usb: hub: Allow reset retry for USB2 devices on connect bounce

If the connect status change is set during reset signaling, but the status remains connected just retry port reset. This solves an issue with connecting a 90W HP Thunderbolt 3 dock with a Lenovo Carbon x1 (5th generation) which causes a 30min loop of a high speed device being re-discovererd before usb ports starts working. [...] [ 389.023845] usb 3-1: new high-speed USB device number 55 using xhci_hcd [ 389.491841] usb 3-1: new high-speed USB device number 56 using xhci_hcd [ 389.959928] usb 3-1: new high-speed USB device number 57 using xhci_hcd [...] This is caused by a high speed device that doesn't successfully go to the enabled state after the second port reset. Instead the connection bounces (connected, with connect status change), bailing out completely from enumeration just to restart from scratch. Link: https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+source/linux/+bug/1716332 Cc: Stable <stable@vger.kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Mathias Nyman <mathias.nyman@linux.intel.com> Acked-by: Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
author: Mathias Nyman <mathias.nyman@linux.intel.com> 2017-10-17 16:07:33 +0300
committer: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> 2017-10-19 09:49:11 +0200
commit: 1ac7db63333db1eeff901bfd6bbcd502b4634fa4 (patch)
tree: efa033e16f6c0f33a71eb606c6f3427e4705bb6b /security/selinux/netif.c
parent: e7d6a32f0d1505695d4417caf93e4a64c06ffe9f (diff)
0 files changed, 0 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitignore b/.gitignore
index 57af07cf7e68..7e9932e55475 100644
--- a/.gitignore
+++ b/.gitignore
@@ -29,6 +29,7 @@ modules.builtin
 *.bz2
 *.lzma
 *.xz
+*.lz4
 *.lzo
 *.patch
 *.gcno
@@ -60,7 +61,6 @@ modules.builtin
 # Generated include files
 #
 include/config
-include/linux/version.h
 include/generated
 arch/*/include/generated
 
@@ -84,3 +84,11 @@ GTAGS
 *.orig
 *~
 \#*#
+
+#
+# Leavings from module signing
+#
+extra_certificates
+signing_key.priv
+signing_key.x509
+x509.genkey
diff --git a/.mailmap b/.mailmap
index 9b0d0267a3c3..658003aa9446 100644
--- a/.mailmap
+++ b/.mailmap
@@ -111,5 +111,8 @@ Uwe Kleine-König <ukleinek@informatik.uni-freiburg.de>
 Uwe Kleine-König <ukl@pengutronix.de>
 Uwe Kleine-König <Uwe.Kleine-Koenig@digi.com>
 Valdis Kletnieks <Valdis.Kletnieks@vt.edu>
+Viresh Kumar <viresh.linux@gmail.com> <viresh.kumar@st.com>
 Takashi YOSHII <takashi.yoshii.zj@renesas.com>
 Yusuke Goda <goda.yusuke@renesas.com>
+Gustavo Padovan <gustavo@las.ic.unicamp.br>
+Gustavo Padovan <padovan@profusion.mobi>
diff --git a/CREDITS b/CREDITS
index 370b4c7da39b..0640e1650483 100644
--- a/CREDITS
+++ b/CREDITS
@@ -637,14 +637,13 @@ S: 14509 NE 39th Street #1096
 S: Bellevue, Washington 98007
 S: USA
 
-N: Christopher L. Cheney
-E: ccheney@debian.org
-E: ccheney@cheney.cx
-W: http://www.cheney.cx
+N: Chris Cheney
+E: chris.cheney@gmail.com
+E: ccheney@redhat.com
 P: 1024D/8E384AF2 2D31 1927 87D7 1F24 9FF9  1BC5 D106 5AB3 8E38 4AF2
 D: Vista Imaging usb webcam driver
-S: 314 Prince of Wales
-S: Conroe, TX 77304
+S: 2308 Therrell Way
+S: McKinney, TX 75070
 S: USA
 
 N: Stuart Cheshire
@@ -761,6 +760,10 @@ S: Northampton
 S: NN1 3QT
 S: United Kingdom
 
+N: Massimo Dal Zotto
+E: dz@debian.org
+D: i8k Dell laptop SMM driver
+
 N: Uwe Dannowski
 E: Uwe.Dannowski@ira.uka.de
 W: http://i30www.ira.uka.de/~dannowsk/
@@ -953,11 +956,11 @@ S: Blacksburg, Virginia 24061
 S: USA
 
 N: Randy Dunlap
-E: rdunlap@xenotime.net
-W: http://www.xenotime.net/linux/linux.html
-W: http://www.linux-usb.org
+E: rdunlap@infradead.org
+W: http://www.infradead.org/~rdunlap/
 D: Linux-USB subsystem, USB core/UHCI/printer/storage drivers
 D: x86 SMP, ACPI, bootflag hacking
+D: documentation, builds
 S: (ask for current address)
 S: USA
 
@@ -1116,6 +1119,7 @@ D: author of userfs filesystem
 D: Improved mmap and munmap handling
 D: General mm minor tidyups
 D: autofs v4 maintainer
+D: Xen subsystem
 S: 987 Alabama St
 S: San Francisco
 S: CA, 94110
@@ -1510,6 +1514,14 @@ D: Natsemi ethernet
 D: Cobalt Networks (x86) support
 D: This-and-That
 
+N: Mark M. Hoffman
+E: mhoffman@lightlink.com
+D: asb100, lm93 and smsc47b397 hardware monitoring drivers
+D: hwmon subsystem core
+D: hwmon subsystem maintainer
+D: i2c-sis96x and i2c-stub SMBus drivers
+S: USA
+
 N: Dirk Hohndel
 E: hohndel@suse.de
 D: The XFree86[tm] Project
@@ -1572,12 +1584,12 @@ S: Wantage, New Jersey 07461
 S: USA
 
 N: Harald Hoyer
-E: harald.hoyer@parzelle.de
-W: http://parzelle.de/
+E: harald@redhat.com
+W: http://www.harald-hoyer.de
 D: ip_masq_quake
 D: md boot support
-S: Hohe Strasse 30
-S: D-70176 Stuttgart
+S: Am Strand 5
+S: D-19063 Schwerin
 S: Germany
 
 N: Jan Hubicka
@@ -1823,6 +1835,11 @@ S: Kattreinstr 38
 S: D-64295
 S: Germany
 
+N: Avi Kivity
+E: avi.kivity@gmail.com
+D: Kernel-based Virtual Machine (KVM)
+S: Ra'annana, Israel
+
 N: Andi Kleen
 E: andi@firstfloor.org
 U: http://www.halobates.de
@@ -2791,8 +2808,7 @@ S: Ottawa, Ontario
 S: Canada K2P 0X8
 
 N: Mikael Pettersson
-E: mikpe@it.uu.se
-W: http://user.it.uu.se/~mikpe/linux/
+E: mikpelinux@gmail.com
 D: Miscellaneous fixes
 
 N: Reed H. Petty
@@ -3814,8 +3830,8 @@ D: INFO-SHEET, former maintainer
 D: Author of the longest-living linux bug
 
 N: Jonathan Woithe
-E: jwoithe@physics.adelaide.edu.au
-W: http://www.physics.adelaide.edu.au/~jwoithe
+E: jwoithe@just42.net
+W: http:/www.just42.net/jwoithe
 D: ALS-007 sound card extensions to Sound Blaster driver
 S: 20 Jordan St
 S: Valley View, SA 5093
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX
index a1a643272883..38f8444bdd0e 100644
--- a/Documentation/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 This is a brief list of all the files in ./linux/Documentation and what
 they contain. If you add a documentation file, please list it here in
 alphabetical order as well, or risk being hunted down like a rabid dog.
-Please try and keep the descriptions small enough to fit on one line.
+Please keep the descriptions small enough to fit on one line.
 							 Thanks -- Paul G.
 
 Following translations are available on the WWW:
@@ -20,24 +20,33 @@ BUG-HUNTING
 Changes
 	- list of changes that break older software packages.
 CodingStyle
-	- how the boss likes the C code in the kernel to look.
-development-process/
-	- An extended tutorial on how to work with the kernel development
-	  process.
+	- how the maintainers expect the C code in the kernel to look.
 DMA-API.txt
 	- DMA API, pci_ API & extensions for non-consistent memory machines.
+DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
+	- Dynamic DMA mapping Guide
 DMA-ISA-LPC.txt
 	- How to do DMA with ISA (and LPC) devices.
+DMA-attributes.txt
+	- listing of the various possible attributes a DMA region can have
 DocBook/
 	- directory with DocBook templates etc. for kernel documentation.
+EDID/
+	- directory with info on customizing EDID for broken gfx/displays.
 HOWTO
 	- the process and procedures of how to do Linux kernel development.
 IPMI.txt
 	- info on Linux Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Driver.
 IRQ-affinity.txt
 	- how to select which CPU(s) handle which interrupt events on SMP.
+IRQ-domain.txt
+	- info on interrupt numbering and setting up IRQ domains.
 IRQ.txt
 	- description of what an IRQ is.
+Intel-IOMMU.txt
+	- basic info on the Intel IOMMU virtualization support.
+Makefile
+	- some files in Documentation dir are actually sample code to build
 ManagementStyle
 	- how to (attempt to) manage kernel hackers.
 RCU/
@@ -66,10 +75,16 @@ applying-patches.txt
 	- description of various trees and how to apply their patches.
 arm/
 	- directory with info about Linux on the ARM architecture.
+arm64/
+	- directory with info about Linux on the 64 bit ARM architecture.
 atomic_ops.txt
 	- semantics and behavior of atomic and bitmask operations.
 auxdisplay/
 	- misc. LCD driver documentation (cfag12864b, ks0108).
+backlight/
+	- directory with info on controlling backlights in flat panel displays
+bad_memory.txt
+	- how to use kernel parameters to exclude bad RAM regions.
 basic_profiling.txt
 	- basic instructions for those who wants to profile Linux kernel.
 binfmt_misc.txt
@@ -80,8 +95,14 @@ block/
 	- info on the Block I/O (BIO) layer.
 blockdev/
 	- info on block devices & drivers
+braille-console.txt
+	- info on how to use serial devices for Braille support.
+bt8xxgpio.txt
+	- info on how to modify a bt8xx video card for GPIO usage.
 btmrvl.txt
 	- info on Marvell Bluetooth driver usage.
+bus-devices/
+	- directory with info on TI GPMC (General Purpose Memory Controller)
 bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt
 	- how to access I/O mapped memory from within device drivers.
 cachetlb.txt
@@ -90,6 +111,12 @@ cdrom/
 	- directory with information on the CD-ROM drivers that Linux has.
 cgroups/
 	- cgroups features, including cpusets and memory controller.
+circular-buffers.txt
+	- how to make use of the existing circular buffer infrastructure
+clk.txt
+	- info on the common clock framework
+coccinelle.txt
+	- info on how to get and use the Coccinelle code checking tool.
 connector/
 	- docs on the netlink based userspace<->kernel space communication mod.
 console/
@@ -104,6 +131,8 @@ cpuidle/
 	- info on CPU_IDLE, CPU idle state management subsystem.
 cputopology.txt
 	- documentation on how CPU topology info is exported via sysfs.
+crc32.txt
+	- brief tutorial on CRC computation
 cris/
 	- directory with info about Linux on CRIS architecture.
 crypto/
@@ -112,40 +141,68 @@ dcdbas.txt
 	- information on the Dell Systems Management Base Driver.
 debugging-modules.txt
 	- some notes on debugging modules after Linux 2.6.3.
+debugging-via-ohci1394.txt
+	- how to use firewire like a hardware debugger memory reader.
 dell_rbu.txt
 	- document demonstrating the use of the Dell Remote BIOS Update driver.
+development-process/
+	- how to work with the mainline kernel development process.
 device-mapper/
 	- directory with info on Device Mapper.
 devices.txt
 	- plain ASCII listing of all the nodes in /dev/ with major minor #'s.
+devicetree/
+	- directory with info on device tree files used by OF/PowerPC/ARM
+digsig.txt
+	-info on the Digital Signature Verification API
+dma-buf-sharing.txt
+	- the DMA Buffer Sharing API Guide
+dmaengine.txt
+	-the DMA Engine API Guide
 dontdiff
 	- file containing a list of files that should never be diff'ed.
 driver-model/
 	- directory with info about Linux driver model.
 dvb/
 	- info on Linux Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) subsystem.
+dynamic-debug-howto.txt
+	- how to use the dynamic debug (dyndbg) feature.
 early-userspace/
 	- info about initramfs, klibc, and userspace early during boot.
 edac.txt
 	- information on EDAC - Error Detection And Correction
 eisa.txt
 	- info on EISA bus support.
+email-clients.txt
+	- info on how to use e-mail to send un-mangled (git) patches.
+extcon/
+	- directory with porting guide for Android kernel switch driver.
 fault-injection/
 	- dir with docs about the fault injection capabilities infrastructure.
 fb/
 	- directory with info on the frame buffer graphics abstraction layer.
-feature-removal-schedule.txt
-	- list of files and features that are going to be removed.
 filesystems/
 	- info on the vfs and the various filesystems that Linux supports.
 firmware_class/
 	- request_firmware() hotplug interface info.
+flexible-arrays.txt
+	- how to make use of flexible sized arrays in linux
+fmc/
+	- information about the FMC bus abstraction
 frv/
 	- Fujitsu FR-V Linux documentation.
+futex-requeue-pi.txt
+	- info on requeueing of tasks from a non-PI futex to a PI futex
+gcov.txt
+	- use of GCC's coverage testing tool "gcov" with the Linux kernel
 gpio.txt
 	- overview of GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) access conventions.
+hid/
+	- directory with information on human interface devices
 highuid.txt
 	- notes on the change from 16 bit to 32 bit user/group IDs.
+hwspinlock.txt
+	- hardware spinlock provides hardware assistance for synchronization
 timers/
 	- info on the timer related topics
 hw_random.txt
@@ -162,10 +219,14 @@ ia64/
 	- directory with info about Linux on Intel 64 bit architecture.
 infiniband/
 	- directory with documents concerning Linux InfiniBand support.
+init.txt
+	- what to do when the kernel can't find the 1st process to run.
 initrd.txt
 	- how to use the RAM disk as an initial/temporary root filesystem.
 input/
 	- info on Linux input device support.
+intel_txt.txt
+	- info on intel Trusted Execution Technology (intel TXT).
 io-mapping.txt
 	- description of io_mapping functions in linux/io-mapping.h
 io_ordering.txt
@@ -182,6 +243,8 @@ isdn/
 	- directory with info on the Linux ISDN support, and supported cards.
 java.txt
 	- info on the in-kernel binary support for Java(tm).
+ja_JP/
+	- directory with Japanese translations of various documents
 kbuild/
 	- directory with info about the kernel build process.
 kdump/
@@ -192,6 +255,12 @@ kernel-docs.txt
 	- listing of various WWW + books that document kernel internals.
 kernel-parameters.txt
 	- summary listing of command line / boot prompt args for the kernel.
+kmemcheck.txt
+	- info on dynamic checker that detects uses of uninitialized memory.
+kmemleak.txt
+	- info on how to make use of the kernel memory leak detection system
+ko_KR/
+	- directory with Korean translations of various documents
 kobject.txt
 	- info of the kobject infrastructure of the Linux kernel.
 kprobes.txt
@@ -208,6 +277,10 @@ local_ops.txt
 	- semantics and behavior of local atomic operations.
 lockdep-design.txt
 	- documentation on the runtime locking correctness validator.
+lockstat.txt
+	- info on collecting statistics on locks (and contention).
+lockup-watchdogs.txt
+	- info on soft and hard lockup detectors (aka nmi_watchdog).
 logo.gif
 	- full colour GIF image of Linux logo (penguin - Tux).
 logo.txt
@@ -216,20 +289,30 @@ m68k/
 	- directory with info about Linux on Motorola 68k architecture.
 magic-number.txt
 	- list of magic numbers used to mark/protect kernel data structures.
-mca.txt
-	- info on supporting Micro Channel Architecture (e.g. PS/2) systems.
 md.txt
 	- info on boot arguments for the multiple devices driver.
+media-framework.txt
+	- info on media framework, its data structures, functions and usage.
 memory-barriers.txt
 	- info on Linux kernel memory barriers.
+memory-devices/
+	- directory with info on parts like the Texas Instruments EMIF driver
 memory-hotplug.txt
 	- Hotpluggable memory support, how to use and current status.
 memory.txt
 	- info on typical Linux memory problems.
+metag/
+	- directory with info about Linux on Meta architecture.
 mips/
 	- directory with info about Linux on MIPS architecture.
+misc-devices/
+	- directory with info about devices using the misc dev subsystem
 mmc/
 	- directory with info about the MMC subsystem
+mn10300/
+	- directory with info about the mn10300 architecture port
+mtd/
+	- directory with info about memory technology devices (flash)
 mono.txt
 	- how to execute Mono-based .NET binaries with the help of BINFMT_MISC.
 mutex-design.txt
@@ -240,8 +323,8 @@ netlabel/
 	- directory with information on the NetLabel subsystem.
 networking/
 	- directory with info on various aspects of networking with Linux.
-nmi_watchdog.txt
-	- info on NMI watchdog for SMP systems.
+nfc/
+	- directory relating info about Near Field Communications support.
 nommu-mmap.txt
 	- documentation about no-mmu memory mapping support.
 numastat.txt
@@ -258,28 +341,46 @@ parport-lowlevel.txt
 	- description and usage of the low level parallel port functions.
 pcmcia/
 	- info on the Linux PCMCIA driver.
+percpu-rw-semaphore.txt
+	- RCU based read-write semaphore optimized for locking for reading
 pi-futex.txt
-	- documentation on lightweight PI-futexes.
+	- documentation on lightweight priority inheritance futexes.
+pinctrl.txt
+	- info on pinctrl subsystem and the PINMUX/PINCONF and drivers
 pnp.txt
 	- Linux Plug and Play documentation.
 power/
 	- directory with info on Linux PCI power management.
 powerpc/
 	- directory with info on using Linux with the PowerPC.
+prctl/
+	- directory with info on the priveledge control subsystem
 preempt-locking.txt
 	- info on locking under a preemptive kernel.
 printk-formats.txt
 	- how to get printk format specifiers right
-prio_tree.txt
-	- info on radix-priority-search-tree use for indexing vmas.
+pps/
+	- directory with information on the pulse-per-second support
+ptp/
+	- directory with info on support for IEEE 1588 PTP clocks in Linux.
+pwm.txt
+	- info on the pulse width modulation driver subsystem
 ramoops.txt
 	- documentation of the ramoops oops/panic logging module.
+rapidio/
+	- directory with info on RapidIO packet-based fabric interconnect
 rbtree.txt
 	- info on what red-black trees are and what they are for.
+remoteproc.txt
+	- info on how to handle remote processor (e.g. AMP) offloads/usage.
+rfkill.txt
+	- info on the radio frequency kill switch subsystem/support.
 robust-futex-ABI.txt
 	- documentation of the robust futex ABI.
 robust-futexes.txt
 	- a description of what robust futexes are.
+rpmsg.txt
+	- info on the Remote Processor Messaging (rpmsg) Framework
 rt-mutex-design.txt
 	- description of the RealTime mutex implementation design.
 rt-mutex.txt
@@ -304,10 +405,10 @@ sgi-visws.txt
 	- short blurb on the SGI Visual Workstations.
 sh/
 	- directory with info on porting Linux to a new architecture.
+smsc_ece1099.txt
+	-info on the smsc Keyboard Scan Expansion/GPIO Expansion device.
 sound/
 	- directory with info on sound card support.
-sparc/
-	- directory with info on using Linux on Sparc architecture.
 sparse.txt
 	- info on how to obtain and use the sparse tool for typechecking.
 spi/
@@ -318,6 +419,8 @@ stable_api_nonsense.txt
 	- info on why the kernel does not have a stable in-kernel api or abi.
 stable_kernel_rules.txt
 	- rules and procedures for the -stable kernel releases.
+static-keys.txt
+	- info on how static keys allow debug code in hotpaths via patching
 svga.txt
 	- short guide on selecting video modes at boot via VGA BIOS.
 sysfs-rules.txt
@@ -326,27 +429,53 @@ sysctl/
 	- directory with info on the /proc/sys/* files.
 sysrq.txt
 	- info on the magic SysRq key.
-telephony/
-	- directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support.
+target/
+	- directory with info on generating TCM v4 fabric .ko modules
+thermal/
+	- directory with information on managing thermal issues (CPU/temp)
+trace/
+	- directory with info on tracing technologies within linux
+unaligned-memory-access.txt
+	- info on how to avoid arch breaking unaligned memory access in code.
 unicode.txt
 	- info on the Unicode character/font mapping used in Linux.
 unshare.txt
 	- description of the Linux unshare system call.
 usb/
 	- directory with info regarding the Universal Serial Bus.
+vDSO/
+	- directory with info regarding virtual dynamic shared objects
+vfio.txt
+	- info on Virtual Function I/O used in guest/hypervisor instances.
+vgaarbiter.txt
+	- info on enable/disable the legacy decoding on different VGA devices
 video-output.txt
 	- sysfs class driver interface to enable/disable a video output device.
 video4linux/
 	- directory with info regarding video/TV/radio cards and linux.
+virtual/
+	- directory with information on the various linux virtualizations.
 vm/
 	- directory with info on the Linux vm code.
+vme_api.txt
+	- file relating info on the VME bus API in linux
 volatile-considered-harmful.txt
 	- Why the "volatile" type class should not be used
 w1/
 	- directory with documents regarding the 1-wire (w1) subsystem.
 watchdog/
 	- how to auto-reboot Linux if it has "fallen and can't get up". ;-)
+wimax/
+	- directory with info about Intel Wireless Wimax Connections
+workqueue.txt
+	- information on the Concurrency Managed Workqueue implementation
 x86/x86_64/
 	- directory with info on Linux support for AMD x86-64 (Hammer) machines.
+xtensa/
+	- directory with documents relating to arch/xtensa port/implementation
+xz.txt
+	- how to make use of the XZ data compression within linux kernel
+zh_CN/
+	- directory with Chinese translations of various documents
 zorro.txt
 	- info on writing drivers for Zorro bus devices found on Amigas.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/README b/Documentation/ABI/README
index 9feaf16f1617..10069828568b 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/README
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/README
@@ -36,9 +36,6 @@ The different levels of stability are:
 	the kernel, but are marked to be removed at some later point in
 	time.  The description of the interface will document the reason
 	why it is obsolete and when it can be expected to be removed.
-	The file Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt may describe
-	some of these interfaces, giving a schedule for when they will
-	be removed.
 
   removed/
 	This directory contains a list of the old interfaces that have
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-pid-oom_adj b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-pid-oom_adj
deleted file mode 100644
index 9a3cb88ade47..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-pid-oom_adj
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-What:	/proc/<pid>/oom_adj
-When:	August 2012
-Why:	/proc/<pid>/oom_adj allows userspace to influence the oom killer's
-	badness heuristic used to determine which task to kill when the kernel
-	is out of memory.
-
-	The badness heuristic has since been rewritten since the introduction of
-	this tunable such that its meaning is deprecated.  The value was
-	implemented as a bitshift on a score generated by the badness()
-	function that did not have any precise units of measure.  With the
-	rewrite, the score is given as a proportion of available memory to the
-	task allocating pages, so using a bitshift which grows the score
-	exponentially is, thus, impossible to tune with fine granularity.
-
-	A much more powerful interface, /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj, was
-	introduced with the oom killer rewrite that allows users to increase or
-	decrease the badness score linearly.  This interface will replace
-	/proc/<pid>/oom_adj.
-
-	A warning will be emitted to the kernel log if an application uses this
-	deprecated interface.  After it is printed once, future warnings will be
-	suppressed until the kernel is rebooted.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-sys-vm-nr_pdflush_threads b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-sys-vm-nr_pdflush_threads
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b0b0eeb20fe3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-sys-vm-nr_pdflush_threads
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+What:		/proc/sys/vm/nr_pdflush_threads
+Date:		June 2012
+Contact:	Wanpeng Li <liwp@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
+Description: Since pdflush is replaced by per-BDI flusher, the interface of old pdflush
+             exported in /proc/sys/vm/ should be removed.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus
index c2a270b45b03..833fd59926a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus
@@ -8,3 +8,41 @@ Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
 		When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile
 		and the mouse activates this profile immediately.
 		Please use actual_profile, it does the same thing.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/firmware_version
+Date:		October 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
+		firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases
+		further usage in other programs. To receive the real version
+		number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the
+		left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21
+		This file is readonly.
+		Please read binary attribute info which contains firmware version.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
+Date:		August 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
+		profile_buttons holds information about button layout.
+		When read, these files return the respective profile buttons.
+		The returned data is 77 bytes in size.
+		This file is readonly.
+		Write control to select profile and read profile_buttons instead.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
+Date:		August 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
+		profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity
+		and light effects.
+		When read, these files return the respective profile settings.
+		The returned data is 43 bytes in size.
+		This file is readonly.
+		Write control to select profile and read profile_settings instead.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4a98e02b6c6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_cpi
+Date:		January 2011
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-4.
+		When read, this attribute returns the number of the active
+		cpi level.
+		This file is readonly.
+		Has never been used. If bookkeeping is done, it's done in userland tools.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_sensitivity_x
+Date:		January 2011
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-10.
+		When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual
+		sensitivity in x direction.
+		This file is readonly.
+		Has never been used. If bookkeeping is done, it's done in userland tools.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_sensitivity_y
+Date:		January 2011
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-10.
+		When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual
+		sensitivity in y direction.
+		This file is readonly.
+		Has never been used. If bookkeeping is done, it's done in userland tools.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/firmware_version
+Date:		January 2011
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
+		firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases
+		further usage in other programs. To receive the real version
+		number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the
+		left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21
+		This file is readonly.
+		Obsoleted by binary sysfs attribute "info".
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
+Date:		January 2011
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
+		profile_buttons holds information about button layout.
+		When read, these files return the respective profile buttons.
+		The returned data is 23 bytes in size.
+		This file is readonly.
+		Write control to select profile and read profile_buttons instead.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
+Date:		January 2011
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
+		profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity
+		and light effects.
+		When read, these files return the respective profile settings.
+		The returned data is 16 bytes in size.
+		This file is readonly.
+		Write control to select profile and read profile_settings instead.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..87ac87e9556d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_cpi
+Date:		August 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	It is possible to switch the cpi setting of the mouse with the
+		press of a button.
+		When read, this file returns the raw number of the actual cpi
+		setting reported by the mouse. This number has to be further
+		processed to receive the real dpi value.
+
+		VALUE DPI
+		1     400
+		2     800
+		4     1600
+
+		This file is readonly.
+		Has never been used. If bookkeeping is done, it's done in userland tools.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_profile
+Date:		August 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in
+		range 0-4.
+		This file is readonly.
+		Please use binary attribute "settings" which provides this information.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/firmware_version
+Date:		August 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
+		firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases
+		further usage in other programs. To receive the real version
+		number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the
+		left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38
+		This file is readonly.
+		Please use binary attribute "info" which provides this information.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
+Date:		August 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
+		profile_buttons holds information about button layout.
+		When read, these files return the respective profile buttons.
+		The returned data is 19 bytes in size.
+		This file is readonly.
+		Write control to select profile and read profile_buttons instead.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
+Date:		August 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
+		profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity
+		and light effects.
+		When read, these files return the respective profile settings.
+		The returned data is 13 bytes in size.
+		This file is readonly.
+		Write control to select profile and read profile_settings instead.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/startup_profile
+Date:		August 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
+                When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile
+                that's active when the mouse is powered on.
+		This file is readonly.
+		Please use binary attribute "settings" which provides this information.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/removed/ip_queue b/Documentation/ABI/removed/ip_queue
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3243613bc2d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/removed/ip_queue
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+What:		ip_queue
+Date:		finally removed in kernel v3.5.0
+Contact:	Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org>
+Description:
+	ip_queue has been replaced by nfnetlink_queue which provides
+	more advanced queueing mechanism to user-space. The ip_queue
+	module was already announced to become obsolete years ago.
+
+Users:
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-firewire b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-firewire
index 3d484e5dc846..41e5a0cd1e3e 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-firewire
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-firewire
@@ -39,6 +39,17 @@ Users:		udev rules to set ownership and access permissions or ACLs of
 		/dev/fw[0-9]+ character device files
 
 
+What:		/sys/bus/firewire/devices/fw[0-9]+/is_local
+Date:		July 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.6
+Contact:	linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
+Description:
+		IEEE 1394 node device attribute.
+		Read-only and immutable.
+Values:		1: The sysfs entry represents a local node (a controller card).
+		0: The sysfs entry represents a remote node.
+
+
 What:		/sys/bus/firewire/devices/fw[0-9]+[.][0-9]+/
 Date:		May 2007
 KernelVersion:	2.6.22
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-usb
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a6b685724740
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-usb
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/persist
+Date:		May 2007
+KernelVersion:	2.6.23
+Contact:	Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
+Description:
+		If CONFIG_USB_PERSIST is set, then each USB device directory
+		will contain a file named power/persist.  The file holds a
+		boolean value (0 or 1) indicating whether or not the
+		"USB-Persist" facility is enabled for the device.  Since the
+		facility is inherently dangerous, it is disabled by default
+		for all devices except hubs.  For more information, see
+		Documentation/usb/persist.txt.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/autosuspend
+Date:		March 2007
+KernelVersion:	2.6.21
+Contact:	Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
+Description:
+		Each USB device directory will contain a file named
+		power/autosuspend.  This file holds the time (in seconds)
+		the device must be idle before it will be autosuspended.
+		0 means the device will be autosuspended as soon as
+		possible.  Negative values will prevent the device from
+		being autosuspended at all, and writing a negative value
+		will resume the device if it is already suspended.
+
+		The autosuspend delay for newly-created devices is set to
+		the value of the usbcore.autosuspend module parameter.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/device/.../power/connected_duration
+Date:		January 2008
+KernelVersion:	2.6.25
+Contact:	Sarah Sharp <sarah.a.sharp@intel.com>
+Description:
+		If CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME is enabled then this file
+		is present.  When read, it returns the total time (in msec)
+		that the USB device has been connected to the machine.  This
+		file is read-only.
+Users:
+		PowerTOP <powertop@lists.01.org>
+		https://01.org/powertop/
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/device/.../power/active_duration
+Date:		January 2008
+KernelVersion:	2.6.25
+Contact:	Sarah Sharp <sarah.a.sharp@intel.com>
+Description:
+		If CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME is enabled then this file
+		is present.  When read, it returns the total time (in msec)
+		that the USB device has been active, i.e. not in a suspended
+		state.  This file is read-only.
+
+		Tools can use this file and the connected_duration file to
+		compute the percentage of time that a device has been active.
+		For example,
+		echo $((100 * `cat active_duration` / `cat connected_duration`))
+		will give an integer percentage.  Note that this does not
+		account for counter wrap.
+Users:
+		PowerTOP <powertop@lists.01.org>
+		https://01.org/powertop/
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<port[.port]>...:<config num>-<interface num>/supports_autosuspend
+Date:		January 2008
+KernelVersion:	2.6.27
+Contact:	Sarah Sharp <sarah.a.sharp@intel.com>
+Description:
+		When read, this file returns 1 if the interface driver
+		for this interface supports autosuspend.  It also
+		returns 1 if no driver has claimed this interface, as an
+		unclaimed interface will not stop the device from being
+		autosuspended if all other interface drivers are idle.
+		The file returns 0 if autosuspend support has not been
+		added to the driver.
+Users:
+		USB PM tool
+		git://git.moblin.org/users/sarah/usb-pm-tool/
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/device/.../avoid_reset_quirk
+Date:		December 2009
+Contact:	Oliver Neukum <oliver@neukum.org>
+Description:
+		Writing 1 to this file tells the kernel that this
+		device will morph into another mode when it is reset.
+		Drivers will not use reset for error handling for
+		such devices.
+Users:
+		usb_modeswitch
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../devnum
+KernelVersion:	since at least 2.6.18
+Description:
+		Device address on the USB bus.
+Users:
+		libusb
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../bConfigurationValue
+KernelVersion:	since at least 2.6.18
+Description:
+		bConfigurationValue of the *active* configuration for the
+		device. Writing 0 or -1 to bConfigurationValue will reset the
+		active configuration (unconfigure the device). Writing
+		another value will change the active configuration.
+
+		Note that some devices, in violation of the USB spec, have a
+		configuration with a value equal to 0. Writing 0 to
+		bConfigurationValue for these devices will install that
+		configuration, rather then unconfigure the device.
+
+		Writing -1 will always unconfigure the device.
+Users:
+		libusb
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../busnum
+KernelVersion:	2.6.22
+Description:
+		Bus-number of the USB-bus the device is connected to.
+Users:
+		libusb
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../descriptors
+KernelVersion:	2.6.26
+Description:
+		Binary file containing cached descriptors of the device. The
+		binary data consists of the device descriptor followed by the
+		descriptors for each configuration of the device.
+		Note that the wTotalLength of the config descriptors can not
+		be trusted, as the device may have a smaller config descriptor
+		than it advertises. The bLength field of each (sub) descriptor
+		can be trusted, and can be used to seek forward one (sub)
+		descriptor at a time until the next config descriptor is found.
+		All descriptors read from this file are in bus-endian format
+Users:
+		libusb
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../speed
+KernelVersion:	since at least 2.6.18
+Description:
+		Speed the device is connected with to the usb-host in
+		Mbit / second. IE one of 1.5 / 12 / 480 / 5000.
+Users:
+		libusb
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-tpm b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-tpm
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a60b45e2493b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-tpm
@@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
+What:		/sys/class/misc/tpmX/device/
+Date:		April 2005
+KernelVersion:	2.6.12
+Contact:	tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net
+Description:	The device/ directory under a specific TPM instance exposes
+		the properties of that TPM chip
+
+
+What:		/sys/class/misc/tpmX/device/active
+Date:		April 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.17
+Contact:	tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net
+Description:	The "active" property prints a '1' if the TPM chip is accepting
+		commands. An inactive TPM chip still contains all the state of
+		an active chip (Storage Root Key, NVRAM, etc), and can be
+		visible to the OS, but will only accept a restricted set of
+		commands. See the TPM Main Specification part 2, Structures,
+		section 17 for more information on which commands are
+		available.
+
+What:		/sys/class/misc/tpmX/device/cancel
+Date:		June 2005
+KernelVersion:	2.6.13
+Contact:	tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net
+Description:	The "cancel" property allows you to cancel the currently
+		pending TPM command. Writing any value to cancel will call the
+		TPM vendor specific cancel operation.
+
+What:		/sys/class/misc/tpmX/device/caps
+Date:		April 2005
+KernelVersion:	2.6.12
+Contact:	tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net
+Description:	The "caps" property contains TPM manufacturer and version info.
+
+		Example output:
+
+		Manufacturer: 0x53544d20
+		TCG version: 1.2
+		Firmware version: 8.16
+
+		Manufacturer is a hex dump of the 4 byte manufacturer info
+		space in a TPM. TCG version shows the TCG TPM spec level that
+		the chip supports. Firmware version is that of the chip and
+		is manufacturer specific.
+
+What:		/sys/class/misc/tpmX/device/durations
+Date:		March 2011
+KernelVersion:	3.1
+Contact:	tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net
+Description:	The "durations" property shows the 3 vendor-specific values
+		used to wait for a short, medium and long TPM command. All
+		TPM commands are categorized as short, medium or long in
+		execution time, so that the driver doesn't have to wait
+		any longer than necessary before starting to poll for a
+		result.
+
+		Example output:
+
+		3015000 4508000 180995000 [original]
+
+		Here the short, medium and long durations are displayed in
+		usecs. "[original]" indicates that the values are displayed
+		unmodified from when they were queried from the chip.
+		Durations can be modified in the case where a buggy chip
+		reports them in msec instead of usec and they need to be
+		scaled to be displayed in usecs. In this case "[adjusted]"
+		will be displayed in place of "[original]".
+
+What:		/sys/class/misc/tpmX/device/enabled
+Date:		April 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.17
+Contact:	tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net
+Description:	The "enabled" property prints a '1' if the TPM chip is enabled,
+		meaning that it should be visible to the OS. This property
+		may be visible but produce a '0' after some operation that
+		disables the TPM.
+
+What:		/sys/class/misc/tpmX/device/owned
+Date:		April 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.17
+Contact:	tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net
+Description:	The "owned" property produces a '1' if the TPM_TakeOwnership
+		ordinal has been executed successfully in the chip. A '0'
+		indicates that ownership hasn't been taken.
+
+What:		/sys/class/misc/tpmX/device/pcrs
+Date:		April 2005
+KernelVersion:	2.6.12
+Contact:	tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net
+Description:	The "pcrs" property will dump the current value of all Platform
+		Configuration Registers in the TPM. Note that since these
+		values may be constantly changing, the output is only valid
+		for a snapshot in time.
+
+		Example output:
+
+		PCR-00: 3A 3F 78 0F 11 A4 B4 99 69 FC AA 80 CD 6E 39 57 C3 3B 22 75
+		PCR-01: 3A 3F 78 0F 11 A4 B4 99 69 FC AA 80 CD 6E 39 57 C3 3B 22 75
+		PCR-02: 3A 3F 78 0F 11 A4 B4 99 69 FC AA 80 CD 6E 39 57 C3 3B 22 75
+		PCR-03: 3A 3F 78 0F 11 A4 B4 99 69 FC AA 80 CD 6E 39 57 C3 3B 22 75
+		PCR-04: 3A 3F 78 0F 11 A4 B4 99 69 FC AA 80 CD 6E 39 57 C3 3B 22 75
+		...
+
+		The number of PCRs and hex bytes needed to represent a PCR
+		value will vary depending on TPM chip version. For TPM 1.1 and
+		1.2 chips, PCRs represent SHA-1 hashes, which are 20 bytes
+		long. Use the "caps" property to determine TPM version.
+
+What:		/sys/class/misc/tpmX/device/pubek
+Date:		April 2005
+KernelVersion:	2.6.12
+Contact:	tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net
+Description:	The "pubek" property will return the TPM's public endorsement
+		key if possible. If the TPM has had ownership established and
+		is version 1.2, the pubek will not be available without the
+		owner's authorization. Since the TPM driver doesn't store any
+		secrets, it can't authorize its own request for the pubek,
+		making it unaccessible. The public endorsement key is gener-
+		ated at TPM menufacture time and exists for the life of the
+		chip.
+
+		Example output:
+
+		Algorithm: 00 00 00 01
+		Encscheme: 00 03
+		Sigscheme: 00 01
+		Parameters: 00 00 08 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 00
+		Modulus length: 256
+		Modulus:
+		B4 76 41 82 C9 20 2C 10 18 40 BC 8B E5 44 4C 6C
+		3A B2 92 0C A4 9B 2A 83 EB 5C 12 85 04 48 A0 B6
+		1E E4 81 84 CE B2 F2 45 1C F0 85 99 61 02 4D EB
+		86 C4 F7 F3 29 60 52 93 6B B2 E5 AB 8B A9 09 E3
+		D7 0E 7D CA 41 BF 43 07 65 86 3C 8C 13 7A D0 8B
+		82 5E 96 0B F8 1F 5F 34 06 DA A2 52 C1 A9 D5 26
+		0F F4 04 4B D9 3F 2D F2 AC 2F 74 64 1F 8B CD 3E
+		1E 30 38 6C 70 63 69 AB E2 50 DF 49 05 2E E1 8D
+		6F 78 44 DA 57 43 69 EE 76 6C 38 8A E9 8E A3 F0
+		A7 1F 3C A8 D0 12 15 3E CA 0E BD FA 24 CD 33 C6
+		47 AE A4 18 83 8E 22 39 75 93 86 E6 FD 66 48 B6
+		10 AD 94 14 65 F9 6A 17 78 BD 16 53 84 30 BF 70
+		E0 DC 65 FD 3C C6 B0 1E BF B9 C1 B5 6C EF B1 3A
+		F8 28 05 83 62 26 11 DC B4 6B 5A 97 FF 32 26 B6
+		F7 02 71 CF 15 AE 16 DD D1 C1 8E A8 CF 9B 50 7B
+		C3 91 FF 44 1E CF 7C 39 FE 17 77 21 20 BD CE 9B
+
+		Possible values:
+
+		Algorithm:	TPM_ALG_RSA			(1)
+		Encscheme:	TPM_ES_RSAESPKCSv15		(2)
+				TPM_ES_RSAESOAEP_SHA1_MGF1	(3)
+		Sigscheme:	TPM_SS_NONE			(1)
+		Parameters, a byte string of 3 u32 values:
+			Key Length (bits):	00 00 08 00	(2048)
+			Num primes:		00 00 00 02	(2)
+			Exponent Size:		00 00 00 00	(0 means the
+								 default exp)
+		Modulus Length: 256 (bytes)
+		Modulus:	The 256 byte Endorsement Key modulus
+
+What:		/sys/class/misc/tpmX/device/temp_deactivated
+Date:		April 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.17
+Contact:	tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net
+Description:	The "temp_deactivated" property returns a '1' if the chip has
+		been temporarily dectivated, usually until the next power
+		cycle. Whether a warm boot (reboot) will clear a TPM chip
+		from a temp_deactivated state is platform specific.
+
+What:		/sys/class/misc/tpmX/device/timeouts
+Date:		March 2011
+KernelVersion:	3.1
+Contact:	tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net
+Description:	The "timeouts" property shows the 4 vendor-specific values
+		for the TPM's interface spec timeouts. The use of these
+		timeouts is defined by the TPM interface spec that the chip
+		conforms to.
+
+		Example output:
+
+		750000 750000 750000 750000 [original]
+
+		The four timeout values are shown in usecs, with a trailing
+		"[original]" or "[adjusted]" depending on whether the values
+		were scaled by the driver to be reported in usec from msecs.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices-node b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices-node
index 49b82cad7003..ce259c13c36a 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices-node
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices-node
@@ -1,7 +1,101 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/possible
+Date:		October 2002
+Contact:	Linux Memory Management list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:
+		Nodes that could be possibly become online at some point.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/online
+Date:		October 2002
+Contact:	Linux Memory Management list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:
+		Nodes that are online.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/has_normal_memory
+Date:		October 2002
+Contact:	Linux Memory Management list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:
+		Nodes that have regular memory.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/has_cpu
+Date:		October 2002
+Contact:	Linux Memory Management list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:
+		Nodes that have one or more CPUs.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/has_high_memory
+Date:		October 2002
+Contact:	Linux Memory Management list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:
+		Nodes that have regular or high memory.
+		Depends on CONFIG_HIGHMEM.
+
 What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX
 Date:		October 2002
 Contact:	Linux Memory Management list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
 Description:
 		When CONFIG_NUMA is enabled, this is a directory containing
 		information on node X such as what CPUs are local to the
-		node.
+		node. Each file is detailed next.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/cpumap
+Date:		October 2002
+Contact:	Linux Memory Management list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:
+		The node's cpumap.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/cpulist
+Date:		October 2002
+Contact:	Linux Memory Management list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:
+		The CPUs associated to the node.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/meminfo
+Date:		October 2002
+Contact:	Linux Memory Management list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:
+		Provides information about the node's distribution and memory
+		utilization. Similar to /proc/meminfo, see Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/numastat
+Date:		October 2002
+Contact:	Linux Memory Management list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:
+		The node's hit/miss statistics, in units of pages.
+		See Documentation/numastat.txt
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/distance
+Date:		October 2002
+Contact:	Linux Memory Management list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:
+		Distance between the node and all the other nodes
+		in the system.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/vmstat
+Date:		October 2002
+Contact:	Linux Memory Management list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:
+		The node's zoned virtual memory statistics.
+		This is a superset of numastat.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/compact
+Date:		February 2010
+Contact:	Mel Gorman <mel@csn.ul.ie>
+Description:
+		When this file is written to, all memory within that node
+		will be compacted. When it completes, memory will be freed
+		into blocks which have as many contiguous pages as possible
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/scan_unevictable_pages
+Date:		October 2008
+Contact:	Lee Schermerhorn <lee.schermerhorn@hp.com>
+Description:
+		When set, it triggers scanning the node's unevictable lists
+		and move any pages that have become evictable onto the respective
+		zone's inactive list. See mm/vmscan.c
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/hugepages/hugepages-<size>/
+Date:		December 2009
+Contact:	Lee Schermerhorn <lee.schermerhorn@hp.com>
+Description:
+		The node's huge page size control/query attributes.
+		See Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5c53d28f775c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+What:		/sys/class/infiniband_srp/srp-<hca>-<port_number>/add_target
+Date:		January 2, 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.15
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Interface for making ib_srp connect to a new target.
+		One can request ib_srp to connect to a new target by writing
+		a comma-separated list of login parameters to this sysfs
+		attribute. The supported parameters are:
+		* id_ext, a 16-digit hexadecimal number specifying the eight
+		  byte identifier extension in the 16-byte SRP target port
+		  identifier. The target port identifier is sent by ib_srp
+		  to the target in the SRP_LOGIN_REQ request.
+		* ioc_guid, a 16-digit hexadecimal number specifying the eight
+		  byte I/O controller GUID portion of the 16-byte target port
+		  identifier.
+		* dgid, a 32-digit hexadecimal number specifying the
+		  destination GID.
+		* pkey, a four-digit hexadecimal number specifying the
+		  InfiniBand partition key.
+		* service_id, a 16-digit hexadecimal number specifying the
+		  InfiniBand service ID used to establish communication with
+		  the SRP target. How to find out the value of the service ID
+		  is specified in the documentation of the SRP target.
+		* max_sect, a decimal number specifying the maximum number of
+		  512-byte sectors to be transferred via a single SCSI command.
+		* max_cmd_per_lun, a decimal number specifying the maximum
+		  number of outstanding commands for a single LUN.
+		* io_class, a hexadecimal number specifying the SRP I/O class.
+		  Must be either 0xff00 (rev 10) or 0x0100 (rev 16a). The I/O
+		  class defines the format of the SRP initiator and target
+		  port identifiers.
+		* initiator_ext, a 16-digit hexadecimal number specifying the
+		  identifier extension portion of the SRP initiator port
+		  identifier. This data is sent by the initiator to the target
+		  in the SRP_LOGIN_REQ request.
+		* cmd_sg_entries, a number in the range 1..255 that specifies
+		  the maximum number of data buffer descriptors stored in the
+		  SRP_CMD information unit itself. With allow_ext_sg=0 the
+		  parameter cmd_sg_entries defines the maximum S/G list length
+		  for a single SRP_CMD, and commands whose S/G list length
+		  exceeds this limit after S/G list collapsing will fail.
+		* allow_ext_sg, whether ib_srp is allowed to include a partial
+		  memory descriptor list in an SRP_CMD instead of the entire
+		  list. If a partial memory descriptor list has been included
+		  in an SRP_CMD the remaining memory descriptors are
+		  communicated from initiator to target via an additional RDMA
+		  transfer. Setting allow_ext_sg to 1 increases the maximum
+		  amount of data that can be transferred between initiator and
+		  target via a single SCSI command. Since not all SRP target
+		  implementations support partial memory descriptor lists the
+		  default value for this option is 0.
+		* sg_tablesize, a number in the range 1..2048 specifying the
+		  maximum S/G list length the SCSI layer is allowed to pass to
+		  ib_srp. Specifying a value that exceeds cmd_sg_entries is
+		  only safe with partial memory descriptor list support enabled
+		  (allow_ext_sg=1).
+		* comp_vector, a number in the range 0..n-1 specifying the
+		  MSI-X completion vector. Some HCA's allocate multiple (n)
+		  MSI-X vectors per HCA port. If the IRQ affinity masks of
+		  these interrupts have been configured such that each MSI-X
+		  interrupt is handled by a different CPU then the comp_vector
+		  parameter can be used to spread the SRP completion workload
+		  over multiple CPU's.
+
+What:		/sys/class/infiniband_srp/srp-<hca>-<port_number>/ibdev
+Date:		January 2, 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.15
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	HCA name (<hca>).
+
+What:		/sys/class/infiniband_srp/srp-<hca>-<port_number>/port
+Date:		January 2, 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.15
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	HCA port number (<port_number>).
+
+What:		/sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/allow_ext_sg
+Date:		May 19, 2011
+KernelVersion:	2.6.39
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Whether ib_srp is allowed to include a partial memory
+		descriptor list in an SRP_CMD when communicating with an SRP
+		target.
+
+What:		/sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/cmd_sg_entries
+Date:		May 19, 2011
+KernelVersion:	2.6.39
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Maximum number of data buffer descriptors that may be sent to
+		the target in a single SRP_CMD request.
+
+What:		/sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/dgid
+Date:		June 17, 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.17
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	InfiniBand destination GID used for communication with the SRP
+		target. Differs from orig_dgid if port redirection has happened.
+
+What:		/sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/id_ext
+Date:		June 17, 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.17
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Eight-byte identifier extension portion of the 16-byte target
+		port identifier.
+
+What:		/sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/ioc_guid
+Date:		June 17, 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.17
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Eight-byte I/O controller GUID portion of the 16-byte target
+		port identifier.
+
+What:		/sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/local_ib_device
+Date:		November 29, 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.19
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Name of the InfiniBand HCA used for communicating with the
+		SRP target.
+
+What:		/sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/local_ib_port
+Date:		November 29, 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.19
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Number of the HCA port used for communicating with the
+		SRP target.
+
+What:		/sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/orig_dgid
+Date:		June 17, 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.17
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	InfiniBand destination GID specified in the parameters
+		written to the add_target sysfs attribute.
+
+What:		/sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/pkey
+Date:		June 17, 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.17
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	A 16-bit number representing the InfiniBand partition key used
+		for communication with the SRP target.
+
+What:		/sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/req_lim
+Date:		October 20, 2010
+KernelVersion:	2.6.36
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Number of requests ib_srp can send to the target before it has
+		to wait for more credits. For more information see also the
+		SRP credit algorithm in the SRP specification.
+
+What:		/sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/service_id
+Date:		June 17, 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.17
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	InfiniBand service ID used for establishing communication with
+		the SRP	target.
+
+What:		/sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/zero_req_lim
+Date:		September 20, 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.18
+Contact:	linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Number of times the initiator had to wait before sending a
+		request to the target because it ran out of credits. For more
+		information see also the SRP credit algorithm in the SRP
+		specification.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-usb-usbtmc b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-usb-usbtmc
index 23a43b8207e6..e960cd027e1e 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-usb-usbtmc
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-usb-usbtmc
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/interface_capabilities
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/device_capabilities
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/*/interface_capabilities
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/*/device_capabilities
 Date:		August 2008
 Contact:	Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
 Description:
@@ -12,8 +12,8 @@ Description:
 		The files are read only.
 
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/usb488_interface_capabilities
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/usb488_device_capabilities
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/*/usb488_interface_capabilities
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/*/usb488_device_capabilities
 Date:		August 2008
 Contact:	Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
 Description:
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Description:
 		The files are read only.
 
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/TermChar
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/*/TermChar
 Date:		August 2008
 Contact:	Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
 Description:
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Description:
 		sent to the device or not.
 
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/TermCharEnabled
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/*/TermCharEnabled
 Date:		August 2008
 Contact:	Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
 Description:
@@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ Description:
 		published by the USB-IF.
 
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/auto_abort
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/*/auto_abort
 Date:		August 2008
 Contact:	Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
 Description:
-		This file determines if the the transaction of the USB TMC
+		This file determines if the transaction of the USB TMC
 		device is to be automatically aborted if there is any error.
 		For more details about this, please see the document,
 		"Universal Serial Bus Test and Measurement Class Specification
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-w1_ds28e04 b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-w1_ds28e04
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..26579ee868c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-w1_ds28e04
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/w1/devices/.../pio
+Date:		May 2012
+Contact:	Markus Franke <franm@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
+Description:	read/write the contents of the two PIO's of the DS28E04-100
+		see Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds28e04 for detailed information
+Users:		any user space application which wants to communicate with DS28E04-100
+
+
+
+What:		/sys/bus/w1/devices/.../eeprom
+Date:		May 2012
+Contact:	Markus Franke <franm@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
+Description:	read/write the contents of the EEPROM memory of the DS28E04-100
+		see Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds28e04 for detailed information
+Users:		any user space application which wants to communicate with DS28E04-100
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-module b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-module
index a0dd21c6db59..6272ae5fb366 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-module
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-module
@@ -4,9 +4,13 @@ Description:
 
 	/sys/module/MODULENAME
 		The name of the module that is in the kernel.  This
-		module name will show up either if the module is built
-		directly into the kernel, or if it is loaded as a
-		dynamic module.
+		module name will always show up if the module is loaded as a
+		dynamic module.  If it is built directly into the kernel, it
+		will only show up if it has a version or at least one
+		parameter.
+
+		Note: The conditions of creation in the built-in case are not
+		by design and may be removed in the future.
 
 	/sys/module/MODULENAME/parameters
 		This directory contains individual files that are each
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-transport-srp b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-transport-srp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b36fb0dc13c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-transport-srp
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+What:		/sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/delete
+Date:		June 1, 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.7
+Contact:	linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org, linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Instructs an SRP initiator to disconnect from a target and to
+		remove all LUNs imported from that target.
+
+What:		/sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/port_id
+Date:		June 27, 2007
+KernelVersion:	2.6.24
+Contact:	linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	16-byte local SRP port identifier in hexadecimal format. An
+		example: 4c:49:4e:55:58:20:56:49:4f:00:00:00:00:00:00:00.
+
+What:		/sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/roles
+Date:		June 27, 2007
+KernelVersion:	2.6.24
+Contact:	linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Role of the remote port. Either "SRP Initiator" or "SRP Target".
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/vdso b/Documentation/ABI/stable/vdso
index 8a1cbb594497..7cdfc28cc2c6 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/vdso
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/vdso
@@ -24,4 +24,4 @@ though.
 
 (As of this writing, this ABI documentation as been confirmed for x86_64.
  The maintainers of the other vDSO-using architectures should confirm
- that it is correct for their architecture.)
-\ No newline at end of file
+ that it is correct for their architecture.)
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..01e769d6984d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+What:		/config/usb-gadget
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+		This group contains sub-groups corresponding to created
+		USB gadgets.
+
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+
+		The attributes of a gadget:
+
+		UDC		- bind a gadget to UDC/unbind a gadget;
+				write UDC's name found in /sys/class/udc/*
+				to bind a gadget, empty string "" to unbind.
+
+		bDeviceClass	- USB device class code
+		bDeviceSubClass	- USB device subclass code
+		bDeviceProtocol	- USB device protocol code
+		bMaxPacketSize0	- maximum endpoint 0 packet size
+		bcdDevice	- bcd device release number
+		bcdUSB		- bcd USB specification version number
+		idProduct	- product ID
+		idVendor	- vendor ID
+
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/configs
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+		This group contains a USB gadget's configurations
+
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/configs/config
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+		The attributes of a configuration:
+
+		bmAttributes	- configuration characteristics
+		MaxPower	- maximum power consumption from the bus
+
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/configs/config/strings
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+		This group contains subdirectories for language-specific
+		strings for this configuration.
+
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/configs/config/strings/language
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+		The attributes:
+
+		configuration	- configuration description
+
+
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+		This group contains functions available to this USB gadget.
+
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/strings
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+		This group contains subdirectories for language-specific
+		strings for this gadget.
+
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/strings/language
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+		The attributes:
+
+		serialnumber	- gadget's serial number (string)
+		product		- gadget's product description
+		manufacturer	- gadget's manufacturer description
+
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-acm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-acm
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5708a568b5f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-acm
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/acm.name
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+
+		This item contains just one readonly attribute: port_num.
+		It contains the port number of the /dev/ttyGS<n> device
+		associated with acm function's instance "name".
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-ecm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-ecm
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6b9a582ce0b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-ecm
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/ecm.name
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+		The attributes:
+
+		ifname		- network device interface name associated with
+				this function instance
+		qmult		- queue length multiplier for high and
+				super speed
+		host_addr	- MAC address of host's end of this
+				Ethernet over USB link
+		dev_addr	- MAC address of device's end of this
+				Ethernet over USB link
+
+
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-eem b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-eem
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dbddf36b48b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-eem
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/eem.name
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+		The attributes:
+
+		ifname		- network device interface name associated with
+				this function instance
+		qmult		- queue length multiplier for high and
+				super speed
+		host_addr	- MAC address of host's end of this
+				Ethernet over USB link
+		dev_addr	- MAC address of device's end of this
+				Ethernet over USB link
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-ncm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-ncm
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bc309f42357d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-ncm
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/ncm.name
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+		The attributes:
+
+		ifname		- network device interface name associated with
+				this function instance
+		qmult		- queue length multiplier for high and
+				super speed
+		host_addr	- MAC address of host's end of this
+				Ethernet over USB link
+		dev_addr	- MAC address of device's end of this
+				Ethernet over USB link
+
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-obex b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-obex
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..aaa5c96fb7c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-obex
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/obex.name
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+
+		This item contains just one readonly attribute: port_num.
+		It contains the port number of the /dev/ttyGS<n> device
+		associated with obex function's instance "name".
+
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-phonet b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-phonet
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3e3b742cdfd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-phonet
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/phonet.name
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+
+		This item contains just one readonly attribute: ifname.
+		It contains the network interface name assigned during
+		network device registration.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-rndis b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-rndis
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..822e6dad8fc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-rndis
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/rndis.name
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+		The attributes:
+
+		ifname		- network device interface name associated with
+				this function instance
+		qmult		- queue length multiplier for high and
+				super speed
+		host_addr	- MAC address of host's end of this
+				Ethernet over USB link
+		dev_addr	- MAC address of device's end of this
+				Ethernet over USB link
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-serial b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-serial
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..16f130c1501f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-serial
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/gser.name
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+
+		This item contains just one readonly attribute: port_num.
+		It contains the port number of the /dev/ttyGS<n> device
+		associated with gser function's instance "name".
+
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-subset b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-subset
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..154ae597cd99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-subset
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+What:		/config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/geth.name
+Date:		Jun 2013
+KenelVersion:	3.11
+Description:
+		The attributes:
+
+		ifname		- network device interface name associated with
+				this function instance
+		qmult		- queue length multiplier for high and
+				super speed
+		host_addr	- MAC address of host's end of this
+				Ethernet over USB link
+		dev_addr	- MAC address of device's end of this
+				Ethernet over USB link
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-olpc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-olpc
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bd76cc6d55f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-olpc
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+What:		/sys/kernel/debug/olpc-ec/cmd
+Date:		Dec 2011
+KernelVersion:	3.4
+Contact:	devel@lists.laptop.org
+Description:
+
+A generic interface for executing OLPC Embedded Controller commands and
+reading their responses.
+
+To execute a command, write data with the format: CC:N A A A A
+CC is the (hex) command, N is the count of expected reply bytes, and A A A A
+are optional (hex) arguments.
+
+To read the response (if any), read from the generic node after executing
+a command. Hex reply bytes will be returned, *whether or not* they came from
+the immediately previous command.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-pfo-nx-crypto b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-pfo-nx-crypto
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..685d5a448423
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-pfo-nx-crypto
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+What:		/sys/kernel/debug/nx-crypto/*
+Date:		March 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.4
+Contact:	Kent Yoder <key@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
+Description:
+
+  These debugfs interfaces are built by the nx-crypto driver, built in
+arch/powerpc/crypto/nx.
+
+Error Detection
+===============
+
+errors:
+- A u32 providing a total count of errors since the driver was loaded. The
+only errors counted here are those returned from the hcall, H_COP_OP.
+
+last_error:
+- The most recent non-zero return code from the H_COP_OP hcall. -EBUSY is not
+recorded here (the hcall will retry until -EBUSY goes away).
+
+last_error_pid:
+- The process ID of the process who received the most recent error from the
+hcall.
+
+Device Use
+==========
+
+aes_bytes:
+- The total number of bytes encrypted using AES in any of the driver's
+supported modes.
+
+aes_ops:
+- The total number of AES operations submitted to the hardware.
+
+sha256_bytes:
+- The total number of bytes hashed by the hardware using SHA-256.
+
+sha256_ops:
+- The total number of SHA-256 operations submitted to the hardware.
+
+sha512_bytes:
+- The total number of bytes hashed by the hardware using SHA-512.
+
+sha512_ops:
+- The total number of SHA-512 operations submitted to the hardware.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/dev-kmsg b/Documentation/ABI/testing/dev-kmsg
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bb820be48179
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/dev-kmsg
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+What:		/dev/kmsg
+Date:		Mai 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Kay Sievers <kay@vrfy.org>
+Description:	The /dev/kmsg character device node provides userspace access
+		to the kernel's printk buffer.
+
+		Injecting messages:
+		Every write() to the opened device node places a log entry in
+		the kernel's printk buffer.
+
+		The logged line can be prefixed with a <N> syslog prefix, which
+		carries the syslog priority and facility. The single decimal
+		prefix number is composed of the 3 lowest bits being the syslog
+		priority and the higher bits the syslog facility number.
+
+		If no prefix is given, the priority number is the default kernel
+		log priority and the facility number is set to LOG_USER (1). It
+		is not possible to inject messages from userspace with the
+		facility number LOG_KERN (0), to make sure that the origin of
+		the messages can always be reliably determined.
+
+		Accessing the buffer:
+		Every read() from the opened device node receives one record
+		of the kernel's printk buffer.
+
+		The first read() directly following an open() always returns
+		first message in the buffer; there is no kernel-internal
+		persistent state; many readers can concurrently open the device
+		and read from it, without affecting other readers.
+
+		Every read() will receive the next available record. If no more
+		records are available read() will block, or if O_NONBLOCK is
+		used -EAGAIN returned.
+
+		Messages in the record ring buffer get overwritten as whole,
+		there are never partial messages received by read().
+
+		In case messages get overwritten in the circular buffer while
+		the device is kept open, the next read() will return -EPIPE,
+		and the seek position be updated to the next available record.
+		Subsequent reads() will return available records again.
+
+		Unlike the classic syslog() interface, the 64 bit record
+		sequence numbers allow to calculate the amount of lost
+		messages, in case the buffer gets overwritten. And they allow
+		to reconnect to the buffer and reconstruct the read position
+		if needed, without limiting the interface to a single reader.
+
+		The device supports seek with the following parameters:
+		SEEK_SET, 0
+		  seek to the first entry in the buffer
+		SEEK_END, 0
+		  seek after the last entry in the buffer
+		SEEK_DATA, 0
+		  seek after the last record available at the time
+		  the last SYSLOG_ACTION_CLEAR was issued.
+
+		The output format consists of a prefix carrying the syslog
+		prefix including priority and facility, the 64 bit message
+		sequence number and the monotonic timestamp in microseconds,
+		and a flag field. All fields are separated by a ','.
+
+		Future extensions might add more comma separated values before
+		the terminating ';'. Unknown fields and values should be
+		gracefully ignored.
+
+		The human readable text string starts directly after the ';'
+		and is terminated by a '\n'. Untrusted values derived from
+		hardware or other facilities are printed, therefore
+		all non-printable characters and '\' itself in the log message
+		are escaped by "\x00" C-style hex encoding.
+
+		A line starting with ' ', is a continuation line, adding
+		key/value pairs to the log message, which provide the machine
+		readable context of the message, for reliable processing in
+		userspace.
+
+		Example:
+		7,160,424069,-;pci_root PNP0A03:00: host bridge window [io  0x0000-0x0cf7] (ignored)
+		 SUBSYSTEM=acpi
+		 DEVICE=+acpi:PNP0A03:00
+		6,339,5140900,-;NET: Registered protocol family 10
+		30,340,5690716,-;udevd[80]: starting version 181
+
+		The DEVICE= key uniquely identifies devices the following way:
+		  b12:8        - block dev_t
+		  c127:3       - char dev_t
+		  n8           - netdev ifindex
+		  +sound:card0 - subsystem:devname
+
+		The flags field carries '-' by default. A 'c' indicates a
+		fragment of a line. All following fragments are flagged with
+		'+'. Note, that these hints about continuation lines are not
+		necessarily correct, and the stream could be interleaved with
+		unrelated messages, but merging the lines in the output
+		usually produces better human readable results. A similar
+		logic is used internally when messages are printed to the
+		console, /proc/kmsg or the syslog() syscall.
+
+Users:		dmesg(1), userspace kernel log consumers
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/ima_policy b/Documentation/ABI/testing/ima_policy
index 6cd6daefaaed..f1c5cc9d17a8 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/ima_policy
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/ima_policy
@@ -12,48 +12,70 @@ Description:
 		then closing the file.  The new policy takes effect after
 		the file ima/policy is closed.
 
+		IMA appraisal, if configured, uses these file measurements
+		for local measurement appraisal.
+
 		rule format: action [condition ...]
 
-		action: measure | dont_measure
-		condition:= base | lsm
-			base:	[[func=] [mask=] [fsmagic=] [uid=]]
+		action: measure | dont_measure | appraise | dont_appraise | audit
+		condition:= base | lsm  [option]
+			base:	[[func=] [mask=] [fsmagic=] [fsuuid=] [uid=]
+				 [fowner]]
 			lsm:	[[subj_user=] [subj_role=] [subj_type=]
 				 [obj_user=] [obj_role=] [obj_type=]]
+			option:	[[appraise_type=]]
 
-		base: 	func:= [BPRM_CHECK][FILE_MMAP][FILE_CHECK]
+		base: 	func:= [BPRM_CHECK][MMAP_CHECK][FILE_CHECK][MODULE_CHECK]
 			mask:= [MAY_READ] [MAY_WRITE] [MAY_APPEND] [MAY_EXEC]
 			fsmagic:= hex value
+			fsuuid:= file system UUID (e.g 8bcbe394-4f13-4144-be8e-5aa9ea2ce2f6)
 			uid:= decimal value
+			fowner:=decimal value
 		lsm:  	are LSM specific
+		option:	appraise_type:= [imasig]
 
 		default policy:
 			# PROC_SUPER_MAGIC
 			dont_measure fsmagic=0x9fa0
+			dont_appraise fsmagic=0x9fa0
 			# SYSFS_MAGIC
 			dont_measure fsmagic=0x62656572
+			dont_appraise fsmagic=0x62656572
 			# DEBUGFS_MAGIC
 			dont_measure fsmagic=0x64626720
+			dont_appraise fsmagic=0x64626720
 			# TMPFS_MAGIC
 			dont_measure fsmagic=0x01021994
+			dont_appraise fsmagic=0x01021994
+			# RAMFS_MAGIC
+			dont_measure fsmagic=0x858458f6
+			dont_appraise fsmagic=0x858458f6
 			# SECURITYFS_MAGIC
 			dont_measure fsmagic=0x73636673
+			dont_appraise fsmagic=0x73636673
 
 			measure func=BPRM_CHECK
 			measure func=FILE_MMAP mask=MAY_EXEC
 			measure func=FILE_CHECK mask=MAY_READ uid=0
+			measure func=MODULE_CHECK uid=0
+			appraise fowner=0
 
 		The default policy measures all executables in bprm_check,
 		all files mmapped executable in file_mmap, and all files
-		open for read by root in do_filp_open.
+		open for read by root in do_filp_open.  The default appraisal
+		policy appraises all files owned by root.
 
 		Examples of LSM specific definitions:
 
 		SELinux:
 			# SELINUX_MAGIC
-			dont_measure fsmagic=0xF97CFF8C
+			dont_measure fsmagic=0xf97cff8c
+			dont_appraise fsmagic=0xf97cff8c
 
 			dont_measure obj_type=var_log_t
+			dont_appraise obj_type=var_log_t
 			dont_measure obj_type=auditd_log_t
+			dont_appraise obj_type=auditd_log_t
 			measure subj_user=system_u func=FILE_CHECK mask=MAY_READ
 			measure subj_role=system_r func=FILE_CHECK mask=MAY_READ
 
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore b/Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore
index ff1df4e3b059..5fca9f5e10a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-Where:		/dev/pstore/...
+Where:		/sys/fs/pstore/... (or /dev/pstore/...)
 Date:		March 2011
 Kernel Version: 2.6.39
 Contact:	tony.luck@intel.com
@@ -11,9 +11,9 @@ Description:	Generic interface to platform dependent persistent storage.
 		of the console log is captured, but other interesting
 		data can also be saved.
 
-		# mount -t pstore -o kmsg_bytes=8000 - /dev/pstore
+		# mount -t pstore -o kmsg_bytes=8000 - /sys/fs/pstore
 
-		$ ls -l /dev/pstore
+		$ ls -l /sys/fs/pstore/
 		total 0
 		-r--r--r-- 1 root root 7896 Nov 30 15:38 dmesg-erst-1
 
@@ -27,9 +27,9 @@ Description:	Generic interface to platform dependent persistent storage.
 		the file will signal to the underlying persistent storage
 		device that it can reclaim the space for later re-use.
 
-		$ rm /dev/pstore/dmesg-erst-1
+		$ rm /sys/fs/pstore/dmesg-erst-1
 
-		The expectation is that all files in /dev/pstore
+		The expectation is that all files in /sys/fs/pstore/
 		will be saved elsewhere and erased from persistent store
 		soon after boot to free up space ready for the next
 		catastrophe.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block
index c1eb41cb9876..279da08f7541 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block
@@ -206,3 +206,17 @@ Description:
 		when a discarded area is read the discard_zeroes_data
 		parameter will be set to one. Otherwise it will be 0 and
 		the result of reading a discarded area is undefined.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/queue/write_same_max_bytes
+Date:		January 2012
+Contact:	Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com>
+Description:
+		Some devices support a write same operation in which a
+		single data block can be written to a range of several
+		contiguous blocks on storage. This can be used to wipe
+		areas on disk or to initialize drives in a RAID
+		configuration. write_same_max_bytes indicates how many
+		bytes can be written in a single write same command. If
+		write_same_max_bytes is 0, write same is not supported
+		by the device.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-bcache b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-bcache
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9e4bbc5d51fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-bcache
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/unregister
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		A write to this file causes the backing device or cache to be
+		unregistered. If a backing device had dirty data in the cache,
+		writeback mode is automatically disabled and all dirty data is
+		flushed before the device is unregistered. Caches unregister
+		all associated backing devices before unregistering themselves.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/clear_stats
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Writing to this file resets all the statistics for the device.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/cache
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For a backing device that has cache, a symlink to
+		the bcache/ dir of that cache.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/cache_hits
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For backing devices: integer number of full cache hits,
+		counted per bio. A partial cache hit counts as a miss.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/cache_misses
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For backing devices: integer number of cache misses.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/cache_hit_ratio
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For backing devices: cache hits as a percentage.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/sequential_cutoff
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For backing devices: Threshold past which sequential IO will
+		skip the cache. Read and written as bytes in human readable
+		units (i.e. echo 10M > sequntial_cutoff).
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/bypassed
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Sum of all reads and writes that have bypassed the cache (due
+		to the sequential cutoff).  Expressed as bytes in human
+		readable units.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/writeback
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For backing devices: When on, writeback caching is enabled and
+		writes will be buffered in the cache. When off, caching is in
+		writethrough mode; reads and writes will be added to the
+		cache but no write buffering will take place.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/writeback_running
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For backing devices: when off, dirty data will not be written
+		from the cache to the backing device. The cache will still be
+		used to buffer writes until it is mostly full, at which point
+		writes transparently revert to writethrough mode. Intended only
+		for benchmarking/testing.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/writeback_delay
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For backing devices: In writeback mode, when dirty data is
+		written to the cache and the cache held no dirty data for that
+		backing device, writeback from cache to backing device starts
+		after this delay, expressed as an integer number of seconds.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/writeback_percent
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For backing devices: If nonzero, writeback from cache to
+		backing device only takes place when more than this percentage
+		of the cache is used, allowing more write coalescing to take
+		place and reducing total number of writes sent to the backing
+		device. Integer between 0 and 40.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/synchronous
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For a cache, a boolean that allows synchronous mode to be
+		switched on and off. In synchronous mode all writes are ordered
+		such that the cache can reliably recover from unclean shutdown;
+		if disabled bcache will not generally wait for writes to
+		complete but if the cache is not shut down cleanly all data
+		will be discarded from the cache. Should not be turned off with
+		writeback caching enabled.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/discard
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For a cache, a boolean allowing discard/TRIM to be turned off
+		or back on if the device supports it.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/bucket_size
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For a cache, bucket size in human readable units, as set at
+		cache creation time; should match the erase block size of the
+		SSD for optimal performance.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/nbuckets
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For a cache, the number of usable buckets.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/tree_depth
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For a cache, height of the btree excluding leaf nodes (i.e. a
+		one node tree will have a depth of 0).
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/btree_cache_size
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Number of btree buckets/nodes that are currently cached in
+		memory; cache dynamically grows and shrinks in response to
+		memory pressure from the rest of the system.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/written
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For a cache, total amount of data in human readable units
+		written to the cache, excluding all metadata.
+
+What:		/sys/block/<disk>/bcache/btree_written
+Date:		November 2010
+Contact:	Kent Overstreet <kent.overstreet@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		For a cache, sum of all btree writes in human readable units.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-dm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-dm
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..87ca5691e29b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-dm
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+What:		/sys/block/dm-<num>/dm/name
+Date:		January 2009
+KernelVersion:	2.6.29
+Contact:	dm-devel@redhat.com
+Description:	Device-mapper device name.
+		Read-only string containing mapped device name.
+Users:		util-linux, device-mapper udev rules
+
+What:		/sys/block/dm-<num>/dm/uuid
+Date:		January 2009
+KernelVersion:	2.6.29
+Contact:	dm-devel@redhat.com
+Description:	Device-mapper device UUID.
+		Read-only string containing DM-UUID or empty string
+		if DM-UUID is not set.
+Users:		util-linux, device-mapper udev rules
+
+What:		/sys/block/dm-<num>/dm/suspended
+Date:		June 2009
+KernelVersion:	2.6.31
+Contact:	dm-devel@redhat.com
+Description:	Device-mapper device suspend state.
+		Contains the value 1 while the device is suspended.
+		Otherwise it contains 0. Read-only attribute.
+Users:		util-linux, device-mapper udev rules
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-rssd b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-rssd
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..beef30c046b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-rssd
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+What:           /sys/block/rssd*/status
+Date:           April 2012
+KernelVersion:  3.4
+Contact:        Asai Thambi S P <asamymuthupa@micron.com>
+Description:    This is a read-only file. Indicates the status of the device.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram
index c8b3b48ec62c..3f0b9ae61d8c 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram
@@ -5,20 +5,21 @@ Description:
 		The disksize file is read-write and specifies the disk size
 		which represents the limit on the *uncompressed* worth of data
 		that can be stored in this disk.
+		Unit: bytes
 
 What:		/sys/block/zram<id>/initstate
 Date:		August 2010
 Contact:	Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org>
 Description:
-		The disksize file is read-only and shows the initialization
+		The initstate file is read-only and shows the initialization
 		state of the device.
 
 What:		/sys/block/zram<id>/reset
 Date:		August 2010
 Contact:	Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org>
 Description:
-		The disksize file is write-only and allows resetting the
-		device. The reset operation frees all the memory assocaited
+		The reset file is write-only and allows resetting the
+		device. The reset operation frees all the memory associated
 		with this device.
 
 What:		/sys/block/zram<id>/num_reads
@@ -48,7 +49,7 @@ Contact:	Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org>
 Description:
 		The notify_free file is read-only and specifies the number of
 		swap slot free notifications received by this device. These
-		notifications are send to a swap block device when a swap slot
+		notifications are sent to a swap block device when a swap slot
 		is freed. This statistic is applicable only when this disk is
 		being used as a swap disk.
 
@@ -96,4 +97,4 @@ Description:
 		overhead, allocated for this disk. So, allocator space
 		efficiency can be calculated using compr_data_size and this
 		statistic.
-		Unit: bytes
-\ No newline at end of file
+		Unit: bytes
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-acpi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-acpi
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7fa9cbc75344
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-acpi
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/acpi/devices/.../path
+Date:		December 2006
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		This attribute indicates the full path of ACPI namespace
+		object associated with the device object.  For example,
+		\_SB_.PCI0.
+		This file is not present for device objects representing
+		fixed ACPI hardware features (like power and sleep
+		buttons).
+
+What:		/sys/bus/acpi/devices/.../modalias
+Date:		July 2007
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		This attribute indicates the PNP IDs of the device object.
+		That is acpi:HHHHHHHH:[CCCCCCC:].  Where each HHHHHHHH or
+		CCCCCCCC contains device object's PNPID (_HID or _CID).
+
+What:		/sys/bus/acpi/devices/.../hid
+Date:		April 2005
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		This attribute indicates the hardware ID (_HID) of the
+		device object.  For example, PNP0103.
+		This file is present for device objects having the _HID
+		control method.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/acpi/devices/.../description
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		This attribute contains the output of the device object's
+		_STR control method, if present.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/acpi/devices/.../adr
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		This attribute contains the output of the device object's
+		_ADR control method, which is present for ACPI device
+		objects representing devices having standard enumeration
+		algorithms, such as PCI.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/acpi/devices/.../uid
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		This attribute contains the output of the device object's
+		_UID control method, if present.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/acpi/devices/.../eject
+Date:		December 2006
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		Writing 1 to this attribute will trigger hot removal of
+		this device object.  This file exists for every device
+		object that has _EJ0 method.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-event_source-devices-events b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-event_source-devices-events
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3c1cc24361bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-event_source-devices-events
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/cpu/events/
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/branch-misses
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/cache-references
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/cache-misses
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/stalled-cycles-frontend
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/branch-instructions
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/stalled-cycles-backend
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/instructions
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/cpu-cycles
+
+Date:		2013/01/08
+
+Contact:	Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org>
+
+Description:	Generic performance monitoring events
+
+		A collection of performance monitoring events that may be
+		supported by many/most CPUs. These events can be monitored
+		using the 'perf(1)' tool.
+
+		The contents of each file would look like:
+
+			event=0xNNNN
+
+		where 'N' is a hex digit and the number '0xNNNN' shows the
+		"raw code" for the perf event identified by the file's
+		"basename".
+
+
+What: 		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_1PLUS_PPC_CMPL
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_BRU_FIN
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_BR_MPRED
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_BRU
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_DCACHE_MISS
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_DFU
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_DIV
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_ERAT_MISS
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_FXU
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_IFU
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_LSU
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_REJECT
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_SCALAR
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_SCALAR_LONG
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_STORE
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_THRD
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_VECTOR
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CMPLU_STALL_VECTOR_LONG
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_CYC
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_GCT_NOSLOT_BR_MPRED
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_GCT_NOSLOT_BR_MPRED_IC_MISS
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_GCT_NOSLOT_CYC
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_GCT_NOSLOT_IC_MISS
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_GRP_CMPL
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_INST_CMPL
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_LD_MISS_L1
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_LD_REF_L1
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_RUN_CYC
+		/sys/devices/cpu/events/PM_RUN_INST_CMPL
+
+Date:		2013/01/08
+
+Contact:	Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org>
+		Linux Powerpc mailing list <linuxppc-dev@ozlabs.org>
+
+Description:	POWER-systems specific performance monitoring events
+
+		A collection of performance monitoring events that may be
+		supported by the POWER CPU. These events can be monitored
+		using the 'perf(1)' tool.
+
+		These events may not be supported by other CPUs.
+
+		The contents of each file would look like:
+
+			event=0xNNNN
+
+		where 'N' is a hex digit and the number '0xNNNN' shows the
+		"raw code" for the perf event identified by the file's
+		"basename".
+
+		Further, multiple terms like 'event=0xNNNN' can be specified
+		and separated with comma. All available terms are defined in
+		the /sys/bus/event_source/devices/<dev>/format file.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-event_source-devices-format b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-event_source-devices-format
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..77f47ff5ee02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-event_source-devices-format
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Where:		/sys/bus/event_source/devices/<dev>/format
+Date:		January 2012
+Kernel Version: 3.3
+Contact:	Jiri Olsa <jolsa@redhat.com>
+Description:
+		Attribute group to describe the magic bits that go into
+		perf_event_attr::config[012] for a particular pmu.
+		Each attribute of this group defines the 'hardware' bitmask
+		we want to export, so that userspace can deal with sane
+		name/value pairs.
+
+		Userspace must be prepared for the possibility that attributes
+		define overlapping bit ranges. For example:
+			attr1 = 'config:0-23'
+			attr2 = 'config:0-7'
+			attr3 = 'config:12-35'
+
+		Example: 'config1:1,6-10,44'
+		Defines contents of attribute that occupies bits 1,6-10,44 of
+		perf_event_attr::config1.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-fcoe b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-fcoe
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..21640eaad371
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-fcoe
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/fcoe/
+Date:		August 2012
+KernelVersion:	TBD
+Contact:	Robert Love <robert.w.love@intel.com>, devel@open-fcoe.org
+Description:	The FCoE bus. Attributes in this directory are control interfaces.
+Attributes:
+
+	ctlr_create: 'FCoE Controller' instance creation interface. Writing an
+		     <ifname> to this file will allocate and populate sysfs with a
+		     fcoe_ctlr_device (ctlr_X). The user can then configure any
+		     per-port settings and finally write to the fcoe_ctlr_device's
+		     'start' attribute to begin the kernel's discovery and login
+		     process.
+
+	ctlr_destroy: 'FCoE Controller' instance removal interface. Writing a
+		       fcoe_ctlr_device's sysfs name to this file will log the
+		       fcoe_ctlr_device out of the fabric or otherwise connected
+		       FCoE devices. It will also free all kernel memory allocated
+		       for this fcoe_ctlr_device and any structures associated
+		       with it, this includes the scsi_host.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/fcoe/devices/ctlr_X
+Date:		March 2012
+KernelVersion:	TBD
+Contact:	Robert Love <robert.w.love@intel.com>, devel@open-fcoe.org
+Description:	'FCoE Controller' instances on the fcoe bus.
+		The FCoE Controller now has a three stage creation process.
+		1) Write interface name to ctlr_create 2) Configure the FCoE
+		Controller (ctlr_X) 3) Enable the FCoE Controller to begin
+		discovery and login. The FCoE Controller is destroyed by
+		writing it's name, i.e. ctlr_X to the ctlr_delete file.
+
+Attributes:
+
+	fcf_dev_loss_tmo: Device loss timeout peroid (see below). Changing
+			  this value will change the dev_loss_tmo for all
+			  FCFs discovered by this controller.
+
+	mode:		  Display or change the FCoE Controller's mode. Possible
+			  modes are 'Fabric' and 'VN2VN'. If a FCoE Controller
+			  is started in 'Fabric' mode then FIP FCF discovery is
+			  initiated and ultimately a fabric login is attempted.
+			  If a FCoE Controller is started in 'VN2VN' mode then
+			  FIP VN2VN discovery and login is performed. A FCoE
+			  Controller only supports one mode at a time.
+
+	enabled:	  Whether an FCoE controller is enabled or disabled.
+			  0 if disabled, 1 if enabled. Writing either 0 or 1
+			  to this file will enable or disable the FCoE controller.
+
+	lesb/link_fail:   Link Error Status Block (LESB) link failure count.
+
+	lesb/vlink_fail:  Link Error Status Block (LESB) virtual link
+			  failure count.
+
+	lesb/miss_fka:    Link Error Status Block (LESB) missed FCoE
+			  Initialization Protocol (FIP) Keep-Alives (FKA).
+
+	lesb/symb_err:    Link Error Status Block (LESB) symbolic error count.
+
+	lesb/err_block:   Link Error Status Block (LESB) block error count.
+
+	lesb/fcs_error:   Link Error Status Block (LESB) Fibre Channel
+			  Serivces error count.
+
+Notes: ctlr_X (global increment starting at 0)
+
+What:		/sys/bus/fcoe/devices/fcf_X
+Date:		March 2012
+KernelVersion:	TBD
+Contact:	Robert Love <robert.w.love@intel.com>, devel@open-fcoe.org
+Description:	'FCoE FCF' instances on the fcoe bus. A FCF is a Fibre Channel
+		Forwarder, which is a FCoE switch that can accept FCoE
+		(Ethernet) packets, unpack them, and forward the embedded
+		Fibre Channel frames into a FC fabric. It can also take
+		outbound FC frames and pack them in Ethernet packets to
+		be sent to their destination on the Ethernet segment.
+Attributes:
+
+	fabric_name: Identifies the fabric that the FCF services.
+
+	switch_name: Identifies the FCF.
+
+	priority:    The switch's priority amongst other FCFs on the same
+		     fabric.
+
+	selected:    1 indicates that the switch has been selected for use;
+		     0 indicates that the swich will not be used.
+
+	fc_map:      The Fibre Channel MAP
+
+	vfid:	     The Virtual Fabric ID
+
+	mac:         The FCF's MAC address
+
+	fka_peroid:  The FIP Keep-Alive peroid
+
+	fabric_state: The internal kernel state
+		      "Unknown" - Initialization value
+		      "Disconnected" - No link to the FCF/fabric
+		      "Connected" - Host is connected to the FCF
+		      "Deleted" - FCF is being removed from the system
+
+	dev_loss_tmo: The device loss timeout peroid for this FCF.
+
+Notes: A device loss infrastructre similar to the FC Transport's
+       is present in fcoe_sysfs. It is nice to have so that a
+       link flapping adapter doesn't continually advance the count
+       used to identify the discovered FCF. FCFs will exist in a
+       "Disconnected" state until either the timer expires and the
+       FCF becomes "Deleted" or the FCF is rediscovered and becomes
+       "Connected."
+
+
+Users: The first user of this interface will be the fcoeadm application,
+       which is commonly packaged in the fcoe-utils package.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-hsi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-hsi
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1b1b282a99e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-hsi
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/hsi
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.4
+Contact:	Carlos Chinea <carlos.chinea@nokia.com>
+Description:
+		High Speed Synchronous Serial Interface (HSI) is a
+		serial interface mainly used for connecting application
+		engines (APE) with cellular modem engines (CMT) in cellular
+		handsets.
+		The bus will be populated with devices (hsi_clients) representing
+		the protocols available in the system. Bus drivers implement
+		those protocols.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/hsi/devices/.../modalias
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.4
+Contact:	Carlos Chinea <carlos.chinea@nokia.com>
+Description:	Stores the same MODALIAS value emitted by uevent
+		Format: hsi:<hsi_client device name>
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-i2c-devices-lm3533 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-i2c-devices-lm3533
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1b62230b33b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-i2c-devices-lm3533
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/i2c/devices/.../output_hvled[n]
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Set the controlling backlight device for high-voltage current
+		sink HVLED[n] (n = 1, 2) (0, 1).
+
+What:		/sys/bus/i2c/devices/.../output_lvled[n]
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Set the controlling led device for low-voltage current sink
+		LVLED[n] (n = 1..5) (0..3).
diff --git a/drivers/staging/iio/Documentation/sysfs-bus-iio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio
index 46a995d6d261..39c8de0e53d0 100644
--- a/drivers/staging/iio/Documentation/sysfs-bus-iio
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio
@@ -40,9 +40,9 @@ Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		Some devices have internal clocks.  This parameter sets the
 		resulting sampling frequency.  In many devices this
-		parameter has an effect on input filters etc rather than
+		parameter has an effect on input filters etc. rather than
 		simply controlling when the input is sampled.  As this
-		effects datardy triggers, hardware buffers and the sysfs
+		effects data ready triggers, hardware buffers and the sysfs
 		direct access interfaces, it may be found in any of the
 		relevant directories.  If it effects all of the above
 		then it is to be found in the base device directory.
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_supply_raw
 KernelVersion:	2.6.35
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
-		Raw (unscaled no bias removal etc) voltage measurement from
+		Raw (unscaled no bias removal etc.) voltage measurement from
 		channel Y. In special cases where the channel does not
 		correspond to externally available input one of the named
 		versions may be used. The number must always be specified and
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Description:
 		physically equivalent inputs when non differential readings are
 		separately available. In differential only parts, then all that
 		is required is a consistent labeling.  Units after application
-		of scale and offset are nanofarads..
+		of scale and offset are nanofarads.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_raw
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_tempX_raw
@@ -118,11 +118,11 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_z_raw
 KernelVersion:	2.6.35
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
-		Raw (unscaled no bias removal etc) temperature measurement.
-		It an axis is specified it generally means that the temperature
+		Raw (unscaled no bias removal etc.) temperature measurement.
+		If an axis is specified it generally means that the temperature
 		sensor is associated with one part of a compound device (e.g.
 		a gyroscope axis). Units after application of scale and offset
-		are milli degrees Celsuis.
+		are milli degrees Celsius.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_tempX_input
 KernelVersion:	2.6.38
@@ -148,10 +148,9 @@ KernelVersion:	2.6.35
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		Angular velocity about axis x, y or z (may be arbitrarily
-		assigned) Data converted by application of offset then scale to
-		radians per second. Has all the equivalent parameters as
-		per voltageY. Units after application of scale and offset are
-		radians per second.
+		assigned). Has all the equivalent parameters as	per voltageY.
+		Units after application of scale and offset are	radians per
+		second.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_incli_x_raw
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_incli_y_raw
@@ -161,7 +160,7 @@ Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		Inclination raw reading about axis x, y or z (may be
 		arbitrarily assigned). Data converted by application of offset
-		and scale to Degrees.
+		and scale to degrees.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_magn_x_raw
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_magn_y_raw
@@ -190,6 +189,14 @@ Description:
 		A computed peak value based on the sum squared magnitude of
 		the underlying value in the specified directions.
 
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressureY_raw
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressure_raw
+KernelVersion:	3.8
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Raw pressure measurement from channel Y. Units after
+		application of scale and offset are kilopascal.
+
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_offset
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_x_offset
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_y_offset
@@ -198,12 +205,14 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_offset
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltage_offset
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_tempY_offset
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_offset
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressureY_offset
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressure_offset
 KernelVersion:	2.6.35
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		If known for a device, offset to be added to <type>[Y]_raw prior
 		to scaling by <type>[Y]_scale in order to obtain value in the
-		<type> units as specified in <type>[y]_raw documentation.
+		<type> units as specified in <type>[Y]_raw documentation.
 		Not present if the offset is always 0 or unknown. If Y or
 		axis <x|y|z> is not present, then the offset applies to all
 		in channels of <type>.
@@ -219,6 +228,7 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_scale
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_supply_scale
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltage_scale
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_voltageY_scale
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_scale
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_scale
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_peak_scale
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_anglvel_scale
@@ -226,13 +236,15 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_magn_scale
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_magn_x_scale
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_magn_y_scale
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_magn_z_scale
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressureY_scale
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressure_scale
 KernelVersion:	2.6.35
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		If known for a device, scale to be applied to <type>Y[_name]_raw
 		post addition of <type>[Y][_name]_offset in order to obtain the
 		measured value in <type> units as specified in
-		<type>[Y][_name]_raw documentation..  If shared across all in
+		<type>[Y][_name]_raw documentation.  If shared across all in
 		channels then Y and <x|y|z> are not present and the value is
 		called <type>[Y][_name]_scale. The peak modifier means this
 		value is applied to <type>Y[_name]_peak_raw values.
@@ -243,10 +255,14 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_z_calibbias
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_anglvel_x_calibbias
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_anglvel_y_calibbias
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_anglvel_z_calibbias
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_illuminance0_calibbias
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_proximity0_calibbias
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressureY_calibbias
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressure_calibbias
 KernelVersion:	2.6.35
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
-		Hardware applied calibration offset. (assumed to fix production
+		Hardware applied calibration offset (assumed to fix production
 		inaccuracies).
 
 What		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY_calibscale
@@ -258,10 +274,14 @@ What		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_z_calibscale
 What		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_anglvel_x_calibscale
 What		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_anglvel_y_calibscale
 What		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_anglvel_z_calibscale
+what		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_illuminance0_calibscale
+what		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_proximity0_calibscale
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressureY_calibscale
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressure_calibscale
 KernelVersion:	2.6.35
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
-		Hardware applied calibration scale factor. (assumed to fix
+		Hardware applied calibration scale factor (assumed to fix
 		production inaccuracies).  If shared across all channels,
 		<type>_calibscale is used.
 
@@ -269,13 +289,23 @@ What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_scale_available
 What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_voltageX_scale_available
 What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_voltage-voltage_scale_available
 What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/out_voltageX_scale_available
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageX_scale_available
 What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_capacitance_scale_available
-KernelVersion:	2.635
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_pressure_scale_available
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_pressureY_scale_available
+KernelVersion:	2.6.35
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
-		If a discrete set of scale values are available, they
+		If a discrete set of scale values is available, they
 		are listed in this attribute.
 
+What		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_voltageY_hardwaregain
+KernelVersion:	2.6.35
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Hardware applied gain factor. If shared across all channels,
+		<type>_hardwaregain is used.
+
 What:		/sys/.../in_accel_filter_low_pass_3db_frequency
 What:		/sys/.../in_magn_filter_low_pass_3db_frequency
 What:		/sys/.../in_anglvel_filter_low_pass_3db_frequency
@@ -287,14 +317,19 @@ Description:
 		gives the 3dB frequency of the filter in Hz.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_voltageY_raw
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_raw
 KernelVersion:	2.6.37
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		Raw (unscaled, no bias etc.) output voltage for
 		channel Y.  The number must always be specified and
 		unique if the output corresponds to a single channel.
+		While DAC like devices typically use out_voltage,
+		a continuous frequency generating device, such as
+		a DDS or PLL should use out_altvoltage.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_voltageY&Z_raw
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY&Z_raw
 KernelVersion:	2.6.37
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
@@ -305,20 +340,27 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_voltageY_powerdown_mode
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_voltage_powerdown_mode
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_powerdown_mode
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltage_powerdown_mode
 KernelVersion:	2.6.38
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		Specifies the output powerdown mode.
 		DAC output stage is disconnected from the amplifier and
-		1kohm_to_gnd: connected to ground via an 1kOhm resistor
-		100kohm_to_gnd: connected to ground via an 100kOhm resistor
-		three_state: left floating
+		1kohm_to_gnd: connected	to ground via an 1kOhm resistor,
+		6kohm_to_gnd: connected to ground via a 6kOhm resistor,
+		20kohm_to_gnd: connected to ground via a 20kOhm resistor,
+		100kohm_to_gnd: connected to ground via an 100kOhm resistor,
+		500kohm_to_gnd: connected to ground via a 500kOhm resistor,
+		three_state: left floating.
 		For a list of available output power down options read
 		outX_powerdown_mode_available. If Y is not present the
 		mode is shared across all outputs.
 
 What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/out_votlageY_powerdown_mode_available
 What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/out_voltage_powerdown_mode_available
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/out_altvotlageY_powerdown_mode_available
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/out_altvoltage_powerdown_mode_available
 KernelVersion:	2.6.38
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
@@ -327,13 +369,34 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_voltageY_powerdown
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_voltage_powerdown
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_powerdown
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltage_powerdown
 KernelVersion:	2.6.38
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		Writing 1 causes output Y to enter the power down mode specified
-		by the corresponding outY_powerdown_mode. Clearing returns to
-		normal operation. Y may be suppressed if all outputs are
-		controlled together.
+		by the corresponding outY_powerdown_mode. DAC output stage is
+		disconnected from the amplifier. Clearing returns to normal
+		operation. Y may be suppressed if all outputs are controlled
+		together.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_frequency
+KernelVersion:	3.4.0
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Output frequency for channel Y in Hz. The number must always be
+		specified and unique if the output corresponds to a single
+		channel.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_phase
+KernelVersion:	3.4.0
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Phase in radians of one frequency/clock output Y
+		(out_altvoltageY) relative to another frequency/clock output
+		(out_altvoltageZ) of the device X. The number must always be
+		specified and unique if the output corresponds to a single
+		channel.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/events
 KernelVersion:	2.6.35
@@ -379,12 +442,12 @@ Description:
 		different values, but the device can only enable both thresholds
 		or neither.
 		Note the driver will assume the last p events requested are
-		to be enabled where p is however many it supports (which may
-		vary depending on the exact set requested. So if you want to be
+		to be enabled where p is how many it supports (which may vary
+		depending on the exact set requested. So if you want to be
 		sure you have set what you think you have, check the contents of
 		these attributes after everything is configured. Drivers may
 		have to buffer any parameters so that they are consistent when
-		a given event type is enabled a future point (and not those for
+		a given event type is enabled at a future point (and not those for
 		whatever event was previously enabled).
 
 What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/events/in_accel_x_roc_rising_en
@@ -453,10 +516,14 @@ What:		/sys/.../events/in_magn_z_raw_thresh_rising_value
 What:		/sys/.../events/in_magn_z_raw_thresh_falling_value
 What:		/sys/.../events/in_voltageY_supply_raw_thresh_rising_value
 What:		/sys/.../events/in_voltageY_supply_raw_thresh_falling_value
+What:		/sys/.../events/in_voltageY_raw_thresh_rising_value
 What:		/sys/.../events/in_voltageY_raw_thresh_falling_value
-What:		/sys/.../events/in_voltageY_raw_thresh_falling_value
-What:		/sys/.../events/in_tempY_raw_thresh_falling_value
+What:		/sys/.../events/in_tempY_raw_thresh_rising_value
 What:		/sys/.../events/in_tempY_raw_thresh_falling_value
+What:		/sys/.../events/in_illuminance0_thresh_falling_value
+what:		/sys/.../events/in_illuminance0_thresh_rising_value
+what:		/sys/.../events/in_proximity0_thresh_falling_value
+what:		/sys/.../events/in_proximity0_thresh_rising_value
 KernelVersion:	2.6.37
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
@@ -490,9 +557,9 @@ What:		/sys/.../events/in_magn_z_raw_roc_rising_value
 What:		/sys/.../events/in_magn_z_raw_roc_falling_value
 What:		/sys/.../events/in_voltageY_supply_raw_roc_rising_value
 What:		/sys/.../events/in_voltageY_supply_raw_roc_falling_value
+What:		/sys/.../events/in_voltageY_raw_roc_rising_value
 What:		/sys/.../events/in_voltageY_raw_roc_falling_value
-What:		/sys/.../events/in_voltageY_raw_roc_falling_value
-What:		/sys/.../events/in_tempY_raw_roc_falling_value
+What:		/sys/.../events/in_tempY_raw_roc_rising_value
 What:		/sys/.../events/in_tempY_raw_roc_falling_value
 KernelVersion:	2.6.37
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
@@ -556,6 +623,8 @@ What:		/sys/.../events/in_tempY_thresh_falling_period
 What:		/sys/.../events/in_tempY_roc_rising_period
 What:		/sys/.../events/in_tempY_roc_falling_period
 What:		/sys/.../events/in_accel_x&y&z_mag_falling_period
+What:		/sys/.../events/in_intensity0_thresh_period
+What:		/sys/.../events/in_proximity0_thresh_period
 KernelVersion:	2.6.37
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
@@ -622,41 +691,45 @@ Description:
 		Actually start the buffer capture up.  Will start trigger
 		if first device and appropriate.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/scan_elements
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/scan_elements
 KernelVersion:	2.6.37
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		Directory containing interfaces for elements that will be
 		captured for a single triggered sample set in the buffer.
 
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_accel_x_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_accel_y_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_accel_z_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_anglvel_x_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_anglvel_y_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_anglvel_z_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_magn_x_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_magn_y_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_magn_z_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_timestamp_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_voltageY_supply_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_voltageY_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_voltageY-voltageZ_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_incli_x_en
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_incli_y_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_accel_x_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_accel_y_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_accel_z_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_anglvel_x_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_anglvel_y_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_anglvel_z_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_magn_x_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_magn_y_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_magn_z_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_timestamp_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_supply_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY-voltageZ_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_incli_x_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_incli_y_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressureY_en
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressure_en
 KernelVersion:	2.6.37
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		Scan element control for triggered data capture.
 
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_accel_type
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_anglvel_type
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_magn_type
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_incli_type
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_voltageY_type
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_voltage-in_type
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_voltageY_supply_type
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_timestamp_type
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_accel_type
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_anglvel_type
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_magn_type
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_incli_type
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_type
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltage_type
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_supply_type
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_timestamp_type
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressureY_type
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressure_type
 KernelVersion:	2.6.37
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
@@ -675,32 +748,34 @@ Description:
 		the buffer output value appropriately.  The storagebits value
 		also specifies the data alignment.  So s48/64>>2 will be a
 		signed 48 bit integer stored in a 64 bit location aligned to
-		a a64 bit boundary. To obtain the clean value, shift right 2
+		a 64 bit boundary. To obtain the clean value, shift right 2
 		and apply a mask to zero the top 16 bits of the result.
 		For other storage combinations this attribute will be extended
 		appropriately.
 
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_accel_type_available
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_accel_type_available
 KernelVersion:	2.6.37
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		If the type parameter can take one of a small set of values,
 		this attribute lists them.
 
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_voltageY_index
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_voltageY_supply_index
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_accel_x_index
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_accel_y_index
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_accel_z_index
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_anglvel_x_index
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_anglvel_y_index
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_anglvel_z_index
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_magn_x_index
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_magn_y_index
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_magn_z_index
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_incli_x_index
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_incli_y_index
-What:		/sys/.../buffer/scan_elements/in_timestamp_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_voltageY_supply_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_accel_x_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_accel_y_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_accel_z_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_anglvel_x_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_anglvel_y_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_anglvel_z_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_magn_x_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_magn_y_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_magn_z_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_incli_x_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_incli_y_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_timestamp_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressureY_index
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressure_index
 KernelVersion:	2.6.37
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
@@ -719,23 +794,20 @@ Description:
 		This attribute is used to read the amount of quadrature error
 		present in the device at a given time.
 
-What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/ac_excitation_en
-KernelVersion:	3.1.0
+What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_accelX_power_mode
+KernelVersion:	3.11
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
-		This attribute, if available, is used to enable the AC
-		excitation mode found on some converters. In ac excitation mode,
-		the polarity of the excitation voltage is reversed on
-		alternate cycles, to eliminate DC errors.
+		Specifies the chip power mode.
+		low_noise: reduce noise level from ADC,
+		low_power: enable low current consumption.
+		For a list of available output power modes read
+		in_accel_power_mode_available.
 
-What:		/sys/.../iio:deviceX/bridge_switch_en
-KernelVersion:	3.1.0
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/store_eeprom
+KernelVersion:	3.4.0
 Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
-		This attribute, if available, is used to close or open the
-		bridge power down switch found on some converters.
-		In bridge applications, such as strain gauges and load cells,
-		the bridge itself consumes the majority of the current in the
-		system. To minimize the current consumption of the system,
-		the bridge can be disconnected (when it is not being used
-		using the bridge_switch_en attribute.
+		Writing '1' stores the current device configuration into
+		on-chip EEPROM. After power-up or chip reset the device will
+		automatically load the saved configuration.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-frequency-ad9523 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-frequency-ad9523
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a91aeabe7b24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-frequency-ad9523
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/pll2_feedback_clk_present
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/pll2_reference_clk_present
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/pll1_reference_clk_a_present
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/pll1_reference_clk_b_present
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/pll1_reference_clk_test_present
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/vcxo_clk_present
+KernelVersion:	3.4.0
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Reading returns either '1' or '0'.
+		'1' means that the clock in question is present.
+		'0' means that the clock is missing.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/pllY_locked
+KernelVersion:	3.4.0
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Reading returns either '1' or '0'. '1' means that the
+		pllY is locked.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/sync_dividers
+KernelVersion:	3.4.0
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Writing '1' triggers the clock distribution synchronization
+		functionality. All dividers are reset and the channels start
+		with their predefined phase offsets (out_altvoltageY_phase).
+		Writing this file has the effect as driving the external
+		/SYNC pin low.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-frequency-adf4350 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-frequency-adf4350
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1254457a726e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-frequency-adf4350
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_frequency_resolution
+KernelVersion:	3.4.0
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Stores channel Y frequency resolution/channel spacing in Hz.
+		The value given directly influences the MODULUS used by
+		the fractional-N PLL. It is assumed that the algorithm
+		that is used to compute the various dividers, is able to
+		generate proper values for multiples of channel spacing.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_altvoltageY_refin_frequency
+KernelVersion:	3.4.0
+Contact:	linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		Sets channel Y REFin frequency in Hz. In some clock chained
+		applications, the reference frequency used by the PLL may
+		change during runtime. This attribute allows the user to
+		adjust the reference frequency accordingly.
+		The value written has no effect until out_altvoltageY_frequency
+		is updated. Consider to use out_altvoltageY_powerdown to power
+		down the PLL and its RFOut buffers during REFin changes.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-light-lm3533-als b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-light-lm3533-als
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..22c5ea670971
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-light-lm3533-als
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+What:		/sys/.../events/in_illuminance0_thresh_either_en
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Event generated when channel passes one of the four thresholds
+		in each direction (rising|falling) and a zone change occurs.
+		The corresponding light zone can be read from
+		in_illuminance0_zone.
+
+What:		/sys/.../events/in_illuminance0_threshY_hysteresis
+Date:		May 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Get the hysteresis for thresholds Y, that is,
+		threshY_hysteresis = threshY_raising - threshY_falling
+
+What:		/sys/.../events/illuminance_threshY_falling_value
+What:		/sys/.../events/illuminance_threshY_raising_value
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Specifies the value of threshold that the device is comparing
+		against for the events enabled by
+		in_illuminance0_thresh_either_en (0..255), where Y in 0..3.
+
+		Note that threshY_falling must be less than or equal to
+		threshY_raising.
+
+		These thresholds correspond to the eight zone-boundary
+		registers (boundaryY_{low,high}) and define the five light
+		zones.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_illuminance0_zone
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Get the current light zone (0..4) as defined by the
+		in_illuminance0_threshY_{falling,rising} thresholds.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_currentY_raw
+Date:		May 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Get output current for channel Y (0..255), that is,
+		out_currentY_currentZ_raw, where Z is the current zone.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_currentY_currentZ_raw
+Date:		May 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Set the output current for channel out_currentY when in zone
+		Z (0..255), where Y in 0..2 and Z in 0..4.
+
+		These values correspond to the ALS-mapper target registers for
+		ALS-mapper Y + 1.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-mpu6050 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-mpu6050
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cb53737aacbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-mpu6050
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+What:           /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_gyro_matrix
+What:           /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_matrix
+What:           /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_magn_matrix
+KernelVersion:  3.4.0
+Contact:        linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		This is mounting matrix for motion sensors. Mounting matrix
+		is a 3x3 unitary matrix. A typical mounting matrix would look like
+		[0, 1, 0; 1, 0, 0; 0, 0, -1]. Using this information, it would be
+		easy to tell the relative positions among sensors as well as their
+		positions relative to the board that holds these sensors. Identity matrix
+		[1, 0, 0; 0, 1, 0; 0, 0, 1] means sensor chip and device are perfectly
+		aligned with each other. All axes are exactly the same.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mdio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mdio
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6349749ebc29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mdio
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/mdio_bus/devices/.../phy_id
+Date:		November 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.8
+Contact:	netdev@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		This attribute contains the 32-bit PHY Identifier as reported
+		by the device during bus enumeration, encoded in hexadecimal.
+		This ID is used to match the device with the appropriate
+		driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mei b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mei
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2066f0bbd453
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mei
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/mei/devices/.../modalias
+Date:		March 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.10
+Contact:	Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com>
+		linux-mei@linux.intel.com
+Description:	Stores the same MODALIAS value emitted by uevent
+		Format: mei:<mei device name>
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci
index 34f51100f029..5210a51c90fd 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci
@@ -64,7 +64,6 @@ Description:
 		Writing a non-zero value to this attribute will
 		force a rescan of all PCI buses in the system, and
 		re-discover previously removed devices.
-		Depends on CONFIG_HOTPLUG.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/pci/devices/.../msi_irqs/
 Date:		September, 2011
@@ -90,7 +89,6 @@ Contact:	Linux PCI developers <linux-pci@vger.kernel.org>
 Description:
 		Writing a non-zero value to this attribute will
 		hot-remove the PCI device and any of its children.
-		Depends on CONFIG_HOTPLUG.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/pci/devices/.../pci_bus/.../rescan
 Date:		May 2011
@@ -99,7 +97,7 @@ Description:
 		Writing a non-zero value to this attribute will
 		force a rescan of the bus and all child buses,
 		and re-discover devices removed earlier from this
-		part of the device tree.  Depends on CONFIG_HOTPLUG.
+		part of the device tree.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/pci/devices/.../rescan
 Date:		January 2009
@@ -109,7 +107,6 @@ Description:
 		force a rescan of the device's parent bus and all
 		child buses, and re-discover devices removed earlier
 		from this part of the device tree.
-		Depends on CONFIG_HOTPLUG.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/pci/devices/.../reset
 Date:		July 2009
@@ -210,3 +207,49 @@ Users:
 		firmware assigned instance number of the PCI
 		device that can help in understanding the firmware
 		intended order of the PCI device.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/pci/devices/.../d3cold_allowed
+Date:		July 2012
+Contact:	Huang Ying <ying.huang@intel.com>
+Description:
+		d3cold_allowed is bit to control whether the corresponding PCI
+		device can be put into D3Cold state.  If it is cleared, the
+		device will never be put into D3Cold state.  If it is set, the
+		device may be put into D3Cold state if other requirements are
+		satisfied too.  Reading this attribute will show the current
+		value of d3cold_allowed bit.  Writing this attribute will set
+		the value of d3cold_allowed bit.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/pci/devices/.../sriov_totalvfs
+Date:		November 2012
+Contact:	Donald Dutile <ddutile@redhat.com>
+Description:
+		This file appears when a physical PCIe device supports SR-IOV.
+		Userspace applications can read this file to determine the
+		maximum number of Virtual Functions (VFs) a PCIe physical
+		function (PF) can support. Typically, this is the value reported
+		in the PF's SR-IOV extended capability structure's TotalVFs
+		element.  Drivers have the ability at probe time to reduce the
+		value read from this file via the pci_sriov_set_totalvfs()
+		function.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/pci/devices/.../sriov_numvfs
+Date:		November 2012
+Contact:	Donald Dutile <ddutile@redhat.com>
+Description:
+		This file appears when a physical PCIe device supports SR-IOV.
+		Userspace applications can read and write to this file to
+		determine and control the enablement or disablement of Virtual
+		Functions (VFs) on the physical function (PF). A read of this
+		file will return the number of VFs that are enabled on this PF.
+		A number written to this file will enable the specified
+		number of VFs. A userspace application would typically read the
+		file and check that the value is zero, and then write the number
+		of VFs that should be enabled on the PF; the value written
+		should be less than or equal to the value in the sriov_totalvfs
+		file. A userspace application wanting to disable the VFs would
+		write a zero to this file. The core ensures that valid values
+		are written to this file, and returns errors when values are not
+		valid.  For example, writing a 2 to this file when sriov_numvfs
+		is not 0 and not 2 already will return an error. Writing a 10
+		when the value of sriov_totalvfs is 8 will return an error.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd
index dbedafb095e2..0a306476424e 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd
@@ -25,6 +25,10 @@ client_id
 
 	The ceph unique client id that was assigned for this specific session.
 
+features
+
+	A hexadecimal encoding of the feature bits for this image.
+
 major
 
 	The block device major number.
@@ -33,10 +37,21 @@ name
 
 	The name of the rbd image.
 
+image_id
+
+	The unique id for the rbd image.  (For rbd image format 1
+	this is empty.)
+
 pool
 
-	The pool where this rbd image resides. The pool-name pair is unique
-	per rados system.
+	The name of the storage pool where this rbd image resides.
+	An rbd image name is unique within its pool.
+
+pool_id
+
+	The unique identifier for the rbd image's pool.  This is
+	a permanent attribute of the pool.  A pool's id will never
+	change.
 
 size
 
@@ -51,26 +66,7 @@ current_snap
 
 	The current snapshot for which the device is mapped.
 
-create_snap
-
-	Create a snapshot:
-
-	 $ echo <snap-name> > /sys/bus/rbd/devices/<dev-id>/snap_create
-
-snap_*
-
-	A directory per each snapshot
-
-
-Entries under /sys/bus/rbd/devices/<dev-id>/snap_<snap-name>
--------------------------------------------------------------
-
-id
-
-	The rados internal snapshot id assigned for this snapshot
-
-size
-
-	The size of the image when this snapshot was taken.
-
+parent
 
+	Information identifying the pool, image, and snapshot id for
+	the parent image in a layered rbd image (format 2 only).
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rpmsg b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rpmsg
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..189e419a5a2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rpmsg
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/rpmsg/devices/.../name
+Date:		June 2011
+KernelVersion:	3.3
+Contact:	Ohad Ben-Cohen <ohad@wizery.com>
+Description:
+		Every rpmsg device is a communication channel with a remote
+		processor. Channels are identified with a (textual) name,
+		which is maximum 32 bytes long (defined as RPMSG_NAME_SIZE in
+		rpmsg.h).
+
+		This sysfs entry contains the name of this channel.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/rpmsg/devices/.../src
+Date:		June 2011
+KernelVersion:	3.3
+Contact:	Ohad Ben-Cohen <ohad@wizery.com>
+Description:
+		Every rpmsg device is a communication channel with a remote
+		processor. Channels have a local ("source") rpmsg address,
+		and remote ("destination") rpmsg address. When an entity
+		starts listening on one end of a channel, it assigns it with
+		a unique rpmsg address (a 32 bits integer). This way when
+		inbound messages arrive to this address, the rpmsg core
+		dispatches them to the listening entity (a kernel driver).
+
+		This sysfs entry contains the src (local) rpmsg address
+		of this channel. If it contains 0xffffffff, then an address
+		wasn't assigned (can happen if no driver exists for this
+		channel).
+
+What:		/sys/bus/rpmsg/devices/.../dst
+Date:		June 2011
+KernelVersion:	3.3
+Contact:	Ohad Ben-Cohen <ohad@wizery.com>
+Description:
+		Every rpmsg device is a communication channel with a remote
+		processor. Channels have a local ("source") rpmsg address,
+		and remote ("destination") rpmsg address. When an entity
+		starts listening on one end of a channel, it assigns it with
+		a unique rpmsg address (a 32 bits integer). This way when
+		inbound messages arrive to this address, the rpmsg core
+		dispatches them to the listening entity.
+
+		This sysfs entry contains the dst (remote) rpmsg address
+		of this channel. If it contains 0xffffffff, then an address
+		wasn't assigned (can happen if the kernel driver that
+		is attached to this channel is exposing a service to the
+		remote processor. This make it a local rpmsg server,
+		and it is listening for inbound messages that may be sent
+		from any remote rpmsg client; it is not bound to a single
+		remote entity).
+
+What:		/sys/bus/rpmsg/devices/.../announce
+Date:		June 2011
+KernelVersion:	3.3
+Contact:	Ohad Ben-Cohen <ohad@wizery.com>
+Description:
+		Every rpmsg device is a communication channel with a remote
+		processor. Channels are identified by a textual name (see
+		/sys/bus/rpmsg/devices/.../name above) and have a local
+		("source") rpmsg address, and remote ("destination") rpmsg
+		address.
+
+		A channel is first created when an entity, whether local
+		or remote, starts listening on it for messages (and is thus
+		called an rpmsg server).
+
+		When that happens, a "name service" announcement is sent
+		to the other processor, in order to let it know about the
+		creation of the channel (this way remote clients know they
+		can start sending messages).
+
+		This sysfs entry tells us whether the channel is a local
+		server channel that is announced (values are either
+		true or false).
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb
index 7c22a532fdfb..1430f584b266 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb
@@ -1,81 +1,3 @@
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/autosuspend
-Date:		March 2007
-KernelVersion:	2.6.21
-Contact:	Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
-Description:
-		Each USB device directory will contain a file named
-		power/autosuspend.  This file holds the time (in seconds)
-		the device must be idle before it will be autosuspended.
-		0 means the device will be autosuspended as soon as
-		possible.  Negative values will prevent the device from
-		being autosuspended at all, and writing a negative value
-		will resume the device if it is already suspended.
-
-		The autosuspend delay for newly-created devices is set to
-		the value of the usbcore.autosuspend module parameter.
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/persist
-Date:		May 2007
-KernelVersion:	2.6.23
-Contact:	Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
-Description:
-		If CONFIG_USB_PERSIST is set, then each USB device directory
-		will contain a file named power/persist.  The file holds a
-		boolean value (0 or 1) indicating whether or not the
-		"USB-Persist" facility is enabled for the device.  Since the
-		facility is inherently dangerous, it is disabled by default
-		for all devices except hubs.  For more information, see
-		Documentation/usb/persist.txt.
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/device/.../power/connected_duration
-Date:		January 2008
-KernelVersion:	2.6.25
-Contact:	Sarah Sharp <sarah.a.sharp@intel.com>
-Description:
-		If CONFIG_PM and CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND are enabled, then this file
-		is present.  When read, it returns the total time (in msec)
-		that the USB device has been connected to the machine.  This
-		file is read-only.
-Users:
-		PowerTOP <power@bughost.org>
-		http://www.lesswatts.org/projects/powertop/
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/device/.../power/active_duration
-Date:		January 2008
-KernelVersion:	2.6.25
-Contact:	Sarah Sharp <sarah.a.sharp@intel.com>
-Description:
-		If CONFIG_PM and CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND are enabled, then this file
-		is present.  When read, it returns the total time (in msec)
-		that the USB device has been active, i.e. not in a suspended
-		state.  This file is read-only.
-
-		Tools can use this file and the connected_duration file to
-		compute the percentage of time that a device has been active.
-		For example,
-		echo $((100 * `cat active_duration` / `cat connected_duration`))
-		will give an integer percentage.  Note that this does not
-		account for counter wrap.
-Users:
-		PowerTOP <power@bughost.org>
-		http://www.lesswatts.org/projects/powertop/
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/device/<busnum>-<devnum>...:<config num>-<interface num>/supports_autosuspend
-Date:		January 2008
-KernelVersion:	2.6.27
-Contact:	Sarah Sharp <sarah.a.sharp@intel.com>
-Description:
-		When read, this file returns 1 if the interface driver
-		for this interface supports autosuspend.  It also
-		returns 1 if no driver has claimed this interface, as an
-		unclaimed interface will not stop the device from being
-		autosuspended if all other interface drivers are idle.
-		The file returns 0 if autosuspend support has not been
-		added to the driver.
-Users:
-		USB PM tool
-		git://git.moblin.org/users/sarah/usb-pm-tool/
-
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/device/.../authorized
 Date:		July 2008
 KernelVersion:	2.6.26
@@ -135,6 +57,17 @@ Description:
 		for the device and attempt to bind to it.  For example:
 		# echo "8086 10f5" > /sys/bus/usb/drivers/foo/new_id
 
+		Reading from this file will list all dynamically added
+		device IDs in the same format, with one entry per
+		line. For example:
+		# cat /sys/bus/usb/drivers/foo/new_id
+		8086 10f5
+		dead beef 06
+		f00d cafe
+
+		The list will be truncated at PAGE_SIZE bytes due to
+		sysfs restrictions.
+
 What:		/sys/bus/usb-serial/drivers/.../new_id
 Date:		October 2011
 Contact:	linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
@@ -157,22 +90,15 @@ Description:
 		match the driver to the device.  For example:
 		# echo "046d c315" > /sys/bus/usb/drivers/foo/remove_id
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/device/.../avoid_reset_quirk
-Date:		December 2009
-Contact:	Oliver Neukum <oliver@neukum.org>
-Description:
-		Writing 1 to this file tells the kernel that this
-		device will morph into another mode when it is reset.
-		Drivers will not use reset for error handling for
-		such devices.
-Users:
-		usb_modeswitch
+		Reading from this file will list the dynamically added
+		device IDs, exactly like reading from the entry
+		"/sys/bus/usb/drivers/.../new_id"
 
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/usb2_hardware_lpm
 Date:		September 2011
 Contact:	Andiry Xu <andiry.xu@amd.com>
 Description:
-		If CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND is set and a USB 2.0 lpm-capable device
+		If CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME is set and a USB 2.0 lpm-capable device
 		is plugged in to a xHCI host which support link PM, it will
 		perform a LPM test; if the test is passed and host supports
 		USB2 hardware LPM (xHCI 1.0 feature), USB2 hardware LPM will
@@ -189,7 +115,62 @@ Contact:	Matthew Garrett <mjg@redhat.com>
 Description:
 		Some information about whether a given USB device is
 		physically fixed to the platform can be inferred from a
-		combination of hub decriptor bits and platform-specific data
+		combination of hub descriptor bits and platform-specific data
 		such as ACPI. This file will read either "removable" or
 		"fixed" if the information is available, and "unknown"
-		otherwise.
-\ No newline at end of file
+		otherwise.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../ltm_capable
+Date:		July 2012
+Contact:	Sarah Sharp <sarah.a.sharp@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		USB 3.0 devices may optionally support Latency Tolerance
+		Messaging (LTM).  They indicate their support by setting a bit
+		in the bmAttributes field of their SuperSpeed BOS descriptors.
+		If that bit is set for the device, ltm_capable will read "yes".
+		If the device doesn't support LTM, the file will read "no".
+		The file will be present for all speeds of USB devices, and will
+		always read "no" for USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 devices.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../(hub interface)/portX
+Date:		August 2012
+Contact:	Lan Tianyu <tianyu.lan@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../(hub interface)/portX
+		is usb port device's sysfs directory.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../(hub interface)/portX/connect_type
+Date:		January 2013
+Contact:	Lan Tianyu <tianyu.lan@intel.com>
+Description:
+		Some platforms provide usb port connect types through ACPI.
+		This attribute is to expose these information to user space.
+		The file will read "hotplug", "wired" and "not used" if the
+		information is available, and "unknown" otherwise.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/usb2_lpm_l1_timeout
+Date:		May 2013
+Contact:	Mathias Nyman <mathias.nyman@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		USB 2.0 devices may support hardware link power management (LPM)
+		L1 sleep state. The usb2_lpm_l1_timeout attribute allows
+		tuning the timeout for L1 inactivity timer (LPM timer), e.g.
+		needed inactivity time before host requests the device to go to L1 sleep.
+		Useful for power management tuning.
+		Supported values are 0 - 65535 microseconds.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/usb2_lpm_besl
+Date:		May 2013
+Contact:	Mathias Nyman <mathias.nyman@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		USB 2.0 devices that support hardware link power management (LPM)
+		L1 sleep state now use a best effort service latency value (BESL) to
+		indicate the best effort to resumption of service to the device after the
+		initiation of the resume event.
+		If the device does not have a preferred besl value then the host can select
+		one instead. This usb2_lpm_besl attribute allows to tune the host selected besl
+		value in order to tune power saving and service latency.
+
+		Supported values are 0 - 15.
+		More information on how besl values map to microseconds can be found in
+		USB 2.0 ECN Errata for Link Power Management, section 4.10)
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb-devices-usbsevseg b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb-devices-usbsevseg
index cb830df8777c..70d00dfa443d 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb-devices-usbsevseg
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb-devices-usbsevseg
@@ -40,4 +40,4 @@ Description:	Controls the decimal places on the device.
 		the value of 10 ** n. Assume this field has
 		the value k and has 1 or more decimal places set,
 		to set the mth place (where m is not already set),
-		change this fields value to k + 10 ** m.
-\ No newline at end of file
+		change this fields value to k + 10 ** m.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-cfq-target-latency b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-cfq-target-latency
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..df0f7828c5e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-cfq-target-latency
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+What:		/sys/block/<device>/iosched/target_latency
+Date:		March 2012
+contact:	Tao Ma <boyu.mt@taobao.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/block/<device>/iosched/target_latency only exists
+		when the user sets cfq to /sys/block/<device>/scheduler.
+		It contains an estimated latency time for the cfq. cfq will
+		use it to calculate the time slice used for every task.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-adp8870 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-adp8870
index 4a9c545bda4b..33e648808117 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-adp8870
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-adp8870
@@ -53,4 +53,4 @@ Description:
 		Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-backlight.
 		It can be enabled by writing the value stored in
 		/sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/max_brightness to
-		/sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/brightness.
-\ No newline at end of file
+		/sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/brightness.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-lm3533 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-lm3533
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..77cf7ac949af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-lm3533
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+What:		/sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/als_channel
+Date:		May 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Get the ALS output channel used as input in
+		ALS-current-control mode (0, 1), where
+
+		0 - out_current0 (backlight 0)
+		1 - out_current1 (backlight 1)
+
+What:		/sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/als_en
+Date:		May 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Enable ALS-current-control mode (0, 1).
+
+What:		/sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/id
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Get the id of this backlight (0, 1).
+
+What:		/sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/linear
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Set the brightness-mapping mode (0, 1), where
+
+		0 - exponential mode
+		1 - linear mode
+
+What:		/sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/pwm
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Set the PWM-input control mask (5 bits), where
+
+		bit 5 - PWM-input enabled in Zone 4
+		bit 4 - PWM-input enabled in Zone 3
+		bit 3 - PWM-input enabled in Zone 2
+		bit 2 - PWM-input enabled in Zone 1
+		bit 1 - PWM-input enabled in Zone 0
+		bit 0 - PWM-input enabled
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-bdi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-bdi
index 5f500977b42f..d773d5697cf5 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-bdi
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-bdi
@@ -48,3 +48,8 @@ max_ratio (read-write)
 	most of the write-back cache.  For example in case of an NFS
 	mount that is prone to get stuck, or a FUSE mount which cannot
 	be trusted to play fair.
+
+stable_pages_required (read-only)
+
+	If set, the backing device requires that all pages comprising a write
+	request must not be changed until writeout is complete.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq
index 23d78b5aab11..ee39acacf6f8 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ What:		/sys/class/devfreq/.../governor
 Date:		September 2011
 Contact:	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
 Description:
-		The /sys/class/devfreq/.../governor shows the name of the
+		The /sys/class/devfreq/.../governor show or set the name of the
 		governor used by the corresponding devfreq object.
 
 What:		/sys/class/devfreq/.../cur_freq
@@ -19,15 +19,16 @@ Date:		September 2011
 Contact:	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
 Description:
 		The /sys/class/devfreq/.../cur_freq shows the current
-		frequency of the corresponding devfreq object.
+		frequency of the corresponding devfreq object. Same as
+		target_freq when get_cur_freq() is not implemented by
+		devfreq driver.
 
-What:		/sys/class/devfreq/.../central_polling
-Date:		September 2011
-Contact:	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
+What:		/sys/class/devfreq/.../target_freq
+Date:		September 2012
+Contact:	Rajagopal Venkat <rajagopal.venkat@linaro.org>
 Description:
-		The /sys/class/devfreq/.../central_polling shows whether
-		the devfreq ojbect is using devfreq-provided central
-		polling mechanism or not.
+		The /sys/class/devfreq/.../target_freq shows the next governor
+		predicted target frequency of the corresponding devfreq object.
 
 What:		/sys/class/devfreq/.../polling_interval
 Date:		September 2011
@@ -43,6 +44,17 @@ Description:
 		(/sys/class/devfreq/.../central_polling is 0), this value
 		may be useless.
 
+What:		/sys/class/devfreq/.../trans_stat
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
+Descrtiption:
+		This ABI shows the statistics of devfreq behavior on a
+		specific device. It shows the time spent in each state and
+		the number of transitions between states.
+		In order to activate this ABI, the devfreq target device
+		driver should provide the list of available frequencies
+		with its profile.
+
 What:		/sys/class/devfreq/.../userspace/set_freq
 Date:		September 2011
 Contact:	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
@@ -50,3 +62,39 @@ Description:
 		The /sys/class/devfreq/.../userspace/set_freq shows and
 		sets the requested frequency for the devfreq object if
 		userspace governor is in effect.
+
+What:		/sys/class/devfreq/.../available_frequencies
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Nishanth Menon <nm@ti.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/class/devfreq/.../available_frequencies shows
+		the available frequencies of the corresponding devfreq object.
+		This is a snapshot of available frequencies and not limited
+		by the min/max frequency restrictions.
+
+What:		/sys/class/devfreq/.../available_governors
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Nishanth Menon <nm@ti.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/class/devfreq/.../available_governors shows
+		currently available governors in the system.
+
+What:		/sys/class/devfreq/.../min_freq
+Date:		January 2013
+Contact:	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/class/devfreq/.../min_freq shows and stores
+		the minimum frequency requested by users. It is 0 if
+		the user does not care. min_freq overrides the
+		frequency requested by governors.
+
+What:		/sys/class/devfreq/.../max_freq
+Date:		January 2013
+Contact:	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/class/devfreq/.../max_freq shows and stores
+		the maximum frequency requested by users. It is 0 if
+		the user does not care. max_freq overrides the
+		frequency requested by governors and min_freq.
+		The max_freq overrides min_freq because max_freq may be
+		used to throttle devices to avoid overheating.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-extcon b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-extcon
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..57a726232912
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-extcon
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+What:		/sys/class/extcon/.../
+Date:		February 2012
+Contact:	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
+Description:
+		Provide a place in sysfs for the extcon objects.
+		This allows accessing extcon specific variables.
+		The name of extcon object denoted as ... is the name given
+		with extcon_dev_register.
+
+		One extcon device denotes a single external connector
+		port. An external connector may have multiple cables
+		attached simultaneously. Many of docks, cradles, and
+		accessory cables have such capability. For example,
+		the 30-pin port of Nuri board (/arch/arm/mach-exynos)
+		may have both HDMI and Charger attached, or analog audio,
+		video, and USB cables attached simultaneously.
+
+		If there are cables mutually exclusive with each other,
+		such binary relations may be expressed with extcon_dev's
+		mutually_exclusive array.
+
+What:		/sys/class/extcon/.../name
+Date:		February 2012
+Contact:	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/class/extcon/.../name shows the name of the extcon
+		object. If the extcon object has an optional callback
+		"show_name" defined, the callback will provide the name with
+		this sysfs node.
+
+What:		/sys/class/extcon/.../state
+Date:		February 2012
+Contact:	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/class/extcon/.../state shows and stores the cable
+		attach/detach information of the corresponding extcon object.
+		If the extcon object has an optional callback "show_state"
+		defined, the showing function is overridden with the optional
+		callback.
+
+		If the default callback for showing function is used, the
+		format is like this:
+		# cat state
+		USB_OTG=1
+		HDMI=0
+		TA=1
+		EAR_JACK=0
+		#
+		In this example, the extcon device has USB_OTG and TA
+		cables attached and HDMI and EAR_JACK cables detached.
+
+		In order to update the state of an extcon device, enter a hex
+		state number starting with 0x:
+		# echo 0xHEX > state
+
+		This updates the whole state of the extcon device.
+		Inputs of all the methods are required to meet the
+		mutually_exclusive conditions if they exist.
+
+		It is recommended to use this "global" state interface if
+		you need to set the value atomically. The later state
+		interface associated with each cable cannot update
+		multiple cable states of an extcon device simultaneously.
+
+What:		/sys/class/extcon/.../cable.x/name
+Date:		February 2012
+Contact:	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/class/extcon/.../cable.x/name shows the name of cable
+		"x" (integer between 0 and 31) of an extcon device.
+
+What:		/sys/class/extcon/.../cable.x/state
+Date:		February 2012
+Contact:	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/class/extcon/.../cable.x/state shows and stores the
+		state of cable "x" (integer between 0 and 31) of an extcon
+		device. The state value is either 0 (detached) or 1
+		(attached).
+
+What:		/sys/class/extcon/.../mutually_exclusive/...
+Date:		December 2011
+Contact:	MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
+Description:
+		Shows the relations of mutually exclusiveness. For example,
+		if the mutually_exclusive array of extcon device is
+		{0x3, 0x5, 0xC, 0x0}, then the output is:
+		# ls mutually_exclusive/
+		0x3
+		0x5
+		0xc
+		#
+
+		Note that mutually_exclusive is a sub-directory of the extcon
+		device and the file names under the mutually_exclusive
+		directory show the mutually-exclusive sets, not the contents
+		of the files.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-driver-lm3533 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-driver-lm3533
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..620ebb3b9baa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-driver-lm3533
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+What:		/sys/class/leds/<led>/als_channel
+Date:		May 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Set the ALS output channel to use as input in
+		ALS-current-control mode (1, 2), where
+
+		1 - out_current1
+		2 - out_current2
+
+What:		/sys/class/leds/<led>/als_en
+Date:		May 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Enable ALS-current-control mode (0, 1).
+
+What:		/sys/class/leds/<led>/falltime
+What:		/sys/class/leds/<led>/risetime
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Set the pattern generator fall and rise times (0..7), where
+
+		0 - 2048 us
+		1 - 262 ms
+		2 - 524 ms
+		3 - 1.049 s
+		4 - 2.097 s
+		5 - 4.194 s
+		6 - 8.389 s
+		7 - 16.78 s
+
+What:		/sys/class/leds/<led>/id
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Get the id of this led (0..3).
+
+What:		/sys/class/leds/<led>/linear
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Set the brightness-mapping mode (0, 1), where
+
+		0 - exponential mode
+		1 - linear mode
+
+What:		/sys/class/leds/<led>/pwm
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	Johan Hovold <jhovold@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		Set the PWM-input control mask (5 bits), where
+
+		bit 5 - PWM-input enabled in Zone 4
+		bit 4 - PWM-input enabled in Zone 3
+		bit 3 - PWM-input enabled in Zone 2
+		bit 2 - PWM-input enabled in Zone 1
+		bit 1 - PWM-input enabled in Zone 0
+		bit 0 - PWM-input enabled
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mtd b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mtd
index 4d55a1888981..bfd119ace6ad 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mtd
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mtd
@@ -14,8 +14,7 @@ Description:
 		The /sys/class/mtd/mtd{0,1,2,3,...} directories correspond
 		to each /dev/mtdX character device.  These may represent
 		physical/simulated flash devices, partitions on a flash
-		device, or concatenated flash devices.  They exist regardless
-		of whether CONFIG_MTD_CHAR is actually enabled.
+		device, or concatenated flash devices.
 
 What:		/sys/class/mtd/mtdXro/
 Date:		April 2009
@@ -23,8 +22,7 @@ KernelVersion:	2.6.29
 Contact:	linux-mtd@lists.infradead.org
 Description:
 		These directories provide the corresponding read-only device
-		nodes for /sys/class/mtd/mtdX/ .  They are only created
-		(for the benefit of udev) if CONFIG_MTD_CHAR is enabled.
+		nodes for /sys/class/mtd/mtdX/ .
 
 What:		/sys/class/mtd/mtdX/dev
 Date:		April 2009
@@ -123,3 +121,66 @@ Description:
 		half page, or a quarter page).
 
 		In the case of ECC NOR, it is the ECC block size.
+
+What:		/sys/class/mtd/mtdX/ecc_strength
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.4
+Contact:	linux-mtd@lists.infradead.org
+Description:
+		Maximum number of bit errors that the device is capable of
+		correcting within each region covering an ECC step (see
+		ecc_step_size).  This will always be a non-negative integer.
+
+		In the case of devices lacking any ECC capability, it is 0.
+
+What:		/sys/class/mtd/mtdX/bitflip_threshold
+Date:		April 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.4
+Contact:	linux-mtd@lists.infradead.org
+Description:
+		This allows the user to examine and adjust the criteria by which
+		mtd returns -EUCLEAN from mtd_read() and mtd_read_oob().  If the
+		maximum number of bit errors that were corrected on any single
+		region comprising an ecc step (as reported by the driver) equals
+		or exceeds this value, -EUCLEAN is returned.  Otherwise, absent
+		an error, 0 is returned.  Higher layers (e.g., UBI) use this
+		return code as an indication that an erase block may be
+		degrading and should be scrutinized as a candidate for being
+		marked as bad.
+
+		The initial value may be specified by the flash device driver.
+		If not, then the default value is ecc_strength.
+
+		The introduction of this feature brings a subtle change to the
+		meaning of the -EUCLEAN return code.  Previously, it was
+		interpreted to mean simply "one or more bit errors were
+		corrected".  Its new interpretation can be phrased as "a
+		dangerously high number of bit errors were corrected on one or
+		more regions comprising an ecc step".  The precise definition of
+		"dangerously high" can be adjusted by the user with
+		bitflip_threshold.  Users are discouraged from doing this,
+		however, unless they know what they are doing and have intimate
+		knowledge of the properties of their device.  Broadly speaking,
+		bitflip_threshold should be low enough to detect genuine erase
+		block degradation, but high enough to avoid the consequences of
+		a persistent return value of -EUCLEAN on devices where sticky
+		bitflips occur.  Note that if bitflip_threshold exceeds
+		ecc_strength, -EUCLEAN is never returned by the read operations.
+		Conversely, if bitflip_threshold is zero, -EUCLEAN is always
+		returned, absent a hard error.
+
+		This is generally applicable only to NAND flash devices with ECC
+		capability.  It is ignored on devices lacking ECC capability;
+		i.e., devices for which ecc_strength is zero.
+
+What:		/sys/class/mtd/mtdX/ecc_step_size
+Date:		May 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.10
+Contact:	linux-mtd@lists.infradead.org
+Description:
+		The size of a single region covered by ECC, known as the ECC
+		step.  Devices may have several equally sized ECC steps within
+		each writesize region.
+
+		It will always be a non-negative integer.  In the case of
+		devices lacking any ECC capability, it is 0.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv
index 38dd762def4b..bdc00707c751 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv
@@ -1,4 +1,10 @@
 
+What:           /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/iface_status
+Date:           May 2010
+Contact:        Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
+Description:
+                Indicates the status of <iface> as it is seen by batman.
+
 What:           /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/mesh_iface
 Date:           May 2010
 Contact:        Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
@@ -7,8 +13,3 @@ Description:
                 displays the batman mesh interface this <iface>
                 currently is associated with.
 
-What:           /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/iface_status
-Date:           May 2010
-Contact:        Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
-Description:
-                Indicates the status of <iface> as it is seen by batman.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-grcan b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-grcan
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f418c92ca555
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-grcan
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+
+What:		/sys/class/net/<iface>/grcan/enable0
+Date:		October 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.8
+Contact:	Andreas Larsson <andreas@gaisler.com>
+Description:
+		Hardware configuration of physical interface 0. This file reads
+		and writes the "Enable 0" bit of the configuration register.
+		Possible values: 0 or 1. See the GRCAN chapter of the GRLIB IP
+		core library documentation for details. The default value is 0
+		or set by the module parameter grcan.enable0 and can be read at
+		/sys/module/grcan/parameters/enable0.
+
+What:		/sys/class/net/<iface>/grcan/enable1
+Date:		October 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.8
+Contact:	Andreas Larsson <andreas@gaisler.com>
+Description:
+		Hardware configuration of physical interface 1. This file reads
+		and writes the "Enable 1" bit of the configuration register.
+		Possible values: 0 or 1. See the GRCAN chapter of the GRLIB IP
+		core library documentation for details. The default value is 0
+		or set by the module parameter grcan.enable1 and can be read at
+		/sys/module/grcan/parameters/enable1.
+
+What:		/sys/class/net/<iface>/grcan/select
+Date:		October 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.8
+Contact:	Andreas Larsson <andreas@gaisler.com>
+Description:
+		Configuration of which physical interface to be used. Possible
+		values: 0 or 1. See the GRCAN chapter of the GRLIB IP core
+		library documentation for details. The default value is 0 or is
+		set by the module parameter grcan.select and can be read at
+		/sys/module/grcan/parameters/select.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh
index b218e0f8bdb3..bdcd8b4e38f2 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh
@@ -6,6 +6,14 @@ Description:
                 Indicates whether the batman protocol messages of the
                 mesh <mesh_iface> shall be aggregated or not.
 
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/ap_isolation
+Date:           May 2011
+Contact:        Antonio Quartulli <ordex@autistici.org>
+Description:
+                Indicates whether the data traffic going from a
+                wireless client to another wireless client will be
+                silently dropped.
+
 What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/bonding
 Date:           June 2010
 Contact:        Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
@@ -14,6 +22,15 @@ Description:
                 mesh will be sent using multiple interfaces at the
                 same time (if available).
 
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/bridge_loop_avoidance
+Date:           November 2011
+Contact:        Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
+Description:
+                Indicates whether the bridge loop avoidance feature
+                is enabled. This feature detects and avoids loops
+                between the mesh and devices bridged with the soft
+                interface <mesh_iface>.
+
 What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/fragmentation
 Date:           October 2010
 Contact:        Andreas Langer <an.langer@gmx.de>
@@ -22,14 +39,6 @@ Description:
                 mesh will be fragmented or silently discarded if the
                 packet size exceeds the outgoing interface MTU.
 
-What:		/sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/ap_isolation
-Date:		May 2011
-Contact:	Antonio Quartulli <ordex@autistici.org>
-Description:
-		Indicates whether the data traffic going from a
-		wireless client to another wireless client will be
-		silently dropped.
-
 What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_bandwidth
 Date:           October 2010
 Contact:        Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
@@ -51,6 +60,21 @@ Description:
                 Defines the selection criteria this node will use
                 to choose a gateway if gw_mode was set to 'client'.
 
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/hop_penalty
+Date:           Oct 2010
+Contact:        Linus Lüssing <linus.luessing@web.de>
+Description:
+                Defines the penalty which will be applied to an
+                originator message's tq-field on every hop.
+
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/network_coding
+Date:           Nov 2012
+Contact:        Martin Hundeboll <martin@hundeboll.net>
+Description:
+                Controls whether Network Coding (using some magic
+                to send fewer wifi packets but still the same
+                content) is enabled or not.
+
 What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/orig_interval
 Date:           May 2010
 Contact:        Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
@@ -58,19 +82,12 @@ Description:
                 Defines the interval in milliseconds in which batman
                 sends its protocol messages.
 
-What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/hop_penalty
-Date:           Oct 2010
-Contact:        Linus Lüssing <linus.luessing@web.de>
-Description:
-		Defines the penalty which will be applied to an
-		originator message's tq-field on every hop.
-
-What:		/sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/routing_algo
-Date:		Dec 2011
-Contact:	Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
+What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/routing_algo
+Date:           Dec 2011
+Contact:        Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de>
 Description:
-		Defines the routing procotol this mesh instance
-		uses to find the optimal paths through the mesh.
+                Defines the routing procotol this mesh instance
+                uses to find the optimal paths through the mesh.
 
 What:           /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/vis_mode
 Date:           May 2010
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-pwm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-pwm
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c479d77b67c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-pwm
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+What:		/sys/class/pwm/
+Date:		May 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	H Hartley Sweeten <hsweeten@visionengravers.com>
+Description:
+		The pwm/ class sub-directory belongs to the Generic PWM
+		Framework and provides a sysfs interface for using PWM
+		channels.
+
+What:		/sys/class/pwm/pwmchipN/
+Date:		May 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	H Hartley Sweeten <hsweeten@visionengravers.com>
+Description:
+		A /sys/class/pwm/pwmchipN directory is created for each
+		probed PWM controller/chip where N is the base of the
+		PWM chip.
+
+What:		/sys/class/pwm/pwmchipN/npwm
+Date:		May 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	H Hartley Sweeten <hsweeten@visionengravers.com>
+Description:
+		The number of PWM channels supported by the PWM chip.
+
+What:		/sys/class/pwm/pwmchipN/export
+Date:		May 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	H Hartley Sweeten <hsweeten@visionengravers.com>
+Description:
+		Exports a PWM channel from the PWM chip for sysfs control.
+		Value is between 0 and /sys/class/pwm/pwmchipN/npwm - 1.
+
+What:		/sys/class/pwm/pwmchipN/unexport
+Date:		May 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	H Hartley Sweeten <hsweeten@visionengravers.com>
+Description:
+		Unexports a PWM channel.
+
+What:		/sys/class/pwm/pwmchipN/pwmX
+Date:		May 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	H Hartley Sweeten <hsweeten@visionengravers.com>
+Description:
+		A /sys/class/pwm/pwmchipN/pwmX directory is created for
+		each exported PWM channel where X is the exported PWM
+		channel number.
+
+What:		/sys/class/pwm/pwmchipN/pwmX/period
+Date:		May 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	H Hartley Sweeten <hsweeten@visionengravers.com>
+Description:
+		Sets the PWM signal period in nanoseconds.
+
+What:		/sys/class/pwm/pwmchipN/pwmX/duty_cycle
+Date:		May 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	H Hartley Sweeten <hsweeten@visionengravers.com>
+Description:
+		Sets the PWM signal duty cycle in nanoseconds.
+
+What:		/sys/class/pwm/pwmchipN/pwmX/polarity
+Date:		May 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	H Hartley Sweeten <hsweeten@visionengravers.com>
+Description:
+		Sets the output polarity of the PWM signal to "normal" or
+		"inversed".
+
+What:		/sys/class/pwm/pwmchipN/pwmX/enable
+Date:		May 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	H Hartley Sweeten <hsweeten@visionengravers.com>
+Description:
+		Enable/disable the PWM signal.
+		0 is disabled
+		1 is enabled
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator
index e091fa873792..bc578bc60628 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator
@@ -349,3 +349,24 @@ Description:
 
 		This will be one of the same strings reported by
 		the "state" attribute.
+
+What:		/sys/class/regulator/.../bypass
+Date:		September 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.7
+Contact:	Mark Brown <broonie@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+		Some regulator directories will contain a field called
+		bypass.  This indicates if the device is in bypass mode.
+
+		This will be one of the following strings:
+
+		'enabled'
+		'disabled'
+		'unknown'
+
+		'enabled' means the regulator is in bypass mode.
+
+		'disabled' means that the regulator is regulating.
+
+		'unknown' means software cannot determine the state, or
+		the reported state is invalid.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc-wusbhc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc-wusbhc
index 25b1e751b777..5977e2875325 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc-wusbhc
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc-wusbhc
@@ -36,3 +36,22 @@ Description:
 
                 Refer to [ECMA-368] section 10.3.1.1 for the value to
                 use.
+
+What:           /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/wusbhc/wusb_dnts
+Date:           June 2013
+KernelVersion:  3.11
+Contact:        Thomas Pugliese <thomas.pugliese@gmail.com>
+Description:
+                The device notification time slot (DNTS) count and inverval in
+                milliseconds that the WUSB host should use.  This controls how
+                often the devices will have the opportunity to send
+                notifications to the host.
+
+What:           /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/wusbhc/wusb_retry_count
+Date:           June 2013
+KernelVersion:  3.11
+Contact:        Thomas Pugliese <thomas.pugliese@gmail.com>
+Description:
+                The number of retries that the WUSB host should attempt
+                before reporting an error for a bus transaction.  The range of
+                valid values is [0..15], where 0 indicates infinite retries.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-edac b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-edac
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6568e0010e1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-edac
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/reset_counters
+Date:		January 2006
+Contact:	linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This write-only control file will zero all the statistical
+		counters for UE and CE errors on the given memory controller.
+		Zeroing the counters will also reset the timer indicating how
+		long since the last counter were reset. This is useful for
+		computing errors/time.  Since the counters are always reset
+		at driver initialization time, no module/kernel parameter
+		is available.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/seconds_since_reset
+Date:		January 2006
+Contact:	linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This attribute file displays how many seconds have elapsed
+		since the last counter reset. This can be used with the error
+		counters to measure error rates.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/mc_name
+Date:		January 2006
+Contact:	linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This attribute file displays the type of memory controller
+		that is being utilized.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/size_mb
+Date:		January 2006
+Contact:	linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This attribute file displays, in count of megabytes, of memory
+		that this memory controller manages.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/ue_count
+Date:		January 2006
+Contact:	linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This attribute file displays the total count of uncorrectable
+		errors that have occurred on this memory controller. If
+		panic_on_ue is set, this counter will not have a chance to
+		increment, since EDAC will panic the system
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/ue_noinfo_count
+Date:		January 2006
+Contact:	linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This attribute file displays the number of UEs that have
+		occurred on this memory controller with no information as to
+		which DIMM slot is having errors.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/ce_count
+Date:		January 2006
+Contact:	linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This attribute file displays the total count of correctable
+		errors that have occurred on this memory controller. This
+		count is very important to examine. CEs provide early
+		indications that a DIMM is beginning to fail. This count
+		field should be monitored for non-zero values and report
+		such information to the system administrator.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/ce_noinfo_count
+Date:		January 2006
+Contact:	linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This attribute file displays the number of CEs that
+		have occurred on this memory controller wherewith no
+		information as to which DIMM slot is having errors. Memory is
+		handicapped, but operational, yet no information is available
+		to indicate which slot the failing memory is in. This count
+		field should be also be monitored for non-zero values.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/sdram_scrub_rate
+Date:		February 2007
+Contact:	linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Read/Write attribute file that controls memory scrubbing.
+		The scrubbing rate used by the memory controller is set by
+		writing a minimum bandwidth in bytes/sec to the attribute file.
+		The rate will be translated to an internal value that gives at
+		least the specified rate.
+		Reading the file will return the actual scrubbing rate employed.
+		If configuration fails or memory scrubbing is not implemented,
+		the value of the attribute file will be -1.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/max_location
+Date:		April 2012
+Contact:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <m.chehab@samsung.com>
+		linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This attribute file displays the information about the last
+		available memory slot in this memory controller. It is used by
+		userspace tools in order to display the memory filling layout.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/(dimm|rank)*/size
+Date:		April 2012
+Contact:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <m.chehab@samsung.com>
+		linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This attribute file will display the size of dimm or rank.
+		For dimm*/size, this is the size, in MB of the DIMM memory
+		stick. For rank*/size, this is the size, in MB for one rank
+		of the DIMM memory stick. On single rank memories (1R), this
+		is also the total size of the dimm. On dual rank (2R) memories,
+		this is half the size of the total DIMM memories.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/(dimm|rank)*/dimm_dev_type
+Date:		April 2012
+Contact:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <m.chehab@samsung.com>
+		linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This attribute file will display what type of DRAM device is
+		being utilized on this DIMM (x1, x2, x4, x8, ...).
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/(dimm|rank)*/dimm_edac_mode
+Date:		April 2012
+Contact:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <m.chehab@samsung.com>
+		linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This attribute file will display what type of Error detection
+		and correction is being utilized. For example: S4ECD4ED would
+		mean a Chipkill with x4 DRAM.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/(dimm|rank)*/dimm_label
+Date:		April 2012
+Contact:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <m.chehab@samsung.com>
+		linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This control file allows this DIMM to have a label assigned
+		to it. With this label in the module, when errors occur
+		the output can provide the DIMM label in the system log.
+		This becomes vital for panic events to isolate the
+		cause of the UE event.
+		DIMM Labels must be assigned after booting, with information
+		that correctly identifies the physical slot with its
+		silk screen label. This information is currently very
+		motherboard specific and determination of this information
+		must occur in userland at this time.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/(dimm|rank)*/dimm_location
+Date:		April 2012
+Contact:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <m.chehab@samsung.com>
+		linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This attribute file will display the location (csrow/channel,
+		branch/channel/slot or channel/slot) of the dimm or rank.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc*/(dimm|rank)*/dimm_mem_type
+Date:		April 2012
+Contact:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <m.chehab@samsung.com>
+		linux-edac@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This attribute file will display what type of memory is
+		currently on this csrow. Normally, either buffered or
+		unbuffered memory (for example, Unbuffered-DDR3).
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-firmware_node b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-firmware_node
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..46badc9ea284
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-firmware_node
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/.../firmware_node/
+Date:		September 2012
+Contact:	<>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../firmware_node directory contains attributes
+		allowing the user space to check and modify some firmware
+		related properties of given device.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/.../firmware_node/description
+Date:		September 2012
+Contact:	Lance Ortiz <lance.ortiz@hp.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../firmware/description attribute contains a string
+		that describes the device as provided by the _STR method in the ACPI
+		namespace.  This attribute is read-only.  If the device does not have
+		an _STR method associated with it in the ACPI namespace, this
+		attribute is not present.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-lpss_ltr b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-lpss_ltr
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ea9298d9bbaf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-lpss_ltr
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/.../lpss_ltr/
+Date:		March 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../lpss_ltr/ directory is only present for
+		devices included into the Intel Lynxpoint Low Power Subsystem
+		(LPSS).  If present, it contains attributes containing the LTR
+		mode and the values of LTR registers of the device.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/.../lpss_ltr/ltr_mode
+Date:		March 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../lpss_ltr/ltr_mode attribute contains an
+		integer number (0 or 1) indicating whether or not the devices'
+		LTR functionality is working in the software mode (1).
+
+		This attribute is read-only.  If the device's runtime PM status
+		is not "active", attempts to read from this attribute cause
+		-EAGAIN to be returned.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/.../lpss_ltr/auto_ltr
+Date:		March 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../lpss_ltr/auto_ltr attribute contains the
+		current value of the device's AUTO_LTR register (raw)
+		represented as an 8-digit hexadecimal number.
+
+		This attribute is read-only.  If the device's runtime PM status
+		is not "active", attempts to read from this attribute cause
+		-EAGAIN to be returned.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/.../lpss_ltr/sw_ltr
+Date:		March 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../lpss_ltr/auto_ltr attribute contains the
+		current value of the device's SW_LTR register (raw) represented
+		as an 8-digit hexadecimal number.
+
+		This attribute is read-only.  If the device's runtime PM status
+		is not "active", attempts to read from this attribute cause
+		-EAGAIN to be returned.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-node b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-node
deleted file mode 100644
index 453a210c3ceb..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-node
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/compact
-Date:		February 2010
-Contact:	Mel Gorman <mel@csn.ul.ie>
-Description:
-		When this file is written to, all memory within that node
-		will be compacted. When it completes, memory will be freed
-		into blocks which have as many contiguous pages as possible
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-online b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-online
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f990026c0740
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-online
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/.../online
+Date:		April 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../online attribute is only present for
+		devices whose bus types provide .online() and .offline()
+		callbacks.  The number read from it (0 or 1) reflects the value
+		of the device's 'offline' field.  If that number is 1 and '0'
+		(or 'n', or 'N') is written to this file, the device bus type's
+		.offline() callback is executed for the device and (if
+		successful) its 'offline' field is updated accordingly.  In
+		turn, if that number is 0 and '1' (or 'y', or 'Y') is written to
+		this file, the device bus type's .online() callback is executed
+		for the device and (if successful) its 'offline' field is
+		updated as appropriate.
+
+		After a successful execution of the bus type's .offline()
+		callback the device cannot be used for any purpose until either
+		it is removed (i.e. device_del() is called for it), or its bus
+		type's .online() is exeucted successfully.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-platform-sh_mobile_lcdc_fb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-platform-sh_mobile_lcdc_fb
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2107082426da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-platform-sh_mobile_lcdc_fb
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/sh_mobile_lcdc_fb.[0-3]/graphics/fb[0-9]/ovl_alpha
+Date:		May 2012
+Contact:	Laurent Pinchart <laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com>
+Description:
+		This file is only available on fb[0-9] devices corresponding
+		to overlay planes.
+
+		Stores the alpha blending value for the overlay. Values range
+		from 0 (transparent) to 255 (opaque). The value is ignored if
+		the mode is not set to Alpha Blending.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/sh_mobile_lcdc_fb.[0-3]/graphics/fb[0-9]/ovl_mode
+Date:		May 2012
+Contact:	Laurent Pinchart <laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com>
+Description:
+		This file is only available on fb[0-9] devices corresponding
+		to overlay planes.
+
+		Selects the composition mode for the overlay. Possible values
+		are
+
+		0 - Alpha Blending
+		1 - ROP3
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/sh_mobile_lcdc_fb.[0-3]/graphics/fb[0-9]/ovl_position
+Date:		May 2012
+Contact:	Laurent Pinchart <laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com>
+Description:
+		This file is only available on fb[0-9] devices corresponding
+		to overlay planes.
+
+		Stores the x,y overlay position on the display in pixels. The
+		position format is `[0-9]+,[0-9]+'.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/sh_mobile_lcdc_fb.[0-3]/graphics/fb[0-9]/ovl_rop3
+Date:		May 2012
+Contact:	Laurent Pinchart <laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com>
+Description:
+		This file is only available on fb[0-9] devices corresponding
+		to overlay planes.
+
+		Stores the raster operation (ROP3) for the overlay. Values
+		range from 0 to 255. The value is ignored if the mode is not
+		set to ROP3.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power
index 840f7d64d483..efe449bdf811 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 What:		/sys/devices/.../power/
 Date:		January 2009
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/devices/.../power directory contains attributes
 		allowing the user space to check and modify some power
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/devices/.../power/wakeup
 Date:		January 2009
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup attribute allows the user
 		space to check if the device is enabled to wake up the system
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/devices/.../power/control
 Date:		January 2009
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/devices/.../power/control attribute allows the user
 		space to control the run-time power management of the device.
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/devices/.../power/async
 Date:		January 2009
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/devices/.../async attribute allows the user space to
 		enable or diasble the device's suspend and resume callbacks to
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_count
 Date:		September 2010
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_count attribute contains the number
 		of signaled wakeup events associated with the device.  This
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active_count
 Date:		September 2010
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_active_count attribute contains the
 		number of times the processing of wakeup events associated with
@@ -96,20 +96,30 @@ Description:
 		is read-only.  If the device is not enabled to wake up the
 		system from sleep states, this attribute is not present.
 
-What:		/sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_hit_count
-Date:		September 2010
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+What:		/sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_abort_count
+Date:		February 2012
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
-		The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_hit_count attribute contains the
+		The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_abort_count attribute contains the
 		number of times the processing of a wakeup event associated with
-		the device might prevent the system from entering a sleep state.
-		This attribute is read-only.  If the device is not enabled to
-		wake up the system from sleep states, this attribute is not
-		present.
+		the device might have aborted system transition into a sleep
+		state in progress.  This attribute is read-only.  If the device
+		is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep states, this
+		attribute is not present.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_expire_count
+Date:		February 2012
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_expire_count attribute contains the
+		number of times a wakeup event associated with the device has
+		been reported with a timeout that expired.  This attribute is
+		read-only.  If the device is not enabled to wake up the system
+		from sleep states, this attribute is not present.
 
 What:		/sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active
 Date:		September 2010
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_active attribute contains either 1,
 		or 0, depending on whether or not a wakeup event associated with
@@ -119,7 +129,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_total_time_ms
 Date:		September 2010
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_total_time_ms attribute contains
 		the total time of processing wakeup events associated with the
@@ -129,7 +139,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_max_time_ms
 Date:		September 2010
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_max_time_ms attribute contains
 		the maximum time of processing a single wakeup event associated
@@ -139,7 +149,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_last_time_ms
 Date:		September 2010
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_last_time_ms attribute contains
 		the value of the monotonic clock corresponding to the time of
@@ -148,6 +158,17 @@ Description:
 		not enabled to wake up the system from sleep states, this
 		attribute is not present.
 
+What:		/sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_prevent_sleep_time_ms
+Date:		February 2012
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_prevent_sleep_time_ms attribute
+		contains the total time the device has been preventing
+		opportunistic transitions to sleep states from occurring.
+		This attribute is read-only.  If the device is not enabled to
+		wake up the system from sleep states, this attribute is not
+		present.
+
 What:		/sys/devices/.../power/autosuspend_delay_ms
 Date:		September 2010
 Contact:	Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
@@ -168,7 +189,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/devices/.../power/pm_qos_latency_us
 Date:		March 2012
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/devices/.../power/pm_qos_resume_latency_us attribute
 		contains the PM QoS resume latency limit for the given device,
@@ -183,3 +204,34 @@ Description:
 
 		This attribute has no effect on system-wide suspend/resume and
 		hibernation.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/.../power/pm_qos_no_power_off
+Date:		September 2012
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../power/pm_qos_no_power_off attribute
+		is used for manipulating the PM QoS "no power off" flag.  If
+		set, this flag indicates to the kernel that power should not
+		be removed entirely from the device.
+
+		Not all drivers support this attribute.  If it isn't supported,
+		it is not present.
+
+		This attribute has no effect on system-wide suspend/resume and
+		hibernation.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/.../power/pm_qos_remote_wakeup
+Date:		September 2012
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../power/pm_qos_remote_wakeup attribute
+		is used for manipulating the PM QoS "remote wakeup required"
+		flag.  If set, this flag indicates to the kernel that the
+		device is a source of user events that have to be signaled from
+		its low-power states.
+
+		Not all drivers support this attribute.  If it isn't supported,
+		it is not present.
+
+		This attribute has no effect on system-wide suspend/resume and
+		hibernation.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_D0 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_D0
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..73b77a6be196
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_D0
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/.../power_resources_D0/
+Date:		January 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../power_resources_D0/ directory is only
+		present for device objects representing ACPI device nodes that
+		use ACPI power resources for power management.
+
+		If present, it contains symbolic links to device directories
+		representing ACPI power resources that need to be turned on for
+		the given device node to be in ACPI power state D0.  The names
+		of the links are the same as the names of the directories they
+		point to.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_D1 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_D1
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..30c20703fb8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_D1
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/.../power_resources_D1/
+Date:		January 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../power_resources_D1/ directory is only
+		present for device objects representing ACPI device nodes that
+		use ACPI power resources for power management and support ACPI
+		power state D1.
+
+		If present, it contains symbolic links to device directories
+		representing ACPI power resources that need to be turned on for
+		the given device node to be in ACPI power state D1.  The names
+		of the links are the same as the names of the directories they
+		point to.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_D2 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_D2
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fd9d84b421e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_D2
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/.../power_resources_D2/
+Date:		January 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../power_resources_D2/ directory is only
+		present for device objects representing ACPI device nodes that
+		use ACPI power resources for power management and support ACPI
+		power state D2.
+
+		If present, it contains symbolic links to device directories
+		representing ACPI power resources that need to be turned on for
+		the given device node to be in ACPI power state D2.  The names
+		of the links are the same as the names of the directories they
+		point to.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_D3hot b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_D3hot
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3df32c20addf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_D3hot
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/.../power_resources_D3hot/
+Date:		January 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../power_resources_D3hot/ directory is only
+		present for device objects representing ACPI device nodes that
+		use ACPI power resources for power management and support ACPI
+		power state D3hot.
+
+		If present, it contains symbolic links to device directories
+		representing ACPI power resources that need to be turned on for
+		the given device node to be in ACPI power state D3hot.  The
+		names of the links are the same as the names of the directories
+		they point to.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_wakeup b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_wakeup
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e0588feeb6e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_resources_wakeup
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/.../power_resources_wakeup/
+Date:		April 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../power_resources_wakeup/ directory is only
+		present for device objects representing ACPI device nodes that
+		require ACPI power resources for wakeup signaling.
+
+		If present, it contains symbolic links to device directories
+		representing ACPI power resources that need to be turned on for
+		the given device node to be able to signal wakeup.  The names of
+		the links are the same as the names of the directories they
+		point to.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_state b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_state
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7ad9546748f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power_state
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/.../power_state
+Date:		January 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../power_state attribute is only present for
+		device objects representing ACPI device nodes that provide power
+		management methods.
+
+		If present, it contains a string representing the current ACPI
+		power state of the given device node.  Its possible values,
+		"D0", "D1", "D2", "D3hot", and "D3cold", reflect the power state
+		names defined by the ACPI specification (ACPI 4 and above).
+
+		If the device node uses shared ACPI power resources, this state
+		determines a list of power resources required not to be turned
+		off.  However, some power resources needed by the device node in
+		higher-power (lower-number) states may also be ON because of
+		some other devices using them at the moment.
+
+		This attribute is read-only.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-real_power_state b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-real_power_state
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8b3527c82a7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-real_power_state
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/.../real_power_state
+Date:		January 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../real_power_state attribute is only present
+		for device objects representing ACPI device nodes that provide
+		power management methods and use ACPI power resources for power
+		management.
+
+		If present, it contains a string representing the real ACPI
+		power state of the given device node as returned by the _PSC
+		control method or inferred from the configuration of power
+		resources.  Its possible values, "D0", "D1", "D2", "D3hot", and
+		"D3cold", reflect the power state names defined by the ACPI
+		specification (ACPI 4 and above).
+
+		In some situations the value of this attribute may be different
+		from the value of the /sys/devices/.../power_state attribute for
+		the same device object.  If that happens, some shared power
+		resources used by the device node are only ON because of some
+		other devices using them at the moment.
+
+		This attribute is read-only.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-resource_in_use b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-resource_in_use
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b4a3bc5922a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-resource_in_use
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/.../resource_in_use
+Date:		January 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices/.../resource_in_use attribute is only present
+		for device objects representing ACPI power resources.
+
+		If present, it contains a number (0 or 1) representing the
+		current status of the given power resource (0 means that the
+		resource is not in use and therefore it has been turned off).
+
+		This attribute is read-only.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-sun b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-sun
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..625ce4b63758
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-sun
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/.../sun
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Yasuaki Ishimatsu <isimatu.yasuaki@jp.fujitsu.com>
+Description:
+		The file contains a Slot-unique ID which provided by the _SUN
+		method in the ACPI namespace. The value is written in Advanced
+		Configuration and Power Interface Specification as follows:
+
+		"The _SUN value is required to be unique among the slots of
+		the same type. It is also recommended that this number match
+		the slot number printed on the physical slot whenever possible."
+
+		So reading the sysfs file, we can identify a physical position
+		of the slot in the system.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu
index e7be75b96e4b..468e4d48f884 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu
@@ -9,31 +9,6 @@ Description:
 
 		/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu#/
 
-What:		/sys/devices/system/cpu/sched_mc_power_savings
-		/sys/devices/system/cpu/sched_smt_power_savings
-Date:		June 2006
-Contact:	Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org>
-Description:	Discover and adjust the kernel's multi-core scheduler support.
-
-		Possible values are:
-
-		0 - No power saving load balance (default value)
-		1 - Fill one thread/core/package first for long running threads
-		2 - Also bias task wakeups to semi-idle cpu package for power
-		    savings
-
-		sched_mc_power_savings is dependent upon SCHED_MC, which is
-		itself architecture dependent.
-
-		sched_smt_power_savings is dependent upon SCHED_SMT, which
-		is itself architecture dependent.
-
-		The two files are independent of each other. It is possible
-		that one file may be present without the other.
-
-		Introduced by git commit 5c45bf27.
-
-
 What:		/sys/devices/system/cpu/kernel_max
 		/sys/devices/system/cpu/offline
 		/sys/devices/system/cpu/online
@@ -92,20 +67,6 @@ Description:	Discover NUMA node a CPU belongs to
 		/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu42/node2 -> ../../node/node2
 
 
-What:		/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu#/node
-Date:		October 2009
-Contact:	Linux memory management mailing list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
-Description:	Discover NUMA node a CPU belongs to
-
-		When CONFIG_NUMA is enabled, a symbolic link that points
-		to the corresponding NUMA node directory.
-
-		For example, the following symlink is created for cpu42
-		in NUMA node 2:
-
-		/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu42/node2 -> ../../node/node2
-
-
 What:		/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu#/topology/core_id
 		/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu#/topology/core_siblings
 		/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu#/topology/core_siblings_list
@@ -183,6 +144,21 @@ Description:	Discover and change clock speed of CPUs
 		to learn how to control the knobs.
 
 
+What:		/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu#/cpufreq/freqdomain_cpus
+Date:		June 2013
+Contact:	cpufreq@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Discover CPUs in the same CPU frequency coordination domain
+
+		freqdomain_cpus is the list of CPUs (online+offline) that share
+		the same clock/freq domain (possibly at the hardware level).
+		That information may be hidden from the cpufreq core and the
+		value of related_cpus may be different from freqdomain_cpus. This
+		attribute is useful for user space DVFS controllers to get better
+		power/performance results for platforms using acpi-cpufreq.
+
+		This file is only present if the acpi-cpufreq driver is in use.
+
+
 What:		/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu*/cache/index3/cache_disable_{0,1}
 Date:		August 2008
 KernelVersion:	2.6.27
@@ -201,3 +177,26 @@ Description:	Disable L3 cache indices
 		All AMD processors with L3 caches provide this functionality.
 		For details, see BKDGs at
 		http://developer.amd.com/documentation/guides/Pages/default.aspx
+
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpufreq/boost
+Date:		August 2012
+Contact:	Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org>
+Description:	Processor frequency boosting control
+
+		This switch controls the boost setting for the whole system.
+		Boosting allows the CPU and the firmware to run at a frequency
+		beyound it's nominal limit.
+		More details can be found in Documentation/cpu-freq/boost.txt
+
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu#/crash_notes
+		/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu#/crash_notes_size
+Date:		April 2013
+Contact:	kexec@lists.infradead.org
+Description:	address and size of the percpu note.
+
+		crash_notes: the physical address of the memory that holds the
+		note of cpu#.
+
+		crash_notes_size: size of the note of cpu#.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-xen_cpu b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-xen_cpu
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9ca02fb2d498
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-xen_cpu
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/system/xen_cpu/
+Date:		May 2012
+Contact:	Liu, Jinsong <jinsong.liu@intel.com>
+Description:
+		A collection of global/individual Xen physical cpu attributes
+
+		Individual physical cpu attributes are contained in
+		subdirectories named by the Xen's logical cpu number, e.g.:
+		/sys/devices/system/xen_cpu/xen_cpu#/
+
+
+What:		/sys/devices/system/xen_cpu/xen_cpu#/online
+Date:		May 2012
+Contact:	Liu, Jinsong <jinsong.liu@intel.com>
+Description:
+		Interface to online/offline Xen physical cpus
+
+		When running under Xen platform, it provide user interface
+		to online/offline physical cpus, except cpu0 due to several
+		logic restrictions and assumptions.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-lenovo-tpkbd b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-lenovo-tpkbd
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..57b92cbdceae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-lenovo-tpkbd
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/press_to_select
+Date:		July 2011
+Contact:	linux-input@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This controls if mouse clicks should be generated if the trackpoint is quickly pressed. How fast this press has to be
+		is being controlled by press_speed.
+		Values are 0 or 1.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/dragging
+Date:		July 2011
+Contact:	linux-input@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	If this setting is enabled, it is possible to do dragging by pressing the trackpoint. This requires press_to_select to be enabled.
+		Values are 0 or 1.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/release_to_select
+Date:		July 2011
+Contact:	linux-input@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	For details regarding this setting please refer to http://www.pc.ibm.com/ww/healthycomputing/trkpntb.html
+		Values are 0 or 1.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/select_right
+Date:		July 2011
+Contact:	linux-input@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This setting controls if the mouse click events generated by pressing the trackpoint (if press_to_select is enabled) generate
+		a left or right mouse button click.
+		Values are 0 or 1.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/sensitivity
+Date:		July 2011
+Contact:	linux-input@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This file contains the trackpoint sensitivity.
+		Values are decimal integers from 1 (lowest sensitivity) to 255 (highest sensitivity).
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/press_speed
+Date:		July 2011
+Contact:	linux-input@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This setting controls how fast the trackpoint needs to be pressed to generate a mouse click if press_to_select is enabled.
+		Values are decimal integers from 1 (slowest) to 255 (fastest).
+
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-isku b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-isku
index 189dc43891bf..c601d0f2ac46 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-isku
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-isku
@@ -101,7 +101,8 @@ Date:		June 2011
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	When written, this file lets one set the backlight intensity for
 		a specific profile. Profile number is included in written data.
-		The data has to be 10 bytes long.
+		The data has to be 10 bytes long for Isku, IskuFX needs	16 bytes
+		of data.
 		Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
 		which profile to read.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
@@ -117,6 +118,14 @@ Description:	When written, this file lets one store macros with max 500
 		which profile and key to read.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
 
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/isku/roccatisku<minor>/reset
+Date:		November 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When written, this file lets one reset the device.
+		The data has to be 3 bytes long.
+		This file is writeonly.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/isku/roccatisku<minor>/control
 Date:		June 2011
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
@@ -133,3 +142,12 @@ Description:	When written, this file lets one trigger easyshift functionality
 		The data has to be 16 bytes long.
 		This file is writeonly.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/isku/roccatisku<minor>/talkfx
+Date:		February 2013
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When written, this file lets one trigger temporary color schemes
+		from the host.
+		The data has to be 16 bytes long.
+		This file is writeonly.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus
index 65e6e5dd67e8..7bd776f9c3c7 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus
@@ -9,15 +9,12 @@ Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
 		and the mouse activates this profile immediately.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/firmware_version
-Date:		October 2010
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/info
+Date:		November 2012
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
-		firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases
-		further usage in other programs. To receive the real version
-		number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the
-		left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21
-		This file is readonly.
+Description:	When read, this file returns general data like firmware version.
+		When written, the device can be reset.
+		The data is 8 bytes long.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
 
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/macro
@@ -42,18 +39,8 @@ Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
 		The mouse will reject invalid data.
 		Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
 		contained in the data.
-		This file is writeonly.
-Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
-Date:		August 2010
-Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
-		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
-		profile_buttons holds information about button layout.
-		When read, these files return the respective profile buttons.
-		The returned data is 77 bytes in size.
-		This file is readonly.
+		Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
+		which profile to read.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
 
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_settings
@@ -68,19 +55,8 @@ Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
 		The mouse will reject invalid data.
 		Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
 		contained in the data.
-		This file is writeonly.
-Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
-Date:		August 2010
-Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
-		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
-		profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity
-		and light effects.
-		When read, these files return the respective profile settings.
-		The returned data is 43 bytes in size.
-		This file is readonly.
+		Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
+		which profile to read.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
 
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/sensor
@@ -104,9 +80,9 @@ What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-
 Date:		October 2010
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
 Description:	When written a calibration process for the tracking control unit
-		can be initiated/cancelled.
-		The data has to be 3 bytes long.
-		This file is writeonly.
+		can be initiated/cancelled. Also lets one read/write sensor
+		registers.
+		The data has to be 4 bytes long.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
 
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu_image
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-konepure b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-konepure
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..41a9b7fbfc79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-konepure
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/konepure/roccatkonepure<minor>/actual_profile
+Date:		December 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. actual_profile holds number of actual profile.
+		This value is persistent, so its value determines the profile
+		that's active when the mouse is powered on next time.
+		When written, the mouse activates the set profile immediately.
+		The data has to be 3 bytes long.
+		The mouse will reject invalid data.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/konepure/roccatkonepure<minor>/control
+Date:		December 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When written, this file lets one select which data from which
+		profile will be	read next. The data has to be 3 bytes long.
+		This file is writeonly.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/konepure/roccatkonepure<minor>/info
+Date:		December 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns general data like firmware version.
+		When written, the device can be reset.
+		The data is 6 bytes long.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/konepure/roccatkonepure<minor>/macro
+Date:		December 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store a macro with max 500 key/button strokes
+		internally.
+		When written, this file lets one set the sequence for a specific
+		button for a specific profile. Button and profile numbers are
+		included in written data. The data has to be 2082 bytes long.
+		This file is writeonly.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/konepure/roccatkonepure<minor>/profile_buttons
+Date:		December 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
+		profile_buttons holds information about button layout.
+		When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
+		buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 59 bytes long.
+		The mouse will reject invalid data.
+		Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
+		contained in the data.
+		Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
+		which profile to read.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/konepure/roccatkonepure<minor>/profile_settings
+Date:		December 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
+		profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity
+		and light effects.
+		When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
+		settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 31 bytes long.
+		The mouse will reject invalid data.
+		Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
+		contained in the data.
+		Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
+		which profile to read.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/konepure/roccatkonepure<minor>/sensor
+Date:		December 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse has a tracking- and a distance-control-unit. These
+		can be activated/deactivated and the lift-off distance can be
+		set. The data has to be 6 bytes long.
+		This file is writeonly.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/konepure/roccatkonepure<minor>/talk
+Date:		December 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	Used to active some easy* functions of the mouse from outside.
+		The data has to be 16 bytes long.
+		This file is writeonly.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/konepure/roccatkonepure<minor>/tcu
+Date:		December 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When written a calibration process for the tracking control unit
+		can be initiated/cancelled. Also lets one read/write sensor
+		registers.
+		The data has to be 4 bytes long.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/konepure/roccatkonepure<minor>/tcu_image
+Date:		December 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read the mouse returns a 30x30 pixel image of the
+		sampled underground. This works only in the course of a
+		calibration process initiated with tcu.
+		The returned data is 1028 bytes in size.
+		This file is readonly.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus
index 20f937c9d84f..a10404f15a54 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus
@@ -1,12 +1,3 @@
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_cpi
-Date:		January 2011
-Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-4.
-		When read, this attribute returns the number of the active
-		cpi level.
-		This file is readonly.
-Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
-
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_profile
 Date:		January 2011
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
@@ -18,33 +9,12 @@ Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
 		active when the mouse is powered on.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_sensitivity_x
-Date:		January 2011
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/info
+Date:		November 2012
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-10.
-		When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual
-		sensitivity in x direction.
-		This file is readonly.
-Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_sensitivity_y
-Date:		January 2011
-Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-10.
-		When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual
-		sensitivity in y direction.
-		This file is readonly.
-Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/firmware_version
-Date:		January 2011
-Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
-		firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases
-		further usage in other programs. To receive the real version
-		number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the
-		left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21
-		This file is readonly.
+Description:	When read, this file returns general data like firmware version.
+		When written, the device can be reset.
+		The data is 6 bytes long.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
 
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile_buttons
@@ -58,18 +28,8 @@ Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
 		The mouse will reject invalid data.
 		Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
 		contained in the data.
-		This file is writeonly.
-Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
-Date:		January 2011
-Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
-		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
-		profile_buttons holds information about button layout.
-		When read, these files return the respective profile buttons.
-		The returned data is 23 bytes in size.
-		This file is readonly.
+		Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
+		which profile to read.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
 
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile_settings
@@ -84,17 +44,6 @@ Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
 		The mouse will reject invalid data.
 		Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
 		contained in the data.
-		This file is writeonly.
-Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
-Date:		January 2011
-Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
-		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
-		profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity
-		and light effects.
-		When read, these files return the respective profile settings.
-		The returned data is 16 bytes in size.
-		This file is readonly.
+		Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
+		which profile to read.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-lua b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-lua
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..31c6c4c8ba2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-lua
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/control
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When written, cpi, button and light settings can be configured.
+		When read, actual cpi setting and sensor data are returned.
+		The data has to be 8 bytes long.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra
index 3f8de50e4ff1..9fa9de30d14b 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra
@@ -1,37 +1,9 @@
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_cpi
-Date:		August 2010
-Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	It is possible to switch the cpi setting of the mouse with the
-		press of a button.
-		When read, this file returns the raw number of the actual cpi
-		setting reported by the mouse. This number has to be further
-		processed to receive the real dpi value.
-
-		VALUE DPI
-		1     400
-		2     800
-		4     1600
-
-		This file is readonly.
-Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_profile
-Date:		August 2010
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/info
+Date:		November 2012
 Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in
-		range 0-4.
-		This file is readonly.
-Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/firmware_version
-Date:		August 2010
-Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
-		firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases
-		further usage in other programs. To receive the real version
-		number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the
-		left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38
-		This file is readonly.
+Description:	When read, this file returns general data like firmware version.
+		When written, the device can be reset.
+		The data is 6 bytes long.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
 
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_settings
@@ -46,19 +18,8 @@ Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
 		The mouse will reject invalid data.
 		Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
 		contained in the data.
-		This file is writeonly.
-Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
-Date:		August 2010
-Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
-		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
-		profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity
-		and light effects.
-		When read, these files return the respective profile settings.
-		The returned data is 13 bytes in size.
-		This file is readonly.
+		Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
+		which profile to read.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
 
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_buttons
@@ -72,27 +33,8 @@ Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
 		The mouse will reject invalid data.
 		Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
 		contained in the data.
-		This file is writeonly.
-Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
-Date:		August 2010
-Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
-		press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
-		profile_buttons holds information about button layout.
-		When read, these files return the respective profile buttons.
-		The returned data is 19 bytes in size.
-		This file is readonly.
-Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
-
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/startup_profile
-Date:		August 2010
-Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
-Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
-                When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile
-                that's active when the mouse is powered on.
-		This file is readonly.
+		Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
+		which profile to read.
 Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
 
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/settings
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-savu b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-savu
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f1e02a98bd9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-savu
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/savu/roccatsavu<minor>/buttons
+Date:		Mai 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split into general settings and
+		button settings. buttons holds informations about button layout.
+		When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
+		buttons to the mouse. The data has to be 47 bytes long.
+		The mouse will reject invalid data.
+		Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
+		contained in the data.
+		Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
+		which profile to read.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/savu/roccatsavu<minor>/control
+Date:		Mai 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When written, this file lets one select which data from which
+		profile will be	read next. The data has to be 3 bytes long.
+		This file is writeonly.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/savu/roccatsavu<minor>/general
+Date:		Mai 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. A profile is split into general settings and
+		button settings. profile holds informations like resolution, sensitivity
+		and light effects.
+		When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
+		settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 43 bytes long.
+		The mouse will reject invalid data.
+		Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
+		contained in the data.
+		This file is writeonly.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/savu/roccatsavu<minor>/info
+Date:		Mai 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns general data like firmware version.
+		When written, the device can be reset.
+		The data is 8 bytes long.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/savu/roccatsavu<minor>/macro
+Date:		Mai 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When written, this file lets one store macros with max 500
+		keystrokes for a specific button for a specific profile.
+		Button and profile numbers are included in written data.
+		The data has to be 2083 bytes long.
+		Before reading this file, control has to be written to select
+		which profile and key to read.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/savu/roccatsavu<minor>/profile
+Date:		Mai 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+		press of a button. profile holds number of actual profile.
+		This value is persistent, so its value determines the profile
+		that's active when the mouse is powered on next time.
+		When written, the mouse activates the set profile immediately.
+		The data has to be 3 bytes long.
+		The mouse will reject invalid data.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/savu/roccatsavu<minor>/sensor
+Date:		July 2012
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse has a Avago ADNS-3090 sensor.
+		This file allows reading and writing of the mouse sensors registers.
+		The data has to be 4 bytes long.
+Users:		http://roccat.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-srws1 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-srws1
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d0eba70c7d40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-srws1
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM1
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM2
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM3
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM4
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM5
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM6
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM7
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM8
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM9
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM10
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM11
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM12
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM13
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM14
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPM15
+What:		/sys/class/leds/SRWS1::<serial>::RPMALL
+Date:		Jan 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.9
+Contact:	Simon Wood <simon@mungewell.org>
+Description:	Provides a control for turning on/off the LEDs which form
+		an RPM meter on the front of the controller
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-thingm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-thingm
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..abcffeedd20a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-thingm
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+What:		/sys/class/leds/blink1::<serial>/rgb
+Date:		January 2013
+Contact:	Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com>
+Description:	The ThingM blink1 is an USB RGB LED. The color notation is
+		3-byte hexadecimal. Read this attribute to get the last set
+		color. Write the 24-bit hexadecimal color to change the current
+		LED color. The default color is full white (0xFFFFFF).
+		For instance, set the color to green with: echo 00FF00 > rgb
+
+What:		/sys/class/leds/blink1::<serial>/fade
+Date:		January 2013
+Contact:	Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com>
+Description:	This attribute allows to set a fade time in milliseconds for
+		the next color change. Read the attribute to know the current
+		fade time. The default value is set to 0 (no fade time). For
+		instance, set a fade time of 2 seconds with: echo 2000 > fade
+
+What:		/sys/class/leds/blink1::<serial>/play
+Date:		January 2013
+Contact:	Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com>
+Description:	This attribute is used to play/pause the light patterns. Write 1
+		to start playing, 0 to stop. Reading this attribute returns the
+		current playing status.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-wiimote b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-wiimote
index 3d98009f447a..ed5dd567d397 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-wiimote
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-wiimote
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Description:	Make it possible to set/get current led state. Reading from it
 What:		/sys/bus/hid/drivers/wiimote/<dev>/extension
 Date:		August 2011
 KernelVersion:	3.2
-Contact:	David Herrmann <dh.herrmann@googlemail.com>
+Contact:	David Herrmann <dh.herrmann@gmail.com>
 Description:	This file contains the currently connected and initialized
 		extensions. It can be one of: none, motionp, nunchuck, classic,
 		motionp+nunchuck, motionp+classic
@@ -20,3 +20,40 @@ Description:	This file contains the currently connected and initialized
 		the official Nintendo Nunchuck extension and classic is the
 		Nintendo Classic Controller extension. The motionp extension can
 		be combined with the other two.
+		Starting with kernel-version 3.11 Motion Plus hotplugging is
+		supported and if detected, it's no longer reported as static
+		extension. You will get uevent notifications for the motion-plus
+		device then.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/hid/drivers/wiimote/<dev>/devtype
+Date:		May 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	David Herrmann <dh.herrmann@gmail.com>
+Description:	While a device is initialized by the wiimote driver, we perform
+		a device detection and signal a "change" uevent after it is
+		done. This file shows the detected device type. "pending" means
+		that the detection is still ongoing, "unknown" means, that the
+		device couldn't be detected or loaded. "generic" means, that the
+		device couldn't be detected but supports basic Wii Remote
+		features and can be used.
+		Other strings for each device-type are available and may be
+		added if new device-specific detections are added.
+		Currently supported are:
+			gen10: First Wii Remote generation
+			gen20: Second Wii Remote Plus generation (builtin MP)
+			balanceboard: Wii Balance Board
+
+What:		/sys/bus/hid/drivers/wiimote/<dev>/bboard_calib
+Date:		May 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	David Herrmann <dh.herrmann@gmail.com>
+Description:	This attribute is only provided if the device was detected as a
+		balance board. It provides a single line with 3 calibration
+		values for all 4 sensors. The values are separated by colons and
+		are each 2 bytes long (encoded as 4 digit hexadecimal value).
+		First, 0kg values for all 4 sensors are written, followed by the
+		17kg values for all 4 sensors and last the 34kg values for all 4
+		sensors.
+		Calibration data is already applied by the kernel to all input
+		values but may be used by user-space to perform other
+		transformations.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-intel-rapid-start b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-intel-rapid-start
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5a7d2e217d40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-intel-rapid-start
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/acpi/intel-rapid-start/wakeup_events
+Date:		July 2, 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	Matthew Garrett <mjg59@srcf.ucam.org>
+Description:	An integer representing a set of wakeup events as follows:
+		1: Wake to enter hibernation when the wakeup timer expires
+		2: Wake to enter hibernation when the battery reaches a
+		critical level
+
+		These values are ORed together. For example, a value of 3
+		indicates that the system will wake to enter hibernation when
+		either the wakeup timer expires or the battery reaches a
+		critical level.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/acpi/intel-rapid-start/wakeup_time
+Date:		July 2, 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.11
+Contact:	Matthew Garrett <mjg59@srcf.ucam.org>
+Description:	An integer representing the length of time the system will
+		remain asleep before waking up to enter hibernation.
+		This value is in minutes.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-ppi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-ppi
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7d1435bc976c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-ppi
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/
+Date:		August 2012
+Kernel Version:	3.6
+Contact:	xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
+Description:
+		This folder includes the attributes related with PPI (Physical
+		Presence Interface). Only if TPM is supported by BIOS, this
+		folder makes sense. The folder path can be got by command
+		'find /sys/ -name 'pcrs''. For the detail information of PPI,
+		please refer to the PPI specification from
+		http://www.trustedcomputinggroup.org/
+
+What:		/sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/version
+Date:		August 2012
+Contact:	xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
+Description:
+		This attribute shows the version of the PPI supported by the
+		platform.
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/request
+Date:		August 2012
+Contact:	xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
+Description:
+		This attribute shows the request for an operation to be
+		executed in the pre-OS environment. It is the only input from
+		the OS to the pre-OS environment. The request should be an
+		integer value range from 1 to 160, and 0 means no request.
+		This file can be read and written.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/pnp0/00:<bus-num>/ppi/response
+Date:		August 2012
+Contact:	xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
+Description:
+		This attribute shows the response to the most recent operation
+		request it acted upon. The format is "<request> <response num>
+		: <response description>".
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/transition_action
+Date:		August 2012
+Contact:	xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
+Description:
+		This attribute shows the platform-specific action that should
+		take place in order to transition to the BIOS for execution of
+		a requested operation. The format is "<action num>: <action
+		description>".
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/tcg_operations
+Date:		August 2012
+Contact:	xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
+Description:
+		This attribute shows whether it is allowed to request an
+		operation to be executed in the pre-OS environment by the BIOS
+		for the requests defined by TCG, i.e. requests from 1 to 22.
+		The format is "<request> <status num>: <status description>".
+		This attribute is only supported by PPI version 1.2+.
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/pnp0/<bus-num>/ppi/vs_operations
+Date:		August 2012
+Contact:	xiaoyan.zhang@intel.com
+Description:
+		This attribute shows whether it is allowed to request an
+		operation to be executed in the pre-OS environment by the BIOS
+		for the verdor specific requests, i.e. requests from 128 to
+		255. The format is same with tcg_operations. This attribute
+		is also only supported by PPI version 1.2+.
+		This file is readonly.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-samsung-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-samsung-laptop
index e82e7c2b8f80..678819a3f8bf 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-samsung-laptop
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-samsung-laptop
@@ -17,3 +17,21 @@ Description:	Some Samsung laptops have different "performance levels"
 		Specifically, not all support the "overclock" option,
 		and it's still unknown if this value even changes
 		anything, other than making the user feel a bit better.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/samsung/battery_life_extender
+Date:		December 1, 2011
+KernelVersion:	3.3
+Contact:	Corentin Chary <corentin.chary@gmail.com>
+Description:	Max battery charge level can be modified, battery cycle
+		life can be extended by reducing the max battery charge
+		level.
+		0 means normal battery mode (100% charge)
+		1 means battery life extender mode (80% charge)
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/samsung/usb_charge
+Date:		December 1, 2011
+KernelVersion:	3.3
+Contact:	Corentin Chary <corentin.chary@gmail.com>
+Description:	Use your USB ports to charge devices, even
+		when your laptop is powered off.
+		1 means enabled, 0 means disabled.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-wacom b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-wacom
index 0130d6683c14..7fc781048b79 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-wacom
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-wacom
@@ -1,3 +1,16 @@
+WWhat:		/sys/class/hidraw/hidraw*/device/oled*_img
+Date:		June 2012
+Contact:	linux-bluetooth@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		The /sys/class/hidraw/hidraw*/device/oled*_img files control
+		OLED mocro displays on Intuos4 Wireless tablet. Accepted image
+		has to contain 256 bytes (64x32 px 1 bit colour). The format
+		is the same as PBM image 62x32px without header (64 bits per
+		horizontal line, 32 lines). An example of setting OLED No. 0:
+		dd bs=256 count=1 if=img_file of=[path to oled0_img]/oled0_img
+		The attribute is read only and no local copy of the image is
+		stored.
+
 What:		/sys/class/hidraw/hidraw*/device/speed
 Date:		April 2010
 Kernel Version:	2.6.35
@@ -9,15 +22,24 @@ Description:
 		or 0 otherwise. Writing to this file one of these values
 		switches reporting speed.
 
+What:		/sys/class/leds/0005\:056A\:00BD.0001\:selector\:*/
+Date:		May 2012
+Kernel Version:	3.5
+Contact:	linux-bluetooth@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		LED selector for Intuos4 WL. There are 4 leds, but only one LED
+		can be lit at a time. Max brightness is 127.
+
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<cfg>.<intf>/wacom_led/led
 Date:		August 2011
 Contact:	linux-input@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
 		Attribute group for control of the status LEDs and the OLEDs.
 		This attribute group is only available for Intuos 4 M, L,
-		and XL (with LEDs and OLEDs) and Cintiq 21UX2 and Cintiq 24HD
-		(LEDs only). Therefore its presence implicitly signifies the
-		presence of said LEDs and OLEDs on the tablet device.
+		and XL (with LEDs and OLEDs), Intuos 5 (LEDs only), and Cintiq
+		21UX2 and Cintiq 24HD (LEDs only). Therefore its presence
+		implicitly signifies the presence of said LEDs and OLEDs on the
+		tablet device.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<cfg>.<intf>/wacom_led/status0_luminance
 Date:		August 2011
@@ -40,10 +62,10 @@ What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<cfg>.<intf>/wacom_led/status_led0
 Date:		August 2011
 Contact:	linux-input@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
-		Writing to this file sets which one of the four (for Intuos 4)
-		or of the right four (for Cintiq 21UX2 and Cintiq 24HD) status
-		LEDs is active (0..3). The other three LEDs on the same side are
-		always inactive.
+		Writing to this file sets which one of the four (for Intuos 4
+		and Intuos 5) or of the right four (for Cintiq 21UX2 and Cintiq
+		24HD) status LEDs is active (0..3). The other three LEDs on the
+		same side are always inactive.
 
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<cfg>.<intf>/wacom_led/status_led1_select
 Date:		September 2011
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-xen-blkback b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-xen-blkback
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8bb43b66eb55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-xen-blkback
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+What:           /sys/module/xen_blkback/parameters/max_buffer_pages
+Date:           March 2013
+KernelVersion:  3.11
+Contact:        Roger Pau Monné <roger.pau@citrix.com>
+Description:
+                Maximum number of free pages to keep in each block
+                backend buffer.
+
+What:           /sys/module/xen_blkback/parameters/max_persistent_grants
+Date:           March 2013
+KernelVersion:  3.11
+Contact:        Roger Pau Monné <roger.pau@citrix.com>
+Description:
+                Maximum number of grants to map persistently in
+                blkback. If the frontend tries to use more than
+                max_persistent_grants, the LRU kicks in and starts
+                removing 5% of max_persistent_grants every 100ms.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-xen-blkfront b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-xen-blkfront
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c0a6cb7eb314
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-xen-blkfront
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+What:           /sys/module/xen_blkfront/parameters/max
+Date:           June 2013
+KernelVersion:  3.11
+Contact:        Konrad Rzeszutek Wilk <konrad.wilk@oracle.com>
+Description:
+                Maximum number of segments that the frontend will negotiate
+                with the backend for indirect descriptors. The default value
+                is 32 - higher value means more potential throughput but more
+                memory usage. The backend picks the minimum of the frontend
+                and its default backend value.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-acpi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-acpi
index 4f9ba3c2fca7..b4436cca97a8 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-acpi
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-acpi
@@ -1,3 +1,59 @@
+What:		/sys/firmware/acpi/bgrt/
+Date:		January 2012
+Contact:	Matthew Garrett <mjg@redhat.com>
+Description:
+		The BGRT is an ACPI 5.0 feature that allows the OS
+		to obtain a copy of the firmware boot splash and
+		some associated metadata. This is intended to be used
+		by boot splash applications in order to interact with
+		the firmware boot splash in order to avoid jarring
+		transitions.
+
+		image: The image bitmap. Currently a 32-bit BMP.
+		status: 1 if the image is valid, 0 if firmware invalidated it.
+		type: 0 indicates image is in BMP format.
+		version: The version of the BGRT. Currently 1.
+		xoffset: The number of pixels between the left of the screen
+			 and the left edge of the image.
+		yoffset: The number of pixels between the top of the screen
+			 and the top edge of the image.
+
+What:		/sys/firmware/acpi/hotplug/
+Date:		February 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		There are separate hotplug profiles for different classes of
+		devices supported by ACPI, such as containers, memory modules,
+		processors, PCI root bridges etc.  A hotplug profile for a given
+		class of devices is a collection of settings defining the way
+		that class of devices will be handled by the ACPI core hotplug
+		code.  Those profiles are represented in sysfs as subdirectories
+		of /sys/firmware/acpi/hotplug/.
+
+		The following setting is available to user space for each
+		hotplug profile:
+
+		enabled: If set, the ACPI core will handle notifications of
+			hotplug events associated with the given class of
+			devices and will allow those devices to be ejected with
+			the help of the _EJ0 control method.  Unsetting it
+			effectively disables hotplug for the correspoinding
+			class of devices.
+
+		The value of the above attribute is an integer number: 1 (set)
+		or 0 (unset).  Attempts to write any other values to it will
+		cause -EINVAL to be returned.
+
+What:		/sys/firmware/acpi/hotplug/force_remove
+Date:		May 2013
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+Description:
+		The number in this file (0 or 1) determines whether (1) or not
+		(0) the ACPI subsystem will allow devices to be hot-removed even
+		if they cannot be put offline gracefully (from the kernel's
+		viewpoint).  That number can be changed by writing a boolean
+		value to this file.
+
 What:		/sys/firmware/acpi/interrupts/
 Date:		February 2008
 Contact:	Len Brown <lenb@kernel.org>
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4
index f22ac0872ae8..c631253cf85c 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4
@@ -96,3 +96,16 @@ Contact:	"Theodore Ts'o" <tytso@mit.edu>
 Description:
 		The maximum number of megabytes the writeback code will
 		try to write out before move on to another inode.
+
+What:		/sys/fs/ext4/<disk>/extent_max_zeroout_kb
+Date:		August 2012
+Contact:	"Theodore Ts'o" <tytso@mit.edu>
+Description:
+		The maximum number of kilobytes which will be zeroed
+		out in preference to creating a new uninitialized
+		extent when manipulating an inode's extent tree.  Note
+		that using a larger value will increase the
+		variability of time necessary to complete a random
+		write operation (since a 4k random write might turn
+		into a much larger write due to the zeroout
+		operation).
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..31942efcaf0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+What:		/sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/gc_max_sleep_time
+Date:		July 2013
+Contact:	"Namjae Jeon" <namjae.jeon@samsung.com>
+Description:
+		 Controls the maximun sleep time for gc_thread. Time
+		 is in milliseconds.
+
+What:		/sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/gc_min_sleep_time
+Date:		July 2013
+Contact:	"Namjae Jeon" <namjae.jeon@samsung.com>
+Description:
+		 Controls the minimum sleep time for gc_thread. Time
+		 is in milliseconds.
+
+What:		/sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/gc_no_gc_sleep_time
+Date:		July 2013
+Contact:	"Namjae Jeon" <namjae.jeon@samsung.com>
+Description:
+		 Controls the default sleep time for gc_thread. Time
+		 is in milliseconds.
+
+What:		/sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/gc_idle
+Date:		July 2013
+Contact:	"Namjae Jeon" <namjae.jeon@samsung.com>
+Description:
+		 Controls the victim selection policy for garbage collection.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-iommu_groups b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-iommu_groups
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9b31556cfdda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-iommu_groups
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+What:		/sys/kernel/iommu_groups/
+Date:		May 2012
+KernelVersion:	v3.5
+Contact:	Alex Williamson <alex.williamson@redhat.com>
+Description:	/sys/kernel/iommu_groups/ contains a number of sub-
+		directories, each representing an IOMMU group.  The
+		name of the sub-directory matches the iommu_group_id()
+		for the group, which is an integer value.  Within each
+		subdirectory is another directory named "devices" with
+		links to the sysfs devices contained in this group.
+		The group directory also optionally contains a "name"
+		file if the IOMMU driver has chosen to register a more
+		common name for the group.
+Users:
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-cleancache b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-cleancache
deleted file mode 100644
index 662ae646ea12..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-cleancache
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-What:		/sys/kernel/mm/cleancache/
-Date:		April 2011
-Contact:	Dan Magenheimer <dan.magenheimer@oracle.com>
-Description:
-		/sys/kernel/mm/cleancache/ contains a number of files which
-		record a count of various cleancache operations
-		(sum across all filesystems):
-			succ_gets
-			failed_gets
-			puts
-			flushes
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-ksm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-ksm
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..73e653ee2481
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-ksm
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+What:		/sys/kernel/mm/ksm
+Date:		September 2009
+KernelVersion:	2.6.32
+Contact:	Linux memory management mailing list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:	Interface for Kernel Samepage Merging (KSM)
+
+What:		/sys/kernel/mm/ksm/full_scans
+What:		/sys/kernel/mm/ksm/pages_shared
+What:		/sys/kernel/mm/ksm/pages_sharing
+What:		/sys/kernel/mm/ksm/pages_to_scan
+What:		/sys/kernel/mm/ksm/pages_unshared
+What:		/sys/kernel/mm/ksm/pages_volatile
+What:		/sys/kernel/mm/ksm/run
+What:		/sys/kernel/mm/ksm/sleep_millisecs
+Date:		September 2009
+Contact:	Linux memory management mailing list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:	Kernel Samepage Merging daemon sysfs interface
+
+		full_scans: how many times all mergeable areas have been
+		scanned.
+
+		pages_shared: how many shared pages are being used.
+
+		pages_sharing: how many more sites are sharing them i.e. how
+		much saved.
+
+		pages_to_scan: how many present pages to scan before ksmd goes
+		to sleep.
+
+		pages_unshared: how many pages unique but repeatedly checked
+		for merging.
+
+		pages_volatile: how many pages changing too fast to be placed
+		in a tree.
+
+		run: write 0 to disable ksm, read 0 while ksm is disabled.
+			write 1 to run ksm, read 1 while ksm is running.
+			write 2 to disable ksm and unmerge all its pages.
+
+		sleep_millisecs: how many milliseconds ksm should sleep between
+		scans.
+
+		See Documentation/vm/ksm.txt for more information.
+
+What:		/sys/kernel/mm/ksm/merge_across_nodes
+Date:		January 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.9
+Contact:	Linux memory management mailing list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:	Control merging pages across different NUMA nodes.
+
+		When it is set to 0 only pages from the same node are merged,
+		otherwise pages from all nodes can be merged together (default).
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-wmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-wmi
index 2e7df91620de..019e1e29370e 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-wmi
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-wmi
@@ -29,3 +29,10 @@ KernelVersion:	2.6.39
 Contact:	"Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net>
 Description:
 		Control the card touchpad. 1 means on, 0 means off.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/<platform>/lid_resume
+Date:		May 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.5
+Contact:	"AceLan Kao" <acelan.kao@canonical.com>
+Description:
+		Resume on lid open. 1 means on, 0 means off.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop
index 814b01354c41..b31e782bd985 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop
@@ -5,4 +5,15 @@ Contact:	"Ike Panhc <ike.pan@canonical.com>"
 Description:
 		Control the power of camera module. 1 means on, 0 means off.
 
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/ideapad/fan_mode
+Date:		June 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.6
+Contact:	"Maxim Mikityanskiy <maxtram95@gmail.com>"
+Description:
+		Change fan mode
+		There are four available modes:
+			* 0 -> Super Silent Mode
+			* 1 -> Standard Mode
+			* 2 -> Dust Cleaning
+			* 4 -> Efficient Thermal Dissipation Mode
 
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-msi-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-msi-laptop
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..307a247ba1ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-msi-laptop
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/msi-laptop-pf/lcd_level
+Date:		Oct 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.19
+Contact:	"Lennart Poettering <mzxreary@0pointer.de>"
+Description:
+		Screen brightness: contains a single integer in the range 0..8.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/msi-laptop-pf/auto_brightness
+Date:		Oct 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.19
+Contact:	"Lennart Poettering <mzxreary@0pointer.de>"
+Description:
+		Enable automatic brightness control: contains either 0 or 1. If
+		set to 1 the hardware adjusts the screen brightness
+		automatically when the power cord is plugged/unplugged.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/msi-laptop-pf/wlan
+Date:		Oct 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.19
+Contact:	"Lennart Poettering <mzxreary@0pointer.de>"
+Description:
+		WLAN subsystem enabled: contains either 0 or 1.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/msi-laptop-pf/bluetooth
+Date:		Oct 2006
+KernelVersion:	2.6.19
+Contact:	"Lennart Poettering <mzxreary@0pointer.de>"
+Description:
+		Bluetooth subsystem enabled: contains either 0 or 1. Please
+		note that this file is constantly 0 if no Bluetooth hardware is
+		available.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/msi-laptop-pf/touchpad
+Date:		Nov 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.8
+Contact:	"Maxim Mikityanskiy <maxtram95@gmail.com>"
+Description:
+		Contains either 0 or 1 and indicates if touchpad is turned on.
+		Touchpad state can only be toggled by pressing Fn+F3.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/msi-laptop-pf/turbo_mode
+Date:		Nov 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.8
+Contact:	"Maxim Mikityanskiy <maxtram95@gmail.com>"
+Description:
+		Contains either 0 or 1 and indicates if turbo mode is turned
+		on. In turbo mode power LED is orange and processor is
+		overclocked. Turbo mode is available only if charging. It is
+		only possible to toggle turbo mode state by pressing Fn+F10,
+		and there is a few seconds cooldown between subsequent toggles.
+		If user presses Fn+F10 too frequent, turbo mode state is not
+		changed.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/msi-laptop-pf/eco_mode
+Date:		Nov 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.8
+Contact:	"Maxim Mikityanskiy <maxtram95@gmail.com>"
+Description:
+		Contains either 0 or 1 and indicates if ECO mode is turned on.
+		In ECO mode power LED is green and userspace should do some
+		powersaving actions. ECO mode is available only on battery
+		power. ECO mode can only be toggled by pressing Fn+F10.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/msi-laptop-pf/turbo_cooldown
+Date:		Nov 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.8
+Contact:	"Maxim Mikityanskiy <maxtram95@gmail.com>"
+Description:
+		Contains value in range 0..3:
+			* 0 -> Turbo mode is off
+			* 1 -> Turbo mode is on, cannot be turned off yet
+			* 2 -> Turbo mode is off, cannot be turned on yet
+			* 3 -> Turbo mode is on
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/msi-laptop-pf/auto_fan
+Date:		Nov 2012
+KernelVersion:	3.8
+Contact:	"Maxim Mikityanskiy <maxtram95@gmail.com>"
+Description:
+		Contains either 0 or 1 and indicates if fan speed is controlled
+		automatically (1) or fan runs at maximal speed (0). Can be
+		toggled in software.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ts5500 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ts5500
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c88375a537a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ts5500
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/ts5500/adc
+Date:		January 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.7
+Contact:	"Savoir-faire Linux Inc." <kernel@savoirfairelinux.com>
+Description:
+		Indicates the presence of an A/D Converter. If it is present,
+		it will display "1", otherwise "0".
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/ts5500/ereset
+Date:		January 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.7
+Contact:	"Savoir-faire Linux Inc." <kernel@savoirfairelinux.com>
+Description:
+		Indicates the presence of an external reset. If it is present,
+		it will display "1", otherwise "0".
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/ts5500/id
+Date:		January 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.7
+Contact:	"Savoir-faire Linux Inc." <kernel@savoirfairelinux.com>
+Description:
+		Product ID of the TS board. TS-5500 ID is 0x60.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/ts5500/jumpers
+Date:		January 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.7
+Contact:	"Savoir-faire Linux Inc." <kernel@savoirfairelinux.com>
+Description:
+		Bitfield showing the jumpers' state. If a jumper is present,
+		the corresponding bit is set. For instance, 0x0e means jumpers
+		2, 3 and 4 are set.
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/ts5500/rs485
+Date:		January 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.7
+Contact:	"Savoir-faire Linux Inc." <kernel@savoirfairelinux.com>
+Description:
+		Indicates the presence of the RS485 option. If it is present,
+		it will display "1", otherwise "0".
+
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/ts5500/sram
+Date:		January 2013
+KernelVersion:	3.7
+Contact:	"Savoir-faire Linux Inc." <kernel@savoirfairelinux.com>
+Description:
+		Indicates the presence of the SRAM option. If it is present,
+		it will display "1", otherwise "0".
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power
index b464d12761ba..205a73878441 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 What:		/sys/power/
 Date:		August 2006
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/power directory will contain files that will
 		provide a unified interface to the power management
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/power/state
 Date:		August 2006
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/power/state file controls the system power state.
 		Reading from this file returns what states are supported,
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/power/disk
 Date:		September 2006
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/power/disk file controls the operating mode of the
 		suspend-to-disk mechanism.  Reading from this file returns
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/power/image_size
 Date:		August 2006
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/power/image_size file controls the size of the image
 		created by the suspend-to-disk mechanism.  It can be written a
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/power/pm_trace
 Date:		August 2006
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/power/pm_trace file controls the code which saves the
 		last PM event point in the RTC across reboots, so that you can
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/power/pm_async
 Date:		January 2009
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/power/pm_async file controls the switch allowing the
 		user space to enable or disable asynchronous suspend and resume
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/power/wakeup_count
 Date:		July 2010
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/power/wakeup_count file allows user space to put the
 		system into a sleep state while taking into account the
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Description:
 
 What:		/sys/power/reserved_size
 Date:		May 2011
-Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
 Description:
 		The /sys/power/reserved_size file allows user space to control
 		the amount of memory reserved for allocations made by device
@@ -172,3 +172,75 @@ Description:
 
 		Reading from this file will display the current value, which is
 		set to 1 MB by default.
+
+What:		/sys/power/autosleep
+Date:		April 2012
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		The /sys/power/autosleep file can be written one of the strings
+		returned by reads from /sys/power/state.  If that happens, a
+		work item attempting to trigger a transition of the system to
+		the sleep state represented by that string is queued up.  This
+		attempt will only succeed if there are no active wakeup sources
+		in the system at that time.  After every execution, regardless
+		of whether or not the attempt to put the system to sleep has
+		succeeded, the work item requeues itself until user space
+		writes "off" to /sys/power/autosleep.
+
+		Reading from this file causes the last string successfully
+		written to it to be returned.
+
+What:		/sys/power/wake_lock
+Date:		February 2012
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		The /sys/power/wake_lock file allows user space to create
+		wakeup source objects and activate them on demand (if one of
+		those wakeup sources is active, reads from the
+		/sys/power/wakeup_count file block or return false).  When a
+		string without white space is written to /sys/power/wake_lock,
+		it will be assumed to represent a wakeup source name.  If there
+		is a wakeup source object with that name, it will be activated
+		(unless active already).  Otherwise, a new wakeup source object
+		will be registered, assigned the given name and activated.
+		If a string written to /sys/power/wake_lock contains white
+		space, the part of the string preceding the white space will be
+		regarded as a wakeup source name and handled as descrived above.
+		The other part of the string will be regarded as a timeout (in
+		nanoseconds) such that the wakeup source will be automatically
+		deactivated after it has expired.  The timeout, if present, is
+		set regardless of the current state of the wakeup source object
+		in question.
+
+		Reads from this file return a string consisting of the names of
+		wakeup sources created with the help of it that are active at
+		the moment, separated with spaces.
+
+
+What:		/sys/power/wake_unlock
+Date:		February 2012
+Contact:	Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
+Description:
+		The /sys/power/wake_unlock file allows user space to deactivate
+		wakeup sources created with the help of /sys/power/wake_lock.
+		When a string is written to /sys/power/wake_unlock, it will be
+		assumed to represent the name of a wakeup source to deactivate.
+		If a wakeup source object of that name exists and is active at
+		the moment, it will be deactivated.
+
+		Reads from this file return a string consisting of the names of
+		wakeup sources created with the help of /sys/power/wake_lock
+		that are inactive at the moment, separated with spaces.
+
+What:		/sys/power/pm_print_times
+Date:		May 2012
+Contact:	Sameer Nanda <snanda@chromium.org>
+Description:
+		The /sys/power/pm_print_times file allows user space to
+		control whether the time taken by devices to suspend and
+		resume is printed.  These prints are useful for hunting down
+		devices that take too long to suspend or resume.
+
+		Writing a "1" enables this printing while writing a "0"
+		disables it.  The default value is "0".  Reading from this file
+		will display the current value.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling
index b02d8b8c173a..8a8e466eb2c0 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
-What:		/sys/kernel/profile
+What:		/sys/kernel/profiling
 Date:		September 2008
 Contact:	Dave Hansen <dave@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
 Description:
-		/sys/kernel/profile is the runtime equivalent
+		/sys/kernel/profiling is the runtime equivalent
 		of the boot-time profile= option.
 
 		You can get the same effect running:
 
-			echo 2 > /sys/kernel/profile
+			echo 2 > /sys/kernel/profiling
 
 		as you would by issuing profile=2 on the boot
 		command line.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ptp b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ptp
index d40d2b550502..05aeedf17794 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ptp
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ptp
@@ -19,7 +19,11 @@ Date:		September 2010
 Contact:	Richard Cochran <richardcochran@gmail.com>
 Description:
 		This file contains the name of the PTP hardware clock
-		as a human readable string.
+		as a human readable string. The purpose of this
+		attribute is to provide the user with a "friendly
+		name" and to help distinguish PHY based devices from
+		MAC based ones. The string does not necessarily have
+		to be any kind of unique id.
 
 What:		/sys/class/ptp/ptpN/max_adjustment
 Date:		September 2010
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty
index b138b663bf54..ad22fb0ee765 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty
@@ -17,3 +17,124 @@ Description:
 		 device, like 'tty1'.
 		 The file supports poll() to detect virtual
 		 console switches.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/ttyS0/uartclk
+Date:		Sep 2012
+Contact:	Tomas Hlavacek <tmshlvck@gmail.com>
+Description:
+		 Shows the current uartclk value associated with the
+		 UART port in serial_core, that is bound to TTY like ttyS0.
+		 uartclk = 16 * baud_base
+
+		 These sysfs values expose the TIOCGSERIAL interface via
+		 sysfs rather than via ioctls.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/ttyS0/type
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Alan Cox <alan@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		 Shows the current tty type for this port.
+
+		 These sysfs values expose the TIOCGSERIAL interface via
+		 sysfs rather than via ioctls.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/ttyS0/line
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Alan Cox <alan@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		 Shows the current tty line number for this port.
+
+		 These sysfs values expose the TIOCGSERIAL interface via
+		 sysfs rather than via ioctls.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/ttyS0/port
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Alan Cox <alan@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		 Shows the current tty port I/O address for this port.
+
+		 These sysfs values expose the TIOCGSERIAL interface via
+		 sysfs rather than via ioctls.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/ttyS0/irq
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Alan Cox <alan@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		 Shows the current primary interrupt for this port.
+
+		 These sysfs values expose the TIOCGSERIAL interface via
+		 sysfs rather than via ioctls.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/ttyS0/flags
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Alan Cox <alan@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		 Show the tty port status flags for this port.
+
+		 These sysfs values expose the TIOCGSERIAL interface via
+		 sysfs rather than via ioctls.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/ttyS0/xmit_fifo_size
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Alan Cox <alan@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		 Show the transmit FIFO size for this port.
+
+		 These sysfs values expose the TIOCGSERIAL interface via
+		 sysfs rather than via ioctls.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/ttyS0/close_delay
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Alan Cox <alan@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		 Show the closing delay time for this port in ms.
+
+		 These sysfs values expose the TIOCGSERIAL interface via
+		 sysfs rather than via ioctls.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/ttyS0/closing_wait
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Alan Cox <alan@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		 Show the close wait time for this port in ms.
+
+		 These sysfs values expose the TIOCGSERIAL interface via
+		 sysfs rather than via ioctls.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/ttyS0/custom_divisor
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Alan Cox <alan@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		 Show the custom divisor if any that is set on this port.
+
+		 These sysfs values expose the TIOCGSERIAL interface via
+		 sysfs rather than via ioctls.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/ttyS0/io_type
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Alan Cox <alan@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		 Show the I/O type that is to be used with the iomem base
+		 address.
+
+		 These sysfs values expose the TIOCGSERIAL interface via
+		 sysfs rather than via ioctls.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/ttyS0/iomem_base
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Alan Cox <alan@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		 The I/O memory base for this port.
+
+		 These sysfs values expose the TIOCGSERIAL interface via
+		 sysfs rather than via ioctls.
+
+What:		/sys/class/tty/ttyS0/iomem_reg_shift
+Date:		October 2012
+Contact:	Alan Cox <alan@linux.intel.com>
+Description:
+		 Show the register shift indicating the spacing to be used
+		 for accesses on this iomem address.
+
+		 These sysfs values expose the TIOCGSERIAL interface via
+		 sysfs rather than via ioctls.
diff --git a/Documentation/CodingStyle b/Documentation/CodingStyle
index 2b90d328b3ba..7fe0546c504a 100644
--- a/Documentation/CodingStyle
+++ b/Documentation/CodingStyle
@@ -389,7 +389,8 @@ Albeit deprecated by some people, the equivalent of the goto statement is
 used frequently by compilers in form of the unconditional jump instruction.
 
 The goto statement comes in handy when a function exits from multiple
-locations and some common work such as cleanup has to be done.
+locations and some common work such as cleanup has to be done.  If there is no
+cleanup needed then just return directly.
 
 The rationale is:
 
@@ -454,6 +455,16 @@ The preferred style for long (multi-line) comments is:
 	 * with beginning and ending almost-blank lines.
 	 */
 
+For files in net/ and drivers/net/ the preferred style for long (multi-line)
+comments is a little different.
+
+	/* The preferred comment style for files in net/ and drivers/net
+	 * looks like this.
+	 *
+	 * It is nearly the same as the generally preferred comment style,
+	 * but there is no initial almost-blank line.
+	 */
+
 It's also important to comment data, whether they are basic types or derived
 types.  To this end, use just one data declaration per line (no commas for
 multiple data declarations).  This leaves you room for a small comment on each
@@ -536,15 +547,7 @@ config AUDIT
 	  logging of avc messages output).  Does not do system-call
 	  auditing without CONFIG_AUDITSYSCALL.
 
-Features that might still be considered unstable should be defined as
-dependent on "EXPERIMENTAL":
-
-config SLUB
-	depends on EXPERIMENTAL && !ARCH_USES_SLAB_PAGE_STRUCT
-	bool "SLUB (Unqueued Allocator)"
-	...
-
-while seriously dangerous features (such as write support for certain
+Seriously dangerous features (such as write support for certain
 filesystems) should advertise this prominently in their prompt string:
 
 config ADFS_FS_RW
@@ -671,8 +674,9 @@ ones already enabled by DEBUG.
 		Chapter 14: Allocating memory
 
 The kernel provides the following general purpose memory allocators:
-kmalloc(), kzalloc(), kcalloc(), vmalloc(), and vzalloc().  Please refer to
-the API documentation for further information about them.
+kmalloc(), kzalloc(), kmalloc_array(), kcalloc(), vmalloc(), and
+vzalloc().  Please refer to the API documentation for further information
+about them.
 
 The preferred form for passing a size of a struct is the following:
 
@@ -686,6 +690,17 @@ Casting the return value which is a void pointer is redundant. The conversion
 from void pointer to any other pointer type is guaranteed by the C programming
 language.
 
+The preferred form for allocating an array is the following:
+
+	p = kmalloc_array(n, sizeof(...), ...);
+
+The preferred form for allocating a zeroed array is the following:
+
+	p = kcalloc(n, sizeof(...), ...);
+
+Both forms check for overflow on the allocation size n * sizeof(...),
+and return NULL if that occurred.
+
 
 		Chapter 15: The inline disease
 
@@ -793,6 +808,35 @@ own custom mode, or may have some other magic method for making indentation
 work correctly.
 
 
+		Chapter 19:  Inline assembly
+
+In architecture-specific code, you may need to use inline assembly to interface
+with CPU or platform functionality.  Don't hesitate to do so when necessary.
+However, don't use inline assembly gratuitously when C can do the job.  You can
+and should poke hardware from C when possible.
+
+Consider writing simple helper functions that wrap common bits of inline
+assembly, rather than repeatedly writing them with slight variations.  Remember
+that inline assembly can use C parameters.
+
+Large, non-trivial assembly functions should go in .S files, with corresponding
+C prototypes defined in C header files.  The C prototypes for assembly
+functions should use "asmlinkage".
+
+You may need to mark your asm statement as volatile, to prevent GCC from
+removing it if GCC doesn't notice any side effects.  You don't always need to
+do so, though, and doing so unnecessarily can limit optimization.
+
+When writing a single inline assembly statement containing multiple
+instructions, put each instruction on a separate line in a separate quoted
+string, and end each string except the last with \n\t to properly indent the
+next instruction in the assembly output:
+
+	asm ("magic %reg1, #42\n\t"
+	     "more_magic %reg2, %reg3"
+	     : /* outputs */ : /* inputs */ : /* clobbers */);
+
+
 
 		Appendix I: References
 
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
index a0b6250add79..14129f149a75 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
@@ -468,11 +468,47 @@ To map a single region, you do:
 	size_t size = buffer->len;
 
 	dma_handle = dma_map_single(dev, addr, size, direction);
+	if (dma_mapping_error(dma_handle)) {
+		/*
+		 * reduce current DMA mapping usage,
+		 * delay and try again later or
+		 * reset driver.
+		 */
+		goto map_error_handling;
+	}
 
 and to unmap it:
 
 	dma_unmap_single(dev, dma_handle, size, direction);
 
+You should call dma_mapping_error() as dma_map_single() could fail and return
+error. Not all dma implementations support dma_mapping_error() interface.
+However, it is a good practice to call dma_mapping_error() interface, which
+will invoke the generic mapping error check interface. Doing so will ensure
+that the mapping code will work correctly on all dma implementations without
+any dependency on the specifics of the underlying implementation. Using the
+returned address without checking for errors could result in failures ranging
+from panics to silent data corruption. A couple of examples of incorrect ways
+to check for errors that make assumptions about the underlying dma
+implementation are as follows and these are applicable to dma_map_page() as
+well.
+
+Incorrect example 1:
+	dma_addr_t dma_handle;
+
+	dma_handle = dma_map_single(dev, addr, size, direction);
+	if ((dma_handle & 0xffff != 0) || (dma_handle >= 0x1000000)) {
+		goto map_error;
+	}
+
+Incorrect example 2:
+	dma_addr_t dma_handle;
+
+	dma_handle = dma_map_single(dev, addr, size, direction);
+	if (dma_handle == DMA_ERROR_CODE) {
+		goto map_error;
+	}
+
 You should call dma_unmap_single when the DMA activity is finished, e.g.
 from the interrupt which told you that the DMA transfer is done.
 
@@ -489,6 +525,14 @@ Specifically:
 	size_t size = buffer->len;
 
 	dma_handle = dma_map_page(dev, page, offset, size, direction);
+	if (dma_mapping_error(dma_handle)) {
+		/*
+		 * reduce current DMA mapping usage,
+		 * delay and try again later or
+		 * reset driver.
+		 */
+		goto map_error_handling;
+	}
 
 	...
 
@@ -496,6 +540,12 @@ Specifically:
 
 Here, "offset" means byte offset within the given page.
 
+You should call dma_mapping_error() as dma_map_page() could fail and return
+error as outlined under the dma_map_single() discussion.
+
+You should call dma_unmap_page when the DMA activity is finished, e.g.
+from the interrupt which told you that the DMA transfer is done.
+
 With scatterlists, you map a region gathered from several regions by:
 
 	int i, count = dma_map_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
@@ -578,6 +628,14 @@ to use the dma_sync_*() interfaces.
 		dma_addr_t mapping;
 
 		mapping = dma_map_single(cp->dev, buffer, len, DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
+		if (dma_mapping_error(dma_handle)) {
+			/*
+			 * reduce current DMA mapping usage,
+			 * delay and try again later or
+			 * reset driver.
+			 */
+			goto map_error_handling;
+		}
 
 		cp->rx_buf = buffer;
 		cp->rx_len = len;
@@ -658,6 +716,75 @@ failure can be determined by:
 		 * delay and try again later or
 		 * reset driver.
 		 */
+		goto map_error_handling;
+	}
+
+- unmap pages that are already mapped, when mapping error occurs in the middle
+  of a multiple page mapping attempt. These example are applicable to
+  dma_map_page() as well.
+
+Example 1:
+	dma_addr_t dma_handle1;
+	dma_addr_t dma_handle2;
+
+	dma_handle1 = dma_map_single(dev, addr, size, direction);
+	if (dma_mapping_error(dev, dma_handle1)) {
+		/*
+		 * reduce current DMA mapping usage,
+		 * delay and try again later or
+		 * reset driver.
+		 */
+		goto map_error_handling1;
+	}
+	dma_handle2 = dma_map_single(dev, addr, size, direction);
+	if (dma_mapping_error(dev, dma_handle2)) {
+		/*
+		 * reduce current DMA mapping usage,
+		 * delay and try again later or
+		 * reset driver.
+		 */
+		goto map_error_handling2;
+	}
+
+	...
+
+	map_error_handling2:
+		dma_unmap_single(dma_handle1);
+	map_error_handling1:
+
+Example 2: (if buffers are allocated in a loop, unmap all mapped buffers when
+	    mapping error is detected in the middle)
+
+	dma_addr_t dma_addr;
+	dma_addr_t array[DMA_BUFFERS];
+	int save_index = 0;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < DMA_BUFFERS; i++) {
+
+		...
+
+		dma_addr = dma_map_single(dev, addr, size, direction);
+		if (dma_mapping_error(dev, dma_addr)) {
+			/*
+			 * reduce current DMA mapping usage,
+			 * delay and try again later or
+			 * reset driver.
+			 */
+			goto map_error_handling;
+		}
+		array[i].dma_addr = dma_addr;
+		save_index++;
+	}
+
+	...
+
+	map_error_handling:
+
+	for (i = 0; i < save_index; i++) {
+
+		...
+
+		dma_unmap_single(array[i].dma_addr);
 	}
 
 Networking drivers must call dev_kfree_skb to free the socket buffer
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index 66bd97a95f10..78a6c569d204 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -678,3 +678,15 @@ out of dma_debug_entries. These entries are preallocated at boot. The number
 of preallocated entries is defined per architecture. If it is too low for you
 boot with 'dma_debug_entries=<your_desired_number>' to overwrite the
 architectural default.
+
+void debug_dmap_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr);
+
+dma-debug interface debug_dma_mapping_error() to debug drivers that fail
+to check dma mapping errors on addresses returned by dma_map_single() and
+dma_map_page() interfaces. This interface clears a flag set by
+debug_dma_map_page() to indicate that dma_mapping_error() has been called by
+the driver. When driver does unmap, debug_dma_unmap() checks the flag and if
+this flag is still set, prints warning message that includes call trace that
+leads up to the unmap. This interface can be called from dma_mapping_error()
+routines to enable dma mapping error check debugging.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt b/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt
index b768cc0e402b..e59480db9ee0 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt
@@ -31,3 +31,72 @@ may be weakly ordered, that is that reads and writes may pass each other.
 Since it is optional for platforms to implement DMA_ATTR_WEAK_ORDERING,
 those that do not will simply ignore the attribute and exhibit default
 behavior.
+
+DMA_ATTR_WRITE_COMBINE
+----------------------
+
+DMA_ATTR_WRITE_COMBINE specifies that writes to the mapping may be
+buffered to improve performance.
+
+Since it is optional for platforms to implement DMA_ATTR_WRITE_COMBINE,
+those that do not will simply ignore the attribute and exhibit default
+behavior.
+
+DMA_ATTR_NON_CONSISTENT
+-----------------------
+
+DMA_ATTR_NON_CONSISTENT lets the platform to choose to return either
+consistent or non-consistent memory as it sees fit.  By using this API,
+you are guaranteeing to the platform that you have all the correct and
+necessary sync points for this memory in the driver.
+
+DMA_ATTR_NO_KERNEL_MAPPING
+--------------------------
+
+DMA_ATTR_NO_KERNEL_MAPPING lets the platform to avoid creating a kernel
+virtual mapping for the allocated buffer. On some architectures creating
+such mapping is non-trivial task and consumes very limited resources
+(like kernel virtual address space or dma consistent address space).
+Buffers allocated with this attribute can be only passed to user space
+by calling dma_mmap_attrs(). By using this API, you are guaranteeing
+that you won't dereference the pointer returned by dma_alloc_attr(). You
+can threat it as a cookie that must be passed to dma_mmap_attrs() and
+dma_free_attrs(). Make sure that both of these also get this attribute
+set on each call.
+
+Since it is optional for platforms to implement
+DMA_ATTR_NO_KERNEL_MAPPING, those that do not will simply ignore the
+attribute and exhibit default behavior.
+
+DMA_ATTR_SKIP_CPU_SYNC
+----------------------
+
+By default dma_map_{single,page,sg} functions family transfer a given
+buffer from CPU domain to device domain. Some advanced use cases might
+require sharing a buffer between more than one device. This requires
+having a mapping created separately for each device and is usually
+performed by calling dma_map_{single,page,sg} function more than once
+for the given buffer with device pointer to each device taking part in
+the buffer sharing. The first call transfers a buffer from 'CPU' domain
+to 'device' domain, what synchronizes CPU caches for the given region
+(usually it means that the cache has been flushed or invalidated
+depending on the dma direction). However, next calls to
+dma_map_{single,page,sg}() for other devices will perform exactly the
+same sychronization operation on the CPU cache. CPU cache sychronization
+might be a time consuming operation, especially if the buffers are
+large, so it is highly recommended to avoid it if possible.
+DMA_ATTR_SKIP_CPU_SYNC allows platform code to skip synchronization of
+the CPU cache for the given buffer assuming that it has been already
+transferred to 'device' domain. This attribute can be also used for
+dma_unmap_{single,page,sg} functions family to force buffer to stay in
+device domain after releasing a mapping for it. Use this attribute with
+care!
+
+DMA_ATTR_FORCE_CONTIGUOUS
+-------------------------
+
+By default DMA-mapping subsystem is allowed to assemble the buffer
+allocated by dma_alloc_attrs() function from individual pages if it can
+be mapped as contiguous chunk into device dma address space. By
+specifing this attribute the allocated buffer is forced to be contiguous
+also in physical memory.
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl
index c5ac6929c41c..f403ec3c5c9a 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl
@@ -107,8 +107,8 @@
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h key_params
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h survey_info_flags
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h survey_info
-!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h beacon_parameters
-!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h plink_actions
+!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_beacon_data
+!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ap_settings
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h station_parameters
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h station_info_flags
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h rate_info_flags
@@ -127,14 +127,11 @@
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ibss_params
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_connect_params
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_pmksa
-!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_send_rx_auth
-!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_send_auth_timeout
-!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_send_rx_assoc
-!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_send_assoc_timeout
-!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_send_deauth
-!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h __cfg80211_send_deauth
-!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_send_disassoc
-!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h __cfg80211_send_disassoc
+!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_rx_mlme_mgmt
+!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_auth_timeout
+!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_rx_assoc_resp
+!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_assoc_timeout
+!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_tx_mlme_mgmt
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ibss_joined
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_connect_result
 !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_roamed
@@ -328,6 +325,7 @@
           <title>functions/definitions</title>
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_tx_info_flags
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_tx_control_flags
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rate_control_flags
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_rate
@@ -404,7 +402,6 @@
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k
-!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_removed
       </chapter>
 
       <chapter id="powersave">
@@ -438,7 +435,7 @@
       </section>
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_buffered_bc
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_beacon_get
-!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_eosp_irqsafe
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_eosp
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_frame_release_type
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_ps_transition
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni
@@ -516,7 +513,7 @@
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe
-!Finclude/net/mac80211.h rate_control_changed
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rate_control_changed
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_rate_control
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h rate_control_send_low
       </chapter>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
index 66725a3d30dc..bc3d9f8c0a90 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 # To add a new book the only step required is to add the book to the
 # list of DOCBOOKS.
 
-DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml mcabook.xml device-drivers.xml \
+DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml device-drivers.xml \
 	    kernel-hacking.xml kernel-locking.xml deviceiobook.xml \
 	    writing_usb_driver.xml networking.xml \
 	    kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl
index 9c27e5125dd2..fe397f90a34f 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ X!Iinclude/linux/kobject.h
 
      <sect1><title>Kernel utility functions</title>
 !Iinclude/linux/kernel.h
-!Ekernel/printk.c
+!Ekernel/printk/printk.c
 !Ekernel/panic.c
 !Ekernel/sys.c
 !Ekernel/rcupdate.c
@@ -126,6 +126,8 @@ X!Edrivers/base/interface.c
      </sect1>
      <sect1><title>Device Drivers DMA Management</title>
 !Edrivers/base/dma-buf.c
+!Edrivers/base/reservation.c
+!Iinclude/linux/reservation.h
 !Edrivers/base/dma-coherent.c
 !Edrivers/base/dma-mapping.c
      </sect1>
@@ -227,7 +229,7 @@ X!Isound/sound_firmware.c
   <chapter id="uart16x50">
      <title>16x50 UART Driver</title>
 !Edrivers/tty/serial/serial_core.c
-!Edrivers/tty/serial/8250/8250.c
+!Edrivers/tty/serial/8250/8250_core.c
   </chapter>
 
   <chapter id="fbdev">
@@ -297,10 +299,10 @@ KAO -->
      </sect1>
      <sect1><title>Frame Buffer Fonts</title>
         <para>
-           Refer to the file drivers/video/console/fonts.c for more information.
+           Refer to the file lib/fonts/fonts.c for more information.
         </para>
 <!-- FIXME: Removed for now since no structured comments in source
-X!Idrivers/video/console/fonts.c
+X!Ilib/fonts/fonts.c
 -->
      </sect1>
   </chapter>
@@ -446,4 +448,21 @@ X!Idrivers/video/console/fonts.c
 !Edrivers/i2c/i2c-core.c
   </chapter>
 
+  <chapter id="hsi">
+     <title>High Speed Synchronous Serial Interface (HSI)</title>
+
+     <para>
+	High Speed Synchronous Serial Interface (HSI) is a
+	serial interface mainly used for connecting application
+	engines (APE) with cellular modem engines (CMT) in cellular
+	handsets.
+
+	HSI provides multiplexing for up to 16 logical channels,
+	low-latency and full duplex communication.
+     </para>
+
+!Iinclude/linux/hsi/hsi.h
+!Edrivers/hsi/hsi.c
+  </chapter>
+
 </book>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl
index 196b8b9dba11..ed1d6d289022 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl
@@ -6,11 +6,36 @@
   <bookinfo>
     <title>Linux DRM Developer's Guide</title>
 
+    <authorgroup>
+      <author>
+	<firstname>Jesse</firstname>
+	<surname>Barnes</surname>
+	<contrib>Initial version</contrib>
+	<affiliation>
+	  <orgname>Intel Corporation</orgname>
+	  <address>
+	    <email>jesse.barnes@intel.com</email>
+	  </address>
+	</affiliation>
+      </author>
+      <author>
+	<firstname>Laurent</firstname>
+	<surname>Pinchart</surname>
+	<contrib>Driver internals</contrib>
+	<affiliation>
+	  <orgname>Ideas on board SPRL</orgname>
+	  <address>
+	    <email>laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com</email>
+	  </address>
+	</affiliation>
+      </author>
+    </authorgroup>
+
     <copyright>
       <year>2008-2009</year>
-      <holder>
-	Intel Corporation (Jesse Barnes &lt;jesse.barnes@intel.com&gt;)
-      </holder>
+      <year>2012</year>
+      <holder>Intel Corporation</holder>
+      <holder>Laurent Pinchart</holder>
     </copyright>
 
     <legalnotice>
@@ -20,6 +45,17 @@
 	the kernel source COPYING file.
       </para>
     </legalnotice>
+
+    <revhistory>
+      <!-- Put document revisions here, newest first. -->
+      <revision>
+	<revnumber>1.0</revnumber>
+	<date>2012-07-13</date>
+	<authorinitials>LP</authorinitials>
+	<revremark>Added extensive documentation about driver internals.
+	</revremark>
+      </revision>
+    </revhistory>
   </bookinfo>
 
 <toc></toc>
@@ -72,342 +108,360 @@
       submission &amp; fencing, suspend/resume support, and DMA
       services.
     </para>
-    <para>
-      The core of every DRM driver is struct drm_driver.  Drivers
-      typically statically initialize a drm_driver structure,
-      then pass it to drm_init() at load time.
-    </para>
 
   <!-- Internals: driver init -->
 
   <sect1>
-    <title>Driver initialization</title>
-    <para>
-      Before calling the DRM initialization routines, the driver must
-      first create and fill out a struct drm_driver structure.
-    </para>
-    <programlisting>
-      static struct drm_driver driver = {
-	/* Don't use MTRRs here; the Xserver or userspace app should
-	 * deal with them for Intel hardware.
-	 */
-	.driver_features =
-	    DRIVER_USE_AGP | DRIVER_REQUIRE_AGP |
-	    DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ | DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED | DRIVER_MODESET,
-	.load = i915_driver_load,
-	.unload = i915_driver_unload,
-	.firstopen = i915_driver_firstopen,
-	.lastclose = i915_driver_lastclose,
-	.preclose = i915_driver_preclose,
-	.save = i915_save,
-	.restore = i915_restore,
-	.device_is_agp = i915_driver_device_is_agp,
-	.get_vblank_counter = i915_get_vblank_counter,
-	.enable_vblank = i915_enable_vblank,
-	.disable_vblank = i915_disable_vblank,
-	.irq_preinstall = i915_driver_irq_preinstall,
-	.irq_postinstall = i915_driver_irq_postinstall,
-	.irq_uninstall = i915_driver_irq_uninstall,
-	.irq_handler = i915_driver_irq_handler,
-	.reclaim_buffers = drm_core_reclaim_buffers,
-	.get_map_ofs = drm_core_get_map_ofs,
-	.get_reg_ofs = drm_core_get_reg_ofs,
-	.fb_probe = intelfb_probe,
-	.fb_remove = intelfb_remove,
-	.fb_resize = intelfb_resize,
-	.master_create = i915_master_create,
-	.master_destroy = i915_master_destroy,
-#if defined(CONFIG_DEBUG_FS)
-	.debugfs_init = i915_debugfs_init,
-	.debugfs_cleanup = i915_debugfs_cleanup,
-#endif
-	.gem_init_object = i915_gem_init_object,
-	.gem_free_object = i915_gem_free_object,
-	.gem_vm_ops = &amp;i915_gem_vm_ops,
-	.ioctls = i915_ioctls,
-	.fops = {
-		.owner = THIS_MODULE,
-		.open = drm_open,
-		.release = drm_release,
-		.ioctl = drm_ioctl,
-		.mmap = drm_mmap,
-		.poll = drm_poll,
-		.fasync = drm_fasync,
-#ifdef CONFIG_COMPAT
-		.compat_ioctl = i915_compat_ioctl,
-#endif
-		.llseek = noop_llseek,
-		},
-	.pci_driver = {
-		.name = DRIVER_NAME,
-		.id_table = pciidlist,
-		.probe = probe,
-		.remove = __devexit_p(drm_cleanup_pci),
-		},
-	.name = DRIVER_NAME,
-	.desc = DRIVER_DESC,
-	.date = DRIVER_DATE,
-	.major = DRIVER_MAJOR,
-	.minor = DRIVER_MINOR,
-	.patchlevel = DRIVER_PATCHLEVEL,
-      };
-    </programlisting>
-    <para>
-      In the example above, taken from the i915 DRM driver, the driver
-      sets several flags indicating what core features it supports;
-      we go over the individual callbacks in later sections.  Since
-      flags indicate which features your driver supports to the DRM
-      core, you need to set most of them prior to calling drm_init().  Some,
-      like DRIVER_MODESET can be set later based on user supplied parameters,
-      but that's the exception rather than the rule.
-    </para>
-    <variablelist>
-      <title>Driver flags</title>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term>DRIVER_USE_AGP</term>
-	<listitem><para>
-	    Driver uses AGP interface
-	</para></listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term>DRIVER_REQUIRE_AGP</term>
-	<listitem><para>
-	    Driver needs AGP interface to function.
-	</para></listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term>DRIVER_USE_MTRR</term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>
-	    Driver uses MTRR interface for mapping memory.  Deprecated.
-	  </para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term>DRIVER_PCI_DMA</term>
-	<listitem><para>
-	    Driver is capable of PCI DMA.  Deprecated.
-	</para></listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term>DRIVER_SG</term>
-	<listitem><para>
-	    Driver can perform scatter/gather DMA.  Deprecated.
-	</para></listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term>DRIVER_HAVE_DMA</term>
-	<listitem><para>Driver supports DMA.  Deprecated.</para></listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term>DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ</term><term>DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED</term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>
-	    DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ indicates whether the driver has an IRQ
-	    handler.  DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED indicates whether the device &amp;
-	    handler support shared IRQs (note that this is required of
-	    PCI drivers).
-	  </para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term>DRIVER_DMA_QUEUE</term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>
-	    Should be set if the driver queues DMA requests and completes them
-	    asynchronously.  Deprecated.
-	  </para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term>DRIVER_FB_DMA</term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>
-	    Driver supports DMA to/from the framebuffer.  Deprecated.
-	  </para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term>DRIVER_MODESET</term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>
-	    Driver supports mode setting interfaces.
-	  </para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-    </variablelist>
-    <para>
-      In this specific case, the driver requires AGP and supports
-      IRQs.  DMA, as discussed later, is handled by device-specific ioctls
-      in this case.  It also supports the kernel mode setting APIs, though
-      unlike in the actual i915 driver source, this example unconditionally
-      exports KMS capability.
+    <title>Driver Initialization</title>
+    <para>
+      At the core of every DRM driver is a <structname>drm_driver</structname>
+      structure. Drivers typically statically initialize a drm_driver structure,
+      and then pass it to one of the <function>drm_*_init()</function> functions
+      to register it with the DRM subsystem.
     </para>
-  </sect1>
-
-  <!-- Internals: driver load -->
-
-  <sect1>
-    <title>Driver load</title>
-    <para>
-      In the previous section, we saw what a typical drm_driver
-      structure might look like.  One of the more important fields in
-      the structure is the hook for the load function.
-    </para>
-    <programlisting>
-      static struct drm_driver driver = {
-      	...
-      	.load = i915_driver_load,
-        ...
-      };
-    </programlisting>
-    <para>
-      The load function has many responsibilities: allocating a driver
-      private structure, specifying supported performance counters,
-      configuring the device (e.g. mapping registers &amp; command
-      buffers), initializing the memory manager, and setting up the
-      initial output configuration.
-    </para>
-    <para>
-      If compatibility is a concern (e.g. with drivers converted over
-      to the new interfaces from the old ones), care must be taken to
-      prevent device initialization and control that is incompatible with
-      currently active userspace drivers.  For instance, if user
-      level mode setting drivers are in use, it would be problematic
-      to perform output discovery &amp; configuration at load time.
-      Likewise, if user-level drivers unaware of memory management are
-      in use, memory management and command buffer setup may need to
-      be omitted.  These requirements are driver-specific, and care
-      needs to be taken to keep both old and new applications and
-      libraries working.  The i915 driver supports the "modeset"
-      module parameter to control whether advanced features are
-      enabled at load time or in legacy fashion.
+    <para>
+      The <structname>drm_driver</structname> structure contains static
+      information that describes the driver and features it supports, and
+      pointers to methods that the DRM core will call to implement the DRM API.
+      We will first go through the <structname>drm_driver</structname> static
+      information fields, and will then describe individual operations in
+      details as they get used in later sections.
     </para>
-
     <sect2>
-      <title>Driver private &amp; performance counters</title>
-      <para>
-	The driver private hangs off the main drm_device structure and
-	can be used for tracking various device-specific bits of
-	information, like register offsets, command buffer status,
-	register state for suspend/resume, etc.  At load time, a
-	driver may simply allocate one and set drm_device.dev_priv
-	appropriately; it should be freed and drm_device.dev_priv set
-	to NULL when the driver is unloaded.
-      </para>
+      <title>Driver Information</title>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Driver Features</title>
+        <para>
+          Drivers inform the DRM core about their requirements and supported
+          features by setting appropriate flags in the
+          <structfield>driver_features</structfield> field. Since those flags
+          influence the DRM core behaviour since registration time, most of them
+          must be set to registering the <structname>drm_driver</structname>
+          instance.
+        </para>
+        <synopsis>u32 driver_features;</synopsis>
+        <variablelist>
+          <title>Driver Feature Flags</title>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term>DRIVER_USE_AGP</term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              Driver uses AGP interface, the DRM core will manage AGP resources.
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term>DRIVER_REQUIRE_AGP</term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              Driver needs AGP interface to function. AGP initialization failure
+              will become a fatal error.
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term>DRIVER_PCI_DMA</term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              Driver is capable of PCI DMA, mapping of PCI DMA buffers to
+              userspace will be enabled. Deprecated.
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term>DRIVER_SG</term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              Driver can perform scatter/gather DMA, allocation and mapping of
+              scatter/gather buffers will be enabled. Deprecated.
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term>DRIVER_HAVE_DMA</term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              Driver supports DMA, the userspace DMA API will be supported.
+              Deprecated.
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term>DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ</term><term>DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED</term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ indicates whether the driver has an IRQ handler
+              managed by the DRM Core. The core will support simple IRQ handler
+              installation when the flag is set. The installation process is
+              described in <xref linkend="drm-irq-registration"/>.</para>
+              <para>DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED indicates whether the device &amp; handler
+              support shared IRQs (note that this is required of PCI  drivers).
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term>DRIVER_GEM</term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              Driver use the GEM memory manager.
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term>DRIVER_MODESET</term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              Driver supports mode setting interfaces (KMS).
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term>DRIVER_PRIME</term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              Driver implements DRM PRIME buffer sharing.
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term>DRIVER_RENDER</term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              Driver supports dedicated render nodes.
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+        </variablelist>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Major, Minor and Patchlevel</title>
+        <synopsis>int major;
+int minor;
+int patchlevel;</synopsis>
+        <para>
+          The DRM core identifies driver versions by a major, minor and patch
+          level triplet. The information is printed to the kernel log at
+          initialization time and passed to userspace through the
+          DRM_IOCTL_VERSION ioctl.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          The major and minor numbers are also used to verify the requested driver
+          API version passed to DRM_IOCTL_SET_VERSION. When the driver API changes
+          between minor versions, applications can call DRM_IOCTL_SET_VERSION to
+          select a specific version of the API. If the requested major isn't equal
+          to the driver major, or the requested minor is larger than the driver
+          minor, the DRM_IOCTL_SET_VERSION call will return an error. Otherwise
+          the driver's set_version() method will be called with the requested
+          version.
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Name, Description and Date</title>
+        <synopsis>char *name;
+char *desc;
+char *date;</synopsis>
+        <para>
+          The driver name is printed to the kernel log at initialization time,
+          used for IRQ registration and passed to userspace through
+          DRM_IOCTL_VERSION.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          The driver description is a purely informative string passed to
+          userspace through the DRM_IOCTL_VERSION ioctl and otherwise unused by
+          the kernel.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          The driver date, formatted as YYYYMMDD, is meant to identify the date of
+          the latest modification to the driver. However, as most drivers fail to
+          update it, its value is mostly useless. The DRM core prints it to the
+          kernel log at initialization time and passes it to userspace through the
+          DRM_IOCTL_VERSION ioctl.
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Driver Load</title>
       <para>
-	The DRM supports several counters which may be used for rough
-	performance characterization.  Note that the DRM stat counter
-	system is not often used by applications, and supporting
-	additional counters is completely optional.
+        The <methodname>load</methodname> method is the driver and device
+        initialization entry point. The method is responsible for allocating and
+        initializing driver private data, specifying supported performance
+        counters, performing resource allocation and mapping (e.g. acquiring
+        clocks, mapping registers or allocating command buffers), initializing
+        the memory manager (<xref linkend="drm-memory-management"/>), installing
+        the IRQ handler (<xref linkend="drm-irq-registration"/>), setting up
+        vertical blanking handling (<xref linkend="drm-vertical-blank"/>), mode
+	setting (<xref linkend="drm-mode-setting"/>) and initial output
+	configuration (<xref linkend="drm-kms-init"/>).
       </para>
+      <note><para>
+        If compatibility is a concern (e.g. with drivers converted over from
+        User Mode Setting to Kernel Mode Setting), care must be taken to prevent
+        device initialization and control that is incompatible with currently
+        active userspace drivers. For instance, if user level mode setting
+        drivers are in use, it would be problematic to perform output discovery
+        &amp; configuration at load time. Likewise, if user-level drivers
+        unaware of memory management are in use, memory management and command
+        buffer setup may need to be omitted. These requirements are
+        driver-specific, and care needs to be taken to keep both old and new
+        applications and libraries working.
+      </para></note>
+      <synopsis>int (*load) (struct drm_device *, unsigned long flags);</synopsis>
       <para>
-	These interfaces are deprecated and should not be used.  If performance
-	monitoring is desired, the developer should investigate and
-	potentially enhance the kernel perf and tracing infrastructure to export
-	GPU related performance information for consumption by performance
-	monitoring tools and applications.
+        The method takes two arguments, a pointer to the newly created
+	<structname>drm_device</structname> and flags. The flags are used to
+	pass the <structfield>driver_data</structfield> field of the device id
+	corresponding to the device passed to <function>drm_*_init()</function>.
+	Only PCI devices currently use this, USB and platform DRM drivers have
+	their <methodname>load</methodname> method called with flags to 0.
       </para>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Driver Private &amp; Performance Counters</title>
+        <para>
+          The driver private hangs off the main
+          <structname>drm_device</structname> structure and can be used for
+          tracking various device-specific bits of information, like register
+          offsets, command buffer status, register state for suspend/resume, etc.
+          At load time, a driver may simply allocate one and set
+          <structname>drm_device</structname>.<structfield>dev_priv</structfield>
+          appropriately; it should be freed and
+          <structname>drm_device</structname>.<structfield>dev_priv</structfield>
+          set to NULL when the driver is unloaded.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          DRM supports several counters which were used for rough performance
+          characterization. This stat counter system is deprecated and should not
+          be used. If performance monitoring is desired, the developer should
+          investigate and potentially enhance the kernel perf and tracing
+          infrastructure to export GPU related performance information for
+          consumption by performance monitoring tools and applications.
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3 id="drm-irq-registration">
+        <title>IRQ Registration</title>
+        <para>
+          The DRM core tries to facilitate IRQ handler registration and
+          unregistration by providing <function>drm_irq_install</function> and
+          <function>drm_irq_uninstall</function> functions. Those functions only
+          support a single interrupt per device, devices that use more than one
+          IRQs need to be handled manually.
+        </para>
+        <sect4>
+          <title>Managed IRQ Registration</title>
+          <para>
+            Both the <function>drm_irq_install</function> and
+	    <function>drm_irq_uninstall</function> functions get the device IRQ by
+	    calling <function>drm_dev_to_irq</function>. This inline function will
+	    call a bus-specific operation to retrieve the IRQ number. For platform
+	    devices, <function>platform_get_irq</function>(..., 0) is used to
+	    retrieve the IRQ number.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            <function>drm_irq_install</function> starts by calling the
+            <methodname>irq_preinstall</methodname> driver operation. The operation
+            is optional and must make sure that the interrupt will not get fired by
+            clearing all pending interrupt flags or disabling the interrupt.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            The IRQ will then be requested by a call to
+            <function>request_irq</function>. If the DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED driver
+            feature flag is set, a shared (IRQF_SHARED) IRQ handler will be
+            requested.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            The IRQ handler function must be provided as the mandatory irq_handler
+            driver operation. It will get passed directly to
+            <function>request_irq</function> and thus has the same prototype as all
+            IRQ handlers. It will get called with a pointer to the DRM device as the
+            second argument.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            Finally the function calls the optional
+            <methodname>irq_postinstall</methodname> driver operation. The operation
+            usually enables interrupts (excluding the vblank interrupt, which is
+            enabled separately), but drivers may choose to enable/disable interrupts
+            at a different time.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            <function>drm_irq_uninstall</function> is similarly used to uninstall an
+            IRQ handler. It starts by waking up all processes waiting on a vblank
+            interrupt to make sure they don't hang, and then calls the optional
+            <methodname>irq_uninstall</methodname> driver operation. The operation
+            must disable all hardware interrupts. Finally the function frees the IRQ
+            by calling <function>free_irq</function>.
+          </para>
+        </sect4>
+        <sect4>
+          <title>Manual IRQ Registration</title>
+          <para>
+            Drivers that require multiple interrupt handlers can't use the managed
+            IRQ registration functions. In that case IRQs must be registered and
+            unregistered manually (usually with the <function>request_irq</function>
+            and <function>free_irq</function> functions, or their devm_* equivalent).
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            When manually registering IRQs, drivers must not set the DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ
+            driver feature flag, and must not provide the
+	    <methodname>irq_handler</methodname> driver operation. They must set the
+	    <structname>drm_device</structname> <structfield>irq_enabled</structfield>
+	    field to 1 upon registration of the IRQs, and clear it to 0 after
+	    unregistering the IRQs.
+          </para>
+        </sect4>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Memory Manager Initialization</title>
+        <para>
+          Every DRM driver requires a memory manager which must be initialized at
+          load time. DRM currently contains two memory managers, the Translation
+          Table Manager (TTM) and the Graphics Execution Manager (GEM).
+          This document describes the use of the GEM memory manager only. See
+          <xref linkend="drm-memory-management"/> for details.
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Miscellaneous Device Configuration</title>
+        <para>
+          Another task that may be necessary for PCI devices during configuration
+          is mapping the video BIOS. On many devices, the VBIOS describes device
+          configuration, LCD panel timings (if any), and contains flags indicating
+          device state. Mapping the BIOS can be done using the pci_map_rom() call,
+          a convenience function that takes care of mapping the actual ROM,
+          whether it has been shadowed into memory (typically at address 0xc0000)
+          or exists on the PCI device in the ROM BAR. Note that after the ROM has
+          been mapped and any necessary information has been extracted, it should
+          be unmapped; on many devices, the ROM address decoder is shared with
+          other BARs, so leaving it mapped could cause undesired behaviour like
+          hangs or memory corruption.
+  <!--!Fdrivers/pci/rom.c pci_map_rom-->
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
     </sect2>
+  </sect1>
 
-    <sect2>
-      <title>Configuring the device</title>
-      <para>
-	Obviously, device configuration is device-specific.
-	However, there are several common operations: finding a
-	device's PCI resources, mapping them, and potentially setting
-	up an IRQ handler.
-      </para>
-      <para>
-	Finding &amp; mapping resources is fairly straightforward.  The
-	DRM wrapper functions, drm_get_resource_start() and
-	drm_get_resource_len(), may be used to find BARs on the given
-	drm_device struct.  Once those values have been retrieved, the
-	driver load function can call drm_addmap() to create a new
-	mapping for the BAR in question.  Note that you probably want a
-	drm_local_map_t in your driver private structure to track any
-	mappings you create.
-<!-- !Fdrivers/gpu/drm/drm_bufs.c drm_get_resource_* -->
-<!-- !Finclude/drm/drmP.h drm_local_map_t -->
-      </para>
-      <para>
-	if compatibility with other operating systems isn't a concern
-	(DRM drivers can run under various BSD variants and OpenSolaris),
-	native Linux calls may be used for the above, e.g. pci_resource_*
-	and iomap*/iounmap.  See the Linux device driver book for more
-	info.
-      </para>
-      <para>
-	Once you have a register map, you may use the DRM_READn() and
-	DRM_WRITEn() macros to access the registers on your device, or
-	use driver-specific versions to offset into your MMIO space
-	relative to a driver-specific base pointer (see I915_READ for
-	an example).
-      </para>
-      <para>
-	If your device supports interrupt generation, you may want to
-	set up an interrupt handler when the driver is loaded.  This
-	is done using the drm_irq_install() function.  If your device
-	supports vertical blank interrupts, it should call
-	drm_vblank_init() to initialize the core vblank handling code before
-	enabling interrupts on your device.  This ensures the vblank related
-	structures are allocated and allows the core to handle vblank events.
-      </para>
-<!--!Fdrivers/char/drm/drm_irq.c drm_irq_install-->
-      <para>
-	Once your interrupt handler is registered (it uses your
-	drm_driver.irq_handler as the actual interrupt handling
-	function), you can safely enable interrupts on your device,
-	assuming any other state your interrupt handler uses is also
-	initialized.
-      </para>
-      <para>
-	Another task that may be necessary during configuration is
-	mapping the video BIOS.  On many devices, the VBIOS describes
-	device configuration, LCD panel timings (if any), and contains
-	flags indicating device state.  Mapping the BIOS can be done
-	using the pci_map_rom() call, a convenience function that
-	takes care of mapping the actual ROM, whether it has been
-	shadowed into memory (typically at address 0xc0000) or exists
-	on the PCI device in the ROM BAR.  Note that after the ROM
-	has been mapped and any necessary information has been extracted,
-	it should be unmapped; on many devices, the ROM address decoder is
-	shared with other BARs, so leaving it mapped could cause
-	undesired behavior like hangs or memory corruption.
-<!--!Fdrivers/pci/rom.c pci_map_rom-->
-      </para>
-    </sect2>
+  <!-- Internals: memory management -->
 
+  <sect1 id="drm-memory-management">
+    <title>Memory management</title>
+    <para>
+      Modern Linux systems require large amount of graphics memory to store
+      frame buffers, textures, vertices and other graphics-related data. Given
+      the very dynamic nature of many of that data, managing graphics memory
+      efficiently is thus crucial for the graphics stack and plays a central
+      role in the DRM infrastructure.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      The DRM core includes two memory managers, namely Translation Table Maps
+      (TTM) and Graphics Execution Manager (GEM). TTM was the first DRM memory
+      manager to be developed and tried to be a one-size-fits-them all
+      solution. It provides a single userspace API to accommodate the need of
+      all hardware, supporting both Unified Memory Architecture (UMA) devices
+      and devices with dedicated video RAM (i.e. most discrete video cards).
+      This resulted in a large, complex piece of code that turned out to be
+      hard to use for driver development.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      GEM started as an Intel-sponsored project in reaction to TTM's
+      complexity. Its design philosophy is completely different: instead of
+      providing a solution to every graphics memory-related problems, GEM
+      identified common code between drivers and created a support library to
+      share it. GEM has simpler initialization and execution requirements than
+      TTM, but has no video RAM management capabitilies and is thus limited to
+      UMA devices.
+    </para>
     <sect2>
-      <title>Memory manager initialization</title>
-      <para>
-	In order to allocate command buffers, cursor memory, scanout
-	buffers, etc., as well as support the latest features provided
-	by packages like Mesa and the X.Org X server, your driver
-	should support a memory manager.
-      </para>
+      <title>The Translation Table Manager (TTM)</title>
       <para>
-	If your driver supports memory management (it should!), you
-	need to set that up at load time as well.  How you initialize
-	it depends on which memory manager you're using: TTM or GEM.
+	TTM design background and information belongs here.
       </para>
       <sect3>
 	<title>TTM initialization</title>
-	<para>
-	  TTM (for Translation Table Manager) manages video memory and
-	  aperture space for graphics devices. TTM supports both UMA devices
-	  and devices with dedicated video RAM (VRAM), i.e. most discrete
-	  graphics devices.  If your device has dedicated RAM, supporting
-	  TTM is desirable.  TTM also integrates tightly with your
-	  driver-specific buffer execution function.  See the radeon
-	  driver for examples.
-	</para>
-	<para>
-	  The core TTM structure is the ttm_bo_driver struct.  It contains
-	  several fields with function pointers for initializing the TTM,
-	  allocating and freeing memory, waiting for command completion
-	  and fence synchronization, and memory migration.  See the
-	  radeon_ttm.c file for an example of usage.
+        <warning><para>This section is outdated.</para></warning>
+        <para>
+          Drivers wishing to support TTM must fill out a drm_bo_driver
+          structure. The structure contains several fields with function
+          pointers for initializing the TTM, allocating and freeing memory,
+          waiting for command completion and fence synchronization, and memory
+          migration. See the radeon_ttm.c file for an example of usage.
 	</para>
 	<para>
 	  The ttm_global_reference structure is made up of several fields:
@@ -445,82 +499,1139 @@
 	  count for the TTM, which will call your initialization function.
 	</para>
       </sect3>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2 id="drm-gem">
+      <title>The Graphics Execution Manager (GEM)</title>
+      <para>
+        The GEM design approach has resulted in a memory manager that doesn't
+        provide full coverage of all (or even all common) use cases in its
+        userspace or kernel API. GEM exposes a set of standard memory-related
+        operations to userspace and a set of helper functions to drivers, and let
+        drivers implement hardware-specific operations with their own private API.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        The GEM userspace API is described in the
+        <ulink url="http://lwn.net/Articles/283798/"><citetitle>GEM - the Graphics
+        Execution Manager</citetitle></ulink> article on LWN. While slightly
+        outdated, the document provides a good overview of the GEM API principles.
+        Buffer allocation and read and write operations, described as part of the
+        common GEM API, are currently implemented using driver-specific ioctls.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        GEM is data-agnostic. It manages abstract buffer objects without knowing
+        what individual buffers contain. APIs that require knowledge of buffer
+        contents or purpose, such as buffer allocation or synchronization
+        primitives, are thus outside of the scope of GEM and must be implemented
+        using driver-specific ioctls.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	On a fundamental level, GEM involves several operations:
+	<itemizedlist>
+	  <listitem>Memory allocation and freeing</listitem>
+	  <listitem>Command execution</listitem>
+	  <listitem>Aperture management at command execution time</listitem>
+	</itemizedlist>
+	Buffer object allocation is relatively straightforward and largely
+        provided by Linux's shmem layer, which provides memory to back each
+        object.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        Device-specific operations, such as command execution, pinning, buffer
+	read &amp; write, mapping, and domain ownership transfers are left to
+        driver-specific ioctls.
+      </para>
       <sect3>
-	<title>GEM initialization</title>
-	<para>
-	  GEM is an alternative to TTM, designed specifically for UMA
-	  devices.  It has simpler initialization and execution requirements
-	  than TTM, but has no VRAM management capability.  Core GEM
-	  is initialized by calling drm_mm_init() to create
-	  a GTT DRM MM object, which provides an address space pool for
-	  object allocation.  In a KMS configuration, the driver
-	  needs to allocate and initialize a command ring buffer following
-	  core GEM initialization.  A UMA device usually has what is called a
-	  "stolen" memory region, which provides space for the initial
-	  framebuffer and large, contiguous memory regions required by the
-	  device.  This space is not typically managed by GEM, and it must
-	  be initialized separately into its own DRM MM object.
-	</para>
-	<para>
-	  Initialization is driver-specific. In the case of Intel
-	  integrated graphics chips like 965GM, GEM initialization can
-	  be done by calling the internal GEM init function,
-	  i915_gem_do_init().  Since the 965GM is a UMA device
-	  (i.e. it doesn't have dedicated VRAM), GEM manages
-	  making regular RAM available for GPU operations.  Memory set
-	  aside by the BIOS (called "stolen" memory by the i915
-	  driver) is managed by the DRM memrange allocator; the
-	  rest of the aperture is managed by GEM.
-	  <programlisting>
-	    /* Basic memrange allocator for stolen space (aka vram) */
-	    drm_memrange_init(&amp;dev_priv->vram, 0, prealloc_size);
-	    /* Let GEM Manage from end of prealloc space to end of aperture */
-	    i915_gem_do_init(dev, prealloc_size, agp_size);
-	  </programlisting>
-<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_memrange.c-->
-	</para>
-	<para>
-	  Once the memory manager has been set up, we may allocate the
-	  command buffer.  In the i915 case, this is also done with a
-	  GEM function, i915_gem_init_ringbuffer().
-	</para>
+        <title>GEM Initialization</title>
+        <para>
+          Drivers that use GEM must set the DRIVER_GEM bit in the struct
+          <structname>drm_driver</structname>
+          <structfield>driver_features</structfield> field. The DRM core will
+          then automatically initialize the GEM core before calling the
+          <methodname>load</methodname> operation. Behind the scene, this will
+          create a DRM Memory Manager object which provides an address space
+          pool for object allocation.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          In a KMS configuration, drivers need to allocate and initialize a
+          command ring buffer following core GEM initialization if required by
+          the hardware. UMA devices usually have what is called a "stolen"
+          memory region, which provides space for the initial framebuffer and
+          large, contiguous memory regions required by the device. This space is
+          typically not managed by GEM, and must be initialized separately into
+          its own DRM MM object.
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>GEM Objects Creation</title>
+        <para>
+          GEM splits creation of GEM objects and allocation of the memory that
+          backs them in two distinct operations.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          GEM objects are represented by an instance of struct
+          <structname>drm_gem_object</structname>. Drivers usually need to extend
+          GEM objects with private information and thus create a driver-specific
+          GEM object structure type that embeds an instance of struct
+          <structname>drm_gem_object</structname>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          To create a GEM object, a driver allocates memory for an instance of its
+          specific GEM object type and initializes the embedded struct
+          <structname>drm_gem_object</structname> with a call to
+          <function>drm_gem_object_init</function>. The function takes a pointer to
+          the DRM device, a pointer to the GEM object and the buffer object size
+          in bytes.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          GEM uses shmem to allocate anonymous pageable memory.
+          <function>drm_gem_object_init</function> will create an shmfs file of
+          the requested size and store it into the struct
+          <structname>drm_gem_object</structname> <structfield>filp</structfield>
+          field. The memory is used as either main storage for the object when the
+          graphics hardware uses system memory directly or as a backing store
+          otherwise.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Drivers are responsible for the actual physical pages allocation by
+          calling <function>shmem_read_mapping_page_gfp</function> for each page.
+          Note that they can decide to allocate pages when initializing the GEM
+          object, or to delay allocation until the memory is needed (for instance
+          when a page fault occurs as a result of a userspace memory access or
+          when the driver needs to start a DMA transfer involving the memory).
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Anonymous pageable memory allocation is not always desired, for instance
+          when the hardware requires physically contiguous system memory as is
+          often the case in embedded devices. Drivers can create GEM objects with
+          no shmfs backing (called private GEM objects) by initializing them with
+          a call to <function>drm_gem_private_object_init</function> instead of
+          <function>drm_gem_object_init</function>. Storage for private GEM
+          objects must be managed by drivers.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Drivers that do not need to extend GEM objects with private information
+          can call the <function>drm_gem_object_alloc</function> function to
+          allocate and initialize a struct <structname>drm_gem_object</structname>
+          instance. The GEM core will call the optional driver
+          <methodname>gem_init_object</methodname> operation after initializing
+          the GEM object with <function>drm_gem_object_init</function>.
+          <synopsis>int (*gem_init_object) (struct drm_gem_object *obj);</synopsis>
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          No alloc-and-init function exists for private GEM objects.
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>GEM Objects Lifetime</title>
+        <para>
+          All GEM objects are reference-counted by the GEM core. References can be
+          acquired and release by <function>calling drm_gem_object_reference</function>
+          and <function>drm_gem_object_unreference</function> respectively. The
+          caller must hold the <structname>drm_device</structname>
+          <structfield>struct_mutex</structfield> lock. As a convenience, GEM
+          provides the <function>drm_gem_object_reference_unlocked</function> and
+          <function>drm_gem_object_unreference_unlocked</function> functions that
+          can be called without holding the lock.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          When the last reference to a GEM object is released the GEM core calls
+          the <structname>drm_driver</structname>
+          <methodname>gem_free_object</methodname> operation. That operation is
+          mandatory for GEM-enabled drivers and must free the GEM object and all
+          associated resources.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          <synopsis>void (*gem_free_object) (struct drm_gem_object *obj);</synopsis>
+          Drivers are responsible for freeing all GEM object resources, including
+          the resources created by the GEM core. If an mmap offset has been
+          created for the object (in which case
+          <structname>drm_gem_object</structname>::<structfield>map_list</structfield>::<structfield>map</structfield>
+          is not NULL) it must be freed by a call to
+          <function>drm_gem_free_mmap_offset</function>. The shmfs backing store
+          must be released by calling <function>drm_gem_object_release</function>
+          (that function can safely be called if no shmfs backing store has been
+          created).
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>GEM Objects Naming</title>
+        <para>
+          Communication between userspace and the kernel refers to GEM objects
+          using local handles, global names or, more recently, file descriptors.
+          All of those are 32-bit integer values; the usual Linux kernel limits
+          apply to the file descriptors.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          GEM handles are local to a DRM file. Applications get a handle to a GEM
+          object through a driver-specific ioctl, and can use that handle to refer
+          to the GEM object in other standard or driver-specific ioctls. Closing a
+          DRM file handle frees all its GEM handles and dereferences the
+          associated GEM objects.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          To create a handle for a GEM object drivers call
+          <function>drm_gem_handle_create</function>. The function takes a pointer
+          to the DRM file and the GEM object and returns a locally unique handle.
+          When the handle is no longer needed drivers delete it with a call to
+          <function>drm_gem_handle_delete</function>. Finally the GEM object
+          associated with a handle can be retrieved by a call to
+          <function>drm_gem_object_lookup</function>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Handles don't take ownership of GEM objects, they only take a reference
+          to the object that will be dropped when the handle is destroyed. To
+          avoid leaking GEM objects, drivers must make sure they drop the
+          reference(s) they own (such as the initial reference taken at object
+          creation time) as appropriate, without any special consideration for the
+          handle. For example, in the particular case of combined GEM object and
+          handle creation in the implementation of the
+          <methodname>dumb_create</methodname> operation, drivers must drop the
+          initial reference to the GEM object before returning the handle.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          GEM names are similar in purpose to handles but are not local to DRM
+          files. They can be passed between processes to reference a GEM object
+          globally. Names can't be used directly to refer to objects in the DRM
+          API, applications must convert handles to names and names to handles
+          using the DRM_IOCTL_GEM_FLINK and DRM_IOCTL_GEM_OPEN ioctls
+          respectively. The conversion is handled by the DRM core without any
+          driver-specific support.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Similar to global names, GEM file descriptors are also used to share GEM
+          objects across processes. They offer additional security: as file
+          descriptors must be explicitly sent over UNIX domain sockets to be shared
+          between applications, they can't be guessed like the globally unique GEM
+          names.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Drivers that support GEM file descriptors, also known as the DRM PRIME
+          API, must set the DRIVER_PRIME bit in the struct
+          <structname>drm_driver</structname>
+          <structfield>driver_features</structfield> field, and implement the
+          <methodname>prime_handle_to_fd</methodname> and
+          <methodname>prime_fd_to_handle</methodname> operations.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          <synopsis>int (*prime_handle_to_fd)(struct drm_device *dev,
+                            struct drm_file *file_priv, uint32_t handle,
+                            uint32_t flags, int *prime_fd);
+  int (*prime_fd_to_handle)(struct drm_device *dev,
+                            struct drm_file *file_priv, int prime_fd,
+                            uint32_t *handle);</synopsis>
+          Those two operations convert a handle to a PRIME file descriptor and
+          vice versa. Drivers must use the kernel dma-buf buffer sharing framework
+          to manage the PRIME file descriptors.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          While non-GEM drivers must implement the operations themselves, GEM
+          drivers must use the <function>drm_gem_prime_handle_to_fd</function>
+          and <function>drm_gem_prime_fd_to_handle</function> helper functions.
+          Those helpers rely on the driver
+          <methodname>gem_prime_export</methodname> and
+          <methodname>gem_prime_import</methodname> operations to create a dma-buf
+          instance from a GEM object (dma-buf exporter role) and to create a GEM
+          object from a dma-buf instance (dma-buf importer role).
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          <synopsis>struct dma_buf * (*gem_prime_export)(struct drm_device *dev,
+                                       struct drm_gem_object *obj,
+                                       int flags);
+  struct drm_gem_object * (*gem_prime_import)(struct drm_device *dev,
+                                              struct dma_buf *dma_buf);</synopsis>
+          These two operations are mandatory for GEM drivers that support DRM
+          PRIME.
+        </para>
+        <sect4>
+          <title>DRM PRIME Helper Functions Reference</title>
+!Pdrivers/gpu/drm/drm_prime.c PRIME Helpers
+        </sect4>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3 id="drm-gem-objects-mapping">
+        <title>GEM Objects Mapping</title>
+        <para>
+          Because mapping operations are fairly heavyweight GEM favours
+          read/write-like access to buffers, implemented through driver-specific
+          ioctls, over mapping buffers to userspace. However, when random access
+          to the buffer is needed (to perform software rendering for instance),
+          direct access to the object can be more efficient.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          The mmap system call can't be used directly to map GEM objects, as they
+          don't have their own file handle. Two alternative methods currently
+          co-exist to map GEM objects to userspace. The first method uses a
+          driver-specific ioctl to perform the mapping operation, calling
+          <function>do_mmap</function> under the hood. This is often considered
+          dubious, seems to be discouraged for new GEM-enabled drivers, and will
+          thus not be described here.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          The second method uses the mmap system call on the DRM file handle.
+          <synopsis>void *mmap(void *addr, size_t length, int prot, int flags, int fd,
+             off_t offset);</synopsis>
+          DRM identifies the GEM object to be mapped by a fake offset passed
+          through the mmap offset argument. Prior to being mapped, a GEM object
+          must thus be associated with a fake offset. To do so, drivers must call
+          <function>drm_gem_create_mmap_offset</function> on the object. The
+          function allocates a fake offset range from a pool and stores the
+          offset divided by PAGE_SIZE in
+          <literal>obj-&gt;map_list.hash.key</literal>. Care must be taken not to
+          call <function>drm_gem_create_mmap_offset</function> if a fake offset
+          has already been allocated for the object. This can be tested by
+          <literal>obj-&gt;map_list.map</literal> being non-NULL.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Once allocated, the fake offset value
+          (<literal>obj-&gt;map_list.hash.key &lt;&lt; PAGE_SHIFT</literal>)
+          must be passed to the application in a driver-specific way and can then
+          be used as the mmap offset argument.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          The GEM core provides a helper method <function>drm_gem_mmap</function>
+          to handle object mapping. The method can be set directly as the mmap
+          file operation handler. It will look up the GEM object based on the
+          offset value and set the VMA operations to the
+          <structname>drm_driver</structname> <structfield>gem_vm_ops</structfield>
+          field. Note that <function>drm_gem_mmap</function> doesn't map memory to
+          userspace, but relies on the driver-provided fault handler to map pages
+          individually.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          To use <function>drm_gem_mmap</function>, drivers must fill the struct
+          <structname>drm_driver</structname> <structfield>gem_vm_ops</structfield>
+          field with a pointer to VM operations.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          <synopsis>struct vm_operations_struct *gem_vm_ops
+
+  struct vm_operations_struct {
+          void (*open)(struct vm_area_struct * area);
+          void (*close)(struct vm_area_struct * area);
+          int (*fault)(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct vm_fault *vmf);
+  };</synopsis>
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          The <methodname>open</methodname> and <methodname>close</methodname>
+          operations must update the GEM object reference count. Drivers can use
+          the <function>drm_gem_vm_open</function> and
+          <function>drm_gem_vm_close</function> helper functions directly as open
+          and close handlers.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          The fault operation handler is responsible for mapping individual pages
+          to userspace when a page fault occurs. Depending on the memory
+          allocation scheme, drivers can allocate pages at fault time, or can
+          decide to allocate memory for the GEM object at the time the object is
+          created.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Drivers that want to map the GEM object upfront instead of handling page
+          faults can implement their own mmap file operation handler.
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Dumb GEM Objects</title>
+        <para>
+          The GEM API doesn't standardize GEM objects creation and leaves it to
+          driver-specific ioctls. While not an issue for full-fledged graphics
+          stacks that include device-specific userspace components (in libdrm for
+          instance), this limit makes DRM-based early boot graphics unnecessarily
+          complex.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Dumb GEM objects partly alleviate the problem by providing a standard
+          API to create dumb buffers suitable for scanout, which can then be used
+          to create KMS frame buffers.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          To support dumb GEM objects drivers must implement the
+          <methodname>dumb_create</methodname>,
+          <methodname>dumb_destroy</methodname> and
+          <methodname>dumb_map_offset</methodname> operations.
+        </para>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <synopsis>int (*dumb_create)(struct drm_file *file_priv, struct drm_device *dev,
+                     struct drm_mode_create_dumb *args);</synopsis>
+            <para>
+              The <methodname>dumb_create</methodname> operation creates a GEM
+              object suitable for scanout based on the width, height and depth
+              from the struct <structname>drm_mode_create_dumb</structname>
+              argument. It fills the argument's <structfield>handle</structfield>,
+              <structfield>pitch</structfield> and <structfield>size</structfield>
+              fields with a handle for the newly created GEM object and its line
+              pitch and size in bytes.
+            </para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <synopsis>int (*dumb_destroy)(struct drm_file *file_priv, struct drm_device *dev,
+                      uint32_t handle);</synopsis>
+            <para>
+              The <methodname>dumb_destroy</methodname> operation destroys a dumb
+              GEM object created by <methodname>dumb_create</methodname>.
+            </para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <synopsis>int (*dumb_map_offset)(struct drm_file *file_priv, struct drm_device *dev,
+                         uint32_t handle, uint64_t *offset);</synopsis>
+            <para>
+              The <methodname>dumb_map_offset</methodname> operation associates an
+              mmap fake offset with the GEM object given by the handle and returns
+              it. Drivers must use the
+              <function>drm_gem_create_mmap_offset</function> function to
+              associate the fake offset as described in
+              <xref linkend="drm-gem-objects-mapping"/>.
+            </para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Memory Coherency</title>
+        <para>
+          When mapped to the device or used in a command buffer, backing pages
+          for an object are flushed to memory and marked write combined so as to
+          be coherent with the GPU. Likewise, if the CPU accesses an object
+          after the GPU has finished rendering to the object, then the object
+          must be made coherent with the CPU's view of memory, usually involving
+          GPU cache flushing of various kinds. This core CPU&lt;-&gt;GPU
+          coherency management is provided by a device-specific ioctl, which
+          evaluates an object's current domain and performs any necessary
+          flushing or synchronization to put the object into the desired
+          coherency domain (note that the object may be busy, i.e. an active
+          render target; in that case, setting the domain blocks the client and
+          waits for rendering to complete before performing any necessary
+          flushing operations).
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Command Execution</title>
+        <para>
+	  Perhaps the most important GEM function for GPU devices is providing a
+          command execution interface to clients. Client programs construct
+          command buffers containing references to previously allocated memory
+          objects, and then submit them to GEM. At that point, GEM takes care to
+          bind all the objects into the GTT, execute the buffer, and provide
+          necessary synchronization between clients accessing the same buffers.
+          This often involves evicting some objects from the GTT and re-binding
+          others (a fairly expensive operation), and providing relocation
+          support which hides fixed GTT offsets from clients. Clients must take
+          care not to submit command buffers that reference more objects than
+          can fit in the GTT; otherwise, GEM will reject them and no rendering
+          will occur. Similarly, if several objects in the buffer require fence
+          registers to be allocated for correct rendering (e.g. 2D blits on
+          pre-965 chips), care must be taken not to require more fence registers
+          than are available to the client. Such resource management should be
+          abstracted from the client in libdrm.
+        </para>
       </sect3>
     </sect2>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <!-- Internals: mode setting -->
 
+  <sect1 id="drm-mode-setting">
+    <title>Mode Setting</title>
+    <para>
+      Drivers must initialize the mode setting core by calling
+      <function>drm_mode_config_init</function> on the DRM device. The function
+      initializes the <structname>drm_device</structname>
+      <structfield>mode_config</structfield> field and never fails. Once done,
+      mode configuration must be setup by initializing the following fields.
+    </para>
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <synopsis>int min_width, min_height;
+int max_width, max_height;</synopsis>
+        <para>
+	  Minimum and maximum width and height of the frame buffers in pixel
+	  units.
+	</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+        <synopsis>struct drm_mode_config_funcs *funcs;</synopsis>
+	<para>Mode setting functions.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
     <sect2>
-      <title>Output configuration</title>
+      <title>Frame Buffer Creation</title>
+      <synopsis>struct drm_framebuffer *(*fb_create)(struct drm_device *dev,
+				     struct drm_file *file_priv,
+				     struct drm_mode_fb_cmd2 *mode_cmd);</synopsis>
       <para>
-	The final initialization task is output configuration.  This involves:
-	<itemizedlist>
-	  <listitem>
-	    Finding and initializing the CRTCs, encoders, and connectors
-	    for the device.
-	  </listitem>
-	  <listitem>
-	    Creating an initial configuration.
-	  </listitem>
-	  <listitem>
-	    Registering a framebuffer console driver.
-	  </listitem>
-	</itemizedlist>
+        Frame buffers are abstract memory objects that provide a source of
+        pixels to scanout to a CRTC. Applications explicitly request the
+        creation of frame buffers through the DRM_IOCTL_MODE_ADDFB(2) ioctls and
+        receive an opaque handle that can be passed to the KMS CRTC control,
+        plane configuration and page flip functions.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        Frame buffers rely on the underneath memory manager for low-level memory
+        operations. When creating a frame buffer applications pass a memory
+        handle (or a list of memory handles for multi-planar formats) through
+        the <parameter>drm_mode_fb_cmd2</parameter> argument. This document
+        assumes that the driver uses GEM, those handles thus reference GEM
+        objects.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        Drivers must first validate the requested frame buffer parameters passed
+        through the mode_cmd argument. In particular this is where invalid
+        sizes, pixel formats or pitches can be caught.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        If the parameters are deemed valid, drivers then create, initialize and
+        return an instance of struct <structname>drm_framebuffer</structname>.
+        If desired the instance can be embedded in a larger driver-specific
+	structure. Drivers must fill its <structfield>width</structfield>,
+	<structfield>height</structfield>, <structfield>pitches</structfield>,
+        <structfield>offsets</structfield>, <structfield>depth</structfield>,
+        <structfield>bits_per_pixel</structfield> and
+        <structfield>pixel_format</structfield> fields from the values passed
+        through the <parameter>drm_mode_fb_cmd2</parameter> argument. They
+        should call the <function>drm_helper_mode_fill_fb_struct</function>
+        helper function to do so.
+      </para>
+
+      <para>
+	The initailization of the new framebuffer instance is finalized with a
+	call to <function>drm_framebuffer_init</function> which takes a pointer
+	to DRM frame buffer operations (struct
+	<structname>drm_framebuffer_funcs</structname>). Note that this function
+	publishes the framebuffer and so from this point on it can be accessed
+	concurrently from other threads. Hence it must be the last step in the
+	driver's framebuffer initialization sequence. Frame buffer operations
+	are
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <synopsis>int (*create_handle)(struct drm_framebuffer *fb,
+		     struct drm_file *file_priv, unsigned int *handle);</synopsis>
+            <para>
+              Create a handle to the frame buffer underlying memory object. If
+              the frame buffer uses a multi-plane format, the handle will
+              reference the memory object associated with the first plane.
+            </para>
+            <para>
+              Drivers call <function>drm_gem_handle_create</function> to create
+              the handle.
+            </para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <synopsis>void (*destroy)(struct drm_framebuffer *framebuffer);</synopsis>
+            <para>
+              Destroy the frame buffer object and frees all associated
+              resources. Drivers must call
+              <function>drm_framebuffer_cleanup</function> to free resources
+              allocated by the DRM core for the frame buffer object, and must
+              make sure to unreference all memory objects associated with the
+              frame buffer. Handles created by the
+              <methodname>create_handle</methodname> operation are released by
+              the DRM core.
+            </para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <synopsis>int (*dirty)(struct drm_framebuffer *framebuffer,
+	     struct drm_file *file_priv, unsigned flags, unsigned color,
+	     struct drm_clip_rect *clips, unsigned num_clips);</synopsis>
+            <para>
+              This optional operation notifies the driver that a region of the
+              frame buffer has changed in response to a DRM_IOCTL_MODE_DIRTYFB
+              ioctl call.
+            </para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	The lifetime of a drm framebuffer is controlled with a reference count,
+	drivers can grab additional references with
+	<function>drm_framebuffer_reference</function> </para> and drop them
+	again with <function>drm_framebuffer_unreference</function>. For
+	driver-private framebuffers for which the last reference is never
+	dropped (e.g. for the fbdev framebuffer when the struct
+	<structname>drm_framebuffer</structname> is embedded into the fbdev
+	helper struct) drivers can manually clean up a framebuffer at module
+	unload time with
+	<function>drm_framebuffer_unregister_private</function>.
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Output Polling</title>
+      <synopsis>void (*output_poll_changed)(struct drm_device *dev);</synopsis>
+      <para>
+        This operation notifies the driver that the status of one or more
+        connectors has changed. Drivers that use the fb helper can just call the
+        <function>drm_fb_helper_hotplug_event</function> function to handle this
+        operation.
+      </para>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Locking</title>
+      <para>
+        Beside some lookup structures with their own locking (which is hidden
+	behind the interface functions) most of the modeset state is protected
+	by the <code>dev-&lt;mode_config.lock</code> mutex and additionally
+	per-crtc locks to allow cursor updates, pageflips and similar operations
+	to occur concurrently with background tasks like output detection.
+	Operations which cross domains like a full modeset always grab all
+	locks. Drivers there need to protect resources shared between crtcs with
+	additional locking. They also need to be careful to always grab the
+	relevant crtc locks if a modset functions touches crtc state, e.g. for
+	load detection (which does only grab the <code>mode_config.lock</code>
+	to allow concurrent screen updates on live crtcs).
+      </para>
+    </sect2>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <!-- Internals: kms initialization and cleanup -->
+
+  <sect1 id="drm-kms-init">
+    <title>KMS Initialization and Cleanup</title>
+    <para>
+      A KMS device is abstracted and exposed as a set of planes, CRTCs, encoders
+      and connectors. KMS drivers must thus create and initialize all those
+      objects at load time after initializing mode setting.
+    </para>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>CRTCs (struct <structname>drm_crtc</structname>)</title>
+      <para>
+        A CRTC is an abstraction representing a part of the chip that contains a
+	pointer to a scanout buffer. Therefore, the number of CRTCs available
+	determines how many independent scanout buffers can be active at any
+	given time. The CRTC structure contains several fields to support this:
+	a pointer to some video memory (abstracted as a frame buffer object), a
+	display mode, and an (x, y) offset into the video memory to support
+	panning or configurations where one piece of video memory spans multiple
+	CRTCs.
       </para>
       <sect3>
-	<title>Output discovery and initialization</title>
-	<para>
-	  Several core functions exist to create CRTCs, encoders, and
-	  connectors, namely: drm_crtc_init(), drm_connector_init(), and
-	  drm_encoder_init(), along with several "helper" functions to
-	  perform common tasks.
-	</para>
-	<para>
-	  Connectors should be registered with sysfs once they've been
-	  detected and initialized, using the
-	  drm_sysfs_connector_add() function.  Likewise, when they're
-	  removed from the system, they should be destroyed with
-	  drm_sysfs_connector_remove().
-	</para>
-	<programlisting>
-<![CDATA[
+        <title>CRTC Initialization</title>
+        <para>
+          A KMS device must create and register at least one struct
+          <structname>drm_crtc</structname> instance. The instance is allocated
+          and zeroed by the driver, possibly as part of a larger structure, and
+          registered with a call to <function>drm_crtc_init</function> with a
+          pointer to CRTC functions.
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>CRTC Operations</title>
+        <sect4>
+          <title>Set Configuration</title>
+          <synopsis>int (*set_config)(struct drm_mode_set *set);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Apply a new CRTC configuration to the device. The configuration
+            specifies a CRTC, a frame buffer to scan out from, a (x,y) position in
+            the frame buffer, a display mode and an array of connectors to drive
+            with the CRTC if possible.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            If the frame buffer specified in the configuration is NULL, the driver
+            must detach all encoders connected to the CRTC and all connectors
+            attached to those encoders and disable them.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            This operation is called with the mode config lock held.
+          </para>
+          <note><para>
+            FIXME: How should set_config interact with DPMS? If the CRTC is
+            suspended, should it be resumed?
+          </para></note>
+        </sect4>
+        <sect4>
+          <title>Page Flipping</title>
+          <synopsis>int (*page_flip)(struct drm_crtc *crtc, struct drm_framebuffer *fb,
+                   struct drm_pending_vblank_event *event);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Schedule a page flip to the given frame buffer for the CRTC. This
+            operation is called with the mode config mutex held.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            Page flipping is a synchronization mechanism that replaces the frame
+            buffer being scanned out by the CRTC with a new frame buffer during
+            vertical blanking, avoiding tearing. When an application requests a page
+            flip the DRM core verifies that the new frame buffer is large enough to
+            be scanned out by  the CRTC in the currently configured mode and then
+            calls the CRTC <methodname>page_flip</methodname> operation with a
+            pointer to the new frame buffer.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            The <methodname>page_flip</methodname> operation schedules a page flip.
+            Once any pending rendering targeting the new frame buffer has
+            completed, the CRTC will be reprogrammed to display that frame buffer
+            after the next vertical refresh. The operation must return immediately
+            without waiting for rendering or page flip to complete and must block
+            any new rendering to the frame buffer until the page flip completes.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            If a page flip can be successfully scheduled the driver must set the
+            <code>drm_crtc-&lt;fb</code> field to the new framebuffer pointed to
+            by <code>fb</code>. This is important so that the reference counting
+            on framebuffers stays balanced.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            If a page flip is already pending, the
+            <methodname>page_flip</methodname> operation must return
+            -<errorname>EBUSY</errorname>.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            To synchronize page flip to vertical blanking the driver will likely
+            need to enable vertical blanking interrupts. It should call
+            <function>drm_vblank_get</function> for that purpose, and call
+            <function>drm_vblank_put</function> after the page flip completes.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            If the application has requested to be notified when page flip completes
+            the <methodname>page_flip</methodname> operation will be called with a
+            non-NULL <parameter>event</parameter> argument pointing to a
+            <structname>drm_pending_vblank_event</structname> instance. Upon page
+            flip completion the driver must call <methodname>drm_send_vblank_event</methodname>
+            to fill in the event and send to wake up any waiting processes.
+            This can be performed with
+            <programlisting><![CDATA[
+            spin_lock_irqsave(&dev->event_lock, flags);
+            ...
+            drm_send_vblank_event(dev, pipe, event);
+            spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev->event_lock, flags);
+            ]]></programlisting>
+          </para>
+          <note><para>
+            FIXME: Could drivers that don't need to wait for rendering to complete
+            just add the event to <literal>dev-&gt;vblank_event_list</literal> and
+            let the DRM core handle everything, as for "normal" vertical blanking
+            events?
+          </para></note>
+          <para>
+            While waiting for the page flip to complete, the
+            <literal>event-&gt;base.link</literal> list head can be used freely by
+            the driver to store the pending event in a driver-specific list.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            If the file handle is closed before the event is signaled, drivers must
+            take care to destroy the event in their
+            <methodname>preclose</methodname> operation (and, if needed, call
+            <function>drm_vblank_put</function>).
+          </para>
+        </sect4>
+        <sect4>
+          <title>Miscellaneous</title>
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <synopsis>void (*set_property)(struct drm_crtc *crtc,
+                     struct drm_property *property, uint64_t value);</synopsis>
+              <para>
+                Set the value of the given CRTC property to
+                <parameter>value</parameter>. See <xref linkend="drm-kms-properties"/>
+                for more information about properties.
+              </para>
+            </listitem>
+            <listitem>
+              <synopsis>void (*gamma_set)(struct drm_crtc *crtc, u16 *r, u16 *g, u16 *b,
+                        uint32_t start, uint32_t size);</synopsis>
+              <para>
+                Apply a gamma table to the device. The operation is optional.
+              </para>
+            </listitem>
+            <listitem>
+              <synopsis>void (*destroy)(struct drm_crtc *crtc);</synopsis>
+              <para>
+                Destroy the CRTC when not needed anymore. See
+                <xref linkend="drm-kms-init"/>.
+              </para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </sect4>
+      </sect3>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Planes (struct <structname>drm_plane</structname>)</title>
+      <para>
+        A plane represents an image source that can be blended with or overlayed
+	on top of a CRTC during the scanout process. Planes are associated with
+	a frame buffer to crop a portion of the image memory (source) and
+	optionally scale it to a destination size. The result is then blended
+	with or overlayed on top of a CRTC.
+      </para>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Plane Initialization</title>
+        <para>
+          Planes are optional. To create a plane, a KMS drivers allocates and
+          zeroes an instances of struct <structname>drm_plane</structname>
+          (possibly as part of a larger structure) and registers it with a call
+          to <function>drm_plane_init</function>. The function takes a bitmask
+          of the CRTCs that can be associated with the plane, a pointer to the
+          plane functions and a list of format supported formats.
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Plane Operations</title>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <synopsis>int (*update_plane)(struct drm_plane *plane, struct drm_crtc *crtc,
+                        struct drm_framebuffer *fb, int crtc_x, int crtc_y,
+                        unsigned int crtc_w, unsigned int crtc_h,
+                        uint32_t src_x, uint32_t src_y,
+                        uint32_t src_w, uint32_t src_h);</synopsis>
+            <para>
+              Enable and configure the plane to use the given CRTC and frame buffer.
+            </para>
+            <para>
+              The source rectangle in frame buffer memory coordinates is given by
+              the <parameter>src_x</parameter>, <parameter>src_y</parameter>,
+              <parameter>src_w</parameter> and <parameter>src_h</parameter>
+              parameters (as 16.16 fixed point values). Devices that don't support
+              subpixel plane coordinates can ignore the fractional part.
+            </para>
+            <para>
+              The destination rectangle in CRTC coordinates is given by the
+              <parameter>crtc_x</parameter>, <parameter>crtc_y</parameter>,
+              <parameter>crtc_w</parameter> and <parameter>crtc_h</parameter>
+              parameters (as integer values). Devices scale the source rectangle to
+              the destination rectangle. If scaling is not supported, and the source
+              rectangle size doesn't match the destination rectangle size, the
+              driver must return a -<errorname>EINVAL</errorname> error.
+            </para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <synopsis>int (*disable_plane)(struct drm_plane *plane);</synopsis>
+            <para>
+              Disable the plane. The DRM core calls this method in response to a
+              DRM_IOCTL_MODE_SETPLANE ioctl call with the frame buffer ID set to 0.
+              Disabled planes must not be processed by the CRTC.
+            </para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <synopsis>void (*destroy)(struct drm_plane *plane);</synopsis>
+            <para>
+              Destroy the plane when not needed anymore. See
+              <xref linkend="drm-kms-init"/>.
+            </para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect3>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Encoders (struct <structname>drm_encoder</structname>)</title>
+      <para>
+        An encoder takes pixel data from a CRTC and converts it to a format
+	suitable for any attached connectors. On some devices, it may be
+	possible to have a CRTC send data to more than one encoder. In that
+	case, both encoders would receive data from the same scanout buffer,
+	resulting in a "cloned" display configuration across the connectors
+	attached to each encoder.
+      </para>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Encoder Initialization</title>
+        <para>
+          As for CRTCs, a KMS driver must create, initialize and register at
+          least one struct <structname>drm_encoder</structname> instance. The
+          instance is allocated and zeroed by the driver, possibly as part of a
+          larger structure.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Drivers must initialize the struct <structname>drm_encoder</structname>
+          <structfield>possible_crtcs</structfield> and
+          <structfield>possible_clones</structfield> fields before registering the
+          encoder. Both fields are bitmasks of respectively the CRTCs that the
+          encoder can be connected to, and sibling encoders candidate for cloning.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          After being initialized, the encoder must be registered with a call to
+          <function>drm_encoder_init</function>. The function takes a pointer to
+          the encoder functions and an encoder type. Supported types are
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              DRM_MODE_ENCODER_DAC for VGA and analog on DVI-I/DVI-A
+              </listitem>
+            <listitem>
+              DRM_MODE_ENCODER_TMDS for DVI, HDMI and (embedded) DisplayPort
+            </listitem>
+            <listitem>
+              DRM_MODE_ENCODER_LVDS for display panels
+            </listitem>
+            <listitem>
+              DRM_MODE_ENCODER_TVDAC for TV output (Composite, S-Video, Component,
+              SCART)
+            </listitem>
+            <listitem>
+              DRM_MODE_ENCODER_VIRTUAL for virtual machine displays
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Encoders must be attached to a CRTC to be used. DRM drivers leave
+          encoders unattached at initialization time. Applications (or the fbdev
+          compatibility layer when implemented) are responsible for attaching the
+          encoders they want to use to a CRTC.
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Encoder Operations</title>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <synopsis>void (*destroy)(struct drm_encoder *encoder);</synopsis>
+            <para>
+              Called to destroy the encoder when not needed anymore. See
+              <xref linkend="drm-kms-init"/>.
+            </para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <synopsis>void (*set_property)(struct drm_plane *plane,
+                     struct drm_property *property, uint64_t value);</synopsis>
+            <para>
+              Set the value of the given plane property to
+              <parameter>value</parameter>. See <xref linkend="drm-kms-properties"/>
+              for more information about properties.
+            </para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </sect3>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Connectors (struct <structname>drm_connector</structname>)</title>
+      <para>
+        A connector is the final destination for pixel data on a device, and
+	usually connects directly to an external display device like a monitor
+	or laptop panel. A connector can only be attached to one encoder at a
+	time. The connector is also the structure where information about the
+	attached display is kept, so it contains fields for display data, EDID
+	data, DPMS &amp; connection status, and information about modes
+	supported on the attached displays.
+      </para>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Connector Initialization</title>
+        <para>
+          Finally a KMS driver must create, initialize, register and attach at
+          least one struct <structname>drm_connector</structname> instance. The
+          instance is created as other KMS objects and initialized by setting the
+          following fields.
+        </para>
+        <variablelist>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term><structfield>interlace_allowed</structfield></term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              Whether the connector can handle interlaced modes.
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term><structfield>doublescan_allowed</structfield></term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              Whether the connector can handle doublescan.
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term><structfield>display_info
+            </structfield></term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              Display information is filled from EDID information when a display
+              is detected. For non hot-pluggable displays such as flat panels in
+              embedded systems, the driver should initialize the
+              <structfield>display_info</structfield>.<structfield>width_mm</structfield>
+              and
+              <structfield>display_info</structfield>.<structfield>height_mm</structfield>
+              fields with the physical size of the display.
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term id="drm-kms-connector-polled"><structfield>polled</structfield></term>
+            <listitem><para>
+              Connector polling mode, a combination of
+              <variablelist>
+                <varlistentry>
+                  <term>DRM_CONNECTOR_POLL_HPD</term>
+                  <listitem><para>
+                    The connector generates hotplug events and doesn't need to be
+                    periodically polled. The CONNECT and DISCONNECT flags must not
+                    be set together with the HPD flag.
+                  </para></listitem>
+                </varlistentry>
+                <varlistentry>
+                  <term>DRM_CONNECTOR_POLL_CONNECT</term>
+                  <listitem><para>
+                    Periodically poll the connector for connection.
+                  </para></listitem>
+                </varlistentry>
+                <varlistentry>
+                  <term>DRM_CONNECTOR_POLL_DISCONNECT</term>
+                  <listitem><para>
+                    Periodically poll the connector for disconnection.
+                  </para></listitem>
+                </varlistentry>
+              </variablelist>
+              Set to 0 for connectors that don't support connection status
+              discovery.
+            </para></listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+        </variablelist>
+        <para>
+          The connector is then registered with a call to
+          <function>drm_connector_init</function> with a pointer to the connector
+          functions and a connector type, and exposed through sysfs with a call to
+          <function>drm_sysfs_connector_add</function>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Supported connector types are
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_VGA</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_DVII</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_DVID</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_DVIA</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_Composite</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_SVIDEO</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_LVDS</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_Component</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_9PinDIN</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_DisplayPort</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_HDMIA</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_HDMIB</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_TV</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_eDP</listitem>
+            <listitem>DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_VIRTUAL</listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Connectors must be attached to an encoder to be used. For devices that
+          map connectors to encoders 1:1, the connector should be attached at
+          initialization time with a call to
+          <function>drm_mode_connector_attach_encoder</function>. The driver must
+          also set the <structname>drm_connector</structname>
+          <structfield>encoder</structfield> field to point to the attached
+          encoder.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+          Finally, drivers must initialize the connectors state change detection
+          with a call to <function>drm_kms_helper_poll_init</function>. If at
+          least one connector is pollable but can't generate hotplug interrupts
+          (indicated by the DRM_CONNECTOR_POLL_CONNECT and
+          DRM_CONNECTOR_POLL_DISCONNECT connector flags), a delayed work will
+          automatically be queued to periodically poll for changes. Connectors
+          that can generate hotplug interrupts must be marked with the
+          DRM_CONNECTOR_POLL_HPD flag instead, and their interrupt handler must
+          call <function>drm_helper_hpd_irq_event</function>. The function will
+          queue a delayed work to check the state of all connectors, but no
+          periodic polling will be done.
+        </para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+        <title>Connector Operations</title>
+        <note><para>
+          Unless otherwise state, all operations are mandatory.
+        </para></note>
+        <sect4>
+          <title>DPMS</title>
+          <synopsis>void (*dpms)(struct drm_connector *connector, int mode);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            The DPMS operation sets the power state of a connector. The mode
+            argument is one of
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem><para>DRM_MODE_DPMS_ON</para></listitem>
+              <listitem><para>DRM_MODE_DPMS_STANDBY</para></listitem>
+              <listitem><para>DRM_MODE_DPMS_SUSPEND</para></listitem>
+              <listitem><para>DRM_MODE_DPMS_OFF</para></listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            In all but DPMS_ON mode the encoder to which the connector is attached
+            should put the display in low-power mode by driving its signals
+            appropriately. If more than one connector is attached to the encoder
+            care should be taken not to change the power state of other displays as
+            a side effect. Low-power mode should be propagated to the encoders and
+            CRTCs when all related connectors are put in low-power mode.
+          </para>
+        </sect4>
+        <sect4>
+          <title>Modes</title>
+          <synopsis>int (*fill_modes)(struct drm_connector *connector, uint32_t max_width,
+                      uint32_t max_height);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Fill the mode list with all supported modes for the connector. If the
+            <parameter>max_width</parameter> and <parameter>max_height</parameter>
+            arguments are non-zero, the implementation must ignore all modes wider
+            than <parameter>max_width</parameter> or higher than
+            <parameter>max_height</parameter>.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            The connector must also fill in this operation its
+            <structfield>display_info</structfield>
+            <structfield>width_mm</structfield> and
+            <structfield>height_mm</structfield> fields with the connected display
+            physical size in millimeters. The fields should be set to 0 if the value
+            isn't known or is not applicable (for instance for projector devices).
+          </para>
+        </sect4>
+        <sect4>
+          <title>Connection Status</title>
+          <para>
+            The connection status is updated through polling or hotplug events when
+            supported (see <xref linkend="drm-kms-connector-polled"/>). The status
+            value is reported to userspace through ioctls and must not be used
+            inside the driver, as it only gets initialized by a call to
+            <function>drm_mode_getconnector</function> from userspace.
+          </para>
+          <synopsis>enum drm_connector_status (*detect)(struct drm_connector *connector,
+                                        bool force);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Check to see if anything is attached to the connector. The
+            <parameter>force</parameter> parameter is set to false whilst polling or
+            to true when checking the connector due to user request.
+            <parameter>force</parameter> can be used by the driver to avoid
+            expensive, destructive operations during automated probing.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            Return connector_status_connected if something is connected to the
+            connector, connector_status_disconnected if nothing is connected and
+            connector_status_unknown if the connection state isn't known.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            Drivers should only return connector_status_connected if the connection
+            status has really been probed as connected. Connectors that can't detect
+            the connection status, or failed connection status probes, should return
+            connector_status_unknown.
+          </para>
+        </sect4>
+        <sect4>
+          <title>Miscellaneous</title>
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <synopsis>void (*set_property)(struct drm_connector *connector,
+                     struct drm_property *property, uint64_t value);</synopsis>
+              <para>
+                Set the value of the given connector property to
+                <parameter>value</parameter>. See <xref linkend="drm-kms-properties"/>
+                for more information about properties.
+              </para>
+            </listitem>
+            <listitem>
+              <synopsis>void (*destroy)(struct drm_connector *connector);</synopsis>
+              <para>
+                Destroy the connector when not needed anymore. See
+                <xref linkend="drm-kms-init"/>.
+              </para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </sect4>
+      </sect3>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Cleanup</title>
+      <para>
+        The DRM core manages its objects' lifetime. When an object is not needed
+	anymore the core calls its destroy function, which must clean up and
+	free every resource allocated for the object. Every
+	<function>drm_*_init</function> call must be matched with a
+	corresponding <function>drm_*_cleanup</function> call to cleanup CRTCs
+	(<function>drm_crtc_cleanup</function>), planes
+	(<function>drm_plane_cleanup</function>), encoders
+	(<function>drm_encoder_cleanup</function>) and connectors
+	(<function>drm_connector_cleanup</function>). Furthermore, connectors
+	that have been added to sysfs must be removed by a call to
+	<function>drm_sysfs_connector_remove</function> before calling
+	<function>drm_connector_cleanup</function>.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        Connectors state change detection must be cleanup up with a call to
+	<function>drm_kms_helper_poll_fini</function>.
+      </para>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Output discovery and initialization example</title>
+      <programlisting><![CDATA[
 void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev)
 {
 	struct drm_connector *connector;
@@ -556,252 +1667,899 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev)
 	drm_connector_helper_add(connector, &intel_crt_connector_helper_funcs);
 
 	drm_sysfs_connector_add(connector);
-}
-]]>
-	</programlisting>
-	<para>
-	  In the example above (again, taken from the i915 driver), a
-	  CRT connector and encoder combination is created.  A device-specific
-	  i2c bus is also created for fetching EDID data and
-	  performing monitor detection.  Once the process is complete,
-	  the new connector is registered with sysfs to make its
-	  properties available to applications.
-	</para>
-	<sect4>
-	  <title>Helper functions and core functions</title>
-	  <para>
-	    Since many PC-class graphics devices have similar display output
-	    designs, the DRM provides a set of helper functions to make
-	    output management easier.  The core helper routines handle
-	    encoder re-routing and the disabling of unused functions following
-	    mode setting.  Using the helpers is optional, but recommended for
-	    devices with PC-style architectures (i.e. a set of display planes
-	    for feeding pixels to encoders which are in turn routed to
-	    connectors).  Devices with more complex requirements needing
-	    finer grained management may opt to use the core callbacks
-	    directly.
-	  </para>
-	  <para>
-	    [Insert typical diagram here.]  [Insert OMAP style config here.]
-	  </para>
-	</sect4>
-	<para>
-	  Each encoder object needs to provide:
-	  <itemizedlist>
-	    <listitem>
-	      A DPMS (basically on/off) function.
-	    </listitem>
-	    <listitem>
-	      A mode-fixup function (for converting requested modes into
-	      native hardware timings).
-	    </listitem>
-	    <listitem>
-	      Functions (prepare, set, and commit) for use by the core DRM
-	      helper functions.
-	    </listitem>
-	  </itemizedlist>
-	  Connector helpers need to provide functions (mode-fetch, validity,
-	  and encoder-matching) for returning an ideal encoder for a given
-	  connector.  The core connector functions include a DPMS callback,
-	  save/restore routines (deprecated), detection, mode probing,
-	  property handling, and cleanup functions.
-	</para>
-<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc.h-->
-<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc.c-->
-<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc_helper.c-->
-      </sect3>
+}]]></programlisting>
+      <para>
+        In the example above (taken from the i915 driver), a CRTC, connector and
+        encoder combination is created. A device-specific i2c bus is also
+        created for fetching EDID data and performing monitor detection. Once
+        the process is complete, the new connector is registered with sysfs to
+        make its properties available to applications.
+      </para>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>KMS API Functions</title>
+!Edrivers/gpu/drm/drm_crtc.c
     </sect2>
   </sect1>
 
-  <!-- Internals: vblank handling -->
+  <!-- Internals: kms helper functions -->
 
   <sect1>
-    <title>VBlank event handling</title>
+    <title>Mode Setting Helper Functions</title>
+    <para>
+      The CRTC, encoder and connector functions provided by the drivers
+      implement the DRM API. They're called by the DRM core and ioctl handlers
+      to handle device state changes and configuration request. As implementing
+      those functions often requires logic not specific to drivers, mid-layer
+      helper functions are available to avoid duplicating boilerplate code.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      The DRM core contains one mid-layer implementation. The mid-layer provides
+      implementations of several CRTC, encoder and connector functions (called
+      from the top of the mid-layer) that pre-process requests and call
+      lower-level functions provided by the driver (at the bottom of the
+      mid-layer). For instance, the
+      <function>drm_crtc_helper_set_config</function> function can be used to
+      fill the struct <structname>drm_crtc_funcs</structname>
+      <structfield>set_config</structfield> field. When called, it will split
+      the <methodname>set_config</methodname> operation in smaller, simpler
+      operations and call the driver to handle them.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      To use the mid-layer, drivers call <function>drm_crtc_helper_add</function>,
+      <function>drm_encoder_helper_add</function> and
+      <function>drm_connector_helper_add</function> functions to install their
+      mid-layer bottom operations handlers, and fill the
+      <structname>drm_crtc_funcs</structname>,
+      <structname>drm_encoder_funcs</structname> and
+      <structname>drm_connector_funcs</structname> structures with pointers to
+      the mid-layer top API functions. Installing the mid-layer bottom operation
+      handlers is best done right after registering the corresponding KMS object.
+    </para>
     <para>
-      The DRM core exposes two vertical blank related ioctls:
+      The mid-layer is not split between CRTC, encoder and connector operations.
+      To use it, a driver must provide bottom functions for all of the three KMS
+      entities.
+    </para>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Helper Functions</title>
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>int drm_crtc_helper_set_config(struct drm_mode_set *set);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            The <function>drm_crtc_helper_set_config</function> helper function
+            is a CRTC <methodname>set_config</methodname> implementation. It
+            first tries to locate the best encoder for each connector by calling
+            the connector <methodname>best_encoder</methodname> helper
+            operation.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            After locating the appropriate encoders, the helper function will
+            call the <methodname>mode_fixup</methodname> encoder and CRTC helper
+            operations to adjust the requested mode, or reject it completely in
+            which case an error will be returned to the application. If the new
+            configuration after mode adjustment is identical to the current
+            configuration the helper function will return without performing any
+            other operation.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            If the adjusted mode is identical to the current mode but changes to
+            the frame buffer need to be applied, the
+            <function>drm_crtc_helper_set_config</function> function will call
+            the CRTC <methodname>mode_set_base</methodname> helper operation. If
+            the adjusted mode differs from the current mode, or if the
+            <methodname>mode_set_base</methodname> helper operation is not
+            provided, the helper function performs a full mode set sequence by
+            calling the <methodname>prepare</methodname>,
+            <methodname>mode_set</methodname> and
+            <methodname>commit</methodname> CRTC and encoder helper operations,
+            in that order.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>void drm_helper_connector_dpms(struct drm_connector *connector, int mode);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            The <function>drm_helper_connector_dpms</function> helper function
+            is a connector <methodname>dpms</methodname> implementation that
+            tracks power state of connectors. To use the function, drivers must
+            provide <methodname>dpms</methodname> helper operations for CRTCs
+            and encoders to apply the DPMS state to the device.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            The mid-layer doesn't track the power state of CRTCs and encoders.
+            The <methodname>dpms</methodname> helper operations can thus be
+            called with a mode identical to the currently active mode.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>int drm_helper_probe_single_connector_modes(struct drm_connector *connector,
+                                            uint32_t maxX, uint32_t maxY);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            The <function>drm_helper_probe_single_connector_modes</function> helper
+            function is a connector <methodname>fill_modes</methodname>
+            implementation that updates the connection status for the connector
+            and then retrieves a list of modes by calling the connector
+            <methodname>get_modes</methodname> helper operation.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            The function filters out modes larger than
+            <parameter>max_width</parameter> and <parameter>max_height</parameter>
+            if specified. It then calls the connector
+            <methodname>mode_valid</methodname> helper operation for  each mode in
+            the probed list to check whether the mode is valid for the connector.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>CRTC Helper Operations</title>
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem id="drm-helper-crtc-mode-fixup">
+          <synopsis>bool (*mode_fixup)(struct drm_crtc *crtc,
+                       const struct drm_display_mode *mode,
+                       struct drm_display_mode *adjusted_mode);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Let CRTCs adjust the requested mode or reject it completely. This
+            operation returns true if the mode is accepted (possibly after being
+            adjusted) or false if it is rejected.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            The <methodname>mode_fixup</methodname> operation should reject the
+            mode if it can't reasonably use it. The definition of "reasonable"
+            is currently fuzzy in this context. One possible behaviour would be
+            to set the adjusted mode to the panel timings when a fixed-mode
+            panel is used with hardware capable of scaling. Another behaviour
+            would be to accept any input mode and adjust it to the closest mode
+            supported by the hardware (FIXME: This needs to be clarified).
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>int (*mode_set_base)(struct drm_crtc *crtc, int x, int y,
+                     struct drm_framebuffer *old_fb)</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Move the CRTC on the current frame buffer (stored in
+            <literal>crtc-&gt;fb</literal>) to position (x,y). Any of the frame
+            buffer, x position or y position may have been modified.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            This helper operation is optional. If not provided, the
+            <function>drm_crtc_helper_set_config</function> function will fall
+            back to the <methodname>mode_set</methodname> helper operation.
+          </para>
+          <note><para>
+            FIXME: Why are x and y passed as arguments, as they can be accessed
+            through <literal>crtc-&gt;x</literal> and
+            <literal>crtc-&gt;y</literal>?
+          </para></note>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>void (*prepare)(struct drm_crtc *crtc);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Prepare the CRTC for mode setting. This operation is called after
+            validating the requested mode. Drivers use it to perform
+            device-specific operations required before setting the new mode.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>int (*mode_set)(struct drm_crtc *crtc, struct drm_display_mode *mode,
+                struct drm_display_mode *adjusted_mode, int x, int y,
+                struct drm_framebuffer *old_fb);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Set a new mode, position and frame buffer. Depending on the device
+            requirements, the mode can be stored internally by the driver and
+            applied in the <methodname>commit</methodname> operation, or
+            programmed to the hardware immediately.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            The <methodname>mode_set</methodname> operation returns 0 on success
+	    or a negative error code if an error occurs.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>void (*commit)(struct drm_crtc *crtc);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Commit a mode. This operation is called after setting the new mode.
+            Upon return the device must use the new mode and be fully
+            operational.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Encoder Helper Operations</title>
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>bool (*mode_fixup)(struct drm_encoder *encoder,
+                       const struct drm_display_mode *mode,
+                       struct drm_display_mode *adjusted_mode);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Let encoders adjust the requested mode or reject it completely. This
+            operation returns true if the mode is accepted (possibly after being
+            adjusted) or false if it is rejected. See the
+            <link linkend="drm-helper-crtc-mode-fixup">mode_fixup CRTC helper
+            operation</link> for an explanation of the allowed adjustments.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>void (*prepare)(struct drm_encoder *encoder);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Prepare the encoder for mode setting. This operation is called after
+            validating the requested mode. Drivers use it to perform
+            device-specific operations required before setting the new mode.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>void (*mode_set)(struct drm_encoder *encoder,
+                 struct drm_display_mode *mode,
+                 struct drm_display_mode *adjusted_mode);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Set a new mode. Depending on the device requirements, the mode can
+            be stored internally by the driver and applied in the
+            <methodname>commit</methodname> operation, or programmed to the
+            hardware immediately.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>void (*commit)(struct drm_encoder *encoder);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Commit a mode. This operation is called after setting the new mode.
+            Upon return the device must use the new mode and be fully
+            operational.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Connector Helper Operations</title>
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>struct drm_encoder *(*best_encoder)(struct drm_connector *connector);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Return a pointer to the best encoder for the connecter. Device that
+            map connectors to encoders 1:1 simply return the pointer to the
+            associated encoder. This operation is mandatory.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>int (*get_modes)(struct drm_connector *connector);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Fill the connector's <structfield>probed_modes</structfield> list
+            by parsing EDID data with <function>drm_add_edid_modes</function> or
+            calling <function>drm_mode_probed_add</function> directly for every
+            supported mode and return the number of modes it has detected. This
+            operation is mandatory.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            When adding modes manually the driver creates each mode with a call to
+            <function>drm_mode_create</function> and must fill the following fields.
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <synopsis>__u32 type;</synopsis>
+                <para>
+                  Mode type bitmask, a combination of
+                  <variablelist>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_TYPE_BUILTIN</term>
+                      <listitem><para>not used?</para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_TYPE_CLOCK_C</term>
+                      <listitem><para>not used?</para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_TYPE_CRTC_C</term>
+                      <listitem><para>not used?</para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>
+        DRM_MODE_TYPE_PREFERRED - The preferred mode for the connector
+                      </term>
+                      <listitem>
+                        <para>not used?</para>
+                      </listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_TYPE_DEFAULT</term>
+                      <listitem><para>not used?</para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_TYPE_USERDEF</term>
+                      <listitem><para>not used?</para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_TYPE_DRIVER</term>
+                      <listitem>
+                        <para>
+                          The mode has been created by the driver (as opposed to
+                          to user-created modes).
+                        </para>
+                      </listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                  </variablelist>
+                  Drivers must set the DRM_MODE_TYPE_DRIVER bit for all modes they
+                  create, and set the DRM_MODE_TYPE_PREFERRED bit for the preferred
+                  mode.
+                </para>
+              </listitem>
+              <listitem>
+                <synopsis>__u32 clock;</synopsis>
+                <para>Pixel clock frequency in kHz unit</para>
+              </listitem>
+              <listitem>
+                <synopsis>__u16 hdisplay, hsync_start, hsync_end, htotal;
+    __u16 vdisplay, vsync_start, vsync_end, vtotal;</synopsis>
+                <para>Horizontal and vertical timing information</para>
+                <screen><![CDATA[
+             Active                 Front           Sync           Back
+             Region                 Porch                          Porch
+    <-----------------------><----------------><-------------><-------------->
+
+      //////////////////////|
+     ////////////////////// |
+    //////////////////////  |..................               ................
+                                               _______________
+
+    <----- [hv]display ----->
+    <------------- [hv]sync_start ------------>
+    <--------------------- [hv]sync_end --------------------->
+    <-------------------------------- [hv]total ----------------------------->
+]]></screen>
+              </listitem>
+              <listitem>
+                <synopsis>__u16 hskew;
+    __u16 vscan;</synopsis>
+                <para>Unknown</para>
+              </listitem>
+              <listitem>
+                <synopsis>__u32 flags;</synopsis>
+                <para>
+                  Mode flags, a combination of
+                  <variablelist>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_PHSYNC</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        Horizontal sync is active high
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_NHSYNC</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        Horizontal sync is active low
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_PVSYNC</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        Vertical sync is active high
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_NVSYNC</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        Vertical sync is active low
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_INTERLACE</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        Mode is interlaced
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_DBLSCAN</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        Mode uses doublescan
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_CSYNC</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        Mode uses composite sync
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_PCSYNC</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        Composite sync is active high
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_NCSYNC</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        Composite sync is active low
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_HSKEW</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        hskew provided (not used?)
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_BCAST</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        not used?
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_PIXMUX</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        not used?
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_DBLCLK</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        not used?
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                    <varlistentry>
+                      <term>DRM_MODE_FLAG_CLKDIV2</term>
+                      <listitem><para>
+                        ?
+                      </para></listitem>
+                    </varlistentry>
+                  </variablelist>
+                </para>
+                <para>
+                  Note that modes marked with the INTERLACE or DBLSCAN flags will be
+                  filtered out by
+                  <function>drm_helper_probe_single_connector_modes</function> if
+                  the connector's <structfield>interlace_allowed</structfield> or
+                  <structfield>doublescan_allowed</structfield> field is set to 0.
+                </para>
+              </listitem>
+              <listitem>
+                <synopsis>char name[DRM_DISPLAY_MODE_LEN];</synopsis>
+                <para>
+                  Mode name. The driver must call
+                  <function>drm_mode_set_name</function> to fill the mode name from
+                  <structfield>hdisplay</structfield>,
+                  <structfield>vdisplay</structfield> and interlace flag after
+                  filling the corresponding fields.
+                </para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            The <structfield>vrefresh</structfield> value is computed by
+            <function>drm_helper_probe_single_connector_modes</function>.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            When parsing EDID data, <function>drm_add_edid_modes</function> fill the
+            connector <structfield>display_info</structfield>
+            <structfield>width_mm</structfield> and
+            <structfield>height_mm</structfield> fields. When creating modes
+            manually the <methodname>get_modes</methodname> helper operation must
+            set the <structfield>display_info</structfield>
+            <structfield>width_mm</structfield> and
+            <structfield>height_mm</structfield> fields if they haven't been set
+            already (for instance at initilization time when a fixed-size panel is
+            attached to the connector). The mode <structfield>width_mm</structfield>
+            and <structfield>height_mm</structfield> fields are only used internally
+            during EDID parsing and should not be set when creating modes manually.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>int (*mode_valid)(struct drm_connector *connector,
+		  struct drm_display_mode *mode);</synopsis>
+          <para>
+            Verify whether a mode is valid for the connector. Return MODE_OK for
+            supported modes and one of the enum drm_mode_status values (MODE_*)
+            for unsupported modes. This operation is mandatory.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            As the mode rejection reason is currently not used beside for
+            immediately removing the unsupported mode, an implementation can
+            return MODE_BAD regardless of the exact reason why the mode is not
+            valid.
+          </para>
+          <note><para>
+            Note that the <methodname>mode_valid</methodname> helper operation is
+            only called for modes detected by the device, and
+            <emphasis>not</emphasis> for modes set by the user through the CRTC
+            <methodname>set_config</methodname> operation.
+          </para></note>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Modeset Helper Functions Reference</title>
+!Edrivers/gpu/drm/drm_crtc_helper.c
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>fbdev Helper Functions Reference</title>
+!Pdrivers/gpu/drm/drm_fb_helper.c fbdev helpers
+!Edrivers/gpu/drm/drm_fb_helper.c
+!Iinclude/drm/drm_fb_helper.h
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Display Port Helper Functions Reference</title>
+!Pdrivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_helper.c dp helpers
+!Iinclude/drm/drm_dp_helper.h
+!Edrivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_helper.c
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>EDID Helper Functions Reference</title>
+!Edrivers/gpu/drm/drm_edid.c
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Rectangle Utilities Reference</title>
+!Pinclude/drm/drm_rect.h rect utils
+!Iinclude/drm/drm_rect.h
+!Edrivers/gpu/drm/drm_rect.c
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Flip-work Helper Reference</title>
+!Pinclude/drm/drm_flip_work.h flip utils
+!Iinclude/drm/drm_flip_work.h
+!Edrivers/gpu/drm/drm_flip_work.c
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>VMA Offset Manager</title>
+!Pdrivers/gpu/drm/drm_vma_manager.c vma offset manager
+!Edrivers/gpu/drm/drm_vma_manager.c
+!Iinclude/drm/drm_vma_manager.h
+    </sect2>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <!-- Internals: kms properties -->
+
+  <sect1 id="drm-kms-properties">
+    <title>KMS Properties</title>
+    <para>
+      Drivers may need to expose additional parameters to applications than
+      those described in the previous sections. KMS supports attaching
+      properties to CRTCs, connectors and planes and offers a userspace API to
+      list, get and set the property values.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      Properties are identified by a name that uniquely defines the property
+      purpose, and store an associated value. For all property types except blob
+      properties the value is a 64-bit unsigned integer.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      KMS differentiates between properties and property instances. Drivers
+      first create properties and then create and associate individual instances
+      of those properties to objects. A property can be instantiated multiple
+      times and associated with different objects. Values are stored in property
+      instances, and all other property information are stored in the propery
+      and shared between all instances of the property.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      Every property is created with a type that influences how the KMS core
+      handles the property. Supported property types are
       <variablelist>
         <varlistentry>
-          <term>DRM_IOCTL_WAIT_VBLANK</term>
-          <listitem>
-            <para>
-              This takes a struct drm_wait_vblank structure as its argument,
-              and it is used to block or request a signal when a specified
-              vblank event occurs.
-            </para>
-          </listitem>
+          <term>DRM_MODE_PROP_RANGE</term>
+          <listitem><para>Range properties report their minimum and maximum
+            admissible values. The KMS core verifies that values set by
+            application fit in that range.</para></listitem>
         </varlistentry>
         <varlistentry>
-          <term>DRM_IOCTL_MODESET_CTL</term>
-          <listitem>
-            <para>
-              This should be called by application level drivers before and
-              after mode setting, since on many devices the vertical blank
-              counter is reset at that time.  Internally, the DRM snapshots
-              the last vblank count when the ioctl is called with the
-              _DRM_PRE_MODESET command, so that the counter won't go backwards
-              (which is dealt with when _DRM_POST_MODESET is used).
-            </para>
-          </listitem>
+          <term>DRM_MODE_PROP_ENUM</term>
+          <listitem><para>Enumerated properties take a numerical value that
+            ranges from 0 to the number of enumerated values defined by the
+            property minus one, and associate a free-formed string name to each
+            value. Applications can retrieve the list of defined value-name pairs
+            and use the numerical value to get and set property instance values.
+            </para></listitem>
+        </varlistentry>
+        <varlistentry>
+          <term>DRM_MODE_PROP_BITMASK</term>
+          <listitem><para>Bitmask properties are enumeration properties that
+            additionally restrict all enumerated values to the 0..63 range.
+            Bitmask property instance values combine one or more of the
+            enumerated bits defined by the property.</para></listitem>
+        </varlistentry>
+        <varlistentry>
+          <term>DRM_MODE_PROP_BLOB</term>
+          <listitem><para>Blob properties store a binary blob without any format
+            restriction. The binary blobs are created as KMS standalone objects,
+            and blob property instance values store the ID of their associated
+            blob object.</para>
+	    <para>Blob properties are only used for the connector EDID property
+	    and cannot be created by drivers.</para></listitem>
         </varlistentry>
       </variablelist>
-<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_irq.c-->
     </para>
     <para>
-      To support the functions above, the DRM core provides several
-      helper functions for tracking vertical blank counters, and
-      requires drivers to provide several callbacks:
-      get_vblank_counter(), enable_vblank() and disable_vblank().  The
-      core uses get_vblank_counter() to keep the counter accurate
-      across interrupt disable periods.  It should return the current
-      vertical blank event count, which is often tracked in a device
-      register.  The enable and disable vblank callbacks should enable
-      and disable vertical blank interrupts, respectively.  In the
-      absence of DRM clients waiting on vblank events, the core DRM
-      code uses the disable_vblank() function to disable
-      interrupts, which saves power.  They are re-enabled again when
-      a client calls the vblank wait ioctl above.
+      To create a property drivers call one of the following functions depending
+      on the property type. All property creation functions take property flags
+      and name, as well as type-specific arguments.
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>struct drm_property *drm_property_create_range(struct drm_device *dev, int flags,
+                                               const char *name,
+                                               uint64_t min, uint64_t max);</synopsis>
+          <para>Create a range property with the given minimum and maximum
+            values.</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>struct drm_property *drm_property_create_enum(struct drm_device *dev, int flags,
+                                              const char *name,
+                                              const struct drm_prop_enum_list *props,
+                                              int num_values);</synopsis>
+          <para>Create an enumerated property. The <parameter>props</parameter>
+            argument points to an array of <parameter>num_values</parameter>
+            value-name pairs.</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <synopsis>struct drm_property *drm_property_create_bitmask(struct drm_device *dev,
+                                                 int flags, const char *name,
+                                                 const struct drm_prop_enum_list *props,
+                                                 int num_values);</synopsis>
+          <para>Create a bitmask property. The <parameter>props</parameter>
+            argument points to an array of <parameter>num_values</parameter>
+            value-name pairs.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      Properties can additionally be created as immutable, in which case they
+      will be read-only for applications but can be modified by the driver. To
+      create an immutable property drivers must set the DRM_MODE_PROP_IMMUTABLE
+      flag at property creation time.
     </para>
     <para>
-      A device that doesn't provide a count register may simply use an
-      internal atomic counter incremented on every vertical blank
-      interrupt (and then treat the enable_vblank() and disable_vblank()
-      callbacks as no-ops).
+      When no array of value-name pairs is readily available at property
+      creation time for enumerated or range properties, drivers can create
+      the property using the <function>drm_property_create</function> function
+      and manually add enumeration value-name pairs by calling the
+      <function>drm_property_add_enum</function> function. Care must be taken to
+      properly specify the property type through the <parameter>flags</parameter>
+      argument.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      After creating properties drivers can attach property instances to CRTC,
+      connector and plane objects by calling the
+      <function>drm_object_attach_property</function>. The function takes a
+      pointer to the target object, a pointer to the previously created property
+      and an initial instance value.
     </para>
   </sect1>
 
-  <sect1>
-    <title>Memory management</title>
+  <!-- Internals: vertical blanking -->
+
+  <sect1 id="drm-vertical-blank">
+    <title>Vertical Blanking</title>
     <para>
-      The memory manager lies at the heart of many DRM operations; it
-      is required to support advanced client features like OpenGL
-      pbuffers.  The DRM currently contains two memory managers: TTM
-      and GEM.
+      Vertical blanking plays a major role in graphics rendering. To achieve
+      tear-free display, users must synchronize page flips and/or rendering to
+      vertical blanking. The DRM API offers ioctls to perform page flips
+      synchronized to vertical blanking and wait for vertical blanking.
     </para>
+    <para>
+      The DRM core handles most of the vertical blanking management logic, which
+      involves filtering out spurious interrupts, keeping race-free blanking
+      counters, coping with counter wrap-around and resets and keeping use
+      counts. It relies on the driver to generate vertical blanking interrupts
+      and optionally provide a hardware vertical blanking counter. Drivers must
+      implement the following operations.
+    </para>
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <synopsis>int (*enable_vblank) (struct drm_device *dev, int crtc);
+void (*disable_vblank) (struct drm_device *dev, int crtc);</synopsis>
+        <para>
+	  Enable or disable vertical blanking interrupts for the given CRTC.
+	</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+        <synopsis>u32 (*get_vblank_counter) (struct drm_device *dev, int crtc);</synopsis>
+        <para>
+	  Retrieve the value of the vertical blanking counter for the given
+	  CRTC. If the hardware maintains a vertical blanking counter its value
+	  should be returned. Otherwise drivers can use the
+	  <function>drm_vblank_count</function> helper function to handle this
+	  operation.
+	</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+    <para>
+      Drivers must initialize the vertical blanking handling core with a call to
+      <function>drm_vblank_init</function> in their
+      <methodname>load</methodname> operation. The function will set the struct
+      <structname>drm_device</structname>
+      <structfield>vblank_disable_allowed</structfield> field to 0. This will
+      keep vertical blanking interrupts enabled permanently until the first mode
+      set operation, where <structfield>vblank_disable_allowed</structfield> is
+      set to 1. The reason behind this is not clear. Drivers can set the field
+      to 1 after <function>calling drm_vblank_init</function> to make vertical
+      blanking interrupts dynamically managed from the beginning.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      Vertical blanking interrupts can be enabled by the DRM core or by drivers
+      themselves (for instance to handle page flipping operations). The DRM core
+      maintains a vertical blanking use count to ensure that the interrupts are
+      not disabled while a user still needs them. To increment the use count,
+      drivers call <function>drm_vblank_get</function>. Upon return vertical
+      blanking interrupts are guaranteed to be enabled.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      To decrement the use count drivers call
+      <function>drm_vblank_put</function>. Only when the use count drops to zero
+      will the DRM core disable the vertical blanking interrupts after a delay
+      by scheduling a timer. The delay is accessible through the vblankoffdelay
+      module parameter or the <varname>drm_vblank_offdelay</varname> global
+      variable and expressed in milliseconds. Its default value is 5000 ms.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      When a vertical blanking interrupt occurs drivers only need to call the
+      <function>drm_handle_vblank</function> function to account for the
+      interrupt.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      Resources allocated by <function>drm_vblank_init</function> must be freed
+      with a call to <function>drm_vblank_cleanup</function> in the driver
+      <methodname>unload</methodname> operation handler.
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
 
+  <!-- Internals: open/close, file operations and ioctls -->
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Open/Close, File Operations and IOCTLs</title>
     <sect2>
-      <title>The Translation Table Manager (TTM)</title>
+      <title>Open and Close</title>
+      <synopsis>int (*firstopen) (struct drm_device *);
+void (*lastclose) (struct drm_device *);
+int (*open) (struct drm_device *, struct drm_file *);
+void (*preclose) (struct drm_device *, struct drm_file *);
+void (*postclose) (struct drm_device *, struct drm_file *);</synopsis>
+      <abstract>Open and close handlers. None of those methods are mandatory.
+      </abstract>
       <para>
-	TTM was developed by Tungsten Graphics, primarily by Thomas
-	Hellström, and is intended to be a flexible, high performance
-	graphics memory manager.
+        The <methodname>firstopen</methodname> method is called by the DRM core
+	for legacy UMS (User Mode Setting) drivers only when an application
+	opens a device that has no other opened file handle. UMS drivers can
+	implement it to acquire device resources. KMS drivers can't use the
+	method and must acquire resources in the <methodname>load</methodname>
+	method instead.
       </para>
       <para>
-	Drivers wishing to support TTM must fill out a drm_bo_driver
-	structure.
+	Similarly the <methodname>lastclose</methodname> method is called when
+	the last application holding a file handle opened on the device closes
+	it, for both UMS and KMS drivers. Additionally, the method is also
+	called at module unload time or, for hot-pluggable devices, when the
+	device is unplugged. The <methodname>firstopen</methodname> and
+	<methodname>lastclose</methodname> calls can thus be unbalanced.
       </para>
       <para>
-	TTM design background and information belongs here.
+        The <methodname>open</methodname> method is called every time the device
+	is opened by an application. Drivers can allocate per-file private data
+	in this method and store them in the struct
+	<structname>drm_file</structname> <structfield>driver_priv</structfield>
+	field. Note that the <methodname>open</methodname> method is called
+	before <methodname>firstopen</methodname>.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        The close operation is split into <methodname>preclose</methodname> and
+	<methodname>postclose</methodname> methods. Drivers must stop and
+	cleanup all per-file operations in the <methodname>preclose</methodname>
+	method. For instance pending vertical blanking and page flip events must
+	be cancelled. No per-file operation is allowed on the file handle after
+	returning from the <methodname>preclose</methodname> method.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        Finally the <methodname>postclose</methodname> method is called as the
+	last step of the close operation, right before calling the
+	<methodname>lastclose</methodname> method if no other open file handle
+	exists for the device. Drivers that have allocated per-file private data
+	in the <methodname>open</methodname> method should free it here.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        The <methodname>lastclose</methodname> method should restore CRTC and
+	plane properties to default value, so that a subsequent open of the
+	device will not inherit state from the previous user. It can also be
+	used to execute delayed power switching state changes, e.g. in
+	conjunction with the vga-switcheroo infrastructure. Beyond that KMS
+	drivers should not do any further cleanup. Only legacy UMS drivers might
+	need to clean up device state so that the vga console or an independent
+	fbdev driver could take over.
       </para>
     </sect2>
-
     <sect2>
-      <title>The Graphics Execution Manager (GEM)</title>
+      <title>File Operations</title>
+      <synopsis>const struct file_operations *fops</synopsis>
+      <abstract>File operations for the DRM device node.</abstract>
       <para>
-	GEM is an Intel project, authored by Eric Anholt and Keith
-	Packard.  It provides simpler interfaces than TTM, and is well
-	suited for UMA devices.
+        Drivers must define the file operations structure that forms the DRM
+	userspace API entry point, even though most of those operations are
+	implemented in the DRM core. The <methodname>open</methodname>,
+	<methodname>release</methodname> and <methodname>ioctl</methodname>
+	operations are handled by
+	<programlisting>
+	.owner = THIS_MODULE,
+	.open = drm_open,
+	.release = drm_release,
+	.unlocked_ioctl = drm_ioctl,
+  #ifdef CONFIG_COMPAT
+	.compat_ioctl = drm_compat_ioctl,
+  #endif
+        </programlisting>
       </para>
       <para>
-	GEM-enabled drivers must provide gem_init_object() and
-	gem_free_object() callbacks to support the core memory
-	allocation routines.  They should also provide several driver-specific
-	ioctls to support command execution, pinning, buffer
-	read &amp; write, mapping, and domain ownership transfers.
+        Drivers that implement private ioctls that requires 32/64bit
+	compatibility support must provide their own
+	<methodname>compat_ioctl</methodname> handler that processes private
+	ioctls and calls <function>drm_compat_ioctl</function> for core ioctls.
       </para>
       <para>
-	On a fundamental level, GEM involves several operations:
-	<itemizedlist>
-	  <listitem>Memory allocation and freeing</listitem>
-	  <listitem>Command execution</listitem>
-	  <listitem>Aperture management at command execution time</listitem>
-	</itemizedlist>
-	Buffer object allocation is relatively
-	straightforward and largely provided by Linux's shmem layer, which
-	provides memory to back each object.  When mapped into the GTT
-	or used in a command buffer, the backing pages for an object are
-	flushed to memory and marked write combined so as to be coherent
-	with the GPU.  Likewise, if the CPU accesses an object after the GPU
-	has finished rendering to the object, then the object must be made
-	coherent with the CPU's view
-	of memory, usually involving GPU cache flushing of various kinds.
-	This core CPU&lt;-&gt;GPU coherency management is provided by a
-	device-specific ioctl, which evaluates an object's current domain and
-	performs any necessary flushing or synchronization to put the object
-	into the desired coherency domain (note that the object may be busy,
-	i.e. an active render target; in that case, setting the domain
-	blocks the client and waits for rendering to complete before
-	performing any necessary flushing operations).
-      </para>
-      <para>
-	Perhaps the most important GEM function is providing a command
-	execution interface to clients.  Client programs construct command
-	buffers containing references to previously allocated memory objects,
-	and then submit them to GEM.  At that point, GEM takes care to bind
-	all the objects into the GTT, execute the buffer, and provide
-	necessary synchronization between clients accessing the same buffers.
-	This often involves evicting some objects from the GTT and re-binding
-	others (a fairly expensive operation), and providing relocation
-	support which hides fixed GTT offsets from clients.  Clients must
-	take care not to submit command buffers that reference more objects
-	than can fit in the GTT; otherwise, GEM will reject them and no rendering
-	will occur.  Similarly, if several objects in the buffer require
-	fence registers to be allocated for correct rendering (e.g. 2D blits
-	on pre-965 chips), care must be taken not to require more fence
-	registers than are available to the client.  Such resource management
-	should be abstracted from the client in libdrm.
+        The <methodname>read</methodname> and <methodname>poll</methodname>
+	operations provide support for reading DRM events and polling them. They
+	are implemented by
+	<programlisting>
+	.poll = drm_poll,
+	.read = drm_read,
+	.llseek = no_llseek,
+	</programlisting>
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        The memory mapping implementation varies depending on how the driver
+	manages memory. Pre-GEM drivers will use <function>drm_mmap</function>,
+	while GEM-aware drivers will use <function>drm_gem_mmap</function>. See
+	<xref linkend="drm-gem"/>.
+	<programlisting>
+	.mmap = drm_gem_mmap,
+	</programlisting>
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        No other file operation is supported by the DRM API.
+      </para>
+    </sect2>
+    <sect2>
+      <title>IOCTLs</title>
+      <synopsis>struct drm_ioctl_desc *ioctls;
+int num_ioctls;</synopsis>
+      <abstract>Driver-specific ioctls descriptors table.</abstract>
+      <para>
+        Driver-specific ioctls numbers start at DRM_COMMAND_BASE. The ioctls
+	descriptors table is indexed by the ioctl number offset from the base
+	value. Drivers can use the DRM_IOCTL_DEF_DRV() macro to initialize the
+	table entries.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        <programlisting>DRM_IOCTL_DEF_DRV(ioctl, func, flags)</programlisting>
+	<para>
+	  <parameter>ioctl</parameter> is the ioctl name. Drivers must define
+	  the DRM_##ioctl and DRM_IOCTL_##ioctl macros to the ioctl number
+	  offset from DRM_COMMAND_BASE and the ioctl number respectively. The
+	  first macro is private to the device while the second must be exposed
+	  to userspace in a public header.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  <parameter>func</parameter> is a pointer to the ioctl handler function
+	  compatible with the <type>drm_ioctl_t</type> type.
+	  <programlisting>typedef int drm_ioctl_t(struct drm_device *dev, void *data,
+		struct drm_file *file_priv);</programlisting>
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  <parameter>flags</parameter> is a bitmask combination of the following
+	  values. It restricts how the ioctl is allowed to be called.
+	  <itemizedlist>
+	    <listitem><para>
+	      DRM_AUTH - Only authenticated callers allowed
+	    </para></listitem>
+	    <listitem><para>
+	      DRM_MASTER - The ioctl can only be called on the master file
+	      handle
+	    </para></listitem>
+            <listitem><para>
+	      DRM_ROOT_ONLY - Only callers with the SYSADMIN capability allowed
+	    </para></listitem>
+            <listitem><para>
+	      DRM_CONTROL_ALLOW - The ioctl can only be called on a control
+	      device
+	    </para></listitem>
+            <listitem><para>
+	      DRM_UNLOCKED - The ioctl handler will be called without locking
+	      the DRM global mutex
+	    </para></listitem>
+	  </itemizedlist>
+	</para>
       </para>
     </sect2>
-
-  </sect1>
-
-  <!-- Output management -->
-  <sect1>
-    <title>Output management</title>
-    <para>
-      At the core of the DRM output management code is a set of
-      structures representing CRTCs, encoders, and connectors.
-    </para>
-    <para>
-      A CRTC is an abstraction representing a part of the chip that
-      contains a pointer to a scanout buffer.  Therefore, the number
-      of CRTCs available determines how many independent scanout
-      buffers can be active at any given time.  The CRTC structure
-      contains several fields to support this: a pointer to some video
-      memory, a display mode, and an (x, y) offset into the video
-      memory to support panning or configurations where one piece of
-      video memory spans multiple CRTCs.
-    </para>
-    <para>
-      An encoder takes pixel data from a CRTC and converts it to a
-      format suitable for any attached connectors.  On some devices,
-      it may be possible to have a CRTC send data to more than one
-      encoder.  In that case, both encoders would receive data from
-      the same scanout buffer, resulting in a "cloned" display
-      configuration across the connectors attached to each encoder.
-    </para>
-    <para>
-      A connector is the final destination for pixel data on a device,
-      and usually connects directly to an external display device like
-      a monitor or laptop panel.  A connector can only be attached to
-      one encoder at a time.  The connector is also the structure
-      where information about the attached display is kept, so it
-      contains fields for display data, EDID data, DPMS &amp;
-      connection status, and information about modes supported on the
-      attached displays.
-    </para>
-<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc.c-->
-  </sect1>
-
-  <sect1>
-    <title>Framebuffer management</title>
-    <para>
-      Clients need to provide a framebuffer object which provides a source
-      of pixels for a CRTC to deliver to the encoder(s) and ultimately the
-      connector(s). A framebuffer is fundamentally a driver-specific memory
-      object, made into an opaque handle by the DRM's addfb() function.
-      Once a framebuffer has been created this way, it may be passed to the
-      KMS mode setting routines for use in a completed configuration.
-    </para>
   </sect1>
 
   <sect1>
@@ -812,15 +2570,24 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev)
     </para>
   </sect1>
 
+  <!-- Internals: suspend/resume -->
+
   <sect1>
-    <title>Suspend/resume</title>
+    <title>Suspend/Resume</title>
     <para>
-      The DRM core provides some suspend/resume code, but drivers
-      wanting full suspend/resume support should provide save() and
-      restore() functions.  These are called at suspend,
-      hibernate, or resume time, and should perform any state save or
-      restore required by your device across suspend or hibernate
-      states.
+      The DRM core provides some suspend/resume code, but drivers wanting full
+      suspend/resume support should provide save() and restore() functions.
+      These are called at suspend, hibernate, or resume time, and should perform
+      any state save or restore required by your device across suspend or
+      hibernate states.
+    </para>
+    <synopsis>int (*suspend) (struct drm_device *, pm_message_t state);
+int (*resume) (struct drm_device *);</synopsis>
+    <para>
+      Those are legacy suspend and resume methods. New driver should use the
+      power management interface provided by their bus type (usually through
+      the struct <structname>device_driver</structname> dev_pm_ops) and set
+      these methods to NULL.
     </para>
   </sect1>
 
@@ -833,6 +2600,35 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev)
   </sect1>
   </chapter>
 
+<!-- TODO
+
+- Add a glossary
+- Document the struct_mutex catch-all lock
+- Document connector properties
+
+- Why is the load method optional?
+- What are drivers supposed to set the initial display state to, and how?
+  Connector's DPMS states are not initialized and are thus equal to
+  DRM_MODE_DPMS_ON. The fbcon compatibility layer calls
+  drm_helper_disable_unused_functions(), which disables unused encoders and
+  CRTCs, but doesn't touch the connectors' DPMS state, and
+  drm_helper_connector_dpms() in reaction to fbdev blanking events. Do drivers
+  that don't implement (or just don't use) fbcon compatibility need to call
+  those functions themselves?
+- KMS drivers must call drm_vblank_pre_modeset() and drm_vblank_post_modeset()
+  around mode setting. Should this be done in the DRM core?
+- vblank_disable_allowed is set to 1 in the first drm_vblank_post_modeset()
+  call and never set back to 0. It seems to be safe to permanently set it to 1
+  in drm_vblank_init() for KMS driver, and it might be safe for UMS drivers as
+  well. This should be investigated.
+- crtc and connector .save and .restore operations are only used internally in
+  drivers, should they be removed from the core?
+- encoder mid-layer .save and .restore operations are only used internally in
+  drivers, should they be removed from the core?
+- encoder mid-layer .detect operation is only used internally in drivers,
+  should it be removed from the core?
+-->
+
   <!-- External interfaces -->
 
   <chapter id="drmExternals">
@@ -853,6 +2649,105 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev)
       Cover generic ioctls and sysfs layout here.  We only need high-level
       info, since man pages should cover the rest.
     </para>
+
+  <!-- External: render nodes -->
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>Render nodes</title>
+      <para>
+        DRM core provides multiple character-devices for user-space to use.
+        Depending on which device is opened, user-space can perform a different
+        set of operations (mainly ioctls). The primary node is always created
+        and called <term>card&lt;num&gt;</term>. Additionally, a currently
+        unused control node, called <term>controlD&lt;num&gt;</term> is also
+        created. The primary node provides all legacy operations and
+        historically was the only interface used by userspace. With KMS, the
+        control node was introduced. However, the planned KMS control interface
+        has never been written and so the control node stays unused to date.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        With the increased use of offscreen renderers and GPGPU applications,
+        clients no longer require running compositors or graphics servers to
+        make use of a GPU. But the DRM API required unprivileged clients to
+        authenticate to a DRM-Master prior to getting GPU access. To avoid this
+        step and to grant clients GPU access without authenticating, render
+        nodes were introduced. Render nodes solely serve render clients, that
+        is, no modesetting or privileged ioctls can be issued on render nodes.
+        Only non-global rendering commands are allowed. If a driver supports
+        render nodes, it must advertise it via the <term>DRIVER_RENDER</term>
+        DRM driver capability. If not supported, the primary node must be used
+        for render clients together with the legacy drmAuth authentication
+        procedure.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        If a driver advertises render node support, DRM core will create a
+        separate render node called <term>renderD&lt;num&gt;</term>. There will
+        be one render node per device. No ioctls except  PRIME-related ioctls
+        will be allowed on this node. Especially <term>GEM_OPEN</term> will be
+        explicitly prohibited. Render nodes are designed to avoid the
+        buffer-leaks, which occur if clients guess the flink names or mmap
+        offsets on the legacy interface. Additionally to this basic interface,
+        drivers must mark their driver-dependent render-only ioctls as
+        <term>DRM_RENDER_ALLOW</term> so render clients can use them. Driver
+        authors must be careful not to allow any privileged ioctls on render
+        nodes.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        With render nodes, user-space can now control access to the render node
+        via basic file-system access-modes. A running graphics server which
+        authenticates clients on the privileged primary/legacy node is no longer
+        required. Instead, a client can open the render node and is immediately
+        granted GPU access. Communication between clients (or servers) is done
+        via PRIME. FLINK from render node to legacy node is not supported. New
+        clients must not use the insecure FLINK interface.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+        Besides dropping all modeset/global ioctls, render nodes also drop the
+        DRM-Master concept. There is no reason to associate render clients with
+        a DRM-Master as they are independent of any graphics server. Besides,
+        they must work without any running master, anyway.
+        Drivers must be able to run without a master object if they support
+        render nodes. If, on the other hand, a driver requires shared state
+        between clients which is visible to user-space and accessible beyond
+        open-file boundaries, they cannot support render nodes.
+      </para>
+    </sect1>
+
+  <!-- External: vblank handling -->
+
+    <sect1>
+      <title>VBlank event handling</title>
+      <para>
+        The DRM core exposes two vertical blank related ioctls:
+        <variablelist>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term>DRM_IOCTL_WAIT_VBLANK</term>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>
+                This takes a struct drm_wait_vblank structure as its argument,
+                and it is used to block or request a signal when a specified
+                vblank event occurs.
+              </para>
+            </listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+          <varlistentry>
+            <term>DRM_IOCTL_MODESET_CTL</term>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>
+                This should be called by application level drivers before and
+                after mode setting, since on many devices the vertical blank
+                counter is reset at that time.  Internally, the DRM snapshots
+                the last vblank count when the ioctl is called with the
+                _DRM_PRE_MODESET command, so that the counter won't go backwards
+                (which is dealt with when _DRM_POST_MODESET is used).
+              </para>
+            </listitem>
+          </varlistentry>
+        </variablelist>
+<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_irq.c-->
+      </para>
+    </sect1>
+
   </chapter>
 
   <!-- API reference -->
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl
index 3fca32c41927..25b58efd955d 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl
@@ -224,8 +224,8 @@ all your transactions.
 </para>
 
 <para>
-Then at umount time , in your put_super() (2.4) or write_super() (2.5)
-you can then call journal_destroy() to clean up your in-core journal object.
+Then at umount time , in your put_super() you can then call journal_destroy()
+to clean up your in-core journal object.
 </para>
 
 <para>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl
index 6ef2f0073e5a..4017f147ba2f 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl
@@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ than a kernel driver.
 <para>There's a USB Mass Storage class driver, which provides
 a different solution for interoperability with systems such
 as MS-Windows and MacOS.
-That <emphasis>File-backed Storage</emphasis> driver uses a
+That <emphasis>Mass Storage</emphasis> driver uses a
 file or block device as backing store for a drive,
 like the <filename>loop</filename> driver.
 The USB host uses the BBB, CB, or CBI versions of the mass
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl
index b3422341d65c..d16d21b7a3b7 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl
@@ -464,6 +464,19 @@ if (desc->irq_data.chip->irq_eoi)
 	protected via desc->lock, by the generic layer.
      </para>
   </chapter>
+
+  <chapter id="genericchip">
+     <title>Generic interrupt chip</title>
+     <para>
+       To avoid copies of identical implementations of irq chips the
+       core provides a configurable generic interrupt chip
+       implementation. Developers should check carefuly whether the
+       generic chip fits their needs before implementing the same
+       functionality slightly different themself.
+     </para>
+!Ekernel/irq/generic-chip.c
+  </chapter>
+
   <chapter id="structs">
      <title>Structures</title>
      <para>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
index 7160652a8736..f75ab4c1b281 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
@@ -58,6 +58,9 @@
 
      <sect1><title>String Conversions</title>
 !Elib/vsprintf.c
+!Finclude/linux/kernel.h kstrtol
+!Finclude/linux/kernel.h kstrtoul
+!Elib/kstrtox.c
      </sect1>
      <sect1><title>String Manipulation</title>
 <!-- All functions are exported at now
@@ -212,19 +215,6 @@ X!Edrivers/pci/hotplug.c
      <sect1><title>PCI Hotplug Support Library</title>
 !Edrivers/pci/hotplug/pci_hotplug_core.c
      </sect1>
-     <sect1><title>MCA Architecture</title>
-	<sect2><title>MCA Device Functions</title>
-           <para>
-              Refer to the file arch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c for more information.
-           </para>
-<!-- FIXME: Removed for now since no structured comments in source
-X!Earch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c
--->
-	</sect2>
-	<sect2><title>MCA Bus DMA</title>
-!Iarch/x86/include/asm/mca_dma.h
-	</sect2>
-     </sect1>
   </chapter>
 
   <chapter id="firmware">
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl
index 07a9c48de5a2..d0758b241b23 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl
@@ -945,7 +945,7 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %pI4\n", &amp;ipaddress);
 
   <sect1 id="sym-exportsymbols">
    <title><function>EXPORT_SYMBOL()</function>
-    <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/module.h</filename></title>
+    <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/export.h</filename></title>
 
    <para>
     This is the classic method of exporting a symbol: dynamically
@@ -955,7 +955,7 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %pI4\n", &amp;ipaddress);
 
   <sect1 id="sym-exportsymbols-gpl">
    <title><function>EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL()</function>
-    <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/module.h</filename></title>
+    <filename class="headerfile">include/linux/export.h</filename></title>
 
    <para>
     Similar to <function>EXPORT_SYMBOL()</function> except that the
@@ -1185,13 +1185,6 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = {
     </para>
 
     <para>
-     You may well want to make your CONFIG option only visible if
-     <symbol>CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL</symbol> is enabled: this serves as a
-     warning to users.  There many other fancy things you can do: see
-     the various <filename>Kconfig</filename> files for ideas.
-    </para>
-
-    <para>
      In your description of the option, make sure you address both the
      expert user and the user who knows nothing about your feature.  Mention
      incompatibilities and issues here.  <emphasis> Definitely
@@ -1289,7 +1282,7 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = {
  * Sparc assembly will do this to ya.
  */
 C_LABEL(cputypvar):
-        .asciz "compatability"
+        .asciz "compatibility"
 
 /* Tested on SS-5, SS-10. Probably someone at Sun applied a spell-checker. */
         .align 4
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl
index 67e7ab41c0a6..09e884e5b9f5 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl
@@ -1955,12 +1955,17 @@ machines due to caching.
    </sect1>
   </chapter>
 
-  <chapter id="apiref">
+  <chapter id="apiref-mutex">
    <title>Mutex API reference</title>
 !Iinclude/linux/mutex.h
 !Ekernel/mutex.c
   </chapter>
 
+  <chapter id="apiref-futex">
+   <title>Futex API reference</title>
+!Ikernel/futex.c
+  </chapter>
+
   <chapter id="references">
    <title>Further reading</title>
 
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl
index d71b57fcf116..f77358f96930 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl
@@ -94,10 +94,8 @@
   <sect1 id="CompileKGDB">
     <title>Kernel config options for kgdb</title>
     <para>
-    To enable <symbol>CONFIG_KGDB</symbol> you should first turn on
-    "Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers"
-    (CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL) in  "General setup", then under the
-    "Kernel debugging" select "KGDB: kernel debugger".
+    To enable <symbol>CONFIG_KGDB</symbol> you should look under
+    "Kernel debugging" and select "KGDB: kernel debugger".
     </para>
     <para>
     While it is not a hard requirement that you have symbols in your
@@ -362,6 +360,23 @@
    </para>
   </para>
   </sect1>
+   <sect1 id="kgdbreboot">
+   <title>Run time parameter: kgdbreboot</title>
+   <para> The kgdbreboot feature allows you to change how the debugger
+   deals with the reboot notification.  You have 3 choices for the
+   behavior.  The default behavior is always set to 0.</para>
+   <orderedlist>
+   <listitem><para>echo -1 > /sys/module/debug_core/parameters/kgdbreboot</para>
+   <para>Ignore the reboot notification entirely.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem><para>echo 0 > /sys/module/debug_core/parameters/kgdbreboot</para>
+   <para>Send the detach message to any attached debugger client.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem><para>echo 1 > /sys/module/debug_core/parameters/kgdbreboot</para>
+   <para>Enter the debugger on reboot notify.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   </orderedlist>
+  </sect1>
   </chapter>
   <chapter id="usingKDB">
   <title>Using kdb</title>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl
index 31df1aa00710..deb71baed328 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl
@@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ and other resources, etc.
         <title>HSM violation</title>
         <para>
         This error is indicated when STATUS value doesn't match HSM
-        requirement during issuing or excution any ATA/ATAPI command.
+        requirement during issuing or execution any ATA/ATAPI command.
         </para>
 
 	<itemizedlist>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl
deleted file mode 100644
index 467ccac6ec50..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
-	"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
-
-<book id="MCAGuide">
- <bookinfo>
-  <title>MCA Driver Programming Interface</title>
-  
-  <authorgroup>
-   <author>
-    <firstname>Alan</firstname>
-    <surname>Cox</surname>
-    <affiliation>
-     <address>
-      <email>alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk</email>
-     </address>
-    </affiliation>
-   </author>
-   <author>
-    <firstname>David</firstname>
-    <surname>Weinehall</surname>
-   </author>
-   <author>
-    <firstname>Chris</firstname>
-    <surname>Beauregard</surname>
-   </author>
-  </authorgroup>
-
-  <copyright>
-   <year>2000</year>
-   <holder>Alan Cox</holder>
-   <holder>David Weinehall</holder>
-   <holder>Chris Beauregard</holder>
-  </copyright>
-
-  <legalnotice>
-   <para>
-     This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
-     it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
-     License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
-     version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
-     version.
-   </para>
-      
-   <para>
-     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
-     useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
-     warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-     See the GNU General Public License for more details.
-   </para>
-      
-   <para>
-     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-     License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
-     Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
-     MA 02111-1307 USA
-   </para>
-      
-   <para>
-     For more details see the file COPYING in the source
-     distribution of Linux.
-   </para>
-  </legalnotice>
- </bookinfo>
-
-<toc></toc>
-
-  <chapter id="intro">
-      <title>Introduction</title>
-  <para>
-	The MCA bus functions provide a generalised interface to find MCA
-	bus cards, to claim them for a driver, and to read and manipulate POS 
-	registers without being aware of the motherboard internals or 
-	certain deep magic specific to onboard devices.
-  </para>
-  <para>
-	The basic interface to the MCA bus devices is the slot. Each slot
-	is numbered and virtual slot numbers are assigned to the internal
-	devices. Using a pci_dev as other busses do does not really make
-	sense in the MCA context as the MCA bus resources require card
-	specific interpretation.
-  </para>
-  <para>
-	Finally the MCA bus functions provide a parallel set of DMA
-	functions mimicing the ISA bus DMA functions as closely as possible,
-	although also supporting the additional DMA functionality on the
-	MCA bus controllers.
-  </para>
-  </chapter>
-  <chapter id="bugs">
-     <title>Known Bugs And Assumptions</title>
-  <para>
-	None.	
-  </para>
-  </chapter>
-
-  <chapter id="pubfunctions">
-     <title>Public Functions Provided</title>
-!Edrivers/mca/mca-legacy.c
-  </chapter>
-
-  <chapter id="dmafunctions">
-     <title>DMA Functions Provided</title>
-!Iarch/x86/include/asm/mca_dma.h
-  </chapter>
-
-</book>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile
index 6628b4b9cac4..f9fd615427fb 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile
@@ -56,48 +56,50 @@ FUNCS = \
 	write \
 
 IOCTLS = \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/linux/videodev2.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/audio.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/ca.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/dmx.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/frontend.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([A-Z][^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/net.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/video.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/linux/media.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/linux/v4l2-subdev.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/videodev2.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/audio.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/ca.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/dmx.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/frontend.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([A-Z][^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/net.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/video.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/media.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /\#define\s+([^\s]+)\s+_IO/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/v4l2-subdev.h) \
 	VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_FRAME_INTERVAL \
 	VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_FRAME_INTERVAL \
 	VIDIOC_SUBDEV_ENUM_MBUS_CODE \
 	VIDIOC_SUBDEV_ENUM_FRAME_SIZE \
 	VIDIOC_SUBDEV_ENUM_FRAME_INTERVAL \
+	VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_SELECTION \
+	VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_SELECTION \
 
 TYPES = \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^typedef\s+[^\s]+\s+([^\s]+)\;/' $(srctree)/include/linux/videodev2.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^}\s+([a-z0-9_]+_t)/' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/frontend.h)
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^typedef\s+[^\s]+\s+([^\s]+)\;/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/videodev2.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^}\s+([a-z0-9_]+_t)/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/frontend.h)
 
 ENUMS = \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/videodev2.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/audio.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/ca.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/dmx.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/frontend.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/net.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/video.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/media.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/v4l2-mediabus.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/v4l2-subdev.h)
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/videodev2.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/audio.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/ca.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/dmx.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/frontend.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/net.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/video.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/media.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/v4l2-mediabus.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^enum\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/v4l2-subdev.h)
 
 STRUCTS = \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/videodev2.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if (/^struct\s+([^\s\{]+)\s*/)' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/audio.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if (/^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/)' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/ca.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if (/^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/)' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/dmx.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if (!/dtv\_cmds\_h/ && /^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/)' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/frontend.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if (/^struct\s+([A-Z][^\s]+)\s+/)' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/net.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if (/^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/)' $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/video.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/media.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/v4l2-subdev.h) \
-	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/linux/v4l2-mediabus.h)
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/videodev2.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if (/^struct\s+([^\s\{]+)\s*/)' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/audio.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if (/^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/)' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/ca.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if (/^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/)' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/dmx.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if (!/dtv\_cmds\_h/ && /^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/)' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/frontend.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if (/^struct\s+([A-Z][^\s]+)\s+/)' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/net.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if (/^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/)' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/video.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/media.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/v4l2-subdev.h) \
+	$(shell perl -ne 'print "$$1 " if /^struct\s+([^\s]+)\s+/' $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/v4l2-mediabus.h)
 
 ERRORS = \
 	E2BIG \
@@ -193,7 +195,7 @@ DVB_DOCUMENTED = \
 #
 
 install_media_images = \
-	$(Q)cp $(OBJIMGFILES) $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/media_api
+	$(Q)cp $(OBJIMGFILES) $(MEDIA_SRC_DIR)/v4l/*.svg $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/media_api
 
 $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/%: $(MEDIA_SRC_DIR)/%.b64
 	$(Q)base64 -d $< >$@
@@ -203,7 +205,7 @@ $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml: $(OBJIMGFILES)
 	@(ln -sf $(MEDIA_SRC_DIR)/v4l/*xml $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/)
 	@(ln -sf $(MEDIA_SRC_DIR)/dvb/*xml $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/)
 
-$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/videodev2.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/linux/videodev2.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
+$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/videodev2.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/videodev2.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
 	@$($(quiet)gen_xml)
 	@(					\
 	echo "<programlisting>") > $@
@@ -214,7 +216,7 @@ $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/videodev2.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/linux/videodev2.h $(MEDIA_O
 	@(					\
 	echo "</programlisting>") >> $@
 
-$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/audio.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/audio.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
+$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/audio.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/audio.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
 	@$($(quiet)gen_xml)
 	@(					\
 	echo "<programlisting>") > $@
@@ -225,7 +227,7 @@ $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/audio.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/audio.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_D
 	@(					\
 	echo "</programlisting>") >> $@
 
-$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/ca.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/ca.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
+$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/ca.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/ca.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
 	@$($(quiet)gen_xml)
 	@(					\
 	echo "<programlisting>") > $@
@@ -236,7 +238,7 @@ $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/ca.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/ca.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4
 	@(					\
 	echo "</programlisting>") >> $@
 
-$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/dmx.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/dmx.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
+$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/dmx.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/dmx.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
 	@$($(quiet)gen_xml)
 	@(					\
 	echo "<programlisting>") > $@
@@ -247,7 +249,7 @@ $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/dmx.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/dmx.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/
 	@(					\
 	echo "</programlisting>") >> $@
 
-$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/frontend.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/frontend.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
+$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/frontend.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/frontend.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
 	@$($(quiet)gen_xml)
 	@(					\
 	echo "<programlisting>") > $@
@@ -258,7 +260,7 @@ $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/frontend.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/frontend.h $(MEDIA
 	@(					\
 	echo "</programlisting>") >> $@
 
-$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/net.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/net.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
+$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/net.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/net.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
 	@$($(quiet)gen_xml)
 	@(					\
 	echo "<programlisting>") > $@
@@ -269,7 +271,7 @@ $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/net.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/net.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/
 	@(					\
 	echo "</programlisting>") >> $@
 
-$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/video.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/linux/dvb/video.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
+$(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/video.h.xml: $(srctree)/include/uapi/linux/dvb/video.h $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
 	@$($(quiet)gen_xml)
 	@(					\
 	echo "<programlisting>") > $@
@@ -298,7 +300,7 @@ $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/media-entities.tmpl: $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/v4l2.xml
 	@(								\
 	for ident in $(IOCTLS) ; do					\
 	  entity=`echo $$ident | tr _ -` ;				\
-	  id=`grep "<refname>$$ident" $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/vidioc-*.xml | sed -r s,"^.*/(.*).xml.*","\1",` ; \
+	  id=`grep "<refname>$$ident" $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/vidioc-*.xml $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/media-ioc-*.xml | sed -r s,"^.*/(.*).xml.*","\1",` ; \
 	  echo "<!ENTITY $$entity \"<link"				\
 	    "linkend='$$id'><constant>$$ident</constant></link>\">"	\
 	  >>$@ ;							\
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/audio.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/audio.xml
index d64386237207..a7ea56c71a27 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/audio.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/audio.xml
@@ -1,12 +1,16 @@
 <title>DVB Audio Device</title>
 <para>The DVB audio device controls the MPEG2 audio decoder of the DVB hardware. It
 can be accessed through <emphasis role="tt">/dev/dvb/adapter0/audio0</emphasis>. Data types and and
-ioctl definitions can be accessed by including <emphasis role="tt">linux/dvb/video.h</emphasis> in your
+ioctl definitions can be accessed by including <emphasis role="tt">linux/dvb/audio.h</emphasis> in your
 application.
 </para>
 <para>Please note that some DVB cards don&#8217;t have their own MPEG decoder, which results in
 the omission of the audio and video device.
 </para>
+<para>
+These ioctls were also used by V4L2 to control MPEG decoders implemented in V4L2. The use
+of these ioctls for that purpose has been made obsolete and proper V4L2 ioctls or controls
+have been created to replace that functionality.</para>
 
 <section id="audio_data_types">
 <title>Audio Data Types</title>
@@ -558,6 +562,8 @@ role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_SELECT_SOURCE</title>
 role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_SET_MUTE</title>
 <para>DESCRIPTION
 </para>
+<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To control a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2
+&VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; with the <constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_START_MUTE_AUDIO</constant> flag instead.</para>
 <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
  align="char">
 <para>This ioctl call asks the audio device to mute the stream that is currently being
@@ -730,6 +736,8 @@ role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_SET_BYPASS_MODE</title>
 role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_CHANNEL_SELECT</title>
 <para>DESCRIPTION
 </para>
+<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To control a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2
+<constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK</constant> control instead.</para>
 <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
  align="char">
 <para>This ioctl call asks the Audio Device to select the requested channel if possible.</para>
@@ -772,6 +780,109 @@ role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_CHANNEL_SELECT</title>
  </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
 &return-value-dvb;
 
+</section><section id="AUDIO_BILINGUAL_CHANNEL_SELECT"
+role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_BILINGUAL_CHANNEL_SELECT</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<para>This ioctl is obsolete. Do not use in new drivers. It has been replaced by
+the V4L2 <constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_MULTILINGUAL_PLAYBACK</constant> control
+for MPEG decoders controlled through V4L2.</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl call asks the Audio Device to select the requested channel for bilingual streams if possible.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request =
+ AUDIO_BILINGUAL_CHANNEL_SELECT, audio_channel_select_t);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals AUDIO_BILINGUAL_CHANNEL_SELECT for this
+ command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>audio_channel_select_t
+ch</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Select the output format of the audio (mono left/right,
+ stereo).</para>
+</entry>
+ </row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+
+</section><section id="AUDIO_GET_PTS"
+role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_GET_PTS</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<para>This ioctl is obsolete. Do not use in new drivers. If you need this functionality,
+then please contact the linux-media mailing list (&v4l-ml;).</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl call asks the Audio Device to return the current PTS timestamp.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request =
+ AUDIO_GET_PTS, __u64 *pts);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals AUDIO_GET_PTS for this
+ command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>__u64 *pts
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Returns the 33-bit timestamp as defined in ITU T-REC-H.222.0 / ISO/IEC 13818-1.
+</para>
+<para>
+The PTS should belong to the currently played
+frame if possible, but may also be a value close to it
+like the PTS of the last decoded frame or the last PTS
+extracted by the PES parser.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+
 </section><section id="AUDIO_GET_STATUS"
 role="subsection"><title>AUDIO_GET_STATUS</title>
 <para>DESCRIPTION
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/ca.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/ca.xml
index 5c4adb44b1c1..85eaf4fe2931 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/ca.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/ca.xml
@@ -226,4 +226,357 @@ typedef struct ca_pid {
 </entry>
  </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
  </section>
+
+<section id="CA_RESET"
+role="subsection"><title>CA_RESET</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_RESET);
+</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals CA_RESET for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+<section id="CA_GET_CAP"
+role="subsection"><title>CA_GET_CAP</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_GET_CAP,
+ ca_caps_t *);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals CA_GET_CAP for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>ca_caps_t *
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+<section id="CA_GET_SLOT_INFO"
+role="subsection"><title>CA_GET_SLOT_INFO</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_GET_SLOT_INFO,
+ ca_slot_info_t *);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals CA_GET_SLOT_INFO for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>ca_slot_info_t *
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+<section id="CA_GET_DESCR_INFO"
+role="subsection"><title>CA_GET_DESCR_INFO</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_GET_DESCR_INFO,
+ ca_descr_info_t *);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals CA_GET_DESCR_INFO for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>ca_descr_info_t *
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+<section id="CA_GET_MSG"
+role="subsection"><title>CA_GET_MSG</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_GET_MSG,
+ ca_msg_t *);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals CA_GET_MSG for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>ca_msg_t *
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+<section id="CA_SEND_MSG"
+role="subsection"><title>CA_SEND_MSG</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_SEND_MSG,
+ ca_msg_t *);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals CA_SEND_MSG for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>ca_msg_t *
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+<section id="CA_SET_DESCR"
+role="subsection"><title>CA_SET_DESCR</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_SET_DESCR,
+ ca_descr_t *);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals CA_SET_DESCR for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>ca_descr_t *
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+<section id="CA_SET_PID"
+role="subsection"><title>CA_SET_PID</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = CA_SET_PID,
+ ca_pid_t *);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals CA_SET_PID for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>ca_pid_t *
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
 </section>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/demux.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/demux.xml
index 37c17908aa40..86de89cfbd67 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/demux.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/demux.xml
@@ -899,4 +899,232 @@ typedef enum {
 <para>Invalid stc number.</para>
 </entry>
  </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
- </section></section>
+ </section>
+
+<section id="DMX_GET_PES_PIDS"
+role="subsection"><title>DMX_GET_PES_PIDS</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = DMX_GET_PES_PIDS,
+ __u16[5]);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals DMX_GET_PES_PIDS for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>__u16[5]
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+<section id="DMX_GET_CAPS"
+role="subsection"><title>DMX_GET_CAPS</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = DMX_GET_CAPS,
+ dmx_caps_t *);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals DMX_GET_CAPS for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>dmx_caps_t *
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+<section id="DMX_SET_SOURCE"
+role="subsection"><title>DMX_SET_SOURCE</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = DMX_SET_SOURCE,
+ dmx_source_t *);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals DMX_SET_SOURCE for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>dmx_source_t *
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+<section id="DMX_ADD_PID"
+role="subsection"><title>DMX_ADD_PID</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = DMX_ADD_PID,
+ __u16 *);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals DMX_ADD_PID for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>__u16 *
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+<section id="DMX_REMOVE_PID"
+role="subsection"><title>DMX_REMOVE_PID</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = DMX_REMOVE_PID,
+ __u16 *);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals DMX_REMOVE_PID for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>__u16 *
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+
+</section>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbapi.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbapi.xml
index 2ab6ddcfc4e0..0197bcc7842d 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbapi.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbapi.xml
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 	<holder>Convergence GmbH</holder>
 </copyright>
 <copyright>
-	<year>2009-2011</year>
+	<year>2009-2012</year>
 	<holder>Mauro Carvalho Chehab</holder>
 </copyright>
 
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Added ISDB-T test originally written by Patrick Boettcher
 
 
 <title>LINUX DVB API</title>
-<subtitle>Version 5.2</subtitle>
+<subtitle>Version 5.10</subtitle>
 <!-- ADD THE CHAPTERS HERE -->
   <chapter id="dvb_introdution">
     &sub-intro;
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml
index c7a4ca517859..a9b15e34c5b2 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml
@@ -1,20 +1,47 @@
 <section id="FE_GET_SET_PROPERTY">
 <title><constant>FE_GET_PROPERTY/FE_SET_PROPERTY</constant></title>
-<para>This section describes the DVB version 5 extention of the DVB-API, also
+<para>This section describes the DVB version 5 extension of the DVB-API, also
 called "S2API", as this API were added to provide support for DVB-S2. It was
 designed to be able to replace the old frontend API. Yet, the DISEQC and
 the capability ioctls weren't implemented yet via the new way.</para>
 <para>The typical usage for the <constant>FE_GET_PROPERTY/FE_SET_PROPERTY</constant>
 API is to replace the ioctl's were the <link linkend="dvb-frontend-parameters">
 struct <constant>dvb_frontend_parameters</constant></link> were used.</para>
+<section id="dtv-stats">
+<title>DTV stats type</title>
+<programlisting>
+struct dtv_stats {
+	__u8 scale;	/* enum fecap_scale_params type */
+	union {
+		__u64 uvalue;	/* for counters and relative scales */
+		__s64 svalue;	/* for 1/1000 dB measures */
+	};
+} __packed;
+</programlisting>
+</section>
+<section id="dtv-fe-stats">
+<title>DTV stats type</title>
+<programlisting>
+#define MAX_DTV_STATS   4
+
+struct dtv_fe_stats {
+	__u8 len;
+	struct dtv_stats stat[MAX_DTV_STATS];
+} __packed;
+</programlisting>
+</section>
+
 <section id="dtv-property">
 <title>DTV property type</title>
 <programlisting>
 /* Reserved fields should be set to 0 */
+
 struct dtv_property {
 	__u32 cmd;
+	__u32 reserved[3];
 	union {
 		__u32 data;
+		struct dtv_fe_stats st;
 		struct {
 			__u8 data[32];
 			__u32 len;
@@ -194,6 +221,7 @@ get/set up to 64 properties. The actual meaning of each property is described on
 	APSK_16,
 	APSK_32,
 	DQPSK,
+	QAM_4_NR,
  } fe_modulation_t;
 </programlisting>
 	</section>
@@ -265,6 +293,7 @@ typedef enum fe_code_rate {
 	FEC_AUTO,
 	FEC_3_5,
 	FEC_9_10,
+	FEC_2_5,
 } fe_code_rate_t;
 	</programlisting>
 	<para>which correspond to error correction rates of 1/2, 2/3, etc.,
@@ -351,7 +380,7 @@ typedef enum fe_delivery_system {
 	SYS_ISDBC,
 	SYS_ATSC,
 	SYS_ATSCMH,
-	SYS_DMBTH,
+	SYS_DTMB,
 	SYS_CMMB,
 	SYS_DAB,
 	SYS_DVBT2,
@@ -438,7 +467,7 @@ typedef enum fe_delivery_system {
 		<title><constant>DTV-ISDBT-LAYER*</constant> parameters</title>
 		<para>ISDB-T channels can be coded hierarchically. As opposed to DVB-T in
 			ISDB-T hierarchical layers can be decoded simultaneously. For that
-			reason a ISDB-T demodulator has 3 viterbi and 3 reed-solomon-decoders.</para>
+			reason a ISDB-T demodulator has 3 Viterbi and 3 Reed-Solomon decoders.</para>
 		<para>ISDB-T has 3 hierarchical layers which each can use a part of the
 			available segments. The total number of segments over all layers has
 			to 13 in ISDB-T.</para>
@@ -531,6 +560,149 @@ typedef enum fe_delivery_system {
 				here are referring to what can be found in the TMCC-structure -
 				independent of the mode.</para>
 		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-FIC-VER">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_FIC_VER</constant></title>
+			<para>Version number of the FIC (Fast Information Channel) signaling data.</para>
+			<para>FIC is used for relaying information to allow rapid service acquisition by the receiver.</para>
+			<para>Possible values: 0, 1, 2, 3, ..., 30, 31</para>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-PARADE-ID">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_PARADE_ID</constant></title>
+			<para>Parade identification number</para>
+			<para>A parade is a collection of up to eight MH groups, conveying one or two ensembles.</para>
+			<para>Possible values: 0, 1, 2, 3, ..., 126, 127</para>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-NOG">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_NOG</constant></title>
+			<para>Number of MH groups per MH subframe for a designated parade.</para>
+			<para>Possible values: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8</para>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-TNOG">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_TNOG</constant></title>
+			<para>Total number of MH groups including all MH groups belonging to all MH parades in one MH subframe.</para>
+			<para>Possible values: 0, 1, 2, 3, ..., 30, 31</para>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-SGN">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SGN</constant></title>
+			<para>Start group number.</para>
+			<para>Possible values: 0, 1, 2, 3, ..., 14, 15</para>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-PRC">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_PRC</constant></title>
+			<para>Parade repetition cycle.</para>
+			<para>Possible values: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8</para>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-FRAME-MODE">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_FRAME_MODE</constant></title>
+			<para>RS frame mode.</para>
+			<para>Possible values are:</para>
+		  <para id="atscmh-rs-frame-mode">
+<programlisting>
+typedef enum atscmh_rs_frame_mode {
+	ATSCMH_RSFRAME_PRI_ONLY  = 0,
+	ATSCMH_RSFRAME_PRI_SEC   = 1,
+} atscmh_rs_frame_mode_t;
+</programlisting>
+		  </para>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-FRAME-ENSEMBLE">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_FRAME_ENSEMBLE</constant></title>
+			<para>RS frame ensemble.</para>
+			<para>Possible values are:</para>
+		  <para id="atscmh-rs-frame-ensemble">
+<programlisting>
+typedef enum atscmh_rs_frame_ensemble {
+	ATSCMH_RSFRAME_ENS_PRI   = 0,
+	ATSCMH_RSFRAME_ENS_SEC   = 1,
+} atscmh_rs_frame_ensemble_t;
+</programlisting>
+		  </para>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-CODE-MODE-PRI">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_CODE_MODE_PRI</constant></title>
+			<para>RS code mode (primary).</para>
+			<para>Possible values are:</para>
+		  <para id="atscmh-rs-code-mode">
+<programlisting>
+typedef enum atscmh_rs_code_mode {
+	ATSCMH_RSCODE_211_187    = 0,
+	ATSCMH_RSCODE_223_187    = 1,
+	ATSCMH_RSCODE_235_187    = 2,
+} atscmh_rs_code_mode_t;
+</programlisting>
+		  </para>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-CODE-MODE-SEC">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_CODE_MODE_SEC</constant></title>
+			<para>RS code mode (secondary).</para>
+			<para>Possible values are:</para>
+<programlisting>
+typedef enum atscmh_rs_code_mode {
+	ATSCMH_RSCODE_211_187    = 0,
+	ATSCMH_RSCODE_223_187    = 1,
+	ATSCMH_RSCODE_235_187    = 2,
+} atscmh_rs_code_mode_t;
+</programlisting>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-BLOCK-MODE">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_BLOCK_MODE</constant></title>
+			<para>Series Concatenated Convolutional Code Block Mode.</para>
+			<para>Possible values are:</para>
+		  <para id="atscmh-sccc-block-mode">
+<programlisting>
+typedef enum atscmh_sccc_block_mode {
+	ATSCMH_SCCC_BLK_SEP      = 0,
+	ATSCMH_SCCC_BLK_COMB     = 1,
+} atscmh_sccc_block_mode_t;
+</programlisting>
+		  </para>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-A">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_A</constant></title>
+			<para>Series Concatenated Convolutional Code Rate.</para>
+			<para>Possible values are:</para>
+		  <para id="atscmh-sccc-code-mode">
+<programlisting>
+typedef enum atscmh_sccc_code_mode {
+	ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_HLF     = 0,
+	ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_QTR     = 1,
+} atscmh_sccc_code_mode_t;
+</programlisting>
+		  </para>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-B">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_B</constant></title>
+			<para>Series Concatenated Convolutional Code Rate.</para>
+			<para>Possible values are:</para>
+<programlisting>
+typedef enum atscmh_sccc_code_mode {
+	ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_HLF     = 0,
+	ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_QTR     = 1,
+} atscmh_sccc_code_mode_t;
+</programlisting>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-C">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_C</constant></title>
+			<para>Series Concatenated Convolutional Code Rate.</para>
+			<para>Possible values are:</para>
+<programlisting>
+typedef enum atscmh_sccc_code_mode {
+	ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_HLF     = 0,
+	ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_QTR     = 1,
+} atscmh_sccc_code_mode_t;
+</programlisting>
+		</section>
+		<section id="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-D">
+			<title><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_D</constant></title>
+			<para>Series Concatenated Convolutional Code Rate.</para>
+			<para>Possible values are:</para>
+<programlisting>
+typedef enum atscmh_sccc_code_mode {
+	ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_HLF     = 0,
+	ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_QTR     = 1,
+} atscmh_sccc_code_mode_t;
+</programlisting>
+		</section>
 	</section>
 	<section id="DTV-API-VERSION">
 	<title><constant>DTV_API_VERSION</constant></title>
@@ -592,6 +764,9 @@ typedef enum fe_guard_interval {
 	GUARD_INTERVAL_1_128,
 	GUARD_INTERVAL_19_128,
 	GUARD_INTERVAL_19_256,
+	GUARD_INTERVAL_PN420,
+	GUARD_INTERVAL_PN595,
+	GUARD_INTERVAL_PN945,
 } fe_guard_interval_t;
 </programlisting>
 
@@ -600,6 +775,7 @@ typedef enum fe_guard_interval {
 			try to find the correct guard interval (if capable) and will use TMCC to fill
 			in the missing parameters.</para>
 		<para>2) Intervals 1/128, 19/128 and 19/256 are used only for DVB-T2 at present</para>
+		<para>3) DTMB specifies PN420, PN595 and PN945.</para>
 	</section>
 	<section id="DTV-TRANSMISSION-MODE">
 		<title><constant>DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE</constant></title>
@@ -616,6 +792,8 @@ typedef enum fe_transmit_mode {
 	TRANSMISSION_MODE_1K,
 	TRANSMISSION_MODE_16K,
 	TRANSMISSION_MODE_32K,
+	TRANSMISSION_MODE_C1,
+	TRANSMISSION_MODE_C3780,
 } fe_transmit_mode_t;
 </programlisting>
 		<para>Notes:</para>
@@ -627,6 +805,7 @@ typedef enum fe_transmit_mode {
 			use TMCC to fill in the missing parameters.</para>
 		<para>3) DVB-T specifies 2K and 8K as valid sizes.</para>
 		<para>4) DVB-T2 specifies 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K and 32K.</para>
+		<para>5) DTMB specifies C1 and C3780.</para>
 	</section>
 	<section id="DTV-HIERARCHY">
 	<title><constant>DTV_HIERARCHY</constant></title>
@@ -641,17 +820,28 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy {
  } fe_hierarchy_t;
 	</programlisting>
 	</section>
-	<section id="DTV-ISDBS-TS-ID">
-	<title><constant>DTV_ISDBS_TS_ID</constant></title>
-	<para>Currently unused.</para>
+	<section id="DTV-STREAM-ID">
+	<title><constant>DTV_STREAM_ID</constant></title>
+	<para>DVB-S2, DVB-T2 and ISDB-S support the transmission of several
+	      streams on a single transport stream.
+	      This property enables the DVB driver to handle substream filtering,
+	      when supported by the hardware.
+	      By default, substream filtering is disabled.
+	</para><para>
+	      For DVB-S2 and DVB-T2, the valid substream id range is from 0 to 255.
+	</para><para>
+	      For ISDB, the valid substream id range is from 1 to 65535.
+	</para><para>
+	      To disable it, you should use the special macro NO_STREAM_ID_FILTER.
+	</para><para>
+	      Note: any value outside the id range also disables filtering.
+	</para>
 	</section>
-	<section id="DTV-DVBT2-PLP-ID">
-		<title><constant>DTV_DVBT2_PLP_ID</constant></title>
-		<para>DVB-T2 supports Physical Layer Pipes (PLP) to allow transmission of
-			many data types via a single multiplex. The API will soon support this
-			at which point this section will be expanded.</para>
+	<section id="DTV-DVBT2-PLP-ID-LEGACY">
+		<title><constant>DTV_DVBT2_PLP_ID_LEGACY</constant></title>
+		<para>Obsolete, replaced with DTV_STREAM_ID.</para>
 	</section>
-	<section id="DTV_ENUM_DELSYS">
+	<section id="DTV-ENUM-DELSYS">
 		<title><constant>DTV_ENUM_DELSYS</constant></title>
 		<para>A Multi standard frontend needs to advertise the delivery systems provided.
 			Applications need to enumerate the provided delivery systems, before using
@@ -663,7 +853,169 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy {
 			FE_GET_INFO. In the case of a legacy frontend, the result is just the same
 			as with FE_GET_INFO, but in a more structured format </para>
 	</section>
+	<section id="DTV-INTERLEAVING">
+	<title><constant>DTV_INTERLEAVING</constant></title>
+	<para id="fe-interleaving">Interleaving mode</para>
+	<programlisting>
+enum fe_interleaving {
+	INTERLEAVING_NONE,
+	INTERLEAVING_AUTO,
+	INTERLEAVING_240,
+	INTERLEAVING_720,
+};
+	</programlisting>
+	</section>
+	<section id="DTV-LNA">
+	<title><constant>DTV_LNA</constant></title>
+	<para>Low-noise amplifier.</para>
+	<para>Hardware might offer controllable LNA which can be set manually
+		using that parameter. Usually LNA could be found only from
+		terrestrial devices if at all.</para>
+	<para>Possible values: 0, 1, LNA_AUTO</para>
+	<para>0, LNA off</para>
+	<para>1, LNA on</para>
+	<para>use the special macro LNA_AUTO to set LNA auto</para>
+	</section>
 </section>
+
+	<section id="frontend-stat-properties">
+	<title>Frontend statistics indicators</title>
+	<para>The values are returned via <constant>dtv_property.stat</constant>.
+	      If the property is supported, <constant>dtv_property.stat.len</constant> is bigger than zero.</para>
+	<para>For most delivery systems, <constant>dtv_property.stat.len</constant>
+	      will be 1 if the stats is supported, and the properties will
+	      return a single value for each parameter.</para>
+	<para>It should be noticed, however, that new OFDM delivery systems
+	      like ISDB can use different modulation types for each group of
+	      carriers. On such standards, up to 3 groups of statistics can be
+	      provided, and <constant>dtv_property.stat.len</constant> is updated
+	      to reflect the "global" metrics, plus one metric per each carrier
+	      group (called "layer" on ISDB).</para>
+	<para>So, in order to be consistent with other delivery systems, the first
+	      value at <link linkend="dtv-stats"><constant>dtv_property.stat.dtv_stats</constant></link>
+	      array refers to the global metric. The other elements of the array
+	      represent each layer, starting from layer A(index 1),
+	      layer B (index 2) and so on.</para>
+	<para>The number of filled elements are stored at <constant>dtv_property.stat.len</constant>.</para>
+	<para>Each element of the <constant>dtv_property.stat.dtv_stats</constant> array consists on two elements:</para>
+	<itemizedlist mark='opencircle'>
+		<listitem><para><constant>svalue</constant> or <constant>uvalue</constant>, where
+			<constant>svalue</constant> is for signed values of the measure (dB measures)
+			and <constant>uvalue</constant> is for unsigned values (counters, relative scale)</para></listitem>
+		<listitem><para><constant>scale</constant> - Scale for the value. It can be:</para>
+			<itemizedlist mark='bullet' id="fecap-scale-params">
+				<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_NOT_AVAILABLE</constant> - The parameter is supported by the frontend, but it was not possible to collect it (could be a transitory or permanent condition)</para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_DECIBEL</constant> - parameter is a signed value, measured in 1/1000 dB</para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_RELATIVE</constant> - parameter is a unsigned value, where 0 means 0% and 65535 means 100%.</para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_COUNTER</constant> - parameter is a unsigned value that counts the occurrence of an event, like bit error, block error, or lapsed time.</para></listitem>
+			</itemizedlist>
+		</listitem>
+	</itemizedlist>
+	<section id="DTV-STAT-SIGNAL-STRENGTH">
+		<title><constant>DTV_STAT_SIGNAL_STRENGTH</constant></title>
+		<para>Indicates the signal strength level at the analog part of the tuner or of the demod.</para>
+		<para>Possible scales for this metric are:</para>
+		<itemizedlist mark='bullet'>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_NOT_AVAILABLE</constant> - it failed to measure it, or the measurement was not complete yet.</para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_DECIBEL</constant> - signal strength is in 0.0001 dBm units, power measured in miliwatts. This value is generally negative.</para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_RELATIVE</constant> - The frontend provides a 0% to 100% measurement for power (actually, 0 to 65535).</para></listitem>
+		</itemizedlist>
+	</section>
+	<section id="DTV-STAT-CNR">
+		<title><constant>DTV_STAT_CNR</constant></title>
+		<para>Indicates the Signal to Noise ratio for the main carrier.</para>
+		<para>Possible scales for this metric are:</para>
+		<itemizedlist mark='bullet'>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_NOT_AVAILABLE</constant> - it failed to measure it, or the measurement was not complete yet.</para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_DECIBEL</constant> - Signal/Noise ratio is in 0.0001 dB units.</para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_RELATIVE</constant> - The frontend provides a 0% to 100% measurement for Signal/Noise (actually, 0 to 65535).</para></listitem>
+		</itemizedlist>
+	</section>
+	<section id="DTV-STAT-PRE-ERROR-BIT-COUNT">
+		<title><constant>DTV_STAT_PRE_ERROR_BIT_COUNT</constant></title>
+		<para>Measures the number of bit errors before the forward error correction (FEC) on the inner coding block (before Viterbi, LDPC or other inner code).</para>
+		<para>This measure is taken during the same interval as <constant>DTV_STAT_PRE_TOTAL_BIT_COUNT</constant>.</para>
+		<para>In order to get the BER (Bit Error Rate) measurement, it should be divided by
+		<link linkend="DTV-STAT-PRE-TOTAL-BIT-COUNT"><constant>DTV_STAT_PRE_TOTAL_BIT_COUNT</constant></link>.</para>
+		<para>This measurement is monotonically increased, as the frontend gets more bit count measurements.
+		      The frontend may reset it when a channel/transponder is tuned.</para>
+		<para>Possible scales for this metric are:</para>
+		<itemizedlist mark='bullet'>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_NOT_AVAILABLE</constant> - it failed to measure it, or the measurement was not complete yet.</para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_COUNTER</constant> - Number of error bits counted before the inner coding.</para></listitem>
+		</itemizedlist>
+	</section>
+	<section id="DTV-STAT-PRE-TOTAL-BIT-COUNT">
+		<title><constant>DTV_STAT_PRE_TOTAL_BIT_COUNT</constant></title>
+		<para>Measures the amount of bits received before the inner code block, during the same period as
+		<link linkend="DTV-STAT-PRE-ERROR-BIT-COUNT"><constant>DTV_STAT_PRE_ERROR_BIT_COUNT</constant></link> measurement was taken.</para>
+		<para>It should be noticed that this measurement can be smaller than the total amount of bits on the transport stream,
+		      as the frontend may need to manually restart the measurement, losing some data between each measurement interval.</para>
+		<para>This measurement is monotonically increased, as the frontend gets more bit count measurements.
+		      The frontend may reset it when a channel/transponder is tuned.</para>
+		<para>Possible scales for this metric are:</para>
+		<itemizedlist mark='bullet'>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_NOT_AVAILABLE</constant> - it failed to measure it, or the measurement was not complete yet.</para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_COUNTER</constant> - Number of bits counted while measuring
+				 <link linkend="DTV-STAT-PRE-ERROR-BIT-COUNT"><constant>DTV_STAT_PRE_ERROR_BIT_COUNT</constant></link>.</para></listitem>
+		</itemizedlist>
+	</section>
+	<section id="DTV-STAT-POST-ERROR-BIT-COUNT">
+		<title><constant>DTV_STAT_POST_ERROR_BIT_COUNT</constant></title>
+		<para>Measures the number of bit errors after the forward error correction (FEC) done by inner code block (after Viterbi, LDPC or other inner code).</para>
+		<para>This measure is taken during the same interval as <constant>DTV_STAT_POST_TOTAL_BIT_COUNT</constant>.</para>
+		<para>In order to get the BER (Bit Error Rate) measurement, it should be divided by
+		<link linkend="DTV-STAT-POST-TOTAL-BIT-COUNT"><constant>DTV_STAT_POST_TOTAL_BIT_COUNT</constant></link>.</para>
+		<para>This measurement is monotonically increased, as the frontend gets more bit count measurements.
+		      The frontend may reset it when a channel/transponder is tuned.</para>
+		<para>Possible scales for this metric are:</para>
+		<itemizedlist mark='bullet'>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_NOT_AVAILABLE</constant> - it failed to measure it, or the measurement was not complete yet.</para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_COUNTER</constant> - Number of error bits counted after the inner coding.</para></listitem>
+		</itemizedlist>
+	</section>
+	<section id="DTV-STAT-POST-TOTAL-BIT-COUNT">
+		<title><constant>DTV_STAT_POST_TOTAL_BIT_COUNT</constant></title>
+		<para>Measures the amount of bits received after the inner coding, during the same period as
+		<link linkend="DTV-STAT-POST-ERROR-BIT-COUNT"><constant>DTV_STAT_POST_ERROR_BIT_COUNT</constant></link> measurement was taken.</para>
+		<para>It should be noticed that this measurement can be smaller than the total amount of bits on the transport stream,
+		      as the frontend may need to manually restart the measurement, losing some data between each measurement interval.</para>
+		<para>This measurement is monotonically increased, as the frontend gets more bit count measurements.
+		      The frontend may reset it when a channel/transponder is tuned.</para>
+		<para>Possible scales for this metric are:</para>
+		<itemizedlist mark='bullet'>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_NOT_AVAILABLE</constant> - it failed to measure it, or the measurement was not complete yet.</para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_COUNTER</constant> - Number of bits counted while measuring
+				 <link linkend="DTV-STAT-POST-ERROR-BIT-COUNT"><constant>DTV_STAT_POST_ERROR_BIT_COUNT</constant></link>.</para></listitem>
+		</itemizedlist>
+	</section>
+	<section id="DTV-STAT-ERROR-BLOCK-COUNT">
+		<title><constant>DTV_STAT_ERROR_BLOCK_COUNT</constant></title>
+		<para>Measures the number of block errors after the outer forward error correction coding (after Reed-Solomon or other outer code).</para>
+		<para>This measurement is monotonically increased, as the frontend gets more bit count measurements.
+		      The frontend may reset it when a channel/transponder is tuned.</para>
+		<para>Possible scales for this metric are:</para>
+		<itemizedlist mark='bullet'>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_NOT_AVAILABLE</constant> - it failed to measure it, or the measurement was not complete yet.</para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_COUNTER</constant> - Number of error blocks counted after the outer coding.</para></listitem>
+		</itemizedlist>
+	</section>
+	<section id="DTV-STAT-TOTAL-BLOCK-COUNT">
+		<title><constant>DTV-STAT_TOTAL_BLOCK_COUNT</constant></title>
+		<para>Measures the total number of blocks received during the same period as
+		<link linkend="DTV-STAT-ERROR-BLOCK-COUNT"><constant>DTV_STAT_ERROR_BLOCK_COUNT</constant></link> measurement was taken.</para>
+		<para>It can be used to calculate the PER indicator, by dividing
+		<link linkend="DTV-STAT-ERROR-BLOCK-COUNT"><constant>DTV_STAT_ERROR_BLOCK_COUNT</constant></link>
+		by <link linkend="DTV-STAT-TOTAL-BLOCK-COUNT"><constant>DTV-STAT-TOTAL-BLOCK-COUNT</constant></link>.</para>
+		<para>Possible scales for this metric are:</para>
+		<itemizedlist mark='bullet'>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_NOT_AVAILABLE</constant> - it failed to measure it, or the measurement was not complete yet.</para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><constant>FE_SCALE_COUNTER</constant> - Number of blocks counted while measuring
+			<link linkend="DTV-STAT-ERROR-BLOCK-COUNT"><constant>DTV_STAT_ERROR_BLOCK_COUNT</constant></link>.</para></listitem>
+		</itemizedlist>
+	</section>
+	</section>
+
 	<section id="frontend-property-terrestrial-systems">
 	<title>Properties used on terrestrial delivery systems</title>
 		<section id="dvbt-params">
@@ -683,7 +1035,9 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy {
 				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-GUARD-INTERVAL"><constant>DTV_GUARD_INTERVAL</constant></link></para></listitem>
 				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-TRANSMISSION-MODE"><constant>DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE</constant></link></para></listitem>
 				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-HIERARCHY"><constant>DTV_HIERARCHY</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-LNA"><constant>DTV_LNA</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			</itemizedlist>
+			<para>In addition, the <link linkend="frontend-stat-properties">DTV QoS statistics</link> are also valid.</para>
 		</section>
 		<section id="dvbt2-params">
 			<title>DVB-T2 delivery system</title>
@@ -705,8 +1059,10 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy {
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-GUARD-INTERVAL"><constant>DTV_GUARD_INTERVAL</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-TRANSMISSION-MODE"><constant>DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-HIERARCHY"><constant>DTV_HIERARCHY</constant></link></para></listitem>
-			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-DVBT2-PLP-ID"><constant>DTV_DVBT2_PLP_ID</constant></link></para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-STREAM-ID"><constant>DTV_STREAM_ID</constant></link></para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-LNA"><constant>DTV_LNA</constant></link></para></listitem>
 		</itemizedlist>
+		<para>In addition, the <link linkend="frontend-stat-properties">DTV QoS statistics</link> are also valid.</para>
 		</section>
 		<section id="isdbt">
 		<title>ISDB-T delivery system</title>
@@ -760,6 +1116,7 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy {
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ISDBT-LAYER-SEGMENT-COUNT"><constant>DTV_ISDBT_LAYERC_SEGMENT_COUNT</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ISDBT-LAYER-TIME-INTERLEAVING"><constant>DTV_ISDBT_LAYERC_TIME_INTERLEAVING</constant></link></para></listitem>
 		</itemizedlist>
+		<para>In addition, the <link linkend="frontend-stat-properties">DTV QoS statistics</link> are also valid.</para>
 		</section>
 		<section id="atsc-params">
 			<title>ATSC delivery system</title>
@@ -773,6 +1130,55 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy {
 				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-MODULATION"><constant>DTV_MODULATION</constant></link></para></listitem>
 				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-BANDWIDTH-HZ"><constant>DTV_BANDWIDTH_HZ</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			</itemizedlist>
+			<para>In addition, the <link linkend="frontend-stat-properties">DTV QoS statistics</link> are also valid.</para>
+		</section>
+		<section id="atscmh-params">
+			<title>ATSC-MH delivery system</title>
+			<para>The following parameters are valid for ATSC-MH:</para>
+			<itemizedlist mark='opencircle'>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-API-VERSION"><constant>DTV_API_VERSION</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-DELIVERY-SYSTEM"><constant>DTV_DELIVERY_SYSTEM</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-TUNE"><constant>DTV_TUNE</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-CLEAR"><constant>DTV_CLEAR</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-FREQUENCY"><constant>DTV_FREQUENCY</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-BANDWIDTH-HZ"><constant>DTV_BANDWIDTH_HZ</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-FIC-VER"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_FIC_VER</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-PARADE-ID"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_PARADE_ID</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-NOG"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_NOG</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-TNOG"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_TNOG</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SGN"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SGN</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-PRC"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_PRC</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-FRAME-MODE"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_FRAME_MODE</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-FRAME-ENSEMBLE"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_FRAME_ENSEMBLE</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-CODE-MODE-PRI"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_CODE_MODE_PRI</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-RS-CODE-MODE-SEC"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_RS_CODE_MODE_SEC</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-BLOCK-MODE"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_BLOCK_MODE</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-A"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_A</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-B"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_B</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-C"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_C</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ATSCMH-SCCC-CODE-MODE-D"><constant>DTV_ATSCMH_SCCC_CODE_MODE_D</constant></link></para></listitem>
+			</itemizedlist>
+			<para>In addition, the <link linkend="frontend-stat-properties">DTV QoS statistics</link> are also valid.</para>
+		</section>
+		<section id="dtmb-params">
+			<title>DTMB delivery system</title>
+			<para>The following parameters are valid for DTMB:</para>
+			<itemizedlist mark='opencircle'>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-API-VERSION"><constant>DTV_API_VERSION</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-DELIVERY-SYSTEM"><constant>DTV_DELIVERY_SYSTEM</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-TUNE"><constant>DTV_TUNE</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-CLEAR"><constant>DTV_CLEAR</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-FREQUENCY"><constant>DTV_FREQUENCY</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-MODULATION"><constant>DTV_MODULATION</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-BANDWIDTH-HZ"><constant>DTV_BANDWIDTH_HZ</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INVERSION"><constant>DTV_INVERSION</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INNER-FEC"><constant>DTV_INNER_FEC</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-GUARD-INTERVAL"><constant>DTV_GUARD_INTERVAL</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-TRANSMISSION-MODE"><constant>DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INTERLEAVING"><constant>DTV_INTERLEAVING</constant></link></para></listitem>
+				<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-LNA"><constant>DTV_LNA</constant></link></para></listitem>
+			</itemizedlist>
+			<para>In addition, the <link linkend="frontend-stat-properties">DTV QoS statistics</link> are also valid.</para>
 		</section>
 	</section>
 	<section id="frontend-property-cable-systems">
@@ -792,7 +1198,9 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy {
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INVERSION"><constant>DTV_INVERSION</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-SYMBOL-RATE"><constant>DTV_SYMBOL_RATE</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INNER-FEC"><constant>DTV_INNER_FEC</constant></link></para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-LNA"><constant>DTV_LNA</constant></link></para></listitem>
 		</itemizedlist>
+		<para>In addition, the <link linkend="frontend-stat-properties">DTV QoS statistics</link> are also valid.</para>
 	</section>
 	<section id="dvbc-annex-b-params">
 		<title>DVB-C Annex B delivery system</title>
@@ -806,7 +1214,9 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy {
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-FREQUENCY"><constant>DTV_FREQUENCY</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-MODULATION"><constant>DTV_MODULATION</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INVERSION"><constant>DTV_INVERSION</constant></link></para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-LNA"><constant>DTV_LNA</constant></link></para></listitem>
 		</itemizedlist>
+		<para>In addition, the <link linkend="frontend-stat-properties">DTV QoS statistics</link> are also valid.</para>
 	</section>
 	</section>
 	<section id="frontend-property-satellital-systems">
@@ -826,6 +1236,7 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy {
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-VOLTAGE"><constant>DTV_VOLTAGE</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-TONE"><constant>DTV_TONE</constant></link></para></listitem>
 		</itemizedlist>
+		<para>In addition, the <link linkend="frontend-stat-properties">DTV QoS statistics</link> are also valid.</para>
 		<para>Future implementations might add those two missing parameters:</para>
 		<itemizedlist mark='opencircle'>
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-DISEQC-MASTER"><constant>DTV_DISEQC_MASTER</constant></link></para></listitem>
@@ -839,7 +1250,9 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy {
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-MODULATION"><constant>DTV_MODULATION</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-PILOT"><constant>DTV_PILOT</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ROLLOFF"><constant>DTV_ROLLOFF</constant></link></para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-STREAM-ID"><constant>DTV_STREAM_ID</constant></link></para></listitem>
 		</itemizedlist>
+		<para>In addition, the <link linkend="frontend-stat-properties">DTV QoS statistics</link> are also valid.</para>
 	</section>
 	<section id="turbo-params">
 		<title>Turbo code delivery system</title>
@@ -861,7 +1274,7 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy {
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-SYMBOL-RATE"><constant>DTV_SYMBOL_RATE</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-INNER-FEC"><constant>DTV_INNER_FEC</constant></link></para></listitem>
 			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-VOLTAGE"><constant>DTV_VOLTAGE</constant></link></para></listitem>
-			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-ISDBS-TS-ID"><constant>DTV_ISDBS_TS_ID</constant></link></para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para><link linkend="DTV-STREAM-ID"><constant>DTV_STREAM_ID</constant></link></para></listitem>
 		</itemizedlist>
 	</section>
 	</section>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/frontend.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/frontend.xml
index aeaed59d0f1f..0d6e81bd9ed2 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/frontend.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/frontend.xml
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ supported via the new <link linkend="FE_GET_SET_PROPERTY">FE_GET_PROPERTY/FE_GET
 
 <para>The usage of this field is deprecated, as it doesn't report all supported standards, and
 will provide an incomplete information for frontends that support multiple delivery systems.
-Please use <link linkend="DTV_ENUM_DELSYS">DTV_ENUM_DELSYS</link> instead.</para>
+Please use <link linkend="DTV-ENUM-DELSYS">DTV_ENUM_DELSYS</link> instead.</para>
 </section>
 
 <section id="fe-caps-t">
@@ -101,6 +101,7 @@ a specific frontend type.</para>
 	FE_CAN_8VSB                   = 0x200000,
 	FE_CAN_16VSB                  = 0x400000,
 	FE_HAS_EXTENDED_CAPS          = 0x800000,
+	FE_CAN_MULTISTREAM            = 0x4000000,
 	FE_CAN_TURBO_FEC              = 0x8000000,
 	FE_CAN_2G_MODULATION          = 0x10000000,
 	FE_NEEDS_BENDING              = 0x20000000,
@@ -207,18 +208,44 @@ spec.</para>
 <para>Several functions of the frontend device use the fe_status data type defined
 by</para>
 <programlisting>
- typedef enum fe_status {
-	 FE_HAS_SIGNAL     = 0x01,   /&#x22C6;  found something above the noise level &#x22C6;/
-	 FE_HAS_CARRIER    = 0x02,   /&#x22C6;  found a DVB signal  &#x22C6;/
-	 FE_HAS_VITERBI    = 0x04,   /&#x22C6;  FEC is stable  &#x22C6;/
-	 FE_HAS_SYNC       = 0x08,   /&#x22C6;  found sync bytes  &#x22C6;/
-	 FE_HAS_LOCK       = 0x10,   /&#x22C6;  everything's working... &#x22C6;/
-	 FE_TIMEDOUT       = 0x20,   /&#x22C6;  no lock within the last ~2 seconds &#x22C6;/
-	 FE_REINIT         = 0x40    /&#x22C6;  frontend was reinitialized,  &#x22C6;/
- } fe_status_t;                      /&#x22C6;  application is recommned to reset &#x22C6;/
+typedef enum fe_status {
+	FE_HAS_SIGNAL		= 0x01,
+	FE_HAS_CARRIER		= 0x02,
+	FE_HAS_VITERBI		= 0x04,
+	FE_HAS_SYNC		= 0x08,
+	FE_HAS_LOCK		= 0x10,
+	FE_TIMEDOUT		= 0x20,
+	FE_REINIT		= 0x40,
+} fe_status_t;
 </programlisting>
-<para>to indicate the current state and/or state changes of the frontend hardware.
-</para>
+<para>to indicate the current state and/or state changes of the frontend hardware:
+</para>
+
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody>
+<row>
+<entry align="char">FE_HAS_SIGNAL</entry>
+<entry align="char">The frontend has found something above the noise level</entry>
+</row><row>
+<entry align="char">FE_HAS_CARRIER</entry>
+<entry align="char">The frontend has found a DVB signal</entry>
+</row><row>
+<entry align="char">FE_HAS_VITERBI</entry>
+<entry align="char">The frontend FEC inner coding (Viterbi, LDPC or other inner code) is stable</entry>
+</row><row>
+<entry align="char">FE_HAS_SYNC</entry>
+<entry align="char">Synchronization bytes was found</entry>
+</row><row>
+<entry align="char">FE_HAS_LOCK</entry>
+<entry align="char">The DVB were locked and everything is working</entry>
+</row><row>
+<entry align="char">FE_TIMEDOUT</entry>
+<entry align="char">no lock within the last about 2 seconds</entry>
+</row><row>
+<entry align="char">FE_REINIT</entry>
+<entry align="char">The frontend was reinitialized, application is
+recommended to reset DiSEqC, tone and parameters</entry>
+</row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
 
 </section>
 
@@ -238,7 +265,7 @@ and to add newer delivery systems.</para>
 <constant>FE_GET_PROPERTY/FE_SET_PROPERTY</constant></link> instead, in
 order to be able to support the newer System Delivery like  DVB-S2, DVB-T2,
 DVB-C2, ISDB, etc.</para>
-<para>All kinds of parameters are combined as an union in the FrontendParameters structure:</para>
+<para>All kinds of parameters are combined as an union in the FrontendParameters structure:
 <programlisting>
 struct dvb_frontend_parameters {
 	uint32_t frequency;     /&#x22C6; (absolute) frequency in Hz for QAM/OFDM &#x22C6;/
@@ -251,12 +278,13 @@ struct dvb_frontend_parameters {
 		struct dvb_vsb_parameters  vsb;
 	} u;
 };
-</programlisting>
+</programlisting></para>
 <para>In the case of QPSK frontends the <constant>frequency</constant> field specifies the intermediate
 frequency, i.e. the offset which is effectively added to the local oscillator frequency (LOF) of
 the LNB. The intermediate frequency has to be specified in units of kHz. For QAM and
 OFDM frontends the <constant>frequency</constant> specifies the absolute frequency and is given in Hz.
 </para>
+
 <section id="dvb-qpsk-parameters">
 <title>QPSK parameters</title>
 <para>For satellite QPSK frontends you have to use the <constant>dvb_qpsk_parameters</constant> structure:</para>
@@ -321,8 +349,8 @@ itself.
 <section id="fe-code-rate-t">
 <title>frontend code rate</title>
 <para>The possible values for the <constant>fec_inner</constant> field used on
-<link refend="dvb-qpsk-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qpsk_parameters</constant></link> and
-<link refend="dvb-qam-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qam_parameters</constant></link> are:
+<link linkend="dvb-qpsk-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qpsk_parameters</constant></link> and
+<link linkend="dvb-qam-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qam_parameters</constant></link> are:
 </para>
 <programlisting>
 typedef enum fe_code_rate {
@@ -347,9 +375,9 @@ detection.
 <section id="fe-modulation-t">
 <title>frontend modulation type for QAM, OFDM and VSB</title>
 <para>For cable and terrestrial frontends, e. g. for
-<link refend="dvb-qam-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qpsk_parameters</constant></link>,
-<link refend="dvb-ofdm-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qam_parameters</constant></link> and
-<link refend="dvb-vsb-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qam_parameters</constant></link>,
+<link linkend="dvb-qam-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qpsk_parameters</constant></link>,
+<link linkend="dvb-ofdm-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qam_parameters</constant></link> and
+<link linkend="dvb-vsb-parameters"><constant>struct dvb_qam_parameters</constant></link>,
 it needs to specify the quadrature modulation mode which can be one of the following:
 </para>
 <programlisting>
@@ -370,8 +398,8 @@ it needs to specify the quadrature modulation mode which can be one of the follo
  } fe_modulation_t;
 </programlisting>
 </section>
-<para>Finally, there are several more parameters for OFDM:
-</para>
+<section>
+<title>More OFDM parameters</title>
 <section id="fe-transmit-mode-t">
 <title>Number of carriers per channel</title>
 <programlisting>
@@ -427,6 +455,7 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy {
  } fe_hierarchy_t;
 </programlisting>
 </section>
+</section>
 
 </section>
 
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml
index 170064a3dc8f..2048b53d19b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ a partial path like:</para>
 additional include file <emphasis
 role="tt">linux/dvb/version.h</emphasis> exists, which defines the
 constant <emphasis role="tt">DVB_API_VERSION</emphasis>. This document
-describes <emphasis role="tt">DVB_API_VERSION 5.4</emphasis>.
+describes <emphasis role="tt">DVB_API_VERSION 5.8</emphasis>.
 </para>
 
 </section>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/kdapi.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/kdapi.xml
index 6c67481eaa4b..6c11ec52cbee 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/kdapi.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/kdapi.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 <para>The kernel demux API defines a driver-internal interface for registering low-level,
 hardware specific driver to a hardware independent demux layer. It is only of interest for
 DVB device driver writers. The header file for this API is named <emphasis role="tt">demux.h</emphasis> and located in
-<emphasis role="tt">drivers/media/dvb/dvb-core</emphasis>.
+<emphasis role="tt">drivers/media/dvb-core</emphasis>.
 </para>
 <para>Maintainer note: This section must be reviewed. It is probably out of date.
 </para>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/net.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/net.xml
index 67d37e5ce597..a193e86941b5 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/net.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/net.xml
@@ -26,4 +26,131 @@ struct dvb_net_if {
 <title>DVB net Function Calls</title>
 <para>To be written&#x2026;
 </para>
+
+<section id="NET_ADD_IF"
+role="subsection"><title>NET_ADD_IF</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = NET_ADD_IF,
+ struct dvb_net_if *if);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals NET_ADD_IF for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>struct dvb_net_if *if
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+<section id="NET_REMOVE_IF"
+role="subsection"><title>NET_REMOVE_IF</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = NET_REMOVE_IF);
+</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals NET_REMOVE_IF for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
+
+<section id="NET_GET_IF"
+role="subsection"><title>NET_GET_IF</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl is undocumented. Documentation is welcome.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(fd, int request = NET_GET_IF,
+ struct dvb_net_if *if);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals NET_GET_IF for this command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>struct dvb_net_if *if
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Undocumented.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+</section>
 </section>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/video.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/video.xml
index 25fb823226b4..3ea1ca7e785e 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/video.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/video.xml
@@ -15,6 +15,10 @@ the audio and video device as well as the video4linux device.
 <para>The ioctls that deal with SPUs (sub picture units) and navigation packets are only
 supported on some MPEG decoders made for DVD playback.
 </para>
+<para>
+These ioctls were also used by V4L2 to control MPEG decoders implemented in V4L2. The use
+of these ioctls for that purpose has been made obsolete and proper V4L2 ioctls or controls
+have been created to replace that functionality.</para>
 <section id="video_types">
 <title>Video Data Types</title>
 
@@ -55,7 +59,7 @@ typedef enum {
 </section>
 
 <section id="video-stream-source-t">
-<title>video stream source</title>
+<title>video_stream_source_t</title>
 <para>The video stream source is set through the VIDEO_SELECT_SOURCE call and can take
 the following values, depending on whether we are replaying from an internal (demuxer) or
 external (user write) source.
@@ -76,7 +80,7 @@ call.
 </section>
 
 <section id="video-play-state-t">
-<title>video play state</title>
+<title>video_play_state_t</title>
 <para>The following values can be returned by the VIDEO_GET_STATUS call representing the
 state of video playback.
 </para>
@@ -90,9 +94,9 @@ typedef enum {
 </section>
 
 <section id="video-command">
+<title>struct video_command</title>
 <para>The structure must be zeroed before use by the application
 This ensures it can be extended safely in the future.</para>
-<title>struct video-command</title>
 <programlisting>
 struct video_command {
 	__u32 cmd;
@@ -121,7 +125,7 @@ struct video_command {
 </section>
 
 <section id="video-size-t">
-<title>struct video_size-t</title>
+<title>video_size_t</title>
 <programlisting>
 typedef struct {
 	int w;
@@ -217,7 +221,7 @@ bits set according to the hardwares capabilities.
 </section>
 
 <section id="video-system">
-<title>video system</title>
+<title>video_system_t</title>
 <para>A call to VIDEO_SET_SYSTEM sets the desired video system for TV output. The
 following system types can be set:
 </para>
@@ -263,7 +267,7 @@ call expects the following format for that information:
 
 </section>
 <section id="video-spu">
-<title>video SPU</title>
+<title>struct video_spu</title>
 <para>Calling VIDEO_SET_SPU deactivates or activates SPU decoding, according to the
 following format:
 </para>
@@ -277,12 +281,12 @@ following format:
 
 </section>
 <section id="video-spu-palette">
-<title>video SPU palette</title>
+<title>struct video_spu_palette</title>
 <para>The following structure is used to set the SPU palette by calling VIDEO_SPU_PALETTE:
 </para>
 <programlisting>
  typedef
- struct video_spu_palette{
+ struct video_spu_palette {
 	 int length;
 	 uint8_t &#x22C6;palette;
  } video_spu_palette_t;
@@ -290,13 +294,13 @@ following format:
 
 </section>
 <section id="video-navi-pack">
-<title>video NAVI pack</title>
+<title>struct video_navi_pack</title>
 <para>In order to get the navigational data the following structure has to be passed to the ioctl
 VIDEO_GET_NAVI:
 </para>
 <programlisting>
  typedef
- struct video_navi_pack{
+ struct video_navi_pack {
 	 int length;         /&#x22C6; 0 ... 1024 &#x22C6;/
 	 uint8_t data[1024];
  } video_navi_pack_t;
@@ -305,7 +309,7 @@ VIDEO_GET_NAVI:
 
 
 <section id="video-attributes-t">
-<title>video attributes</title>
+<title>video_attributes_t</title>
 <para>The following attributes can be set by a call to VIDEO_SET_ATTRIBUTES:
 </para>
 <programlisting>
@@ -541,6 +545,8 @@ VIDEO_GET_NAVI:
 role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_STOP</title>
 <para>DESCRIPTION
 </para>
+<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To control a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2
+&VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; instead.</para>
 <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
  align="char">
 <para>This ioctl call asks the Video Device to stop playing the current stream.
@@ -598,6 +604,8 @@ role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_STOP</title>
 role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_PLAY</title>
 <para>DESCRIPTION
 </para>
+<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To control a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2
+&VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; instead.</para>
 <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
  align="char">
 <para>This ioctl call asks the Video Device to start playing a video stream from the
@@ -634,6 +642,8 @@ role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_PLAY</title>
 role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_FREEZE</title>
 <para>DESCRIPTION
 </para>
+<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To control a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2
+&VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; instead.</para>
 <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
  align="char">
 <para>This ioctl call suspends the live video stream being played. Decoding
@@ -674,6 +684,8 @@ role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_FREEZE</title>
 role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_CONTINUE</title>
 <para>DESCRIPTION
 </para>
+<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To control a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2
+&VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; instead.</para>
 <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
  align="char">
 <para>This ioctl call restarts decoding and playing processes of the video stream
@@ -710,6 +722,9 @@ role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_CONTINUE</title>
 role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_SELECT_SOURCE</title>
 <para>DESCRIPTION
 </para>
+<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. This ioctl was also supported by the
+V4L2 ivtv driver, but that has been replaced by the ivtv-specific
+<constant>IVTV_IOC_PASSTHROUGH_MODE</constant> ioctl.</para>
 <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
  align="char">
 <para>This ioctl call informs the video device which source shall be used for the input
@@ -845,10 +860,160 @@ role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_STATUS</title>
  </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
 &return-value-dvb;
 
+</section><section id="VIDEO_GET_FRAME_COUNT"
+role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_FRAME_COUNT</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<para>This ioctl is obsolete. Do not use in new drivers. For V4L2 decoders this
+ioctl has been replaced by the <constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_FRAME</constant> control.</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl call asks the Video Device to return the number of displayed frames
+since the decoder was started.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request =
+ VIDEO_GET_FRAME_COUNT, __u64 *pts);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals VIDEO_GET_FRAME_COUNT for this
+ command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>__u64 *pts
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Returns the number of frames displayed since the decoder was started.
+</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+
+</section><section id="VIDEO_GET_PTS"
+role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_PTS</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<para>This ioctl is obsolete. Do not use in new drivers. For V4L2 decoders this
+ioctl has been replaced by the <constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_PTS</constant> control.</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl call asks the Video Device to return the current PTS timestamp.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request =
+ VIDEO_GET_PTS, __u64 *pts);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals VIDEO_GET_PTS for this
+ command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>__u64 *pts
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Returns the 33-bit timestamp as defined in ITU T-REC-H.222.0 / ISO/IEC 13818-1.
+</para>
+<para>
+The PTS should belong to the currently played
+frame if possible, but may also be a value close to it
+like the PTS of the last decoded frame or the last PTS
+extracted by the PES parser.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+
+</section><section id="VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE"
+role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl call asks the Video Device to return the current framerate.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request =
+ VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE, unsigned int *rate);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE for this
+ command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>unsigned int *rate
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Returns the framerate in number of frames per 1000 seconds.
+</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+
 </section><section id="VIDEO_GET_EVENT"
 role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_EVENT</title>
 <para>DESCRIPTION
 </para>
+<para>This ioctl is for DVB devices only. To get events from a V4L2 decoder use the V4L2
+&VIDIOC-DQEVENT; ioctl instead.</para>
 <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
  align="char">
 <para>This ioctl call returns an event of type video_event if available. If an event is
@@ -914,6 +1079,152 @@ role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_EVENT</title>
 </entry>
  </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
 
+</section><section id="VIDEO_COMMAND"
+role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_COMMAND</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<para>This ioctl is obsolete. Do not use in new drivers. For V4L2 decoders this
+ioctl has been replaced by the &VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; ioctl.</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl commands the decoder. The <constant>video_command</constant> struct
+is a subset of the <constant>v4l2_decoder_cmd</constant> struct, so refer to the
+&VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD; documentation for more information.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request =
+ VIDEO_COMMAND, struct video_command *cmd);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals VIDEO_COMMAND for this
+ command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>struct video_command *cmd
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Commands the decoder.
+</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+
+</section><section id="VIDEO_TRY_COMMAND"
+role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_TRY_COMMAND</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<para>This ioctl is obsolete. Do not use in new drivers. For V4L2 decoders this
+ioctl has been replaced by the &VIDIOC-TRY-DECODER-CMD; ioctl.</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl tries a decoder command. The <constant>video_command</constant> struct
+is a subset of the <constant>v4l2_decoder_cmd</constant> struct, so refer to the
+&VIDIOC-TRY-DECODER-CMD; documentation for more information.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request =
+ VIDEO_TRY_COMMAND, struct video_command *cmd);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals VIDEO_TRY_COMMAND for this
+ command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>struct video_command *cmd
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Try a decoder command.
+</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+
+</section><section id="VIDEO_GET_SIZE"
+role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_GET_SIZE</title>
+<para>DESCRIPTION
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>This ioctl returns the size and aspect ratio.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>SYNOPSIS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request =
+ VIDEO_GET_SIZE, video_size_t *size);</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>PARAMETERS
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int fd</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>int request</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Equals VIDEO_GET_SIZE for this
+ command.</para>
+</entry>
+ </row><row><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>video_size_t *size
+</para>
+</entry><entry
+ align="char">
+<para>Returns the size and aspect ratio.
+</para>
+</entry>
+ </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+&return-value-dvb;
+
 </section><section id="VIDEO_SET_DISPLAY_FORMAT"
 role="subsection"><title>VIDEO_SET_DISPLAY_FORMAT</title>
 <para>DESCRIPTION
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml
index cea6fd3ed428..d2eb79e41a01 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml
@@ -128,6 +128,26 @@ url="http://www.ijg.org">http://www.ijg.org</ulink>)</corpauthor>
       <subtitle>Version 1.02</subtitle>
     </biblioentry>
 
+    <biblioentry id="itu-t81">
+      <abbrev>ITU-T.81</abbrev>
+      <authorgroup>
+	<corpauthor>International Telecommunication Union
+(<ulink url="http://www.itu.int">http://www.itu.int</ulink>)</corpauthor>
+      </authorgroup>
+      <title>ITU-T Recommendation T.81
+"Information Technology &mdash; Digital Compression and Coding of Continous-Tone
+Still Images &mdash; Requirements and Guidelines"</title>
+    </biblioentry>
+
+    <biblioentry id="w3c-jpeg-jfif">
+      <abbrev>W3C JPEG JFIF</abbrev>
+      <authorgroup>
+	<corpauthor>The World Wide Web Consortium (<ulink
+url="http://www.w3.org/Graphics/JPEG">http://www.w3.org</ulink>)</corpauthor>
+      </authorgroup>
+      <title>JPEG JFIF</title>
+    </biblioentry>
+
     <biblioentry id="smpte12m">
       <abbrev>SMPTE&nbsp;12M</abbrev>
       <authorgroup>
@@ -158,23 +178,92 @@ Signal - NTSC for Studio Applications"</title>
 1125-Line High-Definition Production"</title>
     </biblioentry>
 
-    <biblioentry id="en50067">
-      <abbrev>EN&nbsp;50067</abbrev>
+    <biblioentry id="iec62106">
+      <abbrev>IEC&nbsp;62106</abbrev>
       <authorgroup>
-	<corpauthor>European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
-(<ulink url="http://www.cenelec.eu">http://www.cenelec.eu</ulink>)</corpauthor>
+	<corpauthor>International Electrotechnical Commission
+(<ulink url="http://www.iec.ch">http://www.iec.ch</ulink>)</corpauthor>
       </authorgroup>
       <title>Specification of the radio data system (RDS) for VHF/FM sound broadcasting
 in the frequency range from 87,5 to 108,0 MHz</title>
     </biblioentry>
 
     <biblioentry id="nrsc4">
-      <abbrev>NRSC-4</abbrev>
+      <abbrev>NRSC-4-B</abbrev>
       <authorgroup>
 	<corpauthor>National Radio Systems Committee
 (<ulink url="http://www.nrscstandards.org">http://www.nrscstandards.org</ulink>)</corpauthor>
       </authorgroup>
-      <title>NTSC-4: United States RBDS Standard</title>
+      <title>NRSC-4-B: United States RBDS Standard</title>
+    </biblioentry>
+
+    <biblioentry id="iso12232">
+      <abbrev>ISO&nbsp;12232:2006</abbrev>
+      <authorgroup>
+	<corpauthor>International Organization for Standardization
+(<ulink url="http://www.iso.org">http://www.iso.org</ulink>)</corpauthor>
+      </authorgroup>
+      <title>Photography &mdash; Digital still cameras &mdash; Determination
+      of exposure index, ISO speed ratings, standard output sensitivity, and
+      recommended exposure index</title>
+    </biblioentry>
+
+    <biblioentry id="cea861">
+      <abbrev>CEA-861-E</abbrev>
+      <authorgroup>
+	<corpauthor>Consumer Electronics Association
+(<ulink url="http://www.ce.org">http://www.ce.org</ulink>)</corpauthor>
+      </authorgroup>
+      <title>A DTV Profile for Uncompressed High Speed Digital Interfaces</title>
+    </biblioentry>
+
+    <biblioentry id="vesadmt">
+      <abbrev>VESA&nbsp;DMT</abbrev>
+      <authorgroup>
+	<corpauthor>Video Electronics Standards Association
+(<ulink url="http://www.vesa.org">http://www.vesa.org</ulink>)</corpauthor>
+      </authorgroup>
+      <title>VESA and Industry Standards and Guidelines for Computer Display Monitor Timing (DMT)</title>
+    </biblioentry>
+
+    <biblioentry id="vesaedid">
+      <abbrev>EDID</abbrev>
+      <authorgroup>
+	<corpauthor>Video Electronics Standards Association
+(<ulink url="http://www.vesa.org">http://www.vesa.org</ulink>)</corpauthor>
+      </authorgroup>
+      <title>VESA Enhanced Extended Display Identification Data Standard</title>
+      <subtitle>Release A, Revision 2</subtitle>
+    </biblioentry>
+
+    <biblioentry id="hdcp">
+      <abbrev>HDCP</abbrev>
+      <authorgroup>
+	<corpauthor>Digital Content Protection LLC
+(<ulink url="http://www.digital-cp.com">http://www.digital-cp.com</ulink>)</corpauthor>
+      </authorgroup>
+      <title>High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System</title>
+      <subtitle>Revision 1.3</subtitle>
+    </biblioentry>
+
+    <biblioentry id="hdmi">
+      <abbrev>HDMI</abbrev>
+      <authorgroup>
+	<corpauthor>HDMI Licensing LLC
+(<ulink url="http://www.hdmi.org">http://www.hdmi.org</ulink>)</corpauthor>
+      </authorgroup>
+      <title>High-Definition Multimedia Interface</title>
+      <subtitle>Specification Version 1.4a</subtitle>
+    </biblioentry>
+
+    <biblioentry id="dp">
+      <abbrev>DP</abbrev>
+      <authorgroup>
+	<corpauthor>Video Electronics Standards Association
+(<ulink url="http://www.vesa.org">http://www.vesa.org</ulink>)</corpauthor>
+      </authorgroup>
+      <title>VESA DisplayPort Standard</title>
+      <subtitle>Version 1, Revision 2</subtitle>
     </biblioentry>
 
   </bibliography>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/common.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/common.xml
index c79278acfb0e..1ddf354aa997 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/common.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/common.xml
@@ -464,14 +464,14 @@ The <structfield>type</structfield> field of the respective
 <structfield>tuner</structfield> field contains the index number of
 the tuner.</para>
 
-      <para>Radio devices have exactly one tuner with index zero, no
+      <para>Radio input devices have exactly one tuner with index zero, no
 video inputs.</para>
 
       <para>To query and change tuner properties applications use the
 &VIDIOC-G-TUNER; and &VIDIOC-S-TUNER; ioctl, respectively. The
 &v4l2-tuner; returned by <constant>VIDIOC_G_TUNER</constant> also
 contains signal status information applicable when the tuner of the
-current video input, or a radio tuner is queried. Note that
+current video or radio input is queried. Note that
 <constant>VIDIOC_S_TUNER</constant> does not switch the current tuner,
 when there is more than one at all. The tuner is solely determined by
 the current video input. Drivers must support both ioctls and set the
@@ -491,8 +491,17 @@ the modulator. The <structfield>type</structfield> field of the
 respective &v4l2-output; returned by the &VIDIOC-ENUMOUTPUT; ioctl is
 set to <constant>V4L2_OUTPUT_TYPE_MODULATOR</constant> and its
 <structfield>modulator</structfield> field contains the index number
-of the modulator. This specification does not define radio output
-devices.</para>
+of the modulator.</para>
+
+      <para>Radio output devices have exactly one modulator with index
+zero, no video outputs.</para>
+
+      <para>A video or radio device cannot support both a tuner and a
+modulator. Two separate device nodes will have to be used for such
+hardware, one that supports the tuner functionality and one that supports
+the modulator functionality. The reason is a limitation with the
+&VIDIOC-S-FREQUENCY; ioctl where you cannot specify whether the frequency
+is for a tuner or a modulator.</para>
 
       <para>To query and change modulator properties applications use
 the &VIDIOC-G-MODULATOR; and &VIDIOC-S-MODULATOR; ioctl. Note that
@@ -555,7 +564,7 @@ automatically.</para>
     <para>To query and select the standard used by the current video
 input or output applications call the &VIDIOC-G-STD; and
 &VIDIOC-S-STD; ioctl, respectively. The <emphasis>received</emphasis>
-standard can be sensed with the &VIDIOC-QUERYSTD; ioctl. Note parameter of all these ioctls is a pointer to a &v4l2-std-id; type (a standard set), <emphasis>not</emphasis> an index into the standard enumeration.<footnote>
+standard can be sensed with the &VIDIOC-QUERYSTD; ioctl. Note that the parameter of all these ioctls is a pointer to a &v4l2-std-id; type (a standard set), <emphasis>not</emphasis> an index into the standard enumeration.<footnote>
 	<para>An alternative to the current scheme is to use pointers
 to indices as arguments of <constant>VIDIOC_G_STD</constant> and
 <constant>VIDIOC_S_STD</constant>, the &v4l2-input; and
@@ -579,30 +588,28 @@ switch to a standard by &v4l2-std-id;.</para>
       </footnote> Drivers must implement all video standard ioctls
 when the device has one or more video inputs or outputs.</para>
 
-    <para>Special rules apply to USB cameras where the notion of video
-standards makes little sense. More generally any capture device,
-output devices accordingly, which is <itemizedlist>
+    <para>Special rules apply to devices such as USB cameras where the notion of video
+standards makes little sense. More generally for any capture or output device
+which is: <itemizedlist>
 	<listitem>
 	  <para>incapable of capturing fields or frames at the nominal
 rate of the video standard, or</para>
 	</listitem>
 	<listitem>
-	  <para>where <link linkend="buffer">timestamps</link> refer
-to the instant the field or frame was received by the driver, not the
-capture time, or</para>
-	</listitem>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>where <link linkend="buffer">sequence numbers</link>
-refer to the frames received by the driver, not the captured
-frames.</para>
+	  <para>that does not support the video standard formats at all.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </itemizedlist> Here the driver shall set the
 <structfield>std</structfield> field of &v4l2-input; and &v4l2-output;
-to zero, the <constant>VIDIOC_G_STD</constant>,
+to zero and the <constant>VIDIOC_G_STD</constant>,
 <constant>VIDIOC_S_STD</constant>,
 <constant>VIDIOC_QUERYSTD</constant> and
 <constant>VIDIOC_ENUMSTD</constant> ioctls shall return the
-&EINVAL;.<footnote>
+&ENOTTY;.<footnote>
+	<para>See <xref linkend="buffer" /> for a rationale.</para>
+	<para>Applications can make use of the <xref linkend="input-capabilities" /> and
+<xref linkend="output-capabilities"/> flags to determine whether the video standard ioctls
+are available for the device.</para>
+
 	<para>See <xref linkend="buffer" /> for a rationale. Probably
 even USB cameras follow some well known video standard. It might have
 been better to explicitly indicate elsewhere if a device cannot live
@@ -617,9 +624,9 @@ up to normal expectations, instead of this exception.</para>
 &v4l2-standard; standard;
 
 if (-1 == ioctl (fd, &VIDIOC-G-STD;, &amp;std_id)) {
-	/* Note when VIDIOC_ENUMSTD always returns EINVAL this
+	/* Note when VIDIOC_ENUMSTD always returns ENOTTY this
 	   is no video device or it falls under the USB exception,
-	   and VIDIOC_G_STD returning EINVAL is no error. */
+	   and VIDIOC_G_STD returning ENOTTY is no error. */
 
 	perror ("VIDIOC_G_STD");
 	exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
@@ -724,41 +731,35 @@ if (-1 == ioctl (fd, &VIDIOC-S-STD;, &amp;std_id)) {
 }
       </programlisting>
     </example>
+  </section>
   <section id="dv-timings">
 	<title>Digital Video (DV) Timings</title>
 	<para>
-	The video standards discussed so far has been dealing with Analog TV and the
+	The video standards discussed so far have been dealing with Analog TV and the
 corresponding video timings. Today there are many more different hardware interfaces
 such as High Definition TV interfaces (HDMI), VGA, DVI connectors etc., that carry
 video signals and there is a need to extend the API to select the video timings
 for these interfaces. Since it is not possible to extend the &v4l2-std-id; due to
-the limited bits available, a new set of IOCTLs is added to set/get video timings at
+the limited bits available, a new set of IOCTLs was added to set/get video timings at
 the input and output: </para><itemizedlist>
 	<listitem>
-	<para>DV Presets: Digital Video (DV) presets. These are IDs representing a
-video timing at the input/output. Presets are pre-defined timings implemented
-by the hardware according to video standards. A __u32 data type is used to represent
-a preset unlike the bit mask that is used in &v4l2-std-id; allowing future extensions
-to support as many different presets as needed.</para>
-	</listitem>
-	<listitem>
-	<para>Custom DV Timings: This will allow applications to define more detailed
-custom video timings for the interface. This includes parameters such as width, height,
-polarities, frontporch, backporch etc.
+	<para>DV Timings: This will allow applications to define detailed
+video timings for the interface. This includes parameters such as width, height,
+polarities, frontporch, backporch etc. The <filename>linux/v4l2-dv-timings.h</filename>
+header can be used to get the timings of the formats in the <xref linkend="cea861" /> and
+<xref linkend="vesadmt" /> standards.
 	</para>
 	</listitem>
 	</itemizedlist>
-	<para>To enumerate and query the attributes of DV presets supported by a device,
-applications use the &VIDIOC-ENUM-DV-PRESETS; ioctl. To get the current DV preset,
-applications use the &VIDIOC-G-DV-PRESET; ioctl and to set a preset they use the
-&VIDIOC-S-DV-PRESET; ioctl.</para>
-	<para>To set custom DV timings for the device, applications use the
-&VIDIOC-S-DV-TIMINGS; ioctl and to get current custom DV timings they use the
-&VIDIOC-G-DV-TIMINGS; ioctl.</para>
+	<para>To enumerate and query the attributes of the DV timings supported by a device,
+	applications use the &VIDIOC-ENUM-DV-TIMINGS; and &VIDIOC-DV-TIMINGS-CAP; ioctls.
+	To set DV timings for the device, applications use the
+&VIDIOC-S-DV-TIMINGS; ioctl and to get current DV timings they use the
+&VIDIOC-G-DV-TIMINGS; ioctl. To detect the DV timings as seen by the video receiver applications
+use the &VIDIOC-QUERY-DV-TIMINGS; ioctl.</para>
 	<para>Applications can make use of the <xref linkend="input-capabilities" /> and
 <xref linkend="output-capabilities"/> flags to decide what ioctls are available to set the
 video timings for the device.</para>
-	</section>
   </section>
 
   &sub-controls;
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml
index a2485b3ff3d2..0c7195e3e093 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml
@@ -1476,7 +1476,7 @@ follows.<informaltable>
 		  </row>
 		  <row>
 		    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE_BASE</constant></entry>
-		    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant></entry>
+		    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> (but this is deprecated)</entry>
 		  </row>
 		</tbody>
 	      </tgroup>
@@ -2254,7 +2254,7 @@ video encoding.</para>
       <orderedlist>
 	<listitem>
 	  <para>The <constant>VIDIOC_G_CHIP_IDENT</constant> ioctl was renamed
-to <constant>VIDIOC_G_CHIP_IDENT_OLD</constant> and &VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-IDENT;
+to <constant>VIDIOC_G_CHIP_IDENT_OLD</constant> and <constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_IDENT</constant>
 was introduced in its place. The old struct <structname>v4l2_chip_ident</structname>
 was renamed to <structname id="v4l2-chip-ident-old">v4l2_chip_ident_old</structname>.</para>
 	</listitem>
@@ -2310,6 +2310,9 @@ more information.</para>
 	<listitem>
 	  <para>Added FM Modulator (FM TX) Extended Control Class: <constant>V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_FM_TX</constant> and their Control IDs.</para>
 	</listitem>
+<listitem>
+	  <para>Added FM Receiver (FM RX) Extended Control Class: <constant>V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_FM_RX</constant> and their Control IDs.</para>
+	</listitem>
 	<listitem>
 	  <para>Added Remote Controller chapter, describing the default Remote Controller mapping for media devices.</para>
 	</listitem>
@@ -2377,10 +2380,11 @@ that used it. It was originally scheduled for removal in 2.6.35.
 	  <para>V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE was added to signal volatile controls to userspace.</para>
         </listitem>
         <listitem>
-	  <para>Add selection API for extended control over cropping and
-composing. Does not affect the compatibility of current drivers and
-applications.  See <link linkend="selection-api"> selection API </link> for
-details.</para>
+	  <para>Add selection API for extended control over cropping
+	  and composing. Does not affect the compatibility of current
+	  drivers and applications. See <link
+	  linkend="selection-api"> selection API </link> for
+	  details.</para>
         </listitem>
       </orderedlist>
     </section>
@@ -2393,6 +2397,129 @@ details.</para>
 	    to the <link linkend="control">User controls class</link>.
 	  </para>
         </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Added the device_caps field to struct v4l2_capabilities and added the new
+	  V4L2_CAP_DEVICE_CAPS capability.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>V4L2 in Linux 3.4</title>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Added <link linkend="jpeg-controls">JPEG compression control
+	  class</link>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Extended the DV Timings API:
+	  &VIDIOC-ENUM-DV-TIMINGS;, &VIDIOC-QUERY-DV-TIMINGS; and
+	  &VIDIOC-DV-TIMINGS-CAP;.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>V4L2 in Linux 3.5</title>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Added integer menus, the new type will be
+	  V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER_MENU.</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Added selection API for V4L2 subdev interface:
+	  &VIDIOC-SUBDEV-G-SELECTION; and
+	  &VIDIOC-SUBDEV-S-SELECTION;.</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para> Added <constant>V4L2_COLORFX_ANTIQUE</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_COLORFX_ART_FREEZE</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_COLORFX_AQUA</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SILHOUETTE</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SOLARIZATION</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_COLORFX_VIVID</constant> and
+	  <constant>V4L2_COLORFX_ARBITRARY_CBCR</constant> menu items
+	  to the <constant>V4L2_CID_COLORFX</constant> control.</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para> Added <constant>V4L2_CID_COLORFX_CBCR</constant> control.</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para> Added camera controls <constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_EXPOSURE_BIAS</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_N_PRESET_WHITE_BALANCE</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_CID_IMAGE_STABILIZATION</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_METERING</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_CID_SCENE_MODE</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_CID_3A_LOCK</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_START</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STOP</constant>,
+	  <constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS</constant> and
+	  <constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE</constant>.
+	  </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>V4L2 in Linux 3.6</title>
+      <orderedlist>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Replaced <structfield>input</structfield> in
+	  <structname>v4l2_buffer</structname> by
+	  <structfield>reserved2</structfield> and removed
+	  <constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_INPUT</constant>.</para>
+	</listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Added V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M and V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M_MPLANE capabilities.</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Added support for frequency band enumerations: &VIDIOC-ENUM-FREQ-BANDS;.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>V4L2 in Linux 3.9</title>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Added timestamp types to
+	  <structfield>flags</structfield> field in
+	  <structname>v4l2_buffer</structname>. See <xref
+	  linkend="buffer-flags" />.</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Added <constant>V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_RANGE</constant> control event
+	  changes flag. See <xref linkend="changes-flags"/>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>V4L2 in Linux 3.10</title>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Removed obsolete and unused DV_PRESET ioctls
+	  VIDIOC_G_DV_PRESET, VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET, VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_PRESET and
+	  VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_PRESET. Remove the related v4l2_input/output capability
+	  flags V4L2_IN_CAP_PRESETS and V4L2_OUT_CAP_PRESETS.
+	  </para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Added new debugging ioctl &VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-INFO;.
+	  </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>V4L2 in Linux 3.11</title>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Remove obsolete <constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_IDENT</constant> ioctl.
+	  </para>
+        </listitem>
       </orderedlist>
     </section>
 
@@ -2474,40 +2601,43 @@ and may change in the future.</para>
 	  <para>Video Output Overlay (OSD) Interface, <xref
 	    linkend="osd" />.</para>
         </listitem>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant>,
-	&v4l2-buf-type;, <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</para>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-DBG-G-REGISTER; and &VIDIOC-DBG-S-REGISTER;
+ioctls.</para>
         </listitem>
         <listitem>
-	  <para><constant>V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant>,
-&VIDIOC-QUERYCAP; ioctl, <xref linkend="device-capabilities" />.</para>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-INFO; ioctl.</para>
         </listitem>
         <listitem>
-	  <para>&VIDIOC-ENUM-FRAMESIZES; and
-&VIDIOC-ENUM-FRAMEINTERVALS; ioctls.</para>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-ENUM-DV-TIMINGS;, &VIDIOC-QUERY-DV-TIMINGS; and
+	  &VIDIOC-DV-TIMINGS-CAP; ioctls.</para>
         </listitem>
         <listitem>
-	  <para>&VIDIOC-G-ENC-INDEX; ioctl.</para>
+	  <para>Flash API. <xref linkend="flash-controls" /></para>
         </listitem>
         <listitem>
-	  <para>&VIDIOC-ENCODER-CMD; and &VIDIOC-TRY-ENCODER-CMD;
-ioctls.</para>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-CREATE-BUFS; and &VIDIOC-PREPARE-BUF; ioctls.</para>
         </listitem>
         <listitem>
-	  <para>&VIDIOC-DBG-G-REGISTER; and &VIDIOC-DBG-S-REGISTER;
-ioctls.</para>
+	  <para>Selection API. <xref linkend="selection-api" /></para>
         </listitem>
         <listitem>
-	  <para>&VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-IDENT; ioctl.</para>
+	  <para>Sub-device selection API: &VIDIOC-SUBDEV-G-SELECTION;
+	  and &VIDIOC-SUBDEV-S-SELECTION; ioctls.</para>
         </listitem>
         <listitem>
-	  <para>Flash API. <xref linkend="flash-controls" /></para>
+	  <para>Support for frequency band enumeration: &VIDIOC-ENUM-FREQ-BANDS; ioctl.</para>
         </listitem>
         <listitem>
-	  <para>&VIDIOC-CREATE-BUFS; and &VIDIOC-PREPARE-BUF; ioctls.</para>
+	  <para>Vendor and device specific media bus pixel formats.
+	    <xref linkend="v4l2-mbus-vendor-spec-fmts" />.</para>
         </listitem>
         <listitem>
-	  <para>Selection API. <xref linkend="selection-api" /></para>
+	  <para>Importing DMABUF file descriptors as a new IO method described
+	  in <xref linkend="dmabuf" />.</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Exporting DMABUF files using &VIDIOC-EXPBUF; ioctl.</para>
         </listitem>
       </itemizedlist>
     </section>
@@ -2524,6 +2654,17 @@ interfaces and should not be implemented in new drivers.</para>
 <constant>VIDIOC_S_MPEGCOMP</constant> ioctls. Use Extended Controls,
 <xref linkend="extended-controls" />.</para>
         </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_G_DV_PRESET, VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET, VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_PRESETS and
+	  VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_PRESET ioctls. Use the DV Timings API (<xref linkend="dv-timings" />).</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para><constant>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_CROP</constant> and
+	  <constant>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_CROP</constant> ioctls. Use
+	  <constant>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_SELECTION</constant> and
+	  <constant>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_SELECTION</constant>, <xref
+	  linkend="vidioc-subdev-g-selection" />.</para>
+        </listitem>
       </itemizedlist>
     </section>
   </section>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml
index a1be37897ad7..7a3b49b3cc3b 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml
@@ -203,29 +203,6 @@ and should not be used in new drivers and applications.</entry>
 	    <entry>boolean</entry>
 	    <entry>Mirror the picture vertically.</entry>
 	  </row>
-	<row>
-	  <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_HCENTER_DEPRECATED</constant> (formerly <constant>V4L2_CID_HCENTER</constant>)</entry>
-	    <entry>integer</entry>
-	    <entry>Horizontal image centering. This control is
-deprecated. New drivers and applications should use the <link
-linkend="camera-controls">Camera class controls</link>
-<constant>V4L2_CID_PAN_ABSOLUTE</constant>,
-<constant>V4L2_CID_PAN_RELATIVE</constant> and
-<constant>V4L2_CID_PAN_RESET</constant> instead.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_VCENTER_DEPRECATED</constant>
-	    (formerly <constant>V4L2_CID_VCENTER</constant>)</entry>
-	    <entry>integer</entry>
-	    <entry>Vertical image centering. Centering is intended to
-<emphasis>physically</emphasis> adjust cameras. For image cropping see
-<xref linkend="crop" />, for clipping <xref linkend="overlay" />. This
-control is deprecated. New drivers and applications should use the
-<link linkend="camera-controls">Camera class controls</link>
-<constant>V4L2_CID_TILT_ABSOLUTE</constant>,
-<constant>V4L2_CID_TILT_RELATIVE</constant> and
-<constant>V4L2_CID_TILT_RESET</constant> instead.</entry>
-	  </row>
 	  <row id="v4l2-power-line-frequency">
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>enum</entry>
@@ -285,18 +262,97 @@ minimum value disables backlight compensation.</entry>
 	  <row id="v4l2-colorfx">
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_COLORFX</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>enum</entry>
-	    <entry>Selects a color effect. Possible values for
-<constant>enum v4l2_colorfx</constant> are:
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_NONE</constant> (0),
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_BW</constant> (1),
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SEPIA</constant> (2),
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_NEGATIVE</constant> (3),
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_EMBOSS</constant> (4),
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SKETCH</constant> (5),
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SKY_BLUE</constant> (6),
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_GRASS_GREEN</constant> (7),
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SKIN_WHITEN</constant> (8) and
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_VIVID</constant> (9).</entry>
+	    <entry>Selects a color effect. The following values are defined:
+	    </entry>
+	  </row><row>
+	  <entry></entry>
+	  <entry></entry>
+	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+	      <tbody valign="top">
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_NONE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Color effect is disabled.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_ANTIQUE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>An aging (old photo) effect.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_ART_FREEZE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Frost color effect.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_AQUA</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Water color, cool tone.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_BW</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Black and white.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_EMBOSS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Emboss, the highlights and shadows replace light/dark boundaries
+		  and low contrast areas are set to a gray background.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_GRASS_GREEN</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Grass green.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_NEGATIVE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Negative.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SEPIA</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Sepia tone.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SKETCH</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Sketch.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SKIN_WHITEN</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Skin whiten.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SKY_BLUE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Sky blue.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SOLARIZATION</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Solarization, the image is partially reversed in tone,
+		  only color values above or below a certain threshold are inverted.
+		  </entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SILHOUETTE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Silhouette (outline).</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_VIVID</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Vivid colors.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SET_CBCR</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>The Cb and Cr chroma components are replaced by fixed
+		  coefficients determined by <constant>V4L2_CID_COLORFX_CBCR</constant>
+		  control.</entry>
+		</row>
+	      </tbody>
+	    </entrytbl>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_COLORFX_CBCR</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>integer</entry>
+	    <entry>Determines the Cb and Cr coefficients for <constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SET_CBCR</constant>
+	    color effect. Bits [7:0] of the supplied 32 bit value are interpreted as
+	    Cr component, bits [15:8] as Cb component and bits [31:16] must be zero.
+	  </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_AUTOBRIGHTNESS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>boolean</entry>
+	    <entry>Enable Automatic Brightness.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_ROTATE</constant></entry>
@@ -666,17 +722,22 @@ for more details.</para>
     </section>
 
     <section id="mpeg-controls">
-      <title>MPEG Control Reference</title>
+      <title>Codec Control Reference</title>
 
-      <para>Below all controls within the MPEG control class are
+      <para>Below all controls within the Codec control class are
 described. First the generic controls, then controls specific for
 certain hardware.</para>
 
+      <para>Note: These controls are applicable to all codecs and
+not just MPEG. The defines are prefixed with V4L2_CID_MPEG/V4L2_MPEG
+as the controls were originally made for MPEG codecs and later
+extended to cover all encoding formats.</para>
+
       <section>
-	<title>Generic MPEG Controls</title>
+	<title>Generic Codec Controls</title>
 
 	<table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="mpeg-control-id">
-	  <title>MPEG Control IDs</title>
+	  <title>Codec Control IDs</title>
 	  <tgroup cols="4">
 	    <colspec colname="c1" colwidth="1*" />
 	    <colspec colname="c2" colwidth="6*" />
@@ -696,7 +757,7 @@ certain hardware.</para>
 	      <row>
 		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_CLASS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
 		<entry>class</entry>
-	      </row><row><entry spanname="descr">The MPEG class
+	      </row><row><entry spanname="descr">The Codec class
 descriptor. Calling &VIDIOC-QUERYCTRL; for this control will return a
 description of this control class. This description can be used as the
 caption of a Tab page in a GUI, for example.</entry>
@@ -1286,6 +1347,49 @@ produce a slight hiss, but in the encoder itself, guaranteeing a fixed
 and reproducible audio bitstream. 0 = unmuted, 1 = muted.</entry>
 	      </row>
 	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row id="v4l2-mpeg-audio-dec-playback">
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>enum&nbsp;v4l2_mpeg_audio_dec_playback</entry>
+	      </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Determines how monolingual audio should be played back.
+Possible values are:</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row>
+		<entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_AUTO</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Automatically determines the best playback mode.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_STEREO</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Stereo playback.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_LEFT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Left channel playback.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_RIGHT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Right channel playback.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_MONO</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Mono playback.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_PLAYBACK_SWAPPED_STEREO</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Stereo playback with swapped left and right channels.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		  </tbody>
+		</entrytbl>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row id="v4l2-mpeg-audio-dec-multilingual-playback">
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_AUDIO_DEC_MULTILINGUAL_PLAYBACK</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>enum&nbsp;v4l2_mpeg_audio_dec_playback</entry>
+	      </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Determines how multilingual audio should be played back.</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
 	      <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-encoding">
 		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_ENCODING</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
 		<entry>enum&nbsp;v4l2_mpeg_video_encoding</entry>
@@ -1447,7 +1551,22 @@ of the video. The supplied 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit
 		  </tbody>
 		</entrytbl>
 	      </row>
-
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-dec-pts">
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_PTS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>integer64</entry>
+	      </row><row><entry spanname="descr">This read-only control returns the
+33-bit video Presentation Time Stamp as defined in ITU T-REC-H.222.0 and ISO/IEC 13818-1 of
+the currently displayed frame. This is the same PTS as is used in &VIDIOC-DECODER-CMD;.</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-dec-frame">
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DEC_FRAME</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>integer64</entry>
+	      </row><row><entry spanname="descr">This read-only control returns the
+frame counter of the frame that is currently displayed (decoded). This value is reset to 0 whenever
+the decoder is started.</entry>
+	      </row>
 
 	      <row><entry></entry></row>
 	      <row>
@@ -1964,7 +2083,7 @@ Possible values are:</entry>
 		<entry>integer</entry>
 	      </row>
 	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Cyclic intra macroblock refresh. This is the number of continuous macroblocks
-refreshed every frame. Each frame a succesive set of macroblocks is refreshed until the cycle completes and starts from the
+refreshed every frame. Each frame a successive set of macroblocks is refreshed until the cycle completes and starts from the
 top of the frame. Applicable to H264, H263 and MPEG4 encoder.</entry>
 	      </row>
 
@@ -2124,7 +2243,7 @@ Applicable to the MPEG4 and H264 encoders.</entry>
 		<entry>integer</entry>
 	      </row>
 	      <row><entry spanname="descr">The Video Buffer Verifier size in kilobytes, it is used as a limitation of frame skip.
-The VBV is defined in the standard as a mean to verify that the produced stream will be succesfully decoded.
+The VBV is defined in the standard as a mean to verify that the produced stream will be successfully decoded.
 The standard describes it as "Part of a hypothetical decoder that is conceptually connected to the
 output of the encoder. Its purpose is to provide a constraint on the variability of the data rate that an
 encoder or editing process may produce.".
@@ -2132,12 +2251,20 @@ Applicable to the MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG4 encoders.</entry>
 	      </row>
 
 	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-vbv-delay">
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VBV_DELAY</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>integer</entry>
+	      </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Sets the initial delay in milliseconds for
+VBV buffer control.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
 	      <row>
 		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_CPB_SIZE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
 		<entry>integer</entry>
 	      </row>
 	      <row><entry spanname="descr">The Coded Picture Buffer size in kilobytes, it is used as a limitation of frame skip.
-The CPB is defined in the H264 standard as a mean to verify that the produced stream will be succesfully decoded.
+The CPB is defined in the H264 standard as a mean to verify that the produced stream will be successfully decoded.
 Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry>
 	      </row>
 
@@ -2178,6 +2305,12 @@ Possible values are:</entry>
 	      </row>
 	      <row><entry></entry></row>
 	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_REPEAT_SEQ_HEADER</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>boolean</entry>
+	      </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Repeat the video sequence headers. Repeating these
+headers makes random access to the video stream easier. Applicable to the MPEG1, 2 and 4 encoder.</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row>
 		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_DECODER_MPEG4_DEBLOCK_FILTER</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
 		<entry>boolean</entry>
 	      </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Enabled the deblocking post processing filter for MPEG4 decoder.
@@ -2196,6 +2329,265 @@ Applicable to the MPEG4 decoder.</entry>
 	      </row><row><entry spanname="descr">vop_time_increment value for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4 encoder.</entry>
 	      </row>
 
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FRAME_PACKING</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>boolean</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Enable generation of frame packing supplemental enhancement information in the encoded bitstream.
+The frame packing SEI message contains the arrangement of L and R planes for 3D viewing. Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_CURRENT_FRAME_0</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>boolean</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Sets current frame as frame0 in frame packing SEI.
+Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-sei-fp-arrangement-type">
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>enum&nbsp;v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_sei_fp_arrangement_type</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Frame packing arrangement type for H264 SEI.
+Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+Possible values are:</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row>
+		<entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_CHEKERBOARD</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Pixels are alternatively from L and R.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_COLUMN</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>L and R are interlaced by column.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_ROW</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>L and R are interlaced by row.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_SIDE_BY_SIDE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>L is on the left, R on the right.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_TOP_BOTTOM</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>L is on top, R on bottom.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_SEI_FP_ARRANGEMENT_TYPE_TEMPORAL</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>One view per frame.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		  </tbody>
+		</entrytbl>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>boolean</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Enables flexible macroblock ordering in the encoded bitstream. It is a technique
+used for restructuring the ordering of macroblocks in pictures. Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-fmo-map-type">
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>enum&nbsp;v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_fmo_map_type</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">When using FMO, the map type divides the image in different scan patterns of macroblocks.
+Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+Possible values are:</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row>
+		<entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_INTERLEAVED_SLICES</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Slices are interleaved one after other with macroblocks in run length order.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_SCATTERED_SLICES</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Scatters the macroblocks based on a mathematical function known to both encoder and decoder.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_FOREGROUND_WITH_LEFT_OVER</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Macroblocks arranged in rectangular areas or regions of interest.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_BOX_OUT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Slice groups grow in a cyclic way from centre to outwards.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_RASTER_SCAN</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Slice groups grow in raster scan pattern from left to right.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_WIPE_SCAN</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Slice groups grow in wipe scan pattern from top to bottom.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_MAP_TYPE_EXPLICIT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>User defined map type.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		  </tbody>
+		</entrytbl>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_SLICE_GROUP</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>integer</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Number of slice groups in FMO.
+Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-fmo-change-direction">
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIRECTION</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>enum&nbsp;v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_fmo_change_dir</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies a direction of the slice group change for raster and wipe maps.
+Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+Possible values are:</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row>
+		<entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIR_RIGHT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Raster scan or wipe right.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_DIR_LEFT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Reverse raster scan or wipe left.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		  </tbody>
+		</entrytbl>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_CHANGE_RATE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>integer</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies the size of the first slice group for raster and wipe map.
+Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_FMO_RUN_LENGTH</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>integer</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies the number of consecutive macroblocks for the interleaved map.
+Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ASO</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>boolean</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Enables arbitrary slice ordering in encoded bitstream.
+Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ASO_SLICE_ORDER</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>integer</entry>
+	      </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies the slice order in ASO. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+The supplied 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit
+0 = least significant bit):</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row>
+		<entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>Bit 0:15</entry>
+		      <entry>Slice ID</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>Bit 16:32</entry>
+		      <entry>Slice position or order</entry>
+		    </row>
+		  </tbody>
+		</entrytbl>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>boolean</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Enables H264 hierarchical coding.
+Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-h264-hierarchical-coding-type">
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_TYPE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>enum&nbsp;v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_hierarchical_coding_type</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies the hierarchical coding type.
+Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+Possible values are:</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row>
+		<entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_B</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Hierarchical B coding.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_P</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>Hierarchical P coding.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		  </tbody>
+		</entrytbl>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>integer</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies the number of hierarchical coding layers.
+Applicable to the H264 encoder.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_HIERARCHICAL_CODING_LAYER_QP</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		<entry>integer</entry>
+	      </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Specifies a user defined QP for each layer. Applicable to the H264 encoder.
+The supplied 32-bit integer is interpreted as follows (bit
+0 = least significant bit):</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row>
+		<entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>Bit 0:15</entry>
+		      <entry>QP value</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>Bit 16:32</entry>
+		      <entry>Layer number</entry>
+		    </row>
+		  </tbody>
+		</entrytbl>
+	      </row>
+
 	    </tbody>
 	  </tgroup>
 	</table>
@@ -2622,6 +3014,159 @@ in by the application. 0 = do not insert, 1 = insert packets.</entry>
 	  </tgroup>
 	</table>
       </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>VPX Control Reference</title>
+
+      <para>The VPX controls include controls for encoding parameters
+      of VPx video codec.</para>
+
+      <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="vpx-control-id">
+      <title>VPX Control IDs</title>
+
+      <tgroup cols="4">
+        <colspec colname="c1" colwidth="1*" />
+        <colspec colname="c2" colwidth="6*" />
+        <colspec colname="c3" colwidth="2*" />
+        <colspec colname="c4" colwidth="6*" />
+        <spanspec namest="c1" nameend="c2" spanname="id" />
+        <spanspec namest="c2" nameend="c4" spanname="descr" />
+        <thead>
+          <row>
+            <entry spanname="id" align="left">ID</entry>
+            <entry align="left">Type</entry>
+          </row><row rowsep="1"><entry spanname="descr" align="left">Description</entry>
+          </row>
+        </thead>
+        <tbody valign="top">
+          <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row id="v4l2-vpx-num-partitions">
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_NUM_PARTITIONS</constant></entry>
+		<entry>enum v4l2_vp8_num_partitions</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">The number of token partitions to use in VP8 encoder.
+Possible values are:</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row>
+		<entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_1_PARTITION</constant></entry>
+		      <entry>1 coefficient partition</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_2_PARTITIONS</constant></entry>
+		      <entry>2 coefficient partitions</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_4_PARTITIONS</constant></entry>
+		      <entry>4 coefficient partitions</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_8_PARTITIONS</constant></entry>
+		      <entry>8 coefficient partitions</entry>
+	            </row>
+                  </tbody>
+		</entrytbl>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_IMD_DISABLE_4X4</constant></entry>
+		<entry>boolean</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Setting this prevents intra 4x4 mode in the intra mode decision.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row id="v4l2-vpx-num-ref-frames">
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_NUM_REF_FRAMES</constant></entry>
+		<entry>enum v4l2_vp8_num_ref_frames</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">The number of reference pictures for encoding P frames.
+Possible values are:</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row>
+		<entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_1_REF_FRAME</constant></entry>
+		      <entry>Last encoded frame will be searched</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_2_REF_FRAME</constant></entry>
+		      <entry>Two frames will be searched among the last encoded frame, the golden frame
+and the alternate reference (altref) frame. The encoder implementation will decide which two are chosen.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_3_REF_FRAME</constant></entry>
+		      <entry>The last encoded frame, the golden frame and the altref frame will be searched.</entry>
+		    </row>
+                  </tbody>
+		</entrytbl>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_FILTER_LEVEL</constant></entry>
+		<entry>integer</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Indicates the loop filter level. The adjustment of the loop
+filter level is done via a delta value against a baseline loop filter value.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_FILTER_SHARPNESS</constant></entry>
+		<entry>integer</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">This parameter affects the loop filter. Anything above
+zero weakens the deblocking effect on the loop filter.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row>
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_REF_PERIOD</constant></entry>
+		<entry>integer</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Sets the refresh period for the golden frame. The period is defined
+in number of frames. For a value of 'n', every nth frame starting from the first key frame will be taken as a golden frame.
+For eg. for encoding sequence of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 where the golden frame refresh period is set as 4, the frames
+0, 4, 8 etc will be taken as the golden frames as frame 0 is always a key frame.</entry>
+	      </row>
+
+	      <row><entry></entry></row>
+	      <row id="v4l2-vpx-golden-frame-sel">
+		<entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_SEL</constant></entry>
+		<entry>enum v4l2_vp8_golden_frame_sel</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row><entry spanname="descr">Selects the golden frame for encoding.
+Possible values are:</entry>
+	      </row>
+	      <row>
+		<entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_USE_PREV</constant></entry>
+		      <entry>Use the (n-2)th frame as a golden frame, current frame index being 'n'.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_USE_REF_PERIOD</constant></entry>
+		      <entry>Use the previous specific frame indicated by
+V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_GOLDEN_FRAME_REF_PERIOD as a golden frame.</entry>
+		    </row>
+                  </tbody>
+		</entrytbl>
+	      </row>
+
+          <row><entry></entry></row>
+        </tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+      </table>
+
+      </section>
     </section>
 
     <section id="camera-controls">
@@ -2716,6 +3261,58 @@ remain constant.</entry>
 	  <row><entry></entry></row>
 
 	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_BIAS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>integer menu</entry>
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr"> Determines the automatic
+exposure compensation, it is effective only when <constant>V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO</constant>
+control is set to <constant>AUTO</constant>, <constant>SHUTTER_PRIORITY </constant>
+or <constant>APERTURE_PRIORITY</constant>.
+It is expressed in terms of EV, drivers should interpret the values as 0.001 EV
+units, where the value 1000 stands for +1 EV.
+<para>Increasing the exposure compensation value is equivalent to decreasing
+the exposure value (EV) and will increase the amount of light at the image
+sensor. The camera performs the exposure compensation by adjusting absolute
+exposure time and/or aperture.</para></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row id="v4l2-exposure-metering">
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_METERING</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>enum&nbsp;v4l2_exposure_metering</entry>
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Determines how the camera measures
+the amount of light available for the frame exposure. Possible values are:</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+	      <tbody valign="top">
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_AVERAGE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Use the light information coming from the entire frame
+and average giving no weighting to any particular portion of the metered area.
+		  </entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_CENTER_WEIGHTED</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Average the light information coming from the entire frame
+giving priority to the center of the metered area.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_SPOT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Measure only very small area at the center of the frame.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_EXPOSURE_METERING_MATRIX</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>A multi-zone metering. The light intensity is measured
+in several points of the frame and the the results are combined. The
+algorithm of the zones selection and their significance in calculating the
+final value is device dependent.</entry>
+		</row>
+	      </tbody>
+	    </entrytbl>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row>
 	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_PAN_RELATIVE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
 	    <entry>integer</entry>
 	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">This control turns the
@@ -2798,13 +3395,107 @@ negative values towards infinity. This is a write-only control.</entry>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
 	    <entry>boolean</entry>
-	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Enables automatic focus
-adjustments. The effect of manual focus adjustments while this feature
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Enables continuous automatic
+focus adjustments. The effect of manual focus adjustments while this feature
 is enabled is undefined, drivers should ignore such requests.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row><entry></entry></row>
 
 	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_START</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>button</entry>
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Starts single auto focus process.
+The effect of setting this control when <constant>V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO</constant>
+is set to <constant>TRUE</constant> (1) is undefined, drivers should ignore
+such requests.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STOP</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>button</entry>
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Aborts automatic focusing
+started with <constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_START</constant> control. It is
+effective only when the continuous autofocus is disabled, that is when
+<constant>V4L2_CID_FOCUS_AUTO</constant> control is set to <constant>FALSE
+</constant> (0).</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row id="v4l2-auto-focus-status">
+	    <entry spanname="id">
+	      <constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>bitmask</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry spanname="descr">The automatic focus status. This is a read-only
+	  control.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+	      <tbody valign="top">
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_IDLE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Automatic focus is not active.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_BUSY</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Automatic focusing is in progress.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_REACHED</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Focus has been reached.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS_FAILED</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Automatic focus has failed, the driver will not
+		  transition from this state until another action is
+		  performed by an application.</entry>
+		</row>
+	      </tbody>
+	    </entrytbl>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry spanname="descr">
+Setting <constant>V4L2_LOCK_FOCUS</constant> lock bit of the <constant>V4L2_CID_3A_LOCK
+</constant> control may stop updates of the <constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS</constant>
+control value.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row id="v4l2-auto-focus-range">
+	    <entry spanname="id">
+	      <constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>enum&nbsp;v4l2_auto_focus_range</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry spanname="descr">Determines auto focus distance range
+for which lens may be adjusted. </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+	      <tbody valign="top">
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_AUTO</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>The camera automatically selects the focus range.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_NORMAL</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Normal distance range, limited for best automatic focus
+performance.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_MACRO</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Macro (close-up) auto focus. The camera will
+use its minimum possible distance for auto focus.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE_INFINITY</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>The lens is set to focus on an object at infinite distance.</entry>
+		</row>
+	      </tbody>
+	    </entrytbl>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row>
 	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_ZOOM_ABSOLUTE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
 	    <entry>integer</entry>
 	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Specify the objective lens
@@ -2873,6 +3564,295 @@ camera sensor on or off, or specify its strength. Such band-stop filters can
 be used, for example, to filter out the fluorescent light component.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row id="v4l2-auto-n-preset-white-balance">
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_N_PRESET_WHITE_BALANCE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>enum&nbsp;v4l2_auto_n_preset_white_balance</entry>
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Sets white balance to automatic,
+manual or a preset. The presets determine color temperature of the light as
+a hint to the camera for white balance adjustments resulting in most accurate
+color representation. The following white balance presets are listed in order
+of increasing color temperature.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+	      <tbody valign="top">
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_MANUAL</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Manual white balance.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_AUTO</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Automatic white balance adjustments.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_INCANDESCENT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>White balance setting for incandescent (tungsten) lighting.
+It generally cools down the colors and corresponds approximately to 2500...3500 K
+color temperature range.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLUORESCENT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>White balance preset for fluorescent lighting.
+It corresponds approximately to 4000...5000 K color temperature.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLUORESCENT_H</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>With this setting the camera will compensate for
+fluorescent H lighting.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_HORIZON</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>White balance setting for horizon daylight.
+It corresponds approximately to 5000 K color temperature.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_DAYLIGHT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>White balance preset for daylight (with clear sky).
+It corresponds approximately to 5000...6500 K color temperature.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_FLASH</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>With this setting the camera will compensate for the flash
+light. It slightly warms up the colors and corresponds roughly to 5000...5500 K
+color temperature.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_CLOUDY</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>White balance preset for moderately overcast sky.
+This option corresponds approximately to 6500...8000 K color temperature
+range.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_SHADE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>White balance preset for shade or heavily overcast
+sky. It corresponds approximately to 9000...10000 K color temperature.
+</entry>
+		</row>
+	      </tbody>
+	    </entrytbl>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row id="v4l2-wide-dynamic-range">
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_WIDE_DYNAMIC_RANGE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>boolean</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">Enables or disables the camera's wide dynamic
+range feature. This feature allows to obtain clear images in situations where
+intensity of the illumination varies significantly throughout the scene, i.e.
+there are simultaneously very dark and very bright areas. It is most commonly
+realized in cameras by combining two subsequent frames with different exposure
+times. <footnote id="ctypeconv"><para> This control may be changed to a menu
+control in the future, if more options are required.</para></footnote></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row id="v4l2-image-stabilization">
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_IMAGE_STABILIZATION</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>boolean</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">Enables or disables image stabilization.
+	      <footnoteref linkend="ctypeconv"/></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>integer menu</entry>
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Determines ISO equivalent of an
+image sensor indicating the sensor's sensitivity to light. The numbers are
+expressed in arithmetic scale, as per <xref linkend="iso12232" /> standard,
+where doubling the sensor sensitivity is represented by doubling the numerical
+ISO value. Applications should interpret the values as standard ISO values
+multiplied by 1000, e.g. control value 800 stands for ISO 0.8. Drivers will
+usually support only a subset of standard ISO values. The effect of setting
+this control while the <constant>V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO</constant>
+control is set to a value other than <constant>V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_MANUAL
+</constant> is undefined, drivers should ignore such requests.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row id="v4l2-iso-sensitivity-auto-type">
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>enum&nbsp;v4l2_iso_sensitivity_type</entry>
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Enables or disables automatic ISO
+sensitivity adjustments.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+	      <tbody valign="top">
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_MANUAL</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Manual ISO sensitivity.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Automatic ISO sensitivity adjustments.</entry>
+		</row>
+	      </tbody>
+	    </entrytbl>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row id="v4l2-scene-mode">
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_SCENE_MODE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>enum&nbsp;v4l2_scene_mode</entry>
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">This control allows to select
+scene programs as the camera automatic modes optimized for common shooting
+scenes. Within these modes the camera determines best exposure, aperture,
+focusing, light metering, white balance and equivalent sensitivity. The
+controls of those parameters are influenced by the scene mode control.
+An exact behavior in each mode is subject to the camera specification.
+
+<para>When the scene mode feature is not used, this control should be set to
+<constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NONE</constant> to make sure the other possibly
+related controls are accessible. The following scene programs are defined:
+</para>
+</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+	      <tbody valign="top">
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NONE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>The scene mode feature is disabled.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_BACKLIGHT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Backlight. Compensates for dark shadows when light is
+		  coming from behind a subject, also by automatically turning
+		  on the flash.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_BEACH_SNOW</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Beach and snow. This mode compensates for all-white or
+bright scenes, which tend to look gray and low contrast, when camera's automatic
+exposure is based on an average scene brightness. To compensate, this mode
+automatically slightly overexposes the frames. The white balance may also be
+adjusted to compensate for the fact that reflected snow looks bluish rather
+than white.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_CANDLELIGHT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Candle light. The camera generally raises the ISO
+sensitivity and lowers the shutter speed. This mode compensates for relatively
+close subject in the scene. The flash is disabled in order to preserve the
+ambiance of the light.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_DAWN_DUSK</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Dawn and dusk. Preserves the colors seen in low
+natural light before dusk and after down. The camera may turn off the flash,
+and automatically focus at infinity. It will usually boost saturation and
+lower the shutter speed.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_FALL_COLORS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Fall colors. Increases saturation and adjusts white
+balance for color enhancement. Pictures of autumn leaves get saturated reds
+and yellows.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_FIREWORKS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Fireworks. Long exposure times are used to capture
+the expanding burst of light from a firework. The camera may invoke image
+stabilization.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_LANDSCAPE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Landscape. The camera may choose a small aperture to
+provide deep depth of field and long exposure duration to help capture detail
+in dim light conditions. The focus is fixed at infinity. Suitable for distant
+and wide scenery.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_NIGHT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Night, also known as Night Landscape. Designed for low
+light conditions, it preserves detail in the dark areas without blowing out bright
+objects. The camera generally sets itself to a medium-to-high ISO sensitivity,
+with a relatively long exposure time, and turns flash off. As such, there will be
+increased image noise and the possibility of blurred image.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_PARTY_INDOOR</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Party and indoor. Designed to capture indoor scenes
+that are lit by indoor background lighting as well as the flash. The camera
+usually increases ISO sensitivity, and adjusts exposure for the low light
+conditions.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_PORTRAIT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Portrait. The camera adjusts the aperture so that the
+depth of field is reduced, which helps to isolate the subject against a smooth
+background. Most cameras recognize the presence of faces in the scene and focus
+on them. The color hue is adjusted to enhance skin tones. The intensity of the
+flash is often reduced.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_SPORTS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Sports. Significantly increases ISO and uses a fast
+shutter speed to freeze motion of rapidly-moving subjects. Increased image
+noise may be seen in this mode.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_SUNSET</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Sunset. Preserves deep hues seen in sunsets and
+sunrises. It bumps up the saturation.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_SCENE_MODE_TEXT</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		  <entry>Text. It applies extra contrast and sharpness, it is
+typically a black-and-white mode optimized for readability. Automatic focus
+may be switched to close-up mode and this setting may also involve some
+lens-distortion correction.</entry>
+		</row>
+	      </tbody>
+	    </entrytbl>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_3A_LOCK</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>bitmask</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">This control locks or unlocks the automatic
+focus, exposure and white balance. The automatic adjustments can be paused
+independently by setting the corresponding lock bit to 1. The camera then retains
+the settings until the lock bit is cleared. The following lock bits are defined:
+</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+	      <tbody valign="top">
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_LOCK_EXPOSURE</constant></entry>
+		  <entry>Automatic exposure adjustments lock.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_LOCK_WHITE_BALANCE</constant></entry>
+		  <entry>Automatic white balance adjustments lock.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_LOCK_FOCUS</constant></entry>
+		  <entry>Automatic focus lock.</entry>
+		</row>
+	      </tbody>
+	    </entrytbl>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry spanname="descr">
+When a given algorithm is not enabled, drivers should ignore requests
+to lock it and should return no error. An example might be an application
+setting bit <constant>V4L2_LOCK_WHITE_BALANCE</constant> when the
+<constant>V4L2_CID_AUTO_WHITE_BALANCE</constant> control is set to
+<constant>FALSE</constant>. The value of this control may be changed
+by exposure, white balance or focus controls.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
@@ -2939,7 +3919,7 @@ This encodes up to 31 pre-defined programme types.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row><entry spanname="descr">Sets the Programme Service name (PS_NAME) for transmission.
 It is intended for static display on a receiver. It is the primary aid to listeners in programme service
-identification and selection.  In Annex E of <xref linkend="en50067" />, the RDS specification,
+identification and selection.  In Annex E of <xref linkend="iec62106" />, the RDS specification,
 there is a full description of the correct character encoding for Programme Service name strings.
 Also from RDS specification, PS is usually a single eight character text. However, it is also possible
 to find receivers which can scroll strings sized as 8 x N characters. So, this control must be configured
@@ -2953,7 +3933,7 @@ with steps of 8 characters. The result is it must always contain a string with s
 what is being broadcasted. RDS Radio Text can be applied when broadcaster wishes to transmit longer PS names,
 programme-related information or any other text. In these cases, RadioText should be used in addition to
 <constant>V4L2_CID_RDS_TX_PS_NAME</constant>. The encoding for Radio Text strings is also fully described
-in Annex E of <xref linkend="en50067" />. The length of Radio Text strings depends on which RDS Block is being
+in Annex E of <xref linkend="iec62106" />. The length of Radio Text strings depends on which RDS Block is being
 used to transmit it, either 32 (2A block) or 64 (2B block).  However, it is also possible
 to find receivers which can scroll strings sized as 32 x N or 64 x N characters. So, this control must be configured
 with steps of 32 or 64 characters. The result is it must always contain a string with size multiple of 32 or 64. </entry>
@@ -3039,7 +4019,7 @@ in Hz. The range and step are driver-specific.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_TUNE_PREEMPHASIS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
-	    <entry>integer</entry>
+	    <entry>enum v4l2_preemphasis</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row id="v4l2-preemphasis"><entry spanname="descr">Configures the pre-emphasis value for broadcasting.
 A pre-emphasis filter is applied to the broadcast to accentuate the high audio frequencies.
@@ -3084,7 +4064,7 @@ manually or automatically if set to zero. Unit, range and step are driver-specif
       </table>
 
 <para>For more details about RDS specification, refer to
-<xref linkend="en50067" /> document, from CENELEC.</para>
+<xref linkend="iec62106" /> document, from CENELEC.</para>
     </section>
 
     <section id="flash-controls">
@@ -3151,12 +4131,241 @@ interface and may change in the future.</para>
 	    use case involving camera or individually.
 	  </para>
 
-	</section>
 
+          <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="flash-control-id">
+          <title>Flash Control IDs</title>
+    
+          <tgroup cols="4">
+    	<colspec colname="c1" colwidth="1*" />
+    	<colspec colname="c2" colwidth="6*" />
+    	<colspec colname="c3" colwidth="2*" />
+    	<colspec colname="c4" colwidth="6*" />
+    	<spanspec namest="c1" nameend="c2" spanname="id" />
+    	<spanspec namest="c2" nameend="c4" spanname="descr" />
+    	<thead>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id" align="left">ID</entry>
+    	    <entry align="left">Type</entry>
+    	  </row><row rowsep="1"><entry spanname="descr" align="left">Description</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	</thead>
+    	<tbody valign="top">
+    	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_CLASS</constant></entry>
+    	    <entry>class</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="descr">The FLASH class descriptor.</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE</constant></entry>
+    	    <entry>menu</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row id="v4l2-flash-led-mode">
+    	    <entry spanname="descr">Defines the mode of the flash LED,
+    	    the high-power white LED attached to the flash controller.
+    	    Setting this control may not be possible in presence of
+    	    some faults. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+    	      <tbody valign="top">
+    		<row>
+    		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE</constant></entry>
+    		  <entry>Off.</entry>
+    		</row>
+    		<row>
+    		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH</constant></entry>
+    		  <entry>Flash mode.</entry>
+    		</row>
+    		<row>
+    		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH</constant></entry>
+    		  <entry>Torch mode. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY.</entry>
+    		</row>
+    	      </tbody>
+    	    </entrytbl>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE</constant></entry>
+    	    <entry>menu</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row id="v4l2-flash-strobe-source"><entry
+    	  spanname="descr">Defines the source of the flash LED
+    	  strobe.</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+    	      <tbody valign="top">
+    		<row>
+    		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE</constant></entry>
+    		  <entry>The flash strobe is triggered by using
+    		  the V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE control.</entry>
+    		</row>
+    		<row>
+    		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_EXTERNAL</constant></entry>
+    		  <entry>The flash strobe is triggered by an
+    		  external source. Typically this is a sensor,
+    		  which makes it possible to synchronises the
+    		  flash strobe start to exposure start.</entry>
+    		</row>
+    	      </tbody>
+    	    </entrytbl>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE</constant></entry>
+    	    <entry>button</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="descr">Strobe flash. Valid when
+    	    V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to
+    	    V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH and V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE
+    	    is set to V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE. Setting this
+    	    control may not be possible in presence of some faults.
+    	    See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STOP</constant></entry>
+    	    <entry>button</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row><entry spanname="descr">Stop flash strobe immediately.</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STATUS</constant></entry>
+    	    <entry>boolean</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="descr">Strobe status: whether the flash
+    	    is strobing at the moment or not. This is a read-only
+    	    control.</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT</constant></entry>
+    	    <entry>integer</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="descr">Hardware timeout for flash. The
+    	    flash strobe is stopped after this period of time has
+    	    passed from the start of the strobe.</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_INTENSITY</constant></entry>
+    	    <entry>integer</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="descr">Intensity of the flash strobe when
+    	    the flash LED is in flash mode
+    	    (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH). The unit should be milliamps
+    	    (mA) if possible.</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY</constant></entry>
+    	    <entry>integer</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="descr">Intensity of the flash LED in
+    	    torch mode (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH). The unit should be
+    	    milliamps (mA) if possible. Setting this control may not
+    	    be possible in presence of some faults. See
+    	    V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_INDICATOR_INTENSITY</constant></entry>
+    	    <entry>integer</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="descr">Intensity of the indicator LED.
+    	    The indicator LED may be fully independent of the flash
+    	    LED. The unit should be microamps (uA) if possible.</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT</constant></entry>
+    	    <entry>bitmask</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="descr">Faults related to the flash. The
+    	    faults tell about specific problems in the flash chip
+    	    itself or the LEDs attached to it. Faults may prevent
+    	    further use of some of the flash controls. In particular,
+    	    V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE
+    	    if the fault affects the flash LED. Exactly which faults
+    	    have such an effect is chip dependent. Reading the faults
+    	    resets the control and returns the chip to a usable state
+    	    if possible.</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+    	      <tbody valign="top">
+    		<row>
+    		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_VOLTAGE</constant></entry>
+    		  <entry>Flash controller voltage to the flash LED
+    		  has exceeded the limit specific to the flash
+    		  controller.</entry>
+    		</row>
+    		<row>
+    		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_TIMEOUT</constant></entry>
+    		  <entry>The flash strobe was still on when
+    		  the timeout set by the user ---
+    		  V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT control --- has expired.
+    		  Not all flash controllers may set this in all
+    		  such conditions.</entry>
+    		</row>
+    		<row>
+    		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_TEMPERATURE</constant></entry>
+    		  <entry>The flash controller has overheated.</entry>
+    		</row>
+    		<row>
+    		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_SHORT_CIRCUIT</constant></entry>
+    		  <entry>The short circuit protection of the flash
+    		  controller has been triggered.</entry>
+    		</row>
+    		<row>
+    		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_CURRENT</constant></entry>
+    		  <entry>Current in the LED power supply has exceeded the limit
+    		  specific to the flash controller.</entry>
+    		</row>
+    		<row>
+    		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_INDICATOR</constant></entry>
+    		  <entry>The flash controller has detected a short or open
+    		  circuit condition on the indicator LED.</entry>
+    		</row>
+    	      </tbody>
+    	    </entrytbl>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_CHARGE</constant></entry>
+    	    <entry>boolean</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row><entry spanname="descr">Enable or disable charging of the xenon
+    	  flash capacitor.</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_READY</constant></entry>
+    	    <entry>boolean</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row>
+    	    <entry spanname="descr">Is the flash ready to strobe?
+    	    Xenon flashes require their capacitors charged before
+    	    strobing. LED flashes often require a cooldown period
+    	    after strobe during which another strobe will not be
+    	    possible. This is a read-only control.</entry>
+    	  </row>
+    	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+    	</tbody>
+          </tgroup>
+          </table>
+	</section>
       </section>
+    </section>
 
-      <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="flash-control-id">
-      <title>Flash Control IDs</title>
+    <section id="jpeg-controls">
+      <title>JPEG Control Reference</title>
+      <para>The JPEG class includes controls for common features of JPEG
+      encoders and decoders. Currently it includes features for codecs
+      implementing progressive baseline DCT compression process with
+      Huffman entrophy coding.</para>
+      <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="jpeg-control-id">
+      <title>JPEG Control IDs</title>
 
       <tgroup cols="4">
 	<colspec colname="c1" colwidth="1*" />
@@ -3175,203 +4384,473 @@ interface and may change in the future.</para>
 	<tbody valign="top">
 	  <row><entry></entry></row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_CLASS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_JPEG_CLASS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
 	    <entry>class</entry>
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">The JPEG class descriptor. Calling
+	  &VIDIOC-QUERYCTRL; for this control will return a description of this
+	  control class.
+
+	</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="descr">The FLASH class descriptor.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>menu</entry>
 	  </row>
-	  <row id="v4l2-flash-led-mode">
-	    <entry spanname="descr">Defines the mode of the flash LED,
-	    the high-power white LED attached to the flash controller.
-	    Setting this control may not be possible in presence of
-	    some faults. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.</entry>
+	  <row id="v4l2-jpeg-chroma-subsampling">
+	    <entry spanname="descr">The chroma subsampling factors describe how
+	    each component of an input image is sampled, in respect to maximum
+	    sample rate in each spatial dimension. See <xref linkend="itu-t81"/>,
+	    clause A.1.1. for more details. The <constant>
+	    V4L2_CID_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING</constant> control determines how
+	    Cb and Cr components are downsampled after coverting an input image
+	    from RGB to Y'CbCr color space.
+	    </entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
 	      <tbody valign="top">
 		<row>
-		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE</constant></entry>
-		  <entry>Off.</entry>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_444</constant>
+		  </entry><entry>No chroma subsampling, each pixel has
+		  Y, Cr and Cb values.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_422</constant>
+		  </entry><entry>Horizontally subsample Cr, Cb components
+		  by a factor of 2.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_420</constant>
+		  </entry><entry>Subsample Cr, Cb components horizontally
+		  and vertically by 2.</entry>
 		</row>
 		<row>
-		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH</constant></entry>
-		  <entry>Flash mode.</entry>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_411</constant>
+		  </entry><entry>Horizontally subsample Cr, Cb components
+		  by a factor of 4.</entry>
 		</row>
 		<row>
-		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH</constant></entry>
-		  <entry>Torch mode. See V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY.</entry>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_410</constant>
+		  </entry><entry>Subsample Cr, Cb components horizontally
+		  by 4 and vertically by 2.</entry>
+		</row>
+		<row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_JPEG_CHROMA_SUBSAMPLING_GRAY</constant>
+		  </entry><entry>Use only luminance component.</entry>
 		</row>
 	      </tbody>
 	    </entrytbl>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>menu</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_JPEG_RESTART_INTERVAL</constant>
+	    </entry><entry>integer</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry spanname="descr">
+	      The restart interval determines an interval of inserting RSTm
+	      markers (m = 0..7). The purpose of these markers is to additionally
+	      reinitialize the encoder process, in order to process blocks of
+	      an image independently.
+	      For the lossy compression processes the restart interval unit is
+	      MCU (Minimum Coded Unit) and its value is contained in DRI
+	      (Define Restart Interval) marker. If <constant>
+	      V4L2_CID_JPEG_RESTART_INTERVAL</constant> control is set to 0,
+	      DRI and RSTm markers will not be inserted.
+	    </entry>
 	  </row>
-	  <row id="v4l2-flash-strobe-source"><entry
-	  spanname="descr">Defines the source of the flash LED
-	  strobe.</entry>
+	  <row id="jpeg-quality-control">
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>integer</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">
+	      <constant>V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY</constant> control
+	      determines trade-off between image quality and size.
+	      It provides simpler method for applications to control image quality,
+	      without a need for direct reconfiguration of luminance and chrominance
+	      quantization tables.
+
+	      In cases where a driver uses quantization tables configured directly
+	      by an application, using interfaces defined elsewhere, <constant>
+	      V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY</constant> control should be set
+	      by driver to 0.
+
+	      <para>The value range of this control is driver-specific. Only
+	      positive, non-zero values are meaningful. The recommended range
+	      is 1 - 100, where larger values correspond to better image quality.
+	      </para>
+	    </entry>
+	    </row>
+	  <row id="jpeg-active-marker-control">
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>bitmask</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">Specify which JPEG markers are included
+	    in compressed stream. This control is valid only for encoders.
+	    </entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
 	      <tbody valign="top">
 		<row>
-		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE</constant></entry>
-		  <entry>The flash strobe is triggered by using
-		  the V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE control.</entry>
-		</row>
-		<row>
-		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_EXTERNAL</constant></entry>
-		  <entry>The flash strobe is triggered by an
-		  external source. Typically this is a sensor,
-		  which makes it possible to synchronises the
-		  flash strobe start to exposure start.</entry>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_APP0</constant></entry>
+		  <entry>Application data segment APP<subscript>0</subscript>.</entry>
+		</row><row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_APP1</constant></entry>
+		  <entry>Application data segment APP<subscript>1</subscript>.</entry>
+		</row><row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_COM</constant></entry>
+		  <entry>Comment segment.</entry>
+		</row><row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_DQT</constant></entry>
+		  <entry>Quantization tables segment.</entry>
+		</row><row>
+		  <entry><constant>V4L2_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER_DHT</constant></entry>
+		  <entry>Huffman tables segment.</entry>
 		</row>
 	      </tbody>
 	    </entrytbl>
 	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+      </table>
+      <para>For more details about JPEG specification, refer
+      to <xref linkend="itu-t81"/>, <xref linkend="jfif"/>,
+      <xref linkend="w3c-jpeg-jfif"/>.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section id="image-source-controls">
+      <title>Image Source Control Reference</title>
+
+      <note>
+	<title>Experimental</title>
+
+	<para>This is an <link
+	linkend="experimental">experimental</link> interface and may
+	change in the future.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <para>
+	The Image Source control class is intended for low-level
+	control of image source devices such as image sensors. The
+	devices feature an analogue to digital converter and a bus
+	transmitter to transmit the image data out of the device.
+      </para>
+
+      <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="image-source-control-id">
+      <title>Image Source Control IDs</title>
+
+      <tgroup cols="4">
+	<colspec colname="c1" colwidth="1*" />
+	<colspec colname="c2" colwidth="6*" />
+	<colspec colname="c3" colwidth="2*" />
+	<colspec colname="c4" colwidth="6*" />
+	<spanspec namest="c1" nameend="c2" spanname="id" />
+	<spanspec namest="c2" nameend="c4" spanname="descr" />
+	<thead>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id" align="left">ID</entry>
+	    <entry align="left">Type</entry>
+	  </row><row rowsep="1"><entry spanname="descr" align="left">Description</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</thead>
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>button</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_IMAGE_SOURCE_CLASS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>class</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="descr">Strobe flash. Valid when
-	    V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to
-	    V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH and V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE
-	    is set to V4L2_FLASH_STROBE_SOURCE_SOFTWARE. Setting this
-	    control may not be possible in presence of some faults.
-	    See V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">The IMAGE_SOURCE class descriptor.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STOP</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>button</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_VBLANK</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>integer</entry>
 	  </row>
-	  <row><entry spanname="descr">Stop flash strobe immediately.</entry>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">Vertical blanking. The idle period
+	    after every frame during which no image data is produced.
+	    The unit of vertical blanking is a line. Every line has
+	    length of the image width plus horizontal blanking at the
+	    pixel rate defined by
+	    <constant>V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE</constant> control in the
+	    same sub-device.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE_STATUS</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>boolean</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_HBLANK</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>integer</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="descr">Strobe status: whether the flash
-	    is strobing at the moment or not. This is a read-only
-	    control.</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">Horizontal blanking. The idle
+	    period after every line of image data during which no
+	    image data is produced. The unit of horizontal blanking is
+	    pixels.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT</constant></entry>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_ANALOGUE_GAIN</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>integer</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="descr">Hardware timeout for flash. The
-	    flash strobe is stopped after this period of time has
-	    passed from the start of the strobe.</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">Analogue gain is gain affecting
+	    all colour components in the pixel matrix. The gain
+	    operation is performed in the analogue domain before A/D
+	    conversion.
+	    </entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+      </table>
+
+    </section>
+
+    <section id="image-process-controls">
+      <title>Image Process Control Reference</title>
+
+      <note>
+	<title>Experimental</title>
+
+	<para>This is an <link
+	linkend="experimental">experimental</link> interface and may
+	change in the future.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <para>
+	The Image Source control class is intended for low-level control of
+	image processing functions. Unlike
+	<constant>V4L2_CID_IMAGE_SOURCE_CLASS</constant>, the controls in
+	this class affect processing the image, and do not control capturing
+	of it.
+      </para>
+
+      <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="image-process-control-id">
+      <title>Image Source Control IDs</title>
+
+      <tgroup cols="4">
+	<colspec colname="c1" colwidth="1*" />
+	<colspec colname="c2" colwidth="6*" />
+	<colspec colname="c3" colwidth="2*" />
+	<colspec colname="c4" colwidth="6*" />
+	<spanspec namest="c1" nameend="c2" spanname="id" />
+	<spanspec namest="c2" nameend="c4" spanname="descr" />
+	<thead>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_INTENSITY</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>integer</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="id" align="left">ID</entry>
+	    <entry align="left">Type</entry>
+	  </row><row rowsep="1"><entry spanname="descr" align="left">Description</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</thead>
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_IMAGE_PROC_CLASS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>class</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="descr">Intensity of the flash strobe when
-	    the flash LED is in flash mode
-	    (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_FLASH). The unit should be milliamps
-	    (mA) if possible.</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">The IMAGE_PROC class descriptor.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_TORCH_INTENSITY</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>integer</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_LINK_FREQ</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>integer menu</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="descr">Intensity of the flash LED in
-	    torch mode (V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_TORCH). The unit should be
-	    milliamps (mA) if possible. Setting this control may not
-	    be possible in presence of some faults. See
-	    V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT.</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">Data bus frequency. Together with the
+	    media bus pixel code, bus type (clock cycles per sample), the
+	    data bus frequency defines the pixel rate
+	    (<constant>V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE</constant>) in the
+	    pixel array (or possibly elsewhere, if the device is not an
+	    image sensor). The frame rate can be calculated from the pixel
+	    clock, image width and height and horizontal and vertical
+	    blanking. While the pixel rate control may be defined elsewhere
+	    than in the subdev containing the pixel array, the frame rate
+	    cannot be obtained from that information. This is because only
+	    on the pixel array it can be assumed that the vertical and
+	    horizontal blanking information is exact: no other blanking is
+	    allowed in the pixel array. The selection of frame rate is
+	    performed by selecting the desired horizontal and vertical
+	    blanking. The unit of this control is Hz. </entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_INDICATOR_INTENSITY</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>integer</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_PIXEL_RATE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>64-bit integer</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">Pixel rate in the source pads of
+	    the subdev. This control is read-only and its unit is
+	    pixels / second.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>menu</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row id="v4l2-test-pattern">
+	    <entry spanname="descr"> Some capture/display/sensor devices have
+	    the capability to generate test pattern images. These hardware
+	    specific test patterns can be used to test if a device is working
+	    properly.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+      </table>
+
+    </section>
+
+    <section id="dv-controls">
+      <title>Digital Video Control Reference</title>
+
+      <note>
+	<title>Experimental</title>
+
+	<para>This is an <link
+	linkend="experimental">experimental</link> interface and may
+	change in the future.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <para>
+	The Digital Video control class is intended to control receivers
+	and transmitters for <ulink url="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vga">VGA</ulink>,
+	<ulink url="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Digital_Visual_Interface">DVI</ulink>
+	(Digital Visual Interface), HDMI (<xref linkend="hdmi" />) and DisplayPort (<xref linkend="dp" />).
+	These controls are generally expected to be private to the receiver or transmitter
+	subdevice that implements them, so they are only exposed on the
+	<filename>/dev/v4l-subdev*</filename> device node.
+      </para>
+
+      <para>Note that these devices can have multiple input or output pads which are
+      hooked up to e.g. HDMI connectors. Even though the subdevice will receive or
+      transmit video from/to only one of those pads, the other pads can still be
+      active when it comes to EDID (Extended Display Identification Data,
+      <xref linkend="vesaedid" />) and HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
+      Protection System, <xref linkend="hdcp" />) processing, allowing the device
+      to do the fairly slow EDID/HDCP handling in advance. This allows for quick
+      switching between connectors.</para>
+
+      <para>These pads appear in several of the controls in this section as
+      bitmasks, one bit for each pad. Bit 0 corresponds to pad 0, bit 1 to pad 1,
+      etc. The maximum value of the control is the set of valid pads.</para>
+
+      <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="dv-control-id">
+      <title>Digital Video Control IDs</title>
+
+      <tgroup cols="4">
+	<colspec colname="c1" colwidth="1*" />
+	<colspec colname="c2" colwidth="6*" />
+	<colspec colname="c3" colwidth="2*" />
+	<colspec colname="c4" colwidth="6*" />
+	<spanspec namest="c1" nameend="c2" spanname="id" />
+	<spanspec namest="c2" nameend="c4" spanname="descr" />
+	<thead>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id" align="left">ID</entry>
+	    <entry align="left">Type</entry>
+	  </row><row rowsep="1"><entry spanname="descr" align="left">Description</entry>
 	  </row>
+	</thead>
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="descr">Intensity of the indicator LED.
-	    The indicator LED may be fully independent of the flash
-	    LED. The unit should be microamps (uA) if possible.</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_CLASS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>class</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_FAULT</constant></entry>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">The Digital Video class descriptor.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_TX_HOTPLUG</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>bitmask</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="descr">Faults related to the flash. The
-	    faults tell about specific problems in the flash chip
-	    itself or the LEDs attached to it. Faults may prevent
-	    further use of some of the flash controls. In particular,
-	    V4L2_CID_FLASH_LED_MODE is set to V4L2_FLASH_LED_MODE_NONE
-	    if the fault affects the flash LED. Exactly which faults
-	    have such an effect is chip dependent. Reading the faults
-	    resets the control and returns the chip to a usable state
-	    if possible.</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">Many connectors have a hotplug pin which is high
+	    if EDID information is available from the source. This control shows the
+	    state of the hotplug pin as seen by the transmitter.
+	    Each bit corresponds to an output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad
+	    does not have an associated hotplug pin, then the bit for that pad will be 0.
+	    This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors.
+	    </entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
-	      <tbody valign="top">
-		<row>
-		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_VOLTAGE</constant></entry>
-		  <entry>Flash controller voltage to the flash LED
-		  has exceeded the limit specific to the flash
-		  controller.</entry>
-		</row>
-		<row>
-		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_TIMEOUT</constant></entry>
-		  <entry>The flash strobe was still on when
-		  the timeout set by the user ---
-		  V4L2_CID_FLASH_TIMEOUT control --- has expired.
-		  Not all flash controllers may set this in all
-		  such conditions.</entry>
-		</row>
-		<row>
-		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_TEMPERATURE</constant></entry>
-		  <entry>The flash controller has overheated.</entry>
-		</row>
-		<row>
-		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_SHORT_CIRCUIT</constant></entry>
-		  <entry>The short circuit protection of the flash
-		  controller has been triggered.</entry>
-		</row>
-		<row>
-		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_OVER_CURRENT</constant></entry>
-		  <entry>Current in the LED power supply has exceeded the limit
-		  specific to the flash controller.</entry>
-		</row>
-		<row>
-		  <entry><constant>V4L2_FLASH_FAULT_INDICATOR</constant></entry>
-		  <entry>The flash controller has detected a short or open
-		  circuit condition on the indicator LED.</entry>
-		</row>
-	      </tbody>
-	    </entrytbl>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_TX_RXSENSE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>bitmask</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_CHARGE</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>boolean</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">Rx Sense is the detection of pull-ups on the TMDS
+            clock lines. This normally means that the sink has left/entered standby (i.e.
+	    the transmitter can sense that the receiver is ready to receive video).
+	    Each bit corresponds to an output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad
+	    does not have an associated Rx Sense, then the bit for that pad will be 0.
+	    This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D and HDMI devices.
+	    </entry>
 	  </row>
-	  <row><entry spanname="descr">Enable or disable charging of the xenon
-	  flash capacitor.</entry>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_TX_EDID_PRESENT</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>bitmask</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FLASH_READY</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>boolean</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">When the transmitter sees the hotplug signal from the
+	    receiver it will attempt to read the EDID. If set, then the transmitter has read
+	    at least the first block (= 128 bytes).
+	    Each bit corresponds to an output pad on the transmitter. If an output pad
+	    does not support EDIDs, then the bit for that pad will be 0.
+	    This read-only control is applicable to VGA, DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_TX_MODE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry id="v4l2-dv-tx-mode">enum v4l2_dv_tx_mode</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">HDMI transmitters can transmit in DVI-D mode (just video)
+	    or in HDMI mode (video + audio + auxiliary data). This control selects which mode
+	    to use: V4L2_DV_TX_MODE_DVI_D or V4L2_DV_TX_MODE_HDMI.
+	    This control is applicable to HDMI connectors.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_TX_RGB_RANGE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry id="v4l2-dv-rgb-range">enum v4l2_dv_rgb_range</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry spanname="descr">Is the flash ready to strobe?
-	    Xenon flashes require their capacitors charged before
-	    strobing. LED flashes often require a cooldown period
-	    after strobe during which another strobe will not be
-	    possible. This is a read-only control.</entry>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">Select the quantization range for RGB output. V4L2_DV_RANGE_AUTO
+	    follows the RGB quantization range specified in the standard for the video interface
+	    (ie. <xref linkend="cea861" /> for HDMI). V4L2_DV_RANGE_LIMITED and V4L2_DV_RANGE_FULL override the standard
+	    to be compatible with sinks that have not implemented the standard correctly
+	    (unfortunately quite common for HDMI and DVI-D). Full range allows all possible values to be
+	    used whereas limited range sets the range to (16 &lt;&lt; (N-8)) - (235 &lt;&lt; (N-8))
+	    where N is the number of bits per component.
+	    This control is applicable to VGA, DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_RX_POWER_PRESENT</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>bitmask</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">Detects whether the receiver receives power from the source
+	    (e.g. HDMI carries 5V on one of the pins). This is often used to power an eeprom
+	    which contains EDID information, such that the source can read the EDID even if
+	    the sink is in standby/power off.
+	    Each bit corresponds to an input pad on the transmitter. If an input pad
+	    cannot detect whether power is present, then the bit for that pad will be 0.
+	    This read-only control is applicable to DVI-D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_DV_RX_RGB_RANGE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>enum v4l2_dv_rgb_range</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="descr">Select the quantization range for RGB input. V4L2_DV_RANGE_AUTO
+	    follows the RGB quantization range specified in the standard for the video interface
+	    (ie. <xref linkend="cea861" /> for HDMI). V4L2_DV_RANGE_LIMITED and V4L2_DV_RANGE_FULL override the standard
+	    to be compatible with sources that have not implemented the standard correctly
+	    (unfortunately quite common for HDMI and DVI-D). Full range allows all possible values to be
+	    used whereas limited range sets the range to (16 &lt;&lt; (N-8)) - (235 &lt;&lt; (N-8))
+	    where N is the number of bits per component.
+	    This control is applicable to VGA, DVI-A/D, HDMI and DisplayPort connectors.
+	    </entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row><entry></entry></row>
 	</tbody>
@@ -3379,4 +4858,76 @@ interface and may change in the future.</para>
       </table>
 
     </section>
+
+    <section id="fm-rx-controls">
+      <title>FM Receiver Control Reference</title>
+
+      <para>The FM Receiver (FM_RX) class includes controls for common features of
+      FM Reception capable devices.</para>
+
+      <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="fm-rx-control-id">
+      <title>FM_RX Control IDs</title>
+
+      <tgroup cols="4">
+        <colspec colname="c1" colwidth="1*" />
+        <colspec colname="c2" colwidth="6*" />
+        <colspec colname="c3" colwidth="2*" />
+        <colspec colname="c4" colwidth="6*" />
+        <spanspec namest="c1" nameend="c2" spanname="id" />
+        <spanspec namest="c2" nameend="c4" spanname="descr" />
+        <thead>
+          <row>
+            <entry spanname="id" align="left">ID</entry>
+            <entry align="left">Type</entry>
+          </row><row rowsep="1"><entry spanname="descr" align="left">Description</entry>
+          </row>
+        </thead>
+        <tbody valign="top">
+          <row><entry></entry></row>
+          <row>
+            <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_FM_RX_CLASS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+            <entry>class</entry>
+          </row><row><entry spanname="descr">The FM_RX class
+descriptor. Calling &VIDIOC-QUERYCTRL; for this control will return a
+description of this control class.</entry>
+          </row>
+          <row>
+            <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_RDS_RECEPTION</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+            <entry>boolean</entry>
+          </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Enables/disables RDS
+	  reception by the radio tuner</entry>
+          </row>
+          <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_TUNE_DEEMPHASIS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>enum v4l2_deemphasis</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row id="v4l2-deemphasis"><entry spanname="descr">Configures the de-emphasis value for reception.
+A de-emphasis filter is applied to the broadcast to accentuate the high audio frequencies.
+Depending on the region, a time constant of either 50 or 75 useconds is used. The enum&nbsp;v4l2_deemphasis
+defines possible values for de-emphasis. Here they are:</entry>
+	</row><row>
+	<entrytbl spanname="descr" cols="2">
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_DISABLED</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>No de-emphasis is applied.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_50_uS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>A de-emphasis of 50 uS is used.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry><constant>V4L2_DEEMPHASIS_75_uS</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+		      <entry>A de-emphasis of 75 uS is used.</entry>
+		    </row>
+		  </tbody>
+		</entrytbl>
+
+	  </row>
+          <row><entry></entry></row>
+        </tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+      </table>
+
+      </section>
 </section>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-codec.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-codec.xml
index dca0ecd54dc6..ff44c16fc080 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-codec.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-codec.xml
@@ -1,18 +1,27 @@
   <title>Codec Interface</title>
 
-  <note>
-    <title>Suspended</title>
+  <para>A V4L2 codec can compress, decompress, transform, or otherwise
+convert video data from one format into another format, in memory. Typically
+such devices are memory-to-memory devices (i.e. devices with the
+<constant>V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M</constant> or <constant>V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M_MPLANE</constant>
+capability set).
+</para>
 
-    <para>This interface has been be suspended from the V4L2 API
-implemented in Linux 2.6 until we have more experience with codec
-device interfaces.</para>
-  </note>
+  <para>A memory-to-memory video node acts just like a normal video node, but it
+supports both output (sending frames from memory to the codec hardware) and
+capture (receiving the processed frames from the codec hardware into memory)
+stream I/O. An application will have to setup the stream
+I/O for both sides and finally call &VIDIOC-STREAMON; for both capture and output
+to start the codec.</para>
 
-  <para>A V4L2 codec can compress, decompress, transform, or otherwise
-convert video data from one format into another format, in memory.
-Applications send data to be converted to the driver through a
-&func-write; call, and receive the converted data through a
-&func-read; call. For efficiency a driver may also support streaming
-I/O.</para>
+  <para>Video compression codecs use the MPEG controls to setup their codec parameters
+(note that the MPEG controls actually support many more codecs than just MPEG).
+See <xref linkend="mpeg-controls"></xref>.</para>
 
-  <para>[to do]</para>
+  <para>Memory-to-memory devices can often be used as a shared resource: you can
+open the video node multiple times, each application setting up their own codec properties
+that are local to the file handle, and each can use it independently from the others.
+The driver will arbitrate access to the codec and reprogram it whenever another file
+handler gets access. This is different from the usual video node behavior where the video properties
+are global to the device (i.e. changing something through one file handle is visible
+through another file handle).</para>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-osd.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-osd.xml
index 479d9433869a..dd91d6134e8c 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-osd.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-osd.xml
@@ -1,13 +1,6 @@
   <title>Video Output Overlay Interface</title>
   <subtitle>Also known as On-Screen Display (OSD)</subtitle>
 
-  <note>
-    <title>Experimental</title>
-
-    <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link>
-interface and may change in the future.</para>
-  </note>
-
   <para>Some video output devices can overlay a framebuffer image onto
 the outgoing video signal. Applications can set up such an overlay
 using this interface, which borrows structures and ioctls of the <link
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-rds.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-rds.xml
index 38883a419e65..be2f33737323 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-rds.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-rds.xml
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ information, on an inaudible audio subcarrier of a radio program. This
 interface is aimed at devices capable of receiving and/or transmitting RDS
 information.</para>
 
-      <para>For more information see the core RDS standard <xref linkend="en50067" />
+      <para>For more information see the core RDS standard <xref linkend="iec62106" />
 and the RBDS standard <xref linkend="nrsc4" />.</para>
 
       <para>Note that the RBDS standard as is used in the USA is almost identical
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml
index 0916a7343a16..d15aaf83f56f 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml
@@ -76,11 +76,12 @@
     <wordasword>format</wordasword> means the combination of media bus data
     format, frame width and frame height.</para></note>
 
-    <para>Image formats are typically negotiated on video capture and output
-    devices using the <link linkend="crop">cropping and scaling</link> ioctls.
-    The driver is responsible for configuring every block in the video pipeline
-    according to the requested format at the pipeline input and/or
-    output.</para>
+    <para>Image formats are typically negotiated on video capture and
+    output devices using the format and <link
+    linkend="vidioc-subdev-g-selection">selection</link> ioctls. The
+    driver is responsible for configuring every block in the video
+    pipeline according to the requested format at the pipeline input
+    and/or output.</para>
 
     <para>For complex devices, such as often found in embedded systems,
     identical image sizes at the output of a pipeline can be achieved using
@@ -275,12 +276,12 @@
       </para>
     </section>
 
-    <section>
-      <title>Cropping and scaling</title>
+    <section id="v4l2-subdev-selections">
+      <title>Selections: cropping, scaling and composition</title>
 
       <para>Many sub-devices support cropping frames on their input or output
       pads (or possible even on both). Cropping is used to select the area of
-      interest in an image, typically on a video sensor or video decoder. It can
+      interest in an image, typically on an image sensor or a video decoder. It can
       also be used as part of digital zoom implementations to select the area of
       the image that will be scaled up.</para>
 
@@ -288,26 +289,179 @@
       &v4l2-rect; by the coordinates of the top left corner and the rectangle
       size. Both the coordinates and sizes are expressed in pixels.</para>
 
-      <para>The crop rectangle is retrieved and set using the
-      &VIDIOC-SUBDEV-G-CROP; and &VIDIOC-SUBDEV-S-CROP; ioctls. Like for pad
-      formats, drivers store try and active crop rectangles. The format
-      negotiation mechanism applies to crop settings as well.</para>
-
-      <para>On input pads, cropping is applied relatively to the current pad
-      format. The pad format represents the image size as received by the
-      sub-device from the previous block in the pipeline, and the crop rectangle
-      represents the sub-image that will be transmitted further inside the
-      sub-device for processing. The crop rectangle be entirely containted
-      inside the input image size.</para>
-
-      <para>Input crop rectangle are reset to their default value when the input
-      image format is modified. Drivers should use the input image size as the
-      crop rectangle default value, but hardware requirements may prevent this.
-      </para>
+      <para>As for pad formats, drivers store try and active
+      rectangles for the selection targets <xref
+      linkend="v4l2-selections-common" />.</para>
+
+      <para>On sink pads, cropping is applied relative to the
+      current pad format. The pad format represents the image size as
+      received by the sub-device from the previous block in the
+      pipeline, and the crop rectangle represents the sub-image that
+      will be transmitted further inside the sub-device for
+      processing.</para>
+
+      <para>The scaling operation changes the size of the image by
+      scaling it to new dimensions. The scaling ratio isn't specified
+      explicitly, but is implied from the original and scaled image
+      sizes. Both sizes are represented by &v4l2-rect;.</para>
+
+      <para>Scaling support is optional. When supported by a subdev,
+      the crop rectangle on the subdev's sink pad is scaled to the
+      size configured using the &VIDIOC-SUBDEV-S-SELECTION; IOCTL
+      using <constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE</constant>
+      selection target on the same pad. If the subdev supports scaling
+      but not composing, the top and left values are not used and must
+      always be set to zero.</para>
+
+      <para>On source pads, cropping is similar to sink pads, with the
+      exception that the source size from which the cropping is
+      performed, is the COMPOSE rectangle on the sink pad. In both
+      sink and source pads, the crop rectangle must be entirely
+      contained inside the source image size for the crop
+      operation.</para>
+
+      <para>The drivers should always use the closest possible
+      rectangle the user requests on all selection targets, unless
+      specifically told otherwise.
+      <constant>V4L2_SEL_FLAG_GE</constant> and
+      <constant>V4L2_SEL_FLAG_LE</constant> flags may be
+      used to round the image size either up or down. <xref
+      linkend="v4l2-selection-flags" /></para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Types of selection targets</title>
 
-      <para>Cropping behaviour on output pads is not defined.</para>
+      <section>
+	<title>Actual targets</title>
+
+	<para>Actual targets (without a postfix) reflect the actual
+	hardware configuration at any point of time. There is a BOUNDS
+	target corresponding to every actual target.</para>
+      </section>
+
+      <section>
+	<title>BOUNDS targets</title>
+
+	<para>BOUNDS targets is the smallest rectangle that contains all
+	valid actual rectangles. It may not be possible to set the actual
+	rectangle as large as the BOUNDS rectangle, however. This may be
+	because e.g. a sensor's pixel array is not rectangular but
+	cross-shaped or round. The maximum size may also be smaller than the
+	BOUNDS rectangle.</para>
+      </section>
 
     </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Order of configuration and format propagation</title>
+
+      <para>Inside subdevs, the order of image processing steps will
+      always be from the sink pad towards the source pad. This is also
+      reflected in the order in which the configuration must be
+      performed by the user: the changes made will be propagated to
+      any subsequent stages. If this behaviour is not desired, the
+      user must set
+      <constant>V4L2_SEL_FLAG_KEEP_CONFIG</constant> flag. This
+      flag causes no propagation of the changes are allowed in any
+      circumstances. This may also cause the accessed rectangle to be
+      adjusted by the driver, depending on the properties of the
+      underlying hardware.</para>
+
+      <para>The coordinates to a step always refer to the actual size
+      of the previous step. The exception to this rule is the source
+      compose rectangle, which refers to the sink compose bounds
+      rectangle --- if it is supported by the hardware.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist>
+	<listitem><para>Sink pad format. The user configures the sink pad
+	format. This format defines the parameters of the image the
+	entity receives through the pad for further processing.</para></listitem>
+
+	<listitem><para>Sink pad actual crop selection. The sink pad crop
+	defines the crop performed to the sink pad format.</para></listitem>
+
+	<listitem><para>Sink pad actual compose selection. The size of the
+	sink pad compose rectangle defines the scaling ratio compared
+	to the size of the sink pad crop rectangle. The location of
+	the compose rectangle specifies the location of the actual
+	sink compose rectangle in the sink compose bounds
+	rectangle.</para></listitem>
+
+	<listitem><para>Source pad actual crop selection. Crop on the source
+	pad defines crop performed to the image in the sink compose
+	bounds rectangle.</para></listitem>
+
+	<listitem><para>Source pad format. The source pad format defines the
+	output pixel format of the subdev, as well as the other
+	parameters with the exception of the image width and height.
+	Width and height are defined by the size of the source pad
+	actual crop selection.</para></listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+      <para>Accessing any of the above rectangles not supported by the
+      subdev will return <constant>EINVAL</constant>. Any rectangle
+      referring to a previous unsupported rectangle coordinates will
+      instead refer to the previous supported rectangle. For example,
+      if sink crop is not supported, the compose selection will refer
+      to the sink pad format dimensions instead.</para>
+
+      <figure id="subdev-image-processing-crop">
+	<title>Image processing in subdevs: simple crop example</title>
+	<mediaobject>
+	  <imageobject>
+	    <imagedata fileref="subdev-image-processing-crop.svg"
+	    format="SVG" scale="200" />
+	  </imageobject>
+	</mediaobject>
+      </figure>
+
+      <para>In the above example, the subdev supports cropping on its
+      sink pad. To configure it, the user sets the media bus format on
+      the subdev's sink pad. Now the actual crop rectangle can be set
+      on the sink pad --- the location and size of this rectangle
+      reflect the location and size of a rectangle to be cropped from
+      the sink format. The size of the sink crop rectangle will also
+      be the size of the format of the subdev's source pad.</para>
+
+      <figure id="subdev-image-processing-scaling-multi-source">
+	<title>Image processing in subdevs: scaling with multiple sources</title>
+	<mediaobject>
+	  <imageobject>
+	    <imagedata fileref="subdev-image-processing-scaling-multi-source.svg"
+	    format="SVG" scale="200" />
+	  </imageobject>
+	</mediaobject>
+      </figure>
+
+      <para>In this example, the subdev is capable of first cropping,
+      then scaling and finally cropping for two source pads
+      individually from the resulting scaled image. The location of
+      the scaled image in the cropped image is ignored in sink compose
+      target. Both of the locations of the source crop rectangles
+      refer to the sink scaling rectangle, independently cropping an
+      area at location specified by the source crop rectangle from
+      it.</para>
+
+      <figure id="subdev-image-processing-full">
+	<title>Image processing in subdevs: scaling and composition
+	with multiple sinks and sources</title>
+	<mediaobject>
+	  <imageobject>
+	    <imagedata fileref="subdev-image-processing-full.svg"
+	    format="SVG" scale="200" />
+	  </imageobject>
+	</mediaobject>
+      </figure>
+
+      <para>The subdev driver supports two sink pads and two source
+      pads. The images from both of the sink pads are individually
+      cropped, then scaled and further composed on the composition
+      bounds rectangle. From that, two independent streams are cropped
+      and sent out of the subdev from the source pads.</para>
+
+    </section>
+
   </section>
 
   &sub-subdev-formats;
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/driver.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/driver.xml
index eacafe312cd2..7c6638bacedb 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/driver.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/driver.xml
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ my_suspend              (struct pci_dev *               pci_dev,
 	return 0; /* a negative value on error, 0 on success. */
 }
 
-static void __devexit
+static void
 my_remove               (struct pci_dev *               pci_dev)
 {
 	my_device *my = pci_get_drvdata (pci_dev);
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ my_remove               (struct pci_dev *               pci_dev)
 	/* Describe me. */
 }
 
-static int __devinit
+static int
 my_probe                (struct pci_dev *               pci_dev,
 			 const struct pci_device_id *   pci_id)
 {
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ my_pci_driver = {
 	.id_table = my_pci_device_ids,
 
 	.probe    = my_probe,
-	.remove   = __devexit_p (my_remove),
+	.remove   = my_remove,
 
 	/* Power management functions. */
 	.suspend  = my_suspend,
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/gen-errors.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/gen-errors.xml
index 5bbf3ce1973a..7e29a4e1f696 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/gen-errors.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/gen-errors.xml
@@ -7,6 +7,15 @@
     <tbody valign="top">
 	<!-- Keep it ordered alphabetically -->
       <row>
+	<entry>EAGAIN (aka EWOULDBLOCK)</entry>
+	<entry>The ioctl can't be handled because the device is in state where
+	       it can't perform it. This could happen for example in case where
+	       device is sleeping and ioctl is performed to query statistics.
+	       It is also returned when the ioctl would need to wait
+	       for an event, but the device was opened in non-blocking mode.
+	</entry>
+      </row>
+      <row>
 	<entry>EBADF</entry>
 	<entry>The file descriptor is not a valid.</entry>
       </row>
@@ -51,21 +60,11 @@
 	       for periodic transfers (up to 80% of the USB bandwidth).</entry>
       </row>
       <row>
-	<entry>ENOSYS or EOPNOTSUPP</entry>
-	<entry>Function not available for this device (dvb API only. Will likely
-	       be replaced anytime soon by ENOTTY).</entry>
-      </row>
-      <row>
 	<entry>EPERM</entry>
 	<entry>Permission denied. Can be returned if the device needs write
 		permission, or some special capabilities is needed
 		(e. g. root)</entry>
       </row>
-      <row>
-	<entry>EWOULDBLOCK</entry>
-	<entry>Operation would block. Used when the ioctl would need to wait
-	       for an event, but the device was opened in non-blocking mode.</entry>
-      </row>
     </tbody>
   </tgroup>
 </table>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml
index b815929b5bba..2c4c068dde83 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml
@@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ application until one or more buffers can be dequeued. By default
 outgoing queue. When the <constant>O_NONBLOCK</constant> flag was
 given to the &func-open; function, <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant>
 returns immediately with an &EAGAIN; when no buffer is available. The
-&func-select; or &func-poll; function are always available.</para>
+&func-select; or &func-poll; functions are always available.</para>
 
     <para>To start and stop capturing or output applications call the
 &VIDIOC-STREAMON; and &VIDIOC-STREAMOFF; ioctl. Note
@@ -472,6 +472,165 @@ rest should be evident.</para>
       </footnote></para>
   </section>
 
+  <section id="dmabuf">
+    <title>Streaming I/O (DMA buffer importing)</title>
+
+    <note>
+      <title>Experimental</title>
+      <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link>
+      interface and may change in the future.</para>
+    </note>
+
+<para>The DMABUF framework provides a generic method for sharing buffers
+between multiple devices. Device drivers that support DMABUF can export a DMA
+buffer to userspace as a file descriptor (known as the exporter role), import a
+DMA buffer from userspace using a file descriptor previously exported for a
+different or the same device (known as the importer role), or both. This
+section describes the DMABUF importer role API in V4L2.</para>
+
+    <para>Refer to <link linkend="vidioc-expbuf">DMABUF exporting</link> for
+details about exporting V4L2 buffers as DMABUF file descriptors.</para>
+
+<para>Input and output devices support the streaming I/O method when the
+<constant>V4L2_CAP_STREAMING</constant> flag in the
+<structfield>capabilities</structfield> field of &v4l2-capability; returned by
+the &VIDIOC-QUERYCAP; ioctl is set. Whether importing DMA buffers through
+DMABUF file descriptors is supported is determined by calling the
+&VIDIOC-REQBUFS; ioctl with the memory type set to
+<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_DMABUF</constant>.</para>
+
+    <para>This I/O method is dedicated to sharing DMA buffers between different
+devices, which may be V4L devices or other video-related devices (e.g. DRM).
+Buffers (planes) are allocated by a driver on behalf of an application. Next,
+these buffers are exported to the application as file descriptors using an API
+which is specific for an allocator driver.  Only such file descriptor are
+exchanged. The descriptors and meta-information are passed in &v4l2-buffer; (or
+in &v4l2-plane; in the multi-planar API case).  The driver must be switched
+into DMABUF I/O mode by calling the &VIDIOC-REQBUFS; with the desired buffer
+type.</para>
+
+    <example>
+      <title>Initiating streaming I/O with DMABUF file descriptors</title>
+
+      <programlisting>
+&v4l2-requestbuffers; reqbuf;
+
+memset(&amp;reqbuf, 0, sizeof (reqbuf));
+reqbuf.type = V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE;
+reqbuf.memory = V4L2_MEMORY_DMABUF;
+reqbuf.count = 1;
+
+if (ioctl(fd, &VIDIOC-REQBUFS;, &amp;reqbuf) == -1) {
+	if (errno == EINVAL)
+		printf("Video capturing or DMABUF streaming is not supported\n");
+	else
+		perror("VIDIOC_REQBUFS");
+
+	exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+}
+      </programlisting>
+    </example>
+
+    <para>The buffer (plane) file descriptor is passed on the fly with the
+&VIDIOC-QBUF; ioctl. In case of multiplanar buffers, every plane can be
+associated with a different DMABUF descriptor. Although buffers are commonly
+cycled, applications can pass a different DMABUF descriptor at each
+<constant>VIDIOC_QBUF</constant> call.</para>
+
+    <example>
+      <title>Queueing DMABUF using single plane API</title>
+
+      <programlisting>
+int buffer_queue(int v4lfd, int index, int dmafd)
+{
+	&v4l2-buffer; buf;
+
+	memset(&amp;buf, 0, sizeof buf);
+	buf.type = V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE;
+	buf.memory = V4L2_MEMORY_DMABUF;
+	buf.index = index;
+	buf.m.fd = dmafd;
+
+	if (ioctl(v4lfd, &VIDIOC-QBUF;, &amp;buf) == -1) {
+		perror("VIDIOC_QBUF");
+		return -1;
+	}
+
+	return 0;
+}
+      </programlisting>
+    </example>
+
+    <example>
+      <title>Queueing DMABUF using multi plane API</title>
+
+      <programlisting>
+int buffer_queue_mp(int v4lfd, int index, int dmafd[], int n_planes)
+{
+	&v4l2-buffer; buf;
+	&v4l2-plane; planes[VIDEO_MAX_PLANES];
+	int i;
+
+	memset(&amp;buf, 0, sizeof buf);
+	buf.type = V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE_MPLANE;
+	buf.memory = V4L2_MEMORY_DMABUF;
+	buf.index = index;
+	buf.m.planes = planes;
+	buf.length = n_planes;
+
+	memset(&amp;planes, 0, sizeof planes);
+
+	for (i = 0; i &lt; n_planes; ++i)
+		buf.m.planes[i].m.fd = dmafd[i];
+
+	if (ioctl(v4lfd, &VIDIOC-QBUF;, &amp;buf) == -1) {
+		perror("VIDIOC_QBUF");
+		return -1;
+	}
+
+	return 0;
+}
+      </programlisting>
+    </example>
+
+    <para>Captured or displayed buffers are dequeued with the
+&VIDIOC-DQBUF; ioctl. The driver can unlock the buffer at any
+time between the completion of the DMA and this ioctl. The memory is
+also unlocked when &VIDIOC-STREAMOFF; is called, &VIDIOC-REQBUFS;, or
+when the device is closed.</para>
+
+    <para>For capturing applications it is customary to enqueue a
+number of empty buffers, to start capturing and enter the read loop.
+Here the application waits until a filled buffer can be dequeued, and
+re-enqueues the buffer when the data is no longer needed. Output
+applications fill and enqueue buffers, when enough buffers are stacked
+up output is started. In the write loop, when the application
+runs out of free buffers it must wait until an empty buffer can be
+dequeued and reused. Two methods exist to suspend execution of the
+application until one or more buffers can be dequeued. By default
+<constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant> blocks when no buffer is in the
+outgoing queue. When the <constant>O_NONBLOCK</constant> flag was
+given to the &func-open; function, <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant>
+returns immediately with an &EAGAIN; when no buffer is available. The
+&func-select; and &func-poll; functions are always available.</para>
+
+    <para>To start and stop capturing or displaying applications call the
+&VIDIOC-STREAMON; and &VIDIOC-STREAMOFF; ioctls. Note that
+<constant>VIDIOC_STREAMOFF</constant> removes all buffers from both queues and
+unlocks all buffers as a side effect. Since there is no notion of doing
+anything "now" on a multitasking system, if an application needs to synchronize
+with another event it should examine the &v4l2-buffer;
+<structfield>timestamp</structfield> of captured buffers, or set the field
+before enqueuing buffers for output.</para>
+
+    <para>Drivers implementing DMABUF importing I/O must support the
+<constant>VIDIOC_REQBUFS</constant>, <constant>VIDIOC_QBUF</constant>,
+<constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant>, <constant>VIDIOC_STREAMON</constant> and
+<constant>VIDIOC_STREAMOFF</constant> ioctls, and the
+<function>select()</function> and <function>poll()</function> functions.</para>
+
+  </section>
+
   <section id="async">
     <title>Asynchronous I/O</title>
 
@@ -543,12 +702,13 @@ and can range from zero to the number of buffers allocated
 with the &VIDIOC-REQBUFS; ioctl (&v4l2-requestbuffers; <structfield>count</structfield>) minus one.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-buf-type;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry></entry>
 	    <entry>Type of the buffer, same as &v4l2-format;
 <structfield>type</structfield> or &v4l2-requestbuffers;
-<structfield>type</structfield>, set by the application.</entry>
+<structfield>type</structfield>, set by the application. See <xref
+linkend="v4l2-buf-type" /></entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
@@ -568,7 +728,7 @@ refers to an input stream, applications when an output stream.</entry>
 linkend="buffer-flags" />.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-field;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>field</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry></entry>
 	    <entry>Indicates the field order of the image in the
@@ -581,17 +741,19 @@ applications when an output stream.</entry>
 	    <entry>struct timeval</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>timestamp</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry></entry>
-	    <entry><para>For input streams this is the
-system time (as returned by the <function>gettimeofday()</function>
-function) when the first data byte was captured. For output streams
-the data will not be displayed before this time, secondary to the
-nominal frame rate determined by the current video standard in
-enqueued order. Applications can for example zero this field to
-display frames as soon as possible. The driver stores the time at
-which the first data byte was actually sent out in the
-<structfield>timestamp</structfield> field. This permits
-applications to monitor the drift between the video and system
-clock.</para></entry>
+	    <entry><para>For input streams this is time when the first data
+	    byte was captured, as returned by the
+	    <function>clock_gettime()</function> function for the relevant
+	    clock id; see <constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_TIMESTAMP_*</constant> in
+	    <xref linkend="buffer-flags" />. For output streams the data
+	    will not be displayed before this time, secondary to the nominal
+	    frame rate determined by the current video standard in enqueued
+	    order. Applications can for example zero this field to display
+	    frames as soon as possible. The driver stores the time at which
+	    the first data byte was actually sent out in the
+	    <structfield>timestamp</structfield> field. This permits
+	    applications to monitor the drift between the video and system
+	    clock.</para></entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>&v4l2-timecode;</entry>
@@ -612,8 +774,8 @@ field is independent of the <structfield>timestamp</structfield> and
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>sequence</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry></entry>
-	    <entry>Set by the driver, counting the frames in the
-sequence.</entry>
+	    <entry>Set by the driver, counting the frames (not fields!) in
+sequence. This field is set for both input and output devices.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry spanname="hspan"><para>In <link
@@ -630,11 +792,12 @@ bandwidth. These devices identify by not enumerating any video
 standards, see <xref linkend="standard" />.</para></entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-memory;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>memory</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry></entry>
 	    <entry>This field must be set by applications and/or drivers
-in accordance with the selected I/O method.</entry>
+in accordance with the selected I/O method. See <xref linkend="v4l2-memory"
+	    /></entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>union</entry>
@@ -671,32 +834,36 @@ memory, set by the application. See <xref linkend="userp" /> for details.
 	    <structname>v4l2_buffer</structname> structure.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>int</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>fd</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>For the single-plane API and when
+<structfield>memory</structfield> is <constant>V4L2_MEMORY_DMABUF</constant> this
+is the file descriptor associated with a DMABUF buffer.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>length</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry></entry>
 	    <entry>Size of the buffer (not the payload) in bytes for the
-	    single-planar API. For the multi-planar API should contain the
-	    number of elements in the <structfield>planes</structfield> array.
+	    single-planar API. For the multi-planar API the application sets
+	    this to the number of elements in the <structfield>planes</structfield>
+	    array. The driver will fill in the actual number of valid elements in
+	    that array.
 	    </entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>input</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved2</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry></entry>
-	    <entry>Some video capture drivers support rapid and
-synchronous video input changes, a function useful for example in
-video surveillance applications. For this purpose applications set the
-<constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_INPUT</constant> flag, and this field to the
-number of a video input as in &v4l2-input; field
-<structfield>index</structfield>.</entry>
+	    <entry>A place holder for future extensions. Applications
+should set this to 0.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry></entry>
-	    <entry>A place holder for future extensions and custom
-(driver defined) buffer types
-<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> and higher. Applications
+	    <entry>A place holder for future extensions. Applications
 should set this to 0.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	</tbody>
@@ -738,7 +905,7 @@ should set this to 0.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry></entry>
-	    <entry>__unsigned long</entry>
+	    <entry>unsigned long</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>userptr</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>When the memory type in the containing &v4l2-buffer; is
 	      <constant>V4L2_MEMORY_USERPTR</constant>, this is a userspace
@@ -746,6 +913,15 @@ should set this to 0.</entry>
 	      </entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>int</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>fd</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>When the memory type in the containing &v4l2-buffer; is
+		<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_DMABUF</constant>, this is a file
+		descriptor associated with a DMABUF buffer, similar to the
+		<structfield>fd</structfield> field in &v4l2-buffer;.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>data_offset</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry></entry>
@@ -827,14 +1003,7 @@ should set this to 0.</entry>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>8</entry>
 	    <entry>Buffer for video output overlay (OSD), see <xref
-		linkend="osd" />. Status: <link
-linkend="experimental">Experimental</link>.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>0x80</entry>
-	  <entry>This and higher values are reserved for custom
-(driver defined) buffer types.</entry>
+		linkend="osd" />.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
@@ -921,13 +1090,6 @@ Drivers set or clear this flag when the <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant>
 ioctl is called.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_INPUT</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>0x0200</entry>
-	    <entry>The <structfield>input</structfield> field is valid.
-Applications set or clear this flag before calling the
-<constant>VIDIOC_QBUF</constant> ioctl.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_PREPARED</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>0x0400</entry>
 	    <entry>The buffer has been prepared for I/O and can be queued by the
@@ -939,7 +1101,7 @@ application. Drivers set or clear this flag when the
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_NO_CACHE_INVALIDATE</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>0x0400</entry>
+	    <entry>0x0800</entry>
 	    <entry>Caches do not have to be invalidated for this buffer.
 Typically applications shall use this flag if the data captured in the buffer
 is not going to be touched by the CPU, instead the buffer will, probably, be
@@ -948,12 +1110,47 @@ passed on to a DMA-capable hardware unit for further processing or output.
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_NO_CACHE_CLEAN</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>0x0800</entry>
+	    <entry>0x1000</entry>
 	    <entry>Caches do not have to be cleaned for this buffer.
 Typically applications shall use this flag for output buffers if the data
 in this buffer has not been created by the CPU but by some DMA-capable unit,
 in which case caches have not been used.</entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_TIMESTAMP_MASK</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0xe000</entry>
+	    <entry>Mask for timestamp types below. To test the
+	    timestamp type, mask out bits not belonging to timestamp
+	    type by performing a logical and operation with buffer
+	    flags and timestamp mask.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_TIMESTAMP_UNKNOWN</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x0000</entry>
+	    <entry>Unknown timestamp type. This type is used by
+	    drivers before Linux 3.9 and may be either monotonic (see
+	    below) or realtime (wall clock). Monotonic clock has been
+	    favoured in embedded systems whereas most of the drivers
+	    use the realtime clock. Either kinds of timestamps are
+	    available in user space via
+	    <function>clock_gettime(2)</function> using clock IDs
+	    <constant>CLOCK_MONOTONIC</constant> and
+	    <constant>CLOCK_REALTIME</constant>, respectively.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_TIMESTAMP_MONOTONIC</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x2000</entry>
+	    <entry>The buffer timestamp has been taken from the
+	    <constant>CLOCK_MONOTONIC</constant> clock. To access the
+	    same clock outside V4L2, use
+	    <function>clock_gettime(2)</function> .</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_TIMESTAMP_COPY</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x4000</entry>
+	    <entry>The CAPTURE buffer timestamp has been taken from the
+	    corresponding OUTPUT buffer. This flag applies only to mem2mem devices.</entry>
+	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
@@ -980,6 +1177,12 @@ pointer</link> I/O.</entry>
 	    <entry>3</entry>
 	    <entry>[to do]</entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_MEMORY_DMABUF</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>4</entry>
+	    <entry>The buffer is used for <link linkend="dmabuf">DMA shared
+buffer</link> I/O.</entry>
+	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/lirc_device_interface.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/lirc_device_interface.xml
index 8d7eb6bf6312..34cada2ca710 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/lirc_device_interface.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/lirc_device_interface.xml
@@ -46,7 +46,9 @@ describing an IR signal are read from the chardev.</para>
 values. Pulses and spaces are only marked implicitly by their position. The
 data must start and end with a pulse, therefore, the data must always include
 an uneven number of samples. The write function must block until the data has
-been transmitted by the hardware.</para>
+been transmitted by the hardware. If more data is provided than the hardware
+can send, the driver returns EINVAL.</para>
+
 </section>
 
 <section id="lirc_ioctl">
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/media-ioc-enum-entities.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/media-ioc-enum-entities.xml
index 576b68b33f2c..116c301656e0 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/media-ioc-enum-entities.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/media-ioc-enum-entities.xml
@@ -272,6 +272,16 @@
 	    <entry><constant>MEDIA_ENT_T_V4L2_SUBDEV_LENS</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>Lens controller</entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>MEDIA_ENT_T_V4L2_SUBDEV_DECODER</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>Video decoder, the basic function of the video decoder is to
+	    accept analogue video from a wide variety of sources such as
+	    broadcast, DVD players, cameras and video cassette recorders, in
+	    either NTSC, PAL or HD format and still occasionally SECAM, separate
+	    it into its component parts, luminance and chrominance, and output
+	    it in some digital video standard, with appropriate embedded timing
+	    signals.</entry>
+	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv12m.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv12m.xml
index 3fd3ce5df270..f3a3d459fcdf 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv12m.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv12m.xml
@@ -1,11 +1,13 @@
-    <refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-NV12M">
+    <refentry>
       <refmeta>
-	<refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M ('NV12M')</refentrytitle>
+	<refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M ('NM12'), V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV21M ('NM21'), V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12MT_16X16</refentrytitle>
 	&manvol;
       </refmeta>
       <refnamediv>
-	<refname> <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M</constant></refname>
-	<refpurpose>Variation of <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12</constant> with planes
+	<refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-NV12M"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M</constant></refname>
+	<refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-NV21M"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV21M</constant></refname>
+	<refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-NV12MT-16X16"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12MT_16X16</constant></refname>
+	<refpurpose>Variation of <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12</constant> and <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV21</constant> with planes
 	  non contiguous in memory. </refpurpose>
       </refnamediv>
       <refsect1>
@@ -22,7 +24,12 @@ The CbCr plane is the same width, in bytes, as the Y plane (and of the image),
 but is half as tall in pixels. Each CbCr pair belongs to four pixels. For example,
 Cb<subscript>0</subscript>/Cr<subscript>0</subscript> belongs to
 Y'<subscript>00</subscript>, Y'<subscript>01</subscript>,
-Y'<subscript>10</subscript>, Y'<subscript>11</subscript>. </para>
+Y'<subscript>10</subscript>, Y'<subscript>11</subscript>.
+<constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12MT_16X16</constant> is the tiled version of
+<constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M</constant> with 16x16 macroblock tiles. Here pixels
+are arranged in 16x16 2D tiles and tiles are arranged in linear order in memory.
+<constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV21M</constant> is the same as <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M</constant>
+except the Cb and Cr bytes are swapped, the CrCb plane starts with a Cr byte.</para>
 
 	<para><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M</constant> is intended to be
 used only in drivers and applications that support the multi-planar API,
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv12mt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv12mt.xml
index 2f82b1da8dfe..8a70a1707b7a 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv12mt.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv12mt.xml
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ into 64x32 macroblocks. The CbCr plane has the same width, in bytes, as the Y
 plane (and the image), but is half as tall in pixels. The chroma plane is also
 grouped into 64x32 macroblocks.</para>
 	<para>Width of the buffer has to be aligned to the multiple of 128, and
-height alignment is 32. Every four adjactent buffers - two horizontally and two
+height alignment is 32. Every four adjacent buffers - two horizontally and two
 vertically are grouped together and are located in memory in Z or flipped Z
 order. </para>
 	<para>Layout of macroblocks in memory is presented in the following
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv16m.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv16m.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c51d5a4cda09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-nv16m.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+    <refentry>
+      <refmeta>
+	<refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV16M ('NM16'), V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV61M ('NM61')</refentrytitle>
+	&manvol;
+      </refmeta>
+      <refnamediv>
+	<refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-NV16M"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV16M</constant></refname>
+	<refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-NV61M"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV61M</constant></refname>
+	<refpurpose>Variation of <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV16</constant> and <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV61</constant> with planes
+	  non contiguous in memory. </refpurpose>
+      </refnamediv>
+      <refsect1>
+	<title>Description</title>
+
+	<para>This is a multi-planar, two-plane version of the YUV 4:2:0 format.
+The three components are separated into two sub-images or planes.
+<constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV16M</constant> differs from <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV16
+</constant> in that the two planes are non-contiguous in memory, i.e. the chroma
+plane does not necessarily immediately follows the luma plane.
+The luminance data occupies the first plane. The Y plane has one byte per pixel.
+In the second plane there is chrominance data with alternating chroma samples.
+The CbCr plane is the same width and height, in bytes, as the Y plane.
+Each CbCr pair belongs to four pixels. For example,
+Cb<subscript>0</subscript>/Cr<subscript>0</subscript> belongs to
+Y'<subscript>00</subscript>, Y'<subscript>01</subscript>,
+Y'<subscript>10</subscript>, Y'<subscript>11</subscript>.
+<constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV61M</constant> is the same as <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV16M</constant>
+except the Cb and Cr bytes are swapped, the CrCb plane starts with a Cr byte.</para>
+
+	<para><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV16M</constant> and
+<constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV61M</constant> are intended to be used only in drivers
+and applications that support the multi-planar API, described in
+<xref linkend="planar-apis"/>. </para>
+
+	<example>
+	  <title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV16M</constant> 4 &times; 4 pixel image</title>
+
+	  <formalpara>
+	    <title>Byte Order.</title>
+	    <para>Each cell is one byte.
+		<informaltable frame="none">
+		<tgroup cols="5" align="center">
+		  <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" />
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start0&nbsp;+&nbsp;0:</entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>00</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>01</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>02</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>03</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start0&nbsp;+&nbsp;4:</entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>10</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>11</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>12</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>13</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start0&nbsp;+&nbsp;8:</entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>20</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>21</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>22</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>23</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start0&nbsp;+&nbsp;12:</entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>30</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>31</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>32</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>33</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start1&nbsp;+&nbsp;0:</entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>00</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>00</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>02</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>02</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start1&nbsp;+&nbsp;4:</entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>10</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>10</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>12</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>12</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start1&nbsp;+&nbsp;8:</entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>20</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>20</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>22</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>22</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start1&nbsp;+&nbsp;12:</entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>30</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>30</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>32</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>32</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		  </tbody>
+		</tgroup>
+		</informaltable>
+	      </para>
+	  </formalpara>
+
+	  <formalpara>
+	    <title>Color Sample Location.</title>
+	    <para>
+		<informaltable frame="none">
+		<tgroup cols="7" align="center">
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry></entry>
+		      <entry>0</entry><entry></entry><entry>1</entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry>2</entry><entry></entry><entry>3</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>0</entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry></entry>
+		      <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>1</entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry></entry>
+		      <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>2</entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry></entry>
+		      <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>3</entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry></entry>
+		      <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry>
+		    </row>
+		  </tbody>
+		</tgroup>
+		</informaltable>
+	      </para>
+	  </formalpara>
+	</example>
+      </refsect1>
+    </refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml
index 7b274092e60c..c1c62a9acc2a 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-    <refentry>
+    <refentry id="pixfmt-srggb10">
       <refmeta>
 	<refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB10 ('RG10'),
 	 V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10 ('BA10'),
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10alaw8.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10alaw8.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..29acc2098cc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10alaw8.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+	<refentry>
+	  <refmeta>
+	    <refentrytitle>
+	      V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10ALAW8 ('aBA8'),
+	      V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG10ALAW8 ('aGA8'),
+	      V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10ALAW8 ('agA8'),
+	      V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB10ALAW8 ('aRA8'),
+	    </refentrytitle>
+	    &manvol;
+	  </refmeta>
+	  <refnamediv>
+	    <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SBGGR10ALAW8">
+	      <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10ALAW8</constant>
+	    </refname>
+	    <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGBRG10ALAW8">
+	      <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG10ALAW8</constant>
+	    </refname>
+	    <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10ALAW8">
+	      <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10ALAW8</constant>
+	    </refname>
+	    <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SRGGB10ALAW8">
+	      <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB10ALAW8</constant>
+	    </refname>
+	    <refpurpose>10-bit Bayer formats compressed to 8 bits</refpurpose>
+	  </refnamediv>
+	  <refsect1>
+	    <title>Description</title>
+	    <para>The following four pixel formats are raw sRGB / Bayer
+	    formats with 10 bits per color compressed to 8 bits each,
+	    using the A-LAW algorithm. Each color component consumes 8
+	    bits of memory. In other respects this format is similar to
+	    <xref linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SRGGB8"></xref>.</para>
+	  </refsect1>
+	</refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10dpcm8.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10dpcm8.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2d3f0b1aefe0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10dpcm8.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+    <refentry id="pixfmt-srggb10dpcm8">
+      <refmeta>
+	<refentrytitle>
+	 V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10DPCM8 ('bBA8'),
+	 V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG10DPCM8 ('bGA8'),
+	 V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10DPCM8 ('BD10'),
+	 V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB10DPCM8 ('bRA8'),
+	 </refentrytitle>
+	&manvol;
+      </refmeta>
+      <refnamediv>
+	<refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SBGGR10DPCM8"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10DPCM8</constant></refname>
+	<refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGBRG10DPCM8"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG10DPCM8</constant></refname>
+	<refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10DPCM8"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10DPCM8</constant></refname>
+	<refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SRGGB10DPCM8"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB10DPCM8</constant></refname>
+	<refpurpose>10-bit Bayer formats compressed to 8 bits</refpurpose>
+      </refnamediv>
+      <refsect1>
+	<title>Description</title>
+
+	<para>The following four pixel formats are raw sRGB / Bayer formats
+	with 10 bits per colour compressed to 8 bits each, using DPCM
+	compression. DPCM, differential pulse-code modulation, is lossy.
+	Each colour component consumes 8 bits of memory. In other respects
+	this format is similar to <xref linkend="pixfmt-srggb10" />.</para>
+
+      </refsect1>
+    </refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-uv8.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-uv8.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c507c1f73cd0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-uv8.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+	<refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-UV8">
+	  <refmeta>
+	    <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_UV8  ('UV8')</refentrytitle>
+	    &manvol;
+	  </refmeta>
+	  <refnamediv>
+	    <refname><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_UV8</constant></refname>
+	    <refpurpose>UV plane interleaved</refpurpose>
+	  </refnamediv>
+	  <refsect1>
+	    <title>Description</title>
+	    <para>In this format there is no Y plane, Only CbCr plane. ie
+	    (UV interleaved)</para>
+	    <example>
+	    <title>
+	      <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_UV8</constant>
+	       pixel image
+	    </title>
+
+	    <formalpara>
+	      <title>Byte Order.</title>
+	      <para>Each cell is one byte.
+	        <informaltable frame="none">
+	        <tgroup cols="5" align="center">
+		  <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" />
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start&nbsp;+&nbsp;0:</entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>00</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>00</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>01</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>01</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start&nbsp;+&nbsp;4:</entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>10</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>10</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>11</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>11</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start&nbsp;+&nbsp;8:</entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>20</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>20</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>21</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>21</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start&nbsp;+&nbsp;12:</entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>30</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>30</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>31</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>31</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		  </tbody>
+		</tgroup>
+		</informaltable>
+	      </para>
+	      </formalpara>
+	    </example>
+	  </refsect1>
+	</refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-yuv420m.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-yuv420m.xml
index 9957863daf18..60308f1eefdf 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-yuv420m.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-yuv420m.xml
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
     <refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-YUV420M">
       <refmeta>
-	<refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUV420M ('YU12M')</refentrytitle>
+	<refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUV420M ('YM12')</refentrytitle>
 	&manvol;
       </refmeta>
       <refnamediv>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-yvu420m.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-yvu420m.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2330667907c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt-yvu420m.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+    <refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-YVU420M">
+      <refmeta>
+	<refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVU420M ('YM21')</refentrytitle>
+	&manvol;
+      </refmeta>
+      <refnamediv>
+	<refname> <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVU420M</constant></refname>
+	<refpurpose>Variation of <constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVU420</constant>
+	  with planes non contiguous in memory. </refpurpose>
+      </refnamediv>
+
+      <refsect1>
+	<title>Description</title>
+
+	<para>This is a multi-planar format, as opposed to a packed format.
+The three components are separated into three sub-images or planes.
+
+The Y plane is first. The Y plane has one byte per pixel. The Cr data
+constitutes the second plane which is half the width and half
+the height of the Y plane (and of the image). Each Cr belongs to four
+pixels, a two-by-two square of the image. For example,
+Cr<subscript>0</subscript> belongs to Y'<subscript>00</subscript>,
+Y'<subscript>01</subscript>, Y'<subscript>10</subscript>, and
+Y'<subscript>11</subscript>. The Cb data, just like the Cr plane, constitutes
+the third plane. </para>
+
+	<para>If the Y plane has pad bytes after each row, then the Cr
+and Cb planes have half as many pad bytes after their rows. In other
+words, two Cx rows (including padding) is exactly as long as one Y row
+(including padding).</para>
+
+	<para><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVU420M</constant> is intended to be
+used only in drivers and applications that support the multi-planar API,
+described in <xref linkend="planar-apis"/>. </para>
+
+	<example>
+	  <title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVU420M</constant> 4 &times; 4
+pixel image</title>
+
+	  <formalpara>
+	    <title>Byte Order.</title>
+	    <para>Each cell is one byte.
+		<informaltable frame="none">
+		<tgroup cols="5" align="center">
+		  <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" />
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start0&nbsp;+&nbsp;0:</entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>00</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>01</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>02</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>03</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start0&nbsp;+&nbsp;4:</entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>10</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>11</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>12</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>13</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start0&nbsp;+&nbsp;8:</entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>20</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>21</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>22</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>23</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start0&nbsp;+&nbsp;12:</entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>30</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>31</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>32</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Y'<subscript>33</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row><entry></entry></row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start1&nbsp;+&nbsp;0:</entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>00</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>01</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start1&nbsp;+&nbsp;2:</entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>10</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cr<subscript>11</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row><entry></entry></row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start2&nbsp;+&nbsp;0:</entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>00</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>01</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>start2&nbsp;+&nbsp;2:</entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>10</subscript></entry>
+		      <entry>Cb<subscript>11</subscript></entry>
+		    </row>
+		  </tbody>
+		</tgroup>
+		</informaltable>
+	      </para>
+	  </formalpara>
+
+	  <formalpara>
+	    <title>Color Sample Location.</title>
+	    <para>
+		<informaltable frame="none">
+		<tgroup cols="7" align="center">
+		  <tbody valign="top">
+		    <row>
+		      <entry></entry>
+		      <entry>0</entry><entry></entry><entry>1</entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry>2</entry><entry></entry><entry>3</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>0</entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry></entry>
+		      <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>1</entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>2</entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry></entry>
+		      <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry>
+		    </row>
+		    <row>
+		      <entry>3</entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry>
+		      <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry>
+		    </row>
+		  </tbody>
+		</tgroup>
+		</informaltable>
+	      </para>
+	  </formalpara>
+	</example>
+      </refsect1>
+    </refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml
index 31eaae2469f9..72d72bd67d0a 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml
@@ -391,9 +391,9 @@ clamp (double x)
 	else               return r;
 }
 
-y1 = (255 / 219.0) * (Y1 - 16);
-pb = (255 / 224.0) * (Cb - 128);
-pr = (255 / 224.0) * (Cr - 128);
+y1 = (Y1 - 16) / 219.0;
+pb = (Cb - 128) / 224.0;
+pr = (Cr - 128) / 224.0;
 
 r = 1.0 * y1 + 0     * pb + 1.402 * pr;
 g = 1.0 * y1 - 0.344 * pb - 0.714 * pr;
@@ -673,6 +673,8 @@ access the palette, this must be done with ioctls of the Linux framebuffer API.<
     &sub-srggb8;
     &sub-sbggr16;
     &sub-srggb10;
+    &sub-srggb10alaw8;
+    &sub-srggb10dpcm8;
     &sub-srggb12;
   </section>
 
@@ -700,6 +702,7 @@ information.</para>
     &sub-y12;
     &sub-y10b;
     &sub-y16;
+    &sub-uv8;
     &sub-yuyv;
     &sub-uyvy;
     &sub-yvyu;
@@ -707,6 +710,7 @@ information.</para>
     &sub-y41p;
     &sub-yuv420;
     &sub-yuv420m;
+    &sub-yvu420m;
     &sub-yuv410;
     &sub-yuv422p;
     &sub-yuv411p;
@@ -714,6 +718,7 @@ information.</para>
     &sub-nv12m;
     &sub-nv12mt;
     &sub-nv16;
+    &sub-nv16m;
     &sub-nv24;
     &sub-m420;
   </section>
@@ -756,6 +761,11 @@ extended control <constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE</constant>, see
 		<entry>'AVC1'</entry>
 		<entry>H264 video elementary stream without start codes.</entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-H264-MVC">
+		<entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_H264_MVC</constant></entry>
+		<entry>'MVC'</entry>
+		<entry>H264 MVC video elementary stream.</entry>
+	  </row>
 	  <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-H263">
 		<entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_H263</constant></entry>
 		<entry>'H263'</entry>
@@ -791,6 +801,11 @@ extended control <constant>V4L2_CID_MPEG_STREAM_TYPE</constant>, see
 		<entry>'VC1L'</entry>
 		<entry>VC1, SMPTE 421M Annex L compliant stream.</entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-VP8">
+		<entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_VP8</constant></entry>
+		<entry>'VP8'</entry>
+		<entry>VP8 video elementary stream.</entry>
+	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
@@ -876,11 +891,6 @@ kernel sources in the file <filename>Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/README.hm
 	    <entry>'S561'</entry>
 	    <entry>Compressed GBRG Bayer format used by the gspca driver.</entry>
 	  </row>
-	  <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10DPCM8">
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10DPCM8</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>'DB10'</entry>
-	    <entry>10 bit raw Bayer DPCM compressed to 8 bits.</entry>
-	  </row>
 	  <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-PAC207">
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_PAC207</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>'P207'</entry>
@@ -990,15 +1000,43 @@ http://www.thedirks.org/winnov/</ulink></para></entry>
 	  <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y4">
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y4</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>'Y04 '</entry>
-	    <entry>Old 4-bit greyscale format. Only the least significant 4 bits of each byte are used,
+	    <entry>Old 4-bit greyscale format. Only the most significant 4 bits of each byte are used,
 the other bits are set to 0.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y6">
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y6</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>'Y06 '</entry>
-	    <entry>Old 6-bit greyscale format. Only the least significant 6 bits of each byte are used,
+	    <entry>Old 6-bit greyscale format. Only the most significant 6 bits of each byte are used,
 the other bits are set to 0.</entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-S5C-UYVY-JPG">
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_S5C_UYVY_JPG</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>'S5CI'</entry>
+	    <entry>Two-planar format used by Samsung S5C73MX cameras. The
+first plane contains interleaved JPEG and UYVY image data, followed by meta data
+in form of an array of offsets to the UYVY data blocks. The actual pointer array
+follows immediately the interleaved JPEG/UYVY data, the number of entries in
+this array equals the height of the UYVY image. Each entry is a 4-byte unsigned
+integer in big endian order and it's an offset to a single pixel line of the
+UYVY image. The first plane can start either with JPEG or UYVY data chunk. The
+size of a single UYVY block equals the UYVY image's width multiplied by 2. The
+size of a JPEG chunk depends on the image and can vary with each line.
+<para>The second plane, at an offset of 4084 bytes, contains a 4-byte offset to
+the pointer array in the first plane. This offset is followed by a 4-byte value
+indicating size of the pointer array. All numbers in the second plane are also
+in big endian order. Remaining data in the second plane is undefined. The
+information in the second plane allows to easily find location of the pointer
+array, which can be different for each frame. The size of the pointer array is
+constant for given UYVY image height.</para>
+<para>In order to extract UYVY and JPEG frames an application can initially set
+a data pointer to the start of first plane and then add an offset from the first
+entry of the pointers table. Such a pointer indicates start of an UYVY image
+pixel line. Whole UYVY line can be copied to a separate buffer. These steps
+should be repeated for each line, i.e. the number of entries in the pointer
+array. Anything what's in between the UYVY lines is JPEG data and should be
+concatenated to form the JPEG stream. </para>
+</entry>
+	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selection-api.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selection-api.xml
index 2f0bdb4d5551..4c238ce068b0 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selection-api.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selection-api.xml
@@ -40,6 +40,7 @@ cropping and composing rectangles have the same size.</para>
     <section>
       <title>Selection targets</title>
 
+      <para>
       <figure id="sel-targets-capture">
 	<title>Cropping and composing targets</title>
 	<mediaobject>
@@ -52,6 +53,10 @@ cropping and composing rectangles have the same size.</para>
 	  </textobject>
 	</mediaobject>
       </figure>
+      </para>
+
+      <para>See <xref linkend="v4l2-selection-targets" /> for more
+    information.</para>
     </section>
 
   <section>
@@ -70,7 +75,7 @@ cropping/composing rectangles may have to be aligned, and both the source and
 the sink may have arbitrary upper and lower size limits. Therefore, as usual,
 drivers are expected to adjust the requested parameters and return the actual
 values selected. An application can control the rounding behaviour using <link
-linkend="v4l2-sel-flags"> constraint flags </link>.</para>
+linkend="v4l2-selection-flags"> constraint flags </link>.</para>
 
    <section>
 
@@ -87,7 +92,7 @@ top/left corner at position <constant> (0,0) </constant>.  The rectangle's
 coordinates are expressed in pixels.</para>
 
 <para>The top left corner, width and height of the source rectangle, that is
-the area actually sampled, is given by the <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP_ACTIVE
+the area actually sampled, is given by the <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP
 </constant> target. It uses the same coordinate system as <constant>
 V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP_BOUNDS </constant>. The active cropping area must lie
 completely inside the capture boundaries. The driver may further adjust the
@@ -107,13 +112,13 @@ height are equal to the image size set by <constant> VIDIOC_S_FMT </constant>.
 </para>
 
 <para>The part of a buffer into which the image is inserted by the hardware is
-controlled by the <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_ACTIVE </constant> target.
+controlled by the <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE </constant> target.
 The rectangle's coordinates are also expressed in the same coordinate system as
 the bounds rectangle. The composing rectangle must lie completely inside bounds
 rectangle. The driver must adjust the composing rectangle to fit to the
 bounding limits. Moreover, the driver can perform other adjustments according
 to hardware limitations. The application can control rounding behaviour using
-<link linkend="v4l2-sel-flags"> constraint flags </link>.</para>
+<link linkend="v4l2-selection-flags"> constraint flags </link>.</para>
 
 <para>For capture devices the default composing rectangle is queried using
 <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_DEFAULT </constant>. It is usually equal to the
@@ -121,7 +126,7 @@ bounding rectangle.</para>
 
 <para>The part of a buffer that is modified by the hardware is given by
 <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_PADDED </constant>. It contains all pixels
-defined using <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_ACTIVE </constant> plus all
+defined using <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE </constant> plus all
 padding data modified by hardware during insertion process. All pixels outside
 this rectangle <emphasis>must not</emphasis> be changed by the hardware. The
 content of pixels that lie inside the padded area but outside active area is
@@ -149,7 +154,7 @@ specified using <constant> VIDIOC_S_FMT </constant> ioctl.</para>
 
 <para>The top left corner, width and height of the source rectangle, that is
 the area from which image date are processed by the hardware, is given by the
-<constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP_ACTIVE </constant>. Its coordinates are expressed
+<constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP </constant>. Its coordinates are expressed
 in in the same coordinate system as the bounds rectangle. The active cropping
 area must lie completely inside the crop boundaries and the driver may further
 adjust the requested size and/or position according to hardware
@@ -161,7 +166,7 @@ bounding rectangle.</para>
 
 <para>The part of a video signal or graphics display where the image is
 inserted by the hardware is controlled by <constant>
-V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_ACTIVE </constant> target.  The rectangle's coordinates
+V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE </constant> target.  The rectangle's coordinates
 are expressed in pixels. The composing rectangle must lie completely inside the
 bounds rectangle.  The driver must adjust the area to fit to the bounding
 limits.  Moreover, the driver can perform other adjustments according to
@@ -180,17 +185,17 @@ such a padded area is driver-dependent feature not covered by this document.
 Driver developers are encouraged to keep padded rectangle equal to active one.
 The padded target is accessed by the <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_PADDED
 </constant> identifier.  It must contain all pixels from the <constant>
-V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_ACTIVE </constant> target.</para>
+V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE </constant> target.</para>
 
    </section>
 
    <section>
 
-     <title>Scaling control.</title>
+     <title>Scaling control</title>
 
 <para>An application can detect if scaling is performed by comparing the width
-and the height of rectangles obtained using <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP_ACTIVE
-</constant> and <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_ACTIVE </constant> targets. If
+and the height of rectangles obtained using <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP
+</constant> and <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE </constant> targets. If
 these are not equal then the scaling is applied. The application can compute
 the scaling ratios using these values.</para>
 
@@ -200,7 +205,7 @@ the scaling ratios using these values.</para>
 
   <section>
 
-    <title>Comparison with old cropping API.</title>
+    <title>Comparison with old cropping API</title>
 
 <para>The selection API was introduced to cope with deficiencies of previous
 <link linkend="crop"> API </link>, that was designed to control simple capture
@@ -212,18 +217,17 @@ composing and cropping operations by setting the appropriate targets.  The V4L2
 API lacks any support for composing to and cropping from an image inside a
 memory buffer.  The application could configure a capture device to fill only a
 part of an image by abusing V4L2 API.  Cropping a smaller image from a larger
-one is achieved by setting the field <structfield>
-&v4l2-pix-format;::bytesperline </structfield>.  Introducing an image offsets
-could be done by modifying field <structfield> &v4l2-buffer;::m:userptr
-</structfield> before calling <constant> VIDIOC_QBUF </constant>. Those
+one is achieved by setting the field
+&v4l2-pix-format;<structfield>::bytesperline</structfield>.  Introducing an image offsets
+could be done by modifying field &v4l2-buffer;<structfield>::m_userptr</structfield>
+before calling <constant> VIDIOC_QBUF </constant>. Those
 operations should be avoided because they are not portable (endianness), and do
 not work for macroblock and Bayer formats and mmap buffers.  The selection API
 deals with configuration of buffer cropping/composing in a clear, intuitive and
 portable way.  Next, with the selection API the concepts of the padded target
-and constraints flags are introduced.  Finally, <structname> &v4l2-crop;
-</structname> and <structname> &v4l2-cropcap; </structname> have no reserved
-fields. Therefore there is no way to extend their functionality.  The new
-<structname> &v4l2-selection; </structname> provides a lot of place for future
+and constraints flags are introduced.  Finally, &v4l2-crop; and &v4l2-cropcap;
+have no reserved fields. Therefore there is no way to extend their functionality.
+The new &v4l2-selection; provides a lot of place for future
 extensions.  Driver developers are encouraged to implement only selection API.
 The former cropping API would be simulated using the new one. </para>
 
@@ -248,7 +252,7 @@ area)</para>
 	ret = ioctl(fd, &VIDIOC-G-SELECTION;, &amp;sel);
 	if (ret)
 		exit(-1);
-	sel.target = V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP_ACTIVE;
+	sel.target = V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP;
 	ret = ioctl(fd, &VIDIOC-S-SELECTION;, &amp;sel);
 	if (ret)
 		exit(-1);
@@ -277,7 +281,7 @@ area)</para>
 	r.left = sel.r.width / 4;
 	r.top = sel.r.height / 4;
 	sel.r = r;
-	sel.target = V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_ACTIVE;
+	sel.target = V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE;
 	sel.flags = V4L2_SEL_FLAG_LE;
 	ret = ioctl(fd, &VIDIOC-S-SELECTION;, &amp;sel);
 	if (ret)
@@ -294,11 +298,11 @@ V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT </constant> for other devices</para>
 
 	&v4l2-selection; compose = {
 		.type = V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT,
-		.target = V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_ACTIVE,
+		.target = V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE,
 	};
 	&v4l2-selection; crop = {
 		.type = V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT,
-		.target = V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP_ACTIVE,
+		.target = V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP,
 	};
 	double hscale, vscale;
 
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selections-common.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selections-common.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7502f784b8cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selections-common.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+<section id="v4l2-selections-common">
+
+  <title>Common selection definitions</title>
+
+  <para>While the <link linkend="selection-api">V4L2 selection
+  API</link> and <link linkend="v4l2-subdev-selections">V4L2 subdev
+  selection APIs</link> are very similar, there's one fundamental
+  difference between the two. On sub-device API, the selection
+  rectangle refers to the media bus format, and is bound to a
+  sub-device's pad. On the V4L2 interface the selection rectangles
+  refer to the in-memory pixel format.</para>
+
+  <para>This section defines the common definitions of the
+  selection interfaces on the two APIs.</para>
+
+  <section id="v4l2-selection-targets">
+
+    <title>Selection targets</title>
+
+    <para>The precise meaning of the selection targets may be
+    dependent on which of the two interfaces they are used.</para>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-selection-targets-table">
+    <title>Selection target definitions</title>
+      <tgroup cols="5">
+	<colspec colname="c1" />
+	<colspec colname="c2" />
+	<colspec colname="c3" />
+	<colspec colname="c4" />
+	<colspec colname="c5" />
+	&cs-def;
+	<thead>
+	  <row rowsep="1">
+	    <entry align="left">Target name</entry>
+	    <entry align="left">id</entry>
+	    <entry align="left">Definition</entry>
+	    <entry align="left">Valid for V4L2</entry>
+	    <entry align="left">Valid for V4L2 subdev</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</thead>
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x0000</entry>
+	    <entry>Crop rectangle. Defines the cropped area.</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP_DEFAULT</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x0001</entry>
+	    <entry>Suggested cropping rectangle that covers the "whole picture".</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	    <entry>No</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP_BOUNDS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x0002</entry>
+	    <entry>Bounds of the crop rectangle. All valid crop
+	    rectangles fit inside the crop bounds rectangle.
+	    </entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x0100</entry>
+	    <entry>Compose rectangle. Used to configure scaling
+	    and composition.</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_DEFAULT</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x0101</entry>
+	    <entry>Suggested composition rectangle that covers the "whole picture".</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	    <entry>No</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_BOUNDS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x0102</entry>
+	    <entry>Bounds of the compose rectangle. All valid compose
+	    rectangles fit inside the compose bounds rectangle.</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_PADDED</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x0103</entry>
+	    <entry>The active area and all padding pixels that are inserted or
+	    modified by hardware.</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	    <entry>No</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+  </section>
+
+  <section id="v4l2-selection-flags">
+
+    <title>Selection flags</title>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-selection-flags-table">
+    <title>Selection flag definitions</title>
+      <tgroup cols="5">
+	<colspec colname="c1" />
+	<colspec colname="c2" />
+	<colspec colname="c3" />
+	<colspec colname="c4" />
+	<colspec colname="c5" />
+	&cs-def;
+	<thead>
+	<row rowsep="1">
+	    <entry align="left">Flag name</entry>
+	    <entry align="left">id</entry>
+	    <entry align="left">Definition</entry>
+	    <entry align="left">Valid for V4L2</entry>
+	    <entry align="left">Valid for V4L2 subdev</entry>
+	</row>
+	</thead>
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_FLAG_GE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>(1 &lt;&lt; 0)</entry>
+	    <entry>Suggest the driver it should choose greater or
+	    equal rectangle (in size) than was requested. Albeit the
+	    driver may choose a lesser size, it will only do so due to
+	    hardware limitations. Without this flag (and
+	    <constant>V4L2_SEL_FLAG_LE</constant>) the
+	    behaviour is to choose the closest possible
+	    rectangle.</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_FLAG_LE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>(1 &lt;&lt; 1)</entry>
+	    <entry>Suggest the driver it
+	    should choose lesser or equal rectangle (in size) than was
+	    requested. Albeit the driver may choose a greater size, it
+	    will only do so due to hardware limitations.</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_FLAG_KEEP_CONFIG</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>(1 &lt;&lt; 2)</entry>
+	    <entry>The configuration must not be propagated to any
+	    further processing steps. If this flag is not given, the
+	    configuration is propagated inside the subdevice to all
+	    further processing steps.</entry>
+	    <entry>No</entry>
+	    <entry>Yes</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+  </section>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-formats.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-formats.xml
index 49c532ebbbbe..f72c1cc93a9b 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-formats.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-formats.xml
@@ -93,19 +93,43 @@
 
       <table pgwide="0" frame="none" id="v4l2-mbus-pixelcode-rgb">
 	<title>RGB formats</title>
-	<tgroup cols="11">
+	<tgroup cols="27">
 	  <colspec colname="id" align="left" />
 	  <colspec colname="code" align="center"/>
 	  <colspec colname="bit" />
-	  <colspec colnum="4" colname="b07" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="5" colname="b06" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="6" colname="b05" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="7" colname="b04" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="8" colname="b03" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="9" colname="b02" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="10" colname="b01" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="11" colname="b00" align="center" />
-	  <spanspec namest="b07" nameend="b00" spanname="b0" />
+	  <colspec colnum="4" colname="b31" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="5" colname="b20" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="6" colname="b29" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="7" colname="b28" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="8" colname="b27" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="9" colname="b26" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="10" colname="b25" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="11" colname="b24" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="12" colname="b23" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="13" colname="b22" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="14" colname="b21" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="15" colname="b20" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="16" colname="b19" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="17" colname="b18" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="18" colname="b17" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="19" colname="b16" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="20" colname="b15" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="21" colname="b14" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="22" colname="b13" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="23" colname="b12" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="24" colname="b11" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="25" colname="b10" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="26" colname="b09" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="27" colname="b08" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="28" colname="b07" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="29" colname="b06" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="30" colname="b05" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="31" colname="b04" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="32" colname="b03" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="33" colname="b02" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="34" colname="b01" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="35" colname="b00" align="center" />
+	  <spanspec namest="b31" nameend="b00" spanname="b0" />
 	  <thead>
 	    <row>
 	      <entry>Identifier</entry>
@@ -117,6 +141,30 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry>Bit</entry>
+	      <entry>31</entry>
+	      <entry>30</entry>
+	      <entry>29</entry>
+	      <entry>28</entry>
+	      <entry>27</entry>
+	      <entry>26</entry>
+	      <entry>25</entry>
+	      <entry>24</entry>
+	      <entry>23</entry>
+	      <entry>22</entry>
+	      <entry>21</entry>
+	      <entry>20</entry>
+	      <entry>19</entry>
+	      <entry>18</entry>
+	      <entry>17</entry>
+	      <entry>16</entry>
+	      <entry>15</entry>
+	      <entry>14</entry>
+	      <entry>13</entry>
+	      <entry>12</entry>
+	      <entry>11</entry>
+	      <entry>10</entry>
+	      <entry>9</entry>
+	      <entry>8</entry>
 	      <entry>7</entry>
 	      <entry>6</entry>
 	      <entry>5</entry>
@@ -132,6 +180,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB444_2X8_PADHI_BE</entry>
 	      <entry>0x1001</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>0</entry>
 	      <entry>0</entry>
 	      <entry>0</entry>
@@ -145,6 +194,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
@@ -158,6 +208,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB444_2X8_PADHI_LE</entry>
 	      <entry>0x1002</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
@@ -171,6 +222,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>0</entry>
 	      <entry>0</entry>
 	      <entry>0</entry>
@@ -184,6 +236,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB555_2X8_PADHI_BE</entry>
 	      <entry>0x1003</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>0</entry>
 	      <entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
@@ -197,6 +250,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
@@ -210,6 +264,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB555_2X8_PADHI_LE</entry>
 	      <entry>0x1004</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
@@ -223,6 +278,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>0</entry>
 	      <entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
@@ -236,6 +292,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_BGR565_2X8_BE</entry>
 	      <entry>0x1005</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>b<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>b<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>b<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
@@ -249,6 +306,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
@@ -262,6 +320,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_BGR565_2X8_LE</entry>
 	      <entry>0x1006</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
@@ -275,6 +334,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>b<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>b<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>b<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
@@ -288,6 +348,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB565_2X8_BE</entry>
 	      <entry>0x1007</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>r<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
@@ -301,6 +362,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
@@ -314,6 +376,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB565_2X8_LE</entry>
 	      <entry>0x1008</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
@@ -327,14 +390,178 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
+	      <entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB666-1X18">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB666_1X18</entry>
+	      <entry>0x1009</entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-14;
+	      <entry>r<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB888-1X24">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB888_1X24</entry>
+	      <entry>0x100a</entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-8;
+	      <entry>r<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB888-2X12-BE">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB888_2X12_BE</entry>
+	      <entry>0x100b</entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-20;
+	      <entry>r<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>r<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-20;
 	      <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB888-2X12-LE">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB888_2X12_LE</entry>
+	      <entry>0x100c</entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-20;
+	      <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-20;
+	      <entry>r<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-ARGB888-1X32">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_ARGB888_1X32</entry>
+	      <entry>0x100d</entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
 	    </row>
 	  </tbody>
 	</tgroup>
@@ -353,9 +580,9 @@
 	<listitem><para>The number of bits per pixel component. All components are
 	transferred on the same number of bits. Common values are 8, 10 and 12.</para>
 	</listitem>
-	<listitem><para>If the pixel components are DPCM-compressed, a mention of the
-	DPCM compression and the number of bits per compressed pixel component.</para>
-	</listitem>
+	<listitem><para>The compression (optional). If the pixel components are
+	ALAW- or DPCM-compressed, a mention of the compression scheme and the
+	number of bits per compressed pixel component.</para></listitem>
 	<listitem><para>The number of bus samples per pixel. Pixels that are wider than
 	the bus width must be transferred in multiple samples. Common values are
 	1 and 2.</para></listitem>
@@ -504,6 +731,74 @@
 	      <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
 	    </row>
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SBGGR10-ALAW8-1X8">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SBGGR10_ALAW8_1X8</entry>
+	      <entry>0x3015</entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGBRG10-ALAW8-1X8">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGBRG10_ALAW8_1X8</entry>
+	      <entry>0x3016</entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGRBG10-ALAW8-1X8">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGRBG10_ALAW8_1X8</entry>
+	      <entry>0x3017</entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SRGGB10-ALAW8-1X8">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SRGGB10_ALAW8_1X8</entry>
+	      <entry>0x3018</entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
 	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SBGGR10-DPCM8-1X8">
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SBGGR10_DPCM8_1X8</entry>
 	      <entry>0x300b</entry>
@@ -853,10 +1148,16 @@
       <title>Packed YUV Formats</title>
 
       <para>Those data formats transfer pixel data as (possibly downsampled) Y, U
-      and V components. The format code is made of the following information.
+      and V components. Some formats include dummy bits in some of their samples
+      and are collectively referred to as "YDYC" (Y-Dummy-Y-Chroma) formats.
+      One cannot rely on the values of these dummy bits as those are undefined.
+      </para>
+      <para>The format code is made of the following information.
       <itemizedlist>
 	<listitem><para>The Y, U and V components order code, as transferred on the
-	bus. Possible values are YUYV, UYVY, YVYU and VYUY.</para></listitem>
+	bus. Possible values are YUYV, UYVY, YVYU and VYUY for formats with no
+	dummy bit, and YDYUYDYV, YDYVYDYU, YUYDYVYD and YVYDYUYD for YDYC formats.
+	</para></listitem>
 	<listitem><para>The number of bits per pixel component. All components are
 	transferred on the same number of bits. Common values are 8, 10 and 12.</para>
 	</listitem>
@@ -877,7 +1178,22 @@
       U, Y, V, Y order will be named <constant>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY8_2X8</constant>.
       </para>
 
-      <para>The following table lisst existing packet YUV formats.</para>
+	<para><xref linkend="v4l2-mbus-pixelcode-yuv8"/> list existing packet YUV
+	formats and describes the organization of each pixel data in each sample.
+	When a format pattern is split across multiple samples each of the samples
+	in the pattern is described.</para>
+
+	<para>The role of each bit transferred over the bus is identified by one
+	of the following codes.</para>
+
+	<itemizedlist>
+	   <listitem><para>y<subscript>x</subscript> for luma component bit number x</para></listitem>
+	   <listitem><para>u<subscript>x</subscript> for blue chroma component bit number x</para></listitem>
+	   <listitem><para>v<subscript>x</subscript> for red chroma component bit number x</para></listitem>
+	   <listitem><para>a<subscript>x</subscript> for alpha component bit number x</para></listitem>
+	   <listitem><para>- for non-available bits (for positions higher than the bus width)</para></listitem>
+	   <listitem><para>d for dummy bits</para></listitem>
+	</itemizedlist>
 
       <table pgwide="0" frame="none" id="v4l2-mbus-pixelcode-yuv8">
 	<title>YUV Formats</title>
@@ -885,27 +1201,39 @@
 	  <colspec colname="id" align="left" />
 	  <colspec colname="code" align="center"/>
 	  <colspec colname="bit" />
-	  <colspec colnum="4" colname="b19" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="5" colname="b18" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="6" colname="b17" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="7" colname="b16" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="8" colname="b15" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="9" colname="b14" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="10" colname="b13" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="11" colname="b12" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="12" colname="b11" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="13" colname="b10" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="14" colname="b09" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="15" colname="b08" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="16" colname="b07" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="17" colname="b06" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="18" colname="b05" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="19" colname="b04" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="20" colname="b03" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="21" colname="b02" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="22" colname="b01" align="center" />
-	  <colspec colnum="23" colname="b00" align="center" />
-	  <spanspec namest="b19" nameend="b00" spanname="b0" />
+	  <colspec colnum="4" colname="b31" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="5" colname="b20" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="6" colname="b29" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="7" colname="b28" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="8" colname="b27" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="9" colname="b26" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="10" colname="b25" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="11" colname="b24" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="12" colname="b23" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="13" colname="b22" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="14" colname="b21" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="15" colname="b20" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="16" colname="b19" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="17" colname="b18" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="18" colname="b17" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="19" colname="b16" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="20" colname="b15" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="21" colname="b14" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="22" colname="b13" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="23" colname="b12" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="24" colname="b11" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="25" colname="b10" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="26" colname="b09" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="27" colname="b08" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="28" colname="b07" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="29" colname="b06" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="30" colname="b05" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="31" colname="b04" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="32" colname="b03" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="33" colname="b02" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="34" colname="b01" align="center" />
+	  <colspec colnum="35" colname="b00" align="center" />
+	  <spanspec namest="b31" nameend="b00" spanname="b0" />
 	  <thead>
 	    <row>
 	      <entry>Identifier</entry>
@@ -917,6 +1245,18 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry>Bit</entry>
+	      <entry>31</entry>
+	      <entry>30</entry>
+	      <entry>29</entry>
+	      <entry>28</entry>
+	      <entry>27</entry>
+	      <entry>26</entry>
+	      <entry>25</entry>
+	      <entry>24</entry>
+	      <entry>23</entry>
+	      <entry>22</entry>
+	      <entry>21</entry>
+	      <entry>10</entry>
 	      <entry>19</entry>
 	      <entry>18</entry>
 	      <entry>17</entry>
@@ -944,18 +1284,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_Y8_1X8</entry>
 	      <entry>0x2001</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -965,22 +1294,39 @@
 	      <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
 	    </row>
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-UV8-1X8">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UV8_1X8</entry>
+	      <entry>0x2015</entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
+	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
+	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
 	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-UYVY8-1_5X8">
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY8_1_5X8</entry>
 	      <entry>0x2002</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -994,18 +1340,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1019,18 +1354,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1044,18 +1368,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1069,18 +1382,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1094,18 +1396,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1119,18 +1410,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_VYUY8_1_5X8</entry>
 	      <entry>0x2003</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1144,18 +1424,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1169,18 +1438,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1194,18 +1452,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1219,18 +1466,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1244,18 +1480,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1269,18 +1494,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV8_1_5X8</entry>
 	      <entry>0x2004</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1294,18 +1508,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1319,18 +1522,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1344,18 +1536,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1369,18 +1550,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1394,18 +1564,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1419,18 +1578,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YVYU8_1_5X8</entry>
 	      <entry>0x2005</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1444,18 +1592,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1469,18 +1606,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1494,18 +1620,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1519,18 +1634,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1544,18 +1648,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1569,18 +1662,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY8_2X8</entry>
 	      <entry>0x2006</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1594,18 +1676,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1619,18 +1690,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1644,18 +1704,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1669,18 +1718,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_VYUY8_2X8</entry>
 	      <entry>0x2007</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1694,18 +1732,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1719,18 +1746,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1744,18 +1760,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1769,18 +1774,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV8_2X8</entry>
 	      <entry>0x2008</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1794,18 +1788,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1819,18 +1802,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1844,18 +1816,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1869,18 +1830,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YVYU8_2X8</entry>
 	      <entry>0x2009</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1894,18 +1844,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1919,18 +1858,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1944,18 +1872,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-24;
 	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -1969,16 +1886,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_Y10_1X10</entry>
 	      <entry>0x200a</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-22;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
@@ -1994,16 +1902,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV10_2X10</entry>
 	      <entry>0x200b</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-22;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
@@ -2019,16 +1918,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-22;
 	      <entry>u<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
@@ -2044,16 +1934,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-22;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
@@ -2069,16 +1950,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-22;
 	      <entry>v<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
@@ -2094,16 +1966,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YVYU10_2X10</entry>
 	      <entry>0x200c</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-22;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
@@ -2119,16 +1982,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-22;
 	      <entry>v<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
@@ -2144,16 +1998,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-22;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
@@ -2169,16 +2014,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-22;
 	      <entry>u<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
@@ -2194,14 +2030,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_Y12_1X12</entry>
 	      <entry>0x2013</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-20;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>11</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>10</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
@@ -2219,10 +2048,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY8_1X16</entry>
 	      <entry>0x200f</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-16;
 	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -2244,10 +2070,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-16;
 	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -2269,10 +2092,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_VYUY8_1X16</entry>
 	      <entry>0x2010</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-16;
 	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -2294,10 +2114,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-16;
 	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -2319,10 +2136,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV8_1X16</entry>
 	      <entry>0x2011</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-16;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -2344,10 +2158,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-16;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -2369,10 +2180,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YVYU8_1X16</entry>
 	      <entry>0x2012</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-16;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -2394,10 +2202,51 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
-	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      &dash-ent-16;
+	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YDYUYDYV8-1X16">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YDYUYDYV8_1X16</entry>
+	      <entry>0x2014</entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-16;
+	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-16;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
@@ -2415,10 +2264,55 @@
 	      <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
 	    </row>
+	    <row>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-16;
+	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	      <entry>d</entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-16;
+	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
 	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YUYV10-1X20">
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV10_1X20</entry>
 	      <entry>0x200d</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-12;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
@@ -2444,6 +2338,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-12;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
@@ -2469,6 +2364,7 @@
 	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YVYU10_1X20</entry>
 	      <entry>0x200e</entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-12;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
@@ -2494,6 +2390,7 @@
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
 	      <entry></entry>
+	      &dash-ent-12;
 	      <entry>y<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
@@ -2515,6 +2412,80 @@
 	      <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
 	      <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
 	    </row>
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YUV10-1X30">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUV10_1X30</entry>
+	      <entry>0x2016</entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>-</entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>9</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>8</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-AYUV8-1X32">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_AYUV8_1X32</entry>
+	      <entry>0x2017</entry>
+	      <entry></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>a<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>7</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>6</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
+	      <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
+	    </row>
 	  </tbody>
 	</tgroup>
       </table>
@@ -2565,5 +2536,49 @@
 	</tgroup>
       </table>
     </section>
+
+    <section id="v4l2-mbus-vendor-spec-fmts">
+      <title>Vendor and Device Specific Formats</title>
+
+      <note>
+	<title>Experimental</title>
+	<para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link>
+interface and may change in the future.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <para>This section lists complex data formats that are either vendor or
+	device specific.
+      </para>
+
+      <para>The following table lists the existing vendor and device specific
+	formats.</para>
+
+      <table pgwide="0" frame="none" id="v4l2-mbus-pixelcode-vendor-specific">
+	<title>Vendor and device specific formats</title>
+	<tgroup cols="3">
+	  <colspec colname="id" align="left" />
+	  <colspec colname="code" align="left"/>
+	  <colspec colname="remarks" align="left"/>
+	  <thead>
+	    <row>
+	      <entry>Identifier</entry>
+	      <entry>Code</entry>
+	      <entry>Comments</entry>
+	    </row>
+	  </thead>
+	  <tbody valign="top">
+	    <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-S5C-UYVY-JPEG-1X8">
+	      <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_S5C_UYVY_JPEG_1X8</entry>
+	      <entry>0x5001</entry>
+	      <entry>
+		Interleaved raw UYVY and JPEG image format with embedded
+		meta-data used by Samsung S3C73MX camera sensors.
+	      </entry>
+	    </row>
+	  </tbody>
+	</tgroup>
+      </table>
+    </section>
+
   </section>
 </section>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-crop.dia b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-crop.dia
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e32ba5362e1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-crop.dia
@@ -0,0 +1,614 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<dia:diagram xmlns:dia="http://www.lysator.liu.se/~alla/dia/">
+  <dia:diagramdata>
+    <dia:attribute name="background">
+      <dia:color val="#ffffff"/>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="pagebreak">
+      <dia:color val="#000099"/>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="paper">
+      <dia:composite type="paper">
+        <dia:attribute name="name">
+          <dia:string>#A4#</dia:string>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="tmargin">
+          <dia:real val="2.8222000598907471"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="bmargin">
+          <dia:real val="2.8222000598907471"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="lmargin">
+          <dia:real val="2.8222000598907471"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="rmargin">
+          <dia:real val="2.8222000598907471"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="is_portrait">
+          <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="scaling">
+          <dia:real val="0.49000000953674316"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="fitto">
+          <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+      </dia:composite>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="grid">
+      <dia:composite type="grid">
+        <dia:attribute name="width_x">
+          <dia:real val="1"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="width_y">
+          <dia:real val="1"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="visible_x">
+          <dia:int val="1"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="visible_y">
+          <dia:int val="1"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:composite type="color"/>
+      </dia:composite>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="color">
+      <dia:color val="#d8e5e5"/>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="guides">
+      <dia:composite type="guides">
+        <dia:attribute name="hguides"/>
+        <dia:attribute name="vguides"/>
+      </dia:composite>
+    </dia:attribute>
+  </dia:diagramdata>
+  <dia:layer name="Background" visible="true" active="true">
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O0">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-0.4,6.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-0.45,6.45;23.1387,16.2"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="-0.4,6.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="23.48871579904775"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="9.6500000000000004"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O1">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="0.225,9.45"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="0.175,9.4;8.225,14.7"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="0.225,9.45"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="7.9499999999999975"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="5.1999999999999975"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#a52a2a"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O2">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="3.175,10.55"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="3.125,10.5;7.925,14.45"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="3.175,10.55"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="4.6999999999999975"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="3.8499999999999979"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#0000ff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O3">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="3.725,11.3875"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="3.725,10.7925;6.6025,13.14"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#sink
+crop
+selection#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="3.725,11.3875"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#0000ff"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O4">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="1.475,7.9"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="1.475,7.305;1.475,8.0525"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>##</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="1.475,7.9"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O5">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="0.426918,7.89569"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="0.426918,7.30069;3.90942,8.84819"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#sink media
+bus format#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="0.426918,7.89569"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#a52a2a"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O6">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="17.4887,7.75"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="17.4887,7.155;21.8112,8.7025"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#source media
+bus format#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="17.4887,7.75"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#8b6914"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O7">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="17.5244,9.5417"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="17.4744,9.4917;22.2387,13.35"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="17.5244,9.5417"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="4.6643157990477508"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="3.758300000000002"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#8b6914"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O8">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="17.5244,13.3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="3.12132,13.2463;17.5781,14.4537"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="17.5244,13.3"/>
+        <dia:point val="3.175,14.4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O7" connection="5"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O2" connection="5"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O9">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="17.5244,9.5417"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="3.12162,9.48832;17.5778,10.6034"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="17.5244,9.5417"/>
+        <dia:point val="3.175,10.55"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O7" connection="0"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O2" connection="0"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O10">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="22.1887,13.3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="7.82132,13.2463;22.2424,14.4537"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="22.1887,13.3"/>
+        <dia:point val="7.875,14.4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O7" connection="7"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O2" connection="7"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O11">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="22.1887,9.5417"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="7.82161,9.48831;22.2421,10.6034"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="22.1887,9.5417"/>
+        <dia:point val="7.875,10.55"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O7" connection="2"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O2" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Geometric - Perfect Circle" version="1" id="O12">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="23.23,10.5742"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="23.18,10.5242;24.13,11.4742"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="meta">
+        <dia:composite type="dict"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="23.23,10.5742"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000000000001"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="fill_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#ffffff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="0"/>
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_horizontal">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_vertical">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="subscale">
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O13">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="24.08,10.9992"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="24.03,10.6388;32.4953,11.3624"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="24.08,10.9992"/>
+        <dia:point val="32.3835,11.0007"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O12" connection="3"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O14">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="25.3454,10.49"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="25.3454,9.895;29.9904,10.6425"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#pad 1 (source)#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="25.3454,10.49"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Geometric - Perfect Circle" version="1" id="O15">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-1.44491,11.6506"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-1.49491,11.6006;-0.54491,12.5506"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="meta">
+        <dia:composite type="dict"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="-1.44491,11.6506"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000000000001"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="fill_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#ffffff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="0"/>
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_horizontal">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_vertical">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="subscale">
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O16">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-9.61991,12.09"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-9.67,11.7149;-1.33311,12.4385"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="-9.61991,12.09"/>
+        <dia:point val="-1.44491,12.0756"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O15" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O17">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-7.39291,11.49"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-7.39291,10.895;-3.58791,11.6425"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#pad 0 (sink)#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="-7.39291,11.49"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+  </dia:layer>
+</dia:diagram>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-crop.svg b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-crop.svg
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..18b0f5de9ed2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-crop.svg
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="no"?>
+<!DOCTYPE svg PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD SVG 1.0//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/2001/PR-SVG-20010719/DTD/svg10.dtd">
+<svg width="43cm" height="10cm" viewBox="-194 128 844 196" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink">
+  <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" x="-8" y="130" width="469.774" height="193"/>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="4.5" y="189" width="159" height="104"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a52a2a" x="4.5" y="189" width="159" height="104"/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="63.5" y="211" width="94" height="77"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #0000ff" x="63.5" y="211" width="94" height="77"/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #0000ff;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="74.5" y="227.75">
+    <tspan x="74.5" y="227.75">sink</tspan>
+    <tspan x="74.5" y="243.75">crop</tspan>
+    <tspan x="74.5" y="259.75">selection</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <text style="fill: #000000;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="29.5" y="158">
+    <tspan x="29.5" y="158"></tspan>
+  </text>
+  <text style="fill: #a52a2a;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="8.53836" y="157.914">
+    <tspan x="8.53836" y="157.914">sink media</tspan>
+    <tspan x="8.53836" y="173.914">bus format</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <text style="fill: #8b6914;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="349.774" y="155">
+    <tspan x="349.774" y="155">source media</tspan>
+    <tspan x="349.774" y="171">bus format</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="350.488" y="190.834" width="93.2863" height="75.166"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #8b6914" x="350.488" y="190.834" width="93.2863" height="75.166"/>
+  </g>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="350.488" y1="266" x2="63.5" y2="288"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="350.488" y1="190.834" x2="63.5" y2="211"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="443.774" y1="266" x2="157.5" y2="288"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="443.774" y1="190.834" x2="157.5" y2="211"/>
+  <g>
+    <ellipse style="fill: #ffffff" cx="473.1" cy="219.984" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="473.1" cy="219.984" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="473.1" cy="219.984" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" x1="481.6" y1="219.984" x2="637.934" y2="220.012"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #000000" points="645.434,220.014 635.433,225.012 637.934,220.012 635.435,215.012 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" points="645.434,220.014 635.433,225.012 637.934,220.012 635.435,215.012 "/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #000000;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="506.908" y="209.8">
+    <tspan x="506.908" y="209.8">pad 1 (source)</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <ellipse style="fill: #ffffff" cx="-20.3982" cy="241.512" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="-20.3982" cy="241.512" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="-20.3982" cy="241.512" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" x1="-192.398" y1="241.8" x2="-38.6343" y2="241.529"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #000000" points="-31.1343,241.516 -41.1254,246.534 -38.6343,241.529 -41.1431,236.534 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" points="-31.1343,241.516 -41.1254,246.534 -38.6343,241.529 -41.1431,236.534 "/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #000000;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="-147.858" y="229.8">
+    <tspan x="-147.858" y="229.8">pad 0 (sink)</tspan>
+  </text>
+</svg>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-full.dia b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-full.dia
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a0d782927840
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-full.dia
@@ -0,0 +1,1588 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<dia:diagram xmlns:dia="http://www.lysator.liu.se/~alla/dia/">
+  <dia:diagramdata>
+    <dia:attribute name="background">
+      <dia:color val="#ffffff"/>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="pagebreak">
+      <dia:color val="#000099"/>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="paper">
+      <dia:composite type="paper">
+        <dia:attribute name="name">
+          <dia:string>#A4#</dia:string>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="tmargin">
+          <dia:real val="2.8222000598907471"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="bmargin">
+          <dia:real val="2.8222000598907471"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="lmargin">
+          <dia:real val="2.8222000598907471"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="rmargin">
+          <dia:real val="2.8222000598907471"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="is_portrait">
+          <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="scaling">
+          <dia:real val="0.49000000953674316"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="fitto">
+          <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+      </dia:composite>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="grid">
+      <dia:composite type="grid">
+        <dia:attribute name="width_x">
+          <dia:real val="1"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="width_y">
+          <dia:real val="1"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="visible_x">
+          <dia:int val="1"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="visible_y">
+          <dia:int val="1"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:composite type="color"/>
+      </dia:composite>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="color">
+      <dia:color val="#d8e5e5"/>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="guides">
+      <dia:composite type="guides">
+        <dia:attribute name="hguides"/>
+        <dia:attribute name="vguides"/>
+      </dia:composite>
+    </dia:attribute>
+  </dia:diagramdata>
+  <dia:layer name="Background" visible="true" active="true">
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O0">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="15.945,6.45"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="15.895,6.4;26.4,18.95"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="15.945,6.45"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="10.404999999254942"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="12.449999999999992"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#ff765a"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O1">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-0.1,3.65"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-0.15,3.6;40.25,20.85"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="-0.1,3.65"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="40.300000000000004"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="17.149999999999999"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Geometric - Perfect Circle" version="1" id="O2">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-1.05,7.9106"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-1.1,7.8606;-0.15,8.8106"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="meta">
+        <dia:composite type="dict"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="-1.05,7.9106"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000000000001"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="fill_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#ffffff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="0"/>
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_horizontal">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_vertical">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="subscale">
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Geometric - Perfect Circle" version="1" id="O3">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="40.3366,9.8342"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="40.2866,9.7842;41.2366,10.7342"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="meta">
+        <dia:composite type="dict"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="40.3366,9.8342"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000000000001"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="fill_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#ffffff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="0"/>
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_horizontal">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_vertical">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="subscale">
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O4">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-9.225,8.35"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-9.27509,7.97487;-0.938197,8.69848"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="-9.225,8.35"/>
+        <dia:point val="-1.05,8.3356"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O2" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O5">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="41.1866,10.2592"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="41.1366,9.89879;49.6019,10.6224"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="41.1866,10.2592"/>
+        <dia:point val="49.4901,10.2607"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O3" connection="3"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O6">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-6.998,7.75"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-6.998,7.155;-3.193,7.9025"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#pad 0 (sink)#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="-6.998,7.75"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O7">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="42.452,9.75"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="42.452,9.155;47.097,9.9025"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#pad 2 (source)#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="42.452,9.75"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O8">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="0.275,6"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="0.225,5.95;8.275,11.25"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="0.275,6"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="7.9499999999999975"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="5.1999999999999975"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#a52a2a"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O9">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="3.125,6.8"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="3.075,6.75;7.875,10.7"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="3.125,6.8"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="4.6999999999999975"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="3.8499999999999979"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#0000ff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O10">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="1.525,4.45"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="1.525,3.855;1.525,4.6025"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>##</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="1.525,4.45"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O11">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="0.476918,4.44569"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="0.476918,3.85069;3.95942,5.39819"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#sink media
+bus format#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="0.476918,4.44569"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#a52a2a"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O12">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="16.6822,9.28251"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="16.6322,9.23251;24.9922,17.9564"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="16.6822,9.28251"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="8.2600228398861297"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="8.6238900617957164"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#00ff00"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O13">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="16.6822,17.9064"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="3.05732,10.5823;16.7499,17.9741"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="16.6822,17.9064"/>
+        <dia:point val="3.125,10.65"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O12" connection="5"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O9" connection="5"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O14">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="16.6822,9.28251"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="3.06681,6.74181;16.7404,9.3407"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="16.6822,9.28251"/>
+        <dia:point val="3.125,6.8"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O12" connection="0"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O9" connection="0"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O15">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="24.9422,17.9064"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="7.75945,10.5845;25.0077,17.9719"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="24.9422,17.9064"/>
+        <dia:point val="7.825,10.65"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O12" connection="7"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O9" connection="7"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O16">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="24.9422,9.28251"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="7.76834,6.74334;24.9989,9.33917"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="24.9422,9.28251"/>
+        <dia:point val="7.825,6.8"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O12" connection="2"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O9" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O17">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="16.7352,7.47209"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="16.7352,6.87709;22.5602,8.42459"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#sink compose
+selection (scaling)#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="16.7352,7.47209"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#00ff00"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O18">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="20.4661,9.72825"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="20.4161,9.67825;25.5254,13.3509"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="20.4661,9.72825"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="5.009308462554376"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="3.5726155970598077"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#a020f0"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O19">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.475,5.2564"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="34.475,4.6614;38.7975,6.2089"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#source media
+bus format#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="34.475,5.2564"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#8b6914"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O20">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.4244,8.6917"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="34.3744,8.6417;39.4837,12.3143"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="34.4244,8.6917"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="5.009308462554376"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="3.5726155970598077"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#8b6914"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O21">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.4244,12.2643"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="20.4125,12.2107;34.478,13.3545"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="34.4244,12.2643"/>
+        <dia:point val="20.4661,13.3009"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O20" connection="5"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O18" connection="5"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O22">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.4244,8.6917"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="20.4125,8.63813;34.478,9.78182"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="34.4244,8.6917"/>
+        <dia:point val="20.4661,9.72825"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O20" connection="0"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O18" connection="0"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O23">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="39.4337,12.2643"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="25.4218,12.2107;39.4873,13.3545"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="39.4337,12.2643"/>
+        <dia:point val="25.4754,13.3009"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O20" connection="7"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O18" connection="7"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O24">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="39.4337,8.6917"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="25.4218,8.63813;39.4873,9.78182"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="39.4337,8.6917"/>
+        <dia:point val="25.4754,9.72825"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O20" connection="2"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O18" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O25">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="16.25,5.15"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="16.25,4.555;21.68,6.1025"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#sink compose
+bounds selection#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="16.25,5.15"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#ff765a"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Geometric - Perfect Circle" version="1" id="O26">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-1.02991,16.6506"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-1.07991,16.6006;-0.12991,17.5506"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="meta">
+        <dia:composite type="dict"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="-1.02991,16.6506"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000000000001"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="fill_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#ffffff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="0"/>
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_horizontal">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_vertical">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="subscale">
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O27">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-9.20491,17.09"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-9.255,16.7149;-0.918107,17.4385"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="-9.20491,17.09"/>
+        <dia:point val="-1.02991,17.0756"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O26" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O28">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-6.95,16.45"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-6.95,15.855;-3.145,16.6025"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#pad 1 (sink)#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="-6.95,16.45"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O29">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="0.390412,14.64"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="0.340412,14.59;6.045,18.8"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="0.390412,14.64"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="5.604587512785236"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="4.1099999999999994"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#a52a2a"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O30">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="2.645,15.74"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="2.595,15.69;5.6,18.3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="2.645,15.74"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="2.904999999254942"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="2.5100000000000016"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#0000ff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O31">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="1.595,12.99"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="1.595,12.395;1.595,13.1425"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>##</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="1.595,12.99"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O32">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="17.945,12.595"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="2.58596,12.536;18.004,15.799"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="17.945,12.595"/>
+        <dia:point val="2.645,15.74"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O36" connection="0"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O30" connection="0"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O33">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="17.945,15.8"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="2.58772,15.7427;18.0023,18.3073"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="17.945,15.8"/>
+        <dia:point val="2.645,18.25"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O36" connection="5"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O30" connection="5"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O34">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="21.7,15.8"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="5.49307,15.7431;21.7569,18.3069"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="21.7,15.8"/>
+        <dia:point val="5.55,18.25"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O36" connection="7"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O30" connection="7"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O35">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="21.7,12.595"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="5.49136,12.5364;21.7586,15.7986"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="21.7,12.595"/>
+        <dia:point val="5.55,15.74"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O36" connection="2"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O30" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O36">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="17.945,12.595"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="17.895,12.545;21.75,15.85"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="17.945,12.595"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="3.7549999992549452"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="3.2049999992549427"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#00ff00"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O37">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="22.1631,14.2233"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="22.1131,14.1733;25.45,16.7"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="22.1631,14.2233"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="3.2369000000000021"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="2.4267000000000003"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#a020f0"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O38">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.6714,16.2367"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="34.6214,16.1867;37.9,18.75"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="34.6714,16.2367"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="3.178600000000003"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="2.4632999999999967"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#8b6914"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O39">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.6714,18.7"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="22.1057,16.5926;34.7288,18.7574"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="34.6714,18.7"/>
+        <dia:point val="22.1631,16.65"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O38" connection="5"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O37" connection="5"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O40">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.6714,16.2367"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="22.1058,14.166;34.7287,16.294"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="34.6714,16.2367"/>
+        <dia:point val="22.1631,14.2233"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O38" connection="0"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O37" connection="0"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O41">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="37.85,18.7"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="25.3425,16.5925;37.9075,18.7575"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="37.85,18.7"/>
+        <dia:point val="25.4,16.65"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O38" connection="7"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O37" connection="7"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O42">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="37.85,16.2367"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="25.3427,14.166;37.9073,16.294"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="37.85,16.2367"/>
+        <dia:point val="25.4,14.2233"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O38" connection="2"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O37" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Geometric - Perfect Circle" version="1" id="O43">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="40.347,16.7742"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="40.297,16.7242;41.247,17.6742"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="meta">
+        <dia:composite type="dict"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="40.347,16.7742"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000000000001"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="fill_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#ffffff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="0"/>
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_horizontal">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_vertical">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="subscale">
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O44">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="41.197,17.1992"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="41.147,16.8388;49.6123,17.5624"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="41.197,17.1992"/>
+        <dia:point val="49.5005,17.2007"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O43" connection="3"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O45">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="42.4624,16.69"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="42.4624,16.095;47.1074,16.8425"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#pad 3 (source)#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="42.4624,16.69"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O46">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="9.85,4.55"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="9.85,3.955;12.7275,6.3025"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#sink
+crop
+selection#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="9.85,4.55"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#0000ff"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O47">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="27.65,4.75"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="27.65,4.155;30.5275,6.5025"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#source
+crop
+selection#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="27.65,4.75"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#a020f0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O48">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="10.55,6.6"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="7.7135,6.39438;10.6035,7.11605"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="10.55,6.6"/>
+        <dia:point val="7.825,6.8"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#0000ff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O9" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O49">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="10.45,6.55"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="5.48029,6.48236;10.5176,15.8387"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="10.45,6.55"/>
+        <dia:point val="5.55,15.74"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#0000ff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O30" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O50">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="27.5246,6.66071"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="25.406,6.59136;27.594,9.82122"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="27.5246,6.66071"/>
+        <dia:point val="25.4754,9.72825"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#a020f0"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O18" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O51">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="27.5036,6.68935"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="25.2161,6.62775;27.5652,14.331"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="27.5036,6.68935"/>
+        <dia:point val="25.4,14.2233"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#a020f0"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O37" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+  </dia:layer>
+</dia:diagram>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-full.svg b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-full.svg
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3322cf4c0093
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-full.svg
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="no"?>
+<!DOCTYPE svg PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD SVG 1.0//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/2001/PR-SVG-20010719/DTD/svg10.dtd">
+<svg width="59cm" height="18cm" viewBox="-186 71 1178 346" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink">
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="318.9" y="129" width="208.1" height="249"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #ff765a" x="318.9" y="129" width="208.1" height="249"/>
+  </g>
+  <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" x="-2" y="73" width="806" height="343"/>
+  <g>
+    <ellipse style="fill: #ffffff" cx="-12.5" cy="166.712" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="-12.5" cy="166.712" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="-12.5" cy="166.712" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <ellipse style="fill: #ffffff" cx="815.232" cy="205.184" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="815.232" cy="205.184" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="815.232" cy="205.184" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" x1="-184.5" y1="167" x2="-30.7361" y2="166.729"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #000000" points="-23.2361,166.716 -33.2272,171.734 -30.7361,166.729 -33.2449,161.734 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" points="-23.2361,166.716 -33.2272,171.734 -30.7361,166.729 -33.2449,161.734 "/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" x1="823.732" y1="205.184" x2="980.066" y2="205.212"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #000000" points="987.566,205.214 977.565,210.212 980.066,205.212 977.567,200.212 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" points="987.566,205.214 977.565,210.212 980.066,205.212 977.567,200.212 "/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #000000;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="-139.96" y="155">
+    <tspan x="-139.96" y="155">pad 0 (sink)</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <text style="fill: #000000;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="849.04" y="195">
+    <tspan x="849.04" y="195">pad 2 (source)</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="5.5" y="120" width="159" height="104"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a52a2a" x="5.5" y="120" width="159" height="104"/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="62.5" y="136" width="94" height="77"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #0000ff" x="62.5" y="136" width="94" height="77"/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #000000;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="30.5" y="89">
+    <tspan x="30.5" y="89"></tspan>
+  </text>
+  <text style="fill: #a52a2a;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="9.53836" y="88.9138">
+    <tspan x="9.53836" y="88.9138">sink media</tspan>
+    <tspan x="9.53836" y="104.914">bus format</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="333.644" y="185.65" width="165.2" height="172.478"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #00ff00" x="333.644" y="185.65" width="165.2" height="172.478"/>
+  </g>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="333.644" y1="358.128" x2="62.5" y2="213"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="333.644" y1="185.65" x2="62.5" y2="136"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="498.844" y1="358.128" x2="156.5" y2="213"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="498.844" y1="185.65" x2="156.5" y2="136"/>
+  <text style="fill: #00ff00;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="334.704" y="149.442">
+    <tspan x="334.704" y="149.442">sink compose</tspan>
+    <tspan x="334.704" y="165.442">selection (scaling)</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="409.322" y="194.565" width="100.186" height="71.4523"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a020f0" x="409.322" y="194.565" width="100.186" height="71.4523"/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #8b6914;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="689.5" y="105.128">
+    <tspan x="689.5" y="105.128">source media</tspan>
+    <tspan x="689.5" y="121.128">bus format</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="688.488" y="173.834" width="100.186" height="71.4523"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #8b6914" x="688.488" y="173.834" width="100.186" height="71.4523"/>
+  </g>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="688.488" y1="245.286" x2="409.322" y2="266.018"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="688.488" y1="173.834" x2="409.322" y2="194.565"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="788.674" y1="245.286" x2="509.508" y2="266.018"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="788.674" y1="173.834" x2="509.508" y2="194.565"/>
+  <text style="fill: #ff765a;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="325" y="103">
+    <tspan x="325" y="103">sink compose</tspan>
+    <tspan x="325" y="119">bounds selection</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <ellipse style="fill: #ffffff" cx="-12.0982" cy="341.512" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="-12.0982" cy="341.512" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="-12.0982" cy="341.512" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" x1="-184.098" y1="341.8" x2="-30.3343" y2="341.529"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #000000" points="-22.8343,341.516 -32.8254,346.534 -30.3343,341.529 -32.8431,336.534 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" points="-22.8343,341.516 -32.8254,346.534 -30.3343,341.529 -32.8431,336.534 "/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #000000;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="-139" y="329">
+    <tspan x="-139" y="329">pad 1 (sink)</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="7.80824" y="292.8" width="112.092" height="82.2"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a52a2a" x="7.80824" y="292.8" width="112.092" height="82.2"/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="52.9" y="314.8" width="58.1" height="50.2"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #0000ff" x="52.9" y="314.8" width="58.1" height="50.2"/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #000000;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="31.9" y="259.8">
+    <tspan x="31.9" y="259.8"></tspan>
+  </text>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="358.9" y1="251.9" x2="52.9" y2="314.8"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="358.9" y1="316" x2="52.9" y2="365"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="434" y1="316" x2="111" y2="365"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="434" y1="251.9" x2="111" y2="314.8"/>
+  <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #00ff00" x="358.9" y="251.9" width="75.1" height="64.1"/>
+  <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a020f0" x="443.262" y="284.466" width="64.738" height="48.534"/>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="693.428" y="324.734" width="63.572" height="49.266"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #8b6914" x="693.428" y="324.734" width="63.572" height="49.266"/>
+  </g>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="693.428" y1="374" x2="443.262" y2="333"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="693.428" y1="324.734" x2="443.262" y2="284.466"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="757" y1="374" x2="508" y2="333"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="757" y1="324.734" x2="508" y2="284.466"/>
+  <g>
+    <ellipse style="fill: #ffffff" cx="815.44" cy="343.984" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="815.44" cy="343.984" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="815.44" cy="343.984" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" x1="823.94" y1="343.984" x2="980.274" y2="344.012"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #000000" points="987.774,344.014 977.773,349.012 980.274,344.012 977.775,339.012 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" points="987.774,344.014 977.773,349.012 980.274,344.012 977.775,339.012 "/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #000000;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="849.248" y="333.8">
+    <tspan x="849.248" y="333.8">pad 3 (source)</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <text style="fill: #0000ff;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="197" y="91">
+    <tspan x="197" y="91">sink</tspan>
+    <tspan x="197" y="107">crop</tspan>
+    <tspan x="197" y="123">selection</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <text style="fill: #a020f0;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="553" y="95">
+    <tspan x="553" y="95">source</tspan>
+    <tspan x="553" y="111">crop</tspan>
+    <tspan x="553" y="127">selection</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #0000ff" x1="211" y1="132" x2="166.21" y2="135.287"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #0000ff" points="158.73,135.836 168.337,130.118 166.21,135.287 169.069,140.091 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #0000ff" points="158.73,135.836 168.337,130.118 166.21,135.287 169.069,140.091 "/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #0000ff" x1="209" y1="131" x2="115.581" y2="306.209"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #0000ff" points="112.052,312.827 112.345,301.65 115.581,306.209 121.169,306.355 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #0000ff" points="112.052,312.827 112.345,301.65 115.581,306.209 121.169,306.355 "/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a020f0" x1="550.492" y1="133.214" x2="514.916" y2="186.469"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #a020f0" points="510.75,192.706 512.147,181.613 514.916,186.469 520.463,187.168 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a020f0" points="510.75,192.706 512.147,181.613 514.916,186.469 520.463,187.168 "/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a020f0" x1="550.072" y1="133.787" x2="510.618" y2="275.089"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #a020f0" points="508.601,282.312 506.475,271.336 510.618,275.089 516.106,274.025 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a020f0" points="508.601,282.312 506.475,271.336 510.618,275.089 516.106,274.025 "/>
+  </g>
+</svg>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-scaling-multi-source.dia b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-scaling-multi-source.dia
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0cd50a7bda80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-scaling-multi-source.dia
@@ -0,0 +1,1152 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<dia:diagram xmlns:dia="http://www.lysator.liu.se/~alla/dia/">
+  <dia:diagramdata>
+    <dia:attribute name="background">
+      <dia:color val="#ffffff"/>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="pagebreak">
+      <dia:color val="#000099"/>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="paper">
+      <dia:composite type="paper">
+        <dia:attribute name="name">
+          <dia:string>#A4#</dia:string>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="tmargin">
+          <dia:real val="2.8222000598907471"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="bmargin">
+          <dia:real val="2.8222000598907471"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="lmargin">
+          <dia:real val="2.8222000598907471"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="rmargin">
+          <dia:real val="2.8222000598907471"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="is_portrait">
+          <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="scaling">
+          <dia:real val="0.49000000953674316"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="fitto">
+          <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+      </dia:composite>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="grid">
+      <dia:composite type="grid">
+        <dia:attribute name="width_x">
+          <dia:real val="1"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="width_y">
+          <dia:real val="1"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="visible_x">
+          <dia:int val="1"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:attribute name="visible_y">
+          <dia:int val="1"/>
+        </dia:attribute>
+        <dia:composite type="color"/>
+      </dia:composite>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="color">
+      <dia:color val="#d8e5e5"/>
+    </dia:attribute>
+    <dia:attribute name="guides">
+      <dia:composite type="guides">
+        <dia:attribute name="hguides"/>
+        <dia:attribute name="vguides"/>
+      </dia:composite>
+    </dia:attribute>
+  </dia:diagramdata>
+  <dia:layer name="Background" visible="true" active="true">
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O0">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-0.4,6.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-0.45,6.45;39.95,22.9"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="-0.4,6.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="40.299999999999997"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="16.349999999999998"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O1">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="0.225,9.45"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="0.175,9.4;8.225,14.7"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="0.225,9.45"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="7.9499999999999975"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="5.1999999999999975"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#a52a2a"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O2">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="2.475,10.2"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="2.425,10.15;7.225,14.1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="2.475,10.2"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="4.6999999999999975"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="3.8499999999999979"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#0000ff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O3">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="3,11.2"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="3,10.605;5.8775,12.9525"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#sink
+crop
+selection#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="3,11.2"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#0000ff"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O4">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="1.475,7.9"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="1.475,7.305;1.475,8.0525"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>##</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="1.475,7.9"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O5">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="0.426918,7.89569"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="0.426918,7.30069;3.90942,8.84819"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#sink media
+bus format#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="0.426918,7.89569"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#a52a2a"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O6">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="16.6822,9.28251"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="16.6322,9.23251;24.9922,17.9564"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="16.6822,9.28251"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="8.2600228398861297"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="8.6238900617957164"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#00ff00"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O7">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="16.6822,17.9064"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="2.41365,13.9886;16.7436,17.9678"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="16.6822,17.9064"/>
+        <dia:point val="2.475,14.05"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O6" connection="5"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O2" connection="5"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O8">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="16.6822,9.28251"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="2.42188,9.22939;16.7353,10.2531"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="16.6822,9.28251"/>
+        <dia:point val="2.475,10.2"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O6" connection="0"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O2" connection="0"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O9">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="24.9422,17.9064"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="7.11553,13.9905;25.0017,17.9659"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="24.9422,17.9064"/>
+        <dia:point val="7.175,14.05"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O6" connection="7"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O2" connection="7"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O10">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="24.9422,9.28251"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="7.12249,9.23;24.9947,10.2525"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="24.9422,9.28251"/>
+        <dia:point val="7.175,10.2"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O6" connection="2"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O2" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O11">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="16.7352,7.47209"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="16.7352,6.87709;22.5602,8.42459"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#sink compose
+selection (scaling)#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="16.7352,7.47209"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#00ff00"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O12">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="19.1161,9.97825"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="19.0661,9.92825;24.1754,13.6009"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="19.1161,9.97825"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="5.009308462554376"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="3.5726155970598077"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#a020f0"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O13">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="27.1661,7.47209"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="27.1661,6.87709;30.0436,9.22459"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#source
+crop
+selection#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="27.1661,7.47209"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#a020f0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O14">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.575,7.8564"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="34.575,7.2614;38.8975,8.8089"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#source media
+bus format#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="34.575,7.8564"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#8b6914"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O15">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.5244,11.2917"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="34.4744,11.2417;39.5837,14.9143"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="34.5244,11.2917"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="5.009308462554376"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="3.5726155970598077"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#8b6914"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O16">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.5244,14.8643"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="19.062,13.4968;34.5785,14.9184"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="34.5244,14.8643"/>
+        <dia:point val="19.1161,13.5509"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O15" connection="5"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O12" connection="5"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O17">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.5244,11.2917"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="19.062,9.92418;34.5785,11.3458"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="34.5244,11.2917"/>
+        <dia:point val="19.1161,9.97825"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O15" connection="0"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O12" connection="0"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O18">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="39.5337,14.8643"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="24.0713,13.4968;39.5878,14.9184"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="39.5337,14.8643"/>
+        <dia:point val="24.1254,13.5509"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O15" connection="7"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O12" connection="7"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O19">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="39.5337,11.2917"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="24.0713,9.92418;39.5878,11.3458"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="39.5337,11.2917"/>
+        <dia:point val="24.1254,9.97825"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O15" connection="2"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O12" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Geometric - Perfect Circle" version="1" id="O20">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="39.98,12.0742"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="39.93,12.0242;40.88,12.9742"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="meta">
+        <dia:composite type="dict"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="39.98,12.0742"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000000000001"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="fill_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#ffffff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="0"/>
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_horizontal">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_vertical">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="subscale">
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O21">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="40.83,12.4992"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="40.78,12.1388;49.2453,12.8624"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="40.83,12.4992"/>
+        <dia:point val="49.1335,12.5007"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O20" connection="3"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O22">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="42.0954,11.99"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="42.0954,11.395;46.7404,12.1425"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#pad 1 (source)#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="42.0954,11.99"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Geometric - Perfect Circle" version="1" id="O23">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-1.44491,11.6506"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-1.49491,11.6006;-0.54491,12.5506"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="meta">
+        <dia:composite type="dict"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="-1.44491,11.6506"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000000000001"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="fill_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#ffffff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="0"/>
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_horizontal">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_vertical">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="subscale">
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O24">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-9.61991,12.09"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-9.67,11.7149;-1.33311,12.4385"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="-9.61991,12.09"/>
+        <dia:point val="-1.44491,12.0756"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O23" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O25">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="-7.39291,11.49"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="-7.39291,10.895;-3.58791,11.6425"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#pad 0 (sink)#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="-7.39291,11.49"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O26">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="19.4911,13.8333"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="19.4411,13.7833;24.5504,17.4559"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="19.4911,13.8333"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="5.009308462554376"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="3.5726155970598077"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#a020f0"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Box" version="0" id="O27">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.4994,17.2967"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="34.4494,17.2467;39.5587,20.9193"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="34.4994,17.2967"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="5.009308462554376"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="3.5726155970598077"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000149011612"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="border_color">
+        <dia:color val="#8b6914"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O28">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.4994,20.8693"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="19.4311,17.3459;34.5594,20.9293"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="34.4994,20.8693"/>
+        <dia:point val="19.4911,17.4059"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O27" connection="5"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O26" connection="5"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O29">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="34.4994,17.2967"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="19.4311,13.7733;34.5594,17.3567"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="34.4994,17.2967"/>
+        <dia:point val="19.4911,13.8333"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O27" connection="0"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O26" connection="0"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O30">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="39.5087,20.8693"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="24.4404,17.3459;39.5687,20.9293"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="39.5087,20.8693"/>
+        <dia:point val="24.5004,17.4059"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O27" connection="7"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O26" connection="7"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O31">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="39.5087,17.2967"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="24.4404,13.7733;39.5687,17.3567"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="39.5087,17.2967"/>
+        <dia:point val="24.5004,13.8333"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#e60505"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="4"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O27" connection="2"/>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O26" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Geometric - Perfect Circle" version="1" id="O32">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="39.855,18.7792"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="39.805,18.7292;40.755,19.6792"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="meta">
+        <dia:composite type="dict"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_corner">
+        <dia:point val="39.855,18.7792"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="elem_height">
+        <dia:real val="0.84999999999999787"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.10000000000000001"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="fill_colour">
+        <dia:color val="#ffffff"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="show_background">
+        <dia:boolean val="true"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_style">
+        <dia:enum val="0"/>
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_horizontal">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="flip_vertical">
+        <dia:boolean val="false"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="subscale">
+        <dia:real val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O33">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="40.705,19.2042"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="40.655,18.8438;49.1203,19.5674"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="40.705,19.2042"/>
+        <dia:point val="49.0085,19.2057"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="0" to="O32" connection="3"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Text" version="1" id="O34">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="41.9704,18.695"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="41.9704,18.1;46.6154,18.8475"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="text">
+        <dia:composite type="text">
+          <dia:attribute name="string">
+            <dia:string>#pad 2 (source)#</dia:string>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="font">
+            <dia:font family="sans" style="0" name="Helvetica"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="height">
+            <dia:real val="0.80000000000000004"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="pos">
+            <dia:point val="41.9704,18.695"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="color">
+            <dia:color val="#000000"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+          <dia:attribute name="alignment">
+            <dia:enum val="0"/>
+          </dia:attribute>
+        </dia:composite>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="valign">
+        <dia:enum val="3"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O35">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="27.3,9.55"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="24.0146,9.49376;27.3562,10.255"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="27.3,9.55"/>
+        <dia:point val="24.1254,9.97825"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#a020f0"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O12" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+    <dia:object type="Standard - Line" version="0" id="O36">
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_pos">
+        <dia:point val="27.3454,9.53624"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="obj_bb">
+        <dia:rectangle val="24.4311,9.46695;27.4147,13.9265"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="conn_endpoints">
+        <dia:point val="27.3454,9.53624"/>
+        <dia:point val="24.5004,13.8333"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="numcp">
+        <dia:int val="1"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="line_color">
+        <dia:color val="#a020f0"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow">
+        <dia:enum val="22"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_length">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:attribute name="end_arrow_width">
+        <dia:real val="0.5"/>
+      </dia:attribute>
+      <dia:connections>
+        <dia:connection handle="1" to="O26" connection="2"/>
+      </dia:connections>
+    </dia:object>
+  </dia:layer>
+</dia:diagram>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-scaling-multi-source.svg b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-scaling-multi-source.svg
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2340c0f8bc92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-image-processing-scaling-multi-source.svg
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="no"?>
+<!DOCTYPE svg PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD SVG 1.0//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/2001/PR-SVG-20010719/DTD/svg10.dtd">
+<svg width="59cm" height="17cm" viewBox="-194 128 1179 330" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink">
+  <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" x="-8" y="130" width="806" height="327"/>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="4.5" y="189" width="159" height="104"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a52a2a" x="4.5" y="189" width="159" height="104"/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="49.5" y="204" width="94" height="77"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #0000ff" x="49.5" y="204" width="94" height="77"/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #0000ff;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="60" y="224">
+    <tspan x="60" y="224">sink</tspan>
+    <tspan x="60" y="240">crop</tspan>
+    <tspan x="60" y="256">selection</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <text style="fill: #000000;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="29.5" y="158">
+    <tspan x="29.5" y="158"></tspan>
+  </text>
+  <text style="fill: #a52a2a;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="8.53836" y="157.914">
+    <tspan x="8.53836" y="157.914">sink media</tspan>
+    <tspan x="8.53836" y="173.914">bus format</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="333.644" y="185.65" width="165.2" height="172.478"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #00ff00" x="333.644" y="185.65" width="165.2" height="172.478"/>
+  </g>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="333.644" y1="358.128" x2="49.5" y2="281"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="333.644" y1="185.65" x2="49.5" y2="204"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="498.844" y1="358.128" x2="143.5" y2="281"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="498.844" y1="185.65" x2="143.5" y2="204"/>
+  <text style="fill: #00ff00;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="334.704" y="149.442">
+    <tspan x="334.704" y="149.442">sink compose</tspan>
+    <tspan x="334.704" y="165.442">selection (scaling)</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="382.322" y="199.565" width="100.186" height="71.4523"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a020f0" x="382.322" y="199.565" width="100.186" height="71.4523"/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #a020f0;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="543.322" y="149.442">
+    <tspan x="543.322" y="149.442">source</tspan>
+    <tspan x="543.322" y="165.442">crop</tspan>
+    <tspan x="543.322" y="181.442">selection</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <text style="fill: #8b6914;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="691.5" y="157.128">
+    <tspan x="691.5" y="157.128">source media</tspan>
+    <tspan x="691.5" y="173.128">bus format</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="690.488" y="225.834" width="100.186" height="71.4523"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #8b6914" x="690.488" y="225.834" width="100.186" height="71.4523"/>
+  </g>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="690.488" y1="297.286" x2="382.322" y2="271.018"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="690.488" y1="225.834" x2="382.322" y2="199.565"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="790.674" y1="297.286" x2="482.508" y2="271.018"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="790.674" y1="225.834" x2="482.508" y2="199.565"/>
+  <g>
+    <ellipse style="fill: #ffffff" cx="808.1" cy="249.984" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="808.1" cy="249.984" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="808.1" cy="249.984" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" x1="816.6" y1="249.984" x2="972.934" y2="250.012"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #000000" points="980.434,250.014 970.433,255.012 972.934,250.012 970.435,245.012 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" points="980.434,250.014 970.433,255.012 972.934,250.012 970.435,245.012 "/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #000000;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="841.908" y="239.8">
+    <tspan x="841.908" y="239.8">pad 1 (source)</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <ellipse style="fill: #ffffff" cx="-20.3982" cy="241.512" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="-20.3982" cy="241.512" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="-20.3982" cy="241.512" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" x1="-192.398" y1="241.8" x2="-38.6343" y2="241.529"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #000000" points="-31.1343,241.516 -41.1254,246.534 -38.6343,241.529 -41.1431,236.534 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" points="-31.1343,241.516 -41.1254,246.534 -38.6343,241.529 -41.1431,236.534 "/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #000000;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="-147.858" y="229.8">
+    <tspan x="-147.858" y="229.8">pad 0 (sink)</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a020f0" x="389.822" y="276.666" width="100.186" height="71.4523"/>
+  <g>
+    <rect style="fill: #ffffff" x="689.988" y="345.934" width="100.186" height="71.4523"/>
+    <rect style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #8b6914" x="689.988" y="345.934" width="100.186" height="71.4523"/>
+  </g>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="689.988" y1="417.386" x2="389.822" y2="348.118"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="689.988" y1="345.934" x2="389.822" y2="276.666"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="790.174" y1="417.386" x2="490.008" y2="348.118"/>
+  <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke-dasharray: 4; stroke: #e60505" x1="790.174" y1="345.934" x2="490.008" y2="276.666"/>
+  <g>
+    <ellipse style="fill: #ffffff" cx="805.6" cy="384.084" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="805.6" cy="384.084" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+    <ellipse style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" cx="805.6" cy="384.084" rx="8.5" ry="8.5"/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" x1="814.1" y1="384.084" x2="970.434" y2="384.112"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #000000" points="977.934,384.114 967.933,389.112 970.434,384.112 967.935,379.112 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #000000" points="977.934,384.114 967.933,389.112 970.434,384.112 967.935,379.112 "/>
+  </g>
+  <text style="fill: #000000;text-anchor:start;font-size:12.8;font-family:sanserif;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal" x="839.408" y="373.9">
+    <tspan x="839.408" y="373.9">pad 2 (source)</tspan>
+  </text>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a020f0" x1="546" y1="191" x2="492.157" y2="198.263"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #a020f0" points="484.724,199.266 493.966,192.974 492.157,198.263 495.303,202.884 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a020f0" points="484.724,199.266 493.966,192.974 492.157,198.263 495.303,202.884 "/>
+  </g>
+  <g>
+    <line style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a020f0" x1="546.908" y1="190.725" x2="495.383" y2="268.548"/>
+    <polygon style="fill: #a020f0" points="491.242,274.802 492.594,263.703 495.383,268.548 500.932,269.224 "/>
+    <polygon style="fill: none; fill-opacity:0; stroke-width: 2; stroke: #a020f0" points="491.242,274.802 492.594,263.703 495.383,268.548 500.932,269.224 "/>
+  </g>
+</svg>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml
index e97c512861bb..8469fe13945c 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml
@@ -28,8 +28,8 @@ documentation.</contrib>
 	<firstname>Hans</firstname>
 	<surname>Verkuil</surname>
 	<contrib>Designed and documented the VIDIOC_LOG_STATUS ioctl,
-the extended control ioctls and major parts of the sliced VBI
-API.</contrib>
+the extended control ioctls, major parts of the sliced VBI API, the
+MPEG encoder and decoder APIs and the DV Timings API.</contrib>
 	<affiliation>
 	  <address>
 	    <email>hverkuil@xs4all.nl</email>
@@ -96,6 +96,17 @@ Remote Controller chapter.</contrib>
 	  </address>
 	</affiliation>
       </author>
+
+      <author>
+	<firstname>Sakari</firstname>
+	<surname>Ailus</surname>
+	<contrib>Subdev selections API.</contrib>
+	<affiliation>
+	  <address>
+	    <email>sakari.ailus@iki.fi</email>
+	  </address>
+	</affiliation>
+      </author>
     </authorgroup>
 
     <copyright>
@@ -112,6 +123,8 @@ Remote Controller chapter.</contrib>
       <year>2009</year>
       <year>2010</year>
       <year>2011</year>
+      <year>2012</year>
+      <year>2013</year>
       <holder>Bill Dirks, Michael H. Schimek, Hans Verkuil, Martin
 Rubli, Andy Walls, Muralidharan Karicheri, Mauro Carvalho Chehab,
 	Pawel Osciak</holder>
@@ -128,6 +141,77 @@ structs, ioctls) must be noted in more detail in the history chapter
 applications. -->
 
       <revision>
+	<revnumber>3.11</revnumber>
+	<date>2013-05-26</date>
+	<authorinitials>hv</authorinitials>
+	<revremark>Remove obsolete VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_IDENT ioctl.
+	</revremark>
+      </revision>
+
+      <revision>
+	<revnumber>3.10</revnumber>
+	<date>2013-03-25</date>
+	<authorinitials>hv</authorinitials>
+	<revremark>Remove obsolete and unused DV_PRESET ioctls:
+	VIDIOC_G_DV_PRESET, VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET, VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_PRESET and
+	VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_PRESET. Remove the related v4l2_input/output capability
+	flags V4L2_IN_CAP_PRESETS and V4L2_OUT_CAP_PRESETS. Added VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_INFO.
+	</revremark>
+      </revision>
+
+      <revision>
+	<revnumber>3.9</revnumber>
+	<date>2012-12-03</date>
+	<authorinitials>sa, sn</authorinitials>
+	<revremark>Added timestamp types to v4l2_buffer.
+	Added V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_RANGE control event changes flag.
+	</revremark>
+      </revision>
+
+      <revision>
+	<revnumber>3.6</revnumber>
+	<date>2012-07-02</date>
+	<authorinitials>hv</authorinitials>
+	<revremark>Added VIDIOC_ENUM_FREQ_BANDS.
+	</revremark>
+      </revision>
+
+      <revision>
+	<revnumber>3.5</revnumber>
+	<date>2012-05-07</date>
+	<authorinitials>sa, sn, hv</authorinitials>
+	<revremark>Added V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER_MENU and V4L2 subdev
+	    selections API. Improved the description of V4L2_CID_COLORFX
+	    control, added V4L2_CID_COLORFX_CBCR control.
+	    Added camera controls V4L2_CID_AUTO_EXPOSURE_BIAS,
+	    V4L2_CID_AUTO_N_PRESET_WHITE_BALANCE, V4L2_CID_IMAGE_STABILIZATION,
+	    V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY, V4L2_CID_ISO_SENSITIVITY_AUTO,
+	    V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_METERING, V4L2_CID_SCENE_MODE,
+	    V4L2_CID_3A_LOCK, V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_START,
+	    V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STOP, V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_STATUS
+	    and V4L2_CID_AUTO_FOCUS_RANGE.
+	    Added VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_TIMINGS, VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_TIMINGS and
+	    VIDIOC_DV_TIMINGS_CAP.
+	</revremark>
+      </revision>
+
+      <revision>
+	<revnumber>3.4</revnumber>
+	<date>2012-01-25</date>
+	<authorinitials>sn</authorinitials>
+	<revremark>Added <link linkend="jpeg-controls">JPEG compression
+	    control class.</link>
+	</revremark>
+      </revision>
+
+      <revision>
+	<revnumber>3.3</revnumber>
+	<date>2012-01-11</date>
+	<authorinitials>hv</authorinitials>
+	<revremark>Added device_caps field to struct v4l2_capabilities.</revremark>
+      </revision>
+
+      <revision>
 	<revnumber>3.2</revnumber>
 	<date>2011-08-26</date>
 	<authorinitials>hv</authorinitials>
@@ -417,7 +501,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark>
 </partinfo>
 
 <title>Video for Linux Two API Specification</title>
- <subtitle>Revision 3.2</subtitle>
+ <subtitle>Revision 3.11</subtitle>
 
   <chapter id="common">
     &sub-common;
@@ -471,24 +555,27 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark>
     <!-- All ioctls go here. -->
     &sub-create-bufs;
     &sub-cropcap;
-    &sub-dbg-g-chip-ident;
+    &sub-dbg-g-chip-info;
     &sub-dbg-g-register;
+    &sub-decoder-cmd;
     &sub-dqevent;
+    &sub-dv-timings-cap;
     &sub-encoder-cmd;
     &sub-enumaudio;
     &sub-enumaudioout;
-    &sub-enum-dv-presets;
+    &sub-enum-dv-timings;
     &sub-enum-fmt;
     &sub-enum-framesizes;
     &sub-enum-frameintervals;
+    &sub-enum-freq-bands;
     &sub-enuminput;
     &sub-enumoutput;
     &sub-enumstd;
+    &sub-expbuf;
     &sub-g-audio;
     &sub-g-audioout;
     &sub-g-crop;
     &sub-g-ctrl;
-    &sub-g-dv-preset;
     &sub-g-dv-timings;
     &sub-g-enc-index;
     &sub-g-ext-ctrls;
@@ -507,13 +594,13 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark>
     &sub-g-tuner;
     &sub-log-status;
     &sub-overlay;
+    &sub-prepare-buf;
     &sub-qbuf;
     &sub-querybuf;
     &sub-querycap;
     &sub-queryctrl;
-    &sub-query-dv-preset;
+    &sub-query-dv-timings;
     &sub-querystd;
-    &sub-prepare-buf;
     &sub-reqbufs;
     &sub-s-hw-freq-seek;
     &sub-streamon;
@@ -521,8 +608,10 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark>
     &sub-subdev-enum-frame-size;
     &sub-subdev-enum-mbus-code;
     &sub-subdev-g-crop;
+    &sub-subdev-g-edid;
     &sub-subdev-g-fmt;
     &sub-subdev-g-frame-interval;
+    &sub-subdev-g-selection;
     &sub-subscribe-event;
     <!-- End of ioctls. -->
     &sub-mmap;
@@ -534,6 +623,11 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark>
     &sub-write;
   </appendix>
 
+  <appendix>
+    <title>Common definitions for V4L2 and V4L2 subdev interfaces</title>
+      &sub-selections-common;
+  </appendix>
+
   <appendix id="videodev">
     <title>Video For Linux Two Header File</title>
     &sub-videodev2-h;
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-create-bufs.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-create-bufs.xml
index 73ae8a6cd004..9b700a5f4df7 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-create-bufs.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-create-bufs.xml
@@ -6,7 +6,8 @@
 
   <refnamediv>
     <refname>VIDIOC_CREATE_BUFS</refname>
-    <refpurpose>Create buffers for Memory Mapped or User Pointer I/O</refpurpose>
+    <refpurpose>Create buffers for Memory Mapped or User Pointer or DMA Buffer
+    I/O</refpurpose>
   </refnamediv>
 
   <refsynopsisdiv>
@@ -48,25 +49,42 @@
   <refsect1>
     <title>Description</title>
 
+    <note>
+      <title>Experimental</title>
+      <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental"> experimental </link>
+      interface and may change in the future.</para>
+    </note>
+
     <para>This ioctl is used to create buffers for <link linkend="mmap">memory
-mapped</link> or <link linkend="userp">user pointer</link>
-I/O. It can be used as an alternative or in addition to the
-<constant>VIDIOC_REQBUFS</constant> ioctl, when a tighter control over buffers
-is required. This ioctl can be called multiple times to create buffers of
-different sizes.</para>
+mapped</link> or <link linkend="userp">user pointer</link> or <link
+linkend="dmabuf">DMA buffer</link> I/O. It can be used as an alternative or in
+addition to the <constant>VIDIOC_REQBUFS</constant> ioctl, when a tighter
+control over buffers is required. This ioctl can be called multiple times to
+create buffers of different sizes.</para>
+
+    <para>To allocate the device buffers applications must initialize the
+relevant fields of the <structname>v4l2_create_buffers</structname> structure.
+The <structfield>count</structfield> field must be set to the number of
+requested buffers, the <structfield>memory</structfield> field specifies the
+requested I/O method and the <structfield>reserved</structfield> array must be
+zeroed.</para>
 
-    <para>To allocate device buffers applications initialize relevant fields of
-the <structname>v4l2_create_buffers</structname> structure. They set the
-<structfield>type</structfield> field in the
-<structname>v4l2_format</structname> structure, embedded in this
-structure, to the respective stream or buffer type.
-<structfield>count</structfield> must be set to the number of required buffers.
-<structfield>memory</structfield> specifies the required I/O method. The
-<structfield>format</structfield> field shall typically be filled in using
-either the <constant>VIDIOC_TRY_FMT</constant> or
-<constant>VIDIOC_G_FMT</constant> ioctl(). Additionally, applications can adjust
-<structfield>sizeimage</structfield> fields to fit their specific needs. The
-<structfield>reserved</structfield> array must be zeroed.</para>
+    <para>The <structfield>format</structfield> field specifies the image format
+that the buffers must be able to handle. The application has to fill in this
+&v4l2-format;. Usually this will be done using the
+<constant>VIDIOC_TRY_FMT</constant> or <constant>VIDIOC_G_FMT</constant> ioctl()
+to ensure that the requested format is supported by the driver. Unsupported
+formats will result in an error.</para>
+
+    <para>The buffers created by this ioctl will have as minimum size the size
+defined by the <structfield>format.pix.sizeimage</structfield> field. If the
+<structfield>format.pix.sizeimage</structfield> field is less than the minimum
+required for the given format, then <structfield>sizeimage</structfield> will be
+increased by the driver to that minimum to allocate the buffers. If it is
+larger, then the value will be used as-is. The same applies to the
+<structfield>sizeimage</structfield> field of the
+<structname>v4l2_plane_pix_format</structname> structure in the case of
+multiplanar formats.</para>
 
     <para>When the ioctl is called with a pointer to this structure the driver
 will attempt to allocate up to the requested number of buffers and store the
@@ -91,14 +109,22 @@ information.</para>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>count</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>The number of buffers requested or granted.</entry>
+	    <entry>The number of buffers requested or granted. If count == 0, then
+	    <constant>VIDIOC_CREATE_BUFS</constant> will set <structfield>index</structfield>
+	    to the current number of created buffers, and it will check the validity of
+	    <structfield>memory</structfield> and <structfield>format.type</structfield>.
+	    If those are invalid -1 is returned and errno is set to &EINVAL;,
+	    otherwise <constant>VIDIOC_CREATE_BUFS</constant> returns 0. It will
+	    never set errno to &EBUSY; in this particular case.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-memory;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>memory</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>Applications set this field to
-<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_MMAP</constant> or
-<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_USERPTR</constant>.</entry>
+<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_MMAP</constant>,
+<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_DMABUF</constant> or
+<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_USERPTR</constant>. See <xref linkend="v4l2-memory"
+/></entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>&v4l2-format;</entry>
@@ -129,9 +155,9 @@ mapped</link> I/O.</para>
       <varlistentry>
 	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
 	<listitem>
-	  <para>The buffer type (<structfield>type</structfield> field) or the
-requested I/O method (<structfield>memory</structfield>) is not
-supported.</para>
+	  <para>The buffer type (<structfield>format.type</structfield> field),
+requested I/O method (<structfield>memory</structfield>) or format
+(<structfield>format</structfield> field) is not valid.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
     </variablelist>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml
index b4f2f255211e..bf7cc979fdfa 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml
@@ -59,21 +59,24 @@ constant except when switching the video standard. Remember this
 switch can occur implicit when switching the video input or
 output.</para>
 
+    <para>This ioctl must be implemented for video capture or output devices that
+support cropping and/or scaling and/or have non-square pixels, and for overlay devices.</para>
+
     <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-cropcap">
       <title>struct <structname>v4l2_cropcap</structname></title>
       <tgroup cols="3">
 	&cs-str;
 	<tbody valign="top">
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-buf-type;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>Type of the data stream, set by the application.
 Only these types are valid here:
 <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE</constant>,
+<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE_MPLANE</constant>,
 <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT</constant>,
-<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant>, and custom (driver
-defined) types with code <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant>
-and higher.</entry>
+<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_MPLANE</constant> and
+<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant>. See <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>struct <link linkend="v4l2-rect-crop">v4l2_rect</link></entry>
@@ -156,8 +159,7 @@ on 22 Oct 2002 subject "Re:[V4L][patches!] Re:v4l2/kernel-2.5" -->
 	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
 	<listitem>
 	  <para>The &v4l2-cropcap; <structfield>type</structfield> is
-invalid. This is not permitted for video capture, output and overlay devices,
-which must support <constant>VIDIOC_CROPCAP</constant>.</para>
+invalid.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
     </variablelist>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-chip-ident.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-chip-ident.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ecd966808de..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-chip-ident.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,266 +0,0 @@
-<refentry id="vidioc-dbg-g-chip-ident">
-  <refmeta>
-    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_IDENT</refentrytitle>
-    &manvol;
-  </refmeta>
-
-  <refnamediv>
-    <refname>VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_IDENT</refname>
-    <refpurpose>Identify the chips on a TV card</refpurpose>
-  </refnamediv>
-
-  <refsynopsisdiv>
-    <funcsynopsis>
-      <funcprototype>
-	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
-	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
-	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
-	<paramdef>struct v4l2_dbg_chip_ident
-*<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
-      </funcprototype>
-    </funcsynopsis>
-  </refsynopsisdiv>
-
-  <refsect1>
-    <title>Arguments</title>
-
-    <variablelist>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>&fd;</para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_IDENT</para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para></para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-    </variablelist>
-  </refsect1>
-
-  <refsect1>
-    <title>Description</title>
-
-    <note>
-      <title>Experimental</title>
-
-      <para>This is an <link
-linkend="experimental">experimental</link> interface and may change in
-the future.</para>
-    </note>
-
-    <para>For driver debugging purposes this ioctl allows test
-applications to query the driver about the chips present on the TV
-card. Regular applications must not use it. When you found a chip
-specific bug, please contact the linux-media mailing list (&v4l-ml;)
-so it can be fixed.</para>
-
-    <para>To query the driver applications must initialize the
-<structfield>match.type</structfield> and
-<structfield>match.addr</structfield> or <structfield>match.name</structfield>
-fields of a &v4l2-dbg-chip-ident;
-and call <constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_IDENT</constant> with a pointer to
-this structure. On success the driver stores information about the
-selected chip in the <structfield>ident</structfield> and
-<structfield>revision</structfield> fields. On failure the structure
-remains unchanged.</para>
-
-    <para>When <structfield>match.type</structfield> is
-<constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_HOST</constant>,
-<structfield>match.addr</structfield> selects the nth non-&i2c; chip
-on the TV card. You can enumerate all chips by starting at zero and
-incrementing <structfield>match.addr</structfield> by one until
-<constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_IDENT</constant> fails with an &EINVAL;.
-The number zero always selects the host chip, &eg; the chip connected
-to the PCI or USB bus.</para>
-
-    <para>When <structfield>match.type</structfield> is
-<constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_I2C_DRIVER</constant>,
-<structfield>match.name</structfield> contains the I2C driver name.
-For instance
-<constant>"saa7127"</constant> will match any chip
-supported by the saa7127 driver, regardless of its &i2c; bus address.
-When multiple chips supported by the same driver are present, the
-ioctl will return <constant>V4L2_IDENT_AMBIGUOUS</constant> in the
-<structfield>ident</structfield> field.</para>
-
-    <para>When <structfield>match.type</structfield> is
-<constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_I2C_ADDR</constant>,
-<structfield>match.addr</structfield> selects a chip by its 7 bit
-&i2c; bus address.</para>
-
-    <para>When <structfield>match.type</structfield> is
-<constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_AC97</constant>,
-<structfield>match.addr</structfield> selects the nth AC97 chip
-on the TV card. You can enumerate all chips by starting at zero and
-incrementing <structfield>match.addr</structfield> by one until
-<constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_IDENT</constant> fails with an &EINVAL;.</para>
-
-    <para>On success, the <structfield>ident</structfield> field will
-contain a chip ID from the Linux
-<filename>media/v4l2-chip-ident.h</filename> header file, and the
-<structfield>revision</structfield> field will contain a driver
-specific value, or zero if no particular revision is associated with
-this chip.</para>
-
-    <para>When the driver could not identify the selected chip,
-<structfield>ident</structfield> will contain
-<constant>V4L2_IDENT_UNKNOWN</constant>. When no chip matched
-the ioctl will succeed but the
-<structfield>ident</structfield> field will contain
-<constant>V4L2_IDENT_NONE</constant>. If multiple chips matched,
-<structfield>ident</structfield> will contain
-<constant>V4L2_IDENT_AMBIGUOUS</constant>. In all these cases the
-<structfield>revision</structfield> field remains unchanged.</para>
-
-    <para>This ioctl is optional, not all drivers may support it. It
-was introduced in Linux 2.6.21, but the API was changed to the
-one described here in 2.6.29.</para>
-
-    <para>We recommended the <application>v4l2-dbg</application>
-utility over calling this ioctl directly. It is available from the
-LinuxTV v4l-dvb repository; see <ulink
-url="http://linuxtv.org/repo/">http://linuxtv.org/repo/</ulink> for
-access instructions.</para>
-
-    <!-- Note for convenience vidioc-dbg-g-register.sgml
-	 contains a duplicate of this table. -->
-    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="ident-v4l2-dbg-match">
-      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_dbg_match</structname></title>
-      <tgroup cols="4">
-	&cs-ustr;
-	<tbody valign="top">
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>See <xref linkend="ident-chip-match-types" /> for a list of
-possible types.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>union</entry>
-	    <entry>(anonymous)</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry></entry>
-	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>addr</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Match a chip by this number, interpreted according
-to the <structfield>type</structfield> field.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry></entry>
-	    <entry>char</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>name[32]</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Match a chip by this name, interpreted according
-to the <structfield>type</structfield> field.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	</tbody>
-      </tgroup>
-    </table>
-
-    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-dbg-chip-ident">
-      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_dbg_chip_ident</structname></title>
-      <tgroup cols="3">
-	&cs-str;
-	<tbody valign="top">
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>struct v4l2_dbg_match</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>match</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>How to match the chip, see <xref linkend="ident-v4l2-dbg-match" />.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>ident</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>A chip identifier as defined in the Linux
-<filename>media/v4l2-chip-ident.h</filename> header file, or one of
-the values from <xref linkend="chip-ids" />.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>revision</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>A chip revision, chip and driver specific.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	</tbody>
-      </tgroup>
-    </table>
-
-    <!-- Note for convenience vidioc-dbg-g-register.sgml
-	 contains a duplicate of this table. -->
-    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="ident-chip-match-types">
-      <title>Chip Match Types</title>
-      <tgroup cols="3">
-	&cs-def;
-	<tbody valign="top">
-	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_HOST</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>0</entry>
-	    <entry>Match the nth chip on the card, zero for the
-	    host chip. Does not match &i2c; chips.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_I2C_DRIVER</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>1</entry>
-	    <entry>Match an &i2c; chip by its driver name.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_I2C_ADDR</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>2</entry>
-	    <entry>Match a chip by its 7 bit &i2c; bus address.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_AC97</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>3</entry>
-	    <entry>Match the nth anciliary AC97 chip.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	</tbody>
-      </tgroup>
-    </table>
-
-    <!-- This is an anonymous enum in media/v4l2-chip-ident.h. -->
-    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="chip-ids">
-      <title>Chip Identifiers</title>
-      <tgroup cols="3">
-	&cs-def;
-	<tbody valign="top">
-	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_IDENT_NONE</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>0</entry>
-	    <entry>No chip matched.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_IDENT_AMBIGUOUS</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>1</entry>
-	    <entry>Multiple chips matched.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_IDENT_UNKNOWN</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>2</entry>
-	    <entry>A chip is present at this address, but the driver
-could not identify it.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	</tbody>
-      </tgroup>
-    </table>
-  </refsect1>
-
-  <refsect1>
-    &return-value;
-
-    <variablelist>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>The <structfield>match_type</structfield> is invalid.</para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-     </variablelist>
-  </refsect1>
-</refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-chip-info.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-chip-info.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4c4603c135fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-chip-info.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+<refentry id="vidioc-dbg-g-chip-info">
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_INFO</refentrytitle>
+    &manvol;
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_INFO</refname>
+    <refpurpose>Identify the chips on a TV card</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>struct v4l2_dbg_chip_info
+*<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Arguments</title>
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>&fd;</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_INFO</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Description</title>
+
+    <note>
+      <title>Experimental</title>
+
+      <para>This is an <link
+linkend="experimental">experimental</link> interface and may change in
+the future.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para>For driver debugging purposes this ioctl allows test
+applications to query the driver about the chips present on the TV
+card. Regular applications must not use it. When you found a chip
+specific bug, please contact the linux-media mailing list (&v4l-ml;)
+so it can be fixed.</para>
+
+    <para>Additionally the Linux kernel must be compiled with the
+<constant>CONFIG_VIDEO_ADV_DEBUG</constant> option to enable this ioctl.</para>
+
+    <para>To query the driver applications must initialize the
+<structfield>match.type</structfield> and
+<structfield>match.addr</structfield> or <structfield>match.name</structfield>
+fields of a &v4l2-dbg-chip-info;
+and call <constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_INFO</constant> with a pointer to
+this structure. On success the driver stores information about the
+selected chip in the <structfield>name</structfield> and
+<structfield>flags</structfield> fields.</para>
+
+    <para>When <structfield>match.type</structfield> is
+<constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_BRIDGE</constant>,
+<structfield>match.addr</structfield> selects the nth bridge 'chip'
+on the TV card. You can enumerate all chips by starting at zero and
+incrementing <structfield>match.addr</structfield> by one until
+<constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_INFO</constant> fails with an &EINVAL;.
+The number zero always selects the bridge chip itself, &eg; the chip
+connected to the PCI or USB bus. Non-zero numbers identify specific
+parts of the bridge chip such as an AC97 register block.</para>
+
+    <para>When <structfield>match.type</structfield> is
+<constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_SUBDEV</constant>,
+<structfield>match.addr</structfield> selects the nth sub-device. This
+allows you to enumerate over all sub-devices.</para>
+
+    <para>On success, the <structfield>name</structfield> field will
+contain a chip name and the <structfield>flags</structfield> field will
+contain <constant>V4L2_CHIP_FL_READABLE</constant> if the driver supports
+reading registers from the device or <constant>V4L2_CHIP_FL_WRITABLE</constant>
+if the driver supports writing registers to the device.</para>
+
+    <para>We recommended the <application>v4l2-dbg</application>
+utility over calling this ioctl directly. It is available from the
+LinuxTV v4l-dvb repository; see <ulink
+url="http://linuxtv.org/repo/">http://linuxtv.org/repo/</ulink> for
+access instructions.</para>
+
+    <!-- Note for convenience vidioc-dbg-g-register.sgml
+	 contains a duplicate of this table. -->
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="name-v4l2-dbg-match">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_dbg_match</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="4">
+	&cs-ustr;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>See <xref linkend="name-chip-match-types" /> for a list of
+possible types.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>union</entry>
+	    <entry>(anonymous)</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>addr</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Match a chip by this number, interpreted according
+to the <structfield>type</structfield> field.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>char</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>name[32]</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Match a chip by this name, interpreted according
+to the <structfield>type</structfield> field. Currently unused.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-dbg-chip-info">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_dbg_chip_info</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>struct v4l2_dbg_match</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>match</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>How to match the chip, see <xref linkend="name-v4l2-dbg-match" />.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>char</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>name[32]</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>The name of the chip.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>flags</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Set by the driver. If <constant>V4L2_CHIP_FL_READABLE</constant>
+is set, then the driver supports reading registers from the device. If
+<constant>V4L2_CHIP_FL_WRITABLE</constant> is set, then it supports writing registers.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved[8]</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved fields, both application and driver must set these to 0.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+    <!-- Note for convenience vidioc-dbg-g-register.sgml
+	 contains a duplicate of this table. -->
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="name-chip-match-types">
+      <title>Chip Match Types</title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-def;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_BRIDGE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0</entry>
+	    <entry>Match the nth chip on the card, zero for the
+	    bridge chip. Does not match sub-devices.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_SUBDEV</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>4</entry>
+	    <entry>Match the nth sub-device.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    &return-value;
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>The <structfield>match_type</structfield> is invalid or
+no device could be matched.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+     </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+</refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-register.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-register.xml
index a44aebc7997a..3d038e75d12b 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-register.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-register.xml
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ compiled with the <constant>CONFIG_VIDEO_ADV_DEBUG</constant> option
 to enable these ioctls.</para>
 
     <para>To write a register applications must initialize all fields
-of a &v4l2-dbg-register; and call
+of a &v4l2-dbg-register; except for <structfield>size</structfield> and call
 <constant>VIDIOC_DBG_S_REGISTER</constant> with a pointer to this
 structure. The <structfield>match.type</structfield> and
 <structfield>match.addr</structfield> or <structfield>match.name</structfield>
@@ -87,54 +87,28 @@ written into the register.</para>
 
     <para>To read a register applications must initialize the
 <structfield>match.type</structfield>,
-<structfield>match.chip</structfield> or <structfield>match.name</structfield> and
+<structfield>match.addr</structfield> or <structfield>match.name</structfield> and
 <structfield>reg</structfield> fields, and call
 <constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_REGISTER</constant> with a pointer to this
 structure. On success the driver stores the register value in the
-<structfield>val</structfield> field. On failure the structure remains
-unchanged.</para>
+<structfield>val</structfield> field and the size (in bytes) of the
+value in <structfield>size</structfield>.</para>
 
     <para>When <structfield>match.type</structfield> is
-<constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_HOST</constant>,
-<structfield>match.addr</structfield> selects the nth non-&i2c; chip
+<constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_BRIDGE</constant>,
+<structfield>match.addr</structfield> selects the nth non-sub-device chip
 on the TV card.  The number zero always selects the host chip, &eg; the
 chip connected to the PCI or USB bus. You can find out which chips are
-present with the &VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-IDENT; ioctl.</para>
+present with the &VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-INFO; ioctl.</para>
 
     <para>When <structfield>match.type</structfield> is
-<constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_I2C_DRIVER</constant>,
-<structfield>match.name</structfield> contains the I2C driver name.
-For instance
-<constant>"saa7127"</constant> will match any chip
-supported by the saa7127 driver, regardless of its &i2c; bus address.
-When multiple chips supported by the same driver are present, the
-effect of these ioctls is undefined. Again with the
-&VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-IDENT; ioctl you can find out which &i2c; chips are
-present.</para>
-
-    <para>When <structfield>match.type</structfield> is
-<constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_I2C_ADDR</constant>,
-<structfield>match.addr</structfield> selects a chip by its 7 bit &i2c;
-bus address.</para>
-
-    <para>When <structfield>match.type</structfield> is
-<constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_AC97</constant>,
-<structfield>match.addr</structfield> selects the nth AC97 chip
-on the TV card.</para>
-
-    <note>
-      <title>Success not guaranteed</title>
-
-      <para>Due to a flaw in the Linux &i2c; bus driver these ioctls may
-return successfully without actually reading or writing a register. To
-catch the most likely failure we recommend a &VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-IDENT;
-call confirming the presence of the selected &i2c; chip.</para>
-    </note>
+<constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_SUBDEV</constant>,
+<structfield>match.addr</structfield> selects the nth sub-device.</para>
 
     <para>These ioctls are optional, not all drivers may support them.
 However when a driver supports these ioctls it must also support
-&VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-IDENT;. Conversely it may support
-<constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_IDENT</constant> but not these ioctls.</para>
+&VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-INFO;. Conversely it may support
+<constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_CHIP_INFO</constant> but not these ioctls.</para>
 
     <para><constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_REGISTER</constant> and
 <constant>VIDIOC_DBG_S_REGISTER</constant> were introduced in Linux
@@ -146,7 +120,7 @@ LinuxTV v4l-dvb repository; see <ulink
 url="http://linuxtv.org/repo/">http://linuxtv.org/repo/</ulink> for
 access instructions.</para>
 
-    <!-- Note for convenience vidioc-dbg-g-chip-ident.sgml
+    <!-- Note for convenience vidioc-dbg-g-chip-info.sgml
 	 contains a duplicate of this table. -->
     <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-dbg-match">
       <title>struct <structname>v4l2_dbg_match</structname></title>
@@ -156,7 +130,7 @@ access instructions.</para>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>See <xref linkend="ident-chip-match-types" /> for a list of
+	    <entry>See <xref linkend="chip-match-types" /> for a list of
 possible types.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
@@ -175,7 +149,7 @@ to the <structfield>type</structfield> field.</entry>
 	    <entry>char</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>name[32]</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>Match a chip by this name, interpreted according
-to the <structfield>type</structfield> field.</entry>
+to the <structfield>type</structfield> field. Currently unused.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
@@ -195,6 +169,11 @@ to the <structfield>type</structfield> field.</entry>
 	    <entry>How to match the chip, see <xref linkend="v4l2-dbg-match" />.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>size</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>The register size in bytes.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u64</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>reg</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>A register number.</entry>
@@ -209,7 +188,7 @@ register.</entry>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
 
-    <!-- Note for convenience vidioc-dbg-g-chip-ident.sgml
+    <!-- Note for convenience vidioc-dbg-g-chip-info.sgml
 	 contains a duplicate of this table. -->
     <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="chip-match-types">
       <title>Chip Match Types</title>
@@ -217,25 +196,15 @@ register.</entry>
 	&cs-def;
 	<tbody valign="top">
 	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_HOST</constant></entry>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_BRIDGE</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>0</entry>
 	    <entry>Match the nth chip on the card, zero for the
-	    host chip. Does not match &i2c; chips.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_I2C_DRIVER</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>1</entry>
-	    <entry>Match an &i2c; chip by its driver name.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_I2C_ADDR</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>2</entry>
-	    <entry>Match a chip by its 7 bit &i2c; bus address.</entry>
+	    bridge chip. Does not match sub-devices.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_AC97</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>3</entry>
-	    <entry>Match the nth anciliary AC97 chip.</entry>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CHIP_MATCH_SUBDEV</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>4</entry>
+	    <entry>Match the nth sub-device.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-decoder-cmd.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-decoder-cmd.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9215627b04c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-decoder-cmd.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,249 @@
+<refentry id="vidioc-decoder-cmd">
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_DECODER_CMD, VIDIOC_TRY_DECODER_CMD</refentrytitle>
+    &manvol;
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_DECODER_CMD</refname>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_TRY_DECODER_CMD</refname>
+    <refpurpose>Execute an decoder command</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>struct v4l2_decoder_cmd *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Arguments</title>
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>&fd;</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_DECODER_CMD, VIDIOC_TRY_DECODER_CMD</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Description</title>
+
+    <para>These ioctls control an audio/video (usually MPEG-) decoder.
+<constant>VIDIOC_DECODER_CMD</constant> sends a command to the
+decoder, <constant>VIDIOC_TRY_DECODER_CMD</constant> can be used to
+try a command without actually executing it. To send a command applications
+must initialize all fields of a &v4l2-decoder-cmd; and call
+<constant>VIDIOC_DECODER_CMD</constant> or <constant>VIDIOC_TRY_DECODER_CMD</constant>
+with a pointer to this structure.</para>
+
+    <para>The <structfield>cmd</structfield> field must contain the
+command code. Some commands use the <structfield>flags</structfield> field for
+additional information.
+</para>
+
+    <para>A <function>write</function>() or &VIDIOC-STREAMON; call sends an implicit
+START command to the decoder if it has not been started yet.
+</para>
+
+    <para>A <function>close</function>() or &VIDIOC-STREAMOFF; call of a streaming
+file descriptor sends an implicit immediate STOP command to the decoder, and all
+buffered data is discarded.</para>
+
+    <para>These ioctls are optional, not all drivers may support
+them. They were introduced in Linux 3.3.</para>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-decoder-cmd">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_decoder_cmd</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="5">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>cmd</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>The decoder command, see <xref linkend="decoder-cmds" />.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>flags</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>Flags to go with the command. If no flags are defined for
+this command, drivers and applications must set this field to zero.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>union</entry>
+	    <entry>(anonymous)</entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>struct</entry>
+            <entry><structfield>start</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+            <entry>Structure containing additional data for the
+<constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_START</constant> command.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+            <entry></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>__s32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>speed</structfield></entry>
+            <entry>Playback speed and direction. The playback speed is defined as
+<structfield>speed</structfield>/1000 of the normal speed. So 1000 is normal playback.
+Negative numbers denote reverse playback, so -1000 does reverse playback at normal
+speed. Speeds -1, 0 and 1 have special meanings: speed 0 is shorthand for 1000
+(normal playback). A speed of 1 steps just one frame forward, a speed of -1 steps
+just one frame back.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+            <entry></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>format</structfield></entry>
+            <entry>Format restrictions. This field is set by the driver, not the
+application. Possible values are <constant>V4L2_DEC_START_FMT_NONE</constant> if
+there are no format restrictions or <constant>V4L2_DEC_START_FMT_GOP</constant>
+if the decoder operates on full GOPs (<wordasword>Group Of Pictures</wordasword>).
+This is usually the case for reverse playback: the decoder needs full GOPs, which
+it can then play in reverse order. So to implement reverse playback the application
+must feed the decoder the last GOP in the video file, then the GOP before that, etc. etc.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>struct</entry>
+            <entry><structfield>stop</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+            <entry>Structure containing additional data for the
+<constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_STOP</constant> command.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+            <entry></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>__u64</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>pts</structfield></entry>
+            <entry>Stop playback at this <structfield>pts</structfield> or immediately
+if the playback is already past that timestamp. Leave to 0 if you want to stop after the
+last frame was decoded.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>struct</entry>
+            <entry><structfield>raw</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+            <entry></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>data</structfield>[16]</entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and
+applications must set the array to zero.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="decoder-cmds">
+      <title>Decoder Commands</title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-def;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_START</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0</entry>
+	    <entry>Start the decoder. When the decoder is already
+running or paused, this command will just change the playback speed.
+That means that calling <constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_START</constant> when
+the decoder was paused will <emphasis>not</emphasis> resume the decoder.
+You have to explicitly call <constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_RESUME</constant> for that.
+This command has one flag:
+<constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_START_MUTE_AUDIO</constant>. If set, then audio will
+be muted when playing back at a non-standard speed.
+            </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_STOP</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>1</entry>
+	    <entry>Stop the decoder. When the decoder is already stopped,
+this command does nothing. This command has two flags:
+if <constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_STOP_TO_BLACK</constant> is set, then the decoder will
+set the picture to black after it stopped decoding. Otherwise the last image will
+repeat. If <constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_STOP_IMMEDIATELY</constant> is set, then the decoder
+stops immediately (ignoring the <structfield>pts</structfield> value), otherwise it
+will keep decoding until timestamp >= pts or until the last of the pending data from
+its internal buffers was decoded.
+</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_PAUSE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>2</entry>
+	    <entry>Pause the decoder. When the decoder has not been
+started yet, the driver will return an &EPERM;. When the decoder is
+already paused, this command does nothing. This command has one flag:
+if <constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_PAUSE_TO_BLACK</constant> is set, then set the
+decoder output to black when paused.
+</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_DEC_CMD_RESUME</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>3</entry>
+	    <entry>Resume decoding after a PAUSE command. When the
+decoder has not been started yet, the driver will return an &EPERM;.
+When the decoder is already running, this command does nothing. No
+flags are defined for this command.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    &return-value;
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>The <structfield>cmd</structfield> field is invalid.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>EPERM</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>The application sent a PAUSE or RESUME command when
+the decoder was not running.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+</refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml
index e8714aa16433..89891adb928a 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@
 	  <row>
 	    <entry></entry>
 	    <entry>&v4l2-event-frame-sync;</entry>
-            <entry><structfield>frame</structfield></entry>
+            <entry><structfield>frame_sync</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>Event data for event V4L2_EVENT_FRAME_SYNC.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
@@ -261,6 +261,12 @@
 	    <entry>This control event was triggered because the control flags
 		changed.</entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_RANGE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x0004</entry>
+	    <entry>This control event was triggered because the minimum,
+	    maximum, step or the default value of the control changed.</entry>
+	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dv-timings-cap.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dv-timings-cap.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cd7720d404ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dv-timings-cap.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+<refentry id="vidioc-dv-timings-cap">
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_DV_TIMINGS_CAP</refentrytitle>
+    &manvol;
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_DV_TIMINGS_CAP</refname>
+    <refpurpose>The capabilities of the Digital Video receiver/transmitter</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>struct v4l2_dv_timings_cap *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Arguments</title>
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>&fd;</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_DV_TIMINGS_CAP</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Description</title>
+
+    <note>
+      <title>Experimental</title>
+      <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental"> experimental </link>
+      interface and may change in the future.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para>To query the capabilities of the DV receiver/transmitter applications can call
+this ioctl and the driver will fill in the structure. Note that drivers may return
+different values after switching the video input or output.</para>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-bt-timings-cap">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_bt_timings_cap</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>min_width</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Minimum width of the active video in pixels.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>max_width</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Maximum width of the active video in pixels.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>min_height</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Minimum height of the active video in lines.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>max_height</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Maximum height of the active video in lines.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u64</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>min_pixelclock</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Minimum pixelclock frequency in Hz.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u64</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>max_pixelclock</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Maximum pixelclock frequency in Hz.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>standards</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>The video standard(s) supported by the hardware.
+	    See <xref linkend="dv-bt-standards"/> for a list of standards.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>capabilities</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Several flags giving more information about the capabilities.
+	    See <xref linkend="dv-bt-cap-capabilities"/> for a description of the flags.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[16]</entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers must set the array to zero.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-dv-timings-cap">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_dv_timings_cap</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="4">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Type of DV timings as listed in <xref linkend="dv-timing-types"/>.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[3]</entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers must set the array to zero.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>union</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield></structfield></entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>&v4l2-bt-timings-cap;</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>bt</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>BT.656/1120 timings capabilities of the hardware.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>raw_data</structfield>[32]</entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="dv-bt-cap-capabilities">
+      <title>DV BT Timing capabilities</title>
+      <tgroup cols="2">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>Flag</entry>
+	    <entry>Description</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>V4L2_DV_BT_CAP_INTERLACED</entry>
+	    <entry>Interlaced formats are supported.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>V4L2_DV_BT_CAP_PROGRESSIVE</entry>
+	    <entry>Progressive formats are supported.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>V4L2_DV_BT_CAP_REDUCED_BLANKING</entry>
+	    <entry>CVT/GTF specific: the timings can make use of reduced blanking (CVT)
+or the 'Secondary GTF' curve (GTF).
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>V4L2_DV_BT_CAP_CUSTOM</entry>
+	    <entry>Can support non-standard timings, i.e. timings not belonging to the
+standards set in the <structfield>standards</structfield> field.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    &return-value;
+  </refsect1>
+</refentry>
+
+<!--
+Local Variables:
+mode: sgml
+sgml-parent-document: "v4l2.sgml"
+indent-tabs-mode: nil
+End:
+-->
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml
index af7f3f2a36dd..0619ca5d2d36 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml
@@ -49,13 +49,6 @@
   <refsect1>
     <title>Description</title>
 
-    <note>
-      <title>Experimental</title>
-
-      <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link>
-interface and may change in the future.</para>
-    </note>
-
     <para>These ioctls control an audio/video (usually MPEG-) encoder.
 <constant>VIDIOC_ENCODER_CMD</constant> sends a command to the
 encoder, <constant>VIDIOC_TRY_ENCODER_CMD</constant> can be used to
@@ -74,15 +67,16 @@ only used by the STOP command and contains one bit: If the
 encoding will continue until the end of the current <wordasword>Group
 Of Pictures</wordasword>, otherwise it will stop immediately.</para>
 
-    <para>A <function>read</function>() call sends a START command to
-the encoder if it has not been started yet. After a STOP command,
+    <para>A <function>read</function>() or &VIDIOC-STREAMON; call sends an implicit
+START command to the encoder if it has not been started yet. After a STOP command,
 <function>read</function>() calls will read the remaining data
 buffered by the driver. When the buffer is empty,
 <function>read</function>() will return zero and the next
 <function>read</function>() call will restart the encoder.</para>
 
-    <para>A <function>close</function>() call sends an immediate STOP
-to the encoder, and all buffered data is discarded.</para>
+    <para>A <function>close</function>() or &VIDIOC-STREAMOFF; call of a streaming
+file descriptor sends an implicit immediate STOP to the encoder, and all buffered
+data is discarded.</para>
 
     <para>These ioctls are optional, not all drivers may support
 them. They were introduced in Linux 2.6.21.</para>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-presets.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-presets.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index 0be17c232d3a..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-presets.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,230 +0,0 @@
-<refentry id="vidioc-enum-dv-presets">
-  <refmeta>
-    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_PRESETS</refentrytitle>
-    &manvol;
-  </refmeta>
-
-  <refnamediv>
-    <refname>VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_PRESETS</refname>
-    <refpurpose>Enumerate supported Digital Video presets</refpurpose>
-  </refnamediv>
-
-  <refsynopsisdiv>
-    <funcsynopsis>
-      <funcprototype>
-	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
-	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
-	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
-	<paramdef>struct v4l2_dv_enum_preset *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
-      </funcprototype>
-    </funcsynopsis>
-  </refsynopsisdiv>
-
-  <refsect1>
-    <title>Arguments</title>
-
-    <variablelist>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>&fd;</para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_PRESETS</para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para></para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-    </variablelist>
-  </refsect1>
-
-  <refsect1>
-    <title>Description</title>
-
-    <para>To query the attributes of a DV preset, applications initialize the
-<structfield>index</structfield> field and zero the reserved array of &v4l2-dv-enum-preset;
-and call the <constant>VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_PRESETS</constant> ioctl with a pointer to this
-structure. Drivers fill the rest of the structure or return an
-&EINVAL; when the index is out of bounds. To enumerate all DV Presets supported,
-applications shall begin at index zero, incrementing by one until the
-driver returns <errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode>. Drivers may enumerate a
-different set of DV presets after switching the video input or
-output.</para>
-
-    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-dv-enum-preset">
-      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_dv_enum_presets</structname></title>
-      <tgroup cols="3">
-	&cs-str;
-	<tbody valign="top">
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>index</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Number of the DV preset, set by the
-application.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>preset</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>This field identifies one of the DV preset values listed in <xref linkend="v4l2-dv-presets-vals"/>.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>__u8</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>name</structfield>[24]</entry>
-	    <entry>Name of the preset, a NUL-terminated ASCII string, for example: "720P-60", "1080I-60". This information is
-intended for the user.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>width</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Width of the active video in pixels for the DV preset.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>height</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Height of the active video in lines for the DV preset.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[4]</entry>
-	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers must set the array to zero.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	</tbody>
-      </tgroup>
-    </table>
-
-    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-dv-presets-vals">
-      <title>struct <structname>DV Presets</structname></title>
-      <tgroup cols="3">
-	&cs-str;
-	<tbody valign="top">
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>Preset</entry>
-	    <entry>Preset value</entry>
-	    <entry>Description</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry></entry>
-	    <entry></entry>
-	    <entry></entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_INVALID</entry>
-	    <entry>0</entry>
-	    <entry>Invalid preset value.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_480P59_94</entry>
-	    <entry>1</entry>
-	    <entry>720x480 progressive video at 59.94 fps as per BT.1362.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_576P50</entry>
-	    <entry>2</entry>
-	    <entry>720x576 progressive video at 50 fps as per BT.1362.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_720P24</entry>
-	    <entry>3</entry>
-	    <entry>1280x720 progressive video at 24 fps as per SMPTE 296M.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_720P25</entry>
-	    <entry>4</entry>
-	    <entry>1280x720 progressive video at 25 fps as per SMPTE 296M.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_720P30</entry>
-	    <entry>5</entry>
-	    <entry>1280x720 progressive video at 30 fps as per SMPTE 296M.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_720P50</entry>
-	    <entry>6</entry>
-	    <entry>1280x720 progressive video at 50 fps as per SMPTE 296M.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_720P59_94</entry>
-	    <entry>7</entry>
-	    <entry>1280x720 progressive video at 59.94 fps as per SMPTE 274M.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_720P60</entry>
-	    <entry>8</entry>
-	    <entry>1280x720 progressive video at 60 fps as per SMPTE 274M/296M.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_1080I29_97</entry>
-	    <entry>9</entry>
-	    <entry>1920x1080 interlaced video at 29.97 fps as per BT.1120/SMPTE 274M.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_1080I30</entry>
-	    <entry>10</entry>
-	    <entry>1920x1080 interlaced video at 30 fps as per BT.1120/SMPTE 274M.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_1080I25</entry>
-	    <entry>11</entry>
-	    <entry>1920x1080 interlaced video at 25 fps as per BT.1120.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_1080I50</entry>
-	    <entry>12</entry>
-	    <entry>1920x1080 interlaced video at 50 fps as per SMPTE 296M.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_1080I60</entry>
-	    <entry>13</entry>
-	    <entry>1920x1080 interlaced video at 60 fps as per SMPTE 296M.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_1080P24</entry>
-	    <entry>14</entry>
-	    <entry>1920x1080 progressive video at 24 fps as per SMPTE 296M.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_1080P25</entry>
-	    <entry>15</entry>
-	    <entry>1920x1080 progressive video at 25 fps as per SMPTE 296M.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_1080P30</entry>
-	    <entry>16</entry>
-	    <entry>1920x1080 progressive video at 30 fps as per SMPTE 296M.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_1080P50</entry>
-	    <entry>17</entry>
-	    <entry>1920x1080 progressive video at 50 fps as per BT.1120.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>V4L2_DV_1080P60</entry>
-	    <entry>18</entry>
-	    <entry>1920x1080 progressive video at 60 fps as per BT.1120.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	</tbody>
-      </tgroup>
-    </table>
-  </refsect1>
-
-  <refsect1>
-    &return-value;
-
-    <variablelist>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>The &v4l2-dv-enum-preset; <structfield>index</structfield>
-is out of bounds.</para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-    </variablelist>
-  </refsect1>
-</refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-timings.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-timings.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b3e17c1dfaf5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-dv-timings.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+<refentry id="vidioc-enum-dv-timings">
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_TIMINGS</refentrytitle>
+    &manvol;
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_TIMINGS</refname>
+    <refpurpose>Enumerate supported Digital Video timings</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>struct v4l2_enum_dv_timings *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Arguments</title>
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>&fd;</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_TIMINGS</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Description</title>
+
+    <note>
+      <title>Experimental</title>
+      <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental"> experimental </link>
+      interface and may change in the future.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para>While some DV receivers or transmitters support a wide range of timings, others
+support only a limited number of timings. With this ioctl applications can enumerate a list
+of known supported timings. Call &VIDIOC-DV-TIMINGS-CAP; to check if it also supports other
+standards or even custom timings that are not in this list.</para>
+
+    <para>To query the available timings, applications initialize the
+<structfield>index</structfield> field and zero the reserved array of &v4l2-enum-dv-timings;
+and call the <constant>VIDIOC_ENUM_DV_TIMINGS</constant> ioctl with a pointer to this
+structure. Drivers fill the rest of the structure or return an
+&EINVAL; when the index is out of bounds. To enumerate all supported DV timings,
+applications shall begin at index zero, incrementing by one until the
+driver returns <errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode>. Note that drivers may enumerate a
+different set of DV timings after switching the video input or
+output.</para>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-enum-dv-timings">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_enum_dv_timings</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>index</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Number of the DV timings, set by the
+application.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[3]</entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers must set the array to zero.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>&v4l2-dv-timings;</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>timings</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>The timings.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    &return-value;
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>The &v4l2-enum-dv-timings; <structfield>index</structfield>
+is out of bounds.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Digital video presets are not supported for this input or output.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+</refentry>
+
+<!--
+Local Variables:
+mode: sgml
+sgml-parent-document: "v4l2.sgml"
+indent-tabs-mode: nil
+End:
+-->
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-fmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-fmt.xml
index 347d142e7431..f8dfeed34fca 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-fmt.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-fmt.xml
@@ -58,6 +58,9 @@ structure. Drivers fill the rest of the structure or return an
 incrementing by one until <errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode> is
 returned.</para>
 
+    <para>Note that after switching input or output the list of enumerated image
+formats may be different.</para>
+
     <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-fmtdesc">
       <title>struct <structname>v4l2_fmtdesc</structname></title>
       <tgroup cols="3">
@@ -71,17 +74,15 @@ the application. This is in no way related to the <structfield>
 pixelformat</structfield> field.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-buf-type;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>Type of the data stream, set by the application.
 Only these types are valid here:
 <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE</constant>,
 <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE_MPLANE</constant>,
 <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT</constant>,
-<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_MPLANE</constant>,
-<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant>, and custom (driver
-defined) types with code <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant>
-and higher.</entry>
+<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_MPLANE</constant> and
+<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant>. See <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-framesizes.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-framesizes.xml
index f77a13f486d7..a78454b5abcd 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-framesizes.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-framesizes.xml
@@ -50,13 +50,6 @@ and pixel format and receives a frame width and height.</para>
   <refsect1>
     <title>Description</title>
 
-    <note>
-      <title>Experimental</title>
-
-      <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link>
-interface and may change in the future.</para>
-    </note>
-
     <para>This ioctl allows applications to enumerate all frame sizes
 (&ie; width and height in pixels) that the device supports for the
 given pixel format.</para>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-freq-bands.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-freq-bands.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6541ba0175ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enum-freq-bands.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+<refentry id="vidioc-enum-freq-bands">
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_ENUM_FREQ_BANDS</refentrytitle>
+    &manvol;
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_ENUM_FREQ_BANDS</refname>
+    <refpurpose>Enumerate supported frequency bands</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>struct v4l2_frequency_band
+*<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Arguments</title>
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>&fd;</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_ENUM_FREQ_BANDS</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Description</title>
+
+    <note>
+      <title>Experimental</title>
+      <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental"> experimental </link>
+      interface and may change in the future.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para>Enumerates the frequency bands that a tuner or modulator supports.
+To do this applications initialize the <structfield>tuner</structfield>,
+<structfield>type</structfield> and <structfield>index</structfield> fields,
+and zero out the <structfield>reserved</structfield> array of a &v4l2-frequency-band; and
+call the <constant>VIDIOC_ENUM_FREQ_BANDS</constant> ioctl with a pointer
+to this structure.</para>
+
+    <para>This ioctl is supported if the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_FREQ_BANDS</constant> capability
+    of the corresponding tuner/modulator is set.</para>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-frequency-band">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_frequency_band</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>tuner</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>The tuner or modulator index number. This is the
+same value as in the &v4l2-input; <structfield>tuner</structfield>
+field and the &v4l2-tuner; <structfield>index</structfield> field, or
+the &v4l2-output; <structfield>modulator</structfield> field and the
+&v4l2-modulator; <structfield>index</structfield> field.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>The tuner type. This is the same value as in the
+&v4l2-tuner; <structfield>type</structfield> field. The type must be set
+to <constant>V4L2_TUNER_RADIO</constant> for <filename>/dev/radioX</filename>
+device nodes, and to <constant>V4L2_TUNER_ANALOG_TV</constant>
+for all others. Set this field to <constant>V4L2_TUNER_RADIO</constant> for
+modulators (currently only radio modulators are supported).
+See <xref linkend="v4l2-tuner-type" /></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>index</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Identifies the frequency band, set by the application.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>capability</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry spanname="hspan">The tuner/modulator capability flags for
+this frequency band, see <xref linkend="tuner-capability" />. The <constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_LOW</constant>
+capability must be the same for all frequency bands of the selected tuner/modulator.
+So either all bands have that capability set, or none of them have that capability.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>rangelow</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry spanname="hspan">The lowest tunable frequency in
+units of 62.5 kHz, or if the <structfield>capability</structfield>
+flag <constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_LOW</constant> is set, in units of 62.5
+Hz, for this frequency band.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>rangehigh</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry spanname="hspan">The highest tunable frequency in
+units of 62.5 kHz, or if the <structfield>capability</structfield>
+flag <constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_LOW</constant> is set, in units of 62.5
+Hz, for this frequency band.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>modulation</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry spanname="hspan">The supported modulation systems of this frequency band.
+	    See <xref linkend="band-modulation" />. Note that currently only one
+	    modulation system per frequency band is supported. More work will need to
+	    be done if multiple modulation systems are possible. Contact the
+	    linux-media mailing list (&v4l-ml;) if you need that functionality.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[9]</entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Applications and drivers
+	    must set the array to zero.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="band-modulation">
+      <title>Band Modulation Systems</title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-def;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BAND_MODULATION_VSB</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x02</entry>
+	    <entry>Vestigial Sideband modulation, used for analog TV.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BAND_MODULATION_FM</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x04</entry>
+	    <entry>Frequency Modulation, commonly used for analog radio.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BAND_MODULATION_AM</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x08</entry>
+	    <entry>Amplitude Modulation, commonly used for analog radio.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    &return-value;
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>The <structfield>tuner</structfield> or <structfield>index</structfield>
+is out of bounds or the <structfield>type</structfield> field is wrong.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+</refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml
index 9b8efcd6e947..493a39a8ef21 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml
@@ -278,14 +278,9 @@ input/output interface to linux-media@vger.kernel.org on 19 Oct 2009.
 	&cs-def;
 	<tbody valign="top">
 	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_IN_CAP_PRESETS</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>0x00000001</entry>
-	    <entry>This input supports setting DV presets by using VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_IN_CAP_CUSTOM_TIMINGS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_IN_CAP_DV_TIMINGS</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>0x00000002</entry>
-	    <entry>This input supports setting custom video timings by using VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS.</entry>
+	    <entry>This input supports setting video timings by using VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_IN_CAP_STD</constant></entry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumoutput.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumoutput.xml
index a64d5ef103fa..2654e097df39 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumoutput.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumoutput.xml
@@ -163,14 +163,9 @@ input/output interface to linux-media@vger.kernel.org on 19 Oct 2009.
 	&cs-def;
 	<tbody valign="top">
 	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_OUT_CAP_PRESETS</constant></entry>
-	    <entry>0x00000001</entry>
-	    <entry>This output supports setting DV presets by using VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET.</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_OUT_CAP_CUSTOM_TIMINGS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_OUT_CAP_DV_TIMINGS</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>0x00000002</entry>
-	    <entry>This output supports setting custom video timings by using VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS.</entry>
+	    <entry>This output supports setting video timings by using VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_OUT_CAP_STD</constant></entry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumstd.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumstd.xml
index 3a5fc5405f96..8065099401d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumstd.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumstd.xml
@@ -378,6 +378,12 @@ system)</para></footnote></para></entry>
 is out of bounds.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Standard video timings are not supported for this input or output.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
     </variablelist>
   </refsect1>
 </refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-expbuf.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-expbuf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e287c8fc803b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-expbuf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+<refentry id="vidioc-expbuf">
+
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_EXPBUF</refentrytitle>
+    &manvol;
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_EXPBUF</refname>
+    <refpurpose>Export a buffer as a DMABUF file descriptor.</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>struct v4l2_exportbuffer *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Arguments</title>
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>&fd;</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_EXPBUF</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Description</title>
+
+    <note>
+      <title>Experimental</title>
+      <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental"> experimental </link>
+      interface and may change in the future.</para>
+    </note>
+
+<para>This ioctl is an extension to the <link linkend="mmap">memory
+mapping</link> I/O method, therefore it is available only for
+<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_MMAP</constant> buffers.  It can be used to export a
+buffer as a DMABUF file at any time after buffers have been allocated with the
+&VIDIOC-REQBUFS; ioctl.</para>
+
+<para> To export a buffer, applications fill &v4l2-exportbuffer;.  The
+<structfield> type </structfield> field is set to the same buffer type as was
+previously used with  &v4l2-requestbuffers;<structfield> type </structfield>.
+Applications must also set the <structfield> index </structfield> field. Valid
+index numbers range from zero to the number of buffers allocated with
+&VIDIOC-REQBUFS; (&v4l2-requestbuffers;<structfield> count </structfield>)
+minus one.  For the multi-planar API, applications set the <structfield> plane
+</structfield> field to the index of the plane to be exported. Valid planes
+range from zero to the maximal number of valid planes for the currently active
+format. For the single-planar API, applications must set <structfield> plane
+</structfield> to zero.  Additional flags may be posted in the <structfield>
+flags </structfield> field.  Refer to a manual for open() for details.
+Currently only O_CLOEXEC is supported.  All other fields must be set to zero.
+In the case of multi-planar API, every plane is exported separately using
+multiple <constant> VIDIOC_EXPBUF </constant> calls. </para>
+
+<para> After calling <constant>VIDIOC_EXPBUF</constant> the <structfield> fd
+</structfield> field will be set by a driver.  This is a DMABUF file
+descriptor. The application may pass it to other DMABUF-aware devices. Refer to
+<link linkend="dmabuf">DMABUF importing</link> for details about importing
+DMABUF files into V4L2 nodes. It is recommended to close a DMABUF file when it
+is no longer used to allow the associated memory to be reclaimed. </para>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Examples</title>
+
+    <example>
+      <title>Exporting a buffer.</title>
+      <programlisting>
+int buffer_export(int v4lfd, &v4l2-buf-type; bt, int index, int *dmafd)
+{
+	&v4l2-exportbuffer; expbuf;
+
+	memset(&amp;expbuf, 0, sizeof(expbuf));
+	expbuf.type = bt;
+	expbuf.index = index;
+	if (ioctl(v4lfd, &VIDIOC-EXPBUF;, &amp;expbuf) == -1) {
+		perror("VIDIOC_EXPBUF");
+		return -1;
+	}
+
+	*dmafd = expbuf.fd;
+
+	return 0;
+}
+      </programlisting>
+    </example>
+
+    <example>
+      <title>Exporting a buffer using the multi-planar API.</title>
+      <programlisting>
+int buffer_export_mp(int v4lfd, &v4l2-buf-type; bt, int index,
+	int dmafd[], int n_planes)
+{
+	int i;
+
+	for (i = 0; i &lt; n_planes; ++i) {
+		&v4l2-exportbuffer; expbuf;
+
+		memset(&amp;expbuf, 0, sizeof(expbuf));
+		expbuf.type = bt;
+		expbuf.index = index;
+		expbuf.plane = i;
+		if (ioctl(v4lfd, &VIDIOC-EXPBUF;, &amp;expbuf) == -1) {
+			perror("VIDIOC_EXPBUF");
+			while (i)
+				close(dmafd[--i]);
+			return -1;
+		}
+		dmafd[i] = expbuf.fd;
+	}
+
+	return 0;
+}
+      </programlisting>
+    </example>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-exportbuffer">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_exportbuffer</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Type of the buffer, same as &v4l2-format;
+<structfield>type</structfield> or &v4l2-requestbuffers;
+<structfield>type</structfield>, set by the application. See <xref
+linkend="v4l2-buf-type" /></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>index</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Number of the buffer, set by the application. This field is
+only used for <link linkend="mmap">memory mapping</link> I/O and can range from
+zero to the number of buffers allocated with the &VIDIOC-REQBUFS; and/or
+&VIDIOC-CREATE-BUFS; ioctls. </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>plane</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Index of the plane to be exported when using the
+multi-planar API. Otherwise this value must be set to zero. </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>flags</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Flags for the newly created file, currently only <constant>
+O_CLOEXEC </constant> is supported, refer to the manual of open() for more
+details.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__s32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>fd</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>The DMABUF file descriptor associated with a buffer. Set by
+		the driver.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved[11]</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved field for future use. Must be set to zero.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    &return-value;
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>A queue is not in MMAP mode or DMABUF exporting is not
+supported or <structfield> flags </structfield> or <structfield> type
+</structfield> or <structfield> index </structfield> or <structfield> plane
+</structfield> fields are invalid.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+</refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-crop.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-crop.xml
index 01a50640dce0..75c6a93de3c1 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-crop.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-crop.xml
@@ -100,14 +100,12 @@ changed and <constant>VIDIOC_S_CROP</constant> returns the
 	&cs-str;
 	<tbody valign="top">
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-buf-type;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>Type of the data stream, set by the application.
 Only these types are valid here: <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE</constant>,
-<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT</constant>,
-<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant>, and custom (driver
-defined) types with code <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant>
-and higher.</entry>
+<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT</constant> and
+<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant>. See <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>&v4l2-rect;</entry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-ctrl.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-ctrl.xml
index 12b1d0503e26..ee2820d6ca66 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-ctrl.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-ctrl.xml
@@ -64,7 +64,9 @@ return an &EINVAL;. When the <structfield>value</structfield> is out
 of bounds drivers can choose to take the closest valid value or return
 an &ERANGE;, whatever seems more appropriate. However,
 <constant>VIDIOC_S_CTRL</constant> is a write-only ioctl, it does not
-return the actual new value.</para>
+return the actual new value. If the <structfield>value</structfield>
+is inappropriate for the control (e.g. if it refers to an unsupported
+menu index of a menu control), then &EINVAL; is returned as well.</para>
 
     <para>These ioctls work only with user controls. For other
 control classes the &VIDIOC-G-EXT-CTRLS;, &VIDIOC-S-EXT-CTRLS; or
@@ -99,7 +101,9 @@ application.</entry>
 	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
 	<listitem>
 	  <para>The &v4l2-control; <structfield>id</structfield> is
-invalid.</para>
+invalid or the <structfield>value</structfield> is inappropriate for
+the given control (i.e. if a menu item is selected that is not supported
+by the driver according to &VIDIOC-QUERYMENU;).</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
       <varlistentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index 7940c1149393..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,104 +0,0 @@
-<refentry id="vidioc-g-dv-preset">
-  <refmeta>
-    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_G_DV_PRESET, VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET</refentrytitle>
-    &manvol;
-  </refmeta>
-
-  <refnamediv>
-    <refname>VIDIOC_G_DV_PRESET</refname>
-    <refname>VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET</refname>
-    <refpurpose>Query or select the DV preset of the current input or output</refpurpose>
-  </refnamediv>
-
-  <refsynopsisdiv>
-    <funcsynopsis>
-      <funcprototype>
-	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
-	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
-	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
-	<paramdef>struct v4l2_dv_preset *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
-      </funcprototype>
-    </funcsynopsis>
-  </refsynopsisdiv>
-
-  <refsect1>
-    <title>Arguments</title>
-
-    <variablelist>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>&fd;</para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>VIDIOC_G_DV_PRESET, VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET</para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para></para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-    </variablelist>
-  </refsect1>
-
-  <refsect1>
-    <title>Description</title>
-    <para>To query and select the current DV preset, applications
-use the <constant>VIDIOC_G_DV_PRESET</constant> and <constant>VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET</constant>
-ioctls which take a pointer to a &v4l2-dv-preset; type as argument.
-Applications must zero the reserved array in &v4l2-dv-preset;.
-<constant>VIDIOC_G_DV_PRESET</constant> returns a dv preset in the field
-<structfield>preset</structfield> of &v4l2-dv-preset;.</para>
-
-    <para><constant>VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET</constant> accepts a pointer to a &v4l2-dv-preset;
-that has the preset value to be set. Applications must zero the reserved array in &v4l2-dv-preset;.
-If the preset is not supported, it returns an &EINVAL; </para>
-  </refsect1>
-
-  <refsect1>
-    &return-value;
-
-    <variablelist>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>This ioctl is not supported, or the
-<constant>VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET</constant>,<constant>VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET</constant> parameter was unsuitable.</para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><errorcode>EBUSY</errorcode></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>The device is busy and therefore can not change the preset.</para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-    </variablelist>
-
-    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-dv-preset">
-      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_dv_preset</structname></title>
-      <tgroup cols="3">
-	&cs-str;
-	<tbody valign="top">
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>preset</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Preset value to represent the digital video timings</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>reserved[4]</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Reserved fields for future use</entry>
-	  </row>
-	</tbody>
-      </tgroup>
-    </table>
-  </refsect1>
-  <refsect1>
-    &return-value;
-  </refsect1>
-</refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml
index 4a8648ae9a63..c4336577ff06 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
   <refnamediv>
     <refname>VIDIOC_G_DV_TIMINGS</refname>
     <refname>VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS</refname>
-    <refpurpose>Get or set custom DV timings for input or output</refpurpose>
+    <refpurpose>Get or set DV timings for input or output</refpurpose>
   </refnamediv>
 
   <refsynopsisdiv>
@@ -48,12 +48,17 @@
 
   <refsect1>
     <title>Description</title>
-    <para>To set custom DV timings for the input or output, applications use the
-<constant>VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS</constant> ioctl and to get the current custom timings,
+    <para>To set DV timings for the input or output, applications use the
+<constant>VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS</constant> ioctl and to get the current timings,
 applications use the <constant>VIDIOC_G_DV_TIMINGS</constant> ioctl. The detailed timing
 information is filled in using the structure &v4l2-dv-timings;. These ioctls take
 a pointer to the &v4l2-dv-timings; structure as argument. If the ioctl is not supported
 or the timing values are not correct, the driver returns &EINVAL;.</para>
+<para>The <filename>linux/v4l2-dv-timings.h</filename> header can be used to get the
+timings of the formats in the <xref linkend="cea861" /> and <xref linkend="vesadmt" />
+standards. If the current input or output does not support DV timings (e.g. if
+&VIDIOC-ENUMINPUT; does not set the <constant>V4L2_IN_CAP_DV_TIMINGS</constant> flag), then
+&ENODATA; is returned.</para>
   </refsect1>
 
   <refsect1>
@@ -68,6 +73,12 @@ or the timing values are not correct, the driver returns &EINVAL;.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
       <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Digital video timings are not supported for this input or output.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
 	<term><errorcode>EBUSY</errorcode></term>
 	<listitem>
 	  <para>The device is busy and therefore can not change the timings.</para>
@@ -83,12 +94,13 @@ or the timing values are not correct, the driver returns &EINVAL;.</para>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>width</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Width of the active video in pixels</entry>
+	    <entry>Width of the active video in pixels.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>height</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Height of the active video in lines</entry>
+	    <entry>Height of the active video frame in lines. So for interlaced formats the
+	    height of the active video in each field is <structfield>height</structfield>/2.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
@@ -125,32 +137,52 @@ bit 0 (V4L2_DV_VSYNC_POS_POL) is for vertical sync polarity and bit 1 (V4L2_DV_H
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>vfrontporch</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Vertical front porch in lines</entry>
+	    <entry>Vertical front porch in lines. For interlaced formats this refers to the
+	    odd field (aka field 1).</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>vsync</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Vertical sync length in lines</entry>
+	    <entry>Vertical sync length in lines. For interlaced formats this refers to the
+	    odd field (aka field 1).</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>vbackporch</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Vertical back porch in lines</entry>
+	    <entry>Vertical back porch in lines. For interlaced formats this refers to the
+	    odd field (aka field 1).</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>il_vfrontporch</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Vertical front porch in lines for bottom field of interlaced field formats</entry>
+	    <entry>Vertical front porch in lines for the even field (aka field 2) of
+	    interlaced field formats. Must be 0 for progressive formats.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>il_vsync</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Vertical sync length in lines for bottom field of interlaced field formats</entry>
+	    <entry>Vertical sync length in lines for the even field (aka field 2) of
+	    interlaced field formats. Must be 0 for progressive formats.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>il_vbackporch</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Vertical back porch in lines for bottom field of interlaced field formats</entry>
+	    <entry>Vertical back porch in lines for the even field (aka field 2) of
+	    interlaced field formats. Must be 0 for progressive formats.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>standards</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>The video standard(s) this format belongs to. This will be filled in by
+	    the driver. Applications must set this to 0. See <xref linkend="dv-bt-standards"/>
+	    for a list of standards.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>flags</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Several flags giving more information about the format.
+	    See <xref linkend="dv-bt-flags"/> for a description of the flags.
+	    </entry>
 	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
@@ -211,8 +243,89 @@ bit 0 (V4L2_DV_VSYNC_POS_POL) is for vertical sync polarity and bit 1 (V4L2_DV_H
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
-  </refsect1>
-  <refsect1>
-    &return-value;
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="dv-bt-standards">
+      <title>DV BT Timing standards</title>
+      <tgroup cols="2">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>Timing standard</entry>
+	    <entry>Description</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>V4L2_DV_BT_STD_CEA861</entry>
+	    <entry>The timings follow the CEA-861 Digital TV Profile standard</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>V4L2_DV_BT_STD_DMT</entry>
+	    <entry>The timings follow the VESA Discrete Monitor Timings standard</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>V4L2_DV_BT_STD_CVT</entry>
+	    <entry>The timings follow the VESA Coordinated Video Timings standard</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>V4L2_DV_BT_STD_GTF</entry>
+	    <entry>The timings follow the VESA Generalized Timings Formula standard</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="dv-bt-flags">
+      <title>DV BT Timing flags</title>
+      <tgroup cols="2">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>Flag</entry>
+	    <entry>Description</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>V4L2_DV_FL_REDUCED_BLANKING</entry>
+	    <entry>CVT/GTF specific: the timings use reduced blanking (CVT) or the 'Secondary
+GTF' curve (GTF). In both cases the horizontal and/or vertical blanking
+intervals are reduced, allowing a higher resolution over the same
+bandwidth. This is a read-only flag, applications must not set this.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>V4L2_DV_FL_CAN_REDUCE_FPS</entry>
+	    <entry>CEA-861 specific: set for CEA-861 formats with a framerate that is a multiple
+of six. These formats can be optionally played at 1 / 1.001 speed to
+be compatible with 60 Hz based standards such as NTSC and PAL-M that use a framerate of
+29.97 frames per second. If the transmitter can't generate such frequencies, then the
+flag will also be cleared. This is a read-only flag, applications must not set this.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>V4L2_DV_FL_REDUCED_FPS</entry>
+	    <entry>CEA-861 specific: only valid for video transmitters, the flag is cleared
+by receivers. It is also only valid for formats with the V4L2_DV_FL_CAN_REDUCE_FPS flag
+set, for other formats the flag will be cleared by the driver.
+
+If the application sets this flag, then the pixelclock used to set up the transmitter is
+divided by 1.001 to make it compatible with NTSC framerates. If the transmitter
+can't generate such frequencies, then the flag will also be cleared.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>V4L2_DV_FL_HALF_LINE</entry>
+	    <entry>Specific to interlaced formats: if set, then field 1 (aka the odd field)
+is really one half-line longer and field 2 (aka the even field) is really one half-line
+shorter, so each field has exactly the same number of half-lines. Whether half-lines can be
+detected or used depends on the hardware.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
   </refsect1>
 </refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-enc-index.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-enc-index.xml
index 2aef02c9044e..be25029a16f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-enc-index.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-enc-index.xml
@@ -48,13 +48,6 @@
   <refsect1>
     <title>Description</title>
 
-    <note>
-      <title>Experimental</title>
-
-      <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link>
-interface and may change in the future.</para>
-    </note>
-
     <para>The <constant>VIDIOC_G_ENC_INDEX</constant> ioctl provides
 meta data about a compressed video stream the same or another
 application currently reads from the driver, which is useful for
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-ext-ctrls.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-ext-ctrls.xml
index b17a7aac6997..b3bb9575b2e0 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-ext-ctrls.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-ext-ctrls.xml
@@ -106,7 +106,9 @@ value or if an error is returned.</para>
 &EINVAL;. When the value is out of bounds drivers can choose to take
 the closest valid value or return an &ERANGE;, whatever seems more
 appropriate. In the first case the new value is set in
-&v4l2-ext-control;.</para>
+&v4l2-ext-control;. If the new control value is inappropriate (e.g. the
+given menu index is not supported by the menu control), then this will
+also result in an &EINVAL; error.</para>
 
     <para>The driver will only set/get these controls if all control
 values are correct. This prevents the situation where only some of the
@@ -199,13 +201,46 @@ also be zero.</entry>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>error_idx</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Set by the driver in case of an error. If it is equal
-to <structfield>count</structfield>, then no actual changes were made to
-controls. In other words, the error was not associated with setting a particular
-control. If it is another value, then only the controls up to <structfield>error_idx-1</structfield>
-were modified and control <structfield>error_idx</structfield> is the one that
-caused the error. The <structfield>error_idx</structfield> value is undefined
-if the ioctl returned 0 (success).</entry>
+	    <entry><para>Set by the driver in case of an error. If the error is
+associated with a particular control, then <structfield>error_idx</structfield>
+is set to the index of that control. If the error is not related to a specific
+control, or the validation step failed (see below), then
+<structfield>error_idx</structfield> is set to <structfield>count</structfield>.
+The value is undefined if the ioctl returned 0 (success).</para>
+
+<para>Before controls are read from/written to hardware a validation step
+takes place: this checks if all controls in the list are valid controls,
+if no attempt is made to write to a read-only control or read from a write-only
+control, and any other up-front checks that can be done without accessing the
+hardware. The exact validations done during this step are driver dependent
+since some checks might require hardware access for some devices, thus making
+it impossible to do those checks up-front. However, drivers should make a
+best-effort to do as many up-front checks as possible.</para>
+
+<para>This check is done to avoid leaving the hardware in an inconsistent state due
+to easy-to-avoid problems. But it leads to another problem: the application needs to
+know whether an error came from the validation step (meaning that the hardware
+was not touched) or from an error during the actual reading from/writing to hardware.</para>
+
+<para>The, in hindsight quite poor, solution for that is to set <structfield>error_idx</structfield>
+to <structfield>count</structfield> if the validation failed. This has the
+unfortunate side-effect that it is not possible to see which control failed the
+validation. If the validation was successful and the error happened while
+accessing the hardware, then <structfield>error_idx</structfield> is less than
+<structfield>count</structfield> and only the controls up to
+<structfield>error_idx-1</structfield> were read or written correctly, and the
+state of the remaining controls is undefined.</para>
+
+<para>Since <constant>VIDIOC_TRY_EXT_CTRLS</constant> does not access hardware
+there is also no need to handle the validation step in this special way,
+so <structfield>error_idx</structfield> will just be set to the control that
+failed the validation step instead of to <structfield>count</structfield>.
+This means that if <constant>VIDIOC_S_EXT_CTRLS</constant> fails with
+<structfield>error_idx</structfield> set to <structfield>count</structfield>,
+then you can call <constant>VIDIOC_TRY_EXT_CTRLS</constant> to try to discover
+the actual control that failed the validation step. Unfortunately, there
+is no <constant>TRY</constant> equivalent for <constant>VIDIOC_G_EXT_CTRLS</constant>.
+</para></entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
@@ -265,6 +300,34 @@ These controls are described in <xref
 These controls are described in <xref
 		linkend="flash-controls" />.</entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_JPEG</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x9d0000</entry>
+	    <entry>The class containing JPEG compression controls.
+These controls are described in <xref
+		linkend="jpeg-controls" />.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_IMAGE_SOURCE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x9e0000</entry> <entry>The class containing image
+	    source controls. These controls are described in <xref
+	    linkend="image-source-controls" />.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_IMAGE_PROC</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x9f0000</entry> <entry>The class containing image
+	    processing controls. These controls are described in <xref
+	    linkend="image-process-controls" />.</entry>
+	  </row>
+
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_FM_RX</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0xa10000</entry>
+	    <entry>The class containing FM Receiver (FM RX) controls.
+These controls are described in <xref
+		linkend="fm-rx-controls" />.</entry>
+	  </row>
+
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
@@ -279,8 +342,10 @@ These controls are described in <xref
 	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
 	<listitem>
 	  <para>The &v4l2-ext-control; <structfield>id</structfield>
-is invalid or the &v4l2-ext-controls;
-<structfield>ctrl_class</structfield> is invalid. This error code is
+is invalid, the &v4l2-ext-controls;
+<structfield>ctrl_class</structfield> is invalid, or the &v4l2-ext-control;
+<structfield>value</structfield> was inappropriate (e.g. the given menu
+index is not supported by the driver). This error code is
 also returned by the <constant>VIDIOC_S_EXT_CTRLS</constant> and
 <constant>VIDIOC_TRY_EXT_CTRLS</constant> ioctls if two or more
 control values are in conflict.</para>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-fmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-fmt.xml
index 17fbda15137b..ee8f56e1bac0 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-fmt.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-fmt.xml
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ the application calls the <constant>VIDIOC_S_FMT</constant> ioctl
 with a pointer to a <structname>v4l2_format</structname> structure
 the driver checks
 and adjusts the parameters against hardware abilities. Drivers
-should not return an error code unless the input is ambiguous, this is
+should not return an error code unless the <structfield>type</structfield> field is invalid, this is
 a mechanism to fathom device capabilities and to approach parameters
 acceptable for both the application and driver. On success the driver
 may program the hardware, allocate resources and generally prepare for
@@ -107,6 +107,10 @@ disabling I/O or possibly time consuming hardware preparations.
 Although strongly recommended drivers are not required to implement
 this ioctl.</para>
 
+    <para>The format as returned by <constant>VIDIOC_TRY_FMT</constant>
+must be identical to what <constant>VIDIOC_S_FMT</constant> returns for
+the same input or output.</para>
+
     <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-format">
       <title>struct <structname>v4l2_format</structname></title>
       <tgroup cols="4">
@@ -116,7 +120,7 @@ this ioctl.</para>
 	<colspec colname="c4" />
 	<tbody valign="top">
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-buf-type;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry></entry>
 	    <entry>Type of the data stream, see <xref
@@ -170,9 +174,7 @@ capture and output devices.</entry>
 	    <entry></entry>
 	    <entry>__u8</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>raw_data</structfield>[200]</entry>
-	    <entry>Place holder for future extensions and custom
-(driver defined) formats with <structfield>type</structfield>
-<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> and higher.</entry>
+	    <entry>Place holder for future extensions.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
@@ -187,8 +189,7 @@ capture and output devices.</entry>
 	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
 	<listitem>
 	  <para>The &v4l2-format; <structfield>type</structfield>
-field is invalid, the requested buffer type not supported, or the
-format is not supported with this buffer type.</para>
+field is invalid or the requested buffer type not supported.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
     </variablelist>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-frequency.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-frequency.xml
index 66e9a5257861..c7a1c462e724 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-frequency.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-frequency.xml
@@ -95,14 +95,15 @@ the &v4l2-output; <structfield>modulator</structfield> field and the
 &v4l2-modulator; <structfield>index</structfield> field.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-tuner-type;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>The tuner type. This is the same value as in the
 &v4l2-tuner; <structfield>type</structfield> field. The type must be set
 to <constant>V4L2_TUNER_RADIO</constant> for <filename>/dev/radioX</filename>
 device nodes, and to <constant>V4L2_TUNER_ANALOG_TV</constant>
-for all others. The field is not applicable to modulators, &ie; ignored
-by drivers.</entry>
+for all others. Set this field to <constant>V4L2_TUNER_RADIO</constant> for
+modulators (currently only radio modulators are supported).
+See <xref linkend="v4l2-tuner-type" /></entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
@@ -135,6 +136,12 @@ bounds or the value in the <structfield>type</structfield> field is
 wrong.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>EBUSY</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>A hardware seek is in progress.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
     </variablelist>
   </refsect1>
 </refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-jpegcomp.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-jpegcomp.xml
index 01ea24b84385..098ff483802e 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-jpegcomp.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-jpegcomp.xml
@@ -57,6 +57,11 @@
   <refsect1>
     <title>Description</title>
 
+    <para>These ioctls are <emphasis role="bold">deprecated</emphasis>.
+    New drivers and applications should use <link linkend="jpeg-controls">
+    JPEG class controls</link> for image quality and JPEG markers control.
+    </para>
+
     <para>[to do]</para>
 
     <para>Ronald Bultje elaborates:</para>
@@ -86,7 +91,10 @@ to add them.</para>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>int</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>quality</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>Deprecated. If <link linkend="jpeg-quality-control"><constant>
+	    V4L2_CID_JPEG_COMPRESSION_QUALITY</constant></link> control is exposed
+	    by a driver applications should use it instead and ignore this field.
+	    </entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>int</entry>
@@ -116,7 +124,11 @@ to add them.</para>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>jpeg_markers</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>See <xref linkend="jpeg-markers" />.</entry>
+	    <entry>See <xref linkend="jpeg-markers"/>. Deprecated.
+	    If <link linkend="jpeg-active-marker-control"><constant>
+	    V4L2_CID_JPEG_ACTIVE_MARKER</constant></link> control
+	    is exposed by a driver applications should use it instead
+	    and ignore this field.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.xml
index 19b1d85dd668..f4e28e7d4751 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.xml
@@ -75,11 +75,12 @@ devices.</para>
 	&cs-ustr;
 	<tbody valign="top">
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-buf-type;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry></entry>
 	    <entry>The buffer (stream) type, same as &v4l2-format;
-<structfield>type</structfield>, set by the application.</entry>
+<structfield>type</structfield>, set by the application. See <xref
+	    linkend="v4l2-buf-type" /></entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>union</entry>
@@ -107,9 +108,7 @@ devices.</para>
 	    <entry></entry>
 	    <entry>__u8</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>raw_data</structfield>[200]</entry>
-	    <entry>A place holder for future extensions and custom
-(driver defined) buffer types <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> and
-higher.</entry>
+	    <entry>A place holder for future extensions.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
@@ -133,7 +132,7 @@ higher.</entry>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>&v4l2-fract;</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>timeperframe</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry><para>This is is the desired period between
+	    <entry><para>This is the desired period between
 successive frames captured by the driver, in seconds. The
 field is intended to skip frames on the driver side, saving I/O
 bandwidth.</para><para>Applications store here the desired frame
@@ -194,7 +193,7 @@ applications must set the array to zero.</entry>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>&v4l2-fract;</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>timeperframe</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>This is is the desired period between
+	    <entry>This is the desired period between
 successive frames output by the driver, in seconds.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-selection.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-selection.xml
index a9d36e0c090e..b11ec75e21a1 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-selection.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-selection.xml
@@ -58,43 +58,43 @@
 
     <para>The ioctls are used to query and configure selection rectangles.</para>
 
-<para> To query the cropping (composing) rectangle set <structfield>
-&v4l2-selection;::type </structfield> to the respective buffer type.  Do not
-use multiplanar buffers.  Use <constant> V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE
+<para> To query the cropping (composing) rectangle set &v4l2-selection;
+<structfield> type </structfield> field to the respective buffer type.
+Do not use multiplanar buffers.  Use <constant> V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE
 </constant> instead of <constant> V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE_MPLANE
 </constant>.  Use <constant> V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT </constant> instead of
 <constant> V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_MPLANE </constant>.  The next step is
-setting <structfield> &v4l2-selection;::target </structfield> to value
-<constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP_ACTIVE </constant> (<constant>
-V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_ACTIVE </constant>).  Please refer to table <xref
-linkend="v4l2-sel-target" /> or <xref linkend="selection-api" /> for additional
-targets.  Fields <structfield> &v4l2-selection;::flags </structfield> and
-<structfield> &v4l2-selection;::reserved </structfield> are ignored and they
-must be filled with zeros.  The driver fills the rest of the structure or
+setting the value of &v4l2-selection; <structfield>target</structfield> field
+to <constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP </constant> (<constant>
+V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE </constant>).  Please refer to table <xref
+linkend="v4l2-selections-common" /> or <xref linkend="selection-api" /> for additional
+targets.  The <structfield>flags</structfield> and <structfield>reserved
+</structfield> fields of &v4l2-selection; are ignored and they must be filled
+with zeros.  The driver fills the rest of the structure or
 returns &EINVAL; if incorrect buffer type or target was used. If cropping
 (composing) is not supported then the active rectangle is not mutable and it is
-always equal to the bounds rectangle.  Finally, structure <structfield>
-&v4l2-selection;::r </structfield> is filled with the current cropping
+always equal to the bounds rectangle.  Finally, the &v4l2-rect;
+<structfield>r</structfield> rectangle is filled with the current cropping
 (composing) coordinates. The coordinates are expressed in driver-dependent
 units. The only exception are rectangles for images in raw formats, whose
 coordinates are always expressed in pixels.  </para>
 
-<para> To change the cropping (composing) rectangle set <structfield>
-&v4l2-selection;::type </structfield> to the respective buffer type.  Do not
+<para> To change the cropping (composing) rectangle set the &v4l2-selection;
+<structfield>type</structfield> field to the respective buffer type.  Do not
 use multiplanar buffers.  Use <constant> V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE
 </constant> instead of <constant> V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE_MPLANE
 </constant>.  Use <constant> V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT </constant> instead of
 <constant> V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_MPLANE </constant>.  The next step is
-setting <structfield> &v4l2-selection;::target </structfield> to value
-<constant> V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP_ACTIVE </constant> (<constant>
-V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_ACTIVE </constant>). Please refer to table <xref
-linkend="v4l2-sel-target" /> or <xref linkend="selection-api" /> for additional
-targets.  Set desired active area into the field <structfield>
-&v4l2-selection;::r </structfield>.  Field <structfield>
-&v4l2-selection;::reserved </structfield> is ignored and must be filled with
-zeros.  The driver may adjust the rectangle coordinates. An application may
-introduce constraints to control rounding behaviour. Set the field
-<structfield> &v4l2-selection;::flags </structfield> to one of values:
+setting the value of &v4l2-selection; <structfield>target</structfield> to
+<constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP</constant> (<constant>
+V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE </constant>). Please refer to table <xref
+linkend="v4l2-selections-common" /> or <xref linkend="selection-api" /> for additional
+targets.  The &v4l2-rect; <structfield>r</structfield> rectangle need to be
+set to the desired active area. Field &v4l2-selection; <structfield> reserved
+</structfield> is ignored and must be filled with zeros.  The driver may adjust
+coordinates of the requested rectangle. An application may
+introduce constraints to control rounding behaviour. The &v4l2-selection;
+<structfield>flags</structfield> field must be set to one of the following:
 
 <itemizedlist>
   <listitem>
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ and vertical offset and sizes are chosen according to following priority:
 
 <orderedlist>
   <listitem>
-    <para>Satisfy constraints from <structfield>&v4l2-selection;::flags</structfield>.</para>
+    <para>Satisfy constraints from &v4l2-selection; <structfield>flags</structfield>.</para>
   </listitem>
   <listitem>
     <para>Adjust width, height, left, and top to hardware limits and alignments.</para>
@@ -145,83 +145,17 @@ and vertical offset and sizes are chosen according to following priority:
   </listitem>
 </orderedlist>
 
-On success the field <structfield> &v4l2-selection;::r </structfield> contains
+On success the &v4l2-rect; <structfield>r</structfield> field contains
 the adjusted rectangle. When the parameters are unsuitable the application may
 modify the cropping (composing) or image parameters and repeat the cycle until
 satisfactory parameters have been negotiated. If constraints flags have to be
 violated at then ERANGE is returned. The error indicates that <emphasis> there
 exist no rectangle </emphasis> that satisfies the constraints.</para>
 
-  </refsect1>
+  <para>Selection targets and flags are documented in <xref
+  linkend="v4l2-selections-common"/>.</para>
 
-  <refsect1>
-    <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-sel-target">
-      <title>Selection targets.</title>
-      <tgroup cols="3">
-	&cs-def;
-	<tbody valign="top">
-	  <row>
-            <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP_ACTIVE</constant></entry>
-            <entry>0</entry>
-            <entry>area that is currently cropped by hardware</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-            <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP_DEFAULT</constant></entry>
-            <entry>1</entry>
-            <entry>suggested cropping rectangle that covers the "whole picture"</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-            <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_CROP_BOUNDS</constant></entry>
-            <entry>2</entry>
-            <entry>limits for the cropping rectangle</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-            <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_ACTIVE</constant></entry>
-            <entry>256</entry>
-            <entry>area to which data are composed by hardware</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-            <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_DEFAULT</constant></entry>
-            <entry>257</entry>
-            <entry>suggested composing rectangle that covers the "whole picture"</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-            <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_BOUNDS</constant></entry>
-            <entry>258</entry>
-            <entry>limits for the composing rectangle</entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-            <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE_PADDED</constant></entry>
-            <entry>259</entry>
-            <entry>the active area and all padding pixels that are inserted or modified by the hardware</entry>
-	  </row>
-	</tbody>
-      </tgroup>
-    </table>
-  </refsect1>
-
-  <refsect1>
-    <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-sel-flags">
-      <title>Selection constraint flags</title>
-      <tgroup cols="3">
-	&cs-def;
-	<tbody valign="top">
-	  <row>
-            <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_FLAG_GE</constant></entry>
-            <entry>0x00000001</entry>
-            <entry>indicate that adjusted rectangle must contain a rectangle from <structfield>&v4l2-selection;::r</structfield></entry>
-	  </row>
-	  <row>
-            <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_FLAG_LE</constant></entry>
-            <entry>0x00000002</entry>
-            <entry>indicate that adjusted rectangle must be inside a rectangle from <structfield>&v4l2-selection;::r</structfield></entry>
-	  </row>
-	</tbody>
-      </tgroup>
-    </table>
-  </refsect1>
-
-    <section>
+    <para>
       <figure id="sel-const-adjust">
 	<title>Size adjustments with constraint flags.</title>
 	<mediaobject>
@@ -234,9 +168,9 @@ exist no rectangle </emphasis> that satisfies the constraints.</para>
 	  </textobject>
 	</mediaobject>
       </figure>
-    </section>
+    </para>
 
-  <refsect1>
+  <para>
     <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-selection">
       <title>struct <structname>v4l2_selection</structname></title>
       <tgroup cols="3">
@@ -245,31 +179,34 @@ exist no rectangle </emphasis> that satisfies the constraints.</para>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Type of the buffer (from &v4l2-buf-type;)</entry>
+	    <entry>Type of the buffer (from &v4l2-buf-type;).</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>target</structfield></entry>
-            <entry>used to select between <link linkend="v4l2-sel-target"> cropping and composing rectangles </link></entry>
+            <entry>Used to select between <link linkend="v4l2-selections-common"> cropping
+	    and composing rectangles</link>.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>flags</structfield></entry>
-            <entry>control over coordinates adjustments, refer to <link linkend="v4l2-sel-flags">selection flags</link></entry>
+            <entry>Flags controlling the selection rectangle adjustments, refer to
+	    <link linkend="v4l2-selection-flags">selection flags</link>.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>&v4l2-rect;</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>r</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>selection rectangle</entry>
+	    <entry>The selection rectangle.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>reserved[9]</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Reserved fields for future use</entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved fields for future use.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
+  </para>
   </refsect1>
 
   <refsect1>
@@ -278,24 +215,24 @@ exist no rectangle </emphasis> that satisfies the constraints.</para>
       <varlistentry>
 	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
 	<listitem>
-	  <para>The buffer <structfield> &v4l2-selection;::type </structfield>
-or <structfield> &v4l2-selection;::target </structfield> is not supported, or
-the <structfield> &v4l2-selection;::flags </structfield> are invalid.</para>
+	  <para>Given buffer type <structfield>type</structfield> or
+the selection target <structfield>target</structfield> is not supported,
+or the <structfield>flags</structfield> argument is not valid.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
       <varlistentry>
 	<term><errorcode>ERANGE</errorcode></term>
 	<listitem>
-	  <para>it is not possible to adjust a rectangle <structfield>
-&v4l2-selection;::r </structfield> that satisfies all contraints from
-<structfield> &v4l2-selection;::flags </structfield>.</para>
+	  <para>It is not possible to adjust &v4l2-rect; <structfield>
+r</structfield> rectangle to satisfy all contraints given in the
+<structfield>flags</structfield> argument.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
       <varlistentry>
 	<term><errorcode>EBUSY</errorcode></term>
 	<listitem>
-	  <para>it is not possible to apply change of selection rectangle at the moment.
-Usually because streaming is in progress.</para>
+	  <para>It is not possible to apply change of the selection rectangle
+at the moment. Usually because streaming is in progress.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
     </variablelist>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-sliced-vbi-cap.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-sliced-vbi-cap.xml
index 71741daaf725..bd015d1563ff 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-sliced-vbi-cap.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-sliced-vbi-cap.xml
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ using the &VIDIOC-S-FMT; ioctl as described in <xref
 <structfield>service_lines</structfield>[1][0] to zero.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-buf-type;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>Type of the data stream, see <xref
 		  linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />. Should be
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-std.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-std.xml
index 99ff1a016220..4a898417de28 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-std.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-std.xml
@@ -72,7 +72,9 @@ flags, being a write-only ioctl it does not return the actual new standard as
 the current input does not support the requested standard the driver
 returns an &EINVAL;. When the standard set is ambiguous drivers may
 return <errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode> or choose any of the requested
-standards.</para>
+standards. If the current input or output does not support standard video timings (e.g. if
+&VIDIOC-ENUMINPUT; does not set the <constant>V4L2_IN_CAP_STD</constant> flag), then
+&ENODATA; is returned.</para>
   </refsect1>
 
   <refsect1>
@@ -85,6 +87,12 @@ standards.</para>
 	  <para>The <constant>VIDIOC_S_STD</constant> parameter was unsuitable.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Standard video timings are not supported for this input or output.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
     </variablelist>
   </refsect1>
 </refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-tuner.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-tuner.xml
index 91ec2fb658f8..6cc82010c736 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-tuner.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-g-tuner.xml
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ user.<!-- FIXME Video inputs already have a name, the purpose of this
 field is not quite clear.--></para></entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-tuner-type;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry spanname="hspan">Type of the tuner, see <xref
 		linkend="v4l2-tuner-type" />.</entry>
@@ -119,10 +119,14 @@ field is not quite clear.--></para></entry>
 <xref linkend="tuner-capability" />. Audio flags indicate the ability
 to decode audio subprograms. They will <emphasis>not</emphasis>
 change, for example with the current video standard.</para><para>When
-the structure refers to a radio tuner only the
-<constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_LOW</constant>,
-<constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_STEREO</constant> and
-<constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_RDS</constant> flags can be set.</para></entry>
+the structure refers to a radio tuner the
+<constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_LANG1</constant>,
+<constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_LANG2</constant> and
+<constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_NORM</constant> flags can't be used.</para>
+<para>If multiple frequency bands are supported, then
+<structfield>capability</structfield> is the union of all
+<structfield>capability</structfield> fields of each &v4l2-frequency-band;.
+</para></entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
@@ -130,7 +134,9 @@ the structure refers to a radio tuner only the
 	    <entry spanname="hspan">The lowest tunable frequency in
 units of 62.5 kHz, or if the <structfield>capability</structfield>
 flag <constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_LOW</constant> is set, in units of 62.5
-Hz.</entry>
+Hz. If multiple frequency bands are supported, then
+<structfield>rangelow</structfield> is the lowest frequency
+of all the frequency bands.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
@@ -138,7 +144,9 @@ Hz.</entry>
 	    <entry spanname="hspan">The highest tunable frequency in
 units of 62.5 kHz, or if the <structfield>capability</structfield>
 flag <constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_LOW</constant> is set, in units of 62.5
-Hz.</entry>
+Hz. If multiple frequency bands are supported, then
+<structfield>rangehigh</structfield> is the highest frequency
+of all the frequency bands.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
@@ -276,6 +284,18 @@ can or must be switched. (B/G PAL tuners for example are typically not
       <constant>V4L2_TUNER_ANALOG_TV</constant> tuners can have this capability.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_HWSEEK_BOUNDED</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x0004</entry>
+	    <entry>If set, then this tuner supports the hardware seek functionality
+	    where the seek stops when it reaches the end of the frequency range.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_HWSEEK_WRAP</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x0008</entry>
+	    <entry>If set, then this tuner supports the hardware seek functionality
+	    where the seek wraps around when it reaches the end of the frequency range.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
 	<entry><constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_STEREO</constant></entry>
 	<entry>0x0010</entry>
 	<entry>Stereo audio reception is supported.</entry>
@@ -328,6 +348,18 @@ radio tuners.</entry>
 	<entry>0x0200</entry>
 	<entry>The RDS data is parsed by the hardware and set via controls.</entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	<entry><constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_FREQ_BANDS</constant></entry>
+	<entry>0x0400</entry>
+	<entry>The &VIDIOC-ENUM-FREQ-BANDS; ioctl can be used to enumerate
+	the available frequency bands.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	<entry><constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_HWSEEK_PROG_LIM</constant></entry>
+	<entry>0x0800</entry>
+	<entry>The range to search when using the hardware seek functionality
+	is programmable, see &VIDIOC-S-HW-FREQ-SEEK; for details.</entry>
+	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.xml
index 7bde698760e4..fa7ad7e33228 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.xml
@@ -48,6 +48,12 @@
   <refsect1>
     <title>Description</title>
 
+    <note>
+      <title>Experimental</title>
+      <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental"> experimental </link>
+      interface and may change in the future.</para>
+    </note>
+
     <para>Applications can optionally call the
 <constant>VIDIOC_PREPARE_BUF</constant> ioctl to pass ownership of the buffer
 to the driver before actually enqueuing it, using the
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.xml
index 9caa49af580f..3504a7f2f382 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.xml
@@ -71,12 +71,9 @@ initialize the <structfield>bytesused</structfield>,
 <structfield>field</structfield> and
 <structfield>timestamp</structfield> fields, see <xref
 linkend="buffer" /> for details.
-Applications must also set <structfield>flags</structfield> to 0. If a driver
-supports capturing from specific video inputs and you want to specify a video
-input, then <structfield>flags</structfield> should be set to
-<constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_INPUT</constant> and the field
-<structfield>input</structfield> must be initialized to the desired input.
-The <structfield>reserved</structfield> field must be set to 0. When using
+Applications must also set <structfield>flags</structfield> to 0.
+The <structfield>reserved2</structfield> and
+<structfield>reserved</structfield> fields must be set to 0. When using
 the <link linkend="planar-apis">multi-planar API</link>, the
 <structfield>m.planes</structfield> field must contain a userspace pointer
 to a filled-in array of &v4l2-plane; and the <structfield>length</structfield>
@@ -112,6 +109,23 @@ they cannot be swapped out to disk. Buffers remain locked until
 dequeued, until the &VIDIOC-STREAMOFF; or &VIDIOC-REQBUFS; ioctl is
 called, or until the device is closed.</para>
 
+    <para>To enqueue a <link linkend="dmabuf">DMABUF</link> buffer applications
+set the <structfield>memory</structfield> field to
+<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_DMABUF</constant> and the <structfield>m.fd</structfield>
+field to a file descriptor associated with a DMABUF buffer. When the
+multi-planar API is used the <structfield>m.fd</structfield> fields of the
+passed array of &v4l2-plane; have to be used instead. When
+<constant>VIDIOC_QBUF</constant> is called with a pointer to this structure the
+driver sets the <constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_QUEUED</constant> flag and clears the
+<constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_MAPPED</constant> and
+<constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_DONE</constant> flags in the
+<structfield>flags</structfield> field, or it returns an error code.  This
+ioctl locks the buffer. Locking a buffer means passing it to a driver for a
+hardware access (usually DMA).  If an application accesses (reads/writes) a
+locked buffer then the result is undefined.  Buffers remain locked until
+dequeued, until the &VIDIOC-STREAMOFF; or &VIDIOC-REQBUFS; ioctl is called, or
+until the device is closed.</para>
+
     <para>Applications call the <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant>
 ioctl to dequeue a filled (capturing) or displayed (output) buffer
 from the driver's outgoing queue. They just set the
@@ -124,8 +138,7 @@ remaining fields or returns an error code. The driver may also set
 field. It indicates a non-critical (recoverable) streaming error. In such case
 the application may continue as normal, but should be aware that data in the
 dequeued buffer might be corrupted. When using the multi-planar API, the
-planes array does not have to be passed; the <structfield>m.planes</structfield>
-member must be set to NULL in that case.</para>
+planes array must be passed in as well.</para>
 
     <para>By default <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant> blocks when no
 buffer is in the outgoing queue. When the
@@ -158,6 +171,8 @@ or no buffers have been allocated yet, or the
 <structfield>userptr</structfield> or
 <structfield>length</structfield> are invalid.</para>
 	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
 	<term><errorcode>EIO</errorcode></term>
 	<listitem>
 	  <para><constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant> failed due to an
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index 23b17f604211..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
-<refentry id="vidioc-query-dv-preset">
-  <refmeta>
-    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_PRESET</refentrytitle>
-    &manvol;
-  </refmeta>
-
-  <refnamediv>
-    <refname>VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_PRESET</refname>
-    <refpurpose>Sense the DV preset received by the current
-input</refpurpose>
-  </refnamediv>
-
-  <refsynopsisdiv>
-    <funcsynopsis>
-      <funcprototype>
-	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
-	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
-	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
-	<paramdef>struct v4l2_dv_preset *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
-      </funcprototype>
-    </funcsynopsis>
-  </refsynopsisdiv>
-
-  <refsect1>
-    <title>Arguments</title>
-
-    <variablelist>
-	<varlistentry>
-	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>&fd;</para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para>VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_PRESET</para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-      <varlistentry>
-	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
-	<listitem>
-	  <para></para>
-	</listitem>
-      </varlistentry>
-    </variablelist>
-  </refsect1>
-
-  <refsect1>
-    <title>Description</title>
-
-    <para>The hardware may be able to detect the current DV preset
-automatically, similar to sensing the video standard. To do so, applications
-call <constant> VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_PRESET</constant> with a pointer to a
-&v4l2-dv-preset; type. Once the hardware detects a preset, that preset is
-returned in the preset field of &v4l2-dv-preset;. If the preset could not be
-detected because there was no signal, or the signal was unreliable, or the
-signal did not map to a supported preset, then the value V4L2_DV_INVALID is
-returned.</para>
-  </refsect1>
-
-  <refsect1>
-    &return-value;
-  </refsect1>
-</refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-timings.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-timings.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e185f149e0a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-timings.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+<refentry id="vidioc-query-dv-timings">
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_TIMINGS</refentrytitle>
+    &manvol;
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_TIMINGS</refname>
+    <refpurpose>Sense the DV preset received by the current
+input</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>struct v4l2_dv_timings *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Arguments</title>
+
+    <variablelist>
+	<varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>&fd;</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_TIMINGS</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Description</title>
+
+    <note>
+      <title>Experimental</title>
+      <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental"> experimental </link>
+      interface and may change in the future.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para>The hardware may be able to detect the current DV timings
+automatically, similar to sensing the video standard. To do so, applications
+call <constant>VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_TIMINGS</constant> with a pointer to a
+&v4l2-dv-timings;. Once the hardware detects the timings, it will fill in the
+timings structure.
+
+If the timings could not be detected because there was no signal, then
+<errorcode>ENOLINK</errorcode> is returned. If a signal was detected, but
+it was unstable and the receiver could not lock to the signal, then
+<errorcode>ENOLCK</errorcode> is returned. If the receiver could lock to the signal,
+but the format is unsupported (e.g. because the pixelclock is out of range
+of the hardware capabilities), then the driver fills in whatever timings it
+could find and returns <errorcode>ERANGE</errorcode>. In that case the application
+can call &VIDIOC-DV-TIMINGS-CAP; to compare the found timings with the hardware's
+capabilities in order to give more precise feedback to the user.
+</para>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    &return-value;
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Digital video timings are not supported for this input or output.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>ENOLINK</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>No timings could be detected because no signal was found.
+</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>ENOLCK</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>The signal was unstable and the hardware could not lock on to it.
+</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>ERANGE</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Timings were found, but they are out of range of the hardware
+capabilities.
+</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+</refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querybuf.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querybuf.xml
index 6e414d7b6df7..a597155c052d 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querybuf.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querybuf.xml
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@
   <refsect1>
     <title>Description</title>
 
-    <para>This ioctl is part of the <link linkend="mmap">memory
-mapping</link> I/O method. It can be used to query the status of a
+    <para>This ioctl is part of the <link linkend="mmap">streaming
+</link> I/O method. It can be used to query the status of a
 buffer at any time after buffers have been allocated with the
 &VIDIOC-REQBUFS; ioctl.</para>
 
@@ -71,6 +71,7 @@ the structure.</para>
 
     <para>In the <structfield>flags</structfield> field the
 <constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_MAPPED</constant>,
+<constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_PREPARED</constant>,
 <constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_QUEUED</constant> and
 <constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_DONE</constant> flags will be valid. The
 <structfield>memory</structfield> field will be set to the current
@@ -79,8 +80,10 @@ contains the offset of the buffer from the start of the device memory,
 the <structfield>length</structfield> field its size. For the multi-planar API,
 fields <structfield>m.mem_offset</structfield> and
 <structfield>length</structfield> in the <structfield>m.planes</structfield>
-array elements will be used instead. The driver may or may not set the remaining
-fields and flags, they are meaningless in this context.</para>
+array elements will be used instead and the <structfield>length</structfield>
+field of &v4l2-buffer; is set to the number of filled-in array elements.
+The driver may or may not set the remaining fields and flags, they are
+meaningless in this context.</para>
 
     <para>The <structname>v4l2_buffer</structname> structure is
     specified in <xref linkend="buffer" />.</para>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml
index e3664d6f2de4..d5a3c97b206a 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ make sure the strings are properly NUL-terminated.</para></entry>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u8</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>card</structfield>[32]</entry>
-	    <entry>Name of the device, a NUL-terminated ASCII string.
+	    <entry>Name of the device, a NUL-terminated UTF-8 string.
 For example: "Yoyodyne TV/FM". One driver may support different brands
 or models of video hardware. This information is intended for users,
 for example in a menu of available devices. Since multiple TV cards of
@@ -90,11 +90,13 @@ ambiguities.</entry>
 	    <entry>__u8</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>bus_info</structfield>[32]</entry>
 	    <entry>Location of the device in the system, a
-NUL-terminated ASCII string. For example: "PCI Slot 4". This
+NUL-terminated ASCII string. For example: "PCI:0000:05:06.0". This
 information is intended for users, to distinguish multiple
-identical devices. If no such information is available the field may
-simply count the devices controlled by the driver, or contain the
-empty string (<structfield>bus_info</structfield>[0] = 0).<!-- XXX pci_dev->slot_name example --></entry>
+identical devices. If no such information is available the field must
+simply count the devices controlled by the driver ("platform:vivi-000").
+The bus_info must start with "PCI:" for PCI boards, "PCIe:" for PCI Express boards,
+"usb-" for USB devices, "I2C:" for i2c devices, "ISA:" for ISA devices,
+"parport" for parallel port devices and "platform:" for platform devices.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
@@ -124,12 +126,35 @@ printf ("Version: %u.%u.%u\n",
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>capabilities</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>Device capabilities, see <xref
-		linkend="device-capabilities" />.</entry>
+	    <entry>Available capabilities of the physical device as a whole, see <xref
+		linkend="device-capabilities" />. The same physical device can export
+		multiple devices in /dev (e.g. /dev/videoX, /dev/vbiY and /dev/radioZ).
+		The <structfield>capabilities</structfield> field should contain a union
+		of all capabilities available around the several V4L2 devices exported
+		to userspace.
+		For all those devices the <structfield>capabilities</structfield> field
+		returns the same set of	capabilities. This allows applications to open
+		just one of the devices (typically the video device) and discover whether
+		video, vbi and/or radio are also supported.
+	    </entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[4]</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>device_caps</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Device capabilities of the opened device, see <xref
+		linkend="device-capabilities" />. Should contain the available capabilities
+		of that specific device node. So, for example, <structfield>device_caps</structfield>
+		of a radio device will only contain radio related capabilities and
+		no video or vbi capabilities. This field is only set if the <structfield>capabilities</structfield>
+		field contains the <constant>V4L2_CAP_DEVICE_CAPS</constant> capability.
+		Only the <structfield>capabilities</structfield> field can have the
+		<constant>V4L2_CAP_DEVICE_CAPS</constant> capability, <structfield>device_caps</structfield>
+		will never set <constant>V4L2_CAP_DEVICE_CAPS</constant>.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[3]</entry>
 	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers must set
 this array to zero.</entry>
 	  </row>
@@ -169,6 +194,19 @@ linkend="output">Video Output</link> interface.</entry>
 	    <link linkend="output">Video Output</link> interface.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x00004000</entry>
+	    <entry>The device supports the single-planar API through the
+	    Video Memory-To-Memory interface.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_M2M_MPLANE</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x00008000</entry>
+	    <entry>The device supports the
+	    <link linkend="planar-apis">multi-planar API</link> through the
+	    Video Memory-To-Memory  interface.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>0x00000004</entry>
 	    <entry>The device supports the <link
@@ -276,6 +314,13 @@ linkend="async">asynchronous</link> I/O methods.</entry>
 	    <entry>The device supports the <link
 linkend="mmap">streaming</link> I/O method.</entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_DEVICE_CAPS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x80000000</entry>
+	    <entry>The driver fills the <structfield>device_caps</structfield>
+	    field. This capability can only appear in the <structfield>capabilities</structfield>
+	    field and never in the <structfield>device_caps</structfield> field.</entry>
+	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml
index 36660d311b51..e6645b996558 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ the first control with a higher ID. Drivers which do not support this
 flag yet always return an &EINVAL;.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-ctrl-type;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>Type of control, see <xref
 		linkend="v4l2-ctrl-type" />.</entry>
@@ -215,11 +215,12 @@ the array to zero.</entry>
 
     <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-querymenu">
       <title>struct <structname>v4l2_querymenu</structname></title>
-      <tgroup cols="3">
+      <tgroup cols="4">
 	&cs-str;
 	<tbody valign="top">
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>id</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>Identifies the control, set by the application
 from the respective &v4l2-queryctrl;
@@ -227,18 +228,38 @@ from the respective &v4l2-queryctrl;
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>index</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>Index of the menu item, starting at zero, set by
 	    the application.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
+	    <entry>union</entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
 	    <entry>__u8</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>name</structfield>[32]</entry>
 	    <entry>Name of the menu item, a NUL-terminated ASCII
-string. This information is intended for the user.</entry>
+string. This information is intended for the user. This field is valid
+for <constant>V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_MENU</constant> type controls.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>__s64</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>value</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>
+              Value of the integer menu item. This field is valid for
+              <constant>V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_INTEGER_MENU</constant> type
+              controls.
+            </entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers must set
 the array to zero.</entry>
@@ -292,6 +313,20 @@ the menu items can be enumerated with the
 <constant>VIDIOC_QUERYMENU</constant> ioctl.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER_MENU</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>&ge; 0</entry>
+	    <entry>1</entry>
+	    <entry>N-1</entry>
+	    <entry>
+              The control has a menu of N choices. The values of the
+              menu items can be enumerated with the
+              <constant>VIDIOC_QUERYMENU</constant> ioctl. This is
+              similar to <constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_MENU</constant>
+              except that instead of strings, the menu items are
+              signed 64-bit integers.
+            </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_BITMASK</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>0</entry>
 	    <entry>n/a</entry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querystd.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querystd.xml
index 4b79c7c04ed6..222348542182 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querystd.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-querystd.xml
@@ -54,7 +54,8 @@ standard automatically. To do so, applications call <constant>
 VIDIOC_QUERYSTD</constant> with a pointer to a &v4l2-std-id; type. The
 driver stores here a set of candidates, this can be a single flag or a
 set of supported standards if for example the hardware can only
-distinguish between 50 and 60 Hz systems. When detection is not
+distinguish between 50 and 60 Hz systems. If no signal was detected,
+then the driver will return V4L2_STD_UNKNOWN. When detection is not
 possible or fails, the set must contain all standards supported by the
 current video input or output.</para>
 
@@ -62,5 +63,13 @@ current video input or output.</para>
 
   <refsect1>
     &return-value;
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Standard video timings are not supported for this input or output.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
   </refsect1>
 </refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml
index 7be4b1d29b90..78a06a9a5ece 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml
@@ -48,28 +48,30 @@
   <refsect1>
     <title>Description</title>
 
-    <para>This ioctl is used to initiate <link linkend="mmap">memory
-mapped</link> or <link linkend="userp">user pointer</link>
-I/O. Memory mapped buffers are located in device memory and must be
-allocated with this ioctl before they can be mapped into the
-application's address space. User buffers are allocated by
-applications themselves, and this ioctl is merely used to switch the
-driver into user pointer I/O mode and to setup some internal structures.</para>
+<para>This ioctl is used to initiate <link linkend="mmap">memory mapped</link>,
+<link linkend="userp">user pointer</link> or <link
+linkend="dmabuf">DMABUF</link> based I/O.  Memory mapped buffers are located in
+device memory and must be allocated with this ioctl before they can be mapped
+into the application's address space. User buffers are allocated by
+applications themselves, and this ioctl is merely used to switch the driver
+into user pointer I/O mode and to setup some internal structures.
+Similarly, DMABUF buffers are allocated by applications through a device
+driver, and this ioctl only configures the driver into DMABUF I/O mode without
+performing any direct allocation.</para>
 
-    <para>To allocate device buffers applications initialize all
-fields of the <structname>v4l2_requestbuffers</structname> structure.
-They set the <structfield>type</structfield> field to the respective
-stream or buffer type, the <structfield>count</structfield> field to
-the desired number of buffers, <structfield>memory</structfield>
-must be set to the requested I/O method and the <structfield>reserved</structfield> array
-must be zeroed. When the ioctl
-is called with a pointer to this structure the driver will attempt to allocate
-the requested number of buffers and it stores the actual number
-allocated in the <structfield>count</structfield> field. It can be
-smaller than the number requested, even zero, when the driver runs out
-of free memory. A larger number is also possible when the driver requires
-more buffers to function correctly. For example video output requires at least two buffers,
-one displayed and one filled by the application.</para>
+    <para>To allocate device buffers applications initialize all fields of the
+<structname>v4l2_requestbuffers</structname> structure.  They set the
+<structfield>type</structfield> field to the respective stream or buffer type,
+the <structfield>count</structfield> field to the desired number of buffers,
+<structfield>memory</structfield> must be set to the requested I/O method and
+the <structfield>reserved</structfield> array must be zeroed. When the ioctl is
+called with a pointer to this structure the driver will attempt to allocate the
+requested number of buffers and it stores the actual number allocated in the
+<structfield>count</structfield> field. It can be smaller than the number
+requested, even zero, when the driver runs out of free memory. A larger number
+is also possible when the driver requires more buffers to function correctly.
+For example video output requires at least two buffers, one displayed and one
+filled by the application.</para>
     <para>When the I/O method is not supported the ioctl
 returns an &EINVAL;.</para>
 
@@ -92,25 +94,26 @@ streamoff.--></para>
 	    <entry>The number of buffers requested or granted.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-buf-type;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>Type of the stream or buffers, this is the same
 as the &v4l2-format; <structfield>type</structfield> field. See <xref
 		linkend="v4l2-buf-type" /> for valid values.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-memory;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>memory</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>Applications set this field to
-<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_MMAP</constant> or
-<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_USERPTR</constant>.</entry>
+<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_MMAP</constant>,
+<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_DMABUF</constant> or
+<constant>V4L2_MEMORY_USERPTR</constant>. See <xref linkend="v4l2-memory"
+/>.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[2]</entry>
-	    <entry>A place holder for future extensions and custom
-(driver defined) buffer types <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE</constant> and
-higher. This array should be zeroed by applications.</entry>
+	    <entry>A place holder for future extensions. This array should
+be zeroed by applications.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml
index e013da845b11..5b379e752194 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml
@@ -52,14 +52,32 @@
     <para>Start a hardware frequency seek from the current frequency.
 To do this applications initialize the <structfield>tuner</structfield>,
 <structfield>type</structfield>, <structfield>seek_upward</structfield>,
-<structfield>spacing</structfield> and
-<structfield>wrap_around</structfield> fields, and zero out the
-<structfield>reserved</structfield> array of a &v4l2-hw-freq-seek; and
-call the <constant>VIDIOC_S_HW_FREQ_SEEK</constant> ioctl with a pointer
-to this structure.</para>
+<structfield>wrap_around</structfield>, <structfield>spacing</structfield>,
+<structfield>rangelow</structfield> and <structfield>rangehigh</structfield>
+fields, and zero out the <structfield>reserved</structfield> array of a
+&v4l2-hw-freq-seek; and call the <constant>VIDIOC_S_HW_FREQ_SEEK</constant>
+ioctl with a pointer to this structure.</para>
+
+    <para>The <structfield>rangelow</structfield> and
+<structfield>rangehigh</structfield> fields can be set to a non-zero value to
+tell the driver to search a specific band. If the &v4l2-tuner;
+<structfield>capability</structfield> field has the
+<constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_HWSEEK_PROG_LIM</constant> flag set, these values
+must fall within one of the bands returned by &VIDIOC-ENUM-FREQ-BANDS;. If
+the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_HWSEEK_PROG_LIM</constant> flag is not set,
+then these values must exactly match those of one of the bands returned by
+&VIDIOC-ENUM-FREQ-BANDS;. If the current frequency of the tuner does not fall
+within the selected band it will be clamped to fit in the band before the
+seek is started.</para>
+
+    <para>If an error is returned, then the original frequency will
+    be restored.</para>
 
     <para>This ioctl is supported if the <constant>V4L2_CAP_HW_FREQ_SEEK</constant> capability is set.</para>
 
+    <para>If this ioctl is called from a non-blocking filehandle, then &EAGAIN; is
+    returned and no seek takes place.</para>
+
     <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-hw-freq-seek">
       <title>struct <structname>v4l2_hw_freq_seek</structname></title>
       <tgroup cols="3">
@@ -73,10 +91,11 @@ same value as in the &v4l2-input; <structfield>tuner</structfield>
 field and the &v4l2-tuner; <structfield>index</structfield> field.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry>&v4l2-tuner-type;</entry>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
 	    <entry>The tuner type. This is the same value as in the
-&v4l2-tuner; <structfield>type</structfield> field.</entry>
+&v4l2-tuner; <structfield>type</structfield> field. See <xref
+	    linkend="v4l2-tuner-type" /></entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
@@ -86,7 +105,10 @@ field and the &v4l2-tuner; <structfield>index</structfield> field.</entry>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
 	    <entry><structfield>wrap_around</structfield></entry>
-	    <entry>If non-zero, wrap around when at the end of the frequency range, else stop seeking.</entry>
+	    <entry>If non-zero, wrap around when at the end of the frequency range, else stop seeking.
+	    The &v4l2-tuner; <structfield>capability</structfield> field will tell you what the
+	    hardware supports.
+	    </entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
@@ -95,9 +117,29 @@ field and the &v4l2-tuner; <structfield>index</structfield> field.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry>__u32</entry>
-	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[7]</entry>
-	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and
-	    applications must set the array to zero.</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>rangelow</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>If non-zero, the lowest tunable frequency of the band to
+search in units of 62.5 kHz, or if the &v4l2-tuner;
+<structfield>capability</structfield> field has the
+<constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_LOW</constant> flag set, in units of 62.5 Hz.
+If <structfield>rangelow</structfield> is zero a reasonable default value
+is used.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>rangehigh</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>If non-zero, the highest tunable frequency of the band to
+search in units of 62.5 kHz, or if the &v4l2-tuner;
+<structfield>capability</structfield> field has the
+<constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_LOW</constant> flag set, in units of 62.5 Hz.
+If <structfield>rangehigh</structfield> is zero a reasonable default value
+is used.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[5]</entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Applications
+	    must set the array to zero.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
@@ -112,14 +154,29 @@ field and the &v4l2-tuner; <structfield>index</structfield> field.</entry>
 	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
 	<listitem>
 	  <para>The <structfield>tuner</structfield> index is out of
-bounds or the value in the <structfield>type</structfield> field is
-wrong.</para>
+bounds, the <structfield>wrap_around</structfield> value is not supported or
+one of the values in the <structfield>type</structfield>,
+<structfield>rangelow</structfield> or <structfield>rangehigh</structfield>
+fields is wrong.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
       <varlistentry>
 	<term><errorcode>EAGAIN</errorcode></term>
 	<listitem>
-	  <para>The ioctl timed-out. Try again.</para>
+	  <para>Attempted to call <constant>VIDIOC_S_HW_FREQ_SEEK</constant>
+	  with the filehandle in non-blocking mode.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>The hardware seek found no channels.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>EBUSY</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Another hardware seek is already in progress.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
     </variablelist>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-streamon.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-streamon.xml
index 81cca4569050..716ea15e54a1 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-streamon.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-streamon.xml
@@ -74,7 +74,12 @@ not transmitted yet. I/O returns to the same state as after calling
 stream type. This is the same as &v4l2-requestbuffers;
 <structfield>type</structfield>.</para>
 
-    <para>Note applications can be preempted for unknown periods right
+    <para>If <constant>VIDIOC_STREAMON</constant> is called when streaming
+is already in progress, or if <constant>VIDIOC_STREAMOFF</constant> is called
+when streaming is already stopped, then the ioctl does nothing and 0 is
+returned.</para>
+
+    <para>Note that applications can be preempted for unknown periods right
 before or after the <constant>VIDIOC_STREAMON</constant> or
 <constant>VIDIOC_STREAMOFF</constant> calls, there is no notion of
 starting or stopping "now". Buffer timestamps can be used to
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-crop.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-crop.xml
index 06197323a8cc..4cddd788c589 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-crop.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-crop.xml
@@ -58,9 +58,12 @@
     <title>Description</title>
 
     <note>
-      <title>Experimental</title>
-      <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link>
-      interface and may change in the future.</para>
+      <title>Obsolete</title>
+
+      <para>This is an <link linkend="obsolete">obsolete</link>
+      interface and may be removed in the future. It is superseded by
+      <link linkend="vidioc-subdev-g-selection">the selection
+      API</link>.</para>
     </note>
 
     <para>To retrieve the current crop rectangle applications set the
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-edid.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-edid.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bbd18f0e6ede
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-edid.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+<refentry id="vidioc-subdev-g-edid">
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_EDID, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_EDID</refentrytitle>
+    &manvol;
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_EDID</refname>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_EDID</refname>
+    <refpurpose>Get or set the EDID of a video receiver/transmitter</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>struct v4l2_subdev_edid *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>const struct v4l2_subdev_edid *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Arguments</title>
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>&fd;</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_EDID, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_EDID</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Description</title>
+    <para>These ioctls can be used to get or set an EDID associated with an input pad
+    from a receiver or an output pad of a transmitter subdevice.</para>
+
+    <para>To get the EDID data the application has to fill in the <structfield>pad</structfield>,
+    <structfield>start_block</structfield>, <structfield>blocks</structfield> and <structfield>edid</structfield>
+    fields and call <constant>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_EDID</constant>. The current EDID from block
+    <structfield>start_block</structfield> and of size <structfield>blocks</structfield>
+    will be placed in the memory <structfield>edid</structfield> points to. The <structfield>edid</structfield>
+    pointer must point to memory at least <structfield>blocks</structfield>&nbsp;*&nbsp;128 bytes
+    large (the size of one block is 128 bytes).</para>
+
+    <para>If there are fewer blocks than specified, then the driver will set <structfield>blocks</structfield>
+    to the actual number of blocks. If there are no EDID blocks available at all, then the error code
+    ENODATA is set.</para>
+
+    <para>If blocks have to be retrieved from the sink, then this call will block until they
+    have been read.</para>
+
+    <para>To set the EDID blocks of a receiver the application has to fill in the <structfield>pad</structfield>,
+    <structfield>blocks</structfield> and <structfield>edid</structfield> fields and set
+    <structfield>start_block</structfield> to 0. It is not possible to set part of an EDID,
+    it is always all or nothing. Setting the EDID data is only valid for receivers as it makes
+    no sense for a transmitter.</para>
+
+    <para>The driver assumes that the full EDID is passed in. If there are more EDID blocks than
+    the hardware can handle then the EDID is not written, but instead the error code E2BIG is set
+    and <structfield>blocks</structfield> is set to the maximum that the hardware supports.
+    If <structfield>start_block</structfield> is any
+    value other than 0 then the error code EINVAL is set.</para>
+
+    <para>To disable an EDID you set <structfield>blocks</structfield> to 0. Depending on the
+    hardware this will drive the hotplug pin low and/or block the source from reading the EDID
+    data in some way. In any case, the end result is the same: the EDID is no longer available.
+    </para>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-subdev-edid">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_subdev_edid</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+        &cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>pad</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Pad for which to get/set the EDID blocks.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>start_block</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Read the EDID from starting with this block. Must be 0 when setting
+	    the EDID.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>blocks</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>The number of blocks to get or set. Must be less or equal to 256 (the
+	    maximum number of blocks as defined by the standard). When you set the EDID and
+	    <structfield>blocks</structfield> is 0, then the EDID is disabled or erased.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u8&nbsp;*</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>edid</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Pointer to memory that contains the EDID. The minimum size is
+	    <structfield>blocks</structfield>&nbsp;*&nbsp;128.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[5]</entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Applications and drivers must
+	    set the array to zero.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    &return-value;
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>ENODATA</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>The EDID data is not available.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>E2BIG</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>The EDID data you provided is more than the hardware can handle.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+</refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-selection.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-selection.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1ba9e999af3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subdev-g-selection.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+<refentry id="vidioc-subdev-g-selection">
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_SELECTION, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_SELECTION</refentrytitle>
+    &manvol;
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_SELECTION</refname>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_SELECTION</refname>
+    <refpurpose>Get or set selection rectangles on a subdev pad</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>struct v4l2_subdev_selection *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Arguments</title>
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>&fd;</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_SELECTION, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_SELECTION</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Description</title>
+
+    <note>
+      <title>Experimental</title>
+      <para>This is an <link linkend="experimental">experimental</link>
+      interface and may change in the future.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para>The selections are used to configure various image
+    processing functionality performed by the subdevs which affect the
+    image size. This currently includes cropping, scaling and
+    composition.</para>
+
+    <para>The selection API replaces <link
+    linkend="vidioc-subdev-g-crop">the old subdev crop API</link>. All
+    the function of the crop API, and more, are supported by the
+    selections API.</para>
+
+    <para>See <xref linkend="subdev"></xref> for
+    more information on how each selection target affects the image
+    processing pipeline inside the subdevice.</para>
+
+    <refsect2>
+      <title>Types of selection targets</title>
+
+      <para>There are two types of selection targets: actual and bounds. The
+      actual targets are the targets which configure the hardware. The BOUNDS
+      target will return a rectangle that contain all possible actual
+      rectangles.</para>
+    </refsect2>
+
+    <refsect2>
+      <title>Discovering supported features</title>
+
+      <para>To discover which targets are supported, the user can
+      perform <constant>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_SELECTION</constant> on them.
+      Any unsupported target will return
+      <constant>EINVAL</constant>.</para>
+
+    <para>Selection targets and flags are documented in <xref
+    linkend="v4l2-selections-common"/>.</para>
+
+    <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-subdev-selection">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_subdev_selection</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+        &cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>which</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Active or try selection, from
+	    &v4l2-subdev-format-whence;.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>pad</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Pad number as reported by the media framework.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>target</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Target selection rectangle. See
+	    <xref linkend="v4l2-selections-common" />.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>flags</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Flags. See
+	    <xref linkend="v4l2-selection-flags" />.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>&v4l2-rect;</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>rect</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Selection rectangle, in pixels.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[8]</entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Applications and drivers must
+	    set the array to zero.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+    </refsect2>
+
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    &return-value;
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>EBUSY</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>The selection rectangle can't be changed because the
+	  pad is currently busy. This can be caused, for instance, by
+	  an active video stream on the pad. The ioctl must not be
+	  retried without performing another action to fix the problem
+	  first. Only returned by
+	  <constant>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_SELECTION</constant></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>The &v4l2-subdev-selection;
+	  <structfield>pad</structfield> references a non-existing
+	  pad, the <structfield>which</structfield> field references a
+	  non-existing format, or the selection target is not
+	  supported on the given subdev pad.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+</refentry>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media_api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/media_api.tmpl
index 4e8e8985cc17..4c8d282545a2 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/media_api.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media_api.tmpl
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 <?xml version="1.0"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
-	"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" [
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.2//EN"
+	"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.2/docbookx.dtd" [
 <!ENTITY % media-entities SYSTEM "./media-entities.tmpl"> %media-entities;
 <!ENTITY media-indices SYSTEM "./media-indices.tmpl">
 
@@ -22,6 +22,14 @@
 
 <!-- LinuxTV v4l-dvb repository. -->
 <!ENTITY v4l-dvb		"<ulink url='http://linuxtv.org/repo/'>http://linuxtv.org/repo/</ulink>">
+<!ENTITY dash-ent-8             "<entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry>">
+<!ENTITY dash-ent-10            "<entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry>">
+<!ENTITY dash-ent-12            "<entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry>">
+<!ENTITY dash-ent-14            "<entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry>">
+<!ENTITY dash-ent-16            "<entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry>">
+<!ENTITY dash-ent-20            "<entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry>">
+<!ENTITY dash-ent-22            "<entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry>">
+<!ENTITY dash-ent-24            "<entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry><entry>-</entry>">
 ]>
 
 <book id="media_api">
@@ -29,7 +37,7 @@
 <title>LINUX MEDIA INFRASTRUCTURE API</title>
 
 <copyright>
-	<year>2009-2011</year>
+	<year>2009-2012</year>
 	<holder>LinuxTV Developers</holder>
 </copyright>
 
@@ -53,7 +61,7 @@ Foundation. A copy of the license is included in the chapter entitled
 		video and radio straming devices, including video cameras,
 		analog and digital TV receiver cards, AM/FM receiver cards,
 		streaming capture devices.</para>
-	<para>It is divided into three parts.</para>
+	<para>It is divided into four parts.</para>
 	<para>The first part covers radio, capture,
 		cameras and analog TV devices.</para>
 	<para>The second part covers the
@@ -62,7 +70,8 @@ Foundation. A copy of the license is included in the chapter entitled
 		in fact it covers several different video standards including
 		DVB-T, DVB-S, DVB-C and ATSC. The API is currently being updated
 		to documment support also for DVB-S2, ISDB-T and ISDB-S.</para>
-	<para>The third part covers Remote Controller API</para>
+	<para>The third part covers the Remote Controller API.</para>
+	<para>The fourth part covers the Media Controller API.</para>
 	<para>For additional information and for the latest development code,
 		see: <ulink url="http://linuxtv.org">http://linuxtv.org</ulink>.</para>
 	<para>For discussing improvements, reporting troubles, sending new drivers, etc, please mail to: <ulink url="http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#linux-media">Linux Media Mailing List (LMML).</ulink>.</para>
@@ -87,7 +96,7 @@ Foundation. A copy of the license is included in the chapter entitled
 </author>
 </authorgroup>
 <copyright>
-	<year>2009-2011</year>
+	<year>2009-2012</year>
 	<holder>Mauro Carvalho Chehab</holder>
 </copyright>
 
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl
index 0c674be0d3c6..a248f42a121e 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl
@@ -1119,8 +1119,6 @@ in this page</entry>
 		These constants are defined in nand.h. They are ored together to describe
 		the chip functionality.
      		<programlisting>
-/* Chip can not auto increment pages */
-#define NAND_NO_AUTOINCR	0x00000001
 /* Buswitdh is 16 bit */
 #define NAND_BUSWIDTH_16	0x00000002
 /* Device supports partial programming without padding */
@@ -1218,8 +1216,6 @@ in this page</entry>
 #define	NAND_BBT_LASTBLOCK	0x00000010
 /* The bbt is at the given page, else we must scan for the bbt */
 #define NAND_BBT_ABSPAGE	0x00000020
-/* The bbt is at the given page, else we must scan for the bbt */
-#define NAND_BBT_SEARCH		0x00000040
 /* bbt is stored per chip on multichip devices */
 #define NAND_BBT_PERCHIP	0x00000080
 /* bbt has a version counter at offset veroffs */
@@ -1228,8 +1224,6 @@ in this page</entry>
 #define NAND_BBT_CREATE		0x00000200
 /* Search good / bad pattern through all pages of a block */
 #define NAND_BBT_SCANALLPAGES	0x00000400
-/* Scan block empty during good / bad block scan */
-#define NAND_BBT_SCANEMPTY	0x00000800
 /* Write bbt if neccecary */
 #define NAND_BBT_WRITE		0x00001000
 /* Read and write back block contents when writing bbt */
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl
index 59ad69a9d777..29df25016c7c 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
 !Enet/core/filter.c
      </sect1>
      <sect1><title>Generic Network Statistics</title>
-!Iinclude/linux/gen_stats.h
+!Iinclude/uapi/linux/gen_stats.h
 !Enet/core/gen_stats.c
 !Enet/core/gen_estimator.c
      </sect1>
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@
 !Enet/wimax/op-rfkill.c
 !Enet/wimax/stack.c
 !Iinclude/net/wimax.h
-!Iinclude/linux/wimax.h
+!Iinclude/uapi/linux/wimax.h
      </sect1>
   </chapter>
 
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl
index ac3d0018140c..95618159e29b 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl
@@ -719,6 +719,62 @@ framework to set up sysfs files for this region. Simply leave it alone.
 	</para>
 </sect1>
 
+<sect1 id="using uio_dmem_genirq">
+<title>Using uio_dmem_genirq for platform devices</title>
+	<para>
+	In addition to statically allocated memory ranges, they may also be
+	a desire to use dynamically allocated regions in a user space driver.
+	In particular, being able to access memory made available through the
+	dma-mapping API, may be particularly useful.  The
+	<varname>uio_dmem_genirq</varname> driver provides a way to accomplish
+	this.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	This driver is used in a similar manner to the
+	<varname>"uio_pdrv_genirq"</varname> driver with respect to interrupt
+	configuration and handling.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	Set the <varname>.name</varname> element of
+	<varname>struct platform_device</varname> to
+	<varname>"uio_dmem_genirq"</varname> to use this driver.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	When using this driver, fill in the <varname>.platform_data</varname>
+	element of <varname>struct platform_device</varname>, which is of type
+	<varname>struct uio_dmem_genirq_pdata</varname> and which contains the
+	following elements:
+	</para>
+	<itemizedlist>
+	<listitem><varname>struct uio_info uioinfo</varname>: The same
+	structure used as the  <varname>uio_pdrv_genirq</varname> platform
+	data</listitem>
+	<listitem><varname>unsigned int *dynamic_region_sizes</varname>:
+	Pointer to list of sizes of dynamic memory regions to be mapped into
+	user space.
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem><varname>unsigned int num_dynamic_regions</varname>:
+	Number of elements in <varname>dynamic_region_sizes</varname> array.
+	</listitem>
+	</itemizedlist>
+	<para>
+	The dynamic regions defined in the platform data will be appended to
+	the <varname> mem[] </varname> array after the platform device
+	resources, which implies that the total number of static and dynamic
+	memory regions cannot exceed <varname>MAX_UIO_MAPS</varname>.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	The dynamic memory regions will be allocated when the UIO device file,
+	<varname>/dev/uioX</varname> is opened.
+	Simiar to static memory resources, the memory region information for
+	dynamic regions is then visible via sysfs at
+	<varname>/sys/class/uio/uioX/maps/mapY/*</varname>.
+	The dynmaic memory regions will be freed when the UIO device file is
+	closed. When no processes are holding the device file open, the address
+	returned to userspace is ~0.
+	</para>
+</sect1>
+
 </chapter>
 
 <chapter id="userspace_driver" xreflabel="Writing a driver in user space">
@@ -928,7 +984,7 @@ int main()
 		return errno;
 	}
 	configfd = open(&quot;/sys/class/uio/uio0/device/config&quot;, O_RDWR);
-	if (uiofd &lt; 0) {
+	if (configfd &lt; 0) {
 		perror(&quot;config open:&quot;);
 		return errno;
 	}
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl
index cab4ec58e46e..06741e925985 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl
@@ -433,9 +433,9 @@
   /* chip-specific constructor
    * (see "Management of Cards and Components")
    */
-  static int __devinit snd_mychip_create(struct snd_card *card,
-                                         struct pci_dev *pci,
-                                         struct mychip **rchip)
+  static int snd_mychip_create(struct snd_card *card,
+                               struct pci_dev *pci,
+                               struct mychip **rchip)
   {
           struct mychip *chip;
           int err;
@@ -475,8 +475,8 @@
   }
 
   /* constructor -- see "Constructor" sub-section */
-  static int __devinit snd_mychip_probe(struct pci_dev *pci,
-                               const struct pci_device_id *pci_id)
+  static int snd_mychip_probe(struct pci_dev *pci,
+                              const struct pci_device_id *pci_id)
   {
           static int dev;
           struct snd_card *card;
@@ -526,7 +526,7 @@
   }
 
   /* destructor -- see the "Destructor" sub-section */
-  static void __devexit snd_mychip_remove(struct pci_dev *pci)
+  static void snd_mychip_remove(struct pci_dev *pci)
   {
           snd_card_free(pci_get_drvdata(pci));
           pci_set_drvdata(pci, NULL);
@@ -542,9 +542,8 @@
       <para>
         The real constructor of PCI drivers is the <function>probe</function> callback.
       The <function>probe</function> callback and other component-constructors which are called
-      from the <function>probe</function> callback should be defined with
-      the <parameter>__devinit</parameter> prefix. You 
-      cannot use the <parameter>__init</parameter> prefix for them,
+      from the <function>probe</function> callback cannot be used with
+      the <parameter>__init</parameter> prefix
       because any PCI device could be a hotplug device. 
       </para>
 
@@ -728,7 +727,7 @@
         <informalexample>
           <programlisting>
 <![CDATA[
-  static void __devexit snd_mychip_remove(struct pci_dev *pci)
+  static void snd_mychip_remove(struct pci_dev *pci)
   {
           snd_card_free(pci_get_drvdata(pci));
           pci_set_drvdata(pci, NULL);
@@ -872,9 +871,8 @@
       <para>
       This function itself doesn't allocate the data space. The data
       must be allocated manually beforehand, and its pointer is passed
-      as the argument. This pointer is used as the
-      (<parameter>chip</parameter> identifier in the above example)
-      for the instance. 
+      as the argument. This pointer (<parameter>chip</parameter> in the
+      above example) is used as the identifier for the instance.
       </para>
 
       <para>
@@ -1059,14 +1057,6 @@
       </para>
 
       <para>
-        As further notes, the destructors (both
-      <function>snd_mychip_dev_free</function> and
-      <function>snd_mychip_free</function>) cannot be defined with
-      the <parameter>__devexit</parameter> prefix, because they may be
-      called from the constructor, too, at the false path. 
-      </para>
-
-      <para>
       For a device which allows hotplugging, you can use
       <function>snd_card_free_when_closed</function>.  This one will
       postpone the destruction until all devices are closed.
@@ -1120,9 +1110,9 @@
   }
 
   /* chip-specific constructor */
-  static int __devinit snd_mychip_create(struct snd_card *card,
-                                         struct pci_dev *pci,
-                                         struct mychip **rchip)
+  static int snd_mychip_create(struct snd_card *card,
+                               struct pci_dev *pci,
+                               struct mychip **rchip)
   {
           struct mychip *chip;
           int err;
@@ -1200,7 +1190,7 @@
           .name = KBUILD_MODNAME,
           .id_table = snd_mychip_ids,
           .probe = snd_mychip_probe,
-          .remove = __devexit_p(snd_mychip_remove),
+          .remove = snd_mychip_remove,
   };
 
   /* module initialization */
@@ -1465,11 +1455,6 @@
       </para>
 
       <para>
-      Again, remember that you cannot
-      use the <parameter>__devexit</parameter> prefix for this destructor. 
-      </para>
-
-      <para>
       We didn't implement the hardware disabling part in the above.
       If you need to do this, please note that the destructor may be
       called even before the initialization of the chip is completed.
@@ -1619,7 +1604,7 @@
           .name = KBUILD_MODNAME,
           .id_table = snd_mychip_ids,
           .probe = snd_mychip_probe,
-          .remove = __devexit_p(snd_mychip_remove),
+          .remove = snd_mychip_remove,
   };
 ]]>
           </programlisting>
@@ -1630,11 +1615,7 @@
         The <structfield>probe</structfield> and
       <structfield>remove</structfield> functions have already
       been defined in the previous sections.
-      The <structfield>remove</structfield> function should
-      be defined with the 
-      <function>__devexit_p()</function> macro, so that it's not
-      defined for built-in (and non-hot-pluggable) case. The
-      <structfield>name</structfield> 
+      The <structfield>name</structfield>
       field is the name string of this device. Note that you must not
       use a slash <quote>/</quote> in this string. 
       </para>
@@ -1665,9 +1646,7 @@
       <para>
         Note that these module entries are tagged with
       <parameter>__init</parameter> and 
-      <parameter>__exit</parameter> prefixes, not
-      <parameter>__devinit</parameter> nor
-      <parameter>__devexit</parameter>.
+      <parameter>__exit</parameter> prefixes.
       </para>
 
       <para>
@@ -1918,7 +1897,7 @@
    */
 
   /* create a pcm device */
-  static int __devinit snd_mychip_new_pcm(struct mychip *chip)
+  static int snd_mychip_new_pcm(struct mychip *chip)
   {
           struct snd_pcm *pcm;
           int err;
@@ -1957,7 +1936,7 @@
         <informalexample>
           <programlisting>
 <![CDATA[
-  static int __devinit snd_mychip_new_pcm(struct mychip *chip)
+  static int snd_mychip_new_pcm(struct mychip *chip)
   {
           struct snd_pcm *pcm;
           int err;
@@ -2124,7 +2103,7 @@
           ....
   }
 
-  static int __devinit snd_mychip_new_pcm(struct mychip *chip)
+  static int snd_mychip_new_pcm(struct mychip *chip)
   {
           struct snd_pcm *pcm;
           ....
@@ -2324,7 +2303,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
         <constant>SNDRV_PCM_INFO_XXX</constant>. Here, at least, you
         have to specify whether the mmap is supported and which
         interleaved format is supported.
-        When the is supported, add the
+        When the hardware supports mmap, add the
         <constant>SNDRV_PCM_INFO_MMAP</constant> flag here. When the
         hardware supports the interleaved or the non-interleaved
         formats, <constant>SNDRV_PCM_INFO_INTERLEAVED</constant> or
@@ -2918,7 +2897,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
 
         <para>
           When the pcm supports the pause operation (given in the info
-        field of the hardware table), the <constant>PAUSE_PUSE</constant>
+        field of the hardware table), the <constant>PAUSE_PUSH</constant>
         and <constant>PAUSE_RELEASE</constant> commands must be
         handled here, too. The former is the command to pause the pcm,
         and the latter to restart the pcm again. 
@@ -3105,7 +3084,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
       <section id="pcm-interface-interrupt-handler-timer">
         <title>High frequency timer interrupts</title>
         <para>
-	This happense when the hardware doesn't generate interrupts
+	This happens when the hardware doesn't generate interrupts
         at the period boundary but issues timer interrupts at a fixed
         timer rate (e.g. es1968 or ymfpci drivers). 
         In this case, you need to check the current hardware
@@ -3271,18 +3250,19 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
 	  <title>Example of Hardware Constraints for Channels</title>
 	  <programlisting>
 <![CDATA[
-  static int hw_rule_format_by_channels(struct snd_pcm_hw_params *params,
+  static int hw_rule_channels_by_format(struct snd_pcm_hw_params *params,
                                         struct snd_pcm_hw_rule *rule)
   {
           struct snd_interval *c = hw_param_interval(params,
-                SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_CHANNELS);
+                        SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_CHANNELS);
           struct snd_mask *f = hw_param_mask(params, SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_FORMAT);
-          struct snd_mask fmt;
+          struct snd_interval ch;
 
-          snd_mask_any(&fmt);    /* Init the struct */
-          if (c->min < 2) {
-                  fmt.bits[0] &= SNDRV_PCM_FMTBIT_S16_LE;
-                  return snd_mask_refine(f, &fmt);
+          snd_interval_any(&ch);
+          if (f->bits[0] == SNDRV_PCM_FMTBIT_S16_LE) {
+                  ch.min = ch.max = 1;
+                  ch.integer = 1;
+                  return snd_interval_refine(c, &ch);
           }
           return 0;
   }
@@ -3298,35 +3278,35 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
 	 <programlisting>
 <![CDATA[
   snd_pcm_hw_rule_add(substream->runtime, 0, SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_CHANNELS,
-                      hw_rule_channels_by_format, 0, SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_FORMAT,
-                      -1);
+                      hw_rule_channels_by_format, NULL,
+                      SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_FORMAT, -1);
 ]]>
           </programlisting>
         </informalexample>
       </para>
 
       <para>
-        The rule function is called when an application sets the number of
-        channels. But an application can set the format before the number of
-        channels. Thus you also need to define the inverse rule:
+        The rule function is called when an application sets the PCM
+	format, and it refines the number of channels accordingly.
+        But an application may set the number of channels before
+	setting the format. Thus you also need to define the inverse rule:
 
        <example>
-	 <title>Example of Hardware Constraints for Channels</title>
+	 <title>Example of Hardware Constraints for Formats</title>
 	 <programlisting>
 <![CDATA[
-  static int hw_rule_channels_by_format(struct snd_pcm_hw_params *params,
+  static int hw_rule_format_by_channels(struct snd_pcm_hw_params *params,
                                         struct snd_pcm_hw_rule *rule)
   {
           struct snd_interval *c = hw_param_interval(params,
-                        SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_CHANNELS);
+                SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_CHANNELS);
           struct snd_mask *f = hw_param_mask(params, SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_FORMAT);
-          struct snd_interval ch;
+          struct snd_mask fmt;
 
-          snd_interval_any(&ch);
-          if (f->bits[0] == SNDRV_PCM_FMTBIT_S16_LE) {
-                  ch.min = ch.max = 1;
-                  ch.integer = 1;
-                  return snd_interval_refine(c, &ch);
+          snd_mask_any(&fmt);    /* Init the struct */
+          if (c->min < 2) {
+                  fmt.bits[0] &= SNDRV_PCM_FMTBIT_S16_LE;
+                  return snd_mask_refine(f, &fmt);
           }
           return 0;
   }
@@ -3341,8 +3321,8 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
 	 <programlisting>
 <![CDATA[
   snd_pcm_hw_rule_add(substream->runtime, 0, SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_FORMAT,
-                      hw_rule_format_by_channels, 0, SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_CHANNELS,
-                      -1);
+                      hw_rule_format_by_channels, NULL,
+                      SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_CHANNELS, -1);
 ]]>
           </programlisting>
         </informalexample>
@@ -3399,7 +3379,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
 	  <title>Definition of a Control</title>
           <programlisting>
 <![CDATA[
-  static struct snd_kcontrol_new my_control __devinitdata = {
+  static struct snd_kcontrol_new my_control = {
           .iface = SNDRV_CTL_ELEM_IFACE_MIXER,
           .name = "PCM Playback Switch",
           .index = 0,
@@ -3415,13 +3395,6 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
       </para>
 
       <para>
-        Most likely the control is created via
-      <function>snd_ctl_new1()</function>, and in such a case, you can
-      add the <parameter>__devinitdata</parameter> prefix to the
-      definition as above. 
-      </para>
-
-      <para>
         The <structfield>iface</structfield> field specifies the control
       type, <constant>SNDRV_CTL_ELEM_IFACE_XXX</constant>, which
       is usually <constant>MIXER</constant>.
@@ -3847,10 +3820,8 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
 
       <para>
         <function>snd_ctl_new1()</function> allocates a new
-      <structname>snd_kcontrol</structname> instance (that's why the definition
-      of <parameter>my_control</parameter> can be with
-      the <parameter>__devinitdata</parameter> 
-      prefix), and <function>snd_ctl_add</function> assigns the given
+      <structname>snd_kcontrol</structname> instance,
+      and <function>snd_ctl_add</function> assigns the given
       control component to the card. 
       </para>
     </section>
@@ -3896,7 +3867,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
 <![CDATA[
   static DECLARE_TLV_DB_SCALE(db_scale_my_control, -4050, 150, 0);
 
-  static struct snd_kcontrol_new my_control __devinitdata = {
+  static struct snd_kcontrol_new my_control = {
           ...
           .access = SNDRV_CTL_ELEM_ACCESS_READWRITE |
                     SNDRV_CTL_ELEM_ACCESS_TLV_READ,
@@ -5761,8 +5732,8 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
       <informalexample>
         <programlisting>
 <![CDATA[
-  static int __devinit snd_mychip_probe(struct pci_dev *pci,
-                               const struct pci_device_id *pci_id)
+  static int snd_mychip_probe(struct pci_dev *pci,
+                              const struct pci_device_id *pci_id)
   {
           ....
           struct snd_card *card;
@@ -5787,8 +5758,8 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
       <informalexample>
         <programlisting>
 <![CDATA[
-  static int __devinit snd_mychip_probe(struct pci_dev *pci,
-                               const struct pci_device_id *pci_id)
+  static int snd_mychip_probe(struct pci_dev *pci,
+                              const struct pci_device_id *pci_id)
   {
           ....
           struct snd_card *card;
@@ -5825,7 +5796,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
           .name = KBUILD_MODNAME,
           .id_table = snd_my_ids,
           .probe = snd_my_probe,
-          .remove = __devexit_p(snd_my_remove),
+          .remove = snd_my_remove,
   #ifdef CONFIG_PM
           .suspend = snd_my_suspend,
           .resume = snd_my_resume,
@@ -6193,14 +6164,12 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
 
       <para>
         The macro takes an conditional expression to evaluate.
-	When <constant>CONFIG_SND_DEBUG</constant>, is set, the
-	expression is actually evaluated. If it's non-zero, it shows
-	the warning message such as
+	When <constant>CONFIG_SND_DEBUG</constant>, is set, if the
+	expression is non-zero, it shows the warning message such as
 	<computeroutput>BUG? (xxx)</computeroutput>
-	normally followed by stack trace.  It returns the evaluated
-	value.
-	When no <constant>CONFIG_SND_DEBUG</constant> is set, this
-	macro always returns zero.
+	normally followed by stack trace.
+
+	In both cases it returns the evaluated value.
       </para>
 
     </section>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/writing_usb_driver.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/writing_usb_driver.tmpl
index bd97a13fa5ae..3210dcf741c9 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/writing_usb_driver.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/writing_usb_driver.tmpl
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@
   </para>
   <para>
       Because each different protocol causes a new driver to be created, I have
-      written a generic USB driver skeleton, modeled after the pci-skeleton.c
+      written a generic USB driver skeleton, modelled after the pci-skeleton.c
       file in the kernel source tree upon which many PCI network drivers have
       been based. This USB skeleton can be found at drivers/usb/usb-skeleton.c
       in the kernel source tree. In this article I will walk through the basics
diff --git a/Documentation/EDID/1024x768.S b/Documentation/EDID/1024x768.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4b486fe31b32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/EDID/1024x768.S
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+/*
+   1024x768.S: EDID data set for standard 1024x768 60 Hz monitor
+
+   Copyright (C) 2011 Carsten Emde <C.Emde@osadl.org>
+
+   This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+   modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+   as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+   of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+   GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+   along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+   Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA.
+*/
+
+/* EDID */
+#define VERSION 1
+#define REVISION 3
+
+/* Display */
+#define CLOCK 65000 /* kHz */
+#define XPIX 1024
+#define YPIX 768
+#define XY_RATIO XY_RATIO_4_3
+#define XBLANK 320
+#define YBLANK 38
+#define XOFFSET 8
+#define XPULSE 144
+#define YOFFSET (63+3)
+#define YPULSE (63+6)
+#define DPI 72
+#define VFREQ 60 /* Hz */
+#define TIMING_NAME "Linux XGA"
+#define ESTABLISHED_TIMINGS_BITS 0x08 /* Bit 3 -> 1024x768 @60 Hz */
+#define HSYNC_POL 0
+#define VSYNC_POL 0
+#define CRC 0x55
+
+#include "edid.S"
diff --git a/Documentation/EDID/1280x1024.S b/Documentation/EDID/1280x1024.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a2799fe33a4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/EDID/1280x1024.S
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+/*
+   1280x1024.S: EDID data set for standard 1280x1024 60 Hz monitor
+
+   Copyright (C) 2011 Carsten Emde <C.Emde@osadl.org>
+
+   This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+   modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+   as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+   of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+   GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+   along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+   Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA.
+*/
+
+/* EDID */
+#define VERSION 1
+#define REVISION 3
+
+/* Display */
+#define CLOCK 108000 /* kHz */
+#define XPIX 1280
+#define YPIX 1024
+#define XY_RATIO XY_RATIO_5_4
+#define XBLANK 408
+#define YBLANK 42
+#define XOFFSET 48
+#define XPULSE 112
+#define YOFFSET (63+1)
+#define YPULSE (63+3)
+#define DPI 72
+#define VFREQ 60 /* Hz */
+#define TIMING_NAME "Linux SXGA"
+#define ESTABLISHED_TIMINGS_BITS 0x00 /* none */
+#define HSYNC_POL 1
+#define VSYNC_POL 1
+#define CRC 0xa0
+
+#include "edid.S"
diff --git a/Documentation/EDID/1600x1200.S b/Documentation/EDID/1600x1200.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0ded64cfd1f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/EDID/1600x1200.S
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+/*
+   1600x1200.S: EDID data set for standard 1600x1200 60 Hz monitor
+
+   Copyright (C) 2013 Carsten Emde <C.Emde@osadl.org>
+
+   This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+   modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+   as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+   of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+   GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+   along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+   Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA.
+*/
+
+/* EDID */
+#define VERSION 1
+#define REVISION 3
+
+/* Display */
+#define CLOCK 162000 /* kHz */
+#define XPIX 1600
+#define YPIX 1200
+#define XY_RATIO XY_RATIO_4_3
+#define XBLANK 560
+#define YBLANK 50
+#define XOFFSET 64
+#define XPULSE 192
+#define YOFFSET (63+1)
+#define YPULSE (63+3)
+#define DPI 72
+#define VFREQ 60 /* Hz */
+#define TIMING_NAME "Linux UXGA"
+#define ESTABLISHED_TIMINGS_BITS 0x00 /* none */
+#define HSYNC_POL 1
+#define VSYNC_POL 1
+#define CRC 0x9d
+
+#include "edid.S"
diff --git a/Documentation/EDID/1680x1050.S b/Documentation/EDID/1680x1050.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..96f67cafcf2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/EDID/1680x1050.S
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+/*
+   1680x1050.S: EDID data set for standard 1680x1050 60 Hz monitor
+
+   Copyright (C) 2012 Carsten Emde <C.Emde@osadl.org>
+
+   This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+   modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+   as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+   of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+   GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+   along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+   Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA.
+*/
+
+/* EDID */
+#define VERSION 1
+#define REVISION 3
+
+/* Display */
+#define CLOCK 146250 /* kHz */
+#define XPIX 1680
+#define YPIX 1050
+#define XY_RATIO XY_RATIO_16_10
+#define XBLANK 560
+#define YBLANK 39
+#define XOFFSET 104
+#define XPULSE 176
+#define YOFFSET (63+3)
+#define YPULSE (63+6)
+#define DPI 96
+#define VFREQ 60 /* Hz */
+#define TIMING_NAME "Linux WSXGA"
+#define ESTABLISHED_TIMINGS_BITS 0x00 /* none */
+#define HSYNC_POL 1
+#define VSYNC_POL 1
+#define CRC 0x26
+
+#include "edid.S"
diff --git a/Documentation/EDID/1920x1080.S b/Documentation/EDID/1920x1080.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..36ed5d571d0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/EDID/1920x1080.S
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+/*
+   1920x1080.S: EDID data set for standard 1920x1080 60 Hz monitor
+
+   Copyright (C) 2012 Carsten Emde <C.Emde@osadl.org>
+
+   This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+   modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+   as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+   of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+   GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+   along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+   Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA.
+*/
+
+/* EDID */
+#define VERSION 1
+#define REVISION 3
+
+/* Display */
+#define CLOCK 148500 /* kHz */
+#define XPIX 1920
+#define YPIX 1080
+#define XY_RATIO XY_RATIO_16_9
+#define XBLANK 280
+#define YBLANK 45
+#define XOFFSET 88
+#define XPULSE 44
+#define YOFFSET (63+4)
+#define YPULSE (63+5)
+#define DPI 96
+#define VFREQ 60 /* Hz */
+#define TIMING_NAME "Linux FHD"
+#define ESTABLISHED_TIMINGS_BITS 0x00 /* none */
+#define HSYNC_POL 1
+#define VSYNC_POL 1
+#define CRC 0x05
+
+#include "edid.S"
diff --git a/Documentation/EDID/HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/EDID/HOWTO.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7146db1d9e8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/EDID/HOWTO.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+In the good old days when graphics parameters were configured explicitly
+in a file called xorg.conf, even broken hardware could be managed.
+
+Today, with the advent of Kernel Mode Setting, a graphics board is
+either correctly working because all components follow the standards -
+or the computer is unusable, because the screen remains dark after
+booting or it displays the wrong area. Cases when this happens are:
+- The graphics board does not recognize the monitor.
+- The graphics board is unable to detect any EDID data.
+- The graphics board incorrectly forwards EDID data to the driver.
+- The monitor sends no or bogus EDID data.
+- A KVM sends its own EDID data instead of querying the connected monitor.
+Adding the kernel parameter "nomodeset" helps in most cases, but causes
+restrictions later on.
+
+As a remedy for such situations, the kernel configuration item
+CONFIG_DRM_LOAD_EDID_FIRMWARE was introduced. It allows to provide an
+individually prepared or corrected EDID data set in the /lib/firmware
+directory from where it is loaded via the firmware interface. The code
+(see drivers/gpu/drm/drm_edid_load.c) contains built-in data sets for
+commonly used screen resolutions (1024x768, 1280x1024, 1600x1200,
+1680x1050, 1920x1080) as binary blobs, but the kernel source tree does
+not contain code to create these data. In order to elucidate the origin
+of the built-in binary EDID blobs and to facilitate the creation of
+individual data for a specific misbehaving monitor, commented sources
+and a Makefile environment are given here.
+
+To create binary EDID and C source code files from the existing data
+material, simply type "make".
+
+If you want to create your own EDID file, copy the file 1024x768.S,
+replace the settings with your own data and add a new target to the
+Makefile. Please note that the EDID data structure expects the timing
+values in a different way as compared to the standard X11 format.
+
+X11:
+HTimings:  hdisp hsyncstart hsyncend htotal
+VTimings:  vdisp vsyncstart vsyncend vtotal
+
+EDID:
+#define XPIX hdisp
+#define XBLANK htotal-hdisp
+#define XOFFSET hsyncstart-hdisp
+#define XPULSE hsyncend-hsyncstart
+
+#define YPIX vdisp
+#define YBLANK vtotal-vdisp
+#define YOFFSET (63+(vsyncstart-vdisp))
+#define YPULSE (63+(vsyncend-vsyncstart))
+
+The CRC value in the last line
+  #define CRC 0x55
+also is a bit tricky. After a first version of the binary data set is
+created, it must be checked with the "edid-decode" utility which will
+most probably complain about a wrong CRC. Fortunately, the utility also
+displays the correct CRC which must then be inserted into the source
+file. After the make procedure is repeated, the EDID data set is ready
+to be used.
diff --git a/Documentation/EDID/Makefile b/Documentation/EDID/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..17763ca3f12b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/EDID/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+
+SOURCES	:= $(wildcard [0-9]*x[0-9]*.S)
+
+BIN	:= $(patsubst %.S, %.bin, $(SOURCES))
+
+IHEX	:= $(patsubst %.S, %.bin.ihex, $(SOURCES))
+
+CODE	:= $(patsubst %.S, %.c, $(SOURCES))
+
+all:	$(BIN) $(IHEX) $(CODE)
+
+clean:
+	@rm -f *.o *.bin.ihex *.bin *.c
+
+%.o:	%.S
+	@cc -c $^
+
+%.bin:	%.o
+	@objcopy -Obinary $^ $@
+
+%.bin.ihex:	%.o
+	@objcopy -Oihex $^ $@
+	@dos2unix $@ 2>/dev/null
+
+%.c:	%.bin
+	@echo "{" >$@; hexdump -f hex $^ >>$@; echo "};" >>$@
diff --git a/Documentation/EDID/edid.S b/Documentation/EDID/edid.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ea97ae275fca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/EDID/edid.S
@@ -0,0 +1,261 @@
+/*
+   edid.S: EDID data template
+
+   Copyright (C) 2012 Carsten Emde <C.Emde@osadl.org>
+
+   This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+   modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+   as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+   of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+   GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+   along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+   Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA.
+*/
+
+
+/* Manufacturer */
+#define MFG_LNX1 'L'
+#define MFG_LNX2 'N'
+#define MFG_LNX3 'X'
+#define SERIAL 0
+#define YEAR 2012
+#define WEEK 5
+
+/* EDID 1.3 standard definitions */
+#define XY_RATIO_16_10	0b00
+#define XY_RATIO_4_3	0b01
+#define XY_RATIO_5_4	0b10
+#define XY_RATIO_16_9	0b11
+
+#define mfgname2id(v1,v2,v3) \
+	((((v1-'@')&0x1f)<<10)+(((v2-'@')&0x1f)<<5)+((v3-'@')&0x1f))
+#define swap16(v1) ((v1>>8)+((v1&0xff)<<8))
+#define msbs2(v1,v2) ((((v1>>8)&0x0f)<<4)+((v2>>8)&0x0f))
+#define msbs4(v1,v2,v3,v4) \
+	(((v1&0x03)>>2)+((v2&0x03)>>4)+((v3&0x03)>>6)+((v4&0x03)>>8))
+#define pixdpi2mm(pix,dpi) ((pix*25)/dpi)
+#define xsize pixdpi2mm(XPIX,DPI)
+#define ysize pixdpi2mm(YPIX,DPI)
+
+		.data
+
+/* Fixed header pattern */
+header:		.byte	0x00,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0x00
+
+mfg_id:		.word	swap16(mfgname2id(MFG_LNX1, MFG_LNX2, MFG_LNX3))
+
+prod_code:	.word	0
+
+/* Serial number. 32 bits, little endian. */
+serial_number:	.long	SERIAL
+
+/* Week of manufacture */
+week:		.byte	WEEK
+
+/* Year of manufacture, less 1990. (1990-2245)
+   If week=255, it is the model year instead */
+year:		.byte	YEAR-1990
+
+version:	.byte	VERSION 	/* EDID version, usually 1 (for 1.3) */
+revision:	.byte	REVISION	/* EDID revision, usually 3 (for 1.3) */
+
+/* If Bit 7=1	Digital input. If set, the following bit definitions apply:
+     Bits 6-1	Reserved, must be 0
+     Bit 0	Signal is compatible with VESA DFP 1.x TMDS CRGB,
+		  1 pixel per clock, up to 8 bits per color, MSB aligned,
+   If Bit 7=0	Analog input. If clear, the following bit definitions apply:
+     Bits 6-5	Video white and sync levels, relative to blank
+		  00=+0.7/-0.3 V; 01=+0.714/-0.286 V;
+		  10=+1.0/-0.4 V; 11=+0.7/0 V
+   Bit 4	Blank-to-black setup (pedestal) expected
+   Bit 3	Separate sync supported
+   Bit 2	Composite sync (on HSync) supported
+   Bit 1	Sync on green supported
+   Bit 0	VSync pulse must be serrated when somposite or
+		  sync-on-green is used. */
+video_parms:	.byte	0x6d
+
+/* Maximum horizontal image size, in centimetres
+   (max 292 cm/115 in at 16:9 aspect ratio) */
+max_hor_size:	.byte	xsize/10
+
+/* Maximum vertical image size, in centimetres.
+   If either byte is 0, undefined (e.g. projector) */
+max_vert_size:	.byte	ysize/10
+
+/* Display gamma, minus 1, times 100 (range 1.00-3.5 */
+gamma:		.byte	120
+
+/* Bit 7	DPMS standby supported
+   Bit 6	DPMS suspend supported
+   Bit 5	DPMS active-off supported
+   Bits 4-3	Display type: 00=monochrome; 01=RGB colour;
+		  10=non-RGB multicolour; 11=undefined
+   Bit 2	Standard sRGB colour space. Bytes 25-34 must contain
+		  sRGB standard values.
+   Bit 1	Preferred timing mode specified in descriptor block 1.
+   Bit 0	GTF supported with default parameter values. */
+dsp_features:	.byte	0xea
+
+/* Chromaticity coordinates. */
+/* Red and green least-significant bits
+   Bits 7-6	Red x value least-significant 2 bits
+   Bits 5-4	Red y value least-significant 2 bits
+   Bits 3-2	Green x value lst-significant 2 bits
+   Bits 1-0	Green y value least-significant 2 bits */
+red_green_lsb:	.byte	0x5e
+
+/* Blue and white least-significant 2 bits */
+blue_white_lsb:	.byte	0xc0
+
+/* Red x value most significant 8 bits.
+   0-255 encodes 0-0.996 (255/256); 0-0.999 (1023/1024) with lsbits */
+red_x_msb:	.byte	0xa4
+
+/* Red y value most significant 8 bits */
+red_y_msb:	.byte	0x59
+
+/* Green x and y value most significant 8 bits */
+green_x_y_msb:	.byte	0x4a,0x98
+
+/* Blue x and y value most significant 8 bits */
+blue_x_y_msb:	.byte	0x25,0x20
+
+/* Default white point x and y value most significant 8 bits */
+white_x_y_msb:	.byte	0x50,0x54
+
+/* Established timings */
+/* Bit 7	720x400 @ 70 Hz
+   Bit 6	720x400 @ 88 Hz
+   Bit 5	640x480 @ 60 Hz
+   Bit 4	640x480 @ 67 Hz
+   Bit 3	640x480 @ 72 Hz
+   Bit 2	640x480 @ 75 Hz
+   Bit 1	800x600 @ 56 Hz
+   Bit 0	800x600 @ 60 Hz */
+estbl_timing1:	.byte	0x00
+
+/* Bit 7	800x600 @ 72 Hz
+   Bit 6	800x600 @ 75 Hz
+   Bit 5	832x624 @ 75 Hz
+   Bit 4	1024x768 @ 87 Hz, interlaced (1024x768)
+   Bit 3	1024x768 @ 60 Hz
+   Bit 2	1024x768 @ 72 Hz
+   Bit 1	1024x768 @ 75 Hz
+   Bit 0	1280x1024 @ 75 Hz */
+estbl_timing2:	.byte	ESTABLISHED_TIMINGS_BITS
+
+/* Bit 7	1152x870 @ 75 Hz (Apple Macintosh II)
+   Bits 6-0 	Other manufacturer-specific display mod */
+estbl_timing3:	.byte	0x00
+
+/* Standard timing */
+/* X resolution, less 31, divided by 8 (256-2288 pixels) */
+std_xres:	.byte	(XPIX/8)-31
+/* Y resolution, X:Y pixel ratio
+   Bits 7-6	X:Y pixel ratio: 00=16:10; 01=4:3; 10=5:4; 11=16:9.
+   Bits 5-0	Vertical frequency, less 60 (60-123 Hz) */
+std_vres:	.byte	(XY_RATIO<<6)+VFREQ-60
+		.fill	7,2,0x0101	/* Unused */
+
+descriptor1:
+/* Pixel clock in 10 kHz units. (0.-655.35 MHz, little-endian) */
+clock:		.word	CLOCK/10
+
+/* Horizontal active pixels 8 lsbits (0-4095) */
+x_act_lsb:	.byte	XPIX&0xff
+/* Horizontal blanking pixels 8 lsbits (0-4095)
+   End of active to start of next active. */
+x_blk_lsb:	.byte	XBLANK&0xff
+/* Bits 7-4 	Horizontal active pixels 4 msbits
+   Bits 3-0	Horizontal blanking pixels 4 msbits */
+x_msbs:		.byte	msbs2(XPIX,XBLANK)
+
+/* Vertical active lines 8 lsbits (0-4095) */
+y_act_lsb:	.byte	YPIX&0xff
+/* Vertical blanking lines 8 lsbits (0-4095) */
+y_blk_lsb:	.byte	YBLANK&0xff
+/* Bits 7-4 	Vertical active lines 4 msbits
+   Bits 3-0 	Vertical blanking lines 4 msbits */
+y_msbs:		.byte	msbs2(YPIX,YBLANK)
+
+/* Horizontal sync offset pixels 8 lsbits (0-1023) From blanking start */
+x_snc_off_lsb:	.byte	XOFFSET&0xff
+/* Horizontal sync pulse width pixels 8 lsbits (0-1023) */
+x_snc_pls_lsb:	.byte	XPULSE&0xff
+/* Bits 7-4 	Vertical sync offset lines 4 lsbits -63)
+   Bits 3-0 	Vertical sync pulse width lines 4 lsbits -63) */
+y_snc_lsb:	.byte	((YOFFSET-63)<<4)+(YPULSE-63)
+/* Bits 7-6 	Horizontal sync offset pixels 2 msbits
+   Bits 5-4 	Horizontal sync pulse width pixels 2 msbits
+   Bits 3-2 	Vertical sync offset lines 2 msbits
+   Bits 1-0 	Vertical sync pulse width lines 2 msbits */
+xy_snc_msbs:	.byte	msbs4(XOFFSET,XPULSE,YOFFSET,YPULSE)
+
+/* Horizontal display size, mm, 8 lsbits (0-4095 mm, 161 in) */
+x_dsp_size:	.byte	xsize&0xff
+
+/* Vertical display size, mm, 8 lsbits (0-4095 mm, 161 in) */
+y_dsp_size:	.byte	ysize&0xff
+
+/* Bits 7-4 	Horizontal display size, mm, 4 msbits
+   Bits 3-0 	Vertical display size, mm, 4 msbits */
+dsp_size_mbsb:	.byte	msbs2(xsize,ysize)
+
+/* Horizontal border pixels (each side; total is twice this) */
+x_border:	.byte	0
+/* Vertical border lines (each side; total is twice this) */
+y_border:	.byte	0
+
+/* Bit 7 	Interlaced
+   Bits 6-5 	Stereo mode: 00=No stereo; other values depend on bit 0:
+   Bit 0=0: 01=Field sequential, sync=1 during right; 10=similar,
+     sync=1 during left; 11=4-way interleaved stereo
+   Bit 0=1 2-way interleaved stereo: 01=Right image on even lines;
+     10=Left image on even lines; 11=side-by-side
+   Bits 4-3 	Sync type: 00=Analog composite; 01=Bipolar analog composite;
+     10=Digital composite (on HSync); 11=Digital separate
+   Bit 2 	If digital separate: Vertical sync polarity (1=positive)
+   Other types: VSync serrated (HSync during VSync)
+   Bit 1 	If analog sync: Sync on all 3 RGB lines (else green only)
+   Digital: HSync polarity (1=positive)
+   Bit 0 	2-way line-interleaved stereo, if bits 4-3 are not 00. */
+features:	.byte	0x18+(VSYNC_POL<<2)+(HSYNC_POL<<1)
+
+descriptor2:	.byte	0,0	/* Not a detailed timing descriptor */
+		.byte	0	/* Must be zero */
+		.byte	0xff	/* Descriptor is monitor serial number (text) */
+		.byte	0	/* Must be zero */
+start1:		.ascii	"Linux #0"
+end1:		.byte	0x0a	/* End marker */
+		.fill	12-(end1-start1), 1, 0x20 /* Padded spaces */
+descriptor3:	.byte	0,0	/* Not a detailed timing descriptor */
+		.byte	0	/* Must be zero */
+		.byte	0xfd	/* Descriptor is monitor range limits */
+		.byte	0	/* Must be zero */
+start2:		.byte	VFREQ-1	/* Minimum vertical field rate (1-255 Hz) */
+		.byte	VFREQ+1	/* Maximum vertical field rate (1-255 Hz) */
+		.byte	(CLOCK/(XPIX+XBLANK))-1 /* Minimum horizontal line rate
+						    (1-255 kHz) */
+		.byte	(CLOCK/(XPIX+XBLANK))+1 /* Maximum horizontal line rate
+						    (1-255 kHz) */
+		.byte	(CLOCK/10000)+1	/* Maximum pixel clock rate, rounded up
+					   to 10 MHz multiple (10-2550 MHz) */
+		.byte	0	/* No extended timing information type */
+end2:		.byte	0x0a	/* End marker */
+		.fill	12-(end2-start2), 1, 0x20 /* Padded spaces */
+descriptor4:	.byte	0,0	/* Not a detailed timing descriptor */
+		.byte	0	/* Must be zero */
+		.byte	0xfc	/* Descriptor is text */
+		.byte	0	/* Must be zero */
+start3:		.ascii	TIMING_NAME
+end3:		.byte	0x0a	/* End marker */
+		.fill	12-(end3-start3), 1, 0x20 /* Padded spaces */
+extensions:	.byte	0	/* Number of extensions to follow */
+checksum:	.byte	CRC	/* Sum of all bytes must be 0 */
diff --git a/Documentation/EDID/hex b/Documentation/EDID/hex
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8873ebb618af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/EDID/hex
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+"\t" 8/1 "0x%02x, " "\n"
diff --git a/Documentation/HOWTO b/Documentation/HOWTO
index f7ade3b3b40d..27faae3e3846 100644
--- a/Documentation/HOWTO
+++ b/Documentation/HOWTO
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ required reading:
 
     Other excellent descriptions of how to create patches properly are:
 	"The Perfect Patch"
-		http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt
+		http://kerneltrap.org/node/3737
 	"Linux kernel patch submission format"
 		http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html
 
@@ -218,16 +218,16 @@ The development process
 Linux kernel development process currently consists of a few different
 main kernel "branches" and lots of different subsystem-specific kernel
 branches.  These different branches are:
-  - main 2.6.x kernel tree
-  - 2.6.x.y -stable kernel tree
-  - 2.6.x -git kernel patches
+  - main 3.x kernel tree
+  - 3.x.y -stable kernel tree
+  - 3.x -git kernel patches
   - subsystem specific kernel trees and patches
-  - the 2.6.x -next kernel tree for integration tests
+  - the 3.x -next kernel tree for integration tests
 
-2.6.x kernel tree
+3.x kernel tree
 -----------------
-2.6.x kernels are maintained by Linus Torvalds, and can be found on
-kernel.org in the pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/ directory.  Its development
+3.x kernels are maintained by Linus Torvalds, and can be found on
+kernel.org in the pub/linux/kernel/v3.x/ directory.  Its development
 process is as follows:
   - As soon as a new kernel is released a two weeks window is open,
     during this period of time maintainers can submit big diffs to
@@ -262,20 +262,20 @@ mailing list about kernel releases:
 	released according to perceived bug status, not according to a
 	preconceived timeline."
 
-2.6.x.y -stable kernel tree
+3.x.y -stable kernel tree
 ---------------------------
-Kernels with 4-part versions are -stable kernels. They contain
+Kernels with 3-part versions are -stable kernels. They contain
 relatively small and critical fixes for security problems or significant
-regressions discovered in a given 2.6.x kernel.
+regressions discovered in a given 3.x kernel.
 
 This is the recommended branch for users who want the most recent stable
 kernel and are not interested in helping test development/experimental
 versions.
 
-If no 2.6.x.y kernel is available, then the highest numbered 2.6.x
+If no 3.x.y kernel is available, then the highest numbered 3.x
 kernel is the current stable kernel.
 
-2.6.x.y are maintained by the "stable" team <stable@vger.kernel.org>, and
+3.x.y are maintained by the "stable" team <stable@vger.kernel.org>, and
 are released as needs dictate.  The normal release period is approximately
 two weeks, but it can be longer if there are no pressing problems.  A
 security-related problem, instead, can cause a release to happen almost
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ The file Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt in the kernel tree
 documents what kinds of changes are acceptable for the -stable tree, and
 how the release process works.
 
-2.6.x -git patches
+3.x -git patches
 ------------------
 These are daily snapshots of Linus' kernel tree which are managed in a
 git repository (hence the name.) These patches are usually released
@@ -317,13 +317,13 @@ revisions to it, and maintainers can mark patches as under review,
 accepted, or rejected.  Most of these patchwork sites are listed at
 http://patchwork.kernel.org/.
 
-2.6.x -next kernel tree for integration tests
+3.x -next kernel tree for integration tests
 ---------------------------------------------
-Before updates from subsystem trees are merged into the mainline 2.6.x
+Before updates from subsystem trees are merged into the mainline 3.x
 tree, they need to be integration-tested.  For this purpose, a special
 testing repository exists into which virtually all subsystem trees are
 pulled on an almost daily basis:
-	http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/sfr/linux-next.git
+	http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/next/linux-next.git
 	http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/
 
 This way, the -next kernel gives a summary outlook onto what will be
@@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ Differences between the kernel community and corporate structures
 
 The kernel community works differently than most traditional corporate
 development environments.  Here are a list of things that you can try to
-do to try to avoid problems:
+do to avoid problems:
   Good things to say regarding your proposed changes:
     - "This solves multiple problems."
     - "This deletes 2000 lines of code."
diff --git a/Documentation/IPMI.txt b/Documentation/IPMI.txt
index b2bea15137d2..f13c9132e9f2 100644
--- a/Documentation/IPMI.txt
+++ b/Documentation/IPMI.txt
@@ -42,13 +42,7 @@ The driver interface depends on your hardware.  If your system
 properly provides the SMBIOS info for IPMI, the driver will detect it
 and just work.  If you have a board with a standard interface (These
 will generally be either "KCS", "SMIC", or "BT", consult your hardware
-manual), choose the 'IPMI SI handler' option.  A driver also exists
-for direct I2C access to the IPMI management controller.  Some boards
-support this, but it is unknown if it will work on every board.  For
-this, choose 'IPMI SMBus handler', but be ready to try to do some
-figuring to see if it will work on your system if the SMBIOS/APCI
-information is wrong or not present.  It is fairly safe to have both
-these enabled and let the drivers auto-detect what is present.
+manual), choose the 'IPMI SI handler' option.
 
 You should generally enable ACPI on your system, as systems with IPMI
 can have ACPI tables describing them.
@@ -58,8 +52,7 @@ their job correctly, the IPMI controller should be automatically
 detected (via ACPI or SMBIOS tables) and should just work.  Sadly,
 many boards do not have this information.  The driver attempts
 standard defaults, but they may not work.  If you fall into this
-situation, you need to read the section below named 'The SI Driver' or
-"The SMBus Driver" on how to hand-configure your system.
+situation, you need to read the section below named 'The SI Driver'.
 
 IPMI defines a standard watchdog timer.  You can enable this with the
 'IPMI Watchdog Timer' config option.  If you compile the driver into
@@ -104,12 +97,7 @@ driver, each open file for this device ties in to the message handler
 as an IPMI user.
 
 ipmi_si - A driver for various system interfaces.  This supports KCS,
-SMIC, and BT interfaces.  Unless you have an SMBus interface or your
-own custom interface, you probably need to use this.
-
-ipmi_smb - A driver for accessing BMCs on the SMBus. It uses the
-I2C kernel driver's SMBus interfaces to send and receive IPMI messages
-over the SMBus.
+SMIC, and BT interfaces.
 
 ipmi_watchdog - IPMI requires systems to have a very capable watchdog
 timer.  This driver implements the standard Linux watchdog timer
@@ -360,34 +348,40 @@ You can change this at module load time (for a module) with:
 
   modprobe ipmi_si.o type=<type1>,<type2>....
        ports=<port1>,<port2>... addrs=<addr1>,<addr2>...
-       irqs=<irq1>,<irq2>... trydefaults=[0|1]
+       irqs=<irq1>,<irq2>...
        regspacings=<sp1>,<sp2>,... regsizes=<size1>,<size2>,...
        regshifts=<shift1>,<shift2>,...
        slave_addrs=<addr1>,<addr2>,...
        force_kipmid=<enable1>,<enable2>,...
        kipmid_max_busy_us=<ustime1>,<ustime2>,...
        unload_when_empty=[0|1]
+       trydefaults=[0|1] trydmi=[0|1] tryacpi=[0|1]
+       tryplatform=[0|1] trypci=[0|1]
 
-Each of these except si_trydefaults is a list, the first item for the
+Each of these except try... items is a list, the first item for the
 first interface, second item for the second interface, etc.
 
 The si_type may be either "kcs", "smic", or "bt".  If you leave it blank, it
 defaults to "kcs".
 
-If you specify si_addrs as non-zero for an interface, the driver will
+If you specify addrs as non-zero for an interface, the driver will
 use the memory address given as the address of the device.  This
 overrides si_ports.
 
-If you specify si_ports as non-zero for an interface, the driver will
+If you specify ports as non-zero for an interface, the driver will
 use the I/O port given as the device address.
 
-If you specify si_irqs as non-zero for an interface, the driver will
+If you specify irqs as non-zero for an interface, the driver will
 attempt to use the given interrupt for the device.
 
-si_trydefaults sets whether the standard IPMI interface at 0xca2 and
+trydefaults sets whether the standard IPMI interface at 0xca2 and
 any interfaces specified by ACPE are tried.  By default, the driver
 tries it, set this value to zero to turn this off.
 
+The other try... items disable discovery by their corresponding
+names.  These are all enabled by default, set them to zero to disable
+them.  The tryplatform disables openfirmware.
+
 The next three parameters have to do with register layout.  The
 registers used by the interfaces may not appear at successive
 locations and they may not be in 8-bit registers.  These parameters
@@ -482,53 +476,6 @@ for specifying an interface.  Note that when removing an interface,
 only the first three parameters (si type, address type, and address)
 are used for the comparison.  Any options are ignored for removing.
 
-The SMBus Driver
-----------------
-
-The SMBus driver allows up to 4 SMBus devices to be configured in the
-system.  By default, the driver will register any SMBus interfaces it finds
-in the I2C address range of 0x20 to 0x4f on any adapter.  You can change this
-at module load time (for a module) with:
-
-  modprobe ipmi_smb.o
-	addr=<adapter1>,<i2caddr1>[,<adapter2>,<i2caddr2>[,...]]
-	dbg=<flags1>,<flags2>...
-	[defaultprobe=1] [dbg_probe=1]
-
-The addresses are specified in pairs, the first is the adapter ID and the
-second is the I2C address on that adapter.
-
-The debug flags are bit flags for each BMC found, they are:
-IPMI messages: 1, driver state: 2, timing: 4, I2C probe: 8
-
-Setting smb_defaultprobe to zero disabled the default probing of SMBus
-interfaces at address range 0x20 to 0x4f.  This means that only the
-BMCs specified on the smb_addr line will be detected.
-
-Setting smb_dbg_probe to 1 will enable debugging of the probing and
-detection process for BMCs on the SMBusses.
-
-Discovering the IPMI compliant BMC on the SMBus can cause devices
-on the I2C bus to fail. The SMBus driver writes a "Get Device ID" IPMI
-message as a block write to the I2C bus and waits for a response.
-This action can be detrimental to some I2C devices. It is highly recommended
-that the known I2c address be given to the SMBus driver in the smb_addr
-parameter. The default address range will not be used when a smb_addr
-parameter is provided.
-
-When compiled into the kernel, the addresses can be specified on the
-kernel command line as:
-
-  ipmb_smb.addr=<adapter1>,<i2caddr1>[,<adapter2>,<i2caddr2>[,...]]
-	ipmi_smb.dbg=<flags1>,<flags2>...
-	ipmi_smb.defaultprobe=0 ipmi_smb.dbg_probe=1
-
-These are the same options as on the module command line.
-
-Note that you might need some I2C changes if CONFIG_IPMI_PANIC_EVENT
-is enabled along with this, so the I2C driver knows to run to
-completion during sending a panic event.
-
 
 Other Pieces
 ------------
diff --git a/Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt b/Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt
index 7890fae18529..01a675175a36 100644
--- a/Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt
+++ b/Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt
@@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ i.e counters for the CPU0-3 did not change.
 
 Here is an example of limiting that same irq (44) to cpus 1024 to 1031:
 
-[root@moon 44]# echo 1024-1031 > smp_affinity
-[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
+[root@moon 44]# echo 1024-1031 > smp_affinity_list
+[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity_list
 1024-1031
 
 Note that to do this with a bitmask would require 32 bitmasks of zero
diff --git a/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt b/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt
index 27dcaabfb4db..9bc95942ec22 100644
--- a/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt
+++ b/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,21 @@ systems with multiple interrupt controllers the kernel must ensure
 that each one gets assigned non-overlapping allocations of Linux
 IRQ numbers.
 
+The number of interrupt controllers registered as unique irqchips
+show a rising tendency: for example subdrivers of different kinds
+such as GPIO controllers avoid reimplementing identical callback
+mechanisms as the IRQ core system by modelling their interrupt
+handlers as irqchips, i.e. in effect cascading interrupt controllers.
+
+Here the interrupt number loose all kind of correspondence to
+hardware interrupt numbers: whereas in the past, IRQ numbers could
+be chosen so they matched the hardware IRQ line into the root
+interrupt controller (i.e. the component actually fireing the
+interrupt line to the CPU) nowadays this number is just a number.
+
+For this reason we need a mechanism to separate controller-local
+interrupt numbers, called hardware irq's, from Linux IRQ numbers.
+
 The irq_alloc_desc*() and irq_free_desc*() APIs provide allocation of
 irq numbers, but they don't provide any support for reverse mapping of
 the controller-local IRQ (hwirq) number into the Linux IRQ number
@@ -40,6 +55,10 @@ required hardware setup.
 When an interrupt is received, irq_find_mapping() function should
 be used to find the Linux IRQ number from the hwirq number.
 
+The irq_create_mapping() function must be called *atleast once*
+before any call to irq_find_mapping(), lest the descriptor will not
+be allocated.
+
 If the driver has the Linux IRQ number or the irq_data pointer, and
 needs to know the associated hwirq number (such as in the irq_chip
 callbacks) then it can be directly obtained from irq_data->hwirq.
@@ -93,6 +112,7 @@ Linux IRQ number into the hardware.
 Most drivers cannot use this mapping.
 
 ==== Legacy ====
+irq_domain_add_simple()
 irq_domain_add_legacy()
 irq_domain_add_legacy_isa()
 
@@ -115,3 +135,20 @@ The legacy map should only be used if fixed IRQ mappings must be
 supported.  For example, ISA controllers would use the legacy map for
 mapping Linux IRQs 0-15 so that existing ISA drivers get the correct IRQ
 numbers.
+
+Most users of legacy mappings should use irq_domain_add_simple() which
+will use a legacy domain only if an IRQ range is supplied by the
+system and will otherwise use a linear domain mapping. The semantics
+of this call are such that if an IRQ range is specified then
+descriptors will be allocated on-the-fly for it, and if no range is
+specified it will fall through to irq_domain_add_linear() which meand
+*no* irq descriptors will be allocated.
+
+A typical use case for simple domains is where an irqchip provider
+is supporting both dynamic and static IRQ assignments.
+
+In order to avoid ending up in a situation where a linear domain is
+used and no descriptor gets allocated it is very important to make sure
+that the driver using the simple domain call irq_create_mapping()
+before any irq_find_mapping() since the latter will actually work
+for the static IRQ assignment case.
diff --git a/Documentation/Makefile b/Documentation/Makefile
index 9b4bc5c76f33..31d302bc5863 100644
--- a/Documentation/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/Makefile
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
 obj-m := DocBook/ accounting/ auxdisplay/ connector/ \
 	filesystems/ filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ laptops/ networking/ \
-	pcmcia/ spi/ timers/ vm/ watchdog/src/
+	pcmcia/ spi/ timers/ watchdog/src/ misc-devices/mei/
diff --git a/Documentation/ManagementStyle b/Documentation/ManagementStyle
index a5f0ea58c788..a211ee8d8b44 100644
--- a/Documentation/ManagementStyle
+++ b/Documentation/ManagementStyle
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ sadly that you are one too, and that while we can all bask in the secure
 knowledge that we're better than the average person (let's face it,
 nobody ever believes that they're average or below-average), we should
 also admit that we're not the sharpest knife around, and there will be
-other people that are less of an idiot that you are. 
+other people that are less of an idiot than you are. 
 
 Some people react badly to smart people.  Others take advantage of them. 
 
diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt
index 53e6fca146d7..a09178086c30 100644
--- a/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt
@@ -127,15 +127,42 @@ on the number of vectors that can be allocated; pci_enable_msi_block()
 returns as soon as it finds any constraint that doesn't allow the
 call to succeed.
 
-4.2.3 pci_disable_msi
+4.2.3 pci_enable_msi_block_auto
+
+int pci_enable_msi_block_auto(struct pci_dev *dev, unsigned int *count)
+
+This variation on pci_enable_msi() call allows a device driver to request
+the maximum possible number of MSIs.  The MSI specification only allows
+interrupts to be allocated in powers of two, up to a maximum of 2^5 (32).
+
+If this function returns a positive number, it indicates that it has
+succeeded and the returned value is the number of allocated interrupts. In
+this case, the function enables MSI on this device and updates dev->irq to
+be the lowest of the new interrupts assigned to it.  The other interrupts
+assigned to the device are in the range dev->irq to dev->irq + returned
+value - 1.
+
+If this function returns a negative number, it indicates an error and
+the driver should not attempt to request any more MSI interrupts for
+this device.
+
+If the device driver needs to know the number of interrupts the device
+supports it can pass the pointer count where that number is stored. The
+device driver must decide what action to take if pci_enable_msi_block_auto()
+succeeds, but returns a value less than the number of interrupts supported.
+If the device driver does not need to know the number of interrupts
+supported, it can set the pointer count to NULL.
+
+4.2.4 pci_disable_msi
 
 void pci_disable_msi(struct pci_dev *dev)
 
 This function should be used to undo the effect of pci_enable_msi() or
-pci_enable_msi_block().  Calling it restores dev->irq to the pin-based
-interrupt number and frees the previously allocated message signaled
-interrupt(s).  The interrupt may subsequently be assigned to another
-device, so drivers should not cache the value of dev->irq.
+pci_enable_msi_block() or pci_enable_msi_block_auto().  Calling it restores
+dev->irq to the pin-based interrupt number and frees the previously
+allocated message signaled interrupt(s).  The interrupt may subsequently be
+assigned to another device, so drivers should not cache the value of
+dev->irq.
 
 Before calling this function, a device driver must always call free_irq()
 on any interrupt for which it previously called request_irq().
diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/pci-iov-howto.txt b/Documentation/PCI/pci-iov-howto.txt
index fc73ef5d65b8..86551cc72e03 100644
--- a/Documentation/PCI/pci-iov-howto.txt
+++ b/Documentation/PCI/pci-iov-howto.txt
@@ -2,6 +2,9 @@
 		Copyright (C) 2009 Intel Corporation
 		    Yu Zhao <yu.zhao@intel.com>
 
+		Update: November 2012
+			-- sysfs-based SRIOV enable-/disable-ment
+		Donald Dutile <ddutile@redhat.com>
 
 1. Overview
 
@@ -24,10 +27,21 @@ real existing PCI device.
 
 2.1 How can I enable SR-IOV capability
 
-The device driver (PF driver) will control the enabling and disabling
-of the capability via API provided by SR-IOV core. If the hardware
-has SR-IOV capability, loading its PF driver would enable it and all
-VFs associated with the PF.
+Multiple methods are available for SR-IOV enablement.
+In the first method, the device driver (PF driver) will control the
+enabling and disabling of the capability via API provided by SR-IOV core.
+If the hardware has SR-IOV capability, loading its PF driver would
+enable it and all VFs associated with the PF.  Some PF drivers require
+a module parameter to be set to determine the number of VFs to enable.
+In the second method, a write to the sysfs file sriov_numvfs will
+enable and disable the VFs associated with a PCIe PF.  This method
+enables per-PF, VF enable/disable values versus the first method,
+which applies to all PFs of the same device.  Additionally, the
+PCI SRIOV core support ensures that enable/disable operations are
+valid to reduce duplication in multiple drivers for the same
+checks, e.g., check numvfs == 0 if enabling VFs, ensure
+numvfs <= totalvfs.
+The second method is the recommended method for new/future VF devices.
 
 2.2 How can I use the Virtual Functions
 
@@ -40,20 +54,29 @@ requires device driver that is same as a normal PCI device's.
 3.1 SR-IOV API
 
 To enable SR-IOV capability:
+(a) For the first method, in the driver:
 	int pci_enable_sriov(struct pci_dev *dev, int nr_virtfn);
 	'nr_virtfn' is number of VFs to be enabled.
+(b) For the second method, from sysfs:
+	echo 'nr_virtfn' > \
+        /sys/bus/pci/devices/<DOMAIN:BUS:DEVICE.FUNCTION>/sriov_numvfs
 
 To disable SR-IOV capability:
+(a) For the first method, in the driver:
 	void pci_disable_sriov(struct pci_dev *dev);
+(b) For the second method, from sysfs:
+	echo  0 > \
+        /sys/bus/pci/devices/<DOMAIN:BUS:DEVICE.FUNCTION>/sriov_numvfs
 
 To notify SR-IOV core of Virtual Function Migration:
+(a) In the driver:
 	irqreturn_t pci_sriov_migration(struct pci_dev *dev);
 
 3.2 Usage example
 
 Following piece of code illustrates the usage of the SR-IOV API.
 
-static int __devinit dev_probe(struct pci_dev *dev, const struct pci_device_id *id)
+static int dev_probe(struct pci_dev *dev, const struct pci_device_id *id)
 {
 	pci_enable_sriov(dev, NR_VIRTFN);
 
@@ -62,7 +85,7 @@ static int __devinit dev_probe(struct pci_dev *dev, const struct pci_device_id *
 	return 0;
 }
 
-static void __devexit dev_remove(struct pci_dev *dev)
+static void dev_remove(struct pci_dev *dev)
 {
 	pci_disable_sriov(dev);
 
@@ -88,12 +111,29 @@ static void dev_shutdown(struct pci_dev *dev)
 	...
 }
 
+static int dev_sriov_configure(struct pci_dev *dev, int numvfs)
+{
+	if (numvfs > 0) {
+		...
+		pci_enable_sriov(dev, numvfs);
+		...
+		return numvfs;
+	}
+	if (numvfs == 0) {
+		....
+		pci_disable_sriov(dev);
+		...
+		return 0;
+	}
+}
+
 static struct pci_driver dev_driver = {
 	.name =		"SR-IOV Physical Function driver",
 	.id_table =	dev_id_table,
 	.probe =	dev_probe,
-	.remove =	__devexit_p(dev_remove),
+	.remove =	dev_remove,
 	.suspend =	dev_suspend,
 	.resume =	dev_resume,
 	.shutdown =	dev_shutdown,
+	.sriov_configure = dev_sriov_configure,
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt
index aa09e5476bba..bccf602a87f5 100644
--- a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt
@@ -183,12 +183,6 @@ Please mark the initialization and cleanup functions where appropriate
 			initializes.
 	__exit		Exit code. Ignored for non-modular drivers.
 
-
-	__devinit	Device initialization code.
-			Identical to __init if the kernel is not compiled
-			with CONFIG_HOTPLUG, normal function otherwise.
-	__devexit	The same for __exit.
-
 Tips on when/where to use the above attributes:
 	o The module_init()/module_exit() functions (and all
 	  initialization functions called _only_ from these)
@@ -196,20 +190,6 @@ Tips on when/where to use the above attributes:
 
 	o Do not mark the struct pci_driver.
 
-	o The ID table array should be marked __devinitconst; this is done
-	  automatically if the table is declared with DEFINE_PCI_DEVICE_TABLE().
-
-	o The probe() and remove() functions should be marked __devinit
-	  and __devexit respectively.  All initialization functions
-	  exclusively called by the probe() routine, can be marked __devinit.
-	  Ditto for remove() and __devexit.
-
-	o If mydriver_remove() is marked with __devexit(), then all address
-	  references to mydriver_remove must use __devexit_p(mydriver_remove)
-	  (in the struct pci_driver declaration for example).
-	  __devexit_p() will generate the function name _or_ NULL if the
-	  function will be discarded.  For an example, see drivers/net/tg3.c.
-
 	o Do NOT mark a function if you are not sure which mark to use.
 	  Better to not mark the function than mark the function wrong.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/RTFP.txt b/Documentation/RCU/RTFP.txt
index 7c1dfb19fc40..273e654d7d08 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/RTFP.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/RTFP.txt
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ in read-mostly situations.  This algorithm does take pains to avoid
 write-side contention and parallelize the other write-side overheads by
 providing a fine-grained locking design, however, it would be interesting
 to see how much of the performance advantage reported in 1990 remains
-in 2004.
+today.
 
 At about this same time, Adams [Adams91] described ``chaotic relaxation'',
 where the normal barriers between successive iterations of convergent
@@ -86,9 +86,9 @@ DYNIX/ptx kernel.  The corresponding conference paper appeared in 1998
 [McKenney98].
 
 In 1999, the Tornado and K42 groups described their "generations"
-mechanism, which quite similar to RCU [Gamsa99].  These operating systems
-made pervasive use of RCU in place of "existence locks", which greatly
-simplifies locking hierarchies.
+mechanism, which is quite similar to RCU [Gamsa99].  These operating
+systems made pervasive use of RCU in place of "existence locks", which
+greatly simplifies locking hierarchies and helps avoid deadlocks.
 
 2001 saw the first RCU presentation involving Linux [McKenney01a]
 at OLS.  The resulting abundance of RCU patches was presented the
@@ -106,8 +106,11 @@ these techniques still impose significant read-side overhead in the
 form of memory barriers.  Researchers at Sun worked along similar lines
 in the same timeframe [HerlihyLM02].  These techniques can be thought
 of as inside-out reference counts, where the count is represented by the
-number of hazard pointers referencing a given data structure (rather than
-the more conventional counter field within the data structure itself).
+number of hazard pointers referencing a given data structure rather than
+the more conventional counter field within the data structure itself.
+The key advantage of inside-out reference counts is that they can be
+stored in immortal variables, thus allowing races between access and
+deletion to be avoided.
 
 By the same token, RCU can be thought of as a "bulk reference count",
 where some form of reference counter covers all reference by a given CPU
@@ -179,27 +182,44 @@ tree using software transactional memory to protect concurrent updates
 (strange, but true!) [PhilHoward2011RCUTMRBTree], yet another variant of
 RCU-protected resizeable hash tables [Triplett:2011:RPHash], the 3.0 RCU
 trainwreck [PaulEMcKenney2011RCU3.0trainwreck], and Neil Brown's "Meet the
-Lockers" LWN article [NeilBrown2011MeetTheLockers].
+Lockers" LWN article [NeilBrown2011MeetTheLockers].  Some academic
+work looked at debugging uses of RCU [Seyster:2011:RFA:2075416.2075425].
+
+In 2012, Josh Triplett received his Ph.D. with his dissertation
+covering RCU-protected resizable hash tables and the relationship
+between memory barriers and read-side traversal order:  If the updater
+is making changes in the opposite direction from the read-side traveral
+order, the updater need only execute a memory-barrier instruction,
+but if in the same direction, the updater needs to wait for a grace
+period between the individual updates [JoshTriplettPhD].  Also in 2012,
+after seventeen years of attempts, an RCU paper made it into a top-flight
+academic journal, IEEE Transactions on Parallel and Distributed Systems
+[MathieuDesnoyers2012URCU].  A group of researchers in Spain applied
+user-level RCU to crowd simulation [GuillermoVigueras2012RCUCrowd], and
+another group of researchers in Europe produced a formal description of
+RCU based on separation logic [AlexeyGotsman2012VerifyGraceExtended],
+which was published in the 2013 European Symposium on Programming
+[AlexeyGotsman2013ESOPRCU].
+
 
 
 Bibtex Entries
 
 @article{Kung80
 ,author="H. T. Kung and Q. Lehman"
-,title="Concurrent Maintenance of Binary Search Trees"
+,title="Concurrent Manipulation of Binary Search Trees"
 ,Year="1980"
 ,Month="September"
 ,journal="ACM Transactions on Database Systems"
 ,volume="5"
 ,number="3"
 ,pages="354-382"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://portal.acm.org/citation.cfm?id=320619&dl=GUIDE,}
-[Viewed December 3, 2007]"
 ,annotation={
 	Use garbage collector to clean up data after everyone is done with it.
 	.
 	Oldest use of something vaguely resembling RCU that I have found.
+	http://portal.acm.org/citation.cfm?id=320619&dl=GUIDE,
+	[Viewed December 3, 2007]
 }
 }
 
@@ -309,7 +329,7 @@ for Programming Languages and Operating Systems}"
 ,doi = {http://doi.acm.org/10.1145/42392.42399}
 ,publisher = {ACM}
 ,address = {New York, NY, USA}
-,annotation= {
+,annotation={
 	At the top of page 307: "Conflicts with deposits and withdrawals
 	are necessary if the reported total is to be up to date.  They
 	could be avoided by having total return a sum that is slightly
@@ -346,8 +366,9 @@ for Programming Languages and Operating Systems}"
 }
 }
 
-@Book{Adams91
-,Author="Gregory R. Adams"
+# Was Adams91, see also syncrefs.bib.
+@Book{Andrews91textbook
+,Author="Gregory R. Andrews"
 ,title="Concurrent Programming, Principles, and Practices"
 ,Publisher="Benjamin Cummins"
 ,Year="1991"
@@ -398,39 +419,39 @@ for Programming Languages and Operating Systems}"
 }
 }
 
-@conference{Pu95a,
-Author = "Calton Pu and Tito Autrey and Andrew Black and Charles Consel and
+@conference{Pu95a
+,Author = "Calton Pu and Tito Autrey and Andrew Black and Charles Consel and
 Crispin Cowan and Jon Inouye and Lakshmi Kethana and Jonathan Walpole and
-Ke Zhang",
-Title = "Optimistic Incremental Specialization: Streamlining a Commercial
-Operating System",
-Booktitle = "15\textsuperscript{th} ACM Symposium on
-Operating Systems Principles (SOSP'95)",
-address = "Copper Mountain, CO",
-month="December",
-year="1995",
-pages="314-321",
-annotation="
+Ke Zhang"
+,Title = "Optimistic Incremental Specialization: Streamlining a Commercial
+,Operating System"
+,Booktitle = "15\textsuperscript{th} ACM Symposium on
+,Operating Systems Principles (SOSP'95)"
+,address = "Copper Mountain, CO"
+,month="December"
+,year="1995"
+,pages="314-321"
+,annotation={
 	Uses a replugger, but with a flag to signal when people are
 	using the resource at hand.  Only one reader at a time.
-"
-}
-
-@conference{Cowan96a,
-Author = "Crispin Cowan and Tito Autrey and Charles Krasic and
-Calton Pu and Jonathan Walpole",
-Title = "Fast Concurrent Dynamic Linking for an Adaptive Operating System",
-Booktitle = "International Conference on Configurable Distributed Systems
-(ICCDS'96)",
-address = "Annapolis, MD",
-month="May",
-year="1996",
-pages="108",
-isbn="0-8186-7395-8",
-annotation="
+}
+}
+
+@conference{Cowan96a
+,Author = "Crispin Cowan and Tito Autrey and Charles Krasic and
+,Calton Pu and Jonathan Walpole"
+,Title = "Fast Concurrent Dynamic Linking for an Adaptive Operating System"
+,Booktitle = "International Conference on Configurable Distributed Systems
+(ICCDS'96)"
+,address = "Annapolis, MD"
+,month="May"
+,year="1996"
+,pages="108"
+,isbn="0-8186-7395-8"
+,annotation={
 	Uses a replugger, but with a counter to signal when people are
 	using the resource at hand.  Allows multiple readers.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @techreport{Slingwine95
@@ -493,14 +514,13 @@ Problems"
 ,Year="1998"
 ,pages="509-518"
 ,Address="Las Vegas, NV"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/rclockpdcsproof.pdf}
-[Viewed December 3, 2007]"
 ,annotation={
 	Describes and analyzes RCU mechanism in DYNIX/ptx.  Describes
 	application to linked list update and log-buffer flushing.
 	Defines 'quiescent state'.  Includes both measured and analytic
 	evaluation.
+	http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/rclockpdcsproof.pdf
+	[Viewed December 3, 2007]
 }
 }
 
@@ -514,13 +534,12 @@ Operating System Design and Implementation}"
 ,Year="1999"
 ,pages="87-100"
 ,Address="New Orleans, LA"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://www.usenix.org/events/osdi99/full_papers/gamsa/gamsa.pdf}
-[Viewed August 30, 2006]"
 ,annotation={
 	Use of RCU-like facility in K42/Tornado.  Another independent
 	invention of RCU.
 	See especially pages 7-9 (Section 5).
+	http://www.usenix.org/events/osdi99/full_papers/gamsa/gamsa.pdf
+	[Viewed August 30, 2006]
 }
 }
 
@@ -611,9 +630,9 @@ Orran Krieger and Rusty Russell and Dipankar Sarma and Maneesh Soni"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=100259266316456&w=2}
 [Viewed June 23, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Memory-barrier and Alpha thread.  100 messages, not too bad...
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Spraul01
@@ -624,10 +643,10 @@ Orran Krieger and Rusty Russell and Dipankar Sarma and Maneesh Soni"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=100264675012867&w=2}
 [Viewed June 23, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Suggested burying memory barriers in Linux's list-manipulation
 	primitives.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{LinusTorvalds2001a
@@ -638,6 +657,8 @@ Orran Krieger and Rusty Russell and Dipankar Sarma and Maneesh Soni"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2001/10/13/105}
 [Viewed August 21, 2004]"
+,annotation={
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Blanchard02a
@@ -657,10 +678,10 @@ Orran Krieger and Rusty Russell and Dipankar Sarma and Maneesh Soni"
 ,Month="June"
 ,Year="2002"
 ,pages="289-300"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Measured scalability of Linux 2.4 kernel's directory-entry cache
 	(dcache), and measured some scalability enhancements.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @Conference{McKenney02a
@@ -674,10 +695,10 @@ Andrea Arcangeli and Andi Kleen and Orran Krieger and Rusty Russell"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.linux.org.uk/~ajh/ols2002_proceedings.pdf.gz}
 [Viewed June 23, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Presented and compared a number of RCU implementations for the
 	Linux kernel.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Sarma02a
@@ -688,9 +709,9 @@ Andrea Arcangeli and Andi Kleen and Orran Krieger and Rusty Russell"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=102645767914212&w=2}
 [Viewed June 23, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Compare fastwalk and RCU for dcache.  RCU won.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Barbieri02
@@ -701,9 +722,9 @@ Andrea Arcangeli and Andi Kleen and Orran Krieger and Rusty Russell"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=103082050621241&w=2}
 [Viewed: June 23, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Suggested RCU for vfs\_shared\_cred.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Dickins02a
@@ -722,10 +743,10 @@ Andrea Arcangeli and Andi Kleen and Orran Krieger and Rusty Russell"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=103462075416638&w=2}
 [Viewed June 23, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Performance of dcache RCU on kernbench for 16x NUMA-Q and 1x,
 	2x, and 4x systems.  RCU does no harm, and helps on 16x.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{LinusTorvalds2003a
@@ -736,14 +757,14 @@ Andrea Arcangeli and Andi Kleen and Orran Krieger and Rusty Russell"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2003/3/9/205}
 [Viewed March 13, 2006]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Linus suggests replacing brlock with RCU and/or seqlocks:
 	.
 	'It's entirely possible that the current user could be replaced
 	by RCU and/or seqlocks, and we could get rid of brlocks entirely.'
 	.
 	Steve Hemminger responds by replacing them with RCU.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @article{Appavoo03a
@@ -758,9 +779,9 @@ B. Rosenburg and M. Stumm and J. Xenidis"
 ,volume="42"
 ,number="1"
 ,pages="60-76"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Use of RCU to enable hot-swapping for autonomic behavior in K42.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Seigh03
@@ -769,9 +790,9 @@ B. Rosenburg and M. Stumm and J. Xenidis"
 ,Year="2003"
 ,Month="March"
 ,note="email correspondence"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Described the relationship of the VM/XA passive serialization to RCU.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @Conference{Arcangeli03
@@ -785,14 +806,12 @@ Dipankar Sarma"
 ,year="2003"
 ,month="June"
 ,pages="297-310"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/rcu.FREENIX.2003.06.14.pdf}
-[Viewed November 21, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Compared updated RCU implementations for the Linux kernel, and
 	described System V IPC use of RCU, including order-of-magnitude
 	performance improvements.
-"
+	http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/rcu.FREENIX.2003.06.14.pdf
+}
 }
 
 @Conference{Soules03a
@@ -820,10 +839,10 @@ Michal Ostrowski and Bryan Rosenburg and Jimi Xenidis"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.linuxjournal.com/article/6993}
 [Viewed November 14, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Reader-friendly intro to RCU, with the infamous old-man-and-brat
 	cartoon.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Sarma03a
@@ -832,7 +851,9 @@ Michal Ostrowski and Bryan Rosenburg and Jimi Xenidis"
 ,month="December"
 ,year="2003"
 ,note="Message ID: 20031222180114.GA2248@in.ibm.com"
-,annotation="dipankar/ct.2004.03.27/RCUll.2003.12.22.patch"
+,annotation={
+	dipankar/ct.2004.03.27/RCUll.2003.12.22.patch
+}
 }
 
 @techreport{Friedberg03a
@@ -844,11 +865,11 @@ Michal Ostrowski and Bryan Rosenburg and Jimi Xenidis"
 ,number="US Patent 6,662,184"
 ,month="December"
 ,pages="112"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Applies RCU to a wildcard-search Patricia tree in order to permit
 	synchronization-free lookup.  RCU is used to retain removed nodes
 	for a grace period before freeing them.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @article{McKenney04a
@@ -860,12 +881,11 @@ Michal Ostrowski and Bryan Rosenburg and Jimi Xenidis"
 ,volume="1"
 ,number="118"
 ,pages="38-46"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://www.linuxjournal.com/node/7124}
-[Viewed December 26, 2010]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Reader friendly intro to dcache and RCU.
-"
+	http://www.linuxjournal.com/node/7124
+	[Viewed December 26, 2010]
+}
 }
 
 @Conference{McKenney04b
@@ -879,10 +899,10 @@ Michal Ostrowski and Bryan Rosenburg and Jimi Xenidis"
 \url{http://www.linux.org.au/conf/2004/abstracts.html#90}
 \url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/lockperf.2004.01.17a.pdf}
 [Viewed June 23, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Compares performance of RCU to that of other locking primitives
 	over a number of CPUs (x86, Opteron, Itanium, and PPC).
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Sarma04a
@@ -891,7 +911,9 @@ Michal Ostrowski and Bryan Rosenburg and Jimi Xenidis"
 ,month="March"
 ,year="2004"
 ,note="\url{http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=108003746402892&w=2}"
-,annotation="Head of thread: dipankar/2004.03.23/rcu-low-lat.1.patch"
+,annotation={
+	Head of thread: dipankar/2004.03.23/rcu-low-lat.1.patch
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Sarma04b
@@ -900,7 +922,9 @@ Michal Ostrowski and Bryan Rosenburg and Jimi Xenidis"
 ,month="March"
 ,year="2004"
 ,note="\url{http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=108016474829546&w=2}"
-,annotation="dipankar/rcuth.2004.03.24/rcu-throttle.patch"
+,annotation={
+	dipankar/rcuth.2004.03.24/rcu-throttle.patch
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Spraul04a
@@ -911,9 +935,9 @@ Michal Ostrowski and Bryan Rosenburg and Jimi Xenidis"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=108546407726602&w=2}
 [Viewed June 23, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Hierarchical-bitmap patch for RCU infrastructure.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Steiner04a
@@ -950,10 +974,12 @@ Realtime Applications"
 ,year="2004"
 ,month="June"
 ,pages="182-191"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Describes and compares a number of modifications to the Linux RCU
 	implementation that make it friendly to realtime applications.
-"
+	https://www.usenix.org/conference/2004-usenix-annual-technical-conference/making-rcu-safe-deep-sub-millisecond-response
+	[Viewed July 26, 2012]
+}
 }
 
 @phdthesis{PaulEdwardMcKenneyPhD
@@ -964,14 +990,13 @@ in Operating System Kernels"
 ,school="OGI School of Science and Engineering at
 Oregon Health and Sciences University"
 ,year="2004"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/RCUdissertation.2004.07.14e1.pdf}
-[Viewed October 15, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Describes RCU implementations and presents design patterns
 	corresponding to common uses of RCU in several operating-system
 	kernels.
-"
+	http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/RCUdissertation.2004.07.14e1.pdf
+	[Viewed October 15, 2004]
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2004rcu:dereference
@@ -982,9 +1007,9 @@ Oregon Health and Sciences University"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2004/8/6/237}
 [Viewed June 8, 2010]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Introduce rcu_dereference().
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{JimHouston04a
@@ -995,11 +1020,11 @@ Oregon Health and Sciences University"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2004/8/30/87}
 [Viewed February 17, 2005]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Uses active code in rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock() to
 	make RCU happen, allowing RCU to function on CPUs that do not
 	receive a scheduling-clock interrupt.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{TomHart04a
@@ -1010,9 +1035,9 @@ Oregon Health and Sciences University"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.cs.toronto.edu/~tomhart/masters_thesis.html}
 [Viewed October 15, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Proposes comparing RCU to lock-free methods for the Linux kernel.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Vaddagiri04a
@@ -1023,9 +1048,9 @@ Oregon Health and Sciences University"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?t=109395731700004&r=1&w=2}
 [Viewed October 18, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Srivatsa's RCU patch for tcp_ehash lookup.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Thirumalai04a
@@ -1036,9 +1061,9 @@ Oregon Health and Sciences University"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?t=109144217400003&r=1&w=2}
 [Viewed October 18, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Ravikiran's lockfree FD patch.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{Thirumalai04b
@@ -1049,9 +1074,9 @@ Oregon Health and Sciences University"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=109152521410459&w=2}
 [Viewed October 18, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Ravikiran's lockfree FD patch.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2004rcu:assign:pointer
@@ -1062,9 +1087,9 @@ Oregon Health and Sciences University"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2004/10/23/241}
 [Viewed June 8, 2010]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Introduce rcu_assign_pointer().
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{JamesMorris04a
@@ -1073,12 +1098,12 @@ Oregon Health and Sciences University"
 ,day="15"
 ,month="November"
 ,year="2004"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=110054979416004&w=2}
-[Viewed December 10, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,note="\url{http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=110054979416004&w=2}"
+,annotation={
 	James Morris posts Kaigai Kohei's patch to LKML.
-"
+	[Viewed December 10, 2004]
+	Kaigai's patch is at https://lkml.org/lkml/2004/9/27/52
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{JamesMorris04b
@@ -1089,9 +1114,9 @@ Oregon Health and Sciences University"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.livejournal.com/users/james_morris/2153.html}
 [Viewed December 10, 2004]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	RCU helps SELinux performance.  ;-)  Made LWN.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulMcKenney2005RCUSemantics
@@ -1103,9 +1128,9 @@ Oregon Health and Sciences University"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/rcu-semantics.2005.01.30a.pdf}
 [Viewed December 6, 2009]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Early derivation of RCU semantics.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulMcKenney2005e
@@ -1117,10 +1142,10 @@ Oregon Health and Sciences University"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/3/17/199}
 [Viewed September 5, 2005]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	First posting showing how RCU can be safely adapted for
 	preemptable RCU read side critical sections.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{EsbenNeilsen2005a
@@ -1132,12 +1157,12 @@ Oregon Health and Sciences University"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/3/18/122}
 [Viewed March 30, 2006]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Esben Neilsen suggests read-side suppression of grace-period
 	processing for crude-but-workable realtime RCU.  The downside
-	is indefinite grace periods...But this is OK for experimentation
+	is indefinite grace periods...  But this is OK for experimentation
 	and testing.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{TomHart05a
@@ -1149,10 +1174,10 @@ Data Structures"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{ftp://ftp.cs.toronto.edu/csrg-technical-reports/515/}
 [Viewed March 4, 2005]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Comparison of RCU, QBSR, and EBSR.  RCU wins for read-mostly
 	workloads.  ;-)
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{JonCorbet2005DeprecateSyncKernel
@@ -1164,10 +1189,10 @@ Data Structures"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lwn.net/Articles/134484/}
 [Viewed May 3, 2005]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Jon Corbet describes deprecation of synchronize_kernel()
 	in favor of synchronize_rcu() and synchronize_sched().
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulMcKenney05a
@@ -1178,10 +1203,10 @@ Data Structures"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/5/9/185}
 [Viewed May 13, 2005]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	First publication of working lock-based deferred free patches
 	for the CONFIG_PREEMPT_RT environment.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @conference{PaulMcKenney05b
@@ -1194,10 +1219,10 @@ Data Structures"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/realtimeRCU.2005.04.23a.pdf}
 [Viewed May 13, 2005]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Realtime turns into making RCU yet more realtime friendly.
 	http://lca2005.linux.org.au/Papers/Paul%20McKenney/Towards%20Hard%20Realtime%20Response%20from%20the%20Linux%20Kernel/LKS.2005.04.22a.pdf
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenneyHomePage
@@ -1208,9 +1233,9 @@ Data Structures"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/}
 [Viewed May 25, 2005]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Paul McKenney's home page.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenneyRCUPage
@@ -1221,9 +1246,9 @@ Data Structures"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU}
 [Viewed May 25, 2005]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Paul McKenney's RCU page.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{JosephSeigh2005a
@@ -1232,10 +1257,10 @@ Data Structures"
 ,month="July"
 ,year="2005"
 ,note="Personal communication"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Joe Seigh announcing his atomic-ptr-plus project.
 	http://sourceforge.net/projects/atomic-ptr-plus/
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{JosephSeigh2005b
@@ -1247,9 +1272,9 @@ Data Structures"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://sourceforge.net/projects/atomic-ptr-plus/}
 [Viewed August 8, 2005]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Joe Seigh's atomic-ptr-plus project.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulMcKenney2005c
@@ -1261,9 +1286,9 @@ Data Structures"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/8/1/155}
 [Viewed March 14, 2006]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	First operating counter-based realtime RCU patch posted to LKML.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulMcKenney2005d
@@ -1275,11 +1300,11 @@ Data Structures"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/8/8/108}
 [Viewed March 14, 2006]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	First operating counter-based realtime RCU patch posted to LKML,
 	but fixed so that various unusual combinations of configuration
 	parameters all function properly.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulMcKenney2005rcutorture
@@ -1291,9 +1316,25 @@ Data Structures"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/10/1/70}
 [Viewed March 14, 2006]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	First rcutorture patch.
-"
+}
+}
+
+@unpublished{DavidSMiller2006HashedLocking
+,Author="David S. Miller"
+,Title="Re: [{PATCH}, {RFC}] {RCU} : {OOM} avoidance and lower latency"
+,month="January"
+,day="6"
+,year="2006"
+,note="Available:
+\url{https://lkml.org/lkml/2006/1/7/22}
+[Viewed February 29, 2012]"
+,annotation={
+	David Miller's view on hashed arrays of locks: used to really
+	like it, but time he saw an opportunity for this technique,
+	something else always proved superior.  Partitioning or RCU.  ;-)
+}
 }
 
 @conference{ThomasEHart2006a
@@ -1309,10 +1350,10 @@ Distributed Processing Symposium"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/hart_ipdps06.pdf}
 [Viewed April 28, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Compares QSBR, HPBR, EBR, and lock-free reference counting.
 	http://www.cs.toronto.edu/~tomhart/perflab/ipdps06.tgz
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{NickPiggin2006radixtree
@@ -1324,9 +1365,9 @@ Distributed Processing Symposium"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2006/6/20/238}
 [Viewed March 25, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	RCU-protected radix tree.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @Conference{PaulEMcKenney2006b
@@ -1341,9 +1382,9 @@ Suparna Bhattacharya"
 \url{http://www.linuxsymposium.org/2006/view_abstract.php?content_key=184}
 \url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/OLSrtRCU.2006.08.11a.pdf}
 [Viewed January 1, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Described how to improve the -rt implementation of realtime RCU.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{WikipediaRCU
@@ -1354,12 +1395,11 @@ Canis Rufus and Zoicon5 and Anome and Hal Eisen"
 ,month="July"
 ,day="8"
 ,year="2006"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Read-copy-update}
-[Viewed August 21, 2006]"
-,annotation="
+,note="\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Read-copy-update}"
+,annotation={
 	Wikipedia RCU page as of July 8 2006.
-"
+	[Viewed August 21, 2006]
+}
 }
 
 @Conference{NickPiggin2006LocklessPageCache
@@ -1372,9 +1412,9 @@ Canis Rufus and Zoicon5 and Anome and Hal Eisen"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.linuxsymposium.org/2006/view_abstract.php?content_key=184}
 [Viewed January 11, 2009]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Uses RCU-protected radix tree for a lockless page cache.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2006c
@@ -1388,9 +1428,9 @@ Canis Rufus and Zoicon5 and Anome and Hal Eisen"
 Revised:
 \url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/srcu.2007.01.14a.pdf}
 [Viewed August 21, 2006]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	LWN article introducing SRCU.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{RobertOlsson2006a
@@ -1399,12 +1439,11 @@ Revised:
 ,month="August"
 ,day="18"
 ,year="2006"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://www.nada.kth.se/~snilsson/publications/TRASH/trash.pdf}
-[Viewed March 4, 2011]"
-,annotation="
+,note="\url{http://www.nada.kth.se/~snilsson/publications/TRASH/trash.pdf}"
+,annotation={
 	RCU-protected dynamic trie-hash combination.
-"
+	[Viewed March 4, 2011]
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{ChristophHellwig2006RCU2SRCU
@@ -1426,10 +1465,10 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/linuxusage.html}
 [Viewed January 14, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Paul McKenney's RCU page showing graphs plotting Linux-kernel
 	usage of RCU.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenneyRCUusageRawDataPage
@@ -1440,10 +1479,10 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/linuxusage/rculocktab.html}
 [Viewed January 14, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Paul McKenney's RCU page showing Linux usage of RCU in tabular
 	form, with links to corresponding cscope databases.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{GauthamShenoy2006RCUrwlock
@@ -1455,13 +1494,13 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2006/10/26/73}
 [Viewed January 26, 2009]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	RCU-based reader-writer lock that allows readers to proceed with
 	no memory barriers or atomic instruction in absence of writers.
 	If writer do show up, readers must of course wait as required by
 	the semantics of reader-writer locking.  This is a recursive
 	lock.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{JensAxboe2006SlowSRCU
@@ -1474,11 +1513,11 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2006/11/17/56}
 [Viewed May 28, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	SRCU's grace periods are too slow for Jens, even after a
 	factor-of-three speedup.
 	Sped-up version of SRCU at http://lkml.org/lkml/2006/11/17/359.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{OlegNesterov2006QRCU
@@ -1491,10 +1530,10 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2006/11/19/69}
 [Viewed May 28, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	First cut of QRCU.  Expanded/corrected versions followed.
 	Used to be OlegNesterov2007QRCU, now time-corrected.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{OlegNesterov2006aQRCU
@@ -1506,10 +1545,10 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2006/11/29/330}
 [Viewed November 26, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Expanded/corrected version of QRCU.
 	Used to be OlegNesterov2007aQRCU, now time-corrected.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{EvgeniyPolyakov2006RCUslowdown
@@ -1521,10 +1560,10 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.ioremap.net/node/41}
 [Viewed October 28, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Using RCU as a pure delay leads to a 2.5x slowdown in skbs in
 	the Linux kernel.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @inproceedings{ChrisMatthews2006ClusteredObjectsRCU
@@ -1541,7 +1580,8 @@ Revised:
 ,annotation={
 	Uses K42's RCU-like functionality to manage clustered-object
 	lifetimes.
-}}
+}
+}
 
 @article{DilmaDaSilva2006K42
 ,author = {Silva, Dilma Da and Krieger, Orran and Wisniewski, Robert W. and Waterland, Amos and Tam, David and Baumann, Andrew}
@@ -1557,7 +1597,8 @@ Revised:
 ,address = {New York, NY, USA}
 ,annotation={
 	Describes relationship of K42 generations to RCU.
-}}
+}
+}
 
 # CoreyMinyard2007list_splice_rcu
 @unpublished{CoreyMinyard2007list:splice:rcu
@@ -1569,9 +1610,9 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/1/3/112}
 [Viewed May 28, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Patch for list_splice_rcu().
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2007rcubarrier
@@ -1583,9 +1624,9 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lwn.net/Articles/217484/}
 [Viewed November 22, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	LWN article introducing the rcu_barrier() primitive.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PeterZijlstra2007SyncBarrier
@@ -1597,10 +1638,10 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/1/28/34}
 [Viewed March 27, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	RCU-like implementation for frequent updaters and rare readers(!).
 	Subsumed into QRCU.  Maybe...
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2007BoostRCU
@@ -1609,14 +1650,13 @@ Revised:
 ,month="February"
 ,day="5"
 ,year="2007"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/220677/}
-Revised:
-\url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/RCUbooststate.2007.04.16a.pdf}
-[Viewed September 7, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,note="\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/220677/}"
+,annotation={
 	LWN article introducing RCU priority boosting.
-"
+	Revised:
+	http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/RCUbooststate.2007.04.16a.pdf
+	[Viewed September 7, 2007]
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulMcKenney2007QRCUpatch
@@ -1628,9 +1668,9 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/2/25/18}
 [Viewed March 27, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Patch for QRCU supplying lock-free fast path.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @article{JonathanAppavoo2007K42RCU
@@ -1647,7 +1687,8 @@ Revised:
 ,address = {New York, NY, USA}
 ,annotation={
 	Role of RCU in K42.
-}}
+}
+}
 
 @conference{RobertOlsson2007Trash
 ,Author="Robert Olsson and Stefan Nilsson"
@@ -1658,9 +1699,9 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://ieeexplore.ieee.org/xpl/freeabs_all.jsp?arnumber=4281239}
 [Viewed October 1, 2010]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	RCU-protected dynamic trie-hash combination.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @conference{PeterZijlstra2007ConcurrentPagecacheRCU
@@ -1673,10 +1714,10 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://ols.108.redhat.com/2007/Reprints/zijlstra-Reprint.pdf}
 [Viewed April 14, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Page-cache modifications permitting RCU readers and concurrent
 	updates.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2007whatisRCU
@@ -1701,11 +1742,11 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lwn.net/Articles/243851/}
 [Viewed September 8, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	LWN article describing Promela and spin, and also using Oleg
 	Nesterov's QRCU as an example (with Paul McKenney's fastpath).
 	Merged patch at: http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/2/25/18
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2007WG21DDOatomics
@@ -1714,12 +1755,12 @@ Revised:
 ,month="August"
 ,day="3"
 ,year="2007"
-,note="Preprint:
+,note="Available:
 \url{http://open-std.org/jtc1/sc22/wg21/docs/papers/2008/n2664.htm}
 [Viewed December 7, 2009]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	RCU for C++, parts 1 and 2.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2007WG21DDOannotation
@@ -1728,12 +1769,12 @@ Revised:
 ,month="September"
 ,day="18"
 ,year="2008"
-,note="Preprint:
+,note="Available:
 \url{http://open-std.org/jtc1/sc22/wg21/docs/papers/2008/n2782.htm}
 [Viewed December 7, 2009]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	RCU for C++, part 2, updated many times.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2007PreemptibleRCUPatch
@@ -1745,10 +1786,10 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/9/10/213}
 [Viewed October 25, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Final patch for preemptable RCU to -rt.  (Later patches were
 	to mainline, eventually incorporated.)
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2007PreemptibleRCU
@@ -1760,9 +1801,9 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lwn.net/Articles/253651/}
 [Viewed October 25, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	LWN article describing the design of preemptible RCU.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @article{ThomasEHart2007a
@@ -1783,6 +1824,7 @@ Revised:
 }
 }
 
+# MathieuDesnoyers2007call_rcu_schedNeeded
 @unpublished{MathieuDesnoyers2007call:rcu:schedNeeded
 ,Author="Mathieu Desnoyers"
 ,Title="Re: [patch 1/2] {Linux} Kernel Markers - Support Multiple Probes"
@@ -1792,9 +1834,9 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/12/20/244}
 [Viewed March 27, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Request for call_rcu_sched() and rcu_barrier_sched().
-"
+}
 }
 
 
@@ -1815,11 +1857,11 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lwn.net/Articles/262464/}
 [Viewed December 27, 2007]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Lays out the three basic components of RCU: (1) publish-subscribe,
 	(2) wait for pre-existing readers to complete, and (2) maintain
 	multiple versions.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2008WhatIsRCUUsage
@@ -1831,7 +1873,7 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lwn.net/Articles/263130/}
 [Viewed January 4, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Lays out six uses of RCU:
 	1. RCU is a Reader-Writer Lock Replacement
 	2. RCU is a Restricted Reference-Counting Mechanism
@@ -1839,7 +1881,7 @@ Revised:
 	4. RCU is a Poor Man's Garbage Collector
 	5. RCU is a Way of Providing Existence Guarantees
 	6. RCU is a Way of Waiting for Things to Finish
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2008WhatIsRCUAPI
@@ -1851,10 +1893,10 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lwn.net/Articles/264090/}
 [Viewed January 10, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Gives an overview of the Linux-kernel RCU API and a brief annotated RCU
 	bibliography.
-"
+}
 }
 
 #
@@ -1872,10 +1914,10 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/1/29/208}
 [Viewed March 27, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Patch that prevents preemptible RCU from unnecessarily waking
 	up dynticks-idle CPUs.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2008LKMLDependencyOrdering
@@ -1887,9 +1929,9 @@ Revised:
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/2/2/255}
 [Viewed October 18, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Explanation of compilers violating dependency ordering.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @Conference{PaulEMcKenney2008Beijing
@@ -1916,24 +1958,26 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lwn.net/Articles/279077/}
 [Viewed April 24, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Describes use of Promela and Spin to validate (and fix!) the
 	dynticks/RCU interface.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @article{DinakarGuniguntala2008IBMSysJ
 ,author="D. Guniguntala and P. E. McKenney and J. Triplett and J. Walpole"
 ,title="The read-copy-update mechanism for supporting real-time applications on shared-memory multiprocessor systems with {Linux}"
 ,Year="2008"
-,Month="April-June"
+,Month="May"
 ,journal="IBM Systems Journal"
 ,volume="47"
 ,number="2"
 ,pages="221-236"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	RCU, realtime RCU, sleepable RCU, performance.
-"
+	http://www.research.ibm.com/journal/sj/472/guniguntala.pdf
+	[Viewed April 24, 2008]
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{LaiJiangshan2008NewClassicAlgorithm
@@ -1945,11 +1989,11 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/6/2/539}
 [Viewed December 10, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Updated RCU classic algorithm.  Introduced multi-tailed list
 	for RCU callbacks and also pulling common code into
 	__call_rcu().
-"
+}
 }
 
 @article{PaulEMcKenney2008RCUOSR
@@ -1966,6 +2010,7 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,address="New York, NY, USA"
 ,annotation={
 	Linux changed RCU to a far greater degree than RCU has changed Linux.
+	http://portal.acm.org/citation.cfm?doid=1400097.1400099
 }
 }
 
@@ -1978,10 +2023,10 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/8/21/336}
 [Viewed December 8, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	State-based RCU.  One key thing that this patch does is to
 	separate the dynticks handling of NMIs and IRQs.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{ManfredSpraul2008dyntickIRQNMI
@@ -1993,12 +2038,13 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/9/6/86}
 [Viewed December 8, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Manfred notes a fix required to my attempt to separate irq
 	and NMI processing for hierarchical RCU's dynticks interface.
-"
+}
 }
 
+# Was PaulEMcKenney2011cyclicRCU
 @techreport{PaulEMcKenney2008cyclicRCU
 ,author="Paul E. McKenney"
 ,title="Efficient Support of Consistent Cyclic Search With Read-Copy Update"
@@ -2008,11 +2054,11 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,number="US Patent 7,426,511"
 ,month="September"
 ,pages="23"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Maintains an additional level of indirection to allow
 	readers to confine themselves to the desired snapshot of the
 	data structure.  Only permits one update at a time.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2008HierarchicalRCU
@@ -2021,13 +2067,12 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,month="November"
 ,day="3"
 ,year="2008"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/305782/}
-[Viewed November 6, 2008]"
-,annotation="
+,note="\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/305782/}"
+,annotation={
 	RCU with combining-tree-based grace-period detection,
 	permitting it to handle thousands of CPUs.
-"
+	[Viewed November 6, 2008]
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2009BloatwatchRCU
@@ -2039,10 +2084,10 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2009/1/14/449}
 [Viewed January 15, 2009]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Small-footprint implementation of RCU for uniprocessor
 	embedded applications -- and also for exposition purposes.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @conference{PaulEMcKenney2009MaliciousURCU
@@ -2055,9 +2100,9 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/urcutorture.2009.01.22a.pdf}
 [Viewed February 2, 2009]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Realtime RCU and torture-testing RCU uses.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{MathieuDesnoyers2009URCU
@@ -2066,16 +2111,14 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,month="February"
 ,day="5"
 ,year="2009"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2009/2/5/572}
-\url{http://lttng.org/urcu}
-[Viewed February 20, 2009]"
-,annotation="
+,note="\url{http://lttng.org/urcu}"
+,annotation={
 	Mathieu Desnoyers's user-space RCU implementation.
 	git://lttng.org/userspace-rcu.git
 	http://lttng.org/cgi-bin/gitweb.cgi?p=userspace-rcu.git
 	http://lttng.org/urcu
-"
+	http://lkml.org/lkml/2009/2/5/572
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2009LWNBloatWatchRCU
@@ -2087,9 +2130,24 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lwn.net/Articles/323929/}
 [Viewed March 20, 2009]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Uniprocessor assumptions allow simplified RCU implementation.
-"
+}
+}
+
+@unpublished{EvgeniyPolyakov2009EllipticsNetwork
+,Author="Evgeniy Polyakov"
+,Title="The Elliptics Network"
+,month="April"
+,day="17"
+,year="2009"
+,note="Available:
+\url{http://www.ioremap.net/projects/elliptics}
+[Viewed April 30, 2009]"
+,annotation={
+	Distributed hash table with transactions, using elliptic
+	hash functions to distribute data.
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2009expeditedRCU
@@ -2101,9 +2159,9 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2009/6/25/306}
 [Viewed August 16, 2009]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	First posting of expedited RCU to be accepted into -tip.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2009fastRTRCU
@@ -2115,21 +2173,21 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2009/7/23/294}
 [Viewed August 15, 2009]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	First posting of simple and fast preemptable RCU.
-"
+}
 }
 
-@InProceedings{JoshTriplett2009RPHash
+@unpublished{JoshTriplett2009RPHash
 ,Author="Josh Triplett"
 ,Title="Scalable concurrent hash tables via relativistic programming"
 ,month="September"
 ,year="2009"
-,booktitle="Linux Plumbers Conference 2009"
-,annotation="
+,note="Linux Plumbers Conference presentation"
+,annotation={
 	RP fun with hash tables.
-	See also JoshTriplett2010RPHash
-"
+	Superseded by JoshTriplett2010RPHash
+}
 }
 
 @phdthesis{MathieuDesnoyersPhD
@@ -2154,9 +2212,9 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://wiki.cs.pdx.edu/rp/}
 [Viewed December 9, 2009]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Main Relativistic Programming Wiki.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @conference{PaulEMcKenney2009DeterministicRCU
@@ -2180,9 +2238,9 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://paulmck.livejournal.com/14639.html}
 [Viewed June 4, 2010]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Day-one bug in Tree RCU that took forever to track down.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{MathieuDesnoyers2009defer:rcu
@@ -2193,10 +2251,10 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2009/10/18/129}
 [Viewed December 29, 2009]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Mathieu proposed defer_rcu() with fixed-size per-thread pool
 	of RCU callbacks.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{MathieuDesnoyers2009VerifPrePub
@@ -2205,10 +2263,10 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,month="December"
 ,year="2009"
 ,note="Submitted to IEEE TPDS"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	OOMem model for Mathieu's user-level RCU mechanical proof of
 	correctness.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{MathieuDesnoyers2009URCUPrePub
@@ -2216,15 +2274,15 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,Title="User-Level Implementations of Read-Copy Update"
 ,month="December"
 ,year="2010"
-,url=\url{http://www.computer.org/csdl/trans/td/2012/02/ttd2012020375-abs.html}
-,annotation="
+,url={\url{http://www.computer.org/csdl/trans/td/2012/02/ttd2012020375-abs.html}}
+,annotation={
 	RCU overview, desiderata, semi-formal semantics, user-level RCU
 	usage scenarios, three classes of RCU implementation, wait-free
 	RCU updates, RCU grace-period batching, update overhead,
 	http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/urcu-main-accepted.2011.08.30a.pdf
 	http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/urcu-supp-accepted.2011.08.30a.pdf
 	Superseded by MathieuDesnoyers2012URCU.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @inproceedings{HariKannan2009DynamicAnalysisRCU
@@ -2240,7 +2298,8 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,address = {New York, NY, USA}
 ,annotation={
 	Uses RCU to protect metadata used in dynamic analysis.
-}}
+}
+}
 
 @conference{PaulEMcKenney2010SimpleOptRCU
 ,Author="Paul E. McKenney"
@@ -2252,10 +2311,10 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/SimplicityThruOptimization.2010.01.21f.pdf}
 [Viewed October 10, 2010]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	TREE_PREEMPT_RCU optimizations greatly simplified the old
 	PREEMPT_RCU implementation.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2010LockdepRCU
@@ -2264,12 +2323,11 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,month="February"
 ,year="2010"
 ,day="1"
-,note="Available:
-\url{https://lwn.net/Articles/371986/}
-[Viewed June 4, 2010]"
-,annotation="
+,note="\url{https://lwn.net/Articles/371986/}"
+,annotation={
 	CONFIG_PROVE_RCU, or at least an early version.
-"
+	[Viewed June 4, 2010]
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{AviKivity2010KVM2RCU
@@ -2280,10 +2338,10 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://www.mail-archive.com/kvm@vger.kernel.org/msg28640.html}
 [Viewed March 20, 2010]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Use of RCU permits KVM to increase the size of guest OSes from
 	16 CPUs to 64 CPUs.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{HerbertXu2010RCUResizeHash
@@ -2297,7 +2355,19 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,annotation={
 	Use a pair of list_head structures to support RCU-protected
 	resizable hash tables.
-}}
+}
+}
+
+@mastersthesis{AbhinavDuggal2010Masters
+,author="Abhinav Duggal"
+,title="Stopping Data Races Using Redflag"
+,school="Stony Brook University"
+,year="2010"
+,annotation={
+	Data-race detector incorporating RCU.
+	http://www.filesystems.org/docs/abhinav-thesis/abhinav_thesis.pdf
+}
+}
 
 @article{JoshTriplett2010RPHash
 ,author="Josh Triplett and Paul E. McKenney and Jonathan Walpole"
@@ -2310,7 +2380,8 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,annotation={
 	RP fun with hash tables.
 	http://portal.acm.org/citation.cfm?id=1842733.1842750
-}}
+}
+}
 
 @unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2010RCUAPI
 ,Author="Paul E. McKenney"
@@ -2318,12 +2389,11 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,month="December"
 ,day="8"
 ,year="2010"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/418853/}
-[Viewed December 8, 2010]"
-,annotation="
+,note="\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/418853/}"
+,annotation={
 	Includes updated software-engineering features.
-"
+	[Viewed December 8, 2010]
+}
 }
 
 @mastersthesis{AndrejPodzimek2010masters
@@ -2338,7 +2408,8 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 	Reviews RCU implementations and creates a few for OpenSolaris.
 	Drives quiescent-state detection from RCU read-side primitives,
 	in a manner roughly similar to that of Jim Houston.
-}}
+}
+}
 
 @unpublished{LinusTorvalds2011Linux2:6:38:rc1:NPigginVFS
 ,Author="Linus Torvalds"
@@ -2358,7 +2429,8 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 	of the most expensive parts of path component lookup, which was the
 	d_lock on every component lookup. So I'm seeing improvements of 30-50%
 	on some seriously pathname-lookup intensive loads."
-}}
+}
+}
 
 @techreport{JoshTriplett2011RPScalableCorrectOrdering
 ,author = {Josh Triplett and Philip W. Howard and Paul E. McKenney and Jonathan Walpole}
@@ -2392,12 +2464,12 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,number="US Patent 7,953,778"
 ,month="May"
 ,pages="34"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	Maintains an array of generation numbers to track in-flight
 	updates and keeps an additional level of indirection to allow
 	readers to confine themselves to the desired snapshot of the
 	data structure.
-"
+}
 }
 
 @inproceedings{Triplett:2011:RPHash
@@ -2408,7 +2480,7 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,year = {2011}
 ,pages = {145--158}
 ,numpages = {14}
-,url={http://www.usenix.org/event/atc11/tech/final_files/atc11_proceedings.pdf}
+,url={http://www.usenix.org/event/atc11/tech/final_files/Triplett.pdf}
 ,publisher = {The USENIX Association}
 ,address = {Portland, OR USA}
 }
@@ -2419,27 +2491,58 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 ,month="July"
 ,day="27"
 ,year="2011"
-,note="Available:
-\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/453002/}
-[Viewed July 27, 2011]"
-,annotation="
+,note="\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/453002/}"
+,annotation={
 	Analysis of the RCU trainwreck in Linux kernel 3.0.
-"
+	[Viewed July 27, 2011]
+}
 }
 
 @unpublished{NeilBrown2011MeetTheLockers
 ,Author="Neil Brown"
-,Title="Meet the Lockers"
+,Title="Meet the {Lockers}"
 ,month="August"
 ,day="3"
 ,year="2011"
 ,note="Available:
 \url{http://lwn.net/Articles/453685/}
 [Viewed September 2, 2011]"
-,annotation="
+,annotation={
 	The Locker family as an analogy for locking, reference counting,
 	RCU, and seqlock.
-"
+}
+}
+
+@inproceedings{Seyster:2011:RFA:2075416.2075425
+,author = {Seyster, Justin and Radhakrishnan, Prabakar and Katoch, Samriti and Duggal, Abhinav and Stoller, Scott D. and Zadok, Erez}
+,title = {Redflag: a framework for analysis of Kernel-level concurrency}
+,booktitle = {Proceedings of the 11th international conference on Algorithms and architectures for parallel processing - Volume Part I}
+,series = {ICA3PP'11}
+,year = {2011}
+,isbn = {978-3-642-24649-4}
+,location = {Melbourne, Australia}
+,pages = {66--79}
+,numpages = {14}
+,url = {http://dl.acm.org/citation.cfm?id=2075416.2075425}
+,acmid = {2075425}
+,publisher = {Springer-Verlag}
+,address = {Berlin, Heidelberg}
+}
+
+@phdthesis{JoshTriplettPhD
+,author="Josh Triplett"
+,title="Relativistic Causal Ordering: A Memory Model for Scalable Concurrent Data Structures"
+,school="Portland State University"
+,year="2012"
+,annotation={
+	RCU-protected hash tables, barriers vs. read-side traversal order.
+	.
+	If the updater is making changes in the opposite direction from
+	the read-side traveral order, the updater need only execute a
+	memory-barrier instruction, but if in the same direction, the
+	updater needs to wait for a grace period between the individual
+	updates.
+}
 }
 
 @article{MathieuDesnoyers2012URCU
@@ -2459,5 +2562,150 @@ lot of {Linux} into your technology!!!"
 	RCU updates, RCU grace-period batching, update overhead,
 	http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/urcu-main-accepted.2011.08.30a.pdf
 	http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/urcu-supp-accepted.2011.08.30a.pdf
+	http://www.computer.org/cms/Computer.org/dl/trans/td/2012/02/extras/ttd2012020375s.pdf
+}
+}
+
+@inproceedings{AustinClements2012RCULinux:mmapsem
+,author = {Austin Clements and Frans Kaashoek and Nickolai Zeldovich}
+,title = {Scalable Address Spaces Using {RCU} Balanced Trees}
+,booktitle = {Architectural Support for Programming Languages and Operating Systems (ASPLOS 2012)}
+,month = {March}
+,year = {2012}
+,pages = {199--210}
+,numpages = {12}
+,publisher = {ACM}
+,address = {London, UK}
+,url="http://people.csail.mit.edu/nickolai/papers/clements-bonsai.pdf"
+}
+
+@unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2012ELCbattery
+,Author="Paul E. McKenney"
+,Title="Making {RCU} Safe For Battery-Powered Devices"
+,month="February"
+,day="15"
+,year="2012"
+,note="Available:
+\url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/RCUdynticks.2012.02.15b.pdf}
+[Viewed March 1, 2012]"
+,annotation={
+	RCU_FAST_NO_HZ, round 2.
+}
+}
+
+@article{GuillermoVigueras2012RCUCrowd
+,author = {Vigueras, Guillermo and Ordu\~{n}a, Juan M. and Lozano, Miguel}
+,day = {25}
+,doi = {10.1007/s11227-012-0766-x}
+,issn = {0920-8542}
+,journal = {The Journal of Supercomputing}
+,keywords = {linux, simulation}
+,month = apr
+,posted-at = {2012-05-03 09:12:04}
+,priority = {2}
+,title = {{A Read-Copy Update based parallel server for distributed crowd simulations}}
+,url = {http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s11227-012-0766-x}
+,year = {2012}
+}
+
+
+@unpublished{JonCorbet2012ACCESS:ONCE
+,Author="Jon Corbet"
+,Title="{ACCESS\_ONCE()}"
+,month="August"
+,day="1"
+,year="2012"
+,note="\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/508991/}"
+,annotation={
+	A couple of simple specific compiler optimizations that motivate
+	ACCESS_ONCE().
+}
+}
+
+@unpublished{AlexeyGotsman2012VerifyGraceExtended
+,Author="Alexey Gotsman and Noam Rinetzky and Hongseok Yang"
+,Title="Verifying Highly Concurrent Algorithms with Grace (extended version)"
+,month="July"
+,day="10"
+,year="2012"
+,note="\url{http://software.imdea.org/~gotsman/papers/recycling-esop13-ext.pdf}"
+,annotation={
+	Separation-logic formulation of RCU uses.
+}
+}
+
+@unpublished{PaulMcKenney2012RCUUsage
+,Author="Paul E. McKenney and Silas Boyd-Wickizer and Jonathan Walpole"
+,Title="{RCU} Usage In the Linux Kernel: One Decade Later"
+,month="September"
+,day="17"
+,year="2012"
+,url=http://rdrop.com/users/paulmck/techreports/survey.2012.09.17a.pdf
+,note="Technical report paulmck.2012.09.17"
+,annotation={
+	Overview of the first variant of no-CBs CPUs for RCU.
+}
+}
+
+@unpublished{JonCorbet2012NOCB
+,Author="Jon Corbet"
+,Title="Relocating RCU callbacks"
+,month="October"
+,day="31"
+,year="2012"
+,note="\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/522262/}"
+,annotation={
+	Overview of the first variant of no-CBs CPUs for RCU.
+}
+}
+
+@phdthesis{JustinSeyster2012PhD
+,author="Justin Seyster"
+,title="Runtime Verification of Kernel-Level Concurrency Using Compiler-Based Instrumentation"
+,school="Stony Brook University"
+,year="2012"
+,annotation={
+	Looking for data races, including those involving RCU.
+	Proposal:
+	http://www.fsl.cs.sunysb.edu/docs/jseyster-proposal/redflag.pdf
+	Dissertation:
+	http://www.fsl.cs.sunysb.edu/docs/jseyster-dissertation/redflag.pdf
+}
+}
+
+@unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2013RCUUsage
+,Author="Paul E. McKenney and Silas Boyd-Wickizer and Jonathan Walpole"
+,Title="{RCU} Usage in the {Linux} Kernel: One Decade Later"
+,month="February"
+,day="24"
+,year="2013"
+,note="\url{http://rdrop.com/users/paulmck/techreports/RCUUsage.2013.02.24a.pdf}"
+,annotation={
+	Usage of RCU within the Linux kernel.
+}
+}
+
+@inproceedings{AlexeyGotsman2013ESOPRCU
+,author = {Alexey Gotsman and Noam Rinetzky and Hongseok Yang}
+,title = {Verifying concurrent memory reclamation algorithms with grace}
+,booktitle = {ESOP'13: European Symposium on Programming}
+,year = {2013}
+,pages = {249--269}
+,publisher = {Springer}
+,address = {Rome, Italy}
+,annotation={
+	http://software.imdea.org/~gotsman/papers/recycling-esop13.pdf
+}
+}
+
+@unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2013NoTinyPreempt
+,Author="Paul E. McKenney"
+,Title="Simplifying RCU"
+,month="March"
+,day="6"
+,year="2013"
+,note="\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/541037/}"
+,annotation={
+	Getting rid of TINY_PREEMPT_RCU.
 }
 }
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt
index 5c8d74968090..7703ec73a9bb 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt
@@ -162,9 +162,9 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 		when publicizing a pointer to a structure that can
 		be traversed by an RCU read-side critical section.
 
-5.	If call_rcu(), or a related primitive such as call_rcu_bh() or
-	call_rcu_sched(), is used, the callback function must be
-	written to be called from softirq context.  In particular,
+5.	If call_rcu(), or a related primitive such as call_rcu_bh(),
+	call_rcu_sched(), or call_srcu() is used, the callback function
+	must be written to be called from softirq context.  In particular,
 	it cannot block.
 
 6.	Since synchronize_rcu() can block, it cannot be called from
@@ -202,11 +202,12 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	updater uses call_rcu_sched() or synchronize_sched(), then
 	the corresponding readers must disable preemption, possibly
 	by calling rcu_read_lock_sched() and rcu_read_unlock_sched().
-	If the updater uses synchronize_srcu(), the the corresponding
-	readers must use srcu_read_lock() and srcu_read_unlock(),
-	and with the same srcu_struct.	The rules for the expedited
-	primitives are the same as for their non-expedited counterparts.
-	Mixing things up will result in confusion and broken kernels.
+	If the updater uses synchronize_srcu() or call_srcu(),
+	the the corresponding readers must use srcu_read_lock() and
+	srcu_read_unlock(), and with the same srcu_struct.  The rules for
+	the expedited primitives are the same as for their non-expedited
+	counterparts.  Mixing things up will result in confusion and
+	broken kernels.
 
 	One exception to this rule: rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock()
 	may be substituted for rcu_read_lock_bh() and rcu_read_unlock_bh()
@@ -216,9 +217,14 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	whether the increased speed is worth it.
 
 8.	Although synchronize_rcu() is slower than is call_rcu(), it
-	usually results in simpler code.  So, unless update performance
-	is critically important or the updaters cannot block,
-	synchronize_rcu() should be used in preference to call_rcu().
+	usually results in simpler code.  So, unless update performance is
+	critically important, the updaters cannot block, or the latency of
+	synchronize_rcu() is visible from userspace, synchronize_rcu()
+	should be used in preference to call_rcu().  Furthermore,
+	kfree_rcu() usually results in even simpler code than does
+	synchronize_rcu() without synchronize_rcu()'s multi-millisecond
+	latency.  So please take advantage of kfree_rcu()'s "fire and
+	forget" memory-freeing capabilities where it applies.
 
 	An especially important property of the synchronize_rcu()
 	primitive is that it automatically self-limits: if grace periods
@@ -267,18 +273,18 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	e.	Periodically invoke synchronize_rcu(), permitting a limited
 		number of updates per grace period.
 
-	The same cautions apply to call_rcu_bh() and call_rcu_sched().
+	The same cautions apply to call_rcu_bh(), call_rcu_sched(),
+	call_srcu(), and kfree_rcu().
 
 9.	All RCU list-traversal primitives, which include
-	rcu_dereference(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(),
-	list_for_each_continue_rcu(), and list_for_each_safe_rcu(),
-	must be either within an RCU read-side critical section or
-	must be protected by appropriate update-side locks.  RCU
-	read-side critical sections are delimited by rcu_read_lock()
-	and rcu_read_unlock(), or by similar primitives such as
-	rcu_read_lock_bh() and rcu_read_unlock_bh(), in which case
-	the matching rcu_dereference() primitive must be used in order
-	to keep lockdep happy, in this case, rcu_dereference_bh().
+	rcu_dereference(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(), and
+	list_for_each_safe_rcu(), must be either within an RCU read-side
+	critical section or must be protected by appropriate update-side
+	locks.	RCU read-side critical sections are delimited by
+	rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock(), or by similar primitives
+	such as rcu_read_lock_bh() and rcu_read_unlock_bh(), in which
+	case the matching rcu_dereference() primitive must be used in
+	order to keep lockdep happy, in this case, rcu_dereference_bh().
 
 	The reason that it is permissible to use RCU list-traversal
 	primitives when the update-side lock is held is that doing so
@@ -296,9 +302,9 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	all currently executing rcu_read_lock()-protected RCU read-side
 	critical sections complete.  It does -not- necessarily guarantee
 	that all currently running interrupts, NMIs, preempt_disable()
-	code, or idle loops will complete.  Therefore, if you do not have
-	rcu_read_lock()-protected read-side critical sections, do -not-
-	use synchronize_rcu().
+	code, or idle loops will complete.  Therefore, if your
+	read-side critical sections are protected by something other
+	than rcu_read_lock(), do -not- use synchronize_rcu().
 
 	Similarly, disabling preemption is not an acceptable substitute
 	for rcu_read_lock().  Code that attempts to use preemption
@@ -309,6 +315,12 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	code under the influence of preempt_disable(), you instead
 	need to use synchronize_irq() or synchronize_sched().
 
+	This same limitation also applies to synchronize_rcu_bh()
+	and synchronize_srcu(), as well as to the asynchronous and
+	expedited forms of the three primitives, namely call_rcu(),
+	call_rcu_bh(), call_srcu(), synchronize_rcu_expedited(),
+	synchronize_rcu_bh_expedited(), and synchronize_srcu_expedited().
+
 12.	Any lock acquired by an RCU callback must be acquired elsewhere
 	with softirq disabled, e.g., via spin_lock_irqsave(),
 	spin_lock_bh(), etc.  Failing to disable irq on a given
@@ -333,28 +345,22 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	victim CPU from ever going offline.)
 
 14.	SRCU (srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock(), srcu_dereference(),
-	synchronize_srcu(), and synchronize_srcu_expedited()) may only
-	be invoked from process context.  Unlike other forms of RCU, it
-	-is- permissible to block in an SRCU read-side critical section
-	(demarked by srcu_read_lock() and srcu_read_unlock()), hence the
-	"SRCU": "sleepable RCU".  Please note that if you don't need
-	to sleep in read-side critical sections, you should be using
-	RCU rather than SRCU, because RCU is almost always faster and
-	easier to use than is SRCU.
-
-	If you need to enter your read-side critical section in a
-	hardirq or exception handler, and then exit that same read-side
-	critical section in the task that was interrupted, then you need
-	to srcu_read_lock_raw() and srcu_read_unlock_raw(), which avoid
-	the lockdep checking that would otherwise this practice illegal.
+	synchronize_srcu(), synchronize_srcu_expedited(), and call_srcu())
+	may only be invoked from process context.  Unlike other forms of
+	RCU, it -is- permissible to block in an SRCU read-side critical
+	section (demarked by srcu_read_lock() and srcu_read_unlock()),
+	hence the "SRCU": "sleepable RCU".  Please note that if you
+	don't need to sleep in read-side critical sections, you should be
+	using RCU rather than SRCU, because RCU is almost always faster
+	and easier to use than is SRCU.
 
 	Also unlike other forms of RCU, explicit initialization
 	and cleanup is required via init_srcu_struct() and
 	cleanup_srcu_struct().	These are passed a "struct srcu_struct"
 	that defines the scope of a given SRCU domain.	Once initialized,
 	the srcu_struct is passed to srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock()
-	synchronize_srcu(), and synchronize_srcu_expedited().  A given
-	synchronize_srcu() waits only for SRCU read-side critical
+	synchronize_srcu(), synchronize_srcu_expedited(), and call_srcu().
+	A given synchronize_srcu() waits only for SRCU read-side critical
 	sections governed by srcu_read_lock() and srcu_read_unlock()
 	calls that have been passed the same srcu_struct.  This property
 	is what makes sleeping read-side critical sections tolerable --
@@ -374,7 +380,7 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	requiring SRCU's read-side deadlock immunity or low read-side
 	realtime latency.
 
-	Note that, rcu_assign_pointer() relates to SRCU just as they do
+	Note that, rcu_assign_pointer() relates to SRCU just as it does
 	to other forms of RCU.
 
 15.	The whole point of call_rcu(), synchronize_rcu(), and friends
@@ -395,9 +401,9 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	read-side critical sections.  It is the responsibility of the
 	RCU update-side primitives to deal with this.
 
-17.	Use CONFIG_PROVE_RCU, CONFIG_DEBUG_OBJECTS_RCU_HEAD, and
-	the __rcu sparse checks to validate your RCU code.  These
-	can help find problems as follows:
+17.	Use CONFIG_PROVE_RCU, CONFIG_DEBUG_OBJECTS_RCU_HEAD, and the
+	__rcu sparse checks (enabled by CONFIG_SPARSE_RCU_POINTER) to
+	validate your RCU code.  These can help find problems as follows:
 
 	CONFIG_PROVE_RCU: check that accesses to RCU-protected data
 		structures are carried out under the proper RCU
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/listRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/listRCU.txt
index 4349c1487e91..adb5a3782846 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/listRCU.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/listRCU.txt
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ RCU ("read-copy update") its name.  The RCU code is as follows:
 				audit_copy_rule(&ne->rule, &e->rule);
 				ne->rule.action = newaction;
 				ne->rule.file_count = newfield_count;
-				list_replace_rcu(e, ne);
+				list_replace_rcu(&e->list, &ne->list);
 				call_rcu(&e->rcu, audit_free_rule);
 				return 0;
 			}
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt
index a102d4b3724b..cd83d2348fef 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt
@@ -64,6 +64,11 @@ checking of rcu_dereference() primitives:
 		but retain the compiler constraints that prevent duplicating
 		or coalescsing.  This is useful when when testing the
 		value of the pointer itself, for example, against NULL.
+	rcu_access_index(idx):
+		Return the value of the index and omit all barriers, but
+		retain the compiler constraints that prevent duplicating
+		or coalescsing.  This is useful when when testing the
+		value of the index itself, for example, against -1.
 
 The rcu_dereference_check() check expression can be any boolean
 expression, but would normally include a lockdep expression.  However,
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt
index e439a0edee22..b10cfe711e68 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt
@@ -70,18 +70,33 @@ in realtime kernels in order to avoid excessive scheduling latencies.
 
 rcu_barrier()
 
-We instead need the rcu_barrier() primitive. This primitive is similar
-to synchronize_rcu(), but instead of waiting solely for a grace
-period to elapse, it also waits for all outstanding RCU callbacks to
-complete. Pseudo-code using rcu_barrier() is as follows:
+We instead need the rcu_barrier() primitive.  Rather than waiting for
+a grace period to elapse, rcu_barrier() waits for all outstanding RCU
+callbacks to complete.  Please note that rcu_barrier() does -not- imply
+synchronize_rcu(), in particular, if there are no RCU callbacks queued
+anywhere, rcu_barrier() is within its rights to return immediately,
+without waiting for a grace period to elapse.
+
+Pseudo-code using rcu_barrier() is as follows:
 
    1. Prevent any new RCU callbacks from being posted.
    2. Execute rcu_barrier().
    3. Allow the module to be unloaded.
 
-Quick Quiz #1: Why is there no srcu_barrier()?
+There are also rcu_barrier_bh(), rcu_barrier_sched(), and srcu_barrier()
+functions for the other flavors of RCU, and you of course must match
+the flavor of rcu_barrier() with that of call_rcu().  If your module
+uses multiple flavors of call_rcu(), then it must also use multiple
+flavors of rcu_barrier() when unloading that module.  For example, if
+it uses call_rcu_bh(), call_srcu() on srcu_struct_1, and call_srcu() on
+srcu_struct_2(), then the following three lines of code will be required
+when unloading:
+
+ 1 rcu_barrier_bh();
+ 2 srcu_barrier(&srcu_struct_1);
+ 3 srcu_barrier(&srcu_struct_2);
 
-The rcutorture module makes use of rcu_barrier in its exit function
+The rcutorture module makes use of rcu_barrier() in its exit function
 as follows:
 
  1 static void
@@ -162,7 +177,7 @@ for any pre-existing callbacks to complete.
 Then lines 55-62 print status and do operation-specific cleanup, and
 then return, permitting the module-unload operation to be completed.
 
-Quick Quiz #2: Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might
+Quick Quiz #1: Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might
 	be required?
 
 Your module might have additional complications. For example, if your
@@ -242,7 +257,7 @@ reaches zero, as follows:
  4 complete(&rcu_barrier_completion);
  5 }
 
-Quick Quiz #3: What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes
+Quick Quiz #2: What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes
 	immediately (thus incrementing rcu_barrier_cpu_count to the
 	value one), but the other CPU's rcu_barrier_func() invocations
 	are delayed for a full grace period? Couldn't this result in
@@ -259,12 +274,7 @@ so that your module may be safely unloaded.
 
 Answers to Quick Quizzes
 
-Quick Quiz #1: Why is there no srcu_barrier()?
-
-Answer: Since there is no call_srcu(), there can be no outstanding SRCU
-	callbacks. Therefore, there is no need to wait for them.
-
-Quick Quiz #2: Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might
+Quick Quiz #1: Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might
 	be required?
 
 Answer: Interestingly enough, rcu_barrier() was not originally
@@ -278,7 +288,7 @@ Answer: Interestingly enough, rcu_barrier() was not originally
 	implementing rcutorture, and found that rcu_barrier() solves
 	this problem as well.
 
-Quick Quiz #3: What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes
+Quick Quiz #2: What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes
 	immediately (thus incrementing rcu_barrier_cpu_count to the
 	value one), but the other CPU's rcu_barrier_func() invocations
 	are delayed for a full grace period? Couldn't this result in
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt
index 4202ad093130..141d531aa14b 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ release_referenced()			delete()
 {					{
     ...					    write_lock(&list_lock);
     atomic_dec(&el->rc, relfunc)	    ...
-    ...					    delete_element
+    ...					    remove_element
 }					    write_unlock(&list_lock);
  					    ...
 					    if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc))
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ release_referenced()			delete()
 {					{
     ...					    spin_lock(&list_lock);
     if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc))       ...
-        call_rcu(&el->head, el_free);       delete_element
+        call_rcu(&el->head, el_free);       remove_element
     ...                                     spin_unlock(&list_lock);
 } 					    ...
 					    if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc))
@@ -64,3 +64,60 @@ Sometimes, a reference to the element needs to be obtained in the
 update (write) stream.  In such cases, atomic_inc_not_zero() might be
 overkill, since we hold the update-side spinlock.  One might instead
 use atomic_inc() in such cases.
+
+It is not always convenient to deal with "FAIL" in the
+search_and_reference() code path.  In such cases, the
+atomic_dec_and_test() may be moved from delete() to el_free()
+as follows:
+
+1.					2.
+add()					search_and_reference()
+{					{
+    alloc_object			    rcu_read_lock();
+    ...					    search_for_element
+    atomic_set(&el->rc, 1);		    atomic_inc(&el->rc);
+    spin_lock(&list_lock);		    ...
+
+    add_element				    rcu_read_unlock();
+    ...					}
+    spin_unlock(&list_lock);		4.
+}					delete()
+3.					{
+release_referenced()			    spin_lock(&list_lock);
+{					    ...
+    ...					    remove_element
+    if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc))       spin_unlock(&list_lock);
+        kfree(el);			    ...
+    ...                                     call_rcu(&el->head, el_free);
+} 					    ...
+5.					}
+void el_free(struct rcu_head *rhp)
+{
+    release_referenced();
+}
+
+The key point is that the initial reference added by add() is not removed
+until after a grace period has elapsed following removal.  This means that
+search_and_reference() cannot find this element, which means that the value
+of el->rc cannot increase.  Thus, once it reaches zero, there are no
+readers that can or ever will be able to reference the element.  The
+element can therefore safely be freed.  This in turn guarantees that if
+any reader finds the element, that reader may safely acquire a reference
+without checking the value of the reference counter.
+
+In cases where delete() can sleep, synchronize_rcu() can be called from
+delete(), so that el_free() can be subsumed into delete as follows:
+
+4.
+delete()
+{
+    spin_lock(&list_lock);
+    ...
+    remove_element
+    spin_unlock(&list_lock);
+    ...
+    synchronize_rcu();
+    if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc))
+    	kfree(el);
+    ...
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt
index 523364e4e1f1..8e9359de1d28 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt
@@ -92,14 +92,14 @@ If the CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_INFO kernel configuration parameter is set,
 more information is printed with the stall-warning message, for example:
 
 	INFO: rcu_preempt detected stall on CPU
-	0: (63959 ticks this GP) idle=241/3fffffffffffffff/0
+	0: (63959 ticks this GP) idle=241/3fffffffffffffff/0 softirq=82/543
 	   (t=65000 jiffies)
 
 In kernels with CONFIG_RCU_FAST_NO_HZ, even more information is
 printed:
 
 	INFO: rcu_preempt detected stall on CPU
-	0: (64628 ticks this GP) idle=dd5/3fffffffffffffff/0 drain=0 . timer=-1
+	0: (64628 ticks this GP) idle=dd5/3fffffffffffffff/0 softirq=82/543 last_accelerate: a345/d342 nonlazy_posted: 25 .D
 	   (t=65000 jiffies)
 
 The "(64628 ticks this GP)" indicates that this CPU has taken more
@@ -116,13 +116,28 @@ number between the two "/"s is the value of the nesting, which will
 be a small positive number if in the idle loop and a very large positive
 number (as shown above) otherwise.
 
-For CONFIG_RCU_FAST_NO_HZ kernels, the "drain=0" indicates that the
-CPU is not in the process of trying to force itself into dyntick-idle
-state, the "." indicates that the CPU has not given up forcing RCU
-into dyntick-idle mode (it would be "H" otherwise), and the "timer=-1"
-indicates that the CPU has not recented forced RCU into dyntick-idle
-mode (it would otherwise indicate the number of microseconds remaining
-in this forced state).
+The "softirq=" portion of the message tracks the number of RCU softirq
+handlers that the stalled CPU has executed.  The number before the "/"
+is the number that had executed since boot at the time that this CPU
+last noted the beginning of a grace period, which might be the current
+(stalled) grace period, or it might be some earlier grace period (for
+example, if the CPU might have been in dyntick-idle mode for an extended
+time period.  The number after the "/" is the number that have executed
+since boot until the current time.  If this latter number stays constant
+across repeated stall-warning messages, it is possible that RCU's softirq
+handlers are no longer able to execute on this CPU.  This can happen if
+the stalled CPU is spinning with interrupts are disabled, or, in -rt
+kernels, if a high-priority process is starving RCU's softirq handler.
+
+For CONFIG_RCU_FAST_NO_HZ kernels, the "last_accelerate:" prints the
+low-order 16 bits (in hex) of the jiffies counter when this CPU last
+invoked rcu_try_advance_all_cbs() from rcu_needs_cpu() or last invoked
+rcu_accelerate_cbs() from rcu_prepare_for_idle().  The "nonlazy_posted:"
+prints the number of non-lazy callbacks posted since the last call to
+rcu_needs_cpu().  Finally, an "L" indicates that there are currently
+no non-lazy callbacks ("." is printed otherwise, as shown above) and
+"D" indicates that dyntick-idle processing is enabled ("." is printed
+otherwise, for example, if disabled via the "nohz=" kernel boot parameter).
 
 
 Multiple Warnings From One Stall
@@ -176,7 +191,7 @@ o	A CPU-bound real-time task in a CONFIG_PREEMPT_RT kernel that
 o	A hardware or software issue shuts off the scheduler-clock
 	interrupt on a CPU that is not in dyntick-idle mode.  This
 	problem really has happened, and seems to be most likely to
-	result in RCU CPU stall warnings for CONFIG_NO_HZ=n kernels.
+	result in RCU CPU stall warnings for CONFIG_NO_HZ_COMMON=n kernels.
 
 o	A bug in the RCU implementation.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt
index 375d3fb71437..dac02a6219b1 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt
@@ -42,11 +42,31 @@ fqs_holdoff	Holdoff time (in microseconds) between consecutive calls
 fqs_stutter	Wait time (in seconds) between consecutive bursts
 		of calls to force_quiescent_state().
 
+gp_normal	Make the fake writers use normal synchronous grace-period
+		primitives.
+
+gp_exp		Make the fake writers use expedited synchronous grace-period
+		primitives.  If both gp_normal and gp_exp are set, or
+		if neither gp_normal nor gp_exp are set, then randomly
+		choose the primitive so that about 50% are normal and
+		50% expedited.  By default, neither are set, which
+		gives best overall test coverage.
+
 irqreader	Says to invoke RCU readers from irq level.  This is currently
 		done via timers.  Defaults to "1" for variants of RCU that
 		permit this.  (Or, more accurately, variants of RCU that do
 		-not- permit this know to ignore this variable.)
 
+n_barrier_cbs	If this is nonzero, RCU barrier testing will be conducted,
+		in which case n_barrier_cbs specifies the number of
+		RCU callbacks (and corresponding kthreads) to use for
+		this testing.  The value cannot be negative.  If you
+		specify this to be non-zero when torture_type indicates a
+		synchronous RCU implementation (one for which a member of
+		the synchronize_rcu() rather than the call_rcu() family is
+		used -- see the documentation for torture_type below), an
+		error will be reported and no testing will be carried out.
+
 nfakewriters	This is the number of RCU fake writer threads to run.  Fake
 		writer threads repeatedly use the synchronous "wait for
 		current readers" function of the interface selected by
@@ -164,6 +184,9 @@ torture_type	The type of RCU to test, with string values as follows:
 			and synchronize_rcu_bh_expedited().
 
 		"srcu": srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock() and
+			call_srcu().
+
+		"srcu_sync": srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock() and
 			synchronize_srcu().
 
 		"srcu_expedited": srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock() and
@@ -188,7 +211,7 @@ OUTPUT
 The statistics output is as follows:
 
 	rcu-torture:--- Start of test: nreaders=16 nfakewriters=4 stat_interval=30 verbose=0 test_no_idle_hz=1 shuffle_interval=3 stutter=5 irqreader=1 fqs_duration=0 fqs_holdoff=0 fqs_stutter=3 test_boost=1/0 test_boost_interval=7 test_boost_duration=4
-	rcu-torture: rtc:           (null) ver: 155441 tfle: 0 rta: 155441 rtaf: 8884 rtf: 155440 rtmbe: 0 rtbke: 0 rtbre: 0 rtbf: 0 rtb: 0 nt: 3055767
+	rcu-torture: rtc:           (null) ver: 155441 tfle: 0 rta: 155441 rtaf: 8884 rtf: 155440 rtmbe: 0 rtbe: 0 rtbke: 0 rtbre: 0 rtbf: 0 rtb: 0 nt: 3055767
 	rcu-torture: Reader Pipe:  727860534 34213 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
 	rcu-torture: Reader Batch:  727877838 17003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
 	rcu-torture: Free-Block Circulation:  155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 0
@@ -230,6 +253,9 @@ o	"rtmbe": A non-zero value indicates that rcutorture believes that
 	rcu_assign_pointer() and rcu_dereference() are not working
 	correctly.  This value should be zero.
 
+o	"rtbe": A non-zero value indicates that one of the rcu_barrier()
+	family of functions is not working correctly.
+
 o	"rtbke": rcutorture was unable to create the real-time kthreads
 	used to force RCU priority inversion.  This value should be zero.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt
index f6f15ce39903..f3778f8952da 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt
@@ -10,51 +10,63 @@ for rcutree and next for rcutiny.
 
 CONFIG_TREE_RCU and CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats
 
-These implementations of RCU provides several debugfs files under the
+These implementations of RCU provide several debugfs directories under the
 top-level directory "rcu":
 
-rcu/rcudata:
+rcu/rcu_bh
+rcu/rcu_preempt
+rcu/rcu_sched
+
+Each directory contains files for the corresponding flavor of RCU.
+Note that rcu/rcu_preempt is only present for CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU.
+For CONFIG_TREE_RCU, the RCU flavor maps onto the RCU-sched flavor,
+so that activity for both appears in rcu/rcu_sched.
+
+In addition, the following file appears in the top-level directory:
+rcu/rcutorture.  This file displays rcutorture test progress.  The output
+of "cat rcu/rcutorture" looks as follows:
+
+rcutorture test sequence: 0 (test in progress)
+rcutorture update version number: 615
+
+The first line shows the number of rcutorture tests that have completed
+since boot.  If a test is currently running, the "(test in progress)"
+string will appear as shown above.  The second line shows the number of
+update cycles that the current test has started, or zero if there is
+no test in progress.
+
+
+Within each flavor directory (rcu/rcu_bh, rcu/rcu_sched, and possibly
+also rcu/rcu_preempt) the following files will be present:
+
+rcudata:
 	Displays fields in struct rcu_data.
-rcu/rcudata.csv:
-	Comma-separated values spreadsheet version of rcudata.
-rcu/rcugp:
+rcuexp:
+	Displays statistics for expedited grace periods.
+rcugp:
 	Displays grace-period counters.
-rcu/rcuhier:
+rcuhier:
 	Displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy.
-rcu/rcu_pending:
+rcu_pending:
 	Displays counts of the reasons rcu_pending() decided that RCU had
 	work to do.
-rcu/rcutorture:
-	Displays rcutorture test progress.
-rcu/rcuboost:
+rcuboost:
 	Displays RCU boosting statistics.  Only present if
 	CONFIG_RCU_BOOST=y.
 
-The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" looks as follows:
-
-rcu_sched:
-  0 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=50 of=0 ql=163 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=153737 co=0 ca=0
-  1 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=58 of=0 ql=634 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=191037 co=0 ca=0
-  2 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=175 of=0 ql=74 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=75991 co=0 ca=0
-  3 c=20942 g=20943 pq=1 pgp=20942 qp=1 dt=1846/0/0 df=404 of=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=72261 co=0 ca=0
-  4 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=83 of=0 ql=48 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=128365 co=0 ca=0
-  5 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=64 of=0 ql=169 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=164360 co=0 ca=0
-  6 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=183 of=0 ql=62 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=65663 co=0 ca=0
-  7 c=20897 g=20897 pq=1 pgp=20896 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=382 of=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=75006 co=0 ca=0
-rcu_bh:
-  0 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=6 of=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0
-  1 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=3 of=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=151 co=0 ca=0
-  2 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=6 of=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0
-  3 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=1846/0/0 df=8 of=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0
-  4 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=6 of=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0
-  5 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=4 of=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0
-  6 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=6 of=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0
-  7 c=1474 g=1474 pq=1 pgp=1473 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=8 of=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0
-
-The first section lists the rcu_data structures for rcu_sched, the second
-for rcu_bh.  Note that CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernels will have an
-additional section for rcu_preempt.  Each section has one line per CPU,
-or eight for this 8-CPU system.  The fields are as follows:
+The output of "cat rcu/rcu_preempt/rcudata" looks as follows:
+
+  0!c=30455 g=30456 pq=1 qp=1 dt=126535/140000000000000/0 df=2002 of=4 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=74572 nci=0 co=1131 ca=716
+  1!c=30719 g=30720 pq=1 qp=0 dt=132007/140000000000000/0 df=1874 of=10 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=123209 nci=0 co=685 ca=982
+  2!c=30150 g=30151 pq=1 qp=1 dt=138537/140000000000000/0 df=1707 of=8 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=80132 nci=0 co=1328 ca=1458
+  3 c=31249 g=31250 pq=1 qp=0 dt=107255/140000000000000/0 df=1749 of=6 ql=0/450 qs=NRW. b=10 ci=151700 nci=0 co=509 ca=622
+  4!c=29502 g=29503 pq=1 qp=1 dt=83647/140000000000000/0 df=965 of=5 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=65643 nci=0 co=1373 ca=1521
+  5 c=31201 g=31202 pq=1 qp=1 dt=70422/0/0 df=535 of=7 ql=0/0 qs=.... b=10 ci=58500 nci=0 co=764 ca=698
+  6!c=30253 g=30254 pq=1 qp=1 dt=95363/140000000000000/0 df=780 of=5 ql=0/0 qs=N... b=10 ci=100607 nci=0 co=1414 ca=1353
+  7 c=31178 g=31178 pq=1 qp=0 dt=91536/0/0 df=547 of=4 ql=0/0 qs=.... b=10 ci=109819 nci=0 co=1115 ca=969
+
+This file has one line per CPU, or eight for this 8-CPU system.
+The fields are as follows:
 
 o	The number at the beginning of each line is the CPU number.
 	CPUs numbers followed by an exclamation mark are offline,
@@ -64,11 +76,13 @@ o	The number at the beginning of each line is the CPU number.
 	substantially larger than the number of actual CPUs.
 
 o	"c" is the count of grace periods that this CPU believes have
-	completed.  Offlined CPUs and CPUs in dynticks idle mode may
-	lag quite a ways behind, for example, CPU 6 under "rcu_sched"
-	above, which has been offline through not quite 40,000 RCU grace
-	periods.  It is not unusual to see CPUs lagging by thousands of
-	grace periods.
+	completed.  Offlined CPUs and CPUs in dynticks idle mode may lag
+	quite a ways behind, for example, CPU 4 under "rcu_sched" above,
+	which has been offline through 16 RCU grace periods.  It is not
+	unusual to see offline CPUs lagging by thousands of grace periods.
+	Note that although the grace-period number is an unsigned long,
+	it is printed out as a signed long to allow more human-friendly
+	representation near boot time.
 
 o	"g" is the count of grace periods that this CPU believes have
 	started.  Again, offlined CPUs and CPUs in dynticks idle mode
@@ -84,30 +98,25 @@ o	"pq" indicates that this CPU has passed through a quiescent state
 	CPU has not yet reported that fact, (2) some other CPU has not
 	yet reported for this grace period, or (3) both.
 
-o	"pgp" indicates which grace period the last-observed quiescent
-	state for this CPU corresponds to.  This is important for handling
-	the race between CPU 0 reporting an extended dynticks-idle
-	quiescent state for CPU 1 and CPU 1 suddenly waking up and
-	reporting its own quiescent state.  If CPU 1 was the last CPU
-	for the current grace period, then the CPU that loses this race
-	will attempt to incorrectly mark CPU 1 as having checked in for
-	the next grace period!
-
 o	"qp" indicates that RCU still expects a quiescent state from
 	this CPU.  Offlined CPUs and CPUs in dyntick idle mode might
 	well have qp=1, which is OK: RCU is still ignoring them.
 
 o	"dt" is the current value of the dyntick counter that is incremented
-	when entering or leaving dynticks idle state, either by the
-	scheduler or by irq.  This number is even if the CPU is in
-	dyntick idle mode and odd otherwise.  The number after the first
-	"/" is the interrupt nesting depth when in dyntick-idle state,
-	or one greater than the interrupt-nesting depth otherwise.
-	The number after the second "/" is the NMI nesting depth.
+	when entering or leaving idle, either due to a context switch or
+	due to an interrupt.  This number is even if the CPU is in idle
+	from RCU's viewpoint and odd otherwise.  The number after the
+	first "/" is the interrupt nesting depth when in idle state,
+	or a large number added to the interrupt-nesting depth when
+	running a non-idle task.  Some architectures do not accurately
+	count interrupt nesting when running in non-idle kernel context,
+	which can result in interesting anomalies such as negative
+	interrupt-nesting levels.  The number after the second "/"
+	is the NMI nesting depth.
 
 o	"df" is the number of times that some other CPU has forced a
 	quiescent state on behalf of this CPU due to this CPU being in
-	dynticks-idle state.
+	idle state.
 
 o	"of" is the number of times that some other CPU has forced a
 	quiescent state on behalf of this CPU due to this CPU being
@@ -120,9 +129,13 @@ o	"of" is the number of times that some other CPU has forced a
 	error, so it makes sense to err conservatively.
 
 o	"ql" is the number of RCU callbacks currently residing on
-	this CPU.  This is the total number of callbacks, regardless
-	of what state they are in (new, waiting for grace period to
-	start, waiting for grace period to end, ready to invoke).
+	this CPU.  The first number is the number of "lazy" callbacks
+	that are known to RCU to only be freeing memory, and the number
+	after the "/" is the total number of callbacks, lazy or not.
+	These counters count callbacks regardless of what phase of
+	grace-period processing that they are in (new, waiting for
+	grace period to start, waiting for grace period to end, ready
+	to invoke).
 
 o	"qs" gives an indication of the state of the callback queue
 	with four characters:
@@ -150,6 +163,43 @@ o	"qs" gives an indication of the state of the callback queue
 	If there are no callbacks in a given one of the above states,
 	the corresponding character is replaced by ".".
 
+o	"b" is the batch limit for this CPU.  If more than this number
+	of RCU callbacks is ready to invoke, then the remainder will
+	be deferred.
+
+o	"ci" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been invoked for
+	this CPU.  Note that ci+nci+ql is the number of callbacks that have
+	been registered in absence of CPU-hotplug activity.
+
+o	"nci" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been offloaded from
+	this CPU.  This will always be zero unless the kernel was built
+	with CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU=y and the "rcu_nocbs=" kernel boot
+	parameter was specified.
+
+o	"co" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been orphaned due to
+	this CPU going offline.  These orphaned callbacks have been moved
+	to an arbitrarily chosen online CPU.
+
+o	"ca" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been adopted by this
+	CPU due to other CPUs going offline.  Note that ci+co-ca+ql is
+	the number of RCU callbacks registered on this CPU.
+
+
+Kernels compiled with CONFIG_RCU_BOOST=y display the following from
+/debug/rcu/rcu_preempt/rcudata:
+
+  0!c=12865 g=12866 pq=1 qp=1 dt=83113/140000000000000/0 df=288 of=11 ql=0/0 qs=N... kt=0/O ktl=944 b=10 ci=60709 nci=0 co=748 ca=871
+  1 c=14407 g=14408 pq=1 qp=0 dt=100679/140000000000000/0 df=378 of=7 ql=0/119 qs=NRW. kt=0/W ktl=9b6 b=10 ci=109740 nci=0 co=589 ca=485
+  2 c=14407 g=14408 pq=1 qp=0 dt=105486/0/0 df=90 of=9 ql=0/89 qs=NRW. kt=0/W ktl=c0c b=10 ci=83113 nci=0 co=533 ca=490
+  3 c=14407 g=14408 pq=1 qp=0 dt=107138/0/0 df=142 of=8 ql=0/188 qs=NRW. kt=0/W ktl=b96 b=10 ci=121114 nci=0 co=426 ca=290
+  4 c=14405 g=14406 pq=1 qp=1 dt=50238/0/0 df=706 of=7 ql=0/0 qs=.... kt=0/W ktl=812 b=10 ci=34929 nci=0 co=643 ca=114
+  5!c=14168 g=14169 pq=1 qp=0 dt=45465/140000000000000/0 df=161 of=11 ql=0/0 qs=N... kt=0/O ktl=b4d b=10 ci=47712 nci=0 co=677 ca=722
+  6 c=14404 g=14405 pq=1 qp=0 dt=59454/0/0 df=94 of=6 ql=0/0 qs=.... kt=0/W ktl=e57 b=10 ci=55597 nci=0 co=701 ca=811
+  7 c=14407 g=14408 pq=1 qp=1 dt=68850/0/0 df=31 of=8 ql=0/0 qs=.... kt=0/W ktl=14bd b=10 ci=77475 nci=0 co=508 ca=1042
+
+This is similar to the output discussed above, but contains the following
+additional fields:
+
 o	"kt" is the per-CPU kernel-thread state.  The digit preceding
 	the first slash is zero if there is no work pending and 1
 	otherwise.  The character between the first pair of slashes is
@@ -184,35 +234,51 @@ o	"ktl" is the low-order 16 bits (in hexadecimal) of the count of
 
 	This field is displayed only for CONFIG_RCU_BOOST kernels.
 
-o	"b" is the batch limit for this CPU.  If more than this number
-	of RCU callbacks is ready to invoke, then the remainder will
-	be deferred.
 
-o	"ci" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been invoked for
-	this CPU.  Note that ci+ql is the number of callbacks that have
-	been registered in absence of CPU-hotplug activity.
+The output of "cat rcu/rcu_preempt/rcuexp" looks as follows:
 
-o	"co" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been orphaned due to
-	this CPU going offline.  These orphaned callbacks have been moved
-	to an arbitrarily chosen online CPU.
+s=21872 d=21872 w=0 tf=0 wd1=0 wd2=0 n=0 sc=21872 dt=21872 dl=0 dx=21872
+
+These fields are as follows:
 
-o	"ca" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been adopted due to
-	other CPUs going offline.  Note that ci+co-ca+ql is the number of
-	RCU callbacks registered on this CPU.
+o	"s" is the starting sequence number.
 
-There is also an rcu/rcudata.csv file with the same information in
-comma-separated-variable spreadsheet format.
+o	"d" is the ending sequence number.  When the starting and ending
+	numbers differ, there is an expedited grace period in progress.
 
+o	"w" is the number of times that the sequence numbers have been
+	in danger of wrapping.
 
-The output of "cat rcu/rcugp" looks as follows:
+o	"tf" is the number of times that contention has resulted in a
+	failure to begin an expedited grace period.
 
-rcu_sched: completed=33062  gpnum=33063
-rcu_bh: completed=464  gpnum=464
+o	"wd1" and "wd2" are the number of times that an attempt to
+	start an expedited grace period found that someone else had
+	completed an expedited grace period that satisfies the
+	attempted request.  "Our work is done."
+
+o	"n" is number of times that contention was so great that
+	the request was demoted from an expedited grace period to
+	a normal grace period.
 
-Again, this output is for both "rcu_sched" and "rcu_bh".  Note that
-kernels built with CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU will have an additional
-"rcu_preempt" line.  The fields are taken from the rcu_state structure,
-and are as follows:
+o	"sc" is the number of times that the attempt to start a
+	new expedited grace period succeeded.
+
+o	"dt" is the number of times that we attempted to update
+	the "d" counter.
+
+o	"dl" is the number of times that we failed to update the "d"
+	counter.
+
+o	"dx" is the number of times that we succeeded in updating
+	the "d" counter.
+
+
+The output of "cat rcu/rcu_preempt/rcugp" looks as follows:
+
+completed=31249  gpnum=31250  age=1  max=18
+
+These fields are taken from the rcu_state structure, and are as follows:
 
 o	"completed" is the number of grace periods that have completed.
 	It is comparable to the "c" field from rcu/rcudata in that a
@@ -220,44 +286,42 @@ o	"completed" is the number of grace periods that have completed.
 	that the corresponding RCU grace period has completed.
 
 o	"gpnum" is the number of grace periods that have started.  It is
-	comparable to the "g" field from rcu/rcudata in that a CPU
-	whose "g" field matches the value of "gpnum" is aware that the
-	corresponding RCU grace period has started.
+	similarly comparable to the "g" field from rcu/rcudata in that
+	a CPU whose "g" field matches the value of "gpnum" is aware that
+	the corresponding RCU grace period has started.
+
+	If these two fields are equal, then there is no grace period
+	in progress, in other words, RCU is idle.  On the other hand,
+	if the two fields differ (as they are above), then an RCU grace
+	period is in progress.
 
-	If these two fields are equal (as they are for "rcu_bh" above),
-	then there is no grace period in progress, in other words, RCU
-	is idle.  On the other hand, if the two fields differ (as they
-	do for "rcu_sched" above), then an RCU grace period is in progress.
+o	"age" is the number of jiffies that the current grace period
+	has extended for, or zero if there is no grace period currently
+	in effect.
 
+o	"max" is the age in jiffies of the longest-duration grace period
+	thus far.
 
-The output of "cat rcu/rcuhier" looks as follows, with very long lines:
+The output of "cat rcu/rcu_preempt/rcuhier" looks as follows:
 
-c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6
-1/1 ..>. 0:127 ^0
-3/3 ..>. 0:35 ^0    0/0 ..>. 36:71 ^1    0/0 ..>. 72:107 ^2    0/0 ..>. 108:127 ^3
-3/3f ..>. 0:5 ^0    2/3 ..>. 6:11 ^1    0/0 ..>. 12:17 ^2    0/0 ..>. 18:23 ^3    0/0 ..>. 24:29 ^4    0/0 ..>. 30:35 ^5    0/0 ..>. 36:41 ^0    0/0 ..>. 42:47 ^1    0/0 ..>. 48:53 ^2    0/0 ..>. 54:59 ^3    0/0 ..>. 60:65 ^4    0/0 ..>. 66:71 ^5    0/0 ..>. 72:77 ^0    0/0 ..>. 78:83 ^1    0/0 ..>. 84:89 ^2    0/0 ..>. 90:95 ^3    0/0 ..>. 96:101 ^4    0/0 ..>. 102:107 ^5    0/0 ..>. 108:113 ^0    0/0 ..>. 114:119 ^1    0/0 ..>. 120:125 ^2    0/0 ..>. 126:127 ^3
-rcu_bh:
-c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0
-0/1 ..>. 0:127 ^0
-0/3 ..>. 0:35 ^0    0/0 ..>. 36:71 ^1    0/0 ..>. 72:107 ^2    0/0 ..>. 108:127 ^3
-0/3f ..>. 0:5 ^0    0/3 ..>. 6:11 ^1    0/0 ..>. 12:17 ^2    0/0 ..>. 18:23 ^3    0/0 ..>. 24:29 ^4    0/0 ..>. 30:35 ^5    0/0 ..>. 36:41 ^0    0/0 ..>. 42:47 ^1    0/0 ..>. 48:53 ^2    0/0 ..>. 54:59 ^3    0/0 ..>. 60:65 ^4    0/0 ..>. 66:71 ^5    0/0 ..>. 72:77 ^0    0/0 ..>. 78:83 ^1    0/0 ..>. 84:89 ^2    0/0 ..>. 90:95 ^3    0/0 ..>. 96:101 ^4    0/0 ..>. 102:107 ^5    0/0 ..>. 108:113 ^0    0/0 ..>. 114:119 ^1    0/0 ..>. 120:125 ^2    0/0 ..>. 126:127 ^3
+c=14407 g=14408 s=0 jfq=2 j=c863 nfqs=12040/nfqsng=0(12040) fqlh=1051 oqlen=0/0
+3/3 ..>. 0:7 ^0
+e/e ..>. 0:3 ^0    d/d ..>. 4:7 ^1
 
-This is once again split into "rcu_sched" and "rcu_bh" portions,
-and CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernels will again have an additional
-"rcu_preempt" section.  The fields are as follows:
+The fields are as follows:
 
-o	"c" is exactly the same as "completed" under rcu/rcugp.
+o	"c" is exactly the same as "completed" under rcu/rcu_preempt/rcugp.
 
-o	"g" is exactly the same as "gpnum" under rcu/rcugp.
+o	"g" is exactly the same as "gpnum" under rcu/rcu_preempt/rcugp.
 
-o	"s" is the "signaled" state that drives force_quiescent_state()'s
+o	"s" is the current state of the force_quiescent_state()
 	state machine.
 
 o	"jfq" is the number of jiffies remaining for this grace period
 	before force_quiescent_state() is invoked to help push things
-	along.  Note that CPUs in dyntick-idle mode throughout the grace
-	period will not report on their own, but rather must be check by
-	some other CPU via force_quiescent_state().
+	along.	Note that CPUs in idle mode throughout the grace period
+	will not report on their own, but rather must be check by some
+	other CPU via force_quiescent_state().
 
 o	"j" is the low-order four hex digits of the jiffies counter.
 	Yes, Paul did run into a number of problems that turned out to
@@ -268,7 +332,8 @@ o	"nfqs" is the number of calls to force_quiescent_state() since
 
 o	"nfqsng" is the number of useless calls to force_quiescent_state(),
 	where there wasn't actually a grace period active.  This can
-	happen due to races.  The number in parentheses is the difference
+	no longer happen due to grace-period processing being pushed
+	into a kthread.  The number in parentheses is the difference
 	between "nfqs" and "nfqsng", or the number of times that
 	force_quiescent_state() actually did some real work.
 
@@ -276,28 +341,27 @@ o	"fqlh" is the number of calls to force_quiescent_state() that
 	exited immediately (without even being counted in nfqs above)
 	due to contention on ->fqslock.
 
-o	Each element of the form "1/1 0:127 ^0" represents one struct
-	rcu_node.  Each line represents one level of the hierarchy, from
-	root to leaves.  It is best to think of the rcu_data structures
-	as forming yet another level after the leaves.  Note that there
-	might be either one, two, or three levels of rcu_node structures,
-	depending on the relationship between CONFIG_RCU_FANOUT and
-	CONFIG_NR_CPUS.
+o	Each element of the form "3/3 ..>. 0:7 ^0" represents one rcu_node
+	structure.  Each line represents one level of the hierarchy,
+	from root to leaves.  It is best to think of the rcu_data
+	structures as forming yet another level after the leaves.
+	Note that there might be either one, two, three, or even four
+	levels of rcu_node structures, depending on the relationship
+	between CONFIG_RCU_FANOUT, CONFIG_RCU_FANOUT_LEAF (possibly
+	adjusted using the rcu_fanout_leaf kernel boot parameter), and
+	CONFIG_NR_CPUS (possibly adjusted using the nr_cpu_ids count of
+	possible CPUs for the booting hardware).
 
 	o	The numbers separated by the "/" are the qsmask followed
 		by the qsmaskinit.  The qsmask will have one bit
-		set for each entity in the next lower level that
-		has not yet checked in for the current grace period.
+		set for each entity in the next lower level that has
+		not yet checked in for the current grace period ("e"
+		indicating CPUs 5, 6, and 7 in the example above).
 		The qsmaskinit will have one bit for each entity that is
 		currently expected to check in during each grace period.
 		The value of qsmaskinit is assigned to that of qsmask
 		at the beginning of each grace period.
 
-		For example, for "rcu_sched", the qsmask of the first
-		entry of the lowest level is 0x14, meaning that we
-		are still waiting for CPUs 2 and 4 to check in for the
-		current grace period.
-
 	o	The characters separated by the ">" indicate the state
 		of the blocked-tasks lists.  A "G" preceding the ">"
 		indicates that at least one task blocked in an RCU
@@ -312,48 +376,39 @@ o	Each element of the form "1/1 0:127 ^0" represents one struct
 		A "." character appears if the corresponding condition
 		does not hold, so that "..>." indicates that no tasks
 		are blocked.  In contrast, "GE>T" indicates maximal
-		inconvenience from blocked tasks.
+		inconvenience from blocked tasks.  CONFIG_TREE_RCU
+		builds of the kernel will always show "..>.".
 
 	o	The numbers separated by the ":" are the range of CPUs
 		served by this struct rcu_node.  This can be helpful
 		in working out how the hierarchy is wired together.
 
-		For example, the first entry at the lowest level shows
-		"0:5", indicating that it covers CPUs 0 through 5.
+		For example, the example rcu_node structure shown above
+		has "0:7", indicating that it covers CPUs 0 through 7.
 
 	o	The number after the "^" indicates the bit in the
-		next higher level rcu_node structure that this
-		rcu_node structure corresponds to.
-
-		For example, the first entry at the lowest level shows
-		"^0", indicating that it corresponds to bit zero in
-		the first entry at the middle level.
-
-
-The output of "cat rcu/rcu_pending" looks as follows:
-
-rcu_sched:
-  0 np=255892 qsp=53936 rpq=85 cbr=0 cng=14417 gpc=10033 gps=24320 nf=6445 nn=146741
-  1 np=261224 qsp=54638 rpq=33 cbr=0 cng=25723 gpc=16310 gps=2849 nf=5912 nn=155792
-  2 np=237496 qsp=49664 rpq=23 cbr=0 cng=2762 gpc=45478 gps=1762 nf=1201 nn=136629
-  3 np=236249 qsp=48766 rpq=98 cbr=0 cng=286 gpc=48049 gps=1218 nf=207 nn=137723
-  4 np=221310 qsp=46850 rpq=7 cbr=0 cng=26 gpc=43161 gps=4634 nf=3529 nn=123110
-  5 np=237332 qsp=48449 rpq=9 cbr=0 cng=54 gpc=47920 gps=3252 nf=201 nn=137456
-  6 np=219995 qsp=46718 rpq=12 cbr=0 cng=50 gpc=42098 gps=6093 nf=4202 nn=120834
-  7 np=249893 qsp=49390 rpq=42 cbr=0 cng=72 gpc=38400 gps=17102 nf=41 nn=144888
-rcu_bh:
-  0 np=146741 qsp=1419 rpq=6 cbr=0 cng=6 gpc=0 gps=0 nf=2 nn=145314
-  1 np=155792 qsp=12597 rpq=3 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=4 gps=8 nf=3 nn=143180
-  2 np=136629 qsp=18680 rpq=1 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=7 gps=6 nf=0 nn=117936
-  3 np=137723 qsp=2843 rpq=0 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=10 gps=7 nf=0 nn=134863
-  4 np=123110 qsp=12433 rpq=0 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=4 gps=2 nf=0 nn=110671
-  5 np=137456 qsp=4210 rpq=1 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=6 gps=5 nf=0 nn=133235
-  6 np=120834 qsp=9902 rpq=2 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=6 gps=3 nf=2 nn=110921
-  7 np=144888 qsp=26336 rpq=0 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=8 gps=2 nf=0 nn=118542
-
-As always, this is once again split into "rcu_sched" and "rcu_bh"
-portions, with CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernels having an additional
-"rcu_preempt" section.  The fields are as follows:
+		next higher level rcu_node structure that this rcu_node
+		structure corresponds to.  For example, the "d/d ..>. 4:7
+		^1" has a "1" in this position, indicating that it
+		corresponds to the "1" bit in the "3" shown in the
+		"3/3 ..>. 0:7 ^0" entry on the next level up.
+
+
+The output of "cat rcu/rcu_sched/rcu_pending" looks as follows:
+
+  0!np=26111 qsp=29 rpq=5386 cbr=1 cng=570 gpc=3674 gps=577 nn=15903
+  1!np=28913 qsp=35 rpq=6097 cbr=1 cng=448 gpc=3700 gps=554 nn=18113
+  2!np=32740 qsp=37 rpq=6202 cbr=0 cng=476 gpc=4627 gps=546 nn=20889
+  3 np=23679 qsp=22 rpq=5044 cbr=1 cng=415 gpc=3403 gps=347 nn=14469
+  4!np=30714 qsp=4 rpq=5574 cbr=0 cng=528 gpc=3931 gps=639 nn=20042
+  5 np=28910 qsp=2 rpq=5246 cbr=0 cng=428 gpc=4105 gps=709 nn=18422
+  6!np=38648 qsp=5 rpq=7076 cbr=0 cng=840 gpc=4072 gps=961 nn=25699
+  7 np=37275 qsp=2 rpq=6873 cbr=0 cng=868 gpc=3416 gps=971 nn=25147
+
+The fields are as follows:
+
+o	The leading number is the CPU number, with "!" indicating
+	an offline CPU.
 
 o	"np" is the number of times that __rcu_pending() has been invoked
 	for the corresponding flavor of RCU.
@@ -377,49 +432,23 @@ o	"gpc" is the number of times that an old grace period had
 o	"gps" is the number of times that a new grace period had started,
 	but this CPU was not yet aware of it.
 
-o	"nf" is the number of times that this CPU suspected that the
-	current grace period had run for too long, and thus needed to
-	be forced.
-
-	Please note that "forcing" consists of sending resched IPIs
-	to holdout CPUs.  If that CPU really still is in an old RCU
-	read-side critical section, then we really do have to wait for it.
-	The assumption behing "forcing" is that the CPU is not still in
-	an old RCU read-side critical section, but has not yet responded
-	for some other reason.
-
-o	"nn" is the number of times that this CPU needed nothing.  Alert
-	readers will note that the rcu "nn" number for a given CPU very
-	closely matches the rcu_bh "np" number for that same CPU.  This
-	is due to short-circuit evaluation in rcu_pending().
-
-
-The output of "cat rcu/rcutorture" looks as follows:
-
-rcutorture test sequence: 0 (test in progress)
-rcutorture update version number: 615
-
-The first line shows the number of rcutorture tests that have completed
-since boot.  If a test is currently running, the "(test in progress)"
-string will appear as shown above.  The second line shows the number of
-update cycles that the current test has started, or zero if there is
-no test in progress.
+o	"nn" is the number of times that this CPU needed nothing.
 
 
 The output of "cat rcu/rcuboost" looks as follows:
 
-0:5 tasks=.... kt=W ntb=0 neb=0 nnb=0 j=2f95 bt=300f
-     balk: nt=0 egt=989 bt=0 nb=0 ny=0 nos=16
-6:7 tasks=.... kt=W ntb=0 neb=0 nnb=0 j=2f95 bt=300f
-     balk: nt=0 egt=225 bt=0 nb=0 ny=0 nos=6
+0:3 tasks=.... kt=W ntb=0 neb=0 nnb=0 j=c864 bt=c894
+    balk: nt=0 egt=4695 bt=0 nb=0 ny=56 nos=0
+4:7 tasks=.... kt=W ntb=0 neb=0 nnb=0 j=c864 bt=c894
+    balk: nt=0 egt=6541 bt=0 nb=0 ny=126 nos=0
 
 This information is output only for rcu_preempt.  Each two-line entry
 corresponds to a leaf rcu_node strcuture.  The fields are as follows:
 
 o	"n:m" is the CPU-number range for the corresponding two-line
 	entry.  In the sample output above, the first entry covers
-	CPUs zero through five and the second entry covers CPUs 6
-	and 7.
+	CPUs zero through three and the second entry covers CPUs four
+	through seven.
 
 o	"tasks=TNEB" gives the state of the various segments of the
 	rnp->blocked_tasks list:
@@ -501,113 +530,21 @@ o	"nos" counts the number of times we balked for other
 	reasons, e.g., the grace period ended first.
 
 
-CONFIG_TINY_RCU and CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats
+CONFIG_TINY_RCU debugfs Files and Formats
 
 These implementations of RCU provides a single debugfs file under the
 top-level directory RCU, namely rcu/rcudata, which displays fields in
-rcu_bh_ctrlblk, rcu_sched_ctrlblk and, for CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU,
-rcu_preempt_ctrlblk.
+rcu_bh_ctrlblk and rcu_sched_ctrlblk.
 
 The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" is as follows:
 
-rcu_preempt: qlen=24 gp=1097669 g197/p197/c197 tasks=...
-             ttb=. btg=no ntb=184 neb=0 nnb=183 j=01f7 bt=0274
-             normal balk: nt=1097669 gt=0 bt=371 b=0 ny=25073378 nos=0
-             exp balk: bt=0 nos=0
 rcu_sched: qlen: 0
 rcu_bh: qlen: 0
 
-This is split into rcu_preempt, rcu_sched, and rcu_bh sections, with the
-rcu_preempt section appearing only in CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU builds.
-The last three lines of the rcu_preempt section appear only in
-CONFIG_RCU_BOOST kernel builds.  The fields are as follows:
+This is split into rcu_sched and rcu_bh sections.  The field is as
+follows:
 
 o	"qlen" is the number of RCU callbacks currently waiting either
 	for an RCU grace period or waiting to be invoked.  This is the
 	only field present for rcu_sched and rcu_bh, due to the
 	short-circuiting of grace period in those two cases.
-
-o	"gp" is the number of grace periods that have completed.
-
-o	"g197/p197/c197" displays the grace-period state, with the
-	"g" number being the number of grace periods that have started
-	(mod 256), the "p" number being the number of grace periods
-	that the CPU has responded to (also mod 256), and the "c"
-	number being the number of grace periods that have completed
-	(once again mode 256).
-
-	Why have both "gp" and "g"?  Because the data flowing into
-	"gp" is only present in a CONFIG_RCU_TRACE kernel.
-
-o	"tasks" is a set of bits.  The first bit is "T" if there are
-	currently tasks that have recently blocked within an RCU
-	read-side critical section, the second bit is "N" if any of the
-	aforementioned tasks are blocking the current RCU grace period,
-	and the third bit is "E" if any of the aforementioned tasks are
-	blocking the current expedited grace period.  Each bit is "."
-	if the corresponding condition does not hold.
-
-o	"ttb" is a single bit.  It is "B" if any of the blocked tasks
-	need to be priority boosted and "." otherwise.
-
-o	"btg" indicates whether boosting has been carried out during
-	the current grace period, with "exp" indicating that boosting
-	is in progress for an expedited grace period, "no" indicating
-	that boosting has not yet started for a normal grace period,
-	"begun" indicating that boosting has bebug for a normal grace
-	period, and "done" indicating that boosting has completed for
-	a normal grace period.
-
-o	"ntb" is the total number of tasks subjected to RCU priority boosting
-	periods since boot.
-
-o	"neb" is the number of expedited grace periods that have had
-	to resort to RCU priority boosting since boot.
-
-o	"nnb" is the number of normal grace periods that have had
-	to resort to RCU priority boosting since boot.
-
-o	"j" is the low-order 16 bits of the jiffies counter in hexadecimal.
-
-o	"bt" is the low-order 16 bits of the value that the jiffies counter
-	will have at the next time that boosting is scheduled to begin.
-
-o	In the line beginning with "normal balk", the fields are as follows:
-
-	o	"nt" is the number of times that the system balked from
-		boosting because there were no blocked tasks to boost.
-		Note that the system will balk from boosting even if the
-		grace period is overdue when the currently running task
-		is looping within an RCU read-side critical section.
-		There is no point in boosting in this case, because
-		boosting a running task won't make it run any faster.
-
-	o	"gt" is the number of times that the system balked
-		from boosting because, although there were blocked tasks,
-		none of them were preventing the current grace period
-		from completing.
-
-	o	"bt" is the number of times that the system balked
-		from boosting because boosting was already in progress.
-
-	o	"b" is the number of times that the system balked from
-		boosting because boosting had already completed for
-		the grace period in question.
-
-	o	"ny" is the number of times that the system balked from
-		boosting because it was not yet time to start boosting
-		the grace period in question.
-
-	o	"nos" is the number of times that the system balked from
-		boosting for inexplicable ("not otherwise specified")
-		reasons.  This can actually happen due to races involving
-		increments of the jiffies counter.
-
-o	In the line beginning with "exp balk", the fields are as follows:
-
-	o	"bt" is the number of times that the system balked from
-		boosting because there were no blocked tasks to boost.
-
-	o	"nos" is the number of times that the system balked from
-		 boosting for inexplicable ("not otherwise specified")
-		 reasons.
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
index 6bbe8dcdc3da..0f0fb7c432c2 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
@@ -265,9 +265,9 @@ rcu_dereference()
 		rcu_read_lock();
 		p = rcu_dereference(head.next);
 		rcu_read_unlock();
-		x = p->address;
+		x = p->address;	/* BUG!!! */
 		rcu_read_lock();
-		y = p->data;
+		y = p->data;	/* BUG!!! */
 		rcu_read_unlock();
 
 	Holding a reference from one RCU read-side critical section
@@ -499,6 +499,8 @@ The foo_reclaim() function might appear as follows:
 	{
 		struct foo *fp = container_of(rp, struct foo, rcu);
 
+		foo_cleanup(fp->a);
+
 		kfree(fp);
 	}
 
@@ -521,6 +523,12 @@ o	Use call_rcu() -after- removing a data element from an
 	read-side critical sections that might be referencing that
 	data item.
 
+If the callback for call_rcu() is not doing anything more than calling
+kfree() on the structure, you can use kfree_rcu() instead of call_rcu()
+to avoid having to write your own callback:
+
+	kfree_rcu(old_fp, rcu);
+
 Again, see checklist.txt for additional rules governing the use of RCU.
 
 
@@ -773,8 +781,8 @@ a single atomic update, converting to RCU will require special care.
 
 Also, the presence of synchronize_rcu() means that the RCU version of
 delete() can now block.  If this is a problem, there is a callback-based
-mechanism that never blocks, namely call_rcu(), that can be used in
-place of synchronize_rcu().
+mechanism that never blocks, namely call_rcu() or kfree_rcu(), that can
+be used in place of synchronize_rcu().
 
 
 7.  FULL LIST OF RCU APIs
@@ -789,9 +797,7 @@ RCU list traversal:
 	list_for_each_entry_rcu
 	hlist_for_each_entry_rcu
 	hlist_nulls_for_each_entry_rcu
-
-	list_for_each_continue_rcu	(to be deprecated in favor of new
-					 list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu)
+	list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu
 
 RCU pointer/list update:
 
@@ -813,6 +819,7 @@ RCU:	Critical sections	Grace period		Barrier
 	rcu_read_unlock		synchronize_rcu
 	rcu_dereference		synchronize_rcu_expedited
 				call_rcu
+				kfree_rcu
 
 
 bh:	Critical sections	Grace period		Barrier
@@ -833,11 +840,9 @@ sched:	Critical sections	Grace period		Barrier
 
 SRCU:	Critical sections	Grace period		Barrier
 
-	srcu_read_lock		synchronize_srcu	N/A
-	srcu_read_unlock	synchronize_srcu_expedited
-	srcu_read_lock_raw
-	srcu_read_unlock_raw
-	srcu_dereference
+	srcu_read_lock		synchronize_srcu	srcu_barrier
+	srcu_read_unlock	call_srcu
+	srcu_dereference	synchronize_srcu_expedited
 
 SRCU:	Initialization/cleanup
 	init_srcu_struct
@@ -858,32 +863,31 @@ list can be helpful:
 
 a.	Will readers need to block?  If so, you need SRCU.
 
-b.	Is it necessary to start a read-side critical section in a
-	hardirq handler or exception handler, and then to complete
-	this read-side critical section in the task that was
-	interrupted?  If so, you need SRCU's srcu_read_lock_raw() and
-	srcu_read_unlock_raw() primitives.
-
-c.	What about the -rt patchset?  If readers would need to block
+b.	What about the -rt patchset?  If readers would need to block
 	in an non-rt kernel, you need SRCU.  If readers would block
 	in a -rt kernel, but not in a non-rt kernel, SRCU is not
 	necessary.
 
-d.	Do you need to treat NMI handlers, hardirq handlers,
+c.	Do you need to treat NMI handlers, hardirq handlers,
 	and code segments with preemption disabled (whether
 	via preempt_disable(), local_irq_save(), local_bh_disable(),
 	or some other mechanism) as if they were explicit RCU readers?
-	If so, you need RCU-sched.
+	If so, RCU-sched is the only choice that will work for you.
 
-e.	Do you need RCU grace periods to complete even in the face
+d.	Do you need RCU grace periods to complete even in the face
 	of softirq monopolization of one or more of the CPUs?  For
 	example, is your code subject to network-based denial-of-service
 	attacks?  If so, you need RCU-bh.
 
-f.	Is your workload too update-intensive for normal use of
+e.	Is your workload too update-intensive for normal use of
 	RCU, but inappropriate for other synchronization mechanisms?
 	If so, consider SLAB_DESTROY_BY_RCU.  But please be careful!
 
+f.	Do you need read-side critical sections that are respected
+	even though they are in the middle of the idle loop, during
+	user-mode execution, or on an offlined CPU?  If so, SRCU is the
+	only choice that will work for you.
+
 g.	Otherwise, use RCU.
 
 Of course, this all assumes that you have determined that RCU is in fact
diff --git a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist
index dc0e33210d7e..2b7e32dfe00d 100644
--- a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist
+++ b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist
@@ -105,5 +105,5 @@ kernel patches.
     same time, just various/random combinations of them]:
 
     CONFIG_SMP, CONFIG_SYSFS, CONFIG_PROC_FS, CONFIG_INPUT, CONFIG_PCI,
-    CONFIG_BLOCK, CONFIG_PM, CONFIG_HOTPLUG, CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ,
+    CONFIG_BLOCK, CONFIG_PM, CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ,
     CONFIG_NET, CONFIG_INET=n (but latter with CONFIG_NET=y)
diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches
index 4468ce24427c..26b1e31d5a13 100644
--- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches
+++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches
@@ -60,8 +60,7 @@ own source tree.  For example:
 "dontdiff" is a list of files which are generated by the kernel during
 the build process, and should be ignored in any diff(1)-generated
 patch.  The "dontdiff" file is included in the kernel tree in
-2.6.12 and later.  For earlier kernel versions, you can get it
-from <http://www.xenotime.net/linux/doc/dontdiff>.
+2.6.12 and later.
 
 Make sure your patch does not include any extra files which do not
 belong in a patch submission.  Make sure to review your patch -after-
@@ -110,6 +109,16 @@ probably didn't even receive earlier versions of the patch.
 If the patch fixes a logged bug entry, refer to that bug entry by
 number and URL.
 
+If you want to refer to a specific commit, don't just refer to the
+SHA-1 ID of the commit. Please also include the oneline summary of
+the commit, to make it easier for reviewers to know what it is about.
+Example:
+
+	Commit e21d2170f36602ae2708 ("video: remove unnecessary
+	platform_set_drvdata()") removed the unnecessary
+	platform_set_drvdata(), but left the variable "dev" unused,
+	delete it.
+
 
 3) Separate your changes.
 
@@ -150,7 +159,8 @@ be able to justify all violations that remain in your patch.
 
 Look through the MAINTAINERS file and the source code, and determine
 if your change applies to a specific subsystem of the kernel, with
-an assigned maintainer.  If so, e-mail that person.
+an assigned maintainer.  If so, e-mail that person.  The script
+scripts/get_maintainer.pl can be very useful at this step.
 
 If no maintainer is listed, or the maintainer does not respond, send
 your patch to the primary Linux kernel developer's mailing list,
@@ -420,7 +430,7 @@ person it names.  This tag documents that potentially interested parties
 have been included in the discussion
 
 
-14) Using Reported-by:, Tested-by: and Reviewed-by:
+14) Using Reported-by:, Tested-by:, Reviewed-by: and Suggested-by:
 
 If this patch fixes a problem reported by somebody else, consider adding a
 Reported-by: tag to credit the reporter for their contribution.  Please
@@ -468,6 +478,13 @@ done on the patch.  Reviewed-by: tags, when supplied by reviewers known to
 understand the subject area and to perform thorough reviews, will normally
 increase the likelihood of your patch getting into the kernel.
 
+A Suggested-by: tag indicates that the patch idea is suggested by the person
+named and ensures credit to the person for the idea. Please note that this
+tag should not be added without the reporter's permission, especially if the
+idea was not posted in a public forum. That said, if we diligently credit our
+idea reporters, they will, hopefully, be inspired to help us again in the
+future.
+
 
 15) The canonical patch format
 
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
index f6318f6d7baf..c6a06b71594d 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
@@ -51,7 +51,6 @@ int dbg;
 int print_delays;
 int print_io_accounting;
 int print_task_context_switch_counts;
-__u64 stime, utime;
 
 #define PRINTF(fmt, arg...) {			\
 	    if (dbg) {				\
@@ -98,10 +97,9 @@ static int create_nl_socket(int protocol)
 	if (rcvbufsz)
 		if (setsockopt(fd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_RCVBUF,
 				&rcvbufsz, sizeof(rcvbufsz)) < 0) {
-			fprintf(stderr, "Unable to set socket rcv buf size "
-					"to %d\n",
+			fprintf(stderr, "Unable to set socket rcv buf size to %d\n",
 				rcvbufsz);
-			return -1;
+			goto error;
 		}
 
 	memset(&local, 0, sizeof(local));
@@ -274,7 +272,7 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
 	char *logfile = NULL;
 	int loop = 0;
 	int containerset = 0;
-	char containerpath[1024];
+	char *containerpath = NULL;
 	int cfd = 0;
 	int forking = 0;
 	sigset_t sigset;
@@ -301,7 +299,7 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
 			break;
 		case 'C':
 			containerset = 1;
-			strncpy(containerpath, optarg, strlen(optarg) + 1);
+			containerpath = optarg;
 			break;
 		case 'w':
 			logfile = strdup(optarg);
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt b/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt
index e7cc36397217..a58b63da1a36 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt
@@ -47,11 +47,24 @@ directory apei/einj. The following files are provided.
 
 - param1
   This file is used to set the first error parameter value. Effect of
-  parameter depends on error_type specified.
+  parameter depends on error_type specified. For example, if error
+  type is memory related type, the param1 should be a valid physical
+  memory address.
 
 - param2
   This file is used to set the second error parameter value. Effect of
-  parameter depends on error_type specified.
+  parameter depends on error_type specified. For example, if error
+  type is memory related type, the param2 should be a physical memory
+  address mask. Linux requires page or narrower granularity, say,
+  0xfffffffffffff000.
+
+- notrigger
+  The EINJ mechanism is a two step process. First inject the error, then
+  perform some actions to trigger it. Setting "notrigger" to 1 skips the
+  trigger phase, which *may* allow the user to cause the error in some other
+  context by a simple access to the cpu, memory location, or device that is
+  the target of the error injection. Whether this actually works depends
+  on what operations the BIOS actually includes in the trigger phase.
 
 BIOS versions based in the ACPI 4.0 specification have limited options
 to control where the errors are injected.  Your BIOS may support an
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt b/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt
index febbb1ba4d23..784841caa6e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt
@@ -4,4 +4,4 @@ CONFIG_ACPI_CUSTOM_DSDT builds the image into the kernel.
 
 When to use this method is described in detail on the
 Linux/ACPI home page:
-http://www.lesswatts.org/projects/acpi/overridingDSDT.php
+https://01.org/linux-acpi/documentation/overriding-dsdt
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt b/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..aca4e69121b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,324 @@
+ACPI based device enumeration
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ACPI 5 introduced a set of new resources (UartTSerialBus, I2cSerialBus,
+SpiSerialBus, GpioIo and GpioInt) which can be used in enumerating slave
+devices behind serial bus controllers.
+
+In addition we are starting to see peripherals integrated in the
+SoC/Chipset to appear only in ACPI namespace. These are typically devices
+that are accessed through memory-mapped registers.
+
+In order to support this and re-use the existing drivers as much as
+possible we decided to do following:
+
+	o Devices that have no bus connector resource are represented as
+	  platform devices.
+
+	o Devices behind real busses where there is a connector resource
+	  are represented as struct spi_device or struct i2c_device
+	  (standard UARTs are not busses so there is no struct uart_device).
+
+As both ACPI and Device Tree represent a tree of devices (and their
+resources) this implementation follows the Device Tree way as much as
+possible.
+
+The ACPI implementation enumerates devices behind busses (platform, SPI and
+I2C), creates the physical devices and binds them to their ACPI handle in
+the ACPI namespace.
+
+This means that when ACPI_HANDLE(dev) returns non-NULL the device was
+enumerated from ACPI namespace. This handle can be used to extract other
+device-specific configuration. There is an example of this below.
+
+Platform bus support
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Since we are using platform devices to represent devices that are not
+connected to any physical bus we only need to implement a platform driver
+for the device and add supported ACPI IDs. If this same IP-block is used on
+some other non-ACPI platform, the driver might work out of the box or needs
+some minor changes.
+
+Adding ACPI support for an existing driver should be pretty
+straightforward. Here is the simplest example:
+
+	#ifdef CONFIG_ACPI
+	static struct acpi_device_id mydrv_acpi_match[] = {
+		/* ACPI IDs here */
+		{ }
+	};
+	MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(acpi, mydrv_acpi_match);
+	#endif
+
+	static struct platform_driver my_driver = {
+		...
+		.driver = {
+			.acpi_match_table = ACPI_PTR(mydrv_acpi_match),
+		},
+	};
+
+If the driver needs to perform more complex initialization like getting and
+configuring GPIOs it can get its ACPI handle and extract this information
+from ACPI tables.
+
+Currently the kernel is not able to automatically determine from which ACPI
+device it should make the corresponding platform device so we need to add
+the ACPI device explicitly to acpi_platform_device_ids list defined in
+drivers/acpi/acpi_platform.c. This limitation is only for the platform
+devices, SPI and I2C devices are created automatically as described below.
+
+DMA support
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+DMA controllers enumerated via ACPI should be registered in the system to
+provide generic access to their resources. For example, a driver that would
+like to be accessible to slave devices via generic API call
+dma_request_slave_channel() must register itself at the end of the probe
+function like this:
+
+	err = devm_acpi_dma_controller_register(dev, xlate_func, dw);
+	/* Handle the error if it's not a case of !CONFIG_ACPI */
+
+and implement custom xlate function if needed (usually acpi_dma_simple_xlate()
+is enough) which converts the FixedDMA resource provided by struct
+acpi_dma_spec into the corresponding DMA channel. A piece of code for that case
+could look like:
+
+	#ifdef CONFIG_ACPI
+	struct filter_args {
+		/* Provide necessary information for the filter_func */
+		...
+	};
+
+	static bool filter_func(struct dma_chan *chan, void *param)
+	{
+		/* Choose the proper channel */
+		...
+	}
+
+	static struct dma_chan *xlate_func(struct acpi_dma_spec *dma_spec,
+			struct acpi_dma *adma)
+	{
+		dma_cap_mask_t cap;
+		struct filter_args args;
+
+		/* Prepare arguments for filter_func */
+		...
+		return dma_request_channel(cap, filter_func, &args);
+	}
+	#else
+	static struct dma_chan *xlate_func(struct acpi_dma_spec *dma_spec,
+			struct acpi_dma *adma)
+	{
+		return NULL;
+	}
+	#endif
+
+dma_request_slave_channel() will call xlate_func() for each registered DMA
+controller. In the xlate function the proper channel must be chosen based on
+information in struct acpi_dma_spec and the properties of the controller
+provided by struct acpi_dma.
+
+Clients must call dma_request_slave_channel() with the string parameter that
+corresponds to a specific FixedDMA resource. By default "tx" means the first
+entry of the FixedDMA resource array, "rx" means the second entry. The table
+below shows a layout:
+
+	Device (I2C0)
+	{
+		...
+		Method (_CRS, 0, NotSerialized)
+		{
+			Name (DBUF, ResourceTemplate ()
+			{
+				FixedDMA (0x0018, 0x0004, Width32bit, _Y48)
+				FixedDMA (0x0019, 0x0005, Width32bit, )
+			})
+		...
+		}
+	}
+
+So, the FixedDMA with request line 0x0018 is "tx" and next one is "rx" in
+this example.
+
+In robust cases the client unfortunately needs to call
+acpi_dma_request_slave_chan_by_index() directly and therefore choose the
+specific FixedDMA resource by its index.
+
+SPI serial bus support
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Slave devices behind SPI bus have SpiSerialBus resource attached to them.
+This is extracted automatically by the SPI core and the slave devices are
+enumerated once spi_register_master() is called by the bus driver.
+
+Here is what the ACPI namespace for a SPI slave might look like:
+
+	Device (EEP0)
+	{
+		Name (_ADR, 1)
+		Name (_CID, Package() {
+			"ATML0025",
+			"AT25",
+		})
+		...
+		Method (_CRS, 0, NotSerialized)
+		{
+			SPISerialBus(1, PolarityLow, FourWireMode, 8,
+				ControllerInitiated, 1000000, ClockPolarityLow,
+				ClockPhaseFirst, "\\_SB.PCI0.SPI1",)
+		}
+		...
+
+The SPI device drivers only need to add ACPI IDs in a similar way than with
+the platform device drivers. Below is an example where we add ACPI support
+to at25 SPI eeprom driver (this is meant for the above ACPI snippet):
+
+	#ifdef CONFIG_ACPI
+	static struct acpi_device_id at25_acpi_match[] = {
+		{ "AT25", 0 },
+		{ },
+	};
+	MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(acpi, at25_acpi_match);
+	#endif
+
+	static struct spi_driver at25_driver = {
+		.driver = {
+			...
+			.acpi_match_table = ACPI_PTR(at25_acpi_match),
+		},
+	};
+
+Note that this driver actually needs more information like page size of the
+eeprom etc. but at the time writing this there is no standard way of
+passing those. One idea is to return this in _DSM method like:
+
+	Device (EEP0)
+	{
+		...
+		Method (_DSM, 4, NotSerialized)
+		{
+			Store (Package (6)
+			{
+				"byte-len", 1024,
+				"addr-mode", 2,
+				"page-size, 32
+			}, Local0)
+
+			// Check UUIDs etc.
+
+			Return (Local0)
+		}
+
+Then the at25 SPI driver can get this configuration by calling _DSM on its
+ACPI handle like:
+
+	struct acpi_buffer output = { ACPI_ALLOCATE_BUFFER, NULL };
+	struct acpi_object_list input;
+	acpi_status status;
+
+	/* Fill in the input buffer */
+
+	status = acpi_evaluate_object(ACPI_HANDLE(&spi->dev), "_DSM",
+				      &input, &output);
+	if (ACPI_FAILURE(status))
+		/* Handle the error */
+
+	/* Extract the data here */
+
+	kfree(output.pointer);
+
+I2C serial bus support
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The slaves behind I2C bus controller only need to add the ACPI IDs like
+with the platform and SPI drivers. The I2C core automatically enumerates
+any slave devices behind the controller device once the adapter is
+registered.
+
+Below is an example of how to add ACPI support to the existing mpu3050
+input driver:
+
+	#ifdef CONFIG_ACPI
+	static struct acpi_device_id mpu3050_acpi_match[] = {
+		{ "MPU3050", 0 },
+		{ },
+	};
+	MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(acpi, mpu3050_acpi_match);
+	#endif
+
+	static struct i2c_driver mpu3050_i2c_driver = {
+		.driver	= {
+			.name	= "mpu3050",
+			.owner	= THIS_MODULE,
+			.pm	= &mpu3050_pm,
+			.of_match_table = mpu3050_of_match,
+			.acpi_match_table  ACPI_PTR(mpu3050_acpi_match),
+		},
+		.probe		= mpu3050_probe,
+		.remove		= mpu3050_remove,
+		.id_table	= mpu3050_ids,
+	};
+
+GPIO support
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ACPI 5 introduced two new resources to describe GPIO connections: GpioIo
+and GpioInt. These resources are used be used to pass GPIO numbers used by
+the device to the driver. For example:
+
+	Method (_CRS, 0, NotSerialized)
+	{
+		Name (SBUF, ResourceTemplate()
+		{
+			...
+			// Used to power on/off the device
+			GpioIo (Exclusive, PullDefault, 0x0000, 0x0000,
+				IoRestrictionOutputOnly, "\\_SB.PCI0.GPI0",
+				0x00, ResourceConsumer,,)
+			{
+				// Pin List
+				0x0055
+			}
+
+			// Interrupt for the device
+			GpioInt (Edge, ActiveHigh, ExclusiveAndWake, PullNone,
+				 0x0000, "\\_SB.PCI0.GPI0", 0x00, ResourceConsumer,,)
+			{
+				// Pin list
+				0x0058
+			}
+
+			...
+
+		}
+
+		Return (SBUF)
+	}
+
+These GPIO numbers are controller relative and path "\\_SB.PCI0.GPI0"
+specifies the path to the controller. In order to use these GPIOs in Linux
+we need to translate them to the Linux GPIO numbers.
+
+The driver can do this by including <linux/acpi_gpio.h> and then calling
+acpi_get_gpio(path, gpio). This will return the Linux GPIO number or
+negative errno if there was no translation found.
+
+In a simple case of just getting the Linux GPIO number from device
+resources one can use acpi_get_gpio_by_index() helper function. It takes
+pointer to the device and index of the GpioIo/GpioInt descriptor in the
+device resources list. For example:
+
+	int gpio_irq, gpio_power;
+	int ret;
+
+	gpio_irq = acpi_get_gpio_by_index(dev, 1, NULL);
+	if (gpio_irq < 0)
+		/* handle error */
+
+	gpio_power = acpi_get_gpio_by_index(dev, 0, NULL);
+	if (gpio_power < 0)
+		/* handle error */
+
+	/* Now we can use the GPIO numbers */
+
+Other GpioIo parameters must be converted first by the driver to be
+suitable to the gpiolib before passing them.
+
+In case of GpioInt resource an additional call to gpio_to_irq() must be
+done before calling request_irq().
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt b/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..35c3f5415476
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+Overriding ACPI tables via initrd
+=================================
+
+1) Introduction (What is this about)
+2) What is this for
+3) How does it work
+4) References (Where to retrieve userspace tools)
+
+1) What is this about
+---------------------
+
+If the ACPI_INITRD_TABLE_OVERRIDE compile option is true, it is possible to
+override nearly any ACPI table provided by the BIOS with an instrumented,
+modified one.
+
+For a full list of ACPI tables that can be overridden, take a look at
+the char *table_sigs[MAX_ACPI_SIGNATURE]; definition in drivers/acpi/osl.c
+All ACPI tables iasl (Intel's ACPI compiler and disassembler) knows should
+be overridable, except:
+   - ACPI_SIG_RSDP (has a signature of 6 bytes)
+   - ACPI_SIG_FACS (does not have an ordinary ACPI table header)
+Both could get implemented as well.
+
+
+2) What is this for
+-------------------
+
+Please keep in mind that this is a debug option.
+ACPI tables should not get overridden for productive use.
+If BIOS ACPI tables are overridden the kernel will get tainted with the
+TAINT_OVERRIDDEN_ACPI_TABLE flag.
+Complain to your platform/BIOS vendor if you find a bug which is so sever
+that a workaround is not accepted in the Linux kernel.
+
+Still, it can and should be enabled in any kernel, because:
+  - There is no functional change with not instrumented initrds
+  - It provides a powerful feature to easily debug and test ACPI BIOS table
+    compatibility with the Linux kernel.
+
+
+3) How does it work
+-------------------
+
+# Extract the machine's ACPI tables:
+cd /tmp
+acpidump >acpidump
+acpixtract -a acpidump
+# Disassemble, modify and recompile them:
+iasl -d *.dat
+# For example add this statement into a _PRT (PCI Routing Table) function
+# of the DSDT:
+Store("HELLO WORLD", debug)
+iasl -sa dsdt.dsl
+# Add the raw ACPI tables to an uncompressed cpio archive.
+# They must be put into a /kernel/firmware/acpi directory inside the
+# cpio archive.
+# The uncompressed cpio archive must be the first.
+# Other, typically compressed cpio archives, must be
+# concatenated on top of the uncompressed one.
+mkdir -p kernel/firmware/acpi
+cp dsdt.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
+# A maximum of: #define ACPI_OVERRIDE_TABLES 10
+# tables are  currently allowed (see osl.c):
+iasl -sa facp.dsl
+iasl -sa ssdt1.dsl
+cp facp.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
+cp ssdt1.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
+# Create the uncompressed cpio archive and concatenate the original initrd
+# on top:
+find kernel | cpio -H newc --create > /boot/instrumented_initrd
+cat /boot/initrd >>/boot/instrumented_initrd
+# reboot with increased acpi debug level, e.g. boot params:
+acpi.debug_level=0x2 acpi.debug_layer=0xFFFFFFFF
+# and check your syslog:
+[    1.268089] ACPI: PCI Interrupt Routing Table [\_SB_.PCI0._PRT]
+[    1.272091] [ACPI Debug]  String [0x0B] "HELLO WORLD"
+
+iasl is able to disassemble and recompile quite a lot different,
+also static ACPI tables.
+
+
+4) Where to retrieve userspace tools
+------------------------------------
+
+iasl and acpixtract are part of Intel's ACPICA project:
+http://acpica.org/
+and should be packaged by distributions (for example in the acpica package
+on SUSE).
+
+acpidump can be found in Len Browns pmtools:
+ftp://kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/lenb/acpi/utils/pmtools/acpidump
+This tool is also part of the acpica package on SUSE.
+Alternatively, used ACPI tables can be retrieved via sysfs in latest kernels:
+/sys/firmware/acpi/tables
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/namespace.txt b/Documentation/acpi/namespace.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..260f6a3661fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/namespace.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,395 @@
+ACPI Device Tree - Representation of ACPI Namespace
+
+Copyright (C) 2013, Intel Corporation
+Author: Lv Zheng <lv.zheng@intel.com>
+
+
+Abstract:
+
+The Linux ACPI subsystem converts ACPI namespace objects into a Linux
+device tree under the /sys/devices/LNXSYSTEM:00 and updates it upon
+receiving ACPI hotplug notification events.  For each device object in this
+hierarchy there is a corresponding symbolic link in the
+/sys/bus/acpi/devices.
+This document illustrates the structure of the ACPI device tree.
+
+
+Credit:
+
+Thanks for the help from Zhang Rui <rui.zhang@intel.com> and Rafael J.
+Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>.
+
+
+1. ACPI Definition Blocks
+
+   The ACPI firmware sets up RSDP (Root System Description Pointer) in the
+   system memory address space pointing to the XSDT (Extended System
+   Description Table).  The XSDT always points to the FADT (Fixed ACPI
+   Description Table) using its first entry, the data within the FADT
+   includes various fixed-length entries that describe fixed ACPI features
+   of the hardware.  The FADT contains a pointer to the DSDT
+   (Differentiated System Descripition Table).  The XSDT also contains
+   entries pointing to possibly multiple SSDTs (Secondary System
+   Description Table).
+
+   The DSDT and SSDT data is organized in data structures called definition
+   blocks that contain definitions of various objects, including ACPI
+   control methods, encoded in AML (ACPI Machine Language).  The data block
+   of the DSDT along with the contents of SSDTs represents a hierarchical
+   data structure called the ACPI namespace whose topology reflects the
+   structure of the underlying hardware platform.
+
+   The relationships between ACPI System Definition Tables described above
+   are illustrated in the following diagram.
+
+     +---------+    +-------+    +--------+    +------------------------+
+     |  RSDP   | +->| XSDT  | +->|  FADT  |    |  +-------------------+ |
+     +---------+ |  +-------+ |  +--------+  +-|->|       DSDT        | |
+     | Pointer | |  | Entry |-+  | ...... |  | |  +-------------------+ |
+     +---------+ |  +-------+    | X_DSDT |--+ |  | Definition Blocks | |
+     | Pointer |-+  | ..... |    | ...... |    |  +-------------------+ |
+     +---------+    +-------+    +--------+    |  +-------------------+ |
+                    | Entry |------------------|->|       SSDT        | |
+                    +- - - -+                  |  +-------------------| |
+                    | Entry | - - - - - - - -+ |  | Definition Blocks | |
+                    +- - - -+                | |  +-------------------+ |
+                                             | |  +- - - - - - - - - -+ |
+                                             +-|->|       SSDT        | |
+                                               |  +-------------------+ |
+                                               |  | Definition Blocks | |
+                                               |  +- - - - - - - - - -+ |
+                                               +------------------------+
+                                                           |
+                                              OSPM Loading |
+                                                          \|/
+                                                    +----------------+
+                                                    | ACPI Namespace |
+                                                    +----------------+
+
+                     Figure 1. ACPI Definition Blocks
+
+   NOTE: RSDP can also contain a pointer to the RSDT (Root System
+         Description Table).  Platforms provide RSDT to enable
+         compatibility with ACPI 1.0 operating systems.  The OS is expected
+         to use XSDT, if present.
+
+
+2. Example ACPI Namespace
+
+   All definition blocks are loaded into a single namespace.  The namespace
+   is a hierarchy of objects identified by names and paths.
+   The following naming conventions apply to object names in the ACPI
+   namespace:
+   1. All names are 32 bits long.
+   2. The first byte of a name must be one of 'A' - 'Z', '_'.
+   3. Each of the remaining bytes of a name must be one of 'A' - 'Z', '0'
+      - '9', '_'.
+   4. Names starting with '_' are reserved by the ACPI specification.
+   5. The '\' symbol represents the root of the namespace (i.e. names
+      prepended with '\' are relative to the namespace root).
+   6. The '^' symbol represents the parent of the current namespace node
+      (i.e. names prepended with '^' are relative to the parent of the
+      current namespace node).
+
+   The figure below shows an example ACPI namespace.
+
+   +------+
+   | \    |                     Root
+   +------+
+     |
+     | +------+
+     +-| _PR  |                 Scope(_PR): the processor namespace
+     | +------+
+     |   |
+     |   | +------+
+     |   +-| CPU0 |             Processor(CPU0): the first processor
+     |     +------+
+     |
+     | +------+
+     +-| _SB  |                 Scope(_SB): the system bus namespace
+     | +------+
+     |   |
+     |   | +------+
+     |   +-| LID0 |             Device(LID0); the lid device
+     |   | +------+
+     |   |   |
+     |   |   | +------+
+     |   |   +-| _HID |         Name(_HID, "PNP0C0D"): the hardware ID
+     |   |   | +------+
+     |   |   |
+     |   |   | +------+
+     |   |   +-| _STA |         Method(_STA): the status control method
+     |   |     +------+
+     |   |
+     |   | +------+
+     |   +-| PCI0 |             Device(PCI0); the PCI root bridge
+     |     +------+
+     |       |
+     |       | +------+
+     |       +-| _HID |         Name(_HID, "PNP0A08"): the hardware ID
+     |       | +------+
+     |       |
+     |       | +------+
+     |       +-| _CID |         Name(_CID, "PNP0A03"): the compatible ID
+     |       | +------+
+     |       |
+     |       | +------+
+     |       +-| RP03 |         Scope(RP03): the PCI0 power scope
+     |       | +------+
+     |       |   |
+     |       |   | +------+
+     |       |   +-| PXP3 |     PowerResource(PXP3): the PCI0 power resource
+     |       |     +------+
+     |       |
+     |       | +------+
+     |       +-| GFX0 |         Device(GFX0): the graphics adapter
+     |         +------+
+     |           |
+     |           | +------+
+     |           +-| _ADR |     Name(_ADR, 0x00020000): the PCI bus address
+     |           | +------+
+     |           |
+     |           | +------+
+     |           +-| DD01 |     Device(DD01): the LCD output device
+     |             +------+
+     |               |
+     |               | +------+
+     |               +-| _BCL | Method(_BCL): the backlight control method
+     |                 +------+
+     |
+     | +------+
+     +-| _TZ  |                 Scope(_TZ): the thermal zone namespace
+     | +------+
+     |   |
+     |   | +------+
+     |   +-| FN00 |             PowerResource(FN00): the FAN0 power resource
+     |   | +------+
+     |   |
+     |   | +------+
+     |   +-| FAN0 |             Device(FAN0): the FAN0 cooling device
+     |   | +------+
+     |   |   |
+     |   |   | +------+
+     |   |   +-| _HID |         Name(_HID, "PNP0A0B"): the hardware ID
+     |   |     +------+
+     |   |
+     |   | +------+
+     |   +-| TZ00 |             ThermalZone(TZ00); the FAN thermal zone
+     |     +------+
+     |
+     | +------+
+     +-| _GPE |                 Scope(_GPE): the GPE namespace
+       +------+
+
+                     Figure 2. Example ACPI Namespace
+
+
+3. Linux ACPI Device Objects
+
+   The Linux kernel's core ACPI subsystem creates struct acpi_device
+   objects for ACPI namespace objects representing devices, power resources
+   processors, thermal zones.  Those objects are exported to user space via
+   sysfs as directories in the subtree under /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00.  The
+   format of their names is <bus_id:instance>, where 'bus_id' refers to the
+   ACPI namespace representation of the given object and 'instance' is used
+   for distinguishing different object of the same 'bus_id' (it is
+   two-digit decimal representation of an unsigned integer).
+
+   The value of 'bus_id' depends on the type of the object whose name it is
+   part of as listed in the table below.
+
+                +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
+                |   | Object/Feature  | Table | bus_id   |
+                +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
+                | N | Root            | xSDT  | LNXSYSTM |
+                +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
+                | N | Device          | xSDT  | _HID     |
+                +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
+                | N | Processor       | xSDT  | LNXCPU   |
+                +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
+                | N | ThermalZone     | xSDT  | LNXTHERM |
+                +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
+                | N | PowerResource   | xSDT  | LNXPOWER |
+                +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
+                | N | Other Devices   | xSDT  | device   |
+                +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
+                | F | PWR_BUTTON      | FADT  | LNXPWRBN |
+                +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
+                | F | SLP_BUTTON      | FADT  | LNXSLPBN |
+                +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
+                | M | Video Extension | xSDT  | LNXVIDEO |
+                +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
+                | M | ATA Controller  | xSDT  | LNXIOBAY |
+                +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
+                | M | Docking Station | xSDT  | LNXDOCK  |
+                +---+-----------------+-------+----------+
+
+                 Table 1. ACPI Namespace Objects Mapping
+
+   The following rules apply when creating struct acpi_device objects on
+   the basis of the contents of ACPI System Description Tables (as
+   indicated by the letter in the first column and the notation in the
+   second column of the table above):
+   N:
+      The object's source is an ACPI namespace node (as indicated by the
+      named object's type in the second column).  In that case the object's
+      directory in sysfs will contain the 'path' attribute whose value is
+      the full path to the node from the namespace root.
+      struct acpi_device objects are created for the ACPI namespace nodes
+      whose _STA control methods return PRESENT or FUNCTIONING.  The power
+      resource nodes or nodes without _STA are assumed to be both PRESENT
+      and FUNCTIONING.
+   F:
+      The struct acpi_device object is created for a fixed hardware
+      feature (as indicated by the fixed feature flag's name in the second
+      column), so its sysfs directory will not contain the 'path'
+      attribute.
+   M:
+      The struct acpi_device object is created for an ACPI namespace node
+      with specific control methods (as indicated by the ACPI defined
+      device's type in the second column).  The 'path' attribute containing
+      its namespace path will be present in its sysfs directory.  For
+      example, if the _BCL method is present for an ACPI namespace node, a
+      struct acpi_device object with LNXVIDEO 'bus_id' will be created for
+      it.
+
+   The third column of the above table indicates which ACPI System
+   Description Tables contain information used for the creation of the
+   struct acpi_device objects represented by the given row (xSDT means DSDT
+   or SSDT).
+
+   The forth column of the above table indicates the 'bus_id' generation
+   rule of the struct acpi_device object:
+   _HID:
+      _HID in the last column of the table means that the object's bus_id
+      is derived from the _HID/_CID identification objects present under
+      the corresponding ACPI namespace node. The object's sysfs directory
+      will then contain the 'hid' and 'modalias' attributes that can be
+      used to retrieve the _HID and _CIDs of that object.
+   LNXxxxxx:
+      The 'modalias' attribute is also present for struct acpi_device
+      objects having bus_id of the "LNXxxxxx" form (pseudo devices), in
+      which cases it contains the bus_id string itself.
+   device:
+      'device' in the last column of the table indicates that the object's
+      bus_id cannot be determined from _HID/_CID of the corresponding
+      ACPI namespace node, although that object represents a device (for
+      example, it may be a PCI device with _ADR defined and without _HID
+      or _CID).  In that case the string 'device' will be used as the
+      object's bus_id.
+
+
+4. Linux ACPI Physical Device Glue
+
+   ACPI device (i.e. struct acpi_device) objects may be linked to other
+   objects in the Linux' device hierarchy that represent "physical" devices
+   (for example, devices on the PCI bus).  If that happens, it means that
+   the ACPI device object is a "companion" of a device otherwise
+   represented in a different way and is used (1) to provide configuration
+   information on that device which cannot be obtained by other means and
+   (2) to do specific things to the device with the help of its ACPI
+   control methods.  One ACPI device object may be linked this way to
+   multiple "physical" devices.
+
+   If an ACPI device object is linked to a "physical" device, its sysfs
+   directory contains the "physical_node" symbolic link to the sysfs
+   directory of the target device object.  In turn, the target device's
+   sysfs directory will then contain the "firmware_node" symbolic link to
+   the sysfs directory of the companion ACPI device object.
+   The linking mechanism relies on device identification provided by the
+   ACPI namespace.  For example, if there's an ACPI namespace object
+   representing a PCI device (i.e. a device object under an ACPI namespace
+   object representing a PCI bridge) whose _ADR returns 0x00020000 and the
+   bus number of the parent PCI bridge is 0, the sysfs directory
+   representing the struct acpi_device object created for that ACPI
+   namespace object will contain the 'physical_node' symbolic link to the
+   /sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:02:0/ sysfs directory of the
+   corresponding PCI device.
+
+   The linking mechanism is generally bus-specific.  The core of its
+   implementation is located in the drivers/acpi/glue.c file, but there are
+   complementary parts depending on the bus types in question located
+   elsewhere.  For example, the PCI-specific part of it is located in
+   drivers/pci/pci-acpi.c.
+
+
+5. Example Linux ACPI Device Tree
+
+   The sysfs hierarchy of struct acpi_device objects corresponding to the
+   example ACPI namespace illustrated in Figure 2 with the addition of
+   fixed PWR_BUTTON/SLP_BUTTON devices is shown below.
+
+   +--------------+---+-----------------+
+   | LNXSYSTEM:00 | \ | acpi:LNXSYSTEM: |
+   +--------------+---+-----------------+
+     |
+     | +-------------+-----+----------------+
+     +-| LNXPWRBN:00 | N/A | acpi:LNXPWRBN: |
+     | +-------------+-----+----------------+
+     |
+     | +-------------+-----+----------------+
+     +-| LNXSLPBN:00 | N/A | acpi:LNXSLPBN: |
+     | +-------------+-----+----------------+
+     |
+     | +-----------+------------+--------------+
+     +-| LNXCPU:00 | \_PR_.CPU0 | acpi:LNXCPU: |
+     | +-----------+------------+--------------+
+     |
+     | +-------------+-------+----------------+
+     +-| LNXSYBUS:00 | \_SB_ | acpi:LNXSYBUS: |
+     | +-------------+-------+----------------+
+     |   |
+     |   | +- - - - - - - +- - - - - - +- - - - - - - -+
+     |   +-| * PNP0C0D:00 | \_SB_.LID0 | acpi:PNP0C0D: |
+     |   | +- - - - - - - +- - - - - - +- - - - - - - -+
+     |   |
+     |   | +------------+------------+-----------------------+
+     |   +-| PNP0A08:00 | \_SB_.PCI0 | acpi:PNP0A08:PNP0A03: |
+     |     +------------+------------+-----------------------+
+     |       |
+     |       | +-----------+-----------------+-----+
+     |       +-| device:00 | \_SB_.PCI0.RP03 | N/A |
+     |       | +-----------+-----------------+-----+
+     |       |   |
+     |       |   | +-------------+----------------------+----------------+
+     |       |   +-| LNXPOWER:00 | \_SB_.PCI0.RP03.PXP3 | acpi:LNXPOWER: |
+     |       |     +-------------+----------------------+----------------+
+     |       |
+     |       | +-------------+-----------------+----------------+
+     |       +-| LNXVIDEO:00 | \_SB_.PCI0.GFX0 | acpi:LNXVIDEO: |
+     |         +-------------+-----------------+----------------+
+     |           |
+     |           | +-----------+-----------------+-----+
+     |           +-| device:01 | \_SB_.PCI0.DD01 | N/A |
+     |             +-----------+-----------------+-----+
+     |
+     | +-------------+-------+----------------+
+     +-| LNXSYBUS:01 | \_TZ_ | acpi:LNXSYBUS: |
+       +-------------+-------+----------------+
+         |
+         | +-------------+------------+----------------+
+         +-| LNXPOWER:0a | \_TZ_.FN00 | acpi:LNXPOWER: |
+         | +-------------+------------+----------------+
+         |
+         | +------------+------------+---------------+
+         +-| PNP0C0B:00 | \_TZ_.FAN0 | acpi:PNP0C0B: |
+         | +------------+------------+---------------+
+         |
+         | +-------------+------------+----------------+
+         +-| LNXTHERM:00 | \_TZ_.TZ00 | acpi:LNXTHERM: |
+           +-------------+------------+----------------+
+
+                  Figure 3. Example Linux ACPI Device Tree
+
+   NOTE: Each node is represented as "object/path/modalias", where:
+         1. 'object' is the name of the object's directory in sysfs.
+         2. 'path' is the ACPI namespace path of the corresponding
+            ACPI namespace object, as returned by the object's 'path'
+            sysfs attribute.
+         3. 'modalias' is the value of the object's 'modalias' sysfs
+            attribute (as described earlier in this document).
+   NOTE: N/A indicates the device object does not have the 'path' or the
+         'modalias' attribute.
+   NOTE: The PNP0C0D device listed above is highlighted (marked by "*")
+         to indicate it will be created only when its _STA methods return
+         PRESENT or FUNCTIONING.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/scan_handlers.txt b/Documentation/acpi/scan_handlers.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3246ccf15992
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/scan_handlers.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+ACPI Scan Handlers
+
+Copyright (C) 2012, Intel Corporation
+Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com>
+
+During system initialization and ACPI-based device hot-add, the ACPI namespace
+is scanned in search of device objects that generally represent various pieces
+of hardware.  This causes a struct acpi_device object to be created and
+registered with the driver core for every device object in the ACPI namespace
+and the hierarchy of those struct acpi_device objects reflects the namespace
+layout (i.e. parent device objects in the namespace are represented by parent
+struct acpi_device objects and analogously for their children).  Those struct
+acpi_device objects are referred to as "device nodes" in what follows, but they
+should not be confused with struct device_node objects used by the Device Trees
+parsing code (although their role is analogous to the role of those objects).
+
+During ACPI-based device hot-remove device nodes representing pieces of hardware
+being removed are unregistered and deleted.
+
+The core ACPI namespace scanning code in drivers/acpi/scan.c carries out basic
+initialization of device nodes, such as retrieving common configuration
+information from the device objects represented by them and populating them with
+appropriate data, but some of them require additional handling after they have
+been registered.  For example, if the given device node represents a PCI host
+bridge, its registration should cause the PCI bus under that bridge to be
+enumerated and PCI devices on that bus to be registered with the driver core.
+Similarly, if the device node represents a PCI interrupt link, it is necessary
+to configure that link so that the kernel can use it.
+
+Those additional configuration tasks usually depend on the type of the hardware
+component represented by the given device node which can be determined on the
+basis of the device node's hardware ID (HID).  They are performed by objects
+called ACPI scan handlers represented by the following structure:
+
+struct acpi_scan_handler {
+	const struct acpi_device_id *ids;
+	struct list_head list_node;
+	int (*attach)(struct acpi_device *dev, const struct acpi_device_id *id);
+	void (*detach)(struct acpi_device *dev);
+};
+
+where ids is the list of IDs of device nodes the given handler is supposed to
+take care of, list_node is the hook to the global list of ACPI scan handlers
+maintained by the ACPI core and the .attach() and .detach() callbacks are
+executed, respectively, after registration of new device nodes and before
+unregistration of device nodes the handler attached to previously.
+
+The namespace scanning function, acpi_bus_scan(), first registers all of the
+device nodes in the given namespace scope with the driver core.  Then, it tries
+to match a scan handler against each of them using the ids arrays of the
+available scan handlers.  If a matching scan handler is found, its .attach()
+callback is executed for the given device node.  If that callback returns 1,
+that means that the handler has claimed the device node and is now responsible
+for carrying out any additional configuration tasks related to it.  It also will
+be responsible for preparing the device node for unregistration in that case.
+The device node's handler field is then populated with the address of the scan
+handler that has claimed it.
+
+If the .attach() callback returns 0, it means that the device node is not
+interesting to the given scan handler and may be matched against the next scan
+handler in the list.  If it returns a (negative) error code, that means that
+the namespace scan should be terminated due to a serious error.  The error code
+returned should then reflect the type of the error.
+
+The namespace trimming function, acpi_bus_trim(), first executes .detach()
+callbacks from the scan handlers of all device nodes in the given namespace
+scope (if they have scan handlers).  Next, it unregisters all of the device
+nodes in that scope.
+
+ACPI scan handlers can be added to the list maintained by the ACPI core with the
+help of the acpi_scan_add_handler() function taking a pointer to the new scan
+handler as an argument.  The order in which scan handlers are added to the list
+is the order in which they are matched against device nodes during namespace
+scans.
+
+All scan handles must be added to the list before acpi_bus_scan() is run for the
+first time and they cannot be removed from it.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/video_extension.txt b/Documentation/acpi/video_extension.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..78b32ac02466
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/video_extension.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+ACPI video extensions
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+This driver implement the ACPI Extensions For Display Adapters for
+integrated graphics devices on motherboard, as specified in ACPI 2.0
+Specification, Appendix B, allowing to perform some basic control like
+defining the video POST device, retrieving EDID information or to
+setup a video output, etc.  Note that this is an ref. implementation
+only.  It may or may not work for your integrated video device.
+
+The ACPI video driver does 3 things regarding backlight control:
+
+1 Export a sysfs interface for user space to control backlight level
+
+If the ACPI table has a video device, and acpi_backlight=vendor kernel
+command line is not present, the driver will register a backlight device
+and set the required backlight operation structure for it for the sysfs
+interface control. For every registered class device, there will be a
+directory named acpi_videoX under /sys/class/backlight.
+
+The backlight sysfs interface has a standard definition here:
+Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-backlight.
+
+And what ACPI video driver does is:
+actual_brightness: on read, control method _BQC will be evaluated to
+get the brightness level the firmware thinks it is at;
+bl_power: not implemented, will set the current brightness instead;
+brightness: on write, control method _BCM will run to set the requested
+brightness level;
+max_brightness: Derived from the _BCL package(see below);
+type: firmware
+
+Note that ACPI video backlight driver will always use index for
+brightness, actual_brightness and max_brightness. So if we have
+the following _BCL package:
+
+Method (_BCL, 0, NotSerialized)
+{
+	Return (Package (0x0C)
+	{
+		0x64,
+		0x32,
+		0x0A,
+		0x14,
+		0x1E,
+		0x28,
+		0x32,
+		0x3C,
+		0x46,
+		0x50,
+		0x5A,
+		0x64
+	})
+}
+
+The first two levels are for when laptop are on AC or on battery and are
+not used by Linux currently. The remaining 10 levels are supported levels
+that we can choose from. The applicable index values are from 0 (that
+corresponds to the 0x0A brightness value) to 9 (that corresponds to the
+0x64 brightness value) inclusive. Each of those index values is regarded
+as a "brightness level" indicator. Thus from the user space perspective
+the range of available brightness levels is from 0 to 9 (max_brightness)
+inclusive.
+
+2 Notify user space about hotkey event
+
+There are generally two cases for hotkey event reporting:
+i) For some laptops, when user presses the hotkey, a scancode will be
+   generated and sent to user space through the input device created by
+   the keyboard driver as a key type input event, with proper remap, the
+   following key code will appear to user space:
+
+	EV_KEY, KEY_BRIGHTNESSUP
+	EV_KEY, KEY_BRIGHTNESSDOWN
+	etc.
+
+For this case, ACPI video driver does not need to do anything(actually,
+it doesn't even know this happened).
+
+ii) For some laptops, the press of the hotkey will not generate the
+    scancode, instead, firmware will notify the video device ACPI node
+    about the event. The event value is defined in the ACPI spec. ACPI
+    video driver will generate an key type input event according to the
+    notify value it received and send the event to user space through the
+    input device it created:
+
+	event		keycode
+	0x86		KEY_BRIGHTNESSUP
+	0x87		KEY_BRIGHTNESSDOWN
+	etc.
+
+so this would lead to the same effect as case i) now.
+
+Once user space tool receives this event, it can modify the backlight
+level through the sysfs interface.
+
+3 Change backlight level in the kernel
+
+This works for machines covered by case ii) in Section 2. Once the driver
+received a notification, it will set the backlight level accordingly. This does
+not affect the sending of event to user space, they are always sent to user
+space regardless of whether or not the video module controls the backlight level
+directly. This behaviour can be controlled through the brightness_switch_enabled
+module parameter as documented in kernel-parameters.txt. It is recommended to
+disable this behaviour once a GUI environment starts up and wants to have full
+control of the backlight level.
diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt b/Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt
index b5aada9f20cc..c71487d399d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt
+++ b/Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,16 @@
-The EtherDrive (R) HOWTO for users of 2.6 kernels is found at ...
+ATA over Ethernet is a network protocol that provides simple access to
+block storage on the LAN.
 
-  http://www.coraid.com/SUPPORT/EtherDrive-HBA  
+  http://support.coraid.com/documents/AoEr11.txt
 
-  It has many tips and hints!
+The EtherDrive (R) HOWTO for 2.6 and 3.x kernels is found at ...
+
+  http://support.coraid.com/support/linux/EtherDrive-2.6-HOWTO.html
+
+It has many tips and hints!  Please see, especially, recommended
+tunings for virtual memory:
+
+  http://support.coraid.com/support/linux/EtherDrive-2.6-HOWTO-5.html#ss5.19
 
 The aoetools are userland programs that are designed to work with this
 driver.  The aoetools are on sourceforge.
@@ -23,20 +31,12 @@ CREATING DEVICE NODES
   There is a udev-install.sh script that shows how to install these
   rules on your system.
 
-  If you are not using udev, two scripts are provided in
-  Documentation/aoe as examples of static device node creation for
-  using the aoe driver.
-
-    rm -rf /dev/etherd
-    sh Documentation/aoe/mkdevs.sh /dev/etherd
-
-  ... or to make just one shelf's worth of block device nodes ...
-
-    sh Documentation/aoe/mkshelf.sh /dev/etherd 0
-
   There is also an autoload script that shows how to edit
-  /etc/modprobe.conf to ensure that the aoe module is loaded when
-  necessary.
+  /etc/modprobe.d/aoe.conf to ensure that the aoe module is loaded when
+  necessary.  Preloading the aoe module is preferable to autoloading,
+  however, because AoE discovery takes a few seconds.  It can be
+  confusing when an AoE device is not present the first time the a
+  command is run but appears a second later.
 
 USING DEVICE NODES
 
@@ -51,9 +51,9 @@ USING DEVICE NODES
   "echo > /dev/etherd/discover" tells the driver to find out what AoE
   devices are available.
 
-  These character devices may disappear and be replaced by sysfs
-  counterparts.  Using the commands in aoetools insulates users from
-  these implementation details.
+  In the future these character devices may disappear and be replaced
+  by sysfs counterparts.  Using the commands in aoetools insulates
+  users from these implementation details.
 
   The block devices are named like this:
 
@@ -76,8 +76,8 @@ USING SYSFS
   The netif attribute is the network interface on the localhost
   through which we are communicating with the remote AoE device.
 
-  There is a script in this directory that formats this information
-  in a convenient way.  Users with aoetools can use the aoe-stat
+  There is a script in this directory that formats this information in
+  a convenient way.  Users with aoetools should use the aoe-stat
   command.
 
   root@makki root# sh Documentation/aoe/status.sh 
@@ -121,3 +121,23 @@ DRIVER OPTIONS
   usage example for the module parameter.
 
     modprobe aoe_iflist="eth1 eth3"
+
+  The aoe_deadsecs module parameter determines the maximum number of
+  seconds that the driver will wait for an AoE device to provide a
+  response to an AoE command.  After aoe_deadsecs seconds have
+  elapsed, the AoE device will be marked as "down".  A value of zero
+  is supported for testing purposes and makes the aoe driver keep
+  trying AoE commands forever.
+
+  The aoe_maxout module parameter has a default of 128.  This is the
+  maximum number of unresponded packets that will be sent to an AoE
+  target at one time.
+
+  The aoe_dyndevs module parameter defaults to 1, meaning that the
+  driver will assign a block device minor number to a discovered AoE
+  target based on the order of its discovery.  With dynamic minor
+  device numbers in use, a greater range of AoE shelf and slot
+  addresses can be supported.  Users with udev will never have to
+  think about minor numbers.  Using aoe_dyndevs=0 allows device nodes
+  to be pre-created using a static minor-number scheme with the
+  aoe-mkshelf script in the aoetools.
diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/autoload.sh b/Documentation/aoe/autoload.sh
index 78dad1334c6f..815dff4691c9 100644
--- a/Documentation/aoe/autoload.sh
+++ b/Documentation/aoe/autoload.sh
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 #!/bin/sh
 # set aoe to autoload by installing the
-# aliases in /etc/modprobe.conf
+# aliases in /etc/modprobe.d/
 
-f=/etc/modprobe.conf
+f=/etc/modprobe.d/aoe.conf
 
 if test ! -r $f || test ! -w $f; then
 	echo "cannot configure $f for module autoloading" 1>&2
diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/mkdevs.sh b/Documentation/aoe/mkdevs.sh
deleted file mode 100644
index 44c0ab702432..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/aoe/mkdevs.sh
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-#!/bin/sh
-
-n_shelves=${n_shelves:-10}
-n_partitions=${n_partitions:-16}
-
-if test "$#" != "1"; then
-	echo "Usage: sh `basename $0` {dir}" 1>&2
-	echo "       n_partitions=16 sh `basename $0` {dir}" 1>&2
-	exit 1
-fi
-dir=$1
-
-MAJOR=152
-
-echo "Creating AoE devnode files in $dir ..."
-
-set -e
-
-mkdir -p $dir
-
-# (Status info is in sysfs.  See status.sh.)
-# rm -f $dir/stat
-# mknod -m 0400 $dir/stat c $MAJOR 1
-rm -f $dir/err
-mknod -m 0400 $dir/err c $MAJOR 2
-rm -f $dir/discover
-mknod -m 0200 $dir/discover c $MAJOR 3
-rm -f $dir/interfaces
-mknod -m 0200 $dir/interfaces c $MAJOR 4
-rm -f $dir/revalidate
-mknod -m 0200 $dir/revalidate c $MAJOR 5
-rm -f $dir/flush
-mknod -m 0200 $dir/flush c $MAJOR 6
-
-export n_partitions
-mkshelf=`echo $0 | sed 's!mkdevs!mkshelf!'`
-i=0
-while test $i -lt $n_shelves; do
-	sh -xc "sh $mkshelf $dir $i"
-	i=`expr $i + 1`
-done
diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/mkshelf.sh b/Documentation/aoe/mkshelf.sh
deleted file mode 100644
index 32615814271c..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/aoe/mkshelf.sh
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-#! /bin/sh
-
-if test "$#" != "2"; then
-	echo "Usage: sh `basename $0` {dir} {shelfaddress}" 1>&2
-	echo "       n_partitions=16 sh `basename $0` {dir} {shelfaddress}" 1>&2
-	exit 1
-fi
-n_partitions=${n_partitions:-16}
-dir=$1
-shelf=$2
-nslots=16
-maxslot=`echo $nslots 1 - p | dc`
-MAJOR=152
-
-set -e
-
-minor=`echo $nslots \* $shelf \* $n_partitions | bc`
-endp=`echo $n_partitions - 1 | bc`
-for slot in `seq 0 $maxslot`; do
-	for part in `seq 0 $endp`; do
-		name=e$shelf.$slot
-		test "$part" != "0" && name=${name}p$part
-		rm -f $dir/$name
-		mknod -m 0660 $dir/$name b $MAJOR $minor
-
-		minor=`expr $minor + 1`
-	done
-done
diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/status.sh b/Documentation/aoe/status.sh
index 751f3be514b8..eeec7baae57a 100644
--- a/Documentation/aoe/status.sh
+++ b/Documentation/aoe/status.sh
@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
 #! /bin/sh
 # collate and present sysfs information about AoE storage
+#
+# A more complete version of this script is aoe-stat, in the
+# aoetools.
 
 set -e
 format="%8s\t%8s\t%8s\n"
diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt b/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt
index 8686e789542e..1f06daf03f5b 100644
--- a/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt
+++ b/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt
@@ -23,4 +23,4 @@ SUBSYSTEM=="aoe", KERNEL=="revalidate",	NAME="etherd/%k", GROUP="disk", MODE="02
 SUBSYSTEM=="aoe", KERNEL=="flush",	NAME="etherd/%k", GROUP="disk", MODE="0220"
 
 # aoe block devices     
-KERNEL=="etherd*",       NAME="%k", GROUP="disk"
+KERNEL=="etherd*",       GROUP="disk"
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX b/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX
index 91c24a1e8a9e..36420e116c90 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX
@@ -4,8 +4,6 @@ Booting
 	- requirements for booting
 Interrupts
 	- ARM Interrupt subsystem documentation
-IXP2000
-	- Release Notes for Linux on Intel's IXP2000 Network Processor
 msm
 	- MSM specific documentation
 Netwinder
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Booting b/Documentation/arm/Booting
index a341d87d276e..371814a36719 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Booting
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Booting
@@ -18,7 +18,8 @@ following:
 2. Initialise one serial port.
 3. Detect the machine type.
 4. Setup the kernel tagged list.
-5. Call the kernel image.
+5. Load initramfs.
+6. Call the kernel image.
 
 
 1. Setup and initialise RAM
@@ -120,12 +121,27 @@ tagged list.
 The boot loader must pass at a minimum the size and location of the
 system memory, and the root filesystem location.  The dtb must be
 placed in a region of memory where the kernel decompressor will not
-overwrite it.  The recommended placement is in the first 16KiB of RAM
-with the caveat that it may not be located at physical address 0 since
-the kernel interprets a value of 0 in r2 to mean neither a tagged list
-nor a dtb were passed.
+overwrite it, whilst remaining within the region which will be covered
+by the kernel's low-memory mapping.
 
-5. Calling the kernel image
+A safe location is just above the 128MiB boundary from start of RAM.
+
+5. Load initramfs.
+------------------
+
+Existing boot loaders:		OPTIONAL
+New boot loaders:		OPTIONAL
+
+If an initramfs is in use then, as with the dtb, it must be placed in
+a region of memory where the kernel decompressor will not overwrite it
+while also with the region which will be covered by the kernel's
+low-memory mapping.
+
+A safe location is just above the device tree blob which itself will
+be loaded just above the 128MiB boundary from the start of RAM as
+recommended above.
+
+6. Calling the kernel image
 ---------------------------
 
 Existing boot loaders:		MANDATORY
@@ -136,11 +152,17 @@ is stored in flash, and is linked correctly to be run from flash,
 then it is legal for the boot loader to call the zImage in flash
 directly.
 
-The zImage may also be placed in system RAM (at any location) and
-called there.  Note that the kernel uses 16K of RAM below the image
-to store page tables.  The recommended placement is 32KiB into RAM.
+The zImage may also be placed in system RAM and called there.  The
+kernel should be placed in the first 128MiB of RAM.  It is recommended
+that it is loaded above 32MiB in order to avoid the need to relocate
+prior to decompression, which will make the boot process slightly
+faster.
+
+When booting a raw (non-zImage) kernel the constraints are tighter.
+In this case the kernel must be loaded at an offset into system equal
+to TEXT_OFFSET - PAGE_OFFSET.
 
-In either case, the following conditions must be met:
+In any case, the following conditions must be met:
 
 - Quiesce all DMA capable devices so that memory does not get
   corrupted by bogus network packets or disk data. This will save
@@ -154,13 +176,33 @@ In either case, the following conditions must be met:
 
 - CPU mode
   All forms of interrupts must be disabled (IRQs and FIQs)
-  The CPU must be in SVC mode.  (A special exception exists for Angel)
+
+  For CPUs which do not include the ARM virtualization extensions, the
+  CPU must be in SVC mode.  (A special exception exists for Angel)
+
+  CPUs which include support for the virtualization extensions can be
+  entered in HYP mode in order to enable the kernel to make full use of
+  these extensions.  This is the recommended boot method for such CPUs,
+  unless the virtualisations are already in use by a pre-installed
+  hypervisor.
+
+  If the kernel is not entered in HYP mode for any reason, it must be
+  entered in SVC mode.
 
 - Caches, MMUs
   The MMU must be off.
   Instruction cache may be on or off.
   Data cache must be off.
 
+  If the kernel is entered in HYP mode, the above requirements apply to
+  the HYP mode configuration in addition to the ordinary PL1 (privileged
+  kernel modes) configuration.  In addition, all traps into the
+  hypervisor must be disabled, and PL1 access must be granted for all
+  peripherals and CPU resources for which this is architecturally
+  possible.  Except for entering in HYP mode, the system configuration
+  should be such that a kernel which does not include support for the
+  virtualization extensions can boot correctly without extra help.
+
 - The boot loader is expected to call the kernel image by jumping
   directly to the first instruction of the kernel image.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/IXP2000 b/Documentation/arm/IXP2000
deleted file mode 100644
index 68d21d92a30b..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/IXP2000
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Release Notes for Linux on Intel's IXP2000 Network Processor
-
-Maintained by Deepak Saxena <dsaxena@plexity.net>
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-1. Overview
-
-Intel's IXP2000 family of NPUs (IXP2400, IXP2800, IXP2850) is designed
-for high-performance network applications such high-availability
-telecom systems. In addition to an XScale core, it contains up to 8
-"MicroEngines" that run special code, several high-end networking 
-interfaces (UTOPIA, SPI, etc), a PCI host bridge, one serial port,
-flash interface, and some other odds and ends. For more information, see:
-
-http://developer.intel.com
-
-2. Linux Support
-
-Linux currently supports the following features on the IXP2000 NPUs:
-
-- On-chip serial
-- PCI
-- Flash (MTD/JFFS2)
-- I2C through GPIO
-- Timers (watchdog, OS)
-
-That is about all we can support under Linux ATM b/c the core networking
-components of the chip are accessed via Intel's closed source SDK. 
-Please contact Intel directly on issues with using those. There is
-also a mailing list run by some folks at Princeton University that might
-be of help:  https://lists.cs.princeton.edu/mailman/listinfo/ixp2xxx
-
-WHATEVER YOU DO, DO NOT POST EMAIL TO THE LINUX-ARM OR LINUX-ARM-KERNEL
-MAILING LISTS REGARDING THE INTEL SDK.
-
-3. Supported Platforms
-
-- Intel IXDP2400 Reference Platform
-- Intel IXDP2800 Reference Platform
-- Intel IXDP2401 Reference Platform
-- Intel IXDP2801 Reference Platform
-- RadiSys ENP-2611
-
-4. Usage Notes
-
-- The IXP2000 platforms usually have rather complex PCI bus topologies
-  with large memory space requirements. In addition, b/c of the way the
-  Intel SDK is designed, devices are enumerated in a very specific
-  way. B/c of this this, we use "pci=firmware" option in the kernel
-  command line so that we do not re-enumerate the bus.
-
-- IXDP2x01 systems have variable clock tick rates that we cannot determine 
-  via HW registers. The "ixdp2x01_clk=XXX" cmd line options allow you
-  to pass the clock rate to the board port.
-
-5. Thanks
-
-The IXP2000 work has been funded by Intel Corp. and MontaVista Software, Inc.
-
-The following people have contributed patches/comments/etc:
-
-Naeem F. Afzal
-Lennert Buytenhek
-Jeffrey Daly
-
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Last Update: 8/09/2004
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
index 7b9351f2f555..e48b74de6ac0 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
+++ b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Linux currently supports the following features on the IXP4xx chips:
 - Timers (watchdog, OS)
 
 The following components of the chips are not supported by Linux and
-require the use of Intel's proprietary CSR softare:
+require the use of Intel's proprietary CSR software:
 
 - USB device interface
 - Network interfaces (HSS, Utopia, NPEs, etc)
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README b/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8f08a86e03b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README
@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
+ARM Marvell SoCs
+================
+
+This document lists all the ARM Marvell SoCs that are currently
+supported in mainline by the Linux kernel. As the Marvell families of
+SoCs are large and complex, it is hard to understand where the support
+for a particular SoC is available in the Linux kernel. This document
+tries to help in understanding where those SoCs are supported, and to
+match them with their corresponding public datasheet, when available.
+
+Orion family
+------------
+
+  Flavors:
+        88F5082
+        88F5181
+        88F5181L
+        88F5182
+               Datasheet               : http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-datasheet.pdf
+               Programmer's User Guide : http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-opensource-manual.pdf
+               User Manual             : http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-usermanual.pdf
+        88F5281
+               Datasheet               : http://www.ocmodshop.com/images/reviews/networking/qnap_ts409u/marvel_88f5281_data_sheet.pdf
+        88F6183
+  Core: Feroceon ARMv5 compatible
+  Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-orion5x
+  Linux kernel plat directory: arch/arm/plat-orion
+
+Kirkwood family
+---------------
+
+  Flavors:
+        88F6282 a.k.a Armada 300
+                Product Brief  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/armada_310.pdf
+        88F6283 a.k.a Armada 310
+                Product Brief  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/armada_310.pdf
+        88F6190
+                Product Brief  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6190-003_WEB.pdf
+                Hardware Spec  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F619x_OpenSource.pdf
+                Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
+        88F6192
+                Product Brief  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6192-003_ver1.pdf
+                Hardware Spec  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F619x_OpenSource.pdf
+                Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
+        88F6182
+        88F6180
+                Product Brief  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6180-003_ver1.pdf
+                Hardware Spec  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F6180_OpenSource.pdf
+                Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
+        88F6281
+                Product Brief  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6281-004_ver1.pdf
+                Hardware Spec  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F6281_OpenSource.pdf
+                Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
+  Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/
+  Core: Feroceon ARMv5 compatible
+  Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-kirkwood
+  Linux kernel plat directory: arch/arm/plat-orion
+
+Discovery family
+----------------
+
+  Flavors:
+        MV78100
+                Product Brief  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/MV78100-003_WEB.pdf
+                Hardware Spec  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/HW_MV78100_OpenSource.pdf
+                Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/FS_MV76100_78100_78200_OpenSource.pdf
+        MV78200
+                Product Brief  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/MV78200-002_WEB.pdf
+                Hardware Spec  : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/HW_MV78200_OpenSource.pdf
+                Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/FS_MV76100_78100_78200_OpenSource.pdf
+        MV76100
+                Not supported by the Linux kernel.
+
+  Core: Feroceon ARMv5 compatible
+
+  Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-mv78xx0
+  Linux kernel plat directory: arch/arm/plat-orion
+
+EBU Armada family
+-----------------
+
+  Armada 370 Flavors:
+        88F6710
+        88F6707
+        88F6W11
+
+  Armada XP Flavors:
+        MV78230
+        MV78260
+        MV78460
+
+  Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/Marvell-ArmadaXP-SoC-product%20brief.pdf
+  No public datasheet available.
+
+  Core: Sheeva ARMv7 compatible
+
+  Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-mvebu
+  Linux kernel plat directory: none
+
+Avanta family
+-------------
+
+  Flavors:
+       88F6510
+       88F6530P
+       88F6550
+       88F6560
+  Homepage     : http://www.marvell.com/broadband/
+  Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/broadband/assets/Marvell_Avanta_88F6510_305_060-001_product_brief.pdf
+  No public datasheet available.
+
+  Core: ARMv5 compatible
+
+  Linux kernel mach directory: no code in mainline yet, planned for the future
+  Linux kernel plat directory: no code in mainline yet, planned for the future
+
+Dove family (application processor)
+-----------------------------------
+
+  Flavors:
+        88AP510 a.k.a Armada 510
+                Product Brief   : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Marvell_Armada510_SoC.pdf
+                Hardware Spec   : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Armada-510-Hardware-Spec.pdf
+                Functional Spec : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Armada-510-Functional-Spec.pdf
+  Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/
+  Core: ARMv7 compatible
+  Directory: arch/arm/mach-dove
+
+PXA 2xx/3xx/93x/95x family
+--------------------------
+
+  Flavors:
+        PXA21x, PXA25x, PXA26x
+             Application processor only
+             Core: ARMv5 XScale core
+        PXA270, PXA271, PXA272
+             Product Brief         : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_pb.pdf
+             Design guide          : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_design_guide.pdf
+             Developers manual     : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_dev_man.pdf
+             Specification         : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_emts.pdf
+             Specification update  : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_spec_update.pdf
+             Application processor only
+             Core: ARMv5 XScale core
+        PXA300, PXA310, PXA320
+             PXA 300 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA300_PB_R4.pdf
+             PXA 310 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA310_PB_R4.pdf
+             PXA 320 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA320_PB_R4.pdf
+             Design guide          : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Design_Guide.pdf
+             Developers manual     : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Developers_Manual.zip
+             Specifications        : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_EMTS.pdf
+             Specification Update  : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Spec_Update.zip
+             Reference Manual      : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_TavorP_BootROM_Ref_Manual.pdf
+             Application processor only
+             Core: ARMv5 XScale core
+        PXA930, PXA935
+             Application processor with Communication processor
+             Core: ARMv5 XScale core
+        PXA955
+             Application processor with Communication processor
+             Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 core
+
+   Comments:
+
+    * This line of SoCs originates from the XScale family developed by
+      Intel and acquired by Marvell in ~2006. The PXA21x, PXA25x,
+      PXA26x, PXA27x, PXA3xx and PXA93x were developed by Intel, while
+      the later PXA95x were developed by Marvell.
+
+    * Due to their XScale origin, these SoCs have virtually nothing in
+      common with the other (Kirkwood, Dove, etc.) families of Marvell
+      SoCs, except with the MMP/MMP2 family of SoCs.
+
+   Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-pxa
+   Linux kernel plat directory: arch/arm/plat-pxa
+
+MMP/MMP2 family (communication processor)
+-----------------------------------------
+
+   Flavors:
+        PXA168, a.k.a Armada 168
+             Homepage             : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/armada-168.jsp
+             Product brief        : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/pxa_168_pb.pdf
+             Hardware manual      : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_datasheet.pdf
+             Software manual      : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_software_manual.pdf
+             Specification update : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/ARMADA16x_Spec_update.pdf
+             Boot ROM manual      : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_ref_manual.pdf
+             App node package     : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_app_note_package.pdf
+             Application processor only
+             Core: ARMv5 compatible Marvell PJ1 (Mohawk)
+        PXA910
+             Homepage             : http://www.marvell.com/communication-processors/pxa910/
+             Product Brief        : http://www.marvell.com/communication-processors/pxa910/assets/Marvell_PXA910_Platform-001_PB_final.pdf
+             Application processor with Communication processor
+             Core: ARMv5 compatible Marvell PJ1 (Mohawk)
+        MMP2, a.k.a Armada 610
+             Product Brief        : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-600/assets/armada610_pb.pdf
+             Application processor only
+             Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 core
+
+   Comments:
+
+    * This line of SoCs originates from the XScale family developed by
+      Intel and acquired by Marvell in ~2006. All the processors of
+      this MMP/MMP2 family were developed by Marvell.
+
+    * Due to their XScale origin, these SoCs have virtually nothing in
+      common with the other (Kirkwood, Dove, etc.) families of Marvell
+      SoCs, except with the PXA family of SoCs listed above.
+
+   Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-mmp
+   Linux kernel plat directory: arch/arm/plat-pxa
+
+Long-term plans
+---------------
+
+ * Unify the mach-dove/, mach-mv78xx0/, mach-orion5x/ and
+   mach-kirkwood/ into the mach-mvebu/ to support all SoCs from the
+   Marvell EBU (Engineering Business Unit) in a single mach-<foo>
+   directory. The plat-orion/ would therefore disappear.
+
+ * Unify the mach-mmp/ and mach-pxa/ into the same mach-pxa
+   directory. The plat-pxa/ would therefore disappear.
+
+Credits
+-------
+
+ Maen Suleiman <maen@marvell.com>
+ Lior Amsalem <alior@marvell.com>
+ Thomas Petazzoni <thomas.petazzoni@free-electrons.com>
+ Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch>
+ Nicolas Pitre <nico@fluxnic.net>
+ Eric Miao <eric.y.miao@gmail.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS
index 888ae7b83ae4..4484e021290e 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS
+++ b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS
@@ -47,6 +47,51 @@ flexible way to enable non-common multi-display configuration. In addition to
 modelling the hardware overlays, omapdss supports virtual overlays and overlay
 managers. These can be used when updating a display with CPU or system DMA.
 
+omapdss driver support for audio
+--------------------------------
+There exist several display technologies and standards that support audio as
+well. Hence, it is relevant to update the DSS device driver to provide an audio
+interface that may be used by an audio driver or any other driver interested in
+the functionality.
+
+The audio_enable function is intended to prepare the relevant
+IP for playback (e.g., enabling an audio FIFO, taking in/out of reset
+some IP, enabling companion chips, etc). It is intended to be called before
+audio_start. The audio_disable function performs the reverse operation and is
+intended to be called after audio_stop.
+
+While a given DSS device driver may support audio, it is possible that for
+certain configurations audio is not supported (e.g., an HDMI display using a
+VESA video timing). The audio_supported function is intended to query whether
+the current configuration of the display supports audio.
+
+The audio_config function is intended to configure all the relevant audio
+parameters of the display. In order to make the function independent of any
+specific DSS device driver, a struct omap_dss_audio is defined. Its purpose
+is to contain all the required parameters for audio configuration. At the
+moment, such structure contains pointers to IEC-60958 channel status word
+and CEA-861 audio infoframe structures. This should be enough to support
+HDMI and DisplayPort, as both are based on CEA-861 and IEC-60958.
+
+The audio_enable/disable, audio_config and audio_supported functions could be
+implemented as functions that may sleep. Hence, they should not be called
+while holding a spinlock or a readlock.
+
+The audio_start/audio_stop function is intended to effectively start/stop audio
+playback after the configuration has taken place. These functions are designed
+to be used in an atomic context. Hence, audio_start should return quickly and be
+called only after all the needed resources for audio playback (audio FIFOs,
+DMA channels, companion chips, etc) have been enabled to begin data transfers.
+audio_stop is designed to only stop the audio transfers. The resources used
+for playback are released using audio_disable.
+
+The enum omap_dss_audio_state may be used to help the implementations of
+the interface to keep track of the audio state. The initial state is _DISABLED;
+then, the state transitions to _CONFIGURED, and then, when it is ready to
+play audio, to _ENABLED. The state _PLAYING is used when the audio is being
+rendered.
+
+
 Panel and controller drivers
 ----------------------------
 
@@ -156,6 +201,7 @@ timings		Display timings (pixclock,xres/hfp/hbp/hsw,yres/vfp/vbp/vsw)
 		"pal" and "ntsc"
 panel_name
 tear_elim	Tearing elimination 0=off, 1=on
+output_type	Output type (video encoder only): "composite" or "svideo"
 
 There are also some debugfs files at <debugfs>/omapdss/ which show information
 about clocks and registers.
@@ -239,7 +285,10 @@ FB0 +-- GFX  ---- LCD ---- LCD
 Misc notes
 ----------
 
-OMAP FB allocates the framebuffer memory using the OMAP VRAM allocator.
+OMAP FB allocates the framebuffer memory using the standard dma allocator. You
+can enable Contiguous Memory Allocator (CONFIG_CMA) to improve the dma
+allocator, and if CMA is enabled, you use "cma=" kernel parameter to increase
+the global memory area for CMA.
 
 Using DSI DPLL to generate pixel clock it is possible produce the pixel clock
 of 86.5MHz (max possible), and with that you get 1280x1024@57 output from DVI.
@@ -255,11 +304,6 @@ framebuffer parameters.
 Kernel boot arguments
 ---------------------
 
-vram=<size>[,<physaddr>]
-	- Amount of total VRAM to preallocate and optionally a physical start
-	  memory address. For example, "10M". omapfb allocates memory for
-	  framebuffers from VRAM.
-
 omapfb.mode=<display>:<mode>[,...]
 	- Default video mode for specified displays. For example,
 	  "dvi:800x400MR-24@60".  See drivers/video/modedb.c.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm
index 9012bb039094..4ae915a9f899 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm
+++ b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ to NULL.  Drivers should use the following idiom:
 The most common usage of these functions will probably be to specify
 the maximum time from when an interrupt occurs, to when the device
 becomes accessible.  To accomplish this, driver writers should use the
-set_max_mpu_wakeup_lat() function to to constrain the MPU wakeup
+set_max_mpu_wakeup_lat() function to constrain the MPU wakeup
 latency, and the set_max_dev_wakeup_lat() function to constrain the
 device wakeup latency (from clk_enable() to accessibility).  For
 example,
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt
index 253a35c6f782..65610bf52ebf 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt
@@ -8,53 +8,56 @@ Introduction
   weblink : http://www.st.com/spear
 
   The ST Microelectronics SPEAr range of ARM9/CortexA9 System-on-Chip CPUs are
-  supported by the 'spear' platform of ARM Linux. Currently SPEAr300,
-  SPEAr310, SPEAr320 and SPEAr600 SOCs are supported. Support for the SPEAr13XX
-  series is in progress.
+  supported by the 'spear' platform of ARM Linux. Currently SPEAr1310,
+  SPEAr1340, SPEAr300, SPEAr310, SPEAr320 and SPEAr600 SOCs are supported.
 
   Hierarchy in SPEAr is as follows:
 
   SPEAr (Platform)
 	- SPEAr3XX (3XX SOC series, based on ARM9)
 		- SPEAr300 (SOC)
-			- SPEAr300_EVB (Evaluation Board)
+			- SPEAr300 Evaluation Board
 		- SPEAr310 (SOC)
-			- SPEAr310_EVB (Evaluation Board)
+			- SPEAr310 Evaluation Board
 		- SPEAr320 (SOC)
-			- SPEAr320_EVB (Evaluation Board)
+			- SPEAr320 Evaluation Board
 	- SPEAr6XX (6XX SOC series, based on ARM9)
 		- SPEAr600 (SOC)
-			- SPEAr600_EVB (Evaluation Board)
+			- SPEAr600 Evaluation Board
 	- SPEAr13XX (13XX SOC series, based on ARM CORTEXA9)
-		- SPEAr1300 (SOC)
+		- SPEAr1310 (SOC)
+			- SPEAr1310 Evaluation Board
+		- SPEAr1340 (SOC)
+			- SPEAr1340 Evaluation Board
 
   Configuration
   -------------
 
   A generic configuration is provided for each machine, and can be used as the
   default by
-	make spear600_defconfig
-	make spear300_defconfig
-	make spear310_defconfig
-	make spear320_defconfig
+	make spear13xx_defconfig
+	make spear3xx_defconfig
+	make spear6xx_defconfig
 
   Layout
   ------
 
-  The common files for multiple machine families (SPEAr3XX, SPEAr6XX and
-  SPEAr13XX) are located in the platform code contained in arch/arm/plat-spear
+  The common files for multiple machine families (SPEAr3xx, SPEAr6xx and
+  SPEAr13xx) are located in the platform code contained in arch/arm/plat-spear
   with headers in plat/.
 
   Each machine series have a directory with name arch/arm/mach-spear followed by
   series name. Like mach-spear3xx, mach-spear6xx and mach-spear13xx.
 
-  Common file for machines of spear3xx family is mach-spear3xx/spear3xx.c and for
-  spear6xx is mach-spear6xx/spear6xx.c. mach-spear* also contain soc/machine
-  specific files, like spear300.c, spear310.c, spear320.c and spear600.c.
-  mach-spear* also contains board specific files for each machine type.
+  Common file for machines of spear3xx family is mach-spear3xx/spear3xx.c, for
+  spear6xx is mach-spear6xx/spear6xx.c and for spear13xx family is
+  mach-spear13xx/spear13xx.c. mach-spear* also contain soc/machine specific
+  files, like spear1310.c, spear1340.c spear300.c, spear310.c, spear320.c and
+  spear600.c.  mach-spear* doesn't contains board specific files as they fully
+  support Flattened Device Tree.
 
 
   Document Author
   ---------------
 
-  Viresh Kumar, (c) 2010 ST Microelectronics
+  Viresh Kumar <viresh.linux@gmail.com>, (c) 2010-2012 ST Microelectronics
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
index 816d6071669e..8b46c79679c4 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-			S3C2410 GPIO Control
+			S3C24XX GPIO Control
 			====================
 
 Introduction
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Introduction
   of the s3c2410 GPIO system, please read the Samsung provided
   data-sheet/users manual to find out the complete list.
 
-  See Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt for the core implemetation.
+  See Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt for the core implementation.
 
 
 GPIOLIB
@@ -41,8 +41,8 @@ GPIOLIB
 GPIOLIB conversion
 ------------------
 
-If you need to convert your board or driver to use gpiolib from the exiting
-s3c2410 api, then here are some notes on the process.
+If you need to convert your board or driver to use gpiolib from the phased
+out s3c2410 API, then here are some notes on the process.
 
 1) If your board is exclusively using an GPIO, say to control peripheral
    power, then it will require to claim the gpio with gpio_request() before
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ s3c2410 api, then here are some notes on the process.
    as they have the same arguments, and can either take the pin specific
    values, or the more generic special-function-number arguments.
 
-3) s3c2410_gpio_pullup() changs have the problem that whilst the 
+3) s3c2410_gpio_pullup() changes have the problem that whilst the
    s3c2410_gpio_pullup(x, 1) can be easily translated to the
    s3c_gpio_setpull(x, S3C_GPIO_PULL_NONE), the s3c2410_gpio_pullup(x, 0)
    are not so easy.
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ s3c2410 api, then here are some notes on the process.
    when using gpio_get_value() on an output pin (s3c2410_gpio_getpin
    would return the value the pin is supposed to be outputting).
 
-6) s3c2410_gpio_getirq() should be directly replacable with the
+6) s3c2410_gpio_getirq() should be directly replaceable with the
    gpio_to_irq() call.
 
 The s3c2410_gpio and gpio_ calls have always operated on the same gpio
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ PIN Numbers
 -----------
 
   Each pin has an unique number associated with it in regs-gpio.h,
-  eg S3C2410_GPA(0) or S3C2410_GPF(1). These defines are used to tell
+  e.g. S3C2410_GPA(0) or S3C2410_GPF(1). These defines are used to tell
   the GPIO functions which pin is to be used.
 
   With the conversion to gpiolib, there is no longer a direct conversion
@@ -120,31 +120,27 @@ Configuring a pin
   The following function allows the configuration of a given pin to
   be changed.
 
-    void s3c2410_gpio_cfgpin(unsigned int pin, unsigned int function);
+    void s3c_gpio_cfgpin(unsigned int pin, unsigned int function);
 
-  Eg:
+  e.g.:
 
-     s3c2410_gpio_cfgpin(S3C2410_GPA(0), S3C2410_GPA0_ADDR0);
-     s3c2410_gpio_cfgpin(S3C2410_GPE(8), S3C2410_GPE8_SDDAT1);
+     s3c_gpio_cfgpin(S3C2410_GPA(0), S3C_GPIO_SFN(1));
+     s3c_gpio_cfgpin(S3C2410_GPE(8), S3C_GPIO_SFN(2));
 
    which would turn GPA(0) into the lowest Address line A0, and set
    GPE(8) to be connected to the SDIO/MMC controller's SDDAT1 line.
 
-   The s3c_gpio_cfgpin() call is a functional replacement for this call.
-
 
 Reading the current configuration
 ---------------------------------
 
-  The current configuration of a pin can be read by using:
+  The current configuration of a pin can be read by using standard
+  gpiolib function:
 
-  s3c2410_gpio_getcfg(unsigned int pin);
+  s3c_gpio_getcfg(unsigned int pin);
 
   The return value will be from the same set of values which can be
-  passed to s3c2410_gpio_cfgpin().
-
-  The s3c_gpio_getcfg() call should be a functional replacement for
-  this call.
+  passed to s3c_gpio_cfgpin().
 
 
 Configuring a pull-up resistor
@@ -154,61 +150,33 @@ Configuring a pull-up resistor
   pull-up resistors enabled. This can be configured by the following
   function:
 
-    void s3c2410_gpio_pullup(unsigned int pin, unsigned int to);
-
-  Where the to value is zero to set the pull-up off, and 1 to enable
-  the specified pull-up. Any other values are currently undefined.
-
-  The s3c_gpio_setpull() offers similar functionality, but with the
-  ability to encode whether the pull is up or down. Currently there
-  is no 'just on' state, so up or down must be selected.
-
-
-Getting the state of a PIN
---------------------------
-
-  The state of a pin can be read by using the function:
-
-    unsigned int s3c2410_gpio_getpin(unsigned int pin);
+    void s3c_gpio_setpull(unsigned int pin, unsigned int to);
 
-  This will return either zero or non-zero. Do not count on this
-  function returning 1 if the pin is set.
+  Where the to value is S3C_GPIO_PULL_NONE to set the pull-up off,
+  and S3C_GPIO_PULL_UP to enable the specified pull-up. Any other
+  values are currently undefined.
 
-  This call is now implemented by the relevant gpiolib calls, convert
-  your board or driver to use gpiolib.
-
-
-Setting the state of a PIN
---------------------------
-
-  The value an pin is outputing can be modified by using the following:
 
-    void s3c2410_gpio_setpin(unsigned int pin, unsigned int to);
+Getting and setting the state of a PIN
+--------------------------------------
 
-  Which sets the given pin to the value. Use 0 to write 0, and 1 to
-  set the output to 1.
-
-  This call is now implemented by the relevant gpiolib calls, convert
+  These calls are now implemented by the relevant gpiolib calls, convert
   your board or driver to use gpiolib.
 
 
 Getting the IRQ number associated with a PIN
 --------------------------------------------
 
-  The following function can map the given pin number to an IRQ
+  A standard gpiolib function can map the given pin number to an IRQ
   number to pass to the IRQ system.
 
-   int s3c2410_gpio_getirq(unsigned int pin);
+   int gpio_to_irq(unsigned int pin);
 
   Note, not all pins have an IRQ.
 
-  This call is now implemented by the relevant gpiolib calls, convert
-  your board or driver to use gpiolib.
-
 
-Authour
+Author
 -------
 
-
 Ben Dooks, 03 October 2004
 Copyright 2004 Ben Dooks, Simtec Electronics
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt
index f4a7b22c8664..b738859b1fc0 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt
@@ -37,4 +37,4 @@ Maintainers
   Thanks to the many others who have also provided support.
 
 
-(c) 2005 Ben Dooks
-\ No newline at end of file
+(c) 2005 Ben Dooks
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt
index 32e1eae6a25f..429390bd4684 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt
@@ -53,4 +53,4 @@ Maintainers
   and to Simtec Electronics for allowing me time to work on this.
 
 
-(c) 2004 Ben Dooks
-\ No newline at end of file
+(c) 2004 Ben Dooks
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt
index 513f2562c1a3..795adfd88081 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt
@@ -5,14 +5,14 @@ Introduction
 ------------
 
 This outlines the Samsung GPIO implementation and the architecture
-specific calls provided alongisde the drivers/gpio core.
+specific calls provided alongside the drivers/gpio core.
 
 
 S3C24XX (Legacy)
 ----------------
 
 See Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt for more information
-about these devices. Their implementation is being brought into line
+about these devices. Their implementation has been brought into line
 with the core samsung implementation described in this document.
 
 
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ GPIO numbering is synchronised between the Samsung and gpiolib system.
 PIN configuration
 -----------------
 
-Pin configuration is specific to the Samsung architecutre, with each SoC
+Pin configuration is specific to the Samsung architecture, with each SoC
 registering the necessary information for the core gpio configuration
 implementation to configure pins as necessary.
 
@@ -38,5 +38,3 @@ driver or machine to change gpio configuration.
 
 See arch/arm/plat-samsung/include/plat/gpio-cfg.h for more information
 on these functions.
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt b/Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..750b6fc24af9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,498 @@
+Cluster-wide Power-up/power-down race avoidance algorithm
+=========================================================
+
+This file documents the algorithm which is used to coordinate CPU and
+cluster setup and teardown operations and to manage hardware coherency
+controls safely.
+
+The section "Rationale" explains what the algorithm is for and why it is
+needed.  "Basic model" explains general concepts using a simplified view
+of the system.  The other sections explain the actual details of the
+algorithm in use.
+
+
+Rationale
+---------
+
+In a system containing multiple CPUs, it is desirable to have the
+ability to turn off individual CPUs when the system is idle, reducing
+power consumption and thermal dissipation.
+
+In a system containing multiple clusters of CPUs, it is also desirable
+to have the ability to turn off entire clusters.
+
+Turning entire clusters off and on is a risky business, because it
+involves performing potentially destructive operations affecting a group
+of independently running CPUs, while the OS continues to run.  This
+means that we need some coordination in order to ensure that critical
+cluster-level operations are only performed when it is truly safe to do
+so.
+
+Simple locking may not be sufficient to solve this problem, because
+mechanisms like Linux spinlocks may rely on coherency mechanisms which
+are not immediately enabled when a cluster powers up.  Since enabling or
+disabling those mechanisms may itself be a non-atomic operation (such as
+writing some hardware registers and invalidating large caches), other
+methods of coordination are required in order to guarantee safe
+power-down and power-up at the cluster level.
+
+The mechanism presented in this document describes a coherent memory
+based protocol for performing the needed coordination.  It aims to be as
+lightweight as possible, while providing the required safety properties.
+
+
+Basic model
+-----------
+
+Each cluster and CPU is assigned a state, as follows:
+
+	DOWN
+	COMING_UP
+	UP
+	GOING_DOWN
+
+	    +---------> UP ----------+
+	    |                        v
+
+	COMING_UP                GOING_DOWN
+
+	    ^                        |
+	    +--------- DOWN <--------+
+
+
+DOWN:	The CPU or cluster is not coherent, and is either powered off or
+	suspended, or is ready to be powered off or suspended.
+
+COMING_UP: The CPU or cluster has committed to moving to the UP state.
+	It may be part way through the process of initialisation and
+	enabling coherency.
+
+UP:	The CPU or cluster is active and coherent at the hardware
+	level.  A CPU in this state is not necessarily being used
+	actively by the kernel.
+
+GOING_DOWN: The CPU or cluster has committed to moving to the DOWN
+	state.  It may be part way through the process of teardown and
+	coherency exit.
+
+
+Each CPU has one of these states assigned to it at any point in time.
+The CPU states are described in the "CPU state" section, below.
+
+Each cluster is also assigned a state, but it is necessary to split the
+state value into two parts (the "cluster" state and "inbound" state) and
+to introduce additional states in order to avoid races between different
+CPUs in the cluster simultaneously modifying the state.  The cluster-
+level states are described in the "Cluster state" section.
+
+To help distinguish the CPU states from cluster states in this
+discussion, the state names are given a CPU_ prefix for the CPU states,
+and a CLUSTER_ or INBOUND_ prefix for the cluster states.
+
+
+CPU state
+---------
+
+In this algorithm, each individual core in a multi-core processor is
+referred to as a "CPU".  CPUs are assumed to be single-threaded:
+therefore, a CPU can only be doing one thing at a single point in time.
+
+This means that CPUs fit the basic model closely.
+
+The algorithm defines the following states for each CPU in the system:
+
+	CPU_DOWN
+	CPU_COMING_UP
+	CPU_UP
+	CPU_GOING_DOWN
+
+	 cluster setup and
+	CPU setup complete          policy decision
+	      +-----------> CPU_UP ------------+
+	      |                                v
+
+	CPU_COMING_UP                   CPU_GOING_DOWN
+
+	      ^                                |
+	      +----------- CPU_DOWN <----------+
+	 policy decision           CPU teardown complete
+	or hardware event
+
+
+The definitions of the four states correspond closely to the states of
+the basic model.
+
+Transitions between states occur as follows.
+
+A trigger event (spontaneous) means that the CPU can transition to the
+next state as a result of making local progress only, with no
+requirement for any external event to happen.
+
+
+CPU_DOWN:
+
+	A CPU reaches the CPU_DOWN state when it is ready for
+	power-down.  On reaching this state, the CPU will typically
+	power itself down or suspend itself, via a WFI instruction or a
+	firmware call.
+
+	Next state:	CPU_COMING_UP
+	Conditions:	none
+
+	Trigger events:
+
+		a) an explicit hardware power-up operation, resulting
+		   from a policy decision on another CPU;
+
+		b) a hardware event, such as an interrupt.
+
+
+CPU_COMING_UP:
+
+	A CPU cannot start participating in hardware coherency until the
+	cluster is set up and coherent.  If the cluster is not ready,
+	then the CPU will wait in the CPU_COMING_UP state until the
+	cluster has been set up.
+
+	Next state:	CPU_UP
+	Conditions:	The CPU's parent cluster must be in CLUSTER_UP.
+	Trigger events:	Transition of the parent cluster to CLUSTER_UP.
+
+	Refer to the "Cluster state" section for a description of the
+	CLUSTER_UP state.
+
+
+CPU_UP:
+	When a CPU reaches the CPU_UP state, it is safe for the CPU to
+	start participating in local coherency.
+
+	This is done by jumping to the kernel's CPU resume code.
+
+	Note that the definition of this state is slightly different
+	from the basic model definition: CPU_UP does not mean that the
+	CPU is coherent yet, but it does mean that it is safe to resume
+	the kernel.  The kernel handles the rest of the resume
+	procedure, so the remaining steps are not visible as part of the
+	race avoidance algorithm.
+
+	The CPU remains in this state until an explicit policy decision
+	is made to shut down or suspend the CPU.
+
+	Next state:	CPU_GOING_DOWN
+	Conditions:	none
+	Trigger events:	explicit policy decision
+
+
+CPU_GOING_DOWN:
+
+	While in this state, the CPU exits coherency, including any
+	operations required to achieve this (such as cleaning data
+	caches).
+
+	Next state:	CPU_DOWN
+	Conditions:	local CPU teardown complete
+	Trigger events:	(spontaneous)
+
+
+Cluster state
+-------------
+
+A cluster is a group of connected CPUs with some common resources.
+Because a cluster contains multiple CPUs, it can be doing multiple
+things at the same time.  This has some implications.  In particular, a
+CPU can start up while another CPU is tearing the cluster down.
+
+In this discussion, the "outbound side" is the view of the cluster state
+as seen by a CPU tearing the cluster down.  The "inbound side" is the
+view of the cluster state as seen by a CPU setting the CPU up.
+
+In order to enable safe coordination in such situations, it is important
+that a CPU which is setting up the cluster can advertise its state
+independently of the CPU which is tearing down the cluster.  For this
+reason, the cluster state is split into two parts:
+
+	"cluster" state: The global state of the cluster; or the state
+		on the outbound side:
+
+		CLUSTER_DOWN
+		CLUSTER_UP
+		CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN
+
+	"inbound" state: The state of the cluster on the inbound side.
+
+		INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP
+		INBOUND_COMING_UP
+
+
+	The different pairings of these states results in six possible
+	states for the cluster as a whole:
+
+	                            CLUSTER_UP
+	          +==========> INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP -------------+
+	          #                                               |
+	                                                          |
+	     CLUSTER_UP     <----+                                |
+	  INBOUND_COMING_UP      |                                v
+
+	          ^             CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN       CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN
+	          #              INBOUND_COMING_UP <=== INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP
+
+	    CLUSTER_DOWN         |                                |
+	  INBOUND_COMING_UP <----+                                |
+	                                                          |
+	          ^                                               |
+	          +===========     CLUSTER_DOWN      <------------+
+	                       INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP
+
+	Transitions -----> can only be made by the outbound CPU, and
+	only involve changes to the "cluster" state.
+
+	Transitions ===##> can only be made by the inbound CPU, and only
+	involve changes to the "inbound" state, except where there is no
+	further transition possible on the outbound side (i.e., the
+	outbound CPU has put the cluster into the CLUSTER_DOWN state).
+
+	The race avoidance algorithm does not provide a way to determine
+	which exact CPUs within the cluster play these roles.  This must
+	be decided in advance by some other means.  Refer to the section
+	"Last man and first man selection" for more explanation.
+
+
+	CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP is the only state where the
+	cluster can actually be powered down.
+
+	The parallelism of the inbound and outbound CPUs is observed by
+	the existence of two different paths from CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/
+	INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (corresponding to GOING_DOWN in the basic
+	model) to CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP (corresponding to
+	COMING_UP in the basic model).  The second path avoids cluster
+	teardown completely.
+
+	CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP is equivalent to UP in the basic
+	model.  The final transition to CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP
+	is trivial and merely resets the state machine ready for the
+	next cycle.
+
+	Details of the allowable transitions follow.
+
+	The next state in each case is notated
+
+		<cluster state>/<inbound state> (<transitioner>)
+
+	where the <transitioner> is the side on which the transition
+	can occur; either the inbound or the outbound side.
+
+
+CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP:
+
+	Next state:	CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP (inbound)
+	Conditions:	none
+	Trigger events:
+
+		a) an explicit hardware power-up operation, resulting
+		   from a policy decision on another CPU;
+
+		b) a hardware event, such as an interrupt.
+
+
+CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP:
+
+	In this state, an inbound CPU sets up the cluster, including
+	enabling of hardware coherency at the cluster level and any
+	other operations (such as cache invalidation) which are required
+	in order to achieve this.
+
+	The purpose of this state is to do sufficient cluster-level
+	setup to enable other CPUs in the cluster to enter coherency
+	safely.
+
+	Next state:	CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP (inbound)
+	Conditions:	cluster-level setup and hardware coherency complete
+	Trigger events:	(spontaneous)
+
+
+CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP:
+
+	Cluster-level setup is complete and hardware coherency is
+	enabled for the cluster.  Other CPUs in the cluster can safely
+	enter coherency.
+
+	This is a transient state, leading immediately to
+	CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP.  All other CPUs on the cluster
+	should consider treat these two states as equivalent.
+
+	Next state:	CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (inbound)
+	Conditions:	none
+	Trigger events:	(spontaneous)
+
+
+CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP:
+
+	Cluster-level setup is complete and hardware coherency is
+	enabled for the cluster.  Other CPUs in the cluster can safely
+	enter coherency.
+
+	The cluster will remain in this state until a policy decision is
+	made to power the cluster down.
+
+	Next state:	CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (outbound)
+	Conditions:	none
+	Trigger events:	policy decision to power down the cluster
+
+
+CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP:
+
+	An outbound CPU is tearing the cluster down.  The selected CPU
+	must wait in this state until all CPUs in the cluster are in the
+	CPU_DOWN state.
+
+	When all CPUs are in the CPU_DOWN state, the cluster can be torn
+	down, for example by cleaning data caches and exiting
+	cluster-level coherency.
+
+	To avoid wasteful unnecessary teardown operations, the outbound
+	should check the inbound cluster state for asynchronous
+	transitions to INBOUND_COMING_UP.  Alternatively, individual
+	CPUs can be checked for entry into CPU_COMING_UP or CPU_UP.
+
+
+	Next states:
+
+	CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (outbound)
+		Conditions:	cluster torn down and ready to power off
+		Trigger events:	(spontaneous)
+
+	CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP (inbound)
+		Conditions:	none
+		Trigger events:
+
+			a) an explicit hardware power-up operation,
+			   resulting from a policy decision on another
+			   CPU;
+
+			b) a hardware event, such as an interrupt.
+
+
+CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP:
+
+	The cluster is (or was) being torn down, but another CPU has
+	come online in the meantime and is trying to set up the cluster
+	again.
+
+	If the outbound CPU observes this state, it has two choices:
+
+		a) back out of teardown, restoring the cluster to the
+		   CLUSTER_UP state;
+
+		b) finish tearing the cluster down and put the cluster
+		   in the CLUSTER_DOWN state; the inbound CPU will
+		   set up the cluster again from there.
+
+	Choice (a) permits the removal of some latency by avoiding
+	unnecessary teardown and setup operations in situations where
+	the cluster is not really going to be powered down.
+
+
+	Next states:
+
+	CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP (outbound)
+		Conditions:	cluster-level setup and hardware
+				coherency complete
+		Trigger events:	(spontaneous)
+
+	CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP (outbound)
+		Conditions:	cluster torn down and ready to power off
+		Trigger events:	(spontaneous)
+
+
+Last man and First man selection
+--------------------------------
+
+The CPU which performs cluster tear-down operations on the outbound side
+is commonly referred to as the "last man".
+
+The CPU which performs cluster setup on the inbound side is commonly
+referred to as the "first man".
+
+The race avoidance algorithm documented above does not provide a
+mechanism to choose which CPUs should play these roles.
+
+
+Last man:
+
+When shutting down the cluster, all the CPUs involved are initially
+executing Linux and hence coherent.  Therefore, ordinary spinlocks can
+be used to select a last man safely, before the CPUs become
+non-coherent.
+
+
+First man:
+
+Because CPUs may power up asynchronously in response to external wake-up
+events, a dynamic mechanism is needed to make sure that only one CPU
+attempts to play the first man role and do the cluster-level
+initialisation: any other CPUs must wait for this to complete before
+proceeding.
+
+Cluster-level initialisation may involve actions such as configuring
+coherency controls in the bus fabric.
+
+The current implementation in mcpm_head.S uses a separate mutual exclusion
+mechanism to do this arbitration.  This mechanism is documented in
+detail in vlocks.txt.
+
+
+Features and Limitations
+------------------------
+
+Implementation:
+
+	The current ARM-based implementation is split between
+	arch/arm/common/mcpm_head.S (low-level inbound CPU operations) and
+	arch/arm/common/mcpm_entry.c (everything else):
+
+	__mcpm_cpu_going_down() signals the transition of a CPU to the
+		CPU_GOING_DOWN state.
+
+	__mcpm_cpu_down() signals the transition of a CPU to the CPU_DOWN
+		state.
+
+	A CPU transitions to CPU_COMING_UP and then to CPU_UP via the
+		low-level power-up code in mcpm_head.S.  This could
+		involve CPU-specific setup code, but in the current
+		implementation it does not.
+
+	__mcpm_outbound_enter_critical() and __mcpm_outbound_leave_critical()
+		handle transitions from CLUSTER_UP to CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN
+		and from there to CLUSTER_DOWN or back to CLUSTER_UP (in
+		the case of an aborted cluster power-down).
+
+		These functions are more complex than the __mcpm_cpu_*()
+		functions due to the extra inter-CPU coordination which
+		is needed for safe transitions at the cluster level.
+
+	A cluster transitions from CLUSTER_DOWN back to CLUSTER_UP via
+		the low-level power-up code in mcpm_head.S.  This
+		typically involves platform-specific setup code,
+		provided by the platform-specific power_up_setup
+		function registered via mcpm_sync_init.
+
+Deep topologies:
+
+	As currently described and implemented, the algorithm does not
+	support CPU topologies involving more than two levels (i.e.,
+	clusters of clusters are not supported).  The algorithm could be
+	extended by replicating the cluster-level states for the
+	additional topological levels, and modifying the transition
+	rules for the intermediate (non-outermost) cluster levels.
+
+
+Colophon
+--------
+
+Originally created and documented by Dave Martin for Linaro Limited, in
+collaboration with Nicolas Pitre and Achin Gupta.
+
+Copyright (C) 2012-2013  Linaro Limited
+Distributed under the terms of Version 2 of the GNU General Public
+License, as defined in linux/COPYING.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/firmware.txt b/Documentation/arm/firmware.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c2e468fe7b0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/firmware.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+Interface for registering and calling firmware-specific operations for ARM.
+----
+Written by Tomasz Figa <t.figa@samsung.com>
+
+Some boards are running with secure firmware running in TrustZone secure
+world, which changes the way some things have to be initialized. This makes
+a need to provide an interface for such platforms to specify available firmware
+operations and call them when needed.
+
+Firmware operations can be specified using struct firmware_ops
+
+	struct firmware_ops {
+		/*
+		* Enters CPU idle mode
+		*/
+		int (*do_idle)(void);
+		/*
+		* Sets boot address of specified physical CPU
+		*/
+		int (*set_cpu_boot_addr)(int cpu, unsigned long boot_addr);
+		/*
+		* Boots specified physical CPU
+		*/
+		int (*cpu_boot)(int cpu);
+		/*
+		* Initializes L2 cache
+		*/
+		int (*l2x0_init)(void);
+	};
+
+and then registered with register_firmware_ops function
+
+	void register_firmware_ops(const struct firmware_ops *ops)
+
+the ops pointer must be non-NULL.
+
+There is a default, empty set of operations provided, so there is no need to
+set anything if platform does not require firmware operations.
+
+To call a firmware operation, a helper macro is provided
+
+	#define call_firmware_op(op, ...)				\
+		((firmware_ops->op) ? firmware_ops->op(__VA_ARGS__) : (-ENOSYS))
+
+the macro checks if the operation is provided and calls it or otherwise returns
+-ENOSYS to signal that given operation is not available (for example, to allow
+fallback to legacy operation).
+
+Example of registering firmware operations:
+
+	/* board file */
+
+	static int platformX_do_idle(void)
+	{
+		/* tell platformX firmware to enter idle */
+		return 0;
+	}
+
+	static int platformX_cpu_boot(int i)
+	{
+		/* tell platformX firmware to boot CPU i */
+		return 0;
+	}
+
+	static const struct firmware_ops platformX_firmware_ops = {
+		.do_idle        = exynos_do_idle,
+		.cpu_boot       = exynos_cpu_boot,
+		/* other operations not available on platformX */
+	};
+
+	/* init_early callback of machine descriptor */
+	static void __init board_init_early(void)
+	{
+		register_firmware_ops(&platformX_firmware_ops);
+	}
+
+Example of using a firmware operation:
+
+	/* some platform code, e.g. SMP initialization */
+
+	__raw_writel(virt_to_phys(exynos4_secondary_startup),
+		CPU1_BOOT_REG);
+
+	/* Call Exynos specific smc call */
+	if (call_firmware_op(cpu_boot, cpu) == -ENOSYS)
+		cpu_boot_legacy(...); /* Try legacy way */
+
+	gic_raise_softirq(cpumask_of(cpu), 1);
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt b/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..525452726d31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+Kernel mode NEON
+================
+
+TL;DR summary
+-------------
+* Use only NEON instructions, or VFP instructions that don't rely on support
+  code
+* Isolate your NEON code in a separate compilation unit, and compile it with
+  '-mfpu=neon -mfloat-abi=softfp'
+* Put kernel_neon_begin() and kernel_neon_end() calls around the calls into your
+  NEON code
+* Don't sleep in your NEON code, and be aware that it will be executed with
+  preemption disabled
+
+
+Introduction
+------------
+It is possible to use NEON instructions (and in some cases, VFP instructions) in
+code that runs in kernel mode. However, for performance reasons, the NEON/VFP
+register file is not preserved and restored at every context switch or taken
+exception like the normal register file is, so some manual intervention is
+required. Furthermore, special care is required for code that may sleep [i.e.,
+may call schedule()], as NEON or VFP instructions will be executed in a
+non-preemptible section for reasons outlined below.
+
+
+Lazy preserve and restore
+-------------------------
+The NEON/VFP register file is managed using lazy preserve (on UP systems) and
+lazy restore (on both SMP and UP systems). This means that the register file is
+kept 'live', and is only preserved and restored when multiple tasks are
+contending for the NEON/VFP unit (or, in the SMP case, when a task migrates to
+another core). Lazy restore is implemented by disabling the NEON/VFP unit after
+every context switch, resulting in a trap when subsequently a NEON/VFP
+instruction is issued, allowing the kernel to step in and perform the restore if
+necessary.
+
+Any use of the NEON/VFP unit in kernel mode should not interfere with this, so
+it is required to do an 'eager' preserve of the NEON/VFP register file, and
+enable the NEON/VFP unit explicitly so no exceptions are generated on first
+subsequent use. This is handled by the function kernel_neon_begin(), which
+should be called before any kernel mode NEON or VFP instructions are issued.
+Likewise, the NEON/VFP unit should be disabled again after use to make sure user
+mode will hit the lazy restore trap upon next use. This is handled by the
+function kernel_neon_end().
+
+
+Interruptions in kernel mode
+----------------------------
+For reasons of performance and simplicity, it was decided that there shall be no
+preserve/restore mechanism for the kernel mode NEON/VFP register contents. This
+implies that interruptions of a kernel mode NEON section can only be allowed if
+they are guaranteed not to touch the NEON/VFP registers. For this reason, the
+following rules and restrictions apply in the kernel:
+* NEON/VFP code is not allowed in interrupt context;
+* NEON/VFP code is not allowed to sleep;
+* NEON/VFP code is executed with preemption disabled.
+
+If latency is a concern, it is possible to put back to back calls to
+kernel_neon_end() and kernel_neon_begin() in places in your code where none of
+the NEON registers are live. (Additional calls to kernel_neon_begin() should be
+reasonably cheap if no context switch occurred in the meantime)
+
+
+VFP and support code
+--------------------
+Earlier versions of VFP (prior to version 3) rely on software support for things
+like IEEE-754 compliant underflow handling etc. When the VFP unit needs such
+software assistance, it signals the kernel by raising an undefined instruction
+exception. The kernel responds by inspecting the VFP control registers and the
+current instruction and arguments, and emulates the instruction in software.
+
+Such software assistance is currently not implemented for VFP instructions
+executed in kernel mode. If such a condition is encountered, the kernel will
+fail and generate an OOPS.
+
+
+Separating NEON code from ordinary code
+---------------------------------------
+The compiler is not aware of the special significance of kernel_neon_begin() and
+kernel_neon_end(), i.e., that it is only allowed to issue NEON/VFP instructions
+between calls to these respective functions. Furthermore, GCC may generate NEON
+instructions of its own at -O3 level if -mfpu=neon is selected, and even if the
+kernel is currently compiled at -O2, future changes may result in NEON/VFP
+instructions appearing in unexpected places if no special care is taken.
+
+Therefore, the recommended and only supported way of using NEON/VFP in the
+kernel is by adhering to the following rules:
+* isolate the NEON code in a separate compilation unit and compile it with
+  '-mfpu=neon -mfloat-abi=softfp';
+* issue the calls to kernel_neon_begin(), kernel_neon_end() as well as the calls
+  into the unit containing the NEON code from a compilation unit which is *not*
+  built with the GCC flag '-mfpu=neon' set.
+
+As the kernel is compiled with '-msoft-float', the above will guarantee that
+both NEON and VFP instructions will only ever appear in designated compilation
+units at any optimization level.
+
+
+NEON assembler
+--------------
+NEON assembler is supported with no additional caveats as long as the rules
+above are followed.
+
+
+NEON code generated by GCC
+--------------------------
+The GCC option -ftree-vectorize (implied by -O3) tries to exploit implicit
+parallelism, and generates NEON code from ordinary C source code. This is fully
+supported as long as the rules above are followed.
+
+
+NEON intrinsics
+---------------
+NEON intrinsics are also supported. However, as code using NEON intrinsics
+relies on the GCC header <arm_neon.h>, (which #includes <stdint.h>), you should
+observe the following in addition to the rules above:
+* Compile the unit containing the NEON intrinsics with '-ffreestanding' so GCC
+  uses its builtin version of <stdint.h> (this is a C99 header which the kernel
+  does not supply);
+* Include <arm_neon.h> last, or at least after <linux/types.h>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/memory.txt b/Documentation/arm/memory.txt
index 208a2d465b92..4bfb9ffbdbc1 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/memory.txt
@@ -51,6 +51,9 @@ ffc00000	ffefffff	DMA memory mapping region.  Memory returned
 ff000000	ffbfffff	Reserved for future expansion of DMA
 				mapping region.
 
+fee00000	feffffff	Mapping of PCI I/O space. This is a static
+				mapping within the vmalloc space.
+
 VMALLOC_START	VMALLOC_END-1	vmalloc() / ioremap() space.
 				Memory returned by vmalloc/ioremap will
 				be dynamically placed in this region.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/overview.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1a4e93d6027f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/overview.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+			STi ARM Linux Overview
+			==========================
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+  The ST Microelectronics Multimedia and Application Processors range of
+  CortexA9 System-on-Chip are supported by the 'STi' platform of
+  ARM Linux. Currently STiH415, STiH416 SOCs are supported with both
+  B2000 and B2020 Reference boards.
+
+
+  configuration
+  -------------
+
+  A generic configuration is provided for both STiH415/416, and can be used as the
+  default by
+	make stih41x_defconfig
+
+  Layout
+  ------
+  All the files for multiple machine families (STiH415, STiH416, and STiG125)
+  are located in the platform code contained in arch/arm/mach-sti
+
+  There is a generic board board-dt.c in the mach folder which support
+  Flattened Device Tree, which means, It works with any compatible board with
+  Device Trees.
+
+
+  Document Author
+  ---------------
+
+  Srinivas Kandagatla <srinivas.kandagatla@st.com>, (c) 2013 ST Microelectronics
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1383e33f265d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+			STiH415 Overview
+			================
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+    The STiH415 is the next generation of HD, AVC set-top box processors
+    for satellite, cable, terrestrial and IP-STB markets.
+
+    Features
+    - ARM Cortex-A9 1.0 GHz, dual-core CPU
+    - SATA2x2,USB 2.0x3, PCIe, Gbit Ethernet MACx2
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..558444c201c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+			STiH416 Overview
+			================
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+    The STiH416 is the next generation of HD, AVC set-top box processors
+    for satellite, cable, terrestrial and IP-STB markets.
+
+    Features
+    - ARM Cortex-A9 1.2 GHz dual core CPU
+    - SATA2x2,USB 2.0x3, PCIe, Gbit Ethernet MACx2
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e3f93fb9224e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+ARM Allwinner SoCs
+==================
+
+This document lists all the ARM Allwinner SoCs that are currently
+supported in mainline by the Linux kernel. This document will also
+provide links to documentation and/or datasheet for these SoCs.
+
+SunXi family
+------------
+  Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-sunxi
+
+  Flavors:
+    * ARM Cortex-A8 based SoCs
+      - Allwinner A10 (sun4i)
+        + Datasheet
+	  http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A10/A10%20Datasheet%20-%20v1.21%20%282012-04-06%29.pdf
+	+ User Manual
+	  http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A10/A10%20User%20Manual%20-%20v1.20%20%282012-04-09%2c%20DECRYPTED%29.pdf
+
+      - Allwinner A10s (sun5i)
+        + Datasheet
+          http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A10s/A10s%20Datasheet%20-%20v1.20%20%282012-03-27%29.pdf
+
+      - Allwinner A13 (sun5i)
+        + Datasheet
+	  http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A13/A13%20Datasheet%20-%20v1.12%20%282012-03-29%29.pdf
+        + User Manual
+	  http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A13/A13%20User%20Manual%20-%20v1.2%20%282013-08-08%29.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.txt b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e09a88aa3136
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+Frequently asked questions about the sunxi clock system
+=======================================================
+
+This document contains useful bits of information that people tend to ask
+about the sunxi clock system, as well as accompanying ASCII art when adequate.
+
+Q: Why is the main 24MHz oscillator gatable? Wouldn't that break the
+   system?
+
+A: The 24MHz oscillator allows gating to save power. Indeed, if gated
+   carelessly the system would stop functioning, but with the right
+   steps, one can gate it and keep the system running. Consider this
+   simplified suspend example:
+
+   While the system is operational, you would see something like
+
+      24MHz         32kHz
+       |
+      PLL1
+       \
+        \_ CPU Mux
+             |
+           [CPU]
+
+   When you are about to suspend, you switch the CPU Mux to the 32kHz
+   oscillator:
+
+      24Mhz         32kHz
+       |              |
+      PLL1            |
+                     /
+           CPU Mux _/
+             |
+           [CPU]
+
+    Finally you can gate the main oscillator
+
+                    32kHz
+                      |
+                      |
+                     /
+           CPU Mux _/
+             |
+           [CPU]
+
+Q: Were can I learn more about the sunxi clocks?
+
+A: The linux-sunxi wiki contains a page documenting the clock registers,
+   you can find it at
+
+        http://linux-sunxi.org/A10/CCM
+
+   The authoritative source for information at this time is the ccmu driver
+   released by Allwinner, you can find it at
+
+        https://github.com/linux-sunxi/linux-sunxi/tree/sunxi-3.0/arch/arm/mach-sun4i/clock/ccmu
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/vlocks.txt b/Documentation/arm/vlocks.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..415960a9bab0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/vlocks.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+vlocks for Bare-Metal Mutual Exclusion
+======================================
+
+Voting Locks, or "vlocks" provide a simple low-level mutual exclusion
+mechanism, with reasonable but minimal requirements on the memory
+system.
+
+These are intended to be used to coordinate critical activity among CPUs
+which are otherwise non-coherent, in situations where the hardware
+provides no other mechanism to support this and ordinary spinlocks
+cannot be used.
+
+
+vlocks make use of the atomicity provided by the memory system for
+writes to a single memory location.  To arbitrate, every CPU "votes for
+itself", by storing a unique number to a common memory location.  The
+final value seen in that memory location when all the votes have been
+cast identifies the winner.
+
+In order to make sure that the election produces an unambiguous result
+in finite time, a CPU will only enter the election in the first place if
+no winner has been chosen and the election does not appear to have
+started yet.
+
+
+Algorithm
+---------
+
+The easiest way to explain the vlocks algorithm is with some pseudo-code:
+
+
+	int currently_voting[NR_CPUS] = { 0, };
+	int last_vote = -1; /* no votes yet */
+
+	bool vlock_trylock(int this_cpu)
+	{
+		/* signal our desire to vote */
+		currently_voting[this_cpu] = 1;
+		if (last_vote != -1) {
+			/* someone already volunteered himself */
+			currently_voting[this_cpu] = 0;
+			return false; /* not ourself */
+		}
+
+		/* let's suggest ourself */
+		last_vote = this_cpu;
+		currently_voting[this_cpu] = 0;
+
+		/* then wait until everyone else is done voting */
+		for_each_cpu(i) {
+			while (currently_voting[i] != 0)
+				/* wait */;
+		}
+
+		/* result */
+		if (last_vote == this_cpu)
+			return true; /* we won */
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	bool vlock_unlock(void)
+	{
+		last_vote = -1;
+	}
+
+
+The currently_voting[] array provides a way for the CPUs to determine
+whether an election is in progress, and plays a role analogous to the
+"entering" array in Lamport's bakery algorithm [1].
+
+However, once the election has started, the underlying memory system
+atomicity is used to pick the winner.  This avoids the need for a static
+priority rule to act as a tie-breaker, or any counters which could
+overflow.
+
+As long as the last_vote variable is globally visible to all CPUs, it
+will contain only one value that won't change once every CPU has cleared
+its currently_voting flag.
+
+
+Features and limitations
+------------------------
+
+ * vlocks are not intended to be fair.  In the contended case, it is the
+   _last_ CPU which attempts to get the lock which will be most likely
+   to win.
+
+   vlocks are therefore best suited to situations where it is necessary
+   to pick a unique winner, but it does not matter which CPU actually
+   wins.
+
+ * Like other similar mechanisms, vlocks will not scale well to a large
+   number of CPUs.
+
+   vlocks can be cascaded in a voting hierarchy to permit better scaling
+   if necessary, as in the following hypothetical example for 4096 CPUs:
+
+	/* first level: local election */
+	my_town = towns[(this_cpu >> 4) & 0xf];
+	I_won = vlock_trylock(my_town, this_cpu & 0xf);
+	if (I_won) {
+		/* we won the town election, let's go for the state */
+		my_state = states[(this_cpu >> 8) & 0xf];
+		I_won = vlock_lock(my_state, this_cpu & 0xf));
+		if (I_won) {
+			/* and so on */
+			I_won = vlock_lock(the_whole_country, this_cpu & 0xf];
+			if (I_won) {
+				/* ... */
+			}
+			vlock_unlock(the_whole_country);
+		}
+		vlock_unlock(my_state);
+	}
+	vlock_unlock(my_town);
+
+
+ARM implementation
+------------------
+
+The current ARM implementation [2] contains some optimisations beyond
+the basic algorithm:
+
+ * By packing the members of the currently_voting array close together,
+   we can read the whole array in one transaction (providing the number
+   of CPUs potentially contending the lock is small enough).  This
+   reduces the number of round-trips required to external memory.
+
+   In the ARM implementation, this means that we can use a single load
+   and comparison:
+
+	LDR	Rt, [Rn]
+	CMP	Rt, #0
+
+   ...in place of code equivalent to:
+
+	LDRB	Rt, [Rn]
+	CMP	Rt, #0
+	LDRBEQ	Rt, [Rn, #1]
+	CMPEQ	Rt, #0
+	LDRBEQ	Rt, [Rn, #2]
+	CMPEQ	Rt, #0
+	LDRBEQ	Rt, [Rn, #3]
+	CMPEQ	Rt, #0
+
+   This cuts down on the fast-path latency, as well as potentially
+   reducing bus contention in contended cases.
+
+   The optimisation relies on the fact that the ARM memory system
+   guarantees coherency between overlapping memory accesses of
+   different sizes, similarly to many other architectures.  Note that
+   we do not care which element of currently_voting appears in which
+   bits of Rt, so there is no need to worry about endianness in this
+   optimisation.
+
+   If there are too many CPUs to read the currently_voting array in
+   one transaction then multiple transations are still required.  The
+   implementation uses a simple loop of word-sized loads for this
+   case.  The number of transactions is still fewer than would be
+   required if bytes were loaded individually.
+
+
+   In principle, we could aggregate further by using LDRD or LDM, but
+   to keep the code simple this was not attempted in the initial
+   implementation.
+
+
+ * vlocks are currently only used to coordinate between CPUs which are
+   unable to enable their caches yet.  This means that the
+   implementation removes many of the barriers which would be required
+   when executing the algorithm in cached memory.
+
+   packing of the currently_voting array does not work with cached
+   memory unless all CPUs contending the lock are cache-coherent, due
+   to cache writebacks from one CPU clobbering values written by other
+   CPUs.  (Though if all the CPUs are cache-coherent, you should be
+   probably be using proper spinlocks instead anyway).
+
+
+ * The "no votes yet" value used for the last_vote variable is 0 (not
+   -1 as in the pseudocode).  This allows statically-allocated vlocks
+   to be implicitly initialised to an unlocked state simply by putting
+   them in .bss.
+
+   An offset is added to each CPU's ID for the purpose of setting this
+   variable, so that no CPU uses the value 0 for its ID.
+
+
+Colophon
+--------
+
+Originally created and documented by Dave Martin for Linaro Limited, for
+use in ARM-based big.LITTLE platforms, with review and input gratefully
+received from Nicolas Pitre and Achin Gupta.  Thanks to Nicolas for
+grabbing most of this text out of the relevant mail thread and writing
+up the pseudocode.
+
+Copyright (C) 2012-2013  Linaro Limited
+Distributed under the terms of Version 2 of the GNU General Public
+License, as defined in linux/COPYING.
+
+
+References
+----------
+
+[1] Lamport, L. "A New Solution of Dijkstra's Concurrent Programming
+    Problem", Communications of the ACM 17, 8 (August 1974), 453-455.
+
+    http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lamport%27s_bakery_algorithm
+
+[2] linux/arch/arm/common/vlock.S, www.kernel.org.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..98df4a03807e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+			Booting AArch64 Linux
+			=====================
+
+Author: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com>
+Date  : 07 September 2012
+
+This document is based on the ARM booting document by Russell King and
+is relevant to all public releases of the AArch64 Linux kernel.
+
+The AArch64 exception model is made up of a number of exception levels
+(EL0 - EL3), with EL0 and EL1 having a secure and a non-secure
+counterpart.  EL2 is the hypervisor level and exists only in non-secure
+mode. EL3 is the highest priority level and exists only in secure mode.
+
+For the purposes of this document, we will use the term `boot loader'
+simply to define all software that executes on the CPU(s) before control
+is passed to the Linux kernel.  This may include secure monitor and
+hypervisor code, or it may just be a handful of instructions for
+preparing a minimal boot environment.
+
+Essentially, the boot loader should provide (as a minimum) the
+following:
+
+1. Setup and initialise the RAM
+2. Setup the device tree
+3. Decompress the kernel image
+4. Call the kernel image
+
+
+1. Setup and initialise RAM
+---------------------------
+
+Requirement: MANDATORY
+
+The boot loader is expected to find and initialise all RAM that the
+kernel will use for volatile data storage in the system.  It performs
+this in a machine dependent manner.  (It may use internal algorithms
+to automatically locate and size all RAM, or it may use knowledge of
+the RAM in the machine, or any other method the boot loader designer
+sees fit.)
+
+
+2. Setup the device tree
+-------------------------
+
+Requirement: MANDATORY
+
+The device tree blob (dtb) must be placed on an 8-byte boundary within
+the first 512 megabytes from the start of the kernel image and must not
+cross a 2-megabyte boundary. This is to allow the kernel to map the
+blob using a single section mapping in the initial page tables.
+
+
+3. Decompress the kernel image
+------------------------------
+
+Requirement: OPTIONAL
+
+The AArch64 kernel does not currently provide a decompressor and
+therefore requires decompression (gzip etc.) to be performed by the boot
+loader if a compressed Image target (e.g. Image.gz) is used.  For
+bootloaders that do not implement this requirement, the uncompressed
+Image target is available instead.
+
+
+4. Call the kernel image
+------------------------
+
+Requirement: MANDATORY
+
+The decompressed kernel image contains a 64-byte header as follows:
+
+  u32 code0;			/* Executable code */
+  u32 code1;			/* Executable code */
+  u64 text_offset;		/* Image load offset */
+  u64 res0	= 0;		/* reserved */
+  u64 res1	= 0;		/* reserved */
+  u64 res2	= 0;		/* reserved */
+  u64 res3	= 0;		/* reserved */
+  u64 res4	= 0;		/* reserved */
+  u32 magic	= 0x644d5241;	/* Magic number, little endian, "ARM\x64" */
+  u32 res5 = 0;      		/* reserved */
+
+
+Header notes:
+
+- code0/code1 are responsible for branching to stext.
+
+The image must be placed at the specified offset (currently 0x80000)
+from the start of the system RAM and called there. The start of the
+system RAM must be aligned to 2MB.
+
+Before jumping into the kernel, the following conditions must be met:
+
+- Quiesce all DMA capable devices so that memory does not get
+  corrupted by bogus network packets or disk data.  This will save
+  you many hours of debug.
+
+- Primary CPU general-purpose register settings
+  x0 = physical address of device tree blob (dtb) in system RAM.
+  x1 = 0 (reserved for future use)
+  x2 = 0 (reserved for future use)
+  x3 = 0 (reserved for future use)
+
+- CPU mode
+  All forms of interrupts must be masked in PSTATE.DAIF (Debug, SError,
+  IRQ and FIQ).
+  The CPU must be in either EL2 (RECOMMENDED in order to have access to
+  the virtualisation extensions) or non-secure EL1.
+
+- Caches, MMUs
+  The MMU must be off.
+  Instruction cache may be on or off.
+  Data cache must be off and invalidated.
+  External caches (if present) must be configured and disabled.
+
+- Architected timers
+  CNTFRQ must be programmed with the timer frequency.
+  If entering the kernel at EL1, CNTHCTL_EL2 must have EL1PCTEN (bit 0)
+  set where available.
+
+- Coherency
+  All CPUs to be booted by the kernel must be part of the same coherency
+  domain on entry to the kernel.  This may require IMPLEMENTATION DEFINED
+  initialisation to enable the receiving of maintenance operations on
+  each CPU.
+
+- System registers
+  All writable architected system registers at the exception level where
+  the kernel image will be entered must be initialised by software at a
+  higher exception level to prevent execution in an UNKNOWN state.
+
+The boot loader is expected to enter the kernel on each CPU in the
+following manner:
+
+- The primary CPU must jump directly to the first instruction of the
+  kernel image.  The device tree blob passed by this CPU must contain
+  for each CPU node:
+
+    1. An 'enable-method' property. Currently, the only supported value
+       for this field is the string "spin-table".
+
+    2. A 'cpu-release-addr' property identifying a 64-bit,
+       zero-initialised memory location.
+
+  It is expected that the bootloader will generate these device tree
+  properties and insert them into the blob prior to kernel entry.
+
+- Any secondary CPUs must spin outside of the kernel in a reserved area
+  of memory (communicated to the kernel by a /memreserve/ region in the
+  device tree) polling their cpu-release-addr location, which must be
+  contained in the reserved region.  A wfe instruction may be inserted
+  to reduce the overhead of the busy-loop and a sev will be issued by
+  the primary CPU.  When a read of the location pointed to by the
+  cpu-release-addr returns a non-zero value, the CPU must jump directly
+  to this value.
+
+- Secondary CPU general-purpose register settings
+  x0 = 0 (reserved for future use)
+  x1 = 0 (reserved for future use)
+  x2 = 0 (reserved for future use)
+  x3 = 0 (reserved for future use)
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt b/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..78a377124ef0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+		     Memory Layout on AArch64 Linux
+		     ==============================
+
+Author: Catalin Marinas <catalin.marinas@arm.com>
+Date  : 20 February 2012
+
+This document describes the virtual memory layout used by the AArch64
+Linux kernel. The architecture allows up to 4 levels of translation
+tables with a 4KB page size and up to 3 levels with a 64KB page size.
+
+AArch64 Linux uses 3 levels of translation tables with the 4KB page
+configuration, allowing 39-bit (512GB) virtual addresses for both user
+and kernel. With 64KB pages, only 2 levels of translation tables are
+used but the memory layout is the same.
+
+User addresses have bits 63:39 set to 0 while the kernel addresses have
+the same bits set to 1. TTBRx selection is given by bit 63 of the
+virtual address. The swapper_pg_dir contains only kernel (global)
+mappings while the user pgd contains only user (non-global) mappings.
+The swapper_pgd_dir address is written to TTBR1 and never written to
+TTBR0.
+
+
+AArch64 Linux memory layout:
+
+Start			End			Size		Use
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+0000000000000000	0000007fffffffff	 512GB		user
+
+ffffff8000000000	ffffffbbfffeffff	~240GB		vmalloc
+
+ffffffbbffff0000	ffffffbbffffffff	  64KB		[guard page]
+
+ffffffbc00000000	ffffffbdffffffff	   8GB		vmemmap
+
+ffffffbe00000000	ffffffbffbbfffff	  ~8GB		[guard, future vmmemap]
+
+ffffffbffbc00000	ffffffbffbdfffff	   2MB		earlyprintk device
+
+ffffffbffbe00000	ffffffbffbe0ffff	  64KB		PCI I/O space
+
+ffffffbbffff0000	ffffffbcffffffff	  ~2MB		[guard]
+
+ffffffbffc000000	ffffffbfffffffff	  64MB		modules
+
+ffffffc000000000	ffffffffffffffff	 256GB		kernel logical memory map
+
+
+Translation table lookup with 4KB pages:
+
++--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+|63    56|55    48|47    40|39    32|31    24|23    16|15     8|7      0|
++--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+ |                 |         |         |         |         |
+ |                 |         |         |         |         v
+ |                 |         |         |         |   [11:0]  in-page offset
+ |                 |         |         |         +-> [20:12] L3 index
+ |                 |         |         +-----------> [29:21] L2 index
+ |                 |         +---------------------> [38:30] L1 index
+ |                 +-------------------------------> [47:39] L0 index (not used)
+ +-------------------------------------------------> [63] TTBR0/1
+
+
+Translation table lookup with 64KB pages:
+
++--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+|63    56|55    48|47    40|39    32|31    24|23    16|15     8|7      0|
++--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+ |                 |    |               |              |
+ |                 |    |               |              v
+ |                 |    |               |            [15:0]  in-page offset
+ |                 |    |               +----------> [28:16] L3 index
+ |                 |    +--------------------------> [41:29] L2 index (only 38:29 used)
+ |                 +-------------------------------> [47:42] L1 index (not used)
+ +-------------------------------------------------> [63] TTBR0/1
+
+When using KVM, the hypervisor maps kernel pages in EL2, at a fixed
+offset from the kernel VA (top 24bits of the kernel VA set to zero):
+
+Start			End			Size		Use
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+0000004000000000	0000007fffffffff	 256GB		kernel objects mapped in HYP
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/tagged-pointers.txt b/Documentation/arm64/tagged-pointers.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d9995f1f51b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/tagged-pointers.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+		Tagged virtual addresses in AArch64 Linux
+		=========================================
+
+Author: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com>
+Date  : 12 June 2013
+
+This document briefly describes the provision of tagged virtual
+addresses in the AArch64 translation system and their potential uses
+in AArch64 Linux.
+
+The kernel configures the translation tables so that translations made
+via TTBR0 (i.e. userspace mappings) have the top byte (bits 63:56) of
+the virtual address ignored by the translation hardware. This frees up
+this byte for application use, with the following caveats:
+
+	(1) The kernel requires that all user addresses passed to EL1
+	    are tagged with tag 0x00. This means that any syscall
+	    parameters containing user virtual addresses *must* have
+	    their top byte cleared before trapping to the kernel.
+
+	(2) Non-zero tags are not preserved when delivering signals.
+	    This means that signal handlers in applications making use
+	    of tags cannot rely on the tag information for user virtual
+	    addresses being maintained for fields inside siginfo_t.
+	    One exception to this rule is for signals raised in response
+	    to watchpoint debug exceptions, where the tag information
+	    will be preserved.
+
+	(3) Special care should be taken when using tagged pointers,
+	    since it is likely that C compilers will not hazard two
+	    virtual addresses differing only in the upper byte.
+
+The architecture prevents the use of a tagged PC, so the upper byte will
+be set to a sign-extension of bit 55 on exception return.
diff --git a/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt b/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt
index 27f2b21a9d5c..d9ca5be9b471 100644
--- a/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt
+++ b/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt
@@ -253,6 +253,8 @@ This performs an atomic exchange operation on the atomic variable v, setting
 the given new value.  It returns the old value that the atomic variable v had
 just before the operation.
 
+atomic_xchg requires explicit memory barriers around the operation.
+
 	int atomic_cmpxchg(atomic_t *v, int old, int new);
 
 This performs an atomic compare exchange operation on the atomic value v,
diff --git a/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt b/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1c732f0c6758
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+Kernel driver lp855x
+====================
+
+Backlight driver for LP855x ICs
+
+Supported chips:
+	Texas Instruments LP8550, LP8551, LP8552, LP8553, LP8556 and LP8557
+
+Author: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+* Brightness control
+
+Brightness can be controlled by the pwm input or the i2c command.
+The lp855x driver supports both cases.
+
+* Device attributes
+
+1) bl_ctl_mode
+Backlight control mode.
+Value : pwm based or register based
+
+2) chip_id
+The lp855x chip id.
+Value : lp8550/lp8551/lp8552/lp8553/lp8556/lp8557
+
+Platform data for lp855x
+------------------------
+
+For supporting platform specific data, the lp855x platform data can be used.
+
+* name : Backlight driver name. If it is not defined, default name is set.
+* device_control : Value of DEVICE CONTROL register.
+* initial_brightness : Initial value of backlight brightness.
+* period_ns : Platform specific PWM period value. unit is nano.
+	     Only valid when brightness is pwm input mode.
+* size_program : Total size of lp855x_rom_data.
+* rom_data : List of new eeprom/eprom registers.
+
+example 1) lp8552 platform data : i2c register mode with new eeprom data
+
+#define EEPROM_A5_ADDR	0xA5
+#define EEPROM_A5_VAL	0x4f	/* EN_VSYNC=0 */
+
+static struct lp855x_rom_data lp8552_eeprom_arr[] = {
+	{EEPROM_A5_ADDR, EEPROM_A5_VAL},
+};
+
+static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8552_pdata = {
+	.name = "lcd-bl",
+	.device_control = I2C_CONFIG(LP8552),
+	.initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT,
+	.size_program = ARRAY_SIZE(lp8552_eeprom_arr),
+	.rom_data = lp8552_eeprom_arr,
+};
+
+example 2) lp8556 platform data : pwm input mode with default rom data
+
+static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8556_pdata = {
+	.device_control = PWM_CONFIG(LP8556),
+	.initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT,
+	.period_ns = 1000000,
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/bcache.txt b/Documentation/bcache.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..32b6c3189d98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/bcache.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,448 @@
+Say you've got a big slow raid 6, and an X-25E or three. Wouldn't it be
+nice if you could use them as cache... Hence bcache.
+
+Wiki and git repositories are at:
+  http://bcache.evilpiepirate.org
+  http://evilpiepirate.org/git/linux-bcache.git
+  http://evilpiepirate.org/git/bcache-tools.git
+
+It's designed around the performance characteristics of SSDs - it only allocates
+in erase block sized buckets, and it uses a hybrid btree/log to track cached
+extants (which can be anywhere from a single sector to the bucket size). It's
+designed to avoid random writes at all costs; it fills up an erase block
+sequentially, then issues a discard before reusing it.
+
+Both writethrough and writeback caching are supported. Writeback defaults to
+off, but can be switched on and off arbitrarily at runtime. Bcache goes to
+great lengths to protect your data - it reliably handles unclean shutdown. (It
+doesn't even have a notion of a clean shutdown; bcache simply doesn't return
+writes as completed until they're on stable storage).
+
+Writeback caching can use most of the cache for buffering writes - writing
+dirty data to the backing device is always done sequentially, scanning from the
+start to the end of the index.
+
+Since random IO is what SSDs excel at, there generally won't be much benefit
+to caching large sequential IO. Bcache detects sequential IO and skips it;
+it also keeps a rolling average of the IO sizes per task, and as long as the
+average is above the cutoff it will skip all IO from that task - instead of
+caching the first 512k after every seek. Backups and large file copies should
+thus entirely bypass the cache.
+
+In the event of a data IO error on the flash it will try to recover by reading
+from disk or invalidating cache entries.  For unrecoverable errors (meta data
+or dirty data), caching is automatically disabled; if dirty data was present
+in the cache it first disables writeback caching and waits for all dirty data
+to be flushed.
+
+Getting started:
+You'll need make-bcache from the bcache-tools repository. Both the cache device
+and backing device must be formatted before use.
+  make-bcache -B /dev/sdb
+  make-bcache -C /dev/sdc
+
+make-bcache has the ability to format multiple devices at the same time - if
+you format your backing devices and cache device at the same time, you won't
+have to manually attach:
+  make-bcache -B /dev/sda /dev/sdb -C /dev/sdc
+
+bcache-tools now ships udev rules, and bcache devices are known to the kernel
+immediately.  Without udev, you can manually register devices like this:
+
+  echo /dev/sdb > /sys/fs/bcache/register
+  echo /dev/sdc > /sys/fs/bcache/register
+
+Registering the backing device makes the bcache device show up in /dev; you can
+now format it and use it as normal. But the first time using a new bcache
+device, it'll be running in passthrough mode until you attach it to a cache.
+See the section on attaching.
+
+The devices show up as:
+
+  /dev/bcache<N>
+
+As well as (with udev):
+
+  /dev/bcache/by-uuid/<uuid>
+  /dev/bcache/by-label/<label>
+
+To get started:
+
+  mkfs.ext4 /dev/bcache0
+  mount /dev/bcache0 /mnt
+
+You can control bcache devices through sysfs at /sys/block/bcache<N>/bcache .
+
+Cache devices are managed as sets; multiple caches per set isn't supported yet
+but will allow for mirroring of metadata and dirty data in the future. Your new
+cache set shows up as /sys/fs/bcache/<UUID>
+
+ATTACHING:
+
+After your cache device and backing device are registered, the backing device
+must be attached to your cache set to enable caching. Attaching a backing
+device to a cache set is done thusly, with the UUID of the cache set in
+/sys/fs/bcache:
+
+  echo <CSET-UUID> > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/attach
+
+This only has to be done once. The next time you reboot, just reregister all
+your bcache devices. If a backing device has data in a cache somewhere, the
+/dev/bcache<N> device won't be created until the cache shows up - particularly
+important if you have writeback caching turned on.
+
+If you're booting up and your cache device is gone and never coming back, you
+can force run the backing device:
+
+  echo 1 > /sys/block/sdb/bcache/running
+
+(You need to use /sys/block/sdb (or whatever your backing device is called), not
+/sys/block/bcache0, because bcache0 doesn't exist yet. If you're using a
+partition, the bcache directory would be at /sys/block/sdb/sdb2/bcache)
+
+The backing device will still use that cache set if it shows up in the future,
+but all the cached data will be invalidated. If there was dirty data in the
+cache, don't expect the filesystem to be recoverable - you will have massive
+filesystem corruption, though ext4's fsck does work miracles.
+
+ERROR HANDLING:
+
+Bcache tries to transparently handle IO errors to/from the cache device without
+affecting normal operation; if it sees too many errors (the threshold is
+configurable, and defaults to 0) it shuts down the cache device and switches all
+the backing devices to passthrough mode.
+
+ - For reads from the cache, if they error we just retry the read from the
+   backing device.
+
+ - For writethrough writes, if the write to the cache errors we just switch to
+   invalidating the data at that lba in the cache (i.e. the same thing we do for
+   a write that bypasses the cache)
+
+ - For writeback writes, we currently pass that error back up to the
+   filesystem/userspace. This could be improved - we could retry it as a write
+   that skips the cache so we don't have to error the write.
+
+ - When we detach, we first try to flush any dirty data (if we were running in
+   writeback mode). It currently doesn't do anything intelligent if it fails to
+   read some of the dirty data, though.
+
+TROUBLESHOOTING PERFORMANCE:
+
+Bcache has a bunch of config options and tunables. The defaults are intended to
+be reasonable for typical desktop and server workloads, but they're not what you
+want for getting the best possible numbers when benchmarking.
+
+ - Bad write performance
+
+   If write performance is not what you expected, you probably wanted to be
+   running in writeback mode, which isn't the default (not due to a lack of
+   maturity, but simply because in writeback mode you'll lose data if something
+   happens to your SSD)
+
+   # echo writeback > /sys/block/bcache0/cache_mode
+
+ - Bad performance, or traffic not going to the SSD that you'd expect
+
+   By default, bcache doesn't cache everything. It tries to skip sequential IO -
+   because you really want to be caching the random IO, and if you copy a 10
+   gigabyte file you probably don't want that pushing 10 gigabytes of randomly
+   accessed data out of your cache.
+
+   But if you want to benchmark reads from cache, and you start out with fio
+   writing an 8 gigabyte test file - so you want to disable that.
+
+   # echo 0 > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/sequential_cutoff
+
+   To set it back to the default (4 mb), do
+
+   # echo 4M > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/sequential_cutoff
+
+ - Traffic's still going to the spindle/still getting cache misses
+
+   In the real world, SSDs don't always keep up with disks - particularly with
+   slower SSDs, many disks being cached by one SSD, or mostly sequential IO. So
+   you want to avoid being bottlenecked by the SSD and having it slow everything
+   down.
+
+   To avoid that bcache tracks latency to the cache device, and gradually
+   throttles traffic if the latency exceeds a threshold (it does this by
+   cranking down the sequential bypass).
+
+   You can disable this if you need to by setting the thresholds to 0:
+
+   # echo 0 > /sys/fs/bcache/<cache set>/congested_read_threshold_us
+   # echo 0 > /sys/fs/bcache/<cache set>/congested_write_threshold_us
+
+   The default is 2000 us (2 milliseconds) for reads, and 20000 for writes.
+
+ - Still getting cache misses, of the same data
+
+   One last issue that sometimes trips people up is actually an old bug, due to
+   the way cache coherency is handled for cache misses. If a btree node is full,
+   a cache miss won't be able to insert a key for the new data and the data
+   won't be written to the cache.
+
+   In practice this isn't an issue because as soon as a write comes along it'll
+   cause the btree node to be split, and you need almost no write traffic for
+   this to not show up enough to be noticeable (especially since bcache's btree
+   nodes are huge and index large regions of the device). But when you're
+   benchmarking, if you're trying to warm the cache by reading a bunch of data
+   and there's no other traffic - that can be a problem.
+
+   Solution: warm the cache by doing writes, or use the testing branch (there's
+   a fix for the issue there).
+
+SYSFS - BACKING DEVICE:
+
+Available at /sys/block/<bdev>/bcache, /sys/block/bcache*/bcache and
+(if attached) /sys/fs/bcache/<cset-uuid>/bdev*
+
+attach
+  Echo the UUID of a cache set to this file to enable caching.
+
+cache_mode
+  Can be one of either writethrough, writeback, writearound or none.
+
+clear_stats
+  Writing to this file resets the running total stats (not the day/hour/5 minute
+  decaying versions).
+
+detach
+  Write to this file to detach from a cache set. If there is dirty data in the
+  cache, it will be flushed first.
+
+dirty_data
+  Amount of dirty data for this backing device in the cache. Continuously
+  updated unlike the cache set's version, but may be slightly off.
+
+label
+  Name of underlying device.
+
+readahead
+  Size of readahead that should be performed.  Defaults to 0.  If set to e.g.
+  1M, it will round cache miss reads up to that size, but without overlapping
+  existing cache entries.
+
+running
+  1 if bcache is running (i.e. whether the /dev/bcache device exists, whether
+  it's in passthrough mode or caching).
+
+sequential_cutoff
+  A sequential IO will bypass the cache once it passes this threshold; the
+  most recent 128 IOs are tracked so sequential IO can be detected even when
+  it isn't all done at once.
+
+sequential_merge
+  If non zero, bcache keeps a list of the last 128 requests submitted to compare
+  against all new requests to determine which new requests are sequential
+  continuations of previous requests for the purpose of determining sequential
+  cutoff. This is necessary if the sequential cutoff value is greater than the
+  maximum acceptable sequential size for any single request. 
+
+state
+  The backing device can be in one of four different states:
+
+  no cache: Has never been attached to a cache set.
+
+  clean: Part of a cache set, and there is no cached dirty data.
+
+  dirty: Part of a cache set, and there is cached dirty data.
+
+  inconsistent: The backing device was forcibly run by the user when there was
+  dirty data cached but the cache set was unavailable; whatever data was on the
+  backing device has likely been corrupted.
+
+stop
+  Write to this file to shut down the bcache device and close the backing
+  device.
+
+writeback_delay
+  When dirty data is written to the cache and it previously did not contain
+  any, waits some number of seconds before initiating writeback. Defaults to
+  30.
+
+writeback_percent
+  If nonzero, bcache tries to keep around this percentage of the cache dirty by
+  throttling background writeback and using a PD controller to smoothly adjust
+  the rate.
+
+writeback_rate
+  Rate in sectors per second - if writeback_percent is nonzero, background
+  writeback is throttled to this rate. Continuously adjusted by bcache but may
+  also be set by the user.
+
+writeback_running
+  If off, writeback of dirty data will not take place at all. Dirty data will
+  still be added to the cache until it is mostly full; only meant for
+  benchmarking. Defaults to on.
+
+SYSFS - BACKING DEVICE STATS:
+
+There are directories with these numbers for a running total, as well as
+versions that decay over the past day, hour and 5 minutes; they're also
+aggregated in the cache set directory as well.
+
+bypassed
+  Amount of IO (both reads and writes) that has bypassed the cache
+
+cache_hits
+cache_misses
+cache_hit_ratio
+  Hits and misses are counted per individual IO as bcache sees them; a
+  partial hit is counted as a miss.
+
+cache_bypass_hits
+cache_bypass_misses
+  Hits and misses for IO that is intended to skip the cache are still counted,
+  but broken out here.
+
+cache_miss_collisions
+  Counts instances where data was going to be inserted into the cache from a
+  cache miss, but raced with a write and data was already present (usually 0
+  since the synchronization for cache misses was rewritten)
+
+cache_readaheads
+  Count of times readahead occurred.
+
+SYSFS - CACHE SET:
+
+Available at /sys/fs/bcache/<cset-uuid>
+
+average_key_size
+  Average data per key in the btree.
+
+bdev<0..n>
+  Symlink to each of the attached backing devices.
+
+block_size
+  Block size of the cache devices.
+
+btree_cache_size
+  Amount of memory currently used by the btree cache
+
+bucket_size
+  Size of buckets
+
+cache<0..n>
+  Symlink to each of the cache devices comprising this cache set. 
+
+cache_available_percent
+  Percentage of cache device which doesn't contain dirty data, and could
+  potentially be used for writeback.  This doesn't mean this space isn't used
+  for clean cached data; the unused statistic (in priority_stats) is typically
+  much lower.
+
+clear_stats
+  Clears the statistics associated with this cache
+
+dirty_data
+  Amount of dirty data is in the cache (updated when garbage collection runs).
+
+flash_vol_create
+  Echoing a size to this file (in human readable units, k/M/G) creates a thinly
+  provisioned volume backed by the cache set.
+
+io_error_halflife
+io_error_limit
+  These determines how many errors we accept before disabling the cache.
+  Each error is decayed by the half life (in # ios).  If the decaying count
+  reaches io_error_limit dirty data is written out and the cache is disabled.
+
+journal_delay_ms
+  Journal writes will delay for up to this many milliseconds, unless a cache
+  flush happens sooner. Defaults to 100.
+
+root_usage_percent
+  Percentage of the root btree node in use.  If this gets too high the node
+  will split, increasing the tree depth.
+
+stop
+  Write to this file to shut down the cache set - waits until all attached
+  backing devices have been shut down.
+
+tree_depth
+  Depth of the btree (A single node btree has depth 0).
+
+unregister
+  Detaches all backing devices and closes the cache devices; if dirty data is
+  present it will disable writeback caching and wait for it to be flushed.
+
+SYSFS - CACHE SET INTERNAL:
+
+This directory also exposes timings for a number of internal operations, with
+separate files for average duration, average frequency, last occurrence and max
+duration: garbage collection, btree read, btree node sorts and btree splits.
+
+active_journal_entries
+  Number of journal entries that are newer than the index.
+
+btree_nodes
+  Total nodes in the btree.
+
+btree_used_percent
+  Average fraction of btree in use.
+
+bset_tree_stats
+  Statistics about the auxiliary search trees
+
+btree_cache_max_chain
+  Longest chain in the btree node cache's hash table
+
+cache_read_races
+  Counts instances where while data was being read from the cache, the bucket
+  was reused and invalidated - i.e. where the pointer was stale after the read
+  completed. When this occurs the data is reread from the backing device.
+
+trigger_gc
+  Writing to this file forces garbage collection to run.
+
+SYSFS - CACHE DEVICE:
+
+Available at /sys/block/<cdev>/bcache
+
+block_size
+  Minimum granularity of writes - should match hardware sector size.
+
+btree_written
+  Sum of all btree writes, in (kilo/mega/giga) bytes
+
+bucket_size
+  Size of buckets
+
+cache_replacement_policy
+  One of either lru, fifo or random.
+
+discard
+  Boolean; if on a discard/TRIM will be issued to each bucket before it is
+  reused. Defaults to off, since SATA TRIM is an unqueued command (and thus
+  slow).
+
+freelist_percent
+  Size of the freelist as a percentage of nbuckets. Can be written to to
+  increase the number of buckets kept on the freelist, which lets you
+  artificially reduce the size of the cache at runtime. Mostly for testing
+  purposes (i.e. testing how different size caches affect your hit rate), but
+  since buckets are discarded when they move on to the freelist will also make
+  the SSD's garbage collection easier by effectively giving it more reserved
+  space.
+
+io_errors
+  Number of errors that have occurred, decayed by io_error_halflife.
+
+metadata_written
+  Sum of all non data writes (btree writes and all other metadata).
+
+nbuckets
+  Total buckets in this cache
+
+priority_stats
+  Statistics about how recently data in the cache has been accessed.
+  This can reveal your working set size.  Unused is the percentage of
+  the cache that doesn't contain any data.  Metadata is bcache's
+  metadata overhead.  Average is the average priority of cache buckets.
+  Next is a list of quantiles with the priority threshold of each.
+
+written
+  Sum of all data that has been written to the cache; comparison with
+  btree_written gives the amount of write inflation in bcache.
diff --git a/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt b/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt
index d36b01f778b9..d245f39c3d01 100644
--- a/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
 
 3. But there are some exceptions
     - Kernel permit the identical GPIO be requested both as GPIO and GPIO
-    interrut.
+    interrupt.
     Some drivers, like gpio-keys, need this behavior. Kernel only print out
     warning messages like,
 	bfin-gpio: GPIO 24 is already reserved by gpio-keys: BTN0, and you are
diff --git a/Documentation/block/00-INDEX b/Documentation/block/00-INDEX
index d111e3b23db0..929d9904f74b 100644
--- a/Documentation/block/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/block/00-INDEX
@@ -3,15 +3,23 @@
 biodoc.txt
 	- Notes on the Generic Block Layer Rewrite in Linux 2.5
 capability.txt
-	- Generic Block Device Capability (/sys/block/<disk>/capability)
+	- Generic Block Device Capability (/sys/block/<device>/capability)
+cfq-iosched.txt
+	- CFQ IO scheduler tunables
+cmdline-partition.txt
+	- how to specify block device partitions on kernel command line
+data-integrity.txt
+	- Block data integrity
 deadline-iosched.txt
 	- Deadline IO scheduler tunables
 ioprio.txt
 	- Block io priorities (in CFQ scheduler)
+queue-sysfs.txt
+	- Queue's sysfs entries
 request.txt
 	- The members of struct request (in include/linux/blkdev.h)
 stat.txt
-	- Block layer statistics in /sys/block/<dev>/stat
+	- Block layer statistics in /sys/block/<device>/stat
 switching-sched.txt
 	- Switching I/O schedulers at runtime
 writeback_cache_control.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt
index e418dc0a7086..8df5e8e6dceb 100644
--- a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt
@@ -465,7 +465,6 @@ struct bio {
        bio_end_io_t	*bi_end_io;  /* bi_end_io (bio) */
        atomic_t		bi_cnt;	     /* pin count: free when it hits zero */
        void             *bi_private;
-       bio_destructor_t *bi_destructor; /* bi_destructor (bio) */
 };
 
 With this multipage bio design:
@@ -647,10 +646,6 @@ for a non-clone bio. There are the 6 pools setup for different size biovecs,
 so bio_alloc(gfp_mask, nr_iovecs) will allocate a vec_list of the
 given size from these slabs.
 
-The bi_destructor() routine takes into account the possibility of the bio
-having originated from a different source (see later discussions on
-n/w to block transfers and kvec_cb)
-
 The bio_get() routine may be used to hold an extra reference on a bio prior
 to i/o submission, if the bio fields are likely to be accessed after the
 i/o is issued (since the bio may otherwise get freed in case i/o completion
diff --git a/Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt b/Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt
index 6d670f570451..f3bc72945cbd 100644
--- a/Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt
+++ b/Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,14 @@
+CFQ (Complete Fairness Queueing)
+===============================
+
+The main aim of CFQ scheduler is to provide a fair allocation of the disk
+I/O bandwidth for all the processes which requests an I/O operation.
+
+CFQ maintains the per process queue for the processes which request I/O
+operation(synchronous requests). In case of asynchronous requests, all the
+requests from all the processes are batched together according to their
+process's I/O priority.
+
 CFQ ioscheduler tunables
 ========================
 
@@ -25,6 +36,171 @@ there are multiple spindles behind single LUN (Host based hardware RAID
 controller or for storage arrays), setting slice_idle=0 might end up in better
 throughput and acceptable latencies.
 
+back_seek_max
+-------------
+This specifies, given in Kbytes, the maximum "distance" for backward seeking.
+The distance is the amount of space from the current head location to the
+sectors that are backward in terms of distance.
+
+This parameter allows the scheduler to anticipate requests in the "backward"
+direction and consider them as being the "next" if they are within this
+distance from the current head location.
+
+back_seek_penalty
+-----------------
+This parameter is used to compute the cost of backward seeking. If the
+backward distance of request is just 1/back_seek_penalty from a "front"
+request, then the seeking cost of two requests is considered equivalent.
+
+So scheduler will not bias toward one or the other request (otherwise scheduler
+will bias toward front request). Default value of back_seek_penalty is 2.
+
+fifo_expire_async
+-----------------
+This parameter is used to set the timeout of asynchronous requests. Default
+value of this is 248ms.
+
+fifo_expire_sync
+----------------
+This parameter is used to set the timeout of synchronous requests. Default
+value of this is 124ms. In case to favor synchronous requests over asynchronous
+one, this value should be decreased relative to fifo_expire_async.
+
+group_idle
+-----------
+This parameter forces idling at the CFQ group level instead of CFQ
+queue level. This was introduced after a bottleneck was observed
+in higher end storage due to idle on sequential queue and allow dispatch
+from a single queue. The idea with this parameter is that it can be run with
+slice_idle=0 and group_idle=8, so that idling does not happen on individual
+queues in the group but happens overall on the group and thus still keeps the
+IO controller working.
+Not idling on individual queues in the group will dispatch requests from
+multiple queues in the group at the same time and achieve higher throughput
+on higher end storage.
+
+Default value for this parameter is 8ms.
+
+latency
+-------
+This parameter is used to enable/disable the latency mode of the CFQ
+scheduler. If latency mode (called low_latency) is enabled, CFQ tries
+to recompute the slice time for each process based on the target_latency set
+for the system. This favors fairness over throughput. Disabling low
+latency (setting it to 0) ignores target latency, allowing each process in the
+system to get a full time slice.
+
+By default low latency mode is enabled.
+
+target_latency
+--------------
+This parameter is used to calculate the time slice for a process if cfq's
+latency mode is enabled. It will ensure that sync requests have an estimated
+latency. But if sequential workload is higher(e.g. sequential read),
+then to meet the latency constraints, throughput may decrease because of less
+time for each process to issue I/O request before the cfq queue is switched.
+
+Though this can be overcome by disabling the latency_mode, it may increase
+the read latency for some applications. This parameter allows for changing
+target_latency through the sysfs interface which can provide the balanced
+throughput and read latency.
+
+Default value for target_latency is 300ms.
+
+slice_async
+-----------
+This parameter is same as of slice_sync but for asynchronous queue. The
+default value is 40ms.
+
+slice_async_rq
+--------------
+This parameter is used to limit the dispatching of asynchronous request to
+device request queue in queue's slice time. The maximum number of request that
+are allowed to be dispatched also depends upon the io priority. Default value
+for this is 2.
+
+slice_sync
+----------
+When a queue is selected for execution, the queues IO requests are only
+executed for a certain amount of time(time_slice) before switching to another
+queue. This parameter is used to calculate the time slice of synchronous
+queue.
+
+time_slice is computed using the below equation:-
+time_slice = slice_sync + (slice_sync/5 * (4 - prio)). To increase the
+time_slice of synchronous queue, increase the value of slice_sync. Default
+value is 100ms.
+
+quantum
+-------
+This specifies the number of request dispatched to the device queue. In a
+queue's time slice, a request will not be dispatched if the number of request
+in the device exceeds this parameter. This parameter is used for synchronous
+request.
+
+In case of storage with several disk, this setting can limit the parallel
+processing of request. Therefore, increasing the value can improve the
+performance although this can cause the latency of some I/O to increase due
+to more number of requests.
+
+CFQ Group scheduling
+====================
+
+CFQ supports blkio cgroup and has "blkio." prefixed files in each
+blkio cgroup directory. It is weight-based and there are four knobs
+for configuration - weight[_device] and leaf_weight[_device].
+Internal cgroup nodes (the ones with children) can also have tasks in
+them, so the former two configure how much proportion the cgroup as a
+whole is entitled to at its parent's level while the latter two
+configure how much proportion the tasks in the cgroup have compared to
+its direct children.
+
+Another way to think about it is assuming that each internal node has
+an implicit leaf child node which hosts all the tasks whose weight is
+configured by leaf_weight[_device]. Let's assume a blkio hierarchy
+composed of five cgroups - root, A, B, AA and AB - with the following
+weights where the names represent the hierarchy.
+
+        weight leaf_weight
+ root :  125    125
+ A    :  500    750
+ B    :  250    500
+ AA   :  500    500
+ AB   : 1000    500
+
+root never has a parent making its weight is meaningless. For backward
+compatibility, weight is always kept in sync with leaf_weight. B, AA
+and AB have no child and thus its tasks have no children cgroup to
+compete with. They always get 100% of what the cgroup won at the
+parent level. Considering only the weights which matter, the hierarchy
+looks like the following.
+
+          root
+       /    |   \
+      A     B    leaf
+     500   250   125
+   /  |  \
+  AA  AB  leaf
+ 500 1000 750
+
+If all cgroups have active IOs and competing with each other, disk
+time will be distributed like the following.
+
+Distribution below root. The total active weight at this level is
+A:500 + B:250 + C:125 = 875.
+
+ root-leaf :   125 /  875      =~ 14%
+ A         :   500 /  875      =~ 57%
+ B(-leaf)  :   250 /  875      =~ 28%
+
+A has children and further distributes its 57% among the children and
+the implicit leaf node. The total active weight at this level is
+AA:500 + AB:1000 + A-leaf:750 = 2250.
+
+ A-leaf    : ( 750 / 2250) * A =~ 19%
+ AA(-leaf) : ( 500 / 2250) * A =~ 12%
+ AB(-leaf) : (1000 / 2250) * A =~ 25%
+
 CFQ IOPS Mode for group scheduling
 ===================================
 Basic CFQ design is to provide priority based time slices. Higher priority
diff --git a/Documentation/block/cmdline-partition.txt b/Documentation/block/cmdline-partition.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..525b9f6d7fb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/block/cmdline-partition.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+Embedded device command line partition parsing
+=====================================================================
+
+Support for reading the block device partition table from the command line.
+It is typically used for fixed block (eMMC) embedded devices.
+It has no MBR, so saves storage space. Bootloader can be easily accessed
+by absolute address of data on the block device.
+Users can easily change the partition.
+
+The format for the command line is just like mtdparts:
+
+blkdevparts=<blkdev-def>[;<blkdev-def>]
+  <blkdev-def> := <blkdev-id>:<partdef>[,<partdef>]
+    <partdef> := <size>[@<offset>](part-name)
+
+<blkdev-id>
+    block device disk name, embedded device used fixed block device,
+    it's disk name also fixed. such as: mmcblk0, mmcblk1, mmcblk0boot0.
+
+<size>
+    partition size, in bytes, such as: 512, 1m, 1G.
+
+<offset>
+    partition start address, in bytes.
+
+(part-name)
+    partition name, kernel send uevent with "PARTNAME". application can create
+    a link to block device partition with the name "PARTNAME".
+    user space application can access partition by partition name.
+
+Example:
+    eMMC disk name is "mmcblk0" and "mmcblk0boot0"
+
+  bootargs:
+    'blkdevparts=mmcblk0:1G(data0),1G(data1),-;mmcblk0boot0:1m(boot),-(kernel)'
+
+  dmesg:
+    mmcblk0: p1(data0) p2(data1) p3()
+    mmcblk0boot0: p1(boot) p2(kernel)
diff --git a/Documentation/block/queue-sysfs.txt b/Documentation/block/queue-sysfs.txt
index d8147b336c35..7d2d046c265f 100644
--- a/Documentation/block/queue-sysfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/block/queue-sysfs.txt
@@ -9,20 +9,71 @@ These files are the ones found in the /sys/block/xxx/queue/ directory.
 Files denoted with a RO postfix are readonly and the RW postfix means
 read-write.
 
+add_random (RW)
+----------------
+This file allows to trun off the disk entropy contribution. Default
+value of this file is '1'(on).
+
+discard_granularity (RO)
+-----------------------
+This shows the size of internal allocation of the device in bytes, if
+reported by the device. A value of '0' means device does not support
+the discard functionality.
+
+discard_max_bytes (RO)
+----------------------
+Devices that support discard functionality may have internal limits on
+the number of bytes that can be trimmed or unmapped in a single operation.
+The discard_max_bytes parameter is set by the device driver to the maximum
+number of bytes that can be discarded in a single operation. Discard
+requests issued to the device must not exceed this limit. A discard_max_bytes
+value of 0 means that the device does not support discard functionality.
+
+discard_zeroes_data (RO)
+------------------------
+When read, this file will show if the discarded block are zeroed by the
+device or not. If its value is '1' the blocks are zeroed otherwise not.
+
 hw_sector_size (RO)
 -------------------
 This is the hardware sector size of the device, in bytes.
 
+iostats (RW)
+-------------
+This file is used to control (on/off) the iostats accounting of the
+disk.
+
+logical_block_size (RO)
+-----------------------
+This is the logcal block size of the device, in bytes.
+
 max_hw_sectors_kb (RO)
 ----------------------
 This is the maximum number of kilobytes supported in a single data transfer.
 
+max_integrity_segments (RO)
+---------------------------
+When read, this file shows the max limit of integrity segments as
+set by block layer which a hardware controller can handle.
+
 max_sectors_kb (RW)
 -------------------
 This is the maximum number of kilobytes that the block layer will allow
 for a filesystem request. Must be smaller than or equal to the maximum
 size allowed by the hardware.
 
+max_segments (RO)
+-----------------
+Maximum number of segments of the device.
+
+max_segment_size (RO)
+---------------------
+Maximum segment size of the device.
+
+minimum_io_size (RO)
+--------------------
+This is the smallest preferred io size reported by the device.
+
 nomerges (RW)
 -------------
 This enables the user to disable the lookup logic involved with IO
@@ -38,11 +89,31 @@ read or write requests. Note that the total allocated number may be twice
 this amount, since it applies only to reads or writes (not the accumulated
 sum).
 
+To avoid priority inversion through request starvation, a request
+queue maintains a separate request pool per each cgroup when
+CONFIG_BLK_CGROUP is enabled, and this parameter applies to each such
+per-block-cgroup request pool.  IOW, if there are N block cgroups,
+each request queue may have up to N request pools, each independently
+regulated by nr_requests.
+
+optimal_io_size (RO)
+--------------------
+This is the optimal io size reported by the device.
+
+physical_block_size (RO)
+------------------------
+This is the physical block size of device, in bytes.
+
 read_ahead_kb (RW)
 ------------------
 Maximum number of kilobytes to read-ahead for filesystems on this block
 device.
 
+rotational (RW)
+---------------
+This file is used to stat if the device is of rotational type or
+non-rotational type.
+
 rq_affinity (RW)
 ----------------
 If this option is '1', the block layer will migrate request completions to the
diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt
index 6ccab88705cb..470fe4b5e379 100644
--- a/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ you can put:
 
  options floppy omnibook messages
 
-in /etc/modprobe.conf.
+in a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/.
 
 
  The floppy driver related options are:
diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/nbd.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/nbd.txt
index aeb93ffe6416..271e607304da 100644
--- a/Documentation/blockdev/nbd.txt
+++ b/Documentation/blockdev/nbd.txt
@@ -4,43 +4,13 @@
    can use a remote server as one of its block devices. So every time
    the client computer wants to read, e.g., /dev/nb0, it sends a
    request over TCP to the server, which will reply with the data read.
-   This can be used for stations with low disk space (or even diskless -
-   if you boot from floppy) to borrow disk space from another computer.
-   Unlike NFS, it is possible to put any filesystem on it, etc. It should
-   even be possible to use NBD as a root filesystem (I've never tried),
-   but it requires a user-level program to be in the initrd to start.
-   It also allows you to run block-device in user land (making server
-   and client physically the same computer, communicating using loopback).
-   
-   Current state: It currently works. Network block device is stable.
-   I originally thought that it was impossible to swap over TCP. It
-   turned out not to be true - swapping over TCP now works and seems
-   to be deadlock-free, but it requires heavy patches into Linux's
-   network layer.
-   
+   This can be used for stations with low disk space (or even diskless)
+   to borrow disk space from another computer.
+   Unlike NFS, it is possible to put any filesystem on it, etc.
+
    For more information, or to download the nbd-client and nbd-server
    tools, go to http://nbd.sf.net/.
 
-   Howto: To setup nbd, you can simply do the following:
-
-   First, serve a device or file from a remote server:
-
-   nbd-server <port-number> <device-or-file-to-serve-to-client>
-
-   e.g.,
-	root@server1 # nbd-server 1234 /dev/sdb1
-
-	(serves sdb1 partition on TCP port 1234)
-
-   Then, on the local (client) system:
-
-   nbd-client <server-name-or-IP> <server-port-number> /dev/nb[0-n]
-
-   e.g.,
-	root@client1 # nbd-client server1 1234 /dev/nb0
-
-	(creates the nb0 device on client1)
-
    The nbd kernel module need only be installed on the client
    system, as the nbd-server is completely in userspace. In fact,
    the nbd-server has been successfully ported to other operating
diff --git a/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt b/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cc9ce57e0a26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+GPMC (General Purpose Memory Controller):
+=========================================
+
+GPMC is an unified memory controller dedicated to interfacing external
+memory devices like
+ * Asynchronous SRAM like memories and application specific integrated
+   circuit devices.
+ * Asynchronous, synchronous, and page mode burst NOR flash devices
+   NAND flash
+ * Pseudo-SRAM devices
+
+GPMC is found on Texas Instruments SoC's (OMAP based)
+IP details: http://www.ti.com/lit/pdf/spruh73 section 7.1
+
+
+GPMC generic timing calculation:
+================================
+
+GPMC has certain timings that has to be programmed for proper
+functioning of the peripheral, while peripheral has another set of
+timings. To have peripheral work with gpmc, peripheral timings has to
+be translated to the form gpmc can understand. The way it has to be
+translated depends on the connected peripheral. Also there is a
+dependency for certain gpmc timings on gpmc clock frequency. Hence a
+generic timing routine was developed to achieve above requirements.
+
+Generic routine provides a generic method to calculate gpmc timings
+from gpmc peripheral timings. struct gpmc_device_timings fields has to
+be updated with timings from the datasheet of the peripheral that is
+connected to gpmc. A few of the peripheral timings can be fed either
+in time or in cycles, provision to handle this scenario has been
+provided (refer struct gpmc_device_timings definition). It may so
+happen that timing as specified by peripheral datasheet is not present
+in timing structure, in this scenario, try to correlate peripheral
+timing to the one available. If that doesn't work, try to add a new
+field as required by peripheral, educate generic timing routine to
+handle it, make sure that it does not break any of the existing.
+Then there may be cases where peripheral datasheet doesn't mention
+certain fields of struct gpmc_device_timings, zero those entries.
+
+Generic timing routine has been verified to work properly on
+multiple onenand's and tusb6010 peripherals.
+
+A word of caution: generic timing routine has been developed based
+on understanding of gpmc timings, peripheral timings, available
+custom timing routines, a kind of reverse engineering without
+most of the datasheets & hardware (to be exact none of those supported
+in mainline having custom timing routine) and by simulation.
+
+gpmc timing dependency on peripheral timings:
+[<gpmc_timing>: <peripheral timing1>, <peripheral timing2> ...]
+
+1. common
+cs_on: t_ceasu
+adv_on: t_avdasu, t_ceavd
+
+2. sync common
+sync_clk: clk
+page_burst_access: t_bacc
+clk_activation: t_ces, t_avds
+
+3. read async muxed
+adv_rd_off: t_avdp_r
+oe_on: t_oeasu, t_aavdh
+access: t_iaa, t_oe, t_ce, t_aa
+rd_cycle: t_rd_cycle, t_cez_r, t_oez
+
+4. read async non-muxed
+adv_rd_off: t_avdp_r
+oe_on: t_oeasu
+access: t_iaa, t_oe, t_ce, t_aa
+rd_cycle: t_rd_cycle, t_cez_r, t_oez
+
+5. read sync muxed
+adv_rd_off: t_avdp_r, t_avdh
+oe_on: t_oeasu, t_ach, cyc_aavdh_oe
+access: t_iaa, cyc_iaa, cyc_oe
+rd_cycle: t_cez_r, t_oez, t_ce_rdyz
+
+6. read sync non-muxed
+adv_rd_off: t_avdp_r
+oe_on: t_oeasu
+access: t_iaa, cyc_iaa, cyc_oe
+rd_cycle: t_cez_r, t_oez, t_ce_rdyz
+
+7. write async muxed
+adv_wr_off: t_avdp_w
+we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: t_weasu, t_aavdh, cyc_aavhd_we
+we_off: t_wpl
+cs_wr_off: t_wph
+wr_cycle: t_cez_w, t_wr_cycle
+
+8. write async non-muxed
+adv_wr_off: t_avdp_w
+we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: t_weasu
+we_off: t_wpl
+cs_wr_off: t_wph
+wr_cycle: t_cez_w, t_wr_cycle
+
+9. write sync muxed
+adv_wr_off: t_avdp_w, t_avdh
+we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: t_weasu, t_rdyo, t_aavdh, cyc_aavhd_we
+we_off: t_wpl, cyc_wpl
+cs_wr_off: t_wph
+wr_cycle: t_cez_w, t_ce_rdyz
+
+10. write sync non-muxed
+adv_wr_off: t_avdp_w
+we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: t_weasu, t_rdyo
+we_off: t_wpl, cyc_wpl
+cs_wr_off: t_wph
+wr_cycle: t_cez_w, t_ce_rdyz
+
+
+Note: Many of gpmc timings are dependent on other gpmc timings (a few
+gpmc timings purely dependent on other gpmc timings, a reason that
+some of the gpmc timings are missing above), and it will result in
+indirect dependency of peripheral timings to gpmc timings other than
+mentioned above, refer timing routine for more details. To know what
+these peripheral timings correspond to, please see explanations in
+struct gpmc_device_timings definition. And for gpmc timings refer
+IP details (link above).
diff --git a/Documentation/cachetlb.txt b/Documentation/cachetlb.txt
index 9b728dc17535..d79b008e4a32 100644
--- a/Documentation/cachetlb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cachetlb.txt
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ changes occur:
 	interface must make sure that any previous page table
 	modifications for the address space 'vma->vm_mm' in the range
 	'start' to 'end-1' will be visible to the cpu.  That is, after
-	running, here will be no entries in the TLB for 'mm' for
+	running, there will be no entries in the TLB for 'mm' for
 	virtual addresses in the range 'start' to 'end-1'.
 
 	The "vma" is the backing store being used for the region.
@@ -375,8 +375,8 @@ maps this page at its virtual address.
 
   void flush_icache_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page)
 	All the functionality of flush_icache_page can be implemented in
-	flush_dcache_page and update_mmu_cache. In 2.7 the hope is to
-	remove this interface completely.
+	flush_dcache_page and update_mmu_cache. In the future, the hope
+	is to remove this interface completely.
 
 The final category of APIs is for I/O to deliberately aliased address
 ranges inside the kernel.  Such aliases are set up by use of the
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/00-INDEX b/Documentation/cgroups/00-INDEX
index 3f58fa3d6d00..bc461b6425a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/00-INDEX
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
 00-INDEX
 	- this file
+blkio-controller.txt
+	- Description for Block IO Controller, implementation and usage details.
 cgroups.txt
 	- Control Groups definition, implementation details, examples and API.
 cpuacct.txt
@@ -10,9 +12,15 @@ devices.txt
 	- Device Whitelist Controller; description, interface and security.
 freezer-subsystem.txt
 	- checkpointing; rationale to not use signals, interface.
+hugetlb.txt
+	- HugeTLB Controller implementation and usage details.
 memcg_test.txt
 	- Memory Resource Controller; implementation details.
 memory.txt
 	- Memory Resource Controller; design, accounting, interface, testing.
+net_cls.txt
+	- Network classifier cgroups details and usages.
+net_prio.txt
+	- Network priority cgroups details and usages.
 resource_counter.txt
 	- Resource Counter API.
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt
index b4b1fb3a83f0..cd556b914786 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Throttling/Upper Limit policy
         mount -t cgroup -o blkio none /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio
 
 - Specify a bandwidth rate on particular device for root group. The format
-  for policy is "<major>:<minor>  <byes_per_second>".
+  for policy is "<major>:<minor>  <bytes_per_second>".
 
         echo "8:16  1048576" > /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/blkio.throttle.read_bps_device
 
@@ -94,13 +94,13 @@ Throttling/Upper Limit policy
 
 Hierarchical Cgroups
 ====================
-- Currently none of the IO control policy supports hierarchical groups. But
-  cgroup interface does allow creation of hierarchical cgroups and internally
-  IO policies treat them as flat hierarchy.
 
-  So this patch will allow creation of cgroup hierarchcy but at the backend
-  everything will be treated as flat. So if somebody created a hierarchy like
-  as follows.
+Both CFQ and throttling implement hierarchy support; however,
+throttling's hierarchy support is enabled iff "sane_behavior" is
+enabled from cgroup side, which currently is a development option and
+not publicly available.
+
+If somebody created a hierarchy like as follows.
 
 			root
 			/  \
@@ -108,17 +108,20 @@ Hierarchical Cgroups
 			|
 		     test3
 
-  CFQ and throttling will practically treat all groups at same level.
+CFQ by default and throttling with "sane_behavior" will handle the
+hierarchy correctly.  For details on CFQ hierarchy support, refer to
+Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt.  For throttling, all limits apply
+to the whole subtree while all statistics are local to the IOs
+directly generated by tasks in that cgroup.
+
+Throttling without "sane_behavior" enabled from cgroup side will
+practically treat all groups at same level as if it looks like the
+following.
 
 				pivot
 			     /  /   \  \
 			root  test1 test2  test3
 
-  Down the line we can implement hierarchical accounting/control support
-  and also introduce a new cgroup file "use_hierarchy" which will control
-  whether cgroup hierarchy is viewed as flat or hierarchical by the policy..
-  This is how memory controller also has implemented the things.
-
 Various user visible config options
 ===================================
 CONFIG_BLK_CGROUP
@@ -172,6 +175,12 @@ Proportional weight policy files
 	  dev     weight
 	  8:16    300
 
+- blkio.leaf_weight[_device]
+	- Equivalents of blkio.weight[_device] for the purpose of
+          deciding how much weight tasks in the given cgroup has while
+          competing with the cgroup's child cgroups. For details,
+          please refer to Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt.
+
 - blkio.time
 	- disk time allocated to cgroup per device in milliseconds. First
 	  two fields specify the major and minor number of the device and
@@ -279,6 +288,11 @@ Proportional weight policy files
 	  and minor number of the device and third field specifies the number
 	  of times a group was dequeued from a particular device.
 
+- blkio.*_recursive
+	- Recursive version of various stats. These files show the
+          same information as their non-recursive counterparts but
+          include stats from all the descendant cgroups.
+
 Throttling/Upper limit policy files
 -----------------------------------
 - blkio.throttle.read_bps_device
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e082f96dc12..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
-/*
- * cgroup_event_listener.c - Simple listener of cgroup events
- *
- * Copyright (C) Kirill A. Shutemov <kirill@shutemov.name>
- */
-
-#include <assert.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <libgen.h>
-#include <limits.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
-
-#include <sys/eventfd.h>
-
-#define USAGE_STR "Usage: cgroup_event_listener <path-to-control-file> <args>\n"
-
-int main(int argc, char **argv)
-{
-	int efd = -1;
-	int cfd = -1;
-	int event_control = -1;
-	char event_control_path[PATH_MAX];
-	char line[LINE_MAX];
-	int ret;
-
-	if (argc != 3) {
-		fputs(USAGE_STR, stderr);
-		return 1;
-	}
-
-	cfd = open(argv[1], O_RDONLY);
-	if (cfd == -1) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open %s: %s\n", argv[1],
-				strerror(errno));
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	ret = snprintf(event_control_path, PATH_MAX, "%s/cgroup.event_control",
-			dirname(argv[1]));
-	if (ret >= PATH_MAX) {
-		fputs("Path to cgroup.event_control is too long\n", stderr);
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	event_control = open(event_control_path, O_WRONLY);
-	if (event_control == -1) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open %s: %s\n", event_control_path,
-				strerror(errno));
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	efd = eventfd(0, 0);
-	if (efd == -1) {
-		perror("eventfd() failed");
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	ret = snprintf(line, LINE_MAX, "%d %d %s", efd, cfd, argv[2]);
-	if (ret >= LINE_MAX) {
-		fputs("Arguments string is too long\n", stderr);
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	ret = write(event_control, line, strlen(line) + 1);
-	if (ret == -1) {
-		perror("Cannot write to cgroup.event_control");
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	while (1) {
-		uint64_t result;
-
-		ret = read(efd, &result, sizeof(result));
-		if (ret == -1) {
-			if (errno == EINTR)
-				continue;
-			perror("Cannot read from eventfd");
-			break;
-		}
-		assert(ret == sizeof(result));
-
-		ret = access(event_control_path, W_OK);
-		if ((ret == -1) && (errno == ENOENT)) {
-				puts("The cgroup seems to have removed.");
-				ret = 0;
-				break;
-		}
-
-		if (ret == -1) {
-			perror("cgroup.event_control "
-					"is not accessible any more");
-			break;
-		}
-
-		printf("%s %s: crossed\n", argv[1], argv[2]);
-	}
-
-out:
-	if (efd >= 0)
-		close(efd);
-	if (event_control >= 0)
-		close(event_control);
-	if (cfd >= 0)
-		close(cfd);
-
-	return (ret != 0);
-}
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
index 8e74980ab385..638bf17ff869 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
@@ -29,7 +29,8 @@ CONTENTS:
   3.1 Overview
   3.2 Synchronization
   3.3 Subsystem API
-4. Questions
+4. Extended attributes usage
+5. Questions
 
 1. Control Groups
 =================
@@ -62,9 +63,9 @@ an instance of the cgroup virtual filesystem associated with it.
 At any one time there may be multiple active hierarchies of task
 cgroups. Each hierarchy is a partition of all tasks in the system.
 
-User level code may create and destroy cgroups by name in an
+User-level code may create and destroy cgroups by name in an
 instance of the cgroup virtual file system, specify and query to
-which cgroup a task is assigned, and list the task pids assigned to
+which cgroup a task is assigned, and list the task PIDs assigned to
 a cgroup. Those creations and assignments only affect the hierarchy
 associated with that instance of the cgroup file system.
 
@@ -72,7 +73,7 @@ On their own, the only use for cgroups is for simple job
 tracking. The intention is that other subsystems hook into the generic
 cgroup support to provide new attributes for cgroups, such as
 accounting/limiting the resources which processes in a cgroup can
-access. For example, cpusets (see Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt) allows
+access. For example, cpusets (see Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt) allow
 you to associate a set of CPUs and a set of memory nodes with the
 tasks in each cgroup.
 
@@ -80,11 +81,11 @@ tasks in each cgroup.
 ----------------------------
 
 There are multiple efforts to provide process aggregations in the
-Linux kernel, mainly for resource tracking purposes. Such efforts
+Linux kernel, mainly for resource-tracking purposes. Such efforts
 include cpusets, CKRM/ResGroups, UserBeanCounters, and virtual server
 namespaces. These all require the basic notion of a
 grouping/partitioning of processes, with newly forked processes ending
-in the same group (cgroup) as their parent process.
+up in the same group (cgroup) as their parent process.
 
 The kernel cgroup patch provides the minimum essential kernel
 mechanisms required to efficiently implement such groups. It has
@@ -127,14 +128,14 @@ following lines:
                                / \
                Professors (15%)  students (5%)
 
-Browsers like Firefox/Lynx go into the WWW network class, while (k)nfsd go
-into NFS network class.
+Browsers like Firefox/Lynx go into the WWW network class, while (k)nfsd goes
+into the NFS network class.
 
 At the same time Firefox/Lynx will share an appropriate CPU/Memory class
 depending on who launched it (prof/student).
 
 With the ability to classify tasks differently for different resources
-(by putting those resource subsystems in different hierarchies) then
+(by putting those resource subsystems in different hierarchies),
 the admin can easily set up a script which receives exec notifications
 and depending on who is launching the browser he can
 
@@ -145,19 +146,19 @@ a separate cgroup for every browser launched and associate it with
 appropriate network and other resource class.  This may lead to
 proliferation of such cgroups.
 
-Also lets say that the administrator would like to give enhanced network
+Also let's say that the administrator would like to give enhanced network
 access temporarily to a student's browser (since it is night and the user
-wants to do online gaming :))  OR give one of the students simulation
-apps enhanced CPU power,
+wants to do online gaming :))  OR give one of the student's simulation
+apps enhanced CPU power.
 
-With ability to write pids directly to resource classes, it's just a
-matter of :
+With ability to write PIDs directly to resource classes, it's just a
+matter of:
 
        # echo pid > /sys/fs/cgroup/network/<new_class>/tasks
        (after some time)
        # echo pid > /sys/fs/cgroup/network/<orig_class>/tasks
 
-Without this ability, he would have to split the cgroup into
+Without this ability, the administrator would have to split the cgroup into
 multiple separate ones and then associate the new cgroups with the
 new resource classes.
 
@@ -184,20 +185,20 @@ Control Groups extends the kernel as follows:
    field of each task_struct using the css_set, anchored at
    css_set->tasks.
 
- - A cgroup hierarchy filesystem can be mounted  for browsing and
+ - A cgroup hierarchy filesystem can be mounted for browsing and
    manipulation from user space.
 
- - You can list all the tasks (by pid) attached to any cgroup.
+ - You can list all the tasks (by PID) attached to any cgroup.
 
 The implementation of cgroups requires a few, simple hooks
-into the rest of the kernel, none in performance critical paths:
+into the rest of the kernel, none in performance-critical paths:
 
  - in init/main.c, to initialize the root cgroups and initial
    css_set at system boot.
 
  - in fork and exit, to attach and detach a task from its css_set.
 
-In addition a new file system, of type "cgroup" may be mounted, to
+In addition, a new file system of type "cgroup" may be mounted, to
 enable browsing and modifying the cgroups presently known to the
 kernel.  When mounting a cgroup hierarchy, you may specify a
 comma-separated list of subsystems to mount as the filesystem mount
@@ -230,13 +231,13 @@ as the path relative to the root of the cgroup file system.
 Each cgroup is represented by a directory in the cgroup file system
 containing the following files describing that cgroup:
 
- - tasks: list of tasks (by pid) attached to that cgroup.  This list
-   is not guaranteed to be sorted.  Writing a thread id into this file
+ - tasks: list of tasks (by PID) attached to that cgroup.  This list
+   is not guaranteed to be sorted.  Writing a thread ID into this file
    moves the thread into this cgroup.
- - cgroup.procs: list of tgids in the cgroup.  This list is not
-   guaranteed to be sorted or free of duplicate tgids, and userspace
+ - cgroup.procs: list of thread group IDs in the cgroup.  This list is
+   not guaranteed to be sorted or free of duplicate TGIDs, and userspace
    should sort/uniquify the list if this property is required.
-   Writing a thread group id into this file moves all threads in that
+   Writing a thread group ID into this file moves all threads in that
    group into this cgroup.
  - notify_on_release flag: run the release agent on exit?
  - release_agent: the path to use for release notifications (this file
@@ -261,7 +262,7 @@ cgroup file system directories.
 
 When a task is moved from one cgroup to another, it gets a new
 css_set pointer - if there's an already existing css_set with the
-desired collection of cgroups then that group is reused, else a new
+desired collection of cgroups then that group is reused, otherwise a new
 css_set is allocated. The appropriate existing css_set is located by
 looking into a hash table.
 
@@ -292,17 +293,15 @@ file system) of the abandoned cgroup.  This enables automatic
 removal of abandoned cgroups.  The default value of
 notify_on_release in the root cgroup at system boot is disabled
 (0).  The default value of other cgroups at creation is the current
-value of their parents notify_on_release setting. The default value of
+value of their parents' notify_on_release settings. The default value of
 a cgroup hierarchy's release_agent path is empty.
 
 1.5 What does clone_children do ?
 ---------------------------------
 
-If the clone_children flag is enabled (1) in a cgroup, then all
-cgroups created beneath will call the post_clone callbacks for each
-subsystem of the newly created cgroup. Usually when this callback is
-implemented for a subsystem, it copies the values of the parent
-subsystem, this is the case for the cpuset.
+This flag only affects the cpuset controller. If the clone_children
+flag is enabled (1) in a cgroup, a new cpuset cgroup will copy its
+configuration from the parent during initialization.
 
 1.6 How do I use cgroups ?
 --------------------------
@@ -316,7 +315,7 @@ the "cpuset" cgroup subsystem, the steps are something like:
  4) Create the new cgroup by doing mkdir's and write's (or echo's) in
     the /sys/fs/cgroup virtual file system.
  5) Start a task that will be the "founding father" of the new job.
- 6) Attach that task to the new cgroup by writing its pid to the
+ 6) Attach that task to the new cgroup by writing its PID to the
     /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset/tasks file for that cgroup.
  7) fork, exec or clone the job tasks from this founding father task.
 
@@ -344,7 +343,7 @@ and then start a subshell 'sh' in that cgroup:
 2.1 Basic Usage
 ---------------
 
-Creating, modifying, using the cgroups can be done through the cgroup
+Creating, modifying, using cgroups can be done through the cgroup
 virtual filesystem.
 
 To mount a cgroup hierarchy with all available subsystems, type:
@@ -370,15 +369,12 @@ To mount a cgroup hierarchy with just the cpuset and memory
 subsystems, type:
 # mount -t cgroup -o cpuset,memory hier1 /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1
 
-To change the set of subsystems bound to a mounted hierarchy, just
-remount with different options:
-# mount -o remount,cpuset,blkio hier1 /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1
-
-Now memory is removed from the hierarchy and blkio is added.
-
-Note this will add blkio to the hierarchy but won't remove memory or
-cpuset, because the new options are appended to the old ones:
-# mount -o remount,blkio /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1
+While remounting cgroups is currently supported, it is not recommend
+to use it. Remounting allows changing bound subsystems and
+release_agent. Rebinding is hardly useful as it only works when the
+hierarchy is empty and release_agent itself should be replaced with
+conventional fsnotify. The support for remounting will be removed in
+the future.
 
 To Specify a hierarchy's release_agent:
 # mount -t cgroup -o cpuset,release_agent="/sbin/cpuset_release_agent" \
@@ -444,9 +440,9 @@ You can attach the current shell task by echoing 0:
 # echo 0 > tasks
 
 You can use the cgroup.procs file instead of the tasks file to move all
-threads in a threadgroup at once. Echoing the pid of any task in a
+threads in a threadgroup at once. Echoing the PID of any task in a
 threadgroup to cgroup.procs causes all tasks in that threadgroup to be
-be attached to the cgroup. Writing 0 to cgroup.procs moves all tasks
+attached to the cgroup. Writing 0 to cgroup.procs moves all tasks
 in the writing task's threadgroup.
 
 Note: Since every task is always a member of exactly one cgroup in each
@@ -482,7 +478,7 @@ in /proc/mounts and /proc/<pid>/cgroups.
 There is mechanism which allows to get notifications about changing
 status of a cgroup.
 
-To register new notification handler you need:
+To register a new notification handler you need to:
  - create a file descriptor for event notification using eventfd(2);
  - open a control file to be monitored (e.g. memory.usage_in_bytes);
  - write "<event_fd> <control_fd> <args>" to cgroup.event_control.
@@ -491,7 +487,7 @@ To register new notification handler you need:
 eventfd will be woken up by control file implementation or when the
 cgroup is removed.
 
-To unregister notification handler just close eventfd.
+To unregister a notification handler just close eventfd.
 
 NOTE: Support of notifications should be implemented for the control
 file. See documentation for the subsystem.
@@ -505,7 +501,7 @@ file. See documentation for the subsystem.
 Each kernel subsystem that wants to hook into the generic cgroup
 system needs to create a cgroup_subsys object. This contains
 various methods, which are callbacks from the cgroup system, along
-with a subsystem id which will be assigned by the cgroup system.
+with a subsystem ID which will be assigned by the cgroup system.
 
 Other fields in the cgroup_subsys object include:
 
@@ -519,7 +515,7 @@ Other fields in the cgroup_subsys object include:
   at system boot.
 
 Each cgroup object created by the system has an array of pointers,
-indexed by subsystem id; this pointer is entirely managed by the
+indexed by subsystem ID; this pointer is entirely managed by the
 subsystem; the generic cgroup code will never touch this pointer.
 
 3.2 Synchronization
@@ -555,16 +551,16 @@ call to cgroup_unload_subsys(). It should also set its_subsys.module =
 THIS_MODULE in its .c file.
 
 Each subsystem may export the following methods. The only mandatory
-methods are create/destroy. Any others that are null are presumed to
+methods are css_alloc/free. Any others that are null are presumed to
 be successful no-ops.
 
-struct cgroup_subsys_state *create(struct cgroup *cgrp)
+struct cgroup_subsys_state *css_alloc(struct cgroup *cgrp)
 (cgroup_mutex held by caller)
 
-Called to create a subsystem state object for a cgroup. The
+Called to allocate a subsystem state object for a cgroup. The
 subsystem should allocate its subsystem state object for the passed
 cgroup, returning a pointer to the new object on success or a
-negative error code. On success, the subsystem pointer should point to
+ERR_PTR() value. On success, the subsystem pointer should point to
 a structure of type cgroup_subsys_state (typically embedded in a
 larger subsystem-specific object), which will be initialized by the
 cgroup system. Note that this will be called at initialization to
@@ -573,24 +569,34 @@ identified by the passed cgroup object having a NULL parent (since
 it's the root of the hierarchy) and may be an appropriate place for
 initialization code.
 
-void destroy(struct cgroup *cgrp)
+int css_online(struct cgroup *cgrp)
 (cgroup_mutex held by caller)
 
-The cgroup system is about to destroy the passed cgroup; the subsystem
-should do any necessary cleanup and free its subsystem state
-object. By the time this method is called, the cgroup has already been
-unlinked from the file system and from the child list of its parent;
-cgroup->parent is still valid. (Note - can also be called for a
-newly-created cgroup if an error occurs after this subsystem's
-create() method has been called for the new cgroup).
+Called after @cgrp successfully completed all allocations and made
+visible to cgroup_for_each_child/descendant_*() iterators. The
+subsystem may choose to fail creation by returning -errno. This
+callback can be used to implement reliable state sharing and
+propagation along the hierarchy. See the comment on
+cgroup_for_each_descendant_pre() for details.
 
-int pre_destroy(struct cgroup *cgrp);
+void css_offline(struct cgroup *cgrp);
+(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
 
-Called before checking the reference count on each subsystem. This may
-be useful for subsystems which have some extra references even if
-there are not tasks in the cgroup. If pre_destroy() returns error code,
-rmdir() will fail with it. From this behavior, pre_destroy() can be
-called multiple times against a cgroup.
+This is the counterpart of css_online() and called iff css_online()
+has succeeded on @cgrp. This signifies the beginning of the end of
+@cgrp. @cgrp is being removed and the subsystem should start dropping
+all references it's holding on @cgrp. When all references are dropped,
+cgroup removal will proceed to the next step - css_free(). After this
+callback, @cgrp should be considered dead to the subsystem.
+
+void css_free(struct cgroup *cgrp)
+(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
+
+The cgroup system is about to free @cgrp; the subsystem should free
+its subsystem state object. By the time this method is called, @cgrp
+is completely unused; @cgrp->parent is still valid. (Note - can also
+be called for a newly-created cgroup if an error occurs after this
+subsystem's create() method has been called for the new cgroup).
 
 int can_attach(struct cgroup *cgrp, struct cgroup_taskset *tset)
 (cgroup_mutex held by caller)
@@ -637,33 +643,34 @@ void exit(struct task_struct *task)
 
 Called during task exit.
 
-int populate(struct cgroup *cgrp)
-(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
-
-Called after creation of a cgroup to allow a subsystem to populate
-the cgroup directory with file entries.  The subsystem should make
-calls to cgroup_add_file() with objects of type cftype (see
-include/linux/cgroup.h for details).  Note that although this
-method can return an error code, the error code is currently not
-always handled well.
-
-void post_clone(struct cgroup *cgrp)
-(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
-
-Called during cgroup_create() to do any parameter
-initialization which might be required before a task could attach.  For
-example in cpusets, no task may attach before 'cpus' and 'mems' are set
-up.
-
 void bind(struct cgroup *root)
-(cgroup_mutex and ss->hierarchy_mutex held by caller)
+(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
 
 Called when a cgroup subsystem is rebound to a different hierarchy
 and root cgroup. Currently this will only involve movement between
 the default hierarchy (which never has sub-cgroups) and a hierarchy
 that is being created/destroyed (and hence has no sub-cgroups).
 
-4. Questions
+4. Extended attribute usage
+===========================
+
+cgroup filesystem supports certain types of extended attributes in its
+directories and files.  The current supported types are:
+	- Trusted (XATTR_TRUSTED)
+	- Security (XATTR_SECURITY)
+
+Both require CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability to set.
+
+Like in tmpfs, the extended attributes in cgroup filesystem are stored
+using kernel memory and it's advised to keep the usage at minimum.  This
+is the reason why user defined extended attributes are not supported, since
+any user can do it and there's no limit in the value size.
+
+The current known users for this feature are SELinux to limit cgroup usage
+in containers and systemd for assorted meta data like main PID in a cgroup
+(systemd creates a cgroup per service).
+
+5. Questions
 ============
 
 Q: what's up with this '/bin/echo' ?
@@ -673,5 +680,5 @@ A: bash's builtin 'echo' command does not check calls to write() against
 
 Q: When I attach processes, only the first of the line gets really attached !
 A: We can only return one error code per call to write(). So you should also
-   put only ONE pid.
+   put only ONE PID.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
index 5c51ed406d1d..7740038d82bc 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
@@ -217,8 +217,8 @@ and name space for cpusets, with a minimum of additional kernel code.
 
 The cpus and mems files in the root (top_cpuset) cpuset are
 read-only.  The cpus file automatically tracks the value of
-cpu_online_map using a CPU hotplug notifier, and the mems file
-automatically tracks the value of node_states[N_HIGH_MEMORY]--i.e.,
+cpu_online_mask using a CPU hotplug notifier, and the mems file
+automatically tracks the value of node_states[N_MEMORY]--i.e.,
 nodes with memory--using the cpuset_track_online_nodes() hook.
 
 
@@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ can become very uneven.
 1.7 What is sched_load_balance ?
 --------------------------------
 
-The kernel scheduler (kernel/sched.c) automatically load balances
+The kernel scheduler (kernel/sched/core.c) automatically load balances
 tasks.  If one CPU is underutilized, kernel code running on that
 CPU will look for tasks on other more overloaded CPUs and move those
 tasks to itself, within the constraints of such placement mechanisms
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/devices.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/devices.txt
index 16624a7f8222..3c1095ca02ea 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/devices.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/devices.txt
@@ -13,9 +13,7 @@ either an integer or * for all.  Access is a composition of r
 The root device cgroup starts with rwm to 'all'.  A child device
 cgroup gets a copy of the parent.  Administrators can then remove
 devices from the whitelist or add new entries.  A child cgroup can
-never receive a device access which is denied by its parent.  However
-when a device access is removed from a parent it will not also be
-removed from the child(ren).
+never receive a device access which is denied by its parent.
 
 2. User Interface
 
@@ -50,3 +48,69 @@ task to a new cgroup.  (Again we'll probably want to change that).
 
 A cgroup may not be granted more permissions than the cgroup's
 parent has.
+
+4. Hierarchy
+
+device cgroups maintain hierarchy by making sure a cgroup never has more
+access permissions than its parent.  Every time an entry is written to
+a cgroup's devices.deny file, all its children will have that entry removed
+from their whitelist and all the locally set whitelist entries will be
+re-evaluated.  In case one of the locally set whitelist entries would provide
+more access than the cgroup's parent, it'll be removed from the whitelist.
+
+Example:
+      A
+     / \
+        B
+
+    group        behavior	exceptions
+    A            allow		"b 8:* rwm", "c 116:1 rw"
+    B            deny		"c 1:3 rwm", "c 116:2 rwm", "b 3:* rwm"
+
+If a device is denied in group A:
+	# echo "c 116:* r" > A/devices.deny
+it'll propagate down and after revalidating B's entries, the whitelist entry
+"c 116:2 rwm" will be removed:
+
+    group        whitelist entries                        denied devices
+    A            all                                      "b 8:* rwm", "c 116:* rw"
+    B            "c 1:3 rwm", "b 3:* rwm"                 all the rest
+
+In case parent's exceptions change and local exceptions are not allowed
+anymore, they'll be deleted.
+
+Notice that new whitelist entries will not be propagated:
+      A
+     / \
+        B
+
+    group        whitelist entries                        denied devices
+    A            "c 1:3 rwm", "c 1:5 r"                   all the rest
+    B            "c 1:3 rwm", "c 1:5 r"                   all the rest
+
+when adding "c *:3 rwm":
+	# echo "c *:3 rwm" >A/devices.allow
+
+the result:
+    group        whitelist entries                        denied devices
+    A            "c *:3 rwm", "c 1:5 r"                   all the rest
+    B            "c 1:3 rwm", "c 1:5 r"                   all the rest
+
+but now it'll be possible to add new entries to B:
+	# echo "c 2:3 rwm" >B/devices.allow
+	# echo "c 50:3 r" >B/devices.allow
+or even
+	# echo "c *:3 rwm" >B/devices.allow
+
+Allowing or denying all by writing 'a' to devices.allow or devices.deny will
+not be possible once the device cgroups has children.
+
+4.1 Hierarchy (internal implementation)
+
+device cgroups is implemented internally using a behavior (ALLOW, DENY) and a
+list of exceptions.  The internal state is controlled using the same user
+interface to preserve compatibility with the previous whitelist-only
+implementation.  Removal or addition of exceptions that will reduce the access
+to devices will be propagated down the hierarchy.
+For every propagated exception, the effective rules will be re-evaluated based
+on current parent's access rules.
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt
index 7e62de1e59ff..c96a72cbb30a 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt
@@ -49,13 +49,49 @@ prevent the freeze/unfreeze cycle from becoming visible to the tasks
 being frozen. This allows the bash example above and gdb to run as
 expected.
 
-The freezer subsystem in the container filesystem defines a file named
-freezer.state. Writing "FROZEN" to the state file will freeze all tasks in the
-cgroup. Subsequently writing "THAWED" will unfreeze the tasks in the cgroup.
-Reading will return the current state.
+The cgroup freezer is hierarchical. Freezing a cgroup freezes all
+tasks beloning to the cgroup and all its descendant cgroups. Each
+cgroup has its own state (self-state) and the state inherited from the
+parent (parent-state). Iff both states are THAWED, the cgroup is
+THAWED.
 
-Note freezer.state doesn't exist in root cgroup, which means root cgroup
-is non-freezable.
+The following cgroupfs files are created by cgroup freezer.
+
+* freezer.state: Read-write.
+
+  When read, returns the effective state of the cgroup - "THAWED",
+  "FREEZING" or "FROZEN". This is the combined self and parent-states.
+  If any is freezing, the cgroup is freezing (FREEZING or FROZEN).
+
+  FREEZING cgroup transitions into FROZEN state when all tasks
+  belonging to the cgroup and its descendants become frozen. Note that
+  a cgroup reverts to FREEZING from FROZEN after a new task is added
+  to the cgroup or one of its descendant cgroups until the new task is
+  frozen.
+
+  When written, sets the self-state of the cgroup. Two values are
+  allowed - "FROZEN" and "THAWED". If FROZEN is written, the cgroup,
+  if not already freezing, enters FREEZING state along with all its
+  descendant cgroups.
+
+  If THAWED is written, the self-state of the cgroup is changed to
+  THAWED.  Note that the effective state may not change to THAWED if
+  the parent-state is still freezing. If a cgroup's effective state
+  becomes THAWED, all its descendants which are freezing because of
+  the cgroup also leave the freezing state.
+
+* freezer.self_freezing: Read only.
+
+  Shows the self-state. 0 if the self-state is THAWED; otherwise, 1.
+  This value is 1 iff the last write to freezer.state was "FROZEN".
+
+* freezer.parent_freezing: Read only.
+
+  Shows the parent-state.  0 if none of the cgroup's ancestors is
+  frozen; otherwise, 1.
+
+The root cgroup is non-freezable and the above interface files don't
+exist.
 
 * Examples of usage :
 
@@ -85,18 +121,3 @@ to unfreeze all tasks in the container :
 
 This is the basic mechanism which should do the right thing for user space task
 in a simple scenario.
-
-It's important to note that freezing can be incomplete. In that case we return
-EBUSY. This means that some tasks in the cgroup are busy doing something that
-prevents us from completely freezing the cgroup at this time. After EBUSY,
-the cgroup will remain partially frozen -- reflected by freezer.state reporting
-"FREEZING" when read. The state will remain "FREEZING" until one of these
-things happens:
-
-	1) Userspace cancels the freezing operation by writing "THAWED" to
-		the freezer.state file
-	2) Userspace retries the freezing operation by writing "FROZEN" to
-		the freezer.state file (writing "FREEZING" is not legal
-		and returns EINVAL)
-	3) The tasks that blocked the cgroup from entering the "FROZEN"
-		state disappear from the cgroup's set of tasks.
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/hugetlb.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/hugetlb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a9faaca1f029
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/hugetlb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+HugeTLB Controller
+-------------------
+
+The HugeTLB controller allows to limit the HugeTLB usage per control group and
+enforces the controller limit during page fault. Since HugeTLB doesn't
+support page reclaim, enforcing the limit at page fault time implies that,
+the application will get SIGBUS signal if it tries to access HugeTLB pages
+beyond its limit. This requires the application to know beforehand how much
+HugeTLB pages it would require for its use.
+
+HugeTLB controller can be created by first mounting the cgroup filesystem.
+
+# mount -t cgroup -o hugetlb none /sys/fs/cgroup
+
+With the above step, the initial or the parent HugeTLB group becomes
+visible at /sys/fs/cgroup. At bootup, this group includes all the tasks in
+the system. /sys/fs/cgroup/tasks lists the tasks in this cgroup.
+
+New groups can be created under the parent group /sys/fs/cgroup.
+
+# cd /sys/fs/cgroup
+# mkdir g1
+# echo $$ > g1/tasks
+
+The above steps create a new group g1 and move the current shell
+process (bash) into it.
+
+Brief summary of control files
+
+ hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.limit_in_bytes     # set/show limit of "hugepagesize" hugetlb usage
+ hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.max_usage_in_bytes # show max "hugepagesize" hugetlb  usage recorded
+ hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.usage_in_bytes     # show current res_counter usage for "hugepagesize" hugetlb
+ hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.failcnt		   # show the number of allocation failure due to HugeTLB limit
+
+For a system supporting two hugepage size (16M and 16G) the control
+files include:
+
+hugetlb.16GB.limit_in_bytes
+hugetlb.16GB.max_usage_in_bytes
+hugetlb.16GB.usage_in_bytes
+hugetlb.16GB.failcnt
+hugetlb.16MB.limit_in_bytes
+hugetlb.16MB.max_usage_in_bytes
+hugetlb.16MB.usage_in_bytes
+hugetlb.16MB.failcnt
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
index fc8fa97a09ac..ce94a83a7d9a 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
@@ -399,8 +399,7 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y.
 
  9.10 Memory thresholds
 	Memory controller implements memory thresholds using cgroups notification
-	API. You can use Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c to test
-	it.
+	API. You can use tools/cgroup/cgroup_event_listener.c to test it.
 
 	(Shell-A) Create cgroup and run event listener
 	# mkdir /cgroup/A
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
index 4c95c0034a4b..8af4ad121828 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
@@ -18,33 +18,33 @@ from the rest of the system. The article on LWN [12] mentions some probable
 uses of the memory controller. The memory controller can be used to
 
 a. Isolate an application or a group of applications
-   Memory hungry applications can be isolated and limited to a smaller
+   Memory-hungry applications can be isolated and limited to a smaller
    amount of memory.
-b. Create a cgroup with limited amount of memory, this can be used
+b. Create a cgroup with a limited amount of memory; this can be used
    as a good alternative to booting with mem=XXXX.
 c. Virtualization solutions can control the amount of memory they want
    to assign to a virtual machine instance.
 d. A CD/DVD burner could control the amount of memory used by the
    rest of the system to ensure that burning does not fail due to lack
    of available memory.
-e. There are several other use cases, find one or use the controller just
+e. There are several other use cases; find one or use the controller just
    for fun (to learn and hack on the VM subsystem).
 
 Current Status: linux-2.6.34-mmotm(development version of 2010/April)
 
 Features:
  - accounting anonymous pages, file caches, swap caches usage and limiting them.
- - private LRU and reclaim routine. (system's global LRU and private LRU
-   work independently from each other)
+ - pages are linked to per-memcg LRU exclusively, and there is no global LRU.
  - optionally, memory+swap usage can be accounted and limited.
  - hierarchical accounting
  - soft limit
- - moving(recharging) account at moving a task is selectable.
+ - moving (recharging) account at moving a task is selectable.
  - usage threshold notifier
+ - memory pressure notifier
  - oom-killer disable knob and oom-notifier
  - Root cgroup has no limit controls.
 
- Kernel memory support is work in progress, and the current version provides
+ Kernel memory support is a work in progress, and the current version provides
  basically functionality. (See Section 2.7)
 
 Brief summary of control files.
@@ -66,14 +66,22 @@ Brief summary of control files.
  memory.stat			 # show various statistics
  memory.use_hierarchy		 # set/show hierarchical account enabled
  memory.force_empty		 # trigger forced move charge to parent
+ memory.pressure_level		 # set memory pressure notifications
  memory.swappiness		 # set/show swappiness parameter of vmscan
 				 (See sysctl's vm.swappiness)
  memory.move_charge_at_immigrate # set/show controls of moving charges
  memory.oom_control		 # set/show oom controls.
  memory.numa_stat		 # show the number of memory usage per numa node
 
+ memory.kmem.limit_in_bytes      # set/show hard limit for kernel memory
+ memory.kmem.usage_in_bytes      # show current kernel memory allocation
+ memory.kmem.failcnt             # show the number of kernel memory usage hits limits
+ memory.kmem.max_usage_in_bytes  # show max kernel memory usage recorded
+
  memory.kmem.tcp.limit_in_bytes  # set/show hard limit for tcp buf memory
  memory.kmem.tcp.usage_in_bytes  # show current tcp buf memory allocation
+ memory.kmem.tcp.failcnt            # show the number of tcp buf memory usage hits limits
+ memory.kmem.tcp.max_usage_in_bytes # show max tcp buf memory usage recorded
 
 1. History
 
@@ -143,9 +151,9 @@ Figure 1 shows the important aspects of the controller
 3. Each page has a pointer to the page_cgroup, which in turn knows the
    cgroup it belongs to
 
-The accounting is done as follows: mem_cgroup_charge() is invoked to setup
-the necessary data structures and check if the cgroup that is being charged
-is over its limit. If it is then reclaim is invoked on the cgroup.
+The accounting is done as follows: mem_cgroup_charge_common() is invoked to
+set up the necessary data structures and check if the cgroup that is being
+charged is over its limit. If it is, then reclaim is invoked on the cgroup.
 More details can be found in the reclaim section of this document.
 If everything goes well, a page meta-data-structure called page_cgroup is
 updated. page_cgroup has its own LRU on cgroup.
@@ -154,7 +162,7 @@ updated. page_cgroup has its own LRU on cgroup.
 2.2.1 Accounting details
 
 All mapped anon pages (RSS) and cache pages (Page Cache) are accounted.
-Some pages which are never reclaimable and will not be on the global LRU
+Some pages which are never reclaimable and will not be on the LRU
 are not accounted. We just account pages under usual VM management.
 
 RSS pages are accounted at page_fault unless they've already been accounted
@@ -162,13 +170,13 @@ for earlier. A file page will be accounted for as Page Cache when it's
 inserted into inode (radix-tree). While it's mapped into the page tables of
 processes, duplicate accounting is carefully avoided.
 
-A RSS page is unaccounted when it's fully unmapped. A PageCache page is
+An RSS page is unaccounted when it's fully unmapped. A PageCache page is
 unaccounted when it's removed from radix-tree. Even if RSS pages are fully
 unmapped (by kswapd), they may exist as SwapCache in the system until they
-are really freed. Such SwapCaches also also accounted.
+are really freed. Such SwapCaches are also accounted.
 A swapped-in page is not accounted until it's mapped.
 
-Note: The kernel does swapin-readahead and read multiple swaps at once.
+Note: The kernel does swapin-readahead and reads multiple swaps at once.
 This means swapped-in pages may contain pages for other tasks than a task
 causing page fault. So, we avoid accounting at swap-in I/O.
 
@@ -185,13 +193,15 @@ behind this approach is that a cgroup that aggressively uses a shared
 page will eventually get charged for it (once it is uncharged from
 the cgroup that brought it in -- this will happen on memory pressure).
 
-Exception: If CONFIG_CGROUP_CGROUP_MEM_RES_CTLR_SWAP is not used.
+But see section 8.2: when moving a task to another cgroup, its pages may
+be recharged to the new cgroup, if move_charge_at_immigrate has been chosen.
+
+Exception: If CONFIG_MEMCG_SWAP is not used.
 When you do swapoff and make swapped-out pages of shmem(tmpfs) to
 be backed into memory in force, charges for pages are accounted against the
 caller of swapoff rather than the users of shmem.
 
-
-2.4 Swap Extension (CONFIG_CGROUP_MEM_RES_CTLR_SWAP)
+2.4 Swap Extension (CONFIG_MEMCG_SWAP)
 
 Swap Extension allows you to record charge for swap. A swapped-in page is
 charged back to original page allocator if possible.
@@ -206,7 +216,7 @@ memsw.limit_in_bytes.
 Example: Assume a system with 4G of swap. A task which allocates 6G of memory
 (by mistake) under 2G memory limitation will use all swap.
 In this case, setting memsw.limit_in_bytes=3G will prevent bad use of swap.
-By using memsw limit, you can avoid system OOM which can be caused by swap
+By using the memsw limit, you can avoid system OOM which can be caused by swap
 shortage.
 
 * why 'memory+swap' rather than swap.
@@ -214,7 +224,7 @@ The global LRU(kswapd) can swap out arbitrary pages. Swap-out means
 to move account from memory to swap...there is no change in usage of
 memory+swap. In other words, when we want to limit the usage of swap without
 affecting global LRU, memory+swap limit is better than just limiting swap from
-OS point of view.
+an OS point of view.
 
 * What happens when a cgroup hits memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes
 When a cgroup hits memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes, it's useless to do swap-out
@@ -233,7 +243,7 @@ an OOM routine is invoked to select and kill the bulkiest task in the
 cgroup. (See 10. OOM Control below.)
 
 The reclaim algorithm has not been modified for cgroups, except that
-pages that are selected for reclaiming come from the per cgroup LRU
+pages that are selected for reclaiming come from the per-cgroup LRU
 list.
 
 NOTE: Reclaim does not work for the root cgroup, since we cannot set any
@@ -258,35 +268,89 @@ When oom event notifier is registered, event will be delivered.
   per-zone-per-cgroup LRU (cgroup's private LRU) is just guarded by
   zone->lru_lock, it has no lock of its own.
 
-2.7 Kernel Memory Extension (CONFIG_CGROUP_MEM_RES_CTLR_KMEM)
+2.7 Kernel Memory Extension (CONFIG_MEMCG_KMEM)
 
 With the Kernel memory extension, the Memory Controller is able to limit
 the amount of kernel memory used by the system. Kernel memory is fundamentally
 different than user memory, since it can't be swapped out, which makes it
 possible to DoS the system by consuming too much of this precious resource.
 
+Kernel memory won't be accounted at all until limit on a group is set. This
+allows for existing setups to continue working without disruption.  The limit
+cannot be set if the cgroup have children, or if there are already tasks in the
+cgroup. Attempting to set the limit under those conditions will return -EBUSY.
+When use_hierarchy == 1 and a group is accounted, its children will
+automatically be accounted regardless of their limit value.
+
+After a group is first limited, it will be kept being accounted until it
+is removed. The memory limitation itself, can of course be removed by writing
+-1 to memory.kmem.limit_in_bytes. In this case, kmem will be accounted, but not
+limited.
+
 Kernel memory limits are not imposed for the root cgroup. Usage for the root
-cgroup may or may not be accounted.
+cgroup may or may not be accounted. The memory used is accumulated into
+memory.kmem.usage_in_bytes, or in a separate counter when it makes sense.
+(currently only for tcp).
+The main "kmem" counter is fed into the main counter, so kmem charges will
+also be visible from the user counter.
 
 Currently no soft limit is implemented for kernel memory. It is future work
 to trigger slab reclaim when those limits are reached.
 
 2.7.1 Current Kernel Memory resources accounted
 
+* stack pages: every process consumes some stack pages. By accounting into
+kernel memory, we prevent new processes from being created when the kernel
+memory usage is too high.
+
+* slab pages: pages allocated by the SLAB or SLUB allocator are tracked. A copy
+of each kmem_cache is created every time the cache is touched by the first time
+from inside the memcg. The creation is done lazily, so some objects can still be
+skipped while the cache is being created. All objects in a slab page should
+belong to the same memcg. This only fails to hold when a task is migrated to a
+different memcg during the page allocation by the cache.
+
 * sockets memory pressure: some sockets protocols have memory pressure
 thresholds. The Memory Controller allows them to be controlled individually
 per cgroup, instead of globally.
 
 * tcp memory pressure: sockets memory pressure for the tcp protocol.
 
+2.7.3 Common use cases
+
+Because the "kmem" counter is fed to the main user counter, kernel memory can
+never be limited completely independently of user memory. Say "U" is the user
+limit, and "K" the kernel limit. There are three possible ways limits can be
+set:
+
+    U != 0, K = unlimited:
+    This is the standard memcg limitation mechanism already present before kmem
+    accounting. Kernel memory is completely ignored.
+
+    U != 0, K < U:
+    Kernel memory is a subset of the user memory. This setup is useful in
+    deployments where the total amount of memory per-cgroup is overcommited.
+    Overcommiting kernel memory limits is definitely not recommended, since the
+    box can still run out of non-reclaimable memory.
+    In this case, the admin could set up K so that the sum of all groups is
+    never greater than the total memory, and freely set U at the cost of his
+    QoS.
+
+    U != 0, K >= U:
+    Since kmem charges will also be fed to the user counter and reclaim will be
+    triggered for the cgroup for both kinds of memory. This setup gives the
+    admin a unified view of memory, and it is also useful for people who just
+    want to track kernel memory usage.
+
 3. User Interface
 
 0. Configuration
 
 a. Enable CONFIG_CGROUPS
 b. Enable CONFIG_RESOURCE_COUNTERS
-c. Enable CONFIG_CGROUP_MEM_RES_CTLR
-d. Enable CONFIG_CGROUP_MEM_RES_CTLR_SWAP (to use swap extension)
+c. Enable CONFIG_MEMCG
+d. Enable CONFIG_MEMCG_SWAP (to use swap extension)
+d. Enable CONFIG_MEMCG_KMEM (to use kmem extension)
 
 1. Prepare the cgroups (see cgroups.txt, Why are cgroups needed?)
 # mount -t tmpfs none /sys/fs/cgroup
@@ -313,7 +377,7 @@ We can check the usage:
 # cat /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/0/memory.usage_in_bytes
 1216512
 
-A successful write to this file does not guarantee a successful set of
+A successful write to this file does not guarantee a successful setting of
 this limit to the value written into the file. This can be due to a
 number of factors, such as rounding up to page boundaries or the total
 availability of memory on the system. The user is required to re-read
@@ -347,7 +411,7 @@ Trying usual test under memory controller is always helpful.
 4.1 Troubleshooting
 
 Sometimes a user might find that the application under a cgroup is
-terminated by OOM killer. There are several causes for this:
+terminated by the OOM killer. There are several causes for this:
 
 1. The cgroup limit is too low (just too low to do anything useful)
 2. The user is using anonymous memory and swap is turned off or too low
@@ -355,7 +419,7 @@ terminated by OOM killer. There are several causes for this:
 A sync followed by echo 1 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches will help get rid of
 some of the pages cached in the cgroup (page cache pages).
 
-To know what happens, disable OOM_Kill by 10. OOM Control(see below) and
+To know what happens, disabling OOM_Kill as per "10. OOM Control" (below) and
 seeing what happens will be helpful.
 
 4.2 Task migration
@@ -375,14 +439,15 @@ cgroup might have some charge associated with it, even though all
 tasks have migrated away from it. (because we charge against pages, not
 against tasks.)
 
-Such charges are freed or moved to their parent. At moving, both of RSS
-and CACHES are moved to parent.
-rmdir() may return -EBUSY if freeing/moving fails. See 5.1 also.
+We move the stats to root (if use_hierarchy==0) or parent (if
+use_hierarchy==1), and no change on the charge except uncharging
+from the child.
 
 Charges recorded in swap information is not updated at removal of cgroup.
 Recorded information is discarded and a cgroup which uses swap (swapcache)
 will be charged as a new owner of it.
 
+About use_hierarchy, see Section 6.
 
 5. Misc. interfaces.
 
@@ -395,20 +460,29 @@ will be charged as a new owner of it.
 
   Almost all pages tracked by this memory cgroup will be unmapped and freed.
   Some pages cannot be freed because they are locked or in-use. Such pages are
-  moved to parent and this cgroup will be empty. This may return -EBUSY if
-  VM is too busy to free/move all pages immediately.
+  moved to parent (if use_hierarchy==1) or root (if use_hierarchy==0) and this
+  cgroup will be empty.
 
-  Typical use case of this interface is that calling this before rmdir().
+  The typical use case for this interface is before calling rmdir().
   Because rmdir() moves all pages to parent, some out-of-use page caches can be
   moved to the parent. If you want to avoid that, force_empty will be useful.
 
+  Also, note that when memory.kmem.limit_in_bytes is set the charges due to
+  kernel pages will still be seen. This is not considered a failure and the
+  write will still return success. In this case, it is expected that
+  memory.kmem.usage_in_bytes == memory.usage_in_bytes.
+
+  About use_hierarchy, see Section 6.
+
 5.2 stat file
 
 memory.stat file includes following statistics
 
 # per-memory cgroup local status
 cache		- # of bytes of page cache memory.
-rss		- # of bytes of anonymous and swap cache memory.
+rss		- # of bytes of anonymous and swap cache memory (includes
+		transparent hugepages).
+rss_huge	- # of bytes of anonymous transparent hugepages.
 mapped_file	- # of bytes of mapped file (includes tmpfs/shmem)
 pgpgin		- # of charging events to the memory cgroup. The charging
 		event happens each time a page is accounted as either mapped
@@ -416,10 +490,12 @@ pgpgin		- # of charging events to the memory cgroup. The charging
 pgpgout		- # of uncharging events to the memory cgroup. The uncharging
 		event happens each time a page is unaccounted from the cgroup.
 swap		- # of bytes of swap usage
-inactive_anon	- # of bytes of anonymous memory and swap cache memory on
+writeback	- # of bytes of file/anon cache that are queued for syncing to
+		disk.
+inactive_anon	- # of bytes of anonymous and swap cache memory on inactive
 		LRU list.
 active_anon	- # of bytes of anonymous and swap cache memory on active
-		inactive LRU list.
+		LRU list.
 inactive_file	- # of bytes of file-backed memory on inactive LRU list.
 active_file	- # of bytes of file-backed memory on active LRU list.
 unevictable	- # of bytes of memory that cannot be reclaimed (mlocked etc).
@@ -431,17 +507,10 @@ hierarchical_memory_limit - # of bytes of memory limit with regard to hierarchy
 hierarchical_memsw_limit - # of bytes of memory+swap limit with regard to
 			hierarchy under which memory cgroup is.
 
-total_cache		- sum of all children's "cache"
-total_rss		- sum of all children's "rss"
-total_mapped_file	- sum of all children's "cache"
-total_pgpgin		- sum of all children's "pgpgin"
-total_pgpgout		- sum of all children's "pgpgout"
-total_swap		- sum of all children's "swap"
-total_inactive_anon	- sum of all children's "inactive_anon"
-total_active_anon	- sum of all children's "active_anon"
-total_inactive_file	- sum of all children's "inactive_file"
-total_active_file	- sum of all children's "active_file"
-total_unevictable	- sum of all children's "unevictable"
+total_<counter>		- # hierarchical version of <counter>, which in
+			addition to the cgroup's own value includes the
+			sum of all hierarchical children's values of
+			<counter>, i.e. total_cache
 
 # The following additional stats are dependent on CONFIG_DEBUG_VM.
 
@@ -467,6 +536,10 @@ Note:
 5.3 swappiness
 
 Similar to /proc/sys/vm/swappiness, but affecting a hierarchy of groups only.
+Please note that unlike the global swappiness, memcg knob set to 0
+really prevents from any swapping even if there is a swap storage
+available. This might lead to memcg OOM killer if there are no file
+pages to reclaim.
 
 Following cgroups' swappiness can't be changed.
 - root cgroup (uses /proc/sys/vm/swappiness).
@@ -487,7 +560,7 @@ You can reset failcnt by writing 0 to failcnt file.
 
 For efficiency, as other kernel components, memory cgroup uses some optimization
 to avoid unnecessary cacheline false sharing. usage_in_bytes is affected by the
-method and doesn't show 'exact' value of memory(and swap) usage, it's an fuzz
+method and doesn't show 'exact' value of memory (and swap) usage, it's a fuzz
 value for efficient access. (Of course, when necessary, it's synchronized.)
 If you want to know more exact memory usage, you should use RSS+CACHE(+SWAP)
 value in memory.stat(see 5.2).
@@ -497,8 +570,8 @@ value in memory.stat(see 5.2).
 This is similar to numa_maps but operates on a per-memcg basis.  This is
 useful for providing visibility into the numa locality information within
 an memcg since the pages are allowed to be allocated from any physical
-node.  One of the usecases is evaluating application performance by
-combining this information with the application's cpu allocation.
+node.  One of the use cases is evaluating application performance by
+combining this information with the application's CPU allocation.
 
 We export "total", "file", "anon" and "unevictable" pages per-node for
 each memcg.  The ouput format of memory.numa_stat is:
@@ -562,10 +635,10 @@ are pushed back to their soft limits. If the soft limit of each control
 group is very high, they are pushed back as much as possible to make
 sure that one control group does not starve the others of memory.
 
-Please note that soft limits is a best effort feature, it comes with
+Please note that soft limits is a best-effort feature; it comes with
 no guarantees, but it does its best to make sure that when memory is
 heavily contended for, memory is allocated based on the soft limit
-hints/setup. Currently soft limit based reclaim is setup such that
+hints/setup. Currently soft limit based reclaim is set up such that
 it gets invoked from balance_pgdat (kswapd).
 
 7.1 Interface
@@ -593,7 +666,7 @@ page tables.
 
 8.1 Interface
 
-This feature is disabled by default. It can be enabled(and disabled again) by
+This feature is disabled by default. It can be enabledi (and disabled again) by
 writing to memory.move_charge_at_immigrate of the destination cgroup.
 
 If you want to enable it:
@@ -602,8 +675,8 @@ If you want to enable it:
 
 Note: Each bits of move_charge_at_immigrate has its own meaning about what type
       of charges should be moved. See 8.2 for details.
-Note: Charges are moved only when you move mm->owner, IOW, a leader of a thread
-      group.
+Note: Charges are moved only when you move mm->owner, in other words,
+      a leader of a thread group.
 Note: If we cannot find enough space for the task in the destination cgroup, we
       try to make space by reclaiming memory. Task migration may fail if we
       cannot make enough space.
@@ -613,42 +686,39 @@ And if you want disable it again:
 
 # echo 0 > memory.move_charge_at_immigrate
 
-8.2 Type of charges which can be move
+8.2 Type of charges which can be moved
 
-Each bits of move_charge_at_immigrate has its own meaning about what type of
-charges should be moved. But in any cases, it must be noted that an account of
-a page or a swap can be moved only when it is charged to the task's current(old)
-memory cgroup.
+Each bit in move_charge_at_immigrate has its own meaning about what type of
+charges should be moved. But in any case, it must be noted that an account of
+a page or a swap can be moved only when it is charged to the task's current
+(old) memory cgroup.
 
   bit | what type of charges would be moved ?
  -----+------------------------------------------------------------------------
-   0  | A charge of an anonymous page(or swap of it) used by the target task.
-      | Those pages and swaps must be used only by the target task. You must
-      | enable Swap Extension(see 2.4) to enable move of swap charges.
+   0  | A charge of an anonymous page (or swap of it) used by the target task.
+      | You must enable Swap Extension (see 2.4) to enable move of swap charges.
  -----+------------------------------------------------------------------------
-   1  | A charge of file pages(normal file, tmpfs file(e.g. ipc shared memory)
+   1  | A charge of file pages (normal file, tmpfs file (e.g. ipc shared memory)
       | and swaps of tmpfs file) mmapped by the target task. Unlike the case of
-      | anonymous pages, file pages(and swaps) in the range mmapped by the task
+      | anonymous pages, file pages (and swaps) in the range mmapped by the task
       | will be moved even if the task hasn't done page fault, i.e. they might
       | not be the task's "RSS", but other task's "RSS" that maps the same file.
-      | And mapcount of the page is ignored(the page can be moved even if
-      | page_mapcount(page) > 1). You must enable Swap Extension(see 2.4) to
+      | And mapcount of the page is ignored (the page can be moved even if
+      | page_mapcount(page) > 1). You must enable Swap Extension (see 2.4) to
       | enable move of swap charges.
 
 8.3 TODO
 
-- Implement madvise(2) to let users decide the vma to be moved or not to be
-  moved.
 - All of moving charge operations are done under cgroup_mutex. It's not good
   behavior to hold the mutex too long, so we may need some trick.
 
 9. Memory thresholds
 
-Memory cgroup implements memory thresholds using cgroups notification
+Memory cgroup implements memory thresholds using the cgroups notification
 API (see cgroups.txt). It allows to register multiple memory and memsw
 thresholds and gets notifications when it crosses.
 
-To register a threshold application need:
+To register a threshold, an application must:
 - create an eventfd using eventfd(2);
 - open memory.usage_in_bytes or memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes;
 - write string like "<event_fd> <fd of memory.usage_in_bytes> <threshold>" to
@@ -663,24 +733,24 @@ It's applicable for root and non-root cgroup.
 
 memory.oom_control file is for OOM notification and other controls.
 
-Memory cgroup implements OOM notifier using cgroup notification
+Memory cgroup implements OOM notifier using the cgroup notification
 API (See cgroups.txt). It allows to register multiple OOM notification
 delivery and gets notification when OOM happens.
 
-To register a notifier, application need:
+To register a notifier, an application must:
  - create an eventfd using eventfd(2)
  - open memory.oom_control file
  - write string like "<event_fd> <fd of memory.oom_control>" to
    cgroup.event_control
 
-Application will be notified through eventfd when OOM happens.
-OOM notification doesn't work for root cgroup.
+The application will be notified through eventfd when OOM happens.
+OOM notification doesn't work for the root cgroup.
 
-You can disable OOM-killer by writing "1" to memory.oom_control file, as:
+You can disable the OOM-killer by writing "1" to memory.oom_control file, as:
 
 	#echo 1 > memory.oom_control
 
-This operation is only allowed to the top cgroup of sub-hierarchy.
+This operation is only allowed to the top cgroup of a sub-hierarchy.
 If OOM-killer is disabled, tasks under cgroup will hang/sleep
 in memory cgroup's OOM-waitqueue when they request accountable memory.
 
@@ -698,12 +768,77 @@ At reading, current status of OOM is shown.
 	under_oom	 0 or 1 (if 1, the memory cgroup is under OOM, tasks may
 				 be stopped.)
 
-11. TODO
+11. Memory Pressure
+
+The pressure level notifications can be used to monitor the memory
+allocation cost; based on the pressure, applications can implement
+different strategies of managing their memory resources. The pressure
+levels are defined as following:
+
+The "low" level means that the system is reclaiming memory for new
+allocations. Monitoring this reclaiming activity might be useful for
+maintaining cache level. Upon notification, the program (typically
+"Activity Manager") might analyze vmstat and act in advance (i.e.
+prematurely shutdown unimportant services).
+
+The "medium" level means that the system is experiencing medium memory
+pressure, the system might be making swap, paging out active file caches,
+etc. Upon this event applications may decide to further analyze
+vmstat/zoneinfo/memcg or internal memory usage statistics and free any
+resources that can be easily reconstructed or re-read from a disk.
+
+The "critical" level means that the system is actively thrashing, it is
+about to out of memory (OOM) or even the in-kernel OOM killer is on its
+way to trigger. Applications should do whatever they can to help the
+system. It might be too late to consult with vmstat or any other
+statistics, so it's advisable to take an immediate action.
+
+The events are propagated upward until the event is handled, i.e. the
+events are not pass-through. Here is what this means: for example you have
+three cgroups: A->B->C. Now you set up an event listener on cgroups A, B
+and C, and suppose group C experiences some pressure. In this situation,
+only group C will receive the notification, i.e. groups A and B will not
+receive it. This is done to avoid excessive "broadcasting" of messages,
+which disturbs the system and which is especially bad if we are low on
+memory or thrashing. So, organize the cgroups wisely, or propagate the
+events manually (or, ask us to implement the pass-through events,
+explaining why would you need them.)
+
+The file memory.pressure_level is only used to setup an eventfd. To
+register a notification, an application must:
+
+- create an eventfd using eventfd(2);
+- open memory.pressure_level;
+- write string like "<event_fd> <fd of memory.pressure_level> <level>"
+  to cgroup.event_control.
+
+Application will be notified through eventfd when memory pressure is at
+the specific level (or higher). Read/write operations to
+memory.pressure_level are no implemented.
+
+Test:
+
+   Here is a small script example that makes a new cgroup, sets up a
+   memory limit, sets up a notification in the cgroup and then makes child
+   cgroup experience a critical pressure:
+
+   # cd /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/
+   # mkdir foo
+   # cd foo
+   # cgroup_event_listener memory.pressure_level low &
+   # echo 8000000 > memory.limit_in_bytes
+   # echo 8000000 > memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes
+   # echo $$ > tasks
+   # dd if=/dev/zero | read x
+
+   (Expect a bunch of notifications, and eventually, the oom-killer will
+   trigger.)
+
+12. TODO
 
-1. Add support for accounting huge pages (as a separate controller)
-2. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first
-3. Teach controller to account for shared-pages
-4. Start reclamation in the background when the limit is
+1. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first
+2. Teach controller to account for shared-pages
+3. Start reclamation in the background when the limit is
    not yet hit but the usage is getting closer
 
 Summary
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/net_cls.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/net_cls.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9face6bb578a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/net_cls.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+Network classifier cgroup
+-------------------------
+
+The Network classifier cgroup provides an interface to
+tag network packets with a class identifier (classid).
+
+The Traffic Controller (tc) can be used to assign
+different priorities to packets from different cgroups.
+
+Creating a net_cls cgroups instance creates a net_cls.classid file.
+This net_cls.classid value is initialized to 0.
+
+You can write hexadecimal values to net_cls.classid; the format for these
+values is 0xAAAABBBB; AAAA is the major handle number and BBBB
+is the minor handle number.
+Reading net_cls.classid yields a decimal result.
+
+Example:
+mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls
+mount -t cgroup -onet_cls net_cls /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls
+mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls/0
+echo 0x100001 >  /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls/0/net_cls.classid
+	- setting a 10:1 handle.
+
+cat /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls/0/net_cls.classid
+1048577
+
+configuring tc:
+tc qdisc add dev eth0 root handle 10: htb
+
+tc class add dev eth0 parent 10: classid 10:1 htb rate 40mbit
+ - creating traffic class 10:1
+
+tc filter add dev eth0 parent 10: protocol ip prio 10 handle 1: cgroup
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/net_prio.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/net_prio.txt
index 01b322635591..a82cbd28ea8a 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/net_prio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/net_prio.txt
@@ -51,3 +51,5 @@ One usage for the net_prio cgroup is with mqprio qdisc allowing application
 traffic to be steered to hardware/driver based traffic classes. These mappings
 can then be managed by administrators or other networking protocols such as
 DCBX.
+
+A new net_prio cgroup inherits the parent's configuration.
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/resource_counter.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/resource_counter.txt
index 95b24d766eab..c4d99ed0b418 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/resource_counter.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/resource_counter.txt
@@ -77,21 +77,30 @@ to work with it.
 	where the charging failed.
 
  d. int res_counter_charge_locked
-			(struct res_counter *rc, unsigned long val)
+			(struct res_counter *rc, unsigned long val, bool force)
 
 	The same as res_counter_charge(), but it must not acquire/release the
 	res_counter->lock internally (it must be called with res_counter->lock
-	held).
+	held). The force parameter indicates whether we can bypass the limit.
 
- e. void res_counter_uncharge[_locked]
+ e. u64 res_counter_uncharge[_locked]
 			(struct res_counter *rc, unsigned long val)
 
 	When a resource is released (freed) it should be de-accounted
 	from the resource counter it was accounted to.  This is called
-	"uncharging".
+	"uncharging". The return value of this function indicate the amount
+	of charges still present in the counter.
 
 	The _locked routines imply that the res_counter->lock is taken.
 
+ f. u64 res_counter_uncharge_until
+		(struct res_counter *rc, struct res_counter *top,
+		 unsinged long val)
+
+	Almost same as res_cunter_uncharge() but propagation of uncharge
+	stops when rc == top. This is useful when kill a res_coutner in
+	child cgroup.
+
  2.1 Other accounting routines
 
     There are more routines that may help you with common needs, like
diff --git a/Documentation/clk.txt b/Documentation/clk.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3aeb5c440442
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/clk.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+		The Common Clk Framework
+		Mike Turquette <mturquette@ti.com>
+
+This document endeavours to explain the common clk framework details,
+and how to port a platform over to this framework.  It is not yet a
+detailed explanation of the clock api in include/linux/clk.h, but
+perhaps someday it will include that information.
+
+	Part 1 - introduction and interface split
+
+The common clk framework is an interface to control the clock nodes
+available on various devices today.  This may come in the form of clock
+gating, rate adjustment, muxing or other operations.  This framework is
+enabled with the CONFIG_COMMON_CLK option.
+
+The interface itself is divided into two halves, each shielded from the
+details of its counterpart.  First is the common definition of struct
+clk which unifies the framework-level accounting and infrastructure that
+has traditionally been duplicated across a variety of platforms.  Second
+is a common implementation of the clk.h api, defined in
+drivers/clk/clk.c.  Finally there is struct clk_ops, whose operations
+are invoked by the clk api implementation.
+
+The second half of the interface is comprised of the hardware-specific
+callbacks registered with struct clk_ops and the corresponding
+hardware-specific structures needed to model a particular clock.  For
+the remainder of this document any reference to a callback in struct
+clk_ops, such as .enable or .set_rate, implies the hardware-specific
+implementation of that code.  Likewise, references to struct clk_foo
+serve as a convenient shorthand for the implementation of the
+hardware-specific bits for the hypothetical "foo" hardware.
+
+Tying the two halves of this interface together is struct clk_hw, which
+is defined in struct clk_foo and pointed to within struct clk.  This
+allows for easy navigation between the two discrete halves of the common
+clock interface.
+
+	Part 2 - common data structures and api
+
+Below is the common struct clk definition from
+include/linux/clk-private.h, modified for brevity:
+
+	struct clk {
+		const char		*name;
+		const struct clk_ops	*ops;
+		struct clk_hw		*hw;
+		char			**parent_names;
+		struct clk		**parents;
+		struct clk		*parent;
+		struct hlist_head	children;
+		struct hlist_node	child_node;
+		...
+	};
+
+The members above make up the core of the clk tree topology.  The clk
+api itself defines several driver-facing functions which operate on
+struct clk.  That api is documented in include/linux/clk.h.
+
+Platforms and devices utilizing the common struct clk use the struct
+clk_ops pointer in struct clk to perform the hardware-specific parts of
+the operations defined in clk.h:
+
+	struct clk_ops {
+		int		(*prepare)(struct clk_hw *hw);
+		void		(*unprepare)(struct clk_hw *hw);
+		int		(*enable)(struct clk_hw *hw);
+		void		(*disable)(struct clk_hw *hw);
+		int		(*is_enabled)(struct clk_hw *hw);
+		unsigned long	(*recalc_rate)(struct clk_hw *hw,
+						unsigned long parent_rate);
+		long		(*round_rate)(struct clk_hw *hw, unsigned long,
+						unsigned long *);
+		long		(*determine_rate)(struct clk_hw *hw,
+						unsigned long rate,
+						unsigned long *best_parent_rate,
+						struct clk **best_parent_clk);
+		int		(*set_parent)(struct clk_hw *hw, u8 index);
+		u8		(*get_parent)(struct clk_hw *hw);
+		int		(*set_rate)(struct clk_hw *hw, unsigned long);
+		void		(*init)(struct clk_hw *hw);
+	};
+
+	Part 3 - hardware clk implementations
+
+The strength of the common struct clk comes from its .ops and .hw pointers
+which abstract the details of struct clk from the hardware-specific bits, and
+vice versa.  To illustrate consider the simple gateable clk implementation in
+drivers/clk/clk-gate.c:
+
+struct clk_gate {
+	struct clk_hw	hw;
+	void __iomem    *reg;
+	u8              bit_idx;
+	...
+};
+
+struct clk_gate contains struct clk_hw hw as well as hardware-specific
+knowledge about which register and bit controls this clk's gating.
+Nothing about clock topology or accounting, such as enable_count or
+notifier_count, is needed here.  That is all handled by the common
+framework code and struct clk.
+
+Let's walk through enabling this clk from driver code:
+
+	struct clk *clk;
+	clk = clk_get(NULL, "my_gateable_clk");
+
+	clk_prepare(clk);
+	clk_enable(clk);
+
+The call graph for clk_enable is very simple:
+
+clk_enable(clk);
+	clk->ops->enable(clk->hw);
+	[resolves to...]
+		clk_gate_enable(hw);
+		[resolves struct clk gate with to_clk_gate(hw)]
+			clk_gate_set_bit(gate);
+
+And the definition of clk_gate_set_bit:
+
+static void clk_gate_set_bit(struct clk_gate *gate)
+{
+	u32 reg;
+
+	reg = __raw_readl(gate->reg);
+	reg |= BIT(gate->bit_idx);
+	writel(reg, gate->reg);
+}
+
+Note that to_clk_gate is defined as:
+
+#define to_clk_gate(_hw) container_of(_hw, struct clk_gate, clk)
+
+This pattern of abstraction is used for every clock hardware
+representation.
+
+	Part 4 - supporting your own clk hardware
+
+When implementing support for a new type of clock it only necessary to
+include the following header:
+
+#include <linux/clk-provider.h>
+
+include/linux/clk.h is included within that header and clk-private.h
+must never be included from the code which implements the operations for
+a clock.  More on that below in Part 5.
+
+To construct a clk hardware structure for your platform you must define
+the following:
+
+struct clk_foo {
+	struct clk_hw hw;
+	... hardware specific data goes here ...
+};
+
+To take advantage of your data you'll need to support valid operations
+for your clk:
+
+struct clk_ops clk_foo_ops {
+	.enable		= &clk_foo_enable;
+	.disable	= &clk_foo_disable;
+};
+
+Implement the above functions using container_of:
+
+#define to_clk_foo(_hw) container_of(_hw, struct clk_foo, hw)
+
+int clk_foo_enable(struct clk_hw *hw)
+{
+	struct clk_foo *foo;
+
+	foo = to_clk_foo(hw);
+
+	... perform magic on foo ...
+
+	return 0;
+};
+
+Below is a matrix detailing which clk_ops are mandatory based upon the
+hardware capabilities of that clock.  A cell marked as "y" means
+mandatory, a cell marked as "n" implies that either including that
+callback is invalid or otherwise unnecessary.  Empty cells are either
+optional or must be evaluated on a case-by-case basis.
+
+                              clock hardware characteristics
+                -----------------------------------------------------------
+                | gate | change rate | single parent | multiplexer | root |
+                |------|-------------|---------------|-------------|------|
+.prepare        |      |             |               |             |      |
+.unprepare      |      |             |               |             |      |
+                |      |             |               |             |      |
+.enable         | y    |             |               |             |      |
+.disable        | y    |             |               |             |      |
+.is_enabled     | y    |             |               |             |      |
+                |      |             |               |             |      |
+.recalc_rate    |      | y           |               |             |      |
+.round_rate     |      | y [1]       |               |             |      |
+.determine_rate |      | y [1]       |               |             |      |
+.set_rate       |      | y           |               |             |      |
+                |      |             |               |             |      |
+.set_parent     |      |             | n             | y           | n    |
+.get_parent     |      |             | n             | y           | n    |
+                |      |             |               |             |      |
+.init           |      |             |               |             |      |
+                -----------------------------------------------------------
+[1] either one of round_rate or determine_rate is required.
+
+Finally, register your clock at run-time with a hardware-specific
+registration function.  This function simply populates struct clk_foo's
+data and then passes the common struct clk parameters to the framework
+with a call to:
+
+clk_register(...)
+
+See the basic clock types in drivers/clk/clk-*.c for examples.
+
+	Part 5 - static initialization of clock data
+
+For platforms with many clocks (often numbering into the hundreds) it
+may be desirable to statically initialize some clock data.  This
+presents a problem since the definition of struct clk should be hidden
+from everyone except for the clock core in drivers/clk/clk.c.
+
+To get around this problem struct clk's definition is exposed in
+include/linux/clk-private.h along with some macros for more easily
+initializing instances of the basic clock types.  These clocks must
+still be initialized with the common clock framework via a call to
+__clk_init.
+
+clk-private.h must NEVER be included by code which implements struct
+clk_ops callbacks, nor must it be included by any logic which pokes
+around inside of struct clk at run-time.  To do so is a layering
+violation.
+
+To better enforce this policy, always follow this simple rule: any
+statically initialized clock data MUST be defined in a separate file
+from the logic that implements its ops.  Basically separate the logic
+from the data and all is well.
+
+	Part 6 - Disabling clock gating of unused clocks
+
+Sometimes during development it can be useful to be able to bypass the
+default disabling of unused clocks. For example, if drivers aren't enabling
+clocks properly but rely on them being on from the bootloader, bypassing
+the disabling means that the driver will remain functional while the issues
+are sorted out.
+
+To bypass this disabling, include "clk_ignore_unused" in the bootargs to the
+kernel.
diff --git a/Documentation/coccinelle.txt b/Documentation/coccinelle.txt
index cf44eb6499b4..7f773d51fdd9 100644
--- a/Documentation/coccinelle.txt
+++ b/Documentation/coccinelle.txt
@@ -6,15 +6,17 @@ Copyright 2010 Gilles Muller <Gilles.Muller@lip6.fr>
  Getting Coccinelle
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
-The semantic patches included in the kernel use the 'virtual rule'
-feature which was introduced in Coccinelle version 0.1.11.
+The semantic patches included in the kernel use features and options
+which are provided by Coccinelle version 1.0.0-rc11 and above.
+Using earlier versions will fail as the option names used by
+the Coccinelle files and coccicheck have been updated.
 
-Coccinelle (>=0.2.0) is available through the package manager
+Coccinelle is available through the package manager
 of many distributions, e.g. :
 
- - Debian (>=squeeze)
- - Fedora (>=13)
- - Ubuntu (>=10.04 Lucid Lynx)
+ - Debian
+ - Fedora
+ - Ubuntu
  - OpenSUSE
  - Arch Linux
  - NetBSD
@@ -36,11 +38,6 @@ as a regular user, and install it with
 
         sudo make install
 
-The semantic patches in the kernel will work best with Coccinelle version
-0.2.4 or later.  Using earlier versions may incur some parse errors in the
-semantic patch code, but any results that are obtained should still be
-correct.
-
  Using Coccinelle on the Linux kernel
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
@@ -48,7 +45,7 @@ A Coccinelle-specific target is defined in the top level
 Makefile. This target is named 'coccicheck' and calls the 'coccicheck'
 front-end in the 'scripts' directory.
 
-Four modes are defined: patch, report, context, and org. The mode to
+Four basic modes are defined: patch, report, context, and org. The mode to
 use is specified by setting the MODE variable with 'MODE=<mode>'.
 
 'patch' proposes a fix, when possible.
@@ -62,18 +59,24 @@ diff-like style.Lines of interest are indicated with '-'.
 'org' generates a report in the Org mode format of Emacs.
 
 Note that not all semantic patches implement all modes. For easy use
-of Coccinelle, the default mode is "chain" which tries the previous
-modes in the order above until one succeeds.
+of Coccinelle, the default mode is "report".
+
+Two other modes provide some common combinations of these modes.
+
+'chain' tries the previous modes in the order above until one succeeds.
 
-To make a report for every semantic patch, run the following command:
+'rep+ctxt' runs successively the report mode and the context mode.
+	   It should be used with the C option (described later)
+	   which checks the code on a file basis.
 
-	make coccicheck MODE=report
+Examples:
+	To make a report for every semantic patch, run the following command:
 
-NB: The 'report' mode is the default one.
+		make coccicheck MODE=report
 
-To produce patches, run:
+	To produce patches, run:
 
-	make coccicheck MODE=patch
+		make coccicheck MODE=patch
 
 
 The coccicheck target applies every semantic patch available in the
@@ -87,6 +90,15 @@ As any static code analyzer, Coccinelle produces false
 positives. Thus, reports must be carefully checked, and patches
 reviewed.
 
+To enable verbose messages set the V= variable, for example:
+
+   make coccicheck MODE=report V=1
+
+By default, coccicheck tries to run as parallel as possible. To change
+the parallelism, set the J= variable. For example, to run across 4 CPUs:
+
+   make coccicheck MODE=report J=4
+
 
  Using Coccinelle with a single semantic patch
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -110,7 +122,7 @@ To apply Coccinelle to a specific directory, M= can be used.
 For example, to check drivers/net/wireless/ one may write:
 
     make coccicheck M=drivers/net/wireless/
-    
+
 To apply Coccinelle on a file basis, instead of a directory basis, the
 following command may be used:
 
@@ -120,16 +132,32 @@ To check only newly edited code, use the value 2 for the C flag, i.e.
 
     make C=2 CHECK="scripts/coccicheck"
 
+In these modes, which works on a file basis, there is no information
+about semantic patches displayed, and no commit message proposed.
+
 This runs every semantic patch in scripts/coccinelle by default. The
 COCCI variable may additionally be used to only apply a single
 semantic patch as shown in the previous section.
 
-The "chain" mode is the default. You can select another one with the
+The "report" mode is the default. You can select another one with the
 MODE variable explained above.
 
-In this mode, there is no information about semantic patches
-displayed, and no commit message proposed.
+ Additional flags
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Additional flags can be passed to spatch through the SPFLAGS
+variable.
+
+    make SPFLAGS=--use-glimpse coccicheck
+    make SPFLAGS=--use-idutils coccicheck
+
+See spatch --help to learn more about spatch options.
 
+Note that the '--use-glimpse' and '--use-idutils' options
+require external tools for indexing the code. None of them is
+thus active by default. However, by indexing the code with
+one of these tools, and according to the cocci file used,
+spatch could proceed the entire code base more quickly.
 
  Proposing new semantic patches
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
diff --git a/Documentation/connector/cn_test.c b/Documentation/connector/cn_test.c
index 7764594778d4..adcca0368d60 100644
--- a/Documentation/connector/cn_test.c
+++ b/Documentation/connector/cn_test.c
@@ -69,9 +69,13 @@ static int cn_test_want_notify(void)
 		return -ENOMEM;
 	}
 
-	nlh = NLMSG_PUT(skb, 0, 0x123, NLMSG_DONE, size - sizeof(*nlh));
+	nlh = nlmsg_put(skb, 0, 0x123, NLMSG_DONE, size - sizeof(*nlh), 0);
+	if (!nlh) {
+		kfree_skb(skb);
+		return -EMSGSIZE;
+	}
 
-	msg = (struct cn_msg *)NLMSG_DATA(nlh);
+	msg = nlmsg_data(nlh);
 
 	memset(msg, 0, size0);
 
@@ -117,11 +121,6 @@ static int cn_test_want_notify(void)
 	pr_info("request was sent: group=0x%x\n", ctl->group);
 
 	return 0;
-
-nlmsg_failure:
-	pr_err("failed to send %u.%u\n", msg->seq, msg->ack);
-	kfree_skb(skb);
-	return -EINVAL;
 }
 #endif
 
diff --git a/Documentation/connector/ucon.c b/Documentation/connector/ucon.c
index 4848db8c71ff..8a4da64e02a8 100644
--- a/Documentation/connector/ucon.c
+++ b/Documentation/connector/ucon.c
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ static int netlink_send(int s, struct cn_msg *msg)
 	nlh->nlmsg_seq = seq++;
 	nlh->nlmsg_pid = getpid();
 	nlh->nlmsg_type = NLMSG_DONE;
-	nlh->nlmsg_len = NLMSG_LENGTH(size - sizeof(*nlh));
+	nlh->nlmsg_len = size;
 	nlh->nlmsg_flags = 0;
 
 	m = NLMSG_DATA(nlh);
diff --git a/Documentation/console/console.txt b/Documentation/console/console.txt
index 926cf1b5e63e..f93810d599ad 100644
--- a/Documentation/console/console.txt
+++ b/Documentation/console/console.txt
@@ -12,20 +12,20 @@ The second type has to be explicitly loaded and unloaded. This will be called
 any time with each driver sharing the console with other drivers including
 the system driver. However, modular drivers cannot take over the console
 that is currently occupied by another modular driver. (Exception: Drivers that
-call take_over_console() will succeed in the takeover regardless of the type
+call do_take_over_console() will succeed in the takeover regardless of the type
 of driver occupying the consoles.) They can only take over the console that is
 occupied by the system driver. In the same token, if the modular driver is
 released by the console, the system driver will take over.
 
 Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, has to call:
 
-	 take_over_console() - load and bind driver to console layer
-	 give_up_console() - unbind and unload driver
+	 do_take_over_console() - load and bind driver to console layer
+	 give_up_console() - unload driver, it will only work if driver is fully unbond
 
 In newer kernels, the following are also available:
 
-	 register_con_driver()
-	 unregister_con_driver()
+	 do_register_con_driver()
+	 do_unregister_con_driver()
 
 If sysfs is enabled, the contents of /sys/class/vtconsole can be
 examined. This shows the console backends currently registered by the
@@ -94,12 +94,12 @@ for more details).
 Notes for developers:
 =====================
 
-take_over_console() is now broken up into:
+do_take_over_console() is now broken up into:
 
-     register_con_driver()
-     bind_con_driver() - private function
+     do_register_con_driver()
+     do_bind_con_driver() - private function
 
-give_up_console() is a wrapper to unregister_con_driver(), and a driver must
+give_up_console() is a wrapper to do_unregister_con_driver(), and a driver must
 be fully unbound for this call to succeed. con_is_bound() will check if the
 driver is bound or not.
 
@@ -109,10 +109,10 @@ Guidelines for console driver writers:
 In order for binding to and unbinding from the console to properly work,
 console drivers must follow these guidelines:
 
-1. All drivers, except system drivers, must call either register_con_driver()
-   or take_over_console(). register_con_driver() will just add the driver to
+1. All drivers, except system drivers, must call either do_register_con_driver()
+   or do_take_over_console(). do_register_con_driver() will just add the driver to
    the console's internal list. It won't take over the
-   console. take_over_console(), as it name implies, will also take over (or
+   console. do_take_over_console(), as it name implies, will also take over (or
    bind to) the console.
 
 2. All resources allocated during con->con_init() must be released in
@@ -128,10 +128,10 @@ console drivers must follow these guidelines:
    rebind the driver to the console arrives.
 
 4. Upon exit of the driver, ensure that the driver is totally unbound. If the
-   condition is satisfied, then the driver must call unregister_con_driver()
+   condition is satisfied, then the driver must call do_unregister_con_driver()
    or give_up_console().
 
-5. unregister_con_driver() can also be called on conditions which make it
+5. do_unregister_con_driver() can also be called on conditions which make it
    impossible for the driver to service console requests.  This can happen
    with the framebuffer console that suddenly lost all of its drivers.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/boost.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/boost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9b4edfcf486f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/boost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+Processor boosting control
+
+	- information for users -
+
+Quick guide for the impatient:
+--------------------
+/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpufreq/boost
+controls the boost setting for the whole system. You can read and write
+that file with either "0" (boosting disabled) or "1" (boosting allowed).
+Reading or writing 1 does not mean that the system is boosting at this
+very moment, but only that the CPU _may_ raise the frequency at it's
+discretion.
+--------------------
+
+Introduction
+-------------
+Some CPUs support a functionality to raise the operating frequency of
+some cores in a multi-core package if certain conditions apply, mostly
+if the whole chip is not fully utilized and below it's intended thermal
+budget. This is done without operating system control by a combination
+of hardware and firmware.
+On Intel CPUs this is called "Turbo Boost", AMD calls it "Turbo-Core",
+in technical documentation "Core performance boost". In Linux we use
+the term "boost" for convenience.
+
+Rationale for disable switch
+----------------------------
+
+Though the idea is to just give better performance without any user
+intervention, sometimes the need arises to disable this functionality.
+Most systems offer a switch in the (BIOS) firmware to disable the
+functionality at all, but a more fine-grained and dynamic control would
+be desirable:
+1. While running benchmarks, reproducible results are important. Since
+   the boosting functionality depends on the load of the whole package,
+   single thread performance can vary. By explicitly disabling the boost
+   functionality at least for the benchmark's run-time the system will run
+   at a fixed frequency and results are reproducible again.
+2. To examine the impact of the boosting functionality it is helpful
+   to do tests with and without boosting.
+3. Boosting means overclocking the processor, though under controlled
+   conditions. By raising the frequency and the voltage the processor
+   will consume more power than without the boosting, which may be
+   undesirable for instance for mobile users. Disabling boosting may
+   save power here, though this depends on the workload.
+
+
+User controlled switch
+----------------------
+
+To allow the user to toggle the boosting functionality, the acpi-cpufreq
+driver exports a sysfs knob to disable it. There is a file:
+/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpufreq/boost
+which can either read "0" (boosting disabled) or "1" (boosting enabled).
+Reading the file is always supported, even if the processor does not
+support boosting. In this case the file will be read-only and always
+reads as "0". Explicitly changing the permissions and writing to that
+file anyway will return EINVAL.
+
+On supported CPUs one can write either a "0" or a "1" into this file.
+This will either disable the boost functionality on all cores in the
+whole system (0) or will allow the hardware to boost at will (1).
+
+Writing a "1" does not explicitly boost the system, but just allows the
+CPU (and the firmware) to boost at their discretion. Some implementations
+take external factors like the chip's temperature into account, so
+boosting once does not necessarily mean that it will occur every time
+even using the exact same software setup.
+
+
+AMD legacy cpb switch
+---------------------
+The AMD powernow-k8 driver used to support a very similar switch to
+disable or enable the "Core Performance Boost" feature of some AMD CPUs.
+This switch was instantiated in each CPU's cpufreq directory
+(/sys/devices/system/cpu[0-9]*/cpufreq) and was called "cpb".
+Though the per CPU existence hints at a more fine grained control, the
+actual implementation only supported a system-global switch semantics,
+which was simply reflected into each CPU's file. Writing a 0 or 1 into it
+would pull the other CPUs to the same state.
+For compatibility reasons this file and its behavior is still supported
+on AMD CPUs, though it is now protected by a config switch
+(X86_ACPI_CPUFREQ_CPB). On Intel CPUs this file will never be created,
+even with the config option set.
+This functionality is considered legacy and will be removed in some future
+kernel version.
+
+More fine grained boosting control
+----------------------------------
+
+Technically it is possible to switch the boosting functionality at least
+on a per package basis, for some CPUs even per core. Currently the driver
+does not support it, but this may be implemented in the future.
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt
index c436096351f8..40282e617913 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt
@@ -50,8 +50,6 @@ What shall this struct cpufreq_driver contain?
 
 cpufreq_driver.name -		The name of this driver.
 
-cpufreq_driver.owner -		THIS_MODULE;
-
 cpufreq_driver.init -		A pointer to the per-CPU initialization 
 				function.
 
@@ -108,8 +106,15 @@ policy->governor		must contain the "default policy" for
 				cpufreq_driver.target is called with
 				these values.
 
-For setting some of these values, the frequency table helpers might be
-helpful. See the section 2 for more information on them.
+For setting some of these values (cpuinfo.min[max]_freq, policy->min[max]), the
+frequency table helpers might be helpful. See the section 2 for more information
+on them.
+
+SMP systems normally have same clock source for a group of cpus. For these the
+.init() would be called only once for the first online cpu. Here the .init()
+routine must initialize policy->cpus with mask of all possible cpus (Online +
+Offline) that share the clock. Then the core would copy this mask onto
+policy->related_cpus and will reset policy->cpus to carry only online cpus.
 
 
 1.3 verify
@@ -178,10 +183,10 @@ the reference implementation in drivers/cpufreq/longrun.c
 As most cpufreq processors only allow for being set to a few specific
 frequencies, a "frequency table" with some functions might assist in
 some work of the processor driver. Such a "frequency table" consists
-of an array of struct cpufreq_freq_table entries, with any value in
-"index" you want to use, and the corresponding frequency in
+of an array of struct cpufreq_frequency_table entries, with any value in
+"driver_data" you want to use, and the corresponding frequency in
 "frequency". At the end of the table, you need to add a
-cpufreq_freq_table entry with frequency set to CPUFREQ_TABLE_END. And
+cpufreq_frequency_table entry with frequency set to CPUFREQ_TABLE_END. And
 if you want to skip one entry in the table, set the frequency to 
 CPUFREQ_ENTRY_INVALID. The entries don't need to be in ascending
 order.
@@ -207,10 +212,4 @@ int cpufreq_frequency_table_target(struct cpufreq_policy *policy,
 is the corresponding frequency table helper for the ->target
 stage. Just pass the values to this function, and the unsigned int
 index returns the number of the frequency table entry which contains
-the frequency the CPU shall be set to. PLEASE NOTE: This is not the
-"index" which is in this cpufreq_table_entry.index, but instead
-cpufreq_table[index]. So, the new frequency is
-cpufreq_table[index].frequency, and the value you stored into the
-frequency table "index" field is
-cpufreq_table[index].index.
-
+the frequency the CPU shall be set to.
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt
index c7a2eb8450c2..219970ba54b7 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt
@@ -131,8 +131,8 @@ sampling_rate_min:
 The sampling rate is limited by the HW transition latency:
 transition_latency * 100
 Or by kernel restrictions:
-If CONFIG_NO_HZ is set, the limit is 10ms fixed.
-If CONFIG_NO_HZ is not set or nohz=off boot parameter is used, the
+If CONFIG_NO_HZ_COMMON is set, the limit is 10ms fixed.
+If CONFIG_NO_HZ_COMMON is not set or nohz=off boot parameter is used, the
 limits depend on the CONFIG_HZ option:
 HZ=1000: min=20000us  (20ms)
 HZ=250:  min=80000us  (80ms)
@@ -167,6 +167,27 @@ of load evaluation and helping the CPU stay at its top speed when truly
 busy, rather than shifting back and forth in speed. This tunable has no
 effect on behavior at lower speeds/lower CPU loads.
 
+powersave_bias: this parameter takes a value between 0 to 1000. It
+defines the percentage (times 10) value of the target frequency that
+will be shaved off of the target. For example, when set to 100 -- 10%,
+when ondemand governor would have targeted 1000 MHz, it will target
+1000 MHz - (10% of 1000 MHz) = 900 MHz instead. This is set to 0
+(disabled) by default.
+When AMD frequency sensitivity powersave bias driver --
+drivers/cpufreq/amd_freq_sensitivity.c is loaded, this parameter
+defines the workload frequency sensitivity threshold in which a lower
+frequency is chosen instead of ondemand governor's original target.
+The frequency sensitivity is a hardware reported (on AMD Family 16h
+Processors and above) value between 0 to 100% that tells software how
+the performance of the workload running on a CPU will change when
+frequency changes. A workload with sensitivity of 0% (memory/IO-bound)
+will not perform any better on higher core frequency, whereas a
+workload with sensitivity of 100% (CPU-bound) will perform better
+higher the frequency. When the driver is loaded, this is set to 400
+by default -- for CPUs running workloads with sensitivity value below
+40%, a lower frequency is chosen. Unloading the driver or writing 0
+will disable this feature.
+
 
 2.5 Conservative
 ----------------
@@ -191,6 +212,12 @@ governor but for the opposite direction.  For example when set to its
 default value of '20' it means that if the CPU usage needs to be below
 20% between samples to have the frequency decreased.
 
+sampling_down_factor: similar functionality as in "ondemand" governor.
+But in "conservative", it controls the rate at which the kernel makes
+a decision on when to decrease the frequency while running in any
+speed. Load for frequency increase is still evaluated every
+sampling rate.
+
 3. The Governor Interface in the CPUfreq Core
 =============================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt
index 04f6b32993e6..ff2f28332cc4 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt
@@ -190,11 +190,11 @@ scaling_max_freq		show the current "policy limits" (in
 				first set scaling_max_freq, then
 				scaling_min_freq.
 
-affected_cpus :			List of CPUs that require software coordination
-				of frequency.
+affected_cpus :			List of Online CPUs that require software
+				coordination of frequency.
 
-related_cpus :			List of CPUs that need some sort of frequency
-				coordination, whether software or hardware.
+related_cpus :			List of Online + Offline CPUs that need software
+				coordination of frequency.
 
 scaling_driver :		Hardware driver for cpufreq.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt
index a20bfd415e41..786dc82f98ce 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ maxcpus=n    Restrict boot time cpus to n. Say if you have 4 cpus, using
              other cpus later online, read FAQ's for more info.
 
 additional_cpus=n (*)	Use this to limit hotpluggable cpus. This option sets
-  			cpu_possible_map = cpu_present_map + additional_cpus
+  			cpu_possible_mask = cpu_present_mask + additional_cpus
 
 cede_offline={"off","on"}  Use this option to disable/enable putting offlined
 		            processors to an extended H_CEDE state on
@@ -64,11 +64,11 @@ should only rely on this to count the # of cpus, but *MUST* not rely
 on the apicid values in those tables for disabled apics. In the event
 BIOS doesn't mark such hot-pluggable cpus as disabled entries, one could
 use this parameter "additional_cpus=x" to represent those cpus in the
-cpu_possible_map.
+cpu_possible_mask.
 
 possible_cpus=n		[s390,x86_64] use this to set hotpluggable cpus.
 			This option sets possible_cpus bits in
-			cpu_possible_map. Thus keeping the numbers of bits set
+			cpu_possible_mask. Thus keeping the numbers of bits set
 			constant even if the machine gets rebooted.
 
 CPU maps and such
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ CPU maps and such
 [More on cpumaps and primitive to manipulate, please check
 include/linux/cpumask.h that has more descriptive text.]
 
-cpu_possible_map: Bitmap of possible CPUs that can ever be available in the
+cpu_possible_mask: Bitmap of possible CPUs that can ever be available in the
 system. This is used to allocate some boot time memory for per_cpu variables
 that aren't designed to grow/shrink as CPUs are made available or removed.
 Once set during boot time discovery phase, the map is static, i.e no bits
@@ -84,13 +84,13 @@ are added or removed anytime.  Trimming it accurately for your system needs
 upfront can save some boot time memory. See below for how we use heuristics
 in x86_64 case to keep this under check.
 
-cpu_online_map: Bitmap of all CPUs currently online. Its set in __cpu_up()
+cpu_online_mask: Bitmap of all CPUs currently online. Its set in __cpu_up()
 after a cpu is available for kernel scheduling and ready to receive
 interrupts from devices. Its cleared when a cpu is brought down using
 __cpu_disable(), before which all OS services including interrupts are
 migrated to another target CPU.
 
-cpu_present_map: Bitmap of CPUs currently present in the system. Not all
+cpu_present_mask: Bitmap of CPUs currently present in the system. Not all
 of them may be online. When physical hotplug is processed by the relevant
 subsystem (e.g ACPI) can change and new bit either be added or removed
 from the map depending on the event is hot-add/hot-remove. There are currently
@@ -99,22 +99,22 @@ at which time hotplug is disabled.
 
 You really dont need to manipulate any of the system cpu maps. They should
 be read-only for most use. When setting up per-cpu resources almost always use
-cpu_possible_map/for_each_possible_cpu() to iterate.
+cpu_possible_mask/for_each_possible_cpu() to iterate.
 
 Never use anything other than cpumask_t to represent bitmap of CPUs.
 
 	#include <linux/cpumask.h>
 
-	for_each_possible_cpu     - Iterate over cpu_possible_map
-	for_each_online_cpu       - Iterate over cpu_online_map
-	for_each_present_cpu      - Iterate over cpu_present_map
+	for_each_possible_cpu     - Iterate over cpu_possible_mask
+	for_each_online_cpu       - Iterate over cpu_online_mask
+	for_each_present_cpu      - Iterate over cpu_present_mask
 	for_each_cpu_mask(x,mask) - Iterate over some random collection of cpu mask.
 
 	#include <linux/cpu.h>
 	get_online_cpus() and put_online_cpus():
 
 The above calls are used to inhibit cpu hotplug operations. While the
-cpu_hotplug.refcount is non zero, the cpu_online_map will not change.
+cpu_hotplug.refcount is non zero, the cpu_online_mask will not change.
 If you merely need to avoid cpus going away, you could also use
 preempt_disable() and preempt_enable() for those sections.
 Just remember the critical section cannot call any
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ A: When doing make defconfig, Enable CPU hotplug support
 
    "Processor type and Features" -> Support for Hotpluggable CPUs
 
-Make sure that you have CONFIG_HOTPLUG, and CONFIG_SMP turned on as well.
+Make sure that you have CONFIG_SMP turned on as well.
 
 You would need to enable CONFIG_HOTPLUG_CPU for SMP suspend/resume support
 as well.
@@ -207,6 +207,30 @@ by making it not-removable.
 
 In such cases you will also notice that the online file is missing under cpu0.
 
+Q: Is CPU0 removable on X86?
+A: Yes. If kernel is compiled with CONFIG_BOOTPARAM_HOTPLUG_CPU0=y, CPU0 is
+removable by default. Otherwise, CPU0 is also removable by kernel option
+cpu0_hotplug.
+
+But some features depend on CPU0. Two known dependencies are:
+
+1. Resume from hibernate/suspend depends on CPU0. Hibernate/suspend will fail if
+CPU0 is offline and you need to online CPU0 before hibernate/suspend can
+continue.
+2. PIC interrupts also depend on CPU0. CPU0 can't be removed if a PIC interrupt
+is detected.
+
+It's said poweroff/reboot may depend on CPU0 on some machines although I haven't
+seen any poweroff/reboot failure so far after CPU0 is offline on a few tested
+machines.
+
+Please let me know if you know or see any other dependencies of CPU0.
+
+If the dependencies are under your control, you can turn on CPU0 hotplug feature
+either by CONFIG_BOOTPARAM_HOTPLUG_CPU0 or by kernel parameter cpu0_hotplug.
+
+--Fenghua Yu <fenghua.yu@intel.com>
+
 Q: How do i find out if a particular CPU is not removable?
 A: Depending on the implementation, some architectures may show this by the
 absence of the "online" file. This is done if it can be determined ahead of
@@ -243,8 +267,8 @@ Q: If i have some kernel code that needs to be aware of CPU arrival and
 A: This is what you would need in your kernel code to receive notifications.
 
 	#include <linux/cpu.h>
-	static int __cpuinit foobar_cpu_callback(struct notifier_block *nfb,
-					    unsigned long action, void *hcpu)
+	static int foobar_cpu_callback(struct notifier_block *nfb,
+				       unsigned long action, void *hcpu)
 	{
 		unsigned int cpu = (unsigned long)hcpu;
 
@@ -261,7 +285,7 @@ A: This is what you would need in your kernel code to receive notifications.
 		return NOTIFY_OK;
 	}
 
-	static struct notifier_block __cpuinitdata foobar_cpu_notifer =
+	static struct notifier_block foobar_cpu_notifer =
 	{
 	   .notifier_call = foobar_cpu_callback,
 	};
@@ -346,8 +370,10 @@ A: There is no clear spec defined way from ACPI that can give us that
    CPUs in MADT as hotpluggable CPUS.  In the case there are no disabled CPUS
    we assume 1/2 the number of CPUs currently present can be hotplugged.
 
-   Caveat: Today's ACPI MADT can only provide 256 entries since the apicid field
-   in MADT is only 8 bits.
+   Caveat: ACPI MADT can only provide 256 entries in systems with only ACPI 2.0c
+   or earlier ACPI version supported, because the apicid field in MADT is only
+   8 bits. From ACPI 3.0, this limitation was removed since the apicid field
+   was extended to 32 bits with x2APIC introduced.
 
 User Space Notification
 
diff --git a/Documentation/cpuidle/driver.txt b/Documentation/cpuidle/driver.txt
index 7a9e09ece931..1b0d81d92583 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpuidle/driver.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpuidle/driver.txt
@@ -15,11 +15,17 @@ has mechanisms in place to support actual entry-exit into CPU idle states.
 cpuidle driver initializes the cpuidle_device structure for each CPU device
 and registers with cpuidle using cpuidle_register_device.
 
+If all the idle states are the same, the wrapper function cpuidle_register
+could be used instead.
+
 It can also support the dynamic changes (like battery <-> AC), by using
 cpuidle_pause_and_lock, cpuidle_disable_device and cpuidle_enable_device,
 cpuidle_resume_and_unlock.
 
 Interfaces:
+extern int cpuidle_register(struct cpuidle_driver *drv,
+                            const struct cpumask *const coupled_cpus);
+extern int cpuidle_unregister(struct cpuidle_driver *drv);
 extern int cpuidle_register_driver(struct cpuidle_driver *drv);
 extern void cpuidle_unregister_driver(struct cpuidle_driver *drv);
 extern int cpuidle_register_device(struct cpuidle_device *dev);
diff --git a/Documentation/cpuidle/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/cpuidle/sysfs.txt
index 50d7b1642759..b6f44f490ed7 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpuidle/sysfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpuidle/sysfs.txt
@@ -36,6 +36,7 @@ drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 Feb  8 10:42 state3
 /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpuidle/state0:
 total 0
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 desc
+-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 disable
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 latency
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 name
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 power
@@ -45,6 +46,7 @@ total 0
 /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpuidle/state1:
 total 0
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 desc
+-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 disable
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 latency
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 name
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 power
@@ -54,6 +56,7 @@ total 0
 /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpuidle/state2:
 total 0
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 desc
+-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 disable
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 latency
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 name
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 power
@@ -63,6 +66,7 @@ total 0
 /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpuidle/state3:
 total 0
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 desc
+-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 disable
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 latency
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 name
 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Feb  8 10:42 power
@@ -72,8 +76,17 @@ total 0
 
 
 * desc : Small description about the idle state (string)
+* disable : Option to disable this idle state (bool) -> see note below
 * latency : Latency to exit out of this idle state (in microseconds)
 * name : Name of the idle state (string)
 * power : Power consumed while in this idle state (in milliwatts)
 * time : Total time spent in this idle state (in microseconds)
 * usage : Number of times this state was entered (count)
+
+Note:
+The behavior and the effect of the disable variable depends on the
+implementation of a particular governor. In the ladder governor, for
+example, it is not coherent, i.e. if one is disabling a light state,
+then all deeper states are disabled as well, but the disable variable
+does not reflect it. Likewise, if one enables a deep state but a lighter
+state still is disabled, then this has no effect.
diff --git a/Documentation/cputopology.txt b/Documentation/cputopology.txt
index 902d3151f527..0aad6deb2d96 100644
--- a/Documentation/cputopology.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cputopology.txt
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ to /proc/cpuinfo.
 
 4) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/thread_siblings:
 
-	internel kernel map of cpuX's hardware threads within the same
+	internal kernel map of cpuX's hardware threads within the same
 	core as cpuX
 
 5) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/core_siblings:
diff --git a/Documentation/crc32.txt b/Documentation/crc32.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a08a7dd9d625
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/crc32.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+A brief CRC tutorial.
+
+A CRC is a long-division remainder.  You add the CRC to the message,
+and the whole thing (message+CRC) is a multiple of the given
+CRC polynomial.  To check the CRC, you can either check that the
+CRC matches the recomputed value, *or* you can check that the
+remainder computed on the message+CRC is 0.  This latter approach
+is used by a lot of hardware implementations, and is why so many
+protocols put the end-of-frame flag after the CRC.
+
+It's actually the same long division you learned in school, except that
+- We're working in binary, so the digits are only 0 and 1, and
+- When dividing polynomials, there are no carries.  Rather than add and
+  subtract, we just xor.  Thus, we tend to get a bit sloppy about
+  the difference between adding and subtracting.
+
+Like all division, the remainder is always smaller than the divisor.
+To produce a 32-bit CRC, the divisor is actually a 33-bit CRC polynomial.
+Since it's 33 bits long, bit 32 is always going to be set, so usually the
+CRC is written in hex with the most significant bit omitted.  (If you're
+familiar with the IEEE 754 floating-point format, it's the same idea.)
+
+Note that a CRC is computed over a string of *bits*, so you have
+to decide on the endianness of the bits within each byte.  To get
+the best error-detecting properties, this should correspond to the
+order they're actually sent.  For example, standard RS-232 serial is
+little-endian; the most significant bit (sometimes used for parity)
+is sent last.  And when appending a CRC word to a message, you should
+do it in the right order, matching the endianness.
+
+Just like with ordinary division, you proceed one digit (bit) at a time.
+Each step of the division you take one more digit (bit) of the dividend
+and append it to the current remainder.  Then you figure out the
+appropriate multiple of the divisor to subtract to being the remainder
+back into range.  In binary, this is easy - it has to be either 0 or 1,
+and to make the XOR cancel, it's just a copy of bit 32 of the remainder.
+
+When computing a CRC, we don't care about the quotient, so we can
+throw the quotient bit away, but subtract the appropriate multiple of
+the polynomial from the remainder and we're back to where we started,
+ready to process the next bit.
+
+A big-endian CRC written this way would be coded like:
+for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
+	multiple = remainder & 0x80000000 ? CRCPOLY : 0;
+	remainder = (remainder << 1 | next_input_bit()) ^ multiple;
+}
+
+Notice how, to get at bit 32 of the shifted remainder, we look
+at bit 31 of the remainder *before* shifting it.
+
+But also notice how the next_input_bit() bits we're shifting into
+the remainder don't actually affect any decision-making until
+32 bits later.  Thus, the first 32 cycles of this are pretty boring.
+Also, to add the CRC to a message, we need a 32-bit-long hole for it at
+the end, so we have to add 32 extra cycles shifting in zeros at the
+end of every message,
+
+These details lead to a standard trick: rearrange merging in the
+next_input_bit() until the moment it's needed.  Then the first 32 cycles
+can be precomputed, and merging in the final 32 zero bits to make room
+for the CRC can be skipped entirely.  This changes the code to:
+
+for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
+	remainder ^= next_input_bit() << 31;
+	multiple = (remainder & 0x80000000) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
+	remainder = (remainder << 1) ^ multiple;
+}
+
+With this optimization, the little-endian code is particularly simple:
+for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
+	remainder ^= next_input_bit();
+	multiple = (remainder & 1) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
+	remainder = (remainder >> 1) ^ multiple;
+}
+
+The most significant coefficient of the remainder polynomial is stored
+in the least significant bit of the binary "remainder" variable.
+The other details of endianness have been hidden in CRCPOLY (which must
+be bit-reversed) and next_input_bit().
+
+As long as next_input_bit is returning the bits in a sensible order, we don't
+*have* to wait until the last possible moment to merge in additional bits.
+We can do it 8 bits at a time rather than 1 bit at a time:
+for (i = 0; i < input_bytes; i++) {
+	remainder ^= next_input_byte() << 24;
+	for (j = 0; j < 8; j++) {
+		multiple = (remainder & 0x80000000) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
+		remainder = (remainder << 1) ^ multiple;
+	}
+}
+
+Or in little-endian:
+for (i = 0; i < input_bytes; i++) {
+	remainder ^= next_input_byte();
+	for (j = 0; j < 8; j++) {
+		multiple = (remainder & 1) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
+		remainder = (remainder >> 1) ^ multiple;
+	}
+}
+
+If the input is a multiple of 32 bits, you can even XOR in a 32-bit
+word at a time and increase the inner loop count to 32.
+
+You can also mix and match the two loop styles, for example doing the
+bulk of a message byte-at-a-time and adding bit-at-a-time processing
+for any fractional bytes at the end.
+
+To reduce the number of conditional branches, software commonly uses
+the byte-at-a-time table method, popularized by Dilip V. Sarwate,
+"Computation of Cyclic Redundancy Checks via Table Look-Up", Comm. ACM
+v.31 no.8 (August 1998) p. 1008-1013.
+
+Here, rather than just shifting one bit of the remainder to decide
+in the correct multiple to subtract, we can shift a byte at a time.
+This produces a 40-bit (rather than a 33-bit) intermediate remainder,
+and the correct multiple of the polynomial to subtract is found using
+a 256-entry lookup table indexed by the high 8 bits.
+
+(The table entries are simply the CRC-32 of the given one-byte messages.)
+
+When space is more constrained, smaller tables can be used, e.g. two
+4-bit shifts followed by a lookup in a 16-entry table.
+
+It is not practical to process much more than 8 bits at a time using this
+technique, because tables larger than 256 entries use too much memory and,
+more importantly, too much of the L1 cache.
+
+To get higher software performance, a "slicing" technique can be used.
+See "High Octane CRC Generation with the Intel Slicing-by-8 Algorithm",
+ftp://download.intel.com/technology/comms/perfnet/download/slicing-by-8.pdf
+
+This does not change the number of table lookups, but does increase
+the parallelism.  With the classic Sarwate algorithm, each table lookup
+must be completed before the index of the next can be computed.
+
+A "slicing by 2" technique would shift the remainder 16 bits at a time,
+producing a 48-bit intermediate remainder.  Rather than doing a single
+lookup in a 65536-entry table, the two high bytes are looked up in
+two different 256-entry tables.  Each contains the remainder required
+to cancel out the corresponding byte.  The tables are different because the
+polynomials to cancel are different.  One has non-zero coefficients from
+x^32 to x^39, while the other goes from x^40 to x^47.
+
+Since modern processors can handle many parallel memory operations, this
+takes barely longer than a single table look-up and thus performs almost
+twice as fast as the basic Sarwate algorithm.
+
+This can be extended to "slicing by 4" using 4 256-entry tables.
+Each step, 32 bits of data is fetched, XORed with the CRC, and the result
+broken into bytes and looked up in the tables.  Because the 32-bit shift
+leaves the low-order bits of the intermediate remainder zero, the
+final CRC is simply the XOR of the 4 table look-ups.
+
+But this still enforces sequential execution: a second group of table
+look-ups cannot begin until the previous groups 4 table look-ups have all
+been completed.  Thus, the processor's load/store unit is sometimes idle.
+
+To make maximum use of the processor, "slicing by 8" performs 8 look-ups
+in parallel.  Each step, the 32-bit CRC is shifted 64 bits and XORed
+with 64 bits of input data.  What is important to note is that 4 of
+those 8 bytes are simply copies of the input data; they do not depend
+on the previous CRC at all.  Thus, those 4 table look-ups may commence
+immediately, without waiting for the previous loop iteration.
+
+By always having 4 loads in flight, a modern superscalar processor can
+be kept busy and make full use of its L1 cache.
+
+Two more details about CRC implementation in the real world:
+
+Normally, appending zero bits to a message which is already a multiple
+of a polynomial produces a larger multiple of that polynomial.  Thus,
+a basic CRC will not detect appended zero bits (or bytes).  To enable
+a CRC to detect this condition, it's common to invert the CRC before
+appending it.  This makes the remainder of the message+crc come out not
+as zero, but some fixed non-zero value.  (The CRC of the inversion
+pattern, 0xffffffff.)
+
+The same problem applies to zero bits prepended to the message, and a
+similar solution is used.  Instead of starting the CRC computation with
+a remainder of 0, an initial remainder of all ones is used.  As long as
+you start the same way on decoding, it doesn't make a difference.
diff --git a/Documentation/cris/README b/Documentation/cris/README
index d9b086869a60..8dbdb1a44429 100644
--- a/Documentation/cris/README
+++ b/Documentation/cris/README
@@ -1,38 +1,34 @@
-Linux 2.4 on the CRIS architecture
-==================================
-$Id: README,v 1.7 2001/04/19 12:38:32 bjornw Exp $
+Linux on the CRIS architecture
+==============================
 
-This is a port of Linux 2.4 to Axis Communications ETRAX 100LX embedded 
-network CPU. For more information about CRIS and ETRAX please see further
-below.
+This is a port of Linux to Axis Communications ETRAX 100LX,
+ETRAX FS and ARTPEC-3 embedded network CPUs.
+
+For more information about CRIS and ETRAX please see further below.
 
 In order to compile this you need a version of gcc with support for the
-ETRAX chip family. Please see this link for more information on how to 
+ETRAX chip family. Please see this link for more information on how to
 download the compiler and other tools useful when building and booting
 software for the ETRAX platform:
 
-http://developer.axis.com/doc/software/devboard_lx/install-howto.html
-
-<more specific information should come in this document later>
+http://developer.axis.com/wiki/doku.php?id=axis:install-howto-2_20
 
 What is CRIS ?
 --------------
 
 CRIS is an acronym for 'Code Reduced Instruction Set'. It is the CPU
 architecture in Axis Communication AB's range of embedded network CPU's,
-called ETRAX. The latest CPU is called ETRAX 100LX, where LX stands for
-'Linux' because the chip was designed to be a good host for the Linux
-operating system.
+called ETRAX.
 
 The ETRAX 100LX chip
 --------------------
 
-For reference, please see the press-release:
+For reference, please see the following link:
 
-http://www.axis.com/news/us/001101_etrax.htm
+http://www.axis.com/products/dev_etrax_100lx/index.htm
 
-The ETRAX 100LX is a 100 MIPS processor with 8kB cache, MMU, and a very broad 
-range of  built-in interfaces, all with modern scatter/gather DMA.
+The ETRAX 100LX is a 100 MIPS processor with 8kB cache, MMU, and a very broad
+range of built-in interfaces, all with modern scatter/gather DMA.
 
 Memory interfaces:
 
@@ -51,20 +47,28 @@ I/O interfaces:
 	* SCSI
 	* two parallel-ports
 	* two generic 8-bit ports
-	
-	(not all interfaces are available at the same time due to chip pin 
+
+	(not all interfaces are available at the same time due to chip pin
          multiplexing)
 
-The previous version of the ETRAX, the ETRAX 100, sits in almost all of
-Axis shipping thin-servers like the Axis 2100 web camera or the ETRAX 100
-developer-board. It lacks an MMU so the Linux we run on that is a version
-of uClinux (Linux 2.0 without MM-support) ported to the CRIS architecture.
-The new Linux 2.4 port has full MM and needs a CPU with an MMU, so it will
-not run on the ETRAX 100.
+ETRAX 100LX is CRISv10 architecture.
+
+
+The ETRAX FS and ARTPEC-3 chips
+-------------------------------
 
-A version of the Axis developer-board with ETRAX 100LX (running Linux
-2.4) is now available. For more information please see developer.axis.com.
+The ETRAX FS is a 200MHz 32-bit RISC processor with on-chip 16kB
+I-cache and 16kB D-cache and with a wide range of device interfaces
+including multiple high speed serial ports and an integrated USB 1.1 PHY.
 
+The ARTPEC-3 is a variant of the ETRAX FS with additional IO-units
+used by the Axis Communications network cameras.
+
+See below link for more information:
+
+http://www.axis.com/products/dev_etrax_fs/index.htm
+
+ETRAX FS and ARTPEC-3 are both CRISv32 architectures.
 
 Bootlog
 -------
@@ -182,10 +186,6 @@ SwapFree:            0 kB
 -rwxr-xr-x  1 342      100         16252  Jan 01 00:00 telnetd
 
 
-(All programs are statically linked to the libc at this point - we have not ported the
- shared libraries yet)
-
-
 
 
 
diff --git a/Documentation/crypto/asymmetric-keys.txt b/Documentation/crypto/asymmetric-keys.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b7675904a747
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/crypto/asymmetric-keys.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,312 @@
+		=============================================
+		ASYMMETRIC / PUBLIC-KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY KEY TYPE
+		=============================================
+
+Contents:
+
+  - Overview.
+  - Key identification.
+  - Accessing asymmetric keys.
+    - Signature verification.
+  - Asymmetric key subtypes.
+  - Instantiation data parsers.
+
+
+========
+OVERVIEW
+========
+
+The "asymmetric" key type is designed to be a container for the keys used in
+public-key cryptography, without imposing any particular restrictions on the
+form or mechanism of the cryptography or form of the key.
+
+The asymmetric key is given a subtype that defines what sort of data is
+associated with the key and provides operations to describe and destroy it.
+However, no requirement is made that the key data actually be stored in the
+key.
+
+A completely in-kernel key retention and operation subtype can be defined, but
+it would also be possible to provide access to cryptographic hardware (such as
+a TPM) that might be used to both retain the relevant key and perform
+operations using that key.  In such a case, the asymmetric key would then
+merely be an interface to the TPM driver.
+
+Also provided is the concept of a data parser.  Data parsers are responsible
+for extracting information from the blobs of data passed to the instantiation
+function.  The first data parser that recognises the blob gets to set the
+subtype of the key and define the operations that can be done on that key.
+
+A data parser may interpret the data blob as containing the bits representing a
+key, or it may interpret it as a reference to a key held somewhere else in the
+system (for example, a TPM).
+
+
+==================
+KEY IDENTIFICATION
+==================
+
+If a key is added with an empty name, the instantiation data parsers are given
+the opportunity to pre-parse a key and to determine the description the key
+should be given from the content of the key.
+
+This can then be used to refer to the key, either by complete match or by
+partial match.  The key type may also use other criteria to refer to a key.
+
+The asymmetric key type's match function can then perform a wider range of
+comparisons than just the straightforward comparison of the description with
+the criterion string:
+
+ (1) If the criterion string is of the form "id:<hexdigits>" then the match
+     function will examine a key's fingerprint to see if the hex digits given
+     after the "id:" match the tail.  For instance:
+
+	keyctl search @s asymmetric id:5acc2142
+
+     will match a key with fingerprint:
+
+	1A00 2040 7601 7889 DE11  882C 3823 04AD 5ACC 2142
+
+ (2) If the criterion string is of the form "<subtype>:<hexdigits>" then the
+     match will match the ID as in (1), but with the added restriction that
+     only keys of the specified subtype (e.g. tpm) will be matched.  For
+     instance:
+
+	keyctl search @s asymmetric tpm:5acc2142
+
+Looking in /proc/keys, the last 8 hex digits of the key fingerprint are
+displayed, along with the subtype:
+
+	1a39e171 I-----     1 perm 3f010000     0     0 asymmetri modsign.0: DSA 5acc2142 []
+
+
+=========================
+ACCESSING ASYMMETRIC KEYS
+=========================
+
+For general access to asymmetric keys from within the kernel, the following
+inclusion is required:
+
+	#include <crypto/public_key.h>
+
+This gives access to functions for dealing with asymmetric / public keys.
+Three enums are defined there for representing public-key cryptography
+algorithms:
+
+	enum pkey_algo
+
+digest algorithms used by those:
+
+	enum pkey_hash_algo
+
+and key identifier representations:
+
+	enum pkey_id_type
+
+Note that the key type representation types are required because key
+identifiers from different standards aren't necessarily compatible.  For
+instance, PGP generates key identifiers by hashing the key data plus some
+PGP-specific metadata, whereas X.509 has arbitrary certificate identifiers.
+
+The operations defined upon a key are:
+
+ (1) Signature verification.
+
+Other operations are possible (such as encryption) with the same key data
+required for verification, but not currently supported, and others
+(eg. decryption and signature generation) require extra key data.
+
+
+SIGNATURE VERIFICATION
+----------------------
+
+An operation is provided to perform cryptographic signature verification, using
+an asymmetric key to provide or to provide access to the public key.
+
+	int verify_signature(const struct key *key,
+			     const struct public_key_signature *sig);
+
+The caller must have already obtained the key from some source and can then use
+it to check the signature.  The caller must have parsed the signature and
+transferred the relevant bits to the structure pointed to by sig.
+
+	struct public_key_signature {
+		u8 *digest;
+		u8 digest_size;
+		enum pkey_hash_algo pkey_hash_algo : 8;
+		u8 nr_mpi;
+		union {
+			MPI mpi[2];
+			...
+		};
+	};
+
+The algorithm used must be noted in sig->pkey_hash_algo, and all the MPIs that
+make up the actual signature must be stored in sig->mpi[] and the count of MPIs
+placed in sig->nr_mpi.
+
+In addition, the data must have been digested by the caller and the resulting
+hash must be pointed to by sig->digest and the size of the hash be placed in
+sig->digest_size.
+
+The function will return 0 upon success or -EKEYREJECTED if the signature
+doesn't match.
+
+The function may also return -ENOTSUPP if an unsupported public-key algorithm
+or public-key/hash algorithm combination is specified or the key doesn't
+support the operation; -EBADMSG or -ERANGE if some of the parameters have weird
+data; or -ENOMEM if an allocation can't be performed.  -EINVAL can be returned
+if the key argument is the wrong type or is incompletely set up.
+
+
+=======================
+ASYMMETRIC KEY SUBTYPES
+=======================
+
+Asymmetric keys have a subtype that defines the set of operations that can be
+performed on that key and that determines what data is attached as the key
+payload.  The payload format is entirely at the whim of the subtype.
+
+The subtype is selected by the key data parser and the parser must initialise
+the data required for it.  The asymmetric key retains a reference on the
+subtype module.
+
+The subtype definition structure can be found in:
+
+	#include <keys/asymmetric-subtype.h>
+
+and looks like the following:
+
+	struct asymmetric_key_subtype {
+		struct module		*owner;
+		const char		*name;
+
+		void (*describe)(const struct key *key, struct seq_file *m);
+		void (*destroy)(void *payload);
+		int (*verify_signature)(const struct key *key,
+					const struct public_key_signature *sig);
+	};
+
+Asymmetric keys point to this with their type_data[0] member.
+
+The owner and name fields should be set to the owning module and the name of
+the subtype.  Currently, the name is only used for print statements.
+
+There are a number of operations defined by the subtype:
+
+ (1) describe().
+
+     Mandatory.  This allows the subtype to display something in /proc/keys
+     against the key.  For instance the name of the public key algorithm type
+     could be displayed.  The key type will display the tail of the key
+     identity string after this.
+
+ (2) destroy().
+
+     Mandatory.  This should free the memory associated with the key.  The
+     asymmetric key will look after freeing the fingerprint and releasing the
+     reference on the subtype module.
+
+ (3) verify_signature().
+
+     Optional.  These are the entry points for the key usage operations.
+     Currently there is only the one defined.  If not set, the caller will be
+     given -ENOTSUPP.  The subtype may do anything it likes to implement an
+     operation, including offloading to hardware.
+
+
+==========================
+INSTANTIATION DATA PARSERS
+==========================
+
+The asymmetric key type doesn't generally want to store or to deal with a raw
+blob of data that holds the key data.  It would have to parse it and error
+check it each time it wanted to use it.  Further, the contents of the blob may
+have various checks that can be performed on it (eg. self-signatures, validity
+dates) and may contain useful data about the key (identifiers, capabilities).
+
+Also, the blob may represent a pointer to some hardware containing the key
+rather than the key itself.
+
+Examples of blob formats for which parsers could be implemented include:
+
+ - OpenPGP packet stream [RFC 4880].
+ - X.509 ASN.1 stream.
+ - Pointer to TPM key.
+ - Pointer to UEFI key.
+
+During key instantiation each parser in the list is tried until one doesn't
+return -EBADMSG.
+
+The parser definition structure can be found in:
+
+	#include <keys/asymmetric-parser.h>
+
+and looks like the following:
+
+	struct asymmetric_key_parser {
+		struct module	*owner;
+		const char	*name;
+
+		int (*parse)(struct key_preparsed_payload *prep);
+	};
+
+The owner and name fields should be set to the owning module and the name of
+the parser.
+
+There is currently only a single operation defined by the parser, and it is
+mandatory:
+
+ (1) parse().
+
+     This is called to preparse the key from the key creation and update paths.
+     In particular, it is called during the key creation _before_ a key is
+     allocated, and as such, is permitted to provide the key's description in
+     the case that the caller declines to do so.
+
+     The caller passes a pointer to the following struct with all of the fields
+     cleared, except for data, datalen and quotalen [see
+     Documentation/security/keys.txt].
+
+	struct key_preparsed_payload {
+		char		*description;
+		void		*type_data[2];
+		void		*payload;
+		const void	*data;
+		size_t		datalen;
+		size_t		quotalen;
+	};
+
+     The instantiation data is in a blob pointed to by data and is datalen in
+     size.  The parse() function is not permitted to change these two values at
+     all, and shouldn't change any of the other values _unless_ they are
+     recognise the blob format and will not return -EBADMSG to indicate it is
+     not theirs.
+
+     If the parser is happy with the blob, it should propose a description for
+     the key and attach it to ->description, ->type_data[0] should be set to
+     point to the subtype to be used, ->payload should be set to point to the
+     initialised data for that subtype, ->type_data[1] should point to a hex
+     fingerprint and quotalen should be updated to indicate how much quota this
+     key should account for.
+
+     When clearing up, the data attached to ->type_data[1] and ->description
+     will be kfree()'d and the data attached to ->payload will be passed to the
+     subtype's ->destroy() method to be disposed of.  A module reference for
+     the subtype pointed to by ->type_data[0] will be put.
+
+
+     If the data format is not recognised, -EBADMSG should be returned.  If it
+     is recognised, but the key cannot for some reason be set up, some other
+     negative error code should be returned.  On success, 0 should be returned.
+
+     The key's fingerprint string may be partially matched upon.  For a
+     public-key algorithm such as RSA and DSA this will likely be a printable
+     hex version of the key's fingerprint.
+
+Functions are provided to register and unregister parsers:
+
+	int register_asymmetric_key_parser(struct asymmetric_key_parser *parser);
+	void unregister_asymmetric_key_parser(struct asymmetric_key_parser *subtype);
+
+Parsers may not have the same name.  The names are otherwise only used for
+displaying in debugging messages.
diff --git a/Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt b/Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt
index ba046b8fa92f..7bf1be20d93a 100644
--- a/Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt
@@ -222,5 +222,4 @@ drivers/dma/: location for offload engine drivers
 include/linux/async_tx.h: core header file for the async_tx api
 crypto/async_tx/async_tx.c: async_tx interface to dmaengine and common code
 crypto/async_tx/async_memcpy.c: copy offload
-crypto/async_tx/async_memset.c: memory fill offload
 crypto/async_tx/async_xor.c: xor and xor zero sum offload
diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/2.Process b/Documentation/development-process/2.Process
index 4823577c6509..2e0617936e8f 100644
--- a/Documentation/development-process/2.Process
+++ b/Documentation/development-process/2.Process
@@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ mainline get there via -mm.
 The current -mm patch is available in the "mmotm" (-mm of the moment)
 directory at:
 
-	http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/mmotm/
+	http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/mmotm/
 
 Use of the MMOTM tree is likely to be a frustrating experience, though;
 there is a definite chance that it will not even compile.
@@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ the mainline is expected to look like after the next merge window closes.
 Linux-next trees are announced on the linux-kernel and linux-next mailing
 lists when they are assembled; they can be downloaded from:
 
-	http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/sfr/linux-next/
+	http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/next/
 
 Some information about linux-next has been gathered at:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d7c440b444cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+Guidance for writing policies
+=============================
+
+Try to keep transactionality out of it.  The core is careful to
+avoid asking about anything that is migrating.  This is a pain, but
+makes it easier to write the policies.
+
+Mappings are loaded into the policy at construction time.
+
+Every bio that is mapped by the target is referred to the policy.
+The policy can return a simple HIT or MISS or issue a migration.
+
+Currently there's no way for the policy to issue background work,
+e.g. to start writing back dirty blocks that are going to be evicte
+soon.
+
+Because we map bios, rather than requests it's easy for the policy
+to get fooled by many small bios.  For this reason the core target
+issues periodic ticks to the policy.  It's suggested that the policy
+doesn't update states (eg, hit counts) for a block more than once
+for each tick.  The core ticks by watching bios complete, and so
+trying to see when the io scheduler has let the ios run.
+
+
+Overview of supplied cache replacement policies
+===============================================
+
+multiqueue
+----------
+
+This policy is the default.
+
+The multiqueue policy has two sets of 16 queues: one set for entries
+waiting for the cache and another one for those in the cache.
+Cache entries in the queues are aged based on logical time. Entry into
+the cache is based on variable thresholds and queue selection is based
+on hit count on entry. The policy aims to take different cache miss
+costs into account and to adjust to varying load patterns automatically.
+
+Message and constructor argument pairs are:
+	'sequential_threshold <#nr_sequential_ios>' and
+	'random_threshold <#nr_random_ios>'.
+
+The sequential threshold indicates the number of contiguous I/Os
+required before a stream is treated as sequential.  The random threshold
+is the number of intervening non-contiguous I/Os that must be seen
+before the stream is treated as random again.
+
+The sequential and random thresholds default to 512 and 4 respectively.
+
+Large, sequential ios are probably better left on the origin device
+since spindles tend to have good bandwidth. The io_tracker counts
+contiguous I/Os to try to spot when the io is in one of these sequential
+modes.
+
+cleaner
+-------
+
+The cleaner writes back all dirty blocks in a cache to decommission it.
+
+Examples
+========
+
+The syntax for a table is:
+	cache <metadata dev> <cache dev> <origin dev> <block size>
+	<#feature_args> [<feature arg>]*
+	<policy> <#policy_args> [<policy arg>]*
+
+The syntax to send a message using the dmsetup command is:
+	dmsetup message <mapped device> 0 sequential_threshold 1024
+	dmsetup message <mapped device> 0 random_threshold 8
+
+Using dmsetup:
+	dmsetup create blah --table "0 268435456 cache /dev/sdb /dev/sdc \
+	    /dev/sdd 512 0 mq 4 sequential_threshold 1024 random_threshold 8"
+	creates a 128GB large mapped device named 'blah' with the
+	sequential threshold set to 1024 and the random_threshold set to 8.
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..33d45ee0b737
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+Introduction
+============
+
+dm-cache is a device mapper target written by Joe Thornber, Heinz
+Mauelshagen, and Mike Snitzer.
+
+It aims to improve performance of a block device (eg, a spindle) by
+dynamically migrating some of its data to a faster, smaller device
+(eg, an SSD).
+
+This device-mapper solution allows us to insert this caching at
+different levels of the dm stack, for instance above the data device for
+a thin-provisioning pool.  Caching solutions that are integrated more
+closely with the virtual memory system should give better performance.
+
+The target reuses the metadata library used in the thin-provisioning
+library.
+
+The decision as to what data to migrate and when is left to a plug-in
+policy module.  Several of these have been written as we experiment,
+and we hope other people will contribute others for specific io
+scenarios (eg. a vm image server).
+
+Glossary
+========
+
+  Migration -  Movement of the primary copy of a logical block from one
+	       device to the other.
+  Promotion -  Migration from slow device to fast device.
+  Demotion  -  Migration from fast device to slow device.
+
+The origin device always contains a copy of the logical block, which
+may be out of date or kept in sync with the copy on the cache device
+(depending on policy).
+
+Design
+======
+
+Sub-devices
+-----------
+
+The target is constructed by passing three devices to it (along with
+other parameters detailed later):
+
+1. An origin device - the big, slow one.
+
+2. A cache device - the small, fast one.
+
+3. A small metadata device - records which blocks are in the cache,
+   which are dirty, and extra hints for use by the policy object.
+   This information could be put on the cache device, but having it
+   separate allows the volume manager to configure it differently,
+   e.g. as a mirror for extra robustness.  This metadata device may only
+   be used by a single cache device.
+
+Fixed block size
+----------------
+
+The origin is divided up into blocks of a fixed size.  This block size
+is configurable when you first create the cache.  Typically we've been
+using block sizes of 256KB - 1024KB.  The block size must be between 64
+(32KB) and 2097152 (1GB) and a multiple of 64 (32KB).
+
+Having a fixed block size simplifies the target a lot.  But it is
+something of a compromise.  For instance, a small part of a block may be
+getting hit a lot, yet the whole block will be promoted to the cache.
+So large block sizes are bad because they waste cache space.  And small
+block sizes are bad because they increase the amount of metadata (both
+in core and on disk).
+
+Writeback/writethrough
+----------------------
+
+The cache has two modes, writeback and writethrough.
+
+If writeback, the default, is selected then a write to a block that is
+cached will go only to the cache and the block will be marked dirty in
+the metadata.
+
+If writethrough is selected then a write to a cached block will not
+complete until it has hit both the origin and cache devices.  Clean
+blocks should remain clean.
+
+A simple cleaner policy is provided, which will clean (write back) all
+dirty blocks in a cache.  Useful for decommissioning a cache.
+
+Migration throttling
+--------------------
+
+Migrating data between the origin and cache device uses bandwidth.
+The user can set a throttle to prevent more than a certain amount of
+migration occurring at any one time.  Currently we're not taking any
+account of normal io traffic going to the devices.  More work needs
+doing here to avoid migrating during those peak io moments.
+
+For the time being, a message "migration_threshold <#sectors>"
+can be used to set the maximum number of sectors being migrated,
+the default being 204800 sectors (or 100MB).
+
+Updating on-disk metadata
+-------------------------
+
+On-disk metadata is committed every time a REQ_SYNC or REQ_FUA bio is
+written.  If no such requests are made then commits will occur every
+second.  This means the cache behaves like a physical disk that has a
+write cache (the same is true of the thin-provisioning target).  If
+power is lost you may lose some recent writes.  The metadata should
+always be consistent in spite of any crash.
+
+The 'dirty' state for a cache block changes far too frequently for us
+to keep updating it on the fly.  So we treat it as a hint.  In normal
+operation it will be written when the dm device is suspended.  If the
+system crashes all cache blocks will be assumed dirty when restarted.
+
+Per-block policy hints
+----------------------
+
+Policy plug-ins can store a chunk of data per cache block.  It's up to
+the policy how big this chunk is, but it should be kept small.  Like the
+dirty flags this data is lost if there's a crash so a safe fallback
+value should always be possible.
+
+For instance, the 'mq' policy, which is currently the default policy,
+uses this facility to store the hit count of the cache blocks.  If
+there's a crash this information will be lost, which means the cache
+may be less efficient until those hit counts are regenerated.
+
+Policy hints affect performance, not correctness.
+
+Policy messaging
+----------------
+
+Policies will have different tunables, specific to each one, so we
+need a generic way of getting and setting these.  Device-mapper
+messages are used.  Refer to cache-policies.txt.
+
+Discard bitset resolution
+-------------------------
+
+We can avoid copying data during migration if we know the block has
+been discarded.  A prime example of this is when mkfs discards the
+whole block device.  We store a bitset tracking the discard state of
+blocks.  However, we allow this bitset to have a different block size
+from the cache blocks.  This is because we need to track the discard
+state for all of the origin device (compare with the dirty bitset
+which is just for the smaller cache device).
+
+Target interface
+================
+
+Constructor
+-----------
+
+ cache <metadata dev> <cache dev> <origin dev> <block size>
+       <#feature args> [<feature arg>]*
+       <policy> <#policy args> [policy args]*
+
+ metadata dev    : fast device holding the persistent metadata
+ cache dev	 : fast device holding cached data blocks
+ origin dev	 : slow device holding original data blocks
+ block size      : cache unit size in sectors
+
+ #feature args   : number of feature arguments passed
+ feature args    : writethrough.  (The default is writeback.)
+
+ policy          : the replacement policy to use
+ #policy args    : an even number of arguments corresponding to
+                   key/value pairs passed to the policy
+ policy args     : key/value pairs passed to the policy
+		   E.g. 'sequential_threshold 1024'
+		   See cache-policies.txt for details.
+
+Optional feature arguments are:
+   writethrough  : write through caching that prohibits cache block
+		   content from being different from origin block content.
+		   Without this argument, the default behaviour is to write
+		   back cache block contents later for performance reasons,
+		   so they may differ from the corresponding origin blocks.
+
+A policy called 'default' is always registered.  This is an alias for
+the policy we currently think is giving best all round performance.
+
+As the default policy could vary between kernels, if you are relying on
+the characteristics of a specific policy, always request it by name.
+
+Status
+------
+
+<#used metadata blocks>/<#total metadata blocks> <#read hits> <#read misses>
+<#write hits> <#write misses> <#demotions> <#promotions> <#blocks in cache>
+<#dirty> <#features> <features>* <#core args> <core args>* <#policy args>
+<policy args>*
+
+#used metadata blocks    : Number of metadata blocks used
+#total metadata blocks   : Total number of metadata blocks
+#read hits               : Number of times a READ bio has been mapped
+			     to the cache
+#read misses             : Number of times a READ bio has been mapped
+			     to the origin
+#write hits              : Number of times a WRITE bio has been mapped
+			     to the cache
+#write misses            : Number of times a WRITE bio has been
+			     mapped to the origin
+#demotions               : Number of times a block has been removed
+			     from the cache
+#promotions              : Number of times a block has been moved to
+			     the cache
+#blocks in cache         : Number of blocks resident in the cache
+#dirty                   : Number of blocks in the cache that differ
+			     from the origin
+#feature args            : Number of feature args to follow
+feature args             : 'writethrough' (optional)
+#core args               : Number of core arguments (must be even)
+core args                : Key/value pairs for tuning the core
+			     e.g. migration_threshold
+#policy args             : Number of policy arguments to follow (must be even)
+policy args              : Key/value pairs
+			     e.g. 'sequential_threshold 1024
+
+Messages
+--------
+
+Policies will have different tunables, specific to each one, so we
+need a generic way of getting and setting these.  Device-mapper
+messages are used.  (A sysfs interface would also be possible.)
+
+The message format is:
+
+   <key> <value>
+
+E.g.
+   dmsetup message my_cache 0 sequential_threshold 1024
+
+Examples
+========
+
+The test suite can be found here:
+
+https://github.com/jthornber/thinp-test-suite
+
+dmsetup create my_cache --table '0 41943040 cache /dev/mapper/metadata \
+	/dev/mapper/ssd /dev/mapper/origin 512 1 writeback default 0'
+dmsetup create my_cache --table '0 41943040 cache /dev/mapper/metadata \
+	/dev/mapper/ssd /dev/mapper/origin 1024 1 writeback \
+	mq 4 sequential_threshold 1024 random_threshold 8'
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-raid.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-raid.txt
index 946c73342cde..ef8ba9fa58c4 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-raid.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-raid.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,13 @@
 dm-raid
--------
+=======
 
 The device-mapper RAID (dm-raid) target provides a bridge from DM to MD.
 It allows the MD RAID drivers to be accessed using a device-mapper
 interface.
 
+
+Mapping Table Interface
+-----------------------
 The target is named "raid" and it accepts the following parameters:
 
   <raid_type> <#raid_params> <raid_params> \
@@ -27,6 +30,11 @@ The target is named "raid" and it accepts the following parameters:
 		- rotating parity N (right-to-left) with data restart
   raid6_nc	RAID6 N continue
 		- rotating parity N (right-to-left) with data continuation
+  raid10        Various RAID10 inspired algorithms chosen by additional params
+		- RAID10: Striped Mirrors (aka 'Striping on top of mirrors')
+		- RAID1E: Integrated Adjacent Stripe Mirroring
+		- RAID1E: Integrated Offset Stripe Mirroring
+		-  and other similar RAID10 variants
 
   Reference: Chapter 4 of
   http://www.snia.org/sites/default/files/SNIA_DDF_Technical_Position_v2.0.pdf
@@ -42,7 +50,7 @@ The target is named "raid" and it accepts the following parameters:
     followed by optional parameters (in any order):
 	[sync|nosync]   Force or prevent RAID initialization.
 
-	[rebuild <idx>]	Rebuild drive number idx (first drive is 0).
+	[rebuild <idx>]	Rebuild drive number 'idx' (first drive is 0).
 
 	[daemon_sleep <ms>]
 		Interval between runs of the bitmap daemon that
@@ -51,14 +59,63 @@ The target is named "raid" and it accepts the following parameters:
 
 	[min_recovery_rate <kB/sec/disk>]  Throttle RAID initialization
 	[max_recovery_rate <kB/sec/disk>]  Throttle RAID initialization
-	[write_mostly <idx>]		   Drive index is write-mostly
-	[max_write_behind <sectors>]       See '-write-behind=' (man mdadm)
-	[stripe_cache <sectors>]           Stripe cache size (higher RAIDs only)
+	[write_mostly <idx>]		   Mark drive index 'idx' write-mostly.
+	[max_write_behind <sectors>]       See '--write-behind=' (man mdadm)
+	[stripe_cache <sectors>]           Stripe cache size (RAID 4/5/6 only)
 	[region_size <sectors>]
 		The region_size multiplied by the number of regions is the
 		logical size of the array.  The bitmap records the device
 		synchronisation state for each region.
 
+        [raid10_copies   <# copies>]
+        [raid10_format   <near|far|offset>]
+		These two options are used to alter the default layout of
+		a RAID10 configuration.  The number of copies is can be
+		specified, but the default is 2.  There are also three
+		variations to how the copies are laid down - the default
+		is "near".  Near copies are what most people think of with
+		respect to mirroring.  If these options are left unspecified,
+		or 'raid10_copies 2' and/or 'raid10_format near' are given,
+		then the layouts for 2, 3 and 4 devices	are:
+		2 drives         3 drives          4 drives
+		--------         ----------        --------------
+		A1  A1           A1  A1  A2        A1  A1  A2  A2
+		A2  A2           A2  A3  A3        A3  A3  A4  A4
+		A3  A3           A4  A4  A5        A5  A5  A6  A6
+		A4  A4           A5  A6  A6        A7  A7  A8  A8
+		..  ..           ..  ..  ..        ..  ..  ..  ..
+		The 2-device layout is equivalent 2-way RAID1.  The 4-device
+		layout is what a traditional RAID10 would look like.  The
+		3-device layout is what might be called a 'RAID1E - Integrated
+		Adjacent Stripe Mirroring'.
+
+		If 'raid10_copies 2' and 'raid10_format far', then the layouts
+		for 2, 3 and 4 devices are:
+		2 drives             3 drives             4 drives
+		--------             --------------       --------------------
+		A1  A2               A1   A2   A3         A1   A2   A3   A4
+		A3  A4               A4   A5   A6         A5   A6   A7   A8
+		A5  A6               A7   A8   A9         A9   A10  A11  A12
+		..  ..               ..   ..   ..         ..   ..   ..   ..
+		A2  A1               A3   A1   A2         A2   A1   A4   A3
+		A4  A3               A6   A4   A5         A6   A5   A8   A7
+		A6  A5               A9   A7   A8         A10  A9   A12  A11
+		..  ..               ..   ..   ..         ..   ..   ..   ..
+
+		If 'raid10_copies 2' and 'raid10_format offset', then the
+		layouts for 2, 3 and 4 devices are:
+		2 drives       3 drives           4 drives
+		--------       ------------       -----------------
+		A1  A2         A1  A2  A3         A1  A2  A3  A4
+		A2  A1         A3  A1  A2         A2  A1  A4  A3
+		A3  A4         A4  A5  A6         A5  A6  A7  A8
+		A4  A3         A6  A4  A5         A6  A5  A8  A7
+		A5  A6         A7  A8  A9         A9  A10 A11 A12
+		A6  A5         A9  A7  A8         A10 A9  A12 A11
+		..  ..         ..  ..  ..         ..  ..  ..  ..
+		Here we see layouts closely akin to 'RAID1E - Integrated
+		Offset Stripe Mirroring'.
+
 <#raid_devs>: The number of devices composing the array.
 	Each device consists of two entries.  The first is the device
 	containing the metadata (if any); the second is the one containing the
@@ -68,7 +125,7 @@ The target is named "raid" and it accepts the following parameters:
 	given for both the metadata and data drives for a given position.
 
 
-Example tables
+Example Tables
 --------------
 # RAID4 - 4 data drives, 1 parity (no metadata devices)
 # No metadata devices specified to hold superblock/bitmap info
@@ -87,22 +144,83 @@ Example tables
         raid4 4 2048 sync min_recovery_rate 20 \
         5 8:17 8:18 8:33 8:34 8:49 8:50 8:65 8:66 8:81 8:82
 
+
+Status Output
+-------------
 'dmsetup table' displays the table used to construct the mapping.
 The optional parameters are always printed in the order listed
 above with "sync" or "nosync" always output ahead of the other
 arguments, regardless of the order used when originally loading the table.
 Arguments that can be repeated are ordered by value.
 
-'dmsetup status' yields information on the state and health of the
-array.
-The output is as follows:
+
+'dmsetup status' yields information on the state and health of the array.
+The output is as follows (normally a single line, but expanded here for
+clarity):
 1: <s> <l> raid \
-2:      <raid_type> <#devices> <1 health char for each dev> <resync_ratio>
+2:      <raid_type> <#devices> <health_chars> \
+3:      <sync_ratio> <sync_action> <mismatch_cnt>
 
 Line 1 is the standard output produced by device-mapper.
-Line 2 is produced by the raid target, and best explained by example:
-        0 1960893648 raid raid4 5 AAAAA 2/490221568
+Line 2 & 3 are produced by the raid target and are best explained by example:
+        0 1960893648 raid raid4 5 AAAAA 2/490221568 init 0
 Here we can see the RAID type is raid4, there are 5 devices - all of
-which are 'A'live, and the array is 2/490221568 complete with recovery.
-Faulty or missing devices are marked 'D'.  Devices that are out-of-sync
-are marked 'a'.
+which are 'A'live, and the array is 2/490221568 complete with its initial
+recovery.  Here is a fuller description of the individual fields:
+	<raid_type>     Same as the <raid_type> used to create the array.
+	<health_chars>  One char for each device, indicating: 'A' = alive and
+			in-sync, 'a' = alive but not in-sync, 'D' = dead/failed.
+	<sync_ratio>    The ratio indicating how much of the array has undergone
+			the process described by 'sync_action'.  If the
+			'sync_action' is "check" or "repair", then the process
+			of "resync" or "recover" can be considered complete.
+	<sync_action>   One of the following possible states:
+			idle    - No synchronization action is being performed.
+			frozen  - The current action has been halted.
+			resync  - Array is undergoing its initial synchronization
+				  or is resynchronizing after an unclean shutdown
+				  (possibly aided by a bitmap).
+			recover - A device in the array is being rebuilt or
+				  replaced.
+			check   - A user-initiated full check of the array is
+				  being performed.  All blocks are read and
+				  checked for consistency.  The number of
+				  discrepancies found are recorded in
+				  <mismatch_cnt>.  No changes are made to the
+				  array by this action.
+			repair  - The same as "check", but discrepancies are
+				  corrected.
+			reshape - The array is undergoing a reshape.
+	<mismatch_cnt>  The number of discrepancies found between mirror copies
+			in RAID1/10 or wrong parity values found in RAID4/5/6.
+			This value is valid only after a "check" of the array
+			is performed.  A healthy array has a 'mismatch_cnt' of 0.
+
+Message Interface
+-----------------
+The dm-raid target will accept certain actions through the 'message' interface.
+('man dmsetup' for more information on the message interface.)  These actions
+include:
+	"idle"   - Halt the current sync action.
+	"frozen" - Freeze the current sync action.
+	"resync" - Initiate/continue a resync.
+	"recover"- Initiate/continue a recover process.
+	"check"  - Initiate a check (i.e. a "scrub") of the array.
+	"repair" - Initiate a repair of the array.
+	"reshape"- Currently unsupported (-EINVAL).
+
+Version History
+---------------
+1.0.0	Initial version.  Support for RAID 4/5/6
+1.1.0	Added support for RAID 1
+1.2.0	Handle creation of arrays that contain failed devices.
+1.3.0	Added support for RAID 10
+1.3.1	Allow device replacement/rebuild for RAID 10
+1.3.2   Fix/improve redundancy checking for RAID10
+1.4.0	Non-functional change.  Removes arg from mapping function.
+1.4.1   RAID10 fix redundancy validation checks (commit 55ebbb5).
+1.4.2   Add RAID10 "far" and "offset" algorithm support.
+1.5.0   Add message interface to allow manipulation of the sync_action.
+	New status (STATUSTYPE_INFO) fields: sync_action and mismatch_cnt.
+1.5.1   Add ability to restore transiently failed devices on resume.
+1.5.2   'mismatch_cnt' is zero unless [last_]sync_action is "check".
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/statistics.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/statistics.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2a1673adc200
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/statistics.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,186 @@
+DM statistics
+=============
+
+Device Mapper supports the collection of I/O statistics on user-defined
+regions of a DM device.	 If no regions are defined no statistics are
+collected so there isn't any performance impact.  Only bio-based DM
+devices are currently supported.
+
+Each user-defined region specifies a starting sector, length and step.
+Individual statistics will be collected for each step-sized area within
+the range specified.
+
+The I/O statistics counters for each step-sized area of a region are
+in the same format as /sys/block/*/stat or /proc/diskstats (see:
+Documentation/iostats.txt).  But two extra counters (12 and 13) are
+provided: total time spent reading and writing in milliseconds.	 All
+these counters may be accessed by sending the @stats_print message to
+the appropriate DM device via dmsetup.
+
+Each region has a corresponding unique identifier, which we call a
+region_id, that is assigned when the region is created.	 The region_id
+must be supplied when querying statistics about the region, deleting the
+region, etc.  Unique region_ids enable multiple userspace programs to
+request and process statistics for the same DM device without stepping
+on each other's data.
+
+The creation of DM statistics will allocate memory via kmalloc or
+fallback to using vmalloc space.  At most, 1/4 of the overall system
+memory may be allocated by DM statistics.  The admin can see how much
+memory is used by reading
+/sys/module/dm_mod/parameters/stats_current_allocated_bytes
+
+Messages
+========
+
+    @stats_create <range> <step> [<program_id> [<aux_data>]]
+
+	Create a new region and return the region_id.
+
+	<range>
+	  "-" - whole device
+	  "<start_sector>+<length>" - a range of <length> 512-byte sectors
+				      starting with <start_sector>.
+
+	<step>
+	  "<area_size>" - the range is subdivided into areas each containing
+			  <area_size> sectors.
+	  "/<number_of_areas>" - the range is subdivided into the specified
+				 number of areas.
+
+	<program_id>
+	  An optional parameter.  A name that uniquely identifies
+	  the userspace owner of the range.  This groups ranges together
+	  so that userspace programs can identify the ranges they
+	  created and ignore those created by others.
+	  The kernel returns this string back in the output of
+	  @stats_list message, but it doesn't use it for anything else.
+
+	<aux_data>
+	  An optional parameter.  A word that provides auxiliary data
+	  that is useful to the client program that created the range.
+	  The kernel returns this string back in the output of
+	  @stats_list message, but it doesn't use this value for anything.
+
+    @stats_delete <region_id>
+
+	Delete the region with the specified id.
+
+	<region_id>
+	  region_id returned from @stats_create
+
+    @stats_clear <region_id>
+
+	Clear all the counters except the in-flight i/o counters.
+
+	<region_id>
+	  region_id returned from @stats_create
+
+    @stats_list [<program_id>]
+
+	List all regions registered with @stats_create.
+
+	<program_id>
+	  An optional parameter.
+	  If this parameter is specified, only matching regions
+	  are returned.
+	  If it is not specified, all regions are returned.
+
+	Output format:
+	  <region_id>: <start_sector>+<length> <step> <program_id> <aux_data>
+
+    @stats_print <region_id> [<starting_line> <number_of_lines>]
+
+	Print counters for each step-sized area of a region.
+
+	<region_id>
+	  region_id returned from @stats_create
+
+	<starting_line>
+	  The index of the starting line in the output.
+	  If omitted, all lines are returned.
+
+	<number_of_lines>
+	  The number of lines to include in the output.
+	  If omitted, all lines are returned.
+
+	Output format for each step-sized area of a region:
+
+	  <start_sector>+<length> counters
+
+	  The first 11 counters have the same meaning as
+	  /sys/block/*/stat or /proc/diskstats.
+
+	  Please refer to Documentation/iostats.txt for details.
+
+	  1. the number of reads completed
+	  2. the number of reads merged
+	  3. the number of sectors read
+	  4. the number of milliseconds spent reading
+	  5. the number of writes completed
+	  6. the number of writes merged
+	  7. the number of sectors written
+	  8. the number of milliseconds spent writing
+	  9. the number of I/Os currently in progress
+	  10. the number of milliseconds spent doing I/Os
+	  11. the weighted number of milliseconds spent doing I/Os
+
+	  Additional counters:
+	  12. the total time spent reading in milliseconds
+	  13. the total time spent writing in milliseconds
+
+    @stats_print_clear <region_id> [<starting_line> <number_of_lines>]
+
+	Atomically print and then clear all the counters except the
+	in-flight i/o counters.	 Useful when the client consuming the
+	statistics does not want to lose any statistics (those updated
+	between printing and clearing).
+
+	<region_id>
+	  region_id returned from @stats_create
+
+	<starting_line>
+	  The index of the starting line in the output.
+	  If omitted, all lines are printed and then cleared.
+
+	<number_of_lines>
+	  The number of lines to process.
+	  If omitted, all lines are printed and then cleared.
+
+    @stats_set_aux <region_id> <aux_data>
+
+	Store auxiliary data aux_data for the specified region.
+
+	<region_id>
+	  region_id returned from @stats_create
+
+	<aux_data>
+	  The string that identifies data which is useful to the client
+	  program that created the range.  The kernel returns this
+	  string back in the output of @stats_list message, but it
+	  doesn't use this value for anything.
+
+Examples
+========
+
+Subdivide the DM device 'vol' into 100 pieces and start collecting
+statistics on them:
+
+  dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_create - /100
+
+Set the auxillary data string to "foo bar baz" (the escape for each
+space must also be escaped, otherwise the shell will consume them):
+
+  dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_set_aux 0 foo\\ bar\\ baz
+
+List the statistics:
+
+  dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_list
+
+Print the statistics:
+
+  dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_print 0
+
+Delete the statistics:
+
+  dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_delete 0
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/striped.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/striped.txt
index f34d3236b9da..45f3b91ea4c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/striped.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/striped.txt
@@ -9,15 +9,14 @@ devices in parallel.
 
 Parameters: <num devs> <chunk size> [<dev path> <offset>]+
     <num devs>: Number of underlying devices.
-    <chunk size>: Size of each chunk of data. Must be a power-of-2 and at
-                  least as large as the system's PAGE_SIZE.
+    <chunk size>: Size of each chunk of data. Must be at least as
+                  large as the system's PAGE_SIZE.
     <dev path>: Full pathname to the underlying block-device, or a
                 "major:minor" device-number.
     <offset>: Starting sector within the device.
 
 One or more underlying devices can be specified. The striped device size must
-be a multiple of the chunk size and a multiple of the number of underlying
-devices.
+be a multiple of the chunk size multiplied by the number of underlying devices.
 
 
 Example scripts
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/switch.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/switch.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2fa749387be8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/switch.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+dm-switch
+=========
+
+The device-mapper switch target creates a device that supports an
+arbitrary mapping of fixed-size regions of I/O across a fixed set of
+paths.  The path used for any specific region can be switched
+dynamically by sending the target a message.
+
+It maps I/O to underlying block devices efficiently when there is a large
+number of fixed-sized address regions but there is no simple pattern
+that would allow for a compact representation of the mapping such as
+dm-stripe.
+
+Background
+----------
+
+Dell EqualLogic and some other iSCSI storage arrays use a distributed
+frameless architecture.  In this architecture, the storage group
+consists of a number of distinct storage arrays ("members") each having
+independent controllers, disk storage and network adapters.  When a LUN
+is created it is spread across multiple members.  The details of the
+spreading are hidden from initiators connected to this storage system.
+The storage group exposes a single target discovery portal, no matter
+how many members are being used.  When iSCSI sessions are created, each
+session is connected to an eth port on a single member.  Data to a LUN
+can be sent on any iSCSI session, and if the blocks being accessed are
+stored on another member the I/O will be forwarded as required.  This
+forwarding is invisible to the initiator.  The storage layout is also
+dynamic, and the blocks stored on disk may be moved from member to
+member as needed to balance the load.
+
+This architecture simplifies the management and configuration of both
+the storage group and initiators.  In a multipathing configuration, it
+is possible to set up multiple iSCSI sessions to use multiple network
+interfaces on both the host and target to take advantage of the
+increased network bandwidth.  An initiator could use a simple round
+robin algorithm to send I/O across all paths and let the storage array
+members forward it as necessary, but there is a performance advantage to
+sending data directly to the correct member.
+
+A device-mapper table already lets you map different regions of a
+device onto different targets.  However in this architecture the LUN is
+spread with an address region size on the order of 10s of MBs, which
+means the resulting table could have more than a million entries and
+consume far too much memory.
+
+Using this device-mapper switch target we can now build a two-layer
+device hierarchy:
+
+    Upper Tier – Determine which array member the I/O should be sent to.
+    Lower Tier – Load balance amongst paths to a particular member.
+
+The lower tier consists of a single dm multipath device for each member.
+Each of these multipath devices contains the set of paths directly to
+the array member in one priority group, and leverages existing path
+selectors to load balance amongst these paths.  We also build a
+non-preferred priority group containing paths to other array members for
+failover reasons.
+
+The upper tier consists of a single dm-switch device.  This device uses
+a bitmap to look up the location of the I/O and choose the appropriate
+lower tier device to route the I/O.  By using a bitmap we are able to
+use 4 bits for each address range in a 16 member group (which is very
+large for us).  This is a much denser representation than the dm table
+b-tree can achieve.
+
+Construction Parameters
+=======================
+
+    <num_paths> <region_size> <num_optional_args> [<optional_args>...]
+    [<dev_path> <offset>]+
+
+<num_paths>
+    The number of paths across which to distribute the I/O.
+
+<region_size>
+    The number of 512-byte sectors in a region. Each region can be redirected
+    to any of the available paths.
+
+<num_optional_args>
+    The number of optional arguments. Currently, no optional arguments
+    are supported and so this must be zero.
+
+<dev_path>
+    The block device that represents a specific path to the device.
+
+<offset>
+    The offset of the start of data on the specific <dev_path> (in units
+    of 512-byte sectors). This number is added to the sector number when
+    forwarding the request to the specific path. Typically it is zero.
+
+Messages
+========
+
+set_region_mappings <index>:<path_nr> [<index>]:<path_nr> [<index>]:<path_nr>...
+
+Modify the region table by specifying which regions are redirected to
+which paths.
+
+<index>
+    The region number (region size was specified in constructor parameters).
+    If index is omitted, the next region (previous index + 1) is used.
+    Expressed in hexadecimal (WITHOUT any prefix like 0x).
+
+<path_nr>
+    The path number in the range 0 ... (<num_paths> - 1).
+    Expressed in hexadecimal (WITHOUT any prefix like 0x).
+
+Status
+======
+
+No status line is reported.
+
+Example
+=======
+
+Assume that you have volumes vg1/switch0 vg1/switch1 vg1/switch2 with
+the same size.
+
+Create a switch device with 64kB region size:
+    dmsetup create switch --table "0 `blockdev --getsize /dev/vg1/switch0`
+	switch 3 128 0 /dev/vg1/switch0 0 /dev/vg1/switch1 0 /dev/vg1/switch2 0"
+
+Set mappings for the first 7 entries to point to devices switch0, switch1,
+switch2, switch0, switch1, switch2, switch1:
+    dmsetup message switch 0 set_region_mappings 0:0 :1 :2 :0 :1 :2 :1
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt
index 1ff044d87ca4..50c44cf79b0e 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt
@@ -75,10 +75,12 @@ less sharing than average you'll need a larger-than-average metadata device.
 
 As a guide, we suggest you calculate the number of bytes to use in the
 metadata device as 48 * $data_dev_size / $data_block_size but round it up
-to 2MB if the answer is smaller.  The largest size supported is 16GB.
+to 2MB if the answer is smaller.  If you're creating large numbers of
+snapshots which are recording large amounts of change, you may find you
+need to increase this.
 
-If you're creating large numbers of snapshots which are recording large
-amounts of change, you may need find you need to increase this.
+The largest size supported is 16GB: If the device is larger,
+a warning will be issued and the excess space will not be used.
 
 Reloading a pool table
 ----------------------
@@ -97,13 +99,14 @@ Using an existing pool device
 		 $data_block_size $low_water_mark"
 
 $data_block_size gives the smallest unit of disk space that can be
-allocated at a time expressed in units of 512-byte sectors.  People
-primarily interested in thin provisioning may want to use a value such
-as 1024 (512KB).  People doing lots of snapshotting may want a smaller value
-such as 128 (64KB).  If you are not zeroing newly-allocated data,
-a larger $data_block_size in the region of 256000 (128MB) is suggested.
-$data_block_size must be the same for the lifetime of the
-metadata device.
+allocated at a time expressed in units of 512-byte sectors.
+$data_block_size must be between 128 (64KB) and 2097152 (1GB) and a
+multiple of 128 (64KB).  $data_block_size cannot be changed after the
+thin-pool is created.  People primarily interested in thin provisioning
+may want to use a value such as 1024 (512KB).  People doing lots of
+snapshotting may want a smaller value such as 128 (64KB).  If you are
+not zeroing newly-allocated data, a larger $data_block_size in the
+region of 256000 (128MB) is suggested.
 
 $low_water_mark is expressed in blocks of size $data_block_size.  If
 free space on the data device drops below this level then a dm event
@@ -167,6 +170,38 @@ ii) Using an internal snapshot.
 
     dmsetup create snap --table "0 2097152 thin /dev/mapper/pool 1"
 
+External snapshots
+------------------
+
+You can use an external _read only_ device as an origin for a
+thinly-provisioned volume.  Any read to an unprovisioned area of the
+thin device will be passed through to the origin.  Writes trigger
+the allocation of new blocks as usual.
+
+One use case for this is VM hosts that want to run guests on
+thinly-provisioned volumes but have the base image on another device
+(possibly shared between many VMs).
+
+You must not write to the origin device if you use this technique!
+Of course, you may write to the thin device and take internal snapshots
+of the thin volume.
+
+i) Creating a snapshot of an external device
+
+  This is the same as creating a thin device.
+  You don't mention the origin at this stage.
+
+    dmsetup message /dev/mapper/pool 0 "create_thin 0"
+
+ii) Using a snapshot of an external device.
+
+  Append an extra parameter to the thin target specifying the origin:
+
+    dmsetup create snap --table "0 2097152 thin /dev/mapper/pool 0 /dev/image"
+
+  N.B. All descendants (internal snapshots) of this snapshot require the
+  same extra origin parameter.
+
 Deactivation
 ------------
 
@@ -189,7 +224,16 @@ i) Constructor
 	      <low water mark (blocks)> [<number of feature args> [<arg>]*]
 
     Optional feature arguments:
-    - 'skip_block_zeroing': skips the zeroing of newly-provisioned blocks.
+
+      skip_block_zeroing: Skip the zeroing of newly-provisioned blocks.
+
+      ignore_discard: Disable discard support.
+
+      no_discard_passdown: Don't pass discards down to the underlying
+			   data device, but just remove the mapping.
+
+      read_only: Don't allow any changes to be made to the pool
+		 metadata.
 
     Data block size must be between 64KB (128 sectors) and 1GB
     (2097152 sectors) inclusive.
@@ -199,7 +243,7 @@ ii) Status
 
     <transaction id> <used metadata blocks>/<total metadata blocks>
     <used data blocks>/<total data blocks> <held metadata root>
-
+    [no_]discard_passdown ro|rw
 
     transaction id:
 	A 64-bit number used by userspace to help synchronise with metadata
@@ -217,6 +261,21 @@ ii) Status
 	held root.  This feature is not yet implemented so '-' is
 	always returned.
 
+    discard_passdown|no_discard_passdown
+	Whether or not discards are actually being passed down to the
+	underlying device.  When this is enabled when loading the table,
+	it can get disabled if the underlying device doesn't support it.
+
+    ro|rw
+	If the pool encounters certain types of device failures it will
+	drop into a read-only metadata mode in which no changes to
+	the pool metadata (like allocating new blocks) are permitted.
+
+	In serious cases where even a read-only mode is deemed unsafe
+	no further I/O will be permitted and the status will just
+	contain the string 'Fail'.  The userspace recovery tools
+	should then be used.
+
 iii) Messages
 
     create_thin <dev id>
@@ -237,16 +296,6 @@ iii) Messages
 
 	Deletes a thin device.  Irreversible.
 
-    trim <dev id> <new size in sectors>
-
-	Delete mappings from the end of a thin device.  Irreversible.
-	You might want to use this if you're reducing the size of
-	your thinly-provisioned device.  In many cases, due to the
-	sharing of blocks between devices, it is not possible to
-	determine in advance how much space 'trim' will release.  (In
-	future a userspace tool might be able to perform this
-	calculation.)
-
     set_transaction_id <current id> <new id>
 
 	Userland volume managers, such as LVM, need a way to
@@ -257,12 +306,23 @@ iii) Messages
 	the current transaction id is when you change it with this
 	compare-and-swap message.
 
+    reserve_metadata_snap
+
+        Reserve a copy of the data mapping btree for use by userland.
+        This allows userland to inspect the mappings as they were when
+        this message was executed.  Use the pool's status command to
+        get the root block associated with the metadata snapshot.
+
+    release_metadata_snap
+
+        Release a previously reserved copy of the data mapping btree.
+
 'thin' target
 -------------
 
 i) Constructor
 
-    thin <pool dev> <dev id>
+    thin <pool dev> <dev id> [<external origin dev>]
 
     pool dev:
 	the thin-pool device, e.g. /dev/mapper/my_pool or 253:0
@@ -271,6 +331,11 @@ i) Constructor
 	the internal device identifier of the device to be
 	activated.
 
+    external origin dev:
+	an optional block device outside the pool to be treated as a
+	read-only snapshot origin: reads to unprovisioned areas of the
+	thin target will be mapped to this device.
+
 The pool doesn't store any size against the thin devices.  If you
 load a thin target that is smaller than you've been using previously,
 then you'll have no access to blocks mapped beyond the end.  If you
@@ -283,3 +348,7 @@ regain some space then send the 'trim' message to the pool.
 ii) Status
 
      <nr mapped sectors> <highest mapped sector>
+
+	If the pool has encountered device errors and failed, the status
+	will just contain the string 'Fail'.  The userspace recovery
+	tools should then be used.
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/verity.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/verity.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9884681535ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/verity.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+dm-verity
+==========
+
+Device-Mapper's "verity" target provides transparent integrity checking of
+block devices using a cryptographic digest provided by the kernel crypto API.
+This target is read-only.
+
+Construction Parameters
+=======================
+    <version> <dev> <hash_dev>
+    <data_block_size> <hash_block_size>
+    <num_data_blocks> <hash_start_block>
+    <algorithm> <digest> <salt>
+
+<version>
+    This is the type of the on-disk hash format.
+
+    0 is the original format used in the Chromium OS.
+      The salt is appended when hashing, digests are stored continuously and
+      the rest of the block is padded with zeros.
+
+    1 is the current format that should be used for new devices.
+      The salt is prepended when hashing and each digest is
+      padded with zeros to the power of two.
+
+<dev>
+    This is the device containing data, the integrity of which needs to be
+    checked.  It may be specified as a path, like /dev/sdaX, or a device number,
+    <major>:<minor>.
+
+<hash_dev>
+    This is the device that supplies the hash tree data.  It may be
+    specified similarly to the device path and may be the same device.  If the
+    same device is used, the hash_start should be outside the configured
+    dm-verity device.
+
+<data_block_size>
+    The block size on a data device in bytes.
+    Each block corresponds to one digest on the hash device.
+
+<hash_block_size>
+    The size of a hash block in bytes.
+
+<num_data_blocks>
+    The number of data blocks on the data device.  Additional blocks are
+    inaccessible.  You can place hashes to the same partition as data, in this
+    case hashes are placed after <num_data_blocks>.
+
+<hash_start_block>
+    This is the offset, in <hash_block_size>-blocks, from the start of hash_dev
+    to the root block of the hash tree.
+
+<algorithm>
+    The cryptographic hash algorithm used for this device.  This should
+    be the name of the algorithm, like "sha1".
+
+<digest>
+    The hexadecimal encoding of the cryptographic hash of the root hash block
+    and the salt.  This hash should be trusted as there is no other authenticity
+    beyond this point.
+
+<salt>
+    The hexadecimal encoding of the salt value.
+
+Theory of operation
+===================
+
+dm-verity is meant to be set up as part of a verified boot path.  This
+may be anything ranging from a boot using tboot or trustedgrub to just
+booting from a known-good device (like a USB drive or CD).
+
+When a dm-verity device is configured, it is expected that the caller
+has been authenticated in some way (cryptographic signatures, etc).
+After instantiation, all hashes will be verified on-demand during
+disk access.  If they cannot be verified up to the root node of the
+tree, the root hash, then the I/O will fail.  This should detect
+tampering with any data on the device and the hash data.
+
+Cryptographic hashes are used to assert the integrity of the device on a
+per-block basis. This allows for a lightweight hash computation on first read
+into the page cache. Block hashes are stored linearly, aligned to the nearest
+block size.
+
+Hash Tree
+---------
+
+Each node in the tree is a cryptographic hash.  If it is a leaf node, the hash
+of some data block on disk is calculated. If it is an intermediary node,
+the hash of a number of child nodes is calculated.
+
+Each entry in the tree is a collection of neighboring nodes that fit in one
+block.  The number is determined based on block_size and the size of the
+selected cryptographic digest algorithm.  The hashes are linearly-ordered in
+this entry and any unaligned trailing space is ignored but included when
+calculating the parent node.
+
+The tree looks something like:
+
+alg = sha256, num_blocks = 32768, block_size = 4096
+
+                                 [   root    ]
+                                /    . . .    \
+                     [entry_0]                 [entry_1]
+                    /  . . .  \                 . . .   \
+         [entry_0_0]   . . .  [entry_0_127]    . . . .  [entry_1_127]
+           / ... \             /   . . .  \             /           \
+     blk_0 ... blk_127  blk_16256   blk_16383      blk_32640 . . . blk_32767
+
+
+On-disk format
+==============
+
+The verity kernel code does not read the verity metadata on-disk header.
+It only reads the hash blocks which directly follow the header.
+It is expected that a user-space tool will verify the integrity of the
+verity header.
+
+Alternatively, the header can be omitted and the dmsetup parameters can
+be passed via the kernel command-line in a rooted chain of trust where
+the command-line is verified.
+
+Directly following the header (and with sector number padded to the next hash
+block boundary) are the hash blocks which are stored a depth at a time
+(starting from the root), sorted in order of increasing index.
+
+The full specification of kernel parameters and on-disk metadata format
+is available at the cryptsetup project's wiki page
+  http://code.google.com/p/cryptsetup/wiki/DMVerity
+
+Status
+======
+V (for Valid) is returned if every check performed so far was valid.
+If any check failed, C (for Corruption) is returned.
+
+Example
+=======
+Set up a device:
+  # dmsetup create vroot --readonly --table \
+    "0 2097152 verity 1 /dev/sda1 /dev/sda2 4096 4096 262144 1 sha256 "\
+    "4392712ba01368efdf14b05c76f9e4df0d53664630b5d48632ed17a137f39076 "\
+    "1234000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000"
+
+A command line tool veritysetup is available to compute or verify
+the hash tree or activate the kernel device. This is available from
+the cryptsetup upstream repository http://code.google.com/p/cryptsetup/
+(as a libcryptsetup extension).
+
+Create hash on the device:
+  # veritysetup format /dev/sda1 /dev/sda2
+  ...
+  Root hash: 4392712ba01368efdf14b05c76f9e4df0d53664630b5d48632ed17a137f39076
+
+Activate the device:
+  # veritysetup create vroot /dev/sda1 /dev/sda2 \
+    4392712ba01368efdf14b05c76f9e4df0d53664630b5d48632ed17a137f39076
diff --git a/Documentation/devices.txt b/Documentation/devices.txt
index 00383186d8fb..23721d3be3e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devices.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devices.txt
@@ -98,9 +98,9 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		  8 = /dev/random	Nondeterministic random number gen.
 		  9 = /dev/urandom	Faster, less secure random number gen.
 		 10 = /dev/aio		Asynchronous I/O notification interface
-		 11 = /dev/kmsg		Writes to this come out as printk's
-		 12 = /dev/oldmem	Used by crashdump kernels to access
-					the memory of the kernel that crashed.
+		 11 = /dev/kmsg		Writes to this come out as printk's, reads
+					export the buffered printk records.
+		 12 = /dev/oldmem	OBSOLETE - replaced by /proc/vmcore
 
   1 block	RAM disk
 		  0 = /dev/ram0		First RAM disk
@@ -497,12 +497,8 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 
 		Each device type has 5 bits (32 minors).
 
- 13 block	8-bit MFM/RLL/IDE controller
-		  0 = /dev/xda		First XT disk whole disk
-		 64 = /dev/xdb		Second XT disk whole disk
-
-		Partitions are handled in the same way as IDE disks
-		(see major number 3).
+ 13 block	Previously used for the XT disk (/dev/xdN)
+		Deleted in kernel v3.9.
 
  14 char	Open Sound System (OSS)
 		  0 = /dev/mixer	Mixer control
@@ -846,13 +842,7 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		    ...
 		 31 = /dev/tap15	16th Ethertap device
 
- 36 block	MCA ESDI hard disk
-		  0 = /dev/eda		First ESDI disk whole disk
-		 64 = /dev/edb		Second ESDI disk whole disk
-		    ...
-
-		Partitions are handled in the same way as IDE disks
-		(see major number 3).
+ 36 block	OBSOLETE (was MCA ESDI hard disk)
 
  37 char	IDE tape
 		  0 = /dev/ht0		First IDE tape
@@ -2421,6 +2411,8 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		  1 = /dev/raw/raw1	First raw I/O device
 		  2 = /dev/raw/raw2	Second raw I/O device
 		    ...
+                 max minor number of raw device is set by kernel config
+                 MAX_RAW_DEVS or raw module parameter 'max_raw_devs'
 
 163 char
 
@@ -2564,9 +2556,6 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		192 = /dev/usb/yurex1	First USB Yurex device
 		   ...
 		209 = /dev/usb/yurex16	16th USB Yurex device
-		240 = /dev/usb/dabusb0	First daubusb device
-		    ...
-		243 = /dev/usb/dabusb3	Fourth dabusb device
 
 180 block	USB block devices
 		  0 = /dev/uba		First USB block device
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arc/interrupts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arc/interrupts.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9a5d562435ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arc/interrupts.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+* ARC700 incore Interrupt Controller
+
+  The core interrupt controller provides 32 prioritised interrupts (2 levels)
+  to ARC700 core.
+
+Properties:
+
+- compatible: "snps,arc700-intc"
+- interrupt-controller: This is an interrupt controller.
+- #interrupt-cells: Must be <1>.
+
+  Single Cell "interrupts" property of a device specifies the IRQ number
+  between 0 to 31
+
+  intc accessed via the special ARC AUX register interface, hence "reg" property
+  is not specified.
+
+Example:
+
+	intc: interrupt-controller {
+		compatible = "snps,arc700-intc";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-clk-manager.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-clk-manager.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2c28f1d12f45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-clk-manager.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+Altera SOCFPGA Clock Manager
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "altr,clk-mgr"
+- reg : Should contain base address and length for Clock Manager
+
+Example:
+	 clkmgr@ffd04000 {
+		compatible = "altr,clk-mgr";
+		reg = <0xffd04000 0x1000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-reset.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ecdb57d69dbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-reset.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+Altera SOCFPGA Reset Manager
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "altr,rst-mgr"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+
+Example:
+	 rstmgr@ffd05000 {
+		compatible = "altr,rst-mgr";
+		reg = <0xffd05000 0x1000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-system.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-system.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f4d04a067282
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-system.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+Altera SOCFPGA System Manager
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "altr,sys-mgr"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+- cpu1-start-addr : CPU1 start address in hex.
+
+Example:
+	 sysmgr@ffd08000 {
+		compatible = "altr,sys-mgr";
+		reg = <0xffd08000 0x1000>;
+		cpu1-start-addr = <0xffd080c4>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arch_timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arch_timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..06fc7602593a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arch_timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+* ARM architected timer
+
+ARM cores may have a per-core architected timer, which provides per-cpu timers,
+or a memory mapped architected timer, which provides up to 8 frames with a
+physical and optional virtual timer per frame.
+
+The per-core architected timer is attached to a GIC to deliver its
+per-processor interrupts via PPIs. The memory mapped timer is attached to a GIC
+to deliver its interrupts via SPIs.
+
+** CP15 Timer node properties:
+
+- compatible : Should at least contain one of
+	"arm,armv7-timer"
+	"arm,armv8-timer"
+
+- interrupts : Interrupt list for secure, non-secure, virtual and
+  hypervisor timers, in that order.
+
+- clock-frequency : The frequency of the main counter, in Hz. Optional.
+
+Example:
+
+	timer {
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a15-timer",
+			     "arm,armv7-timer";
+		interrupts = <1 13 0xf08>,
+			     <1 14 0xf08>,
+			     <1 11 0xf08>,
+			     <1 10 0xf08>;
+		clock-frequency = <100000000>;
+	};
+
+** Memory mapped timer node properties:
+
+- compatible : Should at least contain "arm,armv7-timer-mem".
+
+- clock-frequency : The frequency of the main counter, in Hz. Optional.
+
+- reg : The control frame base address.
+
+Note that #address-cells, #size-cells, and ranges shall be present to ensure
+the CPU can address a frame's registers.
+
+A timer node has up to 8 frame sub-nodes, each with the following properties:
+
+- frame-number: 0 to 7.
+
+- interrupts : Interrupt list for physical and virtual timers in that order.
+  The virtual timer interrupt is optional.
+
+- reg : The first and second view base addresses in that order. The second view
+  base address is optional.
+
+- status : "disabled" indicates the frame is not available for use. Optional.
+
+Example:
+
+	timer@f0000000 {
+		compatible = "arm,armv7-timer-mem";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		ranges;
+		reg = <0xf0000000 0x1000>;
+		clock-frequency = <50000000>;
+
+		frame@f0001000 {
+			frame-number = <0>
+			interrupts = <0 13 0x8>,
+				     <0 14 0x8>;
+			reg = <0xf0001000 0x1000>,
+			      <0xf0002000 0x1000>;
+		};
+
+		frame@f0003000 {
+			frame-number = <1>
+			interrupts = <0 15 0x8>;
+			reg = <0xf0003000 0x1000>;
+			status = "disabled";
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards
index 91f26148af79..db5858e32d3f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards
@@ -1,3 +1,19 @@
+ARM Integrator/AP (Application Platform) and Integrator/CP (Compact Platform)
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ARM's oldest Linux-supported platform with connectors for different core
+tiles of ARMv4, ARMv5 and ARMv6 type.
+
+Required properties (in root node):
+	compatible = "arm,integrator-ap";  /* Application Platform */
+	compatible = "arm,integrator-cp";  /* Compact Platform */
+
+FPGA type interrupt controllers, see the versatile-fpga-irq binding doc.
+
+In the root node the Integrator/CP must have a /cpcon node pointing
+to the CP control registers, and the Integrator/AP must have a
+/syscon node pointing to the Integrator/AP system controller.
+
+
 ARM Versatile Application and Platform Baseboards
 -------------------------------------------------
 ARM's development hardware platform with connectors for customizable
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-mpic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-mpic.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..61df564c0d23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-mpic.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+Marvell Armada 370 and Armada XP Interrupt Controller
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "marvell,mpic"
+- interrupt-controller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller.
+- #interrupt-cells: The number of cells to define the interrupts. Should be 1.
+  The cell is the IRQ number
+
+- reg: Should contain PMIC registers location and length. First pair
+  for the main interrupt registers, second pair for the per-CPU
+  interrupt registers. For this last pair, to be compliant with SMP
+  support, the "virtual" must be use (For the record, these registers
+  automatically map to the interrupt controller registers of the
+  current CPU)
+
+
+
+Example:
+
+        mpic: interrupt-controller@d0020000 {
+              compatible = "marvell,mpic";
+              #interrupt-cells = <1>;
+              #address-cells = <1>;
+              #size-cells = <1>;
+              interrupt-controller;
+              reg = <0xd0020a00 0x1d0>,
+                    <0xd0021070 0x58>;
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-pmsu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-pmsu.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..926b4d6aae7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-pmsu.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Power Management Service Unit(PMSU)
+-----------------------------------
+Available on Marvell SOCs: Armada 370 and Armada XP
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: "marvell,armada-370-xp-pmsu"
+
+- reg: Should contain PMSU registers location and length. First pair
+  for the per-CPU SW Reset Control registers, second pair for the
+  Power Management Service Unit.
+
+Example:
+
+armada-370-xp-pmsu@d0022000 {
+	compatible = "marvell,armada-370-xp-pmsu";
+	reg = <0xd0022100 0x430>,
+	      <0xd0020800 0x20>;
+};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c6ed90ea6e17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+Marvell Armada 370 and Armada XP Platforms Device Tree Bindings
+---------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Boards with a SoC of the Marvell Armada 370 and Armada XP families
+shall have the following property:
+
+Required root node property:
+
+compatible: must contain "marvell,armada-370-xp"
+
+In addition, boards using the Marvell Armada 370 SoC shall have the
+following property:
+
+Required root node property:
+
+compatible: must contain "marvell,armada370"
+
+In addition, boards using the Marvell Armada XP SoC shall have the
+following property:
+
+Required root node property:
+
+compatible: must contain "marvell,armadaxp"
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armadeus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armadeus.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9821283ff516
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armadeus.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+Armadeus i.MX Platforms Device Tree Bindings
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+APF51: i.MX51 based module.
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "armadeus,imx51-apf51", "fsl,imx51";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-adc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..723c205cb10d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-adc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+* AT91's Analog to Digital Converter (ADC)
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-adc"
+    <chip> can be "at91sam9260", "at91sam9g45" or "at91sam9x5"
+  - reg: Should contain ADC registers location and length
+  - interrupts: Should contain the IRQ line for the ADC
+  - atmel,adc-channels-used: Bitmask of the channels muxed and enable for this
+    device
+  - atmel,adc-num-channels: Number of channels available in the ADC
+  - atmel,adc-startup-time: Startup Time of the ADC in microseconds as
+    defined in the datasheet
+  - atmel,adc-vref: Reference voltage in millivolts for the conversions
+  - atmel,adc-res: List of resolution in bits supported by the ADC. List size
+		   must be two at least.
+  - atmel,adc-res-names: Contains one identifier string for each resolution
+			 in atmel,adc-res property. "lowres" and "highres"
+			 identifiers are required.
+
+Optional properties:
+  - atmel,adc-use-external: Boolean to enable of external triggers
+  - atmel,adc-use-res: String corresponding to an identifier from
+		       atmel,adc-res-names property. If not specified, the highest
+		       resolution will be used.
+  - atmel,adc-sleep-mode: Boolean to enable sleep mode when no conversion
+  - atmel,adc-sample-hold-time: Sample and Hold Time in microseconds
+ 
+Optional trigger Nodes:
+  - Required properties:
+    * trigger-name: Name of the trigger exposed to the user
+    * trigger-value: Value to put in the Trigger register
+      to activate this trigger
+  - Optional properties:
+    * trigger-external: Is the trigger an external trigger?
+
+Examples:
+adc0: adc@fffb0000 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-adc";
+	reg = <0xfffb0000 0x100>;
+	interrupts = <20 4>;
+	atmel,adc-channel-base = <0x30>;
+	atmel,adc-channels-used = <0xff>;
+	atmel,adc-drdy-mask = <0x10000>;
+	atmel,adc-num-channels = <8>;
+	atmel,adc-startup-time = <40>;
+	atmel,adc-status-register = <0x1c>;
+	atmel,adc-trigger-register = <0x08>;
+	atmel,adc-use-external;
+	atmel,adc-vref = <3300>;
+	atmel,adc-res = <8 10>;
+	atmel,adc-res-names = "lowres", "highres";
+	atmel,adc-use-res = "lowres";
+
+	trigger@0 {
+		trigger-name = "external-rising";
+		trigger-value = <0x1>;
+		trigger-external;
+	};
+	trigger@1 {
+		trigger-name = "external-falling";
+		trigger-value = <0x2>;
+		trigger-external;
+	};
+
+	trigger@2 {
+		trigger-name = "external-any";
+		trigger-value = <0x3>;
+		trigger-external;
+	};
+
+	trigger@3 {
+		trigger-name = "continuous";
+		trigger-value = <0x6>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-aic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-aic.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ad031211b5b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-aic.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+* Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-aic"
+- interrupt-controller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller.
+- interrupt-parent: For single AIC system, it is an empty property.
+- #interrupt-cells: The number of cells to define the interrupts. It should be 3.
+  The first cell is the IRQ number (aka "Peripheral IDentifier" on datasheet).
+  The second cell is used to specify flags:
+    bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags:
+      1 = low-to-high edge triggered.
+      2 = high-to-low edge triggered.
+      4 = active high level-sensitive.
+      8 = active low level-sensitive.
+      Valid combinations are 1, 2, 3, 4, 8.
+      Default flag for internal sources should be set to 4 (active high).
+  The third cell is used to specify the irq priority from 0 (lowest) to 7
+  (highest).
+- reg: Should contain AIC registers location and length
+- atmel,external-irqs: u32 array of external irqs.
+
+Examples:
+	/*
+	 * AIC
+	 */
+	aic: interrupt-controller@fffff000 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-aic";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		interrupt-parent;
+		#interrupt-cells = <3>;
+		reg = <0xfffff000 0x200>;
+	};
+
+	/*
+	 * An interrupt generating device that is wired to an AIC.
+	 */
+	dma: dma-controller@ffffec00 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91sam9g45-dma";
+		reg = <0xffffec00 0x200>;
+		interrupts = <21 4 5>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-at91.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-at91.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1196290082d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-at91.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+Atmel AT91 device tree bindings.
+================================
+
+PIT Timer required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "atmel,at91sam9260-pit"
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length
+- interrupts: Should contain interrupt for the PIT which is the IRQ line
+  shared across all System Controller members.
+
+System Timer (ST) required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "atmel,at91rm9200-st"
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length
+- interrupts: Should contain interrupt for the ST which is the IRQ line
+  shared across all System Controller members.
+
+TC/TCLIB Timer required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-tcb".
+  <chip> can be "at91rm9200" or "at91sam9x5"
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length
+- interrupts: Should contain all interrupts for the TC block
+  Note that you can specify several interrupt cells if the TC
+  block has one interrupt per channel.
+
+Examples:
+
+One interrupt per TC block:
+	tcb0: timer@fff7c000 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-tcb";
+		reg = <0xfff7c000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <18 4>;
+	};
+
+One interrupt per TC channel in a TC block:
+	tcb1: timer@fffdc000 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-tcb";
+		reg = <0xfffdc000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <26 4 27 4 28 4>;
+	};
+
+RSTC Reset Controller required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-rstc".
+  <chip> can be "at91sam9260" or "at91sam9g45"
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length
+
+Example:
+
+	rstc@fffffd00 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-rstc";
+		reg = <0xfffffd00 0x10>;
+	};
+
+RAMC SDRAM/DDR Controller required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "atmel,at91sam9260-sdramc",
+			"atmel,at91sam9g45-ddramc",
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length
+  For at91sam9263 and at91sam9g45 you must specify 2 entries.
+
+Examples:
+
+	ramc0: ramc@ffffe800 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91sam9g45-ddramc";
+		reg = <0xffffe800 0x200>;
+	};
+
+	ramc0: ramc@ffffe400 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91sam9g45-ddramc";
+		reg = <0xffffe400 0x200
+		       0xffffe600 0x200>;
+	};
+
+SHDWC Shutdown Controller
+
+required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-shdwc".
+  <chip> can be "at91sam9260", "at91sam9rl" or "at91sam9x5".
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length
+
+optional properties:
+- atmel,wakeup-mode: String, operation mode of the wakeup mode.
+  Supported values are: "none", "high", "low", "any".
+- atmel,wakeup-counter: Counter on Wake-up 0 (between 0x0 and 0xf).
+
+optional at91sam9260 properties:
+- atmel,wakeup-rtt-timer: boolean to enable Real-time Timer Wake-up.
+
+optional at91sam9rl properties:
+- atmel,wakeup-rtc-timer: boolean to enable Real-time Clock Wake-up.
+- atmel,wakeup-rtt-timer: boolean to enable Real-time Timer Wake-up.
+
+optional at91sam9x5 properties:
+- atmel,wakeup-rtc-timer: boolean to enable Real-time Clock Wake-up.
+
+Example:
+
+	rstc@fffffd00 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-rstc";
+		reg = <0xfffffd00 0x10>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-pmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-pmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..389bed5056e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-pmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+* Power Management Controller (PMC)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "atmel,at91rm9200-pmc"
+- reg: Should contain PMC registers location and length
+
+Examples:
+	pmc: pmc@fffffc00 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-pmc";
+		reg = <0xfffffc00 0x100>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/bcm11351.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/bcm11351.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0ff6560e6094
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/bcm11351.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+Broadcom BCM11351 device tree bindings
+-------------------------------------------
+
+Boards with the bcm281xx SoC family (which includes bcm11130, bcm11140,
+bcm11351, bcm28145, bcm28155 SoCs) shall have the following properties:
+
+Required root node property:
+
+compatible = "brcm,bcm11351";
+DEPRECATED: compatible = "bcm,bcm11351";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/kona-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/kona-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..17d88b233d1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/kona-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Broadcom Kona Family timer
+-----------------------------------------------------
+This timer is used in the following Broadcom SoCs:
+ BCM11130, BCM11140, BCM11351, BCM28145, BCM28155
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "brcm,kona-timer"
+- DEPRECATED: compatible : "bcm,kona-timer"
+- reg : Register range for the timer
+- interrupts : interrupt for the timer
+- clock-frequency: frequency that the clock operates
+
+Example:
+	timer@35006000 {
+		compatible = "brcm,kona-timer";
+		reg = <0x35006000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0x0 7 0x4>;
+		clock-frequency = <32768>;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/kona-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/kona-wdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2b86a00e351d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/kona-wdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+Broadcom Kona Family Watchdog Timer
+-----------------------------------
+
+This watchdog timer is used in the following Broadcom SoCs:
+  BCM11130, BCM11140, BCM11351, BCM28145, BCM28155
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible = "brcm,bcm11351-wdt", "brcm,kona-wdt";
+  - reg: memory address & range
+
+Example:
+	watchdog@35002f40 {
+		compatible = "brcm,bcm11351-wdt", "brcm,kona-wdt";
+		reg = <0x35002f40 0x6c>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm2835.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm2835.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ac683480c486
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm2835.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+Broadcom BCM2835 device tree bindings
+-------------------------------------------
+
+Boards with the BCM2835 SoC shall have the following properties:
+
+Required root node property:
+
+compatible = "brcm,bcm2835";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda.txt
index 4755caaccba6..25fcf96795ca 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,15 @@
-Calxeda Highbank Platforms Device Tree Bindings
+Calxeda Platforms Device Tree Bindings
 -----------------------------------------------
 
-Boards with Calxeda Cortex-A9 based Highbank SOC shall have the following
-properties.
+Boards with Calxeda Cortex-A9 based ECX-1000 (Highbank) SOC shall have the
+following properties.
 
 Required root node properties:
     - compatible = "calxeda,highbank";
+
+
+Boards with Calxeda Cortex-A15 based ECX-2000 SOC shall have the following
+properties.
+
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "calxeda,ecx-2000";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/combophy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/combophy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6622bdb2e8bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/combophy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Calxeda Highbank Combination Phys for SATA
+
+Properties:
+- compatible : Should be "calxeda,hb-combophy"
+- #phy-cells: Should be 1.
+- reg : Address and size for Combination Phy registers.
+- phydev: device ID for programming the combophy.
+
+Example:
+
+	combophy5: combo-phy@fff5d000 {
+		compatible = "calxeda,hb-combophy";
+		#phy-cells = <1>;
+		reg = <0xfff5d000 0x1000>;
+		phydev = <31>;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/l2ecc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/l2ecc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..94e642a33db0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/l2ecc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+Calxeda Highbank L2 cache ECC
+
+Properties:
+- compatible : Should be "calxeda,hb-sregs-l2-ecc"
+- reg : Address and size for ECC error interrupt clear registers.
+- interrupts : Should be single bit error interrupt, then double bit error
+	interrupt.
+
+Example:
+
+	sregs@fff3c200 {
+		compatible = "calxeda,hb-sregs-l2-ecc";
+		reg = <0xfff3c200 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <0 71 4  0 72 4>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/mem-ctrlr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/mem-ctrlr.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f770ac0893d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/mem-ctrlr.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+Calxeda DDR memory controller
+
+Properties:
+- compatible : Should be "calxeda,hb-ddr-ctrl"
+- reg : Address and size for DDR controller registers.
+- interrupts : Interrupt for DDR controller.
+
+Example:
+
+	memory-controller@fff00000 {
+		compatible = "calxeda,hb-ddr-ctrl";
+		reg = <0xfff00000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 91 4>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..92d36e2aa877
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+=======================================================
+ARM CCI cache coherent interconnect binding description
+=======================================================
+
+ARM multi-cluster systems maintain intra-cluster coherency through a
+cache coherent interconnect (CCI) that is capable of monitoring bus
+transactions and manage coherency, TLB invalidations and memory barriers.
+
+It allows snooping and distributed virtual memory message broadcast across
+clusters, through memory mapped interface, with a global control register
+space and multiple sets of interface control registers, one per slave
+interface.
+
+Bindings for the CCI node follow the ePAPR standard, available from:
+
+www.power.org/documentation/epapr-version-1-1/
+
+with the addition of the bindings described in this document which are
+specific to ARM.
+
+* CCI interconnect node
+
+	Description: Describes a CCI cache coherent Interconnect component
+
+	Node name must be "cci".
+	Node's parent must be the root node /, and the address space visible
+	through the CCI interconnect is the same as the one seen from the
+	root node (ie from CPUs perspective as per DT standard).
+	Every CCI node has to define the following properties:
+
+	- compatible
+		Usage: required
+		Value type: <string>
+		Definition: must be set to
+			    "arm,cci-400"
+
+	- reg
+		Usage: required
+		Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
+		Definition: A standard property. Specifies base physical
+			    address of CCI control registers common to all
+			    interfaces.
+
+	- ranges:
+		Usage: required
+		Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
+		Definition: A standard property. Follow rules in the ePAPR for
+			    hierarchical bus addressing. CCI interfaces
+			    addresses refer to the parent node addressing
+			    scheme to declare their register bases.
+
+	CCI interconnect node can define the following child nodes:
+
+	- CCI control interface nodes
+
+		Node name must be "slave-if".
+		Parent node must be CCI interconnect node.
+
+		A CCI control interface node must contain the following
+		properties:
+
+		- compatible
+			Usage: required
+			Value type: <string>
+			Definition: must be set to
+				    "arm,cci-400-ctrl-if"
+
+		- interface-type:
+			Usage: required
+			Value type: <string>
+			Definition: must be set to one of {"ace", "ace-lite"}
+				    depending on the interface type the node
+				    represents.
+
+		- reg:
+			Usage: required
+			Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
+			Definition: the base address and size of the
+				    corresponding interface programming
+				    registers.
+
+* CCI interconnect bus masters
+
+	Description: masters in the device tree connected to a CCI port
+		     (inclusive of CPUs and their cpu nodes).
+
+	A CCI interconnect bus master node must contain the following
+	properties:
+
+	- cci-control-port:
+		Usage: required
+		Value type: <phandle>
+		Definition: a phandle containing the CCI control interface node
+			    the master is connected to.
+
+Example:
+
+	cpus {
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+
+		CPU0: cpu@0 {
+			device_type = "cpu";
+			compatible = "arm,cortex-a15";
+			cci-control-port = <&cci_control1>;
+			reg = <0x0>;
+		};
+
+		CPU1: cpu@1 {
+			device_type = "cpu";
+			compatible = "arm,cortex-a15";
+			cci-control-port = <&cci_control1>;
+			reg = <0x1>;
+		};
+
+		CPU2: cpu@100 {
+			device_type = "cpu";
+			compatible = "arm,cortex-a7";
+			cci-control-port = <&cci_control2>;
+			reg = <0x100>;
+		};
+
+		CPU3: cpu@101 {
+			device_type = "cpu";
+			compatible = "arm,cortex-a7";
+			cci-control-port = <&cci_control2>;
+			reg = <0x101>;
+		};
+
+	};
+
+	dma0: dma@3000000 {
+		compatible = "arm,pl330", "arm,primecell";
+		cci-control-port = <&cci_control0>;
+		reg = <0x0 0x3000000 0x0 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <10>;
+		#dma-cells = <1>;
+		#dma-channels = <8>;
+		#dma-requests = <32>;
+	};
+
+	cci@2c090000 {
+		compatible = "arm,cci-400";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		reg = <0x0 0x2c090000 0 0x1000>;
+		ranges = <0x0 0x0 0x2c090000 0x6000>;
+
+		cci_control0: slave-if@1000 {
+			compatible = "arm,cci-400-ctrl-if";
+			interface-type = "ace-lite";
+			reg = <0x1000 0x1000>;
+		};
+
+		cci_control1: slave-if@4000 {
+			compatible = "arm,cci-400-ctrl-if";
+			interface-type = "ace";
+			reg = <0x4000 0x1000>;
+		};
+
+		cci_control2: slave-if@5000 {
+			compatible = "arm,cci-400-ctrl-if";
+			interface-type = "ace";
+			reg = <0x5000 0x1000>;
+		};
+	};
+
+This CCI node corresponds to a CCI component whose control registers sits
+at address 0x000000002c090000.
+CCI slave interface @0x000000002c091000 is connected to dma controller dma0.
+CCI slave interface @0x000000002c094000 is connected to CPUs {CPU0, CPU1};
+CCI slave interface @0x000000002c095000 is connected to CPUs {CPU2, CPU3};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coherency-fabric.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coherency-fabric.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..17d8cd107559
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coherency-fabric.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+Coherency fabric
+----------------
+Available on Marvell SOCs: Armada 370 and Armada XP
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: "marvell,coherency-fabric"
+
+- reg: Should contain coherency fabric registers location and
+  length. First pair for the coherency fabric registers, second pair
+  for the per-CPU fabric registers registers.
+
+Example:
+
+coherency-fabric@d0020200 {
+	compatible = "marvell,coherency-fabric";
+	reg = <0xd0020200 0xb0>,
+		<0xd0021810 0x1c>;
+
+};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f32494dbfe19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+* ARM CPUs binding description
+
+The device tree allows to describe the layout of CPUs in a system through
+the "cpus" node, which in turn contains a number of subnodes (ie "cpu")
+defining properties for every cpu.
+
+Bindings for CPU nodes follow the ePAPR standard, available from:
+
+http://devicetree.org
+
+For the ARM architecture every CPU node must contain the following properties:
+
+- device_type:	must be "cpu"
+- reg:		property matching the CPU MPIDR[23:0] register bits
+		reg[31:24] bits must be set to 0
+- compatible:	should be one of:
+		"arm,arm1020"
+		"arm,arm1020e"
+		"arm,arm1022"
+		"arm,arm1026"
+		"arm,arm720"
+		"arm,arm740"
+		"arm,arm7tdmi"
+		"arm,arm920"
+		"arm,arm922"
+		"arm,arm925"
+		"arm,arm926"
+		"arm,arm940"
+		"arm,arm946"
+		"arm,arm9tdmi"
+		"arm,cortex-a5"
+		"arm,cortex-a7"
+		"arm,cortex-a8"
+		"arm,cortex-a9"
+		"arm,cortex-a15"
+		"arm,arm1136"
+		"arm,arm1156"
+		"arm,arm1176"
+		"arm,arm11mpcore"
+		"faraday,fa526"
+		"intel,sa110"
+		"intel,sa1100"
+		"marvell,feroceon"
+		"marvell,mohawk"
+		"marvell,xsc3"
+		"marvell,xscale"
+
+Example:
+
+	cpus {
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+
+		CPU0: cpu@0 {
+			device_type = "cpu";
+			compatible = "arm,cortex-a15";
+			reg = <0x0>;
+		};
+
+		CPU1: cpu@1 {
+			device_type = "cpu";
+			compatible = "arm,cortex-a15";
+			reg = <0x1>;
+		};
+
+		CPU2: cpu@100 {
+			device_type = "cpu";
+			compatible = "arm,cortex-a7";
+			reg = <0x100>;
+		};
+
+		CPU3: cpu@101 {
+			device_type = "cpu";
+			compatible = "arm,cortex-a7";
+			reg = <0x101>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/davinci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/davinci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cfaeda4274e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/davinci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Texas Instruments DaVinci Platforms Device Tree Bindings
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
+DA850/OMAP-L138/AM18x Evaluation Module (EVM) board
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "ti,da850-evm", "ti,da850";
+
+EnBW AM1808 based CMC board
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "enbw,cmc", "ti,da850;
+
+Generic DaVinci Boards
+----------------------
+
+DA850/OMAP-L138/AM18x generic board
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "ti,da850";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/davinci/cp-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/davinci/cp-intc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..597e8a089fe4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/davinci/cp-intc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+* TI Common Platform Interrupt Controller
+
+Common Platform Interrupt Controller (cp_intc) is used on
+OMAP-L1x SoCs and can support several configurable number
+of interrupts.
+
+Main node required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be:
+	"ti,cp-intc"
+- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller
+- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+  interrupt source. The type shall be a <u32> and the value shall be 1.
+
+  The cell contains the interrupt number in the range [0-128].
+- ti,intc-size: Number of interrupts handled by the interrupt controller.
+- reg: physical base address and size of the intc registers map.
+
+Example:
+
+	intc: interrupt-controller@1 {
+		compatible = "ti,cp-intc";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		ti,intc-size = <101>;
+		reg = <0xfffee000 0x2000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/davinci/nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/davinci/nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3545ea704b50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/davinci/nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+* Texas Instruments Davinci NAND
+
+This file provides information, what the device node for the
+davinci nand interface contain.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,davinci-nand";
+- reg : contain 2 offset/length values:
+        - offset and length for the access window
+        - offset and length for accessing the aemif control registers
+- ti,davinci-chipselect: Indicates on the davinci_nand driver which
+                         chipselect is used for accessing the nand.
+
+Recommended properties :
+- ti,davinci-mask-ale: mask for ale
+- ti,davinci-mask-cle: mask for cle
+- ti,davinci-mask-chipsel: mask for chipselect
+- ti,davinci-ecc-mode: ECC mode valid values for davinci driver:
+		- "none"
+		- "soft"
+		- "hw"
+- ti,davinci-ecc-bits: used ECC bits, currently supported 1 or 4.
+- ti,davinci-nand-buswidth: buswidth 8 or 16
+- ti,davinci-nand-use-bbt: use flash based bad block table support.
+
+nand device bindings may contain additional sub-nodes describing
+partitions of the address space. See partition.txt for more detail.
+
+Example(da850 EVM ):
+nand_cs3@62000000 {
+	compatible = "ti,davinci-nand";
+	reg = <0x62000000 0x807ff
+		0x68000000 0x8000>;
+	ti,davinci-chipselect = <1>;
+	ti,davinci-mask-ale = <0>;
+	ti,davinci-mask-cle = <0>;
+	ti,davinci-mask-chipsel = <0>;
+	ti,davinci-ecc-mode = "hw";
+	ti,davinci-ecc-bits = <4>;
+	ti,davinci-nand-use-bbt;
+
+	partition@180000 {
+		label = "ubifs";
+		reg = <0x180000 0x7e80000>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/exynos/power_domain.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/exynos/power_domain.txt
index 6528e215c5fe..5216b419016a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/exynos/power_domain.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/exynos/power_domain.txt
@@ -4,14 +4,13 @@ Exynos processors include support for multiple power domains which are used
 to gate power to one or more peripherals on the processor.
 
 Required Properties:
-- compatiable: should be one of the following.
+- compatible: should be one of the following.
     * samsung,exynos4210-pd - for exynos4210 type power domain.
 - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
     region.
 
-Optional Properties:
-- samsung,exynos4210-pd-off: Specifies that the power domain is in turned-off
-    state during boot and remains to be turned-off until explicitly turned-on.
+Node of a device using power domains must have a samsung,power-domain property
+defined with a phandle to respective power domain.
 
 Example:
 
@@ -19,3 +18,11 @@ Example:
 		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-pd";
 		reg = <0x10023C00 0x10>;
 	};
+
+Example of the node using power domain:
+
+	node {
+		/* ... */
+		samsung,power-domain = <&lcd0>;
+		/* ... */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt
index 54bdddadf1cf..e935d7d4ac43 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,22 @@
 Freescale i.MX Platforms Device Tree Bindings
 -----------------------------------------------
 
+i.MX23 Evaluation Kit
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "fsl,imx23-evk", "fsl,imx23";
+
+i.MX25 Product Development Kit
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "fsl,imx25-pdk", "fsl,imx25";
+
+i.MX27 Product Development Kit
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "fsl,imx27-pdk", "fsl,imx27";
+
+i.MX28 Evaluation Kit
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "fsl,imx28-evk", "fsl,imx28";
+
 i.MX51 Babbage Board
 Required root node properties:
     - compatible = "fsl,imx51-babbage", "fsl,imx51";
@@ -28,3 +44,33 @@ Required root node properties:
 i.MX6 Quad SABRE Lite Board
 Required root node properties:
     - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-sabrelite", "fsl,imx6q";
+
+i.MX6 Quad SABRE Smart Device Board
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-sabresd", "fsl,imx6q";
+
+i.MX6 Quad SABRE Automotive Board
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-sabreauto", "fsl,imx6q";
+
+Generic i.MX boards
+-------------------
+
+No iomux setup is done for these boards, so this must have been configured
+by the bootloader for boards to work with the generic bindings.
+
+i.MX27 generic board
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "fsl,imx27";
+
+i.MX51 generic board
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "fsl,imx51";
+
+i.MX53 generic board
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "fsl,imx53";
+
+i.MX6q generic board
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "fsl,imx6q";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt
index 9b4b82a721b6..3dfb0c0384f5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt
@@ -11,7 +11,9 @@ have PPIs or SGIs.
 Main node required properties:
 
 - compatible : should be one of:
+	"arm,cortex-a15-gic"
 	"arm,cortex-a9-gic"
+	"arm,cortex-a7-gic"
 	"arm,arm11mp-gic"
 - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller
 - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
@@ -39,8 +41,9 @@ Main node required properties:
   the GIC cpu interface register base and size.
 
 Optional
-- interrupts	: Interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller. Only
-  present on secondary GICs.
+- interrupts	: Interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller on
+  secondary GICs, or VGIC maintenance interrupt on primary GIC (see
+  below).
 
 - cpu-offset	: per-cpu offset within the distributor and cpu interface
   regions, used when the GIC doesn't have banked registers. The offset is
@@ -57,3 +60,31 @@ Example:
 		      <0xfff10100 0x100>;
 	};
 
+
+* GIC virtualization extensions (VGIC)
+
+For ARM cores that support the virtualization extensions, additional
+properties must be described (they only exist if the GIC is the
+primary interrupt controller).
+
+Required properties:
+
+- reg : Additional regions specifying the base physical address and
+  size of the VGIC registers. The first additional region is the GIC
+  virtual interface control register base and size. The 2nd additional
+  region is the GIC virtual cpu interface register base and size.
+
+- interrupts : VGIC maintenance interrupt.
+
+Example:
+
+	interrupt-controller@2c001000 {
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a15-gic";
+		#interrupt-cells = <3>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		reg = <0x2c001000 0x1000>,
+		      <0x2c002000 0x1000>,
+		      <0x2c004000 0x2000>,
+		      <0x2c006000 0x2000>;
+		interrupts = <1 9 0xf04>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/global_timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/global_timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1e548981eda4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/global_timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+* ARM Global Timer
+	Cortex-A9 are often associated with a per-core Global timer.
+
+** Timer node required properties:
+
+- compatible : Should be "arm,cortex-a9-global-timer"
+		Driver supports versions r2p0 and above.
+
+- interrupts : One interrupt to each core
+
+- reg : Specify the base address and the size of the GT timer
+	register window.
+
+- clocks : Should be phandle to a clock.
+
+Example:
+
+	timer@2c000600 {
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a9-global-timer";
+		reg = <0x2c000600 0x20>;
+		interrupts = <1 13 0xf01>;
+		clocks = <&arm_periph_clk>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/keystone/keystone.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/keystone/keystone.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..63c0e6ae5cf7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/keystone/keystone.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+TI Keystone Platforms Device Tree Bindings
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Boards with Keystone2 based devices (TCI66xxK2H) SOC shall have the
+following properties.
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: All TI specific devices present in Keystone SOC should be in
+   the form "ti,keystone-*". Generic devices like gic, arch_timers, ns16550
+   type UART should use the specified compatible for those devices.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/kirkwood.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/kirkwood.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..98cce9a653eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/kirkwood.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+Marvell Kirkwood Platforms Device Tree Bindings
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Boards with a SoC of the Marvell Kirkwood
+shall have the following property:
+
+Required root node property:
+
+compatible: must contain "marvell,kirkwood";
+
+In order to support the kirkwood cpufreq driver, there must be a node
+cpus/cpu@0 with three clocks, "cpu_clk", "ddrclk" and "powersave",
+where the "powersave" clock is a gating clock used to switch the CPU
+between the "cpu_clk" and the "ddrclk".
+
+Example:
+
+	cpus {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		cpu@0 {
+		      device_type = "cpu";
+		      compatible = "marvell,sheeva-88SV131";
+		      clocks = <&core_clk 1>, <&core_clk 3>, <&gate_clk 11>;
+		      clock-names = "cpu_clk", "ddrclk", "powersave";
+		};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt
index 7ca52161e7ab..c0c7626fd0ff 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt
@@ -10,6 +10,17 @@ Required properties:
 	"arm,pl310-cache"
 	"arm,l220-cache"
 	"arm,l210-cache"
+	"marvell,aurora-system-cache": Marvell Controller designed to be
+     compatible with the ARM one, with system cache mode (meaning
+     maintenance operations on L1 are broadcasted to the L2 and L2
+     performs the same operation).
+	"marvell,"aurora-outer-cache: Marvell Controller designed to be
+	 compatible with the ARM one with outer cache mode.
+	"brcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache": For Broadcom bcm11351 chipset where an
+	offset needs to be added to the address before passing down to the L2
+	cache controller
+	"bcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache": DEPRECATED by
+	                               "brcm,bcm11351-a2-pl310-cache"
 - cache-unified : Specifies the cache is a unified cache.
 - cache-level : Should be set to 2 for a level 2 cache.
 - reg : Physical base address and size of cache controller's memory mapped
@@ -29,6 +40,9 @@ Optional properties:
   filter. Addresses in the filter window are directed to the M1 port. Other
   addresses will go to the M0 port.
 - interrupts : 1 combined interrupt.
+- cache-id-part: cache id part number to be used if it is not present
+  on hardware
+- wt-override: If present then L2 is forced to Write through mode
 
 Example:
 
@@ -37,7 +51,7 @@ L2: cache-controller {
         reg = <0xfff12000 0x1000>;
         arm,data-latency = <1 1 1>;
         arm,tag-latency = <2 2 2>;
-        arm,filter-latency = <0x80000000 0x8000000>;
+        arm,filter-ranges = <0x80000000 0x8000000>;
         cache-unified;
         cache-level = <2>;
 	interrupts = <45>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/lpc32xx-mic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/lpc32xx-mic.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..539adca19e8f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/lpc32xx-mic.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+* NXP LPC32xx Main Interrupt Controller
+  (MIC, including SIC1 and SIC2 secondary controllers)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "nxp,lpc3220-mic"
+- interrupt-controller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller.
+- interrupt-parent: Empty for the interrupt controller itself
+- #interrupt-cells: The number of cells to define the interrupts. Should be 2.
+  The first cell is the IRQ number
+  The second cell is used to specify mode:
+      1 = low-to-high edge triggered
+      2 = high-to-low edge triggered
+      4 = active high level-sensitive
+      8 = active low level-sensitive
+      Default for internal sources should be set to 4 (active high).
+- reg: Should contain MIC registers location and length
+
+Examples:
+	/*
+	 * MIC
+	 */
+	mic: interrupt-controller@40008000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-mic";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		interrupt-parent;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+		reg = <0x40008000 0xC000>;
+	};
+
+	/*
+	 * ADC
+	 */
+	adc@40048000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-adc";
+		reg = <0x40048000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&mic>;
+		interrupts = <39 4>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/lpc32xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/lpc32xx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..56ec8ddc4a3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/lpc32xx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+NXP LPC32xx Platforms Device Tree Bindings
+------------------------------------------
+
+Boards with the NXP LPC32xx SoC shall have the following properties:
+
+Required root node property:
+
+compatible: must be "nxp,lpc3220", "nxp,lpc3230", "nxp,lpc3240" or "nxp,lpc3250"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mrvl/intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mrvl/intc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8b53273cb22f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mrvl/intc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+* Marvell MMP Interrupt controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "mrvl,mmp-intc", "mrvl,mmp2-intc" or
+  "mrvl,mmp2-mux-intc"
+- reg : Address and length of the register set of the interrupt controller.
+  If the interrupt controller is intc, address and length means the range
+  of the whold interrupt controller. If the interrupt controller is mux-intc,
+  address and length means one register. Since address of mux-intc is in the
+  range of intc. mux-intc is secondary interrupt controller.
+- reg-names : Name of the register set of the interrupt controller. It's
+  only required in mux-intc interrupt controller.
+- interrupts : Should be the port interrupt shared by mux interrupts. It's
+  only required in mux-intc interrupt controller.
+- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller.
+- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+  interrupt source.
+- mrvl,intc-nr-irqs : Specifies the number of interrupts in the interrupt
+  controller.
+- mrvl,clr-mfp-irq : Specifies the interrupt that needs to clear MFP edge
+  detection first.
+
+Example:
+	intc: interrupt-controller@d4282000 {
+		compatible = "mrvl,mmp2-intc";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		reg = <0xd4282000 0x1000>;
+		mrvl,intc-nr-irqs = <64>;
+	};
+
+	intcmux4@d4282150 {
+		compatible = "mrvl,mmp2-mux-intc";
+		interrupts = <4>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		reg = <0x150 0x4>, <0x168 0x4>;
+		reg-names = "mux status", "mux mask";
+		mrvl,intc-nr-irqs = <2>;
+	};
+
+* Marvell Orion Interrupt controller
+
+Required properties
+- compatible :  Should be "marvell,orion-intc".
+- #interrupt-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+  interrupt source. Supported value is <1>.
+- interrupt-controller : Declare this node to be an interrupt controller.
+- reg : Interrupt mask address. A list of 4 byte ranges, one per controller.
+        One entry in the list represents 32 interrupts.
+
+Example:
+
+	intc: interrupt-controller {
+        	compatible = "marvell,orion-intc", "marvell,intc";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+                reg = <0xfed20204 0x04>,
+		      <0xfed20214 0x04>;
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mrvl/mrvl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mrvl/mrvl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..117d741a2e4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mrvl/mrvl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+Marvell Platforms Device Tree Bindings
+----------------------------------------------------
+
+PXA168 Aspenite Board
+Required root node properties:
+	- compatible = "mrvl,pxa168-aspenite", "mrvl,pxa168";
+
+PXA910 DKB Board
+Required root node properties:
+	- compatible = "mrvl,pxa910-dkb";
+
+MMP2 Brownstone Board
+Required root node properties:
+	- compatible = "mrvl,mmp2-brownstone";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mrvl/tauros2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mrvl/tauros2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..31af1cbb60bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mrvl/tauros2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+* Marvell Tauros2 Cache
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "marvell,tauros2-cache".
+- marvell,tauros2-cache-features : Specify the features supported for the
+  tauros2 cache.
+  The features including
+    CACHE_TAUROS2_PREFETCH_ON       (1 << 0)
+    CACHE_TAUROS2_LINEFILL_BURST8   (1 << 1)
+  The definition can be found at
+  arch/arm/include/asm/hardware/cache-tauros2.h
+
+Example:
+	L2: l2-cache {
+		compatible = "marvell,tauros2-cache";
+		marvell,tauros2-cache-features = <0x3>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mrvl/timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mrvl/timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9a6e251462e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mrvl/timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+* Marvell MMP Timer controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "mrvl,mmp-timer".
+- reg : Address and length of the register set of timer controller.
+- interrupts : Should be the interrupt number.
+
+Example:
+	timer0: timer@d4014000 {
+		compatible = "mrvl,mmp-timer";
+		reg = <0xd4014000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <13>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/msm/ssbi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/msm/ssbi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..54fd5ced3401
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/msm/ssbi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+* Qualcomm SSBI
+
+Some Qualcomm MSM devices contain a point-to-point serial bus used to
+communicate with a limited range of devices (mostly power management
+chips).
+
+These require the following properties:
+
+- compatible: "qcom,ssbi"
+
+- qcom,controller-type
+  indicates the SSBI bus variant the controller should use to talk
+  with the slave device.  This should be one of "ssbi", "ssbi2", or
+  "pmic-arbiter".  The type chosen is determined by the attached
+  slave.
+
+The slave device should be the single child node of the ssbi device
+with a compatible field.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/msm/timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/msm/timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c6ef8f13dc7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/msm/timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+* MSM Timer
+
+Properties:
+
+- compatible : Should at least contain "qcom,msm-timer". More specific
+               properties specify which subsystem the timers are paired with.
+
+               "qcom,kpss-timer" - krait subsystem
+               "qcom,scss-timer" - scorpion subsystem
+
+- interrupts : Interrupts for the the debug timer, the first general purpose
+               timer, and optionally a second general purpose timer in that
+               order.
+
+- reg : Specifies the base address of the timer registers.
+
+- clock-frequency : The frequency of the debug timer and the general purpose
+                    timer(s) in Hz in that order.
+
+Optional:
+
+- cpu-offset : per-cpu offset used when the timer is accessed without the
+               CPU remapping facilities. The offset is
+               cpu-offset + (0x10000 * cpu-nr).
+
+Example:
+
+       timer@200a000 {
+               compatible = "qcom,scss-timer", "qcom,msm-timer";
+               interrupts = <1 1 0x301>,
+                            <1 2 0x301>,
+                            <1 3 0x301>;
+               reg = <0x0200a000 0x100>;
+               clock-frequency = <19200000>,
+                                 <32768>;
+               cpu-offset = <0x40000>;
+       };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mvebu-system-controller.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mvebu-system-controller.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..081c6a786c8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mvebu-system-controller.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+MVEBU System Controller
+-----------------------
+MVEBU (Marvell SOCs: Armada 370/XP, Dove, mv78xx0, Kirkwood, Orion5x)
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: one of:
+	- "marvell,orion-system-controller"
+	- "marvell,armada-370-xp-system-controller"
+- reg: Should contain system controller registers location and length.
+
+Example:
+
+	system-controller@d0018200 {
+		compatible = "marvell,armada-370-xp-system-controller";
+		reg = <0xd0018200 0x500>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/nspire.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/nspire.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4d08518bd176
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/nspire.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+TI-NSPIRE calculators
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Compatible property value should contain "ti,nspire".
+	CX models should have "ti,nspire-cx"
+	Touchpad models should have "ti,nspire-tp"
+	Clickpad models should have "ti,nspire-clp"
+
+Example:
+
+/ {
+	model = "TI-NSPIRE CX";
+	compatible = "ti,nspire-cx";
+	...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/olimex.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/olimex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..007fb5c685a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/olimex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+Olimex i.MX Platforms Device Tree Bindings
+------------------------------------------
+
+i.MX23 Olinuxino Low Cost Board
+Required root node properties:
+    - compatible = "olimex,imx23-olinuxino", "fsl,imx23";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/counter.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/counter.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5bd8aa091315
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/counter.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+OMAP Counter-32K bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:	Must be "ti,omap-counter32k" for OMAP controllers
+- reg:		Contains timer register address range (base address and length)
+- ti,hwmods:	Name of the hwmod associated to the counter, which is typically
+		"counter_32k"
+
+Example:
+
+counter32k: counter@4a304000 {
+	compatible = "ti,omap-counter32k";
+	reg = <0x4a304000 0x20>;
+	ti,hwmods = "counter_32k";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/intc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f2583e6ec060
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/intc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+* OMAP Interrupt Controller
+
+OMAP2/3 are using a TI interrupt controller that can support several
+configurable number of interrupts.
+
+Main node required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be:
+	"ti,omap2-intc"
+- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller
+- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+  interrupt source. The type shall be a <u32> and the value shall be 1.
+
+  The cell contains the interrupt number in the range [0-128].
+- ti,intc-size: Number of interrupts handled by the interrupt controller.
+- reg: physical base address and size of the intc registers map.
+
+Example:
+
+	intc: interrupt-controller@1 {
+		compatible = "ti,omap2-intc";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		ti,intc-size = <96>;
+		reg = <0x48200000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt
index 6888a5efc860..c0105de55cbd 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt
@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ provided by Arteris.
 Required properties:
 - compatible : Should be "ti,omap3-l3-smx" for OMAP3 family
                Should be "ti,omap4-l3-noc" for OMAP4 family
+- reg:	Contains L3 register address range for each noc domain.
 - ti,hwmods: "l3_main_1", ... One hwmod for each noc domain.
 
 Examples:
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt
index e78e8bccac30..91b7049affa1 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt
@@ -36,14 +36,29 @@ Boards:
 - OMAP3 BeagleBoard : Low cost community board
   compatible = "ti,omap3-beagle", "ti,omap3"
 
-- OMAP4 SDP : Software Developement Board
+- OMAP3 Tobi with Overo : Commercial expansion board with daughter board
+  compatible = "ti,omap3-tobi", "ti,omap3-overo", "ti,omap3"
+
+- OMAP4 SDP : Software Development Board
   compatible = "ti,omap4-sdp", "ti,omap4430"
 
 - OMAP4 PandaBoard : Low cost community board
   compatible = "ti,omap4-panda", "ti,omap4430"
 
-- OMAP3 EVM : Software Developement Board for OMAP35x, AM/DM37x
+- OMAP3 EVM : Software Development Board for OMAP35x, AM/DM37x
   compatible = "ti,omap3-evm", "ti,omap3"
 
-- AM335X EVM : Software Developement Board for AM335x
+- AM335X EVM : Software Development Board for AM335x
   compatible = "ti,am335x-evm", "ti,am33xx", "ti,omap3"
+
+- AM335X Bone : Low cost community board
+  compatible = "ti,am335x-bone", "ti,am33xx", "ti,omap3"
+
+- OMAP5 EVM : Evaluation Module
+  compatible = "ti,omap5-evm", "ti,omap5"
+
+- AM43x EPOS EVM
+  compatible = "ti,am43x-epos-evm", "ti,am4372", "ti,am43"
+
+- DRA7 EVM:  Software Developement Board for DRA7XX
+  compatible = "ti,dra7-evm", "ti,dra7"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d02e27c764ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+OMAP Timer bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:		Should be set to one of the below. Please note that
+			OMAP44xx devices have timer instances that are 100%
+			register compatible with OMAP3xxx devices as well as
+			newer timers that are not 100% register compatible.
+			So for OMAP44xx devices timer instances may use
+			different compatible strings.
+
+			ti,omap2420-timer (applicable to OMAP24xx devices)
+			ti,omap3430-timer (applicable to OMAP3xxx/44xx devices)
+			ti,omap4430-timer (applicable to OMAP44xx devices)
+			ti,omap5430-timer (applicable to OMAP543x devices)
+			ti,am335x-timer	(applicable to AM335x devices)
+			ti,am335x-timer-1ms (applicable to AM335x devices)
+
+- reg:			Contains timer register address range (base address and
+			length).
+- interrupts: 		Contains the interrupt information for the timer. The
+			format is being dependent on which interrupt controller
+			the OMAP device uses.
+- ti,hwmods:		Name of the hwmod associated to the timer, "timer<X>",
+			where <X> is the instance number of the timer from the
+			HW spec.
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,timer-alwon:	Indicates the timer is in an alway-on power domain.
+- ti,timer-dsp:		Indicates the timer can interrupt the on-chip DSP in
+			addition to the ARM CPU.
+- ti,timer-pwm: 	Indicates the timer can generate a PWM output.
+- ti,timer-secure: 	Indicates the timer is reserved on a secure OMAP device
+			and therefore cannot be used by the kernel.
+
+Example:
+
+timer12: timer@48304000 {
+	compatible = "ti,omap3430-timer";
+	reg = <0x48304000 0x400>;
+	interrupts = <95>;
+	ti,hwmods = "timer12"
+	ti,timer-alwon;
+	ti,timer-secure;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt
index 1c044eb320cc..343781b9f246 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt
@@ -7,8 +7,12 @@ representation in the device tree should be done as under:-
 Required properties:
 
 - compatible : should be one of
+	"arm,cortex-a15-pmu"
 	"arm,cortex-a9-pmu"
 	"arm,cortex-a8-pmu"
+	"arm,cortex-a7-pmu"
+	"arm,cortex-a5-pmu"
+	"arm,arm11mpcore-pmu"
 	"arm,arm1176-pmu"
 	"arm,arm1136-pmu"
 - interrupts : 1 combined interrupt or 1 per core.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/primecell.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/primecell.txt
index 951ca46789d4..0df6acacfaea 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/primecell.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/primecell.txt
@@ -13,11 +13,34 @@ Required properties:
 Optional properties:
 
 - arm,primecell-periphid : Value to override the h/w value with
+- clocks : From common clock binding. First clock is phandle to clock for apb
+	pclk. Additional clocks are optional and specific to those peripherals.
+- clock-names : From common clock binding. Shall be "apb_pclk" for first clock.
+- dmas : From common DMA binding. If present, refers to one or more dma channels.
+- dma-names : From common DMA binding, needs to match the 'dmas' property.
+              Devices with exactly one receive and transmit channel shall name
+              these "rx" and "tx", respectively.
+- pinctrl-<n> : Pinctrl states as described in bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt
+- pinctrl-names : Names corresponding to the numbered pinctrl states
+- interrupts : one or more interrupt specifiers
+- interrupt-names : names corresponding to the interrupts properties
 
 Example:
 
 serial@fff36000 {
 	compatible = "arm,pl011", "arm,primecell";
 	arm,primecell-periphid = <0x00341011>;
+
+	clocks = <&pclk>;
+	clock-names = "apb_pclk";
+
+	dmas = <&dma-controller 4>, <&dma-controller 5>;
+	dma-names = "rx", "tx";	
+
+	pinctrl-0 = <&uart0_default_mux>, <&uart0_default_mode>;
+	pinctrl-1 = <&uart0_sleep_mode>;
+	pinctrl-names = "default","sleep";
+
+	interrupts = <0 11 0x4>;
 };
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/psci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/psci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..433afe9cb590
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/psci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+* Power State Coordination Interface (PSCI)
+
+Firmware implementing the PSCI functions described in ARM document number
+ARM DEN 0022A ("Power State Coordination Interface System Software on ARM
+processors") can be used by Linux to initiate various CPU-centric power
+operations.
+
+Issue A of the specification describes functions for CPU suspend, hotplug
+and migration of secure software.
+
+Functions are invoked by trapping to the privilege level of the PSCI
+firmware (specified as part of the binding below) and passing arguments
+in a manner similar to that specified by AAPCS:
+
+	 r0		=> 32-bit Function ID / return value
+	{r1 - r3}	=> Parameters
+
+Note that the immediate field of the trapping instruction must be set
+to #0.
+
+
+Main node required properties:
+
+ - compatible    : Must be "arm,psci"
+
+ - method        : The method of calling the PSCI firmware. Permitted
+                   values are:
+
+                   "smc" : SMC #0, with the register assignments specified
+		           in this binding.
+
+                   "hvc" : HVC #0, with the register assignments specified
+		           in this binding.
+
+Main node optional properties:
+
+ - cpu_suspend   : Function ID for CPU_SUSPEND operation
+
+ - cpu_off       : Function ID for CPU_OFF operation
+
+ - cpu_on        : Function ID for CPU_ON operation
+
+ - migrate       : Function ID for MIGRATE operation
+
+
+Example:
+
+	psci {
+		compatible	= "arm,psci";
+		method		= "smc";
+		cpu_suspend	= <0x95c10000>;
+		cpu_off		= <0x95c10001>;
+		cpu_on		= <0x95c10002>;
+		migrate		= <0x95c10003>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rtsm-dcscb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rtsm-dcscb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3b8fbf3c00c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rtsm-dcscb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+ARM Dual Cluster System Configuration Block
+-------------------------------------------
+
+The Dual Cluster System Configuration Block (DCSCB) provides basic
+functionality for controlling clocks, resets and configuration pins in
+the Dual Cluster System implemented by the Real-Time System Model (RTSM).
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "arm,rtsm,dcscb"
+
+- reg : physical base address and the size of the registers window
+
+Example:
+
+	dcscb@60000000 {
+		compatible = "arm,rtsm,dcscb";
+		reg = <0x60000000 0x1000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung-boards.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung-boards.txt
index 0bf68be56fd1..2168ed31e1b0 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung-boards.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung-boards.txt
@@ -6,3 +6,13 @@ Required root node properties:
     - compatible = should be one or more of the following.
         (a) "samsung,smdkv310" - for Samsung's SMDKV310 eval board.
         (b) "samsung,exynos4210"  - for boards based on Exynos4210 SoC.
+
+Optional:
+    - firmware node, specifying presence and type of secure firmware:
+        - compatible: only "samsung,secure-firmware" is currently supported
+        - reg: address of non-secure SYSRAM used for communication with firmware
+
+	firmware@0203F000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,secure-firmware";
+		reg = <0x0203F000 0x1000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/exynos-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/exynos-adc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..47ada1dff216
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/exynos-adc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+Samsung Exynos Analog to Digital Converter bindings
+
+The devicetree bindings are for the new ADC driver written for
+Exynos4 and upward SoCs from Samsung.
+
+New driver handles the following
+1. Supports ADC IF found on EXYNOS4412/EXYNOS5250
+   and future SoCs from Samsung
+2. Add ADC driver under iio/adc framework
+3. Also adds the Documentation for device tree bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:		Must be "samsung,exynos-adc-v1"
+				for exynos4412/5250 controllers.
+			Must be "samsung,exynos-adc-v2" for
+				future controllers.
+- reg:			Contains ADC register address range (base address and
+			length) and the address of the phy enable register.
+- interrupts: 		Contains the interrupt information for the timer. The
+			format is being dependent on which interrupt controller
+			the Samsung device uses.
+- #io-channel-cells = <1>; As ADC has multiple outputs
+- clocks		From common clock binding: handle to adc clock.
+- clock-names		From common clock binding: Shall be "adc".
+- vdd-supply		VDD input supply.
+
+Note: child nodes can be added for auto probing from device tree.
+
+Example: adding device info in dtsi file
+
+adc: adc@12D10000 {
+	compatible = "samsung,exynos-adc-v1";
+	reg = <0x12D10000 0x100>, <0x10040718 0x4>;
+	interrupts = <0 106 0>;
+	#io-channel-cells = <1>;
+	io-channel-ranges;
+
+	clocks = <&clock 303>;
+	clock-names = "adc";
+
+	vdd-supply = <&buck5_reg>;
+};
+
+
+Example: Adding child nodes in dts file
+
+adc@12D10000 {
+
+	/* NTC thermistor is a hwmon device */
+	ncp15wb473@0 {
+		compatible = "ntc,ncp15wb473";
+		pullup-uV = <1800000>;
+		pullup-ohm = <47000>;
+		pulldown-ohm = <0>;
+		io-channels = <&adc 4>;
+	};
+};
+
+Note: Does not apply to ADC driver under arch/arm/plat-samsung/
+Note: The child node can be added under the adc node or separately.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/interrupt-combiner.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/interrupt-combiner.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9e5f73412cd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/interrupt-combiner.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+* Samsung Exynos Interrupt Combiner Controller
+
+Samsung's Exynos4 architecture includes a interrupt combiner controller which
+can combine interrupt sources as a group and provide a single interrupt request
+for the group. The interrupt request from each group are connected to a parent
+interrupt controller, such as GIC in case of Exynos4210.
+
+The interrupt combiner controller consists of multiple combiners. Up to eight
+interrupt sources can be connected to a combiner. The combiner outputs one
+combined interrupt for its eight interrupt sources. The combined interrupt
+is usually connected to a parent interrupt controller.
+
+A single node in the device tree is used to describe the interrupt combiner
+controller module (which includes multiple combiners). A combiner in the
+interrupt controller module shares config/control registers with other
+combiners. For example, a 32-bit interrupt enable/disable config register
+can accommodate up to 4 interrupt combiners (with each combiner supporting
+up to 8 interrupt sources).
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "samsung,exynos4210-combiner".
+- interrupt-controller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller.
+- #interrupt-cells: should be <2>. The meaning of the cells are
+	* First Cell: Combiner Group Number.
+	* Second Cell: Interrupt number within the group.
+- reg: Base address and size of interrupt combiner registers.
+- interrupts: The list of interrupts generated by the combiners which are then
+    connected to a parent interrupt controller. The format of the interrupt
+    specifier depends in the interrupt parent controller.
+
+Optional properties:
+- samsung,combiner-nr: The number of interrupt combiners supported. If this
+  property is not specified, the default number of combiners is assumed
+  to be 16.
+- interrupt-parent: pHandle of the parent interrupt controller, if not
+  inherited from the parent node.
+
+
+Example:
+
+	The following is a an example from the Exynos4210 SoC dtsi file.
+
+	combiner:interrupt-controller@10440000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-combiner";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+		reg = <0x10440000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 0 0>, <0 1 0>, <0 2 0>, <0 3 0>,
+			     <0 4 0>, <0 5 0>, <0 6 0>, <0 7 0>,
+			     <0 8 0>, <0 9 0>, <0 10 0>, <0 11 0>,
+			     <0 12 0>, <0 13 0>, <0 14 0>, <0 15 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/sysreg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/sysreg.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5039c0a12f55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/sysreg.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+SAMSUNG S5P/Exynos SoC series System Registers (SYSREG)
+
+Properties:
+ - name : should be 'sysreg';
+ - compatible : should contain "samsung,<chip name>-sysreg", "syscon";
+   For Exynos4 SoC series it should be "samsung,exynos4-sysreg", "syscon";
+ - reg : offset and length of the register set.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sirf.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sirf.txt
index 1881e1c6dda5..c6ba6d3c747f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sirf.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sirf.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,9 @@
-prima2 "cb" evaluation board
+CSR SiRFprimaII and SiRFmarco device tree bindings.
+========================================
+
 Required root node properties:
-    - compatible = "sirf,prima2-cb", "sirf,prima2";
+    - compatible:
+    - "sirf,prima2-cb" : prima2 "cb" evaluation board
+    - "sirf,marco-cb" : marco "cb" evaluation board
+    - "sirf,prima2" : prima2 device based board
+    - "sirf,marco" : marco device based board
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/spear-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/spear-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c0017221cf55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/spear-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+* SPEAr ARM Timer
+
+** Timer node required properties:
+
+- compatible : Should be:
+	"st,spear-timer"
+- reg: Address range of the timer registers
+- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller
+  that services interrupts for this device
+- interrupt: Should contain the timer interrupt number
+
+Example:
+
+	timer@f0000000 {
+		compatible = "st,spear-timer";
+		reg = <0xf0000000 0x400>;
+		interrupts = <2>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/spear.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/spear.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0d42949df6c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/spear.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+ST SPEAr Platforms Device Tree Bindings
+---------------------------------------
+
+Boards with the ST SPEAr600 SoC shall have the following properties:
+Required root node property:
+compatible = "st,spear600";
+
+Boards with the ST SPEAr300 SoC shall have the following properties:
+Required root node property:
+compatible = "st,spear300";
+
+Boards with the ST SPEAr310 SoC shall have the following properties:
+Required root node property:
+compatible = "st,spear310";
+
+Boards with the ST SPEAr320 SoC shall have the following properties:
+Required root node property:
+compatible = "st,spear320";
+
+Boards with the ST SPEAr1310 SoC shall have the following properties:
+Required root node property:
+compatible = "st,spear1310";
+
+Boards with the ST SPEAr1340 SoC shall have the following properties:
+Required root node property:
+compatible = "st,spear1340";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/spear/shirq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/spear/shirq.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..715a013ed4bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/spear/shirq.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+* SPEAr Shared IRQ layer (shirq)
+
+SPEAr3xx architecture includes shared/multiplexed irqs for certain set
+of devices. The multiplexor provides a single interrupt to parent
+interrupt controller (VIC) on behalf of a group of devices.
+
+There can be multiple groups available on SPEAr3xx variants but not
+exceeding 4. The number of devices in a group can differ, further they
+may share same set of status/mask registers spanning across different
+bit masks. Also in some cases the group may not have enable or other
+registers. This makes software little complex.
+
+A single node in the device tree is used to describe the shared
+interrupt multiplexor (one node for all groups). A group in the
+interrupt controller shares config/control registers with other groups.
+For example, a 32-bit interrupt enable/disable config register can
+accommodate up to 4 interrupt groups.
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: should be, either of
+     - "st,spear300-shirq"
+     - "st,spear310-shirq"
+     - "st,spear320-shirq"
+  - interrupt-controller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller.
+  - #interrupt-cells: should be <1> which basically contains the offset
+    (starting from 0) of interrupts for all the groups.
+  - reg: Base address and size of shirq registers.
+  - interrupts: The list of interrupts generated by the groups which are
+    then connected to a parent interrupt controller. Each group is
+    associated with one of the interrupts, hence number of interrupts (to
+    parent) is equal to number of groups. The format of the interrupt
+    specifier depends in the interrupt parent controller.
+
+  Optional properties:
+  - interrupt-parent: pHandle of the parent interrupt controller, if not
+    inherited from the parent node.
+
+Example:
+
+The following is an example from the SPEAr320 SoC dtsi file.
+
+shirq: interrupt-controller@0xb3000000 {
+	compatible = "st,spear320-shirq";
+	reg = <0xb3000000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <28 29 30 1>;
+	#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+	interrupt-controller;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ste-nomadik.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ste-nomadik.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6256ec31666d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ste-nomadik.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+ST-Ericsson Nomadik Device Tree Bindings
+
+For various board the "board" node may contain specific properties
+that pertain to this particular board, such as board-specific GPIOs.
+
+Required root node property: src
+- Nomadik System and reset controller used for basic chip control, clock
+  and reset line control.
+- compatible: must be "stericsson,nomadik,src"
+
+Boards with the Nomadik SoC include:
+
+S8815 "MiniKit" manufactured by Calao Systems:
+
+Required root node property:
+
+compatible="calaosystems,usb-s8815";
+
+Required node: usb-s8815
+
+Example:
+
+usb-s8815 {
+		ethernet-gpio {
+			gpios = <&gpio3 19 0x1>;
+			interrupts = <19 0x1>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&gpio3>;
+		};
+		mmcsd-gpio {
+			gpios = <&gpio3 16 0x1>;
+		};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ste-u300.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ste-u300.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d11d80006a19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ste-u300.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+ST-Ericsson U300 Device Tree Bindings
+
+For various board the "board" node may contain specific properties
+that pertain to this particular board, such as board-specific GPIOs
+or board power regulator supplies.
+
+Required root node property:
+
+compatible="stericsson,u300";
+
+Required node: syscon
+This contains the system controller.
+- compatible: must be "stericsson,u300-syscon".
+- reg: the base address and size of the system controller.
+
+Boards with the U300 SoC include:
+
+S365 "Small Board U365":
+
+Required node: s365
+This contains the board-specific information.
+- compatible: must be "stericsson,s365".
+- vana15-supply: the regulator supplying the 1.5V to drive the
+  board.
+- syscon: a pointer to the syscon node so we can access the
+  syscon registers to set the board as self-powered.
+
+Example:
+
+/ {
+	model = "ST-Ericsson U300";
+	compatible = "stericsson,u300";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+
+	s365 {
+		compatible = "stericsson,s365";
+		vana15-supply = <&ab3100_ldo_d_reg>;
+		syscon = <&syscon>;
+	};
+
+	syscon: syscon@c0011000 {
+		compatible = "stericsson,u300-syscon";
+		reg = <0xc0011000 0x1000>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra.txt
index 6e69d2e5e766..ed9c85334436 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra.txt
@@ -1,14 +1,34 @@
 NVIDIA Tegra device tree bindings
 -------------------------------------------
 
-Boards with the tegra20 SoC shall have the following properties:
+SoCs
+-------------------------------------------
 
-Required root node property:
+Each device tree must specify which Tegra SoC it uses, using one of the
+following compatible values:
 
-compatible = "nvidia,tegra20";
+  nvidia,tegra20
+  nvidia,tegra30
 
-Boards with the tegra30 SoC shall have the following properties:
+Boards
+-------------------------------------------
 
-Required root node property:
+Each device tree must specify which one or more of the following
+board-specific compatible values:
 
-compatible = "nvidia,tegra30";
+  ad,medcom-wide
+  ad,plutux
+  ad,tamonten
+  ad,tec
+  compal,paz00
+  compulab,trimslice
+  nvidia,beaver
+  nvidia,cardhu
+  nvidia,cardhu-a02
+  nvidia,cardhu-a04
+  nvidia,harmony
+  nvidia,seaboard
+  nvidia,ventana
+  nvidia,whistler
+  toradex,colibri_t20-512
+  toradex,iris
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-ahb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-ahb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..234406d41c12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-ahb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra AHB
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra20-ahb" or "nvidia,tegra30-ahb"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+
+Example:
+	ahb: ahb@6000c004 {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-ahb";
+		reg = <0x6000c004 0x10c>; /* AHB Arbitration + Gizmo Controller */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-emc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-emc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4c33b29dc660
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-emc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+Embedded Memory Controller
+
+Properties:
+- name : Should be emc
+- #address-cells : Should be 1
+- #size-cells : Should be 0
+- compatible : Should contain "nvidia,tegra20-emc".
+- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
+- nvidia,use-ram-code : If present, the sub-nodes will be addressed
+  and chosen using the ramcode board selector. If omitted, only one
+  set of tables can be present and said tables will be used
+  irrespective of ram-code configuration.
+
+Child device nodes describe the memory settings for different configurations and clock rates.
+
+Example:
+
+	memory-controller@7000f400 {
+		#address-cells = < 1 >;
+		#size-cells = < 0 >;
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-emc";
+		reg = <0x7000f4000 0x200>;
+	}
+
+
+Embedded Memory Controller ram-code table
+
+If the emc node has the nvidia,use-ram-code property present, then the
+next level of nodes below the emc table are used to specify which settings
+apply for which ram-code settings.
+
+If the emc node lacks the nvidia,use-ram-code property, this level is omitted
+and the tables are stored directly under the emc node (see below).
+
+Properties:
+
+- name : Should be emc-tables
+- nvidia,ram-code : the binary representation of the ram-code board strappings
+  for which this node (and children) are valid.
+
+
+
+Embedded Memory Controller configuration table
+
+This is a table containing the EMC register settings for the various
+operating speeds of the memory controller. They are always located as
+subnodes of the emc controller node.
+
+There are two ways of specifying which tables to use:
+
+* The simplest is if there is just one set of tables in the device tree,
+  and they will always be used (based on which frequency is used).
+  This is the preferred method, especially when firmware can fill in
+  this information based on the specific system information and just
+  pass it on to the kernel.
+
+* The slightly more complex one is when more than one memory configuration
+  might exist on the system.  The Tegra20 platform handles this during
+  early boot by selecting one out of possible 4 memory settings based
+  on a 2-pin "ram code" bootstrap setting on the board. The values of
+  these strappings can be read through a register in the SoC, and thus
+  used to select which tables to use.
+
+Properties:
+- name : Should be emc-table
+- compatible : Should contain "nvidia,tegra20-emc-table".
+- reg : either an opaque enumerator to tell different tables apart, or
+  the valid frequency for which the table should be used (in kHz).
+- clock-frequency : the clock frequency for the EMC at which this
+  table should be used (in kHz).
+- nvidia,emc-registers : a 46 word array of EMC registers to be programmed
+  for operation at the 'clock-frequency' setting.
+  The order and contents of the registers are:
+    RC, RFC, RAS, RP, R2W, W2R, R2P, W2P, RD_RCD, WR_RCD, RRD, REXT,
+    WDV, QUSE, QRST, QSAFE, RDV, REFRESH, BURST_REFRESH_NUM, PDEX2WR,
+    PDEX2RD, PCHG2PDEN, ACT2PDEN, AR2PDEN, RW2PDEN, TXSR, TCKE, TFAW,
+    TRPAB, TCLKSTABLE, TCLKSTOP, TREFBW, QUSE_EXTRA, FBIO_CFG6, ODT_WRITE,
+    ODT_READ, FBIO_CFG5, CFG_DIG_DLL, DLL_XFORM_DQS, DLL_XFORM_QUSE,
+    ZCAL_REF_CNT, ZCAL_WAIT_CNT, AUTO_CAL_INTERVAL, CFG_CLKTRIM_0,
+    CFG_CLKTRIM_1, CFG_CLKTRIM_2
+
+		emc-table@166000 {
+			reg = <166000>;
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-emc-table";
+			clock-frequency = < 166000 >;
+			nvidia,emc-registers = < 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+						 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+						 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+						 0 0 0 0 >;
+		};
+
+		emc-table@333000 {
+			reg = <333000>;
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-emc-table";
+			clock-frequency = < 333000 >;
+			nvidia,emc-registers = < 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+						 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+						 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+						 0 0 0 0 >;
+		};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-mc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-mc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..866d93421eba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-mc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra20 MC(Memory Controller)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra20-mc"
+- reg : Should contain 2 register ranges(address and length); see the
+  example below. Note that the MC registers are interleaved with the
+  GART registers, and hence must be represented as multiple ranges.
+- interrupts : Should contain MC General interrupt.
+
+Example:
+	memory-controller@0x7000f000 {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-mc";
+		reg = <0x7000f000 0x024
+		       0x7000f03c 0x3c4>;
+		interrupts = <0 77 0x04>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-pmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-pmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1608a54e90e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra20-pmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra Power Management Controller (PMC)
+
+The PMC block interacts with an external Power Management Unit. The PMC
+mostly controls the entry and exit of the system from different sleep
+modes. It provides power-gating controllers for SoC and CPU power-islands.
+
+Required properties:
+- name : Should be pmc
+- compatible : Should contain "nvidia,tegra<chip>-pmc".
+- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
+- clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+- clock-names : Must include the following entries:
+  "pclk" (The Tegra clock of that name),
+  "clk32k_in" (The 32KHz clock input to Tegra).
+
+Optional properties:
+- nvidia,invert-interrupt : If present, inverts the PMU interrupt signal.
+  The PMU is an external Power Management Unit, whose interrupt output
+  signal is fed into the PMC. This signal is optionally inverted, and then
+  fed into the ARM GIC. The PMC is not involved in the detection or
+  handling of this interrupt signal, merely its inversion.
+- nvidia,suspend-mode : The suspend mode that the platform should use.
+  Valid values are 0, 1 and 2:
+  0 (LP0): CPU + Core voltage off and DRAM in self-refresh
+  1 (LP1): CPU voltage off and DRAM in self-refresh
+  2 (LP2): CPU voltage off
+- nvidia,core-power-req-active-high : Boolean, core power request active-high
+- nvidia,sys-clock-req-active-high : Boolean, system clock request active-high
+- nvidia,combined-power-req : Boolean, combined power request for CPU & Core
+- nvidia,cpu-pwr-good-en : Boolean, CPU power good signal (from PMIC to PMC)
+			   is enabled.
+
+Required properties when nvidia,suspend-mode is specified:
+- nvidia,cpu-pwr-good-time : CPU power good time in uS.
+- nvidia,cpu-pwr-off-time : CPU power off time in uS.
+- nvidia,core-pwr-good-time : <Oscillator-stable-time Power-stable-time>
+			      Core power good time in uS.
+- nvidia,core-pwr-off-time : Core power off time in uS.
+
+Required properties when nvidia,suspend-mode=<0>:
+- nvidia,lp0-vec : <start length> Starting address and length of LP0 vector
+  The LP0 vector contains the warm boot code that is executed by AVP when
+  resuming from the LP0 state. The AVP (Audio-Video Processor) is an ARM7
+  processor and always being the first boot processor when chip is power on
+  or resume from deep sleep mode. When the system is resumed from the deep
+  sleep mode, the warm boot code will restore some PLLs, clocks and then
+  bring up CPU0 for resuming the system.
+
+Example:
+
+/ SoC dts including file
+pmc@7000f400 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-pmc";
+	reg = <0x7000e400 0x400>;
+	clocks = <&tegra_car 110>, <&clk32k_in>;
+	clock-names = "pclk", "clk32k_in";
+	nvidia,invert-interrupt;
+	nvidia,suspend-mode = <1>;
+	nvidia,cpu-pwr-good-time = <2000>;
+	nvidia,cpu-pwr-off-time = <100>;
+	nvidia,core-pwr-good-time = <3845 3845>;
+	nvidia,core-pwr-off-time = <458>;
+	nvidia,core-power-req-active-high;
+	nvidia,sys-clock-req-active-high;
+	nvidia,lp0-vec = <0xbdffd000 0x2000>;
+};
+
+/ Tegra board dts file
+{
+	...
+	clocks {
+		compatible = "simple-bus";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		clk32k_in: clock {
+			compatible = "fixed-clock";
+			reg=<0>;
+			#clock-cells = <0>;
+			clock-frequency = <32768>;
+		};
+	};
+	...
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra30-mc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra30-mc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bdf1a612422b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/tegra/nvidia,tegra30-mc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra30 MC(Memory Controller)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra30-mc"
+- reg : Should contain 4 register ranges(address and length); see the
+  example below. Note that the MC registers are interleaved with the
+  SMMU registers, and hence must be represented as multiple ranges.
+- interrupts : Should contain MC General interrupt.
+
+Example:
+	memory-controller {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra30-mc";
+		reg = <0x7000f000 0x010
+		       0x7000f03c 0x1b4
+		       0x7000f200 0x028
+		       0x7000f284 0x17c>;
+		interrupts = <0 77 0x04>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/twd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/twd.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..75b8610939fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/twd.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+* ARM Timer Watchdog
+
+ARM 11MP, Cortex-A5 and Cortex-A9 are often associated with a per-core
+Timer-Watchdog (aka TWD), which provides both a per-cpu local timer
+and watchdog.
+
+The TWD is usually attached to a GIC to deliver its two per-processor
+interrupts.
+
+** Timer node required properties:
+
+- compatible : Should be one of:
+	"arm,cortex-a9-twd-timer"
+	"arm,cortex-a5-twd-timer"
+	"arm,arm11mp-twd-timer"
+
+- interrupts : One interrupt to each core
+
+- reg : Specify the base address and the size of the TWD timer
+	register window.
+
+Example:
+
+	twd-timer@2c000600 {
+		compatible = "arm,arm11mp-twd-timer"";
+		reg = <0x2c000600 0x20>;
+		interrupts = <1 13 0xf01>;
+	};
+
+** Watchdog node properties:
+
+- compatible : Should be one of:
+	"arm,cortex-a9-twd-wdt"
+	"arm,cortex-a5-twd-wdt"
+	"arm,arm11mp-twd-wdt"
+
+- interrupts : One interrupt to each core
+
+- reg : Specify the base address and the size of the TWD watchdog
+	register window.
+
+Example:
+
+	twd-watchdog@2c000620 {
+		compatible = "arm,arm11mp-twd-wdt";
+		reg = <0x2c000620 0x20>;
+		interrupts = <1 14 0xf01>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/versatile-fpga-irq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/versatile-fpga-irq.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9989eda755d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/versatile-fpga-irq.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+* ARM Versatile FPGA interrupt controller
+
+One or more FPGA IRQ controllers can be synthesized in an ARM reference board
+such as the Integrator or Versatile family. The output of these different
+controllers are OR:ed together and fed to the CPU tile's IRQ input. Each
+instance can handle up to 32 interrupts.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "arm,versatile-fpga-irq"
+- interrupt-controller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller
+- #interrupt-cells: The number of cells to define the interrupts.  Must be 1
+  as the FPGA IRQ controller has no configuration options for interrupt
+  sources.  The cell is a u32 and defines the interrupt number.
+- reg: The register bank for the FPGA interrupt controller.
+- clear-mask: a u32 number representing the mask written to clear all IRQs
+  on the controller at boot for example.
+- valid-mask: a u32 number representing a bit mask determining which of
+  the interrupts are valid. Unconnected/unused lines are set to 0, and
+  the system till not make it possible for devices to request these
+  interrupts.
+
+Example:
+
+pic: pic@14000000 {
+        compatible = "arm,versatile-fpga-irq";
+        #interrupt-cells = <1>;
+        interrupt-controller;
+        reg = <0x14000000 0x100>;
+        clear-mask = <0xffffffff>;
+        valid-mask = <0x003fffff>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-scc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-scc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ae5043e42e5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-scc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+ARM Versatile Express Serial Configuration Controller
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Test chips for ARM Versatile Express platform implement SCC (Serial
+Configuration Controller) interface, used to set initial conditions
+for the test chip.
+
+In some cases its registers are also mapped in normal address space
+and can be used to obtain runtime information about the chip internals
+(like silicon temperature sensors) and as interface to other subsystems
+like platform configuration control and power management.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible value: "arm,vexpress-scc,<model>", "arm,vexpress-scc";
+		    where <model> is the full tile model name (as used
+		    in the tile's Technical Reference Manual),
+		    eg. for Coretile Express A15x2 A7x3 (V2P-CA15_A7):
+	compatible = "arm,vexpress-scc,v2p-ca15_a7", "arm,vexpress-scc";
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- reg: when the SCC is memory mapped, physical address and size of the
+       registers window
+- interrupts: when the SCC can generate a system-level interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+	scc@7fff0000 {
+		compatible = "arm,vexpress-scc,v2p-ca15_a7", "arm,vexpress-scc";
+		reg = <0 0x7fff0000 0 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 95 4>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-sysreg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-sysreg.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5580e9c4bd85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-sysreg.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+ARM Versatile Express system registers
+--------------------------------------
+
+This is a system control registers block, providing multiple low level
+platform functions like board detection and identification, software
+interrupt generation, MMC and NOR Flash control etc.
+
+Required node properties:
+- compatible value : = "arm,vexpress,sysreg";
+- reg : physical base address and the size of the registers window
+- gpio-controller : specifies that the node is a GPIO controller
+- #gpio-cells : size of the GPIO specifier, should be 2:
+  - first cell is the pseudo-GPIO line number:
+    0 - MMC CARDIN
+    1 - MMC WPROT
+    2 - NOR FLASH WPn
+  - second cell can take standard GPIO flags (currently ignored).
+
+Example:
+	v2m_sysreg: sysreg@10000000 {
+ 		compatible = "arm,vexpress-sysreg";
+ 		reg = <0x10000000 0x1000>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+ 	};
+
+This block also can also act a bridge to the platform's configuration
+bus via "system control" interface, addressing devices with site number,
+position in the board stack, config controller, function and device
+numbers - see motherboard's TRM for more details.
+
+The node describing a config device must refer to the sysreg node via
+"arm,vexpress,config-bridge" phandle (can be also defined in the node's
+parent) and relies on the board topology properties - see main vexpress
+node documentation for more details. It must also define the following
+property:
+- arm,vexpress-sysreg,func : must contain two cells:
+  - first cell defines function number (eg. 1 for clock generator,
+    2 for voltage regulators etc.)
+  - device number (eg. osc 0, osc 1 etc.)
+
+Example:
+	mcc {
+		arm,vexpress,config-bridge = <&v2m_sysreg>;
+
+		osc@0 {
+			compatible = "arm,vexpress-osc";
+			arm,vexpress-sysreg,func = <1 0>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ae49161e478a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
+ARM Versatile Express boards family
+-----------------------------------
+
+ARM's Versatile Express platform consists of a motherboard and one
+or more daughterboards (tiles). The motherboard provides a set of
+peripherals. Processor and RAM "live" on the tiles.
+
+The motherboard and each core tile should be described by a separate
+Device Tree source file, with the tile's description including
+the motherboard file using a /include/ directive. As the motherboard
+can be initialized in one of two different configurations ("memory
+maps"), care must be taken to include the correct one.
+
+
+Root node
+---------
+
+Required properties in the root node:
+- compatible value:
+	compatible = "arm,vexpress,<model>", "arm,vexpress";
+  where <model> is the full tile model name (as used in the tile's
+    Technical Reference Manual), eg.:
+    - for Coretile Express A5x2 (V2P-CA5s):
+	compatible = "arm,vexpress,v2p-ca5s", "arm,vexpress";
+    - for Coretile Express A9x4 (V2P-CA9):
+	compatible = "arm,vexpress,v2p-ca9", "arm,vexpress";
+  If a tile comes in several variants or can be used in more then one
+  configuration, the compatible value should be:
+	compatible = "arm,vexpress,<model>,<variant>", \
+				"arm,vexpress,<model>", "arm,vexpress";
+  eg:
+    - Coretile Express A15x2 (V2P-CA15) with Tech Chip 1:
+	compatible = "arm,vexpress,v2p-ca15,tc1", \
+				"arm,vexpress,v2p-ca15", "arm,vexpress";
+    - LogicTile Express 13MG (V2F-2XV6) running Cortex-A7 (3 cores) SMM:
+	compatible = "arm,vexpress,v2f-2xv6,ca7x3", \
+				"arm,vexpress,v2f-2xv6", "arm,vexpress";
+
+Optional properties in the root node:
+- tile model name (use name from the tile's Technical Reference
+  Manual, eg. "V2P-CA5s")
+	model = "<model>";
+- tile's HBI number (unique ARM's board model ID, visible on the
+  PCB's silkscreen) in hexadecimal transcription:
+	arm,hbi = <0xhbi>
+  eg:
+  - for Coretile Express A5x2 (V2P-CA5s) HBI-0191:
+	arm,hbi = <0x191>;
+  - Coretile Express A9x4 (V2P-CA9) HBI-0225:
+	arm,hbi = <0x225>;
+
+
+CPU nodes
+---------
+
+Top-level standard "cpus" node is required. It must contain a node
+with device_type = "cpu" property for every available core, eg.:
+
+	cpus {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		cpu@0 {
+			device_type = "cpu";
+			compatible = "arm,cortex-a5";
+			reg = <0>;
+		};
+	};
+
+
+Configuration infrastructure
+----------------------------
+
+The platform has an elaborated configuration system, consisting of
+microcontrollers residing on the mother- and daughterboards known
+as Motherboard/Daughterboard Configuration Controller (MCC and DCC).
+The controllers are responsible for the platform initialization
+(reset generation, flash programming, FPGA bitfiles loading etc.)
+but also control clock generators, voltage regulators, gather
+environmental data like temperature, power consumption etc. Even
+the video output switch (FPGA) is controlled that way.
+
+Nodes describing devices controlled by this infrastructure should
+point at the bridge device node:
+- bridge phandle:
+	arm,vexpress,config-bridge = <phandle>;
+This property can be also defined in a parent node (eg. for a DCC)
+and is effective for all children.
+
+
+Platform topology
+-----------------
+
+As Versatile Express can be configured in number of physically
+different setups, the device tree should describe platform topology.
+Root node and main motherboard node must define the following
+property, describing physical location of the children nodes:
+- site number:
+	arm,vexpress,site = <number>;
+  where 0 means motherboard, 1 or 2 are daugtherboard sites,
+  0xf means "master" site (site containing main CPU tile)
+- when daughterboards are stacked on one site, their position
+  in the stack be be described with:
+	arm,vexpress,position = <number>;
+- when describing tiles consisting more than one DCC, its number
+  can be described with:
+	arm,vexpress,dcc = <number>;
+
+Any of the numbers above defaults to zero if not defined in
+the node or any of its parent.
+
+
+Motherboard
+-----------
+
+The motherboard description file provides a single "motherboard" node
+using 2 address cells corresponding to the Static Memory Bus used
+between the motherboard and the tile. The first cell defines the Chip
+Select (CS) line number, the second cell address offset within the CS.
+All interrupt lines between the motherboard and the tile are active
+high and are described using single cell.
+
+Optional properties of the "motherboard" node:
+- motherboard's memory map variant:
+	arm,v2m-memory-map = "<name>";
+  where name is one of:
+  - "rs1" - for RS1 map (i.a. peripherals on CS3); this map is also
+            referred to as "ARM Cortex-A Series memory map":
+	arm,v2m-memory-map = "rs1";
+  When this property is missing, the motherboard is using the original
+  memory map (also known as the "Legacy memory map", primarily used
+  with the original CoreTile Express A9x4) with peripherals on CS7.
+
+Motherboard .dtsi files provide a set of labelled peripherals that
+can be used to obtain required phandle in the tile's "aliases" node:
+- UARTs, note that the numbers correspond to the physical connectors
+  on the motherboard's back panel:
+	v2m_serial0, v2m_serial1, v2m_serial2 and v2m_serial3
+- I2C controllers:
+	v2m_i2c_dvi and v2m_i2c_pcie
+- SP804 timers:
+	v2m_timer01 and v2m_timer23
+
+The tile description should define a "smb" node, describing the
+Static Memory Bus between the tile and motherboard. It must define
+the following properties:
+- "simple-bus" compatible value (to ensure creation of the children)
+	compatible = "simple-bus";
+- mapping of the SMB CS/offset addresses into main address space:
+	#address-cells = <2>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	ranges = <...>;
+- interrupts mapping:
+	#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+	interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 63>;
+	interrupt-map = <...>;
+
+
+Example of a VE tile description (simplified)
+---------------------------------------------
+
+/dts-v1/;
+
+/ {
+	model = "V2P-CA5s";
+	arm,hbi = <0x225>;
+	arm,vexpress,site = <0xf>;
+	compatible = "arm,vexpress-v2p-ca5s", "arm,vexpress";
+	interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+
+	chosen { };
+
+	aliases {
+		serial0 = &v2m_serial0;
+	};
+
+	cpus {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		cpu@0 {
+			device_type = "cpu";
+			compatible = "arm,cortex-a5";
+			reg = <0>;
+		};
+	};
+
+	gic: interrupt-controller@2c001000 {
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a9-gic";
+		#interrupt-cells = <3>;
+		#address-cells = <0>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		reg = <0x2c001000 0x1000>,
+		      <0x2c000100 0x100>;
+	};
+
+	dcc {
+		compatible = "simple-bus";
+		arm,vexpress,config-bridge = <&v2m_sysreg>;
+
+		osc@0 {
+			compatible = "arm,vexpress-osc";
+		};
+	};
+
+	smb {
+		compatible = "simple-bus";
+
+		#address-cells = <2>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		/* CS0 is visible at 0x08000000 */
+		ranges = <0 0 0x08000000 0x04000000>;
+
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 63>;
+		/* Active high IRQ 0 is connected to GIC's SPI0 */
+		interrupt-map = <0 0 0 &gic 0 0 4>;
+
+		/include/ "vexpress-v2m-rs1.dtsi"
+	};
+};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vt8500.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vt8500.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..87dc1ddf4770
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vt8500.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+VIA/Wondermedia VT8500 Platforms Device Tree Bindings
+---------------------------------------
+
+Boards with the VIA VT8500 SoC shall have the following properties:
+Required root node property:
+compatible = "via,vt8500";
+
+Boards with the Wondermedia WM8505 SoC shall have the following properties:
+Required root node property:
+compatible = "wm,wm8505";
+
+Boards with the Wondermedia WM8650 SoC shall have the following properties:
+Required root node property:
+compatible = "wm,wm8650";
+
+Boards with the Wondermedia WM8750 SoC shall have the following properties:
+Required root node property:
+compatible = "wm,wm8750";
+
+Boards with the Wondermedia WM8850 SoC shall have the following properties:
+Required root node property:
+compatible = "wm,wm8850";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vt8500/via,vt8500-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vt8500/via,vt8500-intc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0a4ce1051b02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vt8500/via,vt8500-intc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+VIA/Wondermedia VT8500 Interrupt Controller
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "via,vt8500-intc"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+- #interrupt-cells : should be <1>
+
+Example:
+
+	intc: interrupt-controller@d8140000 {
+		compatible = "via,vt8500-intc";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		reg = <0xd8140000 0x10000>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vt8500/via,vt8500-pmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vt8500/via,vt8500-pmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..521b9c7de933
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vt8500/via,vt8500-pmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+VIA/Wondermedia VT8500 Power Management Controller
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "via,vt8500-pmc"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+
+Example:
+
+	pmc@d8130000 {
+		compatible = "via,vt8500-pmc";
+		reg = <0xd8130000 0x1000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vt8500/via,vt8500-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vt8500/via,vt8500-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..901c73f0d8ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vt8500/via,vt8500-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+VIA/Wondermedia VT8500 Timer
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "via,vt8500-timer"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+- interrupts : interrupt for the timer
+
+Example:
+
+	timer@d8130100 {
+		compatible = "via,vt8500-timer";
+		reg = <0xd8130100 0x28>;
+		interrupts = <36>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xen.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xen.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0f7b9c2109f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xen.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+* Xen hypervisor device tree bindings
+
+Xen ARM virtual platforms shall have a top-level "hypervisor" node with
+the following properties:
+
+- compatible:
+	compatible = "xen,xen-<version>", "xen,xen";
+  where <version> is the version of the Xen ABI of the platform.
+
+- reg: specifies the base physical address and size of a region in
+  memory where the grant table should be mapped to, using an
+  HYPERVISOR_memory_op hypercall. The memory region is large enough to map
+  the whole grant table (it is larger or equal to gnttab_max_grant_frames()).
+
+- interrupts: the interrupt used by Xen to inject event notifications.
+  A GIC node is also required.
+
+
+Example (assuming #address-cells = <2> and #size-cells = <2>):
+
+hypervisor {
+	compatible = "xen,xen-4.3", "xen,xen";
+	reg = <0 0xb0000000 0 0x20000>;
+	interrupts = <1 15 0xf08>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-platform.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-platform.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..89de1564950c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-platform.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+* AHCI SATA Controller
+
+SATA nodes are defined to describe on-chip Serial ATA controllers.
+Each SATA controller should have its own node.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible        : compatible list, contains "snps,spear-ahci"
+- interrupts        : <interrupt mapping for SATA IRQ>
+- reg               : <registers mapping>
+
+Optional properties:
+- dma-coherent      : Present if dma operations are coherent
+
+Example:
+        sata@ffe08000 {
+		compatible = "snps,spear-ahci";
+		reg = <0xffe08000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <115>;
+
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/atmel-at91_cf.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/atmel-at91_cf.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c1d22b3ae134
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/atmel-at91_cf.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+Atmel AT91RM9200 CompactFlash
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "atmel,at91rm9200-cf".
+- reg : should specify localbus address and size used.
+- gpios : specifies the gpio pins to control the CF device. Detect
+  and reset gpio's are mandatory while irq and vcc gpio's are
+  optional and may be set to 0 if not present.
+
+Example:
+compact-flash@50000000 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-cf";
+	reg = <0x50000000 0x30000000>;
+	gpios = <&pioC 13 0	/* irq */
+		 &pioC 15 0 	/* detect */
+		 0		/* vcc */
+		 &pioC  5 0	/* reset */
+		>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/calxeda-sata.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/calxeda-sata.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 79caa5651f53..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/calxeda-sata.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-* Calxeda SATA Controller
-
-SATA nodes are defined to describe on-chip Serial ATA controllers.
-Each SATA controller should have its own node.
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible        : compatible list, contains "calxeda,hb-ahci"
-- interrupts        : <interrupt mapping for SATA IRQ>
-- reg               : <registers mapping>
-
-Example:
-        sata@ffe08000 {
-		compatible = "calxeda,hb-ahci";
-                reg = <0xffe08000 0x1000>;
-                interrupts = <115>;
-        };
-
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/cavium-compact-flash.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/cavium-compact-flash.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..93986a5a8018
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/cavium-compact-flash.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+* Compact Flash
+
+The Cavium Compact Flash device is connected to the Octeon Boot Bus,
+and is thus a child of the Boot Bus device.  It can read and write
+industry standard compact flash devices.
+
+Properties:
+- compatible: "cavium,ebt3000-compact-flash";
+
+  Compatibility with many Cavium evaluation boards.
+
+- reg: The base address of the the CF chip select banks.  Depending on
+  the device configuration, there may be one or two banks.
+
+- cavium,bus-width: The width of the connection to the CF devices.  Valid
+  values are 8 and 16.
+
+- cavium,true-ide: Optional, if present the CF connection is in True IDE mode.
+
+- cavium,dma-engine-handle: Optional, a phandle for the DMA Engine connected
+  to this device.
+
+Example:
+	compact-flash@5,0 {
+		compatible = "cavium,ebt3000-compact-flash";
+		reg = <5 0 0x10000>, <6 0 0x10000>;
+		cavium,bus-width = <16>;
+		cavium,true-ide;
+		cavium,dma-engine-handle = <&dma0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/exynos-sata-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/exynos-sata-phy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..37824fac688e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/exynos-sata-phy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+* Samsung SATA PHY Controller
+
+SATA PHY nodes are defined to describe on-chip SATA Physical layer controllers.
+Each SATA PHY controller should have its own node.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible        : compatible list, contains "samsung,exynos5-sata-phy"
+- reg               : <registers mapping>
+
+Example:
+        sata@ffe07000 {
+                compatible = "samsung,exynos5-sata-phy";
+                reg = <0xffe07000 0x1000>;
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/exynos-sata.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/exynos-sata.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0849f1025e34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/exynos-sata.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+* Samsung AHCI SATA Controller
+
+SATA nodes are defined to describe on-chip Serial ATA controllers.
+Each SATA controller should have its own node.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible        : compatible list, contains "samsung,exynos5-sata"
+- interrupts        : <interrupt mapping for SATA IRQ>
+- reg               : <registers mapping>
+- samsung,sata-freq : <frequency in MHz>
+
+Example:
+        sata@ffe08000 {
+                compatible = "samsung,exynos5-sata";
+                reg = <0xffe08000 0x1000>;
+                interrupts = <115>;
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/imx-pata.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/imx-pata.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e38d73414b0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/imx-pata.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+* Freescale i.MX PATA Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,imx27-pata"
+- reg: Address range of the PATA Controller
+- interrupts: The interrupt of the PATA Controller
+- clocks: the clocks for the PATA Controller
+
+Example:
+
+	pata: pata@83fe0000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,imx51-pata", "fsl,imx27-pata";
+		reg = <0x83fe0000 0x4000>;
+		interrupts = <70>;
+		clocks = <&clks 161>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/marvell.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/marvell.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b5cdd20cde9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/marvell.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+* Marvell Orion SATA
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatibility : "marvell,orion-sata"
+- reg           : Address range of controller
+- interrupts    : Interrupt controller is using
+- nr-ports      : Number of SATA ports in use.
+
+Example:
+
+	sata@80000 {
+		compatible = "marvell,orion-sata";
+		reg = <0x80000 0x5000>;
+		interrupts = <21>;
+		nr-ports = <2>;
+	}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/pata-arasan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/pata-arasan.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2aff154be84e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/pata-arasan.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+* ARASAN PATA COMPACT FLASH CONTROLLER
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "arasan,cf-spear1340"
+- reg: Address range of the CF registers
+- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller
+  that services interrupts for this device
+- interrupt: Should contain the CF interrupt number
+- clock-frequency: Interface clock rate, in Hz, one of
+       25000000
+       33000000
+       40000000
+       50000000
+       66000000
+       75000000
+      100000000
+      125000000
+      150000000
+      166000000
+      200000000
+
+Optional properties:
+- arasan,broken-udma: if present, UDMA mode is unusable
+- arasan,broken-mwdma: if present, MWDMA mode is unusable
+- arasan,broken-pio: if present, PIO mode is unusable
+- dmas: one DMA channel, as described in bindings/dma/dma.txt
+  required unless both UDMA and MWDMA mode are broken
+- dma-names: the corresponding channel name, must be "data"
+
+Example:
+
+	cf@fc000000 {
+		compatible = "arasan,cf-spear1340";
+		reg = <0xfc000000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&vic1>;
+		interrupts = <12>;
+		dmas = <&dma-controller 23>;
+		dma-names = "data";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/sata_highbank.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/sata_highbank.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..aa83407cb7a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/sata_highbank.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+* Calxeda AHCI SATA Controller
+
+SATA nodes are defined to describe on-chip Serial ATA controllers.
+The Calxeda SATA controller mostly conforms to the AHCI interface
+with some special extensions to add functionality.
+Each SATA controller should have its own node.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible        : compatible list, contains "calxeda,hb-ahci"
+- interrupts        : <interrupt mapping for SATA IRQ>
+- reg               : <registers mapping>
+
+Optional properties:
+- dma-coherent      : Present if dma operations are coherent
+- calxeda,port-phys : phandle-combophy and lane assignment, which maps each
+			SATA port to a combophy and a lane within that
+			combophy
+- calxeda,sgpio-gpio: phandle-gpio bank, bit offset, and default on or off,
+			which indicates that the driver supports SGPIO
+			indicator lights using the indicated GPIOs
+- calxeda,led-order : a u32 array that map port numbers to offsets within the
+			SGPIO bitstream.
+- calxeda,tx-atten  : a u32 array that contains TX attenuation override
+			codes, one per port. The upper 3 bytes are always
+			0 and thus ignored.
+- calxeda,pre-clocks : a u32 that indicates the number of additional clock
+			cycles to transmit before sending an SGPIO pattern
+- calxeda,post-clocks: a u32 that indicates the number of additional clock
+			cycles to transmit after sending an SGPIO pattern
+
+Example:
+        sata@ffe08000 {
+		compatible = "calxeda,hb-ahci";
+		reg = <0xffe08000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <115>;
+		dma-coherent;
+		calxeda,port-phys = <&combophy5 0 &combophy0 0 &combophy0 1
+					&combophy0 2 &combophy0 3>;
+		calxeda,sgpio-gpio =<&gpioh 5 1 &gpioh 6 1 &gpioh 7 1>;
+		calxeda,led-order = <4 0 1 2 3>;
+		calxeda,tx-atten = <0xff 22 0xff 0xff 23>;
+		calxeda,pre-clocks = <10>;
+		calxeda,post-clocks = <0>;
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0fd76c405208
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+Device tree bindings for i.MX Wireless External Interface Module (WEIM)
+
+The term "wireless" does not imply that the WEIM is literally an interface
+without wires. It simply means that this module was originally designed for
+wireless and mobile applications that use low-power technology.
+
+The actual devices are instantiated from the child nodes of a WEIM node.
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - compatible:		Should be set to "fsl,<soc>-weim"
+ - reg:			A resource specifier for the register space
+			(see the example below)
+ - clocks:		the clock, see the example below.
+ - #address-cells:	Must be set to 2 to allow memory address translation
+ - #size-cells:		Must be set to 1 to allow CS address passing
+ - ranges:		Must be set up to reflect the memory layout with four
+			integer values for each chip-select line in use:
+
+			   <cs-number> 0 <physical address of mapping> <size>
+
+Timing property for child nodes. It is mandatory, not optional.
+
+ - fsl,weim-cs-timing:	The timing array, contains timing values for the
+			child node. We can get the CS index from the child
+			node's "reg" property. The number of registers depends
+			on the selected chip.
+			For i.MX1, i.MX21 ("fsl,imx1-weim") there are two
+			registers: CSxU, CSxL.
+			For i.MX25, i.MX27, i.MX31 and i.MX35 ("fsl,imx27-weim")
+			there are three registers: CSCRxU, CSCRxL, CSCRxA.
+			For i.MX50, i.MX53 ("fsl,imx50-weim"),
+			i.MX51 ("fsl,imx51-weim") and i.MX6Q ("fsl,imx6q-weim")
+			there are six registers: CSxGCR1, CSxGCR2, CSxRCR1,
+			CSxRCR2, CSxWCR1, CSxWCR2.
+
+Example for an imx6q-sabreauto board, the NOR flash connected to the WEIM:
+
+	weim: weim@021b8000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,imx6q-weim";
+		reg = <0x021b8000 0x4000>;
+		clocks = <&clks 196>;
+		#address-cells = <2>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0 0 0x08000000 0x08000000>;
+
+		nor@0,0 {
+			compatible = "cfi-flash";
+			reg = <0 0 0x02000000>;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <1>;
+			bank-width = <2>;
+			fsl,weim-cs-timing = <0x00620081 0x00000001 0x1c022000
+					0x0000c000 0x1404a38e 0x00000000>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7586fb68c072
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,276 @@
+
+* Marvell MBus
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible:	 Should be set to one of the following:
+		 marvell,armada370-mbus
+		 marvell,armadaxp-mbus
+		 marvell,armada370-mbus
+		 marvell,armadaxp-mbus
+		 marvell,kirkwood-mbus
+		 marvell,dove-mbus
+		 marvell,orion5x-88f5281-mbus
+		 marvell,orion5x-88f5182-mbus
+		 marvell,orion5x-88f5181-mbus
+		 marvell,orion5x-88f6183-mbus
+		 marvell,mv78xx0-mbus
+
+- address-cells: Must be '2'. The first cell for the MBus ID encoding,
+                 the second cell for the address offset within the window.
+
+- size-cells:    Must be '1'.
+
+- ranges:        Must be set up to provide a proper translation for each child.
+	         See the examples below.
+
+- controller:    Contains a single phandle referring to the MBus controller
+                 node. This allows to specify the node that contains the
+		 registers that control the MBus, which is typically contained
+		 within the internal register window (see below).
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- pcie-mem-aperture:	This optional property contains the aperture for
+			the memory region of the PCIe driver.
+			If it's defined, it must encode the base address and
+			size for the address decoding windows allocated for
+			the PCIe memory region.
+
+- pcie-io-aperture:	Just as explained for the above property, this
+			optional property contains the aperture for the
+			I/O region of the PCIe driver.
+
+* Marvell MBus controller
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible:	Should be set to "marvell,mbus-controller".
+
+- reg:          Device's register space.
+		Two entries are expected (see the examples below):
+		the first one controls the devices decoding window and
+		the second one controls the SDRAM decoding window.
+
+Example:
+
+	soc {
+		compatible = "marvell,armada370-mbus", "simple-bus";
+		#address-cells = <2>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		controller = <&mbusc>;
+		pcie-mem-aperture = <0xe0000000 0x8000000>;
+		pcie-io-aperture  = <0xe8000000 0x100000>;
+
+		internal-regs {
+			compatible = "simple-bus";
+
+			mbusc: mbus-controller@20000 {
+				compatible = "marvell,mbus-controller";
+				reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>;
+			};
+
+			/* more children ...*/
+		};
+	};
+
+** MBus address decoding window specification
+
+The MBus children address space is comprised of two cells: the first one for
+the window ID and the second one for the offset within the window.
+In order to allow to describe valid and non-valid window entries, the
+following encoding is used:
+
+  0xSIAA0000 0x00oooooo
+
+Where:
+
+  S = 0x0 for a MBus valid window
+  S = 0xf for a non-valid window (see below)
+
+If S = 0x0, then:
+
+   I = 4-bit window target ID
+  AA = windpw attribute
+
+If S = 0xf, then:
+
+   I = don't care
+   AA = 1 for internal register
+
+Following the above encoding, for each ranges entry for a MBus valid window
+(S = 0x0), an address decoding window is allocated. On the other side,
+entries for translation that do not correspond to valid windows (S = 0xf)
+are skipped.
+
+	soc {
+		compatible = "marvell,armada370-mbus", "simple-bus";
+		#address-cells = <2>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		controller = <&mbusc>;
+
+		ranges = <0xf0010000 0 0 0xd0000000 0x100000
+			  0x01e00000 0 0 0xfff00000 0x100000>;
+
+		bootrom {
+			compatible = "marvell,bootrom";
+			reg = <0x01e00000 0 0x100000>;
+		};
+
+		/* other children */
+		...
+
+		internal-regs {
+			compatible = "simple-bus";
+			ranges = <0 0xf0010000 0 0x100000>;
+
+			mbusc: mbus-controller@20000 {
+				compatible = "marvell,mbus-controller";
+				reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>;
+			};
+
+			/* more children ...*/
+		};
+	};
+
+In the shown example, the translation entry in the 'ranges' property is what
+makes the MBus driver create a static decoding window for the corresponding
+given child device. Note that the binding does not require child nodes to be
+present. Of course, child nodes are needed to probe the devices.
+
+Since each window is identified by its target ID and attribute ID there's
+a special macro that can be use to simplify the translation entries:
+
+#define MBUS_ID(target,attributes) (((target) << 24) | ((attributes) << 16))
+
+Using this macro, the above example would be:
+
+	soc {
+		compatible = "marvell,armada370-mbus", "simple-bus";
+		#address-cells = <2>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		controller = <&mbusc>;
+
+		ranges = < MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0 0 0xd0000000 0x100000
+			   MBUS_ID(0x01, 0xe0) 0 0 0xfff00000 0x100000>;
+
+		bootrom {
+			compatible = "marvell,bootrom";
+			reg = <MBUS_ID(0x01, 0xe0) 0 0x100000>;
+		};
+
+		/* other children */
+		...
+
+		internal-regs {
+			compatible = "simple-bus";
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <1>;
+			ranges = <0 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0 0x100000>;
+
+			mbusc: mbus-controller@20000 {
+				compatible = "marvell,mbus-controller";
+				reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>;
+			};
+
+			/* other children */
+			...
+		};
+	};
+
+
+** About the window base address
+
+Remember the MBus controller allows a great deal of flexibility for choosing
+the decoding window base address. When planning the device tree layout it's
+possible to choose any address as the base address, provided of course there's
+a region large enough available, and with the required alignment.
+
+Yet in other words: there's nothing preventing us from setting a base address
+of 0xf0000000, or 0xd0000000 for the NOR device shown above, if such region is
+unused.
+
+** Window allocation policy
+
+The mbus-node ranges property defines a set of mbus windows that are expected
+to be set by the operating system and that are guaranteed to be free of overlaps
+with one another or with the system memory ranges.
+
+Each entry in the property refers to exactly one window. If the operating system
+choses to use a different set of mbus windows, it must ensure that any address
+translations performed from downstream devices are adapted accordingly.
+
+The operating system may insert additional mbus windows that do not conflict
+with the ones listed in the ranges, e.g. for mapping PCIe devices.
+As a special case, the internal register window must be set up by the boot
+loader at the address listed in the ranges property, since access to that region
+is needed to set up the other windows.
+
+** Example
+
+See the example below, where a more complete device tree is shown:
+
+	soc {
+		compatible = "marvell,armadaxp-mbus", "simple-bus";
+		controller = <&mbusc>;
+
+		ranges = <MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0 0 0xd0000000 0x100000   /* internal-regs */
+			  MBUS_ID(0x01, 0x1d) 0 0 0xfff00000 0x100000
+			  MBUS_ID(0x01, 0x2f) 0 0 0xf0000000 0x8000000>;
+
+		bootrom {
+			compatible = "marvell,bootrom";
+			reg = <MBUS_ID(0x01, 0x1d) 0 0x100000>;
+		};
+
+		devbus-bootcs {
+			status = "okay";
+			ranges = <0 MBUS_ID(0x01, 0x2f) 0 0x8000000>;
+
+			/* NOR */
+			nor {
+				compatible = "cfi-flash";
+				reg = <0 0x8000000>;
+				bank-width = <2>;
+			};
+		};
+
+		pcie-controller {
+			compatible = "marvell,armada-xp-pcie";
+			status = "okay";
+			device_type = "pci";
+
+			#address-cells = <3>;
+			#size-cells = <2>;
+
+			ranges =
+			       <0x82000000 0 0x40000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x40000 0 0x00002000   /* Port 0.0 registers */
+				0x82000000 0 0x42000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x42000 0 0x00002000   /* Port 2.0 registers */
+				0x82000000 0 0x44000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x44000 0 0x00002000   /* Port 0.1 registers */
+				0x82000000 0 0x48000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x48000 0 0x00002000   /* Port 0.2 registers */
+				0x82000000 0 0x4c000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x4c000 0 0x00002000   /* Port 0.3 registers */
+				0x82000800 0 0xe0000000 MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xe8) 0xe0000000 0 0x08000000 /* Port 0.0 MEM */
+				0x81000800 0 0          MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xe0) 0xe8000000 0 0x00100000 /* Port 0.0 IO */>;
+
+
+			pcie@1,0 {
+				/* Port 0, Lane 0 */
+				status = "okay";
+			};
+		};
+
+		internal-regs {
+			compatible = "simple-bus";
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <1>;
+			ranges = <0 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0 0x100000>;
+
+			mbusc: mbus-controller@20000 {
+				reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>;
+			};
+
+			interrupt-controller@20000 {
+			      reg = <0x20a00 0x2d0>, <0x21070 0x58>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/omap-ocp2scp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/omap-ocp2scp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..63dd8051521c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/omap-ocp2scp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+* OMAP OCP2SCP - ocp interface to scp interface
+
+properties:
+- compatible : Should be "ti,omap-ocp2scp"
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+- #address-cells, #size-cells : Must be present if the device has sub-nodes
+- ranges : the child address space are mapped 1:1 onto the parent address space
+- ti,hwmods : must be "ocp2scp_usb_phy"
+
+Sub-nodes:
+All the devices connected to ocp2scp are described using sub-node to ocp2scp
+
+ocp2scp@4a0ad000 {
+	compatible = "ti,omap-ocp2scp";
+	reg = <0x4a0ad000 0x1f>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	ranges;
+	ti,hwmods = "ocp2scp_usb_phy";
+
+	subnode1 {
+	...
+	};
+
+	subnode2 {
+	...
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..704be9306c9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+Device tree bindings for OMAP general purpose memory controllers (GPMC)
+
+The actual devices are instantiated from the child nodes of a GPMC node.
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - compatible:		Should be set to one of the following:
+
+			ti,omap2420-gpmc (omap2420)
+			ti,omap2430-gpmc (omap2430)
+			ti,omap3430-gpmc (omap3430 & omap3630)
+			ti,omap4430-gpmc (omap4430 & omap4460 & omap543x)
+			ti,am3352-gpmc   (am335x devices)
+
+ - reg:			A resource specifier for the register space
+			(see the example below)
+ - ti,hwmods:		Should be set to "ti,gpmc" until the DT transition is
+			completed.
+ - #address-cells:	Must be set to 2 to allow memory address translation
+ - #size-cells:		Must be set to 1 to allow CS address passing
+ - gpmc,num-cs:		The maximum number of chip-select lines that controller
+			can support.
+ - gpmc,num-waitpins:	The maximum number of wait pins that controller can
+			support.
+ - ranges:		Must be set up to reflect the memory layout with four
+			integer values for each chip-select line in use:
+
+			   <cs-number> 0 <physical address of mapping> <size>
+
+			Currently, calculated values derived from the contents
+			of the per-CS register GPMC_CONFIG7 (as set up by the
+			bootloader) are used for the physical address decoding.
+			As this will change in the future, filling correct
+			values here is a requirement.
+
+Timing properties for child nodes. All are optional and default to 0.
+
+ - gpmc,sync-clk-ps:	Minimum clock period for synchronous mode, in picoseconds
+
+ Chip-select signal timings (in nanoseconds) corresponding to GPMC_CONFIG2:
+ - gpmc,cs-on-ns:	Assertion time
+ - gpmc,cs-rd-off-ns:	Read deassertion time
+ - gpmc,cs-wr-off-ns:	Write deassertion time
+
+ ADV signal timings (in nanoseconds) corresponding to GPMC_CONFIG3:
+ - gpmc,adv-on-ns:	Assertion time
+ - gpmc,adv-rd-off-ns:	Read deassertion time
+ - gpmc,adv-wr-off-ns:	Write deassertion time
+
+ WE signals timings (in nanoseconds) corresponding to GPMC_CONFIG4:
+ - gpmc,we-on-ns	Assertion time
+ - gpmc,we-off-ns:	Deassertion time
+
+ OE signals timings (in nanoseconds) corresponding to GPMC_CONFIG4:
+ - gpmc,oe-on-ns:	Assertion time
+ - gpmc,oe-off-ns:	Deassertion time
+
+ Access time and cycle time timings (in nanoseconds) corresponding to
+ GPMC_CONFIG5:
+ - gpmc,page-burst-access-ns: 	Multiple access word delay
+ - gpmc,access-ns:		Start-cycle to first data valid delay
+ - gpmc,rd-cycle-ns:		Total read cycle time
+ - gpmc,wr-cycle-ns:		Total write cycle time
+ - gpmc,bus-turnaround-ns:	Turn-around time between successive accesses
+ - gpmc,cycle2cycle-delay-ns:	Delay between chip-select pulses
+ - gpmc,clk-activation-ns: 	GPMC clock activation time
+ - gpmc,wait-monitoring-ns:	Start of wait monitoring with regard to valid
+				data
+
+Boolean timing parameters. If property is present parameter enabled and
+disabled if omitted:
+ - gpmc,adv-extra-delay:	ADV signal is delayed by half GPMC clock
+ - gpmc,cs-extra-delay:		CS signal is delayed by half GPMC clock
+ - gpmc,cycle2cycle-diffcsen:	Add "cycle2cycle-delay" between successive
+				accesses to a different CS
+ - gpmc,cycle2cycle-samecsen:	Add "cycle2cycle-delay" between successive
+				accesses to the same CS
+ - gpmc,oe-extra-delay:		OE signal is delayed by half GPMC clock
+ - gpmc,we-extra-delay:		WE signal is delayed by half GPMC clock
+ - gpmc,time-para-granularity:	Multiply all access times by 2
+
+The following are only applicable to OMAP3+ and AM335x:
+ - gpmc,wr-access-ns:		In synchronous write mode, for single or
+				burst accesses, defines the number of
+				GPMC_FCLK cycles from start access time
+				to the GPMC_CLK rising edge used by the
+				memory device for the first data capture.
+ - gpmc,wr-data-mux-bus-ns:	In address-data multiplex mode, specifies
+				the time when the first data is driven on
+				the address-data bus.
+
+GPMC chip-select settings properties for child nodes. All are optional.
+
+- gpmc,burst-length	Page/burst length. Must be 4, 8 or 16.
+- gpmc,burst-wrap	Enables wrap bursting
+- gpmc,burst-read	Enables read page/burst mode
+- gpmc,burst-write	Enables write page/burst mode
+- gpmc,device-width	Total width of device(s) connected to a GPMC
+			chip-select in bytes. The GPMC supports 8-bit
+			and 16-bit devices and so this property must be
+			1 or 2.
+- gpmc,mux-add-data	Address and data multiplexing configuration.
+			Valid values are 1 for address-address-data
+			multiplexing mode and 2 for address-data
+			multiplexing mode.
+- gpmc,sync-read	Enables synchronous read. Defaults to asynchronous
+			is this is not set.
+- gpmc,sync-write	Enables synchronous writes. Defaults to asynchronous
+			is this is not set.
+- gpmc,wait-pin		Wait-pin used by client. Must be less than
+			"gpmc,num-waitpins".
+- gpmc,wait-on-read	Enables wait monitoring on reads.
+- gpmc,wait-on-write	Enables wait monitoring on writes.
+
+Example for an AM33xx board:
+
+	gpmc: gpmc@50000000 {
+		compatible = "ti,am3352-gpmc";
+		ti,hwmods = "gpmc";
+		reg = <0x50000000 0x2000>;
+		interrupts = <100>;
+
+		gpmc,num-cs = <8>;
+		gpmc,num-waitpins = <2>;
+		#address-cells = <2>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0 0 0x08000000 0x10000000>; /* CS0 @addr 0x8000000, size 0x10000000 */
+
+		/* child nodes go here */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/c6x/dscr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/c6x/dscr.txt
index d847758f2b20..b0e97144cfb1 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/c6x/dscr.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/c6x/dscr.txt
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ TI C6X SoCs contain a region of miscellaneous registers which provide various
 function for SoC control or status. Details vary considerably among from SoC
 to SoC with no two being alike.
 
-In general, the Device State Configuraion Registers (DSCR) will provide one or
+In general, the Device State Configuration Registers (DSCR) will provide one or
 more configuration registers often protected by a lock register where one or
 more key values must be written to a lock register in order to unlock the
 configuration register for writes. These configuration register may be used to
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/altr_socfpga.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/altr_socfpga.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0045433eae1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/altr_socfpga.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+Device Tree Clock bindings for Altera's SoCFPGA platform
+
+This binding uses the common clock binding[1].
+
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : shall be one of the following:
+	"altr,socfpga-pll-clock" - for a PLL clock
+	"altr,socfpga-perip-clock" - The peripheral clock divided from the
+		PLL clock.
+	"altr,socfpga-gate-clk" - Clocks that directly feed peripherals and
+		can get gated.
+
+- reg : shall be the control register offset from CLOCK_MANAGER's base for the clock.
+- clocks : shall be the input parent clock phandle for the clock. This is
+	either an oscillator or a pll output.
+- #clock-cells : from common clock binding, shall be set to 0.
+
+Optional properties:
+- fixed-divider : If clocks have a fixed divider value, use this property.
+- clk-gate : For "socfpga-gate-clk", clk-gate contains the gating register
+        and the bit index.
+- div-reg : For "socfpga-gate-clk", div-reg contains the divider register, bit shift,
+        and width.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/axi-clkgen.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/axi-clkgen.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..028b493e97ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/axi-clkgen.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+Binding for the axi-clkgen clock generator
+
+This binding uses the common clock binding[1].
+
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : shall be "adi,axi-clkgen".
+- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; Should always be set to 0.
+- reg : Address and length of the axi-clkgen register set.
+- clocks : Phandle and clock specifier for the parent clock.
+
+Optional properties:
+- clock-output-names : From common clock binding.
+
+Example:
+	clock@0xff000000 {
+		compatible = "adi,axi-clkgen";
+		#clock-cells = <0>;
+		reg = <0xff000000 0x1000>;
+		clocks = <&osc 1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/calxeda.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/calxeda.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0a6ac1bdcda1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/calxeda.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Device Tree Clock bindings for Calxeda highbank platform
+
+This binding uses the common clock binding[1].
+
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : shall be one of the following:
+	"calxeda,hb-pll-clock" - for a PLL clock
+	"calxeda,hb-a9periph-clock" - The A9 peripheral clock divided from the
+		A9 clock.
+	"calxeda,hb-a9bus-clock" - The A9 bus clock divided from the A9 clock.
+	"calxeda,hb-emmc-clock" - Divided clock for MMC/SD controller.
+- reg : shall be the control register offset from SYSREGs base for the clock.
+- clocks : shall be the input parent clock phandle for the clock. This is
+	either an oscillator or a pll output.
+- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clk-exynos-audss.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clk-exynos-audss.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..75e2e1999f87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clk-exynos-audss.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+* Samsung Audio Subsystem Clock Controller
+
+The Samsung Audio Subsystem clock controller generates and supplies clocks
+to Audio Subsystem block available in the S5PV210 and Exynos SoCs. The clock
+binding described here is applicable to all SoCs in Exynos family.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+- compatible: should be one of the following:
+  - "samsung,exynos4210-audss-clock" - controller compatible with all Exynos4 SoCs.
+  - "samsung,exynos5250-audss-clock" - controller compatible with all Exynos5 SoCs.
+
+- reg: physical base address and length of the controller's register set.
+
+- #clock-cells: should be 1.
+
+The following is the list of clocks generated by the controller. Each clock is
+assigned an identifier and client nodes use this identifier to specify the
+clock which they consume. Some of the clocks are available only on a particular
+Exynos4 SoC and this is specified where applicable.
+
+Provided clocks:
+
+Clock           ID      SoC (if specific)
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+mout_audss      0
+mout_i2s        1
+dout_srp        2
+dout_aud_bus    3
+dout_i2s        4
+srp_clk         5
+i2s_bus         6
+sclk_i2s        7
+pcm_bus         8
+sclk_pcm        9
+
+Example 1: An example of a clock controller node is listed below.
+
+clock_audss: audss-clock-controller@3810000 {
+	compatible = "samsung,exynos5250-audss-clock";
+	reg = <0x03810000 0x0C>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+Example 2: I2S controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock
+           controller. Refer to the standard clock bindings for information
+           about 'clocks' and 'clock-names' property.
+
+i2s0: i2s@03830000 {
+	compatible = "samsung,i2s-v5";
+	reg = <0x03830000 0x100>;
+	dmas = <&pdma0 10
+		&pdma0 9
+		&pdma0 8>;
+	dma-names = "tx", "rx", "tx-sec";
+	clocks = <&clock_audss EXYNOS_I2S_BUS>,
+		<&clock_audss EXYNOS_I2S_BUS>,
+		<&clock_audss EXYNOS_SCLK_I2S>,
+		<&clock_audss EXYNOS_MOUT_AUDSS>,
+		<&clock_audss EXYNOS_MOUT_I2S>;
+	clock-names = "iis", "i2s_opclk0", "i2s_opclk1",
+	"mout_audss", "mout_i2s";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..eb65d417f8c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+This binding is a work-in-progress, and are based on some experimental
+work by benh[1].
+
+Sources of clock signal can be represented by any node in the device
+tree.  Those nodes are designated as clock providers.  Clock consumer
+nodes use a phandle and clock specifier pair to connect clock provider
+outputs to clock inputs.  Similar to the gpio specifiers, a clock
+specifier is an array of one more more cells identifying the clock
+output on a device.  The length of a clock specifier is defined by the
+value of a #clock-cells property in the clock provider node.
+
+[1] http://patchwork.ozlabs.org/patch/31551/
+
+==Clock providers==
+
+Required properties:
+#clock-cells:	   Number of cells in a clock specifier; Typically 0 for nodes
+		   with a single clock output and 1 for nodes with multiple
+		   clock outputs.
+
+Optional properties:
+clock-output-names: Recommended to be a list of strings of clock output signal
+		    names indexed by the first cell in the clock specifier.
+		    However, the meaning of clock-output-names is domain
+		    specific to the clock provider, and is only provided to
+		    encourage using the same meaning for the majority of clock
+		    providers.  This format may not work for clock providers
+		    using a complex clock specifier format.  In those cases it
+		    is recommended to omit this property and create a binding
+		    specific names property.
+
+		    Clock consumer nodes must never directly reference
+		    the provider's clock-output-names property.
+
+For example:
+
+    oscillator {
+        #clock-cells = <1>;
+        clock-output-names = "ckil", "ckih";
+    };
+
+- this node defines a device with two clock outputs, the first named
+  "ckil" and the second named "ckih".  Consumer nodes always reference
+  clocks by index. The names should reflect the clock output signal
+  names for the device.
+
+==Clock consumers==
+
+Required properties:
+clocks:		List of phandle and clock specifier pairs, one pair
+		for each clock input to the device.  Note: if the
+		clock provider specifies '0' for #clock-cells, then
+		only the phandle portion of the pair will appear.
+
+Optional properties:
+clock-names:	List of clock input name strings sorted in the same
+		order as the clocks property.  Consumers drivers
+		will use clock-names to match clock input names
+		with clocks specifiers.
+clock-ranges:	Empty property indicating that child nodes can inherit named
+		clocks from this node. Useful for bus nodes to provide a
+		clock to their children.
+
+For example:
+
+    device {
+        clocks = <&osc 1>, <&ref 0>;
+        clock-names = "baud", "register";
+    };
+
+
+This represents a device with two clock inputs, named "baud" and "register".
+The baud clock is connected to output 1 of the &osc device, and the register
+clock is connected to output 0 of the &ref.
+
+==Example==
+
+    /* external oscillator */
+    osc: oscillator {
+        compatible = "fixed-clock";
+        #clock-cells = <1>;
+        clock-frequency  = <32678>;
+        clock-output-names = "osc";
+    };
+
+    /* phase-locked-loop device, generates a higher frequency clock
+     * from the external oscillator reference */
+    pll: pll@4c000 {
+        compatible = "vendor,some-pll-interface"
+        #clock-cells = <1>;
+        clocks = <&osc 0>;
+        clock-names = "ref";
+        reg = <0x4c000 0x1000>;
+        clock-output-names = "pll", "pll-switched";
+    };
+
+    /* UART, using the low frequency oscillator for the baud clock,
+     * and the high frequency switched PLL output for register
+     * clocking */
+    uart@a000 {
+        compatible = "fsl,imx-uart";
+        reg = <0xa000 0x1000>;
+        interrupts = <33>;
+        clocks = <&osc 0>, <&pll 1>;
+        clock-names = "baud", "register";
+    };
+
+This DT fragment defines three devices: an external oscillator to provide a
+low-frequency reference clock, a PLL device to generate a higher frequency
+clock signal, and a UART.
+
+* The oscillator is fixed-frequency, and provides one clock output, named "osc".
+* The PLL is both a clock provider and a clock consumer. It uses the clock
+  signal generated by the external oscillator, and provides two output signals
+  ("pll" and "pll-switched").
+* The UART has its baud clock connected the external oscillator and its
+  register clock connected to the PLL clock (the "pll-switched" signal)
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos4-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos4-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c6bf8a6c8f52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos4-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,290 @@
+* Samsung Exynos4 Clock Controller
+
+The Exynos4 clock controller generates and supplies clock to various controllers
+within the Exynos4 SoC. The clock binding described here is applicable to all
+SoC's in the Exynos4 family.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+- comptible: should be one of the following.
+  - "samsung,exynos4210-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos4210 SoC.
+  - "samsung,exynos4412-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos4412 SoC.
+
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+- #clock-cells: should be 1.
+
+The following is the list of clocks generated by the controller. Each clock is
+assigned an identifier and client nodes use this identifier to specify the
+clock which they consume. Some of the clocks are available only on a particular
+Exynos4 SoC and this is specified where applicable.
+
+
+		 [Core Clocks]
+
+  Clock               ID      SoC (if specific)
+  -----------------------------------------------
+
+  xxti                1
+  xusbxti             2
+  fin_pll             3
+  fout_apll           4
+  fout_mpll           5
+  fout_epll           6
+  fout_vpll           7
+  sclk_apll           8
+  sclk_mpll           9
+  sclk_epll           10
+  sclk_vpll           11
+  arm_clk             12
+  aclk200             13
+  aclk100             14
+  aclk160             15
+  aclk133             16
+  mout_mpll_user_t    17      Exynos4x12
+  mout_mpll_user_c    18      Exynos4x12
+  mout_core           19
+  mout_apll           20
+
+
+            [Clock Gate for Special Clocks]
+
+  Clock               ID      SoC (if specific)
+  -----------------------------------------------
+
+  sclk_fimc0          128
+  sclk_fimc1          129
+  sclk_fimc2          130
+  sclk_fimc3          131
+  sclk_cam0           132
+  sclk_cam1           133
+  sclk_csis0          134
+  sclk_csis1          135
+  sclk_hdmi           136
+  sclk_mixer          137
+  sclk_dac            138
+  sclk_pixel          139
+  sclk_fimd0          140
+  sclk_mdnie0         141     Exynos4412
+  sclk_mdnie_pwm0 12  142     Exynos4412
+  sclk_mipi0          143
+  sclk_audio0         144
+  sclk_mmc0           145
+  sclk_mmc1           146
+  sclk_mmc2           147
+  sclk_mmc3           148
+  sclk_mmc4           149
+  sclk_sata           150     Exynos4210
+  sclk_uart0          151
+  sclk_uart1          152
+  sclk_uart2          153
+  sclk_uart3          154
+  sclk_uart4          155
+  sclk_audio1         156
+  sclk_audio2         157
+  sclk_spdif          158
+  sclk_spi0           159
+  sclk_spi1           160
+  sclk_spi2           161
+  sclk_slimbus        162
+  sclk_fimd1          163     Exynos4210
+  sclk_mipi1          164     Exynos4210
+  sclk_pcm1           165
+  sclk_pcm2           166
+  sclk_i2s1           167
+  sclk_i2s2           168
+  sclk_mipihsi        169     Exynos4412
+  sclk_mfc            170
+  sclk_pcm0           171
+  sclk_g3d            172
+  sclk_pwm_isp        173     Exynos4x12
+  sclk_spi0_isp       174     Exynos4x12
+  sclk_spi1_isp       175     Exynos4x12
+  sclk_uart_isp       176     Exynos4x12
+  sclk_fimg2d         177
+
+	      [Peripheral Clock Gates]
+
+  Clock               ID      SoC (if specific)
+  -----------------------------------------------
+
+  fimc0               256
+  fimc1               257
+  fimc2               258
+  fimc3               259
+  csis0               260
+  csis1               261
+  jpeg                262
+  smmu_fimc0          263
+  smmu_fimc1          264
+  smmu_fimc2          265
+  smmu_fimc3          266
+  smmu_jpeg           267
+  vp                  268
+  mixer               269
+  tvenc               270     Exynos4210
+  hdmi                271
+  smmu_tv             272
+  mfc                 273
+  smmu_mfcl           274
+  smmu_mfcr           275
+  g3d                 276
+  g2d                 277
+  rotator             278     Exynos4210
+  mdma                279     Exynos4210
+  smmu_g2d            280     Exynos4210
+  smmu_rotator        281     Exynos4210
+  smmu_mdma           282     Exynos4210
+  fimd0               283
+  mie0                284
+  mdnie0              285     Exynos4412
+  dsim0               286
+  smmu_fimd0          287
+  fimd1               288     Exynos4210
+  mie1                289     Exynos4210
+  dsim1               290     Exynos4210
+  smmu_fimd1          291     Exynos4210
+  pdma0               292
+  pdma1               293
+  pcie_phy            294
+  sata_phy            295     Exynos4210
+  tsi                 296
+  sdmmc0              297
+  sdmmc1              298
+  sdmmc2              299
+  sdmmc3              300
+  sdmmc4              301
+  sata                302     Exynos4210
+  sromc               303
+  usb_host            304
+  usb_device          305
+  pcie                306
+  onenand             307
+  nfcon               308
+  smmu_pcie           309
+  gps                 310
+  smmu_gps            311
+  uart0               312
+  uart1               313
+  uart2               314
+  uart3               315
+  uart4               316
+  i2c0                317
+  i2c1                318
+  i2c2                319
+  i2c3                320
+  i2c4                321
+  i2c5                322
+  i2c6                323
+  i2c7                324
+  i2c_hdmi            325
+  tsadc               326
+  spi0                327
+  spi1                328
+  spi2                329
+  i2s1                330
+  i2s2                331
+  pcm0                332
+  i2s0                333
+  pcm1                334
+  pcm2                335
+  pwm                 336
+  slimbus             337
+  spdif               338
+  ac97                339
+  modemif             340
+  chipid              341
+  sysreg              342
+  hdmi_cec            343
+  mct                 344
+  wdt                 345
+  rtc                 346
+  keyif               347
+  audss               348
+  mipi_hsi            349     Exynos4210
+  mdma2               350     Exynos4210
+  pixelasyncm0        351
+  pixelasyncm1        352
+  fimc_lite0          353     Exynos4x12
+  fimc_lite1          354     Exynos4x12
+  ppmuispx            355     Exynos4x12
+  ppmuispmx           356     Exynos4x12
+  fimc_isp            357     Exynos4x12
+  fimc_drc            358     Exynos4x12
+  fimc_fd             359     Exynos4x12
+  mcuisp              360     Exynos4x12
+  gicisp              361     Exynos4x12
+  smmu_isp            362     Exynos4x12
+  smmu_drc            363     Exynos4x12
+  smmu_fd             364     Exynos4x12
+  smmu_lite0          365     Exynos4x12
+  smmu_lite1          366     Exynos4x12
+  mcuctl_isp          367     Exynos4x12
+  mpwm_isp            368     Exynos4x12
+  i2c0_isp            369     Exynos4x12
+  i2c1_isp            370     Exynos4x12
+  mtcadc_isp          371     Exynos4x12
+  pwm_isp             372     Exynos4x12
+  wdt_isp             373     Exynos4x12
+  uart_isp            374     Exynos4x12
+  asyncaxim           375     Exynos4x12
+  smmu_ispcx          376     Exynos4x12
+  spi0_isp            377     Exynos4x12
+  spi1_isp            378     Exynos4x12
+  pwm_isp_sclk        379     Exynos4x12
+  spi0_isp_sclk       380     Exynos4x12
+  spi1_isp_sclk       381     Exynos4x12
+  uart_isp_sclk       382     Exynos4x12
+  tmu_apbif           383
+
+		[Mux Clocks]
+
+  Clock			ID	SoC (if specific)
+  -----------------------------------------------
+
+  mout_fimc0		384
+  mout_fimc1		385
+  mout_fimc2		386
+  mout_fimc3		387
+  mout_cam0		388
+  mout_cam1		389
+  mout_csis0		390
+  mout_csis1		391
+  mout_g3d0		392
+  mout_g3d1		393
+  mout_g3d		394
+  aclk400_mcuisp	395	Exynos4x12
+
+		[Div Clocks]
+
+  Clock			ID	SoC (if specific)
+  -----------------------------------------------
+
+  div_isp0		450	Exynos4x12
+  div_isp1		451	Exynos4x12
+  div_mcuisp0		452	Exynos4x12
+  div_mcuisp1		453	Exynos4x12
+  div_aclk200		454	Exynos4x12
+  div_aclk400_mcuisp	455	Exynos4x12
+
+
+Example 1: An example of a clock controller node is listed below.
+
+	clock: clock-controller@0x10030000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-clock";
+		reg = <0x10030000 0x20000>;
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+	};
+
+Example 2: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock
+	   controller. Refer to the standard clock bindings for information
+	   about 'clocks' and 'clock-names' property.
+
+	serial@13820000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-uart";
+		reg = <0x13820000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <0 54 0>;
+		clocks = <&clock 314>, <&clock 153>;
+		clock-names = "uart", "clk_uart_baud0";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5250-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5250-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..24765c146e31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5250-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+* Samsung Exynos5250 Clock Controller
+
+The Exynos5250 clock controller generates and supplies clock to various
+controllers within the Exynos5250 SoC.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+- comptible: should be one of the following.
+  - "samsung,exynos5250-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos5250 SoC.
+
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+- #clock-cells: should be 1.
+
+The following is the list of clocks generated by the controller. Each clock is
+assigned an identifier and client nodes use this identifier to specify the
+clock which they consume.
+
+
+       [Core Clocks]
+
+  Clock			ID
+  ----------------------------
+
+  fin_pll		1
+
+  [Clock Gate for Special Clocks]
+
+  Clock			ID
+  ----------------------------
+
+  sclk_cam_bayer	128
+  sclk_cam0		129
+  sclk_cam1		130
+  sclk_gscl_wa		131
+  sclk_gscl_wb		132
+  sclk_fimd1		133
+  sclk_mipi1		134
+  sclk_dp		135
+  sclk_hdmi		136
+  sclk_pixel		137
+  sclk_audio0		138
+  sclk_mmc0		139
+  sclk_mmc1		140
+  sclk_mmc2		141
+  sclk_mmc3		142
+  sclk_sata		143
+  sclk_usb3		144
+  sclk_jpeg		145
+  sclk_uart0		146
+  sclk_uart1		147
+  sclk_uart2		148
+  sclk_uart3		149
+  sclk_pwm		150
+  sclk_audio1		151
+  sclk_audio2		152
+  sclk_spdif		153
+  sclk_spi0		154
+  sclk_spi1		155
+  sclk_spi2		156
+  div_i2s1		157
+  div_i2s2		158
+  sclk_hdmiphy		159
+
+
+   [Peripheral Clock Gates]
+
+  Clock			ID
+  ----------------------------
+
+  gscl0			256
+  gscl1			257
+  gscl2			258
+  gscl3			259
+  gscl_wa		260
+  gscl_wb		261
+  smmu_gscl0		262
+  smmu_gscl1		263
+  smmu_gscl2		264
+  smmu_gscl3		265
+  mfc			266
+  smmu_mfcl		267
+  smmu_mfcr		268
+  rotator		269
+  jpeg			270
+  mdma1			271
+  smmu_rotator		272
+  smmu_jpeg		273
+  smmu_mdma1		274
+  pdma0			275
+  pdma1			276
+  sata			277
+  usbotg		278
+  mipi_hsi		279
+  sdmmc0		280
+  sdmmc1		281
+  sdmmc2		282
+  sdmmc3		283
+  sromc			284
+  usb2			285
+  usb3			286
+  sata_phyctrl		287
+  sata_phyi2c		288
+  uart0			289
+  uart1			290
+  uart2			291
+  uart3			292
+  uart4			293
+  i2c0			294
+  i2c1			295
+  i2c2			296
+  i2c3			297
+  i2c4			298
+  i2c5			299
+  i2c6			300
+  i2c7			301
+  i2c_hdmi		302
+  adc			303
+  spi0			304
+  spi1			305
+  spi2			306
+  i2s1			307
+  i2s2			308
+  pcm1			309
+  pcm2			310
+  pwm			311
+  spdif			312
+  ac97			313
+  hsi2c0		314
+  hsi2c1		315
+  hs12c2		316
+  hs12c3		317
+  chipid		318
+  sysreg		319
+  pmu			320
+  cmu_top		321
+  cmu_core		322
+  cmu_mem		323
+  tzpc0			324
+  tzpc1			325
+  tzpc2			326
+  tzpc3			327
+  tzpc4			328
+  tzpc5			329
+  tzpc6			330
+  tzpc7			331
+  tzpc8			332
+  tzpc9			333
+  hdmi_cec		334
+  mct			335
+  wdt			336
+  rtc			337
+  tmu			338
+  fimd1			339
+  mie1			340
+  dsim0			341
+  dp			342
+  mixer			343
+  hdmi			344
+  g2d			345
+
+
+   [Clock Muxes]
+
+  Clock			ID
+  ----------------------------
+  mout_hdmi		1024
+
+
+Example 1: An example of a clock controller node is listed below.
+
+	clock: clock-controller@0x10010000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos5250-clock";
+		reg = <0x10010000 0x30000>;
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+	};
+
+Example 2: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock
+	   controller. Refer to the standard clock bindings for information
+	   about 'clocks' and 'clock-names' property.
+
+	serial@13820000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-uart";
+		reg = <0x13820000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <0 54 0>;
+		clocks = <&clock 314>, <&clock 153>;
+		clock-names = "uart", "clk_uart_baud0";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..32aa34ecad36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,213 @@
+* Samsung Exynos5420 Clock Controller
+
+The Exynos5420 clock controller generates and supplies clock to various
+controllers within the Exynos5420 SoC.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+- comptible: should be one of the following.
+  - "samsung,exynos5420-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos5420 SoC.
+
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+- #clock-cells: should be 1.
+
+The following is the list of clocks generated by the controller. Each clock is
+assigned an identifier and client nodes use this identifier to specify the
+clock which they consume.
+
+
+       [Core Clocks]
+
+  Clock			ID
+  ----------------------------
+
+  fin_pll		1
+
+  [Clock Gate for Special Clocks]
+
+  Clock			ID
+  ----------------------------
+  sclk_uart0		128
+  sclk_uart1		129
+  sclk_uart2		130
+  sclk_uart3		131
+  sclk_mmc0		132
+  sclk_mmc1		133
+  sclk_mmc2		134
+  sclk_spi0		135
+  sclk_spi1		136
+  sclk_spi2		137
+  sclk_i2s1		138
+  sclk_i2s2		139
+  sclk_pcm1		140
+  sclk_pcm2		141
+  sclk_spdif		142
+  sclk_hdmi		143
+  sclk_pixel		144
+  sclk_dp1		145
+  sclk_mipi1		146
+  sclk_fimd1		147
+  sclk_maudio0		148
+  sclk_maupcm0		149
+  sclk_usbd300		150
+  sclk_usbd301		151
+  sclk_usbphy300	152
+  sclk_usbphy301	153
+  sclk_unipro		154
+  sclk_pwm		155
+  sclk_gscl_wa		156
+  sclk_gscl_wb		157
+  sclk_hdmiphy		158
+
+   [Peripheral Clock Gates]
+
+  Clock			ID
+  ----------------------------
+
+  aclk66_peric		256
+  uart0			257
+  uart1			258
+  uart2			259
+  uart3			260
+  i2c0			261
+  i2c1			262
+  i2c2			263
+  i2c3			264
+  i2c4			265
+  i2c5			266
+  i2c6			267
+  i2c7			268
+  i2c_hdmi		269
+  tsadc			270
+  spi0			271
+  spi1			272
+  spi2			273
+  keyif			274
+  i2s1			275
+  i2s2			276
+  pcm1			277
+  pcm2			278
+  pwm			279
+  spdif			280
+  i2c8			281
+  i2c9			282
+  i2c10			283
+  aclk66_psgen		300
+  chipid		301
+  sysreg		302
+  tzpc0			303
+  tzpc1			304
+  tzpc2			305
+  tzpc3			306
+  tzpc4			307
+  tzpc5			308
+  tzpc6			309
+  tzpc7			310
+  tzpc8			311
+  tzpc9			312
+  hdmi_cec		313
+  seckey		314
+  mct			315
+  wdt			316
+  rtc			317
+  tmu			318
+  tmu_gpu		319
+  pclk66_gpio		330
+  aclk200_fsys2		350
+  mmc0			351
+  mmc1			352
+  mmc2			353
+  sromc			354
+  ufs			355
+  aclk200_fsys		360
+  tsi			361
+  pdma0			362
+  pdma1			363
+  rtic			364
+  usbh20		365
+  usbd300		366
+  usbd301		377
+  aclk400_mscl		380
+  mscl0			381
+  mscl1			382
+  mscl2			383
+  smmu_mscl0		384
+  smmu_mscl1		385
+  smmu_mscl2		386
+  aclk333		400
+  mfc			401
+  smmu_mfcl		402
+  smmu_mfcr		403
+  aclk200_disp1		410
+  dsim1			411
+  dp1			412
+  hdmi			413
+  aclk300_disp1		420
+  fimd1			421
+  smmu_fimd1		422
+  aclk166		430
+  mixer			431
+  aclk266		440
+  rotator		441
+  mdma1			442
+  smmu_rotator		443
+  smmu_mdma1		444
+  aclk300_jpeg		450
+  jpeg			451
+  jpeg2			452
+  smmu_jpeg		453
+  aclk300_gscl		460
+  smmu_gscl0		461
+  smmu_gscl1		462
+  gscl_wa		463
+  gscl_wb		464
+  gscl0			465
+  gscl1			466
+  clk_3aa		467
+  aclk266_g2d		470
+  sss			471
+  slim_sss		472
+  mdma0			473
+  aclk333_g2d		480
+  g2d			481
+  aclk333_432_gscl	490
+  smmu_3aa		491
+  smmu_fimcl0		492
+  smmu_fimcl1		493
+  smmu_fimcl3		494
+  fimc_lite3		495
+  aclk_g3d		500
+  g3d			501
+  smmu_mixer		502
+
+  Mux			ID
+  ----------------------------
+
+  mout_hdmi		640
+
+  Divider		ID
+  ----------------------------
+
+  dout_pixel		768
+
+Example 1: An example of a clock controller node is listed below.
+
+	clock: clock-controller@0x10010000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos5420-clock";
+		reg = <0x10010000 0x30000>;
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+	};
+
+Example 2: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock
+	   controller. Refer to the standard clock bindings for information
+	   about 'clocks' and 'clock-names' property.
+
+	serial@13820000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-uart";
+		reg = <0x13820000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <0 54 0>;
+		clocks = <&clock 259>, <&clock 130>;
+		clock-names = "uart", "clk_uart_baud0";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4499e9966bc9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+* Samsung Exynos5440 Clock Controller
+
+The Exynos5440 clock controller generates and supplies clock to various
+controllers within the Exynos5440 SoC.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+- comptible: should be "samsung,exynos5440-clock".
+
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+- #clock-cells: should be 1.
+
+The following is the list of clocks generated by the controller. Each clock is
+assigned an identifier and client nodes use this identifier to specify the
+clock which they consume.
+
+
+       [Core Clocks]
+
+  Clock			ID
+  ----------------------------
+
+  xtal			1
+  arm_clk		2
+
+   [Peripheral Clock Gates]
+
+  Clock			ID
+  ----------------------------
+
+  spi_baud		16
+  pb0_250		17
+  pr0_250		18
+  pr1_250		19
+  b_250			20
+  b_125			21
+  b_200			22
+  sata			23
+  usb			24
+  gmac0			25
+  cs250			26
+  pb0_250_o		27
+  pr0_250_o		28
+  pr1_250_o		29
+  b_250_o		30
+  b_125_o		31
+  b_200_o		32
+  sata_o		33
+  usb_o			34
+  gmac0_o		35
+  cs250_o		36
+
+Example: An example of a clock controller node is listed below.
+
+	clock: clock-controller@0x10010000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos5440-clock";
+		reg = <0x160000 0x10000>;
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0b1fe7824093
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+Binding for simple fixed-rate clock sources.
+
+This binding uses the common clock binding[1].
+
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : shall be "fixed-clock".
+- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0.
+- clock-frequency : frequency of clock in Hz. Should be a single cell.
+
+Optional properties:
+- gpios : From common gpio binding; gpio connection to clock enable pin.
+- clock-output-names : From common clock binding.
+
+Example:
+	clock {
+		compatible = "fixed-clock";
+		#clock-cells = <0>;
+		clock-frequency = <1000000000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5757f9abfc26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/fixed-factor-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+Binding for simple fixed factor rate clock sources.
+
+This binding uses the common clock binding[1].
+
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : shall be "fixed-factor-clock".
+- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0.
+- clock-div: fixed divider.
+- clock-mult: fixed multiplier.
+- clocks: parent clock.
+
+Optional properties:
+- clock-output-names : From common clock binding.
+
+Example:
+	clock {
+		compatible = "fixed-factor-clock";
+		clocks = <&parentclk>;
+		#clock-cells = <0>;
+		div = <2>;
+		mult = <1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx23-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx23-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5083c0b834b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx23-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+* Clock bindings for Freescale i.MX23
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx23-clkctrl"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set
+- #clock-cells: Should be <1>
+
+The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock
+ID in its "clocks" phandle cell.  The following is a full list of i.MX23
+clocks and IDs.
+
+	Clock		ID
+	------------------
+	ref_xtal	0
+	pll		1
+	ref_cpu		2
+	ref_emi		3
+	ref_pix		4
+	ref_io		5
+	saif_sel	6
+	lcdif_sel	7
+	gpmi_sel	8
+	ssp_sel		9
+	emi_sel		10
+	cpu		11
+	etm_sel		12
+	cpu_pll		13
+	cpu_xtal	14
+	hbus		15
+	xbus		16
+	lcdif_div	17
+	ssp_div		18
+	gpmi_div	19
+	emi_pll		20
+	emi_xtal	21
+	etm_div		22
+	saif_div	23
+	clk32k_div	24
+	rtc		25
+	adc		26
+	spdif_div	27
+	clk32k		28
+	dri		29
+	pwm		30
+	filt		31
+	uart		32
+	ssp		33
+	gpmi		34
+	spdif		35
+	emi		36
+	saif		37
+	lcdif		38
+	etm		39
+	usb		40
+	usb_phy		41
+
+Examples:
+
+clks: clkctrl@80040000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx23-clkctrl";
+	reg = <0x80040000 0x2000>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+auart0: serial@8006c000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx23-auart";
+	reg = <0x8006c000 0x2000>;
+	interrupts = <24 25 23>;
+	clocks = <&clks 32>;
+	status = "disabled";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx25-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx25-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..db4f2f05c4d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx25-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+* Clock bindings for Freescale i.MX25
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx25-ccm"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set
+- interrupts: Should contain CCM interrupt
+- #clock-cells: Should be <1>
+
+The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock
+ID in its "clocks" phandle cell.  The following is a full list of i.MX25
+clocks and IDs.
+
+	Clock			ID
+	---------------------------
+	dummy			0
+	osc			1
+	mpll			2
+	upll			3
+	mpll_cpu_3_4		4
+	cpu_sel			5
+	cpu			6
+	ahb			7
+	usb_div			8
+	ipg			9
+	per0_sel		10
+	per1_sel		11
+	per2_sel		12
+	per3_sel		13
+	per4_sel		14
+	per5_sel		15
+	per6_sel		16
+	per7_sel		17
+	per8_sel		18
+	per9_sel		19
+	per10_sel		20
+	per11_sel		21
+	per12_sel		22
+	per13_sel		23
+	per14_sel		24
+	per15_sel		25
+	per0			26
+	per1			27
+	per2			28
+	per3			29
+	per4			30
+	per5			31
+	per6			32
+	per7			33
+	per8			34
+	per9			35
+	per10			36
+	per11			37
+	per12			38
+	per13			39
+	per14			40
+	per15			41
+	csi_ipg_per		42
+	epit_ipg_per		43
+	esai_ipg_per		44
+	esdhc1_ipg_per		45
+	esdhc2_ipg_per		46
+	gpt_ipg_per		47
+	i2c_ipg_per		48
+	lcdc_ipg_per		49
+	nfc_ipg_per		50
+	owire_ipg_per		51
+	pwm_ipg_per		52
+	sim1_ipg_per		53
+	sim2_ipg_per		54
+	ssi1_ipg_per		55
+	ssi2_ipg_per		56
+	uart_ipg_per		57
+	ata_ahb			58
+	reserved		59
+	csi_ahb			60
+	emi_ahb			61
+	esai_ahb		62
+	esdhc1_ahb		63
+	esdhc2_ahb		64
+	fec_ahb			65
+	lcdc_ahb		66
+	rtic_ahb		67
+	sdma_ahb		68
+	slcdc_ahb		69
+	usbotg_ahb		70
+	reserved		71
+	reserved		72
+	reserved		73
+	reserved		74
+	can1_ipg		75
+	can2_ipg		76
+	csi_ipg			77
+	cspi1_ipg		78
+	cspi2_ipg		79
+	cspi3_ipg		80
+	dryice_ipg		81
+	ect_ipg			82
+	epit1_ipg		83
+	epit2_ipg		84
+	reserved		85
+	esdhc1_ipg		86
+	esdhc2_ipg		87
+	fec_ipg			88
+	reserved		89
+	reserved		90
+	reserved		91
+	gpt1_ipg		92
+	gpt2_ipg		93
+	gpt3_ipg		94
+	gpt4_ipg		95
+	reserved		96
+	reserved		97
+	reserved		98
+	iim_ipg			99
+	reserved		100
+	reserved		101
+	kpp_ipg			102
+	lcdc_ipg		103
+	reserved		104
+	pwm1_ipg		105
+	pwm2_ipg		106
+	pwm3_ipg		107
+	pwm4_ipg		108
+	rngb_ipg		109
+	reserved		110
+	scc_ipg			111
+	sdma_ipg		112
+	sim1_ipg		113
+	sim2_ipg		114
+	slcdc_ipg		115
+	spba_ipg		116
+	ssi1_ipg		117
+	ssi2_ipg		118
+	tsc_ipg			119
+	uart1_ipg		120
+	uart2_ipg		121
+	uart3_ipg		122
+	uart4_ipg		123
+	uart5_ipg		124
+	reserved		125
+	wdt_ipg			126
+
+Examples:
+
+clks: ccm@53f80000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx25-ccm";
+	reg = <0x53f80000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <31>;
+};
+
+uart1: serial@43f90000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx25-uart", "fsl,imx21-uart";
+	reg = <0x43f90000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <45>;
+	clocks = <&clks 79>, <&clks 50>;
+	clock-names = "ipg", "per";
+	status = "disabled";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx27-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx27-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7a2070393732
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx27-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+* Clock bindings for Freescale i.MX27
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx27-ccm"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set
+- interrupts: Should contain CCM interrupt
+- #clock-cells: Should be <1>
+
+The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock
+ID in its "clocks" phandle cell.  The following is a full list of i.MX27
+clocks and IDs.
+
+	Clock		    ID
+	-----------------------
+	dummy                0
+	ckih                 1
+	ckil                 2
+	mpll                 3
+	spll                 4
+	mpll_main2           5
+	ahb                  6
+	ipg                  7
+	nfc_div              8
+	per1_div             9
+	per2_div             10
+	per3_div             11
+	per4_div             12
+	vpu_sel              13
+	vpu_div              14
+	usb_div              15
+	cpu_sel              16
+	clko_sel             17
+	cpu_div              18
+	clko_div             19
+	ssi1_sel             20
+	ssi2_sel             21
+	ssi1_div             22
+	ssi2_div             23
+	clko_en              24
+	ssi2_ipg_gate        25
+	ssi1_ipg_gate        26
+	slcdc_ipg_gate       27
+	sdhc3_ipg_gate       28
+	sdhc2_ipg_gate       29
+	sdhc1_ipg_gate       30
+	scc_ipg_gate         31
+	sahara_ipg_gate      32
+	rtc_ipg_gate         33
+	pwm_ipg_gate         34
+	owire_ipg_gate       35
+	lcdc_ipg_gate        36
+	kpp_ipg_gate         37
+	iim_ipg_gate         38
+	i2c2_ipg_gate        39
+	i2c1_ipg_gate        40
+	gpt6_ipg_gate        41
+	gpt5_ipg_gate        42
+	gpt4_ipg_gate        43
+	gpt3_ipg_gate        44
+	gpt2_ipg_gate        45
+	gpt1_ipg_gate        46
+	gpio_ipg_gate        47
+	fec_ipg_gate         48
+	emma_ipg_gate        49
+	dma_ipg_gate         50
+	cspi3_ipg_gate       51
+	cspi2_ipg_gate       52
+	cspi1_ipg_gate       53
+	nfc_baud_gate        54
+	ssi2_baud_gate       55
+	ssi1_baud_gate       56
+	vpu_baud_gate        57
+	per4_gate            58
+	per3_gate            59
+	per2_gate            60
+	per1_gate            61
+	usb_ahb_gate         62
+	slcdc_ahb_gate       63
+	sahara_ahb_gate      64
+	lcdc_ahb_gate        65
+	vpu_ahb_gate         66
+	fec_ahb_gate         67
+	emma_ahb_gate        68
+	emi_ahb_gate         69
+	dma_ahb_gate         70
+	csi_ahb_gate         71
+	brom_ahb_gate        72
+	ata_ahb_gate         73
+	wdog_ipg_gate        74
+	usb_ipg_gate         75
+	uart6_ipg_gate       76
+	uart5_ipg_gate       77
+	uart4_ipg_gate       78
+	uart3_ipg_gate       79
+	uart2_ipg_gate       80
+	uart1_ipg_gate       81
+	ckih_div1p5          82
+	fpm                  83
+	mpll_osc_sel         84
+	mpll_sel             85
+	spll_gate	     86
+
+Examples:
+
+clks: ccm@10027000{
+	compatible = "fsl,imx27-ccm";
+	reg = <0x10027000 0x1000>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+uart1: serial@1000a000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx27-uart", "fsl,imx21-uart";
+	reg = <0x1000a000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <20>;
+	clocks = <&clks 81>, <&clks 61>;
+	clock-names = "ipg", "per";
+	status = "disabled";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx28-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx28-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e6587af62ff0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx28-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+* Clock bindings for Freescale i.MX28
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx28-clkctrl"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set
+- #clock-cells: Should be <1>
+
+The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock
+ID in its "clocks" phandle cell.  The following is a full list of i.MX28
+clocks and IDs.
+
+	Clock		ID
+	------------------
+	ref_xtal	0
+	pll0		1
+	pll1		2
+	pll2		3
+	ref_cpu		4
+	ref_emi		5
+	ref_io0		6
+	ref_io1		7
+	ref_pix		8
+	ref_hsadc	9
+	ref_gpmi	10
+	saif0_sel	11
+	saif1_sel	12
+	gpmi_sel	13
+	ssp0_sel	14
+	ssp1_sel	15
+	ssp2_sel	16
+	ssp3_sel	17
+	emi_sel		18
+	etm_sel		19
+	lcdif_sel	20
+	cpu		21
+	ptp_sel		22
+	cpu_pll		23
+	cpu_xtal	24
+	hbus		25
+	xbus		26
+	ssp0_div	27
+	ssp1_div	28
+	ssp2_div	29
+	ssp3_div	30
+	gpmi_div	31
+	emi_pll		32
+	emi_xtal	33
+	lcdif_div	34
+	etm_div		35
+	ptp		36
+	saif0_div	37
+	saif1_div	38
+	clk32k_div	39
+	rtc		40
+	lradc		41
+	spdif_div	42
+	clk32k		43
+	pwm		44
+	uart		45
+	ssp0		46
+	ssp1		47
+	ssp2		48
+	ssp3		49
+	gpmi		50
+	spdif		51
+	emi		52
+	saif0		53
+	saif1		54
+	lcdif		55
+	etm		56
+	fec		57
+	can0		58
+	can1		59
+	usb0		60
+	usb1		61
+	usb0_phy	62
+	usb1_phy	63
+	enet_out	64
+
+Examples:
+
+clks: clkctrl@80040000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-clkctrl";
+	reg = <0x80040000 0x2000>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+auart0: serial@8006a000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-auart", "fsl,imx23-auart";
+	reg = <0x8006a000 0x2000>;
+	interrupts = <112 70 71>;
+	clocks = <&clks 45>;
+	status = "disabled";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx31-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx31-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..19df842c694f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx31-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+* Clock bindings for Freescale i.MX31
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx31-ccm"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set
+- interrupts: Should contain CCM interrupt
+- #clock-cells: Should be <1>
+
+The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock
+ID in its "clocks" phandle cell.  The following is a full list of i.MX31
+clocks and IDs.
+
+	Clock		    ID
+	-----------------------
+	dummy	             0
+	ckih                 1
+	ckil                 2
+	mpll                 3
+	spll                 4
+	upll                 5
+	mcu_main             6
+	hsp                  7
+	ahb                  8
+	nfc                  9
+	ipg                  10
+	per_div              11
+	per                  12
+	csi_sel              13
+	fir_sel              14
+	csi_div              15
+	usb_div_pre          16
+	usb_div_post         17
+	fir_div_pre          18
+	fir_div_post         19
+	sdhc1_gate           20
+	sdhc2_gate           21
+	gpt_gate             22
+	epit1_gate           23
+	epit2_gate           24
+	iim_gate             25
+	ata_gate             26
+	sdma_gate            27
+	cspi3_gate           28
+	rng_gate             29
+	uart1_gate           30
+	uart2_gate           31
+	ssi1_gate            32
+	i2c1_gate            33
+	i2c2_gate            34
+	i2c3_gate            35
+	hantro_gate          36
+	mstick1_gate         37
+	mstick2_gate         38
+	csi_gate             39
+	rtc_gate             40
+	wdog_gate            41
+	pwm_gate             42
+	sim_gate             43
+	ect_gate             44
+	usb_gate             45
+	kpp_gate             46
+	ipu_gate             47
+	uart3_gate           48
+	uart4_gate           49
+	uart5_gate           50
+	owire_gate           51
+	ssi2_gate            52
+	cspi1_gate           53
+	cspi2_gate           54
+	gacc_gate            55
+	emi_gate             56
+	rtic_gate            57
+	firi_gate            58
+
+Examples:
+
+clks: ccm@53f80000{
+	compatible = "fsl,imx31-ccm";
+	reg = <0x53f80000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <0 31 0x04 0 53 0x04>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+uart1: serial@43f90000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx31-uart", "fsl,imx21-uart";
+	reg = <0x43f90000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <45>;
+	clocks = <&clks 10>, <&clks 30>;
+	clock-names = "ipg", "per";
+	status = "disabled";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx5-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx5-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4c029a8739d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx5-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
+* Clock bindings for Freescale i.MX5
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,<soc>-ccm" , where <soc> can be imx51 or imx53
+- reg: Address and length of the register set
+- interrupts: Should contain CCM interrupt
+- #clock-cells: Should be <1>
+
+The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock
+ID in its "clocks" phandle cell.  The following is a full list of i.MX5
+clocks and IDs.
+
+	Clock			ID
+	---------------------------
+	dummy			0
+	ckil			1
+	osc			2
+	ckih1			3
+	ckih2			4
+	ahb			5
+	ipg			6
+	axi_a			7
+	axi_b			8
+	uart_pred		9
+	uart_root		10
+	esdhc_a_pred		11
+	esdhc_b_pred		12
+	esdhc_c_s		13
+	esdhc_d_s		14
+	emi_sel			15
+	emi_slow_podf		16
+	nfc_podf		17
+	ecspi_pred		18
+	ecspi_podf		19
+	usboh3_pred		20
+	usboh3_podf		21
+	usb_phy_pred		22
+	usb_phy_podf		23
+	cpu_podf		24
+	di_pred			25
+	tve_s			27
+	uart1_ipg_gate		28
+	uart1_per_gate		29
+	uart2_ipg_gate		30
+	uart2_per_gate		31
+	uart3_ipg_gate		32
+	uart3_per_gate		33
+	i2c1_gate		34
+	i2c2_gate		35
+	gpt_ipg_gate		36
+	pwm1_ipg_gate		37
+	pwm1_hf_gate		38
+	pwm2_ipg_gate		39
+	pwm2_hf_gate		40
+	gpt_hf_gate		41
+	fec_gate		42
+	usboh3_per_gate		43
+	esdhc1_ipg_gate		44
+	esdhc2_ipg_gate		45
+	esdhc3_ipg_gate		46
+	esdhc4_ipg_gate		47
+	ssi1_ipg_gate		48
+	ssi2_ipg_gate		49
+	ssi3_ipg_gate		50
+	ecspi1_ipg_gate		51
+	ecspi1_per_gate		52
+	ecspi2_ipg_gate		53
+	ecspi2_per_gate		54
+	cspi_ipg_gate		55
+	sdma_gate		56
+	emi_slow_gate		57
+	ipu_s			58
+	ipu_gate		59
+	nfc_gate		60
+	ipu_di1_gate		61
+	vpu_s			62
+	vpu_gate		63
+	vpu_reference_gate	64
+	uart4_ipg_gate		65
+	uart4_per_gate		66
+	uart5_ipg_gate		67
+	uart5_per_gate		68
+	tve_gate		69
+	tve_pred		70
+	esdhc1_per_gate		71
+	esdhc2_per_gate		72
+	esdhc3_per_gate		73
+	esdhc4_per_gate		74
+	usb_phy_gate		75
+	hsi2c_gate		76
+	mipi_hsc1_gate		77
+	mipi_hsc2_gate		78
+	mipi_esc_gate		79
+	mipi_hsp_gate		80
+	ldb_di1_div_3_5		81
+	ldb_di1_div		82
+	ldb_di0_div_3_5		83
+	ldb_di0_div		84
+	ldb_di1_gate		85
+	can2_serial_gate	86
+	can2_ipg_gate		87
+	i2c3_gate		88
+	lp_apm			89
+	periph_apm		90
+	main_bus		91
+	ahb_max			92
+	aips_tz1		93
+	aips_tz2		94
+	tmax1			95
+	tmax2			96
+	tmax3			97
+	spba			98
+	uart_sel		99
+	esdhc_a_sel		100
+	esdhc_b_sel		101
+	esdhc_a_podf		102
+	esdhc_b_podf		103
+	ecspi_sel		104
+	usboh3_sel		105
+	usb_phy_sel		106
+	iim_gate		107
+	usboh3_gate		108
+	emi_fast_gate		109
+	ipu_di0_gate		110
+	gpc_dvfs		111
+	pll1_sw			112
+	pll2_sw			113
+	pll3_sw			114
+	ipu_di0_sel		115
+	ipu_di1_sel		116
+	tve_ext_sel		117
+	mx51_mipi		118
+	pll4_sw			119
+	ldb_di1_sel		120
+	di_pll4_podf		121
+	ldb_di0_sel		122
+	ldb_di0_gate		123
+	usb_phy1_gate		124
+	usb_phy2_gate		125
+	per_lp_apm		126
+	per_pred1		127
+	per_pred2		128
+	per_podf		129
+	per_root		130
+	ssi_apm			131
+	ssi1_root_sel		132
+	ssi2_root_sel		133
+	ssi3_root_sel		134
+	ssi_ext1_sel		135
+	ssi_ext2_sel		136
+	ssi_ext1_com_sel	137
+	ssi_ext2_com_sel	138
+	ssi1_root_pred		139
+	ssi1_root_podf		140
+	ssi2_root_pred		141
+	ssi2_root_podf		142
+	ssi_ext1_pred		143
+	ssi_ext1_podf		144
+	ssi_ext2_pred		145
+	ssi_ext2_podf		146
+	ssi1_root_gate		147
+	ssi2_root_gate		148
+	ssi3_root_gate		149
+	ssi_ext1_gate		150
+	ssi_ext2_gate		151
+	epit1_ipg_gate		152
+	epit1_hf_gate		153
+	epit2_ipg_gate		154
+	epit2_hf_gate		155
+	can_sel			156
+	can1_serial_gate	157
+	can1_ipg_gate		158
+	owire_gate		159
+	gpu3d_s			160
+	gpu2d_s			161
+	gpu3d_gate		162
+	gpu2d_gate		163
+	garb_gate		164
+	cko1_sel		165
+	cko1_podf		166
+	cko1			167
+	cko2_sel		168
+	cko2_podf		169
+	cko2			170
+	srtc_gate		171
+	pata_gate		172
+	sata_gate		173
+	spdif_xtal_sel		174
+	spdif0_sel		175
+	spdif1_sel		176
+	spdif0_pred		177
+	spdif0_podf		178
+	spdif1_pred		179
+	spdif1_podf		180
+	spdif0_com_sel		181
+	spdif1_com_sel		182
+	spdif0_gate		183
+	spdif1_gate		184
+	spdif_ipg_gate		185
+	ocram			186
+
+Examples (for mx53):
+
+clks: ccm@53fd4000{
+	compatible = "fsl,imx53-ccm";
+	reg = <0x53fd4000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <0 71 0x04 0 72 0x04>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+can1: can@53fc8000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx53-flexcan", "fsl,p1010-flexcan";
+	reg = <0x53fc8000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <82>;
+	clocks = <&clks 158>, <&clks 157>;
+	clock-names = "ipg", "per";
+	status = "disabled";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6q-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6q-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5a90a724b520
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6q-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+* Clock bindings for Freescale i.MX6 Quad
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx6q-ccm"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set
+- interrupts: Should contain CCM interrupt
+- #clock-cells: Should be <1>
+
+The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock
+ID in its "clocks" phandle cell.  The following is a full list of i.MX6Q
+clocks and IDs.
+
+	Clock			ID
+	---------------------------
+	dummy			0
+	ckil			1
+	ckih			2
+	osc			3
+	pll2_pfd0_352m		4
+	pll2_pfd1_594m		5
+	pll2_pfd2_396m		6
+	pll3_pfd0_720m		7
+	pll3_pfd1_540m		8
+	pll3_pfd2_508m		9
+	pll3_pfd3_454m		10
+	pll2_198m		11
+	pll3_120m		12
+	pll3_80m		13
+	pll3_60m		14
+	twd			15
+	step			16
+	pll1_sw			17
+	periph_pre		18
+	periph2_pre		19
+	periph_clk2_sel		20
+	periph2_clk2_sel	21
+	axi_sel			22
+	esai_sel		23
+	asrc_sel		24
+	spdif_sel		25
+	gpu2d_axi		26
+	gpu3d_axi		27
+	gpu2d_core_sel		28
+	gpu3d_core_sel		29
+	gpu3d_shader_sel	30
+	ipu1_sel		31
+	ipu2_sel		32
+	ldb_di0_sel		33
+	ldb_di1_sel		34
+	ipu1_di0_pre_sel	35
+	ipu1_di1_pre_sel	36
+	ipu2_di0_pre_sel	37
+	ipu2_di1_pre_sel	38
+	ipu1_di0_sel		39
+	ipu1_di1_sel		40
+	ipu2_di0_sel		41
+	ipu2_di1_sel		42
+	hsi_tx_sel		43
+	pcie_axi_sel		44
+	ssi1_sel		45
+	ssi2_sel		46
+	ssi3_sel		47
+	usdhc1_sel		48
+	usdhc2_sel		49
+	usdhc3_sel		50
+	usdhc4_sel		51
+	enfc_sel		52
+	emi_sel			53
+	emi_slow_sel		54
+	vdo_axi_sel		55
+	vpu_axi_sel		56
+	cko1_sel		57
+	periph			58
+	periph2			59
+	periph_clk2		60
+	periph2_clk2		61
+	ipg			62
+	ipg_per			63
+	esai_pred		64
+	esai_podf		65
+	asrc_pred		66
+	asrc_podf		67
+	spdif_pred		68
+	spdif_podf		69
+	can_root		70
+	ecspi_root		71
+	gpu2d_core_podf		72
+	gpu3d_core_podf		73
+	gpu3d_shader		74
+	ipu1_podf		75
+	ipu2_podf		76
+	ldb_di0_podf		77
+	ldb_di1_podf		78
+	ipu1_di0_pre		79
+	ipu1_di1_pre		80
+	ipu2_di0_pre		81
+	ipu2_di1_pre		82
+	hsi_tx_podf		83
+	ssi1_pred		84
+	ssi1_podf		85
+	ssi2_pred		86
+	ssi2_podf		87
+	ssi3_pred		88
+	ssi3_podf		89
+	uart_serial_podf	90
+	usdhc1_podf		91
+	usdhc2_podf		92
+	usdhc3_podf		93
+	usdhc4_podf		94
+	enfc_pred		95
+	enfc_podf		96
+	emi_podf		97
+	emi_slow_podf		98
+	vpu_axi_podf		99
+	cko1_podf		100
+	axi			101
+	mmdc_ch0_axi_podf	102
+	mmdc_ch1_axi_podf	103
+	arm			104
+	ahb			105
+	apbh_dma		106
+	asrc			107
+	can1_ipg		108
+	can1_serial		109
+	can2_ipg		110
+	can2_serial		111
+	ecspi1			112
+	ecspi2			113
+	ecspi3			114
+	ecspi4			115
+	ecspi5			116
+	enet			117
+	esai			118
+	gpt_ipg			119
+	gpt_ipg_per		120
+	gpu2d_core		121
+	gpu3d_core		122
+	hdmi_iahb		123
+	hdmi_isfr		124
+	i2c1			125
+	i2c2			126
+	i2c3			127
+	iim			128
+	enfc			129
+	ipu1			130
+	ipu1_di0		131
+	ipu1_di1		132
+	ipu2			133
+	ipu2_di0		134
+	ldb_di0			135
+	ldb_di1			136
+	ipu2_di1		137
+	hsi_tx			138
+	mlb			139
+	mmdc_ch0_axi		140
+	mmdc_ch1_axi		141
+	ocram			142
+	openvg_axi		143
+	pcie_axi		144
+	pwm1			145
+	pwm2			146
+	pwm3			147
+	pwm4			148
+	per1_bch		149
+	gpmi_bch_apb		150
+	gpmi_bch		151
+	gpmi_io			152
+	gpmi_apb		153
+	sata			154
+	sdma			155
+	spba			156
+	ssi1			157
+	ssi2			158
+	ssi3			159
+	uart_ipg		160
+	uart_serial		161
+	usboh3			162
+	usdhc1			163
+	usdhc2			164
+	usdhc3			165
+	usdhc4			166
+	vdo_axi			167
+	vpu_axi			168
+	cko1			169
+	pll1_sys		170
+	pll2_bus		171
+	pll3_usb_otg		172
+	pll4_audio		173
+	pll5_video		174
+	pll8_mlb		175
+	pll7_usb_host		176
+	pll6_enet		177
+	ssi1_ipg		178
+	ssi2_ipg		179
+	ssi3_ipg		180
+	rom			181
+	usbphy1			182
+	usbphy2			183
+	ldb_di0_div_3_5		184
+	ldb_di1_div_3_5		185
+	sata_ref		186
+	sata_ref_100m		187
+	pcie_ref		188
+	pcie_ref_125m		189
+	enet_ref		190
+	usbphy1_gate		191
+	usbphy2_gate		192
+	pll4_post_div		193
+	pll5_post_div		194
+	pll5_video_div		195
+	eim_slow      		196
+	spdif      		197
+	cko2_sel      		198
+	cko2_podf      		199
+	cko2      		200
+	cko      		201
+	vdoa      		202
+
+Examples:
+
+clks: ccm@020c4000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx6q-ccm";
+	reg = <0x020c4000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <0 87 0x04 0 88 0x04>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+uart1: serial@02020000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx6q-uart", "fsl,imx21-uart";
+	reg = <0x02020000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <0 26 0x04>;
+	clocks = <&clks 160>, <&clks 161>;
+	clock-names = "ipg", "per";
+	status = "disabled";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6sl-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6sl-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..15e40bdf147d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6sl-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+* Clock bindings for Freescale i.MX6 SoloLite
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx6sl-ccm"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set
+- #clock-cells: Should be <1>
+
+The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock
+ID in its "clocks" phandle cell.  See include/dt-bindings/clock/imx6sl-clock.h
+for the full list of i.MX6 SoloLite clock IDs.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-core-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-core-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1e662948661e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-core-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+* Core Clock bindings for Marvell MVEBU SoCs
+
+Marvell MVEBU SoCs usually allow to determine core clock frequencies by
+reading the Sample-At-Reset (SAR) register. The core clock consumer should
+specify the desired clock by having the clock ID in its "clocks" phandle cell.
+
+The following is a list of provided IDs and clock names on Armada 370/XP:
+ 0 = tclk    (Internal Bus clock)
+ 1 = cpuclk  (CPU clock)
+ 2 = nbclk   (L2 Cache clock)
+ 3 = hclk    (DRAM control clock)
+ 4 = dramclk (DDR clock)
+
+The following is a list of provided IDs and clock names on Kirkwood and Dove:
+ 0 = tclk   (Internal Bus clock)
+ 1 = cpuclk (CPU0 clock)
+ 2 = l2clk  (L2 Cache clock derived from CPU0 clock)
+ 3 = ddrclk (DDR controller clock derived from CPU0 clock)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : shall be one of the following:
+	"marvell,armada-370-core-clock" - For Armada 370 SoC core clocks
+	"marvell,armada-xp-core-clock" - For Armada XP SoC core clocks
+	"marvell,dove-core-clock" - for Dove SoC core clocks
+	"marvell,kirkwood-core-clock" - for Kirkwood SoC (except mv88f6180)
+	"marvell,mv88f6180-core-clock" - for Kirkwood MV88f6180 SoC
+- reg : shall be the register address of the Sample-At-Reset (SAR) register
+- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 1
+
+Optional properties:
+- clock-output-names : from common clock binding; allows overwrite default clock
+	output names ("tclk", "cpuclk", "l2clk", "ddrclk")
+
+Example:
+
+core_clk: core-clocks@d0214 {
+	compatible = "marvell,dove-core-clock";
+	reg = <0xd0214 0x4>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+spi0: spi@10600 {
+	compatible = "marvell,orion-spi";
+	/* ... */
+	/* get tclk from core clock provider */
+	clocks = <&core_clk 0>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-cpu-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-cpu-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..feb830130714
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-cpu-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+Device Tree Clock bindings for cpu clock of Marvell EBU platforms
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : shall be one of the following:
+	"marvell,armada-xp-cpu-clock" - cpu clocks for Armada XP
+- reg : Address and length of the clock complex register set
+- #clock-cells : should be set to 1.
+- clocks : shall be the input parent clock phandle for the clock.
+
+cpuclk: clock-complex@d0018700 {
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+	compatible = "marvell,armada-xp-cpu-clock";
+	reg = <0xd0018700 0xA0>;
+	clocks = <&coreclk 1>;
+}
+
+cpu@0 {
+	compatible = "marvell,sheeva-v7";
+	reg = <0>;
+	clocks = <&cpuclk 0>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-gated-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-gated-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cffc93d97f54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-gated-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+* Gated Clock bindings for Marvell Orion SoCs
+
+Marvell Dove and Kirkwood allow some peripheral clocks to be gated to save
+some power. The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having
+the clock ID in its "clocks" phandle cell. The clock ID is directly mapped to
+the corresponding clock gating control bit in HW to ease manual clock lookup
+in datasheet.
+
+The following is a list of provided IDs for Armada 370:
+ID	Clock	Peripheral
+-----------------------------------
+0	Audio	AC97 Cntrl
+1	pex0_en	PCIe 0 Clock out
+2	pex1_en	PCIe 1 Clock out
+3	ge1	Gigabit Ethernet 1
+4	ge0	Gigabit Ethernet 0
+5	pex0	PCIe Cntrl 0
+9	pex1	PCIe Cntrl 1
+15	sata0	SATA Host 0
+17	sdio	SDHCI Host
+25	tdm	Time Division Mplx
+28	ddr	DDR Cntrl
+30	sata1	SATA Host 0
+
+The following is a list of provided IDs for Armada XP:
+ID	Clock	Peripheral
+-----------------------------------
+0	audio	Audio Cntrl
+1	ge3	Gigabit Ethernet 3
+2	ge2	Gigabit Ethernet 2
+3	ge1	Gigabit Ethernet 1
+4	ge0	Gigabit Ethernet 0
+5	pex0	PCIe Cntrl 0
+6	pex1	PCIe Cntrl 1
+7	pex2	PCIe Cntrl 2
+8	pex3	PCIe Cntrl 3
+13	bp
+14	sata0lnk
+15	sata0	SATA Host 0
+16	lcd	LCD Cntrl
+17	sdio	SDHCI Host
+18	usb0	USB Host 0
+19	usb1	USB Host 1
+20	usb2	USB Host 2
+22	xor0	XOR DMA 0
+23	crypto	CESA engine
+25	tdm	Time Division Mplx
+28	xor1	XOR DMA 1
+29	sata1lnk
+30	sata1	SATA Host 0
+
+The following is a list of provided IDs for Dove:
+ID	Clock	Peripheral
+-----------------------------------
+0	usb0	USB Host 0
+1	usb1	USB Host 1
+2	ge	Gigabit Ethernet
+3	sata	SATA Host
+4	pex0	PCIe Cntrl 0
+5	pex1	PCIe Cntrl 1
+8	sdio0	SDHCI Host 0
+9	sdio1	SDHCI Host 1
+10	nand	NAND Cntrl
+11	camera	Camera Cntrl
+12	i2s0	I2S Cntrl 0
+13	i2s1	I2S Cntrl 1
+15	crypto	CESA engine
+21	ac97	AC97 Cntrl
+22	pdma	Peripheral DMA
+23	xor0	XOR DMA 0
+24	xor1	XOR DMA 1
+30	gephy	Gigabit Ethernel PHY
+Note: gephy(30) is implemented as a parent clock of ge(2)
+
+The following is a list of provided IDs for Kirkwood:
+ID	Clock	Peripheral
+-----------------------------------
+0	ge0	Gigabit Ethernet 0
+2	pex0	PCIe Cntrl 0
+3	usb0	USB Host 0
+4	sdio	SDIO Cntrl
+5	tsu	Transp. Stream Unit
+6	dunit	SDRAM Cntrl
+7	runit	Runit
+8	xor0	XOR DMA 0
+9	audio	I2S Cntrl 0
+14	sata0	SATA Host 0
+15	sata1	SATA Host 1
+16	xor1	XOR DMA 1
+17	crypto	CESA engine
+18	pex1	PCIe Cntrl 1
+19	ge1	Gigabit Ethernet 1
+20	tdm	Time Division Mplx
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : shall be one of the following:
+	"marvell,dove-gating-clock" - for Dove SoC clock gating
+	"marvell,kirkwood-gating-clock" - for Kirkwood SoC clock gating
+- reg : shall be the register address of the Clock Gating Control register
+- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 1
+
+Optional properties:
+- clocks : default parent clock phandle (e.g. tclk)
+
+Example:
+
+gate_clk: clock-gating-control@d0038 {
+	compatible = "marvell,dove-gating-clock";
+	reg = <0xd0038 0x4>;
+	/* default parent clock is tclk */
+	clocks = <&core_clk 0>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+sdio0: sdio@92000 {
+	compatible = "marvell,dove-sdhci";
+	/* get clk gate bit 8 (sdio0) */
+	clocks = <&gate_clk 8>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nspire-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nspire-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7c3bc8bb5b9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nspire-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+TI-NSPIRE Clocks
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Valid compatible properties include:
+	"lsi,nspire-cx-ahb-divider" for the AHB divider in the CX model
+	"lsi,nspire-classic-ahb-divider" for the AHB divider in the older model
+	"lsi,nspire-cx-clock" for the base clock in the CX model
+	"lsi,nspire-classic-clock" for the base clock in the older model
+
+- reg: Physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+	region.
+
+Optional:
+- clocks: For the "nspire-*-ahb-divider" compatible clocks, this is the parent
+	clock where it divides the rate from.
+
+Example:
+
+ahb_clk {
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "lsi,nspire-cx-clock";
+	reg = <0x900B0000 0x4>;
+	clocks = <&base_clk>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra114-car.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra114-car.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0c80c2677104
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra114-car.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra114 Clock And Reset Controller
+
+This binding uses the common clock binding:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+The CAR (Clock And Reset) Controller on Tegra is the HW module responsible
+for muxing and gating Tegra's clocks, and setting their rates.
+
+Required properties :
+- compatible : Should be "nvidia,tegra114-car"
+- reg : Should contain CAR registers location and length
+- clocks : Should contain phandle and clock specifiers for two clocks:
+  the 32 KHz "32k_in", and the board-specific oscillator "osc".
+- #clock-cells : Should be 1.
+  In clock consumers, this cell represents the clock ID exposed by the
+  CAR. The assignments may be found in header file
+  <dt-bindings/clock/tegra114-car.h>.
+
+Example SoC include file:
+
+/ {
+	tegra_car: clock {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra114-car";
+		reg = <0x60006000 0x1000>;
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+	};
+
+	usb@c5004000 {
+		clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA114_CLK_USB2>;
+	};
+};
+
+Example board file:
+
+/ {
+	clocks {
+		compatible = "simple-bus";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		osc: clock@0 {
+			compatible = "fixed-clock";
+			reg = <0>;
+			#clock-cells = <0>;
+			clock-frequency = <12000000>;
+		};
+
+		clk_32k: clock@1 {
+			compatible = "fixed-clock";
+			reg = <1>;
+			#clock-cells = <0>;
+			clock-frequency = <32768>;
+		};
+	};
+
+	&tegra_car {
+		clocks = <&clk_32k> <&osc>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra20-car.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra20-car.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fcfed5bf73fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra20-car.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra20 Clock And Reset Controller
+
+This binding uses the common clock binding:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+The CAR (Clock And Reset) Controller on Tegra is the HW module responsible
+for muxing and gating Tegra's clocks, and setting their rates.
+
+Required properties :
+- compatible : Should be "nvidia,tegra20-car"
+- reg : Should contain CAR registers location and length
+- clocks : Should contain phandle and clock specifiers for two clocks:
+  the 32 KHz "32k_in", and the board-specific oscillator "osc".
+- #clock-cells : Should be 1.
+  In clock consumers, this cell represents the clock ID exposed by the
+  CAR. The assignments may be found in header file
+  <dt-bindings/clock/tegra20-car.h>.
+
+Example SoC include file:
+
+/ {
+	tegra_car: clock {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-car";
+		reg = <0x60006000 0x1000>;
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+	};
+
+	usb@c5004000 {
+		clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA20_CLK_USB2>;
+	};
+};
+
+Example board file:
+
+/ {
+	clocks {
+		compatible = "simple-bus";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		osc: clock@0 {
+			compatible = "fixed-clock";
+			reg = <0>;
+			#clock-cells = <0>;
+			clock-frequency = <12000000>;
+		};
+
+		clk_32k: clock@1 {
+			compatible = "fixed-clock";
+			reg = <1>;
+			#clock-cells = <0>;
+			clock-frequency = <32768>;
+		};
+	};
+
+	&tegra_car {
+		clocks = <&clk_32k> <&osc>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra30-car.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra30-car.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0f714081e986
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/nvidia,tegra30-car.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra30 Clock And Reset Controller
+
+This binding uses the common clock binding:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+The CAR (Clock And Reset) Controller on Tegra is the HW module responsible
+for muxing and gating Tegra's clocks, and setting their rates.
+
+Required properties :
+- compatible : Should be "nvidia,tegra30-car"
+- reg : Should contain CAR registers location and length
+- clocks : Should contain phandle and clock specifiers for two clocks:
+  the 32 KHz "32k_in", and the board-specific oscillator "osc".
+- #clock-cells : Should be 1.
+  In clock consumers, this cell represents the clock ID exposed by the
+  CAR. The assignments may be found in header file
+  <dt-bindings/clock/tegra30-car.h>.
+
+Example SoC include file:
+
+/ {
+	tegra_car: clock {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra30-car";
+		reg = <0x60006000 0x1000>;
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+	};
+
+	usb@c5004000 {
+		clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA30_CLK_USB2>;
+	};
+};
+
+Example board file:
+
+/ {
+	clocks {
+		compatible = "simple-bus";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		osc: clock@0 {
+			compatible = "fixed-clock";
+			reg = <0>;
+			#clock-cells = <0>;
+			clock-frequency = <12000000>;
+		};
+
+		clk_32k: clock@1 {
+			compatible = "fixed-clock";
+			reg = <1>;
+			#clock-cells = <0>;
+			clock-frequency = <32768>;
+		};
+	};
+
+	&tegra_car {
+		clocks = <&clk_32k> <&osc>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/prima2-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/prima2-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5016979c0f78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/prima2-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+* Clock bindings for CSR SiRFprimaII
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "sirf,prima2-clkc"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set
+- interrupts: Should contain clock controller interrupt
+- #clock-cells: Should be <1>
+
+The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock
+ID in its "clocks" phandle cell.  The following is a full list of prima2
+clocks and IDs.
+
+	Clock			ID
+	---------------------------
+	rtc			0
+	osc             	1
+	pll1            	2
+	pll2            	3
+	pll3            	4
+	mem             	5
+	sys             	6
+	security        	7
+	dsp             	8
+	gps             	9
+	mf              	10
+	io              	11
+	cpu             	12
+	uart0           	13
+	uart1           	14
+	uart2           	15
+	tsc             	16
+	i2c0            	17
+	i2c1            	18
+	spi0            	19
+	spi1            	20
+	pwmc            	21
+	efuse           	22
+	pulse           	23
+	dmac0           	24
+	dmac1           	25
+	nand            	26
+	audio           	27
+	usp0            	28
+	usp1            	29
+	usp2            	30
+	vip             	31
+	gfx             	32
+	mm              	33
+	lcd             	34
+	vpp             	35
+	mmc01           	36
+	mmc23           	37
+	mmc45           	38
+	usbpll          	39
+	usb0            	40
+	usb1			41
+
+Examples:
+
+clks: clock-controller@88000000 {
+	compatible = "sirf,prima2-clkc";
+	reg = <0x88000000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <3>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+i2c0: i2c@b00e0000 {
+	cell-index = <0>;
+	compatible = "sirf,prima2-i2c";
+	reg = <0xb00e0000 0x10000>;
+	interrupts = <24>;
+	clocks = <&clks 17>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/rockchip.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/rockchip.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a891c823ed44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/rockchip.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+Device Tree Clock bindings for arch-rockchip
+
+This binding uses the common clock binding[1].
+
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+== Gate clocks ==
+
+The gate registers form a continuos block which makes the dt node
+structure a matter of taste, as either all gates can be put into
+one gate clock spanning all registers or they can be divided into
+the 10 individual gates containing 16 clocks each.
+The code supports both approaches.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "rockchip,rk2928-gate-clk"
+- reg : shall be the control register address(es) for the clock.
+- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 1
+- clock-output-names : the corresponding gate names that the clock controls
+- clocks : should contain the parent clock for each individual gate,
+  therefore the number of clocks elements should match the number of
+  clock-output-names
+
+Example using multiple gate clocks:
+
+		clk_gates0: gate-clk@200000d0 {
+			compatible = "rockchip,rk2928-gate-clk";
+			reg = <0x200000d0 0x4>;
+			clocks = <&dummy>, <&dummy>,
+				 <&dummy>, <&dummy>,
+				 <&dummy>, <&dummy>,
+				 <&dummy>, <&dummy>,
+				 <&dummy>, <&dummy>,
+				 <&dummy>, <&dummy>,
+				 <&dummy>, <&dummy>,
+				 <&dummy>, <&dummy>;
+
+			clock-output-names =
+				"gate_core_periph", "gate_cpu_gpll",
+				"gate_ddrphy", "gate_aclk_cpu",
+				"gate_hclk_cpu", "gate_pclk_cpu",
+				"gate_atclk_cpu", "gate_i2s0",
+				"gate_i2s0_frac", "gate_i2s1",
+				"gate_i2s1_frac", "gate_i2s2",
+				"gate_i2s2_frac", "gate_spdif",
+				"gate_spdif_frac", "gate_testclk";
+
+			#clock-cells = <1>;
+		};
+
+		clk_gates1: gate-clk@200000d4 {
+			compatible = "rockchip,rk2928-gate-clk";
+			reg = <0x200000d4 0x4>;
+			clocks = <&xin24m>, <&xin24m>,
+				 <&xin24m>, <&dummy>,
+				 <&dummy>, <&xin24m>,
+				 <&xin24m>, <&dummy>,
+				 <&xin24m>, <&dummy>,
+				 <&xin24m>, <&dummy>,
+				 <&xin24m>, <&dummy>,
+				 <&xin24m>, <&dummy>;
+
+			clock-output-names =
+				"gate_timer0", "gate_timer1",
+				"gate_timer2", "gate_jtag",
+				"gate_aclk_lcdc1_src", "gate_otgphy0",
+				"gate_otgphy1", "gate_ddr_gpll",
+				"gate_uart0", "gate_frac_uart0",
+				"gate_uart1", "gate_frac_uart1",
+				"gate_uart2", "gate_frac_uart2",
+				"gate_uart3", "gate_frac_uart3";
+
+			#clock-cells = <1>;
+		};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c64xx-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c64xx-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fa171dc4bd3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c64xx-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+* Samsung S3C64xx Clock Controller
+
+The S3C64xx clock controller generates and supplies clock to various controllers
+within the SoC. The clock binding described here is applicable to all SoCs in
+the S3C64xx family.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+- compatible: should be one of the following.
+  - "samsung,s3c6400-clock" - controller compatible with S3C6400 SoC.
+  - "samsung,s3c6410-clock" - controller compatible with S3C6410 SoC.
+
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+- #clock-cells: should be 1.
+
+Each clock is assigned an identifier and client nodes can use this identifier
+to specify the clock which they consume. Some of the clocks are available only
+on a particular S3C64xx SoC and this is specified where applicable.
+
+All available clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in
+dt-bindings/clock/samsung,s3c64xx-clock.h header and can be used in device
+tree sources.
+
+External clocks:
+
+There are several clocks that are generated outside the SoC. It is expected
+that they are defined using standard clock bindings with following
+clock-output-names:
+ - "fin_pll" - PLL input clock (xtal/extclk) - required,
+ - "xusbxti" - USB xtal - required,
+ - "iiscdclk0" - I2S0 codec clock - optional,
+ - "iiscdclk1" - I2S1 codec clock - optional,
+ - "iiscdclk2" - I2S2 codec clock - optional,
+ - "pcmcdclk0" - PCM0 codec clock - optional,
+ - "pcmcdclk1" - PCM1 codec clock - optional, only S3C6410.
+
+Example: Clock controller node:
+
+	clock: clock-controller@7e00f000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,s3c6410-clock";
+		reg = <0x7e00f000 0x1000>;
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+	};
+
+Example: Required external clocks:
+
+	fin_pll: clock-fin-pll {
+		compatible = "fixed-clock";
+		clock-output-names = "fin_pll";
+		clock-frequency = <12000000>;
+		#clock-cells = <0>;
+	};
+
+	xusbxti: clock-xusbxti {
+		compatible = "fixed-clock";
+		clock-output-names = "xusbxti";
+		clock-frequency = <48000000>;
+		#clock-cells = <0>;
+	};
+
+Example: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock
+  controller (refer to the standard clock bindings for information about
+  "clocks" and "clock-names" properties):
+
+		uart0: serial@7f005000 {
+			compatible = "samsung,s3c6400-uart";
+			reg = <0x7f005000 0x100>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&vic1>;
+			interrupts = <5>;
+			clock-names = "uart", "clk_uart_baud2",
+					"clk_uart_baud3";
+			clocks = <&clock PCLK_UART0>, <&clocks PCLK_UART0>,
+					<&clock SCLK_UART>;
+			status = "disabled";
+		};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/silabs,si5351.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/silabs,si5351.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c40711e8e8f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/silabs,si5351.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+Binding for Silicon Labs Si5351a/b/c programmable i2c clock generator.
+
+Reference
+[1] Si5351A/B/C Data Sheet
+    http://www.silabs.com/Support%20Documents/TechnicalDocs/Si5351.pdf
+
+The Si5351a/b/c are programmable i2c clock generators with up to 8 output
+clocks. Si5351a also has a reduced pin-count package (MSOP10) where only
+3 output clocks are accessible. The internal structure of the clock
+generators can be found in [1].
+
+==I2C device node==
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: shall be one of "silabs,si5351{a,a-msop,b,c}".
+- reg: i2c device address, shall be 0x60 or 0x61.
+- #clock-cells: from common clock binding; shall be set to 1.
+- clocks: from common clock binding; list of parent clock
+  handles, shall be xtal reference clock or xtal and clkin for
+  si5351c only.
+- #address-cells: shall be set to 1.
+- #size-cells: shall be set to 0.
+
+Optional properties:
+- silabs,pll-source: pair of (number, source) for each pll. Allows
+  to overwrite clock source of pll A (number=0) or B (number=1).
+
+==Child nodes==
+
+Each of the clock outputs can be overwritten individually by
+using a child node to the I2C device node. If a child node for a clock
+output is not set, the eeprom configuration is not overwritten.
+
+Required child node properties:
+- reg: number of clock output.
+
+Optional child node properties:
+- silabs,clock-source: source clock of the output divider stage N, shall be
+  0 = multisynth N
+  1 = multisynth 0 for output clocks 0-3, else multisynth4
+  2 = xtal
+  3 = clkin (si5351c only)
+- silabs,drive-strength: output drive strength in mA, shall be one of {2,4,6,8}.
+- silabs,multisynth-source: source pll A(0) or B(1) of corresponding multisynth
+  divider.
+- silabs,pll-master: boolean, multisynth can change pll frequency.
+- silabs,disable-state : clock output disable state, shall be
+  0 = clock output is driven LOW when disabled
+  1 = clock output is driven HIGH when disabled
+  2 = clock output is FLOATING (HIGH-Z) when disabled
+  3 = clock output is NEVER disabled
+
+==Example==
+
+/* 25MHz reference crystal */
+ref25: ref25M {
+	compatible = "fixed-clock";
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	clock-frequency = <25000000>;
+};
+
+i2c-master-node {
+
+	/* Si5351a msop10 i2c clock generator */
+	si5351a: clock-generator@60 {
+		compatible = "silabs,si5351a-msop";
+		reg = <0x60>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+
+		/* connect xtal input to 25MHz reference */
+		clocks = <&ref25>;
+
+		/* connect xtal input as source of pll0 and pll1 */
+		silabs,pll-source = <0 0>, <1 0>;
+
+		/*
+		 * overwrite clkout0 configuration with:
+		 * - 8mA output drive strength
+		 * - pll0 as clock source of multisynth0
+		 * - multisynth0 as clock source of output divider
+		 * - multisynth0 can change pll0
+		 * - set initial clock frequency of 74.25MHz
+		 */
+		clkout0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+			silabs,drive-strength = <8>;
+			silabs,multisynth-source = <0>;
+			silabs,clock-source = <0>;
+			silabs,pll-master;
+			clock-frequency = <74250000>;
+		};
+
+		/*
+		 * overwrite clkout1 configuration with:
+		 * - 4mA output drive strength
+		 * - pll1 as clock source of multisynth1
+		 * - multisynth1 as clock source of output divider
+		 * - multisynth1 can change pll1
+		 */
+		clkout1 {
+			reg = <1>;
+			silabs,drive-strength = <4>;
+			silabs,multisynth-source = <1>;
+			silabs,clock-source = <0>;
+			pll-master;
+		};
+
+		/*
+		 * overwrite clkout2 configuration with:
+		 * - xtal as clock source of output divider
+		 */
+		clkout2 {
+			reg = <2>;
+			silabs,clock-source = <2>;
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st,nomadik.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st,nomadik.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..40e0cf1f7b99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st,nomadik.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+ST Microelectronics Nomadik SRC System Reset and Control
+
+This binding uses the common clock binding:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+The Nomadik SRC controller is responsible of controlling chrystals,
+PLLs and clock gates.
+
+Required properties for the SRC node:
+- compatible: must be "stericsson,nomadik-src"
+- reg: must contain the SRC register base and size
+
+Optional properties for the SRC node:
+- disable-sxtalo: if present this will disable the SXTALO
+  i.e. the driver output for the slow 32kHz chrystal, if the
+  board has its own circuitry for providing this oscillator
+- disable-mxtal: if present this will disable the MXTALO,
+  i.e. the driver output for the main (~19.2 MHz) chrystal,
+  if the board has its own circuitry for providing this
+  oscillator
+
+
+PLL nodes: these nodes represent the two PLLs on the system,
+which should both have the main chrystal, represented as a
+fixed frequency clock, as parent.
+
+Required properties for the two PLL nodes:
+- compatible: must be "st,nomadik-pll-clock"
+- clock-cells: must be 0
+- clock-id: must be 1 or 2 for PLL1 and PLL2 respectively
+- clocks: this clock will have main chrystal as parent
+
+
+HCLK nodes: these represent the clock gates on individual
+lines from the HCLK clock tree and the gate for individual
+lines from the PCLK clock tree.
+
+Requires properties for the HCLK nodes:
+- compatible: must be "st,nomadik-hclk-clock"
+- clock-cells: must be 0
+- clock-id: must be the clock ID from 0 to 63 according to
+  this table:
+
+	0:  HCLKDMA0
+	1:  HCLKSMC
+	2:  HCLKSDRAM
+	3:  HCLKDMA1
+	4:  HCLKCLCD
+	5:  PCLKIRDA
+	6:  PCLKSSP
+	7:  PCLKUART0
+	8:  PCLKSDI
+	9:  PCLKI2C0
+	10: PCLKI2C1
+	11: PCLKUART1
+	12: PCLMSP0
+	13: HCLKUSB
+	14: HCLKDIF
+	15: HCLKSAA
+	16: HCLKSVA
+	17: PCLKHSI
+	18: PCLKXTI
+	19: PCLKUART2
+	20: PCLKMSP1
+	21: PCLKMSP2
+	22: PCLKOWM
+	23: HCLKHPI
+	24: PCLKSKE
+	25: PCLKHSEM
+	26: HCLK3D
+	27: HCLKHASH
+	28: HCLKCRYP
+	29: PCLKMSHC
+	30: HCLKUSBM
+	31: HCLKRNG
+	(32, 33, 34, 35 RESERVED)
+	36: CLDCLK
+	37: IRDACLK
+	38: SSPICLK
+	39: UART0CLK
+	40: SDICLK
+	41: I2C0CLK
+	42: I2C1CLK
+	43: UART1CLK
+	44: MSPCLK0
+	45: USBCLK
+	46: DIFCLK
+	47: IPI2CCLK
+	48: IPBMCCLK
+	49: HSICLKRX
+	50: HSICLKTX
+	51: UART2CLK
+	52: MSPCLK1
+	53: MSPCLK2
+	54: OWMCLK
+	(55 RESERVED)
+	56: SKECLK
+	(57 RESERVED)
+	58: 3DCLK
+	59: PCLKMSP3
+	60: MSPCLK3
+	61: MSHCCLK
+	62: USBMCLK
+	63: RNGCCLK
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/ste-u300-syscon-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/ste-u300-syscon-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7cafcb98ead7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/ste-u300-syscon-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+Clock bindings for ST-Ericsson U300 System Controller Clocks
+
+Bindings for the gated system controller clocks:
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "stericsson,u300-syscon-clk"
+- #clock-cells: must be <0>
+- clock-type: specifies the type of clock:
+  0 = slow clock
+  1 = fast clock
+  2 = rest/remaining clock
+- clock-id: specifies the clock in the type range
+
+Optional properties:
+- clocks: parent clock(s)
+
+The available clocks per type are as follows:
+
+Type:  ID:   Clock:
+-------------------
+0      0     Slow peripheral bridge clock
+0      1     UART0 clock
+0      4     GPIO clock
+0      6     RTC clock
+0      7     Application timer clock
+0      8     Access timer clock
+
+1      0     Fast peripheral bridge clock
+1      1     I2C bus 0 clock
+1      2     I2C bus 1 clock
+1      5     MMC interface peripheral (silicon) clock
+1      6     SPI clock
+
+2      3     CPU clock
+2      4     DMA controller clock
+2      5     External Memory Interface (EMIF) clock
+2      6     NAND flask interface clock
+2      8     XGAM graphics engine clock
+2      9     Shared External Memory Interface (SEMI) clock
+2      10    AHB Subsystem Bridge clock
+2      12    Interrupt controller clock
+
+Example:
+
+gpio_clk: gpio_clk@13M {
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "stericsson,u300-syscon-clk";
+	clock-type = <0>; /* Slow */
+	clock-id = <4>;
+	clocks = <&slow_clk>;
+};
+
+gpio: gpio@c0016000 {
+	compatible = "stericsson,gpio-coh901";
+	(...)
+	clocks = <&gpio_clk>;
+};
+
+
+Bindings for the MMC/SD card clock:
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "stericsson,u300-syscon-mclk"
+- #clock-cells: must be <0>
+
+Optional properties:
+- clocks: parent clock(s)
+
+mmc_mclk: mmc_mclk {
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "stericsson,u300-syscon-mclk";
+	clocks = <&mmc_pclk>;
+};
+
+mmcsd: mmcsd@c0001000 {
+	compatible = "arm,pl18x", "arm,primecell";
+	clocks = <&mmc_pclk>, <&mmc_mclk>;
+	clock-names = "apb_pclk", "mclk";
+	(...)
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..00a5c26454eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+Device Tree Clock bindings for arch-sunxi
+
+This binding uses the common clock binding[1].
+
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : shall be one of the following:
+	"allwinner,sun4i-osc-clk" - for a gatable oscillator
+	"allwinner,sun4i-pll1-clk" - for the main PLL clock
+	"allwinner,sun6i-a31-pll1-clk" - for the main PLL clock on A31
+	"allwinner,sun4i-cpu-clk" - for the CPU multiplexer clock
+	"allwinner,sun4i-axi-clk" - for the AXI clock
+	"allwinner,sun4i-axi-gates-clk" - for the AXI gates
+	"allwinner,sun4i-ahb-clk" - for the AHB clock
+	"allwinner,sun4i-ahb-gates-clk" - for the AHB gates on A10
+	"allwinner,sun5i-a13-ahb-gates-clk" - for the AHB gates on A13
+	"allwinner,sun5i-a10s-ahb-gates-clk" - for the AHB gates on A10s
+	"allwinner,sun7i-a20-ahb-gates-clk" - for the AHB gates on A20
+	"allwinner,sun6i-a31-ahb1-mux-clk" - for the AHB1 multiplexer on A31
+	"allwinner,sun6i-a31-ahb1-gates-clk" - for the AHB1 gates on A31
+	"allwinner,sun4i-apb0-clk" - for the APB0 clock
+	"allwinner,sun4i-apb0-gates-clk" - for the APB0 gates on A10
+	"allwinner,sun5i-a13-apb0-gates-clk" - for the APB0 gates on A13
+	"allwinner,sun5i-a10s-apb0-gates-clk" - for the APB0 gates on A10s
+	"allwinner,sun7i-a20-apb0-gates-clk" - for the APB0 gates on A20
+	"allwinner,sun4i-apb1-clk" - for the APB1 clock
+	"allwinner,sun4i-apb1-mux-clk" - for the APB1 clock muxing
+	"allwinner,sun4i-apb1-gates-clk" - for the APB1 gates on A10
+	"allwinner,sun5i-a13-apb1-gates-clk" - for the APB1 gates on A13
+	"allwinner,sun5i-a10s-apb1-gates-clk" - for the APB1 gates on A10s
+	"allwinner,sun6i-a31-apb1-gates-clk" - for the APB1 gates on A31
+	"allwinner,sun7i-a20-apb1-gates-clk" - for the APB1 gates on A20
+	"allwinner,sun6i-a31-apb2-div-clk" - for the APB2 gates on A31
+	"allwinner,sun6i-a31-apb2-gates-clk" - for the APB2 gates on A31
+
+Required properties for all clocks:
+- reg : shall be the control register address for the clock.
+- clocks : shall be the input parent clock(s) phandle for the clock
+- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0 except for
+	"allwinner,*-gates-clk" where it shall be set to 1
+
+Additionally, "allwinner,*-gates-clk" clocks require:
+- clock-output-names : the corresponding gate names that the clock controls
+
+Clock consumers should specify the desired clocks they use with a
+"clocks" phandle cell. Consumers that are using a gated clock should
+provide an additional ID in their clock property. The values of this
+ID are documented in sunxi/<soc>-gates.txt.
+
+For example:
+
+osc24M: osc24M@01c20050 {
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-osc-clk";
+	reg = <0x01c20050 0x4>;
+	clocks = <&osc24M_fixed>;
+};
+
+pll1: pll1@01c20000 {
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-pll1-clk";
+	reg = <0x01c20000 0x4>;
+	clocks = <&osc24M>;
+};
+
+cpu: cpu@01c20054 {
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-cpu-clk";
+	reg = <0x01c20054 0x4>;
+	clocks = <&osc32k>, <&osc24M>, <&pll1>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun4i-a10-gates.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun4i-a10-gates.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6a03475bbfe2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun4i-a10-gates.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+Gate clock outputs
+------------------
+
+  * AXI gates ("allwinner,sun4i-axi-gates-clk")
+
+    DRAM					0
+
+  * AHB gates ("allwinner,sun4i-ahb-gates-clk")
+
+    USB0					0
+    EHCI0					1
+    OHCI0					2*
+    EHCI1					3
+    OHCI1					4*
+    SS						5
+    DMA						6
+    BIST					7
+    MMC0					8
+    MMC1					9
+    MMC2					10
+    MMC3					11
+    MS						12**
+    NAND					13
+    SDRAM					14
+
+    ACE						16
+    EMAC					17
+    TS						18
+
+    SPI0					20
+    SPI1					21
+    SPI2					22
+    SPI3					23
+    PATA					24
+    SATA					25**
+    GPS						26*
+
+    VE						32
+    TVD						33
+    TVE0					34
+    TVE1					35
+    LCD0					36
+    LCD1					37
+
+    CSI0					40
+    CSI1					41
+
+    HDMI					43
+    DE_BE0					44
+    DE_BE1					45
+    DE_FE1					46
+    DE_FE1					47
+
+    MP						50
+
+    MALI400					52
+
+  * APB0 gates ("allwinner,sun4i-apb0-gates-clk")
+
+    CODEC					0
+    SPDIF					1*
+    AC97					2
+    IIS						3
+
+    PIO						5
+    IR0						6
+    IR1						7
+
+    KEYPAD					10
+
+  * APB1 gates ("allwinner,sun4i-apb1-gates-clk")
+
+    I2C0					0
+    I2C1					1
+    I2C2					2
+
+    CAN						4
+    SCR						5
+    PS20					6
+    PS21					7
+
+    UART0					16
+    UART1					17
+    UART2					18
+    UART3					19
+    UART4					20
+    UART5					21
+    UART6					22
+    UART7					23
+
+Notation:
+ [*]:  The datasheet didn't mention these, but they are present on AW code
+ [**]: The datasheet had this marked as "NC" but they are used on AW code
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun5i-a10s-gates.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun5i-a10s-gates.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d24279fe1429
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun5i-a10s-gates.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+Gate clock outputs
+------------------
+
+  * AXI gates ("allwinner,sun4i-axi-gates-clk")
+
+    DRAM					0
+
+  * AHB gates ("allwinner,sun5i-a10s-ahb-gates-clk")
+
+    USB0					0
+    EHCI0					1
+    OHCI0					2
+
+    SS						5
+    DMA						6
+    BIST					7
+    MMC0					8
+    MMC1					9
+    MMC2					10
+
+    NAND					13
+    SDRAM					14
+
+    EMAC					17
+    TS						18
+
+    SPI0					20
+    SPI1					21
+    SPI2					22
+
+    GPS						26
+
+    HSTIMER					28
+
+    VE						32
+
+    TVE						34
+
+    LCD						36
+
+    CSI						40
+
+    HDMI					43
+    DE_BE					44
+
+    DE_FE					46
+
+    IEP						51
+    MALI400					52
+
+  * APB0 gates ("allwinner,sun5i-a10s-apb0-gates-clk")
+
+    CODEC					0
+
+    IIS						3
+
+    PIO						5
+    IR						6
+
+    KEYPAD					10
+
+  * APB1 gates ("allwinner,sun5i-a10s-apb1-gates-clk")
+
+    I2C0					0
+    I2C1					1
+    I2C2					2
+
+    UART0					16
+    UART1					17
+    UART2					18
+    UART3					19
+
+Notation:
+ [*]:  The datasheet didn't mention these, but they are present on AW code
+ [**]: The datasheet had this marked as "NC" but they are used on AW code
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun5i-a13-gates.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun5i-a13-gates.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..006b6dfc4703
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun5i-a13-gates.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+Gate clock outputs
+------------------
+
+  * AXI gates ("allwinner,sun4i-axi-gates-clk")
+
+    DRAM					0
+
+  * AHB gates ("allwinner,sun5i-a13-ahb-gates-clk")
+
+    USBOTG					0
+    EHCI					1
+    OHCI					2
+
+    SS						5
+    DMA						6
+    BIST					7
+    MMC0					8
+    MMC1					9
+    MMC2					10
+
+    NAND					13
+    SDRAM					14
+
+    SPI0					20
+    SPI1					21
+    SPI2					22
+
+    STIMER					28
+
+    VE						32
+
+    LCD						36
+
+    CSI						40
+
+    DE_BE					44
+
+    DE_FE					46
+
+    IEP						51
+    MALI400					52
+
+  * APB0 gates ("allwinner,sun5i-a13-apb0-gates-clk")
+
+    CODEC					0
+
+    PIO						5
+    IR						6
+
+  * APB1 gates ("allwinner,sun5i-a13-apb1-gates-clk")
+
+    I2C0					0
+    I2C1					1
+    I2C2					2
+
+    UART1					17
+
+    UART3					19
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun6i-a31-gates.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun6i-a31-gates.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fe44932b5c6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun6i-a31-gates.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+Gate clock outputs
+------------------
+
+  * AHB1 gates ("allwinner,sun6i-a31-ahb1-gates-clk")
+
+    MIPI DSI					1
+
+    SS						5
+    DMA						6
+
+    MMC0					8
+    MMC1					9
+    MMC2					10
+    MMC3					11
+
+    NAND1					12
+    NAND0					13
+    SDRAM					14
+
+    GMAC					17
+    TS						18
+    HSTIMER					19
+    SPI0					20
+    SPI1					21
+    SPI2					22
+    SPI3					23
+    USB_OTG					24
+
+    EHCI0					26
+    EHCI1					27
+
+    OHCI0					29
+    OHCI1					30
+    OHCI2					31
+    VE						32
+
+    LCD0					36
+    LCD1					37
+
+    CSI						40
+
+    HDMI					43
+    DE_BE0					44
+    DE_BE1					45
+    DE_FE1					46
+    DE_FE1					47
+
+    MP						50
+
+    GPU						52
+
+    DEU0					55
+    DEU1					56
+    DRC0					57
+    DRC1					58
+
+  * APB1 gates ("allwinner,sun6i-a31-apb1-gates-clk")
+
+    CODEC					0
+
+    DIGITAL MIC					4
+    PIO						5
+
+    DAUDIO0					12
+    DAUDIO1					13
+
+  * APB2 gates ("allwinner,sun6i-a31-apb2-gates-clk")
+
+    I2C0					0
+    I2C1					1
+    I2C2					2
+    I2C3					3
+
+    UART0					16
+    UART1					17
+    UART2					18
+    UART3					19
+    UART4					20
+    UART5					21
+
+Notation:
+ [*]:  The datasheet didn't mention these, but they are present on AW code
+ [**]: The datasheet had this marked as "NC" but they are used on AW code
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun7i-a20-gates.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun7i-a20-gates.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..357f4fdc02ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun7i-a20-gates.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+Gate clock outputs
+------------------
+
+  * AXI gates ("allwinner,sun4i-axi-gates-clk")
+
+    DRAM					0
+
+  * AHB gates ("allwinner,sun7i-a20-ahb-gates-clk")
+
+    USB0					0
+    EHCI0					1
+    OHCI0					2
+    EHCI1					3
+    OHCI1					4
+    SS						5
+    DMA						6
+    BIST					7
+    MMC0					8
+    MMC1					9
+    MMC2					10
+    MMC3					11
+    MS						12
+    NAND					13
+    SDRAM					14
+
+    ACE						16
+    EMAC					17
+    TS						18
+
+    SPI0					20
+    SPI1					21
+    SPI2					22
+    SPI3					23
+
+    SATA					25
+
+    HSTIMER					28
+
+    VE						32
+    TVD						33
+    TVE0					34
+    TVE1					35
+    LCD0					36
+    LCD1					37
+
+    CSI0					40
+    CSI1					41
+
+    HDMI1					42
+    HDMI0					43
+    DE_BE0					44
+    DE_BE1					45
+    DE_FE1					46
+    DE_FE1					47
+
+    GMAC					49
+    MP						50
+
+    MALI400					52
+
+  * APB0 gates ("allwinner,sun7i-a20-apb0-gates-clk")
+
+    CODEC					0
+    SPDIF					1
+    AC97					2
+    IIS0					3
+    IIS1					4
+    PIO						5
+    IR0						6
+    IR1						7
+    IIS2					8
+
+    KEYPAD					10
+
+  * APB1 gates ("allwinner,sun7i-a20-apb1-gates-clk")
+
+    I2C0					0
+    I2C1					1
+    I2C2					2
+    I2C3					3
+    CAN						4
+    SCR						5
+    PS20					6
+    PS21					7
+
+    I2C4					15
+    UART0					16
+    UART1					17
+    UART2					18
+    UART3					19
+    UART4					20
+    UART5					21
+    UART6					22
+    UART7					23
+
+Notation:
+ [*]:  The datasheet didn't mention these, but they are present on AW code
+ [**]: The datasheet had this marked as "NC" but they are used on AW code
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/vf610-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/vf610-clock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c80863d344ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/vf610-clock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+* Clock bindings for Freescale Vybrid VF610 SOC
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,vf610-ccm"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set
+- #clock-cells: Should be <1>
+
+The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock
+ID in its "clocks" phandle cell. See include/dt-bindings/clock/vf610-clock.h
+for the full list of VF610 clock IDs.
+
+Examples:
+
+clks: ccm@4006b000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,vf610-ccm";
+	reg = <0x4006b000 0x1000>;
+	#clock-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+uart1: serial@40028000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,vf610-uart";
+	reg = <0x40028000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <0 62 0x04>;
+	clocks = <&clks VF610_CLK_UART1>;
+	clock-names = "ipg";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/vt8500.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/vt8500.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..91d71cc0314a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/vt8500.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+Device Tree Clock bindings for arch-vt8500
+
+This binding uses the common clock binding[1].
+
+[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : shall be one of the following:
+	"via,vt8500-pll-clock" - for a VT8500/WM8505 PLL clock
+	"wm,wm8650-pll-clock" - for a WM8650 PLL clock
+	"wm,wm8750-pll-clock" - for a WM8750 PLL clock
+	"wm,wm8850-pll-clock" - for a WM8850 PLL clock
+	"via,vt8500-device-clock" - for a VT/WM device clock
+
+Required properties for PLL clocks:
+- reg : shall be the control register offset from PMC base for the pll clock.
+- clocks : shall be the input parent clock phandle for the clock. This should
+	be the reference clock.
+- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0.
+
+Required properties for device clocks:
+- clocks : shall be the input parent clock phandle for the clock. This should
+	be a pll output.
+- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0.
+
+
+Device Clocks
+
+Device clocks are required to have one or both of the following sets of
+properties:
+
+
+Gated device clocks:
+
+Required properties:
+- enable-reg : shall be the register offset from PMC base for the enable
+	register.
+- enable-bit : shall be the bit within enable-reg to enable/disable the clock.
+
+
+Divisor device clocks:
+
+Required property:
+- divisor-reg : shall be the register offset from PMC base for the divisor
+	register.
+Optional property:
+- divisor-mask : shall be the mask for the divisor register. Defaults to 0x1f
+	if not specified.
+
+
+For example:
+
+ref25: ref25M {
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "fixed-clock";
+	clock-frequency = <25000000>;
+};
+
+plla: plla {
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "wm,wm8650-pll-clock";
+	clocks = <&ref25>;
+	reg = <0x200>;
+};
+
+sdhc: sdhc {
+	#clock-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "via,vt8500-device-clock";
+	clocks = <&pllb>;
+	divisor-reg = <0x328>;
+	divisor-mask = <0x3f>;
+	enable-reg = <0x254>;
+	enable-bit = <18>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/zynq-7000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/zynq-7000.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d99af878f5d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/zynq-7000.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+Device Tree Clock bindings for the Zynq 7000 EPP
+
+The Zynq EPP has several different clk providers, each with there own bindings.
+The purpose of this document is to document their usage.
+
+See clock_bindings.txt for more information on the generic clock bindings.
+See Chapter 25 of Zynq TRM for more information about Zynq clocks.
+
+== Clock Controller ==
+The clock controller is a logical abstraction of Zynq's clock tree. It reads
+required input clock frequencies from the devicetree and acts as clock provider
+for all clock consumers of PS clocks.
+
+Required properties:
+ - #clock-cells : Must be 1
+ - compatible : "xlnx,ps7-clkc"
+ - ps-clk-frequency : Frequency of the oscillator providing ps_clk in HZ
+		      (usually 33 MHz oscillators are used for Zynq platforms)
+ - clock-output-names : List of strings used to name the clock outputs. Shall be
+			a list of the outputs given below.
+
+Optional properties:
+ - clocks : as described in the clock bindings
+ - clock-names : as described in the clock bindings
+
+Clock inputs:
+The following strings are optional parameters to the 'clock-names' property in
+order to provide an optional (E)MIO clock source.
+ - swdt_ext_clk
+ - gem0_emio_clk
+ - gem1_emio_clk
+ - mio_clk_XX		# with XX = 00..53
+...
+
+Clock outputs:
+ 0:  armpll
+ 1:  ddrpll
+ 2:  iopll
+ 3:  cpu_6or4x
+ 4:  cpu_3or2x
+ 5:  cpu_2x
+ 6:  cpu_1x
+ 7:  ddr2x
+ 8:  ddr3x
+ 9:  dci
+ 10: lqspi
+ 11: smc
+ 12: pcap
+ 13: gem0
+ 14: gem1
+ 15: fclk0
+ 16: fclk1
+ 17: fclk2
+ 18: fclk3
+ 19: can0
+ 20: can1
+ 21: sdio0
+ 22: sdio1
+ 23: uart0
+ 24: uart1
+ 25: spi0
+ 26: spi1
+ 27: dma
+ 28: usb0_aper
+ 29: usb1_aper
+ 30: gem0_aper
+ 31: gem1_aper
+ 32: sdio0_aper
+ 33: sdio1_aper
+ 34: spi0_aper
+ 35: spi1_aper
+ 36: can0_aper
+ 37: can1_aper
+ 38: i2c0_aper
+ 39: i2c1_aper
+ 40: uart0_aper
+ 41: uart1_aper
+ 42: gpio_aper
+ 43: lqspi_aper
+ 44: smc_aper
+ 45: swdt
+ 46: dbg_trc
+ 47: dbg_apb
+
+Example:
+	clkc: clkc {
+		#clock-cells = <1>;
+		compatible = "xlnx,ps7-clkc";
+		ps-clk-frequency = <33333333>;
+		clock-output-names = "armpll", "ddrpll", "iopll", "cpu_6or4x",
+				"cpu_3or2x", "cpu_2x", "cpu_1x", "ddr2x", "ddr3x",
+				"dci", "lqspi", "smc", "pcap", "gem0", "gem1",
+				"fclk0", "fclk1", "fclk2", "fclk3", "can0", "can1",
+				"sdio0", "sdio1", "uart0", "uart1", "spi0", "spi1",
+				"dma", "usb0_aper", "usb1_aper", "gem0_aper",
+				"gem1_aper", "sdio0_aper", "sdio1_aper",
+				"spi0_aper", "spi1_aper", "can0_aper", "can1_aper",
+				"i2c0_aper", "i2c1_aper", "uart0_aper", "uart1_aper",
+				"gpio_aper", "lqspi_aper", "smc_aper", "swdt",
+				"dbg_trc", "dbg_apb";
+		# optional props
+		clocks = <&clkc 16>, <&clk_foo>;
+		clock-names = "gem1_emio_clk", "can_mio_clk_23";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/arm_big_little_dt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/arm_big_little_dt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0715695e94a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/arm_big_little_dt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+Generic ARM big LITTLE cpufreq driver's DT glue
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+This is DT specific glue layer for generic cpufreq driver for big LITTLE
+systems.
+
+Both required and optional properties listed below must be defined
+under node /cpus/cpu@x. Where x is the first cpu inside a cluster.
+
+FIXME: Cpus should boot in the order specified in DT and all cpus for a cluster
+must be present contiguously. Generic DT driver will check only node 'x' for
+cpu:x.
+
+Required properties:
+- operating-points: Refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/opp.txt
+  for details
+
+Optional properties:
+- clock-latency: Specify the possible maximum transition latency for clock,
+  in unit of nanoseconds.
+
+Examples:
+
+cpus {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+
+	cpu@0 {
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a15";
+		reg = <0>;
+		next-level-cache = <&L2>;
+		operating-points = <
+			/* kHz    uV */
+			792000  1100000
+			396000  950000
+			198000  850000
+		>;
+		clock-latency = <61036>; /* two CLK32 periods */
+	};
+
+	cpu@1 {
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a15";
+		reg = <1>;
+		next-level-cache = <&L2>;
+	};
+
+	cpu@100 {
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a7";
+		reg = <100>;
+		next-level-cache = <&L2>;
+		operating-points = <
+			/* kHz    uV */
+			792000  950000
+			396000  750000
+			198000  450000
+		>;
+		clock-latency = <61036>; /* two CLK32 periods */
+	};
+
+	cpu@101 {
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a7";
+		reg = <101>;
+		next-level-cache = <&L2>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/cpufreq-cpu0.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/cpufreq-cpu0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..051f764bedb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/cpufreq-cpu0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+Generic CPU0 cpufreq driver
+
+It is a generic cpufreq driver for CPU0 frequency management.  It
+supports both uniprocessor (UP) and symmetric multiprocessor (SMP)
+systems which share clock and voltage across all CPUs.
+
+Both required and optional properties listed below must be defined
+under node /cpus/cpu@0.
+
+Required properties:
+- operating-points: Refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/opp.txt
+  for details
+
+Optional properties:
+- clock-latency: Specify the possible maximum transition latency for clock,
+  in unit of nanoseconds.
+- voltage-tolerance: Specify the CPU voltage tolerance in percentage.
+
+Examples:
+
+cpus {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+
+	cpu@0 {
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a9";
+		reg = <0>;
+		next-level-cache = <&L2>;
+		operating-points = <
+			/* kHz    uV */
+			792000  1100000
+			396000  950000
+			198000  850000
+		>;
+		clock-latency = <61036>; /* two CLK32 periods */
+	};
+
+	cpu@1 {
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a9";
+		reg = <1>;
+		next-level-cache = <&L2>;
+	};
+
+	cpu@2 {
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a9";
+		reg = <2>;
+		next-level-cache = <&L2>;
+	};
+
+	cpu@3 {
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a9";
+		reg = <3>;
+		next-level-cache = <&L2>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/cpufreq-exynos5440.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/cpufreq-exynos5440.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..caff1a57436f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/cpufreq-exynos5440.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+
+Exynos5440 cpufreq driver
+-------------------
+
+Exynos5440 SoC cpufreq driver for CPU frequency scaling.
+
+Required properties:
+- interrupts: Interrupt to know the completion of cpu frequency change.
+- operating-points: Table of frequencies and voltage CPU could be transitioned into,
+	in the decreasing order. Frequency should be in KHz units and voltage
+	should be in microvolts.
+
+Optional properties:
+- clock-latency: Clock monitor latency in microsecond.
+
+All the required listed above must be defined under node cpufreq.
+
+Example:
+--------
+	cpufreq@160000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos5440-cpufreq";
+		reg = <0x160000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 57 0>;
+		operating-points = <
+				1000000 975000
+				800000  925000>;
+		clock-latency = <100000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/cpufreq-spear.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/cpufreq-spear.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f3d44984d91c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/cpufreq-spear.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+SPEAr cpufreq driver
+-------------------
+
+SPEAr SoC cpufreq driver for CPU frequency scaling.
+It supports both uniprocessor (UP) and symmetric multiprocessor (SMP) systems
+which share clock across all CPUs.
+
+Required properties:
+- cpufreq_tbl: Table of frequencies CPU could be transitioned into, in the
+  increasing order.
+
+Optional properties:
+- clock-latency: Specify the possible maximum transition latency for clock, in
+  unit of nanoseconds.
+
+Both required and optional properties listed above must be defined under node
+/cpus/cpu@0.
+
+Examples:
+--------
+cpus {
+
+	<...>
+
+	cpu@0 {
+		compatible = "arm,cortex-a9";
+		reg = <0>;
+
+		<...>
+
+		cpufreq_tbl = < 166000
+				200000
+				250000
+				300000
+				400000
+				500000
+				600000 >;
+	};
+
+	<...>
+
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-imx-sahara.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-imx-sahara.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5c65eccd0e56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-imx-sahara.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+Freescale SAHARA Cryptographic Accelerator included in some i.MX chips.
+Currently only i.MX27 is supported.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "fsl,<soc>-sahara"
+- reg : Should contain SAHARA registers location and length
+- interrupts : Should contain SAHARA interrupt number
+
+Example:
+
+sah@10025000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx27-sahara";
+	reg = <	0x10025000 0x800>;
+	interrupts = <75>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt
index bf57ecd5d73a..e4022776ac6e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt
@@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Copyright (C) 2008-2011 Freescale Semiconductor Inc.
    -Run Time Integrity Check (RTIC) Node
    -Run Time Integrity Check (RTIC) Memory Node
    -Secure Non-Volatile Storage (SNVS) Node
+   -Secure Non-Volatile Storage (SNVS) Low Power (LP) RTC Node
    -Full Example
 
 NOTE: the SEC 4 is also known as Freescale's Cryptographic Accelerator
@@ -55,6 +56,12 @@ PROPERTIES
       Value type: <string>
       Definition: Must include "fsl,sec-v4.0"
 
+   - fsl,sec-era
+      Usage: optional
+      Value type: <u32>
+      Definition: A standard property. Define the 'ERA' of the SEC
+          device.
+
    - #address-cells
        Usage: required
        Value type: <u32>
@@ -106,6 +113,7 @@ PROPERTIES
 EXAMPLE
 	crypto@300000 {
 		compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0";
+		fsl,sec-era = <2>;
 		#address-cells = <1>;
 		#size-cells = <1>;
 		reg = <0x300000 0x10000>;
@@ -294,6 +302,27 @@ Secure Non-Volatile Storage (SNVS) Node
           address and length of the SEC4 configuration
           registers.
 
+   - #address-cells
+       Usage: required
+       Value type: <u32>
+       Definition: A standard property.  Defines the number of cells
+           for representing physical addresses in child nodes.  Must
+           have a value of 1.
+
+   - #size-cells
+       Usage: required
+       Value type: <u32>
+       Definition: A standard property.  Defines the number of cells
+           for representing the size of physical addresses in
+           child nodes.  Must have a value of 1.
+
+   - ranges
+       Usage: required
+       Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
+       Definition: A standard property.  Specifies the physical address
+           range of the SNVS register space.  A triplet that includes
+           the child address, parent address, & length.
+
    - interrupts
       Usage: required
       Value type: <prop_encoded-array>
@@ -314,11 +343,34 @@ EXAMPLE
 	sec_mon@314000 {
 		compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon";
 		reg = <0x314000 0x1000>;
+		ranges = <0 0x314000 0x1000>;
 		interrupt-parent = <&mpic>;
 		interrupts = <93 2>;
 	};
 
 =====================================================================
+Secure Non-Volatile Storage (SNVS) Low Power (LP) RTC Node
+
+  A SNVS child node that defines SNVS LP RTC.
+
+  - compatible
+      Usage: required
+      Value type: <string>
+      Definition: Must include "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon-rtc-lp".
+
+  - reg
+      Usage: required
+      Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
+      Definition: A standard property.  Specifies the physical
+          address and length of the SNVS LP configuration registers.
+
+EXAMPLE
+	sec_mon_rtc_lp@314000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon-rtc-lp";
+		reg = <0x34 0x58>;
+	};
+
+=====================================================================
 FULL EXAMPLE
 
 	crypto: crypto@300000 {
@@ -390,8 +442,14 @@ FULL EXAMPLE
 	sec_mon: sec_mon@314000 {
 		compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon";
 		reg = <0x314000 0x1000>;
+		ranges = <0 0x314000 0x1000>;
 		interrupt-parent = <&mpic>;
 		interrupts = <93 2>;
+
+		sec_mon_rtc_lp@34 {
+			compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon-rtc-lp";
+			reg = <0x34 0x58>;
+		};
 	};
 
 =====================================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec6.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec6.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c0a20cd972e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec6.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
+SEC 6 is as Freescale's Cryptographic Accelerator and Assurance Module (CAAM).
+Currently Freescale powerpc chip C29X is embeded with SEC 6.
+SEC 6 device tree binding include:
+   -SEC 6 Node
+   -Job Ring Node
+   -Full Example
+
+=====================================================================
+SEC 6 Node
+
+Description
+
+    Node defines the base address of the SEC 6 block.
+    This block specifies the address range of all global
+    configuration registers for the SEC 6 block.
+    For example, In C293, we could see three SEC 6 node.
+
+PROPERTIES
+
+   - compatible
+      Usage: required
+      Value type: <string>
+      Definition: Must include "fsl,sec-v6.0".
+
+   - fsl,sec-era
+      Usage: optional
+      Value type: <u32>
+      Definition: A standard property. Define the 'ERA' of the SEC
+          device.
+
+   - #address-cells
+       Usage: required
+       Value type: <u32>
+       Definition: A standard property.  Defines the number of cells
+           for representing physical addresses in child nodes.
+
+   - #size-cells
+       Usage: required
+       Value type: <u32>
+       Definition: A standard property.  Defines the number of cells
+           for representing the size of physical addresses in
+           child nodes.
+
+   - reg
+      Usage: required
+      Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
+      Definition: A standard property.  Specifies the physical
+          address and length of the SEC 6 configuration registers.
+
+   - ranges
+       Usage: required
+       Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
+       Definition: A standard property.  Specifies the physical address
+           range of the SEC 6.0 register space (-SNVS not included).  A
+           triplet that includes the child address, parent address, &
+           length.
+
+   Note: All other standard properties (see the ePAPR) are allowed
+   but are optional.
+
+EXAMPLE
+	crypto@a0000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,sec-v6.0";
+		fsl,sec-era = <6>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		reg = <0xa0000 0x20000>;
+		ranges = <0 0xa0000 0x20000>;
+	};
+
+=====================================================================
+Job Ring (JR) Node
+
+    Child of the crypto node defines data processing interface to SEC 6
+    across the peripheral bus for purposes of processing
+    cryptographic descriptors. The specified address
+    range can be made visible to one (or more) cores.
+    The interrupt defined for this node is controlled within
+    the address range of this node.
+
+  - compatible
+      Usage: required
+      Value type: <string>
+      Definition: Must include "fsl,sec-v6.0-job-ring".
+
+  - reg
+      Usage: required
+      Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
+      Definition: Specifies a two JR parameters:  an offset from
+           the parent physical address and the length the JR registers.
+
+   - interrupts
+      Usage: required
+      Value type: <prop_encoded-array>
+      Definition:  Specifies the interrupts generated by this
+           device.  The value of the interrupts property
+           consists of one interrupt specifier. The format
+           of the specifier is defined by the binding document
+           describing the node's interrupt parent.
+
+EXAMPLE
+	jr@1000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,sec-v6.0-job-ring";
+		reg = <0x1000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <49 2 0 0>;
+	};
+
+===================================================================
+Full Example
+
+Since some chips may contain more than one SEC, the dtsi contains
+only the node contents, not the node itself.  A chip using the SEC
+should include the dtsi inside each SEC node.  Example:
+
+In qoriq-sec6.0.dtsi:
+
+	compatible = "fsl,sec-v6.0";
+	fsl,sec-era = <6>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+
+	jr@1000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,sec-v6.0-job-ring",
+			     "fsl,sec-v5.2-job-ring",
+			     "fsl,sec-v5.0-job-ring",
+			     "fsl,sec-v4.4-job-ring",
+			     "fsl,sec-v4.0-job-ring";
+		reg	   = <0x1000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	jr@2000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,sec-v6.0-job-ring",
+			     "fsl,sec-v5.2-job-ring",
+			     "fsl,sec-v5.0-job-ring",
+			     "fsl,sec-v4.4-job-ring",
+			     "fsl,sec-v4.0-job-ring";
+		reg	   = <0x2000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+In the C293 device tree, we add the include of public property:
+
+	crypto@a0000 {
+		/include/ "qoriq-sec6.0.dtsi"
+	}
+
+	crypto@a0000 {
+		reg = <0xa0000 0x20000>;
+		ranges = <0 0xa0000 0x20000>;
+
+		jr@1000 {
+			interrupts = <49 2 0 0>;
+		};
+
+		jr@2000 {
+			interrupts = <50 2 0 0>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/mv_cesa.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/mv_cesa.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..47229b1a594b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/mv_cesa.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Marvell Cryptographic Engines And Security Accelerator
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "marvell,orion-crypto"
+- reg : base physical address of the engine and length of memory mapped
+        region, followed by base physical address of sram and its memory
+        length
+- reg-names : "regs" , "sram";
+- interrupts : interrupt number
+
+Examples:
+
+	crypto@30000 {
+		compatible = "marvell,orion-crypto";
+		reg = <0x30000 0x10000>,
+		      <0x4000000 0x800>;
+		reg-names = "regs" , "sram";
+		interrupts = <22>;
+		status = "okay";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/arm-pl330.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/arm-pl330.txt
index a4cd273b2a67..267565894db9 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/arm-pl330.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/arm-pl330.txt
@@ -9,22 +9,36 @@ Required properties:
     region.
   - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu.
 
+Optional properties:
+  - dma-coherent      : Present if dma operations are coherent
+  - #dma-cells: must be <1>. used to represent the number of integer
+    cells in the dmas property of client device.
+  - dma-channels: contains the total number of DMA channels supported by the DMAC
+  - dma-requests: contains the total number of DMA requests supported by the DMAC
+
 Example:
 
 	pdma0: pdma@12680000 {
 		compatible = "arm,pl330", "arm,primecell";
 		reg = <0x12680000 0x1000>;
 		interrupts = <99>;
+		#dma-cells = <1>;
+		#dma-channels = <8>;
+		#dma-requests = <32>;
 	};
 
 Client drivers (device nodes requiring dma transfers from dev-to-mem or
-mem-to-dev) should specify the DMA channel numbers using a two-value pair
+mem-to-dev) should specify the DMA channel numbers and dma channel names
 as shown below.
 
   [property name]  = <[phandle of the dma controller] [dma request id]>;
+  [property name]  = <[dma channel name]>
 
       where 'dma request id' is the dma request number which is connected
-      to the client controller. The 'property name' is recommended to be
-      of the form <name>-dma-channel.
+      to the client controller. The 'property name' 'dmas' and 'dma-names'
+      as required by the generic dma device tree binding helpers. The dma
+      names correspond 1:1 with the dma request ids in the dmas property.
 
-  Example:  tx-dma-channel = <&pdma0 12>;
+  Example:  dmas = <&pdma0 12
+		    &pdma1 11>;
+	    dma-names = "tx", "rx";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-dma.txt
index 3c046ee6e8b5..e1f343c7a34b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-dma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-dma.txt
@@ -1,14 +1,42 @@
 * Atmel Direct Memory Access Controller (DMA)
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-dma"
-- reg: Should contain DMA registers location and length
-- interrupts: Should contain DMA interrupt
+- compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-dma".
+- reg: Should contain DMA registers location and length.
+- interrupts: Should contain DMA interrupt.
+- #dma-cells: Must be <2>, used to represent the number of integer cells in
+the dmas property of client devices.
 
-Examples:
+Example:
 
-dma@ffffec00 {
+dma0: dma@ffffec00 {
 	compatible = "atmel,at91sam9g45-dma";
 	reg = <0xffffec00 0x200>;
 	interrupts = <21>;
+	#dma-cells = <2>;
+};
+
+DMA clients connected to the Atmel DMA controller must use the format
+described in the dma.txt file, using a three-cell specifier for each channel:
+a phandle plus two integer cells.
+The three cells in order are:
+
+1. A phandle pointing to the DMA controller.
+2. The memory interface (16 most significant bits), the peripheral interface
+(16 less significant bits).
+3. Parameters for the at91 DMA configuration register which are device
+dependent:
+  - bit 7-0: peripheral identifier for the hardware handshaking interface. The
+  identifier can be different for tx and rx.
+  - bit 11-8: FIFO configuration. 0 for half FIFO, 1 for ALAP, 1 for ASAP.
+
+Example:
+
+i2c0@i2c@f8010000 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91sam9x5-i2c";
+	reg = <0xf8010000 0x100>;
+	interrupts = <9 4 6>;
+	dmas = <&dma0 1 7>,
+	       <&dma0 1 8>;
+	dma-names = "tx", "rx";
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8f504e6bae14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+* Generic DMA Controller and DMA request bindings
+
+Generic binding to provide a way for a driver using DMA Engine to retrieve the
+DMA request or channel information that goes from a hardware device to a DMA
+controller.
+
+
+* DMA controller
+
+Required property:
+- #dma-cells: 		Must be at least 1. Used to provide DMA controller
+			specific information. See DMA client binding below for
+			more details.
+
+Optional properties:
+- dma-channels: 	Number of DMA channels supported by the controller.
+- dma-requests: 	Number of DMA requests signals supported by the
+			controller.
+
+Example:
+
+	dma: dma@48000000 {
+		compatible = "ti,omap-sdma";
+		reg = <0x48000000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 12 0x4
+			      0 13 0x4
+			      0 14 0x4
+			      0 15 0x4>;
+		#dma-cells = <1>;
+		dma-channels = <32>;
+		dma-requests = <127>;
+	};
+
+
+* DMA client
+
+Client drivers should specify the DMA property using a phandle to the controller
+followed by DMA controller specific data.
+
+Required property:
+- dmas:			List of one or more DMA specifiers, each consisting of
+			- A phandle pointing to DMA controller node
+			- A number of integer cells, as determined by the
+			  #dma-cells property in the node referenced by phandle
+			  containing DMA controller specific information. This
+			  typically contains a DMA request line number or a
+			  channel number, but can contain any data that is used
+			  required for configuring a channel.
+- dma-names: 		Contains one identifier string for each DMA specifier in
+			the dmas property. The specific strings that can be used
+			are defined in the binding of the DMA client device.
+			Multiple DMA specifiers can be used to represent
+			alternatives and in this case the dma-names for those
+			DMA specifiers must be identical (see examples).
+
+Examples:
+
+1. A device with one DMA read channel, one DMA write channel:
+
+	i2c1: i2c@1 {
+		...
+		dmas = <&dma 2		/* read channel */
+			&dma 3>;	/* write channel */
+		dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+		...
+	};
+
+2. A single read-write channel with three alternative DMA controllers:
+
+	dmas = <&dma1 5
+		&dma2 7
+		&dma3 2>;
+	dma-names = "rx-tx", "rx-tx", "rx-tx";
+
+3. A device with three channels, one of which has two alternatives:
+
+	dmas = <&dma1 2			/* read channel */
+		&dma1 3			/* write channel */
+		&dma2 0			/* error read */
+		&dma3 0>;		/* alternative error read */
+	dma-names = "rx", "tx", "error", "error";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-dma.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7bd8847d6394
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-dma.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+* Freescale Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller for i.MX
+
+This document will only describe differences to the generic DMA Controller and
+DMA request bindings as described in dma/dma.txt .
+
+* DMA controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "fsl,<chip>-dma". chip can be imx1, imx21 or imx27
+- reg : Should contain DMA registers location and length
+- interrupts : First item should be DMA interrupt, second one is optional and
+    should contain DMA Error interrupt
+- #dma-cells : Has to be 1. imx-dma does not support anything else.
+
+Optional properties:
+- #dma-channels : Number of DMA channels supported. Should be 16.
+- #dma-requests : Number of DMA requests supported.
+
+Example:
+
+	dma: dma@10001000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,imx27-dma";
+		reg = <0x10001000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <32 33>;
+		#dma-cells = <1>;
+		#dma-channels = <16>;
+	};
+
+
+* DMA client
+
+Clients have to specify the DMA requests with phandles in a list.
+
+Required properties:
+- dmas: List of one or more DMA request specifiers. One DMA request specifier
+    consists of a phandle to the DMA controller followed by the integer
+    specifying the request line.
+- dma-names: List of string identifiers for the DMA requests. For the correct
+    names, have a look at the specific client driver.
+
+Example:
+
+	sdhci1: sdhci@10013000 {
+		...
+		dmas = <&dma 7>;
+		dma-names = "rx-tx";
+		...
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt
index d1e3f443e205..4fa814d38321 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt
@@ -1,17 +1,78 @@
 * Freescale Smart Direct Memory Access (SDMA) Controller for i.MX
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible : Should be "fsl,<chip>-sdma"
+- compatible : Should be "fsl,imx31-sdma", "fsl,imx31-to1-sdma",
+  "fsl,imx31-to2-sdma", "fsl,imx35-sdma", "fsl,imx35-to1-sdma",
+  "fsl,imx35-to2-sdma", "fsl,imx51-sdma", "fsl,imx53-sdma" or
+  "fsl,imx6q-sdma". The -to variants should be preferred since they
+  allow to determnine the correct ROM script addresses needed for
+  the driver to work without additional firmware.
 - reg : Should contain SDMA registers location and length
 - interrupts : Should contain SDMA interrupt
+- #dma-cells : Must be <3>.
+  The first cell specifies the DMA request/event ID.  See details below
+  about the second and third cell.
 - fsl,sdma-ram-script-name : Should contain the full path of SDMA RAM
   scripts firmware
 
+The second cell of dma phandle specifies the peripheral type of DMA transfer.
+The full ID of peripheral types can be found below.
+
+	ID	transfer type
+	---------------------
+	0	MCU domain SSI
+	1	Shared SSI
+	2	MMC
+	3	SDHC
+	4	MCU domain UART
+	5	Shared UART
+	6	FIRI
+	7	MCU domain CSPI
+	8	Shared CSPI
+	9	SIM
+	10	ATA
+	11	CCM
+	12	External peripheral
+	13	Memory Stick Host Controller
+	14	Shared Memory Stick Host Controller
+	15	DSP
+	16	Memory
+	17	FIFO type Memory
+	18	SPDIF
+	19	IPU Memory
+	20	ASRC
+	21	ESAI
+
+The third cell specifies the transfer priority as below.
+
+	ID	transfer priority
+	-------------------------
+	0	High
+	1	Medium
+	2	Low
+
 Examples:
 
 sdma@83fb0000 {
 	compatible = "fsl,imx51-sdma", "fsl,imx35-sdma";
 	reg = <0x83fb0000 0x4000>;
 	interrupts = <6>;
+	#dma-cells = <3>;
 	fsl,sdma-ram-script-name = "sdma-imx51.bin";
 };
+
+DMA clients connected to the i.MX SDMA controller must use the format
+described in the dma.txt file.
+
+Examples:
+
+ssi2: ssi@70014000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx51-ssi", "fsl,imx21-ssi";
+	reg = <0x70014000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <30>;
+	clocks = <&clks 49>;
+	dmas = <&sdma 24 1 0>,
+	       <&sdma 25 1 0>;
+	dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+	fsl,fifo-depth = <15>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-mxs-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-mxs-dma.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a4873e5e3e36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-mxs-dma.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+* Freescale MXS DMA
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "fsl,<chip>-dma-apbh" or "fsl,<chip>-dma-apbx"
+- reg : Should contain registers location and length
+- interrupts : Should contain the interrupt numbers of DMA channels.
+  If a channel is empty/reserved, 0 should be filled in place.
+- #dma-cells : Must be <1>.  The number cell specifies the channel ID.
+- dma-channels : Number of channels supported by the DMA controller
+
+Optional properties:
+- interrupt-names : Name of DMA channel interrupts
+
+Supported chips:
+imx23, imx28.
+
+Examples:
+
+dma_apbh: dma-apbh@80004000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-dma-apbh";
+	reg = <0x80004000 0x2000>;
+	interrupts = <82 83 84 85
+		      88 88 88 88
+		      88 88 88 88
+		      87 86 0 0>;
+	interrupt-names = "ssp0", "ssp1", "ssp2", "ssp3",
+			  "gpmi0", "gmpi1", "gpmi2", "gmpi3",
+			  "gpmi4", "gmpi5", "gpmi6", "gmpi7",
+			  "hsadc", "lcdif", "empty", "empty";
+	#dma-cells = <1>;
+	dma-channels = <16>;
+};
+
+dma_apbx: dma-apbx@80024000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-dma-apbx";
+	reg = <0x80024000 0x2000>;
+	interrupts = <78 79 66 0
+		      80 81 68 69
+		      70 71 72 73
+		      74 75 76 77>;
+	interrupt-names = "auart4-rx", "aurat4-tx", "spdif-tx", "empty",
+			  "saif0", "saif1", "i2c0", "i2c1",
+			  "auart0-rx", "auart0-tx", "auart1-rx", "auart1-tx",
+			  "auart2-rx", "auart2-tx", "auart3-rx", "auart3-tx";
+	#dma-cells = <1>;
+	dma-channels = <16>;
+};
+
+DMA clients connected to the MXS DMA controller must use the format
+described in the dma.txt file.
+
+Examples:
+
+auart0: serial@8006a000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-auart", "fsl,imx23-auart";
+	reg = <0x8006a000 0x2000>;
+	interrupts = <112>;
+	dmas = <&dma_apbx 8>, <&dma_apbx 9>;
+	dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..23f8d712c3ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+* Hisilicon K3 DMA controller
+
+See dma.txt first
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "hisilicon,k3-dma-1.0"
+- reg: Should contain DMA registers location and length.
+- interrupts: Should contain one interrupt shared by all channel
+- #dma-cells: see dma.txt, should be 1, para number
+- dma-channels: physical channels supported
+- dma-requests: virtual channels supported, each virtual channel
+		have specific request line
+- clocks: clock required
+
+Example:
+
+Controller:
+		dma0: dma@fcd02000 {
+			compatible = "hisilicon,k3-dma-1.0";
+			reg = <0xfcd02000 0x1000>;
+			#dma-cells = <1>;
+			dma-channels = <16>;
+			dma-requests = <27>;
+			interrupts = <0 12 4>;
+			clocks = <&pclk>;
+			status = "disable";
+		};
+
+Client:
+Use specific request line passing from dmax
+For example, i2c0 read channel request line is 18, while write channel use 19
+
+		i2c0: i2c@fcb08000 {
+			compatible = "snps,designware-i2c";
+			dmas =	<&dma0 18          /* read channel */
+				 &dma0 19>;        /* write channel */
+			dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+		};
+
+		i2c1: i2c@fcb09000 {
+			compatible = "snps,designware-i2c";
+			dmas =	<&dma0 20          /* read channel */
+				 &dma0 21>;        /* write channel */
+			dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+		};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/mmp-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/mmp-dma.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a4fa4efa1d83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/mmp-dma.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+* MARVELL MMP DMA controller
+
+Marvell Peripheral DMA Controller
+Used platfroms: pxa688, pxa910, pxa3xx, etc
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "marvell,pdma-1.0"
+- reg: Should contain DMA registers location and length.
+- interrupts: Either contain all of the per-channel DMA interrupts
+		or one irq for pdma device
+- #dma-channels: Number of DMA channels supported by the controller.
+
+"marvell,pdma-1.0"
+Used platfroms: pxa25x, pxa27x, pxa3xx, pxa93x, pxa168, pxa910, pxa688.
+
+Examples:
+
+/*
+ * Each channel has specific irq
+ * ICU parse out irq channel from ICU register,
+ * while DMA controller may not able to distinguish the irq channel
+ * Using this method, interrupt-parent is required as demuxer
+ * For example, pxa688 icu register 0x128, bit 0~15 is PDMA channel irq,
+ * 18~21 is ADMA irq
+ */
+pdma: dma-controller@d4000000 {
+	      compatible = "marvell,pdma-1.0";
+	      reg = <0xd4000000 0x10000>;
+	      interrupts = <0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15>;
+	      interrupt-parent = <&intcmux32>;
+	      #dma-channels = <16>;
+      };
+
+/*
+ * One irq for all channels
+ * Dmaengine driver (DMA controller) distinguish irq channel via
+ * parsing internal register
+ */
+pdma: dma-controller@d4000000 {
+	      compatible = "marvell,pdma-1.0";
+	      reg = <0xd4000000 0x10000>;
+	      interrupts = <47>;
+	      #dma-channels = <16>;
+      };
+
+
+Marvell Two Channel DMA Controller used specifically for audio
+Used platfroms: pxa688, pxa910
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "marvell,adma-1.0" or "marvell,pxa910-squ"
+- reg: Should contain DMA registers location and length.
+- interrupts: Either contain all of the per-channel DMA interrupts
+		or one irq for dma device
+
+"marvell,adma-1.0" used on pxa688
+"marvell,pxa910-squ" used on pxa910
+
+Examples:
+
+/* each channel has specific irq */
+adma0: dma-controller@d42a0800 {
+	      compatible = "marvell,adma-1.0";
+	      reg = <0xd42a0800 0x100>;
+	      interrupts = <18 19>;
+	      interrupt-parent = <&intcmux32>;
+      };
+
+/* One irq for all channels */
+squ: dma-controller@d42a0800 {
+	      compatible = "marvell,pxa910-squ";
+	      reg = <0xd42a0800 0x100>;
+	      interrupts = <46>;
+      };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/mv-xor.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/mv-xor.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7c6cb7fcecd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/mv-xor.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+* Marvell XOR engines
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "marvell,orion-xor"
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length (two sets)
+    the first set is the low registers, the second set the high
+    registers for the XOR engine.
+- clocks: pointer to the reference clock
+
+The DT node must also contains sub-nodes for each XOR channel that the
+XOR engine has. Those sub-nodes have the following required
+properties:
+- interrupts: interrupt of the XOR channel
+
+And the following optional properties:
+- dmacap,memcpy to indicate that the XOR channel is capable of memcpy operations
+- dmacap,memset to indicate that the XOR channel is capable of memset operations
+- dmacap,xor to indicate that the XOR channel is capable of xor operations
+
+Example:
+
+xor@d0060900 {
+	compatible = "marvell,orion-xor";
+	reg = <0xd0060900 0x100
+	       0xd0060b00 0x100>;
+	clocks = <&coreclk 0>;
+	status = "okay";
+
+	xor00 {
+	      interrupts = <51>;
+	      dmacap,memcpy;
+	      dmacap,xor;
+	};
+	xor01 {
+	      interrupts = <52>;
+	      dmacap,memcpy;
+	      dmacap,xor;
+	      dmacap,memset;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/shdma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/shdma.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2a3f3b8946b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/shdma.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+* SHDMA Device Tree bindings
+
+Sh-/r-mobile and r-car systems often have multiple identical DMA controller
+instances, capable of serving any of a common set of DMA slave devices, using
+the same configuration. To describe this topology we require all compatible
+SHDMA DT nodes to be placed under a DMA multiplexer node. All such compatible
+DMAC instances have the same number of channels and use the same DMA
+descriptors. Therefore respective DMA DT bindings can also all be placed in the
+multiplexer node. Even if there is only one such DMAC instance on a system, it
+still has to be placed under such a multiplexer node.
+
+* DMA multiplexer
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:	should be "renesas,shdma-mux"
+- #dma-cells:	should be <1>, see "dmas" property below
+
+Optional properties (currently unused):
+- dma-channels:	number of DMA channels
+- dma-requests:	number of DMA request signals
+
+* DMA controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:	should be of the form "renesas,shdma-<soc>", where <soc> should
+		be replaced with the desired SoC model, e.g.
+		"renesas,shdma-r8a73a4" for the system DMAC on r8a73a4 SoC
+
+Example:
+	dmac: dma-multiplexer@0 {
+		compatible = "renesas,shdma-mux";
+		#dma-cells = <1>;
+		dma-channels = <20>;
+		dma-requests = <256>;
+		#address-cells = <2>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		ranges;
+
+		dma0: dma-controller@e6700020 {
+			compatible = "renesas,shdma-r8a73a4";
+			reg = <0 0xe6700020 0 0x89e0>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+			interrupts = <0 220 4
+					0 200 4
+					0 201 4
+					0 202 4
+					0 203 4
+					0 204 4
+					0 205 4
+					0 206 4
+					0 207 4
+					0 208 4
+					0 209 4
+					0 210 4
+					0 211 4
+					0 212 4
+					0 213 4
+					0 214 4
+					0 215 4
+					0 216 4
+					0 217 4
+					0 218 4
+					0 219 4>;
+			interrupt-names = "error",
+					"ch0", "ch1", "ch2", "ch3",
+					"ch4", "ch5", "ch6", "ch7",
+					"ch8", "ch9", "ch10", "ch11",
+					"ch12", "ch13", "ch14", "ch15",
+					"ch16", "ch17", "ch18", "ch19";
+		};
+	};
+
+* DMA client
+
+Required properties:
+- dmas:		a list of <[DMA multiplexer phandle] [MID/RID value]> pairs,
+		where MID/RID values are fixed handles, specified in the SoC
+		manual
+- dma-names:	a list of DMA channel names, one per "dmas" entry
+
+Example:
+	dmas = <&dmac 0xd1
+		&dmac 0xd2>;
+	dma-names = "tx", "rx";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d58675ea1abf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+* Synopsys Designware DMA Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "snps,dma-spear1340"
+- reg: Address range of the DMAC registers
+- interrupt: Should contain the DMAC interrupt number
+- dma-channels: Number of channels supported by hardware
+- dma-requests: Number of DMA request lines supported, up to 16
+- dma-masters: Number of AHB masters supported by the controller
+- #dma-cells: must be <3>
+- chan_allocation_order: order of allocation of channel, 0 (default): ascending,
+  1: descending
+- chan_priority: priority of channels. 0 (default): increase from chan 0->n, 1:
+  increase from chan n->0
+- block_size: Maximum block size supported by the controller
+- data_width: Maximum data width supported by hardware per AHB master
+  (0 - 8bits, 1 - 16bits, ..., 5 - 256bits)
+
+
+Optional properties:
+- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller
+  that services interrupts for this device
+- is_private: The device channels should be marked as private and not for by the
+  general purpose DMA channel allocator. False if not passed.
+
+Example:
+
+	dmahost: dma@fc000000 {
+		compatible = "snps,dma-spear1340";
+		reg = <0xfc000000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&vic1>;
+		interrupts = <12>;
+
+		dma-channels = <8>;
+		dma-requests = <16>;
+		dma-masters = <2>;
+		#dma-cells = <3>;
+		chan_allocation_order = <1>;
+		chan_priority = <1>;
+		block_size = <0xfff>;
+		data_width = <3 3 0 0>;
+	};
+
+DMA clients connected to the Designware DMA controller must use the format
+described in the dma.txt file, using a four-cell specifier for each channel.
+The four cells in order are:
+
+1. A phandle pointing to the DMA controller
+2. The DMA request line number
+3. Source master for transfers on allocated channel
+4. Destination master for transfers on allocated channel
+
+Example:
+	
+	serial@e0000000 {
+		compatible = "arm,pl011", "arm,primecell";
+		reg = <0xe0000000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 35 0x4>;
+		status = "disabled";
+		dmas = <&dmahost 12 0 1>,
+			<&dmahost 13 0 1 0>;
+		dma-names = "rx", "rx";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ste-coh901318.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ste-coh901318.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..091ad057e9cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ste-coh901318.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+ST-Ericsson COH 901 318 DMA Controller
+
+This is a DMA controller which has begun as a fork of the
+ARM PL08x PrimeCell VHDL code.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "stericsson,coh901318"
+- reg: register locations and length
+- interrupts: the single DMA IRQ
+- #dma-cells: must be set to <1>, as the channels on the
+  COH 901 318 are simple and identified by a single number
+- dma-channels: the number of DMA channels handled
+
+Example:
+
+dmac: dma-controller@c00020000 {
+	compatible = "stericsson,coh901318";
+	reg = <0xc0020000 0x1000>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&vica>;
+	interrupts = <2>;
+	#dma-cells = <1>;
+	dma-channels = <40>;
+};
+
+Consumers example:
+
+uart0: serial@c0013000 {
+	compatible = "...";
+	(...)
+	dmas = <&dmac 17 &dmac 18>;
+	dma-names = "tx", "rx";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ste-dma40.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ste-dma40.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a8c21c256baa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ste-dma40.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+* DMA40 DMA Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "stericsson,dma40"
+- reg: Address range of the DMAC registers
+- reg-names: Names of the above areas to use during resource look-up
+- interrupt: Should contain the DMAC interrupt number
+- #dma-cells: must be <3>
+- memcpy-channels: Channels to be used for memcpy
+
+Optional properties:
+- dma-channels: Number of channels supported by hardware - if not present
+		the driver will attempt to obtain the information from H/W
+- disabled-channels: Channels which can not be used
+
+Example:
+
+	dma: dma-controller@801C0000 {
+		compatible = "stericsson,db8500-dma40", "stericsson,dma40";
+		reg = <0x801C0000 0x1000  0x40010000 0x800>;
+		reg-names = "base", "lcpa";
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+		interrupts = <0 25 0x4>;
+
+		#dma-cells = <2>;
+		memcpy-channels  = <56 57 58 59 60>;
+		disabled-channels  = <12>;
+		dma-channels = <8>;
+	};
+
+Clients
+Required properties:
+- dmas: Comma separated list of dma channel requests
+- dma-names: Names of the aforementioned requested channels
+
+Each dmas request consists of 4 cells:
+  1. A phandle pointing to the DMA controller
+  2. Device Type
+  3. The DMA request line number (only when 'use fixed channel' is set)
+  4. A 32bit mask specifying; mode, direction and endianness [NB: This list will grow]
+        0x00000001: Mode:
+                Logical channel when unset
+                Physical channel when set
+        0x00000002: Direction:
+                Memory to Device when unset
+                Device to Memory when set
+        0x00000004: Endianness:
+                Little endian when unset
+                Big endian when set
+        0x00000008: Use fixed channel:
+                Use automatic channel selection when unset
+                Use DMA request line number when set
+
+Example:
+
+	uart@80120000 {
+		compatible = "arm,pl011", "arm,primecell";
+		reg = <0x80120000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 11 0x4>;
+
+		dmas = <&dma 13 0 0x2>, /* Logical - DevToMem */
+		       <&dma 13 0 0x0>; /* Logical - MemToDev */
+		dma-names = "rx", "rx";
+
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/tegra20-apbdma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/tegra20-apbdma.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..90fa7da525b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/tegra20-apbdma.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+* NVIDIA Tegra APB DMA controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "nvidia,<chip>-apbdma"
+- reg: Should contain DMA registers location and length. This shuld include
+  all of the per-channel registers.
+- interrupts: Should contain all of the per-channel DMA interrupts.
+
+Examples:
+
+apbdma: dma@6000a000 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-apbdma";
+	reg = <0x6000a000 0x1200>;
+	interrupts = < 0 136 0x04
+		       0 137 0x04
+		       0 138 0x04
+		       0 139 0x04
+		       0 140 0x04
+		       0 141 0x04
+		       0 142 0x04
+		       0 143 0x04
+		       0 144 0x04
+		       0 145 0x04
+		       0 146 0x04
+		       0 147 0x04
+		       0 148 0x04
+		       0 149 0x04
+		       0 150 0x04
+		       0 151 0x04 >;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti-edma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti-edma.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9fbbdb783a72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti-edma.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+TI EDMA
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "ti,edma3"
+- ti,edma-regions: Number of regions
+- ti,edma-slots: Number of slots
+- #dma-cells: Should be set to <1>
+              Clients should use a single channel number per DMA request.
+- dma-channels: Specify total DMA channels per CC
+- reg: Memory map for accessing module
+- interrupt-parent: Interrupt controller the interrupt is routed through
+- interrupts: Exactly 3 interrupts need to be specified in the order:
+              1. Transfer completion interrupt.
+              2. Memory protection interrupt.
+              3. Error interrupt.
+Optional properties:
+- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmods associated to the EDMA
+- ti,edma-xbar-event-map: Crossbar event to channel map
+
+Example:
+
+edma: edma@49000000 {
+	reg = <0x49000000 0x10000>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+	interrupts = <12 13 14>;
+	compatible = "ti,edma3";
+	ti,hwmods = "tpcc", "tptc0", "tptc1", "tptc2";
+	#dma-cells = <1>;
+	dma-channels = <64>;
+	ti,edma-regions = <4>;
+	ti,edma-slots = <256>;
+	ti,edma-xbar-event-map = <1 12
+				  2 13>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/drm/tilcdc/panel.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/drm/tilcdc/panel.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9301c330d1a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/drm/tilcdc/panel.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for tilcdc DRM generic panel output driver
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: value should be "ti,tilcdc,panel".
+ - panel-info: configuration info to configure LCDC correctly for the panel
+   - ac-bias: AC Bias Pin Frequency
+   - ac-bias-intrpt: AC Bias Pin Transitions per Interrupt
+   - dma-burst-sz: DMA burst size
+   - bpp: Bits per pixel
+   - fdd: FIFO DMA Request Delay
+   - sync-edge: Horizontal and Vertical Sync Edge: 0=rising 1=falling
+   - sync-ctrl: Horizontal and Vertical Sync: Control: 0=ignore
+   - raster-order: Raster Data Order Select: 1=Most-to-least 0=Least-to-most
+   - fifo-th: DMA FIFO threshold
+ - display-timings: typical videomode of lcd panel.  Multiple video modes
+   can be listed if the panel supports multiple timings, but the 'native-mode'
+   should be the preferred/default resolution.  Refer to
+   Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/display-timing.txt for display
+   timing binding details.
+
+Recommended properties:
+ - pinctrl-names, pinctrl-0: the pincontrol settings to configure
+   muxing properly for pins that connect to TFP410 device
+
+Example:
+
+	/* Settings for CDTech_S035Q01 / LCD3 cape: */
+	lcd3 {
+		compatible = "ti,tilcdc,panel";
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&bone_lcd3_cape_lcd_pins>;
+		panel-info {
+			ac-bias           = <255>;
+			ac-bias-intrpt    = <0>;
+			dma-burst-sz      = <16>;
+			bpp               = <16>;
+			fdd               = <0x80>;
+			sync-edge         = <0>;
+			sync-ctrl         = <1>;
+			raster-order      = <0>;
+			fifo-th           = <0>;
+		};
+		display-timings {
+			native-mode = <&timing0>;
+			timing0: 320x240 {
+				hactive         = <320>;
+				vactive         = <240>;
+				hback-porch     = <21>;
+				hfront-porch    = <58>;
+				hsync-len       = <47>;
+				vback-porch     = <11>;
+				vfront-porch    = <23>;
+				vsync-len       = <2>;
+				clock-frequency = <8000000>;
+				hsync-active    = <0>;
+				vsync-active    = <0>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/drm/tilcdc/slave.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/drm/tilcdc/slave.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3d2c52460dca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/drm/tilcdc/slave.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for tilcdc DRM encoder slave output driver
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: value should be "ti,tilcdc,slave".
+ - i2c: the phandle for the i2c device the encoder slave is connected to
+
+Recommended properties:
+ - pinctrl-names, pinctrl-0: the pincontrol settings to configure
+   muxing properly for pins that connect to TFP410 device
+
+Example:
+
+	hdmi {
+		compatible = "ti,tilcdc,slave";
+		i2c = <&i2c0>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&nxp_hdmi_bonelt_pins>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/drm/tilcdc/tfp410.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/drm/tilcdc/tfp410.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a58ae7756fc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/drm/tilcdc/tfp410.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for tilcdc DRM TFP410 output driver
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: value should be "ti,tilcdc,tfp410".
+ - i2c: the phandle for the i2c device to use for DDC
+
+Recommended properties:
+ - pinctrl-names, pinctrl-0: the pincontrol settings to configure
+   muxing properly for pins that connect to TFP410 device
+ - powerdn-gpio: the powerdown GPIO, pulled low to power down the
+   TFP410 device (for DPMS_OFF)
+
+Example:
+
+	dvicape {
+		compatible = "ti,tilcdc,tfp410";
+		i2c = <&i2c2>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&bone_dvi_cape_dvi_00A1_pins>;
+		powerdn-gpio = <&gpio2 31 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/drm/tilcdc/tilcdc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/drm/tilcdc/tilcdc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fff10da5e927
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/drm/tilcdc/tilcdc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for tilcdc DRM driver
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: value should be "ti,am33xx-tilcdc".
+ - interrupts: the interrupt number
+ - reg: base address and size of the LCDC device
+
+Recommended properties:
+ - interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that
+   services interrupts for this device.
+ - ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the LCDC
+
+Optional properties:
+ - max-bandwidth: The maximum pixels per second that the memory
+   interface / lcd controller combination can sustain
+ - max-width: The maximum horizontal pixel width supported by
+   the lcd controller.
+ - max-pixelclock: The maximum pixel clock that can be supported
+   by the lcd controller in KHz.
+
+Example:
+
+	fb: fb@4830e000 {
+		compatible = "ti,am33xx-tilcdc";
+		reg = <0x4830e000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+		interrupts = <36>;
+		ti,hwmods = "lcdc";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-palmas.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-palmas.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7dab6a8f4a0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-palmas.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+EXTCON FOR PALMAS/TWL CHIPS
+
+PALMAS USB COMPARATOR
+Required Properties:
+ - compatible : Should be "ti,palmas-usb" or "ti,twl6035-usb"
+
+Optional Properties:
+ - ti,wakeup : To enable the wakeup comparator in probe
+ - ti,enable-id-detection: Perform ID detection.
+ - ti,enable-vbus-detection: Perform VBUS detection.
+
+palmas-usb {
+       compatible = "ti,twl6035-usb", "ti,palmas-usb";
+       ti,wakeup;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/mxsfb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/mxsfb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..96ec5179c8a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/mxsfb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+* Freescale MXS LCD Interface (LCDIF)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,<chip>-lcdif".  Supported chips include
+  imx23 and imx28.
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for lcdif
+- interrupts: Should contain lcdif interrupts
+- display : phandle to display node (see below for details)
+
+* display node
+
+Required properties:
+- bits-per-pixel : <16> for RGB565, <32> for RGB888/666.
+- bus-width : number of data lines.  Could be <8>, <16>, <18> or <24>.
+
+Required sub-node:
+- display-timings : Refer to binding doc display-timing.txt for details.
+
+Examples:
+
+lcdif@80030000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-lcdif";
+	reg = <0x80030000 2000>;
+	interrupts = <38 86>;
+
+	display: display {
+		bits-per-pixel = <32>;
+		bus-width = <24>;
+
+		display-timings {
+			native-mode = <&timing0>;
+			timing0: timing0 {
+				clock-frequency = <33500000>;
+				hactive = <800>;
+				vactive = <480>;
+				hfront-porch = <164>;
+				hback-porch = <89>;
+				hsync-len = <10>;
+				vback-porch = <23>;
+				vfront-porch = <10>;
+				vsync-len = <10>;
+				hsync-active = <0>;
+				vsync-active = <0>;
+				de-active = <1>;
+				pixelclk-active = <0>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/cavium-octeon-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/cavium-octeon-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9d6dcd3fe7f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/cavium-octeon-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+* General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) bus.
+
+Properties:
+- compatible: "cavium,octeon-3860-gpio"
+
+  Compatibility with all cn3XXX, cn5XXX and cn6XXX SOCs.
+
+- reg: The base address of the GPIO unit's register bank.
+
+- gpio-controller: This is a GPIO controller.
+
+- #gpio-cells: Must be <2>.  The first cell is the GPIO pin.
+
+- interrupt-controller: The GPIO controller is also an interrupt
+  controller, many of its pins may be configured as an interrupt
+  source.
+
+- #interrupt-cells: Must be <2>.  The first cell is the GPIO pin
+   connected to the interrupt source.  The second cell is the interrupt
+   triggering protocol and may have one of four values:
+   1 - edge triggered on the rising edge.
+   2 - edge triggered on the falling edge
+   4 - level triggered active high.
+   8 - level triggered active low.
+
+- interrupts: Interrupt routing for each pin.
+
+Example:
+
+	gpio-controller@1070000000800 {
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-gpio";
+		reg = <0x10700 0x00000800 0x0 0x100>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		/* Interrupts are specified by two parts:
+		 * 1) GPIO pin number (0..15)
+		 * 2) Triggering (1 - edge rising
+		 *		  2 - edge falling
+		 *		  4 - level active high
+		 *		  8 - level active low)
+		 */
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+		/* The GPIO pin connect to 16 consecutive CUI bits */
+		interrupts = <0 16>, <0 17>, <0 18>, <0 19>,
+			     <0 20>, <0 21>, <0 22>, <0 23>,
+			     <0 24>, <0 25>, <0 26>, <0 27>,
+			     <0 28>, <0 29>, <0 30>, <0 31>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/fsl-imx-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/fsl-imx-gpio.txt
index 4363ae4b3c14..dbd22e0df21e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/fsl-imx-gpio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/fsl-imx-gpio.txt
@@ -8,15 +8,25 @@ Required properties:
   by low 16 pins and the second one is for high 16 pins.
 - gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a gpio controller.
 - #gpio-cells : Should be two.  The first cell is the pin number and
-  the second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently
-  unused).
+  the second cell is used to specify the gpio polarity:
+      0 = active high
+      1 = active low
+- interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller.
+- #interrupt-cells : Should be 2.  The first cell is the GPIO number.
+  The second cell bits[3:0] is used to specify trigger type and level flags:
+      1 = low-to-high edge triggered.
+      2 = high-to-low edge triggered.
+      4 = active high level-sensitive.
+      8 = active low level-sensitive.
 
 Example:
 
 gpio0: gpio@73f84000 {
-	compatible = "fsl,imx51-gpio", "fsl,imx31-gpio";
+	compatible = "fsl,imx51-gpio", "fsl,imx35-gpio";
 	reg = <0x73f84000 0x4000>;
 	interrupts = <50 51>;
 	gpio-controller;
 	#gpio-cells = <2>;
+	interrupt-controller;
+	#interrupt-cells = <2>;
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-74x164.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-74x164.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cc2608021f26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-74x164.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+* Generic 8-bits shift register GPIO driver
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "fairchild,74hc595"
+- reg : chip select number
+- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a gpio controller.
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two.  The first cell is the pin number and
+  the second cell is used to specify the gpio polarity:
+      0 = active high
+      1 = active low
+- registers-number: Number of daisy-chained shift registers
+
+Example:
+
+gpio5: gpio5@0 {
+	compatible = "fairchild,74hc595";
+	reg = <0>;
+	gpio-controller;
+	#gpio-cells = <2>;
+	registers-number = <4>;
+	spi-max-frequency = <100000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-adnp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-adnp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..af66b2724837
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-adnp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+Avionic Design N-bit GPIO expander bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "ad,gpio-adnp"
+- reg: The I2C slave address for this device.
+- interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller.
+- interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the controllers interrupt.
+- #gpio-cells: Should be 2. The first cell is the GPIO number and the
+  second cell is used to specify optional parameters:
+  - bit 0: polarity (0: normal, 1: inverted)
+- gpio-controller: Marks the device as a GPIO controller
+- nr-gpios: The number of pins supported by the controller.
+
+The GPIO expander can optionally be used as an interrupt controller, in
+which case it uses the default two cell specifier as described in
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt.
+
+Example:
+
+	gpioext: gpio-controller@41 {
+		compatible = "ad,gpio-adnp";
+		reg = <0x41>;
+
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+		interrupts = <160 1>;
+
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+
+		nr-gpios = <64>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-clps711x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-clps711x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e0d0446a6b78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-clps711x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+Cirrus Logic CLPS711X GPIO controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "cirrus,clps711x-gpio"
+- reg: Physical base GPIO controller registers location and length.
+  There should be two registers, first is DATA register, the second
+  is DIRECTION.
+- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a gpio controller.
+- #gpio-cells: Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and
+  the second cell is used to specify the gpio polarity:
+    0 = active high
+    1 = active low
+
+Note: Each GPIO port should have an alias correctly numbered in "aliases"
+node.
+
+Example:
+
+aliases {
+	gpio0 = &porta;
+};
+
+porta: gpio@80000000 {
+	compatible = "cirrus,clps711x-gpio";
+	reg = <0x80000000 0x1>, <0x80000040 0x1>;
+	gpio-controller;
+	#gpio-cells = <2>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-fan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-fan.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2dd457a3469a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-fan.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+Bindings for fan connected to GPIO lines
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "gpio-fan"
+- gpios: Specifies the pins that map to bits in the control value,
+  ordered MSB-->LSB.
+- gpio-fan,speed-map: A mapping of possible fan RPM speeds and the
+  control value that should be set to achieve them. This array
+  must have the RPM values in ascending order.
+
+Optional properties:
+- alarm-gpios: This pin going active indicates something is wrong with
+  the fan, and a udev event will be fired.
+
+Examples:
+
+	gpio_fan {
+		compatible = "gpio-fan";
+		gpios = <&gpio1 14 1
+			 &gpio1 13 1>;
+		gpio-fan,speed-map = <0    0
+				      3000 1
+				      6000 2>;
+		alarm-gpios = <&gpio1 15 1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-grgpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-grgpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e466598105fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-grgpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+Aeroflex Gaisler GRGPIO General Purpose I/O cores.
+
+The GRGPIO GPIO core is available in the GRLIB VHDL IP core library.
+
+Note: In the ordinary environment for the GRGPIO core, a Leon SPARC system,
+these properties are built from information in the AMBA plug&play.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- name : Should be "GAISLER_GPIO" or "01_01a"
+
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+
+- interrupts : Interrupt numbers for this device
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- nbits : The number of gpio lines. If not present driver assumes 32 lines.
+
+- irqmap : An array with an index for each gpio line. An index is either a valid
+	index into the interrupts property array, or 0xffffffff that indicates
+	no irq for that line. Driver provides no interrupt support if not
+	present.
+
+For further information look in the documentation for the GLIB IP core library:
+http://www.gaisler.com/products/grlib/grip.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..daa30174bcc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+Microchip MCP2308/MCP23S08/MCP23017/MCP23S17 driver for
+8-/16-bit I/O expander with serial interface (I2C/SPI)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be
+    - "mcp,mcp23s08" (DEPRECATED) for  8 GPIO SPI version
+    - "mcp,mcp23s17" (DEPRECATED) for 16 GPIO SPI version
+    - "mcp,mcp23008" (DEPRECATED) for  8 GPIO I2C version or
+    - "mcp,mcp23017" (DEPRECATED) for 16 GPIO I2C version of the chip
+
+    - "microchip,mcp23s08" for  8 GPIO SPI version
+    - "microchip,mcp23s17" for 16 GPIO SPI version
+    - "microchip,mcp23008" for  8 GPIO I2C version or
+    - "microchip,mcp23017" for 16 GPIO I2C version of the chip
+    NOTE: Do not use the old mcp prefix any more. It is deprecated and will be
+    removed.
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two.
+  - first cell is the pin number
+  - second cell is used to specify flags. Flags are currently unused.
+- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
+- reg : For an address on its bus. I2C uses this a the I2C address of the chip.
+        SPI uses this to specify the chipselect line which the chip is
+        connected to. The driver and the SPI variant of the chip support
+        multiple chips on the same chipselect. Have a look at
+        microchip,spi-present-mask below.
+
+Required device specific properties (only for SPI chips):
+- mcp,spi-present-mask (DEPRECATED)
+- microchip,spi-present-mask : This is a present flag, that makes only sense for SPI
+        chips - as the name suggests. Multiple SPI chips can share the same
+        SPI chipselect. Set a bit in bit0-7 in this mask to 1 if there is a
+        chip connected with the corresponding spi address set. For example if
+        you have a chip with address 3 connected, you have to set bit3 to 1,
+        which is 0x08. mcp23s08 chip variant only supports bits 0-3. It is not
+        possible to mix mcp23s08 and mcp23s17 on the same chipselect. Set at
+        least one bit to 1 for SPI chips.
+    NOTE: Do not use the old mcp prefix any more. It is deprecated and will be
+    removed.
+- spi-max-frequency = The maximum frequency this chip is able to handle
+
+Example I2C:
+gpiom1: gpio@20 {
+        compatible = "microchip,mcp23017";
+        gpio-controller;
+        #gpio-cells = <2>;
+        reg = <0x20>;
+};
+
+Example SPI:
+gpiom1: gpio@0 {
+        compatible = "microchip,mcp23s17";
+        gpio-controller;
+        #gpio-cells = <2>;
+        spi-present-mask = <0x01>;
+        reg = <0>;
+        spi-max-frequency = <1000000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mm-lantiq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mm-lantiq.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f93d51478d5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mm-lantiq.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+Lantiq SoC External Bus memory mapped GPIO controller
+
+By attaching hardware latches to the EBU it is possible to create output
+only gpios. This driver configures a special memory address, which when
+written to outputs 16 bit to the latches.
+
+The node describing the memory mapped GPIOs needs to be a child of the node
+describing the "lantiq,localbus".
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "lantiq,gpio-mm-lantiq"
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two.  The first cell is the pin number and
+  the second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently
+  unused).
+- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a gpio controller.
+
+Optional properties:
+- lantiq,shadow : The default value that we shall assume as already set on the
+  shift register cascade.
+
+Example:
+
+localbus@0 {
+	#address-cells = <2>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	ranges = <0 0 0x0 0x3ffffff /* addrsel0 */
+		1 0 0x4000000 0x4000010>; /* addsel1 */
+	compatible = "lantiq,localbus", "simple-bus";
+
+	gpio_mm0: gpio@4000000 {
+		compatible = "lantiq,gpio-mm";
+		reg = <1 0x0 0x10>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		lantiq,shadow = <0x77f>
+	};
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-msm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-msm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ac20e68a004e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-msm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+MSM GPIO controller bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:
+  - "qcom,msm-gpio" for MSM controllers
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two.
+  - first cell is the pin number
+  - second cell is used to specify optional parameters (unused)
+- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
+- #interrupt-cells : Should be 2.
+- interrupt-controller: Mark the device node as an interrupt controller
+- interrupts : Specify the TLMM summary interrupt number
+- ngpio : Specify the number of MSM GPIOs
+
+Example:
+
+	msmgpio: gpio@fd510000 {
+		compatible = "qcom,msm-gpio";
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+		reg = <0xfd510000 0x4000>;
+		interrupts = <0 208 0>;
+		ngpio = <150>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mvebu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mvebu.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a6f3bec1da7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mvebu.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+* Marvell EBU GPIO controller
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : Should be "marvell,orion-gpio", "marvell,mv78200-gpio"
+  or "marvell,armadaxp-gpio". "marvell,orion-gpio" should be used for
+  Orion, Kirkwood, Dove, Discovery (except MV78200) and Armada
+  370. "marvell,mv78200-gpio" should be used for the Discovery
+  MV78200. "marvel,armadaxp-gpio" should be used for all Armada XP
+  SoCs (MV78230, MV78260, MV78460).
+
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device. Only one
+  entry is expected, except for the "marvell,armadaxp-gpio" variant
+  for which two entries are expected: one for the general registers,
+  one for the per-cpu registers.
+
+- interrupts: The list of interrupts that are used for all the pins
+  managed by this GPIO bank. There can be more than one interrupt
+  (example: 1 interrupt per 8 pins on Armada XP, which means 4
+  interrupts per bank of 32 GPIOs).
+
+- interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller
+
+- #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+  interrupt source. Should be two.
+  The first cell is the GPIO number.
+  The second cell is used to specify flags:
+    bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags:
+      1 = low-to-high edge triggered.
+      2 = high-to-low edge triggered.
+      4 = active high level-sensitive.
+      8 = active low level-sensitive.
+
+- gpio-controller: marks the device node as a gpio controller
+
+- ngpios: number of GPIOs this controller has
+
+- #gpio-cells: Should be two. The first cell is the pin number. The
+  second cell is reserved for flags, unused at the moment.
+
+Example:
+
+		gpio0: gpio@d0018100 {
+			compatible = "marvell,armadaxp-gpio";
+			reg = <0xd0018100 0x40>,
+			    <0xd0018800 0x30>;
+			ngpios = <32>;
+			gpio-controller;
+			#gpio-cells = <2>;
+			interrupt-controller;
+			#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+			interrupts = <16>, <17>, <18>, <19>;
+		};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mxs.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mxs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1e677a47b836
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mxs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+* Freescale MXS GPIO controller
+
+The Freescale MXS GPIO controller is part of MXS PIN controller.  The
+GPIOs are organized in port/bank.  Each port consists of 32 GPIOs.
+
+As the GPIO controller is embedded in the PIN controller and all the
+GPIO ports share the same IO space with PIN controller, the GPIO node
+will be represented as sub-nodes of MXS pinctrl node.
+
+Required properties for GPIO node:
+- compatible : Should be "fsl,<soc>-gpio".  The supported SoCs include
+  imx23 and imx28.
+- interrupts : Should be the port interrupt shared by all 32 pins.
+- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a gpio controller.
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two.  The first cell is the pin number and
+  the second cell is used to specify the gpio polarity:
+      0 = active high
+      1 = active low
+- interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller.
+- #interrupt-cells : Should be 2.  The first cell is the GPIO number.
+  The second cell bits[3:0] is used to specify trigger type and level flags:
+      1 = low-to-high edge triggered.
+      2 = high-to-low edge triggered.
+      4 = active high level-sensitive.
+      8 = active low level-sensitive.
+
+Note: Each GPIO port should have an alias correctly numbered in "aliases"
+node.
+
+Examples:
+
+aliases {
+	gpio0 = &gpio0;
+	gpio1 = &gpio1;
+	gpio2 = &gpio2;
+	gpio3 = &gpio3;
+	gpio4 = &gpio4;
+};
+
+pinctrl@80018000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-pinctrl", "simple-bus";
+	reg = <0x80018000 2000>;
+
+	gpio0: gpio@0 {
+		compatible = "fsl,imx28-gpio";
+		interrupts = <127>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+	};
+
+	gpio1: gpio@1 {
+		compatible = "fsl,imx28-gpio";
+		interrupts = <126>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+	};
+
+	gpio2: gpio@2 {
+		compatible = "fsl,imx28-gpio";
+		interrupts = <125>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+	};
+
+	gpio3: gpio@3 {
+		compatible = "fsl,imx28-gpio";
+		interrupts = <124>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+	};
+
+	gpio4: gpio@4 {
+		compatible = "fsl,imx28-gpio";
+		interrupts = <123>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-nmk.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-nmk.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8315ac7780ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-nmk.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+Nomadik GPIO controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible            : Should be "st,nomadik-gpio".
+- reg                   : Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+- interrupts            : The interrupt outputs from the controller.
+- #gpio-cells           : Should be two:
+                            The first cell is the pin number.
+                            The second cell is used to specify optional parameters:
+                              - bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags:
+                                  1 = low-to-high edge triggered.
+                                  2 = high-to-low edge triggered.
+                                  4 = active high level-sensitive.
+                                  8 = active low level-sensitive.
+- gpio-controller       : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
+- interrupt-controller  : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller.
+- gpio-bank             : Specifies which bank a controller owns.
+- st,supports-sleepmode : Specifies whether controller can sleep or not
+
+Example:
+
+                gpio1: gpio@8012e080 {
+                        compatible = "st,nomadik-gpio";
+                        reg =  <0x8012e080 0x80>;
+                        interrupts = <0 120 0x4>;
+                        #gpio-cells = <2>;
+                        gpio-controller;
+                        interrupt-controller;
+                        st,supports-sleepmode;
+                        gpio-bank = <1>;
+                };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-omap.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8d950522e7fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-omap.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+OMAP GPIO controller bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:
+  - "ti,omap2-gpio" for OMAP2 controllers
+  - "ti,omap3-gpio" for OMAP3 controllers
+  - "ti,omap4-gpio" for OMAP4 controllers
+- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two.
+  - first cell is the pin number
+  - second cell is used to specify optional parameters (unused)
+- interrupt-controller: Mark the device node as an interrupt controller.
+- #interrupt-cells : Should be 2.
+  The first cell is the GPIO number.
+  The second cell is used to specify flags:
+    bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags:
+      1 = low-to-high edge triggered.
+      2 = high-to-low edge triggered.
+      4 = active high level-sensitive.
+      8 = active low level-sensitive.
+
+OMAP specific properties:
+- ti,hwmods:		Name of the hwmod associated to the GPIO:
+			"gpio<X>", <X> being the 1-based instance number
+			from the HW spec.
+- ti,gpio-always-on: 	Indicates if a GPIO bank is always powered and
+			so will never lose its logic state.
+
+
+Example:
+
+gpio4: gpio4 {
+    compatible = "ti,omap4-gpio";
+    ti,hwmods = "gpio4";
+    gpio-controller;
+    #gpio-cells = <2>;
+    interrupt-controller;
+    #interrupt-cells = <2>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-palmas.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-palmas.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..08b5b52a3ae0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-palmas.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+Palmas GPIO controller bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:
+  - "ti,palams-gpio" for palma series of the GPIO controller
+  - "ti,tps80036-gpio" for Palma series device TPS80036.
+  - "ti,tps65913-gpio" for palma series device TPS65913.
+  - "ti,tps65914-gpio" for palma series device TPS65914.
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two.
+  - first cell is the gpio pin number
+  - second cell is used to specify the gpio polarity:
+      0 = active high
+      1 = active low
+- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
+
+Note: This gpio node will be sub node of palmas node.
+
+Example:
+	palmas: tps65913@58 {
+		:::::::::::
+		palmas_gpio: palmas_gpio {
+			compatible = "ti,palmas-gpio";
+			gpio-controller;
+			#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		};
+		:::::::::::
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-poweroff.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-poweroff.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d4eab9227ea4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-poweroff.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+Driver a GPIO line that can be used to turn the power off.
+
+The driver supports both level triggered and edge triggered power off.
+At driver load time, the driver will request the given gpio line and
+install a pm_power_off handler. If the optional properties 'input' is
+not found, the GPIO line will be driven in the inactive
+state. Otherwise its configured as an input.
+
+When the pm_power_off is called, the gpio is configured as an output,
+and drive active, so triggering a level triggered power off
+condition. This will also cause an inactive->active edge condition, so
+triggering positive edge triggered power off. After a delay of 100ms,
+the GPIO is set to inactive, thus causing an active->inactive edge,
+triggering negative edge triggered power off. After another 100ms
+delay the GPIO is driver active again. If the power is still on and
+the CPU still running after a 3000ms delay, a WARN_ON(1) is emitted.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "gpio-poweroff".
+- gpios : The GPIO to set high/low, see "gpios property" in
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt. If the pin should be
+  low to power down the board set it to "Active Low", otherwise set
+  gpio to "Active High".
+
+Optional properties:
+- input : Initially configure the GPIO line as an input. Only reconfigure
+  it to an output when the pm_power_off function is called. If this optional
+  property is not specified, the GPIO is initialized as an output in its
+  inactive state.
+
+Examples:
+
+gpio-poweroff {
+	compatible = "gpio-poweroff";
+	gpios = <&gpio 4 0>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-samsung.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-samsung.txt
index 8f50fe5e6c42..5375625e8cd2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-samsung.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-samsung.txt
@@ -11,14 +11,15 @@ Required properties:
      <[phandle of the gpio controller node]
       [pin number within the gpio controller]
       [mux function]
-      [pull up/down]
+      [flags and pull up/down]
       [drive strength]>
 
   Values for gpio specifier:
   - Pin number: is a value between 0 to 7.
-  - Pull Up/Down: 0 - Pull Up/Down Disabled.
-                  1 - Pull Down Enabled.
-                  3 - Pull Up Enabled.
+  - Flags and Pull Up/Down: 0 - Pull Up/Down Disabled.
+                            1 - Pull Down Enabled.
+                            3 - Pull Up Enabled.
+          Bit 16 (0x00010000) - Input is active low.
   - Drive Strength: 0 - 1x,
                     1 - 3x,
                     2 - 2x,
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-stericsson-coh901.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-stericsson-coh901.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fd665b44d767
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-stericsson-coh901.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+ST-Ericsson COH 901 571/3 GPIO controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Compatible property value should be "stericsson,gpio-coh901"
+- reg: Physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: the 0...n interrupts assigned to the different GPIO ports/banks.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-stmpe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-stmpe.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a0e4cf885213
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-stmpe.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+STMPE gpio
+----------
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: "st,stmpe-gpio"
+
+Optional properties:
+ - st,norequest-mask: bitmask specifying which GPIOs should _not_ be requestable
+   due to different usage (e.g. touch, keypad)
+
+Node name must be stmpe_gpio and should be child node of stmpe node to which it
+belongs.
+
+Example:
+	stmpe_gpio {
+		compatible = "st,stmpe-gpio";
+		st,norequest-mask = <0x20>;	//gpio 5 can't be used
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-stp-xway.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-stp-xway.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..854de130a971
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-stp-xway.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+Lantiq SoC Serial To Parallel (STP) GPIO controller
+
+The Serial To Parallel (STP) is found on MIPS based Lantiq socs. It is a
+peripheral controller used to drive external shift register cascades. At most
+3 groups of 8 bits can be driven. The hardware is able to allow the DSL modem
+to drive the 2 LSBs of the cascade automatically.
+
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "lantiq,gpio-stp-xway"
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two.  The first cell is the pin number and
+  the second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently
+  unused).
+- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a gpio controller.
+
+Optional properties:
+- lantiq,shadow : The default value that we shall assume as already set on the
+  shift register cascade.
+- lantiq,groups : Set the 3 bit mask to select which of the 3 groups are enabled
+  in the shift register cascade.
+- lantiq,dsl : The dsl core can control the 2 LSBs of the gpio cascade. This 2 bit
+  property can enable this feature.
+- lantiq,phy1 : The gphy1 core can control 3 bits of the gpio cascade.
+- lantiq,phy2 : The gphy2 core can control 3 bits of the gpio cascade.
+- lantiq,rising : use rising instead of falling edge for the shift register
+
+Example:
+
+gpio1: stp@E100BB0 {
+	compatible = "lantiq,gpio-stp-xway";
+	reg = <0xE100BB0 0x40>;
+	#gpio-cells = <2>;
+	gpio-controller;
+
+	lantiq,shadow = <0xffff>;
+	lantiq,groups = <0x7>;
+	lantiq,dsl = <0x3>;
+	lantiq,phy1 = <0x7>;
+	lantiq,phy2 = <0x7>;
+	/* lantiq,rising; */
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-twl4030.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-twl4030.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..66788fda1db3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-twl4030.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+twl4030 GPIO controller bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:
+  - "ti,twl4030-gpio" for twl4030 GPIO controller
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two.
+  - first cell is the pin number
+  - second cell is used to specify optional parameters (unused)
+- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
+- #interrupt-cells : Should be 2.
+- interrupt-controller: Mark the device node as an interrupt controller
+  The first cell is the GPIO number.
+  The second cell is not used.
+- ti,use-leds : Enables LEDA and LEDB outputs if set
+- ti,debounce : if n-th bit is set, debounces GPIO-n
+- ti,mmc-cd : if n-th bit is set, GPIO-n controls VMMC(n+1)
+- ti,pullups : if n-th bit is set, set a pullup on GPIO-n
+- ti,pulldowns : if n-th bit is set, set a pulldown on GPIO-n
+
+Example:
+
+twl_gpio: gpio {
+    compatible = "ti,twl4030-gpio";
+    #gpio-cells = <2>;
+    gpio-controller;
+    #interrupt-cells = <2>;
+    interrupt-controller;
+    ti,use-leds;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-tz1090-pdc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-tz1090-pdc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1fd98ffa8cb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-tz1090-pdc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+ImgTec TZ1090 PDC GPIO Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Compatible property value should be "img,tz1090-pdc-gpio".
+
+- reg: Physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region. This starts at and cover the SOC_GPIO_CONTROL registers.
+
+- gpio-controller: Specifies that the node is a gpio controller.
+
+- #gpio-cells: Should be 2. The syntax of the gpio specifier used by client
+  nodes should have the following values.
+     <[phandle of the gpio controller node]
+      [PDC gpio number]
+      [gpio flags]>
+
+  Values for gpio specifier:
+  - GPIO number: a value in the range 0 to 6.
+  - GPIO flags: bit field of flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>.
+    Only the following flags are supported:
+      GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH
+      GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW
+
+Optional properties:
+- gpio-ranges: Mapping to pin controller pins (as described in
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt)
+
+- interrupts: Individual syswake interrupts (other GPIOs cannot interrupt)
+
+
+Example:
+
+	pdc_gpios: gpio-controller@02006500 {
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+
+		compatible = "img,tz1090-pdc-gpio";
+		reg = <0x02006500 0x100>;
+
+		interrupt-parent = <&pdc>;
+		interrupts =	<8  IRQ_TYPE_NONE>,	/* Syswake 0 */
+				<9  IRQ_TYPE_NONE>,	/* Syswake 1 */
+				<10 IRQ_TYPE_NONE>;	/* Syswake 2 */
+		gpio-ranges = <&pdc_pinctrl 0 0 7>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-tz1090.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-tz1090.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..174cdf309170
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-tz1090.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+ImgTec TZ1090 GPIO Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Compatible property value should be "img,tz1090-gpio".
+
+- reg: Physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+- #address-cells: Should be 1 (for bank subnodes)
+
+- #size-cells: Should be 0 (for bank subnodes)
+
+- Each bank of GPIOs should have a subnode to represent it.
+
+  Bank subnode required properties:
+  - reg: Index of bank in the range 0 to 2.
+
+  - gpio-controller: Specifies that the node is a gpio controller.
+
+  - #gpio-cells: Should be 2. The syntax of the gpio specifier used by client
+    nodes should have the following values.
+       <[phandle of the gpio controller node]
+        [gpio number within the gpio bank]
+        [gpio flags]>
+
+    Values for gpio specifier:
+    - GPIO number: a value in the range 0 to 29.
+    - GPIO flags: bit field of flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>.
+      Only the following flags are supported:
+        GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH
+        GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW
+
+  Bank subnode optional properties:
+  - gpio-ranges: Mapping to pin controller pins (as described in
+    Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt)
+
+  - interrupts: Interrupt for the entire bank
+
+  - interrupt-controller: Specifies that the node is an interrupt controller
+
+  - #interrupt-cells: Should be 2. The syntax of the interrupt specifier used by
+    client nodes should have the following values.
+       <[phandle of the interurupt controller]
+        [gpio number within the gpio bank]
+        [irq flags]>
+
+    Values for irq specifier:
+    - GPIO number: a value in the range 0 to 29
+    - IRQ flags: value to describe edge and level triggering, as defined in
+      <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h>. Only the following flags are
+      supported:
+        IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING
+        IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING
+        IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH
+        IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH
+        IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW
+
+
+
+Example:
+
+	gpios: gpio-controller@02005800 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		compatible = "img,tz1090-gpio";
+		reg = <0x02005800 0x90>;
+
+		/* bank 0 with an interrupt */
+		gpios0: bank@0 {
+			#gpio-cells = <2>;
+			#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+			reg = <0>;
+			interrupts = <13 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+			gpio-controller;
+			gpio-ranges = <&pinctrl 0 0 30>;
+			interrupt-controller;
+		};
+
+		/* bank 2 without interrupt */
+		gpios2: bank@2 {
+			#gpio-cells = <2>;
+			reg = <2>;
+			gpio-controller;
+			gpio-ranges = <&pinctrl 0 60 30>;
+		};
+	};
+
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xilinx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xilinx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..63bf4becd5f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xilinx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+Xilinx plb/axi GPIO controller
+
+Dual channel GPIO controller with configurable number of pins
+(from 1 to 32 per channel). Every pin can be configured as
+input/output/tristate. Both channels share the same global IRQ but
+local interrupts can be enabled on channel basis.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "xlnx,xps-gpio-1.00.a"
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the
+  second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently unused).
+- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
+
+Optional properties:
+- interrupts : Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ.
+- interrupt-parent : Phandle for the interrupt controller that
+  services interrupts for this device.
+- xlnx,all-inputs : if n-th bit is setup, GPIO-n is input
+- xlnx,dout-default : if n-th bit is 1, GPIO-n default value is 1
+- xlnx,gpio-width : gpio width
+- xlnx,tri-default : if n-th bit is 1, GPIO-n is in tristate mode
+- xlnx,is-dual : if 1, controller also uses the second channel
+- xlnx,all-inputs-2 : as above but for the second channel
+- xlnx,dout-default-2 : as above but the second channel
+- xlnx,gpio2-width : as above but for the second channel
+- xlnx,tri-default-2 : as above but for the second channel
+
+
+Example:
+gpio: gpio@40000000 {
+	#gpio-cells = <2>;
+	compatible = "xlnx,xps-gpio-1.00.a";
+	gpio-controller ;
+	interrupt-parent = <&microblaze_0_intc>;
+	interrupts = < 6 2 >;
+	reg = < 0x40000000 0x10000 >;
+	xlnx,all-inputs = <0x0>;
+	xlnx,all-inputs-2 = <0x0>;
+	xlnx,dout-default = <0x0>;
+	xlnx,dout-default-2 = <0x0>;
+	xlnx,gpio-width = <0x2>;
+	xlnx,gpio2-width = <0x2>;
+	xlnx,interrupt-present = <0x1>;
+	xlnx,is-dual = <0x1>;
+	xlnx,tri-default = <0xffffffff>;
+	xlnx,tri-default-2 = <0xffffffff>;
+} ;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt
index 4e16ba4feab0..6cec6ff20d2e 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt
@@ -75,4 +75,45 @@ Example of two SOC GPIO banks defined as gpio-controller nodes:
 		gpio-controller;
 	};
 
+2.1) gpio- and pin-controller interaction
+-----------------------------------------
 
+Some or all of the GPIOs provided by a GPIO controller may be routed to pins
+on the package via a pin controller. This allows muxing those pins between
+GPIO and other functions.
+
+It is useful to represent which GPIOs correspond to which pins on which pin
+controllers. The gpio-ranges property described below represents this, and
+contains information structures as follows:
+
+	gpio-range-list ::= <single-gpio-range> [gpio-range-list]
+	single-gpio-range ::=
+			<pinctrl-phandle> <gpio-base> <pinctrl-base> <count>
+	gpio-phandle : phandle to pin controller node.
+	gpio-base : Base GPIO ID in the GPIO controller
+	pinctrl-base : Base pinctrl pin ID in the pin controller
+	count : The number of GPIOs/pins in this range
+
+The "pin controller node" mentioned above must conform to the bindings
+described in ../pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt.
+
+Previous versions of this binding required all pin controller nodes that
+were referenced by any gpio-ranges property to contain a property named
+#gpio-range-cells with value <3>. This requirement is now deprecated.
+However, that property may still exist in older device trees for
+compatibility reasons, and would still be required even in new device
+trees that need to be compatible with older software.
+
+Example:
+
+	qe_pio_e: gpio-controller@1460 {
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		compatible = "fsl,qe-pario-bank-e", "fsl,qe-pario-bank";
+		reg = <0x1460 0x18>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		gpio-ranges = <&pinctrl1 0 20 10>, <&pinctrl2 10 50 20>;
+	};
+
+Here, a single GPIO controller has GPIOs 0..9 routed to pin controller
+pinctrl1's pins 20..29, and GPIOs 10..19 routed to pin controller pinctrl2's
+pins 50..59.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio_atmel.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio_atmel.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..85f8c0d084fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio_atmel.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+* Atmel GPIO controller (PIO)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "atmel,<chip>-gpio", where <chip> is at91rm9200 or at91sam9x5.
+- reg: Should contain GPIO controller registers location and length
+- interrupts: Should be the port interrupt shared by all the pins.
+- #gpio-cells: Should be two.  The first cell is the pin number and
+  the second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently
+  unused).
+- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
+
+optional properties:
+- #gpio-lines: Number of gpio if absent 32.
+
+
+Example:
+	pioA: gpio@fffff200 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-gpio";
+		reg = <0xfffff200 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <2 4>;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-lines = <19>;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio_lpc32xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio_lpc32xx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..49819367a011
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio_lpc32xx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+NXP LPC32xx SoC GPIO controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "nxp,lpc3220-gpio"
+- reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
+- #gpio-cells: Should be 3:
+   1) bank:
+      0: GPIO P0
+      1: GPIO P1
+      2: GPIO P2
+      3: GPIO P3
+      4: GPI P3
+      5: GPO P3
+   2) pin number
+   3) optional parameters:
+      - bit 0 specifies polarity (0 for normal, 1 for inverted)
+- reg: Index of the GPIO group
+
+Example:
+
+	gpio: gpio@40028000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-gpio";
+		reg = <0x40028000 0x1000>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <3>; /* bank, pin, flags */
+	};
+
+	leds {
+		compatible = "gpio-leds";
+
+		led0 {
+			gpios = <&gpio 5 1 1>; /* GPO_P3 1, active low */
+			linux,default-trigger = "heartbeat";
+			default-state = "off";
+		};
+
+		led1 {
+			gpios = <&gpio 5 14 1>; /* GPO_P3 14, active low */
+			linux,default-trigger = "timer";
+			default-state = "off";
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio_nvidia.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio_nvidia.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index eb4b530d64e1..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio_nvidia.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-NVIDIA Tegra 2 GPIO controller
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : "nvidia,tegra20-gpio"
-- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the
-  second cell is used to specify optional parameters:
-  - bit 0 specifies polarity (0 for normal, 1 for inverted)
-- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index fd2bd56e7195..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-LEDs connected to GPIO lines
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : should be "gpio-leds".
-
-Each LED is represented as a sub-node of the gpio-leds device.  Each
-node's name represents the name of the corresponding LED.
-
-LED sub-node properties:
-- gpios :  Should specify the LED's GPIO, see "gpios property" in
-  Documentation/devicetree/gpio.txt.  Active low LEDs should be
-  indicated using flags in the GPIO specifier.
-- label :  (optional) The label for this LED.  If omitted, the label is
-  taken from the node name (excluding the unit address).
-- linux,default-trigger :  (optional) This parameter, if present, is a
-  string defining the trigger assigned to the LED.  Current triggers are:
-    "backlight" - LED will act as a back-light, controlled by the framebuffer
-		  system
-    "default-on" - LED will turn on, but see "default-state" below
-    "heartbeat" - LED "double" flashes at a load average based rate
-    "ide-disk" - LED indicates disk activity
-    "timer" - LED flashes at a fixed, configurable rate
-- default-state:  (optional) The initial state of the LED.  Valid
-  values are "on", "off", and "keep".  If the LED is already on or off
-  and the default-state property is set the to same value, then no
-  glitch should be produced where the LED momentarily turns off (or
-  on).  The "keep" setting will keep the LED at whatever its current
-  state is, without producing a glitch.  The default is off if this
-  property is not present.
-
-Examples:
-
-leds {
-	compatible = "gpio-leds";
-	hdd {
-		label = "IDE Activity";
-		gpios = <&mcu_pio 0 1>; /* Active low */
-		linux,default-trigger = "ide-disk";
-	};
-
-	fault {
-		gpios = <&mcu_pio 1 0>;
-		/* Keep LED on if BIOS detected hardware fault */
-		default-state = "keep";
-	};
-};
-
-run-control {
-	compatible = "gpio-leds";
-	red {
-		gpios = <&mpc8572 6 0>;
-		default-state = "off";
-	};
-	green {
-		gpios = <&mpc8572 7 0>;
-		default-state = "on";
-	};
-}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/men-a021-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/men-a021-wdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..370dee3226d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/men-a021-wdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+Bindings for MEN A21 Watchdog device connected to GPIO lines
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "men,a021-wdt"
+- gpios: Specifies the pins that control the Watchdog, order:
+  1: Watchdog enable
+  2: Watchdog fast-mode
+  3: Watchdog trigger
+  4: Watchdog reset cause bit 0
+  5: Watchdog reset cause bit 1
+  6: Watchdog reset cause bit 2
+
+Optional properties:
+- None
+
+Example:
+	watchdog {
+		compatible ="men,a021-wdt";
+		gpios = <&gpio3 9  1	/* WD_EN */
+			 &gpio3 10 1	/* WD_FAST */
+			 &gpio3 11 1	/* WD_TRIG */
+			 &gpio3 6  1	/* RST_CAUSE[0] */
+			 &gpio3 7  1	/* RST_CAUSE[1] */
+			 &gpio3 8  1>;	/* RST_CAUSE[2] */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/mrvl-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/mrvl-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..66416261e14d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/mrvl-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+* Marvell PXA GPIO controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "intel,pxa25x-gpio", "intel,pxa26x-gpio",
+		"intel,pxa27x-gpio", "intel,pxa3xx-gpio",
+		"marvell,pxa93x-gpio", "marvell,mmp-gpio" or
+		"marvell,mmp2-gpio".
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts : Should be the port interrupt shared by all gpio pins.
+  There're three gpio interrupts in arch-pxa, and they're gpio0,
+  gpio1 and gpio_mux. There're only one gpio interrupt in arch-mmp,
+  gpio_mux.
+- interrupt-names : Should be the names of irq resources. Each interrupt
+  uses its own interrupt name, so there should be as many interrupt names
+  as referenced interrups.
+- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller.
+- #interrupt-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+  interrupt source.
+- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a gpio controller.
+- #gpio-cells : Should be one.  It is the pin number.
+
+Example:
+
+	gpio: gpio@d4019000 {
+		compatible = "marvell,mmp-gpio";
+		reg = <0xd4019000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <49>;
+		interrupt-names = "gpio_mux";
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <1>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+      };
+
+* Marvell Orion GPIO Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible         : Should be "marvell,orion-gpio"
+- reg                : Address and length of the register set for controller.
+- gpio-controller    : So we know this is a gpio controller.
+- ngpio              : How many gpios this controller has.
+- interrupts	     : Up to 4 Interrupts for the controller.
+
+Optional properties:
+- mask-offset        : For SMP Orions, offset for Nth CPU
+
+Example:
+
+		gpio0: gpio@10100 {
+			compatible = "marvell,orion-gpio";
+			#gpio-cells = <2>;
+			gpio-controller;
+			reg = <0x10100 0x40>;
+			ngpio = <32>;
+			interrupts = <35>, <36>, <37>, <38>;
+		};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/nvidia,tegra20-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/nvidia,tegra20-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..023c9526e5f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/nvidia,tegra20-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra GPIO controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra<chip>-gpio"
+- reg : Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+- interrupts : The interrupt outputs from the controller. For Tegra20,
+  there should be 7 interrupts specified, and for Tegra30, there should
+  be 8 interrupts specified.
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the
+  second cell is used to specify optional parameters:
+  - bit 0 specifies polarity (0 for normal, 1 for inverted)
+- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
+- #interrupt-cells : Should be 2.
+  The first cell is the GPIO number.
+  The second cell is used to specify flags:
+    bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags:
+      1 = low-to-high edge triggered.
+      2 = high-to-low edge triggered.
+      4 = active high level-sensitive.
+      8 = active low level-sensitive.
+      Valid combinations are 1, 2, 3, 4, 8.
+- interrupt-controller : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller.
+
+Example:
+
+gpio: gpio@6000d000 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-gpio";
+	reg = < 0x6000d000 0x1000 >;
+	interrupts = < 0 32 0x04
+		       0 33 0x04
+		       0 34 0x04
+		       0 35 0x04
+		       0 55 0x04
+		       0 87 0x04
+		       0 89 0x04 >;
+	#gpio-cells = <2>;
+	gpio-controller;
+	#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+	interrupt-controller;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8655df9440d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+* Renesas R-Car GPIO Controller
+
+Required Properties:
+
+  - compatible: should be one of the following.
+    - "renesas,gpio-r8a7778": for R8A7778 (R-Mobile M1) compatible GPIO controller.
+    - "renesas,gpio-r8a7779": for R8A7779 (R-Car H1) compatible GPIO controller.
+    - "renesas,gpio-r8a7790": for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) compatible GPIO controller.
+    - "renesas,gpio-rcar": for generic R-Car GPIO controller.
+
+  - reg: Base address and length of each memory resource used by the GPIO
+    controller hardware module.
+
+  - interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller.
+  - interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the controllers interrupt.
+
+  - gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a gpio controller.
+  - #gpio-cells: Should be 2. The first cell is the GPIO number and the second
+    cell specifies GPIO flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>. Only the
+    GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH and GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW flags are supported.
+  - gpio-ranges: Range of pins managed by the GPIO controller.
+
+Please refer to gpio.txt in this directory for details of gpio-ranges property
+and the common GPIO bindings used by client devices.
+
+The GPIO controller also acts as an interrupt controller. It uses the default
+two cells specifier as described in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/
+interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt.
+
+Example: R8A7779 (R-Car H1) GPIO controller nodes
+
+	gpio0: gpio@ffc40000 {
+		compatible = "renesas,gpio-r8a7779", "renesas,gpio-rcar";
+		reg = <0xffc40000 0x2c>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+		interrupts = <0 141 0x4>;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		gpio-ranges = <&pfc 0 0 32>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+	};
+	...
+	gpio6: gpio@ffc46000 {
+		compatible = "renesas,gpio-r8a7779", "renesas,gpio-rcar";
+		reg = <0xffc46000 0x2c>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+		interrupts = <0 147 0x4>;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		gpio-ranges = <&pfc 0 192 9>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/sodaville.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/sodaville.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..563eff22b975
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/sodaville.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+GPIO controller on CE4100 / Sodaville SoCs
+==========================================
+
+The bindings for CE4100's GPIO controller match the generic description
+which is covered by the gpio.txt file in this folder.
+
+The only additional property is the intel,muxctl property which holds the
+value which is written into the MUXCNTL register.
+
+There is no compatible property for now because the driver is probed via
+PCI id (vendor 0x8086 device 0x2e67).
+
+The interrupt specifier consists of two cells encoded as follows:
+ - <1st cell>: The interrupt-number that identifies the interrupt source.
+ - <2nd cell>: The level-sense information, encoded as follows:
+		4 - active high level-sensitive
+		8 - active low level-sensitive
+
+Example of the GPIO device and one user:
+
+	pcigpio: gpio@b,1 {
+			/* two cells for GPIO and interrupt */
+			#gpio-cells = <2>;
+			#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+			compatible = "pci8086,2e67.2",
+					   "pci8086,2e67",
+					   "pciclassff0000",
+					   "pciclassff00";
+
+			reg = <0x15900 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0>;
+			/* Interrupt line of the gpio device */
+			interrupts = <15 1>;
+			/* It is an interrupt and GPIO controller itself */
+			interrupt-controller;
+			gpio-controller;
+			intel,muxctl = <0>;
+	};
+
+	testuser@20 {
+			compatible = "example,testuser";
+			/* User the 11th GPIO line as an active high triggered
+			 * level interrupt
+			 */
+			interrupts = <11 8>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&pcigpio>;
+			/* Use this GPIO also with the gpio functions */
+			gpios = <&pcigpio 11 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/spear_spics.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/spear_spics.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..96c37eb15075
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/spear_spics.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+=== ST Microelectronics SPEAr SPI CS Driver ===
+
+SPEAr platform provides a provision to control chipselects of ARM PL022 Prime
+Cell spi controller through its system registers, which otherwise remains under
+PL022 control. If chipselect remain under PL022 control then they would be
+released as soon as transfer is over and TxFIFO becomes empty. This is not
+desired by some of the device protocols above spi which expect (multiple)
+transfers without releasing their chipselects.
+
+Chipselects can be controlled by software by turning them as GPIOs. SPEAr
+provides another interface through system registers through which software can
+directly control each PL022 chipselect. Hence, it is natural for SPEAr to export
+the control of this interface as gpio.
+
+Required properties:
+
+  * compatible: should be defined as "st,spear-spics-gpio"
+  * reg: mentioning address range of spics controller
+  * st-spics,peripcfg-reg: peripheral configuration register offset
+  * st-spics,sw-enable-bit: bit offset to enable sw control
+  * st-spics,cs-value-bit: bit offset to drive chipselect low or high
+  * st-spics,cs-enable-mask: chip select number bit mask
+  * st-spics,cs-enable-shift: chip select number program offset
+  * gpio-controller: Marks the device node as gpio controller
+  * #gpio-cells: should be 1 and will mention chip select number
+
+All the above bit offsets are within peripcfg register.
+
+Example:
+-------
+spics: spics@e0700000{
+        compatible = "st,spear-spics-gpio";
+        reg = <0xe0700000 0x1000>;
+        st-spics,peripcfg-reg = <0x3b0>;
+        st-spics,sw-enable-bit = <12>;
+        st-spics,cs-value-bit = <11>;
+        st-spics,cs-enable-mask = <3>;
+        st-spics,cs-enable-shift = <8>;
+        gpio-controller;
+        #gpio-cells = <2>;
+};
+
+
+spi0: spi@e0100000 {
+        status = "okay";
+        num-cs = <3>;
+        cs-gpios = <&gpio1 7 0>, <&spics 0>,
+                   <&spics 1>;
+	...
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/nvidia,tegra20-host1x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/nvidia,tegra20-host1x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b4fa934ae3a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/nvidia,tegra20-host1x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra host1x
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "nvidia,tegra<chip>-host1x"
+- reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+- interrupts: The interrupt outputs from the controller.
+- #address-cells: The number of cells used to represent physical base addresses
+  in the host1x address space. Should be 1.
+- #size-cells: The number of cells used to represent the size of an address
+  range in the host1x address space. Should be 1.
+- ranges: The mapping of the host1x address space to the CPU address space.
+
+The host1x top-level node defines a number of children, each representing one
+of the following host1x client modules:
+
+- mpe: video encoder
+
+  Required properties:
+  - compatible: "nvidia,tegra<chip>-mpe"
+  - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+  - interrupts: The interrupt outputs from the controller.
+
+- vi: video input
+
+  Required properties:
+  - compatible: "nvidia,tegra<chip>-vi"
+  - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+  - interrupts: The interrupt outputs from the controller.
+
+- epp: encoder pre-processor
+
+  Required properties:
+  - compatible: "nvidia,tegra<chip>-epp"
+  - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+  - interrupts: The interrupt outputs from the controller.
+
+- isp: image signal processor
+
+  Required properties:
+  - compatible: "nvidia,tegra<chip>-isp"
+  - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+  - interrupts: The interrupt outputs from the controller.
+
+- gr2d: 2D graphics engine
+
+  Required properties:
+  - compatible: "nvidia,tegra<chip>-gr2d"
+  - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+  - interrupts: The interrupt outputs from the controller.
+
+- gr3d: 3D graphics engine
+
+  Required properties:
+  - compatible: "nvidia,tegra<chip>-gr3d"
+  - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+
+- dc: display controller
+
+  Required properties:
+  - compatible: "nvidia,tegra<chip>-dc"
+  - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+  - interrupts: The interrupt outputs from the controller.
+
+  Each display controller node has a child node, named "rgb", that represents
+  the RGB output associated with the controller. It can take the following
+  optional properties:
+  - nvidia,ddc-i2c-bus: phandle of an I2C controller used for DDC EDID probing
+  - nvidia,hpd-gpio: specifies a GPIO used for hotplug detection
+  - nvidia,edid: supplies a binary EDID blob
+
+- hdmi: High Definition Multimedia Interface
+
+  Required properties:
+  - compatible: "nvidia,tegra<chip>-hdmi"
+  - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+  - interrupts: The interrupt outputs from the controller.
+  - vdd-supply: regulator for supply voltage
+  - pll-supply: regulator for PLL
+
+  Optional properties:
+  - nvidia,ddc-i2c-bus: phandle of an I2C controller used for DDC EDID probing
+  - nvidia,hpd-gpio: specifies a GPIO used for hotplug detection
+  - nvidia,edid: supplies a binary EDID blob
+
+- tvo: TV encoder output
+
+  Required properties:
+  - compatible: "nvidia,tegra<chip>-tvo"
+  - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+  - interrupts: The interrupt outputs from the controller.
+
+- dsi: display serial interface
+
+  Required properties:
+  - compatible: "nvidia,tegra<chip>-dsi"
+  - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers.
+
+Example:
+
+/ {
+	...
+
+	host1x {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-host1x", "simple-bus";
+		reg = <0x50000000 0x00024000>;
+		interrupts = <0 65 0x04   /* mpcore syncpt */
+			      0 67 0x04>; /* mpcore general */
+
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+
+		ranges = <0x54000000 0x54000000 0x04000000>;
+
+		mpe {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-mpe";
+			reg = <0x54040000 0x00040000>;
+			interrupts = <0 68 0x04>;
+		};
+
+		vi {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-vi";
+			reg = <0x54080000 0x00040000>;
+			interrupts = <0 69 0x04>;
+		};
+
+		epp {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-epp";
+			reg = <0x540c0000 0x00040000>;
+			interrupts = <0 70 0x04>;
+		};
+
+		isp {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-isp";
+			reg = <0x54100000 0x00040000>;
+			interrupts = <0 71 0x04>;
+		};
+
+		gr2d {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-gr2d";
+			reg = <0x54140000 0x00040000>;
+			interrupts = <0 72 0x04>;
+		};
+
+		gr3d {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-gr3d";
+			reg = <0x54180000 0x00040000>;
+		};
+
+		dc@54200000 {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-dc";
+			reg = <0x54200000 0x00040000>;
+			interrupts = <0 73 0x04>;
+
+			rgb {
+				status = "disabled";
+			};
+		};
+
+		dc@54240000 {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-dc";
+			reg = <0x54240000 0x00040000>;
+			interrupts = <0 74 0x04>;
+
+			rgb {
+				status = "disabled";
+			};
+		};
+
+		hdmi {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-hdmi";
+			reg = <0x54280000 0x00040000>;
+			interrupts = <0 75 0x04>;
+			status = "disabled";
+		};
+
+		tvo {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-tvo";
+			reg = <0x542c0000 0x00040000>;
+			interrupts = <0 76 0x04>;
+			status = "disabled";
+		};
+
+		dsi {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-dsi";
+			reg = <0x54300000 0x00040000>;
+			status = "disabled";
+		};
+	};
+
+	...
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-g2d.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-g2d.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c4f358dafdaa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-g2d.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+* Samsung 2D Graphics Accelerator
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible : value should be one among the following:
+	(a) "samsung,s5pv210-g2d" for G2D IP present in S5PV210 & Exynos4210 SoC
+	(b) "samsung,exynos4212-g2d" for G2D IP present in Exynos4x12 SoCs
+	(c) "samsung,exynos5250-g2d" for G2D IP present in Exynos5250 SoC
+
+  - reg : Physical base address of the IP registers and length of memory
+	  mapped region.
+
+  - interrupts : G2D interrupt number to the CPU.
+  - clocks : from common clock binding: handle to G2D clocks.
+  - clock-names : names of clocks listed in clocks property, in the same
+		  order, depending on SoC type:
+		  - for S5PV210 and Exynos4 based SoCs: "fimg2d" and
+		    "sclk_fimg2d"
+		  - for Exynos5250 SoC: "fimg2d".
+
+Example:
+	g2d@12800000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,s5pv210-g2d";
+		reg = <0x12800000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 89 0>;
+		clocks = <&clock 177>, <&clock 277>;
+		clock-names = "sclk_fimg2d", "fimg2d";
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-rotator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-rotator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..82cd1ed0be93
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-rotator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+* Samsung Image Rotator
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible : value should be one of the following:
+	(a) "samsung,exynos4210-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos4210
+	(b) "samsung,exynos4212-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos4212/4412
+	(c) "samsung,exynos5250-rotator" for Rotator IP in Exynos5250
+
+  - reg : Physical base address of the IP registers and length of memory
+	  mapped region.
+
+  - interrupts : Interrupt specifier for rotator interrupt, according to format
+		 specific to interrupt parent.
+
+  - clocks : Clock specifier for rotator clock, according to generic clock
+	     bindings. (See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos*.txt)
+
+  - clock-names : Names of clocks. For exynos rotator, it should be "rotator".
+
+Example:
+	rotator@12810000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-rotator";
+		reg = <0x12810000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 83 0>;
+		clocks = <&clock 278>;
+		clock-names = "rotator";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hid/hid-over-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hid/hid-over-i2c.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..488edcb264c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hid/hid-over-i2c.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+* HID over I2C Device-Tree bindings
+
+HID over I2C provides support for various Human Interface Devices over the
+I2C bus. These devices can be for example touchpads, keyboards, touch screens
+or sensors.
+
+The specification has been written by Microsoft and is currently available here:
+http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/hardware/hh852380.aspx
+
+If this binding is used, the kernel module i2c-hid will handle the communication
+with the device and the generic hid core layer will handle the protocol.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "hid-over-i2c"
+- reg: i2c slave address
+- hid-descr-addr: HID descriptor address
+- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller
+- interrupts: interrupt line
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c-hid-dev@2c {
+		compatible = "hid-over-i2c";
+		reg = <0x2c>;
+		hid-descr-addr = <0x0020>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpx3>;
+		interrupts = <3 2>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/g762.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/g762.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..25cc6d8ee575
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/g762.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+GMT G762/G763 PWM Fan controller
+
+Required node properties:
+
+ - "compatible": must be either "gmt,g762" or "gmt,g763"
+ - "reg": I2C bus address of the device
+ - "clocks": a fixed clock providing input clock frequency
+	     on CLK pin of the chip.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+ - "fan_startv": fan startup voltage. Accepted values are 0, 1, 2 and 3.
+	       The higher the more.
+
+ - "pwm_polarity": pwm polarity. Accepted values are 0 (positive duty)
+	       and 1 (negative duty).
+
+ - "fan_gear_mode": fan gear mode. Supported values are 0, 1 and 2.
+
+If an optional property is not set in .dts file, then current value is kept
+unmodified (e.g. u-boot installed value).
+
+Additional information on operational parameters for the device is available
+in Documentation/hwmon/g762. A detailed datasheet for the device is available
+at http://natisbad.org/NAS/refs/GMT_EDS-762_763-080710-0.2.pdf.
+
+Example g762 node:
+
+   clocks {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+
+	g762_clk: fixedclk {
+		 compatible = "fixed-clock";
+		 #clock-cells = <0>;
+		 clock-frequency = <8192>;
+	}
+   }
+
+   g762: g762@3e {
+	compatible = "gmt,g762";
+	reg = <0x3e>;
+	clocks = <&g762_clk>
+	fan_gear_mode = <0>; /* chip default */
+	fan_startv = <1>;    /* chip default */
+	pwm_polarity = <0>;  /* chip default */
+   };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ntc_thermistor.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ntc_thermistor.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c6f66674f19c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ntc_thermistor.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+NTC Thermistor hwmon sensors
+-------------------------------
+
+Requires node properties:
+- "compatible" value : one of
+	"ntc,ncp15wb473"
+	"ntc,ncp18wb473"
+	"ntc,ncp21wb473"
+	"ntc,ncp03wb473"
+	"ntc,ncp15wl333"
+- "pullup-uv"	Pull up voltage in micro volts
+- "pullup-ohm"	Pull up resistor value in ohms
+- "pulldown-ohm" Pull down resistor value in ohms
+- "connected-positive" Always ON, If not specified.
+		Status change is possible.
+- "io-channels"	Channel node of ADC to be used for
+		conversion.
+
+Read more about iio bindings at
+	Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/iio-bindings.txt
+
+Example:
+	ncp15wb473@0 {
+		compatible = "ntc,ncp15wb473";
+		pullup-uv = <1800000>;
+		pullup-ohm = <47000>;
+		pulldown-ohm = <0>;
+		io-channels = <&adc 3>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/vexpress.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/vexpress.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9c27ed694bbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/vexpress.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+Versatile Express hwmon sensors
+-------------------------------
+
+Requires node properties:
+- "compatible" value : one of
+	"arm,vexpress-volt"
+	"arm,vexpress-amp"
+	"arm,vexpress-temp"
+	"arm,vexpress-power"
+	"arm,vexpress-energy"
+- "arm,vexpress-sysreg,func" when controlled via vexpress-sysreg
+  (see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-sysreg.txt
+  for more details)
+
+Optional node properties:
+- label : string describing the monitored value
+
+Example:
+	energy@0 {
+		compatible = "arm,vexpress-energy";
+		arm,vexpress-sysreg,func = <13 0>;
+		label = "A15 Jcore";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwrng/timeriomem_rng.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwrng/timeriomem_rng.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6616d15866a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwrng/timeriomem_rng.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+HWRNG support for the timeriomem_rng driver
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "timeriomem_rng"
+- reg : base address to sample from
+- period : wait time in microseconds to use between samples
+
+N.B. currently 'reg' must be four bytes wide and aligned
+
+Example:
+
+hwrng@44 {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	compatible = "timeriomem_rng";
+	reg = <0x44 0x04>;
+	period = <1000000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/brcm,bcm2835-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/brcm,bcm2835-i2c.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e9de3756752b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/brcm,bcm2835-i2c.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Broadcom BCM2835 I2C controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "brcm,bcm2835-i2c".
+- reg: Should contain register location and length.
+- interrupts: Should contain interrupt.
+- clocks : The clock feeding the I2C controller.
+
+Recommended properties:
+- clock-frequency : desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz.
+
+Example:
+
+i2c@20205000 {
+	compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-i2c";
+	reg = <0x7e205000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <2 21>;
+	clocks = <&clk_i2c>;
+	clock-frequency = <100000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-imx-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-imx-i2c.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index f3cf43b66f7e..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-imx-i2c.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-* Freescale Inter IC (I2C) and High Speed Inter IC (HS-I2C) for i.MX
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : Should be "fsl,<chip>-i2c"
-- reg : Should contain I2C/HS-I2C registers location and length
-- interrupts : Should contain I2C/HS-I2C interrupt
-
-Optional properties:
-- clock-frequency : Constains desired I2C/HS-I2C bus clock frequency in Hz.
-  The absence of the propoerty indicates the default frequency 100 kHz.
-
-Examples:
-
-i2c@83fc4000 { /* I2C2 on i.MX51 */
-	compatible = "fsl,imx51-i2c", "fsl,imx1-i2c";
-	reg = <0x83fc4000 0x4000>;
-	interrupts = <63>;
-};
-
-i2c@70038000 { /* HS-I2C on i.MX51 */
-	compatible = "fsl,imx51-i2c", "fsl,imx1-i2c";
-	reg = <0x70038000 0x4000>;
-	interrupts = <64>;
-	clock-frequency = <400000>;
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-arb-gpio-challenge.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-arb-gpio-challenge.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1ac8ea8ade1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-arb-gpio-challenge.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+GPIO-based I2C Arbitration Using a Challenge & Response Mechanism
+=================================================================
+This uses GPIO lines and a challenge & response mechanism to arbitrate who is
+the master of an I2C bus in a multimaster situation.
+
+In many cases using GPIOs to arbitrate is not needed and a design can use
+the standard I2C multi-master rules.  Using GPIOs is generally useful in
+the case where there is a device on the bus that has errata and/or bugs
+that makes standard multimaster mode not feasible.
+
+
+Algorithm:
+
+All masters on the bus have a 'bus claim' line which is an output that the
+others can see. These are all active low with pull-ups enabled.  We'll
+describe these lines as:
+
+- OUR_CLAIM: output from us signaling to other hosts that we want the bus
+- THEIR_CLAIMS: output from others signaling that they want the bus
+
+The basic algorithm is to assert your line when you want the bus, then make
+sure that the other side doesn't want it also.  A detailed explanation is best
+done with an example.
+
+Let's say we want to claim the bus.  We:
+1. Assert OUR_CLAIM.
+2. Waits a little bit for the other sides to notice (slew time, say 10
+   microseconds).
+3. Check THEIR_CLAIMS.  If none are asserted then the we have the bus and we are
+   done.
+4. Otherwise, wait for a few milliseconds and see if THEIR_CLAIMS are released.
+5. If not, back off, release the claim and wait for a few more milliseconds.
+6. Go back to 1 (until retry time has expired).
+
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: i2c-arb-gpio-challenge
+- our-claim-gpio: The GPIO that we use to claim the bus.
+- their-claim-gpios: The GPIOs that the other sides use to claim the bus.
+  Note that some implementations may only support a single other master.
+- Standard I2C mux properties. See mux.txt in this directory.
+- Single I2C child bus node at reg 0. See mux.txt in this directory.
+
+Optional properties:
+- slew-delay-us: microseconds to wait for a GPIO to go high. Default is 10 us.
+- wait-retry-us: we'll attempt another claim after this many microseconds.
+    Default is 3000 us.
+- wait-free-us: we'll give up after this many microseconds. Default is 50000 us.
+
+
+Example:
+	i2c@12CA0000 {
+		compatible = "acme,some-i2c-device";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+	};
+
+	i2c-arbitrator {
+		compatible = "i2c-arb-gpio-challenge";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		i2c-parent = <&{/i2c@12CA0000}>;
+
+		our-claim-gpio = <&gpf0 3 1>;
+		their-claim-gpios = <&gpe0 4 1>;
+		slew-delay-us = <10>;
+		wait-retry-us = <3000>;
+		wait-free-us = <50000>;
+
+		i2c@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			i2c@52 {
+				// Normal I2C device
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-at91.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-at91.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b689a0d9441c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-at91.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+I2C for Atmel platforms
+
+Required properties :
+- compatible : Must be "atmel,at91rm9200-i2c", "atmel,at91sam9261-i2c",
+     "atmel,at91sam9260-i2c", "atmel,at91sam9g20-i2c", "atmel,at91sam9g10-i2c"
+     or "atmel,at91sam9x5-i2c"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+     region.
+- interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu.
+- #address-cells = <1>;
+- #size-cells = <0>;
+
+Optional properties:
+- Child nodes conforming to i2c bus binding
+
+Examples :
+
+i2c0: i2c@fff84000 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91sam9g20-i2c";
+	reg = <0xfff84000 0x100>;
+	interrupts = <12 4 6>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+
+	24c512@50 {
+		compatible = "24c512";
+		reg = <0x50>;
+		pagesize = <128>;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-cbus-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-cbus-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8ce9cd2855b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-cbus-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+Device tree bindings for i2c-cbus-gpio driver
+
+Required properties:
+	- compatible = "i2c-cbus-gpio";
+	- gpios: clk, dat, sel
+	- #address-cells = <1>;
+	- #size-cells = <0>;
+
+Optional properties:
+	- child nodes conforming to i2c bus binding
+
+Example:
+
+i2c@0 {
+	compatible = "i2c-cbus-gpio";
+	gpios = <&gpio 66 0 /* clk */
+		 &gpio 65 0 /* dat */
+		 &gpio 64 0 /* sel */
+		>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+
+	retu-mfd: retu@1 {
+		compatible = "retu-mfd";
+		reg = <0x1>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-davinci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-davinci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2dc935b4113d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-davinci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+* Texas Instruments Davinci I2C
+
+This file provides information, what the device node for the
+davinci i2c interface contain.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,davinci-i2c";
+- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
+
+Recommended properties :
+- interrupts : standard interrupt property.
+- clock-frequency : desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz.
+
+Example (enbw_cmc board):
+	i2c@1c22000 {
+		compatible = "ti,davinci-i2c";
+		reg = <0x22000 0x1000>;
+		clock-frequency = <100000>;
+		interrupts = <15>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		dtt@48 {
+			compatible = "national,lm75";
+			reg = <0x48>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-designware.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-designware.txt
index e42a2ee233e6..7fd7fa25e9b0 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-designware.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-designware.txt
@@ -10,6 +10,10 @@ Recommended properties :
 
  - clock-frequency : desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz.
 
+Optional properties :
+ - i2c-sda-hold-time-ns : should contain the SDA hold time in nanoseconds.
+   This option is only supported in hardware blocks version 1.11a or newer.
+
 Example :
 
 	i2c@f0000 {
@@ -20,3 +24,14 @@ Example :
 		interrupts = <11>;
 		clock-frequency = <400000>;
 	};
+
+	i2c@1120000 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		compatible = "snps,designware-i2c";
+		reg = <0x1120000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&ictl>;
+		interrupts = <12 1>;
+		clock-frequency = <400000>;
+		i2c-sda-hold-time-ns = <300>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4f8ec947c6bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for i2c gpio driver
+
+Required properties:
+	- compatible = "i2c-gpio";
+	- gpios: sda and scl gpio
+
+
+Optional properties:
+	- i2c-gpio,sda-open-drain: sda as open drain
+	- i2c-gpio,scl-open-drain: scl as open drain
+	- i2c-gpio,scl-output-only: scl as output only
+	- i2c-gpio,delay-us: delay between GPIO operations (may depend on each platform)
+	- i2c-gpio,timeout-ms: timeout to get data
+
+Example nodes:
+
+i2c@0 {
+	compatible = "i2c-gpio";
+	gpios = <&pioA 23 0 /* sda */
+		 &pioA 24 0 /* scl */
+		>;
+	i2c-gpio,sda-open-drain;
+	i2c-gpio,scl-open-drain;
+	i2c-gpio,delay-us = <2>;	/* ~100 kHz */
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+
+	rv3029c2@56 {
+		compatible = "rv3029c2";
+		reg = <0x56>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-imx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-imx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4a8513e44740
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-imx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+* Freescale Inter IC (I2C) and High Speed Inter IC (HS-I2C) for i.MX
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible :
+  - "fsl,imx1-i2c" for I2C compatible with the one integrated on i.MX1 SoC
+  - "fsl,imx21-i2c" for I2C compatible with the one integrated on i.MX21 SoC
+  - "fsl,vf610-i2c" for I2C compatible with the one integrated on Vybrid vf610 SoC
+- reg : Should contain I2C/HS-I2C registers location and length
+- interrupts : Should contain I2C/HS-I2C interrupt
+
+Optional properties:
+- clock-frequency : Constains desired I2C/HS-I2C bus clock frequency in Hz.
+  The absence of the propoerty indicates the default frequency 100 kHz.
+
+Examples:
+
+i2c@83fc4000 { /* I2C2 on i.MX51 */
+	compatible = "fsl,imx51-i2c", "fsl,imx21-i2c";
+	reg = <0x83fc4000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <63>;
+};
+
+i2c@70038000 { /* HS-I2C on i.MX51 */
+	compatible = "fsl,imx51-i2c", "fsl,imx21-i2c";
+	reg = <0x70038000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <64>;
+	clock-frequency = <400000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mpc.txt
index 1eacd6b20ed5..1eacd6b20ed5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-i2c.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mpc.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..66709a825541
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+GPIO-based I2C Bus Mux
+
+This binding describes an I2C bus multiplexer that uses GPIOs to
+route the I2C signals.
+
+                                  +-----+  +-----+
+                                  | dev |  | dev |
+    +------------+                +-----+  +-----+
+    | SoC        |                   |        |
+    |            |          /--------+--------+
+    |   +------+ |  +------+    child bus A, on GPIO value set to 0
+    |   | I2C  |-|--| Mux  |
+    |   +------+ |  +--+---+    child bus B, on GPIO value set to 1
+    |            |     |    \----------+--------+--------+
+    |   +------+ |     |               |        |        |
+    |   | GPIO |-|-----+            +-----+  +-----+  +-----+
+    |   +------+ |                  | dev |  | dev |  | dev |
+    +------------+                  +-----+  +-----+  +-----+
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: i2c-mux-gpio
+- i2c-parent: The phandle of the I2C bus that this multiplexer's master-side
+  port is connected to.
+- mux-gpios: list of gpios used to control the muxer
+* Standard I2C mux properties. See mux.txt in this directory.
+* I2C child bus nodes. See mux.txt in this directory.
+
+Optional properties:
+- idle-state: value to set the muxer to when idle. When no value is
+  given, it defaults to the last value used.
+
+For each i2c child node, an I2C child bus will be created. They will
+be numbered based on their order in the device tree.
+
+Whenever an access is made to a device on a child bus, the value set
+in the revelant node's reg property will be output using the list of
+GPIOs, the first in the list holding the least-significant value.
+
+If an idle state is defined, using the idle-state (optional) property,
+whenever an access is not being made to a device on a child bus, the
+GPIOs will be set according to the idle value.
+
+If an idle state is not defined, the most recently used value will be
+left programmed into hardware whenever no access is being made to a
+device on a child bus.
+
+Example:
+	i2cmux {
+		compatible = "i2c-mux-gpio";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		mux-gpios = <&gpio1 22 0 &gpio1 23 0>;
+		i2c-parent = <&i2c1>;
+
+		i2c@1 {
+			reg = <1>;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			ssd1307: oled@3c {
+				compatible = "solomon,ssd1307fb-i2c";
+				reg = <0x3c>;
+				pwms = <&pwm 4 3000>;
+				reset-gpios = <&gpio2 7 1>;
+				reset-active-low;
+			};
+		};
+
+		i2c@3 {
+			reg = <3>;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			pca9555: pca9555@20 {
+				compatible = "nxp,pca9555";
+				gpio-controller;
+				#gpio-cells = <2>;
+				reg = <0x20>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ae8af1694e95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+Pinctrl-based I2C Bus Mux
+
+This binding describes an I2C bus multiplexer that uses pin multiplexing to
+route the I2C signals, and represents the pin multiplexing configuration
+using the pinctrl device tree bindings.
+
+                                 +-----+  +-----+
+                                 | dev |  | dev |
+    +------------------------+   +-----+  +-----+
+    | SoC                    |      |        |
+    |                   /----|------+--------+
+    |   +---+   +------+     | child bus A, on first set of pins
+    |   |I2C|---|Pinmux|     |
+    |   +---+   +------+     | child bus B, on second set of pins
+    |                   \----|------+--------+--------+
+    |                        |      |        |        |
+    +------------------------+  +-----+  +-----+  +-----+
+                                | dev |  | dev |  | dev |
+                                +-----+  +-----+  +-----+
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: i2c-mux-pinctrl
+- i2c-parent: The phandle of the I2C bus that this multiplexer's master-side
+  port is connected to.
+
+Also required are:
+
+* Standard pinctrl properties that specify the pin mux state for each child
+  bus. See ../pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt.
+
+* Standard I2C mux properties. See mux.txt in this directory.
+
+* I2C child bus nodes. See mux.txt in this directory.
+
+For each named state defined in the pinctrl-names property, an I2C child bus
+will be created. I2C child bus numbers are assigned based on the index into
+the pinctrl-names property.
+
+The only exception is that no bus will be created for a state named "idle". If
+such a state is defined, it must be the last entry in pinctrl-names. For
+example:
+
+	pinctrl-names = "ddc", "pta", "idle"  ->  ddc = bus 0, pta = bus 1
+	pinctrl-names = "ddc", "idle", "pta"  ->  Invalid ("idle" not last)
+	pinctrl-names = "idle", "ddc", "pta"  ->  Invalid ("idle" not last)
+
+Whenever an access is made to a device on a child bus, the relevant pinctrl
+state will be programmed into hardware.
+
+If an idle state is defined, whenever an access is not being made to a device
+on a child bus, the idle pinctrl state will be programmed into hardware.
+
+If an idle state is not defined, the most recently used pinctrl state will be
+left programmed into hardware whenever no access is being made of a device on
+a child bus.
+
+Example:
+
+	i2cmux {
+		compatible = "i2c-mux-pinctrl";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		i2c-parent = <&i2c1>;
+
+		pinctrl-names = "ddc", "pta", "idle";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&state_i2cmux_ddc>;
+		pinctrl-1 = <&state_i2cmux_pta>;
+		pinctrl-2 = <&state_i2cmux_idle>;
+
+		i2c@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			eeprom {
+				compatible = "eeprom";
+				reg = <0x50>;
+			};
+		};
+
+		i2c@1 {
+			reg = <1>;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			eeprom {
+				compatible = "eeprom";
+				reg = <0x50>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..af84cce5cd7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+Common i2c bus multiplexer/switch properties.
+
+An i2c bus multiplexer/switch will have several child busses that are
+numbered uniquely in a device dependent manner.  The nodes for an i2c bus
+multiplexer/switch will have one child node for each child
+bus.
+
+Required properties:
+- #address-cells = <1>;
+- #size-cells = <0>;
+
+Required properties for child nodes:
+- #address-cells = <1>;
+- #size-cells = <0>;
+- reg : The sub-bus number.
+
+Optional properties for child nodes:
+- Other properties specific to the multiplexer/switch hardware.
+- Child nodes conforming to i2c bus binding
+
+
+Example :
+
+	/*
+	   An NXP pca9548 8 channel I2C multiplexer at address 0x70
+	   with two NXP pca8574 GPIO expanders attached, one each to
+	   ports 3 and 4.
+	 */
+
+	mux@70 {
+		compatible = "nxp,pca9548";
+		reg = <0x70>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		i2c@3 {
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+			reg = <3>;
+
+			gpio1: gpio@38 {
+				compatible = "nxp,pca8574";
+				reg = <0x38>;
+				#gpio-cells = <2>;
+				gpio-controller;
+			};
+		};
+		i2c@4 {
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+			reg = <4>;
+
+			gpio2: gpio@38 {
+				compatible = "nxp,pca8574";
+				reg = <0x38>;
+				#gpio-cells = <2>;
+				gpio-controller;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mv64xxx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mv64xxx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..82e8f6f17179
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mv64xxx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+
+* Marvell MV64XXX I2C controller
+
+Required properties :
+
+ - reg             : Offset and length of the register set for the device
+ - compatible      : Should be "marvell,mv64xxx-i2c" or "allwinner,sun4i-i2c"
+                     or "marvell,mv78230-i2c"
+ - interrupts      : The interrupt number
+
+Optional properties :
+
+ - clock-frequency : Desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. If not set the
+default frequency is 100kHz
+
+Examples:
+
+	i2c@11000 {
+		compatible = "marvell,mv64xxx-i2c";
+		reg = <0x11000 0x20>;
+		interrupts = <29>;
+		clock-frequency = <100000>;
+	};
+
+For the Armada XP:
+
+	i2c@11000 {
+		compatible = "marvell,mv78230-i2c", "marvell,mv64xxx-i2c";
+		reg = <0x11000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <29>;
+		clock-frequency = <100000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mxs.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mxs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4e1c8ac01eba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mxs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+* Freescale MXS Inter IC (I2C) Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,<chip>-i2c"
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length
+- interrupts: Should contain ERROR interrupt number
+- clock-frequency: Desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz.
+                   Only 100000Hz and 400000Hz modes are supported.
+- dmas: DMA specifier, consisting of a phandle to DMA controller node
+  and I2C DMA channel ID.
+  Refer to dma.txt and fsl-mxs-dma.txt for details.
+- dma-names: Must be "rx-tx".
+
+Examples:
+
+i2c0: i2c@80058000 {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-i2c";
+	reg = <0x80058000 2000>;
+	interrupts = <111>;
+	clock-frequency = <100000>;
+	dmas = <&dma_apbx 6>;
+	dma-names = "rx-tx";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-nomadik.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-nomadik.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..72065b0ff680
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-nomadik.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+I2C for Nomadik based systems
+
+Required (non-standard) properties:
+ - Nil
+
+Recommended (non-standard) properties:
+ - clock-frequency : Maximum bus clock frequency for the device
+
+Optional (non-standard) properties:
+ - Nil
+
+Example :
+
+i2c@80004000 {
+        compatible = "stericsson,db8500-i2c", "st,nomadik-i2c";
+        reg = <0x80004000 0x1000>;
+        interrupts = <0 21 0x4>;
+        #address-cells = <1>;
+        #size-cells = <0>;
+        v-i2c-supply = <&db8500_vape_reg>;
+
+        clock-frequency = <400000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-ocores.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-ocores.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1637c298a1b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-ocores.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+Device tree configuration for i2c-ocores
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible      : "opencores,i2c-ocores" or "aeroflexgaisler,i2cmst"
+- reg             : bus address start and address range size of device
+- interrupts      : interrupt number
+- clock-frequency : frequency of bus clock in Hz
+- #address-cells  : should be <1>
+- #size-cells     : should be <0>
+
+Optional properties:
+- reg-shift       : device register offsets are shifted by this value
+- reg-io-width    : io register width in bytes (1, 2 or 4)
+- regstep         : deprecated, use reg-shift above
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c0: ocores@a0000000 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		compatible = "opencores,i2c-ocores";
+		reg = <0xa0000000 0x8>;
+		interrupts = <10>;
+		clock-frequency = <20000000>;
+
+		reg-shift = <0>;	/* 8 bit registers */
+		reg-io-width = <1>;	/* 8 bit read/write */
+
+		dummy@60 {
+			compatible = "dummy";
+			reg = <0x60>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-octeon.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-octeon.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dced82ebe31d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-octeon.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+* Two Wire Serial Interface (TWSI) / I2C
+
+- compatible: "cavium,octeon-3860-twsi"
+
+  Compatibility with all cn3XXX, cn5XXX and cn6XXX SOCs.
+
+- reg: The base address of the TWSI/I2C bus controller register bank.
+
+- #address-cells: Must be <1>.
+
+- #size-cells: Must be <0>.  I2C addresses have no size component.
+
+- interrupts: A single interrupt specifier.
+
+- clock-frequency: The I2C bus clock rate in Hz.
+
+Example:
+	twsi0: i2c@1180000001000 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-twsi";
+		reg = <0x11800 0x00001000 0x0 0x200>;
+		interrupts = <0 45>;
+		clock-frequency = <100000>;
+
+		rtc@68 {
+			compatible = "dallas,ds1337";
+			reg = <0x68>;
+		};
+		tmp@4c {
+			compatible = "ti,tmp421";
+			reg = <0x4c>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/omap-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-omap.txt
index 56564aa4b444..56564aa4b444 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/omap-i2c.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-omap.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pnx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pnx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fe98ada33ee4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pnx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+* NXP PNX I2C Controller
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - reg: Offset and length of the register set for the device
+ - compatible: should be "nxp,pnx-i2c"
+ - interrupts: configure one interrupt line
+ - #address-cells: always 1 (for i2c addresses)
+ - #size-cells: always 0
+ - interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that
+   services interrupts for this device.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+ - clock-frequency: desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz, Default: 100000 Hz
+
+Examples:
+
+	i2c1: i2c@400a0000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,pnx-i2c";
+		reg = <0x400a0000 0x100>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&mic>;
+		interrupts = <51 0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+	};
+
+	i2c2: i2c@400a8000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,pnx-i2c";
+		reg = <0x400a8000 0x100>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&mic>;
+		interrupts = <50 0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		clock-frequency = <100000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ce4100-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pxa-pci-ce4100.txt
index 569b16248514..569b16248514 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ce4100-i2c.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pxa-pci-ce4100.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pxa.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pxa.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..12b78ac507e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pxa.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+* Marvell MMP I2C controller
+
+Required properties :
+
+ - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
+ - compatible : should be "mrvl,mmp-twsi" where mmp is the name of a
+   compatible processor, e.g. pxa168, pxa910, mmp2, mmp3.
+   For the pxa2xx/pxa3xx, an additional node "mrvl,pxa-i2c" is required
+   as shown in the example below.
+
+Recommended properties :
+
+ - interrupts : the interrupt number
+ - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that
+   services interrupts for this device. If the parent is the default
+   interrupt controller in device tree, it could be ignored.
+ - mrvl,i2c-polling : Disable interrupt of i2c controller. Polling
+   status register of i2c controller instead.
+ - mrvl,i2c-fast-mode : Enable fast mode of i2c controller.
+
+Examples:
+	twsi1: i2c@d4011000 {
+		compatible = "mrvl,mmp-twsi";
+		reg = <0xd4011000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <7>;
+		mrvl,i2c-fast-mode;
+	};
+	
+	twsi2: i2c@d4025000 {
+		compatible = "mrvl,mmp-twsi";
+		reg = <0xd4025000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <58>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-s3c2410.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-s3c2410.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..296eb4536129
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-s3c2410.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+* Samsung's I2C controller
+
+The Samsung's I2C controller is used to interface with I2C devices.
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: value should be either of the following.
+      (a) "samsung, s3c2410-i2c", for i2c compatible with s3c2410 i2c.
+      (b) "samsung, s3c2440-i2c", for i2c compatible with s3c2440 i2c.
+      (c) "samsung, s3c2440-hdmiphy-i2c", for s3c2440-like i2c used
+          inside HDMIPHY block found on several samsung SoCs
+      (d) "samsung, exynos5440-i2c", for s3c2440-like i2c used
+	   on EXYNOS5440 which does not need GPIO configuration.
+  - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+    region.
+  - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu.
+  - samsung,i2c-sda-delay: Delay (in ns) applied to data line (SDA) edges.
+
+Required for all cases except "samsung,s3c2440-hdmiphy-i2c":
+  - Samsung GPIO variant (deprecated):
+    - gpios: The order of the gpios should be the following: <SDA, SCL>.
+      The gpio specifier depends on the gpio controller. Required in all
+      cases except for "samsung,s3c2440-hdmiphy-i2c" whose input/output
+      lines are permanently wired to the respective clienta
+  - Pinctrl variant (preferred, if available):
+    - pinctrl-0: Pin control group to be used for this controller.
+    - pinctrl-names: Should contain only one value - "default".
+
+Optional properties:
+  - samsung,i2c-slave-addr: Slave address in multi-master environment. If not
+    specified, default value is 0.
+  - samsung,i2c-max-bus-freq: Desired frequency in Hz of the bus. If not
+    specified, the default value in Hz is 100000.
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c@13870000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,s3c2440-i2c";
+		reg = <0x13870000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <345>;
+		samsung,i2c-sda-delay = <100>;
+		samsung,i2c-max-bus-freq = <100000>;
+		/* Samsung GPIO variant begins here */
+		gpios = <&gpd1 2 0 /* SDA */
+			 &gpd1 3 0 /* SCL */>;
+		/* Samsung GPIO variant ends here */
+		/* Pinctrl variant begins here */
+		pinctrl-0 = <&i2c3_bus>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		/* Pinctrl variant ends here */
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		wm8994@1a {
+			compatible = "wlf,wm8994";
+			reg = <0x1a>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-sirf.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-sirf.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7baf9e133fa8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-sirf.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+I2C for SiRFprimaII platforms
+
+Required properties :
+- compatible : Must be "sirf,prima2-i2c"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+     region.
+- interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu.
+
+Optional properties:
+- clock-frequency : Constains desired I2C/HS-I2C bus clock frequency in Hz.
+  The absence of the propoerty indicates the default frequency 100 kHz.
+
+Examples :
+
+i2c0: i2c@b00e0000 {
+    compatible = "sirf,prima2-i2c";
+    reg = <0xb00e0000 0x10000>;
+    interrupts = <24>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-st-ddci2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-st-ddci2c.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bd81a482634f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-st-ddci2c.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+ST Microelectronics DDC I2C
+
+Required properties :
+- compatible : Must be "st,ddci2c"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+     region.
+- interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu.
+- #address-cells = <1>;
+- #size-cells = <0>;
+
+Optional properties:
+- Child nodes conforming to i2c bus binding
+
+Examples :
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/arm-versatile.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-versatile.txt
index 361d31c51b6f..361d31c51b6f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/arm-versatile.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-versatile.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-vt8500.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-vt8500.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..94a425eaa6c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-vt8500.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+* Wondermedia I2C Controller
+
+Required properties :
+
+ - compatible : should be "wm,wm8505-i2c"
+ - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
+ - interrupts : <IRQ> where IRQ is the interrupt number
+ - clocks : phandle to the I2C clock source
+
+Optional properties :
+
+ - clock-frequency : desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz.
+	Valid values are 100000 and 400000.
+	Default to 100000 if not specified, or invalid value.
+
+Example :
+
+	i2c_0: i2c@d8280000 {
+		compatible = "wm,wm8505-i2c";
+		reg = <0xd8280000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <19>;
+		clocks = <&clki2c0>;
+		clock-frequency = <400000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-xiic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-xiic.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ceabbe91ae44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-xiic.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+Xilinx IIC controller:
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Must be "xlnx,xps-iic-2.00.a"
+- reg : IIC register location and length
+- interrupts : IIC controller unterrupt
+- #address-cells = <1>
+- #size-cells = <0>
+
+Optional properties:
+- Child nodes conforming to i2c bus binding
+
+Example:
+
+	axi_iic_0: i2c@40800000 {
+		compatible = "xlnx,xps-iic-2.00.a";
+		interrupts = < 1 2 >;
+		reg = < 0x40800000 0x10000 >;
+
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ina209.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ina209.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9dd2bee80840
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ina209.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+ina209 properties
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must be "ti,ina209"
+- reg: I2C address
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- shunt-resistor
+	Shunt resistor value in micro-Ohm
+
+Example:
+
+temp-sensor@4c {
+	compatible = "ti,ina209";
+	reg = <0x4c>;
+	shunt-resistor = <5000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ina2xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ina2xx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a2ad85d7e747
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ina2xx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+ina2xx properties
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must be one of the following:
+	- "ti,ina219" for ina219
+	- "ti,ina220" for ina220
+	- "ti,ina226" for ina226
+	- "ti,ina230" for ina230
+- reg: I2C address
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- shunt-resistor
+	Shunt resistor value in micro-Ohm
+
+Example:
+
+ina220@44 {
+	compatible = "ti,ina220";
+	reg = <0x44>;
+	shunt-resistor = <1000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/max6697.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/max6697.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5f793998e4a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/max6697.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+max6697 properties
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:
+	Should be one of
+		maxim,max6581
+		maxim,max6602
+		maxim,max6622
+		maxim,max6636
+		maxim,max6689
+		maxim,max6693
+		maxim,max6694
+		maxim,max6697
+		maxim,max6698
+		maxim,max6699
+- reg: I2C address
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- smbus-timeout-disable
+	Set to disable SMBus timeout. If not specified, SMBus timeout will be
+	enabled.
+- extended-range-enable
+	Only valid for MAX6581. Set to enable extended temperature range.
+	Extended temperature will be disabled if not specified.
+- beta-compensation-enable
+	Only valid for MAX6693 and MX6694. Set to enable beta compensation on
+	remote temperature channel 1.
+	Beta compensation will be disabled if not specified.
+- alert-mask
+	Alert bit mask. Alert disabled for bits set.
+	Select bit 0 for local temperature, bit 1..7 for remote temperatures.
+	If not specified, alert will be enabled for all channels.
+- over-temperature-mask
+	Over-temperature bit mask. Over-temperature reporting disabled for
+	bits set.
+	Select bit 0 for local temperature, bit 1..7 for remote temperatures.
+	If not specified, over-temperature reporting will be enabled for all
+	channels.
+- resistance-cancellation
+	Boolean for all chips other than MAX6581. Set to enable resistance
+	cancellation on remote temperature channel 1.
+	For MAX6581, resistance cancellation enabled for all channels if
+	specified as boolean, otherwise as per bit mask specified.
+	Only supported for remote temperatures (bit 1..7).
+	If not specified, resistance cancellation will be disabled for all
+	channels.
+- transistor-ideality
+	For MAX6581 only. Two values; first is bit mask, second is ideality
+	select value as per MAX6581 data sheet. Select bit 1..7 for remote
+	channels.
+	Transistor ideality will be initialized to default (1.008) if not
+	specified.
+
+Example:
+
+temp-sensor@1a {
+	compatible = "maxim,max6697";
+	reg = <0x1a>;
+	smbus-timeout-disable;
+	resistance-cancellation;
+	alert-mask = <0x72>;
+	over-temperature-mask = <0x7f>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/nvidia,tegra20-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/nvidia,tegra20-i2c.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ef77cc7a0e46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/nvidia,tegra20-i2c.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra20/Tegra30/Tegra114 I2C controller driver.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be:
+	"nvidia,tegra114-i2c"
+	"nvidia,tegra30-i2c"
+	"nvidia,tegra20-i2c"
+	"nvidia,tegra20-i2c-dvc"
+  Details of compatible are as follows:
+  nvidia,tegra20-i2c-dvc: Tegra20 has specific I2C controller called as DVC I2C
+	controller. This only support master mode of I2C communication. Register
+	interface/offset and interrupts handling are different than generic I2C
+	controller. Driver of DVC I2C controller is only compatible with
+	"nvidia,tegra20-i2c-dvc".
+  nvidia,tegra20-i2c: Tegra20 has 4 generic I2C controller. This can support
+	master and slave mode of I2C communication. The i2c-tegra driver only
+	support master mode of I2C communication. Driver of I2C controller is
+	only compatible with "nvidia,tegra20-i2c".
+  nvidia,tegra30-i2c: Tegra30 has 5 generic I2C controller. This controller is
+	very much similar to Tegra20 I2C controller with additional feature:
+	Continue Transfer Support. This feature helps to implement M_NO_START
+	as per I2C core API transfer flags. Driver of I2C controller is
+	compatible with "nvidia,tegra30-i2c" to enable the continue transfer
+	support. This is also compatible with "nvidia,tegra20-i2c" without
+	continue transfer support.
+  nvidia,tegra114-i2c: Tegra114 has 5 generic I2C controller. This controller is
+	very much similar to Tegra30 I2C controller with some hardware
+	modification:
+	 - Tegra30/Tegra20 I2C controller has 2 clock source called div-clk and
+	   fast-clk. Tegra114 has only one clock source called as div-clk and
+	   hence clock mechanism is changed in I2C controller.
+	 - Tegra30/Tegra20 I2C controller has enabled per packet transfer by
+	   default and there is no way to disable it. Tegra114 has this
+	   interrupt disable by default and SW need to enable explicitly.
+	Due to above changes, Tegra114 I2C driver makes incompatible with
+	previous hardware driver. Hence, tegra114 I2C controller is compatible
+	with "nvidia,tegra114-i2c".
+- reg: Should contain I2C controller registers physical address and length.
+- interrupts: Should contain I2C controller interrupts.
+- address-cells: Address cells for I2C device address.
+- size-cells: Size of the I2C device address.
+- clocks: Clock ID as per
+		Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/tegra<chip-id>.txt
+	for I2C controller.
+- clock-names: Name of the clock:
+	Tegra20/Tegra30 I2C controller: "div-clk and "fast-clk".
+	Tegra114 I2C controller: "div-clk".
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c@7000c000 {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-i2c";
+		reg = <0x7000c000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <0 38 0x04>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		clocks = <&tegra_car 12>, <&tegra_car 124>;
+		clock-names = "div-clk", "fast-clk";
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/samsung-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/samsung-i2c.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 38832c712919..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/samsung-i2c.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-* Samsung's I2C controller
-
-The Samsung's I2C controller is used to interface with I2C devices.
-
-Required properties:
-  - compatible: value should be either of the following.
-      (a) "samsung, s3c2410-i2c", for i2c compatible with s3c2410 i2c.
-      (b) "samsung, s3c2440-i2c", for i2c compatible with s3c2440 i2c.
-  - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
-    region.
-  - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu.
-  - samsung,i2c-sda-delay: Delay (in ns) applied to data line (SDA) edges.
-  - gpios: The order of the gpios should be the following: <SDA, SCL>.
-    The gpio specifier depends on the gpio controller.
-
-Optional properties:
-  - samsung,i2c-slave-addr: Slave address in multi-master enviroment. If not
-    specified, default value is 0.
-  - samsung,i2c-max-bus-freq: Desired frequency in Hz of the bus. If not
-    specified, the default value in Hz is 100000.
-
-Example:
-
-	i2c@13870000 {
-		compatible = "samsung,s3c2440-i2c";
-		reg = <0x13870000 0x100>;
-		interrupts = <345>;
-		samsung,i2c-sda-delay = <100>;
-		samsung,i2c-max-bus-freq = <100000>;
-		gpios = <&gpd1 2 0 /* SDA */
-			 &gpd1 3 0 /* SCL */>;
-		#address-cells = <1>;
-		#size-cells = <0>;
-
-		wm8994@1a {
-			compatible = "wlf,wm8994";
-			reg = <0x1a>;
-		};
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt
index 1a85f986961b..ad6a73852f08 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt
@@ -35,6 +35,8 @@ fsl,mc13892		MC13892: Power Management Integrated Circuit (PMIC) for i.MX35/51
 fsl,mma8450		MMA8450Q: Xtrinsic Low-power, 3-axis Xtrinsic Accelerometer
 fsl,mpr121		MPR121: Proximity Capacitive Touch Sensor Controller
 fsl,sgtl5000		SGTL5000: Ultra Low-Power Audio Codec
+infineon,slb9635tt	Infineon SLB9635 (Soft-) I2C TPM (old protocol, max 100khz)
+infineon,slb9645tt	Infineon SLB9645 I2C TPM (new protocol, max 400khz)
 maxim,ds1050		5 Bit Programmable, Pulse-Width Modulator
 maxim,max1237		Low-Power, 4-/12-Channel, 2-Wire Serial, 12-Bit ADCs
 maxim,max6625		9-Bit/12-Bit Temperature Sensors with I²C-Compatible Serial Interface
@@ -55,4 +57,7 @@ st-micro,24c256		i2c serial eeprom  (24cxx)
 stm,m41t00		Serial Access TIMEKEEPER
 stm,m41t62		Serial real-time clock (RTC) with alarm
 stm,m41t80		M41T80 - SERIAL ACCESS RTC WITH ALARMS
+taos,tsl2550		Ambient Light Sensor with SMBUS/Two Wire Serial Interface
 ti,tsc2003		I2C Touch-Screen Controller
+ti,tmp102		Low Power Digital Temperature Sensor with SMBUS/Two Wire Serial Interface
+ti,tmp275		Digital Temperature Sensor
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c5933573e0f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+* Bosch BMA180 triaxial acceleration sensor
+
+http://omapworld.com/BMA180_111_1002839.pdf
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : should be "bosch,bma180"
+  - reg : the I2C address of the sensor
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - interrupt-parent : should be the phandle for the interrupt controller
+
+  - interrupts : interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ, it should by configured with
+		flags IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH | IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING
+
+Example:
+
+bma180@40 {
+	compatible = "bosch,bma180";
+	reg = <0x40>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&gpio6>;
+	interrupts = <18 (IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH | IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING)>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/nuvoton-nau7802.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/nuvoton-nau7802.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e9582e6fe350
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/nuvoton-nau7802.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+* Nuvoton NAU7802 Analog to Digital Converter (ADC)
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: Should be "nuvoton,nau7802"
+  - reg: Should contain the ADC I2C address
+
+Optional properties:
+  - nuvoton,vldo: Internal reference voltage in millivolts to be
+    configured valid values are between 2400 mV and 4500 mV.
+  - interrupts: IRQ line for the ADC. If not used the driver will use
+    polling.
+
+Example:
+adc2: nau7802@2a {
+	compatible = "nuvoton,nau7802";
+	reg = <0x2a>;
+	nuvoton,vldo = <3000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/dac/ad7303.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/dac/ad7303.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..914610f0556e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/dac/ad7303.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+Analog Devices AD7303 DAC device driver
+
+Required properties:
+	- compatible: Must be "adi,ad7303"
+	- reg: SPI chip select number for the device
+	- spi-max-frequency: Max SPI frequency to use (< 30000000)
+	- Vdd-supply: Phandle to the Vdd power supply
+
+Optional properties:
+	- REF-supply: Phandle to the external reference voltage supply. This should
+	  only be set if there is an external reference voltage connected to the REF
+	  pin. If the property is not set Vdd/2 is used as the reference voltage.
+
+Example:
+
+		ad7303@4 {
+			compatible = "adi,ad7303";
+			reg = <4>;
+			spi-max-frequency = <10000000>;
+			Vdd-supply = <&vdd_supply>;
+			adi,use-external-reference;
+			REF-supply = <&vref_supply>;
+		};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/frequency/adf4350.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/frequency/adf4350.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f8c181d81d2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/frequency/adf4350.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+Analog Devices ADF4350/ADF4351 device driver
+
+Required properties:
+	- compatible: Should be one of
+		* "adi,adf4350": When using the ADF4350 device
+		* "adi,adf4351": When using the ADF4351 device
+	- reg: SPI chip select numbert for the device
+	- spi-max-frequency: Max SPI frequency to use (< 20000000)
+	- clocks: From common clock binding. Clock is phandle to clock for
+		ADF435x Reference Clock (CLKIN).
+
+Optional properties:
+	- gpios:	 GPIO Lock detect - If set with a valid phandle and GPIO number,
+			pll lock state is tested upon read.
+	- adi,channel-spacing: Channel spacing in Hz (influences MODULUS).
+	- adi,power-up-frequency:	If set in Hz the PLL tunes to
+			the desired frequency on probe.
+	- adi,reference-div-factor: If set the driver skips dynamic calculation
+			and uses this default value instead.
+	- adi,reference-doubler-enable: Enables reference doubler.
+	- adi,reference-div2-enable: Enables reference divider.
+	- adi,phase-detector-polarity-positive-enable: Enables positive phase
+			detector polarity. Default = negative.
+	- adi,lock-detect-precision-6ns-enable: Enables 6ns lock detect precision.
+			Default = 10ns.
+	- adi,lock-detect-function-integer-n-enable: Enables lock detect
+			for integer-N mode. Default = factional-N mode.
+	- adi,charge-pump-current: Charge pump current in mA.
+			Default = 2500mA.
+	- adi,muxout-select: On chip multiplexer output selection.
+			Valid values for the multiplexer output are:
+			0: Three-State Output (default)
+			1: DVDD
+			2: DGND
+			3: R-Counter output
+			4: N-Divider output
+			5: Analog lock detect
+			6: Digital lock detect
+	- adi,low-spur-mode-enable: Enables low spur mode.
+			Default = Low noise mode.
+	- adi,cycle-slip-reduction-enable: Enables cycle slip reduction.
+	- adi,charge-cancellation-enable: Enabled charge pump
+			charge cancellation for integer-N modes.
+	- adi,anti-backlash-3ns-enable: Enables 3ns antibacklash pulse width
+			 for integer-N modes.
+	- adi,band-select-clock-mode-high-enable: Enables faster band
+			selection logic.
+	- adi,12bit-clk-divider: Clock divider value used when
+			adi,12bit-clkdiv-mode != 0
+	- adi,clk-divider-mode:
+			Valid values for the clkdiv mode are:
+			0: Clock divider off (default)
+			1: Fast lock enable
+			2: Phase resync enable
+	- adi,aux-output-enable: Enables auxiliary RF output.
+	- adi,aux-output-fundamental-enable: Selects fundamental VCO output on
+			the auxiliary RF output. Default = Output of RF dividers.
+	- adi,mute-till-lock-enable: Enables Mute-Till-Lock-Detect function.
+	- adi,output-power: Output power selection.
+			Valid values for the power mode are:
+			0: -4dBm (default)
+			1: -1dBm
+			2: +2dBm
+			3: +5dBm
+	- adi,aux-output-power: Auxiliary output power selection.
+			Valid values for the power mode are:
+			0: -4dBm (default)
+			1: -1dBm
+			2: +2dBm
+			3: +5dBm
+
+
+Example:
+		lo_pll0_rx_adf4351: adf4351-rx-lpc@4 {
+			compatible = "adi,adf4351";
+			reg = <4>;
+			spi-max-frequency = <10000000>;
+			clocks = <&clk0_ad9523 9>;
+			clock-names = "clkin";
+			adi,channel-spacing = <10000>;
+			adi,power-up-frequency = <2400000000>;
+			adi,phase-detector-polarity-positive-enable;
+			adi,charge-pump-current = <2500>;
+			adi,output-power = <3>;
+			adi,mute-till-lock-enable;
+		};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/iio-bindings.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/iio-bindings.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0b447d9ad196
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/iio-bindings.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+This binding is derived from clock bindings, and based on suggestions
+from Lars-Peter Clausen [1].
+
+Sources of IIO channels can be represented by any node in the device
+tree. Those nodes are designated as IIO providers. IIO consumer
+nodes use a phandle and IIO specifier pair to connect IIO provider
+outputs to IIO inputs. Similar to the gpio specifiers, an IIO
+specifier is an array of one or more cells identifying the IIO
+output on a device. The length of an IIO specifier is defined by the
+value of a #io-channel-cells property in the IIO provider node.
+
+[1] http://marc.info/?l=linux-iio&m=135902119507483&w=2
+
+==IIO providers==
+
+Required properties:
+#io-channel-cells: Number of cells in an IIO specifier; Typically 0 for nodes
+		   with a single IIO output and 1 for nodes with multiple
+		   IIO outputs.
+
+Example for a simple configuration with no trigger:
+
+	adc: voltage-sensor@35 {
+		compatible = "maxim,max1139";
+		reg = <0x35>;
+		#io-channel-cells = <1>;
+	};
+
+Example for a configuration with trigger:
+
+	adc@35 {
+		compatible = "some-vendor,some-adc";
+		reg = <0x35>;
+
+		adc1: iio-device@0 {
+			#io-channel-cells = <1>;
+			/* other properties */
+		};
+		adc2: iio-device@1 {
+			#io-channel-cells = <1>;
+			/* other properties */
+		};
+	};
+
+==IIO consumers==
+
+Required properties:
+io-channels:	List of phandle and IIO specifier pairs, one pair
+		for each IIO input to the device. Note: if the
+		IIO provider specifies '0' for #io-channel-cells,
+		then only the phandle portion of the pair will appear.
+
+Optional properties:
+io-channel-names:
+		List of IIO input name strings sorted in the same
+		order as the io-channels property. Consumers drivers
+		will use io-channel-names to match IIO input names
+		with IIO specifiers.
+io-channel-ranges:
+		Empty property indicating that child nodes can inherit named
+		IIO channels from this node. Useful for bus nodes to provide
+		and IIO channel to their children.
+
+For example:
+
+	device {
+		io-channels = <&adc 1>, <&ref 0>;
+		io-channel-names = "vcc", "vdd";
+	};
+
+This represents a device with two IIO inputs, named "vcc" and "vdd".
+The vcc channel is connected to output 1 of the &adc device, and the
+vdd channel is connected to output 0 of the &ref device.
+
+==Example==
+
+	adc: max1139@35 {
+		compatible = "maxim,max1139";
+		reg = <0x35>;
+		#io-channel-cells = <1>;
+	};
+
+	...
+
+	iio_hwmon {
+		compatible = "iio-hwmon";
+		io-channels = <&adc 0>, <&adc 1>, <&adc 2>,
+			<&adc 3>, <&adc 4>, <&adc 5>,
+			<&adc 6>, <&adc 7>, <&adc 8>,
+			<&adc 9>;
+	};
+
+	some_consumer {
+		compatible = "some-consumer";
+		io-channels = <&adc 10>, <&adc 11>;
+		io-channel-names = "adc1", "adc2";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9300.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9300.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d6f66c73ddbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9300.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+* Avago APDS9300 ambient light sensor
+
+http://www.avagotech.com/docs/AV02-1077EN
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : should be "avago,apds9300"
+  - reg : the I2C address of the sensor
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - interrupt-parent : should be the phandle for the interrupt controller
+  - interrupts : interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ
+
+Example:
+
+apds9300@39 {
+	compatible = "avago,apds9300";
+	reg = <0x39>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&gpio2>;
+	interrupts = <29 8>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/magnetometer/ak8975.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/magnetometer/ak8975.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..011679f1a425
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/magnetometer/ak8975.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+* AsahiKASEI AK8975 magnetometer sensor
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : should be "asahi-kasei,ak8975"
+  - reg : the I2C address of the magnetometer
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - gpios : should be device tree identifier of the magnetometer DRDY pin
+
+Example:
+
+ak8975@0c {
+        compatible = "asahi-kasei,ak8975";
+        reg = <0x0c>;
+        gpios = <&gpj0 7 0>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ads7846.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ads7846.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5f7619c22743
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ads7846.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+Device tree bindings for TI's ADS7843, ADS7845, ADS7846, ADS7873, TSC2046
+SPI driven touch screen controllers.
+
+The node for this driver must be a child node of a SPI controller, hence
+all mandatory properties described in
+
+	Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+
+must be specified.
+
+Additional required properties:
+
+	compatible		Must be one of the following, depending on the
+				model:
+					"ti,tsc2046"
+					"ti,ads7843"
+					"ti,ads7845"
+					"ti,ads7846"
+					"ti,ads7873"
+
+	interrupt-parent
+	interrupts		An interrupt node describing the IRQ line the chip's
+				!PENIRQ pin is connected to.
+	vcc-supply		A regulator node for the supply voltage.
+
+
+Optional properties:
+
+	ti,vref-delay-usecs		vref supply delay in usecs, 0 for
+					external vref (u16).
+	ti,vref-mv			The VREF voltage, in millivolts (u16).
+	ti,keep-vref-on			set to keep vref on for differential
+					measurements as well
+	ti,swap-xy			swap x and y axis
+	ti,settle-delay-usec		Settling time of the analog signals;
+					a function of Vcc and the capacitance
+					on the X/Y drivers.  If set to non-zero,
+					two samples are taken with settle_delay
+					us apart, and the second one is used.
+					~150 uSec with 0.01uF caps (u16).
+	ti,penirq-recheck-delay-usecs	If set to non-zero, after samples are
+					taken this delay is applied and penirq
+					is rechecked, to help avoid false
+					events.  This value is affected by the
+					material used to build the touch layer
+					(u16).
+	ti,x-plate-ohms			Resistance of the X-plate,
+					in Ohms (u16).
+	ti,y-plate-ohms			Resistance of the Y-plate,
+					in Ohms (u16).
+	ti,x-min			Minimum value on the X axis (u16).
+	ti,y-min			Minimum value on the Y axis (u16).
+	ti,x-max			Maximum value on the X axis (u16).
+	ti,y-max			Minimum value on the Y axis (u16).
+	ti,pressure-min			Minimum reported pressure value
+					(threshold) - u16.
+	ti,pressure-max			Maximum reported pressure value (u16).
+	ti,debounce-max			Max number of additional readings per
+					sample (u16).
+	ti,debounce-tol			Tolerance used for filtering (u16).
+	ti,debounce-rep			Additional consecutive good readings
+					required after the first two (u16).
+	ti,pendown-gpio-debounce	Platform specific debounce time for the
+					pendown-gpio (u32).
+	pendown-gpio			GPIO handle describing the pin the !PENIRQ
+					line is connected to.
+	linux,wakeup			use any event on touchscreen as wakeup event.
+
+
+Example for a TSC2046 chip connected to an McSPI controller of an OMAP SoC::
+
+	spi_controller {
+		tsc2046@0 {
+			reg = <0>;	/* CS0 */
+			compatible = "ti,tsc2046";
+			interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>;
+			interrupts = <8 0>;	/* BOOT6 / GPIO 8 */
+			spi-max-frequency = <1000000>;
+			pendown-gpio = <&gpio1 8 0>;
+			vcc-supply = <&reg_vcc3>;
+
+			ti,x-min = /bits/ 16 <0>;
+			ti,x-max = /bits/ 16 <8000>;
+			ti,y-min = /bits/ 16 <0>;
+			ti,y-max = /bits/ 16 <4800>;
+			ti,x-plate-ohms = /bits/ 16 <40>;
+			ti,pressure-max = /bits/ 16 <255>;
+
+			linux,wakeup;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cros-ec-keyb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cros-ec-keyb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0f6355ce39b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cros-ec-keyb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+ChromeOS EC Keyboard
+
+Google's ChromeOS EC Keyboard is a simple matrix keyboard implemented on
+a separate EC (Embedded Controller) device. It provides a message for reading
+key scans from the EC. These are then converted into keycodes for processing
+by the kernel.
+
+This binding is based on matrix-keymap.txt and extends/modifies it as follows:
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "google,cros-ec-keyb"
+
+Optional properties:
+- google,needs-ghost-filter: True to enable a ghost filter for the matrix
+keyboard. This is recommended if the EC does not have its own logic or
+hardware for this.
+
+
+Example:
+
+cros-ec-keyb {
+	compatible = "google,cros-ec-keyb";
+	keypad,num-rows = <8>;
+	keypad,num-columns = <13>;
+	google,needs-ghost-filter;
+	/*
+	 * Keymap entries take the form of 0xRRCCKKKK where
+	 * RR=Row CC=Column KKKK=Key Code
+	 * The values below are for a US keyboard layout and
+	 * are taken from the Linux driver. Note that the
+	 * 102ND key is not used for US keyboards.
+	 */
+	linux,keymap = <
+		/* CAPSLCK F1         B          F10     */
+		0x0001003a 0x0002003b 0x00030030 0x00040044
+		/* N       =          R_ALT      ESC     */
+		0x00060031 0x0008000d 0x000a0064 0x01010001
+		/* F4      G          F7         H       */
+		0x0102003e 0x01030022 0x01040041 0x01060023
+		/* '       F9         BKSPACE    L_CTRL  */
+		0x01080028 0x01090043 0x010b000e 0x0200001d
+		/* TAB     F3         T          F6      */
+		0x0201000f 0x0202003d 0x02030014 0x02040040
+		/* ]       Y          102ND      [       */
+		0x0205001b 0x02060015 0x02070056 0x0208001a
+		/* F8      GRAVE      F2         5       */
+		0x02090042 0x03010029 0x0302003c 0x03030006
+		/* F5      6          -          \       */
+		0x0304003f 0x03060007 0x0308000c 0x030b002b
+		/* R_CTRL  A          D          F       */
+		0x04000061 0x0401001e 0x04020020 0x04030021
+		/* S       K          J          ;       */
+		0x0404001f 0x04050025 0x04060024 0x04080027
+		/* L       ENTER      Z          C       */
+		0x04090026 0x040b001c 0x0501002c 0x0502002e
+		/* V       X          ,          M       */
+		0x0503002f 0x0504002d 0x05050033 0x05060032
+		/* L_SHIFT /          .          SPACE   */
+		0x0507002a 0x05080035 0x05090034 0x050B0039
+		/* 1       3          4          2       */
+		0x06010002 0x06020004 0x06030005 0x06040003
+		/* 8       7          0          9       */
+		0x06050009 0x06060008 0x0608000b 0x0609000a
+		/* L_ALT   DOWN       RIGHT      Q       */
+		0x060a0038 0x060b006c 0x060c006a 0x07010010
+		/* E       R          W          I       */
+		0x07020012 0x07030013 0x07040011 0x07050017
+		/* U       R_SHIFT    P          O       */
+		0x07060016 0x07070036 0x07080019 0x07090018
+		/* UP      LEFT    */
+		0x070b0067 0x070c0069>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/fsl-mma8450.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/fsl-mma8450.txt
index a00c94ccbdee..0b96e5737d3a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/fsl-mma8450.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/fsl-mma8450.txt
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible : "fsl,mma8450".
+- reg: the I2C address of MMA8450
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/gpio-keys-polled.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/gpio-keys-polled.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..313abefa37cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/gpio-keys-polled.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for input/gpio_keys_polled.c keyboard driver
+
+Required properties:
+	- compatible = "gpio-keys-polled";
+	- poll-interval: Poll interval time in milliseconds
+
+Optional properties:
+	- autorepeat: Boolean, Enable auto repeat feature of Linux input
+	  subsystem.
+
+Each button (key) is represented as a sub-node of "gpio-keys-polled":
+Subnode properties:
+
+	- gpios: OF device-tree gpio specification.
+	- label: Descriptive name of the key.
+	- linux,code: Keycode to emit.
+
+Optional subnode-properties:
+	- linux,input-type: Specify event type this button/key generates.
+	  If not specified defaults to <1> == EV_KEY.
+	- debounce-interval: Debouncing interval time in milliseconds.
+	  If not specified defaults to 5.
+	- gpio-key,wakeup: Boolean, button can wake-up the system.
+
+Example nodes:
+
+	gpio_keys_polled {
+			compatible = "gpio-keys-polled";
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+			poll-interval = <100>;
+			autorepeat;
+			button@21 {
+				label = "GPIO Key UP";
+				linux,code = <103>;
+				gpios = <&gpio1 0 1>;
+			};
+			...
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/gpio-matrix-keypad.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/gpio-matrix-keypad.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ead641c65e0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/gpio-matrix-keypad.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+* GPIO driven matrix keypad device tree bindings
+
+GPIO driven matrix keypad is used to interface a SoC with a matrix keypad.
+The matrix keypad supports multiple row and column lines, a key can be
+placed at each intersection of a unique row and a unique column. The matrix
+keypad can sense a key-press and key-release by means of GPIO lines and
+report the event using GPIO interrupts to the cpu.
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible:		Should be "gpio-matrix-keypad"
+- row-gpios:		List of gpios used as row lines. The gpio specifier
+			for this property depends on the gpio controller to
+			which these row lines are connected.
+- col-gpios:		List of gpios used as column lines. The gpio specifier
+			for this property depends on the gpio controller to
+			which these column lines are connected.
+- linux,keymap:		The definition can be found at
+			bindings/input/matrix-keymap.txt
+
+Optional Properties:
+- linux,no-autorepeat:	do no enable autorepeat feature.
+- linux,wakeup:		use any event on keypad as wakeup event.
+- debounce-delay-ms:	debounce interval in milliseconds
+- col-scan-delay-us:	delay, measured in microseconds, that is needed
+			before we can scan keypad after activating column gpio
+
+Example:
+	matrix-keypad {
+		compatible = "gpio-matrix-keypad";
+		debounce-delay-ms = <5>;
+		col-scan-delay-us = <2>;
+
+		row-gpios = <&gpio2 25 0
+			     &gpio2 26 0
+			     &gpio2 27 0>;
+
+		col-gpios = <&gpio2 21 0
+			     &gpio2 22 0>;
+
+		linux,keymap = <0x0000008B
+				0x0100009E
+				0x02000069
+				0x0001006A
+				0x0101001C
+				0x0201006C>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/imx-keypad.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/imx-keypad.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2ebaf7d26843
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/imx-keypad.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+* Freescale i.MX Keypad Port(KPP) device tree bindings
+
+The KPP is designed to interface with a keypad matrix with 2-point contact
+or 3-point contact keys. The KPP is designed to simplify the software task
+of scanning a keypad matrix. The KPP is capable of detecting, debouncing,
+and decoding one or multiple keys pressed simultaneously on a keypad.
+
+Required SoC Specific Properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,<soc>-kpp".
+
+- reg: Physical base address of the KPP and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+- interrupts: The KPP interrupt number to the CPU(s).
+
+- clocks: The clock provided by the SoC to the KPP. Some SoCs use dummy
+clock(The clock for the KPP is provided by the SoCs automatically).
+
+Required Board Specific Properties:
+- pinctrl-names: The definition can be found at
+pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt.
+
+- pinctrl-0: The definition can be found at
+pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt.
+
+- linux,keymap: The definition can be found at
+bindings/input/matrix-keymap.txt.
+
+Example:
+kpp: kpp@73f94000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx51-kpp", "fsl,imx21-kpp";
+	reg = <0x73f94000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <60>;
+	clocks = <&clks 0>;
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_kpp_1>;
+	linux,keymap = <0x00000067	/* KEY_UP */
+			0x0001006c	/* KEY_DOWN */
+			0x00020072	/* KEY_VOLUMEDOWN */
+			0x00030066	/* KEY_HOME */
+			0x0100006a	/* KEY_RIGHT */
+			0x01010069	/* KEY_LEFT */
+			0x0102001c	/* KEY_ENTER */
+			0x01030073	/* KEY_VOLUMEUP */
+			0x02000040	/* KEY_F6 */
+			0x02010042	/* KEY_F8 */
+			0x02020043	/* KEY_F9 */
+			0x02030044	/* KEY_F10 */
+			0x0300003b	/* KEY_F1 */
+			0x0301003c	/* KEY_F2 */
+			0x0302003d	/* KEY_F3 */
+			0x03030074>;	/* KEY_POWER */
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/input-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/input-reset.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2bb2626fdb78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/input-reset.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+Input: sysrq reset sequence
+
+A simple binding to represent a set of keys as described in
+include/uapi/linux/input.h. This is to communicate a sequence of keys to the
+sysrq driver. Upon holding the keys for a specified amount of time (if
+specified) the system is sync'ed and reset.
+
+Key sequences are global to the system but all the keys in a set must be coming
+from the same input device.
+
+The /chosen node should contain a 'linux,sysrq-reset-seq' child node to define
+a set of keys.
+
+Required property:
+sysrq-reset-seq: array of Linux keycodes, one keycode per cell.
+
+Optional property:
+timeout-ms: duration keys must be pressed together in milliseconds before
+generating a sysrq. If omitted the system is rebooted immediately when a valid
+sequence has been recognized.
+
+Example:
+
+ chosen {
+                linux,sysrq-reset-seq {
+                        keyset = <0x03
+                                  0x04
+                                  0x0a>;
+                        timeout-ms = <3000>;
+                };
+         };
+
+Would represent KEY_2, KEY_3 and KEY_9.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/lpc32xx-key.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/lpc32xx-key.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bcf62f856358
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/lpc32xx-key.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+NXP LPC32xx Key Scan Interface
+
+This binding is based on the matrix-keymap binding with the following
+changes:
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible: Should be "nxp,lpc3220-key"
+- reg: Physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: The interrupt number to the cpu.
+- nxp,debounce-delay-ms: Debounce delay in ms
+- nxp,scan-delay-ms: Repeated scan period in ms
+- linux,keymap: the key-code to be reported when the key is pressed
+  and released, see also
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/matrix-keymap.txt
+
+Note: keypad,num-rows and keypad,num-columns are required, and must be equal
+since LPC32xx only supports square matrices
+
+Example:
+
+	key@40050000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-key";
+		reg = <0x40050000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <54 0>;
+		keypad,num-rows = <1>;
+		keypad,num-columns = <1>;
+		nxp,debounce-delay-ms = <3>;
+		nxp,scan-delay-ms = <34>;
+		linux,keymap = <0x00000002>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/matrix-keymap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/matrix-keymap.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c54919fad17e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/matrix-keymap.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+A simple common binding for matrix-connected key boards. Currently targeted at
+defining the keys in the scope of linux key codes since that is a stable and
+standardized interface at this time.
+
+Required properties:
+- linux,keymap: an array of packed 1-cell entries containing the equivalent
+  of row, column and linux key-code. The 32-bit big endian cell is packed
+  as:
+	row << 24 | column << 16 | key-code
+
+Optional properties:
+Properties for the number of rows and columns are optional because some
+drivers will use fixed values for these.
+- keypad,num-rows: Number of row lines connected to the keypad controller.
+- keypad,num-columns: Number of column lines connected to the keypad
+  controller.
+
+Some users of this binding might choose to specify secondary keymaps for
+cases where there is a modifier key such as a Fn key. Proposed names
+for said properties are "linux,fn-keymap" or with another descriptive
+word for the modifier other from "Fn".
+
+Example:
+	linux,keymap = < 0x00030012
+			 0x0102003a >;
+	keypad,num-rows = <2>;
+	keypad,num-columns = <8>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/nvidia,tegra20-kbc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/nvidia,tegra20-kbc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2995fae7ee47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/nvidia,tegra20-kbc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+* Tegra keyboard controller
+The key controller has maximum 24 pins to make matrix keypad. Any pin
+can be configured as row or column. The maximum column pin can be 8
+and maximum row pins can be 16 for Tegra20/Tegra30.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "nvidia,tegra20-kbc"
+- reg: Register base address of KBC.
+- interrupts: Interrupt number for the KBC.
+- nvidia,kbc-row-pins: The KBC pins which are configured as row. This is an
+  array of pin numbers which is used as rows.
+- nvidia,kbc-col-pins: The KBC pins which are configured as column. This is an
+  array of pin numbers which is used as column.
+- linux,keymap: The keymap for keys as described in the binding document
+  devicetree/bindings/input/matrix-keymap.txt.
+
+Optional properties, in addition to those specified by the shared
+matrix-keyboard bindings:
+
+- linux,fn-keymap: a second keymap, same specification as the
+  matrix-keyboard-controller spec but to be used when the KEY_FN modifier
+  key is pressed.
+- nvidia,debounce-delay-ms: delay in milliseconds per row scan for debouncing
+- nvidia,repeat-delay-ms: delay in milliseconds before repeat starts
+- nvidia,ghost-filter: enable ghost filtering for this device
+- nvidia,wakeup-source: configure keyboard as a wakeup source for suspend/resume
+
+Example:
+
+keyboard: keyboard {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-kbc";
+	reg = <0x7000e200 0x100>;
+	interrupts = <0 85 0x04>;
+	nvidia,ghost-filter;
+	nvidia,debounce-delay-ms = <640>;
+	nvidia,kbc-row-pins = <0 1 2>;    /* pin 0, 1, 2 as rows */
+	nvidia,kbc-col-pins = <11 12 13>; /* pin 11, 12, 13 as columns */
+	linux,keymap = <0x00000074
+			0x00010067
+			0x00020066
+			0x01010068
+			0x02000069
+			0x02010070
+			0x02020071>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/omap-keypad.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/omap-keypad.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..34ed1c60ff95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/omap-keypad.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+* TI's Keypad Controller device tree bindings
+
+TI's Keypad controller is used to interface a SoC with a matrix-type
+keypad device. The keypad controller supports multiple row and column lines.
+A key can be placed at each intersection of a unique row and a unique column.
+The keypad controller can sense a key-press and key-release and report the
+event using a interrupt to the cpu.
+
+This binding is based on the matrix-keymap binding with the following
+changes:
+
+keypad,num-rows and keypad,num-columns are required.
+
+Required SoC Specific Properties:
+- compatible: should be one of the following
+   - "ti,omap4-keypad": For controllers compatible with omap4 keypad
+      controller.
+
+Optional Properties specific to linux:
+- linux,keypad-no-autorepeat: do no enable autorepeat feature.
+
+Example:
+	keypad@4ae1c000{
+		compatible = "ti,omap4-keypad";
+		keypad,num-rows = <2>;
+		keypad,num-columns = <8>;
+		linux,keypad-no-autorepeat;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ps2keyb-mouse-apbps2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ps2keyb-mouse-apbps2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3029c5694cf6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ps2keyb-mouse-apbps2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+Aeroflex Gaisler APBPS2 PS/2 Core, supporting Keyboard or Mouse.
+
+The APBPS2 PS/2 core is available in the GRLIB VHDL IP core library.
+
+Note: In the ordinary environment for the APBPS2 core, a LEON SPARC system,
+these properties are built from information in the AMBA plug&play and from
+bootloader settings.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- name : Should be "GAISLER_APBPS2" or "01_060"
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts : Interrupt numbers for this device
+
+For further information look in the documentation for the GLIB IP core library:
+http://www.gaisler.com/products/grlib/grip.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/pwm-beeper.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/pwm-beeper.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..be332ae4f2d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/pwm-beeper.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+* PWM beeper device tree bindings
+
+Registers a PWM device as beeper.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "pwm-beeper"
+- pwms: phandle to the physical PWM device
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/pxa27x-keypad.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/pxa27x-keypad.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f8674f7e5ea5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/pxa27x-keypad.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+* Marvell PXA Keypad controller
+
+Required Properties
+- compatible : should be "marvell,pxa27x-keypad"
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts : The interrupt for the keypad controller
+- marvell,debounce-interval : How long time the key will be
+  recognized when it is pressed. It is a u32 value, and bit[31:16]
+  is debounce interval for direct key and bit[15:0] is debounce
+  interval for matrix key. The value is in binary number of 2ms
+
+Optional Properties For Matrix Keyes
+Please refer to matrix-keymap.txt
+
+Optional Properties for Direct Keyes
+- marvell,direct-key-count : How many direct keyes are used.
+- marvell,direct-key-mask : The mask indicates which keyes
+  are used. If bit[X] of the mask is set, the direct key X
+  is used.
+- marvell,direct-key-low-active : Direct key status register
+  tells the level of pins that connects to the direct keyes.
+  When this property is set, it means that when the pin level
+  is low, the key is pressed(active).
+- marvell,direct-key-map : It is a u16 array. Each item indicates
+  the linux key-code for the direct key.
+
+Optional Properties For Rotary
+- marvell,rotary0 : It is a u32 value. Bit[31:16] is the
+  linux key-code for rotary up. Bit[15:0] is the linux key-code
+  for rotary down. It is for rotary 0.
+- marvell,rotary1 : Same as marvell,rotary0. It is for rotary 1.
+- marvell,rotary-rel-key : When rotary is used for relative axes
+  in the device, the value indicates the key-code for relative
+  axes measurement in the device. It is a u32 value. Bit[31:16]
+  is for rotary 1, and Bit[15:0] is for rotary 0.
+
+Examples:
+	keypad: keypad@d4012000 {
+		keypad,num-rows = <3>;
+		keypad,num-columns = <5>;
+		linux,keymap = <0x0000000e	/* KEY_BACKSPACE */
+				0x0001006b	/* KEY_END */
+				0x00020061	/* KEY_RIGHTCTRL */
+				0x0003000b	/* KEY_0 */
+				0x00040002	/* KEY_1 */
+				0x0100008b	/* KEY_MENU */
+				0x01010066	/* KEY_HOME */
+				0x010200e7	/* KEY_SEND */
+				0x01030009	/* KEY_8 */
+				0x0104000a	/* KEY_9 */
+				0x02000160	/* KEY_OK */
+				0x02010003	/* KEY_2 */
+				0x02020004	/* KEY_3 */
+				0x02030005	/* KEY_4 */
+				0x02040006>;	/* KEY_5 */
+		marvell,rotary0 = <0x006c0067>;	/* KEY_UP & KEY_DOWN */
+		marvell,direct-key-count = <1>;
+		marvell,direct-key-map = <0x001c>;
+		marvell,debounce-interval = <0x001e001e>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/rotary-encoder.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/rotary-encoder.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..331549593ed5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/rotary-encoder.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+Rotary encoder DT bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- gpios: a spec for two GPIOs to be used
+
+Optional properties:
+- linux,axis: the input subsystem axis to map to this rotary encoder.
+  Defaults to 0 (ABS_X / REL_X)
+- rotary-encoder,steps: Number of steps in a full turnaround of the
+  encoder. Only relevant for absolute axis. Defaults to 24 which is a
+  typical value for such devices.
+- rotary-encoder,relative-axis: register a relative axis rather than an
+  absolute one. Relative axis will only generate +1/-1 events on the input
+  device, hence no steps need to be passed.
+- rotary-encoder,rollover: Automatic rollove when the rotary value becomes
+  greater than the specified steps or smaller than 0. For absolute axis only.
+- rotary-encoder,half-period: Makes the driver work on half-period mode.
+
+See Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt for more information.
+
+Example:
+
+		rotary@0 {
+			compatible = "rotary-encoder";
+			gpios = <&gpio 19 1>, <&gpio 20 0>; /* GPIO19 is inverted */
+			linux,axis = <0>; /* REL_X */
+			rotary-encoder,relative-axis;
+		};
+
+		rotary@1 {
+			compatible = "rotary-encoder";
+			gpios = <&gpio 21 0>, <&gpio 22 0>;
+			linux,axis = <1>; /* ABS_Y */
+			rotary-encoder,steps = <24>;
+			rotary-encoder,rollover;
+		};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/samsung-keypad.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/samsung-keypad.txt
index ce3e394c0e64..942d071baaa5 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/samsung-keypad.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/samsung-keypad.txt
@@ -25,14 +25,6 @@ Required Board Specific Properties:
 - samsung,keypad-num-columns: Number of column lines connected to the
   keypad controller.
 
-- row-gpios: List of gpios used as row lines. The gpio specifier for
-  this property depends on the gpio controller to which these row lines
-  are connected.
-
-- col-gpios: List of gpios used as column lines. The gpio specifier for
-  this property depends on the gpio controller to which these column
-  lines are connected.
-
 - Keys represented as child nodes: Each key connected to the keypad
   controller is represented as a child node to the keypad controller
   device node and should include the following properties.
@@ -41,6 +33,9 @@ Required Board Specific Properties:
   - linux,code: the key-code to be reported when the key is pressed
     and released.
 
+- pinctrl-0: Should specify pin control groups used for this controller.
+- pinctrl-names: Should contain only one value - "default".
+
 Optional Properties specific to linux:
 - linux,keypad-no-autorepeat: do no enable autorepeat feature.
 - linux,keypad-wakeup: use any event on keypad as wakeup event.
@@ -56,17 +51,8 @@ Example:
 		linux,input-no-autorepeat;
 		linux,input-wakeup;
 
-		row-gpios = <&gpx2 0 3 3 0
-			     &gpx2 1 3 3 0>;
-
-		col-gpios = <&gpx1 0 3 0 0
-			     &gpx1 1 3 0 0
-			     &gpx1 2 3 0 0
-			     &gpx1 3 3 0 0
-			     &gpx1 4 3 0 0
-			     &gpx1 5 3 0 0
-			     &gpx1 6 3 0 0
-			     &gpx1 7 3 0 0>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&keypad_rows &keypad_columns>;
 
 		key_1 {
 			keypad,row = <0>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/spear-keyboard.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/spear-keyboard.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4a846d26da23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/spear-keyboard.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+* SPEAr keyboard controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "st,spear300-kbd"
+
+Optional properties, in addition to those specified by the shared
+matrix-keyboard bindings:
+- autorepeat: bool: enables key autorepeat
+- st,mode: keyboard mode: 0 - 9x9, 1 - 6x6, 2 - 2x2
+
+Example:
+
+kbd@fc400000 {
+	compatible = "st,spear300-kbd";
+	reg = <0xfc400000 0x100>;
+	linux,keymap = < 0x00030012
+			 0x0102003a >;
+	autorepeat;
+	st,mode = <0>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/stmpe-keypad.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/stmpe-keypad.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1b97222e8a0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/stmpe-keypad.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+* STMPE Keypad
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible               : "st,stmpe-keypad"
+ - linux,keymap             : See ./matrix-keymap.txt
+
+Optional properties:
+ - debounce-interval        : Debouncing interval time in milliseconds
+ - st,scan-count            : Scanning cycles elapsed before key data is updated
+ - st,no-autorepeat         : If specified device will not autorepeat
+
+Example:
+
+	stmpe_keypad {
+		compatible = "st,stmpe-keypad";
+
+		debounce-interval = <64>;
+		st,scan-count = <8>;
+		st,no-autorepeat;
+
+		linux,keymap = <0x205006b
+				0x4010074
+				0x3050072
+				0x1030004
+				0x502006a
+				0x500000a
+				0x5008b
+				0x706001c
+				0x405000b
+				0x6070003
+				0x3040067
+				0x303006c
+				0x60400e7
+				0x602009e
+				0x4020073
+				0x5050002
+				0x4030069
+				0x3020008>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/tca8418_keypad.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/tca8418_keypad.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..255185009167
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/tca8418_keypad.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+This binding is based on the matrix-keymap binding with the following
+changes:
+
+keypad,num-rows and keypad,num-columns are required.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,tca8418"
+- reg: the I2C address
+- interrupts: IRQ line number, should trigger on falling edge
+- linux,keymap: Keys definitions, see keypad-matrix.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/tegra-kbc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/tegra-kbc.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 5ecfa99089b4..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/tegra-kbc.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-* Tegra keyboard controller
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible: "nvidia,tegra20-kbc"
-
-Optional properties:
-- debounce-delay: delay in milliseconds per row scan for debouncing
-- repeat-delay: delay in milliseconds before repeat starts
-- ghost-filter: enable ghost filtering for this device
-- wakeup-source: configure keyboard as a wakeup source for suspend/resume
-
-Example:
-
-keyboard: keyboard {
-	compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-kbc";
-	reg = <0x7000e200 0x100>;
-	ghost-filter;
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ti,nspire-keypad.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ti,nspire-keypad.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..513d94d6e899
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ti,nspire-keypad.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+TI-NSPIRE Keypad
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Compatible property value should be "ti,nspire-keypad".
+
+- reg: Physical base address of the peripheral and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+- interrupts: The interrupt number for the peripheral.
+
+- scan-interval: How often to scan in us. Based on a APB speed of 33MHz, the
+	maximum and minimum delay time is ~2000us and ~500us respectively
+
+- row-delay: How long to wait before scanning each row.
+
+- clocks: The clock this peripheral is attached to.
+
+- linux,keymap: The keymap to use
+	(see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/matrix-keymap.txt)
+
+Optional properties:
+- active-low: Specify that the keypad is active low (i.e. logical low signifies
+	a key press).
+
+Example:
+
+input {
+	compatible = "ti,nspire-keypad";
+	reg = <0x900E0000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <16>;
+
+	scan-interval = <1000>;
+	row-delay = <200>;
+
+	clocks = <&apb_pclk>;
+
+	linux,keymap = <
+	0x0000001c	0x0001001c	0x00040039
+	0x0005002c	0x00060015	0x0007000b
+	0x0008000f	0x0100002d	0x01010011
+	0x0102002f	0x01030004	0x01040016
+	0x01050014	0x0106001f	0x01070002
+	0x010a006a	0x02000013	0x02010010
+	0x02020019	0x02030007	0x02040018
+	0x02050031	0x02060032	0x02070005
+	0x02080028	0x0209006c	0x03000026
+	0x03010025	0x03020024	0x0303000a
+	0x03040017	0x03050023	0x03060022
+	0x03070008	0x03080035	0x03090069
+	0x04000021	0x04010012	0x04020020
+	0x0404002e	0x04050030	0x0406001e
+	0x0407000d	0x04080037	0x04090067
+	0x05010038	0x0502000c	0x0503001b
+	0x05040034	0x0505001a	0x05060006
+	0x05080027	0x0509000e	0x050a006f
+	0x0600002b	0x0602004e	0x06030068
+	0x06040003	0x0605006d	0x06060009
+	0x06070001	0x0609000f	0x0708002a
+	0x0709001d	0x070a0033	>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/auo_pixcir_ts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/auo_pixcir_ts.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f40f21c642b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/auo_pixcir_ts.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+* AUO in-cell touchscreen controller using Pixcir sensors
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "auo,auo_pixcir_ts"
+- reg: I2C address of the chip
+- interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected
+- gpios: gpios the chip is connected to
+  first one is the interrupt gpio and second one the reset gpio
+- x-size: horizontal resolution of touchscreen
+- y-size: vertical resolution of touchscreen
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c@00000000 {
+		/* ... */
+
+		auo_pixcir_ts@5c {
+			compatible = "auo,auo_pixcir_ts";
+			reg = <0x5c>;
+			interrupts = <2 0>;
+
+			gpios = <&gpf 2 0 2>, /* INT */
+				<&gpf 5 1 0>; /* RST */
+
+			x-size = <800>;
+			y-size = <600>;
+		};
+
+		/* ... */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/bu21013.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/bu21013.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ca5a2c86480c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/bu21013.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+* Rohm BU21013 Touch Screen
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible              : "rohm,bu21013_tp"
+ - reg                     :  I2C device address
+
+Optional properties:
+ - touch-gpio              : GPIO pin registering a touch event
+ - <supply_name>-supply    : Phandle to a regulator supply
+ - rohm,touch-max-x        : Maximum outward permitted limit in the X axis
+ - rohm,touch-max-y        : Maximum outward permitted limit in the Y axis
+ - rohm,flip-x             : Flip touch coordinates on the X axis
+ - rohm,flip-y             : Flip touch coordinates on the Y axis
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c@80110000 {
+		bu21013_tp@0x5c {
+			compatible = "rohm,bu21013_tp";
+			reg = <0x5c>;
+			touch-gpio = <&gpio2 20 0x4>;
+			avdd-supply = <&ab8500_ldo_aux1_reg>;
+
+			rohm,touch-max-x = <384>;
+			rohm,touch-max-y = <704>;
+			rohm,flip-y;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/egalax-ts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/egalax-ts.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..49fa14ed155c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/egalax-ts.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+* EETI eGalax Multiple Touch Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "eeti,egalax_ts"
+- reg: i2c slave address
+- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller
+- interrupts: touch controller interrupt
+- wakeup-gpios: the gpio pin to be used for waking up the controller
+  and also used as irq pin
+
+Example:
+
+	egalax_ts@04 {
+		compatible = "eeti,egalax_ts";
+		reg = <0x04>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>;
+		interrupts = <9 2>;
+		wakeup-gpios = <&gpio1 9 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/lpc32xx-tsc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/lpc32xx-tsc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..41cbf4b7a670
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/lpc32xx-tsc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+* NXP LPC32xx SoC Touchscreen Controller (TSC)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "nxp,lpc3220-tsc"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: The TSC/ADC interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+	tsc@40048000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-tsc";
+		reg = <0x40048000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&mic>;
+		interrupts = <39 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/mms114.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/mms114.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..89d4c56c5671
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/mms114.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+* MELFAS MMS114 touchscreen controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "melfas,mms114"
+- reg: I2C address of the chip
+- interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected
+- x-size: horizontal resolution of touchscreen
+- y-size: vertical resolution of touchscreen
+
+Optional properties:
+- contact-threshold:
+- moving-threshold:
+- x-invert: invert X axis
+- y-invert: invert Y axis
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c@00000000 {
+		/* ... */
+
+		touchscreen@48 {
+			compatible = "melfas,mms114";
+			reg = <0x48>;
+			interrupts = <39 0>;
+			x-size = <720>;
+			y-size = <1280>;
+			contact-threshold = <10>;
+			moving-threshold = <10>;
+			x-invert;
+			y-invert;
+		};
+
+		/* ... */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sitronix-st1232.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sitronix-st1232.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..64ad48b824a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sitronix-st1232.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+* Sitronix st1232 touchscreen controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "sitronix,st1232"
+- reg: I2C address of the chip
+- interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected
+
+Optional properties:
+- gpios: a phandle to the reset GPIO
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c@00000000 {
+		/* ... */
+
+		touchscreen@55 {
+			compatible = "sitronix,st1232";
+			reg = <0x55>;
+			interrupts = <2 0>;
+			gpios = <&gpio1 166 0>;
+		};
+
+		/* ... */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/stmpe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/stmpe.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..127baa31a77a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/stmpe.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+STMPE Touchscreen
+----------------
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: "st,stmpe-ts"
+
+Optional properties:
+- st,sample-time: ADC converstion time in number of clock.  (0 -> 36 clocks, 1 ->
+  44 clocks, 2 -> 56 clocks, 3 -> 64 clocks, 4 -> 80 clocks, 5 -> 96 clocks, 6
+  -> 144 clocks), recommended is 4.
+- st,mod-12b: ADC Bit mode (0 -> 10bit ADC, 1 -> 12bit ADC)
+- st,ref-sel: ADC reference source (0 -> internal reference, 1 -> external
+  reference)
+- st,adc-freq: ADC Clock speed (0 -> 1.625 MHz, 1 -> 3.25 MHz, 2 || 3 -> 6.5 MHz)
+- st,ave-ctrl: Sample average control (0 -> 1 sample, 1 -> 2 samples, 2 -> 4
+  samples, 3 -> 8 samples)
+- st,touch-det-delay: Touch detect interrupt delay (0 -> 10 us, 1 -> 50 us, 2 ->
+  100 us, 3 -> 500 us, 4-> 1 ms, 5 -> 5 ms, 6 -> 10 ms, 7 -> 50 ms) recommended
+  is 3
+- st,settling: Panel driver settling time (0 -> 10 us, 1 -> 100 us, 2 -> 500 us, 3
+  -> 1 ms, 4 -> 5 ms, 5 -> 10 ms, 6 for 50 ms, 7 -> 100 ms) recommended is 2
+- st,fraction-z: Length of the fractional part in z (fraction-z ([0..7]) = Count of
+  the fractional part) recommended is 7
+- st,i-drive: current limit value of the touchscreen drivers (0 -> 20 mA typical 35
+  mA max, 1 -> 50 mA typical 80 mA max)
+
+Node name must be stmpe_touchscreen and should be child node of stmpe node to
+which it belongs.
+
+Example:
+
+	stmpe_touchscreen {
+		compatible = "st,stmpe-ts";
+		st,sample-time = <4>;
+		st,mod-12b = <1>;
+		st,ref-sel = <0>;
+		st,adc-freq = <1>;
+		st,ave-ctrl = <1>;
+		st,touch-det-delay = <2>;
+		st,settling = <2>;
+		st,fraction-z = <7>;
+		st,i-drive = <1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..491c97b78384
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+* TI - TSC ADC (Touschscreen and analog digital converter)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Required properties:
+- child "tsc"
+	ti,wires: Wires refer to application modes i.e. 4/5/8 wire touchscreen
+		  support on the platform.
+	ti,x-plate-resistance: X plate resistance
+	ti,coordiante-readouts: The sequencer supports a total of 16
+				programmable steps each step is used to
+				read a single coordinate. A single
+                                readout is enough but multiple reads can
+				increase the quality.
+				A value of 5 means, 5 reads for X, 5 for
+				Y and 2 for Z (always). This utilises 12
+				of the 16 software steps available. The
+				remaining 4 can be used by the ADC.
+	ti,wire-config: Different boards could have a different order for
+			connecting wires on touchscreen. We need to provide an
+			8 bit number where in the 1st four bits represent the
+			analog lines and the next 4 bits represent positive/
+			negative terminal on that input line. Notations to
+			represent the input lines and terminals resoectively
+			is as follows:
+			AIN0 = 0, AIN1 = 1 and so on till AIN7 = 7.
+			XP  = 0, XN = 1, YP = 2, YN = 3.
+- child "adc"
+	ti,adc-channels: List of analog inputs available for ADC.
+			 AIN0 = 0, AIN1 = 1 and so on till AIN7 = 7.
+
+Example:
+	tscadc: tscadc@44e0d000 {
+		compatible = "ti,am3359-tscadc";
+		tsc {
+			ti,wires = <4>;
+			ti,x-plate-resistance = <200>;
+			ti,coordiante-readouts = <5>;
+			ti,wire-config = <0x00 0x11 0x22 0x33>;
+		};
+
+		adc {
+			ti,adc-channels = <4 5 6 7>;
+		};
+	}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/abilis,tb10x-ictl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/abilis,tb10x-ictl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9d52d5afe3e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/abilis,tb10x-ictl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+TB10x Top Level Interrupt Controller
+====================================
+
+The Abilis TB10x SOC contains a custom interrupt controller. It performs
+one-to-one mapping of external interrupt sources to CPU interrupts and
+provides support for reconfigurable trigger modes.
+
+Required properties
+-------------------
+
+- compatible: Should be "abilis,tb10x-ictl"
+- reg: specifies physical base address and size of register range.
+- interrupt-congroller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller.
+- #interrupt cells: Specifies the number of cells used to encode an interrupt
+  source connected to this controller. The value shall be 2.
+- interrupt-parent: Specifies the parent interrupt controller.
+- interrupts: Specifies the list of interrupt lines which are handled by
+  the interrupt controller in the parent controller's notation. Interrupts
+  are mapped one-to-one to parent interrupts.
+
+Example
+-------
+
+intc: interrupt-controller {	/* Parent interrupt controller */
+	interrupt-controller;
+	#interrupt-cells = <1>;	/* For example below */
+	/* ... */
+};
+
+tb10x_ictl: pic@2000 {		/* TB10x interrupt controller */
+	compatible = "abilis,tb10x-ictl";
+	reg = <0x2000 0x20>;
+	interrupt-controller;
+	#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+	interrupts = <5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
+			20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/allwinner,sun4i-ic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/allwinner,sun4i-ic.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..57edb30dbbca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/allwinner,sun4i-ic.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+Allwinner Sunxi Interrupt Controller
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "allwinner,sun4i-ic"
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller
+- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+  interrupt source. The value shall be 1.
+
+For the valid interrupt sources for your SoC, see the documentation in
+sunxi/<soc>.txt
+
+Example:
+
+intc: interrupt-controller {
+	compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-ic";
+	reg = <0x01c20400 0x400>;
+	interrupt-controller;
+	#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7da578d72123
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+BCM2835 Top-Level ("ARMCTRL") Interrupt Controller
+
+The BCM2835 contains a custom top-level interrupt controller, which supports
+72 interrupt sources using a 2-level register scheme. The interrupt
+controller, or the HW block containing it, is referred to occasionally
+as "armctrl" in the SoC documentation, hence naming of this binding.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic"
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller
+- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+  interrupt source. The value shall be 2.
+
+  The 1st cell is the interrupt bank; 0 for interrupts in the "IRQ basic
+  pending" register, or 1/2 respectively for interrupts in the "IRQ pending
+  1/2" register.
+
+  The 2nd cell contains the interrupt number within the bank. Valid values
+  are 0..7 for bank 0, and 0..31 for bank 1.
+
+The interrupt sources are as follows:
+
+Bank 0:
+0: ARM_TIMER
+1: ARM_MAILBOX
+2: ARM_DOORBELL_0
+3: ARM_DOORBELL_1
+4: VPU0_HALTED
+5: VPU1_HALTED
+6: ILLEGAL_TYPE0
+7: ILLEGAL_TYPE1
+
+Bank 1:
+0: TIMER0
+1: TIMER1
+2: TIMER2
+3: TIMER3
+4: CODEC0
+5: CODEC1
+6: CODEC2
+7: VC_JPEG
+8: ISP
+9: VC_USB
+10: VC_3D
+11: TRANSPOSER
+12: MULTICORESYNC0
+13: MULTICORESYNC1
+14: MULTICORESYNC2
+15: MULTICORESYNC3
+16: DMA0
+17: DMA1
+18: VC_DMA2
+19: VC_DMA3
+20: DMA4
+21: DMA5
+22: DMA6
+23: DMA7
+24: DMA8
+25: DMA9
+26: DMA10
+27: DMA11
+28: DMA12
+29: AUX
+30: ARM
+31: VPUDMA
+
+Bank 2:
+0: HOSTPORT
+1: VIDEOSCALER
+2: CCP2TX
+3: SDC
+4: DSI0
+5: AVE
+6: CAM0
+7: CAM1
+8: HDMI0
+9: HDMI1
+10: PIXELVALVE1
+11: I2CSPISLV
+12: DSI1
+13: PWA0
+14: PWA1
+15: CPR
+16: SMI
+17: GPIO0
+18: GPIO1
+19: GPIO2
+20: GPIO3
+21: VC_I2C
+22: VC_SPI
+23: VC_I2SPCM
+24: VC_SDIO
+25: VC_UART
+26: SLIMBUS
+27: VEC
+28: CPG
+29: RNG
+30: VC_ARASANSDIO
+31: AVSPMON
+
+Example:
+
+intc: interrupt-controller {
+	compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic";
+	reg = <0x7e00b200 0x200>;
+	interrupt-controller;
+	#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..72a06c0ab1db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+Specifying interrupt information for devices
+============================================
+
+1) Interrupt client nodes
+-------------------------
+
+Nodes that describe devices which generate interrupts must contain an
+"interrupts" property. This property must contain a list of interrupt
+specifiers, one per output interrupt. The format of the interrupt specifier is
+determined by the interrupt controller to which the interrupts are routed; see
+section 2 below for details.
+
+The "interrupt-parent" property is used to specify the controller to which
+interrupts are routed and contains a single phandle referring to the interrupt
+controller node. This property is inherited, so it may be specified in an
+interrupt client node or in any of its parent nodes.
+
+2) Interrupt controller nodes
+-----------------------------
+
+A device is marked as an interrupt controller with the "interrupt-controller"
+property. This is a empty, boolean property. An additional "#interrupt-cells"
+property defines the number of cells needed to specify a single interrupt.
+
+It is the responsibility of the interrupt controller's binding to define the
+length and format of the interrupt specifier. The following two variants are
+commonly used:
+
+  a) one cell
+  -----------
+  The #interrupt-cells property is set to 1 and the single cell defines the
+  index of the interrupt within the controller.
+
+  Example:
+
+	vic: intc@10140000 {
+		compatible = "arm,versatile-vic";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		reg = <0x10140000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	sic: intc@10003000 {
+		compatible = "arm,versatile-sic";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		reg = <0x10003000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&vic>;
+		interrupts = <31>; /* Cascaded to vic */
+	};
+
+  b) two cells
+  ------------
+  The #interrupt-cells property is set to 2 and the first cell defines the
+  index of the interrupt within the controller, while the second cell is used
+  to specify any of the following flags:
+    - bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags
+        1 = low-to-high edge triggered
+        2 = high-to-low edge triggered
+        4 = active high level-sensitive
+        8 = active low level-sensitive
+
+  Example:
+
+	i2c@7000c000 {
+		gpioext: gpio-adnp@41 {
+			compatible = "ad,gpio-adnp";
+			reg = <0x41>;
+
+			interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+			interrupts = <160 1>;
+
+			gpio-controller;
+			#gpio-cells = <1>;
+
+			interrupt-controller;
+			#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+
+			nr-gpios = <64>;
+		};
+
+		sx8634@2b {
+			compatible = "smtc,sx8634";
+			reg = <0x2b>;
+
+			interrupt-parent = <&gpioext>;
+			interrupts = <3 0x8>;
+
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			threshold = <0x40>;
+			sensitivity = <7>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/marvell,orion-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/marvell,orion-intc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2c11ac76fac9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/marvell,orion-intc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+Marvell Orion SoC interrupt controllers
+
+* Main interrupt controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: shall be "marvell,orion-intc"
+- reg: base address(es) of interrupt registers starting with CAUSE register
+- interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller
+- #interrupt-cells: number of cells to encode an interrupt source, shall be 1
+
+The interrupt sources map to the corresponding bits in the interrupt
+registers, i.e.
+- 0 maps to bit 0 of first base address,
+- 1 maps to bit 1 of first base address,
+- 32 maps to bit 0 of second base address, and so on.
+
+Example:
+	intc: interrupt-controller {
+		compatible = "marvell,orion-intc";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		 /* Dove has 64 first level interrupts */
+		reg = <0x20200 0x10>, <0x20210 0x10>;
+	};
+
+* Bridge interrupt controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: shall be "marvell,orion-bridge-intc"
+- reg: base address of bridge interrupt registers starting with CAUSE register
+- interrupts: bridge interrupt of the main interrupt controller
+- interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller
+- #interrupt-cells: number of cells to encode an interrupt source, shall be 1
+
+Optional properties:
+- marvell,#interrupts: number of interrupts provided by bridge interrupt
+      controller, defaults to 32 if not set
+
+Example:
+	bridge_intc: interrupt-controller {
+		compatible = "marvell,orion-bridge-intc";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		reg = <0x20110 0x8>;
+		interrupts = <0>;
+		/* Dove bridge provides 5 interrupts */
+		marvell,#interrupts = <5>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,intc-irqpin.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,intc-irqpin.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1f8b0c507c26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,intc-irqpin.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+DT bindings for the R-/SH-Mobile irqpin controller
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: has to be "renesas,intc-irqpin"
+- #interrupt-cells: has to be <2>: an interrupt index and flags, as defined in
+  interrupts.txt in this directory
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- any properties, listed in interrupts.txt, and any standard resource allocation
+  properties
+- sense-bitfield-width: width of a single sense bitfield in the SENSE register,
+  if different from the default 4 bits
+- control-parent: disable and enable interrupts on the parent interrupt
+  controller, needed for some broken implementations
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/samsung,s3c24xx-irq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/samsung,s3c24xx-irq.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c54c5a9a2a90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/samsung,s3c24xx-irq.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+Samsung S3C24XX Interrupt Controllers
+
+The S3C24XX SoCs contain a custom set of interrupt controllers providing a
+varying number of interrupt sources. The set consists of a main- and sub-
+controller and on newer SoCs even a second main controller.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Compatible property value should be "samsung,s3c2410-irq"
+  for machines before s3c2416 and "samsung,s3c2416-irq" for s3c2416 and later.
+
+- reg: Physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller
+
+- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+  interrupt source. The value shall be 4 and interrupt descriptor shall
+  have the following format:
+      <ctrl_num parent_irq ctrl_irq type>
+
+  ctrl_num contains the controller to use:
+      - 0 ... main controller
+      - 1 ... sub controller
+      - 2 ... second main controller on s3c2416 and s3c2450
+  parent_irq contains the parent bit in the main controller and will be
+             ignored in main controllers
+  ctrl_irq contains the interrupt bit of the controller
+  type contains the trigger type to use
+
+Example:
+
+	interrupt-controller@4a000000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,s3c2410-irq";
+		reg = <0x4a000000 0x100>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells=<4>;
+	};
+
+	[...]
+
+	serial@50000000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,s3c2410-uart";
+		reg = <0x50000000 0x4000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&subintc>;
+		interrupts = <1 28 0 4>, <1 28 1 4>;
+	};
+
+	rtc@57000000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,s3c2410-rtc";
+		reg = <0x57000000 0x100>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+		interrupts = <0 30 0 3>, <0 8 0 3>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sunxi/sun4i-a10.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sunxi/sun4i-a10.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..76b98c834499
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sunxi/sun4i-a10.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+Allwinner A10 (sun4i) interrupt sources
+---------------------------------------
+
+The interrupt sources available for the Allwinner A10 SoC are the
+following one:
+
+0: ENMI
+1: UART0
+2: UART1
+3: UART2
+4: UART3
+5: IR0
+6: IR1
+7: I2C0
+8: I2C1
+9: I2C2
+10: SPI0
+11: SPI1
+12: SPI2
+13: SPDIF
+14: AC97
+15: TS
+16: I2S
+17: UART4
+18: UART5
+19: UART6
+20: UART7
+21: KEYPAD
+22: TIMER0
+23: TIMER1
+24: TIMER2
+25: TIMER3
+26: CAN
+27: DMA
+28: PIO
+29: TOUCH_PANEL
+30: AUDIO_CODEC
+31: LRADC
+32: MMC0
+33: MMC1
+34: MMC2
+35: MMC3
+36: MEMSTICK
+37: NAND
+38: USB0
+39: USB1
+40: USB2
+41: SCR
+42: CSI0
+43: CSI1
+44: LCDCTRL0
+45: LCDCTRL1
+46: MP
+47: DEFEBE0
+48: DEFEBE1
+49: PMU
+50: SPI3
+51: TZASC
+52: PATA
+53: VE
+54: SS
+55: EMAC
+56: SATA
+57: GPS
+58: HDMI
+59: TVE
+60: ACE
+61: TVD
+62: PS2_0
+63: PS2_1
+64: USB3
+65: USB4
+66: PLE_PFM
+67: TIMER4
+68: TIMER5
+69: GPU_GP
+70: GPU_GPMMU
+71: GPU_PP0
+72: GPU_PPMMU0
+73: GPU_PMU
+74: GPU_RSV0
+75: GPU_RSV1
+76: GPU_RSV2
+77: GPU_RSV3
+78: GPU_RSV4
+79: GPU_RSV5
+80: GPU_RSV6
+82: SYNC_TIMER0
+83: SYNC_TIMER1
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sunxi/sun5i-a13.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sunxi/sun5i-a13.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2ec3b5ce1a0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sunxi/sun5i-a13.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+Allwinner A13 (sun5i) interrupt sources
+---------------------------------------
+
+The interrupt sources available for the Allwinner A13 SoC are the
+following one:
+
+0: ENMI
+2: UART1
+4: UART3
+5: IR
+7: I2C0
+8: I2C1
+9: I2C2
+10: SPI0
+11: SPI1
+12: SPI2
+22: TIMER0
+23: TIMER1
+24: TIMER2
+25: TIMER3
+27: DMA
+28: PIO
+29: TOUCH_PANEL
+30: AUDIO_CODEC
+31: LRADC
+32: MMC0
+33: MMC1
+34: MMC2
+37: NAND
+38: USB OTG
+39: USB EHCI
+40: USB OHCI
+42: CSI
+44: LCDCTRL
+47: DEFEBE
+49: PMU
+53: VE
+54: SS
+66: PLE_PFM
+67: TIMER4
+68: TIMER5
+69: GPU_GP
+70: GPU_GPMMU
+71: GPU_PP0
+72: GPU_PPMMU0
+73: GPU_PMU
+74: GPU_RSV0
+75: GPU_RSV1
+76: GPU_RSV2
+77: GPU_RSV3
+78: GPU_RSV4
+79: GPU_RSV5
+80: GPU_RSV6
+82: SYNC_TIMER0
+83: SYNC_TIMER1
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/arm,smmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/arm,smmu.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e34c6cdd8ba8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/arm,smmu.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+* ARM System MMU Architecture Implementation
+
+ARM SoCs may contain an implementation of the ARM System Memory
+Management Unit Architecture, which can be used to provide 1 or 2 stages
+of address translation to bus masters external to the CPU.
+
+The SMMU may also raise interrupts in response to various fault
+conditions.
+
+** System MMU required properties:
+
+- compatible    : Should be one of:
+
+                        "arm,smmu-v1"
+                        "arm,smmu-v2"
+                        "arm,mmu-400"
+                        "arm,mmu-500"
+
+                  depending on the particular implementation and/or the
+                  version of the architecture implemented.
+
+- reg           : Base address and size of the SMMU.
+
+- #global-interrupts : The number of global interrupts exposed by the
+                       device.
+
+- interrupts    : Interrupt list, with the first #global-irqs entries
+                  corresponding to the global interrupts and any
+                  following entries corresponding to context interrupts,
+                  specified in order of their indexing by the SMMU.
+
+                  For SMMUv2 implementations, there must be exactly one
+                  interrupt per context bank. In the case of a single,
+                  combined interrupt, it must be listed multiple times.
+
+- mmu-masters   : A list of phandles to device nodes representing bus
+                  masters for which the SMMU can provide a translation
+                  and their corresponding StreamIDs (see example below).
+                  Each device node linked from this list must have a
+                  "#stream-id-cells" property, indicating the number of
+                  StreamIDs associated with it.
+
+** System MMU optional properties:
+
+- smmu-parent   : When multiple SMMUs are chained together, this
+                  property can be used to provide a phandle to the
+                  parent SMMU (that is the next SMMU on the path going
+                  from the mmu-masters towards memory) node for this
+                  SMMU.
+
+Example:
+
+        smmu {
+                compatible = "arm,smmu-v1";
+                reg = <0xba5e0000 0x10000>;
+                #global-interrupts = <2>;
+                interrupts = <0 32 4>,
+                             <0 33 4>,
+                             <0 34 4>, /* This is the first context interrupt */
+                             <0 35 4>,
+                             <0 36 4>,
+                             <0 37 4>;
+
+                /*
+                 * Two DMA controllers, the first with two StreamIDs (0xd01d
+                 * and 0xd01e) and the second with only one (0xd11c).
+                 */
+                mmu-masters = <&dma0 0xd01d 0xd01e>,
+                              <&dma1 0xd11c>;
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/nvidia,tegra20-gart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/nvidia,tegra20-gart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..099d9362ebc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/nvidia,tegra20-gart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra 20 GART
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "nvidia,tegra20-gart"
+- reg: Two pairs of cells specifying the physical address and size of
+  the memory controller registers and the GART aperture respectively.
+
+Example:
+
+	gart {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-gart";
+		reg = <0x7000f024 0x00000018	/* controller registers */
+		       0x58000000 0x02000000>;	/* GART aperture */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/nvidia,tegra30-smmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/nvidia,tegra30-smmu.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..89fb5434b730
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/nvidia,tegra30-smmu.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra 30 IOMMU H/W, SMMU (System Memory Management Unit)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra30-smmu"
+- reg : Should contain 3 register banks(address and length) for each
+  of the SMMU register blocks.
+- interrupts : Should contain MC General interrupt.
+- nvidia,#asids : # of ASIDs
+- dma-window : IOVA start address and length.
+- nvidia,ahb : phandle to the ahb bus connected to SMMU.
+
+Example:
+	smmu {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra30-smmu";
+		reg = <0x7000f010 0x02c
+		       0x7000f1f0 0x010
+		       0x7000f228 0x05c>;
+		nvidia,#asids = <4>;		/* # of ASIDs */
+		dma-window = <0 0x40000000>;	/* IOVA start & length */
+		nvidia,ahb = <&ahb>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2d88816dd550
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+Common leds properties.
+
+Optional properties for child nodes:
+- label : The label for this LED.  If omitted, the label is
+  taken from the node name (excluding the unit address).
+
+- linux,default-trigger :  This parameter, if present, is a
+    string defining the trigger assigned to the LED.  Current triggers are:
+     "backlight" - LED will act as a back-light, controlled by the framebuffer
+		   system
+     "default-on" - LED will turn on (but for leds-gpio see "default-state"
+		    property in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt)
+     "heartbeat" - LED "double" flashes at a load average based rate
+     "ide-disk" - LED indicates disk activity
+     "timer" - LED flashes at a fixed, configurable rate
+
+Examples:
+
+system-status {
+	label = "Status";
+	linux,default-trigger = "heartbeat";
+	...
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..df1b3080f6b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+LEDs connected to GPIO lines
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "gpio-leds".
+
+Each LED is represented as a sub-node of the gpio-leds device.  Each
+node's name represents the name of the corresponding LED.
+
+LED sub-node properties:
+- gpios :  Should specify the LED's GPIO, see "gpios property" in
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt.  Active low LEDs should be
+  indicated using flags in the GPIO specifier.
+- label :  (optional)
+  see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+- linux,default-trigger :  (optional)
+  see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+- default-state:  (optional) The initial state of the LED.  Valid
+  values are "on", "off", and "keep".  If the LED is already on or off
+  and the default-state property is set the to same value, then no
+  glitch should be produced where the LED momentarily turns off (or
+  on).  The "keep" setting will keep the LED at whatever its current
+  state is, without producing a glitch.  The default is off if this
+  property is not present.
+
+Examples:
+
+leds {
+	compatible = "gpio-leds";
+	hdd {
+		label = "IDE Activity";
+		gpios = <&mcu_pio 0 1>; /* Active low */
+		linux,default-trigger = "ide-disk";
+	};
+
+	fault {
+		gpios = <&mcu_pio 1 0>;
+		/* Keep LED on if BIOS detected hardware fault */
+		default-state = "keep";
+	};
+};
+
+run-control {
+	compatible = "gpio-leds";
+	red {
+		gpios = <&mpc8572 6 0>;
+		default-state = "off";
+	};
+	green {
+		gpios = <&mpc8572 7 0>;
+		default-state = "on";
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a61727f9a6d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+Binding for TI/National Semiconductor LP55xx Led Drivers
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "national,lp5521" or "national,lp5523" or "ti,lp5562" or "ti,lp8501"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+- clock-mode: Input clock mode, (0: automode, 1: internal, 2: external)
+
+Each child has own specific current settings
+- led-cur: Current setting at each led channel (mA x10, 0 if led is not connected)
+- max-cur: Maximun current at each led channel.
+
+Optional properties:
+- label: Used for naming LEDs
+- pwr-sel: LP8501 specific property. Power selection for output channels.
+         0: D1~9 are connected to VDD
+         1: D1~6 with VDD, D7~9 with VOUT
+         2: D1~6 with VOUT, D7~9 with VDD
+         3: D1~9 are connected to VOUT
+
+Alternatively, each child can have specific channel name
+- chan-name: Name of each channel name
+
+example 1) LP5521
+3 LED channels, external clock used. Channel names are 'lp5521_pri:channel0',
+'lp5521_pri:channel1' and 'lp5521_pri:channel2'
+
+lp5521@32 {
+	compatible = "national,lp5521";
+	reg = <0x32>;
+	label = "lp5521_pri";
+	clock-mode = /bits/ 8 <2>;
+
+	chan0 {
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x2f>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x5f>;
+	};
+
+	chan1 {
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x2f>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x5f>;
+	};
+
+	chan2 {
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x2f>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x5f>;
+	};
+};
+
+example 2) LP5523
+9 LED channels with specific name. Internal clock used.
+The I2C slave address is configurable with ASEL1 and ASEL0 pins.
+Available addresses are 32/33/34/35h.
+
+ASEL1    ASEL0    Address
+-------------------------
+ GND      GND       32h
+ GND      VEN       33h
+ VEN      GND       34h
+ VEN      VEN       35h
+
+lp5523@32 {
+	compatible = "national,lp5523";
+	reg = <0x32>;
+	clock-mode = /bits/ 8 <1>;
+
+	chan0 {
+		chan-name = "d1";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan1 {
+		chan-name = "d2";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan2 {
+		chan-name = "d3";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan3 {
+		chan-name = "d4";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan4 {
+		chan-name = "d5";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan5 {
+		chan-name = "d6";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan6 {
+		chan-name = "d7";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan7 {
+		chan-name = "d8";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan8 {
+		chan-name = "d9";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+};
+
+example 3) LP5562
+4 channels are defined.
+
+lp5562@30 {
+	compatible = "ti,lp5562";
+	reg = <0x30>;
+	clock-mode = /bits/8 <2>;
+
+	chan0 {
+		chan-name = "R";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x60>;
+	};
+
+	chan1 {
+		chan-name = "G";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x60>;
+	};
+
+	chan2 {
+		chan-name = "B";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x60>;
+	};
+
+	chan3 {
+		chan-name = "W";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x60>;
+	};
+};
+
+example 4) LP8501
+9 channels are defined. The 'pwr-sel' is LP8501 specific property.
+Others are same as LP5523.
+
+lp8501@32 {
+	compatible = "ti,lp8501";
+	reg = <0x32>;
+	clock-mode = /bits/ 8 <2>;
+	pwr-sel = /bits/ 8 <3>;	/* D1~9 connected to VOUT */
+
+	chan0 {
+		chan-name = "d1";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan1 {
+		chan-name = "d2";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan2 {
+		chan-name = "d3";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan3 {
+		chan-name = "d4";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan4 {
+		chan-name = "d5";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan5 {
+		chan-name = "d6";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan6 {
+		chan-name = "d7";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan7 {
+		chan-name = "d8";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+
+	chan8 {
+		chan-name = "d9";
+		led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+		max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-ns2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-ns2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..aef3aca34d2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-ns2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+Binding for dual-GPIO LED found on Network Space v2 (and parents).
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "lacie,ns2-leds".
+
+Each LED is represented as a sub-node of the ns2-leds device.
+
+Required sub-node properties:
+- cmd-gpio: Command LED GPIO. See OF device-tree GPIO specification.
+- slow-gpio: Slow LED GPIO. See OF device-tree GPIO specification.
+
+Optional sub-node properties:
+- label: Name for this LED. If omitted, the label is taken from the node name.
+- linux,default-trigger: Trigger assigned to the LED.
+
+Example:
+
+ns2-leds {
+	compatible = "lacie,ns2-leds";
+
+	blue-sata {
+		label = "ns2:blue:sata";
+		slow-gpio = <&gpio0 29 0>;
+		cmd-gpio = <&gpio0 30 0>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7297107cf832
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+LED connected to PWM
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "pwm-leds".
+
+Each LED is represented as a sub-node of the pwm-leds device.  Each
+node's name represents the name of the corresponding LED.
+
+LED sub-node properties:
+- pwms : PWM property to point to the PWM device (phandle)/port (id) and to
+  specify the period time to be used: <&phandle id period_ns>;
+- pwm-names : (optional) Name to be used by the PWM subsystem for the PWM device
+  For the pwms and pwm-names property please refer to:
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm.txt
+- max-brightness : Maximum brightness possible for the LED
+- label :  (optional)
+  see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+- linux,default-trigger :  (optional)
+  see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+
+Example:
+
+twl_pwm: pwm {
+	/* provides two PWMs (id 0, 1 for PWM1 and PWM2) */
+	compatible = "ti,twl6030-pwm";
+	#pwm-cells = <2>;
+};
+
+twl_pwmled: pwmled {
+	/* provides one PWM (id 0 for Charing indicator LED) */
+	compatible = "ti,twl6030-pwmled";
+	#pwm-cells = <2>;
+};
+
+pwmleds {
+	compatible = "pwm-leds";
+	kpad {
+		label = "omap4::keypad";
+		pwms = <&twl_pwm 0 7812500>;
+		max-brightness = <127>;
+	};
+
+	charging {
+		label = "omap4:green:chrg";
+		pwms = <&twl_pwmled 0 7812500>;
+		max-brightness = <255>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/pca963x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/pca963x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..aece3eac1b63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/pca963x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+LEDs connected to pca9632, pca9633 or pca9634
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be : "nxp,pca9632", "nxp,pca9633" or "nxp,pca9634"
+
+Optional properties:
+- nxp,totem-pole : use totem pole (push-pull) instead of default open-drain
+- nxp,hw-blink : use hardware blinking instead of software blinking
+
+Each led is represented as a sub-node of the nxp,pca963x device.
+
+LED sub-node properties:
+- label : (optional) see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+- reg : number of LED line (could be from 0 to 3  in pca9632 or pca9633
+		or 0 to 7 in pca9634)
+- linux,default-trigger : (optional)
+   see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+
+Examples:
+
+pca9632: pca9632 {
+	compatible = "nxp,pca9632";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	reg = <0x62>;
+
+	red@0 {
+		label = "red";
+		reg = <0>;
+		linux,default-trigger = "none";
+	};
+	green@1 {
+		label = "green";
+		reg = <1>;
+		linux,default-trigger = "none";
+	};
+	blue@2 {
+		label = "blue";
+		reg = <2>;
+		linux,default-trigger = "none";
+	};
+	unused@3 {
+		label = "unused";
+		reg = <3>;
+		linux,default-trigger = "none";
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/tca6507.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/tca6507.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..80ff3dfb1f32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/tca6507.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+LEDs connected to tca6507
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be : "ti,tca6507".
+
+Each led is represented as a sub-node of the ti,tca6507 device.
+
+LED sub-node properties:
+- label : (optional) see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+- reg : number of LED line (could be from 0 to 6)
+- linux,default-trigger : (optional)
+   see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt
+
+Examples:
+
+tca6507@45 {
+	compatible = "ti,tca6507";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	reg = <0x45>;
+
+	led0: red-aux@0 {
+		label = "red:aux";
+		reg = <0x0>;
+	};
+
+	led1: green-aux@1 {
+		label = "green:aux";
+		reg = <0x5>;
+		linux,default-trigger = "default-on";
+	};
+};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/lpddr2/lpddr2-timings.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/lpddr2/lpddr2-timings.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9ceb19e0c7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/lpddr2/lpddr2-timings.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+* AC timing parameters of LPDDR2(JESD209-2) memories for a given speed-bin
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "jedec,lpddr2-timings"
+- min-freq : minimum DDR clock frequency for the speed-bin. Type is <u32>
+- max-freq : maximum DDR clock frequency for the speed-bin. Type is <u32>
+
+Optional properties:
+
+The following properties represent AC timing parameters from the memory
+data-sheet of the device for a given speed-bin. All these properties are
+of type <u32> and the default unit is ps (pico seconds). Parameters with
+a different unit have a suffix indicating the unit such as 'tRAS-max-ns'
+- tRCD
+- tWR
+- tRAS-min
+- tRRD
+- tWTR
+- tXP
+- tRTP
+- tDQSCK-max
+- tFAW
+- tZQCS
+- tZQinit
+- tRPab
+- tZQCL
+- tCKESR
+- tRAS-max-ns
+- tDQSCK-max-derated
+
+Example:
+
+timings_elpida_ECB240ABACN_400mhz: lpddr2-timings@0 {
+	compatible	= "jedec,lpddr2-timings";
+	min-freq	= <10000000>;
+	max-freq	= <400000000>;
+	tRPab		= <21000>;
+	tRCD		= <18000>;
+	tWR		= <15000>;
+	tRAS-min	= <42000>;
+	tRRD		= <10000>;
+	tWTR		= <7500>;
+	tXP		= <7500>;
+	tRTP		= <7500>;
+	tCKESR		= <15000>;
+	tDQSCK-max	= <5500>;
+	tFAW		= <50000>;
+	tZQCS		= <90000>;
+	tZQCL		= <360000>;
+	tZQinit		= <1000000>;
+	tRAS-max-ns	= <70000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/lpddr2/lpddr2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/lpddr2/lpddr2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..58354a075e13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/lpddr2/lpddr2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+* LPDDR2 SDRAM memories compliant to JEDEC JESD209-2
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be one of - "jedec,lpddr2-nvm", "jedec,lpddr2-s2",
+  "jedec,lpddr2-s4"
+
+  "ti,jedec-lpddr2-s2" should be listed if the memory part is LPDDR2-S2 type
+
+  "ti,jedec-lpddr2-s4" should be listed if the memory part is LPDDR2-S4 type
+
+  "ti,jedec-lpddr2-nvm" should be listed if the memory part is LPDDR2-NVM type
+
+- density  : <u32> representing density in Mb (Mega bits)
+
+- io-width : <u32> representing bus width. Possible values are 8, 16, and 32
+
+Optional properties:
+
+The following optional properties represent the minimum value of some AC
+timing parameters of the DDR device in terms of number of clock cycles.
+These values shall be obtained from the device data-sheet.
+- tRRD-min-tck
+- tWTR-min-tck
+- tXP-min-tck
+- tRTP-min-tck
+- tCKE-min-tck
+- tRPab-min-tck
+- tRCD-min-tck
+- tWR-min-tck
+- tRASmin-min-tck
+- tCKESR-min-tck
+- tFAW-min-tck
+
+Child nodes:
+- The lpddr2 node may have one or more child nodes of type "lpddr2-timings".
+  "lpddr2-timings" provides AC timing parameters of the device for
+  a given speed-bin. The user may provide the timings for as many
+  speed-bins as is required. Please see Documentation/devicetree/
+  bindings/lpddr2/lpddr2-timings.txt for more information on "lpddr2-timings"
+
+Example:
+
+elpida_ECB240ABACN : lpddr2 {
+	compatible	= "Elpida,ECB240ABACN","jedec,lpddr2-s4";
+	density		= <2048>;
+	io-width	= <32>;
+
+	tRPab-min-tck	= <3>;
+	tRCD-min-tck	= <3>;
+	tWR-min-tck	= <3>;
+	tRASmin-min-tck	= <3>;
+	tRRD-min-tck	= <2>;
+	tWTR-min-tck	= <2>;
+	tXP-min-tck	= <2>;
+	tRTP-min-tck	= <2>;
+	tCKE-min-tck	= <3>;
+	tCKESR-min-tck	= <3>;
+	tFAW-min-tck	= <8>;
+
+	timings_elpida_ECB240ABACN_400mhz: lpddr2-timings@0 {
+		compatible	= "jedec,lpddr2-timings";
+		min-freq	= <10000000>;
+		max-freq	= <400000000>;
+		tRPab		= <21000>;
+		tRCD		= <18000>;
+		tWR		= <15000>;
+		tRAS-min	= <42000>;
+		tRRD		= <10000>;
+		tWTR		= <7500>;
+		tXP		= <7500>;
+		tRTP		= <7500>;
+		tCKESR		= <15000>;
+		tDQSCK-max	= <5500>;
+		tFAW		= <50000>;
+		tZQCS		= <90000>;
+		tZQCL		= <360000>;
+		tZQinit		= <1000000>;
+		tRAS-max-ns	= <70000>;
+	};
+
+	timings_elpida_ECB240ABACN_200mhz: lpddr2-timings@1 {
+		compatible	= "jedec,lpddr2-timings";
+		min-freq	= <10000000>;
+		max-freq	= <200000000>;
+		tRPab		= <21000>;
+		tRCD		= <18000>;
+		tWR		= <15000>;
+		tRAS-min	= <42000>;
+		tRRD		= <10000>;
+		tWTR		= <10000>;
+		tXP		= <7500>;
+		tRTP		= <7500>;
+		tCKESR		= <15000>;
+		tDQSCK-max	= <5500>;
+		tFAW		= <50000>;
+		tZQCS		= <90000>;
+		tZQCL		= <360000>;
+		tZQinit		= <1000000>;
+		tRAS-max-ns	= <70000>;
+	};
+
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/marvell.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/marvell.txt
index f1533d91953a..f7a0da6b4022 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/marvell.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/marvell.txt
@@ -115,6 +115,9 @@ prefixed with the string "marvell,", for Marvell Technology Group Ltd.
      - compatible : "marvell,mv64360-eth-block"
      - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this block
 
+   Optional properties:
+     - clocks : Phandle to the clock control device and gate bit
+
    Example Discovery Ethernet block node:
      ethernet-block@2000 {
 	     #address-cells = <1>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/coda.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/coda.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2865d04e4030
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/coda.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+Chips&Media Coda multi-standard codec IP
+========================================
+
+Coda codec IPs are present in i.MX SoCs in various versions,
+called VPU (Video Processing Unit).
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "fsl,<chip>-src" for i.MX SoCs:
+  (a) "fsl,imx27-vpu" for CodaDx6 present in i.MX27
+  (b) "fsl,imx53-vpu" for CODA7541 present in i.MX53
+  (c) "fsl,imx6q-vpu" for CODA960 present in i.MX6q
+- reg: should be register base and length as documented in the
+  SoC reference manual
+- interrupts : Should contain the VPU interrupt. For CODA960,
+  a second interrupt is needed for the MJPEG unit.
+- clocks : Should contain the ahb and per clocks, in the order
+  determined by the clock-names property.
+- clock-names : Should be "ahb", "per"
+- iram : phandle pointing to the SRAM device node
+
+Example:
+
+vpu: vpu@63ff4000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx53-vpu";
+	reg = <0x63ff4000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <9>;
+	clocks = <&clks 63>, <&clks 63>;
+	clock-names = "ahb", "per";
+	iram = <&ocram>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/exynos-fimc-lite.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/exynos-fimc-lite.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0bf6fb7fbeab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/exynos-fimc-lite.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+Exynos4x12/Exynos5 SoC series camera host interface (FIMC-LITE)
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible	: should be one of:
+		  "samsung,exynos4212-fimc-lite" for Exynos4212/4412 SoCs,
+		  "samsung,exynos5250-fimc-lite" for Exynos5250 compatible
+		   devices;
+- reg		: physical base address and size of the device memory mapped
+		  registers;
+- interrupts	: should contain FIMC-LITE interrupt;
+- clocks	: FIMC LITE gate clock should be specified in this property.
+- clock-names	: should contain "flite" entry.
+
+Each FIMC device should have an alias in the aliases node, in the form of
+fimc-lite<n>, where <n> is an integer specifying the IP block instance.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/exynos4-fimc-is.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/exynos4-fimc-is.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..55c9ad6f9599
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/exynos4-fimc-is.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+Exynos4x12 SoC series Imaging Subsystem (FIMC-IS)
+
+The FIMC-IS is a subsystem for processing image signal from an image sensor.
+The Exynos4x12 SoC series FIMC-IS V1.5 comprises of a dedicated ARM Cortex-A5
+processor, ISP, DRC and FD IP blocks and peripheral devices such as UART, I2C
+and SPI bus controllers, PWM and ADC.
+
+fimc-is node
+------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible	: should be "samsung,exynos4212-fimc-is" for Exynos4212 and
+		  Exynos4412 SoCs;
+- reg		: physical base address and length of the registers set;
+- interrupts	: must contain two FIMC-IS interrupts, in order: ISP0, ISP1;
+- clocks	: list of clock specifiers, corresponding to entries in
+		  clock-names property;
+- clock-names	: must contain "ppmuispx", "ppmuispx", "lite0", "lite1"
+		  "mpll", "sysreg", "isp", "drc", "fd", "mcuisp", "uart",
+		  "ispdiv0", "ispdiv1", "mcuispdiv0", "mcuispdiv1", "aclk200",
+		  "div_aclk200", "aclk400mcuisp", "div_aclk400mcuisp" entries,
+		  matching entries in the clocks property.
+pmu subnode
+-----------
+
+Required properties:
+ - reg : must contain PMU physical base address and size of the register set.
+
+The following are the FIMC-IS peripheral device nodes and can be specified
+either standalone or as the fimc-is node child nodes.
+
+i2c-isp (ISP I2C bus controller) nodes
+------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible	: should be "samsung,exynos4212-i2c-isp" for Exynos4212 and
+		  Exynos4412 SoCs;
+- reg		: physical base address and length of the registers set;
+- clocks	: must contain gate clock specifier for this controller;
+- clock-names	: must contain "i2c_isp" entry.
+
+For the above nodes it is required to specify a pinctrl state named "default",
+according to the pinctrl bindings defined in ../pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt.
+
+Device tree nodes of the image sensors' controlled directly by the FIMC-IS
+firmware must be child nodes of their corresponding ISP I2C bus controller node.
+The data link of these image sensors must be specified using the common video
+interfaces bindings, defined in video-interfaces.txt.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/exynos5-gsc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/exynos5-gsc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0604d42f38d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/exynos5-gsc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+* Samsung Exynos5 G-Scaler device
+
+G-Scaler is used for scaling and color space conversion on EXYNOS5 SoCs.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "samsung,exynos5-gsc"
+- reg: should contain G-Scaler physical address location and length.
+- interrupts: should contain G-Scaler interrupt number
+
+Example:
+
+gsc_0:  gsc@0x13e00000 {
+	compatible = "samsung,exynos5-gsc";
+	reg = <0x13e00000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <0 85 0>;
+};
+
+Aliases:
+Each G-Scaler node should have a numbered alias in the aliases node,
+in the form of gscN, N = 0...3. G-Scaler driver uses these aliases
+to retrieve the device IDs using "of_alias_get_id()" call.
+
+Example:
+
+aliases {
+	gsc0 =&gsc_0;
+	gsc1 =&gsc_1;
+	gsc2 =&gsc_2;
+	gsc3 =&gsc_3;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/gpio-ir-receiver.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/gpio-ir-receiver.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..56e726ef4bf2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/gpio-ir-receiver.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for GPIO IR receiver
+
+Required properties:
+	- compatible: should be "gpio-ir-receiver".
+	- gpios: specifies GPIO used for IR signal reception.
+
+Optional properties:
+	- linux,rc-map-name: Linux specific remote control map name.
+
+Example node:
+
+	ir: ir-receiver {
+		compatible = "gpio-ir-receiver";
+		gpios = <&gpio0 19 1>;
+		linux,rc-map-name = "rc-rc6-mce";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/adv7343.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/adv7343.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5653bc2428b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/adv7343.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+* Analog Devices adv7343 video encoder
+
+The ADV7343 are high speed, digital-to-analog video encoders in a 64-lead LQFP
+package. Six high speed, 3.3 V, 11-bit video DACs provide support for composite
+(CVBS), S-Video (Y-C), and component (YPrPb/RGB) analog outputs in standard
+definition (SD), enhanced definition (ED), or high definition (HD) video
+formats.
+
+Required Properties :
+- compatible: Must be "adi,adv7343"
+
+Optional Properties :
+- adi,power-mode-sleep-mode: on enable the current consumption is reduced to
+			      micro ampere level. All DACs and the internal PLL
+			      circuit are disabled.
+- adi,power-mode-pll-ctrl: PLL and oversampling control. This control allows
+			   internal PLL 1 circuit to be powered down and the
+			   oversampling to be switched off.
+- ad,adv7343-power-mode-dac: array configuring the power on/off DAC's 1..6,
+			      0 = OFF and 1 = ON, Default value when this
+			      property is not specified is <0 0 0 0 0 0>.
+- ad,adv7343-sd-config-dac-out: array configure SD DAC Output's 1 and 2, 0 = OFF
+				 and 1 = ON, Default value when this property is
+				 not specified is <0 0>.
+
+Example:
+
+i2c0@1c22000 {
+	...
+	...
+
+	adv7343@2a {
+		compatible = "adi,adv7343";
+		reg = <0x2a>;
+
+		port {
+			adv7343_1: endpoint {
+					adi,power-mode-sleep-mode;
+					adi,power-mode-pll-ctrl;
+					/* Use DAC1..3, DAC6 */
+					adi,dac-enable = <1 1 1 0 0 1>;
+					/* Use SD DAC output 1 */
+					adi,sd-dac-enable = <1 0>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	...
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/mt9p031.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/mt9p031.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cb60443ff78f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/mt9p031.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+* Aptina 1/2.5-Inch 5Mp CMOS Digital Image Sensor
+
+The Aptina MT9P031 is a 1/2.5-inch CMOS active pixel digital image sensor with
+an active array size of 2592H x 1944V. It is programmable through a simple
+two-wire serial interface.
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible: value should be either one among the following
+	(a) "aptina,mt9p031" for mt9p031 sensor
+	(b) "aptina,mt9p031m" for mt9p031m sensor
+
+- input-clock-frequency: Input clock frequency.
+
+- pixel-clock-frequency: Pixel clock frequency.
+
+Optional Properties:
+- reset-gpios: Chip reset GPIO
+
+For further reading on port node refer to
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt.
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c0@1c22000 {
+		...
+		...
+		mt9p031@5d {
+			compatible = "aptina,mt9p031";
+			reg = <0x5d>;
+			reset-gpios = <&gpio3 30 0>;
+
+			port {
+				mt9p031_1: endpoint {
+					input-clock-frequency = <6000000>;
+					pixel-clock-frequency = <96000000>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+		...
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ths8200.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ths8200.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..285f6ae7dfa9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ths8200.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+* Texas Instruments THS8200 video encoder
+
+The ths8200 device is a digital to analog converter used in DVD players, video
+recorders, set-top boxes.
+
+Required Properties :
+- compatible : value must be "ti,ths8200"
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c0@1c22000 {
+		...
+		...
+		ths8200@5c {
+			compatible = "ti,ths8200";
+			reg = <0x5c>;
+		};
+		...
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/tvp514x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/tvp514x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..46752cc71f2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/tvp514x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+* Texas Instruments TVP514x video decoder
+
+The TVP5146/TVP5146m2/TVP5147/TVP5147m1 device is high quality, single-chip
+digital video decoder that digitizes and decodes all popular baseband analog
+video formats into digital video component. The tvp514x decoder supports analog-
+to-digital (A/D) conversion of component RGB and YPbPr signals as well as A/D
+conversion and decoding of NTSC, PAL and SECAM composite and S-video into
+component YCbCr.
+
+Required Properties :
+- compatible : value should be either one among the following
+	(a) "ti,tvp5146" for tvp5146 decoder.
+	(b) "ti,tvp5146m2" for tvp5146m2 decoder.
+	(c) "ti,tvp5147" for tvp5147 decoder.
+	(d) "ti,tvp5147m1" for tvp5147m1 decoder.
+
+- hsync-active: HSYNC Polarity configuration for endpoint.
+
+- vsync-active: VSYNC Polarity configuration for endpoint.
+
+- pclk-sample: Clock polarity of the endpoint.
+
+For further reading on port node refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/
+media/video-interfaces.txt.
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c0@1c22000 {
+		...
+		...
+		tvp514x@5c {
+			compatible = "ti,tvp5146";
+			reg = <0x5c>;
+
+			port {
+				tvp514x_1: endpoint {
+					hsync-active = <1>;
+					vsync-active = <1>;
+					pclk-sample = <0>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+		...
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/tvp7002.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/tvp7002.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5f28b5d9abcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/tvp7002.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+* Texas Instruments TV7002 video decoder
+
+The TVP7002 device supports digitizing of video and graphics signal in RGB and
+YPbPr color space.
+
+Required Properties :
+- compatible : Must be "ti,tvp7002"
+
+Optional Properties:
+- hsync-active: HSYNC Polarity configuration for the bus. Default value when
+  this property is not specified is <0>.
+
+- vsync-active: VSYNC Polarity configuration for the bus. Default value when
+  this property is not specified is <0>.
+
+- pclk-sample: Clock polarity of the bus. Default value when this property is
+  not specified is <0>.
+
+- sync-on-green-active: Active state of Sync-on-green signal property of the
+  endpoint.
+  0 = Normal Operation (Active Low, Default)
+  1 = Inverted operation
+
+- field-even-active: Active-high Field ID output polarity control of the bus.
+  Under normal operation, the field ID output is set to logic 1 for an odd field
+  (field 1) and set to logic 0 for an even field (field 0).
+  0 = Normal Operation (Active Low, Default)
+  1 = FID output polarity inverted
+
+For further reading of port node refer Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/
+video-interfaces.txt.
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c0@1c22000 {
+		...
+		...
+		tvp7002@5c {
+			compatible = "ti,tvp7002";
+			reg = <0x5c>;
+
+			port {
+				tvp7002_1: endpoint {
+					hsync-active = <1>;
+					vsync-active = <1>;
+					pclk-sample = <0>;
+					sync-on-green-active = <1>;
+					field-even-active = <0>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+		...
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/s5p-mfc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/s5p-mfc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f4181680831b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/s5p-mfc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+* Samsung Multi Format Codec (MFC)
+
+Multi Format Codec (MFC) is the IP present in Samsung SoCs which
+supports high resolution decoding and encoding functionalities.
+The MFC device driver is a v4l2 driver which can encode/decode
+video raw/elementary streams and has support for all popular
+video codecs.
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible : value should be either one among the following
+	(a) "samsung,mfc-v5" for MFC v5 present in Exynos4 SoCs
+	(b) "samsung,mfc-v6" for MFC v6 present in Exynos5 SoCs
+	(b) "samsung,mfc-v7" for MFC v7 present in Exynos5420 SoC
+
+  - reg : Physical base address of the IP registers and length of memory
+	  mapped region.
+
+  - interrupts : MFC interrupt number to the CPU.
+  - clocks : from common clock binding: handle to mfc clock.
+  - clock-names : from common clock binding: must contain "mfc",
+		  corresponding to entry in the clocks property.
+
+  - samsung,mfc-r : Base address of the first memory bank used by MFC
+		    for DMA contiguous memory allocation and its size.
+
+  - samsung,mfc-l : Base address of the second memory bank used by MFC
+		    for DMA contiguous memory allocation and its size.
+
+Optional properties:
+  - samsung,power-domain : power-domain property defined with a phandle
+			   to respective power domain.
+
+Example:
+SoC specific DT entry:
+
+mfc: codec@13400000 {
+	compatible = "samsung,mfc-v5";
+	reg = <0x13400000 0x10000>;
+	interrupts = <0 94 0>;
+	samsung,power-domain = <&pd_mfc>;
+	clocks = <&clock 273>;
+	clock-names = "mfc";
+};
+
+Board specific DT entry:
+
+codec@13400000 {
+	samsung,mfc-r = <0x43000000 0x800000>;
+	samsung,mfc-l = <0x51000000 0x800000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/samsung-fimc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/samsung-fimc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..96312f6c4c26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/samsung-fimc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+Samsung S5P/EXYNOS SoC Camera Subsystem (FIMC)
+----------------------------------------------
+
+The S5P/Exynos SoC Camera subsystem comprises of multiple sub-devices
+represented by separate device tree nodes. Currently this includes: FIMC (in
+the S5P SoCs series known as CAMIF), MIPI CSIS, FIMC-LITE and FIMC-IS (ISP).
+
+The sub-subdevices are defined as child nodes of the common 'camera' node which
+also includes common properties of the whole subsystem not really specific to
+any single sub-device, like common camera port pins or the CAMCLK clock outputs
+for external image sensors attached to an SoC.
+
+Common 'camera' node
+--------------------
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible	: must be "samsung,fimc", "simple-bus"
+- clocks	: list of clock specifiers, corresponding to entries in
+		  the clock-names property;
+- clock-names	: must contain "sclk_cam0", "sclk_cam1", "pxl_async0",
+		  "pxl_async1" entries, matching entries in the clocks property.
+
+The pinctrl bindings defined in ../pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt must be used
+to define a required pinctrl state named "default" and optional pinctrl states:
+"idle", "active-a", active-b". These optional states can be used to switch the
+camera port pinmux at runtime. The "idle" state should configure both the camera
+ports A and B into high impedance state, especially the CAMCLK clock output
+should be inactive. For the "active-a" state the camera port A must be activated
+and the port B deactivated and for the state "active-b" it should be the other
+way around.
+
+The 'camera' node must include at least one 'fimc' child node.
+
+'fimc' device nodes
+-------------------
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: "samsung,s5pv210-fimc" for S5PV210, "samsung,exynos4210-fimc"
+  for Exynos4210 and "samsung,exynos4212-fimc" for Exynos4x12 SoCs;
+- reg: physical base address and length of the registers set for the device;
+- interrupts: should contain FIMC interrupt;
+- clocks: list of clock specifiers, must contain an entry for each required
+  entry in clock-names;
+- clock-names: must contain "fimc", "sclk_fimc" entries.
+- samsung,pix-limits: an array of maximum supported image sizes in pixels, for
+  details refer to Table 2-1 in the S5PV210 SoC User Manual; The meaning of
+  each cell is as follows:
+  0 - scaler input horizontal size,
+  1 - input horizontal size for the scaler bypassed,
+  2 - REAL_WIDTH without input rotation,
+  3 - REAL_HEIGHT with input rotation,
+- samsung,sysreg: a phandle to the SYSREG node.
+
+Each FIMC device should have an alias in the aliases node, in the form of
+fimc<n>, where <n> is an integer specifying the IP block instance.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- clock-frequency: maximum FIMC local clock (LCLK) frequency;
+- samsung,min-pix-sizes: an array specyfing minimum image size in pixels at
+  the FIMC input and output DMA, in the first and second cell respectively.
+  Default value when this property is not present is <16 16>;
+- samsung,min-pix-alignment: minimum supported image height alignment (first
+  cell) and the horizontal image offset (second cell). The values are in pixels
+  and default to <2 1> when this property is not present;
+- samsung,mainscaler-ext: a boolean property indicating whether the FIMC IP
+  supports extended image size and has CIEXTEN register;
+- samsung,rotators: a bitmask specifying whether this IP has the input and
+  the output rotator. Bits 4 and 0 correspond to input and output rotator
+  respectively. If a rotator is present its corresponding bit should be set.
+  Default value when this property is not specified is 0x11.
+- samsung,cam-if: a bolean property indicating whether the IP block includes
+  the camera input interface.
+- samsung,isp-wb: this property must be present if the IP block has the ISP
+  writeback input.
+- samsung,lcd-wb: this property must be present if the IP block has the LCD
+  writeback input.
+
+
+'parallel-ports' node
+---------------------
+
+This node should contain child 'port' nodes specifying active parallel video
+input ports. It includes camera A and camera B inputs. 'reg' property in the
+port nodes specifies data input - 0, 1 indicates input A, B respectively.
+
+Optional properties
+
+- samsung,camclk-out : specifies clock output for remote sensor,
+		       0 - CAM_A_CLKOUT, 1 - CAM_B_CLKOUT;
+
+Image sensor nodes
+------------------
+
+The sensor device nodes should be added to their control bus controller (e.g.
+I2C0) nodes and linked to a port node in the csis or the parallel-ports node,
+using the common video interfaces bindings, defined in video-interfaces.txt.
+The implementation of this bindings requires clock-frequency property to be
+present in the sensor device nodes.
+
+Example:
+
+	aliases {
+		fimc0 = &fimc_0;
+	};
+
+	/* Parallel bus IF sensor */
+	i2c_0: i2c@13860000 {
+		s5k6aa: sensor@3c {
+			compatible = "samsung,s5k6aafx";
+			reg = <0x3c>;
+			vddio-supply = <...>;
+
+			clock-frequency = <24000000>;
+			clocks = <...>;
+			clock-names = "mclk";
+
+			port {
+				s5k6aa_ep: endpoint {
+					remote-endpoint = <&fimc0_ep>;
+					bus-width = <8>;
+					hsync-active = <0>;
+					vsync-active = <1>;
+					pclk-sample = <1>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+
+		/* MIPI CSI-2 bus IF sensor */
+		s5c73m3: sensor@0x1a {
+			compatible = "samsung,s5c73m3";
+			reg = <0x1a>;
+			vddio-supply = <...>;
+
+			clock-frequency = <24000000>;
+			clocks = <...>;
+			clock-names = "mclk";
+
+			port {
+				s5c73m3_1: endpoint {
+					data-lanes = <1 2 3 4>;
+					remote-endpoint = <&csis0_ep>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+	camera {
+		compatible = "samsung,fimc", "simple-bus";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		status = "okay";
+
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&cam_port_a_clk_active>;
+
+		/* parallel camera ports */
+		parallel-ports {
+			/* camera A input */
+			port@0 {
+				reg = <0>;
+				fimc0_ep: endpoint {
+					remote-endpoint = <&s5k6aa_ep>;
+					bus-width = <8>;
+					hsync-active = <0>;
+					vsync-active = <1>;
+					pclk-sample = <1>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+
+		fimc_0: fimc@11800000 {
+			compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-fimc";
+			reg = <0x11800000 0x1000>;
+			interrupts = <0 85 0>;
+			status = "okay";
+		};
+
+		csis_0: csis@11880000 {
+			compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-csis";
+			reg = <0x11880000 0x1000>;
+			interrupts = <0 78 0>;
+			/* camera C input */
+			port@3 {
+				reg = <3>;
+				csis0_ep: endpoint {
+					remote-endpoint = <&s5c73m3_ep>;
+					data-lanes = <1 2 3 4>;
+					samsung,csis-hs-settle = <12>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+The MIPI-CSIS device binding is defined in samsung-mipi-csis.txt.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/samsung-mipi-csis.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/samsung-mipi-csis.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..be45f0b1a449
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/samsung-mipi-csis.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+Samsung S5P/EXYNOS SoC series MIPI CSI-2 receiver (MIPI CSIS)
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible	  : "samsung,s5pv210-csis" for S5PV210 (S5PC110),
+		    "samsung,exynos4210-csis" for Exynos4210 (S5PC210),
+		    "samsung,exynos4212-csis" for Exynos4212/Exynos4412,
+		    "samsung,exynos5250-csis" for Exynos5250;
+- reg		  : offset and length of the register set for the device;
+- interrupts      : should contain MIPI CSIS interrupt; the format of the
+		    interrupt specifier depends on the interrupt controller;
+- bus-width	  : maximum number of data lanes supported (SoC specific);
+- vddio-supply    : MIPI CSIS I/O and PLL voltage supply (e.g. 1.8V);
+- vddcore-supply  : MIPI CSIS Core voltage supply (e.g. 1.1V);
+- clocks	  : list of clock specifiers, corresponding to entries in
+		    clock-names property;
+- clock-names	  : must contain "csis", "sclk_csis" entries, matching entries
+		    in the clocks property.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- clock-frequency : The IP's main (system bus) clock frequency in Hz, default
+		    value when this property is not specified is 166 MHz;
+- samsung,csis-wclk : CSI-2 wrapper clock selection. If this property is present
+		    external clock from CMU will be used, or the bus clock if
+		    if it's not specified.
+
+The device node should contain one 'port' child node with one child 'endpoint'
+node, according to the bindings defined in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/
+media/video-interfaces.txt. The following are properties specific to those nodes.
+
+port node
+---------
+
+- reg		  : (required) must be 3 for camera C input (CSIS0) or 4 for
+		    camera D input (CSIS1);
+
+endpoint node
+-------------
+
+- data-lanes	  : (required) an array specifying active physical MIPI-CSI2
+		    data input lanes and their mapping to logical lanes; the
+		    array's content is unused, only its length is meaningful;
+
+- samsung,csis-hs-settle : (optional) differential receiver (HS-RX) settle time;
+
+
+Example:
+
+	reg0: regulator@0 {
+	};
+
+	reg1: regulator@1 {
+	};
+
+/* SoC properties */
+
+	csis_0: csis@11880000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-csis";
+		reg = <0x11880000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 78 0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+	};
+
+/* Board properties */
+
+	csis_0: csis@11880000 {
+		clock-frequency = <166000000>;
+		vddio-supply = <&reg0>;
+		vddcore-supply = <&reg1>;
+		port {
+			reg = <3>; /* 3 - CSIS0, 4 - CSIS1 */
+			csis0_ep: endpoint {
+				remote-endpoint = <...>;
+				data-lanes = <1>, <2>;
+				samsung,csis-hs-settle = <12>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sh_mobile_ceu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sh_mobile_ceu.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1ce4e46bcbb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sh_mobile_ceu.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+Bindings, specific for the sh_mobile_ceu_camera.c driver:
+ - compatible: Should be "renesas,sh-mobile-ceu"
+ - reg: register base and size
+ - interrupts: the interrupt number
+ - interrupt-parent: the interrupt controller
+ - renesas,max-width: maximum image width, supported on this SoC
+ - renesas,max-height: maximum image height, supported on this SoC
+
+Example:
+
+ceu0: ceu@0xfe910000 {
+	compatible = "renesas,sh-mobile-ceu";
+	reg = <0xfe910000 0xa0>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&intcs>;
+	interrupts = <0x880>;
+	renesas,max-width = <8188>;
+	renesas,max-height = <8188>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ce719f89dd1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,230 @@
+Common bindings for video receiver and transmitter interfaces
+
+General concept
+---------------
+
+Video data pipelines usually consist of external devices, e.g. camera sensors,
+controlled over an I2C, SPI or UART bus, and SoC internal IP blocks, including
+video DMA engines and video data processors.
+
+SoC internal blocks are described by DT nodes, placed similarly to other SoC
+blocks.  External devices are represented as child nodes of their respective
+bus controller nodes, e.g. I2C.
+
+Data interfaces on all video devices are described by their child 'port' nodes.
+Configuration of a port depends on other devices participating in the data
+transfer and is described by 'endpoint' subnodes.
+
+device {
+	...
+	ports {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		port@0 {
+			...
+			endpoint@0 { ... };
+			endpoint@1 { ... };
+		};
+		port@1 { ... };
+	};
+};
+
+If a port can be configured to work with more than one remote device on the same
+bus, an 'endpoint' child node must be provided for each of them.  If more than
+one port is present in a device node or there is more than one endpoint at a
+port, or port node needs to be associated with a selected hardware interface,
+a common scheme using '#address-cells', '#size-cells' and 'reg' properties is
+used.
+
+All 'port' nodes can be grouped under optional 'ports' node, which allows to
+specify #address-cells, #size-cells properties independently for the 'port'
+and 'endpoint' nodes and any child device nodes a device might have.
+
+Two 'endpoint' nodes are linked with each other through their 'remote-endpoint'
+phandles.  An endpoint subnode of a device contains all properties needed for
+configuration of this device for data exchange with other device.  In most
+cases properties at the peer 'endpoint' nodes will be identical, however they
+might need to be different when there is any signal modifications on the bus
+between two devices, e.g. there are logic signal inverters on the lines.
+
+It is allowed for multiple endpoints at a port to be active simultaneously,
+where supported by a device.  For example, in case where a data interface of
+a device is partitioned into multiple data busses, e.g. 16-bit input port
+divided into two separate ITU-R BT.656 8-bit busses.  In such case bus-width
+and data-shift properties can be used to assign physical data lines to each
+endpoint node (logical bus).
+
+
+Required properties
+-------------------
+
+If there is more than one 'port' or more than one 'endpoint' node or 'reg'
+property is present in port and/or endpoint nodes the following properties
+are required in a relevant parent node:
+
+ - #address-cells : number of cells required to define port/endpoint
+		    identifier, should be 1.
+ - #size-cells    : should be zero.
+
+Optional endpoint properties
+----------------------------
+
+- remote-endpoint: phandle to an 'endpoint' subnode of a remote device node.
+- slave-mode: a boolean property indicating that the link is run in slave mode.
+  The default when this property is not specified is master mode. In the slave
+  mode horizontal and vertical synchronization signals are provided to the
+  slave device (data source) by the master device (data sink). In the master
+  mode the data source device is also the source of the synchronization signals.
+- bus-width: number of data lines actively used, valid for the parallel busses.
+- data-shift: on the parallel data busses, if bus-width is used to specify the
+  number of data lines, data-shift can be used to specify which data lines are
+  used, e.g. "bus-width=<8>; data-shift=<2>;" means, that lines 9:2 are used.
+- hsync-active: active state of the HSYNC signal, 0/1 for LOW/HIGH respectively.
+- vsync-active: active state of the VSYNC signal, 0/1 for LOW/HIGH respectively.
+  Note, that if HSYNC and VSYNC polarities are not specified, embedded
+  synchronization may be required, where supported.
+- data-active: similar to HSYNC and VSYNC, specifies data line polarity.
+- field-even-active: field signal level during the even field data transmission.
+- pclk-sample: sample data on rising (1) or falling (0) edge of the pixel clock
+  signal.
+- sync-on-green-active: active state of Sync-on-green (SoG) signal, 0/1 for
+  LOW/HIGH respectively.
+- data-lanes: an array of physical data lane indexes. Position of an entry
+  determines the logical lane number, while the value of an entry indicates
+  physical lane, e.g. for 2-lane MIPI CSI-2 bus we could have
+  "data-lanes = <1 2>;", assuming the clock lane is on hardware lane 0.
+  This property is valid for serial busses only (e.g. MIPI CSI-2).
+- clock-lanes: an array of physical clock lane indexes. Position of an entry
+  determines the logical lane number, while the value of an entry indicates
+  physical lane, e.g. for a MIPI CSI-2 bus we could have "clock-lanes = <0>;",
+  which places the clock lane on hardware lane 0. This property is valid for
+  serial busses only (e.g. MIPI CSI-2). Note that for the MIPI CSI-2 bus this
+  array contains only one entry.
+- clock-noncontinuous: a boolean property to allow MIPI CSI-2 non-continuous
+  clock mode.
+
+
+Example
+-------
+
+The example snippet below describes two data pipelines.  ov772x and imx074 are
+camera sensors with a parallel and serial (MIPI CSI-2) video bus respectively.
+Both sensors are on the I2C control bus corresponding to the i2c0 controller
+node.  ov772x sensor is linked directly to the ceu0 video host interface.
+imx074 is linked to ceu0 through the MIPI CSI-2 receiver (csi2). ceu0 has a
+(single) DMA engine writing captured data to memory.  ceu0 node has a single
+'port' node which may indicate that at any time only one of the following data
+pipelines can be active: ov772x -> ceu0 or imx074 -> csi2 -> ceu0.
+
+	ceu0: ceu@0xfe910000 {
+		compatible = "renesas,sh-mobile-ceu";
+		reg = <0xfe910000 0xa0>;
+		interrupts = <0x880>;
+
+		mclk: master_clock {
+			compatible = "renesas,ceu-clock";
+			#clock-cells = <1>;
+			clock-frequency = <50000000>;	/* Max clock frequency */
+			clock-output-names = "mclk";
+		};
+
+		port {
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			/* Parallel bus endpoint */
+			ceu0_1: endpoint@1 {
+				reg = <1>;		/* Local endpoint # */
+				remote = <&ov772x_1_1>;	/* Remote phandle */
+				bus-width = <8>;	/* Used data lines */
+				data-shift = <2>;	/* Lines 9:2 are used */
+
+				/* If hsync-active/vsync-active are missing,
+				   embedded BT.656 sync is used */
+				hsync-active = <0>;	/* Active low */
+				vsync-active = <0>;	/* Active low */
+				data-active = <1>;	/* Active high */
+				pclk-sample = <1>;	/* Rising */
+			};
+
+			/* MIPI CSI-2 bus endpoint */
+			ceu0_0: endpoint@0 {
+				reg = <0>;
+				remote = <&csi2_2>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+	i2c0: i2c@0xfff20000 {
+		...
+		ov772x_1: camera@0x21 {
+			compatible = "omnivision,ov772x";
+			reg = <0x21>;
+			vddio-supply = <&regulator1>;
+			vddcore-supply = <&regulator2>;
+
+			clock-frequency = <20000000>;
+			clocks = <&mclk 0>;
+			clock-names = "xclk";
+
+			port {
+				/* With 1 endpoint per port no need for addresses. */
+				ov772x_1_1: endpoint {
+					bus-width = <8>;
+					remote-endpoint = <&ceu0_1>;
+					hsync-active = <1>;
+					vsync-active = <0>; /* Who came up with an
+							       inverter here ?... */
+					data-active = <1>;
+					pclk-sample = <1>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+
+		imx074: camera@0x1a {
+			compatible = "sony,imx074";
+			reg = <0x1a>;
+			vddio-supply = <&regulator1>;
+			vddcore-supply = <&regulator2>;
+
+			clock-frequency = <30000000>;	/* Shared clock with ov772x_1 */
+			clocks = <&mclk 0>;
+			clock-names = "sysclk";		/* Assuming this is the
+							   name in the datasheet */
+			port {
+				imx074_1: endpoint {
+					clock-lanes = <0>;
+					data-lanes = <1 2>;
+					remote-endpoint = <&csi2_1>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+	csi2: csi2@0xffc90000 {
+		compatible = "renesas,sh-mobile-csi2";
+		reg = <0xffc90000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0x17a0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		port@1 {
+			compatible = "renesas,csi2c";	/* One of CSI2I and CSI2C. */
+			reg = <1>;			/* CSI-2 PHY #1 of 2: PHY_S,
+							   PHY_M has port address 0,
+							   is unused. */
+			csi2_1: endpoint {
+				clock-lanes = <0>;
+				data-lanes = <2 1>;
+				remote-endpoint = <&imx074_1>;
+			};
+		};
+		port@2 {
+			reg = <2>;			/* port 2: link to the CEU */
+
+			csi2_2: endpoint {
+				remote-endpoint = <&ceu0_0>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mvebu-devbus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mvebu-devbus.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..653c90c34a71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mvebu-devbus.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+Device tree bindings for MVEBU Device Bus controllers
+
+The Device Bus controller available in some Marvell's SoC allows to control
+different types of standard memory and I/O devices such as NOR, NAND, and FPGA.
+The actual devices are instantiated from the child nodes of a Device Bus node.
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - compatible:          Currently only Armada 370/XP SoC are supported,
+                        with this compatible string:
+
+                        marvell,mvebu-devbus
+
+ - reg:                 A resource specifier for the register space.
+                        This is the base address of a chip select within
+			the controller's register space.
+                        (see the example below)
+
+ - #address-cells:      Must be set to 1
+ - #size-cells:         Must be set to 1
+ - ranges:              Must be set up to reflect the memory layout with four
+                        integer values for each chip-select line in use:
+                        0 <physical address of mapping> <size>
+
+Mandatory timing properties for child nodes:
+
+Read parameters:
+
+ - devbus,turn-off-ps:  Defines the time during which the controller does not
+                        drive the AD bus after the completion of a device read.
+                        This prevents contentions on the Device Bus after a read
+                        cycle from a slow device.
+
+ - devbus,bus-width:    Defines the bus width (e.g. <16>)
+
+ - devbus,badr-skew-ps: Defines the time delay from from A[2:0] toggle,
+                        to read data sample. This parameter is useful for
+                        synchronous pipelined devices, where the address
+                        precedes the read data by one or two cycles.
+
+ - devbus,acc-first-ps: Defines the time delay from the negation of
+                        ALE[0] to the cycle that the first read data is sampled
+                        by the controller.
+
+ - devbus,acc-next-ps:  Defines the time delay between the cycle that
+                        samples data N and the cycle that samples data N+1
+                        (in burst accesses).
+
+ - devbus,rd-setup-ps:  Defines the time delay between DEV_CSn assertion to
+			DEV_OEn assertion. If set to 0 (default),
+                        DEV_OEn and DEV_CSn are asserted at the same cycle.
+                        This parameter has no affect on <acc-first-ps> parameter
+                        (no affect on first data sample). Set <rd-setup-ps>
+                        to a value smaller than <acc-first-ps>.
+
+ - devbus,rd-hold-ps:   Defines the time between the last data sample to the
+			de-assertion of DEV_CSn. If set to 0 (default),
+			DEV_OEn and DEV_CSn are de-asserted at the same cycle
+			(the cycle of the last data sample).
+                        This parameter has no affect on DEV_OEn de-assertion.
+                        DEV_OEn is always de-asserted the next cycle after
+                        last data sampled. Also this parameter has no
+                        affect on <turn-off-ps> parameter.
+                        Set <rd-hold-ps> to a value smaller than <turn-off-ps>.
+
+Write parameters:
+
+ - devbus,ale-wr-ps:    Defines the time delay from the ALE[0] negation cycle
+			to the DEV_WEn assertion.
+
+ - devbus,wr-low-ps:    Defines the time during which DEV_WEn is active.
+                        A[2:0] and Data are kept valid as long as DEV_WEn
+                        is active. This parameter defines the setup time of
+                        address and data to DEV_WEn rise.
+
+ - devbus,wr-high-ps:   Defines the time during which DEV_WEn is kept
+                        inactive (high) between data beats of a burst write.
+                        DEV_A[2:0] and Data are kept valid (do not toggle) for
+                        <wr-high-ps> - <tick> ps.
+			This parameter defines the hold time of address and
+			data after DEV_WEn rise.
+
+ - devbus,sync-enable: Synchronous device enable.
+                       1: True
+                       0: False
+
+An example for an Armada XP GP board, with a 16 MiB NOR device as child
+is showed below. Note that the Device Bus driver is in charge of allocating
+the mbus address decoding window for each of its child devices.
+The window is created using the chip select specified in the child
+device node together with the base address and size specified in the ranges
+property. For instance, in the example below the allocated decoding window
+will start at base address 0xf0000000, with a size 0x1000000 (16 MiB)
+for chip select 0 (a.k.a DEV_BOOTCS).
+
+This address window handling is done in this mvebu-devbus only as a temporary
+solution. It will be removed when the support for mbus device tree binding is
+added.
+
+The reg property implicitly specifies the chip select as this:
+
+  0x10400: DEV_BOOTCS
+  0x10408: DEV_CS0
+  0x10410: DEV_CS1
+  0x10418: DEV_CS2
+  0x10420: DEV_CS3
+
+Example:
+
+	devbus-bootcs@d0010400 {
+		status = "okay";
+		ranges = <0 0xf0000000 0x1000000>; /* @addr 0xf0000000, size 0x1000000 */
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+
+		/* Device Bus parameters are required */
+
+		/* Read parameters */
+		devbus,bus-width    = <8>;
+		devbus,turn-off-ps  = <60000>;
+		devbus,badr-skew-ps = <0>;
+		devbus,acc-first-ps = <124000>;
+		devbus,acc-next-ps  = <248000>;
+		devbus,rd-setup-ps  = <0>;
+		devbus,rd-hold-ps   = <0>;
+
+		/* Write parameters */
+		devbus,sync-enable = <0>;
+		devbus,wr-high-ps  = <60000>;
+		devbus,wr-low-ps   = <60000>;
+		devbus,ale-wr-ps   = <60000>;
+
+		flash@0 {
+			compatible = "cfi-flash";
+
+			/* 16 MiB */
+			reg = <0 0x1000000>;
+			bank-width = <2>;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <1>;
+
+			/*
+			 * We split the 16 MiB in two partitions,
+			 * just as an example.
+			 */
+			partition@0 {
+				label = "First";
+				reg = <0 0x800000>;
+			};
+
+			partition@800000 {
+				label = "Second";
+				reg = <0x800000 0x800000>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/ti/emif.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/ti/emif.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..938f8e1ba205
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/ti/emif.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+* EMIF family of TI SDRAM controllers
+
+EMIF - External Memory Interface - is an SDRAM controller used in
+TI SoCs. EMIF supports, based on the IP revision, one or more of
+DDR2/DDR3/LPDDR2 protocols. This binding describes a given instance
+of the EMIF IP and memory parts attached to it.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible	: Should be of the form "ti,emif-<ip-rev>" where <ip-rev>
+  is the IP revision of the specific EMIF instance.
+
+- phy-type	: <u32> indicating the DDR phy type. Following are the
+  allowed values
+  <1>	: Attila PHY
+  <2>	: Intelli PHY
+
+- device-handle	: phandle to a "lpddr2" node representing the memory part
+
+- ti,hwmods	: For TI hwmods processing and omap device creation
+  the value shall be "emif<n>" where <n> is the number of the EMIF
+  instance with base 1.
+
+Optional properties:
+- cs1-used		: Have this property if CS1 of this EMIF
+  instance has a memory part attached to it. If there is a memory
+  part attached to CS1, it should be the same type as the one on CS0,
+  so there is no need to give the details of this memory part.
+
+- cal-resistor-per-cs	: Have this property if the board has one
+  calibration resistor per chip-select.
+
+- hw-caps-read-idle-ctrl: Have this property if the controller
+  supports read idle window programming
+
+- hw-caps-dll-calib-ctrl: Have this property if the controller
+  supports dll calibration control
+
+- hw-caps-ll-interface	: Have this property if the controller
+  has a low latency interface and corresponding interrupt events
+
+- hw-caps-temp-alert	: Have this property if the controller
+  has capability for generating SDRAM temperature alerts
+
+Example:
+
+emif1: emif@0x4c000000 {
+	compatible	= "ti,emif-4d";
+	ti,hwmods	= "emif2";
+	phy-type	= <1>;
+	device-handle	= <&elpida_ECB240ABACN>;
+	cs1-used;
+	hw-caps-read-idle-ctrl;
+	hw-caps-ll-interface;
+	hw-caps-temp-alert;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/metag/meta-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/metag/meta-intc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..80994adab392
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/metag/meta-intc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+* Meta External Trigger Controller Binding
+
+This binding specifies what properties must be available in the device tree
+representation of a Meta external trigger controller.
+
+Required properties:
+
+    - compatible: Specifies the compatibility list for the interrupt controller.
+      The type shall be <string> and the value shall include "img,meta-intc".
+
+    - num-banks: Specifies the number of interrupt banks (each of which can
+      handle 32 interrupt sources).
+
+    - interrupt-controller: The presence of this property identifies the node
+      as an interrupt controller. No property value shall be defined.
+
+    - #interrupt-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+      interrupt source. The type shall be a <u32> and the value shall be 2.
+
+    - #address-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+      address. The type shall be <u32> and the value shall be 0. As such,
+      'interrupt-map' nodes do not have to specify a parent unit address.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+    - no-mask: The controller doesn't have any mask registers.
+
+* Interrupt Specifier Definition
+
+  Interrupt specifiers consists of 2 cells encoded as follows:
+
+    - <1st-cell>: The interrupt-number that identifies the interrupt source.
+
+    - <2nd-cell>: The Linux interrupt flags containing level-sense information,
+                  encoded as follows:
+                    1 = edge triggered
+                    4 = level-sensitive
+
+* Examples
+
+Example 1:
+
+	/*
+	 * Meta external trigger block
+	 */
+	intc: intc {
+		// This is an interrupt controller node.
+		interrupt-controller;
+
+		// No address cells so that 'interrupt-map' nodes which
+		// reference this interrupt controller node do not need a parent
+		// address specifier.
+		#address-cells = <0>;
+
+		// Two cells to encode interrupt sources.
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+
+		// Number of interrupt banks
+		num-banks = <2>;
+
+		// No HWMASKEXT is available (specify on Chorus2 and Comet ES1)
+		no-mask;
+
+		// Compatible with Meta hardware trigger block.
+		compatible = "img,meta-intc";
+	};
+
+Example 2:
+
+	/*
+	 * An interrupt generating device that is wired to a Meta external
+	 * trigger block.
+	 */
+	uart1: uart@0x02004c00 {
+		// Interrupt source '5' that is level-sensitive.
+		// Note that there are only two cells as specified in the
+		// interrupt parent's '#interrupt-cells' property.
+		interrupts = <5 4 /* level */>;
+
+		// The interrupt controller that this device is wired to.
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/metag/meta.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/metag/meta.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f4457f57ab08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/metag/meta.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+* Meta Processor Binding
+
+This binding specifies what properties must be available in the device tree
+representation of a Meta Processor Core, which is the root node in the tree.
+
+Required properties:
+
+    - compatible: Specifies the compatibility list for the Meta processor.
+      The type shall be <string> and the value shall include "img,meta".
+
+Optional properties:
+
+    - clocks: Clock consumer specifiers as described in
+      Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+    - clock-names: Clock consumer names as described in
+      Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt.
+
+Clocks are identified by name. Valid clocks are:
+
+    - "core": The Meta core clock from which the Meta timers are derived.
+
+* Examples
+
+/ {
+	compatible = "toumaz,tz1090", "img,meta";
+
+	clocks = <&meta_core_clk>;
+	clock-names = "core";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/metag/pdc-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/metag/pdc-intc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a69118550344
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/metag/pdc-intc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+* ImgTec Powerdown Controller (PDC) Interrupt Controller Binding
+
+This binding specifies what properties must be available in the device tree
+representation of a PDC IRQ controller. This has a number of input interrupt
+lines which can wake the system, and are passed on through output interrupt
+lines.
+
+Required properties:
+
+    - compatible: Specifies the compatibility list for the interrupt controller.
+      The type shall be <string> and the value shall include "img,pdc-intc".
+
+    - reg: Specifies the base PDC physical address(s) and size(s) of the
+      addressable register space. The type shall be <prop-encoded-array>.
+
+    - interrupt-controller: The presence of this property identifies the node
+      as an interrupt controller. No property value shall be defined.
+
+    - #interrupt-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+      interrupt source. The type shall be a <u32> and the value shall be 2.
+
+    - num-perips: Number of waking peripherals.
+
+    - num-syswakes: Number of SysWake inputs.
+
+    - interrupts: List of interrupt specifiers. The first specifier shall be the
+      shared SysWake interrupt, and remaining specifies shall be PDC peripheral
+      interrupts in order.
+
+* Interrupt Specifier Definition
+
+  Interrupt specifiers consists of 2 cells encoded as follows:
+
+    - <1st-cell>: The interrupt-number that identifies the interrupt source.
+                    0-7:  Peripheral interrupts
+                    8-15: SysWake interrupts
+
+    - <2nd-cell>: The level-sense information, encoded using the Linux interrupt
+                  flags as follows (only 4 valid for peripheral interrupts):
+                    0 = none (decided by software)
+                    1 = low-to-high edge triggered
+                    2 = high-to-low edge triggered
+                    3 = both edge triggered
+                    4 = active-high level-sensitive (required for perip irqs)
+                    8 = active-low level-sensitive
+
+* Examples
+
+Example 1:
+
+	/*
+	 * TZ1090 PDC block
+	 */
+	pdc: pdc@0x02006000 {
+		// This is an interrupt controller node.
+		interrupt-controller;
+
+		// Three cells to encode interrupt sources.
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+
+		// Offset address of 0x02006000 and size of 0x1000.
+		reg = <0x02006000 0x1000>;
+
+		// Compatible with Meta hardware trigger block.
+		compatible = "img,pdc-intc";
+
+		// Three peripherals are connected.
+		num-perips = <3>;
+
+		// Four SysWakes are connected.
+		num-syswakes = <4>;
+
+		interrupts = <18 4 /* level */>, /* Syswakes */
+			     <30 4 /* level */>, /* Peripheral 0 (RTC) */
+			     <29 4 /* level */>, /* Peripheral 1 (IR) */
+			     <31 4 /* level */>; /* Peripheral 2 (WDT) */
+	};
+
+Example 2:
+
+	/*
+	 * An SoC peripheral that is wired through the PDC.
+	 */
+	rtc0 {
+		// The interrupt controller that this device is wired to.
+		interrupt-parent = <&pdc>;
+
+		// Interrupt source Peripheral 0
+		interrupts = <0   /* Peripheral 0 (RTC) */
+		              4>  /* IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH */
+	};
+
+Example 3:
+
+	/*
+	 * An interrupt generating device that is wired to a SysWake pin.
+	 */
+	touchscreen0 {
+		// The interrupt controller that this device is wired to.
+		interrupt-parent = <&pdc>;
+
+		// Interrupt source SysWake 0 that is active-low level-sensitive
+		interrupts = <8 /* SysWake0 */
+			      8 /* IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW */>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/88pm860x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/88pm860x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..63f3ee33759c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/88pm860x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+* Marvell 88PM860x Power Management IC
+
+Required parent device properties:
+- compatible : "marvell,88pm860x"
+- reg : the I2C slave address for the 88pm860x chip
+- interrupts : IRQ line for the 88pm860x chip
+- interrupt-controller: describes the 88pm860x as an interrupt controller (has its own domain)
+- #interrupt-cells : should be 1.
+		- The cell is the 88pm860x local IRQ number
+
+Optional parent device properties:
+- marvell,88pm860x-irq-read-clr: inicates whether interrupt status is cleared by read
+- marvell,88pm860x-slave-addr: 88pm860x are two chips solution. <reg> stores the I2C address
+				of one chip, and this property stores the I2C address of
+				another chip.
+
+88pm860x consists of a large and varied group of sub-devices:
+
+Device			 Supply Names	 Description
+------			 ------------	 -----------
+88pm860x-onkey		:		: On key
+88pm860x-rtc		:		: RTC
+88pm8607		:		: Regulators
+88pm860x-backlight	:		: Backlight
+88pm860x-led		:		: Led
+88pm860x-touch		:		: Touchscreen
+
+Example:
+
+	pmic: 88pm860x@34 {
+		compatible = "marvell,88pm860x";
+		reg = <0x34>;
+		interrupts = <4>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+
+		marvell,88pm860x-irq-read-clr;
+		marvell,88pm860x-slave-addr = <0x11>;
+
+		regulators {
+			BUCK1 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+			LDO1 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <2800000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+		};
+		rtc {
+			marvell,88pm860x-vrtc = <1>;
+		};
+		touch {
+			marvell,88pm860x-gpadc-prebias = <1>;
+			marvell,88pm860x-gpadc-slot-cycle = <1>;
+			marvell,88pm860x-tsi-prebias = <6>;
+			marvell,88pm860x-pen-prebias = <16>;
+			marvell,88pm860x-pen-prechg = <2>;
+			marvell,88pm860x-resistor-X = <300>;
+		};
+		backlights {
+			backlight-0 {
+				marvell,88pm860x-iset = <4>;
+				marvell,88pm860x-pwm = <3>;
+			};
+			backlight-2 {
+			};
+		};
+		leds {
+			led0-red {
+				marvell,88pm860x-iset = <12>;
+			};
+			led0-green {
+				marvell,88pm860x-iset = <12>;
+			};
+			led0-blue {
+				marvell,88pm860x-iset = <12>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/ab8500.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/ab8500.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cd9e90c5d171
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/ab8500.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+* AB8500 Multi-Functional Device (MFD)
+
+Required parent device properties:
+- compatible             : contains "stericsson,ab8500";
+- interrupts             : contains the IRQ line for the AB8500
+- interrupt-controller   : describes the AB8500 as an Interrupt Controller (has its own domain)
+- #interrupt-cells       : should be 2, for 2-cell format
+                            - The first cell is the AB8500 local IRQ number
+                            - The second cell is used to specify optional parameters
+                              - bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags:
+                                  1 = low-to-high edge triggered
+                                  2 = high-to-low edge triggered
+                                  4 = active high level-sensitive
+                                  8 = active low level-sensitive
+
+The AB8500 consists of a large and varied group of sub-devices:
+
+Device                     IRQ Names              Supply Names   Description
+------                     ---------              ------------   -----------
+ab8500-bm                :                      :              : Battery Manager
+ab8500-btemp             :                      :              : Battery Temperature
+ab8500-charger           :                      :              : Battery Charger
+ab8500-codec             :                      :              : Audio Codec
+ab8500-fg                : 			: vddadc       : Fuel Gauge
+			 : NCONV_ACCU           :	       : Accumulate N Sample Conversion
+			 : BATT_OVV		:	       : Battery Over Voltage
+			 : LOW_BAT_F		:	       : LOW threshold battery voltage
+			 : CC_INT_CALIB		:	       : Coulomb Counter Internal Calibration
+			 : CCEOC		:	       : Coulomb Counter End of Conversion
+ab8500-btemp		 :			: vtvout       : Battery Temperature
+			 : BAT_CTRL_INDB        :              : Battery Removal Indicator
+			 : BTEMP_LOW            :              : Btemp < BtempLow, if battery temperature is lower than -10°C
+			 : BTEMP_LOW_MEDIUM     :              : BtempLow < Btemp < BtempMedium,if battery temperature is between -10 and 0°C
+			 : BTEMP_MEDIUM_HIGH    :	       : BtempMedium < Btemp < BtempHigh,if battery temperature is between 0°C and“MaxTemp
+			 : BTEMP_HIGH           :              : Btemp > BtempHigh, if battery temperature is higher than “MaxTemp
+ab8500-charger		 :			: vddadc       : Charger interface
+			 : MAIN_CH_UNPLUG_DET	:	       : main charger unplug detection management (not in 8505)
+			 : MAIN_CHARGE_PLUG_DET	:	       : main charger plug detection management (not in 8505)
+			 : MAIN_EXT_CH_NOT_OK	:	       : main charger not OK
+			 : MAIN_CH_TH_PROT_R	:	       : Die temp is above main charger
+			 : MAIN_CH_TH_PROT_F	:	       : Die temp is below main charger
+			 : VBUS_DET_F		:	       : VBUS falling detected
+			 : VBUS_DET_R		:	       : VBUS rising detected
+			 : USB_LINK_STATUS	:	       : USB link status has changed
+			 : USB_CH_TH_PROT_R	:	       : Die temp is above usb charger
+			 : USB_CH_TH_PROT_F	:	       : Die temp is below usb charger
+			 : USB_CHARGER_NOT_OKR	:	       : allowed USB charger not ok detection
+			 : VBUS_OVV		:	       : Overvoltage on Vbus ball detected (USB charge is stopped)
+			 : CH_WD_EXP		:	       : Charger watchdog detected
+ab8500-gpadc             : HW_CONV_END          : vddadc       : Analogue to Digital Converter
+                           SW_CONV_END          :              :
+ab8500-gpio              :                      :              : GPIO Controller
+ab8500-ponkey            : ONKEY_DBF            :              : Power-on Key
+                           ONKEY_DBR            :              :
+ab8500-pwm               :                      :              : Pulse Width Modulator
+ab8500-regulator         :                      :              : Regulators
+ab8500-rtc               : 60S                  :              : Real Time Clock
+                         : ALARM                :              :
+ab8500-sysctrl           :                      :              : System Control
+ab8500-usb               : ID_WAKEUP_R          : vddulpivio18 : Universal Serial Bus
+                         : ID_WAKEUP_F          : v-ape        :
+                         : VBUS_DET_F           : musb_1v8     :
+                         : VBUS_DET_R           :              :
+                         : USB_LINK_STATUS      :              :
+                         : USB_ADP_PROBE_PLUG   :              :
+                         : USB_ADP_PROBE_UNPLUG :              :
+
+Required child device properties:
+- compatible             : "stericsson,ab8500-[bm|btemp|charger|fg|gpadc|gpio|ponkey|
+                                               pwm|regulator|rtc|sysctrl|usb]";
+
+Optional child device properties:
+- interrupts             : contains the device IRQ(s) using the 2-cell format (see above)
+- interrupt-names        : contains names of IRQ resource in the order in which they were
+                           supplied in the interrupts property
+- <supply_name>-supply   : contains a phandle to the regulator supply node in Device Tree
+
+Non-standard child device properties:
+ - Audio CODEC:
+   - stericsson,amic[1|2]-type-single-ended : Single-ended Analoge Mic (default: differential)
+   - stericsson,amic1a-bias-vamic2          : Analoge Mic wishes to use a non-standard Vamic
+   - stericsson,amic1b-bias-vamic2          : Analoge Mic wishes to use a non-standard Vamic
+   - stericsson,amic2-bias-vamic1           : Analoge Mic wishes to use a non-standard Vamic
+   - stericsson,earpeice-cmv                : Earpeice voltage (only: 950 | 1100 | 1270 | 1580)
+
+ab8500 {
+         compatible = "stericsson,ab8500";
+         interrupts = <0 40 0x4>;
+         interrupt-controller;
+         #interrupt-cells = <2>;
+
+         ab8500-rtc {
+                 compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-rtc";
+                 interrupts = <17 0x4
+                               18 0x4>;
+                 interrupt-names = "60S", "ALARM";
+         };
+
+        ab8500-gpadc {
+                compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-gpadc";
+                interrupts = <32 0x4
+                              39 0x4>;
+                interrupt-names = "HW_CONV_END", "SW_CONV_END";
+                vddadc-supply = <&ab8500_ldo_tvout_reg>;
+        };
+
+        ab8500-usb {
+                compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-usb";
+                interrupts = < 90 0x4
+                               96 0x4
+                               14 0x4
+                               15 0x4
+                               79 0x4
+                               74 0x4
+                               75 0x4>;
+                interrupt-names = "ID_WAKEUP_R",
+                                  "ID_WAKEUP_F",
+                                  "VBUS_DET_F",
+                                  "VBUS_DET_R",
+                                  "USB_LINK_STATUS",
+                                  "USB_ADP_PROBE_PLUG",
+                                  "USB_ADP_PROBE_UNPLUG";
+                vddulpivio18-supply = <&ab8500_ldo_intcore_reg>;
+                v-ape-supply = <&db8500_vape_reg>;
+                musb_1v8-supply = <&db8500_vsmps2_reg>;
+        };
+
+        ab8500-ponkey {
+                compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-ponkey";
+                interrupts = <6 0x4
+                              7 0x4>;
+                interrupt-names = "ONKEY_DBF", "ONKEY_DBR";
+        };
+
+        ab8500-sysctrl {
+                compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-sysctrl";
+        };
+
+        ab8500-pwm {
+                compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-pwm";
+        };
+
+	codec: ab8500-codec {
+		compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-codec";
+
+		stericsson,earpeice-cmv = <950>; /* Units in mV. */
+	};
+
+        ab8500-regulators {
+                compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-regulator";
+
+                ab8500_ldo_aux1_reg: ab8500_ldo_aux1 {
+                        /*
+                         * See: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
+                         * for more information on regulators
+                         */
+                };
+        };
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/arizona.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/arizona.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0e295c9d8937
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/arizona.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+Wolfson Arizona class audio SoCs
+
+These devices are audio SoCs with extensive digital capabilites and a range
+of analogue I/O.
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : one of the following chip-specific strings:
+	"wlf,wm5102"
+	"wlf,wm5110"
+  - reg : I2C slave address when connected using I2C, chip select number when
+    using SPI.
+
+  - interrupts : The interrupt line the /IRQ signal for the device is
+    connected to.
+  - interrupt-controller : Arizona class devices contain interrupt controllers
+    and may provide interrupt services to other devices.
+  - interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller.
+  - #interrupt-cells: the number of cells to describe an IRQ, this should be 2.
+    The first cell is the IRQ number.
+    The second cell is the flags, encoded as the trigger masks from
+    Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupts.txt
+
+  - gpio-controller : Indicates this device is a GPIO controller.
+  - #gpio-cells : Must be 2. The first cell is the pin number and the
+    second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently unused).
+
+  - AVDD1-supply, DBVDD1-supply, DBVDD2-supply, DBVDD3-supply, CPVDD-supply,
+    SPKVDDL-supply, SPKVDDR-supply : power supplies for the device, as covered
+    in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - wlf,reset : GPIO specifier for the GPIO controlling /RESET
+  - wlf,ldoena : GPIO specifier for the GPIO controlling LDOENA
+
+  - wlf,gpio-defaults : A list of GPIO configuration register values. If
+    absent, no configuration of these registers is performed. If any
+    entry has a value that is out of range for a 16 bit register then
+    the chip default will be used.  If present exactly five values must
+    be specified.
+
+Example:
+
+codec: wm5102@1a {
+	compatible = "wlf,wm5102";
+	reg = <0x1a>;
+	interrupts = <347>;
+	#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+        interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+
+	gpio-controller;
+	#gpio-cells = <2>;
+
+	wlf,gpio-defaults = <
+		0x00000000, /* AIF1TXLRCLK */
+		0xffffffff,
+		0xffffffff,
+		0xffffffff,
+		0xffffffff,
+	>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/as3711.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/as3711.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d98cf18c721c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/as3711.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+AS3711 is an I2C PMIC from Austria MicroSystems with multiple DCDC and LDO power
+supplies, a battery charger and an RTC. So far only bindings for the two stepup
+DCDC converters are defined. Other DCDC and LDO supplies are configured, using
+standard regulator properties, they must belong to a sub-node, called
+"regulators" and be called "sd1" to "sd4" and "ldo1" to "ldo8." Stepup converter
+configuration should be placed in a subnode, called "backlight."
+
+Compulsory properties:
+- compatible		: must be "ams,as3711"
+- reg			: specifies the I2C address
+
+To use the SU1 converter as a backlight source the following two properties must
+be provided:
+- su1-dev		: framebuffer phandle
+- su1-max-uA		: maximum current
+
+To use the SU2 converter as a backlight source the following two properties must
+be provided:
+- su2-dev		: framebuffer phandle
+- su1-max-uA		: maximum current
+
+Additionally one of these properties must be provided to select the type of
+feedback used:
+- su2-feedback-voltage	: voltage feedback is used
+- su2-feedback-curr1	: CURR1 input used for current feedback
+- su2-feedback-curr2	: CURR2 input used for current feedback
+- su2-feedback-curr3	: CURR3 input used for current feedback
+- su2-feedback-curr-auto: automatic current feedback selection
+
+and one of these to select the over-voltage protection pin
+- su2-fbprot-lx-sd4	: LX_SD4 is used for over-voltage protection
+- su2-fbprot-gpio2	: GPIO2 is used for over-voltage protection
+- su2-fbprot-gpio3	: GPIO3 is used for over-voltage protection
+- su2-fbprot-gpio4	: GPIO4 is used for over-voltage protection
+
+If "su2-feedback-curr-auto" is selected, one or more of the following properties
+have to be specified:
+- su2-auto-curr1	: use CURR1 input for current feedback
+- su2-auto-curr2	: use CURR2 input for current feedback
+- su2-auto-curr3	: use CURR3 input for current feedback
+
+Example:
+
+as3711@40 {
+	compatible = "ams,as3711";
+	reg = <0x40>;
+
+	regulators {
+		sd4 {
+			regulator-name = "1.215V";
+			regulator-min-microvolt = <1215000>;
+			regulator-max-microvolt = <1235000>;
+		};
+		ldo2 {
+			regulator-name = "2.8V CPU";
+			regulator-min-microvolt = <2800000>;
+			regulator-max-microvolt = <2800000>;
+			regulator-always-on;
+			regulator-boot-on;
+		};
+	};
+
+	backlight {
+		compatible = "ams,as3711-bl";
+		su2-dev = <&lcdc>;
+		su2-max-uA = <36000>;
+		su2-feedback-curr-auto;
+		su2-fbprot-gpio4;
+		su2-auto-curr1;
+		su2-auto-curr2;
+		su2-auto-curr3;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cros-ec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cros-ec.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5f229c5f6da9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cros-ec.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+ChromeOS Embedded Controller
+
+Google's ChromeOS EC is a Cortex-M device which talks to the AP and
+implements various function such as keyboard and battery charging.
+
+The EC can be connect through various means (I2C, SPI, LPC) and the
+compatible string used depends on the interface. Each connection method has
+its own driver which connects to the top level interface-agnostic EC driver.
+Other Linux driver (such as cros-ec-keyb for the matrix keyboard) connect to
+the top-level driver.
+
+Required properties (I2C):
+- compatible: "google,cros-ec-i2c"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+
+Required properties (SPI):
+- compatible: "google,cros-ec-spi"
+- reg: SPI chip select
+
+Required properties (LPC):
+- compatible: "google,cros-ec-lpc"
+- reg: List of (IO address, size) pairs defining the interface uses
+
+
+Example for I2C:
+
+i2c@12CA0000 {
+	cros-ec@1e {
+		reg = <0x1e>;
+		compatible = "google,cros-ec-i2c";
+		interrupts = <14 0>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&wakeup_eint>;
+		wakeup-source;
+	};
+
+
+Example for SPI:
+
+spi@131b0000 {
+	ec@0 {
+		compatible = "google,cros-ec-spi";
+		reg = <0x0>;
+		interrupts = <14 0>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&wakeup_eint>;
+		wakeup-source;
+		spi-max-frequency = <5000000>;
+		controller-data {
+		cs-gpio = <&gpf0 3 4 3 0>;
+		samsung,spi-cs;
+		samsung,spi-feedback-delay = <2>;
+		};
+	};
+};
+
+
+Example for LPC is not supplied as it is not yet implemented.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9052-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9052-i2c.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1857f4a6b9a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9052-i2c.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+* Dialog DA9052/53 Power Management Integrated Circuit (PMIC)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "dlg,da9052", "dlg,da9053-aa",
+			 "dlg,da9053-ab", or "dlg,da9053-bb"
+
+Sub-nodes:
+- regulators : Contain the regulator nodes. The DA9052/53 regulators are
+  bound using their names as listed below:
+
+    buck0     : regulator BUCK0
+    buck1     : regulator BUCK1
+    buck2     : regulator BUCK2
+    buck3     : regulator BUCK3
+    ldo4      : regulator LDO4
+    ldo5      : regulator LDO5
+    ldo6      : regulator LDO6
+    ldo7      : regulator LDO7
+    ldo8      : regulator LDO8
+    ldo9      : regulator LDO9
+    ldo10     : regulator LDO10
+    ldo11     : regulator LDO11
+    ldo12     : regulator LDO12
+    ldo13     : regulator LDO13
+
+  The bindings details of individual regulator device can be found in:
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
+
+Examples:
+
+i2c@63fc8000 { /* I2C1 */
+	status = "okay";
+
+	pmic: dialog@48 {
+		compatible = "dlg,da9053-aa";
+		reg = <0x48>;
+
+		regulators {
+			buck0 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <500000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <2075000>;
+			};
+
+			buck1 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <500000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <2075000>;
+			};
+
+			buck2 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <925000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <2500000>;
+			};
+
+			buck3 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <925000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <2500000>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77686.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77686.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c6a3469d3436
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77686.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+Maxim MAX77686 multi-function device
+
+MAX77686 is a Mulitifunction device with PMIC, RTC and Charger on chip. It is
+interfaced to host controller using i2c interface. PMIC and Charger submodules
+are addressed using same i2c slave address whereas RTC submodule uses
+different i2c slave address,presently for which we are statically creating i2c
+client while probing.This document describes the binding for mfd device and
+PMIC submodule.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Must be "maxim,max77686";
+- reg : Specifies the i2c slave address of PMIC block.
+- interrupts : This i2c device has an IRQ line connected to the main SoC.
+- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller.
+
+Optional node:
+- voltage-regulators : The regulators of max77686 have to be instantiated
+  under subnode named "voltage-regulators" using the following format.
+
+	regulator_name {
+		regulator-compatible = LDOn/BUCKn
+		standard regulator constraints....
+	};
+	refer Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
+
+  The regulator-compatible property of regulator should initialized with string
+to get matched with their hardware counterparts as follow:
+
+	-LDOn 	:	for LDOs, where n can lie in range 1 to 26.
+		 	example: LDO1, LDO2, LDO26.
+	-BUCKn 	:	for BUCKs, where n can lie in range 1 to 9.
+			example: BUCK1, BUCK5, BUCK9.
+
+Example:
+
+	max77686@09 {
+		compatible = "maxim,max77686";
+		interrupt-parent = <&wakeup_eint>;
+		interrupts = <26 0>;
+		reg = <0x09>;
+
+		voltage-regulators {
+			ldo11_reg {
+				regulator-compatible = "LDO11";
+				regulator-name = "vdd_ldo11";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1900000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1900000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			buck1_reg {
+				regulator-compatible = "BUCK1";
+				regulator-name = "vdd_mif";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <950000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1300000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+			};
+	}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77693.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77693.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..11921cc417bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77693.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+Maxim MAX77693 multi-function device
+
+MAX77693 is a Multifunction device with the following submodules:
+- PMIC,
+- CHARGER,
+- LED,
+- MUIC,
+- HAPTIC
+
+It is interfaced to host controller using i2c.
+This document describes the bindings for the mfd device.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Must be "maxim,max77693".
+- reg : Specifies the i2c slave address of PMIC block.
+- interrupts : This i2c device has an IRQ line connected to the main SoC.
+- interrupt-parent :  The parent interrupt controller.
+
+Optional properties:
+- regulators : The regulators of max77693 have to be instantiated under subnod
+  named "regulators" using the following format.
+
+	regulators {
+		regualtor-compatible = ESAFEOUT1/ESAFEOUT2/CHARGER
+		standard regulator constratints[*].
+	};
+
+	[*] refer Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
+
+Example:
+	max77693@66 {
+		compatible = "maxim,max77693";
+		reg = <0x66>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpx1>;
+		interrupts = <5 2>;
+
+		regulators {
+			esafeout@1 {
+				regulator-compatible = "ESAFEOUT1";
+				regulator-name = "ESAFEOUT1";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+			};
+			esafeout@2 {
+				regulator-compatible = "ESAFEOUT2";
+				regulator-name = "ESAFEOUT2";
+				};
+			charger@0 {
+				regulator-compatible = "CHARGER";
+				regulator-name = "CHARGER";
+				regulator-min-microamp = <60000>;
+				regulator-max-microamp = <2580000>;
+					regulator-boot-on;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max8925.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max8925.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4f0dc6638e5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max8925.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+* Maxim max8925 Power Management IC
+
+Required parent device properties:
+- compatible : "maxim,max8925"
+- reg : the I2C slave address for the max8925 chip
+- interrupts : IRQ line for the max8925 chip
+- interrupt-controller: describes the max8925 as an interrupt
+  controller (has its own domain)
+- #interrupt-cells : should be 1.
+	- The cell is the max8925 local IRQ number
+
+Optional parent device properties:
+- maxim,tsc-irq: there are 2 IRQ lines for max8925, one is indicated in
+  interrupts property, the other is indicated here.
+
+max8925 consists of a large and varied group of sub-devices:
+
+Device			 Supply Names	 Description
+------			 ------------	 -----------
+max8925-onkey		:		: On key
+max8925-rtc		:		: RTC
+max8925-regulator	:		: Regulators
+max8925-backlight	:		: Backlight
+max8925-touch		:		: Touchscreen
+max8925-power		:		: Charger
+
+Example:
+
+	pmic: max8925@3c {
+		compatible = "maxim,max8925";
+		reg = <0x3c>;
+		interrupts = <1>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&intcmux4>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		maxim,tsc-irq = <0>;
+
+		regulators {
+			SDV1 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <637500>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1425000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			LDO1 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <750000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3900000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+		};
+		backlight {
+			maxim,max8925-dual-string = <0>;
+		};
+		charger {
+			batt-detect = <0>;
+			topoff-threshold = <1>;
+			fast-charge = <7>;
+			no-temp-support = <0>;
+			no-insert-detect = <0>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max8998.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max8998.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..23a3650ff2a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max8998.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+* Maxim MAX8998, National/TI LP3974 multi-function device
+
+The Maxim MAX8998 is a multi-function device which includes voltage/current
+regulators, real time clock, battery charging controller and several
+other sub-blocks. It is interfaced using an I2C interface. Each sub-block
+is addressed by the host system using different i2c slave address.
+
+PMIC sub-block
+--------------
+
+The PMIC sub-block contains a number of voltage and current regulators,
+with controllable parameters and dynamic voltage scaling capability.
+In addition, it includes a real time clock and battery charging controller
+as well. It is accessible at I2C address 0x66.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be one of the following:
+    - "maxim,max8998" for Maxim MAX8998
+    - "national,lp3974" or "ti,lp3974" for National/TI LP3974.
+- reg: Specifies the i2c slave address of the pmic block. It should be 0x66.
+
+Optional properties:
+- interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which
+  the interrupts from MAX8998 are routed to.
+- interrupts: Interrupt specifiers for two interrupt sources.
+  - First interrupt specifier is for main interrupt.
+  - Second interrupt specifier is for power-on/-off interrupt.
+- max8998,pmic-buck1-dvs-gpios: GPIO specifiers for two host gpios used
+  for buck 1 dvs. The format of the gpio specifier depends on the gpio
+  controller.
+- max8998,pmic-buck2-dvs-gpio: GPIO specifier for host gpio used
+  for buck 2 dvs. The format of the gpio specifier depends on the gpio
+  controller.
+- max8998,pmic-buck1-default-dvs-idx: Default voltage setting selected from
+  the possible 4 options selectable by the dvs gpios. The value of this
+  property should be 0, 1, 2 or 3. If not specified or out of range,
+  a default value of 0 is taken.
+- max8998,pmic-buck2-default-dvs-idx: Default voltage setting selected from
+  the possible 2 options selectable by the dvs gpios. The value of this
+  property should be 0 or 1. If not specified or out of range, a default
+  value of 0 is taken.
+- max8998,pmic-buck-voltage-lock: If present, disallows changing of
+  preprogrammed buck dvfs voltages.
+
+Additional properties required if max8998,pmic-buck1-dvs-gpios is defined:
+- max8998,pmic-buck1-dvs-voltage: An array of 4 voltage values in microvolts
+  for buck1 regulator that can be selected using dvs gpio.
+
+Additional properties required if max8998,pmic-buck2-dvs-gpio is defined:
+- max8998,pmic-buck2-dvs-voltage: An array of 2 voltage values in microvolts
+  for buck2 regulator that can be selected using dvs gpio.
+
+Regulators: All the regulators of MAX8998 to be instantiated shall be
+listed in a child node named 'regulators'. Each regulator is represented
+by a child node of the 'regulators' node.
+
+	regulator-name {
+		/* standard regulator bindings here */
+	};
+
+Following regulators of the MAX8998 PMIC block are supported. Note that
+the 'n' in regulator name, as in LDOn or BUCKn, represents the LDO or BUCK
+number as described in MAX8998 datasheet.
+
+	- LDOn
+		  - valid values for n are 2 to 17
+		  - Example: LDO2, LDO10, LDO17
+	- BUCKn
+		  - valid values for n are 1 to 4.
+		  - Example: BUCK1, BUCK2, BUCK3, BUCK4
+
+	- ENVICHG: Battery Charging Current Monitor Output. This is a fixed
+		   voltage type regulator
+
+	- ESAFEOUT1: (ldo19)
+	- ESAFEOUT2: (ld020)
+
+Standard regulator bindings are used inside regulator subnodes. Check
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
+for more details.
+
+Example:
+
+	pmic@66 {
+		compatible = "maxim,max8998-pmic";
+		reg = <0x66>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&wakeup_eint>;
+		interrupts = <4 0>, <3 0>;
+
+		/* Buck 1 DVS settings */
+		max8998,pmic-buck1-default-dvs-idx = <0>;
+		max8998,pmic-buck1-dvs-gpios = <&gpx0 0 1 0 0>, /* SET1 */
+					       <&gpx0 1 1 0 0>; /* SET2 */
+		max8998,pmic-buck1-dvs-voltage = <1350000>, <1300000>,
+						 <1000000>, <950000>;
+
+		/* Buck 2 DVS settings */
+		max8998,pmic-buck2-default-dvs-idx = <0>;
+		max8998,pmic-buck2-dvs-gpio = <&gpx0 0 3 0 0>; /* SET3 */
+		max8998,pmic-buck2-dvs-voltage = <1350000>, <1300000>;
+
+		/* Regulators to instantiate */
+		regulators {
+			ldo2_reg: LDO2 {
+				regulator-name = "VDD_ALIVE_1.1V";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1100000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1100000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			buck1_reg: BUCK1 {
+				regulator-name = "VDD_ARM_1.2V";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <950000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1350000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/mc13xxx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/mc13xxx.txt
index 19f6af47a792..abd9e3cb2db7 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/mc13xxx.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/mc13xxx.txt
@@ -10,10 +10,40 @@ Optional properties:
 - fsl,mc13xxx-uses-touch : Indicate the touchscreen controller is being used
 
 Sub-nodes:
-- regulators : Contain the regulator nodes.  The MC13892 regulators are
-  bound using their names as listed below with their registers and bits
-  for enabling.
+- regulators : Contain the regulator nodes. The regulators are bound using
+  their names as listed below with their registers and bits for enabling.
 
+MC13783 regulators:
+    sw1a      : regulator SW1A      (register 24, bit 0)
+    sw1b      : regulator SW1B      (register 25, bit 0)
+    sw2a      : regulator SW2A      (register 26, bit 0)
+    sw2b      : regulator SW2B      (register 27, bit 0)
+    sw3       : regulator SW3       (register 29, bit 20)
+    vaudio    : regulator VAUDIO    (register 32, bit 0)
+    viohi     : regulator VIOHI     (register 32, bit 3)
+    violo     : regulator VIOLO     (register 32, bit 6)
+    vdig      : regulator VDIG      (register 32, bit 9)
+    vgen      : regulator VGEN      (register 32, bit 12)
+    vrfdig    : regulator VRFDIG    (register 32, bit 15)
+    vrfref    : regulator VRFREF    (register 32, bit 18)
+    vrfcp     : regulator VRFCP     (register 32, bit 21)
+    vsim      : regulator VSIM      (register 33, bit 0)
+    vesim     : regulator VESIM     (register 33, bit 3)
+    vcam      : regulator VCAM      (register 33, bit 6)
+    vrfbg     : regulator VRFBG     (register 33, bit 9)
+    vvib      : regulator VVIB      (register 33, bit 11)
+    vrf1      : regulator VRF1      (register 33, bit 12)
+    vrf2      : regulator VRF2      (register 33, bit 15)
+    vmmc1     : regulator VMMC1     (register 33, bit 18)
+    vmmc2     : regulator VMMC2     (register 33, bit 21)
+    gpo1      : regulator GPO1      (register 34, bit 6)
+    gpo2      : regulator GPO2      (register 34, bit 8)
+    gpo3      : regulator GPO3      (register 34, bit 10)
+    gpo4      : regulator GPO4      (register 34, bit 12)
+    pwgt1spi  : regulator PWGT1SPI  (register 34, bit 15)
+    pwgt2spi  : regulator PWGT2SPI  (register 34, bit 16)
+
+MC13892 regulators:
     vcoincell : regulator VCOINCELL (register 13, bit 23)
     sw1       : regulator SW1	    (register 24, bit 0)
     sw2       : regulator SW2	    (register 25, bit 0)
@@ -46,8 +76,8 @@ Examples:
 
 ecspi@70010000 { /* ECSPI1 */
 	fsl,spi-num-chipselects = <2>;
-	cs-gpios = <&gpio3 24 0>, /* GPIO4_24 */
-		   <&gpio3 25 0>; /* GPIO4_25 */
+	cs-gpios = <&gpio4 24 0>, /* GPIO4_24 */
+		   <&gpio4 25 0>; /* GPIO4_25 */
 	status = "okay";
 
 	pmic: mc13892@0 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/omap-usb-host.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/omap-usb-host.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b381fa696bf9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/omap-usb-host.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+OMAP HS USB Host
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: should be "ti,usbhs-host"
+- reg: should contain one register range i.e. start and length
+- ti,hwmods: must contain "usb_host_hs"
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- num-ports: number of USB ports. Usually this is automatically detected
+  from the IP's revision register but can be overridden by specifying
+  this property. A maximum of 3 ports are supported at the moment.
+
+- portN-mode: String specifying the port mode for port N, where N can be
+  from 1 to 3. If the port mode is not specified, that port is treated
+  as unused. When specified, it must be one of the following.
+	"ehci-phy",
+        "ehci-tll",
+        "ehci-hsic",
+        "ohci-phy-6pin-datse0",
+        "ohci-phy-6pin-dpdm",
+        "ohci-phy-3pin-datse0",
+        "ohci-phy-4pin-dpdm",
+        "ohci-tll-6pin-datse0",
+        "ohci-tll-6pin-dpdm",
+        "ohci-tll-3pin-datse0",
+        "ohci-tll-4pin-dpdm",
+        "ohci-tll-2pin-datse0",
+        "ohci-tll-2pin-dpdm",
+
+- single-ulpi-bypass: Must be present if the controller contains a single
+  ULPI bypass control bit. e.g. OMAP3 silicon <= ES2.1
+
+Required properties if child node exists:
+
+- #address-cells: Must be 1
+- #size-cells: Must be 1
+- ranges: must be present
+
+Properties for children:
+
+The OMAP HS USB Host subsystem contains EHCI and OHCI controllers.
+See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-ehci.txt and
+omap3-ohci.txt
+
+Example for OMAP4:
+
+usbhshost: usbhshost@4a064000 {
+	compatible = "ti,usbhs-host";
+	reg = <0x4a064000 0x800>;
+	ti,hwmods = "usb_host_hs";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	ranges;
+
+	usbhsohci: ohci@4a064800 {
+		compatible = "ti,ohci-omap3", "usb-ohci";
+		reg = <0x4a064800 0x400>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+		interrupts = <0 76 0x4>;
+	};
+
+	usbhsehci: ehci@4a064c00 {
+		compatible = "ti,ehci-omap", "usb-ehci";
+		reg = <0x4a064c00 0x400>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+		interrupts = <0 77 0x4>;
+	};
+};
+
+&usbhshost {
+	port1-mode = "ehci-phy";
+	port2-mode = "ehci-tll";
+	port3-mode = "ehci-phy";
+};
+
+&usbhsehci {
+	phys = <&hsusb1_phy 0 &hsusb3_phy>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/omap-usb-tll.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/omap-usb-tll.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..62fe69724e3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/omap-usb-tll.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+OMAP HS USB Host TLL (Transceiver-Less Interface)
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "ti,usbhs-tll"
+- reg : should contain one register range i.e. start and length
+- interrupts : should contain the TLL module's interrupt
+- ti,hwmod : must contain "usb_tll_hs"
+
+Example:
+
+	usbhstll: usbhstll@4a062000 {
+		compatible = "ti,usbhs-tll";
+		reg = <0x4a062000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <78>;
+		ti,hwmods = "usb_tll_hs";
+	  };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/palmas.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/palmas.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e5f0f8303461
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/palmas.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+* palmas device tree bindings
+
+The TI palmas family current members :-
+twl6035 (palmas)
+twl6037 (palmas)
+tps65913 (palmas)
+tps65914 (palmas)
+tps659038
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be from the list
+  ti,twl6035
+  ti,twl6036
+  ti,twl6037
+  ti,tps65913
+  ti,tps65914
+  ti,tps80036
+  ti,tps659038
+and also the generic series names
+  ti,palmas
+- interrupt-controller : palmas has its own internal IRQs
+- #interrupt-cells : should be set to 2 for IRQ number and flags
+  The first cell is the IRQ number.
+  The second cell is the flags, encoded as the trigger masks from
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupts.txt
+- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller.
+
+Optional properties:
+  ti,mux-padX : set the pad register X (1-2) to the correct muxing for the
+		hardware, if not set will use muxing in OTP.
+
+Example:
+
+palmas {
+	compatible = "ti,twl6035", "ti,palmas";
+	reg = <0x48>
+	interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+	interrupt-controller;
+	#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+
+	ti,mux-pad1 = <0>;
+	ti,mux-pad2 = <0>;
+
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+
+	pmic {
+		compatible = "ti,twl6035-pmic", "ti,palmas-pmic";
+		....
+	};
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c9332c626021
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+
+* Samsung S2MPS11 Voltage and Current Regulator
+
+The Samsung S2MP211 is a multi-function device which includes voltage and
+current regulators, RTC, charger controller and other sub-blocks. It is
+interfaced to the host controller using a I2C interface. Each sub-block is
+addressed by the host system using different I2C slave address.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "samsung,s2mps11-pmic".
+- reg: Specifies the I2C slave address of the pmic block. It should be 0x66.
+
+Optional properties:
+- interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which
+  the interrupts from s2mps11 are delivered to.
+- interrupts: Interrupt specifiers for interrupt sources.
+
+Optional nodes:
+- clocks: s2mps11 provides three(AP/CP/BT) buffered 32.768 KHz outputs, so to
+  register these as clocks with common clock framework instantiate a sub-node
+  named "clocks". It uses the common clock binding documented in :
+  [Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt]
+  - #clock-cells: should be 1.
+
+  - The following is the list of clocks generated by the controller. Each clock
+    is assigned an identifier and client nodes use this identifier to specify
+    the clock which they consume.
+    Clock               ID
+    ----------------------
+    32KhzAP		0
+    32KhzCP		1
+    32KhzBT		2
+
+- regulators: The regulators of s2mps11 that have to be instantiated should be
+included in a sub-node named 'regulators'. Regulator nodes included in this
+sub-node should be of the format as listed below.
+
+	regulator_name {
+		[standard regulator constraints....];
+	};
+
+ regulator-ramp-delay for BUCKs = [6250/12500/25000(default)/50000] uV/us
+
+ BUCK[2/3/4/6] supports disabling ramp delay on hardware, so explictly
+ regulator-ramp-delay = <0> can be used for them to disable ramp delay.
+ In absence of regulator-ramp-delay property, default ramp delay will be used.
+
+NOTE: Some BUCKs share the ramp rate setting i.e. same ramp value will be set
+for a particular group of BUCKs. So provide same regulator-ramp-delay<value>.
+Grouping of BUCKs sharing ramp rate setting is as follow : BUCK[1, 6],
+BUCK[3, 4], and BUCK[7, 8, 10]
+
+The regulator constraints inside the regulator nodes use the standard regulator
+bindings which are documented elsewhere.
+
+The following are the names of the regulators that the s2mps11 pmic block
+supports. Note: The 'n' in LDOn and BUCKn represents the LDO or BUCK number
+as per the datasheet of s2mps11.
+
+	- LDOn
+		  - valid values for n are 1 to 28
+		  - Example: LDO0, LD01, LDO28
+	- BUCKn
+		  - valid values for n are 1 to 9.
+		  - Example: BUCK1, BUCK2, BUCK9
+
+Example:
+
+	s2mps11_pmic@66 {
+		compatible = "samsung,s2mps11-pmic";
+		reg = <0x66>;
+
+		s2m_osc: clocks{
+			#clock-cells = 1;
+			clock-output-names = "xx", "yy", "zz";
+		};
+
+		regulators {
+			ldo1_reg: LDO1 {
+				regulator-name = "VDD_ABB_3.3V";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+			};
+
+			ldo2_reg: LDO2 {
+				regulator-name = "VDD_ALIVE_1.1V";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1100000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1100000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			buck1_reg: BUCK1 {
+				regulator-name = "vdd_mif";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <950000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1350000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+			};
+
+			buck2_reg: BUCK2 {
+				regulator-name = "vdd_arm";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <950000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1350000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-ramp-delay = <50000>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..56edb5520685
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+* ST Microelectronics STMPE Multi-Functional Device
+
+STMPE is an MFD device which may expose the following inbuilt devices: gpio,
+keypad, touchscreen, adc, pwm, rotator.
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible                   : "st,stmpe[610|801|811|1601|2401|2403]"
+ - reg                          : I2C/SPI address of the device
+
+Optional properties:
+ - interrupts                   : The interrupt outputs from the controller
+ - interrupt-controller         : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller
+ - interrupt-parent             : Specifies which IRQ controller we're connected to
+ - wakeup-source                : Marks the input device as wakable
+ - st,autosleep-timeout         : Valid entries (ms); 4, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 and 1024
+
+Example:
+
+	stmpe1601: stmpe1601@40 {
+		compatible = "st,stmpe1601";
+		reg = <0x40>;
+		interrupts = <26 0x4>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpio6>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+
+		wakeup-source;
+		st,autosleep-timeout = <1024>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/syscon.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/syscon.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fe8150bb3248
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/syscon.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+* System Controller Registers R/W driver
+
+System controller node represents a register region containing a set
+of miscellaneous registers. The registers are not cohesive enough to
+represent as any specific type of device. The typical use-case is for
+some other node's driver, or platform-specific code, to acquire a
+reference to the syscon node (e.g. by phandle, node path, or search
+using a specific compatible value), interrogate the node (or associated
+OS driver) to determine the location of the registers, and access the
+registers directly.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should contain "syscon".
+- reg: the register region can be accessed from syscon
+
+Examples:
+gpr: iomuxc-gpr@020e0000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx6q-iomuxc-gpr", "syscon";
+	reg = <0x020e0000 0x38>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps6507x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps6507x.txt
new file mode 100755
index 000000000000..8fffa3c5ed40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps6507x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+TPS6507x Power Management Integrated Circuit
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,tps6507x"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+- regulators: This is the list of child nodes that specify the regulator
+  initialization data for defined regulators. Not all regulators for the
+  given device need to be present. The definition for each of these nodes
+  is defined using the standard binding for regulators found at
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt.
+  The regulator is matched with the regulator-compatible.
+
+  The valid regulator-compatible values are:
+  tps6507x: vdcdc1, vdcdc2, vdcdc3, vldo1, vldo2
+- xxx-supply: Input voltage supply regulator.
+  These entries are required if regulators are enabled for a device.
+  Missing of these properties can cause the regulator registration
+  fails.
+  If some of input supply is powered through battery or always-on
+  supply then also it is require to have these parameters with proper
+  node handle of always on power supply.
+  tps6507x:
+       vindcdc1_2-supply: VDCDC1 and VDCDC2 input.
+       vindcdc3-supply  : VDCDC3 input.
+       vldo1_2-supply   : VLDO1 and VLDO2 input.
+
+Regulator Optional properties:
+- defdcdc_default: It's property of DCDC2 and DCDC3 regulators.
+			0: If defdcdc pin of DCDC2/DCDC3 is pulled to GND.
+			1: If defdcdc pin of DCDC2/DCDC3 is driven HIGH.
+  If this property is not defined, it defaults to 0 (not enabled).
+
+Example:
+
+	pmu: tps6507x@48 {
+		compatible = "ti,tps6507x";
+		reg = <0x48>;
+
+		vindcdc1_2-supply = <&vbat>;
+		vindcdc3-supply = <...>;
+		vinldo1_2-supply = <...>;
+
+		regulators {
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			vdcdc1_reg: regulator@0 {
+				regulator-compatible = "VDCDC1";
+				reg = <0>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <3150000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3450000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+			};
+			vdcdc2_reg: regulator@1 {
+				regulator-compatible = "VDCDC2";
+				reg = <1>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1710000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3450000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				defdcdc_default = <1>;
+			};
+			vdcdc3_reg: regulator@2 {
+				regulator-compatible = "VDCDC3";
+				reg = <2>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <950000>
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1350000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				defdcdc_default = <1>;
+			};
+			ldo1_reg: regulator@3 {
+				regulator-compatible = "LDO1";
+				reg = <3>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1710000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1890000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+			};
+			ldo2_reg: regulator@4 {
+				regulator-compatible = "LDO2";
+				reg = <4>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1140000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1320000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+			};
+		};
+
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65910.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65910.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2e3304888ffc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65910.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+TPS65910 Power Management Integrated Circuit
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,tps65910" or "ti,tps65911"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+- interrupts: the interrupt outputs of the controller
+- #gpio-cells: number of cells to describe a GPIO, this should be 2.
+  The first cell is the GPIO number.
+  The second cell is used to specify additional options <unused>.
+- gpio-controller: mark the device as a GPIO controller
+- #interrupt-cells: the number of cells to describe an IRQ, this should be 2.
+  The first cell is the IRQ number.
+  The second cell is the flags, encoded as the trigger masks from
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupts.txt
+- regulators: This is the list of child nodes that specify the regulator
+  initialization data for defined regulators. Not all regulators for the given
+  device need to be present. The definition for each of these nodes is defined
+  using the standard binding for regulators found at
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt.
+  The regulator is matched with the regulator-compatible.
+
+  The valid regulator-compatible values are:
+  tps65910: vrtc, vio, vdd1, vdd2, vdd3, vdig1, vdig2, vpll, vdac, vaux1,
+            vaux2, vaux33, vmmc
+  tps65911: vrtc, vio, vdd1, vdd3, vddctrl, ldo1, ldo2, ldo3, ldo4, ldo5,
+            ldo6, ldo7, ldo8
+
+- xxx-supply: Input voltage supply regulator.
+  These entries are require if regulators are enabled for a device. Missing of these
+  properties can cause the regulator registration fails.
+  If some of input supply is powered through battery or always-on supply then
+  also it is require to have these parameters with proper node handle of always
+  on power supply.
+  tps65910:
+	vcc1-supply: VDD1 input.
+	vcc2-supply: VDD2 input.
+	vcc3-supply: VAUX33 and VMMC input.
+	vcc4-supply: VAUX1 and VAUX2 input.
+	vcc5-supply: VPLL and VDAC input.
+	vcc6-supply: VDIG1 and VDIG2 input.
+	vcc7-supply: VRTC input.
+	vccio-supply: VIO input.
+  tps65911:
+	vcc1-supply: VDD1 input.
+	vcc2-supply: VDD2 input.
+	vcc3-supply: LDO6, LDO7 and LDO8 input.
+	vcc4-supply: LDO5 input.
+	vcc5-supply: LDO3 and LDO4 input.
+	vcc6-supply: LDO1 and LDO2 input.
+	vcc7-supply: VRTC input.
+	vccio-supply: VIO input.
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,vmbch-threshold: (tps65911) main battery charged threshold
+  comparator. (see VMBCH_VSEL in TPS65910 datasheet)
+- ti,vmbch2-threshold: (tps65911) main battery discharged threshold
+  comparator. (see VMBCH_VSEL in TPS65910 datasheet)
+- ti,en-ck32k-xtal: enable external 32-kHz crystal oscillator (see CK32K_CTRL
+  in TPS6591X datasheet)
+- ti,en-gpio-sleep: enable sleep control for gpios
+  There should be 9 entries here, one for each gpio.
+- ti,system-power-controller: Telling whether or not this pmic is controlling
+  the system power.
+
+Regulator Optional properties:
+- ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control: enable external sleep
+  control through external inputs [0 (not enabled), 1 (EN1), 2 (EN2) or 4(EN3)]
+  If this property is not defined, it defaults to 0 (not enabled).
+
+Example:
+
+	pmu: tps65910@d2 {
+		compatible = "ti,tps65910";
+		reg = <0xd2>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+		interrupts = < 0 118 0x04 >;
+
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		gpio-controller;
+
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+
+		ti,system-power-controller;
+
+		ti,vmbch-threshold = 0;
+		ti,vmbch2-threshold = 0;
+		ti,en-ck32k-xtal;
+		ti,en-gpio-sleep = <0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0>;
+
+		vcc1-supply = <&reg_parent>;
+		vcc2-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		vcc3-supply = <...>;
+		vcc4-supply = <...>;
+		vcc5-supply = <...>;
+		vcc6-supply = <...>;
+		vcc7-supply = <...>;
+		vccio-supply = <...>;
+
+		regulators {
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			vdd1_reg: regulator@0 {
+				regulator-compatible = "vdd1";
+				reg = <0>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = < 600000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control = <0>;
+			};
+			vdd2_reg: regulator@1 {
+				regulator-compatible = "vdd2";
+				reg = <1>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = < 600000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control = <4>;
+			};
+			vddctrl_reg: regulator@2 {
+				regulator-compatible = "vddctrl";
+				reg = <2>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = < 600000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1400000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control = <0>;
+			};
+			vio_reg: regulator@3 {
+				regulator-compatible = "vio";
+				reg = <3>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1500000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control = <1>;
+			};
+			ldo1_reg: regulator@4 {
+				regulator-compatible = "ldo1";
+				reg = <4>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control = <0>;
+			};
+			ldo2_reg: regulator@5 {
+				regulator-compatible = "ldo2";
+				reg = <5>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1050000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1050000>;
+				ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control = <0>;
+			};
+			ldo3_reg: regulator@6 {
+				regulator-compatible = "ldo3";
+				reg = <6>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control = <0>;
+			};
+			ldo4_reg: regulator@7 {
+				regulator-compatible = "ldo4";
+				reg = <7>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control = <0>;
+			};
+			ldo5_reg: regulator@8 {
+				regulator-compatible = "ldo5";
+				reg = <8>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control = <0>;
+			};
+			ldo6_reg: regulator@9 {
+				regulator-compatible = "ldo6";
+				reg = <9>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1200000>;
+				ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control = <0>;
+			};
+			ldo7_reg: regulator@10 {
+				regulator-compatible = "ldo7";
+				reg = <10>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1200000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control = <1>;
+			};
+			ldo8_reg: regulator@11 {
+				regulator-compatible = "ldo8";
+				reg = <11>;
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				ti,regulator-ext-sleep-control = <1>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl4030-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl4030-audio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..414d2ae0adf6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl4030-audio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+Texas Instruments TWL family (twl4030) audio module
+
+The audio module inside the TWL family consist of an audio codec and a vibra
+driver.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : must be "ti,twl4030-audio"
+
+Optional properties, nodes:
+
+Audio functionality:
+- codec { }: Need to be present if the audio functionality is used. Within this
+	     section the following options can be used:
+- ti,digimic_delay: Delay need after enabling the digimic to reduce artifacts
+		    from the start of the recorded sample (in ms)
+-ti,ramp_delay_value: HS ramp delay configuration to reduce pop noise
+-ti,hs_extmute: Use external mute for HS pop reduction
+-ti,hs_extmute_gpio: Use external GPIO to control the external mute
+-ti,offset_cncl_path: Offset cancellation path selection, refer to TRM for the
+		      valid values.
+
+Vibra functionality
+- ti,enable-vibra: Need to be set to <1> if the vibra functionality is used. if
+		   missing or it is 0, the vibra functionality is disabled.
+
+Example:
+&i2c1 {
+	clock-frequency = <2600000>;
+
+	twl: twl@48 {
+		reg = <0x48>;
+		interrupts = <7>; /* SYS_NIRQ cascaded to intc */
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+
+		twl_audio: audio {
+			compatible = "ti,twl4030-audio";
+
+			ti,enable-vibra = <1>;
+
+			codec {
+				ti,ramp_delay_value = <3>;
+			};
+
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl4030-power.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl4030-power.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8e15ec35ac99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl4030-power.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+Texas Instruments TWL family (twl4030) reset and power management module
+
+The power management module inside the TWL family provides several facilities
+to control the power resources, including power scripts. For now, the
+binding only supports the complete shutdown of the system after poweroff.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : must be "ti,twl4030-power"
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,use_poweroff: With this flag, the chip will initiates an ACTIVE-to-OFF or
+		   SLEEP-to-OFF transition when the system poweroffs.
+
+Example:
+&i2c1 {
+	clock-frequency = <2600000>;
+
+	twl: twl@48 {
+		reg = <0x48>;
+		interrupts = <7>; /* SYS_NIRQ cascaded to intc */
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+
+		twl_power: power {
+			compatible = "ti,twl4030-power";
+			ti,use_poweroff;
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl6040.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl6040.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0f5dd709d752
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl6040.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+Texas Instruments TWL6040 family
+
+The TWL6040s are 8-channel high quality low-power audio codecs providing audio,
+vibra and GPO functionality on OMAP4+ platforms.
+They are connected ot the host processor via i2c for commands, McPDM for audio
+data and commands.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "ti,twl6040" for twl6040, "ti,twl6041" for twl6041
+- reg: must be 0x4b for i2c address
+- interrupts: twl6040 has one interrupt line connecteded to the main SoC
+- interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller
+- gpio-controller:
+- #gpio-cells = <1>: twl6040 provides GPO lines.
+- twl6040,audpwron-gpio: Power on GPIO line for the twl6040
+
+- vio-supply: Regulator for the twl6040 VIO supply
+- v2v1-supply: Regulator for the twl6040 V2V1 supply
+
+Optional properties, nodes:
+- enable-active-high: To power on the twl6040 during boot.
+
+Vibra functionality
+Required properties:
+- vddvibl-supply: Regulator for the left vibra motor
+- vddvibr-supply: Regulator for the right vibra motor
+- vibra { }: Configuration section for vibra parameters containing the following
+	     properties:
+- ti,vibldrv-res: Resistance parameter for left driver
+- ti,vibrdrv-res: Resistance parameter for right driver
+- ti,viblmotor-res: Resistance parameter for left motor
+- ti,viblmotor-res: Resistance parameter for right motor
+
+Optional properties within vibra { } section:
+- vddvibl_uV: If the vddvibl default voltage need to be changed
+- vddvibr_uV: If the vddvibr default voltage need to be changed
+
+Example:
+&i2c1 {
+	twl6040: twl@4b {
+		compatible = "ti,twl6040";
+
+		interrupts = <0 119 4>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+		twl6040,audpwron-gpio = <&gpio4 31 0>;
+
+		vio-supply = <&v1v8>;
+		v2v1-supply = <&v2v1>;
+		enable-active-high;
+
+		/* regulators for vibra motor */
+		vddvibl-supply = <&vbat>;
+		vddvibr-supply = <&vbat>;
+
+		vibra {
+			/* Vibra driver, motor resistance parameters */
+			ti,vibldrv-res = <8>;
+			ti,vibrdrv-res = <3>;
+			ti,viblmotor-res = <10>;
+			ti,vibrmotor-res = <10>;
+		};
+	};
+};
+
+/include/ "twl6040.dtsi"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/bootbus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/bootbus.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6581478225a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/bootbus.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+* Boot Bus
+
+The Octeon Boot Bus is a configurable parallel bus with 8 chip
+selects.  Each chip select is independently configurable.
+
+Properties:
+- compatible: "cavium,octeon-3860-bootbus"
+
+  Compatibility with all cn3XXX, cn5XXX and cn6XXX SOCs.
+
+- reg: The base address of the Boot Bus' register bank.
+
+- #address-cells: Must be <2>.  The first cell is the chip select
+   within the bootbus.  The second cell is the offset from the chip select.
+
+- #size-cells: Must be <1>.
+
+- ranges: There must be one one triplet of (child-bus-address,
+  parent-bus-address, length) for each active chip select.  If the
+  length element for any triplet is zero, the chip select is disabled,
+  making it inactive.
+
+The configuration parameters for each chip select are stored in child
+nodes.
+
+Configuration Properties:
+- compatible:  "cavium,octeon-3860-bootbus-config"
+
+- cavium,cs-index: A single cell indicating the chip select that
+  corresponds to this configuration.
+
+- cavium,t-adr: A cell specifying the ADR timing (in nS).
+
+- cavium,t-ce: A cell specifying the CE timing (in nS).
+
+- cavium,t-oe: A cell specifying the OE timing (in nS).
+
+- cavium,t-we: A cell specifying the WE timing (in nS).
+
+- cavium,t-rd-hld: A cell specifying the RD_HLD timing (in nS).
+
+- cavium,t-wr-hld: A cell specifying the WR_HLD timing (in nS).
+
+- cavium,t-pause: A cell specifying the PAUSE timing (in nS).
+
+- cavium,t-wait: A cell specifying the WAIT timing (in nS).
+
+- cavium,t-page: A cell specifying the PAGE timing (in nS).
+
+- cavium,t-rd-dly: A cell specifying the RD_DLY timing (in nS).
+
+- cavium,pages: A cell specifying the PAGES parameter (0 = 8 bytes, 1
+  = 2 bytes, 2 = 4 bytes, 3 = 8 bytes).
+
+- cavium,wait-mode: Optional.  If present, wait mode (WAITM) is selected.
+
+- cavium,page-mode: Optional.  If present, page mode (PAGEM) is selected.
+
+- cavium,bus-width: A cell specifying the WIDTH parameter (in bits) of
+  the bus for this chip select.
+
+- cavium,ale-mode: Optional.  If present, ALE mode is selected.
+
+- cavium,sam-mode: Optional.  If present, SAM mode is selected.
+
+- cavium,or-mode: Optional.  If present, OR mode is selected.
+
+Example:
+	bootbus: bootbus@1180000000000 {
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-bootbus";
+		reg = <0x11800 0x00000000 0x0 0x200>;
+		/* The chip select number and offset */
+		#address-cells = <2>;
+		/* The size of the chip select region */
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0 0  0x0 0x1f400000  0xc00000>,
+			 <1 0  0x10000 0x30000000  0>,
+			 <2 0  0x10000 0x40000000  0>,
+			 <3 0  0x10000 0x50000000  0>,
+			 <4 0  0x0 0x1d020000  0x10000>,
+			 <5 0  0x0 0x1d040000  0x10000>,
+			 <6 0  0x0 0x1d050000  0x10000>,
+			 <7 0  0x10000 0x90000000  0>;
+
+			cavium,cs-config@0 {
+			compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-bootbus-config";
+			cavium,cs-index = <0>;
+			cavium,t-adr  = <20>;
+			cavium,t-ce   = <60>;
+			cavium,t-oe   = <60>;
+			cavium,t-we   = <45>;
+			cavium,t-rd-hld = <35>;
+			cavium,t-wr-hld = <45>;
+			cavium,t-pause  = <0>;
+			cavium,t-wait   = <0>;
+			cavium,t-page   = <35>;
+			cavium,t-rd-dly = <0>;
+
+			cavium,pages     = <0>;
+			cavium,bus-width = <8>;
+		};
+		.
+		.
+		.
+		cavium,cs-config@6 {
+			compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-bootbus-config";
+			cavium,cs-index = <6>;
+			cavium,t-adr  = <5>;
+			cavium,t-ce   = <300>;
+			cavium,t-oe   = <270>;
+			cavium,t-we   = <150>;
+			cavium,t-rd-hld = <100>;
+			cavium,t-wr-hld = <70>;
+			cavium,t-pause  = <0>;
+			cavium,t-wait   = <0>;
+			cavium,t-page   = <320>;
+			cavium,t-rd-dly = <0>;
+
+			cavium,pages     = <0>;
+			cavium,wait-mode;
+			cavium,bus-width = <16>;
+		};
+		.
+		.
+		.
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/ciu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/ciu.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2c2d0746b43d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/ciu.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+* Central Interrupt Unit
+
+Properties:
+- compatible: "cavium,octeon-3860-ciu"
+
+  Compatibility with all cn3XXX, cn5XXX and cn63XX SOCs.
+
+- interrupt-controller:  This is an interrupt controller.
+
+- reg: The base address of the CIU's register bank.
+
+- #interrupt-cells: Must be <2>.  The first cell is the bank within
+   the CIU and may have a value of 0 or 1.  The second cell is the bit
+   within the bank and may have a value between 0 and 63.
+
+Example:
+	interrupt-controller@1070000000000 {
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-ciu";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		/* Interrupts are specified by two parts:
+		 * 1) Controller register (0 or 1)
+		 * 2) Bit within the register (0..63)
+		 */
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+		reg = <0x10700 0x00000000 0x0 0x7000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/ciu2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/ciu2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0ec7ba8bbbcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/ciu2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+* Central Interrupt Unit
+
+Properties:
+- compatible: "cavium,octeon-6880-ciu2"
+
+  Compatibility with 68XX SOCs.
+
+- interrupt-controller:  This is an interrupt controller.
+
+- reg: The base address of the CIU's register bank.
+
+- #interrupt-cells: Must be <2>.  The first cell is the bank within
+  the CIU and may have a value between 0 and 63.  The second cell is
+  the bit within the bank and may also have a value between 0 and 63.
+
+Example:
+	interrupt-controller@1070100000000 {
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-6880-ciu2";
+		interrupt-controller;
+		/* Interrupts are specified by two parts:
+		 * 1) Controller register (0..63)
+		 * 2) Bit within the register (0..63)
+		 */
+		#address-cells = <0>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+		reg = <0x10701 0x00000000 0x0 0x4000000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/dma-engine.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/dma-engine.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a5bdff400002
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/dma-engine.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+* DMA Engine.
+
+The Octeon DMA Engine transfers between the Boot Bus and main memory.
+The DMA Engine will be referred to by phandle by any device that is
+connected to it.
+
+Properties:
+- compatible: "cavium,octeon-5750-bootbus-dma"
+
+  Compatibility with all cn52XX, cn56XX and cn6XXX SOCs.
+
+- reg: The base address of the DMA Engine's register bank.
+
+- interrupts: A single interrupt specifier.
+
+Example:
+	dma0: dma-engine@1180000000100 {
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-5750-bootbus-dma";
+		reg = <0x11800 0x00000100 0x0 0x8>;
+		interrupts = <0 63>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/uctl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/uctl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..aa66b9b8d801
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/uctl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+* UCTL USB controller glue
+
+Properties:
+- compatible: "cavium,octeon-6335-uctl"
+
+  Compatibility with all cn6XXX SOCs.
+
+- reg: The base address of the UCTL register bank.
+
+- #address-cells: Must be <2>.
+
+- #size-cells: Must be <2>.
+
+- ranges: Empty to signify direct mapping of the children.
+
+- refclk-frequency: A single cell containing the reference clock
+  frequency in Hz.
+
+- refclk-type: A string describing the reference clock connection
+  either "crystal" or "external".
+
+Example:
+	uctl@118006f000000 {
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-6335-uctl";
+		reg = <0x11800 0x6f000000 0x0 0x100>;
+		ranges; /* Direct mapping */
+		#address-cells = <2>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		/* 12MHz, 24MHz and 48MHz allowed */
+		refclk-frequency = <24000000>;
+		/* Either "crystal" or "external" */
+		refclk-type = "crystal";
+
+		ehci@16f0000000000 {
+			compatible = "cavium,octeon-6335-ehci","usb-ehci";
+			reg = <0x16f00 0x00000000 0x0 0x100>;
+			interrupts = <0 56>;
+			big-endian-regs;
+		};
+		ohci@16f0000000400 {
+			compatible = "cavium,octeon-6335-ohci","usb-ohci";
+			reg = <0x16f00 0x00000400 0x0 0x100>;
+			interrupts = <0 56>;
+			big-endian-regs;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cpu_irq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cpu_irq.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..13aa4b62c62a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cpu_irq.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+MIPS CPU interrupt controller
+
+On MIPS the mips_cpu_intc_init() helper can be used to initialize the 8 CPU
+IRQs from a devicetree file and create a irq_domain for IRQ controller.
+
+With the irq_domain in place we can describe how the 8 IRQs are wired to the
+platforms internal interrupt controller cascade.
+
+Below is an example of a platform describing the cascade inside the devicetree
+and the code used to load it inside arch_init_irq().
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "mti,cpu-interrupt-controller"
+
+Example devicetree:
+	cpu-irq: cpu-irq@0 {
+		#address-cells = <0>;
+
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+
+		compatible = "mti,cpu-interrupt-controller";
+	};
+
+	intc: intc@200 {
+		compatible = "ralink,rt2880-intc";
+		reg = <0x200 0x100>;
+
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+
+		interrupt-parent = <&cpu-irq>;
+		interrupts = <2>;
+	};
+
+
+Example platform irq.c:
+static struct of_device_id __initdata of_irq_ids[] = {
+	{ .compatible = "mti,cpu-interrupt-controller", .data = mips_cpu_intc_init },
+	{ .compatible = "ralink,rt2880-intc", .data = intc_of_init },
+	{},
+};
+
+void __init arch_init_irq(void)
+{
+	of_irq_init(of_irq_ids);
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/ralink.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/ralink.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b35a8d04f8b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/ralink.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Ralink MIPS SoC device tree bindings
+
+1. SoCs
+
+Each device tree must specify a compatible value for the Ralink SoC
+it uses in the compatible property of the root node. The compatible
+value must be one of the following values:
+
+  ralink,rt2880-soc
+  ralink,rt3050-soc
+  ralink,rt3052-soc
+  ralink,rt3350-soc
+  ralink,rt3352-soc
+  ralink,rt3883-soc
+  ralink,rt5350-soc
+  ralink,mt7620a-soc
+  ralink,mt7620n-soc
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/at25.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/at25.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1d3447165c37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/at25.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+EEPROMs (SPI) compatible with Atmel at25.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "atmel,at25".
+- reg : chip select number
+- spi-max-frequency : max spi frequency to use
+- pagesize : size of the eeprom page
+- size : total eeprom size in bytes
+- address-width : number of address bits (one of 8, 16, or 24)
+
+Optional properties:
+- spi-cpha : SPI shifted clock phase, as per spi-bus bindings.
+- spi-cpol : SPI inverse clock polarity, as per spi-bus bindings.
+- read-only : this parameter-less property disables writes to the eeprom
+
+Obsolete legacy properties are can be used in place of "size", "pagesize",
+"address-width", and "read-only":
+- at25,byte-len : total eeprom size in bytes
+- at25,addr-mode : addr-mode flags, as defined in include/linux/spi/eeprom.h
+- at25,page-size : size of the eeprom page
+
+Additional compatible properties are also allowed.
+
+Example:
+	at25@0 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at25", "st,m95256";
+		reg = <0>
+		spi-max-frequency = <5000000>;
+		spi-cpha;
+		spi-cpol;
+
+		pagesize = <64>;
+		size = <32768>;
+		address-width = <16>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/atmel-ssc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/atmel-ssc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a45ae08c8ed1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/atmel-ssc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+* Atmel SSC driver.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "atmel,at91rm9200-ssc" or "atmel,at91sam9g45-ssc"
+	- atmel,at91rm9200-ssc: support pdc transfer
+	- atmel,at91sam9g45-ssc: support dma transfer
+- reg: Should contain SSC registers location and length
+- interrupts: Should contain SSC interrupt
+
+
+Required properties for devices compatible with "atmel,at91sam9g45-ssc":
+- dmas: DMA specifier, consisting of a phandle to DMA controller node,
+  the memory interface and SSC DMA channel ID (for tx and rx).
+  See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-dma.txt for details.
+- dma-names: Must be "tx", "rx".
+
+Examples:
+- PDC transfer:
+ssc0: ssc@fffbc000 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-ssc";
+	reg = <0xfffbc000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <14 4 5>;
+};
+
+- DMA transfer:
+ssc0: ssc@f0010000 {
+      compatible = "atmel,at91sam9g45-ssc";
+      reg = <0xf0010000 0x4000>;
+      interrupts = <28 4 5>;
+      dmas = <&dma0 1 13>,
+	     <&dma0 1 14>;
+      dma-names = "tx", "rx";
+      pinctrl-names = "default";
+      pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_ssc0_tx &pinctrl_ssc0_rx>;
+      status = "disabled";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/bmp085.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/bmp085.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..91dfda2e4e11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/bmp085.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+BMP085/BMP18x digital pressure sensors
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: bosch,bmp085
+
+Optional properties:
+- chip-id: configurable chip id for non-default chip revisions
+- temp-measurement-period: temperature measurement period (milliseconds)
+- default-oversampling: default oversampling value to be used at startup,
+  value range is 0-3 with rising sensitivity.
+
+Example:
+
+pressure@77 {
+	compatible = "bosch,bmp085";
+	reg = <0x77>;
+	chip-id = <10>;
+	temp-measurement-period = <100>;
+	default-oversampling = <2>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/ifm-csi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/ifm-csi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5bdfffb0b9f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/ifm-csi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+IFM camera sensor interface on mpc5200 LocalPlus bus
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ifm,o2d-csi"
+- reg: specifies sensor chip select number and associated address range
+- interrupts: external interrupt line number and interrupt sense mode
+  of the interrupt line signaling frame valid events
+- gpios: three gpio-specifiers for "capture", "reset" and "master enable"
+  GPIOs (strictly in this order).
+- ifm,csi-clk-handle: the phandle to a node in the DT describing the sensor
+  clock generator. This node is usually a general purpose timer controller.
+- ifm,csi-addr-bus-width: address bus width (valid values are 16, 24, 25)
+- ifm,csi-data-bus-width: data bus width (valid values are 8 and 16)
+- ifm,csi-wait-cycles: sensor bus wait cycles
+
+Optional properties:
+- ifm,csi-byte-swap: if this property is present, the byte swapping on
+  the bus will be enabled.
+
+Example:
+
+	csi@3,0 {
+		compatible = "ifm,o2d-csi";
+		reg = <3 0 0x00100000>;		/* CS 3, 1 MiB range */
+		interrupts = <1 1 2>;		/* IRQ1, edge falling */
+
+		ifm,csi-clk-handle = <&timer7>;
+		gpios = <&gpio_simple 23 0	/* image_capture */
+			 &gpio_simple 26 0	/* image_reset */
+			 &gpio_simple 29 0>;	/* image_master_en */
+
+		ifm,csi-addr-bus-width = <24>;
+		ifm,csi-data-bus-width = <8>;
+		ifm,csi-wait-cycles = <0>;
+	};
+
+The base address of the used chip select is specified in the
+ranges property of the parent localbus node, for example:
+
+	ranges = <0 0 0xff000000 0x01000000
+		  3 0 0xe3000000 0x00100000>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/lis302.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/lis302.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6def86f6b053
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/lis302.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+LIS302 accelerometer devicetree bindings
+
+This device is matched via its bus drivers, and has a number of properties
+that apply in on the generic device (independent from the bus).
+
+
+Required properties for the SPI bindings:
+ - compatible: 		should be set to "st,lis3lv02d_spi"
+ - reg:			the chipselect index
+ - spi-max-frequency:	maximal bus speed, should be set to 1000000 unless
+			constrained by external circuitry
+ - interrupts:		the interrupt generated by the device
+
+Required properties for the I2C bindings:
+ - compatible:		should be set to "st,lis3lv02d"
+ - reg:			i2c slave address
+ - Vdd-supply:		The input supply for Vdd
+ - Vdd_IO-supply:	The input supply for Vdd_IO
+
+
+Optional properties for all bus drivers:
+
+ - st,click-single-{x,y,z}:	if present, tells the device to issue an
+				interrupt on single click events on the
+				x/y/z axis.
+ - st,click-double-{x,y,z}:	if present, tells the device to issue an
+				interrupt on double click events on the
+				x/y/z axis.
+ - st,click-thresh-{x,y,z}:	set the x/y/z axis threshold
+ - st,click-click-time-limit:	click time limit, from 0 to 127.5msec
+				with step of 0.5 msec
+ - st,click-latency:		click latency, from 0 to 255 msec with
+				step of 1 msec.
+ - st,click-window:		click window, from 0 to 255 msec with
+				step of 1 msec.
+ - st,irq{1,2}-disable:		disable IRQ 1/2
+ - st,irq{1,2}-ff-wu-1:		raise IRQ 1/2 on FF_WU_1 condition
+ - st,irq{1,2}-ff-wu-2:		raise IRQ 1/2 on FF_WU_2 condition
+ - st,irq{1,2}-data-ready:	raise IRQ 1/2 on data ready contition
+ - st,irq{1,2}-click:		raise IRQ 1/2 on click condition
+ - st,irq-open-drain:		consider IRQ lines open-drain
+ - st,irq-active-low:		make IRQ lines active low
+ - st,wu-duration-1:		duration register for Free-Fall/Wake-Up
+				interrupt 1
+ - st,wu-duration-2:		duration register for Free-Fall/Wake-Up
+				interrupt 2
+ - st,wakeup-{x,y,z}-{lo,hi}:	set wakeup condition on x/y/z axis for
+				upper/lower limit
+ - st,highpass-cutoff-hz=:	1, 2, 4 or 8 for 1Hz, 2Hz, 4Hz or 8Hz of
+				highpass cut-off frequency
+ - st,hipass{1,2}-disable:	disable highpass 1/2.
+ - st,default-rate=:		set the default rate
+ - st,axis-{x,y,z}=:		set the axis to map to the three coordinates
+ - st,{min,max}-limit-{x,y,z}	set the min/max limits for x/y/z axis
+				(used by self-test)
+
+
+Example for a SPI device node:
+
+	lis302@0 {
+		compatible = "st,lis302dl-spi";
+		reg = <0>;
+		spi-max-frequency = <1000000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+		interrupts = <104 0>;
+
+		st,click-single-x;
+		st,click-single-y;
+		st,click-single-z;
+		st,click-thresh-x = <10>;
+		st,click-thresh-y = <10>;
+		st,click-thresh-z = <10>;
+		st,irq1-click;
+		st,irq2-click;
+		st,wakeup-x-lo;
+		st,wakeup-x-hi;
+		st,wakeup-y-lo;
+		st,wakeup-y-hi;
+		st,wakeup-z-lo;
+		st,wakeup-z-hi;
+	};
+
+Example for a I2C device node:
+
+	lis331dlh: lis331dlh@18 {
+		compatible = "st,lis331dlh", "st,lis3lv02d";
+		reg = <0x18>;
+		Vdd-supply = <&lis3_reg>;
+		Vdd_IO-supply = <&lis3_reg>;
+
+		st,click-single-x;
+		st,click-single-y;
+		st,click-single-z;
+		st,click-thresh-x = <10>;
+		st,click-thresh-y = <10>;
+		st,click-thresh-z = <10>;
+		st,irq1-click;
+		st,irq2-click;
+		st,wakeup-x-lo;
+		st,wakeup-x-hi;
+		st,wakeup-y-lo;
+		st,wakeup-y-hi;
+		st,wakeup-z-lo;
+		st,wakeup-z-hi;
+		st,min-limit-x = <120>;
+		st,min-limit-y = <120>;
+		st,min-limit-z = <140>;
+		st,max-limit-x = <550>;
+		st,max-limit-y = <550>;
+		st,max-limit-z = <750>;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/smc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/smc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6c9f176f3571
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/smc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+Broadcom Secure Monitor Bounce buffer
+-----------------------------------------------------
+This binding defines the location of the bounce buffer
+used for non-secure to secure communications.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "brcm,kona-smc"
+- DEPRECATED: compatible : "bcm,kona-smc"
+- reg : Location and size of bounce buffer
+
+Example:
+	smc@0x3404c000 {
+		compatible = "brcm,bcm11351-smc", "brcm,kona-smc";
+		reg = <0x3404c000 0x400>; //1 KiB in SRAM
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/sram.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/sram.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4d0a00e453a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/sram.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+Generic on-chip SRAM
+
+Simple IO memory regions to be managed by the genalloc API.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : mmio-sram
+
+- reg : SRAM iomem address range
+
+Example:
+
+sram: sram@5c000000 {
+	compatible = "mmio-sram";
+	reg = <0x5c000000 0x40000>; /* 256 KiB SRAM at address 0x5c000000 */
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/atmel-hsmci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/atmel-hsmci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0a85c70cd30a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/atmel-hsmci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+* Atmel High Speed MultiMedia Card Interface
+
+This controller on atmel products provides an interface for MMC, SD and SDIO
+types of memory cards.
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties described
+by mmc.txt and the properties used by the atmel-mci driver.
+
+1) MCI node
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "atmel,hsmci"
+- #address-cells: should be one. The cell is the slot id.
+- #size-cells: should be zero.
+- at least one slot node
+
+The node contains child nodes for each slot that the platform uses
+
+Example MCI node:
+
+mmc0: mmc@f0008000 {
+	compatible = "atmel,hsmci";
+	reg = <0xf0008000 0x600>;
+	interrupts = <12 4>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+
+	[ child node definitions...]
+};
+
+2) slot nodes
+
+Required properties:
+- reg: should contain the slot id.
+- bus-width: number of data lines connected to the controller
+
+Optional properties:
+- cd-gpios: specify GPIOs for card detection
+- cd-inverted: invert the value of external card detect gpio line
+- wp-gpios: specify GPIOs for write protection
+
+Example slot node:
+
+slot@0 {
+	reg = <0>;
+	bus-width = <4>;
+	cd-gpios = <&pioD 15 0>
+	cd-inverted;
+};
+
+Example full MCI node:
+mmc0: mmc@f0008000 {
+	compatible = "atmel,hsmci";
+	reg = <0xf0008000 0x600>;
+	interrupts = <12 4>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	slot@0 {
+		reg = <0>;
+		bus-width = <4>;
+		cd-gpios = <&pioD 15 0>
+		cd-inverted;
+	};
+	slot@1 {
+		reg = <1>;
+		bus-width = <4>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/brcm,bcm2835-sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/brcm,bcm2835-sdhci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..59476fbdbfa1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/brcm,bcm2835-sdhci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+Broadcom BCM2835 SDHCI controller
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties described
+by mmc.txt and the properties that represent the BCM2835 controller.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "brcm,bcm2835-sdhci".
+- clocks : The clock feeding the SDHCI controller.
+
+Example:
+
+sdhci: sdhci {
+	compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-sdhci";
+	reg = <0x7e300000 0x100>;
+	interrupts = <2 30>;
+	clocks = <&clk_mmc>;
+	bus-width = <4>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/davinci_mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/davinci_mmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e5a0140b2381
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/davinci_mmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+* TI Highspeed MMC host controller for DaVinci
+
+The Highspeed MMC Host Controller on TI DaVinci family
+provides an interface for MMC, SD and SDIO types of memory cards.
+
+This file documents the properties used by the davinci_mmc driver.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:
+ Should be "ti,da830-mmc": for da830, da850, dm365
+ Should be "ti,dm355-mmc": for dm355, dm644x
+
+Optional properties:
+- bus-width: Number of data lines, can be <1>, <4>, or <8>, default <1>
+- max-frequency: Maximum operating clock frequency, default 25MHz.
+- dmas: List of DMA specifiers with the controller specific format
+	as described in the generic DMA client binding. A tx and rx
+	specifier is required.
+- dma-names: RX and TX  DMA request names. These strings correspond
+	1:1 with the DMA specifiers listed in dmas.
+
+Example:
+mmc0: mmc@1c40000 {
+	compatible = "ti,da830-mmc",
+	reg = <0x40000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <16>;
+	status = "okay";
+	bus-width = <4>;
+	max-frequency = <50000000>;
+	dmas = <&edma 16
+		&edma 17>;
+	dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c67b975c8906
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+* Samsung Exynos specific extensions to the Synopsys Designware Mobile
+  Storage Host Controller
+
+The Synopsys designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface
+a SoC with storage medium such as eMMC or SD/MMC cards. This file documents
+differences between the core Synopsys dw mshc controller properties described
+by synopsys-dw-mshc.txt and the properties used by the Samsung Exynos specific
+extensions to the Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+* compatible: should be
+	- "samsung,exynos4210-dw-mshc": for controllers with Samsung Exynos4210
+	  specific extensions.
+	- "samsung,exynos4412-dw-mshc": for controllers with Samsung Exynos4412
+	  specific extensions.
+	- "samsung,exynos5250-dw-mshc": for controllers with Samsung Exynos5250
+	  specific extensions.
+
+* samsung,dw-mshc-ciu-div: Specifies the divider value for the card interface
+  unit (ciu) clock. This property is applicable only for Exynos5 SoC's and
+  ignored for Exynos4 SoC's. The valid range of divider value is 0 to 7.
+
+* samsung,dw-mshc-sdr-timing: Specifies the value of CIU clock phase shift value
+  in transmit mode and CIU clock phase shift value in receive mode for single
+  data rate mode operation. Refer notes below for the order of the cells and the
+  valid values.
+
+* samsung,dw-mshc-ddr-timing: Specifies the value of CUI clock phase shift value
+  in transmit mode and CIU clock phase shift value in receive mode for double
+  data rate mode operation. Refer notes below for the order of the cells and the
+  valid values.
+
+  Notes for the sdr-timing and ddr-timing values:
+
+    The order of the cells should be
+      - First Cell: CIU clock phase shift value for tx mode.
+      - Second Cell: CIU clock phase shift value for rx mode.
+
+    Valid values for SDR and DDR CIU clock timing for Exynos5250:
+      - valid value for tx phase shift and rx phase shift is 0 to 7.
+      - when CIU clock divider value is set to 3, all possible 8 phase shift
+        values can be used.
+      - if CIU clock divider value is 0 (that is divide by 1), both tx and rx
+        phase shift clocks should be 0.
+
+Required properties for a slot:
+
+* gpios: specifies a list of gpios used for command, clock and data bus. The
+  first gpio is the command line and the second gpio is the clock line. The
+  rest of the gpios (depending on the bus-width property) are the data lines in
+  no particular order. The format of the gpio specifier depends on the gpio
+  controller.
+
+Example:
+
+  The MSHC controller node can be split into two portions, SoC specific and
+  board specific portions as listed below.
+
+	dwmmc0@12200000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos5250-dw-mshc";
+		reg = <0x12200000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 75 0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+	};
+
+	dwmmc0@12200000 {
+		num-slots = <1>;
+		supports-highspeed;
+		broken-cd;
+		fifo-depth = <0x80>;
+		card-detect-delay = <200>;
+		samsung,dw-mshc-ciu-div = <3>;
+		samsung,dw-mshc-sdr-timing = <2 3>;
+		samsung,dw-mshc-ddr-timing = <1 2>;
+
+		slot@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+			bus-width = <8>;
+			gpios = <&gpc0 0 2 0 3>, <&gpc0 1 2 0 3>,
+				<&gpc1 0 2 3 3>, <&gpc1 1 2 3 3>,
+				<&gpc1 2 2 3 3>, <&gpc1 3 2 3 3>,
+				<&gpc0 3 2 3 3>, <&gpc0 4 2 3 3>,
+				<&gpc0 5 2 3 3>, <&gpc0 6 2 3 3>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt
index 64bcb8be973c..b7943f3f9995 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt
@@ -3,19 +3,25 @@
 The Enhanced Secure Digital Host Controller provides an interface
 for MMC, SD, and SDIO types of memory cards.
 
+This file documents differences between the core properties described
+by mmc.txt and the properties used by the sdhci-esdhc driver.
+
 Required properties:
-  - compatible : should be
-    "fsl,<chip>-esdhc", "fsl,esdhc"
-  - reg : should contain eSDHC registers location and length.
-  - interrupts : should contain eSDHC interrupt.
   - interrupt-parent : interrupt source phandle.
   - clock-frequency : specifies eSDHC base clock frequency.
-  - sdhci,wp-inverted : (optional) specifies that eSDHC controller
-    reports inverted write-protect state;
-  - sdhci,1-bit-only : (optional) specifies that a controller can
-    only handle 1-bit data transfers.
-  - sdhci,auto-cmd12: (optional) specifies that a controller can
-    only handle auto CMD12.
+
+Optional properties:
+  - sdhci,wp-inverted : specifies that eSDHC controller reports
+    inverted write-protect state; New devices should use the generic
+    "wp-inverted" property.
+  - sdhci,1-bit-only : specifies that a controller can only handle
+    1-bit data transfers. New devices should use the generic
+    "bus-width = <1>" property.
+  - sdhci,auto-cmd12: specifies that a controller can only handle auto
+    CMD12.
+  - voltage-ranges : two cells are required, first cell specifies minimum
+    slot voltage (mV), second cell specifies maximum slot voltage (mV).
+    Several ranges could be specified.
 
 Example:
 
@@ -26,4 +32,5 @@ sdhci@2e000 {
 	interrupt-parent = <&ipic>;
 	/* Filled in by U-Boot */
 	clock-frequency = <0>;
+	voltage-ranges = <3300 3300>;
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt
index ab22fe6e73ab..1dd622546d06 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt
@@ -3,17 +3,15 @@
 The Enhanced Secure Digital Host Controller on Freescale i.MX family
 provides an interface for MMC, SD, and SDIO types of memory cards.
 
+This file documents differences between the core properties described
+by mmc.txt and the properties used by the sdhci-esdhc-imx driver.
+
 Required properties:
 - compatible : Should be "fsl,<chip>-esdhc"
-- reg : Should contain eSDHC registers location and length
-- interrupts : Should contain eSDHC interrupt
 
 Optional properties:
-- fsl,card-wired : Indicate the card is wired to host permanently
-- fsl,cd-internal : Indicate to use controller internal card detection
-- fsl,wp-internal : Indicate to use controller internal write protection
-- cd-gpios : Specify GPIOs for card detection
-- wp-gpios : Specify GPIOs for write protection
+- fsl,cd-controller : Indicate to use controller internal card detection
+- fsl,wp-controller : Indicate to use controller internal write protection
 
 Examples:
 
@@ -21,14 +19,14 @@ esdhc@70004000 {
 	compatible = "fsl,imx51-esdhc";
 	reg = <0x70004000 0x4000>;
 	interrupts = <1>;
-	fsl,cd-internal;
-	fsl,wp-internal;
+	fsl,cd-controller;
+	fsl,wp-controller;
 };
 
 esdhc@70008000 {
 	compatible = "fsl,imx51-esdhc";
 	reg = <0x70008000 0x4000>;
 	interrupts = <2>;
-	cd-gpios = <&gpio0 6 0>; /* GPIO1_6 */
-	wp-gpios = <&gpio0 5 0>; /* GPIO1_5 */
+	cd-gpios = <&gpio1 6 0>; /* GPIO1_6 */
+	wp-gpios = <&gpio1 5 0>; /* GPIO1_5 */
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-mmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..db442355cd24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-mmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+* Freescale Secure Digital Host Controller for i.MX2/3 series
+
+This file documents differences to the properties defined in mmc.txt.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "fsl,<chip>-mmc", chip can be imx21 or imx31
+
+Optional properties:
+- dmas: One DMA phandle with arguments as defined by the devicetree bindings
+	of the used DMA controller.
+- dma-names: Has to be "rx-tx".
+
+Example:
+
+sdhci1: sdhci@10014000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx27-mmc", "fsl,imx21-mmc";
+	reg = <0x10014000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <11>;
+	dmas = <&dma 7>;
+	dma-names = "rx-tx";
+	bus-width = <4>;
+	cd-gpios = <&gpio3 29>;
+	status = "okay";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/kona-sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/kona-sdhci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..789fb07a426d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/kona-sdhci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Broadcom BCM281xx SDHCI
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt
+and the properties present in the bcm281xx SDHCI
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "brcm,kona-sdhci"
+- DEPRECATED: compatible : Should be "bcm,kona-sdhci"
+
+Example:
+
+sdio2: sdio@0x3f1a0000 {
+	compatible = "brcm,kona-sdhci";
+	reg = <0x3f1a0000 0x10000>;
+	interrupts = <0x0 74 0x4>;
+};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt
index 89a0084df2f7..0e5e2ec4001d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,9 @@
 MMC/SD/SDIO slot directly connected to a SPI bus
 
+This file documents differences between the core properties described
+by mmc.txt and the properties used by the mmc_spi driver.
+
 Required properties:
-- compatible : should be "mmc-spi-slot".
-- reg : should specify SPI address (chip-select number).
 - spi-max-frequency : maximum frequency for this device (Hz).
 - voltage-ranges : two cells are required, first cell specifies minimum
   slot voltage (mV), second cell specifies maximum slot voltage (mV).
@@ -10,8 +11,8 @@ Required properties:
 
 Optional properties:
 - gpios : may specify GPIOs in this order: Card-Detect GPIO,
-  Write-Protect GPIO.
-- interrupts : the interrupt of a card detect interrupt.
+  Write-Protect GPIO. Note that this does not follow the
+  binding from mmc.txt, for historical reasons.
 - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that
   services interrupts for this device.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..458b57f199af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+These properties are common to multiple MMC host controllers. Any host
+that requires the respective functionality should implement them using
+these definitions.
+
+Interpreted by the OF core:
+- reg: Registers location and length.
+- interrupts: Interrupts used by the MMC controller.
+
+Card detection:
+If no property below is supplied, host native card detect is used.
+Only one of the properties in this section should be supplied:
+  - broken-cd: There is no card detection available; polling must be used.
+  - cd-gpios: Specify GPIOs for card detection, see gpio binding
+  - non-removable: non-removable slot (like eMMC); assume always present.
+
+Optional properties:
+- bus-width: Number of data lines, can be <1>, <4>, or <8>.  The default
+  will be <1> if the property is absent.
+- wp-gpios: Specify GPIOs for write protection, see gpio binding
+- cd-inverted: when present, polarity on the CD line is inverted. See the note
+  below for the case, when a GPIO is used for the CD line
+- wp-inverted: when present, polarity on the WP line is inverted. See the note
+  below for the case, when a GPIO is used for the WP line
+- max-frequency: maximum operating clock frequency
+- no-1-8-v: when present, denotes that 1.8v card voltage is not supported on
+  this system, even if the controller claims it is.
+- cap-sd-highspeed: SD high-speed timing is supported
+- cap-mmc-highspeed: MMC high-speed timing is supported
+- cap-power-off-card: powering off the card is safe
+- cap-sdio-irq: enable SDIO IRQ signalling on this interface
+- full-pwr-cycle: full power cycle of the card is supported
+
+*NOTE* on CD and WP polarity. To use common for all SD/MMC host controllers line
+polarity properties, we have to fix the meaning of the "normal" and "inverted"
+line levels. We choose to follow the SDHCI standard, which specifies both those
+lines as "active low." Therefore, using the "cd-inverted" property means, that
+the CD line is active high, i.e. it is high, when a card is inserted. Similar
+logic applies to the "wp-inverted" property.
+
+CD and WP lines can be implemented on the hardware in one of two ways: as GPIOs,
+specified in cd-gpios and wp-gpios properties, or as dedicated pins. Polarity of
+dedicated pins can be specified, using *-inverted properties. GPIO polarity can
+also be specified using the OF_GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW flag. This creates an ambiguity
+in the latter case. We choose to use the XOR logic for GPIO CD and WP lines.
+This means, the two properties are "superimposed," for example leaving the
+OF_GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW flag clear and specifying the respective *-inverted
+property results in a double-inversion and actually means the "normal" line
+polarity is in effect.
+
+Optional SDIO properties:
+- keep-power-in-suspend: Preserves card power during a suspend/resume cycle
+- enable-sdio-wakeup: Enables wake up of host system on SDIO IRQ assertion
+
+Example:
+
+sdhci@ab000000 {
+	compatible = "sdhci";
+	reg = <0xab000000 0x200>;
+	interrupts = <23>;
+	bus-width = <4>;
+	cd-gpios = <&gpio 69 0>;
+	cd-inverted;
+	wp-gpios = <&gpio 70 0>;
+	max-frequency = <50000000>;
+	keep-power-in-suspend;
+	enable-sdio-wakeup;
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2b584cae352a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+* ARM PrimeCell MultiMedia Card Interface (MMCI) PL180/1
+
+The ARM PrimeCell MMCI PL180 and PL181 provides an interface for
+reading and writing to MultiMedia and SD cards alike.
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties described
+by mmc.txt and the properties used by the mmci driver.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible             : contains "arm,pl18x", "arm,primecell".
+- arm,primecell-periphid : contains the PrimeCell Peripheral ID.
+
+Optional properties:
+- mmc-cap-mmc-highspeed  : indicates whether MMC is high speed capable
+- mmc-cap-sd-highspeed   : indicates whether SD is high speed capable
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mxs-mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mxs-mmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..515addc20070
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mxs-mmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+* Freescale MXS MMC controller
+
+The Freescale MXS Synchronous Serial Ports (SSP) can act as a MMC controller
+to support MMC, SD, and SDIO types of memory cards.
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt
+and the properties used by the mxsmmc driver.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,<chip>-mmc".  The supported chips include
+  imx23 and imx28.
+- interrupts: Should contain ERROR interrupt number
+- dmas: DMA specifier, consisting of a phandle to DMA controller node
+  and SSP DMA channel ID.
+  Refer to dma.txt and fsl-mxs-dma.txt for details.
+- dma-names: Must be "rx-tx".
+
+Examples:
+
+ssp0: ssp@80010000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-mmc";
+	reg = <0x80010000 2000>;
+	interrupts = <96>;
+	dmas = <&dma_apbh 0>;
+	dma-names = "rx-tx";
+	bus-width = <8>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia,tegra20-sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia,tegra20-sdhci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c6d7b11db9eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia,tegra20-sdhci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+* NVIDIA Tegra Secure Digital Host Controller
+
+This controller on Tegra family SoCs provides an interface for MMC, SD,
+and SDIO types of memory cards.
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties described
+by mmc.txt and the properties used by the sdhci-tegra driver.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "nvidia,<chip>-sdhci"
+
+Optional properties:
+- power-gpios : Specify GPIOs for power control
+
+Example:
+
+sdhci@c8000200 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-sdhci";
+	reg = <0xc8000200 0x200>;
+	interrupts = <47>;
+	cd-gpios = <&gpio 69 0>; /* gpio PI5 */
+	wp-gpios = <&gpio 57 0>; /* gpio PH1 */
+	power-gpios = <&gpio 155 0>; /* gpio PT3 */
+	bus-width = <8>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7e51154679a6..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-* NVIDIA Tegra Secure Digital Host Controller
-
-This controller on Tegra family SoCs provides an interface for MMC, SD,
-and SDIO types of memory cards.
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : Should be "nvidia,<chip>-sdhci"
-- reg : Should contain SD/MMC registers location and length
-- interrupts : Should contain SD/MMC interrupt
-
-Optional properties:
-- cd-gpios : Specify GPIOs for card detection
-- wp-gpios : Specify GPIOs for write protection
-- power-gpios : Specify GPIOs for power control
-- support-8bit : Boolean, indicates if 8-bit mode should be used.
-
-Example:
-
-sdhci@c8000200 {
-	compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-sdhci";
-	reg = <0xc8000200 0x200>;
-	interrupts = <47>;
-	cd-gpios = <&gpio 69 0>; /* gpio PI5 */
-	wp-gpios = <&gpio 57 0>; /* gpio PH1 */
-	power-gpios = <&gpio 155 0>; /* gpio PT3 */
-	support-8bit;
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/orion-sdio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/orion-sdio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..84f0ebd67a13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/orion-sdio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+* Marvell orion-sdio controller
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt
+and the properties used by the orion-sdio driver.
+
+- compatible: Should be "marvell,orion-sdio"
+- clocks: reference to the clock of the SDIO interface
+
+Example:
+
+	mvsdio@d00d4000 {
+		compatible = "marvell,orion-sdio";
+		reg = <0xd00d4000 0x200>;
+		interrupts = <54>;
+		clocks = <&gateclk 17>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/pxa-mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/pxa-mmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b7025de7dced
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/pxa-mmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+* PXA MMC drivers
+
+Driver bindings for the PXA MCI (MMC/SDIO) interfaces
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "marvell,pxa-mmc".
+- vmmc-supply: A regulator for VMMC
+
+Optional properties:
+- marvell,detect-delay-ms: sets the detection delay timeout in ms.
+- marvell,gpio-power: GPIO spec for the card power enable pin
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt
+and the properties used by the pxa-mmc driver.
+
+Examples:
+
+mmc0: mmc@41100000 {
+	compatible = "marvell,pxa-mmc";
+	reg = <0x41100000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <23>;
+	cd-gpios = <&gpio 23 0>;
+	wp-gpios = <&gpio 24 0>;
+};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c559f3f36309
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+* Rockchip specific extensions to the Synopsys Designware Mobile
+  Storage Host Controller
+
+The Synopsys designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface
+a SoC with storage medium such as eMMC or SD/MMC cards. This file documents
+differences between the core Synopsys dw mshc controller properties described
+by synopsys-dw-mshc.txt and the properties used by the Rockchip specific
+extensions to the Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+* compatible: should be
+	- "rockchip,rk2928-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RK2928 and following
+
+Example:
+
+	rkdwmmc0@12200000 {
+		compatible = "rockchip,rk2928-dw-mshc";
+		reg = <0x12200000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 75 0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/samsung-sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/samsung-sdhci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..328e990d2546
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/samsung-sdhci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+* Samsung's SDHCI Controller device tree bindings
+
+Samsung's SDHCI controller is used as a connectivity interface with external
+MMC, SD and eMMC storage mediums. This file documents differences between the
+core mmc properties described by mmc.txt and the properties used by the
+Samsung implmentation of the SDHCI controller.
+
+Required SoC Specific Properties:
+- compatible: should be one of the following
+  - "samsung,s3c6410-sdhci": For controllers compatible with s3c6410 sdhci
+    controller.
+  - "samsung,exynos4210-sdhci": For controllers compatible with Exynos4 sdhci
+    controller.
+
+Required Board Specific Properties:
+- pinctrl-0: Should specify pin control groups used for this controller.
+- pinctrl-names: Should contain only one value - "default".
+
+Example:
+	sdhci@12530000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-sdhci";
+		reg = <0x12530000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <0 75 0>;
+		bus-width = <4>;
+		cd-gpios = <&gpk2 2 0>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&sd0_clk &sd0_cmd &sd0_bus4>;
+	};
+
+	Note: This example shows both SoC specific and board specific properties
+	in a single device node. The properties can be actually be separated
+	into SoC specific node and board specific node.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-dove.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-dove.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ae9aab9abcd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-dove.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+* Marvell sdhci-dove controller
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt
+and the properties used by the sdhci-pxav2 and sdhci-pxav3 drivers.
+
+- compatible: Should be "marvell,dove-sdhci".
+
+Example:
+
+sdio0: sdio@92000 {
+	compatible = "marvell,dove-sdhci";
+	reg = <0x92000 0x100>;
+	interrupts = <35>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-pxa.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-pxa.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dbe98a3c183a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-pxa.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+* Marvell sdhci-pxa v2/v3 controller
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt
+and the properties used by the sdhci-pxav2 and sdhci-pxav3 drivers.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "mrvl,pxav2-mmc" or "mrvl,pxav3-mmc".
+
+Optional properties:
+- mrvl,clk-delay-cycles: Specify a number of cycles to delay for tuning.
+
+Example:
+
+sdhci@d4280800 {
+	compatible = "mrvl,pxav3-mmc";
+	reg = <0xd4280800 0x800>;
+	bus-width = <8>;
+	interrupts = <27>;
+	non-removable;
+	mrvl,clk-delay-cycles = <31>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-sirf.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-sirf.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dd6ed464bcb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-sirf.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+* SiRFprimII/marco/atlas6 SDHCI Controller
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt
+and the properties used by the sdhci-sirf driver.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: sirf,prima2-sdhc
+
+Optional properties:
+- cd-gpios: card detect gpio, with zero flags.
+
+Example:
+
+	sd0: sdhci@56000000 {
+		compatible = "sirf,prima2-sdhc";
+		reg = <0xcd000000 0x100000>;
+		cd-gpios = <&gpio 6 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-spear.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-spear.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fd3643e7e467
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-spear.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+* SPEAr SDHCI Controller
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt
+and the properties used by the sdhci-spear driver.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "st,spear300-sdhci"
+
+Optional properties:
+- cd-gpios: card detect gpio, with zero flags.
+
+Example:
+
+	sdhci@fc000000 {
+		compatible = "st,spear300-sdhci";
+		reg = <0xfc000000 0x1000>;
+		cd-gpios = <&gpio0 6 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..066a78b034ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+* Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller
+
+The Synopsys designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface
+a SoC with storage medium such as eMMC or SD/MMC cards. This file documents
+differences between the core mmc properties described by mmc.txt and the
+properties used by the Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+* compatible: should be
+	- snps,dw-mshc: for controllers compliant with synopsys dw-mshc.
+* #address-cells: should be 1.
+* #size-cells: should be 0.
+
+# Slots: The slot specific information are contained within child-nodes with
+  each child-node representing a supported slot. There should be atleast one
+  child node representing a card slot. The name of the child node representing
+  the slot is recommended to be slot@n where n is the unique number of the slot
+  connnected to the controller. The following are optional properties which
+  can be included in the slot child node.
+
+	* reg: specifies the physical slot number. The valid values of this
+	  property is 0 to (num-slots -1), where num-slots is the value
+	  specified by the num-slots property.
+
+	* bus-width: as documented in mmc core bindings.
+
+	* wp-gpios: specifies the write protect gpio line. The format of the
+	  gpio specifier depends on the gpio controller. If a GPIO is not used
+	  for write-protect, this property is optional.
+
+	* disable-wp: If the wp-gpios property isn't present then (by default)
+	  we'd assume that the write protect is hooked up directly to the
+	  controller's special purpose write protect line (accessible via
+	  the WRTPRT register).  However, it's possible that we simply don't
+	  want write protect.  In that case specify 'disable-wp'.
+	  NOTE: This property is not required for slots known to always
+	  connect to eMMC or SDIO cards.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+* clocks: from common clock binding: handle to biu and ciu clocks for the
+  bus interface unit clock and the card interface unit clock.
+
+* clock-names: from common clock binding: Shall be "biu" and "ciu".
+  If the biu clock is missing we'll simply skip enabling it.  If the
+  ciu clock is missing we'll just assume that the clock is running at
+  clock-frequency.  It is an error to omit both the ciu clock and the
+  clock-frequency.
+
+* clock-frequency: should be the frequency (in Hz) of the ciu clock.  If this
+  is specified and the ciu clock is specified then we'll try to set the ciu
+  clock to this at probe time.
+
+* num-slots: specifies the number of slots supported by the controller.
+  The number of physical slots actually used could be equal or less than the
+  value specified by num-slots. If this property is not specified, the value
+  of num-slot property is assumed to be 1.
+
+* fifo-depth: The maximum size of the tx/rx fifo's. If this property is not
+  specified, the default value of the fifo size is determined from the
+  controller registers.
+
+* card-detect-delay: Delay in milli-seconds before detecting card after card
+  insert event. The default value is 0.
+
+* supports-highspeed: Enables support for high speed cards (up to 50MHz)
+
+* broken-cd: as documented in mmc core bindings.
+
+* vmmc-supply: The phandle to the regulator to use for vmmc.  If this is
+  specified we'll defer probe until we can find this regulator.
+
+Aliases:
+
+- All the MSHC controller nodes should be represented in the aliases node using
+  the following format 'mshc{n}' where n is a unique number for the alias.
+
+Example:
+
+The MSHC controller node can be split into two portions, SoC specific and
+board specific portions as listed below.
+
+	dwmmc0@12200000 {
+		compatible = "snps,dw-mshc";
+		clocks = <&clock 351>, <&clock 132>;
+		clock-names = "biu", "ciu";
+		reg = <0x12200000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 75 0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+	};
+
+	dwmmc0@12200000 {
+		clock-frequency = <400000000>;
+		num-slots = <1>;
+		supports-highspeed;
+		broken-cd;
+		fifo-depth = <0x80>;
+		card-detect-delay = <200>;
+		vmmc-supply = <&buck8>;
+
+		slot@0 {
+			reg = <0>;
+			bus-width = <8>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap-hsmmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap-hsmmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ed271fc255b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap-hsmmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+* TI Highspeed MMC host controller for OMAP
+
+The Highspeed MMC Host Controller on TI OMAP family
+provides an interface for MMC, SD, and SDIO types of memory cards.
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties described
+by mmc.txt and the properties used by the omap_hsmmc driver.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:
+ Should be "ti,omap2-hsmmc", for OMAP2 controllers
+ Should be "ti,omap3-hsmmc", for OMAP3 controllers
+ Should be "ti,omap4-hsmmc", for OMAP4 controllers
+- ti,hwmods: Must be "mmc<n>", n is controller instance starting 1
+
+Optional properties:
+ti,dual-volt: boolean, supports dual voltage cards
+<supply-name>-supply: phandle to the regulator device tree node
+"supply-name" examples are "vmmc", "vmmc_aux" etc
+ti,non-removable: non-removable slot (like eMMC)
+ti,needs-special-reset: Requires a special softreset sequence
+ti,needs-special-hs-handling: HSMMC IP needs special setting for handling High Speed
+
+Example:
+	mmc1: mmc@0x4809c000 {
+		compatible = "ti,omap4-hsmmc";
+		reg = <0x4809c000 0x400>;
+		ti,hwmods = "mmc1";
+		ti,dual-volt;
+		bus-width = <4>;
+		vmmc-supply = <&vmmc>; /* phandle to regulator node */
+		ti,non-removable;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/tmio_mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/tmio_mmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6a2a1160a70d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/tmio_mmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+* Toshiba Mobile IO SD/MMC controller
+
+The tmio-mmc driver doesn't probe its devices actively, instead its binding to
+devices is managed by either MFD drivers or by the sh_mobile_sdhi platform
+driver. Those drivers supply the tmio-mmc driver with platform data, that either
+describe hardware capabilities, known to them, or are obtained by them from
+their own platform data or from their DT information. In the latter case all
+compulsory and any optional properties, common to all SD/MMC drivers, as
+described in mmc.txt, can be used. Additionally the following tmio_mmc-specific
+optional bindings can be used.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:	"renesas,sdhi-shmobile" - a generic sh-mobile SDHI unit
+		"renesas,sdhi-sh7372" - SDHI IP on SH7372 SoC
+		"renesas,sdhi-sh73a0" - SDHI IP on SH73A0 SoC
+		"renesas,sdhi-r8a73a4" - SDHI IP on R8A73A4 SoC
+		"renesas,sdhi-r8a7740" - SDHI IP on R8A7740 SoC
+		"renesas,sdhi-r8a7778" - SDHI IP on R8A7778 SoC
+		"renesas,sdhi-r8a7779" - SDHI IP on R8A7779 SoC
+		"renesas,sdhi-r8a7790" - SDHI IP on R8A7790 SoC
+
+Optional properties:
+- toshiba,mmc-wrprotect-disable: write-protect detection is unavailable
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/vt8500-sdmmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/vt8500-sdmmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d7fb6abb3eb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/vt8500-sdmmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+* Wondermedia WM8505/WM8650 SD/MMC Host Controller
+
+This file documents differences between the core properties described
+by mmc.txt and the properties used by the wmt-sdmmc driver.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "wm,wm8505-sdhc".
+- interrupts: Two interrupts are required - regular irq and dma irq.
+
+Optional properties:
+- sdon-inverted: SD_ON bit is inverted on the controller
+
+Examples:
+
+sdhc@d800a000 {
+	compatible = "wm,wm8505-sdhc";
+	reg = <0xd800a000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <20 21>;
+	clocks = <&sdhc>;
+	bus-width = <4>;
+	sdon-inverted;
+};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/arm-versatile.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/arm-versatile.txt
index 476845db94d0..beace4b89daa 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/arm-versatile.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/arm-versatile.txt
@@ -4,5 +4,5 @@ Required properties:
 - compatible : must be "arm,versatile-flash";
 - bank-width : width in bytes of flash interface.
 
-Optional properties:
-- Subnode partition map from mtd flash binding
+The device tree may optionally contain sub-nodes describing partitions of the
+address space. See partition.txt for more detail.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-dataflash.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-dataflash.txt
index ef66ddd01da0..1889a4db5b7c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-dataflash.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-dataflash.txt
@@ -3,6 +3,9 @@
 Required properties:
 - compatible : "atmel,<model>", "atmel,<series>", "atmel,dataflash".
 
+The device tree may optionally contain sub-nodes describing partitions of the
+address space. See partition.txt for more detail.
+
 Example:
 
 flash@1 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c4728839d0c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+Atmel NAND flash
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "atmel,at91rm9200-nand".
+- reg : should specify localbus address and size used for the chip,
+	and hardware ECC controller if available.
+	If the hardware ECC is PMECC, it should contain address and size for
+	PMECC, PMECC Error Location controller and ROM which has lookup tables.
+- atmel,nand-addr-offset : offset for the address latch.
+- atmel,nand-cmd-offset : offset for the command latch.
+- #address-cells, #size-cells : Must be present if the device has sub-nodes
+  representing partitions.
+
+- gpios : specifies the gpio pins to control the NAND device. detect is an
+  optional gpio and may be set to 0 if not present.
+
+Optional properties:
+- atmel,nand-has-dma : boolean to support dma transfer for nand read/write.
+- nand-ecc-mode : String, operation mode of the NAND ecc mode, soft by default.
+  Supported values are: "none", "soft", "hw", "hw_syndrome", "hw_oob_first",
+  "soft_bch".
+- atmel,has-pmecc : boolean to enable Programmable Multibit ECC hardware.
+  Only supported by at91sam9x5 or later sam9 product.
+- atmel,pmecc-cap : error correct capability for Programmable Multibit ECC
+  Controller. Supported values are: 2, 4, 8, 12, 24.
+- atmel,pmecc-sector-size : sector size for ECC computation. Supported values
+  are: 512, 1024.
+- atmel,pmecc-lookup-table-offset : includes two offsets of lookup table in ROM
+  for different sector size. First one is for sector size 512, the next is for
+  sector size 1024.
+- nand-bus-width : 8 or 16 bus width if not present 8
+- nand-on-flash-bbt: boolean to enable on flash bbt option if not present false
+- Nand Flash Controller(NFC) is a slave driver under Atmel nand flash
+  - Required properties:
+    - compatible : "atmel,sama5d3-nfc".
+    - reg : should specify the address and size used for NFC command registers,
+            NFC registers and NFC Sram. NFC Sram address and size can be absent
+            if don't want to use it.
+  - Optional properties:
+    - atmel,write-by-sram: boolean to enable NFC write by sram.
+
+Examples:
+nand0: nand@40000000,0 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-nand";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	reg = <0x40000000 0x10000000
+	       0xffffe800 0x200
+	      >;
+	atmel,nand-addr-offset = <21>;	/* ale */
+	atmel,nand-cmd-offset = <22>;	/* cle */
+	nand-on-flash-bbt;
+	nand-ecc-mode = "soft";
+	gpios = <&pioC 13 0	/* rdy */
+		 &pioC 14 0 	/* nce */
+		 0		/* cd */
+		>;
+	partition@0 {
+		...
+	};
+};
+
+/* for PMECC supported chips */
+nand0: nand@40000000 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-nand";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	reg = < 0x40000000 0x10000000	/* bus addr & size */
+		0xffffe000 0x00000600	/* PMECC addr & size */
+		0xffffe600 0x00000200	/* PMECC ERRLOC addr & size */
+		0x00100000 0x00100000	/* ROM addr & size */
+		>;
+	atmel,nand-addr-offset = <21>;	/* ale */
+	atmel,nand-cmd-offset = <22>;	/* cle */
+	nand-on-flash-bbt;
+	nand-ecc-mode = "hw";
+	atmel,has-pmecc;	/* enable PMECC */
+	atmel,pmecc-cap = <2>;
+	atmel,pmecc-sector-size = <512>;
+	atmel,pmecc-lookup-table-offset = <0x8000 0x10000>;
+	gpios = <&pioD 5 0	/* rdy */
+		 &pioD 4 0	/* nce */
+		 0		/* cd */
+		>;
+	partition@0 {
+		...
+	};
+};
+
+/* for NFC supported chips */
+nand0: nand@40000000 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-nand";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	ranges;
+        ...
+        nfc@70000000 {
+		compatible = "atmel,sama5d3-nfc";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		reg = <
+			0x70000000 0x10000000	/* NFC Command Registers */
+			0xffffc000 0x00000070	/* NFC HSMC regs */
+			0x00200000 0x00100000	/* NFC SRAM banks */
+		>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/denali-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/denali-nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b04d03a1d499
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/denali-nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+* Denali NAND controller
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible : should be "denali,denali-nand-dt"
+  - reg : should contain registers location and length for data and reg.
+  - reg-names: Should contain the reg names "nand_data" and "denali_reg"
+  - interrupts : The interrupt number.
+  - dm-mask : DMA bit mask
+
+The device tree may optionally contain sub-nodes describing partitions of the
+address space. See partition.txt for more detail.
+
+Examples:
+
+nand: nand@ff900000 {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	compatible = "denali,denali-nand-dt";
+	reg = <0xff900000 0x100000>, <0xffb80000 0x10000>;
+	reg-names = "nand_data", "denali_reg";
+	interrupts = <0 144 4>;
+	dma-mask = <0xffffffff>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/elm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/elm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8c1528c421d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/elm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+Error location module
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must be "ti,am33xx-elm"
+- reg: physical base address and size of the registers map.
+- interrupts: Interrupt number for the elm.
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the elm
+
+Example:
+elm: elm@0 {
+	compatible = "ti,am3352-elm";
+	reg = <0x48080000 0x2000>;
+	interrupts = <4>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/flctl-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/flctl-nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..427f46dc60ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/flctl-nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+FLCTL NAND controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "renesas,shmobile-flctl-sh7372"
+- reg : Address range of the FLCTL
+- interrupts : flste IRQ number
+- nand-bus-width : bus width to NAND chip
+
+Optional properties:
+- dmas: DMA specifier(s)
+- dma-names: name for each DMA specifier. Valid names are
+	     "data_tx", "data_rx", "ecc_tx", "ecc_rx"
+
+The DMA fields are not used yet in the driver but are listed here for
+completing the bindings.
+
+The device tree may optionally contain sub-nodes describing partitions of the
+address space. See partition.txt for more detail.
+
+Example:
+
+	flctl@e6a30000 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		compatible = "renesas,shmobile-flctl-sh7372";
+		reg = <0xe6a30000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <0x0d80>;
+
+		nand-bus-width = <16>;
+
+		dmas = <&dmac 1 /* data_tx */
+			&dmac 2;> /* data_rx */
+		dma-names = "data_tx", "data_rx";
+
+		system@0 {
+			label = "system";
+			reg = <0x0 0x8000000>;
+		};
+
+		userdata@8000000 {
+			label = "userdata";
+			reg = <0x8000000 0x10000000>;
+		};
+
+		cache@18000000 {
+			label = "cache";
+			reg = <0x18000000 0x8000000>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt
index 00f1f546b32e..fce4894f5a98 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt
@@ -19,6 +19,10 @@ Optional properties:
 	read registers (tR). Required if property "gpios" is not used
 	(R/B# pins not connected).
 
+Each flash chip described may optionally contain additional sub-nodes
+describing partitions of the address space. See partition.txt for more
+detail.
+
 Examples:
 
 upm@1,0 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsmc-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsmc-nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ec42935f3908
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsmc-nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+ST Microelectronics Flexible Static Memory Controller (FSMC)
+NAND Interface
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "st,spear600-fsmc-nand", "stericsson,fsmc-nand"
+- reg : Address range of the mtd chip
+- reg-names: Should contain the reg names "fsmc_regs", "nand_data", "nand_addr" and "nand_cmd"
+
+Optional properties:
+- bank-width : Width (in bytes) of the device.  If not present, the width
+  defaults to 1 byte
+- nand-skip-bbtscan: Indicates the the BBT scanning should be skipped
+- timings: array of 6 bytes for NAND timings. The meanings of these bytes
+  are:
+  byte 0 TCLR  : CLE to RE delay in number of AHB clock cycles, only 4 bits
+                 are valid. Zero means one clockcycle, 15 means 16 clock
+                 cycles.
+  byte 1 TAR   : ALE to RE delay, 4 bits are valid. Same format as TCLR.
+  byte 2 THIZ  : number of HCLK clock cycles during which the data bus is
+                 kept in Hi-Z (tristate) after the start of a write access.
+                 Only valid for write transactions. Zero means zero cycles,
+                 255 means 255 cycles.
+  byte 3 THOLD : number of HCLK clock cycles to hold the address (and data
+                 when writing) after the command deassertation. Zero means
+                 one cycle, 255 means 256 cycles.
+  byte 4 TWAIT : number of HCLK clock cycles to assert the command to the
+                 NAND flash in response to SMWAITn. Zero means 1 cycle,
+                 255 means 256 cycles.
+  byte 5 TSET  : number of HCLK clock cycles to assert the address before the
+                 command is asserted. Zero means one cycle, 255 means 256
+                 cycles.
+- bank: default NAND bank to use (0-3 are valid, 0 is the default).
+
+Example:
+
+	fsmc: flash@d1800000 {
+		compatible = "st,spear600-fsmc-nand";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		reg = <0xd1800000 0x1000	/* FSMC Register */
+		       0xd2000000 0x0010	/* NAND Base DATA */
+		       0xd2020000 0x0010	/* NAND Base ADDR */
+		       0xd2010000 0x0010>;	/* NAND Base CMD */
+		reg-names = "fsmc_regs", "nand_data", "nand_addr", "nand_cmd";
+
+		bank-width = <1>;
+		nand-skip-bbtscan;
+		timings = /bits/ 8 <0 0 0 2 3 0>;
+		bank = <1>;
+
+		partition@0 {
+			...
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpio-control-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpio-control-nand.txt
index 719f4dc58df7..36ef07d3c90f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpio-control-nand.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpio-control-nand.txt
@@ -25,6 +25,9 @@ Optional properties:
   GPIO state and before and after command byte writes, this register will be
   read to ensure that the GPIO accesses have completed.
 
+The device tree may optionally contain sub-nodes describing partitions of the
+address space. See partition.txt for more detail.
+
 Examples:
 
 gpio-nand@1,0 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..df338cb5059c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+Device tree bindings for GPMC connected NANDs
+
+GPMC connected NAND (found on OMAP boards) are represented as child nodes of
+the GPMC controller with a name of "nand".
+
+All timing relevant properties as well as generic gpmc child properties are
+explained in a separate documents - please refer to
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
+
+For NAND specific properties such as ECC modes or bus width, please refer to
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt
+
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - reg:		The CS line the peripheral is connected to
+
+Optional properties:
+
+ - nand-bus-width: 		Set this numeric value to 16 if the hardware
+				is wired that way. If not specified, a bus
+				width of 8 is assumed.
+
+ - ti,nand-ecc-opt:		A string setting the ECC layout to use. One of:
+
+		"sw"		Software method (default)
+		"hw"		Hardware method
+		"hw-romcode"	gpmc hamming mode method & romcode layout
+		"bch4"		4-bit BCH ecc code
+		"bch8"		8-bit BCH ecc code
+
+ - ti,nand-xfer-type:		A string setting the data transfer type. One of:
+
+		"prefetch-polled"	Prefetch polled mode (default)
+		"polled"		Polled mode, without prefetch
+		"prefetch-dma"		Prefetch enabled sDMA mode
+		"prefetch-irq"		Prefetch enabled irq mode
+
+ - elm_id:	Specifies elm device node. This is required to support BCH
+ 		error correction using ELM module.
+
+For inline partiton table parsing (optional):
+
+ - #address-cells: should be set to 1
+ - #size-cells: should be set to 1
+
+Example for an AM33xx board:
+
+	gpmc: gpmc@50000000 {
+		compatible = "ti,am3352-gpmc";
+		ti,hwmods = "gpmc";
+		reg = <0x50000000 0x1000000>;
+		interrupts = <100>;
+		gpmc,num-cs = <8>;
+		gpmc,num-waitpins = <2>;
+		#address-cells = <2>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0 0 0x08000000 0x2000>;	/* CS0: NAND */
+		elm_id = <&elm>;
+
+		nand@0,0 {
+			reg = <0 0 0>; /* CS0, offset 0 */
+			nand-bus-width = <16>;
+			ti,nand-ecc-opt = "bch8";
+			ti,nand-xfer-type = "polled";
+
+			gpmc,sync-clk-ps = <0>;
+			gpmc,cs-on-ns = <0>;
+			gpmc,cs-rd-off-ns = <44>;
+			gpmc,cs-wr-off-ns = <44>;
+			gpmc,adv-on-ns = <6>;
+			gpmc,adv-rd-off-ns = <34>;
+			gpmc,adv-wr-off-ns = <44>;
+			gpmc,we-off-ns = <40>;
+			gpmc,oe-off-ns = <54>;
+			gpmc,access-ns = <64>;
+			gpmc,rd-cycle-ns = <82>;
+			gpmc,wr-cycle-ns = <82>;
+			gpmc,wr-access-ns = <40>;
+			gpmc,wr-data-mux-bus-ns = <0>;
+
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <1>;
+
+			/* partitions go here */
+		};
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nor.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nor.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..420b3ab18890
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nor.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+Device tree bindings for NOR flash connect to TI GPMC
+
+NOR flash connected to the TI GPMC (found on OMAP boards) are represented as
+child nodes of the GPMC controller with a name of "nor".
+
+All timing relevant properties as well as generic GPMC child properties are
+explained in a separate documents. Please refer to
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
+
+Required properties:
+- bank-width: 		Width of NOR flash in bytes. GPMC supports 8-bit and
+			16-bit devices and so must be either 1 or 2 bytes.
+- compatible:		Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt
+- gpmc,cs-on-ns:		Chip-select assertion time
+- gpmc,cs-rd-off-ns:	Chip-select de-assertion time for reads
+- gpmc,cs-wr-off-ns:	Chip-select de-assertion time for writes
+- gpmc,oe-on-ns:	Output-enable assertion time
+- gpmc,oe-off-ns:	Output-enable de-assertion time
+- gpmc,we-on-ns		Write-enable assertion time
+- gpmc,we-off-ns:	Write-enable de-assertion time
+- gpmc,access-ns:	Start cycle to first data capture (read access)
+- gpmc,rd-cycle-ns:	Total read cycle time
+- gpmc,wr-cycle-ns:	Total write cycle time
+- linux,mtd-name:	Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt
+- reg:			Chip-select, base address (relative to chip-select)
+			and size of NOR flash. Note that base address will be
+			typically 0 as this is the start of the chip-select.
+
+Optional properties:
+- gpmc,XXX		Additional GPMC timings and settings parameters. See
+			Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
+
+Optional properties for partiton table parsing:
+- #address-cells: should be set to 1
+- #size-cells: should be set to 1
+
+Example:
+
+gpmc: gpmc@6e000000 {
+	compatible = "ti,omap3430-gpmc", "simple-bus";
+	ti,hwmods = "gpmc";
+	reg = <0x6e000000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <20>;
+	gpmc,num-cs = <8>;
+	gpmc,num-waitpins = <4>;
+	#address-cells = <2>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+
+	ranges = <0 0 0x10000000 0x08000000>;
+
+	nor@0,0 {
+		compatible = "cfi-flash";
+		linux,mtd-name= "intel,pf48f6000m0y1be";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		reg = <0 0 0x08000000>;
+		bank-width = <2>;
+
+		gpmc,mux-add-data;
+		gpmc,cs-on-ns = <0>;
+		gpmc,cs-rd-off-ns = <186>;
+		gpmc,cs-wr-off-ns = <186>;
+		gpmc,adv-on-ns = <12>;
+		gpmc,adv-rd-off-ns = <48>;
+		gpmc,adv-wr-off-ns = <48>;
+		gpmc,oe-on-ns = <54>;
+		gpmc,oe-off-ns = <168>;
+		gpmc,we-on-ns = <54>;
+		gpmc,we-off-ns = <168>;
+		gpmc,rd-cycle-ns = <186>;
+		gpmc,wr-cycle-ns = <186>;
+		gpmc,access-ns = <114>;
+		gpmc,page-burst-access-ns = <6>;
+		gpmc,bus-turnaround-ns = <12>;
+		gpmc,cycle2cycle-delay-ns = <18>;
+		gpmc,wr-data-mux-bus-ns = <90>;
+		gpmc,wr-access-ns = <186>;
+		gpmc,cycle2cycle-samecsen;
+		gpmc,cycle2cycle-diffcsen;
+
+		partition@0 {
+			label = "bootloader-nor";
+			reg = <0 0x40000>;
+		};
+		partition@0x40000 {
+			label = "params-nor";
+			reg = <0x40000 0x40000>;
+		};
+		partition@0x80000 {
+			label = "kernel-nor";
+			reg = <0x80000 0x200000>;
+		};
+		partition@0x280000 {
+			label = "filesystem-nor";
+			reg = <0x240000 0x7d80000>;
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-onenand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-onenand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b7529424ac88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-onenand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+Device tree bindings for GPMC connected OneNANDs
+
+GPMC connected OneNAND (found on OMAP boards) are represented as child nodes of
+the GPMC controller with a name of "onenand".
+
+All timing relevant properties as well as generic gpmc child properties are
+explained in a separate documents - please refer to
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - reg:			The CS line the peripheral is connected to
+ - gpmc,device-width	Width of the ONENAND device connected to the GPMC
+			in bytes. Must be 1 or 2.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+ - dma-channel:		DMA Channel index
+
+For inline partiton table parsing (optional):
+
+ - #address-cells: should be set to 1
+ - #size-cells: should be set to 1
+
+Example for an OMAP3430 board:
+
+	gpmc: gpmc@6e000000 {
+		compatible = "ti,omap3430-gpmc";
+		ti,hwmods = "gpmc";
+		reg = <0x6e000000 0x1000000>;
+		interrupts = <20>;
+		gpmc,num-cs = <8>;
+		gpmc,num-waitpins = <4>;
+		#address-cells = <2>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+
+		onenand@0 {
+			reg = <0 0 0>; /* CS0, offset 0 */
+			gpmc,device-width = <2>;
+
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <1>;
+
+			/* partitions go here */
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmi-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmi-nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..551b2a179d01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmi-nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+* Freescale General-Purpose Media Interface (GPMI)
+
+The GPMI nand controller provides an interface to control the
+NAND flash chips. We support only one NAND chip now.
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible : should be "fsl,<chip>-gpmi-nand"
+  - reg : should contain registers location and length for gpmi and bch.
+  - reg-names: Should contain the reg names "gpmi-nand" and "bch"
+  - interrupts : BCH interrupt number.
+  - interrupt-names : Should be "bch".
+  - dmas: DMA specifier, consisting of a phandle to DMA controller node
+    and GPMI DMA channel ID.
+    Refer to dma.txt and fsl-mxs-dma.txt for details.
+  - dma-names: Must be "rx-tx".
+
+Optional properties:
+  - nand-on-flash-bbt: boolean to enable on flash bbt option if not
+                       present false
+
+The device tree may optionally contain sub-nodes describing partitions of the
+address space. See partition.txt for more detail.
+
+Examples:
+
+gpmi-nand@8000c000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-gpmi-nand";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	reg = <0x8000c000 2000>, <0x8000a000 2000>;
+	reg-names = "gpmi-nand", "bch";
+	interrupts = <41>;
+	interrupt-names = "bch";
+	dmas = <&dma_apbh 4>;
+	dma-names = "rx-tx";
+
+	partition@0 {
+	...
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/lpc32xx-mlc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/lpc32xx-mlc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d0a37252eb22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/lpc32xx-mlc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+NXP LPC32xx SoC NAND MLC controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "nxp,lpc3220-mlc"
+- reg: Address and size of the controller
+- interrupts: The NAND interrupt specification
+- gpios: GPIO specification for NAND write protect
+
+The following required properties are very controller specific. See the LPC32xx
+User Manual 7.5.14 MLC NAND Timing Register (the values here are specified in
+Hz, to make them independent of actual clock speed and to provide for good
+accuracy:)
+- nxp,tcea_delay: TCEA_DELAY
+- nxp,busy_delay: BUSY_DELAY
+- nxp,nand_ta: NAND_TA
+- nxp,rd_high: RD_HIGH
+- nxp,rd_low: RD_LOW
+- nxp,wr_high: WR_HIGH
+- nxp,wr_low: WR_LOW
+
+Optional subnodes:
+- Partitions, see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt
+
+Example:
+
+	mlc: flash@200A8000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-mlc";
+		reg = <0x200A8000 0x11000>;
+		interrupts = <11 0>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+
+		nxp,tcea-delay = <333333333>;
+		nxp,busy-delay = <10000000>;
+		nxp,nand-ta = <18181818>;
+		nxp,rd-high = <31250000>;
+		nxp,rd-low = <45454545>;
+		nxp,wr-high = <40000000>;
+		nxp,wr-low = <83333333>;
+		gpios = <&gpio 5 19 1>; /* GPO_P3 19, active low */
+
+		mtd0@00000000 {
+			label = "boot";
+			reg = <0x00000000 0x00064000>;
+			read-only;
+		};
+
+		...
+
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/lpc32xx-slc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/lpc32xx-slc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d94edc0fc554
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/lpc32xx-slc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+NXP LPC32xx SoC NAND SLC controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "nxp,lpc3220-slc"
+- reg: Address and size of the controller
+- nand-on-flash-bbt: Use bad block table on flash
+- gpios: GPIO specification for NAND write protect
+
+The following required properties are very controller specific. See the LPC32xx
+User Manual:
+- nxp,wdr-clks: Delay before Ready signal is tested on write (W_RDY)
+- nxp,rdr-clks: Delay before Ready signal is tested on read (R_RDY)
+(The following values are specified in Hz, to make them independent of actual
+clock speed:)
+- nxp,wwidth: Write pulse width (W_WIDTH)
+- nxp,whold: Write hold time (W_HOLD)
+- nxp,wsetup: Write setup time (W_SETUP)
+- nxp,rwidth: Read pulse width (R_WIDTH)
+- nxp,rhold: Read hold time (R_HOLD)
+- nxp,rsetup: Read setup time (R_SETUP)
+
+Optional subnodes:
+- Partitions, see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt
+
+Example:
+
+	slc: flash@20020000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-slc";
+		reg = <0x20020000 0x1000>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+
+		nxp,wdr-clks = <14>;
+		nxp,wwidth = <40000000>;
+		nxp,whold = <100000000>;
+		nxp,wsetup = <100000000>;
+		nxp,rdr-clks = <14>;
+		nxp,rwidth = <40000000>;
+		nxp,rhold = <66666666>;
+		nxp,rsetup = <100000000>;
+		nand-on-flash-bbt;
+		gpios = <&gpio 5 19 1>; /* GPO_P3 19, active low */
+
+		mtd0@00000000 {
+			label = "phy3250-boot";
+			reg = <0x00000000 0x00064000>;
+			read-only;
+		};
+
+		...
+
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/m25p80.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/m25p80.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6d3d57609470
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/m25p80.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+* MTD SPI driver for ST M25Pxx (and similar) serial flash chips
+
+Required properties:
+- #address-cells, #size-cells : Must be present if the device has sub-nodes
+  representing partitions.
+- compatible : Should be the manufacturer and the name of the chip. Bear in mind
+               the DT binding is not Linux-only, but in case of Linux, see the
+               "m25p_ids" table in drivers/mtd/devices/m25p80.c for the list of
+               supported chips.
+- reg : Chip-Select number
+- spi-max-frequency : Maximum frequency of the SPI bus the chip can operate at
+
+Optional properties:
+- m25p,fast-read : Use the "fast read" opcode to read data from the chip instead
+                   of the usual "read" opcode. This opcode is not supported by
+                   all chips and support for it can not be detected at runtime.
+                   Refer to your chips' datasheet to check if this is supported
+                   by your chip.
+
+Example:
+
+	flash: m25p80@0 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		compatible = "spansion,m25p80";
+		reg = <0>;
+		spi-max-frequency = <40000000>;
+		m25p,fast-read;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt
index 80152cb567d9..61c5ec850f2f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt
@@ -16,6 +16,19 @@ file systems on embedded devices.
  - #address-cells, #size-cells : Must be present if the device has
    sub-nodes representing partitions (see below).  In this case
    both #address-cells and #size-cells must be equal to 1.
+ - no-unaligned-direct-access: boolean to disable the default direct
+   mapping of the flash.
+   On some platforms (e.g. MPC5200) a direct 1:1 mapping may cause
+   problems with JFFS2 usage, as the local bus (LPB) doesn't support
+   unaligned accesses as implemented in the JFFS2 code via memcpy().
+   By defining "no-unaligned-direct-access", the flash will not be
+   exposed directly to the MTD users (e.g. JFFS2) any more.
+ - linux,mtd-name: allow to specify the mtd name for retro capability with
+   physmap-flash drivers as boot loader pass the mtd partition via the old
+   device name physmap-flash.
+ - use-advanced-sector-protection: boolean to enable support for the
+   advanced sector protection (Spansion: PPB - Persistent Protection
+   Bits) locking.
 
 For JEDEC compatible devices, the following additional properties
 are defined:
@@ -23,27 +36,8 @@ are defined:
  - vendor-id : Contains the flash chip's vendor id (1 byte).
  - device-id : Contains the flash chip's device id (1 byte).
 
-In addition to the information on the mtd bank itself, the
-device tree may optionally contain additional information
-describing partitions of the address space.  This can be
-used on platforms which have strong conventions about which
-portions of a flash are used for what purposes, but which don't
-use an on-flash partition table such as RedBoot.
-
-Each partition is represented as a sub-node of the mtd device.
-Each node's name represents the name of the corresponding
-partition of the mtd device.
-
-Flash partitions
- - reg : The partition's offset and size within the mtd bank.
- - label : (optional) The label / name for this partition.
-   If omitted, the label is taken from the node name (excluding
-   the unit address).
- - read-only : (optional) This parameter, if present, is a hint to
-   Linux that this partition should only be mounted
-   read-only.  This is usually used for flash partitions
-   containing early-boot firmware images or data which should not
-   be clobbered.
+The device tree may optionally contain sub-nodes describing partitions of the
+address space. See partition.txt for more detail.
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mxc-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mxc-nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b5833d11c7be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mxc-nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+* Freescale's mxc_nand
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,imxXX-nand"
+- reg: address range of the nfc block
+- interrupts: irq to be used
+- nand-bus-width: see nand.txt
+- nand-ecc-mode: see nand.txt
+- nand-on-flash-bbt: see nand.txt
+
+Example:
+
+	nand@d8000000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,imx27-nand";
+		reg = <0xd8000000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <29>;
+		nand-bus-width = <8>;
+		nand-ecc-mode = "hw";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..03855c8c492a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+* MTD generic binding
+
+- nand-ecc-mode : String, operation mode of the NAND ecc mode.
+  Supported values are: "none", "soft", "hw", "hw_syndrome", "hw_oob_first",
+  "soft_bch".
+- nand-bus-width : 8 or 16 bus width if not present 8
+- nand-on-flash-bbt: boolean to enable on flash bbt option if not present false
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/orion-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/orion-nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2d6ab660e603
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/orion-nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+NAND support for Marvell Orion SoC platforms
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "marvell,orion-nand".
+- reg : Base physical address of the NAND and length of memory mapped
+	region
+
+Optional properties:
+- cle : Address line number connected to CLE. Default is 0
+- ale : Address line number connected to ALE. Default is 1
+- bank-width : Width in bytes of the device. Default is 1
+- chip-delay : Chip dependent delay for transferring data from array to read
+               registers in usecs
+
+The device tree may optionally contain sub-nodes describing partitions of the
+address space. See partition.txt for more detail.
+
+Example:
+
+nand@f4000000 {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	cle = <0>;
+	ale = <1>;
+	bank-width = <1>;
+	chip-delay = <25>;
+	compatible = "marvell,orion-nand";
+	reg = <0xf4000000 0x400>;
+
+	partition@0 {
+		label = "u-boot";
+		reg = <0x0000000 0x100000>;
+		read-only;
+	};
+
+	partition@100000 {
+		label = "uImage";
+		reg = <0x0100000 0x200000>;
+	};
+
+	partition@300000 {
+		label = "dtb";
+		reg = <0x0300000 0x100000>;
+	};
+
+	partition@400000 {
+		label = "root";
+		reg = <0x0400000 0x7d00000>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8e5557da1955
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+Representing flash partitions in devicetree
+
+Partitions can be represented by sub-nodes of an mtd device. This can be used
+on platforms which have strong conventions about which portions of a flash are
+used for what purposes, but which don't use an on-flash partition table such
+as RedBoot.
+NOTE: if the sub-node has a compatible string, then it is not a partition.
+
+#address-cells & #size-cells must both be present in the mtd device. There are
+two valid values for both:
+<1>: for partitions that require a single 32-bit cell to represent their
+     size/address (aka the value is below 4 GiB)
+<2>: for partitions that require two 32-bit cells to represent their
+     size/address (aka the value is 4 GiB or greater).
+
+Required properties:
+- reg : The partition's offset and size within the mtd bank.
+
+Optional properties:
+- label : The label / name for this partition.  If omitted, the label is taken
+  from the node name (excluding the unit address).
+- read-only : This parameter, if present, is a hint to Linux that this
+  partition should only be mounted read-only. This is usually used for flash
+  partitions containing early-boot firmware images or data which should not be
+  clobbered.
+
+Examples:
+
+
+flash@0 {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+
+	partition@0 {
+		label = "u-boot";
+		reg = <0x0000000 0x100000>;
+		read-only;
+	};
+
+	uimage@100000 {
+		reg = <0x0100000 0x200000>;
+	};
+};
+
+flash@1 {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <2>;
+
+	/* a 4 GiB partition */
+	partition@0 {
+		label = "filesystem";
+		reg = <0x00000000 0x1 0x00000000>;
+	};
+};
+
+flash@2 {
+	#address-cells = <2>;
+	#size-cells = <2>;
+
+	/* an 8 GiB partition */
+	partition@0 {
+		label = "filesystem #1";
+		reg = <0x0 0x00000000 0x2 0x00000000>;
+	};
+
+	/* a 4 GiB partition */
+	partition@200000000 {
+		label = "filesystem #2";
+		reg = <0x2 0x00000000 0x1 0x00000000>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/pxa3xx-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/pxa3xx-nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f1421e2bbab7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/pxa3xx-nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+PXA3xx NAND DT bindings
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - compatible:		Should be "marvell,pxa3xx-nand"
+ - reg: 		The register base for the controller
+ - interrupts:		The interrupt to map
+ - #address-cells:	Set to <1> if the node includes partitions
+
+Optional properties:
+
+ - marvell,nand-enable-arbiter:	Set to enable the bus arbiter
+ - marvell,nand-keep-config:	Set to keep the NAND controller config as set
+				by the bootloader
+ - num-cs:			Number of chipselect lines to usw
+
+Example:
+
+	nand0: nand@43100000 {
+		compatible = "marvell,pxa3xx-nand";
+		reg = <0x43100000 90>;
+		interrupts = <45>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+
+		marvell,nand-enable-arbiter;
+		marvell,nand-keep-config;
+		num-cs = <1>;
+
+		/* partitions (optional) */
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/spear_smi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/spear_smi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7248aadd89e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/spear_smi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+* SPEAr SMI
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "st,spear600-smi"
+- reg : Address range of the mtd chip
+- #address-cells, #size-cells : Must be present if the device has sub-nodes
+  representing partitions.
+- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller
+  that services interrupts for this device
+- interrupts: Should contain the STMMAC interrupts
+- clock-rate : Functional clock rate of SMI in Hz
+
+Optional properties:
+- st,smi-fast-mode : Flash supports read in fast mode
+
+Example:
+
+	smi: flash@fc000000 {
+		compatible = "st,spear600-smi";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		reg = <0xfc000000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&vic1>;
+		interrupts = <12>;
+		clock-rate = <50000000>;	/* 50MHz */
+
+		flash@f8000000 {
+			st,smi-fast-mode;
+			...
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/allwinner,sun4i-emac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/allwinner,sun4i-emac.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b90bfcd138ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/allwinner,sun4i-emac.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+* Allwinner EMAC ethernet controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "allwinner,sun4i-emac".
+- reg: address and length of the register set for the device.
+- interrupts: interrupt for the device
+- phy: A phandle to a phy node defining the PHY address (as the reg
+  property, a single integer).
+- clocks: A phandle to the reference clock for this device
+
+Optional properties:
+- (local-)mac-address: mac address to be used by this driver
+
+Example:
+
+emac: ethernet@01c0b000 {
+       compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-emac";
+       reg = <0x01c0b000 0x1000>;
+       interrupts = <55>;
+       clocks = <&ahb_gates 17>;
+       phy = <&phy0>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/allwinner,sun4i-mdio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/allwinner,sun4i-mdio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..00b9f9a3ec1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/allwinner,sun4i-mdio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+* Allwinner A10 MDIO Ethernet Controller interface
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "allwinner,sun4i-mdio".
+- reg: address and length of the register set for the device.
+
+Optional properties:
+- phy-supply: phandle to a regulator if the PHY needs one
+
+Example at the SoC level:
+mdio@01c0b080 {
+	compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-mdio";
+	reg = <0x01c0b080 0x14>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+};
+
+And at the board level:
+
+mdio@01c0b080 {
+	phy-supply = <&reg_emac_3v3>;
+
+	phy0: ethernet-phy@0 {
+		reg = <0>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/arc_emac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/arc_emac.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bcbc3f009158
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/arc_emac.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+* Synopsys ARC EMAC 10/100 Ethernet driver (EMAC)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "snps,arc-emac"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts: Should contain the EMAC interrupts
+- clock-frequency: CPU frequency. It is needed to calculate and set polling
+period of EMAC.
+- max-speed: Maximum supported data-rate in Mbit/s. In some HW configurations
+bandwidth of external memory controller might be a limiting factor. That's why
+it's required to specify which data-rate is supported on current SoC or FPGA.
+For example if only 10 Mbit/s is supported (10BASE-T) set "10". If 100 Mbit/s is
+supported (100BASE-TX) set "100".
+- phy: PHY device attached to the EMAC via MDIO bus
+
+Child nodes of the driver are the individual PHY devices connected to the
+MDIO bus. They must have a "reg" property given the PHY address on the MDIO bus.
+
+Optional properties:
+- mac-address: 6 bytes, mac address
+
+Examples:
+
+	ethernet@c0fc2000 {
+		compatible = "snps,arc-emac";
+		reg = <0xc0fc2000 0x3c>;
+		interrupts = <6>;
+		mac-address = [ 00 11 22 33 44 55 ];
+		clock-frequency = <80000000>;
+		max-speed = <100>;
+		phy = <&phy0>;
+
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		phy0: ethernet-phy@0 {
+			reg = <1>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/broadcom-bcm87xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/broadcom-bcm87xx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7c86d5e28a0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/broadcom-bcm87xx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+The Broadcom BCM87XX devices are a family of 10G Ethernet PHYs.  They
+have these bindings in addition to the standard PHY bindings.
+
+Compatible: Should contain "broadcom,bcm8706" or "broadcom,bcm8727" and
+            "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c45"
+
+Optional Properties:
+
+- broadcom,c45-reg-init : one of more sets of 4 cells.  The first cell
+  is the MDIO Manageable Device (MMD) address, the second a register
+  address within the MMD, the third cell contains a mask to be ANDed
+  with the existing register value, and the fourth cell is ORed with
+  he result to yield the new register value.  If the third cell has a
+  value of zero, no read of the existing value is performed.
+
+Example:
+
+	ethernet-phy@5 {
+		reg = <5>;
+		compatible = "broadcom,bcm8706", "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c45";
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+		interrupts = <12 8>; /* Pin 12, active low */
+		/*
+		 * Set PMD Digital Control Register for
+		 * GPIO[1] Tx/Rx
+		 * GPIO[0] R64 Sync Acquired
+		 */
+		broadcom,c45-reg-init = <1 0xc808 0xff8f 0x70>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/calxeda-xgmac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/calxeda-xgmac.txt
index 411727a3f82d..c8ae996bd8f2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/calxeda-xgmac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/calxeda-xgmac.txt
@@ -6,6 +6,9 @@ Required properties:
 - interrupts : Should contain 3 xgmac interrupts. The 1st is main interrupt.
   The 2nd is pwr mgt interrupt. The 3rd is low power state interrupt.
 
+Optional properties:
+- dma-coherent      : Present if dma operations are coherent
+
 Example:
 
 ethernet@fff50000 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/atmel-can.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/atmel-can.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..14e52a0d86ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/atmel-can.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+* AT91 CAN *
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: Should be "atmel,at91sam9263-can" or "atmel,at91sam9x5-can"
+  - reg: Should contain CAN controller registers location and length
+  - interrupts: Should contain IRQ line for the CAN controller
+
+Example:
+
+	can0: can@f000c000 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91sam9x5-can";
+		reg = <0xf000c000 0x300>;
+		interrupts = <40 4 5>
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/c_can.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/c_can.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8f1ae81228e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/c_can.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+Bosch C_CAN/D_CAN controller Device Tree Bindings
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible		: Should be "bosch,c_can" for C_CAN controllers and
+			  "bosch,d_can" for D_CAN controllers.
+- reg			: physical base address and size of the C_CAN/D_CAN
+			  registers map
+- interrupts		: property with a value describing the interrupt
+			  number
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,hwmods		: Must be "d_can<n>" or "c_can<n>", n being the
+			  instance number
+
+Note: "ti,hwmods" field is used to fetch the base address and irq
+resources from TI, omap hwmod data base during device registration.
+Future plan is to migrate hwmod data base contents into device tree
+blob so that, all the required data will be used from device tree dts
+file.
+
+Example:
+
+Step1: SoC common .dtsi file
+
+	dcan1: d_can@481d0000 {
+		compatible = "bosch,d_can";
+		reg = <0x481d0000 0x2000>;
+		interrupts = <55>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
+
+(or)
+
+	dcan1: d_can@481d0000 {
+		compatible = "bosch,d_can";
+		ti,hwmods = "d_can1";
+		reg = <0x481d0000 0x2000>;
+		interrupts = <55>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
+
+Step 2: board specific .dts file
+
+	&dcan1 {
+		status = "okay";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt
index 1ad80d5865a9..56d6cc336e1c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-Flexcan CAN contoller on Freescale's ARM and PowerPC system-on-a-chip (SOC).
+Flexcan CAN controller on Freescale's ARM and PowerPC system-on-a-chip (SOC).
 
 Required properties:
 
@@ -11,8 +11,13 @@ Required properties:
 
 - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device
 - interrupts : Interrupt tuple for this device
+
+Optional properties:
+
 - clock-frequency : The oscillator frequency driving the flexcan device
 
+- xceiver-supply: Regulator that powers the CAN transceiver
+
 Example:
 
 	can@1c000 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/grcan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/grcan.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..34ef3498f887
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/grcan.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+Aeroflex Gaisler GRCAN and GRHCAN CAN controllers.
+
+The GRCAN and CRHCAN CAN controllers are available in the GRLIB VHDL IP core
+library.
+
+Note: These properties are built from the AMBA plug&play in a Leon SPARC system
+(the ordinary environment for GRCAN and GRHCAN). There are no dts files for
+sparc.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- name : Should be "GAISLER_GRCAN", "01_03d", "GAISLER_GRHCAN" or "01_034"
+
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+
+- freq : Frequency of the external oscillator clock in Hz (the frequency of
+	the amba bus in the ordinary case)
+
+- interrupts : Interrupt number for this device
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- systemid : If not present or if the value of the least significant 16 bits
+	of this 32-bit property is smaller than GRCAN_TXBUG_SAFE_GRLIB_VERSION
+	a bug workaround is activated.
+
+For further information look in the documentation for the GLIB IP core library:
+http://www.gaisler.com/products/grlib/grip.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt
index c2dbcec0ee31..f2105a47ec87 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Optional properties:
 	If not specified or if the specified value is 0, the CLKOUT pin
 	will be disabled.
 
-- nxp,no-comparator-bypass : Allows to disable the CAN input comperator.
+- nxp,no-comparator-bypass : Allows to disable the CAN input comparator.
 
 For further information, please have a look to the SJA1000 data sheet.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cavium-mdio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cavium-mdio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..04cb7491d232
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cavium-mdio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+* System Management Interface (SMI) / MDIO
+
+Properties:
+- compatible: "cavium,octeon-3860-mdio"
+
+  Compatibility with all cn3XXX, cn5XXX and cn6XXX SOCs.
+
+- reg: The base address of the MDIO bus controller register bank.
+
+- #address-cells: Must be <1>.
+
+- #size-cells: Must be <0>.  MDIO addresses have no size component.
+
+Typically an MDIO bus might have several children.
+
+Example:
+	mdio@1180000001800 {
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-mdio";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		reg = <0x11800 0x00001800 0x0 0x40>;
+
+		ethernet-phy@0 {
+			...
+			reg = <0>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cavium-mix.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cavium-mix.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5da628db68bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cavium-mix.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+* MIX Ethernet controller.
+
+Properties:
+- compatible: "cavium,octeon-5750-mix"
+
+  Compatibility with all cn5XXX and cn6XXX SOCs populated with MIX
+  devices.
+
+- reg: The base addresses of four separate register banks.  The first
+  bank contains the MIX registers.  The second bank the corresponding
+  AGL registers.  The third bank are the AGL registers shared by all
+  MIX devices present.  The fourth bank is the AGL_PRT_CTL shared by
+  all MIX devices present.
+
+- cell-index: A single cell specifying which portion of the shared
+  register banks corresponds to this MIX device.
+
+- interrupts: Two interrupt specifiers.  The first is the MIX
+  interrupt routing and the second the routing for the AGL interrupts.
+
+- mac-address: Optional, the MAC address to assign to the device.
+
+- local-mac-address: Optional, the MAC address to assign to the device
+  if mac-address is not specified.
+
+- phy-handle: Optional, a phandle for the PHY device connected to this device.
+
+Example:
+	ethernet@1070000100800 {
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-5750-mix";
+		reg = <0x10700 0x00100800 0x0 0x100>, /* MIX */
+		      <0x11800 0xE0000800 0x0 0x300>, /* AGL */
+		      <0x11800 0xE0000400 0x0 0x400>, /* AGL_SHARED  */
+		      <0x11800 0xE0002008 0x0 0x8>;   /* AGL_PRT_CTL */
+		cell-index = <1>;
+		interrupts = <1 18>, < 1 46>;
+		local-mac-address = [ 00 0f b7 10 63 54 ];
+		phy-handle = <&phy1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cavium-pip.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cavium-pip.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d4c53ba04b3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cavium-pip.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+* PIP Ethernet nexus.
+
+The PIP Ethernet nexus can control several data packet input/output
+devices.  The devices have a two level grouping scheme.  There may be
+several interfaces, and each interface may have several ports.  These
+ports might be an individual Ethernet PHY.
+
+
+Properties for the PIP nexus:
+- compatible: "cavium,octeon-3860-pip"
+
+  Compatibility with all cn3XXX, cn5XXX and cn6XXX SOCs.
+
+- reg: The base address of the PIP's register bank.
+
+- #address-cells: Must be <1>.
+
+- #size-cells: Must be <0>.
+
+Properties for PIP interfaces which is a child the PIP nexus:
+- compatible: "cavium,octeon-3860-pip-interface"
+
+  Compatibility with all cn3XXX, cn5XXX and cn6XXX SOCs.
+
+- reg: The interface number.
+
+- #address-cells: Must be <1>.
+
+- #size-cells: Must be <0>.
+
+Properties for PIP port which is a child the PIP interface:
+- compatible: "cavium,octeon-3860-pip-port"
+
+  Compatibility with all cn3XXX, cn5XXX and cn6XXX SOCs.
+
+- reg: The port number within the interface group.
+
+- mac-address: Optional, the MAC address to assign to the device.
+
+- local-mac-address: Optional, the MAC address to assign to the device
+  if mac-address is not specified.
+
+- phy-handle: Optional, a phandle for the PHY device connected to this device.
+
+Example:
+
+	pip@11800a0000000 {
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-pip";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		reg = <0x11800 0xa0000000 0x0 0x2000>;
+
+		interface@0 {
+			compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-pip-interface";
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+			reg = <0>; /* interface */
+
+			ethernet@0 {
+				compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-pip-port";
+				reg = <0x0>; /* Port */
+				local-mac-address = [ 00 0f b7 10 63 60 ];
+				phy-handle = <&phy2>;
+			};
+			ethernet@1 {
+				compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-pip-port";
+				reg = <0x1>; /* Port */
+				local-mac-address = [ 00 0f b7 10 63 61 ];
+				phy-handle = <&phy3>;
+			};
+			ethernet@2 {
+				compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-pip-port";
+				reg = <0x2>; /* Port */
+				local-mac-address = [ 00 0f b7 10 63 62 ];
+				phy-handle = <&phy4>;
+			};
+			ethernet@3 {
+				compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-pip-port";
+				reg = <0x3>; /* Port */
+				local-mac-address = [ 00 0f b7 10 63 63 ];
+				phy-handle = <&phy5>;
+			};
+		};
+
+		interface@1 {
+			compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-pip-interface";
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+			reg = <1>; /* interface */
+
+			ethernet@0 {
+				compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-pip-port";
+				reg = <0x0>; /* Port */
+				local-mac-address = [ 00 0f b7 10 63 64 ];
+				phy-handle = <&phy6>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cdns-emac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cdns-emac.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..09055c2495f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cdns-emac.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+* Cadence EMAC Ethernet controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "cdns,[<chip>-]{emac}"
+  Use "cdns,at91rm9200-emac" Atmel at91rm9200 SoC.
+  or the generic form: "cdns,emac".
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts: Should contain macb interrupt
+- phy-mode: String, operation mode of the PHY interface.
+  Supported values are: "mii", "rmii".
+
+Optional properties:
+- local-mac-address: 6 bytes, mac address
+
+Examples:
+
+	macb0: ethernet@fffc4000 {
+		compatible = "cdns,at91rm9200-emac";
+		reg = <0xfffc4000 0x4000>;
+		interrupts = <21>;
+		phy-mode = "rmii";
+		local-mac-address = [3a 0e 03 04 05 06];
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..05d660e4ac64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+TI SoC Ethernet Switch Controller Device Tree Bindings
+------------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible		: Should be "ti,cpsw"
+- reg			: physical base address and size of the cpsw
+			  registers map
+- interrupts		: property with a value describing the interrupt
+			  number
+- interrupt-parent	: The parent interrupt controller
+- cpdma_channels 	: Specifies number of channels in CPDMA
+- ale_entries		: Specifies No of entries ALE can hold
+- bd_ram_size		: Specifies internal descriptor RAM size
+- rx_descs		: Specifies number of Rx descriptors
+- mac_control		: Specifies Default MAC control register content
+			  for the specific platform
+- slaves		: Specifies number for slaves
+- active_slave		: Specifies the slave to use for time stamping,
+			  ethtool and SIOCGMIIPHY
+- cpts_clock_mult	: Numerator to convert input clock ticks into nanoseconds
+- cpts_clock_shift	: Denominator to convert input clock ticks into nanoseconds
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,hwmods		: Must be "cpgmac0"
+- no_bd_ram		: Must be 0 or 1
+- dual_emac		: Specifies Switch to act as Dual EMAC
+
+Slave Properties:
+Required properties:
+- phy_id		: Specifies slave phy id
+- phy-mode		: The interface between the SoC and the PHY (a string
+			  that of_get_phy_mode() can understand)
+- mac-address		: Specifies slave MAC address
+
+Optional properties:
+- dual_emac_res_vlan	: Specifies VID to be used to segregate the ports
+
+Note: "ti,hwmods" field is used to fetch the base address and irq
+resources from TI, omap hwmod data base during device registration.
+Future plan is to migrate hwmod data base contents into device tree
+blob so that, all the required data will be used from device tree dts
+file.
+
+Examples:
+
+	mac: ethernet@4A100000 {
+		compatible = "ti,cpsw";
+		reg = <0x4A100000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <55 0x4>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+		cpdma_channels = <8>;
+		ale_entries = <1024>;
+		bd_ram_size = <0x2000>;
+		no_bd_ram = <0>;
+		rx_descs = <64>;
+		mac_control = <0x20>;
+		slaves = <2>;
+		active_slave = <0>;
+		cpts_clock_mult = <0x80000000>;
+		cpts_clock_shift = <29>;
+		cpsw_emac0: slave@0 {
+			phy_id = <&davinci_mdio>, <0>;
+			phy-mode = "rgmii-txid";
+			/* Filled in by U-Boot */
+			mac-address = [ 00 00 00 00 00 00 ];
+		};
+		cpsw_emac1: slave@1 {
+			phy_id = <&davinci_mdio>, <1>;
+			phy-mode = "rgmii-txid";
+			/* Filled in by U-Boot */
+			mac-address = [ 00 00 00 00 00 00 ];
+		};
+	};
+
+(or)
+	mac: ethernet@4A100000 {
+		compatible = "ti,cpsw";
+		ti,hwmods = "cpgmac0";
+		cpdma_channels = <8>;
+		ale_entries = <1024>;
+		bd_ram_size = <0x2000>;
+		no_bd_ram = <0>;
+		rx_descs = <64>;
+		mac_control = <0x20>;
+		slaves = <2>;
+		active_slave = <0>;
+		cpts_clock_mult = <0x80000000>;
+		cpts_clock_shift = <29>;
+		cpsw_emac0: slave@0 {
+			phy_id = <&davinci_mdio>, <0>;
+			phy-mode = "rgmii-txid";
+			/* Filled in by U-Boot */
+			mac-address = [ 00 00 00 00 00 00 ];
+		};
+		cpsw_emac1: slave@1 {
+			phy_id = <&davinci_mdio>, <1>;
+			phy-mode = "rgmii-txid";
+			/* Filled in by U-Boot */
+			mac-address = [ 00 00 00 00 00 00 ];
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davicom-dm9000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davicom-dm9000.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2d39c990e641
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davicom-dm9000.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+Davicom DM9000 Fast Ethernet controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible = "davicom,dm9000";
+- reg : physical addresses and sizes of registers, must contain 2 entries:
+    first entry : address register,
+    second entry : data register.
+- interrupt-parent : interrupt controller to which the device is connected
+- interrupts : interrupt specifier specific to interrupt controller
+
+Optional properties:
+- local-mac-address : A bytestring of 6 bytes specifying Ethernet MAC address
+    to use (from firmware or bootloader)
+- davicom,no-eeprom : Configuration EEPROM is not available
+- davicom,ext-phy : Use external PHY
+
+Example:
+
+	ethernet@18000000 {
+		compatible = "davicom,dm9000";
+		reg = <0x18000000 0x2 0x18000004 0x2>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpn>;
+		interrupts = <7 4>;
+		local-mac-address = [00 00 de ad be ef];
+		davicom,no-eeprom;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci-mdio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci-mdio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..72efaaf764f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci-mdio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+TI SoC Davinci MDIO Controller Device Tree Bindings
+---------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible		: Should be "ti,davinci_mdio"
+- reg			: physical base address and size of the davinci mdio
+			  registers map
+- bus_freq		: Mdio Bus frequency
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,hwmods		: Must be "davinci_mdio"
+
+Note: "ti,hwmods" field is used to fetch the base address and irq
+resources from TI, omap hwmod data base during device registration.
+Future plan is to migrate hwmod data base contents into device tree
+blob so that, all the required data will be used from device tree dts
+file.
+
+Examples:
+
+	mdio: davinci_mdio@4A101000 {
+		compatible = "ti,cpsw";
+		reg = <0x4A101000 0x1000>;
+		bus_freq = <1000000>;
+	};
+
+(or)
+
+	mdio: davinci_mdio@4A101000 {
+		compatible = "ti,cpsw";
+		ti,hwmods = "davinci_mdio";
+		bus_freq = <1000000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..48b259e29e87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+* Texas Instruments Davinci EMAC
+
+This file provides information, what the device node
+for the davinci_emac interface contains.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,davinci-dm6467-emac";
+- reg: Offset and length of the register set for the device
+- ti,davinci-ctrl-reg-offset: offset to control register
+- ti,davinci-ctrl-mod-reg-offset: offset to control module register
+- ti,davinci-ctrl-ram-offset: offset to control module ram
+- ti,davinci-ctrl-ram-size: size of control module ram
+- ti,davinci-rmii-en: use RMII
+- ti,davinci-no-bd-ram: has the emac controller BD RAM
+- phy-handle: Contains a phandle to an Ethernet PHY.
+              if not, davinci_emac driver defaults to 100/FULL
+- interrupts: interrupt mapping for the davinci emac interrupts sources:
+              4 sources: <Receive Threshold Interrupt
+			  Receive Interrupt
+			  Transmit Interrupt
+			  Miscellaneous Interrupt>
+
+Optional properties:
+- local-mac-address : 6 bytes, mac address
+
+Example (enbw_cmc board):
+	eth0: emac@1e20000 {
+		compatible = "ti,davinci-dm6467-emac";
+		reg = <0x220000 0x4000>;
+		ti,davinci-ctrl-reg-offset = <0x3000>;
+		ti,davinci-ctrl-mod-reg-offset = <0x2000>;
+		ti,davinci-ctrl-ram-offset = <0>;
+		ti,davinci-ctrl-ram-size = <0x2000>;
+		local-mac-address = [ 00 00 00 00 00 00 ];
+		interrupts = <33
+				34
+				35
+				36
+				>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..49f4f7ae3f51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+Marvell Distributed Switch Architecture Device Tree Bindings
+------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible		: Should be "marvell,dsa"
+- #address-cells	: Must be 2, first cell is the address on the MDIO bus
+			  and second cell is the address in the switch tree.
+			  Second cell is used only when cascading/chaining.
+- #size-cells		: Must be 0
+- dsa,ethernet		: Should be a phandle to a valid Ethernet device node
+- dsa,mii-bus		: Should be a phandle to a valid MDIO bus device node
+
+Optionnal properties:
+- interrupts		: property with a value describing the switch
+			  interrupt number (not supported by the driver)
+
+A DSA node can contain multiple switch chips which are therefore child nodes of
+the parent DSA node. The maximum number of allowed child nodes is 4
+(DSA_MAX_SWITCHES).
+Each of these switch child nodes should have the following required properties:
+
+- reg			: Describes the switch address on the MII bus
+- #address-cells	: Must be 1
+- #size-cells		: Must be 0
+
+A switch may have multiple "port" children nodes
+
+Each port children node must have the following mandatory properties:
+- reg			: Describes the port address in the switch
+- label			: Describes the label associated with this port, special
+			  labels are "cpu" to indicate a CPU port and "dsa" to
+			  indicate an uplink/downlink port.
+
+Note that a port labelled "dsa" will imply checking for the uplink phandle
+described below.
+
+Optionnal property:
+- link			: Should be a phandle to another switch's DSA port.
+			  This property is only used when switches are being
+			  chained/cascaded together.
+
+Example:
+
+	dsa@0 {
+		compatible = "marvell,dsa";
+		#address-cells = <2>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		interrupts = <10>;
+		dsa,ethernet = <&ethernet0>;
+		dsa,mii-bus = <&mii_bus0>;
+
+		switch@0 {
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+			reg = <16 0>;	/* MDIO address 16, switch 0 in tree */
+
+			port@0 {
+				reg = <0>;
+				label = "lan1";
+			};
+
+			port@1 {
+				reg = <1>;
+				label = "lan2";
+			};
+
+			port@5 {
+				reg = <5>;
+				label = "cpu";
+			};
+
+			switch0uplink: port@6 {
+				reg = <6>;
+				label = "dsa";
+				link = <&switch1uplink>;
+			};
+		};
+
+		switch@1 {
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+			reg = <17 1>;	/* MDIO address 17, switch 1 in tree */
+
+			switch1uplink: port@0 {
+				reg = <0>;
+				label = "dsa";
+				link = <&switch0uplink>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fec.txt
index de439517dff0..d53639221403 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fec.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fec.txt
@@ -7,18 +7,22 @@ Required properties:
 - phy-mode : String, operation mode of the PHY interface.
   Supported values are: "mii", "gmii", "sgmii", "tbi", "rmii",
   "rgmii", "rgmii-id", "rgmii-rxid", "rgmii-txid", "rtbi", "smii".
-- phy-reset-gpios : Should specify the gpio for phy reset
 
 Optional properties:
 - local-mac-address : 6 bytes, mac address
+- phy-reset-gpios : Should specify the gpio for phy reset
+- phy-reset-duration : Reset duration in milliseconds.  Should present
+  only if property "phy-reset-gpios" is available.  Missing the property
+  will have the duration be 1 millisecond.  Numbers greater than 1000 are
+  invalid and 1 millisecond will be used instead.
 
 Example:
 
-fec@83fec000 {
+ethernet@83fec000 {
 	compatible = "fsl,imx51-fec", "fsl,imx27-fec";
 	reg = <0x83fec000 0x4000>;
 	interrupts = <87>;
 	phy-mode = "mii";
-	phy-reset-gpios = <&gpio1 14 0>; /* GPIO2_14 */
+	phy-reset-gpios = <&gpio2 14 0>; /* GPIO2_14 */
 	local-mac-address = [00 04 9F 01 1B B9];
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt
index 2c6be0377f55..d2ea4605d078 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt
@@ -86,6 +86,7 @@ General Properties:
 
 Clock Properties:
 
+  - fsl,cksel        Timer reference clock source.
   - fsl,tclk-period  Timer reference clock period in nanoseconds.
   - fsl,tmr-prsc     Prescaler, divides the output clock.
   - fsl,tmr-add      Frequency compensation value.
@@ -97,7 +98,7 @@ Clock Properties:
   clock. You must choose these carefully for the clock to work right.
   Here is how to figure good values:
 
-  TimerOsc     = system clock               MHz
+  TimerOsc     = selected reference clock   MHz
   tclk_period  = desired clock period       nanoseconds
   NominalFreq  = 1000 / tclk_period         MHz
   FreqDivRatio = TimerOsc / NominalFreq     (must be greater that 1.0)
@@ -114,6 +115,20 @@ Clock Properties:
   Pulse Per Second (PPS) signal, since this will be offered to the PPS
   subsystem to synchronize the Linux clock.
 
+  Reference clock source is determined by the value, which is holded
+  in CKSEL bits in TMR_CTRL register. "fsl,cksel" property keeps the
+  value, which will be directly written in those bits, that is why,
+  according to reference manual, the next clock sources can be used:
+
+  <0> - external high precision timer reference clock (TSEC_TMR_CLK
+        input is used for this purpose);
+  <1> - eTSEC system clock;
+  <2> - eTSEC1 transmit clock;
+  <3> - RTC clock input.
+
+  When this attribute is not used, eTSEC system clock will serve as
+  IEEE 1588 timer reference clock.
+
 Example:
 
 	ptp_clock@24E00 {
@@ -121,6 +136,7 @@ Example:
 		reg = <0x24E00 0xB0>;
 		interrupts = <12 0x8 13 0x8>;
 		interrupt-parent = < &ipic >;
+		fsl,cksel       = <1>;
 		fsl,tclk-period = <10>;
 		fsl,tmr-prsc    = <100>;
 		fsl,tmr-add     = <0x999999A4>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/gpmc-eth.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/gpmc-eth.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ace4a64b3695
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/gpmc-eth.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+Device tree bindings for Ethernet chip connected to TI GPMC
+
+Besides being used to interface with external memory devices, the
+General-Purpose Memory Controller can be used to connect Pseudo-SRAM devices
+such as ethernet controllers to processors using the TI GPMC as a data bus.
+
+Ethernet controllers connected to TI GPMC are represented as child nodes of
+the GPMC controller with an "ethernet" name.
+
+All timing relevant properties as well as generic GPMC child properties are
+explained in a separate documents. Please refer to
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
+
+For the properties relevant to the ethernet controller connected to the GPMC
+refer to the binding documentation of the device. For example, the documentation
+for the SMSC 911x is Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc911x.txt
+
+Child nodes need to specify the GPMC bus address width using the "bank-width"
+property but is possible that an ethernet controller also has a property to
+specify the I/O registers address width. Even when the GPMC has a maximum 16-bit
+address width, it supports devices with 32-bit word registers.
+For example with an SMSC LAN911x/912x controller connected to the TI GPMC on an
+OMAP2+ board, "bank-width = <2>;" and "reg-io-width = <4>;".
+
+Required properties:
+- bank-width: 		Address width of the device in bytes. GPMC supports 8-bit
+			and 16-bit devices and so must be either 1 or 2 bytes.
+- compatible:		Compatible string property for the ethernet child device.
+- gpmc,cs-on-ns:	Chip-select assertion time
+- gpmc,cs-rd-off-ns:	Chip-select de-assertion time for reads
+- gpmc,cs-wr-off-ns:	Chip-select de-assertion time for writes
+- gpmc,oe-on-ns:	Output-enable assertion time
+- gpmc,oe-off-ns:	Output-enable de-assertion time
+- gpmc,we-on-ns:	Write-enable assertion time
+- gpmc,we-off-ns:	Write-enable de-assertion time
+- gpmc,access-ns:	Start cycle to first data capture (read access)
+- gpmc,rd-cycle-ns:	Total read cycle time
+- gpmc,wr-cycle-ns:	Total write cycle time
+- reg:			Chip-select, base address (relative to chip-select)
+			and size of the memory mapped for the device.
+			Note that base address will be typically 0 as this
+			is the start of the chip-select.
+
+Optional properties:
+- gpmc,XXX		Additional GPMC timings and settings parameters. See
+			Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-gpmc.txt
+
+Example:
+
+gpmc: gpmc@6e000000 {
+	compatible = "ti,omap3430-gpmc";
+	ti,hwmods = "gpmc";
+	reg = <0x6e000000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <20>;
+	gpmc,num-cs = <8>;
+	gpmc,num-waitpins = <4>;
+	#address-cells = <2>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+
+	ranges = <5 0 0x2c000000 0x1000000>;
+
+	ethernet@5,0 {
+		compatible = "smsc,lan9221", "smsc,lan9115";
+		reg = <5 0 0xff>;
+		bank-width = <2>;
+
+		gpmc,mux-add-data;
+		gpmc,cs-on-ns = <0>;
+		gpmc,cs-rd-off-ns = <186>;
+		gpmc,cs-wr-off-ns = <186>;
+		gpmc,adv-on-ns = <12>;
+		gpmc,adv-rd-off-ns = <48>;
+		gpmc,adv-wr-off-ns = <48>;
+		gpmc,oe-on-ns = <54>;
+		gpmc,oe-off-ns = <168>;
+		gpmc,we-on-ns = <54>;
+		gpmc,we-off-ns = <168>;
+		gpmc,rd-cycle-ns = <186>;
+		gpmc,wr-cycle-ns = <186>;
+		gpmc,access-ns = <114>;
+		gpmc,page-burst-access-ns = <6>;
+		gpmc,bus-turnaround-ns = <12>;
+		gpmc,cycle2cycle-delay-ns = <18>;
+		gpmc,wr-data-mux-bus-ns = <90>;
+		gpmc,wr-access-ns = <186>;
+		gpmc,cycle2cycle-samecsen;
+		gpmc,cycle2cycle-diffcsen;
+
+		interrupt-parent = <&gpio6>;
+		interrupts = <16>;
+		vmmc-supply = <&vddvario>;
+		vmmc_aux-supply = <&vdd33a>;
+		reg-io-width = <4>;
+
+		smsc,save-mac-address;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/lpc-eth.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/lpc-eth.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..585021acd178
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/lpc-eth.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+* NXP LPC32xx SoC Ethernet Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "nxp,lpc-eth"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts: Should contain ethernet controller interrupt
+
+Optional properties:
+- phy-mode: String, operation mode of the PHY interface.
+  Supported values are: "mii", "rmii" (default)
+- use-iram: Use LPC32xx internal SRAM (IRAM) for DMA buffering
+- local-mac-address : 6 bytes, mac address
+
+Example:
+
+	mac: ethernet@31060000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,lpc-eth";
+		reg = <0x31060000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&mic>;
+		interrupts = <29 0>;
+
+		phy-mode = "rmii";
+		use-iram;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/macb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/macb.txt
index 44afa0e5057d..4ff65047bb9a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/macb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/macb.txt
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Required properties:
 - compatible: Should be "cdns,[<chip>-]{macb|gem}"
   Use "cdns,at91sam9260-macb" Atmel at91sam9260 and at91sam9263 SoCs.
   Use "cdns,at32ap7000-macb" for other 10/100 usage or use the generic form: "cdns,macb".
-  Use "cnds,pc302-gem" for Picochip picoXcell pc302 and later devices based on
+  Use "cdns,pc302-gem" for Picochip picoXcell pc302 and later devices based on
   the Cadence GEM, or the generic form: "cdns,gem".
 - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device
 - interrupts: Should contain macb interrupt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-armada-370-neta.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-armada-370-neta.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..859a6fa7569c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-armada-370-neta.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+* Marvell Armada 370 / Armada XP Ethernet Controller (NETA)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "marvell,armada-370-neta".
+- reg: address and length of the register set for the device.
+- interrupts: interrupt for the device
+- phy: A phandle to a phy node defining the PHY address (as the reg
+  property, a single integer).
+- phy-mode: The interface between the SoC and the PHY (a string that
+  of_get_phy_mode() can understand)
+- clocks: a pointer to the reference clock for this device.
+
+Example:
+
+ethernet@d0070000 {
+	compatible = "marvell,armada-370-neta";
+	reg = <0xd0070000 0x2500>;
+	interrupts = <8>;
+	clocks = <&gate_clk 4>;
+	status = "okay";
+	phy = <&phy0>;
+	phy-mode = "rgmii-id";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-orion-mdio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-orion-mdio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9417e54c26c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-orion-mdio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+* Marvell MDIO Ethernet Controller interface
+
+The Ethernet controllers of the Marvel Kirkwood, Dove, Orion5x,
+MV78xx0, Armada 370 and Armada XP have an identical unit that provides
+an interface with the MDIO bus. This driver handles this MDIO
+interface.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "marvell,orion-mdio"
+- reg: address and length of the SMI register
+
+Optional properties:
+- interrupts: interrupt line number for the SMI error/done interrupt
+- clocks: Phandle to the clock control device and gate bit
+
+The child nodes of the MDIO driver are the individual PHY devices
+connected to this MDIO bus. They must have a "reg" property given the
+PHY address on the MDIO bus.
+
+Example at the SoC level:
+
+mdio {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "marvell,orion-mdio";
+	reg = <0xd0072004 0x4>;
+};
+
+And at the board level:
+
+mdio {
+	phy0: ethernet-phy@0 {
+		reg = <0>;
+	};
+
+	phy1: ethernet-phy@1 {
+		reg = <1>;
+	};
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-orion-net.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-orion-net.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a73b79f227e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-orion-net.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+Marvell Orion/Discovery ethernet controller
+=============================================
+
+The Marvell Discovery ethernet controller can be found on Marvell Orion SoCs
+(Kirkwood, Dove, Orion5x, and Discovery Innovation) and as part of Marvell
+Discovery system controller chips (mv64[345]60).
+
+The Discovery ethernet controller is described with two levels of nodes. The
+first level describes the ethernet controller itself and the second level
+describes up to 3 ethernet port nodes within that controller. The reason for
+the multiple levels is that the port registers are interleaved within a single
+set of controller registers. Each port node describes port-specific properties.
+
+Note: The above separation is only true for Discovery system controllers.
+For Orion SoCs we stick to the separation, although there each controller has
+only one port associated. Multiple ports are implemented as multiple single-port
+controllers. As Kirkwood has some issues with proper initialization after reset,
+an extra compatible string is added for it.
+
+* Ethernet controller node
+
+Required controller properties:
+ - #address-cells: shall be 1.
+ - #size-cells: shall be 0.
+ - compatible: shall be one of "marvell,orion-eth", "marvell,kirkwood-eth".
+ - reg: address and length of the controller registers.
+
+Optional controller properties:
+ - clocks: phandle reference to the controller clock.
+ - marvell,tx-checksum-limit: max tx packet size for hardware checksum.
+
+* Ethernet port node
+
+Required port properties:
+ - device_type: shall be "network".
+ - compatible: shall be one of "marvell,orion-eth-port",
+      "marvell,kirkwood-eth-port".
+ - reg: port number relative to ethernet controller, shall be 0, 1, or 2.
+ - interrupts: port interrupt.
+ - local-mac-address: 6 bytes MAC address.
+
+Optional port properties:
+ - marvell,tx-queue-size: size of the transmit ring buffer.
+ - marvell,tx-sram-addr: address of transmit descriptor buffer located in SRAM.
+ - marvell,tx-sram-size: size of transmit descriptor buffer located in SRAM.
+ - marvell,rx-queue-size: size of the receive ring buffer.
+ - marvell,rx-sram-addr: address of receive descriptor buffer located in SRAM.
+ - marvell,rx-sram-size: size of receive descriptor buffer located in SRAM.
+
+and
+
+ - phy-handle: phandle reference to ethernet PHY.
+
+or
+
+ - speed: port speed if no PHY connected.
+ - duplex: port mode if no PHY connected.
+
+* Node example:
+
+mdio-bus {
+	...
+	ethphy: ethernet-phy@8 {
+		device_type = "ethernet-phy";
+		...
+	};
+};
+
+eth: ethernet-controller@72000 {
+	compatible = "marvell,orion-eth";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	reg = <0x72000 0x2000>;
+	clocks = <&gate_clk 2>;
+	marvell,tx-checksum-limit = <1600>;
+
+	ethernet@0 {
+		device_type = "network";
+		compatible = "marvell,orion-eth-port";
+		reg = <0>;
+		interrupts = <29>;
+		phy-handle = <&ethphy>;
+		local-mac-address = [00 00 00 00 00 00];
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-gpio.txt
index bc9549529014..c79bab025369 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-gpio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-gpio.txt
@@ -8,9 +8,16 @@ gpios property as described in section VIII.1 in the following order:
 
 MDC, MDIO.
 
+Note: Each gpio-mdio bus should have an alias correctly numbered in "aliases"
+node.
+
 Example:
 
-mdio {
+aliases {
+	mdio-gpio0 = <&mdio0>;
+};
+
+mdio0: mdio {
 	compatible = "virtual,mdio-gpio";
 	#address-cells = <1>;
 	#size-cells = <0>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..79384113c2b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+Properties for an MDIO bus multiplexer/switch controlled by GPIO pins.
+
+This is a special case of a MDIO bus multiplexer.  One or more GPIO
+lines are used to control which child bus is connected.
+
+Required properties in addition to the generic multiplexer properties:
+
+- compatible : mdio-mux-gpio.
+- gpios : GPIO specifiers for each GPIO line.  One or more must be specified.
+
+
+Example :
+
+	/* The parent MDIO bus. */
+	smi1: mdio@1180000001900 {
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-mdio";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		reg = <0x11800 0x00001900 0x0 0x40>;
+	};
+
+	/*
+	   An NXP sn74cbtlv3253 dual 1-of-4 switch controlled by a
+	   pair of GPIO lines.  Child busses 2 and 3 populated with 4
+	   PHYs each.
+	 */
+	mdio-mux {
+		compatible = "mdio-mux-gpio";
+		gpios = <&gpio1 3 0>, <&gpio1 4 0>;
+		mdio-parent-bus = <&smi1>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		mdio@2 {
+			reg = <2>;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			phy11: ethernet-phy@1 {
+				reg = <1>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <10 8>; /* Pin 10, active low */
+			};
+			phy12: ethernet-phy@2 {
+				reg = <2>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <10 8>; /* Pin 10, active low */
+			};
+			phy13: ethernet-phy@3 {
+				reg = <3>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <10 8>; /* Pin 10, active low */
+			};
+			phy14: ethernet-phy@4 {
+				reg = <4>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <10 8>; /* Pin 10, active low */
+			};
+		};
+
+		mdio@3 {
+			reg = <3>;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			phy21: ethernet-phy@1 {
+				reg = <1>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <12 8>; /* Pin 12, active low */
+			};
+			phy22: ethernet-phy@2 {
+				reg = <2>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <12 8>; /* Pin 12, active low */
+			};
+			phy23: ethernet-phy@3 {
+				reg = <3>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <12 8>; /* Pin 12, active low */
+			};
+			phy24: ethernet-phy@4 {
+				reg = <4>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <12 8>; /* Pin 12, active low */
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-mmioreg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-mmioreg.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8516929c7251
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux-mmioreg.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+Properties for an MDIO bus multiplexer controlled by a memory-mapped device
+
+This is a special case of a MDIO bus multiplexer.  A memory-mapped device,
+like an FPGA, is used to control which child bus is connected.  The mdio-mux
+node must be a child of the memory-mapped device.  The driver currently only
+supports devices with eight-bit registers.
+
+Required properties in addition to the generic multiplexer properties:
+
+- compatible : string, must contain "mdio-mux-mmioreg"
+
+- reg : integer, contains the offset of the register that controls the bus
+	multiplexer.  The size field in the 'reg' property is the size of
+	register, and must therefore be 1.
+
+- mux-mask : integer, contains an eight-bit mask that specifies which
+	bits in the register control the actual bus multiplexer.  The
+	'reg' property of each child mdio-mux node must be constrained by
+	this mask.
+
+Example:
+
+The FPGA node defines a memory-mapped FPGA with a register space of 0x30 bytes.
+For the "EMI2" MDIO bus, register 9 (BRDCFG1) controls the mux on that bus.
+A bitmask of 0x6 means that bits 1 and 2 (bit 0 is lsb) are the bits on
+BRDCFG1 that control the actual mux.
+
+	/* The FPGA node */
+	fpga: board-control@3,0 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		compatible = "fsl,p5020ds-fpga", "fsl,fpga-ngpixis";
+		reg = <3 0 0x30>;
+		ranges = <0 3 0 0x30>;
+
+		mdio-mux-emi2 {
+			compatible = "mdio-mux-mmioreg", "mdio-mux";
+			mdio-parent-bus = <&xmdio0>;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+			reg = <9 1>; // BRDCFG1
+			mux-mask = <0x6>; // EMI2
+
+			emi2_slot1: mdio@0 {	// Slot 1 XAUI (FM2)
+				reg = <0>;
+				#address-cells = <1>;
+				#size-cells = <0>;
+
+				phy_xgmii_slot1: ethernet-phy@0 {
+					compatible = "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c45";
+					reg = <4>;
+				};
+			};
+
+			emi2_slot2: mdio@2 {	// Slot 2 XAUI (FM1)
+				reg = <2>;
+				#address-cells = <1>;
+				#size-cells = <0>;
+
+				phy_xgmii_slot2: ethernet-phy@4 {
+					compatible = "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c45";
+					reg = <0>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+	/* The parent MDIO bus. */
+	xmdio0: mdio@f1000 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		compatible = "fsl,fman-xmdio";
+		reg = <0xf1000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <100 1 0 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f65606f8d632
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+Common MDIO bus multiplexer/switch properties.
+
+An MDIO bus multiplexer/switch will have several child busses that are
+numbered uniquely in a device dependent manner.  The nodes for an MDIO
+bus multiplexer/switch will have one child node for each child bus.
+
+Required properties:
+- mdio-parent-bus : phandle to the parent MDIO bus.
+- #address-cells = <1>;
+- #size-cells = <0>;
+
+Optional properties:
+- Other properties specific to the multiplexer/switch hardware.
+
+Required properties for child nodes:
+- #address-cells = <1>;
+- #size-cells = <0>;
+- reg : The sub-bus number.
+
+
+Example :
+
+	/* The parent MDIO bus. */
+	smi1: mdio@1180000001900 {
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-mdio";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		reg = <0x11800 0x00001900 0x0 0x40>;
+	};
+
+	/*
+	   An NXP sn74cbtlv3253 dual 1-of-4 switch controlled by a
+	   pair of GPIO lines.  Child busses 2 and 3 populated with 4
+	   PHYs each.
+	 */
+	mdio-mux {
+		compatible = "mdio-mux-gpio";
+		gpios = <&gpio1 3 0>, <&gpio1 4 0>;
+		mdio-parent-bus = <&smi1>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		mdio@2 {
+			reg = <2>;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			phy11: ethernet-phy@1 {
+				reg = <1>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <10 8>; /* Pin 10, active low */
+			};
+			phy12: ethernet-phy@2 {
+				reg = <2>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <10 8>; /* Pin 10, active low */
+			};
+			phy13: ethernet-phy@3 {
+				reg = <3>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <10 8>; /* Pin 10, active low */
+			};
+			phy14: ethernet-phy@4 {
+				reg = <4>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <10 8>; /* Pin 10, active low */
+			};
+		};
+
+		mdio@3 {
+			reg = <3>;
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+
+			phy21: ethernet-phy@1 {
+				reg = <1>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <12 8>; /* Pin 12, active low */
+			};
+			phy22: ethernet-phy@2 {
+				reg = <2>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <12 8>; /* Pin 12, active low */
+			};
+			phy23: ethernet-phy@3 {
+				reg = <3>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <12 8>; /* Pin 12, active low */
+			};
+			phy24: ethernet-phy@4 {
+				reg = <4>;
+				compatible = "marvell,88e1149r";
+				marvell,reg-init = <3 0x10 0 0x5777>,
+					<3 0x11 0 0x00aa>,
+					<3 0x12 0 0x4105>,
+					<3 0x13 0 0x0a60>;
+				interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+				interrupts = <12 8>; /* Pin 12, active low */
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/micrel-ks8851.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/micrel-ks8851.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..11ace3c3d805
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/micrel-ks8851.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+Micrel KS8851 Ethernet mac
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible = "micrel,ks8851-ml" of parallel interface
+- reg : 2 physical address and size of registers for data and command
+- interrupts : interrupt connection
+
+Optional properties:
+- local-mac-address : Ethernet mac address to use
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/micrel-ksz9021.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/micrel-ksz9021.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..997a63f1aea1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/micrel-ksz9021.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+Micrel KSZ9021 Gigabit Ethernet PHY
+
+Some boards require special tuning values, particularly when it comes to
+clock delays.  You can specify clock delay values by adding
+micrel-specific properties to an Ethernet OF device node.
+
+All skew control options are specified in picoseconds.  The minimum
+value is 0, and the maximum value is 3000.
+
+Optional properties:
+ - rxc-skew-ps : Skew control of RXC pad
+ - rxdv-skew-ps : Skew control of RX CTL pad
+ - txc-skew-ps : Skew control of TXC pad
+ - txen-skew-ps : Skew control of TX_CTL pad
+ - rxd0-skew-ps : Skew control of RX data 0 pad
+ - rxd1-skew-ps : Skew control of RX data 1 pad
+ - rxd2-skew-ps : Skew control of RX data 2 pad
+ - rxd3-skew-ps : Skew control of RX data 3 pad
+ - txd0-skew-ps : Skew control of TX data 0 pad
+ - txd1-skew-ps : Skew control of TX data 1 pad
+ - txd2-skew-ps : Skew control of TX data 2 pad
+ - txd3-skew-ps : Skew control of TX data 3 pad
+
+Examples:
+
+	/* Attach to an Ethernet device with autodetected PHY */
+	&enet {
+		rxc-skew-ps = <3000>;
+		rxdv-skew-ps = <0>;
+		txc-skew-ps = <3000>;
+		txen-skew-ps = <0>;
+		status = "okay";
+	};
+
+	/* Attach to an explicitly-specified PHY */
+	mdio {
+		phy0: ethernet-phy@0 {
+			rxc-skew-ps = <3000>;
+			rxdv-skew-ps = <0>;
+			txc-skew-ps = <3000>;
+			txen-skew-ps = <0>;
+			reg = <0>;
+		};
+	};
+	ethernet@70000 {
+		status = "okay";
+		phy = <&phy0>;
+		phy-mode = "rgmii-id";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/moxa,moxart-mac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/moxa,moxart-mac.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..583418b2c127
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/moxa,moxart-mac.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+MOXA ART Ethernet Controller
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : Must be "moxa,moxart-mac"
+- reg : Should contain register location and length
+- interrupts : Should contain the mac interrupt number
+
+Example:
+
+	mac0: mac@90900000 {
+		compatible = "moxa,moxart-mac";
+		reg =	<0x90900000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <25 0>;
+	};
+
+	mac1: mac@92000000 {
+		compatible = "moxa,moxart-mac";
+		reg =	<0x92000000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <27 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt
index bb8c742eb8c5..7cd18fbfcf71 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt
@@ -14,10 +14,20 @@ Required properties:
  - linux,phandle :  phandle for this node; likely referenced by an
    ethernet controller node.
 
+Optional Properties:
+
+- compatible: Compatible list, may contain
+  "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c22" or "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c45" for
+  PHYs that implement IEEE802.3 clause 22 or IEEE802.3 clause 45
+  specifications. If neither of these are specified, the default is to
+  assume clause 22. The compatible list may also contain other
+  elements.
+
 Example:
 
 ethernet-phy@0 {
-	linux,phandle = <2452000>
+	compatible = "ethernet-phy-ieee802.3-c22";
+	linux,phandle = <2452000>;
 	interrupt-parent = <40000>;
 	interrupts = <35 1>;
 	reg = <0>;
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stmmac.txt
index 1f62623f8c3f..eba0e5e59ebe 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stmmac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stmmac.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 * STMicroelectronics 10/100/1000 Ethernet driver (GMAC)
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible: Should be "st,spear600-gmac"
+- compatible: Should be "snps,dwmac-<ip_version>" "snps,dwmac"
+	For backwards compatibility: "st,spear600-gmac" is also supported.
 - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device
 - interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller
   that services interrupts for this device
@@ -11,6 +12,21 @@ Required properties:
   property
 - phy-mode: String, operation mode of the PHY interface.
   Supported values are: "mii", "rmii", "gmii", "rgmii".
+- snps,phy-addr		phy address to connect to.
+- snps,reset-gpio 	gpio number for phy reset.
+- snps,reset-active-low boolean flag to indicate if phy reset is active low.
+- snps,reset-delays-us  is triplet of delays
+	The 1st cell is reset pre-delay in micro seconds.
+	The 2nd cell is reset pulse in micro seconds.
+	The 3rd cell is reset post-delay in micro seconds.
+- snps,pbl		Programmable Burst Length
+- snps,fixed-burst	Program the DMA to use the fixed burst mode
+- snps,mixed-burst	Program the DMA to use the mixed burst mode
+- snps,force_thresh_dma_mode	Force DMA to use the threshold mode for
+				both tx and rx
+- snps,force_sf_dma_mode	Force DMA to use the Store and Forward
+				mode for both tx and rx. This flag is
+				ignored if force_thresh_dma_mode is set.
 
 Optional properties:
 - mac-address: 6 bytes, mac address
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/via-velocity.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/via-velocity.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b3db469b1ad7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/via-velocity.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+* VIA Velocity 10/100/1000 Network Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "via,velocity-vt6110"
+- reg : Address and length of the io space
+- interrupts : Should contain the controller interrupt line
+
+Optional properties:
+- no-eeprom : PCI network cards use an external EEPROM to store data. Embedded
+	devices quite often set this data in uboot and do not provide an eeprom.
+	Specify this option if you have no external eeprom.
+
+Examples:
+
+eth0@d8004000 {
+	compatible = "via,velocity-vt6110";
+	reg = <0xd8004000 0x400>;
+	interrupts = <10>;
+	no-eeprom;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvec/nvec_nvidia.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvec/nvidia,nvec.txt
index 5aeee53ff9f4..5aeee53ff9f4 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvec/nvec_nvidia.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvec/nvidia,nvec.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e216af356847
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+* Synopsys Designware PCIe interface
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should contain "snps,dw-pcie" to identify the
+	core, plus an identifier for the specific instance, such
+	as "samsung,exynos5440-pcie".
+- reg: base addresses and lengths of the pcie controller,
+	the phy controller, additional register for the phy controller.
+- interrupts: interrupt values for level interrupt,
+	pulse interrupt, special interrupt.
+- clocks: from common clock binding: handle to pci clock.
+- clock-names: from common clock binding: should be "pcie" and "pcie_bus".
+- #address-cells: set to <3>
+- #size-cells: set to <2>
+- device_type: set to "pci"
+- ranges: ranges for the PCI memory and I/O regions
+- #interrupt-cells: set to <1>
+- interrupt-map-mask and interrupt-map: standard PCI properties
+	to define the mapping of the PCIe interface to interrupt
+	numbers.
+- num-lanes: number of lanes to use
+- reset-gpio: gpio pin number of power good signal
+
+Example:
+
+SoC specific DT Entry:
+
+	pcie@290000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos5440-pcie", "snps,dw-pcie";
+		reg = <0x290000 0x1000
+			0x270000 0x1000
+			0x271000 0x40>;
+		interrupts = <0 20 0>, <0 21 0>, <0 22 0>;
+		clocks = <&clock 28>, <&clock 27>;
+		clock-names = "pcie", "pcie_bus";
+		#address-cells = <3>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		device_type = "pci";
+		ranges = <0x00000800 0 0x40000000 0x40000000 0 0x00001000   /* configuration space */
+			  0x81000000 0 0	  0x40001000 0 0x00010000   /* downstream I/O */
+			  0x82000000 0 0x40011000 0x40011000 0 0x1ffef000>; /* non-prefetchable memory */
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>;
+		interrupt-map = <0x0 0 &gic 53>;
+		num-lanes = <4>;
+	};
+
+	pcie@2a0000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos5440-pcie", "snps,dw-pcie";
+		reg = <0x2a0000 0x1000
+			0x272000 0x1000
+			0x271040 0x40>;
+		interrupts = <0 23 0>, <0 24 0>, <0 25 0>;
+		clocks = <&clock 29>, <&clock 27>;
+		clock-names = "pcie", "pcie_bus";
+		#address-cells = <3>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		device_type = "pci";
+		ranges = <0x00000800 0 0x60000000 0x60000000 0 0x00001000   /* configuration space */
+			  0x81000000 0 0	  0x60001000 0 0x00010000   /* downstream I/O */
+			  0x82000000 0 0x60011000 0x60011000 0 0x1ffef000>; /* non-prefetchable memory */
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>;
+		interrupt-map = <0x0 0 &gic 56>;
+		num-lanes = <4>;
+	};
+
+Board specific DT Entry:
+
+	pcie@290000 {
+		reset-gpio = <&pin_ctrl 5 0>;
+	};
+
+	pcie@2a0000 {
+		reset-gpio = <&pin_ctrl 22 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/mvebu-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/mvebu-pci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9556e2fedf6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/mvebu-pci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,294 @@
+* Marvell EBU PCIe interfaces
+
+Mandatory properties:
+
+- compatible: one of the following values:
+    marvell,armada-370-pcie
+    marvell,armada-xp-pcie
+    marvell,kirkwood-pcie
+- #address-cells, set to <3>
+- #size-cells, set to <2>
+- #interrupt-cells, set to <1>
+- bus-range: PCI bus numbers covered
+- device_type, set to "pci"
+- ranges: ranges describing the MMIO registers to control the PCIe
+  interfaces, and ranges describing the MBus windows needed to access
+  the memory and I/O regions of each PCIe interface.
+
+The ranges describing the MMIO registers have the following layout:
+
+    0x82000000 0 r MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) r 0 s
+
+where:
+
+  * r is a 32-bits value that gives the offset of the MMIO
+  registers of this PCIe interface, from the base of the internal
+  registers.
+
+  * s is a 32-bits value that give the size of this MMIO
+  registers area. This range entry translates the '0x82000000 0 r' PCI
+  address into the 'MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) r' CPU address, which is part
+  of the internal register window (as identified by MBUS_ID(0xf0,
+  0x01)).
+
+The ranges describing the MBus windows have the following layout:
+
+    0x8t000000 s 0     MBUS_ID(w, a) 0 1 0
+
+where:
+
+   * t is the type of the MBus window (as defined by the standard PCI DT
+   bindings), 1 for I/O and 2 for memory.
+
+   * s is the PCI slot that corresponds to this PCIe interface
+
+   * w is the 'target ID' value for the MBus window
+
+   * a the 'attribute' value for the MBus window.
+
+Since the location and size of the different MBus windows is not fixed in
+hardware, and only determined in runtime, those ranges cover the full first
+4 GB of the physical address space, and do not translate into a valid CPU
+address.
+
+In addition, the device tree node must have sub-nodes describing each
+PCIe interface, having the following mandatory properties:
+
+- reg: used only for interrupt mapping, so only the first four bytes
+  are used to refer to the correct bus number and device number.
+- assigned-addresses: reference to the MMIO registers used to control
+  this PCIe interface.
+- clocks: the clock associated to this PCIe interface
+- marvell,pcie-port: the physical PCIe port number
+- status: either "disabled" or "okay"
+- device_type, set to "pci"
+- #address-cells, set to <3>
+- #size-cells, set to <2>
+- #interrupt-cells, set to <1>
+- ranges, translating the MBus windows ranges of the parent node into
+  standard PCI addresses.
+- interrupt-map-mask and interrupt-map, standard PCI properties to
+  define the mapping of the PCIe interface to interrupt numbers.
+
+and the following optional properties:
+- marvell,pcie-lane: the physical PCIe lane number, for ports having
+  multiple lanes. If this property is not found, we assume that the
+  value is 0.
+
+Example:
+
+pcie-controller {
+	compatible = "marvell,armada-xp-pcie";
+	status = "disabled";
+	device_type = "pci";
+
+	#address-cells = <3>;
+	#size-cells = <2>;
+
+	bus-range = <0x00 0xff>;
+
+	ranges =
+	       <0x82000000 0 0x40000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x40000 0 0x00002000	/* Port 0.0 registers */
+		0x82000000 0 0x42000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x42000 0 0x00002000	/* Port 2.0 registers */
+		0x82000000 0 0x44000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x44000 0 0x00002000	/* Port 0.1 registers */
+		0x82000000 0 0x48000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x48000 0 0x00002000	/* Port 0.2 registers */
+		0x82000000 0 0x4c000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x4c000 0 0x00002000	/* Port 0.3 registers */
+		0x82000000 0 0x80000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x80000 0 0x00002000	/* Port 1.0 registers */
+		0x82000000 0 0x82000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x82000 0 0x00002000	/* Port 3.0 registers */
+		0x82000000 0 0x84000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x84000 0 0x00002000	/* Port 1.1 registers */
+		0x82000000 0 0x88000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x88000 0 0x00002000	/* Port 1.2 registers */
+		0x82000000 0 0x8c000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x8c000 0 0x00002000	/* Port 1.3 registers */
+		0x82000000 0x1 0     MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xe8) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.0 MEM */
+		0x81000000 0x1 0     MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xe0) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.0 IO  */
+		0x82000000 0x2 0     MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xd8) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.1 MEM */
+		0x81000000 0x2 0     MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xd0) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.1 IO  */
+		0x82000000 0x3 0     MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xb8) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.2 MEM */
+		0x81000000 0x3 0     MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xb0) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.2 IO  */
+		0x82000000 0x4 0     MBUS_ID(0x04, 0x78) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.3 MEM */
+		0x81000000 0x4 0     MBUS_ID(0x04, 0x70) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.3 IO  */
+
+		0x82000000 0x5 0     MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xe8) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.0 MEM */
+		0x81000000 0x5 0     MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xe0) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.0 IO  */
+		0x82000000 0x6 0     MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xd8) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.1 MEM */
+		0x81000000 0x6 0     MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xd0) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.1 IO  */
+		0x82000000 0x7 0     MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xb8) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.2 MEM */
+		0x81000000 0x7 0     MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xb0) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.2 IO  */
+		0x82000000 0x8 0     MBUS_ID(0x08, 0x78) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.3 MEM */
+		0x81000000 0x8 0     MBUS_ID(0x08, 0x70) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.3 IO  */
+
+		0x82000000 0x9 0     MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xf8) 0 1 0 /* Port 2.0 MEM */
+		0x81000000 0x9 0     MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xf0) 0 1 0 /* Port 2.0 IO  */
+
+		0x82000000 0xa 0     MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xf8) 0 1 0 /* Port 3.0 MEM */
+		0x81000000 0xa 0     MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xf0) 0 1 0 /* Port 3.0 IO  */>;
+
+	pcie@1,0 {
+		device_type = "pci";
+		assigned-addresses = <0x82000800 0 0x40000 0 0x2000>;
+		reg = <0x0800 0 0 0 0>;
+		#address-cells = <3>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x1 0 1 0
+			  0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x1 0 1 0>;
+		interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>;
+		interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 58>;
+		marvell,pcie-port = <0>;
+		marvell,pcie-lane = <0>;
+		clocks = <&gateclk 5>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
+
+	pcie@2,0 {
+		device_type = "pci";
+		assigned-addresses = <0x82001000 0 0x44000 0 0x2000>;
+		reg = <0x1000 0 0 0 0>;
+		#address-cells = <3>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x2 0 1 0
+			  0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x2 0 1 0>;
+		interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>;
+		interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 59>;
+		marvell,pcie-port = <0>;
+		marvell,pcie-lane = <1>;
+		clocks = <&gateclk 6>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
+
+	pcie@3,0 {
+		device_type = "pci";
+		assigned-addresses = <0x82001800 0 0x48000 0 0x2000>;
+		reg = <0x1800 0 0 0 0>;
+		#address-cells = <3>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x3 0 1 0
+			  0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x3 0 1 0>;
+		interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>;
+		interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 60>;
+		marvell,pcie-port = <0>;
+		marvell,pcie-lane = <2>;
+		clocks = <&gateclk 7>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
+
+	pcie@4,0 {
+		device_type = "pci";
+		assigned-addresses = <0x82002000 0 0x4c000 0 0x2000>;
+		reg = <0x2000 0 0 0 0>;
+		#address-cells = <3>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x4 0 1 0
+			  0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x4 0 1 0>;
+		interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>;
+		interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 61>;
+		marvell,pcie-port = <0>;
+		marvell,pcie-lane = <3>;
+		clocks = <&gateclk 8>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
+
+	pcie@5,0 {
+		device_type = "pci";
+		assigned-addresses = <0x82002800 0 0x80000 0 0x2000>;
+		reg = <0x2800 0 0 0 0>;
+		#address-cells = <3>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x5 0 1 0
+			  0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x5 0 1 0>;
+		interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>;
+		interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 62>;
+		marvell,pcie-port = <1>;
+		marvell,pcie-lane = <0>;
+		clocks = <&gateclk 9>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
+
+	pcie@6,0 {
+		device_type = "pci";
+		assigned-addresses = <0x82003000 0 0x84000 0 0x2000>;
+		reg = <0x3000 0 0 0 0>;
+		#address-cells = <3>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x6 0 1 0
+			  0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x6 0 1 0>;
+		interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>;
+		interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 63>;
+		marvell,pcie-port = <1>;
+		marvell,pcie-lane = <1>;
+		clocks = <&gateclk 10>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
+
+	pcie@7,0 {
+		device_type = "pci";
+		assigned-addresses = <0x82003800 0 0x88000 0 0x2000>;
+		reg = <0x3800 0 0 0 0>;
+		#address-cells = <3>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x7 0 1 0
+			  0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x7 0 1 0>;
+		interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>;
+		interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 64>;
+		marvell,pcie-port = <1>;
+		marvell,pcie-lane = <2>;
+		clocks = <&gateclk 11>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
+
+	pcie@8,0 {
+		device_type = "pci";
+		assigned-addresses = <0x82004000 0 0x8c000 0 0x2000>;
+		reg = <0x4000 0 0 0 0>;
+		#address-cells = <3>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x8 0 1 0
+			  0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x8 0 1 0>;
+		interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>;
+		interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 65>;
+		marvell,pcie-port = <1>;
+		marvell,pcie-lane = <3>;
+		clocks = <&gateclk 12>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
+
+	pcie@9,0 {
+		device_type = "pci";
+		assigned-addresses = <0x82004800 0 0x42000 0 0x2000>;
+		reg = <0x4800 0 0 0 0>;
+		#address-cells = <3>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x9 0 1 0
+			  0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x9 0 1 0>;
+		interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>;
+		interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 99>;
+		marvell,pcie-port = <2>;
+		marvell,pcie-lane = <0>;
+		clocks = <&gateclk 26>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
+
+	pcie@10,0 {
+		device_type = "pci";
+		assigned-addresses = <0x82005000 0 0x82000 0 0x2000>;
+		reg = <0x5000 0 0 0 0>;
+		#address-cells = <3>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+		#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+		ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0xa 0 1 0
+			  0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0xa 0 1 0>;
+		interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>;
+		interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 103>;
+		marvell,pcie-port = <3>;
+		marvell,pcie-lane = <0>;
+		clocks = <&gateclk 27>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/nvidia,tegra20-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/nvidia,tegra20-pcie.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6b7510775c50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/nvidia,tegra20-pcie.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra PCIe controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "nvidia,tegra20-pcie" or "nvidia,tegra30-pcie"
+- device_type: Must be "pci"
+- reg: A list of physical base address and length for each set of controller
+  registers. Must contain an entry for each entry in the reg-names property.
+- reg-names: Must include the following entries:
+  "pads": PADS registers
+  "afi": AFI registers
+  "cs": configuration space region
+- interrupts: A list of interrupt outputs of the controller. Must contain an
+  entry for each entry in the interrupt-names property.
+- interrupt-names: Must include the following entries:
+  "intr": The Tegra interrupt that is asserted for controller interrupts
+  "msi": The Tegra interrupt that is asserted when an MSI is received
+- pex-clk-supply: Supply voltage for internal reference clock
+- vdd-supply: Power supply for controller (1.05V)
+- avdd-supply: Power supply for controller (1.05V) (not required for Tegra20)
+- bus-range: Range of bus numbers associated with this controller
+- #address-cells: Address representation for root ports (must be 3)
+  - cell 0 specifies the bus and device numbers of the root port:
+    [23:16]: bus number
+    [15:11]: device number
+  - cell 1 denotes the upper 32 address bits and should be 0
+  - cell 2 contains the lower 32 address bits and is used to translate to the
+    CPU address space
+- #size-cells: Size representation for root ports (must be 2)
+- ranges: Describes the translation of addresses for root ports and standard
+  PCI regions. The entries must be 6 cells each, where the first three cells
+  correspond to the address as described for the #address-cells property
+  above, the fourth cell is the physical CPU address to translate to and the
+  fifth and six cells are as described for the #size-cells property above.
+  - The first two entries are expected to translate the addresses for the root
+    port registers, which are referenced by the assigned-addresses property of
+    the root port nodes (see below).
+  - The remaining entries setup the mapping for the standard I/O, memory and
+    prefetchable PCI regions. The first cell determines the type of region
+    that is setup:
+    - 0x81000000: I/O memory region
+    - 0x82000000: non-prefetchable memory region
+    - 0xc2000000: prefetchable memory region
+  Please refer to the standard PCI bus binding document for a more detailed
+  explanation.
+- clocks: List of clock inputs of the controller. Must contain an entry for
+  each entry in the clock-names property.
+- clock-names: Must include the following entries:
+  "pex": The Tegra clock of that name
+  "afi": The Tegra clock of that name
+  "pcie_xclk": The Tegra clock of that name
+  "pll_e": The Tegra clock of that name
+  "cml": The Tegra clock of that name (not required for Tegra20)
+
+Root ports are defined as subnodes of the PCIe controller node.
+
+Required properties:
+- device_type: Must be "pci"
+- assigned-addresses: Address and size of the port configuration registers
+- reg: PCI bus address of the root port
+- #address-cells: Must be 3
+- #size-cells: Must be 2
+- ranges: Sub-ranges distributed from the PCIe controller node. An empty
+  property is sufficient.
+- nvidia,num-lanes: Number of lanes to use for this port. Valid combinations
+  are:
+  - Root port 0 uses 4 lanes, root port 1 is unused.
+  - Both root ports use 2 lanes.
+
+Example:
+
+SoC DTSI:
+
+	pcie-controller {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-pcie";
+		device_type = "pci";
+		reg = <0x80003000 0x00000800   /* PADS registers */
+		       0x80003800 0x00000200   /* AFI registers */
+		       0x90000000 0x10000000>; /* configuration space */
+		reg-names = "pads", "afi", "cs";
+		interrupts = <0 98 0x04   /* controller interrupt */
+		              0 99 0x04>; /* MSI interrupt */
+		interrupt-names = "intr", "msi";
+
+		bus-range = <0x00 0xff>;
+		#address-cells = <3>;
+		#size-cells = <2>;
+
+		ranges = <0x82000000 0 0x80000000 0x80000000 0 0x00001000   /* port 0 registers */
+			  0x82000000 0 0x80001000 0x80001000 0 0x00001000   /* port 1 registers */
+			  0x81000000 0 0          0x82000000 0 0x00010000   /* downstream I/O */
+			  0x82000000 0 0xa0000000 0xa0000000 0 0x10000000   /* non-prefetchable memory */
+			  0xc2000000 0 0xb0000000 0xb0000000 0 0x10000000>; /* prefetchable memory */
+
+		clocks = <&tegra_car 70>, <&tegra_car 72>, <&tegra_car 74>,
+			 <&tegra_car 118>;
+		clock-names = "pex", "afi", "pcie_xclk", "pll_e";
+		status = "disabled";
+
+		pci@1,0 {
+			device_type = "pci";
+			assigned-addresses = <0x82000800 0 0x80000000 0 0x1000>;
+			reg = <0x000800 0 0 0 0>;
+			status = "disabled";
+
+			#address-cells = <3>;
+			#size-cells = <2>;
+
+			ranges;
+
+			nvidia,num-lanes = <2>;
+		};
+
+		pci@2,0 {
+			device_type = "pci";
+			assigned-addresses = <0x82001000 0 0x80001000 0 0x1000>;
+			reg = <0x001000 0 0 0 0>;
+			status = "disabled";
+
+			#address-cells = <3>;
+			#size-cells = <2>;
+
+			ranges;
+
+			nvidia,num-lanes = <2>;
+		};
+	};
+
+
+Board DTS:
+
+	pcie-controller {
+		status = "okay";
+
+		vdd-supply = <&pci_vdd_reg>;
+		pex-clk-supply = <&pci_clk_reg>;
+
+		/* root port 00:01.0 */
+		pci@1,0 {
+			status = "okay";
+
+			/* bridge 01:00.0 (optional) */
+			pci@0,0 {
+				reg = <0x010000 0 0 0 0>;
+
+				#address-cells = <3>;
+				#size-cells = <2>;
+
+				device_type = "pci";
+
+				/* endpoint 02:00.0 */
+				pci@0,0 {
+					reg = <0x020000 0 0 0 0>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+Note that devices on the PCI bus are dynamically discovered using PCI's bus
+enumeration and therefore don't need corresponding device nodes in DT. However
+if a device on the PCI bus provides a non-probeable bus such as I2C or SPI,
+device nodes need to be added in order to allow the bus' children to be
+instantiated at the proper location in the operating system's device tree (as
+illustrated by the optional nodes in the example above).
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..41aeed38926d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+PCI bus bridges have standardized Device Tree bindings:
+
+PCI Bus Binding to: IEEE Std 1275-1994
+http://www.openfirmware.org/ofwg/bindings/pci/pci2_1.pdf
+
+And for the interrupt mapping part:
+
+Open Firmware Recommended Practice: Interrupt Mapping
+http://www.openfirmware.org/1275/practice/imap/imap0_9d.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ralink,rt3883-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ralink,rt3883-pci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8e0a1eb0acbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ralink,rt3883-pci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+* Mediatek/Ralink RT3883 PCI controller
+
+1) Main node
+
+   Required properties:
+
+   - compatible: must be "ralink,rt3883-pci"
+
+   - reg: specifies the physical base address of the controller and
+     the length of the memory mapped region.
+
+   - #address-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+     address. The value must be 1.
+
+   - #size-cells: specifies the number of cells used to represent the size
+     of an address. The value must be 1.
+
+   - ranges: specifies the translation between child address space and parent
+     address space
+
+  Optional properties:
+
+   - status: indicates the operational status of the device.
+     Value must be either "disabled" or "okay".
+
+2) Child nodes
+
+   The main node must have two child nodes which describes the built-in
+   interrupt controller and the PCI host bridge.
+
+   a) Interrupt controller:
+
+   Required properties:
+
+   - interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller
+
+   - #address-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+     address. The value must be 0. As such, 'interrupt-map' nodes do not
+     have to specify a parent unit address.
+
+   - #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+     interrupt source. The value must be 1.
+
+   - interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that
+     services interrupts for this device.
+
+   - interrupts: specifies the interrupt source of the parent interrupt
+     controller. The format of the interrupt specifier depends on the
+     parent interrupt controller.
+
+   b) PCI host bridge:
+
+   Required properties:
+
+   - #address-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+     address. The value must be 0.
+
+   - #size-cells: specifies the number of cells used to represent the size
+     of an address. The value must be 2.
+
+   - #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
+     interrupt source. The value must be 1.
+
+   - device_type: must be "pci"
+
+   - bus-range: PCI bus numbers covered
+
+   - ranges: specifies the ranges for the PCI memory and I/O regions
+
+   - interrupt-map-mask,
+   - interrupt-map: standard PCI properties to define the mapping of the
+     PCI interface to interrupt numbers.
+
+   The PCI host bridge node migh have additional sub-nodes representing
+   the onboard PCI devices/PCI slots. Each such sub-node must have the
+   following mandatory properties:
+
+     - reg: used only for interrupt mapping, so only the first four bytes
+       are used to refer to the correct bus number and device number.
+
+     - device_type: must be "pci"
+
+   If a given sub-node represents a PCI bridge it must have following
+   mandatory properties as well:
+
+     - #address-cells: must be set to <3>
+
+     - #size-cells: must set to <2>
+
+     - #interrupt-cells: must be set to <1>
+
+     - interrupt-map-mask,
+     - interrupt-map: standard PCI properties to define the mapping of the
+       PCI interface to interrupt numbers.
+
+   Besides the required properties the sub-nodes may have these optional
+   properties:
+
+     - status: indicates the operational status of the sub-node.
+       Value must be either "disabled" or "okay".
+
+3) Example:
+
+   a) SoC specific dtsi file:
+
+	pci@10140000 {
+		compatible = "ralink,rt3883-pci";
+		reg = <0x10140000 0x20000>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		ranges; /* direct mapping */
+
+		status = "disabled";
+
+		pciintc: interrupt-controller {
+			interrupt-controller;
+			#address-cells = <0>;
+			#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+
+			interrupt-parent = <&cpuintc>;
+			interrupts = <4>;
+		};
+
+		host-bridge {
+			#address-cells = <3>;
+			#size-cells = <2>;
+			#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+
+			device_type = "pci";
+
+			bus-range = <0 255>;
+			ranges = <
+				0x02000000 0 0x00000000 0x20000000 0 0x10000000 /* pci memory */
+				0x01000000 0 0x00000000 0x10160000 0 0x00010000 /* io space */
+			>;
+
+			interrupt-map-mask = <0xf800 0 0 7>;
+			interrupt-map = <
+				/* IDSEL 17 */
+				0x8800 0 0 1 &pciintc 18
+				0x8800 0 0 2 &pciintc 18
+				0x8800 0 0 3 &pciintc 18
+				0x8800 0 0 4 &pciintc 18
+				/* IDSEL 18 */
+				0x9000 0 0 1 &pciintc 19
+				0x9000 0 0 2 &pciintc 19
+				0x9000 0 0 3 &pciintc 19
+				0x9000 0 0 4 &pciintc 19
+			>;
+
+			pci-bridge@1 {
+				reg = <0x0800 0 0 0 0>;
+				device_type = "pci";
+				#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+				#address-cells = <3>;
+				#size-cells = <2>;
+
+				interrupt-map-mask = <0x0 0 0 0>;
+				interrupt-map = <0x0 0 0 0 &pciintc 20>;
+
+				status = "disabled";
+			};
+
+			pci-slot@17 {
+				reg = <0x8800 0 0 0 0>;
+				device_type = "pci";
+
+				status = "disabled";
+			};
+
+			pci-slot@18 {
+				reg = <0x9000 0 0 0 0>;
+				device_type = "pci";
+
+				status = "disabled";
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+   b) Board specific dts file:
+
+	pci@10140000 {
+		status = "okay";
+
+		host-bridge {
+			pci-bridge@1 {
+				status = "okay";
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/v3-v360epc-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/v3-v360epc-pci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..30b364e504ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/v3-v360epc-pci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+V3 Semiconductor V360 EPC PCI bridge
+
+This bridge is found in the ARM Integrator/AP (Application Platform)
+
+Integrator-specific notes:
+
+- syscon: should contain a link to the syscon device node (since
+  on the Integrator, some registers in the syscon are required to
+  operate the V3).
+
+V360 EPC specific notes:
+
+- reg: should contain the base address of the V3 adapter.
+- interrupts: should contain a reference to the V3 error interrupt
+  as routed on the system.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/allwinner,sunxi-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/allwinner,sunxi-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dff0e5f995e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/allwinner,sunxi-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+* Allwinner A1X Pin Controller
+
+The pins controlled by sunXi pin controller are organized in banks,
+each bank has 32 pins.  Each pin has 7 multiplexing functions, with
+the first two functions being GPIO in and out. The configuration on
+the pins includes drive strength and pull-up.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "allwinner,<soc>-pinctrl". Supported SoCs for now are:
+  sun5i-a13.
+- reg: Should contain the register physical address and length for the
+  pin controller.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices.
+
+A pinctrl node should contain at least one subnodes representing the
+pinctrl groups available on the machine. Each subnode will list the
+pins it needs, and how they should be configured, with regard to muxer
+configuration, drive strength and pullups. If one of these options is
+not set, its actual value will be unspecified.
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+
+- allwinner,pins: List of strings containing the pin name.
+- allwinner,function: Function to mux the pins listed above to.
+
+Optional subnode-properties:
+- allwinner,drive: Integer. Represents the current sent to the pin
+    0: 10 mA
+    1: 20 mA
+    2: 30 mA
+    3: 40 mA
+- allwinner,pull: Integer.
+    0: No resistor
+    1: Pull-up resistor
+    2: Pull-down resistor
+
+Examples:
+
+pinctrl@01c20800 {
+	compatible = "allwinner,sun5i-a13-pinctrl";
+	reg = <0x01c20800 0x400>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+
+	uart1_pins_a: uart1@0 {
+		allwinner,pins = "PE10", "PE11";
+		allwinner,function = "uart1";
+		allwinner,drive = <0>;
+		allwinner,pull = <0>;
+	};
+
+	uart1_pins_b: uart1@1 {
+		allwinner,pins = "PG3", "PG4";
+		allwinner,function = "uart1";
+		allwinner,drive = <0>;
+		allwinner,pull = <0>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7ccae490ff6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+* Atmel AT91 Pinmux Controller
+
+The AT91 Pinmux Controller, enables the IC
+to share one PAD to several functional blocks. The sharing is done by
+multiplexing the PAD input/output signals. For each PAD there are up to
+8 muxing options (called periph modes). Since different modules require
+different PAD settings (like pull up, keeper, etc) the contoller controls
+also the PAD settings parameters.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+Atmel AT91 pin configuration node is a node of a group of pins which can be
+used for a specific device or function. This node represents both mux and config
+of the pins in that group. The 'pins' selects the function mode(also named pin
+mode) this pin can work on and the 'config' configures various pad settings
+such as pull-up, multi drive, etc.
+
+Required properties for iomux controller:
+- compatible: "atmel,at91rm9200-pinctrl"
+- atmel,mux-mask: array of mask (periph per bank) to describe if a pin can be
+  configured in this periph mode. All the periph and bank need to be describe.
+
+How to create such array:
+
+Each column will represent the possible peripheral of the pinctrl
+Each line will represent a pio bank
+
+Take an example on the 9260
+Peripheral: 2 ( A and B)
+Bank: 3 (A, B and C)
+=>
+
+  /*    A         B     */
+  0xffffffff 0xffc00c3b  /* pioA */
+  0xffffffff 0x7fff3ccf  /* pioB */
+  0xffffffff 0x007fffff  /* pioC */
+
+For each peripheral/bank we will descibe in a u32 if a pin can be
+configured in it by putting 1 to the pin bit (1 << pin)
+
+Let's take the pioA on peripheral B
+From the datasheet Table 10-2.
+Peripheral B
+PA0	MCDB0
+PA1	MCCDB
+PA2
+PA3	MCDB3
+PA4	MCDB2
+PA5	MCDB1
+PA6
+PA7
+PA8
+PA9
+PA10	ETX2
+PA11	ETX3
+PA12
+PA13
+PA14
+PA15
+PA16
+PA17
+PA18
+PA19
+PA20
+PA21
+PA22	ETXER
+PA23	ETX2
+PA24	ETX3
+PA25	ERX2
+PA26	ERX3
+PA27	ERXCK
+PA28	ECRS
+PA29	ECOL
+PA30	RXD4
+PA31	TXD4
+
+=> 0xffc00c3b
+
+Required properties for pin configuration node:
+- atmel,pins: 4 integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config
+  setting. The format is atmel,pins = <PIN_BANK PIN_BANK_NUM PERIPH CONFIG>.
+  The PERIPH 0 means gpio, PERIPH 1 is periph A, PERIPH 2 is periph B...
+  PIN_BANK 0 is pioA, PIN_BANK 1 is pioB...
+
+Bits used for CONFIG:
+PULL_UP		(1 << 0): indicate this pin need a pull up.
+MULTIDRIVE	(1 << 1): indicate this pin need to be configured as multidrive.
+DEGLITCH	(1 << 2): indicate this pin need deglitch.
+PULL_DOWN	(1 << 3): indicate this pin need a pull down.
+DIS_SCHMIT	(1 << 4): indicate this pin need to disable schmit trigger.
+DEBOUNCE	(1 << 16): indicate this pin need debounce.
+DEBOUNCE_VAL	(0x3fff << 17): debounce val.
+
+NOTE:
+Some requirements for using atmel,at91rm9200-pinctrl binding:
+1. We have pin function node defined under at91 controller node to represent
+   what pinmux functions this SoC supports.
+2. The driver can use the function node's name and pin configuration node's
+   name describe the pin function and group hierarchy.
+   For example, Linux at91 pinctrl driver takes the function node's name
+   as the function name and pin configuration node's name as group name to
+   create the map table.
+3. Each pin configuration node should have a phandle, devices can set pins
+   configurations by referring to the phandle of that pin configuration node.
+4. The gpio controller must be describe in the pinctrl simple-bus.
+
+Examples:
+
+pinctrl@fffff400 {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	ranges;
+	compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-pinctrl", "simple-bus";
+	reg = <0xfffff400 0x600>;
+
+	atmel,mux-mask = <
+	      /*    A         B     */
+	       0xffffffff 0xffc00c3b  /* pioA */
+	       0xffffffff 0x7fff3ccf  /* pioB */
+	       0xffffffff 0x007fffff  /* pioC */
+	      >;
+
+	/* shared pinctrl settings */
+	dbgu {
+		pinctrl_dbgu: dbgu-0 {
+			atmel,pins =
+				<1 14 0x1 0x0	/* PB14 periph A */
+				 1 15 0x1 0x1>;	/* PB15 periph A with pullup */
+		};
+	};
+};
+
+dbgu: serial@fffff200 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-usart";
+	reg = <0xfffff200 0x200>;
+	interrupts = <1 4 7>;
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_dbgu>;
+	status = "disabled";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,bcm2835-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,bcm2835-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2569866c692f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,bcm2835-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+Broadcom BCM2835 GPIO (and pinmux) controller
+
+The BCM2835 GPIO module is a combined GPIO controller, (GPIO) interrupt
+controller, and pinmux/control device.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "brcm,bcm2835-gpio"
+- reg: Should contain the physical address of the GPIO module's registers.
+- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the
+  second cell is used to specify optional parameters:
+  - bit 0 specifies polarity (0 for normal, 1 for inverted)
+- interrupts : The interrupt outputs from the controller. One interrupt per
+  individual bank followed by the "all banks" interrupt.
+- interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller.
+- #interrupt-cells : Should be 2.
+  The first cell is the GPIO number.
+  The second cell is used to specify flags:
+    bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags:
+      1 = low-to-high edge triggered.
+      2 = high-to-low edge triggered.
+      4 = active high level-sensitive.
+      8 = active low level-sensitive.
+    Valid combinations are 1, 2, 3, 4, 8.
+
+Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt for a general description of GPIO bindings.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+Each pin configuration node lists the pin(s) to which it applies, and one or
+more of the mux function to select on those pin(s), and pull-up/down
+configuration. Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly
+listed. In other words, a subnode that lists only a mux function implies no
+information about any pull configuration. Similarly, a subnode that lists only
+a pul parameter implies no information about the mux function.
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- brcm,pins: An array of cells. Each cell contains the ID of a pin. Valid IDs
+  are the integer GPIO IDs; 0==GPIO0, 1==GPIO1, ... 53==GPIO53.
+
+Optional subnode-properties:
+- brcm,function: Integer, containing the function to mux to the pin(s):
+  0: GPIO in
+  1: GPIO out
+  2: alt5
+  3: alt4
+  4: alt0
+  5: alt1
+  6: alt2
+  7: alt3
+- brcm,pull: Integer, representing the pull-down/up to apply to the pin(s):
+  0: none
+  1: down
+  2: up
+
+Each of brcm,function and brcm,pull may contain either a single value which
+will be applied to all pins in brcm,pins, or 1 value for each entry in
+brcm,pins.
+
+Example:
+
+	gpio: gpio {
+		compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-gpio";
+		reg = <0x2200000 0xb4>;
+		interrupts = <2 17>, <2 19>, <2 18>, <2 20>;
+
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3a7caf7a744a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+* Freescale IOMUX Controller (IOMUXC) for i.MX
+
+The IOMUX Controller (IOMUXC), together with the IOMUX, enables the IC
+to share one PAD to several functional blocks. The sharing is done by
+multiplexing the PAD input/output signals. For each PAD there are up to
+8 muxing options (called ALT modes). Since different modules require
+different PAD settings (like pull up, keeper, etc) the IOMUXC controls
+also the PAD settings parameters.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+Freescale IMX pin configuration node is a node of a group of pins which can be
+used for a specific device or function. This node represents both mux and config
+of the pins in that group. The 'mux' selects the function mode(also named mux
+mode) this pin can work on and the 'config' configures various pad settings
+such as pull-up, open drain, drive strength, etc.
+
+Required properties for iomux controller:
+- compatible: "fsl,<soc>-iomuxc"
+  Please refer to each fsl,<soc>-pinctrl.txt binding doc for supported SoCs.
+
+Required properties for pin configuration node:
+- fsl,pins: two integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config
+  setting. The format is fsl,pins = <PIN_FUNC_ID CONFIG>, PIN_FUNC_ID is a
+  pin working on a specific function, which consists of a tuple of
+  <mux_reg conf_reg input_reg mux_val input_val>.  CONFIG is the pad setting
+  value like pull-up on this pin.
+
+Bits used for CONFIG:
+NO_PAD_CTL(1 << 31): indicate this pin does not need config.
+
+SION(1 << 30): Software Input On Field.
+Force the selected mux mode input path no matter of MUX_MODE functionality.
+By default the input path is determined by functionality of the selected
+mux mode (regular).
+
+Other bits are used for PAD setting.
+Please refer to each fsl,<soc>-pinctrl,txt binding doc for SoC specific part
+of bits definitions.
+
+NOTE:
+Some requirements for using fsl,imx-pinctrl binding:
+1. We have pin function node defined under iomux controller node to represent
+   what pinmux functions this SoC supports.
+2. The pin configuration node intends to work on a specific function should
+   to be defined under that specific function node.
+   The function node's name should represent well about what function
+   this group of pins in this pin configuration node are working on.
+3. The driver can use the function node's name and pin configuration node's
+   name describe the pin function and group hierarchy.
+   For example, Linux IMX pinctrl driver takes the function node's name
+   as the function name and pin configuration node's name as group name to
+   create the map table.
+4. Each pin configuration node should have a phandle, devices can set pins
+   configurations by referring to the phandle of that pin configuration node.
+
+Examples:
+usdhc@0219c000 { /* uSDHC4 */
+	non-removable;
+	vmmc-supply = <&reg_3p3v>;
+	status = "okay";
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_usdhc4_1>;
+};
+
+iomuxc@020e0000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx6q-iomuxc";
+	reg = <0x020e0000 0x4000>;
+
+	/* shared pinctrl settings */
+	usdhc4 {
+		pinctrl_usdhc4_1: usdhc4grp-1 {
+			fsl,pins = <1386 0x17059	/* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_CMD__USDHC4_CMD */
+				    1392 0x10059	/* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_CLK__USDHC4_CLK	*/
+				    1462 0x17059	/* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT0__USDHC4_DAT0 */
+				    1470 0x17059	/* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT1__USDHC4_DAT1 */
+				    1478 0x17059	/* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT2__USDHC4_DAT2 */
+				    1486 0x17059	/* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT3__USDHC4_DAT3 */
+				    1493 0x17059	/* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT4__USDHC4_DAT4 */
+				    1501 0x17059	/* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT5__USDHC4_DAT5 */
+				    1509 0x17059	/* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT6__USDHC4_DAT6 */
+				    1517 0x17059>;	/* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT7__USDHC4_DAT7 */
+		};
+	};
+	....
+};
+Refer to the IOMUXC controller chapter in imx6q datasheet,
+0x17059 means enable hysteresis, 47KOhm Pull Up, 50Mhz speed,
+80Ohm driver strength and Fast Slew Rate.
+User should refer to each SoC spec to set the correct value.
+
+TODO: when dtc macro support is available, we can change above raw data
+to dt macro which can get better readability in dts file.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx35-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx35-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c083dfd25db9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx35-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+* Freescale IMX35 IOMUX Controller
+
+Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding part
+and usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,imx35-iomuxc"
+- fsl,pins: two integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config
+  setting. The format is fsl,pins = <PIN_FUNC_ID CONFIG>, PIN_FUNC_ID is a
+  pin working on a specific function, CONFIG is the pad setting value like
+  pull-up for this pin. Please refer to imx35 datasheet for the valid pad
+  config settings.
+
+CONFIG bits definition:
+PAD_CTL_DRIVE_VOLAGAGE_18	(1 << 13)
+PAD_CTL_DRIVE_VOLAGAGE_33	(0 << 13)
+PAD_CTL_HYS			(1 << 8)
+PAD_CTL_PKE			(1 << 7)
+PAD_CTL_PUE			(1 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_DOWN		(0 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_47K_UP		(1 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_UP		(2 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_22K_UP		(3 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_ODE_CMOS		(0 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_ODE_OPENDRAIN		(1 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_NOMINAL		(0 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_HIGH		(1 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_MAX			(2 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_FAST		(1 << 0)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_SLOW		(0 << 0)
+
+Refer to imx35-pinfunc.h in device tree source folder for all available
+imx35 PIN_FUNC_ID.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx51-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx51-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4d1408fcc99c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx51-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+* Freescale IMX51 IOMUX Controller
+
+Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding part
+and usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,imx51-iomuxc"
+- fsl,pins: two integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config
+  setting. The format is fsl,pins = <PIN_FUNC_ID CONFIG>, PIN_FUNC_ID is a
+  pin working on a specific function, CONFIG is the pad setting value like
+  pull-up for this pin. Please refer to imx51 datasheet for the valid pad
+  config settings.
+
+CONFIG bits definition:
+PAD_CTL_HVE			(1 << 13)
+PAD_CTL_HYS			(1 << 8)
+PAD_CTL_PKE			(1 << 7)
+PAD_CTL_PUE			(1 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_DOWN		(0 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_47K_UP		(1 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_UP		(2 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_22K_UP		(3 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_ODE			(1 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_LOW			(0 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_MED			(1 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_HIGH		(2 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_MAX			(3 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_FAST		(1 << 0)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_SLOW		(0 << 0)
+
+Refer to imx51-pinfunc.h in device tree source folder for all available
+imx51 PIN_FUNC_ID.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx53-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx53-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..25dcb77cfaf7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx53-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+* Freescale IMX53 IOMUX Controller
+
+Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding part
+and usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,imx53-iomuxc"
+- fsl,pins: two integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config
+  setting. The format is fsl,pins = <PIN_FUNC_ID CONFIG>, PIN_FUNC_ID is a
+  pin working on a specific function, CONFIG is the pad setting value like
+  pull-up for this pin. Please refer to imx53 datasheet for the valid pad
+  config settings.
+
+CONFIG bits definition:
+PAD_CTL_HVE			(1 << 13)
+PAD_CTL_HYS			(1 << 8)
+PAD_CTL_PKE			(1 << 7)
+PAD_CTL_PUE			(1 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_DOWN		(0 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_47K_UP		(1 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_UP		(2 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_22K_UP		(3 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_ODE			(1 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_LOW			(0 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_MED			(1 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_HIGH		(2 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_MAX			(3 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_FAST		(1 << 0)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_SLOW		(0 << 0)
+
+Refer to imx53-pinfunc.h in device tree source folder for all available
+imx53 PIN_FUNC_ID.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx6dl-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx6dl-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0ac5bee87505
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx6dl-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+* Freescale IMX6 DualLite/Solo IOMUX Controller
+
+Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding part
+and usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,imx6dl-iomuxc"
+- fsl,pins: two integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config
+  setting. The format is fsl,pins = <PIN_FUNC_ID CONFIG>, PIN_FUNC_ID is a
+  pin working on a specific function, CONFIG is the pad setting value like
+  pull-up for this pin. Please refer to imx6dl datasheet for the valid pad
+  config settings.
+
+CONFIG bits definition:
+PAD_CTL_HYS                     (1 << 16)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_DOWN           (0 << 14)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_47K_UP              (1 << 14)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_UP             (2 << 14)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_22K_UP              (3 << 14)
+PAD_CTL_PUE                     (1 << 13)
+PAD_CTL_PKE                     (1 << 12)
+PAD_CTL_ODE                     (1 << 11)
+PAD_CTL_SPEED_LOW               (1 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_SPEED_MED               (2 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_SPEED_HIGH              (3 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_DISABLE             (0 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_240ohm              (1 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_120ohm              (2 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_80ohm               (3 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_60ohm               (4 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_48ohm               (5 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_40ohm               (6 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_34ohm               (7 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_FAST                (1 << 0)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_SLOW                (0 << 0)
+
+Refer to imx6dl-pinfunc.h in device tree source folder for all available
+imx6dl PIN_FUNC_ID.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx6q-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx6q-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..546610cf2ae7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx6q-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+* Freescale IMX6Q IOMUX Controller
+
+Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding part
+and usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,imx6q-iomuxc"
+- fsl,pins: two integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config
+  setting. The format is fsl,pins = <PIN_FUNC_ID CONFIG>, PIN_FUNC_ID is a
+  pin working on a specific function, CONFIG is the pad setting value like
+  pull-up for this pin. Please refer to imx6q datasheet for the valid pad
+  config settings.
+
+CONFIG bits definition:
+PAD_CTL_HYS                     (1 << 16)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_DOWN           (0 << 14)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_47K_UP              (1 << 14)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_UP             (2 << 14)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_22K_UP              (3 << 14)
+PAD_CTL_PUE                     (1 << 13)
+PAD_CTL_PKE                     (1 << 12)
+PAD_CTL_ODE                     (1 << 11)
+PAD_CTL_SPEED_LOW               (1 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_SPEED_MED               (2 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_SPEED_HIGH              (3 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_DISABLE             (0 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_240ohm              (1 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_120ohm              (2 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_80ohm               (3 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_60ohm               (4 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_48ohm               (5 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_40ohm               (6 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_34ohm               (7 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_FAST                (1 << 0)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_SLOW                (0 << 0)
+
+Refer to imx6q-pinfunc.h in device tree source folder for all available
+imx6q PIN_FUNC_ID.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx6sl-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx6sl-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e5f6d1f065a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx6sl-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+* Freescale IMX6 SoloLite IOMUX Controller
+
+Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding part
+and usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,imx6sl-iomuxc"
+- fsl,pins: two integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config
+  setting. The format is fsl,pins = <PIN_FUNC_ID CONFIG>, PIN_FUNC_ID is a
+  pin working on a specific function, CONFIG is the pad setting value like
+  pull-up for this pin. Please refer to imx6sl datasheet for the valid pad
+  config settings.
+
+CONFIG bits definition:
+PAD_CTL_LVE                     (1 << 22)
+PAD_CTL_HYS                     (1 << 16)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_DOWN           (0 << 14)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_47K_UP              (1 << 14)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_UP             (2 << 14)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_22K_UP              (3 << 14)
+PAD_CTL_PUE                     (1 << 13)
+PAD_CTL_PKE                     (1 << 12)
+PAD_CTL_ODE                     (1 << 11)
+PAD_CTL_SPEED_LOW               (1 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_SPEED_MED               (2 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_SPEED_HIGH              (3 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_DISABLE             (0 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_240ohm              (1 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_120ohm              (2 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_80ohm               (3 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_60ohm               (4 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_48ohm               (5 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_40ohm               (6 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_34ohm               (7 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_FAST                (1 << 0)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_SLOW                (0 << 0)
+
+Refer to imx6sl-pinfunc.h in device tree source folder for all available
+imx6sl PIN_FUNC_ID.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,mxs-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,mxs-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3077370c89af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,mxs-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,922 @@
+* Freescale MXS Pin Controller
+
+The pins controlled by mxs pin controller are organized in banks, each bank
+has 32 pins.  Each pin has 4 multiplexing functions, and generally, the 4th
+function is GPIO.  The configuration on the pins includes drive strength,
+voltage and pull-up.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,imx23-pinctrl" or "fsl,imx28-pinctrl"
+- reg: Should contain the register physical address and length for the
+  pin controller.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices.
+
+The node of mxs pin controller acts as a container for an arbitrary number of
+subnodes.  Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for
+a group of pins, and only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed.
+In other words, a subnode that describes a drive strength parameter implies no
+information about pull-up. For this reason, even seemingly boolean values are
+actually tristates in this binding: unspecified, off, or on. Unspecified is
+represented as an absent property, and off/on are represented as integer
+values 0 and 1.
+
+Those subnodes under mxs pin controller node will fall into two categories.
+One is to set up a group of pins for a function, both mux selection and pin
+configurations, and it's called group node in the binding document.   The other
+one is to adjust the pin configuration for some particular pins that need a
+different configuration than what is defined in group node.  The binding
+document calls this type of node config node.
+
+On mxs, there is no hardware pin group. The pin group in this binding only
+means a group of pins put together for particular peripheral to work in
+particular function, like SSP0 functioning as mmc0-8bit.  That said, the
+group node should include all the pins needed for one function rather than
+having these pins defined in several group nodes.  It also means each of
+"pinctrl-*" phandle in client device node should only have one group node
+pointed in there, while the phandle can have multiple config node referenced
+there to adjust configurations for some pins in the group.
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- fsl,pinmux-ids: An integer array.  Each integer in the array specify a pin
+  with given mux function, with bank, pin and mux packed as below.
+
+    [15..12] : bank number
+    [11..4]  : pin number
+    [3..0]   : mux selection
+
+  This integer with mux selection packed is used as an entity by both group
+  and config nodes to identify a pin.  The mux selection in the integer takes
+  effects only on group node, and will get ignored by driver with config node,
+  since config node is only meant to set up pin configurations.
+
+  Valid values for these integers are listed below.
+
+- reg: Should be the index of the group nodes for same function.  This property
+  is required only for group nodes, and should not be present in any config
+  nodes.
+
+Optional subnode-properties:
+- fsl,drive-strength: Integer.
+    0: 4 mA
+    1: 8 mA
+    2: 12 mA
+    3: 16 mA
+- fsl,voltage: Integer.
+    0: 1.8 V
+    1: 3.3 V
+- fsl,pull-up: Integer.
+    0: Disable the internal pull-up
+    1: Enable the internal pull-up
+
+Note that when enabling the pull-up, the internal pad keeper gets disabled.
+Also, some pins doesn't have a pull up, in that case, setting the fsl,pull-up
+will only disable the internal pad keeper.
+
+Examples:
+
+pinctrl@80018000 {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-pinctrl";
+	reg = <0x80018000 2000>;
+
+	mmc0_8bit_pins_a: mmc0-8bit@0 {
+		reg = <0>;
+		fsl,pinmux-ids = <
+			0x2000 0x2010 0x2020 0x2030
+			0x2040 0x2050 0x2060 0x2070
+			0x2080 0x2090 0x20a0>;
+		fsl,drive-strength = <1>;
+		fsl,voltage = <1>;
+		fsl,pull-up = <1>;
+	};
+
+	mmc_cd_cfg: mmc-cd-cfg {
+		fsl,pinmux-ids = <0x2090>;
+		fsl,pull-up = <0>;
+	};
+
+	mmc_sck_cfg: mmc-sck-cfg {
+		fsl,pinmux-ids = <0x20a0>;
+		fsl,drive-strength = <2>;
+		fsl,pull-up = <0>;
+	};
+};
+
+In this example, group node mmc0-8bit defines a group of pins for mxs SSP0
+to function as a 8-bit mmc device, with 8mA, 3.3V and pull-up configurations
+applied on all these pins.  And config nodes mmc-cd-cfg and mmc-sck-cfg are
+adjusting the configuration for pins card-detection and clock from what group
+node mmc0-8bit defines.  Only the configuration properties to be adjusted need
+to be listed in the config nodes.
+
+Valid values for i.MX28 pinmux-id:
+
+pinmux						id
+------						--
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D00__GPMI_D0			0x0000
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D01__GPMI_D1			0x0010
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D02__GPMI_D2			0x0020
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D03__GPMI_D3			0x0030
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D04__GPMI_D4			0x0040
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D05__GPMI_D5			0x0050
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D06__GPMI_D6			0x0060
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D07__GPMI_D7			0x0070
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE0N__GPMI_CE0N			0x0100
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE1N__GPMI_CE1N			0x0110
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__GPMI_CE2N			0x0120
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE3N__GPMI_CE3N			0x0130
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__GPMI_READY0			0x0140
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY1__GPMI_READY1			0x0150
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY2__GPMI_READY2			0x0160
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY3__GPMI_READY3			0x0170
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDN__GPMI_RDN			0x0180
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_WRN__GPMI_WRN			0x0190
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_ALE__GPMI_ALE			0x01a0
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CLE__GPMI_CLE			0x01b0
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RESETN__GPMI_RESETN		0x01c0
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D00__LCD_D0			0x1000
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D01__LCD_D1			0x1010
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D02__LCD_D2			0x1020
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D03__LCD_D3			0x1030
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D04__LCD_D4			0x1040
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D05__LCD_D5			0x1050
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D06__LCD_D6			0x1060
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D07__LCD_D7			0x1070
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D08__LCD_D8			0x1080
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D09__LCD_D9			0x1090
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D10__LCD_D10			0x10a0
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D11__LCD_D11			0x10b0
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D12__LCD_D12			0x10c0
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D13__LCD_D13			0x10d0
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D14__LCD_D14			0x10e0
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D15__LCD_D15			0x10f0
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D16__LCD_D16			0x1100
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D17__LCD_D17			0x1110
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D18__LCD_D18			0x1120
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D19__LCD_D19			0x1130
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D20__LCD_D20			0x1140
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D21__LCD_D21			0x1150
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D22__LCD_D22			0x1160
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D23__LCD_D23			0x1170
+MX28_PAD_LCD_RD_E__LCD_RD_E			0x1180
+MX28_PAD_LCD_WR_RWN__LCD_WR_RWN			0x1190
+MX28_PAD_LCD_RS__LCD_RS				0x11a0
+MX28_PAD_LCD_CS__LCD_CS				0x11b0
+MX28_PAD_LCD_VSYNC__LCD_VSYNC			0x11c0
+MX28_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__LCD_HSYNC			0x11d0
+MX28_PAD_LCD_DOTCLK__LCD_DOTCLK			0x11e0
+MX28_PAD_LCD_ENABLE__LCD_ENABLE			0x11f0
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA0__SSP0_D0			0x2000
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA1__SSP0_D1			0x2010
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA2__SSP0_D2			0x2020
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA3__SSP0_D3			0x2030
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA4__SSP0_D4			0x2040
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA5__SSP0_D5			0x2050
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA6__SSP0_D6			0x2060
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA7__SSP0_D7			0x2070
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_CMD__SSP0_CMD			0x2080
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DETECT__SSP0_CARD_DETECT		0x2090
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_SCK__SSP0_SCK			0x20a0
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_SCK__SSP1_SCK			0x20c0
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_CMD__SSP1_CMD			0x20d0
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__SSP1_D0			0x20e0
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__SSP1_D3			0x20f0
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SCK__SSP2_SCK			0x2100
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_MOSI__SSP2_CMD			0x2110
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_MISO__SSP2_D0			0x2120
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS0__SSP2_D3			0x2130
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS1__SSP2_D4			0x2140
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS2__SSP2_D5			0x2150
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_SCK__SSP3_SCK			0x2180
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_MOSI__SSP3_CMD			0x2190
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_MISO__SSP3_D0			0x21a0
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_SS0__SSP3_D3			0x21b0
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_RX__AUART0_RX			0x3000
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_TX__AUART0_TX			0x3010
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_CTS__AUART0_CTS			0x3020
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_RTS__AUART0_RTS			0x3030
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_RX__AUART1_RX			0x3040
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_TX__AUART1_TX			0x3050
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_CTS__AUART1_CTS			0x3060
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_RTS__AUART1_RTS			0x3070
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_RX__AUART2_RX			0x3080
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_TX__AUART2_TX			0x3090
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_CTS__AUART2_CTS			0x30a0
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_RTS__AUART2_RTS			0x30b0
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_RX__AUART3_RX			0x30c0
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_TX__AUART3_TX			0x30d0
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_CTS__AUART3_CTS			0x30e0
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_RTS__AUART3_RTS			0x30f0
+MX28_PAD_PWM0__PWM_0				0x3100
+MX28_PAD_PWM1__PWM_1				0x3110
+MX28_PAD_PWM2__PWM_2				0x3120
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_MCLK__SAIF0_MCLK			0x3140
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_LRCLK__SAIF0_LRCLK		0x3150
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_BITCLK__SAIF0_BITCLK		0x3160
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_SDATA0__SAIF0_SDATA0		0x3170
+MX28_PAD_I2C0_SCL__I2C0_SCL			0x3180
+MX28_PAD_I2C0_SDA__I2C0_SDA			0x3190
+MX28_PAD_SAIF1_SDATA0__SAIF1_SDATA0		0x31a0
+MX28_PAD_SPDIF__SPDIF_TX			0x31b0
+MX28_PAD_PWM3__PWM_3				0x31c0
+MX28_PAD_PWM4__PWM_4				0x31d0
+MX28_PAD_LCD_RESET__LCD_RESET			0x31e0
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDC__ENET0_MDC			0x4000
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDIO__ENET0_MDIO			0x4010
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_EN__ENET0_RX_EN		0x4020
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD0__ENET0_RXD0			0x4030
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD1__ENET0_RXD1			0x4040
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_CLK__ENET0_TX_CLK		0x4050
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_EN__ENET0_TX_EN		0x4060
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD0__ENET0_TXD0			0x4070
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD1__ENET0_TXD1			0x4080
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD2__ENET0_RXD2			0x4090
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD3__ENET0_RXD3			0x40a0
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD2__ENET0_TXD2			0x40b0
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD3__ENET0_TXD3			0x40c0
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_CLK__ENET0_RX_CLK		0x40d0
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_COL__ENET0_COL			0x40e0
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_CRS__ENET0_CRS			0x40f0
+MX28_PAD_ENET_CLK__CLKCTRL_ENET			0x4100
+MX28_PAD_JTAG_RTCK__JTAG_RTCK			0x4140
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D00__EMI_DATA0			0x5000
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D01__EMI_DATA1			0x5010
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D02__EMI_DATA2			0x5020
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D03__EMI_DATA3			0x5030
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D04__EMI_DATA4			0x5040
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D05__EMI_DATA5			0x5050
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D06__EMI_DATA6			0x5060
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D07__EMI_DATA7			0x5070
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D08__EMI_DATA8			0x5080
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D09__EMI_DATA9			0x5090
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D10__EMI_DATA10			0x50a0
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D11__EMI_DATA11			0x50b0
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D12__EMI_DATA12			0x50c0
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D13__EMI_DATA13			0x50d0
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D14__EMI_DATA14			0x50e0
+MX28_PAD_EMI_D15__EMI_DATA15			0x50f0
+MX28_PAD_EMI_ODT0__EMI_ODT0			0x5100
+MX28_PAD_EMI_DQM0__EMI_DQM0			0x5110
+MX28_PAD_EMI_ODT1__EMI_ODT1			0x5120
+MX28_PAD_EMI_DQM1__EMI_DQM1			0x5130
+MX28_PAD_EMI_DDR_OPEN_FB__EMI_DDR_OPEN_FEEDBACK	0x5140
+MX28_PAD_EMI_CLK__EMI_CLK			0x5150
+MX28_PAD_EMI_DQS0__EMI_DQS0			0x5160
+MX28_PAD_EMI_DQS1__EMI_DQS1			0x5170
+MX28_PAD_EMI_DDR_OPEN__EMI_DDR_OPEN		0x51a0
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A00__EMI_ADDR0			0x6000
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A01__EMI_ADDR1			0x6010
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A02__EMI_ADDR2			0x6020
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A03__EMI_ADDR3			0x6030
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A04__EMI_ADDR4			0x6040
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A05__EMI_ADDR5			0x6050
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A06__EMI_ADDR6			0x6060
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A07__EMI_ADDR7			0x6070
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A08__EMI_ADDR8			0x6080
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A09__EMI_ADDR9			0x6090
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A10__EMI_ADDR10			0x60a0
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A11__EMI_ADDR11			0x60b0
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A12__EMI_ADDR12			0x60c0
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A13__EMI_ADDR13			0x60d0
+MX28_PAD_EMI_A14__EMI_ADDR14			0x60e0
+MX28_PAD_EMI_BA0__EMI_BA0			0x6100
+MX28_PAD_EMI_BA1__EMI_BA1			0x6110
+MX28_PAD_EMI_BA2__EMI_BA2			0x6120
+MX28_PAD_EMI_CASN__EMI_CASN			0x6130
+MX28_PAD_EMI_RASN__EMI_RASN			0x6140
+MX28_PAD_EMI_WEN__EMI_WEN			0x6150
+MX28_PAD_EMI_CE0N__EMI_CE0N			0x6160
+MX28_PAD_EMI_CE1N__EMI_CE1N			0x6170
+MX28_PAD_EMI_CKE__EMI_CKE			0x6180
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D00__SSP1_D0			0x0001
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D01__SSP1_D1			0x0011
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D02__SSP1_D2			0x0021
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D03__SSP1_D3			0x0031
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D04__SSP1_D4			0x0041
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D05__SSP1_D5			0x0051
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D06__SSP1_D6			0x0061
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D07__SSP1_D7			0x0071
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE0N__SSP3_D0			0x0101
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE1N__SSP3_D3			0x0111
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__CAN1_TX			0x0121
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE3N__CAN1_RX			0x0131
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__SSP1_CARD_DETECT		0x0141
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY1__SSP1_CMD			0x0151
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY2__CAN0_TX			0x0161
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY3__CAN0_RX			0x0171
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDN__SSP3_SCK			0x0181
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_WRN__SSP1_SCK			0x0191
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_ALE__SSP3_D1			0x01a1
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CLE__SSP3_D2			0x01b1
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RESETN__SSP3_CMD			0x01c1
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D03__ETM_DA8			0x1031
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D04__ETM_DA9			0x1041
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D08__ETM_DA3			0x1081
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D09__ETM_DA4			0x1091
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D20__ENET1_1588_EVENT2_OUT		0x1141
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D21__ENET1_1588_EVENT2_IN		0x1151
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D22__ENET1_1588_EVENT3_OUT		0x1161
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D23__ENET1_1588_EVENT3_IN		0x1171
+MX28_PAD_LCD_RD_E__LCD_VSYNC			0x1181
+MX28_PAD_LCD_WR_RWN__LCD_HSYNC			0x1191
+MX28_PAD_LCD_RS__LCD_DOTCLK			0x11a1
+MX28_PAD_LCD_CS__LCD_ENABLE			0x11b1
+MX28_PAD_LCD_VSYNC__SAIF1_SDATA0		0x11c1
+MX28_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__SAIF1_SDATA1		0x11d1
+MX28_PAD_LCD_DOTCLK__SAIF1_MCLK			0x11e1
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA4__SSP2_D0			0x2041
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA5__SSP2_D3			0x2051
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA6__SSP2_CMD			0x2061
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA7__SSP2_SCK			0x2071
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_SCK__SSP2_D1			0x20c1
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_CMD__SSP2_D2			0x20d1
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__SSP2_D6			0x20e1
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__SSP2_D7			0x20f1
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SCK__AUART2_RX			0x2101
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_MOSI__AUART2_TX			0x2111
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_MISO__AUART3_RX			0x2121
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS0__AUART3_TX			0x2131
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS1__SSP2_D1			0x2141
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS2__SSP2_D2			0x2151
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_SCK__AUART4_TX			0x2181
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_MOSI__AUART4_RX			0x2191
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_MISO__AUART4_RTS			0x21a1
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_SS0__AUART4_CTS			0x21b1
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_RX__I2C0_SCL			0x3001
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_TX__I2C0_SDA			0x3011
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_CTS__AUART4_RX			0x3021
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_RTS__AUART4_TX			0x3031
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_RX__SSP2_CARD_DETECT		0x3041
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_TX__SSP3_CARD_DETECT		0x3051
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_CTS__USB0_OVERCURRENT		0x3061
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_RTS__USB0_ID			0x3071
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_RX__SSP3_D1			0x3081
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_TX__SSP3_D2			0x3091
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_CTS__I2C1_SCL			0x30a1
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_RTS__I2C1_SDA			0x30b1
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_RX__CAN0_TX			0x30c1
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_TX__CAN0_RX			0x30d1
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_CTS__CAN1_TX			0x30e1
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_RTS__CAN1_RX			0x30f1
+MX28_PAD_PWM0__I2C1_SCL				0x3101
+MX28_PAD_PWM1__I2C1_SDA				0x3111
+MX28_PAD_PWM2__USB0_ID				0x3121
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_MCLK__PWM_3			0x3141
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_LRCLK__PWM_4			0x3151
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_BITCLK__PWM_5			0x3161
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_SDATA0__PWM_6			0x3171
+MX28_PAD_I2C0_SCL__TIMROT_ROTARYA		0x3181
+MX28_PAD_I2C0_SDA__TIMROT_ROTARYB		0x3191
+MX28_PAD_SAIF1_SDATA0__PWM_7			0x31a1
+MX28_PAD_LCD_RESET__LCD_VSYNC			0x31e1
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDC__GPMI_CE4N			0x4001
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDIO__GPMI_CE5N			0x4011
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_EN__GPMI_CE6N			0x4021
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD0__GPMI_CE7N			0x4031
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD1__GPMI_READY4		0x4041
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_CLK__HSADC_TRIGGER		0x4051
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_EN__GPMI_READY5		0x4061
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD0__GPMI_READY6		0x4071
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD1__GPMI_READY7		0x4081
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD2__ENET1_RXD0			0x4091
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD3__ENET1_RXD1			0x40a1
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD2__ENET1_TXD0			0x40b1
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD3__ENET1_TXD1			0x40c1
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_CLK__ENET0_RX_ER		0x40d1
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_COL__ENET1_TX_EN			0x40e1
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_CRS__ENET1_RX_EN			0x40f1
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__ENET0_RX_ER			0x0122
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE3N__SAIF1_MCLK			0x0132
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__USB0_ID			0x0142
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY2__ENET0_TX_ER			0x0162
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY3__HSADC_TRIGGER		0x0172
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_ALE__SSP3_D4			0x01a2
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CLE__SSP3_D5			0x01b2
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D00__ETM_DA0			0x1002
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D01__ETM_DA1			0x1012
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D02__ETM_DA2			0x1022
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D03__ETM_DA3			0x1032
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D04__ETM_DA4			0x1042
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D05__ETM_DA5			0x1052
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D06__ETM_DA6			0x1062
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D07__ETM_DA7			0x1072
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D08__ETM_DA8			0x1082
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D09__ETM_DA9			0x1092
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D10__ETM_DA10			0x10a2
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D11__ETM_DA11			0x10b2
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D12__ETM_DA12			0x10c2
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D13__ETM_DA13			0x10d2
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D14__ETM_DA14			0x10e2
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D15__ETM_DA15			0x10f2
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D16__ETM_DA7			0x1102
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D17__ETM_DA6			0x1112
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D18__ETM_DA5			0x1122
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D19__ETM_DA4			0x1132
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D20__ETM_DA3			0x1142
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D21__ETM_DA2			0x1152
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D22__ETM_DA1			0x1162
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D23__ETM_DA0			0x1172
+MX28_PAD_LCD_RD_E__ETM_TCTL			0x1182
+MX28_PAD_LCD_WR_RWN__ETM_TCLK			0x1192
+MX28_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__ETM_TCTL			0x11d2
+MX28_PAD_LCD_DOTCLK__ETM_TCLK			0x11e2
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_SCK__ENET0_1588_EVENT2_OUT	0x20c2
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_CMD__ENET0_1588_EVENT2_IN		0x20d2
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__ENET0_1588_EVENT3_OUT	0x20e2
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__ENET0_1588_EVENT3_IN	0x20f2
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SCK__SAIF0_SDATA1			0x2102
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_MOSI__SAIF0_SDATA2		0x2112
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_MISO__SAIF1_SDATA1		0x2122
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS0__SAIF1_SDATA2			0x2132
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS1__USB1_OVERCURRENT		0x2142
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS2__USB0_OVERCURRENT		0x2152
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_SCK__ENET1_1588_EVENT0_OUT	0x2182
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_MOSI__ENET1_1588_EVENT0_IN	0x2192
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_MISO__ENET1_1588_EVENT1_OUT	0x21a2
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_SS0__ENET1_1588_EVENT1_IN		0x21b2
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_RX__DUART_CTS			0x3002
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_TX__DUART_RTS			0x3012
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_CTS__DUART_RX			0x3022
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_RTS__DUART_TX			0x3032
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_RX__PWM_0			0x3042
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_TX__PWM_1			0x3052
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_CTS__TIMROT_ROTARYA		0x3062
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_RTS__TIMROT_ROTARYB		0x3072
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_RX__SSP3_D4			0x3082
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_TX__SSP3_D5			0x3092
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_CTS__SAIF1_BITCLK		0x30a2
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_RTS__SAIF1_LRCLK		0x30b2
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_RX__ENET0_1588_EVENT0_OUT	0x30c2
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_TX__ENET0_1588_EVENT0_IN	0x30d2
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_CTS__ENET0_1588_EVENT1_OUT	0x30e2
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_RTS__ENET0_1588_EVENT1_IN	0x30f2
+MX28_PAD_PWM0__DUART_RX				0x3102
+MX28_PAD_PWM1__DUART_TX				0x3112
+MX28_PAD_PWM2__USB1_OVERCURRENT			0x3122
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_MCLK__AUART4_CTS			0x3142
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_LRCLK__AUART4_RTS		0x3152
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_BITCLK__AUART4_RX		0x3162
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_SDATA0__AUART4_TX		0x3172
+MX28_PAD_I2C0_SCL__DUART_RX			0x3182
+MX28_PAD_I2C0_SDA__DUART_TX			0x3192
+MX28_PAD_SAIF1_SDATA0__SAIF0_SDATA1		0x31a2
+MX28_PAD_SPDIF__ENET1_RX_ER			0x31b2
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDC__SAIF0_SDATA1		0x4002
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDIO__SAIF0_SDATA2		0x4012
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_EN__SAIF1_SDATA1		0x4022
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD0__SAIF1_SDATA2		0x4032
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_CLK__ENET0_1588_EVENT2_OUT	0x4052
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD2__ENET0_1588_EVENT0_OUT	0x4092
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD3__ENET0_1588_EVENT0_IN	0x40a2
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD2__ENET0_1588_EVENT1_OUT	0x40b2
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD3__ENET0_1588_EVENT1_IN	0x40c2
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_CLK__ENET0_1588_EVENT2_IN	0x40d2
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_COL__ENET0_1588_EVENT3_OUT	0x40e2
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_CRS__ENET0_1588_EVENT3_IN	0x40f2
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D00__GPIO_0_0			0x0003
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D01__GPIO_0_1			0x0013
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D02__GPIO_0_2			0x0023
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D03__GPIO_0_3			0x0033
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D04__GPIO_0_4			0x0043
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D05__GPIO_0_5			0x0053
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D06__GPIO_0_6			0x0063
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_D07__GPIO_0_7			0x0073
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE0N__GPIO_0_16			0x0103
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE1N__GPIO_0_17			0x0113
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__GPIO_0_18			0x0123
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE3N__GPIO_0_19			0x0133
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__GPIO_0_20			0x0143
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY1__GPIO_0_21			0x0153
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY2__GPIO_0_22			0x0163
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY3__GPIO_0_23			0x0173
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDN__GPIO_0_24			0x0183
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_WRN__GPIO_0_25			0x0193
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_ALE__GPIO_0_26			0x01a3
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_CLE__GPIO_0_27			0x01b3
+MX28_PAD_GPMI_RESETN__GPIO_0_28			0x01c3
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D00__GPIO_1_0			0x1003
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D01__GPIO_1_1			0x1013
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D02__GPIO_1_2			0x1023
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D03__GPIO_1_3			0x1033
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D04__GPIO_1_4			0x1043
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D05__GPIO_1_5			0x1053
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D06__GPIO_1_6			0x1063
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D07__GPIO_1_7			0x1073
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D08__GPIO_1_8			0x1083
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D09__GPIO_1_9			0x1093
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D10__GPIO_1_10			0x10a3
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D11__GPIO_1_11			0x10b3
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D12__GPIO_1_12			0x10c3
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D13__GPIO_1_13			0x10d3
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D14__GPIO_1_14			0x10e3
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D15__GPIO_1_15			0x10f3
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D16__GPIO_1_16			0x1103
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D17__GPIO_1_17			0x1113
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D18__GPIO_1_18			0x1123
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D19__GPIO_1_19			0x1133
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D20__GPIO_1_20			0x1143
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D21__GPIO_1_21			0x1153
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D22__GPIO_1_22			0x1163
+MX28_PAD_LCD_D23__GPIO_1_23			0x1173
+MX28_PAD_LCD_RD_E__GPIO_1_24			0x1183
+MX28_PAD_LCD_WR_RWN__GPIO_1_25			0x1193
+MX28_PAD_LCD_RS__GPIO_1_26			0x11a3
+MX28_PAD_LCD_CS__GPIO_1_27			0x11b3
+MX28_PAD_LCD_VSYNC__GPIO_1_28			0x11c3
+MX28_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__GPIO_1_29			0x11d3
+MX28_PAD_LCD_DOTCLK__GPIO_1_30			0x11e3
+MX28_PAD_LCD_ENABLE__GPIO_1_31			0x11f3
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA0__GPIO_2_0			0x2003
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA1__GPIO_2_1			0x2013
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA2__GPIO_2_2			0x2023
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA3__GPIO_2_3			0x2033
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA4__GPIO_2_4			0x2043
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA5__GPIO_2_5			0x2053
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA6__GPIO_2_6			0x2063
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA7__GPIO_2_7			0x2073
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_CMD__GPIO_2_8			0x2083
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_DETECT__GPIO_2_9			0x2093
+MX28_PAD_SSP0_SCK__GPIO_2_10			0x20a3
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_SCK__GPIO_2_12			0x20c3
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_CMD__GPIO_2_13			0x20d3
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__GPIO_2_14			0x20e3
+MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__GPIO_2_15			0x20f3
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SCK__GPIO_2_16			0x2103
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_MOSI__GPIO_2_17			0x2113
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_MISO__GPIO_2_18			0x2123
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS0__GPIO_2_19			0x2133
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS1__GPIO_2_20			0x2143
+MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS2__GPIO_2_21			0x2153
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_SCK__GPIO_2_24			0x2183
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_MOSI__GPIO_2_25			0x2193
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_MISO__GPIO_2_26			0x21a3
+MX28_PAD_SSP3_SS0__GPIO_2_27			0x21b3
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_RX__GPIO_3_0			0x3003
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_TX__GPIO_3_1			0x3013
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_CTS__GPIO_3_2			0x3023
+MX28_PAD_AUART0_RTS__GPIO_3_3			0x3033
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_RX__GPIO_3_4			0x3043
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_TX__GPIO_3_5			0x3053
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_CTS__GPIO_3_6			0x3063
+MX28_PAD_AUART1_RTS__GPIO_3_7			0x3073
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_RX__GPIO_3_8			0x3083
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_TX__GPIO_3_9			0x3093
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_CTS__GPIO_3_10			0x30a3
+MX28_PAD_AUART2_RTS__GPIO_3_11			0x30b3
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_RX__GPIO_3_12			0x30c3
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_TX__GPIO_3_13			0x30d3
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_CTS__GPIO_3_14			0x30e3
+MX28_PAD_AUART3_RTS__GPIO_3_15			0x30f3
+MX28_PAD_PWM0__GPIO_3_16			0x3103
+MX28_PAD_PWM1__GPIO_3_17			0x3113
+MX28_PAD_PWM2__GPIO_3_18			0x3123
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_MCLK__GPIO_3_20			0x3143
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_LRCLK__GPIO_3_21			0x3153
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_BITCLK__GPIO_3_22		0x3163
+MX28_PAD_SAIF0_SDATA0__GPIO_3_23		0x3173
+MX28_PAD_I2C0_SCL__GPIO_3_24			0x3183
+MX28_PAD_I2C0_SDA__GPIO_3_25			0x3193
+MX28_PAD_SAIF1_SDATA0__GPIO_3_26		0x31a3
+MX28_PAD_SPDIF__GPIO_3_27			0x31b3
+MX28_PAD_PWM3__GPIO_3_28			0x31c3
+MX28_PAD_PWM4__GPIO_3_29			0x31d3
+MX28_PAD_LCD_RESET__GPIO_3_30			0x31e3
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDC__GPIO_4_0			0x4003
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDIO__GPIO_4_1			0x4013
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_EN__GPIO_4_2			0x4023
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD0__GPIO_4_3			0x4033
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD1__GPIO_4_4			0x4043
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_CLK__GPIO_4_5			0x4053
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_EN__GPIO_4_6			0x4063
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD0__GPIO_4_7			0x4073
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD1__GPIO_4_8			0x4083
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD2__GPIO_4_9			0x4093
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD3__GPIO_4_10			0x40a3
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD2__GPIO_4_11			0x40b3
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD3__GPIO_4_12			0x40c3
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_CLK__GPIO_4_13		0x40d3
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_COL__GPIO_4_14			0x40e3
+MX28_PAD_ENET0_CRS__GPIO_4_15			0x40f3
+MX28_PAD_ENET_CLK__GPIO_4_16			0x4103
+MX28_PAD_JTAG_RTCK__GPIO_4_20			0x4143
+
+Valid values for i.MX23 pinmux-id:
+
+pinmux						id
+------						--
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D00__GPMI_D00			0x0000
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D01__GPMI_D01			0x0010
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D02__GPMI_D02			0x0020
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D03__GPMI_D03			0x0030
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D04__GPMI_D04			0x0040
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D05__GPMI_D05			0x0050
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D06__GPMI_D06			0x0060
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D07__GPMI_D07			0x0070
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D08__GPMI_D08			0x0080
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D09__GPMI_D09			0x0090
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D10__GPMI_D10			0x00a0
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D11__GPMI_D11			0x00b0
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D12__GPMI_D12			0x00c0
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D13__GPMI_D13			0x00d0
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D14__GPMI_D14			0x00e0
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D15__GPMI_D15			0x00f0
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_CLE__GPMI_CLE			0x0100
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_ALE__GPMI_ALE			0x0110
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__GPMI_CE2N			0x0120
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__GPMI_RDY0			0x0130
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY1__GPMI_RDY1			0x0140
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY2__GPMI_RDY2			0x0150
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY3__GPMI_RDY3			0x0160
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_WPN__GPMI_WPN			0x0170
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_WRN__GPMI_WRN			0x0180
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDN__GPMI_RDN			0x0190
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_CTS__AUART1_CTS			0x01a0
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_RTS__AUART1_RTS			0x01b0
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_RX__AUART1_RX			0x01c0
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_TX__AUART1_TX			0x01d0
+MX23_PAD_I2C_SCL__I2C_SCL			0x01e0
+MX23_PAD_I2C_SDA__I2C_SDA			0x01f0
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D00__LCD_D00			0x1000
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D01__LCD_D01			0x1010
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D02__LCD_D02			0x1020
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D03__LCD_D03			0x1030
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D04__LCD_D04			0x1040
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D05__LCD_D05			0x1050
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D06__LCD_D06			0x1060
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D07__LCD_D07			0x1070
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D08__LCD_D08			0x1080
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D09__LCD_D09			0x1090
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D10__LCD_D10			0x10a0
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D11__LCD_D11			0x10b0
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D12__LCD_D12			0x10c0
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D13__LCD_D13			0x10d0
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D14__LCD_D14			0x10e0
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D15__LCD_D15			0x10f0
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D16__LCD_D16			0x1100
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D17__LCD_D17			0x1110
+MX23_PAD_LCD_RESET__LCD_RESET			0x1120
+MX23_PAD_LCD_RS__LCD_RS				0x1130
+MX23_PAD_LCD_WR__LCD_WR				0x1140
+MX23_PAD_LCD_CS__LCD_CS				0x1150
+MX23_PAD_LCD_DOTCK__LCD_DOTCK			0x1160
+MX23_PAD_LCD_ENABLE__LCD_ENABLE			0x1170
+MX23_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__LCD_HSYNC			0x1180
+MX23_PAD_LCD_VSYNC__LCD_VSYNC			0x1190
+MX23_PAD_PWM0__PWM0				0x11a0
+MX23_PAD_PWM1__PWM1				0x11b0
+MX23_PAD_PWM2__PWM2				0x11c0
+MX23_PAD_PWM3__PWM3				0x11d0
+MX23_PAD_PWM4__PWM4				0x11e0
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_CMD__SSP1_CMD			0x2000
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DETECT__SSP1_DETECT		0x2010
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__SSP1_DATA0			0x2020
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA1__SSP1_DATA1			0x2030
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA2__SSP1_DATA2			0x2040
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__SSP1_DATA3			0x2050
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_SCK__SSP1_SCK			0x2060
+MX23_PAD_ROTARYA__ROTARYA			0x2070
+MX23_PAD_ROTARYB__ROTARYB			0x2080
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A00__EMI_A00			0x2090
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A01__EMI_A01			0x20a0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A02__EMI_A02			0x20b0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A03__EMI_A03			0x20c0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A04__EMI_A04			0x20d0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A05__EMI_A05			0x20e0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A06__EMI_A06			0x20f0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A07__EMI_A07			0x2100
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A08__EMI_A08			0x2110
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A09__EMI_A09			0x2120
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A10__EMI_A10			0x2130
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A11__EMI_A11			0x2140
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A12__EMI_A12			0x2150
+MX23_PAD_EMI_BA0__EMI_BA0			0x2160
+MX23_PAD_EMI_BA1__EMI_BA1			0x2170
+MX23_PAD_EMI_CASN__EMI_CASN			0x2180
+MX23_PAD_EMI_CE0N__EMI_CE0N			0x2190
+MX23_PAD_EMI_CE1N__EMI_CE1N			0x21a0
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE1N__GPMI_CE1N			0x21b0
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE0N__GPMI_CE0N			0x21c0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_CKE__EMI_CKE			0x21d0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_RASN__EMI_RASN			0x21e0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_WEN__EMI_WEN			0x21f0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D00__EMI_D00			0x3000
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D01__EMI_D01			0x3010
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D02__EMI_D02			0x3020
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D03__EMI_D03			0x3030
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D04__EMI_D04			0x3040
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D05__EMI_D05			0x3050
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D06__EMI_D06			0x3060
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D07__EMI_D07			0x3070
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D08__EMI_D08			0x3080
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D09__EMI_D09			0x3090
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D10__EMI_D10			0x30a0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D11__EMI_D11			0x30b0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D12__EMI_D12			0x30c0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D13__EMI_D13			0x30d0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D14__EMI_D14			0x30e0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_D15__EMI_D15			0x30f0
+MX23_PAD_EMI_DQM0__EMI_DQM0			0x3100
+MX23_PAD_EMI_DQM1__EMI_DQM1			0x3110
+MX23_PAD_EMI_DQS0__EMI_DQS0			0x3120
+MX23_PAD_EMI_DQS1__EMI_DQS1			0x3130
+MX23_PAD_EMI_CLK__EMI_CLK			0x3140
+MX23_PAD_EMI_CLKN__EMI_CLKN			0x3150
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D00__LCD_D8			0x0001
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D01__LCD_D9			0x0011
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D02__LCD_D10			0x0021
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D03__LCD_D11			0x0031
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D04__LCD_D12			0x0041
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D05__LCD_D13			0x0051
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D06__LCD_D14			0x0061
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D07__LCD_D15			0x0071
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D08__LCD_D18			0x0081
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D09__LCD_D19			0x0091
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D10__LCD_D20			0x00a1
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D11__LCD_D21			0x00b1
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D12__LCD_D22			0x00c1
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D13__LCD_D23			0x00d1
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D14__AUART2_RX			0x00e1
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D15__AUART2_TX			0x00f1
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_CLE__LCD_D16			0x0101
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_ALE__LCD_D17			0x0111
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__ATA_A2			0x0121
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_RTS__IR_CLK			0x01b1
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_RX__IR_RX			0x01c1
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_TX__IR_TX			0x01d1
+MX23_PAD_I2C_SCL__GPMI_RDY2			0x01e1
+MX23_PAD_I2C_SDA__GPMI_CE2N			0x01f1
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D00__ETM_DA8			0x1001
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D01__ETM_DA9			0x1011
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D02__ETM_DA10			0x1021
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D03__ETM_DA11			0x1031
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D04__ETM_DA12			0x1041
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D05__ETM_DA13			0x1051
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D06__ETM_DA14			0x1061
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D07__ETM_DA15			0x1071
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D08__ETM_DA0			0x1081
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D09__ETM_DA1			0x1091
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D10__ETM_DA2			0x10a1
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D11__ETM_DA3			0x10b1
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D12__ETM_DA4			0x10c1
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D13__ETM_DA5			0x10d1
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D14__ETM_DA6			0x10e1
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D15__ETM_DA7			0x10f1
+MX23_PAD_LCD_RESET__ETM_TCTL			0x1121
+MX23_PAD_LCD_RS__ETM_TCLK			0x1131
+MX23_PAD_LCD_DOTCK__GPMI_RDY3			0x1161
+MX23_PAD_LCD_ENABLE__I2C_SCL			0x1171
+MX23_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__I2C_SDA			0x1181
+MX23_PAD_LCD_VSYNC__LCD_BUSY			0x1191
+MX23_PAD_PWM0__ROTARYA				0x11a1
+MX23_PAD_PWM1__ROTARYB				0x11b1
+MX23_PAD_PWM2__GPMI_RDY3			0x11c1
+MX23_PAD_PWM3__ETM_TCTL				0x11d1
+MX23_PAD_PWM4__ETM_TCLK				0x11e1
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DETECT__GPMI_CE3N			0x2011
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA1__I2C_SCL			0x2031
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA2__I2C_SDA			0x2041
+MX23_PAD_ROTARYA__AUART2_RTS			0x2071
+MX23_PAD_ROTARYB__AUART2_CTS			0x2081
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D00__SSP2_DATA0			0x0002
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D01__SSP2_DATA1			0x0012
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D02__SSP2_DATA2			0x0022
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D03__SSP2_DATA3			0x0032
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D04__SSP2_DATA4			0x0042
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D05__SSP2_DATA5			0x0052
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D06__SSP2_DATA6			0x0062
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D07__SSP2_DATA7			0x0072
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D08__SSP1_DATA4			0x0082
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D09__SSP1_DATA5			0x0092
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D10__SSP1_DATA6			0x00a2
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D11__SSP1_DATA7			0x00b2
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D15__GPMI_CE3N			0x00f2
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__SSP2_DETECT			0x0132
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY1__SSP2_CMD			0x0142
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_WRN__SSP2_SCK			0x0182
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_CTS__SSP1_DATA4			0x01a2
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_RTS__SSP1_DATA5			0x01b2
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_RX__SSP1_DATA6			0x01c2
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_TX__SSP1_DATA7			0x01d2
+MX23_PAD_I2C_SCL__AUART1_TX			0x01e2
+MX23_PAD_I2C_SDA__AUART1_RX			0x01f2
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D08__SAIF2_SDATA0			0x1082
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D09__SAIF1_SDATA0			0x1092
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D10__SAIF_MCLK_BITCLK		0x10a2
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D11__SAIF_LRCLK			0x10b2
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D12__SAIF2_SDATA1			0x10c2
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D13__SAIF2_SDATA2			0x10d2
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D14__SAIF1_SDATA2			0x10e2
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D15__SAIF1_SDATA1			0x10f2
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D16__SAIF_ALT_BITCLK		0x1102
+MX23_PAD_LCD_RESET__GPMI_CE3N			0x1122
+MX23_PAD_PWM0__DUART_RX				0x11a2
+MX23_PAD_PWM1__DUART_TX				0x11b2
+MX23_PAD_PWM3__AUART1_CTS			0x11d2
+MX23_PAD_PWM4__AUART1_RTS			0x11e2
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_CMD__JTAG_TDO			0x2002
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DETECT__USB_OTG_ID		0x2012
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__JTAG_TDI			0x2022
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA1__JTAG_TCLK			0x2032
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA2__JTAG_RTCK			0x2042
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__JTAG_TMS			0x2052
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_SCK__JTAG_TRST			0x2062
+MX23_PAD_ROTARYA__SPDIF				0x2072
+MX23_PAD_ROTARYB__GPMI_CE3N			0x2082
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D00__GPIO_0_0			0x0003
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D01__GPIO_0_1			0x0013
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D02__GPIO_0_2			0x0023
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D03__GPIO_0_3			0x0033
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D04__GPIO_0_4			0x0043
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D05__GPIO_0_5			0x0053
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D06__GPIO_0_6			0x0063
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D07__GPIO_0_7			0x0073
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D08__GPIO_0_8			0x0083
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D09__GPIO_0_9			0x0093
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D10__GPIO_0_10			0x00a3
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D11__GPIO_0_11			0x00b3
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D12__GPIO_0_12			0x00c3
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D13__GPIO_0_13			0x00d3
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D14__GPIO_0_14			0x00e3
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_D15__GPIO_0_15			0x00f3
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_CLE__GPIO_0_16			0x0103
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_ALE__GPIO_0_17			0x0113
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__GPIO_0_18			0x0123
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__GPIO_0_19			0x0133
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY1__GPIO_0_20			0x0143
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY2__GPIO_0_21			0x0153
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY3__GPIO_0_22			0x0163
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_WPN__GPIO_0_23			0x0173
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_WRN__GPIO_0_24			0x0183
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDN__GPIO_0_25			0x0193
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_CTS__GPIO_0_26			0x01a3
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_RTS__GPIO_0_27			0x01b3
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_RX__GPIO_0_28			0x01c3
+MX23_PAD_AUART1_TX__GPIO_0_29			0x01d3
+MX23_PAD_I2C_SCL__GPIO_0_30			0x01e3
+MX23_PAD_I2C_SDA__GPIO_0_31			0x01f3
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D00__GPIO_1_0			0x1003
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D01__GPIO_1_1			0x1013
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D02__GPIO_1_2			0x1023
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D03__GPIO_1_3			0x1033
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D04__GPIO_1_4			0x1043
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D05__GPIO_1_5			0x1053
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D06__GPIO_1_6			0x1063
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D07__GPIO_1_7			0x1073
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D08__GPIO_1_8			0x1083
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D09__GPIO_1_9			0x1093
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D10__GPIO_1_10			0x10a3
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D11__GPIO_1_11			0x10b3
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D12__GPIO_1_12			0x10c3
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D13__GPIO_1_13			0x10d3
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D14__GPIO_1_14			0x10e3
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D15__GPIO_1_15			0x10f3
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D16__GPIO_1_16			0x1103
+MX23_PAD_LCD_D17__GPIO_1_17			0x1113
+MX23_PAD_LCD_RESET__GPIO_1_18			0x1123
+MX23_PAD_LCD_RS__GPIO_1_19			0x1133
+MX23_PAD_LCD_WR__GPIO_1_20			0x1143
+MX23_PAD_LCD_CS__GPIO_1_21			0x1153
+MX23_PAD_LCD_DOTCK__GPIO_1_22			0x1163
+MX23_PAD_LCD_ENABLE__GPIO_1_23			0x1173
+MX23_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__GPIO_1_24			0x1183
+MX23_PAD_LCD_VSYNC__GPIO_1_25			0x1193
+MX23_PAD_PWM0__GPIO_1_26			0x11a3
+MX23_PAD_PWM1__GPIO_1_27			0x11b3
+MX23_PAD_PWM2__GPIO_1_28			0x11c3
+MX23_PAD_PWM3__GPIO_1_29			0x11d3
+MX23_PAD_PWM4__GPIO_1_30			0x11e3
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_CMD__GPIO_2_0			0x2003
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DETECT__GPIO_2_1			0x2013
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__GPIO_2_2			0x2023
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA1__GPIO_2_3			0x2033
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA2__GPIO_2_4			0x2043
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__GPIO_2_5			0x2053
+MX23_PAD_SSP1_SCK__GPIO_2_6			0x2063
+MX23_PAD_ROTARYA__GPIO_2_7			0x2073
+MX23_PAD_ROTARYB__GPIO_2_8			0x2083
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A00__GPIO_2_9			0x2093
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A01__GPIO_2_10			0x20a3
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A02__GPIO_2_11			0x20b3
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A03__GPIO_2_12			0x20c3
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A04__GPIO_2_13			0x20d3
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A05__GPIO_2_14			0x20e3
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A06__GPIO_2_15			0x20f3
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A07__GPIO_2_16			0x2103
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A08__GPIO_2_17			0x2113
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A09__GPIO_2_18			0x2123
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A10__GPIO_2_19			0x2133
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A11__GPIO_2_20			0x2143
+MX23_PAD_EMI_A12__GPIO_2_21			0x2153
+MX23_PAD_EMI_BA0__GPIO_2_22			0x2163
+MX23_PAD_EMI_BA1__GPIO_2_23			0x2173
+MX23_PAD_EMI_CASN__GPIO_2_24			0x2183
+MX23_PAD_EMI_CE0N__GPIO_2_25			0x2193
+MX23_PAD_EMI_CE1N__GPIO_2_26			0x21a3
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE1N__GPIO_2_27			0x21b3
+MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE0N__GPIO_2_28			0x21c3
+MX23_PAD_EMI_CKE__GPIO_2_29			0x21d3
+MX23_PAD_EMI_RASN__GPIO_2_30			0x21e3
+MX23_PAD_EMI_WEN__GPIO_2_31			0x21f3
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,vf610-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,vf610-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ddcdeb697c29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,vf610-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+Freescale Vybrid VF610 IOMUX Controller
+
+Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding part
+and usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,vf610-iomuxc"
+- fsl,pins: two integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config
+  setting. The format is fsl,pins = <PIN_FUNC_ID CONFIG>, PIN_FUNC_ID is
+  a pin working on a specific function, CONFIG is the pad setting value
+  such as pull-up, speed, ode for this pin. Please refer to Vybrid VF610
+  datasheet for the valid pad config settings.
+
+CONFIG bits definition:
+PAD_CTL_SPEED_LOW		(1 << 12)
+PAD_CTL_SPEED_MED		(2 << 12)
+PAD_CTL_SPEED_HIGH		(3 << 12)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_FAST		(1 << 11)
+PAD_CTL_SRE_SLOW		(0 << 11)
+PAD_CTL_ODE			(1 << 10)
+PAD_CTL_HYS			(1 << 9)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_DISABLE		(0 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_150ohm		(1 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_75ohm		(2 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_50ohm		(3 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_37ohm		(4 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_30ohm		(5 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_25ohm		(6 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_DSE_20ohm		(7 << 6)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_DOWN		(0 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_47K_UP		(1 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_UP		(2 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PUS_22K_UP		(3 << 4)
+PAD_CTL_PKE			(1 << 3)
+PAD_CTL_PUE			(1 << 2)
+PAD_CTL_OBE_ENABLE		(1 << 1)
+PAD_CTL_IBE_ENABLE		(1 << 0)
+PAD_CTL_OBE_IBE_ENABLE		(3 << 0)
+
+Please refer to vf610-pinfunc.h in device tree source folder
+for all available PIN_FUNC_ID for Vybrid VF610.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pdc-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pdc-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a186181c402b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pdc-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+ImgTec TZ1090 PDC pin controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "img,tz1090-pdc-pinctrl"
+- reg: Should contain the register physical address and length of the
+  SOC_GPIO_CONTROL registers in the PDC register region.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+TZ1090-PDC's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number
+of subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a
+pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the
+mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration
+parameters, such as pull-up, drive strength, etc.
+
+The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be enumerated
+and processed purely based on their content.
+
+Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed. In
+other words, a subnode that lists a mux function but no pin configuration
+parameters implies no information about any pin configuration parameters.
+Similarly, a pin subnode that describes a pullup parameter implies no
+information about e.g. the mux function. For this reason, even seemingly boolean
+values are actually tristates in this binding: unspecified, off, or on.
+Unspecified is represented as an absent property, and off/on are represented as
+integer values 0 and 1.
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- tz1090,pins : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a pin or
+  group. Valid values for these names are listed below.
+
+Optional subnode-properties:
+- tz1090,function: A string containing the name of the function to mux to the
+  pin or group. Valid values for function names are listed below, including
+  which pingroups can be muxed to them.
+- supported generic pinconfig properties (for further details see
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt):
+  - bias-disable
+  - bias-high-impedance
+  - bias-bus-hold
+  - bias-pull-up
+  - bias-pull-down
+  - input-schmitt-enable
+  - input-schmitt-disable
+  - drive-strength: Integer, control drive strength of pins in mA.
+      2: 2mA
+      4: 4mA
+      8: 8mA
+      12: 12mA
+  - low-power-enable: Flag, power-on-start weak pull-down for invalid power.
+  - low-power-disable: Flag, power-on-start weak pull-down disabled.
+
+Note that many of these properties are only valid for certain specific pins
+or groups. See the TZ1090 TRM for complete details regarding which groups
+support which functionality. The Linux pinctrl driver may also be a useful
+reference.
+
+Valid values for pin and group names are:
+
+  pins:
+
+    These all support bias-high-impediance, bias-pull-up, bias-pull-down, and
+    bias-bus-hold (which can also be provided to any of the groups below to set
+    it for all gpio pins in that group).
+
+    gpio0, gpio1, sys_wake0, sys_wake1, sys_wake2, ir_data, ext_power.
+
+  mux groups:
+
+    These all support function.
+
+    gpio0
+        pins:       gpio0.
+        function:   ir_mod_stable_out.
+    gpio1
+        pins:       gpio1.
+        function:   ir_mod_power_out.
+
+  drive groups:
+
+    These support input-schmitt-enable, input-schmitt-disable,
+    drive-strength, low-power-enable, and low-power-disable.
+
+    pdc
+        pins:   gpio0, gpio1, sys_wake0, sys_wake1, sys_wake2, ir_data,
+                ext_power.
+
+Example:
+
+	pinctrl_pdc: pinctrl@02006500 {
+		#gpio-range-cells = <3>;
+		compatible = "img,tz1090-pdc-pinctrl";
+		reg = <0x02006500 0x100>;
+	};
+
+Example board file extracts:
+
+	&pinctrl_pdc {
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&syswake_default>;
+
+		syswake_default: syswakes {
+			syswake_cfg {
+				tz1090,pins =	"sys_wake0",
+						"sys_wake1",
+						"sys_wake2";
+				pull-up;
+			};
+		};
+		irmod_default: irmod {
+			gpio0_cfg {
+				tz1090,pins =	"gpio0";
+				tz1090,function = "ir_mod_stable_out";
+			};
+			gpio1_cfg {
+				tz1090,pins =	"gpio1";
+				tz1090,function = "ir_mod_power_out";
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+	ir: ir@02006200 {
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&irmod_default>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4b27c99f7f9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,227 @@
+ImgTec TZ1090 pin controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "img,tz1090-pinctrl"
+- reg: Should contain the register physical address and length of the pad
+  configuration registers (CR_PADS_* and CR_IF_CTL0).
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+TZ1090's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of
+subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a
+pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the
+mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration
+parameters, such as pull-up, drive strength, etc.
+
+The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be enumerated
+and processed purely based on their content.
+
+Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed. In
+other words, a subnode that lists a mux function but no pin configuration
+parameters implies no information about any pin configuration parameters.
+Similarly, a pin subnode that describes a pullup parameter implies no
+information about e.g. the mux function. For this reason, even seemingly boolean
+values are actually tristates in this binding: unspecified, off, or on.
+Unspecified is represented as an absent property, and off/on are represented as
+integer values 0 and 1.
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- tz1090,pins : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a pin or
+  group. Valid values for these names are listed below.
+
+Optional subnode-properties:
+- tz1090,function: A string containing the name of the function to mux to the
+  pin or group. Valid values for function names are listed below, including
+  which pingroups can be muxed to them.
+- supported generic pinconfig properties (for further details see
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt):
+  - bias-disable
+  - bias-high-impedance
+  - bias-bus-hold
+  - bias-pull-up
+  - bias-pull-down
+  - input-schmitt-enable
+  - input-schmitt-disable
+  - drive-strength: Integer, control drive strength of pins in mA.
+      2: 2mA
+      4: 4mA
+      8: 8mA
+      12: 12mA
+
+
+Note that many of these properties are only valid for certain specific pins
+or groups. See the TZ1090 TRM for complete details regarding which groups
+support which functionality. The Linux pinctrl driver may also be a useful
+reference.
+
+Valid values for pin and group names are:
+
+  gpio pins:
+
+    These all support bias-high-impediance, bias-pull-up, bias-pull-down, and
+    bias-bus-hold (which can also be provided to any of the groups below to set
+    it for all pins in that group).
+
+    They also all support the some form of muxing. Any pins which are contained
+    in one of the mux groups (see below) can be muxed only to the functions
+    supported by the mux group. All other pins can be muxed to the "perip"
+    function which which enables them with their intended peripheral.
+
+    Different pins in the same mux group cannot be muxed to different functions,
+    however it is possible to mux only a subset of the pins in a mux group to a
+    particular function and leave the remaining pins unmuxed. This is useful if
+    the board connects certain pins in a group to other devices to be controlled
+    by GPIO, and you don't want the usual peripheral to have any control of the
+    pin.
+
+    ant_sel0, ant_sel1, gain0, gain1, gain2, gain3, gain4, gain5, gain6, gain7,
+    i2s_bclk_out, i2s_din, i2s_dout0, i2s_dout1, i2s_dout2, i2s_lrclk_out,
+    i2s_mclk, pa_on, pdm_a, pdm_b, pdm_c, pdm_d, pll_on, rx_hp, rx_on,
+    scb0_sclk, scb0_sdat, scb1_sclk, scb1_sdat, scb2_sclk, scb2_sdat, sdh_cd,
+    sdh_clk_in, sdh_wp, sdio_clk, sdio_cmd, sdio_d0, sdio_d1, sdio_d2, sdio_d3,
+    spi0_cs0, spi0_cs1, spi0_cs2, spi0_din, spi0_dout, spi0_mclk, spi1_cs0,
+    spi1_cs1, spi1_cs2, spi1_din, spi1_dout, spi1_mclk, tft_blank_ls, tft_blue0,
+    tft_blue1, tft_blue2, tft_blue3, tft_blue4, tft_blue5, tft_blue6, tft_blue7,
+    tft_green0, tft_green1, tft_green2, tft_green3, tft_green4, tft_green5,
+    tft_green6, tft_green7, tft_hsync_nr, tft_panelclk, tft_pwrsave, tft_red0,
+    tft_red1, tft_red2, tft_red3, tft_red4, tft_red5, tft_red6, tft_red7,
+    tft_vd12acb, tft_vdden_gd, tft_vsync_ns, tx_on, uart0_cts, uart0_rts,
+    uart0_rxd, uart0_txd, uart1_rxd, uart1_txd.
+
+        bias-high-impediance:  supported.
+        bias-pull-up:          supported.
+        bias-pull-down:        supported.
+        bias-bus-hold:         supported.
+        function:              perip or those supported by pin's mux group.
+
+  other pins:
+
+    These other pins are part of various pin groups below, but can't be
+    controlled as GPIOs. They do however support bias-high-impediance,
+    bias-pull-up, bias-pull-down, and bias-bus-hold (which can also be provided
+    to any of the groups below to set it for all pins in that group).
+
+    clk_out0, clk_out1, tck, tdi, tdo, tms, trst.
+
+        bias-high-impediance:  supported.
+        bias-pull-up:          supported.
+        bias-pull-down:        supported.
+        bias-bus-hold:         supported.
+
+  mux groups:
+
+    These all support function, and some support drive configs.
+
+    afe
+        pins:                  tx_on, rx_on, pll_on, pa_on, rx_hp, ant_sel0,
+                               ant_sel1, gain0, gain1, gain2, gain3, gain4,
+                               gain5, gain6, gain7.
+        function:              afe, ts_out_0.
+        input-schmitt-enable:  supported.
+        input-schmitt-disable: supported.
+        drive-strength:        supported.
+    pdm_d
+        pins:                  pdm_d.
+        function:              pdm_dac, usb_vbus.
+    sdh
+        pins:                  sdh_cd, sdh_wp, sdh_clk_in.
+        function:              sdh, sdio.
+    sdio
+        pins:                  sdio_clk, sdio_cmd, sdio_d0, sdio_d1, sdio_d2,
+                               sdio_d3.
+        function:              sdio, sdh.
+    spi1_cs2
+        pins:                  spi1_cs2.
+        function:              spi1_cs2, usb_vbus.
+    tft
+        pins:                  tft_red0, tft_red1, tft_red2, tft_red3,
+                               tft_red4, tft_red5, tft_red6, tft_red7,
+                               tft_green0, tft_green1, tft_green2, tft_green3,
+                               tft_green4, tft_green5, tft_green6, tft_green7,
+                               tft_blue0, tft_blue1, tft_blue2, tft_blue3,
+                               tft_blue4, tft_blue5, tft_blue6, tft_blue7,
+                               tft_vdden_gd, tft_panelclk, tft_blank_ls,
+                               tft_vsync_ns, tft_hsync_nr, tft_vd12acb,
+                               tft_pwrsave.
+        function:              tft, ext_dac, not_iqadc_stb, iqdac_stb, ts_out_1,
+                               lcd_trace, phy_ringosc.
+        input-schmitt-enable:  supported.
+        input-schmitt-disable: supported.
+        drive-strength:        supported.
+
+  drive groups:
+
+    These all support input-schmitt-enable, input-schmitt-disable,
+    and drive-strength.
+
+    jtag
+        pins:   tck, trst, tdi, tdo, tms.
+    scb1
+        pins:   scb1_sdat, scb1_sclk.
+    scb2
+        pins:   scb2_sdat, scb2_sclk.
+    spi0
+        pins:   spi0_mclk, spi0_cs0, spi0_cs1, spi0_cs2, spi0_dout, spi0_din.
+    spi1
+        pins:   spi1_mclk, spi1_cs0, spi1_cs1, spi1_cs2, spi1_dout, spi1_din.
+    uart
+        pins:   uart0_txd, uart0_rxd, uart0_rts, uart0_cts,
+                uart1_txd, uart1_rxd.
+    drive_i2s
+        pins:   clk_out1, i2s_din, i2s_dout0, i2s_dout1, i2s_dout2,
+                i2s_lrclk_out, i2s_bclk_out, i2s_mclk.
+    drive_pdm
+        pins:   clk_out0, pdm_b, pdm_a.
+    drive_scb0
+        pins:   scb0_sclk, scb0_sdat, pdm_d, pdm_c.
+    drive_sdio
+        pins:   sdio_clk, sdio_cmd, sdio_d0, sdio_d1, sdio_d2, sdio_d3,
+                sdh_wp, sdh_cd, sdh_clk_in.
+
+  convenience groups:
+
+    These are just convenient groupings of pins and don't support any drive
+    configs.
+
+    uart0
+        pins:   uart0_cts, uart0_rts, uart0_rxd, uart0_txd.
+    uart1
+        pins:   uart1_rxd, uart1_txd.
+    scb0
+        pins:   scb0_sclk, scb0_sdat.
+    i2s
+        pins:   i2s_bclk_out, i2s_din, i2s_dout0, i2s_dout1, i2s_dout2,
+                i2s_lrclk_out, i2s_mclk.
+
+Example:
+
+	pinctrl: pinctrl@02005800 {
+		#gpio-range-cells = <3>;
+		compatible = "img,tz1090-pinctrl";
+		reg = <0x02005800 0xe4>;
+	};
+
+Example board file extract:
+
+	&pinctrl {
+		uart0_default: uart0 {
+			uart0_cfg {
+				tz1090,pins =	"uart0_rxd",
+						"uart0_txd";
+				tz1090,function = "perip";
+			};
+		};
+		tft_default: tft {
+			tft_cfg {
+				tz1090,pins =	"tft";
+				tz1090,function = "tft";
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+	uart@02004b00 {
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&uart0_default>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,falcon-pinumx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,falcon-pinumx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..daa768956069
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,falcon-pinumx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+Lantiq FALCON pinmux controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "lantiq,pinctrl-falcon"
+- reg: Should contain the physical address and length of the gpio/pinmux
+  register range
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+Lantiq's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of
+subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a
+pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the
+mux function to select on those group(s), and two pin configuration parameters:
+pull-up and open-drain
+
+The name of each subnode is not important as long as it is unique; all subnodes
+should be enumerated and processed purely based on their content.
+
+Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed. In
+other words, a subnode that lists a mux function but no pin configuration
+parameters implies no information about any pin configuration parameters.
+Similarly, a pin subnode that describes a pullup parameter implies no
+information about e.g. the mux function.
+
+We support 2 types of nodes.
+
+Definition of mux function groups:
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- lantiq,groups : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a group.
+  Valid values for these names are listed below.
+- lantiq,function: A string containing the name of the function to mux to the
+  group. Valid values for function names are listed below.
+
+Valid values for group and function names:
+
+  mux groups:
+    por, ntr, ntr8k, hrst, mdio, bootled, asc0, spi, spi cs0, spi cs1, i2c,
+    jtag, slic, pcm, asc1
+
+  functions:
+    rst, ntr, mdio, led, asc, spi, i2c, jtag, slic, pcm
+
+
+Definition of pin configurations:
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- lantiq,pins : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a pin.
+  Valid values for these names are listed below.
+
+Optional subnode-properties:
+- lantiq,pull: Integer, representing the pull-down/up to apply to the pin.
+    0: none, 1: down
+- lantiq,drive-current: Boolean, enables drive-current
+- lantiq,slew-rate: Boolean, enables slew-rate
+
+Example:
+	pinmux0 {
+		compatible = "lantiq,pinctrl-falcon";
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&state_default>;
+
+		state_default: pinmux {
+			asc0 {
+				lantiq,groups = "asc0";
+				lantiq,function = "asc";
+			};
+			ntr {
+				lantiq,groups = "ntr8k";
+				lantiq,function = "ntr";
+			};
+			i2c {
+				lantiq,groups = "i2c";
+				lantiq,function = "i2c";
+			};
+			hrst {
+				lantiq,groups = "hrst";
+				lantiq,function = "rst";
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,xway-pinumx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,xway-pinumx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b5469db1d7ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,xway-pinumx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+Lantiq XWAY pinmux controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "lantiq,pinctrl-xway" or "lantiq,pinctrl-xr9"
+- reg: Should contain the physical address and length of the gpio/pinmux
+  register range
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+Lantiq's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of
+subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a
+pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the
+mux function to select on those group(s), and two pin configuration parameters:
+pull-up and open-drain
+
+The name of each subnode is not important as long as it is unique; all subnodes
+should be enumerated and processed purely based on their content.
+
+Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed. In
+other words, a subnode that lists a mux function but no pin configuration
+parameters implies no information about any pin configuration parameters.
+Similarly, a pin subnode that describes a pullup parameter implies no
+information about e.g. the mux function.
+
+We support 2 types of nodes.
+
+Definition of mux function groups:
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- lantiq,groups : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a group.
+  Valid values for these names are listed below.
+- lantiq,function: A string containing the name of the function to mux to the
+  group. Valid values for function names are listed below.
+
+Valid values for group and function names:
+
+  mux groups:
+    exin0, exin1, exin2, jtag, ebu a23, ebu a24, ebu a25, ebu clk, ebu cs1,
+    ebu wait, nand ale, nand cs1, nand cle, spi, spi_cs1, spi_cs2, spi_cs3,
+    spi_cs4, spi_cs5, spi_cs6, asc0, asc0 cts rts, stp, nmi , gpt1, gpt2,
+    gpt3, clkout0, clkout1, clkout2, clkout3, gnt1, gnt2, gnt3, req1, req2,
+    req3
+
+  additional mux groups (XR9 only):
+    mdio, nand rdy, nand rd, exin3, exin4, gnt4, req4
+
+  functions:
+    spi, asc, cgu, jtag, exin, stp, gpt, nmi, pci, ebu, mdio
+
+
+
+Definition of pin configurations:
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- lantiq,pins : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a pin.
+  Valid values for these names are listed below.
+
+Optional subnode-properties:
+- lantiq,pull: Integer, representing the pull-down/up to apply to the pin.
+    0: none, 1: down, 2: up.
+- lantiq,open-drain: Boolean, enables open-drain on the defined pin.
+
+Valid values for XWAY pin names:
+  Pinconf pins can be referenced via the names io0-io31.
+
+Valid values for XR9 pin names:
+  Pinconf pins can be referenced via the names io0-io55.
+
+Example:
+	gpio: pinmux@E100B10 {
+		compatible = "lantiq,pinctrl-xway";
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&state_default>;
+
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		reg = <0xE100B10 0xA0>;
+
+		state_default: pinmux {
+			stp {
+				lantiq,groups = "stp";
+				lantiq,function = "stp";
+			};
+			pci {
+				lantiq,groups = "gnt1";
+				lantiq,function = "pci";
+			};
+			conf_out {
+				lantiq,pins = "io4", "io5", "io6"; /* stp */
+				lantiq,open-drain;
+				lantiq,pull = <0>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-370-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-370-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..01ef408e205f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-370-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+* Marvell Armada 370 SoC pinctrl driver for mpp
+
+Please refer to marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding
+part and usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "marvell,88f6710-pinctrl"
+
+Available mpp pins/groups and functions:
+Note: brackets (x) are not part of the mpp name for marvell,function and given
+only for more detailed description in this document.
+
+name          pins     functions
+================================================================================
+mpp0          0        gpio, uart0(rxd)
+mpp1          1        gpo, uart0(txd)
+mpp2          2        gpio, i2c0(sck), uart0(txd)
+mpp3          3        gpio, i2c0(sda), uart0(rxd)
+mpp4          4        gpio, cpu_pd(vdd)
+mpp5          5        gpo, ge0(txclko), uart1(txd), spi1(clk), audio(mclk)
+mpp6          6        gpio, ge0(txd0), sata0(prsnt), tdm(rst), audio(sdo)
+mpp7          7        gpo, ge0(txd1), tdm(tdx), audio(lrclk)
+mpp8          8        gpio, ge0(txd2), uart0(rts), tdm(drx), audio(bclk)
+mpp9          9        gpo, ge0(txd3), uart1(txd), sd0(clk), audio(spdifo)
+mpp10         10       gpio, ge0(txctl), uart0(cts), tdm(fsync), audio(sdi)
+mpp11         11       gpio, ge0(rxd0), uart1(rxd), sd0(cmd), spi0(cs1),
+                       sata1(prsnt), spi1(cs1)
+mpp12         12       gpio, ge0(rxd1), i2c1(sda), sd0(d0), spi1(cs0),
+                       audio(spdifi)
+mpp13         13       gpio, ge0(rxd2), i2c1(sck), sd0(d1), tdm(pclk),
+                       audio(rmclk)
+mpp14         14       gpio, ge0(rxd3), pcie(clkreq0), sd0(d2), spi1(mosi),
+                       spi0(cs2)
+mpp15         15       gpio, ge0(rxctl), pcie(clkreq1), sd0(d3), spi1(miso),
+                       spi0(cs3)
+mpp16         16       gpio, ge0(rxclk), uart1(rxd), tdm(int), audio(extclk)
+mpp17         17       gpo, ge(mdc)
+mpp18         18       gpio, ge(mdio)
+mpp19         19       gpio, ge0(txclk), ge1(txclkout), tdm(pclk)
+mpp20         20       gpo, ge0(txd4), ge1(txd0)
+mpp21         21       gpo, ge0(txd5), ge1(txd1), uart1(txd)
+mpp22         22       gpo, ge0(txd6), ge1(txd2), uart0(rts)
+mpp23         23       gpo, ge0(txd7), ge1(txd3), spi1(mosi)
+mpp24         24       gpio, ge0(col), ge1(txctl), spi1(cs0)
+mpp25         25       gpio, ge0(rxerr), ge1(rxd0), uart1(rxd)
+mpp26         26       gpio, ge0(crs), ge1(rxd1), spi1(miso)
+mpp27         27       gpio, ge0(rxd4), ge1(rxd2), uart0(cts)
+mpp28         28       gpio, ge0(rxd5), ge1(rxd3)
+mpp29         29       gpio, ge0(rxd6), ge1(rxctl), i2c1(sda)
+mpp30         30       gpio, ge0(rxd7), ge1(rxclk), i2c1(sck)
+mpp31         31       gpio, tclk, ge0(txerr)
+mpp32         32       gpio, spi0(cs0)
+mpp33         33       gpio, dev(bootcs), spi0(cs0)
+mpp34         34       gpo, dev(wen0), spi0(mosi)
+mpp35         35       gpo, dev(oen), spi0(sck)
+mpp36         36       gpo, dev(a1), spi0(miso)
+mpp37         37       gpo, dev(a0), sata0(prsnt)
+mpp38         38       gpio, dev(ready), uart1(cts), uart0(cts)
+mpp39         39       gpo, dev(ad0), audio(spdifo)
+mpp40         40       gpio, dev(ad1), uart1(rts), uart0(rts)
+mpp41         41       gpio, dev(ad2), uart1(rxd)
+mpp42         42       gpo, dev(ad3), uart1(txd)
+mpp43         43       gpo, dev(ad4), audio(bclk)
+mpp44         44       gpo, dev(ad5), audio(mclk)
+mpp45         45       gpo, dev(ad6), audio(lrclk)
+mpp46         46       gpo, dev(ad7), audio(sdo)
+mpp47         47       gpo, dev(ad8), sd0(clk), audio(spdifo)
+mpp48         48       gpio, dev(ad9), uart0(rts), sd0(cmd), sata1(prsnt),
+                       spi0(cs1)
+mpp49         49       gpio, dev(ad10), pcie(clkreq1), sd0(d0), spi1(cs0),
+                       audio(spdifi)
+mpp50         50       gpio, dev(ad11), uart0(cts), sd0(d1), spi1(miso),
+                       audio(rmclk)
+mpp51         51       gpio, dev(ad12), i2c1(sda), sd0(d2), spi1(mosi)
+mpp52         52       gpio, dev(ad13), i2c1(sck), sd0(d3), spi1(sck)
+mpp53         53       gpio, dev(ad14), sd0(clk), tdm(pclk), spi0(cs2),
+                       pcie(clkreq1)
+mpp54         54       gpo, dev(ad15), tdm(dtx)
+mpp55         55       gpio, dev(cs1), uart1(txd), tdm(rst), sata1(prsnt),
+                       sata0(prsnt)
+mpp56         56       gpio, dev(cs2), uart1(cts), uart0(cts), spi0(cs3),
+                       pcie(clkreq0), spi1(cs1)
+mpp57         57       gpio, dev(cs3), uart1(rxd), tdm(fsync), sata0(prsnt),
+                       audio(sdo)
+mpp58         58       gpio, dev(cs0), uart1(rts), tdm(int), audio(extclk),
+                       uart0(rts)
+mpp59         59       gpo, dev(ale0), uart1(rts), uart0(rts), audio(bclk)
+mpp60         60       gpio, dev(ale1), uart1(rxd), sata0(prsnt), pcie(rst-out),
+                       audio(sdi)
+mpp61         61       gpo, dev(wen1), uart1(txd), audio(rclk)
+mpp62         62       gpio, dev(a2), uart1(cts), tdm(drx), pcie(clkreq0),
+                       audio(mclk), uart0(cts)
+mpp63         63       gpo, spi0(sck), tclk
+mpp64         64       gpio, spi0(miso), spi0-1(cs1)
+mpp65         65       gpio, spi0(mosi), spi0-1(cs2)
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-xp-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-xp-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bfa0a2e5e0cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,armada-xp-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+* Marvell Armada XP SoC pinctrl driver for mpp
+
+Please refer to marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding
+part and usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "marvell,mv78230-pinctrl", "marvell,mv78260-pinctrl",
+              "marvell,mv78460-pinctrl"
+
+This driver supports all Armada XP variants, i.e. mv78230, mv78260, and mv78460.
+
+Available mpp pins/groups and functions:
+Note: brackets (x) are not part of the mpp name for marvell,function and given
+only for more detailed description in this document.
+
+* Marvell Armada XP (all variants)
+
+name          pins     functions
+================================================================================
+mpp0          0        gpio, ge0(txclko), lcd(d0)
+mpp1          1        gpio, ge0(txd0), lcd(d1)
+mpp2          2        gpio, ge0(txd1), lcd(d2)
+mpp3          3        gpio, ge0(txd2), lcd(d3)
+mpp4          4        gpio, ge0(txd3), lcd(d4)
+mpp5          5        gpio, ge0(txctl), lcd(d5)
+mpp6          6        gpio, ge0(rxd0), lcd(d6)
+mpp7          7        gpio, ge0(rxd1), lcd(d7)
+mpp8          8        gpio, ge0(rxd2), lcd(d8)
+mpp9          9        gpio, ge0(rxd3), lcd(d9)
+mpp10         10       gpio, ge0(rxctl), lcd(d10)
+mpp11         11       gpio, ge0(rxclk), lcd(d11)
+mpp12         12       gpio, ge0(txd4), ge1(txd0), lcd(d12)
+mpp13         13       gpio, ge0(txd5), ge1(txd1), lcd(d13)
+mpp14         14       gpio, ge0(txd6), ge1(txd2), lcd(d15)
+mpp15         15       gpio, ge0(txd7), ge1(txd3), lcd(d16)
+mpp16         16       gpio, ge0(txd7), ge1(txd3), lcd(d16)
+mpp17         17       gpio, ge0(col), ge1(txctl), lcd(d17)
+mpp18         18       gpio, ge0(rxerr), ge1(rxd0), lcd(d18), ptp(trig)
+mpp19         19       gpio, ge0(crs), ge1(rxd1), lcd(d19), ptp(evreq)
+mpp20         20       gpio, ge0(rxd4), ge1(rxd2), lcd(d20), ptp(clk)
+mpp21         21       gpio, ge0(rxd5), ge1(rxd3), lcd(d21), mem(bat)
+mpp22         22       gpio, ge0(rxd6), ge1(rxctl), lcd(d22), sata0(prsnt)
+mpp23         23       gpio, ge0(rxd7), ge1(rxclk), lcd(d23), sata1(prsnt)
+mpp24         24       gpio, lcd(hsync), sata1(prsnt), nf(bootcs-re), tdm(rst)
+mpp25         25       gpio, lcd(vsync), sata0(prsnt), nf(bootcs-we), tdm(pclk)
+mpp26         26       gpio, lcd(clk), tdm(fsync), vdd(cpu1-pd)
+mpp27         27       gpio, lcd(e), tdm(dtx), ptp(trig)
+mpp28         28       gpio, lcd(pwm), tdm(drx), ptp(evreq)
+mpp29         29       gpio, lcd(ref-clk), tdm(int0), ptp(clk), vdd(cpu0-pd)
+mpp30         30       gpio, tdm(int1), sd0(clk)
+mpp31         31       gpio, tdm(int2), sd0(cmd), vdd(cpu0-pd)
+mpp32         32       gpio, tdm(int3), sd0(d0), vdd(cpu1-pd)
+mpp33         33       gpio, tdm(int4), sd0(d1), mem(bat)
+mpp34         34       gpio, tdm(int5), sd0(d2), sata0(prsnt)
+mpp35         35       gpio, tdm(int6), sd0(d3), sata1(prsnt)
+mpp36         36       gpio, spi(mosi)
+mpp37         37       gpio, spi(miso)
+mpp38         38       gpio, spi(sck)
+mpp39         39       gpio, spi(cs0)
+mpp40         40       gpio, spi(cs1), uart2(cts), lcd(vga-hsync), vdd(cpu1-pd),
+                       pcie(clkreq0)
+mpp41         41       gpio, spi(cs2), uart2(rts), lcd(vga-vsync), sata1(prsnt),
+                       pcie(clkreq1)
+mpp42         42       gpio, uart2(rxd), uart0(cts), tdm(int7), tdm-1(timer),
+                       vdd(cpu0-pd)
+mpp43         43       gpio, uart2(txd), uart0(rts), spi(cs3), pcie(rstout),
+                       vdd(cpu2-3-pd){1}
+mpp44         44       gpio, uart2(cts), uart3(rxd), spi(cs4), pcie(clkreq2),
+                       mem(bat)
+mpp45         45       gpio, uart2(rts), uart3(txd), spi(cs5), sata1(prsnt)
+mpp46         46       gpio, uart3(rts), uart1(rts), spi(cs6), sata0(prsnt)
+mpp47         47       gpio, uart3(cts), uart1(cts), spi(cs7), pcie(clkreq3),
+                       ref(clkout)
+mpp48         48       gpio, tclk, dev(burst/last)
+
+* Marvell Armada XP (mv78260 and mv78460 only)
+
+name          pins     functions
+================================================================================
+mpp49         49       gpio, dev(we3)
+mpp50         50       gpio, dev(we2)
+mpp51         51       gpio, dev(ad16)
+mpp52         52       gpio, dev(ad17)
+mpp53         53       gpio, dev(ad18)
+mpp54         54       gpio, dev(ad19)
+mpp55         55       gpio, dev(ad20), vdd(cpu0-pd)
+mpp56         56       gpio, dev(ad21), vdd(cpu1-pd)
+mpp57         57       gpio, dev(ad22), vdd(cpu2-3-pd){1}
+mpp58         58       gpio, dev(ad23)
+mpp59         59       gpio, dev(ad24)
+mpp60         60       gpio, dev(ad25)
+mpp61         61       gpio, dev(ad26)
+mpp62         62       gpio, dev(ad27)
+mpp63         63       gpio, dev(ad28)
+mpp64         64       gpio, dev(ad29)
+mpp65         65       gpio, dev(ad30)
+mpp66         66       gpio, dev(ad31)
+
+Notes:
+* {1} vdd(cpu2-3-pd) only available on mv78460.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,dove-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,dove-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..50ec3512a292
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,dove-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+* Marvell Dove SoC pinctrl driver for mpp
+
+Please refer to marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding
+part and usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "marvell,dove-pinctrl"
+- clocks: (optional) phandle of pdma clock
+
+Available mpp pins/groups and functions:
+Note: brackets (x) are not part of the mpp name for marvell,function and given
+only for more detailed description in this document.
+Note: pmu* also allows for Power Management functions listed below
+
+name          pins     functions
+================================================================================
+mpp0          0        gpio, pmu, uart2(rts), sdio0(cd), lcd0(pwm), pmu*
+mpp1          1        gpio, pmu, uart2(cts), sdio0(wp), lcd1(pwm), pmu*
+mpp2          2        gpio, pmu, uart2(txd), sdio0(buspwr), sata(prsnt),
+                       uart1(rts), pmu*
+mpp3          3        gpio, pmu, uart2(rxd), sdio0(ledctrl), sata(act),
+                       uart1(cts), lcd-spi(cs1), pmu*
+mpp4          4        gpio, pmu, uart3(rts), sdio1(cd), spi1(miso), pmu*
+mpp5          5        gpio, pmu, uart3(cts), sdio1(wp), spi1(cs), pmu*
+mpp6          6        gpio, pmu, uart3(txd), sdio1(buspwr), spi1(mosi), pmu*
+mpp7          7        gpio, pmu, uart3(rxd), sdio1(ledctrl), spi1(sck), pmu*
+mpp8          8        gpio, pmu, watchdog(rstout), pmu*
+mpp9          9        gpio, pmu, pex1(clkreq), pmu*
+mpp10         10       gpio, pmu, ssp(sclk), pmu*
+mpp11         11       gpio, pmu, sata(prsnt), sata-1(act), sdio0(ledctrl),
+                       sdio1(ledctrl), pex0(clkreq), pmu*
+mpp12         12       gpio, pmu, uart2(rts), audio0(extclk), sdio1(cd),
+                       sata(act), pmu*
+mpp13         13       gpio, pmu, uart2(cts), audio1(extclk), sdio1(wp),
+                       ssp(extclk), pmu*
+mpp14         14       gpio, pmu, uart2(txd), sdio1(buspwr), ssp(rxd), pmu*
+mpp15         15       gpio, pmu, uart2(rxd), sdio1(ledctrl), ssp(sfrm), pmu*
+mpp16         16       gpio, uart3(rts), sdio0(cd), ac97(sdi1), lcd-spi(cs1)
+mpp17         17       gpio, uart3(cts), sdio0(wp), ac97(sdi2), twsi(sda),
+                       ac97-1(sysclko)
+mpp18         18       gpio, uart3(txd), sdio0(buspwr), ac97(sdi3), lcd0(pwm)
+mpp19         19       gpio, uart3(rxd), sdio0(ledctrl), twsi(sck)
+mpp20         20       gpio, sdio0(cd), sdio1(cd), spi1(miso), lcd-spi(miso),
+                       ac97(sysclko)
+mpp21         21       gpio, sdio0(wp), sdio1(wp), spi1(cs), lcd-spi(cs0),
+                       uart1(cts), ssp(sfrm)
+mpp22         22       gpio, sdio0(buspwr), sdio1(buspwr), spi1(mosi),
+                       lcd-spi(mosi), uart1(cts), ssp(txd)
+mpp23         23       gpio, sdio0(ledctrl), sdio1(ledctrl), spi1(sck),
+                       lcd-spi(sck), ssp(sclk)
+mpp_camera    24-39    gpio, camera
+mpp_sdio0     40-45    gpio, sdio0
+mpp_sdio1     46-51    gpio, sdio1
+mpp_audio1    52-57    gpio, i2s1/spdifo, i2s1, spdifo, twsi, ssp/spdifo, ssp,
+                       ssp/twsi
+mpp_spi0      58-61    gpio, spi0
+mpp_uart1     62-63    gpio, uart1
+mpp_nand      64-71    gpo, nand
+audio0        -        i2s, ac97
+twsi          -        none, opt1, opt2, opt3
+
+Power Management functions (pmu*):
+pmu-nc               Pin not driven by any PM function
+pmu-low              Pin driven low (0)
+pmu-high             Pin driven high (1)
+pmic(sdi)            Pin is used for PMIC SDI
+cpu-pwr-down         Pin is used for CPU_PWRDWN
+standby-pwr-down     Pin is used for STBY_PWRDWN
+core-pwr-good        Pin is used for CORE_PWR_GOOD (Pins 0-7 only)
+cpu-pwr-good         Pin is used for CPU_PWR_GOOD (Pins 8-15 only)
+bat-fault            Pin is used for BATTERY_FAULT
+ext0-wakeup          Pin is used for EXT0_WU
+ext1-wakeup          Pin is used for EXT0_WU
+ext2-wakeup          Pin is used for EXT0_WU
+pmu-blink            Pin is used for blink function
+
+Notes:
+* group "mpp_audio1" allows the following functions and gpio pins:
+  - gpio          : gpio on pins 52-57
+  - i2s1/spdifo   : audio1 i2s on pins 52-55 and spdifo on 57, no gpios
+  - i2s1          : audio1 i2s on pins 52-55, gpio on pins 56,57
+  - spdifo        : spdifo on pin 57, gpio on pins 52-55
+  - twsi          : twsi on pins 56,57, gpio on pins 52-55
+  - ssp/spdifo    : ssp on pins 52-55, spdifo on pin 57, no gpios
+  - ssp           : ssp on pins 52-55, gpio on pins 56,57
+  - ssp/twsi      : ssp on pins 52-55, twsi on pins 56,57, no gpios
+* group "audio0" internally muxes i2s0 or ac97 controller to the dedicated
+  audio0 pins.
+* group "twsi" internally muxes twsi controller to the dedicated or option pins.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,kirkwood-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,kirkwood-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..95daf6335c37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,kirkwood-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,318 @@
+* Marvell Kirkwood SoC pinctrl driver for mpp
+
+Please refer to marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding
+part and usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "marvell,88f6180-pinctrl",
+              "marvell,88f6190-pinctrl", "marvell,88f6192-pinctrl",
+              "marvell,88f6281-pinctrl", "marvell,88f6282-pinctrl"
+              "marvell,98dx4122-pinctrl"
+
+This driver supports all kirkwood variants, i.e. 88f6180, 88f619x, and 88f628x.
+It also support the 88f6281-based variant in the 98dx412x Bobcat SoCs.
+
+Available mpp pins/groups and functions:
+Note: brackets (x) are not part of the mpp name for marvell,function and given
+only for more detailed description in this document.
+
+* Marvell Kirkwood 88f6180
+
+name          pins     functions
+================================================================================
+mpp0          0        gpio, nand(io2), spi(cs)
+mpp1          1        gpo, nand(io3), spi(mosi)
+mpp2          2        gpo, nand(io4), spi(sck)
+mpp3          3        gpo, nand(io5), spi(miso)
+mpp4          4        gpio, nand(io6), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk)
+mpp5          5        gpo, nand(io7), uart0(txd), ptp(trig)
+mpp6          6        sysrst(out), spi(mosi), ptp(trig)
+mpp7          7        gpo, pex(rsto), spi(cs), ptp(trig)
+mpp8          8        gpio, twsi0(sda), uart0(rts), uart1(rts), ptp(clk),
+                       mii(col)
+mpp9          9        gpio, twsi(sck), uart0(cts), uart1(cts), ptp(evreq),
+                       mii(crs)
+mpp10         10       gpo, spi(sck), uart0(txd), ptp(trig)
+mpp11         11       gpio, spi(miso), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk), ptp-1(evreq),
+                       ptp-2(trig)
+mpp12         12       gpo, sdio(clk)
+mpp13         13       gpio, sdio(cmd), uart1(txd)
+mpp14         14       gpio, sdio(d0), uart1(rxd), mii(col)
+mpp15         15       gpio, sdio(d1), uart0(rts), uart1(txd)
+mpp16         16       gpio, sdio(d2), uart0(cts), uart1(rxd), mii(crs)
+mpp17         17       gpio, sdio(d3)
+mpp18         18       gpo, nand(io0)
+mpp19         19       gpo, nand(io1)
+mpp20         20       gpio, mii(rxerr)
+mpp21         21       gpio, audio(spdifi)
+mpp22         22       gpio, audio(spdifo)
+mpp23         23       gpio, audio(rmclk)
+mpp24         24       gpio, audio(bclk)
+mpp25         25       gpio, audio(sdo)
+mpp26         26       gpio, audio(lrclk)
+mpp27         27       gpio, audio(mclk)
+mpp28         28       gpio, audio(sdi)
+mpp29         29       gpio, audio(extclk)
+
+* Marvell Kirkwood 88f6190
+
+name          pins     functions
+================================================================================
+mpp0          0        gpio, nand(io2), spi(cs)
+mpp1          1        gpo, nand(io3), spi(mosi)
+mpp2          2        gpo, nand(io4), spi(sck)
+mpp3          3        gpo, nand(io5), spi(miso)
+mpp4          4        gpio, nand(io6), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk)
+mpp5          5        gpo, nand(io7), uart0(txd), ptp(trig), sata0(act)
+mpp6          6        sysrst(out), spi(mosi), ptp(trig)
+mpp7          7        gpo, pex(rsto), spi(cs), ptp(trig)
+mpp8          8        gpio, twsi0(sda), uart0(rts), uart1(rts), ptp(clk),
+                       mii(col), mii-1(rxerr)
+mpp9          9        gpio, twsi(sck), uart0(cts), uart1(cts), ptp(evreq),
+                       mii(crs), sata0(prsnt)
+mpp10         10       gpo, spi(sck), uart0(txd), ptp(trig)
+mpp11         11       gpio, spi(miso), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk), ptp-1(evreq),
+                       ptp-2(trig), sata0(act)
+mpp12         12       gpo, sdio(clk)
+mpp13         13       gpio, sdio(cmd), uart1(txd)
+mpp14         14       gpio, sdio(d0), uart1(rxd), mii(col)
+mpp15         15       gpio, sdio(d1), uart0(rts), uart1(txd), sata0(act)
+mpp16         16       gpio, sdio(d2), uart0(cts), uart1(rxd), mii(crs)
+mpp17         17       gpio, sdio(d3), sata0(prsnt)
+mpp18         18       gpo, nand(io0)
+mpp19         19       gpo, nand(io1)
+mpp20         20       gpio, ge1(txd0)
+mpp21         21       gpio, ge1(txd1), sata0(act)
+mpp22         22       gpio, ge1(txd2)
+mpp23         23       gpio, ge1(txd3), sata0(prsnt)
+mpp24         24       gpio, ge1(rxd0)
+mpp25         25       gpio, ge1(rxd1)
+mpp26         26       gpio, ge1(rxd2)
+mpp27         27       gpio, ge1(rxd3)
+mpp28         28       gpio, ge1(col)
+mpp29         29       gpio, ge1(txclk)
+mpp30         30       gpio, ge1(rxclk)
+mpp31         31       gpio, ge1(rxclk)
+mpp32         32       gpio, ge1(txclko)
+mpp33         33       gpo, ge1(txclk)
+mpp34         34       gpio, ge1(txen)
+mpp35         35       gpio, ge1(rxerr), sata0(act), mii(rxerr)
+
+* Marvell Kirkwood 88f6192
+
+name          pins     functions
+================================================================================
+mpp0          0        gpio, nand(io2), spi(cs)
+mpp1          1        gpo, nand(io3), spi(mosi)
+mpp2          2        gpo, nand(io4), spi(sck)
+mpp3          3        gpo, nand(io5), spi(miso)
+mpp4          4        gpio, nand(io6), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk), sata1(act)
+mpp5          5        gpo, nand(io7), uart0(txd), ptp(trig), sata0(act)
+mpp6          6        sysrst(out), spi(mosi), ptp(trig)
+mpp7          7        gpo, pex(rsto), spi(cs), ptp(trig)
+mpp8          8        gpio, twsi0(sda), uart0(rts), uart1(rts), ptp(clk),
+                       mii(col), mii-1(rxerr), sata1(prsnt)
+mpp9          9        gpio, twsi(sck), uart0(cts), uart1(cts), ptp(evreq),
+                       mii(crs), sata0(prsnt)
+mpp10         10       gpo, spi(sck), uart0(txd), ptp(trig), sata1(act)
+mpp11         11       gpio, spi(miso), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk), ptp-1(evreq),
+                       ptp-2(trig), sata0(act)
+mpp12         12       gpo, sdio(clk)
+mpp13         13       gpio, sdio(cmd), uart1(txd)
+mpp14         14       gpio, sdio(d0), uart1(rxd), mii(col), sata1(prsnt)
+mpp15         15       gpio, sdio(d1), uart0(rts), uart1(txd), sata0(act)
+mpp16         16       gpio, sdio(d2), uart0(cts), uart1(rxd), mii(crs),
+                       sata1(act)
+mpp17         17       gpio, sdio(d3), sata0(prsnt)
+mpp18         18       gpo, nand(io0)
+mpp19         19       gpo, nand(io1)
+mpp20         20       gpio, ge1(txd0), ts(mp0), tdm(tx0ql), audio(spdifi),
+                       sata1(act)
+mpp21         21       gpio, ge1(txd1), sata0(act), ts(mp1), tdm(rx0ql),
+                       audio(spdifo)
+mpp22         22       gpio, ge1(txd2), ts(mp2), tdm(tx2ql), audio(rmclk),
+                       sata1(prsnt)
+mpp23         23       gpio, ge1(txd3), sata0(prsnt), ts(mp3), tdm(rx2ql),
+                       audio(bclk)
+mpp24         24       gpio, ge1(rxd0), ts(mp4), tdm(spi-cs0), audio(sdo)
+mpp25         25       gpio, ge1(rxd1), ts(mp5), tdm(spi-sck), audio(lrclk)
+mpp26         26       gpio, ge1(rxd2), ts(mp6), tdm(spi-miso), audio(mclk)
+mpp27         27       gpio, ge1(rxd3), ts(mp7), tdm(spi-mosi), audio(sdi)
+mpp28         28       gpio, ge1(col), ts(mp8), tdm(int), audio(extclk)
+mpp29         29       gpio, ge1(txclk), ts(mp9), tdm(rst)
+mpp30         30       gpio, ge1(rxclk), ts(mp10), tdm(pclk)
+mpp31         31       gpio, ge1(rxclk), ts(mp11), tdm(fs)
+mpp32         32       gpio, ge1(txclko), ts(mp12), tdm(drx)
+mpp33         33       gpo, ge1(txclk), tdm(drx)
+mpp34         34       gpio, ge1(txen), tdm(spi-cs1)
+mpp35         35       gpio, ge1(rxerr), sata0(act), mii(rxerr), tdm(tx0ql)
+
+* Marvell Kirkwood 88f6281
+
+name          pins     functions
+================================================================================
+mpp0          0        gpio, nand(io2), spi(cs)
+mpp1          1        gpo, nand(io3), spi(mosi)
+mpp2          2        gpo, nand(io4), spi(sck)
+mpp3          3        gpo, nand(io5), spi(miso)
+mpp4          4        gpio, nand(io6), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk), sata1(act)
+mpp5          5        gpo, nand(io7), uart0(txd), ptp(trig), sata0(act)
+mpp6          6        sysrst(out), spi(mosi), ptp(trig)
+mpp7          7        gpo, pex(rsto), spi(cs), ptp(trig)
+mpp8          8        gpio, twsi0(sda), uart0(rts), uart1(rts), ptp(clk),
+                       mii(col), mii-1(rxerr), sata1(prsnt)
+mpp9          9        gpio, twsi(sck), uart0(cts), uart1(cts), ptp(evreq),
+                       mii(crs), sata0(prsnt)
+mpp10         10       gpo, spi(sck), uart0(txd), ptp(trig), sata1(act)
+mpp11         11       gpio, spi(miso), uart0(rxd), ptp(clk), ptp-1(evreq),
+                       ptp-2(trig), sata0(act)
+mpp12         12       gpio, sdio(clk)
+mpp13         13       gpio, sdio(cmd), uart1(txd)
+mpp14         14       gpio, sdio(d0), uart1(rxd), mii(col), sata1(prsnt)
+mpp15         15       gpio, sdio(d1), uart0(rts), uart1(txd), sata0(act)
+mpp16         16       gpio, sdio(d2), uart0(cts), uart1(rxd), mii(crs),
+                       sata1(act)
+mpp17         17       gpio, sdio(d3), sata0(prsnt)
+mpp18         18       gpo, nand(io0)
+mpp19         19       gpo, nand(io1)
+mpp20         20       gpio, ge1(txd0), ts(mp0), tdm(tx0ql), audio(spdifi),
+                       sata1(act)
+mpp21         21       gpio, ge1(txd1), sata0(act), ts(mp1), tdm(rx0ql),
+                       audio(spdifo)
+mpp22         22       gpio, ge1(txd2), ts(mp2), tdm(tx2ql), audio(rmclk),
+                       sata1(prsnt)
+mpp23         23       gpio, ge1(txd3), sata0(prsnt), ts(mp3), tdm(rx2ql),
+                       audio(bclk)
+mpp24         24       gpio, ge1(rxd0), ts(mp4), tdm(spi-cs0), audio(sdo)
+mpp25         25       gpio, ge1(rxd1), ts(mp5), tdm(spi-sck), audio(lrclk)
+mpp26         26       gpio, ge1(rxd2), ts(mp6), tdm(spi-miso), audio(mclk)
+mpp27         27       gpio, ge1(rxd3), ts(mp7), tdm(spi-mosi), audio(sdi)
+mpp28         28       gpio, ge1(col), ts(mp8), tdm(int), audio(extclk)
+mpp29         29       gpio, ge1(txclk), ts(mp9), tdm(rst)
+mpp30         30       gpio, ge1(rxclk), ts(mp10), tdm(pclk)
+mpp31         31       gpio, ge1(rxclk), ts(mp11), tdm(fs)
+mpp32         32       gpio, ge1(txclko), ts(mp12), tdm(drx)
+mpp33         33       gpo, ge1(txclk), tdm(drx)
+mpp34         34       gpio, ge1(txen), tdm(spi-cs1), sata1(act)
+mpp35         35       gpio, ge1(rxerr), sata0(act), mii(rxerr), tdm(tx0ql)
+mpp36         36       gpio, ts(mp0), tdm(spi-cs1), audio(spdifi)
+mpp37         37       gpio, ts(mp1), tdm(tx2ql), audio(spdifo)
+mpp38         38       gpio, ts(mp2), tdm(rx2ql), audio(rmclk)
+mpp39         39       gpio, ts(mp3), tdm(spi-cs0), audio(bclk)
+mpp40         40       gpio, ts(mp4), tdm(spi-sck), audio(sdo)
+mpp41         41       gpio, ts(mp5), tdm(spi-miso), audio(lrclk)
+mpp42         42       gpio, ts(mp6), tdm(spi-mosi), audio(mclk)
+mpp43         43       gpio, ts(mp7), tdm(int), audio(sdi)
+mpp44         44       gpio, ts(mp8), tdm(rst), audio(extclk)
+mpp45         45       gpio, ts(mp9), tdm(pclk)
+mpp46         46       gpio, ts(mp10), tdm(fs)
+mpp47         47       gpio, ts(mp11), tdm(drx)
+mpp48         48       gpio, ts(mp12), tdm(dtx)
+mpp49         49       gpio, ts(mp9), tdm(rx0ql), ptp(clk)
+
+* Marvell Kirkwood 88f6282
+
+name          pins     functions
+================================================================================
+mpp0          0        gpio, nand(io2), spi(cs)
+mpp1          1        gpo, nand(io3), spi(mosi)
+mpp2          2        gpo, nand(io4), spi(sck)
+mpp3          3        gpo, nand(io5), spi(miso)
+mpp4          4        gpio, nand(io6), uart0(rxd), sata1(act), lcd(hsync)
+mpp5          5        gpo, nand(io7), uart0(txd), sata0(act), lcd(vsync)
+mpp6          6        sysrst(out), spi(mosi)
+mpp7          7        gpo, spi(cs), lcd(pwm)
+mpp8          8        gpio, twsi0(sda), uart0(rts), uart1(rts), mii(col),
+                       mii-1(rxerr), sata1(prsnt)
+mpp9          9        gpio, twsi(sck), uart0(cts), uart1(cts), mii(crs),
+                       sata0(prsnt)
+mpp10         10       gpo, spi(sck), uart0(txd), sata1(act)
+mpp11         11       gpio, spi(miso), uart0(rxd), sata0(act)
+mpp12         12       gpo, sdio(clk), audio(spdifo), spi(mosi), twsi(sda)
+mpp13         13       gpio, sdio(cmd), uart1(txd), audio(rmclk), lcd(pwm)
+mpp14         14       gpio, sdio(d0), uart1(rxd), mii(col), sata1(prsnt),
+                       audio(spdifi), audio-1(sdi)
+mpp15         15       gpio, sdio(d1), uart0(rts), uart1(txd), sata0(act),
+                       spi(cs)
+mpp16         16       gpio, sdio(d2), uart0(cts), uart1(rxd), mii(crs),
+                       sata1(act), lcd(extclk)
+mpp17         17       gpio, sdio(d3), sata0(prsnt), sata1(act), twsi1(sck)
+mpp18         18       gpo, nand(io0), pex(clkreq)
+mpp19         19       gpo, nand(io1)
+mpp20         20       gpio, ge1(txd0), ts(mp0), tdm(tx0ql), audio(spdifi),
+                       sata1(act), lcd(d0)
+mpp21         21       gpio, ge1(txd1), sata0(act), ts(mp1), tdm(rx0ql),
+                       audio(spdifo), lcd(d1)
+mpp22         22       gpio, ge1(txd2), ts(mp2), tdm(tx2ql), audio(rmclk),
+                       sata1(prsnt), lcd(d2)
+mpp23         23       gpio, ge1(txd3), sata0(prsnt), ts(mp3), tdm(rx2ql),
+                       audio(bclk), lcd(d3)
+mpp24         24       gpio, ge1(rxd0), ts(mp4), tdm(spi-cs0), audio(sdo),
+                       lcd(d4)
+mpp25         25       gpio, ge1(rxd1), ts(mp5), tdm(spi-sck), audio(lrclk),
+                       lcd(d5)
+mpp26         26       gpio, ge1(rxd2), ts(mp6), tdm(spi-miso), audio(mclk),
+                       lcd(d6)
+mpp27         27       gpio, ge1(rxd3), ts(mp7), tdm(spi-mosi), audio(sdi),
+                       lcd(d7)
+mpp28         28       gpio, ge1(col), ts(mp8), tdm(int), audio(extclk),
+                       lcd(d8)
+mpp29         29       gpio, ge1(txclk), ts(mp9), tdm(rst), lcd(d9)
+mpp30         30       gpio, ge1(rxclk), ts(mp10), tdm(pclk), lcd(d10)
+mpp31         31       gpio, ge1(rxclk), ts(mp11), tdm(fs), lcd(d11)
+mpp32         32       gpio, ge1(txclko), ts(mp12), tdm(drx), lcd(d12)
+mpp33         33       gpo, ge1(txclk), tdm(drx), lcd(d13)
+mpp34         34       gpio, ge1(txen), tdm(spi-cs1), sata1(act), lcd(d14)
+mpp35         35       gpio, ge1(rxerr), sata0(act), mii(rxerr), tdm(tx0ql),
+                       lcd(d15)
+mpp36         36       gpio, ts(mp0), tdm(spi-cs1), audio(spdifi), twsi1(sda)
+mpp37         37       gpio, ts(mp1), tdm(tx2ql), audio(spdifo), twsi1(sck)
+mpp38         38       gpio, ts(mp2), tdm(rx2ql), audio(rmclk), lcd(d18)
+mpp39         39       gpio, ts(mp3), tdm(spi-cs0), audio(bclk), lcd(d19)
+mpp40         40       gpio, ts(mp4), tdm(spi-sck), audio(sdo), lcd(d20)
+mpp41         41       gpio, ts(mp5), tdm(spi-miso), audio(lrclk), lcd(d21)
+mpp42         42       gpio, ts(mp6), tdm(spi-mosi), audio(mclk), lcd(d22)
+mpp43         43       gpio, ts(mp7), tdm(int), audio(sdi), lcd(d23)
+mpp44         44       gpio, ts(mp8), tdm(rst), audio(extclk), lcd(clk)
+mpp45         45       gpio, ts(mp9), tdm(pclk), lcd(e)
+mpp46         46       gpio, ts(mp10), tdm(fs), lcd(hsync)
+mpp47         47       gpio, ts(mp11), tdm(drx), lcd(vsync)
+mpp48         48       gpio, ts(mp12), tdm(dtx), lcd(d16)
+mpp49         49       gpo, tdm(rx0ql), pex(clkreq), lcd(d17)
+
+* Marvell Bobcat 98dx4122
+
+name          pins     functions
+================================================================================
+mpp0          0        gpio, nand(io2), spi(cs)
+mpp1          1        gpo, nand(io3), spi(mosi)
+mpp2          2        gpo, nand(io4), spi(sck)
+mpp3          3        gpo, nand(io5), spi(miso)
+mpp4          4        gpio, nand(io6), uart0(rxd)
+mpp5          5        gpo, nand(io7), uart0(txd)
+mpp6          6        sysrst(out), spi(mosi)
+mpp7          7        gpo, pex(rsto), spi(cs)
+mpp8          8        gpio, twsi0(sda), uart0(rts), uart1(rts)
+mpp9          9        gpio, twsi(sck), uart0(cts), uart1(cts)
+mpp10         10       gpo, spi(sck), uart0(txd)
+mpp11         11       gpio, spi(miso), uart0(rxd)
+mpp13         13       gpio, uart1(txd)
+mpp14         14       gpio, uart1(rxd)
+mpp15         15       gpio, uart0(rts)
+mpp16         16       gpio, uart0(cts)
+mpp18         18       gpo, nand(io0)
+mpp19         19       gpo, nand(io1)
+mpp34         34       gpio
+mpp35         35       gpio
+mpp36         36       gpio
+mpp37         37       gpio
+mpp38         38       gpio
+mpp39         39       gpio
+mpp40         40       gpio
+mpp41         41       gpio
+mpp42         42       gpio
+mpp43         43       gpio
+mpp44         44       gpio
+mpp45         45       gpio
+mpp49         49       gpio
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0a26c3aa4e6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/marvell,mvebu-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+* Marvell SoC pinctrl core driver for mpp
+
+The pinctrl driver enables Marvell SoCs to configure the multi-purpose pins
+(mpp) to a specific function. For each SoC family there is a SoC specific
+driver using this core driver.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+A Marvell SoC pin configuration node is a node of a group of pins which can
+be used for a specific device or function. Each node requires one or more
+mpp pins or group of pins and a mpp function common to all pins.
+
+Required properties for pinctrl driver:
+- compatible: "marvell,<soc>-pinctrl"
+  Please refer to each marvell,<soc>-pinctrl.txt binding doc for supported SoCs.
+
+Required properties for pin configuration node:
+- marvell,pins: string array of mpp pins or group of pins to be muxed.
+- marvell,function: string representing a function to mux to for all
+    marvell,pins given in this pin configuration node. The function has to be
+    common for all marvell,pins. Please refer to marvell,<soc>-pinctrl.txt for
+    valid pin/pin group names and available function names for each SoC.
+
+Examples:
+
+uart1: serial@12100 {
+	compatible = "ns16550a";
+	reg = <0x12100 0x100>;
+	reg-shift = <2>;
+	interrupts = <7>;
+
+	pinctrl-0 = <&pmx_uart1_sw>;
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+};
+
+pinctrl: pinctrl@d0200 {
+	compatible = "marvell,dove-pinctrl";
+	reg = <0xd0200 0x20>;
+
+	pmx_uart1_sw: pmx-uart1-sw {
+		marvell,pins = "mpp_uart1";
+		marvell,function = "uart1";
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra114-pinmux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra114-pinmux.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fb70856c5b51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra114-pinmux.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra114 pinmux controller
+
+The Tegra114 pinctrl binding is very similar to the Tegra20 and Tegra30
+pinctrl binding, as described in nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt and
+nvidia,tegra30-pinmux.txt. In fact, this document assumes that binding as
+a baseline, and only documents the differences between the two bindings.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "nvidia,tegra114-pinmux"
+- reg: Should contain the register physical address and length for each of
+  the pad control and mux registers. The first bank of address must be the
+  driver strength pad control register address and second bank address must
+  be pinmux register address.
+
+Tegra114 adds the following optional properties for pin configuration subnodes:
+- nvidia,enable-input: Integer. Enable the pin's input path. 0: no, 1: yes.
+- nvidia,open-drain: Integer. Enable open drain mode. 0: no, 1: yes.
+- nvidia,lock: Integer. Lock the pin configuration against further changes
+    until reset. 0: no, 1: yes.
+- nvidia,io-reset: Integer. Reset the IO path. 0: no, 1: yes.
+- nvidia,rcv-sel: Integer. Select VIL/VIH receivers. 0: normal, 1: high.
+- nvidia,drive-type: Integer. Valid range 0...3.
+
+As with Tegra20 and Terga30, see the Tegra TRM for complete details regarding
+which groups support which functionality.
+
+Valid values for pin and group names are:
+
+  per-pin mux groups:
+
+    These all support nvidia,function, nvidia,tristate, nvidia,pull,
+    nvidia,enable-input, nvidia,lock. Some support nvidia,open-drain,
+    nvidia,io-reset and nvidia,rcv-sel.
+
+    ulpi_data0_po1, ulpi_data1_po2, ulpi_data2_po3, ulpi_data3_po4,
+    ulpi_data4_po5, ulpi_data5_po6, ulpi_data6_po7, ulpi_data7_po0,
+    ulpi_clk_py0, ulpi_dir_py1, ulpi_nxt_py2, ulpi_stp_py3, dap3_fs_pp0,
+    dap3_din_pp1, dap3_dout_pp2, dap3_sclk_pp3, pv0, pv1, sdmmc1_clk_pz0,
+    sdmmc1_cmd_pz1, sdmmc1_dat3_py4, sdmmc1_dat2_py5, sdmmc1_dat1_py6,
+    sdmmc1_dat0_py7, clk2_out_pw5, clk2_req_pcc5, hdmi_int_pn7, ddc_scl_pv4,
+    ddc_sda_pv5, uart2_rxd_pc3, uart2_txd_pc2, uart2_rts_n_pj6,
+    uart2_cts_n_pj5, uart3_txd_pw6, uart3_rxd_pw7, uart3_cts_n_pa1,
+    uart3_rts_n_pc0, pu0, pu1, pu2, pu3, pu4, pu5, pu6, gen1_i2c_sda_pc5,
+    gen1_i2c_scl_pc4, dap4_fs_pp4, dap4_din_pp5, dap4_dout_pp6, dap4_sclk_pp7,
+    clk3_out_pee0, clk3_req_pee1, gmi_wp_n_pc7, gmi_iordy_pi5, gmi_wait_pi7,
+    gmi_adv_n_pk0, gmi_clk_pk1, gmi_cs0_n_pj0, gmi_cs1_n_pj2, gmi_cs2_n_pk3,
+    gmi_cs3_n_pk4, gmi_cs4_n_pk2, gmi_cs6_n_pi3, gmi_cs7_n_pi6, gmi_ad0_pg0,
+    gmi_ad1_pg1, gmi_ad2_pg2, gmi_ad3_pg3, gmi_ad4_pg4, gmi_ad5_pg5,
+    gmi_ad6_pg6, gmi_ad7_pg7, gmi_ad8_ph0, gmi_ad9_ph1, gmi_ad10_ph2,
+    gmi_ad11_ph3, gmi_ad12_ph4, gmi_ad13_ph5, gmi_ad14_ph6, gmi_ad15_ph7,
+    gmi_a16_pj7, gmi_a17_pb0, gmi_a18_pb1, gmi_a19_pk7, gmi_wr_n_pi0,
+    gmi_oe_n_pi1, gmi_dqs_p_pj3, gmi_rst_n_pi4, gen2_i2c_scl_pt5,
+    gen2_i2c_sda_pt6, sdmmc4_clk_pcc4, sdmmc4_cmd_pt7, sdmmc4_dat0_paa0,
+    sdmmc4_dat1_paa1, sdmmc4_dat2_paa2, sdmmc4_dat3_paa3, sdmmc4_dat4_paa4,
+    sdmmc4_dat5_paa5, sdmmc4_dat6_paa6, sdmmc4_dat7_paa7, cam_mclk_pcc0,
+    pcc1, pbb0, cam_i2c_scl_pbb1, cam_i2c_sda_pbb2, pbb3, pbb4, pbb5, pbb6,
+    pbb7, pcc2, pwr_i2c_scl_pz6, pwr_i2c_sda_pz7, kb_row0_pr0, kb_row1_pr1,
+    kb_row2_pr2, kb_row3_pr3, kb_row4_pr4, kb_row5_pr5, kb_row6_pr6,
+    kb_row7_pr7, kb_row8_ps0, kb_row9_ps1, kb_row10_ps2, kb_col0_pq0,
+    kb_col1_pq1, kb_col2_pq2, kb_col3_pq3, kb_col4_pq4, kb_col5_pq5,
+    kb_col6_pq6, kb_col7_pq7, clk_32k_out_pa0, sys_clk_req_pz5, core_pwr_req,
+    cpu_pwr_req, pwr_int_n, owr, dap1_fs_pn0, dap1_din_pn1, dap1_dout_pn2,
+    dap1_sclk_pn3, clk1_req_pee2, clk1_out_pw4, spdif_in_pk6, spdif_out_pk5,
+    dap2_fs_pa2, dap2_din_pa4, dap2_dout_pa5, dap2_sclk_pa3, dvfs_pwm_px0,
+    gpio_x1_aud_px1, gpio_x3_aud_px3, dvfs_clk_px2, gpio_x4_aud_px4,
+    gpio_x5_aud_px5, gpio_x6_aud_px6, gpio_x7_aud_px7, sdmmc3_clk_pa6,
+    sdmmc3_cmd_pa7, sdmmc3_dat0_pb7, sdmmc3_dat1_pb6, sdmmc3_dat2_pb5,
+    sdmmc3_dat3_pb4, hdmi_cec_pee3, sdmmc1_wp_n_pv3, sdmmc3_cd_n_pv2,
+    gpio_w2_aud_pw2, gpio_w3_aud_pw3, usb_vbus_en0_pn4, usb_vbus_en1_pn5,
+    sdmmc3_clk_lb_in_pee5, sdmmc3_clk_lb_out_pee4, reset_out_n.
+
+  drive groups:
+
+    These all support nvidia,pull-down-strength, nvidia,pull-up-strength,
+    nvidia,slew-rate-rising, nvidia,slew-rate-falling. Most but not all
+    support nvidia,high-speed-mode, nvidia,schmitt, nvidia,low-power-mode
+    and nvidia,drive-type.
+
+    ao1, ao2, at1, at2, at3, at4, at5, cdev1, cdev2, dap1, dap2, dap3, dap4,
+    dbg, sdio3, spi, uaa, uab, uart2, uart3, sdio1, ddc, gma, gme, gmf, gmg,
+    gmh, owr, uda.
+
+Valid values for nvidia,functions are:
+
+  blink, cec, cldvfs, clk12, cpu, dap, dap1, dap2, dev3, displaya,
+  displaya_alt, displayb, dtv, emc_dll, extperiph1, extperiph2,
+  extperiph3, gmi, gmi_alt, hda, hsi, i2c1, i2c2, i2c3, i2c4, i2cpwr,
+  i2s0, i2s1, i2s2, i2s3, i2s4, irda, kbc, nand, nand_alt, owr, pmi,
+  pwm0, pwm1, pwm2, pwm3, pwron, reset_out_n, rsvd1, rsvd2, rsvd3,
+  rsvd4, sdmmc1, sdmmc2, sdmmc3, sdmmc4, soc, spdif, spi1, spi2, spi3,
+  spi4, spi5, spi6, sysclk, trace, uarta, uartb, uartc, uartd, ulpi,
+  usb, vgp1, vgp2, vgp3, vgp4, vgp5, vgp6, vi, vi_alt1, vi_alt3
+
+Example:
+
+	pinmux: pinmux {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra114-pinmux";
+		reg = <0x70000868 0x148		/* Pad control registers */
+		       0x70003000 0x40c>;	/* PinMux registers */
+	};
+
+Example board file extract:
+
+	pinctrl {
+		sdmmc4_default: pinmux {
+			sdmmc4_clk_pcc4 {
+				nvidia,pins = "sdmmc4_clk_pcc4",
+				nvidia,function = "sdmmc4";
+				nvidia,pull = <0>;
+				nvidia,tristate = <0>;
+			};
+			sdmmc4_dat0_paa0 {
+				nvidia,pins = "sdmmc4_dat0_paa0",
+						"sdmmc4_dat1_paa1",
+						"sdmmc4_dat2_paa2",
+						"sdmmc4_dat3_paa3",
+						"sdmmc4_dat4_paa4",
+						"sdmmc4_dat5_paa5",
+						"sdmmc4_dat6_paa6",
+						"sdmmc4_dat7_paa7";
+				nvidia,function = "sdmmc4";
+				nvidia,pull = <2>;
+				nvidia,tristate = <0>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+	sdhci@78000400 {
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&sdmmc4_default>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..61e73cde9ae9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra20 pinmux controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "nvidia,tegra20-pinmux"
+- reg: Should contain the register physical address and length for each of
+  the tri-state, mux, pull-up/down, and pad control register sets.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+Tegra's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of
+subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a
+pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the
+mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration
+parameters, such as pull-up, tristate, drive strength, etc.
+
+The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be enumerated
+and processed purely based on their content.
+
+Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed. In
+other words, a subnode that lists a mux function but no pin configuration
+parameters implies no information about any pin configuration parameters.
+Similarly, a pin subnode that describes a pullup parameter implies no
+information about e.g. the mux function or tristate parameter. For this
+reason, even seemingly boolean values are actually tristates in this binding:
+unspecified, off, or on. Unspecified is represented as an absent property,
+and off/on are represented as integer values 0 and 1.
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- nvidia,pins : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a pin or
+    group. Valid values for these names are listed below.
+
+Optional subnode-properties:
+- nvidia,function: A string containing the name of the function to mux to the
+  pin or group. Valid values for function names are listed below. See the Tegra
+  TRM to determine which are valid for each pin or group.
+- nvidia,pull: Integer, representing the pull-down/up to apply to the pin.
+    0: none, 1: down, 2: up.
+- nvidia,tristate: Integer.
+    0: drive, 1: tristate.
+- nvidia,high-speed-mode: Integer. Enable high speed mode the pins.
+    0: no, 1: yes.
+- nvidia,schmitt: Integer. Enables Schmitt Trigger on the input.
+    0: no, 1: yes.
+- nvidia,low-power-mode: Integer. Valid values 0-3. 0 is least power, 3 is
+    most power. Controls the drive power or current. See "Low Power Mode"
+    or "LPMD1" and "LPMD0" in the Tegra TRM.
+- nvidia,pull-down-strength: Integer. Controls drive strength. 0 is weakest.
+    The range of valid values depends on the pingroup. See "CAL_DRVDN" in the
+    Tegra TRM.
+- nvidia,pull-up-strength: Integer. Controls drive strength. 0 is weakest.
+    The range of valid values depends on the pingroup. See "CAL_DRVUP" in the
+    Tegra TRM.
+- nvidia,slew-rate-rising: Integer. Controls rising signal slew rate. 0 is
+    fastest. The range of valid values depends on the pingroup. See
+    "DRVDN_SLWR" in the Tegra TRM.
+- nvidia,slew-rate-falling: Integer. Controls falling signal slew rate. 0 is
+    fastest. The range of valid values depends on the pingroup. See
+    "DRVUP_SLWF" in the Tegra TRM.
+
+Note that many of these properties are only valid for certain specific pins
+or groups. See the Tegra TRM and various pinmux spreadsheets for complete
+details regarding which groups support which functionality. The Linux pinctrl
+driver may also be a useful reference, since it consolidates, disambiguates,
+and corrects data from all those sources.
+
+Valid values for pin and group names are:
+
+  mux groups:
+
+    These all support nvidia,function, nvidia,tristate, and many support
+    nvidia,pull.
+
+    ata, atb, atc, atd, ate, cdev1, cdev2, crtp, csus, dap1, dap2, dap3, dap4,
+    ddc, dta, dtb, dtc, dtd, dte, dtf, gma, gmb, gmc, gmd, gme, gpu, gpu7,
+    gpv, hdint, i2cp, irrx, irtx, kbca, kbcb, kbcc, kbcd, kbce, kbcf, lcsn,
+    ld0, ld1, ld2, ld3, ld4, ld5, ld6, ld7, ld8, ld9, ld10, ld11, ld12, ld13,
+    ld14, ld15, ld16, ld17, ldc, ldi, lhp0, lhp1, lhp2, lhs, lm0, lm1, lpp,
+    lpw0, lpw1, lpw2, lsc0, lsc1, lsck, lsda, lsdi, lspi, lvp0, lvp1, lvs,
+    owc, pmc, pta, rm, sdb, sdc, sdd, sdio1, slxa, slxc, slxd, slxk, spdi,
+    spdo, spia, spib, spic, spid, spie, spif, spig, spih, uaa, uab, uac, uad,
+    uca, ucb, uda.
+
+  tristate groups:
+
+    These only support nvidia,pull.
+
+    ck32, ddrc, pmca, pmcb, pmcc, pmcd, pmce, xm2c, xm2d, ls, lc, ld17_0,
+    ld19_18, ld21_20, ld23_22.
+
+  drive groups:
+
+    With some exceptions, these support nvidia,high-speed-mode,
+    nvidia,schmitt, nvidia,low-power-mode, nvidia,pull-down-strength,
+    nvidia,pull-up-strength, nvidia,slew-rate-rising, nvidia,slew-rate-falling.
+
+    drive_ao1, drive_ao2, drive_at1, drive_at2, drive_cdev1, drive_cdev2,
+    drive_csus, drive_dap1, drive_dap2, drive_dap3, drive_dap4, drive_dbg,
+    drive_lcd1, drive_lcd2, drive_sdmmc2, drive_sdmmc3, drive_spi, drive_uaa,
+    drive_uab, drive_uart2, drive_uart3, drive_vi1, drive_vi2, drive_xm2a,
+    drive_xm2c, drive_xm2d, drive_xm2clk, drive_sdio1, drive_crt, drive_ddc,
+    drive_gma, drive_gmb, drive_gmc, drive_gmd, drive_gme, drive_owr,
+    drive_uda.
+
+Valid values for nvidia,functions are:
+
+  ahb_clk, apb_clk, audio_sync, crt, dap1, dap2, dap3, dap4, dap5,
+  displaya, displayb, emc_test0_dll, emc_test1_dll, gmi, gmi_int,
+  hdmi, i2cp, i2c1, i2c2, i2c3, ide, irda, kbc, mio, mipi_hs, nand,
+  osc, owr, pcie, plla_out, pllc_out1, pllm_out1, pllp_out2, pllp_out3,
+  pllp_out4, pwm, pwr_intr, pwr_on, rsvd1, rsvd2, rsvd3, rsvd4, rtck,
+  sdio1, sdio2, sdio3, sdio4, sflash, spdif, spi1, spi2, spi2_alt,
+  spi3, spi4, trace, twc, uarta, uartb, uartc, uartd, uarte, ulpi,
+  vi, vi_sensor_clk, xio
+
+Example:
+
+	pinctrl@70000000 {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-pinmux";
+		reg = < 0x70000014 0x10    /* Tri-state registers */
+			0x70000080 0x20    /* Mux registers */
+			0x700000a0 0x14    /* Pull-up/down registers */
+			0x70000868 0xa8 >; /* Pad control registers */
+	};
+
+Example board file extract:
+
+	pinctrl@70000000 {
+		sdio4_default: sdio4_default {
+			atb {
+				nvidia,pins = "atb", "gma", "gme";
+				nvidia,function = "sdio4";
+				nvidia,pull = <0>;
+				nvidia,tristate = <0>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+	sdhci@c8000600 {
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&sdio4_default>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra30-pinmux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra30-pinmux.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0e6354c11e6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra30-pinmux.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra30 pinmux controller
+
+The Tegra30 pinctrl binding is very similar to the Tegra20 pinctrl binding,
+as described in nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt. In fact, this document assumes
+that binding as a baseline, and only documents the differences between the
+two bindings.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "nvidia,tegra30-pinmux"
+- reg: Should contain the register physical address and length for each of
+  the pad control and mux registers.
+
+Tegra30 adds the following optional properties for pin configuration subnodes:
+- nvidia,enable-input: Integer. Enable the pin's input path. 0: no, 1: yes.
+- nvidia,open-drain: Integer. Enable open drain mode. 0: no, 1: yes.
+- nvidia,lock: Integer. Lock the pin configuration against further changes
+    until reset. 0: no, 1: yes.
+- nvidia,io-reset: Integer. Reset the IO path. 0: no, 1: yes.
+
+As with Tegra20, see the Tegra TRM for complete details regarding which groups
+support which functionality.
+
+Valid values for pin and group names are:
+
+  per-pin mux groups:
+
+    These all support nvidia,function, nvidia,tristate, nvidia,pull,
+    nvidia,enable-input, nvidia,lock. Some support nvidia,open-drain,
+    nvidia,io-reset.
+
+    clk_32k_out_pa0, uart3_cts_n_pa1, dap2_fs_pa2, dap2_sclk_pa3,
+    dap2_din_pa4, dap2_dout_pa5, sdmmc3_clk_pa6, sdmmc3_cmd_pa7, gmi_a17_pb0,
+    gmi_a18_pb1, lcd_pwr0_pb2, lcd_pclk_pb3, sdmmc3_dat3_pb4, sdmmc3_dat2_pb5,
+    sdmmc3_dat1_pb6, sdmmc3_dat0_pb7, uart3_rts_n_pc0, lcd_pwr1_pc1,
+    uart2_txd_pc2, uart2_rxd_pc3, gen1_i2c_scl_pc4, gen1_i2c_sda_pc5,
+    lcd_pwr2_pc6, gmi_wp_n_pc7, sdmmc3_dat5_pd0, sdmmc3_dat4_pd1, lcd_dc1_pd2,
+    sdmmc3_dat6_pd3, sdmmc3_dat7_pd4, vi_d1_pd5, vi_vsync_pd6, vi_hsync_pd7,
+    lcd_d0_pe0, lcd_d1_pe1, lcd_d2_pe2, lcd_d3_pe3, lcd_d4_pe4, lcd_d5_pe5,
+    lcd_d6_pe6, lcd_d7_pe7, lcd_d8_pf0, lcd_d9_pf1, lcd_d10_pf2, lcd_d11_pf3,
+    lcd_d12_pf4, lcd_d13_pf5, lcd_d14_pf6, lcd_d15_pf7, gmi_ad0_pg0,
+    gmi_ad1_pg1, gmi_ad2_pg2, gmi_ad3_pg3, gmi_ad4_pg4, gmi_ad5_pg5,
+    gmi_ad6_pg6, gmi_ad7_pg7, gmi_ad8_ph0, gmi_ad9_ph1, gmi_ad10_ph2,
+    gmi_ad11_ph3, gmi_ad12_ph4, gmi_ad13_ph5, gmi_ad14_ph6, gmi_ad15_ph7,
+    gmi_wr_n_pi0, gmi_oe_n_pi1, gmi_dqs_pi2, gmi_cs6_n_pi3, gmi_rst_n_pi4,
+    gmi_iordy_pi5, gmi_cs7_n_pi6, gmi_wait_pi7, gmi_cs0_n_pj0, lcd_de_pj1,
+    gmi_cs1_n_pj2, lcd_hsync_pj3, lcd_vsync_pj4, uart2_cts_n_pj5,
+    uart2_rts_n_pj6, gmi_a16_pj7, gmi_adv_n_pk0, gmi_clk_pk1, gmi_cs4_n_pk2,
+    gmi_cs2_n_pk3, gmi_cs3_n_pk4, spdif_out_pk5, spdif_in_pk6, gmi_a19_pk7,
+    vi_d2_pl0, vi_d3_pl1, vi_d4_pl2, vi_d5_pl3, vi_d6_pl4, vi_d7_pl5,
+    vi_d8_pl6, vi_d9_pl7, lcd_d16_pm0, lcd_d17_pm1, lcd_d18_pm2, lcd_d19_pm3,
+    lcd_d20_pm4, lcd_d21_pm5, lcd_d22_pm6, lcd_d23_pm7, dap1_fs_pn0,
+    dap1_din_pn1, dap1_dout_pn2, dap1_sclk_pn3, lcd_cs0_n_pn4, lcd_sdout_pn5,
+    lcd_dc0_pn6, hdmi_int_pn7, ulpi_data7_po0, ulpi_data0_po1, ulpi_data1_po2,
+    ulpi_data2_po3, ulpi_data3_po4, ulpi_data4_po5, ulpi_data5_po6,
+    ulpi_data6_po7, dap3_fs_pp0, dap3_din_pp1, dap3_dout_pp2, dap3_sclk_pp3,
+    dap4_fs_pp4, dap4_din_pp5, dap4_dout_pp6, dap4_sclk_pp7, kb_col0_pq0,
+    kb_col1_pq1, kb_col2_pq2, kb_col3_pq3, kb_col4_pq4, kb_col5_pq5,
+    kb_col6_pq6, kb_col7_pq7, kb_row0_pr0, kb_row1_pr1, kb_row2_pr2,
+    kb_row3_pr3, kb_row4_pr4, kb_row5_pr5, kb_row6_pr6, kb_row7_pr7,
+    kb_row8_ps0, kb_row9_ps1, kb_row10_ps2, kb_row11_ps3, kb_row12_ps4,
+    kb_row13_ps5, kb_row14_ps6, kb_row15_ps7, vi_pclk_pt0, vi_mclk_pt1,
+    vi_d10_pt2, vi_d11_pt3, vi_d0_pt4, gen2_i2c_scl_pt5, gen2_i2c_sda_pt6,
+    sdmmc4_cmd_pt7, pu0, pu1, pu2, pu3, pu4, pu5, pu6, jtag_rtck_pu7, pv0,
+    pv1, pv2, pv3, ddc_scl_pv4, ddc_sda_pv5, crt_hsync_pv6, crt_vsync_pv7,
+    lcd_cs1_n_pw0, lcd_m1_pw1, spi2_cs1_n_pw2, spi2_cs2_n_pw3, clk1_out_pw4,
+    clk2_out_pw5, uart3_txd_pw6, uart3_rxd_pw7, spi2_mosi_px0, spi2_miso_px1,
+    spi2_sck_px2, spi2_cs0_n_px3, spi1_mosi_px4, spi1_sck_px5, spi1_cs0_n_px6,
+    spi1_miso_px7, ulpi_clk_py0, ulpi_dir_py1, ulpi_nxt_py2, ulpi_stp_py3,
+    sdmmc1_dat3_py4, sdmmc1_dat2_py5, sdmmc1_dat1_py6, sdmmc1_dat0_py7,
+    sdmmc1_clk_pz0, sdmmc1_cmd_pz1, lcd_sdin_pz2, lcd_wr_n_pz3, lcd_sck_pz4,
+    sys_clk_req_pz5, pwr_i2c_scl_pz6, pwr_i2c_sda_pz7, sdmmc4_dat0_paa0,
+    sdmmc4_dat1_paa1, sdmmc4_dat2_paa2, sdmmc4_dat3_paa3, sdmmc4_dat4_paa4,
+    sdmmc4_dat5_paa5, sdmmc4_dat6_paa6, sdmmc4_dat7_paa7, pbb0,
+    cam_i2c_scl_pbb1, cam_i2c_sda_pbb2, pbb3, pbb4, pbb5, pbb6, pbb7,
+    cam_mclk_pcc0, pcc1, pcc2, sdmmc4_rst_n_pcc3, sdmmc4_clk_pcc4,
+    clk2_req_pcc5, pex_l2_rst_n_pcc6, pex_l2_clkreq_n_pcc7,
+    pex_l0_prsnt_n_pdd0, pex_l0_rst_n_pdd1, pex_l0_clkreq_n_pdd2,
+    pex_wake_n_pdd3, pex_l1_prsnt_n_pdd4, pex_l1_rst_n_pdd5,
+    pex_l1_clkreq_n_pdd6, pex_l2_prsnt_n_pdd7, clk3_out_pee0, clk3_req_pee1,
+    clk1_req_pee2, hdmi_cec_pee3, clk_32k_in, core_pwr_req, cpu_pwr_req, owr,
+    pwr_int_n.
+
+  drive groups:
+
+    These all support nvidia,pull-down-strength, nvidia,pull-up-strength,
+    nvidia,slew-rate-rising, nvidia,slew-rate-falling. Most but not all
+    support nvidia,high-speed-mode, nvidia,schmitt, nvidia,low-power-mode.
+
+    ao1, ao2, at1, at2, at3, at4, at5, cdev1, cdev2, cec, crt, csus, dap1,
+    dap2, dap3, dap4, dbg, ddc, dev3, gma, gmb, gmc, gmd, gme, gmf, gmg,
+    gmh, gpv, lcd1, lcd2, owr, sdio1, sdio2, sdio3, spi, uaa, uab, uart2,
+    uart3, uda, vi1.
+
+Valid values for nvidia,functions are:
+
+  blink, cec, clk_12m_out, clk_32k_in, core_pwr_req, cpu_pwr_req, crt,
+  dap, ddr, dev3, displaya, displayb, dtv, extperiph1, extperiph2,
+  extperiph3, gmi, gmi_alt, hda, hdcp, hdmi, hsi, i2c1, i2c2, i2c3,
+  i2c4, i2cpwr, i2s0, i2s1, i2s2, i2s3, i2s4, invalid, kbc, mio, nand,
+  nand_alt, owr, pcie, pwm0, pwm1, pwm2, pwm3, pwr_int_n, rsvd1, rsvd2,
+  rsvd3, rsvd4, rtck, sata, sdmmc1, sdmmc2, sdmmc3, sdmmc4, spdif, spi1,
+  spi2, spi2_alt, spi3, spi4, spi5, spi6, sysclk, test, trace, uarta,
+  uartb, uartc, uartd, uarte, ulpi, vgp1, vgp2, vgp3, vgp4, vgp5, vgp6,
+  vi, vi_alt1, vi_alt2, vi_alt3
+
+Example:
+
+	pinctrl@70000000 {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra30-pinmux";
+		reg = < 0x70000868 0xd0     /* Pad control registers */
+			0x70003000 0x3e0 >; /* Mux registers */
+	};
+
+Example board file extract:
+
+	pinctrl@70000000 {
+		sdmmc4_default: pinmux {
+			sdmmc4_clk_pcc4 {
+				nvidia,pins =	"sdmmc4_clk_pcc4",
+						"sdmmc4_rst_n_pcc3";
+				nvidia,function = "sdmmc4";
+				nvidia,pull = <0>;
+				nvidia,tristate = <0>;
+			};
+			sdmmc4_dat0_paa0 {
+				nvidia,pins =	"sdmmc4_dat0_paa0",
+						"sdmmc4_dat1_paa1",
+						"sdmmc4_dat2_paa2",
+						"sdmmc4_dat3_paa3",
+						"sdmmc4_dat4_paa4",
+						"sdmmc4_dat5_paa5",
+						"sdmmc4_dat6_paa6",
+						"sdmmc4_dat7_paa7";
+				nvidia,function = "sdmmc4";
+				nvidia,pull = <2>;
+				nvidia,tristate = <0>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+	sdhci@78000400 {
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&sdmmc4_default>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1958ca9f9e5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+== Introduction ==
+
+Hardware modules that control pin multiplexing or configuration parameters
+such as pull-up/down, tri-state, drive-strength etc are designated as pin
+controllers. Each pin controller must be represented as a node in device tree,
+just like any other hardware module.
+
+Hardware modules whose signals are affected by pin configuration are
+designated client devices. Again, each client device must be represented as a
+node in device tree, just like any other hardware module.
+
+For a client device to operate correctly, certain pin controllers must
+set up certain specific pin configurations. Some client devices need a
+single static pin configuration, e.g. set up during initialization. Others
+need to reconfigure pins at run-time, for example to tri-state pins when the
+device is inactive. Hence, each client device can define a set of named
+states. The number and names of those states is defined by the client device's
+own binding.
+
+The common pinctrl bindings defined in this file provide an infrastructure
+for client device device tree nodes to map those state names to the pin
+configuration used by those states.
+
+Note that pin controllers themselves may also be client devices of themselves.
+For example, a pin controller may set up its own "active" state when the
+driver loads. This would allow representing a board's static pin configuration
+in a single place, rather than splitting it across multiple client device
+nodes. The decision to do this or not somewhat rests with the author of
+individual board device tree files, and any requirements imposed by the
+bindings for the individual client devices in use by that board, i.e. whether
+they require certain specific named states for dynamic pin configuration.
+
+== Pinctrl client devices ==
+
+For each client device individually, every pin state is assigned an integer
+ID. These numbers start at 0, and are contiguous. For each state ID, a unique
+property exists to define the pin configuration. Each state may also be
+assigned a name. When names are used, another property exists to map from
+those names to the integer IDs.
+
+Each client device's own binding determines the set of states the must be
+defined in its device tree node, and whether to define the set of state
+IDs that must be provided, or whether to define the set of state names that
+must be provided.
+
+Required properties:
+pinctrl-0:	List of phandles, each pointing at a pin configuration
+		node. These referenced pin configuration nodes must be child
+		nodes of the pin controller that they configure. Multiple
+		entries may exist in this list so that multiple pin
+		controllers may be configured, or so that a state may be built
+		from multiple nodes for a single pin controller, each
+		contributing part of the overall configuration. See the next
+		section of this document for details of the format of these
+		pin configuration nodes.
+
+		In some cases, it may be useful to define a state, but for it
+		to be empty. This may be required when a common IP block is
+		used in an SoC either without a pin controller, or where the
+		pin controller does not affect the HW module in question. If
+		the binding for that IP block requires certain pin states to
+		exist, they must still be defined, but may be left empty.
+
+Optional properties:
+pinctrl-1:	List of phandles, each pointing at a pin configuration
+		node within a pin controller.
+...
+pinctrl-n:	List of phandles, each pointing at a pin configuration
+		node within a pin controller.
+pinctrl-names:	The list of names to assign states. List entry 0 defines the
+		name for integer state ID 0, list entry 1 for state ID 1, and
+		so on.
+
+For example:
+
+	/* For a client device requiring named states */
+	device {
+		pinctrl-names = "active", "idle";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&state_0_node_a>;
+		pinctrl-1 = <&state_1_node_a &state_1_node_b>;
+	};
+
+	/* For the same device if using state IDs */
+	device {
+		pinctrl-0 = <&state_0_node_a>;
+		pinctrl-1 = <&state_1_node_a &state_1_node_b>;
+	};
+
+	/*
+	 * For an IP block whose binding supports pin configuration,
+	 * but in use on an SoC that doesn't have any pin control hardware
+	 */
+	device {
+		pinctrl-names = "active", "idle";
+		pinctrl-0 = <>;
+		pinctrl-1 = <>;
+	};
+
+== Pin controller devices ==
+
+Pin controller devices should contain the pin configuration nodes that client
+devices reference.
+
+For example:
+
+	pincontroller {
+		... /* Standard DT properties for the device itself elided */
+
+		state_0_node_a {
+			...
+		};
+		state_1_node_a {
+			...
+		};
+		state_1_node_b {
+			...
+		};
+	}
+
+The contents of each of those pin configuration child nodes is defined
+entirely by the binding for the individual pin controller device. There
+exists no common standard for this content.
+
+The pin configuration nodes need not be direct children of the pin controller
+device; they may be grandchildren, for example. Whether this is legal, and
+whether there is any interaction between the child and intermediate parent
+nodes, is again defined entirely by the binding for the individual pin
+controller device.
+
+== Generic pin configuration node content ==
+
+Many data items that are represented in a pin configuration node are common
+and generic. Pin control bindings should use the properties defined below
+where they are applicable; not all of these properties are relevant or useful
+for all hardware or binding structures. Each individual binding document
+should state which of these generic properties, if any, are used, and the
+structure of the DT nodes that contain these properties.
+
+Supported generic properties are:
+
+pins			- the list of pins that properties in the node
+			  apply to
+function		- the mux function to select
+bias-disable		- disable any pin bias
+bias-high-impedance	- high impedance mode ("third-state", "floating")
+bias-bus-hold		- latch weakly
+bias-pull-up		- pull up the pin
+bias-pull-down		- pull down the pin
+bias-pull-pin-default	- use pin-default pull state
+drive-push-pull		- drive actively high and low
+drive-open-drain	- drive with open drain
+drive-open-source	- drive with open source
+drive-strength		- sink or source at most X mA
+input-schmitt-enable	- enable schmitt-trigger mode
+input-schmitt-disable	- disable schmitt-trigger mode
+input-debounce		- debounce mode with debound time X
+low-power-enable	- enable low power mode
+low-power-disable	- disable low power mode
+output-low		- set the pin to output mode with low level
+output-high		- set the pin to output mode with high level
+
+Some of the generic properties take arguments. For those that do, the
+arguments are described below.
+
+- pins takes a list of pin names or IDs as a required argument. The specific
+  binding for the hardware defines:
+  - Whether the entries are integers or strings, and their meaning.
+
+- function takes a list of function names/IDs as a required argument. The
+  specific binding for the hardware defines:
+  - Whether the entries are integers or strings, and their meaning.
+  - Whether only a single entry is allowed (which is applied to all entries
+    in the pins property), or whether there may alternatively be one entry per
+    entry in the pins property, in which case the list lengths must match, and
+    for each list index i, the function at list index i is applied to the pin
+    at list index i.
+
+- bias-pull-up, -down and -pin-default take as optional argument on hardware
+  supporting it the pull strength in Ohm. bias-disable will disable the pull.
+
+- drive-strength takes as argument the target strength in mA.
+
+- input-debounce takes the debounce time in usec as argument
+  or 0 to disable debouncing
+
+More in-depth documentation on these parameters can be found in
+<include/linux/pinctrl/pinconfig-generic.h>
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-palmas.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-palmas.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..734d9b04d533
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-palmas.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+Palmas Pincontrol bindings
+
+The pins of Palmas device can be set on different option and provides
+the configuration for Pull UP/DOWN, open drain etc.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: It must be one of following:
+  - "ti,palmas-pinctrl" for Palma series of the pincontrol.
+  - "ti,tps65913-pinctrl" for Palma series device TPS65913.
+  - "ti,tps80036-pinctrl" for Palma series device TPS80036.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+Palmas's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of
+subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a
+list of pins. This configuration can include the mux function to select on
+those pin(s), and various pin configuration parameters, such as pull-up,
+open drain.
+
+The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be enumerated
+and processed purely based on their content.
+
+Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed. In
+other words, a subnode that lists a mux function but no pin configuration
+parameters implies no information about any pin configuration parameters.
+Similarly, a pin subnode that describes a pullup parameter implies no
+information about e.g. the mux function.
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,palmas-enable-dvfs1: Enable DVFS1. Configure pins for DVFS1 mode.
+	Selection primary or secondary function associated to I2C2_SCL_SCE,
+	I2C2_SDA_SDO pin/pad for DVFS1 interface
+- ti,palmas-enable-dvfs2: Enable DVFS2. Configure pins for DVFS2 mode.
+	Selection primary or secondary function associated to GPADC_START
+	and SYSEN2 pin/pad for DVFS2 interface
+
+This binding uses the following generic properties as defined in
+pinctrl-bindings.txt:
+
+Required: pins
+Options: function, bias-disable, bias-pull-up, bias-pull-down,
+	 bias-pin-default, drive-open-drain.
+
+Note that many of these properties are only valid for certain specific pins.
+See the Palmas device datasheet for complete details regarding which pins
+support which functionality.
+
+Valid values for pin names are:
+	gpio0, gpio1, gpio2, gpio3, gpio4, gpio5, gpio6, gpio7, gpio8, gpio9,
+	gpio10, gpio11, gpio12, gpio13, gpio14, gpio15, vac, powergood,
+	nreswarm, pwrdown, gpadc_start, reset_in, nsleep, enable1, enable2,
+	int.
+
+Valid value of function names are:
+	gpio, led, pwm, regen, sysen, clk32kgaudio, id, vbus_det, chrg_det,
+	vac, vacok, powergood, usb_psel, msecure, pwrhold, int, nreswarm,
+	simrsto, simrsti, low_vbat, wireless_chrg1, rcm, pwrdown, gpadc_start,
+	reset_in, nsleep, enable.
+
+There are 4 special functions: opt0, opt1, opt2 and opt3. If any of these
+functions is selected then directly pins register will be written with 0, 1, 2
+or 3 respectively if it is valid for that pins or list of pins.
+
+Example:
+	palmas: tps65913 {
+		....
+		pinctrl {
+			compatible = "ti,tps65913-pinctrl";
+			ti,palmas-enable-dvfs1;
+			pinctrl-names = "default";
+			pinctrl-0 = <&palmas_pins_state>;
+
+			palmas_pins_state: pinmux {
+				gpio0 {
+					pins = "gpio0";
+					function = "id";
+					bias-pull-up;
+				};
+
+				vac {
+					pins = "vac";
+					function = "vacok";
+					bias-pull-down;
+				};
+
+				gpio5 {
+					pins = "gpio5";
+					function = "opt0";
+					drive-open-drain = <1>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+		....
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-single.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-single.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5a02e30dd262
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-single.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,234 @@
+One-register-per-pin type device tree based pinctrl driver
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "pinctrl-single" or "pinconf-single".
+  "pinctrl-single" means that pinconf isn't supported.
+  "pinconf-single" means that generic pinconf is supported.
+
+- reg : offset and length of the register set for the mux registers
+
+- pinctrl-single,register-width : pinmux register access width in bits
+
+- pinctrl-single,function-mask : mask of allowed pinmux function bits
+  in the pinmux register
+
+Optional properties:
+- pinctrl-single,function-off : function off mode for disabled state if
+  available and same for all registers; if not specified, disabling of
+  pin functions is ignored
+
+- pinctrl-single,bit-per-mux : boolean to indicate that one register controls
+  more than one pin, for which "pinctrl-single,function-mask" property specifies
+ position mask of pin.
+
+- pinctrl-single,drive-strength : array of value that are used to configure
+  drive strength in the pinmux register. They're value of drive strength
+  current and drive strength mask.
+
+		/* drive strength current, mask */
+		pinctrl-single,power-source = <0x30 0xf0>;
+
+- pinctrl-single,bias-pullup : array of value that are used to configure the
+  input bias pullup in the pinmux register.
+
+		/* input, enabled pullup bits, disabled pullup bits, mask */
+		pinctrl-single,bias-pullup = <0 1 0 1>;
+
+- pinctrl-single,bias-pulldown : array of value that are used to configure the
+  input bias pulldown in the pinmux register.
+
+		/* input, enabled pulldown bits, disabled pulldown bits, mask */
+		pinctrl-single,bias-pulldown = <2 2 0 2>;
+
+  * Two bits to control input bias pullup and pulldown: User should use
+    pinctrl-single,bias-pullup & pinctrl-single,bias-pulldown. One bit means
+    pullup, and the other one bit means pulldown.
+  * Three bits to control input bias enable, pullup and pulldown. User should
+    use pinctrl-single,bias-pullup & pinctrl-single,bias-pulldown. Input bias
+    enable bit should be included in pullup or pulldown bits.
+  * Although driver could set PIN_CONFIG_BIAS_DISABLE, there's no property as
+    pinctrl-single,bias-disable. Because pinctrl single driver could implement
+    it by calling pulldown, pullup disabled.
+
+- pinctrl-single,input-schmitt : array of value that are used to configure
+  input schmitt in the pinmux register. In some silicons, there're two input
+  schmitt value (rising-edge & falling-edge) in the pinmux register.
+
+		/* input schmitt value, mask */
+		pinctrl-single,input-schmitt = <0x30 0x70>;
+
+- pinctrl-single,input-schmitt-enable : array of value that are used to
+  configure input schmitt enable or disable in the pinmux register.
+
+		/* input, enable bits, disable bits, mask */
+		pinctrl-single,input-schmitt-enable = <0x30 0x40 0 0x70>;
+
+- pinctrl-single,gpio-range : list of value that are used to configure a GPIO
+  range. They're value of subnode phandle, pin base in pinctrl device, pin
+  number in this range, GPIO function value of this GPIO range.
+  The number of parameters is depend on #pinctrl-single,gpio-range-cells
+  property.
+
+		/* pin base, nr pins & gpio function */
+		pinctrl-single,gpio-range = <&range 0 3 0 &range 3 9 1>;
+
+This driver assumes that there is only one register for each pin (unless the
+pinctrl-single,bit-per-mux is set), and uses the common pinctrl bindings as
+specified in the pinctrl-bindings.txt document in this directory.
+
+The pin configuration nodes for pinctrl-single are specified as pinctrl
+register offset and value pairs using pinctrl-single,pins. Only the bits
+specified in pinctrl-single,function-mask are updated. For example, setting
+a pin for a device could be done with:
+
+	pinctrl-single,pins = <0xdc 0x118>;
+
+Where 0xdc is the offset from the pinctrl register base address for the
+device pinctrl register, and 0x118 contains the desired value of the
+pinctrl register. See the device example and static board pins example
+below for more information.
+
+In case when one register changes more than one pin's mux the
+pinctrl-single,bits need to be used which takes three parameters:
+
+	pinctrl-single,bits = <0xdc 0x18, 0xff>;
+
+Where 0xdc is the offset from the pinctrl register base address for the
+device pinctrl register, 0x18 is the desired value, and 0xff is the sub mask to
+be used when applying this change to the register.
+
+
+Optional sub-node: In case some pins could be configured as GPIO in the pinmux
+register, those pins could be defined as a GPIO range. This sub-node is required
+by pinctrl-single,gpio-range property.
+
+Required properties in sub-node:
+- #pinctrl-single,gpio-range-cells : the number of parameters after phandle in
+  pinctrl-single,gpio-range property.
+
+	range: gpio-range {
+		#pinctrl-single,gpio-range-cells = <3>;
+	};
+
+
+Example:
+
+/* SoC common file */
+
+/* first controller instance for pins in core domain */
+pmx_core: pinmux@4a100040 {
+	compatible = "pinctrl-single";
+	reg = <0x4a100040 0x0196>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	pinctrl-single,register-width = <16>;
+	pinctrl-single,function-mask = <0xffff>;
+};
+
+/* second controller instance for pins in wkup domain */
+pmx_wkup: pinmux@4a31e040 {
+	compatible = "pinctrl-single";
+	reg = <0x4a31e040 0x0038>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	pinctrl-single,register-width = <16>;
+	pinctrl-single,function-mask = <0xffff>;
+};
+
+control_devconf0: pinmux@48002274 {
+	compatible = "pinctrl-single";
+	reg = <0x48002274 4>;	/* Single register */
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	pinctrl-single,bit-per-mux;
+	pinctrl-single,register-width = <32>;
+	pinctrl-single,function-mask = <0x5F>;
+};
+
+/* third controller instance for pins in gpio domain */
+pmx_gpio: pinmux@d401e000 {
+	compatible = "pinconf-single";
+	reg = <0xd401e000 0x0330>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	ranges;
+
+	pinctrl-single,register-width = <32>;
+	pinctrl-single,function-mask = <7>;
+
+	/* sparse GPIO range could be supported */
+	pinctrl-single,gpio-range = <&range 0 3 0 &range 3 9 1
+				&range 12 1 0 &range 13 29 1
+				&range 43 1 0 &range 44 49 1
+				&range 94 1 1 &range 96 2 1>;
+
+	range: gpio-range {
+		#pinctrl-single,gpio-range-cells = <3>;
+	};
+};
+
+
+/* board specific .dts file */
+
+&pmx_core {
+
+	/*
+	 * map all board specific static pins enabled by the pinctrl driver
+	 * itself during the boot (or just set them up in the bootloader)
+	 */
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&board_pins>;
+
+	board_pins: pinmux_board_pins {
+		pinctrl-single,pins = <
+			0x6c 0xf
+			0x6e 0xf
+			0x70 0xf
+			0x72 0xf
+		>;
+	};
+
+	uart0_pins: pinmux_uart0_pins {
+		pinctrl-single,pins = <
+			0x208 0		/* UART0_RXD (IOCFG138) */
+			0x20c 0		/* UART0_TXD (IOCFG139) */
+		>;
+		pinctrl-single,bias-pulldown = <0 2 2>;
+		pinctrl-single,bias-pullup = <0 1 1>;
+	};
+
+	/* map uart2 pins */
+	uart2_pins: pinmux_uart2_pins {
+		pinctrl-single,pins = <
+			0xd8 0x118
+			0xda 0
+			0xdc 0x118
+			0xde 0
+		>;
+	};
+};
+
+&control_devconf0 {
+	mcbsp1_pins: pinmux_mcbsp1_pins {
+		pinctrl-single,bits = <
+			0x00 0x18 0x18 /* FSR/CLKR signal from FSX/CLKX pin */
+		>;
+	};
+
+	mcbsp2_clks_pins: pinmux_mcbsp2_clks_pins {
+		pinctrl-single,bits = <
+			0x00 0x40 0x40 /* McBSP2 CLKS from McBSP_CLKS pin */
+		>;
+	};
+
+};
+
+&uart1 {
+       pinctrl-names = "default";
+       pinctrl-0 = <&uart0_pins>;
+};
+
+&uart2 {
+       pinctrl-names = "default";
+       pinctrl-0 = <&uart2_pins>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-sirf.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-sirf.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c596a6ad3285
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-sirf.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+CSR SiRFprimaII pinmux controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible	: "sirf,prima2-pinctrl"
+- reg		: Address range of the pinctrl registers
+- interrupts    : Interrupts used by every GPIO group
+- gpio-controller : Indicates this device is a GPIO controller
+- interrupt-controller  : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller
+Optional properties:
+- sirf,pullups : if n-th bit of m-th bank is set, set a pullup on GPIO-n of bank m
+- sirf,pulldowns : if n-th bit of m-th bank is set, set a pulldown on GPIO-n of bank m
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common
+pinctrl bindings used by client devices.
+
+SiRFprimaII's pinmux nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of subnodes.
+Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a group of pins.
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- sirf,pins : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a group.
+- sirf,function: A string containing the name of the function to mux to the
+  group.
+
+  Valid values for group and function names can be found from looking at the
+  group and function arrays in driver files:
+  drivers/pinctrl/pinctrl-sirf.c
+
+For example, pinctrl might have subnodes like the following:
+ uart2_pins_a: uart2@0 {
+         uart {
+                 sirf,pins = "uart2grp";
+                 sirf,function = "uart2";
+         };
+ };
+ uart2_noflow_pins_a: uart2@1 {
+         uart {
+                 sirf,pins = "uart2_nostreamctrlgrp";
+                 sirf,function = "uart2_nostreamctrl";
+         };
+ };
+
+For a specific board, if it wants to use uart2 without hardware flow control,
+it can add the following to its board-specific .dts file.
+uart2: uart@0xb0070000 {
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&uart2_noflow_pins_a>;
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-st.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-st.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..05bf82a07dfd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-st.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+*ST pin controller.
+
+Each multi-function pin is controlled, driven and routed through the
+PIO multiplexing block. Each pin supports GPIO functionality (ALT0)
+and multiple alternate functions(ALT1 - ALTx) that directly connect
+the pin to different hardware blocks.
+
+When a pin is in GPIO mode, Output Enable (OE), Open Drain(OD), and
+Pull Up (PU) are driven by the related PIO block.
+
+ST pinctrl driver controls PIO multiplexing block and also interacts with
+gpio driver to configure a pin.
+
+Required properties: (PIO multiplexing block)
+- compatible	: should be "st,<SOC>-<pio-block>-pinctrl"
+	like st,stih415-sbc-pinctrl, st,stih415-front-pinctrl and so on.
+- gpio-controller : Indicates this device is a GPIO controller
+- #gpio-cells	  : Should be one. The first cell is the pin number.
+- st,retime-pin-mask	: Should be mask to specify which pins can be retimed.
+	If the property is not present, it is assumed that all the pins in the
+	bank are capable of retiming. Retiming is mainly used to improve the
+	IO timing margins of external synchronous interfaces.
+- st,bank-name		: Should be a name string for this bank as
+			specified in datasheet.
+- st,syscfg		: Should be a phandle of the syscfg node.
+
+Example:
+	pin-controller-sbc {
+		#address-cells	= <1>;
+		#size-cells	= <1>;
+		compatible	= "st,stih415-sbc-pinctrl";
+		st,syscfg	= <&syscfg_sbc>;
+		ranges 		= <0 0xfe610000 0x5000>;
+		PIO0: gpio@fe610000 {
+			gpio-controller;
+			#gpio-cells	= <1>;
+			reg		= <0 0x100>;
+			st,bank-name	= "PIO0";
+		};
+		...
+		pin-functions nodes follow...
+	};
+
+
+Contents of function subnode node:
+----------------------
+Required properties for pin configuration node:
+- st,pins	: Child node with list of pins with configuration.
+
+Below is the format of how each pin conf should look like.
+
+<bank offset mux mode rt_type rt_delay rt_clk>
+
+Every PIO is represented with 4-7 parameters depending on retime configuration.
+Each parameter is explained as below.
+
+-bank		: Should be bank phandle to which this PIO belongs.
+-offset		: Offset in the PIO bank.
+-mux		: Should be alternate function number associated this pin.
+		Use same numbers from datasheet.
+-mode		:pin configuration is selected from one of the below values.
+		IN
+		IN_PU
+		OUT
+		BIDIR
+		BIDIR_PU
+
+-rt_type	Retiming Configuration for the pin.
+		Possible retime configuration are:
+
+		-------		-------------
+		value		args
+		-------		-------------
+		NICLK		<delay> <clk>
+		ICLK_IO		<delay> <clk>
+		BYPASS		<delay>
+		DE_IO		<delay> <clk>
+		SE_ICLK_IO	<delay> <clk>
+		SE_NICLK_IO	<delay> <clk>
+
+- delay	is retime delay in pico seconds as mentioned in data sheet.
+
+- rt_clk	:clk to be use for retime.
+		Possible values are:
+		CLK_A
+		CLK_B
+		CLK_C
+		CLK_D
+
+Example of mmcclk pin which is a bi-direction pull pu with retime config
+as non inverted clock retimed with CLK_B and delay of 0 pico seconds:
+
+pin-controller {
+	...
+	mmc0 {
+		pinctrl_mmc: mmc {
+			st,pins {
+				mmcclk = <&PIO13 4 ALT4 BIDIR_PU NICLK 0 CLK_B>;
+				...
+			};
+		};
+	...
+	};
+};
+
+sdhci0:sdhci@fe810000{
+	...
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0	= <&pinctrl_mmc>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-vt8500.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-vt8500.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b3aa90f0ce44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-vt8500.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+VIA VT8500 and Wondermedia WM8xxx-series pinmux/gpio controller
+
+These SoCs contain a combined Pinmux/GPIO module. Each pin may operate as
+either a GPIO in, GPIO out or as an alternate function (I2C, SPI etc).
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "via,vt8500-pinctrl", "wm,wm8505-pinctrl", "wm,wm8650-pinctrl",
+	"wm8750-pinctrl" or "wm,wm8850-pinctrl"
+- reg: Should contain the physical address of the module's registers.
+- interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller.
+- #interrupt-cells: Should be two.
+- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller.
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the
+  second cell is used to specify optional parameters.
+	bit 0 - active low
+
+Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt for a general description of GPIO bindings.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+Each pin configuration node lists the pin(s) to which it applies, and one or
+more of the mux functions to select on those pin(s), and pull-up/down
+configuration. Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly
+listed. In other words, a subnode that lists only a mux function implies no
+information about any pull configuration. Similarly, a subnode that lists only
+a pull parameter implies no information about the mux function.
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- wm,pins: An array of cells. Each cell contains the ID of a pin.
+
+Optional subnode-properties:
+- wm,function: Integer, containing the function to mux to the pin(s):
+  0: GPIO in
+  1: GPIO out
+  2: alternate
+
+- wm,pull: Integer, representing the pull-down/up to apply to the pin(s):
+  0: none
+  1: down
+  2: up
+
+Each of wm,function and wm,pull may contain either a single value which
+will be applied to all pins in wm,pins, or one value for each entry in
+wm,pins.
+
+Example:
+
+	pinctrl: pinctrl {
+		compatible = "wm,wm8505-pinctrl";
+		reg = <0xD8110000 0x10000>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl_spear.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl_spear.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b4480d5c3aca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl_spear.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+ST Microelectronics, SPEAr pinmux controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible	: "st,spear300-pinmux"
+		: "st,spear310-pinmux"
+		: "st,spear320-pinmux"
+		: "st,spear1310-pinmux"
+		: "st,spear1340-pinmux"
+- reg		: Address range of the pinctrl registers
+- st,pinmux-mode: Mandatory for SPEAr300 and SPEAr320 and invalid for others.
+	- Its values for SPEAr300:
+		- NAND_MODE		: <0>
+		- NOR_MODE		: <1>
+		- PHOTO_FRAME_MODE	: <2>
+		- LEND_IP_PHONE_MODE	: <3>
+		- HEND_IP_PHONE_MODE	: <4>
+		- LEND_WIFI_PHONE_MODE	: <5>
+		- HEND_WIFI_PHONE_MODE	: <6>
+		- ATA_PABX_WI2S_MODE	: <7>
+		- ATA_PABX_I2S_MODE	: <8>
+		- CAML_LCDW_MODE	: <9>
+		- CAMU_LCD_MODE		: <10>
+		- CAMU_WLCD_MODE	: <11>
+		- CAML_LCD_MODE		: <12>
+	- Its values for SPEAr320:
+		- AUTO_NET_SMII_MODE	: <0>
+		- AUTO_NET_MII_MODE	: <1>
+		- AUTO_EXP_MODE		: <2>
+		- SMALL_PRINTERS_MODE	: <3>
+		- EXTENDED_MODE		: <4>
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common
+pinctrl bindings used by client devices.
+
+SPEAr's pinmux nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of subnodes. Each
+of these subnodes represents muxing for a pin, a group, or a list of pins or
+groups.
+
+The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be enumerated
+and processed purely based on their content.
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- st,pins : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a pin or
+  group.
+- st,function: A string containing the name of the function to mux to the pin or
+  group. See the SPEAr's TRM to determine which are valid for each pin or group.
+
+  Valid values for group and function names can be found from looking at the
+  group and function arrays in driver files:
+  drivers/pinctrl/spear/pinctrl-spear3*0.c
+
+Valid values for group names are:
+For All SPEAr3xx machines:
+	"firda_grp", "i2c0_grp", "ssp_cs_grp", "ssp0_grp", "mii0_grp",
+	"gpio0_pin0_grp", "gpio0_pin1_grp", "gpio0_pin2_grp", "gpio0_pin3_grp",
+	"gpio0_pin4_grp", "gpio0_pin5_grp", "uart0_ext_grp", "uart0_grp",
+	"timer_0_1_grp", timer_0_1_pins, "timer_2_3_grp"
+
+For SPEAr300 machines:
+	"fsmc_2chips_grp", "fsmc_4chips_grp", "clcd_lcdmode_grp",
+	"clcd_pfmode_grp", "tdm_grp", "i2c_clk_grp_grp", "caml_grp", "camu_grp",
+	"dac_grp", "i2s_grp", "sdhci_4bit_grp", "sdhci_8bit_grp",
+	"gpio1_0_to_3_grp", "gpio1_4_to_7_grp"
+
+For SPEAr310 machines:
+	"emi_cs_0_to_5_grp", "uart1_grp", "uart2_grp", "uart3_grp", "uart4_grp",
+	"uart5_grp", "fsmc_grp", "rs485_0_grp", "rs485_1_grp", "tdm_grp"
+
+For SPEAr320 machines:
+	"clcd_grp", "emi_grp", "fsmc_8bit_grp", "fsmc_16bit_grp", "spp_grp",
+	"sdhci_led_grp", "sdhci_cd_12_grp", "sdhci_cd_51_grp", "i2s_grp",
+	"uart1_grp", "uart1_modem_2_to_7_grp", "uart1_modem_31_to_36_grp",
+	"uart1_modem_34_to_45_grp", "uart1_modem_80_to_85_grp", "uart2_grp",
+	"uart3_8_9_grp", "uart3_15_16_grp", "uart3_41_42_grp",
+	"uart3_52_53_grp", "uart3_73_74_grp", "uart3_94_95_grp",
+	"uart3_98_99_grp", "uart4_6_7_grp", "uart4_13_14_grp",
+	"uart4_39_40_grp", "uart4_71_72_grp", "uart4_92_93_grp",
+	"uart4_100_101_grp", "uart5_4_5_grp", "uart5_37_38_grp",
+	"uart5_69_70_grp", "uart5_90_91_grp", "uart6_2_3_grp",
+	"uart6_88_89_grp", "rs485_grp", "touchscreen_grp", "can0_grp",
+	"can1_grp", "pwm0_1_pin_8_9_grp", "pwm0_1_pin_14_15_grp",
+	"pwm0_1_pin_30_31_grp", "pwm0_1_pin_37_38_grp", "pwm0_1_pin_42_43_grp",
+	"pwm0_1_pin_59_60_grp", "pwm0_1_pin_88_89_grp", "pwm2_pin_7_grp",
+	"pwm2_pin_13_grp", "pwm2_pin_29_grp", "pwm2_pin_34_grp",
+	"pwm2_pin_41_grp", "pwm2_pin_58_grp", "pwm2_pin_87_grp",
+	"pwm3_pin_6_grp", "pwm3_pin_12_grp", "pwm3_pin_28_grp",
+	"pwm3_pin_40_grp", "pwm3_pin_57_grp", "pwm3_pin_86_grp",
+	"ssp1_17_20_grp", "ssp1_36_39_grp", "ssp1_48_51_grp", "ssp1_65_68_grp",
+	"ssp1_94_97_grp", "ssp2_13_16_grp", "ssp2_32_35_grp", "ssp2_44_47_grp",
+	"ssp2_61_64_grp", "ssp2_90_93_grp", "mii2_grp", "smii0_1_grp",
+	"rmii0_1_grp", "i2c1_8_9_grp", "i2c1_98_99_grp", "i2c2_0_1_grp",
+	"i2c2_2_3_grp", "i2c2_19_20_grp", "i2c2_75_76_grp", "i2c2_96_97_grp"
+
+For SPEAr1310 machines:
+	"i2c0_grp", "ssp0_grp", "ssp0_cs0_grp", "ssp0_cs1_2_grp", "i2s0_grp",
+	"i2s1_grp", "clcd_grp", "clcd_high_res_grp", "arm_gpio_grp",
+	"smi_2_chips_grp", "smi_4_chips_grp", "gmii_grp", "rgmii_grp",
+	"smii_0_1_2_grp", "ras_mii_txclk_grp", "nand_8bit_grp",
+	"nand_16bit_grp", "nand_4_chips_grp", "keyboard_6x6_grp",
+	"keyboard_rowcol6_8_grp", "uart0_grp", "uart0_modem_grp",
+	"gpt0_tmr0_grp", "gpt0_tmr1_grp", "gpt1_tmr0_grp", "gpt1_tmr1_grp",
+	"sdhci_grp", "cf_grp", "xd_grp", "touch_xy_grp",
+	"uart1_disable_i2c_grp", "uart1_disable_sd_grp", "uart2_3_grp",
+	"uart4_grp", "uart5_grp", "rs485_0_1_tdm_0_1_grp", "i2c_1_2_grp",
+	"i2c3_dis_smi_clcd_grp", "i2c3_dis_sd_i2s0_grp", "i2c_4_5_dis_smi_grp",
+	"i2c4_dis_sd_grp", "i2c5_dis_sd_grp", "i2c_6_7_dis_kbd_grp",
+	"i2c6_dis_sd_grp", "i2c7_dis_sd_grp", "can0_dis_nor_grp",
+	"can0_dis_sd_grp", "can1_dis_sd_grp", "can1_dis_kbd_grp", "pcie0_grp",
+	"pcie1_grp", "pcie2_grp", "sata0_grp", "sata1_grp", "sata2_grp",
+	"ssp1_dis_kbd_grp", "ssp1_dis_sd_grp", "gpt64_grp"
+
+For SPEAr1340 machines:
+	"pads_as_gpio_grp", "fsmc_8bit_grp", "fsmc_16bit_grp", "fsmc_pnor_grp",
+	"keyboard_row_col_grp", "keyboard_col5_grp", "spdif_in_grp",
+	"spdif_out_grp", "gpt_0_1_grp", "pwm0_grp", "pwm1_grp", "pwm2_grp",
+	"pwm3_grp", "vip_mux_grp", "vip_mux_cam0_grp", "vip_mux_cam1_grp",
+	"vip_mux_cam2_grp", "vip_mux_cam3_grp", "cam0_grp", "cam1_grp",
+	"cam2_grp", "cam3_grp", "smi_grp", "ssp0_grp", "ssp0_cs1_grp",
+	"ssp0_cs2_grp", "ssp0_cs3_grp", "uart0_grp", "uart0_enh_grp",
+	"uart1_grp", "i2s_in_grp", "i2s_out_grp", "gmii_grp", "rgmii_grp",
+	"rmii_grp", "sgmii_grp", "i2c0_grp", "i2c1_grp", "cec0_grp", "cec1_grp",
+	"sdhci_grp", "cf_grp", "xd_grp", "clcd_grp", "arm_trace_grp",
+	"miphy_dbg_grp", "pcie_grp", "sata_grp"
+
+Valid values for function names are:
+For All SPEAr3xx machines:
+	"firda", "i2c0", "ssp_cs", "ssp0", "mii0", "gpio0", "uart0_ext",
+	"uart0", "timer_0_1", "timer_2_3"
+
+For SPEAr300 machines:
+	"fsmc", "clcd", "tdm", "i2c1", "cam", "dac", "i2s", "sdhci", "gpio1"
+
+For SPEAr310 machines:
+	"emi", "uart1", "uart2", "uart3", "uart4", "uart5", "fsmc", "rs485_0",
+	"rs485_1", "tdm"
+
+For SPEAr320 machines:
+	"clcd", "emi", "fsmc", "spp", "sdhci", "i2s", "uart1", "uart1_modem",
+	"uart2", "uart3", "uart4", "uart5", "uart6", "rs485", "touchscreen",
+	"can0", "can1", "pwm0_1", "pwm2", "pwm3", "ssp1", "ssp2", "mii2",
+	"mii0_1", "i2c1", "i2c2"
+
+
+For SPEAr1310 machines:
+	"i2c0", "ssp0", "i2s0", "i2s1", "clcd", "arm_gpio", "smi", "gmii",
+	"rgmii", "smii_0_1_2", "ras_mii_txclk", "nand", "keyboard", "uart0",
+	"gpt0", "gpt1", "sdhci", "cf", "xd", "touchscreen", "uart1", "uart2_3",
+	"uart4", "uart5", "rs485_0_1_tdm_0_1", "i2c_1_2", "i2c3_i2s1",
+	"i2c_4_5", "i2c_6_7", "can0", "can1", "pci", "sata", "ssp1", "gpt64"
+
+For SPEAr1340 machines:
+	"pads_as_gpio", "fsmc", "keyboard", "spdif_in", "spdif_out", "gpt_0_1",
+	"pwm", "vip", "cam0", "cam1", "cam2", "cam3", "smi", "ssp0", "uart0",
+	"uart1", "i2s", "gmac", "i2c0", "i2c1", "cec0", "cec1", "sdhci", "cf",
+	"xd", "clcd", "arm_trace", "miphy_dbg", "pcie", "sata"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/renesas,pfc-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/renesas,pfc-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d5dac7b843a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/renesas,pfc-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+* Renesas Pin Function Controller (GPIO and Pin Mux/Config)
+
+The Pin Function Controller (PFC) is a Pin Mux/Config controller. On SH7372,
+SH73A0, R8A73A4 and R8A7740 it also acts as a GPIO controller.
+
+
+Pin Control
+-----------
+
+Required Properties:
+
+  - compatible: should be one of the following.
+    - "renesas,pfc-r8a73a4": for R8A73A4 (R-Mobile APE6) compatible pin-controller.
+    - "renesas,pfc-r8a7740": for R8A7740 (R-Mobile A1) compatible pin-controller.
+    - "renesas,pfc-r8a7778": for R8A7778 (R-Mobile M1) compatible pin-controller.
+    - "renesas,pfc-r8a7779": for R8A7779 (R-Car H1) compatible pin-controller.
+    - "renesas,pfc-r8a7790": for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) compatible pin-controller.
+    - "renesas,pfc-sh7372": for SH7372 (SH-Mobile AP4) compatible pin-controller.
+    - "renesas,pfc-sh73a0": for SH73A0 (SH-Mobile AG5) compatible pin-controller.
+
+  - reg: Base address and length of each memory resource used by the pin
+    controller hardware module.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - #gpio-range-cells: Mandatory when the PFC doesn't handle GPIO, forbidden
+    otherwise. Should be 3.
+
+The PFC node also acts as a container for pin configuration nodes. Please refer
+to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for the definition of the term "pin
+configuration node" and for the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices.
+
+Each pin configuration node represents a desired configuration for a pin, a
+pin group, or a list of pins or pin groups. The configuration can include the
+function to select on those pin(s) and pin configuration parameters (such as
+pull-up and pull-down).
+
+Pin configuration nodes contain pin configuration properties, either directly
+or grouped in child subnodes. Both pin muxing and configuration parameters can
+be grouped in that way and referenced as a single pin configuration node by
+client devices.
+
+A configuration node or subnode must reference at least one pin (through the
+pins or pin groups properties) and contain at least a function or one
+configuration parameter. When the function is present only pin groups can be
+used to reference pins.
+
+All pin configuration nodes and subnodes names are ignored. All of those nodes
+are parsed through phandles and processed purely based on their content.
+
+Pin Configuration Node Properties:
+
+- renesas,pins : An array of strings, each string containing the name of a pin.
+- renesas,groups : An array of strings, each string containing the name of a pin
+  group.
+
+- renesas,function: A string containing the name of the function to mux to the
+  pin group(s) specified by the renesas,groups property
+
+  Valid values for pin, group and function names can be found in the group and
+  function arrays of the PFC data file corresponding to the SoC
+  (drivers/pinctrl/sh-pfc/pfc-*.c)
+
+The pin configuration parameters use the generic pinconf bindings defined in
+pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory. The supported parameters are
+bias-disable, bias-pull-up and bias-pull-down.
+
+
+GPIO
+----
+
+On SH7372, SH73A0, R8A73A4 and R8A7740 the PFC node is also a GPIO controller
+node.
+
+Required Properties:
+
+  - gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a gpio controller.
+
+  - #gpio-cells: Should be 2. The first cell is the GPIO number and the second
+    cell specifies GPIO flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>. Only the
+    GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH and GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW flags are supported.
+
+The syntax of the gpio specifier used by client nodes should be the following
+with values derived from the SoC user manual.
+
+  <[phandle of the gpio controller node]
+   [pin number within the gpio controller]
+   [flags]>
+
+On other mach-shmobile platforms GPIO is handled by the gpio-rcar driver.
+Please refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt
+for documentation of the GPIO device tree bindings on those platforms.
+
+
+Examples
+--------
+
+Example 1: SH73A0 (SH-Mobile AG5) pin controller node
+
+	pfc: pfc@e6050000 {
+		compatible = "renesas,pfc-sh73a0";
+		reg = <0xe6050000 0x8000>,
+		      <0xe605801c 0x1c>;
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+	};
+
+Example 2: A GPIO LED node that references a GPIO
+
+	#include <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>
+
+	leds {
+		compatible = "gpio-leds";
+		led1 {
+			gpios = <&pfc 20 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
+		};
+	};
+
+Example 3: KZM-A9-GT (SH-Mobile AG5) default pin state hog and pin control maps
+           for the MMCIF and SCIFA4 devices
+
+	&pfc {
+		pinctrl-0 = <&scifa4_pins>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+
+		mmcif_pins: mmcif {
+			mux {
+				renesas,groups = "mmc0_data8_0", "mmc0_ctrl_0";
+				renesas,function = "mmc0";
+			};
+			cfg {
+				renesas,groups = "mmc0_data8_0";
+				renesas,pins = "PORT279";
+				bias-pull-up;
+			};
+		};
+
+		scifa4_pins: scifa4 {
+			renesas,groups = "scifa4_data", "scifa4_ctrl";
+			renesas,function = "scifa4";
+		};
+	};
+
+Example 4: KZM-A9-GT (SH-Mobile AG5) default pin state for the MMCIF device
+
+	&mmcif {
+		pinctrl-0 = <&mmcif_pins>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+
+		bus-width = <8>;
+		vmmc-supply = <&reg_1p8v>;
+		status = "okay";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/rockchip,pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/rockchip,pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b0fb1018d7ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/rockchip,pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+* Rockchip Pinmux Controller
+
+The Rockchip Pinmux Controller, enables the IC
+to share one PAD to several functional blocks. The sharing is done by
+multiplexing the PAD input/output signals. For each PAD there are up to
+4 muxing options with option 0 being the use as a GPIO.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+The Rockchip pin configuration node is a node of a group of pins which can be
+used for a specific device or function. This node represents both mux and
+config of the pins in that group. The 'pins' selects the function mode(also
+named pin mode) this pin can work on and the 'config' configures various pad
+settings such as pull-up, etc.
+
+The pins are grouped into up to 5 individual pin banks which need to be
+defined as gpio sub-nodes of the pinmux controller.
+
+Required properties for iomux controller:
+  - compatible: one of "rockchip,rk2928-pinctrl", "rockchip,rk3066a-pinctrl"
+		       "rockchip,rk3066b-pinctrl", "rockchip,rk3188-pinctrl"
+
+Required properties for gpio sub nodes:
+  - compatible: "rockchip,gpio-bank"
+  - reg: register of the gpio bank (different than the iomux registerset)
+  - interrupts: base interrupt of the gpio bank in the interrupt controller
+  - clocks: clock that drives this bank
+  - gpio-controller: identifies the node as a gpio controller and pin bank.
+  - #gpio-cells: number of cells in GPIO specifier. Since the generic GPIO
+    binding is used, the amount of cells must be specified as 2. See generic
+    GPIO binding documentation for description of particular cells.
+  - interrupt-controller: identifies the controller node as interrupt-parent.
+  - #interrupt-cells: the value of this property should be 2 and the interrupt
+    cells should use the standard two-cell scheme described in
+    bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
+
+Required properties for pin configuration node:
+  - rockchip,pins: 3 integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config
+    setting. The format is rockchip,pins = <PIN_BANK PIN_BANK_IDX MUX &phandle>.
+    The MUX 0 means gpio and MUX 1 to 3 mean the specific device function.
+    The phandle of a node containing the generic pinconfig options
+    to use, as described in pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory.
+
+Examples:
+
+#include <dt-bindings/pinctrl/rockchip.h>
+
+...
+
+pinctrl@20008000 {
+	compatible = "rockchip,rk3066a-pinctrl";
+	reg = <0x20008000 0x150>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	ranges;
+
+	gpio0: gpio0@20034000 {
+		compatible = "rockchip,gpio-bank";
+		reg = <0x20034000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <GIC_SPI 54 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+		clocks = <&clk_gates8 9>;
+
+		gpio-controller;
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+	};
+
+	...
+
+	pcfg_pull_default: pcfg_pull_default {
+		bias-pull-pin-default
+	};
+
+	uart2 {
+		uart2_xfer: uart2-xfer {
+			rockchip,pins = <RK_GPIO1 8 1 &pcfg_pull_default>,
+					<RK_GPIO1 9 1 &pcfg_pull_default>;
+		};
+	};
+};
+
+uart2: serial@20064000 {
+	compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart";
+	reg = <0x20064000 0x400>;
+	interrupts = <GIC_SPI 36 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
+	reg-shift = <2>;
+	reg-io-width = <1>;
+	clocks = <&mux_uart2>;
+	status = "okay";
+
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&uart2_xfer>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/samsung-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/samsung-pinctrl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..257677de3e6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/samsung-pinctrl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,318 @@
+Samsung GPIO and Pin Mux/Config controller
+
+Samsung's ARM based SoC's integrates a GPIO and Pin mux/config hardware
+controller. It controls the input/output settings on the available pads/pins
+and also provides ability to multiplex and configure the output of various
+on-chip controllers onto these pads.
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible: should be one of the following.
+  - "samsung,s3c2412-pinctrl": for S3C2412-compatible pin-controller,
+  - "samsung,s3c2416-pinctrl": for S3C2416-compatible pin-controller,
+  - "samsung,s3c2440-pinctrl": for S3C2440-compatible pin-controller,
+  - "samsung,s3c2450-pinctrl": for S3C2450-compatible pin-controller,
+  - "samsung,s3c64xx-pinctrl": for S3C64xx-compatible pin-controller,
+  - "samsung,s5pv210-pinctrl": for S5PV210-compatible pin-controller,
+  - "samsung,exynos4210-pinctrl": for Exynos4210 compatible pin-controller.
+  - "samsung,exynos4x12-pinctrl": for Exynos4x12 compatible pin-controller.
+  - "samsung,exynos5250-pinctrl": for Exynos5250 compatible pin-controller.
+  - "samsung,exynos5420-pinctrl": for Exynos5420 compatible pin-controller.
+
+- reg: Base address of the pin controller hardware module and length of
+  the address space it occupies.
+
+- Pin banks as child nodes: Pin banks of the controller are represented by child
+  nodes of the controller node. Bank name is taken from name of the node. Each
+  bank node must contain following properties:
+
+  - gpio-controller: identifies the node as a gpio controller and pin bank.
+  - #gpio-cells: number of cells in GPIO specifier. Since the generic GPIO
+    binding is used, the amount of cells must be specified as 2. See the below
+    mentioned gpio binding representation for description of particular cells.
+
+	Eg: <&gpx2 6 0>
+	<[phandle of the gpio controller node]
+	[pin number within the gpio controller]
+	[flags]>
+
+	Values for gpio specifier:
+	- Pin number: is a value between 0 to 7.
+	- Flags: 0 - Active High
+		 1 - Active Low
+
+- Pin mux/config groups as child nodes: The pin mux (selecting pin function
+  mode) and pin config (pull up/down, driver strength) settings are represented
+  as child nodes of the pin-controller node. There should be atleast one
+  child node and there is no limit on the count of these child nodes.
+
+  The child node should contain a list of pin(s) on which a particular pin
+  function selection or pin configuration (or both) have to applied. This
+  list of pins is specified using the property name "samsung,pins". There
+  should be atleast one pin specfied for this property and there is no upper
+  limit on the count of pins that can be specified. The pins are specified
+  using pin names which are derived from the hardware manual of the SoC. As
+  an example, the pins in GPA0 bank of the pin controller can be represented
+  as "gpa0-0", "gpa0-1", "gpa0-2" and so on. The names should be in lower case.
+  The format of the pin names should be (as per the hardware manual)
+  "[pin bank name]-[pin number within the bank]".
+
+  The pin function selection that should be applied on the pins listed in the
+  child node is specified using the "samsung,pin-function" property. The value
+  of this property that should be applied to each of the pins listed in the
+  "samsung,pins" property should be picked from the hardware manual of the SoC
+  for the specified pin group. This property is optional in the child node if
+  no specific function selection is desired for the pins listed in the child
+  node. The value of this property is used as-is to program the pin-controller
+  function selector register of the pin-bank.
+
+  The child node can also optionally specify one or more of the pin
+  configuration that should be applied on all the pins listed in the
+  "samsung,pins" property of the child node. The following pin configuration
+  properties are supported.
+
+  - samsung,pin-pud: Pull up/down configuration.
+  - samsung,pin-drv: Drive strength configuration.
+  - samsung,pin-pud-pdn: Pull up/down configuration in power down mode.
+  - samsung,pin-drv-pdn: Drive strength configuration in power down mode.
+
+  The values specified by these config properties should be derived from the
+  hardware manual and these values are programmed as-is into the pin
+  pull up/down and driver strength register of the pin-controller.
+
+  Note: A child should include atleast a pin function selection property or
+  pin configuration property (one or more) or both.
+
+  The client nodes that require a particular pin function selection and/or
+  pin configuration should use the bindings listed in the "pinctrl-bindings.txt"
+  file.
+
+External GPIO and Wakeup Interrupts:
+
+The controller supports two types of external interrupts over gpio. The first
+is the external gpio interrupt and second is the external wakeup interrupts.
+The difference between the two is that the external wakeup interrupts can be
+used as system wakeup events.
+
+A. External GPIO Interrupts: For supporting external gpio interrupts, the
+   following properties should be specified in the pin-controller device node.
+
+   - interrupt-parent: phandle of the interrupt parent to which the external
+     GPIO interrupts are forwarded to.
+   - interrupts: interrupt specifier for the controller. The format and value of
+     the interrupt specifier depends on the interrupt parent for the controller.
+
+   In addition, following properties must be present in node of every bank
+   of pins supporting GPIO interrupts:
+
+   - interrupt-controller: identifies the controller node as interrupt-parent.
+   - #interrupt-cells: the value of this property should be 2.
+     - First Cell: represents the external gpio interrupt number local to the
+       external gpio interrupt space of the controller.
+     - Second Cell: flags to identify the type of the interrupt
+       - 1 = rising edge triggered
+       - 2 = falling edge triggered
+       - 3 = rising and falling edge triggered
+       - 4 = high level triggered
+       - 8 = low level triggered
+
+B. External Wakeup Interrupts: For supporting external wakeup interrupts, a
+   child node representing the external wakeup interrupt controller should be
+   included in the pin-controller device node. This child node should include
+   the following properties.
+
+   - compatible: identifies the type of the external wakeup interrupt controller
+     The possible values are:
+     - samsung,s3c2410-wakeup-eint: represents wakeup interrupt controller
+       found on Samsung S3C24xx SoCs except S3C2412 and S3C2413,
+     - samsung,s3c2412-wakeup-eint: represents wakeup interrupt controller
+       found on Samsung S3C2412 and S3C2413 SoCs,
+     - samsung,s3c64xx-wakeup-eint: represents wakeup interrupt controller
+       found on Samsung S3C64xx SoCs,
+     - samsung,exynos4210-wakeup-eint: represents wakeup interrupt controller
+       found on Samsung Exynos4210 and S5PC110/S5PV210 SoCs.
+   - interrupt-parent: phandle of the interrupt parent to which the external
+     wakeup interrupts are forwarded to.
+   - interrupts: interrupt used by multiplexed wakeup interrupts.
+
+   In addition, following properties must be present in node of every bank
+   of pins supporting wake-up interrupts:
+
+   - interrupt-controller: identifies the node as interrupt-parent.
+   - #interrupt-cells: the value of this property should be 2
+     - First Cell: represents the external wakeup interrupt number local to
+       the external wakeup interrupt space of the controller.
+     - Second Cell: flags to identify the type of the interrupt
+       - 1 = rising edge triggered
+       - 2 = falling edge triggered
+       - 3 = rising and falling edge triggered
+       - 4 = high level triggered
+       - 8 = low level triggered
+
+   Node of every bank of pins supporting direct wake-up interrupts (without
+   multiplexing) must contain following properties:
+
+   - interrupt-parent: phandle of the interrupt parent to which the external
+     wakeup interrupts are forwarded to.
+   - interrupts: interrupts of the interrupt parent which are used for external
+     wakeup interrupts from pins of the bank, must contain interrupts for all
+     pins of the bank.
+
+Aliases:
+
+All the pin controller nodes should be represented in the aliases node using
+the following format 'pinctrl{n}' where n is a unique number for the alias.
+
+Example: A pin-controller node with pin banks:
+
+	pinctrl_0: pinctrl@11400000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-pinctrl";
+		reg = <0x11400000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 47 0>;
+
+		/* ... */
+
+		/* Pin bank without external interrupts */
+		gpy0: gpy0 {
+			gpio-controller;
+			#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		};
+
+		/* ... */
+
+		/* Pin bank with external GPIO or muxed wake-up interrupts */
+		gpj0: gpj0 {
+			gpio-controller;
+			#gpio-cells = <2>;
+
+			interrupt-controller;
+			#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+		};
+
+		/* ... */
+
+		/* Pin bank with external direct wake-up interrupts */
+		gpx0: gpx0 {
+			gpio-controller;
+			#gpio-cells = <2>;
+
+			interrupt-controller;
+			interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+			interrupts = <0 16 0>, <0 17 0>, <0 18 0>, <0 19 0>,
+				     <0 20 0>, <0 21 0>, <0 22 0>, <0 23 0>;
+			#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+		};
+
+		/* ... */
+	};
+
+Example 1: A pin-controller node with pin groups.
+
+	pinctrl_0: pinctrl@11400000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-pinctrl";
+		reg = <0x11400000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 47 0>;
+
+		/* ... */
+
+		uart0_data: uart0-data {
+			samsung,pins = "gpa0-0", "gpa0-1";
+			samsung,pin-function = <2>;
+			samsung,pin-pud = <0>;
+			samsung,pin-drv = <0>;
+		};
+
+		uart0_fctl: uart0-fctl {
+			samsung,pins = "gpa0-2", "gpa0-3";
+			samsung,pin-function = <2>;
+			samsung,pin-pud = <0>;
+			samsung,pin-drv = <0>;
+		};
+
+		uart1_data: uart1-data {
+			samsung,pins = "gpa0-4", "gpa0-5";
+			samsung,pin-function = <2>;
+			samsung,pin-pud = <0>;
+			samsung,pin-drv = <0>;
+		};
+
+		uart1_fctl: uart1-fctl {
+			samsung,pins = "gpa0-6", "gpa0-7";
+			samsung,pin-function = <2>;
+			samsung,pin-pud = <0>;
+			samsung,pin-drv = <0>;
+		};
+
+		i2c2_bus: i2c2-bus {
+			samsung,pins = "gpa0-6", "gpa0-7";
+			samsung,pin-function = <3>;
+			samsung,pin-pud = <3>;
+			samsung,pin-drv = <0>;
+		};
+	};
+
+Example 2: A pin-controller node with external wakeup interrupt controller node.
+
+	pinctrl_1: pinctrl@11000000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-pinctrl";
+		reg = <0x11000000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 46 0>
+
+		/* ... */
+
+		wakeup-interrupt-controller {
+			compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-wakeup-eint";
+			interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+			interrupts = <0 32 0>;
+		};
+	};
+
+Example 3: A uart client node that supports 'default' and 'flow-control' states.
+
+	uart@13800000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-uart";
+		reg = <0x13800000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <0 52 0>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default", "flow-control;
+		pinctrl-0 = <&uart0_data>;
+		pinctrl-1 = <&uart0_data &uart0_fctl>;
+	};
+
+Example 4: Set up the default pin state for uart controller.
+
+	static int s3c24xx_serial_probe(struct platform_device *pdev) {
+		struct pinctrl *pinctrl;
+
+		/* ... */
+
+		pinctrl = devm_pinctrl_get_select_default(&pdev->dev);
+	}
+
+Example 5: A display port client node that supports 'default' pinctrl state
+	   and gpio binding.
+
+	display-port-controller {
+		/* ... */
+
+		samsung,hpd-gpio = <&gpx2 6 0>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&dp_hpd>;
+	};
+
+Example 6: Request the gpio for display port controller
+
+	static int exynos_dp_probe(struct platform_device *pdev)
+	{
+		int hpd_gpio, ret;
+		struct device *dev = &pdev->dev;
+		struct device_node *dp_node = dev->of_node;
+
+		/* ... */
+
+		hpd_gpio = of_get_named_gpio(dp_node, "samsung,hpd-gpio", 0);
+
+		/* ... */
+
+		ret = devm_gpio_request_one(&pdev->dev, hpd_gpio, GPIOF_IN,
+					    "hpd_gpio");
+		/* ... */
+	}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,abx500.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,abx500.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e3865e136067
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,abx500.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,352 @@
+ST Ericsson abx500 pinmux controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "stericsson,ab8500-gpio",  "stericsson,ab8540-gpio",
+	      "stericsson,ab8505-gpio", "stericsson,ab9540-gpio",
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+ST Ericsson's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of
+subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a
+pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the
+mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration
+parameters, such as input, output, pull up, pull down...
+
+The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be enumerated
+and processed purely based on their content.
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- ste,pins : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a pin or
+    group.
+
+Optional subnode-properties:
+- ste,function: A string containing the name of the function to mux to the
+  pin or group.
+
+- generic pin configuration option to use. Example :
+
+	default_cfg {
+		ste,pins = "GPIO1";
+		bias-disable;
+	};
+
+- ste,config: Handle of pin configuration node containing the generic
+  pinconfig options to use, as described in pinctrl-bindings.txt in
+  this directory. Example :
+
+	pcfg_bias_disable: pcfg_bias_disable {
+		bias-disable;
+	};
+
+	default_cfg {
+		ste,pins = "GPIO1";
+		ste.config = <&pcfg_bias_disable>;
+	};
+
+Example board file extract:
+
+&pinctrl_abx500 {
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&sysclkreq2_default_mode>, <&sysclkreq3_default_mode>, <&gpio3_default_mode>, <&sysclkreq6_default_mode>, <&pwmout1_default_mode>, <&pwmout2_default_mode>, <&pwmout3_default_mode>, <&adi1_default_mode>, <&dmic12_default_mode>, <&dmic34_default_mode>, <&dmic56_default_mode>, <&sysclkreq5_default_mode>, <&batremn_default_mode>, <&service_default_mode>, <&pwrctrl0_default_mode>, <&pwrctrl1_default_mode>, <&pwmextvibra1_default_mode>, <&pwmextvibra2_default_mode>, <&gpio51_default_mode>, <&gpio52_default_mode>, <&gpio53_default_mode>, <&gpio54_default_mode>, <&pdmclkdat_default_mode>;
+
+	sysclkreq2 {
+		sysclkreq2_default_mode: sysclkreq2_default {
+			default_mux {
+				ste,function = "sysclkreq";
+				ste,pins = "sysclkreq2_d_1";
+			};
+			default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO1";
+				bias-disable;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	sysclkreq3 {
+		sysclkreq3_default_mode: sysclkreq3_default {
+			default_mux {
+				ste,function = "sysclkreq";
+				ste,pins = "sysclkreq3_d_1";
+			};
+			default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO2";
+				output-low;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	gpio3 {
+		gpio3_default_mode: gpio3_default {
+			default_mux {
+				ste,function = "gpio";
+				ste,pins = "gpio3_a_1";
+			};
+			default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO3";
+				output-low;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	sysclkreq6 {
+		sysclkreq6_default_mode: sysclkreq6_default {
+			default_mux {
+				ste,function = "sysclkreq";
+				ste,pins = "sysclkreq6_d_1";
+			};
+			default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO4";
+				bias-disable;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	pwmout1 {
+		pwmout1_default_mode: pwmout1_default {
+			default_mux {
+				ste,function = "pwmout";
+				ste,pins = "pwmout1_d_1";
+			};
+			default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO14";
+				output-low;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	pwmout2 {
+		pwmout2_default_mode: pwmout2_default {
+			pwmout2_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "pwmout";
+				ste,pins = "pwmout2_d_1";
+			};
+			pwmout2_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO15";
+				output-low;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	pwmout3 {
+		pwmout3_default_mode: pwmout3_default {
+			pwmout3_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "pwmout";
+				ste,pins = "pwmout3_d_1";
+			};
+			pwmout3_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO16";
+				output-low;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	adi1 {
+
+		adi1_default_mode: adi1_default {
+			adi1_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "adi1";
+				ste,pins = "adi1_d_1";
+			};
+			adi1_default_cfg1 {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO17","GPIO19","GPIO20";
+				bias-disable;
+			};
+			adi1_default_cfg2 {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO18";
+				output-low;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	dmic12 {
+		dmic12_default_mode: dmic12_default {
+			dmic12_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "dmic";
+				ste,pins = "dmic12_d_1";
+			};
+			dmic12_default_cfg1 {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO27";
+				output-low;
+			};
+			dmic12_default_cfg2 {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO28";
+				bias-disable;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	dmic34 {
+		dmic34_default_mode: dmic34_default {
+			dmic34_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "dmic";
+				ste,pins = "dmic34_d_1";
+			};
+			dmic34_default_cfg1 {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO29";
+				output-low;
+			};
+			dmic34_default_cfg2 {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO30";
+				bias-disable;{
+
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	dmic56 {
+		dmic56_default_mode: dmic56_default {
+			dmic56_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "dmic";
+				ste,pins = "dmic56_d_1";
+			};
+			dmic56_default_cfg1 {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO31";
+				output-low;
+			};
+			dmic56_default_cfg2 {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO32";
+				bias-disable;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	sysclkreq5 {
+		sysclkreq5_default_mode: sysclkreq5_default {
+			sysclkreq5_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "sysclkreq";
+				ste,pins = "sysclkreq5_d_1";
+			};
+			sysclkreq5_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO42";
+				output-low;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	batremn {
+		batremn_default_mode: batremn_default {
+			batremn_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "batremn";
+				ste,pins = "batremn_d_1";
+			};
+			batremn_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO43";
+				bias-disable;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	service {
+		service_default_mode: service_default {
+			service_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "service";
+				ste,pins = "service_d_1";
+			};
+			service_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO44";
+				bias-disable;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	pwrctrl0 {
+		pwrctrl0_default_mux: pwrctrl0_mux {
+			pwrctrl0_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "pwrctrl";
+				ste,pins = "pwrctrl0_d_1";
+			};
+		};
+		pwrctrl0_default_mode: pwrctrl0_default {
+			pwrctrl0_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO45";
+				bias-disable;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	pwrctrl1 {
+		pwrctrl1_default_mux: pwrctrl1_mux {
+			pwrctrl1_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "pwrctrl";
+				ste,pins = "pwrctrl1_d_1";
+			};
+		};
+		pwrctrl1_default_mode: pwrctrl1_default {
+			pwrctrl1_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO46";
+				bias-disable;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	pwmextvibra1 {
+		pwmextvibra1_default_mode: pwmextvibra1_default {
+			pwmextvibra1_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "pwmextvibra";
+				ste,pins = "pwmextvibra1_d_1";
+			};
+			pwmextvibra1_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO47";
+				bias-disable;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	pwmextvibra2 {
+		pwmextvibra2_default_mode: pwmextvibra2_default {
+			pwmextvibra2_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "pwmextvibra";
+				ste,pins = "pwmextvibra2_d_1";
+			};
+			pwmextvibra1_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO48";
+				bias-disable;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	gpio51 {
+		gpio51_default_mode: gpio51_default {
+				gpio51_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "gpio";
+				ste,pins = "gpio51_a_1";
+			};
+			gpio51_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO51";
+				output-low;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	gpio52 {
+		gpio52_default_mode: gpio52_default {
+			gpio52_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "gpio";
+				ste,pins = "gpio52_a_1";
+			};
+			gpio52_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO52";
+				bias-pull-down;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	gpio53 {
+		gpio53_default_mode: gpio53_default {
+			gpio53_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "gpio";
+				ste,pins = "gpio53_a_1";
+			};
+			gpio53_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO53";
+				bias-pull-down;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	gpio54 {
+		gpio54_default_mode: gpio54_default {
+			gpio54_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "gpio";
+				ste,pins = "gpio54_a_1";
+			};
+			gpio54_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO54";
+				output-low;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+	pdmclkdat {
+		pdmclkdat_default_mode: pdmclkdat_default {
+			pdmclkdat_default_mux {
+				ste,function = "pdm";
+				ste,pins = "pdmclkdat_d_1";
+			};
+			pdmclkdat_default_cfg {
+				ste,pins = "GPIO55", "GPIO56";
+				bias-disable;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,nomadik.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,nomadik.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6b33b9f18e88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,nomadik.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+ST Ericsson Nomadik pinmux controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "stericsson,db8500-pinctrl", "stericsson,db8540-pinctrl",
+              "stericsson,stn8815-pinctrl"
+- reg: Should contain the register physical address and length of the PRCMU.
+
+Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the
+common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the
+phrase "pin configuration node".
+
+ST Ericsson's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of
+subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a
+pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the
+mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration
+parameters, such as input, output, pull up, pull down...
+
+The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be enumerated
+and processed purely based on their content.
+
+Required subnode-properties:
+- ste,pins : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a pin or
+    group.
+
+Optional subnode-properties:
+- ste,function: A string containing the name of the function to mux to the
+  pin or group.
+
+- ste,config: Handle of pin configuration node (e.g. ste,config = <&slpm_in_wkup_pdis>)
+
+- ste,input : <0/1/2>
+	0: input with no pull
+	1: input with pull up,
+	2: input with pull down,
+
+- ste,output: <0/1/2>
+	0: output low,
+	1: output high,
+	2: output (value is not specified).
+
+- ste,sleep: <0/1>
+	0: sleep mode disable,
+	1: sleep mode enable.
+
+- ste,sleep-input: <0/1/2/3>
+	0: sleep input with no pull,
+	1: sleep input with pull up,
+	2: sleep input with pull down.
+	3: sleep input and keep last input configuration (no pull, pull up or pull down).
+
+- ste,sleep-output: <0/1/2>
+	0: sleep output low,
+	1: sleep output high,
+	2: sleep output (value is not specified).
+
+- ste,sleep-gpio: <0/1>
+	0: disable sleep gpio mode,
+	1: enable sleep gpio mode.
+
+- ste,sleep-wakeup: <0/1>
+	0: wake-up detection enabled,
+	1: wake-up detection disabled.
+
+- ste,sleep-pull-disable: <0/1>
+	0: GPIO pull-up or pull-down resistor is enabled, when pin is an input,
+	1: GPIO pull-up and pull-down resistor are disabled.
+
+Example board file extract:
+
+	pinctrl@80157000 {
+		compatible = "stericsson,db8500-pinctrl";
+		reg = <0x80157000 0x2000>;
+
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+
+		slpm_in_wkup_pdis: slpm_in_wkup_pdis {
+			ste,sleep = <1>;
+			ste,sleep-input = <3>;
+			ste,sleep-wakeup = <1>;
+			ste,sleep-pull-disable = <0>;
+		};
+
+		slpm_out_hi_wkup_pdis: slpm_out_hi_wkup_pdis {
+			ste,sleep = <1>;
+			ste,sleep-output = <1>;
+			ste,sleep-wakeup = <1>;
+			ste,sleep-pull-disable = <0>;
+		};
+
+		slpm_out_wkup_pdis: slpm_out_wkup_pdis {
+			ste,sleep = <1>;
+			ste,sleep-output = <2>;
+			ste,sleep-wakeup = <1>;
+			ste,sleep-pull-disable = <0>;
+		};
+
+		uart0 {
+			uart0_default_mux: uart0_mux {
+				u0_default_mux {
+					ste,function = "u0";
+					ste,pins = "u0_a_1";
+				};
+			};
+			uart0_default_mode: uart0_default {
+				uart0_default_cfg1 {
+					ste,pins = "GPIO0", "GPIO2";
+					ste,input = <1>;
+				};
+
+				uart0_default_cfg2 {
+					ste,pins = "GPIO1", "GPIO3";
+					ste,output = <1>;
+				};
+			};
+			uart0_sleep_mode: uart0_sleep {
+				uart0_sleep_cfg1 {
+					ste,pins = "GPIO0", "GPIO2";
+					ste,config = <&slpm_in_wkup_pdis>;
+				};
+				uart0_sleep_cfg2 {
+					ste,pins = "GPIO1";
+					ste,config = <&slpm_out_hi_wkup_pdis>;
+				};
+				uart0_sleep_cfg3 {
+					ste,pins = "GPIO3";
+					ste,config = <&slpm_out_wkup_pdis>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+	uart@80120000 {
+		compatible = "arm,pl011", "arm,primecell";
+		reg = <0x80120000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 11 0x4>;
+
+		pinctrl-names = "default","sleep";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&uart0_default_mux>, <&uart0_default_mode>;
+		pinctrl-1 = <&uart0_sleep_mode>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinmux/pinmux_nvidia.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinmux/pinmux_nvidia.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 36f82dbdd14d..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinmux/pinmux_nvidia.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-NVIDIA Tegra 2 pinmux controller
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : "nvidia,tegra20-pinmux"
-
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/opp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/opp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..74499e5033fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/opp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+* Generic OPP Interface
+
+SoCs have a standard set of tuples consisting of frequency and
+voltage pairs that the device will support per voltage domain. These
+are called Operating Performance Points or OPPs.
+
+Properties:
+- operating-points: An array of 2-tuples items, and each item consists
+  of frequency and voltage like <freq-kHz vol-uV>.
+	freq: clock frequency in kHz
+	vol: voltage in microvolt
+
+Examples:
+
+cpu@0 {
+	compatible = "arm,cortex-a9";
+	reg = <0>;
+	next-level-cache = <&L2>;
+	operating-points = <
+		/* kHz    uV */
+		792000  1100000
+		396000  950000
+		198000  850000
+	>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/btemp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/btemp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0ba1bcc7f33a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/btemp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+=== AB8500 Battery Temperature Monitor Driver ===
+
+The properties below describes the node for btemp driver.
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible = Shall be: "stericsson,ab8500-btemp"
+- battery = Shall be battery specific information
+
+	Example:
+	ab8500_btemp {
+		compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-btemp";
+		battery	   = <&ab8500_battery>;
+	};
+
+For information on battery specific node, Ref:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/fg.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/chargalg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/chargalg.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ef5328371122
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/chargalg.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+=== AB8500 Charging Algorithm Driver ===
+
+The properties below describes the node for chargalg driver.
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible = Shall be: "stericsson,ab8500-chargalg"
+- battery = Shall be battery specific information
+
+Example:
+ab8500_chargalg {
+	compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-chargalg";
+	battery	   = <&ab8500_battery>;
+};
+
+For information on battery specific node, Ref:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/fg.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/charger.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/charger.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6bdbb08ea9e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/charger.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+=== AB8500 Charger Driver ===
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible = Shall be "stericsson,ab8500-charger"
+- battery = Shall be battery specific information
+	Example:
+	ab8500_charger {
+		compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-charger";
+		battery	   = <&ab8500_battery>;
+	};
+
+- vddadc-supply: Supply for USB and Main charger
+	Example:
+	ab8500-charger {
+		vddadc-supply	= <&ab8500_ldo_tvout_reg>;
+	}
+- autopower_cfg:
+	Boolean value depicting the presence of 'automatic poweron after powerloss'
+	Example:
+	ab8500-charger {
+		autopower_cfg;
+	};
+
+For information on battery specific node, Ref:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/fg.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/fg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/fg.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ccafcb9112fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ab8500/fg.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+=== AB8500 Fuel Gauge Driver ===
+
+AB8500 is a mixed signal multimedia and power management
+device comprising: power and energy-management-module,
+wall-charger, usb-charger, audio codec, general purpose adc,
+tvout, clock management and sim card interface.
+
+Fuelgauge support is part of energy-management-modules, other
+components of this module are:
+main-charger, usb-combo-charger and battery-temperature-monitoring.
+
+The properties below describes the node for fuelgauge driver.
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible = This shall be: "stericsson,ab8500-fg"
+- battery = Shall be battery specific information
+	Example:
+	ab8500_fg {
+		compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-fg";
+		battery	   = <&ab8500_battery>;
+	};
+
+dependent node:
+	ab8500_battery: ab8500_battery {
+	};
+	This node will provide information on 'thermistor interface' and
+	'battery technology type' used.
+
+Properties of this node are:
+thermistor-on-batctrl:
+	A boolean value indicating thermistor interface	to battery
+
+	Note:
+	'btemp' and 'batctrl' are the pins interfaced for battery temperature
+	measurement, 'btemp' signal is used when NTC(negative temperature
+	coefficient) resister is interfaced external to battery whereas
+	'batctrl' pin is used when NTC resister is internal to battery.
+
+	Example:
+	ab8500_battery: ab8500_battery {
+		thermistor-on-batctrl;
+	};
+	indicates: NTC resister is internal to battery, 'batctrl' is used
+		for thermal measurement.
+
+	The absence of property 'thermal-on-batctrl' indicates
+	NTC resister is external to battery and  'btemp' signal is used
+	for thermal measurement.
+
+battery-type:
+	This shall be the battery manufacturing technology type,
+	allowed types are:
+		"UNKNOWN" "NiMH" "LION" "LIPO" "LiFe" "NiCd" "LiMn"
+	Example:
+	ab8500_battery: ab8500_battery {
+		stericsson,battery-type = "LIPO";
+	}
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/lp8727_charger.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/lp8727_charger.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2246bc5c874b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/lp8727_charger.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+Binding for TI/National Semiconductor LP8727 Charger
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,lp8727"
+- reg: I2C slave address 27h
+
+Optional properties:
+- interrupt-parent: interrupt controller node (see interrupt binding[0])
+- interrupts: interrupt specifier (see interrupt binding[0])
+- debounce-ms: interrupt debounce time. (u32)
+
+AC and USB charging parameters
+- charger-type: "ac" or "usb" (string)
+- eoc-level: value of 'enum lp8727_eoc_level' (u8)
+- charging-current: value of 'enum lp8727_ichg' (u8)
+
+[0]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt
+
+Example)
+
+lp8727@27 {
+	compatible = "ti,lp8727";
+	reg = <0x27>;
+
+	/* GPIO 134 is used for LP8728 interrupt pin */
+	interrupt-parent = <&gpio5>; 	/* base = 128 */
+	interrupts = <6 0x2>;		/* offset = 6, falling edge type */
+
+	debounce-ms = <300>;
+
+	/* AC charger: 5% EOC and 500mA charging current */
+	ac {
+		charger-type = "ac";
+		eoc-level = /bits/ 8 <0>;
+		charging-current = /bits/ 8 <4>;
+	};
+
+	/* USB charger: 10% EOC and 400mA charging current */
+	usb {
+		charger-type = "usb";
+		eoc-level = /bits/ 8 <1>;
+		charging-current = /bits/ 8 <2>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/max17042_battery.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/max17042_battery.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5bc9b685cf8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/max17042_battery.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+max17042_battery
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Required properties :
+ - compatible : "maxim,max17042"
+
+Optional properties :
+ - maxim,rsns-microohm : Resistance of rsns resistor in micro Ohms
+                         (datasheet-recommended value is 10000).
+   Defining this property enables current-sense functionality.
+
+Example:
+
+	battery-charger@36 {
+		compatible = "maxim,max17042";
+		reg = <0x36>;
+		maxim,rsns-microohm = <10000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/max8925_batter.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/max8925_batter.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d7e3e0c0f71d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/max8925_batter.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+max8925-battery bindings
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Optional properties :
+ - batt-detect: whether support battery detect
+ - topoff-threshold: set charging current in topoff mode
+ - fast-charge: set charging current in fast mode
+ - no-temp-support: whether support temperature protection detect
+ - no-insert-detect: whether support insert detect
+
+Example:
+	charger {
+		batt-detect = <0>;
+		topoff-threshold = <1>;
+		fast-charge = <7>;
+		no-temp-support = <0>;
+		no-insert-detect = <0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/msm-poweroff.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/msm-poweroff.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ce44ad357565
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/msm-poweroff.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+MSM Restart Driver
+
+A power supply hold (ps-hold) bit is set to power the msm chipsets.
+Clearing that bit allows us to restart/poweroff. The difference
+between poweroff and restart is determined by unique power manager IC
+settings.
+
+Required Properties:
+-compatible: "qcom,pshold"
+-reg: Specifies the physical address of the ps-hold register
+
+Example:
+
+	restart@fc4ab000 {
+		compatible = "qcom,pshold";
+		reg = <0xfc4ab000 0x4>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/power_supply.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/power_supply.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8391bfa0edac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/power_supply.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+Power Supply Core Support
+
+Optional Properties:
+ - power-supplies : This property is added to a supply in order to list the
+   devices which supply it power, referenced by their phandles.
+
+Example:
+
+	usb-charger: power@e {
+		compatible = "some,usb-charger";
+		...
+	};
+
+	ac-charger: power@c {
+		compatible = "some,ac-charger";
+		...
+	};
+
+	battery@b {
+		compatible = "some,battery";
+		...
+		power-supplies = <&usb-charger>, <&ac-charger>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/qnap-poweroff.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/qnap-poweroff.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0347d8350d94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/qnap-poweroff.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+* QNAP Power Off
+
+QNAP NAS devices have a microcontroller controlling the main power
+supply. This microcontroller is connected to UART1 of the Kirkwood and
+Orion5x SoCs. Sending the character 'A', at 19200 baud, tells the
+microcontroller to turn the power off. This driver adds a handler to
+pm_power_off which is called to turn the power off.
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible: Should be "qnap,power-off"
+
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for UART1
+- clocks: tclk clock
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/restart-poweroff.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/restart-poweroff.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5776e684afda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/restart-poweroff.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+* Restart Power Off
+
+Buffalo Linkstation LS-XHL and LS-CHLv2, and other devices power off
+by restarting and letting u-boot keep hold of the machine until the
+user presses a button.
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible: Should be "restart-poweroff"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/tps65090.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/tps65090.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8e5e0d3910df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/tps65090.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+TPS65090 Frontend PMU with Switchmode Charger
+
+Required Properties:
+-compatible: "ti,tps65090-charger"
+
+Optional Properties:
+-ti,enable-low-current-chrg: Enables charging when a low current is detected
+ while the default logic is to stop charging.
+
+This node is a subnode of the tps65090 PMIC.
+
+Example:
+
+	tps65090-charger {
+		compatible = "ti,tps65090-charger";
+		ti,enable-low-current-chrg;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/emac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/emac.txt
index 2161334a7ca5..712baf6c3e24 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/emac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/emac.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
     4xx/Axon EMAC ethernet nodes
 
     The EMAC ethernet controller in IBM and AMCC 4xx chips, and also
-    the Axon bridge.  To operate this needs to interact with a ths
+    the Axon bridge.  To operate this needs to interact with a this
     special McMAL DMA controller, and sometimes an RGMII or ZMII
     interface.  In addition to the nodes and properties described
     below, the node for the OPB bus on which the EMAC sits must have a
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpus.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..922c30ad90d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpus.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+===================================================================
+Power Architecture CPU Binding
+Copyright 2013 Freescale Semiconductor Inc.
+
+Power Architecture CPUs in Freescale SOCs are represented in device trees as
+per the definition in ePAPR.
+
+In addition to the ePAPR definitions, the properties defined below may be
+present on CPU nodes.
+
+PROPERTIES
+
+   - fsl,eref-*
+        Usage: optional
+        Value type: <empty>
+        Definition: The EREF (EREF: A Programmer.s Reference Manual for
+	Freescale Power Architecture) defines the architecture for Freescale
+	Power CPUs.  The EREF defines some architecture categories not defined
+	by the Power ISA.  For these EREF-specific categories, the existence of
+	a property named fsl,eref-[CAT], where [CAT] is the abbreviated category
+	name with all uppercase letters converted to lowercase, indicates that
+	the category is supported by the implementation.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/guts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/guts.txt
index 9e7a2417dac5..7f150b5012cc 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/guts.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/guts.txt
@@ -17,9 +17,20 @@ Recommended properties:
    contains a functioning "reset control register" (i.e. the board
    is wired to reset upon setting the HRESET_REQ bit in this register).
 
-Example:
+ - fsl,liodn-bits : Indicates the number of defined bits in the LIODN
+   registers, for those SOCs that have a PAMU device.
+
+Examples:
 	global-utilities@e0000 {	/* global utilities block */
 		compatible = "fsl,mpc8548-guts";
 		reg = <e0000 1000>;
 		fsl,has-rstcr;
 	};
+
+	guts: global-utilities@e0000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,qoriq-device-config-1.0";
+		reg = <0xe0000 0xe00>;
+		fsl,has-rstcr;
+		#sleep-cells = <1>;
+		fsl,liodn-bits = <12>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt
index 939a26d541f6..d5e370450ac0 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt
@@ -12,9 +12,12 @@ Properties:
 - #size-cells : Either one or two, depending on how large each chipselect
                 can be.
 - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
-- interrupts : IFC has two interrupts. The first one is the "common"
-               interrupt(CM_EVTER_STAT), and second is the NAND interrupt
-               (NAND_EVTER_STAT).
+- interrupts: IFC may have one or two interrupts.  If two interrupt
+              specifiers are present, the first is the "common"
+              interrupt (CM_EVTER_STAT), and the second is the NAND
+              interrupt (NAND_EVTER_STAT).  If there is only one,
+              that interrupt reports both types of event.
+
 
 - ranges : Each range corresponds to a single chipselect, and covers
            the entire access window as configured.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/interlaken-lac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/interlaken-lac.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..641bc13983e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/interlaken-lac.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,309 @@
+===============================================================================
+Freescale Interlaken Look-Aside Controller Device Bindings
+Copyright 2012 Freescale Semiconductor Inc.
+
+CONTENTS
+  - Interlaken Look-Aside Controller (LAC) Node
+  - Example LAC Node
+  - Interlaken Look-Aside Controller (LAC) Software Portal Node
+  - Interlaken Look-Aside Controller (LAC) Software Portal Child Nodes
+  - Example LAC SWP Node with Child Nodes
+
+==============================================================================
+Interlaken Look-Aside Controller (LAC) Node
+
+DESCRIPTION
+
+The Interlaken is a narrow, high speed channelized chip-to-chip interface. To
+facilitate interoperability between a data path device and a look-aside
+co-processor, the Interlaken Look-Aside protocol is defined for short
+transaction-related transfers. Although based on the Interlaken protocol,
+Interlaken Look-Aside is not directly compatible with Interlaken and can be
+considered a different operation mode.
+
+The Interlaken LA controller connects internal platform to Interlaken serial
+interface. It accepts LA command through software portals, which are system
+memory mapped 4KB spaces. The LA commands are then translated into the
+Interlaken control words and data words, which are sent on TX side to TCAM
+through SerDes lanes.
+
+There are two 4KiB spaces defined within the LAC global register memory map.
+There is a full register set at 0x0000-0x0FFF (also known as the "hypervisor"
+version), and a subset at 0x1000-0x1FFF.  The former is a superset of the
+latter, and includes certain registers that should not be accessible to
+partitioned software.  Separate nodes are used for each region, with a phandle
+linking the hypervisor node to the normal operating node.
+
+PROPERTIES
+
+  - compatible
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <string>
+	Definition: Must include "fsl,interlaken-lac". This represents only
+		those LAC CCSR registers not protected in partitioned
+		software. The version of the device is determined by the LAC
+		IP Block Revision Register (IPBRR0) at offset 0x0BF8.
+
+		Table of correspondences between IPBRR0 values and example
+		chips:
+			Value		Device
+			-----------	-------
+			0x02000100	T4240
+
+		The Hypervisor node has a different compatible. It must include
+		"fsl,interlaken-lac-hv". This node represents the protected
+		LAC register space and is required except inside a partition
+		where access to the hypervisor node is to be denied.
+
+  - fsl,non-hv-node
+	Usage: required in "fsl,interlaken-lac-hv"
+	Value type: <phandle>
+	Definition: Points to the non-protected LAC CCSR mapped register space
+		node.
+
+  - reg
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
+	Definition: A standard property. The first resource represents the
+		Interlaken LAC configuration registers.
+
+  - interrupts:
+	Usage: required in non-hv node only
+	Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
+	Definition: Interrupt mapping for Interlaken LAC error IRQ.
+
+EXAMPLE
+	lac: lac@229000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac"
+		reg = <0x229000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <16 2 1 18>;
+	};
+
+	lac-hv@228000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-hv"
+		reg = <0x228000 0x1000>;
+		fsl,non-hv-node = <&lac>;
+	};
+
+===============================================================================
+Interlaken Look-Aside Controller (LAC) Software Portal Container Node
+
+DESCRIPTION
+The Interlaken Look-Aside Controller (LAC) utilizes Software Portals to accept
+Interlaken Look-Aside (ILA) commands. The Interlaken LAC software portal
+memory map occupies 128KB of memory space. The software portal memory space is
+intended to be cache-enabled. WIMG for each software space is required to be
+0010 if stashing is enabled; otherwise, WIMG can be 0000 or 0010.
+
+PROPERTIES
+
+  - #address-cells
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <u32>
+	Definition: A standard property. Must have a value of 1.
+
+  - #size-cells
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <u32>
+	Definition: A standard property. Must have a value of 1.
+
+  - compatible
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <string>
+	Definition: Must include "fsl,interlaken-lac-portals"
+
+  - ranges
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
+	Definition: A standard property. Specifies the address and length
+		of the LAC portal memory space.
+
+===============================================================================
+Interlaken Look-Aside Controller (LAC) Software Portals Child Nodes
+
+DESCRIPTION
+There are up to 24 available software portals with each software portal
+requiring 4KB of consecutive memory within the software portal memory mapped
+space.
+
+PROPERTIES
+
+  - compatible
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <string>
+	Definition: Must include "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-vX.Y" where X is
+		the Major version (IP_MJ) found in the LAC IP Block Revision
+		Register (IPBRR0), at offset 0x0BF8, and Y is the Minor version
+		(IP_MN).
+
+		Table of correspondences between version values and example chips:
+		    Value	Device
+		    ------	-------
+		      1.0	T4240
+
+  - reg
+	Usage: required
+	Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
+	Definition: A standard property.  The first resource represents the
+		Interlaken LAC software portal registers.
+
+  - fsl,liodn
+	Value type: <u32>
+	Definition: The logical I/O device number (LIODN) for this device.  The
+		LIODN is a number expressed by this device and used to perform
+		look-ups in the IOMMU (PAMU) address table when performing
+		DMAs. This property is automatically added by u-boot.
+
+===============================================================================
+EXAMPLE
+
+lac-portals {
+	#address-cells = <0x1>;
+	#size-cells = <0x1>;
+	compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portals";
+	ranges = <0x0 0xf 0xf4400000 0x20000>;
+
+	lportal0: lac-portal@0 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x204>;
+		reg = <0x0 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal1: lac-portal@1000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x205>;
+		reg = <0x1000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal2: lac-portal@2000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x206>;
+		reg = <0x2000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal3: lac-portal@3000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x207>;
+		reg = <0x3000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal4: lac-portal@4000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x208>;
+		reg = <0x4000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal5: lac-portal@5000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x209>;
+		reg = <0x5000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal6: lac-portal@6000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x20A>;
+		reg = <0x6000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal7: lac-portal@7000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x20B>;
+		reg = <0x7000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal8: lac-portal@8000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x20C>;
+		reg = <0x8000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal9: lac-portal@9000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x20D>;
+		reg = <0x9000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal10: lac-portal@A000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x20E>;
+		reg = <0xA000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal11: lac-portal@B000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x20F>;
+		reg = <0xB000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal12: lac-portal@C000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x210>;
+		reg = <0xC000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal13: lac-portal@D000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x211>;
+		reg = <0xD000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal14: lac-portal@E000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x212>;
+		reg = <0xE000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal15: lac-portal@F000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x213>;
+		reg = <0xF000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal16: lac-portal@10000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x214>;
+		reg = <0x10000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal17: lac-portal@11000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x215>;
+		reg = <0x11000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal8: lac-portal@1200 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x216>;
+		reg = <0x12000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal19: lac-portal@13000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x217>;
+		reg = <0x13000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal20: lac-portal@14000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x218>;
+		reg = <0x14000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal21: lac-portal@15000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x219>;
+		reg = <0x15000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal22: lac-portal@16000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x21A>;
+		reg = <0x16000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+	lportal23: lac-portal@17000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,interlaken-lac-portal-v1.0";
+		fsl,liodn = <0x21B>;
+		reg = <0x17000 0x1000>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt
index 5693877ab377..82dd5b65cf48 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt
@@ -1,21 +1,20 @@
 * Freescale MSI interrupt controller
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries,
-  first is "fsl,CHIP-msi", where CHIP is the processor(mpc8610, mpc8572,
-  etc.) and the second is "fsl,mpic-msi" or "fsl,ipic-msi" depending on
-  the parent type.
+- compatible : compatible list, may contain one or two entries
+  The first is "fsl,CHIP-msi", where CHIP is the processor(mpc8610, mpc8572,
+  etc.) and the second is "fsl,mpic-msi" or "fsl,ipic-msi" or
+  "fsl,mpic-msi-v4.3" depending on the parent type and version. If mpic
+  version is 4.3, the number of MSI registers is increased to 16, MSIIR1 is
+  provided to access these 16 registers, and compatible "fsl,mpic-msi-v4.3"
+  should be used. The first entry is optional; the second entry is
+  required.
 
 - reg : It may contain one or two regions. The first region should contain
   the address and the length of the shared message interrupt register set.
-  The second region should contain the address of aliased MSIIR register for
-  platforms that have such an alias.
-
-- msi-available-ranges: use <start count> style section to define which
-  msi interrupt can be used in the 256 msi interrupts. This property is
-  optional, without this, all the 256 MSI interrupts can be used.
-  Each available range must begin and end on a multiple of 32 (i.e.
-  no splitting an individual MSI register or the associated PIC interrupt).
+  The second region should contain the address of aliased MSIIR or MSIIR1
+  register for platforms that have such an alias, if using MSIIR1, the second
+  region must be added because different MSI group has different MSIIR1 offset.
 
 - interrupts : each one of the interrupts here is one entry per 32 MSIs,
   and routed to the host interrupt controller. the interrupts should
@@ -28,6 +27,14 @@ Required properties:
   to MPIC.
 
 Optional properties:
+- msi-available-ranges: use <start count> style section to define which
+  msi interrupt can be used in the 256 msi interrupts. This property is
+  optional, without this, all the MSI interrupts can be used.
+  Each available range must begin and end on a multiple of 32 (i.e.
+  no splitting an individual MSI register or the associated PIC interrupt).
+  MPIC v4.3 does not support this property because the 32 interrupts of an
+  individual register are not continuous when using MSIIR1.
+
 - msi-address-64: 64-bit PCI address of the MSIIR register. The MSIIR register
   is used for MSI messaging.  The address of MSIIR in PCI address space is
   the MSI message address.
@@ -54,6 +61,28 @@ Example:
 		interrupt-parent = <&mpic>;
 	};
 
+	msi@41600 {
+		compatible = "fsl,mpic-msi-v4.3";
+		reg = <0x41600 0x200 0x44148 4>;
+		interrupts = <
+			0xe0 0 0 0
+			0xe1 0 0 0
+			0xe2 0 0 0
+			0xe3 0 0 0
+			0xe4 0 0 0
+			0xe5 0 0 0
+			0xe6 0 0 0
+			0xe7 0 0 0
+			0x100 0 0 0
+			0x101 0 0 0
+			0x102 0 0 0
+			0x103 0 0 0
+			0x104 0 0 0
+			0x105 0 0 0
+			0x106 0 0 0
+			0x107 0 0 0>;
+	};
+
 The Freescale hypervisor and msi-address-64
 -------------------------------------------
 Normally, PCI devices have access to all of CCSR via an ATMU mapping.  The
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/pamu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/pamu.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1f5e329f756c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/pamu.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+Freescale Peripheral Management Access Unit (PAMU) Device Tree Binding
+
+DESCRIPTION
+
+The PAMU is an I/O MMU that provides device-to-memory access control and
+address translation capabilities.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible	: <string>
+		  First entry is a version-specific string, such as
+		  "fsl,pamu-v1.0".  The second is "fsl,pamu".
+- ranges	: <prop-encoded-array>
+		  A standard property. Utilized to describe the memory mapped
+		  I/O space utilized by the controller.  The size should
+		  be set to the total size of the register space of all
+		  physically present PAMU controllers.  For example, for
+		  PAMU v1.0, on an SOC that has five PAMU devices, the size
+		  is 0x5000.
+- interrupts	: <prop-encoded-array>
+		  Interrupt mappings.  The first tuple is the normal PAMU
+		  interrupt, used for reporting access violations.  The second
+		  is for PAMU hardware errors, such as PAMU operation errors
+		  and ECC errors.
+- #address-cells: <u32>
+		  A standard property.
+- #size-cells	: <u32>
+		  A standard property.
+
+Optional properties:
+- reg		: <prop-encoded-array>
+		  A standard property.   It represents the CCSR registers of
+		  all child PAMUs combined.  Include it to provide support
+		  for legacy drivers.
+- interrupt-parent : <phandle>
+		  Phandle to interrupt controller
+
+Child nodes:
+
+Each child node represents one PAMU controller.  Each SOC device that is
+connected to a specific PAMU device should have a "fsl,pamu-phandle" property
+that links to the corresponding specific child PAMU controller.
+
+- reg		: <prop-encoded-array>
+		  A standard property.  Specifies the physical address and
+		  length (relative to the parent 'ranges' property) of this
+		  PAMU controller's configuration registers.  The size should
+		  be set to the size of this PAMU controllers's register space.
+		  For PAMU v1.0, this size is 0x1000.
+- fsl,primary-cache-geometry
+		: <prop-encoded-array>
+		  Two cells that specify the geometry of the primary PAMU
+		  cache.  The first is the number of cache lines, and the
+		  second is the number of "ways".  For direct-mapped caches,
+		  specify a value of 1.
+- fsl,secondary-cache-geometry
+		: <prop-encoded-array>
+		  Two cells that specify the geometry of the secondary PAMU
+		  cache.  The first is the number of cache lines, and the
+		  second is the number of "ways".  For direct-mapped caches,
+		  specify a value of 1.
+
+Device nodes:
+
+Devices that have LIODNs need to specify links to the parent PAMU controller
+(the actual PAMU controller that this device is connected to) and a pointer to
+the LIODN register, if applicable.
+
+- fsl,iommu-parent
+		: <phandle>
+		Phandle to the single, specific PAMU controller node to which
+		this device is connect.  The PAMU topology is represented in
+		the device tree to assist code that dynamically determines the
+		best LIODN values to minimize PAMU cache thrashing.
+
+- fsl,liodn-reg : <prop-encoded-array>
+		  Two cells that specify the location of the LIODN register
+		  for this device.  Required for devices that have a single
+		  LIODN.  The first cell is a phandle to a node that contains
+		  the registers where the LIODN is to be set.  The second is
+		  the offset from the first "reg" resource of the node where
+		  the specific LIODN register is located.
+
+
+Example:
+
+	iommu@20000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,pamu-v1.0", "fsl,pamu";
+		reg = <0x20000 0x5000>;
+		ranges = <0 0x20000 0x5000>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		interrupts = <
+			24 2 0 0
+			16 2 1 30>;
+
+		pamu0: pamu@0 {
+			reg = <0 0x1000>;
+			fsl,primary-cache-geometry = <32 1>;
+			fsl,secondary-cache-geometry = <128 2>;
+		};
+
+		pamu1: pamu@1000 {
+			reg = <0x1000 0x1000>;
+			fsl,primary-cache-geometry = <32 1>;
+			fsl,secondary-cache-geometry = <128 2>;
+		};
+
+		pamu2: pamu@2000 {
+			reg = <0x2000 0x1000>;
+			fsl,primary-cache-geometry = <32 1>;
+			fsl,secondary-cache-geometry = <128 2>;
+		};
+
+		pamu3: pamu@3000 {
+			reg = <0x3000 0x1000>;
+			fsl,primary-cache-geometry = <32 1>;
+			fsl,secondary-cache-geometry = <128 2>;
+		};
+
+		pamu4: pamu@4000 {
+			reg = <0x4000 0x1000>;
+			fsl,primary-cache-geometry = <32 1>;
+			fsl,secondary-cache-geometry = <128 2>;
+		};
+	};
+
+	guts: global-utilities@e0000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,qoriq-device-config-1.0";
+		reg = <0xe0000 0xe00>;
+		fsl,has-rstcr;
+		#sleep-cells = <1>;
+		fsl,liodn-bits = <12>;
+	};
+
+/include/ "qoriq-dma-0.dtsi"
+	dma@100300 {
+		fsl,iommu-parent = <&pamu0>;
+		fsl,liodn-reg = <&guts 0x584>; /* DMA2LIODNR */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/raideng.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/raideng.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4ad29b9ac2ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/raideng.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+* Freescale 85xx RAID Engine nodes
+
+RAID Engine nodes are defined to describe on-chip RAID accelerators.  Each RAID
+Engine should have a separate node.
+
+Supported chips:
+P5020, P5040
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible:	Should contain "fsl,raideng-v1.0" as the value
+		This identifies RAID Engine block. 1 in 1.0 represents
+		major number whereas 0 represents minor number. The
+		version matches the hardware IP version.
+- reg:		offset and length of the register set for the device
+- ranges:	standard ranges property specifying the translation
+		between child address space and parent address space
+
+Example:
+	/* P5020 */
+	raideng: raideng@320000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,raideng-v1.0";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		reg	= <0x320000 0x10000>;
+		ranges	= <0 0x320000 0x10000>;
+	};
+
+
+There must be a sub-node for each job queue present in RAID Engine
+This node must be a sub-node of the main RAID Engine node
+
+- compatible:	Should contain "fsl,raideng-v1.0-job-queue" as the value
+		This identifies the job queue interface
+- reg:		offset and length of the register set for job queue
+- ranges:	standard ranges property specifying the translation
+		between child address space and parent address space
+
+Example:
+	/* P5020 */
+	raideng_jq0@1000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,raideng-v1.0-job-queue";
+		reg	   = <0x1000 0x1000>;
+		ranges	   = <0x0 0x1000 0x1000>;
+	};
+
+
+There must be a sub-node for each job ring present in RAID Engine
+This node must be a sub-node of job queue node
+
+- compatible:	Must contain "fsl,raideng-v1.0-job-ring" as the value
+		This identifies job ring. Should contain either
+		"fsl,raideng-v1.0-hp-ring" or "fsl,raideng-v1.0-lp-ring"
+		depending upon whether ring has high or low priority
+- reg:		offset and length of the register set for job ring
+- interrupts:	interrupt mapping for job ring IRQ
+
+Optional property:
+
+- fsl,liodn:	Specifies the LIODN to be used for Job Ring. This
+		property is normally set by firmware. Value
+		is of 12-bits which is the LIODN number for this JR.
+		This property is used by the IOMMU (PAMU) to distinquish
+		transactions from this JR and than be able to do address
+		translation & protection accordingly.
+
+Example:
+	/* P5020 */
+	raideng_jq0@1000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,raideng-v1.0-job-queue";
+		reg	   = <0x1000 0x1000>;
+		ranges	   = <0x0 0x1000 0x1000>;
+
+		raideng_jr0: jr@0 {
+			compatible = "fsl,raideng-v1.0-job-ring", "fsl,raideng-v1.0-hp-ring";
+			reg	   = <0x0 0x400>;
+			interrupts = <139 2 0 0>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&mpic>;
+			fsl,liodn = <0x41>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/srio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/srio.txt
index b039bcbee134..07abf0f2f440 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/srio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/srio.txt
@@ -8,9 +8,9 @@ Properties:
 	Definition: Must include "fsl,srio" for IP blocks with IP Block
 	Revision Register (SRIO IPBRR1) Major ID equal to 0x01c0.
 
-	Optionally, a compatiable string of "fsl,srio-vX.Y" where X is Major
+	Optionally, a compatible string of "fsl,srio-vX.Y" where X is Major
 	version in IP Block Revision Register and Y is Minor version.  If this
-	compatiable is provided it should be ordered before "fsl,srio".
+	compatible is provided it should be ordered before "fsl,srio".
 
    - reg
 	Usage: required
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ssi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ssi.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 5ff76c9c57d2..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ssi.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-Freescale Synchronous Serial Interface
-
-The SSI is a serial device that communicates with audio codecs.  It can
-be programmed in AC97, I2S, left-justified, or right-justified modes.
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible:       Compatible list, contains "fsl,ssi".
-- cell-index:       The SSI, <0> = SSI1, <1> = SSI2, and so on.
-- reg:              Offset and length of the register set for the device.
-- interrupts:       <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b is a
-                    field that represents an encoding of the sense and
-                    level information for the interrupt.  This should be
-                    encoded based on the information in section 2)
-                    depending on the type of interrupt controller you
-                    have.
-- interrupt-parent: The phandle for the interrupt controller that
-                    services interrupts for this device.
-- fsl,mode:         The operating mode for the SSI interface.
-                    "i2s-slave" - I2S mode, SSI is clock slave
-                    "i2s-master" - I2S mode, SSI is clock master
-                    "lj-slave" - left-justified mode, SSI is clock slave
-                    "lj-master" - l.j. mode, SSI is clock master
-                    "rj-slave" - right-justified mode, SSI is clock slave
-                    "rj-master" - r.j., SSI is clock master
-                    "ac97-slave" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock slave
-                    "ac97-master" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock master
-- fsl,playback-dma: Phandle to a node for the DMA channel to use for
-                    playback of audio.  This is typically dictated by SOC
-                    design.  See the notes below.
-- fsl,capture-dma:  Phandle to a node for the DMA channel to use for
-                    capture (recording) of audio.  This is typically dictated
-                    by SOC design.  See the notes below.
-- fsl,fifo-depth:   The number of elements in the transmit and receive FIFOs.
-                    This number is the maximum allowed value for SFCSR[TFWM0].
-- fsl,ssi-asynchronous:
-                    If specified, the SSI is to be programmed in asynchronous
-                    mode.  In this mode, pins SRCK, STCK, SRFS, and STFS must
-                    all be connected to valid signals.  In synchronous mode,
-                    SRCK and SRFS are ignored.  Asynchronous mode allows
-                    playback and capture to use different sample sizes and
-                    sample rates.  Some drivers may require that SRCK and STCK
-                    be connected together, and SRFS and STFS be connected
-                    together.  This would still allow different sample sizes,
-                    but not different sample rates.
-
-Optional properties:
-- codec-handle:     Phandle to a 'codec' node that defines an audio
-                    codec connected to this SSI.  This node is typically
-                    a child of an I2C or other control node.
-
-Child 'codec' node required properties:
-- compatible:       Compatible list, contains the name of the codec
-
-Child 'codec' node optional properties:
-- clock-frequency:  The frequency of the input clock, which typically comes
-                    from an on-board dedicated oscillator.
-
-Notes on fsl,playback-dma and fsl,capture-dma:
-
-On SOCs that have an SSI, specific DMA channels are hard-wired for playback
-and capture.  On the MPC8610, for example, SSI1 must use DMA channel 0 for
-playback and DMA channel 1 for capture.  SSI2 must use DMA channel 2 for
-playback and DMA channel 3 for capture.  The developer can choose which
-DMA controller to use, but the channels themselves are hard-wired.  The
-purpose of these two properties is to represent this hardware design.
-
-The device tree nodes for the DMA channels that are referenced by
-"fsl,playback-dma" and "fsl,capture-dma" must be marked as compatible with
-"fsl,ssi-dma-channel".  The SOC-specific compatible string (e.g.
-"fsl,mpc8610-dma-channel") can remain.  If these nodes are left as
-"fsl,elo-dma-channel" or "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel", then the generic Elo DMA
-drivers (fsldma) will attempt to use them, and it will conflict with the
-sound drivers.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pps/pps-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pps/pps-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..40bf9c3564a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pps/pps-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Device-Tree Bindings for a PPS Signal on GPIO
+
+These properties describe a PPS (pulse-per-second) signal connected to
+a GPIO pin.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "pps-gpio"
+- gpios: one PPS GPIO in the format described by ../gpio/gpio.txt
+
+Optional properties:
+- assert-falling-edge: when present, assert is indicated by a falling edge
+                       (instead of by a rising edge)
+
+Example:
+	pps {
+		compatible = "pps-gpio";
+		gpios = <&gpio2 6 0>;
+
+		assert-falling-edge;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/atmel-tcb-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/atmel-tcb-pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8031148bcf85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/atmel-tcb-pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+Atmel TCB PWM controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "atmel,tcb-pwm"
+- #pwm-cells: should be 3. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
+  the cells format. The only third cell flag supported by this binding is
+  PWM_POLARITY_INVERTED.
+- tc-block: The Timer Counter block to use as a PWM chip.
+
+Example:
+
+pwm {
+	compatible = "atmel,tcb-pwm";
+	#pwm-cells = <3>;
+	tc-block = <1>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/imx-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/imx-pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b50d7a6d9d7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/imx-pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Freescale i.MX PWM controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "fsl,<soc>-pwm"
+- reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers
+- #pwm-cells: should be 2. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
+  the cells format.
+- interrupts: The interrupt for the pwm controller
+
+Example:
+
+pwm1: pwm@53fb4000 {
+	#pwm-cells = <2>;
+	compatible = "fsl,imx53-pwm", "fsl,imx27-pwm";
+	reg = <0x53fb4000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <61>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/lpc32xx-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/lpc32xx-pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cfe1db3bb6e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/lpc32xx-pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+LPC32XX PWM controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "nxp,lpc3220-pwm"
+- reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers
+
+Examples:
+
+pwm@0x4005C000 {
+	compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-pwm";
+	reg = <0x4005C000 0x8>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/mxs-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/mxs-pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..96cdde5f6208
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/mxs-pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Freescale MXS PWM controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "fsl,imx23-pwm"
+- reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers
+- #pwm-cells: should be 2. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
+  the cells format.
+- fsl,pwm-number: the number of PWM devices
+
+Example:
+
+pwm: pwm@80064000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-pwm", "fsl,imx23-pwm";
+	reg = <0x80064000 0x2000>;
+	#pwm-cells = <2>;
+	fsl,pwm-number = <8>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/nvidia,tegra20-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/nvidia,tegra20-pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c3fc57af8772
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/nvidia,tegra20-pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Tegra SoC PWFM controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be one of:
+  - "nvidia,tegra20-pwm"
+  - "nvidia,tegra30-pwm"
+- reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers
+- #pwm-cells: should be 2. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
+  the cells format.
+
+Example:
+
+	pwm: pwm@7000a000 {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-pwm";
+		reg = <0x7000a000 0x100>;
+		#pwm-cells = <2>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/nxp,pca9685-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/nxp,pca9685-pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f84ec9d291ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/nxp,pca9685-pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+NXP PCA9685 16-channel 12-bit PWM LED controller
+================================================
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: "nxp,pca9685-pwm"
+  - #pwm-cells: Should be 2. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
+    the cells format.
+    The index 16 is the ALLCALL channel, that sets all PWM channels at the same
+    time.
+
+Optional properties:
+  - invert (bool): boolean to enable inverted logic
+  - open-drain (bool): boolean to configure outputs with open-drain structure;
+		       if omitted use totem-pole structure
+
+Example:
+
+For LEDs that are directly connected to the PCA, the following setting is
+applicable:
+
+pca: pca@41 {
+	compatible = "nxp,pca9685-pwm";
+	#pwm-cells = <2>;
+	reg = <0x41>;
+	invert;
+	open-drain;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-samsung.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-samsung.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d61fccd40bad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-samsung.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+* Samsung PWM timers
+
+Samsung SoCs contain PWM timer blocks which can be used for system clock source
+and clock event timers, as well as to drive SoC outputs with PWM signal. Each
+PWM timer block provides 5 PWM channels (not all of them can drive physical
+outputs - see SoC and board manual).
+
+Be aware that the clocksource driver supports only uniprocessor systems.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be one of following:
+    samsung,s3c2410-pwm - for 16-bit timers present on S3C24xx SoCs
+    samsung,s3c6400-pwm - for 32-bit timers present on S3C64xx SoCs
+    samsung,s5p6440-pwm - for 32-bit timers present on S5P64x0 SoCs
+    samsung,s5pc100-pwm - for 32-bit timers present on S5PC100, S5PV210,
+			  Exynos4210 rev0 SoCs
+    samsung,exynos4210-pwm - for 32-bit timers present on Exynos4210,
+                          Exynos4x12 and Exynos5250 SoCs
+- reg: base address and size of register area
+- interrupts: list of timer interrupts (one interrupt per timer, starting at
+  timer 0)
+- clock-names: should contain all following required clock names:
+    - "timers" - PWM base clock used to generate PWM signals,
+  and any subset of following optional clock names:
+    - "pwm-tclk0" - first external PWM clock source,
+    - "pwm-tclk1" - second external PWM clock source.
+  Note that not all IP variants allow using all external clock sources.
+  Refer to SoC documentation to learn which clock source configurations
+  are available.
+- clocks: should contain clock specifiers of all clocks, which input names
+  have been specified in clock-names property, in same order.
+- #pwm-cells: should be 3. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
+  the cells format. The only third cell flag supported by this binding is
+  PWM_POLARITY_INVERTED.
+
+Optional properties:
+- samsung,pwm-outputs: list of PWM channels used as PWM outputs on particular
+    platform - an array of up to 5 elements being indices of PWM channels
+    (from 0 to 4), the order does not matter.
+
+Example:
+	pwm@7f006000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,s3c6400-pwm";
+		reg = <0x7f006000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&vic0>;
+		interrupts = <23>, <24>, <25>, <27>, <28>;
+		clocks = <&clock 67>;
+		clock-names = "timers";
+		samsung,pwm-outputs = <0>, <1>;
+		#pwm-cells = <3>;
+	}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-tiecap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-tiecap.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fb81179dce37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-tiecap.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+TI SOC ECAP based APWM controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must be "ti,<soc>-ecap".
+  for am33xx - compatible = "ti,am33xx-ecap";
+  for da850  - compatible = "ti,da850-ecap", "ti,am33xx-ecap";
+- #pwm-cells: should be 3. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
+  the cells format. The PWM channel index ranges from 0 to 4. The only third
+  cell flag supported by this binding is PWM_POLARITY_INVERTED.
+- reg: physical base address and size of the registers map.
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the ECAP:
+  "ecap<x>", <x> being the 0-based instance number from the HW spec
+
+Example:
+
+ecap0: ecap@0 { /* ECAP on am33xx */
+	compatible = "ti,am33xx-ecap";
+	#pwm-cells = <3>;
+	reg = <0x48300100 0x80>;
+	ti,hwmods = "ecap0";
+};
+
+ecap0: ecap@0 { /* ECAP on da850 */
+	compatible = "ti,da850-ecap", "ti,am33xx-ecap";
+	#pwm-cells = <3>;
+	reg = <0x306000 0x80>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-tiehrpwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-tiehrpwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9c100b2c5b23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-tiehrpwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+TI SOC EHRPWM based PWM controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must be "ti,<soc>-ehrpwm".
+  for am33xx - compatible = "ti,am33xx-ehrpwm";
+  for da850  - compatible = "ti,da850-ehrpwm", "ti,am33xx-ehrpwm";
+- #pwm-cells: should be 3. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
+  the cells format. The only third cell flag supported by this binding is
+  PWM_POLARITY_INVERTED.
+- reg: physical base address and size of the registers map.
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the EHRPWM:
+  "ehrpwm<x>", <x> being the 0-based instance number from the HW spec
+
+Example:
+
+ehrpwm0: ehrpwm@0 { /* EHRPWM on am33xx */
+	compatible = "ti,am33xx-ehrpwm";
+	#pwm-cells = <3>;
+	reg = <0x48300200 0x100>;
+	ti,hwmods = "ehrpwm0";
+};
+
+ehrpwm0: ehrpwm@0 { /* EHRPWM on da850 */
+	compatible = "ti,da850-ehrpwm", "ti,am33xx-ehrpwm";
+	#pwm-cells = <3>;
+	reg = <0x300000 0x2000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-tipwmss.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-tipwmss.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f7eae77f8354
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-tipwmss.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+TI SOC based PWM Subsystem
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must be "ti,am33xx-pwmss";
+- reg: physical base address and size of the registers map.
+- address-cells: Specify the number of u32 entries needed in child nodes.
+		  Should set to 1.
+- size-cells: specify number of u32 entries needed to specify child nodes size
+		in reg property. Should set to 1.
+- ranges: describes the address mapping of a memory-mapped bus. Should set to
+	   physical address map of child's base address, physical address within
+	   parent's address  space and length of the address map. For am33xx,
+	   3 set of child register maps present, ECAP register space, EQEP
+	   register space, EHRPWM register space.
+
+Also child nodes should also populated under PWMSS DT node.
+
+Example:
+pwmss0: pwmss@48300000 {
+	compatible = "ti,am33xx-pwmss";
+	reg = <0x48300000 0x10>;
+	ti,hwmods = "epwmss0";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	status = "disabled";
+	ranges = <0x48300100 0x48300100 0x80   /* ECAP */
+		  0x48300180 0x48300180 0x80   /* EQEP */
+		  0x48300200 0x48300200 0x80>; /* EHRPWM */
+
+	/* child nodes go here */
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8556263b8502
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+Specifying PWM information for devices
+======================================
+
+1) PWM user nodes
+-----------------
+
+PWM users should specify a list of PWM devices that they want to use
+with a property containing a 'pwm-list':
+
+	pwm-list ::= <single-pwm> [pwm-list]
+	single-pwm ::= <pwm-phandle> <pwm-specifier>
+	pwm-phandle : phandle to PWM controller node
+	pwm-specifier : array of #pwm-cells specifying the given PWM
+			(controller specific)
+
+PWM properties should be named "pwms". The exact meaning of each pwms
+property must be documented in the device tree binding for each device.
+An optional property "pwm-names" may contain a list of strings to label
+each of the PWM devices listed in the "pwms" property. If no "pwm-names"
+property is given, the name of the user node will be used as fallback.
+
+Drivers for devices that use more than a single PWM device can use the
+"pwm-names" property to map the name of the PWM device requested by the
+pwm_get() call to an index into the list given by the "pwms" property.
+
+The following example could be used to describe a PWM-based backlight
+device:
+
+	pwm: pwm {
+		#pwm-cells = <2>;
+	};
+
+	[...]
+
+	bl: backlight {
+		pwms = <&pwm 0 5000000>;
+		pwm-names = "backlight";
+	};
+
+Note that in the example above, specifying the "pwm-names" is redundant
+because the name "backlight" would be used as fallback anyway.
+
+pwm-specifier typically encodes the chip-relative PWM number and the PWM
+period in nanoseconds.
+
+Optionally, the pwm-specifier can encode a number of flags (defined in
+<dt-bindings/pwm/pwm.h>) in a third cell:
+- PWM_POLARITY_INVERTED: invert the PWM signal polarity
+
+Example with optional PWM specifier for inverse polarity
+
+	bl: backlight {
+		pwms = <&pwm 0 5000000 PWM_POLARITY_INVERTED>;
+		pwm-names = "backlight";
+	};
+
+2) PWM controller nodes
+-----------------------
+
+PWM controller nodes must specify the number of cells used for the
+specifier using the '#pwm-cells' property.
+
+An example PWM controller might look like this:
+
+	pwm: pwm@7000a000 {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-pwm";
+		reg = <0x7000a000 0x100>;
+		#pwm-cells = <2>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/renesas,tpu-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/renesas,tpu-pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b067e84a94b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/renesas,tpu-pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+* Renesas R-Car Timer Pulse Unit PWM Controller
+
+Required Properties:
+
+  - compatible: should be one of the following.
+    - "renesas,tpu-r8a73a4": for R8A77A4 (R-Mobile APE6) compatible PWM controller.
+    - "renesas,tpu-r8a7740": for R8A7740 (R-Mobile A1) compatible PWM controller.
+    - "renesas,tpu-r8a7790": for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) compatible PWM controller.
+    - "renesas,tpu-sh7372": for SH7372 (SH-Mobile AP4) compatible PWM controller.
+    - "renesas,tpu": for generic R-Car TPU PWM controller.
+
+  - reg: Base address and length of each memory resource used by the PWM
+    controller hardware module.
+
+  - #pwm-cells: should be 3. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
+    the cells format. The only third cell flag supported by this binding is
+    PWM_POLARITY_INVERTED.
+
+Please refer to pwm.txt in this directory for details of the common PWM bindings
+used by client devices.
+
+Example: R8A7740 (R-Car A1) TPU controller node
+
+	tpu: pwm@e6600000 {
+		compatible = "renesas,tpu-r8a7740", "renesas,tpu";
+		reg = <0xe6600000 0x100>;
+		#pwm-cells = <3>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/spear-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/spear-pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b486de2c3fe3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/spear-pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+== ST SPEAr SoC PWM controller ==
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be one of:
+  - "st,spear320-pwm"
+  - "st,spear1340-pwm"
+- reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers
+- #pwm-cells: should be 2. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
+  the cells format.
+
+Example:
+
+        pwm: pwm@a8000000 {
+            compatible ="st,spear320-pwm";
+            reg = <0xa8000000 0x1000>;
+            #pwm-cells = <2>;
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/ti,twl-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/ti,twl-pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4e32bee11201
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/ti,twl-pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Texas Instruments TWL series PWM drivers
+
+Supported PWMs:
+On TWL4030 series: PWM1 and PWM2
+On TWL6030 series: PWM0 and PWM1
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,twl4030-pwm" or "ti,twl6030-pwm"
+- #pwm-cells: should be 2. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
+  the cells format.
+
+Example:
+
+twl_pwm: pwm {
+	compatible = "ti,twl6030-pwm";
+	#pwm-cells = <2>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/ti,twl-pwmled.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/ti,twl-pwmled.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9f4b46090782
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/ti,twl-pwmled.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Texas Instruments TWL series PWM drivers connected to LED terminals
+
+Supported PWMs:
+On TWL4030 series: PWMA and PWMB (connected to LEDA and LEDB terminals)
+On TWL6030 series: LED PWM (mainly used as charging indicator LED)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,twl4030-pwmled" or "ti,twl6030-pwmled"
+- #pwm-cells: should be 2. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
+  the cells format.
+
+Example:
+
+twl_pwmled: pwmled {
+	compatible = "ti,twl6030-pwmled";
+	#pwm-cells = <2>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/vt8500-pwm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/vt8500-pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a76390e6df2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/vt8500-pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+VIA/Wondermedia VT8500/WM8xxx series SoC PWM controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "via,vt8500-pwm"
+- reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers
+- #pwm-cells: should be 3. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of
+  the cells format. The only third cell flag supported by this binding is
+  PWM_POLARITY_INVERTED.
+- clocks: phandle to the PWM source clock
+
+Example:
+
+pwm1: pwm@d8220000 {
+	#pwm-cells = <3>;
+	compatible = "via,vt8500-pwm";
+	reg = <0xd8220000 0x1000>;
+	clocks = <&clkpwm>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/88pm800.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/88pm800.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e8a54c2a5821
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/88pm800.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+Marvell 88PM800 regulator
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "marvell,88pm800"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+- regulators: A node that houses a sub-node for each regulator within the
+  device. Each sub-node is identified using the node's name (or the deprecated
+  regulator-compatible property if present), with valid values listed below.
+  The content of each sub-node is defined by the standard binding for
+  regulators; see regulator.txt.
+
+The valid names for regulators are:
+
+  buck1, buck2, buck3, buck4, buck5, ldo1, ldo2, ldo3, ldo4, ldo5, ldo6, ldo7,
+  ldo8, ldo9, ldo10, ldo11, ldo12, ldo13, ldo14, ldo15, ldo16, ldo17, ldo18, ldo19
+
+Example:
+
+	pmic: 88pm800@31 {
+		compatible = "marvell,88pm800";
+		reg = <0x31>;
+
+		regulators {
+			buck1 {
+			        regulator-min-microvolt = <600000>;
+			        regulator-max-microvolt = <3950000>;
+			        regulator-boot-on;
+			        regulator-always-on;
+			};
+			ldo1 {
+			        regulator-min-microvolt = <600000>;
+			        regulator-max-microvolt = <15000000>;
+			        regulator-boot-on;
+			        regulator-always-on;
+			};
+...
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/88pm860x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/88pm860x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1267b3e1a2cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/88pm860x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+Marvell 88PM860x regulator
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "marvell,88pm860x"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+- regulators: A node that houses a sub-node for each regulator within the
+  device. Each sub-node is identified using the regulator-compatible
+  property, with valid values listed below.
+
+Example:
+
+	pmic: 88pm860x@34 {
+		compatible = "marvell,88pm860x";
+		reg = <0x34>;
+
+		regulators {
+			BUCK1 {
+			        regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>;
+			        regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>;
+			        regulator-boot-on;
+			        regulator-always-on;
+			};
+			BUCK3 {
+			        regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>;
+			        regulator-max-microvolt = <3000000>;
+			        regulator-boot-on;
+			        regulator-always-on;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/anatop-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/anatop-regulator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..758eae24082a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/anatop-regulator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+Anatop Voltage regulators
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must be "fsl,anatop-regulator"
+- anatop-reg-offset: Anatop MFD register offset
+- anatop-vol-bit-shift: Bit shift for the register
+- anatop-vol-bit-width: Number of bits used in the register
+- anatop-min-bit-val: Minimum value of this register
+- anatop-min-voltage: Minimum voltage of this regulator
+- anatop-max-voltage: Maximum voltage of this regulator
+
+Optional properties:
+- anatop-delay-reg-offset: Anatop MFD step time register offset
+- anatop-delay-bit-shift: Bit shift for the step time register
+- anatop-delay-bit-width: Number of bits used in the step time register
+
+Any property defined as part of the core regulator
+binding, defined in regulator.txt, can also be used.
+
+Example:
+
+	regulator-vddpu {
+		compatible = "fsl,anatop-regulator";
+		regulator-name = "vddpu";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <725000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <1300000>;
+		regulator-always-on;
+		anatop-reg-offset = <0x140>;
+		anatop-vol-bit-shift = <9>;
+		anatop-vol-bit-width = <5>;
+		anatop-delay-reg-offset = <0x170>;
+		anatop-delay-bit-shift = <24>;
+		anatop-delay-bit-width = <2>;
+		anatop-min-bit-val = <1>;
+		anatop-min-voltage = <725000>;
+		anatop-max-voltage = <1300000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.txt
index 9cf57fd042d2..4fae41d54798 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/fixed-regulator.txt
@@ -8,6 +8,9 @@ Optional properties:
 - startup-delay-us: startup time in microseconds
 - enable-active-high: Polarity of GPIO is Active high
 If this property is missing, the default assumed is Active low.
+- gpio-open-drain: GPIO is open drain type.
+  If this property is missing then default assumption is false.
+-vin-supply: Input supply name.
 
 Any property defined as part of the core regulator
 binding, defined in regulator.txt, can also be used.
@@ -25,5 +28,7 @@ Example:
 		gpio = <&gpio1 16 0>;
 		startup-delay-us = <70000>;
 		enable-active-high;
-		regulator-boot-on
+		regulator-boot-on;
+		gpio-open-drain;
+		vin-supply = <&parent_reg>;
 	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/gpio-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/gpio-regulator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..63c659800c03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/gpio-regulator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+GPIO controlled regulators
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible		: Must be "regulator-gpio".
+- states		: Selection of available voltages and GPIO configs.
+                          if there are no states, then use a fixed regulator
+
+Optional properties:
+- enable-gpio		: GPIO to use to enable/disable the regulator.
+- gpios			: GPIO group used to control voltage.
+- startup-delay-us	: Startup time in microseconds.
+- enable-active-high	: Polarity of GPIO is active high (default is low).
+
+Any property defined as part of the core regulator binding defined in
+regulator.txt can also be used.
+
+Example:
+
+	mmciv: gpio-regulator {
+		compatible = "regulator-gpio";
+
+		regulator-name = "mmci-gpio-supply";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <2600000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+
+		enable-gpio = <&gpio0 23 0x4>;
+		gpios = <&gpio0 24 0x4
+			 &gpio0 25 0x4>;
+		states = <1800000 0x3
+			  2200000 0x2
+			  2600000 0x1
+			  2900000 0x0>;
+
+		startup-delay-us = <100000>;
+		enable-active-high;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/lp872x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/lp872x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..78183182dad9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/lp872x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+Binding for TI/National Semiconductor LP872x Driver
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: "ti,lp8720" or "ti,lp8725"
+  - reg: I2C slave address. 0x7d = LP8720, 0x7a = LP8725
+
+Optional properties:
+  - ti,general-config: the value of LP872X_GENERAL_CFG register (u8)
+    (LP8720)
+    bit[2]: BUCK output voltage control by external DVS pin or register
+            1 = external pin, 0 = bit7 of register 08h
+    bit[1]: sleep control by external DVS pin or register
+            1 = external pin, 0 = bit6 of register 08h
+    bit[0]: time step unit(usec). 1 = 25, 0 = 50
+
+    (LP8725)
+    bit[7:6]: time step unit(usec). 00 = 32, 01 = 64, 10 = 128, 11 = 256
+    bit[4]:   BUCK2 enable control. 1 = enable, 0 = disable
+    bit[3]:   BUCK2 output voltage register address. 1 = 0Ah, 0 = 0Bh
+    bit[2]:   BUCK1 output voltage control by external DVS pin or register
+              1 = register 08h, 0 = DVS
+    bit[1]:   LDO sleep control. 1 = sleep mode, 0 = normal
+    bit[0]:   BUCK1 enable control, 1 = enable, 0 = disable
+
+    For more details, please see the datasheet.
+
+  - ti,update-config: define it when LP872X_GENERAL_CFG register should be set
+  - ti,dvs-gpio: GPIO specifier for external DVS pin control of LP872x devices.
+  - ti,dvs-vsel: DVS selector. 0 = SEL_V1, 1 = SEL_V2.
+  - ti,dvs-state: initial DVS pin state. 0 = DVS_LOW, 1 = DVS_HIGH.
+
+  Sub nodes for regulator_init_data
+    LP8720 has maximum 6 nodes. (child name: ldo1 ~ 5 and buck)
+    LP8725 has maximum 9 nodes. (child name: ldo1 ~ 5, lilo1,2 and buck1,2)
+    For more details, please see the following binding document.
+    (Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt)
+
+Datasheet
+  - LP8720: http://www.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/lp8720.pdf
+  - LP8725: http://www.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/lp8725.pdf
+
+Example 1) LP8720
+
+lp8720@7d {
+	compatible = "ti,lp8720";
+	reg = <0x7d>;
+
+	/* external DVS pin used, timestep is 25usec */
+	ti,general-config = /bits/ 8 <0x03>;
+	ti,update-config;
+
+	/*
+	 * The dvs-gpio depends on the processor environment.
+	 * For example, following GPIO specifier means GPIO134 in OMAP4.
+	 */
+	ti,dvs-gpio = <&gpio5 6 0>;
+	ti,dvs-vsel = /bits/ 8 <1>;		/* SEL_V2 */
+	ti,dvs-state = /bits/ 8 <1>;		/* DVS_HIGH */
+
+	vaf: ldo1 {
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+	};
+
+	vmmc: ldo2 {
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+	};
+
+	vcam_io: ldo3 {
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+	};
+
+	vcam_core: ldo4 {
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <2850000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+	};
+
+	vcam: ldo5 {
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+	};
+
+	vcc: buck {
+		regulator-name = "VBUCK";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <2300000>;
+	};
+};
+
+Example 2) LP8725
+
+lp8725@7a {
+	compatible = "ti,lp8725";
+	reg = <0x7a>;
+
+	/* Enable BUCK1,2, no DVS, normal LDO mode, timestep is 256usec */
+	ti,general-config = /bits/ 8 <0xdd>;
+	ti,update-config;
+
+	vcam_io: ldo1 {
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+	};
+
+	vcam_core: ldo2 {
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+	};
+
+	vcam: ldo3 {
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+	};
+
+	vcmmb_io: ldo4 {
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+	};
+
+	vcmmb_core: ldo5 {
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+	};
+
+	vaux1: lilo1 {
+		regulator-name = "VAUX1";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+	};
+
+	vaux2: lilo2 {
+		regulator-name = "VAUX2";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+	};
+
+	vcc1: buck1 {
+		regulator-name = "VBUCK1";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3000000>;
+		regulator-min-microamp  = <460000>;
+		regulator-max-microamp  = <1370000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+	};
+
+	vcc2: buck2 {
+		regulator-name = "VBUCK2";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <3000000>;
+		regulator-min-microamp  = <460000>;
+		regulator-max-microamp  = <1370000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8660.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8660.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8ba994d8a142
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8660.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+Maxim MAX8660 voltage regulator
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be one of "maxim,max8660", "maxim,max8661"
+- reg: I2C slave address, usually 0x34
+- any required generic properties defined in regulator.txt
+
+Example:
+
+	i2c_master {
+		max8660@34 {
+			compatible = "maxim,max8660";
+			reg = <0x34>;
+
+			regulators {
+				regulator@0 {
+					regulator-compatible= "V3(DCDC)";
+					regulator-min-microvolt = <725000>;
+					regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>;
+				};
+
+				regulator@1 {
+					regulator-compatible= "V4(DCDC)";
+					regulator-min-microvolt = <725000>;
+					regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>;
+				};
+
+				regulator@2 {
+					regulator-compatible= "V5(LDO)";
+					regulator-min-microvolt = <1700000>;
+					regulator-max-microvolt = <2000000>;
+				};
+
+				regulator@3 {
+					regulator-compatible= "V6(LDO)";
+					regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>;
+					regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				};
+
+				regulator@4 {
+					regulator-compatible= "V7(LDO)";
+					regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>;
+					regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				};
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8907.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8907.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..371eccd1cd68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8907.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+MAX8907 regulator
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "maxim,max8907"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+- interrupts: The interrupt output of the controller
+- mbatt-supply: The input supply for MBATT, BBAT, SDBY, VRTC.
+- in-v1-supply: The input supply for SD1.
+- in-v2-supply: The input supply for SD2.
+- in-v3-supply: The input supply for SD3.
+- in1-supply: The input supply for LDO1.
+...
+- in20-supply: The input supply for LDO20.
+- regulators: A node that houses a sub-node for each regulator within the
+  device. Each sub-node is identified using the node's name (or the deprecated
+  regulator-compatible property if present), with valid values listed below.
+  The content of each sub-node is defined by the standard binding for
+  regulators; see regulator.txt.
+
+Optional properties:
+- maxim,system-power-controller: Boolean property indicating that the PMIC
+  controls the overall system power.
+
+The valid names for regulators are:
+
+  sd1, sd2, sd3, ldo1, ldo2, ldo3, ldo4, ldo5, ldo6, ldo7, ldo8, ldo9, ldo10,
+  ldo11, ldo12, ldo13, ldo14, ldo15, ldo16, ldo17, ldo18, ldo19, ldo20, out5v,
+  out33v, bbat, sdby, vrtc.
+
+Example:
+
+		max8907@3c {
+			compatible = "maxim,max8907";
+			reg = <0x3c>;
+			interrupts = <0 86 0x4>;
+
+			maxim,system-power-controller;
+
+			mbatt-supply = <&some_reg>;
+			in-v1-supply = <&mbatt_reg>;
+			...
+			in1-supply = <&mbatt_reg>;
+			...
+
+			regulators {
+				mbatt_reg: mbatt {
+					regulator-name = "vbat_pmu";
+					regulator-min-microvolt = <5000000>;
+					regulator-max-microvolt = <5000000>;
+					regulator-always-on;
+				};
+
+				sd1 {
+					regulator-name = "nvvdd_sv1,vdd_cpu_pmu";
+					regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>;
+					regulator-max-microvolt = <1000000>;
+					regulator-always-on;
+				};
+
+				sd2 {
+					regulator-name = "nvvdd_sv2,vdd_core";
+					regulator-min-microvolt = <1200000>;
+					regulator-max-microvolt = <1200000>;
+					regulator-always-on;
+				};
+...
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8925-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8925-regulator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0057695aae8f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8925-regulator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+Max8925 Voltage regulators
+
+Required nodes:
+-nodes:
+  - SDV1 for SDV SDV1
+  - SDV2 for SDV SDV2
+  - SDV3 for SDV SDV3
+  - LDO1 for LDO LDO1
+  - LDO2 for LDO LDO2
+  - LDO3 for LDO LDO3
+  - LDO4 for LDO LDO4
+  - LDO5 for LDO LDO5
+  - LDO6 for LDO LDO6
+  - LDO7 for LDO LDO7
+  - LDO8 for LDO LDO8
+  - LDO9 for LDO LDO9
+  - LDO10 for LDO LDO10
+  - LDO11 for LDO LDO11
+  - LDO12 for LDO LDO12
+  - LDO13 for LDO LDO13
+  - LDO14 for LDO LDO14
+  - LDO15 for LDO LDO15
+  - LDO16 for LDO LDO16
+  - LDO17 for LDO LDO17
+  - LDO18 for LDO LDO18
+  - LDO19 for LDO LDO19
+  - LDO20 for LDO LDO20
+
+Optional properties:
+- Any optional property defined in bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
+
+Example:
+
+	SDV1 {
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <637500>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <1425000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+		regulator-always-on;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8952.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8952.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..866fcdd0f4eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8952.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+Maxim MAX8952 voltage regulator
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be equal to "maxim,max8952"
+- reg: I2C slave address, usually 0x60
+- max8952,dvs-mode-microvolt: array of 4 integer values defining DVS voltages
+  in microvolts. All values must be from range <770000, 1400000>
+- any required generic properties defined in regulator.txt
+
+Optional properties:
+- max8952,vid-gpios: array of two GPIO pins used for DVS voltage selection
+- max8952,en-gpio: GPIO used to control enable status of regulator
+- max8952,default-mode: index of default DVS voltage, from <0, 3> range
+- max8952,sync-freq: sync frequency, must be one of following values:
+    - 0: 26 MHz
+    - 1: 13 MHz
+    - 2: 19.2 MHz
+  Defaults to 26 MHz if not specified.
+- max8952,ramp-speed: voltage ramp speed, must be one of following values:
+    - 0: 32mV/us
+    - 1: 16mV/us
+    - 2: 8mV/us
+    - 3: 4mV/us
+    - 4: 2mV/us
+    - 5: 1mV/us
+    - 6: 0.5mV/us
+    - 7: 0.25mV/us
+  Defaults to 32mV/us if not specified.
+- any available generic properties defined in regulator.txt
+
+Example:
+
+	vdd_arm_reg: pmic@60 {
+		compatible = "maxim,max8952";
+		reg = <0x60>;
+
+		/* max8952-specific properties */
+		max8952,vid-gpios = <&gpx0 3 0>, <&gpx0 4 0>;
+		max8952,en-gpio = <&gpx0 1 0>;
+		max8952,default-mode = <0>;
+		max8952,dvs-mode-microvolt = <1250000>, <1200000>,
+						<1050000>, <950000>;
+		max8952,sync-freq = <0>;
+		max8952,ramp-speed = <0>;
+
+		/* generic regulator properties */
+		regulator-name = "vdd_arm";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <770000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <1400000>;
+		regulator-always-on;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8973-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8973-regulator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4f15d8a1bfd0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8973-regulator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+* Maxim MAX8973 Voltage Regulator
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible:	must be "maxim,max8973"
+- reg:		the i2c slave address of the regulator. It should be 0x1b.
+
+Any standard regulator properties can be used to configure the single max8973
+DCDC.
+
+Example:
+
+	max8973@1b {
+		compatible = "maxim,max8973";
+		reg = <0x1b>;
+
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <935000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <1200000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+		regulator-always-on;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8997-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8997-regulator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5c186a7a77ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8997-regulator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+* Maxim MAX8997 Voltage and Current Regulator
+
+The Maxim MAX8997 is a multi-function device which includes voltage and
+current regulators, rtc, charger controller and other sub-blocks. It is
+interfaced to the host controller using a i2c interface. Each sub-block is
+addressed by the host system using different i2c slave address. This document
+describes the bindings for 'pmic' sub-block of max8997.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "maxim,max8997-pmic".
+- reg: Specifies the i2c slave address of the pmic block. It should be 0x66.
+
+- max8997,pmic-buck1-dvs-voltage: A set of 8 voltage values in micro-volt (uV)
+  units for buck1 when changing voltage using gpio dvs. Refer to [1] below
+  for additional information.
+
+- max8997,pmic-buck2-dvs-voltage: A set of 8 voltage values in micro-volt (uV)
+  units for buck2 when changing voltage using gpio dvs. Refer to [1] below
+  for additional information.
+
+- max8997,pmic-buck5-dvs-voltage: A set of 8 voltage values in micro-volt (uV)
+  units for buck5 when changing voltage using gpio dvs. Refer to [1] below
+  for additional information.
+
+[1] If none of the 'max8997,pmic-buck[1/2/5]-uses-gpio-dvs' optional
+    property is specified, the 'max8997,pmic-buck[1/2/5]-dvs-voltage'
+    property should specify atleast one voltage level (which would be a
+    safe operating voltage).
+
+    If either of the 'max8997,pmic-buck[1/2/5]-uses-gpio-dvs' optional
+    property is specified, then all the eight voltage values for the
+    'max8997,pmic-buck[1/2/5]-dvs-voltage' should be specified.
+
+Optional properties:
+- interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which
+  the interrupts from max8997 are delivered to.
+- interrupts: Interrupt specifiers for two interrupt sources.
+  - First interrupt specifier is for 'irq1' interrupt.
+  - Second interrupt specifier is for 'alert' interrupt.
+- max8997,pmic-buck1-uses-gpio-dvs: 'buck1' can be controlled by gpio dvs.
+- max8997,pmic-buck2-uses-gpio-dvs: 'buck2' can be controlled by gpio dvs.
+- max8997,pmic-buck5-uses-gpio-dvs: 'buck5' can be controlled by gpio dvs.
+
+Additional properties required if either of the optional properties are used:
+- max8997,pmic-ignore-gpiodvs-side-effect: When GPIO-DVS mode is used for
+  multiple bucks, changing the voltage value of one of the bucks may affect
+  that of another buck, which is the side effect of the change (set_voltage).
+  Use this property to ignore such side effects and change the voltage.
+
+- max8997,pmic-buck125-default-dvs-idx: Default voltage setting selected from
+  the possible 8 options selectable by the dvs gpios. The value of this
+  property should be between 0 and 7. If not specified or if out of range, the
+  default value of this property is set to 0.
+
+- max8997,pmic-buck125-dvs-gpios: GPIO specifiers for three host gpio's used
+  for dvs. The format of the gpio specifier depends in the gpio controller.
+
+Regulators: The regulators of max8997 that have to be instantiated should be
+included in a sub-node named 'regulators'. Regulator nodes included in this
+sub-node should be of the format as listed below.
+
+	regulator_name {
+		standard regulator bindings here
+	};
+
+The following are the names of the regulators that the max8997 pmic block
+supports. Note: The 'n' in LDOn and BUCKn represents the LDO or BUCK number
+as per the datasheet of max8997.
+
+	- LDOn
+		  - valid values for n are 1 to 18 and 21
+		  - Example: LDO0, LD01, LDO2, LDO21
+	- BUCKn
+		  - valid values for n are 1 to 7.
+		  - Example: BUCK1, BUCK2, BUCK3, BUCK7
+
+	- ENVICHG: Battery Charging Current Monitor Output. This is a fixed
+		   voltage type regulator
+
+	- ESAFEOUT1: (ldo19)
+	- ESAFEOUT2: (ld020)
+
+	- CHARGER_CV: main battery charger voltage control
+	- CHARGER: main battery charger current control
+	- CHARGER_TOPOFF: end of charge current threshold level
+
+The bindings inside the regulator nodes use the standard regulator bindings
+which are documented elsewhere.
+
+Example:
+
+	max8997_pmic@66 {
+		compatible = "maxim,max8997-pmic";
+		interrupt-parent = <&wakeup_eint>;
+		reg = <0x66>;
+		interrupts = <4 0>, <3 0>;
+
+		max8997,pmic-buck1-uses-gpio-dvs;
+		max8997,pmic-buck2-uses-gpio-dvs;
+		max8997,pmic-buck5-uses-gpio-dvs;
+
+		max8997,pmic-ignore-gpiodvs-side-effect;
+		max8997,pmic-buck125-default-dvs-idx = <0>;
+
+		max8997,pmic-buck125-dvs-gpios = <&gpx0 0 1 0 0>, /* SET1 */
+						 <&gpx0 1 1 0 0>, /* SET2 */
+						 <&gpx0 2 1 0 0>; /* SET3 */
+
+		max8997,pmic-buck1-dvs-voltage = <1350000>, <1300000>,
+						 <1250000>, <1200000>,
+						 <1150000>, <1100000>,
+						 <1000000>, <950000>;
+
+		max8997,pmic-buck2-dvs-voltage = <1100000>, <1100000>,
+						 <1100000>, <1100000>,
+						 <1000000>, <1000000>,
+						 <1000000>, <1000000>;
+
+		max8997,pmic-buck5-dvs-voltage = <1200000>, <1200000>,
+						 <1200000>, <1200000>,
+						 <1200000>, <1200000>,
+						 <1200000>, <1200000>;
+
+		regulators {
+			ldo1_reg: LDO1 {
+				regulator-name = "VDD_ABB_3.3V";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+			};
+
+			ldo2_reg: LDO2 {
+				regulator-name = "VDD_ALIVE_1.1V";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1100000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1100000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			buck1_reg: BUCK1 {
+				regulator-name = "VDD_ARM_1.2V";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <950000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1350000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/palmas-pmic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/palmas-pmic.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..875639ae0606
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/palmas-pmic.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+* palmas regulator IP block devicetree bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be from the list
+  ti,twl6035-pmic
+  ti,twl6036-pmic
+  ti,twl6037-pmic
+  ti,tps65913-pmic
+  ti,tps65914-pmic
+and also the generic series names
+  ti,palmas-pmic
+- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller which is palmas.
+- interrupts : The interrupt number and the type which can be looked up here:
+	       arch/arm/boot/dts/include/dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h
+- interrupts-name: The names of the individual interrupts.
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,ldo6-vibrator : ldo6 is in vibrator mode
+
+Optional nodes:
+- regulators : Must contain a sub-node per regulator from the list below.
+	       Each sub-node should contain the constraints and initialization
+	       information for that regulator. See regulator.txt for a
+	       description of standard properties for these sub-nodes.
+	       Additional custom properties  are listed below.
+
+	       For ti,palmas-pmic - smps12, smps123, smps3 depending on OTP,
+	       smps45, smps457, smps7 depending on variant, smps6, smps[8-9],
+	       smps10_out2, smps10_out1, do[1-9], ldoln, ldousb.
+
+	       Optional sub-node properties:
+	       ti,warm-reset - maintain voltage during warm reset(boolean)
+	       ti,roof-floor - control voltage selection by pin(boolean)
+	       ti,mode-sleep - mode to adopt in pmic sleep 0 - off, 1 - auto,
+	       2 - eco, 3 - forced pwm
+	       ti,smps-range - OTP has the wrong range set for the hardware so override
+	       0 - low range, 1 - high range.
+
+- ti,system-power-controller: Telling whether or not this pmic is controlling
+			      the system power.
+
+Example:
+
+#include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h>
+
+pmic {
+	compatible = "ti,twl6035-pmic", "ti,palmas-pmic";
+	interrupt-parent = <&palmas>;
+	interrupts = <14 IRQ_TYPE_NONE>;
+	interrupts-name = "short-irq";
+
+	ti,ldo6-vibrator;
+
+	ti,system-power-controller;
+
+	regulators {
+		smps12_reg : smps12 {
+			regulator-name = "smps12";
+			regulator-min-microvolt = < 600000>;
+			regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>;
+			regulator-always-on;
+			regulator-boot-on;
+			ti,warm-reset;
+			ti,roof-floor;
+			ti,mode-sleep = <0>;
+			ti,smps-range = <1>;
+		};
+
+		ldo1_reg: ldo1 {
+			regulator-name = "ldo1";
+			regulator-min-microvolt = <2800000>;
+			regulator-max-microvolt = <2800000>;
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fc989b2e8057
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+PFUZE100 family of regulators
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,pfuze100"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+
+Required child node:
+- regulators: This is the list of child nodes that specify the regulator
+  initialization data for defined regulators. Please refer to below doc
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt.
+
+  The valid names for regulators are:
+  sw1ab,sw1c,sw2,sw3a,sw3b,sw4,swbst,vsnvs,vrefddr,vgen1~vgen6
+
+Each regulator is defined using the standard binding for regulators.
+
+Example:
+
+	pmic: pfuze100@08 {
+		compatible = "fsl,pfuze100";
+		reg = <0x08>;
+
+		regulators {
+			sw1a_reg: sw1ab {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <300000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1875000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-ramp-delay = <6250>;
+			};
+
+			sw1c_reg: sw1c {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <300000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1875000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			sw2_reg: sw2 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			sw3a_reg: sw3a {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <400000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1975000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			sw3b_reg: sw3b {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <400000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1975000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			sw4_reg: sw4 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+			};
+
+			swbst_reg: swbst {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <5000000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <5150000>;
+			};
+
+			snvs_reg: vsnvs {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3000000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			vref_reg: vrefddr {
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			vgen1_reg: vgen1 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1550000>;
+			};
+
+			vgen2_reg: vgen2 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1550000>;
+			};
+
+			vgen3_reg: vgen3 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+			};
+
+			vgen4_reg: vgen4 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			vgen5_reg: vgen5 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			vgen6_reg: vgen6 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
index 5b7a408acdaa..2bd8f0978765 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
@@ -9,7 +9,18 @@ Optional properties:
 - regulator-max-microamp: largest current consumers may set
 - regulator-always-on: boolean, regulator should never be disabled
 - regulator-boot-on: bootloader/firmware enabled regulator
+- regulator-allow-bypass: allow the regulator to go into bypass mode
 - <name>-supply: phandle to the parent supply/regulator node
+- regulator-ramp-delay: ramp delay for regulator(in uV/uS)
+  For hardwares which support disabling ramp rate, it should be explicitly
+  intialised to zero (regulator-ramp-delay = <0>) for disabling ramp delay.
+
+Deprecated properties:
+- regulator-compatible: If a regulator chip contains multiple
+  regulators, and if the chip's binding contains a child node that
+  describes each regulator, then this property indicates which regulator
+  this child node is intended to configure. If this property is missing,
+  the node's name will be used instead.
 
 Example:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/s5m8767-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/s5m8767-regulator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d1660a90fc06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/s5m8767-regulator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+* Samsung S5M8767 Voltage and Current Regulator
+
+The Samsung S5M8767 is a multi-function device which includes voltage and
+current regulators, rtc, charger controller and other sub-blocks. It is
+interfaced to the host controller using a i2c interface. Each sub-block is
+addressed by the host system using different i2c slave address. This document
+describes the bindings for 'pmic' sub-block of s5m8767.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "samsung,s5m8767-pmic".
+- reg: Specifies the i2c slave address of the pmic block. It should be 0x66.
+
+- s5m8767,pmic-buck2-dvs-voltage: A set of 8 voltage values in micro-volt (uV)
+  units for buck2 when changing voltage using gpio dvs. Refer to [1] below
+  for additional information.
+
+- s5m8767,pmic-buck3-dvs-voltage: A set of 8 voltage values in micro-volt (uV)
+  units for buck3 when changing voltage using gpio dvs. Refer to [1] below
+  for additional information.
+
+- s5m8767,pmic-buck4-dvs-voltage: A set of 8 voltage values in micro-volt (uV)
+  units for buck4 when changing voltage using gpio dvs. Refer to [1] below
+  for additional information.
+
+- s5m8767,pmic-buck-ds-gpios: GPIO specifiers for three host gpio's used
+  for selecting GPIO DVS lines. It is one-to-one mapped to dvs gpio lines.
+
+[1] If none of the 's5m8767,pmic-buck[2/3/4]-uses-gpio-dvs' optional
+    property is specified, the 's5m8767,pmic-buck[2/3/4]-dvs-voltage'
+    property should specify atleast one voltage level (which would be a
+    safe operating voltage).
+
+    If either of the 's5m8767,pmic-buck[2/3/4]-uses-gpio-dvs' optional
+    property is specified, then all the eight voltage values for the
+    's5m8767,pmic-buck[2/3/4]-dvs-voltage' should be specified.
+
+Optional properties:
+- interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which
+  the interrupts from s5m8767 are delivered to.
+- interrupts: Interrupt specifiers for two interrupt sources.
+  - First interrupt specifier is for 'irq1' interrupt.
+  - Second interrupt specifier is for 'alert' interrupt.
+- s5m8767,pmic-buck2-uses-gpio-dvs: 'buck2' can be controlled by gpio dvs.
+- s5m8767,pmic-buck3-uses-gpio-dvs: 'buck3' can be controlled by gpio dvs.
+- s5m8767,pmic-buck4-uses-gpio-dvs: 'buck4' can be controlled by gpio dvs.
+
+Additional properties required if either of the optional properties are used:
+
+- s5m8767,pmic-buck234-default-dvs-idx: Default voltage setting selected from
+  the possible 8 options selectable by the dvs gpios. The value of this
+  property should be between 0 and 7. If not specified or if out of range, the
+  default value of this property is set to 0.
+
+- s5m8767,pmic-buck-dvs-gpios: GPIO specifiers for three host gpio's used
+  for dvs. The format of the gpio specifier depends in the gpio controller.
+
+Regulators: The regulators of s5m8767 that have to be instantiated should be
+included in a sub-node named 'regulators'. Regulator nodes included in this
+sub-node should be of the format as listed below.
+
+	regulator_name {
+		ldo1_reg: LDO1 {
+			regulator-name = "VDD_ALIVE_1.0V";
+			regulator-min-microvolt = <1100000>;
+			regulator-max-microvolt = <1100000>;
+			regulator-always-on;
+			regulator-boot-on;
+			op_mode = <1>; /* Normal Mode */
+		};
+	};
+The above regulator entries are defined in regulator bindings documentation
+except op_mode description.
+	- op_mode: describes the different operating modes of the LDO's with
+		power mode change in SOC. The different possible values are,
+		0 - always off mode
+		1 - on in normal mode
+		2 - low power mode
+		3 - suspend mode
+
+The following are the names of the regulators that the s5m8767 pmic block
+supports. Note: The 'n' in LDOn and BUCKn represents the LDO or BUCK number
+as per the datasheet of s5m8767.
+
+	- LDOn
+		  - valid values for n are 1 to 28
+		  - Example: LDO0, LD01, LDO28
+	- BUCKn
+		  - valid values for n are 1 to 9.
+		  - Example: BUCK1, BUCK2, BUCK9
+
+The bindings inside the regulator nodes use the standard regulator bindings
+which are documented elsewhere.
+
+Example:
+
+	s5m8767_pmic@66 {
+		compatible = "samsung,s5m8767-pmic";
+		reg = <0x66>;
+
+		s5m8767,pmic-buck2-uses-gpio-dvs;
+		s5m8767,pmic-buck3-uses-gpio-dvs;
+		s5m8767,pmic-buck4-uses-gpio-dvs;
+
+		s5m8767,pmic-buck-default-dvs-idx = <0>;
+
+		s5m8767,pmic-buck-dvs-gpios = <&gpx0 0 0>, /* DVS1 */
+						 <&gpx0 1 0>, /* DVS2 */
+						 <&gpx0 2 0>; /* DVS3 */
+
+		s5m8767,pmic-buck-ds-gpios = <&gpx2 3 0>, /* SET1 */
+						<&gpx2 4 0>, /* SET2 */
+						<&gpx2 5 0>; /* SET3 */
+
+		s5m8767,pmic-buck2-dvs-voltage = <1350000>, <1300000>,
+						 <1250000>, <1200000>,
+						 <1150000>, <1100000>,
+						 <1000000>, <950000>;
+
+		s5m8767,pmic-buck3-dvs-voltage = <1100000>, <1100000>,
+						 <1100000>, <1100000>,
+						 <1000000>, <1000000>,
+						 <1000000>, <1000000>;
+
+		s5m8767,pmic-buck4-dvs-voltage = <1200000>, <1200000>,
+						 <1200000>, <1200000>,
+						 <1200000>, <1200000>,
+						 <1200000>, <1200000>;
+
+		regulators {
+			ldo1_reg: LDO1 {
+				regulator-name = "VDD_ABB_3.3V";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				op_mode = <1>; /* Normal Mode */
+			};
+
+			ldo2_reg: LDO2 {
+				regulator-name = "VDD_ALIVE_1.1V";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1100000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1100000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			buck1_reg: BUCK1 {
+				regulator-name = "VDD_MIF_1.2V";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <950000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1350000>;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/ti-abb-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/ti-abb-regulator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2e57a33e9029
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/ti-abb-regulator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+Adaptive Body Bias(ABB) SoC internal LDO regulator for Texas Instruments SoCs
+
+Required Properties:
+- compatible: Should be one of:
+  - "ti,abb-v1" for older SoCs like OMAP3
+  - "ti,abb-v2" for newer SoCs like OMAP4, OMAP5
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device. It contains
+  the information of registers in the same order as described by reg-names
+- reg-names: Should contain the reg names
+  - "base-address"	- contains base address of ABB module
+  - "int-address"	- contains address of interrupt register for ABB module
+  (also see Optional properties)
+- #address-cell: should be 0
+- #size-cell: should be 0
+- clocks: should point to the clock node used by ABB module
+- ti,settling-time: Settling time in uSecs from SoC documentation for ABB module
+	to settle down(target time for SR2_WTCNT_VALUE).
+- ti,clock-cycles: SoC specific data about count of system ti,clock-cycles used for
+	computing settling time from SoC Documentation for ABB module(clock
+	cycles for SR2_WTCNT_VALUE).
+- ti,tranxdone-status-mask: Mask to the int-register to write-to-clear mask
+	indicating LDO tranxdone (operation complete).
+- ti,abb_info: An array of 6-tuples u32 items providing information about ABB
+	configuration needed per operational voltage of the device.
+	Each item consists of the following in the same order:
+	volt: voltage in uV - Only used to index ABB information.
+	ABB mode: one of the following:
+		0-bypass
+		1-Forward Body Bias(FBB)
+		3-Reverse Body Bias(RBB)
+	efuse:	(see Optional properties)
+	RBB enable efuse Mask:	(See Optional properties)
+	FBB enable efuse Mask:	(See Optional properties)
+	Vset value efuse Mask:	(See Optional properties)
+
+	NOTE: If more than 1 entry is present, then regulator is setup to change
+	      voltage, allowing for various modes to be selected indexed off
+	      the regulator. Further, ABB LDOs are considered always-on by
+	      default.
+
+Optional Properties:
+- reg-names: In addition to the required properties, the following are optional
+  - "efuse-address"	- Contains efuse base address used to pick up ABB info.
+  - "ldo-address"	- Contains address of ABB LDO overide register address.
+	"efuse-address" is required for this.
+- ti,ldovbb-vset-mask	- Required if ldo-address is set, mask for LDO override
+	register to provide override vset value.
+- ti,ldovbb-override-mask - Required if ldo-address is set, mask for LDO
+	override register to enable override vset value.
+- ti,abb_opp_sel: Addendum to the description in required properties
+	efuse: Mandatory if 'efuse-address' register is defined. Provides offset
+	       from efuse-address to pick up ABB characteristics. Set to 0 if
+	       'efuse-address' is not defined.
+	RBB enable efuse Mask:	Optional if 'efuse-address' register is defined.
+		'ABB mode' is force set to RBB mode if value at "efuse-address"
+		+ efuse maps to RBB mask. Set to 0 to ignore this.
+	FBB enable efuse Mask:	Optional if 'efuse-address' register is defined.
+		'ABB mode' is force set to FBB mode if value at "efuse-address"
+		+ efuse maps to FBB mask (valid only if RBB mask does not match)
+		Set to 0 to ignore this.
+	Vset value efuse Mask:	Mandatory if ldo-address is set. Picks up from
+		efuse the value to set in 'ti,ldovbb-vset-mask' at ldo-address.
+
+Example #1: Simplest configuration (no efuse data, hard coded ABB table):
+abb_x: regulator-abb-x {
+	compatible = "ti,abb-v1";
+	regulator-name = "abb_x";
+	#address-cell = <0>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	reg = <0x483072f0 0x8>, <0x48306818 0x4>;
+	reg-names = "base-address", "int-address";
+	ti,tranxdone-status-mask = <0x4000000>;
+	clocks = <&sysclk>;
+	ti,settling-time = <30>;
+	ti,clock-cycles = <8>;
+	ti,abb_info = <
+	/* uV		ABB	efuse	rbb_m	fbb_m	vset_m */
+	1012500		0	0	0	0	0 /* Bypass */
+	1200000		3	0	0	0	0 /* RBB mandatory */
+	1320000		1	0	0	0	0 /* FBB mandatory */
+	>;
+};
+
+Example #2: Efuse bits contain ABB mode setting (no LDO override capability)
+abb_y: regulator-abb-y {
+	compatible = "ti,abb-v2";
+	regulator-name = "abb_y";
+	#address-cell = <0>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	reg = <0x4a307bd0 0x8>, <0x4a306014 0x4>, <0x4A002268 0x8>;
+	reg-names = "base-address", "int-address", "efuse-address";
+	ti,tranxdone-status-mask = <0x4000000>;
+	clocks = <&sysclk>;
+	ti,settling-time = <50>;
+	ti,clock-cycles = <16>;
+	ti,abb_info = <
+	/* uV		ABB	efuse	rbb_m	fbb_m	vset_m */
+	975000		0	0	0	0	0 /* Bypass */
+	1012500		0	0	0x40000	0	0 /* RBB optional */
+	1200000		0	0x4	0	0x40000	0 /* FBB optional */
+	1320000		1	0	0	0	0 /* FBB mandatory */
+	>;
+};
+
+Example #3: Efuse bits contain ABB mode setting and LDO override capability
+abb_z: regulator-abb-z {
+	compatible = "ti,abb-v2";
+	regulator-name = "abb_z";
+	#address-cell = <0>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	reg = <0x4ae07ce4 0x8>, <0x4ae06010 0x4>,
+	      <0x4a002194 0x8>, <0x4ae0C314 0x4>;
+	reg-names = "base-address", "int-address",
+		    "efuse-address", "ldo-address";
+	ti,tranxdone-status-mask = <0x8000000>;
+	/* LDOVBBMM_MUX_CTRL */
+	ti,ldovbb-override-mask = <0x400>;
+	/* LDOVBBMM_VSET_OUT */
+	ti,ldovbb-vset-mask = <0x1F>;
+	clocks = <&sysclk>;
+	ti,settling-time = <50>;
+	ti,clock-cycles = <16>;
+	ti,abb_info = <
+	/* uV	ABB	efuse	rbb_m	fbb_m	vset_m */
+	975000	0	0	0	0	0	/* Bypass */
+	1200000	0	0x4	0	0x40000	0x1f00	/* FBB optional, vset */
+	>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps51632-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps51632-regulator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2f7e44a96414
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps51632-regulator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+TPS51632 Voltage regulators
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must be "ti,tps51632"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,enable-pwm-dvfs: Enable the DVFS voltage control through the PWM interface.
+- ti,dvfs-step-20mV: The 20mV step voltage when PWM DVFS enabled. Missing this
+	will set 10mV step voltage in PWM DVFS mode. In normal mode, the voltage
+	step is 10mV as per datasheet.
+
+Any property defined as part of the core regulator binding, defined in
+regulator.txt, can also be used.
+
+Example:
+
+	tps51632 {
+		compatible = "ti,tps51632";
+		reg =  <0x43>;
+		regulator-name = "tps51632-vout";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <500000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>;
+		regulator-boot-on;
+		ti,enable-pwm-dvfs;
+		ti,dvfs-step-20mV;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps62360-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps62360-regulator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1b20c3dbcdb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps62360-regulator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+TPS62360 Voltage regulators
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must be one of the following.
+	"ti,tps62360"
+	"ti,tps62361",
+	"ti,tps62362",
+	"ti,tps62363",
+- reg: I2C slave address
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,enable-vout-discharge: Enable output discharge. This is boolean value.
+- ti,enable-pull-down: Enable pull down. This is boolean value.
+- ti,vsel0-gpio: GPIO for controlling VSEL0 line.
+  If this property is missing, then assume that there is no GPIO
+  for vsel0 control.
+- ti,vsel1-gpio: Gpio for controlling VSEL1 line.
+  If this property is missing, then assume that there is no GPIO
+  for vsel1 control.
+- ti,vsel0-state-high: Initial state of vsel0 input is high.
+  If this property is missing, then assume the state as low (0).
+- ti,vsel1-state-high: Initial state of vsel1 input is high.
+  If this property is missing, then assume the state as low (0).
+
+Any property defined as part of the core regulator binding, defined in
+regulator.txt, can also be used.
+
+Example:
+
+	abc: tps62360 {
+		compatible = "ti,tps62361";
+		reg =  <0x60>;
+		regulator-name = "tps62361-vout";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <500000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>;
+		regulator-boot-on
+		ti,vsel0-gpio = <&gpio1 16 0>;
+		ti,vsel1-gpio = <&gpio1 17 0>;
+		ti,vsel0-state-high;
+		ti,vsel1-state-high;
+		ti,enable-pull-down;
+		ti,enable-force-pwm;
+		ti,enable-vout-discharge;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65090.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65090.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..313a60ba61d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65090.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+TPS65090 regulators
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,tps65090"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+- interrupts: the interrupt outputs of the controller
+- regulators: A node that houses a sub-node for each regulator within the
+  device. Each sub-node is identified using the node's name, with valid
+  values listed below. The content of each sub-node is defined by the
+  standard binding for regulators; see regulator.txt.
+  dcdc[1-3], fet[1-7] and ldo[1-2] respectively.
+- vsys[1-3]-supply: The input supply for DCDC[1-3] respectively.
+- infet[1-7]-supply: The input supply for FET[1-7] respectively.
+- vsys-l[1-2]-supply: The input supply for LDO[1-2] respectively.
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,enable-ext-control: This is applicable for DCDC1, DCDC2 and DCDC3.
+  If DCDCs are externally controlled then this property should be there.
+- "dcdc-ext-control-gpios: This is applicable for DCDC1, DCDC2 and DCDC3.
+  If DCDCs are externally controlled and if it is from GPIO then GPIO
+  number should be provided. If it is externally controlled and no GPIO
+  entry then driver will just configure this rails as external control
+  and will not provide any enable/disable APIs.
+
+Each regulator is defined using the standard binding for regulators.
+
+Example:
+
+	tps65090@48 {
+		compatible = "ti,tps65090";
+		reg = <0x48>;
+		interrupts = <0 88 0x4>;
+
+		vsys1-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		vsys2-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		vsys3-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		infet1-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		infet2-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		infet3-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		infet4-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		infet5-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		infet6-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		infet7-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		vsys_l1-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		vsys_l2-supply = <&some_reg>;
+
+		regulators {
+			dcdc1 {
+				regulator-name = "dcdc1";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+				ti,enable-ext-control;
+				dcdc-ext-control-gpios = <&gpio 10 0>;
+			};
+
+			dcdc2 {
+				regulator-name = "dcdc2";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			dcdc3 {
+				regulator-name = "dcdc3";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			fet1 {
+				regulator-name = "fet1";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			fet2 {
+				regulator-name = "fet2";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			fet3 {
+				regulator-name = "fet3";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			fet4 {
+				regulator-name = "fet4";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			fet5 {
+				regulator-name = "fet5";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			fet6 {
+				regulator-name = "fet6";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			fet7 {
+				regulator-name = "fet7";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			ldo1 {
+				regulator-name = "ldo1";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			ldo2 {
+				regulator-name = "ldo2";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65217.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65217.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4f05d208c95c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65217.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+TPS65217 family of regulators
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,tps65217"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+- regulators: list of regulators provided by this controller, must be named
+  after their hardware counterparts: dcdc[1-3] and ldo[1-4]
+- regulators: This is the list of child nodes that specify the regulator
+  initialization data for defined regulators. Not all regulators for the given
+  device need to be present. The definition for each of these nodes is defined
+  using the standard binding for regulators found at
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt.
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,pmic-shutdown-controller: Telling the PMIC to shutdown on PWR_EN toggle.
+
+  The valid names for regulators are:
+  tps65217: dcdc1, dcdc2, dcdc3, ldo1, ldo2, ldo3 and ldo4
+
+Each regulator is defined using the standard binding for regulators.
+
+Example:
+
+	tps: tps@24 {
+		compatible = "ti,tps65217";
+		ti,pmic-shutdown-controller;
+
+		regulators {
+			dcdc1_reg: dcdc1 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <900000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			dcdc2_reg: dcdc2 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <900000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			dcdc3_reg: dcc3 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <900000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			ldo1_reg: ldo1 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			ldo2_reg: ldo2 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <900000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			ldo3_reg: ldo3 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			ldo4_reg: ldo4 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps6586x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps6586x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8b40cac24d93
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps6586x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+TPS6586x family of regulators
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,tps6586x"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+- interrupts: the interrupt outputs of the controller
+- #gpio-cells: number of cells to describe a GPIO
+- gpio-controller: mark the device as a GPIO controller
+- regulators: A node that houses a sub-node for each regulator within the
+  device. Each sub-node is identified using the node's name (or the deprecated
+  regulator-compatible property if present), with valid values listed below.
+  The content of each sub-node is defined by the standard binding for
+  regulators; see regulator.txt.
+  sys, sm[0-2], ldo[0-9] and ldo_rtc
+- sys-supply: The input supply for SYS.
+- vin-sm0-supply: The input supply for the SM0.
+- vin-sm1-supply: The input supply for the SM1.
+- vin-sm2-supply: The input supply for the SM2.
+- vinldo01-supply: The input supply for the LDO1 and LDO2
+- vinldo23-supply: The input supply for the LDO2 and LDO3
+- vinldo4-supply: The input supply for the LDO4
+- vinldo678-supply: The input supply for the LDO6, LDO7 and LDO8
+- vinldo9-supply: The input supply for the LDO9
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,system-power-controller: Telling whether or not this pmic is controlling
+  the system power.
+
+Each regulator is defined using the standard binding for regulators.
+
+Note: LDO5 and LDO_RTC is supplied by SYS regulator internally and driver
+      take care of making proper parent child relationship.
+
+Example:
+
+	pmu: tps6586x@34 {
+		compatible = "ti,tps6586x";
+		reg = <0x34>;
+		interrupts = <0 88 0x4>;
+
+		#gpio-cells = <2>;
+		gpio-controller;
+
+		ti,system-power-controller;
+
+		sys-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		vin-sm0-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		vin-sm1-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		vin-sm2-supply = <&some_reg>;
+		vinldo01-supply = <...>;
+		vinldo23-supply = <...>;
+		vinldo4-supply = <...>;
+		vinldo678-supply = <...>;
+		vinldo9-supply = <...>;
+
+		regulators {
+			sys_reg: sys {
+				regulator-name = "vdd_sys";
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			sm0_reg: sm0 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = < 725000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			sm1_reg: sm1 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = < 725000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			sm2_reg: sm2 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <3000000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <4550000>;
+				regulator-boot-on;
+				regulator-always-on;
+			};
+
+			ldo0_reg: ldo0 {
+				regulator-name = "PCIE CLK";
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+			};
+
+			ldo1_reg: ldo1 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = < 725000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>;
+			};
+
+			ldo2_reg: ldo2 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = < 725000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <1500000>;
+			};
+
+			ldo3_reg: ldo3 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1250000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+			};
+
+			ldo4_reg: ldo4 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1700000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <2475000>;
+			};
+
+			ldo5_reg: ldo5 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1250000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+			};
+
+			ldo6_reg: ldo6 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1250000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+			};
+
+			ldo7_reg: ldo7 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1250000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+			};
+
+			ldo8_reg: ldo8 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1250000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+			};
+
+			ldo9_reg: ldo9 {
+				regulator-min-microvolt = <1250000>;
+				regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/twl-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/twl-regulator.txt
index 0c3395d55ac1..75b0c1669504 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/twl-regulator.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/twl-regulator.txt
@@ -15,24 +15,23 @@ For twl6030 regulators/LDOs
   - "ti,twl6030-vusb" for VUSB LDO
   - "ti,twl6030-v1v8" for V1V8 LDO
   - "ti,twl6030-v2v1" for V2V1 LDO
-  - "ti,twl6030-clk32kg" for CLK32KG RESOURCE
   - "ti,twl6030-vdd1" for VDD1 SMPS
   - "ti,twl6030-vdd2" for VDD2 SMPS
   - "ti,twl6030-vdd3" for VDD3 SMPS
-For twl6025 regulators/LDOs
+For twl6032 regulators/LDOs
 - compatible:
-  - "ti,twl6025-ldo1" for LDO1 LDO
-  - "ti,twl6025-ldo2" for LDO2 LDO
-  - "ti,twl6025-ldo3" for LDO3 LDO
-  - "ti,twl6025-ldo4" for LDO4 LDO
-  - "ti,twl6025-ldo5" for LDO5 LDO
-  - "ti,twl6025-ldo6" for LDO6 LDO
-  - "ti,twl6025-ldo7" for LDO7 LDO
-  - "ti,twl6025-ldoln" for LDOLN LDO
-  - "ti,twl6025-ldousb" for LDOUSB LDO
-  - "ti,twl6025-smps3" for SMPS3 SMPS
-  - "ti,twl6025-smps4" for SMPS4 SMPS
-  - "ti,twl6025-vio" for VIO SMPS
+  - "ti,twl6032-ldo1" for LDO1 LDO
+  - "ti,twl6032-ldo2" for LDO2 LDO
+  - "ti,twl6032-ldo3" for LDO3 LDO
+  - "ti,twl6032-ldo4" for LDO4 LDO
+  - "ti,twl6032-ldo5" for LDO5 LDO
+  - "ti,twl6032-ldo6" for LDO6 LDO
+  - "ti,twl6032-ldo7" for LDO7 LDO
+  - "ti,twl6032-ldoln" for LDOLN LDO
+  - "ti,twl6032-ldousb" for LDOUSB LDO
+  - "ti,twl6032-smps3" for SMPS3 SMPS
+  - "ti,twl6032-smps4" for SMPS4 SMPS
+  - "ti,twl6032-vio" for VIO SMPS
 For twl4030 regulators/LDOs
 - compatible:
   - "ti,twl4030-vaux1" for VAUX1 LDO
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/vexpress.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/vexpress.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d775f72487aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/vexpress.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+Versatile Express voltage regulators
+------------------------------------
+
+Requires node properties:
+- "compatible" value: "arm,vexpress-volt"
+- "arm,vexpress-sysreg,func" when controlled via vexpress-sysreg
+  (see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-sysreg.txt
+  for more details)
+
+Required regulator properties:
+- "regulator-name"
+- "regulator-always-on"
+
+Optional regulator properties:
+- "regulator-min-microvolt"
+- "regulator-max-microvolt"
+
+See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
+for more details about the regulator properties.
+
+When no "regulator-[min|max]-microvolt" properties are defined,
+the device is treated as fixed (or rather "read-only") regulator.
+
+Example:
+	volt@0 {
+		compatible = "arm,vexpress-volt";
+		arm,vexpress-sysreg,func = <2 0>;
+		regulator-name = "Cores";
+		regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>;
+		regulator-max-microvolt = <1050000>;
+		regulator-always-on;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/fsl,imx-src.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/fsl,imx-src.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..13301777e11c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/fsl,imx-src.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+Freescale i.MX System Reset Controller
+======================================
+
+Please also refer to reset.txt in this directory for common reset
+controller binding usage.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,<chip>-src"
+- reg: should be register base and length as documented in the
+  datasheet
+- interrupts: Should contain SRC interrupt and CPU WDOG interrupt,
+  in this order.
+- #reset-cells: 1, see below
+
+example:
+
+src: src@020d8000 {
+        compatible = "fsl,imx6q-src";
+        reg = <0x020d8000 0x4000>;
+        interrupts = <0 91 0x04 0 96 0x04>;
+        #reset-cells = <1>;
+};
+
+Specifying reset lines connected to IP modules
+==============================================
+
+The system reset controller can be used to reset the GPU, VPU,
+IPU, and OpenVG IP modules on i.MX5 and i.MX6 ICs. Those device
+nodes should specify the reset line on the SRC in their resets
+property, containing a phandle to the SRC device node and a
+RESET_INDEX specifying which module to reset, as described in
+reset.txt
+
+example:
+
+        ipu1: ipu@02400000 {
+                resets = <&src 2>;
+        };
+        ipu2: ipu@02800000 {
+                resets = <&src 4>;
+        };
+
+The following RESET_INDEX values are valid for i.MX5:
+GPU_RESET     0
+VPU_RESET     1
+IPU1_RESET    2
+OPEN_VG_RESET 3
+The following additional RESET_INDEX value is valid for i.MX6:
+IPU2_RESET    4
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/reset.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..31db6ff84908
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/reset.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+= Reset Signal Device Tree Bindings =
+
+This binding is intended to represent the hardware reset signals present
+internally in most IC (SoC, FPGA, ...) designs. Reset signals for whole
+standalone chips are most likely better represented as GPIOs, although there
+are likely to be exceptions to this rule.
+
+Hardware blocks typically receive a reset signal. This signal is generated by
+a reset provider (e.g. power management or clock module) and received by a
+reset consumer (the module being reset, or a module managing when a sub-
+ordinate module is reset). This binding exists to represent the provider and
+consumer, and provide a way to couple the two together.
+
+A reset signal is represented by the phandle of the provider, plus a reset
+specifier - a list of DT cells that represents the reset signal within the
+provider. The length (number of cells) and semantics of the reset specifier
+are dictated by the binding of the reset provider, although common schemes
+are described below.
+
+A word on where to place reset signal consumers in device tree: It is possible
+in hardware for a reset signal to affect multiple logically separate HW blocks
+at once. In this case, it would be unwise to represent this reset signal in
+the DT node of each affected HW block, since if activated, an unrelated block
+may be reset. Instead, reset signals should be represented in the DT node
+where it makes most sense to control it; this may be a bus node if all
+children of the bus are affected by the reset signal, or an individual HW
+block node for dedicated reset signals. The intent of this binding is to give
+appropriate software access to the reset signals in order to manage the HW,
+rather than to slavishly enumerate the reset signal that affects each HW
+block.
+
+= Reset providers =
+
+Required properties:
+#reset-cells:	Number of cells in a reset specifier; Typically 0 for nodes
+		with a single reset output and 1 for nodes with multiple
+		reset outputs.
+
+For example:
+
+	rst: reset-controller {
+		#reset-cells = <1>;
+	};
+
+= Reset consumers =
+
+Required properties:
+resets:		List of phandle and reset specifier pairs, one pair
+		for each reset signal that affects the device, or that the
+		device manages. Note: if the reset provider specifies '0' for
+		#reset-cells, then only the phandle portion of the pair will
+		appear.
+
+Optional properties:
+reset-names:	List of reset signal name strings sorted in the same order as
+		the resets property. Consumers drivers will use reset-names to
+		match reset signal names with reset specifiers.
+
+For example:
+
+	device {
+		resets = <&rst 20>;
+		reset-names = "reset";
+	};
+
+This represents a device with a single reset signal named "reset".
+
+	bus {
+		resets = <&rst 10> <&rst 11> <&rst 12> <&rst 11>;
+		reset-names = "i2s1", "i2s2", "dma", "mixer";
+	};
+
+This represents a bus that controls the reset signal of each of four sub-
+ordinate devices. Consider for example a bus that fails to operate unless no
+child device has reset asserted.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/brcm,bcm2835.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/brcm,bcm2835.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..07ccdaa68324
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/brcm,bcm2835.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+BCM2835 Random number generator
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "brcm,bcm2835-rng"
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+
+Example:
+
+rng {
+        compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-rng";
+        reg = <0x7e104000 0x10>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/atmel,at91rm9200-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/atmel,at91rm9200-rtc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..34c1505774bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/atmel,at91rm9200-rtc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+Atmel AT91RM9200 Real Time Clock
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be: "atmel,at91rm9200-rtc" or "atmel,at91sam9x5-rtc"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: rtc alarm/event interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+rtc@fffffe00 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-rtc";
+	reg = <0xfffffe00 0x100>;
+	interrupts = <1 4 7>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/dw-apb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/dw-apb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c703d51abb6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/dw-apb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+* Designware APB timer
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: One of:
+ 	"snps,dw-apb-timer"
+	"snps,dw-apb-timer-sp" <DEPRECATED>
+	"snps,dw-apb-timer-osc" <DEPRECATED>
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: IRQ line for the timer.
+- either clocks+clock-names or clock-frequency properties
+
+Optional properties:
+- clocks	: list of clock specifiers, corresponding to entries in
+		  the clock-names property;
+- clock-names	: should contain "timer" and "pclk" entries, matching entries
+		  in the clocks property.
+- clock-frequency: The frequency in HZ of the timer.
+- clock-freq: For backwards compatibility with picoxcell
+
+If using the clock specifiers, the pclk clock is optional, as not all
+systems may use one.
+
+
+Example:
+	timer@ffe00000 {
+		compatible = "snps,dw-apb-timer";
+		interrupts = <0 170 4>;
+		reg = <0xffe00000 0x1000>;
+		clocks = <&timer_clk>, <&timer_pclk>;
+		clock-names = "timer", "pclk";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/imxdi-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/imxdi-rtc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c9d80d7da141
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/imxdi-rtc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+* i.MX25 Real Time Clock controller
+
+This binding supports the following chips: i.MX25, i.MX53
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be: "fsl,imx25-rtc"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: rtc alarm interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+rtc@80056000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx53-rtc", "fsl,imx25-rtc";
+	reg = <0x80056000 2000>;
+	interrupts = <29>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/lpc32xx-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/lpc32xx-rtc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a87a1e9bc060
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/lpc32xx-rtc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+* NXP LPC32xx SoC Real Time Clock controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "nxp,lpc3220-rtc"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: The RTC interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+	rtc@40024000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-rtc";
+		reg = <0x40024000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <52 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/moxa,moxart-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/moxa,moxart-rtc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c9d3ac1477fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/moxa,moxart-rtc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+MOXA ART real-time clock
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : Should be "moxa,moxart-rtc"
+- gpio-rtc-sclk : RTC sclk gpio, with zero flags
+- gpio-rtc-data : RTC data gpio, with zero flags
+- gpio-rtc-reset : RTC reset gpio, with zero flags
+
+Example:
+
+	rtc: rtc {
+		compatible = "moxa,moxart-rtc";
+		gpio-rtc-sclk = <&gpio 5 0>;
+		gpio-rtc-data = <&gpio 6 0>;
+		gpio-rtc-reset = <&gpio 7 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nvidia,tegra20-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nvidia,tegra20-rtc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..93f45e9dce7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/nvidia,tegra20-rtc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra20 real-time clock
+
+The Tegra RTC maintains seconds and milliseconds counters, and five alarm
+registers. The alarms and other interrupts may wake the system from low-power
+state.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "nvidia,tegra20-rtc".
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupts : A single interrupt specifier.
+
+Example:
+
+timer {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-rtc";
+	reg = <0x7000e000 0x100>;
+	interrupts = <0 2 0x04>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/orion-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/orion-rtc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3bf63ffa5160
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/orion-rtc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+* Mvebu Real Time Clock
+
+RTC controller for the Kirkwood, the Dove, the Armada 370 and the
+Armada XP SoCs
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "marvell,orion-rtc"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: IRQ line for the RTC.
+
+Example:
+
+rtc@10300 {
+        compatible = "marvell,orion-rtc";
+        reg = <0xd0010300 0x20>;
+        interrupts = <50>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/pxa-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/pxa-rtc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8c6672a1b7d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/pxa-rtc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+* PXA RTC
+
+PXA specific RTC driver.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "marvell,pxa-rtc"
+
+Examples:
+
+rtc@40900000 {
+	compatible = "marvell,pxa-rtc";
+	reg = <0x40900000 0x3c>;
+	interrupts = <30 31>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5a0f02d34d95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+TI Real Time Clock
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:
+	- "ti,da830-rtc"  - for RTC IP used similar to that on DA8xx SoC family.
+	- "ti,am3352-rtc" - for RTC IP used similar to that on AM335x SoC family.
+			    This RTC IP has special WAKE-EN Register to enable
+			    Wakeup generation for event Alarm.
+- reg: Address range of rtc register set
+- interrupts: rtc timer, alarm interrupts in order
+- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt controller
+
+Example:
+
+rtc@1c23000 {
+	compatible = "ti,da830-rtc";
+	reg = <0x23000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <19
+		      19>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-palmas.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-palmas.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..adbccc0a51e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-palmas.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+Palmas RTC controller bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:
+  - "ti,palmas-rtc" for palma series of the RTC controller
+- interrupt-parent: Parent interrupt device, must be handle of palmas node.
+- interrupts: Interrupt number of RTC submodule on device.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- ti,backup-battery-chargeable: The Palmas series device like TPS65913 or
+	TPS80036 supports the backup battery for powering the RTC when main
+	battery is removed or in very low power state. The backup battery
+	can be chargeable or non-chargeable. This flag will tells whether
+	battery is chargeable or not. If charging battery then driver can
+	enable the charging.
+- ti,backup-battery-charge-high-current: Enable high current charging in
+	backup battery. Device supports the < 100mA and > 100mA charging.
+	The high current will be > 100mA. Absence of this property will
+	charge battery to lower current i.e. < 100mA.
+
+Example:
+	palmas: tps65913@58 {
+		...
+		palmas_rtc: rtc {
+			compatible = "ti,palmas-rtc";
+			interrupt-parent = <&palmas>;
+			interrupts = <8 0>;
+			ti,backup-battery-chargeable;
+			ti,backup-battery-charge-high-current;
+		};
+		...
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/s3c-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/s3c-rtc.txt
index 90ec45fd33ec..7ac7259fe9ea 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/s3c-rtc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/s3c-rtc.txt
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ Required properties:
 - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
   region.
 - interrupts: Two interrupt numbers to the cpu should be specified. First
-  interrupt number is the rtc alarm interupt and second interrupt number
+  interrupt number is the rtc alarm interrupt and second interrupt number
   is the rtc tick interrupt. The number of cells representing a interrupt
   depends on the parent interrupt controller.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/sa1100-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/sa1100-rtc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0cda19ad4859
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/sa1100-rtc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+* Marvell Real Time Clock controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be "mrvl,sa1100-rtc"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: Should be two. The first interrupt number is the rtc alarm
+  interrupt and the second interrupt number is the rtc hz interrupt.
+- interrupt-names: Assign name of irq resource.
+
+Example:
+	rtc: rtc@d4010000 {
+		compatible = "mrvl,mmp-rtc";
+		reg = <0xd4010000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <5>, <6>;
+		interrupt-name = "rtc 1Hz", "rtc alarm";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/snvs-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/snvs-rtc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fb61ed77ada3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/snvs-rtc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt for details.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/spear-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/spear-rtc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ca67ac62108e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/spear-rtc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+* SPEAr RTC
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "st,spear600-rtc"
+- reg : Address range of the rtc registers
+- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller
+  that services interrupts for this device
+- interrupt: Should contain the rtc interrupt number
+
+Example:
+
+	rtc@fc000000 {
+		compatible = "st,spear600-rtc";
+		reg = <0xfc000000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&vic1>;
+		interrupts = <12>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/stmp3xxx-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/stmp3xxx-rtc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b800070fe6e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/stmp3xxx-rtc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+* STMP3xxx/i.MX28 Time Clock controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be one of the following.
+    * "fsl,stmp3xxx-rtc"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: rtc alarm interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+rtc@80056000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-rtc", "fsl,stmp3xxx-rtc";
+	reg = <0x80056000 2000>;
+	interrupts = <29>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/via,vt8500-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/via,vt8500-rtc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3c0484c49582
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/via,vt8500-rtc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+VIA/Wondermedia VT8500 Realtime Clock Controller
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "via,vt8500-rtc"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+- interrupts : alarm interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+	rtc@d8100000 {
+		compatible = "via,vt8500-rtc";
+		reg = <0xd8100000 0x10000>;
+		interrupts = <48>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt
index c152f65f9a28..55a901051e8f 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
 Altera JTAG UART
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible : should be "ALTR,juart-1.0"
+- compatible : should be "ALTR,juart-1.0" <DEPRECATED>
+- compatible : should be "altr,juart-1.0"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt
index 71cae3f70100..81bf7ffb1a81 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 Altera UART
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible : should be "ALTR,uart-1.0"
+- compatible : should be "ALTR,uart-1.0" <DEPRECATED>
+- compatible : should be "altr,uart-1.0"
 
 Optional properties:
 - clock-frequency : frequency of the clock input to the UART
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/arc-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/arc-uart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5cae2eb686f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/arc-uart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+* Synopsys ARC UART : Non standard UART used in some of the ARC FPGA boards
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible		: "snps,arc-uart"
+- reg			: offset and length of the register set for the device.
+- interrupts		: device interrupt
+- clock-frequency	: the input clock frequency for the UART
+- current-speed		: baud rate for UART
+
+e.g.
+
+arcuart0: serial@c0fc1000 {
+	compatible = "snps,arc-uart";
+	reg = <0xc0fc1000 0x100>;
+	interrupts = <5>;
+	clock-frequency = <80000000>;
+	current-speed = <115200>;
+	status = "okay";
+};
+
+Note: Each port should have an alias correctly numbered in "aliases" node.
+
+e.g.
+aliases {
+	serial0 = &arcuart0;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/atmel-usart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/atmel-usart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2191dcb9f1da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/atmel-usart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+* Atmel Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (USART)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-usart"
+  The compatible <chip> indicated will be the first SoC to support an
+  additional mode or an USART new feature.
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length
+- interrupts: Should contain interrupt
+
+Optional properties:
+- atmel,use-dma-rx: use of PDC or DMA for receiving data
+- atmel,use-dma-tx: use of PDC or DMA for transmitting data
+- add dma bindings for dma transfer:
+	- dmas: DMA specifier, consisting of a phandle to DMA controller node,
+		memory peripheral interface and USART DMA channel ID, FIFO configuration.
+		Refer to dma.txt and atmel-dma.txt for details.
+	- dma-names: "rx" for RX channel, "tx" for TX channel.
+
+<chip> compatible description:
+- at91rm9200:  legacy USART support
+- at91sam9260: generic USART implementation for SAM9 SoCs
+
+Example:
+- use PDC:
+	usart0: serial@fff8c000 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-usart";
+		reg = <0xfff8c000 0x4000>;
+		interrupts = <7>;
+		atmel,use-dma-rx;
+		atmel,use-dma-tx;
+	};
+
+- use DMA:
+	usart0: serial@f001c000 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-usart";
+		reg = <0xf001c000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <12 4 5>;
+		atmel,use-dma-rx;
+		atmel,use-dma-tx;
+		dmas = <&dma0 2 0x3>,
+		       <&dma0 2 0x204>;
+		dma-names = "tx", "rx";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/cavium-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/cavium-uart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..87a6c375cd44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/cavium-uart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+* Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
+
+- compatible: "cavium,octeon-3860-uart"
+
+  Compatibility with all cn3XXX, cn5XXX and cn6XXX SOCs.
+
+- reg: The base address of the UART register bank.
+
+- interrupts: A single interrupt specifier.
+
+- current-speed: Optional, the current bit rate in bits per second.
+
+Example:
+	uart1: serial@1180000000c00 {
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-3860-uart","ns16550";
+		reg = <0x11800 0x00000c00 0x0 0x400>;
+		current-speed = <115200>;
+		interrupts = <0 35>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/efm32-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/efm32-uart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8e080b893b49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/efm32-uart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+* Energymicro efm32 UART
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "efm32,uart"
+- reg : Address and length of the register set
+- interrupts : Should contain uart interrupt
+
+Optional properties:
+- location : Decides the location of the USART I/O pins.
+  Allowed range : [0 .. 5]
+  Default: 0
+
+Example:
+
+uart@0x4000c400 {
+	compatible = "efm32,uart";
+	reg = <0x4000c400 0x400>;
+	interrupts = <15>;
+	location = <0>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-imx-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-imx-uart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..35ae1fb3537f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-imx-uart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+* Freescale i.MX Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "fsl,<soc>-uart"
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts : Should contain uart interrupt
+
+Optional properties:
+- fsl,uart-has-rtscts : Indicate the uart has rts and cts
+- fsl,irda-mode : Indicate the uart supports irda mode
+- fsl,dte-mode : Indicate the uart works in DTE mode. The uart works
+                  is DCE mode by default.
+
+Note: Each uart controller should have an alias correctly numbered
+in "aliases" node.
+
+Example:
+
+aliases {
+	serial0 = &uart1;
+};
+
+uart1: serial@73fbc000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx51-uart", "fsl,imx21-uart";
+	reg = <0x73fbc000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <31>;
+	fsl,uart-has-rtscts;
+	fsl,dte-mode;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-lpuart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-lpuart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6fd1dd1638dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-lpuart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+* Freescale low power universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (lpuart)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "fsl,<soc>-lpuart"
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts : Should contain uart interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+uart0: serial@40027000 {
+	       compatible = "fsl,vf610-lpuart";
+	       reg = <0x40027000 0x1000>;
+	       interrupts = <0 61 0x00>;
+       };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-mxs-auart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-mxs-auart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..59a40f18d551
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-mxs-auart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+* Freescale MXS Application UART (AUART)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "fsl,<soc>-auart". The supported SoCs include
+  imx23 and imx28.
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts : Should contain the auart interrupt numbers
+- dmas: DMA specifier, consisting of a phandle to DMA controller node
+  and AUART DMA channel ID.
+  Refer to dma.txt and fsl-mxs-dma.txt for details.
+- dma-names: "rx" for RX channel, "tx" for TX channel.
+
+Optional properties:
+- fsl,uart-has-rtscts : Indicate the UART has RTS and CTS lines,
+	it also means you enable the DMA support for this UART.
+
+Example:
+auart0: serial@8006a000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-auart", "fsl,imx23-auart";
+	reg = <0x8006a000 0x2000>;
+	interrupts = <112>;
+	dmas = <&dma_apbx 8>, <&dma_apbx 9>;
+	dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+};
+
+Note: Each auart port should have an alias correctly numbered in "aliases"
+node.
+
+Example:
+
+aliases {
+	serial0 = &auart0;
+	serial1 = &auart1;
+	serial2 = &auart2;
+	serial3 = &auart3;
+	serial4 = &auart4;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/lantiq_asc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/lantiq_asc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5b78591aaa46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/lantiq_asc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+Lantiq SoC ASC serial controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "lantiq,asc"
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts: the 3 (tx rx err) interrupt numbers. The interrupt specifier
+  depends on the interrupt-parent interrupt controller.
+
+Example:
+
+asc1: serial@E100C00 {
+	compatible = "lantiq,asc";
+	reg = <0xE100C00 0x400>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&icu0>;
+	interrupts = <112 113 114>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mrvl,pxa-ssp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mrvl,pxa-ssp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..669b8140dd79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mrvl,pxa-ssp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+Device tree bindings for Marvell PXA SSP ports
+
+Required properties:
+
+	- compatible:	Must be one of
+				mrvl,pxa25x-ssp
+				mvrl,pxa25x-nssp
+				mrvl,pxa27x-ssp
+				mrvl,pxa3xx-ssp
+				mvrl,pxa168-ssp
+				mrvl,pxa910-ssp
+				mrvl,ce4100-ssp
+				mrvl,lpss-ssp
+
+	- reg:		The memory base
+	- dmas:		Two dma phandles, one for rx, one for tx
+	- dma-names:	Must be "rx", "tx"
+
+
+Example for PXA3xx:
+
+	ssp0: ssp@41000000 {
+		compatible = "mrvl,pxa3xx-ssp";
+		reg = <0x41000000 0x40>;
+		ssp-id = <1>;
+		interrupts = <24>;
+		clock-names = "pxa27x-ssp.0";
+		dmas = <&dma 13
+			&dma 14>;
+		dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+	};
+
+	ssp1: ssp@41700000 {
+		compatible = "mrvl,pxa3xx-ssp";
+		reg = <0x41700000 0x40>;
+		ssp-id = <2>;
+		interrupts = <16>;
+		clock-names = "pxa27x-ssp.1";
+		dmas = <&dma 15
+			&dma 16>;
+		dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+	};
+
+	ssp2: ssp@41900000 {
+		compatibl3 = "mrvl,pxa3xx-ssp";
+		reg = <0x41900000 0x40>;
+		ssp-id = <3>;
+		interrupts = <0>;
+		clock-names = "pxa27x-ssp.2";
+		dmas = <&dma 66
+			&dma 67>;
+		dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+	};
+
+	ssp3: ssp@41a00000 {
+		compatible = "mrvl,pxa3xx-ssp";
+		reg = <0x41a00000 0x40>;
+		ssp-id = <4>;
+		interrupts = <13>;
+		clock-names = "pxa27x-ssp.3";
+		dmas = <&dma 2
+			&dma 3>;
+		dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mrvl-serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mrvl-serial.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d744340de887
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mrvl-serial.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+PXA UART controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "mrvl,mmp-uart" or "mrvl,pxa-uart".
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nvidia,tegra20-hsuart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nvidia,tegra20-hsuart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..392a4493eebd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nvidia,tegra20-hsuart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra20/Tegra30 high speed (DMA based) UART controller driver.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "nvidia,tegra30-hsuart", "nvidia,tegra20-hsuart".
+- reg: Should contain UART controller registers location and length.
+- interrupts: Should contain UART controller interrupts.
+- nvidia,dma-request-selector : The Tegra DMA controller's phandle and
+  request selector for this UART controller.
+
+Optional properties:
+- nvidia,enable-modem-interrupt: Enable modem interrupts. Should be enable
+		only if all 8 lines of UART controller are pinmuxed.
+
+Example:
+
+serial@70006000 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra30-hsuart", "nvidia,tegra20-hsuart";
+	reg = <0x70006000 0x40>;
+	reg-shift = <2>;
+	interrupts = <0 36 0x04>;
+	nvidia,dma-request-selector = <&apbdma 8>;
+	nvidia,enable-modem-interrupt;
+	status = "disabled";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp-lpc32xx-hsuart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp-lpc32xx-hsuart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0d439dfc1aa5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp-lpc32xx-hsuart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+* NXP LPC32xx SoC High Speed UART
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "nxp,lpc3220-hsuart"
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length
+- interrupts: Should contain interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+	uart1: serial@40014000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-hsuart";
+		reg = <0x40014000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <26 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/of-serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/of-serial.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1928a3e83cd0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/of-serial.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+* UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : one of:
+	- "ns8250"
+	- "ns16450"
+	- "ns16550a"
+	- "ns16550"
+	- "ns16750"
+	- "ns16850"
+	- "nvidia,tegra20-uart"
+	- "nxp,lpc3220-uart"
+	- "ibm,qpace-nwp-serial"
+	- "altr,16550-FIFO32"
+	- "altr,16550-FIFO64"
+	- "altr,16550-FIFO128"
+	- "serial" if the port type is unknown.
+- reg : offset and length of the register set for the device.
+- interrupts : should contain uart interrupt.
+- clock-frequency : the input clock frequency for the UART
+	 or
+  clocks phandle to refer to the clk used as per Documentation/devicetree
+  /bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+Optional properties:
+- current-speed : the current active speed of the UART.
+- reg-offset : offset to apply to the mapbase from the start of the registers.
+- reg-shift : quantity to shift the register offsets by.
+- reg-io-width : the size (in bytes) of the IO accesses that should be
+  performed on the device.  There are some systems that require 32-bit
+  accesses to the UART (e.g. TI davinci).
+- used-by-rtas : set to indicate that the port is in use by the OpenFirmware
+  RTAS and should not be registered.
+- no-loopback-test: set to indicate that the port does not implements loopback
+  test mode
+- fifo-size: the fifo size of the UART.
+- auto-flow-control: one way to enable automatic flow control support. The
+  driver is allowed to detect support for the capability even without this
+  property.
+
+Example:
+
+	uart@80230000 {
+		compatible = "ns8250";
+		reg = <0x80230000 0x100>;
+		clock-frequency = <3686400>;
+		interrupts = <10>;
+		reg-shift = <2>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5d2e840ae65c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+* ARM AMBA Primecell PL011 serial UART
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "arm,primecell", "arm,pl011"
+- reg: exactly one register range with length 0x1000
+- interrupts: exactly one interrupt specifier
+
+Optional properties:
+- pinctrl: When present, must have one state named "sleep"
+	   and one state named "default"
+- clocks:  When present, must refer to exactly one clock named
+	   "apb_pclk"
+- dmas:	   When present, may have one or two dma channels.
+	   The first one must be named "rx", the second one
+	   must be named "tx".
+
+See also bindings/arm/primecell.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qca,ar9330-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qca,ar9330-uart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c5e032c85bf9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qca,ar9330-uart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+* Qualcomm Atheros AR9330 High-Speed UART
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: Must be "qca,ar9330-uart"
+
+- reg: Specifies the physical base address of the controller and
+  the length of the memory mapped region.
+
+- interrupt-parent: The phandle for the interrupt controller that
+  services interrupts for this device.
+
+- interrupts: Specifies the interrupt source of the parent interrupt
+  controller. The format of the interrupt specifier depends on the
+  parent interrupt controller.
+
+Additional requirements:
+
+  Each UART port must have an alias correctly numbered in "aliases"
+  node.
+
+Example:
+
+	aliases {
+		serial0 = &uart0;
+	};
+
+	uart0: uart@18020000 {
+		compatible = "qca,ar9330-uart";
+		reg = <0x18020000 0x14>;
+
+		interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+		interrupts = <3>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qcom,msm-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qcom,msm-uart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ce8c90161959
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qcom,msm-uart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+* MSM Serial UART
+
+The MSM serial UART hardware is designed for low-speed use cases where a
+dma-engine isn't needed. From a software perspective it's mostly compatible
+with the MSM serial UARTDM except that it only supports reading and writing one
+character at a time.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should contain "qcom,msm-uart"
+- reg: Should contain UART register location and length.
+- interrupts: Should contain UART interrupt.
+- clocks: Should contain the core clock.
+- clock-names: Should be "core".
+
+Example:
+
+A uart device at 0xa9c00000 with interrupt 11.
+
+serial@a9c00000 {
+	compatible = "qcom,msm-uart";
+	reg = <0xa9c00000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <11>;
+	clocks = <&uart_cxc>;
+	clock-names = "core";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qcom,msm-uartdm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qcom,msm-uartdm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ffa5b784c66e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qcom,msm-uartdm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+* MSM Serial UARTDM
+
+The MSM serial UARTDM hardware is designed for high-speed use cases where the
+transmit and/or receive channels can be offloaded to a dma-engine. From a
+software perspective it's mostly compatible with the MSM serial UART except
+that it supports reading and writing multiple characters at a time.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should contain at least "qcom,msm-uartdm".
+              A more specific property should be specified as follows depending
+	      on the version:
+		"qcom,msm-uartdm-v1.1"
+		"qcom,msm-uartdm-v1.2"
+		"qcom,msm-uartdm-v1.3"
+		"qcom,msm-uartdm-v1.4"
+- reg: Should contain UART register locations and lengths. The first
+       register shall specify the main control registers. An optional second
+       register location shall specify the GSBI control region.
+       "qcom,msm-uartdm-v1.3" is the only compatible value that might
+       need the GSBI control region.
+- interrupts: Should contain UART interrupt.
+- clocks: Should contain the core clock and the AHB clock.
+- clock-names: Should be "core" for the core clock and "iface" for the
+	       AHB clock.
+
+Optional properties:
+- dmas: Should contain dma specifiers for transmit and receive channels
+- dma-names: Should contain "tx" for transmit and "rx" for receive channels
+
+Examples:
+
+A uartdm v1.4 device with dma capabilities.
+
+serial@f991e000 {
+	compatible = "qcom,msm-uartdm-v1.4", "qcom,msm-uartdm";
+	reg = <0xf991e000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <0 108 0x0>;
+	clocks = <&blsp1_uart2_apps_cxc>, <&blsp1_ahb_cxc>;
+	clock-names = "core", "iface";
+	dmas = <&dma0 0>, <&dma0 1>;
+	dma-names = "tx", "rx";
+};
+
+A uartdm v1.3 device without dma capabilities and part of a GSBI complex.
+
+serial@19c40000 {
+	compatible = "qcom,msm-uartdm-v1.3", "qcom,msm-uartdm";
+	reg = <0x19c40000 0x1000>,
+	      <0x19c00000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <0 195 0x0>;
+	clocks = <&gsbi5_uart_cxc>, <&gsbi5_ahb_cxc>;
+	clock-names = "core", "iface";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt
index 1e753c69fc83..32b1fa1f2a5b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ UART node.
 
 Required properties:
 - rs485-rts-delay: prop-encoded-array <a b> where:
-  * a is the delay beteween rts signal and beginning of data sent in milliseconds.
+  * a is the delay between rts signal and beginning of data sent in milliseconds.
       it corresponds to the delay before sending data.
   * b is the delay between end of data sent and rts signal in milliseconds
       it corresponds to the delay after sending data and actual release of the line.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/sirf-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/sirf-uart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a2dfc6522a91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/sirf-uart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+* CSR SiRFprimaII/atlasVI Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter *
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "sirf,prima2-uart" or "sirf, prima2-usp-uart"
+- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts : Should contain uart interrupt
+- fifosize : Should define hardware rx/tx fifo size
+- clocks : Should contain uart clock number
+
+Optional properties:
+- sirf,uart-has-rtscts: we have hardware flow controller pins in hardware
+- rts-gpios: RTS pin for USP-based UART if sirf,uart-has-rtscts is true
+- cts-gpios: CTS pin for USP-based UART if sirf,uart-has-rtscts is true
+
+Example:
+
+uart0: uart@b0050000 {
+	cell-index = <0>;
+	compatible = "sirf,prima2-uart";
+	reg = <0xb0050000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <17>;
+	fifosize = <128>;
+	clocks = <&clks 13>;
+};
+
+On the board-specific dts, we can put rts-gpios and cts-gpios like
+
+usp@b0090000 {
+	compatible = "sirf,prima2-usp-uart";
+	sirf,uart-has-rtscts;
+	rts-gpios = <&gpio 15 0>;
+	cts-gpios = <&gpio 46 0>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt
index f13f1c5be91c..f13f1c5be91c 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/st-asc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/st-asc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..75d877f5968f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/st-asc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+*st-asc(Serial Port)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "st,asc".
+- reg, reg-names, interrupts, interrupt-names	: Standard way to define device
+			resources with names. look in
+			Documentation/devicetree/bindings/resource-names.txt
+
+Optional properties:
+- st,hw-flow-ctrl	bool flag to enable hardware flow control.
+- st,force-m1		bool flat to force asc to be in Mode-1 recommeded
+			for high bit rates (above 19.2K)
+Example:
+serial@fe440000{
+    compatible    = "st,asc";
+    reg         = <0xfe440000 0x2c>;
+    interrupts     =  <0 209 0>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/via,vt8500-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/via,vt8500-uart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5feef1ef167d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/via,vt8500-uart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+VIA/Wondermedia VT8500 UART Controller
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "via,vt8500-uart"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+- interrupts : UART interrupt
+- clocks : phandle to the uart source clock (usually a 24Mhz fixed clock)
+
+Example:
+
+	uart@d8210000 {
+		compatible = "via,vt8500-uart";
+		reg = <0xd8210000 0x1040>;
+		interrupts = <47>;
+		clocks = <&ref24>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt
index 4d9eecc2ef7d..520199e2e347 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
 Altera UP PS/2 controller
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible : should be "ALTR,ps2-1.0".
+- compatible : should be "ALTR,ps2-1.0". <DEPRECATED>
+- compatible : should be "altr,ps2-1.0".
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/olpc,ap-sp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/olpc,ap-sp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0e72183f52bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/olpc,ap-sp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+OLPC AP-SP serio interface
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "olpc,ap-sp"
+- reg : base address and length of SoC's WTM registers
+- interrupts : SP-AP interrupt
+
+Example:
+	ap-sp@d4290000 {
+		compatible = "olpc,ap-sp";
+		reg = <0xd4290000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <40>;
+	}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/snps-arc_ps2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/snps-arc_ps2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..38c2f21e8044
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/snps-arc_ps2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+* ARC PS/2 driver: PS/2 block used in some ARC FPGA's & nSIM OSCI model
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible		: "snps,arc_ps2"
+- reg			: offset and length (always 0x14) of registers
+- interrupts		: interrupt
+- interrupt-names	: name of interrupt, must be "arc_ps2_irq"
+
+Example:
+
+serio@c9000400 {
+	compatible = "snps,arc_ps2";
+	reg = <0xc9000400 0x14>;
+	interrupts = <13>;
+	interrupt-names = "arc_ps2_irq";
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,adau1701.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,adau1701.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..547a49b56a62
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,adau1701.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+Analog Devices ADAU1701
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - compatible:		Should contain "adi,adau1701"
+ - reg:			The i2c address. Value depends on the state of ADDR0
+			and ADDR1, as wired in hardware.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+ - reset-gpio: 		A GPIO spec to define which pin is connected to the
+			chip's !RESET pin. If specified, the driver will
+			assert a hardware reset at probe time.
+ - adi,pll-mode-gpios:	An array of two GPIO specs to describe the GPIOs
+			the ADAU's PLL config pins are connected to.
+			The state of the pins are set according to the
+			configured clock divider on ASoC side before the
+			firmware is loaded.
+ - adi,pin-config:	An array of 12 numerical values selecting one of the
+			pin configurations as described in the datasheet,
+			table 53. Note that the value of this property has
+			to be prefixed with '/bits/ 8'.
+
+Examples:
+
+	i2c_bus {
+		adau1701@34 {
+			compatible = "adi,adau1701";
+			reg = <0x34>;
+			reset-gpio = <&gpio 23 0>;
+			adi,pll-mode-gpios = <&gpio 24 0 &gpio 25 0>;
+			adi,pin-config = /bits/ 8 <0x4 0x7 0x5 0x5 0x4 0x4
+                                                   0x4 0x4 0x4 0x4 0x4 0x4>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4104.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4104.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b902ee39cf89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4104.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+AK4104 S/PDIF transmitter
+
+This device supports SPI mode only.
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : "asahi-kasei,ak4104"
+
+  - reg : The chip select number on the SPI bus
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - reset-gpio : a GPIO spec for the reset pin. If specified, it will be
+		 deasserted before communication to the device starts.
+
+Example:
+
+spdif: ak4104@0 {
+	compatible = "asahi-kasei,ak4104";
+	reg = <0>;
+	spi-max-frequency = <5000000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4554.c b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4554.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..934fa02754b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4554.c
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+AK4554 ADC/DAC
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : "asahi-kasei,ak4554"
+
+Example:
+
+ak4554-adc-dac {
+	compatible = "asahi-kasei,ak4554";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4642.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4642.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..623d4e70ae11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak4642.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+AK4642 I2C transmitter
+
+This device supports I2C mode only.
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : "asahi-kasei,ak4642" or "asahi-kasei,ak4643" or "asahi-kasei,ak4648"
+  - reg : The chip select number on the I2C bus
+
+Example:
+
+&i2c {
+	ak4648: ak4648@0x12 {
+		compatible = "asahi-kasei,ak4642";
+		reg = <0x12>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak5386.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak5386.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dc3914fe6ce8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ak5386.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+AK5386 Single-ended 24-Bit 192kHz delta-sigma ADC
+
+This device has no control interface.
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : "asahi-kasei,ak5386"
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - reset-gpio : a GPIO spec for the reset/power down pin.
+		 If specified, it will be deasserted at probe time.
+
+Example:
+
+spdif: ak5386@0 {
+	compatible = "asahi-kasei,ak5386";
+	reset-gpio = <&gpio0 23>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/alc5632.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/alc5632.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ffd886d110bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/alc5632.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+ALC5632 audio CODEC
+
+This device supports I2C only.
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : "realtek,alc5632"
+
+  - reg : the I2C address of the device.
+
+  - gpio-controller : Indicates this device is a GPIO controller.
+
+  - #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the
+    second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently unused).
+
+Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes):
+
+  * SPK_OUTP
+  * SPK_OUTN
+  * HP_OUT_L
+  * HP_OUT_R
+  * AUX_OUT_P
+  * AUX_OUT_N
+  * LINE_IN_L
+  * LINE_IN_R
+  * PHONE_P
+  * PHONE_N
+  * MIC1_P
+  * MIC1_N
+  * MIC2_P
+  * MIC2_N
+  * MICBIAS1
+  * DMICDAT
+
+Example:
+
+alc5632: alc5632@1e {
+	compatible = "realtek,alc5632";
+	reg = <0x1a>;
+
+	gpio-controller;
+	#gpio-cells = <2>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-at91sam9g20ek-wm8731-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-at91sam9g20ek-wm8731-audio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9c5a9947b64d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-at91sam9g20ek-wm8731-audio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+* Atmel at91sam9g20ek wm8731 audio complex
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: "atmel,at91sam9g20ek-wm8731-audio"
+  - atmel,model: The user-visible name of this sound complex.
+  - atmel,audio-routing: A list of the connections between audio components.
+  - atmel,ssc-controller: The phandle of the SSC controller
+  - atmel,audio-codec: The phandle of the WM8731 audio codec
+Optional properties:
+  - pinctrl-names, pinctrl-0: Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt
+
+Example:
+sound {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91sam9g20ek-wm8731-audio";
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_pck0_as_mck>;
+
+	atmel,model = "wm8731 @ AT91SAMG20EK";
+
+	atmel,audio-routing =
+		"Ext Spk", "LHPOUT",
+		"Int MIC", "MICIN";
+
+	atmel,ssc-controller = <&ssc0>;
+	atmel,audio-codec = <&wm8731>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-sam9x5-wm8731-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-sam9x5-wm8731-audio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0720857089a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-sam9x5-wm8731-audio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+* Atmel at91sam9x5ek wm8731 audio complex
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: "atmel,sam9x5-wm8731-audio"
+  - atmel,model: The user-visible name of this sound complex.
+  - atmel,ssc-controller: The phandle of the SSC controller
+  - atmel,audio-codec: The phandle of the WM8731 audio codec
+  - atmel,audio-routing: A list of the connections between audio components.
+    Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink,
+    the second being the connection's source.
+
+Available audio endpoints for the audio-routing table:
+
+Board connectors:
+ * Headphone Jack
+ * Line In Jack
+
+wm8731 pins:
+cf Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8731.txt
+
+Example:
+sound {
+	compatible = "atmel,sam9x5-wm8731-audio";
+
+	atmel,model = "wm8731 @ AT91SAM9X5EK";
+
+	atmel,audio-routing =
+		"Headphone Jack", "RHPOUT",
+		"Headphone Jack", "LHPOUT",
+		"LLINEIN", "Line In Jack",
+		"RLINEIN", "Line In Jack";
+
+	atmel,ssc-controller = <&ssc0>;
+	atmel,audio-codec = <&wm8731>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-wm8904.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-wm8904.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8bbe50c884b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-wm8904.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+Atmel ASoC driver with wm8904 audio codec complex
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: "atmel,asoc-wm8904"
+  - atmel,model: The user-visible name of this sound complex.
+  - atmel,audio-routing: A list of the connections between audio components.
+    Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink,
+    the second being the connection's source. Valid names for sources and
+    sinks are the WM8904's pins, and the jacks on the board:
+
+    WM8904 pins:
+
+    * IN1L
+    * IN1R
+    * IN2L
+    * IN2R
+    * IN3L
+    * IN3R
+    * HPOUTL
+    * HPOUTR
+    * LINEOUTL
+    * LINEOUTR
+    * MICBIAS
+
+    Board connectors:
+
+    * Headphone Jack
+    * Line In Jack
+    * Mic
+
+  - atmel,ssc-controller: The phandle of the SSC controller
+  - atmel,audio-codec: The phandle of the WM8904 audio codec
+
+Optional properties:
+  - pinctrl-names, pinctrl-0: Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt
+
+Example:
+sound {
+	compatible = "atmel,asoc-wm8904";
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_pck0_as_mck>;
+
+	atmel,model = "wm8904 @ AT91SAM9N12EK";
+
+	atmel,audio-routing =
+		"Headphone Jack", "HPOUTL",
+		"Headphone Jack", "HPOUTR",
+		"IN2L", "Line In Jack",
+		"IN2R", "Line In Jack",
+		"Mic", "MICBIAS",
+		"IN1L", "Mic";
+
+	atmel,ssc-controller = <&ssc0>;
+	atmel,audio-codec = <&wm8904>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4270.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4270.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6b222f9b8ef5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4270.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+CS4270 audio CODEC
+
+The driver for this device currently only supports I2C.
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : "cirrus,cs4270"
+
+  - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - reset-gpio : a GPIO spec for the reset pin. If specified, it will be
+		 deasserted before communication to the codec starts.
+
+Example:
+
+codec: cs4270@48 {
+	compatible = "cirrus,cs4270";
+	reg = <0x48>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4271.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4271.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e2cd1d7539e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs4271.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+Cirrus Logic CS4271 DT bindings
+
+This driver supports both the I2C and the SPI bus.
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - compatible: "cirrus,cs4271"
+
+For required properties on SPI, please consult
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+
+Required properties on I2C:
+
+ - reg: the i2c address
+
+
+Optional properties:
+
+ - reset-gpio: 	a GPIO spec to define which pin is connected to the chip's
+		!RESET pin
+ - cirrus,amuteb-eq-bmutec:	When given, the Codec's AMUTEB=BMUTEC flag
+				is enabled.
+ - cirrus,enable-soft-reset:
+	The CS4271 requires its LRCLK and MCLK to be stable before its RESET
+	line is de-asserted. That also means that clocks cannot be changed
+	without putting the chip back into hardware reset, which also requires
+	a complete re-initialization of all registers.
+
+	One (undocumented) workaround is to assert and de-assert the PDN bit
+	in the MODE2 register. This workaround can be enabled with this DT
+	property.
+
+	Note that this is not needed in case the clocks are stable
+	throughout the entire runtime of the codec.
+
+Examples:
+
+	codec_i2c: cs4271@10 {
+		compatible = "cirrus,cs4271";
+		reg = <0x10>;
+		reset-gpio = <&gpio 23 0>;
+	};
+
+	codec_spi: cs4271@0 {
+		compatible = "cirrus,cs4271";
+		reg = <0x0>;
+		reset-gpio = <&gpio 23 0>;
+		spi-max-frequency = <6000000>;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..374e145c2ef1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+Texas Instruments McASP controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible :
+	"ti,dm646x-mcasp-audio"	: for DM646x platforms
+	"ti,da830-mcasp-audio"	: for both DA830 & DA850 platforms
+	"ti,omap2-mcasp-audio"	: for OMAP2 platforms (TI81xx, AM33xx)
+
+- reg : Should contain McASP registers offset and length
+- interrupts : Interrupt number for McASP
+- op-mode : I2S/DIT ops mode.
+- tdm-slots : Slots for TDM operation.
+- num-serializer : Serializers used by McASP.
+- serial-dir : A list of serializer pin mode. The list number should be equal
+		to "num-serializer" parameter. Each entry is a number indication
+		serializer pin direction. (0 - INACTIVE, 1 - TX, 2 - RX)
+
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- ti,hwmods : Must be "mcasp<n>", n is controller instance starting 0
+- tx-num-evt : FIFO levels.
+- rx-num-evt : FIFO levels.
+- sram-size-playback : size of sram to be allocated during playback
+- sram-size-capture  : size of sram to be allocated during capture
+
+Example:
+
+mcasp0: mcasp0@1d00000 {
+	compatible = "ti,da830-mcasp-audio";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	reg = <0x100000 0x3000>;
+	interrupts = <82 83>;
+	op-mode = <0>;		/* MCASP_IIS_MODE */
+	tdm-slots = <2>;
+	num-serializer = <16>;
+	serial-dir = <
+			0 0 0 0	/* 0: INACTIVE, 1: TX, 2: RX */
+			0 0 0 0
+			0 0 0 1
+			2 0 0 0 >;
+	tx-num-evt = <1>;
+	rx-num-evt = <1>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,spdif.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,spdif.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f2ae335670f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,spdif.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+Freescale Sony/Philips Digital Interface Format (S/PDIF) Controller
+
+The Freescale S/PDIF audio block is a stereo transceiver that allows the
+processor to receive and transmit digital audio via an coaxial cable or
+a fibre cable.
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : Compatible list, must contain "fsl,imx35-spdif".
+
+  - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device.
+
+  - interrupts : Contains the spdif interrupt.
+
+  - dmas : Generic dma devicetree binding as described in
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt.
+
+  - dma-names : Two dmas have to be defined, "tx" and "rx".
+
+  - clocks : Contains an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+
+  - clock-names : Includes the following entries:
+	"core"		The core clock of spdif controller
+	"rxtx<0-7>"	Clock source list for tx and rx clock.
+			This clock list should be identical to
+			the source list connecting to the spdif
+			clock mux in "SPDIF Transceiver Clock
+			Diagram" of SoC reference manual. It
+			can also be referred to TxClk_Source
+			bit of register SPDIF_STC.
+
+Example:
+
+spdif: spdif@02004000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx35-spdif";
+	reg = <0x02004000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <0 52 0x04>;
+	dmas = <&sdma 14 18 0>,
+	       <&sdma 15 18 0>;
+	dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+
+	clocks = <&clks 197>, <&clks 3>,
+	       <&clks 197>, <&clks 107>,
+	       <&clks 0>, <&clks 118>,
+	       <&clks 62>, <&clks 139>,
+	       <&clks 0>;
+	clock-names = "core", "rxtx0",
+		"rxtx1", "rxtx2",
+		"rxtx3", "rxtx4",
+		"rxtx5", "rxtx6",
+		"rxtx7";
+
+	status = "okay";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,ssi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,ssi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4303b6ab6208
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,ssi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+Freescale Synchronous Serial Interface
+
+The SSI is a serial device that communicates with audio codecs.  It can
+be programmed in AC97, I2S, left-justified, or right-justified modes.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible:       Compatible list, contains "fsl,ssi".
+- cell-index:       The SSI, <0> = SSI1, <1> = SSI2, and so on.
+- reg:              Offset and length of the register set for the device.
+- interrupts:       <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b is a
+                    field that represents an encoding of the sense and
+                    level information for the interrupt.  This should be
+                    encoded based on the information in section 2)
+                    depending on the type of interrupt controller you
+                    have.
+- interrupt-parent: The phandle for the interrupt controller that
+                    services interrupts for this device.
+- fsl,mode:         The operating mode for the SSI interface.
+                    "i2s-slave" - I2S mode, SSI is clock slave
+                    "i2s-master" - I2S mode, SSI is clock master
+                    "lj-slave" - left-justified mode, SSI is clock slave
+                    "lj-master" - l.j. mode, SSI is clock master
+                    "rj-slave" - right-justified mode, SSI is clock slave
+                    "rj-master" - r.j., SSI is clock master
+                    "ac97-slave" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock slave
+                    "ac97-master" - AC97 mode, SSI is clock master
+- fsl,playback-dma: Phandle to a node for the DMA channel to use for
+                    playback of audio.  This is typically dictated by SOC
+                    design.  See the notes below.
+- fsl,capture-dma:  Phandle to a node for the DMA channel to use for
+                    capture (recording) of audio.  This is typically dictated
+                    by SOC design.  See the notes below.
+- fsl,fifo-depth:   The number of elements in the transmit and receive FIFOs.
+                    This number is the maximum allowed value for SFCSR[TFWM0].
+- fsl,ssi-asynchronous:
+                    If specified, the SSI is to be programmed in asynchronous
+                    mode.  In this mode, pins SRCK, STCK, SRFS, and STFS must
+                    all be connected to valid signals.  In synchronous mode,
+                    SRCK and SRFS are ignored.  Asynchronous mode allows
+                    playback and capture to use different sample sizes and
+                    sample rates.  Some drivers may require that SRCK and STCK
+                    be connected together, and SRFS and STFS be connected
+                    together.  This would still allow different sample sizes,
+                    but not different sample rates.
+
+Required are also ac97 link bindings if ac97 is used. See
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc-ac97link.txt for the necessary
+bindings.
+
+Optional properties:
+- codec-handle:     Phandle to a 'codec' node that defines an audio
+                    codec connected to this SSI.  This node is typically
+                    a child of an I2C or other control node.
+- fsl,fiq-stream-filter: Bool property. Disabled DMA and use FIQ instead to
+		    filter the codec stream. This is necessary for some boards
+		    where an incompatible codec is connected to this SSI, e.g.
+		    on pca100 and pcm043.
+- dmas:		    Generic dma devicetree binding as described in
+		    Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt.
+- dma-names:	    Two dmas have to be defined, "tx" and "rx", if fsl,imx-fiq
+		    is not defined.
+
+Child 'codec' node required properties:
+- compatible:       Compatible list, contains the name of the codec
+
+Child 'codec' node optional properties:
+- clock-frequency:  The frequency of the input clock, which typically comes
+                    from an on-board dedicated oscillator.
+
+Notes on fsl,playback-dma and fsl,capture-dma:
+
+On SOCs that have an SSI, specific DMA channels are hard-wired for playback
+and capture.  On the MPC8610, for example, SSI1 must use DMA channel 0 for
+playback and DMA channel 1 for capture.  SSI2 must use DMA channel 2 for
+playback and DMA channel 3 for capture.  The developer can choose which
+DMA controller to use, but the channels themselves are hard-wired.  The
+purpose of these two properties is to represent this hardware design.
+
+The device tree nodes for the DMA channels that are referenced by
+"fsl,playback-dma" and "fsl,capture-dma" must be marked as compatible with
+"fsl,ssi-dma-channel".  The SOC-specific compatible string (e.g.
+"fsl,mpc8610-dma-channel") can remain.  If these nodes are left as
+"fsl,elo-dma-channel" or "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel", then the generic Elo DMA
+drivers (fsldma) will attempt to use them, and it will conflict with the
+sound drivers.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-sgtl5000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-sgtl5000.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e4acdd891e49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-sgtl5000.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+Freescale i.MX audio complex with SGTL5000 codec
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "fsl,imx-audio-sgtl5000"
+- model : The user-visible name of this sound complex
+- ssi-controller : The phandle of the i.MX SSI controller
+- audio-codec : The phandle of the SGTL5000 audio codec
+- audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components.
+  Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink,
+  the second being the connection's source. Valid names could be power
+  supplies, SGTL5000 pins, and the jacks on the board:
+
+  Power supplies:
+   * Mic Bias
+
+  SGTL5000 pins:
+   * MIC_IN
+   * LINE_IN
+   * HP_OUT
+   * LINE_OUT
+
+  Board connectors:
+   * Mic Jack
+   * Line In Jack
+   * Headphone Jack
+   * Line Out Jack
+   * Ext Spk
+
+- mux-int-port : The internal port of the i.MX audio muxer (AUDMUX)
+- mux-ext-port : The external port of the i.MX audio muxer
+
+Note: The AUDMUX port numbering should start at 1, which is consistent with
+hardware manual.
+
+Example:
+
+sound {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx51-babbage-sgtl5000",
+		     "fsl,imx-audio-sgtl5000";
+	model = "imx51-babbage-sgtl5000";
+	ssi-controller = <&ssi1>;
+	audio-codec = <&sgtl5000>;
+	audio-routing =
+		"MIC_IN", "Mic Jack",
+		"Mic Jack", "Mic Bias",
+		"Headphone Jack", "HP_OUT";
+	mux-int-port = <1>;
+	mux-ext-port = <3>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-spdif.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-spdif.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7d13479f9c3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-spdif.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+Freescale i.MX audio complex with S/PDIF transceiver
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : "fsl,imx-audio-spdif"
+
+  - model : The user-visible name of this sound complex
+
+  - spdif-controller : The phandle of the i.MX S/PDIF controller
+
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - spdif-out : This is a boolean property. If present, the transmitting
+    function of S/PDIF will be enabled, indicating there's a physical
+    S/PDIF out connector/jack on the board or it's connecting to some
+    other IP block, such as an HDMI encoder/display-controller.
+
+  - spdif-in : This is a boolean property. If present, the receiving
+    function of S/PDIF will be enabled, indicating there's a physical
+    S/PDIF in connector/jack on the board.
+
+* Note: At least one of these two properties should be set in the DT binding.
+
+
+Example:
+
+sound-spdif {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx-audio-spdif";
+	model = "imx-spdif";
+	spdif-controller = <&spdif>;
+	spdif-out;
+	spdif-in;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-wm8962.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-wm8962.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f49450a87890
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-wm8962.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+Freescale i.MX audio complex with WM8962 codec
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "fsl,imx-audio-wm8962"
+- model : The user-visible name of this sound complex
+- ssi-controller : The phandle of the i.MX SSI controller
+- audio-codec : The phandle of the WM8962 audio codec
+- audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components.
+  Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink,
+  the second being the connection's source. Valid names could be power
+  supplies, WM8962 pins, and the jacks on the board:
+
+  Power supplies:
+   * Mic Bias
+
+  Board connectors:
+   * Mic Jack
+   * Headphone Jack
+   * Ext Spk
+
+- mux-int-port : The internal port of the i.MX audio muxer (AUDMUX)
+- mux-ext-port : The external port of the i.MX audio muxer
+
+Note: The AUDMUX port numbering should start at 1, which is consistent with
+hardware manual.
+
+Example:
+
+sound {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx6q-sabresd-wm8962",
+		     "fsl,imx-audio-wm8962";
+	model = "wm8962-audio";
+	ssi-controller = <&ssi2>;
+	audio-codec = <&codec>;
+		audio-routing =
+		"Headphone Jack", "HPOUTL",
+		"Headphone Jack", "HPOUTR",
+		"Ext Spk", "SPKOUTL",
+		"Ext Spk", "SPKOUTR",
+		"MICBIAS", "AMIC",
+		"IN3R", "MICBIAS",
+		"DMIC", "MICBIAS",
+		"DMICDAT", "DMIC";
+	mux-int-port = <2>;
+	mux-ext-port = <3>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audmux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audmux.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f88a00e54c63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audmux.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+Freescale Digital Audio Mux (AUDMUX) device
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "fsl,imx21-audmux" for AUDMUX version firstly used on i.MX21,
+  or "fsl,imx31-audmux" for the version firstly used on i.MX31.
+- reg : Should contain AUDMUX registers location and length
+
+An initial configuration can be setup using child nodes.
+
+Required properties of optional child nodes:
+- fsl,audmux-port : Integer of the audmux port that is configured by this
+  child node.
+- fsl,port-config : List of configuration options for the specific port. For
+  imx31-audmux and above, it is a list of tuples <ptcr pdcr>. For
+  imx21-audmux it is a list of pcr values.
+
+Example:
+
+audmux@021d8000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx6q-audmux", "fsl,imx31-audmux";
+	reg = <0x021d8000 0x4000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mrvl,pxa-ssp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mrvl,pxa-ssp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..74c9ba6c2823
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mrvl,pxa-ssp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+Marvell PXA SSP CPU DAI bindings
+
+Required properties:
+
+	compatible	Must be "mrvl,pxa-ssp-dai"
+	port		A phandle reference to a PXA ssp upstream device
+
+Example:
+
+	/* upstream device */
+
+	ssp0: ssp@41000000 {
+		compatible = "mrvl,pxa3xx-ssp";
+		reg = <0x41000000 0x40>;
+		interrupts = <24>;
+		clock-names = "pxa27x-ssp.0";
+		dmas = <&dma 13
+			&dma 14>;
+		dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+	};
+
+	/* DAI as user */
+
+	ssp_dai0: ssp_dai@0 {
+		compatible = "mrvl,pxa-ssp-dai";
+		port = <&ssp0>;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mrvl,pxa2xx-pcm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mrvl,pxa2xx-pcm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..551fbb8348c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mrvl,pxa2xx-pcm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+DT bindings for ARM PXA2xx PCM platform driver
+
+This is just a dummy driver that registers the PXA ASoC platform driver.
+It does not have any resources assigned.
+
+Required properties:
+
+	- compatible		'mrvl,pxa-pcm-audio'
+
+Example:
+
+	pxa_pcm_audio: snd_soc_pxa_audio {
+		compatible = "mrvl,pxa-pcm-audio";
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mvebu-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mvebu-audio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f0062c5871b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mvebu-audio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+* mvebu (Kirkwood, Dove, Armada 370) audio controller
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible:
+  "marvell,kirkwood-audio" for Kirkwood platforms
+  "marvell,dove-audio" for Dove platforms
+
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+- interrupts:
+  with "marvell,kirkwood-audio", the audio interrupt
+  with "marvell,dove-audio", a list of two interrupts, the first for
+  the data flow, and the second for errors.
+
+- clocks: one or two phandles.
+  The first one is mandatory and defines the internal clock.
+  The second one is optional and defines an external clock.
+
+- clock-names: names associated to the clocks:
+	"internal" for the internal clock
+	"extclk" for the external clock
+
+Example:
+
+i2s1: audio-controller@b4000 {
+	compatible = "marvell,dove-audio";
+	reg = <0xb4000 0x2210>;
+	interrupts = <21>, <22>;
+	clocks = <&gate_clk 13>;
+	clock-names = "internal";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mxs-audio-sgtl5000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mxs-audio-sgtl5000.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..601c518eddaa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mxs-audio-sgtl5000.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+* Freescale MXS audio complex with SGTL5000 codec
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "fsl,mxs-audio-sgtl5000"
+- model: The user-visible name of this sound complex
+- saif-controllers: The phandle list of the MXS SAIF controller
+- audio-codec: The phandle of the SGTL5000 audio codec
+
+Example:
+
+sound {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-evk-sgtl5000",
+		     "fsl,mxs-audio-sgtl5000";
+	model = "imx28-evk-sgtl5000";
+	saif-controllers = <&saif0 &saif1>;
+	audio-codec = <&sgtl5000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mxs-saif.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mxs-saif.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7ba07a118e37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mxs-saif.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+* Freescale MXS Serial Audio Interface (SAIF)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,<chip>-saif"
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length
+- interrupts: Should contain ERROR interrupt number
+- dmas: DMA specifier, consisting of a phandle to DMA controller node
+  and SAIF DMA channel ID.
+  Refer to dma.txt and fsl-mxs-dma.txt for details.
+- dma-names: Must be "rx-tx".
+
+Optional properties:
+- fsl,saif-master: phandle to the master SAIF.  It's only required for
+  the slave SAIF.
+
+Note: Each SAIF controller should have an alias correctly numbered
+in "aliases" node.
+
+Example:
+
+aliases {
+	saif0 = &saif0;
+	saif1 = &saif1;
+};
+
+saif0: saif@80042000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-saif";
+	reg = <0x80042000 2000>;
+	interrupts = <59>;
+	dmas = <&dma_apbx 4>;
+	dma-names = "rx-tx";
+};
+
+saif1: saif@80046000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-saif";
+	reg = <0x80046000 2000>;
+	interrupts = <58>;
+	dmas = <&dma_apbx 5>;
+	dma-names = "rx-tx";
+	fsl,saif-master = <&saif0>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-alc5632.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-alc5632.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8b8903ef0800
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-alc5632.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra audio complex
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra-audio-alc5632"
+- clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+- clock-names : Must include the following entries:
+  "pll_a" (The Tegra clock of that name),
+  "pll_a_out0" (The Tegra clock of that name),
+  "mclk" (The Tegra cdev1/extern1 clock, which feeds the CODEC's mclk)
+- nvidia,model : The user-visible name of this sound complex.
+- nvidia,audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components.
+  Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink,
+  the second being the connection's source. Valid names for sources and
+  sinks are the ALC5632's pins as documented in the binding for the device
+  and:
+
+  * Headset Stereophone
+  * Int Spk
+  * Headset Mic
+  * Digital Mic
+
+- nvidia,i2s-controller : The phandle of the Tegra I2S controller
+- nvidia,audio-codec : The phandle of the ALC5632 audio codec
+
+Example:
+
+sound {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra-audio-alc5632-paz00",
+				 "nvidia,tegra-audio-alc5632";
+
+	nvidia,model = "Compal PAZ00";
+
+	nvidia,audio-routing =
+				"Int Spk", "SPK_OUTP",
+				"Int Spk", "SPK_OUTN",
+				"Headset Mic","MICBIAS1",
+				"MIC1_N", "Headset Mic",
+				"MIC1_P", "Headset Mic",
+				"Headset Stereophone", "HP_OUT_R",
+				"Headset Stereophone", "HP_OUT_L";
+
+	nvidia,i2s-controller = <&tegra_i2s1>;
+	nvidia,audio-codec = <&alc5632>;
+
+	clocks = <&tegra_car 112>, <&tegra_car 113>, <&tegra_car 93>;
+	clock-names = "pll_a", "pll_a_out0", "mclk";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-rt5640.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-rt5640.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dc6224994d69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-rt5640.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra audio complex, with RT5640 CODEC
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra-audio-rt5640"
+- clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+- clock-names : Must include the following entries:
+  "pll_a" (The Tegra clock of that name),
+  "pll_a_out0" (The Tegra clock of that name),
+  "mclk" (The Tegra cdev1/extern1 clock, which feeds the CODEC's mclk)
+- nvidia,model : The user-visible name of this sound complex.
+- nvidia,audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components.
+  Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink,
+  the second being the connection's source. Valid names for sources and
+  sinks are the RT5640's pins (as documented in its binding), and the jacks
+  on the board:
+
+  * Headphones
+  * Speakers
+  * Mic Jack
+
+- nvidia,i2s-controller : The phandle of the Tegra I2S controller that's
+  connected to the CODEC.
+- nvidia,audio-codec : The phandle of the RT5640 audio codec. This binding
+  assumes that AIF1 on the CODEC is connected to Tegra.
+
+Optional properties:
+- nvidia,hp-det-gpios : The GPIO that detects headphones are plugged in
+
+Example:
+
+sound {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra-audio-rt5640-dalmore",
+			"nvidia,tegra-audio-rt5640";
+	nvidia,model = "NVIDIA Tegra Dalmore";
+
+	nvidia,audio-routing =
+		"Headphones", "HPOR",
+		"Headphones", "HPOL",
+		"Speakers", "SPORP",
+		"Speakers", "SPORN",
+		"Speakers", "SPOLP",
+		"Speakers", "SPOLN";
+
+	nvidia,i2s-controller = <&tegra_i2s1>;
+	nvidia,audio-codec = <&rt5640>;
+
+	nvidia,hp-det-gpios = <&gpio 143 0>; /* GPIO PR7 */
+
+	clocks = <&tegra_car 216>, <&tegra_car 217>, <&tegra_car 120>;
+	clock-names = "pll_a", "pll_a_out0", "mclk";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-trimslice.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-trimslice.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ef1fe7358279
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-trimslice.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra audio complex for TrimSlice
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra-audio-trimslice"
+- clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+- clock-names : Must include the following entries:
+  "pll_a" (The Tegra clock of that name),
+  "pll_a_out0" (The Tegra clock of that name),
+  "mclk" (The Tegra cdev1/extern1 clock, which feeds the CODEC's mclk)
+- nvidia,i2s-controller : The phandle of the Tegra I2S1 controller
+- nvidia,audio-codec : The phandle of the WM8903 audio codec
+
+Example:
+
+sound {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra-audio-trimslice";
+	nvidia,i2s-controller = <&tegra_i2s1>;
+	nvidia,audio-codec = <&codec>;
+	clocks = <&tegra_car 112>, <&tegra_car 113>, <&tegra_car 93>;
+	clock-names = "pll_a", "pll_a_out0", "mclk";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8753.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8753.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..aab6ce0ad2fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8753.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra audio complex
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8753"
+- clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+- clock-names : Must include the following entries:
+  "pll_a" (The Tegra clock of that name),
+  "pll_a_out0" (The Tegra clock of that name),
+  "mclk" (The Tegra cdev1/extern1 clock, which feeds the CODEC's mclk)
+- nvidia,model : The user-visible name of this sound complex.
+- nvidia,audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components.
+  Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink,
+  the second being the connection's source. Valid names for sources and
+  sinks are the WM8753's pins as documented in the binding for the WM8753,
+  and the jacks on the board:
+
+  * Headphone Jack
+  * Mic Jack
+
+- nvidia,i2s-controller : The phandle of the Tegra I2S1 controller
+- nvidia,audio-codec : The phandle of the WM8753 audio codec
+Example:
+
+sound {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8753-whistler",
+		     "nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8753"
+	nvidia,model = "tegra-wm8753-harmony";
+
+	nvidia,audio-routing =
+		"Headphone Jack", "LOUT1",
+		"Headphone Jack", "ROUT1";
+
+	nvidia,i2s-controller = <&i2s1>;
+	nvidia,audio-codec = <&wm8753>;
+
+	clocks = <&tegra_car 112>, <&tegra_car 113>, <&tegra_car 93>;
+	clock-names = "pll_a", "pll_a_out0", "mclk";
+};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8903.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8903.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4b44dfb6ca0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8903.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra audio complex
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8903"
+- clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+- clock-names : Must include the following entries:
+  "pll_a" (The Tegra clock of that name),
+  "pll_a_out0" (The Tegra clock of that name),
+  "mclk" (The Tegra cdev1/extern1 clock, which feeds the CODEC's mclk)
+- nvidia,model : The user-visible name of this sound complex.
+- nvidia,audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components.
+  Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink,
+  the second being the connection's source. Valid names for sources and
+  sinks are the WM8903's pins (documented in the WM8903 binding document),
+  and the jacks on the board:
+
+  * Headphone Jack
+  * Int Spk
+  * Mic Jack
+
+- nvidia,i2s-controller : The phandle of the Tegra I2S1 controller
+- nvidia,audio-codec : The phandle of the WM8903 audio codec
+
+Optional properties:
+- nvidia,spkr-en-gpios : The GPIO that enables the speakers
+- nvidia,hp-mute-gpios : The GPIO that mutes the headphones
+- nvidia,hp-det-gpios : The GPIO that detect headphones are plugged in
+- nvidia,int-mic-en-gpios : The GPIO that enables the internal microphone
+- nvidia,ext-mic-en-gpios : The GPIO that enables the external microphone
+
+Example:
+
+sound {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8903-harmony",
+		     "nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8903"
+	nvidia,model = "tegra-wm8903-harmony";
+
+	nvidia,audio-routing =
+		"Headphone Jack", "HPOUTR",
+		"Headphone Jack", "HPOUTL",
+		"Int Spk", "ROP",
+		"Int Spk", "RON",
+		"Int Spk", "LOP",
+		"Int Spk", "LON",
+		"Mic Jack", "MICBIAS",
+		"IN1L", "Mic Jack";
+
+	nvidia,i2s-controller = <&i2s1>;
+	nvidia,audio-codec = <&wm8903>;
+
+	nvidia,spkr-en-gpios = <&codec 2 0>;
+	nvidia,hp-det-gpios = <&gpio 178 0>; /* gpio PW2 */
+	nvidia,int-mic-en-gpios = <&gpio 184 0>; /*gpio PX0 */
+	nvidia,ext-mic-en-gpios = <&gpio 185 0>; /* gpio PX1 */
+
+	clocks = <&tegra_car 112>, <&tegra_car 113>, <&tegra_car 93>;
+	clock-names = "pll_a", "pll_a_out0", "mclk";
+};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-wm9712.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-wm9712.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ad589b163639
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-wm9712.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra audio complex
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra-audio-wm9712"
+- clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+- clock-names : Must include the following entries:
+  "pll_a" (The Tegra clock of that name),
+  "pll_a_out0" (The Tegra clock of that name),
+  "mclk" (The Tegra cdev1/extern1 clock, which feeds the CODEC's mclk)
+- nvidia,model : The user-visible name of this sound complex.
+- nvidia,audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components.
+  Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink,
+  the second being the connection's source. Valid names for sources and
+  sinks are the WM9712's pins, and the jacks on the board:
+
+  WM9712 pins:
+
+  * MONOOUT
+  * HPOUTL
+  * HPOUTR
+  * LOUT2
+  * ROUT2
+  * OUT3
+  * LINEINL
+  * LINEINR
+  * PHONE
+  * PCBEEP
+  * MIC1
+  * MIC2
+  * Mic Bias
+
+  Board connectors:
+
+  * Headphone
+  * LineIn
+  * Mic
+
+- nvidia,ac97-controller : The phandle of the Tegra AC97 controller
+
+
+Example:
+
+sound {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra-audio-wm9712-colibri_t20",
+		         "nvidia,tegra-audio-wm9712";
+	nvidia,model = "Toradex Colibri T20";
+
+	nvidia,audio-routing =
+		"Headphone", "HPOUTL",
+		"Headphone", "HPOUTR",
+		"LineIn", "LINEINL",
+		"LineIn", "LINEINR",
+		"Mic", "MIC1";
+
+	nvidia,ac97-controller = <&ac97>;
+
+	clocks = <&tegra_car 112>, <&tegra_car 113>, <&tegra_car 93>;
+	clock-names = "pll_a", "pll_a_out0", "mclk";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra20-ac97.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra20-ac97.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c1454979c1ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra20-ac97.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra 20 AC97 controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra20-ac97"
+- reg : Should contain AC97 controller registers location and length
+- interrupts : Should contain AC97 interrupt
+- nvidia,dma-request-selector : The Tegra DMA controller's phandle and
+  request selector for the AC97 controller
+- nvidia,codec-reset-gpio : The Tegra GPIO controller's phandle and the number
+  of the GPIO used to reset the external AC97 codec
+- nvidia,codec-sync-gpio : The Tegra GPIO controller's phandle and the number
+  of the GPIO corresponding with the AC97 DAP _FS line
+Example:
+
+ac97@70002000 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-ac97";
+	reg = <0x70002000 0x200>;
+	interrupts = <0 81 0x04>;
+	nvidia,dma-request-selector = <&apbdma 12>;
+	nvidia,codec-reset-gpio = <&gpio 170 0>;
+	nvidia,codec-sync-gpio = <&gpio 120 0>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tegra20-das.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra20-das.txt
index 6de3a7ee4efb..6de3a7ee4efb 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tegra20-das.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra20-das.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tegra20-i2s.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra20-i2s.txt
index 0df2b5c816e3..0df2b5c816e3 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tegra20-i2s.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra20-i2s.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-ahub.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-ahub.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0e5c12c66523
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-ahub.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra30 AHUB (Audio Hub)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra30-ahub", "nvidia,tegra114-ahub", etc.
+- reg : Should contain the register physical address and length for each of
+  the AHUB's register blocks.
+  - Tegra30 requires 2 entries, for the APBIF and AHUB/AUDIO register blocks.
+  - Tegra114 requires an additional entry, for the APBIF2 register block.
+- interrupts : Should contain AHUB interrupt
+- nvidia,dma-request-selector : A list of the DMA channel specifiers. Each
+  entry contains the Tegra DMA controller's phandle and request selector.
+  If a single entry is present, the request selectors for the channels are
+  assumed to be contiguous, and increment from this value.
+  If multiple values are given, one value must be given per channel.
+- clocks : Must contain an entry for each required entry in clock-names.
+- clock-names : Must include the following entries:
+  - Tegra30: Requires d_audio, apbif, i2s0, i2s1, i2s2, i2s3, i2s4, dam0,
+    dam1, dam2, spdif_in.
+  - Tegra114: Additionally requires amx, adx.
+- ranges : The bus address mapping for the configlink register bus.
+  Can be empty since the mapping is 1:1.
+- #address-cells : For the configlink bus. Should be <1>;
+- #size-cells : For the configlink bus. Should be <1>.
+
+AHUB client modules need to specify the IDs of their CIFs (Client InterFaces).
+For RX CIFs, the numbers indicate the register number within AHUB routing
+register space (APBIF 0..3 RX, I2S 0..5 RX, DAM 0..2 RX 0..1, SPDIF RX 0..1).
+For TX CIFs, the numbers indicate the bit position within the AHUB routing
+registers (APBIF 0..3 TX, I2S 0..5 TX, DAM 0..2 TX, SPDIF TX 0..1).
+
+Example:
+
+ahub@70080000 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra30-ahub";
+	reg = <0x70080000 0x200 0x70080200 0x100>;
+	interrupts = < 0 103 0x04 >;
+	nvidia,dma-request-selector = <&apbdma 1>;
+	clocks = <&tegra_car 106>, <&tegra_car 107>, <&tegra_car 30>,
+		<&tegra_car 11>, <&tegra_car 18>, <&tegra_car 101>,
+		<&tegra_car 102>, <&tegra_car 108>, <&tegra_car 109>,
+		<&tegra_car 110>, <&tegra_car 162>;
+	clock-names = "d_audio", "apbif", "i2s0", "i2s1", "i2s2",
+		"i2s3", "i2s4", "dam0", "dam1", "dam2",
+		"spdif_in";
+	ranges;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-i2s.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-i2s.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dfa6c037124a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra30-i2s.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra30 I2S controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "nvidia,tegra30-i2s"
+- reg : Should contain I2S registers location and length
+- nvidia,ahub-cif-ids : The list of AHUB CIF IDs for this port, rx (playback)
+  first, tx (capture) second. See nvidia,tegra30-ahub.txt for values.
+
+Example:
+
+i2s@70002800 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra30-i2s";
+	reg = <0x70080300 0x100>;
+	nvidia,ahub-cif-ids = <4 4>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-abe-twl6040.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-abe-twl6040.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fd40c852d7c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-abe-twl6040.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+* Texas Instruments OMAP4+ and twl6040 based audio setups
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,abe-twl6040"
+- ti,model: Name of the sound card ( for example "SDP4430")
+- ti,mclk-freq: MCLK frequency for HPPLL operation
+- ti,mcpdm: phandle for the McPDM node
+- ti,twl6040: phandle for the twl6040 core node
+- ti,audio-routing: List of connections between audio components.
+  Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink,
+  the second being the connection's source.
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,dmic: phandle for the OMAP dmic node if the machine have it connected
+- ti,jack_detection: Need to be present if the board capable to detect jack
+  insertion, removal.
+
+Available audio endpoints for the audio-routing table:
+
+Board connectors:
+ * Headset Stereophone
+ * Earphone Spk
+ * Ext Spk
+ * Line Out
+ * Vibrator
+ * Headset Mic
+ * Main Handset Mic
+ * Sub Handset Mic
+ * Line In
+ * Digital Mic
+
+twl6040 pins:
+ * HSOL
+ * HSOR
+ * EP
+ * HFL
+ * HFR
+ * AUXL
+ * AUXR
+ * VIBRAL
+ * VIBRAR
+ * HSMIC
+ * MAINMIC
+ * SUBMIC
+ * AFML
+ * AFMR
+
+ * Headset Mic Bias
+ * Main Mic Bias
+ * Digital Mic1 Bias
+ * Digital Mic2 Bias
+
+Digital mic pins:
+ * DMic
+
+Example:
+
+sound {
+	compatible = "ti,abe-twl6040";
+	ti,model = "SDP4430";
+
+	ti,jack-detection;
+	ti,mclk-freq = <38400000>;
+
+	ti,mcpdm = <&mcpdm>;
+	ti,dmic = <&dmic>;
+
+	ti,twl6040 = <&twl6040>;
+
+	/* Audio routing */
+	ti,audio-routing =
+		"Headset Stereophone", "HSOL",
+		"Headset Stereophone", "HSOR",
+		"Earphone Spk", "EP",
+		"Ext Spk", "HFL",
+		"Ext Spk", "HFR",
+		"Line Out", "AUXL",
+		"Line Out", "AUXR",
+		"Vibrator", "VIBRAL",
+		"Vibrator", "VIBRAR",
+		"HSMIC", "Headset Mic",
+		"Headset Mic", "Headset Mic Bias",
+		"MAINMIC", "Main Handset Mic",
+		"Main Handset Mic", "Main Mic Bias",
+		"SUBMIC", "Sub Handset Mic",
+		"Sub Handset Mic", "Main Mic Bias",
+		"AFML", "Line In",
+		"AFMR", "Line In",
+		"DMic", "Digital Mic",
+		"Digital Mic", "Digital Mic1 Bias";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-dmic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-dmic.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fd8105f18978
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-dmic.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+* Texas Instruments OMAP4+ Digital Microphone Module
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,omap4-dmic"
+- reg: Register location and size as an array:
+       <MPU access base address, size>,
+       <L3 interconnect address, size>;
+- interrupts: Interrupt number for DMIC
+- interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller
+- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated with OMAP dmic IP
+
+Example:
+
+dmic: dmic@4012e000 {
+	compatible = "ti,omap4-dmic";
+	reg = <0x4012e000 0x7f>, /* MPU private access */
+	      <0x4902e000 0x7f>; /* L3 Interconnect */
+	interrupts = <0 114 0x4>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+	ti,hwmods = "dmic";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcbsp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcbsp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..17cce4490456
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcbsp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+* Texas Instruments OMAP2+ McBSP module
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,omap2420-mcbsp" for McBSP on OMAP2420
+	      "ti,omap2430-mcbsp" for McBSP on OMAP2430
+	      "ti,omap3-mcbsp" for McBSP on OMAP3
+	      "ti,omap4-mcbsp" for McBSP on OMAP4 and newer SoC
+- reg: Register location and size, for OMAP4+ as an array:
+       <MPU access base address, size>,
+       <L3 interconnect address, size>;
+- reg-names: Array of strings associated with the address space
+- interrupts: Interrupt numbers for the McBSP port, as an array in case the
+	      McBSP IP have more interrupt lines:
+	<OCP compliant irq>,
+	<TX irq>,
+	<RX irq>;
+- interrupt-names: Array of strings associated with the interrupt numbers
+- interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller
+- ti,buffer-size: Size of the FIFO on the port (OMAP2430 and newer SoC)
+- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the McBSP port
+
+Example:
+
+mcbsp2: mcbsp@49022000 {
+	compatible = "ti,omap3-mcbsp";
+	reg = <0x49022000 0xff>,
+	      <0x49028000 0xff>;
+	reg-names = "mpu", "sidetone";
+	interrupts = <0 17 0x4>, /* OCP compliant interrupt */
+		     <0 62 0x4>, /* TX interrupt */
+		     <0 63 0x4>, /* RX interrupt */
+		     <0 4 0x4>;  /* Sidetone */
+	interrupt-names = "common", "tx", "rx", "sidetone";
+	interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+	ti,buffer-size = <1280>;
+	ti,hwmods = "mcbsp2";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcpdm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcpdm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0741dff048dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcpdm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+* Texas Instruments OMAP4+ McPDM
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,omap4-mcpdm"
+- reg: Register location and size as an array:
+       <MPU access base address, size>,
+       <L3 interconnect address, size>;
+- interrupts: Interrupt number for McPDM
+- interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller
+- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the McPDM
+
+Example:
+
+mcpdm: mcpdm@40132000 {
+	compatible = "ti,omap4-mcpdm";
+	reg = <0x40132000 0x7f>, /* MPU private access */
+	      <0x49032000 0x7f>; /* L3 Interconnect */
+	interrupts = <0 112 0x4>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&gic>;
+	ti,hwmods = "mcpdm";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-twl4030.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-twl4030.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1ab6bc8404d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-twl4030.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+* Texas Instruments SoC with twl4030 based audio setups
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,omap-twl4030"
+- ti,model: Name of the sound card (for example "omap3beagle")
+- ti,mcbsp: phandle for the McBSP node
+- ti,codec: phandle for the twl4030 audio node
+
+Optional properties:
+- ti,mcbsp-voice: phandle for the McBSP node connected to the voice port of twl
+- ti, jack-det-gpio: Jack detect GPIO
+- ti,audio-routing: List of connections between audio components.
+  Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink,
+  the second being the connection's source.
+  If the routing is not provided all possible connection will be available
+
+Available audio endpoints for the audio-routing table:
+
+Board connectors:
+ * Headset Stereophone
+ * Earpiece Spk
+ * Handsfree Spk
+ * Ext Spk
+ * Main Mic
+ * Sub Mic
+ * Headset Mic
+ * Carkit Mic
+ * Digital0 Mic
+ * Digital1 Mic
+ * Line In
+
+twl4030 pins:
+ * HSOL
+ * HSOR
+ * EARPIECE
+ * HFL
+ * HFR
+ * PREDRIVEL
+ * PREDRIVER
+ * CARKITL
+ * CARKITR
+ * MAINMIC
+ * SUBMIC
+ * HSMIC
+ * DIGIMIC0
+ * DIGIMIC1
+ * CARKITMIC
+ * AUXL
+ * AUXR
+
+ * Headset Mic Bias
+ * Mic Bias 1 /* Used for Main Mic or Digimic0 */
+ * Mic Bias 2 /* Used for Sub Mic or Digimic1 */
+
+Example:
+
+sound {
+	compatible = "ti,omap-twl4030";
+	ti,model = "omap3beagle";
+
+	ti,mcbsp = <&mcbsp2>;
+	ti,codec = <&twl_audio>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/pcm1792a.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/pcm1792a.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..970ba1ed576f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/pcm1792a.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+Texas Instruments pcm1792a DT bindings
+
+This driver supports the SPI bus.
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - compatible: "ti,pcm1792a"
+
+For required properties on SPI, please consult
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+
+Examples:
+
+	codec_spi: 1792a@0 {
+		compatible = "ti,pcm1792a";
+		spi-max-frequency = <600000>;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,fsi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,fsi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c5be003f413e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,fsi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+Renesas FSI
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible			: "renesas,sh_fsi2" or "renesas,sh_fsi"
+- reg				: Should contain the register physical address and length
+- interrupts			: Should contain FSI interrupt
+
+- fsia,spdif-connection		: FSI is connected by S/PDFI
+- fsia,stream-mode-support	: FSI supports 16bit stream mode.
+- fsia,use-internal-clock	: FSI uses internal clock when master mode.
+
+- fsib,spdif-connection		: same as fsia
+- fsib,stream-mode-support	: same as fsia
+- fsib,use-internal-clock	: same as fsia
+
+Example:
+
+sh_fsi2: sh_fsi2@0xec230000 {
+	compatible = "renesas,sh_fsi2";
+	reg = <0xec230000 0x400>;
+	interrupts = <0 146 0x4>;
+
+	fsia,spdif-connection;
+	fsia,stream-mode-support;
+	fsia,use-internal-clock;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5640.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5640.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..068a1141b06f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5640.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+RT5640 audio CODEC
+
+This device supports I2C only.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : "realtek,rt5640".
+
+- reg : The I2C address of the device.
+
+- interrupts : The CODEC's interrupt output.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- realtek,in1-differential
+- realtek,in2-differential
+  Boolean. Indicate MIC1/2 input are differential, rather than single-ended.
+
+- realtek,ldo1-en-gpios : The GPIO that controls the CODEC's LDO1_EN pin.
+
+Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes):
+
+  * DMIC1
+  * DMIC2
+  * MICBIAS1
+  * IN1P
+  * IN1R
+  * IN2P
+  * IN2R
+  * HPOL
+  * HPOR
+  * LOUTL
+  * LOUTR
+  * MONOP
+  * MONON
+  * SPOLP
+  * SPOLN
+  * SPORP
+  * SPORN
+
+Example:
+
+rt5640 {
+	compatible = "realtek,rt5640";
+	reg = <0x1c>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&gpio>;
+	interrupts = <TEGRA_GPIO(W, 3) GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+	realtek,ldo1-en-gpios =
+		<&gpio TEGRA_GPIO(V, 3) GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/samsung,smdk-wm8994.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/samsung,smdk-wm8994.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4686646fb122
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/samsung,smdk-wm8994.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+Samsung SMDK audio complex
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "samsung,smdk-wm8994"
+- samsung,i2s-controller: The phandle of the Samsung I2S0 controller
+- samsung,audio-codec: The phandle of the WM8994 audio codec
+Example:
+
+sound {
+		compatible = "samsung,smdk-wm8994";
+
+		samsung,i2s-controller = <&i2s0>;
+		samsung,audio-codec = <&wm8994>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/samsung-i2s.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/samsung-i2s.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7386d444ada1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/samsung-i2s.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+* Samsung I2S controller
+
+Required SoC Specific Properties:
+
+- compatible : should be one of the following.
+   - samsung,s3c6410-i2s: for 8/16/24bit stereo I2S.
+   - samsung,s5pv210-i2s: for 8/16/24bit multichannel(5.1) I2S with
+     secondary fifo, s/w reset control and internal mux for root clk src.
+   - samsung,exynos5420-i2s: for 8/16/24bit multichannel(7.1) I2S with
+     secondary fifo, s/w reset control, internal mux for root clk src and
+     TDM support. TDM (Time division multiplexing) is to allow transfer of
+     multiple channel audio data on single data line.
+
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- dmas: list of DMA controller phandle and DMA request line ordered pairs.
+- dma-names: identifier string for each DMA request line in the dmas property.
+  These strings correspond 1:1 with the ordered pairs in dmas.
+- clocks: Handle to iis clock and RCLK source clk.
+- clock-names:
+  i2s0 uses some base clks from CMU and some are from audio subsystem internal
+  clock controller. The clock names for i2s0 should be "iis", "i2s_opclk0" and
+  "i2s_opclk1" as shown in the example below.
+  i2s1 and i2s2 uses clocks from CMU. The clock names for i2s1 and i2s2 should
+  be "iis" and "i2s_opclk0".
+  "iis" is the i2s bus clock and i2s_opclk0, i2s_opclk1 are sources of the root
+  clk. i2s0 has internal mux to select the source of root clk and i2s1 and i2s2
+  doesn't have any such mux.
+
+Optional SoC Specific Properties:
+
+- samsung,idma-addr: Internal DMA register base address of the audio
+  sub system(used in secondary sound source).
+- pinctrl-0: Should specify pin control groups used for this controller.
+- pinctrl-names: Should contain only one value - "default".
+
+Example:
+
+i2s0: i2s@03830000 {
+	compatible = "samsung,s5pv210-i2s";
+	reg = <0x03830000 0x100>;
+	dmas = <&pdma0 10
+		&pdma0 9
+		&pdma0 8>;
+	dma-names = "tx", "rx", "tx-sec";
+	clocks = <&clock_audss EXYNOS_I2S_BUS>,
+		<&clock_audss EXYNOS_I2S_BUS>,
+		<&clock_audss EXYNOS_SCLK_I2S>;
+	clock-names = "iis", "i2s_opclk0", "i2s_opclk1";
+	samsung,idma-addr = <0x03000000>;
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&i2s0_bus>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..955df60a118c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+* Freescale SGTL5000 Stereo Codec
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "fsl,sgtl5000".
+
+- reg : the I2C address of the device
+
+- clocks : the clock provider of SYS_MCLK
+
+Example:
+
+codec: sgtl5000@0a {
+	compatible = "fsl,sgtl5000";
+	reg = <0x0a>;
+	clocks = <&clks 150>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc-ac97link.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc-ac97link.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..80152a87f239
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc-ac97link.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+AC97 link bindings
+
+These bindings can be included within any other device node.
+
+Required properties:
+ - pinctrl-names: Has to contain following states to setup the correct
+   pinmuxing for the used gpios:
+	"ac97-running": AC97-link is active
+	"ac97-reset": AC97-link reset state
+	"ac97-warm-reset": AC97-link warm reset state
+ - ac97-gpios: List of gpio phandles with args in the order ac97-sync,
+   ac97-sdata, ac97-reset
+
+
+Example:
+
+ssi {
+	...
+
+	pinctrl-names = "default", "ac97-running", "ac97-reset", "ac97-warm-reset";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&ac97link_running>;
+	pinctrl-1 = <&ac97link_running>;
+	pinctrl-2 = <&ac97link_reset>;
+	pinctrl-3 = <&ac97link_warm_reset>;
+	ac97-gpios = <&gpio3 20 0 &gpio3 22 0 &gpio3 28 0>;
+
+	...
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc/codecs/fsl-sgtl5000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc/codecs/fsl-sgtl5000.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 2c3cd413f042..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc/codecs/fsl-sgtl5000.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-* Freescale SGTL5000 Stereo Codec
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : "fsl,sgtl5000".
-
-Example:
-
-codec: sgtl5000@0a {
-	compatible = "fsl,sgtl5000";
-	reg = <0x0a>;
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/spdif-receiver.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/spdif-receiver.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..80f807bf8a1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/spdif-receiver.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for dummy spdif receiver
+
+Required properties:
+	- compatible: should be "linux,spdif-dir".
+
+Example node:
+
+	codec: spdif-receiver {
+		compatible = "linux,spdif-dir";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/spdif-transmitter.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/spdif-transmitter.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..55a85841dd85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/spdif-transmitter.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for dummy spdif transmitter
+
+Required properties:
+	- compatible: should be "linux,spdif-dit".
+
+Example node:
+
+	codec: spdif-transmitter {
+		compatible = "linux,spdif-dit";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ssm2518.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ssm2518.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..59381a778c79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ssm2518.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+SSM2518 audio amplifier
+
+This device supports I2C only.
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible : Must be "adi,ssm2518"
+  - reg : the I2C address of the device. This will either be 0x34 (ADDR pin low)
+	or 0x35 (ADDR pin high)
+
+Optional properties:
+  - gpios : GPIO connected to the nSD pin. If the property is not present it is
+	        assumed that the nSD pin is hardwired to always on.
+
+Example:
+
+	ssm2518: ssm2518@34 {
+		compatible = "adi,ssm2518";
+		reg = <0x34>;
+		gpios = <&gpio 5 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tegra-audio-wm8903.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tegra-audio-wm8903.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index d5b0da8bf1d8..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tegra-audio-wm8903.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
-NVIDIA Tegra audio complex
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : "nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8903"
-- nvidia,model : The user-visible name of this sound complex.
-- nvidia,audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components.
-  Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink,
-  the second being the connection's source. Valid names for sources and
-  sinks are the WM8903's pins, and the jacks on the board:
-
-  WM8903 pins:
-
-  * IN1L
-  * IN1R
-  * IN2L
-  * IN2R
-  * IN3L
-  * IN3R
-  * DMICDAT
-  * HPOUTL
-  * HPOUTR
-  * LINEOUTL
-  * LINEOUTR
-  * LOP
-  * LON
-  * ROP
-  * RON
-  * MICBIAS
-
-  Board connectors:
-
-  * Headphone Jack
-  * Int Spk
-  * Mic Jack
-
-- nvidia,i2s-controller : The phandle of the Tegra I2S1 controller
-- nvidia,audio-codec : The phandle of the WM8903 audio codec
-
-Optional properties:
-- nvidia,spkr-en-gpios : The GPIO that enables the speakers
-- nvidia,hp-mute-gpios : The GPIO that mutes the headphones
-- nvidia,hp-det-gpios : The GPIO that detect headphones are plugged in
-- nvidia,int-mic-en-gpios : The GPIO that enables the internal microphone
-- nvidia,ext-mic-en-gpios : The GPIO that enables the external microphone
-
-Example:
-
-sound {
-	compatible = "nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8903-harmony",
-		     "nvidia,tegra-audio-wm8903"
-	nvidia,model = "tegra-wm8903-harmony";
-
-	nvidia,audio-routing =
-		"Headphone Jack", "HPOUTR",
-		"Headphone Jack", "HPOUTL",
-		"Int Spk", "ROP",
-		"Int Spk", "RON",
-		"Int Spk", "LOP",
-		"Int Spk", "LON",
-		"Mic Jack", "MICBIAS",
-		"IN1L", "Mic Jack";
-
-	nvidia,i2s-controller = <&i2s1>;
-	nvidia,audio-codec = <&wm8903>;
-
-	nvidia,spkr-en-gpios = <&codec 2 0>;
-	nvidia,hp-det-gpios = <&gpio 178 0>; /* gpio PW2 */
-	nvidia,int-mic-en-gpios = <&gpio 184 0>; /*gpio PX0 */
-	nvidia,ext-mic-en-gpios = <&gpio 185 0>; /* gpio PX1 */
-};
-
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ti,pcm1681.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ti,pcm1681.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4df17185ab80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ti,pcm1681.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+Texas Instruments PCM1681 8-channel PWM Processor
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - compatible:		Should contain "ti,pcm1681".
+ - reg:			The i2c address. Should contain <0x4c>.
+
+Examples:
+
+	i2c_bus {
+		pcm1681@4c {
+			compatible = "ti,pcm1681";
+			reg = <0x4c>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ti,tas5086.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ti,tas5086.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d2866a0d6a26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ti,tas5086.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+Texas Instruments TAS5086 6-channel PWM Processor
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - compatible:		Should contain "ti,tas5086".
+ - reg:			The i2c address. Should contain <0x1b>.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+ - reset-gpio: 		A GPIO spec to define which pin is connected to the
+			chip's !RESET pin. If specified, the driver will
+			assert a hardware reset at probe time.
+
+ - ti,charge-period:	This property should contain the time in microseconds
+			that closely matches the external single-ended
+			split-capacitor charge period. The hardware chip
+			waits for this period of time before starting the
+			PWM signals. This helps reduce pops and clicks.
+
+			When not specified, the hardware default of 1300ms
+			is retained.
+
+ - ti,mid-z-channel-X:	Boolean properties, X being a number from 1 to 6.
+			If given, channel X will start with the Mid-Z start
+			sequence, otherwise the default Low-Z scheme is used.
+
+			The correct configuration depends on how the power
+			stages connected to the PWM output pins work. Not all
+			power stages are compatible to Mid-Z - please refer
+			to the datasheets for more details.
+
+			Most systems should not set any of these properties.
+
+Examples:
+
+	i2c_bus {
+		tas5086@1b {
+			compatible = "ti,tas5086";
+			reg = <0x1b>;
+			reset-gpio = <&gpio 23 0>;
+			ti,charge-period = <156000>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..705a6b156c6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+Texas Instruments - tlv320aic3x Codec module
+
+The tlv320aic3x serial control bus communicates through I2C protocols
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible - "string" - One of:
+    "ti,tlv320aic3x" - Generic TLV320AIC3x device
+    "ti,tlv320aic33" - TLV320AIC33
+    "ti,tlv320aic3007" - TLV320AIC3007
+    "ti,tlv320aic3106" - TLV320AIC3106
+
+
+- reg - <int> -  I2C slave address
+
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- gpio-reset - gpio pin number used for codec reset
+- ai3x-gpio-func - <array of 2 int> - AIC3X_GPIO1 & AIC3X_GPIO2 Functionality
+- ai3x-micbias-vg - MicBias Voltage required.
+	1 - MICBIAS output is powered to 2.0V,
+	2 - MICBIAS output is powered to 2.5V,
+	3 - MICBIAS output is connected to AVDD,
+	If this node is not mentioned or if the value is incorrect, then MicBias
+	is powered down.
+
+Example:
+
+tlv320aic3x: tlv320aic3x@1b {
+	compatible = "ti,tlv320aic3x";
+	reg = <0x1b>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ux500-mop500.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ux500-mop500.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..48e071c96b46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ux500-mop500.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+* MOP500 Audio Machine Driver
+
+This node is responsible for linking together all ux500 Audio Driver components.
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible              : "stericsson,snd-soc-mop500"
+
+Non-standard properties:
+ - stericsson,cpu-dai      : Phandle to the CPU-side DAI
+ - stericsson,audio-codec  : Phandle to the Audio CODEC
+ - stericsson,card-name    : Over-ride default card name
+
+Example:
+
+	sound {
+		compatible = "stericsson,snd-soc-mop500";
+
+		stericsson,cpu-dai = <&msp1 &msp3>;
+		stericsson,audio-codec = <&codec>;
+	};
+
+	msp1: msp@80124000 {
+		compatible = "stericsson,ux500-msp-i2s";
+		reg = <0x80124000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 62 0x4>;
+		v-ape-supply = <&db8500_vape_reg>;
+	};
+
+	msp3: msp@80125000 {
+		compatible = "stericsson,ux500-msp-i2s";
+		reg = <0x80125000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 62 0x4>;
+		v-ape-supply = <&db8500_vape_reg>;
+	};
+
+	codec: ab8500-codec {
+		compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-codec";
+		stericsson,earpeice-cmv = <950>; /* Units in mV. */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ux500-msp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ux500-msp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..99acd9c774e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ux500-msp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+* ux500 MSP (CPU-side Digital Audio Interface)
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible       :"stericsson,ux500-msp-i2s"
+ - reg              : Physical base address and length of the device's registers.
+
+Optional properties:
+ - interrupts       : The interrupt output from the device.
+ - interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller.
+ - <name>-supply    : Phandle to the regulator <name> supply
+
+Example:
+
+	sound {
+		compatible = "stericsson,snd-soc-mop500";
+
+		stericsson,platform-pcm-dma = <&pcm>;
+		stericsson,cpu-dai = <&msp1 &msp3>;
+		stericsson,audio-codec = <&codec>;
+	};
+
+	pcm: ux500-pcm {
+		compatible = "stericsson,ux500-pcm";
+	};
+
+	msp1: msp@80124000 {
+		compatible = "stericsson,ux500-msp-i2s";
+		reg = <0x80124000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 62 0x4>;
+		v-ape-supply = <&db8500_vape_reg>;
+	};
+
+	msp3: msp@80125000 {
+		compatible = "stericsson,ux500-msp-i2s";
+		reg = <0x80125000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 62 0x4>;
+		v-ape-supply = <&db8500_vape_reg>;
+	};
+
+	codec: ab8500-codec {
+		compatible = "stericsson,ab8500-codec";
+		stericsson,earpeice-cmv = <950>; /* Units in mV. */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8731.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8731.txt
index 15f70048469b..236690e99b87 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8731.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8731.txt
@@ -16,3 +16,12 @@ codec: wm8731@1a {
 	compatible = "wlf,wm8731";
 	reg = <0x1a>;
 };
+
+Available audio endpoints for an audio-routing table:
+ * LOUT: Left Channel Line Output
+ * ROUT: Right Channel Line Output
+ * LHPOUT: Left Channel Headphone Output
+ * RHPOUT: Right Channel Headphone Output
+ * LLINEIN: Left Channel Line Input
+ * RLINEIN: Right Channel Line Input
+ * MICIN: Microphone Input
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8753.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8753.txt
index e65277a0fb60..8eee61282105 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8753.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8753.txt
@@ -10,9 +10,31 @@ Required properties:
   - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select
           number for SPI.
 
+Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes):
+
+  * LOUT1
+  * LOUT2
+  * ROUT1
+  * ROUT2
+  * MONO1
+  * MONO2
+  * OUT3
+  * OUT4
+  * LINE1
+  * LINE2
+  * RXP
+  * RXN
+  * ACIN
+  * ACOP
+  * MIC1N
+  * MIC1
+  * MIC2N
+  * MIC2
+  * Mic Bias
+
 Example:
 
-codec: wm8737@1a {
+codec: wm8753@1a {
 	compatible = "wlf,wm8753";
 	reg = <0x1a>;
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8903.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8903.txt
index f102cbc42694..94ec32c194bb 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8903.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8903.txt
@@ -28,6 +28,25 @@ Optional properties:
     performed. If any entry has the value 0xffffffff, that GPIO's
     configuration will not be modified.
 
+Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes):
+
+  * IN1L
+  * IN1R
+  * IN2L
+  * IN2R
+  * IN3L
+  * IN3R
+  * DMICDAT
+  * HPOUTL
+  * HPOUTR
+  * LINEOUTL
+  * LINEOUTR
+  * LOP
+  * LON
+  * ROP
+  * RON
+  * MICBIAS
+
 Example:
 
 codec: wm8903@1a {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8962.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8962.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7f82b59ec8f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8962.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+WM8962 audio CODEC
+
+This device supports I2C only.
+
+Required properties:
+
+  - compatible : "wlf,wm8962"
+
+  - reg : the I2C address of the device.
+
+Optional properties:
+  - spk-mono: This is a boolean property. If present, the SPK_MONO bit
+    of R51 (Class D Control 2) gets set, indicating that the speaker is
+    in mono mode.
+
+  - mic-cfg : Default register value for R48 (Additional Control 4).
+    If absent, the default should be the register default.
+
+  - gpio-cfg : A list of GPIO configuration register values. The list must
+    be 6 entries long. If absent, no configuration of these registers is
+    performed. And note that only the value within [0x0, 0xffff] is valid.
+    Any other value is regarded as setting the GPIO register by its reset
+    value 0x0.
+
+Example:
+
+codec: wm8962@1a {
+	compatible = "wlf,wm8962";
+	reg = <0x1a>;
+
+	gpio-cfg = <
+		0x0000 /* 0:Default */
+		0x0000 /* 1:Default */
+		0x0013 /* 2:FN_DMICCLK */
+		0x0000 /* 3:Default */
+		0x8014 /* 4:FN_DMICCDAT */
+		0x0000 /* 5:Default */
+	>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8994.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8994.txt
index 7a7eb1e7bda6..e045e90a0924 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8994.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8994.txt
@@ -5,14 +5,74 @@ on the board).
 
 Required properties:
 
-  - compatible : "wlf,wm1811", "wlf,wm8994", "wlf,wm8958"
+  - compatible : One of "wlf,wm1811", "wlf,wm8994" or "wlf,wm8958".
 
   - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select
           number for SPI.
 
+  - gpio-controller : Indicates this device is a GPIO controller.
+  - #gpio-cells : Must be 2. The first cell is the pin number and the
+    second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently unused).
+
+  - AVDD2-supply, DBVDD1-supply, DBVDD2-supply, DBVDD3-supply, CPVDD-supply,
+    SPKVDD1-supply, SPKVDD2-supply : power supplies for the device, as covered
+    in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt
+
+Optional properties:
+
+  - interrupts : The interrupt line the IRQ signal for the device is
+    connected to.  This is optional, if it is not connected then none
+    of the interrupt related properties should be specified.
+  - interrupt-controller : These devices contain interrupt controllers
+    and may provide interrupt services to other devices if they have an
+    interrupt line connected.
+  - interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller.
+  - #interrupt-cells: the number of cells to describe an IRQ, this should be 2.
+    The first cell is the IRQ number.
+    The second cell is the flags, encoded as the trigger masks from
+    Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupts.txt
+
+  - clocks : A list of up to two phandle and clock specifier pairs
+  - clock-names : A list of clock names sorted in the same order as clocks.
+                  Valid clock names are "MCLK1" and "MCLK2".
+
+  - wlf,gpio-cfg : A list of GPIO configuration register values. If absent,
+    no configuration of these registers is performed. If any value is
+    over 0xffff then the register will be left as default. If present 11
+    values must be supplied.
+
+  - wlf,micbias-cfg : Two MICBIAS register values for WM1811 or
+    WM8958.  If absent the register defaults will be used.
+
+  - wlf,ldo1ena : GPIO specifier for control of LDO1ENA input to device.
+  - wlf,ldo2ena : GPIO specifier for control of LDO2ENA input to device.
+
+  - wlf,lineout1-se : If present LINEOUT1 is in single ended mode.
+  - wlf,lineout2-se : If present LINEOUT2 is in single ended mode.
+
+  - wlf,lineout1-feedback : If present LINEOUT1 has common mode feedback
+    connected.
+  - wlf,lineout2-feedback : If present LINEOUT2 has common mode feedback
+    connected.
+
+  - wlf,ldoena-always-driven : If present LDOENA is always driven.
+
 Example:
 
 codec: wm8994@1a {
 	compatible = "wlf,wm8994";
 	reg = <0x1a>;
+
+	gpio-controller;
+	#gpio-cells = <2>;
+
+	lineout1-se;
+
+	AVDD2-supply = <&regulator>;
+	CPVDD-supply = <&regulator>;
+	DBVDD1-supply = <&regulator>;
+	DBVDD2-supply = <&regulator>;
+	DBVDD3-supply = <&regulator>;
+	SPKVDD1-supply = <&regulator>;
+	SPKVDD2-supply = <&regulator>;
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/brcm,bcm2835-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/brcm,bcm2835-spi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f11f295c8450
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/brcm,bcm2835-spi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+Broadcom BCM2835 SPI0 controller
+
+The BCM2835 contains two forms of SPI master controller, one known simply as
+SPI0, and the other known as the "Universal SPI Master"; part of the
+auxiliary block. This binding applies to the SPI0 controller.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "brcm,bcm2835-spi".
+- reg: Should contain register location and length.
+- interrupts: Should contain interrupt.
+- clocks: The clock feeding the SPI controller.
+
+Example:
+
+spi@20204000 {
+	compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-spi";
+	reg = <0x7e204000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <2 22>;
+	clocks = <&clk_spi>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/efm32-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/efm32-spi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a590ca51be75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/efm32-spi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+* Energy Micro EFM32 SPI
+
+Required properties:
+- #address-cells: see spi-bus.txt
+- #size-cells: see spi-bus.txt
+- compatible: should be "efm32,spi"
+- reg: Offset and length of the register set for the controller
+- interrupts: pair specifying rx and tx irq
+- clocks: phandle to the spi clock
+- cs-gpios: see spi-bus.txt
+- location: Value to write to the ROUTE register's LOCATION bitfield to configure the pinmux for the device, see datasheet for values.
+
+Example:
+
+spi1: spi@0x4000c400 { /* USART1 */
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "efm32,spi";
+	reg = <0x4000c400 0x400>;
+	interrupts = <15 16>;
+	clocks = <&cmu 20>;
+	cs-gpios = <&gpio 51 1>; // D3
+	location = <1>;
+	status = "ok";
+
+	ks8851@0 {
+		compatible = "ks8851";
+		spi-max-frequency = <6000000>;
+		reg = <0>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&boardfpga>;
+		interrupts = <4>;
+		status = "ok";
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-imx-cspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-imx-cspi.txt
index 9841057d112b..4256a6df9b79 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-imx-cspi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-imx-cspi.txt
@@ -17,6 +17,6 @@ ecspi@70010000 {
 	reg = <0x70010000 0x4000>;
 	interrupts = <36>;
 	fsl,spi-num-chipselects = <2>;
-	cs-gpios = <&gpio3 24 0>, /* GPIO4_24 */
-		   <&gpio3 25 0>; /* GPIO4_25 */
+	cs-gpios = <&gpio3 24 0>, /* GPIO3_24 */
+		   <&gpio3 25 0>; /* GPIO3_25 */
 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt
index 777abd7399d5..b032dd76e9d2 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Required properties:
 - cell-index : QE SPI subblock index.
 		0: QE subblock SPI1
 		1: QE subblock SPI2
-- compatible : should be "fsl,spi".
+- compatible : should be "fsl,spi" or "aeroflexgaisler,spictrl".
 - mode : the SPI operation mode, it can be "cpu" or "cpu-qe".
 - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
 - interrupts : <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b is a
@@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ Required properties:
   controller you have.
 - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that
   services interrupts for this device.
+- clock-frequency : input clock frequency to non FSL_SOC cores
 
 Optional properties:
 - gpios : specifies the gpio pins to be used for chipselects.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/mxs-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/mxs-spi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3499b73293c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/mxs-spi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+* Freescale MX233/MX28 SSP/SPI
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,<soc>-spi", where soc is "imx23" or "imx28"
+- reg: Offset and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts: Should contain SSP ERROR interrupt
+- dmas: DMA specifier, consisting of a phandle to DMA controller node
+  and SSP DMA channel ID.
+  Refer to dma.txt and fsl-mxs-dma.txt for details.
+- dma-names: Must be "rx-tx".
+
+Optional properties:
+- clock-frequency : Input clock frequency to the SPI block in Hz.
+		    Default is 160000000 Hz.
+
+Example:
+
+ssp0: ssp@80010000 {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "fsl,imx28-spi";
+	reg = <0x80010000 0x2000>;
+	interrupts = <96>;
+	dmas = <&dma_apbh 0>;
+	dma-names = "rx-tx";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra114-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra114-spi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..91ff771c7e77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra114-spi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra114 SPI controller.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "nvidia,tegra114-spi".
+- reg: Should contain SPI registers location and length.
+- interrupts: Should contain SPI interrupts.
+- nvidia,dma-request-selector : The Tegra DMA controller's phandle and
+  request selector for this SPI controller.
+- This is also require clock named "spi" as per binding document
+  Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+
+Recommended properties:
+- spi-max-frequency: Definition as per
+                     Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+Example:
+
+spi@7000d600 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra114-spi";
+	reg = <0x7000d600 0x200>;
+	interrupts = <0 82 0x04>;
+	nvidia,dma-request-selector = <&apbdma 16>;
+	spi-max-frequency = <25000000>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	status = "disabled";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-sflash.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-sflash.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7b53da5cb75b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-sflash.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra20 SFLASH controller.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "nvidia,tegra20-sflash".
+- reg: Should contain SFLASH registers location and length.
+- interrupts: Should contain SFLASH interrupts.
+- nvidia,dma-request-selector : The Tegra DMA controller's phandle and
+  request selector for this SFLASH controller.
+
+Recommended properties:
+- spi-max-frequency: Definition as per
+                     Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+
+Example:
+
+spi@7000c380 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-sflash";
+	reg = <0x7000c380 0x80>;
+	interrupts = <0 39 0x04>;
+	nvidia,dma-request-selector = <&apbdma 16>;
+	spi-max-frequency = <25000000>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	status = "disabled";
+};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-slink.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-slink.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..eefe15e3d95e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-slink.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra20/Tegra30 SLINK controller.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "nvidia,tegra20-slink", "nvidia,tegra30-slink".
+- reg: Should contain SLINK registers location and length.
+- interrupts: Should contain SLINK interrupts.
+- nvidia,dma-request-selector : The Tegra DMA controller's phandle and
+  request selector for this SLINK controller.
+
+Recommended properties:
+- spi-max-frequency: Definition as per
+                     Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+
+Example:
+
+spi@7000d600 {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-slink";
+	reg = <0x7000d600 0x200>;
+	interrupts = <0 82 0x04>;
+	nvidia,dma-request-selector = <&apbdma 16>;
+	spi-max-frequency = <25000000>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	status = "disabled";
+};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_nvidia.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-spi.txt
index 6b9e51896693..6b9e51896693 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_nvidia.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-spi.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/omap-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/omap-spi.txt
index 81df374adbb9..4c85c4c69584 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/omap-spi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/omap-spi.txt
@@ -6,9 +6,22 @@ Required properties:
   - "ti,omap4-spi" for OMAP4+.
 - ti,spi-num-cs : Number of chipselect supported  by the instance.
 - ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the McSPI
+- ti,pindir-d0-out-d1-in: Select the D0 pin as output and D1 as
+			  input. The default is D0 as input and
+			  D1 as output.
 
+Optional properties:
+- dmas: List of DMA specifiers with the controller specific format
+	as described in the generic DMA client binding. A tx and rx
+	specifier is required for each chip select.
+- dma-names: List of DMA request names. These strings correspond
+	1:1 with the DMA specifiers listed in dmas. The string naming
+	is to be "rxN" and "txN" for RX and TX requests,
+	respectively, where N equals the chip select number.
 
-Example:
+Examples:
+
+[hwmod populated DMA resources]
 
 mcspi1: mcspi@1 {
     #address-cells = <1>;
@@ -18,3 +31,17 @@ mcspi1: mcspi@1 {
     ti,spi-num-cs = <4>;
 };
 
+[generic DMA request binding]
+
+mcspi1: mcspi@1 {
+    #address-cells = <1>;
+    #size-cells = <0>;
+    compatible = "ti,omap4-mcspi";
+    ti,hwmods = "mcspi1";
+    ti,spi-num-cs = <2>;
+    dmas = <&edma 42
+	    &edma 43
+	    &edma 44
+	    &edma 45>;
+    dma-names = "tx0", "rx0", "tx1", "rx1";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e6222106ca36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+Renesas MSIOF spi controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : 	"renesas,sh-msiof" for SuperH or
+		"renesas,sh-mobile-msiof" for SH Mobile series
+- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts : interrupt line used by MSIOF
+
+Optional properties:
+- num-cs		: total number of chip-selects
+- renesas,tx-fifo-size	: Overrides the default tx fifo size given in words
+- renesas,rx-fifo-size	: Overrides the default rx fifo size given in words
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
index e782add2e457..800dafe5b01b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
@@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ The SPI master node requires the following properties:
 - #size-cells     - should be zero.
 - compatible      - name of SPI bus controller following generic names
     		recommended practice.
+- cs-gpios	  - (optional) gpios chip select.
 No other properties are required in the SPI bus node.  It is assumed
 that a driver for an SPI bus device will understand that it is an SPI bus.
 However, the binding does not attempt to define the specific method for
@@ -21,6 +22,25 @@ assumption that board specific platform code will be used to manage
 chip selects.  Individual drivers can define additional properties to
 support describing the chip select layout.
 
+Optional property:
+- num-cs : total number of chipselects
+
+If cs-gpios is used the number of chip select will automatically increased
+with max(cs-gpios > hw cs)
+
+So if for example the controller has 2 CS lines, and the cs-gpios
+property looks like this:
+
+cs-gpios = <&gpio1 0 0> <0> <&gpio1 1 0> <&gpio1 2 0>;
+
+Then it should be configured so that num_chipselect = 4 with the
+following mapping:
+
+cs0 : &gpio1 0 0
+cs1 : native
+cs2 : &gpio1 1 0
+cs3 : &gpio1 2 0
+
 SPI slave nodes must be children of the SPI master node and can
 contain the following properties.
 - reg             - (required) chip select address of device.
@@ -33,6 +53,21 @@ contain the following properties.
     		shifted clock phase (CPHA) mode
 - spi-cs-high     - (optional) Empty property indicating device requires
     		chip select active high
+- spi-3wire       - (optional) Empty property indicating device requires
+    		    3-wire mode.
+- spi-tx-bus-width - (optional) The bus width(number of data wires) that
+                      used for MOSI. Defaults to 1 if not present.
+- spi-rx-bus-width - (optional) The bus width(number of data wires) that
+                      used for MISO. Defaults to 1 if not present.
+
+Some SPI controllers and devices support Dual and Quad SPI transfer mode.
+It allows data in SPI system transfered in 2 wires(DUAL) or 4 wires(QUAD).
+Now the value that spi-tx-bus-width and spi-rx-bus-width can receive is
+only 1(SINGLE), 2(DUAL) and 4(QUAD).
+Dual/Quad mode is not allowed when 3-wire mode is used.
+
+If a gpio chipselect is used for the SPI slave the gpio number will be passed
+via the cs_gpio
 
 SPI example for an MPC5200 SPI bus:
 	spi@f00 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-davinci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-davinci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6d0ac8d0ad9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-davinci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+Davinci SPI controller device bindings
+
+Required properties:
+- #address-cells: number of cells required to define a chip select
+	address on the SPI bus. Should be set to 1.
+- #size-cells: should be zero.
+- compatible:
+	- "ti,dm6441-spi" for SPI used similar to that on DM644x SoC family
+	- "ti,da830-spi" for SPI used similar to that on DA8xx SoC family
+- reg: Offset and length of SPI controller register space
+- num-cs: Number of chip selects
+- ti,davinci-spi-intr-line: interrupt line used to connect the SPI
+	IP to the interrupt controller within the SoC. Possible values
+	are 0 and 1. Manual says one of the two possible interrupt
+	lines can be tied to the interrupt controller. Set this
+	based on a specifc SoC configuration.
+- interrupts: interrupt number mapped to CPU.
+- clocks: spi clk phandle
+
+Example of a NOR flash slave device (n25q032) connected to DaVinci
+SPI controller device over the SPI bus.
+
+spi0:spi@20BF0000 {
+	#address-cells			= <1>;
+	#size-cells			= <0>;
+	compatible			= "ti,dm6446-spi";
+	reg				= <0x20BF0000 0x1000>;
+	num-cs				= <4>;
+	ti,davinci-spi-intr-line	= <0>;
+	interrupts			= <338>;
+	clocks				= <&clkspi>;
+
+	flash: n25q032@0 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		compatible = "st,m25p32";
+		spi-max-frequency = <25000000>;
+		reg = <0>;
+
+		partition@0 {
+			label = "u-boot-spl";
+			reg = <0x0 0x80000>;
+			read-only;
+		};
+
+		partition@1 {
+			label = "test";
+			reg = <0x80000 0x380000>;
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-dspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-dspi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a1fb3035a42b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-dspi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+ARM Freescale DSPI controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "fsl,vf610-dspi"
+- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts : Should contain SPI controller interrupt
+- clocks: from common clock binding: handle to dspi clock.
+- clock-names: from common clock binding: Shall be "dspi".
+- pinctrl-0: pin control group to be used for this controller.
+- pinctrl-names: must contain a "default" entry.
+- spi-num-chipselects : the number of the chipselect signals.
+- bus-num : the slave chip chipselect signal number.
+Example:
+
+dspi0@4002c000 {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "fsl,vf610-dspi";
+	reg = <0x4002c000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <0 67 0x04>;
+	clocks = <&clks VF610_CLK_DSPI0>;
+	clock-names = "dspi";
+	spi-num-chipselects = <5>;
+	bus-num = <0>;
+	pinctrl-names = "default";
+	pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_dspi0_1>;
+	status = "okay";
+
+	sflash: at26df081a@0 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		compatible = "atmel,at26df081a";
+		spi-max-frequency = <16000000>;
+		spi-cpol;
+		spi-cpha;
+		reg = <0>;
+		linux,modalias = "m25p80";
+		modal = "at26df081a";
+	};
+};
+
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8a824be15754
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+SPI-GPIO devicetree bindings
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - compatible: should be set to "spi-gpio"
+ - #address-cells: should be set to <0x1>
+ - ranges
+ - gpio-sck: GPIO spec for the SCK line to use
+ - gpio-miso: GPIO spec for the MISO line to use
+ - gpio-mosi: GPIO spec for the MOSI line to use
+ - cs-gpios: GPIOs to use for chipselect lines
+ - num-chipselects: number of chipselect lines
+
+Example:
+
+	spi {
+		compatible = "spi-gpio";
+		#address-cells = <0x1>;
+		ranges;
+
+		gpio-sck = <&gpio 95 0>;
+		gpio-miso = <&gpio 98 0>;
+		gpio-mosi = <&gpio 97 0>;
+		cs-gpios = <&gpio 125 0>;
+		num-chipselects = <1>;
+
+		/* clients */
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-octeon.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-octeon.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..431add192342
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-octeon.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+Cavium, Inc. OCTEON SOC SPI master controller.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "cavium,octeon-3010-spi"
+- reg : The register base for the controller.
+- interrupts : One interrupt, used by the controller.
+- #address-cells : <1>, as required by generic SPI binding.
+- #size-cells : <0>, also as required by generic SPI binding.
+
+Child nodes as per the generic SPI binding.
+
+Example:
+
+	spi@1070000001000 {
+		compatible = "cavium,octeon-3010-spi";
+		reg = <0x10700 0x00001000 0x0 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <0 58>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+
+		eeprom@0 {
+			compatible = "st,m95256", "atmel,at25";
+			reg = <0>;
+			spi-max-frequency = <5000000>;
+			spi-cpha;
+			spi-cpol;
+
+			pagesize = <64>;
+			size = <32768>;
+			address-width = <16>;
+		};
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-orion.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-orion.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a3ff50fc76fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-orion.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+Marvell Orion SPI device
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "marvell,orion-spi".
+- reg : offset and length of the register set for the device
+- cell-index : Which of multiple SPI controllers is this.
+Optional properties:
+- interrupts : Is currently not used.
+
+Example:
+       spi@10600 {
+	       compatible = "marvell,orion-spi";
+	       #address-cells = <1>;
+	       #size-cells = <0>;
+	       cell-index = <0>;
+	       reg = <0x10600 0x28>;
+	       interrupts = <23>;
+	       status = "disabled";
+       };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-samsung.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-samsung.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..86aa061f069f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-samsung.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+* Samsung SPI Controller
+
+The Samsung SPI controller is used to interface with various devices such as flash
+and display controllers using the SPI communication interface.
+
+Required SoC Specific Properties:
+
+- compatible: should be one of the following.
+    - samsung,s3c2443-spi: for s3c2443, s3c2416 and s3c2450 platforms
+    - samsung,s3c6410-spi: for s3c6410 platforms
+    - samsung,s5p6440-spi: for s5p6440 and s5p6450 platforms
+    - samsung,s5pv210-spi: for s5pv210 and s5pc110 platforms
+    - samsung,exynos4210-spi: for exynos4 and exynos5 platforms
+
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+- interrupts: The interrupt number to the cpu. The interrupt specifier format
+  depends on the interrupt controller.
+
+[PRELIMINARY: the dma channel allocation will change once there are
+official DMA bindings]
+
+- tx-dma-channel: The dma channel specifier for tx operations. The format of
+  the dma specifier depends on the dma controller.
+
+- rx-dma-channel: The dma channel specifier for rx operations. The format of
+  the dma specifier depends on the dma controller.
+
+Required Board Specific Properties:
+
+- #address-cells: should be 1.
+- #size-cells: should be 0.
+
+Optional Board Specific Properties:
+
+- samsung,spi-src-clk: If the spi controller includes a internal clock mux to
+  select the clock source for the spi bus clock, this property can be used to
+  indicate the clock to be used for driving the spi bus clock. If not specified,
+  the clock number 0 is used as default.
+
+- num-cs: Specifies the number of chip select lines supported. If
+  not specified, the default number of chip select lines is set to 1.
+
+SPI Controller specific data in SPI slave nodes:
+
+- The spi slave nodes should provide the following information which is required
+  by the spi controller.
+
+  - cs-gpio: A gpio specifier that specifies the gpio line used as
+    the slave select line by the spi controller. The format of the gpio
+    specifier depends on the gpio controller.
+
+  - samsung,spi-feedback-delay: The sampling phase shift to be applied on the
+    miso line (to account for any lag in the miso line). The following are the
+    valid values.
+
+      - 0: No phase shift.
+      - 1: 90 degree phase shift sampling.
+      - 2: 180 degree phase shift sampling.
+      - 3: 270 degree phase shift sampling.
+
+Aliases:
+
+- All the SPI controller nodes should be represented in the aliases node using
+  the following format 'spi{n}' where n is a unique number for the alias.
+
+
+Example:
+
+- SoC Specific Portion:
+
+	spi_0: spi@12d20000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-spi";
+		reg = <0x12d20000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <0 66 0>;
+		tx-dma-channel = <&pdma0 5>;
+		rx-dma-channel = <&pdma0 4>;
+	};
+
+- Board Specific Portion:
+
+	spi_0: spi@12d20000 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		pinctrl-0 = <&spi0_bus>;
+
+		w25q80bw@0 {
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <1>;
+			compatible = "w25x80";
+			reg = <0>;
+			spi-max-frequency = <10000>;
+
+			controller-data {
+				cs-gpio = <&gpa2 5 1 0 3>;
+				samsung,spi-feedback-delay = <0>;
+			};
+
+			partition@0 {
+				label = "U-Boot";
+				reg = <0x0 0x40000>;
+				read-only;
+			};
+
+			partition@40000 {
+				label = "Kernel";
+				reg = <0x40000 0xc0000>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sc18is602.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sc18is602.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..02f9033270a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-sc18is602.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+NXP SC18IS602/SCIS603
+
+Required properties:
+	- compatible : Should be one of
+		"nxp,sc18is602"
+		"nxp,sc18is602b"
+		"nxp,sc18is603"
+	- reg: I2C bus address
+
+Optional properties:
+	- clock-frequency : external oscillator clock frequency. If not
+	  specified, the SC18IS602 default frequency (7372000) will be used.
+
+The clock-frequency property is relevant and needed only if the chip has an
+external oscillator (SC18IS603).
+
+Example:
+
+	sc18is603@28 {
+		compatible = "nxp,sc18is603";
+		reg = <0x28>;
+		clock-frequency = <14744000>;
+	}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt
index dda375943506..31319dcf30ab 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
 Altera SPI
 
 Required properties:
-- compatible : should be "ALTR,spi-1.0".
+- compatible : should be "ALTR,spi-1.0". <DEPRECATED>
+- compatible : should be "altr,spi-1.0".
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_atmel.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_atmel.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..07e04cdc0c9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_atmel.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+Atmel SPI device
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "atmel,at91rm9200-spi".
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts: Should contain spi interrupt
+- cs-gpios: chipselects
+
+Example:
+
+spi1: spi@fffcc000 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-spi";
+	reg = <0xfffcc000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <13 4 5>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	cs-gpios = <&pioB 3 0>;
+	status = "okay";
+
+	mmc-slot@0 {
+		compatible = "mmc-spi-slot";
+		reg = <0>;
+		gpios = <&pioC 4 0>;	/* CD */
+		spi-max-frequency = <25000000>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_pl022.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_pl022.txt
index 306ec3ff3c0e..22ed6797216d 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_pl022.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_pl022.txt
@@ -6,7 +6,65 @@ Required properties:
 - interrupts : Should contain SPI controller interrupt
 
 Optional properties:
+- num-cs : total number of chipselects
 - cs-gpios : should specify GPIOs used for chipselects.
   The gpios will be referred to as reg = <index> in the SPI child nodes.
   If unspecified, a single SPI device without a chip select can be used.
+- pl022,autosuspend-delay : delay in ms following transfer completion before
+			    the runtime power management system suspends the
+			    device. A setting of 0 indicates no delay and the
+                            device will be suspended immediately
+- pl022,rt : indicates the controller should run the message pump with realtime
+             priority to minimise the transfer latency on the bus (boolean)
+- dmas : Two or more DMA channel specifiers following the convention outlined
+         in bindings/dma/dma.txt
+- dma-names: Names for the dma channels, if present. There must be at
+	     least one channel named "tx" for transmit and named "rx" for
+             receive.
 
+
+SPI slave nodes must be children of the SPI master node and can
+contain the following properties.
+
+- pl022,interface : interface type:
+	0: SPI
+	1: Texas Instruments Synchronous Serial Frame Format
+	2: Microwire (Half Duplex)
+- pl022,com-mode : polling, interrupt or dma
+- pl022,rx-level-trig : Rx FIFO watermark level
+- pl022,tx-level-trig : Tx FIFO watermark level
+- pl022,ctrl-len : Microwire interface: Control length
+- pl022,wait-state : Microwire interface: Wait state
+- pl022,duplex : Microwire interface: Full/Half duplex
+
+
+Example:
+
+	spi@e0100000 {
+		compatible = "arm,pl022", "arm,primecell";
+		reg = <0xe0100000 0x1000>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		interrupts = <0 31 0x4>;
+		dmas = <&dma-controller 23 1>,
+			<&dma-controller 24 0>;
+		dma-names = "rx", "tx";
+
+		m25p80@1 {
+			compatible = "st,m25p80";
+			reg = <1>;
+			spi-max-frequency = <12000000>;
+			spi-cpol;
+			spi-cpha;
+			pl022,hierarchy = <0>;
+			pl022,interface = <0>;
+			pl022,slave-tx-disable;
+			pl022,com-mode = <0x2>;
+			pl022,rx-level-trig = <0>;
+			pl022,tx-level-trig = <0>;
+			pl022,ctrl-len = <0x11>;
+			pl022,wait-state = <0>;
+			pl022,duplex = <0>;
+		};
+	};
+	
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/ti_qspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/ti_qspi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1f9641ade0b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/ti_qspi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+TI QSPI controller.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "ti,dra7xxx-qspi" or "ti,am4372-qspi".
+- reg: Should contain QSPI registers location and length.
+- #address-cells, #size-cells : Must be present if the device has sub-nodes
+- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the QSPI
+
+Recommended properties:
+- spi-max-frequency: Definition as per
+                     Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt
+
+Example:
+
+qspi: qspi@4b300000 {
+	compatible = "ti,dra7xxx-qspi";
+	reg = <0x4b300000 0x100>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	spi-max-frequency = <25000000>;
+	ti,hwmods = "qspi";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/dwc2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/dwc2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1a1b7cfa4845
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/dwc2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+Platform DesignWare HS OTG USB 2.0 controller
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "snps,dwc2"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register range (address and length)
+- interrupts : Should contain 1 interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+        usb@101c0000 {
+                compatible = "ralink,rt3050-usb, snps,dwc2";
+                reg = <0x101c0000 40000>;
+                interrupts = <18>;
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/lpc32xx-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/lpc32xx-adc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b3629d3a9adf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/lpc32xx-adc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+* NXP LPC32xx SoC ADC controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "nxp,lpc3220-adc"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: The ADC interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+	adc@40048000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-adc";
+		reg = <0x40048000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&mic>;
+		interrupts = <39 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/mxs-lradc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/mxs-lradc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..46882058b59b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/mxs-lradc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+* Freescale i.MX28 LRADC device driver
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx28-lradc"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupts: Should contain the LRADC interrupts
+
+Optional properties:
+- fsl,lradc-touchscreen-wires: Number of wires used to connect the touchscreen
+                               to LRADC. Valid value is either 4 or 5. If this
+                               property is not present, then the touchscreen is
+                               disabled.
+
+Examples:
+
+	lradc@80050000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,imx28-lradc";
+		reg = <0x80050000 0x2000>;
+		interrupts = <10 14 15 16 17 18 19
+				20 21 22 23 24 25>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/spear-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/spear-adc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..02ea23a63f20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/spear-adc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+* ST SPEAr ADC device driver
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "st,spear600-adc"
+- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device
+- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller
+  that services interrupts for this device
+- interrupts: Should contain the ADC interrupt
+- sampling-frequency: Default sampling frequency
+
+Optional properties:
+- vref-external: External voltage reference in milli-volts. If omitted
+  the internal voltage reference will be used.
+- average-samples: Number of samples to generate an average value. If
+  omitted, single data conversion will be used.
+
+Examples:
+
+	adc: adc@d8200000 {
+		compatible = "st,spear600-adc";
+		reg = <0xd8200000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&vic1>;
+		interrupts = <6>;
+		sampling-frequency = <5000000>;
+		vref-external = <2500>;	/* 2.5V VRef */
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/imx-drm/fsl-imx-drm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/imx-drm/fsl-imx-drm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b876d4925a57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/imx-drm/fsl-imx-drm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+Freescale i.MX IPUv3
+====================
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,<chip>-ipu"
+- reg: should be register base and length as documented in the
+  datasheet
+- interrupts: Should contain sync interrupt and error interrupt,
+  in this order.
+- #crtc-cells: 1, See below
+- resets: phandle pointing to the system reset controller and
+          reset line index, see reset/fsl,imx-src.txt for details
+
+example:
+
+ipu: ipu@18000000 {
+	#crtc-cells = <1>;
+	compatible = "fsl,imx53-ipu";
+	reg = <0x18000000 0x080000000>;
+	interrupts = <11 10>;
+	resets = <&src 2>;
+};
+
+Parallel display support
+========================
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx-parallel-display"
+- crtc: the crtc this display is connected to, see below
+Optional properties:
+- interface_pix_fmt: How this display is connected to the
+  crtc. Currently supported types: "rgb24", "rgb565", "bgr666"
+- edid: verbatim EDID data block describing attached display.
+- ddc: phandle describing the i2c bus handling the display data
+  channel
+
+example:
+
+display@di0 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx-parallel-display";
+	edid = [edid-data];
+	crtc = <&ipu 0>;
+	interface-pix-fmt = "rgb24";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/imx-drm/ldb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/imx-drm/ldb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ed9377811ee2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/imx-drm/ldb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for LVDS Display Bridge (ldb)
+
+LVDS Display Bridge
+===================
+
+The LVDS Display Bridge device tree node contains up to two lvds-channel
+nodes describing each of the two LVDS encoder channels of the bridge.
+
+Required properties:
+ - #address-cells : should be <1>
+ - #size-cells : should be <0>
+ - compatible : should be "fsl,imx53-ldb" or "fsl,imx6q-ldb".
+                Both LDB versions are similar, but i.MX6 has an additional
+                multiplexer in the front to select any of the four IPU display
+                interfaces as input for each LVDS channel.
+ - gpr : should be <&gpr> on i.MX53 and i.MX6q.
+         The phandle points to the iomuxc-gpr region containing the LVDS
+         control register.
+- clocks, clock-names : phandles to the LDB divider and selector clocks and to
+                        the display interface selector clocks, as described in
+                        Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+        The following clocks are expected on i.MX53:
+                "di0_pll" - LDB LVDS channel 0 mux
+                "di1_pll" - LDB LVDS channel 1 mux
+                "di0" - LDB LVDS channel 0 gate
+                "di1" - LDB LVDS channel 1 gate
+                "di0_sel" - IPU1 DI0 mux
+                "di1_sel" - IPU1 DI1 mux
+        On i.MX6q the following additional clocks are needed:
+                "di2_sel" - IPU2 DI0 mux
+                "di3_sel" - IPU2 DI1 mux
+        The needed clock numbers for each are documented in
+        Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx5-clock.txt, and in
+        Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6q-clock.txt.
+
+Optional properties:
+ - pinctrl-names : should be "default" on i.MX53, not used on i.MX6q
+ - pinctrl-0 : a phandle pointing to LVDS pin settings on i.MX53,
+               not used on i.MX6q
+ - fsl,dual-channel : boolean. if it exists, only LVDS channel 0 should
+   be configured - one input will be distributed on both outputs in dual
+   channel mode
+
+LVDS Channel
+============
+
+Each LVDS Channel has to contain a display-timings node that describes the
+video timings for the connected LVDS display. For detailed information, also
+have a look at Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/display-timing.txt.
+
+Required properties:
+ - reg : should be <0> or <1>
+ - crtcs : a list of phandles with index pointing to the IPU display interfaces
+           that can be used as video source for this channel.
+ - fsl,data-mapping : should be "spwg" or "jeida"
+                      This describes how the color bits are laid out in the
+                      serialized LVDS signal.
+ - fsl,data-width : should be <18> or <24>
+
+example:
+
+gpr: iomuxc-gpr@53fa8000 {
+	/* ... */
+};
+
+ldb: ldb@53fa8008 {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "fsl,imx53-ldb";
+	gpr = <&gpr>;
+	clocks = <&clks 122>, <&clks 120>,
+		 <&clks 115>, <&clks 116>,
+		 <&clks 123>, <&clks 85>;
+	clock-names = "di0_pll", "di1_pll",
+		      "di0_sel", "di1_sel",
+		      "di0", "di1";
+
+	lvds-channel@0 {
+		reg = <0>;
+		crtcs = <&ipu 0>;
+		fsl,data-mapping = "spwg";
+		fsl,data-width = <24>;
+
+		display-timings {
+			/* ... */
+		};
+	};
+
+	lvds-channel@1 {
+		reg = <1>;
+		crtcs = <&ipu 1>;
+		fsl,data-mapping = "spwg";
+		fsl,data-width = <24>;
+
+		display-timings {
+			/* ... */
+		};
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/armada-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/armada-thermal.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fff93d5f92de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/armada-thermal.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+* Marvell Armada 370/XP thermal management
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible:	Should be set to one of the following:
+		marvell,armada370-thermal
+		marvell,armadaxp-thermal
+
+- reg:		Device's register space.
+		Two entries are expected, see the examples below.
+		The first one is required for the sensor register;
+		the second one is required for the control register
+		to be used for sensor initialization (a.k.a. calibration).
+
+Example:
+
+	thermal@d0018300 {
+		compatible = "marvell,armada370-thermal";
+                reg = <0xd0018300 0x4
+		       0xd0018304 0x4>;
+		status = "okay";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/db8500-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/db8500-thermal.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2e1c06fad81f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/db8500-thermal.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+* ST-Ericsson DB8500 Thermal
+
+** Thermal node properties:
+
+- compatible : "stericsson,db8500-thermal";
+- reg : address range of the thermal sensor registers;
+- interrupts : interrupts generated from PRCMU;
+- interrupt-names : "IRQ_HOTMON_LOW" and "IRQ_HOTMON_HIGH";
+- num-trips : number of total trip points, this is required, set it 0 if none,
+  if greater than 0, the following properties must be defined;
+- tripN-temp : temperature of trip point N, should be in ascending order;
+- tripN-type : type of trip point N, should be one of "active" "passive" "hot"
+  "critical";
+- tripN-cdev-num : number of the cooling devices which can be bound to trip
+  point N, this is required if trip point N is defined, set it 0 if none,
+  otherwise the following cooling device names must be defined;
+- tripN-cdev-nameM : name of the No. M cooling device of trip point N;
+
+Usually the num-trips and tripN-*** are separated in board related dts files.
+
+Example:
+thermal@801573c0 {
+	compatible = "stericsson,db8500-thermal";
+	reg = <0x801573c0 0x40>;
+	interrupts = <21 0x4>, <22 0x4>;
+	interrupt-names = "IRQ_HOTMON_LOW", "IRQ_HOTMON_HIGH";
+
+	num-trips = <3>;
+
+	trip0-temp = <75000>;
+	trip0-type = "active";
+	trip0-cdev-num = <1>;
+	trip0-cdev-name0 = "thermal-cpufreq-0";
+
+	trip1-temp = <80000>;
+	trip1-type = "active";
+	trip1-cdev-num = <2>;
+	trip1-cdev-name0 = "thermal-cpufreq-0";
+	trip1-cdev-name1 = "thermal-fan";
+
+	trip2-temp = <85000>;
+	trip2-type = "critical";
+	trip2-cdev-num = <0>;
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/dove-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/dove-thermal.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6f474677d472
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/dove-thermal.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+* Dove Thermal
+
+This driver is for Dove SoCs which contain a thermal sensor.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "marvell,dove-thermal"
+- reg : Address range of the thermal registers
+
+The reg properties should contain two ranges. The first is for the
+three Thermal Manager registers, while the second range contains the
+Thermal Diode Control Registers.
+
+Example:
+
+	thermal@10078 {
+		compatible = "marvell,dove-thermal";
+		reg = <0xd001c 0x0c>, <0xd005c 0x08>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/exynos-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/exynos-thermal.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..284f5300fd8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/exynos-thermal.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+* Exynos Thermal Management Unit (TMU)
+
+** Required properties:
+
+- compatible : One of the following:
+	       "samsung,exynos4412-tmu"
+	       "samsung,exynos4210-tmu"
+	       "samsung,exynos5250-tmu"
+	       "samsung,exynos5440-tmu"
+- interrupt-parent : The phandle for the interrupt controller
+- reg : Address range of the thermal registers. For soc's which has multiple
+	instances of TMU and some registers are shared across all TMU's like
+	interrupt related then 2 set of register has to supplied. First set
+	belongs	to each instance of TMU and second set belongs to common TMU
+	registers.
+- interrupts : Should contain interrupt for thermal system
+- clocks : The main clock for TMU device
+- clock-names : Thermal system clock name
+- vtmu-supply: This entry is optional and provides the regulator node supplying
+		voltage to TMU. If needed this entry can be placed inside
+		board/platform specific dts file.
+
+Example 1):
+
+	tmu@100C0000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4412-tmu";
+		interrupt-parent = <&combiner>;
+		reg = <0x100C0000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <2 4>;
+		clocks = <&clock 383>;
+		clock-names = "tmu_apbif";
+		status = "disabled";
+		vtmu-supply = <&tmu_regulator_node>;
+	};
+
+Example 2):
+
+	tmuctrl_0: tmuctrl@160118 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos5440-tmu";
+		reg = <0x160118 0x230>, <0x160368 0x10>;
+		interrupts = <0 58 0>;
+		clocks = <&clock 21>;
+		clock-names = "tmu_apbif";
+	};
+
+Note: For multi-instance tmu each instance should have an alias correctly
+numbered in "aliases" node.
+
+Example:
+
+aliases {
+	tmuctrl0 = &tmuctrl_0;
+	tmuctrl1 = &tmuctrl_1;
+	tmuctrl2 = &tmuctrl_2;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/imx-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/imx-thermal.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..541c25e49abf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/imx-thermal.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+* Temperature Monitor (TEMPMON) on Freescale i.MX SoCs
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "fsl,imx6q-thermal"
+- fsl,tempmon : phandle pointer to system controller that contains TEMPMON
+  control registers, e.g. ANATOP on imx6q.
+- fsl,tempmon-data : phandle pointer to fuse controller that contains TEMPMON
+  calibration data, e.g. OCOTP on imx6q.  The details about calibration data
+  can be found in SoC Reference Manual.
+
+Example:
+
+tempmon {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx6q-tempmon";
+	fsl,tempmon = <&anatop>;
+	fsl,tempmon-data = <&ocotp>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/kirkwood-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/kirkwood-thermal.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8c0f5eb86da7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/kirkwood-thermal.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+* Kirkwood Thermal
+
+This version is for Kirkwood 88F8262 & 88F6283 SoCs. Other kirkwoods
+don't contain a thermal sensor.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "marvell,kirkwood-thermal"
+- reg : Address range of the thermal registers
+
+Example:
+
+	thermal@10078 {
+		compatible = "marvell,kirkwood-thermal";
+		reg = <0x10078 0x4>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/rcar-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/rcar-thermal.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..28ef498a66e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/rcar-thermal.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+* Renesas R-Car Thermal
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible		: "renesas,rcar-thermal"
+- reg			: Address range of the thermal registers.
+			  The 1st reg will be recognized as common register
+			  if it has "interrupts".
+
+Option properties:
+
+- interrupts		: use interrupt
+
+Example (non interrupt support):
+
+thermal@e61f0100 {
+	compatible = "renesas,rcar-thermal";
+	reg = <0xe61f0100 0x38>;
+};
+
+Example (interrupt support):
+
+thermal@e61f0000 {
+	compatible = "renesas,rcar-thermal";
+	reg = <0xe61f0000 0x14
+		0xe61f0100 0x38
+		0xe61f0200 0x38
+		0xe61f0300 0x38>;
+	interrupts = <0 69 4>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/spear-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/spear-thermal.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..93e3b67c102d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/spear-thermal.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+* SPEAr Thermal
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "st,thermal-spear1340"
+- reg : Address range of the thermal registers
+- st,thermal-flags: flags used to enable thermal sensor
+
+Example:
+
+	thermal@fc000000 {
+		compatible = "st,thermal-spear1340";
+		reg = <0xfc000000 0x1000>;
+		st,thermal-flags = <0x7000>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/ti_soc_thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/ti_soc_thermal.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0c9222d27fae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/ti_soc_thermal.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+* Texas Instrument OMAP SCM bandgap bindings
+
+In the System Control Module, OMAP supplies a voltage reference
+and a temperature sensor feature that are gathered in the band
+gap voltage and temperature sensor (VBGAPTS) module. The band
+gap provides current and voltage reference for its internal
+circuits and other analog IP blocks. The analog-to-digital
+converter (ADC) produces an output value that is proportional
+to the silicon temperature.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be:
+  - "ti,omap4430-bandgap" : for OMAP4430 bandgap
+  - "ti,omap4460-bandgap" : for OMAP4460 bandgap
+  - "ti,omap4470-bandgap" : for OMAP4470 bandgap
+  - "ti,omap5430-bandgap" : for OMAP5430 bandgap
+- interrupts : this entry should indicate which interrupt line
+the talert signal is routed to;
+Specific:
+- gpios : this entry should be used to inform which GPIO
+line the tshut signal is routed to. The informed GPIO will
+be treated as an IRQ;
+- regs : this entry must also be specified and it is specific
+to each bandgap version, because the mapping may change from
+soc to soc, apart of depending on available features.
+
+Example:
+OMAP4430:
+bandgap {
+	reg = <0x4a002260 0x4 0x4a00232C 0x4>;
+	compatible = "ti,omap4430-bandgap";
+};
+
+OMAP4460:
+bandgap {
+	reg = <0x4a002260 0x4
+		0x4a00232C 0x4
+		0x4a002378 0x18>;
+	compatible = "ti,omap4460-bandgap";
+	interrupts = <0 126 4>; /* talert */
+	gpios = <&gpio3 22 0>; /* tshut */
+};
+
+OMAP4470:
+bandgap {
+	reg = <0x4a002260 0x4
+		0x4a00232C 0x4
+		0x4a002378 0x18>;
+	compatible = "ti,omap4470-bandgap";
+	interrupts = <0 126 4>; /* talert */
+	gpios = <&gpio3 22 0>; /* tshut */
+};
+
+OMAP5430:
+bandgap {
+	reg = <0x4a0021e0 0xc
+		0x4a00232c 0xc
+		0x4a002380 0x2c
+		0x4a0023C0 0x3c>;
+	compatible = "ti,omap5430-bandgap";
+	interrupts = <0 126 4>; /* talert */
+};
+
+DRA752:
+bandgap {
+	reg = <0x4a0021e0 0xc
+		0x4a00232c 0xc
+		0x4a002380 0x2c
+		0x4a0023C0 0x3c
+		0x4a002564 0x8
+		0x4a002574 0x50>;
+	compatible = "ti,dra752-bandgap";
+	interrupts = <0 126 4>; /* talert */
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun4i-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun4i-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..48aeb7884ed3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun4i-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Allwinner A1X SoCs Timer Controller
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "allwinner,sun4i-timer"
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupts : The interrupt of the first timer
+- clocks: phandle to the source clock (usually a 24 MHz fixed clock)
+
+Example:
+
+timer {
+	compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-timer";
+	reg = <0x01c20c00 0x400>;
+	interrupts = <22>;
+	clocks = <&osc>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/arm,sp804.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/arm,sp804.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5cd8eee74af1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/arm,sp804.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+ARM sp804 Dual Timers
+---------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "arm,sp804" & "arm,primecell"
+- interrupts: Should contain the list of Dual Timer interrupts. This is the
+	interrupt for timer 1 and timer 2. In the case of a single entry, it is
+	the combined interrupt or if "arm,sp804-has-irq" is present that
+	specifies which timer interrupt is connected.
+- reg: Should contain location and length for dual timer register.
+- clocks: clocks driving the dual timer hardware. This list should be 1 or 3
+	clocks.	With 3 clocks, the order is timer0 clock, timer1 clock,
+	apb_pclk. A single clock can also be specified if the same clock is
+	used for all clock inputs.
+
+Optional properties:
+- arm,sp804-has-irq = <#>: In the case of only 1 timer irq line connected, this
+	specifies if the irq connection is for timer 1 or timer 2. A value of 1
+	or 2 should be used.
+
+Example:
+
+	timer0: timer@fc800000 {
+		compatible = "arm,sp804", "arm,primecell";
+		reg = <0xfc800000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <0 0 4>, <0 1 4>;
+		clocks = <&timclk1 &timclk2 &pclk>;
+		clock-names = "timer1", "timer2", "apb_pclk";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/brcm,bcm2835-system-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/brcm,bcm2835-system-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..844bd5fbd04c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/brcm,bcm2835-system-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+BCM2835 System Timer
+
+The System Timer peripheral provides four 32-bit timer channels and a
+single 64-bit free running counter. Each channel has an output compare
+register, which is compared against the 32 least significant bits of the
+free running counter values, and generates an interrupt.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "brcm,bcm2835-system-timer"
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupts : A list of 4 interrupt sinks; one per timer channel.
+- clock-frequency : The frequency of the clock that drives the counter, in Hz.
+
+Example:
+
+timer {
+	compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-system-timer";
+	reg = <0x7e003000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <1 0>, <1 1>, <1 2>, <1 3>;
+	clock-frequency = <1000000>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/cadence,ttc-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/cadence,ttc-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..993695c659e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/cadence,ttc-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Cadence TTC - Triple Timer Counter
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "cdns,ttc".
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupts : A list of 3 interrupts; one per timer channel.
+- clocks: phandle to the source clock
+
+Example:
+
+ttc0: ttc0@f8001000 {
+	interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+	interrupts = < 0 10 4 0 11 4 0 12 4 >;
+	compatible = "cdns,ttc";
+	reg = <0xF8001000 0x1000>;
+	clocks = <&cpu_clk 3>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,imxgpt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,imxgpt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9809b11f7180
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,imxgpt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+Freescale i.MX General Purpose Timer (GPT)
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "fsl,<soc>-gpt"
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupts : A list of 4 interrupts; one per timer channel.
+- clocks : The clocks provided by the SoC to drive the timer.
+
+Example:
+
+gpt1: timer@10003000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx27-gpt", "fsl,imx1-gpt";
+	reg = <0x10003000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <26>;
+	clocks = <&clks 46>, <&clks 61>;
+	clock-names = "ipg", "per";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/lsi,zevio-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/lsi,zevio-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b2d07ad90e9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/lsi,zevio-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+TI-NSPIRE timer
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "lsi,zevio-timer".
+- reg : The physical base address and size of the timer (always first).
+- clocks: phandle to the source clock.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- interrupts : The interrupt number of the first timer.
+- reg : The interrupt acknowledgement registers
+	(always after timer base address)
+
+If any of the optional properties are not given, the timer is added as a
+clock-source only.
+
+Example:
+
+timer {
+	compatible = "lsi,zevio-timer";
+	reg = <0x900D0000 0x1000>, <0x900A0020 0x8>;
+	interrupts = <19>;
+	clocks = <&timer_clk>;
+};
+
+Example (no clock-events):
+
+timer {
+	compatible = "lsi,zevio-timer";
+	reg = <0x900D0000 0x1000>;
+	clocks = <&timer_clk>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,armada-370-xp-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,armada-370-xp-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f455182b1086
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,armada-370-xp-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+Marvell Armada 370 and Armada XP Timers
+---------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be either "marvell,armada-370-timer" or
+  "marvell,armada-xp-timer" as appropriate.
+- interrupts: Should contain the list of Global Timer interrupts and
+  then local timer interrupts
+- reg: Should contain location and length for timers register. First
+  pair for the Global Timer registers, second pair for the
+  local/private timers.
+
+Clocks required for compatible = "marvell,armada-370-timer":
+- clocks : Must contain a single entry describing the clock input
+
+Clocks required for compatible = "marvell,armada-xp-timer":
+- clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names.
+- clock-names : Must include the following entries:
+  "nbclk" (L2/coherency fabric clock),
+  "fixed" (Reference 25 MHz fixed-clock).
+
+Examples:
+
+- Armada 370:
+
+	timer {
+		compatible = "marvell,armada-370-timer";
+		reg = <0x20300 0x30>, <0x21040 0x30>;
+		interrupts = <37>, <38>, <39>, <40>, <5>, <6>;
+		clocks = <&coreclk 2>;
+	};
+
+- Armada XP:
+
+	timer {
+		compatible = "marvell,armada-xp-timer";
+		reg = <0x20300 0x30>, <0x21040 0x30>;
+		interrupts = <37>, <38>, <39>, <40>, <5>, <6>;
+		clocks = <&coreclk 2>, <&refclk>;
+		clock-names = "nbclk", "fixed";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,orion-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,orion-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..62bb8260cf6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,orion-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+Marvell Orion SoC timer
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: shall be "marvell,orion-timer"
+- reg: base address of the timer register starting with TIMERS CONTROL register
+- interrupt-parent: phandle of the bridge interrupt controller
+- interrupts: should contain the interrupts for Timer0 and Timer1
+- clocks: phandle of timer reference clock (tclk)
+
+Example:
+	timer: timer {
+		compatible = "marvell,orion-timer";
+		reg = <0x20300 0x20>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&bridge_intc>;
+		interrupts = <1>, <2>;
+		clocks = <&core_clk 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/moxa,moxart-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/moxa,moxart-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..da2d510cae47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/moxa,moxart-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+MOXA ART timer
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : Must be "moxa,moxart-timer"
+- reg : Should contain registers location and length
+- interrupts : Should contain the timer interrupt number
+- clocks : Should contain phandle for the clock that drives the counter
+
+Example:
+
+	timer: timer@98400000 {
+		compatible = "moxa,moxart-timer";
+		reg = <0x98400000 0x42>;
+		interrupts = <19 1>;
+		clocks = <&coreclk>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/nvidia,tegra20-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/nvidia,tegra20-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e019fdc38773
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/nvidia,tegra20-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra20 timer
+
+The Tegra20 timer provides four 29-bit timer channels and a single 32-bit free
+running counter. The first two channels may also trigger a watchdog reset.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "nvidia,tegra20-timer".
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupts : A list of 4 interrupts; one per timer channel.
+
+Example:
+
+timer {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-timer";
+	reg = <0x60005000 0x60>;
+	interrupts = <0 0 0x04
+			0 1 0x04
+			0 41 0x04
+			0 42 0x04>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/nvidia,tegra30-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/nvidia,tegra30-timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..906109d4c593
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/nvidia,tegra30-timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+NVIDIA Tegra30 timer
+
+The Tegra30 timer provides ten 29-bit timer channels, a single 32-bit free
+running counter, and 5 watchdog modules. The first two channels may also
+trigger a legacy watchdog reset.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "nvidia,tegra30-timer", "nvidia,tegra20-timer".
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupts : A list of 6 interrupts; one per each of timer channels 1
+    through 5, and one for the shared interrupt for the remaining channels.
+
+timer {
+	compatible = "nvidia,tegra30-timer", "nvidia,tegra20-timer";
+	reg = <0x60005000 0x400>;
+	interrupts = <0 0 0x04
+		      0 1 0x04
+		      0 41 0x04
+		      0 42 0x04
+		      0 121 0x04
+		      0 122 0x04>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/samsung,exynos4210-mct.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/samsung,exynos4210-mct.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b5a86d20ee36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/samsung,exynos4210-mct.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+Samsung's Multi Core Timer (MCT)
+
+The Samsung's Multi Core Timer (MCT) module includes two main blocks, the
+global timer and CPU local timers. The global timer is a 64-bit free running
+up-counter and can generate 4 interrupts when the counter reaches one of the
+four preset counter values. The CPU local timers are 32-bit free running
+down-counters and generate an interrupt when the counter expires. There is
+one CPU local timer instantiated in MCT for every CPU in the system.
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: should be "samsung,exynos4210-mct".
+  (a) "samsung,exynos4210-mct", for mct compatible with Exynos4210 mct.
+  (b) "samsung,exynos4412-mct", for mct compatible with Exynos4412 mct.
+
+- reg: base address of the mct controller and length of the address space
+  it occupies.
+
+- interrupts: the list of interrupts generated by the controller. The following
+  should be the order of the interrupts specified. The local timer interrupts
+  should be specified after the four global timer interrupts have been
+  specified.
+
+	0: Global Timer Interrupt 0
+	1: Global Timer Interrupt 1
+	2: Global Timer Interrupt 2
+	3: Global Timer Interrupt 3
+	4: Local Timer Interrupt 0
+	5: Local Timer Interrupt 1
+	6: ..
+	7: ..
+	i: Local Timer Interrupt n
+
+Example 1: In this example, the system uses only the first global timer
+	   interrupt generated by MCT and the remaining three global timer
+	   interrupts are unused. Two local timer interrupts have been
+	   specified.
+
+	mct@10050000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-mct";
+		reg = <0x10050000 0x800>;
+		interrupts = <0 57 0>, <0 0 0>, <0 0 0>, <0 0 0>,
+			     <0 42 0>, <0 48 0>;
+	};
+
+Example 2: In this example, the MCT global and local timer interrupts are
+	   connected to two separate interrupt controllers. Hence, an
+	   interrupt-map is created to map the interrupts to the respective
+	   interrupt controllers.
+
+	mct@101C0000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-mct";
+		reg = <0x101C0000 0x800>;
+		interrupt-controller;
+		#interrups-cells = <2>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&mct_map>;
+		interrupts = <0 0>, <1 0>, <2 0>, <3 0>,
+			     <4 0>, <5 0>;
+
+		mct_map: mct-map {
+			#interrupt-cells = <2>;
+			#address-cells = <0>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+			interrupt-map = <0x0 0 &combiner 23 3>,
+					<0x4 0 &gic 0 120 0>,
+					<0x5 0 &gic 0 121 0>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/stericsson-u300-apptimer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/stericsson-u300-apptimer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9499bc8ee9e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/stericsson-u300-apptimer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+ST-Ericsson U300 apptimer
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "stericsson,u300-apptimer"
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+- interrupts : A list of 4 interrupts; one for each subtimer. These
+  are, in order: OS (operating system), DD (device driver) both
+  adopted for EPOC/Symbian with two specific IRQs for these tasks,
+  then GP1 and GP2, which are general-purpose timers.
+
+Example:
+
+timer {
+	compatible = "stericsson,u300-apptimer";
+	reg = <0xc0014000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <24 25 26 27>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/atmel-usart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/atmel-usart.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index a49d9a1d4ccf..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/atmel-usart.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-* Atmel Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (USART)
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-usart"
-  The compatible <chip> indicated will be the first SoC to support an
-  additional mode or an USART new feature.
-- reg: Should contain registers location and length
-- interrupts: Should contain interrupt
-
-Optional properties:
-- atmel,use-dma-rx: use of PDC or DMA for receiving data
-- atmel,use-dma-tx: use of PDC or DMA for transmitting data
-
-<chip> compatible description:
-- at91rm9200:  legacy USART support
-- at91sam9260: generic USART implementation for SAM9 SoCs
-
-Example:
-
-	usart0: serial@fff8c000 {
-		compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-usart";
-		reg = <0xfff8c000 0x4000>;
-		interrupts = <7>;
-		atmel,use-dma-rx;
-		atmel,use-dma-tx;
-	};
-
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/efm32-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/efm32-uart.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 6588b6950a7f..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/efm32-uart.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-* Energymicro efm32 UART
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : Should be "efm32,uart"
-- reg : Address and length of the register set
-- interrupts : Should contain uart interrupt
-
-Example:
-
-uart@0x4000c400 {
-	compatible = "efm32,uart";
-	reg = <0x4000c400 0x400>;
-	interrupts = <15>;
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/fsl-imx-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/fsl-imx-uart.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index a9c0406280e8..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/fsl-imx-uart.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-* Freescale i.MX Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : Should be "fsl,<soc>-uart"
-- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
-- interrupts : Should contain uart interrupt
-
-Optional properties:
-- fsl,uart-has-rtscts : Indicate the uart has rts and cts
-- fsl,irda-mode : Indicate the uart supports irda mode
-
-Example:
-
-uart@73fbc000 {
-	compatible = "fsl,imx51-uart", "fsl,imx21-uart";
-	reg = <0x73fbc000 0x4000>;
-	interrupts = <31>;
-	fsl,uart-has-rtscts;
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/msm_serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/msm_serial.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index aef383eb8876..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/msm_serial.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-* Qualcomm MSM UART
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible :
-	- "qcom,msm-uart", and one of "qcom,msm-hsuart" or
-	  "qcom,msm-lsuart".
-- reg : offset and length of the register set for the device
-	for the hsuart operating in compatible mode, there should be a
-	second pair describing the gsbi registers.
-- interrupts : should contain the uart interrupt.
-
-There are two different UART blocks used in MSM devices,
-"qcom,msm-hsuart" and "qcom,msm-lsuart".  The msm-serial driver is
-able to handle both of these, and matches against the "qcom,msm-uart"
-as the compatibility.
-
-The registers for the "qcom,msm-hsuart" device need to specify both
-register blocks, even for the common driver.
-
-Example:
-
-	uart@19c400000 {
-		compatible = "qcom,msm-hsuart", "qcom,msm-uart";
-		reg = <0x19c40000 0x1000>,
-		      <0x19c00000 0x1000>;
-		interrupts = <195>;
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/of-serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/of-serial.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index b8b27b0aca10..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/of-serial.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-* UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter)
-
-Required properties:
-- compatible : one of:
-	- "ns8250"
-	- "ns16450"
-	- "ns16550a"
-	- "ns16550"
-	- "ns16750"
-	- "ns16850"
-	- "nvidia,tegra20-uart"
-	- "ibm,qpace-nwp-serial"
-	- "serial" if the port type is unknown.
-- reg : offset and length of the register set for the device.
-- interrupts : should contain uart interrupt.
-- clock-frequency : the input clock frequency for the UART.
-
-Optional properties:
-- current-speed : the current active speed of the UART.
-- reg-offset : offset to apply to the mapbase from the start of the registers.
-- reg-shift : quantity to shift the register offsets by.
-- reg-io-width : the size (in bytes) of the IO accesses that should be
-  performed on the device.  There are some systems that require 32-bit
-  accesses to the UART (e.g. TI davinci).
-- used-by-rtas : set to indicate that the port is in use by the OpenFirmware
-  RTAS and should not be registered.
-
-Example:
-
-	uart@80230000 {
-		compatible = "ns8250";
-		reg = <0x80230000 0x100>;
-		clock-frequency = <3686400>;
-		interrupts = <10>;
-		reg-shift = <2>;
-	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..20468b2a7516
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+* Universal Flash Storage (UFS) Host Controller
+
+UFSHC nodes are defined to describe on-chip UFS host controllers.
+Each UFS controller instance should have its own node.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible        : compatible list, contains "jedec,ufs-1.1"
+- interrupts        : <interrupt mapping for UFS host controller IRQ>
+- reg               : <registers mapping>
+
+Example:
+	ufshc@0xfc598000 {
+		compatible = "jedec,ufs-1.1";
+		reg = <0xfc598000 0x800>;
+		interrupts = <0 28 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/am33xx-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/am33xx-usb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..20c2ff2ba07e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/am33xx-usb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+  AM33xx MUSB
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+- compatible: ti,am33xx-usb
+- reg: offset and length of the usbss register sets
+- ti,hwmods : must be "usb_otg_hs"
+
+The glue layer contains multiple child nodes. It is required the have
+at least a control module node, USB node and a PHY node. The second USB
+node and its PHY node is optional. The DMA node is also optional.
+
+Reset module
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+- compatible: ti,am335x-usb-ctrl-module
+- reg: offset and length of the "USB control registers" in the "Control
+  Module" block. A second offset and length for the USB wake up control
+  in the same memory block.
+- reg-names: "phy_ctrl" for the "USB control registers" and "wakeup" for
+  the USB wake up control register.
+
+USB PHY
+~~~~~~~
+compatible: ti,am335x-usb-phy
+reg: offset and length of the "USB PHY" register space
+ti,ctrl_mod: reference to the "reset module" node
+reg-names: phy
+The PHY should have a "phy" alias numbered properly in the alias
+node.
+
+USB
+~~~
+- compatible: ti,musb-am33xx
+- reg: offset and length of "USB Controller Registers", and offset and
+  length of "USB Core" register space.
+- reg-names: control for the ""USB Controller Registers" and "mc" for
+  "USB Core" register space
+- interrupts: USB interrupt number
+- interrupt-names: mc
+- dr_mode: Should be one of "host", "peripheral" or "otg".
+- mentor,multipoint: Should be "1" indicating the musb controller supports
+  multipoint. This is a MUSB configuration-specific setting.
+- mentor,num-eps: Specifies the number of endpoints. This is also a
+  MUSB configuration-specific setting. Should be set to "16"
+- mentor,ram-bits: Specifies the ram address size. Should be set to "12"
+- mentor,power: Should be "500". This signifies the controller can supply up to
+  500mA when operating in host mode.
+- phys: reference to the USB phy
+- dmas: specifies the dma channels
+- dma-names: specifies the names of the channels. Use "rxN" for receive
+  and "txN" for transmit endpoints. N specifies the endpoint number.
+
+The controller should have an "usb" alias numbered properly in the alias
+node.
+
+DMA
+~~~
+- compatible: ti,am3359-cppi41
+- reg: offset and length of the following register spaces: USBSS, USB
+  CPPI DMA Controller, USB CPPI DMA Scheduler, USB Queue Manager
+- reg-names: glue, controller, scheduler, queuemgr
+- #dma-cells: should be set to 2. The first number represents the
+  endpoint number (0 … 14 for endpoints 1 … 15 on instance 0 and 15 … 29
+  for endpoints 1 … 15 on instance 1). The second number is 0 for RX and
+  1 for TX transfers.
+- #dma-channels: should be set to 30 representing the 15 endpoints for
+  each USB instance.
+
+Example:
+~~~~~~~~
+The following example contains all the nodes as used on am335x-evm:
+
+aliases {
+	usb0 = &usb0;
+	usb1 = &usb1;
+	phy0 = &usb0_phy;
+	phy1 = &usb1_phy;
+};
+
+usb: usb@47400000 {
+	compatible = "ti,am33xx-usb";
+	reg = <0x47400000 0x1000>;
+	ranges;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	ti,hwmods = "usb_otg_hs";
+
+	ctrl_mod: control@44e10000 {
+		compatible = "ti,am335x-usb-ctrl-module";
+		reg = <0x44e10620 0x10
+			0x44e10648 0x4>;
+		reg-names = "phy_ctrl", "wakeup";
+	};
+
+	usb0_phy: usb-phy@47401300 {
+		compatible = "ti,am335x-usb-phy";
+		reg = <0x47401300 0x100>;
+		reg-names = "phy";
+		ti,ctrl_mod = <&ctrl_mod>;
+	};
+
+	usb0: usb@47401000 {
+		compatible = "ti,musb-am33xx";
+		reg = <0x47401400 0x400
+			0x47401000 0x200>;
+		reg-names = "mc", "control";
+
+		interrupts = <18>;
+		interrupt-names = "mc";
+		dr_mode = "otg"
+		mentor,multipoint = <1>;
+		mentor,num-eps = <16>;
+		mentor,ram-bits = <12>;
+		mentor,power = <500>;
+		phys = <&usb0_phy>;
+
+		dmas = <&cppi41dma  0 0 &cppi41dma  1 0
+			&cppi41dma  2 0 &cppi41dma  3 0
+			&cppi41dma  4 0 &cppi41dma  5 0
+			&cppi41dma  6 0 &cppi41dma  7 0
+			&cppi41dma  8 0 &cppi41dma  9 0
+			&cppi41dma 10 0 &cppi41dma 11 0
+			&cppi41dma 12 0 &cppi41dma 13 0
+			&cppi41dma 14 0 &cppi41dma  0 1
+			&cppi41dma  1 1 &cppi41dma  2 1
+			&cppi41dma  3 1 &cppi41dma  4 1
+			&cppi41dma  5 1 &cppi41dma  6 1
+			&cppi41dma  7 1 &cppi41dma  8 1
+			&cppi41dma  9 1 &cppi41dma 10 1
+			&cppi41dma 11 1 &cppi41dma 12 1
+			&cppi41dma 13 1 &cppi41dma 14 1>;
+		dma-names =
+			"rx1", "rx2", "rx3", "rx4", "rx5", "rx6", "rx7",
+			"rx8", "rx9", "rx10", "rx11", "rx12", "rx13",
+			"rx14", "rx15",
+			"tx1", "tx2", "tx3", "tx4", "tx5", "tx6", "tx7",
+			"tx8", "tx9", "tx10", "tx11", "tx12", "tx13",
+			"tx14", "tx15";
+	};
+
+	usb1_phy: usb-phy@47401b00 {
+		compatible = "ti,am335x-usb-phy";
+		reg = <0x47401b00 0x100>;
+		reg-names = "phy";
+		ti,ctrl_mod = <&ctrl_mod>;
+	};
+
+	usb1: usb@47401800 {
+		compatible = "ti,musb-am33xx";
+		reg = <0x47401c00 0x400
+			0x47401800 0x200>;
+		reg-names = "mc", "control";
+		interrupts = <19>;
+		interrupt-names = "mc";
+		dr_mode = "host"
+		mentor,multipoint = <1>;
+		mentor,num-eps = <16>;
+		mentor,ram-bits = <12>;
+		mentor,power = <500>;
+		phys = <&usb1_phy>;
+
+		dmas = <&cppi41dma 15 0 &cppi41dma 16 0
+			&cppi41dma 17 0 &cppi41dma 18 0
+			&cppi41dma 19 0 &cppi41dma 20 0
+			&cppi41dma 21 0 &cppi41dma 22 0
+			&cppi41dma 23 0 &cppi41dma 24 0
+			&cppi41dma 25 0 &cppi41dma 26 0
+			&cppi41dma 27 0 &cppi41dma 28 0
+			&cppi41dma 29 0 &cppi41dma 15 1
+			&cppi41dma 16 1 &cppi41dma 17 1
+			&cppi41dma 18 1 &cppi41dma 19 1
+			&cppi41dma 20 1 &cppi41dma 21 1
+			&cppi41dma 22 1 &cppi41dma 23 1
+			&cppi41dma 24 1 &cppi41dma 25 1
+			&cppi41dma 26 1 &cppi41dma 27 1
+			&cppi41dma 28 1 &cppi41dma 29 1>;
+		dma-names =
+			"rx1", "rx2", "rx3", "rx4", "rx5", "rx6", "rx7",
+			"rx8", "rx9", "rx10", "rx11", "rx12", "rx13",
+			"rx14", "rx15",
+			"tx1", "tx2", "tx3", "tx4", "tx5", "tx6", "tx7",
+			"tx8", "tx9", "tx10", "tx11", "tx12", "tx13",
+			"tx14", "tx15";
+	};
+
+	cppi41dma: dma-controller@07402000 {
+		compatible = "ti,am3359-cppi41";
+		reg =  <0x47400000 0x1000
+			0x47402000 0x1000
+			0x47403000 0x1000
+			0x47404000 0x4000>;
+		reg-names = "glue", "controller", "scheduler", "queuemgr";
+		interrupts = <17>;
+		interrupt-names = "glue";
+		#dma-cells = <2>;
+		#dma-channels = <30>;
+		#dma-requests = <256>;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/atmel-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/atmel-usb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..55f51af08bc7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/atmel-usb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+Atmel SOC USB controllers
+
+OHCI
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: Should be "atmel,at91rm9200-ohci" for USB controllers
+   used in host mode.
+ - num-ports: Number of ports.
+ - atmel,vbus-gpio: If present, specifies a gpio that needs to be
+   activated for the bus to be powered.
+ - atmel,oc-gpio: If present, specifies a gpio that needs to be
+   activated for the overcurrent detection.
+
+usb0: ohci@00500000 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-ohci", "usb-ohci";
+	reg = <0x00500000 0x100000>;
+	interrupts = <20 4>;
+	num-ports = <2>;
+};
+
+EHCI
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: Should be "atmel,at91sam9g45-ehci" for USB controllers
+   used in host mode.
+
+usb1: ehci@00800000 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91sam9g45-ehci", "usb-ehci";
+	reg = <0x00800000 0x100000>;
+	interrupts = <22 4>;
+};
+
+AT91 USB device controller
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: Should be "atmel,at91rm9200-udc"
+ - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device
+ - interrupts: Should contain macb interrupt
+
+Optional properties:
+ - atmel,vbus-gpio: If present, specifies a gpio that needs to be
+   activated for the bus to be powered.
+
+usb1: gadget@fffa4000 {
+	compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-udc";
+	reg = <0xfffa4000 0x4000>;
+	interrupts = <10 4>;
+	atmel,vbus-gpio = <&pioC 5 0>;
+};
+
+Atmel High-Speed USB device controller
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: Should be "atmel,at91sam9rl-udc"
+ - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device
+ - interrupts: Should contain usba interrupt
+ - ep childnode: To specify the number of endpoints and their properties.
+
+Optional properties:
+ - atmel,vbus-gpio: If present, specifies a gpio that needs to be
+   activated for the bus to be powered.
+
+Required child node properties:
+ - name: Name of the endpoint.
+ - reg: Num of the endpoint.
+ - atmel,fifo-size: Size of the fifo.
+ - atmel,nb-banks: Number of banks.
+ - atmel,can-dma: Boolean to specify if the endpoint support DMA.
+ - atmel,can-isoc: Boolean to specify if the endpoint support ISOC.
+
+usb2: gadget@fff78000 {
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <0>;
+	compatible = "atmel,at91sam9rl-udc";
+	reg = <0x00600000 0x80000
+	       0xfff78000 0x400>;
+	interrupts = <27 4 0>;
+	atmel,vbus-gpio = <&pioB 19 0>;
+
+	ep0 {
+		reg = <0>;
+		atmel,fifo-size = <64>;
+		atmel,nb-banks = <1>;
+	};
+
+	ep1 {
+		reg = <1>;
+		atmel,fifo-size = <1024>;
+		atmel,nb-banks = <2>;
+		atmel,can-dma;
+		atmel,can-isoc;
+	};
+
+	ep2 {
+		reg = <2>;
+		atmel,fifo-size = <1024>;
+		atmel,nb-banks = <2>;
+		atmel,can-dma;
+		atmel,can-isoc;
+	};
+
+	ep3 {
+		reg = <3>;
+		atmel,fifo-size = <1024>;
+		atmel,nb-banks = <3>;
+		atmel,can-dma;
+	};
+
+	ep4 {
+		reg = <4>;
+		atmel,fifo-size = <1024>;
+		atmel,nb-banks = <3>;
+		atmel,can-dma;
+	};
+
+	ep5 {
+		reg = <5>;
+		atmel,fifo-size = <1024>;
+		atmel,nb-banks = <3>;
+		atmel,can-dma;
+		atmel,can-isoc;
+	};
+
+	ep6 {
+		reg = <6>;
+		atmel,fifo-size = <1024>;
+		atmel,nb-banks = <3>;
+		atmel,can-dma;
+		atmel,can-isoc;
+	};
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci13xxx-imx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci13xxx-imx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b4b5b7906c88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci13xxx-imx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+* Freescale i.MX ci13xxx usb controllers
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx27-usb"
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length
+- interrupts: Should contain controller interrupt
+
+Recommended properies:
+- phy_type: the type of the phy connected to the core. Should be one
+  of "utmi", "utmi_wide", "ulpi", "serial" or "hsic". Without this
+  property the PORTSC register won't be touched
+- dr_mode: One of "host", "peripheral" or "otg". Defaults to "otg"
+
+Optional properties:
+- fsl,usbphy: phandler of usb phy that connects to the only one port
+- fsl,usbmisc: phandler of non-core register device, with one argument
+  that indicate usb controller index
+- vbus-supply: regulator for vbus
+- disable-over-current: disable over current detect
+- external-vbus-divider: enables off-chip resistor divider for Vbus
+
+Examples:
+usb@02184000 { /* USB OTG */
+	compatible = "fsl,imx6q-usb", "fsl,imx27-usb";
+	reg = <0x02184000 0x200>;
+	interrupts = <0 43 0x04>;
+	fsl,usbphy = <&usbphy1>;
+	fsl,usbmisc = <&usbmisc 0>;
+	disable-over-current;
+	external-vbus-divider;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc3.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e807635f9e1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc3.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+synopsys DWC3 CORE
+
+DWC3- USB3 CONTROLLER
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: must be "snps,dwc3"
+ - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+ - interrupts: Interrupts used by the dwc3 controller.
+ - usb-phy : array of phandle for the PHY device.  The first element
+   in the array is expected to be a handle to the USB2/HS PHY and
+   the second element is expected to be a handle to the USB3/SS PHY
+
+Optional properties:
+ - tx-fifo-resize: determines if the FIFO *has* to be reallocated.
+
+This is usually a subnode to DWC3 glue to which it is connected.
+
+dwc3@4a030000 {
+	compatible = "snps,dwc3";
+	reg = <0x4a030000 0xcfff>;
+	interrupts = <0 92 4>
+	usb-phy = <&usb2_phy>, <&usb3,phy>;
+	tx-fifo-resize;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ehci-omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ehci-omap.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..485a9a1efa7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ehci-omap.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+OMAP HS USB EHCI controller
+
+This device is usually the child of the omap-usb-host
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/omap-usb-host.txt
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: should be "ti,ehci-omap"
+- reg: should contain one register range i.e. start and length
+- interrupts: description of the interrupt line
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- phys: list of phandles to PHY nodes.
+  This property is required if at least one of the ports are in
+  PHY mode i.e. OMAP_EHCI_PORT_MODE_PHY
+
+To specify the port mode, see
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/omap-usb-host.txt
+
+Example for OMAP4:
+
+usbhsehci: ehci@4a064c00 {
+	compatible = "ti,ehci-omap", "usb-ehci";
+	reg = <0x4a064c00 0x400>;
+	interrupts = <0 77 0x4>;
+};
+
+&usbhsehci {
+	phys = <&hsusb1_phy 0 &hsusb3_phy>;
+};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ehci-orion.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ehci-orion.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6bc09ec14c4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ehci-orion.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+* EHCI controller, Orion Marvell variants
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "marvell,orion-ehci"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: The EHCI interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+	ehci@50000 {
+		compatible = "marvell,orion-ehci";
+		reg = <0x50000 0x1000>;
+		interrupts = <19>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/exynos-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/exynos-usb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d967ba16de60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/exynos-usb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+Samsung Exynos SoC USB controller
+
+The USB devices interface with USB controllers on Exynos SOCs.
+The device node has following properties.
+
+EHCI
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: should be "samsung,exynos4210-ehci" for USB 2.0
+   EHCI controller in host mode.
+ - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+   region.
+ - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu.
+ - clocks: from common clock binding: handle to usb clock.
+ - clock-names: from common clock binding: Shall be "usbhost".
+
+Optional properties:
+ - samsung,vbus-gpio:  if present, specifies the GPIO that
+   needs to be pulled up for the bus to be powered.
+
+Example:
+
+	usb@12110000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-ehci";
+		reg = <0x12110000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <0 71 0>;
+		samsung,vbus-gpio = <&gpx2 6 1 3 3>;
+
+		clocks = <&clock 285>;
+		clock-names = "usbhost";
+	};
+
+OHCI
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: should be "samsung,exynos4210-ohci" for USB 2.0
+   OHCI companion controller in host mode.
+ - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+   region.
+ - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu.
+ - clocks: from common clock binding: handle to usb clock.
+ - clock-names: from common clock binding: Shall be "usbhost".
+
+Example:
+	usb@12120000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-ohci";
+		reg = <0x12120000 0x100>;
+		interrupts = <0 71 0>;
+
+		clocks = <&clock 285>;
+		clock-names = "usbhost";
+	};
+
+DWC3
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: should be "samsung,exynos5250-dwusb3" for USB 3.0 DWC3
+	       controller.
+ - #address-cells, #size-cells : should be '1' if the device has sub-nodes
+				 with 'reg' property.
+ - ranges: allows valid 1:1 translation between child's address space and
+	   parent's address space
+ - clocks: Clock IDs array as required by the controller.
+ - clock-names: names of clocks correseponding to IDs in the clock property
+
+Sub-nodes:
+The dwc3 core should be added as subnode to Exynos dwc3 glue.
+- dwc3 :
+   The binding details of dwc3 can be found in:
+   Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc3.txt
+
+Example:
+	usb@12000000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos5250-dwusb3";
+		clocks = <&clock 286>;
+		clock-names = "usbdrd30";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		ranges;
+
+		dwc3 {
+			compatible = "synopsys,dwc3";
+			reg = <0x12000000 0x10000>;
+			interrupts = <0 72 0>;
+			usb-phy = <&usb2_phy &usb3_phy>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/generic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/generic.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..477d5bb5e51c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/generic.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+Generic USB Properties
+
+Optional properties:
+ - maximum-speed: tells USB controllers we want to work up to a certain
+			speed. Valid arguments are "super-speed", "high-speed",
+			"full-speed" and "low-speed". In case this isn't passed
+			via DT, USB controllers should default to their maximum
+			HW capability.
+ - dr_mode: tells Dual-Role USB controllers that we want to work on a
+			particular mode. Valid arguments are "host",
+			"peripheral" and "otg". In case this attribute isn't
+			passed via DT, USB DRD controllers should default to
+			OTG.
+
+This is an attribute to a USB controller such as:
+
+dwc3@4a030000 {
+	compatible = "synopsys,dwc3";
+	reg = <0x4a030000 0xcfff>;
+	interrupts = <0 92 4>
+	usb-phy = <&usb2_phy>, <&usb3,phy>;
+	maximum-speed = "super-speed";
+	dr_mode = "otg";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/isp1301.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/isp1301.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5405d99d9aaa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/isp1301.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+* NXP ISP1301 USB transceiver
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "nxp,isp1301"
+- reg: I2C address of the ISP1301 device
+
+Optional properties of devices using ISP1301:
+- transceiver: phandle of isp1301 - this helps the ISP1301 driver to find the
+               ISP1301 instance associated with the respective USB driver
+
+Example:
+
+	isp1301: usb-transceiver@2c {
+		compatible = "nxp,isp1301";
+		reg = <0x2c>;
+	};
+
+	usbd@31020000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-udc";
+		reg = <0x31020000 0x300>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&mic>;
+		interrupts = <0x3d 0>, <0x3e 0>, <0x3c 0>, <0x3a 0>;
+		transceiver = <&isp1301>;
+		status = "okay";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/lpc32xx-udc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/lpc32xx-udc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..29f12a533f66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/lpc32xx-udc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+* NXP LPC32xx SoC USB Device Controller (UDC)
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Must be "nxp,lpc3220-udc"
+- reg: Physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: The USB interrupts:
+              * USB Device Low Priority Interrupt
+              * USB Device High Priority Interrupt
+              * USB Device DMA Interrupt
+              * External USB Transceiver Interrupt (OTG ATX)
+- transceiver: phandle of the associated ISP1301 device - this is necessary for
+               the UDC controller for connecting to the USB physical layer
+
+Example:
+
+	isp1301: usb-transceiver@2c {
+		compatible = "nxp,isp1301";
+		reg = <0x2c>;
+	};
+
+	usbd@31020000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,lpc3220-udc";
+		reg = <0x31020000 0x300>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&mic>;
+		interrupts = <0x3d 0>, <0x3e 0>, <0x3c 0>, <0x3a 0>;
+		transceiver = <&isp1301>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/mxs-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/mxs-phy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5835b27146ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/mxs-phy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+* Freescale MXS USB Phy Device
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx23-usbphy"
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length
+- interrupts: Should contain phy interrupt
+
+Example:
+usbphy1: usbphy@020c9000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx6q-usbphy", "fsl,imx23-usbphy";
+	reg = <0x020c9000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <0 44 0x04>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/nvidia,tegra20-ehci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/nvidia,tegra20-ehci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..df0933043a5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/nvidia,tegra20-ehci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+Tegra SOC USB controllers
+
+The device node for a USB controller that is part of a Tegra
+SOC is as described in the document "Open Firmware Recommended
+Practice : Universal Serial Bus" with the following modifications
+and additions :
+
+Required properties :
+ - compatible : Should be "nvidia,tegra20-ehci".
+ - nvidia,phy : phandle of the PHY that the controller is connected to.
+ - clocks : Contains a single entry which defines the USB controller's clock.
+
+Optional properties:
+ - nvidia,needs-double-reset : boolean is to be set for some of the Tegra20
+   USB ports, which need reset twice due to hardware issues.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/nvidia,tegra20-usb-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/nvidia,tegra20-usb-phy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ba797d3e6326
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/nvidia,tegra20-usb-phy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+Tegra SOC USB PHY
+
+The device node for Tegra SOC USB PHY:
+
+Required properties :
+ - compatible : Should be "nvidia,tegra<chip>-usb-phy".
+ - reg : Defines the following set of registers, in the order listed:
+   - The PHY's own register set.
+     Always present.
+   - The register set of the PHY containing the UTMI pad control registers.
+     Present if-and-only-if phy_type == utmi.
+ - phy_type : Should be one of "utmi", "ulpi" or "hsic".
+ - clocks : Defines the clocks listed in the clock-names property.
+ - clock-names : The following clock names must be present:
+   - reg: The clock needed to access the PHY's own registers. This is the
+     associated EHCI controller's clock. Always present.
+   - pll_u: PLL_U. Always present.
+   - timer: The timeout clock (clk_m). Present if phy_type == utmi.
+   - utmi-pads: The clock needed to access the UTMI pad control registers.
+     Present if phy_type == utmi.
+   - ulpi-link: The clock Tegra provides to the ULPI PHY (cdev2).
+     Present if phy_type == ulpi, and ULPI link mode is in use.
+
+Required properties for phy_type == ulpi:
+  - nvidia,phy-reset-gpio : The GPIO used to reset the PHY.
+
+Required PHY timing params for utmi phy, for all chips:
+  - nvidia,hssync-start-delay : Number of 480 Mhz clock cycles to wait before
+    start of sync launches RxActive
+  - nvidia,elastic-limit : Variable FIFO Depth of elastic input store
+  - nvidia,idle-wait-delay : Number of 480 Mhz clock cycles of idle to wait
+    before declare IDLE.
+  - nvidia,term-range-adj : Range adjusment on terminations
+  - Either one of the following for HS driver output control:
+    - nvidia,xcvr-setup : integer, uses the provided value.
+    - nvidia,xcvr-setup-use-fuses : boolean, indicates that the value is read
+      from the on-chip fuses
+    If both are provided, nvidia,xcvr-setup-use-fuses takes precedence.
+  - nvidia,xcvr-lsfslew : LS falling slew rate control.
+  - nvidia,xcvr-lsrslew :  LS rising slew rate control.
+
+Required PHY timing params for utmi phy, only on Tegra30 and above:
+  - nvidia,xcvr-hsslew : HS slew rate control.
+  - nvidia,hssquelch-level : HS squelch detector level.
+  - nvidia,hsdiscon-level : HS disconnect detector level.
+
+Optional properties:
+  - nvidia,has-legacy-mode : boolean indicates whether this controller can
+    operate in legacy mode (as APX 2500 / 2600). In legacy mode some
+    registers are accessed through the APB_MISC base address instead of
+    the USB controller.
+  - nvidia,is-wired : boolean. Indicates whether we can do certain kind of power
+    optimizations for the devices that are always connected. e.g. modem.
+  - dr_mode : dual role mode. Indicates the working mode for the PHY. Can be
+    "host", "peripheral", or "otg". Defaults to "host" if not defined.
+      host means this is a host controller
+      peripheral means it is device controller
+      otg means it can operate as either ("on the go")
+
+VBUS control (required for dr_mode == otg, optional for dr_mode == host):
+  - vbus-supply: regulator for VBUS
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ohci-nxp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ohci-nxp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..71e28c1017ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ohci-nxp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+* OHCI controller, NXP ohci-nxp variant
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "nxp,ohci-nxp"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: The OHCI interrupt
+- transceiver: phandle of the associated ISP1301 device - this is necessary for
+               the UDC controller for connecting to the USB physical layer
+
+Example (LPC32xx):
+
+	isp1301: usb-transceiver@2c {
+		compatible = "nxp,isp1301";
+		reg = <0x2c>;
+	};
+
+	ohci@31020000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,ohci-nxp";
+		reg = <0x31020000 0x300>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&mic>;
+		interrupts = <0x3b 0>;
+		transceiver = <&isp1301>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ohci-omap3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ohci-omap3.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..14ab42812a8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ohci-omap3.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+OMAP HS USB OHCI controller (OMAP3 and later)
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible: should be "ti,ohci-omap3"
+- reg: should contain one register range i.e. start and length
+- interrupts: description of the interrupt line
+
+Example for OMAP4:
+
+usbhsohci: ohci@4a064800 {
+	compatible = "ti,ohci-omap3", "usb-ohci";
+	reg = <0x4a064800 0x400>;
+	interrupts = <0 76 0x4>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9088ab09e200
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+OMAP GLUE AND OTHER OMAP SPECIFIC COMPONENTS
+
+OMAP MUSB GLUE
+ - compatible : Should be "ti,omap4-musb" or "ti,omap3-musb"
+ - ti,hwmods : must be "usb_otg_hs"
+ - ti,has-mailbox : to specify that omap uses an external mailbox
+   (in control module) to communicate with the musb core during device connect
+   and disconnect.
+ - multipoint : Should be "1" indicating the musb controller supports
+   multipoint. This is a MUSB configuration-specific setting.
+ - num-eps : Specifies the number of endpoints. This is also a
+   MUSB configuration-specific setting. Should be set to "16"
+ - ram-bits : Specifies the ram address size. Should be set to "12"
+ - interface-type : This is a board specific setting to describe the type of
+   interface between the controller and the phy. It should be "0" or "1"
+   specifying ULPI and UTMI respectively.
+ - mode : Should be "3" to represent OTG. "1" signifies HOST and "2"
+   represents PERIPHERAL.
+ - power : Should be "50". This signifies the controller can supply up to
+   100mA when operating in host mode.
+ - usb-phy : the phandle for the PHY device
+
+Optional properties:
+ - ctrl-module : phandle of the control module this glue uses to write to
+   mailbox
+
+SOC specific device node entry
+usb_otg_hs: usb_otg_hs@4a0ab000 {
+	compatible = "ti,omap4-musb";
+	ti,hwmods = "usb_otg_hs";
+	ti,has-mailbox;
+	multipoint = <1>;
+	num-eps = <16>;
+	ram-bits = <12>;
+	ctrl-module = <&omap_control_usb>;
+};
+
+Board specific device node entry
+&usb_otg_hs {
+	interface-type = <1>;
+	mode = <3>;
+	power = <50>;
+};
+
+OMAP DWC3 GLUE
+ - compatible : Should be "ti,dwc3"
+ - ti,hwmods : Should be "usb_otg_ss"
+ - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device.
+ - interrupts : The irq number of this device that is used to interrupt the
+   MPU
+ - #address-cells, #size-cells : Must be present if the device has sub-nodes
+ - utmi-mode : controls the source of UTMI/PIPE status for VBUS and OTG ID.
+   It should be set to "1" for HW mode and "2" for SW mode.
+ - ranges: the child address space are mapped 1:1 onto the parent address space
+
+Optional Properties:
+ - extcon : phandle for the extcon device omap dwc3 uses to detect
+   connect/disconnect events.
+ - vbus-supply : phandle to the regulator device tree node if needed.
+
+Sub-nodes:
+The dwc3 core should be added as subnode to omap dwc3 glue.
+- dwc3 :
+   The binding details of dwc3 can be found in:
+   Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc3.txt
+
+omap_dwc3 {
+	compatible = "ti,dwc3";
+	ti,hwmods = "usb_otg_ss";
+	reg = <0x4a020000 0x1ff>;
+	interrupts = <0 93 4>;
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	utmi-mode = <2>;
+	ranges;
+};
+
+OMAP CONTROL USB
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: Should be "ti,omap-control-usb"
+ - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device. It contains
+   the address of "control_dev_conf" and "otghs_control" or "phy_power_usb"
+   depending upon omap4 or omap5.
+ - reg-names: The names of the register addresses corresponding to the registers
+   filled in "reg".
+ - ti,type: This is used to differentiate whether the control module has
+   usb mailbox or usb3 phy power. omap4 has usb mailbox in control module to
+   notify events to the musb core and omap5 has usb3 phy power register to
+   power on usb3 phy. Should be "1" if it has mailbox and "2" if it has usb3
+   phy power.
+
+omap_control_usb: omap-control-usb@4a002300 {
+	compatible = "ti,omap-control-usb";
+	reg = <0x4a002300 0x4>,
+	      <0x4a00233c 0x4>;
+	reg-names = "control_dev_conf", "otghs_control";
+	ti,type = <1>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/platform-uhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/platform-uhci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a4fb0719d157
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/platform-uhci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+Generic Platform UHCI Controller
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "platform-uhci"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+- interrupts : UHCI controller interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+	uhci@d8007b00 {
+		compatible = "platform-uhci";
+		reg = <0xd8007b00 0x200>;
+		interrupts = <43>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/pxa-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/pxa-usb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..79729a948d5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/pxa-usb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+PXA USB controllers
+
+OHCI
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: Should be "marvell,pxa-ohci" for USB controllers
+   used in host mode.
+
+Optional properties:
+ - "marvell,enable-port1", "marvell,enable-port2", "marvell,enable-port3"
+   If present, enables the appropriate USB port of the controller.
+ - "marvell,port-mode" selects the mode of the ports:
+	1 = PMM_NPS_MODE
+	2 = PMM_GLOBAL_MODE
+	3 = PMM_PERPORT_MODE
+ - "marvell,power-sense-low" - power sense pin is low-active.
+ - "marvell,power-control-low" - power control pin is low-active.
+ - "marvell,no-oc-protection" - disable over-current protection.
+ - "marvell,oc-mode-perport" - enable per-port over-current protection.
+ - "marvell,power_on_delay" Power On to Power Good time - in ms.
+
+Example:
+
+	usb0: ohci@4c000000 {
+		compatible = "marvell,pxa-ohci", "usb-ohci";
+		reg = <0x4c000000 0x100000>;
+		interrupts = <18>;
+		marvell,enable-port1;
+		marvell,port-mode = <2>; /* PMM_GLOBAL_MODE */
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/samsung-hsotg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/samsung-hsotg.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b83d428a265e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/samsung-hsotg.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+Samsung High Speed USB OTG controller
+-----------------------------
+
+The Samsung HSOTG IP can be found on Samsung SoCs, from S3C6400 onwards.
+It gives functionality of OTG-compliant USB 2.0 host and device with
+support for USB 2.0 high-speed (480Mbps) and full-speed (12 Mbps)
+operation.
+
+Currently only device mode is supported.
+
+Binding details
+-----
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "samsung,s3c6400-hsotg" should be used for all currently
+    supported SoC,
+- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt controller to which the
+    interrupt signal of the HSOTG block is routed,
+- interrupts: specifier of interrupt signal of interrupt controller,
+    according to bindings of interrupt controller,
+- clocks: contains an array of clock specifiers:
+    - first entry: OTG clock
+- clock-names: contains array of clock names:
+    - first entry: must be "otg"
+- vusb_d-supply: phandle to voltage regulator of digital section,
+- vusb_a-supply: phandle to voltage regulator of analog section.
+
+Example
+-----
+
+	hsotg@12480000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,s3c6400-hsotg";
+		reg = <0x12480000 0x20000>;
+		interrupts = <0 71 0>;
+		clocks = <&clock 305>;
+		clock-names = "otg";
+		vusb_d-supply = <&vusb_reg>;
+		vusb_a-supply = <&vusbdac_reg>;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/samsung-usbphy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/samsung-usbphy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..33fd3543f3f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/samsung-usbphy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+SAMSUNG USB-PHY controllers
+
+** Samsung's usb 2.0 phy transceiver
+
+The Samsung's usb 2.0 phy transceiver is used for controlling
+usb 2.0 phy for s3c-hsotg as well as ehci-s5p and ohci-exynos
+usb controllers across Samsung SOCs.
+TODO: Adding the PHY binding with controller(s) according to the under
+development generic PHY driver.
+
+Required properties:
+
+Exynos4210:
+- compatible : should be "samsung,exynos4210-usb2phy"
+- reg : base physical address of the phy registers and length of memory mapped
+	region.
+- clocks: Clock IDs array as required by the controller.
+- clock-names: names of clock correseponding IDs clock property as requested
+	       by the controller driver.
+
+Exynos5250:
+- compatible : should be "samsung,exynos5250-usb2phy"
+- reg : base physical address of the phy registers and length of memory mapped
+	region.
+
+Optional properties:
+- #address-cells: should be '1' when usbphy node has a child node with 'reg'
+		  property.
+- #size-cells: should be '1' when usbphy node has a child node with 'reg'
+	       property.
+- ranges: allows valid translation between child's address space and parent's
+	  address space.
+
+- The child node 'usbphy-sys' to the node 'usbphy' is for the system controller
+  interface for usb-phy. It should provide the following information required by
+  usb-phy controller to control phy.
+  - reg : base physical address of PHY_CONTROL registers.
+	  The size of this register is the total sum of size of all PHY_CONTROL
+	  registers that the SoC has. For example, the size will be
+	  '0x4' in case we have only one PHY_CONTROL register (e.g.
+	  OTHERS register in S3C64XX or USB_PHY_CONTROL register in S5PV210)
+	  and, '0x8' in case we have two PHY_CONTROL registers (e.g.
+	  USBDEVICE_PHY_CONTROL and USBHOST_PHY_CONTROL registers in exynos4x).
+	  and so on.
+
+Example:
+ - Exynos4210
+
+	usbphy@125B0000 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-usb2phy";
+		reg = <0x125B0000 0x100>;
+		ranges;
+
+		clocks = <&clock 2>, <&clock 305>;
+		clock-names = "xusbxti", "otg";
+
+		usbphy-sys {
+			/* USB device and host PHY_CONTROL registers */
+			reg = <0x10020704 0x8>;
+		};
+	};
+
+
+** Samsung's usb 3.0 phy transceiver
+
+Starting exynso5250, Samsung's SoC have usb 3.0 phy transceiver
+which is used for controlling usb 3.0 phy for dwc3-exynos usb 3.0
+controllers across Samsung SOCs.
+
+Required properties:
+
+Exynos5250:
+- compatible : should be "samsung,exynos5250-usb3phy"
+- reg : base physical address of the phy registers and length of memory mapped
+	region.
+- clocks: Clock IDs array as required by the controller.
+- clock-names: names of clocks correseponding to IDs in the clock property
+	       as requested by the controller driver.
+
+Optional properties:
+- #address-cells: should be '1' when usbphy node has a child node with 'reg'
+		  property.
+- #size-cells: should be '1' when usbphy node has a child node with 'reg'
+	       property.
+- ranges: allows valid translation between child's address space and parent's
+	  address space.
+
+- The child node 'usbphy-sys' to the node 'usbphy' is for the system controller
+  interface for usb-phy. It should provide the following information required by
+  usb-phy controller to control phy.
+  - reg : base physical address of PHY_CONTROL registers.
+	  The size of this register is the total sum of size of all PHY_CONTROL
+	  registers that the SoC has. For example, the size will be
+	  '0x4' in case we have only one PHY_CONTROL register (e.g.
+	  OTHERS register in S3C64XX or USB_PHY_CONTROL register in S5PV210)
+	  and, '0x8' in case we have two PHY_CONTROL registers (e.g.
+	  USBDEVICE_PHY_CONTROL and USBHOST_PHY_CONTROL registers in exynos4x).
+	  and so on.
+
+Example:
+	usbphy@12100000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos5250-usb3phy";
+		reg = <0x12100000 0x100>;
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		ranges;
+
+		clocks = <&clock 1>, <&clock 286>;
+		clock-names = "ext_xtal", "usbdrd30";
+
+		usbphy-sys {
+			/* USB device and host PHY_CONTROL registers */
+			reg = <0x10040704 0x8>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/spear-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/spear-usb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f8a464a25653
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/spear-usb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+ST SPEAr SoC USB controllers:
+-----------------------------
+
+EHCI:
+-----
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "st,spear600-ehci"
+- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller
+  that services interrupts for this device
+- interrupts: Should contain the EHCI interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+	ehci@e1800000 {
+		compatible = "st,spear600-ehci", "usb-ehci";
+		reg = <0xe1800000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&vic1>;
+		interrupts = <27>;
+	};
+
+
+OHCI:
+-----
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "st,spear600-ohci"
+- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller
+  that services interrupts for this device
+- interrupts: Should contain the OHCI interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+	ohci@e1900000 {
+		compatible = "st,spear600-ohci", "usb-ohci";
+		reg = <0xe1800000 0x1000>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&vic1>;
+		interrupts = <26>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/tegra-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/tegra-usb.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 035d63d5646d..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/tegra-usb.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-Tegra SOC USB controllers
-
-The device node for a USB controller that is part of a Tegra
-SOC is as described in the document "Open Firmware Recommended
-Practice : Universal Serial Bus" with the following modifications
-and additions :
-
-Required properties :
- - compatible : Should be "nvidia,tegra20-ehci" for USB controllers
-   used in host mode.
- - phy_type : Should be one of "ulpi" or "utmi".
- - nvidia,vbus-gpio : If present, specifies a gpio that needs to be
-   activated for the bus to be powered.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/twlxxxx-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/twlxxxx-usb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0aee0ad3f035
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/twlxxxx-usb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+USB COMPARATOR OF TWL CHIPS
+
+TWL6030 USB COMPARATOR
+ - compatible : Should be "ti,twl6030-usb"
+ - interrupts : Two interrupt numbers to the cpu should be specified. First
+   interrupt number is the otg interrupt number that raises ID interrupts when
+   the controller has to act as host and the second interrupt number is the
+   usb interrupt number that raises VBUS interrupts when the controller has to
+   act as device
+ - usb-supply : phandle to the regulator device tree node. It should be vusb
+   if it is twl6030 or ldousb if it is twl6032 subclass.
+
+twl6030-usb {
+	compatible = "ti,twl6030-usb";
+	interrupts = < 4 10 >;
+};
+
+Board specific device node entry
+&twl6030-usb {
+	usb-supply = <&vusb>;
+};
+
+TWL4030 USB PHY AND COMPARATOR
+ - compatible : Should be "ti,twl4030-usb"
+ - interrupts : The interrupt numbers to the cpu should be specified. First
+   interrupt number is the otg interrupt number that raises ID interrupts
+   and VBUS interrupts. The second interrupt number is optional.
+ - <supply-name>-supply : phandle to the regulator device tree node.
+   <supply-name> should be vusb1v5, vusb1v8 and vusb3v1
+ - usb_mode : The mode used by the phy to connect to the controller. "1"
+   specifies "ULPI" mode and "2" specifies "CEA2011_3PIN" mode.
+
+twl4030-usb {
+	compatible = "ti,twl4030-usb";
+	interrupts = < 10 4 >;
+	usb1v5-supply = <&vusb1v5>;
+	usb1v8-supply = <&vusb1v8>;
+	usb3v1-supply = <&vusb3v1>;
+	usb_mode = <1>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-nop-xceiv.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-nop-xceiv.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d7e272671c7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-nop-xceiv.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+USB NOP PHY
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: should be usb-nop-xceiv
+
+Optional properties:
+- clocks: phandle to the PHY clock. Use as per Documentation/devicetree
+  /bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
+  This property is required if clock-frequency is specified.
+
+- clock-names: Should be "main_clk"
+
+- clock-frequency: the clock frequency (in Hz) that the PHY clock must
+  be configured to.
+
+- vcc-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides RESET to the PHY.
+
+- reset-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides power to the PHY.
+
+Example:
+
+	hsusb1_phy {
+		compatible = "usb-nop-xceiv";
+		clock-frequency = <19200000>;
+		clocks = <&osc 0>;
+		clock-names = "main_clk";
+		vcc-supply = <&hsusb1_vcc_regulator>;
+		reset-supply = <&hsusb1_reset_regulator>;
+	};
+
+hsusb1_phy is a NOP USB PHY device that gets its clock from an oscillator
+and expects that clock to be configured to 19.2MHz by the NOP PHY driver.
+hsusb1_vcc_regulator provides power to the PHY and hsusb1_reset_regulator
+controls RESET.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-phy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..61496f5cb095
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-phy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+USB PHY
+
+OMAP USB2 PHY
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: Should be "ti,omap-usb2"
+ - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device.
+
+Optional properties:
+ - ctrl-module : phandle of the control module used by PHY driver to power on
+   the PHY.
+
+This is usually a subnode of ocp2scp to which it is connected.
+
+usb2phy@4a0ad080 {
+	compatible = "ti,omap-usb2";
+	reg = <0x4a0ad080 0x58>;
+	ctrl-module = <&omap_control_usb>;
+};
+
+OMAP USB3 PHY
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: Should be "ti,omap-usb3"
+ - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device.
+ - reg-names: The names of the register addresses corresponding to the registers
+   filled in "reg".
+
+Optional properties:
+ - ctrl-module : phandle of the control module used by PHY driver to power on
+   the PHY.
+
+This is usually a subnode of ocp2scp to which it is connected.
+
+usb3phy@4a084400 {
+	compatible = "ti,omap-usb3";
+	reg = <0x4a084400 0x80>,
+	      <0x4a084800 0x64>,
+	      <0x4a084c00 0x40>;
+	reg-names = "phy_rx", "phy_tx", "pll_ctrl";
+	ctrl-module = <&omap_control_usb>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5752df0e17a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+USB xHCI controllers
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: should be "xhci-platform".
+  - reg: should contain address and length of the standard XHCI
+    register set for the device.
+  - interrupts: one XHCI interrupt should be described here.
+
+Example:
+	usb@f0931000 {
+		compatible = "xhci-platform";
+		reg = <0xf0931000 0x8c8>;
+		interrupts = <0x0 0x4e 0x0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb3503.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb3503.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a018da4a7ad7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb3503.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+SMSC USB3503 High-Speed Hub Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: Should be "smsc,usb3503" or "smsc,usb3503a".
+
+Optional properties:
+- reg: Specifies the i2c slave address, it is required and should be 0x08
+       if I2C is used.
+- connect-gpios: Should specify GPIO for connect.
+- disabled-ports: Should specify the ports unused.
+	'1' or '2' or '3' are availe for this property to describe the port
+	number. 1~3 property values are possible to be desribed.
+	Do not describe this property if all ports have to be enabled.
+- intn-gpios: Should specify GPIO for interrupt.
+- reset-gpios: Should specify GPIO for reset.
+- initial-mode: Should specify initial mode.
+                (1 for HUB mode, 2 for STANDBY mode)
+
+Examples:
+	usb3503@08 {
+		compatible = "smsc,usb3503";
+		reg = <0x08>;
+		connect-gpios = <&gpx3 0 1>;
+		disabled-ports = <2 3>;
+		intn-gpios = <&gpx3 4 1>;
+		reset-gpios = <&gpx3 5 1>;
+		initial-mode = <1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usbmisc-imx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usbmisc-imx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..97ce94e1a6cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usbmisc-imx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+* Freescale i.MX non-core registers
+
+Required properties:
+- #index-cells: Cells used to descibe usb controller index. Should be <1>
+- compatible: Should be one of below:
+	"fsl,imx6q-usbmisc" for imx6q
+- reg: Should contain registers location and length
+
+Examples:
+usbmisc@02184800 {
+	#index-cells = <1>;
+	compatible = "fsl,imx6q-usbmisc";
+	reg = <0x02184800 0x200>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ux500-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ux500-usb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..330d6ec15401
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ux500-usb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+Ux500 MUSB
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible : Should be "stericsson,db8500-musb"
+ - reg        : Offset and length of registers
+ - interrupts : Interrupt; mode, number and trigger
+ - dr_mode    : Dual-role; either host mode "host", peripheral mode "peripheral"
+                or both "otg"
+
+Optional properties:
+ - dmas       : A list of dma channels;
+                dma-controller, event-line, fixed-channel, flags
+ - dma-names  : An ordered list of channel names affiliated to the above
+
+Example:
+
+usb_per5@a03e0000 {
+	compatible = "stericsson,db8500-musb", "mentor,musb";
+	reg = <0xa03e0000 0x10000>;
+	interrupts = <0 23 0x4>;
+	interrupt-names = "mc";
+
+	dr_mode = "otg";
+
+	dmas = <&dma 38 0 0x2>, /* Logical - DevToMem */
+	       <&dma 38 0 0x0>, /* Logical - MemToDev */
+	       <&dma 37 0 0x2>, /* Logical - DevToMem */
+	       <&dma 37 0 0x0>, /* Logical - MemToDev */
+	       <&dma 36 0 0x2>, /* Logical - DevToMem */
+	       <&dma 36 0 0x0>, /* Logical - MemToDev */
+	       <&dma 19 0 0x2>, /* Logical - DevToMem */
+	       <&dma 19 0 0x0>, /* Logical - MemToDev */
+	       <&dma 18 0 0x2>, /* Logical - DevToMem */
+	       <&dma 18 0 0x0>, /* Logical - MemToDev */
+	       <&dma 17 0 0x2>, /* Logical - DevToMem */
+	       <&dma 17 0 0x0>, /* Logical - MemToDev */
+	       <&dma 16 0 0x2>, /* Logical - DevToMem */
+	       <&dma 16 0 0x0>, /* Logical - MemToDev */
+	       <&dma 39 0 0x2>, /* Logical - DevToMem */
+	       <&dma 39 0 0x0>; /* Logical - MemToDev */
+
+	dma-names = "iep_1_9",  "oep_1_9",
+		    "iep_2_10", "oep_2_10",
+		    "iep_3_11", "oep_3_11",
+		    "iep_4_12", "oep_4_12",
+		    "iep_5_13", "oep_5_13",
+		    "iep_6_14", "oep_6_14",
+		    "iep_7_15", "oep_7_15",
+		    "iep_8",    "oep_8";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/via,vt8500-ehci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/via,vt8500-ehci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..17b3ad1d97e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/via,vt8500-ehci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+VIA/Wondermedia VT8500 EHCI Controller
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "via,vt8500-ehci"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+- interrupts : ehci controller interrupt
+
+Example:
+
+	ehci@d8007900 {
+		compatible = "via,vt8500-ehci";
+		reg = <0xd8007900 0x200>;
+		interrupts = <43>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/vt8500-ehci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/vt8500-ehci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5fb8fd6e250c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/vt8500-ehci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+VIA VT8500 and Wondermedia WM8xxx SoC USB controllers.
+
+Required properties:
+ - compatible: Should be "via,vt8500-ehci" or "wm,prizm-ehci".
+ - reg: Address range of the ehci registers. size should be 0x200
+ - interrupts: Should contain the ehci interrupt.
+
+usb: ehci@D8007100 {
+	compatible = "wm,prizm-ehci", "usb-ehci";
+	reg = <0xD8007100 0x200>;
+	interrupts = <1>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt
index a20008ab319a..2956800f0240 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt
@@ -3,45 +3,73 @@ Device tree binding vendor prefix registry.  Keep list in alphabetical order.
 This isn't an exhaustive list, but you should add new prefixes to it before
 using them to avoid name-space collisions.
 
+ad	Avionic Design GmbH
 adi	Analog Devices, Inc.
+aeroflexgaisler	Aeroflex Gaisler AB
+ak	Asahi Kasei Corp.
+altr	Altera Corp.
 amcc	Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM, formally AMCC)
 apm	Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM)
 arm	ARM Ltd.
 atmel	Atmel Corporation
+avago	Avago Technologies
+bosch	Bosch Sensortec GmbH
+brcm	Broadcom Corporation
 cavium	Cavium, Inc.
 chrp	Common Hardware Reference Platform
+cirrus	Cirrus Logic, Inc.
 cortina	Cortina Systems, Inc.
 dallas	Maxim Integrated Products (formerly Dallas Semiconductor)
+davicom	DAVICOM Semiconductor, Inc.
 denx	Denx Software Engineering
+emmicro	EM Microelectronic
 epson	Seiko Epson Corp.
 est	ESTeem Wireless Modems
 fsl	Freescale Semiconductor
 GEFanuc	GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc.
 gef	GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc.
+hisilicon	Hisilicon Limited.
 hp	Hewlett Packard
 ibm	International Business Machines (IBM)
 idt	Integrated Device Technologies, Inc.
+img	Imagination Technologies Ltd.
 intercontrol	Inter Control Group
 linux	Linux-specific binding
+lsi	LSI Corp. (LSI Logic)
 marvell	Marvell Technology Group Ltd.
 maxim	Maxim Integrated Products
+microchip	Microchip Technology Inc.
 mosaixtech	Mosaix Technologies, Inc.
 national	National Semiconductor
 nintendo	Nintendo
 nvidia	NVIDIA
 nxp	NXP Semiconductors
+onnn	ON Semiconductor Corp.
 picochip	Picochip Ltd
-powervr	Imagination Technologies
+powervr	PowerVR (deprecated, use img)
+qca	Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.
 qcom	Qualcomm, Inc.
+ralink	Mediatek/Ralink Technology Corp.
 ramtron	Ramtron International
+realtek Realtek Semiconductor Corp.
+renesas	Renesas Electronics Corporation
 samsung	Samsung Semiconductor
 sbs	Smart Battery System
 schindler	Schindler
 sil	Silicon Image
+silabs	Silicon Laboratories
 simtek
 sirf	SiRF Technology, Inc.
+snps 	Synopsys, Inc.
 st	STMicroelectronics
+ste	ST-Ericsson
 stericsson	ST-Ericsson
+toumaz	Toumaz
 ti	Texas Instruments
+toshiba	Toshiba Corporation
+v3	V3 Semiconductor
+via	VIA Technologies, Inc.
 wlf	Wolfson Microelectronics
+wm	Wondermedia Technologies, Inc.
+winbond Winbond Electronics corp.
 xlnx	Xilinx
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/88pm860x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/88pm860x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..261df2799315
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/88pm860x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+88pm860x-backlight bindings
+
+Optional properties:
+  - marvell,88pm860x-iset: Current supplies on backlight device.
+  - marvell,88pm860x-pwm: PWM frequency on backlight device.
+
+Example:
+
+	backlights {
+		backlight-0 {
+			marvell,88pm860x-iset = <4>;
+			marvell,88pm860x-pwm = <3>;
+		};
+		backlight-2 {
+		};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/lp855x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/lp855x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1482103d288f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/lp855x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+lp855x bindings
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: "ti,lp8550", "ti,lp8551", "ti,lp8552", "ti,lp8553",
+                "ti,lp8556", "ti,lp8557"
+  - reg: I2C slave address (u8)
+  - dev-ctrl: Value of DEVICE CONTROL register (u8). It depends on the device.
+
+Optional properties:
+  - bl-name: Backlight device name (string)
+  - init-brt: Initial value of backlight brightness (u8)
+  - pwm-period: PWM period value. Set only PWM input mode used (u32)
+  - rom-addr: Register address of ROM area to be updated (u8)
+  - rom-val: Register value to be updated (u8)
+
+Example:
+
+	/* LP8556 */
+	backlight@2c {
+		compatible = "ti,lp8556";
+		reg = <0x2c>;
+
+		bl-name = "lcd-bl";
+		dev-ctrl = /bits/ 8 <0x85>;
+		init-brt = /bits/ 8 <0x10>;
+	};
+
+	/* LP8557 */
+	backlight@2c {
+		compatible = "ti,lp8557";
+		reg = <0x2c>;
+
+		dev-ctrl = /bits/ 8 <0x41>;
+		init-brt = /bits/ 8 <0x0a>;
+
+		/* 4V OV, 4 output LED string enabled */
+		rom_14h {
+			rom-addr = /bits/ 8 <0x14>;
+			rom-val = /bits/ 8 <0xcf>;
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/max8925-backlight.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/max8925-backlight.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b4cffdaa4137
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/max8925-backlight.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+88pm860x-backlight bindings
+
+Optional properties:
+  - maxim,max8925-dual-string: whether support dual string
+
+Example:
+
+	backlights {
+		maxim,max8925-dual-string = <0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1e4fc727f3b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+pwm-backlight bindings
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: "pwm-backlight"
+  - pwms: OF device-tree PWM specification (see PWM binding[0])
+  - brightness-levels: Array of distinct brightness levels. Typically these
+      are in the range from 0 to 255, but any range starting at 0 will do.
+      The actual brightness level (PWM duty cycle) will be interpolated
+      from these values. 0 means a 0% duty cycle (darkest/off), while the
+      last value in the array represents a 100% duty cycle (brightest).
+  - default-brightness-level: the default brightness level (index into the
+      array defined by the "brightness-levels" property)
+
+Optional properties:
+  - pwm-names: a list of names for the PWM devices specified in the
+               "pwms" property (see PWM binding[0])
+
+[0]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm.txt
+
+Example:
+
+	backlight {
+		compatible = "pwm-backlight";
+		pwms = <&pwm 0 5000000>;
+
+		brightness-levels = <0 4 8 16 32 64 128 255>;
+		default-brightness-level = <6>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/tps65217-backlight.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/tps65217-backlight.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5fb9279ac287
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/tps65217-backlight.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+TPS65217 family of regulators
+
+The TPS65217 chip contains a boost converter and current sinks which can be
+used to drive LEDs for use as backlights.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "ti,tps65217"
+- reg: I2C slave address
+- backlight: node for specifying WLED1 and WLED2 lines in TPS65217
+- isel: selection bit, valid values: 1 for ISEL1 (low-level) and 2 for ISEL2 (high-level)
+- fdim: PWM dimming frequency, valid values: 100, 200, 500, 1000
+- default-brightness: valid values: 0-100
+
+Each regulator is defined using the standard binding for regulators.
+
+Example:
+
+	tps: tps@24 {
+		reg = <0x24>;
+		compatible = "ti,tps65217";
+		backlight {
+			isel = <1>;  /* 1 - ISET1, 2 ISET2 */
+			fdim = <100>; /* TPS65217_BL_FDIM_100HZ */
+			default-brightness = <50>;
+		};
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/display-timing.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/display-timing.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e1d4a0b59612
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/display-timing.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+display-timing bindings
+=======================
+
+display-timings node
+--------------------
+
+required properties:
+ - none
+
+optional properties:
+ - native-mode: The native mode for the display, in case multiple modes are
+		provided. When omitted, assume the first node is the native.
+
+timing subnode
+--------------
+
+required properties:
+ - hactive, vactive: display resolution
+ - hfront-porch, hback-porch, hsync-len: horizontal display timing parameters
+   in pixels
+   vfront-porch, vback-porch, vsync-len: vertical display timing parameters in
+   lines
+ - clock-frequency: display clock in Hz
+
+optional properties:
+ - hsync-active: hsync pulse is active low/high/ignored
+ - vsync-active: vsync pulse is active low/high/ignored
+ - de-active: data-enable pulse is active low/high/ignored
+ - pixelclk-active: with
+			- active high = drive pixel data on rising edge/
+					sample data on falling edge
+			- active low  = drive pixel data on falling edge/
+					sample data on rising edge
+			- ignored     = ignored
+ - interlaced (bool): boolean to enable interlaced mode
+ - doublescan (bool): boolean to enable doublescan mode
+ - doubleclk (bool): boolean to enable doubleclock mode
+
+All the optional properties that are not bool follow the following logic:
+    <1>: high active
+    <0>: low active
+    omitted: not used on hardware
+
+There are different ways of describing the capabilities of a display. The
+devicetree representation corresponds to the one commonly found in datasheets
+for displays. If a display supports multiple signal timings, the native-mode
+can be specified.
+
+The parameters are defined as:
+
+  +----------+-------------------------------------+----------+-------+
+  |          |        ↑                            |          |       |
+  |          |        |vback_porch                 |          |       |
+  |          |        ↓                            |          |       |
+  +----------#######################################----------+-------+
+  |          #        ↑                            #          |       |
+  |          #        |                            #          |       |
+  |  hback   #        |                            #  hfront  | hsync |
+  |   porch  #        |       hactive              #  porch   |  len  |
+  |<-------->#<-------+--------------------------->#<-------->|<----->|
+  |          #        |                            #          |       |
+  |          #        |vactive                     #          |       |
+  |          #        |                            #          |       |
+  |          #        ↓                            #          |       |
+  +----------#######################################----------+-------+
+  |          |        ↑                            |          |       |
+  |          |        |vfront_porch                |          |       |
+  |          |        ↓                            |          |       |
+  +----------+-------------------------------------+----------+-------+
+  |          |        ↑                            |          |       |
+  |          |        |vsync_len                   |          |       |
+  |          |        ↓                            |          |       |
+  +----------+-------------------------------------+----------+-------+
+
+Example:
+
+	display-timings {
+		native-mode = <&timing0>;
+		timing0: 1080p24 {
+			/* 1920x1080p24 */
+			clock-frequency = <52000000>;
+			hactive = <1920>;
+			vactive = <1080>;
+			hfront-porch = <25>;
+			hback-porch = <25>;
+			hsync-len = <25>;
+			vback-porch = <2>;
+			vfront-porch = <2>;
+			vsync-len = <2>;
+			hsync-active = <1>;
+		};
+	};
+
+Every required property also supports the use of ranges, so the commonly used
+datasheet description with minimum, typical and maximum values can be used.
+
+Example:
+
+	timing1: timing {
+		/* 1920x1080p24 */
+		clock-frequency = <148500000>;
+		hactive = <1920>;
+		vactive = <1080>;
+		hsync-len = <0 44 60>;
+		hfront-porch = <80 88 95>;
+		hback-porch = <100 148 160>;
+		vfront-porch = <0 4 6>;
+		vback-porch = <0 36 50>;
+		vsync-len = <0 5 6>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_dp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_dp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..84f10c16cb38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_dp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+The Exynos display port interface should be configured based on
+the type of panel connected to it.
+
+We use two nodes:
+	-dp-controller node
+	-dptx-phy node(defined inside dp-controller node)
+
+For the DP-PHY initialization, we use the dptx-phy node.
+Required properties for dptx-phy:
+	-reg:
+		Base address of DP PHY register.
+	-samsung,enable-mask:
+		The bit-mask used to enable/disable DP PHY.
+
+For the Panel initialization, we read data from dp-controller node.
+Required properties for dp-controller:
+	-compatible:
+		should be "samsung,exynos5-dp".
+	-reg:
+		physical base address of the controller and length
+		of memory mapped region.
+	-interrupts:
+		interrupt combiner values.
+	-clocks:
+		from common clock binding: handle to dp clock.
+	-clock-names:
+		from common clock binding: Shall be "dp".
+	-interrupt-parent:
+		phandle to Interrupt combiner node.
+	-samsung,color-space:
+		input video data format.
+			COLOR_RGB = 0, COLOR_YCBCR422 = 1, COLOR_YCBCR444 = 2
+	-samsung,dynamic-range:
+		dynamic range for input video data.
+			VESA = 0, CEA = 1
+	-samsung,ycbcr-coeff:
+		YCbCr co-efficients for input video.
+			COLOR_YCBCR601 = 0, COLOR_YCBCR709 = 1
+	-samsung,color-depth:
+		number of bits per colour component.
+			COLOR_6 = 0, COLOR_8 = 1, COLOR_10 = 2, COLOR_12 = 3
+	-samsung,link-rate:
+		link rate supported by the panel.
+			LINK_RATE_1_62GBPS = 0x6, LINK_RATE_2_70GBPS = 0x0A
+	-samsung,lane-count:
+		number of lanes supported by the panel.
+			LANE_COUNT1 = 1, LANE_COUNT2 = 2, LANE_COUNT4 = 4
+
+Optional properties for dp-controller:
+	-interlaced:
+		interlace scan mode.
+			Progressive if defined, Interlaced if not defined
+	-vsync-active-high:
+		VSYNC polarity configuration.
+			High if defined, Low if not defined
+	-hsync-active-high:
+		HSYNC polarity configuration.
+			High if defined, Low if not defined
+
+Example:
+
+SOC specific portion:
+	dp-controller {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos5-dp";
+		reg = <0x145b0000 0x10000>;
+		interrupts = <10 3>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&combiner>;
+		clocks = <&clock 342>;
+		clock-names = "dp";
+
+		dptx-phy {
+			reg = <0x10040720>;
+			samsung,enable-mask = <1>;
+		};
+
+	};
+
+Board Specific portion:
+	dp-controller {
+		samsung,color-space = <0>;
+		samsung,dynamic-range = <0>;
+		samsung,ycbcr-coeff = <0>;
+		samsung,color-depth = <1>;
+		samsung,link-rate = <0x0a>;
+		samsung,lane-count = <4>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_hdmi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_hdmi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..323983be3c30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_hdmi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for drm hdmi driver
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: value should be one among the following:
+	1) "samsung,exynos5-hdmi" <DEPRECATED>
+	2) "samsung,exynos4210-hdmi"
+	3) "samsung,exynos4212-hdmi"
+- reg: physical base address of the hdmi and length of memory mapped
+	region.
+- interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu.
+- hpd-gpio: following information about the hotplug gpio pin.
+	a) phandle of the gpio controller node.
+	b) pin number within the gpio controller.
+	c) optional flags and pull up/down.
+
+Example:
+
+	hdmi {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4212-hdmi";
+		reg = <0x14530000 0x100000>;
+		interrupts = <0 95 0>;
+		hpd-gpio = <&gpx3 7 1>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_hdmiddc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_hdmiddc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..41eee971562b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_hdmiddc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for hdmiddc driver
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: value should be one of the following
+	1) "samsung,exynos5-hdmiddc" <DEPRECATED>
+	2) "samsung,exynos4210-hdmiddc"
+
+- reg: I2C address of the hdmiddc device.
+
+Example:
+
+	hdmiddc {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-hdmiddc";
+		reg = <0x50>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_hdmiphy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_hdmiphy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..162f641f7639
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_hdmiphy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for hdmiphy driver
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: value should be one of the following:
+	1) "samsung,exynos5-hdmiphy" <DEPRECATED>
+	2) "samsung,exynos4210-hdmiphy".
+	3) "samsung,exynos4212-hdmiphy".
+- reg: I2C address of the hdmiphy device.
+
+Example:
+
+	hdmiphy {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-hdmiphy";
+		reg = <0x38>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_mixer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_mixer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3334b0a8e343
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_mixer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for mixer driver
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: value should be one of the following:
+	1) "samsung,exynos5-mixer" <DEPRECATED>
+	2) "samsung,exynos4210-mixer"
+	3) "samsung,exynos5250-mixer"
+	4) "samsung,exynos5420-mixer"
+
+- reg: physical base address of the mixer and length of memory mapped
+	region.
+- interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu.
+
+Example:
+
+	mixer {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos5250-mixer";
+		reg = <0x14450000 0x10000>;
+		interrupts = <0 94 0>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/fsl,imx-fb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/fsl,imx-fb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..46da08db186a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/fsl,imx-fb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+Freescale imx21 Framebuffer
+
+This framebuffer driver supports devices imx1, imx21, imx25, and imx27.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "fsl,<chip>-fb", chip should be imx1 or imx21
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+- interrupts : One interrupt of the fb dev
+
+Required nodes:
+- display: Phandle to a display node as described in
+	Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/display-timing.txt
+	Additional, the display node has to define properties:
+	- bits-per-pixel: Bits per pixel
+	- fsl,pcr: LCDC PCR value
+
+Optional properties:
+- fsl,dmacr: DMA Control Register value. This is optional. By default, the
+	register is not modified as recommended by the datasheet.
+- fsl,lscr1: LCDC Sharp Configuration Register value.
+
+Example:
+
+	imxfb: fb@10021000 {
+		compatible = "fsl,imx21-fb";
+		interrupts = <61>;
+		reg = <0x10021000 0x1000>;
+		display = <&display0>;
+	};
+
+	...
+
+	display0: display0 {
+		model = "Primeview-PD050VL1";
+		native-mode = <&timing_disp0>;
+		bits-per-pixel = <16>;
+		fsl,pcr = <0xf0c88080>;	/* non-standard but required */
+		display-timings {
+			timing_disp0: 640x480 {
+				hactive = <640>;
+				vactive = <480>;
+				hback-porch = <112>;
+				hfront-porch = <36>;
+				hsync-len = <32>;
+				vback-porch = <33>;
+				vfront-porch = <33>;
+				vsync-len = <2>;
+				clock-frequency = <25000000>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/samsung-fimd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/samsung-fimd.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..778838a0336a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/samsung-fimd.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+Device-Tree bindings for Samsung SoC display controller (FIMD)
+
+FIMD (Fully Interactive Mobile Display) is the Display Controller for the
+Samsung series of SoCs which transfers the image data from a video memory
+buffer to an external LCD interface.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: value should be one of the following
+		"samsung,s3c2443-fimd"; /* for S3C24XX SoCs */
+		"samsung,s3c6400-fimd"; /* for S3C64XX SoCs */
+		"samsung,s5p6440-fimd"; /* for S5P64X0 SoCs */
+		"samsung,s5pc100-fimd"; /* for S5PC100 SoC  */
+		"samsung,s5pv210-fimd"; /* for S5PV210 SoC */
+		"samsung,exynos4210-fimd"; /* for Exynos4 SoCs */
+		"samsung,exynos5250-fimd"; /* for Exynos5 SoCs */
+
+- reg: physical base address and length of the FIMD registers set.
+
+- interrupt-parent: should be the phandle of the fimd controller's
+		parent interrupt controller.
+
+- interrupts: should contain a list of all FIMD IP block interrupts in the
+		 order: FIFO Level, VSYNC, LCD_SYSTEM. The interrupt specifier
+		 format depends on the interrupt controller used.
+
+- interrupt-names: should contain the interrupt names: "fifo", "vsync",
+	"lcd_sys", in the same order as they were listed in the interrupts
+        property.
+
+- pinctrl-0: pin control group to be used for this controller.
+
+- pinctrl-names: must contain a "default" entry.
+
+- clocks: must include clock specifiers corresponding to entries in the
+         clock-names property.
+
+- clock-names: list of clock names sorted in the same order as the clocks
+               property. Must contain "sclk_fimd" and "fimd".
+
+Optional Properties:
+- samsung,power-domain: a phandle to FIMD power domain node.
+
+Example:
+
+SoC specific DT entry:
+
+	fimd@11c00000 {
+		compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-fimd";
+		interrupt-parent = <&combiner>;
+		reg = <0x11c00000 0x20000>;
+		interrupt-names = "fifo", "vsync", "lcd_sys";
+		interrupts = <11 0>, <11 1>, <11 2>;
+		clocks = <&clock 140>, <&clock 283>;
+		clock-names = "sclk_fimd", "fimd";
+		samsung,power-domain = <&pd_lcd0>;
+		status = "disabled";
+	};
+
+Board specific DT entry:
+
+	fimd@11c00000 {
+		pinctrl-0 = <&lcd_clk &lcd_data24 &pwm1_out>;
+		pinctrl-names = "default";
+		status = "okay";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/simple-framebuffer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/simple-framebuffer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..70c26f3a5b9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/simple-framebuffer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+Simple Framebuffer
+
+A simple frame-buffer describes a raw memory region that may be rendered to,
+with the assumption that the display hardware has already been set up to scan
+out from that buffer.
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: "simple-framebuffer"
+- reg: Should contain the location and size of the framebuffer memory.
+- width: The width of the framebuffer in pixels.
+- height: The height of the framebuffer in pixels.
+- stride: The number of bytes in each line of the framebuffer.
+- format: The format of the framebuffer surface. Valid values are:
+  - r5g6b5 (16-bit pixels, d[15:11]=r, d[10:5]=g, d[4:0]=b).
+  - a8b8g8r8 (32-bit pixels, d[31:24]=a, d[23:16]=b, d[15:8]=g, d[7:0]=r).
+
+Example:
+
+	framebuffer {
+		compatible = "simple-framebuffer";
+		reg = <0x1d385000 (1600 * 1200 * 2)>;
+		width = <1600>;
+		height = <1200>;
+		stride = <(1600 * 2)>;
+		format = "r5g6b5";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/ssd1307fb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/ssd1307fb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7a125427ff4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/ssd1307fb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+* Solomon SSD1307 Framebuffer Driver
+
+Required properties:
+  - compatible: Should be "solomon,<chip>fb-<bus>". The only supported bus for
+    now is i2c, and the supported chips are ssd1306 and ssd1307.
+  - reg: Should contain address of the controller on the I2C bus. Most likely
+         0x3c or 0x3d
+  - pwm: Should contain the pwm to use according to the OF device tree PWM
+         specification [0]. Only required for the ssd1307.
+  - reset-gpios: Should contain the GPIO used to reset the OLED display
+  - solomon,height: Height in pixel of the screen driven by the controller
+  - solomon,width: Width in pixel of the screen driven by the controller
+  - solomon,page-offset: Offset of pages (band of 8 pixels) that the screen is
+    mapped to.
+
+Optional properties:
+  - reset-active-low: Is the reset gpio is active on physical low?
+
+[0]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm.txt
+
+Examples:
+ssd1307: oled@3c {
+        compatible = "solomon,ssd1307fb-i2c";
+        reg = <0x3c>;
+        pwms = <&pwm 4 3000>;
+        reset-gpios = <&gpio2 7>;
+        reset-active-low;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/via,vt8500-fb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/via,vt8500-fb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2871e218a0fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/via,vt8500-fb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+VIA VT8500 Framebuffer
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "via,vt8500-fb"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+- interrupts : framebuffer controller interrupt
+- bits-per-pixel : bit depth of framebuffer (16 or 32)
+
+Required subnodes:
+- display-timings: see display-timing.txt for information
+
+Example:
+
+	fb@d8050800 {
+		compatible = "via,vt8500-fb";
+		reg = <0xd800e400 0x400>;
+		interrupts = <12>;
+		bits-per-pixel = <16>;
+
+		display-timings {
+			native-mode = <&timing0>;
+			timing0: 800x480 {
+				clock-frequency = <0>; /* unused but required */
+				hactive = <800>;
+				vactive = <480>;
+				hfront-porch = <40>;
+				hback-porch = <88>;
+				hsync-len = <0>;
+				vback-porch = <32>;
+				vfront-porch = <11>;
+				vsync-len = <1>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/wm,prizm-ge-rops.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/wm,prizm-ge-rops.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a850fa011f02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/wm,prizm-ge-rops.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+VIA/Wondermedia Graphics Engine Controller
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "wm,prizm-ge-rops"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+
+Example:
+
+	ge_rops@d8050400 {
+		compatible = "wm,prizm-ge-rops";
+		reg = <0xd8050400 0x100>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/wm,wm8505-fb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/wm,wm8505-fb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0bcadb2840a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/wm,wm8505-fb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+Wondermedia WM8505 Framebuffer
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "wm,wm8505-fb"
+- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length)
+- bits-per-pixel : bit depth of framebuffer (16 or 32)
+
+Required subnodes:
+- display-timings: see display-timing.txt for information
+
+Example:
+
+	fb@d8051700 {
+		compatible = "wm,wm8505-fb";
+		reg = <0xd8051700 0x200>;
+		bits-per-pixel = <16>;
+
+		display-timings {
+			native-mode = <&timing0>;
+			timing0: 800x480 {
+				clock-frequency = <0>; /* unused but required */
+				hactive = <800>;
+				vactive = <480>;
+				hfront-porch = <40>;
+				hback-porch = <88>;
+				hsync-len = <0>;
+				vback-porch = <32>;
+				vfront-porch = <11>;
+				vsync-len = <1>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/fsl-imx-owire.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/fsl-imx-owire.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ecf42c07684d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/fsl-imx-owire.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+* Freescale i.MX One wire bus master controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : should be "fsl,imx21-owire"
+- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device
+
+Optional properties:
+- clocks : phandle of clock that supplies the module (required if platform
+		clock bindings use device tree)
+
+Example:
+
+- From imx53.dtsi:
+owire: owire@63fa4000 {
+	compatible = "fsl,imx53-owire", "fsl,imx21-owire";
+	reg = <0x63fa4000 0x4000>;
+	clocks = <&clks 159>;
+	status = "disabled";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/w1-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/w1-gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6e09c35d9f1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/w1-gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+w1-gpio devicetree bindings
+
+Required properties:
+
+ - compatible: "w1-gpio"
+ - gpios: one or two GPIO specs:
+		- the first one is used as data I/O pin
+		- the second one is optional. If specified, it is used as
+		  enable pin for an external pin pullup.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+ - linux,open-drain: if specified, the data pin is considered in
+		     open-drain mode.
+
+Examples:
+
+	onewire@0 {
+		compatible = "w1-gpio";
+		gpios = <&gpio 126 0>, <&gpio 105 0>;
+	};
+
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/atmel-at91rm9200-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/atmel-at91rm9200-wdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d4d86cf8f9eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/atmel-at91rm9200-wdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+Atmel AT91RM9200 System Timer Watchdog
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "atmel,at91sam9260-wdt".
+
+Example:
+	watchdog@fffffd00 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-wdt";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/atmel-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/atmel-wdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fcdd48f7dcff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/atmel-wdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+* Atmel Watchdog Timers
+
+** at91sam9-wdt
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "atmel,at91sam9260-wdt".
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+Optional properties:
+- timeout-sec: contains the watchdog timeout in seconds.
+
+Example:
+
+	watchdog@fffffd40 {
+		compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-wdt";
+		reg = <0xfffffd40 0x10>;
+		timeout-sec = <10>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/brcm,bcm2835-pm-wdog.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/brcm,bcm2835-pm-wdog.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f801d71de1cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/brcm,bcm2835-pm-wdog.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+BCM2835 Watchdog timer
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "brcm,bcm2835-pm-wdt"
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- timeout-sec   : Contains the watchdog timeout in seconds
+
+Example:
+
+watchdog {
+	compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-pm-wdt";
+	reg = <0x7e100000 0x28>;
+	timeout-sec = <10>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/davinci-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/davinci-wdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..75558ccd9a05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/davinci-wdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+DaVinci Watchdog Timer (WDT) Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible : Should be "ti,davinci-wdt"
+- reg : Should contain WDT registers location and length
+
+Examples:
+
+wdt: wdt@2320000 {
+	compatible = "ti,davinci-wdt";
+	reg = <0x02320000 0x80>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/marvel.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/marvel.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5dc8d30061ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/marvel.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+* Marvell Orion Watchdog Time
+
+Required Properties:
+
+- Compatibility : "marvell,orion-wdt"
+- reg		: Address of the timer registers
+
+Optional properties:
+
+- timeout-sec	: Contains the watchdog timeout in seconds
+
+Example:
+
+	wdt@20300 {
+		compatible = "marvell,orion-wdt";
+		reg = <0x20300 0x28>;
+		timeout-sec = <10>;
+		status = "okay";
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/omap-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/omap-wdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c227970671ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/omap-wdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+TI Watchdog Timer (WDT) Controller for OMAP
+
+Required properties:
+compatible:
+- "ti,omap3-wdt" for OMAP3
+- "ti,omap4-wdt" for OMAP4
+- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the WDT
+
+Examples:
+
+wdt2: wdt@4a314000 {
+	compatible = "ti,omap4-wdt", "ti,omap3-wdt";
+	ti,hwmods = "wd_timer2";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/pnx4008-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/pnx4008-wdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..556d06c17c92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/pnx4008-wdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+* NXP PNX watchdog timer
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "nxp,pnx4008-wdt"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+Optional properties:
+- timeout-sec: contains the watchdog timeout in seconds.
+
+Example:
+
+	watchdog@4003C000 {
+		compatible = "nxp,pnx4008-wdt";
+		reg = <0x4003C000 0x1000>;
+		timeout-sec = <10>;
+	};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/qca-ar7130-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/qca-ar7130-wdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7a89e5f85415
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/qca-ar7130-wdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+* Qualcomm Atheros AR7130 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Controller
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "qca,ar7130-wdt"
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+
+Example:
+
+wdt@18060008 {
+	compatible = "qca,ar9330-wdt", "qca,ar7130-wdt";
+	reg = <0x18060008 0x8>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/samsung-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/samsung-wdt.txt
index 79ead8263ae4..2aa486cc1ff6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/samsung-wdt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/samsung-wdt.txt
@@ -2,10 +2,13 @@
 
 The Samsung's Watchdog controller is used for resuming system operation
 after a preset amount of time during which the WDT reset event has not
-occured.
+occurred.
 
 Required properties:
 - compatible : should be "samsung,s3c2410-wdt"
 - reg : base physical address of the controller and length of memory mapped
 	region.
 - interrupts : interrupt number to the cpu.
+
+Optional properties:
+- timeout-sec : contains the watchdog timeout in seconds.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/stericsson-coh901327.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/stericsson-coh901327.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8ffb88e39e76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/stericsson-coh901327.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+ST-Ericsson COH 901 327 Watchdog timer
+
+Required properties:
+- compatible: must be "stericsson,coh901327".
+- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped
+  region.
+- interrupts: the interrupt used for the watchdog timeout warning.
+
+Optional properties:
+- timeout-sec: contains the watchdog timeout in seconds.
+
+Example:
+
+watchdog: watchdog@c0012000 {
+	compatible = "stericsson,coh901327";
+	reg = <0xc0012000 0x1000>;
+	interrupts = <3>;
+	timeout-sec = <60>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sunxi-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sunxi-wdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e39cb266c8f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sunxi-wdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+Allwinner SoCs Watchdog timer
+
+Required properties:
+
+- compatible : should be "allwinner,<soc-family>-wdt", the currently supported
+  SoC families being sun4i and sun6i
+- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers.
+
+Example:
+
+wdt: watchdog@01c20c90 {
+	compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-wdt";
+	reg = <0x01c20c90 0x10>;
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/twl4030-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/twl4030-wdt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..80a37193c0b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/twl4030-wdt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+Device tree bindings for twl4030-wdt driver (TWL4030 watchdog)
+
+Required properties:
+	compatible = "ti,twl4030-wdt";
+
+Example:
+
+watchdog {
+	compatible = "ti,twl4030-wdt";
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt
index da0bfeb4253d..b2fb2f5e1922 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt
@@ -551,12 +551,13 @@ Here is an example of a simple device-tree. In this example, an "o"
 designates a node followed by the node unit name. Properties are
 presented with their name followed by their content. "content"
 represents an ASCII string (zero terminated) value, while <content>
-represents a 32-bit hexadecimal value. The various nodes in this
-example will be discussed in a later chapter. At this point, it is
-only meant to give you a idea of what a device-tree looks like. I have
-purposefully kept the "name" and "linux,phandle" properties which
-aren't necessary in order to give you a better idea of what the tree
-looks like in practice.
+represents a 32-bit value, specified in decimal or hexadecimal (the
+latter prefixed 0x). The various nodes in this example will be
+discussed in a later chapter. At this point, it is only meant to give
+you a idea of what a device-tree looks like. I have purposefully kept
+the "name" and "linux,phandle" properties which aren't necessary in
+order to give you a better idea of what the tree looks like in
+practice.
 
   / o device-tree
       |- name = "device-tree"
@@ -576,14 +577,14 @@ looks like in practice.
       |   |- name = "PowerPC,970"
       |   |- device_type = "cpu"
       |   |- reg = <0>
-      |   |- clock-frequency = <5f5e1000>
+      |   |- clock-frequency = <0x5f5e1000>
       |   |- 64-bit
       |   |- linux,phandle = <2>
       |
       o memory@0
       | |- name = "memory"
       | |- device_type = "memory"
-      | |- reg = <00000000 00000000 00000000 20000000>
+      | |- reg = <0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x20000000>
       | |- linux,phandle = <3>
       |
       o chosen
@@ -1010,8 +1011,8 @@ compatibility.
 		#size-cells = <1>;
 		#interrupt-cells = <2>;
 		device_type = "soc";
-		ranges = <00000000 e0000000 00100000>
-		reg = <e0000000 00003000>;
+		ranges = <0x00000000 0xe0000000 0x00100000>
+		reg = <0xe0000000 0x00003000>;
 		bus-frequency = <0>;
 	}
 
@@ -1085,16 +1086,16 @@ supported currently at the toplevel.
                                  * terminated string
 				 */
 
-  property2 = <1234abcd>;	/* define a property containing a
+  property2 = <0x1234abcd>;	/* define a property containing a
                                  * numerical 32-bit value (hexadecimal)
 				 */
 
-  property3 = <12345678 12345678 deadbeef>;
+  property3 = <0x12345678 0x12345678 0xdeadbeef>;
                                 /* define a property containing 3
                                  * numerical 32-bit values (cells) in
                                  * hexadecimal
 				 */
-  property4 = [0a 0b 0c 0d de ea ad be ef];
+  property4 = [0x0a 0x0b 0x0c 0x0d 0xde 0xea 0xad 0xbe 0xef];
                                 /* define a property whose content is
                                  * an arbitrary array of bytes
                                  */
@@ -1227,7 +1228,7 @@ hierarchy and routing of interrupts in the hardware.
 The interrupt tree model is fully described in the
 document "Open Firmware Recommended Practice: Interrupt
 Mapping Version 0.9".  The document is available at:
-<http://playground.sun.com/1275/practice>.
+<http://www.openfirmware.org/ofwg/practice/>
 
 1) interrupts property
 ----------------------
@@ -1350,10 +1351,10 @@ Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540
 			model = "TSEC";
 			compatible = "gianfar", "simple-bus";
 			reg = <0x24000 0x1000>;
-			local-mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 00 ];
-			interrupts = <29 2 30 2 34 2>;
+			local-mac-address = [ 0x00 0xE0 0x0C 0x00 0x73 0x00 ];
+			interrupts = <0x29 2 0x30 2 0x34 2>;
 			phy-handle = <&phy0>;
-			sleep = <&pmc 00000080>;
+			sleep = <&pmc 0x00000080>;
 			ranges;
 
 			mdio@24520 {
@@ -1385,10 +1386,10 @@ Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540
 			model = "TSEC";
 			compatible = "gianfar";
 			reg = <0x25000 0x1000>;
-			local-mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 01 ];
-			interrupts = <13 2 14 2 18 2>;
+			local-mac-address = [ 0x00 0xE0 0x0C 0x00 0x73 0x01 ];
+			interrupts = <0x13 2 0x14 2 0x18 2>;
 			phy-handle = <&phy1>;
-			sleep = <&pmc 00000040>;
+			sleep = <&pmc 0x00000040>;
 		};
 
 		ethernet@26000 {
@@ -1396,17 +1397,17 @@ Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540
 			model = "FEC";
 			compatible = "gianfar";
 			reg = <0x26000 0x1000>;
-			local-mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 02 ];
-			interrupts = <41 2>;
+			local-mac-address = [ 0x00 0xE0 0x0C 0x00 0x73 0x02 ];
+			interrupts = <0x41 2>;
 			phy-handle = <&phy3>;
-			sleep = <&pmc 00000020>;
+			sleep = <&pmc 0x00000020>;
 		};
 
 		serial@4500 {
 			#address-cells = <1>;
 			#size-cells = <1>;
 			compatible = "fsl,mpc8540-duart", "simple-bus";
-			sleep = <&pmc 00000002>;
+			sleep = <&pmc 0x00000002>;
 			ranges;
 
 			serial@4500 {
@@ -1414,7 +1415,7 @@ Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540
 				compatible = "ns16550";
 				reg = <0x4500 0x100>;
 				clock-frequency = <0>;
-				interrupts = <42 2>;
+				interrupts = <0x42 2>;
 			};
 
 			serial@4600 {
@@ -1422,7 +1423,7 @@ Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540
 				compatible = "ns16550";
 				reg = <0x4600 0x100>;
 				clock-frequency = <0>;
-				interrupts = <42 2>;
+				interrupts = <0x42 2>;
 			};
 		};
 
@@ -1436,11 +1437,11 @@ Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540
 		};
 
 		i2c@3000 {
-			interrupts = <43 2>;
+			interrupts = <0x43 2>;
 			reg = <0x3000 0x100>;
 			compatible  = "fsl-i2c";
 			dfsrr;
-			sleep = <&pmc 00000004>;
+			sleep = <&pmc 0x00000004>;
 		};
 
 		pmc: power@e0070 {
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/usage-model.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/usage-model.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2b6b3d3f0388
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/usage-model.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,415 @@
+Linux and the Device Tree
+-------------------------
+The Linux usage model for device tree data
+
+Author: Grant Likely <grant.likely@secretlab.ca>
+
+This article describes how Linux uses the device tree.  An overview of
+the device tree data format can be found on the device tree usage page
+at devicetree.org[1].
+
+[1] http://devicetree.org/Device_Tree_Usage
+
+The "Open Firmware Device Tree", or simply Device Tree (DT), is a data
+structure and language for describing hardware.  More specifically, it
+is a description of hardware that is readable by an operating system
+so that the operating system doesn't need to hard code details of the
+machine.
+
+Structurally, the DT is a tree, or acyclic graph with named nodes, and
+nodes may have an arbitrary number of named properties encapsulating
+arbitrary data.  A mechanism also exists to create arbitrary
+links from one node to another outside of the natural tree structure.
+
+Conceptually, a common set of usage conventions, called 'bindings',
+is defined for how data should appear in the tree to describe typical
+hardware characteristics including data busses, interrupt lines, GPIO
+connections, and peripheral devices.
+
+As much as possible, hardware is described using existing bindings to
+maximize use of existing support code, but since property and node
+names are simply text strings, it is easy to extend existing bindings
+or create new ones by defining new nodes and properties.  Be wary,
+however, of creating a new binding without first doing some homework
+about what already exists.  There are currently two different,
+incompatible, bindings for i2c busses that came about because the new
+binding was created without first investigating how i2c devices were
+already being enumerated in existing systems.
+
+1. History
+----------
+The DT was originally created by Open Firmware as part of the
+communication method for passing data from Open Firmware to a client
+program (like to an operating system).  An operating system used the
+Device Tree to discover the topology of the hardware at runtime, and
+thereby support a majority of available hardware without hard coded
+information (assuming drivers were available for all devices).
+
+Since Open Firmware is commonly used on PowerPC and SPARC platforms,
+the Linux support for those architectures has for a long time used the
+Device Tree.
+
+In 2005, when PowerPC Linux began a major cleanup and to merge 32-bit
+and 64-bit support, the decision was made to require DT support on all
+powerpc platforms, regardless of whether or not they used Open
+Firmware.  To do this, a DT representation called the Flattened Device
+Tree (FDT) was created which could be passed to the kernel as a binary
+blob without requiring a real Open Firmware implementation.  U-Boot,
+kexec, and other bootloaders were modified to support both passing a
+Device Tree Binary (dtb) and to modify a dtb at boot time.  DT was
+also added to the PowerPC boot wrapper (arch/powerpc/boot/*) so that
+a dtb could be wrapped up with the kernel image to support booting
+existing non-DT aware firmware.
+
+Some time later, FDT infrastructure was generalized to be usable by
+all architectures.  At the time of this writing, 6 mainlined
+architectures (arm, microblaze, mips, powerpc, sparc, and x86) and 1
+out of mainline (nios) have some level of DT support.
+
+2. Data Model
+-------------
+If you haven't already read the Device Tree Usage[1] page,
+then go read it now.  It's okay, I'll wait....
+
+2.1 High Level View
+-------------------
+The most important thing to understand is that the DT is simply a data
+structure that describes the hardware.  There is nothing magical about
+it, and it doesn't magically make all hardware configuration problems
+go away.  What it does do is provide a language for decoupling the
+hardware configuration from the board and device driver support in the
+Linux kernel (or any other operating system for that matter).  Using
+it allows board and device support to become data driven; to make
+setup decisions based on data passed into the kernel instead of on
+per-machine hard coded selections.
+
+Ideally, data driven platform setup should result in less code
+duplication and make it easier to support a wide range of hardware
+with a single kernel image.
+
+Linux uses DT data for three major purposes:
+1) platform identification,
+2) runtime configuration, and
+3) device population.
+
+2.2 Platform Identification
+---------------------------
+First and foremost, the kernel will use data in the DT to identify the
+specific machine.  In a perfect world, the specific platform shouldn't
+matter to the kernel because all platform details would be described
+perfectly by the device tree in a consistent and reliable manner.
+Hardware is not perfect though, and so the kernel must identify the
+machine during early boot so that it has the opportunity to run
+machine-specific fixups.
+
+In the majority of cases, the machine identity is irrelevant, and the
+kernel will instead select setup code based on the machine's core
+CPU or SoC.  On ARM for example, setup_arch() in
+arch/arm/kernel/setup.c will call setup_machine_fdt() in
+arch/arm/kernel/devtree.c which searches through the machine_desc
+table and selects the machine_desc which best matches the device tree
+data.  It determines the best match by looking at the 'compatible'
+property in the root device tree node, and comparing it with the
+dt_compat list in struct machine_desc (which is defined in
+arch/arm/include/asm/mach/arch.h if you're curious).
+
+The 'compatible' property contains a sorted list of strings starting
+with the exact name of the machine, followed by an optional list of
+boards it is compatible with sorted from most compatible to least.  For
+example, the root compatible properties for the TI BeagleBoard and its
+successor, the BeagleBoard xM board might look like, respectively:
+
+	compatible = "ti,omap3-beagleboard", "ti,omap3450", "ti,omap3";
+	compatible = "ti,omap3-beagleboard-xm", "ti,omap3450", "ti,omap3";
+
+Where "ti,omap3-beagleboard-xm" specifies the exact model, it also
+claims that it compatible with the OMAP 3450 SoC, and the omap3 family
+of SoCs in general.  You'll notice that the list is sorted from most
+specific (exact board) to least specific (SoC family).
+
+Astute readers might point out that the Beagle xM could also claim
+compatibility with the original Beagle board.  However, one should be
+cautioned about doing so at the board level since there is typically a
+high level of change from one board to another, even within the same
+product line, and it is hard to nail down exactly what is meant when one
+board claims to be compatible with another.  For the top level, it is
+better to err on the side of caution and not claim one board is
+compatible with another.  The notable exception would be when one
+board is a carrier for another, such as a CPU module attached to a
+carrier board.
+
+One more note on compatible values.  Any string used in a compatible
+property must be documented as to what it indicates.  Add
+documentation for compatible strings in Documentation/devicetree/bindings.
+
+Again on ARM, for each machine_desc, the kernel looks to see if
+any of the dt_compat list entries appear in the compatible property.
+If one does, then that machine_desc is a candidate for driving the
+machine.  After searching the entire table of machine_descs,
+setup_machine_fdt() returns the 'most compatible' machine_desc based
+on which entry in the compatible property each machine_desc matches
+against.  If no matching machine_desc is found, then it returns NULL.
+
+The reasoning behind this scheme is the observation that in the majority
+of cases, a single machine_desc can support a large number of boards
+if they all use the same SoC, or same family of SoCs.  However,
+invariably there will be some exceptions where a specific board will
+require special setup code that is not useful in the generic case.
+Special cases could be handled by explicitly checking for the
+troublesome board(s) in generic setup code, but doing so very quickly
+becomes ugly and/or unmaintainable if it is more than just a couple of
+cases.
+
+Instead, the compatible list allows a generic machine_desc to provide
+support for a wide common set of boards by specifying "less
+compatible" values in the dt_compat list.  In the example above,
+generic board support can claim compatibility with "ti,omap3" or
+"ti,omap3450".  If a bug was discovered on the original beagleboard
+that required special workaround code during early boot, then a new
+machine_desc could be added which implements the workarounds and only
+matches on "ti,omap3-beagleboard".
+
+PowerPC uses a slightly different scheme where it calls the .probe()
+hook from each machine_desc, and the first one returning TRUE is used.
+However, this approach does not take into account the priority of the
+compatible list, and probably should be avoided for new architecture
+support.
+
+2.3 Runtime configuration
+-------------------------
+In most cases, a DT will be the sole method of communicating data from
+firmware to the kernel, so also gets used to pass in runtime and
+configuration data like the kernel parameters string and the location
+of an initrd image.
+
+Most of this data is contained in the /chosen node, and when booting
+Linux it will look something like this:
+
+	chosen {
+		bootargs = "console=ttyS0,115200 loglevel=8";
+		initrd-start = <0xc8000000>;
+		initrd-end = <0xc8200000>;
+	};
+
+The bootargs property contains the kernel arguments, and the initrd-*
+properties define the address and size of an initrd blob.  Note that
+initrd-end is the first address after the initrd image, so this doesn't
+match the usual semantic of struct resource.  The chosen node may also
+optionally contain an arbitrary number of additional properties for
+platform-specific configuration data.
+
+During early boot, the architecture setup code calls of_scan_flat_dt()
+several times with different helper callbacks to parse device tree
+data before paging is setup.  The of_scan_flat_dt() code scans through
+the device tree and uses the helpers to extract information required
+during early boot.  Typically the early_init_dt_scan_chosen() helper
+is used to parse the chosen node including kernel parameters,
+early_init_dt_scan_root() to initialize the DT address space model,
+and early_init_dt_scan_memory() to determine the size and
+location of usable RAM.
+
+On ARM, the function setup_machine_fdt() is responsible for early
+scanning of the device tree after selecting the correct machine_desc
+that supports the board.
+
+2.4 Device population
+---------------------
+After the board has been identified, and after the early configuration data
+has been parsed, then kernel initialization can proceed in the normal
+way.  At some point in this process, unflatten_device_tree() is called
+to convert the data into a more efficient runtime representation.
+This is also when machine-specific setup hooks will get called, like
+the machine_desc .init_early(), .init_irq() and .init_machine() hooks
+on ARM.  The remainder of this section uses examples from the ARM
+implementation, but all architectures will do pretty much the same
+thing when using a DT.
+
+As can be guessed by the names, .init_early() is used for any machine-
+specific setup that needs to be executed early in the boot process,
+and .init_irq() is used to set up interrupt handling.  Using a DT
+doesn't materially change the behaviour of either of these functions.
+If a DT is provided, then both .init_early() and .init_irq() are able
+to call any of the DT query functions (of_* in include/linux/of*.h) to
+get additional data about the platform.
+
+The most interesting hook in the DT context is .init_machine() which
+is primarily responsible for populating the Linux device model with
+data about the platform.  Historically this has been implemented on
+embedded platforms by defining a set of static clock structures,
+platform_devices, and other data in the board support .c file, and
+registering it en-masse in .init_machine().  When DT is used, then
+instead of hard coding static devices for each platform, the list of
+devices can be obtained by parsing the DT, and allocating device
+structures dynamically.
+
+The simplest case is when .init_machine() is only responsible for
+registering a block of platform_devices.  A platform_device is a concept
+used by Linux for memory or I/O mapped devices which cannot be detected
+by hardware, and for 'composite' or 'virtual' devices (more on those
+later).  While there is no 'platform device' terminology for the DT,
+platform devices roughly correspond to device nodes at the root of the
+tree and children of simple memory mapped bus nodes.
+
+About now is a good time to lay out an example.  Here is part of the
+device tree for the NVIDIA Tegra board.
+
+/{
+	compatible = "nvidia,harmony", "nvidia,tegra20";
+	#address-cells = <1>;
+	#size-cells = <1>;
+	interrupt-parent = <&intc>;
+
+	chosen { };
+	aliases { };
+
+	memory {
+		device_type = "memory";
+		reg = <0x00000000 0x40000000>;
+	};
+
+	soc {
+		compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-soc", "simple-bus";
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <1>;
+		ranges;
+
+		intc: interrupt-controller@50041000 {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-gic";
+			interrupt-controller;
+			#interrupt-cells = <1>;
+			reg = <0x50041000 0x1000>, < 0x50040100 0x0100 >;
+		};
+
+		serial@70006300 {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-uart";
+			reg = <0x70006300 0x100>;
+			interrupts = <122>;
+		};
+
+		i2s1: i2s@70002800 {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-i2s";
+			reg = <0x70002800 0x100>;
+			interrupts = <77>;
+			codec = <&wm8903>;
+		};
+
+		i2c@7000c000 {
+			compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-i2c";
+			#address-cells = <1>;
+			#size-cells = <0>;
+			reg = <0x7000c000 0x100>;
+			interrupts = <70>;
+
+			wm8903: codec@1a {
+				compatible = "wlf,wm8903";
+				reg = <0x1a>;
+				interrupts = <347>;
+			};
+		};
+	};
+
+	sound {
+		compatible = "nvidia,harmony-sound";
+		i2s-controller = <&i2s1>;
+		i2s-codec = <&wm8903>;
+	};
+};
+
+At .init_machine() time, Tegra board support code will need to look at
+this DT and decide which nodes to create platform_devices for.
+However, looking at the tree, it is not immediately obvious what kind
+of device each node represents, or even if a node represents a device
+at all.  The /chosen, /aliases, and /memory nodes are informational
+nodes that don't describe devices (although arguably memory could be
+considered a device).  The children of the /soc node are memory mapped
+devices, but the codec@1a is an i2c device, and the sound node
+represents not a device, but rather how other devices are connected
+together to create the audio subsystem.  I know what each device is
+because I'm familiar with the board design, but how does the kernel
+know what to do with each node?
+
+The trick is that the kernel starts at the root of the tree and looks
+for nodes that have a 'compatible' property.  First, it is generally
+assumed that any node with a 'compatible' property represents a device
+of some kind, and second, it can be assumed that any node at the root
+of the tree is either directly attached to the processor bus, or is a
+miscellaneous system device that cannot be described any other way.
+For each of these nodes, Linux allocates and registers a
+platform_device, which in turn may get bound to a platform_driver.
+
+Why is using a platform_device for these nodes a safe assumption?
+Well, for the way that Linux models devices, just about all bus_types
+assume that its devices are children of a bus controller.  For
+example, each i2c_client is a child of an i2c_master.  Each spi_device
+is a child of an SPI bus.  Similarly for USB, PCI, MDIO, etc.  The
+same hierarchy is also found in the DT, where I2C device nodes only
+ever appear as children of an I2C bus node.  Ditto for SPI, MDIO, USB,
+etc.  The only devices which do not require a specific type of parent
+device are platform_devices (and amba_devices, but more on that
+later), which will happily live at the base of the Linux /sys/devices
+tree.  Therefore, if a DT node is at the root of the tree, then it
+really probably is best registered as a platform_device.
+
+Linux board support code calls of_platform_populate(NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL)
+to kick off discovery of devices at the root of the tree.  The
+parameters are all NULL because when starting from the root of the
+tree, there is no need to provide a starting node (the first NULL), a
+parent struct device (the last NULL), and we're not using a match
+table (yet).  For a board that only needs to register devices,
+.init_machine() can be completely empty except for the
+of_platform_populate() call.
+
+In the Tegra example, this accounts for the /soc and /sound nodes, but
+what about the children of the SoC node?  Shouldn't they be registered
+as platform devices too?  For Linux DT support, the generic behaviour
+is for child devices to be registered by the parent's device driver at
+driver .probe() time.  So, an i2c bus device driver will register a
+i2c_client for each child node, an SPI bus driver will register
+its spi_device children, and similarly for other bus_types.
+According to that model, a driver could be written that binds to the
+SoC node and simply registers platform_devices for each of its
+children.  The board support code would allocate and register an SoC
+device, a (theoretical) SoC device driver could bind to the SoC device,
+and register platform_devices for /soc/interrupt-controller, /soc/serial,
+/soc/i2s, and /soc/i2c in its .probe() hook.  Easy, right?
+
+Actually, it turns out that registering children of some
+platform_devices as more platform_devices is a common pattern, and the
+device tree support code reflects that and makes the above example
+simpler.  The second argument to of_platform_populate() is an
+of_device_id table, and any node that matches an entry in that table
+will also get its child nodes registered.  In the Tegra case, the code
+can look something like this:
+
+static void __init harmony_init_machine(void)
+{
+	/* ... */
+	of_platform_populate(NULL, of_default_bus_match_table, NULL, NULL);
+}
+
+"simple-bus" is defined in the ePAPR 1.0 specification as a property
+meaning a simple memory mapped bus, so the of_platform_populate() code
+could be written to just assume simple-bus compatible nodes will
+always be traversed.  However, we pass it in as an argument so that
+board support code can always override the default behaviour.
+
+[Need to add discussion of adding i2c/spi/etc child devices]
+
+Appendix A: AMBA devices
+------------------------
+
+ARM Primecells are a certain kind of device attached to the ARM AMBA
+bus which include some support for hardware detection and power
+management.  In Linux, struct amba_device and the amba_bus_type is
+used to represent Primecell devices.  However, the fiddly bit is that
+not all devices on an AMBA bus are Primecells, and for Linux it is
+typical for both amba_device and platform_device instances to be
+siblings of the same bus segment.
+
+When using the DT, this creates problems for of_platform_populate()
+because it must decide whether to register each node as either a
+platform_device or an amba_device.  This unfortunately complicates the
+device creation model a little bit, but the solution turns out not to
+be too invasive.  If a node is compatible with "arm,amba-primecell", then
+of_platform_populate() will register it as an amba_device instead of a
+platform_device.
diff --git a/Documentation/dma-buf-sharing.txt b/Documentation/dma-buf-sharing.txt
index 225f96d88f55..505e71172ae7 100644
--- a/Documentation/dma-buf-sharing.txt
+++ b/Documentation/dma-buf-sharing.txt
@@ -29,11 +29,8 @@ The buffer-user
    in memory, mapped into its own address space, so it can access the same area
    of memory.
 
-*IMPORTANT*: [see https://lkml.org/lkml/2011/12/20/211 for more details]
-For this first version, A buffer shared using the dma_buf sharing API:
-- *may* be exported to user space using "mmap" *ONLY* by exporter, outside of
-   this framework.
-- may be used *ONLY* by importers that do not need CPU access to the buffer.
+dma-buf operations for device dma only
+--------------------------------------
 
 The dma_buf buffer sharing API usage contains the following steps:
 
@@ -55,14 +52,23 @@ The dma_buf buffer sharing API usage contains the following steps:
    associated with this buffer.
 
    Interface:
-      struct dma_buf *dma_buf_export(void *priv, struct dma_buf_ops *ops,
-				     size_t size, int flags)
+      struct dma_buf *dma_buf_export_named(void *priv, struct dma_buf_ops *ops,
+				     size_t size, int flags,
+				     const char *exp_name)
 
    If this succeeds, dma_buf_export allocates a dma_buf structure, and returns a
    pointer to the same. It also associates an anonymous file with this buffer,
    so it can be exported. On failure to allocate the dma_buf object, it returns
    NULL.
 
+   'exp_name' is the name of exporter - to facilitate information while
+   debugging.
+
+   Exporting modules which do not wish to provide any specific name may use the
+   helper define 'dma_buf_export()', with the same arguments as above, but
+   without the last argument; a __FILE__ pre-processor directive will be
+   inserted in place of 'exp_name' instead.
+
 2. Userspace gets a handle to pass around to potential buffer-users
 
    Userspace entity requests for a file-descriptor (fd) which is a handle to the
@@ -219,10 +225,238 @@ NOTES:
    If the exporter chooses not to allow an attach() operation once a
    map_dma_buf() API has been called, it simply returns an error.
 
-Miscellaneous notes:
+Kernel cpu access to a dma-buf buffer object
+--------------------------------------------
+
+The motivation to allow cpu access from the kernel to a dma-buf object from the
+importers side are:
+- fallback operations, e.g. if the devices is connected to a usb bus and the
+  kernel needs to shuffle the data around first before sending it away.
+- full transparency for existing users on the importer side, i.e. userspace
+  should not notice the difference between a normal object from that subsystem
+  and an imported one backed by a dma-buf. This is really important for drm
+  opengl drivers that expect to still use all the existing upload/download
+  paths.
+
+Access to a dma_buf from the kernel context involves three steps:
+
+1. Prepare access, which invalidate any necessary caches and make the object
+   available for cpu access.
+2. Access the object page-by-page with the dma_buf map apis
+3. Finish access, which will flush any necessary cpu caches and free reserved
+   resources.
+
+1. Prepare access
+
+   Before an importer can access a dma_buf object with the cpu from the kernel
+   context, it needs to notify the exporter of the access that is about to
+   happen.
+
+   Interface:
+      int dma_buf_begin_cpu_access(struct dma_buf *dmabuf,
+				   size_t start, size_t len,
+				   enum dma_data_direction direction)
+
+   This allows the exporter to ensure that the memory is actually available for
+   cpu access - the exporter might need to allocate or swap-in and pin the
+   backing storage. The exporter also needs to ensure that cpu access is
+   coherent for the given range and access direction. The range and access
+   direction can be used by the exporter to optimize the cache flushing, i.e.
+   access outside of the range or with a different direction (read instead of
+   write) might return stale or even bogus data (e.g. when the exporter needs to
+   copy the data to temporary storage).
+
+   This step might fail, e.g. in oom conditions.
+
+2. Accessing the buffer
+
+   To support dma_buf objects residing in highmem cpu access is page-based using
+   an api similar to kmap. Accessing a dma_buf is done in aligned chunks of
+   PAGE_SIZE size. Before accessing a chunk it needs to be mapped, which returns
+   a pointer in kernel virtual address space. Afterwards the chunk needs to be
+   unmapped again. There is no limit on how often a given chunk can be mapped
+   and unmapped, i.e. the importer does not need to call begin_cpu_access again
+   before mapping the same chunk again.
+
+   Interfaces:
+      void *dma_buf_kmap(struct dma_buf *, unsigned long);
+      void dma_buf_kunmap(struct dma_buf *, unsigned long, void *);
+
+   There are also atomic variants of these interfaces. Like for kmap they
+   facilitate non-blocking fast-paths. Neither the importer nor the exporter (in
+   the callback) is allowed to block when using these.
+
+   Interfaces:
+      void *dma_buf_kmap_atomic(struct dma_buf *, unsigned long);
+      void dma_buf_kunmap_atomic(struct dma_buf *, unsigned long, void *);
+
+   For importers all the restrictions of using kmap apply, like the limited
+   supply of kmap_atomic slots. Hence an importer shall only hold onto at most 2
+   atomic dma_buf kmaps at the same time (in any given process context).
+
+   dma_buf kmap calls outside of the range specified in begin_cpu_access are
+   undefined. If the range is not PAGE_SIZE aligned, kmap needs to succeed on
+   the partial chunks at the beginning and end but may return stale or bogus
+   data outside of the range (in these partial chunks).
+
+   Note that these calls need to always succeed. The exporter needs to complete
+   any preparations that might fail in begin_cpu_access.
+
+   For some cases the overhead of kmap can be too high, a vmap interface
+   is introduced. This interface should be used very carefully, as vmalloc
+   space is a limited resources on many architectures.
+
+   Interfaces:
+      void *dma_buf_vmap(struct dma_buf *dmabuf)
+      void dma_buf_vunmap(struct dma_buf *dmabuf, void *vaddr)
+
+   The vmap call can fail if there is no vmap support in the exporter, or if it
+   runs out of vmalloc space. Fallback to kmap should be implemented. Note that
+   the dma-buf layer keeps a reference count for all vmap access and calls down
+   into the exporter's vmap function only when no vmapping exists, and only
+   unmaps it once. Protection against concurrent vmap/vunmap calls is provided
+   by taking the dma_buf->lock mutex.
+
+3. Finish access
+
+   When the importer is done accessing the range specified in begin_cpu_access,
+   it needs to announce this to the exporter (to facilitate cache flushing and
+   unpinning of any pinned resources). The result of any dma_buf kmap calls
+   after end_cpu_access is undefined.
+
+   Interface:
+      void dma_buf_end_cpu_access(struct dma_buf *dma_buf,
+				  size_t start, size_t len,
+				  enum dma_data_direction dir);
+
+
+Direct Userspace Access/mmap Support
+------------------------------------
+
+Being able to mmap an export dma-buf buffer object has 2 main use-cases:
+- CPU fallback processing in a pipeline and
+- supporting existing mmap interfaces in importers.
+
+1. CPU fallback processing in a pipeline
+
+   In many processing pipelines it is sometimes required that the cpu can access
+   the data in a dma-buf (e.g. for thumbnail creation, snapshots, ...). To avoid
+   the need to handle this specially in userspace frameworks for buffer sharing
+   it's ideal if the dma_buf fd itself can be used to access the backing storage
+   from userspace using mmap.
+
+   Furthermore Android's ION framework already supports this (and is otherwise
+   rather similar to dma-buf from a userspace consumer side with using fds as
+   handles, too). So it's beneficial to support this in a similar fashion on
+   dma-buf to have a good transition path for existing Android userspace.
+
+   No special interfaces, userspace simply calls mmap on the dma-buf fd.
+
+2. Supporting existing mmap interfaces in exporters
+
+   Similar to the motivation for kernel cpu access it is again important that
+   the userspace code of a given importing subsystem can use the same interfaces
+   with a imported dma-buf buffer object as with a native buffer object. This is
+   especially important for drm where the userspace part of contemporary OpenGL,
+   X, and other drivers is huge, and reworking them to use a different way to
+   mmap a buffer rather invasive.
+
+   The assumption in the current dma-buf interfaces is that redirecting the
+   initial mmap is all that's needed. A survey of some of the existing
+   subsystems shows that no driver seems to do any nefarious thing like syncing
+   up with outstanding asynchronous processing on the device or allocating
+   special resources at fault time. So hopefully this is good enough, since
+   adding interfaces to intercept pagefaults and allow pte shootdowns would
+   increase the complexity quite a bit.
+
+   Interface:
+      int dma_buf_mmap(struct dma_buf *, struct vm_area_struct *,
+		       unsigned long);
+
+   If the importing subsystem simply provides a special-purpose mmap call to set
+   up a mapping in userspace, calling do_mmap with dma_buf->file will equally
+   achieve that for a dma-buf object.
+
+3. Implementation notes for exporters
+
+   Because dma-buf buffers have invariant size over their lifetime, the dma-buf
+   core checks whether a vma is too large and rejects such mappings. The
+   exporter hence does not need to duplicate this check.
+
+   Because existing importing subsystems might presume coherent mappings for
+   userspace, the exporter needs to set up a coherent mapping. If that's not
+   possible, it needs to fake coherency by manually shooting down ptes when
+   leaving the cpu domain and flushing caches at fault time. Note that all the
+   dma_buf files share the same anon inode, hence the exporter needs to replace
+   the dma_buf file stored in vma->vm_file with it's own if pte shootdown is
+   required. This is because the kernel uses the underlying inode's address_space
+   for vma tracking (and hence pte tracking at shootdown time with
+   unmap_mapping_range).
+
+   If the above shootdown dance turns out to be too expensive in certain
+   scenarios, we can extend dma-buf with a more explicit cache tracking scheme
+   for userspace mappings. But the current assumption is that using mmap is
+   always a slower path, so some inefficiencies should be acceptable.
+
+   Exporters that shoot down mappings (for any reasons) shall not do any
+   synchronization at fault time with outstanding device operations.
+   Synchronization is an orthogonal issue to sharing the backing storage of a
+   buffer and hence should not be handled by dma-buf itself. This is explicitly
+   mentioned here because many people seem to want something like this, but if
+   different exporters handle this differently, buffer sharing can fail in
+   interesting ways depending upong the exporter (if userspace starts depending
+   upon this implicit synchronization).
+
+Other Interfaces Exposed to Userspace on the dma-buf FD
+------------------------------------------------------
+
+- Since kernel 3.12 the dma-buf FD supports the llseek system call, but only
+  with offset=0 and whence=SEEK_END|SEEK_SET. SEEK_SET is supported to allow
+  the usual size discover pattern size = SEEK_END(0); SEEK_SET(0). Every other
+  llseek operation will report -EINVAL.
+
+  If llseek on dma-buf FDs isn't support the kernel will report -ESPIPE for all
+  cases. Userspace can use this to detect support for discovering the dma-buf
+  size using llseek.
+
+Miscellaneous notes
+-------------------
+
 - Any exporters or users of the dma-buf buffer sharing framework must have
   a 'select DMA_SHARED_BUFFER' in their respective Kconfigs.
 
+- In order to avoid fd leaks on exec, the FD_CLOEXEC flag must be set
+  on the file descriptor.  This is not just a resource leak, but a
+  potential security hole.  It could give the newly exec'd application
+  access to buffers, via the leaked fd, to which it should otherwise
+  not be permitted access.
+
+  The problem with doing this via a separate fcntl() call, versus doing it
+  atomically when the fd is created, is that this is inherently racy in a
+  multi-threaded app[3].  The issue is made worse when it is library code
+  opening/creating the file descriptor, as the application may not even be
+  aware of the fd's.
+
+  To avoid this problem, userspace must have a way to request O_CLOEXEC
+  flag be set when the dma-buf fd is created.  So any API provided by
+  the exporting driver to create a dmabuf fd must provide a way to let
+  userspace control setting of O_CLOEXEC flag passed in to dma_buf_fd().
+
+- If an exporter needs to manually flush caches and hence needs to fake
+  coherency for mmap support, it needs to be able to zap all the ptes pointing
+  at the backing storage. Now linux mm needs a struct address_space associated
+  with the struct file stored in vma->vm_file to do that with the function
+  unmap_mapping_range. But the dma_buf framework only backs every dma_buf fd
+  with the anon_file struct file, i.e. all dma_bufs share the same file.
+
+  Hence exporters need to setup their own file (and address_space) association
+  by setting vma->vm_file and adjusting vma->vm_pgoff in the dma_buf mmap
+  callback. In the specific case of a gem driver the exporter could use the
+  shmem file already provided by gem (and set vm_pgoff = 0). Exporters can then
+  zap ptes by unmapping the corresponding range of the struct address_space
+  associated with their own file.
+
 References:
 [1] struct dma_buf_ops in include/linux/dma-buf.h
 [2] All interfaces mentioned above defined in include/linux/dma-buf.h
+[3] https://lwn.net/Articles/236486/
diff --git a/Documentation/dmatest.txt b/Documentation/dmatest.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a2b5663eae26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/dmatest.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+				DMA Test Guide
+				==============
+
+		Andy Shevchenko <andriy.shevchenko@linux.intel.com>
+
+This small document introduces how to test DMA drivers using dmatest module.
+
+	Part 1 - How to build the test module
+
+The menuconfig contains an option that could be found by following path:
+	Device Drivers -> DMA Engine support -> DMA Test client
+
+In the configuration file the option called CONFIG_DMATEST. The dmatest could
+be built as module or inside kernel. Let's consider those cases.
+
+	Part 2 - When dmatest is built as a module...
+
+After mounting debugfs and loading the module, the /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest
+folder with nodes will be created. There are two important files located. First
+is the 'run' node that controls run and stop phases of the test, and the second
+one, 'results', is used to get the test case results.
+
+Note that in this case test will not run on load automatically.
+
+Example of usage:
+	% echo dma0chan0 > /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/channel
+	% echo 2000 > /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/timeout
+	% echo 1 > /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/iterations
+	% echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/run
+
+Hint: available channel list could be extracted by running the following
+command:
+	% ls -1 /sys/class/dma/
+
+After a while you will start to get messages about current status or error like
+in the original code.
+
+Note that running a new test will not stop any in progress test.
+
+The following command should return actual state of the test.
+	% cat /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/run
+
+To wait for test done the user may perform a busy loop that checks the state.
+
+	% while [ $(cat /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/run) = "Y" ]
+	> do
+	> 	echo -n "."
+	> 	sleep 1
+	> done
+	> echo
+
+	Part 3 - When built-in in the kernel...
+
+The module parameters that is supplied to the kernel command line will be used
+for the first performed test. After user gets a control, the test could be
+re-run with the same or different parameters. For the details see the above
+section "Part 2 - When dmatest is built as a module..."
+
+In both cases the module parameters are used as the actual values for the test
+case. You always could check them at run-time by running
+	% grep -H . /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/*
+
+	Part 4 - Gathering the test results
+
+The module provides a storage for the test results in the memory. The gathered
+data could be used after test is done.
+
+The special file 'results' in the debugfs represents gathered data of the in
+progress test. The messages collected are printed to the kernel log as well.
+
+Example of output:
+	% cat /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/results
+	dma0chan0-copy0: #1: No errors with src_off=0x7bf dst_off=0x8ad len=0x3fea (0)
+
+The message format is unified across the different types of errors. A number in
+the parens represents additional information, e.g. error code, error counter,
+or status.
+
+Comparison between buffers is stored to the dedicated structure.
+
+Note that the verify result is now accessible only via file 'results' in the
+debugfs.
diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff
index 0c083c5c2faa..b89a739a3276 100644
--- a/Documentation/dontdiff
+++ b/Documentation/dontdiff
@@ -150,7 +150,6 @@ keywords.c
 ksym.c*
 ksym.h*
 kxgettext
-lkc_defs.h
 lex.c
 lex.*.c
 linux
@@ -158,13 +157,11 @@ logo_*.c
 logo_*_clut224.c
 logo_*_mono.c
 lxdialog
-mach
 mach-types
 mach-types.h
 machtypes.h
 map
 map_hugetlb
-maui_boot.h
 media
 mconf
 miboot*
@@ -184,7 +181,6 @@ modversions.h*
 nconf
 ncscope.*
 offset.h
-offsets.h
 oui.c*
 page-types
 parse.c
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt
index 2a596a4fc23e..fcb34a5697ea 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt
@@ -237,6 +237,12 @@ MEM
   devm_kzalloc()
   devm_kfree()
 
+IIO
+  devm_iio_device_alloc()
+  devm_iio_device_free()
+  devm_iio_trigger_alloc()
+  devm_iio_trigger_free()
+
 IO region
   devm_request_region()
   devm_request_mem_region()
@@ -266,7 +272,8 @@ IOMAP
   devm_ioremap()
   devm_ioremap_nocache()
   devm_iounmap()
-  devm_request_and_ioremap() : checks resource, requests region, ioremaps
+  devm_ioremap_resource() : checks resource, requests memory region, ioremaps
+  devm_request_and_ioremap() : obsoleted by devm_ioremap_resource()
   pcim_iomap()
   pcim_iounmap()
   pcim_iomap_table()	: array of mapped addresses indexed by BAR
@@ -276,3 +283,22 @@ REGULATOR
   devm_regulator_get()
   devm_regulator_put()
   devm_regulator_bulk_get()
+
+CLOCK
+  devm_clk_get()
+  devm_clk_put()
+
+PINCTRL
+  devm_pinctrl_get()
+  devm_pinctrl_put()
+
+PWM
+  devm_pwm_get()
+  devm_pwm_put()
+
+PHY
+  devm_usb_get_phy()
+  devm_usb_put_phy()
+
+SLAVE DMA ENGINE
+  devm_acpi_dma_controller_register()
diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb b/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb
index c4d963a67d6f..8eb92264ee04 100644
--- a/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb
+++ b/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ with the device via the bus. The connection between the DVB-API-functionality
 is done via callbacks, assigned in a static device-description (struct
 dvb_usb_device) each device-driver has to have.
 
-For an example have a look in drivers/media/dvb/dvb-usb/vp7045*.
+For an example have a look in drivers/media/usb/dvb-usb/vp7045*.
 
 Objective is to migrate all the usb-devices (dibusb, cinergyT2, maybe the
 ttusb; flexcop-usb already benefits from the generic flexcop-device) to use
diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/cards.txt b/Documentation/dvb/cards.txt
index cc09187a5db7..97709e9a3076 100644
--- a/Documentation/dvb/cards.txt
+++ b/Documentation/dvb/cards.txt
@@ -119,4 +119,5 @@ o Cards based on the Phillips saa7134 PCI bridge:
   - Compro Videomate DVB-T300
   - Compro Videomate DVB-T200
   - AVerMedia AVerTVHD MCE A180
+  - KWorld PC150-U ATSC Hybrid
 
diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware
index d1d4a179a382..5d5ee4c13fa6 100755
--- a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware
+++ b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware
@@ -23,12 +23,13 @@ use IO::Handle;
 
 @components = ( "sp8870", "sp887x", "tda10045", "tda10046",
 		"tda10046lifeview", "av7110", "dec2000t", "dec2540t",
-		"dec3000s", "vp7041", "dibusb", "nxt2002", "nxt2004",
+		"dec3000s", "vp7041", "vp7049", "dibusb", "nxt2002", "nxt2004",
 		"or51211", "or51132_qam", "or51132_vsb", "bluebird",
 		"opera1", "cx231xx", "cx18", "cx23885", "pvrusb2", "mpc718",
 		"af9015", "ngene", "az6027", "lme2510_lg", "lme2510c_s7395",
 		"lme2510c_s7395_old", "drxk", "drxk_terratec_h5",
-		"drxk_hauppauge_hvr930c", "tda10071", "it9135", "it9137");
+		"drxk_hauppauge_hvr930c", "tda10071", "it9135", "it9137",
+		"drxk_pctv", "drxk_terratec_htc_stick", "sms1xxx_hcw");
 
 # Check args
 syntax() if (scalar(@ARGV) != 1);
@@ -115,7 +116,7 @@ sub tda10045 {
 
 sub tda10046 {
 	my $sourcefile = "TT_PCI_2.19h_28_11_2006.zip";
-	my $url = "http://www.tt-download.com/download/updates/219/$sourcefile";
+	my $url = "http://technotrend.com.ua/download/software/219/$sourcefile";
 	my $hash = "6a7e1e2f2644b162ff0502367553c72d";
 	my $outfile = "dvb-fe-tda10046.fw";
 	my $tmpdir = tempdir(DIR => "/tmp", CLEANUP => 1);
@@ -288,6 +289,19 @@ sub vp7041 {
     $outfile;
 }
 
+sub vp7049 {
+    my $fwfile = "dvb-usb-vp7049-0.95.fw";
+    my $url = "http://ao2.it/sites/default/files/blog/2012/11/06/linux-support-digicom-digitune-s-vp7049-udtt7049/$fwfile";
+    my $hash = "5609fd295168aea88b25ff43a6f79c36";
+
+    checkstandard();
+
+    wgetfile($fwfile, $url);
+    verify($fwfile, $hash);
+
+    $fwfile;
+}
+
 sub dibusb {
 	my $url = "http://www.linuxtv.org/downloads/firmware/dvb-usb-dibusb-5.0.0.11.fw";
 	my $outfile = "dvb-dibusb-5.0.0.11.fw";
@@ -675,6 +689,24 @@ sub drxk_terratec_h5 {
     "$fwfile"
 }
 
+sub drxk_terratec_htc_stick {
+    my $url = "http://ftp.terratec.de/Receiver/Cinergy_HTC_Stick/Updates/History/";
+    my $zipfile = "Cinergy_HTC_Stick_Drv_5.09.1202.00_XP_Vista_7.exe";
+    my $hash = "6722a2442a05423b781721fbc069ed5e";
+    my $tmpdir = tempdir(DIR => "/tmp", CLEANUP => 0);
+    my $drvfile = "Cinergy HTC Stick/BDA Driver 5.09.1202.00/Windows 32 Bit/emOEM.sys";
+    my $fwfile = "dvb-usb-terratec-htc-stick-drxk.fw";
+
+    checkstandard();
+
+    wgetfile($zipfile, $url . $zipfile);
+    verify($zipfile, $hash);
+    unzip($zipfile, $tmpdir);
+    extract("$tmpdir/$drvfile", 0x4e5c0, 42692, "$fwfile");
+
+    "$fwfile"
+}
+
 sub it9135 {
 	my $sourcefile = "dvb-usb-it9135.zip";
 	my $url = "http://www.ite.com.tw/uploads/firmware/v3.6.0.0/$sourcefile";
@@ -730,6 +762,45 @@ sub tda10071 {
     "$fwfile";
 }
 
+sub drxk_pctv {
+    my $sourcefile = "PCTV_460e_reference.zip";
+    my $url = "ftp://ftp.pctvsystems.com/TV/driver/PCTV%2070e%2080e%20100e%20320e%20330e%20800e/";
+    my $hash = "4403de903bf2593464c8d74bbc200a57";
+    my $fwfile = "dvb-demod-drxk-pctv.fw";
+    my $tmpdir = tempdir(DIR => "/tmp", CLEANUP => 1);
+
+    checkstandard();
+
+    wgetfile($sourcefile, $url . $sourcefile);
+    verify($sourcefile, $hash);
+    unzip($sourcefile, $tmpdir);
+    extract("$tmpdir/PCTV\ 70e\ 80e\ 100e\ 320e\ 330e\ 800e/32\ bit/emOEM.sys", 0x72b80, 42692, $fwfile);
+
+    "$fwfile";
+}
+
+sub sms1xxx_hcw {
+    my $url = "http://steventoth.net/linux/sms1xxx/";
+    my %files = (
+	'sms1xxx-hcw-55xxx-dvbt-01.fw'  => "afb6f9fb9a71d64392e8564ef9577e5a",
+	'sms1xxx-hcw-55xxx-dvbt-02.fw'  => "b44807098ba26e52cbedeadc052ba58f",
+	'sms1xxx-hcw-55xxx-isdbt-02.fw' => "dae934eeea85225acbd63ce6cfe1c9e4",
+    );
+
+    checkstandard();
+
+    my $allfiles;
+    foreach my $fwfile (keys %files) {
+	wgetfile($fwfile, "$url/$fwfile");
+	verify($fwfile, $files{$fwfile});
+	$allfiles .= " $fwfile";
+    }
+
+    $allfiles =~ s/^\s//;
+
+    $allfiles;
+}
+
 # ---------------------------------------------------------------
 # Utilities
 
diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt b/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt
index 10b5f0411386..f4b720a14675 100644
--- a/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt
+++ b/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt
@@ -66,5 +66,16 @@ dd if=US290D.sys ibs=1 skip=36856 count=3976 of=dvb-usb-lme2510-s0194.fw
 For LME2510C
 dd if=US290D.sys ibs=1 skip=33152 count=3697 of=dvb-usb-lme2510c-s0194.fw
 
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+The m88rs2000 tuner driver can be found in windows/system32/drivers
+
+US2B0D.sys (dated 29 Jun 2010)
+
+dd if=US2B0D.sys ibs=1 skip=34432 count=3871 of=dvb-usb-lme2510c-rs2000.fw
+
+We need to modify id of rs2000 firmware or it will warm boot id 3344:1120.
+
+echo -ne \\xF0\\x22 | dd conv=notrunc bs=1 count=2 seek=266 of=dvb-usb-lme2510c-rs2000.fw
 
 Copy the firmware file(s) to /lib/firmware
diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/opera-firmware.txt b/Documentation/dvb/opera-firmware.txt
index 93e784c2607b..fb6683188ef7 100644
--- a/Documentation/dvb/opera-firmware.txt
+++ b/Documentation/dvb/opera-firmware.txt
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ from the windriver disk into this directory.
 
 Then run
 
-./get_dvb_firware opera1
+./get_dvb_firmware opera1
 
 and after that you have 2 files:
 
@@ -24,4 +24,4 @@ After that the driver can load the firmware
 in kernel config and have hotplug running).
 
 
-Marco Gittler <g.marco@freenet.de>
-\ No newline at end of file
+Marco Gittler <g.marco@freenet.de>
diff --git a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt
index 74e6c7782678..1bbdcfcf1f13 100644
--- a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt
+++ b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt
@@ -2,17 +2,25 @@
 Introduction
 ============
 
-This document describes how to use the dynamic debug (ddebug) feature.
+This document describes how to use the dynamic debug (dyndbg) feature.
 
-Dynamic debug is designed to allow you to dynamically enable/disable kernel
-code to obtain additional kernel information. Currently, if
-CONFIG_DYNAMIC_DEBUG is set, then all pr_debug()/dev_dbg() calls can be
-dynamically enabled per-callsite.
+Dynamic debug is designed to allow you to dynamically enable/disable
+kernel code to obtain additional kernel information.  Currently, if
+CONFIG_DYNAMIC_DEBUG is set, then all pr_debug()/dev_dbg() and
+print_hex_dump_debug()/print_hex_dump_bytes() calls can be dynamically
+enabled per-callsite.
+
+If CONFIG_DYNAMIC_DEBUG is not set, print_hex_dump_debug() is just
+shortcut for print_hex_dump(KERN_DEBUG).
+
+For print_hex_dump_debug()/print_hex_dump_bytes(), format string is
+its 'prefix_str' argument, if it is constant string; or "hexdump"
+in case 'prefix_str' is build dynamically.
 
 Dynamic debug has even more useful features:
 
- * Simple query language allows turning on and off debugging statements by
-   matching any combination of 0 or 1 of:
+ * Simple query language allows turning on and off debugging
+   statements by matching any combination of 0 or 1 of:
 
    - source filename
    - function name
@@ -20,17 +28,19 @@ Dynamic debug has even more useful features:
    - module name
    - format string
 
- * Provides a debugfs control file: <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control which can be
-   read to display the complete list of known debug statements, to help guide you
+ * Provides a debugfs control file: <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
+   which can be read to display the complete list of known debug
+   statements, to help guide you
 
 Controlling dynamic debug Behaviour
 ===================================
 
 The behaviour of pr_debug()/dev_dbg()s are controlled via writing to a
-control file in the 'debugfs' filesystem. Thus, you must first mount the debugfs
-filesystem, in order to make use of this feature. Subsequently, we refer to the
-control file as: <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control. For example, if you want to
-enable printing from source file 'svcsock.c', line 1603 you simply do:
+control file in the 'debugfs' filesystem. Thus, you must first mount
+the debugfs filesystem, in order to make use of this feature.
+Subsequently, we refer to the control file as:
+<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control. For example, if you want to enable
+printing from source file 'svcsock.c', line 1603 you simply do:
 
 nullarbor:~ # echo 'file svcsock.c line 1603 +p' >
 				<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
@@ -44,15 +54,15 @@ nullarbor:~ # echo 'file svcsock.c wtf 1 +p' >
 Viewing Dynamic Debug Behaviour
 ===========================
 
-You can view the currently configured behaviour of all the debug statements
-via:
+You can view the currently configured behaviour of all the debug
+statements via:
 
 nullarbor:~ # cat <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
 # filename:lineno [module]function flags format
-/usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svc_rdma.c:323 [svcxprt_rdma]svc_rdma_cleanup - "SVCRDMA Module Removed, deregister RPC RDMA transport\012"
-/usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svc_rdma.c:341 [svcxprt_rdma]svc_rdma_init - "\011max_inline       : %d\012"
-/usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svc_rdma.c:340 [svcxprt_rdma]svc_rdma_init - "\011sq_depth         : %d\012"
-/usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svc_rdma.c:338 [svcxprt_rdma]svc_rdma_init - "\011max_requests     : %d\012"
+/usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svc_rdma.c:323 [svcxprt_rdma]svc_rdma_cleanup =_ "SVCRDMA Module Removed, deregister RPC RDMA transport\012"
+/usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svc_rdma.c:341 [svcxprt_rdma]svc_rdma_init =_ "\011max_inline       : %d\012"
+/usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svc_rdma.c:340 [svcxprt_rdma]svc_rdma_init =_ "\011sq_depth         : %d\012"
+/usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svc_rdma.c:338 [svcxprt_rdma]svc_rdma_init =_ "\011max_requests     : %d\012"
 ...
 
 
@@ -65,12 +75,12 @@ nullarbor:~ # grep -i rdma <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control  | wc -l
 nullarbor:~ # grep -i tcp <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control | wc -l
 42
 
-Note in particular that the third column shows the enabled behaviour
-flags for each debug statement callsite (see below for definitions of the
-flags).  The default value, no extra behaviour enabled, is "-".  So
-you can view all the debug statement callsites with any non-default flags:
+The third column shows the currently enabled flags for each debug
+statement callsite (see below for definitions of the flags).  The
+default value, with no flags enabled, is "=_".  So you can view all
+the debug statement callsites with any non-default flags:
 
-nullarbor:~ # awk '$3 != "-"' <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
+nullarbor:~ # awk '$3 != "=_"' <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
 # filename:lineno [module]function flags format
 /usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svcsock.c:1603 [sunrpc]svc_send p "svc_process: st_sendto returned %d\012"
 
@@ -103,15 +113,14 @@ specifications, followed by a flags change specification.
 
 command ::= match-spec* flags-spec
 
-The match-spec's are used to choose a subset of the known dprintk()
+The match-spec's are used to choose a subset of the known pr_debug()
 callsites to which to apply the flags-spec.  Think of them as a query
 with implicit ANDs between each pair.  Note that an empty list of
-match-specs is possible, but is not very useful because it will not
-match any debug statement callsites.
+match-specs will select all debug statement callsites.
 
-A match specification comprises a keyword, which controls the attribute
-of the callsite to be compared, and a value to compare against.  Possible
-keywords are:
+A match specification comprises a keyword, which controls the
+attribute of the callsite to be compared, and a value to compare
+against.  Possible keywords are:
 
 match-spec ::= 'func' string |
 	       'file' string |
@@ -164,15 +173,15 @@ format
     characters (") or single quote characters (').
     Examples:
 
-    format svcrdma:	    // many of the NFS/RDMA server dprintks
-    format readahead	    // some dprintks in the readahead cache
+    format svcrdma:	    // many of the NFS/RDMA server pr_debugs
+    format readahead	    // some pr_debugs in the readahead cache
     format nfsd:\040SETATTR // one way to match a format with whitespace
     format "nfsd: SETATTR"  // a neater way to match a format with whitespace
     format 'nfsd: SETATTR'  // yet another way to match a format with whitespace
 
 line
     The given line number or range of line numbers is compared
-    against the line number of each dprintk() callsite.  A single
+    against the line number of each pr_debug() callsite.  A single
     line number matches the callsite line number exactly.  A
     range of line numbers matches any callsite between the first
     and last line number inclusive.  An empty first number means
@@ -188,51 +197,96 @@ The flags specification comprises a change operation followed
 by one or more flag characters.  The change operation is one
 of the characters:
 
--
-    remove the given flags
+  -    remove the given flags
+  +    add the given flags
+  =    set the flags to the given flags
 
-+
-    add the given flags
+The flags are:
 
-=
-    set the flags to the given flags
+  p    enables the pr_debug() callsite.
+  f    Include the function name in the printed message
+  l    Include line number in the printed message
+  m    Include module name in the printed message
+  t    Include thread ID in messages not generated from interrupt context
+  _    No flags are set. (Or'd with others on input)
 
-The flags are:
+For print_hex_dump_debug() and print_hex_dump_bytes(), only 'p' flag
+have meaning, other flags ignored.
 
-f
-    Include the function name in the printed message
-l
-    Include line number in the printed message
-m
-    Include module name in the printed message
-p
-    Causes a printk() message to be emitted to dmesg
-t
-    Include thread ID in messages not generated from interrupt context
+For display, the flags are preceded by '='
+(mnemonic: what the flags are currently equal to).
 
-Note the regexp ^[-+=][flmpt]+$ matches a flags specification.
-Note also that there is no convenient syntax to remove all
-the flags at once, you need to use "-flmpt".
+Note the regexp ^[-+=][flmpt_]+$ matches a flags specification.
+To clear all flags at once, use "=_" or "-flmpt".
 
 
-Debug messages during boot process
+Debug messages during Boot Process
 ==================================
 
-To be able to activate debug messages during the boot process,
-even before userspace and debugfs exists, use the boot parameter:
-ddebug_query="QUERY"
+To activate debug messages for core code and built-in modules during
+the boot process, even before userspace and debugfs exists, use
+dyndbg="QUERY", module.dyndbg="QUERY", or ddebug_query="QUERY"
+(ddebug_query is obsoleted by dyndbg, and deprecated).  QUERY follows
+the syntax described above, but must not exceed 1023 characters.  Your
+bootloader may impose lower limits.
+
+These dyndbg params are processed just after the ddebug tables are
+processed, as part of the arch_initcall.  Thus you can enable debug
+messages in all code run after this arch_initcall via this boot
+parameter.
 
-QUERY follows the syntax described above, but must not exceed 1023
-characters. The enablement of debug messages is done as an arch_initcall.
-Thus you can enable debug messages in all code processed after this
-arch_initcall via this boot parameter.
 On an x86 system for example ACPI enablement is a subsys_initcall and
-ddebug_query="file ec.c +p"
+   dyndbg="file ec.c +p"
 will show early Embedded Controller transactions during ACPI setup if
 your machine (typically a laptop) has an Embedded Controller.
 PCI (or other devices) initialization also is a hot candidate for using
 this boot parameter for debugging purposes.
 
+If foo module is not built-in, foo.dyndbg will still be processed at
+boot time, without effect, but will be reprocessed when module is
+loaded later.  dyndbg_query= and bare dyndbg= are only processed at
+boot.
+
+
+Debug Messages at Module Initialization Time
+============================================
+
+When "modprobe foo" is called, modprobe scans /proc/cmdline for
+foo.params, strips "foo.", and passes them to the kernel along with
+params given in modprobe args or /etc/modprob.d/*.conf files,
+in the following order:
+
+1. # parameters given via /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf
+   options foo dyndbg=+pt
+   options foo dyndbg # defaults to +p
+
+2. # foo.dyndbg as given in boot args, "foo." is stripped and passed
+   foo.dyndbg=" func bar +p; func buz +mp"
+
+3. # args to modprobe
+   modprobe foo dyndbg==pmf # override previous settings
+
+These dyndbg queries are applied in order, with last having final say.
+This allows boot args to override or modify those from /etc/modprobe.d
+(sensible, since 1 is system wide, 2 is kernel or boot specific), and
+modprobe args to override both.
+
+In the foo.dyndbg="QUERY" form, the query must exclude "module foo".
+"foo" is extracted from the param-name, and applied to each query in
+"QUERY", and only 1 match-spec of each type is allowed.
+
+The dyndbg option is a "fake" module parameter, which means:
+
+- modules do not need to define it explicitly
+- every module gets it tacitly, whether they use pr_debug or not
+- it doesn't appear in /sys/module/$module/parameters/
+  To see it, grep the control file, or inspect /proc/cmdline.
+
+For CONFIG_DYNAMIC_DEBUG kernels, any settings given at boot-time (or
+enabled by -DDEBUG flag during compilation) can be disabled later via
+the sysfs interface if the debug messages are no longer needed:
+
+   echo "module module_name -p" > <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
 
 Examples
 ========
@@ -260,3 +314,18 @@ nullarbor:~ # echo -n 'func svc_process -p' >
 // enable messages for NFS calls READ, READLINK, READDIR and READDIR+.
 nullarbor:~ # echo -n 'format "nfsd: READ" +p' >
 				<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
+
+// enable all messages
+nullarbor:~ # echo -n '+p' > <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
+
+// add module, function to all enabled messages
+nullarbor:~ # echo -n '+mf' > <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
+
+// boot-args example, with newlines and comments for readability
+Kernel command line: ...
+  // see whats going on in dyndbg=value processing
+  dynamic_debug.verbose=1
+  // enable pr_debugs in 2 builtins, #cmt is stripped
+  dyndbg="module params +p #cmt ; module sys +p"
+  // enable pr_debugs in 2 functions in a module loaded later
+  pc87360.dyndbg="func pc87360_init_device +p; func pc87360_find +p"
diff --git a/Documentation/early-userspace/README b/Documentation/early-userspace/README
index e35d83052192..93e63a9af30b 100644
--- a/Documentation/early-userspace/README
+++ b/Documentation/early-userspace/README
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ can really be interpreted as any legal argument to
 gen_initramfs_list.sh.  If a directory is specified as an argument then
 the contents are scanned, uid/gid translation is performed, and
 usr/gen_init_cpio file directives are output.  If a directory is
-specified as an arugemnt to scripts/gen_initramfs_list.sh then the
+specified as an argument to scripts/gen_initramfs_list.sh then the
 contents of the file are simply copied to the output.  All of the output
 directives from directory scanning and file contents copying are
 processed by usr/gen_init_cpio.
@@ -83,8 +83,7 @@ Where's this all leading?
 
 The klibc distribution contains some of the necessary software to make
 early userspace useful.  The klibc distribution is currently
-maintained separately from the kernel, but this may change early in
-the 2.7 era (it missed the boat for 2.5).
+maintained separately from the kernel.
 
 You can obtain somewhat infrequent snapshots of klibc from
 ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/libs/klibc/
diff --git a/Documentation/edac.txt b/Documentation/edac.txt
index 249822cde82b..56c7e936430f 100644
--- a/Documentation/edac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/edac.txt
@@ -232,116 +232,20 @@ EDAC control and attribute files.
 
 
 In 'mcX' directories are EDAC control and attribute files for
-this 'X' instance of the memory controllers:
-
-
-Counter reset control file:
-
-	'reset_counters'
-
-	This write-only control file will zero all the statistical counters
-	for UE and CE errors.  Zeroing the counters will also reset the timer
-	indicating how long since the last counter zero.  This is useful
-	for computing errors/time.  Since the counters are always reset at
-	driver initialization time, no module/kernel parameter is available.
-
-	RUN TIME: echo "anything" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/mc0/counter_reset
-
-		This resets the counters on memory controller 0
-
-
-Seconds since last counter reset control file:
-
-	'seconds_since_reset'
-
-	This attribute file displays how many seconds have elapsed since the
-	last counter reset. This can be used with the error counters to
-	measure error rates.
-
-
-
-Memory Controller name attribute file:
-
-	'mc_name'
-
-	This attribute file displays the type of memory controller
-	that is being utilized.
-
-
-Total memory managed by this memory controller attribute file:
-
-	'size_mb'
-
-	This attribute file displays, in count of megabytes, of memory
-	that this instance of memory controller manages.
-
-
-Total Uncorrectable Errors count attribute file:
-
-	'ue_count'
-
-	This attribute file displays the total count of uncorrectable
-	errors that have occurred on this memory controller. If panic_on_ue
-	is set this counter will not have a chance to increment,
-	since EDAC will panic the system.
-
-
-Total UE count that had no information attribute fileY:
-
-	'ue_noinfo_count'
-
-	This attribute file displays the number of UEs that have occurred
-	with no information as to which DIMM slot is having errors.
-
-
-Total Correctable Errors count attribute file:
-
-	'ce_count'
-
-	This attribute file displays the total count of correctable
-	errors that have occurred on this memory controller. This
-	count is very important to examine. CEs provide early
-	indications that a DIMM is beginning to fail. This count
-	field should be monitored for non-zero values and report
-	such information to the system administrator.
-
-
-Total Correctable Errors count attribute file:
-
-	'ce_noinfo_count'
-
-	This attribute file displays the number of CEs that
-	have occurred wherewith no information as to which DIMM slot
-	is having errors. Memory is handicapped, but operational,
-	yet no information is available to indicate which slot
-	the failing memory is in. This count field should be also
-	be monitored for non-zero values.
-
-Device Symlink:
-
-	'device'
-
-	Symlink to the memory controller device.
-
-Sdram memory scrubbing rate:
-
-	'sdram_scrub_rate'
-
-	Read/Write attribute file that controls memory scrubbing. The scrubbing
-	rate is set by writing a minimum bandwidth in bytes/sec to the attribute
-	file. The rate will be translated to an internal value that gives at
-	least the specified rate.
-
-	Reading the file will return the actual scrubbing rate employed.
-
-	If configuration fails or memory scrubbing is not implemented, the value
-	of the attribute file will be -1.
+this 'X' instance of the memory controllers.
 
+For a description of the sysfs API, please see:
+	Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs/devices-edac
 
 
 ============================================================================
 'csrowX' DIRECTORIES
 
+When CONFIG_EDAC_LEGACY_SYSFS is enabled, the sysfs will contain the
+csrowX directories. As this API doesn't work properly for Rambus, FB-DIMMs
+and modern Intel Memory Controllers, this is being deprecated in favor
+of dimmX directories.
+
 In the 'csrowX' directories are EDAC control and attribute files for
 this 'X' instance of csrow:
 
@@ -734,7 +638,7 @@ were done at i7core_edac driver. This chapter will cover those differences
    associated with a physical CPU socket.
 
    Each MC have 3 physical read channels, 3 physical write channels and
-   3 logic channels. The driver currenty sees it as just 3 channels.
+   3 logic channels. The driver currently sees it as just 3 channels.
    Each channel can have up to 3 DIMMs.
 
    The minimum known unity is DIMMs. There are no information about csrows.
diff --git a/Documentation/eisa.txt b/Documentation/eisa.txt
index 38cf0c7b559f..a55e4910924e 100644
--- a/Documentation/eisa.txt
+++ b/Documentation/eisa.txt
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ CONFIG_ALPHA_JENSEN or CONFIG_EISA_VLB_PRIMING are set.
 
 Converting an EISA driver to the new API mostly involves *deleting*
 code (since probing is now in the core EISA code). Unfortunately, most
-drivers share their probing routine between ISA, MCA and EISA. Special
+drivers share their probing routine between ISA, and EISA. Special
 care must be taken when ripping out the EISA code, so other busses
 won't suffer from these surgical strikes...
 
diff --git a/Documentation/extcon/porting-android-switch-class b/Documentation/extcon/porting-android-switch-class
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..eb0fa5f4fe88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/extcon/porting-android-switch-class
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+
+	Staging/Android Switch Class Porting Guide
+	(linux/drivers/staging/android/switch)
+	(c) Copyright 2012 Samsung Electronics
+
+AUTHORS
+MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com>
+
+/*****************************************************************
+ * CHAPTER 1.                                                    *
+ * PORTING SWITCH CLASS DEVICE DRIVERS                           *
+ *****************************************************************/
+
+****** STEP 1. Basic Functionality
+	No extcon extended feature, but switch features only.
+
+- struct switch_dev (fed to switch_dev_register/unregister)
+    @name: no change
+    @dev: no change
+    @index: drop (not used in switch device driver side anyway)
+    @state: no change
+	If you have used @state with magic numbers, keep it
+	at this step.
+    @print_name: no change but type change (switch_dev->extcon_dev)
+    @print_state: no change but type change (switch_dev->extcon_dev)
+
+- switch_dev_register(sdev, dev)
+	=> extcon_dev_register(edev, dev)
+	: no change but type change (sdev->edev)
+- switch_dev_unregister(sdev)
+	=> extcon_dev_unregister(edev)
+	: no change but type change (sdev->edev)
+- switch_get_state(sdev)
+	=> extcon_get_state(edev)
+	: no change but type change (sdev->edev) and (return: int->u32)
+- switch_set_state(sdev, state)
+	=> extcon_set_state(edev, state)
+	: no change but type change (sdev->edev) and (state: int->u32)
+
+With this changes, the ex-switch extcon class device works as it once
+worked as switch class device. However, it will now have additional
+interfaces (both ABI and in-kernel API) and different ABI locations.
+However, if CONFIG_ANDROID is enabled without CONFIG_ANDROID_SWITCH,
+/sys/class/switch/* will be symbolically linked to /sys/class/extcon/
+so that they are still compatible with legacy userspace processes.
+
+****** STEP 2. Multistate (no more magic numbers in state value)
+	Extcon's extended features for switch device drivers with
+	complex features usually required magic numbers in state
+	value of switch_dev. With extcon, such magic numbers that
+	support multiple cables (
+
+  1. Define cable names at edev->supported_cable.
+  2. (Recommended) remove print_state callback.
+  3. Use extcon_get_cable_state_(edev, index) or
+   extcon_get_cable_state(edev, cable_name) instead of
+   extcon_get_state(edev) if you intend to get a state of a specific
+   cable. Same for set_state. This way, you can remove the usage of
+   magic numbers in state value.
+  4. Use extcon_update_state() if you are updating specific bits of
+   the state value.
+
+Example: a switch device driver w/ magic numbers for two cables.
+	"0x00": no cables connected.
+	"0x01": cable 1 connected
+	"0x02": cable 2 connected
+	"0x03": cable 1 and 2 connected
+  1. edev->supported_cable = {"1", "2", NULL};
+  2. edev->print_state = NULL;
+  3. extcon_get_cable_state_(edev, 0) shows cable 1's state.
+     extcon_get_cable_state(edev, "1") shows cable 1's state.
+     extcon_set_cable_state_(edev, 1) sets cable 2's state.
+     extcon_set_cable_state(edev, "2") sets cable 2's state
+  4. extcon_update_state(edev, 0x01, 0) sets the least bit's 0.
+
+****** STEP 3. Notify other device drivers
+
+  You can notify others of the cable attach/detach events with
+notifier chains.
+
+  At the side of other device drivers (the extcon device itself
+does not need to get notified of its own events), there are two
+methods to register notifier_block for cable events:
+(a) for a specific cable or (b) for every cable.
+
+  (a) extcon_register_interest(obj, extcon_name, cable_name, nb)
+	Example: want to get news of "MAX8997_MUIC"'s "USB" cable
+
+	obj = kzalloc(sizeof(struct extcon_specific_cable_nb),
+		      GFP_KERNEL);
+	nb->notifier_call = the_callback_to_handle_usb;
+
+	extcon_register_intereset(obj, "MAX8997_MUIC", "USB", nb);
+
+  (b) extcon_register_notifier(edev, nb)
+	Call nb for any changes in edev.
+
+  Please note that in order to properly behave with method (a),
+the extcon device driver should support multistate feature (STEP 2).
+
+****** STEP 4. Inter-cable relation (mutually exclusive)
+
+  You can provide inter-cable mutually exclusiveness information
+for an extcon device. When cables A and B are declared to be mutually
+exclusive, the two cables cannot be in ATTACHED state simulteneously.
+
+
+/*****************************************************************
+ * CHAPTER 2.                                                    *
+ * PORTING USERSPACE w/ SWITCH CLASS DEVICE SUPPORT              *
+ *****************************************************************/
+
+****** ABI Location
+
+  If "CONFIG_ANDROID" is enabled and "CONFIG_ANDROID_SWITCH" is
+disabled, /sys/class/switch/* are created as symbolic links to
+/sys/class/extcon/*. Because CONFIG_ANDROID_SWITCH creates
+/sys/class/switch directory, we disable symboling linking if
+CONFIG_ANDROID_SWITCH is enabled.
+
+  The two files of switch class, name and state, are provided with
+extcon, too. When the multistate support (STEP 2 of CHAPTER 1.) is
+not enabled or print_state callback is supplied, the output of
+state ABI is same with switch class.
diff --git a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt
index ba4be8b77093..4cf1a2a6bd72 100644
--- a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt
@@ -240,3 +240,30 @@ trap "echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/probability" SIGINT SIGTERM EXIT
 echo "Injecting errors into the module $module... (interrupt to stop)"
 sleep 1000000
 
+Tool to run command with failslab or fail_page_alloc
+----------------------------------------------------
+In order to make it easier to accomplish the tasks mentioned above, we can use
+tools/testing/fault-injection/failcmd.sh.  Please run a command
+"./tools/testing/fault-injection/failcmd.sh --help" for more information and
+see the following examples.
+
+Examples:
+
+Run a command "make -C tools/testing/selftests/ run_tests" with injecting slab
+allocation failure.
+
+	# ./tools/testing/fault-injection/failcmd.sh \
+		-- make -C tools/testing/selftests/ run_tests
+
+Same as above except to specify 100 times failures at most instead of one time
+at most by default.
+
+	# ./tools/testing/fault-injection/failcmd.sh --times=100 \
+		-- make -C tools/testing/selftests/ run_tests
+
+Same as above except to inject page allocation failure instead of slab
+allocation failure.
+
+	# env FAILCMD_TYPE=fail_page_alloc \
+		./tools/testing/fault-injection/failcmd.sh --times=100 \
+                -- make -C tools/testing/selftests/ run_tests
diff --git a/Documentation/fault-injection/notifier-error-inject.txt b/Documentation/fault-injection/notifier-error-inject.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..09adabef513f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fault-injection/notifier-error-inject.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+Notifier error injection
+========================
+
+Notifier error injection provides the ability to inject artificial errors to
+specified notifier chain callbacks. It is useful to test the error handling of
+notifier call chain failures which is rarely executed.  There are kernel
+modules that can be used to test the following notifiers.
+
+ * CPU notifier
+ * PM notifier
+ * Memory hotplug notifier
+ * powerpc pSeries reconfig notifier
+
+CPU notifier error injection module
+-----------------------------------
+This feature can be used to test the error handling of the CPU notifiers by
+injecting artificial errors to CPU notifier chain callbacks.
+
+If the notifier call chain should be failed with some events notified, write
+the error code to debugfs interface
+/sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/cpu/actions/<notifier event>/error
+
+Possible CPU notifier events to be failed are:
+
+ * CPU_UP_PREPARE
+ * CPU_UP_PREPARE_FROZEN
+ * CPU_DOWN_PREPARE
+ * CPU_DOWN_PREPARE_FROZEN
+
+Example1: Inject CPU offline error (-1 == -EPERM)
+
+	# cd /sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/cpu
+	# echo -1 > actions/CPU_DOWN_PREPARE/error
+	# echo 0 > /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu1/online
+	bash: echo: write error: Operation not permitted
+
+Example2: inject CPU online error (-2 == -ENOENT)
+
+	# echo -2 > actions/CPU_UP_PREPARE/error
+	# echo 1 > /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu1/online
+	bash: echo: write error: No such file or directory
+
+PM notifier error injection module
+----------------------------------
+This feature is controlled through debugfs interface
+/sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/pm/actions/<notifier event>/error
+
+Possible PM notifier events to be failed are:
+
+ * PM_HIBERNATION_PREPARE
+ * PM_SUSPEND_PREPARE
+ * PM_RESTORE_PREPARE
+
+Example: Inject PM suspend error (-12 = -ENOMEM)
+
+	# cd /sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/pm/
+	# echo -12 > actions/PM_SUSPEND_PREPARE/error
+	# echo mem > /sys/power/state
+	bash: echo: write error: Cannot allocate memory
+
+Memory hotplug notifier error injection module
+----------------------------------------------
+This feature is controlled through debugfs interface
+/sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/memory/actions/<notifier event>/error
+
+Possible memory notifier events to be failed are:
+
+ * MEM_GOING_ONLINE
+ * MEM_GOING_OFFLINE
+
+Example: Inject memory hotplug offline error (-12 == -ENOMEM)
+
+	# cd /sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/memory
+	# echo -12 > actions/MEM_GOING_OFFLINE/error
+	# echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
+	bash: echo: write error: Cannot allocate memory
+
+powerpc pSeries reconfig notifier error injection module
+--------------------------------------------------------
+This feature is controlled through debugfs interface
+/sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/pSeries-reconfig/actions/<notifier event>/error
+
+Possible pSeries reconfig notifier events to be failed are:
+
+ * PSERIES_RECONFIG_ADD
+ * PSERIES_RECONFIG_REMOVE
+ * PSERIES_DRCONF_MEM_ADD
+ * PSERIES_DRCONF_MEM_REMOVE
+
+For more usage examples
+-----------------------
+There are tools/testing/selftests using the notifier error injection features
+for CPU and memory notifiers.
+
+ * tools/testing/selftests/cpu-hotplug/on-off-test.sh
+ * tools/testing/selftests/memory-hotplug/on-off-test.sh
+
+These scripts first do simple online and offline tests and then do fault
+injection tests if notifier error injection module is available.
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/cirrusfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/cirrusfb.txt
index f9436843e998..f75950d330a4 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/cirrusfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/cirrusfb.txt
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Version 1.9.4.4
 * Overhaul color register routines.
 * Associated with the above, console colors are now obtained from a LUT
   called 'palette' instead of from the VGA registers.  This code was
-  modeled after that in atyfb and matroxfb.
+  modelled after that in atyfb and matroxfb.
 * Code cleanup, add comments.
 * Overhaul SR07 handling.
 * Bug fixes.
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt
index 99ea58e65eff..4a9739abc860 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ C. Boot options
 
 C. Attaching, Detaching and Unloading
 
-Before going on on how to attach, detach and unload the framebuffer console, an
+Before going on how to attach, detach and unload the framebuffer console, an
 illustration of the dependencies may help.
 
 The console layer, as with most subsystems, needs a driver that interfaces with
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/intel810.txt b/Documentation/fb/intel810.txt
index be3e7836abef..a8e9f5bca6f3 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/intel810.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/intel810.txt
@@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Using the same setup as described above, load the module like this:
 	modprobe i810fb vram=2 xres=1024 bpp=8 hsync1=30 hsync2=55 vsync1=50 \
 	         vsync2=85 accel=1 mtrr=1
 
-Or just add the following to /etc/modprobe.conf
+Or just add the following to a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/
 
 	options i810fb vram=2 xres=1024 bpp=16 hsync1=30 hsync2=55 vsync1=50 \
 	vsync2=85 accel=1 mtrr=1
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt
index dd9e944ea628..feac4e4d6968 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Using the same setup as described above, load the module like this:
 
 	modprobe intelfb mode=800x600-32@75 vram=8 accel=1 hwcursor=1
 
-Or just add the following to /etc/modprobe.conf
+Or just add the following to a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/
 
 	options intelfb mode=800x600-32@75 vram=8 accel=1 hwcursor=1
 
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt
index eefdd91d298a..f6362d88763b 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt
@@ -81,17 +81,11 @@ pmipal  Use the protected mode interface for palette changes.
 
 mtrr:n  Setup memory type range registers for the framebuffer
         where n:
-              0 - disabled (equivalent to nomtrr) (default)
-              1 - uncachable
-              2 - write-back
-              3 - write-combining
-              4 - write-through
-
-        If you see the following in dmesg, choose the type that matches
-        the old one.  In this example, use "mtrr:2".
-...
-mtrr: type mismatch for e0000000,8000000 old: write-back new: write-combining
-...
+              0 - disabled (equivalent to nomtrr)
+              3 - write-combining (default)
+
+	Values other than 0 and 3 will result in a warning and will be
+	treated just like 3.
 
 nomtrr  Do not use memory type range registers.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/viafb.modes b/Documentation/fb/viafb.modes
index 02e5b487f00e..2a547da2e5cc 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/viafb.modes
+++ b/Documentation/fb/viafb.modes
@@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ mode "640x480-60"
 #                   160 chars   800 lines
 #   Blank Time      4.798 us    0.564 ms
 #                   50 chars    28 lines
-#   Polarity        negtive    positive
+#   Polarity        negative    positive
 #
     mode "1280x800-60"
 # D: 83.500 MHz, H: 49.702 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt
index 444e34b52ae1..1cb2462a71ce 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
     Start viafb with default settings:
         #modprobe viafb
 
-    Start viafb with with user options:
+    Start viafb with user options:
         #modprobe viafb viafb_mode=800x600 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh=60
                   viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI viafb_dvi_port=DVP1
                   viafb_mode1=1024x768 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh1=60
diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 4bfd982f8080..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,545 +0,0 @@
-The following is a list of files and features that are going to be
-removed in the kernel source tree.  Every entry should contain what
-exactly is going away, why it is happening, and who is going to be doing
-the work.  When the feature is removed from the kernel, it should also
-be removed from this file.
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	x86 floppy disable_hlt
-When:	2012
-Why:	ancient workaround of dubious utility clutters the
-	code used by everybody else.
-Who:	Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	CONFIG_APM_CPU_IDLE, and its ability to call APM BIOS in idle
-When:	2012
-Why:	This optional sub-feature of APM is of dubious reliability,
-	and ancient APM laptops are likely better served by calling HLT.
-	Deleting CONFIG_APM_CPU_IDLE allows x86 to stop exporting
-	the pm_idle function pointer to modules.
-Who:	Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	x86_32 "no-hlt" cmdline param
-When:	2012
-Why:	remove a branch from idle path, simplify code used by everybody.
-	This option disabled the use of HLT in idle and machine_halt()
-	for hardware that was flakey 15-years ago.  Today we have
-	"idle=poll" that removed HLT from idle, and so if such a machine
-	is still running the upstream kernel, "idle=poll" is likely sufficient.
-Who:	Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	x86 "idle=mwait" cmdline param
-When:	2012
-Why:	simplify x86 idle code
-Who:	Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	PRISM54
-When:	2.6.34
-
-Why:	prism54 FullMAC PCI / Cardbus devices used to be supported only by the
-	prism54 wireless driver. After Intersil stopped selling these
-	devices in preference for the newer more flexible SoftMAC devices
-	a SoftMAC device driver was required and prism54 did not support
-	them. The p54pci driver now exists and has been present in the kernel for
-	a while. This driver supports both SoftMAC devices and FullMAC devices.
-	The main difference between these devices was the amount of memory which
-	could be used for the firmware. The SoftMAC devices support a smaller
-	amount of memory. Because of this the SoftMAC firmware fits into FullMAC
-	devices's memory. p54pci supports not only PCI / Cardbus but also USB
-	and SPI. Since p54pci supports all devices prism54 supports
-	you will have a conflict. I'm not quite sure how distributions are
-	handling this conflict right now. prism54 was kept around due to
-	claims users may experience issues when using the SoftMAC driver.
-	Time has passed users have not reported issues. If you use prism54
-	and for whatever reason you cannot use p54pci please let us know!
-	E-mail us at: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
-
-	For more information see the p54 wiki page:
-
-	http://wireless.kernel.org/en/users/Drivers/p54
-
-Who:	Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM
-Check:	IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM
-When:	July 2009
-
-Why:	Many of IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM users are technically bogus as entropy
-	sources in the kernel's current entropy model. To resolve this, every
-	input point to the kernel's entropy pool needs to better document the
-	type of entropy source it actually is. This will be replaced with
-	additional add_*_randomness functions in drivers/char/random.c
-
-Who:	Robin Getz <rgetz@blackfin.uclinux.org> & Matt Mackall <mpm@selenic.com>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	The ieee80211_regdom module parameter
-When:	March 2010 / desktop catchup
-
-Why:	This was inherited by the CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY code,
-	and currently serves as an option for users to define an
-	ISO / IEC 3166 alpha2 code for the country they are currently
-	present in. Although there are userspace API replacements for this
-	through nl80211 distributions haven't yet caught up with implementing
-	decent alternatives through standard GUIs. Although available as an
-	option through iw or wpa_supplicant its just a matter of time before
-	distributions pick up good GUI options for this. The ideal solution
-	would actually consist of intelligent designs which would do this for
-	the user automatically even when travelling through different countries.
-	Until then we leave this module parameter as a compromise.
-
-	When userspace improves with reasonable widely-available alternatives for
-	this we will no longer need this module parameter. This entry hopes that
-	by the super-futuristically looking date of "March 2010" we will have
-	such replacements widely available.
-
-Who:	Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	dev->power.power_state
-When:	July 2007
-Why:	Broken design for runtime control over driver power states, confusing
-	driver-internal runtime power management with:  mechanisms to support
-	system-wide sleep state transitions; event codes that distinguish
-	different phases of swsusp "sleep" transitions; and userspace policy
-	inputs.  This framework was never widely used, and most attempts to
-	use it were broken.  Drivers should instead be exposing domain-specific
-	interfaces either to kernel or to userspace.
-Who:	Pavel Machek <pavel@ucw.cz>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	/proc/<pid>/oom_adj
-When:	August 2012
-Why:	/proc/<pid>/oom_adj allows userspace to influence the oom killer's
-	badness heuristic used to determine which task to kill when the kernel
-	is out of memory.
-
-	The badness heuristic has since been rewritten since the introduction of
-	this tunable such that its meaning is deprecated.  The value was
-	implemented as a bitshift on a score generated by the badness()
-	function that did not have any precise units of measure.  With the
-	rewrite, the score is given as a proportion of available memory to the
-	task allocating pages, so using a bitshift which grows the score
-	exponentially is, thus, impossible to tune with fine granularity.
-
-	A much more powerful interface, /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj, was
-	introduced with the oom killer rewrite that allows users to increase or
-	decrease the badness score linearly.  This interface will replace
-	/proc/<pid>/oom_adj.
-
-	A warning will be emitted to the kernel log if an application uses this
-	deprecated interface.  After it is printed once, future warnings will be
-	suppressed until the kernel is rebooted.
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	remove EXPORT_SYMBOL(kernel_thread)
-When:	August 2006
-Files:	arch/*/kernel/*_ksyms.c
-Check:	kernel_thread
-Why:	kernel_thread is a low-level implementation detail.  Drivers should
-        use the <linux/kthread.h> API instead which shields them from
-	implementation details and provides a higherlevel interface that
-	prevents bugs and code duplication
-Who:	Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	Unused EXPORT_SYMBOL/EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL exports
-	(temporary transition config option provided until then)
-	The transition config option will also be removed at the same time.
-When:	before 2.6.19
-Why:	Unused symbols are both increasing the size of the kernel binary
-	and are often a sign of "wrong API"
-Who:	Arjan van de Ven <arjan@linux.intel.com>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	PHYSDEVPATH, PHYSDEVBUS, PHYSDEVDRIVER in the uevent environment
-When:	October 2008
-Why:	The stacking of class devices makes these values misleading and
-	inconsistent.
-	Class devices should not carry any of these properties, and bus
-	devices have SUBSYTEM and DRIVER as a replacement.
-Who:	Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@suse.de>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	ACPI procfs interface
-When:	July 2008
-Why:	ACPI sysfs conversion should be finished by January 2008.
-	ACPI procfs interface will be removed in July 2008 so that
-	there is enough time for the user space to catch up.
-Who:	Zhang Rui <rui.zhang@intel.com>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	CONFIG_ACPI_PROCFS_POWER
-When:	2.6.39
-Why:	sysfs I/F for ACPI power devices, including AC and Battery,
-        has been working in upstream kernel since 2.6.24, Sep 2007.
-	In 2.6.37, we make the sysfs I/F always built in and this option
-	disabled by default.
-	Remove this option and the ACPI power procfs interface in 2.6.39.
-Who:	Zhang Rui <rui.zhang@intel.com>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	/proc/acpi/event
-When:	February 2008
-Why:	/proc/acpi/event has been replaced by events via the input layer
-	and netlink since 2.6.23.
-Who:	Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	i386/x86_64 bzImage symlinks
-When:	April 2010
-
-Why:	The i386/x86_64 merge provides a symlink to the old bzImage
-	location so not yet updated user space tools, e.g. package
-	scripts, do not break.
-Who:	Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	GPIO autorequest on gpio_direction_{input,output}() in gpiolib
-When:	February 2010
-Why:	All callers should use explicit gpio_request()/gpio_free().
-	The autorequest mechanism in gpiolib was provided mostly as a
-	migration aid for legacy GPIO interfaces (for SOC based GPIOs).
-	Those users have now largely migrated.  Platforms implementing
-	the GPIO interfaces without using gpiolib will see no changes.
-Who:	David Brownell <dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net>
----------------------------
-
-What:	b43 support for firmware revision < 410
-When:	The schedule was July 2008, but it was decided that we are going to keep the
-        code as long as there are no major maintanance headaches.
-	So it _could_ be removed _any_ time now, if it conflicts with something new.
-Why:	The support code for the old firmware hurts code readability/maintainability
-	and slightly hurts runtime performance. Bugfixes for the old firmware
-	are not provided by Broadcom anymore.
-Who:	Michael Buesch <m@bues.ch>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	Ability for non root users to shm_get hugetlb pages based on mlock
-	resource limits
-When:	2.6.31
-Why:	Non root users need to be part of /proc/sys/vm/hugetlb_shm_group or
-	have CAP_IPC_LOCK to be able to allocate shm segments backed by
-	huge pages.  The mlock based rlimit check to allow shm hugetlb is
-	inconsistent with mmap based allocations.  Hence it is being
-	deprecated.
-Who:	Ravikiran Thirumalai <kiran@scalex86.org>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	Code that is now under CONFIG_WIRELESS_EXT_SYSFS
-	(in net/core/net-sysfs.c)
-When:	3.5
-Why:	Over 1K .text/.data size reduction, data is available in other
-	ways (ioctls)
-Who:	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	sysfs ui for changing p4-clockmod parameters
-When:	September 2009
-Why:	See commits 129f8ae9b1b5be94517da76009ea956e89104ce8 and
-	e088e4c9cdb618675874becb91b2fd581ee707e6.
-	Removal is subject to fixing any remaining bugs in ACPI which may
-	cause the thermal throttling not to happen at the right time.
-Who:	Dave Jones <davej@redhat.com>, Matthew Garrett <mjg@redhat.com>
-
------------------------------
-
-What:	fakephp and associated sysfs files in /sys/bus/pci/slots/
-When:	2011
-Why:	In 2.6.27, the semantics of /sys/bus/pci/slots was redefined to
-	represent a machine's physical PCI slots. The change in semantics
-	had userspace implications, as the hotplug core no longer allowed
-	drivers to create multiple sysfs files per physical slot (required
-	for multi-function devices, e.g.). fakephp was seen as a developer's
-	tool only, and its interface changed. Too late, we learned that
-	there were some users of the fakephp interface.
-
-	In 2.6.30, the original fakephp interface was restored. At the same
-	time, the PCI core gained the ability that fakephp provided, namely
-	function-level hot-remove and hot-add.
-
-	Since the PCI core now provides the same functionality, exposed in:
-
-		/sys/bus/pci/rescan
-		/sys/bus/pci/devices/.../remove
-		/sys/bus/pci/devices/.../rescan
-
-	there is no functional reason to maintain fakephp as well.
-
-	We will keep the existing module so that 'modprobe fakephp' will
-	present the old /sys/bus/pci/slots/... interface for compatibility,
-	but users are urged to migrate their applications to the API above.
-
-	After a reasonable transition period, we will remove the legacy
-	fakephp interface.
-Who:	Alex Chiang <achiang@hp.com>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	CONFIG_RFKILL_INPUT
-When:	2.6.33
-Why:	Should be implemented in userspace, policy daemon.
-Who:	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	sound-slot/service-* module aliases and related clutters in
-	sound/sound_core.c
-When:	August 2010
-Why:	OSS sound_core grabs all legacy minors (0-255) of SOUND_MAJOR
-	(14) and requests modules using custom sound-slot/service-*
-	module aliases.  The only benefit of doing this is allowing
-	use of custom module aliases which might as well be considered
-	a bug at this point.  This preemptive claiming prevents
-	alternative OSS implementations.
-
-	Till the feature is removed, the kernel will be requesting
-	both sound-slot/service-* and the standard char-major-* module
-	aliases and allow turning off the pre-claiming selectively via
-	CONFIG_SOUND_OSS_CORE_PRECLAIM and soundcore.preclaim_oss
-	kernel parameter.
-
-	After the transition phase is complete, both the custom module
-	aliases and switches to disable it will go away.  This removal
-	will also allow making ALSA OSS emulation independent of
-	sound_core.  The dependency will be broken then too.
-Who:	Tejun Heo <tj@kernel.org>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	sysfs-class-rfkill state file
-When:	Feb 2014
-Files:	net/rfkill/core.c
-Why: 	Documented as obsolete since Feb 2010. This file is limited to 3
-	states while the rfkill drivers can have 4 states.
-Who: 	anybody or Florian Mickler <florian@mickler.org>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What: 	sysfs-class-rfkill claim file
-When:	Feb 2012
-Files:	net/rfkill/core.c
-Why:	It is not possible to claim an rfkill driver since 2007. This is
-	Documented as obsolete since Feb 2010.
-Who: 	anybody or Florian Mickler <florian@mickler.org>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	iwlwifi 50XX module parameters
-When:	3.0
-Why:	The "..50" modules parameters were used to configure 5000 series and
-	up devices; different set of module parameters also available for 4965
-	with same functionalities. Consolidate both set into single place
-	in drivers/net/wireless/iwlwifi/iwl-agn.c
-
-Who:	Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	iwl4965 alias support
-When:	3.0
-Why:	Internal alias support has been present in module-init-tools for some
-	time, the MODULE_ALIAS("iwl4965") boilerplate aliases can be removed
-	with no impact.
-
-Who:	Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	xt_NOTRACK
-Files:	net/netfilter/xt_NOTRACK.c
-When:	April 2011
-Why:	Superseded by xt_CT
-Who:	Netfilter developer team <netfilter-devel@vger.kernel.org>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	IRQF_DISABLED
-When:	2.6.36
-Why:	The flag is a NOOP as we run interrupt handlers with interrupts disabled
-Who:	Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What: 	PCI DMA unmap state API
-When:	August 2012
-Why:	PCI DMA unmap state API (include/linux/pci-dma.h) was replaced
-	with DMA unmap state API (DMA unmap state API can be used for
-	any bus).
-Who:	FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	iwlwifi disable_hw_scan module parameters
-When:	3.0
-Why:	Hareware scan is the prefer method for iwlwifi devices for
-	scanning operation. Remove software scan support for all the
-	iwlwifi devices.
-
-Who:	Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	Legacy, non-standard chassis intrusion detection interface.
-When:	June 2011
-Why:	The adm9240, w83792d and w83793 hardware monitoring drivers have
-	legacy interfaces for chassis intrusion detection. A standard
-	interface has been added to each driver, so the legacy interface
-	can be removed.
-Who:	Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	xt_connlimit rev 0
-When:	2012
-Who:	Jan Engelhardt <jengelh@medozas.de>
-Files:	net/netfilter/xt_connlimit.c
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	ipt_addrtype match include file
-When:	2012
-Why:	superseded by xt_addrtype
-Who:	Florian Westphal <fw@strlen.de>
-Files:	include/linux/netfilter_ipv4/ipt_addrtype.h
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	i2c_driver.attach_adapter
-	i2c_driver.detach_adapter
-When:	September 2011
-Why:	These legacy callbacks should no longer be used as i2c-core offers
-	a variety of preferable alternative ways to instantiate I2C devices.
-Who:	Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	Opening a radio device node will no longer automatically switch the
-	tuner mode from tv to radio.
-When:	3.3
-Why:	Just opening a V4L device should not change the state of the hardware
-	like that. It's very unexpected and against the V4L spec. Instead, you
-	switch to radio mode by calling VIDIOC_S_FREQUENCY. This is the second
-	and last step of the move to consistent handling of tv and radio tuners.
-Who:	Hans Verkuil <hans.verkuil@cisco.com>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	g_file_storage driver
-When:	3.8
-Why:	This driver has been superseded by g_mass_storage.
-Who:	Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:   threeg and interface sysfs files in /sys/devices/platform/acer-wmi
-When:   2012
-Why:    In 3.0, we can now autodetect internal 3G device and already have
-	the threeg rfkill device. So, we plan to remove threeg sysfs support
-	for it's no longer necessary.
-
-	We also plan to remove interface sysfs file that exposed which ACPI-WMI
-	interface that was used by acer-wmi driver. It will replaced by
-	information log when acer-wmi initial.
-Who:    Lee, Chun-Yi <jlee@novell.com>
-
----------------------------
-
-What:	/sys/devices/platform/_UDC_/udc/_UDC_/is_dualspeed file and
-	is_dualspeed line in /sys/devices/platform/ci13xxx_*/udc/device file.
-When:	3.8
-Why:	The is_dualspeed file is superseded by maximum_speed in the same
-	directory and is_dualspeed line in device file is superseded by
-	max_speed line in the same file.
-
-	The maximum_speed/max_speed specifies maximum speed supported by UDC.
-	To check if dualspeeed is supported, check if the value is >= 3.
-	Various possible speeds are defined in <linux/usb/ch9.h>.
-Who:	Michal Nazarewicz <mina86@mina86.com>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	The XFS nodelaylog mount option
-When:	3.3
-Why:	The delaylog mode that has been the default since 2.6.39 has proven
-	stable, and the old code is in the way of additional improvements in
-	the log code.
-Who:	Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	iwlagn alias support
-When:	3.5
-Why:	The iwlagn module has been renamed iwlwifi.  The alias will be around
-	for backward compatibility for several cycles and then dropped.
-Who:	Don Fry <donald.h.fry@intel.com>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	pci_scan_bus_parented()
-When:	3.5
-Why:	The pci_scan_bus_parented() interface creates a new root bus.  The
-	bus is created with default resources (ioport_resource and
-	iomem_resource) that are always wrong, so we rely on arch code to
-	correct them later.  Callers of pci_scan_bus_parented() should
-	convert to using pci_scan_root_bus() so they can supply a list of
-	bus resources when the bus is created.
-Who:	Bjorn Helgaas <bhelgaas@google.com>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	The CAP9 SoC family will be removed
-When:	3.4
-Files:	arch/arm/mach-at91/at91cap9.c
-	arch/arm/mach-at91/at91cap9_devices.c
-	arch/arm/mach-at91/include/mach/at91cap9.h
-	arch/arm/mach-at91/include/mach/at91cap9_matrix.h
-	arch/arm/mach-at91/include/mach/at91cap9_ddrsdr.h
-	arch/arm/mach-at91/board-cap9adk.c
-Why:	The code is not actively maintained and platforms are now hard to find.
-Who:	Nicolas Ferre <nicolas.ferre@atmel.com>
-	Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD <plagnioj@jcrosoft.com>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	Low Performance USB Block driver ("CONFIG_BLK_DEV_UB")
-When:	3.6
-Why:	This driver provides support for USB storage devices like "USB
-	sticks". As of now, it is deactivated in Debian, Fedora and
-        Ubuntu. All current users can switch over to usb-storage
-        (CONFIG_USB_STORAGE) which only drawback is the additional SCSI
-        stack.
-Who:	Sebastian Andrzej Siewior <sebastian@breakpoint.cc>
-
-----------------------------
-
-What:	kmap_atomic(page, km_type)
-When:	3.5
-Why:	The old kmap_atomic() with two arguments is deprecated, we only
-	keep it for backward compatibility for few cycles and then drop it.
-Who:	Cong Wang <amwang@redhat.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX b/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
index 8c624a18f67d..8042050eb265 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
@@ -38,6 +38,8 @@ dnotify_test.c
 	- example program for dnotify
 ecryptfs.txt
 	- docs on eCryptfs: stacked cryptographic filesystem for Linux.
+efivarfs.txt
+	- info for the efivarfs filesystem.
 exofs.txt
 	- info, usage, mount options, design about EXOFS.
 ext2.txt
@@ -48,6 +50,8 @@ ext4.txt
 	- info, mount options and specifications for the Ext4 filesystem.
 files.txt
 	- info on file management in the Linux kernel.
+f2fs.txt
+	- info and mount options for the F2FS filesystem.
 fuse.txt
 	- info on the Filesystem in User SpacE including mount options.
 gfs2.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
index 4fca82e5276e..fe7afe225381 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
@@ -9,11 +9,10 @@ be able to use diff(1).
 
 --------------------------- dentry_operations --------------------------
 prototypes:
-	int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, struct nameidata *);
-	int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *,
-			struct qstr *);
-	int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *,
-			const struct dentry *, const struct inode *,
+	int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, unsigned int);
+	int (*d_weak_revalidate)(struct dentry *, unsigned int);
+	int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, struct qstr *);
+	int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *, const struct dentry *,
 			unsigned int, const char *, const struct qstr *);
 	int (*d_delete)(struct dentry *);
 	void (*d_release)(struct dentry *);
@@ -25,6 +24,7 @@ prototypes:
 locking rules:
 		rename_lock	->d_lock	may block	rcu-walk
 d_revalidate:	no		no		yes (ref-walk)	maybe
+d_weak_revalidate:no		no		yes	 	no
 d_hash		no		no		no		maybe
 d_compare:	yes		no		no		maybe
 d_delete:	no		yes		no		no
@@ -37,9 +37,8 @@ d_manage:	no		no		yes (ref-walk)	maybe
 
 --------------------------- inode_operations --------------------------- 
 prototypes:
-	int (*create) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,umode_t, struct nameidata *);
-	struct dentry * (*lookup) (struct inode *,struct dentry *, struct nameid
-ata *);
+	int (*create) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,umode_t, bool);
+	struct dentry * (*lookup) (struct inode *,struct dentry *, unsigned int);
 	int (*link) (struct dentry *,struct inode *,struct dentry *);
 	int (*unlink) (struct inode *,struct dentry *);
 	int (*symlink) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,const char *);
@@ -60,8 +59,12 @@ ata *);
 	ssize_t (*getxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *, void *, size_t);
 	ssize_t (*listxattr) (struct dentry *, char *, size_t);
 	int (*removexattr) (struct dentry *, const char *);
-	void (*truncate_range)(struct inode *, loff_t, loff_t);
 	int (*fiemap)(struct inode *, struct fiemap_extent_info *, u64 start, u64 len);
+	void (*update_time)(struct inode *, struct timespec *, int);
+	int (*atomic_open)(struct inode *, struct dentry *,
+				struct file *, unsigned open_flag,
+				umode_t create_mode, int *opened);
+	int (*tmpfile) (struct inode *, struct dentry *, umode_t);
 
 locking rules:
 	all may block
@@ -78,7 +81,6 @@ rename:		yes (all)	(see below)
 readlink:	no
 follow_link:	no
 put_link:	no
-truncate:	yes		(see below)
 setattr:	yes
 permission:	no (may not block if called in rcu-walk mode)
 get_acl:	no
@@ -87,16 +89,14 @@ setxattr:	yes
 getxattr:	no
 listxattr:	no
 removexattr:	yes
-truncate_range:	yes
 fiemap:		no
+update_time:	no
+atomic_open:	yes
+tmpfile:	no
+
 	Additionally, ->rmdir(), ->unlink() and ->rename() have ->i_mutex on
 victim.
 	cross-directory ->rename() has (per-superblock) ->s_vfs_rename_sem.
-	->truncate() is never called directly - it's a callback, not a
-method. It's called by vmtruncate() - deprecated library function used by
-->setattr(). Locking information above applies to that call (i.e. is
-inherited from ->setattr() - vmtruncate() is used when ATTR_SIZE had been
-passed).
 
 See Documentation/filesystems/directory-locking for more detailed discussion
 of the locking scheme for directory operations.
@@ -110,7 +110,6 @@ prototypes:
 	int (*drop_inode) (struct inode *);
 	void (*evict_inode) (struct inode *);
 	void (*put_super) (struct super_block *);
-	void (*write_super) (struct super_block *);
 	int (*sync_fs)(struct super_block *sb, int wait);
 	int (*freeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
 	int (*unfreeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
@@ -132,10 +131,9 @@ write_inode:
 drop_inode:				!!!inode->i_lock!!!
 evict_inode:
 put_super:		write
-write_super:		read
 sync_fs:		read
-freeze_fs:		read
-unfreeze_fs:		read
+freeze_fs:		write
+unfreeze_fs:		write
 statfs:			maybe(read)	(see below)
 remount_fs:		write
 umount_begin:		no
@@ -191,7 +189,7 @@ prototypes:
 				loff_t pos, unsigned len, unsigned copied,
 				struct page *page, void *fsdata);
 	sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t);
-	int (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned long);
+	void (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned int, unsigned int);
 	int (*releasepage) (struct page *, int);
 	void (*freepage)(struct page *);
 	int (*direct_IO)(int, struct kiocb *, const struct iovec *iov,
@@ -202,6 +200,8 @@ prototypes:
 	int (*launder_page)(struct page *);
 	int (*is_partially_uptodate)(struct page *, read_descriptor_t *, unsigned long);
 	int (*error_remove_page)(struct address_space *, struct page *);
+	int (*swap_activate)(struct file *);
+	int (*swap_deactivate)(struct file *);
 
 locking rules:
 	All except set_page_dirty and freepage may block
@@ -225,6 +225,8 @@ migratepage:		yes (both)
 launder_page:		yes
 is_partially_uptodate:	yes
 error_remove_page:	yes
+swap_activate:		no
+swap_deactivate:	no
 
 	->write_begin(), ->write_end(), ->sync_page() and ->readpage()
 may be called from the request handler (/dev/loop).
@@ -308,8 +310,8 @@ filesystems and by the swapper. The latter will eventually go away.  Please,
 keep it that way and don't breed new callers.
 
 	->invalidatepage() is called when the filesystem must attempt to drop
-some or all of the buffers from the page when it is being truncated.  It
-returns zero on success.  If ->invalidatepage is zero, the kernel uses
+some or all of the buffers from the page when it is being truncated. It
+returns zero on success. If ->invalidatepage is zero, the kernel uses
 block_invalidatepage() instead.
 
 	->releasepage() is called when the kernel is about to try to drop the
@@ -326,6 +328,15 @@ cleaned, or an error value if not. Note that in order to prevent the page
 getting mapped back in and redirtied, it needs to be kept locked
 across the entire operation.
 
+	->swap_activate will be called with a non-zero argument on
+files backing (non block device backed) swapfiles. A return value
+of zero indicates success, in which case this file can be used for
+backing swapspace. The swapspace operations will be proxied to the
+address space operations.
+
+	->swap_deactivate() will be called in the sys_swapoff()
+path after ->swap_activate() returned success.
+
 ----------------------- file_lock_operations ------------------------------
 prototypes:
 	void (*fl_copy_lock)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *);
@@ -333,27 +344,38 @@ prototypes:
 
 
 locking rules:
-			file_lock_lock	may block
+			inode->i_lock	may block
 fl_copy_lock:		yes		no
 fl_release_private:	maybe		no
 
 ----------------------- lock_manager_operations ---------------------------
 prototypes:
 	int (*lm_compare_owner)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *);
+	unsigned long (*lm_owner_key)(struct file_lock *);
 	void (*lm_notify)(struct file_lock *);  /* unblock callback */
 	int (*lm_grant)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *, int);
-	void (*lm_release_private)(struct file_lock *);
 	void (*lm_break)(struct file_lock *); /* break_lease callback */
 	int (*lm_change)(struct file_lock **, int);
 
 locking rules:
-			file_lock_lock	may block
-lm_compare_owner:	yes		no
-lm_notify:		yes		no
-lm_grant:		no		no
-lm_release_private:	maybe		no
-lm_break:		yes		no
-lm_change		yes		no
+
+			inode->i_lock	blocked_lock_lock	may block
+lm_compare_owner:	yes[1]		maybe			no
+lm_owner_key		yes[1]		yes			no
+lm_notify:		yes		yes			no
+lm_grant:		no		no			no
+lm_break:		yes		no			no
+lm_change		yes		no			no
+
+[1]:	->lm_compare_owner and ->lm_owner_key are generally called with
+*an* inode->i_lock held. It may not be the i_lock of the inode
+associated with either file_lock argument! This is the case with deadlock
+detection, since the code has to chase down the owners of locks that may
+be entirely unrelated to the one on which the lock is being acquired.
+For deadlock detection however, the blocked_lock_lock is also held. The
+fact that these locks are held ensures that the file_locks do not
+disappear out from under you while doing the comparison or generating an
+owner key.
 
 --------------------------- buffer_head -----------------------------------
 prototypes:
@@ -405,7 +427,7 @@ prototypes:
 	ssize_t (*write) (struct file *, const char __user *, size_t, loff_t *);
 	ssize_t (*aio_read) (struct kiocb *, const struct iovec *, unsigned long, loff_t);
 	ssize_t (*aio_write) (struct kiocb *, const struct iovec *, unsigned long, loff_t);
-	int (*readdir) (struct file *, void *, filldir_t);
+	int (*iterate) (struct file *, struct dir_context *);
 	unsigned int (*poll) (struct file *, struct poll_table_struct *);
 	long (*unlocked_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long);
 	long (*compat_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long);
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt
index 7671352216f1..9dae59407437 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 
-	BTRFS
-	=====
+BTRFS
+=====
 
-Btrfs is a new copy on write filesystem for Linux aimed at
+Btrfs is a copy on write filesystem for Linux aimed at
 implementing advanced features while focusing on fault tolerance,
 repair and easy administration. Initially developed by Oracle, Btrfs
 is licensed under the GPL and open for contribution from anyone.
@@ -34,9 +34,175 @@ The main Btrfs features include:
     * Online filesystem defragmentation
 
 
+Mount Options
+=============
 
-	MAILING LIST
-	============
+When mounting a btrfs filesystem, the following option are accepted.
+Unless otherwise specified, all options default to off.
+
+  alloc_start=<bytes>
+	Debugging option to force all block allocations above a certain
+	byte threshold on each block device.  The value is specified in
+	bytes, optionally with a K, M, or G suffix, case insensitive.
+	Default is 1MB.
+
+  autodefrag
+	Detect small random writes into files and queue them up for the
+	defrag process.  Works best for small files; Not well suited for
+	large database workloads.
+
+  check_int
+  check_int_data
+  check_int_print_mask=<value>
+	These debugging options control the behavior of the integrity checking
+	module (the BTRFS_FS_CHECK_INTEGRITY config option required).
+
+	check_int enables the integrity checker module, which examines all
+	block write requests to ensure on-disk consistency, at a large
+	memory and CPU cost.  
+
+	check_int_data includes extent data in the integrity checks, and
+	implies the check_int option.
+
+	check_int_print_mask takes a bitmask of BTRFSIC_PRINT_MASK_* values
+	as defined in fs/btrfs/check-integrity.c, to control the integrity
+	checker module behavior.
+
+	See comments at the top of fs/btrfs/check-integrity.c for more info.
+
+  compress
+  compress=<type>
+  compress-force
+  compress-force=<type>
+	Control BTRFS file data compression.  Type may be specified as "zlib"
+	"lzo" or "no" (for no compression, used for remounting).  If no type
+	is specified, zlib is used.  If compress-force is specified,
+	all files will be compressed, whether or not they compress well.
+	If compression is enabled, nodatacow and nodatasum are disabled.
+
+  degraded
+	Allow mounts to continue with missing devices.  A read-write mount may
+	fail with too many devices missing, for example if a stripe member
+	is completely missing.
+
+  device=<devicepath>
+	Specify a device during mount so that ioctls on the control device
+	can be avoided.  Especially useful when trying to mount a multi-device
+	setup as root.  May be specified multiple times for multiple devices.
+
+  discard
+	Issue frequent commands to let the block device reclaim space freed by
+	the filesystem.  This is useful for SSD devices, thinly provisioned
+	LUNs and virtual machine images, but may have a significant
+	performance impact.  (The fstrim command is also available to
+	initiate batch trims from userspace).
+
+  enospc_debug
+	Debugging option to be more verbose in some ENOSPC conditions.
+
+  fatal_errors=<action>
+	Action to take when encountering a fatal error: 
+	  "bug" - BUG() on a fatal error.  This is the default.
+	  "panic" - panic() on a fatal error.
+
+  flushoncommit
+	The 'flushoncommit' mount option forces any data dirtied by a write in a
+	prior transaction to commit as part of the current commit.  This makes
+	the committed state a fully consistent view of the file system from the
+	application's perspective (i.e., it includes all completed file system
+	operations).  This was previously the behavior only when a snapshot is
+	created.
+
+  inode_cache
+	Enable free inode number caching.   Defaults to off due to an overflow
+	problem when the free space crcs don't fit inside a single page.
+
+  max_inline=<bytes>
+	Specify the maximum amount of space, in bytes, that can be inlined in
+	a metadata B-tree leaf.  The value is specified in bytes, optionally 
+	with a K, M, or G suffix, case insensitive.  In practice, this value
+	is limited by the root sector size, with some space unavailable due
+	to leaf headers.  For a 4k sectorsize, max inline data is ~3900 bytes.
+
+  metadata_ratio=<value>
+	Specify that 1 metadata chunk should be allocated after every <value>
+	data chunks.  Off by default.
+
+  noacl
+	Disable support for Posix Access Control Lists (ACLs).  See the
+	acl(5) manual page for more information about ACLs.
+
+  nobarrier
+        Disables the use of block layer write barriers.  Write barriers ensure
+	that certain IOs make it through the device cache and are on persistent
+	storage.  If used on a device with a volatile (non-battery-backed)
+	write-back cache, this option will lead to filesystem corruption on a
+	system crash or power loss.
+
+  nodatacow
+	Disable data copy-on-write for newly created files.  Implies nodatasum,
+	and disables all compression.
+
+  nodatasum
+	Disable data checksumming for newly created files.
+
+  notreelog
+	Disable the tree logging used for fsync and O_SYNC writes.
+
+  recovery
+	Enable autorecovery attempts if a bad tree root is found at mount time.
+	Currently this scans a list of several previous tree roots and tries to 
+	use the first readable.
+
+ skip_balance
+	Skip automatic resume of interrupted balance operation after mount.
+	May be resumed with "btrfs balance resume."
+
+  space_cache (*)
+	Enable the on-disk freespace cache.
+  nospace_cache
+	Disable freespace cache loading without clearing the cache.
+  clear_cache
+	Force clearing and rebuilding of the disk space cache if something
+	has gone wrong.
+
+  ssd
+  nossd
+  ssd_spread
+	Options to control ssd allocation schemes.  By default, BTRFS will
+	enable or disable ssd allocation heuristics depending on whether a
+	rotational or nonrotational disk is in use.  The ssd and nossd options
+	can override this autodetection.
+
+	The ssd_spread mount option attempts to allocate into big chunks
+	of unused space, and may perform better on low-end ssds.  ssd_spread
+	implies ssd, enabling all other ssd heuristics as well.
+
+  subvol=<path>
+	Mount subvolume at <path> rather than the root subvolume.  <path> is
+	relative to the top level subvolume.
+
+  subvolid=<ID>
+	Mount subvolume specified by an ID number rather than the root subvolume.
+	This allows mounting of subvolumes which are not in the root of the mounted
+	filesystem.
+	You can use "btrfs subvolume list" to see subvolume ID numbers.
+
+  subvolrootid=<objectid> (deprecated)
+	Mount subvolume specified by <objectid> rather than the root subvolume.
+	This allows mounting of subvolumes which are not in the root of the mounted
+	filesystem.
+	You can use "btrfs subvolume show " to see the object ID for a subvolume.
+	
+  thread_pool=<number>
+	The number of worker threads to allocate.  The default number is equal
+	to the number of CPUs + 2, or 8, whichever is smaller.
+
+  user_subvol_rm_allowed
+	Allow subvolumes to be deleted by a non-root user. Use with caution. 
+
+MAILING LIST
+============
 
 There is a Btrfs mailing list hosted on vger.kernel.org. You can
 find details on how to subscribe here:
@@ -49,8 +215,8 @@ http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.comp.file-systems.btrfs
 
 
 
-	IRC
-	===
+IRC
+===
 
 Discussion of Btrfs also occurs on the #btrfs channel of the Freenode
 IRC network.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/backend-api.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/backend-api.txt
index 382d52cdaf2d..277d1e810670 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/backend-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/backend-api.txt
@@ -299,6 +299,15 @@ performed on the denizens of the cache.  These are held in a structure of type:
      enough space in the cache to permit this.
 
 
+ (*) Check coherency state of an object [mandatory]:
+
+	int (*check_consistency)(struct fscache_object *object)
+
+     This method is called to have the cache check the saved auxiliary data of
+     the object against the netfs's idea of the state.  0 should be returned
+     if they're consistent and -ESTALE otherwise.  -ENOMEM and -ERESTARTSYS
+     may also be returned.
+
  (*) Update object [mandatory]:
 
 	int (*update_object)(struct fscache_object *object)
@@ -308,6 +317,18 @@ performed on the denizens of the cache.  These are held in a structure of type:
      obtained by calling object->cookie->def->get_aux()/get_attr().
 
 
+ (*) Invalidate data object [mandatory]:
+
+	int (*invalidate_object)(struct fscache_operation *op)
+
+     This is called to invalidate a data object (as pointed to by op->object).
+     All the data stored for this object should be discarded and an
+     attr_changed operation should be performed.  The caller will follow up
+     with an object update operation.
+
+     fscache_op_complete() must be called on op before returning.
+
+
  (*) Discard object [mandatory]:
 
 	void (*drop_object)(struct fscache_object *object)
@@ -419,7 +440,10 @@ performed on the denizens of the cache.  These are held in a structure of type:
 
      If an I/O error occurs, fscache_io_error() should be called and -ENOBUFS
      returned if possible or fscache_end_io() called with a suitable error
-     code..
+     code.
+
+     fscache_put_retrieval() should be called after a page or pages are dealt
+     with.  This will complete the operation when all pages are dealt with.
 
 
  (*) Request pages be read from cache [mandatory]:
@@ -526,6 +550,27 @@ FS-Cache provides some utilities that a cache backend may make use of:
      error value should be 0 if successful and an error otherwise.
 
 
+ (*) Record that one or more pages being retrieved or allocated have been dealt
+     with:
+
+	void fscache_retrieval_complete(struct fscache_retrieval *op,
+					int n_pages);
+
+     This is called to record the fact that one or more pages have been dealt
+     with and are no longer the concern of this operation.  When the number of
+     pages remaining in the operation reaches 0, the operation will be
+     completed.
+
+
+ (*) Record operation completion:
+
+	void fscache_op_complete(struct fscache_operation *op);
+
+     This is called to record the completion of an operation.  This deducts
+     this operation from the parent object's run state, potentially permitting
+     one or more pending operations to start running.
+
+
  (*) Set highest store limit:
 
 	void fscache_set_store_limit(struct fscache_object *object,
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt
index 7cc6bf2871eb..11a0a40ce445 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt
@@ -32,11 +32,12 @@ This document contains the following sections:
 	 (9) Setting the data file size
 	(10) Page alloc/read/write
 	(11) Page uncaching
-	(12) Index and data file update
+	(12) Index and data file consistency
 	(13) Miscellaneous cookie operations
 	(14) Cookie unregistration
-	(15) Index and data file invalidation
-	(16) FS-Cache specific page flags.
+	(15) Index invalidation
+	(16) Data file invalidation
+	(17) FS-Cache specific page flags.
 
 
 =============================
@@ -432,7 +433,7 @@ to the caller.  The attribute adjustment excludes read and write operations.
 
 
 =====================
-PAGE READ/ALLOC/WRITE
+PAGE ALLOC/READ/WRITE
 =====================
 
 And the sixth step is to store and retrieve pages in the cache.  There are
@@ -498,7 +499,7 @@ Else if there's a copy of the page resident in the cache:
      (*) An argument that's 0 on success or negative for an error code.
 
      If an error occurs, it should be assumed that the page contains no usable
-     data.
+     data.  fscache_readpages_cancel() may need to be called.
 
      end_io_func() will be called in process context if the read is results in
      an error, but it might be called in interrupt context if the read is
@@ -622,6 +623,22 @@ some of the pages being read and some being allocated.  Those pages will have
 been marked appropriately and will need uncaching.
 
 
+CANCELLATION OF UNREAD PAGES
+----------------------------
+
+If one or more pages are passed to fscache_read_or_alloc_pages() but not then
+read from the cache and also not read from the underlying filesystem then
+those pages will need to have any marks and reservations removed.  This can be
+done by calling:
+
+	void fscache_readpages_cancel(struct fscache_cookie *cookie,
+				      struct list_head *pages);
+
+prior to returning to the caller.  The cookie argument should be as passed to
+fscache_read_or_alloc_pages().  Every page in the pages list will be examined
+and any that have PG_fscache set will be uncached.
+
+
 ==============
 PAGE UNCACHING
 ==============
@@ -689,9 +706,18 @@ written to the cache and for the cache to finish with the page generally.  No
 error is returned.
 
 
-==========================
-INDEX AND DATA FILE UPDATE
-==========================
+===============================
+INDEX AND DATA FILE CONSISTENCY
+===============================
+
+To find out whether auxiliary data for an object is up to data within the
+cache, the following function can be called:
+
+	int fscache_check_consistency(struct fscache_cookie *cookie)
+
+This will call back to the netfs to check whether the auxiliary data associated
+with a cookie is correct.  It returns 0 if it is and -ESTALE if it isn't; it
+may also return -ENOMEM and -ERESTARTSYS.
 
 To request an update of the index data for an index or other object, the
 following function should be called:
@@ -767,13 +793,42 @@ the cookies for "child" indices, objects and pages have been relinquished
 first.
 
 
-================================
-INDEX AND DATA FILE INVALIDATION
-================================
+==================
+INDEX INVALIDATION
+==================
+
+There is no direct way to invalidate an index subtree.  To do this, the caller
+should relinquish and retire the cookie they have, and then acquire a new one.
+
+
+======================
+DATA FILE INVALIDATION
+======================
+
+Sometimes it will be necessary to invalidate an object that contains data.
+Typically this will be necessary when the server tells the netfs of a foreign
+change - at which point the netfs has to throw away all the state it had for an
+inode and reload from the server.
+
+To indicate that a cache object should be invalidated, the following function
+can be called:
+
+	void fscache_invalidate(struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+
+This can be called with spinlocks held as it defers the work to a thread pool.
+All extant storage, retrieval and attribute change ops at this point are
+cancelled and discarded.  Some future operations will be rejected until the
+cache has had a chance to insert a barrier in the operations queue.  After
+that, operations will be queued again behind the invalidation operation.
+
+The invalidation operation will perform an attribute change operation and an
+auxiliary data update operation as it is very likely these will have changed.
+
+Using the following function, the netfs can wait for the invalidation operation
+to have reached a point at which it can start submitting ordinary operations
+once again:
 
-There is no direct way to invalidate an index subtree or a data file.  To do
-this, the caller should relinquish and retire the cookie they have, and then
-acquire a new one.
+	void fscache_wait_on_invalidate(struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
 
 
 ===========================
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/object.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/object.txt
index 58313348da87..100ff41127e4 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/object.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/object.txt
@@ -216,7 +216,14 @@ servicing netfs requests:
      The normal running state.  In this state, requests the netfs makes will be
      passed on to the cache.
 
- (6) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_UPDATING.
+ (6) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_INVALIDATING.
+
+     The object is undergoing invalidation.  When the state comes here, it
+     discards all pending read, write and attribute change operations as it is
+     going to clear out the cache entirely and reinitialise it.  It will then
+     continue to the FSCACHE_OBJECT_UPDATING state.
+
+ (7) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_UPDATING.
 
      The state machine comes here to update the object in the cache from the
      netfs's records.  This involves updating the auxiliary data that is used
@@ -225,13 +232,13 @@ servicing netfs requests:
 And there are terminal states in which an object cleans itself up, deallocates
 memory and potentially deletes stuff from disk:
 
- (7) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_LC_DYING.
+ (8) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_LC_DYING.
 
      The object comes here if it is dying because of a lookup or creation
      error.  This would be due to a disk error or system error of some sort.
      Temporary data is cleaned up, and the parent is released.
 
- (8) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_DYING.
+ (9) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_DYING.
 
      The object comes here if it is dying due to an error, because its parent
      cookie has been relinquished by the netfs or because the cache is being
@@ -241,27 +248,27 @@ memory and potentially deletes stuff from disk:
      can destroy themselves.  This object waits for all its children to go away
      before advancing to the next state.
 
- (9) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_ABORT_INIT.
+(10) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_ABORT_INIT.
 
      The object comes to this state if it was waiting on its parent in
      FSCACHE_OBJECT_INIT, but its parent died.  The object will destroy itself
      so that the parent may proceed from the FSCACHE_OBJECT_DYING state.
 
-(10) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_RELEASING.
-(11) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_RECYCLING.
+(11) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_RELEASING.
+(12) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_RECYCLING.
 
      The object comes to one of these two states when dying once it is rid of
      all its children, if it is dying because the netfs relinquished its
      cookie.  In the first state, the cached data is expected to persist, and
      in the second it will be deleted.
 
-(12) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_WITHDRAWING.
+(13) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_WITHDRAWING.
 
      The object transits to this state if the cache decides it wants to
      withdraw the object from service, perhaps to make space, but also due to
      error or just because the whole cache is being withdrawn.
 
-(13) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_DEAD.
+(14) State FSCACHE_OBJECT_DEAD.
 
      The object transits to this state when the in-memory object record is
      ready to be deleted.  The object processor shouldn't ever see an object in
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/operations.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/operations.txt
index b6b070c57cbf..bee2a5f93d60 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/operations.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/operations.txt
@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Operations are used through the following procedure:
      necessary (the object might have died whilst the thread was waiting).
 
      When it has finished doing its processing, it should call
-     fscache_put_operation() on it.
+     fscache_op_complete() and fscache_put_operation() on it.
 
  (4) The operation holds an effective lock upon the object, preventing other
      exclusive ops conflicting until it is released.  The operation can be
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 49cc923a93e3..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-  This is the client VFS module for the Common Internet File System
-  (CIFS) protocol which is the successor to the Server Message Block 
-  (SMB) protocol, the native file sharing mechanism for most early
-  PC operating systems.  CIFS is fully supported by current network
-  file servers such as Windows 2000, Windows 2003 (including  
-  Windows XP) as well by Samba (which provides excellent CIFS
-  server support for Linux and many other operating systems), so
-  this network filesystem client can mount to a wide variety of
-  servers.  The smbfs module should be used instead of this cifs module
-  for mounting to older SMB servers such as OS/2.  The smbfs and cifs
-  modules can coexist and do not conflict.  The CIFS VFS filesystem
-  module is designed to work well with servers that implement the
-  newer versions (dialects) of the SMB/CIFS protocol such as Samba, 
-  the program written by Andrew Tridgell that turns any Unix host 
-  into a SMB/CIFS file server.
-
-  The intent of this module is to provide the most advanced network
-  file system function for CIFS compliant servers, including better
-  POSIX compliance, secure per-user session establishment, high
-  performance safe distributed caching (oplock), optional packet
-  signing, large files, Unicode support and other internationalization
-  improvements. Since both Samba server and this filesystem client support
-  the CIFS Unix extensions, the combination can provide a reasonable 
-  alternative to NFSv4 for fileserving in some Linux to Linux environments,
-  not just in Linux to Windows environments.
-
-  This filesystem has an optional mount utility (mount.cifs) that can
-  be obtained from the project page and installed in the path in the same
-  directory with the other mount helpers (such as mount.smbfs). 
-  Mounting using the cifs filesystem without installing the mount helper
-  requires specifying the server's ip address.
-
-  For Linux 2.4:
-    mount //anything/here /mnt_target -o
-            user=username,pass=password,unc=//ip_address_of_server/sharename
-
-  For Linux 2.5: 
-    mount //ip_address_of_server/sharename /mnt_target -o user=username, pass=password
-
-
-  For more information on the module see the project page at
-
-      http://us1.samba.org/samba/Linux_CIFS_client.html 
-
-  For more information on CIFS see:
-
-      http://www.snia.org/tech_activities/CIFS
-
-  or the Samba site:
-     
-      http://www.samba.org
diff --git a/fs/cifs/AUTHORS b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/AUTHORS
index ea940b1db77b..ca4a67a0bb1e 100644
--- a/fs/cifs/AUTHORS
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/AUTHORS
@@ -39,6 +39,7 @@ Shaggy (Dave Kleikamp) for innumerable small fs suggestions and some good cleanu
 Gunter Kukkukk (testing and suggestions for support of old servers)
 Igor Mammedov (DFS support)
 Jeff Layton (many, many fixes, as well as great work on the cifs Kerberos code)
+Scott Lovenberg
 
 Test case and Bug Report contributors
 -------------------------------------
diff --git a/fs/cifs/CHANGES b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/CHANGES
index bc0025cdd1c9..bc0025cdd1c9 100644
--- a/fs/cifs/CHANGES
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/CHANGES
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/README b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/README
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2d5622f60e11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/README
@@ -0,0 +1,753 @@
+The CIFS VFS support for Linux supports many advanced network filesystem 
+features such as hierarchical dfs like namespace, hardlinks, locking and more.  
+It was designed to comply with the SNIA CIFS Technical Reference (which 
+supersedes the 1992 X/Open SMB Standard) as well as to perform best practice 
+practical interoperability with Windows 2000, Windows XP, Samba and equivalent 
+servers.  This code was developed in participation with the Protocol Freedom
+Information Foundation.
+
+Please see
+  http://protocolfreedom.org/ and
+  http://samba.org/samba/PFIF/
+for more details.
+
+
+For questions or bug reports please contact:
+    sfrench@samba.org (sfrench@us.ibm.com) 
+
+Build instructions:
+==================
+For Linux 2.4:
+1) Get the kernel source (e.g.from http://www.kernel.org)
+and download the cifs vfs source (see the project page
+at http://us1.samba.org/samba/Linux_CIFS_client.html)
+and change directory into the top of the kernel directory
+then patch the kernel (e.g. "patch -p1 < cifs_24.patch") 
+to add the cifs vfs to your kernel configure options if
+it has not already been added (e.g. current SuSE and UL
+users do not need to apply the cifs_24.patch since the cifs vfs is
+already in the kernel configure menu) and then
+mkdir linux/fs/cifs and then copy the current cifs vfs files from
+the cifs download to your kernel build directory e.g.
+
+	cp <cifs_download_dir>/fs/cifs/* to <kernel_download_dir>/fs/cifs
+	
+2) make menuconfig (or make xconfig)
+3) select cifs from within the network filesystem choices
+4) save and exit
+5) make dep
+6) make modules (or "make" if CIFS VFS not to be built as a module)
+
+For Linux 2.6:
+1) Download the kernel (e.g. from http://www.kernel.org)
+and change directory into the top of the kernel directory tree
+(e.g. /usr/src/linux-2.5.73)
+2) make menuconfig (or make xconfig)
+3) select cifs from within the network filesystem choices
+4) save and exit
+5) make
+
+
+Installation instructions:
+=========================
+If you have built the CIFS vfs as module (successfully) simply
+type "make modules_install" (or if you prefer, manually copy the file to
+the modules directory e.g. /lib/modules/2.4.10-4GB/kernel/fs/cifs/cifs.o).
+
+If you have built the CIFS vfs into the kernel itself, follow the instructions
+for your distribution on how to install a new kernel (usually you
+would simply type "make install").
+
+If you do not have the utility mount.cifs (in the Samba 3.0 source tree and on 
+the CIFS VFS web site) copy it to the same directory in which mount.smbfs and 
+similar files reside (usually /sbin).  Although the helper software is not  
+required, mount.cifs is recommended.  Eventually the Samba 3.0 utility program 
+"net" may also be helpful since it may someday provide easier mount syntax for
+users who are used to Windows e.g.
+	net use <mount point> <UNC name or cifs URL>
+Note that running the Winbind pam/nss module (logon service) on all of your
+Linux clients is useful in mapping Uids and Gids consistently across the
+domain to the proper network user.  The mount.cifs mount helper can be
+trivially built from Samba 3.0 or later source e.g. by executing:
+
+	gcc samba/source/client/mount.cifs.c -o mount.cifs
+
+If cifs is built as a module, then the size and number of network buffers
+and maximum number of simultaneous requests to one server can be configured.
+Changing these from their defaults is not recommended. By executing modinfo
+	modinfo kernel/fs/cifs/cifs.ko
+on kernel/fs/cifs/cifs.ko the list of configuration changes that can be made
+at module initialization time (by running insmod cifs.ko) can be seen.
+
+Allowing User Mounts
+====================
+To permit users to mount and unmount over directories they own is possible
+with the cifs vfs.  A way to enable such mounting is to mark the mount.cifs
+utility as suid (e.g. "chmod +s /sbin/mount.cifs). To enable users to 
+umount shares they mount requires
+1) mount.cifs version 1.4 or later
+2) an entry for the share in /etc/fstab indicating that a user may
+unmount it e.g.
+//server/usersharename  /mnt/username cifs user 0 0
+
+Note that when the mount.cifs utility is run suid (allowing user mounts), 
+in order to reduce risks, the "nosuid" mount flag is passed in on mount to
+disallow execution of an suid program mounted on the remote target.
+When mount is executed as root, nosuid is not passed in by default,
+and execution of suid programs on the remote target would be enabled
+by default. This can be changed, as with nfs and other filesystems, 
+by simply specifying "nosuid" among the mount options. For user mounts 
+though to be able to pass the suid flag to mount requires rebuilding 
+mount.cifs with the following flag: 
+ 
+        gcc samba/source/client/mount.cifs.c -DCIFS_ALLOW_USR_SUID -o mount.cifs
+
+There is a corresponding manual page for cifs mounting in the Samba 3.0 and
+later source tree in docs/manpages/mount.cifs.8 
+
+Allowing User Unmounts
+======================
+To permit users to ummount directories that they have user mounted (see above),
+the utility umount.cifs may be used.  It may be invoked directly, or if 
+umount.cifs is placed in /sbin, umount can invoke the cifs umount helper
+(at least for most versions of the umount utility) for umount of cifs
+mounts, unless umount is invoked with -i (which will avoid invoking a umount
+helper). As with mount.cifs, to enable user unmounts umount.cifs must be marked
+as suid (e.g. "chmod +s /sbin/umount.cifs") or equivalent (some distributions
+allow adding entries to a file to the /etc/permissions file to achieve the
+equivalent suid effect).  For this utility to succeed the target path
+must be a cifs mount, and the uid of the current user must match the uid
+of the user who mounted the resource.
+
+Also note that the customary way of allowing user mounts and unmounts is 
+(instead of using mount.cifs and unmount.cifs as suid) to add a line
+to the file /etc/fstab for each //server/share you wish to mount, but
+this can become unwieldy when potential mount targets include many
+or  unpredictable UNC names.
+
+Samba Considerations 
+==================== 
+To get the maximum benefit from the CIFS VFS, we recommend using a server that 
+supports the SNIA CIFS Unix Extensions standard (e.g.  Samba 2.2.5 or later or 
+Samba 3.0) but the CIFS vfs works fine with a wide variety of CIFS servers.  
+Note that uid, gid and file permissions will display default values if you do 
+not have a server that supports the Unix extensions for CIFS (such as Samba 
+2.2.5 or later).  To enable the Unix CIFS Extensions in the Samba server, add 
+the line: 
+
+	unix extensions = yes
+	
+to your smb.conf file on the server.  Note that the following smb.conf settings 
+are also useful (on the Samba server) when the majority of clients are Unix or 
+Linux: 
+
+	case sensitive = yes
+	delete readonly = yes 
+	ea support = yes
+
+Note that server ea support is required for supporting xattrs from the Linux
+cifs client, and that EA support is present in later versions of Samba (e.g. 
+3.0.6 and later (also EA support works in all versions of Windows, at least to
+shares on NTFS filesystems).  Extended Attribute (xattr) support is an optional
+feature of most Linux filesystems which may require enabling via
+make menuconfig. Client support for extended attributes (user xattr) can be
+disabled on a per-mount basis by specifying "nouser_xattr" on mount.
+
+The CIFS client can get and set POSIX ACLs (getfacl, setfacl) to Samba servers
+version 3.10 and later.  Setting POSIX ACLs requires enabling both XATTR and 
+then POSIX support in the CIFS configuration options when building the cifs
+module.  POSIX ACL support can be disabled on a per mount basic by specifying
+"noacl" on mount.
+ 
+Some administrators may want to change Samba's smb.conf "map archive" and 
+"create mask" parameters from the default.  Unless the create mask is changed
+newly created files can end up with an unnecessarily restrictive default mode,
+which may not be what you want, although if the CIFS Unix extensions are
+enabled on the server and client, subsequent setattr calls (e.g. chmod) can
+fix the mode.  Note that creating special devices (mknod) remotely 
+may require specifying a mkdev function to Samba if you are not using 
+Samba 3.0.6 or later.  For more information on these see the manual pages
+("man smb.conf") on the Samba server system.  Note that the cifs vfs,
+unlike the smbfs vfs, does not read the smb.conf on the client system 
+(the few optional settings are passed in on mount via -o parameters instead).  
+Note that Samba 2.2.7 or later includes a fix that allows the CIFS VFS to delete
+open files (required for strict POSIX compliance).  Windows Servers already 
+supported this feature. Samba server does not allow symlinks that refer to files
+outside of the share, so in Samba versions prior to 3.0.6, most symlinks to
+files with absolute paths (ie beginning with slash) such as:
+	 ln -s /mnt/foo bar
+would be forbidden. Samba 3.0.6 server or later includes the ability to create 
+such symlinks safely by converting unsafe symlinks (ie symlinks to server 
+files that are outside of the share) to a samba specific format on the server
+that is ignored by local server applications and non-cifs clients and that will
+not be traversed by the Samba server).  This is opaque to the Linux client
+application using the cifs vfs. Absolute symlinks will work to Samba 3.0.5 or
+later, but only for remote clients using the CIFS Unix extensions, and will
+be invisbile to Windows clients and typically will not affect local
+applications running on the same server as Samba.  
+
+Use instructions:
+================
+Once the CIFS VFS support is built into the kernel or installed as a module 
+(cifs.o), you can use mount syntax like the following to access Samba or Windows 
+servers: 
+
+  mount -t cifs //9.53.216.11/e$ /mnt -o user=myname,pass=mypassword
+
+Before -o the option -v may be specified to make the mount.cifs
+mount helper display the mount steps more verbosely.  
+After -o the following commonly used cifs vfs specific options
+are supported:
+
+  user=<username>
+  pass=<password>
+  domain=<domain name>
+  
+Other cifs mount options are described below.  Use of TCP names (in addition to
+ip addresses) is available if the mount helper (mount.cifs) is installed. If
+you do not trust the server to which are mounted, or if you do not have
+cifs signing enabled (and the physical network is insecure), consider use
+of the standard mount options "noexec" and "nosuid" to reduce the risk of 
+running an altered binary on your local system (downloaded from a hostile server
+or altered by a hostile router).
+
+Although mounting using format corresponding to the CIFS URL specification is
+not possible in mount.cifs yet, it is possible to use an alternate format
+for the server and sharename (which is somewhat similar to NFS style mount
+syntax) instead of the more widely used UNC format (i.e. \\server\share):
+  mount -t cifs tcp_name_of_server:share_name /mnt -o user=myname,pass=mypasswd
+
+When using the mount helper mount.cifs, passwords may be specified via alternate
+mechanisms, instead of specifying it after -o using the normal "pass=" syntax
+on the command line:
+1) By including it in a credential file. Specify credentials=filename as one
+of the mount options. Credential files contain two lines
+        username=someuser
+        password=your_password
+2) By specifying the password in the PASSWD environment variable (similarly
+the user name can be taken from the USER environment variable).
+3) By specifying the password in a file by name via PASSWD_FILE
+4) By specifying the password in a file by file descriptor via PASSWD_FD
+
+If no password is provided, mount.cifs will prompt for password entry
+
+Restrictions
+============
+Servers must support either "pure-TCP" (port 445 TCP/IP CIFS connections) or RFC 
+1001/1002 support for "Netbios-Over-TCP/IP." This is not likely to be a 
+problem as most servers support this.
+
+Valid filenames differ between Windows and Linux.  Windows typically restricts
+filenames which contain certain reserved characters (e.g.the character : 
+which is used to delimit the beginning of a stream name by Windows), while
+Linux allows a slightly wider set of valid characters in filenames. Windows
+servers can remap such characters when an explicit mapping is specified in
+the Server's registry.  Samba starting with version 3.10 will allow such 
+filenames (ie those which contain valid Linux characters, which normally
+would be forbidden for Windows/CIFS semantics) as long as the server is
+configured for Unix Extensions (and the client has not disabled
+/proc/fs/cifs/LinuxExtensionsEnabled).
+  
+
+CIFS VFS Mount Options
+======================
+A partial list of the supported mount options follows:
+  user		The user name to use when trying to establish
+		the CIFS session.
+  password	The user password.  If the mount helper is
+		installed, the user will be prompted for password
+		if not supplied.
+  ip		The ip address of the target server
+  unc		The target server Universal Network Name (export) to 
+		mount.	
+  domain	Set the SMB/CIFS workgroup name prepended to the
+		username during CIFS session establishment
+  forceuid	Set the default uid for inodes to the uid
+		passed in on mount. For mounts to servers
+		which do support the CIFS Unix extensions, such as a
+		properly configured Samba server, the server provides
+		the uid, gid and mode so this parameter should not be
+		specified unless the server and clients uid and gid
+		numbering differ.  If the server and client are in the
+		same domain (e.g. running winbind or nss_ldap) and
+		the server supports the Unix Extensions then the uid
+		and gid can be retrieved from the server (and uid
+		and gid would not have to be specifed on the mount. 
+		For servers which do not support the CIFS Unix
+		extensions, the default uid (and gid) returned on lookup
+		of existing files will be the uid (gid) of the person
+		who executed the mount (root, except when mount.cifs
+		is configured setuid for user mounts) unless the "uid=" 
+		(gid) mount option is specified. Also note that permission
+		checks (authorization checks) on accesses to a file occur
+		at the server, but there are cases in which an administrator
+		may want to restrict at the client as well.  For those
+		servers which do not report a uid/gid owner
+		(such as Windows), permissions can also be checked at the
+		client, and a crude form of client side permission checking 
+		can be enabled by specifying file_mode and dir_mode on 
+		the client.  (default)
+  forcegid	(similar to above but for the groupid instead of uid) (default)
+  noforceuid	Fill in file owner information (uid) by requesting it from
+		the server if possible. With this option, the value given in
+		the uid= option (on mount) will only be used if the server
+		can not support returning uids on inodes.
+  noforcegid	(similar to above but for the group owner, gid, instead of uid)
+  uid		Set the default uid for inodes, and indicate to the
+		cifs kernel driver which local user mounted. If the server
+		supports the unix extensions the default uid is
+		not used to fill in the owner fields of inodes (files)
+		unless the "forceuid" parameter is specified.
+  gid		Set the default gid for inodes (similar to above).
+  file_mode     If CIFS Unix extensions are not supported by the server
+		this overrides the default mode for file inodes.
+  fsc		Enable local disk caching using FS-Cache (off by default). This
+  		option could be useful to improve performance on a slow link,
+		heavily loaded server and/or network where reading from the
+		disk is faster than reading from the server (over the network).
+		This could also impact scalability positively as the
+		number of calls to the server are reduced. However, local
+		caching is not suitable for all workloads for e.g. read-once
+		type workloads. So, you need to consider carefully your
+		workload/scenario before using this option. Currently, local
+		disk caching is functional for CIFS files opened as read-only.
+  dir_mode      If CIFS Unix extensions are not supported by the server 
+		this overrides the default mode for directory inodes.
+  port		attempt to contact the server on this tcp port, before
+		trying the usual ports (port 445, then 139).
+  iocharset     Codepage used to convert local path names to and from
+		Unicode. Unicode is used by default for network path
+		names if the server supports it.  If iocharset is
+		not specified then the nls_default specified
+		during the local client kernel build will be used.
+		If server does not support Unicode, this parameter is
+		unused.
+  rsize		default read size (usually 16K). The client currently
+		can not use rsize larger than CIFSMaxBufSize. CIFSMaxBufSize
+		defaults to 16K and may be changed (from 8K to the maximum
+		kmalloc size allowed by your kernel) at module install time
+		for cifs.ko. Setting CIFSMaxBufSize to a very large value
+		will cause cifs to use more memory and may reduce performance
+		in some cases.  To use rsize greater than 127K (the original
+		cifs protocol maximum) also requires that the server support
+		a new Unix Capability flag (for very large read) which some
+		newer servers (e.g. Samba 3.0.26 or later) do. rsize can be
+		set from a minimum of 2048 to a maximum of 130048 (127K or
+		CIFSMaxBufSize, whichever is smaller)
+  wsize		default write size (default 57344)
+		maximum wsize currently allowed by CIFS is 57344 (fourteen
+		4096 byte pages)
+  actimeo=n	attribute cache timeout in seconds (default 1 second).
+		After this timeout, the cifs client requests fresh attribute
+		information from the server. This option allows to tune the
+		attribute cache timeout to suit the workload needs. Shorter
+		timeouts mean better the cache coherency, but increased number
+		of calls to the server. Longer timeouts mean reduced number
+		of calls to the server at the expense of less stricter cache
+		coherency checks (i.e. incorrect attribute cache for a short
+		period of time).
+  rw		mount the network share read-write (note that the
+		server may still consider the share read-only)
+  ro		mount network share read-only
+  version	used to distinguish different versions of the
+		mount helper utility (not typically needed)
+  sep		if first mount option (after the -o), overrides
+		the comma as the separator between the mount
+		parms. e.g.
+			-o user=myname,password=mypassword,domain=mydom
+		could be passed instead with period as the separator by
+			-o sep=.user=myname.password=mypassword.domain=mydom
+		this might be useful when comma is contained within username
+		or password or domain. This option is less important
+		when the cifs mount helper cifs.mount (version 1.1 or later)
+		is used.
+  nosuid        Do not allow remote executables with the suid bit 
+		program to be executed.  This is only meaningful for mounts
+		to servers such as Samba which support the CIFS Unix Extensions.
+		If you do not trust the servers in your network (your mount
+		targets) it is recommended that you specify this option for
+		greater security.
+  exec		Permit execution of binaries on the mount.
+  noexec	Do not permit execution of binaries on the mount.
+  dev		Recognize block devices on the remote mount.
+  nodev		Do not recognize devices on the remote mount.
+  suid          Allow remote files on this mountpoint with suid enabled to 
+		be executed (default for mounts when executed as root,
+		nosuid is default for user mounts).
+  credentials   Although ignored by the cifs kernel component, it is used by 
+		the mount helper, mount.cifs. When mount.cifs is installed it
+		opens and reads the credential file specified in order  
+		to obtain the userid and password arguments which are passed to
+		the cifs vfs.
+  guest         Although ignored by the kernel component, the mount.cifs
+		mount helper will not prompt the user for a password
+		if guest is specified on the mount options.  If no
+		password is specified a null password will be used.
+  perm          Client does permission checks (vfs_permission check of uid
+		and gid of the file against the mode and desired operation),
+		Note that this is in addition to the normal ACL check on the
+		target machine done by the server software. 
+		Client permission checking is enabled by default.
+  noperm        Client does not do permission checks.  This can expose
+		files on this mount to access by other users on the local
+		client system. It is typically only needed when the server
+		supports the CIFS Unix Extensions but the UIDs/GIDs on the
+		client and server system do not match closely enough to allow
+		access by the user doing the mount, but it may be useful with
+		non CIFS Unix Extension mounts for cases in which the default
+		mode is specified on the mount but is not to be enforced on the
+		client (e.g. perhaps when MultiUserMount is enabled)
+		Note that this does not affect the normal ACL check on the
+		target machine done by the server software (of the server
+		ACL against the user name provided at mount time).
+  serverino	Use server's inode numbers instead of generating automatically
+		incrementing inode numbers on the client.  Although this will
+		make it easier to spot hardlinked files (as they will have
+		the same inode numbers) and inode numbers may be persistent,
+		note that the server does not guarantee that the inode numbers
+		are unique if multiple server side mounts are exported under a
+		single share (since inode numbers on the servers might not
+		be unique if multiple filesystems are mounted under the same
+		shared higher level directory).  Note that some older
+		(e.g. pre-Windows 2000) do not support returning UniqueIDs
+		or the CIFS Unix Extensions equivalent and for those
+		this mount option will have no effect.  Exporting cifs mounts
+		under nfsd requires this mount option on the cifs mount.
+		This is now the default if server supports the 
+		required network operation.
+  noserverino   Client generates inode numbers (rather than using the actual one
+		from the server). These inode numbers will vary after
+		unmount or reboot which can confuse some applications,
+		but not all server filesystems support unique inode
+		numbers.
+  setuids       If the CIFS Unix extensions are negotiated with the server
+		the client will attempt to set the effective uid and gid of
+		the local process on newly created files, directories, and
+		devices (create, mkdir, mknod).  If the CIFS Unix Extensions
+		are not negotiated, for newly created files and directories
+		instead of using the default uid and gid specified on
+		the mount, cache the new file's uid and gid locally which means
+		that the uid for the file can change when the inode is
+	        reloaded (or the user remounts the share).
+  nosetuids     The client will not attempt to set the uid and gid on
+		on newly created files, directories, and devices (create, 
+		mkdir, mknod) which will result in the server setting the
+		uid and gid to the default (usually the server uid of the
+		user who mounted the share).  Letting the server (rather than
+		the client) set the uid and gid is the default. If the CIFS
+		Unix Extensions are not negotiated then the uid and gid for
+		new files will appear to be the uid (gid) of the mounter or the
+		uid (gid) parameter specified on the mount.
+  netbiosname   When mounting to servers via port 139, specifies the RFC1001
+		source name to use to represent the client netbios machine 
+		name when doing the RFC1001 netbios session initialize.
+  direct        Do not do inode data caching on files opened on this mount.
+		This precludes mmapping files on this mount. In some cases
+		with fast networks and little or no caching benefits on the
+		client (e.g. when the application is doing large sequential
+		reads bigger than page size without rereading the same data) 
+		this can provide better performance than the default
+		behavior which caches reads (readahead) and writes 
+		(writebehind) through the local Linux client pagecache 
+		if oplock (caching token) is granted and held. Note that
+		direct allows write operations larger than page size
+		to be sent to the server.
+  strictcache   Use for switching on strict cache mode. In this mode the
+		client read from the cache all the time it has Oplock Level II,
+		otherwise - read from the server. All written data are stored
+		in the cache, but if the client doesn't have Exclusive Oplock,
+		it writes the data to the server.
+  rwpidforward  Forward pid of a process who opened a file to any read or write
+		operation on that file. This prevent applications like WINE
+		from failing on read and write if we use mandatory brlock style.
+  acl   	Allow setfacl and getfacl to manage posix ACLs if server
+		supports them.  (default)
+  noacl 	Do not allow setfacl and getfacl calls on this mount
+  user_xattr    Allow getting and setting user xattrs (those attributes whose
+		name begins with "user." or "os2.") as OS/2 EAs (extended
+		attributes) to the server.  This allows support of the
+		setfattr and getfattr utilities. (default)
+  nouser_xattr  Do not allow getfattr/setfattr to get/set/list xattrs 
+  mapchars      Translate six of the seven reserved characters (not backslash)
+			*?<>|:
+		to the remap range (above 0xF000), which also
+		allows the CIFS client to recognize files created with
+		such characters by Windows's POSIX emulation. This can
+		also be useful when mounting to most versions of Samba
+		(which also forbids creating and opening files
+		whose names contain any of these seven characters).
+		This has no effect if the server does not support
+		Unicode on the wire.
+ nomapchars     Do not translate any of these seven characters (default).
+ nocase         Request case insensitive path name matching (case
+		sensitive is the default if the server supports it).
+		(mount option "ignorecase" is identical to "nocase")
+ posixpaths     If CIFS Unix extensions are supported, attempt to
+		negotiate posix path name support which allows certain
+		characters forbidden in typical CIFS filenames, without
+		requiring remapping. (default)
+ noposixpaths   If CIFS Unix extensions are supported, do not request
+		posix path name support (this may cause servers to
+		reject creatingfile with certain reserved characters).
+ nounix         Disable the CIFS Unix Extensions for this mount (tree
+		connection). This is rarely needed, but it may be useful
+		in order to turn off multiple settings all at once (ie
+		posix acls, posix locks, posix paths, symlink support
+		and retrieving uids/gids/mode from the server) or to
+		work around a bug in server which implement the Unix
+		Extensions.
+ nobrl          Do not send byte range lock requests to the server.
+		This is necessary for certain applications that break
+		with cifs style mandatory byte range locks (and most
+		cifs servers do not yet support requesting advisory
+		byte range locks).
+ forcemandatorylock Even if the server supports posix (advisory) byte range
+		locking, send only mandatory lock requests.  For some
+		(presumably rare) applications, originally coded for
+		DOS/Windows, which require Windows style mandatory byte range
+		locking, they may be able to take advantage of this option,
+		forcing the cifs client to only send mandatory locks
+		even if the cifs server would support posix advisory locks.
+		"forcemand" is accepted as a shorter form of this mount
+		option.
+ nostrictsync   If this mount option is set, when an application does an
+		fsync call then the cifs client does not send an SMB Flush
+		to the server (to force the server to write all dirty data
+		for this file immediately to disk), although cifs still sends
+		all dirty (cached) file data to the server and waits for the
+		server to respond to the write.  Since SMB Flush can be
+		very slow, and some servers may be reliable enough (to risk
+		delaying slightly flushing the data to disk on the server),
+		turning on this option may be useful to improve performance for
+		applications that fsync too much, at a small risk of server
+		crash.  If this mount option is not set, by default cifs will
+		send an SMB flush request (and wait for a response) on every
+		fsync call.
+ nodfs          Disable DFS (global name space support) even if the
+		server claims to support it.  This can help work around
+		a problem with parsing of DFS paths with Samba server
+		versions 3.0.24 and 3.0.25.
+ remount        remount the share (often used to change from ro to rw mounts
+	        or vice versa)
+ cifsacl        Report mode bits (e.g. on stat) based on the Windows ACL for
+	        the file. (EXPERIMENTAL)
+ servern        Specify the server 's netbios name (RFC1001 name) to use
+		when attempting to setup a session to the server. 
+		This is needed for mounting to some older servers (such
+		as OS/2 or Windows 98 and Windows ME) since they do not
+		support a default server name.  A server name can be up
+		to 15 characters long and is usually uppercased.
+ sfu            When the CIFS Unix Extensions are not negotiated, attempt to
+		create device files and fifos in a format compatible with
+		Services for Unix (SFU).  In addition retrieve bits 10-12
+		of the mode via the SETFILEBITS extended attribute (as
+		SFU does).  In the future the bottom 9 bits of the
+		mode also will be emulated using queries of the security
+		descriptor (ACL).
+ mfsymlinks     Enable support for Minshall+French symlinks
+		(see http://wiki.samba.org/index.php/UNIX_Extensions#Minshall.2BFrench_symlinks)
+		This option is ignored when specified together with the
+		'sfu' option. Minshall+French symlinks are used even if
+		the server supports the CIFS Unix Extensions.
+ sign           Must use packet signing (helps avoid unwanted data modification
+		by intermediate systems in the route).  Note that signing
+		does not work with lanman or plaintext authentication.
+ seal           Must seal (encrypt) all data on this mounted share before
+		sending on the network.  Requires support for Unix Extensions.
+		Note that this differs from the sign mount option in that it
+		causes encryption of data sent over this mounted share but other
+		shares mounted to the same server are unaffected.
+ locallease     This option is rarely needed. Fcntl F_SETLEASE is
+		used by some applications such as Samba and NFSv4 server to
+		check to see whether a file is cacheable.  CIFS has no way
+		to explicitly request a lease, but can check whether a file
+		is cacheable (oplocked).  Unfortunately, even if a file
+		is not oplocked, it could still be cacheable (ie cifs client
+		could grant fcntl leases if no other local processes are using
+		the file) for cases for example such as when the server does not
+		support oplocks and the user is sure that the only updates to
+		the file will be from this client. Specifying this mount option
+		will allow the cifs client to check for leases (only) locally
+		for files which are not oplocked instead of denying leases
+		in that case. (EXPERIMENTAL)
+ sec            Security mode.  Allowed values are:
+			none	attempt to connection as a null user (no name)
+			krb5    Use Kerberos version 5 authentication
+			krb5i   Use Kerberos authentication and packet signing
+			ntlm    Use NTLM password hashing (default)
+			ntlmi   Use NTLM password hashing with signing (if
+				/proc/fs/cifs/PacketSigningEnabled on or if
+				server requires signing also can be the default) 
+			ntlmv2  Use NTLMv2 password hashing      
+			ntlmv2i Use NTLMv2 password hashing with packet signing
+			lanman  (if configured in kernel config) use older
+				lanman hash
+hard		Retry file operations if server is not responding
+soft		Limit retries to unresponsive servers (usually only
+		one retry) before returning an error.  (default)
+
+The mount.cifs mount helper also accepts a few mount options before -o
+including:
+
+	-S      take password from stdin (equivalent to setting the environment
+		variable "PASSWD_FD=0"
+	-V      print mount.cifs version
+	-?      display simple usage information
+
+With most 2.6 kernel versions of modutils, the version of the cifs kernel
+module can be displayed via modinfo.
+
+Misc /proc/fs/cifs Flags and Debug Info
+=======================================
+Informational pseudo-files:
+DebugData		Displays information about active CIFS sessions and
+			shares, features enabled as well as the cifs.ko
+			version.
+Stats			Lists summary resource usage information as well as per
+			share statistics, if CONFIG_CIFS_STATS in enabled
+			in the kernel configuration.
+
+Configuration pseudo-files:
+PacketSigningEnabled	If set to one, cifs packet signing is enabled
+			and will be used if the server requires 
+			it.  If set to two, cifs packet signing is
+			required even if the server considers packet
+			signing optional. (default 1)
+SecurityFlags		Flags which control security negotiation and
+			also packet signing. Authentication (may/must)
+			flags (e.g. for NTLM and/or NTLMv2) may be combined with
+			the signing flags.  Specifying two different password
+			hashing mechanisms (as "must use") on the other hand 
+			does not make much sense. Default flags are 
+				0x07007 
+			(NTLM, NTLMv2 and packet signing allowed).  The maximum 
+			allowable flags if you want to allow mounts to servers
+			using weaker password hashes is 0x37037 (lanman,
+			plaintext, ntlm, ntlmv2, signing allowed).  Some
+			SecurityFlags require the corresponding menuconfig
+			options to be enabled (lanman and plaintext require
+			CONFIG_CIFS_WEAK_PW_HASH for example).  Enabling
+			plaintext authentication currently requires also
+			enabling lanman authentication in the security flags
+			because the cifs module only supports sending
+			laintext passwords using the older lanman dialect
+			form of the session setup SMB.  (e.g. for authentication
+			using plain text passwords, set the SecurityFlags
+			to 0x30030):
+ 
+			may use packet signing 				0x00001
+			must use packet signing				0x01001
+			may use NTLM (most common password hash)	0x00002
+			must use NTLM					0x02002
+			may use NTLMv2					0x00004
+			must use NTLMv2					0x04004
+			may use Kerberos security			0x00008
+			must use Kerberos				0x08008
+			may use lanman (weak) password hash  		0x00010
+			must use lanman password hash			0x10010
+			may use plaintext passwords    			0x00020
+			must use plaintext passwords			0x20020
+			(reserved for future packet encryption)		0x00040
+
+cifsFYI			If set to non-zero value, additional debug information
+			will be logged to the system error log.  This field
+			contains three flags controlling different classes of
+			debugging entries.  The maximum value it can be set
+			to is 7 which enables all debugging points (default 0).
+			Some debugging statements are not compiled into the
+			cifs kernel unless CONFIG_CIFS_DEBUG2 is enabled in the
+			kernel configuration. cifsFYI may be set to one or
+			nore of the following flags (7 sets them all):
+
+			log cifs informational messages			0x01
+			log return codes from cifs entry points		0x02
+			log slow responses (ie which take longer than 1 second)
+			  CONFIG_CIFS_STATS2 must be enabled in .config	0x04
+				
+				
+traceSMB		If set to one, debug information is logged to the
+			system error log with the start of smb requests
+			and responses (default 0)
+LookupCacheEnable	If set to one, inode information is kept cached
+			for one second improving performance of lookups
+			(default 1)
+OplockEnabled		If set to one, safe distributed caching enabled.
+			(default 1)
+LinuxExtensionsEnabled	If set to one then the client will attempt to
+			use the CIFS "UNIX" extensions which are optional
+			protocol enhancements that allow CIFS servers
+			to return accurate UID/GID information as well
+			as support symbolic links. If you use servers
+			such as Samba that support the CIFS Unix
+			extensions but do not want to use symbolic link
+			support and want to map the uid and gid fields 
+			to values supplied at mount (rather than the 
+			actual values, then set this to zero. (default 1)
+
+These experimental features and tracing can be enabled by changing flags in 
+/proc/fs/cifs (after the cifs module has been installed or built into the 
+kernel, e.g.  insmod cifs).  To enable a feature set it to 1 e.g.  to enable 
+tracing to the kernel message log type: 
+
+	echo 7 > /proc/fs/cifs/cifsFYI
+	
+cifsFYI functions as a bit mask. Setting it to 1 enables additional kernel
+logging of various informational messages.  2 enables logging of non-zero
+SMB return codes while 4 enables logging of requests that take longer
+than one second to complete (except for byte range lock requests). 
+Setting it to 4 requires defining CONFIG_CIFS_STATS2 manually in the
+source code (typically by setting it in the beginning of cifsglob.h),
+and setting it to seven enables all three.  Finally, tracing
+the start of smb requests and responses can be enabled via:
+
+	echo 1 > /proc/fs/cifs/traceSMB
+
+Per share (per client mount) statistics are available in /proc/fs/cifs/Stats
+if the kernel was configured with cifs statistics enabled.  The statistics
+represent the number of successful (ie non-zero return code from the server) 
+SMB responses to some of the more common commands (open, delete, mkdir etc.).
+Also recorded is the total bytes read and bytes written to the server for
+that share.  Note that due to client caching effects this can be less than the
+number of bytes read and written by the application running on the client.
+The statistics for the number of total SMBs and oplock breaks are different in
+that they represent all for that share, not just those for which the server
+returned success.
+	
+Also note that "cat /proc/fs/cifs/DebugData" will display information about
+the active sessions and the shares that are mounted.
+
+Enabling Kerberos (extended security) works but requires version 1.2 or later
+of the helper program cifs.upcall to be present and to be configured in the
+/etc/request-key.conf file.  The cifs.upcall helper program is from the Samba
+project(http://www.samba.org). NTLM and NTLMv2 and LANMAN support do not
+require this helper. Note that NTLMv2 security (which does not require the
+cifs.upcall helper program), instead of using Kerberos, is sufficient for
+some use cases.
+
+DFS support allows transparent redirection to shares in an MS-DFS name space.
+In addition, DFS support for target shares which are specified as UNC
+names which begin with host names (rather than IP addresses) requires
+a user space helper (such as cifs.upcall) to be present in order to
+translate host names to ip address, and the user space helper must also
+be configured in the file /etc/request-key.conf.  Samba, Windows servers and
+many NAS appliances support DFS as a way of constructing a global name
+space to ease network configuration and improve reliability.
+
+To use cifs Kerberos and DFS support, the Linux keyutils package should be
+installed and something like the following lines should be added to the
+/etc/request-key.conf file:
+
+create cifs.spnego * * /usr/local/sbin/cifs.upcall %k
+create dns_resolver * * /usr/local/sbin/cifs.upcall %k
+
+CIFS kernel module parameters
+=============================
+These module parameters can be specified or modified either during the time of
+module loading or during the runtime by using the interface
+	/proc/module/cifs/parameters/<param>
+
+i.e. echo "value" > /sys/module/cifs/parameters/<param>
+
+1. enable_oplocks - Enable or disable oplocks. Oplocks are enabled by default.
+		    [Y/y/1]. To disable use any of [N/n/0].
+
diff --git a/fs/cifs/TODO b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO
index 355abcdcda98..355abcdcda98 100644
--- a/fs/cifs/TODO
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2fac91ac96cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+  This is the client VFS module for the Common Internet File System
+  (CIFS) protocol which is the successor to the Server Message Block 
+  (SMB) protocol, the native file sharing mechanism for most early
+  PC operating systems. New and improved versions of CIFS are now
+  called SMB2 and SMB3. These dialects are also supported by the
+  CIFS VFS module. CIFS is fully supported by network
+  file servers such as Windows 2000, 2003, 2008 and 2012
+  as well by Samba (which provides excellent CIFS
+  server support for Linux and many other operating systems), so
+  this network filesystem client can mount to a wide variety of
+  servers.
+
+  The intent of this module is to provide the most advanced network
+  file system function for CIFS compliant servers, including better
+  POSIX compliance, secure per-user session establishment, high
+  performance safe distributed caching (oplock), optional packet
+  signing, large files, Unicode support and other internationalization
+  improvements. Since both Samba server and this filesystem client support
+  the CIFS Unix extensions, the combination can provide a reasonable 
+  alternative to NFSv4 for fileserving in some Linux to Linux environments,
+  not just in Linux to Windows environments.
+
+  This filesystem has an mount utility (mount.cifs) that can be obtained from
+
+      https://ftp.samba.org/pub/linux-cifs/cifs-utils/
+
+  It must be installed in the directory with the other mount helpers.
+
+  For more information on the module see the project wiki page at
+
+      https://wiki.samba.org/index.php/LinuxCIFS_utils
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/winucase_convert.pl b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/winucase_convert.pl
new file mode 100755
index 000000000000..322a9c833f23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/winucase_convert.pl
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+#!/usr/bin/perl -w
+#
+# winucase_convert.pl -- convert "Windows 8 Upper Case Mapping Table.txt" to
+#                        a two-level set of C arrays.
+#
+#   Copyright 2013: Jeff Layton <jlayton@redhat.com>
+#
+#   This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#   it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#   the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
+#   (at your option) any later version.
+#
+#   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+#   GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#   along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+#
+
+while(<>) {
+	next if (!/^0x(..)(..)\t0x(....)\t/);
+	$firstchar = hex($1);
+	$secondchar = hex($2);
+	$uppercase = hex($3);
+
+	$top[$firstchar][$secondchar] = $uppercase;
+}
+
+for ($i = 0; $i < 256; $i++) {
+	next if (!$top[$i]);
+
+	printf("static const wchar_t t2_%2.2x[256] = {", $i);
+	for ($j = 0; $j < 256; $j++) {
+		if (($j % 8) == 0) {
+			print "\n\t";
+		} else {
+			print " ";
+		}
+		printf("0x%4.4x,", $top[$i][$j] ? $top[$i][$j] : 0);
+	}
+	print "\n};\n\n";
+}
+
+printf("static const wchar_t *const toplevel[256] = {", $i);
+for ($i = 0; $i < 256; $i++) {
+	if (($i % 8) == 0) {
+		print "\n\t";
+	} elsif ($top[$i]) {
+		print " ";
+	} else {
+		print "  ";
+	}
+
+	if ($top[$i]) {
+		printf("t2_%2.2x,", $i);
+	} else {
+		print "NULL,";
+	}
+}
+print "\n};\n\n";
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt
index 7a34f827989c..3a863f692728 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt
@@ -15,8 +15,8 @@ Debugfs is typically mounted with a command like:
     mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug
 
 (Or an equivalent /etc/fstab line).
-The debugfs root directory is accessible by anyone by default. To
-restrict access to the tree the "uid", "gid" and "mode" mount
+The debugfs root directory is accessible only to the root user by
+default. To change access to the tree the "uid", "gid" and "mode" mount
 options can be used.
 
 Note that the debugfs API is exported GPL-only to modules.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/efivarfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/efivarfs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c477af086e65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/efivarfs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+efivarfs - a (U)EFI variable filesystem
+
+The efivarfs filesystem was created to address the shortcomings of
+using entries in sysfs to maintain EFI variables. The old sysfs EFI
+variables code only supported variables of up to 1024 bytes. This
+limitation existed in version 0.99 of the EFI specification, but was
+removed before any full releases. Since variables can now be larger
+than a single page, sysfs isn't the best interface for this.
+
+Variables can be created, deleted and modified with the efivarfs
+filesystem.
+
+efivarfs is typically mounted like this,
+
+	mount -t efivarfs none /sys/firmware/efi/efivars
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt
index b100adc38adb..7ed0d17d6721 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt
@@ -26,11 +26,12 @@ journal=inum		When a journal already exists, this option is ignored.
 			Otherwise, it specifies the number of the inode which
 			will represent the ext3 file system's journal file.
 
+journal_path=path
 journal_dev=devnum	When the external journal device's major/minor numbers
-			have changed, this option allows the user to specify
+			have changed, these options allow the user to specify
 			the new journal location.  The journal device is
-			identified through its new major/minor numbers encoded
-			in devnum.
+			identified through either its new major/minor numbers
+			encoded in devnum, or via a path to the device.
 
 norecovery		Don't load the journal on mounting. Note that this forces
 noload			mount of inconsistent filesystem, which can lead to
@@ -59,9 +60,9 @@ commit=nrsec	(*)	Ext3 can be told to sync all its data and metadata
 			Setting it to very large values will improve
 			performance.
 
-barrier=<0(*)|1>	This enables/disables the use of write barriers in
-barrier			the jbd code.  barrier=0 disables, barrier=1 enables.
-nobarrier	(*)	This also requires an IO stack which can support
+barrier=<0|1(*)>	This enables/disables the use of write barriers in
+barrier	(*)		the jbd code.  barrier=0 disables, barrier=1 enables.
+nobarrier		This also requires an IO stack which can support
 			barriers, and if jbd gets an error on a barrier
 			write, it will disable again with a warning.
 			Write barriers enforce proper on-disk ordering
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt
index 8c10bf375c73..919a3293aaa4 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 Ext4 Filesystem
 ===============
 
-Ext4 is an an advanced level of the ext3 filesystem which incorporates
+Ext4 is an advanced level of the ext3 filesystem which incorporates
 scalability and reliability enhancements for supporting large filesystems
 (64 bit) in keeping with increasing disk capacities and state-of-the-art
 feature requirements.
@@ -144,14 +144,12 @@ journal_async_commit	Commit block can be written to disk without waiting
 			mount the device. This will enable 'journal_checksum'
 			internally.
 
-journal=update		Update the ext4 file system's journal to the current
-			format.
-
+journal_path=path
 journal_dev=devnum	When the external journal device's major/minor numbers
-			have changed, this option allows the user to specify
+			have changed, these options allow the user to specify
 			the new journal location.  The journal device is
-			identified through its new major/minor numbers encoded
-			in devnum.
+			identified through either its new major/minor numbers
+			encoded in devnum, or via a path to the device.
 
 norecovery		Don't load the journal on mounting.  Note that
 noload			if the filesystem was not unmounted cleanly,
@@ -203,12 +201,9 @@ inode_readahead_blks=n	This tuning parameter controls the maximum
 			table readahead algorithm will pre-read into
 			the buffer cache.  The default value is 32 blocks.
 
-nouser_xattr		Disables Extended User Attributes. If you have extended
-			attribute support enabled in the kernel configuration
-			(CONFIG_EXT4_FS_XATTR), extended attribute support
-			is enabled by default on mount. See the attr(5) manual
-			page and http://acl.bestbits.at/ for more information
-			about extended attributes.
+nouser_xattr		Disables Extended User Attributes.  See the
+			attr(5) manual page and http://acl.bestbits.at/
+			for more information about extended attributes.
 
 noacl			This option disables POSIX Access Control List
 			support. If ACL support is enabled in the kernel
@@ -356,11 +351,6 @@ nouid32			Disables 32-bit UIDs and GIDs.  This is for
 			interoperability  with  older kernels which only
 			store and expect 16-bit values.
 
-resize			Allows to resize filesystem to the end of the last
-			existing block group, further resize has to be done
-			with resize2fs either online, or offline. It can be
-			used only with conjunction with remount.
-
 block_validity		This options allows to enables/disables the in-kernel
 noblock_validity	facility for tracking filesystem metadata blocks
 			within internal data structures. This allows multi-
@@ -383,6 +373,16 @@ dioread_nolock		locking. If the dioread_nolock option is specified
 			Because of the restrictions this options comprises
 			it is off by default (e.g. dioread_lock).
 
+max_dir_size_kb=n	This limits the size of directories so that any
+			attempt to expand them beyond the specified
+			limit in kilobytes will cause an ENOSPC error.
+			This is useful in memory constrained
+			environments, where a very large directory can
+			cause severe performance problems or even
+			provoke the Out Of Memory killer.  (For example,
+			if there is only 512mb memory available, a 176mb
+			directory may seriously cramp the system's style.)
+
 i_version		Enable 64-bit inode version support. This option is
 			off by default.
 
@@ -495,6 +495,17 @@ Files in /sys/fs/ext4/<devname>
  session_write_kbytes         This file is read-only and shows the number of
                               kilobytes of data that have been written to this
                               filesystem since it was mounted.
+
+ reserved_clusters            This is RW file and contains number of reserved
+                              clusters in the file system which will be used
+                              in the specific situations to avoid costly
+                              zeroout, unexpected ENOSPC, or possible data
+                              loss. The default is 2% or 4096 clusters,
+                              whichever is smaller and this can be changed
+                              however it can never exceed number of clusters
+                              in the file system. If there is not enough space
+                              for the reserved space when mounting the file
+                              mount will _not_ fail.
 ..............................................................................
 
 Ioctls
@@ -588,6 +599,16 @@ Table of Ext4 specific ioctls
 			      bitmaps and inode table, the userspace tool thus
 			      just passes the new number of blocks.
 
+EXT4_IOC_SWAP_BOOT	      Swap i_blocks and associated attributes
+			      (like i_blocks, i_size, i_flags, ...) from
+			      the specified inode with inode
+			      EXT4_BOOT_LOADER_INO (#5). This is typically
+			      used to store a boot loader in a secure part of
+			      the filesystem, where it can't be changed by a
+			      normal user by accident.
+			      The data blocks of the previous boot loader
+			      will be associated with the given inode.
+
 ..............................................................................
 
 References
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3cd27bed6349
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,495 @@
+================================================================================
+WHAT IS Flash-Friendly File System (F2FS)?
+================================================================================
+
+NAND flash memory-based storage devices, such as SSD, eMMC, and SD cards, have
+been equipped on a variety systems ranging from mobile to server systems. Since
+they are known to have different characteristics from the conventional rotating
+disks, a file system, an upper layer to the storage device, should adapt to the
+changes from the sketch in the design level.
+
+F2FS is a file system exploiting NAND flash memory-based storage devices, which
+is based on Log-structured File System (LFS). The design has been focused on
+addressing the fundamental issues in LFS, which are snowball effect of wandering
+tree and high cleaning overhead.
+
+Since a NAND flash memory-based storage device shows different characteristic
+according to its internal geometry or flash memory management scheme, namely FTL,
+F2FS and its tools support various parameters not only for configuring on-disk
+layout, but also for selecting allocation and cleaning algorithms.
+
+The following git tree provides the file system formatting tool (mkfs.f2fs),
+a consistency checking tool (fsck.f2fs), and a debugging tool (dump.f2fs).
+>> git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jaegeuk/f2fs-tools.git
+
+For reporting bugs and sending patches, please use the following mailing list:
+>> linux-f2fs-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
+
+================================================================================
+BACKGROUND AND DESIGN ISSUES
+================================================================================
+
+Log-structured File System (LFS)
+--------------------------------
+"A log-structured file system writes all modifications to disk sequentially in
+a log-like structure, thereby speeding up  both file writing and crash recovery.
+The log is the only structure on disk; it contains indexing information so that
+files can be read back from the log efficiently. In order to maintain large free
+areas on disk for fast writing, we divide  the log into segments and use a
+segment cleaner to compress the live information from heavily fragmented
+segments." from Rosenblum, M. and Ousterhout, J. K., 1992, "The design and
+implementation of a log-structured file system", ACM Trans. Computer Systems
+10, 1, 26–52.
+
+Wandering Tree Problem
+----------------------
+In LFS, when a file data is updated and written to the end of log, its direct
+pointer block is updated due to the changed location. Then the indirect pointer
+block is also updated due to the direct pointer block update. In this manner,
+the upper index structures such as inode, inode map, and checkpoint block are
+also updated recursively. This problem is called as wandering tree problem [1],
+and in order to enhance the performance, it should eliminate or relax the update
+propagation as much as possible.
+
+[1] Bityutskiy, A. 2005. JFFS3 design issues. http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/
+
+Cleaning Overhead
+-----------------
+Since LFS is based on out-of-place writes, it produces so many obsolete blocks
+scattered across the whole storage. In order to serve new empty log space, it
+needs to reclaim these obsolete blocks seamlessly to users. This job is called
+as a cleaning process.
+
+The process consists of three operations as follows.
+1. A victim segment is selected through referencing segment usage table.
+2. It loads parent index structures of all the data in the victim identified by
+   segment summary blocks.
+3. It checks the cross-reference between the data and its parent index structure.
+4. It moves valid data selectively.
+
+This cleaning job may cause unexpected long delays, so the most important goal
+is to hide the latencies to users. And also definitely, it should reduce the
+amount of valid data to be moved, and move them quickly as well.
+
+================================================================================
+KEY FEATURES
+================================================================================
+
+Flash Awareness
+---------------
+- Enlarge the random write area for better performance, but provide the high
+  spatial locality
+- Align FS data structures to the operational units in FTL as best efforts
+
+Wandering Tree Problem
+----------------------
+- Use a term, “node”, that represents inodes as well as various pointer blocks
+- Introduce Node Address Table (NAT) containing the locations of all the “node”
+  blocks; this will cut off the update propagation.
+
+Cleaning Overhead
+-----------------
+- Support a background cleaning process
+- Support greedy and cost-benefit algorithms for victim selection policies
+- Support multi-head logs for static/dynamic hot and cold data separation
+- Introduce adaptive logging for efficient block allocation
+
+================================================================================
+MOUNT OPTIONS
+================================================================================
+
+background_gc=%s       Turn on/off cleaning operations, namely garbage
+                       collection, triggered in background when I/O subsystem is
+                       idle. If background_gc=on, it will turn on the garbage
+                       collection and if background_gc=off, garbage collection
+                       will be truned off.
+                       Default value for this option is on. So garbage
+                       collection is on by default.
+disable_roll_forward   Disable the roll-forward recovery routine
+discard                Issue discard/TRIM commands when a segment is cleaned.
+no_heap                Disable heap-style segment allocation which finds free
+                       segments for data from the beginning of main area, while
+		       for node from the end of main area.
+nouser_xattr           Disable Extended User Attributes. Note: xattr is enabled
+                       by default if CONFIG_F2FS_FS_XATTR is selected.
+noacl                  Disable POSIX Access Control List. Note: acl is enabled
+                       by default if CONFIG_F2FS_FS_POSIX_ACL is selected.
+active_logs=%u         Support configuring the number of active logs. In the
+                       current design, f2fs supports only 2, 4, and 6 logs.
+                       Default number is 6.
+disable_ext_identify   Disable the extension list configured by mkfs, so f2fs
+                       does not aware of cold files such as media files.
+
+================================================================================
+DEBUGFS ENTRIES
+================================================================================
+
+/sys/kernel/debug/f2fs/ contains information about all the partitions mounted as
+f2fs. Each file shows the whole f2fs information.
+
+/sys/kernel/debug/f2fs/status includes:
+ - major file system information managed by f2fs currently
+ - average SIT information about whole segments
+ - current memory footprint consumed by f2fs.
+
+================================================================================
+SYSFS ENTRIES
+================================================================================
+
+Information about mounted f2f2 file systems can be found in
+/sys/fs/f2fs.  Each mounted filesystem will have a directory in
+/sys/fs/f2fs based on its device name (i.e., /sys/fs/f2fs/sda).
+The files in each per-device directory are shown in table below.
+
+Files in /sys/fs/f2fs/<devname>
+(see also Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs)
+..............................................................................
+ File                         Content
+
+ gc_max_sleep_time            This tuning parameter controls the maximum sleep
+                              time for the garbage collection thread. Time is
+                              in milliseconds.
+
+ gc_min_sleep_time            This tuning parameter controls the minimum sleep
+                              time for the garbage collection thread. Time is
+                              in milliseconds.
+
+ gc_no_gc_sleep_time          This tuning parameter controls the default sleep
+                              time for the garbage collection thread. Time is
+                              in milliseconds.
+
+ gc_idle                      This parameter controls the selection of victim
+                              policy for garbage collection. Setting gc_idle = 0
+                              (default) will disable this option. Setting
+                              gc_idle = 1 will select the Cost Benefit approach
+                              & setting gc_idle = 2 will select the greedy aproach.
+
+================================================================================
+USAGE
+================================================================================
+
+1. Download userland tools and compile them.
+
+2. Skip, if f2fs was compiled statically inside kernel.
+   Otherwise, insert the f2fs.ko module.
+ # insmod f2fs.ko
+
+3. Create a directory trying to mount
+ # mkdir /mnt/f2fs
+
+4. Format the block device, and then mount as f2fs
+ # mkfs.f2fs -l label /dev/block_device
+ # mount -t f2fs /dev/block_device /mnt/f2fs
+
+mkfs.f2fs
+---------
+The mkfs.f2fs is for the use of formatting a partition as the f2fs filesystem,
+which builds a basic on-disk layout.
+
+The options consist of:
+-l [label]   : Give a volume label, up to 512 unicode name.
+-a [0 or 1]  : Split start location of each area for heap-based allocation.
+               1 is set by default, which performs this.
+-o [int]     : Set overprovision ratio in percent over volume size.
+               5 is set by default.
+-s [int]     : Set the number of segments per section.
+               1 is set by default.
+-z [int]     : Set the number of sections per zone.
+               1 is set by default.
+-e [str]     : Set basic extension list. e.g. "mp3,gif,mov"
+-t [0 or 1]  : Disable discard command or not.
+               1 is set by default, which conducts discard.
+
+fsck.f2fs
+---------
+The fsck.f2fs is a tool to check the consistency of an f2fs-formatted
+partition, which examines whether the filesystem metadata and user-made data
+are cross-referenced correctly or not.
+Note that, initial version of the tool does not fix any inconsistency.
+
+The options consist of:
+  -d debug level [default:0]
+
+dump.f2fs
+---------
+The dump.f2fs shows the information of specific inode and dumps SSA and SIT to
+file. Each file is dump_ssa and dump_sit.
+
+The dump.f2fs is used to debug on-disk data structures of the f2fs filesystem.
+It shows on-disk inode information reconized by a given inode number, and is
+able to dump all the SSA and SIT entries into predefined files, ./dump_ssa and
+./dump_sit respectively.
+
+The options consist of:
+  -d debug level [default:0]
+  -i inode no (hex)
+  -s [SIT dump segno from #1~#2 (decimal), for all 0~-1]
+  -a [SSA dump segno from #1~#2 (decimal), for all 0~-1]
+
+Examples:
+# dump.f2fs -i [ino] /dev/sdx
+# dump.f2fs -s 0~-1 /dev/sdx (SIT dump)
+# dump.f2fs -a 0~-1 /dev/sdx (SSA dump)
+
+================================================================================
+DESIGN
+================================================================================
+
+On-disk Layout
+--------------
+
+F2FS divides the whole volume into a number of segments, each of which is fixed
+to 2MB in size. A section is composed of consecutive segments, and a zone
+consists of a set of sections. By default, section and zone sizes are set to one
+segment size identically, but users can easily modify the sizes by mkfs.
+
+F2FS splits the entire volume into six areas, and all the areas except superblock
+consists of multiple segments as described below.
+
+                                            align with the zone size <-|
+                 |-> align with the segment size
+     _________________________________________________________________________
+    |            |            |   Segment   |    Node     |   Segment  |      |
+    | Superblock | Checkpoint |    Info.    |   Address   |   Summary  | Main |
+    |    (SB)    |   (CP)     | Table (SIT) | Table (NAT) | Area (SSA) |      |
+    |____________|_____2______|______N______|______N______|______N_____|__N___|
+                                                                       .      .
+                                                             .                .
+                                                 .                            .
+                                    ._________________________________________.
+                                    |_Segment_|_..._|_Segment_|_..._|_Segment_|
+                                    .           .
+                                    ._________._________
+                                    |_section_|__...__|_
+                                    .            .
+		                    .________.
+	                            |__zone__|
+
+- Superblock (SB)
+ : It is located at the beginning of the partition, and there exist two copies
+   to avoid file system crash. It contains basic partition information and some
+   default parameters of f2fs.
+
+- Checkpoint (CP)
+ : It contains file system information, bitmaps for valid NAT/SIT sets, orphan
+   inode lists, and summary entries of current active segments.
+
+- Segment Information Table (SIT)
+ : It contains segment information such as valid block count and bitmap for the
+   validity of all the blocks.
+
+- Node Address Table (NAT)
+ : It is composed of a block address table for all the node blocks stored in
+   Main area.
+
+- Segment Summary Area (SSA)
+ : It contains summary entries which contains the owner information of all the
+   data and node blocks stored in Main area.
+
+- Main Area
+ : It contains file and directory data including their indices.
+
+In order to avoid misalignment between file system and flash-based storage, F2FS
+aligns the start block address of CP with the segment size. Also, it aligns the
+start block address of Main area with the zone size by reserving some segments
+in SSA area.
+
+Reference the following survey for additional technical details.
+https://wiki.linaro.org/WorkingGroups/Kernel/Projects/FlashCardSurvey
+
+File System Metadata Structure
+------------------------------
+
+F2FS adopts the checkpointing scheme to maintain file system consistency. At
+mount time, F2FS first tries to find the last valid checkpoint data by scanning
+CP area. In order to reduce the scanning time, F2FS uses only two copies of CP.
+One of them always indicates the last valid data, which is called as shadow copy
+mechanism. In addition to CP, NAT and SIT also adopt the shadow copy mechanism.
+
+For file system consistency, each CP points to which NAT and SIT copies are
+valid, as shown as below.
+
+  +--------+----------+---------+
+  |   CP   |    SIT   |   NAT   |
+  +--------+----------+---------+
+  .         .          .          .
+  .            .              .              .
+  .               .                 .                 .
+  +-------+-------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+  | CP #0 | CP #1 | SIT #0 | SIT #1 | NAT #0 | NAT #1 |
+  +-------+-------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+     |             ^                          ^
+     |             |                          |
+     `----------------------------------------'
+
+Index Structure
+---------------
+
+The key data structure to manage the data locations is a "node". Similar to
+traditional file structures, F2FS has three types of node: inode, direct node,
+indirect node. F2FS assigns 4KB to an inode block which contains 923 data block
+indices, two direct node pointers, two indirect node pointers, and one double
+indirect node pointer as described below. One direct node block contains 1018
+data blocks, and one indirect node block contains also 1018 node blocks. Thus,
+one inode block (i.e., a file) covers:
+
+  4KB * (923 + 2 * 1018 + 2 * 1018 * 1018 + 1018 * 1018 * 1018) := 3.94TB.
+
+   Inode block (4KB)
+     |- data (923)
+     |- direct node (2)
+     |          `- data (1018)
+     |- indirect node (2)
+     |            `- direct node (1018)
+     |                       `- data (1018)
+     `- double indirect node (1)
+                         `- indirect node (1018)
+			              `- direct node (1018)
+	                                         `- data (1018)
+
+Note that, all the node blocks are mapped by NAT which means the location of
+each node is translated by the NAT table. In the consideration of the wandering
+tree problem, F2FS is able to cut off the propagation of node updates caused by
+leaf data writes.
+
+Directory Structure
+-------------------
+
+A directory entry occupies 11 bytes, which consists of the following attributes.
+
+- hash		hash value of the file name
+- ino		inode number
+- len		the length of file name
+- type		file type such as directory, symlink, etc
+
+A dentry block consists of 214 dentry slots and file names. Therein a bitmap is
+used to represent whether each dentry is valid or not. A dentry block occupies
+4KB with the following composition.
+
+  Dentry Block(4 K) = bitmap (27 bytes) + reserved (3 bytes) +
+	              dentries(11 * 214 bytes) + file name (8 * 214 bytes)
+
+                         [Bucket]
+             +--------------------------------+
+             |dentry block 1 | dentry block 2 |
+             +--------------------------------+
+             .               .
+       .                             .
+  .       [Dentry Block Structure: 4KB]       .
+  +--------+----------+----------+------------+
+  | bitmap | reserved | dentries | file names |
+  +--------+----------+----------+------------+
+  [Dentry Block: 4KB] .   .
+		 .               .
+            .                          .
+            +------+------+-----+------+
+            | hash | ino  | len | type |
+            +------+------+-----+------+
+            [Dentry Structure: 11 bytes]
+
+F2FS implements multi-level hash tables for directory structure. Each level has
+a hash table with dedicated number of hash buckets as shown below. Note that
+"A(2B)" means a bucket includes 2 data blocks.
+
+----------------------
+A : bucket
+B : block
+N : MAX_DIR_HASH_DEPTH
+----------------------
+
+level #0   | A(2B)
+           |
+level #1   | A(2B) - A(2B)
+           |
+level #2   | A(2B) - A(2B) - A(2B) - A(2B)
+     .     |   .       .       .       .
+level #N/2 | A(2B) - A(2B) - A(2B) - A(2B) - A(2B) - ... - A(2B)
+     .     |   .       .       .       .
+level #N   | A(4B) - A(4B) - A(4B) - A(4B) - A(4B) - ... - A(4B)
+
+The number of blocks and buckets are determined by,
+
+                            ,- 2, if n < MAX_DIR_HASH_DEPTH / 2,
+  # of blocks in level #n = |
+                            `- 4, Otherwise
+
+                             ,- 2^n, if n < MAX_DIR_HASH_DEPTH / 2,
+  # of buckets in level #n = |
+                             `- 2^((MAX_DIR_HASH_DEPTH / 2) - 1), Otherwise
+
+When F2FS finds a file name in a directory, at first a hash value of the file
+name is calculated. Then, F2FS scans the hash table in level #0 to find the
+dentry consisting of the file name and its inode number. If not found, F2FS
+scans the next hash table in level #1. In this way, F2FS scans hash tables in
+each levels incrementally from 1 to N. In each levels F2FS needs to scan only
+one bucket determined by the following equation, which shows O(log(# of files))
+complexity.
+
+  bucket number to scan in level #n = (hash value) % (# of buckets in level #n)
+
+In the case of file creation, F2FS finds empty consecutive slots that cover the
+file name. F2FS searches the empty slots in the hash tables of whole levels from
+1 to N in the same way as the lookup operation.
+
+The following figure shows an example of two cases holding children.
+       --------------> Dir <--------------
+       |                                 |
+    child                             child
+
+    child - child                     [hole] - child
+
+    child - child - child             [hole] - [hole] - child
+
+   Case 1:                           Case 2:
+   Number of children = 6,           Number of children = 3,
+   File size = 7                     File size = 7
+
+Default Block Allocation
+------------------------
+
+At runtime, F2FS manages six active logs inside "Main" area: Hot/Warm/Cold node
+and Hot/Warm/Cold data.
+
+- Hot node	contains direct node blocks of directories.
+- Warm node	contains direct node blocks except hot node blocks.
+- Cold node	contains indirect node blocks
+- Hot data	contains dentry blocks
+- Warm data	contains data blocks except hot and cold data blocks
+- Cold data	contains multimedia data or migrated data blocks
+
+LFS has two schemes for free space management: threaded log and copy-and-compac-
+tion. The copy-and-compaction scheme which is known as cleaning, is well-suited
+for devices showing very good sequential write performance, since free segments
+are served all the time for writing new data. However, it suffers from cleaning
+overhead under high utilization. Contrarily, the threaded log scheme suffers
+from random writes, but no cleaning process is needed. F2FS adopts a hybrid
+scheme where the copy-and-compaction scheme is adopted by default, but the
+policy is dynamically changed to the threaded log scheme according to the file
+system status.
+
+In order to align F2FS with underlying flash-based storage, F2FS allocates a
+segment in a unit of section. F2FS expects that the section size would be the
+same as the unit size of garbage collection in FTL. Furthermore, with respect
+to the mapping granularity in FTL, F2FS allocates each section of the active
+logs from different zones as much as possible, since FTL can write the data in
+the active logs into one allocation unit according to its mapping granularity.
+
+Cleaning process
+----------------
+
+F2FS does cleaning both on demand and in the background. On-demand cleaning is
+triggered when there are not enough free segments to serve VFS calls. Background
+cleaner is operated by a kernel thread, and triggers the cleaning job when the
+system is idle.
+
+F2FS supports two victim selection policies: greedy and cost-benefit algorithms.
+In the greedy algorithm, F2FS selects a victim segment having the smallest number
+of valid blocks. In the cost-benefit algorithm, F2FS selects a victim segment
+according to the segment age and the number of valid blocks in order to address
+log block thrashing problem in the greedy algorithm. F2FS adopts the greedy
+algorithm for on-demand cleaner, while background cleaner adopts cost-benefit
+algorithm.
+
+In order to identify whether the data in the victim segment are valid or not,
+F2FS manages a bitmap. Each bit represents the validity of a block, and the
+bitmap is composed of a bit stream covering whole blocks in main area.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt
index ac2facc50d2a..46dfc6b038c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt
@@ -113,8 +113,8 @@ the fdtable structure -
 	if (fd >= 0) {
 		/* locate_fd() may have expanded fdtable, load the ptr */
 		fdt = files_fdtable(files);
-		FD_SET(fd, fdt->open_fds);
-		FD_CLR(fd, fdt->close_on_exec);
+		__set_open_fd(fd, fdt);
+		__clear_close_on_exec(fd, fdt);
 		spin_unlock(&files->file_lock);
 	.....
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-glocks.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-glocks.txt
index 0494f78d87e4..fcc79957be63 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-glocks.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-glocks.txt
@@ -61,7 +61,9 @@ go_unlock        | Called on the final local unlock of a lock
 go_dump          | Called to print content of object for debugfs file, or on
                  | error to dump glock to the log.
 go_type          | The type of the glock, LM_TYPE_.....
-go_min_hold_time | The minimum hold time
+go_callback	 | Called if the DLM sends a callback to drop this lock
+go_flags	 | GLOF_ASPACE is set, if the glock has an address space
+                 | associated with it
 
 The minimum hold time for each lock is the time after a remote lock
 grant for which we ignore remote demote requests. This is in order to
@@ -89,6 +91,7 @@ go_demote_ok  |       Sometimes         |       Yes
 go_lock       |       Yes               |       No
 go_unlock     |       Yes               |       No
 go_dump       |       Sometimes         |       Yes
+go_callback   |       Sometimes (N/A)   |       Yes
 
 N.B. Operations must not drop either the bit lock or the spinlock
 if its held on entry. go_dump and do_demote_ok must never block.
@@ -111,4 +114,118 @@ itself (locking order as above), and the other, known as the iopen
 glock is used in conjunction with the i_nlink field in the inode to
 determine the lifetime of the inode in question. Locking of inodes
 is on a per-inode basis. Locking of rgrps is on a per rgrp basis.
+In general we prefer to lock local locks prior to cluster locks.
+
+                            Glock Statistics
+                           ------------------
+
+The stats are divided into two sets: those relating to the
+super block and those relating to an individual glock. The
+super block stats are done on a per cpu basis in order to
+try and reduce the overhead of gathering them. They are also
+further divided by glock type. All timings are in nanoseconds.
+
+In the case of both the super block and glock statistics,
+the same information is gathered in each case. The super
+block timing statistics are used to provide default values for
+the glock timing statistics, so that newly created glocks
+should have, as far as possible, a sensible starting point.
+The per-glock counters are initialised to zero when the
+glock is created. The per-glock statistics are lost when
+the glock is ejected from memory.
+
+The statistics are divided into three pairs of mean and
+variance, plus two counters. The mean/variance pairs are
+smoothed exponential estimates and the algorithm used is
+one which will be very familiar to those used to calculation
+of round trip times in network code. See "TCP/IP Illustrated,
+Volume 1", W. Richard Stevens, sect 21.3, "Round-Trip Time Measurement",
+p. 299 and onwards. Also, Volume 2, Sect. 25.10, p. 838 and onwards.
+Unlike the TCP/IP Illustrated case, the mean and variance are
+not scaled, but are in units of integer nanoseconds.
+
+The three pairs of mean/variance measure the following
+things:
+
+ 1. DLM lock time (non-blocking requests)
+ 2. DLM lock time (blocking requests)
+ 3. Inter-request time (again to the DLM)
+
+A non-blocking request is one which will complete right
+away, whatever the state of the DLM lock in question. That
+currently means any requests when (a) the current state of
+the lock is exclusive, i.e. a lock demotion (b) the requested
+state is either null or unlocked (again, a demotion) or (c) the
+"try lock" flag is set. A blocking request covers all the other
+lock requests.
+
+There are two counters. The first is there primarily to show
+how many lock requests have been made, and thus how much data
+has gone into the mean/variance calculations. The other counter
+is counting queuing of holders at the top layer of the glock
+code. Hopefully that number will be a lot larger than the number
+of dlm lock requests issued.
+
+So why gather these statistics? There are several reasons
+we'd like to get a better idea of these timings:
+
+1. To be able to better set the glock "min hold time"
+2. To spot performance issues more easily
+3. To improve the algorithm for selecting resource groups for
+allocation (to base it on lock wait time, rather than blindly
+using a "try lock")
+
+Due to the smoothing action of the updates, a step change in
+some input quantity being sampled will only fully be taken
+into account after 8 samples (or 4 for the variance) and this
+needs to be carefully considered when interpreting the
+results.
+
+Knowing both the time it takes a lock request to complete and
+the average time between lock requests for a glock means we
+can compute the total percentage of the time for which the
+node is able to use a glock vs. time that the rest of the
+cluster has its share. That will be very useful when setting
+the lock min hold time.
+
+Great care has been taken to ensure that we
+measure exactly the quantities that we want, as accurately
+as possible. There are always inaccuracies in any
+measuring system, but I hope this is as accurate as we
+can reasonably make it.
+
+Per sb stats can be found here:
+/sys/kernel/debug/gfs2/<fsname>/sbstats
+Per glock stats can be found here:
+/sys/kernel/debug/gfs2/<fsname>/glstats
+
+Assuming that debugfs is mounted on /sys/kernel/debug and also
+that <fsname> is replaced with the name of the gfs2 filesystem
+in question.
+
+The abbreviations used in the output as are follows:
+
+srtt     - Smoothed round trip time for non-blocking dlm requests
+srttvar  - Variance estimate for srtt
+srttb    - Smoothed round trip time for (potentially) blocking dlm requests
+srttvarb - Variance estimate for srttb
+sirt     - Smoothed inter-request time (for dlm requests)
+sirtvar  - Variance estimate for sirt
+dlm      - Number of dlm requests made (dcnt in glstats file)
+queue    - Number of glock requests queued (qcnt in glstats file)
+
+The sbstats file contains a set of these stats for each glock type (so 8 lines
+for each type) and for each cpu (one column per cpu). The glstats file contains
+a set of these stats for each glock in a similar format to the glocks file, but
+using the format mean/variance for each of the timing stats.
+
+The gfs2_glock_lock_time tracepoint prints out the current values of the stats
+for the glock in question, along with some addition information on each dlm
+reply that is received:
+
+status - The status of the dlm request
+flags  - The dlm request flags
+tdiff  - The time taken by this specific request
+(remaining fields as per above list)
+
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt
index 4cda926628aa..cc4f2306609e 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 Global File System
 ------------------
 
-http://sources.redhat.com/cluster/wiki/
+https://fedorahosted.org/cluster/wiki/HomePage
 
 GFS is a cluster file system. It allows a cluster of computers to
 simultaneously use a block device that is shared between them (with FC,
@@ -30,7 +30,8 @@ needed, simply:
 
 If you are using Fedora, you need to install the gfs2-utils package
 and, for lock_dlm, you will also need to install the cman package
-and write a cluster.conf as per the documentation.
+and write a cluster.conf as per the documentation. For F17 and above
+cman has been replaced by the dlm package.
 
 GFS2 is not on-disk compatible with previous versions of GFS, but it
 is pretty close.
@@ -39,8 +40,6 @@ The following man pages can be found at the URL above:
   fsck.gfs2		to repair a filesystem
   gfs2_grow		to expand a filesystem online
   gfs2_jadd		to add journals to a filesystem online
-  gfs2_tool		to manipulate, examine and tune a filesystem
-  gfs2_quota	to examine and change quota values in a filesystem
+  tunegfs2		to manipulate, examine and tune a filesystem
   gfs2_convert	to convert a gfs filesystem to gfs2 in-place
-  mount.gfs2	to help mount(8) mount a filesystem
   mkfs.gfs2		to make a filesystem
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/jfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/jfs.txt
index 26ebde77e821..41fd757997b3 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/jfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/jfs.txt
@@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ IBM's Journaled File System (JFS) for Linux
 JFS Homepage:  http://jfs.sourceforge.net/
 
 The following mount options are supported:
+(*) == default
 
 iocharset=name	Character set to use for converting from Unicode to
 		ASCII.  The default is to do no conversion.  Use
@@ -21,12 +22,12 @@ nointegrity	Do not write to the journal.  The primary use of this option
 		from backup media.  The integrity of the volume is not
 		guaranteed if the system abnormally abends.
 
-integrity	Default.  Commit metadata changes to the journal.  Use this
-		option to remount a volume where the nointegrity option was
+integrity(*)	Commit metadata changes to the journal.  Use this option to
+		remount a volume where the nointegrity option was
 		previously specified in order to restore normal behavior.
 
 errors=continue		Keep going on a filesystem error.
-errors=remount-ro	Default. Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
+errors=remount-ro(*)	Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
 errors=panic		Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
 
 uid=value	Override on-disk uid with specified value
@@ -35,7 +36,17 @@ umask=value	Override on-disk umask with specified octal value.  For
 		directories, the execute bit will be set if the corresponding
 		read bit is set.
 
-Please send bugs, comments, cards and letters to shaggy@linux.vnet.ibm.com.
+discard=minlen	This enables/disables the use of discard/TRIM commands.
+discard		The discard/TRIM commands are sent to the underlying
+nodiscard(*)	block device when blocks are freed. This is useful for SSD
+		devices and sparse/thinly-provisioned LUNs.  The FITRIM ioctl
+		command is also available together with the nodiscard option.
+		The value of minlen specifies the minimum blockcount, when
+		a TRIM command to the block device is considered useful.
+		When no value is given to the discard option, it defaults to
+		64 blocks, which means 256KiB in JFS.
+		The minlen value of discard overrides the minlen value given
+		on an FITRIM ioctl().
 
 The JFS mailing list can be subscribed to by using the link labeled
 "Mail list Subscribe" at our web page http://jfs.sourceforge.net/
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/00-INDEX b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/00-INDEX
index 1716874a651e..66eb6c8c5334 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/00-INDEX
@@ -20,3 +20,5 @@ rpc-cache.txt
 	- introduction to the caching mechanisms in the sunrpc layer.
 idmapper.txt
 	- information for configuring request-keys to be used by idmapper
+knfsd-rpcgss.txt
+	- Information on GSS authentication support in the NFS Server
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/Exporting b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/Exporting
index 09994c247289..e543b1a619cc 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/Exporting
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/Exporting
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ For a filesystem to be exportable it must:
    2/ make sure that d_splice_alias is used rather than d_add
       when ->lookup finds an inode for a given parent and name.
 
-      If inode is NULL, d_splice_alias(inode, dentry) is eqivalent to
+      If inode is NULL, d_splice_alias(inode, dentry) is equivalent to
 
 		d_add(dentry, inode), NULL
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt
index 120fd3cf7fd9..fe03d10bb79a 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt
@@ -4,13 +4,21 @@ ID Mapper
 =========
 Id mapper is used by NFS to translate user and group ids into names, and to
 translate user and group names into ids.  Part of this translation involves
-performing an upcall to userspace to request the information.  Id mapper will
-user request-key to perform this upcall and cache the result.  The program
-/usr/sbin/nfs.idmap should be called by request-key, and will perform the
-translation and initialize a key with the resulting information.
+performing an upcall to userspace to request the information.  There are two
+ways NFS could obtain this information: placing a call to /sbin/request-key
+or by placing a call to the rpc.idmap daemon.
+
+NFS will attempt to call /sbin/request-key first.  If this succeeds, the
+result will be cached using the generic request-key cache.  This call should
+only fail if /etc/request-key.conf is not configured for the id_resolver key
+type, see the "Configuring" section below if you wish to use the request-key
+method.
+
+If the call to /sbin/request-key fails (if /etc/request-key.conf is not
+configured with the id_resolver key type), then the idmapper will ask the
+legacy rpc.idmap daemon for the id mapping.  This result will be stored
+in a custom NFS idmap cache.
 
- NFS_USE_NEW_IDMAPPER must be selected when configuring the kernel to use this
- feature.
 
 ===========
 Configuring
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs.txt
index f50f26ce6cd0..f2571c8bef74 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs.txt
@@ -12,9 +12,47 @@ and work is in progress on adding support for minor version 1 of the NFSv4
 protocol.
 
 The purpose of this document is to provide information on some of the
-upcall interfaces that are used in order to provide the NFS client with
-some of the information that it requires in order to fully comply with
-the NFS spec.
+special features of the NFS client that can be configured by system
+administrators.
+
+
+The nfs4_unique_id parameter
+============================
+
+NFSv4 requires clients to identify themselves to servers with a unique
+string.  File open and lock state shared between one client and one server
+is associated with this identity.  To support robust NFSv4 state recovery
+and transparent state migration, this identity string must not change
+across client reboots.
+
+Without any other intervention, the Linux client uses a string that contains
+the local system's node name.  System administrators, however, often do not
+take care to ensure that node names are fully qualified and do not change
+over the lifetime of a client system.  Node names can have other
+administrative requirements that require particular behavior that does not
+work well as part of an nfs_client_id4 string.
+
+The nfs.nfs4_unique_id boot parameter specifies a unique string that can be
+used instead of a system's node name when an NFS client identifies itself to
+a server.  Thus, if the system's node name is not unique, or it changes, its
+nfs.nfs4_unique_id stays the same, preventing collision with other clients
+or loss of state during NFS reboot recovery or transparent state migration.
+
+The nfs.nfs4_unique_id string is typically a UUID, though it can contain
+anything that is believed to be unique across all NFS clients.  An
+nfs4_unique_id string should be chosen when a client system is installed,
+just as a system's root file system gets a fresh UUID in its label at
+install time.
+
+The string should remain fixed for the lifetime of the client.  It can be
+changed safely if care is taken that the client shuts down cleanly and all
+outstanding NFSv4 state has expired, to prevent loss of NFSv4 state.
+
+This string can be stored in an NFS client's grub.conf, or it can be provided
+via a net boot facility such as PXE.  It may also be specified as an nfs.ko
+module parameter.  Specifying a uniquifier string is not support for NFS
+clients running in containers.
+
 
 The DNS resolver
 ================
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.txt
index 092fad92a3f0..01c2db769791 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.txt
@@ -39,21 +39,10 @@ interoperability problems with future clients.  Known issues:
 	  from a linux client are possible, but we aren't really
 	  conformant with the spec (for example, we don't use kerberos
 	  on the backchannel correctly).
-	- Incomplete backchannel support: incomplete backchannel gss
-	  support and no support for BACKCHANNEL_CTL mean that
-	  callbacks (hence delegations and layouts) may not be
-	  available and clients confused by the incomplete
-	  implementation may fail.
 	- We do not support SSV, which provides security for shared
 	  client-server state (thus preventing unauthorized tampering
 	  with locks and opens, for example).  It is mandatory for
 	  servers to support this, though no clients use it yet.
-	- Mandatory operations which we do not support, such as
-	  DESTROY_CLIENTID, are not currently used by clients, but will be
-	  (and the spec recommends their uses in common cases), and
-	  clients should not be expected to know how to recover from the
-	  case where they are not supported.  This will eventually cause
-	  interoperability failures.
 
 In addition, some limitations are inherited from the current NFSv4
 implementation:
@@ -89,7 +78,7 @@ Operations
    |                      | MNI        | or OPT)      |                |
    +----------------------+------------+--------------+----------------+
    | ACCESS               | REQ        |              | Section 18.1   |
-NS | BACKCHANNEL_CTL      | REQ        |              | Section 18.33  |
+I  | BACKCHANNEL_CTL      | REQ        |              | Section 18.33  |
 I  | BIND_CONN_TO_SESSION | REQ        |              | Section 18.34  |
    | CLOSE                | REQ        |              | Section 18.2   |
    | COMMIT               | REQ        |              | Section 18.3   |
@@ -99,7 +88,7 @@ NS*| DELEGPURGE           | OPT        | FDELG (REQ)  | Section 18.5   |
    | DELEGRETURN          | OPT        | FDELG,       | Section 18.6   |
    |                      |            | DDELG, pNFS  |                |
    |                      |            | (REQ)        |                |
-NS | DESTROY_CLIENTID     | REQ        |              | Section 18.50  |
+I  | DESTROY_CLIENTID     | REQ        |              | Section 18.50  |
 I  | DESTROY_SESSION      | REQ        |              | Section 18.37  |
 I  | EXCHANGE_ID          | REQ        |              | Section 18.35  |
 I  | FREE_STATEID         | REQ        |              | Section 18.38  |
@@ -192,7 +181,6 @@ EXCHANGE_ID:
 
 CREATE_SESSION:
 * backchannel attributes are ignored
-* backchannel security parameters are ignored
 
 SEQUENCE:
 * no support for dynamic slot table renegotiation (optional)
@@ -202,7 +190,7 @@ Nonstandard compound limitations:
   ca_maxrequestsize request and a ca_maxresponsesize reply, so we may
   fail to live up to the promise we made in CREATE_SESSION fore channel
   negotiation.
-* No more than one IO operation (read, write, readdir) allowed per
-  compound.
+* No more than one read-like operation allowed per compound; encoding
+  replies that cross page boundaries (except for read data) not handled.
 
 See also http://wiki.linux-nfs.org/wiki/index.php/Server_4.0_and_4.1_issues.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsd-admin-interfaces.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsd-admin-interfaces.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..56a96fb08a73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsd-admin-interfaces.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+Administrative interfaces for nfsd
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Note that normally these interfaces are used only by the utilities in
+nfs-utils.
+
+nfsd is controlled mainly by pseudofiles under the "nfsd" filesystem,
+which is normally mounted at /proc/fs/nfsd/.
+
+The server is always started by the first write of a nonzero value to
+nfsd/threads.
+
+Before doing that, NFSD can be told which sockets to listen on by
+writing to nfsd/portlist; that write may be:
+
+	- an ascii-encoded file descriptor, which should refer to a
+	  bound (and listening, for tcp) socket, or
+	- "transportname port", where transportname is currently either
+	  "udp", "tcp", or "rdma".
+
+If nfsd is started without doing any of these, then it will create one
+udp and one tcp listener at port 2049 (see nfsd_init_socks).
+
+On startup, nfsd and lockd grace periods start.
+
+nfsd is shut down by a write of 0 to nfsd/threads.  All locks and state
+are thrown away at that point.
+
+Between startup and shutdown, the number of threads may be adjusted up
+or down by additional writes to nfsd/threads or by writes to
+nfsd/pool_threads.
+
+For more detail about files under nfsd/ and what they control, see
+fs/nfsd/nfsctl.c; most of them have detailed comments.
+
+Implementation notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Note that the rpc server requires the caller to serialize addition and
+removal of listening sockets, and startup and shutdown of the server.
+For nfsd this is done using nfsd_mutex.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt
index ffdd9d866ad7..2d66ed688125 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt
@@ -78,7 +78,8 @@ nfsroot=[<server-ip>:]<root-dir>[,<nfs-options>]
 			flags		= hard, nointr, noposix, cto, ac
 
 
-ip=<client-ip>:<server-ip>:<gw-ip>:<netmask>:<hostname>:<device>:<autoconf>
+ip=<client-ip>:<server-ip>:<gw-ip>:<netmask>:<hostname>:<device>:<autoconf>:
+   <dns0-ip>:<dns1-ip>
 
   This parameter tells the kernel how to configure IP addresses of devices
   and also how to set up the IP routing table. It was originally called
@@ -158,6 +159,13 @@ ip=<client-ip>:<server-ip>:<gw-ip>:<netmask>:<hostname>:<device>:<autoconf>
 
                 Default: any
 
+  <dns0-ip>	IP address of first nameserver.
+		Value gets exported by /proc/net/pnp which is often linked
+		on embedded systems by /etc/resolv.conf.
+
+  <dns1-ip>	IP address of secound nameserver.
+		Same as above.
+
 
 nfsrootdebug
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt
index 983e14abe7e9..adc81a35fe2d 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ struct pnfs_layout_hdr
 ----------------------
 The on-the-wire command LAYOUTGET corresponds to struct
 pnfs_layout_segment, usually referred to by the variable name lseg.
-Each nfs_inode may hold a pointer to a cache of of these layout
+Each nfs_inode may hold a pointer to a cache of these layout
 segments in nfsi->layout, of type struct pnfs_layout_hdr.
 
 We reference the header for the inode pointing to it, across each
@@ -53,3 +53,57 @@ lseg maintains an extra reference corresponding to the NFS_LSEG_VALID
 bit which holds it in the pnfs_layout_hdr's list.  When the final lseg
 is removed from the pnfs_layout_hdr's list, the NFS_LAYOUT_DESTROYED
 bit is set, preventing any new lsegs from being added.
+
+layout drivers
+--------------
+
+PNFS utilizes what is called layout drivers. The STD defines 3 basic
+layout types: "files" "objects" and "blocks". For each of these types
+there is a layout-driver with a common function-vectors table which
+are called by the nfs-client pnfs-core to implement the different layout
+types.
+
+Files-layout-driver code is in: fs/nfs/nfs4filelayout.c && nfs4filelayoutdev.c
+Objects-layout-deriver code is in: fs/nfs/objlayout/.. directory
+Blocks-layout-deriver code is in: fs/nfs/blocklayout/.. directory
+
+objects-layout setup
+--------------------
+
+As part of the full STD implementation the objlayoutdriver.ko needs, at times,
+to automatically login to yet undiscovered iscsi/osd devices. For this the
+driver makes up-calles to a user-mode script called *osd_login*
+
+The path_name of the script to use is by default:
+	/sbin/osd_login.
+This name can be overridden by the Kernel module parameter:
+	objlayoutdriver.osd_login_prog
+
+If Kernel does not find the osd_login_prog path it will zero it out
+and will not attempt farther logins. An admin can then write new value
+to the objlayoutdriver.osd_login_prog Kernel parameter to re-enable it.
+
+The /sbin/osd_login is part of the nfs-utils package, and should usually
+be installed on distributions that support this Kernel version.
+
+The API to the login script is as follows:
+	Usage: $0 -u <URI> -o <OSDNAME> -s <SYSTEMID>
+	Options:
+		-u		target uri e.g. iscsi://<ip>:<port>
+				(allways exists)
+				(More protocols can be defined in the future.
+				 The client does not interpret this string it is
+				 passed unchanged as received from the Server)
+		-o		osdname of the requested target OSD
+				(Might be empty)
+				(A string which denotes the OSD name, there is a
+				 limit of 64 chars on this string)
+		-s 		systemid of the requested target OSD
+				(Might be empty)
+				(This string, if not empty is always an hex
+				 representation of the 20 bytes osd_system_id)
+
+blocks-layout setup
+-------------------
+
+TODO: Document the setup needs of the blocks layout driver
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/rpc-server-gss.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/rpc-server-gss.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..716f4be8e8b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/rpc-server-gss.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+
+rpcsec_gss support for kernel RPC servers
+=========================================
+
+This document gives references to the standards and protocols used to
+implement RPCGSS authentication in kernel RPC servers such as the NFS
+server and the NFS client's NFSv4.0 callback server.  (But note that
+NFSv4.1 and higher don't require the client to act as a server for the
+purposes of authentication.)
+
+RPCGSS is specified in a few IETF documents:
+ - RFC2203 v1: http://tools.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2203.txt
+ - RFC5403 v2: http://tools.ietf.org/rfc/rfc5403.txt
+and there is a 3rd version  being proposed:
+ - http://tools.ietf.org/id/draft-williams-rpcsecgssv3.txt
+   (At draft n. 02 at the time of writing)
+
+Background
+----------
+
+The RPCGSS Authentication method describes a way to perform GSSAPI
+Authentication for NFS.  Although GSSAPI is itself completely mechanism
+agnostic, in many cases only the KRB5 mechanism is supported by NFS
+implementations.
+
+The Linux kernel, at the moment, supports only the KRB5 mechanism, and
+depends on GSSAPI extensions that are KRB5 specific.
+
+GSSAPI is a complex library, and implementing it completely in kernel is
+unwarranted. However GSSAPI operations are fundementally separable in 2
+parts:
+- initial context establishment
+- integrity/privacy protection (signing and encrypting of individual
+  packets)
+
+The former is more complex and policy-independent, but less
+performance-sensitive.  The latter is simpler and needs to be very fast.
+
+Therefore, we perform per-packet integrity and privacy protection in the
+kernel, but leave the initial context establishment to userspace.  We
+need upcalls to request userspace to perform context establishment.
+
+NFS Server Legacy Upcall Mechanism
+----------------------------------
+
+The classic upcall mechanism uses a custom text based upcall mechanism
+to talk to a custom daemon called rpc.svcgssd that is provide by the
+nfs-utils package.
+
+This upcall mechanism has 2 limitations:
+
+A) It can handle tokens that are no bigger than 2KiB
+
+In some Kerberos deployment GSSAPI tokens can be quite big, up and
+beyond 64KiB in size due to various authorization extensions attacked to
+the Kerberos tickets, that needs to be sent through the GSS layer in
+order to perform context establishment.
+
+B) It does not properly handle creds where the user is member of more
+than a few housand groups (the current hard limit in the kernel is 65K
+groups) due to limitation on the size of the buffer that can be send
+back to the kernel (4KiB).
+
+NFS Server New RPC Upcall Mechanism
+-----------------------------------
+
+The newer upcall mechanism uses RPC over a unix socket to a daemon
+called gss-proxy, implemented by a userspace program called Gssproxy.
+
+The gss_proxy RPC protocol is currently documented here:
+
+	https://fedorahosted.org/gss-proxy/wiki/ProtocolDocumentation
+
+This upcall mechanism uses the kernel rpc client and connects to the gssproxy
+userspace program over a regular unix socket. The gssproxy protocol does not
+suffer from the size limitations of the legacy protocol.
+
+Negotiating Upcall Mechanisms
+-----------------------------
+
+To provide backward compatibility, the kernel defaults to using the
+legacy mechanism.  To switch to the new mechanism, gss-proxy must bind
+to /var/run/gssproxy.sock and then write "1" to
+/proc/net/rpc/use-gss-proxy.  If gss-proxy dies, it must repeat both
+steps.
+
+Once the upcall mechanism is chosen, it cannot be changed.  To prevent
+locking into the legacy mechanisms, the above steps must be performed
+before starting nfsd.  Whoever starts nfsd can guarantee this by reading
+from /proc/net/rpc/use-gss-proxy and checking that it contains a
+"1"--the read will block until gss-proxy has done its write to the file.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/porting b/Documentation/filesystems/porting
index 74acd9618819..f0890581f7f6 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/porting
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/porting
@@ -94,9 +94,8 @@ protected.
 ---
 [mandatory]
 
-BKL is also moved from around sb operations.  ->write_super() Is now called 
-without BKL held.  BKL should have been shifted into individual fs sb_op
-functions.  If you don't need it, remove it.  
+BKL is also moved from around sb operations. BKL should have been shifted into
+individual fs sb_op functions.  If you don't need it, remove it.
 
 ---
 [informational]
@@ -282,7 +281,7 @@ ext2_write_failed and callers for an example.
 
 [mandatory]
 
-	->truncate is going away.  The whole truncate sequence needs to be
+	->truncate is gone.  The whole truncate sequence needs to be
 implemented in ->setattr, which is now mandatory for filesystems
 implementing on-disk size changes.  Start with a copy of the old inode_setattr
 and vmtruncate, and the reorder the vmtruncate + foofs_vmtruncate sequence to
@@ -297,7 +296,8 @@ in the beginning of ->setattr unconditionally.
 be used instead.  It gets called whenever the inode is evicted, whether it has
 remaining links or not.  Caller does *not* evict the pagecache or inode-associated
 metadata buffers; getting rid of those is responsibility of method, as it had
-been for ->delete_inode().
+been for ->delete_inode(). Caller makes sure async writeback cannot be running
+for the inode while (or after) ->evict_inode() is called.
 
 	->drop_inode() returns int now; it's called on final iput() with
 inode->i_lock held and it returns true if filesystems wants the inode to be
@@ -306,14 +306,11 @@ updated appropriately.  generic_delete_inode() is also alive and it consists
 simply of return 1.  Note that all actual eviction work is done by caller after
 ->drop_inode() returns.
 
-	clear_inode() is gone; use end_writeback() instead.  As before, it must
-be called exactly once on each call of ->evict_inode() (as it used to be for
-each call of ->delete_inode()).  Unlike before, if you are using inode-associated
-metadata buffers (i.e. mark_buffer_dirty_inode()), it's your responsibility to
-call invalidate_inode_buffers() before end_writeback().
-	No async writeback (and thus no calls of ->write_inode()) will happen
-after end_writeback() returns, so actions that should not overlap with ->write_inode()
-(e.g. freeing on-disk inode if i_nlink is 0) ought to be done after that call.
+	As before, clear_inode() must be called exactly once on each call of
+->evict_inode() (as it used to be for each call of ->delete_inode()).  Unlike
+before, if you are using inode-associated metadata buffers (i.e.
+mark_buffer_dirty_inode()), it's your responsibility to call
+invalidate_inode_buffers() before clear_inode().
 
 	NOTE: checking i_nlink in the beginning of ->write_inode() and bailing out
 if it's zero is not *and* *never* *had* *been* enough.  Final unlink() and iput()
@@ -357,12 +354,10 @@ protects *all* the dcache state of a given dentry.
 via rcu-walk path walk (basically, if the file can have had a path name in the
 vfs namespace).
 
-	i_dentry and i_rcu share storage in a union, and the vfs expects
-i_dentry to be reinitialized before it is freed, so an:
-
-  INIT_LIST_HEAD(&inode->i_dentry);
-
-must be done in the RCU callback.
+	Even though i_dentry and i_rcu share storage in a union, we will
+initialize the former in inode_init_always(), so just leave it alone in
+the callback.  It used to be necessary to clean it there, but not anymore
+(starting at 3.2).
 
 --
 [recommended]
@@ -435,3 +430,28 @@ release it yourself.
 	d_alloc_root() is gone, along with a lot of bugs caused by code
 misusing it.  Replacement: d_make_root(inode).  The difference is,
 d_make_root() drops the reference to inode if dentry allocation fails.  
+
+--
+[mandatory]
+	The witch is dead!  Well, 2/3 of it, anyway.  ->d_revalidate() and
+->lookup() do *not* take struct nameidata anymore; just the flags.
+--
+[mandatory]
+	->create() doesn't take struct nameidata *; unlike the previous
+two, it gets "is it an O_EXCL or equivalent?" boolean argument.  Note that
+local filesystems can ignore tha argument - they are guaranteed that the
+object doesn't exist.  It's remote/distributed ones that might care...
+--
+[mandatory]
+	FS_REVAL_DOT is gone; if you used to have it, add ->d_weak_revalidate()
+in your dentry operations instead.
+--
+[mandatory]
+	vfs_readdir() is gone; switch to iterate_dir() instead
+--
+[mandatory]
+	->readdir() is gone now; switch to ->iterate()
+[mandatory]
+	vfs_follow_link has been removed.  Filesystems must use nd_set_link
+	from ->follow_link for normal symlinks, or nd_jump_link for magic
+	/proc/<pid> style links.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
index b7413cb46dcb..823c95faebd2 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
@@ -40,6 +40,8 @@ Table of Contents
   3.4	/proc/<pid>/coredump_filter - Core dump filtering settings
   3.5	/proc/<pid>/mountinfo - Information about mounts
   3.6	/proc/<pid>/comm  & /proc/<pid>/task/<tid>/comm
+  3.7   /proc/<pid>/task/<tid>/children - Information about task children
+  3.8   /proc/<pid>/fdinfo/<fd> - Information about opened file
 
   4	Configuring procfs
   4.1	Mount options
@@ -141,7 +143,7 @@ Table 1-1: Process specific entries in /proc
  pagemap	Page table
  stack		Report full stack trace, enable via CONFIG_STACKTRACE
  smaps		a extension based on maps, showing the memory consumption of
-		each mapping
+		each mapping and flags associated with it
 ..............................................................................
 
 For example, to get the status information of a process, all you have to do is
@@ -180,6 +182,7 @@ read the file /proc/PID/status:
   CapPrm: 0000000000000000
   CapEff: 0000000000000000
   CapBnd: ffffffffffffffff
+  Seccomp:        0
   voluntary_ctxt_switches:        0
   nonvoluntary_ctxt_switches:     1
 
@@ -236,6 +239,7 @@ Table 1-2: Contents of the status files (as of 2.6.30-rc7)
  CapPrm                      bitmap of permitted capabilities
  CapEff                      bitmap of effective capabilities
  CapBnd                      bitmap of capabilities bounding set
+ Seccomp                     seccomp mode, like prctl(PR_GET_SECCOMP, ...)
  Cpus_allowed                mask of CPUs on which this process may run
  Cpus_allowed_list           Same as previous, but in "list format"
  Mems_allowed                mask of memory nodes allowed to this process
@@ -310,6 +314,11 @@ Table 1-4: Contents of the stat files (as of 2.6.30-rc7)
   start_data    address above which program data+bss is placed
   end_data      address below which program data+bss is placed
   start_brk     address above which program heap can be expanded with brk()
+  arg_start     address above which program command line is placed
+  arg_end       address below which program command line is placed
+  env_start     address above which program environment is placed
+  env_end       address below which program environment is placed
+  exit_code     the thread's exit_code in the form reported by the waitpid system call
 ..............................................................................
 
 The /proc/PID/maps file containing the currently mapped memory regions and
@@ -409,8 +418,9 @@ Swap:                  0 kB
 KernelPageSize:        4 kB
 MMUPageSize:           4 kB
 Locked:              374 kB
+VmFlags: rd ex mr mw me de
 
-The first of these lines shows the same information as is displayed for the
+the first of these lines shows the same information as is displayed for the
 mapping in /proc/PID/maps.  The remaining lines show the size of the mapping
 (size), the amount of the mapping that is currently resident in RAM (RSS), the
 process' proportional share of this mapping (PSS), the number of clean and
@@ -424,11 +434,47 @@ and a page is modified, the file page is replaced by a private anonymous copy.
 "Swap" shows how much would-be-anonymous memory is also used, but out on
 swap.
 
+"VmFlags" field deserves a separate description. This member represents the kernel
+flags associated with the particular virtual memory area in two letter encoded
+manner. The codes are the following:
+    rd  - readable
+    wr  - writeable
+    ex  - executable
+    sh  - shared
+    mr  - may read
+    mw  - may write
+    me  - may execute
+    ms  - may share
+    gd  - stack segment growns down
+    pf  - pure PFN range
+    dw  - disabled write to the mapped file
+    lo  - pages are locked in memory
+    io  - memory mapped I/O area
+    sr  - sequential read advise provided
+    rr  - random read advise provided
+    dc  - do not copy area on fork
+    de  - do not expand area on remapping
+    ac  - area is accountable
+    nr  - swap space is not reserved for the area
+    ht  - area uses huge tlb pages
+    nl  - non-linear mapping
+    ar  - architecture specific flag
+    dd  - do not include area into core dump
+    mm  - mixed map area
+    hg  - huge page advise flag
+    nh  - no-huge page advise flag
+    mg  - mergable advise flag
+
+Note that there is no guarantee that every flag and associated mnemonic will
+be present in all further kernel releases. Things get changed, the flags may
+be vanished or the reverse -- new added.
+
 This file is only present if the CONFIG_MMU kernel configuration option is
 enabled.
 
 The /proc/PID/clear_refs is used to reset the PG_Referenced and ACCESSED/YOUNG
-bits on both physical and virtual pages associated with a process.
+bits on both physical and virtual pages associated with a process, and the
+soft-dirty bit on pte (see Documentation/vm/soft-dirty.txt for details).
 To clear the bits for all the pages associated with the process
     > echo 1 > /proc/PID/clear_refs
 
@@ -437,6 +483,10 @@ To clear the bits for the anonymous pages associated with the process
 
 To clear the bits for the file mapped pages associated with the process
     > echo 3 > /proc/PID/clear_refs
+
+To clear the soft-dirty bit
+    > echo 4 > /proc/PID/clear_refs
+
 Any other value written to /proc/PID/clear_refs will have no effect.
 
 The /proc/pid/pagemap gives the PFN, which can be used to find the pageflags
@@ -743,6 +793,7 @@ Committed_AS:   100056 kB
 VmallocTotal:   112216 kB
 VmallocUsed:       428 kB
 VmallocChunk:   111088 kB
+AnonHugePages:   49152 kB
 
     MemTotal: Total usable ram (i.e. physical ram minus a few reserved
               bits and the kernel binary code)
@@ -776,6 +827,7 @@ VmallocChunk:   111088 kB
        Dirty: Memory which is waiting to get written back to the disk
    Writeback: Memory which is actively being written back to the disk
    AnonPages: Non-file backed pages mapped into userspace page tables
+AnonHugePages: Non-file backed huge pages mapped into userspace page tables
       Mapped: files which have been mmaped, such as libraries
         Slab: in-kernel data structures cache
 SReclaimable: Part of Slab, that might be reclaimed, such as caches
@@ -802,16 +854,15 @@ Committed_AS: The amount of memory presently allocated on the system.
               The committed memory is a sum of all of the memory which
               has been allocated by processes, even if it has not been
               "used" by them as of yet. A process which malloc()'s 1G
-              of memory, but only touches 300M of it will only show up
-              as using 300M of memory even if it has the address space
-              allocated for the entire 1G. This 1G is memory which has
-              been "committed" to by the VM and can be used at any time
-              by the allocating application. With strict overcommit
-              enabled on the system (mode 2 in 'vm.overcommit_memory'),
-              allocations which would exceed the CommitLimit (detailed
-              above) will not be permitted. This is useful if one needs
-              to guarantee that processes will not fail due to lack of
-              memory once that memory has been successfully allocated.
+              of memory, but only touches 300M of it will show up as
+	      using 1G. This 1G is memory which has been "committed" to
+              by the VM and can be used at any time by the allocating
+              application. With strict overcommit enabled on the system
+              (mode 2 in 'vm.overcommit_memory'),allocations which would
+              exceed the CommitLimit (detailed above) will not be permitted.
+              This is useful if one needs to guarantee that processes will
+              not fail due to lack of memory once that memory has been
+              successfully allocated.
 VmallocTotal: total size of vmalloc memory area
  VmallocUsed: amount of vmalloc area which is used
 VmallocChunk: largest contiguous block of vmalloc area which is free
@@ -996,7 +1047,6 @@ Table 1-9: Network info in /proc/net
  snmp          SNMP data                                                       
  sockstat      Socket statistics                                               
  tcp           TCP  sockets                                                    
- tr_rif        Token ring RIF routing table                                    
  udp           UDP sockets                                                     
  unix          UNIX domain sockets                                             
  wireless      Wireless interface data (Wavelan etc)                           
@@ -1360,16 +1410,10 @@ be used to tune the badness score.  Its acceptable values range from -16
 (OOM_DISABLE) to disable oom killing entirely for that task.  Its value is
 scaled linearly with /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj.
 
-Writing to /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj or /proc/<pid>/oom_adj will change the
-other with its scaled value.
-
 The value of /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj may be reduced no lower than the last
 value set by a CAP_SYS_RESOURCE process. To reduce the value any lower
 requires CAP_SYS_RESOURCE.
 
-NOTICE: /proc/<pid>/oom_adj is deprecated and will be removed, please see
-Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt.
-
 Caveat: when a parent task is selected, the oom killer will sacrifice any first
 generation children with separate address spaces instead, if possible.  This
 avoids servers and important system daemons from being killed and loses the
@@ -1380,7 +1424,7 @@ minimal amount of work.
 -------------------------------------------------------------
 
 This file can be used to check the current score used by the oom-killer is for
-any given <pid>. Use it together with /proc/<pid>/oom_adj to tune which
+any given <pid>. Use it together with /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj to tune which
 process should be killed in an out-of-memory situation.
 
 
@@ -1577,6 +1621,110 @@ then the kernel's TASK_COMM_LEN (currently 16 chars) will result in a truncated
 comm value.
 
 
+3.7	/proc/<pid>/task/<tid>/children - Information about task children
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+This file provides a fast way to retrieve first level children pids
+of a task pointed by <pid>/<tid> pair. The format is a space separated
+stream of pids.
+
+Note the "first level" here -- if a child has own children they will
+not be listed here, one needs to read /proc/<children-pid>/task/<tid>/children
+to obtain the descendants.
+
+Since this interface is intended to be fast and cheap it doesn't
+guarantee to provide precise results and some children might be
+skipped, especially if they've exited right after we printed their
+pids, so one need to either stop or freeze processes being inspected
+if precise results are needed.
+
+
+3.7	/proc/<pid>/fdinfo/<fd> - Information about opened file
+---------------------------------------------------------------
+This file provides information associated with an opened file. The regular
+files have at least two fields -- 'pos' and 'flags'. The 'pos' represents
+the current offset of the opened file in decimal form [see lseek(2) for
+details] and 'flags' denotes the octal O_xxx mask the file has been
+created with [see open(2) for details].
+
+A typical output is
+
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	0100002
+
+The files such as eventfd, fsnotify, signalfd, epoll among the regular pos/flags
+pair provide additional information particular to the objects they represent.
+
+	Eventfd files
+	~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	04002
+	eventfd-count:	5a
+
+	where 'eventfd-count' is hex value of a counter.
+
+	Signalfd files
+	~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	04002
+	sigmask:	0000000000000200
+
+	where 'sigmask' is hex value of the signal mask associated
+	with a file.
+
+	Epoll files
+	~~~~~~~~~~~
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	02
+	tfd:        5 events:       1d data: ffffffffffffffff
+
+	where 'tfd' is a target file descriptor number in decimal form,
+	'events' is events mask being watched and the 'data' is data
+	associated with a target [see epoll(7) for more details].
+
+	Fsnotify files
+	~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+	For inotify files the format is the following
+
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	02000000
+	inotify wd:3 ino:9e7e sdev:800013 mask:800afce ignored_mask:0 fhandle-bytes:8 fhandle-type:1 f_handle:7e9e0000640d1b6d
+
+	where 'wd' is a watch descriptor in decimal form, ie a target file
+	descriptor number, 'ino' and 'sdev' are inode and device where the
+	target file resides and the 'mask' is the mask of events, all in hex
+	form [see inotify(7) for more details].
+
+	If the kernel was built with exportfs support, the path to the target
+	file is encoded as a file handle.  The file handle is provided by three
+	fields 'fhandle-bytes', 'fhandle-type' and 'f_handle', all in hex
+	format.
+
+	If the kernel is built without exportfs support the file handle won't be
+	printed out.
+
+	If there is no inotify mark attached yet the 'inotify' line will be omitted.
+
+	For fanotify files the format is
+
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	02
+	fanotify flags:10 event-flags:0
+	fanotify mnt_id:12 mflags:40 mask:38 ignored_mask:40000003
+	fanotify ino:4f969 sdev:800013 mflags:0 mask:3b ignored_mask:40000000 fhandle-bytes:8 fhandle-type:1 f_handle:69f90400c275b5b4
+
+	where fanotify 'flags' and 'event-flags' are values used in fanotify_init
+	call, 'mnt_id' is the mount point identifier, 'mflags' is the value of
+	flags associated with mark which are tracked separately from events
+	mask. 'ino', 'sdev' are target inode and device, 'mask' is the events
+	mask and 'ignored_mask' is the mask of events which are to be ignored.
+	All in hex format. Incorporation of 'mflags', 'mask' and 'ignored_mask'
+	does provide information about flags and mask used in fanotify_mark
+	call [see fsnotify manpage for details].
+
+	While the first three lines are mandatory and always printed, the rest is
+	optional and may be omitted if no marks created yet.
+
+
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Configuring procfs
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/qnx6.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/qnx6.txt
index 050223ea03c7..408679789136 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/qnx6.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/qnx6.txt
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ concepts of blocks, inodes and directories.
 On QNX it is possible to create little endian and big endian qnx6 filesystems.
 This feature makes it possible to create and use a different endianness fs
 for the target (QNX is used on quite a range of embedded systems) plattform
-running on a different endianess.
+running on a different endianness.
 The Linux driver handles endianness transparently. (LE and BE)
 
 Blocks
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Blocks
 The space in the device or file is split up into blocks. These are a fixed
 size of 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096, which is decided when the filesystem is
 created.
-Blockpointers are 32bit, so the maximum space that can be adressed is
+Blockpointers are 32bit, so the maximum space that can be addressed is
 2^32 * 4096 bytes or 16TB
 
 The superblocks
@@ -47,16 +47,16 @@ inactive superblock.
 Each superblock holds a set of root inodes for the different filesystem
 parts. (Inode, Bitmap and Longfilenames)
 Each of these root nodes holds information like total size of the stored
-data and the adressing levels in that specific tree.
-If the level value is 0, up to 16 direct blocks can be adressed by each
+data and the addressing levels in that specific tree.
+If the level value is 0, up to 16 direct blocks can be addressed by each
 node.
-Level 1 adds an additional indirect adressing level where each indirect
-adressing block holds up to blocksize / 4 bytes pointers to data blocks.
-Level 2 adds an additional indirect adressig block level (so, already up
-to 16 * 256 * 256 = 1048576 blocks that can be adressed by such a tree)a
+Level 1 adds an additional indirect addressing level where each indirect
+addressing block holds up to blocksize / 4 bytes pointers to data blocks.
+Level 2 adds an additional indirect addressing block level (so, already up
+to 16 * 256 * 256 = 1048576 blocks that can be addressed by such a tree).
 
 Unused block pointers are always set to ~0 - regardless of root node,
-indirect adressing blocks or inodes.
+indirect addressing blocks or inodes.
 Data leaves are always on the lowest level. So no data is stored on upper
 tree levels.
 
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ The first Superblock is located at 0x2000. (0x2000 is the bootblock size)
 The Audi MMI 3G first superblock directly starts at byte 0.
 Second superblock position can either be calculated from the superblock
 information (total number of filesystem blocks) or by taking the highest
-device address, zeroing the last 3 bytes and then substracting 0x1000 from
+device address, zeroing the last 3 bytes and then subtracting 0x1000 from
 that address.
 
 0x1000 is the size reserved for each superblock - regardless of the
@@ -83,8 +83,8 @@ size, number of blocks used, access time, change time and modification time.
 Object mode field is POSIX format. (which makes things easier)
 
 There are also pointers to the first 16 blocks, if the object data can be
-adressed with 16 direct blocks.
-For more than 16 blocks an indirect adressing in form of another tree is
+addressed with 16 direct blocks.
+For more than 16 blocks an indirect addressing in form of another tree is
 used. (scheme is the same as the one used for the superblock root nodes)
 
 The filesize is stored 64bit. Inode counting starts with 1. (whilst long
@@ -118,13 +118,13 @@ no block pointers and the directory file record pointing to the target file
 inode.
 
 Character and block special devices do not exist in QNX as those files
-are handled by the QNX kernel/drivers and created in /dev independant of the
+are handled by the QNX kernel/drivers and created in /dev independent of the
 underlaying filesystem.
 
 Long filenames
 --------------
 
-Long filenames are stored in a seperate adressing tree. The staring point
+Long filenames are stored in a separate addressing tree. The staring point
 is the longfilename root node in the active superblock.
 Each data block (tree leaves) holds one long filename. That filename is
 limited to 510 bytes. The first two starting bytes are used as length field
@@ -148,8 +148,8 @@ smaller than addressing space in the bitmap.
 Bitmap system area
 ------------------
 
-The bitmap itself is devided into three parts.
-First the system area, that is split into two halfs.
+The bitmap itself is divided into three parts.
+First the system area, that is split into two halves.
 Then userspace.
 
 The requirement for a static, fixed preallocated system area comes from how
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt
index 59b4a0962e0f..b176928e6963 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt
@@ -79,6 +79,10 @@ to just make sure certain lists can't become empty.
 Most systems just mount another filesystem over rootfs and ignore it.  The
 amount of space an empty instance of ramfs takes up is tiny.
 
+If CONFIG_TMPFS is enabled, rootfs will use tmpfs instead of ramfs by
+default.  To force ramfs, add "rootfstype=ramfs" to the kernel command
+line.
+
 What is initramfs?
 ------------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt
index 510b722667ac..33e2f3694733 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Semantics
 
 Each relay channel has one buffer per CPU, each buffer has one or more
 sub-buffers.  Messages are written to the first sub-buffer until it is
-too full to contain a new message, in which case it it is written to
+too full to contain a new message, in which case it is written to
 the next (if available).  Messages are never split across sub-buffers.
 At this point, userspace can be notified so it empties the first
 sub-buffer, while the kernel continues writing to the next.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs-tagging.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs-tagging.txt
index caaaf1266d8f..eb843e49c5a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs-tagging.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs-tagging.txt
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ flag between KOBJ_NS_TYPE_NONE and KOBJ_NS_TYPES, and s_ns will
 point to the namespace to which it belongs.
 
 Each sysfs superblock's sysfs_super_info contains an array void
-*ns[KOBJ_NS_TYPES].  When a a task in a tagging namespace
+*ns[KOBJ_NS_TYPES].  When a task in a tagging namespace
 kobj_nstype first mounts sysfs, a new superblock is created.  It
 will be differentiated from other sysfs mounts by having its
 s_fs_info->ns[kobj_nstype] set to the new namespace.  Note that
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt
index ead764b2728f..aa1f459fa6cf 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt
@@ -111,6 +111,15 @@ tz=UTC        -- Interpret timestamps as UTC rather than local time.
                  useful when mounting devices (like digital cameras)
                  that are set to UTC in order to avoid the pitfalls of
                  local time.
+time_offset=minutes
+	      -- Set offset for conversion of timestamps from local time
+		 used by FAT to UTC. I.e. <minutes> minutes will be subtracted
+		 from each timestamp to convert it to UTC used internally by
+		 Linux. This is useful when time zone set in sys_tz is
+		 not the time zone used by the filesystem. Note that this
+		 option still does not provide correct time stamps in all
+		 cases in presence of DST - time stamps in a different DST
+		 setting will be off by one hour.
 
 showexec      -- If set, the execute permission bits of the file will be
 		 allowed only if the extension part of the name is .EXE,
@@ -137,6 +146,33 @@ errors=panic|continue|remount-ro
 		 without doing anything or remount the partition in
 		 read-only mode (default behavior).
 
+discard       -- If set, issues discard/TRIM commands to the block
+		 device when blocks are freed. This is useful for SSD devices
+		 and sparse/thinly-provisoned LUNs.
+
+nfs=stale_rw|nostale_ro
+		Enable this only if you want to export the FAT filesystem
+		over NFS.
+
+		stale_rw: This option maintains an index (cache) of directory
+		inodes by i_logstart which is used by the nfs-related code to
+		improve look-ups. Full file operations (read/write) over NFS is
+		supported but with cache eviction at NFS server, this could
+		result in ESTALE issues.
+
+		nostale_ro: This option bases the inode number and filehandle
+		on the on-disk location of a file in the MS-DOS directory entry.
+		This ensures that ESTALE will not be returned after a file is
+		evicted from the inode cache. However, it means that operations
+		such as rename, create and unlink could cause filehandles that
+		previously pointed at one file to point at a different file,
+		potentially causing data corruption. For this reason, this
+		option also mounts the filesystem readonly.
+
+		To maintain backward compatibility, '-o nfs' is also accepted,
+		defaulting to stale_rw
+
+
 <bool>: 0,1,yes,no,true,false
 
 TODO
@@ -271,7 +307,7 @@ the following:
 
                 <proceeding files...>
                 <slot #3, id = 0x43, characters = "h is long">
-                <slot #2, id = 0x02, characters = "xtension whic">
+                <slot #2, id = 0x02, characters = "xtension which">
                 <slot #1, id = 0x01, characters = "My Big File.E">
                 <directory entry, name = "MYBIGFIL.EXT">
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
index e916e3d36488..deb48b5fd883 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ members are defined:
 struct file_system_type {
 	const char *name;
 	int fs_flags;
-        struct dentry (*mount) (struct file_system_type *, int,
+        struct dentry *(*mount) (struct file_system_type *, int,
                        const char *, void *);
         void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *);
         struct module *owner;
@@ -216,7 +216,6 @@ struct super_operations {
         void (*drop_inode) (struct inode *);
         void (*delete_inode) (struct inode *);
         void (*put_super) (struct super_block *);
-        void (*write_super) (struct super_block *);
         int (*sync_fs)(struct super_block *sb, int wait);
         int (*freeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
         int (*unfreeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
@@ -273,9 +272,6 @@ or bottom half).
   put_super: called when the VFS wishes to free the superblock
 	(i.e. unmount). This is called with the superblock lock held
 
-  write_super: called when the VFS superblock needs to be written to
-	disc. This method is optional
-
   sync_fs: called when VFS is writing out all dirty data associated with
   	a superblock. The second parameter indicates whether the method
 	should wait until the write out has been completed. Optional.
@@ -341,8 +337,8 @@ This describes how the VFS can manipulate an inode in your
 filesystem. As of kernel 2.6.22, the following members are defined:
 
 struct inode_operations {
-	int (*create) (struct inode *,struct dentry *, umode_t, struct nameidata *);
-	struct dentry * (*lookup) (struct inode *,struct dentry *, struct nameidata *);
+	int (*create) (struct inode *,struct dentry *, umode_t, bool);
+	struct dentry * (*lookup) (struct inode *,struct dentry *, unsigned int);
 	int (*link) (struct dentry *,struct inode *,struct dentry *);
 	int (*unlink) (struct inode *,struct dentry *);
 	int (*symlink) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,const char *);
@@ -354,7 +350,6 @@ struct inode_operations {
 	int (*readlink) (struct dentry *, char __user *,int);
         void * (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *);
         void (*put_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *, void *);
-	void (*truncate) (struct inode *);
 	int (*permission) (struct inode *, int);
 	int (*get_acl)(struct inode *, int);
 	int (*setattr) (struct dentry *, struct iattr *);
@@ -363,7 +358,10 @@ struct inode_operations {
 	ssize_t (*getxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *, void *, size_t);
 	ssize_t (*listxattr) (struct dentry *, char *, size_t);
 	int (*removexattr) (struct dentry *, const char *);
-	void (*truncate_range)(struct inode *, loff_t, loff_t);
+	void (*update_time)(struct inode *, struct timespec *, int);
+	int (*atomic_open)(struct inode *, struct dentry *, struct file *,
+			unsigned open_flag, umode_t create_mode, int *opened);
+	int (*tmpfile) (struct inode *, struct dentry *, umode_t);
 };
 
 Again, all methods are called without any locks being held, unless
@@ -432,16 +430,6 @@ otherwise noted.
   	started might not be in the page cache at the end of the
   	walk).
 
-  truncate: Deprecated. This will not be called if ->setsize is defined.
-	Called by the VFS to change the size of a file.  The
- 	i_size field of the inode is set to the desired size by the
- 	VFS before this method is called.  This method is called by
- 	the truncate(2) system call and related functionality.
-
-	Note: ->truncate and vmtruncate are deprecated. Do not add new
-	instances/calls of these. Filesystems should be converted to do their
-	truncate sequence via ->setattr().
-
   permission: called by the VFS to check for access rights on a POSIX-like
   	filesystem.
 
@@ -472,9 +460,22 @@ otherwise noted.
   removexattr: called by the VFS to remove an extended attribute from
   	a file. This method is called by removexattr(2) system call.
 
-  truncate_range: a method provided by the underlying filesystem to truncate a
-  	range of blocks , i.e. punch a hole somewhere in a file.
+  update_time: called by the VFS to update a specific time or the i_version of
+  	an inode.  If this is not defined the VFS will update the inode itself
+  	and call mark_inode_dirty_sync.
 
+  atomic_open: called on the last component of an open.  Using this optional
+  	method the filesystem can look up, possibly create and open the file in
+  	one atomic operation.  If it cannot perform this (e.g. the file type
+  	turned out to be wrong) it may signal this by returning 1 instead of
+	usual 0 or -ve .  This method is only called if the last component is
+	negative or needs lookup.  Cached positive dentries are still handled by
+	f_op->open().  If the file was created, the FILE_CREATED flag should be
+	set in "opened".  In case of O_EXCL the method must only succeed if the
+	file didn't exist and hence FILE_CREATED shall always be set on success.
+
+  tmpfile: called in the end of O_TMPFILE open().  Optional, equivalent to
+	atomically creating, opening and unlinking a file in given directory.
 
 The Address Space Object
 ========================
@@ -553,12 +554,11 @@ struct address_space_operations
 -------------------------------
 
 This describes how the VFS can manipulate mapping of a file to page cache in
-your filesystem. As of kernel 2.6.22, the following members are defined:
+your filesystem. The following members are defined:
 
 struct address_space_operations {
 	int (*writepage)(struct page *page, struct writeback_control *wbc);
 	int (*readpage)(struct file *, struct page *);
-	int (*sync_page)(struct page *);
 	int (*writepages)(struct address_space *, struct writeback_control *);
 	int (*set_page_dirty)(struct page *page);
 	int (*readpages)(struct file *filp, struct address_space *mapping,
@@ -570,7 +570,7 @@ struct address_space_operations {
 				loff_t pos, unsigned len, unsigned copied,
 				struct page *page, void *fsdata);
 	sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t);
-	int (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned long);
+	void (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned int, unsigned int);
 	int (*releasepage) (struct page *, int);
 	void (*freepage)(struct page *);
 	ssize_t (*direct_IO)(int, struct kiocb *, const struct iovec *iov,
@@ -580,7 +580,12 @@ struct address_space_operations {
 	/* migrate the contents of a page to the specified target */
 	int (*migratepage) (struct page *, struct page *);
 	int (*launder_page) (struct page *);
+	int (*is_partially_uptodate) (struct page *, read_descriptor_t *,
+					unsigned long);
+	void (*is_dirty_writeback) (struct page *, bool *, bool *);
 	int (*error_remove_page) (struct mapping *mapping, struct page *page);
+	int (*swap_activate)(struct file *);
+	int (*swap_deactivate)(struct file *);
 };
 
   writepage: called by the VM to write a dirty page to backing store.
@@ -609,13 +614,6 @@ struct address_space_operations {
        In this case, the page will be relocated, relocked and if
        that all succeeds, ->readpage will be called again.
 
-  sync_page: called by the VM to notify the backing store to perform all
-  	queued I/O operations for a page. I/O operations for other pages
-	associated with this address_space object may also be performed.
-
-	This function is optional and is called only for pages with
-  	PG_Writeback set while waiting for the writeback to complete.
-
   writepages: called by the VM to write out pages associated with the
   	address_space object.  If wbc->sync_mode is WBC_SYNC_ALL, then
   	the writeback_control will specify a range of pages that must be
@@ -687,14 +685,14 @@ struct address_space_operations {
   invalidatepage: If a page has PagePrivate set, then invalidatepage
         will be called when part or all of the page is to be removed
 	from the address space.  This generally corresponds to either a
-	truncation or a complete invalidation of the address space
-	(in the latter case 'offset' will always be 0).
-	Any private data associated with the page should be updated
-	to reflect this truncation.  If offset is 0, then
-	the private data should be released, because the page
-	must be able to be completely discarded.  This may be done by
-        calling the ->releasepage function, but in this case the
-        release MUST succeed.
+	truncation, punch hole  or a complete invalidation of the address
+	space (in the latter case 'offset' will always be 0 and 'length'
+	will be PAGE_CACHE_SIZE). Any private data associated with the page
+	should be updated to reflect this truncation.  If offset is 0 and
+	length is PAGE_CACHE_SIZE, then the private data should be released,
+	because the page must be able to be completely discarded.  This may
+	be done by calling the ->releasepage function, but in this case the
+	release MUST succeed.
 
   releasepage: releasepage is called on PagePrivate pages to indicate
         that the page should be freed if possible.  ->releasepage
@@ -744,11 +742,35 @@ struct address_space_operations {
   	prevent redirtying the page, it is kept locked during the whole
 	operation.
 
+  is_partially_uptodate: Called by the VM when reading a file through the
+	pagecache when the underlying blocksize != pagesize. If the required
+	block is up to date then the read can complete without needing the IO
+	to bring the whole page up to date.
+
+  is_dirty_writeback: Called by the VM when attempting to reclaim a page.
+	The VM uses dirty and writeback information to determine if it needs
+	to stall to allow flushers a chance to complete some IO. Ordinarily
+	it can use PageDirty and PageWriteback but some filesystems have
+	more complex state (unstable pages in NFS prevent reclaim) or
+	do not set those flags due to locking problems (jbd). This callback
+	allows a filesystem to indicate to the VM if a page should be
+	treated as dirty or writeback for the purposes of stalling.
+
   error_remove_page: normally set to generic_error_remove_page if truncation
 	is ok for this address space. Used for memory failure handling.
 	Setting this implies you deal with pages going away under you,
 	unless you have them locked or reference counts increased.
 
+  swap_activate: Called when swapon is used on a file to allocate
+	space if necessary and pin the block lookup information in
+	memory. A return value of zero indicates success,
+	in which case this file can be used to back swapspace. The
+	swapspace operations will be proxied to this address space's
+	->swap_{out,in} methods.
+
+  swap_deactivate: Called during swapoff on files where swap_activate
+	was successful.
+
 
 The File Object
 ===============
@@ -760,7 +782,7 @@ struct file_operations
 ----------------------
 
 This describes how the VFS can manipulate an open file. As of kernel
-2.6.22, the following members are defined:
+3.5, the following members are defined:
 
 struct file_operations {
 	struct module *owner;
@@ -769,7 +791,7 @@ struct file_operations {
 	ssize_t (*write) (struct file *, const char __user *, size_t, loff_t *);
 	ssize_t (*aio_read) (struct kiocb *, const struct iovec *, unsigned long, loff_t);
 	ssize_t (*aio_write) (struct kiocb *, const struct iovec *, unsigned long, loff_t);
-	int (*readdir) (struct file *, void *, filldir_t);
+	int (*iterate) (struct file *, struct dir_context *);
 	unsigned int (*poll) (struct file *, struct poll_table_struct *);
 	long (*unlocked_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long);
 	long (*compat_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long);
@@ -790,6 +812,8 @@ struct file_operations {
 	int (*flock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *);
 	ssize_t (*splice_write)(struct pipe_inode_info *, struct file *, size_t, unsigned int);
 	ssize_t (*splice_read)(struct file *, struct pipe_inode_info *, size_t, unsigned int);
+	int (*setlease)(struct file *, long arg, struct file_lock **);
+	long (*fallocate)(struct file *, int mode, loff_t offset, loff_t len);
 };
 
 Again, all methods are called without any locks being held, unless
@@ -805,7 +829,7 @@ otherwise noted.
 
   aio_write: called by io_submit(2) and other asynchronous I/O operations
 
-  readdir: called when the VFS needs to read the directory contents
+  iterate: called when the VFS needs to read the directory contents
 
   poll: called by the VFS when a process wants to check if there is
 	activity on this file and (optionally) go to sleep until there
@@ -858,6 +882,11 @@ otherwise noted.
   splice_read: called by the VFS to splice data from file to a pipe. This
 	       method is used by the splice(2) system call
 
+  setlease: called by the VFS to set or release a file lock lease.
+	    setlease has the file_lock_lock held and must not sleep.
+
+  fallocate: called by the VFS to preallocate blocks or punch a hole.
+
 Note that the file operations are implemented by the specific
 filesystem in which the inode resides. When opening a device node
 (character or block special) most filesystems will call special
@@ -884,11 +913,10 @@ the VFS uses a default. As of kernel 2.6.22, the following members are
 defined:
 
 struct dentry_operations {
-	int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, struct nameidata *);
-	int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *,
-			struct qstr *);
-	int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *,
-			const struct dentry *, const struct inode *,
+	int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, unsigned int);
+	int (*d_weak_revalidate)(struct dentry *, unsigned int);
+	int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, struct qstr *);
+	int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *, const struct dentry *,
 			unsigned int, const char *, const struct qstr *);
 	int (*d_delete)(const struct dentry *);
 	void (*d_release)(struct dentry *);
@@ -900,39 +928,57 @@ struct dentry_operations {
 
   d_revalidate: called when the VFS needs to revalidate a dentry. This
 	is called whenever a name look-up finds a dentry in the
-	dcache. Most filesystems leave this as NULL, because all their
-	dentries in the dcache are valid
+	dcache. Most local filesystems leave this as NULL, because all their
+	dentries in the dcache are valid. Network filesystems are different
+	since things can change on the server without the client necessarily
+	being aware of it.
+
+	This function should return a positive value if the dentry is still
+	valid, and zero or a negative error code if it isn't.
 
-	d_revalidate may be called in rcu-walk mode (nd->flags & LOOKUP_RCU).
+	d_revalidate may be called in rcu-walk mode (flags & LOOKUP_RCU).
 	If in rcu-walk mode, the filesystem must revalidate the dentry without
 	blocking or storing to the dentry, d_parent and d_inode should not be
-	used without care (because they can go NULL), instead nd->inode should
-	be used.
+	used without care (because they can change and, in d_inode case, even
+	become NULL under us).
 
 	If a situation is encountered that rcu-walk cannot handle, return
 	-ECHILD and it will be called again in ref-walk mode.
 
+ d_weak_revalidate: called when the VFS needs to revalidate a "jumped" dentry.
+	This is called when a path-walk ends at dentry that was not acquired by
+	doing a lookup in the parent directory. This includes "/", "." and "..",
+	as well as procfs-style symlinks and mountpoint traversal.
+
+	In this case, we are less concerned with whether the dentry is still
+	fully correct, but rather that the inode is still valid. As with
+	d_revalidate, most local filesystems will set this to NULL since their
+	dcache entries are always valid.
+
+	This function has the same return code semantics as d_revalidate.
+
+	d_weak_revalidate is only called after leaving rcu-walk mode.
+
   d_hash: called when the VFS adds a dentry to the hash table. The first
 	dentry passed to d_hash is the parent directory that the name is
-	to be hashed into. The inode is the dentry's inode.
+	to be hashed into.
 
 	Same locking and synchronisation rules as d_compare regarding
 	what is safe to dereference etc.
 
   d_compare: called to compare a dentry name with a given name. The first
 	dentry is the parent of the dentry to be compared, the second is
-	the parent's inode, then the dentry and inode (may be NULL) of the
-	child dentry. len and name string are properties of the dentry to be
-	compared. qstr is the name to compare it with.
+	the child dentry. len and name string are properties of the dentry
+	to be compared. qstr is the name to compare it with.
 
 	Must be constant and idempotent, and should not take locks if
-	possible, and should not or store into the dentry or inodes.
-	Should not dereference pointers outside the dentry or inodes without
+	possible, and should not or store into the dentry.
+	Should not dereference pointers outside the dentry without
 	lots of care (eg.  d_parent, d_inode, d_name should not be used).
 
 	However, our vfsmount is pinned, and RCU held, so the dentries and
 	inodes won't disappear, neither will our sb or filesystem module.
-	->i_sb and ->d_sb may be used.
+	->d_sb may be used.
 
 	It is a tricky calling convention because it needs to be called under
 	"rcu-walk", ie. without any locks or references on things.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-self-describing-metadata.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-self-describing-metadata.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..05aa455163e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-self-describing-metadata.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,350 @@
+XFS Self Describing Metadata
+----------------------------
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+The largest scalability problem facing XFS is not one of algorithmic
+scalability, but of verification of the filesystem structure. Scalabilty of the
+structures and indexes on disk and the algorithms for iterating them are
+adequate for supporting PB scale filesystems with billions of inodes, however it
+is this very scalability that causes the verification problem.
+
+Almost all metadata on XFS is dynamically allocated. The only fixed location
+metadata is the allocation group headers (SB, AGF, AGFL and AGI), while all
+other metadata structures need to be discovered by walking the filesystem
+structure in different ways. While this is already done by userspace tools for
+validating and repairing the structure, there are limits to what they can
+verify, and this in turn limits the supportable size of an XFS filesystem.
+
+For example, it is entirely possible to manually use xfs_db and a bit of
+scripting to analyse the structure of a 100TB filesystem when trying to
+determine the root cause of a corruption problem, but it is still mainly a
+manual task of verifying that things like single bit errors or misplaced writes
+weren't the ultimate cause of a corruption event. It may take a few hours to a
+few days to perform such forensic analysis, so for at this scale root cause
+analysis is entirely possible.
+
+However, if we scale the filesystem up to 1PB, we now have 10x as much metadata
+to analyse and so that analysis blows out towards weeks/months of forensic work.
+Most of the analysis work is slow and tedious, so as the amount of analysis goes
+up, the more likely that the cause will be lost in the noise.  Hence the primary
+concern for supporting PB scale filesystems is minimising the time and effort
+required for basic forensic analysis of the filesystem structure.
+
+
+Self Describing Metadata
+------------------------
+
+One of the problems with the current metadata format is that apart from the
+magic number in the metadata block, we have no other way of identifying what it
+is supposed to be. We can't even identify if it is the right place. Put simply,
+you can't look at a single metadata block in isolation and say "yes, it is
+supposed to be there and the contents are valid".
+
+Hence most of the time spent on forensic analysis is spent doing basic
+verification of metadata values, looking for values that are in range (and hence
+not detected by automated verification checks) but are not correct. Finding and
+understanding how things like cross linked block lists (e.g. sibling
+pointers in a btree end up with loops in them) are the key to understanding what
+went wrong, but it is impossible to tell what order the blocks were linked into
+each other or written to disk after the fact.
+
+Hence we need to record more information into the metadata to allow us to
+quickly determine if the metadata is intact and can be ignored for the purpose
+of analysis. We can't protect against every possible type of error, but we can
+ensure that common types of errors are easily detectable.  Hence the concept of
+self describing metadata.
+
+The first, fundamental requirement of self describing metadata is that the
+metadata object contains some form of unique identifier in a well known
+location. This allows us to identify the expected contents of the block and
+hence parse and verify the metadata object. IF we can't independently identify
+the type of metadata in the object, then the metadata doesn't describe itself
+very well at all!
+
+Luckily, almost all XFS metadata has magic numbers embedded already - only the
+AGFL, remote symlinks and remote attribute blocks do not contain identifying
+magic numbers. Hence we can change the on-disk format of all these objects to
+add more identifying information and detect this simply by changing the magic
+numbers in the metadata objects. That is, if it has the current magic number,
+the metadata isn't self identifying. If it contains a new magic number, it is
+self identifying and we can do much more expansive automated verification of the
+metadata object at runtime, during forensic analysis or repair.
+
+As a primary concern, self describing metadata needs some form of overall
+integrity checking. We cannot trust the metadata if we cannot verify that it has
+not been changed as a result of external influences. Hence we need some form of
+integrity check, and this is done by adding CRC32c validation to the metadata
+block. If we can verify the block contains the metadata it was intended to
+contain, a large amount of the manual verification work can be skipped.
+
+CRC32c was selected as metadata cannot be more than 64k in length in XFS and
+hence a 32 bit CRC is more than sufficient to detect multi-bit errors in
+metadata blocks. CRC32c is also now hardware accelerated on common CPUs so it is
+fast. So while CRC32c is not the strongest of possible integrity checks that
+could be used, it is more than sufficient for our needs and has relatively
+little overhead. Adding support for larger integrity fields and/or algorithms
+does really provide any extra value over CRC32c, but it does add a lot of
+complexity and so there is no provision for changing the integrity checking
+mechanism.
+
+Self describing metadata needs to contain enough information so that the
+metadata block can be verified as being in the correct place without needing to
+look at any other metadata. This means it needs to contain location information.
+Just adding a block number to the metadata is not sufficient to protect against
+mis-directed writes - a write might be misdirected to the wrong LUN and so be
+written to the "correct block" of the wrong filesystem. Hence location
+information must contain a filesystem identifier as well as a block number.
+
+Another key information point in forensic analysis is knowing who the metadata
+block belongs to. We already know the type, the location, that it is valid
+and/or corrupted, and how long ago that it was last modified. Knowing the owner
+of the block is important as it allows us to find other related metadata to
+determine the scope of the corruption. For example, if we have a extent btree
+object, we don't know what inode it belongs to and hence have to walk the entire
+filesystem to find the owner of the block. Worse, the corruption could mean that
+no owner can be found (i.e. it's an orphan block), and so without an owner field
+in the metadata we have no idea of the scope of the corruption. If we have an
+owner field in the metadata object, we can immediately do top down validation to
+determine the scope of the problem.
+
+Different types of metadata have different owner identifiers. For example,
+directory, attribute and extent tree blocks are all owned by an inode, whilst
+freespace btree blocks are owned by an allocation group. Hence the size and
+contents of the owner field are determined by the type of metadata object we are
+looking at.  The owner information can also identify misplaced writes (e.g.
+freespace btree block written to the wrong AG).
+
+Self describing metadata also needs to contain some indication of when it was
+written to the filesystem. One of the key information points when doing forensic
+analysis is how recently the block was modified. Correlation of set of corrupted
+metadata blocks based on modification times is important as it can indicate
+whether the corruptions are related, whether there's been multiple corruption
+events that lead to the eventual failure, and even whether there are corruptions
+present that the run-time verification is not detecting.
+
+For example, we can determine whether a metadata object is supposed to be free
+space or still allocated if it is still referenced by its owner by looking at
+when the free space btree block that contains the block was last written
+compared to when the metadata object itself was last written.  If the free space
+block is more recent than the object and the object's owner, then there is a
+very good chance that the block should have been removed from the owner.
+
+To provide this "written timestamp", each metadata block gets the Log Sequence
+Number (LSN) of the most recent transaction it was modified on written into it.
+This number will always increase over the life of the filesystem, and the only
+thing that resets it is running xfs_repair on the filesystem. Further, by use of
+the LSN we can tell if the corrupted metadata all belonged to the same log
+checkpoint and hence have some idea of how much modification occurred between
+the first and last instance of corrupt metadata on disk and, further, how much
+modification occurred between the corruption being written and when it was
+detected.
+
+Runtime Validation
+------------------
+
+Validation of self-describing metadata takes place at runtime in two places:
+
+	- immediately after a successful read from disk
+	- immediately prior to write IO submission
+
+The verification is completely stateless - it is done independently of the
+modification process, and seeks only to check that the metadata is what it says
+it is and that the metadata fields are within bounds and internally consistent.
+As such, we cannot catch all types of corruption that can occur within a block
+as there may be certain limitations that operational state enforces of the
+metadata, or there may be corruption of interblock relationships (e.g. corrupted
+sibling pointer lists). Hence we still need stateful checking in the main code
+body, but in general most of the per-field validation is handled by the
+verifiers.
+
+For read verification, the caller needs to specify the expected type of metadata
+that it should see, and the IO completion process verifies that the metadata
+object matches what was expected. If the verification process fails, then it
+marks the object being read as EFSCORRUPTED. The caller needs to catch this
+error (same as for IO errors), and if it needs to take special action due to a
+verification error it can do so by catching the EFSCORRUPTED error value. If we
+need more discrimination of error type at higher levels, we can define new
+error numbers for different errors as necessary.
+
+The first step in read verification is checking the magic number and determining
+whether CRC validating is necessary. If it is, the CRC32c is calculated and
+compared against the value stored in the object itself. Once this is validated,
+further checks are made against the location information, followed by extensive
+object specific metadata validation. If any of these checks fail, then the
+buffer is considered corrupt and the EFSCORRUPTED error is set appropriately.
+
+Write verification is the opposite of the read verification - first the object
+is extensively verified and if it is OK we then update the LSN from the last
+modification made to the object, After this, we calculate the CRC and insert it
+into the object. Once this is done the write IO is allowed to continue. If any
+error occurs during this process, the buffer is again marked with a EFSCORRUPTED
+error for the higher layers to catch.
+
+Structures
+----------
+
+A typical on-disk structure needs to contain the following information:
+
+struct xfs_ondisk_hdr {
+        __be32  magic;		/* magic number */
+        __be32  crc;		/* CRC, not logged */
+        uuid_t  uuid;		/* filesystem identifier */
+        __be64  owner;		/* parent object */
+        __be64  blkno;		/* location on disk */
+        __be64  lsn;		/* last modification in log, not logged */
+};
+
+Depending on the metadata, this information may be part of a header structure
+separate to the metadata contents, or may be distributed through an existing
+structure. The latter occurs with metadata that already contains some of this
+information, such as the superblock and AG headers.
+
+Other metadata may have different formats for the information, but the same
+level of information is generally provided. For example:
+
+	- short btree blocks have a 32 bit owner (ag number) and a 32 bit block
+	  number for location. The two of these combined provide the same
+	  information as @owner and @blkno in eh above structure, but using 8
+	  bytes less space on disk.
+
+	- directory/attribute node blocks have a 16 bit magic number, and the
+	  header that contains the magic number has other information in it as
+	  well. hence the additional metadata headers change the overall format
+	  of the metadata.
+
+A typical buffer read verifier is structured as follows:
+
+#define XFS_FOO_CRC_OFF		offsetof(struct xfs_ondisk_hdr, crc)
+
+static void
+xfs_foo_read_verify(
+	struct xfs_buf	*bp)
+{
+       struct xfs_mount *mp = bp->b_target->bt_mount;
+
+        if ((xfs_sb_version_hascrc(&mp->m_sb) &&
+             !xfs_verify_cksum(bp->b_addr, BBTOB(bp->b_length),
+					XFS_FOO_CRC_OFF)) ||
+            !xfs_foo_verify(bp)) {
+                XFS_CORRUPTION_ERROR(__func__, XFS_ERRLEVEL_LOW, mp, bp->b_addr);
+                xfs_buf_ioerror(bp, EFSCORRUPTED);
+        }
+}
+
+The code ensures that the CRC is only checked if the filesystem has CRCs enabled
+by checking the superblock of the feature bit, and then if the CRC verifies OK
+(or is not needed) it verifies the actual contents of the block.
+
+The verifier function will take a couple of different forms, depending on
+whether the magic number can be used to determine the format of the block. In
+the case it can't, the code is structured as follows:
+
+static bool
+xfs_foo_verify(
+	struct xfs_buf		*bp)
+{
+        struct xfs_mount	*mp = bp->b_target->bt_mount;
+        struct xfs_ondisk_hdr	*hdr = bp->b_addr;
+
+        if (hdr->magic != cpu_to_be32(XFS_FOO_MAGIC))
+                return false;
+
+        if (!xfs_sb_version_hascrc(&mp->m_sb)) {
+		if (!uuid_equal(&hdr->uuid, &mp->m_sb.sb_uuid))
+			return false;
+		if (bp->b_bn != be64_to_cpu(hdr->blkno))
+			return false;
+		if (hdr->owner == 0)
+			return false;
+	}
+
+	/* object specific verification checks here */
+
+        return true;
+}
+
+If there are different magic numbers for the different formats, the verifier
+will look like:
+
+static bool
+xfs_foo_verify(
+	struct xfs_buf		*bp)
+{
+        struct xfs_mount	*mp = bp->b_target->bt_mount;
+        struct xfs_ondisk_hdr	*hdr = bp->b_addr;
+
+        if (hdr->magic == cpu_to_be32(XFS_FOO_CRC_MAGIC)) {
+		if (!uuid_equal(&hdr->uuid, &mp->m_sb.sb_uuid))
+			return false;
+		if (bp->b_bn != be64_to_cpu(hdr->blkno))
+			return false;
+		if (hdr->owner == 0)
+			return false;
+	} else if (hdr->magic != cpu_to_be32(XFS_FOO_MAGIC))
+		return false;
+
+	/* object specific verification checks here */
+
+        return true;
+}
+
+Write verifiers are very similar to the read verifiers, they just do things in
+the opposite order to the read verifiers. A typical write verifier:
+
+static void
+xfs_foo_write_verify(
+	struct xfs_buf	*bp)
+{
+	struct xfs_mount	*mp = bp->b_target->bt_mount;
+	struct xfs_buf_log_item	*bip = bp->b_fspriv;
+
+	if (!xfs_foo_verify(bp)) {
+		XFS_CORRUPTION_ERROR(__func__, XFS_ERRLEVEL_LOW, mp, bp->b_addr);
+		xfs_buf_ioerror(bp, EFSCORRUPTED);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (!xfs_sb_version_hascrc(&mp->m_sb))
+		return;
+
+
+	if (bip) {
+		struct xfs_ondisk_hdr	*hdr = bp->b_addr;
+		hdr->lsn = cpu_to_be64(bip->bli_item.li_lsn);
+	}
+	xfs_update_cksum(bp->b_addr, BBTOB(bp->b_length), XFS_FOO_CRC_OFF);
+}
+
+This will verify the internal structure of the metadata before we go any
+further, detecting corruptions that have occurred as the metadata has been
+modified in memory. If the metadata verifies OK, and CRCs are enabled, we then
+update the LSN field (when it was last modified) and calculate the CRC on the
+metadata. Once this is done, we can issue the IO.
+
+Inodes and Dquots
+-----------------
+
+Inodes and dquots are special snowflakes. They have per-object CRC and
+self-identifiers, but they are packed so that there are multiple objects per
+buffer. Hence we do not use per-buffer verifiers to do the work of per-object
+verification and CRC calculations. The per-buffer verifiers simply perform basic
+identification of the buffer - that they contain inodes or dquots, and that
+there are magic numbers in all the expected spots. All further CRC and
+verification checks are done when each inode is read from or written back to the
+buffer.
+
+The structure of the verifiers and the identifiers checks is very similar to the
+buffer code described above. The only difference is where they are called. For
+example, inode read verification is done in xfs_iread() when the inode is first
+read out of the buffer and the struct xfs_inode is instantiated. The inode is
+already extensively verified during writeback in xfs_iflush_int, so the only
+addition here is to add the LSN and CRC to the inode as it is copied back into
+the buffer.
+
+XXX: inode unlinked list modification doesn't recalculate the inode CRC! None of
+the unlinked list modifications check or update CRCs, neither during unlink nor
+log recovery. So, it's gone unnoticed until now. This won't matter immediately -
+repair will probably complain about it - but it needs to be fixed.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt
index 3fc0c31a6f5d..5be51fd888bd 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt
@@ -18,6 +18,8 @@ Mount Options
 =============
 
 When mounting an XFS filesystem, the following options are accepted.
+For boolean mount options, the names with the (*) suffix is the
+default behaviour.
 
   allocsize=size
 	Sets the buffered I/O end-of-file preallocation size when
@@ -25,87 +27,128 @@ When mounting an XFS filesystem, the following options are accepted.
 	Valid values for this option are page size (typically 4KiB)
 	through to 1GiB, inclusive, in power-of-2 increments.
 
-  attr2/noattr2
-	The options enable/disable (default is disabled for backward
-	compatibility on-disk) an "opportunistic" improvement to be
-	made in the way inline extended attributes are stored on-disk.
-	When the new form is used for the first time (by setting or
-	removing extended attributes) the on-disk superblock feature
-	bit field will be updated to reflect this format being in use.
-
-  barrier
-	Enables the use of block layer write barriers for writes into
-	the journal and unwritten extent conversion.  This allows for
-	drive level write caching to be enabled, for devices that
-	support write barriers.
+	The default behaviour is for dynamic end-of-file
+	preallocation size, which uses a set of heuristics to
+	optimise the preallocation size based on the current
+	allocation patterns within the file and the access patterns
+	to the file. Specifying a fixed allocsize value turns off
+	the dynamic behaviour.
+
+  attr2
+  noattr2
+	The options enable/disable an "opportunistic" improvement to
+	be made in the way inline extended attributes are stored
+	on-disk.  When the new form is used for the first time when
+	attr2 is selected (either when setting or removing extended
+	attributes) the on-disk superblock feature bit field will be
+	updated to reflect this format being in use.
+
+	The default behaviour is determined by the on-disk feature
+	bit indicating that attr2 behaviour is active. If either
+	mount option it set, then that becomes the new default used
+	by the filesystem.
+
+	CRC enabled filesystems always use the attr2 format, and so
+	will reject the noattr2 mount option if it is set.
+
+  barrier (*)
+  nobarrier
+	Enables/disables the use of block layer write barriers for
+	writes into the journal and for data integrity operations.
+	This allows for drive level write caching to be enabled, for
+	devices that support write barriers.
 
   discard
-	Issue command to let the block device reclaim space freed by the
-	filesystem.  This is useful for SSD devices, thinly provisioned
-	LUNs and virtual machine images, but may have a performance
-	impact.  This option is incompatible with the nodelaylog option.
-
-  dmapi
-	Enable the DMAPI (Data Management API) event callouts.
-	Use with the "mtpt" option.
-
-  grpid/bsdgroups and nogrpid/sysvgroups
-	These options define what group ID a newly created file gets.
-	When grpid is set, it takes the group ID of the directory in
-	which it is created; otherwise (the default) it takes the fsgid
-	of the current process, unless the directory has the setgid bit
-	set, in which case it takes the gid from the parent directory,
-	and also gets the setgid bit set if it is a directory itself.
-
-  ihashsize=value
-	In memory inode hashes have been removed, so this option has
-	no function as of August 2007. Option is deprecated.
-
-  ikeep/noikeep
-	When ikeep is specified, XFS does not delete empty inode clusters
-	and keeps them around on disk. ikeep is the traditional XFS
-	behaviour. When noikeep is specified, empty inode clusters
-	are returned to the free space pool. The default is noikeep for
-	non-DMAPI mounts, while ikeep is the default when DMAPI is in use.
-
-  inode64
-	Indicates that XFS is allowed to create inodes at any location
-	in the filesystem, including those which will result in inode
-	numbers occupying more than 32 bits of significance.  This is
-	provided for backwards compatibility, but causes problems for
-	backup applications that cannot handle large inode numbers.
-
-  largeio/nolargeio
+  nodiscard (*)
+	Enable/disable the issuing of commands to let the block
+	device reclaim space freed by the filesystem.  This is
+	useful for SSD devices, thinly provisioned LUNs and virtual
+	machine images, but may have a performance impact.
+
+	Note: It is currently recommended that you use the fstrim
+	application to discard unused blocks rather than the discard
+	mount option because the performance impact of this option
+	is quite severe.
+
+  grpid/bsdgroups
+  nogrpid/sysvgroups (*)
+	These options define what group ID a newly created file
+	gets.  When grpid is set, it takes the group ID of the
+	directory in which it is created; otherwise it takes the
+	fsgid of the current process, unless the directory has the
+	setgid bit set, in which case it takes the gid from the
+	parent directory, and also gets the setgid bit set if it is
+	a directory itself.
+
+  filestreams
+	Make the data allocator use the filestreams allocation mode
+	across the entire filesystem rather than just on directories
+	configured to use it.
+
+  ikeep
+  noikeep (*)
+	When ikeep is specified, XFS does not delete empty inode
+	clusters and keeps them around on disk.  When noikeep is
+	specified, empty inode clusters are returned to the free
+	space pool.
+
+  inode32
+  inode64 (*)
+	When inode32 is specified, it indicates that XFS limits
+	inode creation to locations which will not result in inode
+	numbers with more than 32 bits of significance.
+
+	When inode64 is specified, it indicates that XFS is allowed
+	to create inodes at any location in the filesystem,
+	including those which will result in inode numbers occupying
+	more than 32 bits of significance. 
+
+	inode32 is provided for backwards compatibility with older
+	systems and applications, since 64 bits inode numbers might
+	cause problems for some applications that cannot handle
+	large inode numbers.  If applications are in use which do
+	not handle inode numbers bigger than 32 bits, the inode32
+	option should be specified.
+
+
+  largeio
+  nolargeio (*)
 	If "nolargeio" is specified, the optimal I/O reported in
-	st_blksize by stat(2) will be as small as possible to allow user
-	applications to avoid inefficient read/modify/write I/O.
-	If "largeio" specified, a filesystem that has a "swidth" specified
-	will return the "swidth" value (in bytes) in st_blksize. If the
-	filesystem does not have a "swidth" specified but does specify
-	an "allocsize" then "allocsize" (in bytes) will be returned
-	instead.
-	If neither of these two options are specified, then filesystem
-	will behave as if "nolargeio" was specified.
+	st_blksize by stat(2) will be as small as possible to allow
+	user applications to avoid inefficient read/modify/write
+	I/O.  This is typically the page size of the machine, as
+	this is the granularity of the page cache.
+
+	If "largeio" specified, a filesystem that was created with a
+	"swidth" specified will return the "swidth" value (in bytes)
+	in st_blksize. If the filesystem does not have a "swidth"
+	specified but does specify an "allocsize" then "allocsize"
+	(in bytes) will be returned instead. Otherwise the behaviour
+	is the same as if "nolargeio" was specified.
 
   logbufs=value
-	Set the number of in-memory log buffers.  Valid numbers range
-	from 2-8 inclusive.
-	The default value is 8 buffers for filesystems with a
-	blocksize of 64KiB, 4 buffers for filesystems with a blocksize
-	of 32KiB, 3 buffers for filesystems with a blocksize of 16KiB
-	and 2 buffers for all other configurations.  Increasing the
-	number of buffers may increase performance on some workloads
-	at the cost of the memory used for the additional log buffers
-	and their associated control structures.
+	Set the number of in-memory log buffers.  Valid numbers
+	range from 2-8 inclusive.
+
+	The default value is 8 buffers.
+
+	If the memory cost of 8 log buffers is too high on small
+	systems, then it may be reduced at some cost to performance
+	on metadata intensive workloads. The logbsize option below
+	controls the size of each buffer and so is also relevant to
+	this case.
 
   logbsize=value
-	Set the size of each in-memory log buffer.
-	Size may be specified in bytes, or in kilobytes with a "k" suffix.
-	Valid sizes for version 1 and version 2 logs are 16384 (16k) and
-	32768 (32k).  Valid sizes for version 2 logs also include
-	65536 (64k), 131072 (128k) and 262144 (256k).
-	The default value for machines with more than 32MiB of memory
-	is 32768, machines with less memory use 16384 by default.
+	Set the size of each in-memory log buffer.  The size may be
+	specified in bytes, or in kilobytes with a "k" suffix.
+	Valid sizes for version 1 and version 2 logs are 16384 (16k)
+	and 32768 (32k).  Valid sizes for version 2 logs also
+	include 65536 (64k), 131072 (128k) and 262144 (256k). The
+	logbsize must be an integer multiple of the log
+	stripe unit configured at mkfs time.
+
+	The default value for for version 1 logs is 32768, while the
+	default value for version 2 logs is MAX(32768, log_sunit).
 
   logdev=device and rtdev=device
 	Use an external log (metadata journal) and/or real-time device.
@@ -114,16 +157,11 @@ When mounting an XFS filesystem, the following options are accepted.
 	optional, and the log section can be separate from the data
 	section or contained within it.
 
-  mtpt=mountpoint
-	Use with the "dmapi" option.  The value specified here will be
-	included in the DMAPI mount event, and should be the path of
-	the actual mountpoint that is used.
-
   noalign
-	Data allocations will not be aligned at stripe unit boundaries.
-
-  noatime
-	Access timestamps are not updated when a file is read.
+	Data allocations will not be aligned at stripe unit
+	boundaries. This is only relevant to filesystems created
+	with non-zero data alignment parameters (sunit, swidth) by
+	mkfs.
 
   norecovery
 	The filesystem will be mounted without running log recovery.
@@ -134,8 +172,14 @@ When mounting an XFS filesystem, the following options are accepted.
 	the mount will fail.
 
   nouuid
-	Don't check for double mounted file systems using the file system uuid.
-	This is useful to mount LVM snapshot volumes.
+	Don't check for double mounted file systems using the file
+	system uuid.  This is useful to mount LVM snapshot volumes,
+	and often used in combination with "norecovery" for mounting
+	read-only snapshots.
+
+  noquota
+	Forcibly turns off all quota accounting and enforcement
+	within the filesystem.
 
   uquota/usrquota/uqnoenforce/quota
 	User disk quota accounting enabled, and limits (optionally)
@@ -150,24 +194,64 @@ When mounting an XFS filesystem, the following options are accepted.
 	enforced.  Refer to xfs_quota(8) for further details.
 
   sunit=value and swidth=value
-	Used to specify the stripe unit and width for a RAID device or
-	a stripe volume.  "value" must be specified in 512-byte block
-	units.
-	If this option is not specified and the filesystem was made on
-	a stripe volume or the stripe width or unit were specified for
-	the RAID device at mkfs time, then the mount system call will
-	restore the value from the superblock.  For filesystems that
-	are made directly on RAID devices, these options can be used
-	to override the information in the superblock if the underlying
-	disk layout changes after the filesystem has been created.
-	The "swidth" option is required if the "sunit" option has been
-	specified, and must be a multiple of the "sunit" value.
+	Used to specify the stripe unit and width for a RAID device
+	or a stripe volume.  "value" must be specified in 512-byte
+	block units. These options are only relevant to filesystems
+	that were created with non-zero data alignment parameters.
+
+	The sunit and swidth parameters specified must be compatible
+	with the existing filesystem alignment characteristics.  In
+	general, that means the only valid changes to sunit are
+	increasing it by a power-of-2 multiple. Valid swidth values
+	are any integer multiple of a valid sunit value.
+
+	Typically the only time these mount options are necessary if
+	after an underlying RAID device has had it's geometry
+	modified, such as adding a new disk to a RAID5 lun and
+	reshaping it.
 
   swalloc
 	Data allocations will be rounded up to stripe width boundaries
 	when the current end of file is being extended and the file
 	size is larger than the stripe width size.
 
+  wsync
+	When specified, all filesystem namespace operations are
+	executed synchronously. This ensures that when the namespace
+	operation (create, unlink, etc) completes, the change to the
+	namespace is on stable storage. This is useful in HA setups
+	where failover must not result in clients seeing
+	inconsistent namespace presentation during or after a
+	failover event.
+
+
+Deprecated Mount Options
+========================
+
+  delaylog/nodelaylog
+	Delayed logging is the only logging method that XFS supports
+	now, so these mount options are now ignored.
+
+	Due for removal in 3.12.
+
+  ihashsize=value
+	In memory inode hashes have been removed, so this option has
+	no function as of August 2007. Option is deprecated.
+
+	Due for removal in 3.12.
+
+  irixsgid
+	This behaviour is now controlled by a sysctl, so the mount
+	option is ignored.
+
+	Due for removal in 3.12.
+
+  osyncisdsync
+  osyncisosync
+	O_SYNC and O_DSYNC are fully supported, so there is no need
+	for these options any more.
+
+	Due for removal in 3.12.
 
 sysctls
 =======
@@ -179,15 +263,20 @@ The following sysctls are available for the XFS filesystem:
 	in /proc/fs/xfs/stat.  It then immediately resets to "0".
 
   fs.xfs.xfssyncd_centisecs	(Min: 100  Default: 3000  Max: 720000)
-  	The interval at which the xfssyncd thread flushes metadata
-  	out to disk.  This thread will flush log activity out, and
-  	do some processing on unlinked inodes.
+	The interval at which the filesystem flushes metadata
+	out to disk and runs internal cache cleanup routines.
 
-  fs.xfs.xfsbufd_centisecs	(Min: 50  Default: 100	Max: 3000)
-	The interval at which xfsbufd scans the dirty metadata buffers list.
+  fs.xfs.filestream_centisecs	(Min: 1  Default: 3000  Max: 360000)
+	The interval at which the filesystem ages filestreams cache
+	references and returns timed-out AGs back to the free stream
+	pool.
 
-  fs.xfs.age_buffer_centisecs	(Min: 100  Default: 1500  Max: 720000)
-	The age at which xfsbufd flushes dirty metadata buffers to disk.
+  fs.xfs.speculative_prealloc_lifetime
+		(Units: seconds   Min: 1  Default: 300  Max: 86400)
+	The interval at which the background scanning for inodes
+	with unused speculative preallocation runs. The scan
+	removes unused preallocation from clean inodes and releases
+	the unused space back to the free pool.
 
   fs.xfs.error_level		(Min: 0  Default: 3  Max: 11)
 	A volume knob for error reporting when internal errors occur.
@@ -244,9 +333,31 @@ The following sysctls are available for the XFS filesystem:
 	by the xfs_io(8) chattr command on a directory to be
 	inherited by files in that directory.
 
+  fs.xfs.inherit_nodefrag	(Min: 0  Default: 1  Max: 1)
+	Setting this to "1" will cause the "nodefrag" flag set
+	by the xfs_io(8) chattr command on a directory to be
+	inherited by files in that directory.
+
   fs.xfs.rotorstep		(Min: 1  Default: 1  Max: 256)
 	In "inode32" allocation mode, this option determines how many
 	files the allocator attempts to allocate in the same allocation
 	group before moving to the next allocation group.  The intent
 	is to control the rate at which the allocator moves between
 	allocation groups when allocating extents for new files.
+
+Deprecated Sysctls
+==================
+
+  fs.xfs.xfsbufd_centisecs	(Min: 50  Default: 100	Max: 3000)
+	Dirty metadata is now tracked by the log subsystem and
+	flushing is driven by log space and idling demands. The
+	xfsbufd no longer exists, so this syctl does nothing.
+
+	Due for removal in 3.14.
+
+  fs.xfs.age_buffer_centisecs	(Min: 100  Default: 1500  Max: 720000)
+	Dirty metadata is now tracked by the log subsystem and
+	flushing is driven by log space and idling demands. The
+	xfsbufd no longer exists, so this syctl does nothing.
+
+	Due for removal in 3.14.
diff --git a/Documentation/firmware_class/README b/Documentation/firmware_class/README
index 7eceaff63f5f..43fada989e65 100644
--- a/Documentation/firmware_class/README
+++ b/Documentation/firmware_class/README
@@ -18,32 +18,45 @@
  High level behavior (mixed):
  ============================
 
- kernel(driver): calls request_firmware(&fw_entry, $FIRMWARE, device)
-
- userspace:
+ 1), kernel(driver):
+	- calls request_firmware(&fw_entry, $FIRMWARE, device)
+	- kernel searchs the fimware image with name $FIRMWARE directly
+	in the below search path of root filesystem:
+		User customized search path by module parameter 'path'[1]
+		"/lib/firmware/updates/" UTS_RELEASE,
+		"/lib/firmware/updates",
+		"/lib/firmware/" UTS_RELEASE,
+		"/lib/firmware"
+	- If found, goto 7), else goto 2)
+
+	[1], the 'path' is a string parameter which length should be less
+	than 256, user should pass 'firmware_class.path=$CUSTOMIZED_PATH'
+	if firmware_class is built in kernel(the general situation)
+
+ 2), userspace:
  	- /sys/class/firmware/xxx/{loading,data} appear.
 	- hotplug gets called with a firmware identifier in $FIRMWARE
 	  and the usual hotplug environment.
 		- hotplug: echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/xxx/loading
 
- kernel: Discard any previous partial load.
+ 3), kernel: Discard any previous partial load.
 
- userspace:
+ 4), userspace:
 		- hotplug: cat appropriate_firmware_image > \
 					/sys/class/firmware/xxx/data
 
- kernel: grows a buffer in PAGE_SIZE increments to hold the image as it
+ 5), kernel: grows a buffer in PAGE_SIZE increments to hold the image as it
 	 comes in.
 
- userspace:
+ 6), userspace:
 		- hotplug: echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/xxx/loading
 
- kernel: request_firmware() returns and the driver has the firmware
+ 7), kernel: request_firmware() returns and the driver has the firmware
 	 image in fw_entry->{data,size}. If something went wrong
 	 request_firmware() returns non-zero and fw_entry is set to
 	 NULL.
 
- kernel(driver): Driver code calls release_firmware(fw_entry) releasing
+ 8), kernel(driver): Driver code calls release_firmware(fw_entry) releasing
 		 the firmware image and any related resource.
 
  High level behavior (driver code):
@@ -106,3 +119,10 @@
    on the setup, so I think that the choice on what firmware to make
    persistent should be left to userspace.
 
+ about firmware cache:
+ --------------------
+ After firmware cache mechanism is introduced during system sleep,
+ request_firmware can be called safely inside device's suspend and
+ resume callback, and callers need't cache the firmware by
+ themselves any more for dealing with firmware loss during system
+ resume.
diff --git a/Documentation/fmc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/fmc/00-INDEX
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..431c69570f43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fmc/00-INDEX
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+
+Documentation in this directory comes from sections of the manual we
+wrote for the externally-developed fmc-bus package. The complete
+manual as of today (2013-02) is available in PDF format at
+http://www.ohwr.org/projects/fmc-bus/files
+
+00-INDEX
+	- this file.
+
+FMC-and-SDB.txt
+	- What are FMC and SDB, basic concepts for this framework
+
+API.txt
+	- The functions that are exported by the bus driver
+
+parameters.txt
+	- The module parameters
+
+carrier.txt
+	- writing a carrier (a device)
+
+mezzanine.txt
+	- writing code for your mezzanine (a driver)
+
+identifiers.txt
+	- how identification and matching works
+
+fmc-fakedev.txt
+	- about drivers/fmc/fmc-fakedev.ko
+
+fmc-trivial.txt
+	- about drivers/fmc/fmc-trivial.ko
+
+fmc-write-eeprom.txt
+	- about drivers/fmc/fmc-write-eeprom.ko
+
+fmc-chardev.txt
+	- about drivers/fmc/fmc-chardev.ko
diff --git a/Documentation/fmc/API.txt b/Documentation/fmc/API.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..06b06b92c794
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fmc/API.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+Functions Exported by fmc.ko
+****************************
+
+The FMC core exports the usual 4 functions that are needed for a bus to
+work, and a few more:
+
+        int fmc_driver_register(struct fmc_driver *drv);
+        void fmc_driver_unregister(struct fmc_driver *drv);
+        int fmc_device_register(struct fmc_device *fmc);
+        void fmc_device_unregister(struct fmc_device *fmc);
+
+        int fmc_device_register_n(struct fmc_device **fmc, int n);
+        void fmc_device_unregister_n(struct fmc_device **fmc, int n);
+
+        uint32_t fmc_readl(struct fmc_device *fmc, int offset);
+        void fmc_writel(struct fmc_device *fmc, uint32_t val, int off);
+        void *fmc_get_drvdata(struct fmc_device *fmc);
+        void fmc_set_drvdata(struct fmc_device *fmc, void *data);
+
+        int fmc_reprogram(struct fmc_device *f, struct fmc_driver *d, char *gw,
+                          int sdb_entry);
+
+The data structure that describe a device is detailed in *note FMC
+Device::, the one that describes a driver is detailed in *note FMC
+Driver::.  Please note that structures of type fmc_device must be
+allocated by the caller, but must not be released after unregistering.
+The fmc-bus itself takes care of releasing the structure when their use
+count reaches zero - actually, the device model does that in lieu of us.
+
+The functions to register and unregister n devices are meant to be used
+by carriers that host more than one mezzanine. The devices must all be
+registered at the same time because if the FPGA is reprogrammed, all
+devices in the array are affected. Usually, the driver matching the
+first device will reprogram the FPGA, so other devices must know they
+are already driven by a reprogrammed FPGA.
+
+If a carrier hosts slots that are driven by different FPGA devices, it
+should register as a group only mezzanines that are driven by the same
+FPGA, for the reason outlined above.
+
+Finally, the fmc_reprogram function calls the reprogram method (see
+*note The API Offered by Carriers:: and also scans the memory area for
+an SDB tree. You can pass -1 as sdb_entry to disable such scan.
+Otherwise, the function fails if no tree is found at the specified
+entry point.  The function is meant to factorize common code, and by
+the time you read this it is already used by the spec-sw and fine-delay
+modules.
diff --git a/Documentation/fmc/FMC-and-SDB.txt b/Documentation/fmc/FMC-and-SDB.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fa14e0b24521
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fmc/FMC-and-SDB.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+
+FMC (FPGA Mezzanine Card) is the standard we use for our I/O devices,
+in the context of White Rabbit and related hardware.
+
+In our I/O environments we need to write drivers for each mezzanine
+card, and such drivers must work regardless of the carrier being used.
+To achieve this, we abstract the FMC interface.
+
+We have a carrier for PCI-E called SPEC and one for VME called SVEC,
+but more are planned.  Also, we support stand-alone devices (usually
+plugged on a SPEC card), controlled through Etherbone, developed by GSI.
+
+Code and documentation for the FMC bus was born as part of the spec-sw
+project, but now it lives in its own project. Other projects, i.e.
+software support for the various carriers, should include this as a
+submodule.
+
+The most up to date version of code and documentation is always
+available from the repository you can clone from:
+
+        git://ohwr.org/fmc-projects/fmc-bus.git (read-only)
+        git@ohwr.org:fmc-projects/fmc-bus.git (read-write for developers)
+
+Selected versions of the documentation, as well as complete tar
+archives for selected revisions are placed to the Files section of the
+project: `http://www.ohwr.org/projects/fmc-bus/files'
+
+
+What is FMC
+***********
+
+FMC, as said, stands for "FPGA Mezzanine Card". It is a standard
+developed by the VME consortium called VITA (VMEbus International Trade
+Association and ratified by ANSI, the American National Standard
+Institute.  The official documentation is called "ANSI-VITA 57.1".
+
+The FMC card is an almost square PCB, around 70x75 millimeters, that is
+called mezzanine in this document.  It usually lives plugged into
+another PCB for power supply and control; such bigger circuit board is
+called carrier from now on, and a single carrier may host more than one
+mezzanine.
+
+In the typical application the mezzanine is mostly analog while the
+carrier is mostly digital, and hosts an FPGA that must be configured to
+match the specific mezzanine and the desired application. Thus, you may
+need to load different FPGA images to drive different instances of the
+same mezzanine.
+
+FMC, as such, is not a bus in the usual meaning of the term, because
+most carriers have only one connector, and carriers with several
+connectors have completely separate electrical connections to them.
+This package, however, implements a bus as a software abstraction.
+
+
+What is SDB
+***********
+
+SDB (Self Describing Bus) is a set of data structures that we use for
+enumerating the internal structure of an FPGA image. We also use it as
+a filesystem inside the FMC EEPROM.
+
+SDB is not mandatory for use of this FMC kernel bus, but if you have SDB
+this package can make good use of it.  SDB itself is developed in the
+fpga-config-space OHWR project. The link to the repository is
+`git://ohwr.org/hdl-core-lib/fpga-config-space.git' and what is used in
+this project lives in the sdbfs subdirectory in there.
+
+SDB support for FMC is described in *note FMC Identification:: and
+*note SDB Support::
+
+
+SDB Support
+***********
+
+The fmc.ko bus driver exports a few functions to help drivers taking
+advantage of the SDB information that may be present in your own FPGA
+memory image.
+
+The module exports the following functions, in the special header
+<linux/fmc-sdb.h>. The linux/ prefix in the name is there because we
+plan to submit it upstream in the future, and don't want to force
+changes on our drivers if that happens.
+
+         int fmc_scan_sdb_tree(struct fmc_device *fmc, unsigned long address);
+         void fmc_show_sdb_tree(struct fmc_device *fmc);
+         signed long fmc_find_sdb_device(struct sdb_array *tree, uint64_t vendor,
+                                         uint32_t device, unsigned long *sz);
+         int fmc_free_sdb_tree(struct fmc_device *fmc);
diff --git a/Documentation/fmc/carrier.txt b/Documentation/fmc/carrier.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5e4f1dd3e98b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fmc/carrier.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,311 @@
+FMC Device
+**********
+
+Within the Linux bus framework, the FMC device is created and
+registered by the carrier driver. For example, the PCI driver for the
+SPEC card fills a data structure for each SPEC that it drives, and
+registers an associated FMC device for each card.  The SVEC driver can
+do exactly the same for the VME carrier (actually, it should do it
+twice, because the SVEC carries two FMC mezzanines).  Similarly, an
+Etherbone driver will be able to register its own FMC devices, offering
+communication primitives through frame exchange.
+
+The contents of the EEPROM within the FMC are used for identification
+purposes, i.e. for matching the device with its own driver. For this
+reason the device structure includes a complete copy of the EEPROM
+(actually, the carrier driver may choose whether or not to return it -
+for example we most likely won't have the whole EEPROM available for
+Etherbone devices.
+
+The following listing shows the current structure defining a device.
+Please note that all the machinery is in place but some details may
+still change in the future.  For this reason, there is a version field
+at the beginning of the structure.  As usual, the minor number will
+change for compatible changes (like a new flag) and the major number
+will increase when an incompatible change happens (for example, a
+change in layout of some fmc data structures).  Device writers should
+just set it to the value FMC_VERSION, and be ready to get back -EINVAL
+at registration time.
+
+     struct fmc_device {
+             unsigned long version;
+             unsigned long flags;
+             struct module *owner;           /* char device must pin it */
+             struct fmc_fru_id id;           /* for EEPROM-based match */
+             struct fmc_operations *op;      /* carrier-provided */
+             int irq;                        /* according to host bus. 0 == none */
+             int eeprom_len;                 /* Usually 8kB, may be less */
+             int eeprom_addr;                /* 0x50, 0x52 etc */
+             uint8_t *eeprom;                /* Full contents or leading part */
+             char *carrier_name;             /* "SPEC" or similar, for special use */
+             void *carrier_data;             /* "struct spec *" or equivalent */
+             __iomem void *fpga_base;        /* May be NULL (Etherbone) */
+             __iomem void *slot_base;        /* Set by the driver */
+             struct fmc_device **devarray;   /* Allocated by the bus */
+             int slot_id;                    /* Index in the slot array */
+             int nr_slots;                   /* Number of slots in this carrier */
+             unsigned long memlen;           /* Used for the char device */
+             struct device dev;              /* For Linux use */
+             struct device *hwdev;           /* The underlying hardware device */
+             unsigned long sdbfs_entry;
+             struct sdb_array *sdb;
+             uint32_t device_id;             /* Filled by the device */
+             char *mezzanine_name;           /* Defaults to ``fmc'' */
+             void *mezzanine_data;
+     };
+
+The meaning of most fields is summarized in the code comment above.
+
+The following fields must be filled by the carrier driver before
+registration:
+
+   * version: must be set to FMC_VERSION.
+
+   * owner: set to MODULE_OWNER.
+
+   * op: the operations to act on the device.
+
+   * irq: number for the mezzanine; may be zero.
+
+   * eeprom_len: length of the following array.
+
+   * eeprom_addr: 0x50 for first mezzanine and so on.
+
+   * eeprom: the full content of the I2C EEPROM.
+
+   * carrier_name.
+
+   * carrier_data: a unique pointer for the carrier.
+
+   * fpga_base: the I/O memory address (may be NULL).
+
+   * slot_id: the index of this slot (starting from zero).
+
+   * memlen: if fpga_base is valid, the length of I/O memory.
+
+   * hwdev: to be used in some dev_err() calls.
+
+   * device_id: a slot-specific unique integer number.
+
+
+Please note that the carrier should read its own EEPROM memory before
+registering the device, as well as fill all other fields listed above.
+
+The following fields should not be assigned, because they are filled
+later by either the bus or the device driver:
+
+   * flags.
+
+   * fru_id: filled by the bus, parsing the eeprom.
+
+   * slot_base: filled and used by the driver, if useful to it.
+
+   * devarray: an array og all mezzanines driven by a singe FPGA.
+
+   * nr_slots: set by the core at registration time.
+
+   * dev: used by Linux.
+
+   * sdb: FPGA contents, scanned according to driver's directions.
+
+   * sdbfs_entry: SDB entry point in EEPROM: autodetected.
+
+   * mezzanine_data: available for the driver.
+
+   * mezzanine_name: filled by fmc-bus during identification.
+
+
+Note: mezzanine_data may be redundant, because Linux offers the drvdata
+approach, so the field may be removed in later versions of this bus
+implementation.
+
+As I write this, she SPEC carrier is already completely functional in
+the fmc-bus environment, and is a good reference to look at.
+
+
+The API Offered by Carriers
+===========================
+
+The carrier provides a number of methods by means of the
+`fmc_operations' structure, which currently is defined like this
+(again, it is a moving target, please refer to the header rather than
+this document):
+
+     struct fmc_operations {
+             uint32_t (*readl)(struct fmc_device *fmc, int offset);
+             void (*writel)(struct fmc_device *fmc, uint32_t value, int offset);
+             int (*reprogram)(struct fmc_device *f, struct fmc_driver *d, char *gw);
+             int (*validate)(struct fmc_device *fmc, struct fmc_driver *drv);
+             int (*irq_request)(struct fmc_device *fmc, irq_handler_t h,
+                                char *name, int flags);
+             void (*irq_ack)(struct fmc_device *fmc);
+             int (*irq_free)(struct fmc_device *fmc);
+             int (*gpio_config)(struct fmc_device *fmc, struct fmc_gpio *gpio,
+                                int ngpio);
+             int (*read_ee)(struct fmc_device *fmc, int pos, void *d, int l);
+             int (*write_ee)(struct fmc_device *fmc, int pos, const void *d, int l);
+     };
+
+The individual methods perform the following tasks:
+
+`readl'
+`writel'
+     These functions access FPGA registers by whatever means the
+     carrier offers. They are not expected to fail, and most of the time
+     they will just make a memory access to the host bus. If the
+     carrier provides a fpga_base pointer, the driver may use direct
+     access through that pointer. For this reason the header offers the
+     inline functions fmc_readl and fmc_writel that access fpga_base if
+     the respective method is NULL. A driver that wants to be portable
+     and efficient should use fmc_readl and fmc_writel.  For Etherbone,
+     or other non-local carriers, error-management is still to be
+     defined.
+
+`validate'
+     Module parameters are used to manage different applications for
+     two or more boards of the same kind. Validation is based on the
+     busid module parameter, if provided, and returns the matching
+     index in the associated array. See *note Module Parameters:: in in
+     doubt. If no match is found, `-ENOENT' is returned; if the user
+     didn't pass `busid=', all devices will pass validation.  The value
+     returned by the validate method can be used as index into other
+     parameters (for example, some drivers use the `lm32=' parameter in
+     this way). Such "generic parameters" are documented in *note
+     Module Parameters::, below. The validate method is used by
+     `fmc-trivial.ko', described in *note fmc-trivial::.
+
+`reprogram'
+     The carrier enumerates FMC devices by loading a standard (or
+     golden) FPGA binary that allows EEPROM access. Each driver, then,
+     will need to reprogram the FPGA by calling this function.  If the
+     name argument is NULL, the carrier should reprogram the golden
+     binary. If the gateware name has been overridden through module
+     parameters (in a carrier-specific way) the file loaded will match
+     the parameters. Per-device gateware names can be specified using
+     the `gateware=' parameter, see *note Module Parameters::.  Note:
+     Clients should call rhe new helper, fmc_reprogram, which both
+     calls this method and parse the SDB tree of the FPGA.
+
+`irq_request'
+`irq_ack'
+`irq_free'
+     Interrupt management is carrier-specific, so it is abstracted as
+     operations. The interrupt number is listed in the device
+     structure, and for the mezzanine driver the number is only
+     informative.  The handler will receive the fmc pointer as dev_id;
+     the flags argument is passed to the Linux request_irq function,
+     but fmc-specific flags may be added in the future. You'll most
+     likely want to pass the `IRQF_SHARED' flag.
+
+`gpio_config'
+     The method allows to configure a GPIO pin in the carrier, and read
+     its current value if it is configured as input. See *note The GPIO
+     Abstraction:: for details.
+
+`read_ee'
+`write_ee'
+     Read or write the EEPROM. The functions are expected to be only
+     called before reprogramming and the carrier should refuse them
+     with `ENODEV' after reprogramming.  The offset is expected to be
+     within 8kB (the current size), but addresses up to 1MB are
+     reserved to fit bigger I2C devices in the future. Carriers may
+     offer access to other internal flash memories using these same
+     methods: for example the SPEC driver may define that its carrier
+     I2C memory is seen at offset 1M and the internal SPI flash is seen
+     at offset 16M.  This multiplexing of several flash memories in the
+     same address space is carrier-specific and should only be used
+     by a driver that has verified the `carrier_name' field.
+
+
+
+The GPIO Abstraction
+====================
+
+Support for GPIO pins in the fmc-bus environment is not very
+straightforward and deserves special discussion.
+
+While the general idea of a carrier-independent driver seems to fly,
+configuration of specific signals within the carrier needs at least
+some knowledge of the carrier itself.  For this reason, the specific
+driver can request to configure carrier-specific GPIO pins, numbered
+from 0 to at most 4095.  Configuration is performed by passing a
+pointer to an array of struct fmc_gpio items, as well as the length of
+the array. This is the data structure:
+
+        struct fmc_gpio {
+                char *carrier_name;
+                int gpio;
+                int _gpio;      /* internal use by the carrier */
+                int mode;       /* GPIOF_DIR_OUT etc, from <linux/gpio.h> */
+                int irqmode;    /* IRQF_TRIGGER_LOW and so on */
+        };
+
+By specifying a carrier_name for each pin, the driver may access
+different pins in different carriers.  The gpio_config method is
+expected to return the number of pins successfully configured, ignoring
+requests for other carriers. However, if no pin is configured (because
+no structure at all refers to the current carrier_name), the operation
+returns an error so the caller will know that it is running under a
+yet-unsupported carrier.
+
+So, for example, a driver that has been developed and tested on both
+the SPEC and the SVEC may request configuration of two different GPIO
+pins, and expect one such configuration to succeed - if none succeeds
+it most likely means that the current carrier is a still-unknown one.
+
+If, however, your GPIO pin has a specific known role, you can pass a
+special number in the gpio field, using one of the following macros:
+
+        #define FMC_GPIO_RAW(x)         (x)             /* 4096 of them */
+        #define FMC_GPIO_IRQ(x)         ((x) + 0x1000)  /*  256 of them */
+        #define FMC_GPIO_LED(x)         ((x) + 0x1100)  /*  256 of them */
+        #define FMC_GPIO_KEY(x)         ((x) + 0x1200)  /*  256 of them */
+        #define FMC_GPIO_TP(x)          ((x) + 0x1300)  /*  256 of them */
+        #define FMC_GPIO_USER(x)        ((x) + 0x1400)  /*  256 of them */
+
+Use of virtual GPIO numbers (anything but FMC_GPIO_RAW) is allowed
+provided the carrier_name field in the data structure is left
+unspecified (NULL). Each carrier is responsible for providing a mapping
+between virtual and physical GPIO numbers. The carrier may then use the
+_gpio field to cache the result of this mapping.
+
+All carriers must map their I/O lines to the sets above starting from
+zero.  The SPEC, for example, maps interrupt pins 0 and 1, and test
+points 0 through 3 (even if the test points on the PCB are called
+5,6,7,8).
+
+If, for example, a driver requires a free LED and a test point (for a
+scope probe to be plugged at some point during development) it may ask
+for FMC_GPIO_LED(0) and FMC_GPIO_TP(0). Each carrier will provide
+suitable GPIO pins.  Clearly, the person running the drivers will know
+the order used by the specific carrier driver in assigning leds and
+testpoints, so to make a carrier-dependent use of the diagnostic tools.
+
+In theory, some form of autodetection should be possible: a driver like
+the wr-nic (which uses IRQ(1) on the SPEC card) should configure
+IRQ(0), make a test with software-generated interrupts and configure
+IRQ(1) if the test fails. This probing step should be used because even
+if the wr-nic gateware is known to use IRQ1 on the SPEC, the driver
+should be carrier-independent and thus use IRQ(0) as a first bet -
+actually, the knowledge that IRQ0 may fail is carrier-dependent
+information, but using it doesn't make the driver unsuitable for other
+carriers.
+
+The return value of gpio_config is defined as follows:
+
+   * If no pin in the array can be used by the carrier, `-ENODEV'.
+
+   * If at least one virtual GPIO number cannot be mapped, `-ENOENT'.
+
+   * On success, 0 or positive. The value returned is the number of
+     high input bits (if no input is configured, the value for success
+     is 0).
+
+While I admit the procedure is not completely straightforward, it
+allows configuration, input and output with a single carrier operation.
+Given the typical use case of FMC devices, GPIO operations are not
+expected to ever by in hot paths, and GPIO access so fare has only been
+used to configure the interrupt pin, mode and polarity. Especially
+reading inputs is not expected to be common. If your device has GPIO
+capabilities in the hot path, you should consider using the kernel's
+GPIO mechanisms.
diff --git a/Documentation/fmc/fmc-chardev.txt b/Documentation/fmc/fmc-chardev.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d9ccb278e597
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fmc/fmc-chardev.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+fmc-chardev
+===========
+
+This is a simple generic driver, that allows user access by means of a
+character device (actually, one for each mezzanine it takes hold of).
+
+The char device is created as a misc device. Its name in /dev (as
+created by udev) is the same name as the underlying FMC device. Thus,
+the name can be a silly fmc-0000 look-alike if the device has no
+identifiers nor bus_id, a more specific fmc-0400 if the device has a
+bus-specific address but no associated name, or something like
+fdelay-0400 if the FMC core can rely on both a mezzanine name and a bus
+address.
+
+Currently the driver only supports read and write: you can lseek to the
+desired address and read or write a register.
+
+The driver assumes all registers are 32-bit in size, and only accepts a
+single read or write per system call. However, as a result of Unix read
+and write semantics, users can simply fread or fwrite bigger areas in
+order to dump or store bigger memory areas.
+
+There is currently no support for mmap, user-space interrupt management
+and DMA buffers. They may be added in later versions, if the need
+arises.
+
+The example below shows raw access to a SPEC card programmed with its
+golden FPGA file, that features an SDB structure at offset 256 - i.e.
+64 words.  The mezzanine's EEPROM in this case is not programmed, so the
+default name is fmc-<bus><devfn>, and there are two cards in the system:
+
+  spusa.root# insmod fmc-chardev.ko
+  [ 1073.339332] spec 0000:02:00.0: Driver has no ID: matches all
+  [ 1073.345051] spec 0000:02:00.0: Created misc device "fmc-0200"
+  [ 1073.350821] spec 0000:04:00.0: Driver has no ID: matches all
+  [ 1073.356525] spec 0000:04:00.0: Created misc device "fmc-0400"
+  spusa.root# ls -l /dev/fmc*
+  crw------- 1 root root 10, 58 Nov 20 19:23 /dev/fmc-0200
+  crw------- 1 root root 10, 57 Nov 20 19:23 /dev/fmc-0400
+  spusa.root# dd bs=4 skip=64 count=1 if=/dev/fmc-0200 2> /dev/null | od -t x1z
+  0000000 2d 42 44 53                                      >-BDS<
+  0000004
+
+The simple program tools/fmc-mem in this package can access an FMC char
+device and read or write a word or a whole area.  Actually, the program
+is not specific to FMC at all, it just uses lseek, read and write.
+
+Its first argument is the device name, the second the offset, the third
+(if any) the value to write and the optional last argument that must
+begin with "+" is the number of bytes to read or write.  In case of
+repeated reading data is written to stdout; repeated writes read from
+stdin and the value argument is ignored.
+
+The following examples show reading the SDB magic number and the first
+SDB record from a SPEC device programmed with its golden image:
+
+     spusa.root# ./fmc-mem /dev/fmc-0200 100
+     5344422d
+     spusa.root# ./fmc-mem /dev/fmc-0200 100 +40 | od -Ax -t x1z
+     000000 2d 42 44 53 00 01 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  >-BDS............<
+     000010 00 00 00 00 ff 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 51 06 00 00  >............Q...<
+     000020 c9 42 a5 e6 02 00 00 00 11 05 12 20 2d 34 42 57  >.B......... -4BW<
+     000030 73 6f 72 43 72 61 62 73 49 53 47 2d 00 20 20 20  >sorCrabsISG-.   <
+     000040
diff --git a/Documentation/fmc/fmc-fakedev.txt b/Documentation/fmc/fmc-fakedev.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e85b74a4ae30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fmc/fmc-fakedev.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+fmc-fakedev
+===========
+
+This package includes a software-only device, called fmc-fakedev, which
+is able to register up to 4 mezzanines (by default it registers one).
+Unlike the SPEC driver, which creates an FMC device for each PCI cards
+it manages, this module creates a single instance of its set of
+mezzanines.
+
+It is meant as the simplest possible example of how a driver should be
+written, and it includes a fake EEPROM image (built using the tools
+described in *note FMC Identification::),, which by default is
+replicated for each fake mezzanine.
+
+You can also use this device to verify the match algorithms, by asking
+it to test your own EEPROM image. You can provide the image by means of
+the eeprom= module parameter: the new EEPROM image is loaded, as usual,
+by means of the firmware loader.  This example shows the defaults and a
+custom EEPROM image:
+
+     spusa.root# insmod fmc-fakedev.ko
+     [   99.971247]  fake-fmc-carrier: mezzanine 0
+     [   99.975393]       Manufacturer: fake-vendor
+     [   99.979624]       Product name: fake-design-for-testing
+     spusa.root# rmmod fmc-fakedev
+     spusa.root# insmod fmc-fakedev.ko eeprom=fdelay-eeprom.bin
+     [  121.447464]  fake-fmc-carrier: Mezzanine 0: eeprom "fdelay-eeprom.bin"
+     [  121.462725]  fake-fmc-carrier: mezzanine 0
+     [  121.466858]       Manufacturer: CERN
+     [  121.470477]       Product name: FmcDelay1ns4cha
+     spusa.root# rmmod fmc-fakedev
+
+After loading the device, you can use the write_ee method do modify its
+own internal fake EEPROM: whenever the image is overwritten starting at
+offset 0, the module will unregister and register again the FMC device.
+This is shown in fmc-write-eeprom.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/fmc/fmc-trivial.txt b/Documentation/fmc/fmc-trivial.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d1910bc67159
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fmc/fmc-trivial.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+fmc-trivial
+===========
+
+The simple module fmc-trivial is just a simple client that registers an
+interrupt handler. I used it to verify the basic mechanism of the FMC
+bus and how interrupts worked.
+
+The module implements the generic FMC parameters, so it can program a
+different gateware file in each card. The whole list of parameters it
+accepts are:
+
+`busid='
+`gateware='
+     Generic parameters. See mezzanine.txt
+
+
+This driver is worth reading, in my opinion.
diff --git a/Documentation/fmc/fmc-write-eeprom.txt b/Documentation/fmc/fmc-write-eeprom.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..44a3bc678bf0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fmc/fmc-write-eeprom.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+fmc-write-eeprom
+================
+
+This module is designed to load a binary file from /lib/firmware and to
+write it to the internal EEPROM of the mezzanine card. This driver uses
+the `busid' generic parameter.
+
+Overwriting the EEPROM is not something you should do daily, and it is
+expected to only happen during manufacturing. For this reason, the
+module makes it unlikely for the random user to change a working EEPROM.
+
+The module takes the following measures:
+
+   * It accepts a `file=' argument (within /lib/firmware) and if no
+     such argument is received, it doesn't write anything to EEPROM
+     (i.e. there is no default file name).
+
+   * If the file name ends with `.bin' it is written verbatim starting
+     at offset 0.
+
+   * If the file name ends with `.tlv' it is interpreted as
+     type-length-value (i.e., it allows writev(2)-like operation).
+
+   * If the file name doesn't match any of the patterns above, it is
+     ignored and no write is performed.
+
+   * Only cards listed with `busid=' are written to. If no busid is
+     specified, no programming is done (and the probe function of the
+     driver will fail).
+
+
+Each TLV tuple is formatted in this way: the header is 5 bytes,
+followed by data. The first byte is `w' for write, the next two bytes
+represent the address, in little-endian byte order, and the next two
+represent the data length, in little-endian order. The length does not
+include the header (it is the actual number of bytes to be written).
+
+This is a real example: that writes 5 bytes at position 0x110:
+
+        spusa.root# od -t x1 -Ax /lib/firmware/try.tlv
+        000000 77 10 01 05 00 30 31 32 33 34
+        00000a
+        spusa.root# insmod /tmp/fmc-write-eeprom.ko busid=0x0200 file=try.tlv
+        [19983.391498] spec 0000:03:00.0: write 5 bytes at 0x0110
+        [19983.414615] spec 0000:03:00.0: write_eeprom: success
+
+Please note that you'll most likely want to use SDBFS to build your
+EEPROM image, at least if your mezzanines are being used in the White
+Rabbit environment. For this reason the TLV format is not expected to
+be used much and is not expected to be developed further.
+
+If you want to try reflashing fake EEPROM devices, you can use the
+fmc-fakedev.ko module (see *note fmc-fakedev::).  Whenever you change
+the image starting at offset 0, it will deregister and register again
+after two seconds.  Please note, however, that if fmc-write-eeprom is
+still loaded, the system will associate it to the new device, which
+will be reprogrammed and thus will be unloaded after two seconds.  The
+following example removes the module after it reflashed fakedev the
+first time.
+
+     spusa.root# insmod fmc-fakedev.ko
+        [   72.984733]  fake-fmc: Manufacturer: fake-vendor
+        [   72.989434]  fake-fmc: Product name: fake-design-for-testing
+        spusa.root# insmod fmc-write-eeprom.ko busid=0 file=fdelay-eeprom.bin; \
+            rmmod fmc-write-eeprom
+        [  130.874098]  fake-fmc: Matching a generic driver (no ID)
+        [  130.887845]  fake-fmc: programming 6155 bytes
+        [  130.894567]  fake-fmc: write_eeprom: success
+        [  132.895794]  fake-fmc: Manufacturer: CERN
+        [  132.899872]  fake-fmc: Product name: FmcDelay1ns4cha
+
+
+Writing to the EEPROM
+=====================
+
+Once you have created a binary file for your EEPROM, you can write it
+to the storage medium using the fmc-write-eeprom (See *note
+fmc-write-eeprom::, while relying on a carrier driver.  The procedure
+here shown here uses the SPEC driver
+(`http://www.ohwr.org/projects/spec-sw').
+
+The example assumes no driver is already loaded (actually, I unloaded
+them by hand as everything loads automatically at boot time after you
+installed the modules), and shows kernel messages together with
+commands. Here the prompt is spusa.root# and two SPEC cards are plugged
+in the system.
+
+     spusa.root# insmod fmc.ko
+     spusa.root# insmod spec.ko
+     [13972.382818] spec 0000:02:00.0:  probe for device 0002:0000
+     [13972.392773] spec 0000:02:00.0: got file "fmc/spec-init.bin", 1484404 (0x16a674) bytes
+     [13972.591388] spec 0000:02:00.0: FPGA programming successful
+     [13972.883011] spec 0000:02:00.0: EEPROM has no FRU information
+     [13972.888719] spec 0000:02:00.0: No device_id filled, using index
+     [13972.894676] spec 0000:02:00.0: No mezzanine_name found
+     [13972.899863] /home/rubini/wip/spec-sw/kernel/spec-gpio.c - spec_gpio_init
+     [13972.906578] spec 0000:04:00.0:  probe for device 0004:0000
+     [13972.916509] spec 0000:04:00.0: got file "fmc/spec-init.bin", 1484404 (0x16a674) bytes
+     [13973.115096] spec 0000:04:00.0: FPGA programming successful
+     [13973.401798] spec 0000:04:00.0: EEPROM has no FRU information
+     [13973.407474] spec 0000:04:00.0: No device_id filled, using index
+     [13973.413417] spec 0000:04:00.0: No mezzanine_name found
+     [13973.418600] /home/rubini/wip/spec-sw/kernel/spec-gpio.c - spec_gpio_init
+     spusa.root# ls /sys/bus/fmc/devices
+     fmc-0000  fmc-0001
+     spusa.root# insmod fmc-write-eeprom.ko busid=0x0200 file=fdelay-eeprom.bin
+     [14103.966259] spec 0000:02:00.0: Matching an generic driver (no ID)
+     [14103.975519] spec 0000:02:00.0: programming 6155 bytes
+     [14126.373762] spec 0000:02:00.0: write_eeprom: success
+     [14126.378770] spec 0000:04:00.0: Matching an generic driver (no ID)
+     [14126.384903] spec 0000:04:00.0: fmc_write_eeprom: no filename given: not programming
+     [14126.392600] fmc_write_eeprom: probe of fmc-0001 failed with error -2
+
+Reading back the EEPROM
+=======================
+
+In order to read back the binary content of the EEPROM of your
+mezzanine device, the bus creates a read-only sysfs file called eeprom
+for each mezzanine it knows about:
+
+   spusa.root# cd /sys/bus/fmc/devices; ls -l */eeprom
+   -r--r--r-- 1 root root 8192 Apr  9 16:53 FmcDelay1ns4cha-f001/eeprom
+   -r--r--r-- 1 root root 8192 Apr  9 17:19 fake-design-for-testing-f002/eeprom
+   -r--r--r-- 1 root root 8192 Apr  9 17:19 fake-design-for-testing-f003/eeprom
+   -r--r--r-- 1 root root 8192 Apr  9 17:19 fmc-f004/eeprom
diff --git a/Documentation/fmc/identifiers.txt b/Documentation/fmc/identifiers.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3bb577ff0d52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fmc/identifiers.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+FMC Identification
+******************
+
+The FMC standard requires every compliant mezzanine to carry
+identification information in an I2C EEPROM.  The information must be
+laid out according to the "IPMI Platform Management FRU Information",
+where IPMI is a lie I'd better not expand, and FRU means "Field
+Replaceable Unit".
+
+The FRU information is an intricate unreadable binary blob that must
+live at offset 0 of the EEPROM, and typically extends for a few hundred
+bytes. The standard allows the application to use all the remaining
+storage area of the EEPROM as it wants.
+
+This chapter explains how to create your own EEPROM image and how to
+write it in your mezzanine, as well as how devices and drivers are
+paired at run time.  EEPROM programming uses tools that are part of this
+package and SDB (part of the fpga-config-space package).
+
+The first sections are only interesting for manufacturers who need to
+write the EEPROM. If you are just a software developer writing an FMC
+device or driver, you may jump straight to *note SDB Support::.
+
+
+Building the FRU Structure
+==========================
+
+If you want to know the internals of the FRU structure and despair, you
+can retrieve the document from
+`http://download.intel.com/design/servers/ipmi/FRU1011.pdf' .  The
+standard is awful and difficult without reason, so we only support the
+minimum mandatory subset - we create a simple structure and parse it
+back at run time, but we are not able to either generate or parse more
+arcane features like non-english languages and 6-bit text.  If you need
+more items of the FRU standard for your boards, please submit patches.
+
+This package includes the Python script that Matthieu Cattin wrote to
+generate the FRU binary blob, based on an helper libipmi by Manohar
+Vanga and Matthieu himself.  I changed the test script to receive
+parameters from the command line or from the environment (the command
+line takes precedence)
+
+To make a long story short, in order to build a standard-compliant
+binary file to be burned in your EEPROM, you need the following items:
+
+        Environment    Opt     Official Name          Default
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+        FRU_VENDOR     -v      "Board Manufacturer"   fmc-example
+        FRU_NAME       -n      "Board Product Name"   mezzanine
+        FRU_SERIAL     -s      `Board Serial Number"  0001
+        FRU_PART       -p      "Board Part Number"    sample-part
+        FRU_OUTPUT     -o      not applicable         /dev/stdout
+
+The "Official Name" above is what you find in the FRU official
+documentation, chapter 11, page 7 ("Board Info Area Format").  The
+output option is used to save the generated binary to a specific file
+name instead of stdout.
+
+You can pass the items to the FRU generator either in the environment
+or on the command line.  This package has currently no support for
+specifying power consumption or such stuff, but I plan to add it as
+soon as I find some time for that.
+
+FIXME: consumption etc for FRU are here or in PTS?
+
+The following example creates a binary image for a specific board:
+
+        ./tools/fru-generator -v CERN -n FmcAdc100m14b4cha \
+               -s HCCFFIA___-CR000003 -p EDA-02063-V5-0 > eeprom.bin
+
+The following example shows a script that builds several binary EEPROM
+images for a series of boards, changing the serial number for each of
+them. The script uses a mix of environment variables and command line
+options, and uses the same string patterns shown above.
+
+        #!/bin/sh
+
+        export FRU_VENDOR="CERN"
+        export FRU_NAME="FmcAdc100m14b4cha"
+        export FRU_PART="EDA-02063-V5-0"
+
+        serial="HCCFFIA___-CR"
+
+        for number in $(seq 1 50); do
+           # build number-string "ns"
+           ns="$(printf %06d $number)"
+           ./fru-generator -s "${serial}${ns}" > eeprom-${ns}.bin
+        done
+
+
+Using SDB-FS in the EEPROM
+==========================
+
+If you want to use SDB as a filesystem in the EEPROM device within the
+mezzanine, you should create one such filesystem using gensdbfs, from
+the fpga-config-space package on OHWR.
+
+By using an SBD filesystem you can cluster several files in a single
+EEPROM, so both the host system and a soft-core running in the FPGA (if
+any) can access extra production-time information.
+
+We chose to use SDB as a storage filesystem because the format is very
+simple, and both the host system and the soft-core will likely already
+include support code for such format. The SDB library offered by the
+fpga-config-space is less than 1kB under LM32, so it proves quite up to
+the task.
+
+The SDB entry point (which acts as a directory listing) cannot live at
+offset zero in the flash device, because the FRU information must live
+there.  To avoid wasting precious storage space while still allowing
+for more-than-minimal FRU structures, the fmc.ko will look for the SDB
+record at address 256, 512 and 1024.
+
+In order to generate the complete EEPROM image you'll need a
+configuration file for gensdbfs: you tell the program where to place
+the sdb entry point, and you must force the FRU data file to be placed
+at the beginning of the storage device. If needed, you can also place
+other files at a special offset (we sometimes do it for backward
+compatibility with drivers we wrote before implementing SDB for flash
+memory).
+
+The directory tools/sdbfs of this package includes a well-commented
+example that you may want to use as a starting point (the comments are
+in the file called -SDB-CONFIG-).  Reading documentation for gensdbfs
+is a suggested first step anyways.
+
+This package (generic FMC bus support) only accesses two files in the
+EEPROM: the FRU information, at offset zero, with a suggested filename
+of IPMI-FRU and the short name for the mezzanine, in a file called
+name. The IPMI-FRU name is not mandatory, but a strongly suggested
+choice; the name filename is mandatory, because this is the preferred
+short name used by the FMC core.  For example, a name of "fdelay" may
+supplement a Product Name like "FmcDelay1ns4cha" - exactly as
+demonstrated in `tools/sdbfs'.
+
+Note: SDB access to flash memory is not yet supported, so the short
+name currently in use is just the "Product Name" FRU string.
+
+The example in tools/sdbfs includes an extra file, that is needed by
+the fine-delay driver, and must live at a known address of 0x1800.  By
+running gensdbfs on that directory you can output your binary EEPROM
+image (here below spusa$ is the shell prompt):
+
+        spusa$ ../fru-generator -v CERN -n FmcDelay1ns4cha -s proto-0 \
+                      -p EDA-02267-V3 > IPMI-FRU
+        spusa$ ls -l
+        total 16
+        -rw-rw-r-- 1 rubini staff 975 Nov 19 18:08 --SDB-CONFIG--
+        -rw-rw-r-- 1 rubini staff 216 Nov 19 18:13 IPMI-FRU
+        -rw-rw-r-- 1 rubini staff  11 Nov 19 18:04 fd-calib
+        -rw-rw-r-- 1 rubini staff   7 Nov 19 18:04 name
+        spusa$ sudo gensdbfs . /lib/firmware/fdelay-eeprom.bin
+        spusa$ sdb-read -l -e 0x100 /lib/firmware/fdelay-eeprom.bin
+        /home/rubini/wip/sdbfs/userspace/sdb-read: listing format is to be defined
+        46696c6544617461:2e202020  00000100-000018ff .
+        46696c6544617461:6e616d65  00000200-00000206 name
+        46696c6544617461:66642d63  00001800-000018ff fd-calib
+        46696c6544617461:49504d49  00000000-000000d7 IPMI-FRU
+        spusa$ ../fru-dump /lib/firmware/fdelay-eeprom.bin
+        /lib/firmware/fdelay-eeprom.bin: manufacturer: CERN
+        /lib/firmware/fdelay-eeprom.bin: product-name: FmcDelay1ns4cha
+        /lib/firmware/fdelay-eeprom.bin: serial-number: proto-0
+        /lib/firmware/fdelay-eeprom.bin: part-number: EDA-02267-V3
+
+As expected, the output file is both a proper sdbfs object and an IPMI
+FRU information blob. The fd-calib file lives at offset 0x1800 and is
+over-allocated to 256 bytes, according to the configuration file for
+gensdbfs.
diff --git a/Documentation/fmc/mezzanine.txt b/Documentation/fmc/mezzanine.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..87910dbfc91e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fmc/mezzanine.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+FMC Driver
+**********
+
+An FMC driver is concerned with the specific mezzanine and associated
+gateware. As such, it is expected to be independent of the carrier
+being used: it will perform I/O accesses only by means of
+carrier-provided functions.
+
+The matching between device and driver is based on the content of the
+EEPROM (as mandated by the FMC standard) or by the actual cores
+configured in the FPGA; the latter technique is used when the FPGA is
+already programmed when the device is registered to the bus core.
+
+In some special cases it is possible for a driver to directly access
+FPGA registers, by means of the `fpga_base' field of the device
+structure. This may be needed for high-bandwidth peripherals like fast
+ADC cards. If the device module registered a remote device (for example
+by means of Etherbone), the `fpga_base' pointer will be NULL.
+Therefore, drivers must be ready to deal with NULL base pointers, and
+fail gracefully.  Most driver, however, are not expected to access the
+pointer directly but run fmc_readl and fmc_writel instead, which will
+work in any case.
+
+In even more special cases, the driver may access carrier-specific
+functionality: the `carrier_name' string allows the driver to check
+which is the current carrier and make use of the `carrier_data'
+pointer.  We chose to use carrier names rather than numeric identifiers
+for greater flexibility, but also to avoid a central registry within
+the `fmc.h' file - we hope other users will exploit our framework with
+their own carriers.  An example use of carrier names is in GPIO setup
+(see *note The GPIO Abstraction::), although the name match is not
+expected to be performed by the driver.  If you depend on specific
+carriers, please check the carrier name and fail gracefully if your
+driver finds it is running in a yet-unknown-to-it environment.
+
+
+ID Table
+========
+
+Like most other Linux drivers, and FMC driver must list all the devices
+which it is able to drive.  This is usually done by means of a device
+table, but in FMC we can match hardware based either on the contents of
+their EEPROM or on the actual FPGA cores that can be enumerated.
+Therefore, we have two tables of identifiers.
+
+Matching of FRU information depends on two names, the manufacturer (or
+vendor) and the device (see *note FMC Identification::); for
+flexibility during production (i.e. before writing to the EEPROM) the
+bus supports a catch-all driver that specifies NULL strings. For this
+reason, the table is specified as pointer-and-length, not a a
+null-terminated array - the entry with NULL names can be a valid entry.
+
+Matching on FPGA cores depends on two numeric fields: the 64-bit vendor
+number and the 32-bit device number. Support for matching based on
+class is not yet implemented.  Each device is expected to be uniquely
+identified by an array of cores (it matches if all of the cores are
+instantiated), and for consistency the list is passed as
+pointer-and-length.  Several similar devices can be driven by the same
+driver, and thus the driver specifies and array of such arrays.
+
+The complete set of involved data structures is thus the following:
+
+        struct fmc_fru_id { char *manufacturer; char *product_name; };
+        struct fmc_sdb_one_id { uint64_t vendor; uint32_t device; };
+        struct fmc_sdb_id { struct fmc_sdb_one_id *cores; int cores_nr; };
+
+        struct fmc_device_id {
+                struct fmc_fru_id *fru_id; int fru_id_nr;
+                struct fmc_sdb_id *sdb_id; int sdb_id_nr;
+        };
+
+A better reference, with full explanation, is the <linux/fmc.h> header.
+
+
+Module Parameters
+=================
+
+Most of the FMC drivers need the same set of kernel parameters. This
+package includes support to implement common parameters by means of
+fields in the `fmc_driver' structure and simple macro definitions.
+
+The parameters are carrier-specific, in that they rely on the busid
+concept, that varies among carriers. For the SPEC, the identifier is a
+PCI bus and devfn number, 16 bits wide in total; drivers for other
+carriers will most likely offer something similar but not identical,
+and some code duplication is unavoidable.
+
+This is the list of parameters that are common to several modules to
+see how they are actually used, please look at spec-trivial.c.
+
+`busid='
+     This is an array of integers, listing carrier-specific
+     identification numbers. For PIC, for example, `0x0400' represents
+     bus 4, slot 0.  If any such ID is specified, the driver will only
+     accept to drive cards that appear in the list (even if the FMC ID
+     matches). This is accomplished by the validate carrier method.
+
+`gateware='
+     The argument is an array of strings. If no busid= is specified,
+     the first string of gateware= is used for all cards; otherwise the
+     identifiers and gateware names are paired one by one, in the order
+     specified.
+
+`show_sdb='
+     For modules supporting it, this parameter asks to show the SDB
+     internal structure by means of kernel messages. It is disabled by
+     default because those lines tend to hide more important messages,
+     if you look at the system console while loading the drivers.
+     Note: the parameter is being obsoleted, because fmc.ko itself now
+     supports dump_sdb= that applies to every client driver.
+
+
+For example, if you are using the trivial driver to load two different
+gateware files to two different cards, you can use the following
+parameters to load different binaries to the cards, after looking up
+the PCI identifiers. This has been tested with a SPEC carrier.
+
+        insmod fmc-trivial.ko \
+                              busid=0x0200,0x0400 \
+                              gateware=fmc/fine-delay.bin,fmc/simple-dio.bin
+
+Please note that not all sub-modules support all of those parameters.
+You can use modinfo to check what is supported by each module.
diff --git a/Documentation/fmc/parameters.txt b/Documentation/fmc/parameters.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..59edf088e3a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fmc/parameters.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+Module Parameters in fmc.ko
+***************************
+
+The core driver receives two module parameters, meant to help debugging
+client modules. Both parameters can be modified by writing to
+/sys/module/fmc/parameters/, because they are used when client drivers
+are devices are registered, not when fmc.ko is loaded.
+
+`dump_eeprom='
+     If not zero, the parameter asks the bus controller to dump the
+     EEPROM of any device that is registered, using printk.
+
+`dump_sdb='
+     If not zero, the parameter prints the SDB tree of every FPGA it is
+     loaded by fmc_reprogram(). If greater than one, it asks to dump
+     the binary content of SDB records.  This currently only dumps the
+     top-level SDB array, though.
+
+
+EEPROM dumping avoids repeating lines, since most of the contents is
+usually empty and all bits are one or zero. This is an example of the
+output:
+
+        [ 6625.850480] spec 0000:02:00.0: FPGA programming successful
+        [ 6626.139949] spec 0000:02:00.0: Manufacturer: CERN
+        [ 6626.144666] spec 0000:02:00.0: Product name: FmcDelay1ns4cha
+        [ 6626.150370] FMC: mezzanine 0: 0000:02:00.0 on SPEC
+        [ 6626.155179] FMC: dumping eeprom 0x2000 (8192) bytes
+        [ 6626.160087] 0000: 01 00 00 01  00 0b 00 f3  01 0a 00 a5  85 87 c4 43
+        [ 6626.167069] 0010: 45 52 4e cf  46 6d 63 44  65 6c 61 79  31 6e 73 34
+        [ 6626.174019] 0020: 63 68 61 c7  70 72 6f 74  6f 2d 30 cc  45 44 41 2d
+        [ 6626.180975] 0030: 30 32 32 36  37 2d 56 33  da 32 30 31  32 2d 31 31
+        [...]
+        [ 6626.371366] 0200: 66 64 65 6c  61 79 0a 00  00 00 00 00  00 00 00 00
+        [ 6626.378359] 0210: 00 00 00 00  00 00 00 00  00 00 00 00  00 00 00 00
+        [ 6626.385361] [...]
+        [ 6626.387308] 1800: 70 6c 61 63  65 68 6f 6c  64 65 72 ff  ff ff ff ff
+        [ 6626.394259] 1810: ff ff ff ff  ff ff ff ff  ff ff ff ff  ff ff ff ff
+        [ 6626.401250] [...]
+
+The dump of SDB looks like the following; the example shows the simple
+golden gateware for the SPEC card, removing the leading timestamps to
+fit the page:
+
+        spec 0000:02:00.0: SDB: 00000651:e6a542c9 WB4-Crossbar-GSI
+        spec 0000:02:00.0: SDB: 0000ce42:ff07fc47 WR-Periph-Syscon (00000000-000000ff)
+        FMC: mezzanine 0: 0000:02:00.0 on SPEC
+        FMC: poor dump of sdb first level:
+        0000: 53 44 42 2d  00 02 01 00  00 00 00 00  00 00 00 00
+        0010: 00 00 00 00  00 00 01 ff  00 00 00 00  00 00 06 51
+        0020: e6 a5 42 c9  00 00 00 02  20 12 05 11  57 42 34 2d
+        0030: 43 72 6f 73  73 62 61 72  2d 47 53 49  20 20 20 00
+        0040: 00 00 01 01  00 00 00 07  00 00 00 00  00 00 00 00
+        0050: 00 00 00 00  00 00 00 ff  00 00 00 00  00 00 ce 42
+        0060: ff 07 fc 47  00 00 00 01  20 12 03 05  57 52 2d 50
+        0070: 65 72 69 70  68 2d 53 79  73 63 6f 6e  20 20 20 01
diff --git a/Documentation/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio.txt
index 792faa3c06cf..6f83fa965b4b 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/gpio.txt
@@ -72,11 +72,11 @@ in this document, but drivers acting as clients to the GPIO interface must
 not care how it's implemented.)
 
 That said, if the convention is supported on their platform, drivers should
-use it when possible.  Platforms must declare GENERIC_GPIO support in their
-Kconfig (boolean true), and provide an <asm/gpio.h> file.  Drivers that can't
-work without standard GPIO calls should have Kconfig entries which depend
-on GENERIC_GPIO.  The GPIO calls are available, either as "real code" or as
-optimized-away stubs, when drivers use the include file:
+use it when possible.  Platforms must select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB or
+ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB in their Kconfig.  Drivers that can't work without
+standard GPIO calls should have Kconfig entries which depend on GPIOLIB.  The
+GPIO calls are available, either as "real code" or as optimized-away stubs,
+when drivers use the include file:
 
 	#include <linux/gpio.h>
 
@@ -271,9 +271,26 @@ Some platforms may also use knowledge about what GPIOs are active for
 power management, such as by powering down unused chip sectors and, more
 easily, gating off unused clocks.
 
-Note that requesting a GPIO does NOT cause it to be configured in any
-way; it just marks that GPIO as in use.  Separate code must handle any
-pin setup (e.g. controlling which pin the GPIO uses, pullup/pulldown).
+For GPIOs that use pins known to the pinctrl subsystem, that subsystem should
+be informed of their use; a gpiolib driver's .request() operation may call
+pinctrl_request_gpio(), and a gpiolib driver's .free() operation may call
+pinctrl_free_gpio(). The pinctrl subsystem allows a pinctrl_request_gpio()
+to succeed concurrently with a pin or pingroup being "owned" by a device for
+pin multiplexing.
+
+Any programming of pin multiplexing hardware that is needed to route the
+GPIO signal to the appropriate pin should occur within a GPIO driver's
+.direction_input() or .direction_output() operations, and occur after any
+setup of an output GPIO's value. This allows a glitch-free migration from a
+pin's special function to GPIO. This is sometimes required when using a GPIO
+to implement a workaround on signals typically driven by a non-GPIO HW block.
+
+Some platforms allow some or all GPIO signals to be routed to different pins.
+Similarly, other aspects of the GPIO or pin may need to be configured, such as
+pullup/pulldown. Platform software should arrange that any such details are
+configured prior to gpio_request() being called for those GPIOs, e.g. using
+the pinctrl subsystem's mapping table, so that GPIO users need not be aware
+of these details.
 
 Also note that it's your responsibility to have stopped using a GPIO
 before you free it.
@@ -302,6 +319,11 @@ where 'flags' is currently defined to specify the following properties:
 
 	* GPIOF_INIT_LOW	- as output, set initial level to LOW
 	* GPIOF_INIT_HIGH	- as output, set initial level to HIGH
+	* GPIOF_OPEN_DRAIN	- gpio pin is open drain type.
+	* GPIOF_OPEN_SOURCE	- gpio pin is open source type.
+
+	* GPIOF_EXPORT_DIR_FIXED	- export gpio to sysfs, keep direction
+	* GPIOF_EXPORT_DIR_CHANGEABLE	- also export, allow changing direction
 
 since GPIOF_INIT_* are only valid when configured as output, so group valid
 combinations as:
@@ -310,8 +332,19 @@ combinations as:
 	* GPIOF_OUT_INIT_LOW	- configured as output, initial level LOW
 	* GPIOF_OUT_INIT_HIGH	- configured as output, initial level HIGH
 
-In the future, these flags can be extended to support more properties such
-as open-drain status.
+When setting the flag as GPIOF_OPEN_DRAIN then it will assume that pins is
+open drain type. Such pins will not be driven to 1 in output mode. It is
+require to connect pull-up on such pins. By enabling this flag, gpio lib will
+make the direction to input when it is asked to set value of 1 in output mode
+to make the pin HIGH. The pin is make to LOW by driving value 0 in output mode.
+
+When setting the flag as GPIOF_OPEN_SOURCE then it will assume that pins is
+open source type. Such pins will not be driven to 0 in output mode. It is
+require to connect pull-down on such pin. By enabling this flag, gpio lib will
+make the direction to input when it is asked to set value of 0 in output mode
+to make the pin LOW. The pin is make to HIGH by driving value 1 in output mode.
+
+In the future, these flags can be extended to support more properties.
 
 Further more, to ease the claim/release of multiple GPIOs, 'struct gpio' is
 introduced to encapsulate all three fields as:
@@ -406,6 +439,48 @@ slower clock delays the rising edge of SCK, and the I2C master adjusts its
 signaling rate accordingly.
 
 
+GPIO controllers and the pinctrl subsystem
+------------------------------------------
+
+A GPIO controller on a SOC might be tightly coupled with the pinctrl
+subsystem, in the sense that the pins can be used by other functions
+together with an optional gpio feature. We have already covered the
+case where e.g. a GPIO controller need to reserve a pin or set the
+direction of a pin by calling any of:
+
+pinctrl_request_gpio()
+pinctrl_free_gpio()
+pinctrl_gpio_direction_input()
+pinctrl_gpio_direction_output()
+
+But how does the pin control subsystem cross-correlate the GPIO
+numbers (which are a global business) to a certain pin on a certain
+pin controller?
+
+This is done by registering "ranges" of pins, which are essentially
+cross-reference tables. These are described in
+Documentation/pinctrl.txt
+
+While the pin allocation is totally managed by the pinctrl subsystem,
+gpio (under gpiolib) is still maintained by gpio drivers. It may happen
+that different pin ranges in a SoC is managed by different gpio drivers.
+
+This makes it logical to let gpio drivers announce their pin ranges to
+the pin ctrl subsystem before it will call 'pinctrl_request_gpio' in order
+to request the corresponding pin to be prepared by the pinctrl subsystem
+before any gpio usage.
+
+For this, the gpio controller can register its pin range with pinctrl
+subsystem. There are two ways of doing it currently: with or without DT.
+
+For with DT support refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt.
+
+For non-DT support, user can call gpiochip_add_pin_range() with appropriate
+parameters to register a range of gpio pins with a pinctrl driver. For this
+exact name string of pinctrl device has to be passed as one of the
+argument to this routine.
+
+
 What do these conventions omit?
 ===============================
 One of the biggest things these conventions omit is pin multiplexing, since
diff --git a/Documentation/hid/hid-sensor.txt b/Documentation/hid/hid-sensor.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..948b0989c433
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hid/hid-sensor.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+
+HID Sensors Framework
+======================
+HID sensor framework provides necessary interfaces to implement sensor drivers,
+which are connected to a sensor hub. The sensor hub is a HID device and it provides
+a report descriptor conforming to HID 1.12 sensor usage tables.
+
+Description from the HID 1.12 "HID Sensor Usages" specification:
+"Standardization of HID usages for sensors would allow (but not require) sensor
+hardware vendors to provide a consistent Plug And Play interface at the USB boundary,
+thereby enabling some operating systems to incorporate common device drivers that
+could be reused between vendors, alleviating any need for the vendors to provide
+the drivers themselves."
+
+This specification describes many usage IDs, which describe the type of sensor
+and also the individual data fields. Each sensor can have variable number of
+data fields. The length and order is specified in the report descriptor. For
+example a part of report descriptor can look like:
+
+   INPUT(1)[INPUT]
+ ..
+    Field(2)
+      Physical(0020.0073)
+      Usage(1)
+        0020.045f
+      Logical Minimum(-32767)
+      Logical Maximum(32767)
+      Report Size(8)
+      Report Count(1)
+      Report Offset(16)
+      Flags(Variable Absolute)
+..
+..
+
+The report is indicating "sensor page (0x20)" contains an accelerometer-3D (0x73).
+This accelerometer-3D has some fields. Here for example field 2 is motion intensity
+(0x045f) with a logical minimum value of -32767 and logical maximum of 32767. The
+order of fields and length of each field is important as the input event raw
+data will use this format.
+
+
+Implementation
+=================
+
+This specification defines many different types of sensors with different sets of
+data fields. It is difficult to have a common input event to user space applications,
+for different sensors. For example an accelerometer can send X,Y and Z data, whereas
+an ambient light sensor can send illumination data.
+So the implementation has two parts:
+- Core hid driver
+- Individual sensor processing part (sensor drivers)
+
+Core driver
+-----------
+The core driver registers (hid-sensor-hub) registers as a HID driver. It parses
+report descriptors and identifies all the sensors present. It adds an MFD device
+with name HID-SENSOR-xxxx (where xxxx is usage id from the specification).
+For example
+HID-SENSOR-200073 is registered for an Accelerometer 3D driver.
+So if any driver with this name is inserted, then the probe routine for that
+function will be called. So an accelerometer processing driver can register
+with this name and will be probed if there is an accelerometer-3D detected.
+
+The core driver provides a set of APIs which can be used by the processing
+drivers to register and get events for that usage id. Also it provides parsing
+functions, which get and set each input/feature/output report.
+
+Individual sensor processing part (sensor drivers)
+-----------
+The processing driver will use an interface provided by the core driver to parse
+the report and get the indexes of the fields and also can get events. This driver
+can use IIO interface to use the standard ABI defined for a type of sensor.
+
+
+Core driver Interface
+=====================
+
+Callback structure:
+Each processing driver can use this structure to set some callbacks.
+	int (*suspend)(..): Callback when HID suspend is received
+	int (*resume)(..): Callback when HID resume is received
+	int (*capture_sample)(..): Capture a sample for one of its data fields
+	int (*send_event)(..): One complete event is received which can have
+                               multiple data fields.
+
+Registration functions:
+int sensor_hub_register_callback(struct hid_sensor_hub_device *hsdev,
+			u32 usage_id,
+			struct hid_sensor_hub_callbacks *usage_callback):
+
+Registers callbacks for an usage id. The callback functions are not allowed
+to sleep.
+
+
+int sensor_hub_remove_callback(struct hid_sensor_hub_device *hsdev,
+			u32 usage_id):
+
+Removes callbacks for an usage id.
+
+
+Parsing function:
+int sensor_hub_input_get_attribute_info(struct hid_sensor_hub_device *hsdev,
+			u8 type,
+			u32 usage_id, u32 attr_usage_id,
+			struct hid_sensor_hub_attribute_info *info);
+
+A processing driver can look for some field of interest and check if it exists
+in a report descriptor. If it exists it will store necessary information
+so that fields can be set or get individually.
+These indexes avoid searching every time and getting field index to get or set.
+
+
+Set Feature report
+int sensor_hub_set_feature(struct hid_sensor_hub_device *hsdev, u32 report_id,
+			u32 field_index, s32 value);
+
+This interface is used to set a value for a field in feature report. For example
+if there is a field report_interval, which is parsed by a call to
+sensor_hub_input_get_attribute_info before, then it can directly set that individual
+field.
+
+
+int sensor_hub_get_feature(struct hid_sensor_hub_device *hsdev, u32 report_id,
+			u32 field_index, s32 *value);
+
+This interface is used to get a value for a field in input report. For example
+if there is a field report_interval, which is parsed by a call to
+sensor_hub_input_get_attribute_info before, then it can directly get that individual
+field value.
+
+
+int sensor_hub_input_attr_get_raw_value(struct hid_sensor_hub_device *hsdev,
+			u32 usage_id,
+			u32 attr_usage_id, u32 report_id);
+
+This is used to get a particular field value through input reports. For example
+accelerometer wants to poll X axis value, then it can call this function with
+the usage id of X axis. HID sensors can provide events, so this is not necessary
+to poll for any field. If there is some new sample, the core driver will call
+registered callback function to process the sample.
diff --git a/Documentation/hid/uhid.txt b/Documentation/hid/uhid.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dc35a2b75eee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hid/uhid.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+      UHID - User-space I/O driver support for HID subsystem
+     ========================================================
+
+The HID subsystem needs two kinds of drivers. In this document we call them:
+
+ 1. The "HID I/O Driver" is the driver that performs raw data I/O to the
+    low-level device. Internally, they register an hid_ll_driver structure with
+    the HID core. They perform device setup, read raw data from the device and
+    push it into the HID subsystem and they provide a callback so the HID
+    subsystem can send data to the device.
+
+ 2. The "HID Device Driver" is the driver that parses HID reports and reacts on
+    them. There are generic drivers like "generic-usb" and "generic-bluetooth"
+    which adhere to the HID specification and provide the standardizes features.
+    But there may be special drivers and quirks for each non-standard device out
+    there. Internally, they use the hid_driver structure.
+
+Historically, the USB stack was the first subsystem to provide an HID I/O
+Driver. However, other standards like Bluetooth have adopted the HID specs and
+may provide HID I/O Drivers, too. The UHID driver allows to implement HID I/O
+Drivers in user-space and feed the data into the kernel HID-subsystem.
+
+This allows user-space to operate on the same level as USB-HID, Bluetooth-HID
+and similar. It does not provide a way to write HID Device Drivers, though. Use
+hidraw for this purpose.
+
+There is an example user-space application in ./samples/uhid/uhid-example.c
+
+The UHID API
+------------
+
+UHID is accessed through a character misc-device. The minor-number is allocated
+dynamically so you need to rely on udev (or similar) to create the device node.
+This is /dev/uhid by default.
+
+If a new device is detected by your HID I/O Driver and you want to register this
+device with the HID subsystem, then you need to open /dev/uhid once for each
+device you want to register. All further communication is done by read()'ing or
+write()'ing "struct uhid_event" objects. Non-blocking operations are supported
+by setting O_NONBLOCK.
+
+struct uhid_event {
+        __u32 type;
+        union {
+                struct uhid_create_req create;
+                struct uhid_data_req data;
+                ...
+        } u;
+};
+
+The "type" field contains the ID of the event. Depending on the ID different
+payloads are sent. You must not split a single event across multiple read()'s or
+multiple write()'s. A single event must always be sent as a whole. Furthermore,
+only a single event can be sent per read() or write(). Pending data is ignored.
+If you want to handle multiple events in a single syscall, then use vectored
+I/O with readv()/writev().
+
+The first thing you should do is sending an UHID_CREATE event. This will
+register the device. UHID will respond with an UHID_START event. You can now
+start sending data to and reading data from UHID. However, unless UHID sends the
+UHID_OPEN event, the internally attached HID Device Driver has no user attached.
+That is, you might put your device asleep unless you receive the UHID_OPEN
+event. If you receive the UHID_OPEN event, you should start I/O. If the last
+user closes the HID device, you will receive an UHID_CLOSE event. This may be
+followed by an UHID_OPEN event again and so on. There is no need to perform
+reference-counting in user-space. That is, you will never receive multiple
+UHID_OPEN events without an UHID_CLOSE event. The HID subsystem performs
+ref-counting for you.
+You may decide to ignore UHID_OPEN/UHID_CLOSE, though. I/O is allowed even
+though the device may have no users.
+
+If you want to send data to the HID subsystem, you send an HID_INPUT event with
+your raw data payload. If the kernel wants to send data to the device, you will
+read an UHID_OUTPUT or UHID_OUTPUT_EV event.
+
+If your device disconnects, you should send an UHID_DESTROY event. This will
+unregister the device. You can now send UHID_CREATE again to register a new
+device.
+If you close() the fd, the device is automatically unregistered and destroyed
+internally.
+
+write()
+-------
+write() allows you to modify the state of the device and feed input data into
+the kernel. The following types are supported: UHID_CREATE, UHID_DESTROY and
+UHID_INPUT. The kernel will parse the event immediately and if the event ID is
+not supported, it will return -EOPNOTSUPP. If the payload is invalid, then
+-EINVAL is returned, otherwise, the amount of data that was read is returned and
+the request was handled successfully.
+
+  UHID_CREATE:
+  This creates the internal HID device. No I/O is possible until you send this
+  event to the kernel. The payload is of type struct uhid_create_req and
+  contains information about your device. You can start I/O now.
+
+  UHID_DESTROY:
+  This destroys the internal HID device. No further I/O will be accepted. There
+  may still be pending messages that you can receive with read() but no further
+  UHID_INPUT events can be sent to the kernel.
+  You can create a new device by sending UHID_CREATE again. There is no need to
+  reopen the character device.
+
+  UHID_INPUT:
+  You must send UHID_CREATE before sending input to the kernel! This event
+  contains a data-payload. This is the raw data that you read from your device.
+  The kernel will parse the HID reports and react on it.
+
+  UHID_FEATURE_ANSWER:
+  If you receive a UHID_FEATURE request you must answer with this request. You
+  must copy the "id" field from the request into the answer. Set the "err" field
+  to 0 if no error occurred or to EIO if an I/O error occurred.
+  If "err" is 0 then you should fill the buffer of the answer with the results
+  of the feature request and set "size" correspondingly.
+
+read()
+------
+read() will return a queued ouput report. These output reports can be of type
+UHID_START, UHID_STOP, UHID_OPEN, UHID_CLOSE, UHID_OUTPUT or UHID_OUTPUT_EV. No
+reaction is required to any of them but you should handle them according to your
+needs. Only UHID_OUTPUT and UHID_OUTPUT_EV have payloads.
+
+  UHID_START:
+  This is sent when the HID device is started. Consider this as an answer to
+  UHID_CREATE. This is always the first event that is sent.
+
+  UHID_STOP:
+  This is sent when the HID device is stopped. Consider this as an answer to
+  UHID_DESTROY.
+  If the kernel HID device driver closes the device manually (that is, you
+  didn't send UHID_DESTROY) then you should consider this device closed and send
+  an UHID_DESTROY event. You may want to reregister your device, though. This is
+  always the last message that is sent to you unless you reopen the device with
+  UHID_CREATE.
+
+  UHID_OPEN:
+  This is sent when the HID device is opened. That is, the data that the HID
+  device provides is read by some other process. You may ignore this event but
+  it is useful for power-management. As long as you haven't received this event
+  there is actually no other process that reads your data so there is no need to
+  send UHID_INPUT events to the kernel.
+
+  UHID_CLOSE:
+  This is sent when there are no more processes which read the HID data. It is
+  the counterpart of UHID_OPEN and you may as well ignore this event.
+
+  UHID_OUTPUT:
+  This is sent if the HID device driver wants to send raw data to the I/O
+  device. You should read the payload and forward it to the device. The payload
+  is of type "struct uhid_data_req".
+  This may be received even though you haven't received UHID_OPEN, yet.
+
+  UHID_OUTPUT_EV (obsolete):
+  Same as UHID_OUTPUT but this contains a "struct input_event" as payload. This
+  is called for force-feedback, LED or similar events which are received through
+  an input device by the HID subsystem. You should convert this into raw reports
+  and send them to your device similar to events of type UHID_OUTPUT.
+  This is no longer sent by newer kernels. Instead, HID core converts it into a
+  raw output report and sends it via UHID_OUTPUT.
+
+  UHID_FEATURE:
+  This event is sent if the kernel driver wants to perform a feature request as
+  described in the HID specs. The report-type and report-number are available in
+  the payload.
+  The kernel serializes feature requests so there will never be two in parallel.
+  However, if you fail to respond with a UHID_FEATURE_ANSWER in a time-span of 5
+  seconds, then the requests will be dropped and a new one might be sent.
+  Therefore, the payload also contains an "id" field that identifies every
+  request.
+
+Document by:
+  David Herrmann <dh.herrmann@googlemail.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/hw_random.txt b/Documentation/hw_random.txt
index 690f52550c80..026e237bbc87 100644
--- a/Documentation/hw_random.txt
+++ b/Documentation/hw_random.txt
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Intel RNG Driver notes:
 
 	* FIXME: support poll(2)
 
-	NOTE: request_mem_region was removed, for two reasons:
+	NOTE: request_mem_region was removed, for three reasons:
 	1) Only one RNG is supported by this driver, 2) The location
 	used by the RNG is a fixed location in MMIO-addressable memory,
 	3) users with properly working BIOS e820 handling will always
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ab8500 b/Documentation/hwmon/ab8500
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cf169c8ef4e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ab8500
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+Kernel driver ab8500
+====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * ST-Ericsson AB8500
+    Prefix: 'ab8500'
+    Addresses scanned: -
+    Datasheet: http://www.stericsson.com/developers/documentation.jsp
+
+Authors:
+        Martin Persson <martin.persson@stericsson.com>
+        Hongbo Zhang <hongbo.zhang@linaro.org>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+See also Documentation/hwmon/abx500. This is the ST-Ericsson AB8500 specific
+driver.
+
+Currently only the AB8500 internal sensor and one external sensor for battery
+temperature are monitored. Other GPADC channels can also be monitored if needed
+in future.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet
index 8d2be8a0b1e3..86c0b1251c81 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet
@@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Byte 1:
 min threshold (scale as bank 0x26)
 
 
-Warning for the adventerous
+Warning for the adventurous
 ===========================
 
 A word of caution to those who want to experiment and see if they can figure
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abx500 b/Documentation/hwmon/abx500
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..319a058cec7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abx500
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+Kernel driver abx500
+====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * ST-Ericsson ABx500 series
+    Prefix: 'abx500'
+    Addresses scanned: -
+    Datasheet: http://www.stericsson.com/developers/documentation.jsp
+
+Authors:
+        Martin Persson <martin.persson@stericsson.com>
+        Hongbo Zhang <hongbo.zhang@linaro.org>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+Every ST-Ericsson Ux500 SOC consists of both ABx500 and DBx500 physically,
+this is kernel hwmon driver for ABx500.
+
+There are some GPADCs inside ABx500 which are designed for connecting to
+thermal sensors, and there is also a thermal sensor inside ABx500 too, which
+raises interrupt when critical temperature reached.
+
+This abx500 is a common layer which can monitor all of the sensors, every
+specific abx500 chip has its special configurations in its own file, e.g. some
+sensors can be configured invisible if they are not available on that chip, and
+the corresponding gpadc_addr should be set to 0, thus this sensor won't be
+polled.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275
index 2cfa25667123..15b4a20d5062 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Supported chips:
     Addresses scanned: -
     Datasheet: www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADM1276.pdf
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015 b/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015
index f6fe9c203733..063b80d857b1 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015
@@ -6,6 +6,10 @@ Supported chips:
     Prefix: 'ads1015'
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website :
                http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads1015.pdf
+  * Texas Instruments ADS1115
+    Prefix: 'ads1115'
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website :
+               http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads1115.pdf
 
 Authors:
         Dirk Eibach, Guntermann & Drunck GmbH <eibach@gdsys.de>
@@ -13,9 +17,9 @@ Authors:
 Description
 -----------
 
-This driver implements support for the Texas Instruments ADS1015.
+This driver implements support for the Texas Instruments ADS1015/ADS1115.
 
-This device is a 12-bit A-D converter with 4 inputs.
+This device is a 12/16-bit A-D converter with 4 inputs.
 
 The inputs can be used single ended or in certain differential combinations.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828 b/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828
index 2bbebe6f771f..f6e263e0f607 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828
@@ -4,29 +4,47 @@ Kernel driver ads7828
 Supported chips:
   * Texas Instruments/Burr-Brown ADS7828
     Prefix: 'ads7828'
-    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48, 0x49, 0x4a, 0x4b
-    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website :
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website:
                http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads7828.pdf
 
+  * Texas Instruments ADS7830
+    Prefix: 'ads7830'
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website:
+               http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads7830.pdf
+
 Authors:
         Steve Hardy <shardy@redhat.com>
+        Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com>
+        Guillaume Roguez <guillaume.roguez@savoirfairelinux.com>
+
+Platform data
+-------------
+
+The ads7828 driver accepts an optional ads7828_platform_data structure (defined
+in include/linux/platform_data/ads7828.h). The structure fields are:
 
-Module Parameters
------------------
+* diff_input: (bool) Differential operation
+  set to true for differential mode, false for default single ended mode.
 
-* se_input: bool (default Y)
-  Single ended operation - set to N for differential mode
-* int_vref: bool (default Y)
-  Operate with the internal 2.5V reference - set to N for external reference
-* vref_mv: int (default 2500)
-  If using an external reference, set this to the reference voltage in mV
+* ext_vref: (bool) External reference
+  set to true if it operates with an external reference, false for default
+  internal reference.
+
+* vref_mv: (unsigned int) Voltage reference
+  if using an external reference, set this to the reference voltage in mV,
+  otherwise it will default to the internal value (2500mV). This value will be
+  bounded with limits accepted by the chip, described in the datasheet.
+
+ If no structure is provided, the configuration defaults to single ended
+ operation and internal voltage reference (2.5V).
 
 Description
 -----------
 
-This driver implements support for the Texas Instruments ADS7828.
+This driver implements support for the Texas Instruments ADS7828 and ADS7830.
 
-This device is a 12-bit 8-channel A-D converter.
+The ADS7828 device is a 12-bit 8-channel A/D converter, while the ADS7830 does
+8-bit sampling.
 
 It can operate in single ended mode (8 +ve inputs) or in differential mode,
 where 4 differential pairs can be measured.
@@ -34,3 +52,7 @@ where 4 differential pairs can be measured.
 The chip also has the facility to use an external voltage reference.  This
 may be required if your hardware supplies the ADS7828 from a 5V supply, see
 the datasheet for more details.
+
+There is no reliable way to identify this chip, so the driver will not scan
+some addresses to try to auto-detect it. That means that you will have to
+statically declare the device in the platform support code.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7410 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7410
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9817941e5f19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7410
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+Kernel driver adt7410
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Analog Devices ADT7410
+    Prefix: 'adt7410'
+    Addresses scanned: None
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+               http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7410.pdf
+  * Analog Devices ADT7420
+    Prefix: 'adt7420'
+    Addresses scanned: None
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+               http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7420.pdf
+  * Analog Devices ADT7310
+    Prefix: 'adt7310'
+    Addresses scanned: None
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+               http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7310.pdf
+  * Analog Devices ADT7320
+    Prefix: 'adt7320'
+    Addresses scanned: None
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+               http://www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADT7320.pdf
+
+Author: Hartmut Knaack <knaack.h@gmx.de>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The ADT7310/ADT7410 is a temperature sensor with rated temperature range of
+-55°C to +150°C. It has a high accuracy of +/-0.5°C and can be operated at a
+resolution of 13 bits (0.0625°C) or 16 bits (0.0078°C). The sensor provides an
+INT pin to indicate that a minimum or maximum temperature set point has been
+exceeded, as well as a critical temperature (CT) pin to indicate that the
+critical temperature set point has been exceeded. Both pins can be set up with a
+common hysteresis of 0°C - 15°C and a fault queue, ranging from 1 to 4 events.
+Both pins can individually set to be active-low or active-high, while the whole
+device can either run in comparator mode or interrupt mode. The ADT7410 supports
+continuous temperature sampling, as well as sampling one temperature value per
+second or even just get one sample on demand for power saving. Besides, it can
+completely power down its ADC, if power management is required.
+
+The ADT7320/ADT7420 is register compatible, the only differences being the
+package, a slightly narrower operating temperature range (-40°C to +150°C), and
+a better accuracy (0.25°C instead of 0.50°C.)
+
+The difference between the ADT7310/ADT7320 and ADT7410/ADT7420 is the control
+interface, the ADT7310 and ADT7320 use SPI while the ADT7410 and ADT7420 use
+I2C.
+
+Configuration Notes
+-------------------
+
+Since the device uses one hysteresis value, which is an offset to minimum,
+maximum and critical temperature, it can only be set for temp#_max_hyst.
+However, temp#_min_hyst and temp#_crit_hyst show their corresponding
+hysteresis.
+The device is set to 16 bit resolution and comparator mode.
+
+sysfs-Interface
+---------------
+
+temp#_input		- temperature input
+temp#_min		- temperature minimum setpoint
+temp#_max		- temperature maximum setpoint
+temp#_crit		- critical temperature setpoint
+temp#_min_hyst		- hysteresis for temperature minimum (read-only)
+temp#_max_hyst		- hysteresis for temperature maximum (read/write)
+temp#_crit_hyst		- hysteresis for critical temperature (read-only)
+temp#_min_alarm		- temperature minimum alarm flag
+temp#_max_alarm		- temperature maximum alarm flag
+temp#_crit_alarm	- critical temperature alarm flag
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp b/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp
index 84d46c0c71a3..fec5a9bf755f 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp
@@ -6,7 +6,9 @@ Supported chips:
     Prefix: 'coretemp'
     CPUID: family 0x6, models 0xe (Pentium M DC), 0xf (Core 2 DC 65nm),
                               0x16 (Core 2 SC 65nm), 0x17 (Penryn 45nm),
-                              0x1a (Nehalem), 0x1c (Atom), 0x1e (Lynnfield)
+                              0x1a (Nehalem), 0x1c (Atom), 0x1e (Lynnfield),
+                              0x26 (Tunnel Creek Atom), 0x27 (Medfield Atom),
+                              0x36 (Cedar Trail Atom)
     Datasheet: Intel 64 and IA-32 Architectures Software Developer's Manual
                Volume 3A: System Programming Guide
                http://softwarecommunity.intel.com/Wiki/Mobility/720.htm
@@ -52,7 +54,19 @@ Some information comes from ark.intel.com
 
 Process		Processor					TjMax(C)
 
+22nm		Core i5/i7 Processors
+		i7 3920XM, 3820QM, 3720QM, 3667U, 3520M		105
+		i5 3427U, 3360M/3320M				105
+		i7 3770/3770K					105
+		i5 3570/3570K, 3550, 3470/3450			105
+		i7 3770S					103
+		i5 3570S/3550S, 3475S/3470S/3450S		103
+		i7 3770T					94
+		i5 3570T					94
+		i5 3470T					91
+
 32nm		Core i3/i5/i7 Processors
+		i7 2600						98
 		i7 660UM/640/620, 640LM/620, 620M, 610E		105
 		i5 540UM/520/430, 540M/520/450/430		105
 		i3 330E, 370M/350/330				90 rPGA, 105 BGA
@@ -65,6 +79,14 @@ Process		Processor					TjMax(C)
 		U3400						105
 		P4505/P4500 					90
 
+32nm		Atom Processors
+		S1260/1220					95
+		S1240						102
+		Z2460						90
+		Z2760						90
+		D2700/2550/2500					100
+		N2850/2800/2650/2600				100
+
 45nm		Xeon Processors 5400 Quad-Core
 		X5492, X5482, X5472, X5470, X5460, X5450	85
 		E5472, E5462, E5450/40/30/20/10/05		85
@@ -80,11 +102,21 @@ Process		Processor					TjMax(C)
 
 45nm		Atom Processors
 		D525/510/425/410				100
+		K525/510/425/410				100
+		Z670/650					90
 		Z560/550/540/530P/530/520PT/520/515/510PT/510P	90
 		Z510/500					90
+		N570/550					100
 		N475/470/455/450				100
 		N280/270					90
 		330/230						125
+		E680/660/640/620				90
+		E680T/660T/640T/620T				110
+		E665C/645C					90
+		E665CT/645CT					110
+		CE4170/4150/4110				110
+		CE4200 series					unknown
+		CE5300 series					unknown
 
 45nm		Core2 Processors
 		Solo ULV SU3500/3300				100
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/da9052 b/Documentation/hwmon/da9052
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5bc51346b689
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/da9052
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+Supported chips:
+  * Dialog Semiconductors DA9052-BC and DA9053-AA/Bx PMICs
+    Prefix: 'da9052'
+    Datasheet: Datasheet is not publicly available.
+
+Authors: David Dajun Chen <dchen@diasemi.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The DA9052/53 provides an Analogue to Digital Converter (ADC) with 10 bits
+resolution and track and hold circuitry combined with an analogue input
+multiplexer. The analogue input multiplexer will allow conversion of up to 10
+different inputs. The track and hold circuit ensures stable input voltages at
+the input of the ADC during the conversion.
+
+The ADC is used to measure the following inputs:
+Channel 0: VDDOUT - measurement of the system voltage
+Channel 1: ICH - internal battery charger current measurement
+Channel 2: TBAT - output from the battery NTC
+Channel 3: VBAT - measurement of the battery voltage
+Channel 4: ADC_IN4 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
+Channel 5: ADC_IN5 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
+Channel 6: ADC_IN6 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
+Channel 7: XY - TSI interface to measure the X and Y voltage of the touch
+	   screen resistive potentiometers
+Channel 8: Internal Tjunc. - sense (internal temp. sensor)
+Channel 9: VBBAT - measurement of the backup battery voltage
+
+By using sysfs attributes we can measure the system voltage VDDOUT, the battery
+charging current ICH, battery temperature TBAT, battery junction temperature
+TJUNC, battery voltage VBAT and the back up battery voltage VBBAT.
+
+Voltage Monitoring
+------------------
+
+Voltages are sampled by a 10 bit ADC.
+
+The battery voltage is calculated as:
+	Milli volt = ((ADC value * 1000) / 512) + 2500
+
+The backup battery voltage is calculated as:
+	Milli volt = (ADC value * 2500) / 512;
+
+The voltages on ADC channels 4, 5 and 6 are calculated as:
+	Milli volt = (ADC value * 2500) / 1023
+
+Temperature Monitoring
+----------------------
+
+Temperatures are sampled by a 10 bit ADC.  Junction and battery temperatures
+are monitored by the ADC channels.
+
+The junction temperature is calculated:
+	Degrees celsius = 1.708 * (TJUNC_RES - T_OFFSET) - 108.8
+The junction temperature attribute is supported by the driver.
+
+The battery temperature is calculated:
+	Degree Celsius = 1 / (t1 + 1/298)- 273
+where t1 = (1/B)* ln(( ADCval * 2.5)/(R25*ITBAT*255))
+Default values of R25, B, ITBAT are 10e3, 3380 and 50e-6 respectively.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/da9055 b/Documentation/hwmon/da9055
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..855c3f536e00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/da9055
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+Supported chips:
+  * Dialog Semiconductors DA9055 PMIC
+    Prefix: 'da9055'
+    Datasheet: Datasheet is not publicly available.
+
+Authors: David Dajun Chen <dchen@diasemi.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The DA9055 provides an Analogue to Digital Converter (ADC) with 10 bits
+resolution and track and hold circuitry combined with an analogue input
+multiplexer. The analogue input multiplexer will allow conversion of up to 5
+different inputs. The track and hold circuit ensures stable input voltages at
+the input of the ADC during the conversion.
+
+The ADC is used to measure the following inputs:
+Channel 0: VDDOUT - measurement of the system voltage
+Channel 1: ADC_IN1 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
+Channel 2: ADC_IN2 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
+Channel 3: ADC_IN3 - high impedance input (0 - 2.5V)
+Channel 4: Internal Tjunc. - sense (internal temp. sensor)
+
+By using sysfs attributes we can measure the system voltage VDDOUT,
+chip junction temperature and auxiliary channels voltages.
+
+Voltage Monitoring
+------------------
+
+Voltages are sampled in a AUTO mode it can be manually sampled too and results
+are stored in a 10 bit ADC.
+
+The system voltage is calculated as:
+	Milli volt = ((ADC value * 1000) / 85) + 2500
+
+The voltages on ADC channels 1, 2 and 3 are calculated as:
+	Milli volt = (ADC value * 1000) / 102
+
+Temperature Monitoring
+----------------------
+
+Temperatures are sampled by a 10 bit ADC.  Junction temperatures
+are monitored by the ADC channels.
+
+The junction temperature is calculated:
+	Degrees celsius = -0.4084 * (ADC_RES - T_OFFSET) + 307.6332
+The junction temperature attribute is supported by the driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ds1621 b/Documentation/hwmon/ds1621
index 5e97f333c4df..896cdc972ca8 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ds1621
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ds1621
@@ -2,16 +2,30 @@ Kernel driver ds1621
 ====================
 
 Supported chips:
-  * Dallas Semiconductor DS1621
+  * Dallas Semiconductor / Maxim Integrated DS1621
     Prefix: 'ds1621'
-    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
-    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website
-               http://www.dalsemi.com/
+    Addresses scanned: none
+    Datasheet: Publicly available from www.maximintegrated.com
+
   * Dallas Semiconductor DS1625
-    Prefix: 'ds1621'
-    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
-    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website
-               http://www.dalsemi.com/
+    Prefix: 'ds1625'
+    Addresses scanned: none
+    Datasheet: Publicly available from www.datasheetarchive.com
+
+  * Maxim Integrated DS1631
+    Prefix: 'ds1631'
+    Addresses scanned: none
+    Datasheet: Publicly available from www.maximintegrated.com
+
+  * Maxim Integrated DS1721
+    Prefix: 'ds1721'
+    Addresses scanned: none
+    Datasheet: Publicly available from www.maximintegrated.com
+
+  * Maxim Integrated DS1731
+    Prefix: 'ds1731'
+    Addresses scanned: none
+    Datasheet: Publicly available from www.maximintegrated.com
 
 Authors:
         Christian W. Zuckschwerdt <zany@triq.net>
@@ -59,5 +73,115 @@ any of the limits have ever been met or exceeded since last power-up or
 reset. Be aware: When testing, it showed that the status of Tout can change
 with neither of the alarms set.
 
-Temperature conversion of the DS1621 takes up to 1000ms; internal access to
-non-volatile registers may last for 10ms or below.
+Since there is no version or vendor identification register, there is
+no unique identification for these devices. Therefore, explicit device
+instantiation is required for correct device identification and functionality
+(one device per address in this address range: 0x48..0x4f).
+
+The DS1625 is pin compatible and functionally equivalent with the DS1621,
+but the DS1621 is meant to replace it. The DS1631, DS1721, and DS1731 are
+also pin compatible with the DS1621 and provide multi-resolution support.
+
+Additionally, the DS1721 data sheet says the temperature flags (THF and TLF)
+are used internally, however, these flags do get set and cleared as the actual
+temperature crosses the min or max settings (which by default are set to 75
+and 80 degrees respectively).
+
+Temperature Conversion:
+-----------------------
+DS1621 - 750ms (older devices may take up to 1000ms)
+DS1625 - 500ms
+DS1631 - 93ms..750ms for 9..12 bits resolution, respectively.
+DS1721 - 93ms..750ms for 9..12 bits resolution, respectively.
+DS1731 - 93ms..750ms for 9..12 bits resolution, respectively.
+
+Note:
+On the DS1621, internal access to non-volatile registers may last for 10ms
+or less (unverified on the other devices).
+
+Temperature Accuracy:
+---------------------
+DS1621: +/- 0.5 degree Celsius (from 0 to +70 degrees)
+DS1625: +/- 0.5 degree Celsius (from 0 to +70 degrees)
+DS1631: +/- 0.5 degree Celsius (from 0 to +70 degrees)
+DS1721: +/- 1.0 degree Celsius (from -10 to +85 degrees)
+DS1731: +/- 1.0 degree Celsius (from -10 to +85 degrees)
+
+Note:
+Please refer to the device datasheets for accuracy at other temperatures.
+
+Temperature Resolution:
+-----------------------
+As mentioned above, the DS1631, DS1721, and DS1731 provide multi-resolution
+support, which is achieved via the R0 and R1 config register bits, where:
+
+R0..R1
+------
+ 0  0 => 9 bits, 0.5 degrees Celcius
+ 1  0 => 10 bits, 0.25 degrees Celcius
+ 0  1 => 11 bits, 0.125 degrees Celcius
+ 1  1 => 12 bits, 0.0625 degrees Celcius
+
+Note:
+At initial device power-on, the default resolution is set to 12-bits.
+
+The resolution mode for the DS1631, DS1721, or DS1731 can be changed from
+userspace, via the device 'update_interval' sysfs attribute. This attribute
+will normalize the range of input values to the device maximum resolution
+values defined in the datasheet as follows:
+
+Resolution    Conversion Time    Input Range
+ (C/LSB)       (msec)             (msec)
+------------------------------------------------
+0.5             93.75              0....94
+0.25            187.5              95...187
+0.125           375                188..375
+0.0625          750                376..infinity
+------------------------------------------------
+
+The following examples show how the 'update_interval' attribute can be
+used to change the conversion time:
+
+$ cat update_interval
+750
+$ cat temp1_input
+22062
+$
+$ echo 300 > update_interval
+$ cat update_interval
+375
+$ cat temp1_input
+22125
+$
+$ echo 150 > update_interval
+$ cat update_interval
+188
+$ cat temp1_input
+22250
+$
+$ echo 1 > update_interval
+$ cat update_interval
+94
+$ cat temp1_input
+22000
+$
+$ echo 1000 > update_interval
+$ cat update_interval
+750
+$ cat temp1_input
+22062
+$
+
+As shown, the ds1621 driver automatically adjusts the 'update_interval'
+user input, via a step function. Reading back the 'update_interval' value
+after a write operation provides the conversion time used by the device.
+
+Mathematically, the resolution can be derived from the conversion time
+via the following function:
+
+   g(x) = 0.5 * [minimum_conversion_time/x]
+
+where:
+ -> 'x' = the output from 'update_interval'
+ -> 'g(x)' = the resolution in degrees C per LSB.
+ -> 93.75ms = minimum conversion time
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/exynos4_tmu b/Documentation/hwmon/exynos4_tmu
deleted file mode 100644
index c3c6b41db607..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/exynos4_tmu
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver exynos4_tmu
-=================
-
-Supported chips:
-* ARM SAMSUNG EXYNOS4 series of SoC
-  Prefix: 'exynos4-tmu'
-  Datasheet: Not publicly available
-
-Authors: Donggeun Kim <dg77.kim@samsung.com>
-
-Description
------------
-
-This driver allows to read temperature inside SAMSUNG EXYNOS4 series of SoC.
-
-The chip only exposes the measured 8-bit temperature code value
-through a register.
-Temperature can be taken from the temperature code.
-There are three equations converting from temperature to temperature code.
-
-The three equations are:
-  1. Two point trimming
-	Tc = (T - 25) * (TI2 - TI1) / (85 - 25) + TI1
-
-  2. One point trimming
-	Tc = T + TI1 - 25
-
-  3. No trimming
-	Tc = T + 50
-
-  Tc: Temperature code, T: Temperature,
-  TI1: Trimming info for 25 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register)
-       Temperature code measured at 25 degree Celsius which is unchanged
-  TI2: Trimming info for 85 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register)
-       Temperature code measured at 85 degree Celsius which is unchanged
-
-TMU(Thermal Management Unit) in EXYNOS4 generates interrupt
-when temperature exceeds pre-defined levels.
-The maximum number of configurable threshold is four.
-The threshold levels are defined as follows:
-  Level_0: current temperature > trigger_level_0 + threshold
-  Level_1: current temperature > trigger_level_1 + threshold
-  Level_2: current temperature > trigger_level_2 + threshold
-  Level_3: current temperature > trigger_level_3 + threshold
-
-  The threshold and each trigger_level are set
-  through the corresponding registers.
-
-When an interrupt occurs, this driver notify user space of
-one of four threshold levels for the interrupt
-through kobject_uevent_env and sysfs_notify functions.
-Although an interrupt condition for level_0 can be set,
-it is not notified to user space through sysfs_notify function.
-
-Sysfs Interface
----------------
-name		name of the temperature sensor
-		RO
-
-temp1_input	temperature
-		RO
-
-temp1_max	temperature for level_1 interrupt
-		RO
-
-temp1_crit	temperature for level_2 interrupt
-		RO
-
-temp1_emergency	temperature for level_3 interrupt
-		RO
-
-temp1_max_alarm	alarm for level_1 interrupt
-		RO
-
-temp1_crit_alarm
-		alarm for level_2 interrupt
-		RO
-
-temp1_emergency_alarm
-		alarm for level_3 interrupt
-		RO
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/fam15h_power b/Documentation/hwmon/fam15h_power
index a92918e0bd69..80654813d04a 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/fam15h_power
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/fam15h_power
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ Supported chips:
   BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) For AMD Family 15h Processors
     (not yet published)
 
-Author: Andreas Herrmann <andreas.herrmann3@amd.com>
+Author: Andreas Herrmann <herrmann.der.user@googlemail.com>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/g762 b/Documentation/hwmon/g762
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..923db9c5b5bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/g762
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+Kernel driver g762
+==================
+
+The GMT G762 Fan Speed PWM Controller is connected directly to a fan
+and performs closed-loop or open-loop control of the fan speed. Two
+modes - PWM or DC - are supported by the device.
+
+For additional information, a detailed datasheet is available at
+http://natisbad.org/NAS/ref/GMT_EDS-762_763-080710-0.2.pdf. sysfs
+bindings are described in Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.
+
+The following entries are available to the user in a subdirectory of
+/sys/bus/i2c/drivers/g762/ to control the operation of the device.
+This can be done manually using the following entries but is usually
+done via a userland daemon like fancontrol.
+
+Note that those entries do not provide ways to setup the specific
+hardware characteristics of the system (reference clock, pulses per
+fan revolution, ...); Those can be modified via devicetree bindings
+documented in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/g762.txt or
+using a specific platform_data structure in board initialization
+file (see include/linux/platform_data/g762.h).
+
+  fan1_target: set desired fan speed. This only makes sense in closed-loop
+            fan speed control (i.e. when pwm1_enable is set to 2).
+
+  fan1_input: provide current fan rotation value in RPM as reported by
+            the fan to the device.
+
+  fan1_div: fan clock divisor. Supported value are 1, 2, 4 and 8.
+
+  fan1_pulses: number of pulses per fan revolution. Supported values
+            are 2 and 4.
+
+  fan1_fault: reports fan failure, i.e. no transition on fan gear pin for
+            about 0.7s (if the fan is not voluntarily set off).
+
+  fan1_alarm: in closed-loop control mode, if fan RPM value is 25% out
+            of the programmed value for over 6 seconds 'fan1_alarm' is
+            set to 1.
+
+  pwm1_enable: set current fan speed control mode i.e. 1 for manual fan
+            speed control (open-loop) via pwm1 described below, 2 for
+            automatic fan speed control (closed-loop) via fan1_target
+            above.
+
+  pwm1_mode: set or get fan driving mode: 1 for PWM mode, 0 for DC mode.
+
+  pwm1: get or set PWM fan control value in open-loop mode. This is an
+            integer value between 0 and 255. 0 stops the fan, 255 makes
+            it run at full speed.
+
+Both in PWM mode ('pwm1_mode' set to 1) and DC mode ('pwm1_mode' set to 0),
+when current fan speed control mode is open-loop ('pwm1_enable' set to 1),
+the fan speed is programmed by setting a value between 0 and 255 via 'pwm1'
+entry (0 stops the fan, 255 makes it run at full speed). In closed-loop mode
+('pwm1_enable' set to 2), the expected rotation speed in RPM can be passed to
+the chip via 'fan1_target'. In closed-loop mode, the target speed is compared
+with current speed (available via 'fan1_input') by the device and a feedback
+is performed to match that target value. The fan speed value is computed
+based on the parameters associated with the physical characteristics of the
+system: a reference clock source frequency, a number of pulses per fan
+revolution, etc.
+
+Note that the driver will update its values at most once per second.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/hih6130 b/Documentation/hwmon/hih6130
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..73dae918ea7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/hih6130
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+Kernel driver hih6130
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Honeywell HIH-6130 / HIH-6131
+    Prefix: 'hih6130'
+    Addresses scanned: none
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Honeywell website
+    http://sensing.honeywell.com/index.php?ci_id=3106&la_id=1&defId=44872
+
+Author:
+  Iain Paton <ipaton0@gmail.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The HIH-6130 & HIH-6131 are humidity and temperature sensors in a SO8 package.
+The difference between the two devices is that the HIH-6131 has a condensation
+filter.
+
+The devices communicate with the I2C protocol. All sensors are set to the same
+I2C address 0x27 by default, so an entry with I2C_BOARD_INFO("hih6130", 0x27)
+can be used in the board setup code.
+
+Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for details on how to
+instantiate I2C devices.
+
+sysfs-Interface
+---------------
+
+temp1_input - temperature input
+humidity1_input - humidity input
+
+Notes
+-----
+
+Command mode and alarms are not currently supported.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/htu21 b/Documentation/hwmon/htu21
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f39a215fb6ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/htu21
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+Kernel driver htu21
+===================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Measurement Specialties HTU21D
+    Prefix: 'htu21'
+    Addresses scanned: none
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Measurement Specialties website
+    http://www.meas-spec.com/downloads/HTU21D.pdf
+
+
+Author:
+  William Markezana <william.markezana@meas-spec.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The HTU21D is a humidity and temperature sensor in a DFN package of
+only 3 x 3 mm footprint and 0.9 mm height.
+
+The devices communicate with the I2C protocol. All sensors are set to the
+same I2C address 0x40, so an entry with I2C_BOARD_INFO("htu21", 0x40) can
+be used in the board setup code.
+
+This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the
+devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices
+for details.
+
+sysfs-Interface
+---------------
+
+temp1_input - temperature input
+humidity1_input - humidity input
+
+Notes
+-----
+
+The driver uses the default resolution settings of 12 bit for humidity and 14
+bit for temperature, which results in typical measurement times of 11 ms for
+humidity and 44 ms for temperature. To keep self heating below 0.1 degree
+Celsius, the device should not be active for more than 10% of the time. For
+this reason, the driver performs no more than two measurements per second and
+reports cached information if polled more frequently.
+
+Different resolutions, the on-chip heater, using the CRC checksum and reading
+the serial number are not supported yet.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ina209 b/Documentation/hwmon/ina209
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..672501de4509
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ina209
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+Kernel driver ina209
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Burr-Brown / Texas Instruments INA209
+    Prefix: 'ina209'
+    Addresses scanned: -
+    Datasheet:
+        http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/ina209
+
+Author: Paul Hays <Paul.Hays@cattail.ca>
+Author: Ira W. Snyder <iws@ovro.caltech.edu>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The TI / Burr-Brown INA209 monitors voltage, current, and power on the high side
+of a D.C. power supply. It can perform measurements and calculations in the
+background to supply readings at any time. It includes a programmable
+calibration multiplier to scale the displayed current and power values.
+
+
+Sysfs entries
+-------------
+
+The INA209 chip is highly configurable both via hardwiring and via
+the I2C bus. See the datasheet for details.
+
+This tries to expose most monitoring features of the hardware via
+sysfs. It does not support every feature of this chip.
+
+
+in0_input		shunt voltage (mV)
+in0_input_highest	shunt voltage historical maximum reading (mV)
+in0_input_lowest	shunt voltage historical minimum reading (mV)
+in0_reset_history	reset shunt voltage history
+in0_max			shunt voltage max alarm limit (mV)
+in0_min			shunt voltage min alarm limit (mV)
+in0_crit_max		shunt voltage crit max alarm limit (mV)
+in0_crit_min		shunt voltage crit min alarm limit (mV)
+in0_max_alarm		shunt voltage max alarm limit exceeded
+in0_min_alarm		shunt voltage min alarm limit exceeded
+in0_crit_max_alarm	shunt voltage crit max alarm limit exceeded
+in0_crit_min_alarm	shunt voltage crit min alarm limit exceeded
+
+in1_input		bus voltage (mV)
+in1_input_highest	bus voltage historical maximum reading (mV)
+in1_input_lowest	bus voltage historical minimum reading (mV)
+in1_reset_history	reset bus voltage history
+in1_max			bus voltage max alarm limit (mV)
+in1_min			bus voltage min alarm limit (mV)
+in1_crit_max		bus voltage crit max alarm limit (mV)
+in1_crit_min		bus voltage crit min alarm limit (mV)
+in1_max_alarm		bus voltage max alarm limit exceeded
+in1_min_alarm		bus voltage min alarm limit exceeded
+in1_crit_max_alarm	bus voltage crit max alarm limit exceeded
+in1_crit_min_alarm	bus voltage crit min alarm limit exceeded
+
+power1_input		power measurement (uW)
+power1_input_highest	power historical maximum reading (uW)
+power1_reset_history	reset power history
+power1_max		power max alarm limit (uW)
+power1_crit		power crit alarm limit (uW)
+power1_max_alarm	power max alarm limit exceeded
+power1_crit_alarm	power crit alarm limit exceeded
+
+curr1_input		current measurement (mA)
+
+update_interval		data conversion time; affects number of samples used
+			to average results for shunt and bus voltages.
+
+General Remarks
+---------------
+
+The power and current registers in this chip require that the calibration
+register is programmed correctly before they are used. Normally this is expected
+to be done in the BIOS. In the absence of BIOS programming, the shunt resistor
+voltage can be provided using platform data. The driver uses platform data from
+the ina2xx driver for this purpose. If calibration register data is not provided
+via platform data, the driver checks if the calibration register has been
+programmed (ie has a value not equal to zero). If so, this value is retained.
+Otherwise, a default value reflecting a shunt resistor value of 10 mOhm is
+programmed into the calibration register.
+
+
+Output Pins
+-----------
+
+Output pin programming is a board feature which depends on the BIOS. It is
+outside the scope of a hardware monitoring driver to enable or disable output
+pins.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ina2xx b/Documentation/hwmon/ina2xx
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4223c2d3b508
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ina2xx
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+Kernel driver ina2xx
+====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Texas Instruments INA219
+    Prefix: 'ina219'
+    Addresses: I2C 0x40 - 0x4f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
+               http://www.ti.com/
+
+  * Texas Instruments INA220
+    Prefix: 'ina220'
+    Addresses: I2C 0x40 - 0x4f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
+               http://www.ti.com/
+
+  * Texas Instruments INA226
+    Prefix: 'ina226'
+    Addresses: I2C 0x40 - 0x4f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
+               http://www.ti.com/
+
+  * Texas Instruments INA230
+    Prefix: 'ina230'
+    Addresses: I2C 0x40 - 0x4f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
+               http://www.ti.com/
+
+Author: Lothar Felten <l-felten@ti.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The INA219 is a high-side current shunt and power monitor with an I2C
+interface. The INA219 monitors both shunt drop and supply voltage, with
+programmable conversion times and filtering.
+
+The INA220 is a high or low side current shunt and power monitor with an I2C
+interface. The INA220 monitors both shunt drop and supply voltage.
+
+The INA226 is a current shunt and power monitor with an I2C interface.
+The INA226 monitors both a shunt voltage drop and bus supply voltage.
+
+The INA230 is a high or low side current shunt and power monitor with an I2C
+interface. The INA230 monitors both a shunt voltage drop and bus supply voltage.
+
+The shunt value in micro-ohms can be set via platform data or device tree.
+Please refer to the Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ina2xx.txt for bindings
+if the device tree is used.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
index 23b7def21ba8..c263740f0cba 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
@@ -30,6 +30,22 @@ Supported chips:
     Prefix: 'it8728'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
+  * IT8771E
+    Prefix: 'it8771'
+    Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: Not publicly available
+  * IT8772E
+    Prefix: 'it8772'
+    Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: Not publicly available
+  * IT8782F
+    Prefix: 'it8782'
+    Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: Not publicly available
+  * IT8783E/F
+    Prefix: 'it8783'
+    Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: Not publicly available
   * SiS950   [clone of IT8705F]
     Prefix: 'it87'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
@@ -63,7 +79,7 @@ Module Parameters
 Hardware Interfaces
 -------------------
 
-All the chips suported by this driver are LPC Super-I/O chips, accessed
+All the chips supported by this driver are LPC Super-I/O chips, accessed
 through the LPC bus (ISA-like I/O ports). The IT8712F additionally has an
 SMBus interface to the hardware monitoring functions. This driver no
 longer supports this interface though, as it is slower and less reliable
@@ -75,7 +91,8 @@ Description
 -----------
 
 This driver implements support for the IT8705F, IT8712F, IT8716F,
-IT8718F, IT8720F, IT8721F, IT8726F, IT8728F, IT8758E and SiS950 chips.
+IT8718F, IT8720F, IT8721F, IT8726F, IT8728F, IT8758E, IT8771E, IT8772E,
+IT8782F, IT8783E/F, and SiS950 chips.
 
 These chips are 'Super I/O chips', supporting floppy disks, infrared ports,
 joysticks and other miscellaneous stuff. For hardware monitoring, they
@@ -99,18 +116,18 @@ The IT8716F, IT8718F, IT8720F, IT8721F/IT8758E and later IT8712F revisions
 have support for 2 additional fans. The additional fans are supported by the
 driver.
 
-The IT8716F, IT8718F, IT8720F and IT8721F/IT8758E, and late IT8712F and
-IT8705F also have optional 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This
-is better (no more fan clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older
-chips and revisions. The 16-bit tachometer mode is enabled by the driver when
-one of the above chips is detected.
+The IT8716F, IT8718F, IT8720F, IT8721F/IT8758E, IT8782F, IT8783E/F, and late
+IT8712F and IT8705F also have optional 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to
+3. This is better (no more fan clock divider mess) but not compatible with the
+older chips and revisions. The 16-bit tachometer mode is enabled by the driver
+when one of the above chips is detected.
 
 The IT8726F is just bit enhanced IT8716F with additional hardware
 for AMD power sequencing. Therefore the chip will appear as IT8716F
 to userspace applications.
 
-The IT8728F is considered compatible with the IT8721F, until a datasheet
-becomes available (hopefully.)
+The IT8728F, IT8771E, and IT8772E are considered compatible with the IT8721F,
+until a datasheet becomes available (hopefully.)
 
 Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. An alarm is triggered once
 when the Overtemperature Shutdown limit is crossed.
@@ -131,9 +148,10 @@ inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution of
 0.016 volt (except IT8721F/IT8758E and IT8728F: 0.012 volt.) The battery
 voltage in8 does not have limit registers.
 
-On the IT8721F/IT8758E, some voltage inputs are internal and scaled inside
-the chip (in7, in8 and optionally in3). The driver handles this transparently
-so user-space doesn't have to care.
+On the IT8721F/IT8758E, IT8782F, and IT8783E/F, some voltage inputs are
+internal and scaled inside the chip (in7 (optional for IT8782F and IT8783E/F),
+in8 and optionally in3). The driver handles this transparently so user-space
+doesn't have to care.
 
 The VID lines (IT8712F/IT8716F/IT8718F/IT8720F) encode the core voltage value:
 the voltage level your processor should work with. This is hardcoded by
@@ -199,3 +217,13 @@ doesn't use CPU cycles.
 Trip points must be set properly before switching to automatic fan speed
 control mode. The driver will perform basic integrity checks before
 actually switching to automatic control mode.
+
+
+Temperature offset attributes
+-----------------------------
+
+The driver supports temp[1-3]_offset sysfs attributes to adjust the reported
+temperature for thermal diodes or diode-connected thermal transistors.
+If a temperature sensor is configured for thermistors, the attribute values
+are ignored. If the thermal sensor type is Intel PECI, the temperature offset
+must be programmed to the critical CPU temperature.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 b/Documentation/hwmon/jc42
index 66ecb9fc8246..868d74d6b773 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/jc42
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/jc42
@@ -17,12 +17,13 @@ Supported chips:
   * Maxim MAX6604
     Datasheets:
 	http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6604.pdf
-  * Microchip MCP9804, MCP9805, MCP98242, MCP98243, MCP9843
+  * Microchip MCP9804, MCP9805, MCP98242, MCP98243, MCP98244, MCP9843
     Datasheets:
 	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/22203C.pdf
 	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/21977b.pdf
 	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/21996a.pdf
 	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/22153c.pdf
+	http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/22327A.pdf
   * NXP Semiconductors SE97, SE97B, SE98, SE98A
     Datasheets:
 	http://www.nxp.com/documents/data_sheet/SE97.pdf
@@ -48,7 +49,7 @@ Supported chips:
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1f
 
 Author:
-	Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+	Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp b/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp
index a10f73624ad3..4dfdc8f83633 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp
@@ -11,7 +11,8 @@ Supported chips:
   Socket S1G2: Athlon (X2), Sempron (X2), Turion X2 (Ultra)
 * AMD Family 12h processors: "Llano" (E2/A4/A6/A8-Series)
 * AMD Family 14h processors: "Brazos" (C/E/G/Z-Series)
-* AMD Family 15h processors: "Bulldozer"
+* AMD Family 15h processors: "Bulldozer" (FX-Series), "Trinity"
+* AMD Family 16h processors: "Kabini"
 
   Prefix: 'k10temp'
   Addresses scanned: PCI space
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem b/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem
index 2ba5ed126858..83b2ddc160c8 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Supported devices:
     Documentation:
         http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/CPLI2C.pdf
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm25066 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm25066
index a21db81c4591..c1b57d72efc3 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm25066
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm25066
@@ -1,7 +1,13 @@
-Kernel driver max8688
+Kernel driver lm25066
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+  * TI LM25056
+    Prefix: 'lm25056'
+    Addresses scanned: -
+    Datasheets:
+	http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/lm25056
+	http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/lm25056a
   * National Semiconductor LM25066
     Prefix: 'lm25066'
     Addresses scanned: -
@@ -19,14 +25,15 @@ Supported chips:
     Datasheet:
 	http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM5066.html
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
 -----------
 
-This driver supports hardware montoring for National Semiconductor LM25066,
-LM5064, and LM5064 Power Management, Monitoring, Control, and Protection ICs.
+This driver supports hardware montoring for National Semiconductor / TI LM25056,
+LM25066, LM5064, and LM5064 Power Management, Monitoring, Control, and
+Protection ICs.
 
 The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see
 Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers.
@@ -60,14 +67,19 @@ in1_max			Maximum input voltage.
 in1_min_alarm		Input voltage low alarm.
 in1_max_alarm		Input voltage high alarm.
 
-in2_label		"vout1"
-in2_input		Measured output voltage.
-in2_average		Average measured output voltage.
-in2_min			Minimum output voltage.
-in2_min_alarm		Output voltage low alarm.
-
-in3_label		"vout2"
-in3_input		Measured voltage on vaux pin
+in2_label		"vmon"
+in2_input		Measured voltage on VAUX pin
+in2_min			Minimum VAUX voltage (LM25056 only).
+in2_max			Maximum VAUX voltage (LM25056 only).
+in2_min_alarm		VAUX voltage low alarm (LM25056 only).
+in2_max_alarm		VAUX voltage high alarm (LM25056 only).
+
+in3_label		"vout1"
+			Not supported on LM25056.
+in3_input		Measured output voltage.
+in3_average		Average measured output voltage.
+in3_min			Minimum output voltage.
+in3_min_alarm		Output voltage low alarm.
 
 curr1_label		"iin"
 curr1_input		Measured input current.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm70 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm70
index 0d240291e3cc..86d182942c51 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm70
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm70
@@ -6,6 +6,10 @@ Supported chips:
     Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM70.html
   * Texas Instruments TMP121/TMP123
     Information: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp121.html
+  * National Semiconductor LM71
+    Datasheet: http://www.ti.com/product/LM71
+  * National Semiconductor LM74
+    Datasheet: http://www.ti.com/product/LM74
 
 Author:
         Kaiwan N Billimoria <kaiwan@designergraphix.com>
@@ -31,9 +35,11 @@ As a real (in-tree) example of this "SPI protocol driver" interfacing
 with a "SPI master controller driver", see drivers/spi/spi_lm70llp.c
 and its associated documentation.
 
-The TMP121/TMP123 are very similar; main differences are 4 wire SPI inter-
-face (read only) and 13-bit temperature data (0.0625 degrees celsius reso-
-lution).
+The LM74 and TMP121/TMP123 are very similar; main difference is 13-bit
+temperature data (0.0625 degrees celsius resolution).
+
+The LM71 is also very similar; main difference is 14-bit temperature
+data (0.03125 degrees celsius resolution).
 
 Thanks to
 ---------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm73 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm73
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8af059dcb642
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm73
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+Kernel driver lm73
+==================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Texas Instruments LM73
+    Prefix: 'lm73'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48, 0x49, 0x4a, 0x4c, 0x4d, and 0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
+               http://www.ti.com/product/lm73
+
+Author: Guillaume Ligneul <guillaume.ligneul@gmail.com>
+Documentation: Chris Verges <kg4ysn@gmail.com>
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The LM73 is a digital temperature sensor.  All temperature values are
+given in degrees Celsius.
+
+Measurement Resolution Support
+------------------------------
+
+The LM73 supports four resolutions, defined in terms of degrees C per
+LSB: 0.25, 0.125, 0.0625, and 0.3125.  Changing the resolution mode
+affects the conversion time of the LM73's analog-to-digital converter.
+From userspace, the desired resolution can be specified as a function of
+conversion time via the 'update_interval' sysfs attribute for the
+device.  This attribute will normalize ranges of input values to the
+maximum times defined for the resolution in the datasheet.
+
+    Resolution    Conv. Time    Input Range
+    (C/LSB)       (msec)        (msec)
+    --------------------------------------
+    0.25          14             0..14
+    0.125         28            15..28
+    0.0625        56            29..56
+    0.03125       112           57..infinity
+    --------------------------------------
+
+The following examples show how the 'update_interval' attribute can be
+used to change the conversion time:
+
+    $ echo 0 > update_interval
+    $ cat update_interval
+    14
+    $ cat temp1_input
+    24250
+
+    $ echo 22 > update_interval
+    $ cat update_interval
+    28
+    $ cat temp1_input
+    24125
+
+    $ echo 56 > update_interval
+    $ cat update_interval
+    56
+    $ cat temp1_input
+    24062
+
+    $ echo 85 > update_interval
+    $ cat update_interval
+    112
+    $ cat temp1_input
+    24031
+
+As shown here, the lm73 driver automatically adjusts any user input for
+'update_interval' via a step function.  Reading back the
+'update_interval' value after a write operation will confirm the
+conversion time actively in use.
+
+Mathematically, the resolution can be derived from the conversion time
+via the following function:
+
+   g(x) = 0.250 * [log(x/14) / log(2)]
+
+where 'x' is the output from 'update_interval' and 'g(x)' is the
+resolution in degrees C per LSB.
+
+Alarm Support
+-------------
+
+The LM73 features a simple over-temperature alarm mechanism.  This
+feature is exposed via the sysfs attributes.
+
+The attributes 'temp1_max_alarm' and 'temp1_min_alarm' are flags
+provided by the LM73 that indicate whether the measured temperature has
+passed the 'temp1_max' and 'temp1_min' thresholds, respectively.  These
+values _must_ be read to clear the registers on the LM73.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75
index c91a1d15fa28..2560a9c6d445 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75
@@ -12,18 +12,18 @@ Supported chips:
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
                http://www.national.com/
-  * Dallas Semiconductor DS75, DS1775
-    Prefixes: 'ds75', 'ds1775'
+  * Dallas Semiconductor (now Maxim) DS75, DS1775, DS7505
+    Prefixes: 'ds75', 'ds1775', 'ds7505'
     Addresses scanned: none
-    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website
-               http://www.maxim-ic.com/
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
+               http://www.maximintegrated.com/
   * Maxim MAX6625, MAX6626
     Prefixes: 'max6625', 'max6626'
     Addresses scanned: none
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
                http://www.maxim-ic.com/
   * Microchip (TelCom) TCN75
-    Prefix: 'lm75'
+    Prefix: 'tcn75'
     Addresses scanned: none
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Microchip website
                http://www.microchip.com/
@@ -67,7 +67,8 @@ the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value.
 All temperatures are in degrees Celsius, and are guaranteed within a
 range of -55 to +125 degrees.
 
-The LM75 only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often
+The driver caches the values for a period varying between 1 second for the
+slowest chips and 125 ms for the fastest chips; reading it more often
 will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.
 
 The original LM75 was typically used in combination with LM78-like chips
@@ -78,8 +79,8 @@ The LM75 is essentially an industry standard; there may be other
 LM75 clones not listed here, with or without various enhancements,
 that are supported. The clones are not detected by the driver, unless
 they reproduce the exact register tricks of the original LM75, and must
-therefore be instantiated explicitly. The specific enhancements (such as
-higher resolution) are not currently supported by the driver.
+therefore be instantiated explicitly. Higher resolution up to 12-bit
+is supported by this driver, other specific enhancements are not.
 
 The LM77 is not supported, contrary to what we pretended for a long time.
 Both chips are simply not compatible, value encoding differs.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90
index 9cd14cfe6515..b466974e142f 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90
@@ -118,6 +118,10 @@ Supported chips:
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 through 0x4F
     Datasheet: Publicly available at NXP website
                http://ics.nxp.com/products/interface/datasheet/sa56004x.pdf
+  * GMT G781
+    Prefix: 'g781'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d
+    Datasheet: Not publicly available from GMT
 
 Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm95234 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm95234
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a0e95ddfd372
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm95234
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+Kernel driver lm95234
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * National Semiconductor / Texas Instruments LM95234
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x4d, 0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website
+               http://www.ti.com/product/lm95234
+
+
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+LM95234 is an 11-bit digital temperature sensor with a 2-wire System Management
+Bus (SMBus) interface and TrueTherm technology that can very accurately monitor
+the temperature of four remote diodes as well as its own temperature.
+The four remote diodes can be external devices such as microprocessors,
+graphics processors or diode-connected 2N3904s. The LM95234's TruTherm
+beta compensation technology allows sensing of 90 nm or 65 nm process
+thermal diodes accurately.
+
+All temperature values are given in millidegrees Celsius. Temperature
+is provided within a range of -127 to +255 degrees (+127.875 degrees for
+the internal sensor). Resolution depends on temperature input and range.
+
+Each sensor has its own maximum limit, but the hysteresis is common to all
+channels. The hysteresis is configurable with the tem1_max_hyst attribute and
+affects the hysteresis on all channels. The first two external sensors also
+have a critical limit.
+
+The lm95234 driver can change its update interval to a fixed set of values.
+It will round up to the next selectable interval. See the datasheet for exact
+values. Reading sensor values more often will do no harm, but will return
+'old' values.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978
index c365f9beb5dd..dc0d08c61305 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978
@@ -2,24 +2,32 @@ Kernel driver ltc2978
 =====================
 
 Supported chips:
+  * Linear Technology LTC2974
+    Prefix: 'ltc2974'
+    Addresses scanned: -
+    Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2974
   * Linear Technology LTC2978
     Prefix: 'ltc2978'
     Addresses scanned: -
-    Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/2978fa.pdf
+    Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2978
   * Linear Technology LTC3880
     Prefix: 'ltc3880'
     Addresses scanned: -
-    Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/3880f.pdf
+    Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc3880
+  * Linear Technology LTC3883
+    Prefix: 'ltc3883'
+    Addresses scanned: -
+    Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc3883
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
 -----------
 
-The LTC2978 is an octal power supply monitor, supervisor, sequencer and
-margin controller. The LTC3880 is a dual, PolyPhase DC/DC synchronous
-step-down switching regulator controller.
+LTC2974 is a quad digital power supply manager. LTC2978 is an octal power supply
+monitor. LTC3880 is a dual output poly-phase step-down DC/DC controller. LTC3883
+is a single phase step-down DC/DC controller.
 
 
 Usage Notes
@@ -41,63 +49,90 @@ Sysfs attributes
 in1_label		"vin"
 in1_input		Measured input voltage.
 in1_min			Minimum input voltage.
-in1_max			Maximum input voltage.
-in1_lcrit		Critical minimum input voltage.
+in1_max			Maximum input voltage. LTC2974 and LTC2978 only.
+in1_lcrit		Critical minimum input voltage. LTC2974 and LTC2978
+			only.
 in1_crit		Critical maximum input voltage.
 in1_min_alarm		Input voltage low alarm.
-in1_max_alarm		Input voltage high alarm.
-in1_lcrit_alarm		Input voltage critical low alarm.
+in1_max_alarm		Input voltage high alarm. LTC2974 and LTC2978 only.
+in1_lcrit_alarm		Input voltage critical low alarm. LTC2974 and LTC2978
+			only.
 in1_crit_alarm		Input voltage critical high alarm.
-in1_lowest		Lowest input voltage. LTC2978 only.
+in1_lowest		Lowest input voltage. LTC2974 and LTC2978 only.
 in1_highest		Highest input voltage.
-in1_reset_history	Reset history. Writing into this attribute will reset
-			history for all attributes.
-
-in[2-9]_label		"vout[1-8]". Channels 3 to 9 on LTC2978 only.
-in[2-9]_input		Measured output voltage.
-in[2-9]_min		Minimum output voltage.
-in[2-9]_max		Maximum output voltage.
-in[2-9]_lcrit		Critical minimum output voltage.
-in[2-9]_crit		Critical maximum output voltage.
-in[2-9]_min_alarm	Output voltage low alarm.
-in[2-9]_max_alarm	Output voltage high alarm.
-in[2-9]_lcrit_alarm	Output voltage critical low alarm.
-in[2-9]_crit_alarm	Output voltage critical high alarm.
-in[2-9]_lowest		Lowest output voltage. LTC2978 only.
-in[2-9]_highest		Lowest output voltage.
-in[2-9]_reset_history	Reset history. Writing into this attribute will reset
-			history for all attributes.
-
-temp[1-3]_input		Measured temperature.
+in1_reset_history	Reset input voltage history.
+
+in[N]_label		"vout[1-8]".
+			LTC2974: N=2-5
+			LTC2978: N=2-9
+			LTC3880: N=2-3
+			LTC3883: N=2
+in[N]_input		Measured output voltage.
+in[N]_min		Minimum output voltage.
+in[N]_max		Maximum output voltage.
+in[N]_lcrit		Critical minimum output voltage.
+in[N]_crit		Critical maximum output voltage.
+in[N]_min_alarm		Output voltage low alarm.
+in[N]_max_alarm		Output voltage high alarm.
+in[N]_lcrit_alarm	Output voltage critical low alarm.
+in[N]_crit_alarm	Output voltage critical high alarm.
+in[N]_lowest		Lowest output voltage. LTC2974 and LTC2978 only.
+in[N]_highest		Highest output voltage.
+in[N]_reset_history	Reset output voltage history.
+
+temp[N]_input		Measured temperature.
+			On LTC2974, temp[1-4] report external temperatures,
+			and temp5 reports the chip temperature.
 			On LTC2978, only one temperature measurement is
-			supported and reflects the internal temperature.
+			supported and reports the chip temperature.
 			On LTC3880, temp1 and temp2 report external
-			temperatures, and temp3 reports the internal
-			temperature.
-temp[1-3]_min		Mimimum temperature.
-temp[1-3]_max		Maximum temperature.
-temp[1-3]_lcrit		Critical low temperature.
-temp[1-3]_crit		Critical high temperature.
-temp[1-3]_min_alarm	Chip temperature low alarm.
-temp[1-3]_max_alarm	Chip temperature high alarm.
-temp[1-3]_lcrit_alarm	Chip temperature critical low alarm.
-temp[1-3]_crit_alarm	Chip temperature critical high alarm.
-temp[1-3]_lowest	Lowest measured temperature. LTC2978 only.
-temp[1-3]_highest	Highest measured temperature.
-temp[1-3]_reset_history	Reset history. Writing into this attribute will reset
-			history for all attributes.
-
-power[1-2]_label	"pout[1-2]". LTC3880 only.
-power[1-2]_input	Measured power.
-
-curr1_label		"iin". LTC3880 only.
+			temperatures, and temp3 reports the chip temperature.
+			On LTC3883, temp1 reports an external temperature,
+			and temp2 reports the chip temperature.
+temp[N]_min		Mimimum temperature. LTC2974 and LTC2978 only.
+temp[N]_max		Maximum temperature.
+temp[N]_lcrit		Critical low temperature.
+temp[N]_crit		Critical high temperature.
+temp[N]_min_alarm	Temperature low alarm. LTC2974 and LTC2978 only.
+temp[N]_max_alarm	Temperature high alarm.
+temp[N]_lcrit_alarm	Temperature critical low alarm.
+temp[N]_crit_alarm	Temperature critical high alarm.
+temp[N]_lowest		Lowest measured temperature. LTC2974 and LTC2978 only.
+			Not supported for chip temperature sensor on LTC2974.
+temp[N]_highest		Highest measured temperature. Not supported for chip
+			temperature sensor on LTC2974.
+temp[N]_reset_history	Reset temperature history. Not supported for chip
+			temperature sensor on LTC2974.
+
+power1_label		"pin". LTC3883 only.
+power1_input		Measured input power.
+
+power[N]_label		"pout[1-4]".
+			LTC2974: N=1-4
+			LTC2978: Not supported
+			LTC3880: N=1-2
+			LTC3883: N=2
+power[N]_input		Measured output power.
+
+curr1_label		"iin". LTC3880 and LTC3883 only.
 curr1_input		Measured input current.
 curr1_max		Maximum input current.
 curr1_max_alarm		Input current high alarm.
-
-curr[2-3]_label		"iout[1-2]". LTC3880 only.
-curr[2-3]_input		Measured input current.
-curr[2-3]_max		Maximum input current.
-curr[2-3]_crit		Critical input current.
-curr[2-3]_max_alarm	Input current high alarm.
-curr[2-3]_crit_alarm	Input current critical high alarm.
+curr1_highest		Highest input current. LTC3883 only.
+curr1_reset_history	Reset input current history. LTC3883 only.
+
+curr[N]_label		"iout[1-4]".
+			LTC2974: N=1-4
+			LTC2978: not supported
+			LTC3880: N=2-3
+			LTC3883: N=2
+curr[N]_input		Measured output current.
+curr[N]_max		Maximum output current.
+curr[N]_crit		Critical high output current.
+curr[N]_lcrit		Critical low output current. LTC2974 only.
+curr[N]_max_alarm	Output current high alarm.
+curr[N]_crit_alarm	Output current critical high alarm.
+curr[N]_lcrit_alarm	Output current critical low alarm. LTC2974 only.
+curr[N]_lowest		Lowest output current. LTC2974 only.
+curr[N]_highest		Highest output current.
+curr[N]_reset_history	Reset output current history.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4261 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4261
index eba2e2c4b94d..9378a75c6134 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4261
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4261
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Supported chips:
     Datasheet:
         http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/42612fb.pdf
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max16064 b/Documentation/hwmon/max16064
index f8b478076f6d..d59cc7829bec 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max16064
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max16064
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ Supported chips:
     Addresses scanned: -
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16064.pdf
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max16065 b/Documentation/hwmon/max16065
index c11f64a1f2ad..208a29e43010 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max16065
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max16065
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Supported chips:
 	http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16070-MAX16071.pdf
 
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max1619 b/Documentation/hwmon/max1619
index d6f8d9cd7d7f..e6d87398cc8f 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max1619
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max1619
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Supported chips:
                http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX1619.pdf
 
 Authors:
-        Alexey Fisher <fishor@mail.ru>,
+        Oleksij Rempel <bug-track@fisher-privat.net>,
         Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max197 b/Documentation/hwmon/max197
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8d89b9009df8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max197
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+Maxim MAX197 driver
+===================
+
+Author:
+  * Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com>
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Maxim MAX197
+    Prefix: 'max197'
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX197.pdf
+
+  * Maxim MAX199
+    Prefix: 'max199'
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX199.pdf
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The A/D converters MAX197, and MAX199 are both 8-Channel, Multi-Range, 5V,
+12-Bit DAS with 8+4 Bus Interface and Fault Protection.
+
+The available ranges for the MAX197 are {0,-5V} to 5V, and {0,-10V} to 10V,
+while they are {0,-2V} to 2V, and {0,-4V} to 4V on the MAX199.
+
+Platform data
+-------------
+
+The MAX197 platform data (defined in linux/platform_data/max197.h) should be
+filled with a pointer to a conversion function, defined like:
+
+    int convert(u8 ctrl);
+
+ctrl is the control byte to write to start a new conversion.
+On success, the function must return the 12-bit raw value read from the chip,
+or a negative error code otherwise.
+
+Control byte format:
+
+Bit     Name       Description
+7,6     PD1,PD0    Clock and Power-Down modes
+5       ACQMOD     Internal or External Controlled Acquisition
+4       RNG        Full-scale voltage magnitude at the input
+3       BIP        Unipolar or Bipolar conversion mode
+2,1,0   A2,A1,A0   Channel
+
+Sysfs interface
+---------------
+
+* in[0-7]_input: The conversion value for the corresponding channel.
+                 RO
+
+* in[0-7]_min:   The lower limit (in mV) for the corresponding channel.
+                 For the MAX197, it will be adjusted to -10000, -5000, or 0.
+                 For the MAX199, it will be adjusted to -4000, -2000, or 0.
+                 RW
+
+* in[0-7]_max:   The higher limit (in mV) for the corresponding channel.
+                 For the MAX197, it will be adjusted to 0, 5000, or 10000.
+                 For the MAX199, it will be adjusted to 0, 2000, or 4000.
+                 RW
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max34440 b/Documentation/hwmon/max34440
index 04482226db20..37cbf472a19d 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max34440
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max34440
@@ -16,8 +16,18 @@ Supported chips:
     Prefixes: 'max34446'
     Addresses scanned: -
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34446.pdf
+  * Maxim MAX34460
+    PMBus 12-Channel Voltage Monitor & Sequencer
+    Prefix: 'max34460'
+    Addresses scanned: -
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX34460.pdf
+  * Maxim MAX34461
+    PMBus 16-Channel Voltage Monitor & Sequencer
+    Prefix: 'max34461'
+    Addresses scanned: -
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX34461.pdf
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
@@ -26,6 +36,9 @@ Description
 This driver supports hardware montoring for Maxim MAX34440 PMBus 6-Channel
 Power-Supply Manager, MAX34441 PMBus 5-Channel Power-Supply Manager
 and Intelligent Fan Controller, and MAX34446 PMBus Power-Supply Data Logger.
+It also supports the MAX34460 and MAX34461 PMBus Voltage Monitor & Sequencers.
+The MAX34460 supports 12 voltage channels, and the MAX34461 supports 16 voltage
+channels.
 
 The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see
 Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers.
@@ -109,3 +122,6 @@ temp[1-8]_reset_history	Write any value to reset history.
 
 			temp7 and temp8 attributes only exist for MAX34440.
 			MAX34446 only supports temp[1-3].
+
+MAX34460 supports attribute groups in[1-12] and temp[1-5].
+MAX34461 supports attribute groups in[1-16] and temp[1-5].
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max6697 b/Documentation/hwmon/max6697
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6594177ededa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max6697
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+Kernel driver max6697
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Maxim MAX6581
+    Prefix: 'max6581'
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6581.pdf
+  * Maxim MAX6602
+    Prefix: 'max6602'
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6602.pdf
+  * Maxim MAX6622
+    Prefix: 'max6622'
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6622.pdf
+  * Maxim MAX6636
+    Prefix: 'max6636'
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6636.pdf
+  * Maxim MAX6689
+    Prefix: 'max6689'
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6689.pdf
+  * Maxim MAX6693
+    Prefix: 'max6693'
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6693.pdf
+  * Maxim MAX6694
+    Prefix: 'max6694'
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6694.pdf
+  * Maxim MAX6697
+    Prefix: 'max6697'
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6697.pdf
+  * Maxim MAX6698
+    Prefix: 'max6698'
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6698.pdf
+  * Maxim MAX6699
+    Prefix: 'max6699'
+    Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX6699.pdf
+
+Author:
+    Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for several MAX6697 compatible temperature sensor
+chips. The chips support one local temperature sensor plus four, six, or seven
+remote temperature sensors. Remote temperature sensors are diode-connected
+thermal transitors, except for MAX6698 which supports three diode-connected
+thermal transistors plus three thermistors in addition to the local temperature
+sensor.
+
+The driver provides the following sysfs attributes. temp1 is the local (chip)
+temperature, temp[2..n] are remote temperatures. The actually supported
+per-channel attributes are chip type and channel dependent.
+
+tempX_input      RO temperature
+tempX_max        RW temperature maximum threshold
+tempX_max_alarm  RO temperature maximum threshold alarm
+tempX_crit       RW temperature critical threshold
+tempX_crit_alarm RO temperature critical threshold alarm
+tempX_fault      RO temperature diode fault (remote sensors only)
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max8688 b/Documentation/hwmon/max8688
index fe849871df32..e78078638b91 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/max8688
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max8688
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ Supported chips:
     Addresses scanned: -
     Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX8688.pdf
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/mc13783-adc b/Documentation/hwmon/mc13783-adc
index 044531a86405..d0e7b3fa9e75 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/mc13783-adc
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/mc13783-adc
@@ -3,8 +3,11 @@ Kernel driver mc13783-adc
 
 Supported chips:
   * Freescale Atlas MC13783
-    Prefix: 'mc13783_adc'
+    Prefix: 'mc13783'
     Datasheet: http://www.freescale.com/files/rf_if/doc/data_sheet/MC13783.pdf?fsrch=1
+  * Freescale Atlas MC13892
+    Prefix: 'mc13892'
+    Datasheet: http://cache.freescale.com/files/analog/doc/data_sheet/MC13892.pdf?fsrch=1&sr=1
 
 Authors:
     Sascha Hauer <s.hauer@pengutronix.de>
@@ -13,20 +16,21 @@ Authors:
 Description
 -----------
 
-The Freescale MC13783 is a Power Management and Audio Circuit. Among
-other things it contains a 10-bit A/D converter. The converter has 16
-channels which can be used in different modes.
-The A/D converter has a resolution of 2.25mV. Channels 0-4 have
-a dedicated meaning with chip internal scaling applied. Channels 5-7
-can be used as general purpose inputs or alternatively in a dedicated
-mode. Channels 12-15 are occupied by the touchscreen if it's active.
+The Freescale MC13783 and MC13892 are Power Management and Audio Circuits.
+Among other things they contain a 10-bit A/D converter. The converter has 16
+(MC13783) resp. 12 (MC13892) channels which can be used in different modes. The
+A/D converter has a resolution of 2.25mV.
 
-Currently the driver only supports channels 2 and 5-15 with no alternative
-modes for channels 5-7.
+Some channels can be used as General Purpose inputs or in a dedicated mode with
+a chip internal scaling applied .
 
-See this table for the meaning of the different channels and their chip
-internal scaling:
+Currently the driver only supports the Application Supply channel (BP / BPSNS),
+the General Purpose inputs and touchscreen.
 
+See the following tables for the meaning of the different channels and their
+chip internal scaling:
+
+MC13783:
 Channel	Signal						Input Range	Scaling
 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 0	Battery Voltage (BATT)				2.50 - 4.65V	-2.40V
@@ -34,7 +38,7 @@ Channel	Signal						Input Range	Scaling
 2	Application Supply (BP)				2.50 - 4.65V	-2.40V
 3	Charger Voltage (CHRGRAW)			0 - 10V /	/5
 							0 - 20V		/10
-4	Charger Current (CHRGISNSP-CHRGISNSN)		-0.25V - 0.25V	x4
+4	Charger Current (CHRGISNSP-CHRGISNSN)		-0.25 - 0.25V	x4
 5	General Purpose ADIN5 / Battery Pack Thermistor	0 - 2.30V	No
 6	General Purpose ADIN6 / Backup Voltage (LICELL)	0 - 2.30V /	No /
 							1.50 - 3.50V	-1.20V
@@ -48,3 +52,23 @@ Channel	Signal						Input Range	Scaling
 13	General Purpose TSX2 / Touchscreen X-plate 2	0 - 2.30V	No
 14	General Purpose TSY1 / Touchscreen Y-plate 1	0 - 2.30V	No
 15	General Purpose TSY2 / Touchscreen Y-plate 2	0 - 2.30V	No
+
+MC13892:
+Channel	Signal						Input Range	Scaling
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+0	Battery Voltage (BATT)				0 - 4.8V	/2
+1	Battery Current (BATT - BATTISNSCC)		-60 - 60 mV	x20
+2	Application Supply (BPSNS)			0 - 4.8V	/2
+3	Charger Voltage (CHRGRAW)			0 - 12V /	/5
+							0 - 20V		/10
+4	Charger Current (CHRGISNS-BPSNS) /		-0.3 - 0.3V /	x4 /
+	Touchscreen X-plate 1				0 - 2.4V	No
+5	General Purpose ADIN5 /	Battery Pack Thermistor	0 - 2.4V	No
+6	General Purpose ADIN6 / Backup Voltage (LICELL)	0 - 2.4V /	No
+	Backup Voltage (LICELL)                        	0 - 3.6V	x2/3
+7	General Purpose ADIN7 / UID / Die Temperature	0 - 2.4V /	No /
+							0 - 4.8V	/2
+12	General Purpose TSX1 / Touchscreen X-plate 1	0 - 2.4V	No
+13	General Purpose TSX2 / Touchscreen X-plate 2	0 - 2.4V	No
+14	General Purpose TSY1 / Touchscreen Y-plate 1	0 - 2.4V	No
+15	General Purpose TSY2 / Touchscreen Y-plate 2	0 - 2.4V	No
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/mcp3021 b/Documentation/hwmon/mcp3021
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..74a6b72adf5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/mcp3021
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+Kernel driver MCP3021
+======================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Microchip Technology MCP3021
+    Prefix: 'mcp3021'
+    Datasheet: http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/21805a.pdf
+  * Microchip Technology MCP3221
+    Prefix: 'mcp3221'
+    Datasheet: http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/21732c.pdf
+
+Authors:
+   Mingkai Hu
+   Sven Schuchmann <schuchmann@schleissheimer.de>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the Microchip Technology MCP3021 and
+MCP3221 chip.
+
+The Microchip Technology Inc. MCP3021 is a successive approximation A/D
+converter (ADC) with 10-bit resolution. The MCP3221 has 12-bit resolution.
+
+These devices provide one single-ended input with very low power consumption.
+Communication to the MCP3021/MCP3221  is performed using a 2-wire I2C
+compatible interface. Standard (100 kHz) and Fast (400 kHz) I2C modes are
+available. The default I2C device address is 0x4d (contact the Microchip
+factory for additional address options).
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775 b/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4e9ef60e8c6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+Note
+====
+
+This driver supersedes the NCT6775F and NCT6776F support in the W83627EHF
+driver.
+
+Kernel driver NCT6775
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Nuvoton NCT5572D/NCT6771F/NCT6772F/NCT6775F/W83677HG-I
+    Prefix: 'nct6775'
+    Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+    Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
+  * Nuvoton NCT5577D/NCT6776D/NCT6776F
+    Prefix: 'nct6776'
+    Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+    Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
+  * Nuvoton NCT5532D/NCT6779D
+    Prefix: 'nct6779'
+    Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+    Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
+
+Authors:
+        Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the Nuvoton NCT6775F, NCT6776F, and NCT6779D
+and compatible super I/O chips.
+
+The chips support up to 25 temperature monitoring sources. Up to 6 of those are
+direct temperature sensor inputs, the others are special sources such as PECI,
+PCH, and SMBUS. Depending on the chip type, 2 to 6 of the temperature sources
+can be monitored and compared against minimum, maximum, and critical
+temperatures. The driver reports up to 10 of the temperatures to the user.
+There are 4 to 5 fan rotation speed sensors, 8 to 15 analog voltage sensors,
+one VID, alarms with beep warnings (control unimplemented), and some automatic
+fan regulation strategies (plus manual fan control mode).
+
+The temperature sensor sources on all chips are configurable. The configured
+source for each of the temperature sensors is provided in tempX_label.
+
+Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is
+either 1 degC or 0.5 degC, depending on the temperature source and
+configuration. An alarm is triggered when the temperature gets higher than
+the high limit; it stays on until the temperature falls below the hysteresis
+value. Alarms are only supported for temp1 to temp6, depending on the chip type.
+
+Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
+triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. On
+NCT6775F, fan readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8,
+16, 32, 64 or 128) to give the readings more range or accuracy; the other chips
+do not have a fan speed divider. The driver sets the most suitable fan divisor
+itself; specifically, it increases the divider value each time a fan speed
+reading returns an invalid value, and it reduces it if the fan speed reading
+is lower than optimal. Some fans might not be present because they share pins
+with other functions.
+
+Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts.
+An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum
+or maximum limit.
+
+The driver supports automatic fan control mode known as Thermal Cruise.
+In this mode, the chip attempts to keep the measured temperature in a
+predefined temperature range. If the temperature goes out of range, fan
+is driven slower/faster to reach the predefined range again.
+
+The mode works for fan1-fan5.
+
+sysfs attributes
+----------------
+
+pwm[1-5] - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range:
+	   0 (lowest speed) to 255 (full)
+
+pwm[1-5]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control:
+	* 0 Fan control disabled (fans set to maximum speed)
+	* 1 Manual mode, write to pwm[0-5] any value 0-255
+	* 2 "Thermal Cruise" mode
+	* 3 "Fan Speed Cruise" mode
+	* 4 "Smart Fan III" mode (NCT6775F only)
+	* 5 "Smart Fan IV" mode
+
+pwm[1-5]_mode - controls if output is PWM or DC level
+        * 0 DC output
+        * 1 PWM output
+
+Common fan control attributes
+-----------------------------
+
+pwm[1-5]_temp_sel	Temperature source. Value is temperature sensor index.
+			For example, select '1' for temp1_input.
+pwm[1-5]_weight_temp_sel
+			Secondary temperature source. Value is temperature
+			sensor index. For example, select '1' for temp1_input.
+			Set to 0 to disable secondary temperature control.
+
+If secondary temperature functionality is enabled, it is controlled with the
+following attributes.
+
+pwm[1-5]_weight_duty_step
+			Duty step size.
+pwm[1-5]_weight_temp_step
+			Temperature step size. With each step over
+			temp_step_base, the value of weight_duty_step is added
+			to the current pwm value.
+pwm[1-5]_weight_temp_step_base
+			Temperature at which secondary temperature control kicks
+			in.
+pwm[1-5]_weight_temp_step_tol
+			Temperature step tolerance.
+
+Thermal Cruise mode (2)
+-----------------------
+
+If the temperature is in the range defined by:
+
+pwm[1-5]_target_temp	Target temperature, unit millidegree Celsius
+			(range 0 - 127000)
+pwm[1-5]_temp_tolerance
+			Target temperature tolerance, unit millidegree Celsius
+
+there are no changes to fan speed. Once the temperature leaves the interval, fan
+speed increases (if temperature is higher that desired) or decreases (if
+temperature is lower than desired), using the following limits and time
+intervals.
+
+pwm[1-5]_start		fan pwm start value (range 1 - 255), to start fan
+			when the temperature is above defined range.
+pwm[1-5]_floor		lowest fan pwm (range 0 - 255) if temperature is below
+			the defined range. If set to 0, the fan is expected to
+			stop if the temperature is below the defined range.
+pwm[1-5]_step_up_time	milliseconds before fan speed is increased
+pwm[1-5]_step_down_time	milliseconds before fan speed is decreased
+pwm[1-5]_stop_time	how many milliseconds must elapse to switch
+			corresponding fan off (when the temperature was below
+			defined range).
+
+Speed Cruise mode (3)
+---------------------
+
+This modes tries to keep the fan speed constant.
+
+fan[1-5]_target		Target fan speed
+fan[1-5]_tolerance
+			Target speed tolerance
+
+
+Untested; use at your own risk.
+
+Smart Fan IV mode (5)
+---------------------
+
+This mode offers multiple slopes to control the fan speed. The slopes can be
+controlled by setting the pwm and temperature attributes. When the temperature
+rises, the chip will calculate the DC/PWM output based on the current slope.
+There are up to seven data points depending on the chip type. Subsequent data
+points should be set to higher temperatures and higher pwm values to achieve
+higher fan speeds with increasing temperature. The last data point reflects
+critical temperature mode, in which the fans should run at full speed.
+
+pwm[1-5]_auto_point[1-7]_pwm
+			pwm value to be set if temperature reaches matching
+			temperature range.
+pwm[1-5]_auto_point[1-7]_temp
+			Temperature over which the matching pwm is enabled.
+pwm[1-5]_temp_tolerance
+			Temperature tolerance, unit millidegree Celsius
+pwm[1-5]_crit_temp_tolerance
+			Temperature tolerance for critical temperature,
+			unit millidegree Celsius
+
+pwm[1-5]_step_up_time	milliseconds before fan speed is increased
+pwm[1-5]_step_down_time	milliseconds before fan speed is decreased
+
+Usage Notes
+-----------
+
+On various ASUS boards with NCT6776F, it appears that CPUTIN is not really
+connected to anything and floats, or that it is connected to some non-standard
+temperature measurement device. As a result, the temperature reported on CPUTIN
+will not reflect a usable value. It often reports unreasonably high
+temperatures, and in some cases the reported temperature declines if the actual
+temperature increases (similar to the raw PECI temperature value - see PECI
+specification for details). CPUTIN should therefore be be ignored on ASUS
+boards. The CPU temperature on ASUS boards is reported from PECI 0.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus
index f90f99920cc5..cf756ed48ff9 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Supported chips:
     Addresses scanned: -
     Datasheet: n.a.
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Sysfs entries
 
 When probing the chip, the driver identifies which PMBus registers are
 supported, and determines available sensors from this information.
-Attribute files only exist if respective sensors are suported by the chip.
+Attribute files only exist if respective sensors are supported by the chip.
 Labels are provided to inform the user about the sensor associated with
 a given sysfs entry.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sht15 b/Documentation/hwmon/sht15
index 02850bdfac18..778987d1856f 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/sht15
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sht15
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ bits for humidity, or 12 bits for temperature and 8 bits for humidity.
 The humidity calibration coefficients are programmed into an OTP memory on the
 chip. These coefficients are used to internally calibrate the signals from the
 sensors. Disabling the reload of those coefficients allows saving 10ms for each
-measurement and decrease power consumption, while loosing on precision.
+measurement and decrease power consumption, while losing on precision.
 
 Some options may be set directly in the sht15_platform_data structure
 or via sysfs attributes.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/smm665 b/Documentation/hwmon/smm665
index 59e316140542..a341eeedab75 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/smm665
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/smm665
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ Supported chips:
       http://www.summitmicro.com/prod_select/summary/SMM766/SMM766_2086.pdf
       http://www.summitmicro.com/prod_select/summary/SMM766B/SMM766B_2122.pdf
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Module Parameters
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches b/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches
index 86f42e8e9e49..3d1bac399a22 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 	How to Get Your Patch Accepted Into the Hwmon Subsystem
 	-------------------------------------------------------
 
-This text is is a collection of suggestions for people writing patches or
+This text is a collection of suggestions for people writing patches or
 drivers for the hwmon subsystem. Following these suggestions will greatly
 increase the chances of your change being accepted.
 
@@ -27,8 +27,7 @@ increase the chances of your change being accepted.
   explicitly below the patch header.
 
 * If your patch (or the driver) is affected by configuration options such as
-  CONFIG_SMP or CONFIG_HOTPLUG, make sure it compiles for all configuration
-  variants.
+  CONFIG_SMP, make sure it compiles for all configuration variants.
 
 
 2. Adding functionality to existing drivers
@@ -60,8 +59,7 @@ increase the chances of your change being accepted.
 
 * Add the driver to Kconfig and Makefile in alphabetical order.
 
-* Make sure that all dependencies are listed in Kconfig. For new drivers, it
-  is most likely prudent to add a dependency on EXPERIMENTAL.
+* Make sure that all dependencies are listed in Kconfig.
 
 * Avoid forward declarations if you can. Rearrange the code if necessary.
 
@@ -70,6 +68,9 @@ increase the chances of your change being accepted.
   review more difficult. It may also result in code which is more complicated
   than necessary. Use inline functions or just regular functions instead.
 
+* Use devres functions whenever possible to allocate resources. For rationale
+  and supported functions, please see Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt.
+
 * If the driver has a detect function, make sure it is silent. Debug messages
   and messages printed after a successful detection are acceptable, but it
   must not print messages such as "Chip XXX not found/supported".
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
index 1f4dd855a299..79f8257dd790 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
@@ -722,14 +722,14 @@ add/subtract if it has been divided before the add/subtract.
 What to do if a value is found to be invalid, depends on the type of the
 sysfs attribute that is being set. If it is a continuous setting like a
 tempX_max or inX_max attribute, then the value should be clamped to its
-limits using SENSORS_LIMIT(value, min_limit, max_limit). If it is not
-continuous like for example a tempX_type, then when an invalid value is
-written, -EINVAL should be returned.
+limits using clamp_val(value, min_limit, max_limit). If it is not continuous
+like for example a tempX_type, then when an invalid value is written,
+-EINVAL should be returned.
 
 Example1, temp1_max, register is a signed 8 bit value (-128 - 127 degrees):
 
 	long v = simple_strtol(buf, NULL, 10) / 1000;
-	v = SENSORS_LIMIT(v, -128, 127);
+	v = clamp_val(v, -128, 127);
 	/* write v to register */
 
 Example2, fan divider setting, valid values 2, 4 and 8:
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp401 b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp401
index 9fc447249212..f91e3fa7e5ec 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp401
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp401
@@ -8,8 +8,16 @@ Supported chips:
     Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp401.html
   * Texas Instruments TMP411
     Prefix: 'tmp411'
-    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e
     Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp411.html
+  * Texas Instruments TMP431
+    Prefix: 'tmp431'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d
+    Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp431.html
+  * Texas Instruments TMP432
+    Prefix: 'tmp432'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d
+    Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp432.html
 
 Authors:
          Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
@@ -18,19 +26,19 @@ Authors:
 Description
 -----------
 
-This driver implements support for Texas Instruments TMP401 and
-TMP411 chips. These chips implements one remote and one local
-temperature sensor. Temperature is measured in degrees
+This driver implements support for Texas Instruments TMP401, TMP411,
+TMP431, and TMP432 chips. These chips implement one or two remote and
+one local temperature sensors. Temperature is measured in degrees
 Celsius. Resolution of the remote sensor is 0.0625 degree. Local
 sensor resolution can be set to 0.5, 0.25, 0.125 or 0.0625 degree (not
 supported by the driver so far, so using the default resolution of 0.5
 degree).
 
 The driver provides the common sysfs-interface for temperatures (see
-/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface under Temperatures).
+Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface under Temperatures).
 
-The TMP411 chip is compatible with TMP401. It provides some additional
-features.
+The TMP411 and TMP431 chips are compatible with TMP401. TMP411 provides
+some additional features.
 
 * Minimum and Maximum temperature measured since power-on, chip-reset
 
@@ -40,3 +48,6 @@ features.
 
   Exported via sysfs attribute temp_reset_history. Writing 1 to this
   file triggers a reset.
+
+TMP432 is compatible with TMP401 and TMP431. It supports two external
+temperature sensors.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon b/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon
index ef7984317cec..c3a3a5be10ad 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon
@@ -41,5 +41,5 @@ Channel Signal
 
 The Sysfs nodes will represent the voltage in the units of mV,
 the temperature channel shows the converted temperature in
-degree celcius. The Battery charging current channel represents
+degree Celsius. The Battery charging current channel represents
 battery charging current in mA.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000 b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000
index 0df5f276505b..805e33edb978 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Supported chips:
 	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9090.pdf
 	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90910.pdf
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9200 b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9200
index fd7d07b1908a..1e8060e631bd 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9200
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9200
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Supported chips:
 	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9246.pdf
 	http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9248.pdf
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/vexpress b/Documentation/hwmon/vexpress
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..557d6d5ad90d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/vexpress
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+Kernel driver vexpress
+======================
+
+Supported systems:
+  * ARM Ltd. Versatile Express platform
+    Prefix: 'vexpress'
+    Datasheets:
+      * "Hardware Description" sections of the Technical Reference Manuals
+        for the Versatile Express boards:
+        http://infocenter.arm.com/help/topic/com.arm.doc.subset.boards.express/index.html
+      * Section "4.4.14. System Configuration registers" of the V2M-P1 TRM:
+        http://infocenter.arm.com/help/index.jsp?topic=/com.arm.doc.dui0447-/index.html
+
+Author: Pawel Moll
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+Versatile Express platform (http://www.arm.com/versatileexpress/) is a
+reference & prototyping system for ARM Ltd. processors. It can be set up
+from a wide range of boards, each of them containing (apart of the main
+chip/FPGA) a number of microcontrollers responsible for platform
+configuration and control. Theses microcontrollers can also monitor the
+board and its environment by a number of internal and external sensors,
+providing information about power lines voltages and currents, board
+temperature and power usage. Some of them also calculate consumed energy
+and provide a cumulative use counter.
+
+The configuration devices are _not_ memory mapped and must be accessed
+via a custom interface, abstracted by the "vexpress_config" API.
+
+As these devices are non-discoverable, they must be described in a Device
+Tree passed to the kernel. Details of the DT binding for them can be found
+in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/vexpress.txt.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d
index 90387c3540f7..f4021a285460 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Credits:
     Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
     and Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>
   w83792d.c:
-    Chunhao Huang <DZShen@Winbond.com.tw>,
+    Shane Huang (Winbond),
     Rudolf Marek <r.marek@assembler.cz>
 
 Additional contributors:
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d
index 8a023ce0b72e..53f7b6866fec 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d
@@ -7,8 +7,7 @@ Supported chips:
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
     Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com.tw
 
-Author: Chunhao Huang
-Contact: DZShen <DZShen@Winbond.com.tw>
+Author: Shane Huang (Winbond)
 
 
 Module Parameters
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/wm831x b/Documentation/hwmon/wm831x
index 24f47d8f6a42..11446757c8c8 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/wm831x
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/wm831x
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ reporting of all the input values but does not provide any alarms.
 Voltage Monitoring
 ------------------
 
-Voltages are sampled by a 12 bit ADC.  Voltages in milivolts are 1.465
+Voltages are sampled by a 12 bit ADC.  Voltages in millivolts are 1.465
 times the ADC value.
 
 Temperature Monitoring
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100 b/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100
index a995b41724fd..33908a4d68ff 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ http://archive.ericsson.net/service/internet/picov/get?DocNo=28701-EN/LZT146401
 http://archive.ericsson.net/service/internet/picov/get?DocNo=28701-EN/LZT146256
 
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 
 Description
@@ -121,12 +121,26 @@ in1_max_alarm		Input voltage high alarm.
 in1_lcrit_alarm		Input voltage critical low alarm.
 in1_crit_alarm		Input voltage critical high alarm.
 
-in2_label		"vout1"
-in2_input		Measured output voltage.
-in2_lcrit		Critical minimum output Voltage.
-in2_crit		Critical maximum output voltage.
-in2_lcrit_alarm		Critical output voltage critical low alarm.
-in2_crit_alarm		Critical output voltage critical high alarm.
+in2_label		"vmon"
+in2_input		Measured voltage on VMON (ZL2004) or VDRV (ZL9101M,
+			ZL9117M) pin. Reported voltage is 16x the voltage on the
+			pin (adjusted internally by the chip).
+in2_lcrit		Critical minimum VMON/VDRV Voltage.
+in2_crit		Critical maximum VMON/VDRV voltage.
+in2_lcrit_alarm		VMON/VDRV voltage critical low alarm.
+in2_crit_alarm		VMON/VDRV voltage critical high alarm.
+
+			vmon attributes are supported on ZL2004, ZL9101M,
+			and ZL9117M only.
+
+inX_label		"vout1"
+inX_input		Measured output voltage.
+inX_lcrit		Critical minimum output Voltage.
+inX_crit		Critical maximum output voltage.
+inX_lcrit_alarm		Critical output voltage critical low alarm.
+inX_crit_alarm		Critical output voltage critical high alarm.
+
+			X is 3 for ZL2004, ZL9101M, and ZL9117M, 2 otherwise.
 
 curr1_label		"iout1"
 curr1_input		Measured output current.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt
index a903ee5e9776..62f7d4ea6e26 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt
+++ b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ int hwspinlock_example2(void)
      locks).
      Should be called from a process context (this function might sleep).
      Returns the address of hwspinlock on success, or NULL on error (e.g.
-     if the hwspinlock is sill in use).
+     if the hwspinlock is still in use).
 
 5. Important structs
 
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-diolan-u2c b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-diolan-u2c
index 30fe4bb9a069..0d6018c316c7 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-diolan-u2c
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-diolan-u2c
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Supported adapters:
     Documentation:
 	http://www.diolan.com/i2c/u2c12.html
 
-Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
+Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
index 2871fd500349..d29dea0f3232 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
@@ -20,6 +20,11 @@ Supported adapters:
   * Intel Patsburg (PCH)
   * Intel DH89xxCC (PCH)
   * Intel Panther Point (PCH)
+  * Intel Lynx Point (PCH)
+  * Intel Lynx Point-LP (PCH)
+  * Intel Avoton (SOC)
+  * Intel Wellsburg (PCH)
+  * Intel Coleto Creek (PCH)
    Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website
 
 On Intel Patsburg and later chipsets, both the normal host SMBus controller
@@ -37,9 +42,10 @@ Module Parameters
 Disable selected features normally supported by the device. This makes it
 possible to work around possible driver or hardware bugs if the feature in
 question doesn't work as intended for whatever reason. Bit values:
-  1  disable SMBus PEC
-  2  disable the block buffer
-  8  disable the I2C block read functionality
+ 0x01  disable SMBus PEC
+ 0x02  disable the block buffer
+ 0x08  disable the I2C block read functionality
+ 0x10  don't use interrupts
 
 
 Description
@@ -85,6 +91,12 @@ SMBus 2.0 Support
 The 82801DB (ICH4) and later chips support several SMBus 2.0 features.
 
 
+Interrupt Support
+-----------------
+
+PCI interrupt support is supported on the 82801EB (ICH5) and later chips.
+
+
 Hidden ICH SMBus
 ----------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-ismt b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-ismt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..737355822c0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-ismt
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+Kernel driver i2c-ismt
+
+Supported adapters:
+  * Intel S12xx series SOCs
+
+Authors:
+	Bill Brown <bill.e.brown@intel.com>
+
+
+Module Parameters
+-----------------
+
+* bus_speed (unsigned int)
+Allows changing of the bus speed.  Normally, the bus speed is set by the BIOS
+and never needs to be changed.  However, some SMBus analyzers are too slow for
+monitoring the bus during debug, thus the need for this module parameter.
+Specify the bus speed in kHz.
+Available bus frequency settings:
+  0  no change
+  80 kHz
+  100 kHz
+  400 kHz
+  1000 kHz
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The S12xx series of SOCs have a pair of integrated SMBus 2.0 controllers
+targeted primarily at the microserver and storage markets.
+
+The S12xx series contain a pair of PCI functions.  An output of lspci will show
+something similar to the following:
+
+  00:13.0 System peripheral: Intel Corporation Centerton SMBus 2.0 Controller 0
+  00:13.1 System peripheral: Intel Corporation Centerton SMBus 2.0 Controller 1
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4
index 475bb4ae0720..c097e0f020fe 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4
@@ -8,7 +8,12 @@ Supported adapters:
     Datasheet: Only available via NDA from ServerWorks
   * ATI IXP200, IXP300, IXP400, SB600, SB700 and SB800 southbridges
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
-  * AMD Hudson-2
+    SB700 register reference available at:
+    http://support.amd.com/us/Embedded_TechDocs/43009_sb7xx_rrg_pub_1.00.pdf
+  * AMD SP5100 (SB700 derivative found on some server mainboards)
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the AMD website
+    http://support.amd.com/us/Embedded_TechDocs/44413.pdf
+  * AMD Hudson-2, CZ
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
   * Standard Microsystems (SMSC) SLC90E66 (Victory66) southbridge
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the SMSC website http://www.smsc.com
@@ -68,6 +73,11 @@ this driver on those mainboards.
 The ServerWorks Southbridges, the Intel 440MX, and the Victory66 are
 identical to the PIIX4 in I2C/SMBus support.
 
+The AMD SB700, SB800, SP5100 and Hudson-2 chipsets implement two
+PIIX4-compatible SMBus controllers. If your BIOS initializes the
+secondary controller, it will be detected by this driver as
+an "Auxiliary SMBus Host Controller".
+
 If you own Force CPCI735 motherboard or other OSB4 based systems you may need
 to change the SMBus Interrupt Select register so the SMBus controller uses
 the SMI mode.
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis630 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis630
index 0b9697366930..ee7943631074 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis630
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis630
@@ -4,9 +4,11 @@ Supported adapters:
   * Silicon Integrated Systems Corp (SiS)
 	630 chipset (Datasheet: available at http://www.sfr-fresh.com/linux)
 	730 chipset
+	964 chipset
   * Possible other SiS chipsets ?
 
 Author: Alexander Malysh <amalysh@web.de>
+	Amaury Decrême <amaury.decreme@gmail.com> - SiS964 support
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
@@ -18,6 +20,7 @@ Module Parameters
 * high_clock = [1|0] Forcibly set Host Master Clock to 56KHz (default,
 			what your BIOS use). DANGEROUS! This should be a bit
 			faster, but freeze some systems (i.e. my Laptop).
+			SIS630/730 chip only.
 
 
 Description
@@ -36,6 +39,12 @@ or like this:
 00:00.0 Host bridge: Silicon Integrated Systems [SiS] 730 Host (rev 02)
 00:01.0 ISA bridge: Silicon Integrated Systems [SiS] 85C503/5513
 
+or like this:
+
+00:00.0 Host bridge: Silicon Integrated Systems [SiS] 760/M760 Host (rev 02)
+00:02.0 ISA bridge: Silicon Integrated Systems [SiS] SiS964 [MuTIOL Media IO]
+							LPC Controller (rev 36)
+
 in your 'lspci' output , then this driver is for your chipset.
 
 Thank You
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro
index 2e758b0e9456..b88f91ae580e 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro
@@ -20,7 +20,10 @@ Supported adapters:
     Datasheet: available on http://linux.via.com.tw
 
   * VIA Technologies, Inc. VX855/VX875
-    Datasheet: Availability unknown
+    Datasheet: available on http://linux.via.com.tw
+
+  * VIA Technologies, Inc. VX900
+    Datasheet: available on http://linux.via.com.tw
 
 Authors:
 	Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>,
@@ -57,6 +60,7 @@ Your lspci -n listing must show one of these :
  device 1106:8324   (CX700)
  device 1106:8353   (VX800/VX820)
  device 1106:8409   (VX855/VX875)
+ device 1106:8410   (VX900)
 
 If none of these show up, you should look in the BIOS for settings like
 enable ACPI / SMBus or even USB.
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/scx200_acb b/Documentation/i2c/busses/scx200_acb
index 7c07883d4dfc..ce83c871fe95 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/scx200_acb
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/scx200_acb
@@ -28,5 +28,5 @@ If the scx200_acb driver is built into the kernel, add the following
 parameter to your boot command line:
   scx200_acb.base=0x810,0x820
 If the scx200_acb driver is built as a module, add the following line to
-the file /etc/modprobe.conf instead:
+a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/ instead:
   options scx200_acb base=0x810,0x820
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/functionality b/Documentation/i2c/functionality
index 42c17c1fb3cd..b0ff2ab596ce 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/functionality
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/functionality
@@ -18,9 +18,9 @@ For the most up-to-date list of functionality constants, please check
                                   adapters typically can not do these)
   I2C_FUNC_10BIT_ADDR             Handles the 10-bit address extensions
   I2C_FUNC_PROTOCOL_MANGLING      Knows about the I2C_M_IGNORE_NAK,
-                                  I2C_M_REV_DIR_ADDR, I2C_M_NOSTART and
-                                  I2C_M_NO_RD_ACK flags (which modify the
-                                  I2C protocol!)
+                                  I2C_M_REV_DIR_ADDR and I2C_M_NO_RD_ACK
+                                  flags (which modify the I2C protocol!)
+  I2C_FUNC_NOSTART                Can skip repeated start sequence
   I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_QUICK            Handles the SMBus write_quick command
   I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_READ_BYTE        Handles the SMBus read_byte command
   I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_WRITE_BYTE       Handles the SMBus write_byte command
@@ -50,6 +50,9 @@ A few combinations of the above flags are also defined for your convenience:
                                   emulated by a real I2C adapter (using
                                   the transparent emulation layer)
 
+In kernel versions prior to 3.5 I2C_FUNC_NOSTART was implemented as
+part of I2C_FUNC_PROTOCOL_MANGLING.
+
 
 ADAPTER IMPLEMENTATION
 ----------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/i2c-protocol b/Documentation/i2c/i2c-protocol
index 10518dd58814..0b3e62d1f77a 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/i2c-protocol
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/i2c-protocol
@@ -49,7 +49,9 @@ a byte read, followed by a byte write:
 Modified transactions
 =====================
 
-We have found some I2C devices that needs the following modifications:
+The following modifications to the I2C protocol can also be generated,
+with the exception of I2C_M_NOSTART these are usually only needed to
+work around device issues:
 
   Flag I2C_M_NOSTART: 
     In a combined transaction, no 'S Addr Wr/Rd [A]' is generated at some
@@ -60,6 +62,11 @@ We have found some I2C devices that needs the following modifications:
     we do not generate Addr, but we do generate the startbit S. This will
     probably confuse all other clients on your bus, so don't try this.
 
+    This is often used to gather transmits from multiple data buffers in
+    system memory into something that appears as a single transfer to the
+    I2C device but may also be used between direction changes by some
+    rare devices.
+
   Flags I2C_M_REV_DIR_ADDR
     This toggles the Rd/Wr flag. That is, if you want to do a write, but
     need to emit an Rd instead of a Wr, or vice versa, you set this
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices b/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices
index abf63615ee05..c70e7a7638d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ i2c_board_info which is registered by calling i2c_register_board_info().
 
 Example (from omap2 h4):
 
-static struct i2c_board_info __initdata h4_i2c_board_info[] = {
+static struct i2c_board_info h4_i2c_board_info[] __initdata = {
 	{
 		I2C_BOARD_INFO("isp1301_omap", 0x2d),
 		.irq		= OMAP_GPIO_IRQ(125),
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Example (from the nxp OHCI driver):
 
 static const unsigned short normal_i2c[] = { 0x2c, 0x2d, I2C_CLIENT_END };
 
-static int __devinit usb_hcd_nxp_probe(struct platform_device *pdev)
+static int usb_hcd_nxp_probe(struct platform_device *pdev)
 {
 	(...)
 	struct i2c_adapter *i2c_adap;
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/muxes/gpio-i2cmux b/Documentation/i2c/muxes/gpio-i2cmux
deleted file mode 100644
index 811cd78d4cdc..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/i2c/muxes/gpio-i2cmux
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver gpio-i2cmux
-
-Author: Peter Korsgaard <peter.korsgaard@barco.com>
-
-Description
------------
-
-gpio-i2cmux is an i2c mux driver providing access to I2C bus segments
-from a master I2C bus and a hardware MUX controlled through GPIO pins.
-
-E.G.:
-
-  ----------              ----------  Bus segment 1   - - - - -
- |          | SCL/SDA    |          |-------------- |           |
- |          |------------|          |
- |          |            |          | Bus segment 2 |           |
- |  Linux   | GPIO 1..N  |   MUX    |---------------   Devices
- |          |------------|          |               |           |
- |          |            |          | Bus segment M
- |          |            |          |---------------|           |
-  ----------              ----------                  - - - - -
-
-SCL/SDA of the master I2C bus is multiplexed to bus segment 1..M
-according to the settings of the GPIO pins 1..N.
-
-Usage
------
-
-gpio-i2cmux uses the platform bus, so you need to provide a struct
-platform_device with the platform_data pointing to a struct
-gpio_i2cmux_platform_data with the I2C adapter number of the master
-bus, the number of bus segments to create and the GPIO pins used
-to control it. See include/linux/gpio-i2cmux.h for details.
-
-E.G. something like this for a MUX providing 4 bus segments
-controlled through 3 GPIO pins:
-
-#include <linux/gpio-i2cmux.h>
-#include <linux/platform_device.h>
-
-static const unsigned myboard_gpiomux_gpios[] = {
-	AT91_PIN_PC26, AT91_PIN_PC25, AT91_PIN_PC24
-};
-
-static const unsigned myboard_gpiomux_values[] = {
-	0, 1, 2, 3
-};
-
-static struct gpio_i2cmux_platform_data myboard_i2cmux_data = {
-	.parent		= 1,
-	.base_nr	= 2, /* optional */
-	.values		= myboard_gpiomux_values,
-	.n_values	= ARRAY_SIZE(myboard_gpiomux_values),
-	.gpios		= myboard_gpiomux_gpios,
-	.n_gpios	= ARRAY_SIZE(myboard_gpiomux_gpios),
-	.idle		= 4, /* optional */
-};
-
-static struct platform_device myboard_i2cmux = {
-	.name		= "gpio-i2cmux",
-	.id		= 0,
-	.dev		= {
-		.platform_data	= &myboard_i2cmux_data,
-	},
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/muxes/i2c-mux-gpio b/Documentation/i2c/muxes/i2c-mux-gpio
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d4d91a53fc39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/muxes/i2c-mux-gpio
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+Kernel driver i2c-gpio-mux
+
+Author: Peter Korsgaard <peter.korsgaard@barco.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+i2c-gpio-mux is an i2c mux driver providing access to I2C bus segments
+from a master I2C bus and a hardware MUX controlled through GPIO pins.
+
+E.G.:
+
+  ----------              ----------  Bus segment 1   - - - - -
+ |          | SCL/SDA    |          |-------------- |           |
+ |          |------------|          |
+ |          |            |          | Bus segment 2 |           |
+ |  Linux   | GPIO 1..N  |   MUX    |---------------   Devices
+ |          |------------|          |               |           |
+ |          |            |          | Bus segment M
+ |          |            |          |---------------|           |
+  ----------              ----------                  - - - - -
+
+SCL/SDA of the master I2C bus is multiplexed to bus segment 1..M
+according to the settings of the GPIO pins 1..N.
+
+Usage
+-----
+
+i2c-gpio-mux uses the platform bus, so you need to provide a struct
+platform_device with the platform_data pointing to a struct
+gpio_i2cmux_platform_data with the I2C adapter number of the master
+bus, the number of bus segments to create and the GPIO pins used
+to control it. See include/linux/i2c-gpio-mux.h for details.
+
+E.G. something like this for a MUX providing 4 bus segments
+controlled through 3 GPIO pins:
+
+#include <linux/i2c-gpio-mux.h>
+#include <linux/platform_device.h>
+
+static const unsigned myboard_gpiomux_gpios[] = {
+	AT91_PIN_PC26, AT91_PIN_PC25, AT91_PIN_PC24
+};
+
+static const unsigned myboard_gpiomux_values[] = {
+	0, 1, 2, 3
+};
+
+static struct gpio_i2cmux_platform_data myboard_i2cmux_data = {
+	.parent		= 1,
+	.base_nr	= 2, /* optional */
+	.values		= myboard_gpiomux_values,
+	.n_values	= ARRAY_SIZE(myboard_gpiomux_values),
+	.gpios		= myboard_gpiomux_gpios,
+	.n_gpios	= ARRAY_SIZE(myboard_gpiomux_gpios),
+	.idle		= 4, /* optional */
+};
+
+static struct platform_device myboard_i2cmux = {
+	.name		= "i2c-gpio-mux",
+	.id		= 0,
+	.dev		= {
+		.platform_data	= &myboard_i2cmux_data,
+	},
+};
+
+If you don't know the absolute GPIO pin numbers at registration time,
+you can instead provide a chip name (.chip_name) and relative GPIO pin
+numbers, and the i2c-gpio-mux driver will do the work for you,
+including deferred probing if the GPIO chip isn't immediately
+available.
+
+Device Registration
+-------------------
+
+When registering your i2c-gpio-mux device, you should pass the number
+of any GPIO pin it uses as the device ID. This guarantees that every
+instance has a different ID.
+
+Alternatively, if you don't need a stable device name, you can simply
+pass PLATFORM_DEVID_AUTO as the device ID, and the platform core will
+assign a dynamic ID to your device. If you do not know the absolute
+GPIO pin numbers at registration time, this is even the only option.
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol b/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol
index 49f5b680809d..6012b12b3510 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol
@@ -23,6 +23,12 @@ don't match these function names.  For some of the operations which pass a
 single data byte, the functions using SMBus protocol operation names execute
 a different protocol operation entirely.
 
+Each transaction type corresponds to a functionality flag. Before calling a
+transaction function, a device driver should always check (just once) for
+the corresponding functionality flag to ensure that the underlying I2C
+adapter supports the transaction in question. See
+<file:Documentation/i2c/functionality> for the details.
+
 
 Key to symbols
 ==============
@@ -49,6 +55,8 @@ This sends a single bit to the device, at the place of the Rd/Wr bit.
 
 A Addr Rd/Wr [A] P
 
+Functionality flag: I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_QUICK
+
 
 SMBus Receive Byte:  i2c_smbus_read_byte()
 ==========================================
@@ -60,6 +68,8 @@ the previous SMBus command.
 
 S Addr Rd [A] [Data] NA P
 
+Functionality flag: I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_READ_BYTE
+
 
 SMBus Send Byte:  i2c_smbus_write_byte()
 ========================================
@@ -69,6 +79,8 @@ to a device.  See Receive Byte for more information.
 
 S Addr Wr [A] Data [A] P
 
+Functionality flag: I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_WRITE_BYTE
+
 
 SMBus Read Byte:  i2c_smbus_read_byte_data()
 ============================================
@@ -78,6 +90,8 @@ The register is specified through the Comm byte.
 
 S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] S Addr Rd [A] [Data] NA P
 
+Functionality flag: I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_READ_BYTE_DATA
+
 
 SMBus Read Word:  i2c_smbus_read_word_data()
 ============================================
@@ -88,6 +102,8 @@ byte. But this time, the data is a complete word (16 bits).
 
 S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] S Addr Rd [A] [DataLow] A [DataHigh] NA P
 
+Functionality flag: I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_READ_WORD_DATA
+
 Note the convenience function i2c_smbus_read_word_swapped is
 available for reads where the two data bytes are the other way
 around (not SMBus compliant, but very popular.)
@@ -102,6 +118,8 @@ the Read Byte operation.
 
 S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] Data [A] P
 
+Functionality flag: I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_WRITE_BYTE_DATA
+
 
 SMBus Write Word:  i2c_smbus_write_word_data()
 ==============================================
@@ -112,13 +130,15 @@ specified through the Comm byte.
 
 S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] DataLow [A] DataHigh [A] P
 
+Functionality flag: I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_WRITE_WORD_DATA
+
 Note the convenience function i2c_smbus_write_word_swapped is
 available for writes where the two data bytes are the other way
 around (not SMBus compliant, but very popular.)
 
 
-SMBus Process Call:  i2c_smbus_process_call()
-=============================================
+SMBus Process Call:
+===================
 
 This command selects a device register (through the Comm byte), sends
 16 bits of data to it, and reads 16 bits of data in return.
@@ -126,6 +146,8 @@ This command selects a device register (through the Comm byte), sends
 S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] DataLow [A] DataHigh [A] 
                              S Addr Rd [A] [DataLow] A [DataHigh] NA P
 
+Functionality flag: I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_PROC_CALL
+
 
 SMBus Block Read:  i2c_smbus_read_block_data()
 ==============================================
@@ -137,6 +159,8 @@ of data is specified by the device in the Count byte.
 S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] 
            S Addr Rd [A] [Count] A [Data] A [Data] A ... A [Data] NA P
 
+Functionality flag: I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_READ_BLOCK_DATA
+
 
 SMBus Block Write:  i2c_smbus_write_block_data()
 ================================================
@@ -147,6 +171,8 @@ Comm byte. The amount of data is specified in the Count byte.
 
 S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] Count [A] Data [A] Data [A] ... [A] Data [A] P
 
+Functionality flag: I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_WRITE_BLOCK_DATA
+
 
 SMBus Block Write - Block Read Process Call
 ===========================================
@@ -160,6 +186,8 @@ This command selects a device register (through the Comm byte), sends
 S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] Count [A] Data [A] ...
                              S Addr Rd [A] [Count] A [Data] ... A P
 
+Functionality flag: I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_BLOCK_PROC_CALL
+
 
 SMBus Host Notify
 =================
@@ -229,15 +257,7 @@ designated register that is specified through the Comm byte.
 S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] 
            S Addr Rd [A] [Data] A [Data] A ... A [Data] NA P
 
-
-I2C Block Read (2 Comm bytes)
-=============================
-
-This command reads a block of bytes from a device, from a 
-designated register that is specified through the two Comm bytes.
-
-S Addr Wr [A] Comm1 [A] Comm2 [A] 
-           S Addr Rd [A] [Data] A [Data] A ... A [Data] NA P
+Functionality flag: I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_READ_I2C_BLOCK
 
 
 I2C Block Write:  i2c_smbus_write_i2c_block_data()
@@ -249,3 +269,5 @@ Comm byte. Note that command lengths of 0, 2, or more bytes are
 supported as they are indistinguishable from data.
 
 S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] Data [A] Data [A] ... [A] Data [A] P
+
+Functionality flag: I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_WRITE_I2C_BLOCK
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients
index d6991625c407..8e5fbd88c7d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients
@@ -196,8 +196,8 @@ static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *i2c_client,
 
 Update the detach method, by changing the name to _remove and
 to delete the i2c_detach_client call. It is possible that you
-can also remove the ret variable as it is not not needed for
-any of the core functions.
+can also remove the ret variable as it is not needed for any
+of the core functions.
 
 - static int example_detach(struct i2c_client *client)
 + static int example_remove(struct i2c_client *client)
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients
index 5aa53374ea2a..6b344b516bff 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients
@@ -245,21 +245,17 @@ static int __init foo_init(void)
 {
 	return i2c_add_driver(&foo_driver);
 }
+module_init(foo_init);
 
 static void __exit foo_cleanup(void)
 {
 	i2c_del_driver(&foo_driver);
 }
+module_exit(foo_cleanup);
 
-/* Substitute your own name and email address */
-MODULE_AUTHOR("Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>"
-MODULE_DESCRIPTION("Driver for Barf Inc. Foo I2C devices");
-
-/* a few non-GPL license types are also allowed */
-MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");
+The module_i2c_driver() macro can be used to reduce above code.
 
-module_init(foo_init);
-module_exit(foo_cleanup);
+module_i2c_driver(foo_driver);
 
 Note that some functions are marked by `__init'.  These functions can
 be removed after kernel booting (or module loading) is completed.
@@ -267,6 +263,17 @@ Likewise, functions marked by `__exit' are dropped by the compiler when
 the code is built into the kernel, as they would never be called.
 
 
+Driver Information
+==================
+
+/* Substitute your own name and email address */
+MODULE_AUTHOR("Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>"
+MODULE_DESCRIPTION("Driver for Barf Inc. Foo I2C devices");
+
+/* a few non-GPL license types are also allowed */
+MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");
+
+
 Power Management
 ================
 
@@ -358,8 +365,6 @@ in terms of it. Never use this function directly!
 	s32 i2c_smbus_read_word_data(struct i2c_client *client, u8 command);
 	s32 i2c_smbus_write_word_data(struct i2c_client *client,
 				      u8 command, u16 value);
-	s32 i2c_smbus_process_call(struct i2c_client *client,
-				   u8 command, u16 value);
 	s32 i2c_smbus_read_block_data(struct i2c_client *client,
 				      u8 command, u8 *values);
 	s32 i2c_smbus_write_block_data(struct i2c_client *client,
@@ -374,6 +379,8 @@ These ones were removed from i2c-core because they had no users, but could
 be added back later if needed:
 
 	s32 i2c_smbus_write_quick(struct i2c_client *client, u8 value);
+	s32 i2c_smbus_process_call(struct i2c_client *client,
+				   u8 command, u16 value);
 	s32 i2c_smbus_block_process_call(struct i2c_client *client,
 					 u8 command, u8 length, u8 *values);
 
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/aliasing-test.c b/Documentation/ia64/aliasing-test.c
index 5caa2af33207..62a190d45f38 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/aliasing-test.c
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/aliasing-test.c
@@ -132,6 +132,7 @@ static int read_rom(char *path)
 
 	rc = write(fd, "1", 2);
 	if (rc <= 0) {
+		close(fd);
 		perror("write");
 		return -1;
 	}
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/err_inject.txt b/Documentation/ia64/err_inject.txt
index 223e4f0582d0..9f651c181429 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/err_inject.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/err_inject.txt
@@ -882,7 +882,7 @@ int err_inj()
 			cpu=parameters[i].cpu;
 			k = cpu%64;
 			j = cpu/64;
-			mask[j]=1<<k;
+			mask[j] = 1UL << k;
 
 			if (sched_setaffinity(0, MASK_SIZE*8, mask)==-1) {
 				perror("Error sched_setaffinity:");
diff --git a/Documentation/ide/ide.txt b/Documentation/ide/ide.txt
index e77bebfa7b0d..7aca987c23d9 100644
--- a/Documentation/ide/ide.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ide/ide.txt
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ When using ide.c as a module in combination with kmod, add:
 
 	alias block-major-3 ide-probe
 
-to /etc/modprobe.conf.
+to a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/.
 
 When ide.c is used as a module, you can pass command line parameters to the
 driver using the "options=" keyword to insmod, while replacing any ',' with
diff --git a/Documentation/infiniband/ipoib.txt b/Documentation/infiniband/ipoib.txt
index 64eeb55d0c09..f2cfe265e836 100644
--- a/Documentation/infiniband/ipoib.txt
+++ b/Documentation/infiniband/ipoib.txt
@@ -24,6 +24,9 @@ Partitions and P_Keys
   The P_Key for any interface is given by the "pkey" file, and the
   main interface for a subinterface is in "parent."
 
+  Child interface create/delete can also be done using IPoIB's
+  rtnl_link_ops, where childs created using either way behave the same.
+
 Datagram vs Connected modes
 
   The IPoIB driver supports two modes of operation: datagram and
diff --git a/Documentation/initrd.txt b/Documentation/initrd.txt
index 1ba84f3584e3..4e1839ccb555 100644
--- a/Documentation/initrd.txt
+++ b/Documentation/initrd.txt
@@ -362,5 +362,5 @@ Resources
     http://www.almesberger.net/cv/papers/ols2k-9.ps.gz
 [2] newlib package (experimental), with initrd example
     http://sources.redhat.com/newlib/
-[3] Brouwer, Andries; "util-linux: Miscellaneous utilities for Linux"
-    ftp://ftp.win.tue.nl/pub/linux-local/utils/util-linux/
+[3] util-linux: Miscellaneous utilities for Linux
+    http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util-linux/
diff --git a/Documentation/input/alps.txt b/Documentation/input/alps.txt
index ae8ba9a74ce1..e544c7ff8cfa 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/alps.txt
+++ b/Documentation/input/alps.txt
@@ -3,10 +3,26 @@ ALPS Touchpad Protocol
 
 Introduction
 ------------
-
-Currently the ALPS touchpad driver supports four protocol versions in use by
-ALPS touchpads, called versions 1, 2, 3, and 4. Information about the various
-protocol versions is contained in the following sections.
+Currently the ALPS touchpad driver supports five protocol versions in use by
+ALPS touchpads, called versions 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.
+
+Since roughly mid-2010 several new ALPS touchpads have been released and
+integrated into a variety of laptops and netbooks.  These new touchpads
+have enough behavior differences that the alps_model_data definition
+table, describing the properties of the different versions, is no longer
+adequate.  The design choices were to re-define the alps_model_data
+table, with the risk of regression testing existing devices, or isolate
+the new devices outside of the alps_model_data table.  The latter design
+choice was made.  The new touchpad signatures are named: "Rushmore",
+"Pinnacle", and "Dolphin", which you will see in the alps.c code.
+For the purposes of this document, this group of ALPS touchpads will
+generically be called "new ALPS touchpads".
+
+We experimented with probing the ACPI interface _HID (Hardware ID)/_CID
+(Compatibility ID) definition as a way to uniquely identify the
+different ALPS variants but there did not appear to be a 1:1 mapping.
+In fact, it appeared to be an m:n mapping between the _HID and actual
+hardware type.
 
 Detection
 ---------
@@ -20,9 +36,13 @@ If the E6 report is successful, the touchpad model is identified using the "E7
 report" sequence: E8-E7-E7-E7-E9. The response is the model signature and is
 matched against known models in the alps_model_data_array.
 
-With protocol versions 3 and 4, the E7 report model signature is always
-73-02-64. To differentiate between these versions, the response from the
-"Enter Command Mode" sequence must be inspected as described below.
+For older touchpads supporting protocol versions 3 and 4, the E7 report
+model signature is always 73-02-64. To differentiate between these
+versions, the response from the "Enter Command Mode" sequence must be
+inspected as described below.
+
+The new ALPS touchpads have an E7 signature of 73-03-50 or 73-03-0A but
+seem to be better differentiated by the EC Command Mode response.
 
 Command Mode
 ------------
@@ -47,6 +67,14 @@ address of the register being read, and the third contains the value of the
 register. Registers are written by writing the value one nibble at a time
 using the same encoding used for addresses.
 
+For the new ALPS touchpads, the EC command is used to enter command
+mode. The response in the new ALPS touchpads is significantly different,
+and more important in determining the behavior.  This code has been
+separated from the original alps_model_data table and put in the
+alps_identify function.  For example, there seem to be two hardware init
+sequences for the "Dolphin" touchpads as determined by the second byte
+of the EC response.
+
 Packet Format
 -------------
 
@@ -133,7 +161,7 @@ number of contacts (f1 and f0 in the table below).
 
 This packet only appears after a position packet with the mt bit set, and
 usually only appears when there are two or more contacts (although
-occassionally it's seen with only a single contact).
+occasionally it's seen with only a single contact).
 
 The final v3 packet type is the trackstick packet.
 
@@ -187,3 +215,28 @@ There are several things worth noting here.
     well.
 
 So far no v4 devices with tracksticks have been encountered.
+
+ALPS Absolute Mode - Protocol Version 5
+---------------------------------------
+This is basically Protocol Version 3 but with different logic for packet
+decode.  It uses the same alps_process_touchpad_packet_v3 call with a
+specialized decode_fields function pointer to correctly interpret the
+packets.  This appears to only be used by the Dolphin devices.
+
+For single-touch, the 6-byte packet format is:
+
+ byte 0:    1    1    0    0    1    0    0    0
+ byte 1:    0   x6   x5   x4   x3   x2   x1   x0
+ byte 2:    0   y6   y5   y4   y3   y2   y1   y0
+ byte 3:    0    M    R    L    1    m    r    l
+ byte 4:   y10  y9   y8   y7  x10   x9   x8   x7
+ byte 5:    0   z6   z5   z4   z3   z2   z1   z0
+
+For mt, the format is:
+
+ byte 0:    1    1    1    n3   1   n2   n1   x24
+ byte 1:    1   y7   y6    y5  y4   y3   y2    y1
+ byte 2:    ?   x2   x1   y12 y11  y10   y9    y8
+ byte 3:    0  x23  x22   x21 x20  x19  x18   x17
+ byte 4:    0   x9   x8    x7  x6   x5   x4    x3
+ byte 5:    0  x16  x15   x14 x13  x12  x11   x10
diff --git a/Documentation/input/edt-ft5x06.txt b/Documentation/input/edt-ft5x06.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2032f0b7a8fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/input/edt-ft5x06.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+EDT ft5x06 based Polytouch devices
+----------------------------------
+
+The edt-ft5x06 driver is useful for the EDT "Polytouch" family of capacitive
+touch screens. Note that it is *not* suitable for other devices based on the
+focaltec ft5x06 devices, since they contain vendor-specific firmware. In
+particular this driver is not suitable for the Nook tablet.
+
+It has been tested with the following devices:
+  * EP0350M06
+  * EP0430M06
+  * EP0570M06
+  * EP0700M06
+
+The driver allows configuration of the touch screen via a set of sysfs files:
+
+/sys/class/input/eventX/device/device/threshold:
+    allows setting the "click"-threshold in the range from 20 to 80.
+
+/sys/class/input/eventX/device/device/gain:
+    allows setting the sensitivity in the range from 0 to 31. Note that
+    lower values indicate higher sensitivity.
+
+/sys/class/input/eventX/device/device/offset:
+    allows setting the edge compensation in the range from 0 to 31.
+
+/sys/class/input/eventX/device/device/report_rate:
+    allows setting the report rate in the range from 3 to 14.
+
+
+For debugging purposes the driver provides a few files in the debug
+filesystem (if available in the kernel). In /sys/kernel/debug/edt_ft5x06
+you'll find the following files:
+
+num_x, num_y:
+    (readonly) contains the number of sensor fields in X- and
+    Y-direction.
+
+mode:
+    allows switching the sensor between "factory mode" and "operation
+    mode" by writing "1" or "0" to it. In factory mode (1) it is
+    possible to get the raw data from the sensor. Note that in factory
+    mode regular events don't get delivered and the options described
+    above are unavailable.
+
+raw_data:
+    contains num_x * num_y big endian 16 bit values describing the raw
+    values for each sensor field. Note that each read() call on this
+    files triggers a new readout. It is recommended to provide a buffer
+    big enough to contain num_x * num_y * 2 bytes.
+
+Note that reading raw_data gives a I/O error when the device is not in factory
+mode. The same happens when reading/writing to the parameter files when the
+device is not in regular operation mode.
diff --git a/Documentation/input/event-codes.txt b/Documentation/input/event-codes.txt
index 53305bd08182..f1ea2c69648d 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/event-codes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/input/event-codes.txt
@@ -196,6 +196,17 @@ EV_MSC:
 EV_MSC events are used for input and output events that do not fall under other
 categories.
 
+A few EV_MSC codes have special meaning:
+
+* MSC_TIMESTAMP:
+  - Used to report the number of microseconds since the last reset. This event
+    should be coded as an uint32 value, which is allowed to wrap around with
+    no special consequence. It is assumed that the time difference between two
+    consecutive events is reliable on a reasonable time scale (hours).
+    A reset to zero can happen, in which case the time since the last event is
+    unknown.  If the device does not provide this information, the driver must
+    not provide it to user space.
+
 EV_LED:
 ----------
 EV_LED events are used for input and output to set and query the state of
diff --git a/Documentation/input/gamepad.txt b/Documentation/input/gamepad.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8002c894c6b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/input/gamepad.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+                            Linux Gamepad API
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+1. Intro
+~~~~~~~~
+Linux provides many different input drivers for gamepad hardware. To avoid
+having user-space deal with different button-mappings for each gamepad, this
+document defines how gamepads are supposed to report their data.
+
+2. Geometry
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+As "gamepad" we define devices which roughly look like this:
+
+            ____________________________              __
+           / [__ZL__]          [__ZR__] \               |
+          / [__ TL __]        [__ TR __] \              | Front Triggers
+       __/________________________________\__         __|
+      /                                  _   \          |
+     /      /\           __             (N)   \         |
+    /       ||      __  |MO|  __     _       _ \        | Main Pad
+   |    <===DP===> |SE|      |ST|   (W) -|- (E) |       |
+    \       ||    ___          ___       _     /        |
+    /\      \/   /   \        /   \     (S)   /\      __|
+   /  \________ | LS  | ____ |  RS | ________/  \       |
+  |         /  \ \___/ /    \ \___/ /  \         |      | Control Sticks
+  |        /    \_____/      \_____/    \        |    __|
+  |       /                              \       |
+   \_____/                                \_____/
+
+       |________|______|    |______|___________|
+         D-Pad    Left       Right   Action Pad
+                 Stick       Stick
+
+                   |_____________|
+                      Menu Pad
+
+Most gamepads have the following features:
+  - Action-Pad
+    4 buttons in diamonds-shape (on the right side). The buttons are
+    differently labeled on most devices so we define them as NORTH,
+    SOUTH, WEST and EAST.
+  - D-Pad (Direction-pad)
+    4 buttons (on the left side) that point up, down, left and right.
+  - Menu-Pad
+    Different constellations, but most-times 2 buttons: SELECT - START
+    Furthermore, many gamepads have a fancy branded button that is used as
+    special system-button. It often looks different to the other buttons and
+    is used to pop up system-menus or system-settings.
+  - Analog-Sticks
+    Analog-sticks provide freely moveable sticks to control directions. Not
+    all devices have both or any, but they are present at most times.
+    Analog-sticks may also provide a digital button if you press them.
+  - Triggers
+    Triggers are located on the upper-side of the pad in vertical direction.
+    Not all devices provide them, but the upper buttons are normally named
+    Left- and Right-Triggers, the lower buttons Z-Left and Z-Right.
+  - Rumble
+    Many devices provide force-feedback features. But are mostly just
+    simple rumble motors.
+
+3. Detection
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+All gamepads that follow the protocol described here map BTN_GAMEPAD. This is
+an alias for BTN_SOUTH/BTN_A. It can be used to identify a gamepad as such.
+However, not all gamepads provide all features, so you need to test for all
+features that you need, first. How each feature is mapped is described below.
+
+Legacy drivers often don't comply to these rules. As we cannot change them
+for backwards-compatibility reasons, you need to provide fixup mappings in
+user-space yourself. Some of them might also provide module-options that
+change the mappings so you can adivce users to set these.
+
+All new gamepads are supposed to comply with this mapping. Please report any
+bugs, if they don't.
+
+There are a lot of less-featured/less-powerful devices out there, which re-use
+the buttons from this protocol. However, they try to do this in a compatible
+fashion. For example, the "Nintendo Wii Nunchuk" provides two trigger buttons
+and one analog stick. It reports them as if it were a gamepad with only one
+analog stick and two trigger buttons on the right side.
+But that means, that if you only support "real" gamepads, you must test
+devices for _all_ reported events that you need. Otherwise, you will also get
+devices that report a small subset of the events.
+
+No other devices, that do not look/feel like a gamepad, shall report these
+events.
+
+4. Events
+~~~~~~~~~
+Gamepads report the following events:
+
+Action-Pad:
+  Every gamepad device has at least 2 action buttons. This means, that every
+  device reports BTN_SOUTH (which BTN_GAMEPAD is an alias for). Regardless
+  of the labels on the buttons, the codes are sent according to the
+  physical position of the buttons.
+  Please note that 2- and 3-button pads are fairly rare and old. You might
+  want to filter gamepads that do not report all four.
+    2-Button Pad:
+      If only 2 action-buttons are present, they are reported as BTN_SOUTH and
+      BTN_EAST. For vertical layouts, the upper button is BTN_EAST. For
+      horizontal layouts, the button more on the right is BTN_EAST.
+    3-Button Pad:
+      If only 3 action-buttons are present, they are reported as (from left
+      to right): BTN_WEST, BTN_SOUTH, BTN_EAST
+      If the buttons are aligned perfectly vertically, they are reported as
+      (from top down): BTN_WEST, BTN_SOUTH, BTN_EAST
+    4-Button Pad:
+      If all 4 action-buttons are present, they can be aligned in two
+      different formations. If diamond-shaped, they are reported as BTN_NORTH,
+      BTN_WEST, BTN_SOUTH, BTN_EAST according to their physical location.
+      If rectangular-shaped, the upper-left button is BTN_NORTH, lower-left
+      is BTN_WEST, lower-right is BTN_SOUTH and upper-right is BTN_EAST.
+
+D-Pad:
+  Every gamepad provides a D-Pad with four directions: Up, Down, Left, Right
+  Some of these are available as digital buttons, some as analog buttons. Some
+  may even report both. The kernel does not convert between these so
+  applications should support both and choose what is more appropriate if
+  both are reported.
+    Digital buttons are reported as:
+      BTN_DPAD_*
+    Analog buttons are reported as:
+      ABS_HAT0X and ABS_HAT0Y
+
+Analog-Sticks:
+  The left analog-stick is reported as ABS_X, ABS_Y. The right analog stick is
+  reported as ABS_RX, ABS_RY. Zero, one or two sticks may be present.
+  If analog-sticks provide digital buttons, they are mapped accordingly as
+  BTN_THUMBL (first/left) and BTN_THUMBR (second/right).
+
+Triggers:
+  Trigger buttons can be available as digital or analog buttons or both. User-
+  space must correctly deal with any situation and choose the most appropriate
+  mode.
+  Upper trigger buttons are reported as BTN_TR or ABS_HAT1X (right) and BTN_TL
+  or ABS_HAT1Y (left). Lower trigger buttons are reported as BTN_TR2 or
+  ABS_HAT2X (right/ZR) and BTN_TL2 or ABS_HAT2Y (left/ZL).
+  If only one trigger-button combination is present (upper+lower), they are
+  reported as "right" triggers (BTN_TR/ABS_HAT1X).
+
+Menu-Pad:
+  Menu buttons are always digital and are mapped according to their location
+  instead of their labels. That is:
+    1-button Pad: Mapped as BTN_START
+    2-button Pad: Left button mapped as BTN_SELECT, right button mapped as
+                  BTN_START
+  Many pads also have a third button which is branded or has a special symbol
+  and meaning. Such buttons are mapped as BTN_MODE. Examples are the Nintendo
+  "HOME" button, the XBox "X"-button or Sony "P" button.
+
+Rumble:
+  Rumble is adverticed as FF_RUMBLE.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+  Written 2013 by David Herrmann <dh.herrmann@gmail.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/input/input.txt b/Documentation/input/input.txt
index b3d6787b4fb1..666c06c5ab0c 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/input.txt
+++ b/Documentation/input/input.txt
@@ -250,8 +250,8 @@ And so on up to event31.
 a USB keyboard works and is correctly connected to the kernel keyboard
 driver. 
 
-  Doing a cat /dev/input/mouse0 (c, 13, 32) will verify that a mouse
-is also emulated, characters should appear if you move it.
+  Doing a "cat /dev/input/mouse0" (c, 13, 32) will verify that a mouse
+is also emulated; characters should appear if you move it.
 
   You can test the joystick emulation with the 'jstest' utility,
 available in the joystick package (see Documentation/input/joystick.txt).
diff --git a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt
index 543101c5bf26..de139b18184a 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt
+++ b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt
@@ -80,6 +80,8 @@ Userspace can detect that a driver can report more total contacts than slots
 by noting that the largest supported BTN_TOOL_*TAP event is larger than the
 total number of type B slots reported in the absinfo for the ABS_MT_SLOT axis.
 
+The minimum value of the ABS_MT_SLOT axis must be 0.
+
 Protocol Example A
 ------------------
 
@@ -162,26 +164,48 @@ are divided into categories, to allow for partial implementation.  The
 minimum set consists of ABS_MT_POSITION_X and ABS_MT_POSITION_Y, which
 allows for multiple contacts to be tracked.  If the device supports it, the
 ABS_MT_TOUCH_MAJOR and ABS_MT_WIDTH_MAJOR may be used to provide the size
-of the contact area and approaching contact, respectively.
+of the contact area and approaching tool, respectively.
 
 The TOUCH and WIDTH parameters have a geometrical interpretation; imagine
 looking through a window at someone gently holding a finger against the
 glass.  You will see two regions, one inner region consisting of the part
 of the finger actually touching the glass, and one outer region formed by
-the perimeter of the finger. The diameter of the inner region is the
-ABS_MT_TOUCH_MAJOR, the diameter of the outer region is
-ABS_MT_WIDTH_MAJOR. Now imagine the person pressing the finger harder
-against the glass. The inner region will increase, and in general, the
-ratio ABS_MT_TOUCH_MAJOR / ABS_MT_WIDTH_MAJOR, which is always smaller than
-unity, is related to the contact pressure. For pressure-based devices,
+the perimeter of the finger. The center of the touching region (a) is
+ABS_MT_POSITION_X/Y and the center of the approaching finger (b) is
+ABS_MT_TOOL_X/Y. The touch diameter is ABS_MT_TOUCH_MAJOR and the finger
+diameter is ABS_MT_WIDTH_MAJOR. Now imagine the person pressing the finger
+harder against the glass. The touch region will increase, and in general,
+the ratio ABS_MT_TOUCH_MAJOR / ABS_MT_WIDTH_MAJOR, which is always smaller
+than unity, is related to the contact pressure. For pressure-based devices,
 ABS_MT_PRESSURE may be used to provide the pressure on the contact area
 instead. Devices capable of contact hovering can use ABS_MT_DISTANCE to
 indicate the distance between the contact and the surface.
 
-In addition to the MAJOR parameters, the oval shape of the contact can be
-described by adding the MINOR parameters, such that MAJOR and MINOR are the
-major and minor axis of an ellipse. Finally, the orientation of the oval
-shape can be describe with the ORIENTATION parameter.
+
+	  Linux MT                               Win8
+         __________                     _______________________
+        /          \                   |                       |
+       /            \                  |                       |
+      /     ____     \                 |                       |
+     /     /    \     \                |                       |
+     \     \  a  \     \               |       a               |
+      \     \____/      \              |                       |
+       \                 \             |                       |
+        \        b        \            |           b           |
+         \                 \           |                       |
+          \                 \          |                       |
+           \                 \         |                       |
+            \                /         |                       |
+             \              /          |                       |
+              \            /           |                       |
+               \__________/            |_______________________|
+
+
+In addition to the MAJOR parameters, the oval shape of the touch and finger
+regions can be described by adding the MINOR parameters, such that MAJOR
+and MINOR are the major and minor axis of an ellipse. The orientation of
+the touch ellipse can be described with the ORIENTATION parameter, and the
+direction of the finger ellipse is given by the vector (a - b).
 
 For type A devices, further specification of the touch shape is possible
 via ABS_MT_BLOB_ID.
@@ -224,7 +248,7 @@ tool. Omit if circular [4].
 The above four values can be used to derive additional information about
 the contact. The ratio ABS_MT_TOUCH_MAJOR / ABS_MT_WIDTH_MAJOR approximates
 the notion of pressure. The fingers of the hand and the palm all have
-different characteristic widths [1].
+different characteristic widths.
 
 ABS_MT_PRESSURE
 
@@ -240,17 +264,24 @@ the contact is hovering above the surface.
 
 ABS_MT_ORIENTATION
 
-The orientation of the ellipse. The value should describe a signed quarter
-of a revolution clockwise around the touch center. The signed value range
-is arbitrary, but zero should be returned for a finger aligned along the Y
-axis of the surface, a negative value when finger is turned to the left, and
-a positive value when finger turned to the right. When completely aligned with
-the X axis, the range max should be returned.  Orientation can be omitted
-if the touching object is circular, or if the information is not available
-in the kernel driver. Partial orientation support is possible if the device
-can distinguish between the two axis, but not (uniquely) any values in
-between. In such cases, the range of ABS_MT_ORIENTATION should be [0, 1]
-[4].
+The orientation of the touching ellipse. The value should describe a signed
+quarter of a revolution clockwise around the touch center. The signed value
+range is arbitrary, but zero should be returned for an ellipse aligned with
+the Y axis of the surface, a negative value when the ellipse is turned to
+the left, and a positive value when the ellipse is turned to the
+right. When completely aligned with the X axis, the range max should be
+returned.
+
+Touch ellipsis are symmetrical by default. For devices capable of true 360
+degree orientation, the reported orientation must exceed the range max to
+indicate more than a quarter of a revolution. For an upside-down finger,
+range max * 2 should be returned.
+
+Orientation can be omitted if the touch area is circular, or if the
+information is not available in the kernel driver. Partial orientation
+support is possible if the device can distinguish between the two axis, but
+not (uniquely) any values in between. In such cases, the range of
+ABS_MT_ORIENTATION should be [0, 1] [4].
 
 ABS_MT_POSITION_X
 
@@ -260,6 +291,23 @@ ABS_MT_POSITION_Y
 
 The surface Y coordinate of the center of the touching ellipse.
 
+ABS_MT_TOOL_X
+
+The surface X coordinate of the center of the approaching tool. Omit if
+the device cannot distinguish between the intended touch point and the
+tool itself.
+
+ABS_MT_TOOL_Y
+
+The surface Y coordinate of the center of the approaching tool. Omit if the
+device cannot distinguish between the intended touch point and the tool
+itself.
+
+The four position values can be used to separate the position of the touch
+from the position of the tool. If both positions are present, the major
+tool axis points towards the touch point [1]. Otherwise, the tool axes are
+aligned with the touch axes.
+
 ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE
 
 The type of approaching tool. A lot of kernel drivers cannot distinguish
@@ -305,6 +353,28 @@ The range of ABS_MT_ORIENTATION should be set to [0, 1], to indicate that
 the device can distinguish between a finger along the Y axis (0) and a
 finger along the X axis (1).
 
+For win8 devices with both T and C coordinates, the position mapping is
+
+   ABS_MT_POSITION_X := T_X
+   ABS_MT_POSITION_Y := T_Y
+   ABS_MT_TOOL_X := C_X
+   ABS_MT_TOOL_X := C_Y
+
+Unfortunately, there is not enough information to specify both the touching
+ellipse and the tool ellipse, so one has to resort to approximations.  One
+simple scheme, which is compatible with earlier usage, is:
+
+   ABS_MT_TOUCH_MAJOR := min(X, Y)
+   ABS_MT_TOUCH_MINOR := <not used>
+   ABS_MT_ORIENTATION := <not used>
+   ABS_MT_WIDTH_MAJOR := min(X, Y) + distance(T, C)
+   ABS_MT_WIDTH_MINOR := min(X, Y)
+
+Rationale: We have no information about the orientation of the touching
+ellipse, so approximate it with an inscribed circle instead. The tool
+ellipse should align with the the vector (T - C), so the diameter must
+increase with distance(T, C). Finally, assume that the touch diameter is
+equal to the tool thickness, and we arrive at the formulas above.
 
 Finger Tracking
 ---------------
@@ -338,9 +408,7 @@ subsequent events of the same type refer to different fingers.
 For example usage of the type A protocol, see the bcm5974 driver. For
 example usage of the type B protocol, see the hid-egalax driver.
 
-[1] With the extension ABS_MT_APPROACH_X and ABS_MT_APPROACH_Y, the
-difference between the contact position and the approaching tool position
-could be used to derive tilt.
+[1] Also, the difference (TOOL_X - POSITION_X) can be used to model tilt.
 [2] The list can of course be extended.
 [3] The mtdev project: http://bitmath.org/code/mtdev/.
 [4] See the section on event computation.
diff --git a/Documentation/intel_txt.txt b/Documentation/intel_txt.txt
index 849de1a78e77..91d89c540709 100644
--- a/Documentation/intel_txt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/intel_txt.txt
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ grub.conf needs to be modified as follows:
 
 The kernel option for enabling Intel TXT support is found under the
 Security top-level menu and is called "Enable Intel(R) Trusted
-Execution Technology (TXT)".  It is marked as EXPERIMENTAL and
+Execution Technology (TXT)".  It is considered EXPERIMENTAL and
 depends on the generic x86 support (to allow maximum flexibility in
 kernel build options), since the tboot code will detect whether the
 platform actually supports Intel TXT and thus whether any of the
diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt
index 3b7488fc3373..2a5f0e14efa3 100644
--- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt
@@ -72,6 +72,7 @@ Code  Seq#(hex)	Include File		Comments
 0x06	all	linux/lp.h
 0x09	all	linux/raid/md_u.h
 0x10	00-0F	drivers/char/s390/vmcp.h
+0x10	10-1F	arch/s390/include/uapi/sclp_ctl.h
 0x12	all	linux/fs.h
 		linux/blkpg.h
 0x1b	all	InfiniBand Subsystem	<http://infiniband.sourceforge.net/>
@@ -88,6 +89,7 @@ Code  Seq#(hex)	Include File		Comments
 		and kernel/power/user.c
 '8'	all				SNP8023 advanced NIC card
 					<mailto:mcr@solidum.com>
+';'	64-7F	linux/vfio.h
 '@'	00-0F	linux/radeonfb.h	conflict!
 '@'	00-0F	drivers/video/aty/aty128fb.c	conflict!
 'A'	00-1F	linux/apm_bios.h	conflict!
@@ -120,6 +122,7 @@ Code  Seq#(hex)	Include File		Comments
 'G'	00-0F	linux/gigaset_dev.h	conflict!
 'H'	00-7F	linux/hiddev.h		conflict!
 'H'	00-0F	linux/hidraw.h		conflict!
+'H'	01	linux/mei.h		conflict!
 'H'	00-0F	sound/asound.h		conflict!
 'H'	20-40	sound/asound_fm.h	conflict!
 'H'	80-8F	sound/sfnt_info.h	conflict!
@@ -129,6 +132,7 @@ Code  Seq#(hex)	Include File		Comments
 'H'	40-4F	sound/hdspm.h		conflict!
 'H'	40-4F	sound/hdsp.h		conflict!
 'H'	90	sound/usb/usx2y/usb_stream.h
+'H'	A0	uapi/linux/usb/cdc-wdm.h
 'H'	C0-F0	net/bluetooth/hci.h	conflict!
 'H'	C0-DF	net/bluetooth/hidp/hidp.h	conflict!
 'H'	C0-DF	net/bluetooth/cmtp/cmtp.h	conflict!
@@ -176,9 +180,8 @@ Code  Seq#(hex)	Include File		Comments
 'V'	C0	linux/ivtv.h		conflict!
 'V'	C0	media/davinci/vpfe_capture.h	conflict!
 'V'	C0	media/si4713.h		conflict!
-'V'	C0-CF	drivers/media/video/mxb.h	conflict!
 'W'	00-1F	linux/watchdog.h	conflict!
-'W'	00-1F	linux/wanrouter.h	conflict!
+'W'	00-1F	linux/wanrouter.h	conflict!		(pre 3.9)
 'W'	00-3F	sound/asound.h		conflict!
 'X'	all	fs/xfs/xfs_fs.h		conflict!
 		and fs/xfs/linux-2.6/xfs_ioctl32.h
@@ -202,8 +205,6 @@ Code  Seq#(hex)	Include File		Comments
 'c'	A0-AF   arch/x86/include/asm/msr.h	conflict!
 'd'	00-FF	linux/char/drm/drm/h	conflict!
 'd'	02-40	pcmcia/ds.h		conflict!
-'d'	10-3F	drivers/media/video/dabusb.h	conflict!
-'d'	C0-CF	drivers/media/video/saa7191.h	conflict!
 'd'	F0-FF	linux/digi1.h
 'e'	all	linux/digi1.h		conflict!
 'e'	00-1F	drivers/net/irda/irtty-sir.h	conflict!
@@ -225,6 +226,7 @@ Code  Seq#(hex)	Include File		Comments
 'j'	00-3F	linux/joystick.h
 'k'	00-0F	linux/spi/spidev.h	conflict!
 'k'	00-05	video/kyro.h		conflict!
+'k'	10-17	linux/hsi/hsi_char.h	HSI character device
 'l'	00-3F	linux/tcfs_fs.h		transparent cryptographic file system
 					<http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://mikonos.dia.unisa.it/tcfs>
 'l'	40-7F	linux/udf_fs_i.h	in development:
@@ -264,9 +266,7 @@ Code  Seq#(hex)	Include File		Comments
 'v'	00-1F	linux/ext2_fs.h		conflict!
 'v'	00-1F	linux/fs.h		conflict!
 'v'	00-0F	linux/sonypi.h		conflict!
-'v'	C0-DF	media/pwc-ioctl.h	conflict!
 'v'	C0-FF	linux/meye.h		conflict!
-'v'	D0-DF	drivers/media/video/cpia2/cpia2dev.h	conflict!
 'w'	all				CERN SCI driver
 'y'	00-1F				packet based user level communications
 					<mailto:zapman@interlan.net>
diff --git a/Documentation/iostats.txt b/Documentation/iostats.txt
index c76c21d87e85..65f694f2d1c9 100644
--- a/Documentation/iostats.txt
+++ b/Documentation/iostats.txt
@@ -71,6 +71,8 @@ Field  4 -- # of milliseconds spent reading
     measured from __make_request() to end_that_request_last()).
 Field  5 -- # of writes completed
     This is the total number of writes completed successfully.
+Field  6 -- # of writes merged
+    See the description of field 2.
 Field  7 -- # of sectors written
     This is the total number of sectors written successfully.
 Field  8 -- # of milliseconds spent writing
diff --git a/Documentation/isdn/README.gigaset b/Documentation/isdn/README.gigaset
index ef3343eaa002..7534c6039adc 100644
--- a/Documentation/isdn/README.gigaset
+++ b/Documentation/isdn/README.gigaset
@@ -97,8 +97,7 @@ GigaSet 307x Device Driver
 				   2.5.): 1=on (default), 0=off
 
      Depending on your distribution you may want to create a separate module
-     configuration file /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset for these, or add them to a
-     custom file like /etc/modprobe.conf.local.
+     configuration file like /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset.conf for these.
 
 2.2. Device nodes for user space programs
      ------------------------------------
@@ -212,8 +211,8 @@ GigaSet 307x Device Driver
 
         options ppp_async flag_time=0
 
-     to an appropriate module configuration file, like /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset
-     or /etc/modprobe.conf.local.
+     to an appropriate module configuration file, like
+     /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset.conf.
 
      Unimodem mode is needed for making some devices [e.g. SX100] work which
      do not support the regular Gigaset command set. If debug output (see
@@ -237,8 +236,8 @@ GigaSet 307x Device Driver
 	modprobe usb_gigaset startmode=0
      or by adding a line like
 	options usb_gigaset startmode=0
-     to an appropriate module configuration file, like /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset
-     or /etc/modprobe.conf.local.
+     to an appropriate module configuration file, like
+     /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset.conf
 
 2.6. Call-ID (CID) mode
      ------------------
@@ -310,7 +309,7 @@ GigaSet 307x Device Driver
 
            options isdn dialtimeout=15
 
-        to /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset, /etc/modprobe.conf.local or a similar file.
+        to /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset.conf or a similar file.
 
      Problem:
         The isdnlog program emits error messages or just doesn't work.
@@ -350,8 +349,7 @@ GigaSet 307x Device Driver
      The initial value can be set using the debug parameter when loading the
      module "gigaset", e.g. by adding a line
         options gigaset debug=0
-     to your module configuration file, eg. /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset or
-     /etc/modprobe.conf.local.
+     to your module configuration file, eg. /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset.conf
 
      Generated debugging information can be found
      - as output of the command
diff --git a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO
index 050d37fe6d40..8148a47fc70e 100644
--- a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO
+++ b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO
@@ -11,14 +11,14 @@ for non English (read: Japanese) speakers and is not intended as a
 fork. So if you have any comments or updates for this file, please try
 to update the original English file first.
 
-Last Updated: 2011/03/31
+Last Updated: 2013/07/19
 ==================================
 これは、
-linux-2.6.38/Documentation/HOWTO
+linux-3.10/Documentation/HOWTO
 の和訳です。
 
-翻訳団体： JF プロジェクト < http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/ >
-翻訳日： 2011/3/28
+翻訳団体： JF プロジェクト < http://linuxjf.sourceforge.jp/ >
+翻訳日： 2013/7/19
 翻訳者： Tsugikazu Shibata <tshibata at ab dot jp dot nec dot com>
 校正者： 松倉さん <nbh--mats at nifty dot com>
          小林 雅典さん (Masanori Kobayasi) <zap03216 at nifty dot ne dot jp>
@@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Linux カーネルソースツリーの中に含まれる、きれいにし、�
 自己参照方式で、索引がついた web 形式で、ソースコードを参照することが
 できます。この最新の素晴しいカーネルコードのリポジトリは以下で見つかり
 ます-
-	http://sosdg.org/~qiyong/lxr/
+	http://lxr.linux.no/+trees
 
 開発プロセス
 -----------------------
@@ -253,24 +253,24 @@ Linux カーネルソースツリーの中に含まれる、きれいにし、�
 Linux カーネルの開発プロセスは現在幾つかの異なるメインカーネル「ブラン
 チ」と多数のサブシステム毎のカーネルブランチから構成されます。
 これらのブランチとは-
-  - メインの 2.6.x カーネルツリー
-  - 2.6.x.y -stable カーネルツリー
-  - 2.6.x -git カーネルパッチ
+  - メインの 3.x カーネルツリー
+  - 3.x.y -stable カーネルツリー
+  - 3.x -git カーネルパッチ
   - サブシステム毎のカーネルツリーとパッチ
-  - 統合テストのための 2.6.x -next カーネルツリー
+  - 統合テストのための 3.x -next カーネルツリー
 
-2.6.x カーネルツリー
+3.x カーネルツリー
 -----------------
 
-2.6.x カーネルは Linus Torvalds によってメンテナンスされ、kernel.org
-の pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/ ディレクトリに存在します。この開発プロセスは
+3.x カーネルは Linus Torvalds によってメンテナンスされ、kernel.org
+の pub/linux/kernel/v3.x/ ディレクトリに存在します。この開発プロセスは
 以下のとおり-
 
   - 新しいカーネルがリリースされた直後に、2週間の特別期間が設けられ、
     この期間中に、メンテナ達は Linus に大きな差分を送ることができます。
     このような差分は通常 -next カーネルに数週間含まれてきたパッチです。
     大きな変更は git(カーネルのソース管理ツール、詳細は
-    http://git-scm.com/  参照) を使って送るのが好ましいやり方ですが、パッ
+    http://git-scm.com/ 参照) を使って送るのが好ましいやり方ですが、パッ
     チファイルの形式のまま送るのでも十分です。
 
   - 2週間後、-rc1 カーネルがリリースされ、この後にはカーネル全体の安定
@@ -302,20 +302,20 @@ Andrew Morton が Linux-kernel メーリングリストにカーネルリリー�
   実に認識されたバグの状況によりリリースされるのであり、前もって決めら
   れた計画によってリリースされるものではないからです。」
 
-2.6.x.y -stable カーネルツリー
+3.x.y -stable カーネルツリー
 ---------------------------
 
-バージョン番号が4つの数字に分かれているカーネルは -stable カーネルです。
-これには、2.6.x カーネルで見つかったセキュリティ問題や重大な後戻りに対
+バージョン番号が3つの数字に分かれているカーネルは -stable カーネルです。
+これには、3.x カーネルで見つかったセキュリティ問題や重大な後戻りに対
 する比較的小さい重要な修正が含まれます。
 
 これは、開発/実験的バージョンのテストに協力することに興味が無く、
 最新の安定したカーネルを使いたいユーザに推奨するブランチです。
 
-もし、2.6.x.y カーネルが存在しない場合には、番号が一番大きい 2.6.x が
+もし、3.x.y カーネルが存在しない場合には、番号が一番大きい 3.x が
 最新の安定版カーネルです。
 
-2.6.x.y は "stable" チーム <stable@kernel.org> でメンテされており、必
+3.x.y は "stable" チーム <stable@kernel.org> でメンテされており、必
 要に応じてリリースされます。通常のリリース期間は 2週間毎ですが、差し迫っ
 た問題がなければもう少し長くなることもあります。セキュリティ関連の問題
 の場合はこれに対してだいたいの場合、すぐにリリースがされます。
@@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Andrew Morton が Linux-kernel メーリングリストにカーネルリリー�
 イルにはどのような種類の変更が -stable ツリーに受け入れ可能か、またリ
 リースプロセスがどう動くかが記述されています。
 
-2.6.x -git パッチ
+3.x -git パッチ
 ------------------
 
 git リポジトリで管理されているLinus のカーネルツリーの毎日のスナップ
@@ -358,14 +358,14 @@ quilt シリーズとして公開されているパッチキューも使われ�
 をつけることができます。大部分のこれらの patchwork のサイトは
 http://patchwork.kernel.org/ でリストされています。
 
-統合テストのための 2.6.x -next カーネルツリー
+統合テストのための 3.x -next カーネルツリー
 ---------------------------------------------
 
-サブシステムツリーの更新内容がメインラインの 2.6.x ツリーにマージされ
+サブシステムツリーの更新内容がメインラインの 3.x ツリーにマージされ
 る前に、それらは統合テストされる必要があります。この目的のため、実質的
 に全サブシステムツリーからほぼ毎日プルされてできる特別なテスト用のリ
 ポジトリが存在します-
-       http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/sfr/linux-next.git
+       http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/next/linux-next.git
        http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/
 
 このやり方によって、-next カーネルは次のマージ機会でどんなものがメイン
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
index 68e32bb6bd80..6466704d47b5 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
@@ -50,6 +50,10 @@ LDFLAGS_MODULE
 --------------------------------------------------
 Additional options used for $(LD) when linking modules.
 
+LDFLAGS_vmlinux
+--------------------------------------------------
+Additional options passed to final link of vmlinux.
+
 KBUILD_VERBOSE
 --------------------------------------------------
 Set the kbuild verbosity. Can be assigned same values as "V=...".
@@ -214,3 +218,18 @@ KBUILD_BUILD_USER, KBUILD_BUILD_HOST
 These two variables allow to override the user@host string displayed during
 boot and in /proc/version. The default value is the output of the commands
 whoami and host, respectively.
+
+KBUILD_LDS
+--------------------------------------------------
+The linker script with full path. Assigned by the top-level Makefile.
+
+KBUILD_VMLINUX_INIT
+--------------------------------------------------
+All object files for the init (first) part of vmlinux.
+Files specified with KBUILD_VMLINUX_INIT are linked first.
+
+KBUILD_VMLINUX_MAIN
+--------------------------------------------------
+All object files for the main part of vmlinux.
+KBUILD_VMLINUX_INIT and KBUILD_VMLINUX_MAIN together specify
+all the object files used to link vmlinux.
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt
index a686f9cd69c1..c420676c6fe3 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt
@@ -147,6 +147,7 @@ applicable everywhere (see syntax).
   - "modules"
     This declares the symbol to be used as the MODULES symbol, which
     enables the third modular state for all config symbols.
+    At most one symbol may have the "modules" option set.
 
   - "env"=<value>
     This imports the environment variable into Kconfig. It behaves like
@@ -388,26 +389,3 @@ config FOO
 	depends on BAR && m
 
 limits FOO to module (=m) or disabled (=n).
-
-Kconfig symbol existence
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-The following two methods produce the same kconfig symbol dependencies
-but differ greatly in kconfig symbol existence (production) in the
-generated config file.
-
-case 1:
-
-config FOO
-	tristate "about foo"
-	depends on BAR
-
-vs. case 2:
-
-if BAR
-config FOO
-	tristate "about foo"
-endif
-
-In case 1, the symbol FOO will always exist in the config file (given
-no other dependencies).  In case 2, the symbol FOO will only exist in
-the config file if BAR is enabled.
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt
index c313d71324b4..8ef6dbb6a462 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt
@@ -28,12 +28,10 @@ new (default) values, so you can use:
 
 	grep "(NEW)" conf.new
 
-to see the new config symbols or you can 'diff' the previous and
-new .config files to see the differences:
+to see the new config symbols or you can use diffconfig to see the
+differences between the previous and new .config files:
 
-	diff .config.old .config | less
-
-(Yes, we need something better here.)
+	scripts/diffconfig .config.old .config | less
 
 ______________________________________________________________________
 Environment variables for '*config'
@@ -48,6 +46,12 @@ KCONFIG_OVERWRITECONFIG
 If you set KCONFIG_OVERWRITECONFIG in the environment, Kconfig will not
 break symlinks when .config is a symlink to somewhere else.
 
+CONFIG_
+--------------------------------------------------
+If you set CONFIG_ in the environment, Kconfig will prefix all symbols
+with its value when saving the configuration, instead of using the default,
+"CONFIG_".
+
 ______________________________________________________________________
 Environment variables for '{allyes/allmod/allno/rand}config'
 
@@ -55,15 +59,15 @@ KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG
 --------------------------------------------------
 (partially based on lkml email from/by Rob Landley, re: miniconfig)
 --------------------------------------------------
-The allyesconfig/allmodconfig/allnoconfig/randconfig variants can
-also use the environment variable KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG as a flag or a
-filename that contains config symbols that the user requires to be
-set to a specific value.  If KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG is used without a
-filename, "make *config" checks for a file named
-"all{yes/mod/no/def/random}.config" (corresponding to the *config command
-that was used) for symbol values that are to be forced.  If this file
-is not found, it checks for a file named "all.config" to contain forced
-values.
+The allyesconfig/allmodconfig/allnoconfig/randconfig variants can also
+use the environment variable KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG as a flag or a filename
+that contains config symbols that the user requires to be set to a
+specific value.  If KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG is used without a filename where
+KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG == "" or KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG == "1", "make *config"
+checks for a file named "all{yes/mod/no/def/random}.config"
+(corresponding to the *config command that was used) for symbol values
+that are to be forced.  If this file is not found, it checks for a
+file named "all.config" to contain forced values.
 
 This enables you to create "miniature" config (miniconfig) or custom
 config files containing just the config symbols that you are interested
@@ -86,6 +90,42 @@ disable the options that are explicitly listed in the specified
 mini-config files.
 
 ______________________________________________________________________
+Environment variables for 'randconfig'
+
+KCONFIG_SEED
+--------------------------------------------------
+You can set this to the integer value used to seed the RNG, if you want
+to somehow debug the behaviour of the kconfig parser/frontends.
+If not set, the current time will be used.
+
+KCONFIG_PROBABILITY
+--------------------------------------------------
+This variable can be used to skew the probabilities. This variable can
+be unset or empty, or set to three different formats:
+	KCONFIG_PROBABILITY     y:n split           y:m:n split
+	-----------------------------------------------------------------
+	unset or empty          50  : 50            33  : 33  : 34
+	N                        N  : 100-N         N/2 : N/2 : 100-N
+    [1] N:M                     N+M : 100-(N+M)      N  :  M  : 100-(N+M)
+    [2] N:M:L                    N  : 100-N          M  :  L  : 100-(M+L)
+
+where N, M and L are integers (in base 10) in the range [0,100], and so
+that:
+    [1] N+M is in the range [0,100]
+    [2] M+L is in the range [0,100]
+
+Examples:
+	KCONFIG_PROBABILITY=10
+		10% of booleans will be set to 'y', 90% to 'n'
+		5% of tristates will be set to 'y', 5% to 'm', 90% to 'n'
+	KCONFIG_PROBABILITY=15:25
+		40% of booleans will be set to 'y', 60% to 'n'
+		15% of tristates will be set to 'y', 25% to 'm', 60% to 'n'
+	KCONFIG_PROBABILITY=10:15:15
+		10% of booleans will be set to 'y', 90% to 'n'
+		15% of tristates will be set to 'y', 15% to 'm', 70% to 'n'
+
+______________________________________________________________________
 Environment variables for 'silentoldconfig'
 
 KCONFIG_NOSILENTUPDATE
@@ -125,7 +165,7 @@ Searching in menuconfig:
 	Example:
 		/hotplug
 		This lists all config symbols that contain "hotplug",
-		e.g., HOTPLUG, HOTPLUG_CPU, MEMORY_HOTPLUG.
+		e.g., HOTPLUG_CPU, MEMORY_HOTPLUG.
 
 	For search help, enter / followed TAB-TAB-TAB (to highlight
 	<Help>) and Enter.  This will tell you that you can also use
@@ -134,6 +174,17 @@ Searching in menuconfig:
 
 		/^hotplug
 
+	When searching, symbols are sorted thus:
+	  - first, exact matches, sorted alphabetically (an exact match
+	    is when the search matches the complete symbol name);
+	  - then, other matches, sorted alphabetically.
+	For example: ^ATH.K matches:
+	    ATH5K ATH9K ATH5K_AHB ATH5K_DEBUG [...] ATH6KL ATH6KL_DEBUG
+	    [...] ATH9K_AHB ATH9K_BTCOEX_SUPPORT ATH9K_COMMON [...]
+	of which only ATH5K and ATH9K match exactly and so are sorted
+	first (and in alphabetical order), then come all other symbols,
+	sorted in alphabetical order.
+
 ______________________________________________________________________
 User interface options for 'menuconfig'
 
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
index ab0a984530d8..d567a7cc552b 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This document describes the Linux kernel Makefiles.
 
 	=== 7 Kbuild syntax for exported headers
 		--- 7.1 header-y
-		--- 7.2 objhdr-y
+		--- 7.2 genhdr-y
 		--- 7.3 destination-y
 		--- 7.4 generic-y
 
@@ -593,7 +593,7 @@ more details, with real examples.
 
 	Example:
 		#Makefile
-		LDFLAGS_vmlinux += $(call really-ld-option, -X)
+		LDFLAGS_vmlinux += $(call ld-option, -X)
 
 
 === 4 Host Program support
@@ -921,8 +921,9 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
 	Often, the KBUILD_CFLAGS variable depends on the configuration.
 
 	Example:
-		#arch/x86/Makefile
-		cflags-$(CONFIG_M386) += -march=i386
+		#arch/x86/boot/compressed/Makefile
+		cflags-$(CONFIG_X86_32) := -march=i386
+		cflags-$(CONFIG_X86_64) := -mcmodel=small
 		KBUILD_CFLAGS += $(cflags-y)
 
 	Many arch Makefiles dynamically run the target C compiler to
@@ -1175,15 +1176,39 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
 	in an init section in the image. Platform code *must* copy the
 	blob to non-init memory prior to calling unflatten_device_tree().
 
-	Example:
-		#arch/x86/platform/ce4100/Makefile
-		clean-files := *dtb.S
+	To use this command, simply add *.dtb into obj-y or targets, or make
+	some other target depend on %.dtb
 
-		DTC_FLAGS := -p 1024
-		obj-y += foo.dtb.o
+	A central rule exists to create $(obj)/%.dtb from $(src)/%.dts;
+	architecture Makefiles do no need to explicitly write out that rule.
 
-		$(obj)/%.dtb: $(src)/%.dts
-			$(call cmd,dtc)
+	Example:
+		targets += $(dtb-y)
+		clean-files += *.dtb
+		DTC_FLAGS ?= -p 1024
+
+    dtc_cpp
+	This is just like dtc as describe above, except that the C pre-
+	processor is invoked upon the .dtsp file before compiling the result
+	with dtc.
+
+	In order for build dependencies to work, all files compiled using
+	dtc_cpp must use the C pre-processor's #include functionality and not
+	dtc's /include/ functionality.
+
+	Using the C pre-processor allows use of #define to create named
+	constants. In turn, the #defines will typically appear in a header
+	file, which may be shared with regular C code. Since the dtc language
+	represents a data structure rather than code in C syntax, similar
+	restrictions are placed on a header file included by a device tree
+	file as for a header file included by an assembly language file.
+	In particular, the C pre-processor is passed -x assembler-with-cpp,
+	which sets macro __ASSEMBLY__. __DTS__ is also set. These allow header
+	files to restrict their content to that compatible with device tree
+	source.
+
+	A central rule exists to create $(obj)/%.dtb from $(src)/%.dtsp;
+	architecture Makefiles do no need to explicitly write out that rule.
 
 --- 6.8 Custom kbuild commands
 
@@ -1282,15 +1307,15 @@ See subsequent chapter for the syntax of the Kbuild file.
 
 	Subdirectories are visited before their parent directories.
 
-	--- 7.2 objhdr-y
+	--- 7.2 genhdr-y
 
-	objhdr-y specifies generated files to be exported.
+	genhdr-y specifies generated files to be exported.
 	Generated files are special as they need to be looked
 	up in another directory when doing 'make O=...' builds.
 
 		Example:
 			#include/linux/Kbuild
-			objhdr-y += version.h
+			genhdr-y += version.h
 
 	--- 7.3 destination-y
 
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt
index 3fb39e0116b4..69372fb98cf8 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt
@@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ build.
 
 	Sometimes, an external module uses exported symbols from
 	another external module. kbuild needs to have full knowledge of
-	all symbols to avoid spitting out warnings about undefined
+	all symbols to avoid spliitting out warnings about undefined
 	symbols. Three solutions exist for this situation.
 
 	NOTE: The method with a top-level kbuild file is recommended
diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
index 506c7390c2b9..88d5a863712a 100644
--- a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
@@ -47,19 +47,12 @@ parameter. Optionally the size of the ELF header can also be passed
 when using the elfcorehdr=[size[KMG]@]offset[KMG] syntax.
 
 
-With the dump-capture kernel, you can access the memory image, or "old
-memory," in two ways:
-
-- Through a /dev/oldmem device interface. A capture utility can read the
-  device file and write out the memory in raw format. This is a raw dump
-  of memory. Analysis and capture tools must be intelligent enough to
-  determine where to look for the right information.
-
-- Through /proc/vmcore. This exports the dump as an ELF-format file that
-  you can write out using file copy commands such as cp or scp. Further,
-  you can use analysis tools such as the GNU Debugger (GDB) and the Crash
-  tool to debug the dump file. This method ensures that the dump pages are
-  correctly ordered.
+With the dump-capture kernel, you can access the memory image through
+/proc/vmcore. This exports the dump as an ELF-format file that you can
+write out using file copy commands such as cp or scp. Further, you can
+use analysis tools such as the GNU Debugger (GDB) and the Crash tool to
+debug the dump file. This method ensures that the dump pages are correctly
+ordered.
 
 
 Setup and Installation
@@ -86,7 +79,7 @@ There is also a gitweb interface available at
 http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.git
 
 More information about kexec-tools can be found at
-http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/kexec/README.html
+http://horms.net/projects/kexec/
 
 3) Unpack the tarball with the tar command, as follows:
 
@@ -297,6 +290,7 @@ Boot into System Kernel
    On ia64, 256M@256M is a generous value that typically works.
    The region may be automatically placed on ia64, see the
    dump-capture kernel config option notes above.
+   If use sparse memory, the size should be rounded to GRANULE boundaries.
 
    On s390x, typically use "crashkernel=xxM". The value of xx is dependent
    on the memory consumption of the kdump system. In general this is not
@@ -422,18 +416,6 @@ the following command:
 
    cp /proc/vmcore <dump-file>
 
-You can also access dumped memory as a /dev/oldmem device for a linear
-and raw view. To create the device, use the following command:
-
-    mknod /dev/oldmem c 1 12
-
-Use the dd command with suitable options for count, bs, and skip to
-access specific portions of the dump.
-
-To see the entire memory, use the following command:
-
-   dd if=/dev/oldmem of=oldmem.001
-
 
 Analysis
 ========
@@ -460,14 +442,6 @@ format. Crash is available on Dave Anderson's site at the following URL:
    http://people.redhat.com/~anderson/
 
 
-To Do
-=====
-
-1) Provide relocatable kernels for all architectures to help in maintaining
-   multiple kernels for crash_dump, and the same kernel as the system kernel
-   can be used to capture the dump.
-
-
 Contact
 =======
 
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
index 3d8a97747f77..acbc1a3d0d91 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
@@ -64,6 +64,8 @@ Example kernel-doc function comment:
  * comment lines.
  *
  * The longer description can have multiple paragraphs.
+ *
+ * Return: Describe the return value of foobar.
  */
 
 The short description following the subject can span multiple lines
@@ -78,6 +80,8 @@ If a function parameter is "..." (varargs), it should be listed in
 kernel-doc notation as:
  * @...: description
 
+The return value, if any, should be described in a dedicated section
+named "Return".
 
 Example kernel-doc data structure comment.
 
@@ -138,9 +142,10 @@ are:
 
 - Makefile
 
-  The targets 'sgmldocs', 'psdocs', 'pdfdocs', and 'htmldocs' are used
-  to build DocBook files, PostScript files, PDF files, and html files
-  in Documentation/DocBook.
+  The targets 'xmldocs', 'psdocs', 'pdfdocs', and 'htmldocs' are used
+  to build XML DocBook files, PostScript files, PDF files, and html files
+  in Documentation/DocBook. The older target 'sgmldocs' is equivalent
+  to 'xmldocs'.
 
 - Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
 
@@ -154,8 +159,8 @@ If you just want to read the ready-made books on the various
 subsystems (see Documentation/DocBook/*.tmpl), just type 'make
 psdocs', or 'make pdfdocs', or 'make htmldocs', depending on your
 preference.  If you would rather read a different format, you can type
-'make sgmldocs' and then use DocBook tools to convert
-Documentation/DocBook/*.sgml to a format of your choice (for example,
+'make xmldocs' and then use DocBook tools to convert
+Documentation/DocBook/*.xml to a format of your choice (for example,
 'db2html ...' if 'make htmldocs' was not defined).
 
 If you want to see man pages instead, you can do this:
@@ -222,6 +227,9 @@ only a "*").
 "section header:" names must be unique per function (or struct,
 union, typedef, enum).
 
+Use the section header "Return" for sections describing the return value
+of a function.
+
 Avoid putting a spurious blank line after the function name, or else the
 description will be repeated!
 
@@ -237,21 +245,21 @@ patterns, which are highlighted appropriately.
 NOTE 1:  The multi-line descriptive text you provide does *not* recognize
 line breaks, so if you try to format some text nicely, as in:
 
-  Return codes
+  Return:
     0 - cool
     1 - invalid arg
     2 - out of memory
 
 this will all run together and produce:
 
-  Return codes 0 - cool 1 - invalid arg 2 - out of memory
+  Return: 0 - cool 1 - invalid arg 2 - out of memory
 
 NOTE 2:  If the descriptive text you provide has lines that begin with
 some phrase followed by a colon, each of those phrases will be taken as
 a new section heading, which means you should similarly try to avoid text
 like:
 
-  Return codes:
+  Return:
     0: cool
     1: invalid arg
     2: out of memory
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
index 7986d79d9d17..fcbb736d55fe 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -44,6 +44,8 @@ parameter is applicable:
 	AVR32	AVR32 architecture is enabled.
 	AX25	Appropriate AX.25 support is enabled.
 	BLACKFIN Blackfin architecture is enabled.
+	CLK	Common clock infrastructure is enabled.
+	CMA	Contiguous Memory Area support is enabled.
 	DRM	Direct Rendering Management support is enabled.
 	DYNAMIC_DEBUG Build in debug messages and enable them at runtime
 	EDD	BIOS Enhanced Disk Drive Services (EDD) is enabled
@@ -70,7 +72,6 @@ parameter is applicable:
 	M68k	M68k architecture is enabled.
 			These options have more detailed description inside of
 			Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt.
-	MCA	MCA bus support is enabled.
 	MDA	MDA console support is enabled.
 	MIPS	MIPS architecture is enabled.
 	MOUSE	Appropriate mouse support is enabled.
@@ -110,6 +111,7 @@ parameter is applicable:
 	USB	USB support is enabled.
 	USBHID	USB Human Interface Device support is enabled.
 	V4L	Video For Linux support is enabled.
+	VMMIO   Driver for memory mapped virtio devices is enabled.
 	VGA	The VGA console has been enabled.
 	VT	Virtual terminal support is enabled.
 	WDT	Watchdog support is enabled.
@@ -233,10 +235,61 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			Format: To spoof as Windows 98: ="Microsoft Windows"
 
 	acpi_osi=	[HW,ACPI] Modify list of supported OS interface strings
-			acpi_osi="string1"	# add string1 -- only one string
-			acpi_osi="!string2"	# remove built-in string2
+			acpi_osi="string1"	# add string1
+			acpi_osi="!string2"	# remove string2
+			acpi_osi=!*		# remove all strings
+			acpi_osi=!		# disable all built-in OS vendor
+						  strings
 			acpi_osi=		# disable all strings
 
+			'acpi_osi=!' can be used in combination with single or
+			multiple 'acpi_osi="string1"' to support specific OS
+			vendor string(s).  Note that such command can only
+			affect the default state of the OS vendor strings, thus
+			it cannot affect the default state of the feature group
+			strings and the current state of the OS vendor strings,
+			specifying it multiple times through kernel command line
+			is meaningless.  This command is useful when one do not
+			care about the state of the feature group strings which
+			should be controlled by the OSPM.
+			Examples:
+			  1. 'acpi_osi=! acpi_osi="Windows 2000"' is equivalent
+			     to 'acpi_osi="Windows 2000" acpi_osi=!', they all
+			     can make '_OSI("Windows 2000")' TRUE.
+
+			'acpi_osi=' cannot be used in combination with other
+			'acpi_osi=' command lines, the _OSI method will not
+			exist in the ACPI namespace.  NOTE that such command can
+			only affect the _OSI support state, thus specifying it
+			multiple times through kernel command line is also
+			meaningless.
+			Examples:
+			  1. 'acpi_osi=' can make 'CondRefOf(_OSI, Local1)'
+			     FALSE.
+
+			'acpi_osi=!*' can be used in combination with single or
+			multiple 'acpi_osi="string1"' to support specific
+			string(s).  Note that such command can affect the
+			current state of both the OS vendor strings and the
+			feature group strings, thus specifying it multiple times
+			through kernel command line is meaningful.  But it may
+			still not able to affect the final state of a string if
+			there are quirks related to this string.  This command
+			is useful when one want to control the state of the
+			feature group strings to debug BIOS issues related to
+			the OSPM features.
+			Examples:
+			  1. 'acpi_osi="Module Device" acpi_osi=!*' can make
+			     '_OSI("Module Device")' FALSE.
+			  2. 'acpi_osi=!* acpi_osi="Module Device"' can make
+			     '_OSI("Module Device")' TRUE.
+			  3. 'acpi_osi=! acpi_osi=!* acpi_osi="Windows 2000"' is
+			     equivalent to
+			     'acpi_osi=!* acpi_osi=! acpi_osi="Windows 2000"'
+			     and
+			     'acpi_osi=!* acpi_osi="Windows 2000" acpi_osi=!',
+			     they all will make '_OSI("Windows 2000")' TRUE.
+
 	acpi_pm_good	[X86]
 			Override the pmtimer bug detection: force the kernel
 			to assume that this machine's pmtimer latches its value
@@ -320,6 +373,13 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			on: enable for both 32- and 64-bit processes
 			off: disable for both 32- and 64-bit processes
 
+	alloc_snapshot	[FTRACE]
+			Allocate the ftrace snapshot buffer on boot up when the
+			main buffer is allocated. This is handy if debugging
+			and you need to use tracing_snapshot() on boot up, and
+			do not want to use tracing_snapshot_alloc() as it needs
+			to be done where GFP_KERNEL allocations are allowed.
+
 	amd_iommu=	[HW,X86-64]
 			Pass parameters to the AMD IOMMU driver in the system.
 			Possible values are:
@@ -335,6 +395,12 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 					  requirements as needed. This option
 					  does not override iommu=pt
 
+	amd_iommu_dump=	[HW,X86-64]
+			Enable AMD IOMMU driver option to dump the ACPI table
+			for AMD IOMMU. With this option enabled, AMD IOMMU
+			driver will print ACPI tables for AMD IOMMU during
+			IOMMU initialization.
+
 	amijoy.map=	[HW,JOY] Amiga joystick support
 			Map of devices attached to JOY0DAT and JOY1DAT
 			Format: <a>,<b>
@@ -397,8 +463,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 	atkbd.softrepeat= [HW]
 			Use software keyboard repeat
 
-	autotest	[IA-64]
-
 	baycom_epp=	[HW,AX25]
 			Format: <io>,<mode>
 
@@ -416,6 +480,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			Format: <io>,<irq>,<mode>
 			See header of drivers/net/hamradio/baycom_ser_hdx.c.
 
+	blkdevparts=	Manual partition parsing of block device(s) for
+			embedded devices based on command line input.
+			See Documentation/block/cmdline-partition.txt
+
 	boot_delay=	Milliseconds to delay each printk during boot.
 			Values larger than 10 seconds (10000) are changed to
 			no delay (0).
@@ -442,12 +510,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			possible to determine what the correct size should be.
 			This option provides an override for these situations.
 
-	capability.disable=
-			[SECURITY] Disable capabilities.  This would normally
-			be used only if an alternative security model is to be
-			configured.  Potentially dangerous and should only be
-			used if you are entirely sure of the consequences.
-
 	ccw_timeout_log [S390]
 			See Documentation/s390/CommonIO for details.
 
@@ -467,6 +529,13 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 
 	cio_ignore=	[S390]
 			See Documentation/s390/CommonIO for details.
+	clk_ignore_unused
+			[CLK]
+			Keep all clocks already enabled by bootloader on,
+			even if no driver has claimed them. This is useful
+			for debug and development, but should not be
+			needed on a platform with proper driver support.
+			For more information, see Documentation/clk.txt.
 
 	clock=		[BUGS=X86-32, HW] gettimeofday clocksource override.
 			[Deprecated]
@@ -508,6 +577,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			Also note the kernel might malfunction if you disable
 			some critical bits.
 
+	cma=nn[MG]	[ARM,KNL]
+			Sets the size of kernel global memory area for contiguous
+			memory allocations. For more information, see
+			include/linux/dma-contiguous.h
+
 	cmo_free_hint=	[PPC] Format: { yes | no }
 			Specify whether pages are marked as being inactive
 			when they are freed.  This is used in CMO environments
@@ -515,6 +589,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			a hypervisor.
 			Default: yes
 
+	coherent_pool=nn[KMG]	[ARM,KNL]
+			Sets the size of memory pool for coherent, atomic dma
+			allocations, by default set to 256K.
+
 	code_bytes	[X86] How many bytes of object code to print
 			in an oops report.
 			Range: 0 - 8192
@@ -557,6 +635,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			UART at the specified I/O port or MMIO address,
 			switching to the matching ttyS device later.  The
 			options are the same as for ttyS, above.
+		hvc<n>	Use the hypervisor console device <n>. This is for
+			both Xen and PowerPC hypervisors.
 
                 If the device connected to the port is not a TTY but a braille
                 device, prepend "brl," before the device type, for instance
@@ -594,6 +674,26 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			a memory unit (amount[KMG]). See also
 			Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt for an example.
 
+	crashkernel=size[KMG],high
+			[KNL, x86_64] range could be above 4G. Allow kernel
+			to allocate physical memory region from top, so could
+			be above 4G if system have more than 4G ram installed.
+			Otherwise memory region will be allocated below 4G, if
+			available.
+			It will be ignored if crashkernel=X is specified.
+	crashkernel=size[KMG],low
+			[KNL, x86_64] range under 4G. When crashkernel=X,high
+			is passed, kernel could allocate physical memory region
+			above 4G, that cause second kernel crash on system
+			that require some amount of low memory, e.g. swiotlb
+			requires at least 64M+32K low memory.  Kernel would
+			try to allocate 72M below 4G automatically.
+			This one let user to specify own low range under 4G
+			for second kernel instead.
+			0: to disable low allocation.
+			It will be ignored when crashkernel=X,high is not used
+			or memory reserved is below 4G.
+
 	cs89x0_dma=	[HW,NET]
 			Format: <dma>
 
@@ -610,7 +710,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 
 	ddebug_query=   [KNL,DYNAMIC_DEBUG] Enable debug messages at early boot
 			time. See Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt for
-			details.
+			details.  Deprecated, see dyndbg.
 
 	debug		[KNL] Enable kernel debugging (events log level).
 
@@ -713,8 +813,28 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			The filter can be disabled or changed to another
 			driver later using sysfs.
 
+	drm_kms_helper.edid_firmware=[<connector>:]<file>
+			Broken monitors, graphic adapters and KVMs may
+			send no or incorrect EDID data sets. This parameter
+			allows to specify an EDID data set in the
+			/lib/firmware directory that is used instead.
+			Generic built-in EDID data sets are used, if one of
+			edid/1024x768.bin, edid/1280x1024.bin,
+			edid/1680x1050.bin, or edid/1920x1080.bin is given
+			and no file with the same name exists. Details and
+			instructions how to build your own EDID data are
+			available in Documentation/EDID/HOWTO.txt. An EDID
+			data set will only be used for a particular connector,
+			if its name and a colon are prepended to the EDID
+			name.
+
 	dscc4.setup=	[NET]
 
+	dyndbg[="val"]		[KNL,DYNAMIC_DEBUG]
+	module.dyndbg[="val"]
+			Enable debug messages at boot time.  See
+			Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt for details.
+
 	earlycon=	[KNL] Output early console device and options.
 		uart[8250],io,<addr>[,options]
 		uart[8250],mmio,<addr>[,options]
@@ -725,18 +845,31 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			(mmio) or 32-bit (mmio32).
 			The options are the same as for ttyS, above.
 
-	earlyprintk=	[X86,SH,BLACKFIN]
+	earlyprintk=	[X86,SH,BLACKFIN,ARM]
 			earlyprintk=vga
+			earlyprintk=xen
 			earlyprintk=serial[,ttySn[,baudrate]]
+			earlyprintk=serial[,0x...[,baudrate]]
 			earlyprintk=ttySn[,baudrate]
 			earlyprintk=dbgp[debugController#]
 
+			earlyprintk is useful when the kernel crashes before
+			the normal console is initialized. It is not enabled by
+			default because it has some cosmetic problems.
+
 			Append ",keep" to not disable it when the real console
 			takes over.
 
 			Only vga or serial or usb debug port at a time.
 
-			Currently only ttyS0 and ttyS1 are supported.
+			Currently only ttyS0 and ttyS1 may be specified by
+			name.  Other I/O ports may be explicitly specified
+			on some architectures (x86 and arm at least) by
+			replacing ttySn with an I/O port address, like this:
+				earlyprintk=serial,0x1008,115200
+			You can find the port for a given device in
+			/proc/tty/driver/serial:
+				2: uart:ST16650V2 port:00001008 irq:18 ...
 
 			Interaction with the standard serial driver is not
 			very good.
@@ -744,6 +877,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			The VGA output is eventually overwritten by the real
 			console.
 
+			The xen output can only be used by Xen PV guests.
+
 	ekgdboc=	[X86,KGDB] Allow early kernel console debugging
 			ekgdboc=kbd
 
@@ -753,6 +888,12 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 	edd=		[EDD]
 			Format: {"off" | "on" | "skip[mbr]"}
 
+	efi_no_storage_paranoia [EFI; X86]
+			Using this parameter you can use more than 50% of
+			your efi variable storage. Use this parameter only if
+			you are really sure that your UEFI does sane gc and
+			fulfills the spec otherwise your board may brick.
+
 	eisa_irq_edge=	[PARISC,HW]
 			See header of drivers/parisc/eisa.c.
 
@@ -872,6 +1013,24 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 	gpt		[EFI] Forces disk with valid GPT signature but
 			invalid Protective MBR to be treated as GPT.
 
+	grcan.enable0=	[HW] Configuration of physical interface 0. Determines
+			the "Enable 0" bit of the configuration register.
+			Format: 0 | 1
+			Default: 0
+	grcan.enable1=	[HW] Configuration of physical interface 1. Determines
+			the "Enable 0" bit of the configuration register.
+			Format: 0 | 1
+			Default: 0
+	grcan.select=	[HW] Select which physical interface to use.
+			Format: 0 | 1
+			Default: 0
+	grcan.txsize=	[HW] Sets the size of the tx buffer.
+			Format: <unsigned int> such that (txsize & ~0x1fffc0) == 0.
+			Default: 1024
+	grcan.rxsize=	[HW] Sets the size of the rx buffer.
+			Format: <unsigned int> such that (rxsize & ~0x1fffc0) == 0.
+			Default: 1024
+
 	hashdist=	[KNL,NUMA] Large hashes allocated during boot
 			are distributed across NUMA nodes.  Defaults on
 			for 64-bit NUMA, off otherwise.
@@ -925,6 +1084,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			       If specified, z/VM IUCV HVC accepts connections
 			       from listed z/VM user IDs only.
 
+	hwthread_map=	[METAG] Comma-separated list of Linux cpu id to
+			        hardware thread id mappings.
+				Format: <cpu>:<hwthread>
+
 	keep_bootcon	[KNL]
 			Do not unregister boot console at start. This is only
 			useful for debugging when something happens in the window
@@ -967,6 +1130,20 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 	i8k.restricted	[HW] Allow controlling fans only if SYS_ADMIN
 			capability is set.
 
+	i915.invert_brightness=
+			[DRM] Invert the sense of the variable that is used to
+			set the brightness of the panel backlight. Normally a
+			brightness value of 0 indicates backlight switched off,
+			and the maximum of the brightness value sets the backlight
+			to maximum brightness. If this parameter is set to 0
+			(default) and the machine requires it, or this parameter
+			is set to 1, a brightness value of 0 sets the backlight
+			to maximum brightness, and the maximum of the brightness
+			value switches the backlight off.
+			-1 -- never invert brightness
+			 0 -- machine default
+			 1 -- force brightness inversion
+
 	icn=		[HW,ISDN]
 			Format: <io>[,<membase>[,<icn_id>[,<icn_id2>]]]
 
@@ -980,16 +1157,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			Claim all unknown PCI IDE storage controllers.
 
 	idle=		[X86]
-			Format: idle=poll, idle=mwait, idle=halt, idle=nomwait
+			Format: idle=poll, idle=halt, idle=nomwait
 			Poll forces a polling idle loop that can slightly
 			improve the performance of waking up a idle CPU, but
 			will use a lot of power and make the system run hot.
 			Not recommended.
-			idle=mwait: On systems which support MONITOR/MWAIT but
-			the kernel chose to not use it because it doesn't save
-			as much power as a normal idle loop, use the
-			MONITOR/MWAIT idle loop anyways. Performance should be
-			the same as idle=poll.
 			idle=halt: Halt is forced to be used for CPU idle.
 			In such case C2/C3 won't be used again.
 			idle=nomwait: Disable mwait for CPU C-states
@@ -1004,10 +1176,13 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 	ihash_entries=	[KNL]
 			Set number of hash buckets for inode cache.
 
-	ima_audit=	[IMA]
-			Format: { "0" | "1" }
-			0 -- integrity auditing messages. (Default)
-			1 -- enable informational integrity auditing messages.
+	ima_appraise=	[IMA] appraise integrity measurements
+			Format: { "off" | "enforce" | "fix" }
+			default: "enforce"
+
+	ima_appraise_tcb [IMA]
+			The builtin appraise policy appraises all files
+			owned by uid=0.
 
 	ima_hash=	[IMA]
 			Format: { "sha1" | "md5" }
@@ -1033,6 +1208,13 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 	inport.irq=	[HW] Inport (ATI XL and Microsoft) busmouse driver
 			Format: <irq>
 
+	int_pln_enable  [x86] Enable power limit notification interrupt
+
+	integrity_audit=[IMA]
+			Format: { "0" | "1" }
+			0 -- basic integrity auditing messages. (Default)
+			1 -- additional integrity auditing messages.
+
 	intel_iommu=	[DMAR] Intel IOMMU driver (DMAR) option
 		on
 			Enable intel iommu driver.
@@ -1064,6 +1246,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			0	disables intel_idle and fall back on acpi_idle.
 			1 to 6	specify maximum depth of C-state.
 
+	intel_pstate=  [X86]
+		       disable
+		         Do not enable intel_pstate as the default
+		         scaling driver for the supported processors
+
 	intremap=	[X86-64, Intel-IOMMU]
 			on	enable Interrupt Remapping (default)
 			off	disable Interrupt Remapping
@@ -1071,8 +1258,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			no_x2apic_optout
 				BIOS x2APIC opt-out request will be ignored
 
-	inttest=	[IA-64]
-
 	iomem=		Disable strict checking of access to MMIO memory
 		strict	regions from userspace.
 		relaxed
@@ -1089,7 +1274,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 		forcesac
 		soft
 		pt		[x86, IA-64]
-		group_mf	[x86, IA-64]
 
 
 	io7=		[HW] IO7 for Marvel based alpha systems
@@ -1150,6 +1334,20 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 
 	iucv=		[HW,NET]
 
+	ivrs_ioapic	[HW,X86_64]
+			Provide an override to the IOAPIC-ID<->DEVICE-ID
+			mapping provided in the IVRS ACPI table. For
+			example, to map IOAPIC-ID decimal 10 to
+			PCI device 00:14.0 write the parameter as:
+				ivrs_ioapic[10]=00:14.0
+
+	ivrs_hpet	[HW,X86_64]
+			Provide an override to the HPET-ID<->DEVICE-ID
+			mapping provided in the IVRS ACPI table. For
+			example, to map HPET-ID decimal 0 to
+			PCI device 00:14.0 write the parameter as:
+				ivrs_hpet[0]=00:14.0
+
 	js=		[HW,JOY] Analog joystick
 			See Documentation/input/joystick.txt.
 
@@ -1163,7 +1361,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			pages. In the event, a node is too small to have both
 			kernelcore and Movable pages, kernelcore pages will
 			take priority and other nodes will have a larger number
-			of kernelcore pages.  The Movable zone is used for the
+			of Movable pages.  The Movable zone is used for the
 			allocation of pages that may be reclaimed or moved
 			by the page migration subsystem.  This means that
 			HugeTLB pages may not be allocated from this zone.
@@ -1252,6 +1450,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 	lapic		[X86-32,APIC] Enable the local APIC even if BIOS
 			disabled it.
 
+	lapic=		[x86,APIC] "notscdeadline" Do not use TSC deadline
+			value for LAPIC timer one-shot implementation. Default
+			back to the programmable timer unit in the LAPIC.
+
 	lapic_timer_c2_ok	[X86,APIC] trust the local apic timer
 			in C2 power state.
 
@@ -1306,8 +1508,13 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			* nohrst, nosrst, norst: suppress hard, soft
                           and both resets.
 
+			* rstonce: only attempt one reset during
+			  hot-unplug link recovery
+
 			* dump_id: dump IDENTIFY data.
 
+			* atapi_dmadir: Enable ATAPI DMADIR bridge support
+
 			If there are multiple matching configurations changing
 			the same attribute, the last one is used.
 
@@ -1412,8 +1619,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			devices can be requested on-demand with the
 			/dev/loop-control interface.
 
-	mcatest=	[IA-64]
-
 	mce		[X86-32] Machine Check Exception
 
 	mce=option	[X86-64] See Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
@@ -1428,9 +1633,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 	mem=nn[KMG]	[KNL,BOOT] Force usage of a specific amount of memory
 			Amount of memory to be used when the kernel is not able
 			to see the whole system memory or for test.
-			[X86-32] Use together with memmap= to avoid physical
-			address space collisions. Without memmap= PCI devices
-			could be placed at addresses belonging to unused RAM.
+			[X86] Work as limiting max address. Use together
+			with memmap= to avoid physical address space collisions.
+			Without memmap= PCI devices could be placed at addresses
+			belonging to unused RAM.
 
 	mem=nopentium	[BUGS=X86-32] Disable usage of 4MB pages for kernel
 			memory.
@@ -1540,6 +1746,12 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			log everything. Information is printed at KERN_DEBUG
 			so loglevel=8 may also need to be specified.
 
+	module.sig_enforce
+			[KNL] When CONFIG_MODULE_SIG is set, this means that
+			modules without (valid) signatures will fail to load.
+			Note that if CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_FORCE is set, that
+			is always true, so this option does nothing.
+
 	mousedev.tap_time=
 			[MOUSE] Maximum time between finger touching and
 			leaving touchpad surface for touch to be considered
@@ -1657,6 +1869,14 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			of returning the full 64-bit number.
 			The default is to return 64-bit inode numbers.
 
+	nfs.max_session_slots=
+			[NFSv4.1] Sets the maximum number of session slots
+			the client will attempt to negotiate with the server.
+			This limits the number of simultaneous RPC requests
+			that the client can send to the NFSv4.1 server.
+			Note that there is little point in setting this
+			value higher than the max_tcp_slot_table_limit.
+
 	nfs.nfs4_disable_idmapping=
 			[NFSv4] When set to the default of '1', this option
 			ensures that both the RPC level authentication
@@ -1669,6 +1889,44 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			will be autodetected by the client, and it will fall
 			back to using the idmapper.
 			To turn off this behaviour, set the value to '0'.
+	nfs.nfs4_unique_id=
+			[NFS4] Specify an additional fixed unique ident-
+			ification string that NFSv4 clients can insert into
+			their nfs_client_id4 string.  This is typically a
+			UUID that is generated at system install time.
+
+	nfs.send_implementation_id =
+			[NFSv4.1] Send client implementation identification
+			information in exchange_id requests.
+			If zero, no implementation identification information
+			will be sent.
+			The default is to send the implementation identification
+			information.
+	
+	nfs.recover_lost_locks =
+			[NFSv4] Attempt to recover locks that were lost due
+			to a lease timeout on the server. Please note that
+			doing this risks data corruption, since there are
+			no guarantees that the file will remain unchanged
+			after the locks are lost.
+			If you want to enable the kernel legacy behaviour of
+			attempting to recover these locks, then set this
+			parameter to '1'.
+			The default parameter value of '0' causes the kernel
+			not to attempt recovery of lost locks.
+
+	nfsd.nfs4_disable_idmapping=
+			[NFSv4] When set to the default of '1', the NFSv4
+			server will return only numeric uids and gids to
+			clients using auth_sys, and will accept numeric uids
+			and gids from such clients.  This is intended to ease
+			migration from NFSv2/v3.
+
+	objlayoutdriver.osd_login_prog=
+			[NFS] [OBJLAYOUT] sets the pathname to the program which
+			is used to automatically discover and login into new
+			osd-targets. Please see:
+			Documentation/filesystems/pnfs.txt for more explanations
 
 	nmi_debug=	[KNL,AVR32,SH] Specify one or more actions to take
 			when a NMI is triggered.
@@ -1741,8 +1999,12 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			noexec=on: enable non-executable mappings (default)
 			noexec=off: disable non-executable mappings
 
+	nosmap		[X86]
+			Disable SMAP (Supervisor Mode Access Prevention)
+			even if it is supported by processor.
+
 	nosmep		[X86]
-			Disable SMEP (Supervisor Mode Execution Protection)
+			Disable SMEP (Supervisor Mode Execution Prevention)
 			even if it is supported by processor.
 
 	noexec32	[X86-64]
@@ -1762,14 +2024,16 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			and restore using xsave. The kernel will fallback to
 			enabling legacy floating-point and sse state.
 
+	eagerfpu=	[X86]
+			on	enable eager fpu restore
+			off	disable eager fpu restore
+			auto	selects the default scheme, which automatically
+				enables eagerfpu restore for xsaveopt.
+
 	nohlt		[BUGS=ARM,SH] Tells the kernel that the sleep(SH) or
 			wfi(ARM) instruction doesn't work correctly and not to
 			use it. This is also useful when using JTAG debugger.
 
-	no-hlt		[BUGS=X86-32] Tells the kernel that the hlt
-			instruction doesn't work correctly and not to
-			use it.
-
 	no_file_caps	Tells the kernel not to honor file capabilities.  The
 			only way then for a file to be executed with privilege
 			is to be setuid root or executed by root.
@@ -1785,6 +2049,14 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			Valid arguments: on, off
 			Default: on
 
+	nohz_full=	[KNL,BOOT]
+			In kernels built with CONFIG_NO_HZ_FULL=y, set
+			the specified list of CPUs whose tick will be stopped
+			whenever possible. The boot CPU will be forced outside
+			the range to maintain the timekeeping.
+			The CPUs in this range must also be included in the
+			rcu_nocbs= set.
+
 	noiotrap	[SH] Disables trapped I/O port accesses.
 
 	noirqdebug	[X86-32] Disables the code which attempts to detect and
@@ -1833,6 +2105,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			shutdown the other cpus.  Instead use the REBOOT_VECTOR
 			irq.
 
+	nomodule	Disable module load
+
 	nopat		[X86] Disable PAT (page attribute table extension of
 			pagetables) support.
 
@@ -1844,8 +2118,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 	noreplace-smp	[X86-32,SMP] Don't replace SMP instructions
 			with UP alternatives
 
-	noresidual	[PPC] Don't use residual data on PReP machines.
-
 	nordrand	[X86] Disable the direct use of the RDRAND
 			instruction even if it is supported by the
 			processor.  RDRAND is still available to user
@@ -1879,6 +2151,20 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 
 	nox2apic	[X86-64,APIC] Do not enable x2APIC mode.
 
+	cpu0_hotplug	[X86] Turn on CPU0 hotplug feature when
+			CONFIG_BOOTPARAM_HOTPLUG_CPU0 is off.
+			Some features depend on CPU0. Known dependencies are:
+			1. Resume from suspend/hibernate depends on CPU0.
+			Suspend/hibernate will fail if CPU0 is offline and you
+			need to online CPU0 before suspend/hibernate.
+			2. PIC interrupts also depend on CPU0. CPU0 can't be
+			removed if a PIC interrupt is detected.
+			It's said poweroff/reboot may depend on CPU0 on some
+			machines although I haven't seen such issues so far
+			after CPU0 is offline on a few tested machines.
+			If the dependencies are under your control, you can
+			turn on cpu0_hotplug.
+
 	nptcg=		[IA-64] Override max number of concurrent global TLB
 			purges which is reported from either PAL_VM_SUMMARY or
 			SAL PALO.
@@ -1891,6 +2177,9 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 
 	nr_uarts=	[SERIAL] maximum number of UARTs to be registered.
 
+	numa_balancing=	[KNL,X86] Enable or disable automatic NUMA balancing.
+			Allowed values are enable and disable
+
 	numa_zonelist_order= [KNL, BOOT] Select zonelist order for NUMA.
 			one of ['zone', 'node', 'default'] can be specified
 			This can be set from sysctl after boot.
@@ -2088,6 +2377,21 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 				This sorting is done to get a device
 				order compatible with older (<= 2.4) kernels.
 		nobfsort	Don't sort PCI devices into breadth-first order.
+		pcie_bus_tune_off	Disable PCIe MPS (Max Payload Size)
+				tuning and use the BIOS-configured MPS defaults.
+		pcie_bus_safe	Set every device's MPS to the largest value
+				supported by all devices below the root complex.
+		pcie_bus_perf	Set device MPS to the largest allowable MPS
+				based on its parent bus. Also set MRRS (Max
+				Read Request Size) to the largest supported
+				value (no larger than the MPS that the device
+				or bus can support) for best performance.
+		pcie_bus_peer2peer	Set every device's MPS to 128B, which
+				every device is guaranteed to support. This
+				configuration allows peer-to-peer DMA between
+				any pair of devices, possibly at the cost of
+				reduced performance.  This also guarantees
+				that hot-added devices will work.
 		cbiosize=nn[KMG]	The fixed amount of bus space which is
 				reserved for the CardBus bridge's IO window.
 				The default value is 256 bytes.
@@ -2109,8 +2413,23 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 				the default.
 				off: Turn ECRC off
 				on: Turn ECRC on.
-		realloc		reallocate PCI resources if allocations done by BIOS
-				are erroneous.
+		hpiosize=nn[KMG]	The fixed amount of bus space which is
+				reserved for hotplug bridge's IO window.
+				Default size is 256 bytes.
+		hpmemsize=nn[KMG]	The fixed amount of bus space which is
+				reserved for hotplug bridge's memory window.
+				Default size is 2 megabytes.
+		realloc=	Enable/disable reallocating PCI bridge resources
+				if allocations done by BIOS are too small to
+				accommodate resources required by all child
+				devices.
+				off: Turn realloc off
+				on: Turn realloc on
+		realloc		same as realloc=on
+		noari		do not use PCIe ARI.
+		pcie_scan_all	Scan all possible PCIe devices.  Otherwise we
+				only look for one device below a PCIe downstream
+				port.
 
 	pcie_aspm=	[PCIE] Forcibly enable or disable PCIe Active State Power
 			Management.
@@ -2118,6 +2437,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 		force	Enable ASPM even on devices that claim not to support it.
 			WARNING: Forcing ASPM on may cause system lockups.
 
+	pcie_hp=	[PCIE] PCI Express Hotplug driver options:
+		nomsi	Do not use MSI for PCI Express Native Hotplug (this
+			makes all PCIe ports use INTx for hotplug services).
+
 	pcie_ports=	[PCIE] PCIe ports handling:
 		auto	Ask the BIOS whether or not to use native PCIe services
 			associated with PCIe ports (PME, hot-plug, AER).  Use
@@ -2276,26 +2599,166 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 	ramdisk_size=	[RAM] Sizes of RAM disks in kilobytes
 			See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt.
 
-	rcupdate.blimit=	[KNL,BOOT]
+	rcu_nocbs=	[KNL,BOOT]
+			In kernels built with CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU=y, set
+			the specified list of CPUs to be no-callback CPUs.
+			Invocation of these CPUs' RCU callbacks will
+			be offloaded to "rcuox/N" kthreads created for
+			that purpose, where "x" is "b" for RCU-bh, "p"
+			for RCU-preempt, and "s" for RCU-sched, and "N"
+			is the CPU number.  This reduces OS jitter on the
+			offloaded CPUs, which can be useful for HPC and
+
+			real-time workloads.  It can also improve energy
+			efficiency for asymmetric multiprocessors.
+
+	rcu_nocb_poll	[KNL,BOOT]
+			Rather than requiring that offloaded CPUs
+			(specified by rcu_nocbs= above) explicitly
+			awaken the corresponding "rcuoN" kthreads,
+			make these kthreads poll for callbacks.
+			This improves the real-time response for the
+			offloaded CPUs by relieving them of the need to
+			wake up the corresponding kthread, but degrades
+			energy efficiency by requiring that the kthreads
+			periodically wake up to do the polling.
+
+	rcutree.blimit=	[KNL,BOOT]
 			Set maximum number of finished RCU callbacks to process
 			in one batch.
 
-	rcupdate.qhimark=	[KNL,BOOT]
+	rcutree.fanout_leaf=	[KNL,BOOT]
+			Increase the number of CPUs assigned to each
+			leaf rcu_node structure.  Useful for very large
+			systems.
+
+	rcutree.jiffies_till_first_fqs= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Set delay from grace-period initialization to
+			first attempt to force quiescent states.
+			Units are jiffies, minimum value is zero,
+			and maximum value is HZ.
+
+	rcutree.jiffies_till_next_fqs= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Set delay between subsequent attempts to force
+			quiescent states.  Units are jiffies, minimum
+			value is one, and maximum value is HZ.
+
+	rcutree.qhimark=	[KNL,BOOT]
 			Set threshold of queued
 			RCU callbacks over which batch limiting is disabled.
 
-	rcupdate.qlowmark=	[KNL,BOOT]
+	rcutree.qlowmark=	[KNL,BOOT]
 			Set threshold of queued RCU callbacks below which
 			batch limiting is re-enabled.
 
+	rcutree.rcu_cpu_stall_suppress=	[KNL,BOOT]
+			Suppress RCU CPU stall warning messages.
+
+	rcutree.rcu_cpu_stall_timeout= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Set timeout for RCU CPU stall warning messages.
+
+	rcutree.rcu_idle_gp_delay=	[KNL,BOOT]
+			Set wakeup interval for idle CPUs that have
+			RCU callbacks (RCU_FAST_NO_HZ=y).
+
+	rcutree.rcu_idle_lazy_gp_delay=	[KNL,BOOT]
+			Set wakeup interval for idle CPUs that have
+			only "lazy" RCU callbacks (RCU_FAST_NO_HZ=y).
+			Lazy RCU callbacks are those which RCU can
+			prove do nothing more than free memory.
+
+	rcutorture.fqs_duration= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Set duration of force_quiescent_state bursts.
+
+	rcutorture.fqs_holdoff= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Set holdoff time within force_quiescent_state bursts.
+
+	rcutorture.fqs_stutter= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Set wait time between force_quiescent_state bursts.
+
+	rcutorture.irqreader= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Test RCU readers from irq handlers.
+
+	rcutorture.n_barrier_cbs= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Set callbacks/threads for rcu_barrier() testing.
+
+	rcutorture.nfakewriters= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Set number of concurrent RCU writers.  These just
+			stress RCU, they don't participate in the actual
+			test, hence the "fake".
+
+	rcutorture.nreaders= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Set number of RCU readers.
+
+	rcutorture.onoff_holdoff= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Set time (s) after boot for CPU-hotplug testing.
+
+	rcutorture.onoff_interval= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Set time (s) between CPU-hotplug operations, or
+			zero to disable CPU-hotplug testing.
+
+	rcutorture.shuffle_interval= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Set task-shuffle interval (s).  Shuffling tasks
+			allows some CPUs to go into dyntick-idle mode
+			during the rcutorture test.
+
+	rcutorture.shutdown_secs= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Set time (s) after boot system shutdown.  This
+			is useful for hands-off automated testing.
+
+	rcutorture.stall_cpu= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Duration of CPU stall (s) to test RCU CPU stall
+			warnings, zero to disable.
+
+	rcutorture.stall_cpu_holdoff= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Time to wait (s) after boot before inducing stall.
+
+	rcutorture.stat_interval= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Time (s) between statistics printk()s.
+
+	rcutorture.stutter= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Time (s) to stutter testing, for example, specifying
+			five seconds causes the test to run for five seconds,
+			wait for five seconds, and so on.  This tests RCU's
+			ability to transition abruptly to and from idle.
+
+	rcutorture.test_boost= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Test RCU priority boosting?  0=no, 1=maybe, 2=yes.
+			"Maybe" means test if the RCU implementation
+			under test support RCU priority boosting.
+
+	rcutorture.test_boost_duration= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Duration (s) of each individual boost test.
+
+	rcutorture.test_boost_interval= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Interval (s) between each boost test.
+
+	rcutorture.test_no_idle_hz= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Test RCU's dyntick-idle handling.  See also the
+			rcutorture.shuffle_interval parameter.
+
+	rcutorture.torture_type= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Specify the RCU implementation to test.
+
+	rcutorture.verbose= [KNL,BOOT]
+			Enable additional printk() statements.
+
 	rdinit=		[KNL]
 			Format: <full_path>
 			Run specified binary instead of /init from the ramdisk,
 			used for early userspace startup. See initrd.
 
-	reboot=		[BUGS=X86-32,BUGS=ARM,BUGS=IA-64] Rebooting mode
-			Format: <reboot_mode>[,<reboot_mode2>[,...]]
-			See arch/*/kernel/reboot.c or arch/*/kernel/process.c
+	reboot=		[KNL]
+			Format (x86 or x86_64):
+				[w[arm] | c[old] | h[ard] | s[oft] | g[pio]] \
+				[[,]s[mp]#### \
+				[[,]b[ios] | a[cpi] | k[bd] | t[riple] | e[fi] | p[ci]] \
+				[[,]f[orce]
+			Where reboot_mode is one of warm (soft) or cold (hard) or gpio,
+			      reboot_type is one of bios, acpi, kbd, triple, efi, or pci,
+			      reboot_force is either force or not specified,
+			      reboot_cpu is s[mp]#### with #### being the processor
+					to be used for rebooting.
 
 	relax_domain_level=
 			[KNL, SMP] Set scheduler's default relax_domain_level.
@@ -2318,6 +2781,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 
 	resume=		[SWSUSP]
 			Specify the partition device for software suspend
+			Format:
+			{/dev/<dev> | PARTUUID=<uuid> | <int>:<int> | <hex>}
 
 	resume_offset=	[SWSUSP]
 			Specify the offset from the beginning of the partition
@@ -2361,6 +2826,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			Useful for devices that are detected asynchronously
 			(e.g. USB and MMC devices).
 
+	rproc_mem=nn[KMG][@address]
+			[KNL,ARM,CMA] Remoteproc physical memory block.
+			Memory area to be used by remote processor image,
+			managed by CMA.
+
 	rw		[KNL] Mount root device read-write on boot
 
 	S		[KNL] Run init in single mode
@@ -2372,6 +2842,15 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 
 	sched_debug	[KNL] Enables verbose scheduler debug messages.
 
+	skew_tick=	[KNL] Offset the periodic timer tick per cpu to mitigate
+			xtime_lock contention on larger systems, and/or RCU lock
+			contention on all systems with CONFIG_MAXSMP set.
+			Format: { "0" | "1" }
+			0 -- disable. (may be 1 via CONFIG_CMDLINE="skew_tick=1"
+			1 -- enable.
+			Note: increases power consumption, thus should only be
+			enabled if running jitter sensitive (HPC/RT) workloads.
+
 	security=	[SECURITY] Choose a security module to enable at boot.
 			If this boot parameter is not specified, only the first
 			security module asking for security registration will be
@@ -2454,9 +2933,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 	smart2=		[HW]
 			Format: <io1>[,<io2>[,...,<io8>]]
 
-	smp-alt-once	[X86-32,SMP] On a hotplug CPU system, only
-			attempt to substitute SMP alternatives once at boot.
-
 	smsc-ircc2.nopnp	[HW] Don't use PNP to discover SMC devices
 	smsc-ircc2.ircc_cfg=	[HW] Device configuration I/O port
 	smsc-ircc2.ircc_sir=	[HW] SIR base I/O port
@@ -2544,7 +3020,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			improve throughput, but will also increase the
 			amount of memory reserved for use by the client.
 
-	swapaccount[=0|1]
+	swapaccount=[0|1]
 			[KNL] Enable accounting of swap in memory resource
 			controller if no parameter or 1 is given or disable
 			it if 0 is given (See Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt)
@@ -2608,6 +3084,27 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			Force threading of all interrupt handlers except those
 			marked explicitly IRQF_NO_THREAD.
 
+	tmem		[KNL,XEN]
+			Enable the Transcendent memory driver if built-in.
+
+	tmem.cleancache=0|1 [KNL, XEN]
+			Default is on (1). Disable the usage of the cleancache
+			API to send anonymous pages to the hypervisor.
+
+	tmem.frontswap=0|1 [KNL, XEN]
+			Default is on (1). Disable the usage of the frontswap
+			API to send swap pages to the hypervisor. If disabled
+			the selfballooning and selfshrinking are force disabled.
+
+	tmem.selfballooning=0|1 [KNL, XEN]
+			Default is on (1). Disable the driving of swap pages
+			to the hypervisor.
+
+	tmem.selfshrinking=0|1 [KNL, XEN]
+			Default is on (1). Partial swapoff that immediately
+			transfers pages from Xen hypervisor back to the
+			kernel based on different criteria.
+
 	topology=	[S390]
 			Format: {off | on}
 			Specify if the kernel should make use of the cpu
@@ -2635,6 +3132,35 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			to facilitate early boot debugging.
 			See also Documentation/trace/events.txt
 
+	trace_options=[option-list]
+			[FTRACE] Enable or disable tracer options at boot.
+			The option-list is a comma delimited list of options
+			that can be enabled or disabled just as if you were
+			to echo the option name into
+
+			    /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace_options
+
+			For example, to enable stacktrace option (to dump the
+			stack trace of each event), add to the command line:
+
+			      trace_options=stacktrace
+
+			See also Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt "trace options"
+			section.
+
+	traceoff_on_warning
+			[FTRACE] enable this option to disable tracing when a
+			warning is hit. This turns off "tracing_on". Tracing can
+			be enabled again by echoing '1' into the "tracing_on"
+			file located in /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/
+
+			This option is useful, as it disables the trace before
+			the WARNING dump is called, which prevents the trace to
+			be filled with content caused by the warning output.
+
+			This option can also be set at run time via the sysctl
+			option:  kernel/traceoff_on_warning
+
 	transparent_hugepage=
 			[KNL]
 			Format: [always|madvise|never]
@@ -2752,6 +3278,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 					initial READ(10) command);
 				o = CAPACITY_OK (accept the capacity
 					reported by the device);
+				p = WRITE_CACHE (the device cache is ON
+					by default);
 				r = IGNORE_RESIDUE (the device reports
 					bogus residue values);
 				s = SINGLE_LUN (the device has only one
@@ -2793,6 +3321,31 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 	video=		[FB] Frame buffer configuration
 			See Documentation/fb/modedb.txt.
 
+	video.brightness_switch_enabled= [0,1]
+			If set to 1, on receiving an ACPI notify event
+			generated by hotkey, video driver will adjust brightness
+			level and then send out the event to user space through
+			the allocated input device; If set to 0, video driver
+			will only send out the event without touching backlight
+			brightness level.
+			default: 1
+
+	virtio_mmio.device=
+			[VMMIO] Memory mapped virtio (platform) device.
+
+				<size>@<baseaddr>:<irq>[:<id>]
+			where:
+				<size>     := size (can use standard suffixes
+						like K, M and G)
+				<baseaddr> := physical base address
+				<irq>      := interrupt number (as passed to
+						request_irq())
+				<id>       := (optional) platform device id
+			example:
+				virtio_mmio.device=1K@0x100b0000:48:7
+
+			Can be used multiple times for multiple devices.
+
 	vga=		[BOOT,X86-32] Select a particular video mode
 			See Documentation/x86/boot.txt and
 			Documentation/svga.txt.
@@ -2836,6 +3389,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			            them quite hard to use for exploits but
 			            might break your system.
 
+	vt.color=	[VT] Default text color.
+			Format: 0xYX, X = foreground, Y = background.
+			Default: 0x07 = light gray on black.
+
 	vt.cur_default=	[VT] Default cursor shape.
 			Format: 0xCCBBAA, where AA, BB, and CC are the same as
 			the parameters of the <Esc>[?A;B;Cc escape sequence;
@@ -2875,11 +3432,41 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			overridden by individual drivers. 0 will hide
 			cursors, 1 will display them.
 
+	vt.italic=	[VT] Default color for italic text; 0-15.
+			Default: 2 = green.
+
+	vt.underline=	[VT] Default color for underlined text; 0-15.
+			Default: 3 = cyan.
+
 	watchdog timers	[HW,WDT] For information on watchdog timers,
 			see Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt
 			or other driver-specific files in the
 			Documentation/watchdog/ directory.
 
+	workqueue.disable_numa
+			By default, all work items queued to unbound
+			workqueues are affine to the NUMA nodes they're
+			issued on, which results in better behavior in
+			general.  If NUMA affinity needs to be disabled for
+			whatever reason, this option can be used.  Note
+			that this also can be controlled per-workqueue for
+			workqueues visible under /sys/bus/workqueue/.
+
+	workqueue.power_efficient
+			Per-cpu workqueues are generally preferred because
+			they show better performance thanks to cache
+			locality; unfortunately, per-cpu workqueues tend to
+			be more power hungry than unbound workqueues.
+
+			Enabling this makes the per-cpu workqueues which
+			were observed to contribute significantly to power
+			consumption unbound, leading to measurably lower
+			power usage at the cost of small performance
+			overhead.
+
+			The default value of this parameter is determined by
+			the config option CONFIG_WQ_POWER_EFFICIENT_DEFAULT.
+
 	x2apic_phys	[X86-64,APIC] Use x2apic physical mode instead of
 			default x2apic cluster mode on platforms
 			supporting x2apic.
@@ -2890,9 +3477,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 			plus one apbt timer for broadcast timer.
 			x86_mrst_timer=apbt_only | lapic_and_apbt
 
-	xd=		[HW,XT] Original XT pre-IDE (RLL encoded) disks.
-	xd_geo=		See header of drivers/block/xd.c.
-
 	xen_emul_unplug=		[HW,X86,XEN]
 			Unplug Xen emulated devices
 			Format: [unplug0,][unplug1]
@@ -2905,6 +3489,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
 				the unplug protocol
 			never -- do not unplug even if version check succeeds
 
+	xen_nopvspin	[X86,XEN]
+			Disables the ticketlock slowpath using Xen PV
+			optimizations.
+
 	xirc2ps_cs=	[NET,PCMCIA]
 			Format:
 			<irq>,<irq_mask>,<io>,<full_duplex>,<do_sound>,<lockup_hack>[,<irq2>[,<irq3>[,<irq4>]]]
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-per-CPU-kthreads.txt b/Documentation/kernel-per-CPU-kthreads.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..32351bfabf20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-per-CPU-kthreads.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,249 @@
+REDUCING OS JITTER DUE TO PER-CPU KTHREADS
+
+This document lists per-CPU kthreads in the Linux kernel and presents
+options to control their OS jitter.  Note that non-per-CPU kthreads are
+not listed here.  To reduce OS jitter from non-per-CPU kthreads, bind
+them to a "housekeeping" CPU dedicated to such work.
+
+
+REFERENCES
+
+o	Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt:  Binding interrupts to sets of CPUs.
+
+o	Documentation/cgroups:  Using cgroups to bind tasks to sets of CPUs.
+
+o	man taskset:  Using the taskset command to bind tasks to sets
+	of CPUs.
+
+o	man sched_setaffinity:  Using the sched_setaffinity() system
+	call to bind tasks to sets of CPUs.
+
+o	/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuN/online:  Control CPU N's hotplug state,
+	writing "0" to offline and "1" to online.
+
+o	In order to locate kernel-generated OS jitter on CPU N:
+
+		cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing
+		echo 1 > max_graph_depth # Increase the "1" for more detail
+		echo function_graph > current_tracer
+		# run workload
+		cat per_cpu/cpuN/trace
+
+
+KTHREADS
+
+Name: ehca_comp/%u
+Purpose: Periodically process Infiniband-related work.
+To reduce its OS jitter, do any of the following:
+1.	Don't use eHCA Infiniband hardware, instead choosing hardware
+	that does not require per-CPU kthreads.  This will prevent these
+	kthreads from being created in the first place.  (This will
+	work for most people, as this hardware, though important, is
+	relatively old and is produced in relatively low unit volumes.)
+2.	Do all eHCA-Infiniband-related work on other CPUs, including
+	interrupts.
+3.	Rework the eHCA driver so that its per-CPU kthreads are
+	provisioned only on selected CPUs.
+
+
+Name: irq/%d-%s
+Purpose: Handle threaded interrupts.
+To reduce its OS jitter, do the following:
+1.	Use irq affinity to force the irq threads to execute on
+	some other CPU.
+
+Name: kcmtpd_ctr_%d
+Purpose: Handle Bluetooth work.
+To reduce its OS jitter, do one of the following:
+1.	Don't use Bluetooth, in which case these kthreads won't be
+	created in the first place.
+2.	Use irq affinity to force Bluetooth-related interrupts to
+	occur on some other CPU and furthermore initiate all
+	Bluetooth activity on some other CPU.
+
+Name: ksoftirqd/%u
+Purpose: Execute softirq handlers when threaded or when under heavy load.
+To reduce its OS jitter, each softirq vector must be handled
+separately as follows:
+TIMER_SOFTIRQ:  Do all of the following:
+1.	To the extent possible, keep the CPU out of the kernel when it
+	is non-idle, for example, by avoiding system calls and by forcing
+	both kernel threads and interrupts to execute elsewhere.
+2.	Build with CONFIG_HOTPLUG_CPU=y.  After boot completes, force
+	the CPU offline, then bring it back online.  This forces
+	recurring timers to migrate elsewhere.	If you are concerned
+	with multiple CPUs, force them all offline before bringing the
+	first one back online.  Once you have onlined the CPUs in question,
+	do not offline any other CPUs, because doing so could force the
+	timer back onto one of the CPUs in question.
+NET_TX_SOFTIRQ and NET_RX_SOFTIRQ:  Do all of the following:
+1.	Force networking interrupts onto other CPUs.
+2.	Initiate any network I/O on other CPUs.
+3.	Once your application has started, prevent CPU-hotplug operations
+	from being initiated from tasks that might run on the CPU to
+	be de-jittered.  (It is OK to force this CPU offline and then
+	bring it back online before you start your application.)
+BLOCK_SOFTIRQ:  Do all of the following:
+1.	Force block-device interrupts onto some other CPU.
+2.	Initiate any block I/O on other CPUs.
+3.	Once your application has started, prevent CPU-hotplug operations
+	from being initiated from tasks that might run on the CPU to
+	be de-jittered.  (It is OK to force this CPU offline and then
+	bring it back online before you start your application.)
+BLOCK_IOPOLL_SOFTIRQ:  Do all of the following:
+1.	Force block-device interrupts onto some other CPU.
+2.	Initiate any block I/O and block-I/O polling on other CPUs.
+3.	Once your application has started, prevent CPU-hotplug operations
+	from being initiated from tasks that might run on the CPU to
+	be de-jittered.  (It is OK to force this CPU offline and then
+	bring it back online before you start your application.)
+TASKLET_SOFTIRQ: Do one or more of the following:
+1.	Avoid use of drivers that use tasklets.  (Such drivers will contain
+	calls to things like tasklet_schedule().)
+2.	Convert all drivers that you must use from tasklets to workqueues.
+3.	Force interrupts for drivers using tasklets onto other CPUs,
+	and also do I/O involving these drivers on other CPUs.
+SCHED_SOFTIRQ: Do all of the following:
+1.	Avoid sending scheduler IPIs to the CPU to be de-jittered,
+	for example, ensure that at most one runnable kthread is present
+	on that CPU.  If a thread that expects to run on the de-jittered
+	CPU awakens, the scheduler will send an IPI that can result in
+	a subsequent SCHED_SOFTIRQ.
+2.	Build with CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU=y, CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU_ALL=y,
+	CONFIG_NO_HZ_FULL=y, and, in addition, ensure that the CPU
+	to be de-jittered is marked as an adaptive-ticks CPU using the
+	"nohz_full=" boot parameter.  This reduces the number of
+	scheduler-clock interrupts that the de-jittered CPU receives,
+	minimizing its chances of being selected to do the load balancing
+	work that runs in SCHED_SOFTIRQ context.
+3.	To the extent possible, keep the CPU out of the kernel when it
+	is non-idle, for example, by avoiding system calls and by
+	forcing both kernel threads and interrupts to execute elsewhere.
+	This further reduces the number of scheduler-clock interrupts
+	received by the de-jittered CPU.
+HRTIMER_SOFTIRQ:  Do all of the following:
+1.	To the extent possible, keep the CPU out of the kernel when it
+	is non-idle.  For example, avoid system calls and force both
+	kernel threads and interrupts to execute elsewhere.
+2.	Build with CONFIG_HOTPLUG_CPU=y.  Once boot completes, force the
+	CPU offline, then bring it back online.  This forces recurring
+	timers to migrate elsewhere.  If you are concerned with multiple
+	CPUs, force them all offline before bringing the first one
+	back online.  Once you have onlined the CPUs in question, do not
+	offline any other CPUs, because doing so could force the timer
+	back onto one of the CPUs in question.
+RCU_SOFTIRQ:  Do at least one of the following:
+1.	Offload callbacks and keep the CPU in either dyntick-idle or
+	adaptive-ticks state by doing all of the following:
+	a.	Build with CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU=y, CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU_ALL=y,
+		CONFIG_NO_HZ_FULL=y, and, in addition ensure that the CPU
+		to be de-jittered is marked as an adaptive-ticks CPU using
+		the "nohz_full=" boot parameter.  Bind the rcuo kthreads
+		to housekeeping CPUs, which can tolerate OS jitter.
+	b.	To the extent possible, keep the CPU out of the kernel
+		when it is non-idle, for example, by avoiding system
+		calls and by forcing both kernel threads and interrupts
+		to execute elsewhere.
+2.	Enable RCU to do its processing remotely via dyntick-idle by
+	doing all of the following:
+	a.	Build with CONFIG_NO_HZ=y and CONFIG_RCU_FAST_NO_HZ=y.
+	b.	Ensure that the CPU goes idle frequently, allowing other
+		CPUs to detect that it has passed through an RCU quiescent
+		state.	If the kernel is built with CONFIG_NO_HZ_FULL=y,
+		userspace execution also allows other CPUs to detect that
+		the CPU in question has passed through a quiescent state.
+	c.	To the extent possible, keep the CPU out of the kernel
+		when it is non-idle, for example, by avoiding system
+		calls and by forcing both kernel threads and interrupts
+		to execute elsewhere.
+
+Name: kworker/%u:%d%s (cpu, id, priority)
+Purpose: Execute workqueue requests
+To reduce its OS jitter, do any of the following:
+1.	Run your workload at a real-time priority, which will allow
+	preempting the kworker daemons.
+2.	Do any of the following needed to avoid jitter that your
+	application cannot tolerate:
+	a.	Build your kernel with CONFIG_SLUB=y rather than
+		CONFIG_SLAB=y, thus avoiding the slab allocator's periodic
+		use of each CPU's workqueues to run its cache_reap()
+		function.
+	b.	Avoid using oprofile, thus avoiding OS jitter from
+		wq_sync_buffer().
+	c.	Limit your CPU frequency so that a CPU-frequency
+		governor is not required, possibly enlisting the aid of
+		special heatsinks or other cooling technologies.  If done
+		correctly, and if you CPU architecture permits, you should
+		be able to build your kernel with CONFIG_CPU_FREQ=n to
+		avoid the CPU-frequency governor periodically running
+		on each CPU, including cs_dbs_timer() and od_dbs_timer().
+		WARNING:  Please check your CPU specifications to
+		make sure that this is safe on your particular system.
+	d.	It is not possible to entirely get rid of OS jitter
+		from vmstat_update() on CONFIG_SMP=y systems, but you
+		can decrease its frequency by writing a large value to
+		/proc/sys/vm/stat_interval.  The default value is HZ,
+		for an interval of one second.  Of course, larger values
+		will make your virtual-memory statistics update more
+		slowly.  Of course, you can also run your workload at
+		a real-time priority, thus preempting vmstat_update().
+	e.	If running on high-end powerpc servers, build with
+		CONFIG_PPC_RTAS_DAEMON=n.  This prevents the RTAS
+		daemon from running on each CPU every second or so.
+		(This will require editing Kconfig files and will defeat
+		this platform's RAS functionality.)  This avoids jitter
+		due to the rtas_event_scan() function.
+		WARNING:  Please check your CPU specifications to
+		make sure that this is safe on your particular system.
+	f.	If running on Cell Processor, build your kernel with
+		CBE_CPUFREQ_SPU_GOVERNOR=n to avoid OS jitter from
+		spu_gov_work().
+		WARNING:  Please check your CPU specifications to
+		make sure that this is safe on your particular system.
+	g.	If running on PowerMAC, build your kernel with
+		CONFIG_PMAC_RACKMETER=n to disable the CPU-meter,
+		avoiding OS jitter from rackmeter_do_timer().
+
+Name: rcuc/%u
+Purpose: Execute RCU callbacks in CONFIG_RCU_BOOST=y kernels.
+To reduce its OS jitter, do at least one of the following:
+1.	Build the kernel with CONFIG_PREEMPT=n.  This prevents these
+	kthreads from being created in the first place, and also obviates
+	the need for RCU priority boosting.  This approach is feasible
+	for workloads that do not require high degrees of responsiveness.
+2.	Build the kernel with CONFIG_RCU_BOOST=n.  This prevents these
+	kthreads from being created in the first place.  This approach
+	is feasible only if your workload never requires RCU priority
+	boosting, for example, if you ensure frequent idle time on all
+	CPUs that might execute within the kernel.
+3.	Build with CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU=y and CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU_ALL=y,
+	which offloads all RCU callbacks to kthreads that can be moved
+	off of CPUs susceptible to OS jitter.  This approach prevents the
+	rcuc/%u kthreads from having any work to do, so that they are
+	never awakened.
+4.	Ensure that the CPU never enters the kernel, and, in particular,
+	avoid initiating any CPU hotplug operations on this CPU.  This is
+	another way of preventing any callbacks from being queued on the
+	CPU, again preventing the rcuc/%u kthreads from having any work
+	to do.
+
+Name: rcuob/%d, rcuop/%d, and rcuos/%d
+Purpose: Offload RCU callbacks from the corresponding CPU.
+To reduce its OS jitter, do at least one of the following:
+1.	Use affinity, cgroups, or other mechanism to force these kthreads
+	to execute on some other CPU.
+2.	Build with CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU=n, which will prevent these
+	kthreads from being created in the first place.  However, please
+	note that this will not eliminate OS jitter, but will instead
+	shift it to RCU_SOFTIRQ.
+
+Name: watchdog/%u
+Purpose: Detect software lockups on each CPU.
+To reduce its OS jitter, do at least one of the following:
+1.	Build with CONFIG_LOCKUP_DETECTOR=n, which will prevent these
+	kthreads from being created in the first place.
+2.	Echo a zero to /proc/sys/kernel/watchdog to disable the
+	watchdog timer.
+3.	Echo a large number of /proc/sys/kernel/watchdog_thresh in
+	order to reduce the frequency of OS jitter due to the watchdog
+	timer down to a level that is acceptable for your workload.
diff --git a/Documentation/kmemcheck.txt b/Documentation/kmemcheck.txt
index c28f82895d6b..9398a501fdb9 100644
--- a/Documentation/kmemcheck.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kmemcheck.txt
@@ -91,9 +91,9 @@ information from the kmemcheck warnings, which is extremely valuable in
 debugging a problem. This option is not mandatory, however, because it slows
 down the compilation process and produces a much bigger kernel image.
 
-Now the kmemcheck menu should be visible (under "Kernel hacking" / "kmemcheck:
-trap use of uninitialized memory"). Here follows a description of the
-kmemcheck configuration variables:
+Now the kmemcheck menu should be visible (under "Kernel hacking" / "Memory
+Debugging" / "kmemcheck: trap use of uninitialized memory"). Here follows
+a description of the kmemcheck configuration variables:
 
   o CONFIG_KMEMCHECK
 
diff --git a/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO b/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO
index 2f48f205fedc..680e64635958 100644
--- a/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO
+++ b/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO
@@ -182,8 +182,8 @@ Documentation/DocBook/ 디렉토리 내에서 만들어지며 PDF, Postscript, H
 프로젝트를 봐야 한다.
     http://kernelnewbies.org
 그곳은 거의 모든 종류의 기본적인 커널 개발 질문들(질문하기 전에 먼저
-아카이브를 찾아봐라. 과거에 이미 답변되었을 수도 있다)을 할수있는 도움이
-될만한 메일링 리스트가 있다. 또한 실시간으로 질문 할수 있는 IRC 채널도
+아카이브를 찾아봐라. 과거에 이미 답변되었을 수도 있다)을 할 수 있는 도움이
+될만한 메일링 리스트가 있다. 또한 실시간으로 질문 할 수 있는 IRC 채널도
 가지고 있으며 리눅스 커널 개발을 배우는 데 유용한 문서들을 보유하고 있다.
 
 웹사이트는 코드구성, 서브시스템들, 그리고 현재 프로젝트들
@@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Documentation/DocBook/ 디렉토리 내에서 만들어지며 PDF, Postscript, H
     것을 기억해라. 왜냐하면 변경이 자체내에서만 발생하고 추가된 코드가
     드라이버 외부의 다른 부분에는 영향을 주지 않으므로 그런 변경은
     회귀(역자주: 이전에는 존재하지 않았지만 새로운 기능추가나 변경으로 인해
-		생겨난 버그)를 일으킬 만한 위험을 가지고 있지 않기 때문이다. -rc1이
+    생겨난 버그)를 일으킬 만한 위험을 가지고 있지 않기 때문이다. -rc1이
     배포된 이후에 git를 사용하여 패치들을 Linus에게 보낼수 있지만 패치들은
     공식적인 메일링 리스트로 보내서 검토를 받을 필요가 있다.
   - 새로운 -rc는 Linus가 현재 git tree가 테스트 하기에 충분히 안정된 상태에
@@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ bugme-janitor 메일링 리스트(bugzilla에 모든 변화들이 여기서 메�
  - 의견
  - 변경을 위한 요구
  - 당위성을 위한 요구
- - 고요
+ - 침묵
 
 기억하라. 이것들은 여러분의 패치가 커널로 들어가기 위한 과정이다. 여러분의
 패치들은 비판과 다른 의견을 받을 수 있고 그것들을 기술적인 레벨로 평가하고
@@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ bugme-janitor 메일링 리스트(bugzilla에 모든 변화들이 여기서 메�
 가능한한 가장 좋은 기술적인 해답을 찾고 있는 커뮤니티에서는 항상
 어떤 패치가 얼마나 좋은지에 관하여 다른 의견들이 있을 수 있다. 여러분은
 협조적이어야 하고 기꺼이 여러분의 생각을 커널 내에 맞추어야 한다. 아니면
-적어도 여러분의 것이 가치있다는 것을 중명하여야 한다. 잘못된 것도 여러분이
+적어도 여러분의 것이 가치있다는 것을 증명하여야 한다. 잘못된 것도 여러분이
 올바른 방향의 해결책으로 이끌어갈 의지가 있다면 받아들여질 것이라는 점을
 기억하라.
 
@@ -488,21 +488,21 @@ bugme-janitor 메일링 리스트(bugzilla에 모든 변화들이 여기서 메�
 커널 커뮤니티는 가장 전통적인 회사의 개발 환경과는 다르다. 여기에 여러분들의
 문제를 피하기 위한 목록이 있다.
   여러분들이 제안한 변경들에 관하여 말할 때 좋은 것들 :
-    - "이것은 여러 문제들을 해겹합니다."
-    - "이것은 2000 라인의 코드를 제거합니다."
+    - "이것은 여러 문제들을 해결합니다."
+    - "이것은 2000 라인의 코드를 줄입니다."
     - "이것은 내가 말하려는 것에 관해 설명하는 패치입니다."
-    - "나는 5개의 다른 아키텍쳐에서 그것을 테스트했슴으로..."
-    - "여기에 일련의 작은 패치들이 있슴음로..."
-    - "이것은 일반적인 머신에서 성능을 향상시킴으로..."
+    - "나는 5개의 다른 아키텍쳐에서 그것을 테스트 했으므로..."
+    - "여기에 일련의 작은 패치들이 있으므로..."
+    - "이것은 일반적인 머신에서 성능을 향상함으로..."
 
   여러분들이 말할 때 피해야 할 좋지 않은 것들 :
-    - "우리를 그것을 AIT/ptx/Solaris에서 이러한 방법으로 했다. 그러므로 그것은 좋은 것임에 틀립없다..."
+    - "우리는 그것을 AIX/ptx/Solaris에서 이러한 방법으로 했다. 그러므로 그것은 좋은 것임에 틀림없다..."
     - "나는 20년동안 이것을 해왔다. 그러므로..."
     - "이것은 돈을 벌기위해 나의 회사가 필요로 하는 것이다."
     - "이것은 우리의 엔터프라이즈 상품 라인을 위한 것이다."
     - "여기에 나의 생각을 말하고 있는 1000 페이지 설계 문서가 있다."
     - "나는 6달동안 이것을 했으니..."
-    - "여기에 5000라인 짜리 패치가 있으니..."
+    - "여기에 5000 라인 짜리 패치가 있으니..."
     - "나는 현재 뒤죽박죽인 것을 재작성했다. 그리고 여기에..."
     - "나는 마감시한을 가지고 있으므로 이 패치는 지금 적용될 필요가 있다."
 
@@ -574,6 +574,7 @@ Pat이라는 이름을 가진 여자가 있을 수도 있는 것이다. 리눅�
 또한 완성되지 않았고 "나중에 수정될 것이다." 와 같은 것들을 포함하는
 패치들은 받아들여지지 않을 것이라는 점을 유념하라.
 
+
 변경을 정당화해라
 -----------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/ko_KR/stable_api_nonsense.txt b/Documentation/ko_KR/stable_api_nonsense.txt
index 8f2b0e1d98c4..51f85ade4190 100644
--- a/Documentation/ko_KR/stable_api_nonsense.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ko_KR/stable_api_nonsense.txt
@@ -106,12 +106,12 @@ Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com>
 ---------------------------------
 
 리눅스 커널 드라이버를 계속해서 메인 커널 트리에 반영하지 않고
-유지보수하려고 하는 사름들과 이 문제를 논의하게 되면 훨씬 더
+유지보수하려고 하는 사람들과 이 문제를 논의하게 되면 훨씬 더
 "논란의 여지가 많은" 주제가 될 것이다.
 
 리눅스 커널 개발은 끊임없이 빠른 속도로 이루어지고 있으며 결코
 느슨해진 적이 없다. 커널 개발자들이 현재 인터페이스들에서 버그를
-발견하거나 무엇인가 할수 있는 더 좋은 방법을 찾게 되었다고 하자.
+발견하거나 무엇인가 할 수 있는 더 좋은 방법을 찾게 되었다고 하자.
 그들이 발견한 것을 실행한다면 아마도 더 잘 동작하도록 현재 인터페이스들을
 수정하게 될 것이다. 그들이 그런 일을 하게되면 함수 이름들은 변하게 되고,
 구조체들은 늘어나거나 줄어들게 되고, 함수 파라미터들은 재작업될 것이다.
@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ GPL을 따르는 배포 드라이버에 관해 얘기하고 있다는 것을 상
 동작하는 것을 보장한다.
 
 메인 커널 트리에 여러분의 드라이버를 반영하면 얻게 되는 장점들은 다음과 같다.
-   - 관리의 드는 비용(원래 개발자의)은 줄어줄면서 드라이버의 질은 향상될 것이다.
+   - 관리에 드는 비용(원래 개발자의)은 줄어줄면서 드라이버의 질은 향상될 것이다.
    - 다른 개발자들이 여러분의 드라이버에 기능들을 추가 할 것이다.
    - 다른 사람들은 여러분의 드라이버에 버그를 발견하고 수정할 것이다.
    - 다른 사람들은 여러분의 드라이버의 개선점을 찾을 줄 것이다.
diff --git a/Documentation/kobject.txt b/Documentation/kobject.txt
index 49578cf1aea5..c5182bb2c16c 100644
--- a/Documentation/kobject.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kobject.txt
@@ -284,9 +284,11 @@ instead, it is associated with the ktype. So let us introduce struct
 kobj_type:
 
     struct kobj_type {
-	    void (*release)(struct kobject *);
+	    void (*release)(struct kobject *kobj);
 	    const struct sysfs_ops *sysfs_ops;
-	    struct attribute	**default_attrs;
+	    struct attribute **default_attrs;
+	    const struct kobj_ns_type_operations *(*child_ns_type)(struct kobject *kobj);
+	    const void *(*namespace)(struct kobject *kobj);
     };
 
 This structure is used to describe a particular type of kobject (or, more
diff --git a/Documentation/kref.txt b/Documentation/kref.txt
index 48ba715d5a63..ddf85a5dde0c 100644
--- a/Documentation/kref.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kref.txt
@@ -213,3 +213,91 @@ presentation on krefs, which can be found at:
 and:
   http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2004_kref_talk/
 
+
+The above example could also be optimized using kref_get_unless_zero() in
+the following way:
+
+static struct my_data *get_entry()
+{
+	struct my_data *entry = NULL;
+	mutex_lock(&mutex);
+	if (!list_empty(&q)) {
+		entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_data, link);
+		if (!kref_get_unless_zero(&entry->refcount))
+			entry = NULL;
+	}
+	mutex_unlock(&mutex);
+	return entry;
+}
+
+static void release_entry(struct kref *ref)
+{
+	struct my_data *entry = container_of(ref, struct my_data, refcount);
+
+	mutex_lock(&mutex);
+	list_del(&entry->link);
+	mutex_unlock(&mutex);
+	kfree(entry);
+}
+
+static void put_entry(struct my_data *entry)
+{
+	kref_put(&entry->refcount, release_entry);
+}
+
+Which is useful to remove the mutex lock around kref_put() in put_entry(), but
+it's important that kref_get_unless_zero is enclosed in the same critical
+section that finds the entry in the lookup table,
+otherwise kref_get_unless_zero may reference already freed memory.
+Note that it is illegal to use kref_get_unless_zero without checking its
+return value. If you are sure (by already having a valid pointer) that
+kref_get_unless_zero() will return true, then use kref_get() instead.
+
+The function kref_get_unless_zero also makes it possible to use rcu
+locking for lookups in the above example:
+
+struct my_data
+{
+	struct rcu_head rhead;
+	.
+	struct kref refcount;
+	.
+	.
+};
+
+static struct my_data *get_entry_rcu()
+{
+	struct my_data *entry = NULL;
+	rcu_read_lock();
+	if (!list_empty(&q)) {
+		entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_data, link);
+		if (!kref_get_unless_zero(&entry->refcount))
+			entry = NULL;
+	}
+	rcu_read_unlock();
+	return entry;
+}
+
+static void release_entry_rcu(struct kref *ref)
+{
+	struct my_data *entry = container_of(ref, struct my_data, refcount);
+
+	mutex_lock(&mutex);
+	list_del_rcu(&entry->link);
+	mutex_unlock(&mutex);
+	kfree_rcu(entry, rhead);
+}
+
+static void put_entry(struct my_data *entry)
+{
+	kref_put(&entry->refcount, release_entry_rcu);
+}
+
+But note that the struct kref member needs to remain in valid memory for a
+rcu grace period after release_entry_rcu was called. That can be accomplished
+by using kfree_rcu(entry, rhead) as done above, or by calling synchronize_rcu()
+before using kfree, but note that synchronize_rcu() may sleep for a
+substantial amount of time.
+
+
+Thomas Hellstrom <thellstrom@vmware.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt b/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt
index 803e51f6768b..79a1bc675a8d 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt
@@ -8,8 +8,8 @@ http://acpi4asus.sf.net/
 
  This driver provides support for extra features of ACPI-compatible ASUS laptops.
  It may also support some MEDION, JVC or VICTOR laptops (such as MEDION 9675 or
- VICTOR XP7210 for example). It makes all the extra buttons generate standard
- ACPI events that go through /proc/acpi/events and input events (like keyboards).
+ VICTOR XP7210 for example). It makes all the extra buttons generate input
+ events (like keyboards).
  On some models adds support for changing the display brightness and output,
  switching the LCD backlight on and off, and most importantly, allows you to
  blink those fancy LEDs intended for reporting mail and wireless status.
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Status
 Usage
 -----
 
-  Try "modprobe asus_acpi". Check your dmesg (simply type dmesg). You should
+  Try "modprobe asus-laptop". Check your dmesg (simply type dmesg). You should
   see some lines like this :
 
       Asus Laptop Extras version 0.42
@@ -55,8 +55,8 @@ Usage
   DSDT) to me.
 
   That's all, now, all the events generated by the hotkeys of your laptop
-  should be reported in your /proc/acpi/event entry. You can check with
-  "acpi_listen".
+  should be reported via netlink events. You can check with
+  "acpi_genl monitor" (part of the acpica project).
 
   Hotkeys are also reported as input keys (like keyboards) you can check
   which key are supported using "xev" under X11.
@@ -151,8 +151,7 @@ Display switching
 
   Debugging:
   1) Check whether the Fn+F8 key:
-     a) does not lock the laptop (try disabling CONFIG_X86_UP_APIC or boot with
-        noapic / nolapic if it does)
+     a) does not lock the laptop (try a boot with noapic / nolapic if it does)
      b) generates events (0x6n, where n is the value corresponding to the
         configuration above)
      c) actually works
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/dslm.c b/Documentation/laptops/dslm.c
index 72ff290c5fc6..d5dd2d4b04d8 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/dslm.c
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/dslm.c
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
  * dslm.c
  * Simple Disk Sleep Monitor
  *  by Bartek Kania
- * Licenced under the GPL
+ * Licensed under the GPL
  */
 #include <unistd.h>
 #include <stdlib.h>
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt b/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt
index 0bf25eebce94..4ebbfc3f1c6e 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt
@@ -262,9 +262,9 @@ MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES=10
 
 #
 # Allowed dirty background ratio, in percent.  Once DIRTY_RATIO has been
-# exceeded, the kernel will wake pdflush which will then reduce the amount
-# of dirty memory to dirty_background_ratio.  Set this nice and low, so once
-# some writeout has commenced, we do a lot of it.
+# exceeded, the kernel will wake flusher threads which will then reduce the
+# amount of dirty memory to dirty_background_ratio.  Set this nice and low,
+# so once some writeout has commenced, we do a lot of it.
 #
 #DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=5
 
@@ -384,9 +384,9 @@ CPU_MAXFREQ=${CPU_MAXFREQ:-'slowest'}
 
 #
 # Allowed dirty background ratio, in percent.  Once DIRTY_RATIO has been
-# exceeded, the kernel will wake pdflush which will then reduce the amount
-# of dirty memory to dirty_background_ratio.  Set this nice and low, so once
-# some writeout has commenced, we do a lot of it.
+# exceeded, the kernel will wake flusher threads which will then reduce the
+# amount of dirty memory to dirty_background_ratio.  Set this nice and low,
+# so once some writeout has commenced, we do a lot of it.
 #
 DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=${DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO:-'5'}
 
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt b/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt
index 2bd4e82e5d9f..978b1e615155 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt
@@ -12,10 +12,15 @@ Fn keys (hotkeys):
 ------------------
 Some models report hotkeys through the SNC or SPIC devices, such events are
 reported both through the ACPI subsystem as acpi events and through the INPUT
-subsystem. See the logs of acpid or /proc/acpi/event and
-/proc/bus/input/devices to find out what those events are and which input
-devices are created by the driver. Additionally, loading the driver with the
-debug option will report all events in the kernel log.
+subsystem. See the logs of /proc/bus/input/devices to find out what those
+events are and which input devices are created by the driver.
+Additionally, loading the driver with the debug option will report all events
+in the kernel log.
+
+The "scancodes" passed to the input system (that can be remapped with udev)
+are indexes to the table "sony_laptop_input_keycode_map" in the sony-laptop.c
+module.  For example the "FN/E" key combination (EJECTCD on some models)
+generates the scancode 20 (0x14).
 
 Backlight control:
 ------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt
index 4857acfc50f1..606bdb9ce036 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Module use:
 -----------
 
 In order to automatically load the sonypi module on use, you can put those
-lines in your /etc/modprobe.conf file:
+lines a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/:
 
 	alias char-major-10-250 sonypi
 	options sonypi minor=250
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
index 9d666828915a..86c52360ffe7 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
@@ -329,20 +329,6 @@ sysfs notes:
 
 		This attribute has poll()/select() support.
 
-	hotkey_report_mode:
-		Returns the state of the procfs ACPI event report mode
-		filter for hot keys.  If it is set to 1 (the default),
-		all hot key presses are reported both through the input
-		layer and also as ACPI events through procfs (but not
-		through netlink).  If it is set to 2, hot key presses
-		are reported only through the input layer.
-
-		This attribute is read-only in kernels 2.6.23 or later,
-		and read-write on earlier kernels.
-
-		May return -EPERM (write access locked out by module
-		parameter) or -EACCES (read-only).
-
 	wakeup_reason:
 		Set to 1 if the system is waking up because the user
 		requested a bay ejection.  Set to 2 if the system is
@@ -518,24 +504,21 @@ SW_TABLET_MODE	Tablet ThinkPads HKEY events 0x5009 and 0x500A
 Non hotkey ACPI HKEY event map:
 -------------------------------
 
-Events that are not propagated by the driver, except for legacy
-compatibility purposes when hotkey_report_mode is set to 1:
-
-0x5001		Lid closed
-0x5002		Lid opened
-0x5009		Tablet swivel: switched to tablet mode
-0x500A		Tablet swivel: switched to normal mode
-0x7000		Radio Switch may have changed state
-
 Events that are never propagated by the driver:
 
 0x2304		System is waking up from suspend to undock
 0x2305		System is waking up from suspend to eject bay
 0x2404		System is waking up from hibernation to undock
 0x2405		System is waking up from hibernation to eject bay
+0x5001		Lid closed
+0x5002		Lid opened
+0x5009		Tablet swivel: switched to tablet mode
+0x500A		Tablet swivel: switched to normal mode
 0x5010		Brightness level changed/control event
 0x6000		KEYBOARD: Numlock key pressed
 0x6005		KEYBOARD: Fn key pressed (TO BE VERIFIED)
+0x7000		Radio Switch may have changed state
+
 
 Events that are propagated by the driver to userspace:
 
@@ -574,50 +557,6 @@ operating system is to force either an immediate suspend or hibernate
 cycle, or a system shutdown.  Obviously, something is very wrong if this
 happens.
 
-Compatibility notes:
-
-ibm-acpi and thinkpad-acpi 0.15 (mainline kernels before 2.6.23) never
-supported the input layer, and sent events over the procfs ACPI event
-interface.
-
-To avoid sending duplicate events over the input layer and the ACPI
-event interface, thinkpad-acpi 0.16 implements a module parameter
-(hotkey_report_mode), and also a sysfs device attribute with the same
-name.
-
-Make no mistake here: userspace is expected to switch to using the input
-layer interface of thinkpad-acpi, together with the ACPI netlink event
-interface in kernels 2.6.23 and later, or with the ACPI procfs event
-interface in kernels 2.6.22 and earlier.
-
-If no hotkey_report_mode module parameter is specified (or it is set to
-zero), the driver defaults to mode 1 (see below), and on kernels 2.6.22
-and earlier, also allows one to change the hotkey_report_mode through
-sysfs.  In kernels 2.6.23 and later, where the netlink ACPI event
-interface is available, hotkey_report_mode cannot be changed through
-sysfs (it is read-only).
-
-If the hotkey_report_mode module parameter is set to 1 or 2, it cannot
-be changed later through sysfs (any writes will return -EPERM to signal
-that hotkey_report_mode was locked.  On 2.6.23 and later, where
-hotkey_report_mode cannot be changed at all, writes will return -EACCES).
-
-hotkey_report_mode set to 1 makes the driver export through the procfs
-ACPI event interface all hot key presses (which are *also* sent to the
-input layer).  This is a legacy compatibility behaviour, and it is also
-the default mode of operation for the driver.
-
-hotkey_report_mode set to 2 makes the driver filter out the hot key
-presses from the procfs ACPI event interface, so these events will only
-be sent through the input layer.  Userspace that has been updated to use
-the thinkpad-acpi input layer interface should set hotkey_report_mode to
-2.
-
-Hot key press events are never sent to the ACPI netlink event interface.
-Really up-to-date userspace under kernel 2.6.23 and later is to use the
-netlink interface and the input layer interface, and don't bother at all
-with hotkey_report_mode.
-
 
 Brightness hotkey notes:
 
@@ -1398,7 +1337,7 @@ Sysfs notes:
 EXPERIMENTAL: UWB
 -----------------
 
-This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because it has not been extensively
+This feature is considered EXPERIMENTAL because it has not been extensively
 tested and validated in various ThinkPad models yet.  The feature may not
 work as expected. USE WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply
 the experimental=1 parameter when loading the module.
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/00-INDEX b/Documentation/leds/00-INDEX
index 29f481df32c7..1ecd1596633e 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/leds/00-INDEX
@@ -6,3 +6,9 @@ leds-lp5521.txt
 	- notes on how to use the leds-lp5521 driver.
 leds-lp5523.txt
 	- notes on how to use the leds-lp5523 driver.
+leds-lp5562.txt
+	- notes on how to use the leds-lp5562 driver.
+leds-lp55xx.txt
+	- description about lp55xx common driver.
+leds-lm3556.txt
+	- notes on how to use the leds-lm3556 driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-blinkm.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-blinkm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9dd92f4cf4e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-blinkm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+The leds-blinkm driver supports the devices of the BlinkM family.
+
+They are RGB-LED modules driven by a (AT)tiny microcontroller and
+communicate through I2C. The default address of these modules is
+0x09 but this can be changed through a command. By this you could
+dasy-chain up to 127 BlinkMs on an I2C bus.
+
+The device accepts RGB and HSB color values through separate commands.
+Also you can store blinking sequences as "scripts" in
+the controller and run them. Also fading is an option.
+
+The interface this driver provides is 2-fold:
+
+a) LED class interface for use with triggers
+############################################
+
+The registration follows the scheme:
+blinkm-<i2c-bus-nr>-<i2c-device-nr>-<color>
+
+$ ls -h /sys/class/leds/blinkm-6-*
+/sys/class/leds/blinkm-6-9-blue:
+brightness  device  max_brightness  power  subsystem  trigger  uevent
+
+/sys/class/leds/blinkm-6-9-green:
+brightness  device  max_brightness  power  subsystem  trigger  uevent
+
+/sys/class/leds/blinkm-6-9-red:
+brightness  device  max_brightness  power  subsystem  trigger  uevent
+
+(same is /sys/bus/i2c/devices/6-0009/leds)
+
+We can control the colors separated into red, green and blue and
+assign triggers on each color.
+
+E.g.:
+
+$ cat blinkm-6-9-blue/brightness
+05
+
+$ echo 200 > blinkm-6-9-blue/brightness
+$
+
+$ modprobe ledtrig-heartbeat
+$ echo heartbeat > blinkm-6-9-green/trigger
+$
+
+
+b) Sysfs group to control rgb, fade, hsb, scripts ...
+#####################################################
+
+This extended interface is available as folder blinkm
+in the sysfs folder of the I2C device.
+E.g. below /sys/bus/i2c/devices/6-0009/blinkm
+
+$ ls -h /sys/bus/i2c/devices/6-0009/blinkm/
+blue  green  red  test
+
+Currently supported is just setting red, green, blue
+and a test sequence.
+
+E.g.:
+
+$ cat *
+00
+00
+00
+#Write into test to start test sequence!#
+
+$ echo 1 > test
+$
+
+$ echo 255 > red
+$
+
+
+
+as of 6/2012
+
+dl9pf <at> gmx <dot> de
+
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lm3556.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lm3556.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..62278e871b50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lm3556.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+Kernel driver for lm3556
+========================
+
+*Texas Instrument:
+ 1.5 A Synchronous Boost LED Flash Driver w/ High-Side Current Source
+* Datasheet: http://www.national.com/ds/LM/LM3556.pdf
+
+Authors:
+	Daniel Jeong
+	Contact:Daniel Jeong(daniel.jeong-at-ti.com, gshark.jeong-at-gmail.com)
+
+Description
+-----------
+There are 3 functions in LM3556, Flash, Torch and Indicator.
+
+FLASH MODE
+In Flash Mode, the LED current source(LED) provides 16 target current levels
+from 93.75 mA to 1500 mA.The Flash currents are adjusted via the CURRENT
+CONTROL REGISTER(0x09).Flash mode is activated by the ENABLE REGISTER(0x0A),
+or by pulling the STROBE pin HIGH.
+LM3556 Flash can be controlled through sys/class/leds/flash/brightness file
+* if STROBE pin is enabled, below example control brightness only, and
+ON / OFF will be controlled by STROBE pin.
+
+Flash Example:
+OFF     : #echo 0 > sys/class/leds/flash/brightness
+93.75 mA: #echo 1 > sys/class/leds/flash/brightness
+... .....
+1500  mA: #echo 16 > sys/class/leds/flash/brightness
+
+TORCH MODE
+In Torch Mode, the current source(LED) is programmed via the CURRENT CONTROL
+REGISTER(0x09).Torch Mode is activated by the ENABLE REGISTER(0x0A) or by the
+hardware TORCH input.
+LM3556 torch can be controlled through sys/class/leds/torch/brightness file.
+* if TORCH pin is enabled, below example control brightness only,
+and ON / OFF will be controlled by TORCH pin.
+
+Torch Example:
+OFF     : #echo 0 > sys/class/leds/torch/brightness
+46.88 mA: #echo 1 > sys/class/leds/torch/brightness
+... .....
+375 mA  : #echo 8 > sys/class/leds/torch/brightness
+
+INDICATOR MODE
+Indicator pattern can be set through sys/class/leds/indicator/pattern file,
+and 4 patterns are pre-defined in indicator_pattern array.
+According to N-lank, Pulse time and N Period values, different pattern wiill
+be generated.If you want new patterns for your own device, change
+indicator_pattern array with your own values and INDIC_PATTERN_SIZE.
+Please refer datasheet for more detail about N-Blank, Pulse time and N Period.
+
+Indicator pattern example:
+pattern 0: #echo 0 > sys/class/leds/indicator/pattern
+....
+pattern 3: #echo 3 > sys/class/leds/indicator/pattern
+
+Indicator brightness can be controlled through
+sys/class/leds/indicator/brightness file.
+
+Example:
+OFF      : #echo 0 > sys/class/leds/indicator/brightness
+5.86 mA  : #echo 1 > sys/class/leds/indicator/brightness
+........
+46.875mA : #echo 8 > sys/class/leds/indicator/brightness
+
+Notes
+-----
+Driver expects it is registered using the i2c_board_info mechanism.
+To register the chip at address 0x63 on specific adapter, set the platform data
+according to include/linux/platform_data/leds-lm3556.h, set the i2c board info
+
+Example:
+	static struct i2c_board_info board_i2c_ch4[] __initdata = {
+		{
+			 I2C_BOARD_INFO(LM3556_NAME, 0x63),
+			 .platform_data = &lm3556_pdata,
+		 },
+	};
+
+and register it in the platform init function
+
+Example:
+	board_register_i2c_bus(4, 400,
+				board_i2c_ch4, ARRAY_SIZE(board_i2c_ch4));
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.txt
index c6eda18b15ef..e88ac3b60c08 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.txt
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ registered using the i2c_board_info mechanism.
 To register the chip at address 0x60 on adapter 0, set the platform data
 according to include/linux/leds-lp3944.h, set the i2c board info:
 
-	static struct i2c_board_info __initdata a910_i2c_board_info[] = {
+	static struct i2c_board_info a910_i2c_board_info[] __initdata = {
 		{
 			I2C_BOARD_INFO("lp3944", 0x60),
 			.platform_data = &a910_lp3944_leds,
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt
index c4d8d151e0fe..d08d8c179f85 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt
@@ -17,19 +17,26 @@ lp5521:channelx, where x is 0 .. 2
 All three channels can be also controlled using the engine micro programs.
 More details of the instructions can be found from the public data sheet.
 
-Control interface for the engines:
-x is 1 .. 3
-enginex_mode : disabled, load, run
-enginex_load : store program (visible only in engine load mode)
+LP5521 has the internal program memory for running various LED patterns.
+There are two ways to run LED patterns.
 
-Example (start to blink the channel 2 led):
-cd   /sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel2/device
-echo "load" > engine3_mode
-echo "037f4d0003ff6000" > engine3_load
-echo "run" > engine3_mode
+1) Legacy interface - enginex_mode and enginex_load
+  Control interface for the engines:
+  x is 1 .. 3
+  enginex_mode : disabled, load, run
+  enginex_load : store program (visible only in engine load mode)
 
-stop the engine:
-echo "disabled" > engine3_mode
+  Example (start to blink the channel 2 led):
+  cd   /sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel2/device
+  echo "load" > engine3_mode
+  echo "037f4d0003ff6000" > engine3_load
+  echo "run" > engine3_mode
+
+  To stop the engine:
+  echo "disabled" > engine3_mode
+
+2) Firmware interface - LP55xx common interface
+  For the details, please refer to 'firmware' section in leds-lp55xx.txt
 
 sysfs contains a selftest entry.
 The test communicates with the chip and checks that
@@ -43,17 +50,23 @@ Format: 10x mA i.e 10 means 1.0 mA
 example platform data:
 
 Note: chan_nr can have values between 0 and 2.
+The name of each channel can be configurable.
+If the name field is not defined, the default name will be set to 'xxxx:channelN'
+(XXXX : pdata->label or i2c client name, N : channel number)
 
-static struct lp5521_led_config lp5521_led_config[] = {
+static struct lp55xx_led_config lp5521_led_config[] = {
         {
+		.name = "red",
                 .chan_nr        = 0,
                 .led_current    = 50,
 		.max_current    = 130,
         }, {
+		.name = "green",
                 .chan_nr        = 1,
                 .led_current    = 0,
 		.max_current    = 130,
         }, {
+		.name = "blue",
                 .chan_nr        = 2,
                 .led_current    = 0,
 		.max_current    = 130,
@@ -75,10 +88,10 @@ static void lp5521_enable(bool state)
 	/* Control of chip enable signal */
 }
 
-static struct lp5521_platform_data lp5521_platform_data = {
+static struct lp55xx_platform_data lp5521_platform_data = {
         .led_config     = lp5521_led_config,
         .num_channels   = ARRAY_SIZE(lp5521_led_config),
-        .clock_mode     = LP5521_CLOCK_EXT,
+        .clock_mode     = LP55XX_CLOCK_EXT,
         .setup_resources   = lp5521_setup,
         .release_resources = lp5521_release,
         .enable            = lp5521_enable,
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt
index fad2feb8b7ce..5b3e91d4ac59 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt
@@ -10,28 +10,44 @@ Contact: Samu Onkalo (samu.p.onkalo-at-nokia.com)
 Description
 -----------
 LP5523 can drive up to 9 channels. Leds can be controlled directly via
-the led class control interface. Channels have generic names:
-lp5523:channelx where x is 0...8
+the led class control interface.
+The name of each channel is configurable in the platform data - name and label.
+There are three options to make the channel name.
 
-The chip provides 3 engines. Each engine can control channels without
-interaction from the main CPU. Details of the micro engine code can be found
-from the public data sheet. Leds can be muxed to different channels.
+a) Define the 'name' in the platform data
+To make specific channel name, then use 'name' platform data.
+/sys/class/leds/R1               (name: 'R1')
+/sys/class/leds/B1               (name: 'B1')
 
-Control interface for the engines:
-x is 1 .. 3
-enginex_mode : disabled, load, run
-enginex_load : microcode load (visible only in load mode)
-enginex_leds : led mux control (visible only in load mode)
+b) Use the 'label' with no 'name' field
+For one device name with channel number, then use 'label'.
+/sys/class/leds/RGB:channelN     (label: 'RGB', N: 0 ~ 8)
 
-cd /sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/device
-echo "load" > engine3_mode
-echo "9d80400004ff05ff437f0000" > engine3_load
-echo "111111111" > engine3_leds
-echo "run" > engine3_mode
+c) Default
+If both fields are NULL, 'lp5523' is used by default.
+/sys/class/leds/lp5523:channelN  (N: 0 ~ 8)
 
-sysfs contains a selftest entry. It measures each channel
-voltage level and checks if it looks reasonable. If the level is too high,
-the led is missing; if the level is too low, there is a short circuit.
+LP5523 has the internal program memory for running various LED patterns.
+There are two ways to run LED patterns.
+
+1) Legacy interface - enginex_mode, enginex_load and enginex_leds
+  Control interface for the engines:
+  x is 1 .. 3
+  enginex_mode : disabled, load, run
+  enginex_load : microcode load (visible only in load mode)
+  enginex_leds : led mux control (visible only in load mode)
+
+  cd /sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/device
+  echo "load" > engine3_mode
+  echo "9d80400004ff05ff437f0000" > engine3_load
+  echo "111111111" > engine3_leds
+  echo "run" > engine3_mode
+
+  To stop the engine:
+  echo "disabled" > engine3_mode
+
+2) Firmware interface - LP55xx common interface
+  For the details, please refer to 'firmware' section in leds-lp55xx.txt
 
 Selftest uses always the current from the platform data.
 
@@ -44,14 +60,15 @@ Example platform data:
 
 Note - chan_nr can have values between 0 and 8.
 
-static struct lp5523_led_config lp5523_led_config[] = {
+static struct lp55xx_led_config lp5523_led_config[] = {
         {
+		.name		= "D1",
                 .chan_nr        = 0,
                 .led_current    = 50,
 		.max_current    = 130,
         },
 ...
-        }, {
+        {
                 .chan_nr        = 8,
                 .led_current    = 50,
 		.max_current    = 130,
@@ -73,10 +90,10 @@ static void lp5523_enable(bool state)
 	/* Control chip enable signal */
 }
 
-static struct lp5523_platform_data lp5523_platform_data = {
+static struct lp55xx_platform_data lp5523_platform_data = {
         .led_config     = lp5523_led_config,
         .num_channels   = ARRAY_SIZE(lp5523_led_config),
-        .clock_mode     = LP5523_CLOCK_EXT,
+        .clock_mode     = LP55XX_CLOCK_EXT,
         .setup_resources   = lp5523_setup,
         .release_resources = lp5523_release,
         .enable            = lp5523_enable,
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5562.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5562.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5a823ff6b393
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5562.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+Kernel driver for LP5562
+========================
+
+* TI LP5562 LED Driver
+
+Author: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com>
+
+Description
+
+  LP5562 can drive up to 4 channels. R/G/B and White.
+  LEDs can be controlled directly via the led class control interface.
+
+  All four channels can be also controlled using the engine micro programs.
+  LP5562 has the internal program memory for running various LED patterns.
+  For the details, please refer to 'firmware' section in leds-lp55xx.txt
+
+Device attribute: engine_mux
+
+  3 Engines are allocated in LP5562, but the number of channel is 4.
+  Therefore each channel should be mapped to the engine number.
+  Value : RGB or W
+
+  This attribute is used for programming LED data with the firmware interface.
+  Unlike the LP5521/LP5523/55231, LP5562 has unique feature for the engine mux,
+  so additional sysfs is required.
+
+  LED Map
+  Red   ... Engine 1 (fixed)
+  Green ... Engine 2 (fixed)
+  Blue  ... Engine 3 (fixed)
+  White ... Engine 1 or 2 or 3 (selective)
+
+How to load the program data using engine_mux
+
+  Before loading the LP5562 program data, engine_mux should be written between
+  the engine selection and loading the firmware.
+  Engine mux has two different mode, RGB and W.
+  RGB is used for loading RGB program data, W is used for W program data.
+
+  For example, run blinking green channel pattern,
+  echo 2 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine     # 2 is for green channel
+  echo "RGB" > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/engine_mux    # engine mux for RGB
+  echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/loading
+  echo "4000600040FF6000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/data
+  echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/loading
+  echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
+
+  To run a blinking white pattern,
+  echo 1 or 2 or 3 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+  echo "W" > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/engine_mux
+  echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/loading
+  echo "4000600040FF6000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/data
+  echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/loading
+  echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
+
+How to load the predefined patterns
+
+  Please refer to 'leds-lp55xx.txt"
+
+Setting Current of Each Channel
+
+  Like LP5521 and LP5523/55231, LP5562 provides LED current settings.
+  The 'led_current' and 'max_current' are used.
+
+(Example of Platform data)
+
+To configure the platform specific data, lp55xx_platform_data structure is used.
+
+static struct lp55xx_led_config lp5562_led_config[] = {
+	{
+		.name 		= "R",
+		.chan_nr	= 0,
+		.led_current	= 20,
+		.max_current	= 40,
+	},
+	{
+		.name 		= "G",
+		.chan_nr	= 1,
+		.led_current	= 20,
+		.max_current	= 40,
+	},
+	{
+		.name 		= "B",
+		.chan_nr	= 2,
+		.led_current	= 20,
+		.max_current	= 40,
+	},
+	{
+		.name 		= "W",
+		.chan_nr	= 3,
+		.led_current	= 20,
+		.max_current	= 40,
+	},
+};
+
+static int lp5562_setup(void)
+{
+	/* setup HW resources */
+}
+
+static void lp5562_release(void)
+{
+	/* Release HW resources */
+}
+
+static void lp5562_enable(bool state)
+{
+	/* Control of chip enable signal */
+}
+
+static struct lp55xx_platform_data lp5562_platform_data = {
+        .led_config     = lp5562_led_config,
+        .num_channels   = ARRAY_SIZE(lp5562_led_config),
+        .setup_resources   = lp5562_setup,
+        .release_resources = lp5562_release,
+        .enable            = lp5562_enable,
+};
+
+If the current is set to 0 in the platform data, that channel is
+disabled and it is not visible in the sysfs.
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..82713ff92eb3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,186 @@
+LP5521/LP5523/LP55231/LP5562/LP8501 Common Driver
+=================================================
+
+Authors: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+LP5521, LP5523/55231, LP5562 and LP8501 have common features as below.
+
+  Register access via the I2C
+  Device initialization/deinitialization
+  Create LED class devices for multiple output channels
+  Device attributes for user-space interface
+  Program memory for running LED patterns
+
+The LP55xx common driver provides these features using exported functions.
+  lp55xx_init_device() / lp55xx_deinit_device()
+  lp55xx_register_leds() / lp55xx_unregister_leds()
+  lp55xx_regsister_sysfs() / lp55xx_unregister_sysfs()
+
+( Driver Structure Data )
+
+In lp55xx common driver, two different data structure is used.
+
+o lp55xx_led
+  control multi output LED channels such as led current, channel index.
+o lp55xx_chip
+  general chip control such like the I2C and platform data.
+
+For example, LP5521 has maximum 3 LED channels.
+LP5523/55231 has 9 output channels.
+
+lp55xx_chip for LP5521 ... lp55xx_led #1
+                           lp55xx_led #2
+                           lp55xx_led #3
+
+lp55xx_chip for LP5523 ... lp55xx_led #1
+                           lp55xx_led #2
+                                 .
+                                 .
+                           lp55xx_led #9
+
+( Chip Dependent Code )
+
+To support device specific configurations, special structure
+'lpxx_device_config' is used.
+
+  Maximum number of channels
+  Reset command, chip enable command
+  Chip specific initialization
+  Brightness control register access
+  Setting LED output current
+  Program memory address access for running patterns
+  Additional device specific attributes
+
+( Firmware Interface )
+
+LP55xx family devices have the internal program memory for running
+various LED patterns.
+This pattern data is saved as a file in the user-land or
+hex byte string is written into the memory through the I2C.
+LP55xx common driver supports the firmware interface.
+
+LP55xx chips have three program engines.
+To load and run the pattern, the programming sequence is following.
+  (1) Select an engine number (1/2/3)
+  (2) Mode change to load
+  (3) Write pattern data into selected area
+  (4) Mode change to run
+
+The LP55xx common driver provides simple interfaces as below.
+select_engine : Select which engine is used for running program
+run_engine    : Start program which is loaded via the firmware interface
+firmware      : Load program data
+
+For example, run blinking pattern in engine #1 of LP5521
+echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/loading
+echo "4000600040FF6000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/data
+echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/loading
+echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
+
+For example, run blinking pattern in engine #3 of LP55231
+echo 3 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp55231/loading
+echo "9d0740ff7e0040007e00a0010000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp55231/data
+echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp55231/loading
+echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
+
+To start blinking patterns in engine #2 and #3 simultaneously,
+for idx in 2 3
+do
+  echo $idx > /sys/class/leds/red/device/select_engine
+  sleep 0.1
+  echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/loading
+  echo "4000600040FF6000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/data
+  echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/loading
+done
+echo 1 > /sys/class/leds/red/device/run_engine
+
+Here is another example for LP5523.
+echo 2 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5523/loading
+echo "9d80400004ff05ff437f0000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5523/data
+echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5523/loading
+echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
+
+As soon as 'loading' is set to 0, registered callback is called.
+Inside the callback, the selected engine is loaded and memory is updated.
+To run programmed pattern, 'run_engine' attribute should be enabled.
+
+The pattern sqeuence of LP8501 is same as LP5523.
+However pattern data is specific.
+Ex 1) Engine 1 is used
+echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
+echo "9d0140ff7e0040007e00a001c000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/data
+echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
+echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
+
+Ex 2) Engine 2 and 3 are used at the same time
+echo 2 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+sleep 1
+echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
+echo "9d0140ff7e0040007e00a001c000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/data
+echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
+sleep 1
+echo 3 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+sleep 1
+echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
+echo "9d0340ff7e0040007e00a001c000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/data
+echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
+sleep 1
+echo 1 > /sys/class/leds/d1/device/run_engine
+
+( 'run_engine' and 'firmware_cb' )
+The sequence of running the program data is common.
+But each device has own specific register addresses for commands.
+To support this, 'run_engine' and 'firmware_cb' are configurable in each driver.
+run_engine  : Control the selected engine
+firmware_cb : The callback function after loading the firmware is done.
+              Chip specific commands for loading and updating program memory.
+
+( Predefined pattern data )
+
+Without the firmware interface, LP55xx driver provides another method for
+loading a LED pattern. That is 'predefined' pattern.
+A predefined pattern is defined in the platform data and load it(or them)
+via the sysfs if needed.
+To use the predefined pattern concept, 'patterns' and 'num_patterns' should be
+configured.
+
+  Example of predefined pattern data:
+
+  /* mode_1: blinking data */
+  static const u8 mode_1[] = {
+		0x40, 0x00, 0x60, 0x00, 0x40, 0xFF, 0x60, 0x00,
+		};
+
+  /* mode_2: always on */
+  static const u8 mode_2[] = { 0x40, 0xFF, };
+
+  struct lp55xx_predef_pattern board_led_patterns[] = {
+	{
+		.r = mode_1,
+		.size_r = ARRAY_SIZE(mode_1),
+	},
+	{
+		.b = mode_2,
+		.size_b = ARRAY_SIZE(mode_2),
+	},
+  }
+
+  struct lp55xx_platform_data lp5562_pdata = {
+  ...
+	.patterns      = board_led_patterns,
+	.num_patterns  = ARRAY_SIZE(board_led_patterns),
+  };
+
+Then, mode_1 and mode_2 can be run via through the sysfs.
+
+  echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/led_pattern    # red blinking LED pattern
+  echo 2 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/led_pattern    # blue LED always on
+
+To stop running pattern,
+  echo 0 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/led_pattern
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-oneshot.txt b/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-oneshot.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..07cd1fa41a3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-oneshot.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+One-shot LED Trigger
+====================
+
+This is a LED trigger useful for signaling the user of an event where there are
+no clear trap points to put standard led-on and led-off settings.  Using this
+trigger, the application needs only to signal the trigger when an event has
+happened, than the trigger turns the LED on and than keeps it off for a
+specified amount of time.
+
+This trigger is meant to be usable both for sporadic and dense events.  In the
+first case, the trigger produces a clear single controlled blink for each
+event, while in the latter it keeps blinking at constant rate, as to signal
+that the events are arriving continuously.
+
+A one-shot LED only stays in a constant state when there are no events.  An
+additional "invert" property specifies if the LED has to stay off (normal) or
+on (inverted) when not rearmed.
+
+The trigger can be activated from user space on led class devices as shown
+below:
+
+  echo oneshot > trigger
+
+This adds the following sysfs attributes to the LED:
+
+  delay_on - specifies for how many milliseconds the LED has to stay at
+             LED_FULL brightness after it has been armed.
+             Default to 100 ms.
+
+  delay_off - specifies for how many milliseconds the LED has to stay at
+              LED_OFF brightness after it has been armed.
+              Default to 100 ms.
+
+  invert - reverse the blink logic.  If set to 0 (default) blink on for delay_on
+           ms, then blink off for delay_off ms, leaving the LED normally off.  If
+           set to 1, blink off for delay_off ms, then blink on for delay_on ms,
+           leaving the LED normally on.
+           Setting this value also immediately change the LED state.
+
+  shot - write any non-empty string to signal an events, this starts a blink
+         sequence if not already running.
+
+Example use-case: network devices, initialization:
+
+  echo oneshot > trigger # set trigger for this led
+  echo 33 > delay_on     # blink at 1 / (33 + 33) Hz on continuous traffic
+  echo 33 > delay_off
+
+interface goes up:
+
+  echo 1 > invert # set led as normally-on, turn the led on
+
+packet received/transmitted:
+
+  echo 1 > shot # led starts blinking, ignored if already blinking
+
+interface goes down
+
+  echo 0 > invert # set led as normally-off, turn the led off
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-transient.txt b/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-transient.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3bd38b487df1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-transient.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+LED Transient Trigger
+=====================
+
+The leds timer trigger does not currently have an interface to activate
+a one shot timer. The current support allows for setting two timers, one for
+specifying how long a state to be on, and the second for how long the state
+to be off. The delay_on value specifies the time period an LED should stay
+in on state, followed by a delay_off value that specifies how long the LED
+should stay in off state. The on and off cycle repeats until the trigger
+gets deactivated. There is no provision for one time activation to implement
+features that require an on or off state to be held just once and then stay in
+the original state forever.
+
+Without one shot timer interface, user space can still use timer trigger to
+set a timer to hold a state, however when user space application crashes or
+goes away without deactivating the timer, the hardware will be left in that
+state permanently.
+
+As a specific example of this use-case, let's look at vibrate feature on
+phones. Vibrate function on phones is implemented using PWM pins on SoC or
+PMIC. There is a need to activate one shot timer to control the vibrate
+feature, to prevent user space crashes leaving the phone in vibrate mode
+permanently causing the battery to drain.
+
+Transient trigger addresses the need for one shot timer activation. The
+transient trigger can be enabled and disabled just like the other leds
+triggers.
+
+When an led class device driver registers itself, it can specify all leds
+triggers it supports and a default trigger. During registration, activation
+routine for the default trigger gets called. During registration of an led
+class device, the LED state does not change.
+
+When the driver unregisters, deactivation routine for the currently active
+trigger will be called, and LED state is changed to LED_OFF.
+
+Driver suspend changes the LED state to LED_OFF and resume doesn't change
+the state. Please note that there is no explicit interaction between the
+suspend and resume actions and the currently enabled trigger. LED state
+changes are suspended while the driver is in suspend state. Any timers
+that are active at the time driver gets suspended, continue to run, without
+being able to actually change the LED state. Once driver is resumed, triggers
+start functioning again.
+
+LED state changes are controlled using brightness which is a common led
+class device property. When brightness is set to 0 from user space via
+echo 0 > brightness, it will result in deactivating the current trigger.
+
+Transient trigger uses standard register and unregister interfaces. During
+trigger registration, for each led class device that specifies this trigger
+as its default trigger, trigger activation routine will get called. During
+registration, the LED state does not change, unless there is another trigger
+active, in which case LED state changes to LED_OFF.
+
+During trigger unregistration, LED state gets changed to LED_OFF.
+
+Transient trigger activation routine doesn't change the LED state. It
+creates its properties and does its initialization. Transient trigger
+deactivation routine, will cancel any timer that is active before it cleans
+up and removes the properties it created. It will restore the LED state to
+non-transient state. When driver gets suspended, irrespective of the transient
+state, the LED state changes to LED_OFF.
+
+Transient trigger can be enabled and disabled from user space on led class
+devices, that support this trigger as shown below:
+
+echo transient > trigger
+echo none > trigger
+
+NOTE: Add a new property trigger state to control the state.
+
+This trigger exports three properties, activate, state, and duration. When
+transient trigger is activated these properties are set to default values.
+
+- duration allows setting timer value in msecs. The initial value is 0.
+- activate allows activating and deactivating the timer specified by
+  duration as needed. The initial and default value is 0.  This will allow
+  duration to be set after trigger activation.
+- state allows user to specify a transient state to be held for the specified
+  duration.
+
+	activate - one shot timer activate mechanism.
+		1 when activated, 0 when deactivated.
+		default value is zero when transient trigger is enabled,
+		to allow duration to be set.
+
+		activate state indicates a timer with a value of specified
+		duration running.
+		deactivated state indicates that there is no active timer
+		running.
+
+	duration - one shot timer value. When activate is set, duration value
+		is used to start a timer that runs once. This value doesn't
+		get changed by the trigger unless user does a set via
+		echo new_value > duration
+
+	state - transient state to be held. It has two values 0 or 1. 0 maps
+		to LED_OFF and 1 maps to LED_FULL. The specified state is
+		held for the duration of the one shot timer and then the
+		state gets changed to the non-transient state which is the
+		inverse of transient state.
+		If state = LED_FULL, when the timer runs out the state will
+		go back to LED_OFF.
+		If state = LED_OFF, when the timer runs out the state will
+		go back to LED_FULL.
+		Please note that current LED state is not checked prior to
+		changing the state to the specified state.
+		Driver could map these values to inverted depending on the
+		default states it defines for the LED in its brightness_set()
+		interface which is called from the led brightness_set()
+		interfaces to control the LED state.
+
+When timer expires activate goes back to deactivated state, duration is left
+at the set value to be used when activate is set at a future time. This will
+allow user app to set the time once and activate it to run it once for the
+specified value as needed. When timer expires, state is restored to the
+non-transient state which is the inverse of the transient state.
+
+	echo 1 > activate - starts timer = duration when duration is not 0.
+	echo 0 > activate - cancels currently running timer.
+	echo n > duration - stores timer value to be used upon next
+                            activate. Currently active timer if
+                            any, continues to run for the specified time.
+	echo 0 > duration - stores timer value to be used upon next
+                            activate. Currently active timer if any,
+                            continues to run for the specified time.
+	echo 1 > state    - stores desired transient state LED_FULL to be
+			    held for the specified duration.
+	echo 0 > state    - stores desired transient state LED_OFF to be
+			    held for the specified duration.
+
+What is not supported:
+======================
+- Timer activation is one shot and extending and/or shortening the timer
+  is not supported.
+
+Example use-case 1:
+	echo transient > trigger
+	echo n > duration
+	echo 1 > state
+repeat the following step as needed:
+	echo 1 > activate - start timer = duration to run once
+	echo 1 > activate - start timer = duration to run once
+	echo none > trigger
+
+This trigger is intended to be used for for the following example use cases:
+ - Control of vibrate (phones, tablets etc.) hardware by user space app.
+ - Use of LED by user space app as activity indicator.
+ - Use of LED by user space app as a kind of watchdog indicator -- as
+       long as the app is alive, it can keep the LED illuminated, if it dies
+       the LED will be extinguished automatically.
+ - Use by any user space app that needs a transient GPIO output.
diff --git a/Documentation/lockstat.txt b/Documentation/lockstat.txt
index cef00d42ed5b..dd2f7b26ca30 100644
--- a/Documentation/lockstat.txt
+++ b/Documentation/lockstat.txt
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ that had to wait on lock acquisition.
 
  - CONFIGURATION
 
-Lock statistics are enabled via CONFIG_LOCK_STATS.
+Lock statistics are enabled via CONFIG_LOCK_STAT.
 
  - USAGE
 
diff --git a/Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt b/Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt
index 97d45f276fe6..eaf32a1fd0b1 100644
--- a/Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt
+++ b/Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt
@@ -80,8 +80,6 @@ Valid names are:
   /dev/sdd: -> 0x0830 (forth SCSI disk)
   /dev/sde: -> 0x0840 (fifth SCSI disk)
   /dev/fd : -> 0x0200 (floppy disk)
-  /dev/xda: -> 0x0c00 (first XT disk, unused in Linux/m68k)
-  /dev/xdb: -> 0x0c40 (second XT disk, unused in Linux/m68k)
 
   The name must be followed by a decimal number, that stands for the
 partition number. Internally, the value of the number is just
diff --git a/Documentation/magic-number.txt b/Documentation/magic-number.txt
index 82761a31d64d..76d80a64bbe1 100644
--- a/Documentation/magic-number.txt
+++ b/Documentation/magic-number.txt
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ SLAB_C_MAGIC          0x4f17a36d  kmem_cache        mm/slab.c
 COW_MAGIC             0x4f4f4f4d  cow_header_v1     arch/um/drivers/ubd_user.c
 I810_CARD_MAGIC       0x5072696E  i810_card         sound/oss/i810_audio.c
 TRIDENT_CARD_MAGIC    0x5072696E  trident_card      sound/oss/trident.c
-ROUTER_MAGIC          0x524d4157  wan_device        include/linux/wanrouter.h
+ROUTER_MAGIC          0x524d4157  wan_device        [in wanrouter.h pre 3.9]
 SCC_MAGIC             0x52696368  gs_port           drivers/char/scc.h
 SAVEKMSG_MAGIC1       0x53415645  savekmsg          arch/*/amiga/config.c
 GDA_MAGIC             0x58464552  gda               arch/mips/include/asm/sn/gda.h
diff --git a/Documentation/mca.txt b/Documentation/mca.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index dfd130c2207d..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/mca.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,313 +0,0 @@
-i386 Micro Channel Architecture Support
-=======================================
-
-MCA support is enabled using the CONFIG_MCA define.  A machine with a MCA
-bus will have the kernel variable MCA_bus set, assuming the BIOS feature
-bits are set properly (see arch/i386/boot/setup.S for information on
-how this detection is done).
-
-Adapter Detection
-=================
-
-The ideal MCA adapter detection is done through the use of the
-Programmable Option Select registers.  Generic functions for doing
-this have been added in include/linux/mca.h and arch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c.
-Everything needed to detect adapters and read (and write) configuration
-information is there.  A number of MCA-specific drivers already use
-this.  The typical probe code looks like the following:
-
-	#include <linux/mca.h>
-
-	unsigned char pos2, pos3, pos4, pos5;
-	struct net_device* dev;
-	int slot;
-
-	if( MCA_bus ) {
-		slot = mca_find_adapter( ADAPTER_ID, 0 );
-		if( slot == MCA_NOTFOUND ) {
-			return -ENODEV;
-		}
-		/* optional - see below */
-		mca_set_adapter_name( slot, "adapter name & description" );
-		mca_set_adapter_procfn( slot, dev_getinfo, dev );
-
-		/* read the POS registers.  Most devices only use 2 and 3 */
-		pos2 = mca_read_stored_pos( slot, 2 );
-		pos3 = mca_read_stored_pos( slot, 3 );
-		pos4 = mca_read_stored_pos( slot, 4 );
-		pos5 = mca_read_stored_pos( slot, 5 );
-	} else {
-		return -ENODEV;
-	}
-
-	/* extract configuration from pos[2345] and set everything up */
-
-Loadable modules should modify this to test that the specified IRQ and
-IO ports (plus whatever other stuff) match.  See 3c523.c for example
-code (actually, smc-mca.c has a slightly more complex example that can
-handle a list of adapter ids).
-
-Keep in mind that devices should never directly access the POS registers
-(via inb(), outb(), etc).  While it's generally safe, there is a small
-potential for blowing up hardware when it's done at the wrong time.
-Furthermore, accessing a POS register disables a device temporarily.
-This is usually okay during startup, but do _you_ want to rely on it?
-During initial configuration, mca_init() reads all the POS registers
-into memory.  mca_read_stored_pos() accesses that data.  mca_read_pos()
-and mca_write_pos() are also available for (safer) direct POS access,
-but their use is _highly_ discouraged.  mca_write_pos() is particularly
-dangerous, as it is possible for adapters to be put in inconsistent
-states (i.e. sharing IO address, etc) and may result in crashes, toasted
-hardware, and blindness.
-
-User level drivers (such as the AGX X server) can use /proc/mca/pos to
-find adapters (see below).
-
-Some MCA adapters can also be detected via the usual ISA-style device
-probing (many SCSI adapters, for example).  This sort of thing is highly
-discouraged.  Perfectly good information is available telling you what's
-there, so there's no excuse for messing with random IO ports.  However,
-we MCA people still appreciate any ISA-style driver that will work with
-our hardware.  You take what you can get...
-
-Level-Triggered Interrupts
-==========================
-
-Because MCA uses level-triggered interrupts, a few problems arise with
-what might best be described as the ISA mindset and its effects on
-drivers.  These sorts of problems are expected to become less common as
-more people use shared IRQs on PCI machines.
-
-In general, an interrupt must be acknowledged not only at the ICU (which
-is done automagically by the kernel), but at the device level.  In
-particular, IRQ 0 must be reset after a timer interrupt (now done in
-arch/x86/kernel/time.c) or the first timer interrupt hangs the system.
-There were also problems with the 1.3.x floppy drivers, but that seems
-to have been fixed.
-
-IRQs are also shareable, and most MCA-specific devices should be coded
-with shared IRQs in mind.
-
-/proc/mca
-=========
-
-/proc/mca is a directory containing various files for adapters and
-other stuff.
-
-	/proc/mca/pos		Straight listing of POS registers
-	/proc/mca/slot[1-8]	Information on adapter in specific slot
-	/proc/mca/video		Same for integrated video
-	/proc/mca/scsi		Same for integrated SCSI
-	/proc/mca/machine	Machine information
-
-See Appendix A for a sample.
-
-Device drivers can easily add their own information function for
-specific slots (including integrated ones) via the
-mca_set_adapter_procfn() call.  Drivers that support this are ESDI, IBM
-SCSI, and 3c523.  If a device is also a module, make sure that the proc
-function is removed in the module cleanup.  This will require storing
-the slot information in a private structure somewhere.  See the 3c523
-driver for details.
-
-Your typical proc function will look something like this:
-
-	static int
-	dev_getinfo( char* buf, int slot, void* d ) {
-		struct net_device* dev = (struct net_device*) d;
-		int len = 0;
-
-		len += sprintf( buf+len, "Device: %s\n", dev->name );
-		len += sprintf( buf+len, "IRQ: %d\n", dev->irq );
-		len += sprintf( buf+len, "IO Port: %#lx-%#lx\n", ... );
-		...
-
-		return len;
-	}
-
-Some of the standard MCA information will already be printed, so don't
-bother repeating it.  Don't try putting in more than 3K of information.
-
-Enable this function with:
-	mca_set_adapter_procfn( slot, dev_getinfo, dev );
-
-Disable it with:
-	mca_set_adapter_procfn( slot, NULL, NULL );
-
-It is also recommended that, even if you don't write a proc function, to
-set the name of the adapter (i.e. "PS/2 ESDI Controller") via
-mca_set_adapter_name( int slot, char* name ).
-
-MCA Device Drivers
-==================
-
-Currently, there are a number of MCA-specific device drivers.
-
-1) PS/2 SCSI
-	drivers/scsi/ibmmca.c
-	drivers/scsi/ibmmca.h
-   The driver for the IBM SCSI subsystem.  Includes both integrated
-   controllers and adapter cards.  May require command-line arg
-   "ibmmcascsi=io_port" to force detection of an adapter.  If you have a
-   machine with a front-panel display (i.e. model 95), you can use
-   "ibmmcascsi=display" to enable a drive activity indicator.
-
-2) 3c523
-	drivers/net/3c523.c
-	drivers/net/3c523.h
-   3Com 3c523 Etherlink/MC ethernet driver.
-
-3) SMC Ultra/MCA and IBM Adapter/A
-	drivers/net/smc-mca.c
-	drivers/net/smc-mca.h
-	Driver for the MCA version of the SMC Ultra and various other
-	OEM'ed and work-alike cards (Elite, Adapter/A, etc).
-
-4) NE/2
-	driver/net/ne2.c
-	driver/net/ne2.h
-	The NE/2 is the MCA version of the NE2000.  This may not work
-	with clones that have a different adapter id than the original
-	NE/2.
-
-5) Future Domain MCS-600/700, OEM'd IBM Fast SCSI Adapter/A and
-   Reply Sound Blaster/SCSI (SCSI part)
-	Better support for these cards than the driver for ISA.
-   Supports multiple cards with IRQ sharing.
-
-Also added boot time option of scsi-probe, which can do reordering of
-SCSI host adapters. This will direct the kernel on the order which
-SCSI adapter should be detected. Example:
-  scsi-probe=ibmmca,fd_mcs,adaptec1542,buslogic
-
-The serial drivers were modified to support the extended IO port range
-of the typical MCA system (also #ifdef CONFIG_MCA).
-
-The following devices work with existing drivers:
-1) Token-ring
-2) Future Domain SCSI (MCS-600, MCS-700, not MCS-350, OEM'ed IBM SCSI)
-3) Adaptec 1640 SCSI (using the aha1542 driver)
-4) Bustek/Buslogic SCSI (various)
-5) Probably all Arcnet cards.
-6) Some, possibly all, MCA IDE controllers.
-7) 3Com 3c529 (MCA version of 3c509) (patched)
-
-8) Intel EtherExpressMC  (patched version)
-   You need to have CONFIG_MCA defined to have EtherExpressMC support.
-9) Reply Sound Blaster/SCSI (SB part) (patched version)
-
-Bugs & Other Weirdness
-======================
-
-NMIs tend to occur with MCA machines because of various hardware
-weirdness, bus timeouts, and many other non-critical things.  Some basic
-code to handle them (inspired by the NetBSD MCA code) has been added to
-detect the guilty device, but it's pretty incomplete.  If NMIs are a
-persistent problem (on some model 70 or 80s, they occur every couple
-shell commands), the CONFIG_IGNORE_NMI flag will take care of that.
-
-Various Pentium machines have had serious problems with the FPU test in
-bugs.h.  Basically, the machine hangs after the HLT test.  This occurs,
-as far as we know, on the Pentium-equipped 85s, 95s, and some PC Servers.
-The PCI/MCA PC 750s are fine as far as I can tell.  The ``mca-pentium''
-boot-prompt flag will disable the FPU bug check if this is a problem
-with your machine.
-
-The model 80 has a raft of problems that are just too weird and unique
-to get into here.  Some people have no trouble while others have nothing
-but problems.  I'd suspect some problems are related to the age of the
-average 80 and accompanying hardware deterioration, although others
-are definitely design problems with the hardware.  Among the problems
-include SCSI controller problems, ESDI controller problems, and serious
-screw-ups in the floppy controller.  Oh, and the parallel port is also
-pretty flaky.  There were about 5 or 6 different model 80 motherboards
-produced to fix various obscure problems.  As far as I know, it's pretty
-much impossible to tell which bugs a particular model 80 has (other than
-triggering them, that is).
-
-Drivers are required for some MCA memory adapters.  If you're suddenly
-short a few megs of RAM, this might be the reason.  The (I think) Enhanced
-Memory Adapter commonly found on the model 70 is one.  There's a very
-alpha driver floating around, but it's pretty ugly (disassembled from
-the DOS driver, actually).  See the MCA Linux web page (URL below)
-for more current memory info.
-
-The Thinkpad 700 and 720 will work, but various components are either
-non-functional, flaky, or we don't know anything about them.  The
-graphics controller is supposed to be some WD, but we can't get things
-working properly.  The PCMCIA slots don't seem to work.  Ditto for APM.
-The serial ports work, but detection seems to be flaky.
-
-Credits
-=======
-A whole pile of people have contributed to the MCA code.  I'd include
-their names here, but I don't have a list handy.  Check the MCA Linux
-home page (URL below) for a perpetually out-of-date list.
-
-=====================================================================
-MCA Linux Home Page: http://www.dgmicro.com/mca/
-
-Christophe Beauregard
-chrisb@truespectra.com
-cpbeaure@calum.csclub.uwaterloo.ca
-
-=====================================================================
-Appendix A: Sample /proc/mca
-
-This is from my model 8595.  Slot 1 contains the standard IBM SCSI
-adapter, slot 3 is an Adaptec AHA-1640, slot 5 is a XGA-1 video adapter,
-and slot 7 is the 3c523 Etherlink/MC.
-
-/proc/mca/machine:
-Model Id: 0xf8
-Submodel Id: 0x14
-BIOS Revision: 0x5
-
-/proc/mca/pos:
-Slot 1: ff 8e f1 fc a0 ff ff ff  IBM SCSI Adapter w/Cache
-Slot 2: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff  
-Slot 3: 1f 0f 81 3b bf b6 ff ff  
-Slot 4: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff  
-Slot 5: db 8f 1d 5e fd c0 00 00  
-Slot 6: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff  
-Slot 7: 42 60 ff 08 ff ff ff ff  3Com 3c523 Etherlink/MC
-Slot 8: ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff  
-Video : ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff  
-SCSI  : ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff  
-
-/proc/mca/slot1:
-Slot: 1
-Adapter Name: IBM SCSI Adapter w/Cache
-Id: 8eff
-Enabled: Yes
-POS: ff 8e f1 fc a0 ff ff ff 
-Subsystem PUN: 7
-Detected at boot: Yes
-
-/proc/mca/slot3:
-Slot: 3
-Adapter Name: Unknown
-Id: 0f1f
-Enabled: Yes
-POS: 1f 0f 81 3b bf b6 ff ff 
-
-/proc/mca/slot5:
-Slot: 5
-Adapter Name: Unknown
-Id: 8fdb
-Enabled: Yes
-POS: db 8f 1d 5e fd c0 00 00 
-
-/proc/mca/slot7:
-Slot: 7
-Adapter Name: 3Com 3c523 Etherlink/MC
-Id: 6042
-Enabled: Yes
-POS: 42 60 ff 08 ff ff ff ff 
-Revision: 0xe
-IRQ: 9
-IO Address: 0x3300-0x3308
-Memory: 0xd8000-0xdbfff
-Transceiver: External
-Device: eth0
-Hardware Address: 02 60 8c 45 c4 2a
diff --git a/Documentation/md.txt b/Documentation/md.txt
index 993fba37b7d1..fbb2fcbf16b6 100644
--- a/Documentation/md.txt
+++ b/Documentation/md.txt
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ device to add.
 The array is started with the RUN_ARRAY ioctl.
 
 Once started, new devices can be added.  They should have an
-appropriate superblock written to them, and then passed be in with
+appropriate superblock written to them, and then be passed in with
 ADD_NEW_DISK.
 
 Devices that have failed or are not yet active can be detached from an
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Specific Rules that apply to format-0 super block arrays, and
 -------------------------------------------------------------
 
 An array can be 'created' by describing the array (level, chunksize
-etc) in a SET_ARRAY_INFO ioctl.  This must has major_version==0 and
+etc) in a SET_ARRAY_INFO ioctl.  This must have major_version==0 and
 raid_disks != 0.
 
 Then uninitialized devices can be added with ADD_NEW_DISK.  The
@@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Each directory contains:
       offset
         This gives the location in the device (in sectors from the
         start) where data from the array will be stored.  Any part of
-        the device before this offset us not touched, unless it is
+        the device before this offset is not touched, unless it is
         used for storing metadata (Formats 1.1 and 1.2).
 
       size
@@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Each directory contains:
         When the device is not 'in_sync', this records the number of
 	sectors from the start of the device which are known to be
 	correct.  This is normally zero, but during a recovery
-	operation is will steadily increase, and if the recovery is
+	operation it will steadily increase, and if the recovery is
 	interrupted, restoring this value can cause recovery to
 	avoid repeating the earlier blocks.  With v1.x metadata, this
 	value is saved and restored automatically.
@@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ Each directory contains:
 
 
 
-An active md device will also contain and entry for each active device
+An active md device will also contain an entry for each active device
 in the array.  These are named
 
     rdNN
@@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ will show 'in_sync' on every line.
 
 
 
-Active md devices for levels that support data redundancy (1,4,5,6)
+Active md devices for levels that support data redundancy (1,4,5,6,10)
 also have
 
    sync_action
@@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ also have
                        failed/missing device
        idle          - nothing is happening
        check         - A full check of redundancy was requested and is
-                       happening.  This reads all block and checks
+                       happening.  This reads all blocks and checks
                        them. A repair may also happen for some raid
                        levels.
        repair        - A full check and repair is happening.  This is
@@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ also have
 
    degraded
       This contains a count of the number of devices by which the
-      arrays is degraded.  So an optimal array with show '0'.  A
+      arrays is degraded.  So an optimal array will show '0'.  A
       single failed/missing drive will show '1', etc.
       This file responds to select/poll, any increase or decrease
       in the count of missing devices will trigger an event.
@@ -566,13 +566,6 @@ also have
      when it reaches the current sync_max (below) and possibly at
      other times.
 
-   sync_max
-     This is a number of sectors at which point a resync/recovery
-     process will pause.  When a resync is active, the value can
-     only ever be increased, never decreased.  The value of 'max'
-     effectively disables the limit.
-
-
    sync_speed
      This shows the current actual speed, in K/sec, of the current
      sync_action.  It is averaged over the last 30 seconds.
@@ -593,6 +586,12 @@ also have
      that number to reach sync_max.  Then you can either increase
      "sync_max", or can write 'idle' to "sync_action".
 
+     The value of 'max' for "sync_max" effectively disables the limit.
+     When a resync is active, the value can only ever be increased,
+     never decreased.
+     The value of '0' is the minimum for "sync_min".
+
+
 
 Each active md device may also have attributes specific to the
 personality module that manages it.
diff --git a/Documentation/media-framework.txt b/Documentation/media-framework.txt
index 3a0f879533ce..f552a75c0e70 100644
--- a/Documentation/media-framework.txt
+++ b/Documentation/media-framework.txt
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Abstract media device model
 
 Discovering a device internal topology, and configuring it at runtime, is one
 of the goals of the media framework. To achieve this, hardware devices are
-modeled as an oriented graph of building blocks called entities connected
+modelled as an oriented graph of building blocks called entities connected
 through pads.
 
 An entity is a basic media hardware building block. It can correspond to
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ connected to another pad through an enabled link
 	media_entity_find_link(struct media_pad *source,
 			       struct media_pad *sink);
 
-	media_entity_remote_source(struct media_pad *pad);
+	media_entity_remote_pad(struct media_pad *pad);
 
 Refer to the kerneldoc documentation for more information.
 
@@ -335,6 +335,9 @@ the media_entity pipe field.
 Calls to media_entity_pipeline_start() can be nested. The pipeline pointer must
 be identical for all nested calls to the function.
 
+media_entity_pipeline_start() may return an error. In that case, it will
+clean up any of the changes it did by itself.
+
 When stopping the stream, drivers must notify the entities with
 
 	media_entity_pipeline_stop(struct media_entity *entity);
@@ -351,3 +354,19 @@ If other operations need to be disallowed on streaming entities (such as
 changing entities configuration parameters) drivers can explicitly check the
 media_entity stream_count field to find out if an entity is streaming. This
 operation must be done with the media_device graph_mutex held.
+
+
+Link validation
+---------------
+
+Link validation is performed by media_entity_pipeline_start() for any
+entity which has sink pads in the pipeline. The
+media_entity::link_validate() callback is used for that purpose. In
+link_validate() callback, entity driver should check that the properties of
+the source pad of the connected entity and its own sink pad match. It is up
+to the type of the entity (and in the end, the properties of the hardware)
+what matching actually means.
+
+Subsystems should facilitate link validation by providing subsystem specific
+helper functions to provide easy access for commonly needed information, and
+in the end provide a way to use driver-specific callbacks.
diff --git a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
index 2759f7c188f0..c8c42e64e953 100644
--- a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
@@ -251,12 +251,13 @@ And there are a number of things that _must_ or _must_not_ be assumed:
 
      And for:
 
-	*A = X; Y = *A;
+	*A = X; *(A + 4) = Y;
 
-     we may get either of:
+     we may get any of:
 
-	STORE *A = X; Y = LOAD *A;
-	STORE *A = Y = X;
+	STORE *A = X; STORE *(A + 4) = Y;
+	STORE *(A + 4) = Y; STORE *A = X;
+	STORE {*A, *(A + 4) } = {X, Y};
 
 
 =========================
@@ -530,9 +531,10 @@ dependency barrier to make it work correctly.  Consider the following bit of
 code:
 
 	q = &a;
-	if (p)
+	if (p) {
+		<data dependency barrier>
 		q = &b;
-	<data dependency barrier>
+	}
 	x = *q;
 
 This will not have the desired effect because there is no actual data
@@ -541,9 +543,10 @@ attempting to predict the outcome in advance.  In such a case what's actually
 required is:
 
 	q = &a;
-	if (p)
+	if (p) {
+		<read barrier>
 		q = &b;
-	<read barrier>
+	}
 	x = *q;
 
 
@@ -1684,6 +1687,7 @@ explicit lock operations, described later).  These include:
 
 	xchg();
 	cmpxchg();
+	atomic_xchg();
 	atomic_cmpxchg();
 	atomic_inc_return();
 	atomic_dec_return();
diff --git a/Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.txt b/Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f4ad9a7d0f4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+TI EMIF SDRAM Controller Driver:
+
+Author
+========
+Aneesh V <aneesh@ti.com>
+
+Location
+============
+driver/memory/emif.c
+
+Supported SoCs:
+===================
+TI OMAP44xx
+TI OMAP54xx
+
+Menuconfig option:
+==========================
+Device Drivers
+	Memory devices
+		Texas Instruments EMIF driver
+
+Description
+===========
+This driver is for the EMIF module available in Texas Instruments
+SoCs. EMIF is an SDRAM controller that, based on its revision,
+supports one or more of DDR2, DDR3, and LPDDR2 SDRAM protocols.
+This driver takes care of only LPDDR2 memories presently. The
+functions of the driver includes re-configuring AC timing
+parameters and other settings during frequency, voltage and
+temperature changes
+
+Platform Data (see include/linux/platform_data/emif_plat.h):
+=====================================================================
+DDR device details and other board dependent and SoC dependent
+information can be passed through platform data (struct emif_platform_data)
+- DDR device details: 'struct ddr_device_info'
+- Device AC timings: 'struct lpddr2_timings' and 'struct lpddr2_min_tck'
+- Custom configurations: customizable policy options through
+  'struct emif_custom_configs'
+- IP revision
+- PHY type
+
+Interface to the external world:
+================================
+EMIF driver registers notifiers for voltage and frequency changes
+affecting EMIF and takes appropriate actions when these are invoked.
+- freq_pre_notify_handling()
+- freq_post_notify_handling()
+- volt_notify_handling()
+
+Debugfs
+========
+The driver creates two debugfs entries per device.
+- regcache_dump : dump of register values calculated and saved for all
+  frequencies used so far.
+- mr4 : last polled value of MR4 register in the LPDDR2 device. MR4
+  indicates the current temperature level of the device.
diff --git a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt
index 8f485d72cf25..58340d50f8a6 100644
--- a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt
+++ b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt
@@ -161,8 +161,9 @@ a recent addition and not present on older kernels.
 		    in the memory block.
 'state'           : read-write
                     at read:  contains online/offline state of memory.
-                    at write: user can specify "online", "offline" command
-                    which will be performed on al sections in the block.
+                    at write: user can specify "online_kernel",
+                    "online_movable", "online", "offline" command
+                    which will be performed on all sections in the block.
 'phys_device'     : read-only: designed to show the name of physical memory
                     device.  This is not well implemented now.
 'removable'       : read-only: contains an integer value indicating
@@ -209,13 +210,15 @@ If memory device is found, memory hotplug code will be called.
 
 4.2 Notify memory hot-add event by hand
 ------------
-In some environments, especially virtualized environment, firmware will not
-notify memory hotplug event to the kernel. For such environment, "probe"
-interface is supported. This interface depends on CONFIG_ARCH_MEMORY_PROBE.
+On powerpc, the firmware does not notify a memory hotplug event to the kernel.
+Therefore, "probe" interface is supported to notify the event to the kernel.
+This interface depends on CONFIG_ARCH_MEMORY_PROBE.
 
-Now, CONFIG_ARCH_MEMORY_PROBE is supported only by powerpc but it does not
-contain highly architecture codes. Please add config if you need "probe"
-interface.
+CONFIG_ARCH_MEMORY_PROBE is supported on powerpc only. On x86, this config
+option is disabled by default since ACPI notifies a memory hotplug event to
+the kernel, which performs its hotplug operation as the result. Please
+enable this option if you need the "probe" interface for testing purposes
+on x86.
 
 Probe interface is located at
 /sys/devices/system/memory/probe
@@ -255,6 +258,17 @@ For onlining, you have to write "online" to the section's state file as:
 
 % echo online > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
 
+This onlining will not change the ZONE type of the target memory section,
+If the memory section is in ZONE_NORMAL, you can change it to ZONE_MOVABLE:
+
+% echo online_movable > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
+(NOTE: current limit: this memory section must be adjacent to ZONE_MOVABLE)
+
+And if the memory section is in ZONE_MOVABLE, you can change it to ZONE_NORMAL:
+
+% echo online_kernel > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
+(NOTE: current limit: this memory section must be adjacent to ZONE_NORMAL)
+
 After this, section memoryXXX's state will be 'online' and the amount of
 available memory will be increased.
 
@@ -341,7 +355,7 @@ Need more implementation yet....
 --------------------------------
 8. Memory hotplug event notifier
 --------------------------------
-Memory hotplug has event notifer. There are 6 types of notification.
+Memory hotplug has event notifier. There are 6 types of notification.
 
 MEMORY_GOING_ONLINE
   Generated before new memory becomes available in order to be able to
@@ -377,15 +391,21 @@ The third argument is passed by pointer of struct memory_notify.
 struct memory_notify {
        unsigned long start_pfn;
        unsigned long nr_pages;
+       int status_change_nid_normal;
+       int status_change_nid_high;
        int status_change_nid;
 }
 
 start_pfn is start_pfn of online/offline memory.
 nr_pages is # of pages of online/offline memory.
-status_change_nid is set node id when N_HIGH_MEMORY of nodemask is (will be)
+status_change_nid_normal is set node id when N_NORMAL_MEMORY of nodemask
+is (will be) set/clear, if this is -1, then nodemask status is not changed.
+status_change_nid_high is set node id when N_HIGH_MEMORY of nodemask
+is (will be) set/clear, if this is -1, then nodemask status is not changed.
+status_change_nid is set node id when N_MEMORY of nodemask is (will be)
 set/clear. It means a new(memoryless) node gets new memory by online and a
 node loses all memory. If this is -1, then nodemask status is not changed.
-If status_changed_nid >= 0, callback should create/discard structures for the
+If status_changed_nid* >= 0, callback should create/discard structures for the
 node if necessary.
 
 --------------
diff --git a/Documentation/memory.txt b/Documentation/memory.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 802efe58647c..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/memory.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-There are several classic problems related to memory on Linux
-systems.
-
-	1) There are some motherboards that will not cache above
-	   a certain quantity of memory.  If you have one of these
-	   motherboards, your system will be SLOWER, not faster
-	   as you add more memory.  Consider exchanging your 
-           motherboard.
-
-All of these problems can be addressed with the "mem=XXXM" boot option
-(where XXX is the size of RAM to use in megabytes).  
-It can also tell Linux to use less memory than is actually installed.
-If you use "mem=" on a machine with PCI, consider using "memmap=" to avoid
-physical address space collisions.
-
-See the documentation of your boot loader (LILO, grub, loadlin, etc.) about
-how to pass options to the kernel.
-
-There are other memory problems which Linux cannot deal with.  Random
-corruption of memory is usually a sign of serious hardware trouble.
-Try:
-
-	* Reducing memory settings in the BIOS to the most conservative 
-          timings.
-
-	* Adding a cooling fan.
-
-	* Not overclocking your CPU.
-
-	* Having the memory tested in a memory tester or exchanged
-	  with the vendor. Consider testing it with memtest86 yourself.
-	
-	* Exchanging your CPU, cache, or motherboard for one that works.
diff --git a/Documentation/metag/00-INDEX b/Documentation/metag/00-INDEX
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..db11c513bd5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/metag/00-INDEX
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+00-INDEX
+	- this file
+kernel-ABI.txt
+	- Documents metag ABI details
diff --git a/Documentation/metag/kernel-ABI.txt b/Documentation/metag/kernel-ABI.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..628216603198
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/metag/kernel-ABI.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+			==========================
+			KERNEL ABIS FOR METAG ARCH
+			==========================
+
+This document describes the Linux ABIs for the metag architecture, and has the
+following sections:
+
+ (*) Outline of registers
+ (*) Userland registers
+ (*) Kernel registers
+ (*) System call ABI
+ (*) Calling conventions
+
+
+====================
+OUTLINE OF REGISTERS
+====================
+
+The main Meta core registers are arranged in units:
+
+	UNIT	Type	DESCRIPTION	GP	EXT	PRIV	GLOBAL
+	=======	=======	===============	=======	=======	=======	=======
+	CT	Special	Control unit
+	D0	General	Data unit 0	0-7	8-15	16-31	16-31
+	D1	General	Data unit 1	0-7	8-15	16-31	16-31
+	A0	General	Address unit 0	0-3	4-7	 8-15	 8-15
+	A1	General	Address unit 1	0-3	4-7	 8-15	 8-15
+	PC	Special	PC unit		0		 1
+	PORT	Special	Ports
+	TR	Special	Trigger unit			 0-7
+	TT	Special	Trace unit			 0-5
+	FX	General	FP unit			0-15
+
+GP registers form part of the main context.
+
+Extended context registers (EXT) may not be present on all hardware threads and
+can be context switched if support is enabled and the appropriate bits are set
+in e.g. the D0.8 register to indicate what extended state to preserve.
+
+Global registers are shared between threads and are privilege protected.
+
+See arch/metag/include/asm/metag_regs.h for definitions relating to core
+registers and the fields and bits they contain. See the TRMs for further details
+about special registers.
+
+Several special registers are preserved in the main context, these are the
+interesting ones:
+
+	REG	(ALIAS)		PURPOSE
+	=======================	===============================================
+	CT.1	(TXMODE)	Processor mode bits (particularly for DSP)
+	CT.2	(TXSTATUS)	Condition flags and LSM_STEP (MGET/MSET step)
+	CT.3	(TXRPT)		Branch repeat counter
+	PC.0	(PC)		Program counter
+
+Some of the general registers have special purposes in the ABI and therefore
+have aliases:
+
+	D0 REG	(ALIAS)	PURPOSE		D1 REG	(ALIAS)	PURPOSE
+	===============	===============	===============	=======================
+	D0.0	(D0Re0)	32bit result	D1.0	(D1Re0)	Top half of 64bit result
+	D0.1	(D0Ar6)	Argument 6	D1.1	(D1Ar5)	Argument 5
+	D0.2	(D0Ar4)	Argument 4	D1.2	(D1Ar3)	Argument 3
+	D0.3	(D0Ar2)	Argument 2	D1.3	(D1Ar1)	Argument 1
+	D0.4	(D0FrT)	Frame temp	D1.4	(D1RtP)	Return pointer
+	D0.5		Call preserved	D1.5		Call preserved
+	D0.6		Call preserved	D1.6		Call preserved
+	D0.7		Call preserved	D1.7		Call preserved
+
+	A0 REG	(ALIAS)	PURPOSE		A1 REG	(ALIAS)	PURPOSE
+	===============	===============	===============	=======================
+	A0.0	(A0StP)	Stack pointer	A1.0	(A1GbP)	Global base pointer
+	A0.1	(A0FrP)	Frame pointer	A1.1	(A1LbP)	Local base pointer
+	A0.2				A1.2
+	A0.3				A1.3
+
+
+==================
+USERLAND REGISTERS
+==================
+
+All the general purpose D0, D1, A0, A1 registers are preserved when entering the
+kernel (including asynchronous events such as interrupts and timer ticks) except
+the following which have special purposes in the ABI:
+
+	REGISTERS	WHEN	STATUS		PURPOSE
+	===============	=======	===============	===============================
+	D0.8		DSP	Preserved	ECH, determines what extended
+						DSP state to preserve.
+	A0.0	(A0StP)	ALWAYS	Preserved	Stack >= A0StP may be clobbered
+						at any time by the creation of a
+						signal frame.
+	A1.0	(A1GbP)	SMP	Clobbered	Used as temporary for loading
+						kernel stack pointer and saving
+						core context.
+	A0.15		!SMP	Protected	Stores kernel stack pointer.
+	A1.15		ALWAYS	Protected	Stores kernel base pointer.
+
+On UP A0.15 is used to store the kernel stack pointer for storing the userland
+context. A0.15 is global between hardware threads though which means it cannot
+be used on SMP for this purpose. Since no protected local registers are
+available A1GbP is reserved for use as a temporary to allow a percpu stack
+pointer to be loaded for storing the rest of the context.
+
+
+================
+KERNEL REGISTERS
+================
+
+When in the kernel the following registers have special purposes in the ABI:
+
+	REGISTERS	WHEN	STATUS		PURPOSE
+	===============	=======	===============	===============================
+	A0.0	(A0StP)	ALWAYS	Preserved	Stack >= A0StP may be clobbered
+						at any time by the creation of
+						an irq signal frame.
+	A1.0	(A1GbP)	ALWAYS	Preserved	Reserved (kernel base pointer).
+
+
+===============
+SYSTEM CALL ABI
+===============
+
+When a system call is made, the following registers are effective:
+
+	REGISTERS	CALL			RETURN
+	===============	=======================	===============================
+	D0.0	(D0Re0)				Return value (or -errno)
+	D1.0	(D1Re0)	System call number	Clobbered
+	D0.1	(D0Ar6)	Syscall arg #6		Preserved
+	D1.1	(D1Ar5)	Syscall arg #5		Preserved
+	D0.2	(D0Ar4)	Syscall arg #4		Preserved
+	D1.2	(D1Ar3)	Syscall arg #3		Preserved
+	D0.3	(D0Ar2)	Syscall arg #2		Preserved
+	D1.3	(D1Ar1)	Syscall arg #1		Preserved
+
+Due to the limited number of argument registers and some system calls with badly
+aligned 64-bit arguments, 64-bit values are always packed in consecutive
+arguments, even if this is contrary to the normal calling conventions (where the
+two halves would go in a matching pair of data registers).
+
+For example fadvise64_64 usually has the signature:
+
+	long sys_fadvise64_64(i32 fd, i64 offs, i64 len, i32 advice);
+
+But for metag fadvise64_64 is wrapped so that the 64-bit arguments are packed:
+
+	long sys_fadvise64_64_metag(i32 fd,      i32 offs_lo,
+				    i32 offs_hi, i32 len_lo,
+				    i32 len_hi,  i32 advice)
+
+So the arguments are packed in the registers like this:
+
+	D0 REG	(ALIAS)	VALUE		D1 REG	(ALIAS)	VALUE
+	===============	===============	===============	=======================
+	D0.1	(D0Ar6)	advice		D1.1	(D1Ar5)	hi(len)
+	D0.2	(D0Ar4)	lo(len)		D1.2	(D1Ar3)	hi(offs)
+	D0.3	(D0Ar2)	lo(offs)	D1.3	(D1Ar1)	fd
+
+
+===================
+CALLING CONVENTIONS
+===================
+
+These calling conventions apply to both user and kernel code. The stack grows
+from low addresses to high addresses in the metag ABI. The stack pointer (A0StP)
+should always point to the next free address on the stack and should at all
+times be 64-bit aligned. The following registers are effective at the point of a
+call:
+
+	REGISTERS	CALL			RETURN
+	===============	=======================	===============================
+	D0.0	(D0Re0)				32bit return value
+	D1.0	(D1Re0)				Upper half of 64bit return value
+	D0.1	(D0Ar6)	32bit argument #6	Clobbered
+	D1.1	(D1Ar5)	32bit argument #5	Clobbered
+	D0.2	(D0Ar4)	32bit argument #4	Clobbered
+	D1.2	(D1Ar3)	32bit argument #3	Clobbered
+	D0.3	(D0Ar2)	32bit argument #2	Clobbered
+	D1.3	(D1Ar1)	32bit argument #1	Clobbered
+	D0.4	(D0FrT)				Clobbered
+	D1.4	(D1RtP)	Return pointer		Clobbered
+	D{0-1}.{5-7}				Preserved
+	A0.0	(A0StP)	Stack pointer		Preserved
+	A1.0	(A0GbP)				Preserved
+	A0.1	(A0FrP)	Frame pointer		Preserved
+	A1.1	(A0LbP)				Preserved
+	A{0-1},{2-3}				Clobbered
+
+64-bit arguments are placed in matching pairs of registers (i.e. the same
+register number in both D0 and D1 units), with the least significant half in D0
+and the most significant half in D1, leaving a gap where necessary. Further
+arguments are stored on the stack in reverse order (earlier arguments at higher
+addresses):
+
+	ADDRESS		0     1     2     3	4     5     6     7
+	===============	===== ===== ===== =====	===== ===== ===== =====
+	A0StP       -->
+	A0StP-0x08	32bit argument #8	32bit argument #7
+	A0StP-0x10	32bit argument #10	32bit argument #9
+
+Function prologues tend to look a bit like this:
+
+	/* If frame pointer in use, move it to frame temp register so it can be
+	   easily pushed onto stack */
+	MOV	D0FrT,A0FrP
+
+	/* If frame pointer in use, set it to stack pointer */
+	ADD	A0FrP,A0StP,#0
+
+	/* Preserve D0FrT, D1RtP, D{0-1}.{5-7} on stack, incrementing A0StP */
+	MSETL	[A0StP++],D0FrT,D0.5,D0.6,D0.7
+
+	/* Allocate some stack space for local variables */
+	ADD	A0StP,A0StP,#0x10
+
+At this point the stack would look like this:
+
+	ADDRESS		0     1     2     3	4     5     6     7
+	===============	===== ===== ===== =====	===== ===== ===== =====
+	A0StP       -->
+	A0StP-0x08
+	A0StP-0x10
+	A0StP-0x18	Old D0.7		Old D1.7
+	A0StP-0x20	Old D0.6		Old D1.6
+	A0StP-0x28	Old D0.5		Old D1.5
+	A0FrP       -->	Old A0FrP (frame ptr)	Old D1RtP (return ptr)
+	A0FrP-0x08	32bit argument #8	32bit argument #7
+	A0FrP-0x10	32bit argument #10	32bit argument #9
+
+Function epilogues tend to differ depending on the use of a frame pointer. An
+example of a frame pointer epilogue:
+
+	/* Restore D0FrT, D1RtP, D{0-1}.{5-7} from stack, incrementing A0FrP */
+	MGETL	D0FrT,D0.5,D0.6,D0.7,[A0FrP++]
+	/* Restore stack pointer to where frame pointer was before increment */
+	SUB	A0StP,A0FrP,#0x20
+	/* Restore frame pointer from frame temp */
+	MOV	A0FrP,D0FrT
+	/* Return to caller via restored return pointer */
+	MOV	PC,D1RtP
+
+If the function hasn't touched the frame pointer, MGETL cannot be safely used
+with A0StP as it always increments and that would expose the stack to clobbering
+by interrupts (kernel) or signals (user). Therefore it's common to see the MGETL
+split into separate GETL instructions:
+
+	/* Restore D0FrT, D1RtP, D{0-1}.{5-7} from stack */
+	GETL	D0FrT,D1RtP,[A0StP+#-0x30]
+	GETL	D0.5,D1.5,[A0StP+#-0x28]
+	GETL	D0.6,D1.6,[A0StP+#-0x20]
+	GETL	D0.7,D1.7,[A0StP+#-0x18]
+	/* Restore stack pointer */
+	SUB	A0StP,A0StP,#0x30
+	/* Return to caller via restored return pointer */
+	MOV	PC,D1RtP
diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/lis3lv02d b/Documentation/misc-devices/lis3lv02d
index f1a4ec840f86..af815b9ba413 100644
--- a/Documentation/misc-devices/lis3lv02d
+++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/lis3lv02d
@@ -4,7 +4,8 @@ Kernel driver lis3lv02d
 Supported chips:
 
   * STMicroelectronics LIS3LV02DL, LIS3LV02DQ (12 bits precision)
-  * STMicroelectronics LIS302DL, LIS3L02DQ, LIS331DL (8 bits)
+  * STMicroelectronics LIS302DL, LIS3L02DQ, LIS331DL (8 bits) and
+    LIS331DLH (16 bits)
 
 Authors:
         Yan Burman <burman.yan@gmail.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/.gitignore b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/.gitignore
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f356b81ca1ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/.gitignore
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+mei-amt-version
diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/Makefile b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..00e8c3e836ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := mei-amt-version
+HOSTCFLAGS_mei-amt-version.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/TODO b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/TODO
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6b3625d3058c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/TODO
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+TODO:
+	- Cleanup and split the timer function
diff --git a/drivers/staging/mei/mei-amt-version.c b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/mei-amt-version.c
index ac2a507be253..49e4f770864a 100644
--- a/drivers/staging/mei/mei-amt-version.c
+++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/mei-amt-version.c
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@
 #include <stdint.h>
 #include <stdbool.h>
 #include <bits/wordsize.h>
-#include "mei.h"
+#include <linux/mei.h>
 
 /*****************************************************************************
  * Intel Management Engine Interface
@@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ out:
 }
 
 /***************************************************************************
- * Intel Advanced Management Technolgy ME Client
+ * Intel Advanced Management Technology ME Client
  ***************************************************************************/
 
 #define AMT_MAJOR_VERSION 1
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ struct amt_code_versions {
 } __attribute__((packed));
 
 /***************************************************************************
- * Intel Advanced Management Technolgy Host Interface
+ * Intel Advanced Management Technology Host Interface
  ***************************************************************************/
 
 struct amt_host_if_msg_header {
diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/mei-client-bus.txt b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/mei-client-bus.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f83910a8ce76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/mei-client-bus.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+Intel(R) Management Engine (ME) Client bus API
+===============================================
+
+
+Rationale
+=========
+MEI misc character device is useful for dedicated applications to send and receive
+data to the many FW appliance found in Intel's ME from the user space.
+However for some of the ME functionalities it make sense to leverage existing software
+stack and expose them through existing kernel subsystems.
+
+In order to plug seamlessly into the kernel device driver model we add kernel virtual
+bus abstraction on top of the MEI driver. This allows implementing linux kernel drivers
+for the various MEI features as a stand alone entities found in their respective subsystem.
+Existing device drivers can even potentially be re-used by adding an MEI CL bus layer to
+the existing code.
+
+
+MEI CL bus API
+===========
+A driver implementation for an MEI Client is very similar to existing bus
+based device drivers. The driver registers itself as an MEI CL bus driver through
+the mei_cl_driver structure:
+
+struct mei_cl_driver {
+	struct device_driver driver;
+	const char *name;
+
+	const struct mei_cl_device_id *id_table;
+
+	int (*probe)(struct mei_cl_device *dev, const struct mei_cl_id *id);
+	int (*remove)(struct mei_cl_device *dev);
+};
+
+struct mei_cl_id {
+	char name[MEI_NAME_SIZE];
+	kernel_ulong_t driver_info;
+};
+
+The mei_cl_id structure allows the driver to bind itself against a device name.
+
+To actually register a driver on the ME Client bus one must call the mei_cl_add_driver()
+API. This is typically called at module init time.
+
+Once registered on the ME Client bus, a driver will typically try to do some I/O on
+this bus and this should be done through the mei_cl_send() and mei_cl_recv()
+routines. The latter is synchronous (blocks and sleeps until data shows up).
+In order for drivers to be notified of pending events waiting for them (e.g.
+an Rx event) they can register an event handler through the
+mei_cl_register_event_cb() routine. Currently only the MEI_EVENT_RX event
+will trigger an event handler call and the driver implementation is supposed
+to call mei_recv() from the event handler in order to fetch the pending
+received buffers.
+
+
+Example
+=======
+As a theoretical example let's pretend the ME comes with a "contact" NFC IP.
+The driver init and exit routines for this device would look like:
+
+#define CONTACT_DRIVER_NAME "contact"
+
+static struct mei_cl_device_id contact_mei_cl_tbl[] = {
+	{ CONTACT_DRIVER_NAME, },
+
+	/* required last entry */
+	{ }
+};
+MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(mei_cl, contact_mei_cl_tbl);
+
+static struct mei_cl_driver contact_driver = {
+       .id_table = contact_mei_tbl,
+       .name = CONTACT_DRIVER_NAME,
+
+       .probe = contact_probe,
+       .remove = contact_remove,
+};
+
+static int contact_init(void)
+{
+	int r;
+
+	r = mei_cl_driver_register(&contact_driver);
+	if (r) {
+		pr_err(CONTACT_DRIVER_NAME ": driver registration failed\n");
+		return r;
+	}
+
+	return 0;
+}
+
+static void __exit contact_exit(void)
+{
+	mei_cl_driver_unregister(&contact_driver);
+}
+
+module_init(contact_init);
+module_exit(contact_exit);
+
+And the driver's simplified probe routine would look like that:
+
+int contact_probe(struct mei_cl_device *dev, struct mei_cl_device_id *id)
+{
+	struct contact_driver *contact;
+
+	[...]
+	mei_cl_enable_device(dev);
+
+	mei_cl_register_event_cb(dev, contact_event_cb, contact);
+
+	return 0;
+ }
+
+In the probe routine the driver first enable the MEI device and then registers
+an ME bus event handler which is as close as it can get to registering a
+threaded IRQ handler.
+The handler implementation will typically call some I/O routine depending on
+the pending events:
+
+#define MAX_NFC_PAYLOAD 128
+
+static void contact_event_cb(struct mei_cl_device *dev, u32 events,
+			     void *context)
+{
+	struct contact_driver *contact = context;
+
+	if (events & BIT(MEI_EVENT_RX)) {
+		u8 payload[MAX_NFC_PAYLOAD];
+		int payload_size;
+
+		payload_size = mei_recv(dev, payload, MAX_NFC_PAYLOAD);
+		if (payload_size <= 0)
+			return;
+
+		/* Hook to the NFC subsystem */
+		nfc_hci_recv_frame(contact->hdev, payload, payload_size);
+	}
+}
diff --git a/drivers/staging/mei/mei.txt b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/mei.txt
index 2785697da59d..15bba1aeba9a 100644
--- a/drivers/staging/mei/mei.txt
+++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/mei.txt
@@ -50,25 +50,25 @@ Intel MEI Driver
 The driver exposes a misc device called /dev/mei.
 
 An application maintains communication with an Intel ME feature while
-/dev/mei is open. The binding to a specific features is performed by calling
+/dev/mei is open. The binding to a specific feature is performed by calling
 MEI_CONNECT_CLIENT_IOCTL, which passes the desired UUID.
 The number of instances of an Intel ME feature that can be opened
 at the same time depends on the Intel ME feature, but most of the
 features allow only a single instance.
 
 The Intel AMT Host Interface (Intel AMTHI) feature supports multiple
-simultaneous user applications. Therefore, the Intel MEI driver handles
-this internally by maintaining request queues for the applications.
+simultaneous user connected applications. The Intel MEI driver
+handles this internally by maintaining request queues for the applications.
 
-The driver is oblivious to data that is passed between firmware feature
+The driver is transparent to data that are passed between firmware feature
 and host application.
 
 Because some of the Intel ME features can change the system
 configuration, the driver by default allows only a privileged
 user to access it.
 
-A code snippet for an application communicating with
-Intel AMTHI client:
+A code snippet for an application communicating with Intel AMTHI client:
+
 	struct mei_connect_client_data data;
 	fd = open(MEI_DEVICE);
 
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ The Intel MEI Driver supports the following IOCTL command:
 	Notes:
         max_msg_length (MTU) in client properties describes the maximum
         data that can be sent or received. (e.g. if MTU=2K, can send
-        requests up to bytes 2k and received responses upto 2k bytes).
+        requests up to bytes 2k and received responses up to 2k bytes).
 
 Intel ME Applications:
 ==============
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ The Intel AMT Watchdog is composed of two parts:
 	2) Intel MEI driver - connects to the watchdog feature, configures the
 	   watchdog and sends the heartbeats.
 
-The Intel MEI driver uses the kernel watchdog to configure the Intel AMT
+The Intel MEI driver uses the kernel watchdog API to configure the Intel AMT
 Watchdog and to send heartbeats to it. The default timeout of the
 watchdog is 120 seconds.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt
index 22ae8441489f..189bab09255a 100644
--- a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt
@@ -22,9 +22,12 @@ All attributes are read-only.
 	manfid			Manufacturer ID (from CID Register)
 	name			Product Name (from CID Register)
 	oemid			OEM/Application ID (from CID Register)
+	prv			Product Revision (from CID Register) (SD and MMCv4 only)
 	serial			Product Serial Number (from CID Register)
 	erase_size		Erase group size
 	preferred_erase_size	Preferred erase size
+	raw_rpmb_size_mult	RPMB partition size
+	rel_sectors		Reliable write sector count
 
 Note on Erase Size and Preferred Erase Size:
 
@@ -65,6 +68,11 @@ Note on Erase Size and Preferred Erase Size:
 
 	"preferred_erase_size" is in bytes.
 
+Note on raw_rpmb_size_mult:
+	"raw_rpmb_size_mult" is a mutliple of 128kB block.
+	RPMB size in byte is calculated by using the following equation:
+	RPMB partition size = 128kB x raw_rpmb_size_mult
+
 SD/MMC/SDIO Clock Gating Attribute
 ==================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/mono.txt b/Documentation/mono.txt
index e8e1758e87da..d01ac6052194 100644
--- a/Documentation/mono.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mono.txt
@@ -38,11 +38,11 @@ if [ ! -e /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc/register ]; then
         /sbin/modprobe binfmt_misc
 	# Some distributions, like Fedora Core, perform
 	# the following command automatically when the
-	# binfmt_misc module is loaded into the kernel.
+	# binfmt_misc module is loaded into the kernel
+	# or during normal boot up (systemd-based systems).
 	# Thus, it is possible that the following line
-	# is not needed at all. Look at /etc/modprobe.conf
-	# to check whether this is applicable or not.
-        mount -t binfmt_misc none /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc
+	# is not needed at all.
+	mount -t binfmt_misc none /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc
 fi
 
 # Register support for .NET CLR binaries
diff --git a/Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.txt b/Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.txt
index 990efd7a9818..e129b2479ea8 100644
--- a/Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.txt
@@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ THe code within the for loop was changed to:
     }
 
 As you can see tmppar is used to accumulate the parity within a for
-iteration. In the last 3 statements is is added to par and, if needed,
+iteration. In the last 3 statements is added to par and, if needed,
 to rp12 and rp14.
 
 While making the changes I also found that I could exploit that tmppar
diff --git a/Documentation/namespaces/resource-control.txt b/Documentation/namespaces/resource-control.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..abc13c394738
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/namespaces/resource-control.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+There are a lot of kinds of objects in the kernel that don't have
+individual limits or that have limits that are ineffective when a set
+of processes is allowed to switch user ids.  With user namespaces
+enabled in a kernel for people who don't trust their users or their
+users programs to play nice this problems becomes more acute.
+
+Therefore it is recommended that memory control groups be enabled in
+kernels that enable user namespaces, and it is further recommended
+that userspace configure memory control groups to limit how much
+memory user's they don't trust to play nice can use.
+
+Memory control groups can be configured by installing the libcgroup
+package present on most distros editing /etc/cgrules.conf,
+/etc/cgconfig.conf and setting up libpam-cgroup.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/.gitignore b/Documentation/networking/.gitignore
index 286a5680f490..e69de29bb2d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/.gitignore
+++ b/Documentation/networking/.gitignore
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-ifenslave
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX
index 9ad9ddeb384c..f11580f8719a 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX
@@ -1,7 +1,5 @@
 00-INDEX
 	- this file
-3c359.txt
-	- information on the 3Com TokenLink Velocity XL (3c5359) driver.
 3c505.txt
 	- information on the 3Com EtherLink Plus (3c505) driver.
 3c509.txt
@@ -54,8 +52,6 @@ de4x5.txt
 	- the Digital EtherWORKS DE4?? and DE5?? PCI Ethernet driver
 decnet.txt
 	- info on using the DECnet networking layer in Linux.
-depca.txt
-	- the Digital DEPCA/EtherWORKS DE1?? and DE2?? LANCE Ethernet driver
 dl2k.txt
 	- README for D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapters (dl2k.ko).
 dm9000.txt
@@ -74,8 +70,6 @@ e1000e.txt
 	- README for the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Driver (e1000e).
 eql.txt
 	- serial IP load balancing
-ewrk3.txt
-	- the Digital EtherWORKS 3 DE203/4/5 Ethernet driver
 fib_trie.txt
 	- Level Compressed Trie (LC-trie) notes: a structure for routing.
 filter.txt
@@ -92,10 +86,10 @@ generic_netlink.txt
 	- info on Generic Netlink
 gianfar.txt
 	- Gianfar Ethernet Driver.
+i40e.txt
+	- README for the Intel Ethernet Controller XL710 Driver (i40e).
 ieee802154.txt
 	- Linux IEEE 802.15.4 implementation, API and drivers
-ifenslave.c
-	- Configure network interfaces for parallel routing (bonding).
 igb.txt
 	- README for the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Driver (igb).
 igbvf.txt
@@ -128,12 +122,12 @@ ltpc.txt
 	- the Apple or Farallon LocalTalk PC card driver
 mac80211-injection.txt
 	- HOWTO use packet injection with mac80211
-multicast.txt
-	- Behaviour of cards under Multicast
 multiqueue.txt
 	- HOWTO for multiqueue network device support.
 netconsole.txt
 	- The network console module netconsole.ko: configuration and notes.
+netdev-FAQ.txt
+	- FAQ describing how to submit net changes to netdev mailing list.
 netdev-features.txt
 	- Network interface features API description.
 netdevices.txt
@@ -142,8 +136,6 @@ netif-msg.txt
 	- Design of the network interface message level setting (NETIF_MSG_*).
 nfc.txt
 	- The Linux Near Field Communication (NFS) subsystem.
-olympic.txt
-	- IBM PCI Pit/Pit-Phy/Olympic Token Ring driver info.
 openvswitch.txt
 	- Open vSwitch developer documentation.
 operstates.txt
@@ -184,8 +176,6 @@ skfp.txt
 	- SysKonnect FDDI (SK-5xxx, Compaq Netelligent) driver info.
 smc9.txt
 	- the driver for SMC's 9000 series of Ethernet cards
-smctr.txt
-	- SMC TokenCard TokenRing Linux driver info.
 spider-net.txt
 	- README for the Spidernet Driver (as found in PS3 / Cell BE).
 stmmac.txt
@@ -200,8 +190,6 @@ tcp-thin.txt
 	- kernel tuning options for low rate 'thin' TCP streams.
 tlan.txt
 	- ThunderLAN (Compaq Netelligent 10/100, Olicom OC-2xxx) driver info.
-tms380tr.txt
-	- SysKonnect Token Ring ISA/PCI adapter driver info.
 tproxy.txt
 	- Transparent proxy support user guide.
 tuntap.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt b/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index dadfe8147ab8..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-
-3COM PCI TOKEN LINK VELOCITY XL TOKEN RING CARDS README
-
-Release 0.9.0 - Release   
-	Jul 17th 2000 Mike Phillips 
-
-	1.2.0 - Final
-	Feb 17th 2002 Mike Phillips 
-	Updated for submission to the 2.4.x kernel.
-
-Thanks:
-	Terry Murphy from 3Com for tech docs and support,
-	Adam D. Ligas for testing the driver.
- 
-Note:
-	This driver will NOT work with the 3C339 Token Ring cards, you need
-to use the tms380 driver instead.
-
-Options:
-
-The driver accepts three options: ringspeed, pkt_buf_sz and message_level.
-
-These options can be specified differently for each card found. 
-
-ringspeed:  Has one of three settings 0 (default), 4 or 16.  0 will 
-make the card autosense the ringspeed and join at the appropriate speed, 
-this will be the default option for most people.  4 or 16 allow you to 
-explicitly force the card to operate at a certain speed.  The card will fail 
-if you try to insert it at the wrong speed. (Although some hubs will allow 
-this so be *very* careful).  The main purpose for explicitly setting the ring
-speed is for when the card is first on the ring.  In autosense mode, if the card
-cannot detect any active monitors on the ring it will open at the same speed as
-its last opening. This can be hazardous if this speed does not match the speed
-you want the ring to operate at.  
-
-pkt_buf_sz:  This is this initial receive buffer allocation size.  This will
-default to 4096 if no value is entered. You may increase performance of the 
-driver by setting this to a value larger than the network packet size, although
-the driver now re-sizes buffers based on MTU settings as well. 
-
-message_level: Controls level of messages created by the driver. Defaults to 0:
-which only displays start-up and critical messages.  Presently any non-zero 
-value will display all soft messages as well.  NB This does not turn 
-debugging messages on, that must be done by modified the source code.
-
-Variable MTU size:
-
-The driver can handle a MTU size up to either 4500 or 18000 depending upon 
-ring speed.  The driver also changes the size of the receive buffers as part
-of the mtu re-sizing, so if you set mtu = 18000, you will need to be able
-to allocate 16 * (sk_buff with 18000 buffer size) call it 18500 bytes per ring 
-position = 296,000 bytes of memory space, plus of course anything 
-necessary for the tx sk_buff's.  Remember this is per card, so if you are
-building routers, gateway's etc, you could start to use a lot of memory
-real fast.
-
-2/17/02 Mike Phillips
-
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/3c509.txt b/Documentation/networking/3c509.txt
index dcc9eaf59395..fbf722e15ac3 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/3c509.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/3c509.txt
@@ -25,7 +25,6 @@ models:
   3c509B (later revision of the ISA card; supports full-duplex)
   3c589 (PCMCIA)
   3c589B (later revision of the 3c589; supports full-duplex)
-  3c529 (MCA)
   3c579 (EISA)
 
 Large portions of this documentation were heavily borrowed from the guide
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt b/Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 55d24433d151..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,203 +0,0 @@
-Released 1994-06-13
-
-
-	CONTENTS:
-
-	1. Introduction.
-	2. License.
-	3. Files in this release.
-	4. Installation.
-	5. Problems and tuning.
-	6. Using the drivers with earlier releases.
-	7. Acknowledgments.
-
-
-	1. INTRODUCTION.
-
-	This is a set of Ethernet drivers for the D-Link DE-600/DE-620
-	pocket adapters, for the parallel port on a Linux based machine.
-	Some adapter "clones" will also work.  Xircom is _not_ a clone...
-	These drivers _can_ be used as loadable modules,
-	and were developed for use on Linux 1.1.13 and above.
-	For use on Linux 1.0.X, or earlier releases, see below.
-
-	I have used these drivers for NFS, ftp, telnet and X-clients on
-	remote machines. Transmissions with ftp seems to work as
-	good as can be expected (i.e. > 80k bytes/sec) from a
-	parallel port...:-)  Receive speeds will be about 60-80% of this.
-	Depending on your machine, somewhat higher speeds can be achieved.
-
-	All comments/fixes to Bjorn Ekwall (bj0rn@blox.se).
-
-
-	2. LICENSE.
-
-	This program is free software; you can redistribute it
-	and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
-	License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
-	version 2, or (at your option) any later version.
-
-	This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
-	useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
-	warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
-	PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more
-	details.
-
-	You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-	License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
-	Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA
-	02139, USA.
-
-
-	3. FILES IN THIS RELEASE.
-
-	README.DLINK  This file.
-	de600.c       The Source (may it be with You :-) for the DE-600
-	de620.c       ditto for the DE-620
-	de620.h       Macros for de620.c
-
-	If you are upgrading from the d-link tar release, there will
-	also be a "dlink-patches" file that will patch Linux 1.1.18:
-		linux/drivers/net/Makefile
-		linux/drivers/net/CONFIG
-		linux/drivers/net/MODULES
-		linux/drivers/net/Space.c
-		linux/config.in
-	Apply the patch by:
-	"cd /usr/src; patch -p0 < linux/drivers/net/dlink-patches"
-	The old source, "linux/drivers/net/d_link.c", can be removed.
-
-
-	4. INSTALLATION.
-
-	o Get the latest net binaries, according to current net.wisdom.
-
-	o Read the NET-2 and Ethernet HOWTOs and modify your setup.
-
-	o If your parallel port has a strange address or irq,
-	  modify "linux/drivers/net/CONFIG" accordingly, or adjust
-	  the parameters in the "tuning" section in the sources.
-
-	If you are going to use the drivers as loadable modules, do _not_
-	enable them while doing "make config", but instead make sure that
-	the drivers are included in "linux/drivers/net/MODULES".
-
-	If you are _not_ going to use the driver(s) as loadable modules,
-	but instead have them included in the kernel, remember to enable
-	the drivers while doing "make config".
-
-	o To include networking and DE600/DE620 support in your kernel:
-	  # cd /linux
-	  (as modules:)
-	  #  make config (answer yes on CONFIG_NET and CONFIG_INET)
-	  (else included in the kernel:)
-	  #  make config (answer yes on CONFIG _NET, _INET and _DE600 or _DE620)
-	  # make clean
-	  # make zImage (or whatever magic you usually do)
-
-	o I use lilo to boot multiple kernels, so that I at least
-	  can have one working kernel :-). If you do too, append
-	  these lines to /etc/lilo/config:
-
-		image = /linux/zImage
-		label = newlinux
-		root = /dev/hda2 (or whatever YOU have...)
-
-	  # /etc/lilo/install
-
-	o Do "sync" and reboot the new kernel with a D-Link
-	  DE-600/DE-620 pocket adapter connected.
-
-	o The adapter can be configured with ifconfig eth?
-	  where the actual number is decided by the kernel
-	  when the drivers are initialized.
-
-
-	5. "PROBLEMS" AND TUNING,
-
-	o If you see error messages from the driver, and if the traffic
-	  stops on the adapter, try to do "ifconfig" and "route" once
-	  more, just as in "rc.inet1".  This should take care of most
-	  problems, including effects from power loss, or adapters that
-	  aren't connected to the printer port in some way or another.
-	  You can somewhat change the behaviour by enabling/disabling
-	  the macro  SHUTDOWN_WHEN_LOST  in the "tuning" section.
-	  For the DE-600 there is another macro, CHECK_LOST_DE600,
-	  that you might want to read about in the "tuning" section.
-
-	o Some machines have trouble handling the parallel port and
-	  the adapter at high speed. If you experience problems:
-
-	  DE-600:
-	  - The adapter is not recognized at boot, i.e. an Ethernet
-	    address of 00:80:c8:... is not shown, try to add another
-	      "; SLOW_DOWN_IO"
-	    at DE600_SLOW_DOWN in the "tuning" section. As a last resort,
-	    uncomment: "#define REALLY_SLOW_IO" (see <asm/io.h> for hints).
-
-	  - You experience "timeout" messages: first try to add another
-	      "; SLOW_DOWN_IO"
-	    at DE600_SLOW_DOWN in the "tuning" section, _then_ try to
-	    increase the value (original value: 5) at
-	    "if (tickssofar < 5)" near line 422.
-
-	  DE-620:
-	  - Your parallel port might be "sluggish".  To cater for
-	    this, there are the macros LOWSPEED and READ_DELAY/WRITE_DELAY
-	    in the "tuning" section. Your first step should be to enable
-	    LOWSPEED, and after that you can "tune" the XXX_DELAY values.
-
-	o If the adapter _is_ recognized at boot but you get messages
-	  about "Network Unreachable", then the problem is probably
-	  _not_ with the driver.  Check your net configuration instead
-	  (ifconfig and route) in "rc.inet1".
-
-	o There is some rudimentary support for debugging, look at
-	  the source. Use "-DDE600_DEBUG=3" or "-DDE620_DEBUG=3"
-	  when compiling, or include it in "linux/drivers/net/CONFIG".
-	  IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS YOU CAN'T SOLVE: PLEASE COMPILE THE DRIVER
-	  WITH DEBUGGING ENABLED, AND SEND ME THE RESULTING OUTPUT!
-
-
-	6. USING THE DRIVERS WITH EARLIER RELEASES.
-
-	The later 1.1.X releases of the Linux kernel include some
-	changes in the networking layer (a.k.a. NET3). This affects
-	these drivers in a few places.  The hints that follow are
-	_not_ tested by me, since I don't have the disk space to keep
-	all releases on-line.
-	Known needed changes to date:
-	- release patchfile: some patches will fail, but they should
-	  be easy to apply "by hand", since they are trivial.
-	  (Space.c: d_link_init() is now called de600_probe())
-	- de600.c: change  "mark_bh(NET_BH)" to  "mark_bh(INET_BH)".
-	- de620.c: (maybe) change the code around "netif_rx(skb);" to be
-		   similar to the code around "dev_rint(...)" in de600.c
-
-
-	7. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.
-
-	These drivers wouldn't have been done without the base
-	(and support) from Ross Biro, and D-Link Systems Inc.
-	The driver relies upon GPL-ed source from D-Link Systems Inc.
-	and from Russel Nelson at Crynwr Software <nelson@crynwr.com>.
-
-	Additional input also from:
-	Donald Becker <becker@super.org>, Alan Cox <A.Cox@swansea.ac.uk>
-	and Fred N. van Kempen <waltje@uWalt.NL.Mugnet.ORG>
-
-	DE-600 alpha release primary victim^H^H^H^H^H^Htester:
-	- Erik Proper <erikp@cs.kun.nl>.
-	Good input also from several users, most notably
-	- Mark Burton <markb@ordern.demon.co.uk>.
-
-	DE-620 alpha release victims^H^H^H^H^H^H^Htesters:
-	- J. Joshua Kopper <kopper@rtsg.mot.com>
-	- Olav Kvittem <Olav.Kvittem@uninett.no>
-	- Germano Caronni <caronni@nessie.cs.id.ethz.ch>
-	- Jeremy Fitzhardinge <jeremy@suite.sw.oz.au>
-
-
-	Happy hacking!
-
-	Bjorn Ekwall == bj0rn@blox.se
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic
index e7fb2c6023bc..2ae3b64983ab 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic
+++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-Copyright (c) 2009-2011 QLogic Corporation
+Copyright (c) 2009-2013 QLogic Corporation
 QLogic Linux qlcnic NIC Driver
 
 You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/Makefile b/Documentation/networking/Makefile
index 24c308dd3fd1..0aa1ac98fc2b 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/networking/Makefile
@@ -1,11 +1,6 @@
 # kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
 obj- := dummy.o
 
-# List of programs to build
-hostprogs-y := ifenslave
-
-HOSTCFLAGS_ifenslave.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
-
 # Tell kbuild to always build the programs
 always := $(hostprogs-y)
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt b/Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt
index 9ff579502151..aff97f47c05c 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt
@@ -70,9 +70,10 @@ list, mail to linux-arcnet@tichy.ch.uj.edu.pl.
 There are archives of the mailing list at:
 	http://epistolary.org/mailman/listinfo.cgi/arcnet
 
-The people on linux-net@vger.kernel.org have also been known to be very
-helpful, especially when we're talking about ALPHA Linux kernels that may or
-may not work right in the first place.
+The people on linux-net@vger.kernel.org (now defunct, replaced by
+netdev@vger.kernel.org) have also been known to be very helpful, especially
+when we're talking about ALPHA Linux kernels that may or may not work right
+in the first place.
 
 
 Other Drivers and Info
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt
index 221ad0cdf11f..c1d82047a4b1 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,3 @@
-[state: 21-08-2011]
-
 BATMAN-ADV
 ----------
 
@@ -67,18 +65,20 @@ To deactivate an interface you have  to  write  "none"  into  its
 All  mesh  wide  settings  can be found in batman's own interface
 folder:
 
-#  ls  /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/
-# aggregated_ogms   fragmentation gw_sel_class   vis_mode
-# ap_isolation      gw_bandwidth  hop_penalty
-# bonding           gw_mode       orig_interval
+# ls /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/
+# aggregated_ogms        gw_bandwidth           log_level
+# ap_isolation           gw_mode                orig_interval
+# bonding                gw_sel_class           routing_algo
+# bridge_loop_avoidance  hop_penalty            vis_mode
+# fragmentation
 
 
 There is a special folder for debugging information:
 
-#  ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/
-#  gateways     socket        transtable_global  vis_data
-#  originators  softif_neigh  transtable_local
-
+# ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/
+# bla_backbone_table  log                 transtable_global
+# bla_claim_table     originators         transtable_local
+# gateways            socket              vis_data
 
 Some of the files contain all sort of status information  regard-
 ing  the  mesh  network.  For  example, you can view the table of
@@ -202,15 +202,22 @@ abled  during run time. Following log_levels are defined:
 1 - Enable messages related to routing / flooding / broadcasting
 2 - Enable messages related to route added / changed / deleted
 4 - Enable messages related to translation table operations
-7 - Enable all messages
+8 - Enable messages related to bridge loop avoidance
+16 - Enable messaged related to DAT, ARP snooping and parsing
+31 - Enable all messages
 
 The debug output can be changed at runtime  using  the  file
 /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level. e.g.
 
-# echo 2 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level
+# echo 6 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level
 
 will enable debug messages for when routes change.
 
+Counters for different types of packets entering and leaving the
+batman-adv module are available through ethtool:
+
+# ethtool --statistics bat0
+
 
 BATCTL
 ------
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/baycom.txt b/Documentation/networking/baycom.txt
index 4e68849d5639..688f18fd4467 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/baycom.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/baycom.txt
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Every time a driver is inserted into the kernel, it has to know which
 modems it should access at which ports. This can be done with the setbaycom
 utility. If you are only using one modem, you can also configure the
 driver from the insmod command line (or by means of an option line in
-/etc/modprobe.conf).
+/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf).
 
 Examples:
   modprobe baycom_ser_fdx mode="ser12*" iobase=0x3f8 irq=4
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
index 080ad26690ae..9b28e714831a 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
@@ -104,8 +104,7 @@ Table of Contents
 ==============================
 
 	Most popular distro kernels ship with the bonding driver
-already available as a module and the ifenslave user level control
-program installed and ready for use. If your distro does not, or you
+already available as a module. If your distro does not, or you
 have need to compile bonding from source (e.g., configuring and
 installing a mainline kernel from kernel.org), you'll need to perform
 the following steps:
@@ -124,46 +123,13 @@ device support" section.  It is recommended that you configure the
 driver as module since it is currently the only way to pass parameters
 to the driver or configure more than one bonding device.
 
-	Build and install the new kernel and modules, then continue
-below to install ifenslave.
+	Build and install the new kernel and modules.
 
-1.2 Install ifenslave Control Utility
+1.2 Bonding Control Utility
 -------------------------------------
 
-	The ifenslave user level control program is included in the
-kernel source tree, in the file Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c.
-It is generally recommended that you use the ifenslave that
-corresponds to the kernel that you are using (either from the same
-source tree or supplied with the distro), however, ifenslave
-executables from older kernels should function (but features newer
-than the ifenslave release are not supported).  Running an ifenslave
-that is newer than the kernel is not supported, and may or may not
-work.
-
-	To install ifenslave, do the following:
-
-# gcc -Wall -O -I/usr/src/linux/include ifenslave.c -o ifenslave
-# cp ifenslave /sbin/ifenslave
-
-	If your kernel source is not in "/usr/src/linux," then replace
-"/usr/src/linux/include" in the above with the location of your kernel
-source include directory.
-
-	You may wish to back up any existing /sbin/ifenslave, or, for
-testing or informal use, tag the ifenslave to the kernel version
-(e.g., name the ifenslave executable /sbin/ifenslave-2.6.10).
-
-IMPORTANT NOTE:
-
-	If you omit the "-I" or specify an incorrect directory, you
-may end up with an ifenslave that is incompatible with the kernel
-you're trying to build it for.  Some distros (e.g., Red Hat from 7.1
-onwards) do not have /usr/include/linux symbolically linked to the
-default kernel source include directory.
-
-SECOND IMPORTANT NOTE:
-	If you plan to configure bonding using sysfs or using the
-/etc/network/interfaces file, you do not need to use ifenslave.
+	 It is recommended to configure bonding via iproute2 (netlink)
+or sysfs, the old ifenslave control utility is obsolete.
 
 2. Bonding Driver Options
 =========================
@@ -173,9 +139,8 @@ bonding module at load time, or are specified via sysfs.
 
 	Module options may be given as command line arguments to the
 insmod or modprobe command, but are usually specified in either the
-/etc/modules.conf or /etc/modprobe.conf configuration file, or in a
-distro-specific configuration file (some of which are detailed in the next
-section).
+/etc/modrobe.d/*.conf configuration files, or in a distro-specific
+configuration file (some of which are detailed in the next section).
 
 	Details on bonding support for sysfs is provided in the
 "Configuring Bonding Manually via Sysfs" section, below.
@@ -338,6 +303,12 @@ arp_validate
 	such a situation, validation of backup slaves must be
 	disabled.
 
+	The validation of ARP requests on backup slaves is mainly
+	helping bonding to decide which slaves are more likely to
+	work in case of the active slave failure, it doesn't really
+	guarantee that the backup slave will work if it's selected
+	as the next active slave.
+
 	This option is useful in network configurations in which
 	multiple bonding hosts are concurrently issuing ARPs to one or
 	more targets beyond a common switch.  Should the link between
@@ -350,6 +321,25 @@ arp_validate
 
 	This option was added in bonding version 3.1.0.
 
+arp_all_targets
+
+	Specifies the quantity of arp_ip_targets that must be reachable
+	in order for the ARP monitor to consider a slave as being up.
+	This option affects only active-backup mode for slaves with
+	arp_validation enabled.
+
+	Possible values are:
+
+	any or 0
+
+		consider the slave up only when any of the arp_ip_targets
+		is reachable
+
+	all or 1
+
+		consider the slave up only when all of the arp_ip_targets
+		are reachable
+
 downdelay
 
 	Specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait before disabling
@@ -753,12 +743,22 @@ xmit_hash_policy
 		protocol information to generate the hash.
 
 		Uses XOR of hardware MAC addresses and IP addresses to
-		generate the hash.  The formula is
+		generate the hash.  The IPv4 formula is
 
 		(((source IP XOR dest IP) AND 0xffff) XOR
 			( source MAC XOR destination MAC ))
 				modulo slave count
 
+		The IPv6 formula is
+
+		hash = (source ip quad 2 XOR dest IP quad 2) XOR
+		       (source ip quad 3 XOR dest IP quad 3) XOR
+		       (source ip quad 4 XOR dest IP quad 4)
+
+		(((hash >> 24) XOR (hash >> 16) XOR (hash >> 8) XOR hash)
+			XOR (source MAC XOR destination MAC))
+				modulo slave count
+
 		This algorithm will place all traffic to a particular
 		network peer on the same slave.  For non-IP traffic,
 		the formula is the same as for the layer2 transmit
@@ -779,19 +779,29 @@ xmit_hash_policy
 		slaves, although a single connection will not span
 		multiple slaves.
 
-		The formula for unfragmented TCP and UDP packets is
+		The formula for unfragmented IPv4 TCP and UDP packets is
 
 		((source port XOR dest port) XOR
 			 ((source IP XOR dest IP) AND 0xffff)
 				modulo slave count
 
-		For fragmented TCP or UDP packets and all other IP
-		protocol traffic, the source and destination port
+		The formula for unfragmented IPv6 TCP and UDP packets is
+
+		hash = (source port XOR dest port) XOR
+		       ((source ip quad 2 XOR dest IP quad 2) XOR
+			(source ip quad 3 XOR dest IP quad 3) XOR
+			(source ip quad 4 XOR dest IP quad 4))
+
+		((hash >> 24) XOR (hash >> 16) XOR (hash >> 8) XOR hash)
+			modulo slave count
+
+		For fragmented TCP or UDP packets and all other IPv4 and
+		IPv6 protocol traffic, the source and destination port
 		information is omitted.  For non-IP traffic, the
 		formula is the same as for the layer2 transmit hash
 		policy.
 
-		This policy is intended to mimic the behavior of
+		The IPv4 policy is intended to mimic the behavior of
 		certain switches, notably Cisco switches with PFC2 as
 		well as some Foundry and IBM products.
 
@@ -832,7 +842,7 @@ resend_igmp
 ==============================
 
 	You can configure bonding using either your distro's network
-initialization scripts, or manually using either ifenslave or the
+initialization scripts, or manually using either iproute2 or the
 sysfs interface.  Distros generally use one of three packages for the
 network initialization scripts: initscripts, sysconfig or interfaces.
 Recent versions of these packages have support for bonding, while older
@@ -1021,7 +1031,7 @@ ifcfg-bondX files.
 
 	Because the sysconfig scripts supply the bonding module
 options in the ifcfg-bondX file, it is not necessary to add them to
-the system /etc/modules.conf or /etc/modprobe.conf configuration file.
+the system /etc/modules.d/*.conf configuration files.
 
 3.2 Configuration with Initscripts Support
 ------------------------------------------
@@ -1098,15 +1108,13 @@ queried targets, e.g.,
 	arp_ip_target=+192.168.1.1 arp_ip_target=+192.168.1.2
 
 	is the proper syntax to specify multiple targets.  When specifying
-options via BONDING_OPTS, it is not necessary to edit /etc/modules.conf or
-/etc/modprobe.conf.
+options via BONDING_OPTS, it is not necessary to edit /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf.
 
 	For even older versions of initscripts that do not support
-BONDING_OPTS, it is necessary to edit /etc/modules.conf (or
-/etc/modprobe.conf, depending upon your distro) to load the bonding module
-with your desired options when the bond0 interface is brought up.  The
-following lines in /etc/modules.conf (or modprobe.conf) will load the
-bonding module, and select its options:
+BONDING_OPTS, it is necessary to edit /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf, depending upon
+your distro) to load the bonding module with your desired options when the
+bond0 interface is brought up.  The following lines in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf
+will load the bonding module, and select its options:
 
 alias bond0 bonding
 options bond0 mode=balance-alb miimon=100
@@ -1143,7 +1151,7 @@ not support this method for specifying multiple bonding interfaces; for
 those instances, see the "Configuring Multiple Bonds Manually" section,
 below.
 
-3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually with Ifenslave
+3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually with iproute2
 -----------------------------------------------
 
 	This section applies to distros whose network initialization
@@ -1152,9 +1160,9 @@ knowledge of bonding.  One such distro is SuSE Linux Enterprise Server
 version 8.
 
 	The general method for these systems is to place the bonding
-module parameters into /etc/modules.conf or /etc/modprobe.conf (as
+module parameters into a config file in /etc/modprobe.d/ (as
 appropriate for the installed distro), then add modprobe and/or
-ifenslave commands to the system's global init script.  The name of
+`ip link` commands to the system's global init script.  The name of
 the global init script differs; for sysconfig, it is
 /etc/init.d/boot.local and for initscripts it is /etc/rc.d/rc.local.
 
@@ -1166,8 +1174,8 @@ reboots, edit the appropriate file (/etc/init.d/boot.local or
 modprobe bonding mode=balance-alb miimon=100
 modprobe e100
 ifconfig bond0 192.168.1.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 up
-ifenslave bond0 eth0
-ifenslave bond0 eth1
+ip link set eth0 master bond0
+ip link set eth1 master bond0
 
 	Replace the example bonding module parameters and bond0
 network configuration (IP address, netmask, etc) with the appropriate
@@ -1213,7 +1221,7 @@ options, you may wish to use the "max_bonds" module parameter,
 documented above.
 
 	To create multiple bonding devices with differing options, it is
-preferrable to use bonding parameters exported by sysfs, documented in the
+preferable to use bonding parameters exported by sysfs, documented in the
 section below.
 
 	For versions of bonding without sysfs support, the only means to
@@ -1228,7 +1236,7 @@ network initialization scripts.
 specify a different name for each instance (the module loading system
 requires that every loaded module, even multiple instances of the same
 module, have a unique name).  This is accomplished by supplying multiple
-sets of bonding options in /etc/modprobe.conf, for example:
+sets of bonding options in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf, for example:
 
 alias bond0 bonding
 options bond0 -o bond0 mode=balance-rr miimon=100
@@ -1354,6 +1362,12 @@ To add ARP targets:
 To remove an ARP target:
 # echo -192.168.0.100 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/arp_ip_target
 
+To configure the interval between learning packet transmits:
+# echo 12 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/lp_interval
+	NOTE: the lp_inteval is the number of seconds between instances where
+the bonding driver sends learning packets to each slaves peer switch.  The
+default interval is 1 second.
+
 Example Configuration
 ---------------------
 	We begin with the same example that is shown in section 3.3,
@@ -1793,8 +1807,8 @@ route additions may cause trouble.
 	On systems with network configuration scripts that do not
 associate physical devices directly with network interface names (so
 that the same physical device always has the same "ethX" name), it may
-be necessary to add some special logic to either /etc/modules.conf or
-/etc/modprobe.conf (depending upon which is installed on the system).
+be necessary to add some special logic to config files in
+/etc/modprobe.d/.
 
 	For example, given a modules.conf containing the following:
 
@@ -1821,20 +1835,15 @@ add above bonding e1000 tg3
 bonding is loaded.  This command is fully documented in the
 modules.conf manual page.
 
-	On systems utilizing modprobe.conf (or modprobe.conf.local),
-an equivalent problem can occur.  In this case, the following can be
-added to modprobe.conf (or modprobe.conf.local, as appropriate), as
-follows (all on one line; it has been split here for clarity):
+	On systems utilizing modprobe an equivalent problem can occur.
+In this case, the following can be added to config files in
+/etc/modprobe.d/ as:
 
-install bonding /sbin/modprobe tg3; /sbin/modprobe e1000;
-	/sbin/modprobe --ignore-install bonding
+softdep bonding pre: tg3 e1000
 
-	This will, when loading the bonding module, rather than
-performing the normal action, instead execute the provided command.
-This command loads the device drivers in the order needed, then calls
-modprobe with --ignore-install to cause the normal action to then take
-place.  Full documentation on this can be found in the modprobe.conf
-and modprobe manual pages.
+	This will load tg3 and e1000 modules before loading the bonding one.
+Full documentation on this can be found in the modprobe.d and modprobe
+manual pages.
 
 8.3. Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon
 ---------------------------------------------------------
@@ -1958,7 +1967,7 @@ access to fail over to.  Additionally, the bonding load balance modes
 support link monitoring of their members, so if individual links fail,
 the load will be rebalanced across the remaining devices.
 
-	See Section 13, "Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput"
+	See Section 12, "Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput"
 for information on configuring bonding with one peer device.
 
 11.2 High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology
@@ -2628,7 +2637,7 @@ be found at:
 
 https://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/bonding-devel
 
-	Discussions regarding the developpement of the bonding driver take place
+	Discussions regarding the development of the bonding driver take place
 on the main Linux network mailing list, hosted at vger.kernel.org. The list
 address is:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt b/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt
index a7ba5e4e2c91..a27cb6214ed7 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,14 @@
 In order to use the Ethernet bridging functionality, you'll need the
-userspace tools. These programs and documentation are available
-at http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/Net:Bridge.  The download page is
-http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/bridge.
+userspace tools.
+
+Documentation for Linux bridging is on:
+   http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/bridge
+
+The bridge-utilities are maintained at:
+   git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/shemminger/bridge-utils.git
+
+Additionally, the iproute2 utilities can be used to configure
+bridge devices.
 
 If you still have questions, don't hesitate to post to the mailing list 
 (more info https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bridge).
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt b/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt
index e52fd62bef3a..0aa4bd381bec 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt
@@ -19,60 +19,36 @@ and host. Currently, UART and Loopback are available for Linux.
 Architecture:
 ------------
 The implementation of CAIF is divided into:
-* CAIF Socket Layer, Kernel API, and  Net Device.
+* CAIF Socket Layer and GPRS IP Interface.
 * CAIF Core Protocol Implementation
 * CAIF Link Layer, implemented as NET devices.
 
 
   RTNL
    !
-   !	 +------+   +------+   +------+
-   !	+------+!  +------+!  +------+!
-   !	! Sock !!  !Kernel!!  ! Net  !!
-   !	! API  !+  ! API  !+  ! Dev  !+	  <- CAIF Client APIs
-   !	+------+   +------!   +------+
-   !	   !	      !		 !
-   !	   +----------!----------+
-   !		   +------+		  <- CAIF Protocol Implementation
-   +------->	   ! CAIF !
-		   ! Core !
-		   +------+
-	     +--------!--------+
-	     !		       !
-	  +------+	    +-----+
-	  !    	 !	    ! TTY !	  <- Link Layer (Net Devices)
-	  +------+	    +-----+
-
-
-Using the Kernel API
-----------------------
-The Kernel API is used for accessing CAIF channels from the
-kernel.
-The user of the API has to implement two callbacks for receive
-and control.
-The receive callback gives a CAIF packet as a SKB. The control
-callback will
-notify of channel initialization complete, and flow-on/flow-
-off.
-
-
-  struct caif_device caif_dev = {
-    .caif_config = {
-     .name = "MYDEV"
-     .type = CAIF_CHTY_AT
-    }
-   .receive_cb = my_receive,
-   .control_cb = my_control,
-  };
-  caif_add_device(&caif_dev);
-  caif_transmit(&caif_dev, skb);
-
-See the caif_kernel.h for details about the CAIF kernel API.
+   !	      +------+	 +------+
+   !	     +------+!	+------+!
+   !	     !	IP  !!	!Socket!!
+   +-------> !interf!+	! API  !+	<- CAIF Client APIs
+   !	     +------+	+------!
+   !		!	    !
+   !		+-----------+
+   !		      !
+   !		   +------+		<- CAIF Core Protocol
+   !		   ! CAIF !
+   !		   ! Core !
+   !		   +------+
+   !	   +----------!---------+
+   !	   !	      !		!
+   !	+------+   +-----+   +------+
+   +--> ! HSI  !   ! TTY !   ! USB  !	<- Link Layer (Net Devices)
+	+------+   +-----+   +------+
+
 
 
 I M P L E M E N T A T I O N
 ===========================
-===========================
+
 
 CAIF Core Protocol Layer
 =========================================
@@ -88,17 +64,13 @@ The Core CAIF implementation contains:
       -	Simple implementation of CAIF.
       -	Layered architecture (a la Streams), each layer in the CAIF
 	specification is implemented in a separate c-file.
-      -	Clients must implement PHY layer to access physical HW
-	with receive and transmit functions.
       -	Clients must call configuration function to add PHY layer.
       -	Clients must implement CAIF layer to consume/produce
 	CAIF payload with receive and transmit functions.
       -	Clients must call configuration function to add and connect the
 	Client layer.
       - When receiving / transmitting CAIF Packets (cfpkt), ownership is passed
-	to the called function (except for framing layers' receive functions
-	or if a transmit function returns an error, in which case the caller
-	must free the packet).
+	to the called function (except for framing layers' receive function)
 
 Layered Architecture
 --------------------
@@ -109,11 +81,6 @@ Implementation. The support functions include:
 	CAIF Packet has functions for creating, destroying and adding content
 	and for adding/extracting header and trailers to protocol packets.
 
-      - CFLST CAIF list implementation.
-
-      - CFGLUE CAIF Glue. Contains OS Specifics, such as memory
-	allocation, endianness, etc.
-
 The CAIF Protocol implementation contains:
 
       - CFCNFG CAIF Configuration layer. Configures the CAIF Protocol
@@ -128,7 +95,7 @@ The CAIF Protocol implementation contains:
 	control and remote shutdown requests.
 
       - CFVEI CAIF VEI layer. Handles CAIF AT Channels on VEI (Virtual
-        External Interface). This layer encodes/decodes VEI frames.
+	External Interface). This layer encodes/decodes VEI frames.
 
       - CFDGML CAIF Datagram layer. Handles CAIF Datagram layer (IP
 	traffic), encodes/decodes Datagram frames.
@@ -170,7 +137,7 @@ The CAIF Protocol implementation contains:
 	    +---------+	    +---------+
 		 !		!
 	    +---------+	    +---------+
-	    |         |	    | Serial  |
+	    |	      |	    | Serial  |
 	    |	      |	    | CFSERL  |
 	    +---------+	    +---------+
 
@@ -186,24 +153,20 @@ In this layered approach the following "rules" apply.
 		 layer->dn->transmit(layer->dn, packet);
 
 
-Linux Driver Implementation
+CAIF Socket and IP interface
 ===========================
 
-Linux GPRS Net Device and CAIF socket are implemented on top of the
-CAIF Core protocol. The Net device and CAIF socket have an instance of
+The IP interface and CAIF socket API are implemented on top of the
+CAIF Core protocol. The IP Interface and CAIF socket have an instance of
 'struct cflayer', just like the CAIF Core protocol stack.
 Net device and Socket implement the 'receive()' function defined by
 'struct cflayer', just like the rest of the CAIF stack. In this way, transmit and
 receive of packets is handled as by the rest of the layers: the 'dn->transmit()'
 function is called in order to transmit data.
 
-The layer on top of the CAIF Core implementation is
-sometimes referred to as the "Client layer".
-
-
 Configuration of Link Layer
 ---------------------------
-The Link Layer is implemented as Linux net devices (struct net_device).
+The Link Layer is implemented as Linux network devices (struct net_device).
 Payload handling and registration is done using standard Linux mechanisms.
 
 The CAIF Protocol relies on a loss-less link layer without implementing
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt
index 56ca3b75376e..820f55344edc 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt
@@ -22,7 +22,8 @@ This file contains
       4.1.2 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_ERR_FILTER
       4.1.3 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_LOOPBACK
       4.1.4 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_RECV_OWN_MSGS
-      4.1.5 RAW socket returned message flags
+      4.1.5 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_FD_FRAMES
+      4.1.6 RAW socket returned message flags
     4.2 Broadcast Manager protocol sockets (SOCK_DGRAM)
     4.3 connected transport protocols (SOCK_SEQPACKET)
     4.4 unconnected transport protocols (SOCK_DGRAM)
@@ -41,7 +42,8 @@ This file contains
       6.5.1 Netlink interface to set/get devices properties
       6.5.2 Setting the CAN bit-timing
       6.5.3 Starting and stopping the CAN network device
-    6.6 supported CAN hardware
+    6.6 CAN FD (flexible data rate) driver support
+    6.7 supported CAN hardware
 
   7 Socket CAN resources
 
@@ -232,16 +234,16 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
   arbitration problems and error frames caused by the different
   ECUs. The occurrence of detected errors are important for diagnosis
   and have to be logged together with the exact timestamp. For this
-  reason the CAN interface driver can generate so called Error Frames
-  that can optionally be passed to the user application in the same
-  way as other CAN frames. Whenever an error on the physical layer
+  reason the CAN interface driver can generate so called Error Message
+  Frames that can optionally be passed to the user application in the
+  same way as other CAN frames. Whenever an error on the physical layer
   or the MAC layer is detected (e.g. by the CAN controller) the driver
-  creates an appropriate error frame. Error frames can be requested by
-  the user application using the common CAN filter mechanisms. Inside
-  this filter definition the (interested) type of errors may be
-  selected. The reception of error frames is disabled by default.
-  The format of the CAN error frame is briefly described in the Linux
-  header file "include/linux/can/error.h".
+  creates an appropriate error message frame. Error messages frames can
+  be requested by the user application using the common CAN filter
+  mechanisms. Inside this filter definition the (interested) type of
+  errors may be selected. The reception of error messages is disabled
+  by default. The format of the CAN error message frame is briefly
+  described in the Linux header file "include/linux/can/error.h".
 
 4. How to use Socket CAN
 ------------------------
@@ -273,7 +275,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
 
     struct can_frame {
             canid_t can_id;  /* 32 bit CAN_ID + EFF/RTR/ERR flags */
-            __u8    can_dlc; /* data length code: 0 .. 8 */
+            __u8    can_dlc; /* frame payload length in byte (0 .. 8) */
             __u8    data[8] __attribute__((aligned(8)));
     };
 
@@ -375,6 +377,51 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
     nbytes = sendto(s, &frame, sizeof(struct can_frame),
                     0, (struct sockaddr*)&addr, sizeof(addr));
 
+  Remark about CAN FD (flexible data rate) support:
+
+  Generally the handling of CAN FD is very similar to the formerly described
+  examples. The new CAN FD capable CAN controllers support two different
+  bitrates for the arbitration phase and the payload phase of the CAN FD frame
+  and up to 64 bytes of payload. This extended payload length breaks all the
+  kernel interfaces (ABI) which heavily rely on the CAN frame with fixed eight
+  bytes of payload (struct can_frame) like the CAN_RAW socket. Therefore e.g.
+  the CAN_RAW socket supports a new socket option CAN_RAW_FD_FRAMES that
+  switches the socket into a mode that allows the handling of CAN FD frames
+  and (legacy) CAN frames simultaneously (see section 4.1.5).
+
+  The struct canfd_frame is defined in include/linux/can.h:
+
+    struct canfd_frame {
+            canid_t can_id;  /* 32 bit CAN_ID + EFF/RTR/ERR flags */
+            __u8    len;     /* frame payload length in byte (0 .. 64) */
+            __u8    flags;   /* additional flags for CAN FD */
+            __u8    __res0;  /* reserved / padding */
+            __u8    __res1;  /* reserved / padding */
+            __u8    data[64] __attribute__((aligned(8)));
+    };
+
+  The struct canfd_frame and the existing struct can_frame have the can_id,
+  the payload length and the payload data at the same offset inside their
+  structures. This allows to handle the different structures very similar.
+  When the content of a struct can_frame is copied into a struct canfd_frame
+  all structure elements can be used as-is - only the data[] becomes extended.
+
+  When introducing the struct canfd_frame it turned out that the data length
+  code (DLC) of the struct can_frame was used as a length information as the
+  length and the DLC has a 1:1 mapping in the range of 0 .. 8. To preserve
+  the easy handling of the length information the canfd_frame.len element
+  contains a plain length value from 0 .. 64. So both canfd_frame.len and
+  can_frame.can_dlc are equal and contain a length information and no DLC.
+  For details about the distinction of CAN and CAN FD capable devices and
+  the mapping to the bus-relevant data length code (DLC), see chapter 6.6.
+
+  The length of the two CAN(FD) frame structures define the maximum transfer
+  unit (MTU) of the CAN(FD) network interface and skbuff data length. Two
+  definitions are specified for CAN specific MTUs in include/linux/can.h :
+
+  #define CAN_MTU   (sizeof(struct can_frame))   == 16  => 'legacy' CAN frame
+  #define CANFD_MTU (sizeof(struct canfd_frame)) == 72  => CAN FD frame
+
   4.1 RAW protocol sockets with can_filters (SOCK_RAW)
 
   Using CAN_RAW sockets is extensively comparable to the commonly
@@ -383,7 +430,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
   defaults are set at RAW socket binding time:
 
   - The filters are set to exactly one filter receiving everything
-  - The socket only receives valid data frames (=> no error frames)
+  - The socket only receives valid data frames (=> no error message frames)
   - The loopback of sent CAN frames is enabled (see chapter 3.2)
   - The socket does not receive its own sent frames (in loopback mode)
 
@@ -434,7 +481,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
   4.1.2 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_ERR_FILTER
 
   As described in chapter 3.4 the CAN interface driver can generate so
-  called Error Frames that can optionally be passed to the user
+  called Error Message Frames that can optionally be passed to the user
   application in the same way as other CAN frames. The possible
   errors are divided into different error classes that may be filtered
   using the appropriate error mask. To register for every possible
@@ -472,7 +519,69 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
     setsockopt(s, SOL_CAN_RAW, CAN_RAW_RECV_OWN_MSGS,
                &recv_own_msgs, sizeof(recv_own_msgs));
 
-  4.1.5 RAW socket returned message flags
+  4.1.5 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_FD_FRAMES
+
+  CAN FD support in CAN_RAW sockets can be enabled with a new socket option
+  CAN_RAW_FD_FRAMES which is off by default. When the new socket option is
+  not supported by the CAN_RAW socket (e.g. on older kernels), switching the
+  CAN_RAW_FD_FRAMES option returns the error -ENOPROTOOPT.
+
+  Once CAN_RAW_FD_FRAMES is enabled the application can send both CAN frames
+  and CAN FD frames. OTOH the application has to handle CAN and CAN FD frames
+  when reading from the socket.
+
+    CAN_RAW_FD_FRAMES enabled:  CAN_MTU and CANFD_MTU are allowed
+    CAN_RAW_FD_FRAMES disabled: only CAN_MTU is allowed (default)
+
+  Example:
+    [ remember: CANFD_MTU == sizeof(struct canfd_frame) ]
+
+    struct canfd_frame cfd;
+
+    nbytes = read(s, &cfd, CANFD_MTU);
+
+    if (nbytes == CANFD_MTU) {
+            printf("got CAN FD frame with length %d\n", cfd.len);
+	    /* cfd.flags contains valid data */
+    } else if (nbytes == CAN_MTU) {
+            printf("got legacy CAN frame with length %d\n", cfd.len);
+	    /* cfd.flags is undefined */
+    } else {
+            fprintf(stderr, "read: invalid CAN(FD) frame\n");
+            return 1;
+    }
+
+    /* the content can be handled independently from the received MTU size */
+
+    printf("can_id: %X data length: %d data: ", cfd.can_id, cfd.len);
+    for (i = 0; i < cfd.len; i++)
+            printf("%02X ", cfd.data[i]);
+
+  When reading with size CANFD_MTU only returns CAN_MTU bytes that have
+  been received from the socket a legacy CAN frame has been read into the
+  provided CAN FD structure. Note that the canfd_frame.flags data field is
+  not specified in the struct can_frame and therefore it is only valid in
+  CANFD_MTU sized CAN FD frames.
+
+  As long as the payload length is <=8 the received CAN frames from CAN FD
+  capable CAN devices can be received and read by legacy sockets too. When
+  user-generated CAN FD frames have a payload length <=8 these can be send
+  by legacy CAN network interfaces too. Sending CAN FD frames with payload
+  length > 8 to a legacy CAN network interface returns an -EMSGSIZE error.
+
+  Implementation hint for new CAN applications:
+
+  To build a CAN FD aware application use struct canfd_frame as basic CAN
+  data structure for CAN_RAW based applications. When the application is
+  executed on an older Linux kernel and switching the CAN_RAW_FD_FRAMES
+  socket option returns an error: No problem. You'll get legacy CAN frames
+  or CAN FD frames and can process them the same way.
+
+  When sending to CAN devices make sure that the device is capable to handle
+  CAN FD frames by checking if the device maximum transfer unit is CANFD_MTU.
+  The CAN device MTU can be retrieved e.g. with a SIOCGIFMTU ioctl() syscall.
+
+  4.1.6 RAW socket returned message flags
 
   When using recvmsg() call, the msg->msg_flags may contain following flags:
 
@@ -527,7 +636,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
 
     rcvlist_all - list for unfiltered entries (no filter operations)
     rcvlist_eff - list for single extended frame (EFF) entries
-    rcvlist_err - list for error frames masks
+    rcvlist_err - list for error message frames masks
     rcvlist_fil - list for mask/value filters
     rcvlist_inv - list for mask/value filters (inverse semantic)
     rcvlist_sff - list for single standard frame (SFF) entries
@@ -573,10 +682,13 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
     dev->type  = ARPHRD_CAN; /* the netdevice hardware type */
     dev->flags = IFF_NOARP;  /* CAN has no arp */
 
-    dev->mtu   = sizeof(struct can_frame);
+    dev->mtu = CAN_MTU; /* sizeof(struct can_frame) -> legacy CAN interface */
 
-  The struct can_frame is the payload of each socket buffer in the
-  protocol family PF_CAN.
+    or alternative, when the controller supports CAN with flexible data rate:
+    dev->mtu = CANFD_MTU; /* sizeof(struct canfd_frame) -> CAN FD interface */
+
+  The struct can_frame or struct canfd_frame is the payload of each socket
+  buffer (skbuff) in the protocol family PF_CAN.
 
   6.2 local loopback of sent frames
 
@@ -649,7 +761,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
   The CAN device must be configured via netlink interface. The supported
   netlink message types are defined and briefly described in
   "include/linux/can/netlink.h". CAN link support for the program "ip"
-  of the IPROUTE2 utility suite is avaiable and it can be used as shown
+  of the IPROUTE2 utility suite is available and it can be used as shown
   below:
 
   - Setting CAN device properties:
@@ -784,15 +896,41 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
     $ ip link set canX type can restart-ms 100
 
   Alternatively, the application may realize the "bus-off" condition
-  by monitoring CAN error frames and do a restart when appropriate with
-  the command:
+  by monitoring CAN error message frames and do a restart when
+  appropriate with the command:
 
     $ ip link set canX type can restart
 
-  Note that a restart will also create a CAN error frame (see also
-  chapter 3.4).
+  Note that a restart will also create a CAN error message frame (see
+  also chapter 3.4).
+
+  6.6 CAN FD (flexible data rate) driver support
+
+  CAN FD capable CAN controllers support two different bitrates for the
+  arbitration phase and the payload phase of the CAN FD frame. Therefore a
+  second bittiming has to be specified in order to enable the CAN FD bitrate.
+
+  Additionally CAN FD capable CAN controllers support up to 64 bytes of
+  payload. The representation of this length in can_frame.can_dlc and
+  canfd_frame.len for userspace applications and inside the Linux network
+  layer is a plain value from 0 .. 64 instead of the CAN 'data length code'.
+  The data length code was a 1:1 mapping to the payload length in the legacy
+  CAN frames anyway. The payload length to the bus-relevant DLC mapping is
+  only performed inside the CAN drivers, preferably with the helper
+  functions can_dlc2len() and can_len2dlc().
+
+  The CAN netdevice driver capabilities can be distinguished by the network
+  devices maximum transfer unit (MTU):
+
+  MTU = 16 (CAN_MTU)   => sizeof(struct can_frame)   => 'legacy' CAN device
+  MTU = 72 (CANFD_MTU) => sizeof(struct canfd_frame) => CAN FD capable device
+
+  The CAN device MTU can be retrieved e.g. with a SIOCGIFMTU ioctl() syscall.
+  N.B. CAN FD capable devices can also handle and send legacy CAN frames.
+
+  FIXME: Add details about the CAN FD controller configuration when available.
 
-  6.6 Supported CAN hardware
+  6.7 Supported CAN hardware
 
   Please check the "Kconfig" file in "drivers/net/can" to get an actual
   list of the support CAN hardware. On the Socket CAN project website
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt b/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt
index c725d33b316f..0e190180eec8 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt
@@ -36,7 +36,6 @@ TABLE OF CONTENTS
     4.1 Compiling the Driver as a Loadable Module
     4.2 Compiling the driver to support memory mode
     4.3 Compiling the driver to support Rx DMA 
-    4.4 Compiling the Driver into the Kernel
 
 5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
     5.1 Known Defects and Limitations
@@ -364,84 +363,6 @@ The compile-time optionality for DMA was removed in the 2.3 kernel
 series.  DMA support is now unconditionally part of the driver.  It is
 enabled by the 'use_dma=1' module option.
 
-4.4 COMPILING THE DRIVER INTO THE KERNEL
-
-If your Linux distribution already has support for the cs89x0 driver
-then simply copy the source file to the /usr/src/linux/drivers/net
-directory to replace the original ones and run the make utility to
-rebuild the kernel.  See Step 3 for rebuilding the kernel.
-
-If your Linux does not include the cs89x0 driver, you need to edit three 
-configuration files, copy the source file to the /usr/src/linux/drivers/net
-directory, and then run the make utility to rebuild the kernel.
-
-1. Edit the following configuration files by adding the statements as
-indicated.  (When possible, try to locate the added text to the section of the
-file containing similar statements).
-
-
-a.) In /usr/src/linux/drivers/net/Config.in, add:
-
-tristate 'CS89x0 support' CONFIG_CS89x0
-
-Example:
-
-     if [ "$CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL" = "y" ]; then
-       tristate 'ICL EtherTeam 16i/32 support' CONFIG_ETH16I
-     fi
-
-     tristate 'CS89x0 support' CONFIG_CS89x0
-
-     tristate 'NE2000/NE1000 support' CONFIG_NE2000
-     if [ "$CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL" = "y" ]; then
-       tristate 'NI5210 support' CONFIG_NI52
-
-
-b.) In /usr/src/linux/drivers/net/Makefile, add the following lines: 
-
-ifeq ($(CONFIG_CS89x0),y)
-L_OBJS += cs89x0.o
-else
-  ifeq ($(CONFIG_CS89x0),m)
-  M_OBJS += cs89x0.o
-  endif
-endif
-
-
-c.) In /linux/drivers/net/Space.c file, add the line:
-
-extern int cs89x0_probe(struct device *dev);
-
-
-Example:
-
- extern int ultra_probe(struct device *dev);
- extern int wd_probe(struct device *dev);
- extern int el2_probe(struct device *dev);
-
- extern int cs89x0_probe(struct device *dev);
-
- extern int ne_probe(struct device *dev);
- extern int hp_probe(struct device *dev);
- extern int hp_plus_probe(struct device *dev);
-
-
-Also add:
-
- #ifdef CONFIG_CS89x0
- 	{ cs89x0_probe,0 },
- #endif
-
-
-2.) Copy the driver source files (cs89x0.c and cs89x0.h) 
-into the /usr/src/linux/drivers/net directory.
-
-
-3.) Go to /usr/src/linux directory and run 'make config' followed by 'make' 
-(or make bzImage) to rebuild the kernel. 
-
-4.) Use the DOS 'setup' utility to disable plug and play on the NIC.
-
 
 5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
 ===============================================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/depca.txt b/Documentation/networking/depca.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 24c6b26e5658..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/networking/depca.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
-
-DE10x
-=====
-
-Memory Addresses:
-
-	SW1	SW2	SW3	SW4
-64K	on	on	on	on	d0000	dbfff
-	off	on	on	on	c0000	cbfff
-	off	off	on	on	e0000	ebfff
-
-32K	on	on	off	on	d8000	dbfff
-	off	on	off	on	c8000	cbfff
-	off	off	off	on	e8000	ebfff
-
-DBR ROM	on	on			dc000	dffff
-	off	on			cc000	cffff
-	off	off			ec000	effff
-
-Note  that the 2K  mode   is set  by   SW3/SW4  on/off or  off/off.  Address
-assignment is through the RBSA register.
-
-I/O Address:
-	SW5
-0x300	on
-0x200	off
-
-Remote Boot:
-	SW6
-Disable	on
-Enable	off
-
-Remote Boot Timeout:
-	SW7
-2.5min	on
-30s	off
-
-IRQ:
-	SW8	SW9	SW10	SW11	SW12
-2	on	off	off	off	off
-3	off	on	off	off	off
-4	off	off	on	off	off
-5	off	off	off	on	off
-7	off	off	off	off	on
-
-DE20x
-=====
-
-Memory Size:
-
-	SW3	SW4
-64K	on	on
-32K	off	on
-2K	on 	off
-2K	off	off
-
-Start Addresses:
-
-	SW1	SW2	SW3	SW4
-64K	on	on	on	on	c0000	cffff
-	on	off	on	on	d0000	dffff
-	off	on	on	on	e0000	effff
-
-32K	on	on	off	off	c8000	cffff
-	on	off	off	off	d8000	dffff
-	off	on	off	off	e8000	effff
-
-Illegal	off	off	 -	 -	  -	  -
-
-I/O Address:
-	SW5
-0x300	on
-0x200	off
-
-Remote Boot:
-	SW6
-Disable	on
-Enable	off
-
-Remote Boot Timeout:
-	SW7
-2.5min	on
-30s	off
-
-IRQ:
-	SW8	SW9	SW10	SW11	SW12
-5	on	off	off	off	off
-9	off	on	off	off	off
-10	off	off	on	off	off
-11	off	off	off	on	off
-15	off	off	off	off	on
-
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt b/Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt
index 10e8490fa406..cba74f7a3abc 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt
@@ -45,12 +45,13 @@ Now eth0 should active, you can test it by "ping" or get more information by
 "ifconfig". If tested ok, continue the next step.
 
 4. cp dl2k.ko /lib/modules/`uname -r`/kernel/drivers/net
-5. Add the following line to /etc/modprobe.conf:
+5. Add the following line to /etc/modprobe.d/dl2k.conf:
 	alias eth0 dl2k
-6. Run "netconfig" or "netconf" to create configuration script ifcfg-eth0
+6. Run depmod to updated module indexes.
+7. Run "netconfig" or "netconf" to create configuration script ifcfg-eth0
    located at /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts or create it manually.
    [see - Configuration Script Sample]
-7. Driver will automatically load and configure at next boot time.
+8. Driver will automatically load and configure at next boot time.
 
 Compiling the Driver
 ====================
@@ -154,8 +155,8 @@ Installing the Driver
   -----------------
   1. Copy dl2k.o to the network modules directory, typically
      /lib/modules/2.x.x-xx/net or /lib/modules/2.x.x/kernel/drivers/net.
-  2. Locate the boot module configuration file, most commonly modprobe.conf
-     or modules.conf (for 2.4) in the /etc directory. Add the following lines:
+  2. Locate the boot module configuration file, most commonly in the
+     /etc/modprobe.d/ directory. Add the following lines:
 
      alias ethx dl2k
      options dl2k <optional parameters>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/driver.txt b/Documentation/networking/driver.txt
index 03283daa64fe..da59e2884130 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/driver.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/driver.txt
@@ -2,16 +2,16 @@ Document about softnet driver issues
 
 Transmit path guidelines:
 
-1) The hard_start_xmit method must never return '1' under any
-   normal circumstances.  It is considered a hard error unless
+1) The ndo_start_xmit method must not return NETDEV_TX_BUSY under
+   any normal circumstances.  It is considered a hard error unless
    there is no way your device can tell ahead of time when it's
    transmit function will become busy.
 
    Instead it must maintain the queue properly.  For example,
    for a driver implementing scatter-gather this means:
 
-	static int drv_hard_start_xmit(struct sk_buff *skb,
-		   		       struct net_device *dev)
+	static netdev_tx_t drv_hard_start_xmit(struct sk_buff *skb,
+					       struct net_device *dev)
 	{
 		struct drv *dp = netdev_priv(dev);
 
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ Transmit path guidelines:
 			unlock_tx(dp);
 			printk(KERN_ERR PFX "%s: BUG! Tx Ring full when queue awake!\n",
 			       dev->name);
-			return 1;
+			return NETDEV_TX_BUSY;
 		}
 
 		... queue packet to card ...
@@ -35,6 +35,7 @@ Transmit path guidelines:
 		...
 		unlock_tx(dp);
 		...
+		return NETDEV_TX_OK;
 	}
 
    And then at the end of your TX reclamation event handling:
@@ -58,15 +59,12 @@ Transmit path guidelines:
             TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) > 0)
 		netif_wake_queue(dp->dev);
 
-2) Do not forget to update netdev->trans_start to jiffies after
-   each new tx packet is given to the hardware.
-
-3) A hard_start_xmit method must not modify the shared parts of a
+2) An ndo_start_xmit method must not modify the shared parts of a
    cloned SKB.
 
-4) Do not forget that once you return 0 from your hard_start_xmit
-   method, it is your driver's responsibility to free up the SKB
-   and in some finite amount of time.
+3) Do not forget that once you return NETDEV_TX_OK from your
+   ndo_start_xmit method, it is your driver's responsibility to free
+   up the SKB and in some finite amount of time.
 
    For example, this means that it is not allowed for your TX
    mitigation scheme to let TX packets "hang out" in the TX
@@ -74,8 +72,9 @@ Transmit path guidelines:
    This error can deadlock sockets waiting for send buffer room
    to be freed up.
 
-   If you return 1 from the hard_start_xmit method, you must not keep
-   any reference to that SKB and you must not attempt to free it up.
+   If you return NETDEV_TX_BUSY from the ndo_start_xmit method, you
+   must not keep any reference to that SKB and you must not attempt
+   to free it up.
 
 Probing guidelines:
 
@@ -85,10 +84,10 @@ Probing guidelines:
 
 Close/stop guidelines:
 
-1) After the dev->stop routine has been called, the hardware must
+1) After the ndo_stop routine has been called, the hardware must
    not receive or transmit any data.  All in flight packets must
    be aborted. If necessary, poll or wait for completion of 
    any reset commands.
 
-2) The dev->stop routine will be called by unregister_netdevice
+2) The ndo_stop routine will be called by unregister_netdevice
    if device is still UP.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e100.txt b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt
index 162f323a7a1f..13a32124bca0 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/e100.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of Adapters
 ==============================================================
 
-November 15, 2005
+March 15, 2011
 
 Contents
 ========
@@ -94,8 +94,8 @@ Additional Configurations
 
   Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started is
   distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves adding
-  an alias line to /etc/modules.conf or /etc/modprobe.conf as well as editing
-  other system startup scripts and/or configuration files.  Many popular Linux
+  an alias line to /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf as well as editing other system
+  startup scripts and/or configuration files.  Many popular Linux
   distributions ship with tools to make these changes for you. To learn the
   proper way to configure a network device for your system, refer to your
   distribution documentation.  If during this process you are asked for the
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Additional Configurations
   PRO/100 Family of Adapters is e100.
 
   As an example, if you install the e100 driver for two PRO/100 adapters
-  (eth0 and eth1), add the following to modules.conf or modprobe.conf:
+  (eth0 and eth1), add the following to a configuraton file in /etc/modprobe.d/
 
        alias eth0 e100
        alias eth1 e100
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Additional Configurations
   NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots.
 
 
-  Ethtool
+  ethtool
   -------
 
   The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt
index 71ca95855671..437b2099cced 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/1000 Family of Adapters
-===============================================================
+Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+===========================================================
 
 Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
-Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation.
+Copyright(c) 1999 - 2013 Intel Corporation.
 
 Contents
 ========
@@ -420,15 +420,15 @@ Additional Configurations
   - The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 16110.  This value coincides
     with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 16128.
 
-  - Using Jumbo Frames at 10 or 100 Mbps may result in poor performance or
-    loss of link.
+  - Using Jumbo frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in
+    poor performance or loss of link.
 
   - Adapters based on the Intel(R) 82542 and 82573V/E controller do not
     support Jumbo Frames. These correspond to the following product names:
      Intel(R) PRO/1000 Gigabit Server Adapter
      Intel(R) PRO/1000 PM Network Connection
 
-  Ethtool
+  ethtool
   -------
   The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
   diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  The ethtool
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt
index 97b5ba942ebf..ad2d9f38ce14 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-Linux* Driver for Intel(R) Network Connection
-=============================================
+Linux* Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+======================================================
 
 Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
-Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation.
+Copyright(c) 1999 - 2013 Intel Corporation.
 
 Contents
 ========
@@ -259,13 +259,16 @@ Additional Configurations
   - The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 9216.  This value coincides
     with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9234 bytes.
 
-  - Using Jumbo Frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in
+  - Using Jumbo frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in
     poor performance or loss of link.
 
   - Some adapters limit Jumbo Frames sized packets to a maximum of
     4096 bytes and some adapters do not support Jumbo Frames.
 
-  Ethtool
+  - Jumbo Frames cannot be configured on an 82579-based Network device, if
+    MACSec is enabled on the system.
+
+  ethtool
   -------
   The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
   diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  We
@@ -273,6 +276,9 @@ Additional Configurations
 
   http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
 
+  NOTE: When validating enable/disable tests on some parts (82578, for example)
+  you need to add a few seconds between tests when working with ethtool.
+
   Speed and Duplex
   ----------------
   Speed and Duplex are configured through the ethtool* utility. For
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ewrk3.txt b/Documentation/networking/ewrk3.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 90e9e5f16e6b..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/networking/ewrk3.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-The EtherWORKS 3  driver in this distribution is  designed to  work with all
-kernels   >  1.1.33   (approx)  and  includes  tools   in  the  'ewrk3tools'
-subdirectory   to  allow  set   up of   the   card,  similar  to  the  MSDOS
-'NICSETUP.EXE' tools provided on  the DOS drivers  disk (type 'make' in that
-subdirectory to make the tools).
-
-The supported  cards are DE203,  DE204 and DE205.  All   other cards are NOT
-supported - refer to 'depca.c' for running the LANCE based network cards and
-'de4x5.c'  for the  DIGITAL   Semiconductor PCI  chip  based  adapters  from
-Digital.
-
-The ability to load  this driver as a  loadable module has been included and
-used extensively  during the driver  development (to save those  long reboot
-sequences). To utilise this ability, you have to do 8 things:
-
-    0) have a copy of the loadable modules code installed on your system.
-    1) copy ewrk3.c from the  /linux/drivers/net directory to your favourite
-    temporary directory.
-    2) edit the  source code near  line 1898 to reflect  the I/O address and
-    IRQ you're using.
-    3) compile  ewrk3.c, but include -DMODULE in  the command line to ensure
-    that the correct bits are compiled (see end of source code).
-    4) if you are wanting to add a new  card, goto 5. Otherwise, recompile a
-    kernel with the ewrk3 configuration turned off and reboot.
-    5) insmod ewrk3.o
-          [Alan Cox: Changed this so you can insmod ewrk3.o irq=x io=y]
-          [Adam Kropelin: Multiple cards now supported by irq=x1,x2 io=y1,y2]
-    6) run the net startup bits for your new eth?? interface manually 
-    (usually /etc/rc.inet[12] at boot time). 
-    7) enjoy!
-
-    Note that autoprobing is not allowed in loadable modules - the system is
-    already up and running and you're messing with interrupts.
-
-    To unload a module, turn off the associated interface 
-    'ifconfig eth?? down' then 'rmmod ewrk3'.
-
-The performance we've  achieved so far  has been measured through the 'ttcp'
-tool   at 975kB/s.  This  measures  the  total  TCP  stack performance which
-includes the   card,  so don't  expect   to get   much nearer  the  1.25MB/s
-theoretical Ethernet rate.
-
-
-Enjoy!
-
-Dave
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/filter.txt b/Documentation/networking/filter.txt
index bbf2005270b5..cdb3e40b9d14 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/filter.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/filter.txt
@@ -17,12 +17,12 @@ creating filters.
 
 LSF is much simpler than BPF. One does not have to worry about
 devices or anything like that. You simply create your filter
-code, send it to the kernel via the SO_ATTACH_FILTER ioctl and
+code, send it to the kernel via the SO_ATTACH_FILTER option and
 if your filter code passes the kernel check on it, you then
 immediately begin filtering data on that socket.
 
 You can also detach filters from your socket via the
-SO_DETACH_FILTER ioctl. This will probably not be used much
+SO_DETACH_FILTER option. This will probably not be used much
 since when you close a socket that has a filter on it the
 filter is automagically removed. The other less common case
 may be adding a different filter on the same socket where you had another
@@ -31,12 +31,19 @@ the old one and placing your new one in its place, assuming your
 filter has passed the checks, otherwise if it fails the old filter
 will remain on that socket.
 
+SO_LOCK_FILTER option allows to lock the filter attached to a
+socket. Once set, a filter cannot be removed or changed. This allows
+one process to setup a socket, attach a filter, lock it then drop
+privileges and be assured that the filter will be kept until the
+socket is closed.
+
 Examples
 ========
 
 Ioctls-
 setsockopt(sockfd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_ATTACH_FILTER, &Filter, sizeof(Filter));
 setsockopt(sockfd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_DETACH_FILTER, &value, sizeof(value));
+setsockopt(sockfd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_LOCK_FILTER, &value, sizeof(value));
 
 See the BSD bpf.4 manpage and the BSD Packet Filter paper written by
 Steven McCanne and Van Jacobson of Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/fore200e.txt b/Documentation/networking/fore200e.txt
index f648eb265188..d52af53efdc5 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/fore200e.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/fore200e.txt
@@ -11,12 +11,10 @@ i386, alpha (untested), powerpc, sparc and sparc64 archs.
 
 The intent is to enable the use of different models of FORE adapters at the
 same time, by hosts that have several bus interfaces (such as PCI+SBUS,
-PCI+MCA or PCI+EISA).
+or PCI+EISA).
 
 Only PCI and SBUS devices are currently supported by the driver, but support
-for other bus interfaces such as EISA should not be too hard to add (this may
-be more tricky for the MCA bus, though, as FORE made some MCA-specific
-modifications to the adapter's AALI interface).
+for other bus interfaces such as EISA should not be too hard to add.
 
 
 Firmware Copyright Notice
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/i40e.txt b/Documentation/networking/i40e.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f737273c6dc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/i40e.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller XL710 Family
+===================================================================
+
+Intel i40e Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 2013 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Additional Configurations
+- Performance Tuning
+- Known Issues
+- Support
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+The driver in this release is compatible with the Intel Ethernet
+Controller XL710 Family.
+
+For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter &
+Driver ID Guide at:
+
+    http://support.intel.com/support/network/sb/CS-012904.htm
+
+
+Enabling the driver
+===================
+
+The driver is enabled via the standard kernel configuration system,
+using the make command:
+
+     Make oldconfig/silentoldconfig/menuconfig/etc.
+
+The driver is located in the menu structure at:
+
+	-> Device Drivers
+	  -> Network device support (NETDEVICES [=y])
+	    -> Ethernet driver support
+	      -> Intel devices
+	        -> Intel(R) Ethernet Controller XL710 Family
+
+Additional Configurations
+=========================
+
+  Generic Receive Offload (GRO)
+  -----------------------------
+  The driver supports the in-kernel software implementation of GRO.  GRO has
+  shown that by coalescing Rx traffic into larger chunks of data, CPU
+  utilization can be significantly reduced when under large Rx load.  GRO is
+  an evolution of the previously-used LRO interface.  GRO is able to coalesce
+  other protocols besides TCP.  It's also safe to use with configurations that
+  are problematic for LRO, namely bridging and iSCSI.
+
+  Ethtool
+  -------
+  The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+  diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest
+  ethtool version is required for this functionality.
+
+  The latest release of ethtool can be found from
+  https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool
+
+  Data Center Bridging (DCB)
+  --------------------------
+  DCB configuration is not currently supported.
+
+  FCoE
+  ----
+  Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) hardware offload is not currently
+  supported.
+
+  MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature
+  ----------------------------------
+  When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by
+  the hardware and not transmitted.  An interrupt is sent to the PF driver
+  notifying it of the spoof attempt.
+
+  When a spoofed packet is detected the PF driver will send the following
+  message to the system log (displayed by  the "dmesg" command):
+
+  Spoof event(s) detected on VF (n)
+
+  Where n=the VF that attempted to do the spoofing.
+
+
+Performance Tuning
+==================
+
+An excellent article on performance tuning can be found at:
+
+http://www.redhat.com/promo/summit/2008/downloads/pdf/Thursday/Mark_Wagner.pdf
+
+
+Known Issues
+============
+
+
+Support
+=======
+
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+    http://support.intel.com
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+    http://e1000.sourceforge.net
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported
+kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related
+to the issue to e1000-devel@lists.sourceforge.net and copy
+netdev@vger.kernel.org.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt
index 1dc1c24a7547..09eb57329f11 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt
@@ -4,15 +4,22 @@
 
 Introduction
 ============
+The IEEE 802.15.4 working group focuses on standartization of bottom
+two layers: Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical (PHY). And there
+are mainly two options available for upper layers:
+ - ZigBee - proprietary protocol from ZigBee Alliance
+ - 6LowPAN - IPv6 networking over low rate personal area networks
 
 The Linux-ZigBee project goal is to provide complete implementation
-of IEEE 802.15.4 / ZigBee / 6LoWPAN protocols. IEEE 802.15.4 is a stack
+of IEEE 802.15.4 and 6LoWPAN protocols. IEEE 802.15.4 is a stack
 of protocols for organizing Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Networks.
 
-Currently only IEEE 802.15.4 layer is implemented. We have chosen
-to use plain Berkeley socket API, the generic Linux networking stack
-to transfer IEEE 802.15.4 messages and a special protocol over genetlink
-for configuration/management
+The stack is composed of three main parts:
+ - IEEE 802.15.4 layer;  We have chosen to use plain Berkeley socket API,
+   the generic Linux networking stack to transfer IEEE 802.15.4 messages
+   and a special protocol over genetlink for configuration/management
+ - MAC - provides access to shared channel and reliable data delivery
+ - PHY - represents device drivers
 
 
 Socket API
@@ -29,15 +36,6 @@ or git tree at git://linux-zigbee.git.sourceforge.net/gitroot/linux-zigbee).
 One can use SOCK_RAW for passing raw data towards device xmit function. YMMV.
 
 
-MLME - MAC Level Management
-============================
-
-Most of IEEE 802.15.4 MLME interfaces are directly mapped on netlink commands.
-See the include/net/nl802154.h header. Our userspace tools package
-(see above) provides CLI configuration utility for radio interfaces and simple
-coordinator for IEEE 802.15.4 networks as an example users of MLME protocol.
-
-
 Kernel side
 =============
 
@@ -51,6 +49,15 @@ Like with WiFi, there are several types of devices implementing IEEE 802.15.4.
 Those types of devices require different approach to be hooked into Linux kernel.
 
 
+MLME - MAC Level Management
+============================
+
+Most of IEEE 802.15.4 MLME interfaces are directly mapped on netlink commands.
+See the include/net/nl802154.h header. Our userspace tools package
+(see above) provides CLI configuration utility for radio interfaces and simple
+coordinator for IEEE 802.15.4 networks as an example users of MLME protocol.
+
+
 HardMAC
 =======
 
@@ -64,8 +71,9 @@ submits skb to qdisc), so if you need something from that cb later, you should
 store info in the skb->data on your own.
 
 To hook the MLME interface you have to populate the ml_priv field of your
-net_device with a pointer to struct ieee802154_mlme_ops instance. All fields are
-required.
+net_device with a pointer to struct ieee802154_mlme_ops instance. The fields
+assoc_req, assoc_resp, disassoc_req, start_req, and scan_req are optional.
+All other fields are required.
 
 We provide an example of simple HardMAC driver at drivers/ieee802154/fakehard.c
 
@@ -73,11 +81,47 @@ We provide an example of simple HardMAC driver at drivers/ieee802154/fakehard.c
 SoftMAC
 =======
 
-We are going to provide intermediate layer implementing IEEE 802.15.4 MAC
-in software. This is currently WIP.
+The MAC is the middle layer in the IEEE 802.15.4 Linux stack. This moment it
+provides interface for drivers registration and management of slave interfaces.
+
+NOTE: Currently the only monitor device type is supported - it's IEEE 802.15.4
+stack interface for network sniffers (e.g. WireShark).
+
+This layer is going to be extended soon.
 
 See header include/net/mac802154.h and several drivers in drivers/ieee802154/.
 
+
+Device drivers API
+==================
+
+The include/net/mac802154.h defines following functions:
+ - struct ieee802154_dev *ieee802154_alloc_device
+   (size_t priv_size, struct ieee802154_ops *ops):
+   allocation of IEEE 802.15.4 compatible device
+
+ - void ieee802154_free_device(struct ieee802154_dev *dev):
+   freeing allocated device
+
+ - int ieee802154_register_device(struct ieee802154_dev *dev):
+   register PHY in the system
+
+ - void ieee802154_unregister_device(struct ieee802154_dev *dev):
+   freeing registered PHY
+
+Moreover IEEE 802.15.4 device operations structure should be filled.
+
+Fake drivers
+============
+
+In addition there are two drivers available which simulate real devices with
+HardMAC (fakehard) and SoftMAC (fakelb - IEEE 802.15.4 loopback driver)
+interfaces. This option provides possibility to test and debug stack without
+usage of real hardware.
+
+See sources in drivers/ieee802154 folder for more details.
+
+
 6LoWPAN Linux implementation
 ============================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c b/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c
deleted file mode 100644
index ac5debb2f16c..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1105 +0,0 @@
-/* Mode: C;
- * ifenslave.c: Configure network interfaces for parallel routing.
- *
- *	This program controls the Linux implementation of running multiple
- *	network interfaces in parallel.
- *
- * Author:	Donald Becker <becker@cesdis.gsfc.nasa.gov>
- *		Copyright 1994-1996 Donald Becker
- *
- *		This program is free software; you can redistribute it
- *		and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
- *		License as published by the Free Software Foundation.
- *
- *	The author may be reached as becker@CESDIS.gsfc.nasa.gov, or C/O
- *	Center of Excellence in Space Data and Information Sciences
- *	   Code 930.5, Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt MD 20771
- *
- *  Changes :
- *    - 2000/10/02 Willy Tarreau <willy at meta-x.org> :
- *       - few fixes. Master's MAC address is now correctly taken from
- *         the first device when not previously set ;
- *       - detach support : call BOND_RELEASE to detach an enslaved interface.
- *       - give a mini-howto from command-line help : # ifenslave -h
- *
- *    - 2001/02/16 Chad N. Tindel <ctindel at ieee dot org> :
- *       - Master is now brought down before setting the MAC address.  In
- *         the 2.4 kernel you can't change the MAC address while the device is
- *         up because you get EBUSY.
- *
- *    - 2001/09/13 Takao Indoh <indou dot takao at jp dot fujitsu dot com>
- *       - Added the ability to change the active interface on a mode 1 bond
- *         at runtime.
- *
- *    - 2001/10/23 Chad N. Tindel <ctindel at ieee dot org> :
- *       - No longer set the MAC address of the master.  The bond device will
- *         take care of this itself
- *       - Try the SIOC*** versions of the bonding ioctls before using the
- *         old versions
- *    - 2002/02/18 Erik Habbinga <erik_habbinga @ hp dot com> :
- *       - ifr2.ifr_flags was not initialized in the hwaddr_notset case,
- *         SIOCGIFFLAGS now called before hwaddr_notset test
- *
- *    - 2002/10/31 Tony Cureington <tony.cureington * hp_com> :
- *       - If the master does not have a hardware address when the first slave
- *         is enslaved, the master is assigned the hardware address of that
- *         slave - there is a comment in bonding.c stating "ifenslave takes
- *         care of this now." This corrects the problem of slaves having
- *         different hardware addresses in active-backup mode when
- *         multiple interfaces are specified on a single ifenslave command
- *         (ifenslave bond0 eth0 eth1).
- *
- *    - 2003/03/18 - Tsippy Mendelson <tsippy.mendelson at intel dot com> and
- *                   Shmulik Hen <shmulik.hen at intel dot com>
- *       - Moved setting the slave's mac address and openning it, from
- *         the application to the driver. This enables support of modes
- *         that need to use the unique mac address of each slave.
- *         The driver also takes care of closing the slave and restoring its
- *         original mac address upon release.
- *         In addition, block possibility of enslaving before the master is up.
- *         This prevents putting the system in an undefined state.
- *
- *    - 2003/05/01 - Amir Noam <amir.noam at intel dot com>
- *       - Added ABI version control to restore compatibility between
- *         new/old ifenslave and new/old bonding.
- *       - Prevent adding an adapter that is already a slave.
- *         Fixes the problem of stalling the transmission and leaving
- *         the slave in a down state.
- *
- *    - 2003/05/01 - Shmulik Hen <shmulik.hen at intel dot com>
- *       - Prevent enslaving if the bond device is down.
- *         Fixes the problem of leaving the system in unstable state and
- *         halting when trying to remove the module.
- *       - Close socket on all abnormal exists.
- *       - Add versioning scheme that follows that of the bonding driver.
- *         current version is 1.0.0 as a base line.
- *
- *    - 2003/05/22 - Jay Vosburgh <fubar at us dot ibm dot com>
- *	 - ifenslave -c was broken; it's now fixed
- *	 - Fixed problem with routes vanishing from master during enslave
- *	   processing.
- *
- *    - 2003/05/27 - Amir Noam <amir.noam at intel dot com>
- *	 - Fix backward compatibility issues:
- *	   For drivers not using ABI versions, slave was set down while
- *	   it should be left up before enslaving.
- *	   Also, master was not set down and the default set_mac_address()
- *	   would fail and generate an error message in the system log.
- * 	 - For opt_c: slave should not be set to the master's setting
- *	   while it is running. It was already set during enslave. To
- *	   simplify things, it is now handled separately.
- *
- *    - 2003/12/01 - Shmulik Hen <shmulik.hen at intel dot com>
- *	 - Code cleanup and style changes
- *	   set version to 1.1.0
- */
-
-#define APP_VERSION	"1.1.0"
-#define APP_RELDATE	"December 1, 2003"
-#define APP_NAME	"ifenslave"
-
-static char *version =
-APP_NAME ".c:v" APP_VERSION " (" APP_RELDATE ")\n"
-"o Donald Becker (becker@cesdis.gsfc.nasa.gov).\n"
-"o Detach support added on 2000/10/02 by Willy Tarreau (willy at meta-x.org).\n"
-"o 2.4 kernel support added on 2001/02/16 by Chad N. Tindel\n"
-"  (ctindel at ieee dot org).\n";
-
-static const char *usage_msg =
-"Usage: ifenslave [-f] <master-if> <slave-if> [<slave-if>...]\n"
-"       ifenslave -d   <master-if> <slave-if> [<slave-if>...]\n"
-"       ifenslave -c   <master-if> <slave-if>\n"
-"       ifenslave --help\n";
-
-static const char *help_msg =
-"\n"
-"       To create a bond device, simply follow these three steps :\n"
-"       - ensure that the required drivers are properly loaded :\n"
-"         # modprobe bonding ; modprobe <3c59x|eepro100|pcnet32|tulip|...>\n"
-"       - assign an IP address to the bond device :\n"
-"         # ifconfig bond0 <addr> netmask <mask> broadcast <bcast>\n"
-"       - attach all the interfaces you need to the bond device :\n"
-"         # ifenslave [{-f|--force}] bond0 eth0 [eth1 [eth2]...]\n"
-"         If bond0 didn't have a MAC address, it will take eth0's. Then, all\n"
-"         interfaces attached AFTER this assignment will get the same MAC addr.\n"
-"         (except for ALB/TLB modes)\n"
-"\n"
-"       To set the bond device down and automatically release all the slaves :\n"
-"         # ifconfig bond0 down\n"
-"\n"
-"       To detach a dead interface without setting the bond device down :\n"
-"         # ifenslave {-d|--detach} bond0 eth0 [eth1 [eth2]...]\n"
-"\n"
-"       To change active slave :\n"
-"         # ifenslave {-c|--change-active} bond0 eth0\n"
-"\n"
-"       To show master interface info\n"
-"         # ifenslave bond0\n"
-"\n"
-"       To show all interfaces info\n"
-"       # ifenslave {-a|--all-interfaces}\n"
-"\n"
-"       To be more verbose\n"
-"       # ifenslave {-v|--verbose} ...\n"
-"\n"
-"       # ifenslave {-u|--usage}   Show usage\n"
-"       # ifenslave {-V|--version} Show version\n"
-"       # ifenslave {-h|--help}    This message\n"
-"\n";
-
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <ctype.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <getopt.h>
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <sys/socket.h>
-#include <sys/ioctl.h>
-#include <linux/if.h>
-#include <net/if_arp.h>
-#include <linux/if_ether.h>
-#include <linux/if_bonding.h>
-#include <linux/sockios.h>
-
-typedef unsigned long long u64;	/* hack, so we may include kernel's ethtool.h */
-typedef __uint32_t u32;		/* ditto */
-typedef __uint16_t u16;		/* ditto */
-typedef __uint8_t u8;		/* ditto */
-#include <linux/ethtool.h>
-
-struct option longopts[] = {
-	/* { name  has_arg  *flag  val } */
-	{"all-interfaces",	0, 0, 'a'},	/* Show all interfaces. */
-	{"change-active",	0, 0, 'c'},	/* Change the active slave.  */
-	{"detach",		0, 0, 'd'},	/* Detach a slave interface. */
-	{"force",		0, 0, 'f'},	/* Force the operation. */
-	{"help",		0, 0, 'h'},	/* Give help */
-	{"usage",		0, 0, 'u'},	/* Give usage */
-	{"verbose",		0, 0, 'v'},	/* Report each action taken. */
-	{"version",		0, 0, 'V'},	/* Emit version information. */
-	{ 0, 0, 0, 0}
-};
-
-/* Command-line flags. */
-unsigned int
-opt_a = 0,	/* Show-all-interfaces flag. */
-opt_c = 0,	/* Change-active-slave flag. */
-opt_d = 0,	/* Detach a slave interface. */
-opt_f = 0,	/* Force the operation. */
-opt_h = 0,	/* Help */
-opt_u = 0,	/* Usage */
-opt_v = 0,	/* Verbose flag. */
-opt_V = 0;	/* Version */
-
-int skfd = -1;		/* AF_INET socket for ioctl() calls.*/
-int abi_ver = 0;	/* userland - kernel ABI version */
-int hwaddr_set = 0;	/* Master's hwaddr is set */
-int saved_errno;
-
-struct ifreq master_mtu, master_flags, master_hwaddr;
-struct ifreq slave_mtu, slave_flags, slave_hwaddr;
-
-struct dev_ifr {
-	struct ifreq *req_ifr;
-	char *req_name;
-	int req_type;
-};
-
-struct dev_ifr master_ifra[] = {
-	{&master_mtu,     "SIOCGIFMTU",     SIOCGIFMTU},
-	{&master_flags,   "SIOCGIFFLAGS",   SIOCGIFFLAGS},
-	{&master_hwaddr,  "SIOCGIFHWADDR",  SIOCGIFHWADDR},
-	{NULL, "", 0}
-};
-
-struct dev_ifr slave_ifra[] = {
-	{&slave_mtu,     "SIOCGIFMTU",     SIOCGIFMTU},
-	{&slave_flags,   "SIOCGIFFLAGS",   SIOCGIFFLAGS},
-	{&slave_hwaddr,  "SIOCGIFHWADDR",  SIOCGIFHWADDR},
-	{NULL, "", 0}
-};
-
-static void if_print(char *ifname);
-static int get_drv_info(char *master_ifname);
-static int get_if_settings(char *ifname, struct dev_ifr ifra[]);
-static int get_slave_flags(char *slave_ifname);
-static int set_master_hwaddr(char *master_ifname, struct sockaddr *hwaddr);
-static int set_slave_hwaddr(char *slave_ifname, struct sockaddr *hwaddr);
-static int set_slave_mtu(char *slave_ifname, int mtu);
-static int set_if_flags(char *ifname, short flags);
-static int set_if_up(char *ifname, short flags);
-static int set_if_down(char *ifname, short flags);
-static int clear_if_addr(char *ifname);
-static int set_if_addr(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname);
-static int change_active(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname);
-static int enslave(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname);
-static int release(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname);
-#define v_print(fmt, args...)	\
-	if (opt_v)		\
-		fprintf(stderr, fmt, ## args )
-
-int main(int argc, char *argv[])
-{
-	char **spp, *master_ifname, *slave_ifname;
-	int c, i, rv;
-	int res = 0;
-	int exclusive = 0;
-
-	while ((c = getopt_long(argc, argv, "acdfhuvV", longopts, 0)) != EOF) {
-		switch (c) {
-		case 'a': opt_a++; exclusive++; break;
-		case 'c': opt_c++; exclusive++; break;
-		case 'd': opt_d++; exclusive++; break;
-		case 'f': opt_f++; exclusive++; break;
-		case 'h': opt_h++; exclusive++; break;
-		case 'u': opt_u++; exclusive++; break;
-		case 'v': opt_v++; break;
-		case 'V': opt_V++; exclusive++; break;
-
-		case '?':
-			fprintf(stderr, "%s", usage_msg);
-			res = 2;
-			goto out;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* options check */
-	if (exclusive > 1) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "%s", usage_msg);
-		res = 2;
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	if (opt_v || opt_V) {
-		printf("%s", version);
-		if (opt_V) {
-			res = 0;
-			goto out;
-		}
-	}
-
-	if (opt_u) {
-		printf("%s", usage_msg);
-		res = 0;
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	if (opt_h) {
-		printf("%s", usage_msg);
-		printf("%s", help_msg);
-		res = 0;
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	/* Open a basic socket */
-	if ((skfd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0)) < 0) {
-		perror("socket");
-		res = 1;
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	if (opt_a) {
-		if (optind == argc) {
-			/* No remaining args */
-			/* show all interfaces */
-			if_print((char *)NULL);
-			goto out;
-		} else {
-			/* Just show usage */
-			fprintf(stderr, "%s", usage_msg);
-			res = 2;
-			goto out;
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Copy the interface name */
-	spp = argv + optind;
-	master_ifname = *spp++;
-
-	if (master_ifname == NULL) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "%s", usage_msg);
-		res = 2;
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	/* exchange abi version with bonding module */
-	res = get_drv_info(master_ifname);
-	if (res) {
-		fprintf(stderr,
-			"Master '%s': Error: handshake with driver failed. "
-			"Aborting\n",
-			master_ifname);
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	slave_ifname = *spp++;
-
-	if (slave_ifname == NULL) {
-		if (opt_d || opt_c) {
-			fprintf(stderr, "%s", usage_msg);
-			res = 2;
-			goto out;
-		}
-
-		/* A single arg means show the
-		 * configuration for this interface
-		 */
-		if_print(master_ifname);
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	res = get_if_settings(master_ifname, master_ifra);
-	if (res) {
-		/* Probably a good reason not to go on */
-		fprintf(stderr,
-			"Master '%s': Error: get settings failed: %s. "
-			"Aborting\n",
-			master_ifname, strerror(res));
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	/* check if master is indeed a master;
-	 * if not then fail any operation
-	 */
-	if (!(master_flags.ifr_flags & IFF_MASTER)) {
-		fprintf(stderr,
-			"Illegal operation; the specified interface '%s' "
-			"is not a master. Aborting\n",
-			master_ifname);
-		res = 1;
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	/* check if master is up; if not then fail any operation */
-	if (!(master_flags.ifr_flags & IFF_UP)) {
-		fprintf(stderr,
-			"Illegal operation; the specified master interface "
-			"'%s' is not up.\n",
-			master_ifname);
-		res = 1;
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	/* Only for enslaving */
-	if (!opt_c && !opt_d) {
-		sa_family_t master_family = master_hwaddr.ifr_hwaddr.sa_family;
-		unsigned char *hwaddr =
-			(unsigned char *)master_hwaddr.ifr_hwaddr.sa_data;
-
-		/* The family '1' is ARPHRD_ETHER for ethernet. */
-		if (master_family != 1 && !opt_f) {
-			fprintf(stderr,
-				"Illegal operation: The specified master "
-				"interface '%s' is not ethernet-like.\n "
-				"This program is designed to work with "
-				"ethernet-like network interfaces.\n "
-				"Use the '-f' option to force the "
-				"operation.\n",
-				master_ifname);
-			res = 1;
-			goto out;
-		}
-
-		/* Check master's hw addr */
-		for (i = 0; i < 6; i++) {
-			if (hwaddr[i] != 0) {
-				hwaddr_set = 1;
-				break;
-			}
-		}
-
-		if (hwaddr_set) {
-			v_print("current hardware address of master '%s' "
-				"is %2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x, "
-				"type %d\n",
-				master_ifname,
-				hwaddr[0], hwaddr[1],
-				hwaddr[2], hwaddr[3],
-				hwaddr[4], hwaddr[5],
-				master_family);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* Accepts only one slave */
-	if (opt_c) {
-		/* change active slave */
-		res = get_slave_flags(slave_ifname);
-		if (res) {
-			fprintf(stderr,
-				"Slave '%s': Error: get flags failed. "
-				"Aborting\n",
-				slave_ifname);
-			goto out;
-		}
-		res = change_active(master_ifname, slave_ifname);
-		if (res) {
-			fprintf(stderr,
-				"Master '%s', Slave '%s': Error: "
-				"Change active failed\n",
-				master_ifname, slave_ifname);
-		}
-	} else {
-		/* Accept multiple slaves */
-		do {
-			if (opt_d) {
-				/* detach a slave interface from the master */
-				rv = get_slave_flags(slave_ifname);
-				if (rv) {
-					/* Can't work with this slave. */
-					/* remember the error and skip it*/
-					fprintf(stderr,
-						"Slave '%s': Error: get flags "
-						"failed. Skipping\n",
-						slave_ifname);
-					res = rv;
-					continue;
-				}
-				rv = release(master_ifname, slave_ifname);
-				if (rv) {
-					fprintf(stderr,
-						"Master '%s', Slave '%s': Error: "
-						"Release failed\n",
-						master_ifname, slave_ifname);
-					res = rv;
-				}
-			} else {
-				/* attach a slave interface to the master */
-				rv = get_if_settings(slave_ifname, slave_ifra);
-				if (rv) {
-					/* Can't work with this slave. */
-					/* remember the error and skip it*/
-					fprintf(stderr,
-						"Slave '%s': Error: get "
-						"settings failed: %s. "
-						"Skipping\n",
-						slave_ifname, strerror(rv));
-					res = rv;
-					continue;
-				}
-				rv = enslave(master_ifname, slave_ifname);
-				if (rv) {
-					fprintf(stderr,
-						"Master '%s', Slave '%s': Error: "
-						"Enslave failed\n",
-						master_ifname, slave_ifname);
-					res = rv;
-				}
-			}
-		} while ((slave_ifname = *spp++) != NULL);
-	}
-
-out:
-	if (skfd >= 0) {
-		close(skfd);
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-static short mif_flags;
-
-/* Get the inteface configuration from the kernel. */
-static int if_getconfig(char *ifname)
-{
-	struct ifreq ifr;
-	int metric, mtu;	/* Parameters of the master interface. */
-	struct sockaddr dstaddr, broadaddr, netmask;
-	unsigned char *hwaddr;
-
-	strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname);
-	if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFFLAGS, &ifr) < 0)
-		return -1;
-	mif_flags = ifr.ifr_flags;
-	printf("The result of SIOCGIFFLAGS on %s is %x.\n",
-	       ifname, ifr.ifr_flags);
-
-	strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname);
-	if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFADDR, &ifr) < 0)
-		return -1;
-	printf("The result of SIOCGIFADDR is %2.2x.%2.2x.%2.2x.%2.2x.\n",
-	       ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data[0], ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data[1],
-	       ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data[2], ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data[3]);
-
-	strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname);
-	if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFHWADDR, &ifr) < 0)
-		return -1;
-
-	/* Gotta convert from 'char' to unsigned for printf(). */
-	hwaddr = (unsigned char *)ifr.ifr_hwaddr.sa_data;
-	printf("The result of SIOCGIFHWADDR is type %d  "
-	       "%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x.\n",
-	       ifr.ifr_hwaddr.sa_family, hwaddr[0], hwaddr[1],
-	       hwaddr[2], hwaddr[3], hwaddr[4], hwaddr[5]);
-
-	strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname);
-	if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFMETRIC, &ifr) < 0) {
-		metric = 0;
-	} else
-		metric = ifr.ifr_metric;
-	printf("The result of SIOCGIFMETRIC is %d\n", metric);
-
-	strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname);
-	if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFMTU, &ifr) < 0)
-		mtu = 0;
-	else
-		mtu = ifr.ifr_mtu;
-	printf("The result of SIOCGIFMTU is %d\n", mtu);
-
-	strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname);
-	if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFDSTADDR, &ifr) < 0) {
-		memset(&dstaddr, 0, sizeof(struct sockaddr));
-	} else
-		dstaddr = ifr.ifr_dstaddr;
-
-	strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname);
-	if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFBRDADDR, &ifr) < 0) {
-		memset(&broadaddr, 0, sizeof(struct sockaddr));
-	} else
-		broadaddr = ifr.ifr_broadaddr;
-
-	strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname);
-	if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFNETMASK, &ifr) < 0) {
-		memset(&netmask, 0, sizeof(struct sockaddr));
-	} else
-		netmask = ifr.ifr_netmask;
-
-	return 0;
-}
-
-static void if_print(char *ifname)
-{
-	char buff[1024];
-	struct ifconf ifc;
-	struct ifreq *ifr;
-	int i;
-
-	if (ifname == (char *)NULL) {
-		ifc.ifc_len = sizeof(buff);
-		ifc.ifc_buf = buff;
-		if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFCONF, &ifc) < 0) {
-			perror("SIOCGIFCONF failed");
-			return;
-		}
-
-		ifr = ifc.ifc_req;
-		for (i = ifc.ifc_len / sizeof(struct ifreq); --i >= 0; ifr++) {
-			if (if_getconfig(ifr->ifr_name) < 0) {
-				fprintf(stderr,
-					"%s: unknown interface.\n",
-					ifr->ifr_name);
-				continue;
-			}
-
-			if (((mif_flags & IFF_UP) == 0) && !opt_a) continue;
-			/*ife_print(&ife);*/
-		}
-	} else {
-		if (if_getconfig(ifname) < 0) {
-			fprintf(stderr,
-				"%s: unknown interface.\n", ifname);
-		}
-	}
-}
-
-static int get_drv_info(char *master_ifname)
-{
-	struct ifreq ifr;
-	struct ethtool_drvinfo info;
-	char *endptr;
-
-	memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr));
-	strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, master_ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-	ifr.ifr_data = (caddr_t)&info;
-
-	info.cmd = ETHTOOL_GDRVINFO;
-	strncpy(info.driver, "ifenslave", 32);
-	snprintf(info.fw_version, 32, "%d", BOND_ABI_VERSION);
-
-	if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCETHTOOL, &ifr) < 0) {
-		if (errno == EOPNOTSUPP) {
-			goto out;
-		}
-
-		saved_errno = errno;
-		v_print("Master '%s': Error: get bonding info failed %s\n",
-			master_ifname, strerror(saved_errno));
-		return 1;
-	}
-
-	abi_ver = strtoul(info.fw_version, &endptr, 0);
-	if (*endptr) {
-                v_print("Master '%s': Error: got invalid string as an ABI "
-			"version from the bonding module\n",
-			master_ifname);
-		return 1;
-	}
-
-out:
-	v_print("ABI ver is %d\n", abi_ver);
-
-	return 0;
-}
-
-static int change_active(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname)
-{
-	struct ifreq ifr;
-	int res = 0;
-
-	if (!(slave_flags.ifr_flags & IFF_SLAVE)) {
-		fprintf(stderr,
-			"Illegal operation: The specified slave interface "
-			"'%s' is not a slave\n",
-			slave_ifname);
-		return 1;
-	}
-
-	strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, master_ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-	strncpy(ifr.ifr_slave, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-	if ((ioctl(skfd, SIOCBONDCHANGEACTIVE, &ifr) < 0) &&
-	    (ioctl(skfd, BOND_CHANGE_ACTIVE_OLD, &ifr) < 0)) {
-		saved_errno = errno;
-		v_print("Master '%s': Error: SIOCBONDCHANGEACTIVE failed: "
-			"%s\n",
-			master_ifname, strerror(saved_errno));
-		res = 1;
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-static int enslave(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname)
-{
-	struct ifreq ifr;
-	int res = 0;
-
-	if (slave_flags.ifr_flags & IFF_SLAVE) {
-		fprintf(stderr,
-			"Illegal operation: The specified slave interface "
-			"'%s' is already a slave\n",
-			slave_ifname);
-		return 1;
-	}
-
-	res = set_if_down(slave_ifname, slave_flags.ifr_flags);
-	if (res) {
-		fprintf(stderr,
-			"Slave '%s': Error: bring interface down failed\n",
-			slave_ifname);
-		return res;
-	}
-
-	if (abi_ver < 2) {
-		/* Older bonding versions would panic if the slave has no IP
-		 * address, so get the IP setting from the master.
-		 */
-		set_if_addr(master_ifname, slave_ifname);
-	} else {
-		res = clear_if_addr(slave_ifname);
-		if (res) {
-			fprintf(stderr,
-				"Slave '%s': Error: clear address failed\n",
-				slave_ifname);
-			return res;
-		}
-	}
-
-	if (master_mtu.ifr_mtu != slave_mtu.ifr_mtu) {
-		res = set_slave_mtu(slave_ifname, master_mtu.ifr_mtu);
-		if (res) {
-			fprintf(stderr,
-				"Slave '%s': Error: set MTU failed\n",
-				slave_ifname);
-			return res;
-		}
-	}
-
-	if (hwaddr_set) {
-		/* Master already has an hwaddr
-		 * so set it's hwaddr to the slave
-		 */
-		if (abi_ver < 1) {
-			/* The driver is using an old ABI, so
-			 * the application sets the slave's
-			 * hwaddr
-			 */
-			res = set_slave_hwaddr(slave_ifname,
-					       &(master_hwaddr.ifr_hwaddr));
-			if (res) {
-				fprintf(stderr,
-					"Slave '%s': Error: set hw address "
-					"failed\n",
-					slave_ifname);
-				goto undo_mtu;
-			}
-
-			/* For old ABI the application needs to bring the
-			 * slave back up
-			 */
-			res = set_if_up(slave_ifname, slave_flags.ifr_flags);
-			if (res) {
-				fprintf(stderr,
-					"Slave '%s': Error: bring interface "
-					"down failed\n",
-					slave_ifname);
-				goto undo_slave_mac;
-			}
-		}
-		/* The driver is using a new ABI,
-		 * so the driver takes care of setting
-		 * the slave's hwaddr and bringing
-		 * it up again
-		 */
-	} else {
-		/* No hwaddr for master yet, so
-		 * set the slave's hwaddr to it
-		 */
-		if (abi_ver < 1) {
-			/* For old ABI, the master needs to be
-			 * down before setting its hwaddr
-			 */
-			res = set_if_down(master_ifname, master_flags.ifr_flags);
-			if (res) {
-				fprintf(stderr,
-					"Master '%s': Error: bring interface "
-					"down failed\n",
-					master_ifname);
-				goto undo_mtu;
-			}
-		}
-
-		res = set_master_hwaddr(master_ifname,
-					&(slave_hwaddr.ifr_hwaddr));
-		if (res) {
-			fprintf(stderr,
-				"Master '%s': Error: set hw address "
-				"failed\n",
-				master_ifname);
-			goto undo_mtu;
-		}
-
-		if (abi_ver < 1) {
-			/* For old ABI, bring the master
-			 * back up
-			 */
-			res = set_if_up(master_ifname, master_flags.ifr_flags);
-			if (res) {
-				fprintf(stderr,
-					"Master '%s': Error: bring interface "
-					"up failed\n",
-					master_ifname);
-				goto undo_master_mac;
-			}
-		}
-
-		hwaddr_set = 1;
-	}
-
-	/* Do the real thing */
-	strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, master_ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-	strncpy(ifr.ifr_slave, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-	if ((ioctl(skfd, SIOCBONDENSLAVE, &ifr) < 0) &&
-	    (ioctl(skfd, BOND_ENSLAVE_OLD, &ifr) < 0)) {
-		saved_errno = errno;
-		v_print("Master '%s': Error: SIOCBONDENSLAVE failed: %s\n",
-			master_ifname, strerror(saved_errno));
-		res = 1;
-	}
-
-	if (res) {
-		goto undo_master_mac;
-	}
-
-	return 0;
-
-/* rollback (best effort) */
-undo_master_mac:
-	set_master_hwaddr(master_ifname, &(master_hwaddr.ifr_hwaddr));
-	hwaddr_set = 0;
-	goto undo_mtu;
-undo_slave_mac:
-	set_slave_hwaddr(slave_ifname, &(slave_hwaddr.ifr_hwaddr));
-undo_mtu:
-	set_slave_mtu(slave_ifname, slave_mtu.ifr_mtu);
-	return res;
-}
-
-static int release(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname)
-{
-	struct ifreq ifr;
-	int res = 0;
-
-	if (!(slave_flags.ifr_flags & IFF_SLAVE)) {
-		fprintf(stderr,
-			"Illegal operation: The specified slave interface "
-			"'%s' is not a slave\n",
-			slave_ifname);
-		return 1;
-	}
-
-	strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, master_ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-	strncpy(ifr.ifr_slave, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-	if ((ioctl(skfd, SIOCBONDRELEASE, &ifr) < 0) &&
-	    (ioctl(skfd, BOND_RELEASE_OLD, &ifr) < 0)) {
-		saved_errno = errno;
-		v_print("Master '%s': Error: SIOCBONDRELEASE failed: %s\n",
-			master_ifname, strerror(saved_errno));
-		return 1;
-	} else if (abi_ver < 1) {
-		/* The driver is using an old ABI, so we'll set the interface
-		 * down to avoid any conflicts due to same MAC/IP
-		 */
-		res = set_if_down(slave_ifname, slave_flags.ifr_flags);
-		if (res) {
-			fprintf(stderr,
-				"Slave '%s': Error: bring interface "
-				"down failed\n",
-				slave_ifname);
-		}
-	}
-
-	/* set to default mtu */
-	set_slave_mtu(slave_ifname, 1500);
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-static int get_if_settings(char *ifname, struct dev_ifr ifra[])
-{
-	int i;
-	int res = 0;
-
-	for (i = 0; ifra[i].req_ifr; i++) {
-		strncpy(ifra[i].req_ifr->ifr_name, ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-		res = ioctl(skfd, ifra[i].req_type, ifra[i].req_ifr);
-		if (res < 0) {
-			saved_errno = errno;
-			v_print("Interface '%s': Error: %s failed: %s\n",
-				ifname, ifra[i].req_name,
-				strerror(saved_errno));
-
-			return saved_errno;
-		}
-	}
-
-	return 0;
-}
-
-static int get_slave_flags(char *slave_ifname)
-{
-	int res = 0;
-
-	strncpy(slave_flags.ifr_name, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-	res = ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFFLAGS, &slave_flags);
-	if (res < 0) {
-		saved_errno = errno;
-		v_print("Slave '%s': Error: SIOCGIFFLAGS failed: %s\n",
-			slave_ifname, strerror(saved_errno));
-	} else {
-		v_print("Slave %s: flags %04X.\n",
-			slave_ifname, slave_flags.ifr_flags);
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-static int set_master_hwaddr(char *master_ifname, struct sockaddr *hwaddr)
-{
-	unsigned char *addr = (unsigned char *)hwaddr->sa_data;
-	struct ifreq ifr;
-	int res = 0;
-
-	strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, master_ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-	memcpy(&(ifr.ifr_hwaddr), hwaddr, sizeof(struct sockaddr));
-	res = ioctl(skfd, SIOCSIFHWADDR, &ifr);
-	if (res < 0) {
-		saved_errno = errno;
-		v_print("Master '%s': Error: SIOCSIFHWADDR failed: %s\n",
-			master_ifname, strerror(saved_errno));
-		return res;
-	} else {
-		v_print("Master '%s': hardware address set to "
-			"%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x.\n",
-			master_ifname, addr[0], addr[1], addr[2],
-			addr[3], addr[4], addr[5]);
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-static int set_slave_hwaddr(char *slave_ifname, struct sockaddr *hwaddr)
-{
-	unsigned char *addr = (unsigned char *)hwaddr->sa_data;
-	struct ifreq ifr;
-	int res = 0;
-
-	strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-	memcpy(&(ifr.ifr_hwaddr), hwaddr, sizeof(struct sockaddr));
-	res = ioctl(skfd, SIOCSIFHWADDR, &ifr);
-	if (res < 0) {
-		saved_errno = errno;
-
-		v_print("Slave '%s': Error: SIOCSIFHWADDR failed: %s\n",
-			slave_ifname, strerror(saved_errno));
-
-		if (saved_errno == EBUSY) {
-			v_print("  The device is busy: it must be idle "
-				"before running this command.\n");
-		} else if (saved_errno == EOPNOTSUPP) {
-			v_print("  The device does not support setting "
-				"the MAC address.\n"
-				"  Your kernel likely does not support slave "
-				"devices.\n");
-		} else if (saved_errno == EINVAL) {
-			v_print("  The device's address type does not match "
-				"the master's address type.\n");
-		}
-		return res;
-	} else {
-		v_print("Slave '%s': hardware address set to "
-			"%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x.\n",
-			slave_ifname, addr[0], addr[1], addr[2],
-			addr[3], addr[4], addr[5]);
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-static int set_slave_mtu(char *slave_ifname, int mtu)
-{
-	struct ifreq ifr;
-	int res = 0;
-
-	ifr.ifr_mtu = mtu;
-	strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-
-	res = ioctl(skfd, SIOCSIFMTU, &ifr);
-	if (res < 0) {
-		saved_errno = errno;
-		v_print("Slave '%s': Error: SIOCSIFMTU failed: %s\n",
-			slave_ifname, strerror(saved_errno));
-	} else {
-		v_print("Slave '%s': MTU set to %d.\n", slave_ifname, mtu);
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-static int set_if_flags(char *ifname, short flags)
-{
-	struct ifreq ifr;
-	int res = 0;
-
-	ifr.ifr_flags = flags;
-	strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-
-	res = ioctl(skfd, SIOCSIFFLAGS, &ifr);
-	if (res < 0) {
-		saved_errno = errno;
-		v_print("Interface '%s': Error: SIOCSIFFLAGS failed: %s\n",
-			ifname, strerror(saved_errno));
-	} else {
-		v_print("Interface '%s': flags set to %04X.\n", ifname, flags);
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-static int set_if_up(char *ifname, short flags)
-{
-	return set_if_flags(ifname, flags | IFF_UP);
-}
-
-static int set_if_down(char *ifname, short flags)
-{
-	return set_if_flags(ifname, flags & ~IFF_UP);
-}
-
-static int clear_if_addr(char *ifname)
-{
-	struct ifreq ifr;
-	int res = 0;
-
-	strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-	ifr.ifr_addr.sa_family = AF_INET;
-	memset(ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data, 0, sizeof(ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data));
-
-	res = ioctl(skfd, SIOCSIFADDR, &ifr);
-	if (res < 0) {
-		saved_errno = errno;
-		v_print("Interface '%s': Error: SIOCSIFADDR failed: %s\n",
-			ifname, strerror(saved_errno));
-	} else {
-		v_print("Interface '%s': address cleared\n", ifname);
-	}
-
-	return res;
-}
-
-static int set_if_addr(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname)
-{
-	struct ifreq ifr;
-	int res;
-	unsigned char *ipaddr;
-	int i;
-	struct {
-		char *req_name;
-		char *desc;
-		int g_ioctl;
-		int s_ioctl;
-	} ifra[] = {
-		{"IFADDR", "addr", SIOCGIFADDR, SIOCSIFADDR},
-		{"DSTADDR", "destination addr", SIOCGIFDSTADDR, SIOCSIFDSTADDR},
-		{"BRDADDR", "broadcast addr", SIOCGIFBRDADDR, SIOCSIFBRDADDR},
-		{"NETMASK", "netmask", SIOCGIFNETMASK, SIOCSIFNETMASK},
-		{NULL, NULL, 0, 0},
-	};
-
-	for (i = 0; ifra[i].req_name; i++) {
-		strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, master_ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-		res = ioctl(skfd, ifra[i].g_ioctl, &ifr);
-		if (res < 0) {
-			int saved_errno = errno;
-
-			v_print("Interface '%s': Error: SIOCG%s failed: %s\n",
-				master_ifname, ifra[i].req_name,
-				strerror(saved_errno));
-
-			ifr.ifr_addr.sa_family = AF_INET;
-			memset(ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data, 0,
-			       sizeof(ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data));
-		}
-
-		strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ);
-		res = ioctl(skfd, ifra[i].s_ioctl, &ifr);
-		if (res < 0) {
-			int saved_errno = errno;
-
-			v_print("Interface '%s': Error: SIOCS%s failed: %s\n",
-				slave_ifname, ifra[i].req_name,
-				strerror(saved_errno));
-
-		}
-
-		ipaddr = (unsigned char *)ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data;
-		v_print("Interface '%s': set IP %s to %d.%d.%d.%d\n",
-			slave_ifname, ifra[i].desc,
-			ipaddr[0], ipaddr[1], ipaddr[2], ipaddr[3]);
-	}
-
-	return 0;
-}
-
-/*
- * Local variables:
- *  version-control: t
- *  kept-new-versions: 5
- *  c-indent-level: 4
- *  c-basic-offset: 4
- *  tab-width: 4
- *  compile-command: "gcc -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes -O -I/usr/src/linux/include ifenslave.c -o ifenslave"
- * End:
- */
-
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/igb.txt b/Documentation/networking/igb.txt
index 9a2a037194a5..4ebbd659256f 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/igb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/igb.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Network Connection
-==================================================
+Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+===========================================================
 
 Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
-Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation.
+Copyright(c) 1999 - 2013 Intel Corporation.
 
 Contents
 ========
@@ -36,6 +36,53 @@ Default Value: 0
 This parameter adds support for SR-IOV.  It causes the driver to spawn up to
 max_vfs worth of virtual function.
 
+QueuePairs
+----------
+Valid Range:  0-1
+Default Value:  1 (TX and RX will be paired onto one interrupt vector)
+
+If set to 0, when MSI-X is enabled, the TX and RX will attempt to occupy
+separate vectors.
+
+This option can be overridden to 1 if there are not sufficient interrupts
+available.  This can occur if any combination of RSS, VMDQ, and max_vfs
+results in more than 4 queues being used.
+
+Node
+----
+Valid Range:   0-n
+Default Value: -1 (off)
+
+  0 - n: where n is the number of the NUMA node that should be used to
+         allocate memory for this adapter port.
+  -1: uses the driver default of allocating memory on whichever processor is
+      running insmod/modprobe.
+
+  The Node parameter will allow you to pick which NUMA node you want to have
+  the adapter allocate memory from.  All driver structures, in-memory queues,
+  and receive buffers will be allocated on the node specified.  This parameter
+  is only useful when interrupt affinity is specified, otherwise some portion
+  of the time the interrupt could run on a different core than the memory is
+  allocated on, causing slower memory access and impacting throughput, CPU, or
+  both.
+
+EEE
+---
+Valid Range:  0-1
+Default Value: 1 (enabled)
+
+  A link between two EEE-compliant devices will result in periodic bursts of
+  data followed by long periods where in the link is in an idle state. This Low
+  Power Idle (LPI) state is supported in both 1Gbps and 100Mbps link speeds.
+  NOTE: EEE support requires autonegotiation.
+
+DMAC
+----
+Valid Range: 0-1
+Default Value: 1 (enabled)
+  Enables or disables DMA Coalescing feature.
+
+
 
 Additional Configurations
 =========================
@@ -55,10 +102,10 @@ Additional Configurations
   - The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 9216.  This value coincides
     with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9234 bytes.
 
-  - Using Jumbo Frames at 10 or 100 Mbps may result in poor performance or
-    loss of link.
+  - Using Jumbo frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in
+    poor performance or loss of link.
 
-  Ethtool
+  ethtool
   -------
   The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
   diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest
@@ -106,6 +153,14 @@ Additional Configurations
 
   Where n=the VF that attempted to do the spoofing.
 
+  Setting MAC Address, VLAN and Rate Limit Using IProute2 Tool
+  ------------------------------------------------------------
+  You can set a MAC address of a Virtual Function (VF), a default VLAN and the
+  rate limit using the IProute2 tool. Download the latest version of the
+  iproute2 tool from Sourceforge if your version does not have all the
+  features you require.
+
+
 Support
 =======
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt b/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt
index cbfe4ee65533..40db17a6665b 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Network Connection
-==================================================
+Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+===========================================================
 
 Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
-Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation.
+Copyright(c) 1999 - 2013 Intel Corporation.
 
 Contents
 ========
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ networking link on the left to search for your adapter:
 Additional Configurations
 =========================
 
-  Ethtool
+  ethtool
   -------
   The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
   diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  The ethtool
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
index ad3e80e17b4f..a46d78583ae1 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
@@ -26,20 +26,33 @@ route/max_size - INTEGER
 	Maximum number of routes allowed in the kernel.  Increase
 	this when using large numbers of interfaces and/or routes.
 
+neigh/default/gc_thresh1 - INTEGER
+	Minimum number of entries to keep.  Garbage collector will not
+	purge entries if there are fewer than this number.
+	Default: 128
+
 neigh/default/gc_thresh3 - INTEGER
 	Maximum number of neighbor entries allowed.  Increase this
 	when using large numbers of interfaces and when communicating
 	with large numbers of directly-connected peers.
+	Default: 1024
 
 neigh/default/unres_qlen_bytes - INTEGER
 	The maximum number of bytes which may be used by packets
 	queued for each	unresolved address by other network layers.
 	(added in linux 3.3)
+	Setting negative value is meaningless and will return error.
+	Default: 65536 Bytes(64KB)
 
 neigh/default/unres_qlen - INTEGER
 	The maximum number of packets which may be queued for each
 	unresolved address by other network layers.
 	(deprecated in linux 3.3) : use unres_qlen_bytes instead.
+	Prior to linux 3.3, the default value is 3 which may cause
+	unexpected packet loss. The current default value is calculated
+	according to default value of unres_qlen_bytes and true size of
+	packet.
+	Default: 31
 
 mtu_expires - INTEGER
 	Time, in seconds, that cached PMTU information is kept.
@@ -48,12 +61,6 @@ min_adv_mss - INTEGER
 	The advertised MSS depends on the first hop route MTU, but will
 	never be lower than this setting.
 
-rt_cache_rebuild_count - INTEGER
-	The per net-namespace route cache emergency rebuild threshold.
-	Any net-namespace having its route cache rebuilt due to
-	a hash bucket chain being too long more than this many times
-	will have its route caching disabled
-
 IP Fragmentation:
 
 ipfrag_high_thresh - INTEGER
@@ -123,17 +130,6 @@ somaxconn - INTEGER
 	Defaults to 128.  See also tcp_max_syn_backlog for additional tuning
 	for TCP sockets.
 
-tcp_abc - INTEGER
-	Controls Appropriate Byte Count (ABC) defined in RFC3465.
-	ABC is a way of increasing congestion window (cwnd) more slowly
-	in response to partial acknowledgments.
-	Possible values are:
-		0 increase cwnd once per acknowledgment (no ABC)
-		1 increase cwnd once per acknowledgment of full sized segment
-		2 allow increase cwnd by two if acknowledgment is
-		  of two segments to compensate for delayed acknowledgments.
-	Default: 0 (off)
-
 tcp_abort_on_overflow - BOOLEAN
 	If listening service is too slow to accept new connections,
 	reset them. Default state is FALSE. It means that if overflow
@@ -147,7 +143,7 @@ tcp_adv_win_scale - INTEGER
 	(if tcp_adv_win_scale > 0) or bytes-bytes/2^(-tcp_adv_win_scale),
 	if it is <= 0.
 	Possible values are [-31, 31], inclusive.
-	Default: 2
+	Default: 1
 
 tcp_allowed_congestion_control - STRING
 	Show/set the congestion control choices available to non-privileged
@@ -179,27 +175,39 @@ tcp_congestion_control - STRING
 	is inherited.
 	[see setsockopt(listenfd, SOL_TCP, TCP_CONGESTION, "name" ...) ]
 
-tcp_cookie_size - INTEGER
-	Default size of TCP Cookie Transactions (TCPCT) option, that may be
-	overridden on a per socket basis by the TCPCT socket option.
-	Values greater than the maximum (16) are interpreted as the maximum.
-	Values greater than zero and less than the minimum (8) are interpreted
-	as the minimum.  Odd values are interpreted as the next even value.
-	Default: 0 (off).
-
 tcp_dsack - BOOLEAN
 	Allows TCP to send "duplicate" SACKs.
 
+tcp_early_retrans - INTEGER
+	Enable Early Retransmit (ER), per RFC 5827. ER lowers the threshold
+	for triggering fast retransmit when the amount of outstanding data is
+	small and when no previously unsent data can be transmitted (such
+	that limited transmit could be used). Also controls the use of
+	Tail loss probe (TLP) that converts RTOs occurring due to tail
+	losses into fast recovery (draft-dukkipati-tcpm-tcp-loss-probe-01).
+	Possible values:
+		0 disables ER
+		1 enables ER
+		2 enables ER but delays fast recovery and fast retransmit
+		  by a fourth of RTT. This mitigates connection falsely
+		  recovers when network has a small degree of reordering
+		  (less than 3 packets).
+		3 enables delayed ER and TLP.
+		4 enables TLP only.
+	Default: 3
+
 tcp_ecn - INTEGER
-	Enable Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) in TCP. ECN is only
-	used when both ends of the TCP flow support it. It is useful to
-	avoid losses due to congestion (when the bottleneck router supports
-	ECN).
+	Control use of Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) by TCP.
+	ECN is used only when both ends of the TCP connection indicate
+	support for it.  This feature is useful in avoiding losses due
+	to congestion by allowing supporting routers to signal
+	congestion before having to drop packets.
 	Possible values are:
-		0 disable ECN
-		1 ECN enabled
-		2 Only server-side ECN enabled. If the other end does
-		  not support ECN, behavior is like with ECN disabled.
+		0 Disable ECN.  Neither initiate nor accept ECN.
+		1 Enable ECN when requested by incoming connections and
+		  also request ECN on outgoing connection attempts.
+		2 Enable ECN when requested by incoming connections
+		  but do not request ECN on outgoing connections.
 	Default: 2
 
 tcp_fack - BOOLEAN
@@ -207,47 +215,23 @@ tcp_fack - BOOLEAN
 	The value is not used, if tcp_sack is not enabled.
 
 tcp_fin_timeout - INTEGER
-	Time to hold socket in state FIN-WAIT-2, if it was closed
-	by our side. Peer can be broken and never close its side,
-	or even died unexpectedly. Default value is 60sec.
-	Usual value used in 2.2 was 180 seconds, you may restore
-	it, but remember that if your machine is even underloaded WEB server,
-	you risk to overflow memory with kilotons of dead sockets,
-	FIN-WAIT-2 sockets are less dangerous than FIN-WAIT-1,
-	because they eat maximum 1.5K of memory, but they tend
-	to live longer.	Cf. tcp_max_orphans.
+	The length of time an orphaned (no longer referenced by any
+	application) connection will remain in the FIN_WAIT_2 state
+	before it is aborted at the local end.  While a perfectly
+	valid "receive only" state for an un-orphaned connection, an
+	orphaned connection in FIN_WAIT_2 state could otherwise wait
+	forever for the remote to close its end of the connection.
+	Cf. tcp_max_orphans
+	Default: 60 seconds
 
 tcp_frto - INTEGER
-	Enables Forward RTO-Recovery (F-RTO) defined in RFC4138.
+	Enables Forward RTO-Recovery (F-RTO) defined in RFC5682.
 	F-RTO is an enhanced recovery algorithm for TCP retransmission
-	timeouts.  It is particularly beneficial in wireless environments
-	where packet loss is typically due to random radio interference
-	rather than intermediate router congestion.  F-RTO is sender-side
-	only modification. Therefore it does not require any support from
-	the peer.
-
-	If set to 1, basic version is enabled.  2 enables SACK enhanced
-	F-RTO if flow uses SACK.  The basic version can be used also when
-	SACK is in use though scenario(s) with it exists where F-RTO
-	interacts badly with the packet counting of the SACK enabled TCP
-	flow.
-
-tcp_frto_response - INTEGER
-	When F-RTO has detected that a TCP retransmission timeout was
-	spurious (i.e, the timeout would have been avoided had TCP set a
-	longer retransmission timeout), TCP has several options what to do
-	next. Possible values are:
-		0 Rate halving based; a smooth and conservative response,
-		  results in halved cwnd and ssthresh after one RTT
-		1 Very conservative response; not recommended because even
-		  though being valid, it interacts poorly with the rest of
-		  Linux TCP, halves cwnd and ssthresh immediately
-		2 Aggressive response; undoes congestion control measures
-		  that are now known to be unnecessary (ignoring the
-		  possibility of a lost retransmission that would require
-		  TCP to be more cautious), cwnd and ssthresh are restored
-		  to the values prior timeout
-	Default: 0 (rate halving based)
+	timeouts.  It is particularly beneficial in networks where the
+	RTT fluctuates (e.g., wireless). F-RTO is sender-side only
+	modification. It does not require any support from the peer.
+
+	By default it's enabled with a non-zero value. 0 disables F-RTO.
 
 tcp_keepalive_time - INTEGER
 	How often TCP sends out keepalive messages when keepalive is enabled.
@@ -410,7 +394,7 @@ tcp_rmem - vector of 3 INTEGERs: min, default, max
 	net.core.rmem_max.  Calling setsockopt() with SO_RCVBUF disables
 	automatic tuning of that socket's receive buffer size, in which
 	case this value is ignored.
-	Default: between 87380B and 4MB, depending on RAM size.
+	Default: between 87380B and 6MB, depending on RAM size.
 
 tcp_sack - BOOLEAN
 	Enable select acknowledgments (SACKS).
@@ -431,13 +415,15 @@ tcp_stdurg - BOOLEAN
 tcp_synack_retries - INTEGER
 	Number of times SYNACKs for a passive TCP connection attempt will
 	be retransmitted. Should not be higher than 255. Default value
-	is 5, which corresponds to ~180seconds.
+	is 5, which corresponds to 31seconds till the last retransmission
+	with the current initial RTO of 1second. With this the final timeout
+	for a passive TCP connection will happen after 63seconds.
 
 tcp_syncookies - BOOLEAN
-	Only valid when the kernel was compiled with CONFIG_SYNCOOKIES
+	Only valid when the kernel was compiled with CONFIG_SYN_COOKIES
 	Send out syncookies when the syn backlog queue of a socket
 	overflows. This is to prevent against the common 'SYN flood attack'
-	Default: FALSE
+	Default: 1
 
 	Note, that syncookies is fallback facility.
 	It MUST NOT be used to help highly loaded servers to stand
@@ -454,14 +440,57 @@ tcp_syncookies - BOOLEAN
 	SYN flood warnings in logs not being really flooded, your server
 	is seriously misconfigured.
 
+	If you want to test which effects syncookies have to your
+	network connections you can set this knob to 2 to enable
+	unconditionally generation of syncookies.
+
+tcp_fastopen - INTEGER
+	Enable TCP Fast Open feature (draft-ietf-tcpm-fastopen) to send data
+	in the opening SYN packet. To use this feature, the client application
+	must use sendmsg() or sendto() with MSG_FASTOPEN flag rather than
+	connect() to perform a TCP handshake automatically.
+
+	The values (bitmap) are
+	1: Enables sending data in the opening SYN on the client.
+	2: Enables TCP Fast Open on the server side, i.e., allowing data in
+	   a SYN packet to be accepted and passed to the application before
+	   3-way hand shake finishes.
+	4: Send data in the opening SYN regardless of cookie availability and
+	   without a cookie option.
+	0x100: Accept SYN data w/o validating the cookie.
+	0x200: Accept data-in-SYN w/o any cookie option present.
+	0x400/0x800: Enable Fast Open on all listeners regardless of the
+	   TCP_FASTOPEN socket option. The two different flags designate two
+	   different ways of setting max_qlen without the TCP_FASTOPEN socket
+	   option.
+
+	Default: 0
+
+	Note that the client & server side Fast Open flags (1 and 2
+	respectively) must be also enabled before the rest of flags can take
+	effect.
+
+	See include/net/tcp.h and the code for more details.
+
 tcp_syn_retries - INTEGER
 	Number of times initial SYNs for an active TCP connection attempt
 	will be retransmitted. Should not be higher than 255. Default value
-	is 5, which corresponds to ~180seconds.
+	is 6, which corresponds to 63seconds till the last retransmission
+	with the current initial RTO of 1second. With this the final timeout
+	for an active TCP connection attempt will happen after 127seconds.
 
 tcp_timestamps - BOOLEAN
 	Enable timestamps as defined in RFC1323.
 
+tcp_min_tso_segs - INTEGER
+	Minimal number of segments per TSO frame.
+	Since linux-3.12, TCP does an automatic sizing of TSO frames,
+	depending on flow rate, instead of filling 64Kbytes packets.
+	For specific usages, it's possible to force TCP to build big
+	TSO frames. Note that TCP stack might split too big TSO packets
+	if available window is too small.
+	Default: 2
+
 tcp_tso_win_divisor - INTEGER
 	This allows control over what percentage of the congestion window
 	can be consumed by a single TSO frame.
@@ -500,6 +529,19 @@ tcp_wmem - vector of 3 INTEGERs: min, default, max
 	this value is ignored.
 	Default: between 64K and 4MB, depending on RAM size.
 
+tcp_notsent_lowat - UNSIGNED INTEGER
+	A TCP socket can control the amount of unsent bytes in its write queue,
+	thanks to TCP_NOTSENT_LOWAT socket option. poll()/select()/epoll()
+	reports POLLOUT events if the amount of unsent bytes is below a per
+	socket value, and if the write queue is not full. sendmsg() will
+	also not add new buffers if the limit is hit.
+
+	This global variable controls the amount of unsent data for
+	sockets not using TCP_NOTSENT_LOWAT. For these sockets, a change
+	to the global variable has immediate effect.
+
+	Default: UINT_MAX (0xFFFFFFFF)
+
 tcp_workaround_signed_windows - BOOLEAN
 	If set, assume no receipt of a window scaling option means the
 	remote TCP is broken and treats the window as a signed quantity.
@@ -537,6 +579,25 @@ tcp_thin_dupack - BOOLEAN
 	Documentation/networking/tcp-thin.txt
 	Default: 0
 
+tcp_limit_output_bytes - INTEGER
+	Controls TCP Small Queue limit per tcp socket.
+	TCP bulk sender tends to increase packets in flight until it
+	gets losses notifications. With SNDBUF autotuning, this can
+	result in a large amount of packets queued in qdisc/device
+	on the local machine, hurting latency of other flows, for
+	typical pfifo_fast qdiscs.
+	tcp_limit_output_bytes limits the number of bytes on qdisc
+	or device to reduce artificial RTT/cwnd and reduce bufferbloat.
+	Note: For GSO/TSO enabled flows, we try to have at least two
+	packets in flight. Reducing tcp_limit_output_bytes might also
+	reduce the size of individual GSO packet (64KB being the max)
+	Default: 131072
+
+tcp_challenge_ack_limit - INTEGER
+	Limits number of Challenge ACK sent per second, as recommended
+	in RFC 5961 (Improving TCP's Robustness to Blind In-Window Attacks)
+	Default: 100
+
 UDP variables:
 
 udp_mem - vector of 3 INTEGERs: min, pressure, max
@@ -604,15 +665,8 @@ IP Variables:
 ip_local_port_range - 2 INTEGERS
 	Defines the local port range that is used by TCP and UDP to
 	choose the local port. The first number is the first, the
-	second the last local port number. Default value depends on
-	amount of memory available on the system:
-	> 128Mb 32768-61000
-	< 128Mb 1024-4999 or even less.
-	This number defines number of active connections, which this
-	system can issue simultaneously to systems not supporting
-	TCP extensions (timestamps). With tcp_tw_recycle enabled
-	(i.e. by default) range 1024-4999 is enough to issue up to
-	2000 connections per second to systems supporting timestamps.
+	second the last local port number. The default values are
+	32768 and 61000 respectively.
 
 ip_local_reserved_ports - list of comma separated ranges
 	Specify the ports which are reserved for known third-party
@@ -657,6 +711,15 @@ ip_dynaddr - BOOLEAN
 	occurs.
 	Default: 0
 
+ip_early_demux - BOOLEAN
+	Optimize input packet processing down to one demux for
+	certain kinds of local sockets.  Currently we only do this
+	for established TCP sockets.
+
+	It may add an additional cost for pure routing workloads that
+	reduces overall throughput, in such case you should disable it.
+	Default: 1
+
 icmp_echo_ignore_all - BOOLEAN
 	If set non-zero, then the kernel will ignore all ICMP ECHO
 	requests sent to it.
@@ -701,7 +764,7 @@ icmp_ignore_bogus_error_responses - BOOLEAN
 	frames.  Such violations are normally logged via a kernel warning.
 	If this is set to TRUE, the kernel will not give such warnings, which
 	will avoid log file clutter.
-	Default: FALSE
+	Default: 1
 
 icmp_errors_use_inbound_ifaddr - BOOLEAN
 
@@ -850,9 +913,19 @@ accept_source_route - BOOLEAN
 		FALSE (host)
 
 accept_local - BOOLEAN
-	Accept packets with local source addresses. In combination with
-	suitable routing, this can be used to direct packets between two
-	local interfaces over the wire and have them accepted properly.
+	Accept packets with local source addresses. In combination
+	with suitable routing, this can be used to direct packets
+	between two local interfaces over the wire and have them
+	accepted properly.
+
+	rp_filter must be set to a non-zero value in order for
+	accept_local to have an effect.
+
+	default FALSE
+
+route_localnet - BOOLEAN
+	Do not consider loopback addresses as martian source or destination
+	while routing. This enables the use of 127/8 for local routing purposes.
 	default FALSE
 
 rp_filter - INTEGER
@@ -975,7 +1048,15 @@ disable_policy - BOOLEAN
 disable_xfrm - BOOLEAN
 	Disable IPSEC encryption on this interface, whatever the policy
 
+igmpv2_unsolicited_report_interval - INTEGER
+	The interval in milliseconds in which the next unsolicited
+	IGMPv1 or IGMPv2 report retransmit will take place.
+	Default: 10000 (10 seconds)
 
+igmpv3_unsolicited_report_interval - INTEGER
+	The interval in milliseconds in which the next unsolicited
+	IGMPv3 report retransmit will take place.
+	Default: 1000 (1 seconds)
 
 tag - INTEGER
 	Allows you to write a number, which can be used as required.
@@ -1261,6 +1342,33 @@ force_tllao - BOOLEAN
 	race condition where the sender deletes the cached link-layer address
 	prior to receiving a response to a previous solicitation."
 
+ndisc_notify - BOOLEAN
+	Define mode for notification of address and device changes.
+	0 - (default): do nothing
+	1 - Generate unsolicited neighbour advertisements when device is brought
+	    up or hardware address changes.
+
+mldv1_unsolicited_report_interval - INTEGER
+	The interval in milliseconds in which the next unsolicited
+	MLDv1 report retransmit will take place.
+	Default: 10000 (10 seconds)
+
+mldv2_unsolicited_report_interval - INTEGER
+	The interval in milliseconds in which the next unsolicited
+	MLDv2 report retransmit will take place.
+	Default: 1000 (1 second)
+
+force_mld_version - INTEGER
+	0 - (default) No enforcement of a MLD version, MLDv1 fallback allowed
+	1 - Enforce to use MLD version 1
+	2 - Enforce to use MLD version 2
+
+suppress_frag_ndisc - INTEGER
+	Control RFC 6980 (Security Implications of IPv6 Fragmentation
+	with IPv6 Neighbor Discovery) behavior:
+	1 - (default) discard fragmented neighbor discovery packets
+	0 - allow fragmented neighbor discovery packets
+
 icmp/*:
 ratelimit - INTEGER
 	Limit the maximal rates for sending ICMPv6 packets.
@@ -1294,13 +1402,22 @@ bridge-nf-call-ip6tables - BOOLEAN
 bridge-nf-filter-vlan-tagged - BOOLEAN
 	1 : pass bridged vlan-tagged ARP/IP/IPv6 traffic to {arp,ip,ip6}tables.
 	0 : disable this.
-	Default: 1
+	Default: 0
 
 bridge-nf-filter-pppoe-tagged - BOOLEAN
 	1 : pass bridged pppoe-tagged IP/IPv6 traffic to {ip,ip6}tables.
 	0 : disable this.
-	Default: 1
+	Default: 0
 
+bridge-nf-pass-vlan-input-dev - BOOLEAN
+	1: if bridge-nf-filter-vlan-tagged is enabled, try to find a vlan
+	interface on the bridge and set the netfilter input device to the vlan.
+	This allows use of e.g. "iptables -i br0.1" and makes the REDIRECT
+	target work with vlan-on-top-of-bridge interfaces.  When no matching
+	vlan interface is found, or this switch is off, the input device is
+	set to the bridge interface.
+	0: disable bridge netfilter vlan interface lookup.
+	Default: 0
 
 proc/sys/net/sctp/* Variables:
 
@@ -1382,6 +1499,20 @@ path_max_retrans - INTEGER
 
 	Default: 5
 
+pf_retrans - INTEGER
+	The number of retransmissions that will be attempted on a given path
+	before traffic is redirected to an alternate transport (should one
+	exist).  Note this is distinct from path_max_retrans, as a path that
+	passes the pf_retrans threshold can still be used.  Its only
+	deprioritized when a transmission path is selected by the stack.  This
+	setting is primarily used to enable fast failover mechanisms without
+	having to reduce path_max_retrans to a very low value.  See:
+	http://www.ietf.org/id/draft-nishida-tsvwg-sctp-failover-05.txt
+	for details.  Note also that a value of pf_retrans > path_max_retrans
+	disables this feature
+
+	Default: 0
+
 rto_initial - INTEGER
 	The initial round trip timeout value in milliseconds that will be used
 	in calculating round trip times.  This is the initial time interval
@@ -1429,6 +1560,20 @@ cookie_preserve_enable - BOOLEAN
 
 	Default: 1
 
+cookie_hmac_alg - STRING
+	Select the hmac algorithm used when generating the cookie value sent by
+	a listening sctp socket to a connecting client in the INIT-ACK chunk.
+	Valid values are:
+	* md5
+	* sha1
+	* none
+	Ability to assign md5 or sha1 as the selected alg is predicated on the
+	configuration of those algorithms at build time (CONFIG_CRYPTO_MD5 and
+	CONFIG_CRYPTO_SHA1).
+
+	Default: Dependent on configuration.  MD5 if available, else SHA1 if
+	available, else none.
+
 rcvbuf_policy - INTEGER
 	Determines if the receive buffer is attributed to the socket or to
 	association.   SCTP supports the capability to create multiple
@@ -1441,7 +1586,7 @@ rcvbuf_policy - INTEGER
 	blocking.
 
 	1: rcvbuf space is per association
-	0: recbuf space is per socket
+	0: rcvbuf space is per socket
 
 	Default: 0
 
@@ -1491,11 +1636,8 @@ addr_scope_policy - INTEGER
 
 
 /proc/sys/net/core/*
-dev_weight - INTEGER
-	The maximum number of packets that kernel can handle on a NAPI
-	interrupt, it's a Per-CPU variable.
+	Please see: Documentation/sysctl/net.txt for descriptions of these entries.
 
-	Default: 64
 
 /proc/sys/net/unix/*
 max_dgram_qlen - INTEGER
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt b/Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt
index 9fd7e21296c8..6cd74fa55358 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt
@@ -2,9 +2,9 @@
 Options for the ipv6 module are supplied as parameters at load time.
 
 Module options may be given as command line arguments to the insmod
-or modprobe command, but are usually specified in either the
-/etc/modules.conf or /etc/modprobe.conf configuration file, or in a
-distro-specific configuration file.
+or modprobe command, but are usually specified in either
+/etc/modules.d/*.conf configuration files, or in a distro-specific
+configuration file.
 
 The available ipv6 module parameters are listed below.  If a parameter
 is not specified the default value is used.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt
index f2a2488f1bf3..7a3c04729591 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt
@@ -15,6 +15,13 @@ amemthresh - INTEGER
         enabled and the variable is automatically set to 2, otherwise
         the strategy is disabled and the variable is  set  to 1.
 
+backup_only - BOOLEAN
+	0 - disabled (default)
+	not 0 - enabled
+
+	If set, disable the director function while the server is
+	in backup mode to avoid packet loops for DR/TUN methods.
+
 conntrack - BOOLEAN
 	0 - disabled (default)
 	not 0 - enabled
@@ -174,6 +181,19 @@ snat_reroute - BOOLEAN
 	always be the same as the original route so it is an optimisation
 	to disable snat_reroute and avoid the recalculation.
 
+sync_persist_mode - INTEGER
+	default 0
+
+	Controls the synchronisation of connections when using persistence
+
+	0: All types of connections are synchronised
+	1: Attempt to reduce the synchronisation traffic depending on
+	the connection type. For persistent services avoid synchronisation
+	for normal connections, do it only for persistence templates.
+	In such case, for TCP and SCTP it may need enabling sloppy_tcp and
+	sloppy_sctp flags on backup servers. For non-persistent services
+	such optimization is not applied, mode 0 is assumed.
+
 sync_version - INTEGER
 	default 1
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt
index e196f16df313..1e0c045e89f7 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
-Linux Base Driver for 10 Gigabit Intel(R) Network Connection
-=============================================================
+Linux Base Driver for 10 Gigabit Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+=====================================================================
 
-October 9, 2007
+March 14, 2011
 
 
 Contents
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Additional Configurations
   with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 16128.
 
 
-  Ethtool
+  ethtool
   -------
   The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
   diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information.  The ethtool
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt
index af77ed3c4172..96cccebb839b 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,9 @@
-Linux Base Driver for 10 Gigabit PCI Express Intel(R) Network Connection
-========================================================================
+Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet 10 Gigabit PCI Express Family of
+Adapters
+=============================================================================
 
-Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
-Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation.
+Intel 10 Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999 - 2013 Intel Corporation.
 
 Contents
 ========
@@ -16,8 +17,8 @@ Contents
 Identifying Your Adapter
 ========================
 
-The driver in this release is compatible with 82598 and 82599-based Intel
-Network Connections.
+The driver in this release is compatible with 82598, 82599 and X540-based
+Intel Network Connections.
 
 For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter &
 Driver ID Guide at:
@@ -72,7 +73,7 @@ cables that comply with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications.
 Laser turns off for SFP+ when ifconfig down
 -------------------------------------------
 "ifconfig down" turns off the laser for 82599-based SFP+ fiber adapters.
-"ifconfig up" turns on the later.
+"ifconfig up" turns on the laser.
 
 
 82598-BASED ADAPTERS
@@ -118,6 +119,93 @@ NOTE: For 82598 backplane cards entering 1 gig mode, flow control default
 behavior is changed to off.  Flow control in 1 gig mode on these devices can
 lead to Tx hangs.
 
+Intel(R) Ethernet Flow Director
+-------------------------------
+Supports advanced filters that direct receive packets by their flows to
+different queues. Enables tight control on routing a flow in the platform.
+Matches flows and CPU cores for flow affinity. Supports multiple parameters
+for flexible flow classification and load balancing.
+
+Flow director is enabled only if the kernel is multiple TX queue capable.
+
+An included script (set_irq_affinity.sh) automates setting the IRQ to CPU
+affinity.
+
+You can verify that the driver is using Flow Director by looking at the counter
+in ethtool: fdir_miss and fdir_match.
+
+Other ethtool Commands:
+To enable Flow Director
+	ethtool -K ethX ntuple on
+To add a filter
+	Use -U switch. e.g., ethtool -U ethX flow-type tcp4 src-ip 0x178000a
+        action 1
+To see the list of filters currently present:
+	ethtool -u ethX
+
+Perfect Filter: Perfect filter is an interface to load the filter table that
+funnels all flow into queue_0 unless an alternative queue is specified using
+"action". In that case, any flow that matches the filter criteria will be
+directed to the appropriate queue.
+
+If the queue is defined as -1, filter will drop matching packets.
+
+To account for filter matches and misses, there are two stats in ethtool:
+fdir_match and fdir_miss. In addition, rx_queue_N_packets shows the number of
+packets processed by the Nth queue.
+
+NOTE: Receive Packet Steering (RPS) and Receive Flow Steering (RFS) are not
+compatible with Flow Director. IF Flow Director is enabled, these will be
+disabled.
+
+The following three parameters impact Flow Director.
+
+FdirMode
+--------
+Valid Range: 0-2 (0=off, 1=ATR, 2=Perfect filter mode)
+Default Value: 1
+
+  Flow Director filtering modes.
+
+FdirPballoc
+-----------
+Valid Range: 0-2 (0=64k, 1=128k, 2=256k)
+Default Value: 0
+
+  Flow Director allocated packet buffer size.
+
+AtrSampleRate
+--------------
+Valid Range: 1-100
+Default Value: 20
+
+  Software ATR Tx packet sample rate. For example, when set to 20, every 20th
+  packet, looks to see if the packet will create a new flow.
+
+Node
+----
+Valid Range:   0-n
+Default Value: 1 (off)
+
+  0 - n: where n is the number of NUMA nodes (i.e. 0 - 3) currently online in
+  your system
+  1: turns this option off
+
+  The Node parameter will allow you to pick which NUMA node you want to have
+  the adapter allocate memory on.
+
+max_vfs
+-------
+Valid Range:   1-63
+Default Value: 0
+
+  If the value is greater than 0 it will also force the VMDq parameter to be 1
+  or more.
+
+  This parameter adds support for SR-IOV.  It causes the driver to spawn up to
+  max_vfs worth of virtual function.
+
+
 Additional Configurations
 =========================
 
@@ -221,9 +309,10 @@ http://www.redhat.com/promo/summit/2008/downloads/pdf/Thursday/Mark_Wagner.pdf
 Known Issues
 ============
 
-  Enabling SR-IOV in a 32-bit Microsoft* Windows* Server 2008 Guest OS using
-  Intel (R) 82576-based GbE or Intel (R) 82599-based 10GbE controller under KVM
-  -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+  Enabling SR-IOV in a 32-bit or 64-bit Microsoft* Windows* Server 2008/R2
+  Guest OS using Intel (R) 82576-based GbE or Intel (R) 82599-based 10GbE
+  controller under KVM
+  ------------------------------------------------------------------------
   KVM Hypervisor/VMM supports direct assignment of a PCIe device to a VM.  This
   includes traditional PCIe devices, as well as SR-IOV-capable devices using
   Intel 82576-based and 82599-based controllers.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt
index 5a91a41fa946..53d8d2a5a6a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Network Connection
-==================================================
+Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+===========================================================
 
 Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
-Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation.
+Copyright(c) 1999 - 2013 Intel Corporation.
 
 Contents
 ========
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ltpc.txt b/Documentation/networking/ltpc.txt
index fe2a9129d959..0bf3220c715b 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ltpc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ltpc.txt
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ the driver will try to determine them itself.
 
 If you load the driver as a module, you can pass the parameters "io=",
 "irq=", and "dma=" on the command line with insmod or modprobe, or add
-them as options in /etc/modprobe.conf:
+them as options in a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/ directory:
 
  alias lt0 ltpc # autoload the module when the interface is configured
  options ltpc io=0x240 irq=9 dma=1
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/mac80211-auth-assoc-deauth.txt b/Documentation/networking/mac80211-auth-assoc-deauth.txt
index e0a2aa585ca3..d7a15fe91bf7 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/mac80211-auth-assoc-deauth.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/mac80211-auth-assoc-deauth.txt
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ BA session stop & deauth/disassoc frames
 end note
 end
 
-mac80211->driver: config(channel, non-HT)
+mac80211->driver: config(channel, channel type)
 mac80211->driver: bss_info_changed(set BSSID, basic rate bitmap)
 mac80211->driver: sta_state(AP, exists)
 
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ note over mac80211,driver: cleanup like for authenticate
 end
 
 alt not previously authenticated (FT)
-mac80211->driver: config(channel, non-HT)
+mac80211->driver: config(channel, channel type)
 mac80211->driver: bss_info_changed(set BSSID, basic rate bitmap)
 mac80211->driver: sta_state(AP, exists)
 mac80211->driver: sta_state(AP, authenticated)
@@ -67,10 +67,6 @@ end
 
 mac80211->driver: set up QoS parameters
 
-alt is HT channel
-mac80211->driver: config(channel, HT params)
-end
-
 mac80211->driver: bss_info_changed(QoS, HT, associated with AID)
 mac80211->userspace: associated
 
@@ -95,5 +91,5 @@ mac80211->driver: sta_state(AP,exists)
 mac80211->driver: sta_state(AP,not-exists)
 mac80211->driver: turn off powersave
 mac80211->driver: bss_info_changed(clear BSSID, not associated, no QoS, ...)
-mac80211->driver: config(non-HT channel type)
+mac80211->driver: config(channel type to non-HT)
 mac80211->userspace: disconnected
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multicast.txt b/Documentation/networking/multicast.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index b06c8c69266f..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/networking/multicast.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
-Behaviour of Cards Under Multicast
-==================================
-
-This is how they currently behave, not what the hardware can do--for example,
-the Lance driver doesn't use its filter, even though the code for loading
-it is in the DEC Lance-based driver.
-
-The following are requirements for multicasting 
------------------------------------------------
-AppleTalk	Multicast	hardware filtering not important but
-				 avoid cards only doing promisc
-IP-Multicast	Multicast	hardware filters really help
-IP-MRoute	AllMulti	hardware filters are of no help
-
-
-Board		Multicast	AllMulti	Promisc		Filter
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-3c501		YES		YES		YES		Software
-3c503		YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-3c505		YES		NO		YES		Hardware
-3c507		NO		NO		NO		N/A
-3c509		YES		YES		YES		Software
-3c59x		YES		YES		YES		Software
-ac3200		YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-apricot		YES		PROMISC		YES		Hardware
-arcnet		NO		NO		NO		N/A
-at1700		PROMISC		PROMISC		YES		Software
-atp		PROMISC		PROMISC		YES		Software
-cs89x0		YES		YES		YES		Software
-de4x5		YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-de600		NO		NO		NO		N/A
-de620		PROMISC		PROMISC		YES		Software
-depca		YES		PROMISC		YES		Hardware
-dmfe		YES		YES		YES		Software(*)
-e2100		YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-eepro		YES		PROMISC		YES		Hardware
-eexpress	NO		NO		NO		N/A
-ewrk3		YES		PROMISC		YES		Hardware
-hp-plus		YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-hp		YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-hp100		YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-ibmtr		NO		NO		NO		N/A
-ioc3-eth	YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-lance		YES		YES		YES		Software(#)
-ne		YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-ni52		<------------------ Buggy ------------------>
-ni65		YES		YES		YES		Software(#)
-seeq		NO		NO		NO		N/A
-sgiseek		<------------------ Buggy ------------------>
-smc-ultra	YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-sunlance	YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-tulip		YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-wavelan		YES		PROMISC		YES		Hardware
-wd		YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-xirc2ps_cs	YES		YES		YES		Hardware
-znet		YES		YES		YES		Software
-
-
-PROMISC = This multicast mode is in fact promiscuous mode. Avoid using
-cards who go PROMISC on any multicast in a multicast kernel.
-
-(#) = Hardware multicast support is not used yet.
-(*) = Hardware support for Davicom 9132 chipset only.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt b/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt
index 8d022073e3ef..a5d574a9ae09 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt
@@ -1,9 +1,10 @@
 
 started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>, 2001.09.17
 2.6 port and netpoll api by Matt Mackall <mpm@selenic.com>, Sep 9 2003
+IPv6 support by Cong Wang <xiyou.wangcong@gmail.com>, Jan 1 2013
 
 Please send bug reports to Matt Mackall <mpm@selenic.com>
-and Satyam Sharma <satyam.sharma@gmail.com>
+Satyam Sharma <satyam.sharma@gmail.com>, and Cong Wang <xiyou.wangcong@gmail.com>
 
 Introduction:
 =============
@@ -41,6 +42,10 @@ Examples:
 
  insmod netconsole netconsole=@/,@10.0.0.2/
 
+  or using IPv6
+
+ insmod netconsole netconsole=@/,@fd00:1:2:3::1/
+
 It also supports logging to multiple remote agents by specifying
 parameters for the multiple agents separated by semicolons and the
 complete string enclosed in "quotes", thusly:
@@ -51,8 +56,23 @@ Built-in netconsole starts immediately after the TCP stack is
 initialized and attempts to bring up the supplied dev at the supplied
 address.
 
-The remote host can run either 'netcat -u -l -p <port>',
-'nc -l -u <port>' or syslogd.
+The remote host has several options to receive the kernel messages,
+for example:
+
+1) syslogd
+
+2) netcat
+
+   On distributions using a BSD-based netcat version (e.g. Fedora,
+   openSUSE and Ubuntu) the listening port must be specified without
+   the -p switch:
+
+   'nc -u -l -p <port>' / 'nc -u -l <port>' or
+   'netcat -u -l -p <port>' / 'netcat -u -l <port>'
+
+3) socat
+
+   'socat udp-recv:<port> -'
 
 Dynamic reconfiguration:
 ========================
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt b/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d9112f01c44a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
+
+Information you need to know about netdev
+-----------------------------------------
+
+Q: What is netdev?
+
+A: It is a mailing list for all network related linux stuff.  This includes
+   anything found under net/  (i.e. core code like IPv6) and drivers/net
+   (i.e. hardware specific drivers) in the linux source tree.
+
+   Note that some subsystems (e.g. wireless drivers) which have a high volume
+   of traffic have their own specific mailing lists.
+
+   The netdev list is managed (like many other linux mailing lists) through
+   VGER ( http://vger.kernel.org/ ) and archives can be found below:
+
+	http://marc.info/?l=linux-netdev
+	http://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/
+
+   Aside from subsystems like that mentioned above, all network related linux
+   development (i.e. RFC, review, comments, etc) takes place on netdev.
+
+Q: How do the changes posted to netdev make their way into linux?
+
+A: There are always two trees (git repositories) in play.  Both are driven
+   by David Miller, the main network maintainer.  There is the "net" tree,
+   and the "net-next" tree.  As you can probably guess from the names, the
+   net tree is for fixes to existing code already in the mainline tree from
+   Linus, and net-next is where the new code goes for the future release.
+   You can find the trees here:
+
+	http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/davem/net.git
+	http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/davem/net-next.git
+
+Q: How often do changes from these trees make it to the mainline Linus tree?
+
+A: To understand this, you need to know a bit of background information
+   on the cadence of linux development.  Each new release starts off with
+   a two week "merge window" where the main maintainers feed their new
+   stuff to Linus for merging into the mainline tree.  After the two weeks,
+   the merge window is closed, and it is called/tagged "-rc1".  No new
+   features get mainlined after this -- only fixes to the rc1 content
+   are expected.  After roughly a week of collecting fixes to the rc1
+   content, rc2 is released.  This repeats on a roughly weekly basis
+   until rc7 (typically; sometimes rc6 if things are quiet, or rc8 if
+   things are in a state of churn), and a week after the last vX.Y-rcN
+   was done, the official "vX.Y" is released.
+
+   Relating that to netdev:  At the beginning of the 2 week merge window,
+   the net-next tree will be closed - no new changes/features.  The
+   accumulated new content of the past ~10 weeks will be passed onto
+   mainline/Linus via a pull request for vX.Y -- at the same time,
+   the "net" tree will start accumulating fixes for this pulled content
+   relating to vX.Y
+
+   An announcement indicating when net-next has been closed is usually
+   sent to netdev, but knowing the above, you can predict that in advance.
+
+   IMPORTANT:  Do not send new net-next content to netdev during the
+   period during which net-next tree is closed.
+
+   Shortly after the two weeks have passed, (and vX.Y-rc1 is released) the
+   tree for net-next reopens to collect content for the next (vX.Y+1) release.
+
+   If you aren't subscribed to netdev and/or are simply unsure if net-next
+   has re-opened yet, simply check the net-next git repository link above for
+   any new networking related commits.
+
+   The "net" tree continues to collect fixes for the vX.Y content, and
+   is fed back to Linus at regular (~weekly) intervals.  Meaning that the
+   focus for "net" is on stablilization and bugfixes.
+
+   Finally, the vX.Y gets released, and the whole cycle starts over.
+
+Q: So where are we now in this cycle?
+
+A: Load the mainline (Linus) page here:
+
+	http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git
+
+   and note the top of the "tags" section.  If it is rc1, it is early
+   in the dev cycle.  If it was tagged rc7 a week ago, then a release
+   is probably imminent.
+
+Q: How do I indicate which tree (net vs. net-next) my patch should be in?
+
+A: Firstly, think whether you have a bug fix or new "next-like" content.
+   Then once decided, assuming that you use git, use the prefix flag, i.e.
+
+	git format-patch --subject-prefix='PATCH net-next' start..finish
+
+   Use "net" instead of "net-next" (always lower case) in the above for
+   bug-fix net content.  If you don't use git, then note the only magic in
+   the above is just the subject text of the outgoing e-mail, and you can
+   manually change it yourself with whatever MUA you are comfortable with.
+
+Q: I sent a patch and I'm wondering what happened to it.  How can I tell
+   whether it got merged?
+
+A: Start by looking at the main patchworks queue for netdev:
+
+	http://patchwork.ozlabs.org/project/netdev/list/
+
+   The "State" field will tell you exactly where things are at with
+   your patch.
+
+Q: The above only says "Under Review".  How can I find out more?
+
+A: Generally speaking, the patches get triaged quickly (in less than 48h).
+   So be patient.  Asking the maintainer for status updates on your
+   patch is a good way to ensure your patch is ignored or pushed to
+   the bottom of the priority list.
+
+Q: How can I tell what patches are queued up for backporting to the
+   various stable releases?
+
+A: Normally Greg Kroah-Hartman collects stable commits himself, but
+   for networking, Dave collects up patches he deems critical for the
+   networking subsystem, and then hands them off to Greg.
+
+   There is a patchworks queue that you can see here:
+	http://patchwork.ozlabs.org/bundle/davem/stable/?state=*
+
+   It contains the patches which Dave has selected, but not yet handed
+   off to Greg.  If Greg already has the patch, then it will be here:
+	http://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/stable/stable-queue.git
+
+   A quick way to find whether the patch is in this stable-queue is
+   to simply clone the repo, and then git grep the mainline commit ID, e.g.
+
+	stable-queue$ git grep -l 284041ef21fdf2e
+	releases/3.0.84/ipv6-fix-possible-crashes-in-ip6_cork_release.patch
+	releases/3.4.51/ipv6-fix-possible-crashes-in-ip6_cork_release.patch
+	releases/3.9.8/ipv6-fix-possible-crashes-in-ip6_cork_release.patch
+	stable/stable-queue$
+
+Q: I see a network patch and I think it should be backported to stable.
+   Should I request it via "stable@vger.kernel.org" like the references in
+   the kernel's Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt file say?
+
+A: No, not for networking.  Check the stable queues as per above 1st to see
+   if it is already queued.  If not, then send a mail to netdev, listing
+   the upstream commit ID and why you think it should be a stable candidate.
+
+   Before you jump to go do the above, do note that the normal stable rules
+   in Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt still apply.  So you need to
+   explicitly indicate why it is a critical fix and exactly what users are
+   impacted.  In addition, you need to convince yourself that you _really_
+   think it has been overlooked, vs. having been considered and rejected.
+
+   Generally speaking, the longer it has had a chance to "soak" in mainline,
+   the better the odds that it is an OK candidate for stable.  So scrambling
+   to request a commit be added the day after it appears should be avoided.
+
+Q: I have created a network patch and I think it should be backported to
+   stable.  Should I add a "Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org" like the references
+   in the kernel's Documentation/ directory say?
+
+A: No.  See above answer.  In short, if you think it really belongs in
+   stable, then ensure you write a decent commit log that describes who
+   gets impacted by the bugfix and how it manifests itself, and when the
+   bug was introduced.  If you do that properly, then the commit will
+   get handled appropriately and most likely get put in the patchworks
+   stable queue if it really warrants it.
+
+   If you think there is some valid information relating to it being in
+   stable that does _not_ belong in the commit log, then use the three
+   dash marker line as described in Documentation/SubmittingPatches to
+   temporarily embed that information into the patch that you send.
+
+Q: Someone said that the comment style and coding convention is different
+   for the networking content.  Is this true?
+
+A: Yes, in a largely trivial way.  Instead of this:
+
+	/*
+	 * foobar blah blah blah
+	 * another line of text
+	 */
+
+   it is requested that you make it look like this:
+
+	/* foobar blah blah blah
+	 * another line of text
+	 */
+
+Q: I am working in existing code that has the former comment style and not the
+   latter.  Should I submit new code in the former style or the latter?
+
+A: Make it the latter style, so that eventually all code in the domain of
+   netdev is of this format.
+
+Q: I found a bug that might have possible security implications or similar.
+   Should I mail the main netdev maintainer off-list?
+
+A: No. The current netdev maintainer has consistently requested that people
+   use the mailing lists and not reach out directly.  If you aren't OK with
+   that, then perhaps consider mailing "security@kernel.org" or reading about
+   http://oss-security.openwall.org/wiki/mailing-lists/distros
+   as possible alternative mechanisms.
+
+Q: What level of testing is expected before I submit my change?
+
+A: If your changes are against net-next, the expectation is that you
+   have tested by layering your changes on top of net-next.  Ideally you
+   will have done run-time testing specific to your change, but at a
+   minimum, your changes should survive an "allyesconfig" and an
+   "allmodconfig" build without new warnings or failures.
+
+Q: Any other tips to help ensure my net/net-next patch gets OK'd?
+
+A: Attention to detail.  Re-read your own work as if you were the
+   reviewer.  You can start with using checkpatch.pl, perhaps even
+   with the "--strict" flag.  But do not be mindlessly robotic in
+   doing so.  If your change is a bug-fix, make sure your commit log
+   indicates the end-user visible symptom, the underlying reason as
+   to why it happens, and then if necessary, explain why the fix proposed
+   is the best way to get things done.   Don't mangle whitespace, and as
+   is common, don't mis-indent function arguments that span multiple lines.
+   If it is your 1st patch, mail it to yourself so you can test apply
+   it to an unpatched tree to confirm infrastructure didn't mangle it.
+
+   Finally, go back and read Documentation/SubmittingPatches to be
+   sure you are not repeating some common mistake documented there.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdev-features.txt b/Documentation/networking/netdev-features.txt
index 4164f5c02e4b..f310edec8a77 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/netdev-features.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/netdev-features.txt
@@ -164,4 +164,4 @@ read the CRC recorded by the NIC on receipt of the packet.
 This requests that the NIC receive all possible frames, including errored
 frames (such as bad FCS, etc).  This can be helpful when sniffing a link with
 bad packets on it.  Some NICs may receive more packets if also put into normal
-PROMISC mdoe.
+PROMISC mode.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt
index 89358341682a..c7ecc7080494 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt
@@ -47,26 +47,25 @@ packets is preferred.
 
 struct net_device synchronization rules
 =======================================
-dev->open:
+ndo_open:
 	Synchronization: rtnl_lock() semaphore.
 	Context: process
 
-dev->stop:
+ndo_stop:
 	Synchronization: rtnl_lock() semaphore.
 	Context: process
-	Note1: netif_running() is guaranteed false
-	Note2: dev->poll() is guaranteed to be stopped
+	Note: netif_running() is guaranteed false
 
-dev->do_ioctl:
+ndo_do_ioctl:
 	Synchronization: rtnl_lock() semaphore.
 	Context: process
 
-dev->get_stats:
+ndo_get_stats:
 	Synchronization: dev_base_lock rwlock.
 	Context: nominally process, but don't sleep inside an rwlock
 
-dev->hard_start_xmit:
-	Synchronization: netif_tx_lock spinlock.
+ndo_start_xmit:
+	Synchronization: __netif_tx_lock spinlock.
 
 	When the driver sets NETIF_F_LLTX in dev->features this will be
 	called without holding netif_tx_lock. In this case the driver
@@ -87,20 +86,20 @@ dev->hard_start_xmit:
 	o NETDEV_TX_LOCKED Locking failed, please retry quickly.
 	  Only valid when NETIF_F_LLTX is set.
 
-dev->tx_timeout:
-	Synchronization: netif_tx_lock spinlock.
+ndo_tx_timeout:
+	Synchronization: netif_tx_lock spinlock; all TX queues frozen.
 	Context: BHs disabled
 	Notes: netif_queue_stopped() is guaranteed true
 
-dev->set_rx_mode:
-	Synchronization: netif_tx_lock spinlock.
+ndo_set_rx_mode:
+	Synchronization: netif_addr_lock spinlock.
 	Context: BHs disabled
 
 struct napi_struct synchronization rules
 ========================================
 napi->poll:
 	Synchronization: NAPI_STATE_SCHED bit in napi->state.  Device
-		driver's dev->close method will invoke napi_disable() on
+		driver's ndo_stop method will invoke napi_disable() on
 		all NAPI instances which will do a sleeping poll on the
 		NAPI_STATE_SCHED napi->state bit, waiting for all pending
 		NAPI activity to cease.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netlink_mmap.txt b/Documentation/networking/netlink_mmap.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..533378839546
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/netlink_mmap.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,339 @@
+This file documents how to use memory mapped I/O with netlink.
+
+Author: Patrick McHardy <kaber@trash.net>
+
+Overview
+--------
+
+Memory mapped netlink I/O can be used to increase throughput and decrease
+overhead of unicast receive and transmit operations. Some netlink subsystems
+require high throughput, these are mainly the netfilter subsystems
+nfnetlink_queue and nfnetlink_log, but it can also help speed up large
+dump operations of f.i. the routing database.
+
+Memory mapped netlink I/O used two circular ring buffers for RX and TX which
+are mapped into the processes address space.
+
+The RX ring is used by the kernel to directly construct netlink messages into
+user-space memory without copying them as done with regular socket I/O,
+additionally as long as the ring contains messages no recvmsg() or poll()
+syscalls have to be issued by user-space to get more message.
+
+The TX ring is used to process messages directly from user-space memory, the
+kernel processes all messages contained in the ring using a single sendmsg()
+call.
+
+Usage overview
+--------------
+
+In order to use memory mapped netlink I/O, user-space needs three main changes:
+
+- ring setup
+- conversion of the RX path to get messages from the ring instead of recvmsg()
+- conversion of the TX path to construct messages into the ring
+
+Ring setup is done using setsockopt() to provide the ring parameters to the
+kernel, then a call to mmap() to map the ring into the processes address space:
+
+- setsockopt(fd, SOL_NETLINK, NETLINK_RX_RING, &params, sizeof(params));
+- setsockopt(fd, SOL_NETLINK, NETLINK_TX_RING, &params, sizeof(params));
+- ring = mmap(NULL, size, PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0)
+
+Usage of either ring is optional, but even if only the RX ring is used the
+mapping still needs to be writable in order to update the frame status after
+processing.
+
+Conversion of the reception path involves calling poll() on the file
+descriptor, once the socket is readable the frames from the ring are
+processsed in order until no more messages are available, as indicated by
+a status word in the frame header.
+
+On kernel side, in order to make use of memory mapped I/O on receive, the
+originating netlink subsystem needs to support memory mapped I/O, otherwise
+it will use an allocated socket buffer as usual and the contents will be
+ copied to the ring on transmission, nullifying most of the performance gains.
+Dumps of kernel databases automatically support memory mapped I/O.
+
+Conversion of the transmit path involves changing message construction to
+use memory from the TX ring instead of (usually) a buffer declared on the
+stack and setting up the frame header approriately. Optionally poll() can
+be used to wait for free frames in the TX ring.
+
+Structured and definitions for using memory mapped I/O are contained in
+<linux/netlink.h>.
+
+RX and TX rings
+----------------
+
+Each ring contains a number of continuous memory blocks, containing frames of
+fixed size dependent on the parameters used for ring setup.
+
+Ring:	[ block 0 ]
+		[ frame 0 ]
+		[ frame 1 ]
+	[ block 1 ]
+		[ frame 2 ]
+		[ frame 3 ]
+	...
+	[ block n ]
+		[ frame 2 * n ]
+		[ frame 2 * n + 1 ]
+
+The blocks are only visible to the kernel, from the point of view of user-space
+the ring just contains the frames in a continuous memory zone.
+
+The ring parameters used for setting up the ring are defined as follows:
+
+struct nl_mmap_req {
+	unsigned int	nm_block_size;
+	unsigned int	nm_block_nr;
+	unsigned int	nm_frame_size;
+	unsigned int	nm_frame_nr;
+};
+
+Frames are grouped into blocks, where each block is a continuous region of memory
+and holds nm_block_size / nm_frame_size frames. The total number of frames in
+the ring is nm_frame_nr. The following invariants hold:
+
+- frames_per_block = nm_block_size / nm_frame_size
+
+- nm_frame_nr = frames_per_block * nm_block_nr
+
+Some parameters are constrained, specifically:
+
+- nm_block_size must be a multiple of the architectures memory page size.
+  The getpagesize() function can be used to get the page size.
+
+- nm_frame_size must be equal or larger to NL_MMAP_HDRLEN, IOW a frame must be
+  able to hold at least the frame header
+
+- nm_frame_size must be smaller or equal to nm_block_size
+
+- nm_frame_size must be a multiple of NL_MMAP_MSG_ALIGNMENT
+
+- nm_frame_nr must equal the actual number of frames as specified above.
+
+When the kernel can't allocate physically continuous memory for a ring block,
+it will fall back to use physically discontinuous memory. This might affect
+performance negatively, in order to avoid this the nm_frame_size parameter
+should be chosen to be as small as possible for the required frame size and
+the number of blocks should be increased instead.
+
+Ring frames
+------------
+
+Each frames contain a frame header, consisting of a synchronization word and some
+meta-data, and the message itself.
+
+Frame:	[ header message ]
+
+The frame header is defined as follows:
+
+struct nl_mmap_hdr {
+	unsigned int	nm_status;
+	unsigned int	nm_len;
+	__u32		nm_group;
+	/* credentials */
+	__u32		nm_pid;
+	__u32		nm_uid;
+	__u32		nm_gid;
+};
+
+- nm_status is used for synchronizing processing between the kernel and user-
+  space and specifies ownership of the frame as well as the operation to perform
+
+- nm_len contains the length of the message contained in the data area
+
+- nm_group specified the destination multicast group of message
+
+- nm_pid, nm_uid and nm_gid contain the netlink pid, UID and GID of the sending
+  process. These values correspond to the data available using SOCK_PASSCRED in
+  the SCM_CREDENTIALS cmsg.
+
+The possible values in the status word are:
+
+- NL_MMAP_STATUS_UNUSED:
+	RX ring:	frame belongs to the kernel and contains no message
+			for user-space. Approriate action is to invoke poll()
+			to wait for new messages.
+
+	TX ring:	frame belongs to user-space and can be used for
+			message construction.
+
+- NL_MMAP_STATUS_RESERVED:
+	RX ring only:	frame is currently used by the kernel for message
+			construction and contains no valid message yet.
+			Appropriate action is to invoke poll() to wait for
+			new messages.
+
+- NL_MMAP_STATUS_VALID:
+	RX ring:	frame contains a valid message. Approriate action is
+			to process the message and release the frame back to
+			the kernel by setting the status to
+			NL_MMAP_STATUS_UNUSED or queue the frame by setting the
+			status to NL_MMAP_STATUS_SKIP.
+
+	TX ring:	the frame contains a valid message from user-space to
+			be processed by the kernel. After completing processing
+			the kernel will release the frame back to user-space by
+			setting the status to NL_MMAP_STATUS_UNUSED.
+
+- NL_MMAP_STATUS_COPY:
+	RX ring only:	a message is ready to be processed but could not be
+			stored in the ring, either because it exceeded the
+			frame size or because the originating subsystem does
+			not support memory mapped I/O. Appropriate action is
+			to invoke recvmsg() to receive the message and release
+			the frame back to the kernel by setting the status to
+			NL_MMAP_STATUS_UNUSED.
+
+- NL_MMAP_STATUS_SKIP:
+	RX ring only:	user-space queued the message for later processing, but
+			processed some messages following it in the ring. The
+			kernel should skip this frame when looking for unused
+			frames.
+
+The data area of a frame begins at a offset of NL_MMAP_HDRLEN relative to the
+frame header.
+
+TX limitations
+--------------
+
+Kernel processing usually involves validation of the message received by
+user-space, then processing its contents. The kernel must assure that
+userspace is not able to modify the message contents after they have been
+validated. In order to do so, the message is copied from the ring frame
+to an allocated buffer if either of these conditions is false:
+
+- only a single mapping of the ring exists
+- the file descriptor is not shared between processes
+
+This means that for threaded programs, the kernel will fall back to copying.
+
+Example
+-------
+
+Ring setup:
+
+	unsigned int block_size = 16 * getpagesize();
+	struct nl_mmap_req req = {
+		.nm_block_size		= block_size,
+		.nm_block_nr		= 64,
+		.nm_frame_size		= 16384,
+		.nm_frame_nr		= 64 * block_size / 16384,
+	};
+	unsigned int ring_size;
+	void *rx_ring, *tx_ring;
+
+	/* Configure ring parameters */
+	if (setsockopt(fd, NETLINK_RX_RING, &req, sizeof(req)) < 0)
+		exit(1);
+	if (setsockopt(fd, NETLINK_TX_RING, &req, sizeof(req)) < 0)
+		exit(1)
+
+	/* Calculate size of each invididual ring */
+	ring_size = req.nm_block_nr * req.nm_block_size;
+
+	/* Map RX/TX rings. The TX ring is located after the RX ring */
+	rx_ring = mmap(NULL, 2 * ring_size, PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE,
+		       MAP_SHARED, fd, 0);
+	if ((long)rx_ring == -1L)
+		exit(1);
+	tx_ring = rx_ring + ring_size:
+
+Message reception:
+
+This example assumes some ring parameters of the ring setup are available.
+
+	unsigned int frame_offset = 0;
+	struct nl_mmap_hdr *hdr;
+	struct nlmsghdr *nlh;
+	unsigned char buf[16384];
+	ssize_t len;
+
+	while (1) {
+		struct pollfd pfds[1];
+
+		pfds[0].fd	= fd;
+		pfds[0].events	= POLLIN | POLLERR;
+		pfds[0].revents	= 0;
+
+		if (poll(pfds, 1, -1) < 0 && errno != -EINTR)
+			exit(1);
+
+		/* Check for errors. Error handling omitted */
+		if (pfds[0].revents & POLLERR)
+			<handle error>
+
+		/* If no new messages, poll again */
+		if (!(pfds[0].revents & POLLIN))
+			continue;
+
+		/* Process all frames */
+		while (1) {
+			/* Get next frame header */
+			hdr = rx_ring + frame_offset;
+
+			if (hdr->nm_status == NL_MMAP_STATUS_VALID) {
+				/* Regular memory mapped frame */
+				nlh = (void *)hdr + NL_MMAP_HDRLEN;
+				len = hdr->nm_len;
+
+				/* Release empty message immediately. May happen
+				 * on error during message construction.
+				 */
+				if (len == 0)
+					goto release;
+			} else if (hdr->nm_status == NL_MMAP_STATUS_COPY) {
+				/* Frame queued to socket receive queue */
+				len = recv(fd, buf, sizeof(buf), MSG_DONTWAIT);
+				if (len <= 0)
+					break;
+				nlh = buf;
+			} else
+				/* No more messages to process, continue polling */
+				break;
+
+			process_msg(nlh);
+release:
+			/* Release frame back to the kernel */
+			hdr->nm_status = NL_MMAP_STATUS_UNUSED;
+
+			/* Advance frame offset to next frame */
+			frame_offset = (frame_offset + frame_size) % ring_size;
+		}
+	}
+
+Message transmission:
+
+This example assumes some ring parameters of the ring setup are available.
+A single message is constructed and transmitted, to send multiple messages
+at once they would be constructed in consecutive frames before a final call
+to sendto().
+
+	unsigned int frame_offset = 0;
+	struct nl_mmap_hdr *hdr;
+	struct nlmsghdr *nlh;
+	struct sockaddr_nl addr = {
+		.nl_family	= AF_NETLINK,
+	};
+
+	hdr = tx_ring + frame_offset;
+	if (hdr->nm_status != NL_MMAP_STATUS_UNUSED)
+		/* No frame available. Use poll() to avoid. */
+		exit(1);
+
+	nlh = (void *)hdr + NL_MMAP_HDRLEN;
+
+	/* Build message */
+	build_message(nlh);
+
+	/* Fill frame header: length and status need to be set */
+	hdr->nm_len	= nlh->nlmsg_len;
+	hdr->nm_status	= NL_MMAP_STATUS_VALID;
+
+	if (sendto(fd, NULL, 0, 0, &addr, sizeof(addr)) < 0)
+		exit(1);
+
+	/* Advance frame offset to next frame */
+	frame_offset = (frame_offset + frame_size) % ring_size;
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/nf_conntrack-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/nf_conntrack-sysctl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..70da5086153d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/nf_conntrack-sysctl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+/proc/sys/net/netfilter/nf_conntrack_* Variables:
+
+nf_conntrack_acct - BOOLEAN
+	0 - disabled (default)
+	not 0 - enabled
+
+	Enable connection tracking flow accounting. 64-bit byte and packet
+	counters per flow are added.
+
+nf_conntrack_buckets - INTEGER (read-only)
+	Size of hash table. If not specified as parameter during module
+	loading, the default size is calculated by dividing total memory
+	by 16384 to determine the number of buckets but the hash table will
+	never have fewer than 32 or more than 16384 buckets.
+
+nf_conntrack_checksum - BOOLEAN
+	0 - disabled
+	not 0 - enabled (default)
+
+	Verify checksum of incoming packets. Packets with bad checksums are
+	in INVALID state. If this is enabled, such packets will not be
+	considered for connection tracking.
+
+nf_conntrack_count - INTEGER (read-only)
+	Number of currently allocated flow entries.
+
+nf_conntrack_events - BOOLEAN
+	0 - disabled
+	not 0 - enabled (default)
+
+	If this option is enabled, the connection tracking code will
+	provide userspace with connection tracking events via ctnetlink.
+
+nf_conntrack_events_retry_timeout - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 15
+
+	This option is only relevant when "reliable connection tracking
+	events" are used.  Normally, ctnetlink is "lossy", that is,
+	events are normally dropped when userspace listeners can't keep up.
+
+	Userspace can request "reliable event mode".  When this mode is
+	active, the conntrack will only be destroyed after the event was
+	delivered.  If event delivery fails, the kernel periodically
+	re-tries to send the event to userspace.
+
+	This is the maximum interval the kernel should use when re-trying
+	to deliver the destroy event.
+
+	A higher number means there will be fewer delivery retries and it
+	will take longer for a backlog to be processed.
+
+nf_conntrack_expect_max - INTEGER
+	Maximum size of expectation table.  Default value is
+	nf_conntrack_buckets / 256. Minimum is 1.
+
+nf_conntrack_frag6_high_thresh - INTEGER
+	default 262144
+
+	Maximum memory used to reassemble IPv6 fragments.  When
+	nf_conntrack_frag6_high_thresh bytes of memory is allocated for this
+	purpose, the fragment handler will toss packets until
+	nf_conntrack_frag6_low_thresh is reached.
+
+nf_conntrack_frag6_low_thresh - INTEGER
+	default 196608
+
+	See nf_conntrack_frag6_low_thresh
+
+nf_conntrack_frag6_timeout - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 60
+
+	Time to keep an IPv6 fragment in memory.
+
+nf_conntrack_generic_timeout - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 600
+
+	Default for generic timeout.  This refers to layer 4 unknown/unsupported
+	protocols.
+
+nf_conntrack_helper - BOOLEAN
+	0 - disabled
+	not 0 - enabled (default)
+
+	Enable automatic conntrack helper assignment.
+
+nf_conntrack_icmp_timeout - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 30
+
+	Default for ICMP timeout.
+
+nf_conntrack_icmpv6_timeout - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 30
+
+	Default for ICMP6 timeout.
+
+nf_conntrack_log_invalid - INTEGER
+	0   - disable (default)
+	1   - log ICMP packets
+	6   - log TCP packets
+	17  - log UDP packets
+	33  - log DCCP packets
+	41  - log ICMPv6 packets
+	136 - log UDPLITE packets
+	255 - log packets of any protocol
+
+	Log invalid packets of a type specified by value.
+
+nf_conntrack_max - INTEGER
+	Size of connection tracking table.  Default value is
+	nf_conntrack_buckets value * 4.
+
+nf_conntrack_tcp_be_liberal - BOOLEAN
+	0 - disabled (default)
+	not 0 - enabled
+
+	Be conservative in what you do, be liberal in what you accept from others.
+	If it's non-zero, we mark only out of window RST segments as INVALID.
+
+nf_conntrack_tcp_loose - BOOLEAN
+	0 - disabled
+	not 0 - enabled (default)
+
+	If it is set to zero, we disable picking up already established
+	connections.
+
+nf_conntrack_tcp_max_retrans - INTEGER
+	default 3
+
+	Maximum number of packets that can be retransmitted without
+	received an (acceptable) ACK from the destination. If this number
+	is reached, a shorter timer will be started.
+
+nf_conntrack_tcp_timeout_close - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 10
+
+nf_conntrack_tcp_timeout_close_wait - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 60
+
+nf_conntrack_tcp_timeout_established - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 432000 (5 days)
+
+nf_conntrack_tcp_timeout_fin_wait - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 120
+
+nf_conntrack_tcp_timeout_last_ack - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 30
+
+nf_conntrack_tcp_timeout_max_retrans - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 300
+
+nf_conntrack_tcp_timeout_syn_recv - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 60
+
+nf_conntrack_tcp_timeout_syn_sent - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 120
+
+nf_conntrack_tcp_timeout_time_wait - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 120
+
+nf_conntrack_tcp_timeout_unacknowledged - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 300
+
+nf_conntrack_timestamp - BOOLEAN
+	0 - disabled (default)
+	not 0 - enabled
+
+	Enable connection tracking flow timestamping.
+
+nf_conntrack_udp_timeout - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 30
+
+nf_conntrack_udp_timeout_stream2 - INTEGER (seconds)
+	default 180
+
+	This extended timeout will be used in case there is an UDP stream
+	detected.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt b/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index b95b5bf96751..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
-
-IBM PCI Pit/Pit-Phy/Olympic CHIPSET BASED TOKEN RING CARDS README
-
-Release 0.2.0 - Release    
-	June 8th 1999 Peter De Schrijver & Mike Phillips
-Release 0.9.C - Release
-	April 18th 2001 Mike Phillips
-
-Thanks:
-Erik De Cock, Adrian Bridgett and Frank Fiene for their 
-patience and testing.
-Donald Champion for the cardbus support
-Kyle Lucke for the dma api changes.   
-Jonathon Bitner for hardware support. 
-Everybody on linux-tr for their continued support.  
- 
-Options:
-
-The driver accepts four options: ringspeed, pkt_buf_sz,  
-message_level and network_monitor.
-
-These options can be specified differently for each card found. 
-
-ringspeed:  Has one of three settings 0 (default), 4 or 16.  0 will 
-make the card autosense the ringspeed and join at the appropriate speed, 
-this will be the default option for most people.  4 or 16 allow you to 
-explicitly force the card to operate at a certain speed.  The card will fail 
-if you try to insert it at the wrong speed. (Although some hubs will allow 
-this so be *very* careful).  The main purpose for explicitly setting the ring
-speed is for when the card is first on the ring.  In autosense mode, if the card
-cannot detect any active monitors on the ring it will not open, so you must 
-re-init the card at the appropriate speed.  Unfortunately at present the only
-way of doing this is rmmod and insmod which is a bit tough if it is compiled
-in the kernel.
-
-pkt_buf_sz:  This is this initial receive buffer allocation size.  This will
-default to 4096 if no value is entered. You may increase performance of the 
-driver by setting this to a value larger than the network packet size, although
-the driver now re-sizes buffers based on MTU settings as well. 
-
-message_level: Controls level of messages created by the driver. Defaults to 0:
-which only displays start-up and critical messages.  Presently any non-zero 
-value will display all soft messages as well.  NB This does not turn 
-debugging messages on, that must be done by modified the source code.
-
-network_monitor: Any non-zero value will provide a quasi network monitoring 
-mode.  All unexpected MAC frames (beaconing etc.) will be received
-by the driver and the source and destination addresses printed. 
-Also an entry will be added in  /proc/net called olympic_tr%d, where tr%d
-is the registered device name, i.e tr0, tr1, etc. This displays low
-level information about the configuration of the ring and the adapter.
-This feature has been designed for network administrators to assist in 
-the diagnosis of network / ring problems. (This used to OLYMPIC_NETWORK_MONITOR,
-but has now changed to allow each adapter to be configured differently and
-to alleviate the necessity to re-compile olympic to turn the option on).
-
-Multi-card:
-
-The driver will detect multiple cards and will work with shared interrupts,
-each card is assigned the next token ring device, i.e. tr0 , tr1, tr2.  The 
-driver should also happily reside in the system with other drivers.  It has 
-been tested with ibmtr.c running, and I personally have had one Olicom PCI 
-card and two IBM olympic cards (all on the same interrupt), all running
-together. 
-
-Variable MTU size:
-
-The driver can handle a MTU size up to either 4500 or 18000 depending upon 
-ring speed.  The driver also changes the size of the receive buffers as part
-of the mtu re-sizing, so if you set mtu = 18000, you will need to be able
-to allocate 16 * (sk_buff with 18000 buffer size) call it 18500 bytes per ring 
-position = 296,000 bytes of memory space, plus of course anything 
-necessary for the tx sk_buff's.  Remember this is per card, so if you are
-building routers, gateway's etc, you could start to use a lot of memory
-real fast.
-
-
-6/8/99 Peter De Schrijver and Mike Phillips
-
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/openvswitch.txt b/Documentation/networking/openvswitch.txt
index b8a048b8df3a..37c20ee2455e 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/openvswitch.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/openvswitch.txt
@@ -91,6 +91,46 @@ Often we ellipsize arguments not important to the discussion, e.g.:
     in_port(1), eth(...), eth_type(0x0800), ipv4(...), tcp(...)
 
 
+Wildcarded flow key format
+--------------------------
+
+A wildcarded flow is described with two sequences of Netlink attributes
+passed over the Netlink socket. A flow key, exactly as described above, and an
+optional corresponding flow mask.
+
+A wildcarded flow can represent a group of exact match flows. Each '1' bit
+in the mask specifies a exact match with the corresponding bit in the flow key.
+A '0' bit specifies a don't care bit, which will match either a '1' or '0' bit
+of a incoming packet. Using wildcarded flow can improve the flow set up rate
+by reduce the number of new flows need to be processed by the user space program.
+
+Support for the mask Netlink attribute is optional for both the kernel and user
+space program. The kernel can ignore the mask attribute, installing an exact
+match flow, or reduce the number of don't care bits in the kernel to less than
+what was specified by the user space program. In this case, variations in bits
+that the kernel does not implement will simply result in additional flow setups.
+The kernel module will also work with user space programs that neither support
+nor supply flow mask attributes.
+
+Since the kernel may ignore or modify wildcard bits, it can be difficult for
+the userspace program to know exactly what matches are installed. There are
+two possible approaches: reactively install flows as they miss the kernel
+flow table (and therefore not attempt to determine wildcard changes at all)
+or use the kernel's response messages to determine the installed wildcards.
+
+When interacting with userspace, the kernel should maintain the match portion
+of the key exactly as originally installed. This will provides a handle to
+identify the flow for all future operations. However, when reporting the
+mask of an installed flow, the mask should include any restrictions imposed
+by the kernel.
+
+The behavior when using overlapping wildcarded flows is undefined. It is the
+responsibility of the user space program to ensure that any incoming packet
+can match at most one flow, wildcarded or not. The current implementation
+performs best-effort detection of overlapping wildcarded flows and may reject
+some but not all of them. However, this behavior may change in future versions.
+
+
 Basic rule for evolving flow keys
 ---------------------------------
 
@@ -118,7 +158,7 @@ essentially like this, ignoring metadata:
 Naively, to add VLAN support, it makes sense to add a new "vlan" flow
 key attribute to contain the VLAN tag, then continue to decode the
 encapsulated headers beyond the VLAN tag using the existing field
-definitions.  With this change, an TCP packet in VLAN 10 would have a
+definitions.  With this change, a TCP packet in VLAN 10 would have a
 flow key much like this:
 
     eth(...), vlan(vid=10, pcp=0), eth_type(0x0800), ip(proto=6, ...), tcp(...)
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/operstates.txt b/Documentation/networking/operstates.txt
index 1a77a3cfae54..97694572338b 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/operstates.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/operstates.txt
@@ -88,6 +88,10 @@ set this flag. On netif_carrier_off(), the scheduler stops sending
 packets. The name 'carrier' and the inversion are historical, think of
 it as lower layer.
 
+Note that for certain kind of soft-devices, which are not managing any
+real hardware, there is possible to set this bit from userpsace.
+One should use TVL IFLA_CARRIER to do so.
+
 netif_carrier_ok() can be used to query that bit.
 
 __LINK_STATE_DORMANT, maps to IFF_DORMANT:
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt
index 1c08a4b0981f..c01223628a87 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt
@@ -3,9 +3,9 @@
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 This file documents the mmap() facility available with the PACKET
-socket interface on 2.4 and 2.6 kernels. This type of sockets is used for 
-capture network traffic with utilities like tcpdump or any other that needs
-raw access to network interface.
+socket interface on 2.4/2.6/3.x kernels. This type of sockets is used for
+i) capture network traffic with utilities like tcpdump, ii) transmit network
+traffic, or any other that needs raw access to network interface.
 
 You can find the latest version of this document at:
     http://wiki.ipxwarzone.com/index.php5?title=Linux_packet_mmap
@@ -21,19 +21,18 @@ Please send your comments to
 + Why use PACKET_MMAP
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-In Linux 2.4/2.6 if PACKET_MMAP is not enabled, the capture process is very
-inefficient. It uses very limited buffers and requires one system call
-to capture each packet, it requires two if you want to get packet's 
-timestamp (like libpcap always does).
+In Linux 2.4/2.6/3.x if PACKET_MMAP is not enabled, the capture process is very
+inefficient. It uses very limited buffers and requires one system call to
+capture each packet, it requires two if you want to get packet's timestamp
+(like libpcap always does).
 
 In the other hand PACKET_MMAP is very efficient. PACKET_MMAP provides a size 
 configurable circular buffer mapped in user space that can be used to either
 send or receive packets. This way reading packets just needs to wait for them,
 most of the time there is no need to issue a single system call. Concerning
 transmission, multiple packets can be sent through one system call to get the
-highest bandwidth.
-By using a shared buffer between the kernel and the user also has the benefit
-of minimizing packet copies.
+highest bandwidth. By using a shared buffer between the kernel and the user
+also has the benefit of minimizing packet copies.
 
 It's fine to use PACKET_MMAP to improve the performance of the capture and
 transmission process, but it isn't everything. At least, if you are capturing
@@ -41,7 +40,8 @@ at high speeds (this is relative to the cpu speed), you should check if the
 device driver of your network interface card supports some sort of interrupt
 load mitigation or (even better) if it supports NAPI, also make sure it is
 enabled. For transmission, check the MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) used and
-supported by devices of your network.
+supported by devices of your network. CPU IRQ pinning of your network interface
+card can also be an advantage.
 
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 + How to use mmap() to improve capture process
@@ -87,9 +87,7 @@ the following process:
 socket creation and destruction is straight forward, and is done 
 the same way with or without PACKET_MMAP:
 
-int fd;
-
-fd= socket(PF_PACKET, mode, htons(ETH_P_ALL))
+ int fd = socket(PF_PACKET, mode, htons(ETH_P_ALL));
 
 where mode is SOCK_RAW for the raw interface were link level
 information can be captured or SOCK_DGRAM for the cooked
@@ -163,11 +161,23 @@ As capture, each frame contains two parts:
 
  A complete tutorial is available at: http://wiki.gnu-log.net/
 
+By default, the user should put data at :
+ frame base + TPACKET_HDRLEN - sizeof(struct sockaddr_ll)
+
+So, whatever you choose for the socket mode (SOCK_DGRAM or SOCK_RAW),
+the beginning of the user data will be at :
+ frame base + TPACKET_ALIGN(sizeof(struct tpacket_hdr))
+
+If you wish to put user data at a custom offset from the beginning of
+the frame (for payload alignment with SOCK_RAW mode for instance) you
+can set tp_net (with SOCK_DGRAM) or tp_mac (with SOCK_RAW). In order
+to make this work it must be enabled previously with setsockopt()
+and the PACKET_TX_HAS_OFF option.
+
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 + PACKET_MMAP settings
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-
 To setup PACKET_MMAP from user level code is done with a call like
 
  - Capture process
@@ -201,7 +211,6 @@ indeed, packet_set_ring checks that the following condition is true
 
     frames_per_block * tp_block_nr == tp_frame_nr
 
-
 Lets see an example, with the following values:
 
      tp_block_size= 4096
@@ -227,7 +236,6 @@ be spawned across two blocks, so there are some details you have to take into
 account when choosing the frame_size. See "Mapping and use of the circular 
 buffer (ring)".
 
-
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 + PACKET_MMAP setting constraints
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -264,7 +272,6 @@ User space programs can include /usr/include/sys/user.h and
 The pagesize can also be determined dynamically with the getpagesize (2) 
 system call. 
 
-
  Block number limit
 --------------------
 
@@ -284,7 +291,6 @@ called pg_vec, its size limits the number of blocks that can be allocated.
       v  block #2
      block #1
 
-
 kmalloc allocates any number of bytes of physically contiguous memory from 
 a pool of pre-determined sizes. This pool of memory is maintained by the slab 
 allocator which is at the end the responsible for doing the allocation and 
@@ -299,7 +305,6 @@ pointers to blocks is
 
      131072/4 = 32768 blocks
 
-
  PACKET_MMAP buffer size calculator
 ------------------------------------
 
@@ -340,7 +345,6 @@ and a value for <frame size> of 2048 bytes. These parameters will yield
 and hence the buffer will have a 262144 MiB size. So it can hold 
 262144 MiB / 2048 bytes = 134217728 frames
 
-
 Actually, this buffer size is not possible with an i386 architecture. 
 Remember that the memory is allocated in kernel space, in the case of 
 an i386 kernel's memory size is limited to 1GiB.
@@ -372,7 +376,6 @@ the following (from include/linux/if_packet.h):
    - Start+tp_net: Packet data, aligned to TPACKET_ALIGNMENT=16.
    - Pad to align to TPACKET_ALIGNMENT=16
  */
-           
  
  The following are conditions that are checked in packet_set_ring
 
@@ -413,7 +416,6 @@ and the following flags apply:
      #define TP_STATUS_LOSING        4 
      #define TP_STATUS_CSUMNOTREADY  8 
 
-
 TP_STATUS_COPY        : This flag indicates that the frame (and associated
                         meta information) has been truncated because it's 
                         larger than tp_frame_size. This packet can be 
@@ -462,7 +464,6 @@ packets are in the ring:
 It doesn't incur in a race condition to first check the status value and 
 then poll for frames.
 
-
 ++ Transmission process
 Those defines are also used for transmission:
 
@@ -494,14 +495,463 @@ The user can also use poll() to check if a buffer is available:
     retval = poll(&pfd, 1, timeout);
 
 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
++ What TPACKET versions are available and when to use them?
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ int val = tpacket_version;
+ setsockopt(fd, SOL_PACKET, PACKET_VERSION, &val, sizeof(val));
+ getsockopt(fd, SOL_PACKET, PACKET_VERSION, &val, sizeof(val));
+
+where 'tpacket_version' can be TPACKET_V1 (default), TPACKET_V2, TPACKET_V3.
+
+TPACKET_V1:
+	- Default if not otherwise specified by setsockopt(2)
+	- RX_RING, TX_RING available
+	- VLAN metadata information available for packets
+	  (TP_STATUS_VLAN_VALID)
+
+TPACKET_V1 --> TPACKET_V2:
+	- Made 64 bit clean due to unsigned long usage in TPACKET_V1
+	  structures, thus this also works on 64 bit kernel with 32 bit
+	  userspace and the like
+	- Timestamp resolution in nanoseconds instead of microseconds
+	- RX_RING, TX_RING available
+	- How to switch to TPACKET_V2:
+		1. Replace struct tpacket_hdr by struct tpacket2_hdr
+		2. Query header len and save
+		3. Set protocol version to 2, set up ring as usual
+		4. For getting the sockaddr_ll,
+		   use (void *)hdr + TPACKET_ALIGN(hdrlen) instead of
+		   (void *)hdr + TPACKET_ALIGN(sizeof(struct tpacket_hdr))
+
+TPACKET_V2 --> TPACKET_V3:
+	- Flexible buffer implementation:
+		1. Blocks can be configured with non-static frame-size
+		2. Read/poll is at a block-level (as opposed to packet-level)
+		3. Added poll timeout to avoid indefinite user-space wait
+		   on idle links
+		4. Added user-configurable knobs:
+			4.1 block::timeout
+			4.2 tpkt_hdr::sk_rxhash
+	- RX Hash data available in user space
+	- Currently only RX_RING available
+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
++ AF_PACKET fanout mode
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+In the AF_PACKET fanout mode, packet reception can be load balanced among
+processes. This also works in combination with mmap(2) on packet sockets.
+
+Currently implemented fanout policies are:
+
+  - PACKET_FANOUT_HASH: schedule to socket by skb's rxhash
+  - PACKET_FANOUT_LB: schedule to socket by round-robin
+  - PACKET_FANOUT_CPU: schedule to socket by CPU packet arrives on
+  - PACKET_FANOUT_RND: schedule to socket by random selection
+  - PACKET_FANOUT_ROLLOVER: if one socket is full, rollover to another
+
+Minimal example code by David S. Miller (try things like "./test eth0 hash",
+"./test eth0 lb", etc.):
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/wait.h>
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+#include <sys/ioctl.h>
+
+#include <unistd.h>
+
+#include <linux/if_ether.h>
+#include <linux/if_packet.h>
+
+#include <net/if.h>
+
+static const char *device_name;
+static int fanout_type;
+static int fanout_id;
+
+#ifndef PACKET_FANOUT
+# define PACKET_FANOUT			18
+# define PACKET_FANOUT_HASH		0
+# define PACKET_FANOUT_LB		1
+#endif
+
+static int setup_socket(void)
+{
+	int err, fd = socket(AF_PACKET, SOCK_RAW, htons(ETH_P_IP));
+	struct sockaddr_ll ll;
+	struct ifreq ifr;
+	int fanout_arg;
+
+	if (fd < 0) {
+		perror("socket");
+		return EXIT_FAILURE;
+	}
+
+	memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr));
+	strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, device_name);
+	err = ioctl(fd, SIOCGIFINDEX, &ifr);
+	if (err < 0) {
+		perror("SIOCGIFINDEX");
+		return EXIT_FAILURE;
+	}
+
+	memset(&ll, 0, sizeof(ll));
+	ll.sll_family = AF_PACKET;
+	ll.sll_ifindex = ifr.ifr_ifindex;
+	err = bind(fd, (struct sockaddr *) &ll, sizeof(ll));
+	if (err < 0) {
+		perror("bind");
+		return EXIT_FAILURE;
+	}
+
+	fanout_arg = (fanout_id | (fanout_type << 16));
+	err = setsockopt(fd, SOL_PACKET, PACKET_FANOUT,
+			 &fanout_arg, sizeof(fanout_arg));
+	if (err) {
+		perror("setsockopt");
+		return EXIT_FAILURE;
+	}
+
+	return fd;
+}
+
+static void fanout_thread(void)
+{
+	int fd = setup_socket();
+	int limit = 10000;
+
+	if (fd < 0)
+		exit(fd);
+
+	while (limit-- > 0) {
+		char buf[1600];
+		int err;
+
+		err = read(fd, buf, sizeof(buf));
+		if (err < 0) {
+			perror("read");
+			exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+		}
+		if ((limit % 10) == 0)
+			fprintf(stdout, "(%d) \n", getpid());
+	}
+
+	fprintf(stdout, "%d: Received 10000 packets\n", getpid());
+
+	close(fd);
+	exit(0);
+}
+
+int main(int argc, char **argp)
+{
+	int fd, err;
+	int i;
+
+	if (argc != 3) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "Usage: %s INTERFACE {hash|lb}\n", argp[0]);
+		return EXIT_FAILURE;
+	}
+
+	if (!strcmp(argp[2], "hash"))
+		fanout_type = PACKET_FANOUT_HASH;
+	else if (!strcmp(argp[2], "lb"))
+		fanout_type = PACKET_FANOUT_LB;
+	else {
+		fprintf(stderr, "Unknown fanout type [%s]\n", argp[2]);
+		exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+	}
+
+	device_name = argp[1];
+	fanout_id = getpid() & 0xffff;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
+		pid_t pid = fork();
+
+		switch (pid) {
+		case 0:
+			fanout_thread();
+
+		case -1:
+			perror("fork");
+			exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+		}
+	}
+
+	for (i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
+		int status;
+
+		wait(&status);
+	}
+
+	return 0;
+}
+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
++ AF_PACKET TPACKET_V3 example
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AF_PACKET's TPACKET_V3 ring buffer can be configured to use non-static frame
+sizes by doing it's own memory management. It is based on blocks where polling
+works on a per block basis instead of per ring as in TPACKET_V2 and predecessor.
+
+It is said that TPACKET_V3 brings the following benefits:
+ *) ~15 - 20% reduction in CPU-usage
+ *) ~20% increase in packet capture rate
+ *) ~2x increase in packet density
+ *) Port aggregation analysis
+ *) Non static frame size to capture entire packet payload
+
+So it seems to be a good candidate to be used with packet fanout.
+
+Minimal example code by Daniel Borkmann based on Chetan Loke's lolpcap (compile
+it with gcc -Wall -O2 blob.c, and try things like "./a.out eth0", etc.):
+
+/* Written from scratch, but kernel-to-user space API usage
+ * dissected from lolpcap:
+ *  Copyright 2011, Chetan Loke <loke.chetan@gmail.com>
+ *  License: GPL, version 2.0
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <assert.h>
+#include <net/if.h>
+#include <arpa/inet.h>
+#include <netdb.h>
+#include <poll.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <inttypes.h>
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+#include <linux/if_packet.h>
+#include <linux/if_ether.h>
+#include <linux/ip.h>
+
+#ifndef likely
+# define likely(x)		__builtin_expect(!!(x), 1)
+#endif
+#ifndef unlikely
+# define unlikely(x)		__builtin_expect(!!(x), 0)
+#endif
+
+struct block_desc {
+	uint32_t version;
+	uint32_t offset_to_priv;
+	struct tpacket_hdr_v1 h1;
+};
+
+struct ring {
+	struct iovec *rd;
+	uint8_t *map;
+	struct tpacket_req3 req;
+};
+
+static unsigned long packets_total = 0, bytes_total = 0;
+static sig_atomic_t sigint = 0;
+
+static void sighandler(int num)
+{
+	sigint = 1;
+}
+
+static int setup_socket(struct ring *ring, char *netdev)
+{
+	int err, i, fd, v = TPACKET_V3;
+	struct sockaddr_ll ll;
+	unsigned int blocksiz = 1 << 22, framesiz = 1 << 11;
+	unsigned int blocknum = 64;
+
+	fd = socket(AF_PACKET, SOCK_RAW, htons(ETH_P_ALL));
+	if (fd < 0) {
+		perror("socket");
+		exit(1);
+	}
+
+	err = setsockopt(fd, SOL_PACKET, PACKET_VERSION, &v, sizeof(v));
+	if (err < 0) {
+		perror("setsockopt");
+		exit(1);
+	}
+
+	memset(&ring->req, 0, sizeof(ring->req));
+	ring->req.tp_block_size = blocksiz;
+	ring->req.tp_frame_size = framesiz;
+	ring->req.tp_block_nr = blocknum;
+	ring->req.tp_frame_nr = (blocksiz * blocknum) / framesiz;
+	ring->req.tp_retire_blk_tov = 60;
+	ring->req.tp_feature_req_word = TP_FT_REQ_FILL_RXHASH;
+
+	err = setsockopt(fd, SOL_PACKET, PACKET_RX_RING, &ring->req,
+			 sizeof(ring->req));
+	if (err < 0) {
+		perror("setsockopt");
+		exit(1);
+	}
+
+	ring->map = mmap(NULL, ring->req.tp_block_size * ring->req.tp_block_nr,
+			 PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED | MAP_LOCKED, fd, 0);
+	if (ring->map == MAP_FAILED) {
+		perror("mmap");
+		exit(1);
+	}
+
+	ring->rd = malloc(ring->req.tp_block_nr * sizeof(*ring->rd));
+	assert(ring->rd);
+	for (i = 0; i < ring->req.tp_block_nr; ++i) {
+		ring->rd[i].iov_base = ring->map + (i * ring->req.tp_block_size);
+		ring->rd[i].iov_len = ring->req.tp_block_size;
+	}
+
+	memset(&ll, 0, sizeof(ll));
+	ll.sll_family = PF_PACKET;
+	ll.sll_protocol = htons(ETH_P_ALL);
+	ll.sll_ifindex = if_nametoindex(netdev);
+	ll.sll_hatype = 0;
+	ll.sll_pkttype = 0;
+	ll.sll_halen = 0;
+
+	err = bind(fd, (struct sockaddr *) &ll, sizeof(ll));
+	if (err < 0) {
+		perror("bind");
+		exit(1);
+	}
+
+	return fd;
+}
+
+static void display(struct tpacket3_hdr *ppd)
+{
+	struct ethhdr *eth = (struct ethhdr *) ((uint8_t *) ppd + ppd->tp_mac);
+	struct iphdr *ip = (struct iphdr *) ((uint8_t *) eth + ETH_HLEN);
+
+	if (eth->h_proto == htons(ETH_P_IP)) {
+		struct sockaddr_in ss, sd;
+		char sbuff[NI_MAXHOST], dbuff[NI_MAXHOST];
+
+		memset(&ss, 0, sizeof(ss));
+		ss.sin_family = PF_INET;
+		ss.sin_addr.s_addr = ip->saddr;
+		getnameinfo((struct sockaddr *) &ss, sizeof(ss),
+			    sbuff, sizeof(sbuff), NULL, 0, NI_NUMERICHOST);
+
+		memset(&sd, 0, sizeof(sd));
+		sd.sin_family = PF_INET;
+		sd.sin_addr.s_addr = ip->daddr;
+		getnameinfo((struct sockaddr *) &sd, sizeof(sd),
+			    dbuff, sizeof(dbuff), NULL, 0, NI_NUMERICHOST);
+
+		printf("%s -> %s, ", sbuff, dbuff);
+	}
+
+	printf("rxhash: 0x%x\n", ppd->hv1.tp_rxhash);
+}
+
+static void walk_block(struct block_desc *pbd, const int block_num)
+{
+	int num_pkts = pbd->h1.num_pkts, i;
+	unsigned long bytes = 0;
+	struct tpacket3_hdr *ppd;
+
+	ppd = (struct tpacket3_hdr *) ((uint8_t *) pbd +
+				       pbd->h1.offset_to_first_pkt);
+	for (i = 0; i < num_pkts; ++i) {
+		bytes += ppd->tp_snaplen;
+		display(ppd);
+
+		ppd = (struct tpacket3_hdr *) ((uint8_t *) ppd +
+					       ppd->tp_next_offset);
+	}
+
+	packets_total += num_pkts;
+	bytes_total += bytes;
+}
+
+static void flush_block(struct block_desc *pbd)
+{
+	pbd->h1.block_status = TP_STATUS_KERNEL;
+}
+
+static void teardown_socket(struct ring *ring, int fd)
+{
+	munmap(ring->map, ring->req.tp_block_size * ring->req.tp_block_nr);
+	free(ring->rd);
+	close(fd);
+}
+
+int main(int argc, char **argp)
+{
+	int fd, err;
+	socklen_t len;
+	struct ring ring;
+	struct pollfd pfd;
+	unsigned int block_num = 0, blocks = 64;
+	struct block_desc *pbd;
+	struct tpacket_stats_v3 stats;
+
+	if (argc != 2) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "Usage: %s INTERFACE\n", argp[0]);
+		return EXIT_FAILURE;
+	}
+
+	signal(SIGINT, sighandler);
+
+	memset(&ring, 0, sizeof(ring));
+	fd = setup_socket(&ring, argp[argc - 1]);
+	assert(fd > 0);
+
+	memset(&pfd, 0, sizeof(pfd));
+	pfd.fd = fd;
+	pfd.events = POLLIN | POLLERR;
+	pfd.revents = 0;
+
+	while (likely(!sigint)) {
+		pbd = (struct block_desc *) ring.rd[block_num].iov_base;
+
+		if ((pbd->h1.block_status & TP_STATUS_USER) == 0) {
+			poll(&pfd, 1, -1);
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		walk_block(pbd, block_num);
+		flush_block(pbd);
+		block_num = (block_num + 1) % blocks;
+	}
+
+	len = sizeof(stats);
+	err = getsockopt(fd, SOL_PACKET, PACKET_STATISTICS, &stats, &len);
+	if (err < 0) {
+		perror("getsockopt");
+		exit(1);
+	}
+
+	fflush(stdout);
+	printf("\nReceived %u packets, %lu bytes, %u dropped, freeze_q_cnt: %u\n",
+	       stats.tp_packets, bytes_total, stats.tp_drops,
+	       stats.tp_freeze_q_cnt);
+
+	teardown_socket(&ring, fd);
+	return 0;
+}
+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 + PACKET_TIMESTAMP
 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 The PACKET_TIMESTAMP setting determines the source of the timestamp in
-the packet meta information.  If your NIC is capable of timestamping
-packets in hardware, you can request those hardware timestamps to used.
-Note: you may need to enable the generation of hardware timestamps with
-SIOCSHWTSTAMP.
+the packet meta information for mmap(2)ed RX_RING and TX_RINGs.  If your
+NIC is capable of timestamping packets in hardware, you can request those
+hardware timestamps to be used. Note: you may need to enable the generation
+of hardware timestamps with SIOCSHWTSTAMP (see related information from
+Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt).
 
 PACKET_TIMESTAMP accepts the same integer bit field as
 SO_TIMESTAMPING.  However, only the SOF_TIMESTAMPING_SYS_HARDWARE
@@ -513,12 +963,47 @@ SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RAW_HARDWARE if both bits are set.
     req |= SOF_TIMESTAMPING_SYS_HARDWARE;
     setsockopt(fd, SOL_PACKET, PACKET_TIMESTAMP, (void *) &req, sizeof(req))
 
-If PACKET_TIMESTAMP is not set, a software timestamp generated inside
-the networking stack is used (the behavior before this setting was added).
+For the mmap(2)ed ring buffers, such timestamps are stored in the
+tpacket{,2,3}_hdr structure's tp_sec and tp_{n,u}sec members. To determine
+what kind of timestamp has been reported, the tp_status field is binary |'ed
+with the following possible bits ...
+
+    TP_STATUS_TS_SYS_HARDWARE
+    TP_STATUS_TS_RAW_HARDWARE
+    TP_STATUS_TS_SOFTWARE
+
+... that are equivalent to its SOF_TIMESTAMPING_* counterparts. For the
+RX_RING, if none of those 3 are set (i.e. PACKET_TIMESTAMP is not set),
+then this means that a software fallback was invoked *within* PF_PACKET's
+processing code (less precise).
+
+Getting timestamps for the TX_RING works as follows: i) fill the ring frames,
+ii) call sendto() e.g. in blocking mode, iii) wait for status of relevant
+frames to be updated resp. the frame handed over to the application, iv) walk
+through the frames to pick up the individual hw/sw timestamps.
+
+Only (!) if transmit timestamping is enabled, then these bits are combined
+with binary | with TP_STATUS_AVAILABLE, so you must check for that in your
+application (e.g. !(tp_status & (TP_STATUS_SEND_REQUEST | TP_STATUS_SENDING))
+in a first step to see if the frame belongs to the application, and then
+one can extract the type of timestamp in a second step from tp_status)!
+
+If you don't care about them, thus having it disabled, checking for
+TP_STATUS_AVAILABLE resp. TP_STATUS_WRONG_FORMAT is sufficient. If in the
+TX_RING part only TP_STATUS_AVAILABLE is set, then the tp_sec and tp_{n,u}sec
+members do not contain a valid value. For TX_RINGs, by default no timestamp
+is generated!
 
 See include/linux/net_tstamp.h and Documentation/networking/timestamping
 for more information on hardware timestamps.
 
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
++ Miscellaneous bits
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+- Packet sockets work well together with Linux socket filters, thus you also
+  might want to have a look at Documentation/networking/filter.txt
+
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 + THANKS
 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phy.txt b/Documentation/networking/phy.txt
index 95e5f5985a2a..d5b1a3935245 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/phy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/phy.txt
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Letting the PHY Abstraction Layer do Everything
  
  Now, to connect, just call this function:
  
-   phydev = phy_connect(dev, phy_name, &adjust_link, flags, interface);
+   phydev = phy_connect(dev, phy_name, &adjust_link, interface);
 
  phydev is a pointer to the phy_device structure which represents the PHY.  If
  phy_connect is successful, it will return the pointer.  dev, here, is the
@@ -113,7 +113,9 @@ Letting the PHY Abstraction Layer do Everything
  current state, though the PHY will not yet be truly operational at this
  point.
 
- flags is a u32 which can optionally contain phy-specific flags.
+ PHY-specific flags should be set in phydev->dev_flags prior to the call
+ to phy_connect() such that the underlying PHY driver can check for flags
+ and perform specific operations based on them.
  This is useful if the system has put hardware restrictions on
  the PHY/controller, of which the PHY needs to be aware.
 
@@ -185,11 +187,10 @@ Doing it all yourself
    start, or disables then frees them for stop.
 
  struct phy_device * phy_attach(struct net_device *dev, const char *phy_id,
-		 u32 flags, phy_interface_t interface);
+		 phy_interface_t interface);
 
    Attaches a network device to a particular PHY, binding the PHY to a generic
-   driver if none was found during bus initialization.  Passes in
-   any phy-specific flags as needed.
+   driver if none was found during bus initialization.
 
  int phy_start_aneg(struct phy_device *phydev);
    
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt b/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt
index 4be0c039edbc..d2a9f43b5546 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt
@@ -136,16 +136,6 @@ For more information, please review the AMD8131 errata at
 http://vip.amd.com/us-en/assets/content_type/white_papers_and_tech_docs/
 26310_AMD-8131_HyperTransport_PCI-X_Tunnel_Revision_Guide_rev_3_18.pdf
 
-6.  Available Downloads
-Neterion "s2io" driver in Red Hat and Suse 2.6-based distributions is kept up 
-to date, also the latest "s2io" code (including support for 2.4 kernels) is 
-available via "Support" link on the Neterion site:  http://www.neterion.com.
-
-For Xframe User Guide (Programming manual), visit ftp site ns1.s2io.com,
-user: linuxdocs password: HALdocs
-
-7. Support 
+6. Support
 For further support please contact either your 10GbE Xframe NIC vendor (IBM, 
-HP, SGI etc.) or click on the "Support" link on the Neterion site:  
-http://www.neterion.com.
-
+HP, SGI etc.)
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt b/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt
index 579994afbe06..ca6977f5b2ed 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt
@@ -163,6 +163,64 @@ and unnecessary. If there are fewer hardware queues than CPUs, then
 RPS might be beneficial if the rps_cpus for each queue are the ones that
 share the same memory domain as the interrupting CPU for that queue.
 
+==== RPS Flow Limit
+
+RPS scales kernel receive processing across CPUs without introducing
+reordering. The trade-off to sending all packets from the same flow
+to the same CPU is CPU load imbalance if flows vary in packet rate.
+In the extreme case a single flow dominates traffic. Especially on
+common server workloads with many concurrent connections, such
+behavior indicates a problem such as a misconfiguration or spoofed
+source Denial of Service attack.
+
+Flow Limit is an optional RPS feature that prioritizes small flows
+during CPU contention by dropping packets from large flows slightly
+ahead of those from small flows. It is active only when an RPS or RFS
+destination CPU approaches saturation.  Once a CPU's input packet
+queue exceeds half the maximum queue length (as set by sysctl
+net.core.netdev_max_backlog), the kernel starts a per-flow packet
+count over the last 256 packets. If a flow exceeds a set ratio (by
+default, half) of these packets when a new packet arrives, then the
+new packet is dropped. Packets from other flows are still only
+dropped once the input packet queue reaches netdev_max_backlog.
+No packets are dropped when the input packet queue length is below
+the threshold, so flow limit does not sever connections outright:
+even large flows maintain connectivity.
+
+== Interface
+
+Flow limit is compiled in by default (CONFIG_NET_FLOW_LIMIT), but not
+turned on. It is implemented for each CPU independently (to avoid lock
+and cache contention) and toggled per CPU by setting the relevant bit
+in sysctl net.core.flow_limit_cpu_bitmap. It exposes the same CPU
+bitmap interface as rps_cpus (see above) when called from procfs:
+
+ /proc/sys/net/core/flow_limit_cpu_bitmap
+
+Per-flow rate is calculated by hashing each packet into a hashtable
+bucket and incrementing a per-bucket counter. The hash function is
+the same that selects a CPU in RPS, but as the number of buckets can
+be much larger than the number of CPUs, flow limit has finer-grained
+identification of large flows and fewer false positives. The default
+table has 4096 buckets. This value can be modified through sysctl
+
+ net.core.flow_limit_table_len
+
+The value is only consulted when a new table is allocated. Modifying
+it does not update active tables.
+
+== Suggested Configuration
+
+Flow limit is useful on systems with many concurrent connections,
+where a single connection taking up 50% of a CPU indicates a problem.
+In such environments, enable the feature on all CPUs that handle
+network rx interrupts (as set in /proc/irq/N/smp_affinity).
+
+The feature depends on the input packet queue length to exceed
+the flow limit threshold (50%) + the flow history length (256).
+Setting net.core.netdev_max_backlog to either 1000 or 10000
+performed well in experiments.
+
 
 RFS: Receive Flow Steering
 ==========================
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/sctp.txt b/Documentation/networking/sctp.txt
index 0c790a76910e..97b810ca9082 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/sctp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/sctp.txt
@@ -19,7 +19,6 @@ of SCTP that is RFC 2960 compliant and provides an programming interface
 referred to as the  UDP-style API of the Sockets Extensions for SCTP, as 
 proposed in IETF Internet-Drafts.    
 
-
 Caveats:  
 
 -lksctp can be built as statically or as a module.  However, be aware that 
@@ -33,6 +32,4 @@ For more information, please visit the lksctp project website:
    http://www.sf.net/projects/lksctp
 
 Or contact the lksctp developers through the mailing list:
-   <lksctp-developers@lists.sourceforge.net> 
-
-
+   <linux-sctp@vger.kernel.org>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/smctr.txt b/Documentation/networking/smctr.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 9af25b810c1f..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/networking/smctr.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-Text File for the SMC TokenCard TokenRing Linux driver (smctr.c).
-        By Jay Schulist <jschlst@samba.org>
-
-The Linux SMC Token Ring driver works with the SMC TokenCard Elite (8115T) 
-ISA and SMC TokenCard Elite/A (8115T/A) MCA adapters.
-
-Latest information on this driver can be obtained on the Linux-SNA WWW site.
-Please point your browser to: http://www.linux-sna.org
-
-This driver is rather simple to use. Select Y to Token Ring adapter support
-in the kernel configuration. A choice for SMC Token Ring adapters will
-appear. This drives supports all SMC ISA/MCA adapters. Choose this
-option. I personally recommend compiling the driver as a module (M), but if you
-you would like to compile it statically answer Y instead.
-
-This driver supports multiple adapters without the need to load multiple copies
-of the driver. You should be able to load up to 7 adapters without any kernel
-modifications, if you are in need of more please contact the maintainer of this
-driver.
-
-Load the driver either by lilo/loadlin or as a module. When a module using the
-following command will suffice for most:
-
-# modprobe smctr
-smctr.c: v1.00 12/6/99 by jschlst@samba.org
-tr0: SMC TokenCard 8115T at Io 0x300, Irq 10, Rom 0xd8000, Ram 0xcc000.
-
-Now just setup the device via ifconfig and set and routes you may have. After
-this you are ready to start sending some tokens.
-
-Errata:
-1). For anyone wondering where to pick up the SMC adapters please browse
-    to http://www.smc.com
-
-2). If you are the first/only Token Ring Client on a Token Ring LAN, please
-    specify the ringspeed with the ringspeed=[4/16] module option. If no
-    ringspeed is specified the driver will attempt to autodetect the ring
-    speed and/or if the adapter is the first/only station on the ring take
-    the appropriate actions. 
-
-    NOTE: Default ring speed is 16MB UTP.
-
-3). PnP support for this adapter sucks. I recommend hard setting the 
-    IO/MEM/IRQ by the jumpers on the adapter. If this is not possible
-    load the module with the following io=[ioaddr] mem=[mem_addr]
-    irq=[irq_num].
-
-    The following IRQ, IO, and MEM settings are supported.
-
-    IO ports:
-    0x200, 0x220, 0x240, 0x260, 0x280, 0x2A0, 0x2C0, 0x2E0, 0x300,
-    0x320, 0x340, 0x360, 0x380.
-
-    IRQs:
-    2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
-
-    Memory addresses:
-    0xA0000, 0xA4000, 0xA8000, 0xAC000, 0xB0000, 0xB4000,
-    0xB8000, 0xBC000, 0xC0000, 0xC4000, 0xC8000, 0xCC000,
-    0xD0000, 0xD4000, 0xD8000, 0xDC000, 0xE0000, 0xE4000,
-    0xE8000, 0xEC000, 0xF0000, 0xF4000, 0xF8000, 0xFC000
-
-This driver is under the GNU General Public License. Its Firmware image is
-included as an initialized C-array and is licensed by SMC to the Linux
-users of this driver. However no warranty about its fitness is expressed or
-implied by SMC.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt
index d0aeeadd264b..457b8bbafb08 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
        STMicroelectronics 10/100/1000 Synopsys Ethernet driver
 
-Copyright (C) 2007-2010  STMicroelectronics Ltd
+Copyright (C) 2007-2013  STMicroelectronics Ltd
 Author: Giuseppe Cavallaro <peppe.cavallaro@st.com>
 
 This is the driver for the MAC 10/100/1000 on-chip Ethernet controllers
@@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ Currently this network device driver is for all STM embedded MAC/GMAC
 (i.e. 7xxx/5xxx SoCs), SPEAr (arm), Loongson1B (mips) and XLINX XC2V3000
 FF1152AMT0221 D1215994A VIRTEX FPGA board.
 
-DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.60a (and older) and DWC Ether MAC 10/100
-Universal version 4.0 have been used for developing this driver.
+DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.70a (and older) and DWC Ether
+MAC 10/100 Universal version 4.0 have been used for developing this driver.
 
 This driver supports both the platform bus and PCI.
 
@@ -29,11 +29,11 @@ The kernel configuration option is STMMAC_ETH:
 	dma_txsize: DMA tx ring size;
 	buf_sz: DMA buffer size;
 	tc: control the HW FIFO threshold;
-	tx_coe: Enable/Disable Tx Checksum Offload engine;
 	watchdog: transmit timeout (in milliseconds);
 	flow_ctrl: Flow control ability [on/off];
 	pause: Flow Control Pause Time;
-	tmrate: timer period (only if timer optimisation is configured).
+	eee_timer: tx EEE timer;
+	chain_mode: select chain mode instead of ring.
 
 3) Command line options
 Driver parameters can be also passed in command line by using:
@@ -54,27 +54,29 @@ net_device structure enabling the scatter/gather feature.
 When one or more packets are received, an interrupt happens. The interrupts
 are not queued so the driver has to scan all the descriptors in the ring during
 the receive process.
-This is based on NAPI so the interrupt handler signals only if there is work to be
-done, and it exits.
+This is based on NAPI so the interrupt handler signals only if there is work
+to be done, and it exits.
 Then the poll method will be scheduled at some future point.
 The incoming packets are stored, by the DMA, in a list of pre-allocated socket
 buffers in order to avoid the memcpy (Zero-copy).
 
-4.3) Timer-Driver Interrupt
-Instead of having the device that asynchronously notifies the frame receptions, the
-driver configures a timer to generate an interrupt at regular intervals.
-Based on the granularity of the timer, the frames that are received by the device
-will experience different levels of latency. Some NICs have dedicated timer
-device to perform this task. STMMAC can use either the RTC device or the TMU
-channel 2  on STLinux platforms.
-The timers frequency can be passed to the driver as parameter; when change it,
-take care of both hardware capability and network stability/performance impact.
-Several performance tests on STM platforms showed this optimisation allows to spare
-the CPU while having the maximum throughput.
+4.3) Interrupt Mitigation
+The driver is able to mitigate the number of its DMA interrupts
+using NAPI for the reception on chips older than the 3.50.
+New chips have an HW RX-Watchdog used for this mitigation.
+
+On Tx-side, the mitigation schema is based on a SW timer that calls the
+tx function (stmmac_tx) to reclaim the resource after transmitting the
+frames.
+Also there is another parameter (like a threshold) used to program
+the descriptors avoiding to set the interrupt on completion bit in
+when the frame is sent (xmit).
+
+Mitigation parameters can be tuned by ethtool.
 
 4.4) WOL
-Wake up on Lan feature through Magic and Unicast frames are supported for the GMAC
-core.
+Wake up on Lan feature through Magic and Unicast frames are supported for the
+GMAC core.
 
 4.5) DMA descriptors
 Driver handles both normal and enhanced descriptors. The latter has been only
@@ -106,40 +108,51 @@ Several driver's information can be passed through the platform
 These are included in the include/linux/stmmac.h header file
 and detailed below as well:
 
- struct plat_stmmacenet_data {
+struct plat_stmmacenet_data {
+	char *phy_bus_name;
 	int bus_id;
 	int phy_addr;
 	int interface;
 	struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data *mdio_bus_data;
-	int pbl;
+	struct stmmac_dma_cfg *dma_cfg;
 	int clk_csr;
 	int has_gmac;
 	int enh_desc;
 	int tx_coe;
+	int rx_coe;
 	int bugged_jumbo;
 	int pmt;
 	int force_sf_dma_mode;
+	int force_thresh_dma_mode;
+	int riwt_off;
 	void (*fix_mac_speed)(void *priv, unsigned int speed);
 	void (*bus_setup)(void __iomem *ioaddr);
 	int (*init)(struct platform_device *pdev);
 	void (*exit)(struct platform_device *pdev);
+	void *custom_cfg;
+	void *custom_data;
 	void *bsp_priv;
  };
 
 Where:
+ o phy_bus_name: phy bus name to attach to the stmmac.
  o bus_id: bus identifier.
  o phy_addr: the physical address can be passed from the platform.
 	    If it is set to -1 the driver will automatically
 	    detect it at run-time by probing all the 32 addresses.
  o interface: PHY device's interface.
  o mdio_bus_data: specific platform fields for the MDIO bus.
- o pbl: the Programmable Burst Length is maximum number of beats to
+ o dma_cfg: internal DMA parameters
+   o pbl: the Programmable Burst Length is maximum number of beats to
        be transferred in one DMA transaction.
        GMAC also enables the 4xPBL by default.
- o clk_csr: CSR Clock range selection.
+   o fixed_burst/mixed_burst/burst_len
+ o clk_csr: fixed CSR Clock range selection.
  o has_gmac: uses the GMAC core.
  o enh_desc: if sets the MAC will use the enhanced descriptor structure.
  o tx_coe: core is able to perform the tx csum in HW.
+ o rx_coe: the supports three check sum offloading engine types:
+	   type_1, type_2 (full csum) and no RX coe.
  o bugged_jumbo: some HWs are not able to perform the csum in HW for
 		over-sized frames due to limited buffer sizes.
 		Setting this flag the csum will be done in SW on
@@ -147,23 +160,26 @@ Where:
  o pmt: core has the embedded power module (optional).
  o force_sf_dma_mode: force DMA to use the Store and Forward mode
 		     instead of the Threshold.
+ o force_thresh_dma_mode: force DMA to use the Shreshold mode other than
+		     the Store and Forward mode.
+ o riwt_off: force to disable the RX watchdog feature and switch to NAPI mode.
  o fix_mac_speed: this callback is used for modifying some syscfg registers
 		 (on ST SoCs) according to the link speed negotiated by the
 		 physical layer .
  o bus_setup: perform HW setup of the bus. For example, on some ST platforms
 	     this field is used to configure the AMBA  bridge to generate more
 	     efficient STBus traffic.
- o init/exit: callbacks used for calling a custom initialisation;
+ o init/exit: callbacks used for calling a custom initialization;
 	     this is sometime necessary on some platforms (e.g. ST boxes)
 	     where the HW needs to have set some PIO lines or system cfg
 	     registers.
- o custom_cfg: this is a custom configuration that can be passed while
-	      initialising the resources.
+ o custom_cfg/custom_data: this is a custom configuration that can be passed
+			   while initializing the resources.
+ o bsp_priv: another private poiter.
 
-The we have:
+For MDIO bus The we have:
 
  struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data {
-	int bus_id;
 	int (*phy_reset)(void *priv);
 	unsigned int phy_mask;
 	int *irqs;
@@ -171,16 +187,32 @@ The we have:
  };
 
 Where:
- o bus_id: bus identifier;
  o phy_reset: hook to reset the phy device attached to the bus.
  o phy_mask: phy mask passed when register the MDIO bus within the driver.
  o irqs: list of IRQs, one per PHY.
  o probed_phy_irq: if irqs is NULL, use this for probed PHY.
 
+For DMA engine we have the following internal fields that should be
+tuned according to the HW capabilities.
+
+struct stmmac_dma_cfg {
+	int pbl;
+	int fixed_burst;
+	int burst_len_supported;
+};
+
+Where:
+ o pbl: Programmable Burst Length
+ o fixed_burst: program the DMA to use the fixed burst mode
+ o burst_len: this is the value we put in the register
+	      supported values are provided as macros in
+	      linux/stmmac.h header file.
+
+---
+
 Below an example how the structures above are using on ST platforms.
 
  static struct plat_stmmacenet_data stxYYY_ethernet_platform_data = {
-	.pbl = 32,
 	.has_gmac = 0,
 	.enh_desc = 0,
 	.fix_mac_speed = stxYYY_ethernet_fix_mac_speed,
@@ -203,9 +235,6 @@ there are two MAC cores: one MAC is for MDIO Bus/PHY emulation
 with fixed_link support.
 
 static struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data stmmac1_mdio_bus = {
-	.bus_id = 1,
-		|
-		|-> phy device on the bus_id 1
 	.phy_reset = phy_reset;
 		|
 		|-> function to provide the phy_reset on this board
@@ -230,9 +259,11 @@ reset procedure etc).
  o Makefile
  o stmmac_main.c: main network device driver;
  o stmmac_mdio.c: mdio functions;
+ o stmmac_pci: PCI driver;
+ o stmmac_platform.c: platform driver
  o stmmac_ethtool.c: ethtool support;
  o stmmac_timer.[ch]: timer code used for mitigating the driver dma interrupts
-		      Only tested on ST40 platforms based.
+		      (only tested on ST40 platforms based);
  o stmmac.h: private driver structure;
  o common.h: common definitions and VFTs;
  o descs.h: descriptor structure definitions;
@@ -242,9 +273,13 @@ reset procedure etc).
  o dwmac100_core: MAC 100 core and dma code;
  o dwmac100_dma.c: dma funtions for the MAC chip;
  o dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the MAC;
- o dwmac_lib.c: generic DMA functions shared among chips
- o enh_desc.c: functions for handling enhanced descriptors
- o norm_desc.c: functions for handling normal descriptors
+ o dwmac_lib.c: generic DMA functions shared among chips;
+ o enh_desc.c: functions for handling enhanced descriptors;
+ o norm_desc.c: functions for handling normal descriptors;
+ o chain_mode.c/ring_mode.c:: functions to manage RING/CHAINED modes;
+ o mmc_core.c/mmc.h: Management MAC Counters;
+ o stmmac_hwtstamp.c: HW timestamp support for PTP
+ o stmmac_ptp.c: PTP 1588 clock
 
 5) Debug Information
 
@@ -277,7 +312,56 @@ All these are only useful during the developing stage
 and should never enabled inside the code for general usage.
 In fact, these can generate an huge amount of debug messages.
 
-6) TODO:
+6) Energy Efficient Ethernet
+
+Energy Efficient Ethernet(EEE) enables IEEE 802.3 MAC sublayer along
+with a family of Physical layer to operate in the Low power Idle(LPI)
+mode. The EEE mode supports the IEEE 802.3 MAC operation at 100Mbps,
+1000Mbps & 10Gbps.
+
+The LPI mode allows power saving by switching off parts of the
+communication device functionality when there is no data to be
+transmitted & received. The system on both the side of the link can
+disable some functionalities & save power during the period of low-link
+utilization. The MAC controls whether the system should enter or exit
+the LPI mode & communicate this to PHY.
+
+As soon as the interface is opened, the driver verifies if the EEE can
+be supported. This is done by looking at both the DMA HW capability
+register and the PHY devices MCD registers.
+To enter in Tx LPI mode the driver needs to have a software timer
+that enable and disable the LPI mode when there is nothing to be
+transmitted.
+
+7) Extended descriptors
+The extended descriptors give us information about the receive Ethernet payload
+when it is carrying PTP packets or TCP/UDP/ICMP over IP.
+These are not available on GMAC Synopsys chips older than the 3.50.
+At probe time the driver will decide if these can be actually used.
+This support also is mandatory for PTPv2 because the extra descriptors 6 and 7
+are used for saving the hardware timestamps.
+
+8) Precision Time Protocol (PTP)
+The driver supports the IEEE 1588-2002, Precision Time Protocol (PTP),
+which enables precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and
+control systems implemented with technologies such as network
+communication.
+
+In addition to the basic timestamp features mentioned in IEEE 1588-2002
+Timestamps, new GMAC cores support the advanced timestamp features.
+IEEE 1588-2008 that can be enabled when configure the Kernel.
+
+9) SGMII/RGMII supports
+New GMAC devices provide own way to manage RGMII/SGMII.
+This information is available at run-time by looking at the
+HW capability register. This means that the stmmac can manage
+auto-negotiation and link status w/o using the PHYLIB stuff
+In fact, the HW provides a subset of extended registers to
+restart the ANE, verify Full/Half duplex mode and Speed.
+Also thanks to these registers it is possible to look at the
+Auto-negotiated Link Parter Ability.
+
+10) TODO:
  o XGMAC is not supported.
- o Add the EEE - Energy Efficient Ethernet
- o Add the PTP - precision time protocol
+ o Complete the TBI & RTBI support.
+ o extened VLAN support for 3.70a SYNP GMAC.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tms380tr.txt b/Documentation/networking/tms380tr.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 1f73e13058df..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/networking/tms380tr.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
-Text file for the Linux SysKonnect Token Ring ISA/PCI Adapter Driver.
-	Text file by: Jay Schulist <jschlst@samba.org>
-
-The Linux SysKonnect Token Ring driver works with the SysKonnect TR4/16(+) ISA,
-SysKonnect TR4/16(+) PCI, SysKonnect TR4/16 PCI, and older revisions of the
-SK NET TR4/16 ISA card.
-
-Latest information on this driver can be obtained on the Linux-SNA WWW site.
-Please point your browser to: 
-http://www.linux-sna.org
-
-Many thanks to Christoph Goos for his excellent work on this driver and
-SysKonnect for donating the adapters to Linux-SNA for the testing and 
-maintenance of this device driver.
-
-Important information to be noted:
-1. Adapters can be slow to open (~20 secs) and close (~5 secs), please be 
-   patient.
-2. This driver works very well when autoprobing for adapters. Why even 
-   think about those nasty io/int/dma settings of modprobe when the driver 
-   will do it all for you!
-
-This driver is rather simple to use. Select Y to Token Ring adapter support
-in the kernel configuration. A choice for SysKonnect Token Ring adapters will
-appear. This drives supports all SysKonnect ISA and PCI adapters. Choose this
-option. I personally recommend compiling the driver as a module (M), but if you
-you would like to compile it statically answer Y instead.
-
-This driver supports multiple adapters without the need to load multiple copies
-of the driver. You should be able to load up to 7 adapters without any kernel
-modifications, if you are in need of more please contact the maintainer of this
-driver.
-
-Load the driver either by lilo/loadlin or as a module. When a module using the
-following command will suffice for most:
-
-# modprobe sktr
-
-This will produce output similar to the following: (Output is user specific)
-
-sktr.c: v1.01 08/29/97 by Christoph Goos
-tr0: SK NET TR 4/16 PCI found at 0x6100, using IRQ 17.
-tr1: SK NET TR 4/16 PCI found at 0x6200, using IRQ 16.
-tr2: SK NET TR 4/16 ISA found at 0xa20, using IRQ 10 and DMA 5.
-
-Now just setup the device via ifconfig and set and routes you may have. After
-this you are ready to start sending some tokens.
-
-Errata:
-For anyone wondering where to pick up the SysKonnect adapters please browse
-to http://www.syskonnect.com
-
-This driver is under the GNU General Public License. Its Firmware image is 
-included as an initialized C-array and is licensed by SysKonnect to the Linux 
-users of this driver. However no warranty about its fitness is expressed or 
-implied by SysKonnect.
-
-Below find attached the setting for the SK NET TR 4/16 ISA adapters
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-                    ***************************
-                    ***   C O N T E N T S   ***
-                    ***************************
-
-                1) Location of DIP-Switch W1
-                2) Default settings
-                3) DIP-Switch W1 description
-
-
-  ==============================================================
-  CHAPTER 1     LOCATION OF DIP-SWITCH
-  ==============================================================
-
-UÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
-þUÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿                         UÄÄÄÄÄ¿            UÄÄÄ¿         þ
-þAÄÄÄÄÄÄU                      W1 AÄÄÄÄÄU     UÄÄÄÄ¿ þ   þ         þ
-þUÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿                                     þ    þ þ   þ      UÄÄÅ¿
-þAÄÄÄÄÄÄU              UÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿          AÄÄÄÄU þ   þ      þ  þþ
-þUÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿              þ           þ          UÄÄÄ¿  AÄÄÄU      AÄÄÅU
-þAÄÄÄÄÄÄU              þ TMS380C26 þ          þ   þ                þ
-þUÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿              þ           þ          AÄÄÄU                AÄ¿
-þAÄÄÄÄÄÄU              þ           þ                               þ þ
-þ                      AÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄU                               þ þ
-þ                                                                  þ þ
-þ                                                                  AÄU
-þ                                                                  þ
-þ                                                                  þ
-þ                                                                  þ
-þ                                                                  þ
-AÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄAÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄAÄÄAÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄAÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄU
-             AÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄU  AÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄU
-
-  ==============================================================
-  CHAPTER 2     DEFAULT SETTINGS
-  ==============================================================
-
-          W1    1  2  3  4  5  6  7  8
-        +------------------------------+
-        | ON    X                      |
-        | OFF      X  X  X  X  X  X  X |
-        +------------------------------+
-
-        W1.1 = ON               Adapter drives address lines SA17..19
-        W1.2 - 1.5 = OFF        BootROM disabled
-        W1.6 - 1.8 = OFF        I/O address 0A20h
-
-  ==============================================================
-  CHAPTER 3     DIP SWITCH W1 DESCRIPTION
-  ==============================================================
-
-      UÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄ¿  ON
-      þ 1 þ 2 þ 3 þ 4 þ 5 þ 6 þ 7 þ 8 þ
-      AÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄU  OFF
-      |AD | BootROM Addr. |  I/O      |
-      +-+-+-------+-------+-----+-----+
-        |         |             |
-        |         |             +------ 6     7     8
-        |         |                     ON    ON    ON       1900h
-        |         |                     ON    ON    OFF      0900h
-        |         |                     ON    OFF   ON       1980h
-        |         |                     ON    OFF   OFF      0980h
-        |         |                     OFF   ON    ON       1b20h
-        |         |                     OFF   ON    OFF      0b20h
-        |         |                     OFF   OFF   ON       1a20h
-        |         |                     OFF   OFF   OFF      0a20h    (+)
-        |         |
-        |         |
-        |         +-------- 2     3     4     5
-        |                   OFF   x     x     x       disabled  (+)
-        |                   ON    ON    ON    ON      C0000
-        |                   ON    ON    ON    OFF     C4000
-        |                   ON    ON    OFF   ON      C8000
-        |                   ON    ON    OFF   OFF     CC000
-        |                   ON    OFF   ON    ON      D0000
-        |                   ON    OFF   ON    OFF     D4000
-        |                   ON    OFF   OFF   ON      D8000
-        |                   ON    OFF   OFF   OFF     DC000
-        |
-        |
-        +----- 1
-               OFF    adapter does NOT drive SA<17..19>
-               ON     adapter drives SA<17..19>  (+)
-
-
-        (+) means default setting
-
-                       ********************************
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt
index 7b5996d9357e..ec11429e1d42 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt
@@ -2,9 +2,8 @@ Transparent proxy support
 =========================
 
 This feature adds Linux 2.2-like transparent proxy support to current kernels.
-To use it, enable NETFILTER_TPROXY, the socket match and the TPROXY target in
-your kernel config. You will need policy routing too, so be sure to enable that
-as well.
+To use it, enable the socket match and the TPROXY target in your kernel config.
+You will need policy routing too, so be sure to enable that as well.
 
 
 1. Making non-local sockets work
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt b/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt
index c0aab985bad9..949d5dcdd9a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt
@@ -105,6 +105,83 @@ Copyright (C) 1999-2000 Maxim Krasnyansky <max_mk@yahoo.com>
      Proto [2 bytes]
      Raw protocol(IP, IPv6, etc) frame.
 
+  3.3 Multiqueue tuntap interface:
+
+  From version 3.8, Linux supports multiqueue tuntap which can uses multiple
+  file descriptors (queues) to parallelize packets sending or receiving. The
+  device allocation is the same as before, and if user wants to create multiple
+  queues, TUNSETIFF with the same device name must be called many times with
+  IFF_MULTI_QUEUE flag.
+
+  char *dev should be the name of the device, queues is the number of queues to
+  be created, fds is used to store and return the file descriptors (queues)
+  created to the caller. Each file descriptor were served as the interface of a
+  queue which could be accessed by userspace.
+
+  #include <linux/if.h>
+  #include <linux/if_tun.h>
+
+  int tun_alloc_mq(char *dev, int queues, int *fds)
+  {
+      struct ifreq ifr;
+      int fd, err, i;
+
+      if (!dev)
+          return -1;
+
+      memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr));
+      /* Flags: IFF_TUN   - TUN device (no Ethernet headers)
+       *        IFF_TAP   - TAP device
+       *
+       *        IFF_NO_PI - Do not provide packet information
+       *        IFF_MULTI_QUEUE - Create a queue of multiqueue device
+       */
+      ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_TAP | IFF_NO_PI | IFF_MULTI_QUEUE;
+      strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, dev);
+
+      for (i = 0; i < queues; i++) {
+          if ((fd = open("/dev/net/tun", O_RDWR)) < 0)
+             goto err;
+          err = ioctl(fd, TUNSETIFF, (void *)&ifr);
+          if (err) {
+             close(fd);
+             goto err;
+          }
+          fds[i] = fd;
+      }
+
+      return 0;
+  err:
+      for (--i; i >= 0; i--)
+          close(fds[i]);
+      return err;
+  }
+
+  A new ioctl(TUNSETQUEUE) were introduced to enable or disable a queue. When
+  calling it with IFF_DETACH_QUEUE flag, the queue were disabled. And when
+  calling it with IFF_ATTACH_QUEUE flag, the queue were enabled. The queue were
+  enabled by default after it was created through TUNSETIFF.
+
+  fd is the file descriptor (queue) that we want to enable or disable, when
+  enable is true we enable it, otherwise we disable it
+
+  #include <linux/if.h>
+  #include <linux/if_tun.h>
+
+  int tun_set_queue(int fd, int enable)
+  {
+      struct ifreq ifr;
+
+      memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr));
+
+      if (enable)
+         ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_ATTACH_QUEUE;
+      else
+         ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_DETACH_QUEUE;
+
+      return ioctl(fd, TUNSETQUEUE, (void *)&ifr);
+  }
+
 Universal TUN/TAP device driver Frequently Asked Question.
    
 1. What platforms are supported by TUN/TAP driver ?
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt
index bd70976b8160..9a8041dcbb53 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt
@@ -67,8 +67,8 @@ Module parameters
 =================
 
 There are several parameters which may be provided to the driver when
-its module is loaded.  These are usually placed in /etc/modprobe.conf
-(/etc/modules.conf in 2.4).  Example:
+its module is loaded.  These are usually placed in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf
+configuretion files.  Example:
 
 options 3c59x debug=3 rx_copybreak=300
 
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ steps you should take:
 - OK, it's a driver problem.
 
    You need to generate a report.  Typically this is an email to the
-   maintainer and/or linux-net@vger.kernel.org.  The maintainer's
+   maintainer and/or netdev@vger.kernel.org.  The maintainer's
    email address will be in the driver source or in the MAINTAINERS file.
 
 - The contents of your report will vary a lot depending upon the
@@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ steps you should take:
       1) Increase the debug level.  Usually this is done via:
 
          a) modprobe driver debug=7
-         b) In /etc/modprobe.conf (or /etc/modules.conf for 2.4):
+         b) In /etc/modprobe.d/driver.conf:
             options driver debug=7
 
       2) Recreate the problem with the higher debug level,
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/vxge.txt b/Documentation/networking/vxge.txt
index d2e2997e6fa0..bb76c667a476 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/vxge.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/vxge.txt
@@ -91,10 +91,3 @@ v)  addr_learn_en
        virtualization environment.
        Valid range: 0,1 (disabled, enabled respectively)
        Default: 0
-
-4) Troubleshooting:
--------------------
-
-To resolve an issue with the source code or X3100 series adapter, please collect
-the statistics, register dumps using ethool, relevant logs and email them to
-support@neterion.com.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/vxlan.txt b/Documentation/networking/vxlan.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6d993510f091
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/vxlan.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+Virtual eXtensible Local Area Networking documentation
+======================================================
+
+The VXLAN protocol is a tunnelling protocol that is designed to
+solve the problem of limited number of available VLAN's (4096).
+With VXLAN identifier is expanded to 24 bits.
+
+It is a draft RFC standard, that is implemented by Cisco Nexus,
+Vmware and Brocade. The protocol runs over UDP using a single
+destination port (still not standardized by IANA).
+This document describes the Linux kernel tunnel device,
+there is also an implantation of VXLAN for Openvswitch.
+
+Unlike most tunnels, a VXLAN is a 1 to N network, not just point
+to point. A VXLAN device can either dynamically learn the IP address
+of the other end, in a manner similar to a learning bridge, or the
+forwarding entries can be configured statically.
+
+The management of vxlan is done in a similar fashion to it's
+too closest neighbors GRE and VLAN. Configuring VXLAN requires
+the version of iproute2 that matches the kernel release
+where VXLAN was first merged upstream.
+
+1. Create vxlan device
+  # ip li add vxlan0 type vxlan id 42 group 239.1.1.1 dev eth1
+
+This creates a new device (vxlan0). The device uses the
+the multicast group 239.1.1.1 over eth1 to handle packets where
+no entry is in the forwarding table.
+
+2. Delete vxlan device
+  # ip link delete vxlan0
+
+3. Show vxlan info
+  # ip -d link show vxlan0
+
+It is possible to create, destroy and display the vxlan
+forwarding table using the new bridge command.
+
+1. Create forwarding table entry
+  # bridge fdb add to 00:17:42:8a:b4:05 dst 192.19.0.2 dev vxlan0
+
+2. Delete forwarding table entry
+  # bridge fdb delete 00:17:42:8a:b4:05 dev vxlan0
+
+3. Show forwarding table
+  # bridge fdb show dev vxlan0
diff --git a/Documentation/nfc/nfc-hci.txt b/Documentation/nfc/nfc-hci.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0686c9e211c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/nfc/nfc-hci.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,290 @@
+HCI backend for NFC Core
+
+Author: Eric Lapuyade, Samuel Ortiz
+Contact: eric.lapuyade@intel.com, samuel.ortiz@intel.com
+
+General
+-------
+
+The HCI layer implements much of the ETSI TS 102 622 V10.2.0 specification. It
+enables easy writing of HCI-based NFC drivers. The HCI layer runs as an NFC Core
+backend, implementing an abstract nfc device and translating NFC Core API
+to HCI commands and events.
+
+HCI
+---
+
+HCI registers as an nfc device with NFC Core. Requests coming from userspace are
+routed through netlink sockets to NFC Core and then to HCI. From this point,
+they are translated in a sequence of HCI commands sent to the HCI layer in the
+host controller (the chip). Commands can be executed synchronously (the sending
+context blocks waiting for response) or asynchronously (the response is returned
+from HCI Rx context).
+HCI events can also be received from the host controller. They will be handled
+and a translation will be forwarded to NFC Core as needed. There are hooks to
+let the HCI driver handle proprietary events or override standard behavior.
+HCI uses 2 execution contexts:
+- one for executing commands : nfc_hci_msg_tx_work(). Only one command
+can be executing at any given moment.
+- one for dispatching received events and commands : nfc_hci_msg_rx_work().
+
+HCI Session initialization:
+---------------------------
+
+The Session initialization is an HCI standard which must unfortunately
+support proprietary gates. This is the reason why the driver will pass a list
+of proprietary gates that must be part of the session. HCI will ensure all
+those gates have pipes connected when the hci device is set up.
+In case the chip supports pre-opened gates and pseudo-static pipes, the driver
+can pass that information to HCI core.
+
+HCI Gates and Pipes
+-------------------
+
+A gate defines the 'port' where some service can be found. In order to access
+a service, one must create a pipe to that gate and open it. In this
+implementation, pipes are totally hidden. The public API only knows gates.
+This is consistent with the driver need to send commands to proprietary gates
+without knowing the pipe connected to it.
+
+Driver interface
+----------------
+
+A driver is generally written in two parts : the physical link management and
+the HCI management. This makes it easier to maintain a driver for a chip that
+can be connected using various phy (i2c, spi, ...)
+
+HCI Management
+--------------
+
+A driver would normally register itself with HCI and provide the following
+entry points:
+
+struct nfc_hci_ops {
+	int (*open)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev);
+	void (*close)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev);
+	int (*hci_ready) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev);
+	int (*xmit) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, struct sk_buff *skb);
+	int (*start_poll) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev,
+			   u32 im_protocols, u32 tm_protocols);
+	int (*dep_link_up)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, struct nfc_target *target,
+			   u8 comm_mode, u8 *gb, size_t gb_len);
+	int (*dep_link_down)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev);
+	int (*target_from_gate) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 gate,
+				 struct nfc_target *target);
+	int (*complete_target_discovered) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 gate,
+					   struct nfc_target *target);
+	int (*im_transceive) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev,
+			      struct nfc_target *target, struct sk_buff *skb,
+			      data_exchange_cb_t cb, void *cb_context);
+	int (*tm_send)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, struct sk_buff *skb);
+	int (*check_presence)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev,
+			      struct nfc_target *target);
+	int (*event_received)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 gate, u8 event,
+			      struct sk_buff *skb);
+};
+
+- open() and close() shall turn the hardware on and off.
+- hci_ready() is an optional entry point that is called right after the hci
+session has been set up. The driver can use it to do additional initialization
+that must be performed using HCI commands.
+- xmit() shall simply write a frame to the physical link.
+- start_poll() is an optional entrypoint that shall set the hardware in polling
+mode. This must be implemented only if the hardware uses proprietary gates or a
+mechanism slightly different from the HCI standard.
+- dep_link_up() is called after a p2p target has been detected, to finish
+the p2p connection setup with hardware parameters that need to be passed back
+to nfc core.
+- dep_link_down() is called to bring the p2p link down.
+- target_from_gate() is an optional entrypoint to return the nfc protocols
+corresponding to a proprietary gate.
+- complete_target_discovered() is an optional entry point to let the driver
+perform additional proprietary processing necessary to auto activate the
+discovered target.
+- im_transceive() must be implemented by the driver if proprietary HCI commands
+are required to send data to the tag. Some tag types will require custom
+commands, others can be written to using the standard HCI commands. The driver
+can check the tag type and either do proprietary processing, or return 1 to ask
+for standard processing. The data exchange command itself must be sent
+asynchronously.
+- tm_send() is called to send data in the case of a p2p connection
+- check_presence() is an optional entry point that will be called regularly
+by the core to check that an activated tag is still in the field. If this is
+not implemented, the core will not be able to push tag_lost events to the user
+space
+- event_received() is called to handle an event coming from the chip. Driver
+can handle the event or return 1 to let HCI attempt standard processing.
+
+On the rx path, the driver is responsible to push incoming HCP frames to HCI
+using nfc_hci_recv_frame(). HCI will take care of re-aggregation and handling
+This must be done from a context that can sleep.
+
+PHY Management
+--------------
+
+The physical link (i2c, ...) management is defined by the following struture:
+
+struct nfc_phy_ops {
+	int (*write)(void *dev_id, struct sk_buff *skb);
+	int (*enable)(void *dev_id);
+	void (*disable)(void *dev_id);
+};
+
+enable(): turn the phy on (power on), make it ready to transfer data
+disable(): turn the phy off
+write(): Send a data frame to the chip. Note that to enable higher
+layers such as an llc to store the frame for re-emission, this function must
+not alter the skb. It must also not return a positive result (return 0 for
+success, negative for failure).
+
+Data coming from the chip shall be sent directly to nfc_hci_recv_frame().
+
+LLC
+---
+
+Communication between the CPU and the chip often requires some link layer
+protocol. Those are isolated as modules managed by the HCI layer. There are
+currently two modules : nop (raw transfert) and shdlc.
+A new llc must implement the following functions:
+
+struct nfc_llc_ops {
+	void *(*init) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, xmit_to_drv_t xmit_to_drv,
+		       rcv_to_hci_t rcv_to_hci, int tx_headroom,
+		       int tx_tailroom, int *rx_headroom, int *rx_tailroom,
+		       llc_failure_t llc_failure);
+	void (*deinit) (struct nfc_llc *llc);
+	int (*start) (struct nfc_llc *llc);
+	int (*stop) (struct nfc_llc *llc);
+	void (*rcv_from_drv) (struct nfc_llc *llc, struct sk_buff *skb);
+	int (*xmit_from_hci) (struct nfc_llc *llc, struct sk_buff *skb);
+};
+
+- init() : allocate and init your private storage
+- deinit() : cleanup
+- start() : establish the logical connection
+- stop () : terminate the logical connection
+- rcv_from_drv() : handle data coming from the chip, going to HCI
+- xmit_from_hci() : handle data sent by HCI, going to the chip
+
+The llc must be registered with nfc before it can be used. Do that by
+calling nfc_llc_register(const char *name, struct nfc_llc_ops *ops);
+
+Again, note that the llc does not handle the physical link. It is thus very
+easy to mix any physical link with any llc for a given chip driver.
+
+Included Drivers
+----------------
+
+An HCI based driver for an NXP PN544, connected through I2C bus, and using
+shdlc is included.
+
+Execution Contexts
+------------------
+
+The execution contexts are the following:
+- IRQ handler (IRQH):
+fast, cannot sleep. sends incoming frames to HCI where they are passed to
+the current llc. In case of shdlc, the frame is queued in shdlc rx queue.
+
+- SHDLC State Machine worker (SMW)
+Only when llc_shdlc is used: handles shdlc rx & tx queues.
+Dispatches HCI cmd responses.
+
+- HCI Tx Cmd worker (MSGTXWQ)
+Serializes execution of HCI commands. Completes execution in case of response
+timeout.
+
+- HCI Rx worker (MSGRXWQ)
+Dispatches incoming HCI commands or events.
+
+- Syscall context from a userspace call (SYSCALL)
+Any entrypoint in HCI called from NFC Core
+
+Workflow executing an HCI command (using shdlc)
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Executing an HCI command can easily be performed synchronously using the
+following API:
+
+int nfc_hci_send_cmd (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 gate, u8 cmd,
+			const u8 *param, size_t param_len, struct sk_buff **skb)
+
+The API must be invoked from a context that can sleep. Most of the time, this
+will be the syscall context. skb will return the result that was received in
+the response.
+
+Internally, execution is asynchronous. So all this API does is to enqueue the
+HCI command, setup a local wait queue on stack, and wait_event() for completion.
+The wait is not interruptible because it is guaranteed that the command will
+complete after some short timeout anyway.
+
+MSGTXWQ context will then be scheduled and invoke nfc_hci_msg_tx_work().
+This function will dequeue the next pending command and send its HCP fragments
+to the lower layer which happens to be shdlc. It will then start a timer to be
+able to complete the command with a timeout error if no response arrive.
+
+SMW context gets scheduled and invokes nfc_shdlc_sm_work(). This function
+handles shdlc framing in and out. It uses the driver xmit to send frames and
+receives incoming frames in an skb queue filled from the driver IRQ handler.
+SHDLC I(nformation) frames payload are HCP fragments. They are aggregated to
+form complete HCI frames, which can be a response, command, or event.
+
+HCI Responses are dispatched immediately from this context to unblock
+waiting command execution. Response processing involves invoking the completion
+callback that was provided by nfc_hci_msg_tx_work() when it sent the command.
+The completion callback will then wake the syscall context.
+
+It is also possible to execute the command asynchronously using this API:
+
+static int nfc_hci_execute_cmd_async(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 pipe, u8 cmd,
+			       const u8 *param, size_t param_len,
+			       data_exchange_cb_t cb, void *cb_context)
+
+The workflow is the same, except that the API call returns immediately, and
+the callback will be called with the result from the SMW context.
+
+Workflow receiving an HCI event or command
+------------------------------------------
+
+HCI commands or events are not dispatched from SMW context. Instead, they are
+queued to HCI rx_queue and will be dispatched from HCI rx worker
+context (MSGRXWQ). This is done this way to allow a cmd or event handler
+to also execute other commands (for example, handling the
+NFC_HCI_EVT_TARGET_DISCOVERED event from PN544 requires to issue an
+ANY_GET_PARAMETER to the reader A gate to get information on the target
+that was discovered).
+
+Typically, such an event will be propagated to NFC Core from MSGRXWQ context.
+
+Error management
+----------------
+
+Errors that occur synchronously with the execution of an NFC Core request are
+simply returned as the execution result of the request. These are easy.
+
+Errors that occur asynchronously (e.g. in a background protocol handling thread)
+must be reported such that upper layers don't stay ignorant that something
+went wrong below and know that expected events will probably never happen.
+Handling of these errors is done as follows:
+
+- driver (pn544) fails to deliver an incoming frame: it stores the error such
+that any subsequent call to the driver will result in this error. Then it calls
+the standard nfc_shdlc_recv_frame() with a NULL argument to report the problem
+above. shdlc stores a EREMOTEIO sticky status, which will trigger SMW to
+report above in turn.
+
+- SMW is basically a background thread to handle incoming and outgoing shdlc
+frames. This thread will also check the shdlc sticky status and report to HCI
+when it discovers it is not able to run anymore because of an unrecoverable
+error that happened within shdlc or below. If the problem occurs during shdlc
+connection, the error is reported through the connect completion.
+
+- HCI: if an internal HCI error happens (frame is lost), or HCI is reported an
+error from a lower layer, HCI will either complete the currently executing
+command with that error, or notify NFC Core directly if no command is executing.
+
+- NFC Core: when NFC Core is notified of an error from below and polling is
+active, it will send a tag discovered event with an empty tag list to the user
+space to let it know that the poll operation will never be able to detect a tag.
+If polling is not active and the error was sticky, lower levels will return it
+at next invocation.
diff --git a/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.txt b/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.txt
index 2fcac9f5996e..b36ca14ca2d6 100644
--- a/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.txt
+++ b/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.txt
@@ -1,32 +1,15 @@
 Kernel driver for the NXP Semiconductors PN544 Near Field
 Communication chip
 
-Author: Jari Vanhala
-Contact: Matti Aaltonen (matti.j.aaltonen at nokia.com)
-
 General
 -------
 
 The PN544 is an integrated transmission module for contactless
 communication. The driver goes under drives/nfc/ and is compiled as a
-module named "pn544". It registers a misc device and creates a device
-file named "/dev/pn544".
+module named "pn544".
 
 Host Interfaces: I2C, SPI and HSU, this driver supports currently only I2C.
 
-The Interface
--------------
-
-The driver offers a sysfs interface for a hardware test and an IOCTL
-interface for selecting between two operating modes. There are read,
-write and poll functions for transferring messages. The two operating
-modes are the normal (HCI) mode and the firmware update mode.
-
-PN544 is controlled by sending messages from the userspace to the
-chip. The main function of the driver is just to pass those messages
-without caring about the message content.
-
-
 Protocols
 ---------
 
@@ -47,68 +30,3 @@ and third (LSB) bytes of the message. The maximum FW message length is
 
 For the ETSI HCI specification see
 http://www.etsi.org/WebSite/Technologies/ProtocolSpecification.aspx
-
-The Hardware Test
------------------
-
-The idea of the test is that it can performed by reading from the
-corresponding sysfs file. The test is implemented in the board file
-and it should test that PN544 can be put into the firmware update
-mode. If the test is not implemented the sysfs file does not get
-created.
-
-Example:
-> cat /sys/module/pn544/drivers/i2c\:pn544/3-002b/nfc_test
-1
-
-Normal Operation
-----------------
-
-PN544 is powered up when the device file is opened, otherwise it's
-turned off. Only one instance can use the device at a time.
-
-Userspace applications control PN544 with HCI messages. The hardware
-sends an interrupt when data is available for reading. Data is
-physically read when the read function is called by a userspace
-application. Poll() checks the read interrupt state. Configuration and
-self testing are also done from the userspace using read and write.
-
-Example platform data:
-
-static int rx71_pn544_nfc_request_resources(struct i2c_client *client)
-{
-	/* Get and setup the HW resources for the device */
-}
-
-static void rx71_pn544_nfc_free_resources(void)
-{
-	/* Release the HW resources */
-}
-
-static void rx71_pn544_nfc_enable(int fw)
-{
-	/* Turn the device on */
-}
-
-static int rx71_pn544_nfc_test(void)
-{
-	/*
-	 * Put the device into the FW update mode
-	 * and then back to the normal mode.
-	 * Check the behavior and return one on success,
-	 * zero on failure.
-	 */
-}
-
-static void rx71_pn544_nfc_disable(void)
-{
-	/* turn the power off */
-}
-
-static struct pn544_nfc_platform_data rx71_nfc_data = {
-	.request_resources = rx71_pn544_nfc_request_resources,
-	.free_resources = rx71_pn544_nfc_free_resources,
-	.enable = rx71_pn544_nfc_enable,
-	.test = rx71_pn544_nfc_test,
-	.disable = rx71_pn544_nfc_disable,
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/parisc/debugging b/Documentation/parisc/debugging
index d728594058e5..7d75223fa18d 100644
--- a/Documentation/parisc/debugging
+++ b/Documentation/parisc/debugging
@@ -34,6 +34,6 @@ registers interruption handlers read to find out where the machine
 was interrupted - so if you get an interruption between the instruction
 that clears the Q bit and the RFI that sets it again you don't know
 where exactly it happened.  If you're lucky the IAOQ will point to the
-instrucion that cleared the Q bit, if you're not it points anywhere
+instruction that cleared the Q bit, if you're not it points anywhere
 at all.  Usually Q bit problems will show themselves in unexplainable
 system hangs or running off the end of physical memory.
diff --git a/Documentation/parisc/registers b/Documentation/parisc/registers
index dd3caddd1ad9..10c7d1730f5d 100644
--- a/Documentation/parisc/registers
+++ b/Documentation/parisc/registers
@@ -78,6 +78,14 @@ Shadow Registers		used by interruption handler code
 TOC enable bit			1
 
 =========================================================================
+
+The PA-RISC architecture defines 7 registers as "shadow registers".
+Those are used in RETURN FROM INTERRUPTION AND RESTORE instruction to reduce
+the state save and restore time by eliminating the need for general register
+(GR) saves and restores in interruption handlers.
+Shadow registers are the GRs 1, 8, 9, 16, 17, 24, and 25.
+
+=========================================================================
 Register usage notes, originally from John Marvin, with some additional
 notes from Randolph Chung.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/parport.txt b/Documentation/parport.txt
index 93a7ceef398d..c208e4366c03 100644
--- a/Documentation/parport.txt
+++ b/Documentation/parport.txt
@@ -36,18 +36,17 @@ addresses should not be specified for supported PCI cards since they
 are automatically detected.
 
 
-KMod
-----
+modprobe
+--------
 
-If you use kmod, you will find it useful to edit /etc/modprobe.conf.
-Here is an example of the lines that need to be added:
+If you use modprobe , you will find it useful to add lines as below to a
+configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/ directory:.
 
 	alias parport_lowlevel parport_pc
 	options parport_pc io=0x378,0x278 irq=7,auto
 
-KMod will then automatically load parport_pc (with the options
-"io=0x378,0x278 irq=7,auto") whenever a parallel port device driver
-(such as lp) is loaded.
+modprobe will load parport_pc (with the options "io=0x378,0x278 irq=7,auto")
+whenever a parallel port device driver (such as lp) is loaded.
 
 Note that these are example lines only!  You shouldn't in general need
 to specify any options to parport_pc in order to be able to use a
diff --git a/Documentation/percpu-rw-semaphore.txt b/Documentation/percpu-rw-semaphore.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7d3c82431909
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/percpu-rw-semaphore.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+Percpu rw semaphores
+--------------------
+
+Percpu rw semaphores is a new read-write semaphore design that is
+optimized for locking for reading.
+
+The problem with traditional read-write semaphores is that when multiple
+cores take the lock for reading, the cache line containing the semaphore
+is bouncing between L1 caches of the cores, causing performance
+degradation.
+
+Locking for reading is very fast, it uses RCU and it avoids any atomic
+instruction in the lock and unlock path. On the other hand, locking for
+writing is very expensive, it calls synchronize_rcu() that can take
+hundreds of milliseconds.
+
+The lock is declared with "struct percpu_rw_semaphore" type.
+The lock is initialized percpu_init_rwsem, it returns 0 on success and
+-ENOMEM on allocation failure.
+The lock must be freed with percpu_free_rwsem to avoid memory leak.
+
+The lock is locked for read with percpu_down_read, percpu_up_read and
+for write with percpu_down_write, percpu_up_write.
+
+The idea of using RCU for optimized rw-lock was introduced by
+Eric Dumazet <eric.dumazet@gmail.com>.
+The code was written by Mikulas Patocka <mpatocka@redhat.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/pinctrl.txt
index 150fd3833d0b..c0ffd30eb55e 100644
--- a/Documentation/pinctrl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/pinctrl.txt
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ int __init foo_probe(void)
 	struct pinctrl_dev *pctl;
 
 	pctl = pinctrl_register(&foo_desc, <PARENT>, NULL);
-	if (IS_ERR(pctl))
+	if (!pctl)
 		pr_err("could not register foo pin driver\n");
 }
 
@@ -152,11 +152,9 @@ static const struct foo_group foo_groups[] = {
 };
 
 
-static int foo_list_groups(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector)
+static int foo_get_groups_count(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev)
 {
-	if (selector >= ARRAY_SIZE(foo_groups))
-		return -EINVAL;
-	return 0;
+	return ARRAY_SIZE(foo_groups);
 }
 
 static const char *foo_get_group_name(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev,
@@ -175,7 +173,7 @@ static int foo_get_group_pins(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector,
 }
 
 static struct pinctrl_ops foo_pctrl_ops = {
-	.list_groups = foo_list_groups,
+	.get_groups_count = foo_get_groups_count,
 	.get_group_name = foo_get_group_name,
 	.get_group_pins = foo_get_group_pins,
 };
@@ -186,13 +184,12 @@ static struct pinctrl_desc foo_desc = {
        .pctlops = &foo_pctrl_ops,
 };
 
-The pin control subsystem will call the .list_groups() function repeatedly
-beginning on 0 until it returns non-zero to determine legal selectors, then
-it will call the other functions to retrieve the name and pins of the group.
-Maintaining the data structure of the groups is up to the driver, this is
-just a simple example - in practice you may need more entries in your group
-structure, for example specific register ranges associated with each group
-and so on.
+The pin control subsystem will call the .get_groups_count() function to
+determine total number of legal selectors, then it will call the other functions
+to retrieve the name and pins of the group. Maintaining the data structure of
+the groups is up to the driver, this is just a simple example - in practice you
+may need more entries in your group structure, for example specific register
+ranges associated with each group and so on.
 
 
 Pin configuration
@@ -206,12 +203,14 @@ using a certain resistor value - pull up and pull down - so that the pin has a
 stable value when nothing is driving the rail it is connected to, or when it's
 unconnected.
 
-For example, a platform may do this:
+Pin configuration can be programmed by adding configuration entries into the
+mapping table; see section "Board/machine configuration" below.
 
-ret = pin_config_set("foo-dev", "FOO_GPIO_PIN", PLATFORM_X_PULL_UP);
+The format and meaning of the configuration parameter, PLATFORM_X_PULL_UP
+above, is entirely defined by the pin controller driver.
 
-To pull up a pin to VDD. The pin configuration driver implements callbacks for
-changing pin configuration in the pin controller ops like this:
+The pin configuration driver implements callbacks for changing pin
+configuration in the pin controller ops like this:
 
 #include <linux/pinctrl/pinctrl.h>
 #include <linux/pinctrl/pinconf.h>
@@ -283,11 +282,16 @@ Interaction with the GPIO subsystem
 The GPIO drivers may want to perform operations of various types on the same
 physical pins that are also registered as pin controller pins.
 
+First and foremost, the two subsystems can be used as completely orthogonal,
+see the section named "pin control requests from drivers" and
+"drivers needing both pin control and GPIOs" below for details. But in some
+situations a cross-subsystem mapping between pins and GPIOs is needed.
+
 Since the pin controller subsystem have its pinspace local to the pin
 controller we need a mapping so that the pin control subsystem can figure out
 which pin controller handles control of a certain GPIO pin. Since a single
 pin controller may be muxing several GPIO ranges (typically SoCs that have
-one set of pins but internally several GPIO silicon blocks, each modeled as
+one set of pins but internally several GPIO silicon blocks, each modelled as
 a struct gpio_chip) any number of GPIO ranges can be added to a pin controller
 instance like this:
 
@@ -339,6 +343,23 @@ chip b:
  - GPIO range : [48 .. 55]
  - pin range  : [64 .. 71]
 
+The above examples assume the mapping between the GPIOs and pins is
+linear. If the mapping is sparse or haphazard, an array of arbitrary pin
+numbers can be encoded in the range like this:
+
+static const unsigned range_pins[] = { 14, 1, 22, 17, 10, 8, 6, 2 };
+
+static struct pinctrl_gpio_range gpio_range = {
+	.name = "chip",
+	.id = 0,
+	.base = 32,
+	.pins = &range_pins,
+	.npins = ARRAY_SIZE(range_pins),
+	.gc = &chip;
+};
+
+In this case the pin_base property will be ignored.
+
 When GPIO-specific functions in the pin control subsystem are called, these
 ranges will be used to look up the appropriate pin controller by inspecting
 and matching the pin to the pin ranges across all controllers. When a
@@ -346,13 +367,18 @@ pin controller handling the matching range is found, GPIO-specific functions
 will be called on that specific pin controller.
 
 For all functionalities dealing with pin biasing, pin muxing etc, the pin
-controller subsystem will subtract the range's .base offset from the passed
-in gpio number, and add the ranges's .pin_base offset to retrive a pin number.
-After that, the subsystem passes it on to the pin control driver, so the driver
+controller subsystem will look up the corresponding pin number from the passed
+in gpio number, and use the range's internals to retrive a pin number. After
+that, the subsystem passes it on to the pin control driver, so the driver
 will get an pin number into its handled number range. Further it is also passed
 the range ID value, so that the pin controller knows which range it should
 deal with.
 
+Calling pinctrl_add_gpio_range from pinctrl driver is DEPRECATED. Please see
+section 2.1 of Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt on how to bind
+pinctrl and gpio drivers.
+
+
 PINMUX interfaces
 =================
 
@@ -492,14 +518,10 @@ Definitions:
     {"map-i2c0", i2c0, pinctrl0, fi2c0, gi2c0}
   }
 
-  Every map must be assigned a symbolic name, pin controller and function.
-  The group is not compulsory - if it is omitted the first group presented by
-  the driver as applicable for the function will be selected, which is
-  useful for simple cases.
-
-  The device name is present in map entries tied to specific devices. Maps
-  without device names are referred to as SYSTEM pinmuxes, such as can be taken
-  by the machine implementation on boot and not tied to any specific device.
+  Every map must be assigned a state name, pin controller, device and
+  function. The group is not compulsory - if it is omitted the first group
+  presented by the driver as applicable for the function will be selected,
+  which is useful for simple cases.
 
   It is possible to map several groups to the same combination of device,
   pin controller and function. This is for cases where a certain function on
@@ -601,11 +623,9 @@ static const struct foo_group foo_groups[] = {
 };
 
 
-static int foo_list_groups(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector)
+static int foo_get_groups_count(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev)
 {
-	if (selector >= ARRAY_SIZE(foo_groups))
-		return -EINVAL;
-	return 0;
+	return ARRAY_SIZE(foo_groups);
 }
 
 static const char *foo_get_group_name(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev,
@@ -624,7 +644,7 @@ static int foo_get_group_pins(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector,
 }
 
 static struct pinctrl_ops foo_pctrl_ops = {
-	.list_groups = foo_list_groups,
+	.get_groups_count = foo_get_groups_count,
 	.get_group_name = foo_get_group_name,
 	.get_group_pins = foo_get_group_pins,
 };
@@ -635,7 +655,7 @@ struct foo_pmx_func {
 	const unsigned num_groups;
 };
 
-static const char * const spi0_groups[] = { "spi0_1_grp" };
+static const char * const spi0_groups[] = { "spi0_0_grp", "spi0_1_grp" };
 static const char * const i2c0_groups[] = { "i2c0_grp" };
 static const char * const mmc0_groups[] = { "mmc0_1_grp", "mmc0_2_grp",
 					"mmc0_3_grp" };
@@ -658,11 +678,9 @@ static const struct foo_pmx_func foo_functions[] = {
 	},
 };
 
-int foo_list_funcs(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector)
+int foo_get_functions_count(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev)
 {
-	if (selector >= ARRAY_SIZE(foo_functions))
-		return -EINVAL;
-	return 0;
+	return ARRAY_SIZE(foo_functions);
 }
 
 const char *foo_get_fname(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector)
@@ -698,7 +716,7 @@ void foo_disable(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector,
 }
 
 struct pinmux_ops foo_pmxops = {
-	.list_functions = foo_list_funcs,
+	.get_functions_count = foo_get_functions_count,
 	.get_function_name = foo_get_fname,
 	.get_function_groups = foo_get_groups,
 	.enable = foo_enable,
@@ -726,19 +744,26 @@ same time.
 All the above functions are mandatory to implement for a pinmux driver.
 
 
-Pinmux interaction with the GPIO subsystem
-==========================================
+Pin control interaction with the GPIO subsystem
+===============================================
 
-The public pinmux API contains two functions named pinmux_request_gpio()
-and pinmux_free_gpio(). These two functions shall *ONLY* be called from
+Note that the following implies that the use case is to use a certain pin
+from the Linux kernel using the API in <linux/gpio.h> with gpio_request()
+and similar functions. There are cases where you may be using something
+that your datasheet calls "GPIO mode" but actually is just an electrical
+configuration for a certain device. See the section below named
+"GPIO mode pitfalls" for more details on this scenario.
+
+The public pinmux API contains two functions named pinctrl_request_gpio()
+and pinctrl_free_gpio(). These two functions shall *ONLY* be called from
 gpiolib-based drivers as part of their gpio_request() and
-gpio_free() semantics. Likewise the pinmux_gpio_direction_[input|output]
+gpio_free() semantics. Likewise the pinctrl_gpio_direction_[input|output]
 shall only be called from within respective gpio_direction_[input|output]
 gpiolib implementation.
 
 NOTE that platforms and individual drivers shall *NOT* request GPIO pins to be
-muxed in. Instead, implement a proper gpiolib driver and have that driver
-request proper muxing for its pins.
+controlled e.g. muxed in. Instead, implement a proper gpiolib driver and have
+that driver request proper muxing and other control for its pins.
 
 The function list could become long, especially if you can convert every
 individual pin into a GPIO pin independent of any other pins, and then try
@@ -747,7 +772,7 @@ the approach to define every pin as a function.
 In this case, the function array would become 64 entries for each GPIO
 setting and then the device functions.
 
-For this reason there are two functions a pinmux driver can implement
+For this reason there are two functions a pin control driver can implement
 to enable only GPIO on an individual pin: .gpio_request_enable() and
 .gpio_disable_free().
 
@@ -762,12 +787,196 @@ gpiolib driver and the affected GPIO range, pin offset and desired direction
 will be passed along to this function.
 
 Alternatively to using these special functions, it is fully allowed to use
-named functions for each GPIO pin, the pinmux_request_gpio() will attempt to
+named functions for each GPIO pin, the pinctrl_request_gpio() will attempt to
 obtain the function "gpioN" where "N" is the global GPIO pin number if no
 special GPIO-handler is registered.
 
 
-Pinmux board/machine configuration
+GPIO mode pitfalls
+==================
+
+Due to the naming conventions used by hardware engineers, where "GPIO"
+is taken to mean different things than what the kernel does, the developer
+may be confused by a datasheet talking about a pin being possible to set
+into "GPIO mode". It appears that what hardware engineers mean with
+"GPIO mode" is not necessarily the use case that is implied in the kernel
+interface <linux/gpio.h>: a pin that you grab from kernel code and then
+either listen for input or drive high/low to assert/deassert some
+external line.
+
+Rather hardware engineers think that "GPIO mode" means that you can
+software-control a few electrical properties of the pin that you would
+not be able to control if the pin was in some other mode, such as muxed in
+for a device.
+
+The GPIO portions of a pin and its relation to a certain pin controller
+configuration and muxing logic can be constructed in several ways. Here
+are two examples:
+
+(A)
+                       pin config
+                       logic regs
+                       |               +- SPI
+     Physical pins --- pad --- pinmux -+- I2C
+                               |       +- mmc
+                               |       +- GPIO
+                               pin
+                               multiplex
+                               logic regs
+
+Here some electrical properties of the pin can be configured no matter
+whether the pin is used for GPIO or not. If you multiplex a GPIO onto a
+pin, you can also drive it high/low from "GPIO" registers.
+Alternatively, the pin can be controlled by a certain peripheral, while
+still applying desired pin config properties. GPIO functionality is thus
+orthogonal to any other device using the pin.
+
+In this arrangement the registers for the GPIO portions of the pin controller,
+or the registers for the GPIO hardware module are likely to reside in a
+separate memory range only intended for GPIO driving, and the register
+range dealing with pin config and pin multiplexing get placed into a
+different memory range and a separate section of the data sheet.
+
+(B)
+
+                       pin config
+                       logic regs
+                       |               +- SPI
+     Physical pins --- pad --- pinmux -+- I2C
+                       |       |       +- mmc
+                       |       |
+                       GPIO    pin
+                               multiplex
+                               logic regs
+
+In this arrangement, the GPIO functionality can always be enabled, such that
+e.g. a GPIO input can be used to "spy" on the SPI/I2C/MMC signal while it is
+pulsed out. It is likely possible to disrupt the traffic on the pin by doing
+wrong things on the GPIO block, as it is never really disconnected. It is
+possible that the GPIO, pin config and pin multiplex registers are placed into
+the same memory range and the same section of the data sheet, although that
+need not be the case.
+
+From a kernel point of view, however, these are different aspects of the
+hardware and shall be put into different subsystems:
+
+- Registers (or fields within registers) that control electrical
+  properties of the pin such as biasing and drive strength should be
+  exposed through the pinctrl subsystem, as "pin configuration" settings.
+
+- Registers (or fields within registers) that control muxing of signals
+  from various other HW blocks (e.g. I2C, MMC, or GPIO) onto pins should
+  be exposed through the pinctrl subssytem, as mux functions.
+
+- Registers (or fields within registers) that control GPIO functionality
+  such as setting a GPIO's output value, reading a GPIO's input value, or
+  setting GPIO pin direction should be exposed through the GPIO subsystem,
+  and if they also support interrupt capabilities, through the irqchip
+  abstraction.
+
+Depending on the exact HW register design, some functions exposed by the
+GPIO subsystem may call into the pinctrl subsystem in order to
+co-ordinate register settings across HW modules. In particular, this may
+be needed for HW with separate GPIO and pin controller HW modules, where
+e.g. GPIO direction is determined by a register in the pin controller HW
+module rather than the GPIO HW module.
+
+Electrical properties of the pin such as biasing and drive strength
+may be placed at some pin-specific register in all cases or as part
+of the GPIO register in case (B) especially. This doesn't mean that such
+properties necessarily pertain to what the Linux kernel calls "GPIO".
+
+Example: a pin is usually muxed in to be used as a UART TX line. But during
+system sleep, we need to put this pin into "GPIO mode" and ground it.
+
+If you make a 1-to-1 map to the GPIO subsystem for this pin, you may start
+to think that you need to come up with something real complex, that the
+pin shall be used for UART TX and GPIO at the same time, that you will grab
+a pin control handle and set it to a certain state to enable UART TX to be
+muxed in, then twist it over to GPIO mode and use gpio_direction_output()
+to drive it low during sleep, then mux it over to UART TX again when you
+wake up and maybe even gpio_request/gpio_free as part of this cycle. This
+all gets very complicated.
+
+The solution is to not think that what the datasheet calls "GPIO mode"
+has to be handled by the <linux/gpio.h> interface. Instead view this as
+a certain pin config setting. Look in e.g. <linux/pinctrl/pinconf-generic.h>
+and you find this in the documentation:
+
+  PIN_CONFIG_OUTPUT: this will configure the pin in output, use argument
+     1 to indicate high level, argument 0 to indicate low level.
+
+So it is perfectly possible to push a pin into "GPIO mode" and drive the
+line low as part of the usual pin control map. So for example your UART
+driver may look like this:
+
+#include <linux/pinctrl/consumer.h>
+
+struct pinctrl          *pinctrl;
+struct pinctrl_state    *pins_default;
+struct pinctrl_state    *pins_sleep;
+
+pins_default = pinctrl_lookup_state(uap->pinctrl, PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT);
+pins_sleep = pinctrl_lookup_state(uap->pinctrl, PINCTRL_STATE_SLEEP);
+
+/* Normal mode */
+retval = pinctrl_select_state(pinctrl, pins_default);
+/* Sleep mode */
+retval = pinctrl_select_state(pinctrl, pins_sleep);
+
+And your machine configuration may look like this:
+--------------------------------------------------
+
+static unsigned long uart_default_mode[] = {
+    PIN_CONF_PACKED(PIN_CONFIG_DRIVE_PUSH_PULL, 0),
+};
+
+static unsigned long uart_sleep_mode[] = {
+    PIN_CONF_PACKED(PIN_CONFIG_OUTPUT, 0),
+};
+
+static struct pinctrl_map pinmap[] __initdata = {
+    PIN_MAP_MUX_GROUP("uart", PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT, "pinctrl-foo",
+                      "u0_group", "u0"),
+    PIN_MAP_CONFIGS_PIN("uart", PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT, "pinctrl-foo",
+                        "UART_TX_PIN", uart_default_mode),
+    PIN_MAP_MUX_GROUP("uart", PINCTRL_STATE_SLEEP, "pinctrl-foo",
+                      "u0_group", "gpio-mode"),
+    PIN_MAP_CONFIGS_PIN("uart", PINCTRL_STATE_SLEEP, "pinctrl-foo",
+                        "UART_TX_PIN", uart_sleep_mode),
+};
+
+foo_init(void) {
+    pinctrl_register_mappings(pinmap, ARRAY_SIZE(pinmap));
+}
+
+Here the pins we want to control are in the "u0_group" and there is some
+function called "u0" that can be enabled on this group of pins, and then
+everything is UART business as usual. But there is also some function
+named "gpio-mode" that can be mapped onto the same pins to move them into
+GPIO mode.
+
+This will give the desired effect without any bogus interaction with the
+GPIO subsystem. It is just an electrical configuration used by that device
+when going to sleep, it might imply that the pin is set into something the
+datasheet calls "GPIO mode" but that is not the point: it is still used
+by that UART device to control the pins that pertain to that very UART
+driver, putting them into modes needed by the UART. GPIO in the Linux
+kernel sense are just some 1-bit line, and is a different use case.
+
+How the registers are poked to attain the push/pull and output low
+configuration and the muxing of the "u0" or "gpio-mode" group onto these
+pins is a question for the driver.
+
+Some datasheets will be more helpful and refer to the "GPIO mode" as
+"low power mode" rather than anything to do with GPIO. This often means
+the same thing electrically speaking, but in this latter case the
+software engineers will usually quickly identify that this is some
+specific muxing/configuration rather than anything related to the GPIO
+API.
+
+
+Board/machine configuration
 ==================================
 
 Boards and machines define how a certain complete running system is put
@@ -775,27 +984,33 @@ together, including how GPIOs and devices are muxed, how regulators are
 constrained and how the clock tree looks. Of course pinmux settings are also
 part of this.
 
-A pinmux config for a machine looks pretty much like a simple regulator
-configuration, so for the example array above we want to enable i2c and
-spi on the second function mapping:
+A pin controller configuration for a machine looks pretty much like a simple
+regulator configuration, so for the example array above we want to enable i2c
+and spi on the second function mapping:
 
 #include <linux/pinctrl/machine.h>
 
-static const struct pinmux_map __initdata pmx_mapping[] = {
+static const struct pinctrl_map mapping[] __initconst = {
 	{
-		.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
-		.function = "spi0",
 		.dev_name = "foo-spi.0",
+		.name = PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT,
+		.type = PIN_MAP_TYPE_MUX_GROUP,
+		.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
+		.data.mux.function = "spi0",
 	},
 	{
-		.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
-		.function = "i2c0",
 		.dev_name = "foo-i2c.0",
+		.name = PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT,
+		.type = PIN_MAP_TYPE_MUX_GROUP,
+		.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
+		.data.mux.function = "i2c0",
 	},
 	{
-		.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
-		.function = "mmc0",
 		.dev_name = "foo-mmc.0",
+		.name = PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT,
+		.type = PIN_MAP_TYPE_MUX_GROUP,
+		.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
+		.data.mux.function = "mmc0",
 	},
 };
 
@@ -805,21 +1020,51 @@ must match a function provided by the pinmux driver handling this pin range.
 
 As you can see we may have several pin controllers on the system and thus
 we need to specify which one of them that contain the functions we wish
-to map. The map can also use struct device * directly, so there is no
-inherent need to use strings to specify .dev_name or .ctrl_dev_name, these
-are for the situation where you do not have a handle to the struct device *,
-for example if they are not yet instantiated or cumbersome to obtain.
+to map.
 
 You register this pinmux mapping to the pinmux subsystem by simply:
 
-       ret = pinmux_register_mappings(pmx_mapping, ARRAY_SIZE(pmx_mapping));
+       ret = pinctrl_register_mappings(mapping, ARRAY_SIZE(mapping));
 
 Since the above construct is pretty common there is a helper macro to make
 it even more compact which assumes you want to use pinctrl-foo and position
 0 for mapping, for example:
 
-static struct pinmux_map __initdata pmx_mapping[] = {
-       PINMUX_MAP("I2CMAP", "pinctrl-foo", "i2c0", "foo-i2c.0"),
+static struct pinctrl_map mapping[] __initdata = {
+	PIN_MAP_MUX_GROUP("foo-i2c.o", PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT, "pinctrl-foo", NULL, "i2c0"),
+};
+
+The mapping table may also contain pin configuration entries. It's common for
+each pin/group to have a number of configuration entries that affect it, so
+the table entries for configuration reference an array of config parameters
+and values. An example using the convenience macros is shown below:
+
+static unsigned long i2c_grp_configs[] = {
+	FOO_PIN_DRIVEN,
+	FOO_PIN_PULLUP,
+};
+
+static unsigned long i2c_pin_configs[] = {
+	FOO_OPEN_COLLECTOR,
+	FOO_SLEW_RATE_SLOW,
+};
+
+static struct pinctrl_map mapping[] __initdata = {
+	PIN_MAP_MUX_GROUP("foo-i2c.0", PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT, "pinctrl-foo", "i2c0", "i2c0"),
+	PIN_MAP_CONFIGS_GROUP("foo-i2c.0", PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT, "pinctrl-foo", "i2c0", i2c_grp_configs),
+	PIN_MAP_CONFIGS_PIN("foo-i2c.0", PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT, "pinctrl-foo", "i2c0scl", i2c_pin_configs),
+	PIN_MAP_CONFIGS_PIN("foo-i2c.0", PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT, "pinctrl-foo", "i2c0sda", i2c_pin_configs),
+};
+
+Finally, some devices expect the mapping table to contain certain specific
+named states. When running on hardware that doesn't need any pin controller
+configuration, the mapping table must still contain those named states, in
+order to explicitly indicate that the states were provided and intended to
+be empty. Table entry macro PIN_MAP_DUMMY_STATE serves the purpose of defining
+a named state without causing any pin controller to be programmed:
+
+static struct pinctrl_map mapping[] __initdata = {
+	PIN_MAP_DUMMY_STATE("foo-i2c.0", PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT),
 };
 
 
@@ -831,180 +1076,285 @@ As it is possible to map a function to different groups of pins an optional
 
 ...
 {
+	.dev_name = "foo-spi.0",
 	.name = "spi0-pos-A",
+	.type = PIN_MAP_TYPE_MUX_GROUP,
 	.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
 	.function = "spi0",
 	.group = "spi0_0_grp",
-	.dev_name = "foo-spi.0",
 },
 {
+	.dev_name = "foo-spi.0",
 	.name = "spi0-pos-B",
+	.type = PIN_MAP_TYPE_MUX_GROUP,
 	.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
 	.function = "spi0",
 	.group = "spi0_1_grp",
-	.dev_name = "foo-spi.0",
 },
 ...
 
 This example mapping is used to switch between two positions for spi0 at
 runtime, as described further below under the heading "Runtime pinmuxing".
 
-Further it is possible to match several groups of pins to the same function
-for a single device, say for example in the mmc0 example above, where you can
+Further it is possible for one named state to affect the muxing of several
+groups of pins, say for example in the mmc0 example above, where you can
 additively expand the mmc0 bus from 2 to 4 to 8 pins. If we want to use all
 three groups for a total of 2+2+4 = 8 pins (for an 8-bit MMC bus as is the
 case), we define a mapping like this:
 
 ...
 {
+	.dev_name = "foo-mmc.0",
 	.name = "2bit"
+	.type = PIN_MAP_TYPE_MUX_GROUP,
 	.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
 	.function = "mmc0",
 	.group = "mmc0_1_grp",
-	.dev_name = "foo-mmc.0",
 },
 {
+	.dev_name = "foo-mmc.0",
 	.name = "4bit"
+	.type = PIN_MAP_TYPE_MUX_GROUP,
 	.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
 	.function = "mmc0",
 	.group = "mmc0_1_grp",
-	.dev_name = "foo-mmc.0",
 },
 {
+	.dev_name = "foo-mmc.0",
 	.name = "4bit"
+	.type = PIN_MAP_TYPE_MUX_GROUP,
 	.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
 	.function = "mmc0",
 	.group = "mmc0_2_grp",
-	.dev_name = "foo-mmc.0",
 },
 {
+	.dev_name = "foo-mmc.0",
 	.name = "8bit"
+	.type = PIN_MAP_TYPE_MUX_GROUP,
 	.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
+	.function = "mmc0",
 	.group = "mmc0_1_grp",
-	.dev_name = "foo-mmc.0",
 },
 {
+	.dev_name = "foo-mmc.0",
 	.name = "8bit"
+	.type = PIN_MAP_TYPE_MUX_GROUP,
 	.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
 	.function = "mmc0",
 	.group = "mmc0_2_grp",
-	.dev_name = "foo-mmc.0",
 },
 {
+	.dev_name = "foo-mmc.0",
 	.name = "8bit"
+	.type = PIN_MAP_TYPE_MUX_GROUP,
 	.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
 	.function = "mmc0",
 	.group = "mmc0_3_grp",
-	.dev_name = "foo-mmc.0",
 },
 ...
 
 The result of grabbing this mapping from the device with something like
 this (see next paragraph):
 
-	pmx = pinmux_get(&device, "8bit");
+	p = devm_pinctrl_get(dev);
+	s = pinctrl_lookup_state(p, "8bit");
+	ret = pinctrl_select_state(p, s);
+
+or more simply:
+
+	p = devm_pinctrl_get_select(dev, "8bit");
 
 Will be that you activate all the three bottom records in the mapping at
-once. Since they share the same name, pin controller device, funcion and
+once. Since they share the same name, pin controller device, function and
 device, and since we allow multiple groups to match to a single device, they
 all get selected, and they all get enabled and disable simultaneously by the
 pinmux core.
 
 
-Pinmux requests from drivers
-============================
+Pin control requests from drivers
+=================================
 
-Generally it is discouraged to let individual drivers get and enable pinmuxes.
-So if possible, handle the pinmuxes in platform code or some other place where
-you have access to all the affected struct device * pointers. In some cases
-where a driver needs to switch between different mux mappings at runtime
-this is not possible.
+When a device driver is about to probe the device core will automatically
+attempt to issue pinctrl_get_select_default() on these devices.
+This way driver writers do not need to add any of the boilerplate code
+of the type found below. However when doing fine-grained state selection
+and not using the "default" state, you may have to do some device driver
+handling of the pinctrl handles and states.
 
-A driver may request a certain mux to be activated, usually just the default
-mux like this:
+So if you just want to put the pins for a certain device into the default
+state and be done with it, there is nothing you need to do besides
+providing the proper mapping table. The device core will take care of
+the rest.
 
-#include <linux/pinctrl/pinmux.h>
+Generally it is discouraged to let individual drivers get and enable pin
+control. So if possible, handle the pin control in platform code or some other
+place where you have access to all the affected struct device * pointers. In
+some cases where a driver needs to e.g. switch between different mux mappings
+at runtime this is not possible.
+
+A typical case is if a driver needs to switch bias of pins from normal
+operation and going to sleep, moving from the PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT to
+PINCTRL_STATE_SLEEP at runtime, re-biasing or even re-muxing pins to save
+current in sleep mode.
+
+A driver may request a certain control state to be activated, usually just the
+default state like this:
+
+#include <linux/pinctrl/consumer.h>
 
 struct foo_state {
-       struct pinmux *pmx;
+       struct pinctrl *p;
+       struct pinctrl_state *s;
        ...
 };
 
 foo_probe()
 {
-	/* Allocate a state holder named "state" etc */
-	struct pinmux pmx;
+	/* Allocate a state holder named "foo" etc */
+	struct foo_state *foo = ...;
 
-	pmx = pinmux_get(&device, NULL);
-	if IS_ERR(pmx)
-		return PTR_ERR(pmx);
-	pinmux_enable(pmx);
+	foo->p = devm_pinctrl_get(&device);
+	if (IS_ERR(foo->p)) {
+		/* FIXME: clean up "foo" here */
+		return PTR_ERR(foo->p);
+	}
 
-	state->pmx = pmx;
-}
+	foo->s = pinctrl_lookup_state(foo->p, PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT);
+	if (IS_ERR(foo->s)) {
+		/* FIXME: clean up "foo" here */
+		return PTR_ERR(s);
+	}
 
-foo_remove()
-{
-	pinmux_disable(state->pmx);
-	pinmux_put(state->pmx);
+	ret = pinctrl_select_state(foo->s);
+	if (ret < 0) {
+		/* FIXME: clean up "foo" here */
+		return ret;
+	}
 }
 
-If you want to grab a specific mux mapping and not just the first one found for
-this device you can specify a specific mapping name, for example in the above
-example the second i2c0 setting: pinmux_get(&device, "spi0-pos-B");
-
-This get/enable/disable/put sequence can just as well be handled by bus drivers
+This get/lookup/select/put sequence can just as well be handled by bus drivers
 if you don't want each and every driver to handle it and you know the
 arrangement on your bus.
 
-The semantics of the get/enable respective disable/put is as follows:
+The semantics of the pinctrl APIs are:
 
-- pinmux_get() is called in process context to reserve the pins affected with
-  a certain mapping and set up the pinmux core and the driver. It will allocate
-  a struct from the kernel memory to hold the pinmux state.
+- pinctrl_get() is called in process context to obtain a handle to all pinctrl
+  information for a given client device. It will allocate a struct from the
+  kernel memory to hold the pinmux state. All mapping table parsing or similar
+  slow operations take place within this API.
 
-- pinmux_enable()/pinmux_disable() is quick and can be called from fastpath
-  (irq context) when you quickly want to set up/tear down the hardware muxing
-  when running a device driver. Usually it will just poke some values into a
-  register.
+- devm_pinctrl_get() is a variant of pinctrl_get() that causes pinctrl_put()
+  to be called automatically on the retrieved pointer when the associated
+  device is removed. It is recommended to use this function over plain
+  pinctrl_get().
 
-- pinmux_disable() is called in process context to tear down the pin requests
-  and release the state holder struct for the mux setting.
+- pinctrl_lookup_state() is called in process context to obtain a handle to a
+  specific state for a the client device. This operation may be slow too.
 
-Usually the pinmux core handled the get/put pair and call out to the device
-drivers bookkeeping operations, like checking available functions and the
-associated pins, whereas the enable/disable pass on to the pin controller
+- pinctrl_select_state() programs pin controller hardware according to the
+  definition of the state as given by the mapping table. In theory this is a
+  fast-path operation, since it only involved blasting some register settings
+  into hardware. However, note that some pin controllers may have their
+  registers on a slow/IRQ-based bus, so client devices should not assume they
+  can call pinctrl_select_state() from non-blocking contexts.
+
+- pinctrl_put() frees all information associated with a pinctrl handle.
+
+- devm_pinctrl_put() is a variant of pinctrl_put() that may be used to
+  explicitly destroy a pinctrl object returned by devm_pinctrl_get().
+  However, use of this function will be rare, due to the automatic cleanup
+  that will occur even without calling it.
+
+  pinctrl_get() must be paired with a plain pinctrl_put().
+  pinctrl_get() may not be paired with devm_pinctrl_put().
+  devm_pinctrl_get() can optionally be paired with devm_pinctrl_put().
+  devm_pinctrl_get() may not be paired with plain pinctrl_put().
+
+Usually the pin control core handled the get/put pair and call out to the
+device drivers bookkeeping operations, like checking available functions and
+the associated pins, whereas the enable/disable pass on to the pin controller
 driver which takes care of activating and/or deactivating the mux setting by
 quickly poking some registers.
 
-The pins are allocated for your device when you issue the pinmux_get() call,
-after this you should be able to see this in the debugfs listing of all pins.
+The pins are allocated for your device when you issue the devm_pinctrl_get()
+call, after this you should be able to see this in the debugfs listing of all
+pins.
+
+NOTE: the pinctrl system will return -EPROBE_DEFER if it cannot find the
+requested pinctrl handles, for example if the pinctrl driver has not yet
+registered. Thus make sure that the error path in your driver gracefully
+cleans up and is ready to retry the probing later in the startup process.
 
 
-System pinmux hogging
-=====================
+Drivers needing both pin control and GPIOs
+==========================================
 
-A system pinmux map entry, i.e. a pinmux setting that does not have a device
-associated with it, can be hogged by the core when the pin controller is
-registered. This means that the core will attempt to call pinmux_get() and
-pinmux_enable() on it immediately after the pin control device has been
-registered.
+Again, it is discouraged to let drivers lookup and select pin control states
+themselves, but again sometimes this is unavoidable.
 
-This is enabled by simply setting the .hog_on_boot field in the map to true,
-like this:
+So say that your driver is fetching its resources like this:
+
+#include <linux/pinctrl/consumer.h>
+#include <linux/gpio.h>
+
+struct pinctrl *pinctrl;
+int gpio;
+
+pinctrl = devm_pinctrl_get_select_default(&dev);
+gpio = devm_gpio_request(&dev, 14, "foo");
+
+Here we first request a certain pin state and then request GPIO 14 to be
+used. If you're using the subsystems orthogonally like this, you should
+nominally always get your pinctrl handle and select the desired pinctrl
+state BEFORE requesting the GPIO. This is a semantic convention to avoid
+situations that can be electrically unpleasant, you will certainly want to
+mux in and bias pins in a certain way before the GPIO subsystems starts to
+deal with them.
+
+The above can be hidden: using the device core, the pinctrl core may be
+setting up the config and muxing for the pins right before the device is
+probing, nevertheless orthogonal to the GPIO subsystem.
+
+But there are also situations where it makes sense for the GPIO subsystem
+to communicate directly with the pinctrl subsystem, using the latter as a
+back-end. This is when the GPIO driver may call out to the functions
+described in the section "Pin control interaction with the GPIO subsystem"
+above. This only involves per-pin multiplexing, and will be completely
+hidden behind the gpio_*() function namespace. In this case, the driver
+need not interact with the pin control subsystem at all.
+
+If a pin control driver and a GPIO driver is dealing with the same pins
+and the use cases involve multiplexing, you MUST implement the pin controller
+as a back-end for the GPIO driver like this, unless your hardware design
+is such that the GPIO controller can override the pin controller's
+multiplexing state through hardware without the need to interact with the
+pin control system.
+
+
+System pin control hogging
+==========================
+
+Pin control map entries can be hogged by the core when the pin controller
+is registered. This means that the core will attempt to call pinctrl_get(),
+lookup_state() and select_state() on it immediately after the pin control
+device has been registered.
+
+This occurs for mapping table entries where the client device name is equal
+to the pin controller device name, and the state name is PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT.
 
 {
-	.name = "POWERMAP"
+	.dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
+	.name = PINCTRL_STATE_DEFAULT,
+	.type = PIN_MAP_TYPE_MUX_GROUP,
 	.ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl-foo",
 	.function = "power_func",
-	.hog_on_boot = true,
 },
 
 Since it may be common to request the core to hog a few always-applicable
 mux settings on the primary pin controller, there is a convenience macro for
 this:
 
-PINMUX_MAP_PRIMARY_SYS_HOG("POWERMAP", "power_func")
+PIN_MAP_MUX_GROUP_HOG_DEFAULT("pinctrl-foo", NULL /* group */, "power_func")
 
 This gives the exact same result as the above construction.
 
@@ -1016,32 +1366,50 @@ It is possible to mux a certain function in and out at runtime, say to move
 an SPI port from one set of pins to another set of pins. Say for example for
 spi0 in the example above, we expose two different groups of pins for the same
 function, but with different named in the mapping as described under
-"Advanced mapping" above. So we have two mappings named "spi0-pos-A" and
-"spi0-pos-B".
+"Advanced mapping" above. So that for an SPI device, we have two states named
+"pos-A" and "pos-B".
 
 This snippet first muxes the function in the pins defined by group A, enables
 it, disables and releases it, and muxes it in on the pins defined by group B:
 
-foo_switch()
+#include <linux/pinctrl/consumer.h>
+
+struct pinctrl *p;
+struct pinctrl_state *s1, *s2;
+
+foo_probe()
 {
-	struct pinmux *pmx;
+	/* Setup */
+	p = devm_pinctrl_get(&device);
+	if (IS_ERR(p))
+		...
+
+	s1 = pinctrl_lookup_state(foo->p, "pos-A");
+	if (IS_ERR(s1))
+		...
+
+	s2 = pinctrl_lookup_state(foo->p, "pos-B");
+	if (IS_ERR(s2))
+		...
+}
 
+foo_switch()
+{
 	/* Enable on position A */
-	pmx = pinmux_get(&device, "spi0-pos-A");
-	if IS_ERR(pmx)
-		return PTR_ERR(pmx);
-	pinmux_enable(pmx);
+	ret = pinctrl_select_state(s1);
+	if (ret < 0)
+	    ...
 
-	/* This releases the pins again */
-	pinmux_disable(pmx);
-	pinmux_put(pmx);
+	...
 
 	/* Enable on position B */
-	pmx = pinmux_get(&device, "spi0-pos-B");
-	if IS_ERR(pmx)
-		return PTR_ERR(pmx);
-	pinmux_enable(pmx);
+	ret = pinctrl_select_state(s2);
+	if (ret < 0)
+	    ...
+
 	...
 }
 
-The above has to be done from process context.
+The above has to be done from process context. The reservation of the pins
+will be done when the state is activated, so in effect one specific pin
+can be used by different functions at different times on a running system.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt b/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt
index 262acf56fa79..e9b54de8fdf7 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ use the PM_TRACE mechanism documented in Documentation/power/s2ram.txt .
 
 To verify that the STR works, it is generally more convenient to use the s2ram
 tool available from http://suspend.sf.net and documented at
-http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Suspend_to_RAM.
+http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Suspend_to_RAM (S2RAM_LINK).
 
 Namely, after writing "freezer", "devices", "platform", "processors", or "core"
 into /sys/power/pm_test (available if the kernel is compiled with
@@ -194,10 +194,10 @@ Among other things, the testing with the help of /sys/power/pm_test may allow
 you to identify drivers that fail to suspend or resume their devices.  They
 should be unloaded every time before an STR transition.
 
-Next, you can follow the instructions at http://en.opensuse.org/s2ram to test
-the system, but if it does not work "out of the box", you may need to boot it
-with "init=/bin/bash" and test s2ram in the minimal configuration.  In that
-case, you may be able to search for failing drivers by following the procedure
+Next, you can follow the instructions at S2RAM_LINK to test the system, but if
+it does not work "out of the box", you may need to boot it with
+"init=/bin/bash" and test s2ram in the minimal configuration.  In that case,
+you may be able to search for failing drivers by following the procedure
 analogous to the one described in section 1.  If you find some failing drivers,
 you will have to unload them every time before an STR transition (ie. before
 you run s2ram), and please report the problems with them.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/charger-manager.txt b/Documentation/power/charger-manager.txt
index fdcca991df30..b4f7f4b23f64 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/charger-manager.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/charger-manager.txt
@@ -44,6 +44,16 @@ Charger Manager supports the following:
 	Normally, the platform will need to resume and suspend some devices
 	that are used by Charger Manager.
 
+* Support for premature full-battery event handling
+	If the battery voltage drops by "fullbatt_vchkdrop_uV" after
+	"fullbatt_vchkdrop_ms" from the full-battery event, the framework
+	restarts charging. This check is also performed while suspended by
+	setting wakeup time accordingly and using suspend_again.
+
+* Support for uevent-notify
+	With the charger-related events, the device sends
+	notification to users with UEVENT.
+
 2. Global Charger-Manager Data related with suspend_again
 ========================================================
 In order to setup Charger Manager with suspend-again feature
@@ -55,7 +65,7 @@ if there are multiple batteries. If there are multiple batteries, the
 multiple instances of Charger Manager share the same charger_global_desc
 and it will manage in-suspend monitoring for all instances of Charger Manager.
 
-The user needs to provide all the two entries properly in order to activate
+The user needs to provide all the three entries properly in order to activate
 in-suspend monitoring:
 
 struct charger_global_desc {
@@ -74,6 +84,11 @@ bool (*rtc_only_wakeup)(void);
 	same struct. If there is any other wakeup source triggered the
 	wakeup, it should return false. If the "rtc" is the only wakeup
 	reason, it should return true.
+
+bool assume_timer_stops_in_suspend;
+	: if true, Charger Manager assumes that
+	the timer (CM uses jiffies as timer) stops during suspend. Then, CM
+	assumes that the suspend-duration is same as the alarm length.
 };
 
 3. How to setup suspend_again
@@ -111,6 +126,16 @@ enum polling_modes polling_mode;
 	  CM_POLL_CHARGING_ONLY: poll this battery if and only if the
 				 battery is being charged.
 
+unsigned int fullbatt_vchkdrop_ms;
+unsigned int fullbatt_vchkdrop_uV;
+	: If both have non-zero values, Charger Manager will check the
+	battery voltage drop fullbatt_vchkdrop_ms after the battery is fully
+	charged. If the voltage drop is over fullbatt_vchkdrop_uV, Charger
+	Manager will try to recharge the battery by disabling and enabling
+	chargers. Recharge with voltage drop condition only (without delay
+	condition) is needed to be implemented with hardware interrupts from
+	fuel gauges or charger devices/chips.
+
 unsigned int fullbatt_uV;
 	: If specified with a non-zero value, Charger Manager assumes
 	that the battery is full (capacity = 100) if the battery is not being
@@ -122,6 +147,8 @@ unsigned int polling_interval_ms;
 	this battery every polling_interval_ms or more frequently.
 
 enum data_source battery_present;
+	: CM_BATTERY_PRESENT: assume that the battery exists.
+	CM_NO_BATTERY: assume that the battery does not exists.
 	CM_FUEL_GAUGE: get battery presence information from fuel gauge.
 	CM_CHARGER_STAT: get battery presence from chargers.
 
@@ -151,7 +178,17 @@ bool measure_battery_temp;
 	the value of measure_battery_temp.
 };
 
-5. Other Considerations
+5. Notify Charger-Manager of charger events: cm_notify_event()
+=========================================================
+If there is an charger event is required to notify
+Charger Manager, a charger device driver that triggers the event can call
+cm_notify_event(psy, type, msg) to notify the corresponding Charger Manager.
+In the function, psy is the charger driver's power_supply pointer, which is
+associated with Charger-Manager. The parameter "type"
+is the same as irq's type (enum cm_event_types). The event message "msg" is
+optional and is effective only if the event type is "UNDESCRIBED" or "OTHERS".
+
+6. Other Considerations
 =======================
 
 At the charger/battery-related events such as battery-pulled-out,
diff --git a/Documentation/power/devices.txt b/Documentation/power/devices.txt
index 872815cd41d3..a66c9821b5ce 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/devices.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/devices.txt
@@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ situations.
 System Power Management Phases
 ------------------------------
 Suspending or resuming the system is done in several phases.  Different phases
-are used for standby or memory sleep states ("suspend-to-RAM") and the
+are used for freeze, standby, and memory sleep states ("suspend-to-RAM") and the
 hibernation state ("suspend-to-disk").  Each phase involves executing callbacks
 for every device before the next phase begins.  Not all busses or classes
 support all these callbacks and not all drivers use all the callbacks.  The
@@ -309,7 +309,8 @@ execute the corresponding method from dev->driver->pm instead if there is one.
 
 Entering System Suspend
 -----------------------
-When the system goes into the standby or memory sleep state, the phases are:
+When the system goes into the freeze, standby or memory sleep state,
+the phases are:
 
 		prepare, suspend, suspend_late, suspend_noirq.
 
@@ -368,7 +369,7 @@ the devices that were suspended.
 
 Leaving System Suspend
 ----------------------
-When resuming from standby or memory sleep, the phases are:
+When resuming from freeze, standby or memory sleep, the phases are:
 
 		resume_noirq, resume_early, resume, complete.
 
@@ -433,8 +434,8 @@ the system log.
 
 Entering Hibernation
 --------------------
-Hibernating the system is more complicated than putting it into the standby or
-memory sleep state, because it involves creating and saving a system image.
+Hibernating the system is more complicated than putting it into the other
+sleep states, because it involves creating and saving a system image.
 Therefore there are more phases for hibernation, with a different set of
 callbacks.  These phases always run after tasks have been frozen and memory has
 been freed.
@@ -485,8 +486,8 @@ image forms an atomic snapshot of the system state.
 
 At this point the system image is saved, and the devices then need to be
 prepared for the upcoming system shutdown.  This is much like suspending them
-before putting the system into the standby or memory sleep state, and the phases
-are similar.
+before putting the system into the freeze, standby or memory sleep state,
+and the phases are similar.
 
     9.	The prepare phase is discussed above.
 
@@ -583,9 +584,10 @@ for the given device during all power transitions, instead of the respective
 subsystem-level callbacks.  Specifically, if a device's pm_domain pointer is
 not NULL, the ->suspend() callback from the object pointed to by it will be
 executed instead of its subsystem's (e.g. bus type's) ->suspend() callback and
-anlogously for all of the remaining callbacks.  In other words, power management
-domain callbacks, if defined for the given device, always take precedence over
-the callbacks provided by the device's subsystem (e.g. bus type).
+analogously for all of the remaining callbacks.  In other words, power
+management domain callbacks, if defined for the given device, always take
+precedence over the callbacks provided by the device's subsystem (e.g. bus
+type).
 
 The support for device power management domains is only relevant to platforms
 needing to use the same device driver power management callbacks in many
@@ -598,7 +600,7 @@ it into account in any way.
 Device Low Power (suspend) States
 ---------------------------------
 Device low-power states aren't standard.  One device might only handle
-"on" and "off, while another might support a dozen different versions of
+"on" and "off", while another might support a dozen different versions of
 "on" (how many engines are active?), plus a state that gets back to "on"
 faster than from a full "off".
 
diff --git a/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt b/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt
index ec715cd78fbb..85894d83b352 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ architectures).
 
 II. How does it work?
 
-There are four per-task flags used for that, PF_NOFREEZE, PF_FROZEN, TIF_FREEZE
+There are three per-task flags used for that, PF_NOFREEZE, PF_FROZEN
 and PF_FREEZER_SKIP (the last one is auxiliary).  The tasks that have
 PF_NOFREEZE unset (all user space processes and some kernel threads) are
 regarded as 'freezable' and treated in a special way before the system enters a
@@ -17,30 +17,31 @@ suspend state as well as before a hibernation image is created (in what follows
 we only consider hibernation, but the description also applies to suspend).
 
 Namely, as the first step of the hibernation procedure the function
-freeze_processes() (defined in kernel/power/process.c) is called.  It executes
-try_to_freeze_tasks() that sets TIF_FREEZE for all of the freezable tasks and
-either wakes them up, if they are kernel threads, or sends fake signals to them,
-if they are user space processes.  A task that has TIF_FREEZE set, should react
-to it by calling the function called __refrigerator() (defined in
-kernel/freezer.c), which sets the task's PF_FROZEN flag, changes its state
-to TASK_UNINTERRUPTIBLE and makes it loop until PF_FROZEN is cleared for it.
-Then, we say that the task is 'frozen' and therefore the set of functions
-handling this mechanism is referred to as 'the freezer' (these functions are
-defined in kernel/power/process.c, kernel/freezer.c & include/linux/freezer.h).
-User space processes are generally frozen before kernel threads.
+freeze_processes() (defined in kernel/power/process.c) is called.  A system-wide
+variable system_freezing_cnt (as opposed to a per-task flag) is used to indicate
+whether the system is to undergo a freezing operation. And freeze_processes()
+sets this variable.  After this, it executes try_to_freeze_tasks() that sends a
+fake signal to all user space processes, and wakes up all the kernel threads.
+All freezable tasks must react to that by calling try_to_freeze(), which
+results in a call to __refrigerator() (defined in kernel/freezer.c), which sets
+the task's PF_FROZEN flag, changes its state to TASK_UNINTERRUPTIBLE and makes
+it loop until PF_FROZEN is cleared for it. Then, we say that the task is
+'frozen' and therefore the set of functions handling this mechanism is referred
+to as 'the freezer' (these functions are defined in kernel/power/process.c,
+kernel/freezer.c & include/linux/freezer.h). User space processes are generally
+frozen before kernel threads.
 
 __refrigerator() must not be called directly.  Instead, use the
 try_to_freeze() function (defined in include/linux/freezer.h), that checks
-the task's TIF_FREEZE flag and makes the task enter __refrigerator() if the
-flag is set.
+if the task is to be frozen and makes the task enter __refrigerator().
 
 For user space processes try_to_freeze() is called automatically from the
 signal-handling code, but the freezable kernel threads need to call it
 explicitly in suitable places or use the wait_event_freezable() or
 wait_event_freezable_timeout() macros (defined in include/linux/freezer.h)
-that combine interruptible sleep with checking if TIF_FREEZE is set and calling
-try_to_freeze().  The main loop of a freezable kernel thread may look like the
-following one:
+that combine interruptible sleep with checking if the task is to be frozen and
+calling try_to_freeze().  The main loop of a freezable kernel thread may look
+like the following one:
 
 	set_freezable();
 	do {
@@ -53,7 +54,7 @@ following one:
 (from drivers/usb/core/hub.c::hub_thread()).
 
 If a freezable kernel thread fails to call try_to_freeze() after the freezer has
-set TIF_FREEZE for it, the freezing of tasks will fail and the entire
+initiated a freezing operation, the freezing of tasks will fail and the entire
 hibernation operation will be cancelled.  For this reason, freezable kernel
 threads must call try_to_freeze() somewhere or use one of the
 wait_event_freezable() and wait_event_freezable_timeout() macros.
@@ -222,3 +223,8 @@ since they ask the freezer to skip freezing this task, since it is anyway
 only after the entire suspend/hibernation sequence is complete.
 So, to summarize, use [un]lock_system_sleep() instead of directly using
 mutex_[un]lock(&pm_mutex). That would prevent freezing failures.
+
+V. Miscellaneous
+/sys/power/pm_freeze_timeout controls how long it will cost at most to freeze
+all user space processes or all freezable kernel threads, in unit of millisecond.
+The default value is 20000, with range of unsigned integer.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/interface.txt b/Documentation/power/interface.txt
index c537834af005..f1f0f59a7c47 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/interface.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/interface.txt
@@ -7,8 +7,8 @@ running. The interface exists in /sys/power/ directory (assuming sysfs
 is mounted at /sys). 
 
 /sys/power/state controls system power state. Reading from this file
-returns what states are supported, which is hard-coded to 'standby'
-(Power-On Suspend), 'mem' (Suspend-to-RAM), and 'disk'
+returns what states are supported, which is hard-coded to 'freeze',
+'standby' (Power-On Suspend), 'mem' (Suspend-to-RAM), and 'disk'
 (Suspend-to-Disk). 
 
 Writing to this file one of those strings causes the system to
diff --git a/Documentation/power/notifiers.txt b/Documentation/power/notifiers.txt
index c2a4a346c0d9..a81fa254303d 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/notifiers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/notifiers.txt
@@ -15,8 +15,10 @@ A suspend/hibernation notifier may be used for this purpose.
 The subsystems or drivers having such needs can register suspend notifiers that
 will be called upon the following events by the PM core:
 
-PM_HIBERNATION_PREPARE	The system is going to hibernate or suspend, tasks will
-			be frozen immediately.
+PM_HIBERNATION_PREPARE	The system is going to hibernate, tasks will be frozen
+			immediately. This is different from PM_SUSPEND_PREPARE
+			below because here we do additional work between notifiers
+			and drivers freezing.
 
 PM_POST_HIBERNATION	The system memory state has been restored from a
 			hibernation image or an error occurred during
diff --git a/Documentation/power/opp.txt b/Documentation/power/opp.txt
index 3035d00757ad..425c51d56aef 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/opp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/opp.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,5 @@
-*=============*
-* OPP Library *
-*=============*
+Operating Performance Points (OPP) Library
+==========================================
 
 (C) 2009-2010 Nishanth Menon <nm@ti.com>, Texas Instruments Incorporated
 
@@ -16,15 +15,31 @@ Contents
 
 1. Introduction
 ===============
+1.1 What is an Operating Performance Point (OPP)?
+
 Complex SoCs of today consists of a multiple sub-modules working in conjunction.
 In an operational system executing varied use cases, not all modules in the SoC
 need to function at their highest performing frequency all the time. To
 facilitate this, sub-modules in a SoC are grouped into domains, allowing some
-domains to run at lower voltage and frequency while other domains are loaded
-more. The set of discrete tuples consisting of frequency and voltage pairs that
+domains to run at lower voltage and frequency while other domains run at
+voltage/frequency pairs that are higher.
+
+The set of discrete tuples consisting of frequency and voltage pairs that
 the device will support per domain are called Operating Performance Points or
 OPPs.
 
+As an example:
+Let us consider an MPU device which supports the following:
+{300MHz at minimum voltage of 1V}, {800MHz at minimum voltage of 1.2V},
+{1GHz at minimum voltage of 1.3V}
+
+We can represent these as three OPPs as the following {Hz, uV} tuples:
+{300000000, 1000000}
+{800000000, 1200000}
+{1000000000, 1300000}
+
+1.2 Operating Performance Points Library
+
 OPP library provides a set of helper functions to organize and query the OPP
 information. The library is located in drivers/base/power/opp.c and the header
 is located in include/linux/opp.h. OPP library can be enabled by enabling
diff --git a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt
index 17e130a80347..483632087788 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ one of the parameters.
 Two different PM QoS frameworks are available:
 1. PM QoS classes for cpu_dma_latency, network_latency, network_throughput.
 2. the per-device PM QoS framework provides the API to manage the per-device latency
-constraints.
+constraints and PM QoS flags.
 
 Each parameters have defined units:
  * latency: usec
@@ -86,20 +86,24 @@ To remove the user mode request for a target value simply close the device
 node.
 
 
-2. PM QoS per-device latency framework
+2. PM QoS per-device latency and flags framework
+
+For each device, there are two lists of PM QoS requests. One is maintained
+along with the aggregated target of latency value and the other is for PM QoS
+flags. Values are updated in response to changes of the request list.
+
+Target latency value is simply the minimum of the request values held in the
+parameter list elements.  The PM QoS flags aggregate value is a gather (bitwise
+OR) of all list elements' values. Two device PM QoS flags are defined currently:
+PM_QOS_FLAG_NO_POWER_OFF and PM_QOS_FLAG_REMOTE_WAKEUP.
 
-For each device a list of performance requests is maintained along with
-an aggregated target value.  The aggregated target value is updated with
-changes to the request list or elements of the list.  Typically the
-aggregated target value is simply the max or min of the request values held
-in the parameter list elements.
 Note: the aggregated target value is implemented as an atomic variable so that
 reading the aggregated value does not require any locking mechanism.
 
 
 From kernel mode the use of this interface is the following:
 
-int dev_pm_qos_add_request(device, handle, value):
+int dev_pm_qos_add_request(device, handle, type, value):
 Will insert an element into the list for that identified device with the
 target value.  Upon change to this list the new target is recomputed and any
 registered notifiers are called only if the target value is now different.
@@ -119,6 +123,38 @@ the request.
 s32 dev_pm_qos_read_value(device):
 Returns the aggregated value for a given device's constraints list.
 
+enum pm_qos_flags_status dev_pm_qos_flags(device, mask)
+Check PM QoS flags of the given device against the given mask of flags.
+The meaning of the return values is as follows:
+	PM_QOS_FLAGS_ALL: All flags from the mask are set
+	PM_QOS_FLAGS_SOME: Some flags from the mask are set
+	PM_QOS_FLAGS_NONE: No flags from the mask are set
+	PM_QOS_FLAGS_UNDEFINED: The device's PM QoS structure has not been
+			initialized or the list of requests is empty.
+
+int dev_pm_qos_add_ancestor_request(dev, handle, value)
+Add a PM QoS request for the first direct ancestor of the given device whose
+power.ignore_children flag is unset.
+
+int dev_pm_qos_expose_latency_limit(device, value)
+Add a request to the device's PM QoS list of latency constraints and create
+a sysfs attribute pm_qos_resume_latency_us under the device's power directory
+allowing user space to manipulate that request.
+
+void dev_pm_qos_hide_latency_limit(device)
+Drop the request added by dev_pm_qos_expose_latency_limit() from the device's
+PM QoS list of latency constraints and remove sysfs attribute pm_qos_resume_latency_us
+from the device's power directory.
+
+int dev_pm_qos_expose_flags(device, value)
+Add a request to the device's PM QoS list of flags and create sysfs attributes
+pm_qos_no_power_off and pm_qos_remote_wakeup under the device's power directory
+allowing user space to change these flags' value.
+
+void dev_pm_qos_hide_flags(device)
+Drop the request added by dev_pm_qos_expose_flags() from the device's PM QoS list
+of flags and remove sysfs attributes pm_qos_no_power_off and pm_qos_remote_wakeup
+under the device's power directory.
 
 Notification mechanisms:
 The per-device PM QoS framework has 2 different and distinct notification trees:
diff --git a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt
index 9f16c5178b66..3f10b39b0346 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt
@@ -81,9 +81,14 @@ This defines trickle and fast charges.  For batteries that
 are already charged or discharging, 'n/a' can be displayed (or
 'unknown', if the status is not known).
 
+AUTHENTIC - indicates the power supply (battery or charger) connected
+to the platform is authentic(1) or non authentic(0).
+
 HEALTH - represents health of the battery, values corresponds to
 POWER_SUPPLY_HEALTH_*, defined in battery.h.
 
+VOLTAGE_OCV - open circuit voltage of the battery.
+
 VOLTAGE_MAX_DESIGN, VOLTAGE_MIN_DESIGN - design values for maximal and
 minimal power supply voltages. Maximal/minimal means values of voltages
 when battery considered "full"/"empty" at normal conditions. Yes, there is
@@ -110,14 +115,31 @@ CHARGE_COUNTER - the current charge counter (in µAh).  This could easily
 be negative; there is no empty or full value.  It is only useful for
 relative, time-based measurements.
 
+CONSTANT_CHARGE_CURRENT - constant charge current programmed by charger.
+CONSTANT_CHARGE_CURRENT_MAX - maximum charge current supported by the
+power supply object.
+
+CONSTANT_CHARGE_VOLTAGE - constant charge voltage programmed by charger.
+CONSTANT_CHARGE_VOLTAGE_MAX - maximum charge voltage supported by the
+power supply object.
+
+CHARGE_CONTROL_LIMIT - current charge control limit setting
+CHARGE_CONTROL_LIMIT_MAX - maximum charge control limit setting
+
 ENERGY_FULL, ENERGY_EMPTY - same as above but for energy.
 
 CAPACITY - capacity in percents.
+CAPACITY_ALERT_MIN - minimum capacity alert value in percents.
+CAPACITY_ALERT_MAX - maximum capacity alert value in percents.
 CAPACITY_LEVEL - capacity level. This corresponds to
 POWER_SUPPLY_CAPACITY_LEVEL_*.
 
 TEMP - temperature of the power supply.
+TEMP_ALERT_MIN - minimum battery temperature alert value in milli centigrade.
+TEMP_ALERT_MAX - maximum battery temperature alert value in milli centigrade.
 TEMP_AMBIENT - ambient temperature.
+TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MIN - minimum ambient temperature alert value in milli centigrade.
+TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MAX - maximum ambient temperature alert value in milli centigrade.
 
 TIME_TO_EMPTY - seconds left for battery to be considered empty (i.e.
 while battery powers a load)
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
index e272d9909e39..13902778ae44 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
@@ -11,8 +11,7 @@ Registration
 Drivers can register a regulator by calling :-
 
 struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc,
-	struct device *dev, struct regulator_init_data *init_data,
-	void *driver_data, struct device_node *of_node);
+					 const struct regulator_config *config);
 
 This will register the regulators capabilities and operations to the regulator
 core.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
index 4abe83e1045a..71d8fe4e75d3 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
@@ -144,8 +144,12 @@ The action performed by the idle callback is totally dependent on the subsystem
 (or driver) in question, but the expected and recommended action is to check
 if the device can be suspended (i.e. if all of the conditions necessary for
 suspending the device are satisfied) and to queue up a suspend request for the
-device in that case.  The value returned by this callback is ignored by the PM
-core.
+device in that case.  If there is no idle callback, or if the callback returns
+0, then the PM core will attempt to carry out a runtime suspend of the device;
+in essence, it will call pm_runtime_suspend() directly.  To prevent this (for
+example, if the callback routine has started a delayed suspend), the routine
+should return a non-zero value.  Negative error return codes are ignored by the
+PM core.
 
 The helper functions provided by the PM core, described in Section 4, guarantee
 that the following constraints are met with respect to runtime PM callbacks for
@@ -301,9 +305,10 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
       removing the device from device hierarchy
 
   int pm_runtime_idle(struct device *dev);
-    - execute the subsystem-level idle callback for the device; returns 0 on
-      success or error code on failure, where -EINPROGRESS means that
-      ->runtime_idle() is already being executed
+    - execute the subsystem-level idle callback for the device; returns an
+      error code on failure, where -EINPROGRESS means that ->runtime_idle() is
+      already being executed; if there is no callback or the callback returns 0
+      then run pm_runtime_suspend(dev) and return its result
 
   int pm_runtime_suspend(struct device *dev);
     - execute the subsystem-level suspend callback for the device; returns 0 on
@@ -426,6 +431,10 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
       'power.runtime_error' is set or 'power.disable_depth' is greater than
       zero)
 
+  bool pm_runtime_active(struct device *dev);
+    - return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'active' or its
+      'power.disable_depth' field is not equal to zero, or false otherwise
+
   bool pm_runtime_suspended(struct device *dev);
     - return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'suspended' and its
       'power.disable_depth' field is equal to zero, or false otherwise
@@ -642,12 +651,13 @@ out the following operations:
   * During system suspend it calls pm_runtime_get_noresume() and
     pm_runtime_barrier() for every device right before executing the
     subsystem-level .suspend() callback for it.  In addition to that it calls
-    pm_runtime_disable() for every device right after executing the
-    subsystem-level .suspend() callback for it.
+    __pm_runtime_disable() with 'false' as the second argument for every device
+    right before executing the subsystem-level .suspend_late() callback for it.
 
   * During system resume it calls pm_runtime_enable() and pm_runtime_put_sync()
-    for every device right before and right after executing the subsystem-level
-    .resume() callback for it, respectively.
+    for every device right after executing the subsystem-level .resume_early()
+    callback and right after executing the subsystem-level .resume() callback
+    for it, respectively.
 
 7. Generic subsystem callbacks
 
@@ -655,11 +665,6 @@ Subsystems may wish to conserve code space by using the set of generic power
 management callbacks provided by the PM core, defined in
 driver/base/power/generic_ops.c:
 
-  int pm_generic_runtime_idle(struct device *dev);
-    - invoke the ->runtime_idle() callback provided by the driver of this
-      device, if defined, and call pm_runtime_suspend() for this device if the
-      return value is 0 or the callback is not defined
-
   int pm_generic_runtime_suspend(struct device *dev);
     - invoke the ->runtime_suspend() callback provided by the driver of this
       device and return its result, or return -EINVAL if not defined
diff --git a/Documentation/power/states.txt b/Documentation/power/states.txt
index 4416b28630df..442d43df9b25 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/states.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/states.txt
@@ -2,12 +2,26 @@
 System Power Management States
 
 
-The kernel supports three power management states generically, though
-each is dependent on platform support code to implement the low-level
-details for each state. This file describes each state, what they are
+The kernel supports four power management states generically, though
+one is generic and the other three are dependent on platform support
+code to implement the low-level details for each state.
+This file describes each state, what they are
 commonly called, what ACPI state they map to, and what string to write
 to /sys/power/state to enter that state
 
+state:		Freeze / Low-Power Idle
+ACPI state:	S0
+String:		"freeze"
+
+This state is a generic, pure software, light-weight, low-power state.
+It allows more energy to be saved relative to idle by freezing user
+space and putting all I/O devices into low-power states (possibly
+lower-power than available at run time), such that the processors can
+spend more time in their idle states.
+This state can be used for platforms without Standby/Suspend-to-RAM
+support, or it can be used in addition to Suspend-to-RAM (memory sleep)
+to provide reduced resume latency.
+
 
 State:		Standby / Power-On Suspend
 ACPI State:	S1
@@ -22,9 +36,6 @@ We try to put devices in a low-power state equivalent to D1, which
 also offers low power savings, but low resume latency. Not all devices
 support D1, and those that don't are left on. 
 
-A transition from Standby to the On state should take about 1-2
-seconds. 
-
 
 State:		Suspend-to-RAM
 ACPI State:	S3
@@ -42,9 +53,6 @@ transition back to the On state.
 For at least ACPI, STR requires some minimal boot-strapping code to
 resume the system from STR. This may be true on other platforms. 
 
-A transition from Suspend-to-RAM to the On state should take about
-3-5 seconds. 
-
 
 State:		Suspend-to-disk
 ACPI State:	S4
@@ -74,7 +82,3 @@ low-power state (like ACPI S4), or it may simply power down. Powering
 down offers greater savings, and allows this mechanism to work on any
 system. However, entering a real low-power state allows the user to
 trigger wake up events (e.g. pressing a key or opening a laptop lid).
-
-A transition from Suspend-to-Disk to the On state should take about 30
-seconds, though it's typically a bit more with the current
-implementation. 
diff --git a/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt
index f28f9a6f0347..e13dafc8e8f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ More details follow:
 
                                   Write 'mem' to
                                 /sys/power/state
-                                    syfs file
+                                    sysfs file
                                         |
                                         v
                                Acquire pm_mutex lock
diff --git a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt
index ac190cf1963e..079160e22bcc 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt
@@ -33,6 +33,11 @@ echo shutdown > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state
 
 echo platform > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state
 
+. If you would like to write hibernation image to swap and then suspend
+to RAM (provided your platform supports it), you can try
+
+echo suspend > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state
+
 . If you have SATA disks, you'll need recent kernels with SATA suspend
 support. For suspend and resume to work, make sure your disk drivers
 are built into kernel -- not modules. [There's way to make
@@ -45,10 +50,23 @@ echo N > /sys/power/image_size
 
 before suspend (it is limited to 500 MB by default).
 
+. The resume process checks for the presence of the resume device,
+if found, it then checks the contents for the hibernation image signature.
+If both are found, it resumes the hibernation image.
+
+. The resume process may be triggered in two ways:
+  1) During lateinit:  If resume=/dev/your_swap_partition is specified on
+     the kernel command line, lateinit runs the resume process.  If the
+     resume device has not been probed yet, the resume process fails and
+     bootup continues.
+  2) Manually from an initrd or initramfs:  May be run from
+     the init script by using the /sys/power/resume file.  It is vital
+     that this be done prior to remounting any filesystems (even as
+     read-only) otherwise data may be corrupted.
 
 Article about goals and implementation of Software Suspend for Linux
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Author: Gábor Kuti
+Author: Gábor Kuti
 Last revised: 2003-10-20 by Pavel Machek
 
 Idea and goals to achieve
@@ -321,7 +339,7 @@ Q: How can distributions ship a swsusp-supporting kernel with modular
 disk drivers (especially SATA)?
 
 A: Well, it can be done, load the drivers, then do echo into
-/sys/power/disk/resume file from initrd. Be sure not to mount
+/sys/power/resume file from initrd. Be sure not to mount
 anything, not even read-only mount, or you are going to lose your
 data.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/power/video_extension.txt b/Documentation/power/video_extension.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index b2f9b1598ac2..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/power/video_extension.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-ACPI video extensions
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This driver implement the ACPI Extensions For Display Adapters for
-integrated graphics devices on motherboard, as specified in ACPI 2.0
-Specification, Appendix B, allowing to perform some basic control like
-defining the video POST device, retrieving EDID information or to
-setup a video output, etc.  Note that this is an ref. implementation
-only.  It may or may not work for your integrated video device.
-
-Interfaces exposed to userland through /proc/acpi/video:
-
-VGA/info : display the supported video bus device capability like Video ROM, CRT/LCD/TV.
-VGA/ROM :  Used to get a copy of the display devices' ROM data (up to 4k).
-VGA/POST_info : Used to determine what options are implemented.
-VGA/POST : Used to get/set POST device.
-VGA/DOS : Used to get/set ownership of output switching:
-	Please refer ACPI spec B.4.1 _DOS
-VGA/CRT : CRT output
-VGA/LCD : LCD output
-VGA/TVO : TV output
-VGA/*/brightness : Used to get/set brightness of output device
-
-Notify event through /proc/acpi/event:
-
-#define ACPI_VIDEO_NOTIFY_SWITCH        0x80
-#define ACPI_VIDEO_NOTIFY_PROBE         0x81
-#define ACPI_VIDEO_NOTIFY_CYCLE         0x82
-#define ACPI_VIDEO_NOTIFY_NEXT_OUTPUT   0x83
-#define ACPI_VIDEO_NOTIFY_PREV_OUTPUT   0x84
-
-#define ACPI_VIDEO_NOTIFY_CYCLE_BRIGHTNESS      0x82
-#define ACPI_VIDEO_NOTIFY_INC_BRIGHTNESS        0x83
-#define ACPI_VIDEO_NOTIFY_DEC_BRIGHTNESS        0x84
-#define ACPI_VIDEO_NOTIFY_ZERO_BRIGHTNESS       0x85
-#define ACPI_VIDEO_NOTIFY_DISPLAY_OFF           0x86
-
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
index 5620fb5ac425..6db73df04278 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
@@ -5,19 +5,28 @@ please mail me.
 
 00-INDEX
 	- this file
+bootwrapper.txt
+	- Information on how the powerpc kernel is wrapped for boot on various
+	  different platforms.
 cpu_features.txt
 	- info on how we support a variety of CPUs with minimal compile-time
 	options.
 eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
 	- info on PCI Bus EEH Error Recovery
+firmware-assisted-dump.txt
+	- Documentation on the firmware assisted dump mechanism "fadump".
 hvcs.txt
 	- IBM "Hypervisor Virtual Console Server" Installation Guide
+kvm_440.txt
+	- Various notes on the implementation of KVM for PowerPC 440.
 mpc52xx.txt
 	- Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family
-sound.txt
-	- info on sound support under Linux/PPC
-zImage_layout.txt
-	- info on the kernel images for Linux/PPC
+pmu-ebb.txt
+	- Description of the API for using the PMU with Event Based Branches.
 qe_firmware.txt
 	- describes the layout of firmware binaries for the Freescale QUICC
 	  Engine and the code that parses and uploads the microcode therein.
+ptrace.txt
+	- Information on the ptrace interfaces for hardware debug registers.
+transactional_memory.txt
+	- Overview of the Power8 transactional memory support.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt
index ffa4183fdb8b..ae09df8722c8 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt
@@ -11,10 +11,10 @@ split instruction and data caches, and if the CPU supports the DOZE and NAP
 sleep modes.
 
 Detection of the feature set is simple. A list of processors can be found in
-arch/ppc/kernel/cputable.c. The PVR register is masked and compared with each
-value in the list. If a match is found, the cpu_features of cur_cpu_spec is
-assigned to the feature bitmask for this processor and a __setup_cpu function
-is called.
+arch/powerpc/kernel/cputable.c. The PVR register is masked and compared with
+each value in the list. If a match is found, the cpu_features of cur_cpu_spec
+is assigned to the feature bitmask for this processor and a __setup_cpu
+function is called.
 
 C code may test 'cur_cpu_spec[smp_processor_id()]->cpu_features' for a
 particular feature bit. This is done in quite a few places, for example
@@ -51,6 +51,6 @@ should be used in the majority of cases.
 
 The END_FTR_SECTION macros are implemented by storing information about this
 code in the '__ftr_fixup' ELF section. When do_cpu_ftr_fixups
-(arch/ppc/kernel/misc.S) is invoked, it will iterate over the records in
+(arch/powerpc/kernel/misc.S) is invoked, it will iterate over the records in
 __ftr_fixup, and if the required feature is not present it will loop writing
 nop's from each BEGIN_FTR_SECTION to END_FTR_SECTION.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..73cd163dbfb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@
+PMU Event Based Branches
+========================
+
+Event Based Branches (EBBs) are a feature which allows the hardware to
+branch directly to a specified user space address when certain events occur.
+
+The full specification is available in Power ISA v2.07:
+
+  https://www.power.org/documentation/power-isa-version-2-07/
+
+One type of event for which EBBs can be configured is PMU exceptions. This
+document describes the API for configuring the Power PMU to generate EBBs,
+using the Linux perf_events API.
+
+
+Terminology
+-----------
+
+Throughout this document we will refer to an "EBB event" or "EBB events". This
+just refers to a struct perf_event which has set the "EBB" flag in its
+attr.config. All events which can be configured on the hardware PMU are
+possible "EBB events".
+
+
+Background
+----------
+
+When a PMU EBB occurs it is delivered to the currently running process. As such
+EBBs can only sensibly be used by programs for self-monitoring.
+
+It is a feature of the perf_events API that events can be created on other
+processes, subject to standard permission checks. This is also true of EBB
+events, however unless the target process enables EBBs (via mtspr(BESCR)) no
+EBBs will ever be delivered.
+
+This makes it possible for a process to enable EBBs for itself, but not
+actually configure any events. At a later time another process can come along
+and attach an EBB event to the process, which will then cause EBBs to be
+delivered to the first process. It's not clear if this is actually useful.
+
+
+When the PMU is configured for EBBs, all PMU interrupts are delivered to the
+user process. This means once an EBB event is scheduled on the PMU, no non-EBB
+events can be configured. This means that EBB events can not be run
+concurrently with regular 'perf' commands, or any other perf events.
+
+It is however safe to run 'perf' commands on a process which is using EBBs. The
+kernel will in general schedule the EBB event, and perf will be notified that
+its events could not run.
+
+The exclusion between EBB events and regular events is implemented using the
+existing "pinned" and "exclusive" attributes of perf_events. This means EBB
+events will be given priority over other events, unless they are also pinned.
+If an EBB event and a regular event are both pinned, then whichever is enabled
+first will be scheduled and the other will be put in error state. See the
+section below titled "Enabling an EBB event" for more information.
+
+
+Creating an EBB event
+---------------------
+
+To request that an event is counted using EBB, the event code should have bit
+63 set.
+
+EBB events must be created with a particular, and restrictive, set of
+attributes - this is so that they interoperate correctly with the rest of the
+perf_events subsystem.
+
+An EBB event must be created with the "pinned" and "exclusive" attributes set.
+Note that if you are creating a group of EBB events, only the leader can have
+these attributes set.
+
+An EBB event must NOT set any of the "inherit", "sample_period", "freq" or
+"enable_on_exec" attributes.
+
+An EBB event must be attached to a task. This is specified to perf_event_open()
+by passing a pid value, typically 0 indicating the current task.
+
+All events in a group must agree on whether they want EBB. That is all events
+must request EBB, or none may request EBB.
+
+EBB events must specify the PMC they are to be counted on. This ensures
+userspace is able to reliably determine which PMC the event is scheduled on.
+
+
+Enabling an EBB event
+---------------------
+
+Once an EBB event has been successfully opened, it must be enabled with the
+perf_events API. This can be achieved either via the ioctl() interface, or the
+prctl() interface.
+
+However, due to the design of the perf_events API, enabling an event does not
+guarantee that it has been scheduled on the PMU. To ensure that the EBB event
+has been scheduled on the PMU, you must perform a read() on the event. If the
+read() returns EOF, then the event has not been scheduled and EBBs are not
+enabled.
+
+This behaviour occurs because the EBB event is pinned and exclusive. When the
+EBB event is enabled it will force all other non-pinned events off the PMU. In
+this case the enable will be successful. However if there is already an event
+pinned on the PMU then the enable will not be successful.
+
+
+Reading an EBB event
+--------------------
+
+It is possible to read() from an EBB event. However the results are
+meaningless. Because interrupts are being delivered to the user process the
+kernel is not able to count the event, and so will return a junk value.
+
+
+Closing an EBB event
+--------------------
+
+When an EBB event is finished with, you can close it using close() as for any
+regular event. If this is the last EBB event the PMU will be deconfigured and
+no further PMU EBBs will be delivered.
+
+
+EBB Handler
+-----------
+
+The EBB handler is just regular userspace code, however it must be written in
+the style of an interrupt handler. When the handler is entered all registers
+are live (possibly) and so must be saved somehow before the handler can invoke
+other code.
+
+It's up to the program how to handle this. For C programs a relatively simple
+option is to create an interrupt frame on the stack and save registers there.
+
+Fork
+----
+
+EBB events are not inherited across fork. If the child process wishes to use
+EBBs it should open a new event for itself. Similarly the EBB state in
+BESCR/EBBHR/EBBRR is cleared across fork().
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt
index f4a5499b7bc6..99c5ce88d0fe 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt
@@ -40,6 +40,7 @@ features will have bits indicating whether there is support for:
 #define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_INSN_BP_MASK		0x2
 #define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_RANGE		0x4
 #define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_MASK		0x8
+#define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_DAWR		0x10
 
 2. PTRACE_SETHWDEBUG
 
@@ -127,6 +128,22 @@ Some examples of using the structure to:
   p.addr2           = (uint64_t) end_range;
   p.condition_value = 0;
 
+- set a watchpoint in server processors (BookS)
+
+  p.version         = 1;
+  p.trigger_type    = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_RW;
+  p.addr_mode       = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE;
+  or
+  p.addr_mode       = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
+
+  p.condition_mode  = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
+  p.addr            = (uint64_t) begin_range;
+  /* For PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE addr2 needs to be specified, where
+   * addr2 - addr <= 8 Bytes.
+   */
+  p.addr2           = (uint64_t) end_range;
+  p.condition_value = 0;
+
 3. PTRACE_DELHWDEBUG
 
 Takes an integer which identifies an existing breakpoint or watchpoint
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/sound.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/sound.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index df23d95e03a0..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/sound.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-            Information about PowerPC Sound support
-=====================================================================
-
-Please mail me (Cort Dougan, cort@fsmlabs.com) if you have questions,
-comments or corrections.
-
-Last Change: 6.16.99
-
-This just covers sound on the PReP and CHRP systems for now and later
-will contain information on the PowerMac's.
-
-Sound on PReP has been tested and is working with the PowerStack and IBM
-Power Series onboard sound systems which are based on the cs4231(2) chip.
-The sound options when doing the make config are a bit different from
-the default, though.
-
-The I/O base, irq and dma lines that you enter during the make config
-are ignored and are set when booting according to the machine type.
-This is so that one binary can be used for Motorola and IBM machines
-which use different values and isn't allowed by the driver, so things
-are hacked together in such a way as to allow this information to be
-set automatically on boot.
-
-1. Motorola PowerStack PReP machines
-
-  Enable support for "Crystal CS4232 based (PnP) cards" and for the
-  Microsoft Sound System.  The MSS isn't used, but some of the routines
-  that the CS4232 driver uses are in it.
-
-  Although the options you set are ignored and determined automatically
-  on boot these are included for information only:
-
-  (830) CS4232 audio I/O base 530, 604, E80 or F40
-  (10) CS4232 audio IRQ 5, 7, 9, 11, 12 or 15
-  (6) CS4232 audio DMA 0, 1 or 3
-  (7) CS4232 second (duplex) DMA 0, 1 or 3
-
-  This will allow simultaneous record and playback, as 2 different dma
-  channels are used.
-
-  The sound will be all left channel and very low volume since the
-  auxiliary input isn't muted by default.  I had the changes necessary
-  for this in the kernel but the sound driver maintainer didn't want
-  to include them since it wasn't common in other machines.  To fix this
-  you need to mute it using a mixer utility of some sort (if you find one
-  please let me know) or by patching the driver yourself and recompiling.
-
-  There is a problem on the PowerStack 2's (PowerStack Pro's) using a
-  different irq/drq than the kernel expects.  Unfortunately, I don't know
-  which irq/drq it is so if anyone knows please email me.
-
-  Midi is not supported since the cs4232 driver doesn't support midi yet.
-
-2. IBM PowerPersonal PReP machines
-
-  I've only tested sound on the Power Personal Series of IBM workstations
-  so if you try it on others please let me know the result.  I'm especially
-  interested in the 43p's sound system, which I know nothing about.
-
-  Enable support for "Crystal CS4232 based (PnP) cards" and for the
-  Microsoft Sound System.  The MSS isn't used, but some of the routines
-  that the CS4232 driver uses are in it.
-
-  Although the options you set are ignored and determined automatically
-  on boot these are included for information only:
-
-  (530) CS4232 audio I/O base 530, 604, E80 or F40
-  (5) CS4232 audio IRQ 5, 7, 9, 11, 12 or 15
-  (1) CS4232 audio DMA 0, 1 or 3
-  (7) CS4232 second (duplex) DMA 0, 1 or 3
-  (330) CS4232 MIDI I/O base 330, 370, 3B0 or 3F0
-  (9) CS4232 MIDI IRQ 5, 7, 9, 11, 12 or 15
-
-  This setup does _NOT_ allow for recording yet.
-
-  Midi is not supported since the cs4232 driver doesn't support midi yet.
-
-2. IBM CHRP
-
-  I have only tested this on the 43P-150.  Build the kernel with the cs4232
-  set as a module and load the module with irq=9 dma=1 dma2=2 io=0x550
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dc23e58ae264
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,198 @@
+Transactional Memory support
+============================
+
+POWER kernel support for this feature is currently limited to supporting
+its use by user programs.  It is not currently used by the kernel itself.
+
+This file aims to sum up how it is supported by Linux and what behaviour you
+can expect from your user programs.
+
+
+Basic overview
+==============
+
+Hardware Transactional Memory is supported on POWER8 processors, and is a
+feature that enables a different form of atomic memory access.  Several new
+instructions are presented to delimit transactions; transactions are
+guaranteed to either complete atomically or roll back and undo any partial
+changes.
+
+A simple transaction looks like this:
+
+begin_move_money:
+  tbegin
+  beq   abort_handler
+
+  ld    r4, SAVINGS_ACCT(r3)
+  ld    r5, CURRENT_ACCT(r3)
+  subi  r5, r5, 1
+  addi  r4, r4, 1
+  std   r4, SAVINGS_ACCT(r3)
+  std   r5, CURRENT_ACCT(r3)
+
+  tend
+
+  b     continue
+
+abort_handler:
+  ... test for odd failures ...
+
+  /* Retry the transaction if it failed because it conflicted with
+   * someone else: */
+  b     begin_move_money
+
+
+The 'tbegin' instruction denotes the start point, and 'tend' the end point.
+Between these points the processor is in 'Transactional' state; any memory
+references will complete in one go if there are no conflicts with other
+transactional or non-transactional accesses within the system.  In this
+example, the transaction completes as though it were normal straight-line code
+IF no other processor has touched SAVINGS_ACCT(r3) or CURRENT_ACCT(r3); an
+atomic move of money from the current account to the savings account has been
+performed.  Even though the normal ld/std instructions are used (note no
+lwarx/stwcx), either *both* SAVINGS_ACCT(r3) and CURRENT_ACCT(r3) will be
+updated, or neither will be updated.
+
+If, in the meantime, there is a conflict with the locations accessed by the
+transaction, the transaction will be aborted by the CPU.  Register and memory
+state will roll back to that at the 'tbegin', and control will continue from
+'tbegin+4'.  The branch to abort_handler will be taken this second time; the
+abort handler can check the cause of the failure, and retry.
+
+Checkpointed registers include all GPRs, FPRs, VRs/VSRs, LR, CCR/CR, CTR, FPCSR
+and a few other status/flag regs; see the ISA for details.
+
+Causes of transaction aborts
+============================
+
+- Conflicts with cache lines used by other processors
+- Signals
+- Context switches
+- See the ISA for full documentation of everything that will abort transactions.
+
+
+Syscalls
+========
+
+Performing syscalls from within transaction is not recommended, and can lead
+to unpredictable results.
+
+Syscalls do not by design abort transactions, but beware: The kernel code will
+not be running in transactional state.  The effect of syscalls will always
+remain visible, but depending on the call they may abort your transaction as a
+side-effect, read soon-to-be-aborted transactional data that should not remain
+invisible, etc.  If you constantly retry a transaction that constantly aborts
+itself by calling a syscall, you'll have a livelock & make no progress.
+
+Simple syscalls (e.g. sigprocmask()) "could" be OK.  Even things like write()
+from, say, printf() should be OK as long as the kernel does not access any
+memory that was accessed transactionally.
+
+Consider any syscalls that happen to work as debug-only -- not recommended for
+production use.  Best to queue them up till after the transaction is over.
+
+
+Signals
+=======
+
+Delivery of signals (both sync and async) during transactions provides a second
+thread state (ucontext/mcontext) to represent the second transactional register
+state.  Signal delivery 'treclaim's to capture both register states, so signals
+abort transactions.  The usual ucontext_t passed to the signal handler
+represents the checkpointed/original register state; the signal appears to have
+arisen at 'tbegin+4'.
+
+If the sighandler ucontext has uc_link set, a second ucontext has been
+delivered.  For future compatibility the MSR.TS field should be checked to
+determine the transactional state -- if so, the second ucontext in uc->uc_link
+represents the active transactional registers at the point of the signal.
+
+For 64-bit processes, uc->uc_mcontext.regs->msr is a full 64-bit MSR and its TS
+field shows the transactional mode.
+
+For 32-bit processes, the mcontext's MSR register is only 32 bits; the top 32
+bits are stored in the MSR of the second ucontext, i.e. in
+uc->uc_link->uc_mcontext.regs->msr.  The top word contains the transactional
+state TS.
+
+However, basic signal handlers don't need to be aware of transactions
+and simply returning from the handler will deal with things correctly:
+
+Transaction-aware signal handlers can read the transactional register state
+from the second ucontext.  This will be necessary for crash handlers to
+determine, for example, the address of the instruction causing the SIGSEGV.
+
+Example signal handler:
+
+    void crash_handler(int sig, siginfo_t *si, void *uc)
+    {
+      ucontext_t *ucp = uc;
+      ucontext_t *transactional_ucp = ucp->uc_link;
+
+      if (ucp_link) {
+        u64 msr = ucp->uc_mcontext.regs->msr;
+        /* May have transactional ucontext! */
+#ifndef __powerpc64__
+        msr |= ((u64)transactional_ucp->uc_mcontext.regs->msr) << 32;
+#endif
+        if (MSR_TM_ACTIVE(msr)) {
+           /* Yes, we crashed during a transaction.  Oops. */
+   fprintf(stderr, "Transaction to be restarted at 0x%llx, but "
+                           "crashy instruction was at 0x%llx\n",
+                           ucp->uc_mcontext.regs->nip,
+                           transactional_ucp->uc_mcontext.regs->nip);
+        }
+      }
+
+      fix_the_problem(ucp->dar);
+    }
+
+When in an active transaction that takes a signal, we need to be careful with
+the stack.  It's possible that the stack has moved back up after the tbegin.
+The obvious case here is when the tbegin is called inside a function that
+returns before a tend.  In this case, the stack is part of the checkpointed
+transactional memory state.  If we write over this non transactionally or in
+suspend, we are in trouble because if we get a tm abort, the program counter and
+stack pointer will be back at the tbegin but our in memory stack won't be valid
+anymore.
+
+To avoid this, when taking a signal in an active transaction, we need to use
+the stack pointer from the checkpointed state, rather than the speculated
+state.  This ensures that the signal context (written tm suspended) will be
+written below the stack required for the rollback.  The transaction is aborted
+becuase of the treclaim, so any memory written between the tbegin and the
+signal will be rolled back anyway.
+
+For signals taken in non-TM or suspended mode, we use the
+normal/non-checkpointed stack pointer.
+
+
+Failure cause codes used by kernel
+==================================
+
+These are defined in <asm/reg.h>, and distinguish different reasons why the
+kernel aborted a transaction:
+
+ TM_CAUSE_RESCHED       Thread was rescheduled.
+ TM_CAUSE_TLBI          Software TLB invalide.
+ TM_CAUSE_FAC_UNAV      FP/VEC/VSX unavailable trap.
+ TM_CAUSE_SYSCALL       Currently unused; future syscalls that must abort
+                        transactions for consistency will use this.
+ TM_CAUSE_SIGNAL        Signal delivered.
+ TM_CAUSE_MISC          Currently unused.
+ TM_CAUSE_ALIGNMENT     Alignment fault.
+ TM_CAUSE_EMULATE       Emulation that touched memory.
+
+These can be checked by the user program's abort handler as TEXASR[0:7].  If
+bit 7 is set, it indicates that the error is consider persistent.  For example
+a TM_CAUSE_ALIGNMENT will be persistent while a TM_CAUSE_RESCHED will not.q
+
+GDB
+===
+
+GDB and ptrace are not currently TM-aware.  If one stops during a transaction,
+it looks like the transaction has just started (the checkpointed state is
+presented).  The transaction cannot then be continued and will take the failure
+handler route.  Furthermore, the transactional 2nd register state will be
+inaccessible.  GDB can currently be used on programs using TM, but not sensibly
+in parts within transactions.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/zImage_layout.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/zImage_layout.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 048e0150f571..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/zImage_layout.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-          Information about the Linux/PPC kernel images
-=====================================================================
-
-Please mail me (Cort Dougan, cort@fsmlabs.com) if you have questions,
-comments or corrections.
-
-This document is meant to answer several questions I've had about how
-the PReP system boots and how Linux/PPC interacts with that mechanism.
-It would be nice if we could have information on how other architectures
-boot here as well.  If you have anything to contribute, please
-let me know.
-
-
-1. PReP boot file
-
-  This is the file necessary to boot PReP systems from floppy or
-  hard drive.  The firmware reads the PReP partition table entry
-  and will load the image accordingly.
-
-  To boot the zImage, copy it onto a floppy with dd if=zImage of=/dev/fd0h1440
-  or onto a PReP hard drive partition with dd if=zImage of=/dev/sda4
-  assuming you've created a PReP partition (type 0x41) with fdisk on
-  /dev/sda4.
-
-  The layout of the image format is:
-
-  0x0     +------------+
-          |            | PReP partition table entry
-          |            |
-  0x400   +------------+
-          |            | Bootstrap program code + data
-          |            |
-          |            |
-          +------------+
-          |            | compressed kernel, elf header removed
-          +------------+
-          |            | initrd (if loaded)
-          +------------+
-          |            | Elf section table for bootstrap program
-          +------------+
-
-
-2. MBX boot file
-
-  The MBX boards can load an elf image, and relocate it to the
-  proper location in memory - it copies the image to the location it was
-  linked at.
diff --git a/Documentation/prctl/no_new_privs.txt b/Documentation/prctl/no_new_privs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f7be84fba910
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/prctl/no_new_privs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+The execve system call can grant a newly-started program privileges that
+its parent did not have.  The most obvious examples are setuid/setgid
+programs and file capabilities.  To prevent the parent program from
+gaining these privileges as well, the kernel and user code must be
+careful to prevent the parent from doing anything that could subvert the
+child.  For example:
+
+ - The dynamic loader handles LD_* environment variables differently if
+   a program is setuid.
+
+ - chroot is disallowed to unprivileged processes, since it would allow
+   /etc/passwd to be replaced from the point of view of a process that
+   inherited chroot.
+
+ - The exec code has special handling for ptrace.
+
+These are all ad-hoc fixes.  The no_new_privs bit (since Linux 3.5) is a
+new, generic mechanism to make it safe for a process to modify its
+execution environment in a manner that persists across execve.  Any task
+can set no_new_privs.  Once the bit is set, it is inherited across fork,
+clone, and execve and cannot be unset.  With no_new_privs set, execve
+promises not to grant the privilege to do anything that could not have
+been done without the execve call.  For example, the setuid and setgid
+bits will no longer change the uid or gid; file capabilities will not
+add to the permitted set, and LSMs will not relax constraints after
+execve.
+
+To set no_new_privs, use prctl(PR_SET_NO_NEW_PRIVS, 1, 0, 0, 0).
+
+Be careful, though: LSMs might also not tighten constraints on exec
+in no_new_privs mode.  (This means that setting up a general-purpose
+service launcher to set no_new_privs before execing daemons may
+interfere with LSM-based sandboxing.)
+
+Note that no_new_privs does not prevent privilege changes that do not
+involve execve.  An appropriately privileged task can still call
+setuid(2) and receive SCM_RIGHTS datagrams.
+
+There are two main use cases for no_new_privs so far:
+
+ - Filters installed for the seccomp mode 2 sandbox persist across
+   execve and can change the behavior of newly-executed programs.
+   Unprivileged users are therefore only allowed to install such filters
+   if no_new_privs is set.
+
+ - By itself, no_new_privs can be used to reduce the attack surface
+   available to an unprivileged user.  If everything running with a
+   given uid has no_new_privs set, then that uid will be unable to
+   escalate its privileges by directly attacking setuid, setgid, and
+   fcap-using binaries; it will need to compromise something without the
+   no_new_privs bit set first.
+
+In the future, other potentially dangerous kernel features could become
+available to unprivileged tasks if no_new_privs is set.  In principle,
+several options to unshare(2) and clone(2) would be safe when
+no_new_privs is set, and no_new_privs + chroot is considerable less
+dangerous than chroot by itself.
diff --git a/Documentation/prctl/seccomp_filter.txt b/Documentation/prctl/seccomp_filter.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1e469ef75778
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/prctl/seccomp_filter.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+		SECure COMPuting with filters
+		=============================
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+A large number of system calls are exposed to every userland process
+with many of them going unused for the entire lifetime of the process.
+As system calls change and mature, bugs are found and eradicated.  A
+certain subset of userland applications benefit by having a reduced set
+of available system calls.  The resulting set reduces the total kernel
+surface exposed to the application.  System call filtering is meant for
+use with those applications.
+
+Seccomp filtering provides a means for a process to specify a filter for
+incoming system calls.  The filter is expressed as a Berkeley Packet
+Filter (BPF) program, as with socket filters, except that the data
+operated on is related to the system call being made: system call
+number and the system call arguments.  This allows for expressive
+filtering of system calls using a filter program language with a long
+history of being exposed to userland and a straightforward data set.
+
+Additionally, BPF makes it impossible for users of seccomp to fall prey
+to time-of-check-time-of-use (TOCTOU) attacks that are common in system
+call interposition frameworks.  BPF programs may not dereference
+pointers which constrains all filters to solely evaluating the system
+call arguments directly.
+
+What it isn't
+-------------
+
+System call filtering isn't a sandbox.  It provides a clearly defined
+mechanism for minimizing the exposed kernel surface.  It is meant to be
+a tool for sandbox developers to use.  Beyond that, policy for logical
+behavior and information flow should be managed with a combination of
+other system hardening techniques and, potentially, an LSM of your
+choosing.  Expressive, dynamic filters provide further options down this
+path (avoiding pathological sizes or selecting which of the multiplexed
+system calls in socketcall() is allowed, for instance) which could be
+construed, incorrectly, as a more complete sandboxing solution.
+
+Usage
+-----
+
+An additional seccomp mode is added and is enabled using the same
+prctl(2) call as the strict seccomp.  If the architecture has
+CONFIG_HAVE_ARCH_SECCOMP_FILTER, then filters may be added as below:
+
+PR_SET_SECCOMP:
+	Now takes an additional argument which specifies a new filter
+	using a BPF program.
+	The BPF program will be executed over struct seccomp_data
+	reflecting the system call number, arguments, and other
+	metadata.  The BPF program must then return one of the
+	acceptable values to inform the kernel which action should be
+	taken.
+
+	Usage:
+		prctl(PR_SET_SECCOMP, SECCOMP_MODE_FILTER, prog);
+
+	The 'prog' argument is a pointer to a struct sock_fprog which
+	will contain the filter program.  If the program is invalid, the
+	call will return -1 and set errno to EINVAL.
+
+	If fork/clone and execve are allowed by @prog, any child
+	processes will be constrained to the same filters and system
+	call ABI as the parent.
+
+	Prior to use, the task must call prctl(PR_SET_NO_NEW_PRIVS, 1) or
+	run with CAP_SYS_ADMIN privileges in its namespace.  If these are not
+	true, -EACCES will be returned.  This requirement ensures that filter
+	programs cannot be applied to child processes with greater privileges
+	than the task that installed them.
+
+	Additionally, if prctl(2) is allowed by the attached filter,
+	additional filters may be layered on which will increase evaluation
+	time, but allow for further decreasing the attack surface during
+	execution of a process.
+
+The above call returns 0 on success and non-zero on error.
+
+Return values
+-------------
+A seccomp filter may return any of the following values. If multiple
+filters exist, the return value for the evaluation of a given system
+call will always use the highest precedent value. (For example,
+SECCOMP_RET_KILL will always take precedence.)
+
+In precedence order, they are:
+
+SECCOMP_RET_KILL:
+	Results in the task exiting immediately without executing the
+	system call.  The exit status of the task (status & 0x7f) will
+	be SIGSYS, not SIGKILL.
+
+SECCOMP_RET_TRAP:
+	Results in the kernel sending a SIGSYS signal to the triggering
+	task without executing the system call.  siginfo->si_call_addr
+	will show the address of the system call instruction, and
+	siginfo->si_syscall and siginfo->si_arch will indicate which
+	syscall was attempted.  The program counter will be as though
+	the syscall happened (i.e. it will not point to the syscall
+	instruction).  The return value register will contain an arch-
+	dependent value -- if resuming execution, set it to something
+	sensible.  (The architecture dependency is because replacing
+	it with -ENOSYS could overwrite some useful information.)
+
+	The SECCOMP_RET_DATA portion of the return value will be passed
+	as si_errno.
+
+	SIGSYS triggered by seccomp will have a si_code of SYS_SECCOMP.
+
+SECCOMP_RET_ERRNO:
+	Results in the lower 16-bits of the return value being passed
+	to userland as the errno without executing the system call.
+
+SECCOMP_RET_TRACE:
+	When returned, this value will cause the kernel to attempt to
+	notify a ptrace()-based tracer prior to executing the system
+	call.  If there is no tracer present, -ENOSYS is returned to
+	userland and the system call is not executed.
+
+	A tracer will be notified if it requests PTRACE_O_TRACESECCOMP
+	using ptrace(PTRACE_SETOPTIONS).  The tracer will be notified
+	of a PTRACE_EVENT_SECCOMP and the SECCOMP_RET_DATA portion of
+	the BPF program return value will be available to the tracer
+	via PTRACE_GETEVENTMSG.
+
+	The tracer can skip the system call by changing the syscall number
+	to -1.  Alternatively, the tracer can change the system call
+	requested by changing the system call to a valid syscall number.  If
+	the tracer asks to skip the system call, then the system call will
+	appear to return the value that the tracer puts in the return value
+	register.
+
+	The seccomp check will not be run again after the tracer is
+	notified.  (This means that seccomp-based sandboxes MUST NOT
+	allow use of ptrace, even of other sandboxed processes, without
+	extreme care; ptracers can use this mechanism to escape.)
+
+SECCOMP_RET_ALLOW:
+	Results in the system call being executed.
+
+If multiple filters exist, the return value for the evaluation of a
+given system call will always use the highest precedent value.
+
+Precedence is only determined using the SECCOMP_RET_ACTION mask.  When
+multiple filters return values of the same precedence, only the
+SECCOMP_RET_DATA from the most recently installed filter will be
+returned.
+
+Pitfalls
+--------
+
+The biggest pitfall to avoid during use is filtering on system call
+number without checking the architecture value.  Why?  On any
+architecture that supports multiple system call invocation conventions,
+the system call numbers may vary based on the specific invocation.  If
+the numbers in the different calling conventions overlap, then checks in
+the filters may be abused.  Always check the arch value!
+
+Example
+-------
+
+The samples/seccomp/ directory contains both an x86-specific example
+and a more generic example of a higher level macro interface for BPF
+program generation.
+
+
+
+Adding architecture support
+-----------------------
+
+See arch/Kconfig for the authoritative requirements.  In general, if an
+architecture supports both ptrace_event and seccomp, it will be able to
+support seccomp filter with minor fixup: SIGSYS support and seccomp return
+value checking.  Then it must just add CONFIG_HAVE_ARCH_SECCOMP_FILTER
+to its arch-specific Kconfig.
+
+
+
+Caveats
+-------
+
+The vDSO can cause some system calls to run entirely in userspace,
+leading to surprises when you run programs on different machines that
+fall back to real syscalls.  To minimize these surprises on x86, make
+sure you test with
+/sys/devices/system/clocksource/clocksource0/current_clocksource set to
+something like acpi_pm.
+
+On x86-64, vsyscall emulation is enabled by default.  (vsyscalls are
+legacy variants on vDSO calls.)  Currently, emulated vsyscalls will honor seccomp, with a few oddities:
+
+- A return value of SECCOMP_RET_TRAP will set a si_call_addr pointing to
+  the vsyscall entry for the given call and not the address after the
+  'syscall' instruction.  Any code which wants to restart the call
+  should be aware that (a) a ret instruction has been emulated and (b)
+  trying to resume the syscall will again trigger the standard vsyscall
+  emulation security checks, making resuming the syscall mostly
+  pointless.
+
+- A return value of SECCOMP_RET_TRACE will signal the tracer as usual,
+  but the syscall may not be changed to another system call using the
+  orig_rax register. It may only be changed to -1 order to skip the
+  currently emulated call. Any other change MAY terminate the process.
+  The rip value seen by the tracer will be the syscall entry address;
+  this is different from normal behavior.  The tracer MUST NOT modify
+  rip or rsp.  (Do not rely on other changes terminating the process.
+  They might work.  For example, on some kernels, choosing a syscall
+  that only exists in future kernels will be correctly emulated (by
+  returning -ENOSYS).
+
+To detect this quirky behavior, check for addr & ~0x0C00 ==
+0xFFFFFFFFFF600000.  (For SECCOMP_RET_TRACE, use rip.  For
+SECCOMP_RET_TRAP, use siginfo->si_call_addr.)  Do not check any other
+condition: future kernels may improve vsyscall emulation and current
+kernels in vsyscall=native mode will behave differently, but the
+instructions at 0xF...F600{0,4,8,C}00 will not be system calls in these
+cases.
+
+Note that modern systems are unlikely to use vsyscalls at all -- they
+are a legacy feature and they are considerably slower than standard
+syscalls.  New code will use the vDSO, and vDSO-issued system calls
+are indistinguishable from normal system calls.
diff --git a/Documentation/printk-formats.txt b/Documentation/printk-formats.txt
index 5df176ed59b8..445ad743ec81 100644
--- a/Documentation/printk-formats.txt
+++ b/Documentation/printk-formats.txt
@@ -17,6 +17,8 @@ Symbols/Function Pointers:
 	%pF	versatile_init+0x0/0x110
 	%pf	versatile_init
 	%pS	versatile_init+0x0/0x110
+	%pSR	versatile_init+0x9/0x110
+		(with __builtin_extract_return_addr() translation)
 	%ps	versatile_init
 	%pB	prev_fn_of_versatile_init+0x88/0x88
 
@@ -53,11 +55,31 @@ Struct Resources:
 	For printing struct resources. The 'R' and 'r' specifiers result in a
 	printed resource with ('R') or without ('r') a decoded flags member.
 
+Physical addresses:
+
+	%pa	0x01234567 or 0x0123456789abcdef
+
+	For printing a phys_addr_t type (and its derivatives, such as
+	resource_size_t) which can vary based on build options, regardless of
+	the width of the CPU data path. Passed by reference.
+
+Raw buffer as a hex string:
+	%*ph	00 01 02  ...  3f
+	%*phC	00:01:02: ... :3f
+	%*phD	00-01-02- ... -3f
+	%*phN	000102 ... 3f
+
+	For printing a small buffers (up to 64 bytes long) as a hex string with
+	certain separator. For the larger buffers consider to use
+	print_hex_dump().
+
 MAC/FDDI addresses:
 
 	%pM	00:01:02:03:04:05
+	%pMR	05:04:03:02:01:00
 	%pMF	00-01-02-03-04-05
 	%pm	000102030405
+	%pmR	050403020100
 
 	For printing 6-byte MAC/FDDI addresses in hex notation. The 'M' and 'm'
 	specifiers result in a printed address with ('M') or without ('m') byte
@@ -67,11 +89,15 @@ MAC/FDDI addresses:
 	the 'M' specifier to use dash ('-') separators instead of the default
 	separator.
 
+	For Bluetooth addresses the 'R' specifier shall be used after the 'M'
+	specifier to use reversed byte order suitable for visual interpretation
+	of Bluetooth addresses which are in the little endian order.
+
 IPv4 addresses:
 
 	%pI4	1.2.3.4
 	%pi4	001.002.003.004
-	%p[Ii][hnbl]
+	%p[Ii]4[hnbl]
 
 	For printing IPv4 dot-separated decimal addresses. The 'I4' and 'i4'
 	specifiers result in a printed address with ('i4') or without ('I4')
@@ -95,6 +121,38 @@ IPv6 addresses:
 	print a compressed IPv6 address as described by
 	http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5952
 
+IPv4/IPv6 addresses (generic, with port, flowinfo, scope):
+
+	%pIS	1.2.3.4		or 0001:0002:0003:0004:0005:0006:0007:0008
+	%piS	001.002.003.004	or 00010002000300040005000600070008
+	%pISc	1.2.3.4		or 1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8
+	%pISpc	1.2.3.4:12345	or [1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8]:12345
+	%p[Ii]S[pfschnbl]
+
+	For printing an IP address without the need to distinguish whether it's
+	of type AF_INET or AF_INET6, a pointer to a valid 'struct sockaddr',
+	specified through 'IS' or 'iS', can be passed to this format specifier.
+
+	The additional 'p', 'f', and 's' specifiers are used to specify port
+	(IPv4, IPv6), flowinfo (IPv6) and scope (IPv6). Ports have a ':' prefix,
+	flowinfo a '/' and scope a '%', each followed by the actual value.
+
+	In case of an IPv6 address the compressed IPv6 address as described by
+	http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5952 is being used if the additional
+	specifier 'c' is given. The IPv6 address is surrounded by '[', ']' in
+	case of additional specifiers 'p', 'f' or 's' as suggested by
+	https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-6man-text-addr-representation-07
+
+	In case of IPv4 addresses, the additional 'h', 'n', 'b', and 'l'
+	specifiers can be used as well and are ignored in case of an IPv6
+	address.
+
+	Further examples:
+
+	%pISfc		1.2.3.4		or [1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8]/123456789
+	%pISsc		1.2.3.4		or [1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8]%1234567890
+	%pISpfc		1.2.3.4:12345	or [1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8]:12345/123456789
+
 UUID/GUID addresses:
 
 	%pUb	00010203-0405-0607-0809-0a0b0c0d0e0f
@@ -110,6 +168,15 @@ UUID/GUID addresses:
 	Where no additional specifiers are used the default little endian
 	order with lower case hex characters will be printed.
 
+dentry names:
+	%pd{,2,3,4}
+	%pD{,2,3,4}
+
+	For printing dentry name; if we race with d_move(), the name might be
+	a mix of old and new ones, but it won't oops.  %pd dentry is a safer
+	equivalent of %s dentry->d_name.name we used to use, %pd<n> prints
+	n last components.  %pD does the same thing for struct file.
+
 struct va_format:
 
 	%pV
@@ -127,16 +194,16 @@ struct va_format:
 
 u64 SHOULD be printed with %llu/%llx, (unsigned long long):
 
-	printk("%llu", (unsigned long long)u64_var);
+	printk("%llu", u64_var);
 
 s64 SHOULD be printed with %lld/%llx, (long long):
 
-	printk("%lld", (long long)s64_var);
+	printk("%lld", s64_var);
 
 If <type> is dependent on a config option for its size (e.g., sector_t,
-blkcnt_t, phys_addr_t, resource_size_t) or is architecture-dependent
-for its size (e.g., tcflag_t), use a format specifier of its largest
-possible type and explicitly cast to it.  Example:
+blkcnt_t) or is architecture-dependent for its size (e.g., tcflag_t), use a
+format specifier of its largest possible type and explicitly cast to it.
+Example:
 
 	printk("test: sector number/total blocks: %llu/%llu\n",
 		(unsigned long long)sector, (unsigned long long)blockcount);
@@ -146,5 +213,5 @@ Reminder: sizeof() result is of type size_t.
 Thank you for your cooperation and attention.
 
 
-By Randy Dunlap <rdunlap@xenotime.net> and
+By Randy Dunlap <rdunlap@infradead.org> and
 Andrew Murray <amurray@mpc-data.co.uk>
diff --git a/Documentation/prio_tree.txt b/Documentation/prio_tree.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 3aa68f9a117b..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/prio_tree.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
-The prio_tree.c code indexes vmas using 3 different indexes:
-	* heap_index  = vm_pgoff + vm_size_in_pages : end_vm_pgoff
-	* radix_index = vm_pgoff : start_vm_pgoff
-	* size_index = vm_size_in_pages
-
-A regular radix-priority-search-tree indexes vmas using only heap_index and
-radix_index. The conditions for indexing are:
-	* ->heap_index >= ->left->heap_index &&
-		->heap_index >= ->right->heap_index
-	* if (->heap_index == ->left->heap_index)
-		then ->radix_index < ->left->radix_index;
-	* if (->heap_index == ->right->heap_index)
-		then ->radix_index < ->right->radix_index;
-	* nodes are hashed to left or right subtree using radix_index
-	  similar to a pure binary radix tree.
-
-A regular radix-priority-search-tree helps to store and query
-intervals (vmas). However, a regular radix-priority-search-tree is only
-suitable for storing vmas with different radix indices (vm_pgoff).
-
-Therefore, the prio_tree.c extends the regular radix-priority-search-tree
-to handle many vmas with the same vm_pgoff. Such vmas are handled in
-2 different ways: 1) All vmas with the same radix _and_ heap indices are
-linked using vm_set.list, 2) if there are many vmas with the same radix
-index, but different heap indices and if the regular radix-priority-search
-tree cannot index them all, we build an overflow-sub-tree that indexes such
-vmas using heap and size indices instead of heap and radix indices. For
-example, in the figure below some vmas with vm_pgoff = 0 (zero) are
-indexed by regular radix-priority-search-tree whereas others are pushed
-into an overflow-subtree. Note that all vmas in an overflow-sub-tree have
-the same vm_pgoff (radix_index) and if necessary we build different
-overflow-sub-trees to handle each possible radix_index. For example,
-in figure we have 3 overflow-sub-trees corresponding to radix indices
-0, 2, and 4.
-
-In the final tree the first few (prio_tree_root->index_bits) levels
-are indexed using heap and radix indices whereas the overflow-sub-trees below
-those levels (i.e. levels prio_tree_root->index_bits + 1 and higher) are
-indexed using heap and size indices. In overflow-sub-trees the size_index
-is used for hashing the nodes to appropriate places.
-
-Now, an example prio_tree:
-
-  vmas are represented [radix_index, size_index, heap_index]
-                 i.e., [start_vm_pgoff, vm_size_in_pages, end_vm_pgoff]
-
-level  prio_tree_root->index_bits = 3
------
-												_
-  0			 				[0,7,7]					 |
-  							/     \					 |
-				      ------------------       ------------			 |     Regular
-  				     /					   \			 |  radix priority
-  1		 		[1,6,7]					  [4,3,7]		 |   search tree
-  				/     \					  /     \		 |
-			 -------       -----			    ------       -----		 |  heap-and-radix
-			/		    \			   /		      \		 |      indexed
-  2		    [0,6,6]	 	   [2,5,7]		[5,2,7]		    [6,1,7]	 |
-		    /     \		   /     \		/     \		    /     \	 |
-  3		[0,5,5]	[1,5,6]		[2,4,6]	[3,4,7]	    [4,2,6] [5,1,6]	[6,0,6]	[7,0,7]	 |
-		   /			   /		       /		   		_
-                  /		          /		      /					_
-  4	      [0,4,4]		      [2,3,5]		   [4,1,5]				 |
-  		 /			 /		      /					 |
-  5	     [0,3,3]		     [2,2,4]		  [4,0,4]				 |  Overflow-sub-trees
-  		/			/							 |
-  6	    [0,2,2]		    [2,1,3]							 |    heap-and-size
-  	       /		       /							 |       indexed
-  7	   [0,1,1]		   [2,0,2]							 |
-  	      /											 |
-  8	  [0,0,0]										 |
-  												_
-
-Note that we use prio_tree_root->index_bits to optimize the height
-of the heap-and-radix indexed tree. Since prio_tree_root->index_bits is
-set according to the maximum end_vm_pgoff mapped, we are sure that all
-bits (in vm_pgoff) above prio_tree_root->index_bits are 0 (zero). Therefore,
-we only use the first prio_tree_root->index_bits as radix_index.
-Whenever index_bits is increased in prio_tree_expand, we shuffle the tree
-to make sure that the first prio_tree_root->index_bits levels of the tree
-is indexed properly using heap and radix indices.
-
-We do not optimize the height of overflow-sub-trees using index_bits.
-The reason is: there can be many such overflow-sub-trees and all of
-them have to be suffled whenever the index_bits increases. This may involve
-walking the whole prio_tree in prio_tree_insert->prio_tree_expand code
-path which is not desirable. Hence, we do not optimize the height of the
-heap-and-size indexed overflow-sub-trees using prio_tree->index_bits.
-Instead the overflow sub-trees are indexed using full BITS_PER_LONG bits
-of size_index. This may lead to skewed sub-trees because most of the
-higher significant bits of the size_index are likely to be 0 (zero). In
-the example above, all 3 overflow-sub-trees are skewed. This may marginally
-affect the performance. However, processes rarely map many vmas with the
-same start_vm_pgoff but different end_vm_pgoffs. Therefore, we normally
-do not require overflow-sub-trees to index all vmas.
-
-From the above discussion it is clear that the maximum height of
-a prio_tree can be prio_tree_root->index_bits + BITS_PER_LONG.
-However, in most of the common cases we do not need overflow-sub-trees,
-so the tree height in the common cases will be prio_tree_root->index_bits.
-
-It is fair to mention here that the prio_tree_root->index_bits
-is increased on demand, however, the index_bits is not decreased when
-vmas are removed from the prio_tree. That's tricky to do. Hence, it's
-left as a home work problem.
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/pwm.txt b/Documentation/pwm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1039b68fe9c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/pwm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) interface
+
+This provides an overview about the Linux PWM interface
+
+PWMs are commonly used for controlling LEDs, fans or vibrators in
+cell phones. PWMs with a fixed purpose have no need implementing
+the Linux PWM API (although they could). However, PWMs are often
+found as discrete devices on SoCs which have no fixed purpose. It's
+up to the board designer to connect them to LEDs or fans. To provide
+this kind of flexibility the generic PWM API exists.
+
+Identifying PWMs
+----------------
+
+Users of the legacy PWM API use unique IDs to refer to PWM devices.
+
+Instead of referring to a PWM device via its unique ID, board setup code
+should instead register a static mapping that can be used to match PWM
+consumers to providers, as given in the following example:
+
+	static struct pwm_lookup board_pwm_lookup[] = {
+		PWM_LOOKUP("tegra-pwm", 0, "pwm-backlight", NULL),
+	};
+
+	static void __init board_init(void)
+	{
+		...
+		pwm_add_table(board_pwm_lookup, ARRAY_SIZE(board_pwm_lookup));
+		...
+	}
+
+Using PWMs
+----------
+
+Legacy users can request a PWM device using pwm_request() and free it
+after usage with pwm_free().
+
+New users should use the pwm_get() function and pass to it the consumer
+device or a consumer name. pwm_put() is used to free the PWM device. Managed
+variants of these functions, devm_pwm_get() and devm_pwm_put(), also exist.
+
+After being requested a PWM has to be configured using:
+
+int pwm_config(struct pwm_device *pwm, int duty_ns, int period_ns);
+
+To start/stop toggling the PWM output use pwm_enable()/pwm_disable().
+
+Using PWMs with the sysfs interface
+-----------------------------------
+
+If CONFIG_SYSFS is enabled in your kernel configuration a simple sysfs
+interface is provided to use the PWMs from userspace. It is exposed at
+/sys/class/pwm/. Each probed PWM controller/chip will be exported as
+pwmchipN, where N is the base of the PWM chip. Inside the directory you
+will find:
+
+npwm - The number of PWM channels this chip supports (read-only).
+
+export - Exports a PWM channel for use with sysfs (write-only).
+
+unexport - Unexports a PWM channel from sysfs (write-only).
+
+The PWM channels are numbered using a per-chip index from 0 to npwm-1.
+
+When a PWM channel is exported a pwmX directory will be created in the
+pwmchipN directory it is associated with, where X is the number of the
+channel that was exported. The following properties will then be available:
+
+period - The total period of the PWM signal (read/write).
+	Value is in nanoseconds and is the sum of the active and inactive
+	time of the PWM.
+
+duty_cycle - The active time of the PWM signal (read/write).
+	Value is in nanoseconds and must be less than the period.
+
+polarity - Changes the polarity of the PWM signal (read/write).
+	Writes to this property only work if the PWM chip supports changing
+	the polarity. The polarity can only be changed if the PWM is not
+	enabled. Value is the string "normal" or "inversed".
+
+enable - Enable/disable the PWM signal (read/write).
+	0 - disabled
+	1 - enabled
+
+Implementing a PWM driver
+-------------------------
+
+Currently there are two ways to implement pwm drivers. Traditionally
+there only has been the barebone API meaning that each driver has
+to implement the pwm_*() functions itself. This means that it's impossible
+to have multiple PWM drivers in the system. For this reason it's mandatory
+for new drivers to use the generic PWM framework.
+
+A new PWM controller/chip can be added using pwmchip_add() and removed
+again with pwmchip_remove(). pwmchip_add() takes a filled in struct
+pwm_chip as argument which provides a description of the PWM chip, the
+number of PWM devices provider by the chip and the chip-specific
+implementation of the supported PWM operations to the framework.
+
+Locking
+-------
+
+The PWM core list manipulations are protected by a mutex, so pwm_request()
+and pwm_free() may not be called from an atomic context. Currently the
+PWM core does not enforce any locking to pwm_enable(), pwm_disable() and
+pwm_config(), so the calling context is currently driver specific. This
+is an issue derived from the former barebone API and should be fixed soon.
+
+Helpers
+-------
+
+Currently a PWM can only be configured with period_ns and duty_ns. For several
+use cases freq_hz and duty_percent might be better. Instead of calculating
+this in your driver please consider adding appropriate helpers to the framework.
diff --git a/Documentation/ramoops.txt b/Documentation/ramoops.txt
index 8fb1ba7fe7bf..69b3cac4749d 100644
--- a/Documentation/ramoops.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ramoops.txt
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Ramoops oops/panic logger
 
 Sergiu Iordache <sergiu@chromium.org>
 
-Updated: 8 August 2011
+Updated: 17 November 2011
 
 0. Introduction
 
@@ -30,15 +30,26 @@ variable while setting 0 in that variable dumps only the panics.
 The module uses a counter to record multiple dumps but the counter gets reset
 on restart (i.e. new dumps after the restart will overwrite old ones).
 
+Ramoops also supports software ECC protection of persistent memory regions.
+This might be useful when a hardware reset was used to bring the machine back
+to life (i.e. a watchdog triggered). In such cases, RAM may be somewhat
+corrupt, but usually it is restorable.
+
 2. Setting the parameters
 
 Setting the ramoops parameters can be done in 2 different manners:
  1. Use the module parameters (which have the names of the variables described
  as before).
+ For quick debugging, you can also reserve parts of memory during boot
+ and then use the reserved memory for ramoops. For example, assuming a machine
+ with > 128 MB of memory, the following kernel command line will tell the
+ kernel to use only the first 128 MB of memory, and place ECC-protected ramoops
+ region at 128 MB boundary:
+ "mem=128M ramoops.mem_address=0x8000000 ramoops.ecc=1"
  2. Use a platform device and set the platform data. The parameters can then
  be set through that platform data. An example of doing that is:
 
-#include <linux/ramoops.h>
+#include <linux/pstore_ram.h>
 [...]
 
 static struct ramoops_platform_data ramoops_data = {
@@ -46,6 +57,7 @@ static struct ramoops_platform_data ramoops_data = {
         .mem_address            = <...>,
         .record_size            = <...>,
         .dump_oops              = <...>,
+        .ecc                    = <...>,
 };
 
 static struct platform_device ramoops_dev = {
@@ -64,6 +76,14 @@ if (ret) {
 	return ret;
 }
 
+You can specify either RAM memory or peripheral devices' memory. However, when
+specifying RAM, be sure to reserve the memory by issuing memblock_reserve()
+very early in the architecture code, e.g.:
+
+#include <linux/memblock.h>
+
+memblock_reserve(ramoops_data.mem_address, ramoops_data.mem_size);
+
 3. Dump format
 
 The data dump begins with a header, currently defined as "====" followed by a
@@ -71,6 +91,29 @@ timestamp and a new line. The dump then continues with the actual data.
 
 4. Reading the data
 
-The dump data can be read from memory (through /dev/mem or other means).
-Getting the module parameters, which are needed in order to parse the data, can
-be done through /sys/module/ramoops/parameters/* .
+The dump data can be read from the pstore filesystem. The format for these
+files is "dmesg-ramoops-N", where N is the record number in memory. To delete
+a stored record from RAM, simply unlink the respective pstore file.
+
+5. Persistent function tracing
+
+Persistent function tracing might be useful for debugging software or hardware
+related hangs. The functions call chain log is stored in a "ftrace-ramoops"
+file. Here is an example of usage:
+
+ # mount -t debugfs debugfs /sys/kernel/debug/
+ # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/pstore/record_ftrace
+ # reboot -f
+ [...]
+ # mount -t pstore pstore /mnt/
+ # tail /mnt/ftrace-ramoops
+ 0 ffffffff8101ea64  ffffffff8101bcda  native_apic_mem_read <- disconnect_bsp_APIC+0x6a/0xc0
+ 0 ffffffff8101ea44  ffffffff8101bcf6  native_apic_mem_write <- disconnect_bsp_APIC+0x86/0xc0
+ 0 ffffffff81020084  ffffffff8101a4b5  hpet_disable <- native_machine_shutdown+0x75/0x90
+ 0 ffffffff81005f94  ffffffff8101a4bb  iommu_shutdown_noop <- native_machine_shutdown+0x7b/0x90
+ 0 ffffffff8101a6a1  ffffffff8101a437  native_machine_emergency_restart <- native_machine_restart+0x37/0x40
+ 0 ffffffff811f9876  ffffffff8101a73a  acpi_reboot <- native_machine_emergency_restart+0xaa/0x1e0
+ 0 ffffffff8101a514  ffffffff8101a772  mach_reboot_fixups <- native_machine_emergency_restart+0xe2/0x1e0
+ 0 ffffffff811d9c54  ffffffff8101a7a0  __const_udelay <- native_machine_emergency_restart+0x110/0x1e0
+ 0 ffffffff811d9c34  ffffffff811d9c80  __delay <- __const_udelay+0x30/0x40
+ 0 ffffffff811d9d14  ffffffff811d9c3f  delay_tsc <- __delay+0xf/0x20
diff --git a/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt b/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt
index c75694b35d08..28fbd877f85a 100644
--- a/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt
@@ -73,39 +73,175 @@ data structure. This structure includes lists of all devices and local master
 ports that form the same network. It also contains a pointer to the default
 master port that is used to communicate with devices within the network.
 
+2.5 Device Drivers
+
+RapidIO device-specific drivers follow Linux Kernel Driver Model and are
+intended to support specific RapidIO devices attached to the RapidIO network.
+
+2.6 Subsystem Interfaces
+
+RapidIO interconnect specification defines features that may be used to provide
+one or more common service layers for all participating RapidIO devices. These
+common services may act separately from device-specific drivers or be used by
+device-specific drivers. Example of such service provider is the RIONET driver
+which implements Ethernet-over-RapidIO interface. Because only one driver can be
+registered for a device, all common RapidIO services have to be registered as
+subsystem interfaces. This allows to have multiple common services attached to
+the same device without blocking attachment of a device-specific driver.
+
 3. Subsystem Initialization
 ---------------------------
 
 In order to initialize the RapidIO subsystem, a platform must initialize and
 register at least one master port within the RapidIO network. To register mport
-within the subsystem controller driver initialization code calls function
-rio_register_mport() for each available master port. After all active master
-ports are registered with a RapidIO subsystem, the rio_init_mports() routine
-is called to perform enumeration and discovery.
+within the subsystem controller driver's initialization code calls function
+rio_register_mport() for each available master port.
+
+After all active master ports are registered with a RapidIO subsystem,
+an enumeration and/or discovery routine may be called automatically or
+by user-space command.
 
-In the current PowerPC-based implementation a subsys_initcall() is specified to
-perform controller initialization and mport registration. At the end it directly
-calls rio_init_mports() to execute RapidIO enumeration and discovery.
+RapidIO subsystem can be configured to be built as a statically linked or
+modular component of the kernel (see details below).
 
 4. Enumeration and Discovery
 ----------------------------
 
-When rio_init_mports() is called it scans a list of registered master ports and
-calls an enumeration or discovery routine depending on the configured role of a
-master port: host or agent.
+4.1 Overview
+------------
+
+RapidIO subsystem configuration options allow users to build enumeration and
+discovery methods as statically linked components or loadable modules.
+An enumeration/discovery method implementation and available input parameters
+define how any given method can be attached to available RapidIO mports:
+simply to all available mports OR individually to the specified mport device.
+
+Depending on selected enumeration/discovery build configuration, there are
+several methods to initiate an enumeration and/or discovery process:
+
+  (a) Statically linked enumeration and discovery process can be started
+  automatically during kernel initialization time using corresponding module
+  parameters. This was the original method used since introduction of RapidIO
+  subsystem. Now this method relies on enumerator module parameter which is
+  'rio-scan.scan' for existing basic enumeration/discovery method.
+  When automatic start of enumeration/discovery is used a user has to ensure
+  that all discovering endpoints are started before the enumerating endpoint
+  and are waiting for enumeration to be completed.
+  Configuration option CONFIG_RAPIDIO_DISC_TIMEOUT defines time that discovering
+  endpoint waits for enumeration to be completed. If the specified timeout
+  expires the discovery process is terminated without obtaining RapidIO network
+  information. NOTE: a timed out discovery process may be restarted later using
+  a user-space command as it is described below (if the given endpoint was
+  enumerated successfully).
+
+  (b) Statically linked enumeration and discovery process can be started by
+  a command from user space. This initiation method provides more flexibility
+  for a system startup compared to the option (a) above. After all participating
+  endpoints have been successfully booted, an enumeration process shall be
+  started first by issuing a user-space command, after an enumeration is
+  completed a discovery process can be started on all remaining endpoints.
+
+  (c) Modular enumeration and discovery process can be started by a command from
+  user space. After an enumeration/discovery module is loaded, a network scan
+  process can be started by issuing a user-space command.
+  Similar to the option (b) above, an enumerator has to be started first.
+
+  (d) Modular enumeration and discovery process can be started by a module
+  initialization routine. In this case an enumerating module shall be loaded
+  first.
+
+When a network scan process is started it calls an enumeration or discovery
+routine depending on the configured role of a master port: host or agent.
 
 Enumeration is performed by a master port if it is configured as a host port by
-assigning a host device ID greater than or equal to zero. A host device ID is
-assigned to a master port through the kernel command line parameter "riohdid=",
-or can be configured in a platform-specific manner. If the host device ID for
-a specific master port is set to -1, the discovery process will be performed
-for it.
+assigning a host destination ID greater than or equal to zero. The host
+destination ID can be assigned to a master port using various methods depending
+on RapidIO subsystem build configuration:
+
+  (a) For a statically linked RapidIO subsystem core use command line parameter
+  "rapidio.hdid=" with a list of destination ID assignments in order of mport
+  device registration. For example, in a system with two RapidIO controllers
+  the command line parameter "rapidio.hdid=-1,7" will result in assignment of
+  the host destination ID=7 to the second RapidIO controller, while the first
+  one will be assigned destination ID=-1.
+
+  (b) If the RapidIO subsystem core is built as a loadable module, in addition
+  to the method shown above, the host destination ID(s) can be specified using
+  traditional methods of passing module parameter "hdid=" during its loading:
+  - from command line: "modprobe rapidio hdid=-1,7", or
+  - from modprobe configuration file using configuration command "options",
+    like in this example: "options rapidio hdid=-1,7". An example of modprobe
+    configuration file is provided in the section below.
+
+  NOTES:
+  (i) if "hdid=" parameter is omitted all available mport will be assigned
+  destination ID = -1;
+  (ii) the "hdid=" parameter in systems with multiple mports can have
+  destination ID assignments omitted from the end of list (default = -1).
+
+If the host device ID for a specific master port is set to -1, the discovery
+process will be performed for it.
 
 The enumeration and discovery routines use RapidIO maintenance transactions
 to access the configuration space of devices.
 
-The enumeration process is implemented according to the enumeration algorithm
-outlined in the RapidIO Interconnect Specification: Annex I [1].
+NOTE: If RapidIO switch-specific device drivers are built as loadable modules
+they must be loaded before enumeration/discovery process starts.
+This requirement is cased by the fact that enumeration/discovery methods invoke
+vendor-specific callbacks on early stages.
+
+4.2 Automatic Start of Enumeration and Discovery
+------------------------------------------------
+
+Automatic enumeration/discovery start method is applicable only to built-in
+enumeration/discovery RapidIO configuration selection. To enable automatic
+enumeration/discovery start by existing basic enumerator method set use boot
+command line parameter "rio-scan.scan=1".
+
+This configuration requires synchronized start of all RapidIO endpoints that
+form a network which will be enumerated/discovered. Discovering endpoints have
+to be started before an enumeration starts to ensure that all RapidIO
+controllers have been initialized and are ready to be discovered. Configuration
+parameter CONFIG_RAPIDIO_DISC_TIMEOUT defines time (in seconds) which
+a discovering endpoint will wait for enumeration to be completed.
+
+When automatic enumeration/discovery start is selected, basic method's
+initialization routine calls rio_init_mports() to perform enumeration or
+discovery for all known mport devices.
+
+Depending on RapidIO network size and configuration this automatic
+enumeration/discovery start method may be difficult to use due to the
+requirement for synchronized start of all endpoints.
+
+4.3 User-space Start of Enumeration and Discovery
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+User-space start of enumeration and discovery can be used with built-in and
+modular build configurations. For user-space controlled start RapidIO subsystem
+creates the sysfs write-only attribute file '/sys/bus/rapidio/scan'. To initiate
+an enumeration or discovery process on specific mport device, a user needs to
+write mport_ID (not RapidIO destination ID) into that file. The mport_ID is a
+sequential number (0 ... RIO_MAX_MPORTS) assigned during mport device
+registration. For example for machine with single RapidIO controller, mport_ID
+for that controller always will be 0.
+
+To initiate RapidIO enumeration/discovery on all available mports a user may
+write '-1' (or RIO_MPORT_ANY) into the scan attribute file.
+
+4.4 Basic Enumeration Method
+----------------------------
+
+This is an original enumeration/discovery method which is available since
+first release of RapidIO subsystem code. The enumeration process is
+implemented according to the enumeration algorithm outlined in the RapidIO
+Interconnect Specification: Annex I [1].
+
+This method can be configured as statically linked or loadable module.
+The method's single parameter "scan" allows to trigger the enumeration/discovery
+process from module initialization routine.
+
+This enumeration/discovery method can be started only once and does not support
+unloading if it is built as a module.
 
 The enumeration process traverses the network using a recursive depth-first
 algorithm. When a new device is found, the enumerator takes ownership of that
@@ -160,7 +296,49 @@ time period. If this wait time period expires before enumeration is completed,
 an agent skips RapidIO discovery and continues with remaining kernel
 initialization.
 
-5. References
+4.5 Adding New Enumeration/Discovery Method
+-------------------------------------------
+
+RapidIO subsystem code organization allows addition of new enumeration/discovery
+methods as new configuration options without significant impact to the core
+RapidIO code.
+
+A new enumeration/discovery method has to be attached to one or more mport
+devices before an enumeration/discovery process can be started. Normally,
+method's module initialization routine calls rio_register_scan() to attach
+an enumerator to a specified mport device (or devices). The basic enumerator
+implementation demonstrates this process.
+
+4.6 Using Loadable RapidIO Switch Drivers
+-----------------------------------------
+
+In the case when RapidIO switch drivers are built as loadable modules a user
+must ensure that they are loaded before the enumeration/discovery starts.
+This process can be automated by specifying pre- or post- dependencies in the
+RapidIO-specific modprobe configuration file as shown in the example below.
+
+  File /etc/modprobe.d/rapidio.conf:
+  ----------------------------------
+
+  # Configure RapidIO subsystem modules
+
+  # Set enumerator host destination ID (overrides kernel command line option)
+  options rapidio hdid=-1,2
+
+  # Load RapidIO switch drivers immediately after rapidio core module was loaded
+  softdep rapidio post: idt_gen2 idtcps tsi57x
+
+  # OR :
+
+  # Load RapidIO switch drivers just before rio-scan enumerator module is loaded
+  softdep rio-scan pre: idt_gen2 idtcps tsi57x
+
+  --------------------------
+
+NOTE: In the example above, one of "softdep" commands must be removed or
+commented out to keep required module loading sequence.
+
+A. References
 -------------
 
 [1] RapidIO Trade Association. RapidIO Interconnect Specifications.
diff --git a/Documentation/rapidio/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/rapidio/sysfs.txt
index 97f71ce575d6..271438c0617f 100644
--- a/Documentation/rapidio/sysfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rapidio/sysfs.txt
@@ -40,6 +40,7 @@ device_rev - returns the device revision level
              (see 4.1 for switch specific details)
    lprev   - returns name of previous device (switch) on the path to the device
              that that owns this attribute
+  modalias - returns the device modalias
 
 In addition to the files listed above, each device has a binary attribute file
 that allows read/write access to the device configuration registers using
@@ -88,3 +89,20 @@ that exports additional attributes.
 
 IDT_GEN2:
  errlog - reads contents of device error log until it is empty.
+
+
+5. RapidIO Bus Attributes
+-------------------------
+
+RapidIO bus subdirectory /sys/bus/rapidio implements the following bus-specific
+attribute:
+
+  scan - allows to trigger enumeration discovery process from user space. This
+	 is a write-only attribute. To initiate an enumeration or discovery
+	 process on specific mport device, a user needs to write mport_ID (not
+	 RapidIO destination ID) into this file. The mport_ID is a sequential
+	 number (0 ... RIO_MAX_MPORTS) assigned to the mport device.
+	 For example, for a machine with a single RapidIO controller, mport_ID
+	 for that controller always will be 0.
+	 To initiate RapidIO enumeration/discovery on all available mports
+	 a user must write '-1' (or RIO_MPORT_ANY) into this attribute file.
diff --git a/Documentation/rbtree.txt b/Documentation/rbtree.txt
index 8d32d85a5234..61b6c48871a0 100644
--- a/Documentation/rbtree.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rbtree.txt
@@ -193,24 +193,55 @@ Example:
 Support for Augmented rbtrees
 -----------------------------
 
-Augmented rbtree is an rbtree with "some" additional data stored in each node.
-This data can be used to augment some new functionality to rbtree.
-Augmented rbtree is an optional feature built on top of basic rbtree
-infrastructure. An rbtree user who wants this feature will have to call the
-augmentation functions with the user provided augmentation callback
-when inserting and erasing nodes.
-
-On insertion, the user must call rb_augment_insert() once the new node is in
-place. This will cause the augmentation function callback to be called for
-each node between the new node and the root which has been affected by the
-insertion.
-
-When erasing a node, the user must call rb_augment_erase_begin() first to
-retrieve the deepest node on the rebalance path. Then, after erasing the
-original node, the user must call rb_augment_erase_end() with the deepest
-node found earlier. This will cause the augmentation function to be called
-for each affected node between the deepest node and the root.
-
+Augmented rbtree is an rbtree with "some" additional data stored in
+each node, where the additional data for node N must be a function of
+the contents of all nodes in the subtree rooted at N. This data can
+be used to augment some new functionality to rbtree. Augmented rbtree
+is an optional feature built on top of basic rbtree infrastructure.
+An rbtree user who wants this feature will have to call the augmentation
+functions with the user provided augmentation callback when inserting
+and erasing nodes.
+
+C files implementing augmented rbtree manipulation must include
+<linux/rbtree_augmented.h> instead of <linus/rbtree.h>. Note that
+linux/rbtree_augmented.h exposes some rbtree implementations details
+you are not expected to rely on; please stick to the documented APIs
+there and do not include <linux/rbtree_augmented.h> from header files
+either so as to minimize chances of your users accidentally relying on
+such implementation details.
+
+On insertion, the user must update the augmented information on the path
+leading to the inserted node, then call rb_link_node() as usual and
+rb_augment_inserted() instead of the usual rb_insert_color() call.
+If rb_augment_inserted() rebalances the rbtree, it will callback into
+a user provided function to update the augmented information on the
+affected subtrees.
+
+When erasing a node, the user must call rb_erase_augmented() instead of
+rb_erase(). rb_erase_augmented() calls back into user provided functions
+to updated the augmented information on affected subtrees.
+
+In both cases, the callbacks are provided through struct rb_augment_callbacks.
+3 callbacks must be defined:
+
+- A propagation callback, which updates the augmented value for a given
+  node and its ancestors, up to a given stop point (or NULL to update
+  all the way to the root).
+
+- A copy callback, which copies the augmented value for a given subtree
+  to a newly assigned subtree root.
+
+- A tree rotation callback, which copies the augmented value for a given
+  subtree to a newly assigned subtree root AND recomputes the augmented
+  information for the former subtree root.
+
+The compiled code for rb_erase_augmented() may inline the propagation and
+copy callbacks, which results in a large function, so each augmented rbtree
+user should have a single rb_erase_augmented() call site in order to limit
+compiled code size.
+
+
+Sample usage:
 
 Interval tree is an example of augmented rb tree. Reference -
 "Introduction to Algorithms" by Cormen, Leiserson, Rivest and Stein.
@@ -230,26 +261,132 @@ and its immediate children. And this will be used in O(log n) lookup
 for lowest match (lowest start address among all possible matches)
 with something like:
 
-find_lowest_match(lo, hi, node)
+struct interval_tree_node *
+interval_tree_first_match(struct rb_root *root,
+			  unsigned long start, unsigned long last)
 {
-	lowest_match = NULL;
-	while (node) {
-		if (max_hi(node->left) > lo) {
-			// Lowest overlap if any must be on left side
-			node = node->left;
-		} else if (overlap(lo, hi, node)) {
-			lowest_match = node;
-			break;
-		} else if (lo > node->lo) {
-			// Lowest overlap if any must be on right side
-			node = node->right;
-		} else {
-			break;
+	struct interval_tree_node *node;
+
+	if (!root->rb_node)
+		return NULL;
+	node = rb_entry(root->rb_node, struct interval_tree_node, rb);
+
+	while (true) {
+		if (node->rb.rb_left) {
+			struct interval_tree_node *left =
+				rb_entry(node->rb.rb_left,
+					 struct interval_tree_node, rb);
+			if (left->__subtree_last >= start) {
+				/*
+				 * Some nodes in left subtree satisfy Cond2.
+				 * Iterate to find the leftmost such node N.
+				 * If it also satisfies Cond1, that's the match
+				 * we are looking for. Otherwise, there is no
+				 * matching interval as nodes to the right of N
+				 * can't satisfy Cond1 either.
+				 */
+				node = left;
+				continue;
+			}
 		}
+		if (node->start <= last) {		/* Cond1 */
+			if (node->last >= start)	/* Cond2 */
+				return node;	/* node is leftmost match */
+			if (node->rb.rb_right) {
+				node = rb_entry(node->rb.rb_right,
+					struct interval_tree_node, rb);
+				if (node->__subtree_last >= start)
+					continue;
+			}
+		}
+		return NULL;	/* No match */
+	}
+}
+
+Insertion/removal are defined using the following augmented callbacks:
+
+static inline unsigned long
+compute_subtree_last(struct interval_tree_node *node)
+{
+	unsigned long max = node->last, subtree_last;
+	if (node->rb.rb_left) {
+		subtree_last = rb_entry(node->rb.rb_left,
+			struct interval_tree_node, rb)->__subtree_last;
+		if (max < subtree_last)
+			max = subtree_last;
+	}
+	if (node->rb.rb_right) {
+		subtree_last = rb_entry(node->rb.rb_right,
+			struct interval_tree_node, rb)->__subtree_last;
+		if (max < subtree_last)
+			max = subtree_last;
+	}
+	return max;
+}
+
+static void augment_propagate(struct rb_node *rb, struct rb_node *stop)
+{
+	while (rb != stop) {
+		struct interval_tree_node *node =
+			rb_entry(rb, struct interval_tree_node, rb);
+		unsigned long subtree_last = compute_subtree_last(node);
+		if (node->__subtree_last == subtree_last)
+			break;
+		node->__subtree_last = subtree_last;
+		rb = rb_parent(&node->rb);
 	}
-	return lowest_match;
 }
 
-Finding exact match will be to first find lowest match and then to follow
-successor nodes looking for exact match, until the start of a node is beyond
-the hi value we are looking for.
+static void augment_copy(struct rb_node *rb_old, struct rb_node *rb_new)
+{
+	struct interval_tree_node *old =
+		rb_entry(rb_old, struct interval_tree_node, rb);
+	struct interval_tree_node *new =
+		rb_entry(rb_new, struct interval_tree_node, rb);
+
+	new->__subtree_last = old->__subtree_last;
+}
+
+static void augment_rotate(struct rb_node *rb_old, struct rb_node *rb_new)
+{
+	struct interval_tree_node *old =
+		rb_entry(rb_old, struct interval_tree_node, rb);
+	struct interval_tree_node *new =
+		rb_entry(rb_new, struct interval_tree_node, rb);
+
+	new->__subtree_last = old->__subtree_last;
+	old->__subtree_last = compute_subtree_last(old);
+}
+
+static const struct rb_augment_callbacks augment_callbacks = {
+	augment_propagate, augment_copy, augment_rotate
+};
+
+void interval_tree_insert(struct interval_tree_node *node,
+			  struct rb_root *root)
+{
+	struct rb_node **link = &root->rb_node, *rb_parent = NULL;
+	unsigned long start = node->start, last = node->last;
+	struct interval_tree_node *parent;
+
+	while (*link) {
+		rb_parent = *link;
+		parent = rb_entry(rb_parent, struct interval_tree_node, rb);
+		if (parent->__subtree_last < last)
+			parent->__subtree_last = last;
+		if (start < parent->start)
+			link = &parent->rb.rb_left;
+		else
+			link = &parent->rb.rb_right;
+	}
+
+	node->__subtree_last = last;
+	rb_link_node(&node->rb, rb_parent, link);
+	rb_insert_augmented(&node->rb, root, &augment_callbacks);
+}
+
+void interval_tree_remove(struct interval_tree_node *node,
+			  struct rb_root *root)
+{
+	rb_erase_augmented(&node->rb, root, &augment_callbacks);
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/remoteproc.txt b/Documentation/remoteproc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e6469fdcf89a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/remoteproc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,299 @@
+Remote Processor Framework
+
+1. Introduction
+
+Modern SoCs typically have heterogeneous remote processor devices in asymmetric
+multiprocessing (AMP) configurations, which may be running different instances
+of operating system, whether it's Linux or any other flavor of real-time OS.
+
+OMAP4, for example, has dual Cortex-A9, dual Cortex-M3 and a C64x+ DSP.
+In a typical configuration, the dual cortex-A9 is running Linux in a SMP
+configuration, and each of the other three cores (two M3 cores and a DSP)
+is running its own instance of RTOS in an AMP configuration.
+
+The remoteproc framework allows different platforms/architectures to
+control (power on, load firmware, power off) those remote processors while
+abstracting the hardware differences, so the entire driver doesn't need to be
+duplicated. In addition, this framework also adds rpmsg virtio devices
+for remote processors that supports this kind of communication. This way,
+platform-specific remoteproc drivers only need to provide a few low-level
+handlers, and then all rpmsg drivers will then just work
+(for more information about the virtio-based rpmsg bus and its drivers,
+please read Documentation/rpmsg.txt).
+Registration of other types of virtio devices is now also possible. Firmwares
+just need to publish what kind of virtio devices do they support, and then
+remoteproc will add those devices. This makes it possible to reuse the
+existing virtio drivers with remote processor backends at a minimal development
+cost.
+
+2. User API
+
+  int rproc_boot(struct rproc *rproc)
+    - Boot a remote processor (i.e. load its firmware, power it on, ...).
+      If the remote processor is already powered on, this function immediately
+      returns (successfully).
+      Returns 0 on success, and an appropriate error value otherwise.
+      Note: to use this function you should already have a valid rproc
+      handle. There are several ways to achieve that cleanly (devres, pdata,
+      the way remoteproc_rpmsg.c does this, or, if this becomes prevalent, we
+      might also consider using dev_archdata for this).
+
+  void rproc_shutdown(struct rproc *rproc)
+    - Power off a remote processor (previously booted with rproc_boot()).
+      In case @rproc is still being used by an additional user(s), then
+      this function will just decrement the power refcount and exit,
+      without really powering off the device.
+      Every call to rproc_boot() must (eventually) be accompanied by a call
+      to rproc_shutdown(). Calling rproc_shutdown() redundantly is a bug.
+      Notes:
+      - we're not decrementing the rproc's refcount, only the power refcount.
+        which means that the @rproc handle stays valid even after
+        rproc_shutdown() returns, and users can still use it with a subsequent
+        rproc_boot(), if needed.
+
+3. Typical usage
+
+#include <linux/remoteproc.h>
+
+/* in case we were given a valid 'rproc' handle */
+int dummy_rproc_example(struct rproc *my_rproc)
+{
+	int ret;
+
+	/* let's power on and boot our remote processor */
+	ret = rproc_boot(my_rproc);
+	if (ret) {
+		/*
+		 * something went wrong. handle it and leave.
+		 */
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * our remote processor is now powered on... give it some work
+	 */
+
+	/* let's shut it down now */
+	rproc_shutdown(my_rproc);
+}
+
+4. API for implementors
+
+  struct rproc *rproc_alloc(struct device *dev, const char *name,
+				const struct rproc_ops *ops,
+				const char *firmware, int len)
+    - Allocate a new remote processor handle, but don't register
+      it yet. Required parameters are the underlying device, the
+      name of this remote processor, platform-specific ops handlers,
+      the name of the firmware to boot this rproc with, and the
+      length of private data needed by the allocating rproc driver (in bytes).
+
+      This function should be used by rproc implementations during
+      initialization of the remote processor.
+      After creating an rproc handle using this function, and when ready,
+      implementations should then call rproc_add() to complete
+      the registration of the remote processor.
+      On success, the new rproc is returned, and on failure, NULL.
+
+      Note: _never_ directly deallocate @rproc, even if it was not registered
+      yet. Instead, when you need to unroll rproc_alloc(), use rproc_put().
+
+  void rproc_put(struct rproc *rproc)
+    - Free an rproc handle that was allocated by rproc_alloc.
+      This function essentially unrolls rproc_alloc(), by decrementing the
+      rproc's refcount. It doesn't directly free rproc; that would happen
+      only if there are no other references to rproc and its refcount now
+      dropped to zero.
+
+  int rproc_add(struct rproc *rproc)
+    - Register @rproc with the remoteproc framework, after it has been
+      allocated with rproc_alloc().
+      This is called by the platform-specific rproc implementation, whenever
+      a new remote processor device is probed.
+      Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise.
+      Note: this function initiates an asynchronous firmware loading
+      context, which will look for virtio devices supported by the rproc's
+      firmware.
+      If found, those virtio devices will be created and added, so as a result
+      of registering this remote processor, additional virtio drivers might get
+      probed.
+
+  int rproc_del(struct rproc *rproc)
+    - Unroll rproc_add().
+      This function should be called when the platform specific rproc
+      implementation decides to remove the rproc device. it should
+      _only_ be called if a previous invocation of rproc_add()
+      has completed successfully.
+
+      After rproc_del() returns, @rproc is still valid, and its
+      last refcount should be decremented by calling rproc_put().
+
+      Returns 0 on success and -EINVAL if @rproc isn't valid.
+
+  void rproc_report_crash(struct rproc *rproc, enum rproc_crash_type type)
+    - Report a crash in a remoteproc
+      This function must be called every time a crash is detected by the
+      platform specific rproc implementation. This should not be called from a
+      non-remoteproc driver. This function can be called from atomic/interrupt
+      context.
+
+5. Implementation callbacks
+
+These callbacks should be provided by platform-specific remoteproc
+drivers:
+
+/**
+ * struct rproc_ops - platform-specific device handlers
+ * @start:	power on the device and boot it
+ * @stop:	power off the device
+ * @kick:	kick a virtqueue (virtqueue id given as a parameter)
+ */
+struct rproc_ops {
+	int (*start)(struct rproc *rproc);
+	int (*stop)(struct rproc *rproc);
+	void (*kick)(struct rproc *rproc, int vqid);
+};
+
+Every remoteproc implementation should at least provide the ->start and ->stop
+handlers. If rpmsg/virtio functionality is also desired, then the ->kick handler
+should be provided as well.
+
+The ->start() handler takes an rproc handle and should then power on the
+device and boot it (use rproc->priv to access platform-specific private data).
+The boot address, in case needed, can be found in rproc->bootaddr (remoteproc
+core puts there the ELF entry point).
+On success, 0 should be returned, and on failure, an appropriate error code.
+
+The ->stop() handler takes an rproc handle and powers the device down.
+On success, 0 is returned, and on failure, an appropriate error code.
+
+The ->kick() handler takes an rproc handle, and an index of a virtqueue
+where new message was placed in. Implementations should interrupt the remote
+processor and let it know it has pending messages. Notifying remote processors
+the exact virtqueue index to look in is optional: it is easy (and not
+too expensive) to go through the existing virtqueues and look for new buffers
+in the used rings.
+
+6. Binary Firmware Structure
+
+At this point remoteproc only supports ELF32 firmware binaries. However,
+it is quite expected that other platforms/devices which we'd want to
+support with this framework will be based on different binary formats.
+
+When those use cases show up, we will have to decouple the binary format
+from the framework core, so we can support several binary formats without
+duplicating common code.
+
+When the firmware is parsed, its various segments are loaded to memory
+according to the specified device address (might be a physical address
+if the remote processor is accessing memory directly).
+
+In addition to the standard ELF segments, most remote processors would
+also include a special section which we call "the resource table".
+
+The resource table contains system resources that the remote processor
+requires before it should be powered on, such as allocation of physically
+contiguous memory, or iommu mapping of certain on-chip peripherals.
+Remotecore will only power up the device after all the resource table's
+requirement are met.
+
+In addition to system resources, the resource table may also contain
+resource entries that publish the existence of supported features
+or configurations by the remote processor, such as trace buffers and
+supported virtio devices (and their configurations).
+
+The resource table begins with this header:
+
+/**
+ * struct resource_table - firmware resource table header
+ * @ver: version number
+ * @num: number of resource entries
+ * @reserved: reserved (must be zero)
+ * @offset: array of offsets pointing at the various resource entries
+ *
+ * The header of the resource table, as expressed by this structure,
+ * contains a version number (should we need to change this format in the
+ * future), the number of available resource entries, and their offsets
+ * in the table.
+ */
+struct resource_table {
+	u32 ver;
+	u32 num;
+	u32 reserved[2];
+	u32 offset[0];
+} __packed;
+
+Immediately following this header are the resource entries themselves,
+each of which begins with the following resource entry header:
+
+/**
+ * struct fw_rsc_hdr - firmware resource entry header
+ * @type: resource type
+ * @data: resource data
+ *
+ * Every resource entry begins with a 'struct fw_rsc_hdr' header providing
+ * its @type. The content of the entry itself will immediately follow
+ * this header, and it should be parsed according to the resource type.
+ */
+struct fw_rsc_hdr {
+	u32 type;
+	u8 data[0];
+} __packed;
+
+Some resources entries are mere announcements, where the host is informed
+of specific remoteproc configuration. Other entries require the host to
+do something (e.g. allocate a system resource). Sometimes a negotiation
+is expected, where the firmware requests a resource, and once allocated,
+the host should provide back its details (e.g. address of an allocated
+memory region).
+
+Here are the various resource types that are currently supported:
+
+/**
+ * enum fw_resource_type - types of resource entries
+ *
+ * @RSC_CARVEOUT:   request for allocation of a physically contiguous
+ *		    memory region.
+ * @RSC_DEVMEM:     request to iommu_map a memory-based peripheral.
+ * @RSC_TRACE:	    announces the availability of a trace buffer into which
+ *		    the remote processor will be writing logs.
+ * @RSC_VDEV:       declare support for a virtio device, and serve as its
+ *		    virtio header.
+ * @RSC_LAST:       just keep this one at the end
+ *
+ * Please note that these values are used as indices to the rproc_handle_rsc
+ * lookup table, so please keep them sane. Moreover, @RSC_LAST is used to
+ * check the validity of an index before the lookup table is accessed, so
+ * please update it as needed.
+ */
+enum fw_resource_type {
+	RSC_CARVEOUT	= 0,
+	RSC_DEVMEM	= 1,
+	RSC_TRACE	= 2,
+	RSC_VDEV	= 3,
+	RSC_LAST	= 4,
+};
+
+For more details regarding a specific resource type, please see its
+dedicated structure in include/linux/remoteproc.h.
+
+We also expect that platform-specific resource entries will show up
+at some point. When that happens, we could easily add a new RSC_PLATFORM
+type, and hand those resources to the platform-specific rproc driver to handle.
+
+7. Virtio and remoteproc
+
+The firmware should provide remoteproc information about virtio devices
+that it supports, and their configurations: a RSC_VDEV resource entry
+should specify the virtio device id (as in virtio_ids.h), virtio features,
+virtio config space, vrings information, etc.
+
+When a new remote processor is registered, the remoteproc framework
+will look for its resource table and will register the virtio devices
+it supports. A firmware may support any number of virtio devices, and
+of any type (a single remote processor can also easily support several
+rpmsg virtio devices this way, if desired).
+
+Of course, RSC_VDEV resource entries are only good enough for static
+allocation of virtio devices. Dynamic allocations will also be made possible
+using the rpmsg bus (similar to how we already do dynamic allocations of
+rpmsg channels; read more about it in rpmsg.txt).
diff --git a/Documentation/rpmsg.txt b/Documentation/rpmsg.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f7edc3aa1e92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/rpmsg.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,293 @@
+Remote Processor Messaging (rpmsg) Framework
+
+Note: this document describes the rpmsg bus and how to write rpmsg drivers.
+To learn how to add rpmsg support for new platforms, check out remoteproc.txt
+(also a resident of Documentation/).
+
+1. Introduction
+
+Modern SoCs typically employ heterogeneous remote processor devices in
+asymmetric multiprocessing (AMP) configurations, which may be running
+different instances of operating system, whether it's Linux or any other
+flavor of real-time OS.
+
+OMAP4, for example, has dual Cortex-A9, dual Cortex-M3 and a C64x+ DSP.
+Typically, the dual cortex-A9 is running Linux in a SMP configuration,
+and each of the other three cores (two M3 cores and a DSP) is running
+its own instance of RTOS in an AMP configuration.
+
+Typically AMP remote processors employ dedicated DSP codecs and multimedia
+hardware accelerators, and therefore are often used to offload CPU-intensive
+multimedia tasks from the main application processor.
+
+These remote processors could also be used to control latency-sensitive
+sensors, drive random hardware blocks, or just perform background tasks
+while the main CPU is idling.
+
+Users of those remote processors can either be userland apps (e.g. multimedia
+frameworks talking with remote OMX components) or kernel drivers (controlling
+hardware accessible only by the remote processor, reserving kernel-controlled
+resources on behalf of the remote processor, etc..).
+
+Rpmsg is a virtio-based messaging bus that allows kernel drivers to communicate
+with remote processors available on the system. In turn, drivers could then
+expose appropriate user space interfaces, if needed.
+
+When writing a driver that exposes rpmsg communication to userland, please
+keep in mind that remote processors might have direct access to the
+system's physical memory and other sensitive hardware resources (e.g. on
+OMAP4, remote cores and hardware accelerators may have direct access to the
+physical memory, gpio banks, dma controllers, i2c bus, gptimers, mailbox
+devices, hwspinlocks, etc..). Moreover, those remote processors might be
+running RTOS where every task can access the entire memory/devices exposed
+to the processor. To minimize the risks of rogue (or buggy) userland code
+exploiting remote bugs, and by that taking over the system, it is often
+desired to limit userland to specific rpmsg channels (see definition below)
+it can send messages on, and if possible, minimize how much control
+it has over the content of the messages.
+
+Every rpmsg device is a communication channel with a remote processor (thus
+rpmsg devices are called channels). Channels are identified by a textual name
+and have a local ("source") rpmsg address, and remote ("destination") rpmsg
+address.
+
+When a driver starts listening on a channel, its rx callback is bound with
+a unique rpmsg local address (a 32-bit integer). This way when inbound messages
+arrive, the rpmsg core dispatches them to the appropriate driver according
+to their destination address (this is done by invoking the driver's rx handler
+with the payload of the inbound message).
+
+
+2. User API
+
+  int rpmsg_send(struct rpmsg_channel *rpdev, void *data, int len);
+   - sends a message across to the remote processor on a given channel.
+     The caller should specify the channel, the data it wants to send,
+     and its length (in bytes). The message will be sent on the specified
+     channel, i.e. its source and destination address fields will be
+     set to the channel's src and dst addresses.
+
+     In case there are no TX buffers available, the function will block until
+     one becomes available (i.e. until the remote processor consumes
+     a tx buffer and puts it back on virtio's used descriptor ring),
+     or a timeout of 15 seconds elapses. When the latter happens,
+     -ERESTARTSYS is returned.
+     The function can only be called from a process context (for now).
+     Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error value on failure.
+
+  int rpmsg_sendto(struct rpmsg_channel *rpdev, void *data, int len, u32 dst);
+   - sends a message across to the remote processor on a given channel,
+     to a destination address provided by the caller.
+     The caller should specify the channel, the data it wants to send,
+     its length (in bytes), and an explicit destination address.
+     The message will then be sent to the remote processor to which the
+     channel belongs, using the channel's src address, and the user-provided
+     dst address (thus the channel's dst address will be ignored).
+
+     In case there are no TX buffers available, the function will block until
+     one becomes available (i.e. until the remote processor consumes
+     a tx buffer and puts it back on virtio's used descriptor ring),
+     or a timeout of 15 seconds elapses. When the latter happens,
+     -ERESTARTSYS is returned.
+     The function can only be called from a process context (for now).
+     Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error value on failure.
+
+  int rpmsg_send_offchannel(struct rpmsg_channel *rpdev, u32 src, u32 dst,
+							void *data, int len);
+   - sends a message across to the remote processor, using the src and dst
+     addresses provided by the user.
+     The caller should specify the channel, the data it wants to send,
+     its length (in bytes), and explicit source and destination addresses.
+     The message will then be sent to the remote processor to which the
+     channel belongs, but the channel's src and dst addresses will be
+     ignored (and the user-provided addresses will be used instead).
+
+     In case there are no TX buffers available, the function will block until
+     one becomes available (i.e. until the remote processor consumes
+     a tx buffer and puts it back on virtio's used descriptor ring),
+     or a timeout of 15 seconds elapses. When the latter happens,
+     -ERESTARTSYS is returned.
+     The function can only be called from a process context (for now).
+     Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error value on failure.
+
+  int rpmsg_trysend(struct rpmsg_channel *rpdev, void *data, int len);
+   - sends a message across to the remote processor on a given channel.
+     The caller should specify the channel, the data it wants to send,
+     and its length (in bytes). The message will be sent on the specified
+     channel, i.e. its source and destination address fields will be
+     set to the channel's src and dst addresses.
+
+     In case there are no TX buffers available, the function will immediately
+     return -ENOMEM without waiting until one becomes available.
+     The function can only be called from a process context (for now).
+     Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error value on failure.
+
+  int rpmsg_trysendto(struct rpmsg_channel *rpdev, void *data, int len, u32 dst)
+   - sends a message across to the remote processor on a given channel,
+     to a destination address provided by the user.
+     The user should specify the channel, the data it wants to send,
+     its length (in bytes), and an explicit destination address.
+     The message will then be sent to the remote processor to which the
+     channel belongs, using the channel's src address, and the user-provided
+     dst address (thus the channel's dst address will be ignored).
+
+     In case there are no TX buffers available, the function will immediately
+     return -ENOMEM without waiting until one becomes available.
+     The function can only be called from a process context (for now).
+     Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error value on failure.
+
+  int rpmsg_trysend_offchannel(struct rpmsg_channel *rpdev, u32 src, u32 dst,
+							void *data, int len);
+   - sends a message across to the remote processor, using source and
+     destination addresses provided by the user.
+     The user should specify the channel, the data it wants to send,
+     its length (in bytes), and explicit source and destination addresses.
+     The message will then be sent to the remote processor to which the
+     channel belongs, but the channel's src and dst addresses will be
+     ignored (and the user-provided addresses will be used instead).
+
+     In case there are no TX buffers available, the function will immediately
+     return -ENOMEM without waiting until one becomes available.
+     The function can only be called from a process context (for now).
+     Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error value on failure.
+
+  struct rpmsg_endpoint *rpmsg_create_ept(struct rpmsg_channel *rpdev,
+		void (*cb)(struct rpmsg_channel *, void *, int, void *, u32),
+		void *priv, u32 addr);
+   - every rpmsg address in the system is bound to an rx callback (so when
+     inbound messages arrive, they are dispatched by the rpmsg bus using the
+     appropriate callback handler) by means of an rpmsg_endpoint struct.
+
+     This function allows drivers to create such an endpoint, and by that,
+     bind a callback, and possibly some private data too, to an rpmsg address
+     (either one that is known in advance, or one that will be dynamically
+     assigned for them).
+
+     Simple rpmsg drivers need not call rpmsg_create_ept, because an endpoint
+     is already created for them when they are probed by the rpmsg bus
+     (using the rx callback they provide when they registered to the rpmsg bus).
+
+     So things should just work for simple drivers: they already have an
+     endpoint, their rx callback is bound to their rpmsg address, and when
+     relevant inbound messages arrive (i.e. messages which their dst address
+     equals to the src address of their rpmsg channel), the driver's handler
+     is invoked to process it.
+
+     That said, more complicated drivers might do need to allocate
+     additional rpmsg addresses, and bind them to different rx callbacks.
+     To accomplish that, those drivers need to call this function.
+     Drivers should provide their channel (so the new endpoint would bind
+     to the same remote processor their channel belongs to), an rx callback
+     function, an optional private data (which is provided back when the
+     rx callback is invoked), and an address they want to bind with the
+     callback. If addr is RPMSG_ADDR_ANY, then rpmsg_create_ept will
+     dynamically assign them an available rpmsg address (drivers should have
+     a very good reason why not to always use RPMSG_ADDR_ANY here).
+
+     Returns a pointer to the endpoint on success, or NULL on error.
+
+  void rpmsg_destroy_ept(struct rpmsg_endpoint *ept);
+   - destroys an existing rpmsg endpoint. user should provide a pointer
+     to an rpmsg endpoint that was previously created with rpmsg_create_ept().
+
+  int register_rpmsg_driver(struct rpmsg_driver *rpdrv);
+   - registers an rpmsg driver with the rpmsg bus. user should provide
+     a pointer to an rpmsg_driver struct, which contains the driver's
+     ->probe() and ->remove() functions, an rx callback, and an id_table
+     specifying the names of the channels this driver is interested to
+     be probed with.
+
+  void unregister_rpmsg_driver(struct rpmsg_driver *rpdrv);
+   - unregisters an rpmsg driver from the rpmsg bus. user should provide
+     a pointer to a previously-registered rpmsg_driver struct.
+     Returns 0 on success, and an appropriate error value on failure.
+
+
+3. Typical usage
+
+The following is a simple rpmsg driver, that sends an "hello!" message
+on probe(), and whenever it receives an incoming message, it dumps its
+content to the console.
+
+#include <linux/kernel.h>
+#include <linux/module.h>
+#include <linux/rpmsg.h>
+
+static void rpmsg_sample_cb(struct rpmsg_channel *rpdev, void *data, int len,
+						void *priv, u32 src)
+{
+	print_hex_dump(KERN_INFO, "incoming message:", DUMP_PREFIX_NONE,
+						16, 1, data, len, true);
+}
+
+static int rpmsg_sample_probe(struct rpmsg_channel *rpdev)
+{
+	int err;
+
+	dev_info(&rpdev->dev, "chnl: 0x%x -> 0x%x\n", rpdev->src, rpdev->dst);
+
+	/* send a message on our channel */
+	err = rpmsg_send(rpdev, "hello!", 6);
+	if (err) {
+		pr_err("rpmsg_send failed: %d\n", err);
+		return err;
+	}
+
+	return 0;
+}
+
+static void rpmsg_sample_remove(struct rpmsg_channel *rpdev)
+{
+	dev_info(&rpdev->dev, "rpmsg sample client driver is removed\n");
+}
+
+static struct rpmsg_device_id rpmsg_driver_sample_id_table[] = {
+	{ .name	= "rpmsg-client-sample" },
+	{ },
+};
+MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(rpmsg, rpmsg_driver_sample_id_table);
+
+static struct rpmsg_driver rpmsg_sample_client = {
+	.drv.name	= KBUILD_MODNAME,
+	.drv.owner	= THIS_MODULE,
+	.id_table	= rpmsg_driver_sample_id_table,
+	.probe		= rpmsg_sample_probe,
+	.callback	= rpmsg_sample_cb,
+	.remove		= rpmsg_sample_remove,
+};
+
+static int __init init(void)
+{
+	return register_rpmsg_driver(&rpmsg_sample_client);
+}
+module_init(init);
+
+static void __exit fini(void)
+{
+	unregister_rpmsg_driver(&rpmsg_sample_client);
+}
+module_exit(fini);
+
+Note: a similar sample which can be built and loaded can be found
+in samples/rpmsg/.
+
+4. Allocations of rpmsg channels:
+
+At this point we only support dynamic allocations of rpmsg channels.
+
+This is possible only with remote processors that have the VIRTIO_RPMSG_F_NS
+virtio device feature set. This feature bit means that the remote
+processor supports dynamic name service announcement messages.
+
+When this feature is enabled, creation of rpmsg devices (i.e. channels)
+is completely dynamic: the remote processor announces the existence of a
+remote rpmsg service by sending a name service message (which contains
+the name and rpmsg addr of the remote service, see struct rpmsg_ns_msg).
+
+This message is then handled by the rpmsg bus, which in turn dynamically
+creates and registers an rpmsg channel (which represents the remote service).
+If/when a relevant rpmsg driver is registered, it will be immediately probed
+by the bus, and can then start sending messages to the remote service.
+
+The plan is also to add static creation of rpmsg channels via the virtio
+config space, but it's not implemented yet.
diff --git a/Documentation/rt-mutex-design.txt b/Documentation/rt-mutex-design.txt
index 33ed8007a845..a5bcd7f5c33f 100644
--- a/Documentation/rt-mutex-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rt-mutex-design.txt
@@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ priority back.
 __rt_mutex_adjust_prio examines the result of rt_mutex_getprio, and if the
 result does not equal the task's current priority, then rt_mutex_setprio
 is called to adjust the priority of the task to the new priority.
-Note that rt_mutex_setprio is defined in kernel/sched.c to implement the
+Note that rt_mutex_setprio is defined in kernel/sched/core.c to implement the
 actual change in priority.
 
 It is interesting to note that __rt_mutex_adjust_prio can either increase
diff --git a/Documentation/rtc.txt b/Documentation/rtc.txt
index 250160469d83..596b60c08b74 100644
--- a/Documentation/rtc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rtc.txt
@@ -119,8 +119,9 @@ three different userspace interfaces:
     *	/sys/class/rtc/rtcN ... sysfs attributes support readonly
 	access to some RTC attributes.
 
-    *	/proc/driver/rtc ... the first RTC (rtc0) may expose itself
-	using a procfs interface.  More information is (currently) shown
+    *	/proc/driver/rtc ... the system clock RTC may expose itself
+	using a procfs interface. If there is no RTC for the system clock,
+	rtc0 is used by default. More information is (currently) shown
 	here than through sysfs.
 
 The RTC Class framework supports a wide variety of RTCs, ranging from those
@@ -152,9 +153,10 @@ since_epoch:	 The number of seconds since the epoch according to the RTC
 time:		 RTC-provided time
 wakealarm:	 The time at which the clock will generate a system wakeup
 		 event. This is a one shot wakeup event, so must be reset
-		 after wake if a daily wakeup is required. Format is either
-		 seconds since the epoch or, if there's a leading +, seconds
-		 in the future.
+		 after wake if a daily wakeup is required. Format is seconds since
+		 the epoch by default, or if there's a leading +, seconds in the
+		 future, or if there is a leading +=, seconds ahead of the current
+		 alarm.
 
 IOCTL INTERFACE
 ---------------
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/3270.txt b/Documentation/s390/3270.txt
index 7a5c73a7ed7f..7c715de99774 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/3270.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/3270.txt
@@ -47,9 +47,9 @@ including the console 3270, changes subchannel identifier relative to
 one another.  ReIPL as soon as possible after running the configuration
 script and the resulting /tmp/mkdev3270.
 
-If you have chosen to make tub3270 a module, you add a line to
-/etc/modprobe.conf.  If you are working on a VM virtual machine, you
-can use DEF GRAF to define virtual 3270 devices.
+If you have chosen to make tub3270 a module, you add a line to a
+configuration file under /etc/modprobe.d/.  If you are working on a VM
+virtual machine, you can use DEF GRAF to define virtual 3270 devices.
 
 You may generate both 3270 and 3215 console support, or one or the
 other, or neither.  If you generate both, the console type under VM is
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ at boot time to a 3270 if it is a 3215.
 
 In brief, these are the steps:
 	1. Install the tub3270 patch
-	2. (If a module) add a line to /etc/modprobe.conf
+	2. (If a module) add a line to a file in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf
 	3. (If VM) define devices with DEF GRAF
 	4. Reboot
 	5. Configure
@@ -84,13 +84,12 @@ Here are the installation steps in detail:
 		make modules_install
 
 	2. (Perform this step only if you have configured tub3270 as a
-	module.)  Add a line to /etc/modprobe.conf to automatically
-	load the driver when it's needed.  With this line added,
-	you will see login prompts appear on your 3270s as soon as
-	boot is complete (or with emulated 3270s, as soon as you dial
-	into your vm guest using the command "DIAL <vmguestname>").
-	Since the line-mode major number is 227, the line to add to
-	/etc/modprobe.conf should be:
+	module.)  Add a line to a file /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf to automatically
+	load the driver when it's needed.  With this line added, you will see
+	login prompts appear on your 3270s as soon as boot is complete (or
+	with emulated 3270s, as soon as you dial into your vm guest using the
+	command "DIAL <vmguestname>").  Since the line-mode major number is
+	227, the line to add should be:
 		alias char-major-227 tub3270
 
 	3. Define graphic devices to your vm guest machine, if you
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
index d378cba66456..6e0f63f343b4 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
+++ b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
@@ -8,9 +8,9 @@ Command line parameters
 
   Enable logging of debug information in case of ccw device timeouts.
 
-* cio_ignore = {all} |
-	       {<device> | <range of devices>} |
-	       {!<device> | !<range of devices>}
+* cio_ignore = device[,device[,..]]
+
+	device := {all | [!]ipldev | [!]condev | [!]<devno> | [!]<devno>-<devno>}
 
   The given devices will be ignored by the common I/O-layer; no detection
   and device sensing will be done on any of those devices. The subchannel to 
@@ -24,8 +24,10 @@ Command line parameters
   device numbers (0xabcd or abcd, for 2.4 backward compatibility). If you
   give a device number 0xabcd, it will be interpreted as 0.0.abcd.
 
-  You can use the 'all' keyword to ignore all devices.
-  The '!' operator will cause the I/O-layer to _not_ ignore a device.
+  You can use the 'all' keyword to ignore all devices. The 'ipldev' and 'condev'
+  keywords can be used to refer to the CCW based boot device and CCW console
+  device respectively (these are probably useful only when combined with the '!'
+  operator). The '!' operator will cause the I/O-layer to _not_ ignore a device.
   The command line is parsed from left to right.
 
   For example, 
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt
index ae66f9b90a25..fcaf0b4efba2 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt
@@ -143,7 +143,8 @@ Parameter:     id:   handle for debug log
 
 Return Value:  none 
 
-Description:   frees memory for a debug log     
+Description:   frees memory for a debug log and removes all registered debug
+	       views.
                Must not be called within an interrupt handler 
 
 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt
index 28aa1075e291..b1b8587b86f0 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt
@@ -17,16 +17,6 @@ you must `#define __ARCH_WANT_UNLOCKED_CTXSW` in a header file
 Unlocked context switches introduce only a very minor performance
 penalty to the core scheduler implementation in the CONFIG_SMP case.
 
-2. Interrupt status
-By default, the switch_to arch function is called with interrupts
-disabled. Interrupts may be enabled over the call if it is likely to
-introduce a significant interrupt latency by adding the line
-`#define __ARCH_WANT_INTERRUPTS_ON_CTXSW` in the same place as for
-unlocked context switches. This define also implies
-`__ARCH_WANT_UNLOCKED_CTXSW`. See arch/arm/include/asm/system.h for an
-example.
-
-
 CPU idle
 ========
 Your cpu_idle routines need to obey the following rules:
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
index 91ecff07cede..f14f49304222 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
@@ -66,9 +66,7 @@ rq->cfs.load value, which is the sum of the weights of the tasks queued on the
 runqueue.
 
 CFS maintains a time-ordered rbtree, where all runnable tasks are sorted by the
-p->se.vruntime key (there is a subtraction using rq->cfs.min_vruntime to
-account for possible wraparounds).  CFS picks the "leftmost" task from this
-tree and sticks to it.
+p->se.vruntime key. CFS picks the "leftmost" task from this tree and sticks to it.
 As the system progresses forwards, the executed tasks are put into the tree
 more and more to the right --- slowly but surely giving a chance for every task
 to become the "leftmost task" and thus get on the CPU within a deterministic
@@ -130,7 +128,7 @@ CFS implements three scheduling policies:
     idle timer scheduler in order to avoid to get into priority
     inversion problems which would deadlock the machine.
 
-SCHED_FIFO/_RR are implemented in sched_rt.c and are as specified by
+SCHED_FIFO/_RR are implemented in sched/rt.c and are as specified by
 POSIX.
 
 The command chrt from util-linux-ng 2.13.1.1 can set all of these except
@@ -145,9 +143,9 @@ Classes," an extensible hierarchy of scheduler modules.  These modules
 encapsulate scheduling policy details and are handled by the scheduler core
 without the core code assuming too much about them.
 
-sched_fair.c implements the CFS scheduler described above.
+sched/fair.c implements the CFS scheduler described above.
 
-sched_rt.c implements SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR semantics, in a simpler way than
+sched/rt.c implements SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR semantics, in a simpler way than
 the previous vanilla scheduler did.  It uses 100 runqueues (for all 100 RT
 priority levels, instead of 140 in the previous scheduler) and it needs no
 expired array.
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt
index b7ee379b651b..4af80b1c05aa 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ is treated as one entity. The load of a group is defined as the sum of the
 load of each of its member CPUs, and only when the load of a group becomes
 out of balance are tasks moved between groups.
 
-In kernel/sched.c, trigger_load_balance() is run periodically on each CPU
+In kernel/sched/core.c, trigger_load_balance() is run periodically on each CPU
 through scheduler_tick(). It raises a softirq after the next regularly scheduled
 rebalancing event for the current runqueue has arrived. The actual load
 balancing workhorse, run_rebalance_domains()->rebalance_domains(), is then run
@@ -61,12 +61,8 @@ The implementor should read comments in include/linux/sched.h:
 struct sched_domain fields, SD_FLAG_*, SD_*_INIT to get an idea of
 the specifics and what to tune.
 
-For SMT, the architecture must define CONFIG_SCHED_SMT and provide a
-cpumask_t cpu_sibling_map[NR_CPUS], where cpu_sibling_map[i] is the mask of
-all "i"'s siblings as well as "i" itself.
-
 Architectures may retain the regular override the default SD_*_INIT flags
-while using the generic domain builder in kernel/sched.c if they wish to
+while using the generic domain builder in kernel/sched/core.c if they wish to
 retain the traditional SMT->SMP->NUMA topology (or some subset of that). This
 can be done by #define'ing ARCH_HASH_SCHED_TUNE.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX b/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX
index b48ded55b555..9b0787f965e9 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX
@@ -56,8 +56,6 @@ g_NCR5380.txt
 	- info on driver for NCR5380 and NCR53c400 based adapters
 hptiop.txt
 	- HIGHPOINT ROCKETRAID 3xxx RAID DRIVER
-ibmmca.txt
-	- info on driver for IBM adapters with MCA bus
 in2000.txt
 	- info on in2000 driver
 libsas.txt
@@ -94,3 +92,5 @@ sym53c8xx_2.txt
 	- info on second generation driver for sym53c8xx based adapters
 tmscsim.txt
 	- info on driver for AM53c974 based adapters
+ufs.txt
+	- info on Universal Flash Storage(UFS) and UFS host controller driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas
index 83f8ea8b79eb..6edaa65b0818 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas
@@ -1,3 +1,75 @@
+Release Date    : Sat. Aug 31, 2013 17:00:00 PST 2013 -
+			(emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
+			Adam Radford
+			Kashyap Desai
+			Sumit Saxena
+Current Version : 06.700.06.00-rc1
+Old Version     : 06.600.18.00-rc1
+    1. Add High Availability clustering support using shared Logical Disks.
+    2. Version and Changelog update.
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Release Date    : Wed. May 15, 2013 17:00:00 PST 2013 -
+			(emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
+			Adam Radford
+			Kashyap Desai
+			Sumit Saxena
+Current Version : 06.600.18.00-rc1
+Old Version     : 06.506.00.00-rc1
+    1. Return DID_ERROR for scsi io, when controller is in critical h/w error.
+    2. Fix the interrupt mask for Gen2 controller.
+    3. Update balance count in driver to be in sync of firmware.
+    4. Free event detail memory without device ID check.
+    5. Set IO request timeout value provided by OS timeout for Tape devices.
+    6. Add support for MegaRAID Fury (device ID-0x005f) 12Gb/s controllers.
+    7. Add support to display Customer branding details in syslog.
+    8. Set IoFlags to enable Fast Path for JBODs for Invader/Fury(12 Gb/s)
+    controllers.
+    9. Add support for Extended MSI-x vectors for Invader and Fury(12Gb/s
+    HBA).
+    10.Add support for Uneven Span PRL11.
+    11.Add support to differentiate between iMR and MR Firmware.
+    12.Version and Changelog update.
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Release Date    : Sat. Feb 9, 2013 17:00:00 PST 2013 -
+			(emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
+			Adam Radford
+Current Version : 06.506.00.00-rc1
+Old Version     : 06.504.01.00-rc1
+    1. Add 4k FastPath DIF support.
+    2. Dont load DevHandle unless FastPath enabled.
+    3. Version and Changelog update.
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Release Date    : Mon. Oct 1, 2012 17:00:00 PST 2012 -
+			(emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
+			Adam Radford
+Current Version : 06.504.01.00-rc1
+Old Version     : 00.00.06.18-rc1
+    1. Removed un-needed completion_lock spinlock calls.
+    2. Add module param for configurable MSI-X vector count.
+    3. Load io_request DataLength in bytes.
+    4. Add array boundary check for SystemPD.
+    5. Add SystemPD FastPath support.
+    6. Remove duplicate code.
+    7. Version, Changelog, Copyright update.
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Release Date    : Tue. Jun 17, 2012 17:00:00 PST 2012 -
+			(emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
+			Adam Radford/Kashyap Desai
+Current Version : 00.00.06.18-rc1
+Old Version     : 00.00.06.15-rc1
+    1. Fix Copyright dates.
+    2. Add throttlequeuedepth module parameter.
+    3. Add resetwaittime module parameter.
+    4. Move poll_aen_lock initializer.
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Release Date    : Mon. Mar 19, 2012 17:00:00 PST 2012 -
+			(emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
+			Adam Radford
+Current Version : 00.00.06.15-rc1
+Old Version     : 00.00.06.14-rc1
+    1. Optimize HostMSIxVectors setting.
+    2. Add fpRead/WriteCapable, fpRead/WriteAcrossStripe checks.
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Release Date    : Fri. Jan 6, 2012 17:00:00 PST 2010 -
 			(emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
 			Adam Radford
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx
index 19e7cd4bba66..5020b7b5a244 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx
@@ -1,48 +1,11 @@
-Copyright (c) 2003-2011 QLogic Corporation
-QLogic Linux/ESX Fibre Channel HBA Driver
+Copyright (c) 2003-2013 QLogic Corporation
+QLogic Linux FC-FCoE Driver
 
-This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6/ESX that may be
-distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file.
+This program includes a device driver for Linux 3.x.
 You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the
 GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as
 Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2).
 
-You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file
-under the following terms:
-
-	1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable),
-	   must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
-	   conditions and the following disclaimer.
-
-	2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above
-	   copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
-	   following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
-	   materials provided with the distribution.
-
-	3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to
-	   endorse or promote products derived from this software
-	   without specific prior written permission
-
-REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE,
-THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY
-EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
-PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
-BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
-EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
-TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
-DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
-ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
-OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
-POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-
-USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT
-CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR
-OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT,
-TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN
-ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN
-COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM.
 
 
 EXHIBIT A
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx
index ab899591ecb7..fcc27ad27d74 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-Copyright (c) 2003-2011 QLogic Corporation
+Copyright (c) 2003-2013 QLogic Corporation
 QLogic Linux iSCSI Driver
 
 This program includes a device driver for Linux 3.x.
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt
index 64ac7093c872..e2d3273000d4 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ The following information is available in this file:
                  INCORRECTLY CAN RENDER YOUR SYSTEM INOPERABLE.
                  USE THEM WITH CAUTION. 
 
-   Edit the file "modprobe.conf" in the directory /etc and add/edit a
+   Put a .conf file in the /etc/modprobe.d/ directory and add/edit a
    line containing 'options aic79xx aic79xx=[command[,command...]]' where
    'command' is one or more of the following:
    -----------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx.txt
index 18f8d1905e6a..7c5d0223d444 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx.txt
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ The following information is available in this file:
                  INCORRECTLY CAN RENDER YOUR SYSTEM INOPERABLE.
                  USE THEM WITH CAUTION. 
 
-   Edit the file "modprobe.conf" in the directory /etc and add/edit a
+   Put a .conf file in the /etc/modprobe.d directory and add/edit a
    line containing 'options aic7xxx aic7xxx=[command[,command...]]' where
    'command' is one or more of the following:
    -----------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/bfa.txt b/Documentation/scsi/bfa.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f2d6e9d1791e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/bfa.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+Linux driver for Brocade FC/FCOE adapters
+
+
+Supported Hardware
+------------------
+
+bfa 3.0.2.2 driver supports all Brocade FC/FCOE adapters. Below is a list of
+adapter models with corresponding PCIIDs.
+
+	PCIID		  	Model
+
+	1657:0013:1657:0014	425 4Gbps dual port FC HBA
+	1657:0013:1657:0014	825 8Gbps PCIe dual port FC HBA
+	1657:0013:103c:1742	HP 82B 8Gbps PCIedual port FC HBA
+	1657:0013:103c:1744	HP 42B 4Gbps dual port FC HBA
+	1657:0017:1657:0014	415 4Gbps single port FC HBA
+	1657:0017:1657:0014	815 8Gbps single port FC HBA
+	1657:0017:103c:1741	HP 41B 4Gbps single port FC HBA
+	1657:0017:103c 1743	HP 81B 8Gbps single port FC HBA
+	1657:0021:103c:1779	804 8Gbps FC HBA for HP Bladesystem c-class
+
+	1657:0014:1657:0014	1010 10Gbps single port CNA - FCOE
+	1657:0014:1657:0014	1020 10Gbps dual port CNA - FCOE
+	1657:0014:1657:0014	1007 10Gbps dual port CNA - FCOE
+	1657:0014:1657:0014	1741 10Gbps dual port CNA - FCOE
+
+	1657:0022:1657:0024	1860 16Gbps FC HBA
+	1657:0022:1657:0022	1860 10Gbps CNA - FCOE
+
+
+Firmware download
+-----------------
+
+The latest Firmware package for 3.0.2.2 bfa driver can be found at:
+
+http://www.brocade.com/services-support/drivers-downloads/adapters/Linux.page
+
+and then click following respective util package link:
+
+	Version			Link
+
+	v3.0.0.0	Linux Adapter Firmware package for RHEL 6.2, SLES 11SP2
+
+
+Configuration & Management utility download
+-------------------------------------------
+
+The latest driver configuration & management utility for 3.0.2.2 bfa driver can
+be found at:
+
+http://www.brocade.com/services-support/drivers-downloads/adapters/Linux.page
+
+and then click following respective util pacakge link
+
+	Version			Link
+
+	v3.0.2.0	Linux Adapter Firmware package for RHEL 6.2, SLES 11SP2
+
+
+Documentation
+-------------
+
+The latest Administration's Guide, Installation and Reference Manual,
+Troubleshooting Guide, and Release Notes for the corresponding out-of-box
+driver can be found at:
+
+http://www.brocade.com/services-support/drivers-downloads/adapters/Linux.page
+
+and use the following inbox and out-of-box driver version mapping to find
+the corresponding documentation:
+
+	Inbox Version		Out-of-box Version
+
+	v3.0.2.2		v3.0.0.0
+
+
+Support
+-------
+
+For general product and support info, go to the Brocade website at:
+
+http://www.brocade.com/services-support/index.page
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/hptiop.txt b/Documentation/scsi/hptiop.txt
index 9605179711f4..12ecfd308e55 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/hptiop.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/hptiop.txt
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ For Intel IOP based adapters, the controller IOP is accessed via PCI BAR0:
             0x40    Inbound Queue Port
             0x44    Outbound Queue Port
 
-For Marvell IOP based adapters, the IOP is accessed via PCI BAR0 and BAR1:
+For Marvell not Frey IOP based adapters, the IOP is accessed via PCI BAR0 and BAR1:
 
      BAR0 offset    Register
          0x20400    Inbound Doorbell Register
@@ -55,9 +55,31 @@ For Marvell IOP based adapters, the IOP is accessed via PCI BAR0 and BAR1:
      0x40-0x1040    Inbound Queue
    0x1040-0x2040    Outbound Queue
 
+For Marvell Frey IOP based adapters, the IOP is accessed via PCI BAR0 and BAR1:
 
-I/O Request Workflow
-----------------------
+     BAR0 offset    Register
+             0x0    IOP configuration information.
+
+     BAR1 offset    Register
+          0x4000    Inbound List Base Address Low
+          0x4004    Inbound List Base Address High
+          0x4018    Inbound List Write Pointer
+          0x402C    Inbound List Configuration and Control
+          0x4050    Outbound List Base Address Low
+          0x4054    Outbound List Base Address High
+          0x4058    Outbound List Copy Pointer Shadow Base Address Low
+          0x405C    Outbound List Copy Pointer Shadow Base Address High
+          0x4088    Outbound List Interrupt Cause
+          0x408C    Outbound List Interrupt Enable
+         0x1020C    PCIe Function 0 Interrupt Enable
+         0x10400    PCIe Function 0 to CPU Message A
+         0x10420    CPU to PCIe Function 0 Message A
+         0x10480    CPU to PCIe Function 0 Doorbell
+         0x10484    CPU to PCIe Function 0 Doorbell Enable
+
+
+I/O Request Workflow of Not Marvell Frey
+------------------------------------------
 
 All queued requests are handled via inbound/outbound queue port.
 A request packet can be allocated in either IOP or host memory.
@@ -101,6 +123,45 @@ register 0. An outbound message with the same value indicates the completion
 of an inbound message.
 
 
+I/O Request Workflow of Marvell Frey
+--------------------------------------
+
+All queued requests are handled via inbound/outbound list.
+
+To send a request to the controller:
+
+    - Allocate a free request in host DMA coherent memory.
+
+      Requests allocated in host memory must be aligned on 32-bytes boundary.
+
+    - Fill the request with index of the request in the flag.
+
+      Fill a free inbound list unit with the physical address and the size of
+      the request.
+
+      Set up the inbound list write pointer with the index of previous unit,
+      round to 0 if the index reaches the supported count of requests.
+
+    - Post the inbound list writer pointer to IOP.
+
+    - The IOP process the request. When the request is completed, the flag of
+      the request with or-ed IOPMU_QUEUE_MASK_HOST_BITS will be put into a
+      free outbound list unit and the index of the outbound list unit will be
+      put into the copy pointer shadow register. An outbound interrupt will be
+      generated.
+
+    - The host read the outbound list copy pointer shadow register and compare
+      with previous saved read pointer N. If they are different, the host will
+      read the (N+1)th outbound list unit.
+
+      The host get the index of the request from the (N+1)th outbound list
+      unit and complete the request.
+
+Non-queued requests (reset communication/reset/flush etc) can be sent via PCIe
+Function 0 to CPU Message A register. The CPU to PCIe Function 0 Message register
+with the same value indicates the completion of message.
+
+
 User-level Interface
 ---------------------
 
@@ -112,7 +173,7 @@ The driver exposes following sysfs attributes:
 
 
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Copyright (C) 2006-2009 HighPoint Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
+Copyright (C) 2006-2012 HighPoint Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
 
   This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index ac41a9fcac77..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1402 +0,0 @@
-
-               -=< The IBM Microchannel SCSI-Subsystem >=-
-	       
-	                 for the IBM PS/2 series
-		 
-	  	   Low Level Software-Driver for Linux
-		 
-     Copyright (c) 1995 Strom Systems, Inc. under the terms of the GNU 
-  General Public License. Originally written by Martin Kolinek, December 1995.
-   Officially modified and maintained by Michael Lang since January 1999.
-	   
- 	                       Version 4.0a
-	
-   Last update: January 3, 2001
-   
-   Before you Start
-   ----------------
-   This is the common README.ibmmca file for all driver releases of the 
-   IBM MCA SCSI driver for Linux. Please note, that driver releases 4.0
-   or newer do not work with kernel versions older than 2.4.0, while driver
-   versions older than 4.0 do not work with kernels 2.4.0 or later! If you
-   try to compile your kernel with the wrong driver source, the 
-   compilation is aborted and you get a corresponding error message. This is
-   no bug in the driver; it prevents you from using the wrong source code
-   with the wrong kernel version.
-
-   Authors of this Driver
-   ----------------------
-    - Chris Beauregard (improvement of the SCSI-device mapping by the driver)
-    - Martin Kolinek (origin, first release of this driver)
-    - Klaus Kudielka (multiple SCSI-host management/detection, adaption to
-                      Linux Kernel 2.1.x, module support)
-    - Michael Lang (assigning original pun/lun mapping, dynamical ldn
-                    assignment, rewritten adapter detection, this file, 
-		    patches, official driver maintenance and subsequent 
-		    debugging, related with the driver)
-
-   Table of Contents
-   -----------------
-   1 Abstract
-   2 Driver Description
-     2.1  IBM SCSI-Subsystem Detection
-     2.2  Physical Units, Logical Units, and Logical Devices
-     2.3  SCSI-Device Recognition and dynamical ldn Assignment
-     2.4  SCSI-Device Order
-     2.5  Regular SCSI-Command-Processing
-     2.6  Abort & Reset Commands
-     2.7  Disk Geometry
-     2.8  Kernel Boot Option
-     2.9  Driver Module Support
-     2.10 Multiple Hostadapter Support
-     2.11 /proc/scsi-Filesystem Information
-     2.12 /proc/mca-Filesystem Information
-     2.13 Supported IBM SCSI-Subsystems
-     2.14 Linux Kernel Versions
-   3 Code History
-   4 To do
-   5 Users' Manual
-     5.1 Commandline Parameters
-     5.2 Troubleshooting
-     5.3 Bug reports
-     5.4 Support WWW-page
-   6 References
-   7 Credits to
-     7.1 People
-     7.2 Sponsors & Supporters
-   8 Trademarks
-   9 Disclaimer
-
-                              * * *
-
-   1 Abstract
-   ----------
-   This README-file describes the IBM SCSI-subsystem low level driver for
-   Linux. The descriptions which were formerly kept in the source code have
-   been taken out of this file to simplify the codes readability. The driver
-   description has been updated, as most of the former description was already
-   quite outdated. The history of the driver development is also kept inside
-   here. Multiple historical developments have been summarized to shorten the
-   text size a bit. At the end of this file you can find a small manual for
-   this driver and hints to get it running on your machine.
-
-   2 Driver Description
-   --------------------
-   2.1 IBM SCSI-Subsystem Detection
-   --------------------------------
-   This is done in the ibmmca_detect() function. It first checks, if the
-   Microchannel-bus support is enabled, as the IBM SCSI-subsystem needs the
-   Microchannel. In a next step, a free interrupt is chosen and the main
-   interrupt handler is connected to it to handle answers of the SCSI-
-   subsystem(s). If the F/W SCSI-adapter is forced by the BIOS to use IRQ11
-   instead of IRQ14, IRQ11 is used for the IBM SCSI-2 F/W adapter. In a 
-   further step it is checked, if the adapter gets detected by force from
-   the kernel commandline, where the I/O port and the SCSI-subsystem id can 
-   be specified. The next step checks if there is an integrated SCSI-subsystem
-   installed. This register area is fixed through all IBM PS/2 MCA-machines 
-   and appears as something like a virtual slot 10 of the MCA-bus. On most
-   PS/2 machines, the POS registers of slot 10 are set to 0xff or 0x00 if not
-   integrated SCSI-controller is available. But on certain PS/2s, like model 
-   9595, this slot 10 is used to store other information which at earlier
-   stage confused the driver and resulted in the detection of some ghost-SCSI. 
-   If POS-register 2 and 3 are not 0x00 and not 0xff, but all other POS
-   registers are either 0xff or 0x00, there must be an integrated SCSI-
-   subsystem present and it will be registered as IBM Integrated SCSI-
-   Subsystem. The next step checks, if there is a slot-adapter installed on 
-   the MCA-bus. To get this, the first two POS-registers, that represent the 
-   adapter ID are checked. If they fit to one of the ids, stored in the 
-   adapter list, a SCSI-subsystem is assumed to be found in a slot and will be 
-   registered. This check is done through all possible MCA-bus slots to allow 
-   more than one SCSI-adapter to be present in the PS/2-system and this is 
-   already the first point of problems. Looking into the technical reference 
-   manual for the IBM PS/2 common interfaces, the POS2 register must have 
-   different interpretation of its single bits to avoid overlapping I/O
-   regions. While one can assume, that the integrated subsystem has a fix 
-   I/O-address at 0x3540 - 0x3547, further installed IBM SCSI-adapters must 
-   use a different I/O-address. This is expressed by bit 1 to 3 of POS2 
-   (multiplied by 8 + 0x3540). Bits 2 and 3 are reserved for the integrated 
-   subsystem, but not for the adapters! The following list shows, how the 
-   bits of POS2 and POS3 should be interpreted.
-   
-   The POS2-register of all PS/2 models' integrated SCSI-subsystems has the 
-   following interpretation of bits:
-                           Bit 7 - 4 : Chip Revision ID (Release)
-                           Bit 3 - 2 : Reserved
-                           Bit 1     : 8k NVRAM Disabled
-                           Bit 0     : Chip Enable (EN-Signal)
-   The POS3-register is interpreted as follows (for most IBM SCSI-subsys.):
-                           Bit 7 - 5 : SCSI ID
-                           Bit 4 - 0 : Reserved = 0
-   The slot-adapters have different interpretation of these bits. The IBM SCSI
-   adapter (w/Cache) and the IBM SCSI-2 F/W adapter use the following
-   interpretation of the POS2 register:
-                           Bit 7 - 4 : ROM Segment Address Select
-			   Bit 3 - 1 : Adapter I/O Address Select (*8+0x3540)
-			   Bit 0     : Adapter Enable (EN-Signal)
-   and for the POS3 register:
-                           Bit 7 - 5 : SCSI ID 
-			   Bit 4     : Fairness Enable (SCSI ID3 f. F/W)
-			   Bit 3 - 0 : Arbitration Level
-   The most modern product of the series is the IBM SCSI-2 F/W adapter, it 
-   allows dual-bus SCSI and SCSI-wide addressing, which means, PUNs may be
-   between 0 and 15. Here, Bit 4 is the high-order bit of the 4-bit wide
-   adapter PUN expression. In short words, this means, that IBM PS/2 machines 
-   can only support 1 single integrated subsystem by default. Additional
-   slot-adapters get ports assigned by the automatic configuration tool.
-
-   One day I found a patch in ibmmca_detect(), forcing the I/O-address to be 
-   0x3540 for integrated SCSI-subsystems, there was a remark placed, that on 
-   integrated IBM SCSI-subsystems of model 56, the POS2 register was showing 5.
-   This means, that really for these models, POS2 has to be interpreted
-   sticking to the technical reference guide. In this case, the bit 2 (4) is 
-   a reserved bit and may not be interpreted. These differences between the 
-   adapters and the integrated controllers are taken into account by the 
-   detection routine of the driver on from version >3.0g. 
-
-   Every time, a SCSI-subsystem is discovered, the ibmmca_register() function
-   is called. This function checks first, if the requested area for the I/O-
-   address of this SCSI-subsystem is still available and assigns this I/O-
-   area to the SCSI-subsystem. There are always 8 sequential I/O-addresses
-   taken for each individual SCSI-subsystem found, which are:
-   
-     Offset            Type                  Permissions
-       0     Command Interface Register 1    Read/Write
-       1     Command Interface Register 2    Read/Write
-       2     Command Interface Register 3    Read/Write
-       3     Command Interface Register 4    Read/Write
-       4     Attention Register              Read/Write
-       5     Basic Control Register          Read/Write
-       6     Interrupt Status Register       Read
-       7     Basic Status Register           Read
-   
-   After the I/O-address range is assigned, the host-adapter is assigned
-   to a local structure which keeps all adapter information needed for the
-   driver itself and the mid- and higher-level SCSI-drivers. The SCSI pun/lun
-   and the adapters' ldn tables are initialized and get probed afterwards by
-   the check_devices() function. If no further adapters are found, 
-   ibmmca_detect() quits.
-   
-   2.2 Physical Units, Logical Units, and Logical Devices
-   ------------------------------------------------------
-   There can be up to 56 devices on the SCSI bus (besides the adapter):
-   there are up to 7 "physical units" (each identified by physical unit 
-   number or pun, also called the scsi id, this is the number you select
-   with hardware jumpers), and each physical unit can have up to 8 
-   "logical units" (each identified by logical unit number, or lun, 
-   between 0 and 7). The IBM SCSI-2 F/W adapter offers this on up to two
-   busses and provides support for 30 logical devices at the same time, where
-   in wide-addressing mode you can have 16 puns with 32 luns on each device.
-   This section describes the handling of devices on non-F/W adapters.
-   Just imagine, that you can have 16 * 32 = 512 devices on a F/W adapter
-   which means a lot of possible devices for such a small machine.
-
-   Typically the adapter has pun=7, so puns of other physical units
-   are between 0 and 6(15). On a wide-adapter a pun higher than 7 is
-   possible, but is normally not used. Almost all physical units have only 
-   one logical unit, with lun=0. A CD-ROM jukebox would be an example of a 
-   physical unit with more than one logical unit.
-
-   The embedded microprocessor of the IBM SCSI-subsystem hides the complex
-   two-dimensional (pun,lun) organization from the operating system.
-   When the machine is powered-up (or rebooted), the embedded microprocessor 
-   checks, on its own, all 56 possible (pun,lun) combinations, and the first 
-   15 devices found are assigned into a one-dimensional array of so-called 
-   "logical devices", identified by "logical device numbers" or ldn. The last 
-   ldn=15 is reserved for the subsystem itself. Wide adapters may have 
-   to check up to 15 * 8 = 120 pun/lun combinations.
-   
-   2.3 SCSI-Device Recognition and Dynamical ldn Assignment
-   --------------------------------------------------------
-   One consequence of information hiding is that the real (pun,lun)    
-   numbers are also hidden. The two possibilities to get around this problem
-   are to offer fake pun/lun combinations to the operating system or to 
-   delete the whole mapping of the adapter and to reassign the ldns, using
-   the immediate assign command of the SCSI-subsystem for probing through
-   all possible pun/lun combinations.  An ldn is a "logical device number"
-   which is used by IBM SCSI-subsystems to access some valid SCSI-device.
-   At the beginning of the development of this driver, the following approach 
-   was used:
-   
-   First, the driver checked the ldn's (0 to 6) to find out which ldn's
-   have devices assigned. This was done by the functions check_devices() and
-   device_exists(). The interrupt handler has a special paragraph of code
-   (see local_checking_phase_flag) to assist in the checking. Assume, for
-   example, that three logical devices were found assigned at ldn 0, 1, 2.
-   These are presented to the upper layer of Linux SCSI driver
-   as devices with bogus (pun, lun) equal to (0,0), (1,0), (2,0). 
-   On the other hand, if the upper layer issues a command to device
-   say (4,0), this driver returns DID_NO_CONNECT error.
-
-   In a second step of the driver development, the following improvement has
-   been applied: The first approach limited the number of devices to 7, far
-   fewer than the 15 that it could use, then it just mapped ldn -> 
-   (ldn/8,ldn%8) for pun,lun.  We ended up with a real mishmash of puns
-   and luns, but it all seemed to work.
-
-   The latest development, which is implemented from the driver version 3.0
-   and later, realizes the device recognition in the following way:
-   The physical SCSI-devices on the SCSI-bus are probed via immediate_assign- 
-   and device_inquiry-commands, that is all implemented in a completely new
-   made check_devices() subroutine. This delivers an exact map of the physical
-   SCSI-world that is now stored in the get_scsi[][]-array. This means,
-   that the once hidden pun,lun assignment is now known to this driver.
-   It no longer believes in default-settings of the subsystem and maps all
-   ldns to existing pun,lun "by foot". This assures full control of the ldn
-   mapping and allows dynamical remapping of ldns to different pun,lun, if
-   there are more SCSI-devices installed than ldns available (n>15). The
-   ldns from 0 to 6 get 'hardwired' by this driver to puns 0 to 7 at lun=0,
-   excluding the pun of the subsystem. This assures, that at least simple 
-   SCSI-installations have optimum access-speed and are not touched by
-   dynamical remapping. The ldns 7 to 14 are put to existing devices with 
-   lun>0 or to non-existing devices, in order to satisfy the subsystem, if 
-   there are less than 15 SCSI-devices connected. In the case of more than 15 
-   devices, the dynamical mapping goes active. If the get_scsi[][] reports a 
-   device to be existent, but it has no ldn assigned, it gets an ldn out of 7
-   to 14. The numbers are assigned in cyclic order, therefore it takes 8 
-   dynamical reassignments on the SCSI-devices until a certain device 
-   loses its ldn again. This assures that dynamical remapping is avoided 
-   during intense I/O between up to 15 SCSI-devices (means pun,lun 
-   combinations). A further advantage of this method is that people who
-   build their kernel without probing on all luns will get what they expect,
-   because the driver just won't assign everything with lun>0 when 
-   multiple lun probing is inactive.
- 
-   2.4 SCSI-Device Order
-   ---------------------
-   Because of the now correct recognition of physical pun,lun, and 
-   their report to mid-level- and higher-level-drivers, the new reported puns
-   can be different from the old, faked puns. Therefore, Linux will eventually
-   change /dev/sdXXX assignments and prompt you for corrupted superblock
-   repair on boottime. In this case DO NOT PANIC, YOUR DISKS ARE STILL OK!!!
-   You have to reboot (CTRL-D) with an old kernel and set the /etc/fstab-file
-   entries right. After that, the system should come up as errorfree as before.
-   If your boot-partition is not coming up, also edit the /etc/lilo.conf-file
-   in a Linux session booted on old kernel and run lilo before reboot. Check
-   lilo.conf anyway to get boot on other partitions with foreign OSes right
-   again. But there exists a feature of this driver that allows you to change
-   the assignment order of the SCSI-devices by flipping the PUN-assignment.
-   See the next paragraph for a description.
- 
-   The problem for this is, that Linux does not assign the SCSI-devices in the
-   way as described in the ANSI-SCSI-standard. Linux assigns /dev/sda to 
-   the device with at minimum id 0. But the first drive should be at id 6,
-   because for historical reasons, drive at id 6 has, by hardware, the highest
-   priority and a drive at id 0 the lowest. IBM was one of the rare producers,
-   where the BIOS assigns drives belonging to the ANSI-SCSI-standard. Most 
-   other producers' BIOS does not (I think even Adaptec-BIOS). The 
-   IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD flag, which you set while configuring the
-   kernel enables to choose the preferred way of SCSI-device-assignment. 
-   Defining this flag would result in Linux determining the devices in the 
-   same order as DOS and OS/2 does on your MCA-machine. This is also standard 
-   on most industrial computers and OSes, like e.g. OS-9. Leaving this flag 
-   undefined will get your devices ordered in the default way of Linux. See 
-   also the remarks of Chris Beauregard from Dec 15, 1997 and the followups 
-   in section 3.
-   
-   2.5 Regular SCSI-Command-Processing
-   -----------------------------------
-   Only three functions get involved: ibmmca_queuecommand(), issue_cmd(),
-   and interrupt_handler().
-
-   The upper layer issues a scsi command by calling function 
-   ibmmca_queuecommand(). This function fills a "subsystem control block"
-   (scb) and calls a local function issue_cmd(), which writes a scb 
-   command into subsystem I/O ports. Once the scb command is carried out, 
-   the interrupt_handler() is invoked. If a device is determined to be 
-   existent and it has not assigned any ldn, it gets one dynamically.
-   For this, the whole stuff is done in ibmmca_queuecommand().
-
-   2.6 Abort & Reset Commands
-   --------------------------
-   These are implemented with busy waiting for interrupt to arrive.
-   ibmmca_reset() and ibmmca_abort() do not work sufficiently well
-   up to now and need still a lot of development work. This seems
-   to be a problem with other low-level SCSI drivers too, however
-   this should be no excuse.
-
-   2.7 Disk Geometry
-   -----------------
-   The ibmmca_biosparams() function should return the same disk geometry 
-   as the bios. This is needed for fdisk, etc. The returned geometry is 
-   certainly correct for disks smaller than 1 gigabyte. In the meantime,
-   it has been proved, that this works fine even with disks larger than
-   1 gigabyte.
-
-   2.8 Kernel Boot Option
-   ----------------------
-   The function ibmmca_scsi_setup() is called if option ibmmcascsi=n 
-   is passed to the kernel. See file linux/init/main.c for details.
-   
-   2.9 Driver Module Support
-   -------------------------
-   Is implemented and tested by K. Kudielka. This could probably not work
-   on kernels <2.1.0.
-  
-   2.10 Multiple Hostadapter Support
-   ---------------------------------
-   This driver supports up to eight interfaces of type IBM-SCSI-Subsystem. 
-   Integrated-, and MCA-adapters are automatically recognized. Unrecognizable
-   IBM-SCSI-Subsystem interfaces can be specified as kernel-parameters.
- 
-   2.11 /proc/scsi-Filesystem Information
-   --------------------------------------
-   Information about the driver condition is given in 
-   /proc/scsi/ibmmca/<host_no>. ibmmca_proc_info() provides this information.
-   
-   This table is quite informative for interested users. It shows the load
-   of commands on the subsystem and whether you are running the bypassed
-   (software) or integrated (hardware) SCSI-command set (see below). The
-   amount of accesses is shown. Read, write, modeselect is shown separately
-   in order to help debugging problems with CD-ROMs or tapedrives.
-   
-   The following table shows the list of 15 logical device numbers, that are
-   used by the SCSI-subsystem. The load on each ldn is shown in the table,
-   again, read and write commands are split. The last column shows the amount
-   of reassignments, that have been applied to the ldns, if you have more than
-   15 pun/lun combinations available on the SCSI-bus.
-   
-   The last two tables show the pun/lun map and the positions of the ldns
-   on this pun/lun map. This may change during operation, when a ldn is
-   reassigned to another pun/lun combination. If the necessity for dynamical
-   assignments is set to 'no', the ldn structure keeps static.
-   
-   2.12 /proc/mca-Filesystem Information
-   -------------------------------------
-   The slot-file contains all default entries and in addition chip and I/O-
-   address information of the SCSI-subsystem. This information is provided
-   by ibmmca_getinfo().
-   
-   2.13 Supported IBM SCSI-Subsystems
-   ----------------------------------
-   The following IBM SCSI-subsystems are supported by this driver:
-   
-     - IBM Fast/Wide SCSI-2 Adapter
-     - IBM 7568 Industrial Computer SCSI Adapter w/Cache
-     - IBM Expansion Unit SCSI Controller
-     - IBM SCSI Adapter w/Cache
-     - IBM SCSI Adapter
-     - IBM Integrated SCSI Controller
-     - All clones, 100% compatible with the chipset and subsystem command
-       system of IBM SCSI-adapters (forced detection)
-     
-   2.14 Linux Kernel Versions
-   --------------------------
-   The IBM SCSI-subsystem low level driver is prepared to be used with
-   all versions of Linux between 2.0.x and 2.4.x. The compatibility checks
-   are fully implemented up from version 3.1e of the driver. This means, that
-   you just need the latest ibmmca.h and ibmmca.c file and copy it in the
-   linux/drivers/scsi directory. The code is automatically adapted during 
-   kernel compilation. This is different from kernel 2.4.0! Here version 
-   4.0 or later of the driver must be used for kernel 2.4.0 or later. Version
-   4.0 or later does not work together with older kernels! Driver versions
-   older than 4.0 do not work together with kernel 2.4.0 or later. They work
-   on all older kernels.
-
-   3 Code History
-   --------------
-   Jan 15 1996:  First public release.
-   - Martin Kolinek
-
-   Jan 23 1996:  Scrapped code which reassigned scsi devices to logical
-   device numbers. Instead, the existing assignment (created
-   when the machine is powered-up or rebooted) is used. 
-   A side effect is that the upper layer of Linux SCSI 
-   device driver gets bogus scsi ids (this is benign), 
-   and also the hard disks are ordered under Linux the 
-   same way as they are under dos (i.e., C: disk is sda, 
-   D: disk is sdb, etc.).
-   - Martin Kolinek
-
-   I think that the CD-ROM is now detected only if a CD is 
-   inside CD_ROM while Linux boots. This can be fixed later,
-   once the driver works on all types of PS/2's.
-   - Martin Kolinek
-
-   Feb 7 1996:   Modified biosparam function. Fixed the CD-ROM detection. 
-   For now, devices other than harddisk and CD_ROM are 
-   ignored. Temporarily modified abort() function 
-   to behave like reset().
-   - Martin Kolinek
-
-   Mar 31 1996:  The integrated scsi subsystem is correctly found
-   in PS/2 models 56,57, but not in model 76. Therefore
-   the ibmmca_scsi_setup() function has been added today.
-   This function allows the user to force detection of
-   scsi subsystem. The kernel option has format
-   ibmmcascsi=n
-   where n is the scsi_id (pun) of the subsystem. Most likely, n is 7.
-   - Martin Kolinek
-
-   Aug 21 1996:  Modified the code which maps ldns to (pun,0).  It was
-   insufficient for those of us with CD-ROM changers.
-   - Chris Beauregard
- 
-   Dec 14 1996: More improvements to the ldn mapping.  See check_devices
-   for details.  Did more fiddling with the integrated SCSI detection,
-   but I think it's ultimately hopeless without actually testing the
-   model of the machine.  The 56, 57, 76 and 95 (ultimedia) all have
-   different integrated SCSI register configurations.  However, the 56
-   and 57 are the only ones that have problems with forced detection.
-   - Chris Beauregard
- 
-   Mar 8-16 1997: Modified driver to run as a module and to support 
-   multiple adapters. A structure, called ibmmca_hostdata, is now
-   present, containing all the variables, that were once only
-   available for one single adapter. The find_subsystem-routine has vanished.
-   The hardware recognition is now done in ibmmca_detect directly.
-   This routine checks for presence of MCA-bus, checks the interrupt
-   level and continues with checking the installed hardware.
-   Certain PS/2-models do not recognize a SCSI-subsystem automatically.
-   Hence, the setup defined by command-line-parameters is checked first.
-   Thereafter, the routine probes for an integrated SCSI-subsystem.
-   Finally, adapters are checked. This method has the advantage to cover all
-   possible combinations of multiple SCSI-subsystems on one MCA-board. Up to
-   eight SCSI-subsystems can be recognized and announced to the upper-level
-   drivers with this improvement. A set of defines made changes to other
-   routines as small as possible.
-   - Klaus Kudielka
-   
-   May 30 1997: (v1.5b)
-   1) SCSI-command capability enlarged by the recognition of MODE_SELECT.
-      This needs the RD-Bit to be disabled on IM_OTHER_SCSI_CMD_CMD which 
-      allows data to be written from the system to the device. It is a
-      necessary step to be allowed to set blocksize of SCSI-tape-drives and 
-      the tape-speed, without confusing the SCSI-Subsystem.
-   2) The recognition of a tape is included in the check_devices routine.
-      This is done by checking for TYPE_TAPE, that is already defined in
-      the kernel-scsi-environment. The markup of a tape is done in the 
-      global ldn_is_tape[] array. If the entry on index ldn 
-      is 1, there is a tapedrive connected.
-   3) The ldn_is_tape[] array is necessary to distinguish between tape- and 
-      other devices. Fixed blocklength devices should not cause a problem
-      with the SCB-command for read and write in the ibmmca_queuecommand
-      subroutine. Therefore, I only derivate the READ_XX, WRITE_XX for
-      the tape-devices, as recommended by IBM in this Technical Reference,
-      mentioned below. (IBM recommends to avoid using the read/write of the
-      subsystem, but the fact was, that read/write causes a command error from
-      the subsystem and this causes kernel-panic.)
-   4) In addition, I propose to use the ldn instead of a fix char for the
-      display of PS2_DISK_LED_ON(). On 95, one can distinguish between the
-      devices that are accessed. It shows activity and easyfies debugging.   
-   The tape-support has been tested with a SONY SDT-5200 and a HP DDS-2
-   (I do not know yet the type). Optimization and CD-ROM audio-support, 
-   I am working on ...
-   - Michael Lang
-   
-   June 19 1997: (v1.6b)
-   1) Submitting the extra-array ldn_is_tape[] -> to the local ld[]
-      device-array. 
-   2) CD-ROM Audio-Play seems to work now.
-   3) When using DDS-2 (120M) DAT-Tapes, mtst shows still density-code
-      0x13 for ordinary DDS (61000 BPM) instead 0x24 for DDS-2. This appears 
-      also on Adaptec 2940 adaptor in a PCI-System. Therefore, I assume that 
-      the problem is independent of the low-level-driver/bus-architecture.
-   4) Hexadecimal ldn on PS/2-95 LED-display.
-   5) Fixing of the PS/2-LED on/off that it works right with tapedrives and
-      does not confuse the disk_rw_in_progress counter.
-   - Michael Lang
-  
-   June 21 1997: (v1.7b)
-   1) Adding of a proc_info routine to inform in /proc/scsi/ibmmca/<host> the
-      outer-world about operational load statistics on the different ldns,
-      seen by the driver. Everybody that has more than one IBM-SCSI should
-      test this, because I only have one and cannot see what happens with more
-      than one IBM-SCSI hosts.
-   2) Definition of a driver version-number to have a better recognition of 
-      the source when there are existing too much releases that may confuse
-      the user, when reading about release-specific problems. Up to know,
-      I calculated the version-number to be 1.7. Because we are in BETA-test
-      yet, it is today 1.7b.
-   3) Sorry for the heavy bug I programmed on June 19 1997! After that, the
-      CD-ROM did not work any more! The C7-command was a fake impression
-      I got while programming. Now, the READ and WRITE commands for CD-ROM are
-      no longer running over the subsystem, but just over 
-      IM_OTHER_SCSI_CMD_CMD. On my observations (PS/2-95), now CD-ROM mounts
-      much faster(!) and hopefully all fancy multimedia-functions, like direct
-      digital recording from audio-CDs also work. (I tried it with cdda2wav
-      from the cdwtools-package and it filled up the harddisk immediately :-).)
-      To easify boolean logics, a further local device-type in ld[], called
-      is_cdrom has been included.
-   4) If one uses a SCSI-device of unsupported type/commands, one
-      immediately runs into a kernel-panic caused by Command Error. To better
-      understand which SCSI-command caused the problem, I extended this
-      specific panic-message slightly.
-   - Michael Lang
- 
-   June 25 1997: (v1.8b)
-   1) Some cosmetic changes for the handling of SCSI-device-types.
-      Now, also CD-Burners / WORMs and SCSI-scanners should work. For
-      MO-drives I have no experience, therefore not yet supported.
-      In logical_devices I changed from different type-variables to one
-      called 'device_type' where the values, corresponding to scsi.h,
-      of a SCSI-device are stored.
-   2) There existed a small bug, that maps a device, coming after a SCSI-tape
-      wrong. Therefore, e.g. a CD-ROM changer would have been mapped wrong
-      -> problem removed.
-   3) Extension of the logical_device structure. Now it contains also device,
-      vendor and revision-level of a SCSI-device for internal usage.
-   - Michael Lang
-
-   June 26-29 1997: (v2.0b)
-   1) The release number 2.0b is necessary because of the completely new done
-      recognition and handling of SCSI-devices with the adapter. As I got
-      from Chris the hint, that the subsystem can reassign ldns dynamically,
-      I remembered this immediate_assign-command, I found once in the handbook.
-      Now, the driver first kills all ldn assignments that are set by default
-      on the SCSI-subsystem. After that, it probes on all puns and luns for
-      devices by going through all combinations with immediate_assign and
-      probing for devices, using device_inquiry. The found physical(!) pun,lun
-      structure is stored in get_scsi[][] as device types. This is followed
-      by the assignment of all ldns to existing SCSI-devices. If more ldns
-      than devices are available, they are assigned to non existing pun,lun
-      combinations to satisfy the adapter. With this, the dynamical mapping
-      was possible to implement. (For further info see the text in the 
-      source code and in the description below. Read the description
-      below BEFORE installing this driver on your system!)
-   2) Changed the name IBMMCA_DRIVER_VERSION to IBMMCA_SCSI_DRIVER_VERSION.
-   3) The LED-display shows on PS/2-95 no longer the ldn, but the SCSI-ID
-      (pun) of the accessed SCSI-device. This is now senseful, because the 
-      pun known within the driver is exactly the pun of the physical device
-      and no longer a fake one.
-   4) The /proc/scsi/ibmmca/<host_no> consists now of the first part, where
-      hit-statistics of ldns is shown and a second part, where the maps of 
-      physical and logical SCSI-devices are displayed. This could be very 
-      interesting, when one is using more than 15 SCSI-devices in order to 
-      follow the dynamical remapping of ldns.
-   - Michael Lang
- 
-   June 26-29 1997: (v2.0b-1)
-   1) I forgot to switch the local_checking_phase_flag to 1 and back to 0
-      in the dynamical remapping part in ibmmca_queuecommand for the 
-      device_exist routine. Sorry.
-   - Michael Lang
- 
-   July 1-13 1997: (v3.0b,c)
-   1) Merging of the driver-developments of Klaus Kudielka and Michael Lang 
-      in order to get a optimum and unified driver-release for the 
-      IBM-SCSI-Subsystem-Adapter(s).
-         For people, using the Kernel-release >=2.1.0, module-support should 
-      be no problem. For users, running under <2.1.0, module-support may not 
-      work, because the methods have changed between 2.0.x and 2.1.x.
-   2) Added some more effective statistics for /proc-output.
-   3) Change typecasting at necessary points from (unsigned long) to
-      virt_to_bus().
-   4) Included #if... at special points to have specific adaption of the
-      driver to kernel 2.0.x and 2.1.x. It should therefore also run with 
-      later releases.
-   5) Magneto-Optical drives and medium-changers are also recognized, now.
-      Therefore, we have a completely gapfree recognition of all SCSI-
-      device-types, that are known by Linux up to kernel 2.1.31.
-   6) The flag SCSI_IBMMCA_DEV_RESET has been inserted. If it is set within
-      the configuration, each connected SCSI-device will get a reset command
-      during boottime. This can be necessary for some special SCSI-devices.
-      This flag should be included in Config.in.
-      (See also the new Config.in file.)
-   Probable next improvement: bad disk handler.
-   - Michael Lang
- 
-   Sept 14 1997: (v3.0c)
-   1) Some debugging and speed optimization applied.
-   - Michael Lang
-
-   Dec 15, 1997
-    - chrisb@truespectra.com
-    - made the front panel display thingy optional, specified from the
-    command-line via ibmmcascsi=display.  Along the lines of the /LED
-    option for the OS/2 driver.
-    - fixed small bug in the LED display that would hang some machines.
-    - reversed ordering of the drives (using the
-    IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD define).  This is necessary for two main
-    reasons:
-	- users who've already installed Linux won't be screwed.  Keep
-	in mind that not everyone is a kernel hacker.
-	- be consistent with the BIOS ordering of the drives.  In the
-	BIOS, id 6 is C:, id 0 might be D:.  With this scheme, they'd be
-	backwards.  This confuses the crap out of those heathens who've
-	got a impure Linux installation (which, <wince>, I'm one of).
-    This whole problem arises because IBM is actually non-standard with
-    the id to BIOS mappings.  You'll find, in fdomain.c, a similar
-    comment about a few FD BIOS revisions.  The Linux (and apparently
-    industry) standard is that C: maps to scsi id (0,0).  Let's stick
-    with that standard.
-    - Since this is technically a branch of my own, I changed the
-    version number to 3.0e-cpb.
-
-   Jan 17, 1998: (v3.0f)
-   1) Addition of some statistical info for /proc in proc_info.
-   2) Taking care of the SCSI-assignment problem, dealed by Chris at Dec 15
-      1997. In fact, IBM is right, concerning the assignment of SCSI-devices 
-      to driveletters. It is conform to the ANSI-definition of the SCSI-
-      standard to assign drive C: to SCSI-id 6, because it is the highest
-      hardware priority after the hostadapter (that has still today by
-      default everywhere id 7). Also realtime-operating systems that I use, 
-      like LynxOS and OS9, which are quite industrial systems use top-down
-      numbering of the harddisks, that is also starting at id 6. Now, one
-      sits a bit between two chairs. On one hand side, using the define
-      IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD makes Linux assigning disks conform to
-      the IBM- and ANSI-SCSI-standard and keeps this driver downward
-      compatible to older releases, on the other hand side, people is quite
-      habituated in believing that C: is assigned to (0,0) and much other
-      SCSI-BIOS do so. Therefore, I moved the IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD 
-      define out of the driver and put it into Config.in as subitem of 
-      'IBM SCSI support'. A help, added to Documentation/Configure.help 
-      explains the differences between saying 'y' or 'n' to the user, when 
-      IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD prompts, so the ordinary user is enabled to 
-      choose the way of assignment, depending on his own situation and gusto.
-   3) Adapted SCSI_IBMMCA_DEV_RESET to the local naming convention, so it is
-      now called IBMMCA_SCSI_DEV_RESET.
-   4) Optimization of proc_info and its subroutines.
-   5) Added more in-source-comments and extended the driver description by
-      some explanation about the SCSI-device-assignment problem.
-   - Michael Lang
-   
-   Jan 18, 1998: (v3.0g)
-   1) Correcting names to be absolutely conform to the later 2.1.x releases.
-      This is necessary for 
-            IBMMCA_SCSI_DEV_RESET -> CONFIG_IBMMCA_SCSI_DEV_RESET
-            IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD -> CONFIG_IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD
-   - Michael Lang
- 
-   Jan 18, 1999: (v3.1 MCA-team internal)
-   1) The multiple hosts structure is accessed from every subroutine, so there
-      is no longer the address of the device structure passed from function
-      to function, but only the hostindex. A call by value, nothing more. This
-      should really be understood by the compiler and the subsystem should get
-      the right values and addresses.
-   2) The SCSI-subsystem detection was not complete and quite hugely buggy up
-      to now, compared to the technical manual. The interpretation of the pos2
-      register is not as assumed by people before, therefore, I dropped a note
-      in the ibmmca_detect function to show the registers' interpretation.
-      The pos-registers of integrated SCSI-subsystems do not contain any 
-      information concerning the IO-port offset, really. Instead, they contain
-      some info about the adapter, the chip, the NVRAM .... The I/O-port is
-      fixed to 0x3540 - 0x3547. There can be more than one adapters in the 
-      slots and they get an offset for the I/O area in order to get their own
-      I/O-address area. See chapter 2 for detailed description. At least, the 
-      detection should now work right, even on models other than 95. The 95ers
-      came happily around the bug, as their pos2 register contains always 0 
-      in the critical area. Reserved bits are not allowed to be interpreted, 
-      therefore, IBM is allowed to set those bits as they like and they may 
-      really vary between different PS/2 models. So, now, no interpretation 
-      of reserved bits - hopefully no trouble here anymore.
-   3) The command error, which you may get on models 55, 56, 57, 70, 77 and
-      P70 may have been caused by the fact, that adapters of older design do
-      not like sending commands to non-existing SCSI-devices and will react
-      with a command error as a sign of protest. While this error is not
-      present on IBM SCSI Adapter w/cache, it appears on IBM Integrated SCSI
-      Adapters. Therefore, I implemented a workaround to forgive those 
-      adapters their protests, but it is marked up in the statistics, so
-      after a successful boot, you can see in /proc/scsi/ibmmca/<host_number>
-      how often the command errors have been forgiven to the SCSI-subsystem.
-      If the number is bigger than 0, you have a SCSI subsystem of older
-      design, what should no longer matter.
-   4) ibmmca_getinfo() has been adapted very carefully, so it shows in the 
-      slotn file really, what is senseful to be presented.
-   5) ibmmca_register() has been extended in its parameter list in order to
-      pass the right name of the SCSI-adapter to Linux.
-   - Michael Lang
-
-   Feb 6, 1999: (v3.1)
-   1) Finally, after some 3.1Beta-releases, the 3.1 release. Sorry, for 
-      the delayed release, but it was not finished with the release of 
-      Kernel 2.2.0.
-   - Michael Lang
-   
-   Feb 10, 1999 (v3.1)
-   1) Added a new commandline parameter called 'bypass' in order to bypass
-      every integrated subsystem SCSI-command consequently in case of
-      troubles.
-   2) Concatenated read_capacity requests to the harddisks. It gave a lot
-      of troubles with some controllers and after I wanted to apply some
-      extensions, it jumped out in the same situation, on my w/cache, as like 
-      on D. Weinehalls' Model 56, having integrated SCSI. This gave me the 
-      decisive hint to move the code-part out and declare it global. Now
-      it seems to work far better and more stable. Let us see what
-      the world thinks of it...
-   3) By the way, only Sony DAT-drives seem to show density code 0x13. A
-      test with a HP drive gave right results, so the problem is vendor-
-      specific and not a problem of the OS or the driver.
-   - Michael Lang
-   
-   Feb 18, 1999 (v3.1d)
-   1) The abort command and the reset function have been checked for 
-      inconsistencies. From the logical point of thinking, they work
-      at their optimum, now, but as the subsystem does not answer with an
-      interrupt, abort never finishes, sigh...
-   2) Everything, that is accessed by a busmaster request from the adapter
-      is now declared as global variable, even the return-buffer in the
-      local checking phase. This assures, that no accesses to undefined memory
-      areas are performed.
-   3) In ibmmca.h, the line unchecked_isa_dma is added with 1 in order to
-      avoid memory-pointers for the areas higher than 16MByte in order to
-      be sure, it also works on 16-Bit Microchannel bus systems.
-   4) A lot of small things have been found, but nothing that endangered the
-      driver operations. Just it should be more stable, now.
-   - Michael Lang
-      
-   Feb 20, 1999 (v3.1e)
-   1) I took the warning from the Linux Kernel Hackers Guide serious and 
-      checked the cmd->result return value to the done-function very carefully.
-      It is obvious, that the IBM SCSI only delivers the tsb.dev_status, if
-      some error appeared, else it is undefined. Now, this is fixed. Before
-      any SCB command gets queued, the tsb.dev_status is set to 0, so the 
-      cmd->result won't screw up Linux higher level drivers.
-   2) The reset-function has slightly improved. This is still planned for 
-      abort. During the abort and the reset function, no interrupts are 
-      allowed. This is however quite hard to cope with, so the INT-status
-      register is read. When the interrupt gets queued, one can find its
-      status immediately on that register and is enabled to continue in the
-      reset function. I had no chance to test this really, only in a bogus 
-      situation, I got this function running, but the situation was too much
-      worse for Linux :-(, so tests will continue.
-   3) Buffers got now consistent. No open address mapping, as before and
-      therefore no further troubles with the unassigned memory segmentation
-      faults that scrambled probes on 95XX series and even on 85XX series,
-      when the kernel is done in a not so perfectly fitting way.
-   4) Spontaneous interrupts from the subsystem, appearing without any
-      command previously queued are answered with a DID_BAD_INTR result.
-   5) Taken into account ZP Gus' proposals to reverse the SCSI-device
-      scan order. As it does not work on Kernel 2.1.x or 2.2.x, as proposed
-      by him, I implemented it in a slightly derived way, which offers in 
-      addition more flexibility.
-   - Michael Lang
-
-   Apr 23, 2000 (v3.2pre1)
-   1) During a very long time, I collected a huge amount of bug reports from
-      various people, trying really quite different things on their SCSI-
-      PS/2s. Today, all these bug reports are taken into account and should be
-      mostly solved. The major topics were:
-      - Driver crashes during boottime by no obvious reason.
-      - Driver panics while the midlevel-SCSI-driver is trying to inquire
-        the SCSI-device properties, even though hardware is in perfect state.
-      - Displayed info for the various slot-cards is interpreted wrong.
-      The main reasons for the crashes were two:
-      1) The commands to check for device information like INQUIRY, 
-         TEST_UNIT_READY, REQUEST_SENSE and MODE_SENSE cause the devices
-	 to deliver information of up to 255 bytes. Midlevel drivers offer
-	 1024 bytes of space for the answer, but the IBM-SCSI-adapters do
-	 not accept this, as they stick quite near to ANSI-SCSI and report
-	 a COMMAND_ERROR message which causes the driver to panic. The main
-	 problem was located around the INQUIRY command. Now, for all the
-	 mentioned commands, the buffersize sent to the adapter is at 
-	 maximum 255 which seems to be a quite reasonable solution. 
-	 TEST_UNIT_READY gets a buffersize of 0 to make sure that no 
-	 data is transferred in order to avoid any possible command failure.
-      2) On unsuccessful TEST_UNIT_READY, the mid-level driver has to send
-         a REQUEST_SENSE in order to see where the problem is located. This
-	 REQUEST_SENSE may have various length in its answer-buffer. IBM
-	 SCSI-subsystems report a command failure if the returned buffersize
-	 is different from the sent buffersize, but this can be suppressed by
-	 a special bit, which is now done and problems seem to be solved.
-   2) Code adaption to all kernel-releases. Now, the 3.2 code compiles on 
-      2.0.x, 2.1.x, 2.2.x and 2.3.x kernel releases without any code-changes.
-   3) Commandline-parameters are recognized again, even under Kernel 2.3.x or
-      higher.
-   - Michael Lang   
-
-   April 27, 2000 (v3.2pre2)
-   1) Bypassed commands get read by the adapter by one cycle instead of two.
-      This increases SCSI-performance.
-   2) Synchronous datatransfer is provided for sure to be 5 MHz on older
-      SCSI and 10 MHz on internal F/W SCSI-adapter.
-   3) New commandline parameters allow to force the adapter to slow down while
-      in synchronous transfer. Could be helpful for very old devices.
-   - Michael Lang
-   
-   June 2, 2000 (v3.2pre5)
-   1) Added Jim Shorney's contribution to make the activity indicator
-      flashing in addition to the LED-alphanumeric display-panel on
-      models 95A. To be enabled to choose this feature freely, a new
-      commandline parameter is added, called 'activity'.
-   2) Added the READ_CONTROL bit for test_unit_ready SCSI-command.
-   3) Added some suppress_exception bits to read_device_capacity and
-      all device_inquiry occurrences in the driver code.
-   4) Complaints about the various KERNEL_VERSION implementations are
-      taken into account. Every local_LinuxKernelVersion occurrence is
-      now replaced by KERNEL_VERSION, defined in linux/version.h. 
-      Corresponding changes were applied to ibmmca.h, too. This was a
-      contribution to all kernel-parts by Philipp Hahn.
-   - Michael Lang
-   
-   July 17, 2000 (v3.2pre8)
-   A long period of collecting bug reports from all corners of the world
-   now lead to the following corrections to the code:
-   1) SCSI-2 F/W support crashed with a COMMAND ERROR. The reason for this 
-      was that it is possible to disable Fast-SCSI for the external bus.
-      The feature-control command, where this crash appeared regularly, tried
-      to set the maximum speed of 10MHz synchronous transfer speed and that
-      reports a COMMAND ERROR if external bus Fast-SCSI is disabled. Now,
-      the feature-command probes down from maximum speed until the adapter 
-      stops to complain, which is at the same time the maximum possible
-      speed selected in the reference program. So, F/W external can run at
-      5 MHz (slow-) or 10 MHz (fast-SCSI). During feature probing, the 
-      COMMAND ERROR message is used to detect if the adapter does not complain.
-   2) Up to now, only combined busmode is supported, if you use external
-      SCSI-devices, attached to the F/W-controller. If dual bus is selected,
-      only the internal SCSI-devices get accessed by Linux. For most 
-      applications, this should do fine. 
-   3) Wide-SCSI-addressing (16-Bit) is now possible for the internal F/W
-      bus on the F/W adapter. If F/W adapter is detected, the driver
-      automatically uses the extended PUN/LUN <-> LDN mapping tables, which
-      are now new from 3.2pre8. This allows PUNs between 0 and 15 and should
-      provide more fun with the F/W adapter.
-   4) Several machines use the SCSI: POS registers for internal/undocumented
-      storage of system relevant info. This confused the driver, mainly on
-      models 9595, as it expected no onboard SCSI only, if all POS in
-      the integrated SCSI-area are set to 0x00 or 0xff. Now, the mechanism
-      to check for integrated SCSI is much more restrictive and these problems
-      should be history.
-   - Michael Lang          
-
-   July 18, 2000 (v3.2pre9)
-   This develop rather quickly at the moment. Two major things were still
-   missing in 3.2pre8:
-   1) The adapter PUN for F/W adapters has 4-bits, while all other adapters
-      have 3-bits. This is now taken into account for F/W.
-   2) When you select CONFIG_IBMMCA_SCSI_ORDER_STANDARD, you should 
-      normally get the inverse probing order of your devices on the SCSI-bus.
-      The ANSI device order gets scrambled in version 3.2pre8!! Now, a new
-      and tested algorithm inverts the device-order on the SCSI-bus and
-      automatically avoids accidental access to whatever SCSI PUN the adapter 
-      is set and works with SCSI- and Wide-SCSI-addressing.
-   - Michael Lang
-
-   July 23, 2000 (v3.2pre10 unpublished) 
-   1) LED panel display supports wide-addressing in ibmmca=display mode.
-   2) Adapter-information and autoadaption to address-space is done.
-   3) Auto-probing for maximum synchronous SCSI transfer rate is working.
-   4) Optimization to some embedded function calls is applied.
-   5) Added some comment for the user to wait for SCSI-devices being probed.
-   6) Finished version 3.2 for Kernel 2.4.0. It least, I thought it is but...
-   - Michael Lang
-   
-   July 26, 2000 (v3.2pre11)
-   1) I passed a horrible weekend getting mad with NMIs on kernel 2.2.14 and
-      a model 9595. Asking around in the community, nobody except of me has
-      seen such errors. Weird, but I am trying to recompile everything on
-      the model 9595. Maybe, as I use a specially modified gcc, that could
-      cause problems. But, it was not the reason. The true background was,
-      that the kernel was compiled for i386 and the 9595 has a 486DX-2. 
-      Normally, no troubles should appear, but for this special machine,
-      only the right processor support is working fine!
-   2) Previous problems with synchronous speed, slowing down from one adapter 
-      to the next during probing are corrected. Now, local variables store
-      the synchronous bitmask for every single adapter found on the MCA bus.
-   3) LED alphanumeric panel support for XX95 systems is now showing some
-      alive rotator during boottime. This makes sense, when no monitor is 
-      connected to the system. You can get rid of all display activity, if
-      you do not use any parameter or just ibmmcascsi=activity, for the 
-      harddrive activity LED, existent on all PS/2, except models 8595-XXX.
-      If no monitor is available, please use ibmmcascsi=display, which works
-      fine together with the linuxinfo utility for the LED-panel.
-   - Michael Lang
-   
-   July 29, 2000 (v3.2)
-   1) Submission of this driver for kernel 2.4test-XX and 2.2.17.
-   - Michael Lang
-   
-   December 28, 2000 (v3.2d / v4.0)
-   1) The interrupt handler had some wrong statement to wait for. This
-      was done due to experimental reasons during 3.2 development but it
-      has shown that this is not stable enough. Going back to wait for the
-      adapter to be not busy is best.
-   2) Inquiry requests can be shorter than 255 bytes of return buffer. Due
-      to a bug in the ibmmca_queuecommand routine, this buffer was forced
-      to 255 at minimum. If the memory address, this return buffer is pointing
-      to does not offer more space, invalid memory accesses destabilized the
-      kernel.
-   3) version 4.0 is only valid for kernel 2.4.0 or later. This is necessary
-      to remove old kernel version dependent waste from the driver. 3.2d is
-      only distributed with older kernels but keeps compatibility with older
-      kernel versions. 4.0 and higher versions cannot be used with older 
-      kernels anymore!! You must have at least kernel 2.4.0!!
-   4) The commandline argument 'bypass' and all its functionality got removed
-      in version 4.0. This was never really necessary, as all troubles were
-      based on non-command related reasons up to now, so bypassing commands
-      did not help to avoid any bugs. It is kept in 3.2X for debugging reasons.
-   5) Dynamic reassignment of ldns was again verified and analyzed to be
-      completely inoperational. This is corrected and should work now.
-   6) All commands that get sent to the SCSI adapter were verified and
-      completed in such a way, that they are now completely conform to the
-      demands in the technical description of IBM. Main candidates were the
-      DEVICE_INQUIRY, REQUEST_SENSE and DEVICE_CAPACITY commands. They must
-      be transferred by bypassing the internal command buffer of the adapter
-      or else the response can be a random result. GET_POS_INFO would be more
-      safe in usage, if one could use the SUPRESS_EXCEPTION_SHORT, but this
-      is not allowed by the technical references of IBM. (Sorry, folks, the
-      model 80 problem is still a task to be solved in a different way.)
-   7) v3.2d is still hold back for some days for testing, while 4.0 is 
-      released.
-   - Michael Lang
-   
-   January 3, 2001 (v4.0a)
-   1) A lot of complains after the 2.4.0-prerelease kernel came in about
-      the impossibility to compile the driver as a module. This problem is
-      solved. In combination with that problem, some unprecise declaration
-      of the function option_setup() gave some warnings during compilation.
-      This is solved, too by a forward declaration in ibmmca.c.
-   2) #ifdef argument concerning CONFIG_SCSI_IBMMCA is no longer needed and
-      was entirely removed.
-   3) Some switch statements got optimized in code, as some minor variables
-      in internal SCSI-command handlers.
-   - Michael Lang
-
-   4 To do
-   -------
-        - IBM SCSI-2 F/W external SCSI bus support in separate mode!
-	- It seems that the handling of bad disks is really bad -
-	  non-existent, in fact. However, a low-level driver cannot help
-	  much, if such things happen.
-
-   5 Users' Manual
-   ---------------
-   5.1 Commandline Parameters
-   --------------------------
-   There exist several features for the IBM SCSI-subsystem driver.
-   The commandline parameter format is:
-   
-         ibmmcascsi=<command1>,<command2>,<command3>,...
-	 
-   where commandN can be one of the following:
-   
-         display    Owners of a model 95 or other PS/2 systems with an
-	            alphanumeric LED display may set this to have their
-		    display showing the following output of the 8 digits:
-		      
-		                ------DA
-				
-		    where '-' stays dark, 'D' shows the SCSI-device id
-		    and 'A' shows the SCSI hostindex, being currently 
-		    accessed. During boottime, this will give the message
-		    
-		                SCSIini*
-				
-                    on the LED-panel, where the * represents a rotator, 
-		    showing the activity during the probing phase of the
-		    driver which can take up to two minutes per SCSI-adapter.
-	 adisplay   This works like display, but gives more optical overview 
-	            of the activities on the SCSI-bus. The display will have
-		    the following output:
-		    
-		                6543210A
-				
-		    where the numbers 0 to 6 light up at the shown position,
-		    when the SCSI-device is accessed. 'A' shows again the SCSI
-		    hostindex. If display nor adisplay is set, the internal
-		    PS/2 harddisk LED is used for media-activities. So, if
-		    you really do not have a system with a LED-display, you
-		    should not set display or adisplay. Keep in mind, that
-		    display and adisplay can only be used alternatively. It
-		    is not recommended to use this option, if you have some
-		    wide-addressed devices e.g. at the SCSI-2 F/W adapter in
-		    your system. In addition, the usage of the display for
-		    other tasks in parallel, like the linuxinfo-utility makes 
-		    no sense with this option.
-	 activity   This enables the PS/2 harddisk LED activity indicator.
-	            Most PS/2 have no alphanumeric LED display, but some
-		    indicator. So you should use this parameter to activate it.
-		    If you own model 9595 (Server95), you can have both, the 
-		    LED panel and the activity indicator in parallel. However,
-		    some PS/2s, like the 8595 do not have any harddisk LED 
-		    activity indicator, which means, that you must use the
-		    alphanumeric LED display if you want to monitor SCSI-
-		    activity.
-	 bypass     This is obsolete from driver version 4.0, as the adapters
-	            got that far understood, that the selection between 
-		    integrated and bypassed commands should now work completely
-		    correct! For historical reasons, the old description is
-		    kept here:
-	            This commandline parameter forces the driver never to use
-	            SCSI-subsystems' integrated SCSI-command set. Except of
-		    the immediate assign, which is of vital importance for
-		    every IBM SCSI-subsystem to set its ldns right. Instead,
-		    the ordinary ANSI-SCSI-commands are used and passed by the
-		    controller to the SCSI-devices, therefore 'bypass'. The
-		    effort, done by the subsystem is quite bogus and at a
-		    minimum and therefore it should work everywhere. This
-		    could maybe solve troubles with old or integrated SCSI-
-		    controllers and nasty harddisks. Keep in mind, that using 
-		    this flag will slow-down SCSI-accesses slightly, as the 
-		    software generated commands are always slower than the 
-		    hardware. Non-harddisk devices always get read/write-
-		    commands in bypass mode. On the most recent releases of 
-		    the Linux IBM-SCSI-driver, the bypass command should be
-		    no longer a necessary thing, if you are sure about your
-		    SCSI-hardware!
-	 normal     This is the parameter, introduced on the 2.0.x development
-	            rail by ZP Gu. This parameter defines the SCSI-device
-		    scan order in the new industry standard. This means, that
-		    the first SCSI-device is the one with the lowest pun.
-		    E.g. harddisk at pun=0 is scanned before harddisk at
-		    pun=6, which means, that harddisk at pun=0 gets sda
-		    and the one at pun=6 gets sdb.
-	 ansi       The ANSI-standard for the right scan order, as done by
-	            IBM, Microware and Microsoft, scans SCSI-devices starting
-		    at the highest pun, which means, that e.g. harddisk at
-		    pun=6 gets sda and a harddisk at pun=0 gets sdb. If you
-		    like to have the same SCSI-device order, as in DOS, OS-9
-		    or OS/2, just use this parameter.
-         fast       SCSI-I/O in synchronous mode is done at 5 MHz for IBM-
-                    SCSI-devices. SCSI-2 Fast/Wide Adapter/A external bus
-                    should then run at 10 MHz if Fast-SCSI is enabled,
-                    and at 5 MHz if Fast-SCSI is disabled on the external
-                    bus. This is the default setting when nothing is 
-                    specified here.
-         medium     Synchronous rate is at 50% approximately, which means
-                    2.5 MHz for IBM SCSI-adapters and 5.0 MHz for F/W ext.
-                    SCSI-bus (when Fast-SCSI speed enabled on external bus).
-         slow       The slowest possible synchronous transfer rate is set. 
-                    This means 1.82 MHz for IBM SCSI-adapters and 2.0 MHz
-                    for F/W external bus at Fast-SCSI speed on the external
-		    bus.
-		    
-   A further option is that you can force the SCSI-driver to accept a SCSI-
-   subsystem at a certain I/O-address with a predefined adapter PUN. This
-   is done by entering 
-
-                  commandN   = I/O-base
-		  commandN+1 = adapter PUN
-		  
-   e.g. ibmmcascsi=0x3540,7 will force the driver to detect a SCSI-subsystem 
-   at I/O-address 0x3540 with adapter PUN 7. Please only use this method, if
-   the driver does really not recognize your SCSI-adapter! With driver version
-   3.2, this recognition of various adapters was hugely improved and you
-   should try first to remove your commandline arguments of such type with a 
-   newer driver. I bet, it will be recognized correctly. Even multiple and 
-   different types of IBM SCSI-adapters should be recognized correctly, too.
-   Use the forced detection method only as last solution!
-   
-   Examples:
-   
-        ibmmcascsi=adisplay
-	
-   This will use the advanced display mode for the model 95 LED alphanumeric
-   display.
-   
-        ibmmcascsi=display,0x3558,7
-	
-   This will activate the default display mode for the model 95 LED display
-   and will force the driver to accept a SCSI-subsystem at I/O-base 0x3558
-   with adapter PUN 7.
-   
-   5.2 Troubleshooting
-   -------------------
-   The following FAQs should help you to solve some major problems with this
-   driver.
-   
-     Q: "Reset SCSI-devices at boottime" halts the system at boottime, why?
-     A: This is only tested with the IBM SCSI Adapter w/cache. It is not
-        yet proven to run on other adapters, however you may be lucky.
-	In version 3.1d this has been hugely improved and should work better,
-	now. Normally you really won't need to activate this flag in the
-	kernel configuration, as all post 1989 SCSI-devices should accept
-	the reset-signal, when the computer is switched on. The SCSI-
-	subsystem generates this reset while being initialized. This flag
-	is really reserved for users with very old, very strange or self-made
-	SCSI-devices.
-     Q: Why is the SCSI-order of my drives mirrored to the device-order
-        seen from OS/2 or DOS ?
-     A: It depends on the operating system, if it looks at the devices in
-        ANSI-SCSI-standard (starting from pun 6 and going down to pun 0) or
-	if it just starts at pun 0 and counts up. If you want to be conform
-	with OS/2 and DOS, you have to activate this flag in the kernel
-	configuration or you should set 'ansi' as parameter for the kernel.
-	The parameter 'normal' sets the new industry standard, starting
-	from pun 0, scanning up to pun 6. This allows you to change your 
-	opinion still after having already compiled the kernel.
-     Q: Why can't I find IBM MCA SCSI support in the config menu?
-     A: You have to activate MCA bus support, first.
-     Q: Where can I find the latest info about this driver?
-     A: See the file MAINTAINERS for the current WWW-address, which offers
-        updates, info and Q/A lists. At this file's origin, the webaddress
-	was: http://www.staff.uni-mainz.de/mlang/linux.html
-     Q: My SCSI-adapter is not recognized by the driver, what can I do?
-     A: Just force it to be recognized by kernel parameters. See section 5.1.
-        If this really happens, do also send e-mail to the maintainer, as
-	forced detection should be never necessary. Forced detection is in
-	principal some flaw of the driver adapter detection and goes into 
-	bug reports.
-     Q: The driver screws up, if it starts to probe SCSI-devices, is there
-        some way out of it?
-     A: Yes, that was some recognition problem of the correct SCSI-adapter
-        and its I/O base addresses. Upgrade your driver to the latest release
-	and it should be fine again.
-     Q: I get a message: panic IBM MCA SCSI: command error .... , what can
-        I do against this?
-     A: Previously, I followed the way by ignoring command errors by using
-        ibmmcascsi=forgiveall, but this command no longer exists and is
-	obsolete. If such a problem appears, it is caused by some segmentation
-	fault of the driver, which maps to some unallowed area. The latest 
-	version of the driver should be ok, as most bugs have been solved.
-     Q: There are still kernel panics, even after having set 
-        ibmmcascsi=forgiveall. Are there other possibilities to prevent
-	such panics?
-     A: No, get just the latest release of the driver and it should work 
-        better and better with increasing version number. Forget about this
-	ibmmcascsi=forgiveall, as also ignorecmd are obsolete.!
-     Q: Linux panics or stops without any comment, but it is probable, that my
-        harddisk(s) have bad blocks.
-     A: Sorry, the bad-block handling is still a feeble point of this driver,
-        but is on the schedule for development in the near future.
-     Q: Linux panics while dynamically assigning SCSI-ids or ldns.
-     A: If you disconnect a SCSI-device from the machine, while Linux is up
-        and the driver uses dynamical reassignment of logical device numbers
-	(ldn), it really gets "angry" if it won't find devices, that were still
-	present at boottime and stops Linux.
-     Q: The system does not recover after an abort-command has been generated.
-     A: This is regrettably true, as it is not yet understood, why the 
-        SCSI-adapter does really NOT generate any interrupt at the end of
-	the abort-command. As no interrupt is generated, the abort command
-	cannot get finished and the system hangs, sorry, but checks are 
-	running to hunt down this problem. If there is a real pending command,
-	the interrupt MUST get generated after abort. In this case, it
-	should finish well.
-     Q: The system gets in bad shape after a SCSI-reset, is this known?
-     A: Yes, as there are a lot of prescriptions (see the Linux Hackers'
-        Guide) what has to be done for reset, we still share the bad shape of
-	the reset functions with all other low level SCSI-drivers. 
-	Astonishingly, reset works in most cases quite ok, but the harddisks
-	won't run in synchronous mode anymore after a reset, until you reboot.
-     Q: Why does my XXX w/Cache adapter not use read-prefetch?
-     A: Ok, that is not completely possible. If a cache is present, the 
-        adapter tries to use it internally. Explicitly, one can use the cache
-	with a read prefetch command, maybe in future, but this requires
-	some major overhead of SCSI-commands that risks the performance to
-	go down more than it gets improved. Tests with that are running.
-     Q: I have a IBM SCSI-2 Fast/Wide adapter, it boots in some way and hangs.
-     A: Yes, that is understood, as for sure, your SCSI-2 Fast/Wide adapter
-        was in such a case recognized as integrated SCSI-adapter or something 
-	else, but not as the correct adapter. As the I/O-ports get assigned 
-	wrongly by that reason, the system should crash in most cases. You 
-	should upgrade to the latest release of the SCSI-driver. The 
-	recommended version is 3.2 or later. Here, the F/W support is in
-	a stable and reliable condition. Wide-addressing is in addition 
-	supported.
-     Q: I get an Oops message and something like "killing interrupt".
-     A: The reason for this is that the IBM SCSI-subsystem only sends a 
-        termination status back, if some error appeared. In former releases
-	of the driver, it was not checked, if the termination status block
-	is NULL. From version 3.2, it is taken care of this.
-     Q: I have a F/W adapter and the driver sees my internal SCSI-devices,
-        but ignores the external ones.
-     A: Select combined busmode in the IBM config-program and check for that
-        no SCSI-id on the external devices appears on internal devices.
-        Reboot afterwards. Dual busmode is supported, but works only for the
-	internal bus, yet. External bus is still ignored. Take care for your
-	SCSI-ids. If combined bus-mode is activated, on some adapters, 
-	the wide-addressing is not possible, so devices with ids between 8 
-	and 15 get ignored by the driver & adapter!
-     Q: I have a 9595 and I get a NMI during heavy SCSI I/O e.g. during fsck.
-        A COMMAND ERROR is reported and characters on the screen are missing.
-	Warm reboot is not possible. Things look like quite weird.
-     A: Check the processor type of your 9595. If you have an 80486 or 486DX-2
-        processor complex on your mainboard and you compiled a kernel that
-	supports 80386 processors, it is possible, that the kernel cannot
-	keep track of the PS/2 interrupt handling and stops on an NMI. Just
-	compile a kernel for the correct processor type of your PS/2 and
-	everything should be fine. This is necessary even if one assumes,
-	that some 80486 system should be downward compatible to 80386
-	software.
-     Q: Some commands hang and interrupts block the machine. After some
-        timeout, the syslog reports that it tries to call abort, but the
-	machine is frozen.
-     A: This can be a busy wait bug in the interrupt handler of driver 
-        version 3.2. You should at least upgrade to 3.2c if you use 
-	kernel < 2.4.0 and driver version 4.0 if you use kernel 2.4.0 or 
-	later (including all test releases).
-     Q: I have a PS/2 model 80 and more than 16 MBytes of RAM. The driver
-        completely refuses to work, reports NMIs, COMMAND ERRORs or other
-	ambiguous stuff. When reducing the RAM size down below 16 MB, 
-	everything is running smoothly.
-     A: No real answer, yet. In any case, one should force the kernel to
-        present SCBs only below the 16 MBytes barrier. Maybe this solves the
-	problem. Not yet tried, but guessing that it could work. To get this,
-	set unchecked_isa_dma argument of ibmmca.h from 0 to 1.
-
-   5.3 Bug reports
-   --------------
-   If you really find bugs in the source code or the driver will successfully
-   refuse to work on your machine, you should send a bug report to me. The
-   best for this is to follow the instructions on the WWW-page for this
-   driver. Fill out the bug-report form, placed on the WWW-page and ship it,
-   so the bugs can be taken into account with maximum efforts. But, please
-   do not send bug reports about this driver to Linus Torvalds or Leonard
-   Zubkoff, as Linus is buried in E-Mail and Leonard is supervising all
-   SCSI-drivers and won't have the time left to look inside every single
-   driver to fix a bug and especially DO NOT send modified code to Linus
-   Torvalds or Alan J. Cox which has not been checked here!!! They are both
-   quite buried in E-mail (as me, sometimes, too) and one should first check
-   for problems on my local teststand. Recently, I got a lot of 
-   bug reports for errors in the ibmmca.c code, which I could not imagine, but
-   a look inside some Linux-distribution showed me quite often some modified
-   code, which did no longer work on most other machines than the one of the
-   modifier. Ok, so now that there is maintenance service available for this
-   driver, please use this address first in order to keep the level of
-   confusion low. Thank you!
-   
-   When you get a SCSI-error message that panics your system, a list of
-   register-entries of the SCSI-subsystem is shown (from Version 3.1d). With 
-   this list, it is very easy for the maintainer to localize the problem in 
-   the driver or in the configuration of the user. Please write down all the 
-   values from this report and send them to the maintainer. This would really 
-   help a lot and makes life easier concerning misunderstandings.
-   
-   Use the bug-report form (see 5.4 for its address) to send all the bug-
-   stuff to the maintainer or write e-mail with the values from the table. 
-   
-   5.4 Support WWW-page
-   --------------------
-   The address of the IBM SCSI-subsystem supporting WWW-page is:
-   
-        http://www.staff.uni-mainz.de/mlang/linux.html
-	
-   Here you can find info about the background of this driver, patches,
-   troubleshooting support, news and a bugreport form. Please check that
-   WWW-page regularly for latest hints. If ever this URL changes, please 
-   refer to the MAINTAINERS file in order to get the latest address.
-   
-   For the bugreport, please fill out the formular on the corresponding
-   WWW-page. Read the dedicated instructions and write as much as you
-   know about your problem. If you do not like such formulars, please send
-   some e-mail directly, but at least with the same information as required by
-   the formular.
-   
-   If you have extensive bug reports, including Oops messages and
-   screen-shots, please feel free to send it directly to the address
-   of the maintainer, too. The current address of the maintainer is:
-   
-            Michael Lang <langa2@kph.uni-mainz.de>
-   
-   6 References
-   ------------
-   IBM Corp., "Update for the PS/2 Hardware Interface Technical Reference, 
-   Common Interfaces", Armonk, September 1991, PN 04G3281, 
-   (available in the U.S. for $21.75 at 1-800-IBM-PCTB or in Germany for
-   around 40,-DM at "Hallo IBM").
-  
-   IBM Corp., "Personal System/2 Micro Channel SCSI
-   Adapter with Cache Technical Reference", Armonk, March 1990, PN 68X2365.
-
-   IBM Corp., "Personal System/2 Micro Channel SCSI
-   Adapter Technical Reference", Armonk, March 1990, PN 68X2397.
-
-   IBM Corp., "SCSI-2 Fast/Wide Adapter/A Technical Reference - Dual Bus",
-   Armonk, March 1994, PN 83G7545.
- 
-   Friedhelm Schmidt, "SCSI-Bus und IDE-Schnittstelle - Moderne Peripherie-
-   Schnittstellen: Hardware, Protokollbeschreibung und Anwendung", 2. Aufl.
-   Addison Wesley, 1996.
-   
-   Michael K. Johnson, "The Linux Kernel Hackers' Guide", Version 0.6, Chapel
-   Hill - North Carolina, 1995
-   
-   Andreas Kaiser, "SCSI TAPE BACKUP for OS/2 2.0", Version 2.12, Stuttgart
-   1993
-   
-   Helmut Rompel, "IBM Computerwelt GUIDE", What is what bei IBM., Systeme *
-   Programme * Begriffe, IWT-Verlag GmbH - Muenchen, 1988
-   
-   7 Credits to
-   ------------
-   7.1 People
-   ----------
-   Klaus Grimm
-                who already a long time ago gave me the old code from the
-		SCSI-driver in order to get it running for some old machine
-		in our institute.
-   Martin Kolinek
-                who wrote the first release of the IBM SCSI-subsystem driver.
-   Chris Beauregard
-                who for a long time maintained MCA-Linux and the SCSI-driver
-		in the beginning. Chris, wherever you are: Cheers to you!
-   Klaus Kudielka
-                with whom in the 2.1.x times, I had a quite fruitful
-                cooperation to get the driver running as a module and to get
-		it running with multiple SCSI-adapters.
-   David Weinehall
-                for his excellent maintenance of the MCA-stuff and the quite 
-		detailed bug reports and ideas for this driver (and his 
-		patience ;-)).
-   Alan J. Cox  
-                for his bug reports and his bold activities in cross-checking
-		the driver-code with his teststand.
-		
-   7.2 Sponsors & Supporters
-   -------------------------
-   "Hallo IBM",
-   IBM-Deutschland GmbH
-                the service of IBM-Deutschland for customers. Their E-Mail
-		service is unbeatable. Whatever old stuff I asked for, I 
-		always got some helpful answers.
-   Karl-Otto Reimers,
-   IBM Klub - Sparte IBM Geschichte, Sindelfingen
-                for sending me a copy of the w/Cache manual from the 
-		IBM-Deutschland archives.
-   Harald Staiger
-                for his extensive hardware donations which allows me today
-		still to test the driver in various constellations.
-   Erich Fritscher
-                for his very kind sponsoring.
-   Louis Ohland,
-   Charles Lasitter
-                for support by shipping me an IBM SCSI-2 Fast/Wide manual.
-                In addition, the contribution of various hardware is quite 
-                decessive and will make it possible to add FWSR (RAID)
-                adapter support to the driver in the near future! So,
-                complaints about no RAID support won't remain forever.
-                Yes, folks, that is no joke, RAID support is going to rise!
-   Erik Weber
-                for the great deal we made about a model 9595 and the nice
-                surrounding equipment and the cool trip to Mannheim
-                second-hand computer market. In addition, I would like
-		to thank him for his exhaustive SCSI-driver testing on his 
-		95er PS/2 park.
-   Anthony Hogbin
-                for his direct shipment of a SCSI F/W adapter, which allowed
-                me immediately on the first stage to try it on model 8557
-                together with onboard SCSI adapter and some SCSI w/Cache.
-   Andreas Hotz
-                for his support by memory and an IBM SCSI-adapter. Collecting
-                all this together now allows me to try really things with
-                the driver at maximum load and variety on various models in
-                a very quick and efficient way.
-   Peter Jennewein
-                for his model 30, which serves me as part of my teststand
-		and his cool remark about how you make an ordinary diskette
-		drive working and how to connect it to an IBM-diskette port.
-   Johannes Gutenberg-Universitaet, Mainz &
-   Institut fuer Kernphysik, Mainz Microtron (MAMI)
-                for the offered space, the link, placed on the central
-                homepage and the space to store and offer the driver and 
-		related material and the free working times, which allow
-                me to answer all your e-mail.
-                   
-   8 Trademarks
-   ------------
-   IBM, PS/2, OS/2, Microchannel are registered trademarks of International 
-   Business Machines Corporation
-   
-   MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation
-   
-   Microware, OS-9 are registered trademarks of Microware Systems
-   
-   9 Disclaimer
-   ------------
-   Beside the GNU General Public License and the dependent disclaimers and disclaimers
-   concerning the Linux-kernel in special, this SCSI-driver comes without any
-   warranty. Its functionality is tested as good as possible on certain 
-   machines and combinations of computer hardware, which does not exclude,
-   that data loss or severe damage of hardware is possible while using this
-   part of software on some arbitrary computer hardware or in combination 
-   with other software packages. It is highly recommended to make backup
-   copies of your data before using this software. Furthermore, personal
-   injuries by hardware defects, that could be caused by this SCSI-driver are
-   not excluded and it is highly recommended to handle this driver with a
-   maximum of carefulness.
-   
-   This driver supports hardware, produced by International Business Machines
-   Corporation (IBM).
-   
-------
-Michael Lang 
-(langa2@kph.uni-mainz.de)
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/libsas.txt b/Documentation/scsi/libsas.txt
index aa54f54c4a50..3cc9c7843e15 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/libsas.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/libsas.txt
@@ -398,21 +398,6 @@ struct sas_task {
 	task_done -- callback when the task has finished execution
 };
 
-When an external entity, entity other than the LLDD or the
-SAS Layer, wants to work with a struct domain_device, it
-_must_ call kobject_get() when getting a handle on the
-device and kobject_put() when it is done with the device.
-
-This does two things:
-     A) implements proper kfree() for the device;
-     B) increments/decrements the kref for all players:
-     domain_device
-	all domain_device's ... (if past an expander)
-	    port
-		host adapter
-		     pci device
-			 and up the ladder, etc.
-
 DISCOVERY
 ---------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/osst.txt b/Documentation/scsi/osst.txt
index ad86c6d1e898..00c8ebb2fd18 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/osst.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/osst.txt
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ recognized.
 If you want to have the module autoloaded on access to /dev/osst, you may
 add something like
 alias char-major-206 osst
-to your /etc/modprobe.conf (before 2.6: modules.conf).
+to a file under /etc/modprobe.d/ directory.
 
 You may find it convenient to create a symbolic link 
 ln -s nosst0 /dev/tape
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi-parameters.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-parameters.txt
index 21e5798526ee..2bfd6f6d2d3d 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-parameters.txt
@@ -37,9 +37,6 @@ parameters may be changed at runtime by the command
 
 	eata=		[HW,SCSI]
 
-	fd_mcs=		[HW,SCSI]
-			See header of drivers/scsi/fd_mcs.c.
-
 	fdomain=	[HW,SCSI]
 			See header of drivers/scsi/fdomain.c.
 
@@ -48,9 +45,6 @@ parameters may be changed at runtime by the command
 
 	gvp11=		[HW,SCSI]
 
-	ibmmcascsi=	[HW,MCA,SCSI] IBM MicroChannel SCSI adapter
-			See Documentation/mca.txt.
-
 	in2000=		[HW,SCSI]
 			See header of drivers/scsi/in2000.c.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt
index a340b18cd4eb..2b06aba4fa0f 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ the motherboard (or both). Some aic7xxx based HBAs are dual controllers
 and thus represent two hosts. Like most modern HBAs, each aic7xxx host
 has its own PCI device address. [The one-to-one correspondence between
 a SCSI host and a PCI device is common but not required (e.g. with
-ISA or MCA adapters).]
+ISA adapters).]
 
 The SCSI mid level isolates an LLD from other layers such as the SCSI
 upper layer drivers and the block layer.
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/st.txt b/Documentation/scsi/st.txt
index 691ca292c24d..f346abbdd6ff 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/st.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/st.txt
@@ -112,10 +112,8 @@ attempted).
 
 MINOR NUMBERS
 
-The tape driver currently supports 128 drives by default. This number
-can be increased by editing st.h and recompiling the driver if
-necessary. The upper limit is 2^17 drives if 4 modes for each drive
-are used.
+The tape driver currently supports up to 2^17 drives if 4 modes for
+each drive are used.
 
 The minor numbers consist of the following bit fields:
 
@@ -390,6 +388,10 @@ MTSETDRVBUFFER
 	     MT_ST_SYSV sets the SYSV semantics (mode)
 	     MT_ST_NOWAIT enables immediate mode (i.e., don't wait for
 	        the command to finish) for some commands (e.g., rewind)
+	     MT_ST_NOWAIT_EOF enables immediate filemark mode (i.e. when
+	        writing a filemark, don't wait for it to complete). Please
+		see the BASICS note about MTWEOFI with respect to the
+		possible dangers of writing immediate filemarks.
 	     MT_ST_SILI enables setting the SILI bit in SCSI commands when
 		reading in variable block mode to enhance performance when
 		reading blocks shorter than the byte count; set this only
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..41a6164592aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/ufs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+                       Universal Flash Storage
+                       =======================
+
+
+Contents
+--------
+
+1. Overview
+2. UFS Architecture Overview
+  2.1 Application Layer
+  2.2 UFS Transport Protocol(UTP) layer
+  2.3 UFS Interconnect(UIC) Layer
+3. UFSHCD Overview
+  3.1 UFS controller initialization
+  3.2 UTP Transfer requests
+  3.3 UFS error handling
+  3.4 SCSI Error handling
+
+
+1. Overview
+-----------
+
+Universal Flash Storage(UFS) is a storage specification for flash devices.
+It is aimed to provide a universal storage interface for both
+embedded and removable flash memory based storage in mobile
+devices such as smart phones and tablet computers. The specification
+is defined by JEDEC Solid State Technology Association. UFS is based
+on MIPI M-PHY physical layer standard. UFS uses MIPI M-PHY as the
+physical layer and MIPI Unipro as the link layer.
+
+The main goals of UFS is to provide,
+ * Optimized performance:
+   For UFS version 1.0 and 1.1 the target performance is as follows,
+   Support for Gear1 is mandatory (rate A: 1248Mbps, rate B: 1457.6Mbps)
+   Support for Gear2 is optional (rate A: 2496Mbps, rate B: 2915.2Mbps)
+   Future version of the standard,
+   Gear3 (rate A: 4992Mbps, rate B: 5830.4Mbps)
+ * Low power consumption
+ * High random IOPs and low latency
+
+
+2. UFS Architecture Overview
+----------------------------
+
+UFS has a layered communication architecture which is based on SCSI
+SAM-5 architectural model.
+
+UFS communication architecture consists of following layers,
+
+2.1 Application Layer
+
+  The Application layer is composed of UFS command set layer(UCS),
+  Task Manager and Device manager. The UFS interface is designed to be
+  protocol agnostic, however SCSI has been selected as a baseline
+  protocol for versions 1.0 and 1.1 of UFS protocol  layer.
+  UFS supports subset of SCSI commands defined by SPC-4 and SBC-3.
+  * UCS: It handles SCSI commands supported by UFS specification.
+  * Task manager: It handles task management functions defined by the
+     UFS which are meant for command queue control.
+  * Device manager: It handles device level operations and device
+     configuration operations. Device level operations mainly involve
+     device power management operations and commands to Interconnect
+     layers. Device level configurations involve handling of query
+     requests which are used to modify and retrieve configuration
+     information of the device.
+
+2.2 UFS Transport Protocol(UTP) layer
+
+  UTP layer provides services for
+  the higher layers through Service Access Points. UTP defines 3
+  service access points for higher layers.
+  * UDM_SAP: Device manager service access point is exposed to device
+    manager for device level operations. These device level operations
+    are done through query requests.
+  * UTP_CMD_SAP: Command service access point is exposed to UFS command
+    set layer(UCS) to transport commands.
+  * UTP_TM_SAP: Task management service access point is exposed to task
+    manager to transport task management functions.
+  UTP transports messages through UFS protocol information unit(UPIU).
+
+2.3 UFS Interconnect(UIC) Layer
+
+  UIC is the lowest layer of UFS layered architecture. It handles
+  connection between UFS host and UFS device. UIC consists of
+  MIPI UniPro and MIPI M-PHY. UIC provides 2 service access points
+  to upper layer,
+  * UIC_SAP: To transport UPIU between UFS host and UFS device.
+  * UIO_SAP: To issue commands to Unipro layers.
+
+
+3. UFSHCD Overview
+------------------
+
+The UFS host controller driver is based on Linux SCSI Framework.
+UFSHCD is a low level device driver which acts as an interface between
+SCSI Midlayer and PCIe based UFS host controllers.
+
+The current UFSHCD implementation supports following functionality,
+
+3.1 UFS controller initialization
+
+  The initialization module brings UFS host controller to active state
+  and prepares the controller to transfer commands/response between
+  UFSHCD and UFS device.
+
+3.2 UTP Transfer requests
+
+  Transfer request handling module of UFSHCD receives SCSI commands
+  from SCSI Midlayer, forms UPIUs and issues the UPIUs to UFS Host
+  controller. Also, the module decodes, responses received from UFS
+  host controller in the form of UPIUs and intimates the SCSI Midlayer
+  of the status of the command.
+
+3.3 UFS error handling
+
+  Error handling module handles Host controller fatal errors,
+  Device fatal errors and UIC interconnect layer related errors.
+
+3.4 SCSI Error handling
+
+  This is done through UFSHCD SCSI error handling routines registered
+  with SCSI Midlayer. Examples of some of the error handling commands
+  issues by SCSI Midlayer are Abort task, Lun reset and host reset.
+  UFSHCD Routines to perform these tasks are registered with
+  SCSI Midlayer through .eh_abort_handler, .eh_device_reset_handler and
+  .eh_host_reset_handler.
+
+In this version of UFSHCD Query requests and power management
+functionality are not implemented.
+
+UFS Specifications can be found at,
+UFS - http://www.jedec.org/sites/default/files/docs/JESD220.pdf
+UFSHCI - http://www.jedec.org/sites/default/files/docs/JESD223.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/security/00-INDEX b/Documentation/security/00-INDEX
index eeed1de546d4..414235c1fcfc 100644
--- a/Documentation/security/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/security/00-INDEX
@@ -12,6 +12,8 @@ apparmor.txt
 	- documentation on the AppArmor security extension.
 credentials.txt
 	- documentation about credentials in Linux.
+keys-ecryptfs.txt
+	- description of the encryption keys for the ecryptfs filesystem.
 keys-request-key.txt
 	- description of the kernel key request service.
 keys-trusted-encrypted.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/security/Smack.txt b/Documentation/security/Smack.txt
index d2f72ae66432..7a2d30c132e3 100644
--- a/Documentation/security/Smack.txt
+++ b/Documentation/security/Smack.txt
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ at hand.
 
 Smack consists of three major components:
     - The kernel
-    - A start-up script and a few modified applications
+    - Basic utilities, which are helpful but not required
     - Configuration data
 
 The kernel component of Smack is implemented as a Linux
@@ -23,37 +23,27 @@ Security Modules (LSM) module. It requires netlabel and
 works best with file systems that support extended attributes,
 although xattr support is not strictly required.
 It is safe to run a Smack kernel under a "vanilla" distribution.
+
 Smack kernels use the CIPSO IP option. Some network
 configurations are intolerant of IP options and can impede
 access to systems that use them as Smack does.
 
-The startup script etc-init.d-smack should be installed
-in /etc/init.d/smack and should be invoked early in the
-start-up process. On Fedora rc5.d/S02smack is recommended.
-This script ensures that certain devices have the correct
-Smack attributes and loads the Smack configuration if
-any is defined. This script invokes two programs that
-ensure configuration data is properly formatted. These
-programs are /usr/sbin/smackload and /usr/sin/smackcipso.
-The system will run just fine without these programs,
-but it will be difficult to set access rules properly.
-
-A version of "ls" that provides a "-M" option to display
-Smack labels on long listing is available.
+The current git repository for Smack user space is:
 
-A hacked version of sshd that allows network logins by users
-with specific Smack labels is available. This version does
-not work for scp. You must set the /etc/ssh/sshd_config
-line:
-   UsePrivilegeSeparation no
+	git://github.com/smack-team/smack.git
 
-The format of /etc/smack/usr is:
+This should make and install on most modern distributions.
+There are three commands included in smackutil:
 
-   username smack
+smackload  - properly formats data for writing to /smack/load
+smackcipso - properly formats data for writing to /smack/cipso
+chsmack    - display or set Smack extended attribute values
 
 In keeping with the intent of Smack, configuration data is
 minimal and not strictly required. The most important
 configuration step is mounting the smackfs pseudo filesystem.
+If smackutil is installed the startup script will take care
+of this, but it can be manually as well.
 
 Add this line to /etc/fstab:
 
@@ -61,19 +51,162 @@ Add this line to /etc/fstab:
 
 and create the /smack directory for mounting.
 
-Smack uses extended attributes (xattrs) to store file labels.
-The command to set a Smack label on a file is:
+Smack uses extended attributes (xattrs) to store labels on filesystem
+objects. The attributes are stored in the extended attribute security
+name space. A process must have CAP_MAC_ADMIN to change any of these
+attributes.
+
+The extended attributes that Smack uses are:
+
+SMACK64
+	Used to make access control decisions. In almost all cases
+	the label given to a new filesystem object will be the label
+	of the process that created it.
+SMACK64EXEC
+	The Smack label of a process that execs a program file with
+	this attribute set will run with this attribute's value.
+SMACK64MMAP
+	Don't allow the file to be mmapped by a process whose Smack
+	label does not allow all of the access permitted to a process
+	with the label contained in this attribute. This is a very
+	specific use case for shared libraries.
+SMACK64TRANSMUTE
+	Can only have the value "TRUE". If this attribute is present
+	on a directory when an object is created in the directory and
+	the Smack rule (more below) that permitted the write access
+	to the directory includes the transmute ("t") mode the object
+	gets the label of the directory instead of the label of the
+	creating process. If the object being created is a directory
+	the SMACK64TRANSMUTE attribute is set as well.
+SMACK64IPIN
+	This attribute is only available on file descriptors for sockets.
+	Use the Smack label in this attribute for access control
+	decisions on packets being delivered to this socket.
+SMACK64IPOUT
+	This attribute is only available on file descriptors for sockets.
+	Use the Smack label in this attribute for access control
+	decisions on packets coming from this socket.
+
+There are multiple ways to set a Smack label on a file:
 
     # attr -S -s SMACK64 -V "value" path
+    # chsmack -a value path
 
-NOTE: Smack labels are limited to 23 characters. The attr command
-      does not enforce this restriction and can be used to set
-      invalid Smack labels on files.
-
-If you don't do anything special all users will get the floor ("_")
-label when they log in. If you do want to log in via the hacked ssh
-at other labels use the attr command to set the smack value on the
-home directory and its contents.
+A process can see the smack label it is running with by
+reading /proc/self/attr/current. A process with CAP_MAC_ADMIN
+can set the process smack by writing there.
+
+Most Smack configuration is accomplished by writing to files
+in the smackfs filesystem. This pseudo-filesystem is usually
+mounted on /smack.
+
+access
+	This interface reports whether a subject with the specified
+	Smack label has a particular access to an object with a
+	specified Smack label. Write a fixed format access rule to
+	this file. The next read will indicate whether the access
+	would be permitted. The text will be either "1" indicating
+	access, or "0" indicating denial.
+access2
+	This interface reports whether a subject with the specified
+	Smack label has a particular access to an object with a
+	specified Smack label. Write a long format access rule to
+	this file. The next read will indicate whether the access
+	would be permitted. The text will be either "1" indicating
+	access, or "0" indicating denial.
+ambient
+	This contains the Smack label applied to unlabeled network
+	packets.
+change-rule
+	This interface allows modification of existing access control rules.
+	The format accepted on write is:
+		"%s %s %s %s"
+	where the first string is the subject label, the second the
+	object label, the third the access to allow and the fourth the
+	access to deny. The access strings may contain only the characters
+	"rwxat-". If a rule for a given subject and object exists it will be
+	modified by enabling the permissions in the third string and disabling
+	those in the fourth string. If there is no such rule it will be
+	created using the access specified in the third and the fourth strings.
+cipso
+	This interface allows a specific CIPSO header to be assigned
+	to a Smack label. The format accepted on write is:
+		"%24s%4d%4d"["%4d"]...
+	The first string is a fixed Smack label. The first number is
+	the level to use. The second number is the number of categories.
+	The following numbers are the categories.
+	"level-3-cats-5-19          3   2   5  19"
+cipso2
+	This interface allows a specific CIPSO header to be assigned
+	to a Smack label. The format accepted on write is:
+	"%s%4d%4d"["%4d"]...
+	The first string is a long Smack label. The first number is
+	the level to use. The second number is the number of categories.
+	The following numbers are the categories.
+	"level-3-cats-5-19   3   2   5  19"
+direct
+	This contains the CIPSO level used for Smack direct label
+	representation in network packets.
+doi
+	This contains the CIPSO domain of interpretation used in
+	network packets.
+load
+	This interface allows access control rules in addition to
+	the system defined rules to be specified. The format accepted
+	on write is:
+		"%24s%24s%5s"
+	where the first string is the subject label, the second the
+	object label, and the third the requested access. The access
+	string may contain only the characters "rwxat-", and specifies
+	which sort of access is allowed. The "-" is a placeholder for
+	permissions that are not allowed. The string "r-x--" would
+	specify read and execute access. Labels are limited to 23
+	characters in length.
+load2
+	This interface allows access control rules in addition to
+	the system defined rules to be specified. The format accepted
+	on write is:
+		"%s %s %s"
+	where the first string is the subject label, the second the
+	object label, and the third the requested access. The access
+	string may contain only the characters "rwxat-", and specifies
+	which sort of access is allowed. The "-" is a placeholder for
+	permissions that are not allowed. The string "r-x--" would
+	specify read and execute access.
+load-self
+	This interface allows process specific access rules to be
+	defined. These rules are only consulted if access would
+	otherwise be permitted, and are intended to provide additional
+	restrictions on the process. The format is the same as for
+	the load interface.
+load-self2
+	This interface allows process specific access rules to be
+	defined. These rules are only consulted if access would
+	otherwise be permitted, and are intended to provide additional
+	restrictions on the process. The format is the same as for
+	the load2 interface.
+logging
+	This contains the Smack logging state.
+mapped
+	This contains the CIPSO level used for Smack mapped label
+	representation in network packets.
+netlabel
+	This interface allows specific internet addresses to be
+	treated as single label hosts. Packets are sent to single
+	label hosts without CIPSO headers, but only from processes
+	that have Smack write access to the host label. All packets
+	received from single label hosts are given the specified
+	label. The format accepted on write is:
+		"%d.%d.%d.%d label" or "%d.%d.%d.%d/%d label".
+onlycap
+	This contains the label processes must have for CAP_MAC_ADMIN
+	and CAP_MAC_OVERRIDE to be effective. If this file is empty
+	these capabilities are effective at for processes with any
+	label. The value is set by writing the desired label to the
+	file or cleared by writing "-" to the file.
+revoke-subject
+	Writing a Smack label here sets the access to '-' for all access
+	rules with that subject label.
 
 You can add access rules in /etc/smack/accesses. They take the form:
 
@@ -83,10 +216,6 @@ access is a combination of the letters rwxa which specify the
 kind of access permitted a subject with subjectlabel on an
 object with objectlabel. If there is no rule no access is allowed.
 
-A process can see the smack label it is running with by
-reading /proc/self/attr/current. A privileged process can
-set the process smack by writing there.
-
 Look for additional programs on http://schaufler-ca.com
 
 From the Smack Whitepaper:
@@ -186,7 +315,7 @@ team. Smack labels are unstructured, case sensitive, and the only operation
 ever performed on them is comparison for equality. Smack labels cannot
 contain unprintable characters, the "/" (slash), the "\" (backslash), the "'"
 (quote) and '"' (double-quote) characters.
-Smack labels cannot begin with a '-', which is reserved for special options.
+Smack labels cannot begin with a '-'. This is reserved for special options.
 
 There are some predefined labels:
 
@@ -194,7 +323,7 @@ There are some predefined labels:
 	^ 	Pronounced "hat", a single circumflex character.
 	* 	Pronounced "star", a single asterisk character.
 	? 	Pronounced "huh", a single question mark character.
-	@ 	Pronounced "Internet", a single at sign character.
+	@ 	Pronounced "web", a single at sign character.
 
 Every task on a Smack system is assigned a label. System tasks, such as
 init(8) and systems daemons, are run with the floor ("_") label. User tasks
@@ -246,13 +375,14 @@ The format of an access rule is:
 
 Where subject-label is the Smack label of the task, object-label is the Smack
 label of the thing being accessed, and access is a string specifying the sort
-of access allowed. The Smack labels are limited to 23 characters. The access
-specification is searched for letters that describe access modes:
+of access allowed. The access specification is searched for letters that
+describe access modes:
 
 	a: indicates that append access should be granted.
 	r: indicates that read access should be granted.
 	w: indicates that write access should be granted.
 	x: indicates that execute access should be granted.
+	t: indicates that the rule requests transmutation.
 
 Uppercase values for the specification letters are allowed as well.
 Access mode specifications can be in any order. Examples of acceptable rules
@@ -273,7 +403,7 @@ Examples of unacceptable rules are:
 
 Spaces are not allowed in labels. Since a subject always has access to files
 with the same label specifying a rule for that case is pointless. Only
-valid letters (rwxaRWXA) and the dash ('-') character are allowed in
+valid letters (rwxatRWXAT) and the dash ('-') character are allowed in
 access specifications. The dash is a placeholder, so "a-r" is the same
 as "ar". A lone dash is used to specify that no access should be allowed.
 
@@ -297,6 +427,13 @@ but not any of its attributes by the circumstance of having read access to the
 containing directory but not to the differently labeled file. This is an
 artifact of the file name being data in the directory, not a part of the file.
 
+If a directory is marked as transmuting (SMACK64TRANSMUTE=TRUE) and the
+access rule that allows a process to create an object in that directory
+includes 't' access the label assigned to the new object will be that
+of the directory, not the creating process. This makes it much easier
+for two processes with different labels to share data without granting
+access to all of their files.
+
 IPC objects, message queues, semaphore sets, and memory segments exist in flat
 namespaces and access requests are only required to match the object in
 question.
diff --git a/Documentation/security/Yama.txt b/Documentation/security/Yama.txt
index a9511f179069..dd908cf64ecf 100644
--- a/Documentation/security/Yama.txt
+++ b/Documentation/security/Yama.txt
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ parent to a child process (i.e. direct "gdb EXE" and "strace EXE" still
 work), or with CAP_SYS_PTRACE (i.e. "gdb --pid=PID", and "strace -p PID"
 still work as root).
 
-For software that has defined application-specific relationships
+In mode 1, software that has defined application-specific relationships
 between a debugging process and its inferior (crash handlers, etc),
 prctl(PR_SET_PTRACER, pid, ...) can be used. An inferior can declare which
 other process (and its descendents) are allowed to call PTRACE_ATTACH
@@ -46,12 +46,13 @@ restrictions, it can call prctl(PR_SET_PTRACER, PR_SET_PTRACER_ANY, ...)
 so that any otherwise allowed process (even those in external pid namespaces)
 may attach.
 
-The sysctl settings are:
+The sysctl settings (writable only with CAP_SYS_PTRACE) are:
 
 0 - classic ptrace permissions: a process can PTRACE_ATTACH to any other
     process running under the same uid, as long as it is dumpable (i.e.
     did not transition uids, start privileged, or have called
-    prctl(PR_SET_DUMPABLE...) already).
+    prctl(PR_SET_DUMPABLE...) already). Similarly, PTRACE_TRACEME is
+    unchanged.
 
 1 - restricted ptrace: a process must have a predefined relationship
     with the inferior it wants to call PTRACE_ATTACH on. By default,
@@ -59,6 +60,13 @@ The sysctl settings are:
     classic criteria is also met. To change the relationship, an
     inferior can call prctl(PR_SET_PTRACER, debugger, ...) to declare
     an allowed debugger PID to call PTRACE_ATTACH on the inferior.
+    Using PTRACE_TRACEME is unchanged.
+
+2 - admin-only attach: only processes with CAP_SYS_PTRACE may use ptrace
+    with PTRACE_ATTACH, or through children calling PTRACE_TRACEME.
+
+3 - no attach: no processes may use ptrace with PTRACE_ATTACH nor via
+    PTRACE_TRACEME. Once set, this sysctl value cannot be changed.
 
 The original children-only logic was based on the restrictions in grsecurity.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/security/keys.txt b/Documentation/security/keys.txt
index 787717091421..7b4145d00452 100644
--- a/Documentation/security/keys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/security/keys.txt
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ KEY SERVICE OVERVIEW
 
 The key service provides a number of features besides keys:
 
- (*) The key service defines two special key types:
+ (*) The key service defines three special key types:
 
      (+) "keyring"
 
@@ -137,6 +137,18 @@ The key service provides a number of features besides keys:
 	 blobs of data. These can be created, updated and read by userspace,
 	 and aren't intended for use by kernel services.
 
+     (+) "logon"
+
+	 Like a "user" key, a "logon" key has a payload that is an arbitrary
+	 blob of data. It is intended as a place to store secrets which are
+	 accessible to the kernel but not to userspace programs.
+
+	 The description can be arbitrary, but must be prefixed with a non-zero
+	 length string that describes the key "subclass". The subclass is
+	 separated from the rest of the description by a ':'. "logon" keys can
+	 be created and updated from userspace, but the payload is only
+	 readable from kernel space.
+
  (*) Each process subscribes to three keyrings: a thread-specific keyring, a
      process-specific keyring, and a session-specific keyring.
 
@@ -400,6 +412,10 @@ The main syscalls are:
      to the keyring. In this case, an error will be generated if the process
      does not have permission to write to the keyring.
 
+     If the key type supports it, if the description is NULL or an empty
+     string, the key type will try and generate a description from the content
+     of the payload.
+
      The payload is optional, and the pointer can be NULL if not required by
      the type. The payload is plen in size, and plen can be zero for an empty
      payload.
@@ -793,6 +809,23 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
      kernel and resumes executing userspace.
 
 
+ (*) Invalidate a key.
+
+	long keyctl(KEYCTL_INVALIDATE, key_serial_t key);
+
+     This function marks a key as being invalidated and then wakes up the
+     garbage collector.  The garbage collector immediately removes invalidated
+     keys from all keyrings and deletes the key when its reference count
+     reaches zero.
+
+     Keys that are marked invalidated become invisible to normal key operations
+     immediately, though they are still visible in /proc/keys until deleted
+     (they're marked with an 'i' flag).
+
+     A process must have search permission on the key for this function to be
+     successful.
+
+
 ===============
 KERNEL SERVICES
 ===============
@@ -961,6 +994,23 @@ payload contents" for more information.
     reference pointer if successful.
 
 
+(*) A keyring can be created by:
+
+	struct key *keyring_alloc(const char *description, uid_t uid, gid_t gid,
+				  const struct cred *cred,
+				  key_perm_t perm,
+				  unsigned long flags,
+				  struct key *dest);
+
+    This creates a keyring with the given attributes and returns it.  If dest
+    is not NULL, the new keyring will be linked into the keyring to which it
+    points.  No permission checks are made upon the destination keyring.
+
+    Error EDQUOT can be returned if the keyring would overload the quota (pass
+    KEY_ALLOC_NOT_IN_QUOTA in flags if the keyring shouldn't be accounted
+    towards the user's quota).  Error ENOMEM can also be returned.
+
+
 (*) To check the validity of a key, this function can be called:
 
 	int validate_key(struct key *key);
@@ -1085,12 +1135,53 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory:
      it should return 0.
 
 
- (*) int (*instantiate)(struct key *key, const void *data, size_t datalen);
+ (*) int (*preparse)(struct key_preparsed_payload *prep);
+
+     This optional method permits the key type to attempt to parse payload
+     before a key is created (add key) or the key semaphore is taken (update or
+     instantiate key).  The structure pointed to by prep looks like:
+
+	struct key_preparsed_payload {
+		char		*description;
+		void		*type_data[2];
+		void		*payload;
+		const void	*data;
+		size_t		datalen;
+		size_t		quotalen;
+	};
+
+     Before calling the method, the caller will fill in data and datalen with
+     the payload blob parameters; quotalen will be filled in with the default
+     quota size from the key type and the rest will be cleared.
+
+     If a description can be proposed from the payload contents, that should be
+     attached as a string to the description field.  This will be used for the
+     key description if the caller of add_key() passes NULL or "".
+
+     The method can attach anything it likes to type_data[] and payload.  These
+     are merely passed along to the instantiate() or update() operations.
+
+     The method should return 0 if success ful or a negative error code
+     otherwise.
+
+     
+ (*) void (*free_preparse)(struct key_preparsed_payload *prep);
+
+     This method is only required if the preparse() method is provided,
+     otherwise it is unused.  It cleans up anything attached to the
+     description, type_data and payload fields of the key_preparsed_payload
+     struct as filled in by the preparse() method.
+
+
+ (*) int (*instantiate)(struct key *key, struct key_preparsed_payload *prep);
 
      This method is called to attach a payload to a key during construction.
      The payload attached need not bear any relation to the data passed to this
      function.
 
+     The prep->data and prep->datalen fields will define the original payload
+     blob.  If preparse() was supplied then other fields may be filled in also.
+
      If the amount of data attached to the key differs from the size in
      keytype->def_datalen, then key_payload_reserve() should be called.
 
@@ -1106,6 +1197,9 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory:
      If this type of key can be updated, then this method should be provided.
      It is called to update a key's payload from the blob of data provided.
 
+     The prep->data and prep->datalen fields will define the original payload
+     blob.  If preparse() was supplied then other fields may be filled in also.
+
      key_payload_reserve() should be called if the data length might change
      before any changes are actually made. Note that if this succeeds, the type
      is committed to changing the key because it's already been altered, so all
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX b/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX
index e09468ad3cb1..1f1b22fbd739 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX
@@ -2,8 +2,6 @@
 	- this file.
 README.cycladesZ
 	- info on Cyclades-Z firmware loading.
-computone.txt
-	- info on Computone Intelliport II/Plus Multiport Serial Driver.
 digiepca.txt
 	- info on Digi Intl. {PC,PCI,EISA}Xx and Xem series cards.
 hayes-esp.txt
@@ -18,8 +16,6 @@ serial-rs485.txt
 	- info about RS485 structures and support in the kernel.
 specialix.txt
 	- info on hardware/driver for specialix IO8+ multiport serial card.
-stallion.txt
-	- info on using the Stallion multiport serial driver.
 sx.txt
 	- info on the Specialix SX/SI multiport serial driver.
 tty.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/computone.txt b/Documentation/serial/computone.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 39ddcdbeeb85..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/serial/computone.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,520 +0,0 @@
-NOTE: This is an unmaintained driver.  It is not guaranteed to work due to
-changes made in the tty layer in 2.6.  If you wish to take over maintenance of
-this driver, contact Michael Warfield <mhw@wittsend.com>.
-
-Changelog:
-----------
-11-01-2001:	Original Document
-
-10-29-2004:	Minor misspelling & format fix, update status of driver.
-		James Nelson <james4765@gmail.com>
-
-Computone Intelliport II/Plus Multiport Serial Driver
------------------------------------------------------
-
-Release Notes For Linux Kernel 2.2 and higher.
-These notes are for the drivers which have already been integrated into the
-kernel and have been tested on Linux kernels 2.0, 2.2, 2.3, and 2.4.
-
-Version: 1.2.14
-Date: 11/01/2001
-Historical Author: Andrew Manison <amanison@america.net>
-Primary Author: Doug McNash
-
-This file assumes that you are using the Computone drivers which are
-integrated into the kernel sources.  For updating the drivers or installing
-drivers into kernels which do not already have Computone drivers, please
-refer to the instructions in the README.computone file in the driver patch.
-
-
-1. INTRODUCTION
-
-This driver supports the entire family of Intelliport II/Plus controllers
-with the exception of the MicroChannel controllers.  It does not support
-products previous to the Intelliport II.
-
-This driver was developed on the v2.0.x Linux tree and has been tested up
-to v2.4.14; it will probably not work with earlier v1.X kernels,.
-
-
-2. QUICK INSTALLATION
-
-Hardware - If you have an ISA card, find a free interrupt and io port. 
-		   List those in use with `cat /proc/interrupts` and 
-		   `cat /proc/ioports`.  Set the card dip switches to a free 
-		   address.  You may need to configure your BIOS to reserve an
-		   irq for an ISA card.  PCI and EISA parameters are set
-		   automagically.  Insert card into computer with the power off 
-		   before or after drivers installation.
-
-	Note the hardware address from the Computone ISA cards installed into
-		the system.  These are required for editing ip2.c or editing
-		/etc/modprobe.conf, or for specification on the modprobe
-		command line.
-
-	Note that the /etc/modules.conf should be used for older (pre-2.6)
-		kernels.
-
-Software -
-
-Module installation:
-
-a) Determine free irq/address to use if any (configure BIOS if need be)
-b) Run "make config" or "make menuconfig" or "make xconfig"
-   Select (m) module for CONFIG_COMPUTONE under character
-   devices.  CONFIG_PCI and CONFIG_MODULES also may need to be set.
-c) Set address on ISA cards then:
-   edit /usr/src/linux/drivers/char/ip2.c if needed 
-	or
-   edit /etc/modprobe.conf if needed (module).
-	or both to match this setting.
-d) Run "make modules"
-e) Run "make modules_install"
-f) Run "/sbin/depmod -a"
-g) install driver using `modprobe ip2 <options>` (options listed below)
-h) run ip2mkdev (either the script below or the binary version)
-
-
-Kernel installation:
-
-a) Determine free irq/address to use if any (configure BIOS if need be)
-b) Run "make config" or "make menuconfig" or "make xconfig"
-   Select (y) kernel for CONFIG_COMPUTONE under character
-   devices.  CONFIG_PCI may need to be set if you have PCI bus.
-c) Set address on ISA cards then:
-	   edit /usr/src/linux/drivers/char/ip2.c  
-           (Optional - may be specified on kernel command line now)
-d) Run "make zImage" or whatever target you prefer.
-e) mv /usr/src/linux/arch/x86/boot/zImage to /boot.
-f) Add new config for this kernel into /etc/lilo.conf, run "lilo"
-	or copy to a floppy disk and boot from that floppy disk.
-g) Reboot using this kernel
-h) run ip2mkdev (either the script below or the binary version)
-
-Kernel command line options:
-
-When compiling the driver into the kernel, io and irq may be
-compiled into the driver by editing ip2.c and setting the values for
-io and irq in the appropriate array.  An alternative is to specify
-a command line parameter to the kernel at boot up.
-
-        ip2=io0,irq0,io1,irq1,io2,irq2,io3,irq3
-
-Note that this order is very different from the specifications for the
-modload parameters which have separate IRQ and IO specifiers.
-
-The io port also selects PCI (1) and EISA (2) boards.
-
-        io=0    No board
-        io=1    PCI board
-        io=2    EISA board
-        else    ISA board io address
-
-You only need to specify the boards which are present.
-
-        Examples:
-
-                2 PCI boards:
-
-                        ip2=1,0,1,0
-
-                1 ISA board at 0x310 irq 5:
-
-                        ip2=0x310,5
-
-This can be added to and "append" option in lilo.conf similar to this:
-
-        append="ip2=1,0,1,0"
-
-
-3. INSTALLATION
-
-Previously, the driver sources were packaged with a set of patch files
-to update the character drivers' makefile and configuration file, and other 
-kernel source files. A build script (ip2build) was included which applies 
-the patches if needed, and build any utilities needed.
-What you receive may be a single patch file in conventional kernel
-patch format build script. That form can also be applied by
-running patch -p1 < ThePatchFile.  Otherwise run ip2build.
- 
-The driver can be installed as a module (recommended) or built into the 
-kernel. This is selected as for other drivers through the `make config`
-command from the root of the Linux source tree. If the driver is built 
-into the kernel you will need to edit the file ip2.c to match the boards 
-you are installing. See that file for instructions. If the driver is 
-installed as a module the configuration can also be specified on the
-modprobe command line as follows:
-
-	modprobe ip2 irq=irq1,irq2,irq3,irq4 io=addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4
-
-where irqnum is one of the valid Intelliport II interrupts (3,4,5,7,10,11,
-12,15) and addr1-4 are the base addresses for up to four controllers. If 
-the irqs are not specified the driver uses the default in ip2.c (which 
-selects polled mode). If no base addresses are specified the defaults in 
-ip2.c are used. If you are autoloading the driver module with kerneld or
-kmod the base addresses and interrupt number must also be set in ip2.c
-and recompile or just insert and options line in /etc/modprobe.conf or both.
-The options line is equivalent to the command line and takes precedence over
-what is in ip2.c. 
-
-/etc/modprobe.conf sample:
-	options ip2 io=1,0x328 irq=1,10
-	alias char-major-71 ip2
-	alias char-major-72 ip2
-	alias char-major-73 ip2
-
-The equivalent in ip2.c:
-
-static int io[IP2_MAX_BOARDS]= { 1, 0x328, 0, 0 };
-static int irq[IP2_MAX_BOARDS] = { 1, 10, -1, -1 }; 
-
-The equivalent for the kernel command line (in lilo.conf):
-
-        append="ip2=1,1,0x328,10"
-
-
-Note:	Both io and irq should be updated to reflect YOUR system.  An "io"
-	address of 1 or 2 indicates a PCI or EISA card in the board table.
-	The PCI or EISA irq will be assigned automatically.
-
-Specifying an invalid or in-use irq will default the driver into
-running in polled mode for that card.  If all irq entries are 0 then
-all cards will operate in polled mode.
-
-If you select the driver as part of the kernel run :
-
-	make zlilo (or whatever you do to create a bootable kernel)
-
-If you selected a module run :
-
-	make modules && make modules_install
-
-The utility ip2mkdev (see 5 and 7 below) creates all the device nodes
-required by the driver.  For a device to be created it must be configured
-in the driver and the board must be installed. Only devices corresponding
-to real IntelliPort II ports are created. With multiple boards and expansion
-boxes this will leave gaps in the sequence of device names. ip2mkdev uses
-Linux tty naming conventions: ttyF0 - ttyF255 for normal devices, and
-cuf0 - cuf255 for callout devices.
-
-
-4. USING THE DRIVERS
-
-As noted above, the driver implements the ports in accordance with Linux
-conventions, and the devices should be interchangeable with the standard
-serial devices. (This is a key point for problem reporting: please make
-sure that what you are trying do works on the ttySx/cuax ports first; then 
-tell us what went wrong with the ip2 ports!)
-
-Higher speeds can be obtained using the setserial utility which remaps 
-38,400 bps (extb) to 57,600 bps, 115,200 bps, or a custom speed. 
-Intelliport II installations using the PowerPort expansion module can
-use the custom speed setting to select the highest speeds: 153,600 bps,
-230,400 bps, 307,200 bps, 460,800bps and 921,600 bps. The base for
-custom baud rate configuration is fixed at 921,600 for cards/expansion
-modules with ST654's and 115200 for those with Cirrus CD1400's.  This
-corresponds to the maximum bit rates those chips are capable.  
-For example if the baud base is 921600 and the baud divisor is 18 then
-the custom rate is 921600/18 = 51200 bps.  See the setserial man page for
-complete details. Of course if stty accepts the higher rates now you can
-use that as well as the standard ioctls().
-
-
-5. ip2mkdev and assorted utilities...
-
-Several utilities, including the source for a binary ip2mkdev utility are
-available under .../drivers/char/ip2.  These can be build by changing to
-that directory and typing "make" after the kernel has be built.  If you do
-not wish to compile the binary utilities, the shell script below can be
-cut out and run as "ip2mkdev" to create the necessary device files.  To
-use the ip2mkdev script, you must have procfs enabled and the proc file
-system mounted on /proc.
-
-
-6. NOTES
-
-This is a release version of the driver, but it is impossible to test it
-in all configurations of Linux. If there is any anomalous behaviour that 
-does not match the standard serial port's behaviour please let us know.
-
-
-7. ip2mkdev shell script
-
-Previously, this script was simply attached here.  It is now attached as a
-shar archive to make it easier to extract the script from the documentation.
-To create the ip2mkdev shell script change to a convenient directory (/tmp
-works just fine) and run the following command:
-
-	unshar Documentation/serial/computone.txt
-		(This file)
-
-You should now have a file ip2mkdev in your current working directory with
-permissions set to execute.  Running that script with then create the
-necessary devices for the Computone boards, interfaces, and ports which
-are present on you system at the time it is run.
-
-
-#!/bin/sh
-# This is a shell archive (produced by GNU sharutils 4.2.1).
-# To extract the files from this archive, save it to some FILE, remove
-# everything before the `!/bin/sh' line above, then type `sh FILE'.
-#
-# Made on 2001-10-29 10:32 EST by <mhw@alcove.wittsend.com>.
-# Source directory was `/home2/src/tmp'.
-#
-# Existing files will *not* be overwritten unless `-c' is specified.
-#
-# This shar contains:
-# length mode       name
-# ------ ---------- ------------------------------------------
-#   4251 -rwxr-xr-x ip2mkdev
-#
-save_IFS="${IFS}"
-IFS="${IFS}:"
-gettext_dir=FAILED
-locale_dir=FAILED
-first_param="$1"
-for dir in $PATH
-do
-  if test "$gettext_dir" = FAILED && test -f $dir/gettext \
-     && ($dir/gettext --version >/dev/null 2>&1)
-  then
-    set `$dir/gettext --version 2>&1`
-    if test "$3" = GNU
-    then
-      gettext_dir=$dir
-    fi
-  fi
-  if test "$locale_dir" = FAILED && test -f $dir/shar \
-     && ($dir/shar --print-text-domain-dir >/dev/null 2>&1)
-  then
-    locale_dir=`$dir/shar --print-text-domain-dir`
-  fi
-done
-IFS="$save_IFS"
-if test "$locale_dir" = FAILED || test "$gettext_dir" = FAILED
-then
-  echo=echo
-else
-  TEXTDOMAINDIR=$locale_dir
-  export TEXTDOMAINDIR
-  TEXTDOMAIN=sharutils
-  export TEXTDOMAIN
-  echo="$gettext_dir/gettext -s"
-fi
-if touch -am -t 200112312359.59 $$.touch >/dev/null 2>&1 && test ! -f 200112312359.59 -a -f $$.touch; then
-  shar_touch='touch -am -t $1$2$3$4$5$6.$7 "$8"'
-elif touch -am 123123592001.59 $$.touch >/dev/null 2>&1 && test ! -f 123123592001.59 -a ! -f 123123592001.5 -a -f $$.touch; then
-  shar_touch='touch -am $3$4$5$6$1$2.$7 "$8"'
-elif touch -am 1231235901 $$.touch >/dev/null 2>&1 && test ! -f 1231235901 -a -f $$.touch; then
-  shar_touch='touch -am $3$4$5$6$2 "$8"'
-else
-  shar_touch=:
-  echo
-  $echo 'WARNING: not restoring timestamps.  Consider getting and'
-  $echo "installing GNU \`touch', distributed in GNU File Utilities..."
-  echo
-fi
-rm -f 200112312359.59 123123592001.59 123123592001.5 1231235901 $$.touch
-#
-if mkdir _sh17581; then
-  $echo 'x -' 'creating lock directory'
-else
-  $echo 'failed to create lock directory'
-  exit 1
-fi
-# ============= ip2mkdev ==============
-if test -f 'ip2mkdev' && test "$first_param" != -c; then
-  $echo 'x -' SKIPPING 'ip2mkdev' '(file already exists)'
-else
-  $echo 'x -' extracting 'ip2mkdev' '(text)'
-  sed 's/^X//' << 'SHAR_EOF' > 'ip2mkdev' &&
-#!/bin/sh -
-#
-#	ip2mkdev
-#
-#	Make or remove devices as needed for Computone Intelliport drivers
-#
-#	First rule!  If the dev file exists and you need it, don't mess
-#	with it.  That prevents us from screwing up open ttys, ownership
-#	and permissions on a running system!
-#
-#	This script will NOT remove devices that no longer exist if their
-#	board or interface box has been removed.  If you want to get rid
-#	of them, you can manually do an "rm -f /dev/ttyF* /dev/cuaf*"
-#	before running this script.  Running this script will then recreate
-#	all the valid devices.
-#
-#	Michael H. Warfield
-#	/\/\|=mhw=|\/\/
-#	mhw@wittsend.com
-#
-#	Updated 10/29/2000 for version 1.2.13 naming convention
-#		under devfs.	/\/\|=mhw=|\/\/
-#
-#	Updated 03/09/2000 for devfs support in ip2 drivers. /\/\|=mhw=|\/\/
-#
-X
-if test -d /dev/ip2 ; then
-#	This is devfs mode...  We don't do anything except create symlinks
-#	from the real devices to the old names!
-X	cd /dev
-X	echo "Creating symbolic links to devfs devices"
-X	for i in `ls ip2` ; do
-X		if test ! -L ip2$i ; then
-X			# Remove it incase it wasn't a symlink (old device)
-X			rm -f ip2$i
-X			ln -s ip2/$i ip2$i
-X		fi
-X	done
-X	for i in `( cd tts ; ls F* )` ; do
-X		if test ! -L tty$i ; then
-X			# Remove it incase it wasn't a symlink (old device)
-X			rm -f tty$i
-X			ln -s tts/$i tty$i
-X		fi
-X	done
-X	for i in `( cd cua ; ls F* )` ; do
-X		DEVNUMBER=`expr $i : 'F\(.*\)'`
-X		if test ! -L cuf$DEVNUMBER ; then
-X			# Remove it incase it wasn't a symlink (old device)
-X			rm -f cuf$DEVNUMBER
-X			ln -s cua/$i cuf$DEVNUMBER
-X		fi
-X	done
-X	exit 0
-fi
-X
-if test ! -f /proc/tty/drivers
-then
-X	echo "\
-Unable to check driver status.
-Make sure proc file system is mounted."
-X
-X	exit 255
-fi
-X
-if test ! -f /proc/tty/driver/ip2
-then
-X	echo "\
-Unable to locate ip2 proc file.
-Attempting to load driver"
-X
-X	if /sbin/insmod ip2
-X	then
-X		if test ! -f /proc/tty/driver/ip2
-X		then
-X			echo "\
-Unable to locate ip2 proc file after loading driver.
-Driver initialization failure or driver version error.
-"
-X		exit 255
-X		fi
-X	else
-X		echo "Unable to load ip2 driver."
-X		exit 255
-X	fi
-fi
-X
-# Ok...  So we got the driver loaded and we can locate the procfs files.
-# Next we need our major numbers.
-X
-TTYMAJOR=`sed -e '/^ip2/!d' -e '/\/dev\/tt/!d' -e 's/.*tt[^ 	]*[ 	]*\([0-9]*\)[ 	]*.*/\1/' < /proc/tty/drivers`
-CUAMAJOR=`sed -e '/^ip2/!d' -e '/\/dev\/cu/!d' -e 's/.*cu[^ 	]*[ 	]*\([0-9]*\)[ 	]*.*/\1/' < /proc/tty/drivers`
-BRDMAJOR=`sed -e '/^Driver: /!d' -e 's/.*IMajor=\([0-9]*\)[ 	]*.*/\1/' < /proc/tty/driver/ip2`
-X
-echo "\
-TTYMAJOR = $TTYMAJOR
-CUAMAJOR = $CUAMAJOR
-BRDMAJOR = $BRDMAJOR
-"
-X
-# Ok...  Now we should know our major numbers, if appropriate...
-# Now we need our boards and start the device loops.
-X
-grep '^Board [0-9]:' /proc/tty/driver/ip2 | while read token number type alltherest
-do
-X	# The test for blank "type" will catch the stats lead-in lines
-X	# if they exist in the file
-X	if test "$type" = "vacant" -o "$type" = "Vacant" -o "$type" = ""
-X	then
-X		continue
-X	fi
-X
-X	BOARDNO=`expr "$number" : '\([0-9]\):'`
-X	PORTS=`expr "$alltherest" : '.*ports=\([0-9]*\)' | tr ',' ' '`
-X	MINORS=`expr "$alltherest" : '.*minors=\([0-9,]*\)' | tr ',' ' '`
-X
-X	if test "$BOARDNO" = "" -o "$PORTS" = ""
-X	then
-#	This may be a bug.  We should at least get this much information
-X		echo "Unable to process board line"
-X		continue
-X	fi
-X
-X	if test "$MINORS" = ""
-X	then
-#	Silently skip this one.  This board seems to have no boxes
-X		continue
-X	fi
-X
-X	echo "board $BOARDNO: $type ports = $PORTS; port numbers = $MINORS"
-X
-X	if test "$BRDMAJOR" != ""
-X	then
-X		BRDMINOR=`expr $BOARDNO \* 4`
-X		STSMINOR=`expr $BRDMINOR + 1`
-X		if test ! -c /dev/ip2ipl$BOARDNO ; then
-X			mknod /dev/ip2ipl$BOARDNO c $BRDMAJOR $BRDMINOR
-X		fi
-X		if test ! -c /dev/ip2stat$BOARDNO ; then
-X			mknod /dev/ip2stat$BOARDNO c $BRDMAJOR $STSMINOR
-X		fi
-X	fi
-X
-X	if test "$TTYMAJOR" != ""
-X	then
-X		PORTNO=$BOARDBASE
-X
-X		for PORTNO in $MINORS
-X		do
-X			if test ! -c /dev/ttyF$PORTNO ; then
-X				# We got the hardware but no device - make it
-X				mknod /dev/ttyF$PORTNO c $TTYMAJOR $PORTNO
-X			fi	
-X		done
-X	fi
-X
-X	if test "$CUAMAJOR" != ""
-X	then
-X		PORTNO=$BOARDBASE
-X
-X		for PORTNO in $MINORS
-X		do
-X			if test ! -c /dev/cuf$PORTNO ; then
-X				# We got the hardware but no device - make it
-X				mknod /dev/cuf$PORTNO c $CUAMAJOR $PORTNO
-X			fi	
-X		done
-X	fi
-done
-X
-Xexit 0
-SHAR_EOF
-  (set 20 01 10 29 10 32 01 'ip2mkdev'; eval "$shar_touch") &&
-  chmod 0755 'ip2mkdev' ||
-  $echo 'restore of' 'ip2mkdev' 'failed'
-  if ( md5sum --help 2>&1 | grep 'sage: md5sum \[' ) >/dev/null 2>&1 \
-  && ( md5sum --version 2>&1 | grep -v 'textutils 1.12' ) >/dev/null; then
-    md5sum -c << SHAR_EOF >/dev/null 2>&1 \
-    || $echo 'ip2mkdev:' 'MD5 check failed'
-cb5717134509f38bad9fde6b1f79b4a4  ip2mkdev
-SHAR_EOF
-  else
-    shar_count="`LC_ALL= LC_CTYPE= LANG= wc -c < 'ip2mkdev'`"
-    test 4251 -eq "$shar_count" ||
-    $echo 'ip2mkdev:' 'original size' '4251,' 'current size' "$shar_count!"
-  fi
-fi
-rm -fr _sh17581
-exit 0
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/driver b/Documentation/serial/driver
index 0a25a9191864..067c47d46917 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/driver
+++ b/Documentation/serial/driver
@@ -133,6 +133,16 @@ hardware.
 	Interrupts: locally disabled.
 	This call must not sleep
 
+  send_xchar(port,ch)
+	Transmit a high priority character, even if the port is stopped.
+	This is used to implement XON/XOFF flow control and tcflow().  If
+	the serial driver does not implement this function, the tty core
+	will append the character to the circular buffer and then call
+	start_tx() / stop_tx() to flush the data out.
+
+	Locking: none.
+	Interrupts: caller dependent.
+
   stop_rx(port)
 	Stop receiving characters; the port is in the process of
 	being closed.
@@ -242,9 +252,8 @@ hardware.
 
   pm(port,state,oldstate)
 	Perform any power management related activities on the specified
-	port.  State indicates the new state (defined by ACPI D0-D3),
-	oldstate indicates the previous state.  Essentially, D0 means
-	fully on, D3 means powered down.
+	port.  State indicates the new state (defined by
+	enum uart_pm_state), oldstate indicates the previous state.
 
 	This function should not be used to grab any resources.
 
@@ -255,6 +264,10 @@ hardware.
 	Locking: none.
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
 
+  set_wake(port,state)
+	Enable/disable power management wakeup on serial activity.  Not
+	currently implemented.
+
   type(port)
 	Return a pointer to a string constant describing the specified
 	port, or return NULL, in which case the string 'unknown' is
@@ -307,6 +320,31 @@ hardware.
 	Locking: none.
 	Interrupts: caller dependent.
 
+  poll_init(port)
+	Called by kgdb to perform the minimal hardware initialization needed
+	to support poll_put_char() and poll_get_char().  Unlike ->startup()
+	this should not request interrupts.
+
+	Locking: tty_mutex and tty_port->mutex taken.
+	Interrupts: n/a.
+
+  poll_put_char(port,ch)
+	Called by kgdb to write a single character directly to the serial
+	port.  It can and should block until there is space in the TX FIFO.
+
+	Locking: none.
+	Interrupts: caller dependent.
+	This call must not sleep
+
+  poll_get_char(port)
+	Called by kgdb to read a single character directly from the serial
+	port.  If data is available, it should be returned; otherwise
+	the function should return NO_POLL_CHAR immediately.
+
+	Locking: none.
+	Interrupts: caller dependent.
+	This call must not sleep
+
 Other functions
 ---------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/rocket.txt b/Documentation/serial/rocket.txt
index 1d8582990435..60b039891057 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/rocket.txt
+++ b/Documentation/serial/rocket.txt
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ in the system log at /var/log/messages.
 
 If installed as a module, the module must be loaded.  This can be done
 manually by entering "modprobe rocket".  To have the module loaded automatically
-upon system boot, edit the /etc/modprobe.conf file and add the line
+upon system boot, edit a /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf file and add the line
 "alias char-major-46 rocket".
 
 In order to use the ports, their device names (nodes) must be created with mknod.
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/stallion.txt b/Documentation/serial/stallion.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 5c4902d9a5be..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/serial/stallion.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,392 +0,0 @@
-* NOTE - This is an unmaintained driver.  Lantronix, which bought Stallion
-technologies, is not active in driver maintenance, and they have no information
-on when or if they will have a 2.6 driver.
-
-James Nelson <james4765@gmail.com> - 12-12-2004
-
-Stallion Multiport Serial Driver Readme
----------------------------------------
-
-Copyright (C) 1994-1999,  Stallion Technologies.
-
-Version:   5.5.1
-Date:      28MAR99
-
-
-
-1. INTRODUCTION
-
-There are two drivers that work with the different families of Stallion
-multiport serial boards. One is for the Stallion smart boards - that is
-EasyIO, EasyConnection 8/32 and EasyConnection 8/64-PCI, the other for
-the true Stallion intelligent multiport boards - EasyConnection 8/64
-(ISA, EISA, MCA), EasyConnection/RA-PCI, ONboard and Brumby.
-
-If you are using any of the Stallion intelligent multiport boards (Brumby,
-ONboard, EasyConnection 8/64 (ISA, EISA, MCA), EasyConnection/RA-PCI) with
-Linux you will need to get the driver utility package.  This contains a
-firmware loader and the firmware images necessary to make the devices operate.
-
-The Stallion Technologies ftp site, ftp.stallion.com, will always have
-the latest version of the driver utility package.
-
-ftp://ftp.stallion.com/drivers/ata5/Linux/ata-linux-550.tar.gz
-
-As of the printing of this document the latest version of the driver
-utility package is 5.5.0. If a later version is now available then you
-should use the latest version.
-
-If you are using the EasyIO, EasyConnection 8/32 or EasyConnection 8/64-PCI
-boards then you don't need this package, although it does have a serial stats
-display program.
-
-If you require DIP switch settings, EISA or MCA configuration files, or any
-other information related to Stallion boards then have a look at Stallion's
-web pages at http://www.stallion.com.
-
-
-
-2. INSTALLATION
-
-The drivers can be used as loadable modules or compiled into the kernel.
-You can choose which when doing a "config" on the kernel.
-
-All ISA, EISA and MCA boards that you want to use need to be configured into
-the driver(s). All PCI boards will be automatically detected when you load
-the driver - so they do not need to be entered into the driver(s)
-configuration structure. Note that kernel PCI support is required to use PCI
-boards.
-
-There are two methods of configuring ISA, EISA and MCA boards into the drivers.
-If using the driver as a loadable module then the simplest method is to pass
-the driver configuration as module arguments. The other method is to modify
-the driver source to add configuration lines for each board in use.
-
-If you have pre-built Stallion driver modules then the module argument
-configuration method should be used. A lot of Linux distributions come with
-pre-built driver modules in /lib/modules/X.Y.Z/misc for the kernel in use.
-That makes things pretty simple to get going.
-
-
-2.1 MODULE DRIVER CONFIGURATION:
-
-The simplest configuration for modules is to use the module load arguments
-to configure any ISA, EISA or MCA boards. PCI boards are automatically
-detected, so do not need any additional configuration at all.
-
-If using EasyIO, EasyConnection 8/32 ISA or MCA, or EasyConnection 8/63-PCI
-boards then use the "stallion" driver module, Otherwise if you are using
-an EasyConnection 8/64 ISA, EISA or MCA, EasyConnection/RA-PCI, ONboard,
-Brumby or original Stallion board then use the "istallion" driver module.
-
-Typically to load up the smart board driver use:
-
-    modprobe stallion
-
-This will load the EasyIO and EasyConnection 8/32 driver. It will output a
-message to say that it loaded and print the driver version number. It will
-also print out whether it found the configured boards or not. These messages
-may not appear on the console, but typically are always logged to
-/var/adm/messages or /var/log/syslog files - depending on how the klogd and
-syslogd daemons are setup on your system.
-
-To load the intelligent board driver use:
-
-    modprobe istallion
-
-It will output similar messages to the smart board driver.
-
-If not using an auto-detectable board type (that is a PCI board) then you
-will also need to supply command line arguments to the modprobe command
-when loading the driver. The general form of the configuration argument is
-
-    board?=<name>[,<ioaddr>[,<addr>][,<irq>]]
-
-where:
-
-    board?  -- specifies the arbitrary board number of this board,
-               can be in the range 0 to 3.
-
-    name    -- textual name of this board. The board name is the common
-               board name, or any "shortened" version of that. The board
-               type number may also be used here.
-
-    ioaddr  -- specifies the I/O address of this board. This argument is
-               optional, but should generally be specified.
-
-    addr    -- optional second address argument. Some board types require
-               a second I/O address, some require a memory address. The
-               exact meaning of this argument depends on the board type.
-
-    irq     -- optional IRQ line used by this board.
-
-Up to 4 board configuration arguments can be specified on the load line.
-Here is some examples:
-
-    modprobe stallion board0=easyio,0x2a0,5
-
-This configures an EasyIO board as board 0 at I/O address 0x2a0 and IRQ 5.
-
-    modprobe istallion board3=ec8/64,0x2c0,0xcc000
-
-This configures an EasyConnection 8/64 ISA as board 3 at I/O address 0x2c0 at
-memory address 0xcc000.
-
-    modprobe stallion board1=ec8/32-at,0x2a0,0x280,10
-
-This configures an EasyConnection 8/32 ISA board at primary I/O address 0x2a0,
-secondary address 0x280 and IRQ 10.
-
-You will probably want to enter this module load and configuration information
-into your system startup scripts so that the drivers are loaded and configured
-on each system boot. Typically the start up script would be something like
-/etc/modprobe.conf.
-
-
-2.2 STATIC DRIVER CONFIGURATION:
-
-For static driver configuration you need to modify the driver source code.
-Entering ISA, EISA and MCA boards into the driver(s) configuration structure
-involves editing the driver(s) source file. It's pretty easy if you follow
-the instructions below. Both drivers can support up to 4 boards. The smart
-card driver (the stallion.c driver) supports any combination of EasyIO and
-EasyConnection 8/32 boards (up to a total of 4). The intelligent driver
-supports any combination of ONboards, Brumbys, Stallions and EasyConnection
-8/64 (ISA and EISA) boards (up to a total of 4).
-
-To set up the driver(s) for the boards that you want to use you need to
-edit the appropriate driver file and add configuration entries.
-
-If using EasyIO or EasyConnection 8/32 ISA or MCA boards,
-   In drivers/char/stallion.c:
-      - find the definition of the stl_brdconf array (of structures)
-        near the top of the file
-      - modify this to match the boards you are going to install
-	(the comments before this structure should help)
-      - save and exit
-
-If using ONboard, Brumby, Stallion or EasyConnection 8/64 (ISA or EISA)
-boards,
-   In drivers/char/istallion.c:
-      - find the definition of the stli_brdconf array (of structures)
-        near the top of the file
-      - modify this to match the boards you are going to install
-	(the comments before this structure should help)
-      - save and exit
-
-Once you have set up the board configurations then you are ready to build
-the kernel or modules.
-
-When the new kernel is booted, or the loadable module loaded then the
-driver will emit some kernel trace messages about whether the configured
-boards were detected or not. Depending on how your system logger is set
-up these may come out on the console, or just be logged to
-/var/adm/messages or /var/log/syslog. You should check the messages to
-confirm that all is well.
-
-
-2.3 SHARING INTERRUPTS
-
-It is possible to share interrupts between multiple EasyIO and
-EasyConnection 8/32 boards in an EISA system. To do this you must be using
-static driver configuration, modifying the driver source code to add driver
-configuration. Then a couple of extra things are required:
-
-1. When entering the board resources into the stallion.c file you need to
-   mark the boards as using level triggered interrupts. Do this by replacing
-   the "0" entry at field position 6 (the last field) in the board
-   configuration structure with a "1". (This is the structure that defines
-   the board type, I/O locations, etc. for each board). All boards that are
-   sharing an interrupt must be set this way, and each board should have the
-   same interrupt number specified here as well. Now build the module or
-   kernel as you would normally.
-
-2. When physically installing the boards into the system you must enter
-   the system EISA configuration utility. You will need to install the EISA
-   configuration files for *all* the EasyIO and EasyConnection 8/32 boards
-   that are sharing interrupts. The Stallion EasyIO and EasyConnection 8/32
-   EISA configuration files required are supplied by Stallion Technologies
-   on the EASY Utilities floppy diskette (usually supplied in the box with
-   the board when purchased. If not, you can pick it up from Stallion's FTP
-   site, ftp.stallion.com). You will need to edit the board resources to
-   choose level triggered interrupts, and make sure to set each board's
-   interrupt to the same IRQ number.
-
-You must complete both the above steps for this to work. When you reboot
-or load the driver your EasyIO and EasyConnection 8/32 boards will be
-sharing interrupts.
-
-
-2.4 USING HIGH SHARED MEMORY
-
-The EasyConnection 8/64-EI, ONboard and Stallion boards are capable of
-using shared memory addresses above the usual 640K - 1Mb range. The ONboard
-ISA and the Stallion boards can be programmed to use memory addresses up to
-16Mb (the ISA bus addressing limit), and the EasyConnection 8/64-EI and
-ONboard/E can be programmed for memory addresses up to 4Gb (the EISA bus
-addressing limit).
-
-The higher than 1Mb memory addresses are fully supported by this driver.
-Just enter the address as you normally would for a lower than 1Mb address
-(in the driver's board configuration structure).
-
-
-
-2.5 TROUBLE SHOOTING
-
-If a board is not found by the driver but is actually in the system then the
-most likely problem is that the I/O address is wrong. Change the module load
-argument for the loadable module form. Or change it in the driver stallion.c
-or istallion.c configuration structure and rebuild the kernel or modules, or
-change it on the board.
-
-On EasyIO and EasyConnection 8/32 boards the IRQ is software programmable, so
-if there is a conflict you may need to change the IRQ used for a board. There
-are no interrupts to worry about for ONboard, Brumby or EasyConnection 8/64
-(ISA, EISA and MCA) boards. The memory region on EasyConnection 8/64 and
-ONboard boards is software programmable, but not on the Brumby boards.
-
-
-
-3. USING THE DRIVERS
-
-3.1 INTELLIGENT DRIVER OPERATION
-
-The intelligent boards also need to have their "firmware" code downloaded
-to them. This is done via a user level application supplied in the driver
-utility package called "stlload". Compile this program wherever you dropped
-the package files, by typing "make". In its simplest form you can then type
-
-    ./stlload -i cdk.sys
-
-in this directory and that will download board 0 (assuming board 0 is an
-EasyConnection 8/64 or EasyConnection/RA board). To download to an
-ONboard, Brumby or Stallion do:
-
-    ./stlload -i 2681.sys
-
-Normally you would want all boards to be downloaded as part of the standard
-system startup. To achieve this, add one of the lines above into the
-/etc/rc.d/rc.S or /etc/rc.d/rc.serial file. To download each board just add
-the "-b <brd-number>" option to the line. You will need to download code for
-every board. You should probably move the stlload program into a system
-directory, such as /usr/sbin. Also, the default location of the cdk.sys image
-file in the stlload down-loader is /usr/lib/stallion. Create that directory
-and put the cdk.sys and 2681.sys files in it. (It's a convenient place to put
-them anyway). As an example your /etc/rc.d/rc.S file might have the
-following lines added to it (if you had 3 boards):
-
-    /usr/sbin/stlload -b 0 -i /usr/lib/stallion/cdk.sys
-    /usr/sbin/stlload -b 1 -i /usr/lib/stallion/2681.sys
-    /usr/sbin/stlload -b 2 -i /usr/lib/stallion/2681.sys
-
-The image files cdk.sys and 2681.sys are specific to the board types. The
-cdk.sys will only function correctly on an EasyConnection 8/64 board. Similarly
-the 2681.sys image fill only operate on ONboard, Brumby and Stallion boards.
-If you load the wrong image file into a board it will fail to start up, and
-of course the ports will not be operational!
-
-If you are using the modularized version of the driver you might want to put
-the modprobe calls in the startup script as well (before the download lines
-obviously).
-
-
-3.2 USING THE SERIAL PORTS
-
-Once the driver is installed you will need to setup some device nodes to
-access the serial ports. The simplest method is to use the /dev/MAKEDEV program.
-It will automatically create device entries for Stallion boards. This will
-create the normal serial port devices as /dev/ttyE# where# is the port number
-starting from 0. A bank of 64 minor device numbers is allocated to each board,
-so the first port on the second board is port 64,etc. A set of callout type
-devices may also be created. They are created as the devices /dev/cue# where #
-is the same as for the ttyE devices.
-
-For the most part the Stallion driver tries to emulate the standard PC system
-COM ports and the standard Linux serial driver. The idea is that you should
-be able to use Stallion board ports and COM ports interchangeably without
-modifying anything but the device name. Anything that doesn't work like that
-should be considered a bug in this driver!
-
-If you look at the driver code you will notice that it is fairly closely
-based on the Linux serial driver (linux/drivers/char/serial.c). This is
-intentional, obviously this is the easiest way to emulate its behavior!
-
-Since this driver tries to emulate the standard serial ports as much as
-possible, most system utilities should work as they do for the standard
-COM ports. Most importantly "stty" works as expected and "setserial" can
-also be used (excepting the ability to auto-configure the I/O and IRQ
-addresses of boards). Higher baud rates are supported in the usual fashion
-through setserial or using the CBAUDEX extensions. Note that the EasyIO and
-EasyConnection (all types) support at least 57600 and 115200 baud. The newer
-EasyConnection XP modules and new EasyIO boards support 230400 and 460800
-baud as well. The older boards including ONboard and Brumby support a
-maximum baud rate of 38400.
-
-If you are unfamiliar with how to use serial ports, then get the Serial-HOWTO
-by Greg Hankins. It will explain everything you need to know!
-
-
-
-4. NOTES
-
-You can use both drivers at once if you have a mix of board types installed
-in a system. However to do this you will need to change the major numbers
-used by one of the drivers. Currently both drivers use major numbers 24, 25
-and 28 for their devices. Change one driver to use some other major numbers,
-and then modify the mkdevnods script to make device nodes based on those new
-major numbers. For example, you could change the istallion.c driver to use
-major numbers 60, 61 and 62. You will also need to create device nodes with
-different names for the ports, for example ttyF# and cuf#.
-
-The original Stallion board is no longer supported by Stallion Technologies.
-Although it is known to work with the istallion driver.
-
-Finding a free physical memory address range can be a problem. The older
-boards like the Stallion and ONboard need large areas (64K or even 128K), so
-they can be very difficult to get into a system. If you have 16 Mb of RAM
-then you have no choice but to put them somewhere in the 640K -> 1Mb range.
-ONboards require 64K, so typically 0xd0000 is good, or 0xe0000 on some
-systems. If you have an original Stallion board, "V4.0" or Rev.O, then you
-need a 64K memory address space, so again 0xd0000 and 0xe0000 are good.
-Older Stallion boards are a much bigger problem. They need 128K of address
-space and must be on a 128K boundary. If you don't have a VGA card then
-0xc0000 might be usable - there is really no other place you can put them
-below 1Mb.
-
-Both the ONboard and old Stallion boards can use higher memory addresses as
-well, but you must have less than 16Mb of RAM to be able to use them. Usual
-high memory addresses used include 0xec0000 and 0xf00000.
-
-The Brumby boards only require 16Kb of address space, so you can usually
-squeeze them in somewhere. Common addresses are 0xc8000, 0xcc000, or in
-the 0xd0000 range. EasyConnection 8/64 boards are even better, they only
-require 4Kb of address space, again usually 0xc8000, 0xcc000 or 0xd0000
-are good.
-
-If you are using an EasyConnection 8/64-EI or ONboard/E then usually the
-0xd0000 or 0xe0000 ranges are the best options below 1Mb. If neither of
-them can be used then the high memory support to use the really high address
-ranges is the best option. Typically the 2Gb range is convenient for them,
-and gets them well out of the way.
-
-The ports of the EasyIO-8M board do not have DCD or DTR signals. So these
-ports cannot be used as real modem devices. Generally, when using these
-ports you should only use the cueX devices.
-
-The driver utility package contains a couple of very useful programs. One 
-is a serial port statistics collection and display program - very handy
-for solving serial port problems. The other is an extended option setting
-program that works with the intelligent boards.
-
-
-
-5. DISCLAIMER
-
-The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate and
-reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Stallion Technologies
-Pty. Ltd. for its use, nor any infringements of patents or other rights
-of third parties resulting from its use. Stallion Technologies reserves
-the right to modify the design of its products and will endeavour to change
-the information in manuals and accompanying documentation accordingly.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/smsc_ece1099.txt b/Documentation/smsc_ece1099.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6b492e82b43d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/smsc_ece1099.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+What is smsc-ece1099?
+----------------------
+
+The ECE1099 is a 40-Pin 3.3V Keyboard Scan Expansion
+or GPIO Expansion device. The device supports a keyboard
+scan matrix of 23x8. The device is connected to a Master
+via the SMSC BC-Link interface or via the SMBus.
+Keypad scan Input(KSI) and Keypad Scan Output(KSO) signals
+are multiplexed with GPIOs.
+
+Interrupt generation
+--------------------
+
+Interrupts can be generated by an edge detection on a GPIO
+pin or an edge detection on one of the bus interface pins.
+Interrupts can also be detected on the keyboard scan interface.
+The bus interrupt pin (BC_INT# or SMBUS_INT#) is asserted if
+any bit in one of the Interrupt Status registers is 1 and
+the corresponding Interrupt Mask bit is also 1.
+
+In order for software to determine which device is the source
+of an interrupt, it should first read the Group Interrupt Status Register
+to determine which Status register group is a source for the interrupt.
+Software should read both the Status register and the associated Mask register,
+then AND the two values together. Bits that are 1 in the result of the AND
+are active interrupts. Software clears an interrupt by writing a 1 to the
+corresponding bit in the Status register.
+
+Communication Protocol
+----------------------
+
+- SMbus slave Interface
+	The host processor communicates with the ECE1099 device
+	through a series of read/write registers via the SMBus
+	interface. SMBus is a serial communication protocol between
+	a computer host and its peripheral devices. The SMBus data
+	rate is 10KHz minimum to 400 KHz maximum
+
+- Slave Bus Interface
+	The ECE1099 device SMBus implementation is a subset of the
+	SMBus interface to the host. The device is a slave-only SMBus device.
+	The implementation in the device is a subset of SMBus since it
+	only supports four protocols.
+
+	The Write Byte, Read Byte, Send Byte, and Receive Byte protocols are the
+	only valid SMBus protocols for the device.
+
+- BC-LinkTM Interface
+	The BC-Link is a proprietary bus that allows communication
+	between a Master device and a Companion device. The Master
+	device uses this serial bus to read and write registers
+	located on the Companion device. The bus comprises three signals,
+	BC_CLK, BC_DAT and BC_INT#. The Master device always provides the
+	clock, BC_CLK, and the Companion device is the source for an
+	independent asynchronous interrupt signal, BC_INT#. The ECE1099
+	supports BC-Link speeds up to 24MHz.
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
index 12e3a0fb9bec..95731a08f257 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
@@ -860,7 +860,14 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 
     [Multiple options for each card instance]
     model	- force the model name
-    position_fix - Fix DMA pointer (0 = auto, 1 = use LPIB, 2 = POSBUF)
+    position_fix - Fix DMA pointer
+		  -1 = system default: choose appropriate one per controller
+			hardware
+		  0 = auto: falls back to LPIB when POSBUF doesn't work
+		  1 = use LPIB
+		  2 = POSBUF: use position buffer
+		  3 = VIACOMBO: VIA-specific workaround for capture
+		  4 = COMBO: use LPIB for playback, auto for capture stream
     probe_mask  - Bitmask to probe codecs (default = -1, meaning all slots)
     		  When the bit 8 (0x100) is set, the lower 8 bits are used
 		  as the "fixed" codec slots; i.e. the driver probes the
@@ -874,8 +881,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
     		setup before initializing the codecs.  This option is
 		available only when CONFIG_SND_HDA_PATCH_LOADER=y is set.
 		See HD-Audio.txt for details.
-    beep_mode	- Selects the beep registration mode (0=off, 1=on, 2=
-		dynamic registration via mute switch on/off); the default
+    beep_mode	- Selects the beep registration mode (0=off, 1=on); default
 		value is set via CONFIG_SND_HDA_INPUT_BEEP_MODE kconfig.
     
     [Single (global) options]
@@ -905,7 +911,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
     models depending on the codec chip.  The list of available models
     is found in HD-Audio-Models.txt
 
-    The model name "genric" is treated as a special case.  When this
+    The model name "generic" is treated as a special case.  When this
     model is given, the driver uses the generic codec parser without
     "codec-patch".  It's sometimes good for testing and debugging.
 
@@ -925,6 +931,11 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 	    (Usually SD_LPIB register is more accurate than the
 	    position buffer.)
 
+	    position_fix=3 is specific to VIA devices.  The position
+	    of the capture stream is checked from both LPIB and POSBUF
+	    values.  position_fix=4 is a combination mode, using LPIB
+	    for playback and POSBUF for capture.
+
     NB: If you get many "azx_get_response timeout" messages at
     loading, it's likely a problem of interrupts (e.g. ACPI irq
     routing).  Try to boot with options like "pci=noacpi".  Also, you
@@ -1539,7 +1550,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 
     Module for sound cards based on the C-Media CMI8786/8787/8788 chip:
     * Asound A-8788
-    * Asus Xonar DG
+    * Asus Xonar DG/DGX
     * AuzenTech X-Meridian
     * AuzenTech X-Meridian 2G
     * Bgears b-Enspirer
@@ -1894,7 +1905,6 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
     vid             - Vendor ID for the device (optional)
     pid             - Product ID for the device (optional)
     nrpacks	    - Max. number of packets per URB (default: 8)
-    async_unlink    - Use async unlink mode (default: yes)
     device_setup    - Device specific magic number (optional)
                     - Influence depends on the device
                     - Default: 0x0000 
@@ -1906,8 +1916,6 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
     NB: nrpacks parameter can be modified dynamically via sysfs.
         Don't put the value over 20.  Changing via sysfs has no sanity
 	check.
-    NB: async_unlink=0 would cause Oops.  It remains just for
-        debugging purpose (if any).
     NB: ignore_ctl_error=1 may help when you get an error at accessing
         the mixer element such as URB error -22.  This happens on some
         buggy USB device or the controller.
@@ -2038,7 +2046,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
     Install the necessary firmware files in alsa-firmware package.
     When no hotplug fw loader is available, you need to load the
     firmware via vxloader utility in alsa-tools package.  To invoke
-    vxloader automatically, add the following to /etc/modprobe.conf
+    vxloader automatically, add the following to /etc/modprobe.d/alsa.conf
 
 	install snd-vx222 /sbin/modprobe --first-time -i snd-vx222 && /usr/bin/vxloader
 
@@ -2162,10 +2170,10 @@ corresponds to the card index of ALSA.  Usually, define this
 as the same card module.
 
 An example configuration for a single emu10k1 card is like below:
------ /etc/modprobe.conf
+----- /etc/modprobe.d/alsa.conf
 alias snd-card-0 snd-emu10k1
 alias sound-slot-0 snd-emu10k1
------ /etc/modprobe.conf
+----- /etc/modprobe.d/alsa.conf
 
 The available number of auto-loaded sound cards depends on the module
 option "cards_limit" of snd module.  As default it's set to 1.
@@ -2178,7 +2186,7 @@ cards is kept consistent.
 
 An example configuration for two sound cards is like below:
 
------ /etc/modprobe.conf
+----- /etc/modprobe.d/alsa.conf
 # ALSA portion
 options snd cards_limit=2
 alias snd-card-0 snd-interwave
@@ -2188,7 +2196,7 @@ options snd-ens1371 index=1
 # OSS/Free portion
 alias sound-slot-0 snd-interwave
 alias sound-slot-1 snd-ens1371
------ /etc/modprobe.conf
+----- /etc/modprobe.d/alsa.conf
 
 In this example, the interwave card is always loaded as the first card
 (index 0) and ens1371 as the second (index 1).
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt
index a4c53d8961e1..654dd3b694a8 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ The parameter can be given:
    # modprobe snd-usb-audio index=1 device_setup=0x09
 
  * Or while configuring the modules options in your modules configuration file
-   - For Fedora distributions, edit the /etc/modprobe.conf file:
+   (tipically a .conf file in /etc/modprobe.d/ directory:
        alias snd-card-1 snd-usb-audio
        options snd-usb-audio index=1 device_setup=0x09
 
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ CAUTION when initializing the device
    - first turn off the device
    - de-register the snd-usb-audio module (modprobe -r)
    - change the device_setup parameter by changing the device_setup
-     option in /etc/modprobe.conf 
+     option in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf
    - turn on the device
  * A workaround for this last issue has been applied to kernel 2.6.23, but it may not
    be enough to ensure the 'stability' of the device initialization.
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Channel-Mapping-API.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Channel-Mapping-API.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3c43d1a4ca0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Channel-Mapping-API.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+ALSA PCM channel-mapping API
+============================
+					Takashi Iwai <tiwai@suse.de>
+
+GENERAL
+-------
+
+The channel mapping API allows user to query the possible channel maps
+and the current channel map, also optionally to modify the channel map
+of the current stream.
+
+A channel map is an array of position for each PCM channel.
+Typically, a stereo PCM stream has a channel map of
+  { front_left, front_right }
+while a 4.0 surround PCM stream has a channel map of
+  { front left, front right, rear left, rear right }.
+
+The problem, so far, was that we had no standard channel map
+explicitly, and applications had no way to know which channel
+corresponds to which (speaker) position.  Thus, applications applied
+wrong channels for 5.1 outputs, and you hear suddenly strange sound
+from rear.  Or, some devices secretly assume that center/LFE is the
+third/fourth channels while others that C/LFE as 5th/6th channels.
+
+Also, some devices such as HDMI are configurable for different speaker
+positions even with the same number of total channels.  However, there
+was no way to specify this because of lack of channel map
+specification.  These are the main motivations for the new channel
+mapping API.
+
+
+DESIGN
+------
+
+Actually, "the channel mapping API" doesn't introduce anything new in
+the kernel/user-space ABI perspective.  It uses only the existing
+control element features.
+
+As a ground design, each PCM substream may contain a control element
+providing the channel mapping information and configuration.  This
+element is specified by:
+	iface = SNDRV_CTL_ELEM_IFACE_PCM
+	name = "Playback Channel Map" or "Capture Channel Map"
+	device = the same device number for the assigned PCM substream
+	index = the same index number for the assigned PCM substream
+
+Note the name is different depending on the PCM substream direction.
+
+Each control element provides at least the TLV read operation and the
+read operation.  Optionally, the write operation can be provided to
+allow user to change the channel map dynamically.
+
+* TLV
+
+The TLV operation gives the list of available channel
+maps.  A list item of a channel map is usually a TLV of
+	type data-bytes ch0 ch1 ch2...
+where type is the TLV type value, the second argument is the total
+bytes (not the numbers) of channel values, and the rest are the
+position value for each channel.
+
+As a TLV type, either SNDRV_CTL_TLVT_CHMAP_FIXED,
+SNDRV_CTL_TLV_CHMAP_VAR or SNDRV_CTL_TLVT_CHMAP_PAIRED can be used.
+The _FIXED type is for a channel map with the fixed channel position
+while the latter two are for flexible channel positions.  _VAR type is
+for a channel map where all channels are freely swappable and _PAIRED
+type is where pair-wise channels are swappable.  For example, when you
+have {FL/FR/RL/RR} channel map, _PAIRED type would allow you to swap
+only {RL/RR/FL/FR} while _VAR type would allow even swapping FL and
+RR.
+
+These new TLV types are defined in sound/tlv.h.
+
+The available channel position values are defined in sound/asound.h,
+here is a cut:
+
+/* channel positions */
+enum {
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_UNKNOWN = 0,
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_NA,		/* N/A, silent */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_MONO,	/* mono stream */
+	/* this follows the alsa-lib mixer channel value + 3 */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_FL,		/* front left */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_FR,		/* front right */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_RL,		/* rear left */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_RR,		/* rear right */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_FC,		/* front center */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_LFE,	/* LFE */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_SL,		/* side left */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_SR,		/* side right */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_RC,		/* rear center */
+	/* new definitions */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_FLC,	/* front left center */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_FRC,	/* front right center */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_RLC,	/* rear left center */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_RRC,	/* rear right center */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_FLW,	/* front left wide */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_FRW,	/* front right wide */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_FLH,	/* front left high */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_FCH,	/* front center high */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_FRH,	/* front right high */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_TC,		/* top center */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_TFL,	/* top front left */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_TFR,	/* top front right */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_TFC,	/* top front center */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_TRL,	/* top rear left */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_TRR,	/* top rear right */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_TRC,	/* top rear center */
+	SNDRV_CHMAP_LAST = SNDRV_CHMAP_TRC,
+};
+
+When a PCM stream can provide more than one channel map, you can
+provide multiple channel maps in a TLV container type.  The TLV data
+to be returned will contain such as:
+	SNDRV_CTL_TLVT_CONTAINER 96
+	    SNDRV_CTL_TLVT_CHMAP_FIXED 4 SNDRV_CHMAP_FC
+	    SNDRV_CTL_TLVT_CHMAP_FIXED 8 SNDRV_CHMAP_FL SNDRV_CHMAP_FR
+	    SNDRV_CTL_TLVT_CHMAP_FIXED 16 NDRV_CHMAP_FL SNDRV_CHMAP_FR \
+		SNDRV_CHMAP_RL SNDRV_CHMAP_RR
+
+The channel position is provided in LSB 16bits.  The upper bits are
+used for bit flags.
+
+#define SNDRV_CHMAP_POSITION_MASK	0xffff
+#define SNDRV_CHMAP_PHASE_INVERSE	(0x01 << 16)
+#define SNDRV_CHMAP_DRIVER_SPEC		(0x02 << 16)
+
+SNDRV_CHMAP_PHASE_INVERSE indicates the channel is phase inverted,
+(thus summing left and right channels would result in almost silence).
+Some digital mic devices have this.
+
+When SNDRV_CHMAP_DRIVER_SPEC is set, all the channel position values
+don't follow the standard definition above but driver-specific.
+
+* READ OPERATION
+
+The control read operation is for providing the current channel map of
+the given stream.  The control element returns an integer array
+containing the position of each channel.
+
+When this is performed before the number of the channel is specified
+(i.e. hw_params is set), it should return all channels set to
+UNKNOWN.
+
+* WRITE OPERATION
+
+The control write operation is optional, and only for devices that can
+change the channel configuration on the fly, such as HDMI.  User needs
+to pass an integer value containing the valid channel positions for
+all channels of the assigned PCM substream.
+
+This operation is allowed only at PCM PREPARED state.  When called in
+other states, it shall return an error.
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt
index c8c54544abc5..85c362d8ea34 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt
@@ -8,117 +8,56 @@ ALC880
   5stack-digout	5-jack in back, 2-jack in front, a SPDIF out
   6stack	6-jack in back, 2-jack in front
   6stack-digout	6-jack with a SPDIF out
-  w810		3-jack
-  z71v		3-jack (HP shared SPDIF)
-  asus		3-jack (ASUS Mobo)
-  asus-w1v	ASUS W1V
-  asus-dig	ASUS with SPDIF out
-  asus-dig2	ASUS with SPDIF out (using GPIO2)
-  uniwill	3-jack
-  fujitsu	Fujitsu Laptops (Pi1536)
-  F1734		2-jack
-  lg		LG laptop (m1 express dual)
-  lg-lw		LG LW20/LW25 laptop
-  tcl		TCL S700
-  clevo		Clevo laptops (m520G, m665n)
-  medion	Medion Rim 2150
-  test		for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can be
-		adjusted.  Appearing only when compiled with
-		$CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y
-  auto		auto-config reading BIOS (default)
 
 ALC260
 ======
-  fujitsu	Fujitsu S7020
-  acer		Acer TravelMate
-  will		Will laptops (PB V7900)
-  replacer	Replacer 672V
-  favorit100	Maxdata Favorit 100XS
-  basic		fixed pin assignment (old default model)
-  test		for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can
-		adjusted.  Appearing only when compiled with
-		$CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y
-  auto		auto-config reading BIOS (default)
+  N/A
 
 ALC262
 ======
-  N/A
+  inv-dmic	Inverted internal mic workaround
 
 ALC267/268
 ==========
-  N/A
+  inv-dmic	Inverted internal mic workaround
 
-ALC269
+ALC269/270/275/276/28x/29x
 ======
-  laptop-amic	Laptops with analog-mic input
-  laptop-dmic	Laptops with digital-mic input
-
-ALC662/663/272
+  laptop-amic		Laptops with analog-mic input
+  laptop-dmic		Laptops with digital-mic input
+  alc269-dmic		Enable ALC269(VA) digital mic workaround
+  alc271-dmic		Enable ALC271X digital mic workaround
+  inv-dmic		Inverted internal mic workaround
+  headset-mic		Indicates a combined headset (headphone+mic) jack
+  lenovo-dock   	Enables docking station I/O for some Lenovos
+  dell-headset-multi	Headset jack, which can also be used as mic-in
+  dell-headset-dock	Headset jack (without mic-in), and also dock I/O
+
+ALC66x/67x/892
 ==============
-  asus-mode1	ASUS
-  asus-mode2	ASUS
-  asus-mode3	ASUS
-  asus-mode4	ASUS
-  asus-mode5	ASUS
-  asus-mode6	ASUS
-  asus-mode7	ASUS
-  asus-mode8	ASUS
+  mario			Chromebook mario model fixup
+  asus-mode1		ASUS
+  asus-mode2		ASUS
+  asus-mode3		ASUS
+  asus-mode4		ASUS
+  asus-mode5		ASUS
+  asus-mode6		ASUS
+  asus-mode7		ASUS
+  asus-mode8		ASUS
+  inv-dmic		Inverted internal mic workaround
+  dell-headset-multi	Headset jack, which can also be used as mic-in
 
 ALC680
 ======
   N/A
 
-ALC882/883/885/888/889
+ALC88x/898/1150
 ======================
-  3stack-dig	3-jack with SPDIF I/O
-  6stack-dig	6-jack digital with SPDIF I/O
-  arima		Arima W820Di1
-  targa		Targa T8, MSI-1049 T8
-  asus-a7j	ASUS A7J
-  asus-a7m	ASUS A7M
-  macpro	MacPro support
-  mb5		Macbook 5,1
-  macmini3	Macmini 3,1
-  mba21		Macbook Air 2,1
-  mbp3		Macbook Pro rev3
-  imac24	iMac 24'' with jack detection
-  imac91	iMac 9,1
-  w2jc		ASUS W2JC
-  3stack-2ch-dig	3-jack with SPDIF I/O (ALC883)
-  alc883-6stack-dig	6-jack digital with SPDIF I/O (ALC883)
-  3stack-6ch    3-jack 6-channel
-  3stack-6ch-dig 3-jack 6-channel with SPDIF I/O
-  6stack-dig-demo  6-jack digital for Intel demo board
-  acer		Acer laptops (Travelmate 3012WTMi, Aspire 5600, etc)
-  acer-aspire	Acer Aspire 9810
-  acer-aspire-4930g Acer Aspire 4930G
-  acer-aspire-6530g Acer Aspire 6530G
-  acer-aspire-7730g Acer Aspire 7730G
-  acer-aspire-8930g Acer Aspire 8930G
-  medion	Medion Laptops
-  targa-dig	Targa/MSI
-  targa-2ch-dig	Targa/MSI with 2-channel
-  targa-8ch-dig Targa/MSI with 8-channel (MSI GX620)
-  laptop-eapd   3-jack with SPDIF I/O and EAPD (Clevo M540JE, M550JE)
-  lenovo-101e	Lenovo 101E
-  lenovo-nb0763	Lenovo NB0763
-  lenovo-ms7195-dig Lenovo MS7195
-  lenovo-sky	Lenovo Sky
-  haier-w66	Haier W66
-  3stack-hp	HP machines with 3stack (Lucknow, Samba boards)
-  6stack-dell	Dell machines with 6stack (Inspiron 530)
-  mitac		Mitac 8252D
-  clevo-m540r	Clevo M540R (6ch + digital)
-  clevo-m720	Clevo M720 laptop series
-  fujitsu-pi2515 Fujitsu AMILO Pi2515
-  fujitsu-xa3530 Fujitsu AMILO XA3530
-  3stack-6ch-intel Intel DG33* boards
-  intel-alc889a	Intel IbexPeak with ALC889A
-  intel-x58	Intel DX58 with ALC889
-  asus-p5q	ASUS P5Q-EM boards
-  mb31		MacBook 3,1
-  sony-vaio-tt  Sony VAIO TT
-  auto		auto-config reading BIOS (default)
+  acer-aspire-4930g	Acer Aspire 4930G/5930G/6530G/6930G/7730G
+  acer-aspire-8930g	Acer Aspire 8330G/6935G
+  acer-aspire		Acer Aspire others
+  inv-dmic		Inverted internal mic workaround
+  no-primary-hp		VAIO Z/VGC-LN51JGB workaround (for fixed speaker DAC)
 
 ALC861/660
 ==========
@@ -139,7 +78,8 @@ CMI9880
 
 AD1882 / AD1882A
 ================
-  3stack	3-stack mode (default)
+  3stack	3-stack mode
+  3stack-automute 3-stack with automute front HP (default)
   6stack	6-stack mode
 
 AD1884A / AD1883 / AD1984A / AD1984B
@@ -305,6 +245,7 @@ STAC9227/9228/9229/927x
   5stack-no-fp	D965 5stack without front panel
   dell-3stack	Dell Dimension E520
   dell-bios	Fixes with Dell BIOS setup
+  dell-bios-amic Fixes with Dell BIOS setup including analog mic
   volknob	Fixes with volume-knob widget 0x24
   auto		BIOS setup (default)
 
@@ -339,6 +280,10 @@ STAC92HD83*
   dell-s14	Dell laptop
   dell-vostro-3500	Dell Vostro 3500 laptop
   hp-dv7-4000	HP dv-7 4000
+  hp_cNB11_intquad HP CNB models with 4 speakers
+  hp-zephyr	HP Zephyr
+  hp-led	HP with broken BIOS for mute LED
+  hp-inv-led	HP with broken BIOS for inverted mute LED
   auto		BIOS setup (default)
 
 STAC9872
@@ -352,6 +297,12 @@ Cirrus Logic CS4206/4207
   imac27	IMac 27 Inch
   auto		BIOS setup (default)
 
+Cirrus Logic CS4208
+===================
+  mba6		MacBook Air 6,1 and 6,2
+  gpio0		Enable GPIO 0 amp
+  auto		BIOS setup (default)
+
 VIA VT17xx/VT18xx/VT20xx
 ========================
   auto		BIOS setup (default)
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt
index 91fee3b45fb8..42a0a39b77e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt
@@ -59,7 +59,12 @@ a case, you can change the default method via `position_fix` option.
 `position_fix=1` means to use LPIB method explicitly.
 `position_fix=2` means to use the position-buffer.
 `position_fix=3` means to use a combination of both methods, needed
-for some VIA and ATI controllers.  0 is the default value for all other
+for some VIA controllers.  The capture stream position is corrected
+by comparing both LPIB and position-buffer values.
+`position_fix=4` is another combination available for all controllers,
+and uses LPIB for the playback and the position-buffer for the capture
+streams.
+0 is the default value for all other
 controllers, the automatic check and fallback to LPIB as described in
 the above.  If you get a problem of repeated sounds, this option might
 help.
@@ -171,14 +176,14 @@ support the automatic probing (yet as of 2.6.28).  And, BIOS is often,
 yes, pretty often broken.  It sets up wrong values and screws up the
 driver.
 
-The preset model is provided basically to overcome such a situation.
-When the matching preset model is found in the white-list, the driver
-assumes the static configuration of that preset and builds the mixer
-elements and PCM streams based on the static information.  Thus, if
-you have a newer machine with a slightly different PCI SSID from the
-existing one, you may have a good chance to re-use the same model.
-You can pass the `model` option to specify the preset model instead of
-PCI SSID look-up.
+The preset model (or recently called as "fix-up") is provided
+basically to overcome such a situation.  When the matching preset
+model is found in the white-list, the driver assumes the static
+configuration of that preset with the correct pin setup, etc.
+Thus, if you have a newer machine with a slightly different PCI SSID
+(or codec SSID) from the existing one, you may have a good chance to
+re-use the same model.  You can pass the `model` option to specify the
+preset model instead of PCI (and codec-) SSID look-up.
 
 What `model` option values are available depends on the codec chip.
 Check your codec chip from the codec proc file (see "Codec Proc-File"
@@ -194,17 +199,12 @@ non-working HD-audio hardware is to check HD-audio codec and several
 different `model` option values.  If you have any luck, some of them
 might suit with your device well.
 
-Some codecs such as ALC880 have a special model option `model=test`.
-This configures the driver to provide as many mixer controls as
-possible for every single pin feature except for the unsolicited
-events (and maybe some other specials).  Adjust each mixer element and
-try the I/O in the way of trial-and-error until figuring out the whole
-I/O pin mappings.
+There are a few special model option values:
+- when 'nofixup' is passed, the device-specific fixups in the codec
+  parser are skipped.
+- when `generic` is passed, the codec-specific parser is skipped and
+  only the generic parser is used.
 
-Note that `model=generic` has a special meaning.  It means to use the
-generic parser regardless of the codec.  Usually the codec-specific
-parser is much better than the generic parser (as now).  Thus this
-option is more about the debugging purpose.
 
 Speaker and Headphone Output
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -382,9 +382,8 @@ init_verbs::
   (separated with a space).
 hints::
   Shows / stores hint strings for codec parsers for any use.
-  Its format is `key = value`.  For example, passing `hp_detect = yes`
-  to IDT/STAC codec parser will result in the disablement of the
-  headphone detection.
+  Its format is `key = value`.  For example, passing `jack_detect = no`
+  will disable the jack detection of the machine completely.
 init_pin_configs::
   Shows the initial pin default config values set by BIOS.
 driver_pin_configs::
@@ -416,6 +415,65 @@ re-configure based on that state, run like below:
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
+Hint Strings
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The codec parser have several switches and adjustment knobs for
+matching better with the actual codec or device behavior.  Many of
+them can be adjusted dynamically via "hints" strings as mentioned in
+the section above.  For example, by passing `jack_detect = no` string
+via sysfs or a patch file, you can disable the jack detection, thus
+the codec parser will skip the features like auto-mute or mic
+auto-switch.  As a boolean value, either `yes`, `no`, `true`, `false`,
+`1` or `0` can be passed.
+
+The generic parser supports the following hints:
+
+- jack_detect (bool): specify whether the jack detection is available
+  at all on this machine; default true
+- inv_jack_detect (bool): indicates that the jack detection logic is
+  inverted
+- trigger_sense (bool): indicates that the jack detection needs the
+  explicit call of AC_VERB_SET_PIN_SENSE verb
+- inv_eapd (bool): indicates that the EAPD is implemented in the
+  inverted logic
+- pcm_format_first (bool): sets the PCM format before the stream tag
+  and channel ID
+- sticky_stream (bool): keep the PCM format, stream tag and ID as long
+  as possible; default true
+- spdif_status_reset (bool): reset the SPDIF status bits at each time
+  the SPDIF stream is set up
+-  pin_amp_workaround (bool): the output pin may have multiple amp
+  values
+- single_adc_amp (bool): ADCs can have only single input amps
+- auto_mute (bool): enable/disable the headphone auto-mute feature;
+  default true
+- auto_mic (bool): enable/disable the mic auto-switch feature; default
+  true
+- line_in_auto_switch (bool): enable/disable the line-in auto-switch
+  feature; default false
+- need_dac_fix (bool): limits the DACs depending on the channel count
+- primary_hp (bool): probe headphone jacks as the primary outputs;
+  default true
+- multi_io (bool): try probing multi-I/O config (e.g. shared
+  line-in/surround, mic/clfe jacks)
+- multi_cap_vol (bool): provide multiple capture volumes
+- inv_dmic_split (bool): provide split internal mic volume/switch for
+  phase-inverted digital mics
+- indep_hp (bool): provide the independent headphone PCM stream and
+  the corresponding mixer control, if available
+- add_stereo_mix_input (bool): add the stereo mix (analog-loopback
+  mix) to the input mux if available
+- add_jack_modes (bool): add "xxx Jack Mode" enum controls to each
+  I/O jack for allowing to change the headphone amp and mic bias VREF
+  capabilities
+- power_down_unused (bool): power down the unused widgets
+- add_hp_mic (bool): add the headphone to capture source if possible
+- hp_mic_detect (bool): enable/disable the hp/mic shared input for a
+  single built-in mic case; default true
+- mixer_nid (int): specifies the widget NID of the analog-loopback
+  mixer
+
+
 Early Patching
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 When CONFIG_SND_HDA_PATCH_LOADER=y is set, you can pass a "patch" as a
@@ -440,7 +498,7 @@ A patch file is a plain text file which looks like below:
   0x20 0x400 0xff
 
   [hint]
-  hp_detect = yes
+  jack_detect = no
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 The file needs to have a line `[codec]`.  The next line should contain
@@ -526,6 +584,13 @@ cable is unplugged.  Thus, if you hear noises, suspect first the
 power-saving.  See /sys/module/snd_hda_intel/parameters/power_save to
 check the current value.  If it's non-zero, the feature is turned on.
 
+The recent kernel supports the runtime PM for the HD-audio controller
+chip, too.  It means that the HD-audio controller is also powered up /
+down dynamically.  The feature is enabled only for certain controller
+chips like Intel LynxPoint.  You can enable/disable this feature
+forcibly by setting `power_save_controller` option, which is also
+available at /sys/module/snd_hda_intel/parameters directory.
+
 
 Tracepoints
 ~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -582,8 +647,9 @@ The latest development codes for HD-audio are found on sound git tree:
 - git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/tiwai/sound.git
 
 The master branch or for-next branches can be used as the main
-development branches in general while the HD-audio specific patches
-are committed in topic/hda branch.
+development branches in general while the development for the current
+and next kernels are found in for-linus and for-next branches,
+respectively.
 
 If you are using the latest Linus tree, it'd be better to pull the
 above GIT tree onto it.  If you are using the older kernels, an easy
@@ -694,7 +760,11 @@ won't be always updated.  For example, the volume values are usually
 cached in the driver, and thus changing the widget amp value directly
 via hda-verb won't change the mixer value.
 
-The hda-verb program is found in the ftp directory:
+The hda-verb program is included now in alsa-tools:
+
+- git://git.alsa-project.org/alsa-tools.git
+
+Also, the old stand-alone package is found in the ftp directory:
 
 - ftp://ftp.suse.com/pub/people/tiwai/misc/
 
@@ -772,3 +842,18 @@ A git repository is available:
 
 See README file in the tarball for more details about hda-emu
 program.
+
+
+hda-jack-retask
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+hda-jack-retask is a user-friendly GUI program to manipulate the
+HD-audio pin control for jack retasking.  If you have a problem about
+the jack assignment, try this program and check whether you can get
+useful results.  Once when you figure out the proper pin assignment,
+it can be fixed either in the driver code statically or via passing a
+firmware patch file (see "Early Patching" section).
+
+The program is included in alsa-tools now:
+
+- git://git.alsa-project.org/alsa-tools.git
+
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/MIXART.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/MIXART.txt
index ef42c44fa1f2..4ee35b4fbe4a 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/MIXART.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/MIXART.txt
@@ -76,9 +76,9 @@ FIRMWARE
  when CONFIG_FW_LOADER is set.  The mixartloader is necessary only
  for older versions or when you build the driver into kernel.]
  
-For loading the firmware automatically after the module is loaded, use
-the post-install command.  For example, add the following entry to
-/etc/modprobe.conf for miXart driver:
+For loading the firmware automatically after the module is loaded, use a
+install command.  For example, add the following entry to
+/etc/modprobe.d/mixart.conf for miXart driver:
 
 	install snd-mixart /sbin/modprobe --first-time -i snd-mixart && \
 			   /usr/bin/mixartloader
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/OSS-Emulation.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/OSS-Emulation.txt
index 022aaeb0e9dd..152ca2a3f1bd 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/OSS-Emulation.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/OSS-Emulation.txt
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ the card number and the minor unit number.  Usually you don't have to
 define these aliases by yourself.
 
 Only necessary step for auto-loading of OSS modules is to define the
-card alias in /etc/modprobe.conf, such as
+card alias in /etc/modprobe.d/alsa.conf, such as
 
 	alias sound-slot-0 snd-emu10k1
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/README.maya44 b/Documentation/sound/alsa/README.maya44
index 0e41576fa13e..67b2ea1cc31d 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/README.maya44
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/README.maya44
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Mic Phantom+48V: switch for +48V phantom power for electrostatic microphones on
     Make sure this is not turned on while any other source is connected to input 1/2.
     It might damage the source and/or the maya44 card.
 
-Mic/Line input: if switch is is on, input jack 1/2 is microphone input (mono), otherwise line input (stereo).
+Mic/Line input: if switch is on, input jack 1/2 is microphone input (mono), otherwise line input (stereo).
 
 Bypass: analogue bypass from ADC input to output for channel 1+2. Same as "Monitor" in the windows driver.
 Bypass 1: same for channel 3+4.
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/compress_offload.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/compress_offload.txt
index c83a835350f0..fd74ff26376e 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/compress_offload.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/compress_offload.txt
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ processing. Support for such hardware has not been very good in Linux,
 mostly because of a lack of a generic API available in the mainline
 kernel.
 
-Rather than requiring a compability break with an API change of the
+Rather than requiring a compatibility break with an API change of the
 ALSA PCM interface, a new 'Compressed Data' API is introduced to
 provide a control and data-streaming interface for audio DSPs.
 
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ The main requirements are:
 
 Design
 
-The new API shares a number of concepts with with the PCM API for flow
+The new API shares a number of concepts with the PCM API for flow
 control. Start, pause, resume, drain and stop commands have the same
 semantics no matter what the content is.
 
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ the settings should remain the exception.
 The timestamp becomes a multiple field structure. It lists the number
 of bytes transferred, the number of samples processed and the number
 of samples rendered/grabbed. All these values can be used to determine
-the avarage bitrate, figure out if the ring buffer needs to be
+the average bitrate, figure out if the ring buffer needs to be
 refilled or the delay due to decoding/encoding/io on the DSP.
 
 Note that the list of codecs/profiles/modes was derived from the
@@ -145,6 +145,52 @@ Modifications include:
 - Addition of encoding options when required (derived from OpenMAX IL)
 - Addition of rateControlSupported (missing in OpenMAX AL)
 
+Gapless Playback
+================
+When playing thru an album, the decoders have the ability to skip the encoder
+delay and padding and directly move from one track content to another. The end
+user can perceive this as gapless playback as we dont have silence while
+switching from one track to another
+
+Also, there might be low-intensity noises due to encoding. Perfect gapless is
+difficult to reach with all types of compressed data, but works fine with most
+music content. The decoder needs to know the encoder delay and encoder padding.
+So we need to pass this to DSP. This metadata is extracted from ID3/MP4 headers
+and are not present by default in the bitstream, hence the need for a new
+interface to pass this information to the DSP. Also DSP and userspace needs to
+switch from one track to another and start using data for second track.
+
+The main additions are:
+
+- set_metadata
+This routine sets the encoder delay and encoder padding. This can be used by
+decoder to strip the silence. This needs to be set before the data in the track
+is written.
+
+- set_next_track
+This routine tells DSP that metadata and write operation sent after this would
+correspond to subsequent track
+
+- partial drain
+This is called when end of file is reached. The userspace can inform DSP that
+EOF is reached and now DSP can start skipping padding delay. Also next write
+data would belong to next track
+
+Sequence flow for gapless would be:
+- Open
+- Get caps / codec caps
+- Set params
+- Set metadata of the first track
+- Fill data of the first track
+- Trigger start
+- User-space finished sending all,
+- Indicaite next track data by sending set_next_track
+- Set metadata of the next track
+- then call partial_drain to flush most of buffer in DSP
+- Fill data of the next track
+- DSP switches to second track
+(note: order for partial_drain and write for next track can be reversed as well)
+
 Not supported:
 
 - Support for VoIP/circuit-switched calls is not the target of this
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/hdspm.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/hdspm.txt
index 7a67ff71a9f8..7ba31948dea7 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/hdspm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/hdspm.txt
@@ -359,4 +359,4 @@ Calling Parameter:
    enable_monitor int array (min = 1, max = 8), 
      "Enable Analog Out on Channel 63/64 by default."
 
-      note: here the analog output is enabled (but not routed).
-\ No newline at end of file
+      note: here the analog output is enabled (but not routed).
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/seq_oss.html b/Documentation/sound/alsa/seq_oss.html
index d9776cf60c07..9663b45f6fde 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/seq_oss.html
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/seq_oss.html
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ sample data.
 <H4>
 7.2.4 Close Callback</H4>
 The <TT>close</TT> callback is called when this device is closed by the
-applicaion. If any private data was allocated in open callback, it must
+application. If any private data was allocated in open callback, it must
 be released in the close callback. The deletion of ALSA port should be
 done here, too. This callback must not be NULL.
 <H4>
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/ALS b/Documentation/sound/oss/ALS
index d01ffbfd5808..bf10bed4574b 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/oss/ALS
+++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/ALS
@@ -57,10 +57,10 @@ The resulting sound driver will provide the following capabilities:
     DSP/PCM/audio out (L&R), FM (L&R) and Mic in (mono).
 
 Jonathan Woithe
-jwoithe@physics.adelaide.edu.au
+jwoithe@just42.net
 30 March 1998
 
 Modified 2000-02-26 by Dave Forrest, drf5n@virginia.edu to add ALS100/ALS200
 Modified 2000-04-10 by Paul Laufer, pelaufer@csupomona.edu to add ISAPnP info.
-Modified 2000-11-19 by Jonathan Woithe, jwoithe@physics.adelaide.edu.au
+Modified 2000-11-19 by Jonathan Woithe, jwoithe@just42.net
  - updated information for kernel 2.4.x.
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/AudioExcelDSP16 b/Documentation/sound/oss/AudioExcelDSP16
index e0dc0641b480..ea8549faede9 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/oss/AudioExcelDSP16
+++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/AudioExcelDSP16
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ mpu_base	I/O base address for activate MPU-401 mode
 		(0x300, 0x310, 0x320 or 0x330)
 mpu_irq		MPU-401 irq line (5, 7, 9, 10 or 0)
 
-The /etc/modprobe.conf will have lines like this:
+A configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/ directory will have lines like this:
 
 options opl3 io=0x388
 options ad1848 io=0x530 irq=11 dma=3
@@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ Where the aedsp16 options are the options for this driver while opl3 and
 ad1848 are the corresponding options for the MSS and OPL3 modules.
 
 Loading MSS and OPL3 needs to pre load the aedsp16 module to set up correctly
-the sound card. Installation dependencies must be written in the modprobe.conf
-file:
+the sound card. Installation dependencies must be written in configuration
+files under /etc/modprobe.d/ directory:
 
-install ad1848 /sbin/modprobe aedsp16 && /sbin/modprobe -i ad1848
-install opl3 /sbin/modprobe aedsp16 && /sbin/modprobe -i opl3
+softdep ad1848 pre: aedsp16
+softdep opl3 pre: aedsp16
 
 Then you must load the sound modules stack in this order:
 sound -> aedsp16 -> [ ad1848, opl3 ]
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/CMI8330 b/Documentation/sound/oss/CMI8330
index 9c439f1a6dba..8a5fd1611c6f 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/oss/CMI8330
+++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/CMI8330
@@ -143,11 +143,10 @@ CONFIG_SOUND_MSS=m
 
 
 
-Alma Chao <elysian@ethereal.torsion.org> suggests the following /etc/modprobe.conf:
+Alma Chao <elysian@ethereal.torsion.org> suggests the following in
+a /etc/modprobe.d/*conf file:
 
 alias sound ad1848
 alias synth0 opl3
 options ad1848 io=0x530 irq=7 dma=0 soundpro=1
 options opl3 io=0x388
-
-	
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/Introduction b/Documentation/sound/oss/Introduction
index 75d967ff9266..42da2d8fa372 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/oss/Introduction
+++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/Introduction
@@ -167,8 +167,8 @@ in a file such as /root/soundon.sh.
 MODPROBE:
 =========
 
-If loading via modprobe, these common files are automatically loaded 
-when requested by modprobe.  For example, my /etc/modprobe.conf contains:
+If loading via modprobe, these common files are automatically loaded when
+requested by modprobe.  For example, my /etc/modprobe.d/oss.conf contains:
 
 alias sound sb 
 options sb io=0x240 irq=9 dma=3 dma16=5 mpu_io=0x300
@@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ http://www.opensound.com.  Before loading the commercial sound
 driver, you should do the following:
 
 1.  remove sound modules (detailed above)
-2.  remove the sound modules from /etc/modprobe.conf
+2.  remove the sound modules from /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf
 3.  move the sound modules from /lib/modules/<kernel>/misc
     (for example, I make a /lib/modules/<kernel>/misc/tmp
     directory and copy the sound module files to that 
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ twice, you need to do the following:
     sb.o could be copied (or symlinked) to sb1.o for the
     second SoundBlaster.
 
-2.  Make a second entry in /etc/modprobe.conf, for example,
+2.  Make a second entry in /etc/modprobe.d/*conf, for example,
     sound1 or sb1.  This second entry should refer to the
     new module names for example sb1, and should include
     the I/O, etc. for the second sound card.
@@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ There are several ways of configuring your sound:
 2)  On the command line when using insmod or in a bash script
     using command line calls to load sound.
 
-3)  In /etc/modprobe.conf when using modprobe.
+3)  In /etc/modprobe.d/*conf when using modprobe.
 
 4)  Via Red Hat's GPL'd /usr/sbin/sndconfig program (text based).
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/Opti b/Documentation/sound/oss/Opti
index c15af3c07d46..4cd5d9ab3580 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/oss/Opti
+++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/Opti
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ force the card into a mode in which it can be programmed.
 If you have another OS installed on your computer it is recommended
 that Linux and the other OS use the same resources.
 
-Also, it is recommended that resources specified in /etc/modprobe.conf
+Also, it is recommended that resources specified in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf
 and resources specified in /etc/isapnp.conf agree.
 
 Compiling the sound driver
@@ -67,11 +67,7 @@ address is hard-coded into the driver.
 
 Using kmod and autoloading the sound driver
 -------------------------------------------
-Comment: as of linux-2.1.90 kmod is replacing kerneld.
-The config file '/etc/modprobe.conf' is used as before.
-
-This is the sound part of my /etc/modprobe.conf file.
-Following that I will explain each line.
+Config files in '/etc/modprobe.d/' are used as below:
 
 alias mixer0 mad16
 alias audio0 mad16
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/PAS16 b/Documentation/sound/oss/PAS16
index 3dca4b75988e..5c27229eec8c 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/oss/PAS16
+++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/PAS16
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ CONFIG_SOUND_YM3812
   You can then get OPL3 functionality by issuing the command:
   insmod opl3
   In addition, you must either add the following line to 
-  /etc/modprobe.conf:
+  /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf:
   options opl3 io=0x388
   or else add the following line to /etc/lilo.conf:
   opl3=0x388
@@ -158,5 +158,5 @@ following line would be appropriate:
 append="pas2=0x388,10,3,-1,0,-1,-1,-1 opl3=0x388"
 
 If sound is built totally modular, the above options may be 
-specified in /etc/modprobe.conf for pas2, sb and opl3
+specified in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf for pas2, sb and opl3
 respectively. 
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/README.modules b/Documentation/sound/oss/README.modules
index e691d74e1e5e..cdc039421a46 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/oss/README.modules
+++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/README.modules
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Note that it is no longer necessary or possible to configure sound in the
 drivers/sound dir. Now one simply configures and makes one's kernel and
 modules in the usual way.
 
- Then, add to your /etc/modprobe.conf something like:
+ Then, add to your /etc/modprobe.d/oss.conf something like:
 
 alias char-major-14-* sb
 install sb /sbin/modprobe -i sb && /sbin/modprobe adlib_card
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ options adlib_card io=0x388     # FM synthesizer
  Alternatively, if you have compiled in kernel level ISAPnP support:
 
 alias char-major-14 sb
-post-install sb /sbin/modprobe "-k" "adlib_card"
+softdep sb post: adlib_card
 options adlib_card io=0x388
 
   The effect of this is that the sound driver and all necessary bits and
@@ -66,12 +66,12 @@ args are expected.
  Note that at present there is no way to configure the io, irq and other
 parameters for the modular drivers as one does for the wired drivers.. One
 needs to pass the modules the necessary parameters as arguments, either
-with /etc/modprobe.conf or with command-line args to modprobe, e.g.
+with /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf or with command-line args to modprobe, e.g.
 
 modprobe sb io=0x220 irq=7 dma=1 dma16=5 mpu_io=0x330
 modprobe adlib_card io=0x388
 
- recommend using /etc/modprobe.conf.
+ recommend using /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf.
 
 Persistent DMA Buffers:
 
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ wasteful of RAM, but it guarantees that sound always works.
 
 To make the sound driver use persistent DMA buffers we need to pass the
 sound.o module a "dmabuf=1" command-line argument. This is normally done
-in /etc/modprobe.conf like so:
+in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf files like so:
 
 options sound		dmabuf=1
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sparc/README-2.5 b/Documentation/sparc/README-2.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 806fe490a56d..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/sparc/README-2.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-BTFIXUP
--------
-
-To build new kernels you have to issue "make image". The ready kernel
-in ELF format is placed in arch/sparc/boot/image. Explanation is below.
-
-BTFIXUP is a unique feature of Linux/sparc among other architectures,
-developed by Jakub Jelinek (I think... Obviously David S. Miller took
-part, too). It allows to boot the same kernel at different 
-sub-architectures, such as sun4c, sun4m, sun4d, where SunOS uses
-different kernels. This feature is convinient for people who you move
-disks between boxes and for distrution builders.
-
-To function, BTFIXUP must link the kernel "in the draft" first,
-analyze the result, write a special stub code based on that, and
-build the final kernel with the stub (btfix.o).
-
-Kai Germaschewski improved the build system of the kernel in the 2.5 series
-significantly. Unfortunately, the traditional way of running the draft
-linking from architecture specific Makefile before the actual linking
-by generic Makefile is nearly impossible to support properly in the
-new build system. Therefore, the way we integrate BTFIXUP with the
-build system was changed in 2.5.40. Now, generic Makefile performs
-the draft linking and stores the result in file vmlinux. Architecture
-specific post-processing invokes BTFIXUP machinery and final linking
-in the same way as other architectures do bootstraps.
-
-Implications of that change are as follows.
-
-1. Hackers must type "make image" now, instead of just "make", in the same
-   way as s390 people do now. It is analogous to "make bzImage" on i386.
-   This does NOT affect sparc64, you continue to use "make" to build sparc64
-   kernels.
-
-2. vmlinux is not the final kernel, so RPM builders have to adjust
-   their spec files (if they delivered vmlinux for debugging).
-   System.map generated for vmlinux is still valid.
-
-3. Scripts that produce a.out images have to be changed. First, if they
-   invoke make, they have to use "make image". Second, they have to pick up
-   the new kernel in arch/sparc/boot/image instead of vmlinux.
-
-4. Since we are compliant with Kai's build system now, make -j is permitted.
-
--- Pete Zaitcev
-zaitcev@yahoo.com
diff --git a/Documentation/sparse.txt b/Documentation/sparse.txt
index 4909d4116356..eceab1308a8c 100644
--- a/Documentation/sparse.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sparse.txt
@@ -49,6 +49,24 @@ be generated without __CHECK_ENDIAN__.
 __bitwise - noisy stuff; in particular, __le*/__be* are that.  We really
 don't want to drown in noise unless we'd explicitly asked for it.
 
+Using sparse for lock checking
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The following macros are undefined for gcc and defined during a sparse
+run to use the "context" tracking feature of sparse, applied to
+locking.  These annotations tell sparse when a lock is held, with
+regard to the annotated function's entry and exit.
+
+__must_hold - The specified lock is held on function entry and exit.
+
+__acquires - The specified lock is held on function exit, but not entry.
+
+__releases - The specified lock is held on function entry, but not exit.
+
+If the function enters and exits without the lock held, acquiring and
+releasing the lock inside the function in a balanced way, no
+annotation is needed.  The tree annotations above are for cases where
+sparse would otherwise report a context imbalance.
 
 Getting sparse
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/ep93xx_spi b/Documentation/spi/ep93xx_spi
index d8eb01c15db1..832ddce6e5fb 100644
--- a/Documentation/spi/ep93xx_spi
+++ b/Documentation/spi/ep93xx_spi
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ arch/arm/mach-ep93xx/ts72xx.c:
 #include <linux/gpio.h>
 #include <linux/spi/spi.h>
 
-#include <mach/ep93xx_spi.h>
+#include <linux/platform_data/spi-ep93xx.h>
 
 /* this is our GPIO line used for chip select */
 #define MMC_CHIP_SELECT_GPIO EP93XX_GPIO_LINE_EGPIO9
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/spi-sc18is602 b/Documentation/spi/spi-sc18is602
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a45702865a38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/spi/spi-sc18is602
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+Kernel driver spi-sc18is602
+===========================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * NXP SI18IS602/602B/603
+    Datasheet: http://www.nxp.com/documents/data_sheet/SC18IS602_602B_603.pdf
+
+Author:
+        Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net>
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver provides connects a NXP SC18IS602/603 I2C-bus to SPI bridge to the
+kernel's SPI core subsystem.
+
+The driver does not probe for supported chips, since the SI18IS602/603 does not
+support Chip ID registers. You will have to instantiate the devices explicitly.
+Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for details.
+
+
+Usage Notes
+-----------
+
+This driver requires the I2C adapter driver to support raw I2C messages. I2C
+adapter drivers which can only handle the SMBus protocol are not supported.
+
+The maximum SPI message size supported by SC18IS602/603 is 200 bytes. Attempts
+to initiate longer transfers will fail with -EINVAL. EEPROM read operations and
+similar large accesses have to be split into multiple chunks of no more than
+200 bytes per SPI message (128 bytes of data per message is recommended). This
+means that programs such as "cp" or "od", which automatically use large block
+sizes to access a device, can not be used directly to read data from EEPROM.
+Programs such as dd, where the block size can be specified, should be used
+instead.
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary
index 7312ec14dd89..f21edb983413 100644
--- a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary
+++ b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ So for example arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c files might have code like:
 	/* if your mach-* infrastructure doesn't support kernels that can
 	 * run on multiple boards, pdata wouldn't benefit from "__init".
 	 */
-	static struct mysoc_spi_data __initdata pdata = { ... };
+	static struct mysoc_spi_data pdata __initdata = { ... };
 
 	static __init board_init(void)
 	{
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ SPI protocol drivers somewhat resemble platform device drivers:
 		},
 
 		.probe		= CHIP_probe,
-		.remove		= __devexit_p(CHIP_remove),
+		.remove		= CHIP_remove,
 		.suspend	= CHIP_suspend,
 		.resume		= CHIP_resume,
 	};
@@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ device whose board_info gave a modalias of "CHIP".  Your probe() code
 might look like this unless you're creating a device which is managing
 a bus (appearing under /sys/class/spi_master).
 
-	static int __devinit CHIP_probe(struct spi_device *spi)
+	static int CHIP_probe(struct spi_device *spi)
 	{
 		struct CHIP			*chip;
 		struct CHIP_platform_data	*pdata;
diff --git a/Documentation/spinlocks.txt b/Documentation/spinlocks.txt
index 9dbe885ecd8d..97eaf5727178 100644
--- a/Documentation/spinlocks.txt
+++ b/Documentation/spinlocks.txt
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ don't block on each other (and thus there is no dead-lock wrt interrupts.
 But when you do the write-lock, you have to use the irq-safe version. 
 
 For an example of being clever with rw-locks, see the "waitqueue_lock" 
-handling in kernel/sched.c - nothing ever _changes_ a wait-queue from
+handling in kernel/sched/core.c - nothing ever _changes_ a wait-queue from
 within an interrupt, they only read the queue in order to know whom to
 wake up. So read-locks are safe (which is good: they are very common
 indeed), while write-locks need to protect themselves against interrupts.
diff --git a/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt b/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt
index f0ab5cf28fca..b0714d8f678a 100644
--- a/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-Everything you ever wanted to know about Linux 2.6 -stable releases.
+Everything you ever wanted to know about Linux -stable releases.
 
 Rules on what kind of patches are accepted, and which ones are not, into the
 "-stable" tree:
@@ -12,6 +12,12 @@ Rules on what kind of patches are accepted, and which ones are not, into the
    marked CONFIG_BROKEN), an oops, a hang, data corruption, a real
    security issue, or some "oh, that's not good" issue.  In short, something
    critical.
+ - Serious issues as reported by a user of a distribution kernel may also
+   be considered if they fix a notable performance or interactivity issue.
+   As these fixes are not as obvious and have a higher risk of a subtle
+   regression they should only be submitted by a distribution kernel
+   maintainer and include an addendum linking to a bugzilla entry if it
+   exists and additional information on the user-visible impact.
  - New device IDs and quirks are also accepted.
  - No "theoretical race condition" issues, unless an explanation of how the
    race can be exploited is also provided.
@@ -36,10 +42,10 @@ Procedure for submitting patches to the -stable tree:
    cherry-picked than this can be specified in the following format in
    the sign-off area:
 
-     Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # .32.x: a1f84a3: sched: Check for idle
-     Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # .32.x: 1b9508f: sched: Rate-limit newidle
-     Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # .32.x: fd21073: sched: Fix affinity logic
-     Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # .32.x
+     Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # 3.3.x: a1f84a3: sched: Check for idle
+     Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # 3.3.x: 1b9508f: sched: Rate-limit newidle
+     Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # 3.3.x: fd21073: sched: Fix affinity logic
+     Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # 3.3.x
     Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu>
 
    The tag sequence has the meaning of:
@@ -73,6 +79,15 @@ Review cycle:
    security kernel team, and not go through the normal review cycle.
    Contact the kernel security team for more details on this procedure.
 
+Trees:
+
+ - The queues of patches, for both completed versions and in progress
+   versions can be found at:
+	http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/stable/stable-queue.git
+ - The finalized and tagged releases of all stable kernels can be found
+   in separate branches per version at:
+	http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/stable/linux-stable.git
+
 
 Review committee:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/static-keys.txt b/Documentation/static-keys.txt
index d93f3c00f245..9f5263d3152c 100644
--- a/Documentation/static-keys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/static-keys.txt
@@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ label case adds:
 6 (mov) + 2 (test) + 2 (jne) = 10 - 5 (5 byte jump 0) = 5 addition bytes.
 
 If we then include the padding bytes, the jump label code saves, 16 total bytes
-of instruction memory for this small fucntion. In this case the non-jump label
+of instruction memory for this small function. In this case the non-jump label
 function is 80 bytes long. Thus, we have have saved 20% of the instruction
 footprint. We can in fact improve this even further, since the 5-byte no-op
 really can be a 2-byte no-op since we can reach the branch with a 2-byte jmp.
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt
index 88fd7f5c8dcd..88152f214f48 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt
@@ -32,6 +32,8 @@ Currently, these files are in /proc/sys/fs:
 - nr_open
 - overflowuid
 - overflowgid
+- protected_hardlinks
+- protected_symlinks
 - suid_dumpable
 - super-max
 - super-nr
@@ -157,22 +159,68 @@ The default is 65534.
 
 ==============================================================
 
+protected_hardlinks:
+
+A long-standing class of security issues is the hardlink-based
+time-of-check-time-of-use race, most commonly seen in world-writable
+directories like /tmp. The common method of exploitation of this flaw
+is to cross privilege boundaries when following a given hardlink (i.e. a
+root process follows a hardlink created by another user). Additionally,
+on systems without separated partitions, this stops unauthorized users
+from "pinning" vulnerable setuid/setgid files against being upgraded by
+the administrator, or linking to special files.
+
+When set to "0", hardlink creation behavior is unrestricted.
+
+When set to "1" hardlinks cannot be created by users if they do not
+already own the source file, or do not have read/write access to it.
+
+This protection is based on the restrictions in Openwall and grsecurity.
+
+==============================================================
+
+protected_symlinks:
+
+A long-standing class of security issues is the symlink-based
+time-of-check-time-of-use race, most commonly seen in world-writable
+directories like /tmp. The common method of exploitation of this flaw
+is to cross privilege boundaries when following a given symlink (i.e. a
+root process follows a symlink belonging to another user). For a likely
+incomplete list of hundreds of examples across the years, please see:
+http://cve.mitre.org/cgi-bin/cvekey.cgi?keyword=/tmp
+
+When set to "0", symlink following behavior is unrestricted.
+
+When set to "1" symlinks are permitted to be followed only when outside
+a sticky world-writable directory, or when the uid of the symlink and
+follower match, or when the directory owner matches the symlink's owner.
+
+This protection is based on the restrictions in Openwall and grsecurity.
+
+==============================================================
+
 suid_dumpable:
 
 This value can be used to query and set the core dump mode for setuid
 or otherwise protected/tainted binaries. The modes are
 
 0 - (default) - traditional behaviour. Any process which has changed
-	privilege levels or is execute only will not be dumped
+	privilege levels or is execute only will not be dumped.
 1 - (debug) - all processes dump core when possible. The core dump is
 	owned by the current user and no security is applied. This is
 	intended for system debugging situations only. Ptrace is unchecked.
+	This is insecure as it allows regular users to examine the memory
+	contents of privileged processes.
 2 - (suidsafe) - any binary which normally would not be dumped is dumped
-	readable by root only. This allows the end user to remove
-	such a dump but not access it directly. For security reasons
-	core dumps in this mode will not overwrite one another or
-	other files. This mode is appropriate when administrators are
-	attempting to debug problems in a normal environment.
+	anyway, but only if the "core_pattern" kernel sysctl is set to
+	either a pipe handler or a fully qualified path. (For more details
+	on this limitation, see CVE-2006-2451.) This mode is appropriate
+	when administrators are attempting to debug problems in a normal
+	environment, and either have a core dump pipe handler that knows
+	to treat privileged core dumps with care, or specific directory
+	defined for catching core dumps. If a core dump happens without
+	a pipe handler or fully qualifid path, a message will be emitted
+	to syslog warning about the lack of a correct setting.
 
 ==============================================================
 
@@ -225,6 +273,13 @@ a queue must be less or equal then msg_max.
 maximum  message size value (it is every  message queue's attribute set during
 its creation).
 
+/proc/sys/fs/mqueue/msg_default is  a read/write  file for setting/getting the
+default number of messages in a queue value if attr parameter of mq_open(2) is
+NULL. If it exceed msg_max, the default value is initialized msg_max.
+
+/proc/sys/fs/mqueue/msgsize_default is a read/write file for setting/getting
+the default message size value if attr parameter of mq_open(2) is NULL. If it
+exceed msgsize_max, the default value is initialized msgsize_max.
 
 4. /proc/sys/fs/epoll - Configuration options for the epoll interface
 --------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt
index 6d78841fd416..9d4c1d18ad44 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt
@@ -38,6 +38,7 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel:
 - l2cr                        [ PPC only ]
 - modprobe                    ==> Documentation/debugging-modules.txt
 - modules_disabled
+- msg_next_id		      [ sysv ipc ]
 - msgmax
 - msgmnb
 - msgmni
@@ -62,17 +63,19 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel:
 - rtsig-max
 - rtsig-nr
 - sem
+- sem_next_id		      [ sysv ipc ]
 - sg-big-buff                 [ generic SCSI device (sg) ]
+- shm_next_id		      [ sysv ipc ]
 - shm_rmid_forced
 - shmall
 - shmmax                      [ sysv ipc ]
 - shmmni
-- softlockup_thresh
 - stop-a                      [ SPARC only ]
 - sysrq                       ==> Documentation/sysrq.txt
 - tainted
 - threads-max
 - unknown_nmi_panic
+- watchdog_thresh
 - version
 
 ==============================================================
@@ -179,8 +182,11 @@ core_pattern is used to specify a core dumpfile pattern name.
 	%<NUL>	'%' is dropped
 	%%	output one '%'
 	%p	pid
+	%P	global pid (init PID namespace)
 	%u	uid
 	%g	gid
+	%d	dump mode, matches PR_SET_DUMPABLE and
+		/proc/sys/fs/suid_dumpable
 	%s	signal number
 	%t	UNIX time of dump
 	%h	hostname
@@ -318,6 +324,22 @@ to false.
 
 ==============================================================
 
+msg_next_id, sem_next_id, and shm_next_id:
+
+These three toggles allows to specify desired id for next allocated IPC
+object: message, semaphore or shared memory respectively.
+
+By default they are equal to -1, which means generic allocation logic.
+Possible values to set are in range {0..INT_MAX}.
+
+Notes:
+1) kernel doesn't guarantee, that new object will have desired id. So,
+it's up to userspace, how to handle an object with "wrong" id.
+2) Toggle with non-default value will be set back to -1 by kernel after
+successful IPC object allocation.
+
+==============================================================
+
 nmi_watchdog:
 
 Enables/Disables the NMI watchdog on x86 systems. When the value is
@@ -406,6 +428,32 @@ This file shows up if CONFIG_DEBUG_STACKOVERFLOW is enabled.
 
 ==============================================================
 
+perf_cpu_time_max_percent:
+
+Hints to the kernel how much CPU time it should be allowed to
+use to handle perf sampling events.  If the perf subsystem
+is informed that its samples are exceeding this limit, it
+will drop its sampling frequency to attempt to reduce its CPU
+usage.
+
+Some perf sampling happens in NMIs.  If these samples
+unexpectedly take too long to execute, the NMIs can become
+stacked up next to each other so much that nothing else is
+allowed to execute.
+
+0: disable the mechanism.  Do not monitor or correct perf's
+   sampling rate no matter how CPU time it takes.
+
+1-100: attempt to throttle perf's sample rate to this
+   percentage of CPU.  Note: the kernel calculates an
+   "expected" length of each sample event.  100 here means
+   100% of that expected length.  Even if this is set to
+   100, you may still see sample throttling if this
+   length is exceeded.  Set to 0 if you truly do not care
+   how much CPU is consumed.
+
+==============================================================
+
 
 pid_max:
 
@@ -540,6 +588,19 @@ are doing anyway :)
 
 ==============================================================
 
+shmall:
+
+This parameter sets the total amount of shared memory pages that
+can be used system wide. Hence, SHMALL should always be at least
+ceil(shmmax/PAGE_SIZE).
+
+If you are not sure what the default PAGE_SIZE is on your Linux
+system, you can run the following command:
+
+# getconf PAGE_SIZE
+
+==============================================================
+
 shmmax:
 
 This value can be used to query and set the run time limit
@@ -570,15 +631,6 @@ without users and with a dead originative process will be destroyed.
 
 ==============================================================
 
-softlockup_thresh:
-
-This value can be used to lower the softlockup tolerance threshold.  The
-default threshold is 60 seconds.  If a cpu is locked up for 60 seconds,
-the kernel complains.  Valid values are 1-60 seconds.  Setting this
-tunable to zero will disable the softlockup detection altogether.
-
-==============================================================
-
 tainted:
 
 Non-zero if the kernel has been tainted.  Numeric values, which
@@ -614,3 +666,16 @@ that time, kernel debugging information is displayed on console.
 
 NMI switch that most IA32 servers have fires unknown NMI up, for
 example.  If a system hangs up, try pressing the NMI switch.
+
+==============================================================
+
+watchdog_thresh:
+
+This value can be used to control the frequency of hrtimer and NMI
+events and the soft and hard lockup thresholds. The default threshold
+is 10 seconds.
+
+The softlockup threshold is (2 * watchdog_thresh). Setting this
+tunable to zero will disable lockup detection altogether.
+
+==============================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt
index 3201a7097e4d..9a0319a82470 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-Documentation for /proc/sys/net/*	kernel version 2.4.0-test11-pre4
+Documentation for /proc/sys/net/*
 	(c) 1999		Terrehon Bowden <terrehon@pacbell.net>
 				Bodo Bauer <bb@ricochet.net>
 	(c) 2000		Jorge Nerin <comandante@zaralinux.com>
@@ -9,10 +9,10 @@ For general info and legal blurb, please look in README.
 ==============================================================
 
 This file contains the documentation for the sysctl files in
-/proc/sys/net and is valid for Linux kernel version 2.4.0-test11-pre4.
+/proc/sys/net
 
 The interface  to  the  networking  parts  of  the  kernel  is  located  in
-/proc/sys/net. The following table shows all possible subdirectories.You may
+/proc/sys/net. The following table shows all possible subdirectories.  You may
 see only some of them, depending on your kernel's configuration.
 
 
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Table : Subdirectories in /proc/sys/net
  ipv4      IP version 4        x25        X.25 protocol
  ipx       IPX                 token-ring IBM token ring
  bridge    Bridging            decnet     DEC net
- ipv6      IP version 6
+ ipv6      IP version 6        tipc       TIPC
 ..............................................................................
 
 1. /proc/sys/net/core - Network core options
@@ -43,6 +43,50 @@ Values :
 	1 - enable the JIT
 	2 - enable the JIT and ask the compiler to emit traces on kernel log.
 
+dev_weight
+--------------
+
+The maximum number of packets that kernel can handle on a NAPI interrupt,
+it's a Per-CPU variable.
+Default: 64
+
+default_qdisc
+--------------
+
+The default queuing discipline to use for network devices. This allows
+overriding the default queue discipline of pfifo_fast with an
+alternative. Since the default queuing discipline is created with the
+no additional parameters so is best suited to queuing disciplines that
+work well without configuration like stochastic fair queue (sfq),
+CoDel (codel) or fair queue CoDel (fq_codel). Don't use queuing disciplines
+like Hierarchical Token Bucket or Deficit Round Robin which require setting
+up classes and bandwidths.
+Default: pfifo_fast
+
+busy_read
+----------------
+Low latency busy poll timeout for socket reads. (needs CONFIG_NET_RX_BUSY_POLL)
+Approximate time in us to busy loop waiting for packets on the device queue.
+This sets the default value of the SO_BUSY_POLL socket option.
+Can be set or overridden per socket by setting socket option SO_BUSY_POLL,
+which is the preferred method of enabling. If you need to enable the feature
+globally via sysctl, a value of 50 is recommended.
+Will increase power usage.
+Default: 0 (off)
+
+busy_poll
+----------------
+Low latency busy poll timeout for poll and select. (needs CONFIG_NET_RX_BUSY_POLL)
+Approximate time in us to busy loop waiting for events.
+Recommended value depends on the number of sockets you poll on.
+For several sockets 50, for several hundreds 100.
+For more than that you probably want to use epoll.
+Note that only sockets with SO_BUSY_POLL set will be busy polled,
+so you want to either selectively set SO_BUSY_POLL on those sockets or set
+sysctl.net.busy_read globally.
+Will increase power usage.
+Default: 0 (off)
+
 rmem_default
 ------------
 
@@ -86,8 +130,7 @@ netdev_budget
 
 Maximum number of packets taken from all interfaces in one polling cycle (NAPI
 poll). In one polling cycle interfaces which are registered to polling are
-probed in a round-robin manner. The limit of packets in one such probe can be
-set per-device via sysfs class/net/<device>/weight .
+probed in a round-robin manner.
 
 netdev_max_backlog
 ------------------
@@ -194,3 +237,18 @@ IPX.
 The /proc/net/ipx_route  table  holds  a list of IPX routes. For each route it
 gives the  destination  network, the router node (or Directly) and the network
 address of the router (or Connected) for internal networks.
+
+6. TIPC
+-------------------------------------------------------
+
+The TIPC protocol now has a tunable for the receive memory, similar to the
+tcp_rmem - i.e. a vector of 3 INTEGERs: (min, default, max)
+
+    # cat /proc/sys/net/tipc/tipc_rmem
+    4252725 34021800        68043600
+    #
+
+The max value is set to CONN_OVERLOAD_LIMIT, and the default and min values
+are scaled (shifted) versions of that same value.  Note that the min value
+is not at this point in time used in any meaningful way, but the triplet is
+preserved in order to be consistent with things like tcp_rmem.
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
index 96f0ee825bed..79a797eb3e87 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
@@ -18,6 +18,7 @@ files can be found in mm/swap.c.
 
 Currently, these files are in /proc/sys/vm:
 
+- admin_reserve_kbytes
 - block_dump
 - compact_memory
 - dirty_background_bytes
@@ -42,7 +43,6 @@ Currently, these files are in /proc/sys/vm:
 - mmap_min_addr
 - nr_hugepages
 - nr_overcommit_hugepages
-- nr_pdflush_threads
 - nr_trim_pages         (only if CONFIG_MMU=n)
 - numa_zonelist_order
 - oom_dump_tasks
@@ -54,11 +54,41 @@ Currently, these files are in /proc/sys/vm:
 - percpu_pagelist_fraction
 - stat_interval
 - swappiness
+- user_reserve_kbytes
 - vfs_cache_pressure
 - zone_reclaim_mode
 
 ==============================================================
 
+admin_reserve_kbytes
+
+The amount of free memory in the system that should be reserved for users
+with the capability cap_sys_admin.
+
+admin_reserve_kbytes defaults to min(3% of free pages, 8MB)
+
+That should provide enough for the admin to log in and kill a process,
+if necessary, under the default overcommit 'guess' mode.
+
+Systems running under overcommit 'never' should increase this to account
+for the full Virtual Memory Size of programs used to recover. Otherwise,
+root may not be able to log in to recover the system.
+
+How do you calculate a minimum useful reserve?
+
+sshd or login + bash (or some other shell) + top (or ps, kill, etc.)
+
+For overcommit 'guess', we can sum resident set sizes (RSS).
+On x86_64 this is about 8MB.
+
+For overcommit 'never', we can take the max of their virtual sizes (VSZ)
+and add the sum of their RSS.
+On x86_64 this is about 128MB.
+
+Changing this takes effect whenever an application requests memory.
+
+==============================================================
+
 block_dump
 
 block_dump enables block I/O debugging when set to a nonzero value. More
@@ -77,8 +107,8 @@ huge pages although processes will also directly compact memory as required.
 
 dirty_background_bytes
 
-Contains the amount of dirty memory at which the pdflush background writeback
-daemon will start writeback.
+Contains the amount of dirty memory at which the background kernel
+flusher threads will start writeback.
 
 Note: dirty_background_bytes is the counterpart of dirty_background_ratio. Only
 one of them may be specified at a time. When one sysctl is written it is
@@ -90,7 +120,7 @@ other appears as 0 when read.
 dirty_background_ratio
 
 Contains, as a percentage of total system memory, the number of pages at which
-the pdflush background writeback daemon will start writing out dirty data.
+the background kernel flusher threads will start writing out dirty data.
 
 ==============================================================
 
@@ -113,9 +143,9 @@ retained.
 dirty_expire_centisecs
 
 This tunable is used to define when dirty data is old enough to be eligible
-for writeout by the pdflush daemons.  It is expressed in 100'ths of a second.
-Data which has been dirty in-memory for longer than this interval will be
-written out next time a pdflush daemon wakes up.
+for writeout by the kernel flusher threads.  It is expressed in 100'ths
+of a second.  Data which has been dirty in-memory for longer than this
+interval will be written out next time a flusher thread wakes up.
 
 ==============================================================
 
@@ -129,7 +159,7 @@ data.
 
 dirty_writeback_centisecs
 
-The pdflush writeback daemons will periodically wake up and write `old' data
+The kernel flusher threads will periodically wake up and write `old' data
 out to disk.  This tunable expresses the interval between those wakeups, in
 100'ths of a second.
 
@@ -170,17 +200,25 @@ fragmentation index is <= extfrag_threshold. The default value is 500.
 
 hugepages_treat_as_movable
 
-This parameter is only useful when kernelcore= is specified at boot time to
-create ZONE_MOVABLE for pages that may be reclaimed or migrated. Huge pages
-are not movable so are not normally allocated from ZONE_MOVABLE. A non-zero
-value written to hugepages_treat_as_movable allows huge pages to be allocated
-from ZONE_MOVABLE.
+This parameter controls whether we can allocate hugepages from ZONE_MOVABLE
+or not. If set to non-zero, hugepages can be allocated from ZONE_MOVABLE.
+ZONE_MOVABLE is created when kernel boot parameter kernelcore= is specified,
+so this parameter has no effect if used without kernelcore=.
+
+Hugepage migration is now available in some situations which depend on the
+architecture and/or the hugepage size. If a hugepage supports migration,
+allocation from ZONE_MOVABLE is always enabled for the hugepage regardless
+of the value of this parameter.
+IOW, this parameter affects only non-migratable hugepages.
 
-Once enabled, the ZONE_MOVABLE is treated as an area of memory the huge
-pages pool can easily grow or shrink within. Assuming that applications are
-not running that mlock() a lot of memory, it is likely the huge pages pool
-can grow to the size of ZONE_MOVABLE by repeatedly entering the desired value
-into nr_hugepages and triggering page reclaim.
+Assuming that hugepages are not migratable in your system, one usecase of
+this parameter is that users can make hugepage pool more extensible by
+enabling the allocation from ZONE_MOVABLE. This is because on ZONE_MOVABLE
+page reclaim/migration/compaction work more and you can get contiguous
+memory more likely. Note that using ZONE_MOVABLE for non-migratable
+hugepages can do harm to other features like memory hotremove (because
+memory hotremove expects that memory blocks on ZONE_MOVABLE are always
+removable,) so it's a trade-off responsible for the users.
 
 ==============================================================
 
@@ -426,16 +464,6 @@ See Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
 
 ==============================================================
 
-nr_pdflush_threads
-
-The current number of pdflush threads.  This value is read-only.
-The value changes according to the number of dirty pages in the system.
-
-When necessary, additional pdflush threads are created, one per second, up to
-nr_pdflush_threads_max.
-
-==============================================================
-
 nr_trim_pages
 
 This is available only on NOMMU kernels.
@@ -490,7 +518,7 @@ Specify "[Dd]efault" to request automatic configuration.  Autoconfiguration
 will select "node" order in following case.
 (1) if the DMA zone does not exist or
 (2) if the DMA zone comprises greater than 50% of the available memory or
-(3) if any node's DMA zone comprises greater than 60% of its local memory and
+(3) if any node's DMA zone comprises greater than 70% of its local memory and
     the amount of local memory is big enough.
 
 Otherwise, "zone" order will be selected. Default order is recommended unless
@@ -502,9 +530,10 @@ oom_dump_tasks
 
 Enables a system-wide task dump (excluding kernel threads) to be
 produced when the kernel performs an OOM-killing and includes such
-information as pid, uid, tgid, vm size, rss, cpu, oom_adj score, and
-name.  This is helpful to determine why the OOM killer was invoked
-and to identify the rogue task that caused it.
+information as pid, uid, tgid, vm size, rss, nr_ptes, swapents,
+oom_score_adj score, and name.  This is helpful to determine why the
+OOM killer was invoked, to identify the rogue task that caused it,
+and to determine why the OOM killer chose the task it did to kill.
 
 If this is set to zero, this information is suppressed.  On very
 large systems with thousands of tasks it may not be feasible to dump
@@ -552,6 +581,7 @@ memory until it actually runs out.
 
 When this flag is 2, the kernel uses a "never overcommit"
 policy that attempts to prevent any overcommit of memory.
+Note that user_reserve_kbytes affects this policy.
 
 This feature can be very useful because there are a lot of
 programs that malloc() huge amounts of memory "just-in-case"
@@ -574,16 +604,24 @@ of physical RAM.  See above.
 
 page-cluster
 
-page-cluster controls the number of pages which are written to swap in
-a single attempt.  The swap I/O size.
+page-cluster controls the number of pages up to which consecutive pages
+are read in from swap in a single attempt. This is the swap counterpart
+to page cache readahead.
+The mentioned consecutivity is not in terms of virtual/physical addresses,
+but consecutive on swap space - that means they were swapped out together.
 
 It is a logarithmic value - setting it to zero means "1 page", setting
 it to 1 means "2 pages", setting it to 2 means "4 pages", etc.
+Zero disables swap readahead completely.
 
 The default value is three (eight pages at a time).  There may be some
 small benefits in tuning this to a different value if your workload is
 swap-intensive.
 
+Lower values mean lower latencies for initial faults, but at the same time
+extra faults and I/O delays for following faults if they would have been part of
+that consecutive pages readahead would have brought in.
+
 =============================================================
 
 panic_on_oom
@@ -647,6 +685,24 @@ The default value is 60.
 
 ==============================================================
 
+- user_reserve_kbytes
+
+When overcommit_memory is set to 2, "never overommit" mode, reserve
+min(3% of current process size, user_reserve_kbytes) of free memory.
+This is intended to prevent a user from starting a single memory hogging
+process, such that they cannot recover (kill the hog).
+
+user_reserve_kbytes defaults to min(3% of the current process size, 128MB).
+
+If this is reduced to zero, then the user will be allowed to allocate
+all free memory with a single process, minus admin_reserve_kbytes.
+Any subsequent attempts to execute a command will result in
+"fork: Cannot allocate memory".
+
+Changing this takes effect whenever an application requests memory.
+
+==============================================================
+
 vfs_cache_pressure
 ------------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt b/Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt
index c1a1fd636bf9..a5f985ee1822 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ versions of the sysfs interface.
         at device creation and removal
       - the unique key to the device at that point in time
       - the kernel's path to the device directory without the leading
-        /sys, and always starting with with a slash
+        /sys, and always starting with a slash
       - all elements of a devpath must be real directories. Symlinks
         pointing to /sys/devices must always be resolved to their real
         target and the target path must be used to access the device.
diff --git a/Documentation/sysrq.txt b/Documentation/sysrq.txt
index 312e3754e8c5..8cb4d7842a5f 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysrq.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysrq.txt
@@ -116,6 +116,7 @@ On all -  write a character to /proc/sysrq-trigger.  e.g.:
 'w'	- Dumps tasks that are in uninterruptable (blocked) state.
 
 'x'	- Used by xmon interface on ppc/powerpc platforms.
+          Show global PMU Registers on sparc64.
 
 'y'	- Show global CPU Registers [SPARC-64 specific]
 
@@ -128,9 +129,9 @@ On all -  write a character to /proc/sysrq-trigger.  e.g.:
 
 *  Okay, so what can I use them for?
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Well, un'R'aw is very handy when your X server or a svgalib program crashes.
+Well, unraw(r) is very handy when your X server or a svgalib program crashes.
 
-sa'K' (Secure Access Key) is useful when you want to be sure there is no
+sak(k) (Secure Access Key) is useful when you want to be sure there is no
 trojan program running at console which could grab your password
 when you would try to login. It will kill all programs on given console,
 thus letting you make sure that the login prompt you see is actually
@@ -142,20 +143,20 @@ IMPORTANT: such.                                                   :IMPORTANT
 useful when you want to exit a program that will not let you switch consoles.
 (For example, X or a svgalib program.)
 
-re'B'oot is good when you're unable to shut down. But you should also 'S'ync
-and 'U'mount first.
+reboot(b) is good when you're unable to shut down. But you should also
+sync(s) and umount(u) first.
 
-'C'rash can be used to manually trigger a crashdump when the system is hung.
+crash(c) can be used to manually trigger a crashdump when the system is hung.
 Note that this just triggers a crash if there is no dump mechanism available.
 
-'S'ync is great when your system is locked up, it allows you to sync your
+sync(s) is great when your system is locked up, it allows you to sync your
 disks and will certainly lessen the chance of data loss and fscking. Note
 that the sync hasn't taken place until you see the "OK" and "Done" appear
 on the screen. (If the kernel is really in strife, you may not ever get the
 OK or Done message...)
 
-'U'mount is basically useful in the same ways as 'S'ync. I generally 'S'ync,
-'U'mount, then re'B'oot when my system locks. It's saved me many a fsck.
+umount(u) is basically useful in the same ways as sync(s). I generally sync(s),
+umount(u), then reboot(b) when my system locks. It's saved me many a fsck.
 Again, the unmount (remount read-only) hasn't taken place until you see the
 "OK" and "Done" message appear on the screen.
 
@@ -164,11 +165,11 @@ kernel messages you do not want to see. Selecting '0' will prevent all but
 the most urgent kernel messages from reaching your console. (They will
 still be logged if syslogd/klogd are alive, though.)
 
-t'E'rm and k'I'll are useful if you have some sort of runaway process you
+term(e) and kill(i) are useful if you have some sort of runaway process you
 are unable to kill any other way, especially if it's spawning other
 processes.
 
-"'J'ust thaw it" is useful if your system becomes unresponsive due to a frozen
+"just thaw it(j)" is useful if your system becomes unresponsive due to a frozen
 (probably root) filesystem via the FIFREEZE ioctl.
 
 *  Sometimes SysRq seems to get 'stuck' after using it, what can I do?
@@ -241,9 +242,8 @@ command you are interested in.
 
 *  I have more questions, who can I ask?
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-And I'll answer any questions about the registration system you got, also
-responding as soon as possible.
- -Crutcher
+Just ask them on the linux-kernel mailing list:
+	linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
 
 *  Credits
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
diff --git a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py
index a78879b01f09..54d29c1320ed 100755
--- a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py
+++ b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py
@@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ def tcm_mod_build_configfs(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name):
 	buf += "	int ret;\n\n"
 	buf += "	if (strstr(name, \"tpgt_\") != name)\n"
 	buf += "		return ERR_PTR(-EINVAL);\n"
-	buf += "	if (strict_strtoul(name + 5, 10, &tpgt) || tpgt > UINT_MAX)\n"
+	buf += "	if (kstrtoul(name + 5, 10, &tpgt) || tpgt > UINT_MAX)\n"
 	buf += "		return ERR_PTR(-EINVAL);\n\n"
 	buf += "	tpg = kzalloc(sizeof(struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg), GFP_KERNEL);\n"
 	buf += "	if (!tpg) {\n"
@@ -402,8 +402,6 @@ def tcm_mod_build_configfs(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name):
 	buf += "	.queue_data_in			= " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_data_in,\n"
 	buf += "	.queue_status			= " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_status,\n"
 	buf += "	.queue_tm_rsp			= " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_tm_rsp,\n"
-	buf += "	.get_fabric_sense_len		= " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_sense_len,\n"
-	buf += "	.set_fabric_sense_len		= " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_fabric_sense_len,\n"
 	buf += "	.is_state_remove		= " + fabric_mod_name + "_is_state_remove,\n"
 	buf += "	/*\n"
 	buf += "	 * Setup function pointers for generic logic in target_core_fabric_configfs.c\n"
@@ -906,20 +904,6 @@ def tcm_mod_dump_fabric_ops(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name):
 			buf += "}\n\n"
 			bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_tm_rsp(struct se_cmd *);\n"
 
-		if re.search('get_fabric_sense_len\)\(', fo):
-			buf += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_sense_len(void)\n"
-			buf += "{\n"
-			buf += "	return 0;\n"
-			buf += "}\n\n"
-			bufi += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_sense_len(void);\n"
-
-		if re.search('set_fabric_sense_len\)\(', fo):
-			buf += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_fabric_sense_len(struct se_cmd *se_cmd, u32 sense_length)\n"
-			buf += "{\n"
-			buf += "	return 0;\n"
-			buf += "}\n\n"
-			bufi += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_fabric_sense_len(struct se_cmd *, u32);\n"
-
 		if re.search('is_state_remove\)\(', fo):
 			buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_is_state_remove(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n"
 			buf += "{\n"
diff --git a/Documentation/telephony/00-INDEX b/Documentation/telephony/00-INDEX
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ffe0ed5b6fb..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/telephony/00-INDEX
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-00-INDEX
-	- this file.
-ixj.txt
-	- document describing the Quicknet drivers.
diff --git a/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt b/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index db94fb6c5678..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,394 +0,0 @@
-Linux Quicknet-Drivers-Howto
-Quicknet Technologies, Inc. (www.quicknet.net)
-Version 0.3.4  December 18, 1999
-
-1.0  Introduction
-
-This document describes the first GPL release version of the Linux
-driver for the Quicknet Internet PhoneJACK and Internet LineJACK
-cards.  More information about these cards is available at
-www.quicknet.net.  The driver version discussed in this document is
-0.3.4.
-
-These cards offer nice telco style interfaces to use your standard
-telephone/key system/PBX as the user interface for VoIP applications.
-The Internet LineJACK also offers PSTN connectivity for a single line
-Internet to PSTN gateway.  Of course, you can add more than one card
-to a system to obtain multi-line functionality.  At this time, the
-driver supports the POTS port on both the Internet PhoneJACK and the
-Internet LineJACK, but the PSTN port on the latter card is not yet
-supported.
-
-This document, and the drivers for the cards, are intended for a
-limited audience that includes technically capable programmers who
-would like to experiment with Quicknet cards.  The drivers are
-considered in ALPHA status and are not yet considered stable enough
-for general, widespread use in an unlimited audience.
-
-That's worth saying again:
-
-THE LINUX DRIVERS FOR QUICKNET CARDS ARE PRESENTLY IN A ALPHA STATE
-AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSIDERED AS READY FOR NORMAL WIDESPREAD USE.
-
-They are released early in the spirit of Internet development and to
-make this technology available to innovators who would benefit from
-early exposure.
-
-When we promote the device driver to "beta" level it will be
-considered ready for non-programmer, non-technical users.  Until then,
-please be aware that these drivers may not be stable and may affect
-the performance of your system.
-
-
-1.1 Latest Additions/Improvements
-
-The 0.3.4 version of the driver is the first GPL release.  Several
-features had to be removed from the prior binary only module, mostly
-for reasons of Intellectual Property rights.  We can't release
-information that is not ours - so certain aspects of the driver had to
-be removed to protect the rights of others.  
-
-Specifically, very old Internet PhoneJACK cards have non-standard
-G.723.1 codecs (due to the early nature of the DSPs in those days).
-The auto-conversion code to bring those cards into compliance with
-today's standards is available as a binary only module to those people
-needing it.  If you bought your card after 1997 or so, you are OK -
-it's only the very old cards that are affected.
-
-Also, the code to download G.728/G.729/G.729a codecs to the DSP is
-available as a binary only module as well.  This IP is not ours to
-release.  
-
-Hooks are built into the GPL driver to allow it to work with other
-companion modules that are completely separate from this module.
-
-1.2 Copyright, Trademarks, Disclaimer, & Credits 
-
-Copyright
-
-Copyright (c) 1999 Quicknet Technologies, Inc.  Permission is granted
-to freely copy and distribute this document provided you preserve it
-in its original form. For corrections and minor changes contact the
-maintainer at linux@quicknet.net.
-
-Trademarks
-
-Internet PhoneJACK and Internet LineJACK are registered trademarks of
-Quicknet Technologies, Inc.
-
-Disclaimer
-
-Much of the info in this HOWTO is early information released by
-Quicknet Technologies, Inc. for the express purpose of allowing early
-testing and use of the Linux drivers developed for their products.
-While every attempt has been made to be thorough, complete and
-accurate, the information contained here may be unreliable and there
-are likely a number of errors in this document. Please let the
-maintainer know about them. Since this is free documentation, it
-should be obvious that neither I nor previous authors can be held
-legally responsible for any errors.
-
-Credits
-
-This HOWTO was written by:
-
-	Greg Herlein <gherlein@quicknet.net>
-	Ed Okerson <eokerson@quicknet.net> 
-
-1.3  Future Plans: You Can Help 
-
-Please let the maintainer know of any errors in facts, opinions,
-logic, spelling, grammar, clarity, links, etc.  But first, if the date
-is over a month old, check to see that you have the latest
-version. Please send any info that you think belongs in this document.
-
-You can also contribute code and/or bug-fixes for the sample
-applications.
-
-
-1.4  Where to get things
-
-Info on latest versions of the driver are here:
-
-http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.quicknet.net/develop.htm
-
-1.5  Mailing List
-
-Quicknet operates a mailing list to provide a public forum on using
-these drivers.
-
-To subscribe to the linux-sdk mailing list, send an email to:
-
-   majordomo@linux.quicknet.net
-
-In the body of the email, type:
-
-   subscribe linux-sdk <your-email-address>
-
-Please delete any signature block that you would normally add to the
-bottom of your email - it tends to confuse majordomo.
-
-To send mail to the list, address your mail to 
-
-   linux-sdk@linux.quicknet.net
-
-Your message will go out to everyone on the list.
-
-To unsubscribe to the linux-sdk mailing list, send an email to:
-
-   majordomo@linux.quicknet.net
-
-In the body of the email, type:
-
-   unsubscribe linux-sdk <your-email-address>
-
-
-
-2.0  Requirements
-
-2.1  Quicknet Card(s)
-
-You will need at least one Internet PhoneJACK or Internet LineJACK
-cards.  These are ISA or PCI bus devices that use Plug-n-Play for
-configuration, and use no IRQs.  The driver will support up to 16
-cards in any one system, of any mix between the two types.
-
-Note that you will need two cards to do any useful testing alone, since
-you will need a card on both ends of the connection.  Of course, if
-you are doing collaborative work, perhaps your friends or coworkers
-have cards too.  If not, we'll gladly sell them some!
-
-
-2.2  ISAPNP
-
-Since the Quicknet cards are Plug-n-Play devices, you will need the
-isapnp tools package to configure the cards, or you can use the isapnp
-module to autoconfigure them.  The former package probably came with
-your Linux distribution.  Documentation on this package is available
-online at:
-
-http://mailer.wiwi.uni-marburg.de/linux/LDP/HOWTO/Plug-and-Play-HOWTO.html
-
-The isapnp autoconfiguration is available on the Quicknet website at:
-
-    http://www.quicknet.net/develop.htm
-
-though it may be in the kernel by the time you read this.
-
-
-3.0  Card Configuration 
-
-If you did not get your drivers as part of the linux kernel, do the
-following to install them:
-
-   a.  untar the distribution file.  We use the following command:
-        tar -xvzf ixj-0.x.x.tgz
-
-This creates a subdirectory holding all the necessary files.  Go to that
-subdirectory.
-
-   b.  run the "ixj_dev_create" script to remove any stray device
-files left in the /dev directory, and to create the new officially
-designated device files.  Note that the old devices were called 
-/dev/ixj, and the new method uses /dev/phone.  
-
-   c.  type "make;make install" - this will compile and install the
-module.
-
-   d.  type "depmod -av" to rebuild all your kernel version dependencies.
-
-   e.  if you are using the isapnp module to configure the cards
-       automatically, then skip to step f.  Otherwise, ensure that you
-       have run the isapnp configuration utility to properly configure
-       the cards.
-
-       e1. The Internet PhoneJACK has one configuration register that
-           requires 16 IO ports.  The Internet LineJACK card has two
-           configuration registers and isapnp reports that IO 0
-           requires 16 IO ports and IO 1 requires 8.  The Quicknet
-           driver assumes that these registers are configured to be
-           contiguous, i.e. if IO 0 is set to 0x340 then IO 1 should
-           be set to 0x350.
-
-           Make sure that none of the cards overlap if you have
-           multiple cards in the system.
-
-           If you are new to the isapnp tools, you can jumpstart
-           yourself by doing the following:
-
-      e2.  go to the /etc directory and run pnpdump to get a blank
-           isapnp.conf file.
-
-	   	pnpdump > /etc/isapnp.conf
-
-      e3.  edit the /etc/isapnp.conf file to set the IO warnings and
-           the register IO addresses. The IO warnings means that you
-           should find the line in the file that looks like this:
-
-	   (CONFLICT (IO FATAL)(IRQ FATAL)(DMA FATAL)(MEM FATAL)) # or WARNING
-
-	   and you should edit the line to look like this:
-
-	   (CONFLICT (IO WARNING)(IRQ FATAL)(DMA FATAL)(MEM FATAL)) #
-	   or WARNING
-
-           The next step is to set the IO port addresses.  The issue
-           here is that isapnp does not identify all of the ports out
-           there.  Specifically any device that does not have a driver
-           or module loaded by Linux will not be registered.  This
-           includes older sound cards and network cards.  We have
-           found that the IO port 0x300 is often used even though
-           isapnp claims that no-one is using those ports.  We
-           recommend that for a single card installation that port
-           0x340 (and 0x350) be used.  The IO port line should change
-           from this:
-
-	   (IO 0 (SIZE 16) (BASE 0x0300) (CHECK))
-
-	   to this:
-
-	   (IO 0 (SIZE 16) (BASE 0x0340) )
-
-       e4.  if you have multiple Quicknet cards, make sure that you do
-            not have any overlaps.  Be especially careful if you are
-            mixing Internet PhoneJACK and Internet LineJACK cards in
-            the same system.  In these cases we recommend moving the
-            IO port addresses to the 0x400 block.  Please note that on
-            a few machines the 0x400 series are used.  Feel free to
-            experiment with other addresses.  Our cards have been
-            proven to work using IO addresses of up to 0xFF0.
-
-       e5.  the last step is to uncomment the activation line so the
-            drivers will be associated with the port.  This means the
-            line (immediately below) the IO line should go from this:
-
-            # (ACT Y)
-
-            to this:
-
-	    (ACT Y)
-
-            Once you have finished editing the isapnp.conf file you
-            must submit it into the pnp driverconfigure the cards.
-            This is done using the following command:
-
-	    isapnp isapnp.conf
-
-	    If this works you should see a line that identifies the
-            Quicknet device, the IO port(s) chosen, and a message
-            "Enabled OK".
-
-   f.  if you are loading the module by hand, use insmod.  An example
-of this would look like this:
-
-	insmod phonedev
-	insmod ixj dspio=0x320,0x310 xio=0,0x330
-
-Then verify the module loaded by running lsmod. If you are not using a
-module that matches your kernel version, you may need to "force" the
-load using the -f option in the insmod command.
-
-	insmod phonedev
-	insmod -f ixj dspio=0x320,0x310 xio=0,0x330
-
-
-If you are using isapnp to autoconfigure your card, then you do NOT
-need any of the above, though you need to use depmod to load the
-driver, like this:
-
-	depmod ixj
-
-which will result in the needed drivers getting loaded automatically.
-
-   g.  if you are planning on having the kernel automatically request
-the module for you, then you need to edit /etc/conf.modules and add the
-following lines:
-
-	options ixj dspio=0x340 xio=0x330 ixjdebug=0
-
-If you do this, then when you execute an application that uses the
-module the kernel will request that it is loaded.
-
-  h.  if you want non-root users to be able to read and write to the 
-ixj devices (this is a good idea!) you should do the following:
-
-     - decide upon a group name to use and create that group if 
-       needed.  Add the user names to that group that you wish to 
-       have access to the device.  For example, we typically will
-       create a group named "ixj" in /etc/group and add all users
-       to that group that we want to run software that can use the 
-       ixjX devices.
-
-     - change the permissions on the device files, like this:
-	
-       chgrp ixj /dev/ixj*	
-       chmod 660 /dev/ixj*
-	
-Once this is done, then non-root users should be able to use the
-devices.  If you have enabled autoloading of modules, then the user
-should be able to open the device and have the module loaded
-automatically for them.
-
-
-4.0 Driver Installation problems.
-
-We have tested these drivers on the 2.2.9, 2.2.10, 2.2.12, and 2.2.13 kernels
-and in all cases have eventually been able to get the drivers to load and 
-run.  We have found four types of problems that prevent this from happening.
-The problems and solutions are:
-
-  a. A step was missed in the installation.  Go back and use section 3
-as a checklist.  Many people miss running the ixj_dev_create script and thus
-never load the device names into the filesystem.
-
-  b. The kernel is inconsistently linked.  We have found this problem in
-the Out Of the Box installation of several distributions.  The symptoms 
-are that neither driver will load, and that the unknown symbols include "jiffy"
-and "kmalloc".  The solution is to recompile both the kernel and the
-modules.  The command string for the final compile looks like this:
-
-    In the kernel directory:
-    1.  cp .config /tmp
-    2.  make mrproper
-    3.  cp /tmp/.config .
-    4.	make clean;make bzImage;make modules;make modules_install
-
-This rebuilds both the kernel and all the modules and makes sure they all 
-have the same linkages.  This generally solves the problem once the new 
-kernel is installed and the system rebooted.
-
-  c. The kernel has been patched, then unpatched.  This happens when
-someone decides to use an earlier kernel after they load a later kernel.
-The symptoms are proceeding through all three above steps and still not
-being able to load the driver.  What has happened is that the generated
-header files are out of sync with the kernel itself.  The solution is
-to recompile (again) using "make mrproper".  This will remove and then
-regenerate all the necessary header files.  Once this is done, then you 
-need to install and reboot the kernel.  We have not seen any problem
-loading one of our drivers after this treatment.
-
-5.0  Known Limitations
-
-We cannot currently play "dial-tone" and listen for DTMF digits at the
-same time using the ISA PhoneJACK.  This is a bug in the 8020 DSP chip
-used on that product.  All other Quicknet products function normally
-in this regard.  We have a work-around, but it's not done yet.  Until
-then, if you want dial-tone, you can always play a recorded dial-tone
-sound into the audio until you have gathered the DTMF digits.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/cpu-cooling-api.txt b/Documentation/thermal/cpu-cooling-api.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fca24c931ec8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/cpu-cooling-api.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+CPU cooling APIs How To
+===================================
+
+Written by Amit Daniel Kachhap <amit.kachhap@linaro.org>
+
+Updated: 12 May 2012
+
+Copyright (c)  2012 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd(http://www.samsung.com)
+
+0. Introduction
+
+The generic cpu cooling(freq clipping) provides registration/unregistration APIs
+to the caller. The binding of the cooling devices to the trip point is left for
+the user. The registration APIs returns the cooling device pointer.
+
+1. cpu cooling APIs
+
+1.1 cpufreq registration/unregistration APIs
+1.1.1 struct thermal_cooling_device *cpufreq_cooling_register(
+	struct cpumask *clip_cpus)
+
+    This interface function registers the cpufreq cooling device with the name
+    "thermal-cpufreq-%x". This api can support multiple instances of cpufreq
+    cooling devices.
+
+   clip_cpus: cpumask of cpus where the frequency constraints will happen.
+
+1.1.2 void cpufreq_cooling_unregister(struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev)
+
+    This interface function unregisters the "thermal-cpufreq-%x" cooling device.
+
+    cdev: Cooling device pointer which has to be unregistered.
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal b/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9010c4416967
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+Kernel driver exynos_tmu
+=================
+
+Supported chips:
+* ARM SAMSUNG EXYNOS4, EXYNOS5 series of SoC
+  Datasheet: Not publicly available
+
+Authors: Donggeun Kim <dg77.kim@samsung.com>
+Authors: Amit Daniel <amit.daniel@samsung.com>
+
+TMU controller Description:
+---------------------------
+
+This driver allows to read temperature inside SAMSUNG EXYNOS4/5 series of SoC.
+
+The chip only exposes the measured 8-bit temperature code value
+through a register.
+Temperature can be taken from the temperature code.
+There are three equations converting from temperature to temperature code.
+
+The three equations are:
+  1. Two point trimming
+	Tc = (T - 25) * (TI2 - TI1) / (85 - 25) + TI1
+
+  2. One point trimming
+	Tc = T + TI1 - 25
+
+  3. No trimming
+	Tc = T + 50
+
+  Tc: Temperature code, T: Temperature,
+  TI1: Trimming info for 25 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register)
+       Temperature code measured at 25 degree Celsius which is unchanged
+  TI2: Trimming info for 85 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register)
+       Temperature code measured at 85 degree Celsius which is unchanged
+
+TMU(Thermal Management Unit) in EXYNOS4/5 generates interrupt
+when temperature exceeds pre-defined levels.
+The maximum number of configurable threshold is five.
+The threshold levels are defined as follows:
+  Level_0: current temperature > trigger_level_0 + threshold
+  Level_1: current temperature > trigger_level_1 + threshold
+  Level_2: current temperature > trigger_level_2 + threshold
+  Level_3: current temperature > trigger_level_3 + threshold
+
+  The threshold and each trigger_level are set
+  through the corresponding registers.
+
+When an interrupt occurs, this driver notify kernel thermal framework
+with the function exynos_report_trigger.
+Although an interrupt condition for level_0 can be set,
+it can be used to synchronize the cooling action.
+
+TMU driver description:
+-----------------------
+
+The exynos thermal driver is structured as,
+
+					Kernel Core thermal framework
+				(thermal_core.c, step_wise.c, cpu_cooling.c)
+								^
+								|
+								|
+TMU configuration data -------> TMU Driver  <------> Exynos Core thermal wrapper
+(exynos_tmu_data.c)	      (exynos_tmu.c)	   (exynos_thermal_common.c)
+(exynos_tmu_data.h)	      (exynos_tmu.h)	   (exynos_thermal_common.h)
+
+a) TMU configuration data: This consist of TMU register offsets/bitfields
+		described through structure exynos_tmu_registers. Also several
+		other platform data (struct exynos_tmu_platform_data) members
+		are used to configure the TMU.
+b) TMU driver: This component initialises the TMU controller and sets different
+		thresholds. It invokes core thermal implementation with the call
+		exynos_report_trigger.
+c) Exynos Core thermal wrapper: This provides 3 wrapper function to use the
+		Kernel core thermal framework. They are exynos_unregister_thermal,
+		exynos_register_thermal and exynos_report_trigger.
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal_emulation b/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal_emulation
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b15efec6ca28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal_emulation
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+EXYNOS EMULATION MODE
+========================
+
+Copyright (C) 2012 Samsung Electronics
+
+Written by Jonghwa Lee <jonghwa3.lee@samsung.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+Exynos 4x12 (4212, 4412) and 5 series provide emulation mode for thermal management unit.
+Thermal emulation mode supports software debug for TMU's operation. User can set temperature
+manually with software code and TMU will read current temperature from user value not from
+sensor's value.
+
+Enabling CONFIG_THERMAL_EMULATION option will make this support available.
+When it's enabled, sysfs node will be created as
+/sys/devices/virtual/thermal/thermal_zone'zone id'/emul_temp.
+
+The sysfs node, 'emul_node', will contain value 0 for the initial state. When you input any
+temperature you want to update to sysfs node, it automatically enable emulation mode and
+current temperature will be changed into it.
+(Exynos also supports user changeable delay time which would be used to delay of
+ changing temperature. However, this node only uses same delay of real sensing time, 938us.)
+
+Exynos emulation mode requires synchronous of value changing and enabling. It means when you
+want to update the any value of delay or next temperature, then you have to enable emulation
+mode at the same time. (Or you have to keep the mode enabling.) If you don't, it fails to
+change the value to updated one and just use last succeessful value repeatedly. That's why
+this node gives users the right to change termerpature only. Just one interface makes it more
+simply to use.
+
+Disabling emulation mode only requires writing value 0 to sysfs node.
+
+
+TEMP	120 |
+	    |
+	100 |
+	    |
+	 80 |
+	    |		     	 	 +-----------
+	 60 |      		     	 |	    |
+	    |	           +-------------|          |
+	 40 |              |         	 |          |
+	    |		   |	     	 |          |
+	 20 |		   |	     	 |          +----------
+	    |	 	   |	     	 |          |          |
+	  0 |______________|_____________|__________|__________|_________
+		   A	    	 A	    A	   	       A     TIME
+		   |<----->|	 |<----->|  |<----->|	       |
+		   | 938us |  	 |	 |  |       |          |
+emulation    :  0  50	   |  	 70      |  20      |          0
+current temp :   sensor   50		 70         20	      sensor
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/intel_powerclamp.txt b/Documentation/thermal/intel_powerclamp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..332de4a39b5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/intel_powerclamp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,307 @@
+			 =======================
+			 INTEL POWERCLAMP DRIVER
+			 =======================
+By: Arjan van de Ven <arjan@linux.intel.com>
+    Jacob Pan <jacob.jun.pan@linux.intel.com>
+
+Contents:
+	(*) Introduction
+	    - Goals and Objectives
+
+	(*) Theory of Operation
+	    - Idle Injection
+	    - Calibration
+
+	(*) Performance Analysis
+	    - Effectiveness and Limitations
+	    - Power vs Performance
+	    - Scalability
+	    - Calibration
+	    - Comparison with Alternative Techniques
+
+	(*) Usage and Interfaces
+	    - Generic Thermal Layer (sysfs)
+	    - Kernel APIs (TBD)
+
+============
+INTRODUCTION
+============
+
+Consider the situation where a system’s power consumption must be
+reduced at runtime, due to power budget, thermal constraint, or noise
+level, and where active cooling is not preferred. Software managed
+passive power reduction must be performed to prevent the hardware
+actions that are designed for catastrophic scenarios.
+
+Currently, P-states, T-states (clock modulation), and CPU offlining
+are used for CPU throttling.
+
+On Intel CPUs, C-states provide effective power reduction, but so far
+they’re only used opportunistically, based on workload. With the
+development of intel_powerclamp driver, the method of synchronizing
+idle injection across all online CPU threads was introduced. The goal
+is to achieve forced and controllable C-state residency.
+
+Test/Analysis has been made in the areas of power, performance,
+scalability, and user experience. In many cases, clear advantage is
+shown over taking the CPU offline or modulating the CPU clock.
+
+
+===================
+THEORY OF OPERATION
+===================
+
+Idle Injection
+--------------
+
+On modern Intel processors (Nehalem or later), package level C-state
+residency is available in MSRs, thus also available to the kernel.
+
+These MSRs are:
+      #define MSR_PKG_C2_RESIDENCY	0x60D
+      #define MSR_PKG_C3_RESIDENCY	0x3F8
+      #define MSR_PKG_C6_RESIDENCY	0x3F9
+      #define MSR_PKG_C7_RESIDENCY	0x3FA
+
+If the kernel can also inject idle time to the system, then a
+closed-loop control system can be established that manages package
+level C-state. The intel_powerclamp driver is conceived as such a
+control system, where the target set point is a user-selected idle
+ratio (based on power reduction), and the error is the difference
+between the actual package level C-state residency ratio and the target idle
+ratio.
+
+Injection is controlled by high priority kernel threads, spawned for
+each online CPU.
+
+These kernel threads, with SCHED_FIFO class, are created to perform
+clamping actions of controlled duty ratio and duration. Each per-CPU
+thread synchronizes its idle time and duration, based on the rounding
+of jiffies, so accumulated errors can be prevented to avoid a jittery
+effect. Threads are also bound to the CPU such that they cannot be
+migrated, unless the CPU is taken offline. In this case, threads
+belong to the offlined CPUs will be terminated immediately.
+
+Running as SCHED_FIFO and relatively high priority, also allows such
+scheme to work for both preemptable and non-preemptable kernels.
+Alignment of idle time around jiffies ensures scalability for HZ
+values. This effect can be better visualized using a Perf timechart.
+The following diagram shows the behavior of kernel thread
+kidle_inject/cpu. During idle injection, it runs monitor/mwait idle
+for a given "duration", then relinquishes the CPU to other tasks,
+until the next time interval.
+
+The NOHZ schedule tick is disabled during idle time, but interrupts
+are not masked. Tests show that the extra wakeups from scheduler tick
+have a dramatic impact on the effectiveness of the powerclamp driver
+on large scale systems (Westmere system with 80 processors).
+
+CPU0
+		  ____________          ____________
+kidle_inject/0   |   sleep    |  mwait |  sleep     |
+	_________|            |________|            |_______
+			       duration
+CPU1
+		  ____________          ____________
+kidle_inject/1   |   sleep    |  mwait |  sleep     |
+	_________|            |________|            |_______
+			      ^
+			      |
+			      |
+			      roundup(jiffies, interval)
+
+Only one CPU is allowed to collect statistics and update global
+control parameters. This CPU is referred to as the controlling CPU in
+this document. The controlling CPU is elected at runtime, with a
+policy that favors BSP, taking into account the possibility of a CPU
+hot-plug.
+
+In terms of dynamics of the idle control system, package level idle
+time is considered largely as a non-causal system where its behavior
+cannot be based on the past or current input. Therefore, the
+intel_powerclamp driver attempts to enforce the desired idle time
+instantly as given input (target idle ratio). After injection,
+powerclamp moniors the actual idle for a given time window and adjust
+the next injection accordingly to avoid over/under correction.
+
+When used in a causal control system, such as a temperature control,
+it is up to the user of this driver to implement algorithms where
+past samples and outputs are included in the feedback. For example, a
+PID-based thermal controller can use the powerclamp driver to
+maintain a desired target temperature, based on integral and
+derivative gains of the past samples.
+
+
+
+Calibration
+-----------
+During scalability testing, it is observed that synchronized actions
+among CPUs become challenging as the number of cores grows. This is
+also true for the ability of a system to enter package level C-states.
+
+To make sure the intel_powerclamp driver scales well, online
+calibration is implemented. The goals for doing such a calibration
+are:
+
+a) determine the effective range of idle injection ratio
+b) determine the amount of compensation needed at each target ratio
+
+Compensation to each target ratio consists of two parts:
+
+        a) steady state error compensation
+	This is to offset the error occurring when the system can
+	enter idle without extra wakeups (such as external interrupts).
+
+	b) dynamic error compensation
+	When an excessive amount of wakeups occurs during idle, an
+	additional idle ratio can be added to quiet interrupts, by
+	slowing down CPU activities.
+
+A debugfs file is provided for the user to examine compensation
+progress and results, such as on a Westmere system.
+[jacob@nex01 ~]$ cat
+/sys/kernel/debug/intel_powerclamp/powerclamp_calib
+controlling cpu: 0
+pct confidence steady dynamic (compensation)
+0	0	0	0
+1	1	0	0
+2	1	1	0
+3	3	1	0
+4	3	1	0
+5	3	1	0
+6	3	1	0
+7	3	1	0
+8	3	1	0
+...
+30	3	2	0
+31	3	2	0
+32	3	1	0
+33	3	2	0
+34	3	1	0
+35	3	2	0
+36	3	1	0
+37	3	2	0
+38	3	1	0
+39	3	2	0
+40	3	3	0
+41	3	1	0
+42	3	2	0
+43	3	1	0
+44	3	1	0
+45	3	2	0
+46	3	3	0
+47	3	0	0
+48	3	2	0
+49	3	3	0
+
+Calibration occurs during runtime. No offline method is available.
+Steady state compensation is used only when confidence levels of all
+adjacent ratios have reached satisfactory level. A confidence level
+is accumulated based on clean data collected at runtime. Data
+collected during a period without extra interrupts is considered
+clean.
+
+To compensate for excessive amounts of wakeup during idle, additional
+idle time is injected when such a condition is detected. Currently,
+we have a simple algorithm to double the injection ratio. A possible
+enhancement might be to throttle the offending IRQ, such as delaying
+EOI for level triggered interrupts. But it is a challenge to be
+non-intrusive to the scheduler or the IRQ core code.
+
+
+CPU Online/Offline
+------------------
+Per-CPU kernel threads are started/stopped upon receiving
+notifications of CPU hotplug activities. The intel_powerclamp driver
+keeps track of clamping kernel threads, even after they are migrated
+to other CPUs, after a CPU offline event.
+
+
+=====================
+Performance Analysis
+=====================
+This section describes the general performance data collected on
+multiple systems, including Westmere (80P) and Ivy Bridge (4P, 8P).
+
+Effectiveness and Limitations
+-----------------------------
+The maximum range that idle injection is allowed is capped at 50
+percent. As mentioned earlier, since interrupts are allowed during
+forced idle time, excessive interrupts could result in less
+effectiveness. The extreme case would be doing a ping -f to generated
+flooded network interrupts without much CPU acknowledgement. In this
+case, little can be done from the idle injection threads. In most
+normal cases, such as scp a large file, applications can be throttled
+by the powerclamp driver, since slowing down the CPU also slows down
+network protocol processing, which in turn reduces interrupts.
+
+When control parameters change at runtime by the controlling CPU, it
+may take an additional period for the rest of the CPUs to catch up
+with the changes. During this time, idle injection is out of sync,
+thus not able to enter package C- states at the expected ratio. But
+this effect is minor, in that in most cases change to the target
+ratio is updated much less frequently than the idle injection
+frequency.
+
+Scalability
+-----------
+Tests also show a minor, but measurable, difference between the 4P/8P
+Ivy Bridge system and the 80P Westmere server under 50% idle ratio.
+More compensation is needed on Westmere for the same amount of
+target idle ratio. The compensation also increases as the idle ratio
+gets larger. The above reason constitutes the need for the
+calibration code.
+
+On the IVB 8P system, compared to an offline CPU, powerclamp can
+achieve up to 40% better performance per watt. (measured by a spin
+counter summed over per CPU counting threads spawned for all running
+CPUs).
+
+====================
+Usage and Interfaces
+====================
+The powerclamp driver is registered to the generic thermal layer as a
+cooling device. Currently, it’s not bound to any thermal zones.
+
+jacob@chromoly:/sys/class/thermal/cooling_device14$ grep . *
+cur_state:0
+max_state:50
+type:intel_powerclamp
+
+Example usage:
+- To inject 25% idle time
+$ sudo sh -c "echo 25 > /sys/class/thermal/cooling_device80/cur_state
+"
+
+If the system is not busy and has more than 25% idle time already,
+then the powerclamp driver will not start idle injection. Using Top
+will not show idle injection kernel threads.
+
+If the system is busy (spin test below) and has less than 25% natural
+idle time, powerclamp kernel threads will do idle injection, which
+appear running to the scheduler. But the overall system idle is still
+reflected. In this example, 24.1% idle is shown. This helps the
+system admin or user determine the cause of slowdown, when a
+powerclamp driver is in action.
+
+
+Tasks: 197 total,   1 running, 196 sleeping,   0 stopped,   0 zombie
+Cpu(s): 71.2%us,  4.7%sy,  0.0%ni, 24.1%id,  0.0%wa,  0.0%hi,  0.0%si,  0.0%st
+Mem:   3943228k total,  1689632k used,  2253596k free,    74960k buffers
+Swap:  4087804k total,        0k used,  4087804k free,   945336k cached
+
+  PID USER      PR  NI  VIRT  RES  SHR S %CPU %MEM    TIME+  COMMAND
+ 3352 jacob     20   0  262m  644  428 S  286  0.0   0:17.16 spin
+ 3341 root     -51   0     0    0    0 D   25  0.0   0:01.62 kidle_inject/0
+ 3344 root     -51   0     0    0    0 D   25  0.0   0:01.60 kidle_inject/3
+ 3342 root     -51   0     0    0    0 D   25  0.0   0:01.61 kidle_inject/1
+ 3343 root     -51   0     0    0    0 D   25  0.0   0:01.60 kidle_inject/2
+ 2935 jacob     20   0  696m 125m  35m S    5  3.3   0:31.11 firefox
+ 1546 root      20   0  158m  20m 6640 S    3  0.5   0:26.97 Xorg
+ 2100 jacob     20   0 1223m  88m  30m S    3  2.3   0:23.68 compiz
+
+Tests have shown that by using the powerclamp driver as a cooling
+device, a PID based userspace thermal controller can manage to
+control CPU temperature effectively, when no other thermal influence
+is added. For example, a UltraBook user can compile the kernel under
+certain temperature (below most active trip points).
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/nouveau_thermal b/Documentation/thermal/nouveau_thermal
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..efceb7828f54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/nouveau_thermal
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+Kernel driver nouveau
+===================
+
+Supported chips:
+* NV43+
+
+Authors: Martin Peres (mupuf) <martin.peres@labri.fr>
+
+Description
+---------
+
+This driver allows to read the GPU core temperature, drive the GPU fan and
+set temperature alarms.
+
+Currently, due to the absence of in-kernel API to access HWMON drivers, Nouveau
+cannot access any of the i2c external monitoring chips it may find. If you
+have one of those, temperature and/or fan management through Nouveau's HWMON
+interface is likely not to work. This document may then not cover your situation
+entirely.
+
+Temperature management
+--------------------
+
+Temperature is exposed under as a read-only HWMON attribute temp1_input.
+
+In order to protect the GPU from overheating, Nouveau supports 4 configurable
+temperature thresholds:
+
+ * Fan_boost: Fan speed is set to 100% when reaching this temperature;
+ * Downclock: The GPU will be downclocked to reduce its power dissipation;
+ * Critical: The GPU is put on hold to further lower power dissipation;
+ * Shutdown: Shut the computer down to protect your GPU.
+
+WARNING: Some of these thresholds may not be used by Nouveau depending
+on your chipset.
+
+The default value for these thresholds comes from the GPU's vbios. These
+thresholds can be configured thanks to the following HWMON attributes:
+
+ * Fan_boost: temp1_auto_point1_temp and temp1_auto_point1_temp_hyst;
+ * Downclock: temp1_max and temp1_max_hyst;
+ * Critical: temp1_crit and temp1_crit_hyst;
+ * Shutdown: temp1_emergency and temp1_emergency_hyst.
+
+NOTE: Remember that the values are stored as milli degrees Celcius. Don't forget
+to multiply!
+
+Fan management
+------------
+
+Not all cards have a drivable fan. If you do, then the following HWMON
+attributes should be available:
+
+ * pwm1_enable: Current fan management mode (NONE, MANUAL or AUTO);
+ * pwm1: Current PWM value (power percentage);
+ * pwm1_min: The minimum PWM speed allowed;
+ * pwm1_max: The maximum PWM speed allowed (bypassed when hitting Fan_boost);
+
+You may also have the following attribute:
+
+ * fan1_input: Speed in RPM of your fan.
+
+Your fan can be driven in different modes:
+
+ * 0: The fan is left untouched;
+ * 1: The fan can be driven in manual (use pwm1 to change the speed);
+ * 2; The fan is driven automatically depending on the temperature.
+
+NOTE: Be sure to use the manual mode if you want to drive the fan speed manually
+
+NOTE2: Not all fan management modes may be supported on all chipsets. We are
+working on it.
+
+Bug reports
+---------
+
+Thermal management on Nouveau is new and may not work on all cards. If you have
+inquiries, please ping mupuf on IRC (#nouveau, freenode).
+
+Bug reports should be filled on Freedesktop's bug tracker. Please follow
+http://nouveau.freedesktop.org/wiki/Bugs
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt b/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt
index 1733ab947a95..87519cb379ee 100644
--- a/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt
@@ -31,28 +31,40 @@ temperature) and throttle appropriate devices.
 1. thermal sysfs driver interface functions
 
 1.1 thermal zone device interface
-1.1.1 struct thermal_zone_device *thermal_zone_device_register(char *name,
-		int trips, void *devdata, struct thermal_zone_device_ops *ops)
+1.1.1 struct thermal_zone_device *thermal_zone_device_register(char *type,
+		int trips, int mask, void *devdata,
+		struct thermal_zone_device_ops *ops,
+		const struct thermal_zone_params *tzp,
+		int passive_delay, int polling_delay))
 
     This interface function adds a new thermal zone device (sensor) to
     /sys/class/thermal folder as thermal_zone[0-*]. It tries to bind all the
     thermal cooling devices registered at the same time.
 
-    name: the thermal zone name.
+    type: the thermal zone type.
     trips: the total number of trip points this thermal zone supports.
+    mask: Bit string: If 'n'th bit is set, then trip point 'n' is writeable.
     devdata: device private data
     ops: thermal zone device call-backs.
 	.bind: bind the thermal zone device with a thermal cooling device.
 	.unbind: unbind the thermal zone device with a thermal cooling device.
 	.get_temp: get the current temperature of the thermal zone.
-	.get_mode: get the current mode (user/kernel) of the thermal zone.
-	    - "kernel" means thermal management is done in kernel.
-	    - "user" will prevent kernel thermal driver actions upon trip points
+	.get_mode: get the current mode (enabled/disabled) of the thermal zone.
+	    - "enabled" means the kernel thermal management is enabled.
+	    - "disabled" will prevent kernel thermal driver action upon trip points
 	      so that user applications can take charge of thermal management.
-	.set_mode: set the mode (user/kernel) of the thermal zone.
+	.set_mode: set the mode (enabled/disabled) of the thermal zone.
 	.get_trip_type: get the type of certain trip point.
 	.get_trip_temp: get the temperature above which the certain trip point
 			will be fired.
+	.set_emul_temp: set the emulation temperature which helps in debugging
+			different threshold temperature points.
+    tzp: thermal zone platform parameters.
+    passive_delay: number of milliseconds to wait between polls when
+	performing passive cooling.
+    polling_delay: number of milliseconds to wait between polls when checking
+	whether trip points have been crossed (0 for interrupt driven systems).
+
 
 1.1.2 void thermal_zone_device_unregister(struct thermal_zone_device *tz)
 
@@ -82,7 +94,8 @@ temperature) and throttle appropriate devices.
 
 1.3 interface for binding a thermal zone device with a thermal cooling device
 1.3.1 int thermal_zone_bind_cooling_device(struct thermal_zone_device *tz,
-		int trip, struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev);
+	int trip, struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev,
+	unsigned long upper, unsigned long lower);
 
     This interface function bind a thermal cooling device to the certain trip
     point of a thermal zone device.
@@ -91,6 +104,12 @@ temperature) and throttle appropriate devices.
     cdev: thermal cooling device
     trip: indicates which trip point the cooling devices is associated with
 	  in this thermal zone.
+    upper:the Maximum cooling state for this trip point.
+          THERMAL_NO_LIMIT means no upper limit,
+	  and the cooling device can be in max_state.
+    lower:the Minimum cooling state can be used for this trip point.
+          THERMAL_NO_LIMIT means no lower limit,
+	  and the cooling device can be in cooling state 0.
 
 1.3.2 int thermal_zone_unbind_cooling_device(struct thermal_zone_device *tz,
 		int trip, struct thermal_cooling_device *cdev);
@@ -103,6 +122,41 @@ temperature) and throttle appropriate devices.
     trip: indicates which trip point the cooling devices is associated with
 	  in this thermal zone.
 
+1.4 Thermal Zone Parameters
+1.4.1 struct thermal_bind_params
+    This structure defines the following parameters that are used to bind
+    a zone with a cooling device for a particular trip point.
+    .cdev: The cooling device pointer
+    .weight: The 'influence' of a particular cooling device on this zone.
+             This is on a percentage scale. The sum of all these weights
+             (for a particular zone) cannot exceed 100.
+    .trip_mask:This is a bit mask that gives the binding relation between
+               this thermal zone and cdev, for a particular trip point.
+               If nth bit is set, then the cdev and thermal zone are bound
+               for trip point n.
+    .limits: This is an array of cooling state limits. Must have exactly
+         2 * thermal_zone.number_of_trip_points. It is an array consisting
+         of tuples <lower-state upper-state> of state limits. Each trip
+         will be associated with one state limit tuple when binding.
+         A NULL pointer means <THERMAL_NO_LIMITS THERMAL_NO_LIMITS>
+         on all trips. These limits are used when binding a cdev to a
+         trip point.
+    .match: This call back returns success(0) if the 'tz and cdev' need to
+	    be bound, as per platform data.
+1.4.2 struct thermal_zone_params
+    This structure defines the platform level parameters for a thermal zone.
+    This data, for each thermal zone should come from the platform layer.
+    This is an optional feature where some platforms can choose not to
+    provide this data.
+    .governor_name: Name of the thermal governor used for this zone
+    .no_hwmon: a boolean to indicate if the thermal to hwmon sysfs interface
+               is required. when no_hwmon == false, a hwmon sysfs interface
+               will be created. when no_hwmon == true, nothing will be done.
+               In case the thermal_zone_params is NULL, the hwmon interface
+               will be created (for backward compatibility).
+    .num_tbps: Number of thermal_bind_params entries for this zone
+    .tbp: thermal_bind_params entries
+
 2. sysfs attributes structure
 
 RO	read only value
@@ -117,8 +171,11 @@ Thermal zone device sys I/F, created once it's registered:
     |---type:			Type of the thermal zone
     |---temp:			Current temperature
     |---mode:			Working mode of the thermal zone
+    |---policy:			Thermal governor used for this zone
     |---trip_point_[0-*]_temp:	Trip point temperature
     |---trip_point_[0-*]_type:	Trip point type
+    |---trip_point_[0-*]_hyst:	Hysteresis value for this trip point
+    |---emul_temp:		Emulated temperature set node
 
 Thermal cooling device sys I/F, created once it's registered:
 /sys/class/thermal/cooling_device[0-*]:
@@ -167,16 +224,20 @@ temp
 	RO, Required
 
 mode
-	One of the predefined values in [kernel, user].
+	One of the predefined values in [enabled, disabled].
 	This file gives information about the algorithm that is currently
 	managing the thermal zone. It can be either default kernel based
 	algorithm or user space application.
-	kernel	= Thermal management in kernel thermal zone driver.
-	user	= Preventing kernel thermal zone driver actions upon
-		  trip points so that user application can take full
-		  charge of the thermal management.
+	enabled		= enable Kernel Thermal management.
+	disabled	= Preventing kernel thermal zone driver actions upon
+			  trip points so that user application can take full
+			  charge of the thermal management.
 	RW, Optional
 
+policy
+	One of the various thermal governors used for a particular zone.
+	RW, Required
+
 trip_point_[0-*]_temp
 	The temperature above which trip point will be fired.
 	Unit: millidegree Celsius
@@ -188,6 +249,11 @@ trip_point_[0-*]_type
 	thermal zone.
 	RO, Optional
 
+trip_point_[0-*]_hyst
+	The hysteresis value for a trip point, represented as an integer
+	Unit: Celsius
+	RW, Optional
+
 cdev[0-*]
 	Sysfs link to the thermal cooling device node where the sys I/F
 	for cooling device throttling control represents.
@@ -209,6 +275,20 @@ passive
 	Valid values: 0 (disabled) or greater than 1000
 	RW, Optional
 
+emul_temp
+	Interface to set the emulated temperature method in thermal zone
+	(sensor). After setting this temperature, the thermal zone may pass
+	this temperature to platform emulation function if registered or
+	cache it locally. This is useful in debugging different temperature
+	threshold and its associated cooling action. This is write only node
+	and writing 0 on this node should disable emulation.
+	Unit: millidegree Celsius
+	WO, Optional
+
+	  WARNING: Be careful while enabling this option on production systems,
+	  because userland can easily disable the thermal policy by simply
+	  flooding this sysfs node with low temperature values.
+
 *****************************
 * Cooling device attributes *
 *****************************
@@ -248,7 +328,8 @@ method, the sys I/F structure will be built like this:
 |thermal_zone1:
     |---type:			acpitz
     |---temp:			37000
-    |---mode:			kernel
+    |---mode:			enabled
+    |---policy:			step_wise
     |---trip_point_0_temp:	100000
     |---trip_point_0_type:	critical
     |---trip_point_1_temp:	80000
@@ -285,8 +366,36 @@ The framework includes a simple notification mechanism, in the form of a
 netlink event. Netlink socket initialization is done during the _init_
 of the framework. Drivers which intend to use the notification mechanism
 just need to call thermal_generate_netlink_event() with two arguments viz
-(originator, event). Typically the originator will be an integer assigned
-to a thermal_zone_device when it registers itself with the framework. The
+(originator, event). The originator is a pointer to struct thermal_zone_device
+from where the event has been originated. An integer which represents the
+thermal zone device will be used in the message to identify the zone. The
 event will be one of:{THERMAL_AUX0, THERMAL_AUX1, THERMAL_CRITICAL,
 THERMAL_DEV_FAULT}. Notification can be sent when the current temperature
 crosses any of the configured thresholds.
+
+5. Export Symbol APIs:
+
+5.1: get_tz_trend:
+This function returns the trend of a thermal zone, i.e the rate of change
+of temperature of the thermal zone. Ideally, the thermal sensor drivers
+are supposed to implement the callback. If they don't, the thermal
+framework calculated the trend by comparing the previous and the current
+temperature values.
+
+5.2:get_thermal_instance:
+This function returns the thermal_instance corresponding to a given
+{thermal_zone, cooling_device, trip_point} combination. Returns NULL
+if such an instance does not exist.
+
+5.3:thermal_notify_framework:
+This function handles the trip events from sensor drivers. It starts
+throttling the cooling devices according to the policy configured.
+For CRITICAL and HOT trip points, this notifies the respective drivers,
+and does actual throttling for other trip points i.e ACTIVE and PASSIVE.
+The throttling policy is based on the configured platform data; if no
+platform data is provided, this uses the step_wise throttling policy.
+
+5.4:thermal_cdev_update:
+This function serves as an arbitrator to set the state of a cooling
+device. It sets the cooling device to the deepest cooling state if
+possible.
diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/x86_pkg_temperature_thermal b/Documentation/thermal/x86_pkg_temperature_thermal
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..17a3a4c0a0ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/thermal/x86_pkg_temperature_thermal
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+Kernel driver: x86_pkg_temp_thermal
+===================
+
+Supported chips:
+* x86: with package level thermal management
+(Verify using: CPUID.06H:EAX[bit 6] =1)
+
+Authors: Srinivas Pandruvada <srinivas.pandruvada@linux.intel.com>
+
+Reference
+---
+Intel® 64 and IA-32 Architectures Software Developer’s Manual (Jan, 2013):
+Chapter 14.6: PACKAGE LEVEL THERMAL MANAGEMENT
+
+Description
+---------
+
+This driver register CPU digital temperature package level sensor as a thermal
+zone with maximum two user mode configurable trip points. Number of trip points
+depends on the capability of the package. Once the trip point is violated,
+user mode can receive notification via thermal notification mechanism and can
+take any action to control temperature.
+
+
+Threshold management
+--------------------
+Each package will register as a thermal zone under /sys/class/thermal.
+Example:
+/sys/class/thermal/thermal_zone1
+
+This contains two trip points:
+- trip_point_0_temp
+- trip_point_1_temp
+
+User can set any temperature between 0 to TJ-Max temperature. Temperature units
+are in milli-degree Celsius. Refer to "Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt" for
+thermal sys-fs details.
+
+Any value other than 0 in these trip points, can trigger thermal notifications.
+Setting 0, stops sending thermal notifications.
+
+Thermal notifications: To get kobject-uevent notifications, set the thermal zone
+policy to "user_space". For example: echo -n "user_space" > policy
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/Documentation/this_cpu_ops.txt b/Documentation/this_cpu_ops.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1a4ce7e3e05f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/this_cpu_ops.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+this_cpu operations
+-------------------
+
+this_cpu operations are a way of optimizing access to per cpu
+variables associated with the *currently* executing processor through
+the use of segment registers (or a dedicated register where the cpu
+permanently stored the beginning of the per cpu area for a specific
+processor).
+
+The this_cpu operations add a per cpu variable offset to the processor
+specific percpu base and encode that operation in the instruction
+operating on the per cpu variable.
+
+This means there are no atomicity issues between the calculation of
+the offset and the operation on the data. Therefore it is not
+necessary to disable preempt or interrupts to ensure that the
+processor is not changed between the calculation of the address and
+the operation on the data.
+
+Read-modify-write operations are of particular interest. Frequently
+processors have special lower latency instructions that can operate
+without the typical synchronization overhead but still provide some
+sort of relaxed atomicity guarantee. The x86 for example can execute
+RMV (Read Modify Write) instructions like inc/dec/cmpxchg without the
+lock prefix and the associated latency penalty.
+
+Access to the variable without the lock prefix is not synchronized but
+synchronization is not necessary since we are dealing with per cpu
+data specific to the currently executing processor. Only the current
+processor should be accessing that variable and therefore there are no
+concurrency issues with other processors in the system.
+
+On x86 the fs: or the gs: segment registers contain the base of the
+per cpu area. It is then possible to simply use the segment override
+to relocate a per cpu relative address to the proper per cpu area for
+the processor. So the relocation to the per cpu base is encoded in the
+instruction via a segment register prefix.
+
+For example:
+
+	DEFINE_PER_CPU(int, x);
+	int z;
+
+	z = this_cpu_read(x);
+
+results in a single instruction
+
+	mov ax, gs:[x]
+
+instead of a sequence of calculation of the address and then a fetch
+from that address which occurs with the percpu operations. Before
+this_cpu_ops such sequence also required preempt disable/enable to
+prevent the kernel from moving the thread to a different processor
+while the calculation is performed.
+
+The main use of the this_cpu operations has been to optimize counter
+operations.
+
+	this_cpu_inc(x)
+
+results in the following single instruction (no lock prefix!)
+
+	inc gs:[x]
+
+instead of the following operations required if there is no segment
+register.
+
+	int *y;
+	int cpu;
+
+	cpu = get_cpu();
+	y = per_cpu_ptr(&x, cpu);
+	(*y)++;
+	put_cpu();
+
+Note that these operations can only be used on percpu data that is
+reserved for a specific processor. Without disabling preemption in the
+surrounding code this_cpu_inc() will only guarantee that one of the
+percpu counters is correctly incremented. However, there is no
+guarantee that the OS will not move the process directly before or
+after the this_cpu instruction is executed. In general this means that
+the value of the individual counters for each processor are
+meaningless. The sum of all the per cpu counters is the only value
+that is of interest.
+
+Per cpu variables are used for performance reasons. Bouncing cache
+lines can be avoided if multiple processors concurrently go through
+the same code paths.  Since each processor has its own per cpu
+variables no concurrent cacheline updates take place. The price that
+has to be paid for this optimization is the need to add up the per cpu
+counters when the value of the counter is needed.
+
+
+Special operations:
+-------------------
+
+	y = this_cpu_ptr(&x)
+
+Takes the offset of a per cpu variable (&x !) and returns the address
+of the per cpu variable that belongs to the currently executing
+processor.  this_cpu_ptr avoids multiple steps that the common
+get_cpu/put_cpu sequence requires. No processor number is
+available. Instead the offset of the local per cpu area is simply
+added to the percpu offset.
+
+
+
+Per cpu variables and offsets
+-----------------------------
+
+Per cpu variables have *offsets* to the beginning of the percpu
+area. They do not have addresses although they look like that in the
+code. Offsets cannot be directly dereferenced. The offset must be
+added to a base pointer of a percpu area of a processor in order to
+form a valid address.
+
+Therefore the use of x or &x outside of the context of per cpu
+operations is invalid and will generally be treated like a NULL
+pointer dereference.
+
+In the context of per cpu operations
+
+	x is a per cpu variable. Most this_cpu operations take a cpu
+	variable.
+
+	&x is the *offset* a per cpu variable. this_cpu_ptr() takes
+	the offset of a per cpu variable which makes this look a bit
+	strange.
+
+
+
+Operations on a field of a per cpu structure
+--------------------------------------------
+
+Let's say we have a percpu structure
+
+	struct s {
+		int n,m;
+	};
+
+	DEFINE_PER_CPU(struct s, p);
+
+
+Operations on these fields are straightforward
+
+	this_cpu_inc(p.m)
+
+	z = this_cpu_cmpxchg(p.m, 0, 1);
+
+
+If we have an offset to struct s:
+
+	struct s __percpu *ps = &p;
+
+	z = this_cpu_dec(ps->m);
+
+	z = this_cpu_inc_return(ps->n);
+
+
+The calculation of the pointer may require the use of this_cpu_ptr()
+if we do not make use of this_cpu ops later to manipulate fields:
+
+	struct s *pp;
+
+	pp = this_cpu_ptr(&p);
+
+	pp->m--;
+
+	z = pp->n++;
+
+
+Variants of this_cpu ops
+-------------------------
+
+this_cpu ops are interrupt safe. Some architecture do not support
+these per cpu local operations. In that case the operation must be
+replaced by code that disables interrupts, then does the operations
+that are guaranteed to be atomic and then reenable interrupts. Doing
+so is expensive. If there are other reasons why the scheduler cannot
+change the processor we are executing on then there is no reason to
+disable interrupts. For that purpose the __this_cpu operations are
+provided. For example.
+
+	__this_cpu_inc(x);
+
+Will increment x and will not fallback to code that disables
+interrupts on platforms that cannot accomplish atomicity through
+address relocation and a Read-Modify-Write operation in the same
+instruction.
+
+
+
+&this_cpu_ptr(pp)->n vs this_cpu_ptr(&pp->n)
+--------------------------------------------
+
+The first operation takes the offset and forms an address and then
+adds the offset of the n field.
+
+The second one first adds the two offsets and then does the
+relocation.  IMHO the second form looks cleaner and has an easier time
+with (). The second form also is consistent with the way
+this_cpu_read() and friends are used.
+
+
+Christoph Lameter, April 3rd, 2013
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/NO_HZ.txt b/Documentation/timers/NO_HZ.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cca122f25120
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/timers/NO_HZ.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,352 @@
+		NO_HZ: Reducing Scheduling-Clock Ticks
+
+
+This document describes Kconfig options and boot parameters that can
+reduce the number of scheduling-clock interrupts, thereby improving energy
+efficiency and reducing OS jitter.  Reducing OS jitter is important for
+some types of computationally intensive high-performance computing (HPC)
+applications and for real-time applications.
+
+There are three main ways of managing scheduling-clock interrupts
+(also known as "scheduling-clock ticks" or simply "ticks"):
+
+1.	Never omit scheduling-clock ticks (CONFIG_HZ_PERIODIC=y or
+	CONFIG_NO_HZ=n for older kernels).  You normally will -not-
+	want to choose this option.
+
+2.	Omit scheduling-clock ticks on idle CPUs (CONFIG_NO_HZ_IDLE=y or
+	CONFIG_NO_HZ=y for older kernels).  This is the most common
+	approach, and should be the default.
+
+3.	Omit scheduling-clock ticks on CPUs that are either idle or that
+	have only one runnable task (CONFIG_NO_HZ_FULL=y).  Unless you
+	are running realtime applications or certain types of HPC
+	workloads, you will normally -not- want this option.
+
+These three cases are described in the following three sections, followed
+by a third section on RCU-specific considerations, a fourth section
+discussing testing, and a fifth and final section listing known issues.
+
+
+NEVER OMIT SCHEDULING-CLOCK TICKS
+
+Very old versions of Linux from the 1990s and the very early 2000s
+are incapable of omitting scheduling-clock ticks.  It turns out that
+there are some situations where this old-school approach is still the
+right approach, for example, in heavy workloads with lots of tasks
+that use short bursts of CPU, where there are very frequent idle
+periods, but where these idle periods are also quite short (tens or
+hundreds of microseconds).  For these types of workloads, scheduling
+clock interrupts will normally be delivered any way because there
+will frequently be multiple runnable tasks per CPU.  In these cases,
+attempting to turn off the scheduling clock interrupt will have no effect
+other than increasing the overhead of switching to and from idle and
+transitioning between user and kernel execution.
+
+This mode of operation can be selected using CONFIG_HZ_PERIODIC=y (or
+CONFIG_NO_HZ=n for older kernels).
+
+However, if you are instead running a light workload with long idle
+periods, failing to omit scheduling-clock interrupts will result in
+excessive power consumption.  This is especially bad on battery-powered
+devices, where it results in extremely short battery lifetimes.  If you
+are running light workloads, you should therefore read the following
+section.
+
+In addition, if you are running either a real-time workload or an HPC
+workload with short iterations, the scheduling-clock interrupts can
+degrade your applications performance.  If this describes your workload,
+you should read the following two sections.
+
+
+OMIT SCHEDULING-CLOCK TICKS FOR IDLE CPUs
+
+If a CPU is idle, there is little point in sending it a scheduling-clock
+interrupt.  After all, the primary purpose of a scheduling-clock interrupt
+is to force a busy CPU to shift its attention among multiple duties,
+and an idle CPU has no duties to shift its attention among.
+
+The CONFIG_NO_HZ_IDLE=y Kconfig option causes the kernel to avoid sending
+scheduling-clock interrupts to idle CPUs, which is critically important
+both to battery-powered devices and to highly virtualized mainframes.
+A battery-powered device running a CONFIG_HZ_PERIODIC=y kernel would
+drain its battery very quickly, easily 2-3 times as fast as would the
+same device running a CONFIG_NO_HZ_IDLE=y kernel.  A mainframe running
+1,500 OS instances might find that half of its CPU time was consumed by
+unnecessary scheduling-clock interrupts.  In these situations, there
+is strong motivation to avoid sending scheduling-clock interrupts to
+idle CPUs.  That said, dyntick-idle mode is not free:
+
+1.	It increases the number of instructions executed on the path
+	to and from the idle loop.
+
+2.	On many architectures, dyntick-idle mode also increases the
+	number of expensive clock-reprogramming operations.
+
+Therefore, systems with aggressive real-time response constraints often
+run CONFIG_HZ_PERIODIC=y kernels (or CONFIG_NO_HZ=n for older kernels)
+in order to avoid degrading from-idle transition latencies.
+
+An idle CPU that is not receiving scheduling-clock interrupts is said to
+be "dyntick-idle", "in dyntick-idle mode", "in nohz mode", or "running
+tickless".  The remainder of this document will use "dyntick-idle mode".
+
+There is also a boot parameter "nohz=" that can be used to disable
+dyntick-idle mode in CONFIG_NO_HZ_IDLE=y kernels by specifying "nohz=off".
+By default, CONFIG_NO_HZ_IDLE=y kernels boot with "nohz=on", enabling
+dyntick-idle mode.
+
+
+OMIT SCHEDULING-CLOCK TICKS FOR CPUs WITH ONLY ONE RUNNABLE TASK
+
+If a CPU has only one runnable task, there is little point in sending it
+a scheduling-clock interrupt because there is no other task to switch to.
+Note that omitting scheduling-clock ticks for CPUs with only one runnable
+task implies also omitting them for idle CPUs.
+
+The CONFIG_NO_HZ_FULL=y Kconfig option causes the kernel to avoid
+sending scheduling-clock interrupts to CPUs with a single runnable task,
+and such CPUs are said to be "adaptive-ticks CPUs".  This is important
+for applications with aggressive real-time response constraints because
+it allows them to improve their worst-case response times by the maximum
+duration of a scheduling-clock interrupt.  It is also important for
+computationally intensive short-iteration workloads:  If any CPU is
+delayed during a given iteration, all the other CPUs will be forced to
+wait idle while the delayed CPU finishes.  Thus, the delay is multiplied
+by one less than the number of CPUs.  In these situations, there is
+again strong motivation to avoid sending scheduling-clock interrupts.
+
+By default, no CPU will be an adaptive-ticks CPU.  The "nohz_full="
+boot parameter specifies the adaptive-ticks CPUs.  For example,
+"nohz_full=1,6-8" says that CPUs 1, 6, 7, and 8 are to be adaptive-ticks
+CPUs.  Note that you are prohibited from marking all of the CPUs as
+adaptive-tick CPUs:  At least one non-adaptive-tick CPU must remain
+online to handle timekeeping tasks in order to ensure that system
+calls like gettimeofday() returns accurate values on adaptive-tick CPUs.
+(This is not an issue for CONFIG_NO_HZ_IDLE=y because there are no running
+user processes to observe slight drifts in clock rate.)  Therefore, the
+boot CPU is prohibited from entering adaptive-ticks mode.  Specifying a
+"nohz_full=" mask that includes the boot CPU will result in a boot-time
+error message, and the boot CPU will be removed from the mask.  Note that
+this means that your system must have at least two CPUs in order for
+CONFIG_NO_HZ_FULL=y to do anything for you.
+
+Alternatively, the CONFIG_NO_HZ_FULL_ALL=y Kconfig parameter specifies
+that all CPUs other than the boot CPU are adaptive-ticks CPUs.  This
+Kconfig parameter will be overridden by the "nohz_full=" boot parameter,
+so that if both the CONFIG_NO_HZ_FULL_ALL=y Kconfig parameter and
+the "nohz_full=1" boot parameter is specified, the boot parameter will
+prevail so that only CPU 1 will be an adaptive-ticks CPU.
+
+Finally, adaptive-ticks CPUs must have their RCU callbacks offloaded.
+This is covered in the "RCU IMPLICATIONS" section below.
+
+Normally, a CPU remains in adaptive-ticks mode as long as possible.
+In particular, transitioning to kernel mode does not automatically change
+the mode.  Instead, the CPU will exit adaptive-ticks mode only if needed,
+for example, if that CPU enqueues an RCU callback.
+
+Just as with dyntick-idle mode, the benefits of adaptive-tick mode do
+not come for free:
+
+1.	CONFIG_NO_HZ_FULL selects CONFIG_NO_HZ_COMMON, so you cannot run
+	adaptive ticks without also running dyntick idle.  This dependency
+	extends down into the implementation, so that all of the costs
+	of CONFIG_NO_HZ_IDLE are also incurred by CONFIG_NO_HZ_FULL.
+
+2.	The user/kernel transitions are slightly more expensive due
+	to the need to inform kernel subsystems (such as RCU) about
+	the change in mode.
+
+3.	POSIX CPU timers on adaptive-tick CPUs may miss their deadlines
+	(perhaps indefinitely) because they currently rely on
+	scheduling-tick interrupts.  This will likely be fixed in
+	one of two ways: (1) Prevent CPUs with POSIX CPU timers from
+	entering adaptive-tick mode, or (2) Use hrtimers or other
+	adaptive-ticks-immune mechanism to cause the POSIX CPU timer to
+	fire properly.
+
+4.	If there are more perf events pending than the hardware can
+	accommodate, they are normally round-robined so as to collect
+	all of them over time.  Adaptive-tick mode may prevent this
+	round-robining from happening.  This will likely be fixed by
+	preventing CPUs with large numbers of perf events pending from
+	entering adaptive-tick mode.
+
+5.	Scheduler statistics for adaptive-tick CPUs may be computed
+	slightly differently than those for non-adaptive-tick CPUs.
+	This might in turn perturb load-balancing of real-time tasks.
+
+6.	The LB_BIAS scheduler feature is disabled by adaptive ticks.
+
+Although improvements are expected over time, adaptive ticks is quite
+useful for many types of real-time and compute-intensive applications.
+However, the drawbacks listed above mean that adaptive ticks should not
+(yet) be enabled by default.
+
+
+RCU IMPLICATIONS
+
+There are situations in which idle CPUs cannot be permitted to
+enter either dyntick-idle mode or adaptive-tick mode, the most
+common being when that CPU has RCU callbacks pending.
+
+The CONFIG_RCU_FAST_NO_HZ=y Kconfig option may be used to cause such CPUs
+to enter dyntick-idle mode or adaptive-tick mode anyway.  In this case,
+a timer will awaken these CPUs every four jiffies in order to ensure
+that the RCU callbacks are processed in a timely fashion.
+
+Another approach is to offload RCU callback processing to "rcuo" kthreads
+using the CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU=y Kconfig option.  The specific CPUs to
+offload may be selected via several methods:
+
+1.	One of three mutually exclusive Kconfig options specify a
+	build-time default for the CPUs to offload:
+
+	a.	The CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU_NONE=y Kconfig option results in
+		no CPUs being offloaded.
+
+	b.	The CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU_ZERO=y Kconfig option causes
+		CPU 0 to be offloaded.
+
+	c.	The CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU_ALL=y Kconfig option causes all
+		CPUs to be offloaded.  Note that the callbacks will be
+		offloaded to "rcuo" kthreads, and that those kthreads
+		will in fact run on some CPU.  However, this approach
+		gives fine-grained control on exactly which CPUs the
+		callbacks run on, along with their scheduling priority
+		(including the default of SCHED_OTHER), and it further
+		allows this control to be varied dynamically at runtime.
+
+2.	The "rcu_nocbs=" kernel boot parameter, which takes a comma-separated
+	list of CPUs and CPU ranges, for example, "1,3-5" selects CPUs 1,
+	3, 4, and 5.  The specified CPUs will be offloaded in addition to
+	any CPUs specified as offloaded by CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU_ZERO=y or
+	CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU_ALL=y.  This means that the "rcu_nocbs=" boot
+	parameter has no effect for kernels built with RCU_NOCB_CPU_ALL=y.
+
+The offloaded CPUs will never queue RCU callbacks, and therefore RCU
+never prevents offloaded CPUs from entering either dyntick-idle mode
+or adaptive-tick mode.  That said, note that it is up to userspace to
+pin the "rcuo" kthreads to specific CPUs if desired.  Otherwise, the
+scheduler will decide where to run them, which might or might not be
+where you want them to run.
+
+
+TESTING
+
+So you enable all the OS-jitter features described in this document,
+but do not see any change in your workload's behavior.  Is this because
+your workload isn't affected that much by OS jitter, or is it because
+something else is in the way?  This section helps answer this question
+by providing a simple OS-jitter test suite, which is available on branch
+master of the following git archive:
+
+git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/frederic/dynticks-testing.git
+
+Clone this archive and follow the instructions in the README file.
+This test procedure will produce a trace that will allow you to evaluate
+whether or not you have succeeded in removing OS jitter from your system.
+If this trace shows that you have removed OS jitter as much as is
+possible, then you can conclude that your workload is not all that
+sensitive to OS jitter.
+
+Note: this test requires that your system have at least two CPUs.
+We do not currently have a good way to remove OS jitter from single-CPU
+systems.
+
+
+KNOWN ISSUES
+
+o	Dyntick-idle slows transitions to and from idle slightly.
+	In practice, this has not been a problem except for the most
+	aggressive real-time workloads, which have the option of disabling
+	dyntick-idle mode, an option that most of them take.  However,
+	some workloads will no doubt want to use adaptive ticks to
+	eliminate scheduling-clock interrupt latencies.  Here are some
+	options for these workloads:
+
+	a.	Use PMQOS from userspace to inform the kernel of your
+		latency requirements (preferred).
+
+	b.	On x86 systems, use the "idle=mwait" boot parameter.
+
+	c.	On x86 systems, use the "intel_idle.max_cstate=" to limit
+	`	the maximum C-state depth.
+
+	d.	On x86 systems, use the "idle=poll" boot parameter.
+		However, please note that use of this parameter can cause
+		your CPU to overheat, which may cause thermal throttling
+		to degrade your latencies -- and that this degradation can
+		be even worse than that of dyntick-idle.  Furthermore,
+		this parameter effectively disables Turbo Mode on Intel
+		CPUs, which can significantly reduce maximum performance.
+
+o	Adaptive-ticks slows user/kernel transitions slightly.
+	This is not expected to be a problem for computationally intensive
+	workloads, which have few such transitions.  Careful benchmarking
+	will be required to determine whether or not other workloads
+	are significantly affected by this effect.
+
+o	Adaptive-ticks does not do anything unless there is only one
+	runnable task for a given CPU, even though there are a number
+	of other situations where the scheduling-clock tick is not
+	needed.  To give but one example, consider a CPU that has one
+	runnable high-priority SCHED_FIFO task and an arbitrary number
+	of low-priority SCHED_OTHER tasks.  In this case, the CPU is
+	required to run the SCHED_FIFO task until it either blocks or
+	some other higher-priority task awakens on (or is assigned to)
+	this CPU, so there is no point in sending a scheduling-clock
+	interrupt to this CPU.	However, the current implementation
+	nevertheless sends scheduling-clock interrupts to CPUs having a
+	single runnable SCHED_FIFO task and multiple runnable SCHED_OTHER
+	tasks, even though these interrupts are unnecessary.
+
+	And even when there are multiple runnable tasks on a given CPU,
+	there is little point in interrupting that CPU until the current
+	running task's timeslice expires, which is almost always way
+	longer than the time of the next scheduling-clock interrupt.
+
+	Better handling of these sorts of situations is future work.
+
+o	A reboot is required to reconfigure both adaptive idle and RCU
+	callback offloading.  Runtime reconfiguration could be provided
+	if needed, however, due to the complexity of reconfiguring RCU at
+	runtime, there would need to be an earthshakingly good reason.
+	Especially given that you have the straightforward option of
+	simply offloading RCU callbacks from all CPUs and pinning them
+	where you want them whenever you want them pinned.
+
+o	Additional configuration is required to deal with other sources
+	of OS jitter, including interrupts and system-utility tasks
+	and processes.  This configuration normally involves binding
+	interrupts and tasks to particular CPUs.
+
+o	Some sources of OS jitter can currently be eliminated only by
+	constraining the workload.  For example, the only way to eliminate
+	OS jitter due to global TLB shootdowns is to avoid the unmapping
+	operations (such as kernel module unload operations) that
+	result in these shootdowns.  For another example, page faults
+	and TLB misses can be reduced (and in some cases eliminated) by
+	using huge pages and by constraining the amount of memory used
+	by the application.  Pre-faulting the working set can also be
+	helpful, especially when combined with the mlock() and mlockall()
+	system calls.
+
+o	Unless all CPUs are idle, at least one CPU must keep the
+	scheduling-clock interrupt going in order to support accurate
+	timekeeping.
+
+o	If there might potentially be some adaptive-ticks CPUs, there
+	will be at least one CPU keeping the scheduling-clock interrupt
+	going, even if all CPUs are otherwise idle.
+
+	Better handling of this situation is ongoing work.
+
+o	Some process-handling operations still require the occasional
+	scheduling-clock tick.	These operations include calculating CPU
+	load, maintaining sched average, computing CFS entity vruntime,
+	computing avenrun, and carrying out load balancing.  They are
+	currently accommodated by scheduling-clock tick every second
+	or so.	On-going work will eliminate the need even for these
+	infrequent scheduling-clock ticks.
diff --git a/Documentation/tpm/xen-tpmfront.txt b/Documentation/tpm/xen-tpmfront.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..69346de87ff3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/tpm/xen-tpmfront.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+Virtual TPM interface for Xen
+
+Authors: Matthew Fioravante (JHUAPL), Daniel De Graaf (NSA)
+
+This document describes the virtual Trusted Platform Module (vTPM) subsystem for
+Xen. The reader is assumed to have familiarity with building and installing Xen,
+Linux, and a basic understanding of the TPM and vTPM concepts.
+
+INTRODUCTION
+
+The goal of this work is to provide a TPM functionality to a virtual guest
+operating system (in Xen terms, a DomU).  This allows programs to interact with
+a TPM in a virtual system the same way they interact with a TPM on the physical
+system.  Each guest gets its own unique, emulated, software TPM.  However, each
+of the vTPM's secrets (Keys, NVRAM, etc) are managed by a vTPM Manager domain,
+which seals the secrets to the Physical TPM.  If the process of creating each of
+these domains (manager, vTPM, and guest) is trusted, the vTPM subsystem extends
+the chain of trust rooted in the hardware TPM to virtual machines in Xen. Each
+major component of vTPM is implemented as a separate domain, providing secure
+separation guaranteed by the hypervisor. The vTPM domains are implemented in
+mini-os to reduce memory and processor overhead.
+
+This mini-os vTPM subsystem was built on top of the previous vTPM work done by
+IBM and Intel corporation.
+
+
+DESIGN OVERVIEW
+---------------
+
+The architecture of vTPM is described below:
+
++------------------+
+|    Linux DomU    | ...
+|       |  ^       |
+|       v  |       |
+|   xen-tpmfront   |
++------------------+
+        |  ^
+        v  |
++------------------+
+| mini-os/tpmback  |
+|       |  ^       |
+|       v  |       |
+|  vtpm-stubdom    | ...
+|       |  ^       |
+|       v  |       |
+| mini-os/tpmfront |
++------------------+
+        |  ^
+        v  |
++------------------+
+| mini-os/tpmback  |
+|       |  ^       |
+|       v  |       |
+| vtpmmgr-stubdom  |
+|       |  ^       |
+|       v  |       |
+| mini-os/tpm_tis  |
++------------------+
+        |  ^
+        v  |
++------------------+
+|   Hardware TPM   |
++------------------+
+
+ * Linux DomU: The Linux based guest that wants to use a vTPM. There may be
+	       more than one of these.
+
+ * xen-tpmfront.ko: Linux kernel virtual TPM frontend driver. This driver
+                    provides vTPM access to a Linux-based DomU.
+
+ * mini-os/tpmback: Mini-os TPM backend driver. The Linux frontend driver
+		    connects to this backend driver to facilitate communications
+		    between the Linux DomU and its vTPM. This driver is also
+		    used by vtpmmgr-stubdom to communicate with vtpm-stubdom.
+
+ * vtpm-stubdom: A mini-os stub domain that implements a vTPM. There is a
+		 one to one mapping between running vtpm-stubdom instances and
+                 logical vtpms on the system. The vTPM Platform Configuration
+                 Registers (PCRs) are normally all initialized to zero.
+
+ * mini-os/tpmfront: Mini-os TPM frontend driver. The vTPM mini-os domain
+		     vtpm-stubdom uses this driver to communicate with
+		     vtpmmgr-stubdom. This driver is also used in mini-os
+		     domains such as pv-grub that talk to the vTPM domain.
+
+ * vtpmmgr-stubdom: A mini-os domain that implements the vTPM manager. There is
+		    only one vTPM manager and it should be running during the
+		    entire lifetime of the machine.  This domain regulates
+		    access to the physical TPM on the system and secures the
+		    persistent state of each vTPM.
+
+ * mini-os/tpm_tis: Mini-os TPM version 1.2 TPM Interface Specification (TIS)
+                    driver. This driver used by vtpmmgr-stubdom to talk directly to
+                    the hardware TPM. Communication is facilitated by mapping
+                    hardware memory pages into vtpmmgr-stubdom.
+
+ * Hardware TPM: The physical TPM that is soldered onto the motherboard.
+
+
+INTEGRATION WITH XEN
+--------------------
+
+Support for the vTPM driver was added in Xen using the libxl toolstack in Xen
+4.3.  See the Xen documentation (docs/misc/vtpm.txt) for details on setting up
+the vTPM and vTPM Manager stub domains.  Once the stub domains are running, a
+vTPM device is set up in the same manner as a disk or network device in the
+domain's configuration file.
+
+In order to use features such as IMA that require a TPM to be loaded prior to
+the initrd, the xen-tpmfront driver must be compiled in to the kernel.  If not
+using such features, the driver can be compiled as a module and will be loaded
+as usual.
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/events-nmi.txt b/Documentation/trace/events-nmi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c03c8c89f08d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/trace/events-nmi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+NMI Trace Events
+
+These events normally show up here:
+
+	/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/nmi
+
+--
+
+nmi_handler:
+
+You might want to use this tracepoint if you suspect that your
+NMI handlers are hogging large amounts of CPU time.  The kernel
+will warn if it sees long-running handlers:
+
+	INFO: NMI handler took too long to run: 9.207 msecs
+
+and this tracepoint will allow you to drill down and get some
+more details.
+
+Let's say you suspect that perf_event_nmi_handler() is causing
+you some problems and you only want to trace that handler
+specifically.  You need to find its address:
+
+	$ grep perf_event_nmi_handler /proc/kallsyms
+	ffffffff81625600 t perf_event_nmi_handler
+
+Let's also say you are only interested in when that function is
+really hogging a lot of CPU time, like a millisecond at a time.
+Note that the kernel's output is in milliseconds, but the input
+to the filter is in nanoseconds!  You can filter on 'delta_ns':
+
+cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/nmi/nmi_handler
+echo 'handler==0xffffffff81625600 && delta_ns>1000000' > filter
+echo 1 > enable
+
+Your output would then look like:
+
+$ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace_pipe
+<idle>-0     [000] d.h3   505.397558: nmi_handler: perf_event_nmi_handler() delta_ns: 3236765 handled: 1
+<idle>-0     [000] d.h3   505.805893: nmi_handler: perf_event_nmi_handler() delta_ns: 3174234 handled: 1
+<idle>-0     [000] d.h3   506.158206: nmi_handler: perf_event_nmi_handler() delta_ns: 3084642 handled: 1
+<idle>-0     [000] d.h3   506.334346: nmi_handler: perf_event_nmi_handler() delta_ns: 3080351 handled: 1
+
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/events-power.txt b/Documentation/trace/events-power.txt
index cf794af22855..3bd33b8dc7c4 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/events-power.txt
+++ b/Documentation/trace/events-power.txt
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Cf. include/trace/events/power.h for the events definitions.
 1. Power state switch events
 ============================
 
-1.1 New trace API
+1.1 Trace API
 -----------------
 
 A 'cpu' event class gathers the CPU-related events: cpuidle and
@@ -41,31 +41,6 @@ The event which has 'state=4294967295' in the trace is very important to the use
 space tools which are using it to detect the end of the current state, and so to
 correctly draw the states diagrams and to calculate accurate statistics etc.
 
-1.2 DEPRECATED trace API
-------------------------
-
-A new Kconfig option CONFIG_EVENT_POWER_TRACING_DEPRECATED with the default value of
-'y' has been created. This allows the legacy trace power API to be used conjointly
-with the new trace API.
-The Kconfig option, the old trace API (in include/trace/events/power.h) and the
-old trace points will disappear in a future release (namely 2.6.41).
-
-power_start		"type=%lu state=%lu cpu_id=%lu"
-power_frequency		"type=%lu state=%lu cpu_id=%lu"
-power_end		"cpu_id=%lu"
-
-The 'type' parameter takes one of those macros:
- . POWER_NONE	= 0,
- . POWER_CSTATE	= 1,	/* C-State */
- . POWER_PSTATE	= 2,	/* Frequency change or DVFS */
-
-The 'state' parameter is set depending on the type:
- . Target C-state for type=POWER_CSTATE,
- . Target frequency for type=POWER_PSTATE,
-
-power_end is used to indicate the exit of a state, corresponding to the latest
-power_start event.
-
 2. Clocks events
 ================
 The clock events are used for clock enable/disable and for
@@ -88,3 +63,34 @@ power_domain_target	"%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu"
 The first parameter gives the power domain name (e.g. "mpu_pwrdm").
 The second parameter is the power domain target state.
 
+4. PM QoS events
+================
+The PM QoS events are used for QoS add/update/remove request and for
+target/flags update.
+
+pm_qos_add_request                 "pm_qos_class=%s value=%d"
+pm_qos_update_request              "pm_qos_class=%s value=%d"
+pm_qos_remove_request              "pm_qos_class=%s value=%d"
+pm_qos_update_request_timeout      "pm_qos_class=%s value=%d, timeout_us=%ld"
+
+The first parameter gives the QoS class name (e.g. "CPU_DMA_LATENCY").
+The second parameter is value to be added/updated/removed.
+The third parameter is timeout value in usec.
+
+pm_qos_update_target               "action=%s prev_value=%d curr_value=%d"
+pm_qos_update_flags                "action=%s prev_value=0x%x curr_value=0x%x"
+
+The first parameter gives the QoS action name (e.g. "ADD_REQ").
+The second parameter is the previous QoS value.
+The third parameter is the current QoS value to update.
+
+And, there are also events used for device PM QoS add/update/remove request.
+
+dev_pm_qos_add_request             "device=%s type=%s new_value=%d"
+dev_pm_qos_update_request          "device=%s type=%s new_value=%d"
+dev_pm_qos_remove_request          "device=%s type=%s new_value=%d"
+
+The first parameter gives the device name which tries to add/update/remove
+QoS requests.
+The second parameter gives the request type (e.g. "DEV_PM_QOS_LATENCY").
+The third parameter is value to be added/updated/removed.
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/events.txt b/Documentation/trace/events.txt
index bb24c2a0e870..37732a220d33 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/events.txt
+++ b/Documentation/trace/events.txt
@@ -183,13 +183,22 @@ The relational-operators depend on the type of the field being tested:
 
 The operators available for numeric fields are:
 
-==, !=, <, <=, >, >=
+==, !=, <, <=, >, >=, &
 
 And for string fields they are:
 
-==, !=
+==, !=, ~
 
-Currently, only exact string matches are supported.
+The glob (~) only accepts a wild card character (*) at the start and or
+end of the string. For example:
+
+  prev_comm ~ "*sh"
+  prev_comm ~ "sh*"
+  prev_comm ~ "*sh*"
+
+But does not allow for it to be within the string:
+
+  prev_comm ~ "ba*sh"   <-- is invalid
 
 5.2 Setting filters
 -------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt
index 6f51fed45f2d..ea2d35d64d26 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt
+++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt
@@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ Copyright 2008 Red Hat Inc.
 Reviewers:   Elias Oltmanns, Randy Dunlap, Andrew Morton,
 	     John Kacur, and David Teigland.
 Written for: 2.6.28-rc2
+Updated for: 3.10
 
 Introduction
 ------------
@@ -17,13 +18,16 @@ designers of systems to find what is going on inside the kernel.
 It can be used for debugging or analyzing latencies and
 performance issues that take place outside of user-space.
 
-Although ftrace is the function tracer, it also includes an
-infrastructure that allows for other types of tracing. Some of
-the tracers that are currently in ftrace include a tracer to
-trace context switches, the time it takes for a high priority
-task to run after it was woken up, the time interrupts are
-disabled, and more (ftrace allows for tracer plugins, which
-means that the list of tracers can always grow).
+Although ftrace is typically considered the function tracer, it
+is really a frame work of several assorted tracing utilities.
+There's latency tracing to examine what occurs between interrupts
+disabled and enabled, as well as for preemption and from a time
+a task is woken to the task is actually scheduled in.
+
+One of the most common uses of ftrace is the event tracing.
+Through out the kernel is hundreds of static event points that
+can be enabled via the debugfs file system to see what is
+going on in certain parts of the kernel.
 
 
 Implementation Details
@@ -61,7 +65,7 @@ the extended "/sys/kernel/debug/tracing" path name.
 
 That's it! (assuming that you have ftrace configured into your kernel)
 
-After mounting the debugfs, you can see a directory called
+After mounting debugfs, you can see a directory called
 "tracing".  This directory contains the control and output files
 of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files:
 
@@ -84,7 +88,9 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files:
 
 	This sets or displays whether writing to the trace
 	ring buffer is enabled. Echo 0 into this file to disable
-	the tracer or 1 to enable it.
+	the tracer or 1 to enable it. Note, this only disables
+	writing to the ring buffer, the tracing overhead may
+	still be occurring.
 
   trace:
 
@@ -109,7 +115,15 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files:
 
 	This file lets the user control the amount of data
 	that is displayed in one of the above output
-	files.
+	files. Options also exist to modify how a tracer
+	or events work (stack traces, timestamps, etc).
+
+  options:
+
+	This is a directory that has a file for every available
+	trace option (also in trace_options). Options may also be set
+	or cleared by writing a "1" or "0" respectively into the
+	corresponding file with the option name.
 
   tracing_max_latency:
 
@@ -121,10 +135,17 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files:
 	latency is greater than the value in this
 	file. (in microseconds)
 
+  tracing_thresh:
+
+	Some latency tracers will record a trace whenever the
+	latency is greater than the number in this file.
+	Only active when the file contains a number greater than 0.
+	(in microseconds)
+
   buffer_size_kb:
 
 	This sets or displays the number of kilobytes each CPU
-	buffer can hold. The tracer buffers are the same size
+	buffer holds. By default, the trace buffers are the same size
 	for each CPU. The displayed number is the size of the
 	CPU buffer and not total size of all buffers. The
 	trace buffers are allocated in pages (blocks of memory
@@ -133,16 +154,30 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files:
 	than requested, the rest of the page will be used,
 	making the actual allocation bigger than requested.
 	( Note, the size may not be a multiple of the page size
-	  due to buffer management overhead. )
+	  due to buffer management meta-data. )
+
+  buffer_total_size_kb:
+
+	This displays the total combined size of all the trace buffers.
+
+  free_buffer:
+
+	If a process is performing the tracing, and the ring buffer
+	should be shrunk "freed" when the process is finished, even
+	if it were to be killed by a signal, this file can be used
+	for that purpose. On close of this file, the ring buffer will
+	be resized to its minimum size. Having a process that is tracing
+	also open this file, when the process exits its file descriptor
+	for this file will be closed, and in doing so, the ring buffer
+	will be "freed".
 
-	This can only be updated when the current_tracer
-	is set to "nop".
+	It may also stop tracing if disable_on_free option is set.
 
   tracing_cpumask:
 
 	This is a mask that lets the user only trace
-	on specified CPUS. The format is a hex string
-	representing the CPUS.
+	on specified CPUs. The format is a hex string
+	representing the CPUs.
 
   set_ftrace_filter:
 
@@ -183,6 +218,261 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files:
 	"set_ftrace_notrace". (See the section "dynamic ftrace"
 	below for more details.)
 
+  enabled_functions:
+
+	This file is more for debugging ftrace, but can also be useful
+	in seeing if any function has a callback attached to it.
+	Not only does the trace infrastructure use ftrace function
+	trace utility, but other subsystems might too. This file
+	displays all functions that have a callback attached to them
+	as well as the number of callbacks that have been attached.
+	Note, a callback may also call multiple functions which will
+	not be listed in this count.
+
+	If the callback registered to be traced by a function with
+	the "save regs" attribute (thus even more overhead), a 'R'
+	will be displayed on the same line as the function that
+	is returning registers.
+
+  function_profile_enabled:
+
+	When set it will enable all functions with either the function
+	tracer, or if enabled, the function graph tracer. It will
+	keep a histogram of the number of functions that were called
+	and if run with the function graph tracer, it will also keep
+	track of the time spent in those functions. The histogram
+	content can be displayed in the files:
+
+	trace_stats/function<cpu> ( function0, function1, etc).
+
+  trace_stats:
+
+	A directory that holds different tracing stats.
+
+  kprobe_events:
+ 
+	Enable dynamic trace points. See kprobetrace.txt.
+
+  kprobe_profile:
+
+	Dynamic trace points stats. See kprobetrace.txt.
+
+  max_graph_depth:
+
+	Used with the function graph tracer. This is the max depth
+	it will trace into a function. Setting this to a value of
+	one will show only the first kernel function that is called
+	from user space.
+
+  printk_formats:
+
+	This is for tools that read the raw format files. If an event in
+	the ring buffer references a string (currently only trace_printk()
+	does this), only a pointer to the string is recorded into the buffer
+	and not the string itself. This prevents tools from knowing what
+	that string was. This file displays the string and address for
+	the string allowing tools to map the pointers to what the
+	strings were.
+
+  saved_cmdlines:
+
+	Only the pid of the task is recorded in a trace event unless
+	the event specifically saves the task comm as well. Ftrace
+	makes a cache of pid mappings to comms to try to display
+	comms for events. If a pid for a comm is not listed, then
+	"<...>" is displayed in the output.
+
+  snapshot:
+
+	This displays the "snapshot" buffer and also lets the user
+	take a snapshot of the current running trace.
+	See the "Snapshot" section below for more details.
+
+  stack_max_size:
+
+	When the stack tracer is activated, this will display the
+	maximum stack size it has encountered.
+	See the "Stack Trace" section below.
+
+  stack_trace:
+
+	This displays the stack back trace of the largest stack
+	that was encountered when the stack tracer is activated.
+	See the "Stack Trace" section below.
+
+  stack_trace_filter:
+
+	This is similar to "set_ftrace_filter" but it limits what
+	functions the stack tracer will check.
+
+  trace_clock:
+
+	Whenever an event is recorded into the ring buffer, a
+	"timestamp" is added. This stamp comes from a specified
+	clock. By default, ftrace uses the "local" clock. This
+	clock is very fast and strictly per cpu, but on some
+	systems it may not be monotonic with respect to other
+	CPUs. In other words, the local clocks may not be in sync
+	with local clocks on other CPUs.
+
+	Usual clocks for tracing:
+
+	  # cat trace_clock
+	  [local] global counter x86-tsc
+
+	  local: Default clock, but may not be in sync across CPUs
+
+	  global: This clock is in sync with all CPUs but may
+	  	  be a bit slower than the local clock.
+
+	  counter: This is not a clock at all, but literally an atomic
+	  	   counter. It counts up one by one, but is in sync
+		   with all CPUs. This is useful when you need to
+		   know exactly the order events occurred with respect to
+		   each other on different CPUs.
+
+	  uptime: This uses the jiffies counter and the time stamp
+	  	  is relative to the time since boot up.
+
+	  perf: This makes ftrace use the same clock that perf uses.
+	  	Eventually perf will be able to read ftrace buffers
+		and this will help out in interleaving the data.
+
+	  x86-tsc: Architectures may define their own clocks. For
+	  	   example, x86 uses its own TSC cycle clock here.
+
+	To set a clock, simply echo the clock name into this file.
+
+	  echo global > trace_clock
+
+  trace_marker:
+
+	This is a very useful file for synchronizing user space
+	with events happening in the kernel. Writing strings into
+	this file will be written into the ftrace buffer.
+
+	It is useful in applications to open this file at the start
+	of the application and just reference the file descriptor
+	for the file.
+
+	void trace_write(const char *fmt, ...)
+	{
+		va_list ap;
+		char buf[256];
+		int n;
+
+		if (trace_fd < 0)
+			return;
+
+		va_start(ap, fmt);
+		n = vsnprintf(buf, 256, fmt, ap);
+		va_end(ap);
+
+		write(trace_fd, buf, n);
+	}
+
+	start:
+
+		trace_fd = open("trace_marker", WR_ONLY);
+
+  uprobe_events:
+ 
+	Add dynamic tracepoints in programs.
+	See uprobetracer.txt
+
+  uprobe_profile:
+
+	Uprobe statistics. See uprobetrace.txt
+
+  instances:
+
+	This is a way to make multiple trace buffers where different
+	events can be recorded in different buffers.
+	See "Instances" section below.
+
+  events:
+
+	This is the trace event directory. It holds event tracepoints
+	(also known as static tracepoints) that have been compiled
+	into the kernel. It shows what event tracepoints exist
+	and how they are grouped by system. There are "enable"
+	files at various levels that can enable the tracepoints
+	when a "1" is written to them.
+
+	See events.txt for more information.
+
+  per_cpu:
+
+	This is a directory that contains the trace per_cpu information.
+
+  per_cpu/cpu0/buffer_size_kb:
+
+	The ftrace buffer is defined per_cpu. That is, there's a separate
+	buffer for each CPU to allow writes to be done atomically,
+	and free from cache bouncing. These buffers may have different
+	size buffers. This file is similar to the buffer_size_kb
+	file, but it only displays or sets the buffer size for the
+	specific CPU. (here cpu0).
+
+  per_cpu/cpu0/trace:
+
+	This is similar to the "trace" file, but it will only display
+	the data specific for the CPU. If written to, it only clears
+	the specific CPU buffer.
+
+  per_cpu/cpu0/trace_pipe
+
+	This is similar to the "trace_pipe" file, and is a consuming
+	read, but it will only display (and consume) the data specific
+	for the CPU.
+
+  per_cpu/cpu0/trace_pipe_raw
+
+	For tools that can parse the ftrace ring buffer binary format,
+	the trace_pipe_raw file can be used to extract the data
+	from the ring buffer directly. With the use of the splice()
+	system call, the buffer data can be quickly transferred to
+	a file or to the network where a server is collecting the
+	data.
+
+	Like trace_pipe, this is a consuming reader, where multiple
+	reads will always produce different data.
+
+  per_cpu/cpu0/snapshot:
+
+	This is similar to the main "snapshot" file, but will only
+	snapshot the current CPU (if supported). It only displays
+	the content of the snapshot for a given CPU, and if
+	written to, only clears this CPU buffer.
+
+  per_cpu/cpu0/snapshot_raw:
+
+	Similar to the trace_pipe_raw, but will read the binary format
+	from the snapshot buffer for the given CPU.
+
+  per_cpu/cpu0/stats:
+
+	This displays certain stats about the ring buffer:
+
+	 entries: The number of events that are still in the buffer.
+
+	 overrun: The number of lost events due to overwriting when
+	 	  the buffer was full.
+
+	 commit overrun: Should always be zero.
+	 	This gets set if so many events happened within a nested
+		event (ring buffer is re-entrant), that it fills the
+		buffer and starts dropping events.
+
+	 bytes: Bytes actually read (not overwritten).
+
+	 oldest event ts: The oldest timestamp in the buffer
+
+	 now ts: The current timestamp
+
+	 dropped events: Events lost due to overwrite option being off.
+
+	 read events: The number of events read.
 
 The Tracers
 -----------
@@ -234,11 +524,6 @@ Here is the list of current tracers that may be configured.
         RT tasks (as the current "wakeup" does). This is useful
         for those interested in wake up timings of RT tasks.
 
-  "hw-branch-tracer"
-
-	Uses the BTS CPU feature on x86 CPUs to traces all
-	branches executed.
-
   "nop"
 
 	This is the "trace nothing" tracer. To remove all
@@ -261,70 +546,100 @@ Here is an example of the output format of the file "trace"
                              --------
 # tracer: function
 #
-#           TASK-PID   CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
-#              | |      |          |         |
-            bash-4251  [01] 10152.583854: path_put <-path_walk
-            bash-4251  [01] 10152.583855: dput <-path_put
-            bash-4251  [01] 10152.583855: _atomic_dec_and_lock <-dput
+# entries-in-buffer/entries-written: 140080/250280   #P:4
+#
+#                              _-----=> irqs-off
+#                             / _----=> need-resched
+#                            | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#                            || / _--=> preempt-depth
+#                            ||| /     delay
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#  ||||    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |       |   ||||       |         |
+            bash-1977  [000] .... 17284.993652: sys_close <-system_call_fastpath
+            bash-1977  [000] .... 17284.993653: __close_fd <-sys_close
+            bash-1977  [000] .... 17284.993653: _raw_spin_lock <-__close_fd
+            sshd-1974  [003] .... 17284.993653: __srcu_read_unlock <-fsnotify
+            bash-1977  [000] .... 17284.993654: add_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_lock
+            bash-1977  [000] ...1 17284.993655: _raw_spin_unlock <-__close_fd
+            bash-1977  [000] ...1 17284.993656: sub_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_unlock
+            bash-1977  [000] .... 17284.993657: filp_close <-__close_fd
+            bash-1977  [000] .... 17284.993657: dnotify_flush <-filp_close
+            sshd-1974  [003] .... 17284.993658: sys_select <-system_call_fastpath
                              --------
 
 A header is printed with the tracer name that is represented by
-the trace. In this case the tracer is "function". Then a header
-showing the format. Task name "bash", the task PID "4251", the
-CPU that it was running on "01", the timestamp in <secs>.<usecs>
-format, the function name that was traced "path_put" and the
-parent function that called this function "path_walk". The
-timestamp is the time at which the function was entered.
+the trace. In this case the tracer is "function". Then it shows the
+number of events in the buffer as well as the total number of entries
+that were written. The difference is the number of entries that were
+lost due to the buffer filling up (250280 - 140080 = 110200 events
+lost).
+
+The header explains the content of the events. Task name "bash", the task
+PID "1977", the CPU that it was running on "000", the latency format
+(explained below), the timestamp in <secs>.<usecs> format, the
+function name that was traced "sys_close" and the parent function that
+called this function "system_call_fastpath". The timestamp is the time
+at which the function was entered.
 
 Latency trace format
 --------------------
 
-When the latency-format option is enabled, the trace file gives
-somewhat more information to see why a latency happened.
-Here is a typical trace.
+When the latency-format option is enabled or when one of the latency
+tracers is set, the trace file gives somewhat more information to see
+why a latency happened. Here is a typical trace.
 
 # tracer: irqsoff
 #
-irqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
---------------------------------------------------------------------
- latency: 97 us, #3/3, CPU#0 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
-    -----------------
-    | task: swapper-0 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
-    -----------------
- => started at: apic_timer_interrupt
- => ended at:   do_softirq
-
-#                _------=> CPU#
-#               / _-----=> irqs-off
-#              | / _----=> need-resched
-#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
-#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
-#              |||| /
-#              |||||     delay
-#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
-#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
-  <idle>-0     0d..1    0us+: trace_hardirqs_off_thunk (apic_timer_interrupt)
-  <idle>-0     0d.s.   97us : __do_softirq (do_softirq)
-  <idle>-0     0d.s1   98us : trace_hardirqs_on (do_softirq)
+# irqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 3.8.0-test+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------
+# latency: 259 us, #4/4, CPU#2 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:4)
+#    -----------------
+#    | task: ps-6143 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+#    -----------------
+#  => started at: __lock_task_sighand
+#  => ended at:   _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore
+#
+#
+#                  _------=> CPU#            
+#                 / _-----=> irqs-off        
+#                | / _----=> need-resched    
+#                || / _---=> hardirq/softirq 
+#                ||| / _--=> preempt-depth   
+#                |||| /     delay             
+#  cmd     pid   ||||| time  |   caller      
+#     \   /      |||||  \    |   /           
+      ps-6143    2d...    0us!: trace_hardirqs_off <-__lock_task_sighand
+      ps-6143    2d..1  259us+: trace_hardirqs_on <-_raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore
+      ps-6143    2d..1  263us+: time_hardirqs_on <-_raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore
+      ps-6143    2d..1  306us : <stack trace>
+ => trace_hardirqs_on_caller
+ => trace_hardirqs_on
+ => _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore
+ => do_task_stat
+ => proc_tgid_stat
+ => proc_single_show
+ => seq_read
+ => vfs_read
+ => sys_read
+ => system_call_fastpath
 
 
 This shows that the current tracer is "irqsoff" tracing the time
-for which interrupts were disabled. It gives the trace version
-and the version of the kernel upon which this was executed on
-(2.6.26-rc8). Then it displays the max latency in microsecs (97
-us). The number of trace entries displayed and the total number
-recorded (both are three: #3/3). The type of preemption that was
-used (PREEMPT). VP, KP, SP, and HP are always zero and are
-reserved for later use. #P is the number of online CPUS (#P:2).
+for which interrupts were disabled. It gives the trace version (which
+never changes) and the version of the kernel upon which this was executed on
+(3.10). Then it displays the max latency in microseconds (259 us). The number
+of trace entries displayed and the total number (both are four: #4/4).
+VP, KP, SP, and HP are always zero and are reserved for later use.
+#P is the number of online CPUs (#P:4).
 
 The task is the process that was running when the latency
-occurred. (swapper pid: 0).
+occurred. (ps pid: 6143).
 
 The start and stop (the functions in which the interrupts were
 disabled and enabled respectively) that caused the latencies:
 
-  apic_timer_interrupt is where the interrupts were disabled.
-  do_softirq is where they were enabled again.
+ __lock_task_sighand is where the interrupts were disabled.
+ _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore is where they were enabled again.
 
 The next lines after the header are the trace itself. The header
 explains which is which.
@@ -367,16 +682,43 @@ The above is mostly meaningful for kernel developers.
 
   The rest is the same as the 'trace' file.
 
+  Note, the latency tracers will usually end with a back trace
+  to easily find where the latency occurred.
 
 trace_options
 -------------
 
-The trace_options file is used to control what gets printed in
-the trace output. To see what is available, simply cat the file:
+The trace_options file (or the options directory) is used to control
+what gets printed in the trace output, or manipulate the tracers.
+To see what is available, simply cat the file:
 
   cat trace_options
-  print-parent nosym-offset nosym-addr noverbose noraw nohex nobin \
-  noblock nostacktrace nosched-tree nouserstacktrace nosym-userobj
+print-parent
+nosym-offset
+nosym-addr
+noverbose
+noraw
+nohex
+nobin
+noblock
+nostacktrace
+trace_printk
+noftrace_preempt
+nobranch
+annotate
+nouserstacktrace
+nosym-userobj
+noprintk-msg-only
+context-info
+latency-format
+sleep-time
+graph-time
+record-cmd
+overwrite
+nodisable_on_free
+irq-info
+markers
+function-trace
 
 To disable one of the options, echo in the option prepended with
 "no".
@@ -393,7 +735,7 @@ Here are the available options:
 		 function as well as the function being traced.
 
   print-parent:
-   bash-4000  [01]  1477.606694: simple_strtoul <-strict_strtoul
+   bash-4000  [01]  1477.606694: simple_strtoul <-kstrtoul
 
   noprint-parent:
    bash-4000  [01]  1477.606694: simple_strtoul
@@ -417,7 +759,7 @@ Here are the available options:
             latency-format option is enabled.
 
     bash  4000 1 0 00000000 00010a95 [58127d26] 1720.415ms \
-    (+0.000ms): simple_strtoul (strict_strtoul)
+    (+0.000ms): simple_strtoul (kstrtoul)
 
   raw - This will display raw numbers. This option is best for
 	use with user applications that can translate the raw
@@ -428,13 +770,34 @@ Here are the available options:
 
   bin - This will print out the formats in raw binary.
 
-  block - TBD (needs update)
+  block - When set, reading trace_pipe will not block when polled.
 
   stacktrace - This is one of the options that changes the trace
 	       itself. When a trace is recorded, so is the stack
 	       of functions. This allows for back traces of
 	       trace sites.
 
+  trace_printk - Can disable trace_printk() from writing into the buffer.
+
+  branch - Enable branch tracing with the tracer.
+
+  annotate - It is sometimes confusing when the CPU buffers are full
+  	     and one CPU buffer had a lot of events recently, thus
+	     a shorter time frame, were another CPU may have only had
+	     a few events, which lets it have older events. When
+	     the trace is reported, it shows the oldest events first,
+	     and it may look like only one CPU ran (the one with the
+	     oldest events). When the annotate option is set, it will
+	     display when a new CPU buffer started:
+
+          <idle>-0     [001] dNs4 21169.031481: wake_up_idle_cpu <-add_timer_on
+          <idle>-0     [001] dNs4 21169.031482: _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore <-add_timer_on
+          <idle>-0     [001] .Ns4 21169.031484: sub_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore
+##### CPU 2 buffer started ####
+          <idle>-0     [002] .N.1 21169.031484: rcu_idle_exit <-cpu_idle
+          <idle>-0     [001] .Ns3 21169.031484: _raw_spin_unlock <-clocksource_watchdog
+          <idle>-0     [001] .Ns3 21169.031485: sub_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_unlock
+
   userstacktrace - This option changes the trace. It records a
 		   stacktrace of the current userspace thread.
 
@@ -451,9 +814,13 @@ Here are the available options:
 		a.out-1623  [000] 40874.465068: /root/a.out[+0x480] <-/root/a.out[+0
 x494] <- /root/a.out[+0x4a8] <- /lib/libc-2.7.so[+0x1e1a6]
 
-  sched-tree - trace all tasks that are on the runqueue, at
-	       every scheduling event. Will add overhead if
-	       there's a lot of tasks running at once.
+
+  printk-msg-only - When set, trace_printk()s will only show the format
+  		    and not their parameters (if trace_bprintk() or
+		    trace_bputs() was used to save the trace_printk()).
+
+  context-info - Show only the event data. Hides the comm, PID,
+  	         timestamp, CPU, and other useful data.
 
   latency-format - This option changes the trace. When
                    it is enabled, the trace displays
@@ -461,31 +828,61 @@ x494] <- /root/a.out[+0x4a8] <- /lib/libc-2.7.so[+0x1e1a6]
                    latencies, as described in "Latency
                    trace format".
 
+  sleep-time - When running function graph tracer, to include
+  	       the time a task schedules out in its function.
+	       When enabled, it will account time the task has been
+	       scheduled out as part of the function call.
+
+  graph-time - When running function graph tracer, to include the
+  	       time to call nested functions. When this is not set,
+	       the time reported for the function will only include
+	       the time the function itself executed for, not the time
+	       for functions that it called.
+
+  record-cmd - When any event or tracer is enabled, a hook is enabled
+  	       in the sched_switch trace point to fill comm cache
+	       with mapped pids and comms. But this may cause some
+	       overhead, and if you only care about pids, and not the
+	       name of the task, disabling this option can lower the
+	       impact of tracing.
+
   overwrite - This controls what happens when the trace buffer is
               full. If "1" (default), the oldest events are
               discarded and overwritten. If "0", then the newest
               events are discarded.
+	        (see per_cpu/cpu0/stats for overrun and dropped)
 
-ftrace_enabled
---------------
+  disable_on_free - When the free_buffer is closed, tracing will
+  		    stop (tracing_on set to 0).
 
-The following tracers (listed below) give different output
-depending on whether or not the sysctl ftrace_enabled is set. To
-set ftrace_enabled, one can either use the sysctl function or
-set it via the proc file system interface.
+  irq-info - Shows the interrupt, preempt count, need resched data.
+  	     When disabled, the trace looks like:
 
-  sysctl kernel.ftrace_enabled=1
+# tracer: function
+#
+# entries-in-buffer/entries-written: 144405/9452052   #P:4
+#
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#      TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |       |          |         |
+          <idle>-0     [002]  23636.756054: ttwu_do_activate.constprop.89 <-try_to_wake_up
+          <idle>-0     [002]  23636.756054: activate_task <-ttwu_do_activate.constprop.89
+          <idle>-0     [002]  23636.756055: enqueue_task <-activate_task
 
- or
 
-  echo 1 > /proc/sys/kernel/ftrace_enabled
+  markers - When set, the trace_marker is writable (only by root).
+  	    When disabled, the trace_marker will error with EINVAL
+	    on write.
+
 
-To disable ftrace_enabled simply replace the '1' with '0' in the
-above commands.
+  function-trace - The latency tracers will enable function tracing
+  	    if this option is enabled (default it is). When
+	    it is disabled, the latency tracers do not trace
+	    functions. This keeps the overhead of the tracer down
+	    when performing latency tests.
+
+ Note: Some tracers have their own options. They only appear
+       when the tracer is active.
 
-When ftrace_enabled is set the tracers will also record the
-functions that are within the trace. The descriptions of the
-tracers will also show an example with ftrace enabled.
 
 
 irqsoff
@@ -506,95 +903,133 @@ new trace is saved.
 To reset the maximum, echo 0 into tracing_max_latency. Here is
 an example:
 
+ # echo 0 > options/function-trace
  # echo irqsoff > current_tracer
- # echo latency-format > trace_options
- # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
  # echo 1 > tracing_on
+ # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
  # ls -ltr
  [...]
  # echo 0 > tracing_on
  # cat trace
 # tracer: irqsoff
 #
-irqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26
---------------------------------------------------------------------
- latency: 12 us, #3/3, CPU#1 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
-    -----------------
-    | task: bash-3730 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
-    -----------------
- => started at: sys_setpgid
- => ended at:   sys_setpgid
-
-#                _------=> CPU#
-#               / _-----=> irqs-off
-#              | / _----=> need-resched
-#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
-#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
-#              |||| /
-#              |||||     delay
-#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
-#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
-    bash-3730  1d...    0us : _write_lock_irq (sys_setpgid)
-    bash-3730  1d..1    1us+: _write_unlock_irq (sys_setpgid)
-    bash-3730  1d..2   14us : trace_hardirqs_on (sys_setpgid)
-
-
-Here we see that that we had a latency of 12 microsecs (which is
-very good). The _write_lock_irq in sys_setpgid disabled
-interrupts. The difference between the 12 and the displayed
-timestamp 14us occurred because the clock was incremented
+# irqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 3.8.0-test+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------
+# latency: 16 us, #4/4, CPU#0 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:4)
+#    -----------------
+#    | task: swapper/0-0 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+#    -----------------
+#  => started at: run_timer_softirq
+#  => ended at:   run_timer_softirq
+#
+#
+#                  _------=> CPU#            
+#                 / _-----=> irqs-off        
+#                | / _----=> need-resched    
+#                || / _---=> hardirq/softirq 
+#                ||| / _--=> preempt-depth   
+#                |||| /     delay             
+#  cmd     pid   ||||| time  |   caller      
+#     \   /      |||||  \    |   /           
+  <idle>-0       0d.s2    0us+: _raw_spin_lock_irq <-run_timer_softirq
+  <idle>-0       0dNs3   17us : _raw_spin_unlock_irq <-run_timer_softirq
+  <idle>-0       0dNs3   17us+: trace_hardirqs_on <-run_timer_softirq
+  <idle>-0       0dNs3   25us : <stack trace>
+ => _raw_spin_unlock_irq
+ => run_timer_softirq
+ => __do_softirq
+ => call_softirq
+ => do_softirq
+ => irq_exit
+ => smp_apic_timer_interrupt
+ => apic_timer_interrupt
+ => rcu_idle_exit
+ => cpu_idle
+ => rest_init
+ => start_kernel
+ => x86_64_start_reservations
+ => x86_64_start_kernel
+
+Here we see that that we had a latency of 16 microseconds (which is
+very good). The _raw_spin_lock_irq in run_timer_softirq disabled
+interrupts. The difference between the 16 and the displayed
+timestamp 25us occurred because the clock was incremented
 between the time of recording the max latency and the time of
 recording the function that had that latency.
 
-Note the above example had ftrace_enabled not set. If we set the
-ftrace_enabled, we get a much larger output:
+Note the above example had function-trace not set. If we set
+function-trace, we get a much larger output:
+
+ with echo 1 > options/function-trace
 
 # tracer: irqsoff
 #
-irqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
---------------------------------------------------------------------
- latency: 50 us, #101/101, CPU#0 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
-    -----------------
-    | task: ls-4339 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
-    -----------------
- => started at: __alloc_pages_internal
- => ended at:   __alloc_pages_internal
-
-#                _------=> CPU#
-#               / _-----=> irqs-off
-#              | / _----=> need-resched
-#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
-#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
-#              |||| /
-#              |||||     delay
-#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
-#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
-      ls-4339  0...1    0us+: get_page_from_freelist (__alloc_pages_internal)
-      ls-4339  0d..1    3us : rmqueue_bulk (get_page_from_freelist)
-      ls-4339  0d..1    3us : _spin_lock (rmqueue_bulk)
-      ls-4339  0d..1    4us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock)
-      ls-4339  0d..2    4us : __rmqueue (rmqueue_bulk)
-      ls-4339  0d..2    5us : __rmqueue_smallest (__rmqueue)
-      ls-4339  0d..2    5us : __mod_zone_page_state (__rmqueue_smallest)
-      ls-4339  0d..2    6us : __rmqueue (rmqueue_bulk)
-      ls-4339  0d..2    6us : __rmqueue_smallest (__rmqueue)
-      ls-4339  0d..2    7us : __mod_zone_page_state (__rmqueue_smallest)
-      ls-4339  0d..2    7us : __rmqueue (rmqueue_bulk)
-      ls-4339  0d..2    8us : __rmqueue_smallest (__rmqueue)
+# irqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 3.8.0-test+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------
+# latency: 71 us, #168/168, CPU#3 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:4)
+#    -----------------
+#    | task: bash-2042 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+#    -----------------
+#  => started at: ata_scsi_queuecmd
+#  => ended at:   ata_scsi_queuecmd
+#
+#
+#                  _------=> CPU#            
+#                 / _-----=> irqs-off        
+#                | / _----=> need-resched    
+#                || / _---=> hardirq/softirq 
+#                ||| / _--=> preempt-depth   
+#                |||| /     delay             
+#  cmd     pid   ||||| time  |   caller      
+#     \   /      |||||  \    |   /           
+    bash-2042    3d...    0us : _raw_spin_lock_irqsave <-ata_scsi_queuecmd
+    bash-2042    3d...    0us : add_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_lock_irqsave
+    bash-2042    3d..1    1us : ata_scsi_find_dev <-ata_scsi_queuecmd
+    bash-2042    3d..1    1us : __ata_scsi_find_dev <-ata_scsi_find_dev
+    bash-2042    3d..1    2us : ata_find_dev.part.14 <-__ata_scsi_find_dev
+    bash-2042    3d..1    2us : ata_qc_new_init <-__ata_scsi_queuecmd
+    bash-2042    3d..1    3us : ata_sg_init <-__ata_scsi_queuecmd
+    bash-2042    3d..1    4us : ata_scsi_rw_xlat <-__ata_scsi_queuecmd
+    bash-2042    3d..1    4us : ata_build_rw_tf <-ata_scsi_rw_xlat
 [...]
-      ls-4339  0d..2   46us : __rmqueue_smallest (__rmqueue)
-      ls-4339  0d..2   47us : __mod_zone_page_state (__rmqueue_smallest)
-      ls-4339  0d..2   47us : __rmqueue (rmqueue_bulk)
-      ls-4339  0d..2   48us : __rmqueue_smallest (__rmqueue)
-      ls-4339  0d..2   48us : __mod_zone_page_state (__rmqueue_smallest)
-      ls-4339  0d..2   49us : _spin_unlock (rmqueue_bulk)
-      ls-4339  0d..2   49us : sub_preempt_count (_spin_unlock)
-      ls-4339  0d..1   50us : get_page_from_freelist (__alloc_pages_internal)
-      ls-4339  0d..2   51us : trace_hardirqs_on (__alloc_pages_internal)
-
-
-
-Here we traced a 50 microsecond latency. But we also see all the
+    bash-2042    3d..1   67us : delay_tsc <-__delay
+    bash-2042    3d..1   67us : add_preempt_count <-delay_tsc
+    bash-2042    3d..2   67us : sub_preempt_count <-delay_tsc
+    bash-2042    3d..1   67us : add_preempt_count <-delay_tsc
+    bash-2042    3d..2   68us : sub_preempt_count <-delay_tsc
+    bash-2042    3d..1   68us+: ata_bmdma_start <-ata_bmdma_qc_issue
+    bash-2042    3d..1   71us : _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore <-ata_scsi_queuecmd
+    bash-2042    3d..1   71us : _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore <-ata_scsi_queuecmd
+    bash-2042    3d..1   72us+: trace_hardirqs_on <-ata_scsi_queuecmd
+    bash-2042    3d..1  120us : <stack trace>
+ => _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore
+ => ata_scsi_queuecmd
+ => scsi_dispatch_cmd
+ => scsi_request_fn
+ => __blk_run_queue_uncond
+ => __blk_run_queue
+ => blk_queue_bio
+ => generic_make_request
+ => submit_bio
+ => submit_bh
+ => __ext3_get_inode_loc
+ => ext3_iget
+ => ext3_lookup
+ => lookup_real
+ => __lookup_hash
+ => walk_component
+ => lookup_last
+ => path_lookupat
+ => filename_lookup
+ => user_path_at_empty
+ => user_path_at
+ => vfs_fstatat
+ => vfs_stat
+ => sys_newstat
+ => system_call_fastpath
+
+
+Here we traced a 71 microsecond latency. But we also see all the
 functions that were called during that time. Note that by
 enabling function tracing, we incur an added overhead. This
 overhead may extend the latency times. But nevertheless, this
@@ -614,120 +1049,122 @@ Like the irqsoff tracer, it records the maximum latency for
 which preemption was disabled. The control of preemptoff tracer
 is much like the irqsoff tracer.
 
+ # echo 0 > options/function-trace
  # echo preemptoff > current_tracer
- # echo latency-format > trace_options
- # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
  # echo 1 > tracing_on
+ # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
  # ls -ltr
  [...]
  # echo 0 > tracing_on
  # cat trace
 # tracer: preemptoff
 #
-preemptoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
---------------------------------------------------------------------
- latency: 29 us, #3/3, CPU#0 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
-    -----------------
-    | task: sshd-4261 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
-    -----------------
- => started at: do_IRQ
- => ended at:   __do_softirq
-
-#                _------=> CPU#
-#               / _-----=> irqs-off
-#              | / _----=> need-resched
-#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
-#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
-#              |||| /
-#              |||||     delay
-#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
-#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
-    sshd-4261  0d.h.    0us+: irq_enter (do_IRQ)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s.   29us : _local_bh_enable (__do_softirq)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s1   30us : trace_preempt_on (__do_softirq)
+# preemptoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 3.8.0-test+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------
+# latency: 46 us, #4/4, CPU#1 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:4)
+#    -----------------
+#    | task: sshd-1991 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+#    -----------------
+#  => started at: do_IRQ
+#  => ended at:   do_IRQ
+#
+#
+#                  _------=> CPU#            
+#                 / _-----=> irqs-off        
+#                | / _----=> need-resched    
+#                || / _---=> hardirq/softirq 
+#                ||| / _--=> preempt-depth   
+#                |||| /     delay             
+#  cmd     pid   ||||| time  |   caller      
+#     \   /      |||||  \    |   /           
+    sshd-1991    1d.h.    0us+: irq_enter <-do_IRQ
+    sshd-1991    1d..1   46us : irq_exit <-do_IRQ
+    sshd-1991    1d..1   47us+: trace_preempt_on <-do_IRQ
+    sshd-1991    1d..1   52us : <stack trace>
+ => sub_preempt_count
+ => irq_exit
+ => do_IRQ
+ => ret_from_intr
 
 
 This has some more changes. Preemption was disabled when an
-interrupt came in (notice the 'h'), and was enabled while doing
-a softirq. (notice the 's'). But we also see that interrupts
-have been disabled when entering the preempt off section and
-leaving it (the 'd'). We do not know if interrupts were enabled
-in the mean time.
+interrupt came in (notice the 'h'), and was enabled on exit.
+But we also see that interrupts have been disabled when entering
+the preempt off section and leaving it (the 'd'). We do not know if
+interrupts were enabled in the mean time or shortly after this
+was over.
 
 # tracer: preemptoff
 #
-preemptoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
---------------------------------------------------------------------
- latency: 63 us, #87/87, CPU#0 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
-    -----------------
-    | task: sshd-4261 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
-    -----------------
- => started at: remove_wait_queue
- => ended at:   __do_softirq
-
-#                _------=> CPU#
-#               / _-----=> irqs-off
-#              | / _----=> need-resched
-#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
-#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
-#              |||| /
-#              |||||     delay
-#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
-#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
-    sshd-4261  0d..1    0us : _spin_lock_irqsave (remove_wait_queue)
-    sshd-4261  0d..1    1us : _spin_unlock_irqrestore (remove_wait_queue)
-    sshd-4261  0d..1    2us : do_IRQ (common_interrupt)
-    sshd-4261  0d..1    2us : irq_enter (do_IRQ)
-    sshd-4261  0d..1    2us : idle_cpu (irq_enter)
-    sshd-4261  0d..1    3us : add_preempt_count (irq_enter)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h1    3us : idle_cpu (irq_enter)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h.    4us : handle_fasteoi_irq (do_IRQ)
+# preemptoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 3.8.0-test+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------
+# latency: 83 us, #241/241, CPU#1 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:4)
+#    -----------------
+#    | task: bash-1994 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+#    -----------------
+#  => started at: wake_up_new_task
+#  => ended at:   task_rq_unlock
+#
+#
+#                  _------=> CPU#            
+#                 / _-----=> irqs-off        
+#                | / _----=> need-resched    
+#                || / _---=> hardirq/softirq 
+#                ||| / _--=> preempt-depth   
+#                |||| /     delay             
+#  cmd     pid   ||||| time  |   caller      
+#     \   /      |||||  \    |   /           
+    bash-1994    1d..1    0us : _raw_spin_lock_irqsave <-wake_up_new_task
+    bash-1994    1d..1    0us : select_task_rq_fair <-select_task_rq
+    bash-1994    1d..1    1us : __rcu_read_lock <-select_task_rq_fair
+    bash-1994    1d..1    1us : source_load <-select_task_rq_fair
+    bash-1994    1d..1    1us : source_load <-select_task_rq_fair
 [...]
-    sshd-4261  0d.h.   12us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h1   12us : ack_ioapic_quirk_irq (handle_fasteoi_irq)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h1   13us : move_native_irq (ack_ioapic_quirk_irq)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h1   13us : _spin_unlock (handle_fasteoi_irq)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h1   14us : sub_preempt_count (_spin_unlock)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h1   14us : irq_exit (do_IRQ)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h1   15us : sub_preempt_count (irq_exit)
-    sshd-4261  0d..2   15us : do_softirq (irq_exit)
-    sshd-4261  0d...   15us : __do_softirq (do_softirq)
-    sshd-4261  0d...   16us : __local_bh_disable (__do_softirq)
-    sshd-4261  0d...   16us+: add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s4   20us : add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s4   21us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s5   21us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable)
+    bash-1994    1d..1   12us : irq_enter <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
+    bash-1994    1d..1   12us : rcu_irq_enter <-irq_enter
+    bash-1994    1d..1   13us : add_preempt_count <-irq_enter
+    bash-1994    1d.h1   13us : exit_idle <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
+    bash-1994    1d.h1   13us : hrtimer_interrupt <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
+    bash-1994    1d.h1   13us : _raw_spin_lock <-hrtimer_interrupt
+    bash-1994    1d.h1   14us : add_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_lock
+    bash-1994    1d.h2   14us : ktime_get_update_offsets <-hrtimer_interrupt
 [...]
-    sshd-4261  0d.s6   41us : add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s6   42us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s7   42us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s5   43us : add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s5   43us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable_ip)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s6   44us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable_ip)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s5   44us : add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s5   45us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable)
+    bash-1994    1d.h1   35us : lapic_next_event <-clockevents_program_event
+    bash-1994    1d.h1   35us : irq_exit <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
+    bash-1994    1d.h1   36us : sub_preempt_count <-irq_exit
+    bash-1994    1d..2   36us : do_softirq <-irq_exit
+    bash-1994    1d..2   36us : __do_softirq <-call_softirq
+    bash-1994    1d..2   36us : __local_bh_disable <-__do_softirq
+    bash-1994    1d.s2   37us : add_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_lock_irq
+    bash-1994    1d.s3   38us : _raw_spin_unlock <-run_timer_softirq
+    bash-1994    1d.s3   39us : sub_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_unlock
+    bash-1994    1d.s2   39us : call_timer_fn <-run_timer_softirq
 [...]
-    sshd-4261  0d.s.   63us : _local_bh_enable (__do_softirq)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s1   64us : trace_preempt_on (__do_softirq)
+    bash-1994    1dNs2   81us : cpu_needs_another_gp <-rcu_process_callbacks
+    bash-1994    1dNs2   82us : __local_bh_enable <-__do_softirq
+    bash-1994    1dNs2   82us : sub_preempt_count <-__local_bh_enable
+    bash-1994    1dN.2   82us : idle_cpu <-irq_exit
+    bash-1994    1dN.2   83us : rcu_irq_exit <-irq_exit
+    bash-1994    1dN.2   83us : sub_preempt_count <-irq_exit
+    bash-1994    1.N.1   84us : _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore <-task_rq_unlock
+    bash-1994    1.N.1   84us+: trace_preempt_on <-task_rq_unlock
+    bash-1994    1.N.1  104us : <stack trace>
+ => sub_preempt_count
+ => _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore
+ => task_rq_unlock
+ => wake_up_new_task
+ => do_fork
+ => sys_clone
+ => stub_clone
 
 
 The above is an example of the preemptoff trace with
-ftrace_enabled set. Here we see that interrupts were disabled
+function-trace set. Here we see that interrupts were not disabled
 the entire time. The irq_enter code lets us know that we entered
 an interrupt 'h'. Before that, the functions being traced still
 show that it is not in an interrupt, but we can see from the
 functions themselves that this is not the case.
 
-Notice that __do_softirq when called does not have a
-preempt_count. It may seem that we missed a preempt enabling.
-What really happened is that the preempt count is held on the
-thread's stack and we switched to the softirq stack (4K stacks
-in effect). The code does not copy the preempt count, but
-because interrupts are disabled, we do not need to worry about
-it. Having a tracer like this is good for letting people know
-what really happens inside the kernel.
-
-
 preemptirqsoff
 --------------
 
@@ -762,38 +1199,57 @@ tracer.
 Again, using this trace is much like the irqsoff and preemptoff
 tracers.
 
+ # echo 0 > options/function-trace
  # echo preemptirqsoff > current_tracer
- # echo latency-format > trace_options
- # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
  # echo 1 > tracing_on
+ # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
  # ls -ltr
  [...]
  # echo 0 > tracing_on
  # cat trace
 # tracer: preemptirqsoff
 #
-preemptirqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
---------------------------------------------------------------------
- latency: 293 us, #3/3, CPU#0 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
-    -----------------
-    | task: ls-4860 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
-    -----------------
- => started at: apic_timer_interrupt
- => ended at:   __do_softirq
-
-#                _------=> CPU#
-#               / _-----=> irqs-off
-#              | / _----=> need-resched
-#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
-#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
-#              |||| /
-#              |||||     delay
-#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
-#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
-      ls-4860  0d...    0us!: trace_hardirqs_off_thunk (apic_timer_interrupt)
-      ls-4860  0d.s.  294us : _local_bh_enable (__do_softirq)
-      ls-4860  0d.s1  294us : trace_preempt_on (__do_softirq)
-
+# preemptirqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 3.8.0-test+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------
+# latency: 100 us, #4/4, CPU#3 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:4)
+#    -----------------
+#    | task: ls-2230 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+#    -----------------
+#  => started at: ata_scsi_queuecmd
+#  => ended at:   ata_scsi_queuecmd
+#
+#
+#                  _------=> CPU#            
+#                 / _-----=> irqs-off        
+#                | / _----=> need-resched    
+#                || / _---=> hardirq/softirq 
+#                ||| / _--=> preempt-depth   
+#                |||| /     delay             
+#  cmd     pid   ||||| time  |   caller      
+#     \   /      |||||  \    |   /           
+      ls-2230    3d...    0us+: _raw_spin_lock_irqsave <-ata_scsi_queuecmd
+      ls-2230    3...1  100us : _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore <-ata_scsi_queuecmd
+      ls-2230    3...1  101us+: trace_preempt_on <-ata_scsi_queuecmd
+      ls-2230    3...1  111us : <stack trace>
+ => sub_preempt_count
+ => _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore
+ => ata_scsi_queuecmd
+ => scsi_dispatch_cmd
+ => scsi_request_fn
+ => __blk_run_queue_uncond
+ => __blk_run_queue
+ => blk_queue_bio
+ => generic_make_request
+ => submit_bio
+ => submit_bh
+ => ext3_bread
+ => ext3_dir_bread
+ => htree_dirblock_to_tree
+ => ext3_htree_fill_tree
+ => ext3_readdir
+ => vfs_readdir
+ => sys_getdents
+ => system_call_fastpath
 
 
 The trace_hardirqs_off_thunk is called from assembly on x86 when
@@ -802,105 +1258,158 @@ function tracing, we do not know if interrupts were enabled
 within the preemption points. We do see that it started with
 preemption enabled.
 
-Here is a trace with ftrace_enabled set:
-
+Here is a trace with function-trace set:
 
 # tracer: preemptirqsoff
 #
-preemptirqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
---------------------------------------------------------------------
- latency: 105 us, #183/183, CPU#0 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
-    -----------------
-    | task: sshd-4261 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
-    -----------------
- => started at: write_chan
- => ended at:   __do_softirq
-
-#                _------=> CPU#
-#               / _-----=> irqs-off
-#              | / _----=> need-resched
-#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
-#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
-#              |||| /
-#              |||||     delay
-#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
-#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
-      ls-4473  0.N..    0us : preempt_schedule (write_chan)
-      ls-4473  0dN.1    1us : _spin_lock (schedule)
-      ls-4473  0dN.1    2us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock)
-      ls-4473  0d..2    2us : put_prev_task_fair (schedule)
-[...]
-      ls-4473  0d..2   13us : set_normalized_timespec (ktime_get_ts)
-      ls-4473  0d..2   13us : __switch_to (schedule)
-    sshd-4261  0d..2   14us : finish_task_switch (schedule)
-    sshd-4261  0d..2   14us : _spin_unlock_irq (finish_task_switch)
-    sshd-4261  0d..1   15us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock_irqsave)
-    sshd-4261  0d..2   16us : _spin_unlock_irqrestore (hrtick_set)
-    sshd-4261  0d..2   16us : do_IRQ (common_interrupt)
-    sshd-4261  0d..2   17us : irq_enter (do_IRQ)
-    sshd-4261  0d..2   17us : idle_cpu (irq_enter)
-    sshd-4261  0d..2   18us : add_preempt_count (irq_enter)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h2   18us : idle_cpu (irq_enter)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h.   18us : handle_fasteoi_irq (do_IRQ)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h.   19us : _spin_lock (handle_fasteoi_irq)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h.   19us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h1   20us : _spin_unlock (handle_fasteoi_irq)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h1   20us : sub_preempt_count (_spin_unlock)
-[...]
-    sshd-4261  0d.h1   28us : _spin_unlock (handle_fasteoi_irq)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h1   29us : sub_preempt_count (_spin_unlock)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h2   29us : irq_exit (do_IRQ)
-    sshd-4261  0d.h2   29us : sub_preempt_count (irq_exit)
-    sshd-4261  0d..3   30us : do_softirq (irq_exit)
-    sshd-4261  0d...   30us : __do_softirq (do_softirq)
-    sshd-4261  0d...   31us : __local_bh_disable (__do_softirq)
-    sshd-4261  0d...   31us+: add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s4   34us : add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
+# preemptirqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 3.8.0-test+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------
+# latency: 161 us, #339/339, CPU#3 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:4)
+#    -----------------
+#    | task: ls-2269 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+#    -----------------
+#  => started at: schedule
+#  => ended at:   mutex_unlock
+#
+#
+#                  _------=> CPU#            
+#                 / _-----=> irqs-off        
+#                | / _----=> need-resched    
+#                || / _---=> hardirq/softirq 
+#                ||| / _--=> preempt-depth   
+#                |||| /     delay             
+#  cmd     pid   ||||| time  |   caller      
+#     \   /      |||||  \    |   /           
+kworker/-59      3...1    0us : __schedule <-schedule
+kworker/-59      3d..1    0us : rcu_preempt_qs <-rcu_note_context_switch
+kworker/-59      3d..1    1us : add_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_lock_irq
+kworker/-59      3d..2    1us : deactivate_task <-__schedule
+kworker/-59      3d..2    1us : dequeue_task <-deactivate_task
+kworker/-59      3d..2    2us : update_rq_clock <-dequeue_task
+kworker/-59      3d..2    2us : dequeue_task_fair <-dequeue_task
+kworker/-59      3d..2    2us : update_curr <-dequeue_task_fair
+kworker/-59      3d..2    2us : update_min_vruntime <-update_curr
+kworker/-59      3d..2    3us : cpuacct_charge <-update_curr
+kworker/-59      3d..2    3us : __rcu_read_lock <-cpuacct_charge
+kworker/-59      3d..2    3us : __rcu_read_unlock <-cpuacct_charge
+kworker/-59      3d..2    3us : update_cfs_rq_blocked_load <-dequeue_task_fair
+kworker/-59      3d..2    4us : clear_buddies <-dequeue_task_fair
+kworker/-59      3d..2    4us : account_entity_dequeue <-dequeue_task_fair
+kworker/-59      3d..2    4us : update_min_vruntime <-dequeue_task_fair
+kworker/-59      3d..2    4us : update_cfs_shares <-dequeue_task_fair
+kworker/-59      3d..2    5us : hrtick_update <-dequeue_task_fair
+kworker/-59      3d..2    5us : wq_worker_sleeping <-__schedule
+kworker/-59      3d..2    5us : kthread_data <-wq_worker_sleeping
+kworker/-59      3d..2    5us : put_prev_task_fair <-__schedule
+kworker/-59      3d..2    6us : pick_next_task_fair <-pick_next_task
+kworker/-59      3d..2    6us : clear_buddies <-pick_next_task_fair
+kworker/-59      3d..2    6us : set_next_entity <-pick_next_task_fair
+kworker/-59      3d..2    6us : update_stats_wait_end <-set_next_entity
+      ls-2269    3d..2    7us : finish_task_switch <-__schedule
+      ls-2269    3d..2    7us : _raw_spin_unlock_irq <-finish_task_switch
+      ls-2269    3d..2    8us : do_IRQ <-ret_from_intr
+      ls-2269    3d..2    8us : irq_enter <-do_IRQ
+      ls-2269    3d..2    8us : rcu_irq_enter <-irq_enter
+      ls-2269    3d..2    9us : add_preempt_count <-irq_enter
+      ls-2269    3d.h2    9us : exit_idle <-do_IRQ
 [...]
-    sshd-4261  0d.s3   43us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable_ip)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s4   44us : sub_preempt_count (local_bh_enable_ip)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s3   44us : smp_apic_timer_interrupt (apic_timer_interrupt)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s3   45us : irq_enter (smp_apic_timer_interrupt)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s3   45us : idle_cpu (irq_enter)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s3   46us : add_preempt_count (irq_enter)
-    sshd-4261  0d.H3   46us : idle_cpu (irq_enter)
-    sshd-4261  0d.H3   47us : hrtimer_interrupt (smp_apic_timer_interrupt)
-    sshd-4261  0d.H3   47us : ktime_get (hrtimer_interrupt)
+      ls-2269    3d.h3   20us : sub_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_unlock
+      ls-2269    3d.h2   20us : irq_exit <-do_IRQ
+      ls-2269    3d.h2   21us : sub_preempt_count <-irq_exit
+      ls-2269    3d..3   21us : do_softirq <-irq_exit
+      ls-2269    3d..3   21us : __do_softirq <-call_softirq
+      ls-2269    3d..3   21us+: __local_bh_disable <-__do_softirq
+      ls-2269    3d.s4   29us : sub_preempt_count <-_local_bh_enable_ip
+      ls-2269    3d.s5   29us : sub_preempt_count <-_local_bh_enable_ip
+      ls-2269    3d.s5   31us : do_IRQ <-ret_from_intr
+      ls-2269    3d.s5   31us : irq_enter <-do_IRQ
+      ls-2269    3d.s5   31us : rcu_irq_enter <-irq_enter
 [...]
-    sshd-4261  0d.H3   81us : tick_program_event (hrtimer_interrupt)
-    sshd-4261  0d.H3   82us : ktime_get (tick_program_event)
-    sshd-4261  0d.H3   82us : ktime_get_ts (ktime_get)
-    sshd-4261  0d.H3   83us : getnstimeofday (ktime_get_ts)
-    sshd-4261  0d.H3   83us : set_normalized_timespec (ktime_get_ts)
-    sshd-4261  0d.H3   84us : clockevents_program_event (tick_program_event)
-    sshd-4261  0d.H3   84us : lapic_next_event (clockevents_program_event)
-    sshd-4261  0d.H3   85us : irq_exit (smp_apic_timer_interrupt)
-    sshd-4261  0d.H3   85us : sub_preempt_count (irq_exit)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s4   86us : sub_preempt_count (irq_exit)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s3   86us : add_preempt_count (__local_bh_disable)
+      ls-2269    3d.s5   31us : rcu_irq_enter <-irq_enter
+      ls-2269    3d.s5   32us : add_preempt_count <-irq_enter
+      ls-2269    3d.H5   32us : exit_idle <-do_IRQ
+      ls-2269    3d.H5   32us : handle_irq <-do_IRQ
+      ls-2269    3d.H5   32us : irq_to_desc <-handle_irq
+      ls-2269    3d.H5   33us : handle_fasteoi_irq <-handle_irq
 [...]
-    sshd-4261  0d.s1   98us : sub_preempt_count (net_rx_action)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s.   99us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock_irq)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s1   99us+: _spin_unlock_irq (run_timer_softirq)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s.  104us : _local_bh_enable (__do_softirq)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s.  104us : sub_preempt_count (_local_bh_enable)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s.  105us : _local_bh_enable (__do_softirq)
-    sshd-4261  0d.s1  105us : trace_preempt_on (__do_softirq)
-
-
-This is a very interesting trace. It started with the preemption
-of the ls task. We see that the task had the "need_resched" bit
-set via the 'N' in the trace.  Interrupts were disabled before
-the spin_lock at the beginning of the trace. We see that a
-schedule took place to run sshd.  When the interrupts were
-enabled, we took an interrupt. On return from the interrupt
-handler, the softirq ran. We took another interrupt while
-running the softirq as we see from the capital 'H'.
+      ls-2269    3d.s5  158us : _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore <-rtl8139_poll
+      ls-2269    3d.s3  158us : net_rps_action_and_irq_enable.isra.65 <-net_rx_action
+      ls-2269    3d.s3  159us : __local_bh_enable <-__do_softirq
+      ls-2269    3d.s3  159us : sub_preempt_count <-__local_bh_enable
+      ls-2269    3d..3  159us : idle_cpu <-irq_exit
+      ls-2269    3d..3  159us : rcu_irq_exit <-irq_exit
+      ls-2269    3d..3  160us : sub_preempt_count <-irq_exit
+      ls-2269    3d...  161us : __mutex_unlock_slowpath <-mutex_unlock
+      ls-2269    3d...  162us+: trace_hardirqs_on <-mutex_unlock
+      ls-2269    3d...  186us : <stack trace>
+ => __mutex_unlock_slowpath
+ => mutex_unlock
+ => process_output
+ => n_tty_write
+ => tty_write
+ => vfs_write
+ => sys_write
+ => system_call_fastpath
+
+This is an interesting trace. It started with kworker running and
+scheduling out and ls taking over. But as soon as ls released the
+rq lock and enabled interrupts (but not preemption) an interrupt
+triggered. When the interrupt finished, it started running softirqs.
+But while the softirq was running, another interrupt triggered.
+When an interrupt is running inside a softirq, the annotation is 'H'.
 
 
 wakeup
 ------
 
+One common case that people are interested in tracing is the
+time it takes for a task that is woken to actually wake up.
+Now for non Real-Time tasks, this can be arbitrary. But tracing
+it none the less can be interesting. 
+
+Without function tracing:
+
+ # echo 0 > options/function-trace
+ # echo wakeup > current_tracer
+ # echo 1 > tracing_on
+ # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
+ # chrt -f 5 sleep 1
+ # echo 0 > tracing_on
+ # cat trace
+# tracer: wakeup
+#
+# wakeup latency trace v1.1.5 on 3.8.0-test+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------
+# latency: 15 us, #4/4, CPU#3 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:4)
+#    -----------------
+#    | task: kworker/3:1H-312 (uid:0 nice:-20 policy:0 rt_prio:0)
+#    -----------------
+#
+#                  _------=> CPU#            
+#                 / _-----=> irqs-off        
+#                | / _----=> need-resched    
+#                || / _---=> hardirq/softirq 
+#                ||| / _--=> preempt-depth   
+#                |||| /     delay             
+#  cmd     pid   ||||| time  |   caller      
+#     \   /      |||||  \    |   /           
+  <idle>-0       3dNs7    0us :      0:120:R   + [003]   312:100:R kworker/3:1H
+  <idle>-0       3dNs7    1us+: ttwu_do_activate.constprop.87 <-try_to_wake_up
+  <idle>-0       3d..3   15us : __schedule <-schedule
+  <idle>-0       3d..3   15us :      0:120:R ==> [003]   312:100:R kworker/3:1H
+
+The tracer only traces the highest priority task in the system
+to avoid tracing the normal circumstances. Here we see that
+the kworker with a nice priority of -20 (not very nice), took
+just 15 microseconds from the time it woke up, to the time it
+ran.
+
+Non Real-Time tasks are not that interesting. A more interesting
+trace is to concentrate only on Real-Time tasks.
+
+wakeup_rt
+---------
+
 In a Real-Time environment it is very important to know the
 wakeup time it takes for the highest priority task that is woken
 up to the time that it executes. This is also known as "schedule
@@ -914,124 +1423,229 @@ Real-Time environments are interested in the worst case latency.
 That is the longest latency it takes for something to happen,
 and not the average. We can have a very fast scheduler that may
 only have a large latency once in a while, but that would not
-work well with Real-Time tasks.  The wakeup tracer was designed
+work well with Real-Time tasks.  The wakeup_rt tracer was designed
 to record the worst case wakeups of RT tasks. Non-RT tasks are
 not recorded because the tracer only records one worst case and
 tracing non-RT tasks that are unpredictable will overwrite the
-worst case latency of RT tasks.
+worst case latency of RT tasks (just run the normal wakeup
+tracer for a while to see that effect).
 
 Since this tracer only deals with RT tasks, we will run this
 slightly differently than we did with the previous tracers.
 Instead of performing an 'ls', we will run 'sleep 1' under
 'chrt' which changes the priority of the task.
 
- # echo wakeup > current_tracer
- # echo latency-format > trace_options
- # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
+ # echo 0 > options/function-trace
+ # echo wakeup_rt > current_tracer
  # echo 1 > tracing_on
+ # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
  # chrt -f 5 sleep 1
  # echo 0 > tracing_on
  # cat trace
 # tracer: wakeup
 #
-wakeup latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
---------------------------------------------------------------------
- latency: 4 us, #2/2, CPU#1 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
-    -----------------
-    | task: sleep-4901 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:1 rt_prio:5)
-    -----------------
-
-#                _------=> CPU#
-#               / _-----=> irqs-off
-#              | / _----=> need-resched
-#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
-#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
-#              |||| /
-#              |||||     delay
-#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
-#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
-  <idle>-0     1d.h4    0us+: try_to_wake_up (wake_up_process)
-  <idle>-0     1d..4    4us : schedule (cpu_idle)
-
-
-Running this on an idle system, we see that it only took 4
-microseconds to perform the task switch.  Note, since the trace
-marker in the schedule is before the actual "switch", we stop
-the tracing when the recorded task is about to schedule in. This
-may change if we add a new marker at the end of the scheduler.
-
-Notice that the recorded task is 'sleep' with the PID of 4901
+# tracer: wakeup_rt
+#
+# wakeup_rt latency trace v1.1.5 on 3.8.0-test+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------
+# latency: 5 us, #4/4, CPU#3 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:4)
+#    -----------------
+#    | task: sleep-2389 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:1 rt_prio:5)
+#    -----------------
+#
+#                  _------=> CPU#            
+#                 / _-----=> irqs-off        
+#                | / _----=> need-resched    
+#                || / _---=> hardirq/softirq 
+#                ||| / _--=> preempt-depth   
+#                |||| /     delay             
+#  cmd     pid   ||||| time  |   caller      
+#     \   /      |||||  \    |   /           
+  <idle>-0       3d.h4    0us :      0:120:R   + [003]  2389: 94:R sleep
+  <idle>-0       3d.h4    1us+: ttwu_do_activate.constprop.87 <-try_to_wake_up
+  <idle>-0       3d..3    5us : __schedule <-schedule
+  <idle>-0       3d..3    5us :      0:120:R ==> [003]  2389: 94:R sleep
+
+
+Running this on an idle system, we see that it only took 5 microseconds
+to perform the task switch.  Note, since the trace point in the schedule
+is before the actual "switch", we stop the tracing when the recorded task
+is about to schedule in. This may change if we add a new marker at the
+end of the scheduler.
+
+Notice that the recorded task is 'sleep' with the PID of 2389
 and it has an rt_prio of 5. This priority is user-space priority
 and not the internal kernel priority. The policy is 1 for
 SCHED_FIFO and 2 for SCHED_RR.
 
-Doing the same with chrt -r 5 and ftrace_enabled set.
+Note, that the trace data shows the internal priority (99 - rtprio).
 
-# tracer: wakeup
+  <idle>-0       3d..3    5us :      0:120:R ==> [003]  2389: 94:R sleep
+
+The 0:120:R means idle was running with a nice priority of 0 (120 - 20)
+and in the running state 'R'. The sleep task was scheduled in with
+2389: 94:R. That is the priority is the kernel rtprio (99 - 5 = 94)
+and it too is in the running state.
+
+Doing the same with chrt -r 5 and function-trace set.
+
+  echo 1 > options/function-trace
+
+# tracer: wakeup_rt
 #
-wakeup latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8
---------------------------------------------------------------------
- latency: 50 us, #60/60, CPU#1 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:2)
-    -----------------
-    | task: sleep-4068 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:2 rt_prio:5)
-    -----------------
-
-#                _------=> CPU#
-#               / _-----=> irqs-off
-#              | / _----=> need-resched
-#              || / _---=> hardirq/softirq
-#              ||| / _--=> preempt-depth
-#              |||| /
-#              |||||     delay
-#  cmd     pid ||||| time  |   caller
-#     \   /    |||||   \   |   /
-ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    0us : try_to_wake_up (wake_up_process)
-ksoftirq-7     1d.H4    1us : sub_preempt_count (marker_probe_cb)
-ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    2us : check_preempt_wakeup (try_to_wake_up)
-ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    3us : update_curr (check_preempt_wakeup)
-ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    4us : calc_delta_mine (update_curr)
-ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    5us : __resched_task (check_preempt_wakeup)
-ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    6us : task_wake_up_rt (try_to_wake_up)
-ksoftirq-7     1d.H3    7us : _spin_unlock_irqrestore (try_to_wake_up)
-[...]
-ksoftirq-7     1d.H2   17us : irq_exit (smp_apic_timer_interrupt)
-ksoftirq-7     1d.H2   18us : sub_preempt_count (irq_exit)
-ksoftirq-7     1d.s3   19us : sub_preempt_count (irq_exit)
-ksoftirq-7     1..s2   20us : rcu_process_callbacks (__do_softirq)
-[...]
-ksoftirq-7     1..s2   26us : __rcu_process_callbacks (rcu_process_callbacks)
-ksoftirq-7     1d.s2   27us : _local_bh_enable (__do_softirq)
-ksoftirq-7     1d.s2   28us : sub_preempt_count (_local_bh_enable)
-ksoftirq-7     1.N.3   29us : sub_preempt_count (ksoftirqd)
-ksoftirq-7     1.N.2   30us : _cond_resched (ksoftirqd)
-ksoftirq-7     1.N.2   31us : __cond_resched (_cond_resched)
-ksoftirq-7     1.N.2   32us : add_preempt_count (__cond_resched)
-ksoftirq-7     1.N.2   33us : schedule (__cond_resched)
-ksoftirq-7     1.N.2   33us : add_preempt_count (schedule)
-ksoftirq-7     1.N.3   34us : hrtick_clear (schedule)
-ksoftirq-7     1dN.3   35us : _spin_lock (schedule)
-ksoftirq-7     1dN.3   36us : add_preempt_count (_spin_lock)
-ksoftirq-7     1d..4   37us : put_prev_task_fair (schedule)
-ksoftirq-7     1d..4   38us : update_curr (put_prev_task_fair)
-[...]
-ksoftirq-7     1d..5   47us : _spin_trylock (tracing_record_cmdline)
-ksoftirq-7     1d..5   48us : add_preempt_count (_spin_trylock)
-ksoftirq-7     1d..6   49us : _spin_unlock (tracing_record_cmdline)
-ksoftirq-7     1d..6   49us : sub_preempt_count (_spin_unlock)
-ksoftirq-7     1d..4   50us : schedule (__cond_resched)
-
-The interrupt went off while running ksoftirqd. This task runs
-at SCHED_OTHER. Why did not we see the 'N' set early? This may
-be a harmless bug with x86_32 and 4K stacks. On x86_32 with 4K
-stacks configured, the interrupt and softirq run with their own
-stack. Some information is held on the top of the task's stack
-(need_resched and preempt_count are both stored there). The
-setting of the NEED_RESCHED bit is done directly to the task's
-stack, but the reading of the NEED_RESCHED is done by looking at
-the current stack, which in this case is the stack for the hard
-interrupt. This hides the fact that NEED_RESCHED has been set.
-We do not see the 'N' until we switch back to the task's
-assigned stack.
+# wakeup_rt latency trace v1.1.5 on 3.8.0-test+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------
+# latency: 29 us, #85/85, CPU#3 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:4)
+#    -----------------
+#    | task: sleep-2448 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:1 rt_prio:5)
+#    -----------------
+#
+#                  _------=> CPU#            
+#                 / _-----=> irqs-off        
+#                | / _----=> need-resched    
+#                || / _---=> hardirq/softirq 
+#                ||| / _--=> preempt-depth   
+#                |||| /     delay             
+#  cmd     pid   ||||| time  |   caller      
+#     \   /      |||||  \    |   /           
+  <idle>-0       3d.h4    1us+:      0:120:R   + [003]  2448: 94:R sleep
+  <idle>-0       3d.h4    2us : ttwu_do_activate.constprop.87 <-try_to_wake_up
+  <idle>-0       3d.h3    3us : check_preempt_curr <-ttwu_do_wakeup
+  <idle>-0       3d.h3    3us : resched_task <-check_preempt_curr
+  <idle>-0       3dNh3    4us : task_woken_rt <-ttwu_do_wakeup
+  <idle>-0       3dNh3    4us : _raw_spin_unlock <-try_to_wake_up
+  <idle>-0       3dNh3    4us : sub_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_unlock
+  <idle>-0       3dNh2    5us : ttwu_stat <-try_to_wake_up
+  <idle>-0       3dNh2    5us : _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore <-try_to_wake_up
+  <idle>-0       3dNh2    6us : sub_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore
+  <idle>-0       3dNh1    6us : _raw_spin_lock <-__run_hrtimer
+  <idle>-0       3dNh1    6us : add_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_lock
+  <idle>-0       3dNh2    7us : _raw_spin_unlock <-hrtimer_interrupt
+  <idle>-0       3dNh2    7us : sub_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_unlock
+  <idle>-0       3dNh1    7us : tick_program_event <-hrtimer_interrupt
+  <idle>-0       3dNh1    7us : clockevents_program_event <-tick_program_event
+  <idle>-0       3dNh1    8us : ktime_get <-clockevents_program_event
+  <idle>-0       3dNh1    8us : lapic_next_event <-clockevents_program_event
+  <idle>-0       3dNh1    8us : irq_exit <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
+  <idle>-0       3dNh1    9us : sub_preempt_count <-irq_exit
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2    9us : idle_cpu <-irq_exit
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2    9us : rcu_irq_exit <-irq_exit
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   10us : rcu_eqs_enter_common.isra.45 <-rcu_irq_exit
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   10us : sub_preempt_count <-irq_exit
+  <idle>-0       3.N.1   11us : rcu_idle_exit <-cpu_idle
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   11us : rcu_eqs_exit_common.isra.43 <-rcu_idle_exit
+  <idle>-0       3.N.1   11us : tick_nohz_idle_exit <-cpu_idle
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   12us : menu_hrtimer_cancel <-tick_nohz_idle_exit
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   12us : ktime_get <-tick_nohz_idle_exit
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   12us : tick_do_update_jiffies64 <-tick_nohz_idle_exit
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   13us : update_cpu_load_nohz <-tick_nohz_idle_exit
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   13us : _raw_spin_lock <-update_cpu_load_nohz
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   13us : add_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_lock
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   13us : __update_cpu_load <-update_cpu_load_nohz
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   14us : sched_avg_update <-__update_cpu_load
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   14us : _raw_spin_unlock <-update_cpu_load_nohz
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   14us : sub_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_unlock
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   15us : calc_load_exit_idle <-tick_nohz_idle_exit
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   15us : touch_softlockup_watchdog <-tick_nohz_idle_exit
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   15us : hrtimer_cancel <-tick_nohz_idle_exit
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   15us : hrtimer_try_to_cancel <-hrtimer_cancel
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   16us : lock_hrtimer_base.isra.18 <-hrtimer_try_to_cancel
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   16us : _raw_spin_lock_irqsave <-lock_hrtimer_base.isra.18
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   16us : add_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_lock_irqsave
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   17us : __remove_hrtimer <-remove_hrtimer.part.16
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   17us : hrtimer_force_reprogram <-__remove_hrtimer
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   17us : tick_program_event <-hrtimer_force_reprogram
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   18us : clockevents_program_event <-tick_program_event
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   18us : ktime_get <-clockevents_program_event
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   18us : lapic_next_event <-clockevents_program_event
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   19us : _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore <-hrtimer_try_to_cancel
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   19us : sub_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   19us : hrtimer_forward <-tick_nohz_idle_exit
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   20us : ktime_add_safe <-hrtimer_forward
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   20us : ktime_add_safe <-hrtimer_forward
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   20us : hrtimer_start_range_ns <-hrtimer_start_expires.constprop.11
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   20us : __hrtimer_start_range_ns <-hrtimer_start_range_ns
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   21us : lock_hrtimer_base.isra.18 <-__hrtimer_start_range_ns
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   21us : _raw_spin_lock_irqsave <-lock_hrtimer_base.isra.18
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   21us : add_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_lock_irqsave
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   22us : ktime_add_safe <-__hrtimer_start_range_ns
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   22us : enqueue_hrtimer <-__hrtimer_start_range_ns
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   22us : tick_program_event <-__hrtimer_start_range_ns
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   23us : clockevents_program_event <-tick_program_event
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   23us : ktime_get <-clockevents_program_event
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   23us : lapic_next_event <-clockevents_program_event
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   24us : _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore <-__hrtimer_start_range_ns
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   24us : sub_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   24us : account_idle_ticks <-tick_nohz_idle_exit
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   24us : account_idle_time <-account_idle_ticks
+  <idle>-0       3.N.1   25us : sub_preempt_count <-cpu_idle
+  <idle>-0       3.N..   25us : schedule <-cpu_idle
+  <idle>-0       3.N..   25us : __schedule <-preempt_schedule
+  <idle>-0       3.N..   26us : add_preempt_count <-__schedule
+  <idle>-0       3.N.1   26us : rcu_note_context_switch <-__schedule
+  <idle>-0       3.N.1   26us : rcu_sched_qs <-rcu_note_context_switch
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   27us : rcu_preempt_qs <-rcu_note_context_switch
+  <idle>-0       3.N.1   27us : _raw_spin_lock_irq <-__schedule
+  <idle>-0       3dN.1   27us : add_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_lock_irq
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   28us : put_prev_task_idle <-__schedule
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   28us : pick_next_task_stop <-pick_next_task
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   28us : pick_next_task_rt <-pick_next_task
+  <idle>-0       3dN.2   29us : dequeue_pushable_task <-pick_next_task_rt
+  <idle>-0       3d..3   29us : __schedule <-preempt_schedule
+  <idle>-0       3d..3   30us :      0:120:R ==> [003]  2448: 94:R sleep
+
+This isn't that big of a trace, even with function tracing enabled,
+so I included the entire trace.
+
+The interrupt went off while when the system was idle. Somewhere
+before task_woken_rt() was called, the NEED_RESCHED flag was set,
+this is indicated by the first occurrence of the 'N' flag.
+
+Latency tracing and events
+--------------------------
+As function tracing can induce a much larger latency, but without
+seeing what happens within the latency it is hard to know what
+caused it. There is a middle ground, and that is with enabling
+events.
+
+ # echo 0 > options/function-trace
+ # echo wakeup_rt > current_tracer
+ # echo 1 > events/enable
+ # echo 1 > tracing_on
+ # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
+ # chrt -f 5 sleep 1
+ # echo 0 > tracing_on
+ # cat trace
+# tracer: wakeup_rt
+#
+# wakeup_rt latency trace v1.1.5 on 3.8.0-test+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------
+# latency: 6 us, #12/12, CPU#2 | (M:preempt VP:0, KP:0, SP:0 HP:0 #P:4)
+#    -----------------
+#    | task: sleep-5882 (uid:0 nice:0 policy:1 rt_prio:5)
+#    -----------------
+#
+#                  _------=> CPU#            
+#                 / _-----=> irqs-off        
+#                | / _----=> need-resched    
+#                || / _---=> hardirq/softirq 
+#                ||| / _--=> preempt-depth   
+#                |||| /     delay             
+#  cmd     pid   ||||| time  |   caller      
+#     \   /      |||||  \    |   /           
+  <idle>-0       2d.h4    0us :      0:120:R   + [002]  5882: 94:R sleep
+  <idle>-0       2d.h4    0us : ttwu_do_activate.constprop.87 <-try_to_wake_up
+  <idle>-0       2d.h4    1us : sched_wakeup: comm=sleep pid=5882 prio=94 success=1 target_cpu=002
+  <idle>-0       2dNh2    1us : hrtimer_expire_exit: hrtimer=ffff88007796feb8
+  <idle>-0       2.N.2    2us : power_end: cpu_id=2
+  <idle>-0       2.N.2    3us : cpu_idle: state=4294967295 cpu_id=2
+  <idle>-0       2dN.3    4us : hrtimer_cancel: hrtimer=ffff88007d50d5e0
+  <idle>-0       2dN.3    4us : hrtimer_start: hrtimer=ffff88007d50d5e0 function=tick_sched_timer expires=34311211000000 softexpires=34311211000000
+  <idle>-0       2.N.2    5us : rcu_utilization: Start context switch
+  <idle>-0       2.N.2    5us : rcu_utilization: End context switch
+  <idle>-0       2d..3    6us : __schedule <-schedule
+  <idle>-0       2d..3    6us :      0:120:R ==> [002]  5882: 94:R sleep
+
 
 function
 --------
@@ -1039,6 +1653,7 @@ function
 This tracer is the function tracer. Enabling the function tracer
 can be done from the debug file system. Make sure the
 ftrace_enabled is set; otherwise this tracer is a nop.
+See the "ftrace_enabled" section below.
 
  # sysctl kernel.ftrace_enabled=1
  # echo function > current_tracer
@@ -1048,23 +1663,23 @@ ftrace_enabled is set; otherwise this tracer is a nop.
  # cat trace
 # tracer: function
 #
-#           TASK-PID   CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
-#              | |      |          |         |
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638713: finish_task_switch <-schedule
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638714: _spin_unlock_irq <-finish_task_switch
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638714: sub_preempt_count <-_spin_unlock_irq
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638715: hrtick_set <-schedule
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638715: _spin_lock_irqsave <-hrtick_set
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638716: add_preempt_count <-_spin_lock_irqsave
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638716: _spin_unlock_irqrestore <-hrtick_set
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638717: sub_preempt_count <-_spin_unlock_irqrestore
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638717: hrtick_clear <-hrtick_set
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638718: sub_preempt_count <-schedule
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638718: sub_preempt_count <-preempt_schedule
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638719: wait_for_completion <-__stop_machine_run
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638719: wait_for_common <-wait_for_completion
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638720: _spin_lock_irq <-wait_for_common
-            bash-4003  [00]   123.638720: add_preempt_count <-_spin_lock_irq
+# entries-in-buffer/entries-written: 24799/24799   #P:4
+#
+#                              _-----=> irqs-off
+#                             / _----=> need-resched
+#                            | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#                            || / _--=> preempt-depth
+#                            ||| /     delay
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#  ||||    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |       |   ||||       |         |
+            bash-1994  [002] ....  3082.063030: mutex_unlock <-rb_simple_write
+            bash-1994  [002] ....  3082.063031: __mutex_unlock_slowpath <-mutex_unlock
+            bash-1994  [002] ....  3082.063031: __fsnotify_parent <-fsnotify_modify
+            bash-1994  [002] ....  3082.063032: fsnotify <-fsnotify_modify
+            bash-1994  [002] ....  3082.063032: __srcu_read_lock <-fsnotify
+            bash-1994  [002] ....  3082.063032: add_preempt_count <-__srcu_read_lock
+            bash-1994  [002] ...1  3082.063032: sub_preempt_count <-__srcu_read_lock
+            bash-1994  [002] ....  3082.063033: __srcu_read_unlock <-fsnotify
 [...]
 
 
@@ -1214,79 +1829,19 @@ int main (int argc, char **argv)
         return 0;
 }
 
+Or this simple script!
 
-hw-branch-tracer (x86 only)
----------------------------
-
-This tracer uses the x86 last branch tracing hardware feature to
-collect a branch trace on all cpus with relatively low overhead.
-
-The tracer uses a fixed-size circular buffer per cpu and only
-traces ring 0 branches. The trace file dumps that buffer in the
-following format:
-
-# tracer: hw-branch-tracer
-#
-# CPU#        TO  <-  FROM
-   0  scheduler_tick+0xb5/0x1bf	  <-  task_tick_idle+0x5/0x6
-   2  run_posix_cpu_timers+0x2b/0x72a	  <-  run_posix_cpu_timers+0x25/0x72a
-   0  scheduler_tick+0x139/0x1bf	  <-  scheduler_tick+0xed/0x1bf
-   0  scheduler_tick+0x17c/0x1bf	  <-  scheduler_tick+0x148/0x1bf
-   2  run_posix_cpu_timers+0x9e/0x72a	  <-  run_posix_cpu_timers+0x5e/0x72a
-   0  scheduler_tick+0x1b6/0x1bf	  <-  scheduler_tick+0x1aa/0x1bf
-
-
-The tracer may be used to dump the trace for the oops'ing cpu on
-a kernel oops into the system log. To enable this,
-ftrace_dump_on_oops must be set. To set ftrace_dump_on_oops, one
-can either use the sysctl function or set it via the proc system
-interface.
-
-  sysctl kernel.ftrace_dump_on_oops=n
-
-or
-
-  echo n > /proc/sys/kernel/ftrace_dump_on_oops
-
-If n = 1, ftrace will dump buffers of all CPUs, if n = 2 ftrace will
-only dump the buffer of the CPU that triggered the oops.
-
-Here's an example of such a dump after a null pointer
-dereference in a kernel module:
-
-[57848.105921] BUG: unable to handle kernel NULL pointer dereference at 0000000000000000
-[57848.106019] IP: [<ffffffffa0000006>] open+0x6/0x14 [oops]
-[57848.106019] PGD 2354e9067 PUD 2375e7067 PMD 0
-[57848.106019] Oops: 0002 [#1] SMP
-[57848.106019] last sysfs file: /sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1e.0/0000:20:05.0/local_cpus
-[57848.106019] Dumping ftrace buffer:
-[57848.106019] ---------------------------------
-[...]
-[57848.106019]    0  chrdev_open+0xe6/0x165	  <-  cdev_put+0x23/0x24
-[57848.106019]    0  chrdev_open+0x117/0x165	  <-  chrdev_open+0xfa/0x165
-[57848.106019]    0  chrdev_open+0x120/0x165	  <-  chrdev_open+0x11c/0x165
-[57848.106019]    0  chrdev_open+0x134/0x165	  <-  chrdev_open+0x12b/0x165
-[57848.106019]    0  open+0x0/0x14 [oops]	  <-  chrdev_open+0x144/0x165
-[57848.106019]    0  page_fault+0x0/0x30	  <-  open+0x6/0x14 [oops]
-[57848.106019]    0  error_entry+0x0/0x5b	  <-  page_fault+0x4/0x30
-[57848.106019]    0  error_kernelspace+0x0/0x31	  <-  error_entry+0x59/0x5b
-[57848.106019]    0  error_sti+0x0/0x1	  <-  error_kernelspace+0x2d/0x31
-[57848.106019]    0  page_fault+0x9/0x30	  <-  error_sti+0x0/0x1
-[57848.106019]    0  do_page_fault+0x0/0x881	  <-  page_fault+0x1a/0x30
-[...]
-[57848.106019]    0  do_page_fault+0x66b/0x881	  <-  is_prefetch+0x1ee/0x1f2
-[57848.106019]    0  do_page_fault+0x6e0/0x881	  <-  do_page_fault+0x67a/0x881
-[57848.106019]    0  oops_begin+0x0/0x96	  <-  do_page_fault+0x6e0/0x881
-[57848.106019]    0  trace_hw_branch_oops+0x0/0x2d	  <-  oops_begin+0x9/0x96
-[...]
-[57848.106019]    0  ds_suspend_bts+0x2a/0xe3	  <-  ds_suspend_bts+0x1a/0xe3
-[57848.106019] ---------------------------------
-[57848.106019] CPU 0
-[57848.106019] Modules linked in: oops
-[57848.106019] Pid: 5542, comm: cat Tainted: G        W  2.6.28 #23
-[57848.106019] RIP: 0010:[<ffffffffa0000006>]  [<ffffffffa0000006>] open+0x6/0x14 [oops]
-[57848.106019] RSP: 0018:ffff880235457d48  EFLAGS: 00010246
-[...]
+------
+#!/bin/bash
+
+debugfs=`sed -ne 's/^debugfs \(.*\) debugfs.*/\1/p' /proc/mounts`
+echo nop > $debugfs/tracing/current_tracer
+echo 0 > $debugfs/tracing/tracing_on
+echo $$ > $debugfs/tracing/set_ftrace_pid
+echo function > $debugfs/tracing/current_tracer
+echo 1 > $debugfs/tracing/tracing_on
+exec "$@"
+------
 
 
 function graph tracer
@@ -1473,16 +2028,18 @@ starts of pointing to a simple return. (Enabling FTRACE will
 include the -pg switch in the compiling of the kernel.)
 
 At compile time every C file object is run through the
-recordmcount.pl script (located in the scripts directory). This
-script will process the C object using objdump to find all the
-locations in the .text section that call mcount. (Note, only the
-.text section is processed, since processing other sections like
-.init.text may cause races due to those sections being freed).
+recordmcount program (located in the scripts directory). This
+program will parse the ELF headers in the C object to find all
+the locations in the .text section that call mcount. (Note, only
+white listed .text sections are processed, since processing other
+sections like .init.text may cause races due to those sections
+being freed unexpectedly).
 
 A new section called "__mcount_loc" is created that holds
 references to all the mcount call sites in the .text section.
-This section is compiled back into the original object. The
-final linker will add all these references into a single table.
+The recordmcount program re-links this section back into the
+original object. The final linking stage of the kernel will add all these
+references into a single table.
 
 On boot up, before SMP is initialized, the dynamic ftrace code
 scans this table and updates all the locations into nops. It
@@ -1493,13 +2050,25 @@ unloaded, it also removes its functions from the ftrace function
 list. This is automatic in the module unload code, and the
 module author does not need to worry about it.
 
-When tracing is enabled, kstop_machine is called to prevent
-races with the CPUS executing code being modified (which can
-cause the CPU to do undesirable things), and the nops are
+When tracing is enabled, the process of modifying the function
+tracepoints is dependent on architecture. The old method is to use
+kstop_machine to prevent races with the CPUs executing code being
+modified (which can cause the CPU to do undesirable things, especially
+if the modified code crosses cache (or page) boundaries), and the nops are
 patched back to calls. But this time, they do not call mcount
 (which is just a function stub). They now call into the ftrace
 infrastructure.
 
+The new method of modifying the function tracepoints is to place
+a breakpoint at the location to be modified, sync all CPUs, modify
+the rest of the instruction not covered by the breakpoint. Sync
+all CPUs again, and then remove the breakpoint with the finished
+version to the ftrace call site.
+
+Some archs do not even need to monkey around with the synchronization,
+and can just slap the new code on top of the old without any
+problems with other CPUs executing it at the same time.
+
 One special side-effect to the recording of the functions being
 traced is that we can now selectively choose which functions we
 wish to trace and which ones we want the mcount calls to remain
@@ -1530,20 +2099,28 @@ mutex_lock
 
 If I am only interested in sys_nanosleep and hrtimer_interrupt:
 
- # echo sys_nanosleep hrtimer_interrupt \
-		> set_ftrace_filter
+ # echo sys_nanosleep hrtimer_interrupt > set_ftrace_filter
  # echo function > current_tracer
  # echo 1 > tracing_on
  # usleep 1
  # echo 0 > tracing_on
  # cat trace
-# tracer: ftrace
+# tracer: function
+#
+# entries-in-buffer/entries-written: 5/5   #P:4
 #
-#           TASK-PID   CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
-#              | |      |          |         |
-          usleep-4134  [00]  1317.070017: hrtimer_interrupt <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
-          usleep-4134  [00]  1317.070111: sys_nanosleep <-syscall_call
-          <idle>-0     [00]  1317.070115: hrtimer_interrupt <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
+#                              _-----=> irqs-off
+#                             / _----=> need-resched
+#                            | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#                            || / _--=> preempt-depth
+#                            ||| /     delay
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#  ||||    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |       |   ||||       |         |
+          usleep-2665  [001] ....  4186.475355: sys_nanosleep <-system_call_fastpath
+          <idle>-0     [001] d.h1  4186.475409: hrtimer_interrupt <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
+          usleep-2665  [001] d.h1  4186.475426: hrtimer_interrupt <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
+          <idle>-0     [003] d.h1  4186.475426: hrtimer_interrupt <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
+          <idle>-0     [002] d.h1  4186.475427: hrtimer_interrupt <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
 
 To see which functions are being traced, you can cat the file:
 
@@ -1571,20 +2148,25 @@ Note: It is better to use quotes to enclose the wild cards,
 
 Produces:
 
-# tracer: ftrace
+# tracer: function
 #
-#           TASK-PID   CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
-#              | |      |          |         |
-            bash-4003  [00]  1480.611794: hrtimer_init <-copy_process
-            bash-4003  [00]  1480.611941: hrtimer_start <-hrtick_set
-            bash-4003  [00]  1480.611956: hrtimer_cancel <-hrtick_clear
-            bash-4003  [00]  1480.611956: hrtimer_try_to_cancel <-hrtimer_cancel
-          <idle>-0     [00]  1480.612019: hrtimer_get_next_event <-get_next_timer_interrupt
-          <idle>-0     [00]  1480.612025: hrtimer_get_next_event <-get_next_timer_interrupt
-          <idle>-0     [00]  1480.612032: hrtimer_get_next_event <-get_next_timer_interrupt
-          <idle>-0     [00]  1480.612037: hrtimer_get_next_event <-get_next_timer_interrupt
-          <idle>-0     [00]  1480.612382: hrtimer_get_next_event <-get_next_timer_interrupt
-
+# entries-in-buffer/entries-written: 897/897   #P:4
+#
+#                              _-----=> irqs-off
+#                             / _----=> need-resched
+#                            | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#                            || / _--=> preempt-depth
+#                            ||| /     delay
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#  ||||    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |       |   ||||       |         |
+          <idle>-0     [003] dN.1  4228.547803: hrtimer_cancel <-tick_nohz_idle_exit
+          <idle>-0     [003] dN.1  4228.547804: hrtimer_try_to_cancel <-hrtimer_cancel
+          <idle>-0     [003] dN.2  4228.547805: hrtimer_force_reprogram <-__remove_hrtimer
+          <idle>-0     [003] dN.1  4228.547805: hrtimer_forward <-tick_nohz_idle_exit
+          <idle>-0     [003] dN.1  4228.547805: hrtimer_start_range_ns <-hrtimer_start_expires.constprop.11
+          <idle>-0     [003] d..1  4228.547858: hrtimer_get_next_event <-get_next_timer_interrupt
+          <idle>-0     [003] d..1  4228.547859: hrtimer_start <-__tick_nohz_idle_enter
+          <idle>-0     [003] d..2  4228.547860: hrtimer_force_reprogram <-__rem
 
 Notice that we lost the sys_nanosleep.
 
@@ -1651,19 +2233,29 @@ traced.
 
 Produces:
 
-# tracer: ftrace
+# tracer: function
+#
+# entries-in-buffer/entries-written: 39608/39608   #P:4
 #
-#           TASK-PID   CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
-#              | |      |          |         |
-            bash-4043  [01]   115.281644: finish_task_switch <-schedule
-            bash-4043  [01]   115.281645: hrtick_set <-schedule
-            bash-4043  [01]   115.281645: hrtick_clear <-hrtick_set
-            bash-4043  [01]   115.281646: wait_for_completion <-__stop_machine_run
-            bash-4043  [01]   115.281647: wait_for_common <-wait_for_completion
-            bash-4043  [01]   115.281647: kthread_stop <-stop_machine_run
-            bash-4043  [01]   115.281648: init_waitqueue_head <-kthread_stop
-            bash-4043  [01]   115.281648: wake_up_process <-kthread_stop
-            bash-4043  [01]   115.281649: try_to_wake_up <-wake_up_process
+#                              _-----=> irqs-off
+#                             / _----=> need-resched
+#                            | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#                            || / _--=> preempt-depth
+#                            ||| /     delay
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#  ||||    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |       |   ||||       |         |
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  4342.324896: file_ra_state_init <-do_dentry_open
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  4342.324897: open_check_o_direct <-do_last
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  4342.324897: ima_file_check <-do_last
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  4342.324898: process_measurement <-ima_file_check
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  4342.324898: ima_get_action <-process_measurement
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  4342.324898: ima_match_policy <-ima_get_action
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  4342.324899: do_truncate <-do_last
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  4342.324899: should_remove_suid <-do_truncate
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  4342.324899: notify_change <-do_truncate
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  4342.324900: current_fs_time <-notify_change
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  4342.324900: current_kernel_time <-current_fs_time
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  4342.324900: timespec_trunc <-current_fs_time
 
 We can see that there's no more lock or preempt tracing.
 
@@ -1729,6 +2321,28 @@ this special filter via:
  echo > set_graph_function
 
 
+ftrace_enabled
+--------------
+
+Note, the proc sysctl ftrace_enable is a big on/off switch for the
+function tracer. By default it is enabled (when function tracing is
+enabled in the kernel). If it is disabled, all function tracing is
+disabled. This includes not only the function tracers for ftrace, but
+also for any other uses (perf, kprobes, stack tracing, profiling, etc).
+
+Please disable this with care.
+
+This can be disable (and enabled) with:
+
+  sysctl kernel.ftrace_enabled=0
+  sysctl kernel.ftrace_enabled=1
+
+ or
+
+  echo 0 > /proc/sys/kernel/ftrace_enabled
+  echo 1 > /proc/sys/kernel/ftrace_enabled
+
+
 Filter commands
 ---------------
 
@@ -1763,12 +2377,71 @@ The following commands are supported:
 
    echo '__schedule_bug:traceoff:5' > set_ftrace_filter
 
+  To always disable tracing when __schedule_bug is hit:
+
+   echo '__schedule_bug:traceoff' > set_ftrace_filter
+
   These commands are cumulative whether or not they are appended
   to set_ftrace_filter. To remove a command, prepend it by '!'
   and drop the parameter:
 
+   echo '!__schedule_bug:traceoff:0' > set_ftrace_filter
+
+    The above removes the traceoff command for __schedule_bug
+    that have a counter. To remove commands without counters:
+
    echo '!__schedule_bug:traceoff' > set_ftrace_filter
 
+- snapshot
+  Will cause a snapshot to be triggered when the function is hit.
+
+   echo 'native_flush_tlb_others:snapshot' > set_ftrace_filter
+
+  To only snapshot once:
+
+   echo 'native_flush_tlb_others:snapshot:1' > set_ftrace_filter
+
+  To remove the above commands:
+
+   echo '!native_flush_tlb_others:snapshot' > set_ftrace_filter
+   echo '!native_flush_tlb_others:snapshot:0' > set_ftrace_filter
+
+- enable_event/disable_event
+  These commands can enable or disable a trace event. Note, because
+  function tracing callbacks are very sensitive, when these commands
+  are registered, the trace point is activated, but disabled in
+  a "soft" mode. That is, the tracepoint will be called, but
+  just will not be traced. The event tracepoint stays in this mode
+  as long as there's a command that triggers it.
+
+   echo 'try_to_wake_up:enable_event:sched:sched_switch:2' > \
+   	 set_ftrace_filter
+
+  The format is:
+
+    <function>:enable_event:<system>:<event>[:count]
+    <function>:disable_event:<system>:<event>[:count]
+
+  To remove the events commands:
+
+
+   echo '!try_to_wake_up:enable_event:sched:sched_switch:0' > \
+   	 set_ftrace_filter
+   echo '!schedule:disable_event:sched:sched_switch' > \
+   	 set_ftrace_filter
+
+- dump
+  When the function is hit, it will dump the contents of the ftrace
+  ring buffer to the console. This is useful if you need to debug
+  something, and want to dump the trace when a certain function
+  is hit. Perhaps its a function that is called before a tripple
+  fault happens and does not allow you to get a regular dump.
+
+- cpudump
+  When the function is hit, it will dump the contents of the ftrace
+  ring buffer for the current CPU to the console. Unlike the "dump"
+  command, it only prints out the contents of the ring buffer for the
+  CPU that executed the function that triggered the dump.
 
 trace_pipe
 ----------
@@ -1787,28 +2460,31 @@ different. The trace is live.
  # cat trace
 # tracer: function
 #
-#           TASK-PID   CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
-#              | |      |          |         |
+# entries-in-buffer/entries-written: 0/0   #P:4
+#
+#                              _-----=> irqs-off
+#                             / _----=> need-resched
+#                            | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#                            || / _--=> preempt-depth
+#                            ||| /     delay
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#  ||||    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |       |   ||||       |         |
 
  #
  # cat /tmp/trace.out
-            bash-4043  [00] 41.267106: finish_task_switch <-schedule
-            bash-4043  [00] 41.267106: hrtick_set <-schedule
-            bash-4043  [00] 41.267107: hrtick_clear <-hrtick_set
-            bash-4043  [00] 41.267108: wait_for_completion <-__stop_machine_run
-            bash-4043  [00] 41.267108: wait_for_common <-wait_for_completion
-            bash-4043  [00] 41.267109: kthread_stop <-stop_machine_run
-            bash-4043  [00] 41.267109: init_waitqueue_head <-kthread_stop
-            bash-4043  [00] 41.267110: wake_up_process <-kthread_stop
-            bash-4043  [00] 41.267110: try_to_wake_up <-wake_up_process
-            bash-4043  [00] 41.267111: select_task_rq_rt <-try_to_wake_up
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  5281.568961: mutex_unlock <-rb_simple_write
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  5281.568963: __mutex_unlock_slowpath <-mutex_unlock
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  5281.568963: __fsnotify_parent <-fsnotify_modify
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  5281.568964: fsnotify <-fsnotify_modify
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  5281.568964: __srcu_read_lock <-fsnotify
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  5281.568964: add_preempt_count <-__srcu_read_lock
+            bash-1994  [000] ...1  5281.568965: sub_preempt_count <-__srcu_read_lock
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  5281.568965: __srcu_read_unlock <-fsnotify
+            bash-1994  [000] ....  5281.568967: sys_dup2 <-system_call_fastpath
 
 
 Note, reading the trace_pipe file will block until more input is
-added. By changing the tracer, trace_pipe will issue an EOF. We
-needed to set the function tracer _before_ we "cat" the
-trace_pipe file.
-
+added.
 
 trace entries
 -------------
@@ -1817,32 +2493,315 @@ Having too much or not enough data can be troublesome in
 diagnosing an issue in the kernel. The file buffer_size_kb is
 used to modify the size of the internal trace buffers. The
 number listed is the number of entries that can be recorded per
-CPU. To know the full size, multiply the number of possible CPUS
+CPU. To know the full size, multiply the number of possible CPUs
 with the number of entries.
 
  # cat buffer_size_kb
 1408 (units kilobytes)
 
-Note, to modify this, you must have tracing completely disabled.
-To do that, echo "nop" into the current_tracer. If the
-current_tracer is not set to "nop", an EINVAL error will be
-returned.
+Or simply read buffer_total_size_kb
+
+ # cat buffer_total_size_kb 
+5632
+
+To modify the buffer, simple echo in a number (in 1024 byte segments).
 
- # echo nop > current_tracer
  # echo 10000 > buffer_size_kb
  # cat buffer_size_kb
 10000 (units kilobytes)
 
-The number of pages which will be allocated is limited to a
-percentage of available memory. Allocating too much will produce
-an error.
+It will try to allocate as much as possible. If you allocate too
+much, it can cause Out-Of-Memory to trigger.
 
  # echo 1000000000000 > buffer_size_kb
 -bash: echo: write error: Cannot allocate memory
  # cat buffer_size_kb
 85
 
+The per_cpu buffers can be changed individually as well:
+
+ # echo 10000 > per_cpu/cpu0/buffer_size_kb
+ # echo 100 > per_cpu/cpu1/buffer_size_kb
+
+When the per_cpu buffers are not the same, the buffer_size_kb
+at the top level will just show an X
+
+ # cat buffer_size_kb
+X
+
+This is where the buffer_total_size_kb is useful:
+
+ # cat buffer_total_size_kb 
+12916
+
+Writing to the top level buffer_size_kb will reset all the buffers
+to be the same again.
+
+Snapshot
+--------
+CONFIG_TRACER_SNAPSHOT makes a generic snapshot feature
+available to all non latency tracers. (Latency tracers which
+record max latency, such as "irqsoff" or "wakeup", can't use
+this feature, since those are already using the snapshot
+mechanism internally.)
+
+Snapshot preserves a current trace buffer at a particular point
+in time without stopping tracing. Ftrace swaps the current
+buffer with a spare buffer, and tracing continues in the new
+current (=previous spare) buffer.
+
+The following debugfs files in "tracing" are related to this
+feature:
+
+  snapshot:
+
+	This is used to take a snapshot and to read the output
+	of the snapshot. Echo 1 into this file to allocate a
+	spare buffer and to take a snapshot (swap), then read
+	the snapshot from this file in the same format as
+	"trace" (described above in the section "The File
+	System"). Both reads snapshot and tracing are executable
+	in parallel. When the spare buffer is allocated, echoing
+	0 frees it, and echoing else (positive) values clear the
+	snapshot contents.
+	More details are shown in the table below.
+
+	status\input  |     0      |     1      |    else    |
+	--------------+------------+------------+------------+
+	not allocated |(do nothing)| alloc+swap |(do nothing)|
+	--------------+------------+------------+------------+
+	allocated     |    free    |    swap    |   clear    |
+	--------------+------------+------------+------------+
+
+Here is an example of using the snapshot feature.
+
+ # echo 1 > events/sched/enable
+ # echo 1 > snapshot
+ # cat snapshot
+# tracer: nop
+#
+# entries-in-buffer/entries-written: 71/71   #P:8
+#
+#                              _-----=> irqs-off
+#                             / _----=> need-resched
+#                            | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#                            || / _--=> preempt-depth
+#                            ||| /     delay
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#  ||||    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |       |   ||||       |         |
+          <idle>-0     [005] d...  2440.603828: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/5 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R ==> next_comm=snapshot-test-2 next_pid=2242 next_prio=120
+           sleep-2242  [005] d...  2440.603846: sched_switch: prev_comm=snapshot-test-2 prev_pid=2242 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R ==> next_comm=kworker/5:1 next_pid=60 next_prio=120
+[...]
+          <idle>-0     [002] d...  2440.707230: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/2 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R ==> next_comm=snapshot-test-2 next_pid=2229 next_prio=120
+
+ # cat trace
+# tracer: nop
+#
+# entries-in-buffer/entries-written: 77/77   #P:8
+#
+#                              _-----=> irqs-off
+#                             / _----=> need-resched
+#                            | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#                            || / _--=> preempt-depth
+#                            ||| /     delay
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#  ||||    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |       |   ||||       |         |
+          <idle>-0     [007] d...  2440.707395: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/7 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R ==> next_comm=snapshot-test-2 next_pid=2243 next_prio=120
+ snapshot-test-2-2229  [002] d...  2440.707438: sched_switch: prev_comm=snapshot-test-2 prev_pid=2229 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=swapper/2 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
+[...]
+
+
+If you try to use this snapshot feature when current tracer is
+one of the latency tracers, you will get the following results.
+
+ # echo wakeup > current_tracer
+ # echo 1 > snapshot
+bash: echo: write error: Device or resource busy
+ # cat snapshot
+cat: snapshot: Device or resource busy
+
+
+Instances
+---------
+In the debugfs tracing directory is a directory called "instances".
+This directory can have new directories created inside of it using
+mkdir, and removing directories with rmdir. The directory created
+with mkdir in this directory will already contain files and other
+directories after it is created.
+
+ # mkdir instances/foo
+ # ls instances/foo
+buffer_size_kb  buffer_total_size_kb  events  free_buffer  per_cpu
+set_event  snapshot  trace  trace_clock  trace_marker  trace_options
+trace_pipe  tracing_on
+
+As you can see, the new directory looks similar to the tracing directory
+itself. In fact, it is very similar, except that the buffer and
+events are agnostic from the main director, or from any other
+instances that are created.
+
+The files in the new directory work just like the files with the
+same name in the tracing directory except the buffer that is used
+is a separate and new buffer. The files affect that buffer but do not
+affect the main buffer with the exception of trace_options. Currently,
+the trace_options affect all instances and the top level buffer
+the same, but this may change in future releases. That is, options
+may become specific to the instance they reside in.
+
+Notice that none of the function tracer files are there, nor is
+current_tracer and available_tracers. This is because the buffers
+can currently only have events enabled for them.
+
+ # mkdir instances/foo
+ # mkdir instances/bar
+ # mkdir instances/zoot
+ # echo 100000 > buffer_size_kb
+ # echo 1000 > instances/foo/buffer_size_kb
+ # echo 5000 > instances/bar/per_cpu/cpu1/buffer_size_kb
+ # echo function > current_trace
+ # echo 1 > instances/foo/events/sched/sched_wakeup/enable
+ # echo 1 > instances/foo/events/sched/sched_wakeup_new/enable
+ # echo 1 > instances/foo/events/sched/sched_switch/enable
+ # echo 1 > instances/bar/events/irq/enable
+ # echo 1 > instances/zoot/events/syscalls/enable
+ # cat trace_pipe
+CPU:2 [LOST 11745 EVENTS]
+            bash-2044  [002] .... 10594.481032: _raw_spin_lock_irqsave <-get_page_from_freelist
+            bash-2044  [002] d... 10594.481032: add_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_lock_irqsave
+            bash-2044  [002] d..1 10594.481032: __rmqueue <-get_page_from_freelist
+            bash-2044  [002] d..1 10594.481033: _raw_spin_unlock <-get_page_from_freelist
+            bash-2044  [002] d..1 10594.481033: sub_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_unlock
+            bash-2044  [002] d... 10594.481033: get_pageblock_flags_group <-get_pageblock_migratetype
+            bash-2044  [002] d... 10594.481034: __mod_zone_page_state <-get_page_from_freelist
+            bash-2044  [002] d... 10594.481034: zone_statistics <-get_page_from_freelist
+            bash-2044  [002] d... 10594.481034: __inc_zone_state <-zone_statistics
+            bash-2044  [002] d... 10594.481034: __inc_zone_state <-zone_statistics
+            bash-2044  [002] .... 10594.481035: arch_dup_task_struct <-copy_process
+[...]
+
+ # cat instances/foo/trace_pipe
+            bash-1998  [000] d..4   136.676759: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/0:1 pid=59 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=000
+            bash-1998  [000] dN.4   136.676760: sched_wakeup: comm=bash pid=1998 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=000
+          <idle>-0     [003] d.h3   136.676906: sched_wakeup: comm=rcu_preempt pid=9 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=003
+          <idle>-0     [003] d..3   136.676909: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/3 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R ==> next_comm=rcu_preempt next_pid=9 next_prio=120
+     rcu_preempt-9     [003] d..3   136.676916: sched_switch: prev_comm=rcu_preempt prev_pid=9 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=swapper/3 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
+            bash-1998  [000] d..4   136.677014: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/0:1 pid=59 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=000
+            bash-1998  [000] dN.4   136.677016: sched_wakeup: comm=bash pid=1998 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=000
+            bash-1998  [000] d..3   136.677018: sched_switch: prev_comm=bash prev_pid=1998 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=kworker/0:1 next_pid=59 next_prio=120
+     kworker/0:1-59    [000] d..4   136.677022: sched_wakeup: comm=sshd pid=1995 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=001
+     kworker/0:1-59    [000] d..3   136.677025: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/0:1 prev_pid=59 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=bash next_pid=1998 next_prio=120
+[...]
+
+ # cat instances/bar/trace_pipe
+     migration/1-14    [001] d.h3   138.732674: softirq_raise: vec=3 [action=NET_RX]
+          <idle>-0     [001] dNh3   138.732725: softirq_raise: vec=3 [action=NET_RX]
+            bash-1998  [000] d.h1   138.733101: softirq_raise: vec=1 [action=TIMER]
+            bash-1998  [000] d.h1   138.733102: softirq_raise: vec=9 [action=RCU]
+            bash-1998  [000] ..s2   138.733105: softirq_entry: vec=1 [action=TIMER]
+            bash-1998  [000] ..s2   138.733106: softirq_exit: vec=1 [action=TIMER]
+            bash-1998  [000] ..s2   138.733106: softirq_entry: vec=9 [action=RCU]
+            bash-1998  [000] ..s2   138.733109: softirq_exit: vec=9 [action=RCU]
+            sshd-1995  [001] d.h1   138.733278: irq_handler_entry: irq=21 name=uhci_hcd:usb4
+            sshd-1995  [001] d.h1   138.733280: irq_handler_exit: irq=21 ret=unhandled
+            sshd-1995  [001] d.h1   138.733281: irq_handler_entry: irq=21 name=eth0
+            sshd-1995  [001] d.h1   138.733283: irq_handler_exit: irq=21 ret=handled
+[...]
+
+ # cat instances/zoot/trace
+# tracer: nop
+#
+# entries-in-buffer/entries-written: 18996/18996   #P:4
+#
+#                              _-----=> irqs-off
+#                             / _----=> need-resched
+#                            | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+#                            || / _--=> preempt-depth
+#                            ||| /     delay
+#           TASK-PID   CPU#  ||||    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+#              | |       |   ||||       |         |
+            bash-1998  [000] d...   140.733501: sys_write -> 0x2
+            bash-1998  [000] d...   140.733504: sys_dup2(oldfd: a, newfd: 1)
+            bash-1998  [000] d...   140.733506: sys_dup2 -> 0x1
+            bash-1998  [000] d...   140.733508: sys_fcntl(fd: a, cmd: 1, arg: 0)
+            bash-1998  [000] d...   140.733509: sys_fcntl -> 0x1
+            bash-1998  [000] d...   140.733510: sys_close(fd: a)
+            bash-1998  [000] d...   140.733510: sys_close -> 0x0
+            bash-1998  [000] d...   140.733514: sys_rt_sigprocmask(how: 0, nset: 0, oset: 6e2768, sigsetsize: 8)
+            bash-1998  [000] d...   140.733515: sys_rt_sigprocmask -> 0x0
+            bash-1998  [000] d...   140.733516: sys_rt_sigaction(sig: 2, act: 7fff718846f0, oact: 7fff71884650, sigsetsize: 8)
+            bash-1998  [000] d...   140.733516: sys_rt_sigaction -> 0x0
+
+You can see that the trace of the top most trace buffer shows only
+the function tracing. The foo instance displays wakeups and task
+switches.
+
+To remove the instances, simply delete their directories:
+
+ # rmdir instances/foo
+ # rmdir instances/bar
+ # rmdir instances/zoot
+
+Note, if a process has a trace file open in one of the instance
+directories, the rmdir will fail with EBUSY.
+
+
+Stack trace
 -----------
+Since the kernel has a fixed sized stack, it is important not to
+waste it in functions. A kernel developer must be conscience of
+what they allocate on the stack. If they add too much, the system
+can be in danger of a stack overflow, and corruption will occur,
+usually leading to a system panic.
+
+There are some tools that check this, usually with interrupts
+periodically checking usage. But if you can perform a check
+at every function call that will become very useful. As ftrace provides
+a function tracer, it makes it convenient to check the stack size
+at every function call. This is enabled via the stack tracer.
+
+CONFIG_STACK_TRACER enables the ftrace stack tracing functionality.
+To enable it, write a '1' into /proc/sys/kernel/stack_tracer_enabled.
+
+ # echo 1 > /proc/sys/kernel/stack_tracer_enabled
+
+You can also enable it from the kernel command line to trace
+the stack size of the kernel during boot up, by adding "stacktrace"
+to the kernel command line parameter.
+
+After running it for a few minutes, the output looks like:
+
+ # cat stack_max_size
+2928
+
+ # cat stack_trace
+        Depth    Size   Location    (18 entries)
+        -----    ----   --------
+  0)     2928     224   update_sd_lb_stats+0xbc/0x4ac
+  1)     2704     160   find_busiest_group+0x31/0x1f1
+  2)     2544     256   load_balance+0xd9/0x662
+  3)     2288      80   idle_balance+0xbb/0x130
+  4)     2208     128   __schedule+0x26e/0x5b9
+  5)     2080      16   schedule+0x64/0x66
+  6)     2064     128   schedule_timeout+0x34/0xe0
+  7)     1936     112   wait_for_common+0x97/0xf1
+  8)     1824      16   wait_for_completion+0x1d/0x1f
+  9)     1808     128   flush_work+0xfe/0x119
+ 10)     1680      16   tty_flush_to_ldisc+0x1e/0x20
+ 11)     1664      48   input_available_p+0x1d/0x5c
+ 12)     1616      48   n_tty_poll+0x6d/0x134
+ 13)     1568      64   tty_poll+0x64/0x7f
+ 14)     1504     880   do_select+0x31e/0x511
+ 15)      624     400   core_sys_select+0x177/0x216
+ 16)      224      96   sys_select+0x91/0xb9
+ 17)      128     128   system_call_fastpath+0x16/0x1b
+
+Note, if -mfentry is being used by gcc, functions get traced before
+they set up the stack frame. This means that leaf level functions
+are not tested by the stack tracer when -mfentry is used.
+
+Currently, -mfentry is used by gcc 4.6.0 and above on x86 only.
+
+---------
 
 More details can be found in the source code, in the
 kernel/trace/*.c files.
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt
index d0d0bb9e3e25..d68ea5fc812b 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt
+++ b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ kprobes can probe (this means, all functions body except for __kprobes
 functions). Unlike the Tracepoint based event, this can be added and removed
 dynamically, on the fly.
 
-To enable this feature, build your kernel with CONFIG_KPROBE_TRACING=y.
+To enable this feature, build your kernel with CONFIG_KPROBE_EVENT=y.
 
 Similar to the events tracer, this doesn't need to be activated via
 current_tracer. Instead of that, add probe points via
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/tracepoints.txt b/Documentation/trace/tracepoints.txt
index c0e1ceed75a4..ac4170dd0f24 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/tracepoints.txt
+++ b/Documentation/trace/tracepoints.txt
@@ -40,7 +40,13 @@ Two elements are required for tracepoints :
 
 In order to use tracepoints, you should include linux/tracepoint.h.
 
-In include/trace/subsys.h :
+In include/trace/events/subsys.h :
+
+#undef TRACE_SYSTEM
+#define TRACE_SYSTEM subsys
+
+#if !defined(_TRACE_SUBSYS_H) || defined(TRACE_HEADER_MULTI_READ)
+#define _TRACE_SUBSYS_H
 
 #include <linux/tracepoint.h>
 
@@ -48,10 +54,16 @@ DECLARE_TRACE(subsys_eventname,
 	TP_PROTO(int firstarg, struct task_struct *p),
 	TP_ARGS(firstarg, p));
 
+#endif /* _TRACE_SUBSYS_H */
+
+/* This part must be outside protection */
+#include <trace/define_trace.h>
+
 In subsys/file.c (where the tracing statement must be added) :
 
-#include <trace/subsys.h>
+#include <trace/events/subsys.h>
 
+#define CREATE_TRACE_POINTS
 DEFINE_TRACE(subsys_eventname);
 
 void somefct(void)
@@ -72,6 +84,9 @@ Where :
 - TP_ARGS(firstarg, p) are the parameters names, same as found in the
   prototype.
 
+- if you use the header in multiple source files, #define CREATE_TRACE_POINTS
+  should appear only in one source file.
+
 Connecting a function (probe) to a tracepoint is done by providing a
 probe (function to call) for the specific tracepoint through
 register_trace_subsys_eventname().  Removing a probe is done through
@@ -81,7 +96,6 @@ tracepoint_synchronize_unregister() must be called before the end of
 the module exit function to make sure there is no caller left using
 the probe. This, and the fact that preemption is disabled around the
 probe call, make sure that probe removal and module unload are safe.
-See the "Probe example" section below for a sample probe module.
 
 The tracepoint mechanism supports inserting multiple instances of the
 same tracepoint, but a single definition must be made of a given
@@ -100,17 +114,3 @@ core kernel image or in modules.
 If the tracepoint has to be used in kernel modules, an
 EXPORT_TRACEPOINT_SYMBOL_GPL() or EXPORT_TRACEPOINT_SYMBOL() can be
 used to export the defined tracepoints.
-
-* Probe / tracepoint example
-
-See the example provided in samples/tracepoints
-
-Compile them with your kernel.  They are built during 'make' (not
-'make modules') when CONFIG_SAMPLE_TRACEPOINTS=m.
-
-Run, as root :
-modprobe tracepoint-sample (insmod order is not important)
-modprobe tracepoint-probe-sample
-cat /proc/tracepoint-sample (returns an expected error)
-rmmod tracepoint-sample tracepoint-probe-sample
-dmesg
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.txt b/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d9c3e682312c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+            Uprobe-tracer: Uprobe-based Event Tracing
+            =========================================
+
+           Documentation written by Srikar Dronamraju
+
+
+Overview
+--------
+Uprobe based trace events are similar to kprobe based trace events.
+To enable this feature, build your kernel with CONFIG_UPROBE_EVENT=y.
+
+Similar to the kprobe-event tracer, this doesn't need to be activated via
+current_tracer. Instead of that, add probe points via
+/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/uprobe_events, and enable it via
+/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/uprobes/<EVENT>/enabled.
+
+However unlike kprobe-event tracer, the uprobe event interface expects the
+user to calculate the offset of the probepoint in the object.
+
+Synopsis of uprobe_tracer
+-------------------------
+  p[:[GRP/]EVENT] PATH:SYMBOL[+offs] [FETCHARGS] : Set a uprobe
+  r[:[GRP/]EVENT] PATH:SYMBOL[+offs] [FETCHARGS] : Set a return uprobe (uretprobe)
+  -:[GRP/]EVENT                                  : Clear uprobe or uretprobe event
+
+  GRP           : Group name. If omitted, "uprobes" is the default value.
+  EVENT         : Event name. If omitted, the event name is generated based
+                  on SYMBOL+offs.
+  PATH          : Path to an executable or a library.
+  SYMBOL[+offs] : Symbol+offset where the probe is inserted.
+
+  FETCHARGS     : Arguments. Each probe can have up to 128 args.
+   %REG         : Fetch register REG
+
+Event Profiling
+---------------
+You can check the total number of probe hits and probe miss-hits via
+/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/uprobe_profile.
+The first column is event name, the second is the number of probe hits,
+the third is the number of probe miss-hits.
+
+Usage examples
+--------------
+ * Add a probe as a new uprobe event, write a new definition to uprobe_events
+as below: (sets a uprobe at an offset of 0x4245c0 in the executable /bin/bash)
+
+    echo 'p: /bin/bash:0x4245c0' > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/uprobe_events
+
+ * Add a probe as a new uretprobe event:
+
+    echo 'r: /bin/bash:0x4245c0' > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/uprobe_events
+
+ * Unset registered event:
+
+    echo '-:bash_0x4245c0' >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/uprobe_events
+
+ * Print out the events that are registered:
+
+    cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/uprobe_events
+
+ * Clear all events:
+
+    echo > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/uprobe_events
+
+Following example shows how to dump the instruction pointer and %ax register
+at the probed text address. Probe zfree function in /bin/zsh:
+
+    # cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/
+    # cat /proc/`pgrep zsh`/maps | grep /bin/zsh | grep r-xp
+    00400000-0048a000 r-xp 00000000 08:03 130904 /bin/zsh
+    # objdump -T /bin/zsh | grep -w zfree
+    0000000000446420 g    DF .text  0000000000000012  Base        zfree
+
+  0x46420 is the offset of zfree in object /bin/zsh that is loaded at
+  0x00400000. Hence the command to uprobe would be:
+
+    # echo 'p:zfree_entry /bin/zsh:0x46420 %ip %ax' > uprobe_events
+
+  And the same for the uretprobe would be:
+
+    # echo 'r:zfree_exit /bin/zsh:0x46420 %ip %ax' >> uprobe_events
+
+Please note: User has to explicitly calculate the offset of the probe-point
+in the object. We can see the events that are registered by looking at the
+uprobe_events file.
+
+    # cat uprobe_events
+    p:uprobes/zfree_entry /bin/zsh:0x00046420 arg1=%ip arg2=%ax
+    r:uprobes/zfree_exit /bin/zsh:0x00046420 arg1=%ip arg2=%ax
+
+Format of events can be seen by viewing the file events/uprobes/zfree_entry/format
+
+    # cat events/uprobes/zfree_entry/format
+    name: zfree_entry
+    ID: 922
+    format:
+         field:unsigned short common_type;         offset:0;  size:2; signed:0;
+         field:unsigned char common_flags;         offset:2;  size:1; signed:0;
+         field:unsigned char common_preempt_count; offset:3;  size:1; signed:0;
+         field:int common_pid;                     offset:4;  size:4; signed:1;
+         field:int common_padding;                 offset:8;  size:4; signed:1;
+
+         field:unsigned long __probe_ip;           offset:12; size:4; signed:0;
+         field:u32 arg1;                           offset:16; size:4; signed:0;
+         field:u32 arg2;                           offset:20; size:4; signed:0;
+
+    print fmt: "(%lx) arg1=%lx arg2=%lx", REC->__probe_ip, REC->arg1, REC->arg2
+
+Right after definition, each event is disabled by default. For tracing these
+events, you need to enable it by:
+
+    # echo 1 > events/uprobes/enable
+
+Lets disable the event after sleeping for some time.
+
+    # sleep 20
+    # echo 0 > events/uprobes/enable
+
+And you can see the traced information via /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace.
+
+    # cat trace
+    # tracer: nop
+    #
+    #           TASK-PID    CPU#    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
+    #              | |       |          |         |
+                 zsh-24842 [006] 258544.995456: zfree_entry: (0x446420) arg1=446420 arg2=79
+                 zsh-24842 [007] 258545.000270: zfree_exit:  (0x446540 <- 0x446420) arg1=446540 arg2=0
+                 zsh-24842 [002] 258545.043929: zfree_entry: (0x446420) arg1=446420 arg2=79
+                 zsh-24842 [004] 258547.046129: zfree_exit:  (0x446540 <- 0x446420) arg1=446540 arg2=0
+
+Output shows us uprobe was triggered for a pid 24842 with ip being 0x446420
+and contents of ax register being 79. And uretprobe was triggered with ip at
+0x446540 with counterpart function entry at 0x446420.
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/URB.txt b/Documentation/usb/URB.txt
index 8ffce746d496..50da0d455444 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/URB.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/URB.txt
@@ -168,18 +168,39 @@ that if the completion handler or anyone else tries to resubmit it
 they will get a -EPERM error.  Thus you can be sure that when
 usb_kill_urb() returns, the URB is totally idle.
 
+There is a lifetime issue to consider.  An URB may complete at any
+time, and the completion handler may free the URB.  If this happens
+while usb_unlink_urb or usb_kill_urb is running, it will cause a
+memory-access violation.  The driver is responsible for avoiding this,
+which often means some sort of lock will be needed to prevent the URB
+from being deallocated while it is still in use.
+
+On the other hand, since usb_unlink_urb may end up calling the
+completion handler, the handler must not take any lock that is held
+when usb_unlink_urb is invoked.  The general solution to this problem
+is to increment the URB's reference count while holding the lock, then
+drop the lock and call usb_unlink_urb or usb_kill_urb, and then
+decrement the URB's reference count.  You increment the reference
+count by calling
+
+	struct urb *usb_get_urb(struct urb *urb)
+
+(ignore the return value; it is the same as the argument) and
+decrement the reference count by calling usb_free_urb.  Of course,
+none of this is necessary if there's no danger of the URB being freed
+by the completion handler.
+
 
 1.7. What about the completion handler?
 
 The handler is of the following type:
 
-	typedef void (*usb_complete_t)(struct urb *, struct pt_regs *)
+	typedef void (*usb_complete_t)(struct urb *)
 
-I.e., it gets the URB that caused the completion call, plus the
-register values at the time of the corresponding interrupt (if any).
-In the completion handler, you should have a look at urb->status to
-detect any USB errors. Since the context parameter is included in the URB,
-you can pass information to the completion handler. 
+I.e., it gets the URB that caused the completion call. In the completion
+handler, you should have a look at urb->status to detect any USB errors.
+Since the context parameter is included in the URB, you can pass
+information to the completion handler.
 
 Note that even when an error (or unlink) is reported, data may have been
 transferred.  That's because USB transfers are packetized; it might take
@@ -188,12 +209,12 @@ have transferred successfully before the completion was called.
 
 
 NOTE:  ***** WARNING *****
-NEVER SLEEP IN A COMPLETION HANDLER.  These are normally called
-during hardware interrupt processing.  If you can, defer substantial
-work to a tasklet (bottom half) to keep system latencies low.  You'll
-probably need to use spinlocks to protect data structures you manipulate
-in completion handlers.
+NEVER SLEEP IN A COMPLETION HANDLER.  These are often called in atomic
+context.
 
+In the current kernel, completion handlers run with local interrupts
+disabled, but in the future this will be changed, so don't assume that
+local IRQs are always disabled inside completion handlers.
 
 1.8. How to do isochronous (ISO) transfers?
 
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt b/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt
index 7b590edae145..1d02c01d1c7c 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Please pick something while reading :)
       none
 
     - primary handler of the EP-interrupt
-      reads the event and tries to process it. Everything that requries
+      reads the event and tries to process it. Everything that requires
       sleeping is handed over to the Thread. The event is saved in an
       per-endpoint data-structure.
       We probably have to pay attention not to process events once we
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/error-codes.txt b/Documentation/usb/error-codes.txt
index b3f606b81a03..9c3eb845ebe5 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/error-codes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/error-codes.txt
@@ -21,6 +21,8 @@ Non-USB-specific:
 
 USB-specific:
 
+-EBUSY		The URB is already active.
+
 -ENODEV		specified USB-device or bus doesn't exist
 
 -ENOENT		specified interface or endpoint does not exist or
@@ -35,9 +37,8 @@ USB-specific:
 		d) ISO: number_of_packets is < 0
 		e) various other cases
 
--EAGAIN		a) specified ISO start frame too early
-		b) (using ISO-ASAP) too much scheduled for the future
-		   wait some time and try again.
+-EXDEV		ISO: URB_ISO_ASAP wasn't specified and all the frames
+		the URB would be scheduled in have already expired.
 
 -EFBIG		Host controller driver can't schedule that many ISO frames.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt b/Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..eaaaea019fc7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+*How FunctionFS works*
+
+From kernel point of view it is just a composite function with some
+unique behaviour.  It may be added to an USB configuration only after
+the user space driver has registered by writing descriptors and
+strings (the user space program has to provide the same information
+that kernel level composite functions provide when they are added to
+the configuration).
+
+This in particular means that the composite initialisation functions
+may not be in init section (ie. may not use the __init tag).
+
+From user space point of view it is a file system which when
+mounted provides an "ep0" file.  User space driver need to
+write descriptors and strings to that file.  It does not need
+to worry about endpoints, interfaces or strings numbers but
+simply provide descriptors such as if the function was the
+only one (endpoints and strings numbers starting from one and
+interface numbers starting from zero).  The FunctionFS changes
+them as needed also handling situation when numbers differ in
+different configurations.
+
+When descriptors and strings are written "ep#" files appear
+(one for each declared endpoint) which handle communication on
+a single endpoint.  Again, FunctionFS takes care of the real
+numbers and changing of the configuration (which means that
+"ep1" file may be really mapped to (say) endpoint 3 (and when
+configuration changes to (say) endpoint 2)).  "ep0" is used
+for receiving events and handling setup requests.
+
+When all files are closed the function disables itself.
+
+What I also want to mention is that the FunctionFS is designed in such
+a way that it is possible to mount it several times so in the end
+a gadget could use several FunctionFS functions. The idea is that
+each FunctionFS instance is identified by the device name used
+when mounting.
+
+One can imagine a gadget that has an Ethernet, MTP and HID interfaces
+where the last two are implemented via FunctionFS.  On user space
+level it would look like this:
+
+$ insmod g_ffs.ko idVendor=<ID> iSerialNumber=<string> functions=mtp,hid
+$ mkdir /dev/ffs-mtp && mount -t functionfs mtp /dev/ffs-mtp
+$ ( cd /dev/ffs-mtp && mtp-daemon ) &
+$ mkdir /dev/ffs-hid && mount -t functionfs hid /dev/ffs-hid
+$ ( cd /dev/ffs-hid && hid-daemon ) &
+
+On kernel level the gadget checks ffs_data->dev_name to identify
+whether it's FunctionFS designed for MTP ("mtp") or HID ("hid").
+
+If no "functions" module parameters is supplied, the driver accepts
+just one function with any name.
+
+When "functions" module parameter is supplied, only functions
+with listed names are accepted. In particular, if the "functions"
+parameter's value is just a one-element list, then the behaviour
+is similar to when there is no "functions" at all; however,
+only a function with the specified name is accepted.
+
+The gadget is registered only after all the declared function
+filesystems have been mounted and USB descriptors of all functions
+have been written to their ep0's.
+
+Conversely, the gadget is unregistered after the first USB function
+closes its endpoints.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8ec2a67c39b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,384 @@
+
+
+
+
+		Linux USB gadget configured through configfs
+
+
+			     25th April 2013
+
+
+
+
+Overview
+========
+
+A USB Linux Gadget is a device which has a UDC (USB Device Controller) and can
+be connected to a USB Host to extend it with additional functions like a serial
+port or a mass storage capability.
+
+A gadget is seen by its host as a set of configurations, each of which contains
+a number of interfaces which, from the gadget's perspective, are known as
+functions, each function representing e.g. a serial connection or a SCSI disk.
+
+Linux provides a number of functions for gadgets to use.
+
+Creating a gadget means deciding what configurations there will be
+and which functions each configuration will provide.
+
+Configfs (please see Documentation/filesystems/configfs/*) lends itslef nicely
+for the purpose of telling the kernel about the above mentioned decision.
+This document is about how to do it.
+
+It also describes how configfs integration into gadget is designed.
+
+
+
+
+Requirements
+============
+
+In order for this to work configfs must be available, so CONFIGFS_FS must be
+'y' or 'm' in .config. As of this writing USB_LIBCOMPOSITE selects CONFIGFS_FS.
+
+
+
+
+Usage
+=====
+
+(The original post describing the first function
+made available through configfs can be seen here:
+http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-usb/msg76388.html)
+
+$ modprobe libcomposite
+$ mount none $CONFIGFS_HOME -t configfs
+
+where CONFIGFS_HOME is the mount point for configfs
+
+1. Creating the gadgets
+-----------------------
+
+For each gadget to be created its corresponding directory must be created:
+
+$ mkdir $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/<gadget name>
+
+e.g.:
+
+$ mkdir $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/g1
+
+...
+...
+...
+
+$ cd $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/g1
+
+Each gadget needs to have its vendor id <VID> and product id <PID> specified:
+
+$ echo <VID> > idVendor
+$ echo <PID> > idProduct
+
+A gadget also needs its serial number, manufacturer and product strings.
+In order to have a place to store them, a strings subdirectory must be created
+for each language, e.g.:
+
+$ mkdir strings/0x409
+
+Then the strings can be specified:
+
+$ echo <serial number> > strings/0x409/serialnumber
+$ echo <manufacturer> > strings/0x409/manufacturer
+$ echo <product> > strings/0x409/product
+
+2. Creating the configurations
+------------------------------
+
+Each gadget will consist of a number of configurations, their corresponding
+directories must be created:
+
+$ mkdir configs/<name>.<number>
+
+where <name> can be any string which is legal in a filesystem and the
+<numebr> is the configuration's number, e.g.:
+
+$ mkdir configs/c.1
+
+...
+...
+...
+
+Each configuration also needs its strings, so a subdirectory must be created
+for each language, e.g.:
+
+$ mkdir configs/c.1/strings/0x409
+
+Then the configuration string can be specified:
+
+$ echo <configuration> > configs/c.1/strings/0x409/configuration
+
+Some attributes can also be set for a configuration, e.g.:
+
+$ echo 120 > configs/c.1/MaxPower
+
+3. Creating the functions
+-------------------------
+
+The gadget will provide some functions, for each function its corresponding
+directory must be created:
+
+$ mkdir functions/<name>.<instance name>
+
+where <name> corresponds to one of allowed function names and instance name
+is an arbitrary string allowed in a filesystem, e.g.:
+
+$ mkdir functions/ncm.usb0 # usb_f_ncm.ko gets loaded with request_module()
+
+...
+...
+...
+
+Each function provides its specific set of attributes, with either read-only
+or read-write access. Where applicable they need to be written to as
+appropriate.
+Please refer to Documentation/ABI/*/configfs-usb-gadget* for more information.
+
+4. Associating the functions with their configurations
+------------------------------------------------------
+
+At this moment a number of gadgets is created, each of which has a number of
+configurations specified and a number of functions available. What remains
+is specifying which function is available in which configuration (the same
+function can be used in multiple configurations). This is achieved with
+creating symbolic links:
+
+$ ln -s functions/<name>.<instance name> configs/<name>.<number>
+
+e.g.:
+
+$ ln -s functions/ncm.usb0 configs/c.1
+
+...
+...
+...
+
+5. Enabling the gadget
+----------------------
+
+All the above steps serve the purpose of composing the gadget of
+configurations and functions.
+
+An example directory structure might look like this:
+
+.
+./strings
+./strings/0x409
+./strings/0x409/serialnumber
+./strings/0x409/product
+./strings/0x409/manufacturer
+./configs
+./configs/c.1
+./configs/c.1/ncm.usb0 -> ../../../../usb_gadget/g1/functions/ncm.usb0
+./configs/c.1/strings
+./configs/c.1/strings/0x409
+./configs/c.1/strings/0x409/configuration
+./configs/c.1/bmAttributes
+./configs/c.1/MaxPower
+./functions
+./functions/ncm.usb0
+./functions/ncm.usb0/ifname
+./functions/ncm.usb0/qmult
+./functions/ncm.usb0/host_addr
+./functions/ncm.usb0/dev_addr
+./UDC
+./bcdUSB
+./bcdDevice
+./idProduct
+./idVendor
+./bMaxPacketSize0
+./bDeviceProtocol
+./bDeviceSubClass
+./bDeviceClass
+
+
+Such a gadget must be finally enabled so that the USB host can enumerate it.
+In order to enable the gadget it must be bound to a UDC (USB Device Controller).
+
+$ echo <udc name> > UDC
+
+where <udc name> is one of those found in /sys/class/udc/*
+e.g.:
+
+$ echo s3c-hsotg > UDC
+
+
+6. Disabling the gadget
+-----------------------
+
+$ echo "" > UDC
+
+7. Cleaning up
+--------------
+
+Remove functions from configurations:
+
+$ rm configs/<config name>.<number>/<function>
+
+where <config name>.<number> specify the configuration and <function> is
+a symlink to a function being removed from the configuration, e.g.:
+
+$ rm configfs/c.1/ncm.usb0
+
+...
+...
+...
+
+Remove strings directories in configurations
+
+$ rmdir configs/<config name>.<number>/strings/<lang>
+
+e.g.:
+
+$ rmdir configs/c.1/strings/0x409
+
+...
+...
+...
+
+and remove the configurations
+
+$ rmdir configs/<config name>.<number>
+
+e.g.:
+
+rmdir configs/c.1
+
+...
+...
+...
+
+Remove functions (function modules are not unloaded, though)
+
+$ rmdir functions/<name>.<instance name>
+
+e.g.:
+
+$ rmdir functions/ncm.usb0
+
+...
+...
+...
+
+Remove strings directories in the gadget
+
+$ rmdir strings/<lang>
+
+e.g.:
+
+$ rmdir strings/0x409
+
+and finally remove the gadget:
+
+$ cd ..
+$ rmdir <gadget name>
+
+e.g.:
+
+$ rmdir g1
+
+
+
+
+Implementation design
+=====================
+
+Below the idea of how configfs works is presented.
+In configfs there are items and groups, both represented as directories.
+The difference between an item and a group is that a group can contain
+other groups. In the picture below only an item is shown.
+Both items and groups can have attributes, which are represented as files.
+The user can create and remove directories, but cannot remove files,
+which can be read-only or read-write, depending on what they represent.
+
+The filesystem part of configfs operates on config_items/groups and
+configfs_attributes which are generic and of the same type for all
+configured elements. However, they are embedded in usage-specific
+larger structures. In the picture below there is a "cs" which contains
+a config_item and an "sa" which contains a configfs_attribute.
+
+The filesystem view would be like this:
+
+./
+./cs        (directory)
+   |
+   +--sa    (file)
+   |
+   .
+   .
+   .
+
+Whenever a user reads/writes the "sa" file, a function is called
+which accepts a struct config_item and a struct configfs_attribute.
+In the said function the "cs" and "sa" are retrieved using the well
+known container_of technique and an appropriate sa's function (show or
+store) is called and passed the "cs" and a character buffer. The "show"
+is for displaying the file's contents (copy data from the cs to the
+buffer), while the "store" is for modifying the file's contents (copy data
+from the buffer to the cs), but it is up to the implementer of the
+two functions to decide what they actually do.
+
+typedef struct configured_structure cs;
+typedef struc specific_attribute sa;
+
+                                       sa
+                       +----------------------------------+
+        cs             |  (*show)(cs *, buffer);          |
++-----------------+    |  (*store)(cs *, buffer, length); |
+|                 |    |                                  |
+| +-------------+ |    |       +------------------+       |
+| | struct      |-|----|------>|struct            |       |
+| | config_item | |    |       |configfs_attribute|       |
+| +-------------+ |    |       +------------------+       |
+|                 |    +----------------------------------+
+| data to be set  |                .
+|                 |                .
++-----------------+                .
+
+The file names are decided by the config item/group designer, while
+the directories in general can be named at will. A group can have
+a number of its default sub-groups created automatically.
+
+For more information on configfs please see
+Documentation/filesystems/configfs/*.
+
+The concepts described above translate to USB gadgets like this:
+
+1. A gadget has its config group, which has some attributes (idVendor,
+idProduct etc) and default sub-groups (configs, functions, strings).
+Writing to the attributes causes the information to be stored in
+appropriate locations. In the configs, functions and strings sub-groups
+a user can create their sub-groups to represent configurations, functions,
+and groups of strings in a given language.
+
+2. The user creates configurations and functions, in the configurations
+creates symbolic links to functions. This information is used when the
+gadget's UDC attribute is written to, which means binding the gadget
+to the UDC. The code in drivers/usb/gadget/configfs.c iterates over
+all configurations, and in each configuration it iterates over all
+functions and binds them. This way the whole gadget is bound.
+
+3. The file drivers/usb/gadget/configfs.c contains code for
+
+	- gadget's config_group
+	- gadget's default groups (configs, functions, strings)
+	- associating functions with configurations (symlinks)
+
+4. Each USB function naturally has its own view of what it wants
+configured, so config_groups for particular functions are defined
+in the functions implementation files drivers/usb/gadget/f_*.c.
+
+5. Funciton's code is written in such a way that it uses
+
+usb_get_function_instance(), which, in turn, calls request_module.
+So, provided that modprobe works, modules for particular functions
+are loaded automatically. Please note that the converse is not true:
+after a gadget is disabled and torn down, the modules remain loaded.
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/hotplug.txt b/Documentation/usb/hotplug.txt
index 4c945716a660..6424b130485c 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/hotplug.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/hotplug.txt
@@ -33,9 +33,9 @@ you get the best hotplugging when you configure a highly modular system.
 
 KERNEL HOTPLUG HELPER (/sbin/hotplug)
 
-When you compile with CONFIG_HOTPLUG, you get a new kernel parameter:
-/proc/sys/kernel/hotplug, which normally holds the pathname "/sbin/hotplug".
-That parameter names a program which the kernel may invoke at various times.
+There is a kernel parameter: /proc/sys/kernel/hotplug, which normally
+holds the pathname "/sbin/hotplug".  That parameter names a program
+which the kernel may invoke at various times.
 
 The /sbin/hotplug program can be invoked by any subsystem as part of its
 reaction to a configuration change, from a thread in that subsystem.
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt b/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..59063ad7a60d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+* Overview
+
+  Mass Storage Gadget (or MSG) acts as a USB Mass Storage device,
+  appearing to the host as a disk or a CD-ROM drive.  It supports
+  multiple logical units (LUNs).  Backing storage for each LUN is
+  provided by a regular file or a block device, access can be limited
+  to read-only, and gadget can indicate that it is removable and/or
+  CD-ROM (the latter implies read-only access).
+
+  Its requirements are modest; only a bulk-in and a bulk-out endpoint
+  are needed.  The memory requirement amounts to two 16K buffers.
+  Support is included for full-speed, high-speed and SuperSpeed
+  operation.
+
+  Note that the driver is slightly non-portable in that it assumes
+  a single memory/DMA buffer will be useable for bulk-in and bulk-out
+  endpoints.  With most device controllers this is not an issue, but
+  there may be some with hardware restrictions that prevent a buffer
+  from being used by more than one endpoint.
+
+  This document describes how to use the gadget from user space, its
+  relation to mass storage function (or MSF) and different gadgets
+  using it, and how it differs from File Storage Gadget (or FSG)
+  (which is no longer included in Linux).  It will talk only briefly
+  about how to use MSF within composite gadgets.
+
+* Module parameters
+
+  The mass storage gadget accepts the following mass storage specific
+  module parameters:
+
+  - file=filename[,filename...]
+
+    This parameter lists paths to files or block devices used for
+    backing storage for each logical unit.  There may be at most
+    FSG_MAX_LUNS (8) LUNs set.  If more files are specified, they will
+    be silently ignored.  See also “luns” parameter.
+
+    *BEWARE* that if a file is used as a backing storage, it may not
+    be modified by any other process.  This is because the host
+    assumes the data does not change without its knowledge.  It may be
+    read, but (if the logical unit is writable) due to buffering on
+    the host side, the contents are not well defined.
+
+    The size of the logical unit will be rounded down to a full
+    logical block.  The logical block size is 2048 bytes for LUNs
+    simulating CD-ROM, block size of the device if the backing file is
+    a block device, or 512 bytes otherwise.
+
+  - removable=b[,b...]
+
+    This parameter specifies whether each logical unit should be
+    removable.  “b” here is either “y”, “Y” or “1” for true or “n”,
+    “N” or “0” for false.
+
+    If this option is set for a logical unit, gadget will accept an
+    “eject” SCSI request (Start/Stop Unit).  When it is sent, the
+    backing file will be closed to simulate ejection and the logical
+    unit will not be mountable by the host until a new backing file is
+    specified by userspace on the device (see “sysfs entries”
+    section).
+
+    If a logical unit is not removable (the default), a backing file
+    must be specified for it with the “file” parameter as the module
+    is loaded.  The same applies if the module is built in, no
+    exceptions.
+
+    The default value of the flag is false, *HOWEVER* it used to be
+    true.  This has been changed to better match File Storage Gadget
+    and because it seems like a saner default after all.  Thus to
+    maintain compatibility with older kernels, it's best to specify
+    the default values.  Also, if one relied on old default, explicit
+    “n” needs to be specified now.
+
+    Note that “removable” means the logical unit's media can be
+    ejected or removed (as is true for a CD-ROM drive or a card
+    reader).  It does *not* mean that the entire gadget can be
+    unplugged from the host; the proper term for that is
+    “hot-unpluggable”.
+
+  - cdrom=b[,b...]
+
+    This parameter specifies whether each logical unit should simulate
+    CD-ROM.  The default is false.
+
+  - ro=b[,b...]
+
+    This parameter specifies whether each logical unit should be
+    reported as read only.  This will prevent host from modifying the
+    backing files.
+
+    Note that if this flag for given logical unit is false but the
+    backing file could not be opened in read/write mode, the gadget
+    will fall back to read only mode anyway.
+
+    The default value for non-CD-ROM logical units is false; for
+    logical units simulating CD-ROM it is forced to true.
+
+  - nofua=b[,b...]
+
+    This parameter specifies whether FUA flag should be ignored in SCSI
+    Write10 and Write12 commands sent to given logical units.
+
+    MS Windows mounts removable storage in “Removal optimised mode” by
+    default.  All the writes to the media are synchronous, which is
+    achieved by setting the FUA (Force Unit Access) bit in SCSI
+    Write(10,12) commands.  This forces each write to wait until the
+    data has actually been written out and prevents I/O requests
+    aggregation in block layer dramatically decreasing performance.
+
+    Note that this may mean that if the device is powered from USB and
+    the user unplugs the device without unmounting it first (which at
+    least some Windows users do), the data may be lost.
+
+    The default value is false.
+
+  - luns=N
+
+    This parameter specifies number of logical units the gadget will
+    have.  It is limited by FSG_MAX_LUNS (8) and higher value will be
+    capped.
+
+    If this parameter is provided, and the number of files specified
+    in “file” argument is greater then the value of “luns”, all excess
+    files will be ignored.
+
+    If this parameter is not present, the number of logical units will
+    be deduced from the number of files specified in the “file”
+    parameter.  If the file parameter is missing as well, one is
+    assumed.
+
+  - stall=b
+
+    Specifies whether the gadget is allowed to halt bulk endpoints.
+    The default is determined according to the type of USB device
+    controller, but usually true.
+
+  In addition to the above, the gadget also accepts the following
+  parameters defined by the composite framework (they are common to
+  all composite gadgets so just a quick listing):
+
+  - idVendor      -- USB Vendor ID (16 bit integer)
+  - idProduct     -- USB Product ID (16 bit integer)
+  - bcdDevice     -- USB Device version (BCD) (16 bit integer)
+  - iManufacturer -- USB Manufacturer string (string)
+  - iProduct      -- USB Product string (string)
+  - iSerialNumber -- SerialNumber string (sting)
+
+* sysfs entries
+
+  For each logical unit, the gadget creates a directory in the sysfs
+  hierarchy.  Inside of it the following three files are created:
+
+  - file
+
+    When read it returns the path to the backing file for the given
+    logical unit.  If there is no backing file (possible only if the
+    logical unit is removable), the content is empty.
+
+    When written into, it changes the backing file for given logical
+    unit.  This change can be performed even if given logical unit is
+    not specified as removable (but that may look strange to the
+    host).  It may fail, however, if host disallowed medium removal
+    with the Prevent-Allow Medium Removal SCSI command.
+
+  - ro
+
+    Reflects the state of ro flag for the given logical unit.  It can
+    be read any time, and written to when there is no backing file
+    open for given logical unit.
+
+  - nofua
+
+    Reflects the state of nofua flag for given logical unit.  It can
+    be read and written.
+
+  Other then those, as usual, the values of module parameters can be
+  read from /sys/module/g_mass_storage/parameters/* files.
+
+* Other gadgets using mass storage function
+
+  The Mass Storage Gadget uses the Mass Storage Function to handle
+  mass storage protocol.  As a composite function, MSF may be used by
+  other gadgets as well (eg. g_multi and acm_ms).
+
+  All of the information in previous sections are valid for other
+  gadgets using MSF, except that support for mass storage related
+  module parameters may be missing, or the parameters may have
+  a prefix.  To figure out whether any of this is true one needs to
+  consult the gadget's documentation or its source code.
+
+  For examples of how to include mass storage function in gadgets, one
+  may take a look at mass_storage.c, acm_ms.c and multi.c (sorted by
+  complexity).
+
+* Relation to file storage gadget
+
+  The Mass Storage Function and thus the Mass Storage Gadget has been
+  based on the File Storage Gadget.  The difference between the two is
+  that MSG is a composite gadget (ie. uses the composite framework)
+  while file storage gadget was a traditional gadget.  From userspace
+  point of view this distinction does not really matter, but from
+  kernel hacker's point of view, this means that (i) MSG does not
+  duplicate code needed for handling basic USB protocol commands and
+  (ii) MSF can be used in any other composite gadget.
+
+  Because of that, File Storage Gadget has been removed in Linux 3.8.
+  All users need to transition to the Mass Storage Gadget.  The two
+  gadgets behave mostly the same from the outside except:
+
+  1. In FSG the “removable” and “cdrom” module parameters set the flag
+     for all logical units whereas in MSG they accept a list of y/n
+     values for each logical unit.  If one uses only a single logical
+     unit this does not matter, but if there are more, the y/n value
+     needs to be repeated for each logical unit.
+
+  2. FSG's “serial”, “vendor”, “product” and “release” module
+     parameters are handled in MSG by the composite layer's parameters
+     named respectively: “iSerialnumber”, “idVendor”, “idProduct” and
+     “bcdDevice”.
+
+  3. MSG does not support FSG's test mode, thus “transport”,
+     “protocol” and “buflen” FSG's module parameters are not
+     supported.  MSG always uses SCSI protocol with bulk only
+     transport mode and 16 KiB buffers.
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/persist.txt b/Documentation/usb/persist.txt
index 074b159b77c2..35d70eda9ad6 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/persist.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/persist.txt
@@ -155,6 +155,9 @@ If the kernel gets fooled in this way, it's almost certain to cause
 data corruption and to crash your system.  You'll have no one to blame
 but yourself.
 
+For those devices with avoid_reset_quirk attribute being set, persist
+maybe fail because they may morph after reset.
+
 YOU HAVE BEEN WARNED!  USE AT YOUR OWN RISK!
 
 That having been said, most of the time there shouldn't be any trouble
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
index 817df299ea07..1392b61d6ebe 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
@@ -33,6 +33,10 @@ built with CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND enabled (which depends on
 CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME).  System PM support is present only if the kernel
 was built with CONFIG_SUSPEND or CONFIG_HIBERNATION enabled.
 
+(Starting with the 3.10 kernel release, dynamic PM support for USB is
+present whenever the kernel was built with CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME enabled.
+The CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND option has been eliminated.)
+
 
 	What is Remote Wakeup?
 	----------------------
@@ -179,7 +183,8 @@ do:
 
 	modprobe usbcore autosuspend=5
 
-Equivalently, you could add to /etc/modprobe.conf a line saying:
+Equivalently, you could add to a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d
+a line saying:
 
 	options usbcore autosuspend=5
 
@@ -205,10 +210,8 @@ initialized to 5.  (The idle-delay values for already existing devices
 will not be affected.)
 
 Setting the initial default idle-delay to -1 will prevent any
-autosuspend of any USB device.  This is a simple alternative to
-disabling CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND and rebuilding the kernel, and it has the
-added benefit of allowing you to enable autosuspend for selected
-devices.
+autosuspend of any USB device.  This has the benefit of allowing you
+then to enable autosuspend for selected devices.
 
 
 	Warnings
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/proc_usb_info.txt b/Documentation/usb/proc_usb_info.txt
index c9c3f0f5ad7b..98be91982677 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/proc_usb_info.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/proc_usb_info.txt
@@ -54,9 +54,12 @@ it and 002/048 sometime later.
 
 These files can be read as binary data.  The binary data consists
 of first the device descriptor, then the descriptors for each
-configuration of the device.  Multi-byte fields in the device and
-configuration descriptors, but not other descriptors, are converted
-to host endianness by the kernel.  This information is also shown
+configuration of the device.  Multi-byte fields in the device descriptor
+are converted to host endianness by the kernel.  The configuration
+descriptors are in bus endian format! The configuration descriptor
+are wTotalLength bytes apart. If a device returns less configuration
+descriptor data than indicated by wTotalLength there will be a hole in
+the file for the missing bytes.  This information is also shown
 in text form by the /proc/bus/usb/devices file, described later.
 
 These files may also be used to write user-level drivers for the USB
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
index 5335fa8b06eb..c42bb9cd3b43 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
@@ -183,10 +183,10 @@ An input control transfer to get a port status.
 d5ea89a0 3575914555 S Ci:1:001:0 s a3 00 0000 0003 0004 4 <
 d5ea89a0 3575914560 C Ci:1:001:0 0 4 = 01050000
 
-An output bulk transfer to send a SCSI command 0x5E in a 31-byte Bulk wrapper
-to a storage device at address 5:
+An output bulk transfer to send a SCSI command 0x28 (READ_10) in a 31-byte
+Bulk wrapper to a storage device at address 5:
 
-dd65f0e8 4128379752 S Bo:1:005:2 -115 31 = 55534243 5e000000 00000000 00000600 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000
+dd65f0e8 4128379752 S Bo:1:005:2 -115 31 = 55534243 ad000000 00800000 80010a28 20000000 20000040 00000000 000000
 dd65f0e8 4128379808 C Bo:1:005:2 0 31 >
 
 * Raw binary format and API
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf b/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf
index 426ddaaef96f..8b3d43efce90 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf
+++ b/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ COMMAND/ARGS are
 
  get-cdid DEVICE
 
-   Get the device ID associated to the HOST-CHDI we sent with
+   Get the device ID associated to the HOST-CHID we sent with
    'set-chid'. We might not know about it.
 
  set-cc DEVICE
diff --git a/Documentation/vfio.txt b/Documentation/vfio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b9ca02370d46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/vfio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,377 @@
+VFIO - "Virtual Function I/O"[1]
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Many modern system now provide DMA and interrupt remapping facilities
+to help ensure I/O devices behave within the boundaries they've been
+allotted.  This includes x86 hardware with AMD-Vi and Intel VT-d,
+POWER systems with Partitionable Endpoints (PEs) and embedded PowerPC
+systems such as Freescale PAMU.  The VFIO driver is an IOMMU/device
+agnostic framework for exposing direct device access to userspace, in
+a secure, IOMMU protected environment.  In other words, this allows
+safe[2], non-privileged, userspace drivers.
+
+Why do we want that?  Virtual machines often make use of direct device
+access ("device assignment") when configured for the highest possible
+I/O performance.  From a device and host perspective, this simply
+turns the VM into a userspace driver, with the benefits of
+significantly reduced latency, higher bandwidth, and direct use of
+bare-metal device drivers[3].
+
+Some applications, particularly in the high performance computing
+field, also benefit from low-overhead, direct device access from
+userspace.  Examples include network adapters (often non-TCP/IP based)
+and compute accelerators.  Prior to VFIO, these drivers had to either
+go through the full development cycle to become proper upstream
+driver, be maintained out of tree, or make use of the UIO framework,
+which has no notion of IOMMU protection, limited interrupt support,
+and requires root privileges to access things like PCI configuration
+space.
+
+The VFIO driver framework intends to unify these, replacing both the
+KVM PCI specific device assignment code as well as provide a more
+secure, more featureful userspace driver environment than UIO.
+
+Groups, Devices, and IOMMUs
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Devices are the main target of any I/O driver.  Devices typically
+create a programming interface made up of I/O access, interrupts,
+and DMA.  Without going into the details of each of these, DMA is
+by far the most critical aspect for maintaining a secure environment
+as allowing a device read-write access to system memory imposes the
+greatest risk to the overall system integrity.
+
+To help mitigate this risk, many modern IOMMUs now incorporate
+isolation properties into what was, in many cases, an interface only
+meant for translation (ie. solving the addressing problems of devices
+with limited address spaces).  With this, devices can now be isolated
+from each other and from arbitrary memory access, thus allowing
+things like secure direct assignment of devices into virtual machines.
+
+This isolation is not always at the granularity of a single device
+though.  Even when an IOMMU is capable of this, properties of devices,
+interconnects, and IOMMU topologies can each reduce this isolation.
+For instance, an individual device may be part of a larger multi-
+function enclosure.  While the IOMMU may be able to distinguish
+between devices within the enclosure, the enclosure may not require
+transactions between devices to reach the IOMMU.  Examples of this
+could be anything from a multi-function PCI device with backdoors
+between functions to a non-PCI-ACS (Access Control Services) capable
+bridge allowing redirection without reaching the IOMMU.  Topology
+can also play a factor in terms of hiding devices.  A PCIe-to-PCI
+bridge masks the devices behind it, making transaction appear as if
+from the bridge itself.  Obviously IOMMU design plays a major factor
+as well.
+
+Therefore, while for the most part an IOMMU may have device level
+granularity, any system is susceptible to reduced granularity.  The
+IOMMU API therefore supports a notion of IOMMU groups.  A group is
+a set of devices which is isolatable from all other devices in the
+system.  Groups are therefore the unit of ownership used by VFIO.
+
+While the group is the minimum granularity that must be used to
+ensure secure user access, it's not necessarily the preferred
+granularity.  In IOMMUs which make use of page tables, it may be
+possible to share a set of page tables between different groups,
+reducing the overhead both to the platform (reduced TLB thrashing,
+reduced duplicate page tables), and to the user (programming only
+a single set of translations).  For this reason, VFIO makes use of
+a container class, which may hold one or more groups.  A container
+is created by simply opening the /dev/vfio/vfio character device.
+
+On its own, the container provides little functionality, with all
+but a couple version and extension query interfaces locked away.
+The user needs to add a group into the container for the next level
+of functionality.  To do this, the user first needs to identify the
+group associated with the desired device.  This can be done using
+the sysfs links described in the example below.  By unbinding the
+device from the host driver and binding it to a VFIO driver, a new
+VFIO group will appear for the group as /dev/vfio/$GROUP, where
+$GROUP is the IOMMU group number of which the device is a member.
+If the IOMMU group contains multiple devices, each will need to
+be bound to a VFIO driver before operations on the VFIO group
+are allowed (it's also sufficient to only unbind the device from
+host drivers if a VFIO driver is unavailable; this will make the
+group available, but not that particular device).  TBD - interface
+for disabling driver probing/locking a device.
+
+Once the group is ready, it may be added to the container by opening
+the VFIO group character device (/dev/vfio/$GROUP) and using the
+VFIO_GROUP_SET_CONTAINER ioctl, passing the file descriptor of the
+previously opened container file.  If desired and if the IOMMU driver
+supports sharing the IOMMU context between groups, multiple groups may
+be set to the same container.  If a group fails to set to a container
+with existing groups, a new empty container will need to be used
+instead.
+
+With a group (or groups) attached to a container, the remaining
+ioctls become available, enabling access to the VFIO IOMMU interfaces.
+Additionally, it now becomes possible to get file descriptors for each
+device within a group using an ioctl on the VFIO group file descriptor.
+
+The VFIO device API includes ioctls for describing the device, the I/O
+regions and their read/write/mmap offsets on the device descriptor, as
+well as mechanisms for describing and registering interrupt
+notifications.
+
+VFIO Usage Example
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Assume user wants to access PCI device 0000:06:0d.0
+
+$ readlink /sys/bus/pci/devices/0000:06:0d.0/iommu_group
+../../../../kernel/iommu_groups/26
+
+This device is therefore in IOMMU group 26.  This device is on the
+pci bus, therefore the user will make use of vfio-pci to manage the
+group:
+
+# modprobe vfio-pci
+
+Binding this device to the vfio-pci driver creates the VFIO group
+character devices for this group:
+
+$ lspci -n -s 0000:06:0d.0
+06:0d.0 0401: 1102:0002 (rev 08)
+# echo 0000:06:0d.0 > /sys/bus/pci/devices/0000:06:0d.0/driver/unbind
+# echo 1102 0002 > /sys/bus/pci/drivers/vfio-pci/new_id
+
+Now we need to look at what other devices are in the group to free
+it for use by VFIO:
+
+$ ls -l /sys/bus/pci/devices/0000:06:0d.0/iommu_group/devices
+total 0
+lrwxrwxrwx. 1 root root 0 Apr 23 16:13 0000:00:1e.0 ->
+	../../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1e.0
+lrwxrwxrwx. 1 root root 0 Apr 23 16:13 0000:06:0d.0 ->
+	../../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1e.0/0000:06:0d.0
+lrwxrwxrwx. 1 root root 0 Apr 23 16:13 0000:06:0d.1 ->
+	../../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1e.0/0000:06:0d.1
+
+This device is behind a PCIe-to-PCI bridge[4], therefore we also
+need to add device 0000:06:0d.1 to the group following the same
+procedure as above.  Device 0000:00:1e.0 is a bridge that does
+not currently have a host driver, therefore it's not required to
+bind this device to the vfio-pci driver (vfio-pci does not currently
+support PCI bridges).
+
+The final step is to provide the user with access to the group if
+unprivileged operation is desired (note that /dev/vfio/vfio provides
+no capabilities on its own and is therefore expected to be set to
+mode 0666 by the system).
+
+# chown user:user /dev/vfio/26
+
+The user now has full access to all the devices and the iommu for this
+group and can access them as follows:
+
+	int container, group, device, i;
+	struct vfio_group_status group_status =
+					{ .argsz = sizeof(group_status) };
+	struct vfio_iommu_type1_info iommu_info = { .argsz = sizeof(iommu_info) };
+	struct vfio_iommu_type1_dma_map dma_map = { .argsz = sizeof(dma_map) };
+	struct vfio_device_info device_info = { .argsz = sizeof(device_info) };
+
+	/* Create a new container */
+	container = open("/dev/vfio/vfio", O_RDWR);
+
+	if (ioctl(container, VFIO_GET_API_VERSION) != VFIO_API_VERSION)
+		/* Unknown API version */
+
+	if (!ioctl(container, VFIO_CHECK_EXTENSION, VFIO_TYPE1_IOMMU))
+		/* Doesn't support the IOMMU driver we want. */
+
+	/* Open the group */
+	group = open("/dev/vfio/26", O_RDWR);
+
+	/* Test the group is viable and available */
+	ioctl(group, VFIO_GROUP_GET_STATUS, &group_status);
+
+	if (!(group_status.flags & VFIO_GROUP_FLAGS_VIABLE))
+		/* Group is not viable (ie, not all devices bound for vfio) */
+
+	/* Add the group to the container */
+	ioctl(group, VFIO_GROUP_SET_CONTAINER, &container);
+
+	/* Enable the IOMMU model we want */
+	ioctl(container, VFIO_SET_IOMMU, VFIO_TYPE1_IOMMU);
+
+	/* Get addition IOMMU info */
+	ioctl(container, VFIO_IOMMU_GET_INFO, &iommu_info);
+
+	/* Allocate some space and setup a DMA mapping */
+	dma_map.vaddr = mmap(0, 1024 * 1024, PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE,
+			     MAP_PRIVATE | MAP_ANONYMOUS, 0, 0);
+	dma_map.size = 1024 * 1024;
+	dma_map.iova = 0; /* 1MB starting at 0x0 from device view */
+	dma_map.flags = VFIO_DMA_MAP_FLAG_READ | VFIO_DMA_MAP_FLAG_WRITE;
+
+	ioctl(container, VFIO_IOMMU_MAP_DMA, &dma_map);
+
+	/* Get a file descriptor for the device */
+	device = ioctl(group, VFIO_GROUP_GET_DEVICE_FD, "0000:06:0d.0");
+
+	/* Test and setup the device */
+	ioctl(device, VFIO_DEVICE_GET_INFO, &device_info);
+
+	for (i = 0; i < device_info.num_regions; i++) {
+		struct vfio_region_info reg = { .argsz = sizeof(reg) };
+
+		reg.index = i;
+
+		ioctl(device, VFIO_DEVICE_GET_REGION_INFO, &reg);
+
+		/* Setup mappings... read/write offsets, mmaps
+		 * For PCI devices, config space is a region */
+	}
+
+	for (i = 0; i < device_info.num_irqs; i++) {
+		struct vfio_irq_info irq = { .argsz = sizeof(irq) };
+
+		irq.index = i;
+
+		ioctl(device, VFIO_DEVICE_GET_IRQ_INFO, &irq);
+
+		/* Setup IRQs... eventfds, VFIO_DEVICE_SET_IRQS */
+	}
+
+	/* Gratuitous device reset and go... */
+	ioctl(device, VFIO_DEVICE_RESET);
+
+VFIO User API
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Please see include/linux/vfio.h for complete API documentation.
+
+VFIO bus driver API
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+VFIO bus drivers, such as vfio-pci make use of only a few interfaces
+into VFIO core.  When devices are bound and unbound to the driver,
+the driver should call vfio_add_group_dev() and vfio_del_group_dev()
+respectively:
+
+extern int vfio_add_group_dev(struct iommu_group *iommu_group,
+                              struct device *dev,
+                              const struct vfio_device_ops *ops,
+                              void *device_data);
+
+extern void *vfio_del_group_dev(struct device *dev);
+
+vfio_add_group_dev() indicates to the core to begin tracking the
+specified iommu_group and register the specified dev as owned by
+a VFIO bus driver.  The driver provides an ops structure for callbacks
+similar to a file operations structure:
+
+struct vfio_device_ops {
+	int	(*open)(void *device_data);
+	void	(*release)(void *device_data);
+	ssize_t	(*read)(void *device_data, char __user *buf,
+			size_t count, loff_t *ppos);
+	ssize_t	(*write)(void *device_data, const char __user *buf,
+			 size_t size, loff_t *ppos);
+	long	(*ioctl)(void *device_data, unsigned int cmd,
+			 unsigned long arg);
+	int	(*mmap)(void *device_data, struct vm_area_struct *vma);
+};
+
+Each function is passed the device_data that was originally registered
+in the vfio_add_group_dev() call above.  This allows the bus driver
+an easy place to store its opaque, private data.  The open/release
+callbacks are issued when a new file descriptor is created for a
+device (via VFIO_GROUP_GET_DEVICE_FD).  The ioctl interface provides
+a direct pass through for VFIO_DEVICE_* ioctls.  The read/write/mmap
+interfaces implement the device region access defined by the device's
+own VFIO_DEVICE_GET_REGION_INFO ioctl.
+
+
+PPC64 sPAPR implementation note
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+This implementation has some specifics:
+
+1) Only one IOMMU group per container is supported as an IOMMU group
+represents the minimal entity which isolation can be guaranteed for and
+groups are allocated statically, one per a Partitionable Endpoint (PE)
+(PE is often a PCI domain but not always).
+
+2) The hardware supports so called DMA windows - the PCI address range
+within which DMA transfer is allowed, any attempt to access address space
+out of the window leads to the whole PE isolation.
+
+3) PPC64 guests are paravirtualized but not fully emulated. There is an API
+to map/unmap pages for DMA, and it normally maps 1..32 pages per call and
+currently there is no way to reduce the number of calls. In order to make things
+faster, the map/unmap handling has been implemented in real mode which provides
+an excellent performance which has limitations such as inability to do
+locked pages accounting in real time.
+
+So 3 additional ioctls have been added:
+
+	VFIO_IOMMU_SPAPR_TCE_GET_INFO - returns the size and the start
+		of the DMA window on the PCI bus.
+
+	VFIO_IOMMU_ENABLE - enables the container. The locked pages accounting
+		is done at this point. This lets user first to know what
+		the DMA window is and adjust rlimit before doing any real job.
+
+	VFIO_IOMMU_DISABLE - disables the container.
+
+
+The code flow from the example above should be slightly changed:
+
+	.....
+	/* Add the group to the container */
+	ioctl(group, VFIO_GROUP_SET_CONTAINER, &container);
+
+	/* Enable the IOMMU model we want */
+	ioctl(container, VFIO_SET_IOMMU, VFIO_SPAPR_TCE_IOMMU)
+
+	/* Get addition sPAPR IOMMU info */
+	vfio_iommu_spapr_tce_info spapr_iommu_info;
+	ioctl(container, VFIO_IOMMU_SPAPR_TCE_GET_INFO, &spapr_iommu_info);
+
+	if (ioctl(container, VFIO_IOMMU_ENABLE))
+		/* Cannot enable container, may be low rlimit */
+
+	/* Allocate some space and setup a DMA mapping */
+	dma_map.vaddr = mmap(0, 1024 * 1024, PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE,
+			     MAP_PRIVATE | MAP_ANONYMOUS, 0, 0);
+
+	dma_map.size = 1024 * 1024;
+	dma_map.iova = 0; /* 1MB starting at 0x0 from device view */
+	dma_map.flags = VFIO_DMA_MAP_FLAG_READ | VFIO_DMA_MAP_FLAG_WRITE;
+
+	/* Check here is .iova/.size are within DMA window from spapr_iommu_info */
+
+	ioctl(container, VFIO_IOMMU_MAP_DMA, &dma_map);
+	.....
+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[1] VFIO was originally an acronym for "Virtual Function I/O" in its
+initial implementation by Tom Lyon while as Cisco.  We've since
+outgrown the acronym, but it's catchy.
+
+[2] "safe" also depends upon a device being "well behaved".  It's
+possible for multi-function devices to have backdoors between
+functions and even for single function devices to have alternative
+access to things like PCI config space through MMIO registers.  To
+guard against the former we can include additional precautions in the
+IOMMU driver to group multi-function PCI devices together
+(iommu=group_mf).  The latter we can't prevent, but the IOMMU should
+still provide isolation.  For PCI, SR-IOV Virtual Functions are the
+best indicator of "well behaved", as these are designed for
+virtualization usage models.
+
+[3] As always there are trade-offs to virtual machine device
+assignment that are beyond the scope of VFIO.  It's expected that
+future IOMMU technologies will reduce some, but maybe not all, of
+these trade-offs.
+
+[4] In this case the device is below a PCI bridge, so transactions
+from either function of the device are indistinguishable to the iommu:
+
+-[0000:00]-+-1e.0-[06]--+-0d.0
+                        \-0d.1
+
+00:1e.0 PCI bridge: Intel Corporation 82801 PCI Bridge (rev 90)
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/4CCs.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/4CCs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..41241af1ebfe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/4CCs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+Guidelines for Linux4Linux pixel format 4CCs
+============================================
+
+Guidelines for Video4Linux 4CC codes defined using v4l2_fourcc() are
+specified in this document. First of the characters defines the nature of
+the pixel format, compression and colour space. The interpretation of the
+other three characters depends on the first one.
+
+Existing 4CCs may not obey these guidelines.
+
+Formats
+=======
+
+Raw bayer
+---------
+
+The following first characters are used by raw bayer formats:
+
+	B: raw bayer, uncompressed
+	b: raw bayer, DPCM compressed
+	a: A-law compressed
+	u: u-law compressed
+
+2nd character: pixel order
+	B: BGGR
+	G: GBRG
+	g: GRBG
+	R: RGGB
+
+3rd character: uncompressed bits-per-pixel 0--9, A--
+
+4th character: compressed bits-per-pixel 0--9, A--
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828
index 7b59e953c4bf..55a21deab7db 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
   0 -> Unknown board                            (au0828)
-  1 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q                        (au0828)        [2040:7200,2040:7210,2040:7217,2040:721b,2040:721e,2040:721f,2040:7280,0fd9:0008,2040:7260,2040:7213]
+  1 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q                        (au0828)        [2040:7200,2040:7210,2040:7217,2040:721b,2040:721e,2040:721f,2040:7280,0fd9:0008,2040:7260,2040:7213,2040:7270]
   2 -> Hauppauge HVR850                         (au0828)        [2040:7240]
   3 -> DViCO FusionHDTV USB                     (au0828)        [0fe9:d620]
   4 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q rev xxF8               (au0828)        [2040:7201,2040:7211,2040:7281]
-  5 -> Hauppauge Woodbury                       (au0828)        [2040:8200]
+  5 -> Hauppauge Woodbury                       (au0828)        [05e1:0480,2040:8200]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
index b753906c7183..f14475011fea 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
@@ -159,3 +159,7 @@
 158 -> Geovision GV-800(S) (slave)                         [800b:763d,800c:763d,800d:763d]
 159 -> ProVideo PV183                                      [1830:1540,1831:1540,1832:1540,1833:1540,1834:1540,1835:1540,1836:1540,1837:1540]
 160 -> Tongwei Video Technology TD-3116                    [f200:3116]
+161 -> Aposonic W-DVR                                      [0279:0228]
+162 -> Adlink MPG24
+163 -> Bt848 Capture 14MHz
+164 -> CyberVision CV06 (SV)
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
index 23584d0c6a75..9f056d512e35 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
  17 -> NetUP Dual DVB-S2 CI                                [1b55:2a2c]
  18 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1270                             [0070:2211]
  19 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1275                             [0070:2215,0070:221d,0070:22f2]
- 20 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1255                             [0070:2251,0070:2259,0070:22f1]
+ 20 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1255                             [0070:2251,0070:22f1]
  21 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1210                             [0070:2291,0070:2295,0070:2299,0070:229d,0070:22f0,0070:22f3,0070:22f4,0070:22f5]
  22 -> Mygica X8506 DMB-TH                                 [14f1:8651]
  23 -> Magic-Pro ProHDTV Extreme 2                         [14f1:8657]
@@ -32,3 +32,9 @@
  31 -> Leadtek Winfast PxDVR3200 H XC4000                  [107d:6f39]
  32 -> MPX-885
  33 -> Mygica X8507                                        [14f1:8502]
+ 34 -> TerraTec Cinergy T PCIe Dual                        [153b:117e]
+ 35 -> TeVii S471                                          [d471:9022]
+ 36 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1255                             [0070:2259]
+ 37 -> Prof Revolution DVB-S2 8000                         [8000:3034]
+ 38 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4400                             [0070:c108,0070:c138,0070:c12a,0070:c1f8]
+ 39 -> AVerTV Hybrid Express Slim HC81R                    [1461:d939]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88
index eee18e6962b6..fa4b3f947468 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@
  58 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD 800i                               [11bd:0051]
  59 -> DViCO FusionHDTV 5 PCI nano                         [18ac:d530]
  60 -> Pinnacle Hybrid PCTV                                [12ab:1788]
- 61 -> Leadtek TV2000 XP Global                            [107d:6f18,107d:6618]
+ 61 -> Leadtek TV2000 XP Global                            [107d:6f18,107d:6618,107d:6619]
  62 -> PowerColor RA330                                    [14f1:ea3d]
  63 -> Geniatech X8000-MT DVBT                             [14f1:8852]
  64 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T PRO                          [18ac:db30]
@@ -87,3 +87,5 @@
  86 -> TeVii S464 DVB-S/S2                                 [d464:9022]
  87 -> Leadtek WinFast DTV2000 H PLUS                      [107d:6f42]
  88 -> Leadtek WinFast DTV1800 H (XC4000)                  [107d:6f38]
+ 89 -> Leadtek TV2000 XP Global (SC4100)                   [107d:6f36]
+ 90 -> Leadtek TV2000 XP Global (XC4100)                   [107d:6f43]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
index e7be3ac49ead..e81864405102 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
   6 -> Terratec Cinergy 200 USB                 (em2800)
   7 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II                   (em2800)        [0413:6023]
   8 -> Kworld USB2800                           (em2800)
-  9 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/100/101/107 / Kaiser Baas Video to DVD maker  (em2820/em2840) [1b80:e302,1b80:e304,2304:0207,2304:021a]
+  9 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/100/101/107 / Kaiser Baas Video to DVD maker  (em2820/em2840) [1b80:e302,1b80:e304,2304:0207,2304:021a,093b:a003]
  10 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900                  (em2880)        [2040:6500]
  11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS                       (em2880)
  12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF                    (em2820/em2840)
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@
  61 -> Pixelview PlayTV Box 4 USB 2.0           (em2820/em2840)
  62 -> Gadmei TVR200                            (em2820/em2840)
  63 -> Kaiomy TVnPC U2                          (em2860)        [eb1a:e303]
- 64 -> Easy Cap Capture DC-60                   (em2860)
+ 64 -> Easy Cap Capture DC-60                   (em2860)        [1b80:e309]
  65 -> IO-DATA GV-MVP/SZ                        (em2820/em2840) [04bb:0515]
  66 -> Empire dual TV                           (em2880)
  67 -> Terratec Grabby                          (em2860)        [0ccd:0096,0ccd:10AF]
@@ -76,7 +76,13 @@
  76 -> KWorld PlusTV 340U or UB435-Q (ATSC)     (em2870)        [1b80:a340]
  77 -> EM2874 Leadership ISDBT                  (em2874)
  78 -> PCTV nanoStick T2 290e                   (em28174)
- 79 -> Terratec Cinergy H5                      (em2884)        [0ccd:10a2,0ccd:10ad]
+ 79 -> Terratec Cinergy H5                      (em2884)        [0ccd:10a2,0ccd:10ad,0ccd:10b6]
  80 -> PCTV DVB-S2 Stick (460e)                 (em28174)
  81 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 930C                 (em2884)        [2040:1605]
  82 -> Terratec Cinergy HTC Stick               (em2884)        [0ccd:00b2]
+ 83 -> Honestech Vidbox NW03                    (em2860)        [eb1a:5006]
+ 84 -> MaxMedia UB425-TC                        (em2874)        [1b80:e425]
+ 85 -> PCTV QuatroStick (510e)                  (em2884)        [2304:0242]
+ 86 -> PCTV QuatroStick nano (520e)             (em2884)        [2013:0251]
+ 87 -> Terratec Cinergy HTC USB XS              (em2884)        [0ccd:008e,0ccd:00ac]
+ 88 -> C3 Tech Digital Duo HDTV/SDTV USB        (em2884)        [1b80:e755]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
index e7ef38a19859..8df17d063499 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
@@ -187,3 +187,7 @@
 186 -> Beholder BeholdTV 501                    [5ace:5010]
 187 -> Beholder BeholdTV 503 FM                 [5ace:5030]
 188 -> Sensoray 811/911                         [6000:0811,6000:0911]
+189 -> Kworld PC150-U                           [17de:a134]
+190 -> Asus My Cinema PS3-100                   [1043:48cd]
+191 -> Hawell HW-9004V1
+192 -> AverMedia AverTV Satellite Hybrid+FM A706 [1461:2055]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner
index 6323b7a20719..ac8862184962 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner
@@ -78,10 +78,14 @@ tuner=77 - TCL tuner MF02GIP-5N-E
 tuner=78 - Philips FMD1216MEX MK3 Hybrid Tuner
 tuner=79 - Philips PAL/SECAM multi (FM1216 MK5)
 tuner=80 - Philips FQ1216LME MK3 PAL/SECAM w/active loopthrough
-tuner=81 - Xceive 4000 tuner
 tuner=81 - Partsnic (Daewoo) PTI-5NF05
 tuner=82 - Philips CU1216L
 tuner=83 - NXP TDA18271
 tuner=84 - Sony BTF-Pxn01Z
 tuner=85 - Philips FQ1236 MK5
 tuner=86 - Tena TNF5337 MFD
+tuner=87 - Xceive 4000 tuner
+tuner=88 - Xceive 5000C tuner
+tuner=89 - Sony BTF-PG472Z PAL/SECAM
+tuner=90 - Sony BTF-PK467Z NTSC-M-JP
+tuner=91 - Sony BTF-PB463Z NTSC-M
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt
index 8977e7ce4dab..0b69e4ee8e31 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Table of Contents
 
 1.0 Introduction
 
-  The file ../../drivers/media/video/c-qcam.c is a device driver for
+  The file ../../drivers/media/parport/c-qcam.c is a device driver for
 the Logitech (nee Connectix) parallel port interface color CCD camera.
 This is a fairly inexpensive device for capturing images.  Logitech
 does not currently provide information for developers, but many people
@@ -61,29 +61,19 @@ But that is my personal preference.
 2.2 Configuration
 
   The configuration requires module configuration and device
-configuration.  I like kmod or kerneld process with the
-/etc/modprobe.conf file so the modules can automatically load/unload as
-they are used.  The video devices could already exist, be generated
-using MAKEDEV, or need to be created.  The following sections detail
-these procedures.
+configuration.  The following sections detail these procedures.
 
 
 2.1 Module Configuration
 
   Using modules requires a bit of work to install and pass the
-parameters.  Understand that entries in /etc/modprobe.conf of:
+parameters.  Understand that entries in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf of:
 
    alias parport_lowlevel parport_pc
    options parport_pc io=0x378 irq=none
    alias char-major-81 videodev
    alias char-major-81-0 c-qcam
 
-will cause the kmod/modprobe to do certain things.  If you are
-using kmod, then a request for a 'char-major-81-0' will cause
-the 'c-qcam' module to load.  If you have other video sources with
-modules, you might want to assign the different minor numbers to
-different modules.
-
 2.2 Device Configuration
 
   At this point, we need to ensure that the device files exist.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia2 b/Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia2
index ce8213d28b67..38e742fd0df7 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia2
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia2
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ gqcam application to view this stream.
 	The driver is implemented as two kernel modules. The cpia2 module
 contains the camera functions and the V4L interface.  The cpia2_usb module
 contains usb specific functions.  The main reason for this was the size of the
-module was getting out of hand, so I separted them.  It is not likely that
+module was getting out of hand, so I separated them.  It is not likely that
 there will be a parallel port version.
 
 FEATURES:
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/README.davinci-vpbe b/Documentation/video4linux/README.davinci-vpbe
index 7a460b0685bb..dc9a297f49c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/README.davinci-vpbe
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/README.davinci-vpbe
@@ -5,22 +5,22 @@
  File partitioning
  -----------------
  V4L2 display device driver
-         drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_display.c
-         drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_display.h
+         drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_display.c
+         drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_display.h
 
  VPBE display controller
-         drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe.c
-         drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe.h
+         drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe.c
+         drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe.h
 
  VPBE venc sub device driver
-         drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_venc.c
-         drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_venc.h
-         drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_venc_regs.h
+         drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_venc.c
+         drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_venc.h
+         drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_venc_regs.h
 
  VPBE osd driver
-         drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_osd.c
-         drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_osd.h
-         drivers/media/video/davinci/vpbe_osd_regs.h
+         drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_osd.c
+         drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_osd.h
+         drivers/media/platform/davinci/vpbe_osd_regs.h
 
  Functional partitioning
  -----------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran
index 9ed629d4874b..b5a911fd0602 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Load zr36067.o. If it can't autodetect your card, use the card=X insmod
 option with X being the card number as given in the previous section.
 To have more than one card, use card=X1[,X2[,X3,[X4[..]]]]
 
-To automate this, add the following to your /etc/modprobe.conf:
+To automate this, add the following to your /etc/modprobe.d/zoran.conf:
 
 options zr36067 card=X1[,X2[,X3[,X4[..]]]]
 alias char-major-81-0 zr36067
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards
index db833ced2cb8..a8fb6e2d3c8b 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Very nice card if you only have satellite TV but several tuners connected
 to the card via composite.
 
 Many thanks to Matrix-Vision for giving us 2 cards for free which made
-Bt848a/Bt849 single crytal operation support possible!!!
+Bt848a/Bt849 single crystal operation support possible!!!
 
 
 
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Modules.conf b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Modules.conf
index 753f15956eb8..8f258faf18f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Modules.conf
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Modules.conf
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-# For modern kernels (2.6 or above), this belongs in /etc/modprobe.conf
+# For modern kernels (2.6 or above), this belongs in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf
 # For for 2.4 kernels or earlier, this belongs in /etc/modules.conf.
 
 # i2c
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Sound-FAQ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Sound-FAQ
index 395f6c6fdd98..d3f1d7783d1c 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Sound-FAQ
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Sound-FAQ
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ card installed, you might to check out if you can read these registers
 values used by the windows driver.  A tool to do this is available
 from ftp://telepresence.dmem.strath.ac.uk/pub/bt848/winutil, but it
 does'nt work with bt878 boards according to some reports I received.
-Another one with bt878 suport is available from
+Another one with bt878 support is available from
 http://btwincap.sourceforge.net/Files/btspy2.00.zip
 
 You might also dig around in the *.ini files of the Windows applications.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/cpia2_overview.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/cpia2_overview.txt
index a6e53665216b..ad6adbedfe50 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/cpia2_overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/cpia2_overview.txt
@@ -35,4 +35,4 @@ the camera.  There are three modes for this.  Block mode requests a number
 of contiguous registers.  Random mode reads or writes random registers with
 a tuple structure containing address/value pairs.  The repeat mode is only
 used by VP4 to load a firmware patch.  It contains a starting address and
-a sequence of bytes to be written into a gpio port.
-\ No newline at end of file
+a sequence of bytes to be written into a gpio port.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/et61x251.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/et61x251.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index e0cdae491858..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/et61x251.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,315 +0,0 @@
-
-		       ET61X[12]51 PC Camera Controllers
-				Driver for Linux
-		       =================================
-
-			       - Documentation -
-
-
-Index
-=====
-1.  Copyright
-2.  Disclaimer
-3.  License
-4.  Overview and features
-5.  Module dependencies
-6.  Module loading
-7.  Module parameters
-8.  Optional device control through "sysfs"
-9.  Supported devices
-10. Notes for V4L2 application developers
-11. Contact information
-
-
-1. Copyright
-============
-Copyright (C) 2006-2007 by Luca Risolia <luca.risolia@studio.unibo.it>
-
-
-2. Disclaimer
-=============
-Etoms is a trademark of Etoms Electronics Corp.
-This software is not developed or sponsored by Etoms Electronics.
-
-
-3. License
-==========
-This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-(at your option) any later version.
-
-This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-
-
-4. Overview and features
-========================
-This driver supports the video interface of the devices mounting the ET61X151
-or ET61X251 PC Camera Controllers.
-
-It's worth to note that Etoms Electronics has never collaborated with the
-author during the development of this project; despite several requests,
-Etoms Electronics also refused to release enough detailed specifications of
-the video compression engine.
-
-The driver relies on the Video4Linux2 and USB core modules. It has been
-designed to run properly on SMP systems as well.
-
-The latest version of the ET61X[12]51 driver can be found at the following URL:
-http://www.linux-projects.org/
-
-Some of the features of the driver are:
-
-- full compliance with the Video4Linux2 API (see also "Notes for V4L2
-  application developers" paragraph);
-- available mmap or read/poll methods for video streaming through isochronous
-  data transfers;
-- automatic detection of image sensor;
-- support for any window resolutions and optional panning within the maximum
-  pixel area of image sensor;
-- image downscaling with arbitrary scaling factors from 1 and 2 in both
-  directions (see "Notes for V4L2 application developers" paragraph);
-- two different video formats for uncompressed or compressed data in low or
-  high compression quality (see also "Notes for V4L2 application developers"
-  paragraph);
-- full support for the capabilities of every possible image sensors that can
-  be connected to the ET61X[12]51 bridges, including, for instance, red, green,
-  blue and global gain adjustments and exposure control (see "Supported
-  devices" paragraph for details);
-- use of default color settings for sunlight conditions;
-- dynamic I/O interface for both ET61X[12]51 and image sensor control (see
-  "Optional device control through 'sysfs'" paragraph);
-- dynamic driver control thanks to various module parameters (see "Module
-  parameters" paragraph);
-- up to 64 cameras can be handled at the same time; they can be connected and
-  disconnected from the host many times without turning off the computer, if
-  the system supports hotplugging;
-- no known bugs.
-
-
-5. Module dependencies
-======================
-For it to work properly, the driver needs kernel support for Video4Linux and
-USB.
-
-The following options of the kernel configuration file must be enabled and
-corresponding modules must be compiled:
-
-	# Multimedia devices
-	#
-	CONFIG_VIDEO_DEV=m
-
-To enable advanced debugging functionality on the device through /sysfs:
-
-	# Multimedia devices
-	#
-	CONFIG_VIDEO_ADV_DEBUG=y
-
-	# USB support
-	#
-	CONFIG_USB=m
-
-In addition, depending on the hardware being used, the modules below are
-necessary:
-
-	# USB Host Controller Drivers
-	#
-	CONFIG_USB_EHCI_HCD=m
-	CONFIG_USB_UHCI_HCD=m
-	CONFIG_USB_OHCI_HCD=m
-
-And finally:
-
-	# USB Multimedia devices
-	#
-	CONFIG_USB_ET61X251=m
-
-
-6. Module loading
-=================
-To use the driver, it is necessary to load the "et61x251" module into memory
-after every other module required: "videodev", "v4l2_common", "compat_ioctl32",
-"usbcore" and, depending on the USB host controller you have, "ehci-hcd",
-"uhci-hcd" or "ohci-hcd".
-
-Loading can be done as shown below:
-
-	[root@localhost home]# modprobe et61x251
-
-At this point the devices should be recognized. You can invoke "dmesg" to
-analyze kernel messages and verify that the loading process has gone well:
-
-	[user@localhost home]$ dmesg
-
-
-7. Module parameters
-====================
-Module parameters are listed below:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           video_nr
-Type:           short array (min = 0, max = 64)
-Syntax:         <-1|n[,...]>
-Description:    Specify V4L2 minor mode number:
-		-1 = use next available
-		 n = use minor number n
-		You can specify up to 64 cameras this way.
-		For example:
-		video_nr=-1,2,-1 would assign minor number 2 to the second
-		registered camera and use auto for the first one and for every
-		other camera.
-Default:        -1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           force_munmap
-Type:           bool array (min = 0, max = 64)
-Syntax:         <0|1[,...]>
-Description:    Force the application to unmap previously mapped buffer memory
-		before calling any VIDIOC_S_CROP or VIDIOC_S_FMT ioctl's. Not
-		all the applications support this feature. This parameter is
-		specific for each detected camera.
-		0 = do not force memory unmapping
-		1 = force memory unmapping (save memory)
-Default:        0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           frame_timeout
-Type:           uint array (min = 0, max = 64)
-Syntax:         <n[,...]>
-Description:    Timeout for a video frame in seconds. This parameter is
-		specific for each detected camera. This parameter can be
-		changed at runtime thanks to the /sys filesystem interface.
-Default:        2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           debug
-Type:           ushort
-Syntax:         <n>
-Description:    Debugging information level, from 0 to 3:
-		0 = none (use carefully)
-		1 = critical errors
-		2 = significant information
-		3 = more verbose messages
-		Level 3 is useful for testing only, when only one device
-		is used at the same time. It also shows some more information
-		about the hardware being detected. This module parameter can be
-		changed at runtime thanks to the /sys filesystem interface.
-Default:        2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-8. Optional device control through "sysfs"
-==========================================
-If the kernel has been compiled with the CONFIG_VIDEO_ADV_DEBUG option enabled,
-it is possible to read and write both the ET61X[12]51 and the image sensor
-registers by using the "sysfs" filesystem interface.
-
-There are four files in the /sys/class/video4linux/videoX directory for each
-registered camera: "reg", "val", "i2c_reg" and "i2c_val". The first two files
-control the ET61X[12]51 bridge, while the other two control the sensor chip.
-"reg" and "i2c_reg" hold the values of the current register index where the
-following reading/writing operations are addressed at through "val" and
-"i2c_val". Their use is not intended for end-users, unless you know what you
-are doing. Remember that you must be logged in as root before writing to them.
-
-As an example, suppose we were to want to read the value contained in the
-register number 1 of the sensor register table - which is usually the product
-identifier - of the camera registered as "/dev/video0":
-
-	[root@localhost #] cd /sys/class/video4linux/video0
-	[root@localhost #] echo 1 > i2c_reg
-	[root@localhost #] cat i2c_val
-
-Note that if the sensor registers cannot be read, "cat" will fail.
-To avoid race conditions, all the I/O accesses to the files are serialized.
-
-
-9. Supported devices
-====================
-None of the names of the companies as well as their products will be mentioned
-here. They have never collaborated with the author, so no advertising.
-
-From the point of view of a driver, what unambiguously identify a device are
-its vendor and product USB identifiers. Below is a list of known identifiers of
-devices mounting the ET61X[12]51 PC camera controllers:
-
-Vendor ID  Product ID
----------  ----------
-0x102c     0x6151
-0x102c     0x6251
-0x102c     0x6253
-0x102c     0x6254
-0x102c     0x6255
-0x102c     0x6256
-0x102c     0x6257
-0x102c     0x6258
-0x102c     0x6259
-0x102c     0x625a
-0x102c     0x625b
-0x102c     0x625c
-0x102c     0x625d
-0x102c     0x625e
-0x102c     0x625f
-0x102c     0x6260
-0x102c     0x6261
-0x102c     0x6262
-0x102c     0x6263
-0x102c     0x6264
-0x102c     0x6265
-0x102c     0x6266
-0x102c     0x6267
-0x102c     0x6268
-0x102c     0x6269
-
-The following image sensors are supported:
-
-Model       Manufacturer
------       ------------
-TAS5130D1B  Taiwan Advanced Sensor Corporation
-
-All the available control settings of each image sensor are supported through
-the V4L2 interface.
-
-
-10. Notes for V4L2 application developers
-=========================================
-This driver follows the V4L2 API specifications. In particular, it enforces two
-rules:
-
-- exactly one I/O method, either "mmap" or "read", is associated with each
-file descriptor. Once it is selected, the application must close and reopen the
-device to switch to the other I/O method;
-
-- although it is not mandatory, previously mapped buffer memory should always
-be unmapped before calling any "VIDIOC_S_CROP" or "VIDIOC_S_FMT" ioctl's.
-The same number of buffers as before will be allocated again to match the size
-of the new video frames, so you have to map the buffers again before any I/O
-attempts on them.
-
-Consistently with the hardware limits, this driver also supports image
-downscaling with arbitrary scaling factors from 1 and 2 in both directions.
-However, the V4L2 API specifications don't correctly define how the scaling
-factor can be chosen arbitrarily by the "negotiation" of the "source" and
-"target" rectangles. To work around this flaw, we have added the convention
-that, during the negotiation, whenever the "VIDIOC_S_CROP" ioctl is issued, the
-scaling factor is restored to 1.
-
-This driver supports two different video formats: the first one is the "8-bit
-Sequential Bayer" format and can be used to obtain uncompressed video data
-from the device through the current I/O method, while the second one provides
-"raw" compressed video data (without frame headers not related to the
-compressed data). The current compression quality may vary from 0 to 1 and can
-be selected or queried thanks to the VIDIOC_S_JPEGCOMP and VIDIOC_G_JPEGCOMP
-V4L2 ioctl's.
-
-
-11. Contact information
-=======================
-The author may be contacted by e-mail at <luca.risolia@studio.unibo.it>.
-
-GPG/PGP encrypted e-mail's are accepted. The GPG key ID of the author is
-'FCE635A4'; the public 1024-bit key should be available at any keyserver;
-the fingerprint is: '88E8 F32F 7244 68BA 3958  5D40 99DA 5D2A FCE6 35A4'.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/extract_xc3028.pl b/Documentation/video4linux/extract_xc3028.pl
index 47877deae6d7..47877deae6d7 100644..100755
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/extract_xc3028.pl
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/extract_xc3028.pl
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/fimc.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/fimc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e51f1b5b7324
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/fimc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+Samsung S5P/EXYNOS4 FIMC driver
+
+Copyright (C) 2012 - 2013 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+The FIMC (Fully Interactive Mobile Camera) device available in Samsung
+SoC Application Processors is an integrated camera host interface, color
+space converter, image resizer and rotator.  It's also capable of capturing
+data from LCD controller (FIMD) through the SoC internal writeback data
+path.  There are multiple FIMC instances in the SoCs (up to 4), having
+slightly different capabilities, like pixel alignment constraints, rotator
+availability, LCD writeback support, etc. The driver is located at
+drivers/media/platform/exynos4-is directory.
+
+1. Supported SoCs
+=================
+
+S5PC100 (mem-to-mem only), S5PV210, EXYNOS4210
+
+2. Supported features
+=====================
+
+ - camera parallel interface capture (ITU-R.BT601/565);
+ - camera serial interface capture (MIPI-CSI2);
+ - memory-to-memory processing (color space conversion, scaling, mirror
+   and rotation);
+ - dynamic pipeline re-configuration at runtime (re-attachment of any FIMC
+   instance to any parallel video input or any MIPI-CSI front-end);
+ - runtime PM and system wide suspend/resume
+
+Not currently supported:
+ - LCD writeback input
+ - per frame clock gating (mem-to-mem)
+
+3. Files partitioning
+=====================
+
+- media device driver
+  drivers/media/platform/exynos4-is/media-dev.[ch]
+
+ - camera capture video device driver
+  drivers/media/platform/exynos4-is/fimc-capture.c
+
+ - MIPI-CSI2 receiver subdev
+  drivers/media/platform/exynos4-is/mipi-csis.[ch]
+
+ - video post-processor (mem-to-mem)
+  drivers/media/platform/exynos4-is/fimc-core.c
+
+ - common files
+  drivers/media/platform/exynos4-is/fimc-core.h
+  drivers/media/platform/exynos4-is/fimc-reg.h
+  drivers/media/platform/exynos4-is/regs-fimc.h
+
+4. User space interfaces
+========================
+
+4.1. Media device interface
+
+The driver supports Media Controller API as defined at
+http://linuxtv.org/downloads/v4l-dvb-apis/media_common.html
+The media device driver name is "SAMSUNG S5P FIMC".
+
+The purpose of this interface is to allow changing assignment of FIMC instances
+to the SoC peripheral camera input at runtime and optionally to control internal
+connections of the MIPI-CSIS device(s) to the FIMC entities.
+
+The media device interface allows to configure the SoC for capturing image
+data from the sensor through more than one FIMC instance (e.g. for simultaneous
+viewfinder and still capture setup).
+Reconfiguration is done by enabling/disabling media links created by the driver
+during initialization. The internal device topology can be easily discovered
+through media entity and links enumeration.
+
+4.2. Memory-to-memory video node
+
+V4L2 memory-to-memory interface at /dev/video? device node.  This is standalone
+video device, it has no media pads. However please note the mem-to-mem and
+capture video node operation on same FIMC instance is not allowed.  The driver
+detects such cases but the applications should prevent them to avoid an
+undefined behaviour.
+
+4.3. Capture video node
+
+The driver supports V4L2 Video Capture Interface as defined at:
+http://linuxtv.org/downloads/v4l-dvb-apis/devices.html
+
+At the capture and mem-to-mem video nodes only the multi-planar API is
+supported. For more details see:
+http://linuxtv.org/downloads/v4l-dvb-apis/planar-apis.html
+
+4.4. Camera capture subdevs
+
+Each FIMC instance exports a sub-device node (/dev/v4l-subdev?), a sub-device
+node is also created per each available and enabled at the platform level
+MIPI-CSI receiver device (currently up to two).
+
+4.5. sysfs
+
+In order to enable more precise camera pipeline control through the sub-device
+API the driver creates a sysfs entry associated with "s5p-fimc-md" platform
+device. The entry path is: /sys/platform/devices/s5p-fimc-md/subdev_conf_mode.
+
+In typical use case there could be a following capture pipeline configuration:
+sensor subdev -> mipi-csi subdev -> fimc subdev -> video node
+
+When we configure these devices through sub-device API at user space, the
+configuration flow must be from left to right, and the video node is
+configured as last one.
+When we don't use sub-device user space API the whole configuration of all
+devices belonging to the pipeline is done at the video node driver.
+The sysfs entry allows to instruct the capture node driver not to configure
+the sub-devices (format, crop), to avoid resetting the subdevs' configuration
+when the last configuration steps at the video node is performed.
+
+For full sub-device control support (subdevs configured at user space before
+starting streaming):
+# echo "sub-dev" > /sys/platform/devices/s5p-fimc-md/subdev_conf_mode
+
+For V4L2 video node control only (subdevs configured internally by the host
+driver):
+# echo "vid-dev" > /sys/platform/devices/s5p-fimc-md/subdev_conf_mode
+This is a default option.
+
+5. Device mapping to video and subdev device nodes
+==================================================
+
+There are associated two video device nodes with each device instance in
+hardware - video capture and mem-to-mem and additionally a subdev node for
+more precise FIMC capture subsystem control. In addition a separate v4l2
+sub-device node is created per each MIPI-CSIS device.
+
+How to find out which /dev/video? or /dev/v4l-subdev? is assigned to which
+device?
+
+You can either grep through the kernel log to find relevant information, i.e.
+# dmesg | grep -i fimc
+(note that udev, if present, might still have rearranged the video nodes),
+
+or retrieve the information from /dev/media? with help of the media-ctl tool:
+# media-ctl -p
+
+6. Platform support
+===================
+
+The machine code (arch/arm/plat-samsung and arch/arm/mach-*) must select
+following options:
+
+CONFIG_S5P_DEV_FIMC0       mandatory
+CONFIG_S5P_DEV_FIMC1  \
+CONFIG_S5P_DEV_FIMC2  |    optional
+CONFIG_S5P_DEV_FIMC3  |
+CONFIG_S5P_SETUP_FIMC /
+CONFIG_S5P_SETUP_MIPIPHY \
+CONFIG_S5P_DEV_CSIS0     | optional for MIPI-CSI interface
+CONFIG_S5P_DEV_CSIS1     /
+
+Except that, relevant s5p_device_fimc? should be registered in the machine code
+in addition to a "s5p-fimc-md" platform device to which the media device driver
+is bound.  The "s5p-fimc-md" device instance is required even if only mem-to-mem
+operation is used.
+
+The description of sensor(s) attached to FIMC/MIPI-CSIS camera inputs should be
+passed as the "s5p-fimc-md" device platform_data.  The platform data structure
+is defined in file include/media/s5p_fimc.h.
+
+7. Build
+========
+
+This driver depends on following config options:
+PLAT_S5P,
+PM_RUNTIME,
+I2C,
+REGULATOR,
+VIDEO_V4L2_SUBDEV_API,
+
+If the driver is built as a loadable kernel module (CONFIG_VIDEO_SAMSUNG_S5P_FIMC=m)
+two modules are created (in addition to the core v4l2 modules): s5p-fimc.ko and
+optional s5p-csis.ko (MIPI-CSI receiver subdev).
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
index f2060f0dc02c..1e6b6531bbcc 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
@@ -217,6 +217,7 @@ ov534_9		06f8:3003	Hercules Dualpix HD Weblog
 sonixj		06f8:3004	Hercules Classic Silver
 sonixj		06f8:3008	Hercules Deluxe Optical Glass
 pac7302		06f8:3009	Hercules Classic Link
+pac7302		06f8:301b	Hercules Link
 nw80x		0728:d001	AVerMedia Camguard
 spca508		0733:0110	ViewQuest VQ110
 spca501		0733:0401	Intel Create and Share
@@ -275,6 +276,7 @@ pac7302		093a:2622	Genius Eye 312
 pac7302		093a:2624	PAC7302
 pac7302		093a:2625	Genius iSlim 310
 pac7302		093a:2626	Labtec 2200
+pac7302		093a:2627	Genius FaceCam 300
 pac7302		093a:2628	Genius iLook 300
 pac7302		093a:2629	Genious iSlim 300
 pac7302		093a:262a	Webcam 300k
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/ibmcam.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/ibmcam.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index a51055211e62..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/ibmcam.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,323 +0,0 @@
-README for Linux device driver for the IBM "C-It" USB video camera
-
-INTRODUCTION:
-
-This driver does not use all features known to exist in
-the IBM camera. However most of needed features work well.
-
-This driver was developed using logs of observed USB traffic
-which was produced by standard Windows driver (c-it98.sys).
-I did not have data sheets from Xirlink.
-
-Video formats:
-      128x96  [model 1]
-      176x144
-      320x240 [model 2]
-      352x240 [model 2]
-      352x288
-Frame rate: 3 - 30 frames per second (FPS)
-External interface: USB
-Internal interface: Video For Linux (V4L)
-Supported controls:
-- by V4L: Contrast,  Brightness, Color, Hue
-- by driver options: frame rate, lighting conditions, video format,
-		     default picture settings, sharpness.
-
-SUPPORTED CAMERAS:
-
-Xirlink "C-It" camera, also known as "IBM PC Camera".
-The device uses proprietary ASIC (and compression method);
-it is manufactured by Xirlink. See http://xirlinkwebcam.sourceforge.net, 
-http://www.ibmpccamera.com, or http://www.c-itnow.com/ for details and pictures.
-
-This very chipset ("X Chip", as marked at the factory)
-is used in several other cameras, and they are supported
-as well:
-
-- IBM NetCamera
-- Veo Stingray
-
-The Linux driver was developed with camera with following
-model number (or FCC ID): KSX-XVP510. This camera has three
-interfaces, each with one endpoint (control, iso, iso). This
-type of cameras is referred to as "model 1". These cameras are
-no longer manufactured.
-
-Xirlink now manufactures new cameras which are somewhat different.
-In particular, following models [FCC ID] belong to that category:
-
-XVP300 [KSX-X9903]
-XVP600 [KSX-X9902]
-XVP610 [KSX-X9902]
-
-(see http://www.xirlink.com/ibmpccamera/ for updates, they refer
-to these new cameras by Windows driver dated 12-27-99, v3005 BETA)
-These cameras have two interfaces, one endpoint in each (iso, bulk).
-Such type of cameras is referred to as "model 2". They are supported
-(with exception of 352x288 native mode).
-
-Some IBM NetCameras (Model 4) are made to generate only compressed
-video streams. This is great for performance, but unfortunately
-nobody knows how to decompress the stream :-( Therefore, these
-cameras are *unsupported* and if you try to use one of those, all
-you get is random colored horizontal streaks, not the image!
-If you have one of those cameras, you probably should return it
-to the store and get something that is supported.
-
-Tell me more about all that "model" business
---------------------------------------------
-
-I just invented model numbers to uniquely identify flavors of the
-hardware/firmware that were sold. It was very confusing to use
-brand names or some other internal numbering schemes. So I found
-by experimentation that all Xirlink chipsets fall into four big
-classes, and I called them "models". Each model is programmed in
-its own way, and each model sends back the video in its own way.
-
-Quirks of Model 2 cameras:
--------------------------
-
-Model 2 does not have hardware contrast control. Corresponding V4L
-control is implemented in software, which is not very nice to your
-CPU, but at least it works.
-
-This driver provides 352x288 mode by switching the camera into
-quasi-352x288 RGB mode (800 Kbits per frame) essentially limiting
-this mode to 10 frames per second or less, in ideal conditions on
-the bus (USB is shared, after all). The frame rate
-has to be programmed very conservatively. Additional concern is that
-frame rate depends on brightness setting; therefore the picture can
-be good at one brightness and broken at another! I did not want to fix
-the frame rate at slowest setting, but I had to move it pretty much down
-the scale (so that framerate option barely matters). I also noticed that
-camera after first powering up produces frames slightly faster than during
-consecutive uses. All this means that if you use 352x288 (which is
-default), be warned - you may encounter broken picture on first connect;
-try to adjust brightness - brighter image is slower, so USB will be able
-to send all data. However if you regularly use Model 2 cameras you may
-prefer 176x144 which makes perfectly good I420, with no scaling and
-lesser demands on USB (300 Kbits per second, or 26 frames per second).
-
-Another strange effect of 352x288 mode is the fine vertical grid visible
-on some colored surfaces. I am sure it is caused by me not understanding
-what the camera is trying to say. Blame trade secrets for that.
-
-The camera that I had also has a hardware quirk: if disconnected,
-it needs few minutes to "relax" before it can be plugged in again
-(poorly designed USB processor reset circuit?)
-
-[Veo Stingray with Product ID 0x800C is also Model 2, but I haven't
-observed this particular flaw in it.]
-
-Model 2 camera can be programmed for very high sensitivity (even starlight
-may be enough), this makes it convenient for tinkering with. The driver
-code has enough comments to help a programmer to tweak the camera
-as s/he feels necessary.
-
-WHAT YOU NEED:
-
-- A supported IBM PC (C-it) camera (model 1 or 2)
-
-- A Linux box with USB support (2.3/2.4; 2.2 w/backport may work)
-
-- A Video4Linux compatible frame grabber program such as xawtv.
-
-HOW TO COMPILE THE DRIVER:
-
-You need to compile the driver only if you are a developer
-or if you want to make changes to the code. Most distributions
-precompile all modules, so you can go directly to the next
-section "HOW TO USE THE DRIVER".
-
-The ibmcam driver uses usbvideo helper library (module),
-so if you are studying the ibmcam code you will be led there.
-
-The driver itself consists of only one file in usb/ directory:
-ibmcam.c. This file is included into the Linux kernel build
-process if you configure the kernel for CONFIG_USB_IBMCAM.
-Run "make xconfig" and in USB section you will find the IBM
-camera driver. Select it, save the configuration and recompile.
-
-HOW TO USE THE DRIVER:
-
-I recommend to compile driver as a module. This gives you an
-easier access to its configuration. The camera has many more
-settings than V4L can operate, so some settings are done using
-module options.
-
-To begin with, on most modern Linux distributions the driver
-will be automatically loaded whenever you plug the supported
-camera in. Therefore, you don't need to do anything. However
-if you want to experiment with some module parameters then
-you can load and unload the driver manually, with camera
-plugged in or unplugged.
-
-Typically module is installed with command 'modprobe', like this:
-
-# modprobe ibmcam framerate=1
-
-Alternatively you can use 'insmod' in similar fashion:
-
-# insmod /lib/modules/2.x.y/usb/ibmcam.o framerate=1
-
-Module can be inserted with camera connected or disconnected.
-
-The driver can have options, though some defaults are provided.
-
-Driver options: (* indicates that option is model-dependent)
-
-Name            Type            Range [default] Example
---------------  --------------  --------------  ------------------
-debug           Integer         0-9 [0]         debug=1
-flags           Integer         0-0xFF [0]      flags=0x0d
-framerate       Integer         0-6 [2]         framerate=1
-hue_correction  Integer         0-255 [128]     hue_correction=115
-init_brightness Integer         0-255 [128]     init_brightness=100
-init_contrast   Integer         0-255 [192]     init_contrast=200
-init_color      Integer         0-255 [128]     init_color=130
-init_hue        Integer         0-255 [128]     init_hue=115
-lighting        Integer         0-2* [1]        lighting=2
-sharpness       Integer         0-6* [4]        sharpness=3
-size            Integer         0-2* [2]        size=1
-
-Options for Model 2 only:
-
-Name            Type            Range [default] Example
---------------  --------------  --------------  ------------------
-init_model2_rg  Integer         0..255 [0x70]   init_model2_rg=128
-init_model2_rg2 Integer         0..255 [0x2f]   init_model2_rg2=50
-init_model2_sat Integer         0..255 [0x34]   init_model2_sat=65
-init_model2_yb  Integer         0..255 [0xa0]   init_model2_yb=200
-
-debug           You don't need this option unless you are a developer.
-		If you are a developer then you will see in the code
-		what values do what. 0=off.
-
-flags           This is a bit mask, and you can combine any number of
-		bits to produce what you want. Usually you don't want
-		any of extra features this option provides:
-
-		FLAGS_RETRY_VIDIOCSYNC  1  This bit allows to retry failed
-					   VIDIOCSYNC ioctls without failing.
-					   Will work with xawtv, will not
-					   with xrealproducer. Default is
-					   not set.
-		FLAGS_MONOCHROME        2  Activates monochrome (b/w) mode.
-		FLAGS_DISPLAY_HINTS     4  Shows colored pixels which have
-					   magic meaning to developers.
-		FLAGS_OVERLAY_STATS     8  Shows tiny numbers on screen,
-					   useful only for debugging.
-		FLAGS_FORCE_TESTPATTERN 16 Shows blue screen with numbers.
-		FLAGS_SEPARATE_FRAMES   32 Shows each frame separately, as
-					   it was received from the camera.
-					   Default (not set) is to mix the
-					   preceding frame in to compensate
-					   for occasional loss of Isoc data
-					   on high frame rates.
-		FLAGS_CLEAN_FRAMES      64 Forces "cleanup" of each frame
-					   prior to use; relevant only if
-					   FLAGS_SEPARATE_FRAMES is set.
-					   Default is not to clean frames,
-					   this is a little faster but may
-					   produce flicker if frame rate is
-					   too high and Isoc data gets lost.
-		FLAGS_NO_DECODING      128 This flag turns the video stream
-					   decoder off, and dumps the raw
-					   Isoc data from the camera into
-					   the reading process. Useful to
-					   developers, but not to users.
-
-framerate       This setting controls frame rate of the camera. This is
-		an approximate setting (in terms of "worst" ... "best")
-		because camera changes frame rate depending on amount
-		of light available. Setting 0 is slowest, 6 is fastest.
-		Beware - fast settings are very demanding and may not
-		work well with all video sizes. Be conservative.
-
-hue_correction  This highly optional setting allows to adjust the
-		hue of the image in a way slightly different from
-		what usual "hue" control does. Both controls affect
-		YUV colorspace: regular "hue" control adjusts only
-		U component, and this "hue_correction" option similarly
-		adjusts only V component. However usually it is enough
-		to tweak only U or V to compensate for colored light or
-		color temperature; this option simply allows more
-		complicated correction when and if it is necessary.
-
-init_brightness These settings specify _initial_ values which will be
-init_contrast   used to set up the camera. If your V4L application has
-init_color      its own controls to adjust the picture then these
-init_hue        controls will be used too. These options allow you to
-		preconfigure the camera when it gets connected, before
-		any V4L application connects to it. Good for webcams.
-
-init_model2_rg  These initial settings alter color balance of the
-init_model2_rg2 camera on hardware level. All four settings may be used
-init_model2_sat to tune the camera to specific lighting conditions. These
-init_model2_yb  settings only apply to Model 2 cameras.
-
-lighting        This option selects one of three hardware-defined
-		photosensitivity settings of the camera. 0=bright light,
-		1=Medium (default), 2=Low light. This setting affects
-		frame rate: the dimmer the lighting the lower the frame
-		rate (because longer exposition time is needed). The
-		Model 2 cameras allow values more than 2 for this option,
-		thus enabling extremely high sensitivity at cost of frame
-		rate, color saturation and imaging sensor noise.
-
-sharpness       This option controls smoothing (noise reduction)
-		made by camera. Setting 0 is most smooth, setting 6
-		is most sharp. Be aware that CMOS sensor used in the
-		camera is pretty noisy, so if you choose 6 you will
-		be greeted with "snowy" image. Default is 4. Model 2
-		cameras do not support this feature.
-
-size            This setting chooses one of several image sizes that are
-		supported by this driver. Cameras may support more, but
-		it's difficult to reverse-engineer all formats.
-		Following video sizes are supported:
-
-		size=0     128x96  (Model 1 only)
-		size=1     160x120
-		size=2     176x144
-		size=3     320x240 (Model 2 only)
-		size=4     352x240 (Model 2 only)
-		size=5     352x288
-		size=6     640x480 (Model 3 only)
-
-		The 352x288 is the native size of the Model 1 sensor
-		array, so it's the best resolution the camera can
-		yield. The best resolution of Model 2 is 176x144, and
-		larger images are produced by stretching the bitmap.
-		Model 3 has sensor with 640x480 grid, and it works too,
-		but the frame rate will be exceptionally low (1-2 FPS);
-		it may be still OK for some applications, like security.
-		Choose the image size you need. The smaller image can
-		support faster frame rate. Default is 352x288.
-
-For more information and the Troubleshooting FAQ visit this URL:
-
-		http://www.linux-usb.org/ibmcam/
-
-WHAT NEEDS TO BE DONE:
-
-- The button on the camera is not used. I don't know how to get to it.
-  I know now how to read button on Model 2, but what to do with it?
-
-- Camera reports its status back to the driver; however I don't know
-  what returned data means. If camera fails at some initialization
-  stage then something should be done, and I don't do that because
-  I don't even know that some command failed. This is mostly Model 1
-  concern because Model 2 uses different commands which do not return
-  status (and seem to complete successfully every time).
-
-- Some flavors of Model 4 NetCameras produce only compressed video
-  streams, and I don't know how to decode them.
-
-CREDITS:
-
-The code is based in no small part on the CPiA driver by Johannes Erdfelt,
-Randy Dunlap, and others. Big thanks to them for their pioneering work on that
-and the USB stack.
-
-I also thank John Lightsey for his donation of the Veo Stingray camera.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 4450ab13f37b..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-This document describes the ALi m5602 bridge connected
-to the following supported sensors:
-OmniVision OV9650,
-Samsung s5k83a,
-Samsung s5k4aa,
-Micron mt9m111,
-Pixel plus PO1030
-
-This driver mimics the windows drivers, which have a braindead implementation sending bayer-encoded frames at VGA resolution.
-In a perfect world we should be able to reprogram the m5602 and the connected sensor in hardware instead, supporting a range of resolutions and pixelformats
-
-Anyway, have fun and please report any bugs to m560x-driver-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt
index 34e2842c70ae..a051152ea99c 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Module use:
 -----------
 
 In order to automatically load the meye module on use, you can put those lines
-in your /etc/modprobe.conf file:
+in your /etc/modprobe.d/meye.conf file:
 
 	alias char-major-81 videodev
 	alias char-major-81-0 meye
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt
index 5dd1439b61fd..b9a9f83b1587 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Introduction
 ============
 
 This file documents the Texas Instruments OMAP 3 Image Signal Processor (ISP)
-driver located under drivers/media/video/omap3isp. The original driver was
+driver located under drivers/media/platform/omap3isp. The original driver was
 written by Texas Instruments but since that it has been rewritten (twice) at
 Nokia.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/ov511.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/ov511.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index b3326b167ada..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/ov511.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,288 +0,0 @@
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Readme for Linux device driver for the OmniVision OV511 USB to camera bridge IC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-Author: Mark McClelland
-Homepage: http://alpha.dyndns.org/ov511
-
-INTRODUCTION:
-
-This is a driver for the OV511, a USB-only chip used in many "webcam" devices.
-Any camera using the OV511/OV511+ and the OV6620/OV7610/20/20AE should work.
-Video capture devices that use the Philips SAA7111A decoder also work. It
-supports streaming and capture of color or monochrome video via the Video4Linux
-API. Most V4L apps are compatible with it. Most resolutions with a width and
-height that are a multiple of 8 are supported.
-
-If you need more information, please visit the OV511 homepage at the above URL.
-
-WHAT YOU NEED:
-
-- If you want to help with the development, get the chip's specification docs at
-  http://www.ovt.com/omniusbp.html
-
-- A Video4Linux compatible frame grabber program (I recommend vidcat and xawtv)
-    vidcat is part of the w3cam package:  http://mpx.freeshell.net/
-    xawtv is available at:  http://linux.bytesex.org/xawtv/
-
-HOW TO USE IT:
-
-Note: These are simplified instructions. For complete instructions see:
-	http://alpha.dyndns.org/ov511/install.html
-
-You must have first compiled USB support, support for your specific USB host
-controller (UHCI or OHCI), and Video4Linux support for your kernel (I recommend
-making them modules.) Make sure "Enforce bandwidth allocation" is NOT enabled.
-
-Next, (as root):
-
-	modprobe usbcore
-	modprobe usb-uhci  <OR>  modprobe usb-ohci
-	modprobe videodev
-	modprobe ov511
-
-If it is not already there (it usually is), create the video device:
-
-	mknod /dev/video0 c 81 0
-
-Optionally, symlink /dev/video to /dev/video0
-
-You will have to set permissions on this device to allow you to read/write
-from it:
-
-	chmod 666 /dev/video
-	chmod 666 /dev/video0 (if necessary)
-
-Now you are ready to run a video app! Both vidcat and xawtv work well for me
-at 640x480.
-
-[Using vidcat:]
-
-	vidcat -s 640x480 -p c > test.jpg
-	xview test.jpg
-
-[Using xawtv:]
-
-From the main xawtv directory:
-
-	make clean
-	./configure
-	make
-	make install
-
-Now you should be able to run xawtv. Right click for the options dialog.
-
-MODULE PARAMETERS:
-
-  You can set these with:  insmod ov511 NAME=VALUE
-  There is currently no way to set these on a per-camera basis.
-
-  NAME: autobright
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 1
-  DESC: Brightness is normally under automatic control and can't be set
-	manually by the video app. Set to 0 for manual control.
-
-  NAME: autogain
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 1
-  DESC: Auto Gain Control enable. This feature is not yet implemented.
-
-  NAME: autoexp
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 1
-  DESC: Auto Exposure Control enable. This feature is not yet implemented.
-
-  NAME: debug
-  TYPE: integer (0-6)
-  DEFAULT: 3
-  DESC: Sets the threshold for printing debug messages. The higher the value,
-	the more is printed. The levels are cumulative, and are as follows:
-	  0=no debug messages
-	  1=init/detection/unload and other significant messages
-	  2=some warning messages
-	  3=config/control function calls
-	  4=most function calls and data parsing messages
-	  5=highly repetitive mesgs
-
-  NAME: snapshot
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 0
-  DESC: Set to 1 to enable snapshot mode. read()/VIDIOCSYNC will block until
-	the snapshot button is pressed. Note: enabling this mode disables
-	/proc/video/ov511/<minor#>/button
-
-  NAME: cams
-  TYPE: integer (1-4 for OV511, 1-31 for OV511+)
-  DEFAULT: 1
-  DESC: Number of cameras allowed to stream simultaneously on a single bus.
-	Values higher than 1 reduce the data rate of each camera, allowing two
-	or more to be used at once. If you have a complicated setup involving
-	both OV511 and OV511+ cameras, trial-and-error may be necessary for
-	finding the optimum setting.
-
-  NAME: compress
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 0
-  DESC: Set this to 1 to turn on the camera's compression engine. This can
-	potentially increase the frame rate at the expense of quality, if you
-	have a fast CPU. You must load the proper compression module for your
-	camera before starting your application (ov511_decomp or ov518_decomp).
-
-  NAME: testpat
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 0
-  DESC: This configures the camera's sensor to transmit a colored test-pattern
-	instead of an image. This does not work correctly yet.
-
-  NAME: dumppix
-  TYPE: integer (0-2)
-  DEFAULT: 0
-  DESC: Dumps raw pixel data and skips post-processing and format conversion.
-	It is for debugging purposes only. Options are:
-		0: Disable (default)
-		1: Dump raw data from camera, excluding headers and trailers
-		2: Dumps data exactly as received from camera
-
-  NAME: led
-  TYPE: integer (0-2)
-  DEFAULT: 1 (Always on)
-  DESC: Controls whether the LED (the little light) on the front of the camera
-	is always off (0), always on (1), or only on when driver is open (2).
-	This is not supported with the OV511, and might only work with certain
-	cameras (ones that actually have the LED wired to the control pin, and
-	not just hard-wired to be on all the time).
-
-  NAME: dump_bridge
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 0
-  DESC: Dumps the bridge (OV511[+] or OV518[+]) register values to the system
-	log. Only useful for serious debugging/development purposes.
-
-  NAME: dump_sensor
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 0
-  DESC: Dumps the sensor register values to the system log. Only useful for
-	serious debugging/development purposes.
-
-  NAME: printph
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 0
-  DESC: Setting this to 1 will dump the first 12 bytes of each isoc frame. This
-	is only useful if you are trying to debug problems with the isoc data
-	stream (i.e.: camera initializes, but vidcat hangs until Ctrl-C). Be
-	warned that this dumps a large number of messages to your kernel log.
-
-  NAME: phy, phuv, pvy, pvuv, qhy, qhuv, qvy, qvuv
-  TYPE: integer (0-63 for phy and phuv, 0-255 for rest)
-  DEFAULT: OV511 default values
-  DESC: These are registers 70h - 77h of the OV511, which control the
-	prediction ranges and quantization thresholds of the compressor, for
-	the Y and UV channels in the horizontal and vertical directions. See
-	the OV511 or OV511+ data sheet for more detailed descriptions. These
-	normally do not need to be changed.
-
-  NAME: lightfreq
-  TYPE: integer (0, 50, or 60)
-  DEFAULT: 0 (use sensor default)
-  DESC: Sets the sensor to match your lighting frequency. This can reduce the
-	appearance of "banding", i.e. horizontal lines or waves of light and
-	dark that are often caused by artificial lighting. Valid values are:
-		0 - Use default (depends on sensor, most likely 60 Hz)
-		50 - For European and Asian 50 Hz power
-		60 - For American 60 Hz power
-
-  NAME: bandingfilter
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 0 (off)
-  DESC: Enables the sensor´s banding filter exposure algorithm. This reduces
-	or stabilizes the "banding" caused by some artificial light sources
-	(especially fluorescent). You might have to set lightfreq correctly for
-	this to work right. As an added bonus, this sometimes makes it
-	possible to capture your monitor´s output.
-
-  NAME: fastset
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 0 (off)
-  DESC: Allows picture settings (brightness, contrast, color, and hue) to take
-	effect immediately, even in the middle of a frame. This reduces the
-	time to change settings, but can ruin frames during the change. Only
-	affects OmniVision sensors.
-
-  NAME: force_palette
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 0 (off)
-  DESC: Forces the palette (color format) to a specific value. If an
-	application requests a different palette, it will be rejected, thereby
-	forcing it to try others until it succeeds. This is useful for forcing
-	greyscale mode with a color camera, for example. Supported modes are:
-		0                           (Allows all the following formats)
-		1   VIDEO_PALETTE_GREY      (Linear greyscale)
-		10  VIDEO_PALETTE_YUV420    (YUV 4:2:0 Planar)
-		15  VIDEO_PALETTE_YUV420P   (YUV 4:2:0 Planar, same as 10)
-
-  NAME: backlight
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 0 (off)
-  DESC: Setting this flag changes the exposure algorithm for OmniVision sensors
-	such that objects in the camera's view (i.e. your head) can be clearly
-	seen when they are illuminated from behind. It reduces or eliminates
-	the sensor's auto-exposure function, so it should only be used when
-	needed. Additionally, it is only supported with the OV6620 and OV7620.
-
-  NAME: unit_video
-  TYPE: Up to 16 comma-separated integers
-  DEFAULT: 0,0,0... (automatically assign the next available minor(s))
-  DESC: You can specify up to 16 minor numbers to be assigned to ov511 devices.
-	For example, "unit_video=1,3" will make the driver use /dev/video1 and
-	/dev/video3 for the first two devices it detects. Additional devices
-	will be assigned automatically starting at the first available device
-	node (/dev/video0 in this case). Note that you cannot specify 0 as a
-	minor number. This feature requires kernel version 2.4.5 or higher.
-
-  NAME: remove_zeros
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 0 (do not skip any incoming data)
-  DESC: Setting this to 1 will remove zero-padding from incoming data. This
-	will compensate for the blocks of corruption that can appear when the
-	camera cannot keep up with the speed of the USB bus (eg. at low frame
-	resolutions). This feature is always enabled when compression is on.
-
-  NAME: mirror
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 0 (off)
-  DESC: Setting this to 1 will reverse ("mirror") the image horizontally. This
-	might be necessary if your camera has a custom lens assembly. This has
-	no effect with video capture devices.
-
-  NAME: ov518_color
-  TYPE: integer (Boolean)
-  DEFAULT: 0 (off)
-  DESC: Enable OV518 color support. This is off by default since it doesn't
-	work most of the time. If you want to try it, you must also load
-	ov518_decomp with the "nouv=0" parameter. If you get improper colors or
-	diagonal lines through the image, restart your video app and try again.
-	Repeat as necessary.
-
-WORKING FEATURES:
- o Color streaming/capture at most widths and heights that are multiples of 8.
- o Monochrome (use force_palette=1 to enable)
- o Setting/getting of saturation, contrast, brightness, and hue (only some of
-   them work the OV7620 and OV7620AE)
- o /proc status reporting
- o SAA7111A video capture support at 320x240 and 640x480
- o Compression support
- o SMP compatibility
-
-HOW TO CONTACT ME:
-
-You can email me at mark@alpha.dyndns.org . Please prefix the subject line
-with "OV511: " so that I am certain to notice your message.
-
-CREDITS:
-
-The code is based in no small part on the CPiA driver by Johannes Erdfelt,
-Randy Dunlap, and others. Big thanks to them for their pioneering work on that
-and the USB stack. Thanks to Bret Wallach for getting camera reg IO, ISOC, and
-image capture working. Thanks to Orion Sky Lawlor, Kevin Moore, and Claudio
-Matsuoka for their work as well.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/se401.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/se401.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index bd6526ec8dd7..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/se401.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-Linux driver for SE401 based USB cameras
-
-Copyright, 2001, Jeroen Vreeken
-
-
-INTRODUCTION:
-
-The SE401 chip is the used in low-cost usb webcams.
-It is produced by Endpoints Inc. (www.endpoints.com).
-It interfaces directly to a cmos image sensor and USB. The only other major
-part in a se401 based camera is a dram chip.
-
-The following cameras are known to work with this driver:
-
-Aox se401 (non-branded) cameras
-Philips PVCV665 USB VGA webcam 'Vesta Fun'
-Kensington VideoCAM PC Camera Model 67014
-Kensington VideoCAM PC Camera Model 67015
-Kensington VideoCAM PC Camera Model 67016
-Kensington VideoCAM PC Camera Model 67017
-
-
-WHAT YOU NEED:
-
--	USB support
--	VIDEO4LINUX support
-
-More information about USB support for linux can be found at:
-http://www.linux-usb.org
-
-
-MODULE OPTIONS:
-
-When the driver is compiled as a module you can also use the 'flickerless'
-option. With it exposure is limited to values that do not interfere with the
-net frequency. Valid options for this option are 0, 50 and 60. (0=disable,
-50=50hz, 60=60hz)
-
-
-KNOWN PROBLEMS:
-
-The driver works fine with the usb-ohci and uhci host controller drivers,
-the default settings also work with usb-uhci. But sending more than one bulk
-transfer at a time with usb-uhci doesn't work yet.
-Users of usb-ohci and uhci can safely enlarge SE401_NUMSBUF in se401.h in
-order to increase the throughput (and thus framerate).
-
-
-HELP:
-
-The latest info on this driver can be found at:
-http://members.chello.nl/~j.vreeken/se401/
-And questions to me can be send to:
-pe1rxq@amsat.org
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt
index 3a7823e01b4d..98c32925eb39 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt
@@ -53,6 +53,9 @@ Testing is usually done with most application under Debian/testing:
 - kradio - Comfortable Radio Application for KDE
 - radio - ncurses-based radio application
 - mplayer - The Ultimate Movie Player For Linux
+- v4l2-ctl - Collection of command line video4linux utilities
+For example, you can use:
+v4l2-ctl -d /dev/radio0 --set-ctrl=volume=10,mute=0 --set-freq=95.21 --all
 
 There is also a library libv4l, which can be used. It's going to have a function
 for frequency seeking, either by using hardware functionality as in radio-si470x
@@ -75,8 +78,10 @@ commands. Please adjust the audio devices to your needs (/dev/dsp* and hw:x,x).
 If you just want to test audio (very poor quality):
 cat /dev/dsp1 > /dev/dsp
 
-If you use OSS try:
+If you use sox + OSS try:
 sox -2 --endian little -r 96000 -t oss /dev/dsp1 -t oss /dev/dsp
+or using sox + alsa:
+sox --endian little -c 2 -S -r 96000 -t alsa hw:1 -t alsa -r 96000 hw:0
 
 If you use arts try:
 arecord -D hw:1,0 -r96000 -c2 -f S16_LE | artsdsp aplay -B -
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/si476x.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/si476x.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2f9b4875ab8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/si476x.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+SI476x Driver Readme
+------------------------------------------------
+	Copyright (C) 2013 Andrey Smirnov <andrew.smirnov@gmail.com>
+
+TODO for the driver
+------------------------------
+
+- According to the SiLabs' datasheet it is possible to update the
+  firmware of the radio chip in the run-time, thus bringing it to the
+  most recent version. Unfortunately I couldn't find any mentioning of
+  the said firmware update for the old chips that I tested the driver
+  against, so for chips like that the driver only exposes the old
+  functionality.
+
+
+Parameters exposed over debugfs
+-------------------------------
+SI476x allow user to get multiple characteristics that can be very
+useful for EoL testing/RF performance estimation, parameters that have
+very little to do with V4L2 subsystem. Such parameters are exposed via
+debugfs and can be accessed via regular file I/O operations.
+
+The drivers exposes following files:
+
+* /sys/kernel/debug/<device-name>/acf
+  This file contains ACF(Automatically Controlled Features) status
+  information. The contents of the file is binary data of the
+  following layout:
+
+  Offset	| Name		| Description
+  ====================================================================
+  0x00		| blend_int	| Flag, set when stereo separation has
+  		|  		| crossed below the blend threshold
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x01		| hblend_int	| Flag, set when HiBlend cutoff
+  		| 		| frequency is lower than threshold
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x02		| hicut_int	| Flag, set when HiCut cutoff
+  		| 		| frequency is lower than threshold
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x03		| chbw_int	| Flag, set when channel filter
+  		| 		| bandwidth is less than threshold
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x04		| softmute_int	| Flag indicating that softmute
+  		| 		| attenuation has increased above
+		|		| softmute threshold
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x05		| smute		| 0 - Audio is not soft muted
+  		| 		| 1 - Audio is soft muted
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x06		| smattn	| Soft mute attenuation level in dB
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x07		| chbw		| Channel filter bandwidth in kHz
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x08		| hicut		| HiCut cutoff frequency in units of
+  		| 		| 100Hz
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x09		| hiblend	| HiBlend cutoff frequency in units
+  		| 		| of 100 Hz
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x10		| pilot		| 0 - Stereo pilot is not present
+  		| 		| 1 - Stereo pilot is present
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x11		| stblend	| Stereo blend in %
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+* /sys/kernel/debug/<device-name>/rds_blckcnt
+  This file contains statistics about RDS receptions. It's binary data
+  has the following layout:
+
+  Offset	| Name		| Description
+  ====================================================================
+  0x00		| expected	| Number of expected RDS blocks
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x02		| received	| Number of received RDS blocks
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x04		| uncorrectable	| Number of uncorrectable RDS blocks
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+* /sys/kernel/debug/<device-name>/agc
+  This file contains information about parameters pertaining to
+  AGC(Automatic Gain Control)
+
+  The layout is:
+  Offset	| Name		| Description
+  ====================================================================
+  0x00		| mxhi		| 0 - FM Mixer PD high threshold is
+  		| 		| not tripped
+		|		| 1 - FM Mixer PD high threshold is
+		|		| tripped
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x01		| mxlo		| ditto for FM Mixer PD low
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x02		| lnahi		| ditto for FM LNA PD high
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x03		| lnalo		| ditto for FM LNA PD low
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x04		| fmagc1	| FMAGC1 attenuator resistance
+  		| 		| (see datasheet for more detail)
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x05		| fmagc2	| ditto for FMAGC2
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x06		| pgagain	| PGA gain in dB
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x07		| fmwblang	| FM/WB LNA Gain in dB
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+* /sys/kernel/debug/<device-name>/rsq
+  This file contains information about parameters pertaining to
+  RSQ(Received Signal Quality)
+
+  The layout is:
+  Offset	| Name		| Description
+  ====================================================================
+  0x00		| multhint	| 0 - multipath value has not crossed
+  		| 		| the Multipath high threshold
+		|		| 1 - multipath value has crossed
+  		| 		| the Multipath high threshold
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x01		| multlint	| ditto for Multipath low threshold
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x02		| snrhint	| 0 - received signal's SNR has not
+  		| 		| crossed high threshold
+		|		| 1 - received signal's SNR has
+  		| 		| crossed high threshold
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x03		| snrlint	| ditto for low threshold
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x04		| rssihint	| ditto for RSSI high threshold
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x05		| rssilint	| ditto for RSSI low threshold
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x06		| bltf		| Flag indicating if seek command
+  		| 		| reached/wrapped seek band limit
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x07		| snr_ready	| Indicates that SNR metrics is ready
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x08		| rssiready	| ditto for RSSI metrics
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x09		| injside	| 0 - Low-side injection is being used
+  		| 		| 1 - High-side injection is used
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x10		| afcrl		| Flag indicating if AFC rails
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x11		| valid		| Flag indicating if channel is valid
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x12		| readfreq	| Current tuned frequency
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x14		| freqoff	| Singed frequency offset in units of
+  		| 		| 2ppm
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x15		| rssi		| Signed value of RSSI in dBuV
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x16		| snr		| Signed RF SNR in dB
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x17		| issi		| Signed Image Strength Signal
+  		| 		| indicator
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x18		| lassi		| Signed Low side adjacent Channel
+  		| 		| Strength indicator
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x19		| hassi		| ditto fpr High side
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x20		| mult		| Multipath indicator
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x21		| dev		| Frequency deviation
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x24		| assi		| Adjacent channel SSI
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x25		| usn		| Ultrasonic noise indicator
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x26		| pilotdev	| Pilot deviation in units of 100 Hz
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x27		| rdsdev	| ditto for RDS
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x28		| assidev	| ditto for ASSI
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x29		| strongdev	| Frequency deviation
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+  0x30		| rdspi		| RDS PI code
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+* /sys/kernel/debug/<device-name>/rsq_primary
+  This file contains information about parameters pertaining to
+  RSQ(Received Signal Quality) for primary tuner only. Layout is as
+  the one above.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt
index 3f87c7da4ca2..daa9e2ac162c 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt
@@ -9,32 +9,36 @@ The following terms are used in this document:
    of connecting to a variety of systems and interfaces, typically uses i2c for
    control and configuration, and a parallel or a serial bus for data.
  - camera host - an interface, to which a camera is connected. Typically a
-   specialised interface, present on many SoCs, e.g., PXA27x and PXA3xx, SuperH,
+   specialised interface, present on many SoCs, e.g. PXA27x and PXA3xx, SuperH,
    AVR32, i.MX27, i.MX31.
  - camera host bus - a connection between a camera host and a camera. Can be
-   parallel or serial, consists of data and control lines, e.g., clock, vertical
+   parallel or serial, consists of data and control lines, e.g. clock, vertical
    and horizontal synchronization signals.
 
 Purpose of the soc-camera subsystem
 -----------------------------------
 
-The soc-camera subsystem provides a unified API between camera host drivers and
-camera sensor drivers. It implements a V4L2 interface to the user, currently
-only the mmap method is supported.
+The soc-camera subsystem initially provided a unified API between camera host
+drivers and camera sensor drivers. Later the soc-camera sensor API has been
+replaced with the V4L2 standard subdev API. This also made camera driver re-use
+with non-soc-camera hosts possible. The camera host API to the soc-camera core
+has been preserved.
 
-This subsystem has been written to connect drivers for System-on-Chip (SoC)
-video capture interfaces with drivers for CMOS camera sensor chips to enable
-the reuse of sensor drivers with various hosts. The subsystem has been designed
-to support multiple camera host interfaces and multiple cameras per interface,
-although most applications have only one camera sensor.
+Soc-camera implements a V4L2 interface to the user, currently only the "mmap"
+method is supported by host drivers. However, the soc-camera core also provides
+support for the "read" method.
+
+The subsystem has been designed to support multiple camera host interfaces and
+multiple cameras per interface, although most applications have only one camera
+sensor.
 
 Existing drivers
 ----------------
 
-As of 2.6.27-rc4 there are two host drivers in the mainline: pxa_camera.c for
-PXA27x SoCs and sh_mobile_ceu_camera.c for SuperH SoCs, and four sensor drivers:
-mt9m001.c, mt9m111.c, mt9v022.c and a generic soc_camera_platform.c driver. This
-list is not supposed to be updated, look for more examples in your tree.
+As of 3.7 there are seven host drivers in the mainline: atmel-isi.c,
+mx1_camera.c (broken, scheduled for removal), mx2_camera.c, mx3_camera.c,
+omap1_camera.c, pxa_camera.c, sh_mobile_ceu_camera.c, and multiple sensor
+drivers under drivers/media/i2c/soc_camera/.
 
 Camera host API
 ---------------
@@ -45,38 +49,37 @@ soc_camera_host_register(struct soc_camera_host *);
 
 function. The host object can be initialized as follows:
 
-static struct soc_camera_host pxa_soc_camera_host = {
-	.drv_name	= PXA_CAM_DRV_NAME,
-	.ops		= &pxa_soc_camera_host_ops,
-};
+	struct soc_camera_host	*ici;
+	ici->drv_name		= DRV_NAME;
+	ici->ops		= &camera_host_ops;
+	ici->priv		= pcdev;
+	ici->v4l2_dev.dev	= &pdev->dev;
+	ici->nr			= pdev->id;
 
 All camera host methods are passed in a struct soc_camera_host_ops:
 
-static struct soc_camera_host_ops pxa_soc_camera_host_ops = {
+static struct soc_camera_host_ops camera_host_ops = {
 	.owner		= THIS_MODULE,
-	.add		= pxa_camera_add_device,
-	.remove		= pxa_camera_remove_device,
-	.suspend	= pxa_camera_suspend,
-	.resume		= pxa_camera_resume,
-	.set_fmt_cap	= pxa_camera_set_fmt_cap,
-	.try_fmt_cap	= pxa_camera_try_fmt_cap,
-	.init_videobuf	= pxa_camera_init_videobuf,
-	.reqbufs	= pxa_camera_reqbufs,
-	.poll		= pxa_camera_poll,
-	.querycap	= pxa_camera_querycap,
-	.try_bus_param	= pxa_camera_try_bus_param,
-	.set_bus_param	= pxa_camera_set_bus_param,
+	.add		= camera_add_device,
+	.remove		= camera_remove_device,
+	.set_fmt	= camera_set_fmt_cap,
+	.try_fmt	= camera_try_fmt_cap,
+	.init_videobuf2	= camera_init_videobuf2,
+	.poll		= camera_poll,
+	.querycap	= camera_querycap,
+	.set_bus_param	= camera_set_bus_param,
+	/* The rest of host operations are optional */
 };
 
 .add and .remove methods are called when a sensor is attached to or detached
-from the host, apart from performing host-internal tasks they shall also call
-sensor driver's .init and .release methods respectively. .suspend and .resume
-methods implement host's power-management functionality and its their
-responsibility to call respective sensor's methods. .try_bus_param and
-.set_bus_param are used to negotiate physical connection parameters between the
-host and the sensor. .init_videobuf is called by soc-camera core when a
-video-device is opened, further video-buffer management is implemented completely
-by the specific camera host driver. The rest of the methods are called from
+from the host. .set_bus_param is used to configure physical connection
+parameters between the host and the sensor. .init_videobuf2 is called by
+soc-camera core when a video-device is opened, the host driver would typically
+call vb2_queue_init() in this method. Further video-buffer management is
+implemented completely by the specific camera host driver. If the host driver
+supports non-standard pixel format conversion, it should implement a
+.get_formats and, possibly, a .put_formats operations. See below for more
+details about format conversion. The rest of the methods are called from
 respective V4L2 operations.
 
 Camera API
@@ -84,37 +87,21 @@ Camera API
 
 Sensor drivers can use struct soc_camera_link, typically provided by the
 platform, and used to specify to which camera host bus the sensor is connected,
-and arbitrarily provide platform .power and .reset methods for the camera.
-soc_camera_device_register() and soc_camera_device_unregister() functions are
-used to add a sensor driver to or remove one from the system. The registration
-function takes a pointer to struct soc_camera_device as the only parameter.
-This struct can be initialized as follows:
-
-	/* link to driver operations */
-	icd->ops	= &mt9m001_ops;
-	/* link to the underlying physical (e.g., i2c) device */
-	icd->control	= &client->dev;
-	/* window geometry */
-	icd->x_min	= 20;
-	icd->y_min	= 12;
-	icd->x_current	= 20;
-	icd->y_current	= 12;
-	icd->width_min	= 48;
-	icd->width_max	= 1280;
-	icd->height_min	= 32;
-	icd->height_max	= 1024;
-	icd->y_skip_top	= 1;
-	/* camera bus ID, typically obtained from platform data */
-	icd->iface	= icl->bus_id;
-
-struct soc_camera_ops provides .probe and .remove methods, which are called by
-the soc-camera core, when a camera is matched against or removed from a camera
-host bus, .init, .release, .suspend, and .resume are called from the camera host
-driver as discussed above. Other members of this struct provide respective V4L2
-functionality.
-
-struct soc_camera_device also links to an array of struct soc_camera_data_format,
-listing pixel formats, supported by the camera.
+and optionally provide platform .power and .reset methods for the camera. This
+struct is provided to the camera driver via the I2C client device platform data
+and can be obtained, using the soc_camera_i2c_to_link() macro. Care should be
+taken, when using soc_camera_vdev_to_subdev() and when accessing struct
+soc_camera_device, using v4l2_get_subdev_hostdata(): both only work, when
+running on an soc-camera host. The actual camera driver operation is implemented
+using the V4L2 subdev API. Additionally soc-camera camera drivers can use
+auxiliary soc-camera helper functions like soc_camera_power_on() and
+soc_camera_power_off(), which switch regulators, provided by the platform and call
+board-specific power switching methods. soc_camera_apply_board_flags() takes
+camera bus configuration capability flags and applies any board transformations,
+e.g. signal polarity inversion. soc_mbus_get_fmtdesc() can be used to obtain a
+pixel format descriptor, corresponding to a certain media-bus pixel format code.
+soc_camera_limit_side() can be used to restrict beginning and length of a frame
+side, based on camera capabilities.
 
 VIDIOC_S_CROP and VIDIOC_S_FMT behaviour
 ----------------------------------------
@@ -129,7 +116,7 @@ VIDIOC_S_FMT: sets user window. Should preserve previously set sensor window as
 much as possible by modifying scaling factors. If the sensor window cannot be
 preserved precisely, it may be changed too.
 
-In soc-camera there are two locations, where scaling and cropping can taks
+In soc-camera there are two locations, where scaling and cropping can take
 place: in the camera driver and in the host driver. User ioctls are first passed
 to the host driver, which then generally passes them down to the camera driver.
 It is more efficient to perform scaling and cropping in the camera driver to
@@ -153,8 +140,25 @@ implemented.
 User window geometry is kept in .user_width and .user_height fields in struct
 soc_camera_device and used by the soc-camera core and host drivers. The core
 updates these fields upon successful completion of a .s_fmt() call, but if these
-fields change elsewhere, e.g., during .s_crop() processing, the host driver is
+fields change elsewhere, e.g. during .s_crop() processing, the host driver is
 responsible for updating them.
 
+Format conversion
+-----------------
+
+V4L2 distinguishes between pixel formats, as they are stored in memory, and as
+they are transferred over a media bus. Soc-camera provides support to
+conveniently manage these formats. A table of standard transformations is
+maintained by soc-camera core, which describes, what FOURCC pixel format will
+be obtained, if a media-bus pixel format is stored in memory according to
+certain rules. E.g. if V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV8_2X8 data is sampled with 8 bits per
+sample and stored in memory in the little-endian order with no gaps between
+bytes, data in memory will represent the V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUYV FOURCC format. These
+standard transformations will be used by soc-camera or by camera host drivers to
+configure camera drivers to produce the FOURCC format, requested by the user,
+using the VIDIOC_S_FMT ioctl(). Apart from those standard format conversions,
+host drivers can also provide their own conversion rules by implementing a
+.get_formats and, if required, a .put_formats methods.
+
 --
 Author: Guennadi Liakhovetski <g.liakhovetski@gmx.de>
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/stv680.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/stv680.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 4f8946f32f51..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/stv680.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-Linux driver for STV0680 based USB cameras
-
-Copyright, 2001, Kevin Sisson
-
-
-INTRODUCTION:
-
-STMicroelectronics produces the STV0680B chip, which comes in two
-types, -001 and -003. The -003 version allows the recording and downloading
-of sound clips from the camera, and allows a flash attachment. Otherwise,
-it uses the same commands as the -001 version. Both versions support a
-variety of SDRAM sizes and sensors, allowing for a maximum of 26 VGA or 20
-CIF pictures. The STV0680 supports either a serial or a usb interface, and
-video is possible through the usb interface.
-
-The following cameras are known to work with this driver, although any
-camera with Vendor/Product codes of 0553/0202 should work:
-
-Aiptek Pencam (various models)
-Nisis QuickPix 2
-Radio Shack 'Kid's digital camera' (#60-1207)
-At least one Trust Spycam model
-Several other European brand models
-
-WHAT YOU NEED:
-
--	USB support
--	VIDEO4LINUX support
-
-More information about USB support for linux can be found at:
-http://www.linux-usb.org
-
-
-MODULE OPTIONS:
-
-When the driver is compiled as a module, you can set a "swapRGB=1"
-option, if necessary, for those applications that require it
-(such as xawtv). However, the driver should detect and set this
-automatically, so this option should not normally be used.
-
-
-KNOWN PROBLEMS:
-
-The driver seems to work better with the usb-ohci than the usb-uhci host
-controller driver.
-
-HELP:
-
-The latest info on this driver can be found at:
-http://personal.clt.bellsouth.net/~kjsisson or at
-http://stv0680-usb.sourceforge.net
-
-Any questions to me can be send to:  kjsisson@bellsouth.net
-\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt
index e2492a9d1027..06cf3ac83631 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt
@@ -124,14 +124,39 @@ You add non-menu controls by calling v4l2_ctrl_new_std:
 			const struct v4l2_ctrl_ops *ops,
 			u32 id, s32 min, s32 max, u32 step, s32 def);
 
-Menu controls are added by calling v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu:
+Menu and integer menu controls are added by calling v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu:
 
 	struct v4l2_ctrl *v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu(struct v4l2_ctrl_handler *hdl,
 			const struct v4l2_ctrl_ops *ops,
 			u32 id, s32 max, s32 skip_mask, s32 def);
 
+Menu controls with a driver specific menu are added by calling
+v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu_items:
+
+       struct v4l2_ctrl *v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu_items(
+                       struct v4l2_ctrl_handler *hdl,
+                       const struct v4l2_ctrl_ops *ops, u32 id, s32 max,
+                       s32 skip_mask, s32 def, const char * const *qmenu);
+
+Integer menu controls with a driver specific menu can be added by calling
+v4l2_ctrl_new_int_menu:
+
+	struct v4l2_ctrl *v4l2_ctrl_new_int_menu(struct v4l2_ctrl_handler *hdl,
+			const struct v4l2_ctrl_ops *ops,
+			u32 id, s32 max, s32 def, const s64 *qmenu_int);
+
 These functions are typically called right after the v4l2_ctrl_handler_init:
 
+	static const s64 exp_bias_qmenu[] = {
+	       -2, -1, 0, 1, 2
+	};
+	static const char * const test_pattern[] = {
+		"Disabled",
+		"Vertical Bars",
+		"Solid Black",
+		"Solid White",
+	};
+
 	v4l2_ctrl_handler_init(&foo->ctrl_handler, nr_of_controls);
 	v4l2_ctrl_new_std(&foo->ctrl_handler, &foo_ctrl_ops,
 			V4L2_CID_BRIGHTNESS, 0, 255, 1, 128);
@@ -141,6 +166,14 @@ These functions are typically called right after the v4l2_ctrl_handler_init:
 			V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY,
 			V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY_60HZ, 0,
 			V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY_DISABLED);
+	v4l2_ctrl_new_int_menu(&foo->ctrl_handler, &foo_ctrl_ops,
+			V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_BIAS,
+			ARRAY_SIZE(exp_bias_qmenu) - 1,
+			ARRAY_SIZE(exp_bias_qmenu) / 2 - 1,
+			exp_bias_qmenu);
+	v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu_items(&foo->ctrl_handler, &foo_ctrl_ops,
+			V4L2_CID_TEST_PATTERN, ARRAY_SIZE(test_pattern) - 1, 0,
+			0, test_pattern);
 	...
 	if (foo->ctrl_handler.error) {
 		int err = foo->ctrl_handler.error;
@@ -164,6 +197,19 @@ controls. There is no min argument since that is always 0 for menu controls,
 and instead of a step there is a skip_mask argument: if bit X is 1, then menu
 item X is skipped.
 
+The v4l2_ctrl_new_int_menu function creates a new standard integer menu
+control with driver-specific items in the menu. It differs from
+v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu in that it doesn't have the mask argument and takes
+as the last argument an array of signed 64-bit integers that form an exact
+menu item list.
+
+The v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu_items function is very similar to
+v4l2_ctrl_new_std_menu but takes an extra parameter qmenu, which is the driver
+specific menu for an otherwise standard menu control. A good example for this
+control is the test pattern control for capture/display/sensors devices that
+have the capability to generate test patterns. These test patterns are hardware
+specific, so the contents of the menu will vary from device to device.
+
 Note that if something fails, the function will return NULL or an error and
 set ctrl_handler->error to the error code. If ctrl_handler->error was already
 set, then it will just return and do nothing. This is also true for
@@ -573,7 +619,11 @@ handler and finally add the first handler to the second. For example:
 	v4l2_ctrl_new_std(&radio_ctrl_handler, &radio_ops, V4L2_CID_AUDIO_MUTE, ...);
 	v4l2_ctrl_new_std(&video_ctrl_handler, &video_ops, V4L2_CID_BRIGHTNESS, ...);
 	v4l2_ctrl_new_std(&video_ctrl_handler, &video_ops, V4L2_CID_CONTRAST, ...);
-	v4l2_ctrl_add_handler(&video_ctrl_handler, &radio_ctrl_handler);
+	v4l2_ctrl_add_handler(&video_ctrl_handler, &radio_ctrl_handler, NULL);
+
+The last argument to v4l2_ctrl_add_handler() is a filter function that allows
+you to filter which controls will be added. Set it to NULL if you want to add
+all controls.
 
 Or you can add specific controls to a handler:
 
@@ -666,14 +716,20 @@ a control of this type whenever the first control belonging to a new control
 class is added.
 
 
-Proposals for Extensions
-========================
+Adding Notify Callbacks
+=======================
+
+Sometimes the platform or bridge driver needs to be notified when a control
+from a sub-device driver changes. You can set a notify callback by calling
+this function:
 
-Some ideas for future extensions to the spec:
+void v4l2_ctrl_notify(struct v4l2_ctrl *ctrl,
+	void (*notify)(struct v4l2_ctrl *ctrl, void *priv), void *priv);
 
-1) Add a V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_HEX to have values shown as hexadecimal instead of
-decimal. Useful for e.g. video_mute_yuv.
+Whenever the give control changes value the notify callback will be called
+with a pointer to the control and the priv pointer that was passed with
+v4l2_ctrl_notify. Note that the control's handler lock is held when the
+notify function is called.
 
-2) It is possible to mark in the controls array which controls have been
-successfully written and which failed by for example adding a bit to the
-control ID. Not sure if it is worth the effort, though.
+There can be only one notify function per control handler. Any attempt
+to set another notify function will cause a WARN_ON.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt
index 659b2ba12a4f..6c4866b49eb5 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt
@@ -68,8 +68,7 @@ Structure of the framework
 The framework closely resembles the driver structure: it has a v4l2_device
 struct for the device instance data, a v4l2_subdev struct to refer to
 sub-device instances, the video_device struct stores V4L2 device node data
-and in the future a v4l2_fh struct will keep track of filehandle instances
-(this is not yet implemented).
+and the v4l2_fh struct keeps track of filehandle instances.
 
 The V4L2 framework also optionally integrates with the media framework. If a
 driver sets the struct v4l2_device mdev field, sub-devices and video nodes
@@ -174,19 +173,18 @@ The recommended approach is as follows:
 
 static atomic_t drv_instance = ATOMIC_INIT(0);
 
-static int __devinit drv_probe(struct pci_dev *pdev,
-				const struct pci_device_id *pci_id)
+static int drv_probe(struct pci_dev *pdev, const struct pci_device_id *pci_id)
 {
 	...
 	state->instance = atomic_inc_return(&drv_instance) - 1;
 }
 
 If you have multiple device nodes then it can be difficult to know when it is
-safe to unregister v4l2_device. For this purpose v4l2_device has refcounting
-support. The refcount is increased whenever video_register_device is called and
-it is decreased whenever that device node is released. When the refcount reaches
-zero, then the v4l2_device release() callback is called. You can do your final
-cleanup there.
+safe to unregister v4l2_device for hotpluggable devices. For this purpose
+v4l2_device has refcounting support. The refcount is increased whenever
+video_register_device is called and it is decreased whenever that device node
+is released. When the refcount reaches zero, then the v4l2_device release()
+callback is called. You can do your final cleanup there.
 
 If other device nodes (e.g. ALSA) are created, then you can increase and
 decrease the refcount manually as well by calling:
@@ -197,6 +195,10 @@ or:
 
 int v4l2_device_put(struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev);
 
+Since the initial refcount is 1 you also need to call v4l2_device_put in the
+disconnect() callback (for USB devices) or in the remove() callback (for e.g.
+PCI devices), otherwise the refcount will never reach 0.
+
 struct v4l2_subdev
 ------------------
 
@@ -244,7 +246,6 @@ may be NULL if the subdev driver does not support anything from that category.
 It looks like this:
 
 struct v4l2_subdev_core_ops {
-	int (*g_chip_ident)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd, struct v4l2_dbg_chip_ident *chip);
 	int (*log_status)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd);
 	int (*init)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd, u32 val);
 	...
@@ -262,11 +263,16 @@ struct v4l2_subdev_video_ops {
 	...
 };
 
+struct v4l2_subdev_pad_ops {
+	...
+};
+
 struct v4l2_subdev_ops {
 	const struct v4l2_subdev_core_ops  *core;
 	const struct v4l2_subdev_tuner_ops *tuner;
 	const struct v4l2_subdev_audio_ops *audio;
 	const struct v4l2_subdev_video_ops *video;
+	const struct v4l2_subdev_pad_ops *video;
 };
 
 The core ops are common to all subdevs, the other categories are implemented
@@ -303,8 +309,43 @@ Don't forget to cleanup the media entity before the sub-device is destroyed:
 
 	media_entity_cleanup(&sd->entity);
 
-A device (bridge) driver needs to register the v4l2_subdev with the
-v4l2_device:
+If the subdev driver intends to process video and integrate with the media
+framework, it must implement format related functionality using
+v4l2_subdev_pad_ops instead of v4l2_subdev_video_ops.
+
+In that case, the subdev driver may set the link_validate field to provide
+its own link validation function. The link validation function is called for
+every link in the pipeline where both of the ends of the links are V4L2
+sub-devices. The driver is still responsible for validating the correctness
+of the format configuration between sub-devices and video nodes.
+
+If link_validate op is not set, the default function
+v4l2_subdev_link_validate_default() is used instead. This function ensures
+that width, height and the media bus pixel code are equal on both source and
+sink of the link. Subdev drivers are also free to use this function to
+perform the checks mentioned above in addition to their own checks.
+
+There are currently two ways to register subdevices with the V4L2 core. The
+first (traditional) possibility is to have subdevices registered by bridge
+drivers. This can be done when the bridge driver has the complete information
+about subdevices connected to it and knows exactly when to register them. This
+is typically the case for internal subdevices, like video data processing units
+within SoCs or complex PCI(e) boards, camera sensors in USB cameras or connected
+to SoCs, which pass information about them to bridge drivers, usually in their
+platform data.
+
+There are however also situations where subdevices have to be registered
+asynchronously to bridge devices. An example of such a configuration is a Device
+Tree based system where information about subdevices is made available to the
+system independently from the bridge devices, e.g. when subdevices are defined
+in DT as I2C device nodes. The API used in this second case is described further
+below.
+
+Using one or the other registration method only affects the probing process, the
+run-time bridge-subdevice interaction is in both cases the same.
+
+In the synchronous case a device (bridge) driver needs to register the
+v4l2_subdev with the v4l2_device:
 
 	int err = v4l2_device_register_subdev(v4l2_dev, sd);
 
@@ -323,24 +364,24 @@ Afterwards the subdev module can be unloaded and sd->dev == NULL.
 
 You can call an ops function either directly:
 
-	err = sd->ops->core->g_chip_ident(sd, &chip);
+	err = sd->ops->core->g_std(sd, &norm);
 
 but it is better and easier to use this macro:
 
-	err = v4l2_subdev_call(sd, core, g_chip_ident, &chip);
+	err = v4l2_subdev_call(sd, core, g_std, &norm);
 
 The macro will to the right NULL pointer checks and returns -ENODEV if subdev
-is NULL, -ENOIOCTLCMD if either subdev->core or subdev->core->g_chip_ident is
-NULL, or the actual result of the subdev->ops->core->g_chip_ident ops.
+is NULL, -ENOIOCTLCMD if either subdev->core or subdev->core->g_std is
+NULL, or the actual result of the subdev->ops->core->g_std ops.
 
 It is also possible to call all or a subset of the sub-devices:
 
-	v4l2_device_call_all(v4l2_dev, 0, core, g_chip_ident, &chip);
+	v4l2_device_call_all(v4l2_dev, 0, core, g_std, &norm);
 
 Any subdev that does not support this ops is skipped and error results are
 ignored. If you want to check for errors use this:
 
-	err = v4l2_device_call_until_err(v4l2_dev, 0, core, g_chip_ident, &chip);
+	err = v4l2_device_call_until_err(v4l2_dev, 0, core, g_std, &norm);
 
 Any error except -ENOIOCTLCMD will exit the loop with that error. If no
 errors (except -ENOIOCTLCMD) occurred, then 0 is returned.
@@ -371,6 +412,30 @@ controlled through GPIO pins. This distinction is only relevant when setting
 up the device, but once the subdev is registered it is completely transparent.
 
 
+In the asynchronous case subdevice probing can be invoked independently of the
+bridge driver availability. The subdevice driver then has to verify whether all
+the requirements for a successful probing are satisfied. This can include a
+check for a master clock availability. If any of the conditions aren't satisfied
+the driver might decide to return -EPROBE_DEFER to request further reprobing
+attempts. Once all conditions are met the subdevice shall be registered using
+the v4l2_async_register_subdev() function. Unregistration is performed using
+the v4l2_async_unregister_subdev() call. Subdevices registered this way are
+stored in a global list of subdevices, ready to be picked up by bridge drivers.
+
+Bridge drivers in turn have to register a notifier object with an array of
+subdevice descriptors that the bridge device needs for its operation. This is
+performed using the v4l2_async_notifier_register() call. To unregister the
+notifier the driver has to call v4l2_async_notifier_unregister(). The former of
+the two functions takes two arguments: a pointer to struct v4l2_device and a
+pointer to struct v4l2_async_notifier. The latter contains a pointer to an array
+of pointers to subdevice descriptors of type struct v4l2_async_subdev type. The
+V4L2 core will then use these descriptors to match asynchronously registered
+subdevices to them. If a match is detected the .bound() notifier callback is
+called. After all subdevices have been located the .complete() callback is
+called. When a subdevice is removed from the system the .unbind() method is
+called. All three callbacks are optional.
+
+
 V4L2 sub-device userspace API
 -----------------------------
 
@@ -552,31 +617,60 @@ of the video device exits.
 The default video_device_release() callback just calls kfree to free the
 allocated memory.
 
+There is also a video_device_release_empty() function that does nothing
+(is empty) and can be used if the struct is embedded and there is nothing
+to do when it is released.
+
 You should also set these fields:
 
-- v4l2_dev: set to the v4l2_device parent device.
+- v4l2_dev: must be set to the v4l2_device parent device.
+
 - name: set to something descriptive and unique.
+
+- vfl_dir: set this to VFL_DIR_RX for capture devices (VFL_DIR_RX has value 0,
+  so this is normally already the default), set to VFL_DIR_TX for output
+  devices and VFL_DIR_M2M for mem2mem (codec) devices.
+
 - fops: set to the v4l2_file_operations struct.
+
 - ioctl_ops: if you use the v4l2_ioctl_ops to simplify ioctl maintenance
   (highly recommended to use this and it might become compulsory in the
-  future!), then set this to your v4l2_ioctl_ops struct.
+  future!), then set this to your v4l2_ioctl_ops struct. The vfl_type and
+  vfl_dir fields are used to disable ops that do not match the type/dir
+  combination. E.g. VBI ops are disabled for non-VBI nodes, and output ops
+  are disabled for a capture device. This makes it possible to provide
+  just one v4l2_ioctl_ops struct for both vbi and video nodes.
+
 - lock: leave to NULL if you want to do all the locking in the driver.
-  Otherwise you give it a pointer to a struct mutex_lock and before any
-  of the v4l2_file_operations is called this lock will be taken by the
-  core and released afterwards.
+  Otherwise you give it a pointer to a struct mutex_lock and before the
+  unlocked_ioctl file operation is called this lock will be taken by the
+  core and released afterwards. See the next section for more details.
+
+- queue: a pointer to the struct vb2_queue associated with this device node.
+  If queue is non-NULL, and queue->lock is non-NULL, then queue->lock is
+  used for the queuing ioctls (VIDIOC_REQBUFS, CREATE_BUFS, QBUF, DQBUF,
+  QUERYBUF, PREPARE_BUF, STREAMON and STREAMOFF) instead of the lock above.
+  That way the vb2 queuing framework does not have to wait for other ioctls.
+  This queue pointer is also used by the vb2 helper functions to check for
+  queuing ownership (i.e. is the filehandle calling it allowed to do the
+  operation).
+
 - prio: keeps track of the priorities. Used to implement VIDIOC_G/S_PRIORITY.
   If left to NULL, then it will use the struct v4l2_prio_state in v4l2_device.
   If you want to have a separate priority state per (group of) device node(s),
   then you can point it to your own struct v4l2_prio_state.
-- parent: you only set this if v4l2_device was registered with NULL as
+
+- dev_parent: you only set this if v4l2_device was registered with NULL as
   the parent device struct. This only happens in cases where one hardware
   device has multiple PCI devices that all share the same v4l2_device core.
 
   The cx88 driver is an example of this: one core v4l2_device struct, but
-  it is used by both an raw video PCI device (cx8800) and a MPEG PCI device
-  (cx8802). Since the v4l2_device cannot be associated with a particular
-  PCI device it is setup without a parent device. But when the struct
-  video_device is setup you do know which parent PCI device to use.
+  it is used by both a raw video PCI device (cx8800) and a MPEG PCI device
+  (cx8802). Since the v4l2_device cannot be associated with two PCI devices
+  at the same time it is setup without a parent device. But when the struct
+  video_device is initialized you *do* know which parent PCI device to use and
+  so you set dev_device to the correct PCI device.
+
 - flags: optional. Set to V4L2_FL_USE_FH_PRIO if you want to let the framework
   handle the VIDIOC_G/S_PRIORITY ioctls. This requires that you use struct
   v4l2_fh. Eventually this flag will disappear once all drivers use the core
@@ -587,6 +681,16 @@ in your v4l2_file_operations struct.
 
 Do not use .ioctl! This is deprecated and will go away in the future.
 
+In some cases you want to tell the core that a function you had specified in
+your v4l2_ioctl_ops should be ignored. You can mark such ioctls by calling this
+function before video_device_register is called:
+
+void v4l2_disable_ioctl(struct video_device *vdev, unsigned int cmd);
+
+This tends to be needed if based on external factors (e.g. which card is
+being used) you want to turns off certain features in v4l2_ioctl_ops without
+having to make a new struct.
+
 The v4l2_file_operations struct is a subset of file_operations. The main
 difference is that the inode argument is omitted since it is never used.
 
@@ -605,33 +709,43 @@ manually set the struct media_entity type and name fields.
 A reference to the entity will be automatically acquired/released when the
 video device is opened/closed.
 
-v4l2_file_operations and locking
---------------------------------
+ioctls and locking
+------------------
+
+The V4L core provides optional locking services. The main service is the
+lock field in struct video_device, which is a pointer to a mutex. If you set
+this pointer, then that will be used by unlocked_ioctl to serialize all ioctls.
+
+If you are using the videobuf2 framework, then there is a second lock that you
+can set: video_device->queue->lock. If set, then this lock will be used instead
+of video_device->lock to serialize all queuing ioctls (see the previous section
+for the full list of those ioctls).
 
-You can set a pointer to a mutex_lock in struct video_device. Usually this
-will be either a top-level mutex or a mutex per device node. If you want
-finer-grained locking then you have to set it to NULL and do you own locking.
+The advantage of using a different lock for the queuing ioctls is that for some
+drivers (particularly USB drivers) certain commands such as setting controls
+can take a long time, so you want to use a separate lock for the buffer queuing
+ioctls. That way your VIDIOC_DQBUF doesn't stall because the driver is busy
+changing the e.g. exposure of the webcam.
 
-It is up to the driver developer to decide which method to use. However, if
-your driver has high-latency operations (for example, changing the exposure
-of a USB webcam might take a long time), then you might be better off with
-doing your own locking if you want to allow the user to do other things with
-the device while waiting for the high-latency command to finish.
+Of course, you can always do all the locking yourself by leaving both lock
+pointers at NULL.
 
-If a lock is specified then all file operations will be serialized on that
-lock. If you use videobuf then you must pass the same lock to the videobuf
-queue initialize function: if videobuf has to wait for a frame to arrive, then
-it will temporarily unlock the lock and relock it afterwards. If your driver
-also waits in the code, then you should do the same to allow other processes
-to access the device node while the first process is waiting for something.
+If you use the old videobuf then you must pass the video_device lock to the
+videobuf queue initialize function: if videobuf has to wait for a frame to
+arrive, then it will temporarily unlock the lock and relock it afterwards. If
+your driver also waits in the code, then you should do the same to allow other
+processes to access the device node while the first process is waiting for
+something.
 
 In the case of videobuf2 you will need to implement the wait_prepare and
-wait_finish callbacks to unlock/lock if applicable. In particular, if you use
-the lock in struct video_device then you must unlock/lock this mutex in
-wait_prepare and wait_finish.
+wait_finish callbacks to unlock/lock if applicable. If you use the queue->lock
+pointer, then you can use the helper functions vb2_ops_wait_prepare/finish.
 
-The implementation of a hotplug disconnect should also take the lock before
-calling v4l2_device_disconnect.
+The implementation of a hotplug disconnect should also take the lock from
+video_device before calling v4l2_device_disconnect. If you are also using
+video_device->queue->lock, then you have to first lock video_device->queue->lock
+followed by video_device->lock. That way you can be sure no ioctl is running
+when you call v4l2_device_disconnect.
 
 video_device registration
 -------------------------
@@ -941,21 +1055,35 @@ fast.
 
 Useful functions:
 
-- v4l2_event_queue()
+void v4l2_event_queue(struct video_device *vdev, const struct v4l2_event *ev)
 
   Queue events to video device. The driver's only responsibility is to fill
   in the type and the data fields. The other fields will be filled in by
   V4L2.
 
-- v4l2_event_subscribe()
+int v4l2_event_subscribe(struct v4l2_fh *fh,
+			 struct v4l2_event_subscription *sub, unsigned elems,
+			 const struct v4l2_subscribed_event_ops *ops)
 
   The video_device->ioctl_ops->vidioc_subscribe_event must check the driver
   is able to produce events with specified event id. Then it calls
-  v4l2_event_subscribe() to subscribe the event. The last argument is the
-  size of the event queue for this event. If it is 0, then the framework
-  will fill in a default value (this depends on the event type).
+  v4l2_event_subscribe() to subscribe the event.
 
-- v4l2_event_unsubscribe()
+  The elems argument is the size of the event queue for this event. If it is 0,
+  then the framework will fill in a default value (this depends on the event
+  type).
+
+  The ops argument allows the driver to specify a number of callbacks:
+  * add:     called when a new listener gets added (subscribing to the same
+             event twice will only cause this callback to get called once)
+  * del:     called when a listener stops listening
+  * replace: replace event 'old' with event 'new'.
+  * merge:   merge event 'old' into event 'new'.
+  All 4 callbacks are optional, if you don't want to specify any callbacks
+  the ops argument itself maybe NULL.
+
+int v4l2_event_unsubscribe(struct v4l2_fh *fh,
+			   struct v4l2_event_subscription *sub)
 
   vidioc_unsubscribe_event in struct v4l2_ioctl_ops. A driver may use
   v4l2_event_unsubscribe() directly unless it wants to be involved in
@@ -964,7 +1092,7 @@ Useful functions:
   The special type V4L2_EVENT_ALL may be used to unsubscribe all events. The
   drivers may want to handle this in a special way.
 
-- v4l2_event_pending()
+int v4l2_event_pending(struct v4l2_fh *fh)
 
   Returns the number of pending events. Useful when implementing poll.
 
@@ -979,4 +1107,30 @@ The first event type in the class is reserved for future use, so the first
 available event type is 'class base + 1'.
 
 An example on how the V4L2 events may be used can be found in the OMAP
-3 ISP driver (drivers/media/video/omap3isp).
+3 ISP driver (drivers/media/platform/omap3isp).
+
+
+V4L2 clocks
+-----------
+
+Many subdevices, like camera sensors, TV decoders and encoders, need a clock
+signal to be supplied by the system. Often this clock is supplied by the
+respective bridge device. The Linux kernel provides a Common Clock Framework for
+this purpose. However, it is not (yet) available on all architectures. Besides,
+the nature of the multi-functional (clock, data + synchronisation, I2C control)
+connection of subdevices to the system might impose special requirements on the
+clock API usage. E.g. V4L2 has to support clock provider driver unregistration
+while a subdevice driver is holding a reference to the clock. For these reasons
+a V4L2 clock helper API has been developed and is provided to bridge and
+subdevice drivers.
+
+The API consists of two parts: two functions to register and unregister a V4L2
+clock source: v4l2_clk_register() and v4l2_clk_unregister() and calls to control
+a clock object, similar to the respective generic clock API calls:
+v4l2_clk_get(), v4l2_clk_put(), v4l2_clk_enable(), v4l2_clk_disable(),
+v4l2_clk_get_rate(), and v4l2_clk_set_rate(). Clock suppliers have to provide
+clock operations that will be called when clock users invoke respective API
+methods.
+
+It is expected that once the CCF becomes available on all relevant
+architectures this API will be removed.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf b/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf
index 1d00d7f15b8f..3ffe9e960b6f 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf
@@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ again.
 Developers who are interested in more information can go into the relevant
 header files; there are a few low-level functions declared there which have
 not been talked about here.  Also worthwhile is the vivi driver
-(drivers/media/video/vivi.c), which is maintained as an example of how V4L2
+(drivers/media/platform/vivi.c), which is maintained as an example of how V4L2
 drivers should be written.  Vivi only uses the vmalloc() API, but it's good
 enough to get started with.  Note also that all of these calls are exported
 GPL-only, so they will not be available to non-GPL kernel modules.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 9649450f3b90..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,458 +0,0 @@
-
-		   W996[87]CF JPEG USB Dual Mode Camera Chip
-		     Driver for Linux 2.6 (basic version)
-		   =========================================
-
-			       - Documentation -
-
-
-Index
-=====
-1.  Copyright
-2.  Disclaimer
-3.  License
-4.  Overview
-5.  Supported devices
-6.  Module dependencies
-7.  Module loading
-8.  Module parameters
-9.  Contact information
-10. Credits
-
-
-1. Copyright
-============
-Copyright (C) 2002-2004 by Luca Risolia <luca.risolia@studio.unibo.it>
-
-
-2. Disclaimer
-=============
-Winbond is a trademark of Winbond Electronics Corporation.
-This software is not sponsored or developed by Winbond.
-
-
-3. License
-==========
-This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-(at your option) any later version.
-
-This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-
-
-4. Overview
-===========
-This driver supports the video streaming capabilities of the devices mounting
-Winbond W9967CF and Winbond W9968CF JPEG USB Dual Mode Camera Chips. OV681
-based cameras should be supported as well.
-
-The driver is divided into two modules: the basic one, "w9968cf", is needed for
-the supported devices to work; the second one, "w9968cf-vpp", is an optional
-module, which provides some useful video post-processing functions like video
-decoding, up-scaling and colour conversions.
-
-Note that the official kernels do neither include nor support the second
-module for performance purposes. Therefore, it is always recommended to
-download and install the latest and complete release of the driver,
-replacing the existing one, if present.
-
-The latest and full-featured version of the W996[87]CF driver can be found at:
-http://www.linux-projects.org. Please refer to the documentation included in
-that package, if you are going to use it.
-
-Up to 32 cameras can be handled at the same time. They can be connected and
-disconnected from the host many times without turning off the computer, if
-your system supports the hotplug facility.
-
-To change the default settings for each camera, many parameters can be passed
-through command line when the module is loaded into memory.
-
-The driver relies on the Video4Linux, USB and I2C core modules. It has been
-designed to run properly on SMP systems as well. An additional module,
-"ovcamchip", is mandatory; it provides support for some OmniVision image
-sensors connected to the W996[87]CF chips; if found in the system, the module
-will be automatically loaded by default (provided that the kernel has been
-compiled with the automatic module loading option).
-
-
-5. Supported devices
-====================
-At the moment, known W996[87]CF and OV681 based devices are:
-- Aroma Digi Pen VGA Dual Mode ADG-5000 (unknown image sensor)
-- AVerMedia AVerTV USB (SAA7111A, Philips FI1216Mk2 tuner, PT2313L audio chip)
-- Creative Labs Video Blaster WebCam Go (OmniVision OV7610 sensor)
-- Creative Labs Video Blaster WebCam Go Plus (OmniVision OV7620 sensor)
-- Lebon LDC-035A (unknown image sensor)
-- Ezonics EZ-802 EZMega Cam (OmniVision OV8610C sensor)
-- OmniVision OV8610-EDE (OmniVision OV8610 sensor)
-- OPCOM Digi Pen VGA Dual Mode Pen Camera (unknown image sensor)
-- Pretec Digi Pen-II (OmniVision OV7620 sensor)
-- Pretec DigiPen-480 (OmniVision OV8610 sensor)
-
-If you know any other W996[87]CF or OV681 based cameras, please contact me.
-
-The list above does not imply that all those devices work with this driver: up
-until now only webcams that have an image sensor supported by the "ovcamchip"
-module work. Kernel messages will always tell you whether this is case.
-
-Possible external microcontrollers of those webcams are not supported: this
-means that still images cannot be downloaded from the device memory.
-
-Furthermore, it's worth to note that I was only able to run tests on my
-"Creative Labs Video Blaster WebCam Go". Donations of other models, for
-additional testing and full support, would be much appreciated.
-
-
-6. Module dependencies
-======================
-For it to work properly, the driver needs kernel support for Video4Linux, USB
-and I2C, and the "ovcamchip" module for the image sensor. Make sure you are not
-actually using any external "ovcamchip" module, given that the W996[87]CF
-driver depends on the version of the module present in the official kernels.
-
-The following options of the kernel configuration file must be enabled and
-corresponding modules must be compiled:
-
-	# Multimedia devices
-	#
-	CONFIG_VIDEO_DEV=m
-
-	# I2C support
-	#
-	CONFIG_I2C=m
-
-The I2C core module can be compiled statically in the kernel as well.
-
-	# OmniVision Camera Chip support
-	#
-	CONFIG_VIDEO_OVCAMCHIP=m
-
-	# USB support
-	#
-	CONFIG_USB=m
-
-In addition, depending on the hardware being used, only one of the modules
-below is necessary:
-
-	# USB Host Controller Drivers
-	#
-	CONFIG_USB_EHCI_HCD=m
-	CONFIG_USB_UHCI_HCD=m
-	CONFIG_USB_OHCI_HCD=m
-
-And finally:
-
-	# USB Multimedia devices
-	#
-	CONFIG_USB_W9968CF=m
-
-
-7. Module loading
-=================
-To use the driver, it is necessary to load the "w9968cf" module into memory
-after every other module required.
-
-Loading can be done this way, from root:
-
-	[root@localhost home]# modprobe usbcore
-	[root@localhost home]# modprobe i2c-core
-	[root@localhost home]# modprobe videodev
-	[root@localhost home]# modprobe w9968cf
-
-At this point the pertinent devices should be recognized: "dmesg" can be used
-to analyze kernel messages:
-
-	[user@localhost home]$ dmesg
-
-There are a lot of parameters the module can use to change the default
-settings for each device. To list every possible parameter with a brief
-explanation about them and which syntax to use, it is recommended to run the
-"modinfo" command:
-
-	[root@locahost home]# modinfo w9968cf
-
-
-8. Module parameters
-====================
-Module parameters are listed below:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:            ovmod_load
-Type:            bool
-Syntax:          <0|1>
-Description:     Automatic 'ovcamchip' module loading: 0 disabled, 1 enabled.
-		 If enabled, 'insmod' searches for the required 'ovcamchip'
-		 module in the system, according to its configuration, and
-		 loads that module automatically. This action is performed as
-		 once soon as the 'w9968cf' module is loaded into memory.
-Default:         1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           simcams
-Type:           int
-Syntax:         <n>
-Description:    Number of cameras allowed to stream simultaneously.
-		n may vary from 0 to 32.
-Default:        32
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           video_nr
-Type:           int array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <-1|n[,...]>
-Description:    Specify V4L minor mode number.
-		-1 = use next available
-		 n = use minor number n
-		You can specify up to 32 cameras this way.
-		For example:
-		video_nr=-1,2,-1 would assign minor number 2 to the second
-		recognized camera and use auto for the first one and for every
-		other camera.
-Default:        -1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           packet_size
-Type:           int array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <n[,...]>
-Description:    Specify the maximum data payload size in bytes for alternate
-		settings, for each device. n is scaled between 63 and 1023.
-Default:        1023
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           max_buffers
-Type:           int array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <n[,...]>
-Description:    For advanced users.
-		Specify the maximum number of video frame buffers to allocate
-		for each device, from 2 to 32.
-Default:        2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           double_buffer
-Type:           bool array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|1[,...]>
-Description:    Hardware double buffering: 0 disabled, 1 enabled.
-		It should be enabled if you want smooth video output: if you
-		obtain out of sync. video, disable it, or try to
-		decrease the 'clockdiv' module parameter value.
-Default:        1 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           clamping
-Type:           bool array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|1[,...]>
-Description:    Video data clamping: 0 disabled, 1 enabled.
-Default:        0 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           filter_type
-Type:           int array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|1|2[,...]>
-Description:    Video filter type.
-		0 none, 1 (1-2-1) 3-tap filter, 2 (2-3-6-3-2) 5-tap filter.
-		The filter is used to reduce noise and aliasing artifacts
-		produced by the CCD or CMOS image sensor.
-Default:        0 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           largeview
-Type:           bool array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|1[,...]>
-Description:    Large view: 0 disabled, 1 enabled.
-Default:        1 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           upscaling
-Type:           bool array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|1[,...]>
-Description:    Software scaling (for non-compressed video only):
-		0 disabled, 1 enabled.
-		Disable it if you have a slow CPU or you don't have enough
-		memory.
-Default:        0 for every device.
-Note:           If 'w9968cf-vpp' is not present, this parameter is set to 0.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           decompression
-Type:           int array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|1|2[,...]>
-Description:    Software video decompression:
-		0 = disables decompression
-		    (doesn't allow formats needing decompression).
-		1 = forces decompression
-		    (allows formats needing decompression only).
-		2 = allows any permitted formats.
-		Formats supporting (de)compressed video are YUV422P and
-		YUV420P/YUV420 in any resolutions where width and height are
-		multiples of 16.
-Default:        2 for every device.
-Note:           If 'w9968cf-vpp' is not present, forcing decompression is not
-		allowed; in this case this parameter is set to 2.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           force_palette
-Type:           int array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|9|10|13|15|8|7|1|6|3|4|5[,...]>
-Description:    Force picture palette.
-		In order:
-		 0 = Off - allows any of the following formats:
-		 9 = UYVY    16 bpp - Original video, compression disabled
-		10 = YUV420  12 bpp - Original video, compression enabled
-		13 = YUV422P 16 bpp - Original video, compression enabled
-		15 = YUV420P 12 bpp - Original video, compression enabled
-		 8 = YUVY    16 bpp - Software conversion from UYVY
-		 7 = YUV422  16 bpp - Software conversion from UYVY
-		 1 = GREY     8 bpp - Software conversion from UYVY
-		 6 = RGB555  16 bpp - Software conversion from UYVY
-		 3 = RGB565  16 bpp - Software conversion from UYVY
-		 4 = RGB24   24 bpp - Software conversion from UYVY
-		 5 = RGB32   32 bpp - Software conversion from UYVY
-		When not 0, this parameter will override 'decompression'.
-Default:        0 for every device. Initial palette is 9 (UYVY).
-Note:           If 'w9968cf-vpp' is not present, this parameter is set to 9.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           force_rgb
-Type:           bool array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|1[,...]>
-Description:    Read RGB video data instead of BGR:
-		1 = use RGB component ordering.
-		0 = use BGR component ordering.
-		This parameter has effect when using RGBX palettes only.
-Default:        0 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           autobright
-Type:           bool array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|1[,...]>
-Description:    Image sensor automatically changes brightness:
-		0 = no, 1 = yes
-Default:        0 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           autoexp
-Type:           bool array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|1[,...]>
-Description:    Image sensor automatically changes exposure:
-		0 = no, 1 = yes
-Default:        1 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           lightfreq
-Type:           int array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <50|60[,...]>
-Description:    Light frequency in Hz:
-		50 for European and Asian lighting, 60 for American lighting.
-Default:        50 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           bandingfilter
-Type:           bool array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|1[,...]>
-Description:    Banding filter to reduce effects of fluorescent
-		lighting:
-		0 disabled, 1 enabled.
-		This filter tries to reduce the pattern of horizontal
-		light/dark bands caused by some (usually fluorescent) lighting.
-Default:        0 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           clockdiv
-Type:           int array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <-1|n[,...]>
-Description:    Force pixel clock divisor to a specific value (for experts):
-		n may vary from 0 to 127.
-		-1 for automatic value.
-		See also the 'double_buffer' module parameter.
-Default:        -1 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           backlight
-Type:           bool array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|1[,...]>
-Description:    Objects are lit from behind:
-		0 = no, 1 = yes
-Default:        0 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           mirror
-Type:           bool array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|1[,...]>
-Description:    Reverse image horizontally:
-		0 = no, 1 = yes
-Default:        0 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           monochrome
-Type:           bool array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <0|1[,...]>
-Description:    The image sensor is monochrome:
-		0 = no, 1 = yes
-Default:        0 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           brightness
-Type:           long array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <n[,...]>
-Description:    Set picture brightness (0-65535).
-		This parameter has no effect if 'autobright' is enabled.
-Default:        31000 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           hue
-Type:           long array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <n[,...]>
-Description:    Set picture hue (0-65535).
-Default:        32768 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           colour
-Type:           long array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <n[,...]>
-Description:    Set picture saturation (0-65535).
-Default:        32768 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           contrast
-Type:           long array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <n[,...]>
-Description:    Set picture contrast (0-65535).
-Default:        50000 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           whiteness
-Type:           long array (min = 0, max = 32)
-Syntax:         <n[,...]>
-Description:    Set picture whiteness (0-65535).
-Default:        32768 for every device.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           debug
-Type:           int
-Syntax:         <n>
-Description:    Debugging information level, from 0 to 6:
-		0 = none (use carefully)
-		1 = critical errors
-		2 = significant information
-		3 = configuration or general messages
-		4 = warnings
-		5 = called functions
-		6 = function internals
-		Level 5 and 6 are useful for testing only, when only one
-		device is used.
-Default:        2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           specific_debug
-Type:           bool
-Syntax:         <0|1>
-Description:    Enable or disable specific debugging messages:
-		0 = print messages concerning every level <= 'debug' level.
-		1 = print messages concerning the level indicated by 'debug'.
-Default:        0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-9. Contact information
-======================
-I may be contacted by e-mail at <luca.risolia@studio.unibo.it>.
-
-I can accept GPG/PGP encrypted e-mail. My GPG key ID is 'FCE635A4'.
-My public 1024-bit key should be available at your keyserver; the fingerprint
-is: '88E8 F32F 7244 68BA 3958  5D40 99DA 5D2A FCE6 35A4'.
-
-
-10. Credits
-==========
-The development would not have proceed much further without having looked at
-the source code of other drivers and without the help of several persons; in
-particular:
-
-- the I2C interface to kernel and high-level image sensor control routines have
-  been taken from the OV511 driver by Mark McClelland;
-
-- memory management code has been copied from the bttv driver by Ralph Metzler,
-  Marcus Metzler and Gerd Knorr;
-
-- the low-level I2C read function has been written by Frederic Jouault;
-
-- the low-level I2C fast write function has been written by Piotr Czerczak.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/zc0301.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/zc0301.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index b41c83cf09f4..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/zc0301.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,270 +0,0 @@
-
-	      ZC0301 and ZC0301P Image Processor and Control Chip
-				Driver for Linux
-	      ===================================================
-
-			       - Documentation -
-
-
-Index
-=====
-1.  Copyright
-2.  Disclaimer
-3.  License
-4.  Overview and features
-5.  Module dependencies
-6.  Module loading
-7.  Module parameters
-8.  Supported devices
-9.  Notes for V4L2 application developers
-10. Contact information
-11. Credits
-
-
-1. Copyright
-============
-Copyright (C) 2006-2007 by Luca Risolia <luca.risolia@studio.unibo.it>
-
-
-2. Disclaimer
-=============
-This software is not developed or sponsored by Z-Star Microelectronics Corp.
-Trademarks are property of their respective owner.
-
-
-3. License
-==========
-This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-(at your option) any later version.
-
-This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-
-
-4. Overview and features
-========================
-This driver supports the video interface of the devices mounting the ZC0301 or
-ZC0301P Image Processors and Control Chips.
-
-The driver relies on the Video4Linux2 and USB core modules. It has been
-designed to run properly on SMP systems as well.
-
-The latest version of the ZC0301[P] driver can be found at the following URL:
-http://www.linux-projects.org/
-
-Some of the features of the driver are:
-
-- full compliance with the Video4Linux2 API (see also "Notes for V4L2
-  application developers" paragraph);
-- available mmap or read/poll methods for video streaming through isochronous
-  data transfers;
-- automatic detection of image sensor;
-- video format is standard JPEG;
-- dynamic driver control thanks to various module parameters (see "Module
-  parameters" paragraph);
-- up to 64 cameras can be handled at the same time; they can be connected and
-  disconnected from the host many times without turning off the computer, if
-  the system supports hotplugging;
-
-
-5. Module dependencies
-======================
-For it to work properly, the driver needs kernel support for Video4Linux and
-USB.
-
-The following options of the kernel configuration file must be enabled and
-corresponding modules must be compiled:
-
-	# Multimedia devices
-	#
-	CONFIG_VIDEO_DEV=m
-
-	# USB support
-	#
-	CONFIG_USB=m
-
-In addition, depending on the hardware being used, the modules below are
-necessary:
-
-	# USB Host Controller Drivers
-	#
-	CONFIG_USB_EHCI_HCD=m
-	CONFIG_USB_UHCI_HCD=m
-	CONFIG_USB_OHCI_HCD=m
-
-The ZC0301 controller also provides a built-in microphone interface. It is
-supported by the USB Audio driver thanks to the ALSA API:
-
-	# Sound
-	#
-	CONFIG_SOUND=y
-
-	# Advanced Linux Sound Architecture
-	#
-	CONFIG_SND=m
-
-	# USB devices
-	#
-	CONFIG_SND_USB_AUDIO=m
-
-And finally:
-
-	# V4L USB devices
-	#
-	CONFIG_USB_ZC0301=m
-
-
-6. Module loading
-=================
-To use the driver, it is necessary to load the "zc0301" module into memory
-after every other module required: "videodev", "v4l2_common", "compat_ioctl32",
-"usbcore" and, depending on the USB host controller you have, "ehci-hcd",
-"uhci-hcd" or "ohci-hcd".
-
-Loading can be done as shown below:
-
-	[root@localhost home]# modprobe zc0301
-
-At this point the devices should be recognized. You can invoke "dmesg" to
-analyze kernel messages and verify that the loading process has gone well:
-
-	[user@localhost home]$ dmesg
-
-
-7. Module parameters
-====================
-Module parameters are listed below:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           video_nr
-Type:           short array (min = 0, max = 64)
-Syntax:         <-1|n[,...]>
-Description:    Specify V4L2 minor mode number:
-		-1 = use next available
-		 n = use minor number n
-		You can specify up to 64 cameras this way.
-		For example:
-		video_nr=-1,2,-1 would assign minor number 2 to the second
-		registered camera and use auto for the first one and for every
-		other camera.
-Default:        -1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           force_munmap
-Type:           bool array (min = 0, max = 64)
-Syntax:         <0|1[,...]>
-Description:    Force the application to unmap previously mapped buffer memory
-		before calling any VIDIOC_S_CROP or VIDIOC_S_FMT ioctl's. Not
-		all the applications support this feature. This parameter is
-		specific for each detected camera.
-		0 = do not force memory unmapping
-		1 = force memory unmapping (save memory)
-Default:        0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           frame_timeout
-Type:           uint array (min = 0, max = 64)
-Syntax:         <n[,...]>
-Description:    Timeout for a video frame in seconds. This parameter is
-		specific for each detected camera. This parameter can be
-		changed at runtime thanks to the /sys filesystem interface.
-Default:        2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Name:           debug
-Type:           ushort
-Syntax:         <n>
-Description:    Debugging information level, from 0 to 3:
-		0 = none (use carefully)
-		1 = critical errors
-		2 = significant information
-		3 = more verbose messages
-		Level 3 is useful for testing only, when only one device
-		is used at the same time. It also shows some information
-		about the hardware being detected. This module parameter can be
-		changed at runtime thanks to the /sys filesystem interface.
-Default:        2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-8. Supported devices
-====================
-None of the names of the companies as well as their products will be mentioned
-here. They have never collaborated with the author, so no advertising.
-
-From the point of view of a driver, what unambiguously identify a device are
-its vendor and product USB identifiers. Below is a list of known identifiers of
-devices mounting the ZC0301 Image Processor and Control Chips:
-
-Vendor ID  Product ID
----------  ----------
-0x041e     0x4017
-0x041e     0x401c
-0x041e     0x401e
-0x041e     0x401f
-0x041e     0x4022
-0x041e     0x4034
-0x041e     0x4035
-0x041e     0x4036
-0x041e     0x403a
-0x0458     0x7007
-0x0458     0x700c
-0x0458     0x700f
-0x046d     0x08ae
-0x055f     0xd003
-0x055f     0xd004
-0x0ac8     0x0301
-0x0ac8     0x301b
-0x0ac8     0x303b
-0x10fd     0x0128
-0x10fd     0x8050
-0x10fd     0x804e
-
-The list above does not imply that all those devices work with this driver: up
-until now only the ones that mount the following image sensors are supported;
-kernel messages will always tell you whether this is the case:
-
-Model       Manufacturer
------       ------------
-PAS202BCB   PixArt Imaging, Inc.
-PB-0330     Photobit Corporation
-
-
-9. Notes for V4L2 application developers
-========================================
-This driver follows the V4L2 API specifications. In particular, it enforces two
-rules:
-
-- exactly one I/O method, either "mmap" or "read", is associated with each
-file descriptor. Once it is selected, the application must close and reopen the
-device to switch to the other I/O method;
-
-- although it is not mandatory, previously mapped buffer memory should always
-be unmapped before calling any "VIDIOC_S_CROP" or "VIDIOC_S_FMT" ioctl's.
-The same number of buffers as before will be allocated again to match the size
-of the new video frames, so you have to map the buffers again before any I/O
-attempts on them.
-
-
-10. Contact information
-=======================
-The author may be contacted by e-mail at <luca.risolia@studio.unibo.it>.
-
-GPG/PGP encrypted e-mail's are accepted. The GPG key ID of the author is
-'FCE635A4'; the public 1024-bit key should be available at any keyserver;
-the fingerprint is: '88E8 F32F 7244 68BA 3958  5D40 99DA 5D2A FCE6 35A4'.
-
-
-11. Credits
-===========
-- Information about the chip internals needed to enable the I2C protocol have
-  been taken from the documentation of the ZC030x Video4Linux1 driver written
-  by Andrew Birkett <andy@nobugs.org>;
-- The initialization values of the ZC0301 controller connected to the PAS202BCB
-  and PB-0330 image sensors have been taken from the SPCA5XX driver maintained
-  by Michel Xhaard <mxhaard@magic.fr>;
-- Stanislav Lechev donated one camera.
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/00-INDEX b/Documentation/virtual/00-INDEX
index 924bd462675e..e952d30bbf0f 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/00-INDEX
@@ -6,6 +6,3 @@ kvm/
 	- Kernel Virtual Machine.  See also http://linux-kvm.org
 uml/
 	- User Mode Linux, builds/runs Linux kernel as a userspace program.
-virtio.txt
-	- Text version of draft virtio spec.
-          See http://ozlabs.org/~rusty/virtio-spec
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt
index e1d94bf4056e..858aecf21db2 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@ The Definitive KVM (Kernel-based Virtual Machine) API Documentation
 ===================================================================
 
 1. General description
+----------------------
 
 The kvm API is a set of ioctls that are issued to control various aspects
 of a virtual machine.  The ioctls belong to three classes
@@ -23,7 +24,9 @@ of a virtual machine.  The ioctls belong to three classes
    Only run vcpu ioctls from the same thread that was used to create the
    vcpu.
 
+
 2. File descriptors
+-------------------
 
 The kvm API is centered around file descriptors.  An initial
 open("/dev/kvm") obtains a handle to the kvm subsystem; this handle
@@ -41,19 +44,23 @@ not cause harm to the host, their actual behavior is not guaranteed by
 the API.  The only supported use is one virtual machine per process,
 and one vcpu per thread.
 
+
 3. Extensions
+-------------
 
 As of Linux 2.6.22, the KVM ABI has been stabilized: no backward
 incompatible change are allowed.  However, there is an extension
 facility that allows backward-compatible extensions to the API to be
 queried and used.
 
-The extension mechanism is not based on on the Linux version number.
+The extension mechanism is not based on the Linux version number.
 Instead, kvm defines extension identifiers and a facility to query
 whether a particular extension identifier is available.  If it is, a
 set of ioctls is available for application use.
 
+
 4. API description
+------------------
 
 This section describes ioctls that can be used to control kvm guests.
 For each ioctl, the following information is provided along with a
@@ -75,6 +82,7 @@ description:
   Returns: the return value.  General error numbers (EBADF, ENOMEM, EINVAL)
       are not detailed, but errors with specific meanings are.
 
+
 4.1 KVM_GET_API_VERSION
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -90,12 +98,13 @@ supported.  Applications should refuse to run if KVM_GET_API_VERSION
 returns a value other than 12.  If this check passes, all ioctls
 described as 'basic' will be available.
 
+
 4.2 KVM_CREATE_VM
 
 Capability: basic
 Architectures: all
 Type: system ioctl
-Parameters: none
+Parameters: machine type identifier (KVM_VM_*)
 Returns: a VM fd that can be used to control the new virtual machine.
 
 The new VM has no virtual cpus and no memory.  An mmap() of a VM fd
@@ -103,6 +112,12 @@ will access the virtual machine's physical address space; offset zero
 corresponds to guest physical address zero.  Use of mmap() on a VM fd
 is discouraged if userspace memory allocation (KVM_CAP_USER_MEMORY) is
 available.
+You most certainly want to use 0 as machine type.
+
+In order to create user controlled virtual machines on S390, check
+KVM_CAP_S390_UCONTROL and use the flag KVM_VM_S390_UCONTROL as
+privileged user (CAP_SYS_ADMIN).
+
 
 4.3 KVM_GET_MSR_INDEX_LIST
 
@@ -130,6 +145,7 @@ Note: if kvm indicates supports MCE (KVM_CAP_MCE), then the MCE bank MSRs are
 not returned in the MSR list, as different vcpus can have a different number
 of banks, as set via the KVM_X86_SETUP_MCE ioctl.
 
+
 4.4 KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -144,6 +160,7 @@ receives an integer that describes the extension availability.
 Generally 0 means no and 1 means yes, but some extensions may report
 additional information in the integer return value.
 
+
 4.5 KVM_GET_VCPU_MMAP_SIZE
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -156,6 +173,7 @@ The KVM_RUN ioctl (cf.) communicates with userspace via a shared
 memory region.  This ioctl returns the size of that region.  See the
 KVM_RUN documentation for details.
 
+
 4.6 KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -166,6 +184,7 @@ Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
 
 This ioctl is obsolete and has been removed.
 
+
 4.7 KVM_CREATE_VCPU
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -200,18 +219,11 @@ allocation of vcpu ids.  For example, if userspace wants
 single-threaded guest vcpus, it should make all vcpu ids be a multiple
 of the number of vcpus per vcore.
 
-On powerpc using book3s_hv mode, the vcpus are mapped onto virtual
-threads in one or more virtual CPU cores.  (This is because the
-hardware requires all the hardware threads in a CPU core to be in the
-same partition.)  The KVM_CAP_PPC_SMT capability indicates the number
-of vcpus per virtual core (vcore).  The vcore id is obtained by
-dividing the vcpu id by the number of vcpus per vcore.  The vcpus in a
-given vcore will always be in the same physical core as each other
-(though that might be a different physical core from time to time).
-Userspace can control the threading (SMT) mode of the guest by its
-allocation of vcpu ids.  For example, if userspace wants
-single-threaded guest vcpus, it should make all vcpu ids be a multiple
-of the number of vcpus per vcore.
+For virtual cpus that have been created with S390 user controlled virtual
+machines, the resulting vcpu fd can be memory mapped at page offset
+KVM_S390_SIE_PAGE_OFFSET in order to obtain a memory map of the virtual
+cpu's hardware control block.
+
 
 4.8 KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG (vm ioctl)
 
@@ -236,6 +248,7 @@ since the last call to this ioctl.  Bit 0 is the first page in the
 memory slot.  Ensure the entire structure is cleared to avoid padding
 issues.
 
+
 4.9 KVM_SET_MEMORY_ALIAS
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -246,6 +259,7 @@ Returns: 0 (success), -1 (error)
 
 This ioctl is obsolete and has been removed.
 
+
 4.10 KVM_RUN
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -262,10 +276,11 @@ obtained by mmap()ing the vcpu fd at offset 0, with the size given by
 KVM_GET_VCPU_MMAP_SIZE.  The parameter block is formatted as a 'struct
 kvm_run' (see below).
 
+
 4.11 KVM_GET_REGS
 
 Capability: basic
-Architectures: all
+Architectures: all except ARM, arm64
 Type: vcpu ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_regs (out)
 Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
@@ -282,10 +297,11 @@ struct kvm_regs {
 	__u64 rip, rflags;
 };
 
+
 4.12 KVM_SET_REGS
 
 Capability: basic
-Architectures: all
+Architectures: all except ARM, arm64
 Type: vcpu ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_regs (in)
 Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
@@ -294,6 +310,7 @@ Writes the general purpose registers into the vcpu.
 
 See KVM_GET_REGS for the data structure.
 
+
 4.13 KVM_GET_SREGS
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -315,12 +332,13 @@ struct kvm_sregs {
 	__u64 interrupt_bitmap[(KVM_NR_INTERRUPTS + 63) / 64];
 };
 
-/* ppc -- see arch/powerpc/include/asm/kvm.h */
+/* ppc -- see arch/powerpc/include/uapi/asm/kvm.h */
 
 interrupt_bitmap is a bitmap of pending external interrupts.  At most
 one bit may be set.  This interrupt has been acknowledged by the APIC
 but not yet injected into the cpu core.
 
+
 4.14 KVM_SET_SREGS
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -332,6 +350,7 @@ Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
 Writes special registers into the vcpu.  See KVM_GET_SREGS for the
 data structures.
 
+
 4.15 KVM_TRANSLATE
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -355,6 +374,7 @@ struct kvm_translation {
 	__u8  pad[5];
 };
 
+
 4.16 KVM_INTERRUPT
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -403,6 +423,7 @@ c) KVM_INTERRUPT_SET_LEVEL
 Note that any value for 'irq' other than the ones stated above is invalid
 and incurs unexpected behavior.
 
+
 4.17 KVM_DEBUG_GUEST
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -413,6 +434,7 @@ Returns: -1 on error
 
 Support for this has been removed.  Use KVM_SET_GUEST_DEBUG instead.
 
+
 4.18 KVM_GET_MSRS
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -441,6 +463,7 @@ Application code should set the 'nmsrs' member (which indicates the
 size of the entries array) and the 'index' member of each array entry.
 kvm will fill in the 'data' member.
 
+
 4.19 KVM_SET_MSRS
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -456,6 +479,7 @@ Application code should set the 'nmsrs' member (which indicates the
 size of the entries array), and the 'index' and 'data' members of each
 array entry.
 
+
 4.20 KVM_SET_CPUID
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -484,6 +508,7 @@ struct kvm_cpuid {
 	struct kvm_cpuid_entry entries[0];
 };
 
+
 4.21 KVM_SET_SIGNAL_MASK
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -506,6 +531,7 @@ struct kvm_signal_mask {
 	__u8  sigset[0];
 };
 
+
 4.22 KVM_GET_FPU
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -531,6 +557,7 @@ struct kvm_fpu {
 	__u32 pad2;
 };
 
+
 4.23 KVM_SET_FPU
 
 Capability: basic
@@ -556,10 +583,11 @@ struct kvm_fpu {
 	__u32 pad2;
 };
 
+
 4.24 KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP
-Architectures: x86, ia64
+Architectures: x86, ia64, ARM, arm64
 Type: vm ioctl
 Parameters: none
 Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
@@ -567,20 +595,40 @@ Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
 Creates an interrupt controller model in the kernel.  On x86, creates a virtual
 ioapic, a virtual PIC (two PICs, nested), and sets up future vcpus to have a
 local APIC.  IRQ routing for GSIs 0-15 is set to both PIC and IOAPIC; GSI 16-23
-only go to the IOAPIC.  On ia64, a IOSAPIC is created.
+only go to the IOAPIC.  On ia64, a IOSAPIC is created. On ARM/arm64, a GIC is
+created.
+
 
 4.25 KVM_IRQ_LINE
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP
-Architectures: x86, ia64
+Architectures: x86, ia64, arm, arm64
 Type: vm ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_irq_level
 Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
 
 Sets the level of a GSI input to the interrupt controller model in the kernel.
-Requires that an interrupt controller model has been previously created with
-KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP.  Note that edge-triggered interrupts require the level
-to be set to 1 and then back to 0.
+On some architectures it is required that an interrupt controller model has
+been previously created with KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP.  Note that edge-triggered
+interrupts require the level to be set to 1 and then back to 0.
+
+ARM/arm64 can signal an interrupt either at the CPU level, or at the
+in-kernel irqchip (GIC), and for in-kernel irqchip can tell the GIC to
+use PPIs designated for specific cpus.  The irq field is interpreted
+like this:
+
+  bits:  | 31 ... 24 | 23  ... 16 | 15    ...    0 |
+  field: | irq_type  | vcpu_index |     irq_id     |
+
+The irq_type field has the following values:
+- irq_type[0]: out-of-kernel GIC: irq_id 0 is IRQ, irq_id 1 is FIQ
+- irq_type[1]: in-kernel GIC: SPI, irq_id between 32 and 1019 (incl.)
+               (the vcpu_index field is ignored)
+- irq_type[2]: in-kernel GIC: PPI, irq_id between 16 and 31 (incl.)
+
+(The irq_id field thus corresponds nicely to the IRQ ID in the ARM GIC specs)
+
+In both cases, level is used to raise/lower the line.
 
 struct kvm_irq_level {
 	union {
@@ -590,6 +638,7 @@ struct kvm_irq_level {
 	__u32 level;           /* 0 or 1 */
 };
 
+
 4.26 KVM_GET_IRQCHIP
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP
@@ -611,6 +660,7 @@ struct kvm_irqchip {
 	} chip;
 };
 
+
 4.27 KVM_SET_IRQCHIP
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP
@@ -632,6 +682,7 @@ struct kvm_irqchip {
 	} chip;
 };
 
+
 4.28 KVM_XEN_HVM_CONFIG
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_XEN_HVM
@@ -656,6 +707,7 @@ struct kvm_xen_hvm_config {
 	__u8 pad2[30];
 };
 
+
 4.29 KVM_GET_CLOCK
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_ADJUST_CLOCK
@@ -674,6 +726,7 @@ struct kvm_clock_data {
 	__u32 pad[9];
 };
 
+
 4.30 KVM_SET_CLOCK
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_ADJUST_CLOCK
@@ -692,6 +745,7 @@ struct kvm_clock_data {
 	__u32 pad[9];
 };
 
+
 4.31 KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS
@@ -731,6 +785,7 @@ struct kvm_vcpu_events {
 KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SHADOW may be set in the flags field to signal that
 interrupt.shadow contains a valid state. Otherwise, this field is undefined.
 
+
 4.32 KVM_SET_VCPU_EVENTS
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS
@@ -757,6 +812,7 @@ If KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW is available, KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SHADOW can be set in
 the flags field to signal that interrupt.shadow contains a valid state and
 shall be written into the VCPU.
 
+
 4.33 KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS
@@ -775,6 +831,7 @@ struct kvm_debugregs {
 	__u64 reserved[9];
 };
 
+
 4.34 KVM_SET_DEBUGREGS
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS
@@ -788,6 +845,7 @@ Writes debug registers into the vcpu.
 See KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS for the data structure. The flags field is unused
 yet and must be cleared on entry.
 
+
 4.35 KVM_SET_USER_MEMORY_REGION
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_USER_MEM
@@ -805,7 +863,8 @@ struct kvm_userspace_memory_region {
 };
 
 /* for kvm_memory_region::flags */
-#define KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES  1UL
+#define KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES	(1UL << 0)
+#define KVM_MEM_READONLY	(1UL << 1)
 
 This ioctl allows the user to create or modify a guest physical memory
 slot.  When changing an existing slot, it may be moved in the guest
@@ -821,19 +880,23 @@ It is recommended that the lower 21 bits of guest_phys_addr and userspace_addr
 be identical.  This allows large pages in the guest to be backed by large
 pages in the host.
 
-The flags field supports just one flag, KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES, which
-instructs kvm to keep track of writes to memory within the slot.  See
-the KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG ioctl.
+The flags field supports two flags: KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES and
+KVM_MEM_READONLY.  The former can be set to instruct KVM to keep track of
+writes to memory within the slot.  See KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG ioctl to know how to
+use it.  The latter can be set, if KVM_CAP_READONLY_MEM capability allows it,
+to make a new slot read-only.  In this case, writes to this memory will be
+posted to userspace as KVM_EXIT_MMIO exits.
 
-When the KVM_CAP_SYNC_MMU capability, changes in the backing of the memory
-region are automatically reflected into the guest.  For example, an mmap()
-that affects the region will be made visible immediately.  Another example
-is madvise(MADV_DROP).
+When the KVM_CAP_SYNC_MMU capability is available, changes in the backing of
+the memory region are automatically reflected into the guest.  For example, an
+mmap() that affects the region will be made visible immediately.  Another
+example is madvise(MADV_DROP).
 
 It is recommended to use this API instead of the KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION ioctl.
 The KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION does not allow fine grained control over memory
 allocation and is deprecated.
 
+
 4.36 KVM_SET_TSS_ADDR
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_TSS_ADDR
@@ -852,10 +915,11 @@ This ioctl is required on Intel-based hosts.  This is needed on Intel hardware
 because of a quirk in the virtualization implementation (see the internals
 documentation when it pops into existence).
 
+
 4.37 KVM_ENABLE_CAP
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_ENABLE_CAP
-Architectures: ppc
+Architectures: ppc, s390
 Type: vcpu ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_enable_cap (in)
 Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error
@@ -887,6 +951,7 @@ function properly, this is the place to put them.
        __u8  pad[64];
 };
 
+
 4.38 KVM_GET_MP_STATE
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE
@@ -917,6 +982,7 @@ Possible values are:
 This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP.  Without an in-kernel
 irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace.
 
+
 4.39 KVM_SET_MP_STATE
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE
@@ -931,6 +997,7 @@ arguments.
 This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP.  Without an in-kernel
 irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace.
 
+
 4.40 KVM_SET_IDENTITY_MAP_ADDR
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_IDENTITY_MAP_ADDR
@@ -949,6 +1016,7 @@ This ioctl is required on Intel-based hosts.  This is needed on Intel hardware
 because of a quirk in the virtualization implementation (see the internals
 documentation when it pops into existence).
 
+
 4.41 KVM_SET_BOOT_CPU_ID
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_BOOT_CPU_ID
@@ -961,6 +1029,7 @@ Define which vcpu is the Bootstrap Processor (BSP).  Values are the same
 as the vcpu id in KVM_CREATE_VCPU.  If this ioctl is not called, the default
 is vcpu 0.
 
+
 4.42 KVM_GET_XSAVE
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_XSAVE
@@ -975,6 +1044,7 @@ struct kvm_xsave {
 
 This ioctl would copy current vcpu's xsave struct to the userspace.
 
+
 4.43 KVM_SET_XSAVE
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_XSAVE
@@ -989,6 +1059,7 @@ struct kvm_xsave {
 
 This ioctl would copy userspace's xsave struct to the kernel.
 
+
 4.44 KVM_GET_XCRS
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_XCRS
@@ -1012,6 +1083,7 @@ struct kvm_xcrs {
 
 This ioctl would copy current vcpu's xcrs to the userspace.
 
+
 4.45 KVM_SET_XCRS
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_XCRS
@@ -1035,6 +1107,7 @@ struct kvm_xcrs {
 
 This ioctl would set vcpu's xcr to the value userspace specified.
 
+
 4.46 KVM_GET_SUPPORTED_CPUID
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_EXT_CPUID
@@ -1109,6 +1182,7 @@ support.  Instead it is reported via
 if that returns true and you use KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP, or if you emulate the
 feature in userspace, then you can enable the feature for KVM_SET_CPUID2.
 
+
 4.47 KVM_PPC_GET_PVINFO
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_GET_PVINFO
@@ -1126,12 +1200,16 @@ struct kvm_ppc_pvinfo {
 This ioctl fetches PV specific information that need to be passed to the guest
 using the device tree or other means from vm context.
 
-For now the only implemented piece of information distributed here is an array
-of 4 instructions that make up a hypercall.
+The hcall array defines 4 instructions that make up a hypercall.
 
 If any additional field gets added to this structure later on, a bit for that
 additional piece of information will be set in the flags bitmap.
 
+The flags bitmap is defined as:
+
+   /* the host supports the ePAPR idle hcall
+   #define KVM_PPC_PVINFO_FLAGS_EV_IDLE   (1<<0)
+
 4.48 KVM_ASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_ASSIGNMENT
@@ -1159,6 +1237,14 @@ following flags are specified:
 
 /* Depends on KVM_CAP_IOMMU */
 #define KVM_DEV_ASSIGN_ENABLE_IOMMU	(1 << 0)
+/* The following two depend on KVM_CAP_PCI_2_3 */
+#define KVM_DEV_ASSIGN_PCI_2_3		(1 << 1)
+#define KVM_DEV_ASSIGN_MASK_INTX	(1 << 2)
+
+If KVM_DEV_ASSIGN_PCI_2_3 is set, the kernel will manage legacy INTx interrupts
+via the PCI-2.3-compliant device-level mask, thus enable IRQ sharing with other
+assigned devices or host devices. KVM_DEV_ASSIGN_MASK_INTX specifies the
+guest's view on the INTx mask, see KVM_ASSIGN_SET_INTX_MASK for details.
 
 The KVM_DEV_ASSIGN_ENABLE_IOMMU flag is a mandatory option to ensure
 isolation of the device.  Usages not specifying this flag are deprecated.
@@ -1167,6 +1253,7 @@ Only PCI header type 0 devices with PCI BAR resources are supported by
 device assignment.  The user requesting this ioctl must have read/write
 access to the PCI sysfs resource files associated with the device.
 
+
 4.49 KVM_DEASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_DEASSIGNMENT
@@ -1180,6 +1267,7 @@ Ends PCI device assignment, releasing all associated resources.
 See KVM_CAP_DEVICE_ASSIGNMENT for the data structure. Only assigned_dev_id is
 used in kvm_assigned_pci_dev to identify the device.
 
+
 4.50 KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ
@@ -1213,6 +1301,7 @@ The following flags are defined:
 It is not valid to specify multiple types per host or guest IRQ. However, the
 IRQ type of host and guest can differ or can even be null.
 
+
 4.51 KVM_DEASSIGN_DEV_IRQ
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ
@@ -1227,6 +1316,7 @@ See KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ for the data structure. The target device is specified
 by assigned_dev_id, flags must correspond to the IRQ type specified on
 KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ. Partial deassignment of host or guest IRQ is allowed.
 
+
 4.52 KVM_SET_GSI_ROUTING
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQ_ROUTING
@@ -1275,6 +1365,7 @@ struct kvm_irq_routing_msi {
 	__u32 pad;
 };
 
+
 4.53 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_NR
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_MSIX
@@ -1296,6 +1387,7 @@ struct kvm_assigned_msix_nr {
 
 #define KVM_MAX_MSIX_PER_DEV		256
 
+
 4.54 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_ENTRY
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_MSIX
@@ -1314,7 +1406,8 @@ struct kvm_assigned_msix_entry {
 	__u16 padding[3];
 };
 
-4.54 KVM_SET_TSC_KHZ
+
+4.55 KVM_SET_TSC_KHZ
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_TSC_CONTROL
 Architectures: x86
@@ -1325,7 +1418,8 @@ Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
 Specifies the tsc frequency for the virtual machine. The unit of the
 frequency is KHz.
 
-4.55 KVM_GET_TSC_KHZ
+
+4.56 KVM_GET_TSC_KHZ
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_GET_TSC_KHZ
 Architectures: x86
@@ -1337,7 +1431,8 @@ Returns the tsc frequency of the guest. The unit of the return value is
 KHz. If the host has unstable tsc this ioctl returns -EIO instead as an
 error.
 
-4.56 KVM_GET_LAPIC
+
+4.57 KVM_GET_LAPIC
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP
 Architectures: x86
@@ -1353,7 +1448,8 @@ struct kvm_lapic_state {
 Reads the Local APIC registers and copies them into the input argument.  The
 data format and layout are the same as documented in the architecture manual.
 
-4.57 KVM_SET_LAPIC
+
+4.58 KVM_SET_LAPIC
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP
 Architectures: x86
@@ -1369,7 +1465,8 @@ struct kvm_lapic_state {
 Copies the input argument into the the Local APIC registers.  The data format
 and layout are the same as documented in the architecture manual.
 
-4.58 KVM_IOEVENTFD
+
+4.59 KVM_IOEVENTFD
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_IOEVENTFD
 Architectures: all
@@ -1390,15 +1487,91 @@ struct kvm_ioeventfd {
 	__u8  pad[36];
 };
 
+For the special case of virtio-ccw devices on s390, the ioevent is matched
+to a subchannel/virtqueue tuple instead.
+
 The following flags are defined:
 
 #define KVM_IOEVENTFD_FLAG_DATAMATCH (1 << kvm_ioeventfd_flag_nr_datamatch)
 #define KVM_IOEVENTFD_FLAG_PIO       (1 << kvm_ioeventfd_flag_nr_pio)
 #define KVM_IOEVENTFD_FLAG_DEASSIGN  (1 << kvm_ioeventfd_flag_nr_deassign)
+#define KVM_IOEVENTFD_FLAG_VIRTIO_CCW_NOTIFY \
+	(1 << kvm_ioeventfd_flag_nr_virtio_ccw_notify)
 
 If datamatch flag is set, the event will be signaled only if the written value
 to the registered address is equal to datamatch in struct kvm_ioeventfd.
 
+For virtio-ccw devices, addr contains the subchannel id and datamatch the
+virtqueue index.
+
+
+4.60 KVM_DIRTY_TLB
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_SW_TLB
+Architectures: ppc
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_dirty_tlb (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+struct kvm_dirty_tlb {
+	__u64 bitmap;
+	__u32 num_dirty;
+};
+
+This must be called whenever userspace has changed an entry in the shared
+TLB, prior to calling KVM_RUN on the associated vcpu.
+
+The "bitmap" field is the userspace address of an array.  This array
+consists of a number of bits, equal to the total number of TLB entries as
+determined by the last successful call to KVM_CONFIG_TLB, rounded up to the
+nearest multiple of 64.
+
+Each bit corresponds to one TLB entry, ordered the same as in the shared TLB
+array.
+
+The array is little-endian: the bit 0 is the least significant bit of the
+first byte, bit 8 is the least significant bit of the second byte, etc.
+This avoids any complications with differing word sizes.
+
+The "num_dirty" field is a performance hint for KVM to determine whether it
+should skip processing the bitmap and just invalidate everything.  It must
+be set to the number of set bits in the bitmap.
+
+
+4.61 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_INTX_MASK
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_PCI_2_3
+Architectures: x86
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_assigned_pci_dev (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+Allows userspace to mask PCI INTx interrupts from the assigned device.  The
+kernel will not deliver INTx interrupts to the guest between setting and
+clearing of KVM_ASSIGN_SET_INTX_MASK via this interface.  This enables use of
+and emulation of PCI 2.3 INTx disable command register behavior.
+
+This may be used for both PCI 2.3 devices supporting INTx disable natively and
+older devices lacking this support. Userspace is responsible for emulating the
+read value of the INTx disable bit in the guest visible PCI command register.
+When modifying the INTx disable state, userspace should precede updating the
+physical device command register by calling this ioctl to inform the kernel of
+the new intended INTx mask state.
+
+Note that the kernel uses the device INTx disable bit to internally manage the
+device interrupt state for PCI 2.3 devices.  Reads of this register may
+therefore not match the expected value.  Writes should always use the guest
+intended INTx disable value rather than attempting to read-copy-update the
+current physical device state.  Races between user and kernel updates to the
+INTx disable bit are handled lazily in the kernel.  It's possible the device
+may generate unintended interrupts, but they will not be injected into the
+guest.
+
+See KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ for the data structure.  The target device is specified
+by assigned_dev_id.  In the flags field, only KVM_DEV_ASSIGN_MASK_INTX is
+evaluated.
+
+
 4.62 KVM_CREATE_SPAPR_TCE
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_SPAPR_TCE
@@ -1434,6 +1607,7 @@ the entries written by kernel-handled H_PUT_TCE calls, and also lets
 userspace update the TCE table directly which is useful in some
 circumstances.
 
+
 4.63 KVM_ALLOCATE_RMA
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_RMA
@@ -1466,6 +1640,7 @@ is supported; 2 if the processor requires all virtual machines to have
 an RMA, or 1 if the processor can use an RMA but doesn't require it,
 because it supports the Virtual RMA (VRMA) facility.
 
+
 4.64 KVM_NMI
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_USER_NMI
@@ -1491,7 +1666,724 @@ following algorithm:
 Some guests configure the LINT1 NMI input to cause a panic, aiding in
 debugging.
 
+
+4.65 KVM_S390_UCAS_MAP
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_S390_UCONTROL
+Architectures: s390
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_s390_ucas_mapping (in)
+Returns: 0 in case of success
+
+The parameter is defined like this:
+	struct kvm_s390_ucas_mapping {
+		__u64 user_addr;
+		__u64 vcpu_addr;
+		__u64 length;
+	};
+
+This ioctl maps the memory at "user_addr" with the length "length" to
+the vcpu's address space starting at "vcpu_addr". All parameters need to
+be aligned by 1 megabyte.
+
+
+4.66 KVM_S390_UCAS_UNMAP
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_S390_UCONTROL
+Architectures: s390
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_s390_ucas_mapping (in)
+Returns: 0 in case of success
+
+The parameter is defined like this:
+	struct kvm_s390_ucas_mapping {
+		__u64 user_addr;
+		__u64 vcpu_addr;
+		__u64 length;
+	};
+
+This ioctl unmaps the memory in the vcpu's address space starting at
+"vcpu_addr" with the length "length". The field "user_addr" is ignored.
+All parameters need to be aligned by 1 megabyte.
+
+
+4.67 KVM_S390_VCPU_FAULT
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_S390_UCONTROL
+Architectures: s390
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: vcpu absolute address (in)
+Returns: 0 in case of success
+
+This call creates a page table entry on the virtual cpu's address space
+(for user controlled virtual machines) or the virtual machine's address
+space (for regular virtual machines). This only works for minor faults,
+thus it's recommended to access subject memory page via the user page
+table upfront. This is useful to handle validity intercepts for user
+controlled virtual machines to fault in the virtual cpu's lowcore pages
+prior to calling the KVM_RUN ioctl.
+
+
+4.68 KVM_SET_ONE_REG
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_ONE_REG
+Architectures: all
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_one_reg (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, negative value on failure
+
+struct kvm_one_reg {
+       __u64 id;
+       __u64 addr;
+};
+
+Using this ioctl, a single vcpu register can be set to a specific value
+defined by user space with the passed in struct kvm_one_reg, where id
+refers to the register identifier as described below and addr is a pointer
+to a variable with the respective size. There can be architecture agnostic
+and architecture specific registers. Each have their own range of operation
+and their own constants and width. To keep track of the implemented
+registers, find a list below:
+
+  Arch  |       Register        | Width (bits)
+        |                       |
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_HIOR      | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_IAC1      | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_IAC2      | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_IAC3      | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_IAC4      | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_DAC1      | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_DAC2      | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_DABR      | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_DSCR      | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_PURR      | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_SPURR     | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_DAR       | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_DSISR     | 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_AMR       | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_UAMOR     | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_MMCR0     | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_MMCR1     | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_MMCRA     | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_PMC1      | 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_PMC2      | 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_PMC3      | 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_PMC4      | 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_PMC5      | 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_PMC6      | 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_PMC7      | 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_PMC8      | 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_FPR0      | 64
+          ...
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_FPR31     | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_VR0       | 128
+          ...
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_VR31      | 128
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_VSR0      | 128
+          ...
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_VSR31     | 128
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_FPSCR     | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_VSCR      | 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_VPA_ADDR  | 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_VPA_SLB   | 128
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_VPA_DTL   | 128
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_EPCR	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_EPR	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_TCR	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_TSR	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_OR_TSR	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_CLEAR_TSR	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_MAS0	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_MAS1	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_MAS2	| 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_MAS7_3	| 64
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_MAS4	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_MAS6	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_MMUCFG	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_TLB0CFG	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_TLB1CFG	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_TLB2CFG	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_TLB3CFG	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_TLB0PS	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_TLB1PS	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_TLB2PS	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_TLB3PS	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_EPTCFG	| 32
+  PPC   | KVM_REG_PPC_ICP_STATE | 64
+
+ARM registers are mapped using the lower 32 bits.  The upper 16 of that
+is the register group type, or coprocessor number:
+
+ARM core registers have the following id bit patterns:
+  0x4020 0000 0010 <index into the kvm_regs struct:16>
+
+ARM 32-bit CP15 registers have the following id bit patterns:
+  0x4020 0000 000F <zero:1> <crn:4> <crm:4> <opc1:4> <opc2:3>
+
+ARM 64-bit CP15 registers have the following id bit patterns:
+  0x4030 0000 000F <zero:1> <zero:4> <crm:4> <opc1:4> <zero:3>
+
+ARM CCSIDR registers are demultiplexed by CSSELR value:
+  0x4020 0000 0011 00 <csselr:8>
+
+ARM 32-bit VFP control registers have the following id bit patterns:
+  0x4020 0000 0012 1 <regno:12>
+
+ARM 64-bit FP registers have the following id bit patterns:
+  0x4030 0000 0012 0 <regno:12>
+
+
+arm64 registers are mapped using the lower 32 bits. The upper 16 of
+that is the register group type, or coprocessor number:
+
+arm64 core/FP-SIMD registers have the following id bit patterns. Note
+that the size of the access is variable, as the kvm_regs structure
+contains elements ranging from 32 to 128 bits. The index is a 32bit
+value in the kvm_regs structure seen as a 32bit array.
+  0x60x0 0000 0010 <index into the kvm_regs struct:16>
+
+arm64 CCSIDR registers are demultiplexed by CSSELR value:
+  0x6020 0000 0011 00 <csselr:8>
+
+arm64 system registers have the following id bit patterns:
+  0x6030 0000 0013 <op0:2> <op1:3> <crn:4> <crm:4> <op2:3>
+
+4.69 KVM_GET_ONE_REG
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_ONE_REG
+Architectures: all
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_one_reg (in and out)
+Returns: 0 on success, negative value on failure
+
+This ioctl allows to receive the value of a single register implemented
+in a vcpu. The register to read is indicated by the "id" field of the
+kvm_one_reg struct passed in. On success, the register value can be found
+at the memory location pointed to by "addr".
+
+The list of registers accessible using this interface is identical to the
+list in 4.68.
+
+
+4.70 KVM_KVMCLOCK_CTRL
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_KVMCLOCK_CTRL
+Architectures: Any that implement pvclocks (currently x86 only)
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: None
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+This signals to the host kernel that the specified guest is being paused by
+userspace.  The host will set a flag in the pvclock structure that is checked
+from the soft lockup watchdog.  The flag is part of the pvclock structure that
+is shared between guest and host, specifically the second bit of the flags
+field of the pvclock_vcpu_time_info structure.  It will be set exclusively by
+the host and read/cleared exclusively by the guest.  The guest operation of
+checking and clearing the flag must an atomic operation so
+load-link/store-conditional, or equivalent must be used.  There are two cases
+where the guest will clear the flag: when the soft lockup watchdog timer resets
+itself or when a soft lockup is detected.  This ioctl can be called any time
+after pausing the vcpu, but before it is resumed.
+
+
+4.71 KVM_SIGNAL_MSI
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_SIGNAL_MSI
+Architectures: x86
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_msi (in)
+Returns: >0 on delivery, 0 if guest blocked the MSI, and -1 on error
+
+Directly inject a MSI message. Only valid with in-kernel irqchip that handles
+MSI messages.
+
+struct kvm_msi {
+	__u32 address_lo;
+	__u32 address_hi;
+	__u32 data;
+	__u32 flags;
+	__u8  pad[16];
+};
+
+No flags are defined so far. The corresponding field must be 0.
+
+
+4.71 KVM_CREATE_PIT2
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_PIT2
+Architectures: x86
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_pit_config (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+Creates an in-kernel device model for the i8254 PIT. This call is only valid
+after enabling in-kernel irqchip support via KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP. The following
+parameters have to be passed:
+
+struct kvm_pit_config {
+	__u32 flags;
+	__u32 pad[15];
+};
+
+Valid flags are:
+
+#define KVM_PIT_SPEAKER_DUMMY     1 /* emulate speaker port stub */
+
+PIT timer interrupts may use a per-VM kernel thread for injection. If it
+exists, this thread will have a name of the following pattern:
+
+kvm-pit/<owner-process-pid>
+
+When running a guest with elevated priorities, the scheduling parameters of
+this thread may have to be adjusted accordingly.
+
+This IOCTL replaces the obsolete KVM_CREATE_PIT.
+
+
+4.72 KVM_GET_PIT2
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_PIT_STATE2
+Architectures: x86
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_pit_state2 (out)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+Retrieves the state of the in-kernel PIT model. Only valid after
+KVM_CREATE_PIT2. The state is returned in the following structure:
+
+struct kvm_pit_state2 {
+	struct kvm_pit_channel_state channels[3];
+	__u32 flags;
+	__u32 reserved[9];
+};
+
+Valid flags are:
+
+/* disable PIT in HPET legacy mode */
+#define KVM_PIT_FLAGS_HPET_LEGACY  0x00000001
+
+This IOCTL replaces the obsolete KVM_GET_PIT.
+
+
+4.73 KVM_SET_PIT2
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_PIT_STATE2
+Architectures: x86
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_pit_state2 (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+Sets the state of the in-kernel PIT model. Only valid after KVM_CREATE_PIT2.
+See KVM_GET_PIT2 for details on struct kvm_pit_state2.
+
+This IOCTL replaces the obsolete KVM_SET_PIT.
+
+
+4.74 KVM_PPC_GET_SMMU_INFO
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_GET_SMMU_INFO
+Architectures: powerpc
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: None
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+This populates and returns a structure describing the features of
+the "Server" class MMU emulation supported by KVM.
+This can in turn be used by userspace to generate the appropriate
+device-tree properties for the guest operating system.
+
+The structure contains some global informations, followed by an
+array of supported segment page sizes:
+
+      struct kvm_ppc_smmu_info {
+	     __u64 flags;
+	     __u32 slb_size;
+	     __u32 pad;
+	     struct kvm_ppc_one_seg_page_size sps[KVM_PPC_PAGE_SIZES_MAX_SZ];
+      };
+
+The supported flags are:
+
+    - KVM_PPC_PAGE_SIZES_REAL:
+        When that flag is set, guest page sizes must "fit" the backing
+        store page sizes. When not set, any page size in the list can
+        be used regardless of how they are backed by userspace.
+
+    - KVM_PPC_1T_SEGMENTS
+        The emulated MMU supports 1T segments in addition to the
+        standard 256M ones.
+
+The "slb_size" field indicates how many SLB entries are supported
+
+The "sps" array contains 8 entries indicating the supported base
+page sizes for a segment in increasing order. Each entry is defined
+as follow:
+
+   struct kvm_ppc_one_seg_page_size {
+	__u32 page_shift;	/* Base page shift of segment (or 0) */
+	__u32 slb_enc;		/* SLB encoding for BookS */
+	struct kvm_ppc_one_page_size enc[KVM_PPC_PAGE_SIZES_MAX_SZ];
+   };
+
+An entry with a "page_shift" of 0 is unused. Because the array is
+organized in increasing order, a lookup can stop when encoutering
+such an entry.
+
+The "slb_enc" field provides the encoding to use in the SLB for the
+page size. The bits are in positions such as the value can directly
+be OR'ed into the "vsid" argument of the slbmte instruction.
+
+The "enc" array is a list which for each of those segment base page
+size provides the list of supported actual page sizes (which can be
+only larger or equal to the base page size), along with the
+corresponding encoding in the hash PTE. Similarly, the array is
+8 entries sorted by increasing sizes and an entry with a "0" shift
+is an empty entry and a terminator:
+
+   struct kvm_ppc_one_page_size {
+	__u32 page_shift;	/* Page shift (or 0) */
+	__u32 pte_enc;		/* Encoding in the HPTE (>>12) */
+   };
+
+The "pte_enc" field provides a value that can OR'ed into the hash
+PTE's RPN field (ie, it needs to be shifted left by 12 to OR it
+into the hash PTE second double word).
+
+4.75 KVM_IRQFD
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQFD
+Architectures: x86
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_irqfd (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+Allows setting an eventfd to directly trigger a guest interrupt.
+kvm_irqfd.fd specifies the file descriptor to use as the eventfd and
+kvm_irqfd.gsi specifies the irqchip pin toggled by this event.  When
+an event is tiggered on the eventfd, an interrupt is injected into
+the guest using the specified gsi pin.  The irqfd is removed using
+the KVM_IRQFD_FLAG_DEASSIGN flag, specifying both kvm_irqfd.fd
+and kvm_irqfd.gsi.
+
+With KVM_CAP_IRQFD_RESAMPLE, KVM_IRQFD supports a de-assert and notify
+mechanism allowing emulation of level-triggered, irqfd-based
+interrupts.  When KVM_IRQFD_FLAG_RESAMPLE is set the user must pass an
+additional eventfd in the kvm_irqfd.resamplefd field.  When operating
+in resample mode, posting of an interrupt through kvm_irq.fd asserts
+the specified gsi in the irqchip.  When the irqchip is resampled, such
+as from an EOI, the gsi is de-asserted and the user is notifed via
+kvm_irqfd.resamplefd.  It is the user's responsibility to re-queue
+the interrupt if the device making use of it still requires service.
+Note that closing the resamplefd is not sufficient to disable the
+irqfd.  The KVM_IRQFD_FLAG_RESAMPLE is only necessary on assignment
+and need not be specified with KVM_IRQFD_FLAG_DEASSIGN.
+
+4.76 KVM_PPC_ALLOCATE_HTAB
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_ALLOC_HTAB
+Architectures: powerpc
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: Pointer to u32 containing hash table order (in/out)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+This requests the host kernel to allocate an MMU hash table for a
+guest using the PAPR paravirtualization interface.  This only does
+anything if the kernel is configured to use the Book 3S HV style of
+virtualization.  Otherwise the capability doesn't exist and the ioctl
+returns an ENOTTY error.  The rest of this description assumes Book 3S
+HV.
+
+There must be no vcpus running when this ioctl is called; if there
+are, it will do nothing and return an EBUSY error.
+
+The parameter is a pointer to a 32-bit unsigned integer variable
+containing the order (log base 2) of the desired size of the hash
+table, which must be between 18 and 46.  On successful return from the
+ioctl, it will have been updated with the order of the hash table that
+was allocated.
+
+If no hash table has been allocated when any vcpu is asked to run
+(with the KVM_RUN ioctl), the host kernel will allocate a
+default-sized hash table (16 MB).
+
+If this ioctl is called when a hash table has already been allocated,
+the kernel will clear out the existing hash table (zero all HPTEs) and
+return the hash table order in the parameter.  (If the guest is using
+the virtualized real-mode area (VRMA) facility, the kernel will
+re-create the VMRA HPTEs on the next KVM_RUN of any vcpu.)
+
+4.77 KVM_S390_INTERRUPT
+
+Capability: basic
+Architectures: s390
+Type: vm ioctl, vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_s390_interrupt (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+Allows to inject an interrupt to the guest. Interrupts can be floating
+(vm ioctl) or per cpu (vcpu ioctl), depending on the interrupt type.
+
+Interrupt parameters are passed via kvm_s390_interrupt:
+
+struct kvm_s390_interrupt {
+	__u32 type;
+	__u32 parm;
+	__u64 parm64;
+};
+
+type can be one of the following:
+
+KVM_S390_SIGP_STOP (vcpu) - sigp restart
+KVM_S390_PROGRAM_INT (vcpu) - program check; code in parm
+KVM_S390_SIGP_SET_PREFIX (vcpu) - sigp set prefix; prefix address in parm
+KVM_S390_RESTART (vcpu) - restart
+KVM_S390_INT_VIRTIO (vm) - virtio external interrupt; external interrupt
+			   parameters in parm and parm64
+KVM_S390_INT_SERVICE (vm) - sclp external interrupt; sclp parameter in parm
+KVM_S390_INT_EMERGENCY (vcpu) - sigp emergency; source cpu in parm
+KVM_S390_INT_EXTERNAL_CALL (vcpu) - sigp external call; source cpu in parm
+KVM_S390_INT_IO(ai,cssid,ssid,schid) (vm) - compound value to indicate an
+    I/O interrupt (ai - adapter interrupt; cssid,ssid,schid - subchannel);
+    I/O interruption parameters in parm (subchannel) and parm64 (intparm,
+    interruption subclass)
+KVM_S390_MCHK (vm, vcpu) - machine check interrupt; cr 14 bits in parm,
+                           machine check interrupt code in parm64 (note that
+                           machine checks needing further payload are not
+                           supported by this ioctl)
+
+Note that the vcpu ioctl is asynchronous to vcpu execution.
+
+4.78 KVM_PPC_GET_HTAB_FD
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_HTAB_FD
+Architectures: powerpc
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: Pointer to struct kvm_get_htab_fd (in)
+Returns: file descriptor number (>= 0) on success, -1 on error
+
+This returns a file descriptor that can be used either to read out the
+entries in the guest's hashed page table (HPT), or to write entries to
+initialize the HPT.  The returned fd can only be written to if the
+KVM_GET_HTAB_WRITE bit is set in the flags field of the argument, and
+can only be read if that bit is clear.  The argument struct looks like
+this:
+
+/* For KVM_PPC_GET_HTAB_FD */
+struct kvm_get_htab_fd {
+	__u64	flags;
+	__u64	start_index;
+	__u64	reserved[2];
+};
+
+/* Values for kvm_get_htab_fd.flags */
+#define KVM_GET_HTAB_BOLTED_ONLY	((__u64)0x1)
+#define KVM_GET_HTAB_WRITE		((__u64)0x2)
+
+The `start_index' field gives the index in the HPT of the entry at
+which to start reading.  It is ignored when writing.
+
+Reads on the fd will initially supply information about all
+"interesting" HPT entries.  Interesting entries are those with the
+bolted bit set, if the KVM_GET_HTAB_BOLTED_ONLY bit is set, otherwise
+all entries.  When the end of the HPT is reached, the read() will
+return.  If read() is called again on the fd, it will start again from
+the beginning of the HPT, but will only return HPT entries that have
+changed since they were last read.
+
+Data read or written is structured as a header (8 bytes) followed by a
+series of valid HPT entries (16 bytes) each.  The header indicates how
+many valid HPT entries there are and how many invalid entries follow
+the valid entries.  The invalid entries are not represented explicitly
+in the stream.  The header format is:
+
+struct kvm_get_htab_header {
+	__u32	index;
+	__u16	n_valid;
+	__u16	n_invalid;
+};
+
+Writes to the fd create HPT entries starting at the index given in the
+header; first `n_valid' valid entries with contents from the data
+written, then `n_invalid' invalid entries, invalidating any previously
+valid entries found.
+
+4.79 KVM_CREATE_DEVICE
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_CTRL
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_create_device (in/out)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+Errors:
+  ENODEV: The device type is unknown or unsupported
+  EEXIST: Device already created, and this type of device may not
+          be instantiated multiple times
+
+  Other error conditions may be defined by individual device types or
+  have their standard meanings.
+
+Creates an emulated device in the kernel.  The file descriptor returned
+in fd can be used with KVM_SET/GET/HAS_DEVICE_ATTR.
+
+If the KVM_CREATE_DEVICE_TEST flag is set, only test whether the
+device type is supported (not necessarily whether it can be created
+in the current vm).
+
+Individual devices should not define flags.  Attributes should be used
+for specifying any behavior that is not implied by the device type
+number.
+
+struct kvm_create_device {
+	__u32	type;	/* in: KVM_DEV_TYPE_xxx */
+	__u32	fd;	/* out: device handle */
+	__u32	flags;	/* in: KVM_CREATE_DEVICE_xxx */
+};
+
+4.80 KVM_SET_DEVICE_ATTR/KVM_GET_DEVICE_ATTR
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_CTRL
+Type: device ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_device_attr
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+Errors:
+  ENXIO:  The group or attribute is unknown/unsupported for this device
+  EPERM:  The attribute cannot (currently) be accessed this way
+          (e.g. read-only attribute, or attribute that only makes
+          sense when the device is in a different state)
+
+  Other error conditions may be defined by individual device types.
+
+Gets/sets a specified piece of device configuration and/or state.  The
+semantics are device-specific.  See individual device documentation in
+the "devices" directory.  As with ONE_REG, the size of the data
+transferred is defined by the particular attribute.
+
+struct kvm_device_attr {
+	__u32	flags;		/* no flags currently defined */
+	__u32	group;		/* device-defined */
+	__u64	attr;		/* group-defined */
+	__u64	addr;		/* userspace address of attr data */
+};
+
+4.81 KVM_HAS_DEVICE_ATTR
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_CTRL
+Type: device ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_device_attr
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+Errors:
+  ENXIO:  The group or attribute is unknown/unsupported for this device
+
+Tests whether a device supports a particular attribute.  A successful
+return indicates the attribute is implemented.  It does not necessarily
+indicate that the attribute can be read or written in the device's
+current state.  "addr" is ignored.
+
+4.82 KVM_ARM_VCPU_INIT
+
+Capability: basic
+Architectures: arm, arm64
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct struct kvm_vcpu_init (in)
+Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error
+Errors:
+  EINVAL:    the target is unknown, or the combination of features is invalid.
+  ENOENT:    a features bit specified is unknown.
+
+This tells KVM what type of CPU to present to the guest, and what
+optional features it should have.  This will cause a reset of the cpu
+registers to their initial values.  If this is not called, KVM_RUN will
+return ENOEXEC for that vcpu.
+
+Note that because some registers reflect machine topology, all vcpus
+should be created before this ioctl is invoked.
+
+Possible features:
+	- KVM_ARM_VCPU_POWER_OFF: Starts the CPU in a power-off state.
+	  Depends on KVM_CAP_ARM_PSCI.
+	- KVM_ARM_VCPU_EL1_32BIT: Starts the CPU in a 32bit mode.
+	  Depends on KVM_CAP_ARM_EL1_32BIT (arm64 only).
+
+
+4.83 KVM_GET_REG_LIST
+
+Capability: basic
+Architectures: arm, arm64
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_reg_list (in/out)
+Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error
+Errors:
+  E2BIG:     the reg index list is too big to fit in the array specified by
+             the user (the number required will be written into n).
+
+struct kvm_reg_list {
+	__u64 n; /* number of registers in reg[] */
+	__u64 reg[0];
+};
+
+This ioctl returns the guest registers that are supported for the
+KVM_GET_ONE_REG/KVM_SET_ONE_REG calls.
+
+
+4.84 KVM_ARM_SET_DEVICE_ADDR
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_ARM_SET_DEVICE_ADDR
+Architectures: arm, arm64
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_arm_device_address (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+Errors:
+  ENODEV: The device id is unknown
+  ENXIO:  Device not supported on current system
+  EEXIST: Address already set
+  E2BIG:  Address outside guest physical address space
+  EBUSY:  Address overlaps with other device range
+
+struct kvm_arm_device_addr {
+	__u64 id;
+	__u64 addr;
+};
+
+Specify a device address in the guest's physical address space where guests
+can access emulated or directly exposed devices, which the host kernel needs
+to know about. The id field is an architecture specific identifier for a
+specific device.
+
+ARM/arm64 divides the id field into two parts, a device id and an
+address type id specific to the individual device.
+
+  bits:  | 63        ...       32 | 31    ...    16 | 15    ...    0 |
+  field: |        0x00000000      |     device id   |  addr type id  |
+
+ARM/arm64 currently only require this when using the in-kernel GIC
+support for the hardware VGIC features, using KVM_ARM_DEVICE_VGIC_V2
+as the device id.  When setting the base address for the guest's
+mapping of the VGIC virtual CPU and distributor interface, the ioctl
+must be called after calling KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP, but before calling
+KVM_RUN on any of the VCPUs.  Calling this ioctl twice for any of the
+base addresses will return -EEXIST.
+
+4.85 KVM_PPC_RTAS_DEFINE_TOKEN
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_RTAS
+Architectures: ppc
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_rtas_token_args
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+Defines a token value for a RTAS (Run Time Abstraction Services)
+service in order to allow it to be handled in the kernel.  The
+argument struct gives the name of the service, which must be the name
+of a service that has a kernel-side implementation.  If the token
+value is non-zero, it will be associated with that service, and
+subsequent RTAS calls by the guest specifying that token will be
+handled by the kernel.  If the token value is 0, then any token
+associated with the service will be forgotten, and subsequent RTAS
+calls by the guest for that service will be passed to userspace to be
+handled.
+
+
 5. The kvm_run structure
+------------------------
 
 Application code obtains a pointer to the kvm_run structure by
 mmap()ing a vcpu fd.  From that point, application code can control
@@ -1601,7 +2493,8 @@ executed a memory-mapped I/O instruction which could not be satisfied
 by kvm.  The 'data' member contains the written data if 'is_write' is
 true, and should be filled by application code otherwise.
 
-NOTE: For KVM_EXIT_IO, KVM_EXIT_MMIO and KVM_EXIT_OSI, the corresponding
+NOTE: For KVM_EXIT_IO, KVM_EXIT_MMIO, KVM_EXIT_OSI, KVM_EXIT_DCR,
+      KVM_EXIT_PAPR and KVM_EXIT_EPR the corresponding
 operations are complete (and guest state is consistent) only after userspace
 has re-entered the kernel with KVM_RUN.  The kernel side will first finish
 incomplete operations and then check for pending signals.  Userspace
@@ -1651,6 +2544,20 @@ s390 specific.
 
 s390 specific.
 
+		/* KVM_EXIT_S390_UCONTROL */
+		struct {
+			__u64 trans_exc_code;
+			__u32 pgm_code;
+		} s390_ucontrol;
+
+s390 specific. A page fault has occurred for a user controlled virtual
+machine (KVM_VM_S390_UNCONTROL) on it's host page table that cannot be
+resolved by the kernel.
+The program code and the translation exception code that were placed
+in the cpu's lowcore are presented here as defined by the z Architecture
+Principles of Operation Book in the Chapter for Dynamic Address Translation
+(DAT)
+
 		/* KVM_EXIT_DCR */
 		struct {
 			__u32 dcrn;
@@ -1690,12 +2597,72 @@ The possible hypercalls are defined in the Power Architecture Platform
 Requirements (PAPR) document available from www.power.org (free
 developer registration required to access it).
 
+		/* KVM_EXIT_S390_TSCH */
+		struct {
+			__u16 subchannel_id;
+			__u16 subchannel_nr;
+			__u32 io_int_parm;
+			__u32 io_int_word;
+			__u32 ipb;
+			__u8 dequeued;
+		} s390_tsch;
+
+s390 specific. This exit occurs when KVM_CAP_S390_CSS_SUPPORT has been enabled
+and TEST SUBCHANNEL was intercepted. If dequeued is set, a pending I/O
+interrupt for the target subchannel has been dequeued and subchannel_id,
+subchannel_nr, io_int_parm and io_int_word contain the parameters for that
+interrupt. ipb is needed for instruction parameter decoding.
+
+		/* KVM_EXIT_EPR */
+		struct {
+			__u32 epr;
+		} epr;
+
+On FSL BookE PowerPC chips, the interrupt controller has a fast patch
+interrupt acknowledge path to the core. When the core successfully
+delivers an interrupt, it automatically populates the EPR register with
+the interrupt vector number and acknowledges the interrupt inside
+the interrupt controller.
+
+In case the interrupt controller lives in user space, we need to do
+the interrupt acknowledge cycle through it to fetch the next to be
+delivered interrupt vector using this exit.
+
+It gets triggered whenever both KVM_CAP_PPC_EPR are enabled and an
+external interrupt has just been delivered into the guest. User space
+should put the acknowledged interrupt vector into the 'epr' field.
+
 		/* Fix the size of the union. */
 		char padding[256];
 	};
+
+	/*
+	 * shared registers between kvm and userspace.
+	 * kvm_valid_regs specifies the register classes set by the host
+	 * kvm_dirty_regs specified the register classes dirtied by userspace
+	 * struct kvm_sync_regs is architecture specific, as well as the
+	 * bits for kvm_valid_regs and kvm_dirty_regs
+	 */
+	__u64 kvm_valid_regs;
+	__u64 kvm_dirty_regs;
+	union {
+		struct kvm_sync_regs regs;
+		char padding[1024];
+	} s;
+
+If KVM_CAP_SYNC_REGS is defined, these fields allow userspace to access
+certain guest registers without having to call SET/GET_*REGS. Thus we can
+avoid some system call overhead if userspace has to handle the exit.
+Userspace can query the validity of the structure by checking
+kvm_valid_regs for specific bits. These bits are architecture specific
+and usually define the validity of a groups of registers. (e.g. one bit
+ for general purpose registers)
+
 };
 
+
 6. Capabilities that can be enabled
+-----------------------------------
 
 There are certain capabilities that change the behavior of the virtual CPU when
 enabled. To enable them, please see section 4.37. Below you can find a list of
@@ -1711,6 +2678,7 @@ The following information is provided along with the description:
   Returns: the return value.  General error numbers (EBADF, ENOMEM, EINVAL)
       are not detailed, but errors with specific meanings are.
 
+
 6.1 KVM_CAP_PPC_OSI
 
 Architectures: ppc
@@ -1724,6 +2692,7 @@ between the guest and the host.
 
 When this capability is enabled, KVM_EXIT_OSI can occur.
 
+
 6.2 KVM_CAP_PPC_PAPR
 
 Architectures: ppc
@@ -1741,3 +2710,93 @@ HTAB address part of SDR1 contains an HVA instead of a GPA, as PAPR keeps the
 HTAB invisible to the guest.
 
 When this capability is enabled, KVM_EXIT_PAPR_HCALL can occur.
+
+
+6.3 KVM_CAP_SW_TLB
+
+Architectures: ppc
+Parameters: args[0] is the address of a struct kvm_config_tlb
+Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error
+
+struct kvm_config_tlb {
+	__u64 params;
+	__u64 array;
+	__u32 mmu_type;
+	__u32 array_len;
+};
+
+Configures the virtual CPU's TLB array, establishing a shared memory area
+between userspace and KVM.  The "params" and "array" fields are userspace
+addresses of mmu-type-specific data structures.  The "array_len" field is an
+safety mechanism, and should be set to the size in bytes of the memory that
+userspace has reserved for the array.  It must be at least the size dictated
+by "mmu_type" and "params".
+
+While KVM_RUN is active, the shared region is under control of KVM.  Its
+contents are undefined, and any modification by userspace results in
+boundedly undefined behavior.
+
+On return from KVM_RUN, the shared region will reflect the current state of
+the guest's TLB.  If userspace makes any changes, it must call KVM_DIRTY_TLB
+to tell KVM which entries have been changed, prior to calling KVM_RUN again
+on this vcpu.
+
+For mmu types KVM_MMU_FSL_BOOKE_NOHV and KVM_MMU_FSL_BOOKE_HV:
+ - The "params" field is of type "struct kvm_book3e_206_tlb_params".
+ - The "array" field points to an array of type "struct
+   kvm_book3e_206_tlb_entry".
+ - The array consists of all entries in the first TLB, followed by all
+   entries in the second TLB.
+ - Within a TLB, entries are ordered first by increasing set number.  Within a
+   set, entries are ordered by way (increasing ESEL).
+ - The hash for determining set number in TLB0 is: (MAS2 >> 12) & (num_sets - 1)
+   where "num_sets" is the tlb_sizes[] value divided by the tlb_ways[] value.
+ - The tsize field of mas1 shall be set to 4K on TLB0, even though the
+   hardware ignores this value for TLB0.
+
+6.4 KVM_CAP_S390_CSS_SUPPORT
+
+Architectures: s390
+Parameters: none
+Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error
+
+This capability enables support for handling of channel I/O instructions.
+
+TEST PENDING INTERRUPTION and the interrupt portion of TEST SUBCHANNEL are
+handled in-kernel, while the other I/O instructions are passed to userspace.
+
+When this capability is enabled, KVM_EXIT_S390_TSCH will occur on TEST
+SUBCHANNEL intercepts.
+
+6.5 KVM_CAP_PPC_EPR
+
+Architectures: ppc
+Parameters: args[0] defines whether the proxy facility is active
+Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error
+
+This capability enables or disables the delivery of interrupts through the
+external proxy facility.
+
+When enabled (args[0] != 0), every time the guest gets an external interrupt
+delivered, it automatically exits into user space with a KVM_EXIT_EPR exit
+to receive the topmost interrupt vector.
+
+When disabled (args[0] == 0), behavior is as if this facility is unsupported.
+
+When this capability is enabled, KVM_EXIT_EPR can occur.
+
+6.6 KVM_CAP_IRQ_MPIC
+
+Architectures: ppc
+Parameters: args[0] is the MPIC device fd
+            args[1] is the MPIC CPU number for this vcpu
+
+This capability connects the vcpu to an in-kernel MPIC device.
+
+6.7 KVM_CAP_IRQ_XICS
+
+Architectures: ppc
+Parameters: args[0] is the XICS device fd
+            args[1] is the XICS CPU number (server ID) for this vcpu
+
+This capability connects the vcpu to an in-kernel XICS device.
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/cpuid.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/cpuid.txt
index 882068538c9c..22ff659bc0fb 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/cpuid.txt
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/cpuid.txt
@@ -10,11 +10,15 @@ a guest.
 KVM cpuid functions are:
 
 function: KVM_CPUID_SIGNATURE (0x40000000)
-returns : eax = 0,
+returns : eax = 0x40000001,
           ebx = 0x4b4d564b,
           ecx = 0x564b4d56,
           edx = 0x4d.
 Note that this value in ebx, ecx and edx corresponds to the string "KVMKVMKVM".
+The value in eax corresponds to the maximum cpuid function present in this leaf,
+and will be updated if more functions are added in the future.
+Note also that old hosts set eax value to 0x0. This should
+be interpreted as if the value was 0x40000001.
 This function queries the presence of KVM cpuid leafs.
 
 
@@ -39,6 +43,10 @@ KVM_FEATURE_CLOCKSOURCE2           ||     3 || kvmclock available at msrs
 KVM_FEATURE_ASYNC_PF               ||     4 || async pf can be enabled by
                                    ||       || writing to msr 0x4b564d02
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+KVM_FEATURE_PV_UNHALT              ||     7 || guest checks this feature bit
+                                   ||       || before enabling paravirtualized
+                                   ||       || spinlock support.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 KVM_FEATURE_CLOCKSOURCE_STABLE_BIT ||    24 || host will warn if no guest-side
                                    ||       || per-cpu warps are expected in
                                    ||       || kvmclock.
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/README b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/README
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..34a69834124a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/README
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+This directory contains specific device bindings for KVM_CAP_DEVICE_CTRL.
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/mpic.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/mpic.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8257397adc3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/mpic.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+MPIC interrupt controller
+=========================
+
+Device types supported:
+  KVM_DEV_TYPE_FSL_MPIC_20     Freescale MPIC v2.0
+  KVM_DEV_TYPE_FSL_MPIC_42     Freescale MPIC v4.2
+
+Only one MPIC instance, of any type, may be instantiated.  The created
+MPIC will act as the system interrupt controller, connecting to each
+vcpu's interrupt inputs.
+
+Groups:
+  KVM_DEV_MPIC_GRP_MISC
+  Attributes:
+    KVM_DEV_MPIC_BASE_ADDR (rw, 64-bit)
+      Base address of the 256 KiB MPIC register space.  Must be
+      naturally aligned.  A value of zero disables the mapping.
+      Reset value is zero.
+
+  KVM_DEV_MPIC_GRP_REGISTER (rw, 32-bit)
+    Access an MPIC register, as if the access were made from the guest.
+    "attr" is the byte offset into the MPIC register space.  Accesses
+    must be 4-byte aligned.
+
+    MSIs may be signaled by using this attribute group to write
+    to the relevant MSIIR.
+
+  KVM_DEV_MPIC_GRP_IRQ_ACTIVE (rw, 32-bit)
+    IRQ input line for each standard openpic source.  0 is inactive and 1
+    is active, regardless of interrupt sense.
+
+    For edge-triggered interrupts:  Writing 1 is considered an activating
+    edge, and writing 0 is ignored.  Reading returns 1 if a previously
+    signaled edge has not been acknowledged, and 0 otherwise.
+
+    "attr" is the IRQ number.  IRQ numbers for standard sources are the
+    byte offset of the relevant IVPR from EIVPR0, divided by 32.
+
+IRQ Routing:
+
+  The MPIC emulation supports IRQ routing. Only a single MPIC device can
+  be instantiated. Once that device has been created, it's available as
+  irqchip id 0.
+
+  This irqchip 0 has 256 interrupt pins, which expose the interrupts in
+  the main array of interrupt sources (a.k.a. "SRC" interrupts).
+
+  The numbering is the same as the MPIC device tree binding -- based on
+  the register offset from the beginning of the sources array, without
+  regard to any subdivisions in chip documentation such as "internal"
+  or "external" interrupts.
+
+  Access to non-SRC interrupts is not implemented through IRQ routing mechanisms.
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/xics.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/xics.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..42864935ac5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/xics.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+XICS interrupt controller
+
+Device type supported: KVM_DEV_TYPE_XICS
+
+Groups:
+  KVM_DEV_XICS_SOURCES
+  Attributes: One per interrupt source, indexed by the source number.
+
+This device emulates the XICS (eXternal Interrupt Controller
+Specification) defined in PAPR.  The XICS has a set of interrupt
+sources, each identified by a 20-bit source number, and a set of
+Interrupt Control Presentation (ICP) entities, also called "servers",
+each associated with a virtual CPU.
+
+The ICP entities are created by enabling the KVM_CAP_IRQ_ARCH
+capability for each vcpu, specifying KVM_CAP_IRQ_XICS in args[0] and
+the interrupt server number (i.e. the vcpu number from the XICS's
+point of view) in args[1] of the kvm_enable_cap struct.  Each ICP has
+64 bits of state which can be read and written using the
+KVM_GET_ONE_REG and KVM_SET_ONE_REG ioctls on the vcpu.  The 64 bit
+state word has the following bitfields, starting at the
+least-significant end of the word:
+
+* Unused, 16 bits
+
+* Pending interrupt priority, 8 bits
+  Zero is the highest priority, 255 means no interrupt is pending.
+
+* Pending IPI (inter-processor interrupt) priority, 8 bits
+  Zero is the highest priority, 255 means no IPI is pending.
+
+* Pending interrupt source number, 24 bits
+  Zero means no interrupt pending, 2 means an IPI is pending
+
+* Current processor priority, 8 bits
+  Zero is the highest priority, meaning no interrupts can be
+  delivered, and 255 is the lowest priority.
+
+Each source has 64 bits of state that can be read and written using
+the KVM_GET_DEVICE_ATTR and KVM_SET_DEVICE_ATTR ioctls, specifying the
+KVM_DEV_XICS_SOURCES attribute group, with the attribute number being
+the interrupt source number.  The 64 bit state word has the following
+bitfields, starting from the least-significant end of the word:
+
+* Destination (server number), 32 bits
+  This specifies where the interrupt should be sent, and is the
+  interrupt server number specified for the destination vcpu.
+
+* Priority, 8 bits
+  This is the priority specified for this interrupt source, where 0 is
+  the highest priority and 255 is the lowest.  An interrupt with a
+  priority of 255 will never be delivered.
+
+* Level sensitive flag, 1 bit
+  This bit is 1 for a level-sensitive interrupt source, or 0 for
+  edge-sensitive (or MSI).
+
+* Masked flag, 1 bit
+  This bit is set to 1 if the interrupt is masked (cannot be delivered
+  regardless of its priority), for example by the ibm,int-off RTAS
+  call, or 0 if it is not masked.
+
+* Pending flag, 1 bit
+  This bit is 1 if the source has a pending interrupt, otherwise 0.
+
+Only one XICS instance may be created per VM.
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..022198e389d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+Linux KVM Hypercall:
+===================
+X86:
+ KVM Hypercalls have a three-byte sequence of either the vmcall or the vmmcall
+ instruction. The hypervisor can replace it with instructions that are
+ guaranteed to be supported.
+
+ Up to four arguments may be passed in rbx, rcx, rdx, and rsi respectively.
+ The hypercall number should be placed in rax and the return value will be
+ placed in rax.  No other registers will be clobbered unless explicitly stated
+ by the particular hypercall.
+
+S390:
+  R2-R7 are used for parameters 1-6. In addition, R1 is used for hypercall
+  number. The return value is written to R2.
+
+  S390 uses diagnose instruction as hypercall (0x500) along with hypercall
+  number in R1.
+
+ PowerPC:
+  It uses R3-R10 and hypercall number in R11. R4-R11 are used as output registers.
+  Return value is placed in R3.
+
+  KVM hypercalls uses 4 byte opcode, that are patched with 'hypercall-instructions'
+  property inside the device tree's /hypervisor node.
+  For more information refer to Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt
+
+KVM Hypercalls Documentation
+===========================
+The template for each hypercall is:
+1. Hypercall name.
+2. Architecture(s)
+3. Status (deprecated, obsolete, active)
+4. Purpose
+
+1. KVM_HC_VAPIC_POLL_IRQ
+------------------------
+Architecture: x86
+Status: active
+Purpose: Trigger guest exit so that the host can check for pending
+interrupts on reentry.
+
+2. KVM_HC_MMU_OP
+------------------------
+Architecture: x86
+Status: deprecated.
+Purpose: Support MMU operations such as writing to PTE,
+flushing TLB, release PT.
+
+3. KVM_HC_FEATURES
+------------------------
+Architecture: PPC
+Status: active
+Purpose: Expose hypercall availability to the guest. On x86 platforms, cpuid
+used to enumerate which hypercalls are available. On PPC, either device tree
+based lookup ( which is also what EPAPR dictates) OR KVM specific enumeration
+mechanism (which is this hypercall) can be used.
+
+4. KVM_HC_PPC_MAP_MAGIC_PAGE
+------------------------
+Architecture: PPC
+Status: active
+Purpose: To enable communication between the hypervisor and guest there is a
+shared page that contains parts of supervisor visible register state.
+The guest can map this shared page to access its supervisor register through
+memory using this hypercall.
+
+5. KVM_HC_KICK_CPU
+------------------------
+Architecture: x86
+Status: active
+Purpose: Hypercall used to wakeup a vcpu from HLT state
+Usage example : A vcpu of a paravirtualized guest that is busywaiting in guest
+kernel mode for an event to occur (ex: a spinlock to become available) can
+execute HLT instruction once it has busy-waited for more than a threshold
+time-interval. Execution of HLT instruction would cause the hypervisor to put
+the vcpu to sleep until occurence of an appropriate event. Another vcpu of the
+same guest can wakeup the sleeping vcpu by issuing KVM_HC_KICK_CPU hypercall,
+specifying APIC ID (a1) of the vcpu to be woken up. An additional argument (a0)
+is used in the hypercall for future use.
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt
index 3b4cd3bf5631..41b7ac9884b5 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt
@@ -6,7 +6,129 @@ KVM Lock Overview
 
 (to be written)
 
-2. Reference
+2: Exception
+------------
+
+Fast page fault:
+
+Fast page fault is the fast path which fixes the guest page fault out of
+the mmu-lock on x86. Currently, the page fault can be fast only if the
+shadow page table is present and it is caused by write-protect, that means
+we just need change the W bit of the spte.
+
+What we use to avoid all the race is the SPTE_HOST_WRITEABLE bit and
+SPTE_MMU_WRITEABLE bit on the spte:
+- SPTE_HOST_WRITEABLE means the gfn is writable on host.
+- SPTE_MMU_WRITEABLE means the gfn is writable on mmu. The bit is set when
+  the gfn is writable on guest mmu and it is not write-protected by shadow
+  page write-protection.
+
+On fast page fault path, we will use cmpxchg to atomically set the spte W
+bit if spte.SPTE_HOST_WRITEABLE = 1 and spte.SPTE_WRITE_PROTECT = 1, this
+is safe because whenever changing these bits can be detected by cmpxchg.
+
+But we need carefully check these cases:
+1): The mapping from gfn to pfn
+The mapping from gfn to pfn may be changed since we can only ensure the pfn
+is not changed during cmpxchg. This is a ABA problem, for example, below case
+will happen:
+
+At the beginning:
+gpte = gfn1
+gfn1 is mapped to pfn1 on host
+spte is the shadow page table entry corresponding with gpte and
+spte = pfn1
+
+   VCPU 0                           VCPU0
+on fast page fault path:
+
+   old_spte = *spte;
+                                 pfn1 is swapped out:
+                                    spte = 0;
+
+                                 pfn1 is re-alloced for gfn2.
+
+                                 gpte is changed to point to
+                                 gfn2 by the guest:
+                                    spte = pfn1;
+
+   if (cmpxchg(spte, old_spte, old_spte+W)
+	mark_page_dirty(vcpu->kvm, gfn1)
+             OOPS!!!
+
+We dirty-log for gfn1, that means gfn2 is lost in dirty-bitmap.
+
+For direct sp, we can easily avoid it since the spte of direct sp is fixed
+to gfn. For indirect sp, before we do cmpxchg, we call gfn_to_pfn_atomic()
+to pin gfn to pfn, because after gfn_to_pfn_atomic():
+- We have held the refcount of pfn that means the pfn can not be freed and
+  be reused for another gfn.
+- The pfn is writable that means it can not be shared between different gfns
+  by KSM.
+
+Then, we can ensure the dirty bitmaps is correctly set for a gfn.
+
+Currently, to simplify the whole things, we disable fast page fault for
+indirect shadow page.
+
+2): Dirty bit tracking
+In the origin code, the spte can be fast updated (non-atomically) if the
+spte is read-only and the Accessed bit has already been set since the
+Accessed bit and Dirty bit can not be lost.
+
+But it is not true after fast page fault since the spte can be marked
+writable between reading spte and updating spte. Like below case:
+
+At the beginning:
+spte.W = 0
+spte.Accessed = 1
+
+   VCPU 0                                       VCPU0
+In mmu_spte_clear_track_bits():
+
+   old_spte = *spte;
+
+   /* 'if' condition is satisfied. */
+   if (old_spte.Accssed == 1 &&
+        old_spte.W == 0)
+      spte = 0ull;
+                                         on fast page fault path:
+                                             spte.W = 1
+                                         memory write on the spte:
+                                             spte.Dirty = 1
+
+
+   else
+      old_spte = xchg(spte, 0ull)
+
+
+   if (old_spte.Accssed == 1)
+      kvm_set_pfn_accessed(spte.pfn);
+   if (old_spte.Dirty == 1)
+      kvm_set_pfn_dirty(spte.pfn);
+      OOPS!!!
+
+The Dirty bit is lost in this case.
+
+In order to avoid this kind of issue, we always treat the spte as "volatile"
+if it can be updated out of mmu-lock, see spte_has_volatile_bits(), it means,
+the spte is always atomicly updated in this case.
+
+3): flush tlbs due to spte updated
+If the spte is updated from writable to readonly, we should flush all TLBs,
+otherwise rmap_write_protect will find a read-only spte, even though the
+writable spte might be cached on a CPU's TLB.
+
+As mentioned before, the spte can be updated to writable out of mmu-lock on
+fast page fault path, in order to easily audit the path, we see if TLBs need
+be flushed caused by this reason in mmu_spte_update() since this is a common
+function to update spte (present -> present).
+
+Since the spte is "volatile" if it can be updated out of mmu-lock, we always
+atomicly update the spte, the race caused by fast page fault can be avoided,
+See the comments in spte_has_volatile_bits() and mmu_spte_update().
+
+3. Reference
 ------------
 
 Name:		kvm_lock
@@ -23,3 +145,9 @@ Arch:		x86
 Protects:	- kvm_arch::{last_tsc_write,last_tsc_nsec,last_tsc_offset}
 		- tsc offset in vmcb
 Comment:	'raw' because updating the tsc offsets must not be preempted.
+
+Name:		kvm->mmu_lock
+Type:		spinlock_t
+Arch:		any
+Protects:	-shadow page/shadow tlb entry
+Comment:	it is a spinlock since it is used in mmu notifier.
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt
index fa5f1dbc6b23..290894176142 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt
@@ -187,23 +187,16 @@ Shadow pages contain the following information:
     perform a reverse map from a pte to a gfn. When role.direct is set, any
     element of this array can be calculated from the gfn field when used, in
     this case, the array of gfns is not allocated. See role.direct and gfn.
-  slot_bitmap:
-    A bitmap containing one bit per memory slot.  If the page contains a pte
-    mapping a page from memory slot n, then bit n of slot_bitmap will be set
-    (if a page is aliased among several slots, then it is not guaranteed that
-    all slots will be marked).
-    Used during dirty logging to avoid scanning a shadow page if none if its
-    pages need tracking.
   root_count:
     A counter keeping track of how many hardware registers (guest cr3 or
     pdptrs) are now pointing at the page.  While this counter is nonzero, the
     page cannot be destroyed.  See role.invalid.
-  multimapped:
-    Whether there exist multiple sptes pointing at this page.
-  parent_pte/parent_ptes:
-    If multimapped is zero, parent_pte points at the single spte that points at
-    this page's spt.  Otherwise, parent_ptes points at a data structure
-    with a list of parent_ptes.
+  parent_ptes:
+    The reverse mapping for the pte/ptes pointing at this page's spt. If
+    parent_ptes bit 0 is zero, only one spte points at this pages and
+    parent_ptes points at this single spte, otherwise, there exists multiple
+    sptes pointing at this page and (parent_ptes & ~0x1) points at a data
+    structure with a list of parent_ptes.
   unsync:
     If true, then the translations in this page may not match the guest's
     translation.  This is equivalent to the state of the tlb when a pte is
@@ -217,6 +210,24 @@ Shadow pages contain the following information:
     A bitmap indicating which sptes in spt point (directly or indirectly) at
     pages that may be unsynchronized.  Used to quickly locate all unsychronized
     pages reachable from a given page.
+  mmu_valid_gen:
+    Generation number of the page.  It is compared with kvm->arch.mmu_valid_gen
+    during hash table lookup, and used to skip invalidated shadow pages (see
+    "Zapping all pages" below.)
+  clear_spte_count:
+    Only present on 32-bit hosts, where a 64-bit spte cannot be written
+    atomically.  The reader uses this while running out of the MMU lock
+    to detect in-progress updates and retry them until the writer has
+    finished the write.
+  write_flooding_count:
+    A guest may write to a page table many times, causing a lot of
+    emulations if the page needs to be write-protected (see "Synchronized
+    and unsynchronized pages" below).  Leaf pages can be unsynchronized
+    so that they do not trigger frequent emulation, but this is not
+    possible for non-leafs.  This field counts the number of emulations
+    since the last time the page table was actually used; if emulation
+    is triggered too frequently on this page, KVM will unmap the page
+    to avoid emulation in the future.
 
 Reverse map
 ===========
@@ -265,14 +276,26 @@ This is the most complicated event.  The cause of a page fault can be:
 
 Handling a page fault is performed as follows:
 
+ - if the RSV bit of the error code is set, the page fault is caused by guest
+   accessing MMIO and cached MMIO information is available.
+   - walk shadow page table
+   - check for valid generation number in the spte (see "Fast invalidation of
+     MMIO sptes" below)
+   - cache the information to vcpu->arch.mmio_gva, vcpu->arch.access and
+     vcpu->arch.mmio_gfn, and call the emulator
+ - If both P bit and R/W bit of error code are set, this could possibly
+   be handled as a "fast page fault" (fixed without taking the MMU lock).  See
+   the description in Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt.
  - if needed, walk the guest page tables to determine the guest translation
    (gva->gpa or ngpa->gpa)
    - if permissions are insufficient, reflect the fault back to the guest
  - determine the host page
-   - if this is an mmio request, there is no host page; call the emulator
-     to emulate the instruction instead
+   - if this is an mmio request, there is no host page; cache the info to
+     vcpu->arch.mmio_gva, vcpu->arch.access and vcpu->arch.mmio_gfn
  - walk the shadow page table to find the spte for the translation,
    instantiating missing intermediate page tables as necessary
+   - If this is an mmio request, cache the mmio info to the spte and set some
+     reserved bit on the spte (see callers of kvm_mmu_set_mmio_spte_mask)
  - try to unsynchronize the page
    - if successful, we can let the guest continue and modify the gpte
  - emulate the instruction
@@ -358,6 +381,51 @@ causes its write_count to be incremented, thus preventing instantiation of
 a large spte.  The frames at the end of an unaligned memory slot have
 artificially inflated ->write_counts so they can never be instantiated.
 
+Zapping all pages (page generation count)
+=========================================
+
+For the large memory guests, walking and zapping all pages is really slow
+(because there are a lot of pages), and also blocks memory accesses of
+all VCPUs because it needs to hold the MMU lock.
+
+To make it be more scalable, kvm maintains a global generation number
+which is stored in kvm->arch.mmu_valid_gen.  Every shadow page stores
+the current global generation-number into sp->mmu_valid_gen when it
+is created.  Pages with a mismatching generation number are "obsolete".
+
+When KVM need zap all shadow pages sptes, it just simply increases the global
+generation-number then reload root shadow pages on all vcpus.  As the VCPUs
+create new shadow page tables, the old pages are not used because of the
+mismatching generation number.
+
+KVM then walks through all pages and zaps obsolete pages.  While the zap
+operation needs to take the MMU lock, the lock can be released periodically
+so that the VCPUs can make progress.
+
+Fast invalidation of MMIO sptes
+===============================
+
+As mentioned in "Reaction to events" above, kvm will cache MMIO
+information in leaf sptes.  When a new memslot is added or an existing
+memslot is changed, this information may become stale and needs to be
+invalidated.  This also needs to hold the MMU lock while walking all
+shadow pages, and is made more scalable with a similar technique.
+
+MMIO sptes have a few spare bits, which are used to store a
+generation number.  The global generation number is stored in
+kvm_memslots(kvm)->generation, and increased whenever guest memory info
+changes.  This generation number is distinct from the one described in
+the previous section.
+
+When KVM finds an MMIO spte, it checks the generation number of the spte.
+If the generation number of the spte does not equal the global generation
+number, it will ignore the cached MMIO information and handle the page
+fault through the slow path.
+
+Since only 19 bits are used to store generation-number on mmio spte, all
+pages are zapped when there is an overflow.
+
+
 Further reading
 ===============
 
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/msr.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/msr.txt
index 50317809113d..6d470ae7b073 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/msr.txt
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/msr.txt
@@ -34,9 +34,12 @@ MSR_KVM_WALL_CLOCK_NEW:   0x4b564d00
 		time information and check that they are both equal and even.
 		An odd version indicates an in-progress update.
 
-		sec: number of seconds for wallclock.
+		sec: number of seconds for wallclock at time of boot.
 
-		nsec: number of nanoseconds for wallclock.
+		nsec: number of nanoseconds for wallclock at time of boot.
+
+	In order to get the current wallclock time, the system_time from
+	MSR_KVM_SYSTEM_TIME_NEW needs to be added.
 
 	Note that although MSRs are per-CPU entities, the effect of this
 	particular MSR is global.
@@ -82,20 +85,25 @@ MSR_KVM_SYSTEM_TIME_NEW:  0x4b564d01
 		time at the time this structure was last updated. Unit is
 		nanoseconds.
 
-		tsc_to_system_mul: a function of the tsc frequency. One has
-		to multiply any tsc-related quantity by this value to get
-		a value in nanoseconds, besides dividing by 2^tsc_shift
+		tsc_to_system_mul: multiplier to be used when converting
+		tsc-related quantity to nanoseconds
 
-		tsc_shift: cycle to nanosecond divider, as a power of two, to
-		allow for shift rights. One has to shift right any tsc-related
-		quantity by this value to get a value in nanoseconds, besides
-		multiplying by tsc_to_system_mul.
+		tsc_shift: shift to be used when converting tsc-related
+		quantity to nanoseconds. This shift will ensure that
+		multiplication with tsc_to_system_mul does not overflow.
+		A positive value denotes a left shift, a negative value
+		a right shift.
 
-		With this information, guests can derive per-CPU time by
-		doing:
+		The conversion from tsc to nanoseconds involves an additional
+		right shift by 32 bits. With this information, guests can
+		derive per-CPU time by doing:
 
 			time = (current_tsc - tsc_timestamp)
-			time = (time * tsc_to_system_mul) >> tsc_shift
+			if (tsc_shift >= 0)
+				time <<= tsc_shift;
+			else
+				time >>= -tsc_shift;
+			time = (time * tsc_to_system_mul) >> 32
 			time = time + system_time
 
 		flags: bits in this field indicate extended capabilities
@@ -109,6 +117,10 @@ MSR_KVM_SYSTEM_TIME_NEW:  0x4b564d01
 		     0      |	   24      | multiple cpus are guaranteed to
 			    |		   | be monotonic
 		-------------------------------------------------------------
+			    |		   | guest vcpu has been paused by
+		     1	    |	  N/A	   | the host
+			    |		   | See 4.70 in api.txt
+		-------------------------------------------------------------
 
 	Availability of this MSR must be checked via bit 3 in 0x4000001 cpuid
 	leaf prior to usage.
@@ -219,3 +231,36 @@ MSR_KVM_STEAL_TIME: 0x4b564d03
 		steal: the amount of time in which this vCPU did not run, in
 		nanoseconds. Time during which the vcpu is idle, will not be
 		reported as steal time.
+
+MSR_KVM_EOI_EN: 0x4b564d04
+	data: Bit 0 is 1 when PV end of interrupt is enabled on the vcpu; 0
+	when disabled.  Bit 1 is reserved and must be zero.  When PV end of
+	interrupt is enabled (bit 0 set), bits 63-2 hold a 4-byte aligned
+	physical address of a 4 byte memory area which must be in guest RAM and
+	must be zeroed.
+
+	The first, least significant bit of 4 byte memory location will be
+	written to by the hypervisor, typically at the time of interrupt
+	injection.  Value of 1 means that guest can skip writing EOI to the apic
+	(using MSR or MMIO write); instead, it is sufficient to signal
+	EOI by clearing the bit in guest memory - this location will
+	later be polled by the hypervisor.
+	Value of 0 means that the EOI write is required.
+
+	It is always safe for the guest to ignore the optimization and perform
+	the APIC EOI write anyway.
+
+	Hypervisor is guaranteed to only modify this least
+	significant bit while in the current VCPU context, this means that
+	guest does not need to use either lock prefix or memory ordering
+	primitives to synchronise with the hypervisor.
+
+	However, hypervisor can set and clear this memory bit at any time:
+	therefore to make sure hypervisor does not interrupt the
+	guest and clear the least significant bit in the memory area
+	in the window between guest testing it to detect
+	whether it can skip EOI apic write and between guest
+	clearing it to signal EOI to the hypervisor,
+	guest must both read the least significant bit in the memory area and
+	clear it using a single CPU instruction, such as test and clear, or
+	compare and exchange.
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt
index 2b7ce190cde4..4cd076febb02 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt
@@ -81,28 +81,8 @@ additional registers to the magic page. If you add fields to the magic page,
 also define a new hypercall feature to indicate that the host can give you more
 registers. Only if the host supports the additional features, make use of them.
 
-The magic page has the following layout as described in
-arch/powerpc/include/asm/kvm_para.h:
-
-struct kvm_vcpu_arch_shared {
-	__u64 scratch1;
-	__u64 scratch2;
-	__u64 scratch3;
-	__u64 critical;		/* Guest may not get interrupts if == r1 */
-	__u64 sprg0;
-	__u64 sprg1;
-	__u64 sprg2;
-	__u64 sprg3;
-	__u64 srr0;
-	__u64 srr1;
-	__u64 dar;
-	__u64 msr;
-	__u32 dsisr;
-	__u32 int_pending;	/* Tells the guest if we have an interrupt */
-};
-
-Additions to the page must only occur at the end. Struct fields are always 32
-or 64 bit aligned, depending on them being 32 or 64 bit wide respectively.
+The magic page layout is described by struct kvm_vcpu_arch_shared
+in arch/powerpc/include/asm/kvm_para.h.
 
 Magic page features
 ===================
@@ -129,8 +109,6 @@ The following bits are safe to be set inside the guest:
 
   MSR_EE
   MSR_RI
-  MSR_CR
-  MSR_ME
 
 If any other bit changes in the MSR, please still use mtmsr(d).
 
@@ -196,3 +174,25 @@ following:
 That way we can inject an arbitrary amount of code as replacement for a single
 instruction. This allows us to check for pending interrupts when setting EE=1
 for example.
+
+Hypercall ABIs in KVM on PowerPC
+=================================
+1) KVM hypercalls (ePAPR)
+
+These are ePAPR compliant hypercall implementation (mentioned above). Even
+generic hypercalls are implemented here, like the ePAPR idle hcall. These are
+available on all targets.
+
+2) PAPR hypercalls
+
+PAPR hypercalls are needed to run server PowerPC PAPR guests (-M pseries in QEMU).
+These are the same hypercalls that pHyp, the POWER hypervisor implements. Some of
+them are handled in the kernel, some are handled in user space. This is only
+available on book3s_64.
+
+3) OSI hypercalls
+
+Mac-on-Linux is another user of KVM on PowerPC, which has its own hypercall (long
+before KVM). This is supported to maintain compatibility. All these hypercalls get
+forwarded to user space. This is only useful on book3s_32, but can be used with
+book3s_64 as well.
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt
index 77dfecf4e2d6..f4099ca6b483 100644
--- a/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt
@@ -3127,7 +3127,7 @@
            at process_kern.c:156
        #3  0x1006a052 in switch_to (prev=0x50072000, next=0x507e8000, last=0x50072000)
            at process_kern.c:161
-       #4  0x10001d12 in schedule () at sched.c:777
+       #4  0x10001d12 in schedule () at core.c:777
        #5  0x1006a744 in __down (sem=0x507d241c) at semaphore.c:71
        #6  0x1006aa10 in __down_failed () at semaphore.c:157
        #7  0x1006c5d8 in segv_handler (sc=0x5006e940) at trap_user.c:174
@@ -3191,7 +3191,7 @@
            at process_kern.c:161
        161       _switch_to(prev, next);
        (gdb)
-       #4  0x10001d12 in schedule () at sched.c:777
+       #4  0x10001d12 in schedule () at core.c:777
        777             switch_to(prev, next, prev);
        (gdb)
        #5  0x1006a744 in __down (sem=0x507d241c) at semaphore.c:71
@@ -3591,7 +3591,7 @@
 
 
   Looking at the source shows that the fault happened during a call to
-  copy_to_user to copy the data into the kernel:
+  copy_from_user to copy the data into the kernel:
 
 
        107             count -= chars;
diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/virtio-spec.txt b/Documentation/virtual/virtio-spec.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index da094737e2f8..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/virtual/virtio-spec.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2200 +0,0 @@
-[Generated file: see http://ozlabs.org/~rusty/virtio-spec/]
-Virtio PCI Card Specification
-v0.9.1 DRAFT
--
-
-Rusty Russell <rusty@rustcorp.com.au>IBM Corporation (Editor)
-
-2011 August 1.
-
-Purpose and Description
-
-This document describes the specifications of the “virtio” family
-of PCI[LaTeX Command: nomenclature] devices. These are devices
-are found in virtual environments[LaTeX Command: nomenclature],
-yet by design they are not all that different from physical PCI
-devices, and this document treats them as such. This allows the
-guest to use standard PCI drivers and discovery mechanisms.
-
-The purpose of virtio and this specification is that virtual
-environments and guests should have a straightforward, efficient,
-standard and extensible mechanism for virtual devices, rather
-than boutique per-environment or per-OS mechanisms.
-
-  Straightforward: Virtio PCI devices use normal PCI mechanisms
-  of interrupts and DMA which should be familiar to any device
-  driver author. There is no exotic page-flipping or COW
-  mechanism: it's just a PCI device.[footnote:
-This lack of page-sharing implies that the implementation of the
-device (e.g. the hypervisor or host) needs full access to the
-guest memory. Communication with untrusted parties (i.e.
-inter-guest communication) requires copying.
-]
-
-  Efficient: Virtio PCI devices consist of rings of descriptors
-  for input and output, which are neatly separated to avoid cache
-  effects from both guest and device writing to the same cache
-  lines.
-
-  Standard: Virtio PCI makes no assumptions about the environment
-  in which it operates, beyond supporting PCI. In fact the virtio
-  devices specified in the appendices do not require PCI at all:
-  they have been implemented on non-PCI buses.[footnote:
-The Linux implementation further separates the PCI virtio code
-from the specific virtio drivers: these drivers are shared with
-the non-PCI implementations (currently lguest and S/390).
-]
-
-  Extensible: Virtio PCI devices contain feature bits which are
-  acknowledged by the guest operating system during device setup.
-  This allows forwards and backwards compatibility: the device
-  offers all the features it knows about, and the driver
-  acknowledges those it understands and wishes to use.
-
-  Virtqueues
-
-The mechanism for bulk data transport on virtio PCI devices is
-pretentiously called a virtqueue. Each device can have zero or
-more virtqueues: for example, the network device has one for
-transmit and one for receive.
-
-Each virtqueue occupies two or more physically-contiguous pages
-(defined, for the purposes of this specification, as 4096 bytes),
-and consists of three parts:
-
-
-+-------------------+-----------------------------------+-----------+
-| Descriptor Table  |   Available Ring     (padding)    | Used Ring |
-+-------------------+-----------------------------------+-----------+
-
-
-When the driver wants to send buffers to the device, it puts them
-in one or more slots in the descriptor table, and writes the
-descriptor indices into the available ring. It then notifies the
-device. When the device has finished with the buffers, it writes
-the descriptors into the used ring, and sends an interrupt.
-
-Specification
-
-  PCI Discovery
-
-Any PCI device with Vendor ID 0x1AF4, and Device ID 0x1000
-through 0x103F inclusive is a virtio device[footnote:
-The actual value within this range is ignored
-]. The device must also have a Revision ID of 0 to match this
-specification.
-
-The Subsystem Device ID indicates which virtio device is
-supported by the device. The Subsystem Vendor ID should reflect
-the PCI Vendor ID of the environment (it's currently only used
-for informational purposes by the guest).
-
-
-+----------------------+--------------------+---------------+
-| Subsystem Device ID  |   Virtio Device    | Specification |
-+----------------------+--------------------+---------------+
-+----------------------+--------------------+---------------+
-|          1           |   network card     |  Appendix C   |
-+----------------------+--------------------+---------------+
-|          2           |   block device     |  Appendix D   |
-+----------------------+--------------------+---------------+
-|          3           |      console       |  Appendix E   |
-+----------------------+--------------------+---------------+
-|          4           |  entropy source    |  Appendix F   |
-+----------------------+--------------------+---------------+
-|          5           | memory ballooning  |  Appendix G   |
-+----------------------+--------------------+---------------+
-|          6           |     ioMemory       |       -       |
-+----------------------+--------------------+---------------+
-|          9           |   9P transport     |       -       |
-+----------------------+--------------------+---------------+
-
-
-  Device Configuration
-
-To configure the device, we use the first I/O region of the PCI
-device. This contains a virtio header followed by a
-device-specific region.
-
-There may be different widths of accesses to the I/O region; the “
-natural” access method for each field in the virtio header must
-be used (i.e. 32-bit accesses for 32-bit fields, etc), but the
-device-specific region can be accessed using any width accesses,
-and should obtain the same results.
-
-Note that this is possible because while the virtio header is PCI
-(i.e. little) endian, the device-specific region is encoded in
-the native endian of the guest (where such distinction is
-applicable).
-
-  Device Initialization Sequence
-
-We start with an overview of device initialization, then expand
-on the details of the device and how each step is preformed.
-
-  Reset the device. This is not required on initial start up.
-
-  The ACKNOWLEDGE status bit is set: we have noticed the device.
-
-  The DRIVER status bit is set: we know how to drive the device.
-
-  Device-specific setup, including reading the Device Feature
-  Bits, discovery of virtqueues for the device, optional MSI-X
-  setup, and reading and possibly writing the virtio
-  configuration space.
-
-  The subset of Device Feature Bits understood by the driver is
-  written to the device.
-
-  The DRIVER_OK status bit is set.
-
-  The device can now be used (ie. buffers added to the
-  virtqueues)[footnote:
-Historically, drivers have used the device before steps 5 and 6.
-This is only allowed if the driver does not use any features
-which would alter this early use of the device.
-]
-
-If any of these steps go irrecoverably wrong, the guest should
-set the FAILED status bit to indicate that it has given up on the
-device (it can reset the device later to restart if desired).
-
-We now cover the fields required for general setup in detail.
-
-  Virtio Header
-
-The virtio header looks as follows:
-
-
-+------------++---------------------+---------------------+----------+--------+---------+---------+---------+--------+
-| Bits       || 32                  | 32                  | 32       | 16     | 16      | 16      | 8       | 8      |
-+------------++---------------------+---------------------+----------+--------+---------+---------+---------+--------+
-| Read/Write || R                   | R+W                 | R+W      | R      | R+W     | R+W     | R+W     | R      |
-+------------++---------------------+---------------------+----------+--------+---------+---------+---------+--------+
-| Purpose    || Device              | Guest               | Queue    | Queue  | Queue   | Queue   | Device  | ISR    |
-|            || Features bits 0:31  | Features bits 0:31  | Address  | Size   | Select  | Notify  | Status  | Status |
-+------------++---------------------+---------------------+----------+--------+---------+---------+---------+--------+
-
-
-If MSI-X is enabled for the device, two additional fields
-immediately follow this header:
-
-
-+------------++----------------+--------+
-| Bits       || 16             | 16     |
-              +----------------+--------+
-+------------++----------------+--------+
-| Read/Write || R+W            | R+W    |
-+------------++----------------+--------+
-| Purpose    || Configuration  | Queue  |
-| (MSI-X)    || Vector         | Vector |
-+------------++----------------+--------+
-
-
-Finally, if feature bits (VIRTIO_F_FEATURES_HI) this is
-immediately followed by two additional fields:
-
-
-+------------++----------------------+----------------------
-| Bits       || 32                   | 32
-+------------++----------------------+----------------------
-| Read/Write || R                    | R+W
-+------------++----------------------+----------------------
-| Purpose    || Device               | Guest
-|            || Features bits 32:63  | Features bits 32:63
-+------------++----------------------+----------------------
-
-
-Immediately following these general headers, there may be
-device-specific headers:
-
-
-+------------++--------------------+
-| Bits       || Device Specific    |
-              +--------------------+
-+------------++--------------------+
-| Read/Write || Device Specific    |
-+------------++--------------------+
-| Purpose    || Device Specific... |
-|            ||                    |
-+------------++--------------------+
-
-
-  Device Status
-
-The Device Status field is updated by the guest to indicate its
-progress. This provides a simple low-level diagnostic: it's most
-useful to imagine them hooked up to traffic lights on the console
-indicating the status of each device.
-
-The device can be reset by writing a 0 to this field, otherwise
-at least one bit should be set:
-
-  ACKNOWLEDGE (1) Indicates that the guest OS has found the
-  device and recognized it as a valid virtio device.
-
-  DRIVER (2) Indicates that the guest OS knows how to drive the
-  device. Under Linux, drivers can be loadable modules so there
-  may be a significant (or infinite) delay before setting this
-  bit.
-
-  DRIVER_OK (3) Indicates that the driver is set up and ready to
-  drive the device.
-
-  FAILED (8) Indicates that something went wrong in the guest,
-  and it has given up on the device. This could be an internal
-  error, or the driver didn't like the device for some reason, or
-  even a fatal error during device operation. The device must be
-  reset before attempting to re-initialize.
-
-  Feature Bits
-
-The least significant 31 bits of the first configuration field
-indicates the features that the device supports (the high bit is
-reserved, and will be used to indicate the presence of future
-feature bits elsewhere). If more than 31 feature bits are
-supported, the device indicates so by setting feature bit 31 (see
-[cha:Reserved-Feature-Bits]). The bits are allocated as follows:
-
-  0 to 23 Feature bits for the specific device type
-
-  24 to 40 Feature bits reserved for extensions to the queue and
-  feature negotiation mechanisms
-
-  41 to 63 Feature bits reserved for future extensions
-
-For example, feature bit 0 for a network device (i.e. Subsystem
-Device ID 1) indicates that the device supports checksumming of
-packets.
-
-The feature bits are negotiated: the device lists all the
-features it understands in the Device Features field, and the
-guest writes the subset that it understands into the Guest
-Features field. The only way to renegotiate is to reset the
-device.
-
-In particular, new fields in the device configuration header are
-indicated by offering a feature bit, so the guest can check
-before accessing that part of the configuration space.
-
-This allows for forwards and backwards compatibility: if the
-device is enhanced with a new feature bit, older guests will not
-write that feature bit back to the Guest Features field and it
-can go into backwards compatibility mode. Similarly, if a guest
-is enhanced with a feature that the device doesn't support, it
-will not see that feature bit in the Device Features field and
-can go into backwards compatibility mode (or, for poor
-implementations, set the FAILED Device Status bit).
-
-Access to feature bits 32 to 63 is enabled by Guest by setting
-feature bit 31. If this bit is unset, Device must assume that all
-feature bits > 31 are unset.
-
-  Configuration/Queue Vectors
-
-When MSI-X capability is present and enabled in the device
-(through standard PCI configuration space) 4 bytes at byte offset
-20 are used to map configuration change and queue interrupts to
-MSI-X vectors. In this case, the ISR Status field is unused, and
-device specific configuration starts at byte offset 24 in virtio
-header structure. When MSI-X capability is not enabled, device
-specific configuration starts at byte offset 20 in virtio header.
-
-Writing a valid MSI-X Table entry number, 0 to 0x7FF, to one of
-Configuration/Queue Vector registers, maps interrupts triggered
-by the configuration change/selected queue events respectively to
-the corresponding MSI-X vector. To disable interrupts for a
-specific event type, unmap it by writing a special NO_VECTOR
-value:
-
-/* Vector value used to disable MSI for queue */
-
-#define VIRTIO_MSI_NO_VECTOR            0xffff
-
-Reading these registers returns vector mapped to a given event,
-or NO_VECTOR if unmapped. All queue and configuration change
-events are unmapped by default.
-
-Note that mapping an event to vector might require allocating
-internal device resources, and might fail. Devices report such
-failures by returning the NO_VECTOR value when the relevant
-Vector field is read. After mapping an event to vector, the
-driver must verify success by reading the Vector field value: on
-success, the previously written value is returned, and on
-failure, NO_VECTOR is returned. If a mapping failure is detected,
-the driver can retry mapping with fewervectors, or disable MSI-X.
-
-  Virtqueue Configuration
-
-As a device can have zero or more virtqueues for bulk data
-transport (for example, the network driver has two), the driver
-needs to configure them as part of the device-specific
-configuration.
-
-This is done as follows, for each virtqueue a device has:
-
-  Write the virtqueue index (first queue is 0) to the Queue
-  Select field.
-
-  Read the virtqueue size from the Queue Size field, which is
-  always a power of 2. This controls how big the virtqueue is
-  (see below). If this field is 0, the virtqueue does not exist.
-
-  Allocate and zero virtqueue in contiguous physical memory, on a
-  4096 byte alignment. Write the physical address, divided by
-  4096 to the Queue Address field.[footnote:
-The 4096 is based on the x86 page size, but it's also large
-enough to ensure that the separate parts of the virtqueue are on
-separate cache lines.
-]
-
-  Optionally, if MSI-X capability is present and enabled on the
-  device, select a vector to use to request interrupts triggered
-  by virtqueue events. Write the MSI-X Table entry number
-  corresponding to this vector in Queue Vector field. Read the
-  Queue Vector field: on success, previously written value is
-  returned; on failure, NO_VECTOR value is returned.
-
-The Queue Size field controls the total number of bytes required
-for the virtqueue according to the following formula:
-
-#define ALIGN(x) (((x) + 4095) & ~4095)
-
-static inline unsigned vring_size(unsigned int qsz)
-
-{
-
-     return ALIGN(sizeof(struct vring_desc)*qsz + sizeof(u16)*(2
-+ qsz))
-
-          + ALIGN(sizeof(struct vring_used_elem)*qsz);
-
-}
-
-This currently wastes some space with padding, but also allows
-future extensions. The virtqueue layout structure looks like this
-(qsz is the Queue Size field, which is a variable, so this code
-won't compile):
-
-struct vring {
-
-    /* The actual descriptors (16 bytes each) */
-
-    struct vring_desc desc[qsz];
-
-
-
-    /* A ring of available descriptor heads with free-running
-index. */
-
-    struct vring_avail avail;
-
-
-
-    // Padding to the next 4096 boundary.
-
-    char pad[];
-
-
-
-    // A ring of used descriptor heads with free-running index.
-
-    struct vring_used used;
-
-};
-
-  A Note on Virtqueue Endianness
-
-Note that the endian of these fields and everything else in the
-virtqueue is the native endian of the guest, not little-endian as
-PCI normally is. This makes for simpler guest code, and it is
-assumed that the host already has to be deeply aware of the guest
-endian so such an “endian-aware” device is not a significant
-issue.
-
-  Descriptor Table
-
-The descriptor table refers to the buffers the guest is using for
-the device. The addresses are physical addresses, and the buffers
-can be chained via the next field. Each descriptor describes a
-buffer which is read-only or write-only, but a chain of
-descriptors can contain both read-only and write-only buffers.
-
-No descriptor chain may be more than 2^32 bytes long in total.struct vring_desc {
-
-    /* Address (guest-physical). */
-
-    u64 addr;
-
-    /* Length. */
-
-    u32 len;
-
-/* This marks a buffer as continuing via the next field. */
-
-#define VRING_DESC_F_NEXT   1
-
-/* This marks a buffer as write-only (otherwise read-only). */
-
-#define VRING_DESC_F_WRITE     2
-
-/* This means the buffer contains a list of buffer descriptors.
-*/
-
-#define VRING_DESC_F_INDIRECT   4
-
-    /* The flags as indicated above. */
-
-    u16 flags;
-
-    /* Next field if flags & NEXT */
-
-    u16 next;
-
-};
-
-The number of descriptors in the table is specified by the Queue
-Size field for this virtqueue.
-
-  <sub:Indirect-Descriptors>Indirect Descriptors
-
-Some devices benefit by concurrently dispatching a large number
-of large requests. The VIRTIO_RING_F_INDIRECT_DESC feature can be
-used to allow this (see [cha:Reserved-Feature-Bits]). To increase
-ring capacity it is possible to store a table of indirect
-descriptors anywhere in memory, and insert a descriptor in main
-virtqueue (with flags&INDIRECT on) that refers to memory buffer
-containing this indirect descriptor table; fields addr and len
-refer to the indirect table address and length in bytes,
-respectively. The indirect table layout structure looks like this
-(len is the length of the descriptor that refers to this table,
-which is a variable, so this code won't compile):
-
-struct indirect_descriptor_table {
-
-    /* The actual descriptors (16 bytes each) */
-
-    struct vring_desc desc[len / 16];
-
-};
-
-The first indirect descriptor is located at start of the indirect
-descriptor table (index 0), additional indirect descriptors are
-chained by next field. An indirect descriptor without next field
-(with flags&NEXT off) signals the end of the indirect descriptor
-table, and transfers control back to the main virtqueue. An
-indirect descriptor can not refer to another indirect descriptor
-table (flags&INDIRECT must be off). A single indirect descriptor
-table can include both read-only and write-only descriptors;
-write-only flag (flags&WRITE) in the descriptor that refers to it
-is ignored.
-
-  Available Ring
-
-The available ring refers to what descriptors we are offering the
-device: it refers to the head of a descriptor chain. The “flags”
-field is currently 0 or 1: 1 indicating that we do not need an
-interrupt when the device consumes a descriptor from the
-available ring. Alternatively, the guest can ask the device to
-delay interrupts until an entry with an index specified by the “
-used_event” field is written in the used ring (equivalently,
-until the idx field in the used ring will reach the value
-used_event + 1). The method employed by the device is controlled
-by the VIRTIO_RING_F_EVENT_IDX feature bit (see [cha:Reserved-Feature-Bits]
-). This interrupt suppression is merely an optimization; it may
-not suppress interrupts entirely.
-
-The “idx” field indicates where we would put the next descriptor
-entry (modulo the ring size). This starts at 0, and increases.
-
-struct vring_avail {
-
-#define VRING_AVAIL_F_NO_INTERRUPT      1
-
-   u16 flags;
-
-   u16 idx;
-
-   u16 ring[qsz]; /* qsz is the Queue Size field read from device
-*/
-
-   u16 used_event;
-
-};
-
-  Used Ring
-
-The used ring is where the device returns buffers once it is done
-with them. The flags field can be used by the device to hint that
-no notification is necessary when the guest adds to the available
-ring. Alternatively, the “avail_event” field can be used by the
-device to hint that no notification is necessary until an entry
-with an index specified by the “avail_event” is written in the
-available ring (equivalently, until the idx field in the
-available ring will reach the value avail_event + 1). The method
-employed by the device is controlled by the guest through the
-VIRTIO_RING_F_EVENT_IDX feature bit (see [cha:Reserved-Feature-Bits]
-). [footnote:
-These fields are kept here because this is the only part of the
-virtqueue written by the device
-].
-
-Each entry in the ring is a pair: the head entry of the
-descriptor chain describing the buffer (this matches an entry
-placed in the available ring by the guest earlier), and the total
-of bytes written into the buffer. The latter is extremely useful
-for guests using untrusted buffers: if you do not know exactly
-how much has been written by the device, you usually have to zero
-the buffer to ensure no data leakage occurs.
-
-/* u32 is used here for ids for padding reasons. */
-
-struct vring_used_elem {
-
-    /* Index of start of used descriptor chain. */
-
-    u32 id;
-
-    /* Total length of the descriptor chain which was used
-(written to) */
-
-    u32 len;
-
-};
-
-
-
-struct vring_used {
-
-#define VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY  1
-
-    u16 flags;
-
-    u16 idx;
-
-    struct vring_used_elem ring[qsz];
-
-    u16 avail_event;
-
-};
-
-  Helpers for Managing Virtqueues
-
-The Linux Kernel Source code contains the definitions above and
-helper routines in a more usable form, in
-include/linux/virtio_ring.h. This was explicitly licensed by IBM
-and Red Hat under the (3-clause) BSD license so that it can be
-freely used by all other projects, and is reproduced (with slight
-variation to remove Linux assumptions) in Appendix A.
-
-  Device Operation
-
-There are two parts to device operation: supplying new buffers to
-the device, and processing used buffers from the device. As an
-example, the virtio network device has two virtqueues: the
-transmit virtqueue and the receive virtqueue. The driver adds
-outgoing (read-only) packets to the transmit virtqueue, and then
-frees them after they are used. Similarly, incoming (write-only)
-buffers are added to the receive virtqueue, and processed after
-they are used.
-
-  Supplying Buffers to The Device
-
-Actual transfer of buffers from the guest OS to the device
-operates as follows:
-
-  Place the buffer(s) into free descriptor(s).
-
-  If there are no free descriptors, the guest may choose to
-    notify the device even if notifications are suppressed (to
-    reduce latency).[footnote:
-The Linux drivers do this only for read-only buffers: for
-write-only buffers, it is assumed that the driver is merely
-trying to keep the receive buffer ring full, and no notification
-of this expected condition is necessary.
-]
-
-  Place the id of the buffer in the next ring entry of the
-  available ring.
-
-  The steps (1) and (2) may be performed repeatedly if batching
-  is possible.
-
-  A memory barrier should be executed to ensure the device sees
-  the updated descriptor table and available ring before the next
-  step.
-
-  The available “idx” field should be increased by the number of
-  entries added to the available ring.
-
-  A memory barrier should be executed to ensure that we update
-  the idx field before checking for notification suppression.
-
-  If notifications are not suppressed, the device should be
-  notified of the new buffers.
-
-Note that the above code does not take precautions against the
-available ring buffer wrapping around: this is not possible since
-the ring buffer is the same size as the descriptor table, so step
-(1) will prevent such a condition.
-
-In addition, the maximum queue size is 32768 (it must be a power
-of 2 which fits in 16 bits), so the 16-bit “idx” value can always
-distinguish between a full and empty buffer.
-
-Here is a description of each stage in more detail.
-
-  Placing Buffers Into The Descriptor Table
-
-A buffer consists of zero or more read-only physically-contiguous
-elements followed by zero or more physically-contiguous
-write-only elements (it must have at least one element). This
-algorithm maps it into the descriptor table:
-
-  for each buffer element, b:
-
-  Get the next free descriptor table entry, d
-
-  Set d.addr to the physical address of the start of b
-
-  Set d.len to the length of b.
-
-  If b is write-only, set d.flags to VRING_DESC_F_WRITE,
-    otherwise 0.
-
-  If there is a buffer element after this:
-
-    Set d.next to the index of the next free descriptor element.
-
-    Set the VRING_DESC_F_NEXT bit in d.flags.
-
-In practice, the d.next fields are usually used to chain free
-descriptors, and a separate count kept to check there are enough
-free descriptors before beginning the mappings.
-
-  Updating The Available Ring
-
-The head of the buffer we mapped is the first d in the algorithm
-above. A naive implementation would do the following:
-
-avail->ring[avail->idx % qsz] = head;
-
-However, in general we can add many descriptors before we update
-the “idx” field (at which point they become visible to the
-device), so we keep a counter of how many we've added:
-
-avail->ring[(avail->idx + added++) % qsz] = head;
-
-  Updating The Index Field
-
-Once the idx field of the virtqueue is updated, the device will
-be able to access the descriptor entries we've created and the
-memory they refer to. This is why a memory barrier is generally
-used before the idx update, to ensure it sees the most up-to-date
-copy.
-
-The idx field always increments, and we let it wrap naturally at
-65536:
-
-avail->idx += added;
-
-  <sub:Notifying-The-Device>Notifying The Device
-
-Device notification occurs by writing the 16-bit virtqueue index
-of this virtqueue to the Queue Notify field of the virtio header
-in the first I/O region of the PCI device. This can be expensive,
-however, so the device can suppress such notifications if it
-doesn't need them. We have to be careful to expose the new idx
-value before checking the suppression flag: it's OK to notify
-gratuitously, but not to omit a required notification. So again,
-we use a memory barrier here before reading the flags or the
-avail_event field.
-
-If the VIRTIO_F_RING_EVENT_IDX feature is not negotiated, and if
-the VRING_USED_F_NOTIFY flag is not set, we go ahead and write to
-the PCI configuration space.
-
-If the VIRTIO_F_RING_EVENT_IDX feature is negotiated, we read the
-avail_event field in the available ring structure. If the
-available index crossed_the avail_event field value since the
-last notification, we go ahead and write to the PCI configuration
-space. The avail_event field wraps naturally at 65536 as well:
-
-(u16)(new_idx - avail_event - 1) < (u16)(new_idx - old_idx)
-
-  <sub:Receiving-Used-Buffers>Receiving Used Buffers From The
-  Device
-
-Once the device has used a buffer (read from or written to it, or
-parts of both, depending on the nature of the virtqueue and the
-device), it sends an interrupt, following an algorithm very
-similar to the algorithm used for the driver to send the device a
-buffer:
-
-  Write the head descriptor number to the next field in the used
-  ring.
-
-  Update the used ring idx.
-
-  Determine whether an interrupt is necessary:
-
-  If the VIRTIO_F_RING_EVENT_IDX feature is not negotiated: check
-    if f the VRING_AVAIL_F_NO_INTERRUPT flag is not set in avail-
-    >flags
-
-  If the VIRTIO_F_RING_EVENT_IDX feature is negotiated: check
-    whether the used index crossed the used_event field value
-    since the last update. The used_event field wraps naturally
-    at 65536 as well:(u16)(new_idx - used_event - 1) < (u16)(new_idx - old_idx)
-
-  If an interrupt is necessary:
-
-  If MSI-X capability is disabled:
-
-    Set the lower bit of the ISR Status field for the device.
-
-    Send the appropriate PCI interrupt for the device.
-
-  If MSI-X capability is enabled:
-
-    Request the appropriate MSI-X interrupt message for the
-      device, Queue Vector field sets the MSI-X Table entry
-      number.
-
-    If Queue Vector field value is NO_VECTOR, no interrupt
-      message is requested for this event.
-
-The guest interrupt handler should:
-
-  If MSI-X capability is disabled: read the ISR Status field,
-  which will reset it to zero. If the lower bit is zero, the
-  interrupt was not for this device. Otherwise, the guest driver
-  should look through the used rings of each virtqueue for the
-  device, to see if any progress has been made by the device
-  which requires servicing.
-
-  If MSI-X capability is enabled: look through the used rings of
-  each virtqueue mapped to the specific MSI-X vector for the
-  device, to see if any progress has been made by the device
-  which requires servicing.
-
-For each ring, guest should then disable interrupts by writing
-VRING_AVAIL_F_NO_INTERRUPT flag in avail structure, if required.
-It can then process used ring entries finally enabling interrupts
-by clearing the VRING_AVAIL_F_NO_INTERRUPT flag or updating the
-EVENT_IDX field in the available structure, Guest should then
-execute a memory barrier, and then recheck the ring empty
-condition. This is necessary to handle the case where, after the
-last check and before enabling interrupts, an interrupt has been
-suppressed by the device:
-
-vring_disable_interrupts(vq);
-
-for (;;) {
-
-    if (vq->last_seen_used != vring->used.idx) {
-
-		vring_enable_interrupts(vq);
-
-		mb();
-
-		if (vq->last_seen_used != vring->used.idx)
-
-			break;
-
-    }
-
-    struct vring_used_elem *e =
-vring.used->ring[vq->last_seen_used%vsz];
-
-    process_buffer(e);
-
-    vq->last_seen_used++;
-
-}
-
-  Dealing With Configuration Changes
-
-Some virtio PCI devices can change the device configuration
-state, as reflected in the virtio header in the PCI configuration
-space. In this case:
-
-  If MSI-X capability is disabled: an interrupt is delivered and
-  the second highest bit is set in the ISR Status field to
-  indicate that the driver should re-examine the configuration
-  space.Note that a single interrupt can indicate both that one
-  or more virtqueue has been used and that the configuration
-  space has changed: even if the config bit is set, virtqueues
-  must be scanned.
-
-  If MSI-X capability is enabled: an interrupt message is
-  requested. The Configuration Vector field sets the MSI-X Table
-  entry number to use. If Configuration Vector field value is
-  NO_VECTOR, no interrupt message is requested for this event.
-
-Creating New Device Types
-
-Various considerations are necessary when creating a new device
-type:
-
-  How Many Virtqueues?
-
-It is possible that a very simple device will operate entirely
-through its configuration space, but most will need at least one
-virtqueue in which it will place requests. A device with both
-input and output (eg. console and network devices described here)
-need two queues: one which the driver fills with buffers to
-receive input, and one which the driver places buffers to
-transmit output.
-
-  What Configuration Space Layout?
-
-Configuration space is generally used for rarely-changing or
-initialization-time parameters. But it is a limited resource, so
-it might be better to use a virtqueue to update configuration
-information (the network device does this for filtering,
-otherwise the table in the config space could potentially be very
-large).
-
-Note that this space is generally the guest's native endian,
-rather than PCI's little-endian.
-
-  What Device Number?
-
-Currently device numbers are assigned quite freely: a simple
-request mail to the author of this document or the Linux
-virtualization mailing list[footnote:
-
-https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/virtualization
-] will be sufficient to secure a unique one.
-
-Meanwhile for experimental drivers, use 65535 and work backwards.
-
-  How many MSI-X vectors?
-
-Using the optional MSI-X capability devices can speed up
-interrupt processing by removing the need to read ISR Status
-register by guest driver (which might be an expensive operation),
-reducing interrupt sharing between devices and queues within the
-device, and handling interrupts from multiple CPUs. However, some
-systems impose a limit (which might be as low as 256) on the
-total number of MSI-X vectors that can be allocated to all
-devices. Devices and/or device drivers should take this into
-account, limiting the number of vectors used unless the device is
-expected to cause a high volume of interrupts. Devices can
-control the number of vectors used by limiting the MSI-X Table
-Size or not presenting MSI-X capability in PCI configuration
-space. Drivers can control this by mapping events to as small
-number of vectors as possible, or disabling MSI-X capability
-altogether.
-
-  Message Framing
-
-The descriptors used for a buffer should not effect the semantics
-of the message, except for the total length of the buffer. For
-example, a network buffer consists of a 10 byte header followed
-by the network packet. Whether this is presented in the ring
-descriptor chain as (say) a 10 byte buffer and a 1514 byte
-buffer, or a single 1524 byte buffer, or even three buffers,
-should have no effect.
-
-In particular, no implementation should use the descriptor
-boundaries to determine the size of any header in a request.[footnote:
-The current qemu device implementations mistakenly insist that
-the first descriptor cover the header in these cases exactly, so
-a cautious driver should arrange it so.
-]
-
-  Device Improvements
-
-Any change to configuration space, or new virtqueues, or
-behavioural changes, should be indicated by negotiation of a new
-feature bit. This establishes clarity[footnote:
-Even if it does mean documenting design or implementation
-mistakes!
-] and avoids future expansion problems.
-
-Clusters of functionality which are always implemented together
-can use a single bit, but if one feature makes sense without the
-others they should not be gratuitously grouped together to
-conserve feature bits. We can always extend the spec when the
-first person needs more than 24 feature bits for their device.
-
-[LaTeX Command: printnomenclature]
-
-Appendix A: virtio_ring.h
-
-#ifndef VIRTIO_RING_H
-
-#define VIRTIO_RING_H
-
-/* An interface for efficient virtio implementation.
-
- *
-
- * This header is BSD licensed so anyone can use the definitions
-
- * to implement compatible drivers/servers.
-
- *
-
- * Copyright 2007, 2009, IBM Corporation
-
- * Copyright 2011, Red Hat, Inc
-
- * All rights reserved.
-
- *
-
- * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
-without
-
- * modification, are permitted provided that the following
-conditions
-
- * are met:
-
- * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above
-copyright
-
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following
-disclaimer.
-
- * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
-copyright
-
- *    notice, this list of conditions and the following
-disclaimer in the
-
- *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the
-distribution.
-
- * 3. Neither the name of IBM nor the names of its contributors
-
- *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
-this software
-
- *    without specific prior written permission.
-
- * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
-CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-
- * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
-TO, THE
-
- * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
-PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-
- * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL IBM OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
-LIABLE
-
- * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
-CONSEQUENTIAL
-
- * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
-SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-
- * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
-INTERRUPTION)
-
- * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
-CONTRACT, STRICT
-
- * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
-IN ANY WAY
-
- * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
-POSSIBILITY OF
-
- * SUCH DAMAGE.
-
- */
-
-
-
-/* This marks a buffer as continuing via the next field. */
-
-#define VRING_DESC_F_NEXT       1
-
-/* This marks a buffer as write-only (otherwise read-only). */
-
-#define VRING_DESC_F_WRITE      2
-
-
-
-/* The Host uses this in used->flags to advise the Guest: don't
-kick me
-
- * when you add a buffer.  It's unreliable, so it's simply an
-
- * optimization.  Guest will still kick if it's out of buffers.
-*/
-
-#define VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY  1
-
-/* The Guest uses this in avail->flags to advise the Host: don't
-
- * interrupt me when you consume a buffer.  It's unreliable, so
-it's
-
- * simply an optimization.  */
-
-#define VRING_AVAIL_F_NO_INTERRUPT      1
-
-
-
-/* Virtio ring descriptors: 16 bytes.
-
- * These can chain together via "next". */
-
-struct vring_desc {
-
-        /* Address (guest-physical). */
-
-        uint64_t addr;
-
-        /* Length. */
-
-        uint32_t len;
-
-        /* The flags as indicated above. */
-
-        uint16_t flags;
-
-        /* We chain unused descriptors via this, too */
-
-        uint16_t next;
-
-};
-
-
-
-struct vring_avail {
-
-        uint16_t flags;
-
-        uint16_t idx;
-
-        uint16_t ring[];
-
-        uint16_t used_event;
-
-};
-
-
-
-/* u32 is used here for ids for padding reasons. */
-
-struct vring_used_elem {
-
-        /* Index of start of used descriptor chain. */
-
-        uint32_t id;
-
-        /* Total length of the descriptor chain which was written
-to. */
-
-        uint32_t len;
-
-};
-
-
-
-struct vring_used {
-
-        uint16_t flags;
-
-        uint16_t idx;
-
-        struct vring_used_elem ring[];
-
-        uint16_t avail_event;
-
-};
-
-
-
-struct vring {
-
-        unsigned int num;
-
-
-
-        struct vring_desc *desc;
-
-        struct vring_avail *avail;
-
-        struct vring_used *used;
-
-};
-
-
-
-/* The standard layout for the ring is a continuous chunk of
-memory which
-
- * looks like this.  We assume num is a power of 2.
-
- *
-
- * struct vring {
-
- *      // The actual descriptors (16 bytes each)
-
- *      struct vring_desc desc[num];
-
- *
-
- *      // A ring of available descriptor heads with free-running
-index.
-
- *      __u16 avail_flags;
-
- *      __u16 avail_idx;
-
- *      __u16 available[num];
-
- *
-
- *      // Padding to the next align boundary.
-
- *      char pad[];
-
- *
-
- *      // A ring of used descriptor heads with free-running
-index.
-
- *      __u16 used_flags;
-
- *      __u16 EVENT_IDX;
-
- *      struct vring_used_elem used[num];
-
- * };
-
- * Note: for virtio PCI, align is 4096.
-
- */
-
-static inline void vring_init(struct vring *vr, unsigned int num,
-void *p,
-
-                              unsigned long align)
-
-{
-
-        vr->num = num;
-
-        vr->desc = p;
-
-        vr->avail = p + num*sizeof(struct vring_desc);
-
-        vr->used = (void *)(((unsigned long)&vr->avail->ring[num]
-
-                              + align-1)
-
-                            & ~(align - 1));
-
-}
-
-
-
-static inline unsigned vring_size(unsigned int num, unsigned long
-align)
-
-{
-
-        return ((sizeof(struct vring_desc)*num +
-sizeof(uint16_t)*(2+num)
-
-                 + align - 1) & ~(align - 1))
-
-                + sizeof(uint16_t)*3 + sizeof(struct
-vring_used_elem)*num;
-
-}
-
-
-
-static inline int vring_need_event(uint16_t event_idx, uint16_t
-new_idx, uint16_t old_idx)
-
-{
-
-         return (uint16_t)(new_idx - event_idx - 1) <
-(uint16_t)(new_idx - old_idx);
-
-}
-
-#endif /* VIRTIO_RING_H */
-
-<cha:Reserved-Feature-Bits>Appendix B: Reserved Feature Bits
-
-Currently there are five device-independent feature bits defined:
-
-  VIRTIO_F_NOTIFY_ON_EMPTY (24) Negotiating this feature
-  indicates that the driver wants an interrupt if the device runs
-  out of available descriptors on a virtqueue, even though
-  interrupts are suppressed using the VRING_AVAIL_F_NO_INTERRUPT
-  flag or the used_event field. An example of this is the
-  networking driver: it doesn't need to know every time a packet
-  is transmitted, but it does need to free the transmitted
-  packets a finite time after they are transmitted. It can avoid
-  using a timer if the device interrupts it when all the packets
-  are transmitted.
-
-  VIRTIO_F_RING_INDIRECT_DESC (28) Negotiating this feature
-  indicates that the driver can use descriptors with the
-  VRING_DESC_F_INDIRECT flag set, as described in [sub:Indirect-Descriptors]
-  .
-
-  VIRTIO_F_RING_EVENT_IDX(29) This feature enables the used_event
-  and the avail_event fields. If set, it indicates that the
-  device should ignore the flags field in the available ring
-  structure. Instead, the used_event field in this structure is
-  used by guest to suppress device interrupts. Further, the
-  driver should ignore the flags field in the used ring
-  structure. Instead, the avail_event field in this structure is
-  used by the device to suppress notifications. If unset, the
-  driver should ignore the used_event field; the device should
-  ignore the avail_event field; the flags field is used
-
-  VIRTIO_F_BAD_FEATURE(30) This feature should never be
-  negotiated by the guest; doing so is an indication that the
-  guest is faulty[footnote:
-An experimental virtio PCI driver contained in Linux version
-2.6.25 had this problem, and this feature bit can be used to
-detect it.
-]
-
-  VIRTIO_F_FEATURES_HIGH(31) This feature indicates that the
-  device supports feature bits 32:63. If unset, feature bits
-  32:63 are unset.
-
-Appendix C: Network Device
-
-The virtio network device is a virtual ethernet card, and is the
-most complex of the devices supported so far by virtio. It has
-enhanced rapidly and demonstrates clearly how support for new
-features should be added to an existing device. Empty buffers are
-placed in one virtqueue for receiving packets, and outgoing
-packets are enqueued into another for transmission in that order.
-A third command queue is used to control advanced filtering
-features.
-
-  Configuration
-
-  Subsystem Device ID 1
-
-  Virtqueues 0:receiveq. 1:transmitq. 2:controlq[footnote:
-Only if VIRTIO_NET_F_CTRL_VQ set
-]
-
-  Feature bits
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_CSUM (0) Device handles packets with partial
-    checksum
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_CSUM (1) Guest handles packets with partial
-    checksum
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC (5) Device has given MAC address.
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_GSO (6) (Deprecated) device handles packets with
-    any GSO type.[footnote:
-It was supposed to indicate segmentation offload support, but
-upon further investigation it became clear that multiple bits
-were required.
-]
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO4 (7) Guest can receive TSOv4.
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO6 (8) Guest can receive TSOv6.
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_ECN (9) Guest can receive TSO with ECN.
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_UFO (10) Guest can receive UFO.
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_TSO4 (11) Device can receive TSOv4.
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_TSO6 (12) Device can receive TSOv6.
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_ECN (13) Device can receive TSO with ECN.
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_UFO (14) Device can receive UFO.
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_MRG_RXBUF (15) Guest can merge receive buffers.
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_STATUS (16) Configuration status field is
-    available.
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_CTRL_VQ (17) Control channel is available.
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_CTRL_RX (18) Control channel RX mode support.
-
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_CTRL_VLAN (19) Control channel VLAN filtering.
-
-  Device configuration layout Two configuration fields are
-  currently defined. The mac address field always exists (though
-  is only valid if VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC is set), and the status field
-  only exists if VIRTIO_NET_F_STATUS is set. Only one bit is
-  currently defined for the status field: VIRTIO_NET_S_LINK_UP. #define VIRTIO_NET_S_LINK_UP	1
-
-
-
-struct virtio_net_config {
-
-    u8 mac[6];
-
-    u16 status;
-
-};
-
-  Device Initialization
-
-  The initialization routine should identify the receive and
-  transmission virtqueues.
-
-  If the VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC feature bit is set, the configuration
-  space “mac” entry indicates the “physical” address of the the
-  network card, otherwise a private MAC address should be
-  assigned. All guests are expected to negotiate this feature if
-  it is set.
-
-  If the VIRTIO_NET_F_CTRL_VQ feature bit is negotiated, identify
-  the control virtqueue.
-
-  If the VIRTIO_NET_F_STATUS feature bit is negotiated, the link
-  status can be read from the bottom bit of the “status” config
-  field. Otherwise, the link should be assumed active.
-
-  The receive virtqueue should be filled with receive buffers.
-  This is described in detail below in “Setting Up Receive
-  Buffers”.
-
-  A driver can indicate that it will generate checksumless
-  packets by negotating the VIRTIO_NET_F_CSUM feature. This “
-  checksum offload” is a common feature on modern network cards.
-
-  If that feature is negotiated, a driver can use TCP or UDP
-  segmentation offload by negotiating the VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_TSO4
-  (IPv4 TCP), VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_TSO6 (IPv6 TCP) and
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_UFO (UDP fragmentation) features. It should
-  not send TCP packets requiring segmentation offload which have
-  the Explicit Congestion Notification bit set, unless the
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_ECN feature is negotiated.[footnote:
-This is a common restriction in real, older network cards.
-]
-
-  The converse features are also available: a driver can save the
-  virtual device some work by negotiating these features.[footnote:
-For example, a network packet transported between two guests on
-the same system may not require checksumming at all, nor
-segmentation, if both guests are amenable.
-] The VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_CSUM feature indicates that partially
-  checksummed packets can be received, and if it can do that then
-  the VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO4, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO6,
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_UFO and VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_ECN are the input
-  equivalents of the features described above. See “Receiving
-  Packets” below.
-
-  Device Operation
-
-Packets are transmitted by placing them in the transmitq, and
-buffers for incoming packets are placed in the receiveq. In each
-case, the packet itself is preceded by a header:
-
-struct virtio_net_hdr {
-
-#define VIRTIO_NET_HDR_F_NEEDS_CSUM    1
-
-	u8 flags;
-
-#define VIRTIO_NET_HDR_GSO_NONE        0
-
-#define VIRTIO_NET_HDR_GSO_TCPV4       1
-
-#define VIRTIO_NET_HDR_GSO_UDP		 3
-
-#define VIRTIO_NET_HDR_GSO_TCPV6       4
-
-#define VIRTIO_NET_HDR_GSO_ECN      0x80
-
-	u8 gso_type;
-
-	u16 hdr_len;
-
-	u16 gso_size;
-
-	u16 csum_start;
-
-	u16 csum_offset;
-
-/* Only if VIRTIO_NET_F_MRG_RXBUF: */
-
-	u16 num_buffers
-
-};
-
-The controlq is used to control device features such as
-filtering.
-
-  Packet Transmission
-
-Transmitting a single packet is simple, but varies depending on
-the different features the driver negotiated.
-
-  If the driver negotiated VIRTIO_NET_F_CSUM, and the packet has
-  not been fully checksummed, then the virtio_net_hdr's fields
-  are set as follows. Otherwise, the packet must be fully
-  checksummed, and flags is zero.
-
-  flags has the VIRTIO_NET_HDR_F_NEEDS_CSUM set,
-
-  <ite:csum_start-is-set>csum_start is set to the offset within
-    the packet to begin checksumming, and
-
-  csum_offset indicates how many bytes after the csum_start the
-    new (16 bit ones' complement) checksum should be placed.[footnote:
-For example, consider a partially checksummed TCP (IPv4) packet.
-It will have a 14 byte ethernet header and 20 byte IP header
-followed by the TCP header (with the TCP checksum field 16 bytes
-into that header). csum_start will be 14+20 = 34 (the TCP
-checksum includes the header), and csum_offset will be 16. The
-value in the TCP checksum field will be the sum of the TCP pseudo
-header, so that replacing it by the ones' complement checksum of
-the TCP header and body will give the correct result.
-]
-
-  <enu:If-the-driver>If the driver negotiated
-  VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_TSO4, TSO6 or UFO, and the packet requires
-  TCP segmentation or UDP fragmentation, then the “gso_type”
-  field is set to VIRTIO_NET_HDR_GSO_TCPV4, TCPV6 or UDP.
-  (Otherwise, it is set to VIRTIO_NET_HDR_GSO_NONE). In this
-  case, packets larger than 1514 bytes can be transmitted: the
-  metadata indicates how to replicate the packet header to cut it
-  into smaller packets. The other gso fields are set:
-
-  hdr_len is a hint to the device as to how much of the header
-    needs to be kept to copy into each packet, usually set to the
-    length of the headers, including the transport header.[footnote:
-Due to various bugs in implementations, this field is not useful
-as a guarantee of the transport header size.
-]
-
-  gso_size is the size of the packet beyond that header (ie.
-    MSS).
-
-  If the driver negotiated the VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_ECN feature, the
-    VIRTIO_NET_HDR_GSO_ECN bit may be set in “gso_type” as well,
-    indicating that the TCP packet has the ECN bit set.[footnote:
-This case is not handled by some older hardware, so is called out
-specifically in the protocol.
-]
-
-  If the driver negotiated the VIRTIO_NET_F_MRG_RXBUF feature,
-  the num_buffers field is set to zero.
-
-  The header and packet are added as one output buffer to the
-  transmitq, and the device is notified of the new entry (see [sub:Notifying-The-Device]
-  ).[footnote:
-Note that the header will be two bytes longer for the
-VIRTIO_NET_F_MRG_RXBUF case.
-]
-
-  Packet Transmission Interrupt
-
-Often a driver will suppress transmission interrupts using the
-VRING_AVAIL_F_NO_INTERRUPT flag (see [sub:Receiving-Used-Buffers]
-) and check for used packets in the transmit path of following
-packets. However, it will still receive interrupts if the
-VIRTIO_F_NOTIFY_ON_EMPTY feature is negotiated, indicating that
-the transmission queue is completely emptied.
-
-The normal behavior in this interrupt handler is to retrieve and
-new descriptors from the used ring and free the corresponding
-headers and packets.
-
-  Setting Up Receive Buffers
-
-It is generally a good idea to keep the receive virtqueue as
-fully populated as possible: if it runs out, network performance
-will suffer.
-
-If the VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO4, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO6 or
-VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_UFO features are used, the Guest will need to
-accept packets of up to 65550 bytes long (the maximum size of a
-TCP or UDP packet, plus the 14 byte ethernet header), otherwise
-1514 bytes. So unless VIRTIO_NET_F_MRG_RXBUF is negotiated, every
-buffer in the receive queue needs to be at least this length [footnote:
-Obviously each one can be split across multiple descriptor
-elements.
-].
-
-If VIRTIO_NET_F_MRG_RXBUF is negotiated, each buffer must be at
-least the size of the struct virtio_net_hdr.
-
-  Packet Receive Interrupt
-
-When a packet is copied into a buffer in the receiveq, the
-optimal path is to disable further interrupts for the receiveq
-(see [sub:Receiving-Used-Buffers]) and process packets until no
-more are found, then re-enable them.
-
-Processing packet involves:
-
-  If the driver negotiated the VIRTIO_NET_F_MRG_RXBUF feature,
-  then the “num_buffers” field indicates how many descriptors
-  this packet is spread over (including this one). This allows
-  receipt of large packets without having to allocate large
-  buffers. In this case, there will be at least “num_buffers” in
-  the used ring, and they should be chained together to form a
-  single packet. The other buffers will not begin with a struct
-  virtio_net_hdr.
-
-  If the VIRTIO_NET_F_MRG_RXBUF feature was not negotiated, or
-  the “num_buffers” field is one, then the entire packet will be
-  contained within this buffer, immediately following the struct
-  virtio_net_hdr.
-
-  If the VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_CSUM feature was negotiated, the
-  VIRTIO_NET_HDR_F_NEEDS_CSUM bit in the “flags” field may be
-  set: if so, the checksum on the packet is incomplete and the “
-  csum_start” and “csum_offset” fields indicate how to calculate
-  it (see [ite:csum_start-is-set]).
-
-  If the VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO4, TSO6 or UFO options were
-  negotiated, then the “gso_type” may be something other than
-  VIRTIO_NET_HDR_GSO_NONE, and the “gso_size” field indicates the
-  desired MSS (see [enu:If-the-driver]).Control Virtqueue
-
-The driver uses the control virtqueue (if VIRTIO_NET_F_VTRL_VQ is
-negotiated) to send commands to manipulate various features of
-the device which would not easily map into the configuration
-space.
-
-All commands are of the following form:
-
-struct virtio_net_ctrl {
-
-	u8 class;
-
-	u8 command;
-
-	u8 command-specific-data[];
-
-	u8 ack;
-
-};
-
-
-
-/* ack values */
-
-#define VIRTIO_NET_OK     0
-
-#define VIRTIO_NET_ERR    1
-
-The class, command and command-specific-data are set by the
-driver, and the device sets the ack byte. There is little it can
-do except issue a diagnostic if the ack byte is not
-VIRTIO_NET_OK.
-
-  Packet Receive Filtering
-
-If the VIRTIO_NET_F_CTRL_RX feature is negotiated, the driver can
-send control commands for promiscuous mode, multicast receiving,
-and filtering of MAC addresses.
-
-Note that in general, these commands are best-effort: unwanted
-packets may still arrive.
-
-  Setting Promiscuous Mode
-
-#define VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_RX    0
-
- #define VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_RX_PROMISC      0
-
- #define VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_RX_ALLMULTI     1
-
-The class VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_RX has two commands:
-VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_RX_PROMISC turns promiscuous mode on and off, and
-VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_RX_ALLMULTI turns all-multicast receive on and
-off. The command-specific-data is one byte containing 0 (off) or
-1 (on).
-
-  Setting MAC Address Filtering
-
-struct virtio_net_ctrl_mac {
-
-	u32 entries;
-
-	u8 macs[entries][ETH_ALEN];
-
-};
-
-
-
-#define VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_MAC    1
-
- #define VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_MAC_TABLE_SET        0
-
-The device can filter incoming packets by any number of
-destination MAC addresses.[footnote:
-Since there are no guarantees, it can use a hash filter
-orsilently switch to allmulti or promiscuous mode if it is given
-too many addresses.
-] This table is set using the class VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_MAC and the
-command VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_MAC_TABLE_SET. The command-specific-data
-is two variable length tables of 6-byte MAC addresses. The first
-table contains unicast addresses, and the second contains
-multicast addresses.
-
-  VLAN Filtering
-
-If the driver negotiates the VIRTION_NET_F_CTRL_VLAN feature, it
-can control a VLAN filter table in the device.
-
-#define VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_VLAN       2
-
- #define VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_VLAN_ADD             0
-
- #define VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_VLAN_DEL             1
-
-Both the VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_VLAN_ADD and VIRTIO_NET_CTRL_VLAN_DEL
-command take a 16-bit VLAN id as the command-specific-data.
-
-Appendix D: Block Device
-
-The virtio block device is a simple virtual block device (ie.
-disk). Read and write requests (and other exotic requests) are
-placed in the queue, and serviced (probably out of order) by the
-device except where noted.
-
-  Configuration
-
-  Subsystem Device ID 2
-
-  Virtqueues 0:requestq.
-
-  Feature bits
-
-  VIRTIO_BLK_F_BARRIER (0) Host supports request barriers.
-
-  VIRTIO_BLK_F_SIZE_MAX (1) Maximum size of any single segment is
-    in “size_max”.
-
-  VIRTIO_BLK_F_SEG_MAX (2) Maximum number of segments in a
-    request is in “seg_max”.
-
-  VIRTIO_BLK_F_GEOMETRY (4) Disk-style geometry specified in “
-    geometry”.
-
-  VIRTIO_BLK_F_RO (5) Device is read-only.
-
-  VIRTIO_BLK_F_BLK_SIZE (6) Block size of disk is in “blk_size”.
-
-  VIRTIO_BLK_F_SCSI (7) Device supports scsi packet commands.
-
-  VIRTIO_BLK_F_FLUSH (9) Cache flush command support.
-
-
-
-  Device configuration layout The capacity of the device
-  (expressed in 512-byte sectors) is always present. The
-  availability of the others all depend on various feature bits
-  as indicated above. struct virtio_blk_config {
-
-	u64 capacity;
-
-	u32 size_max;
-
-	u32 seg_max;
-
-	struct virtio_blk_geometry {
-
-		u16 cylinders;
-
-		u8 heads;
-
-		u8 sectors;
-
-	} geometry;
-
-	u32 blk_size;
-
-
-
-};
-
-  Device Initialization
-
-  The device size should be read from the “capacity”
-  configuration field. No requests should be submitted which goes
-  beyond this limit.
-
-  If the VIRTIO_BLK_F_BLK_SIZE feature is negotiated, the
-  blk_size field can be read to determine the optimal sector size
-  for the driver to use. This does not effect the units used in
-  the protocol (always 512 bytes), but awareness of the correct
-  value can effect performance.
-
-  If the VIRTIO_BLK_F_RO feature is set by the device, any write
-  requests will fail.
-
-
-
-  Device Operation
-
-The driver queues requests to the virtqueue, and they are used by
-the device (not necessarily in order). Each request is of form:
-
-struct virtio_blk_req {
-
-
-
-	u32 type;
-
-	u32 ioprio;
-
-	u64 sector;
-
-	char data[][512];
-
-	u8 status;
-
-};
-
-If the device has VIRTIO_BLK_F_SCSI feature, it can also support
-scsi packet command requests, each of these requests is of form:struct virtio_scsi_pc_req {
-
-	u32 type;
-
-	u32 ioprio;
-
-	u64 sector;
-
-    char cmd[];
-
-	char data[][512];
-
-#define SCSI_SENSE_BUFFERSIZE   96
-
-    u8 sense[SCSI_SENSE_BUFFERSIZE];
-
-    u32 errors;
-
-    u32 data_len;
-
-    u32 sense_len;
-
-    u32 residual;
-
-	u8 status;
-
-};
-
-The type of the request is either a read (VIRTIO_BLK_T_IN), a
-write (VIRTIO_BLK_T_OUT), a scsi packet command
-(VIRTIO_BLK_T_SCSI_CMD or VIRTIO_BLK_T_SCSI_CMD_OUT[footnote:
-the SCSI_CMD and SCSI_CMD_OUT types are equivalent, the device
-does not distinguish between them
-]) or a flush (VIRTIO_BLK_T_FLUSH or VIRTIO_BLK_T_FLUSH_OUT[footnote:
-the FLUSH and FLUSH_OUT types are equivalent, the device does not
-distinguish between them
-]). If the device has VIRTIO_BLK_F_BARRIER feature the high bit
-(VIRTIO_BLK_T_BARRIER) indicates that this request acts as a
-barrier and that all preceding requests must be complete before
-this one, and all following requests must not be started until
-this is complete. Note that a barrier does not flush caches in
-the underlying backend device in host, and thus does not serve as
-data consistency guarantee. Driver must use FLUSH request to
-flush the host cache.
-
-#define VIRTIO_BLK_T_IN           0
-
-#define VIRTIO_BLK_T_OUT          1
-
-#define VIRTIO_BLK_T_SCSI_CMD     2
-
-#define VIRTIO_BLK_T_SCSI_CMD_OUT 3
-
-#define VIRTIO_BLK_T_FLUSH        4
-
-#define VIRTIO_BLK_T_FLUSH_OUT    5
-
-#define VIRTIO_BLK_T_BARRIER	 0x80000000
-
-The ioprio field is a hint about the relative priorities of
-requests to the device: higher numbers indicate more important
-requests.
-
-The sector number indicates the offset (multiplied by 512) where
-the read or write is to occur. This field is unused and set to 0
-for scsi packet commands and for flush commands.
-
-The cmd field is only present for scsi packet command requests,
-and indicates the command to perform. This field must reside in a
-single, separate read-only buffer; command length can be derived
-from the length of this buffer.
-
-Note that these first three (four for scsi packet commands)
-fields are always read-only: the data field is either read-only
-or write-only, depending on the request. The size of the read or
-write can be derived from the total size of the request buffers.
-
-The sense field is only present for scsi packet command requests,
-and indicates the buffer for scsi sense data.
-
-The data_len field is only present for scsi packet command
-requests, this field is deprecated, and should be ignored by the
-driver. Historically, devices copied data length there.
-
-The sense_len field is only present for scsi packet command
-requests and indicates the number of bytes actually written to
-the sense buffer.
-
-The residual field is only present for scsi packet command
-requests and indicates the residual size, calculated as data
-length - number of bytes actually transferred.
-
-The final status byte is written by the device: either
-VIRTIO_BLK_S_OK for success, VIRTIO_BLK_S_IOERR for host or guest
-error or VIRTIO_BLK_S_UNSUPP for a request unsupported by host:#define VIRTIO_BLK_S_OK        0
-
-#define VIRTIO_BLK_S_IOERR     1
-
-#define VIRTIO_BLK_S_UNSUPP    2
-
-Historically, devices assumed that the fields type, ioprio and
-sector reside in a single, separate read-only buffer; the fields
-errors, data_len, sense_len and residual reside in a single,
-separate write-only buffer; the sense field in a separate
-write-only buffer of size 96 bytes, by itself; the fields errors,
-data_len, sense_len and residual in a single write-only buffer;
-and the status field is a separate read-only buffer of size 1
-byte, by itself.
-
-Appendix E: Console Device
-
-The virtio console device is a simple device for data input and
-output. A device may have one or more ports. Each port has a pair
-of input and output virtqueues. Moreover, a device has a pair of
-control IO virtqueues. The control virtqueues are used to
-communicate information between the device and the driver about
-ports being opened and closed on either side of the connection,
-indication from the host about whether a particular port is a
-console port, adding new ports, port hot-plug/unplug, etc., and
-indication from the guest about whether a port or a device was
-successfully added, port open/close, etc.. For data IO, one or
-more empty buffers are placed in the receive queue for incoming
-data and outgoing characters are placed in the transmit queue.
-
-  Configuration
-
-  Subsystem Device ID 3
-
-  Virtqueues 0:receiveq(port0). 1:transmitq(port0), 2:control
-  receiveq[footnote:
-Ports 2 onwards only if VIRTIO_CONSOLE_F_MULTIPORT is set
-], 3:control transmitq, 4:receiveq(port1), 5:transmitq(port1),
-  ...
-
-  Feature bits
-
-  VIRTIO_CONSOLE_F_SIZE (0) Configuration cols and rows fields
-    are valid.
-
-  VIRTIO_CONSOLE_F_MULTIPORT(1) Device has support for multiple
-    ports; configuration fields nr_ports and max_nr_ports are
-    valid and control virtqueues will be used.
-
-  Device configuration layout The size of the console is supplied
-  in the configuration space if the VIRTIO_CONSOLE_F_SIZE feature
-  is set. Furthermore, if the VIRTIO_CONSOLE_F_MULTIPORT feature
-  is set, the maximum number of ports supported by the device can
-  be fetched.struct virtio_console_config {
-
-	u16 cols;
-
-	u16 rows;
-
-
-
-	u32 max_nr_ports;
-
-};
-
-  Device Initialization
-
-  If the VIRTIO_CONSOLE_F_SIZE feature is negotiated, the driver
-  can read the console dimensions from the configuration fields.
-
-  If the VIRTIO_CONSOLE_F_MULTIPORT feature is negotiated, the
-  driver can spawn multiple ports, not all of which may be
-  attached to a console. Some could be generic ports. In this
-  case, the control virtqueues are enabled and according to the
-  max_nr_ports configuration-space value, the appropriate number
-  of virtqueues are created. A control message indicating the
-  driver is ready is sent to the host. The host can then send
-  control messages for adding new ports to the device. After
-  creating and initializing each port, a
-  VIRTIO_CONSOLE_PORT_READY control message is sent to the host
-  for that port so the host can let us know of any additional
-  configuration options set for that port.
-
-  The receiveq for each port is populated with one or more
-  receive buffers.
-
-  Device Operation
-
-  For output, a buffer containing the characters is placed in the
-  port's transmitq.[footnote:
-Because this is high importance and low bandwidth, the current
-Linux implementation polls for the buffer to be used, rather than
-waiting for an interrupt, simplifying the implementation
-significantly. However, for generic serial ports with the
-O_NONBLOCK flag set, the polling limitation is relaxed and the
-consumed buffers are freed upon the next write or poll call or
-when a port is closed or hot-unplugged.
-]
-
-  When a buffer is used in the receiveq (signalled by an
-  interrupt), the contents is the input to the port associated
-  with the virtqueue for which the notification was received.
-
-  If the driver negotiated the VIRTIO_CONSOLE_F_SIZE feature, a
-  configuration change interrupt may occur. The updated size can
-  be read from the configuration fields.
-
-  If the driver negotiated the VIRTIO_CONSOLE_F_MULTIPORT
-  feature, active ports are announced by the host using the
-  VIRTIO_CONSOLE_PORT_ADD control message. The same message is
-  used for port hot-plug as well.
-
-  If the host specified a port `name', a sysfs attribute is
-  created with the name filled in, so that udev rules can be
-  written that can create a symlink from the port's name to the
-  char device for port discovery by applications in the guest.
-
-  Changes to ports' state are effected by control messages.
-  Appropriate action is taken on the port indicated in the
-  control message. The layout of the structure of the control
-  buffer and the events associated are:struct virtio_console_control {
-
-	uint32_t id;    /* Port number */
-
-	uint16_t event; /* The kind of control event */
-
-	uint16_t value; /* Extra information for the event */
-
-};
-
-
-
-/* Some events for the internal messages (control packets) */
-
-
-
-#define VIRTIO_CONSOLE_DEVICE_READY     0
-
-#define VIRTIO_CONSOLE_PORT_ADD         1
-
-#define VIRTIO_CONSOLE_PORT_REMOVE      2
-
-#define VIRTIO_CONSOLE_PORT_READY       3
-
-#define VIRTIO_CONSOLE_CONSOLE_PORT     4
-
-#define VIRTIO_CONSOLE_RESIZE           5
-
-#define VIRTIO_CONSOLE_PORT_OPEN        6
-
-#define VIRTIO_CONSOLE_PORT_NAME        7
-
-Appendix F: Entropy Device
-
-The virtio entropy device supplies high-quality randomness for
-guest use.
-
-  Configuration
-
-  Subsystem Device ID 4
-
-  Virtqueues 0:requestq.
-
-  Feature bits None currently defined
-
-  Device configuration layout None currently defined.
-
-  Device Initialization
-
-  The virtqueue is initialized
-
-  Device Operation
-
-When the driver requires random bytes, it places the descriptor
-of one or more buffers in the queue. It will be completely filled
-by random data by the device.
-
-Appendix G: Memory Balloon Device
-
-The virtio memory balloon device is a primitive device for
-managing guest memory: the device asks for a certain amount of
-memory, and the guest supplies it (or withdraws it, if the device
-has more than it asks for). This allows the guest to adapt to
-changes in allowance of underlying physical memory. If the
-feature is negotiated, the device can also be used to communicate
-guest memory statistics to the host.
-
-  Configuration
-
-  Subsystem Device ID 5
-
-  Virtqueues 0:inflateq. 1:deflateq. 2:statsq.[footnote:
-Only if VIRTIO_BALLON_F_STATS_VQ set
-]
-
-  Feature bits
-
-  VIRTIO_BALLOON_F_MUST_TELL_HOST (0) Host must be told before
-    pages from the balloon are used.
-
-  VIRTIO_BALLOON_F_STATS_VQ (1) A virtqueue for reporting guest
-    memory statistics is present.
-
-  Device configuration layout Both fields of this configuration
-  are always available. Note that they are little endian, despite
-  convention that device fields are guest endian:struct virtio_balloon_config {
-
-	u32 num_pages;
-
-	u32 actual;
-
-};
-
-  Device Initialization
-
-  The inflate and deflate virtqueues are identified.
-
-  If the VIRTIO_BALLOON_F_STATS_VQ feature bit is negotiated:
-
-  Identify the stats virtqueue.
-
-  Add one empty buffer to the stats virtqueue and notify the
-    host.
-
-Device operation begins immediately.
-
-  Device Operation
-
-  Memory Ballooning The device is driven by the receipt of a
-  configuration change interrupt.
-
-  The “num_pages” configuration field is examined. If this is
-  greater than the “actual” number of pages, memory must be given
-  to the balloon. If it is less than the “actual” number of
-  pages, memory may be taken back from the balloon for general
-  use.
-
-  To supply memory to the balloon (aka. inflate):
-
-  The driver constructs an array of addresses of unused memory
-    pages. These addresses are divided by 4096[footnote:
-This is historical, and independent of the guest page size
-] and the descriptor describing the resulting 32-bit array is
-    added to the inflateq.
-
-  To remove memory from the balloon (aka. deflate):
-
-  The driver constructs an array of addresses of memory pages it
-    has previously given to the balloon, as described above. This
-    descriptor is added to the deflateq.
-
-  If the VIRTIO_BALLOON_F_MUST_TELL_HOST feature is set, the
-    guest may not use these requested pages until that descriptor
-    in the deflateq has been used by the device.
-
-  Otherwise, the guest may begin to re-use pages previously given
-    to the balloon before the device has acknowledged their
-    withdrawal. [footnote:
-In this case, deflation advice is merely a courtesy
-]
-
-  In either case, once the device has completed the inflation or
-  deflation, the “actual” field of the configuration should be
-  updated to reflect the new number of pages in the balloon.[footnote:
-As updates to configuration space are not atomic, this field
-isn't particularly reliable, but can be used to diagnose buggy
-guests.
-]
-
-  Memory Statistics
-
-The stats virtqueue is atypical because communication is driven
-by the device (not the driver). The channel becomes active at
-driver initialization time when the driver adds an empty buffer
-and notifies the device. A request for memory statistics proceeds
-as follows:
-
-  The device pushes the buffer onto the used ring and sends an
-  interrupt.
-
-  The driver pops the used buffer and discards it.
-
-  The driver collects memory statistics and writes them into a
-  new buffer.
-
-  The driver adds the buffer to the virtqueue and notifies the
-  device.
-
-  The device pops the buffer (retaining it to initiate a
-  subsequent request) and consumes the statistics.
-
-  Memory Statistics Format Each statistic consists of a 16 bit
-  tag and a 64 bit value. Both quantities are represented in the
-  native endian of the guest. All statistics are optional and the
-  driver may choose which ones to supply. To guarantee backwards
-  compatibility, unsupported statistics should be omitted.
-
-  struct virtio_balloon_stat {
-
-#define VIRTIO_BALLOON_S_SWAP_IN  0
-
-#define VIRTIO_BALLOON_S_SWAP_OUT 1
-
-#define VIRTIO_BALLOON_S_MAJFLT   2
-
-#define VIRTIO_BALLOON_S_MINFLT   3
-
-#define VIRTIO_BALLOON_S_MEMFREE  4
-
-#define VIRTIO_BALLOON_S_MEMTOT   5
-
-	u16 tag;
-
-	u64 val;
-
-} __attribute__((packed));
-
-  Tags
-
-  VIRTIO_BALLOON_S_SWAP_IN The amount of memory that has been
-  swapped in (in bytes).
-
-  VIRTIO_BALLOON_S_SWAP_OUT The amount of memory that has been
-  swapped out to disk (in bytes).
-
-  VIRTIO_BALLOON_S_MAJFLT The number of major page faults that
-  have occurred.
-
-  VIRTIO_BALLOON_S_MINFLT The number of minor page faults that
-  have occurred.
-
-  VIRTIO_BALLOON_S_MEMFREE The amount of memory not being used
-  for any purpose (in bytes).
-
-  VIRTIO_BALLOON_S_MEMTOT The total amount of memory available
-  (in bytes).
-
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/Makefile b/Documentation/vm/Makefile
deleted file mode 100644
index 3fa4d0668864..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/vm/Makefile
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
-obj- := dummy.o
-
-# List of programs to build
-hostprogs-y := page-types hugepage-mmap hugepage-shm map_hugetlb
-
-# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
-always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/cleancache.txt b/Documentation/vm/cleancache.txt
index d5c615af10ba..142fbb0f325a 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/cleancache.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/cleancache.txt
@@ -46,10 +46,11 @@ a negative return value indicates failure.  A "put_page" will copy a
 the pool id, a file key, and a page index into the file.  (The combination
 of a pool id, a file key, and an index is sometimes called a "handle".)
 A "get_page" will copy the page, if found, from cleancache into kernel memory.
-A "flush_page" will ensure the page no longer is present in cleancache;
-a "flush_inode" will flush all pages associated with the specified file;
-and, when a filesystem is unmounted, a "flush_fs" will flush all pages in
-all files specified by the given pool id and also surrender the pool id.
+An "invalidate_page" will ensure the page no longer is present in cleancache;
+an "invalidate_inode" will invalidate all pages associated with the specified
+file; and, when a filesystem is unmounted, an "invalidate_fs" will invalidate
+all pages in all files specified by the given pool id and also surrender
+the pool id.
 
 An "init_shared_fs", like init_fs, obtains a pool id but tells cleancache
 to treat the pool as shared using a 128-bit UUID as a key.  On systems
@@ -62,12 +63,12 @@ of the kernel (e.g. by "tools" that control cleancache).  Or a
 cleancache implementation can simply disable shared_init by always
 returning a negative value.
 
-If a get_page is successful on a non-shared pool, the page is flushed (thus
-making cleancache an "exclusive" cache).  On a shared pool, the page
-is NOT flushed on a successful get_page so that it remains accessible to
+If a get_page is successful on a non-shared pool, the page is invalidated
+(thus making cleancache an "exclusive" cache).  On a shared pool, the page
+is NOT invalidated on a successful get_page so that it remains accessible to
 other sharers.  The kernel is responsible for ensuring coherency between
 cleancache (shared or not), the page cache, and the filesystem, using
-cleancache flush operations as required.
+cleancache invalidate operations as required.
 
 Note that cleancache must enforce put-put-get coherency and get-get
 coherency.  For the former, if two puts are made to the same handle but
@@ -77,20 +78,20 @@ if a get for a given handle fails, subsequent gets for that handle will
 never succeed unless preceded by a successful put with that handle.
 
 Last, cleancache provides no SMP serialization guarantees; if two
-different Linux threads are simultaneously putting and flushing a page
+different Linux threads are simultaneously putting and invalidating a page
 with the same handle, the results are indeterminate.  Callers must
 lock the page to ensure serial behavior.
 
 CLEANCACHE PERFORMANCE METRICS
 
-Cleancache monitoring is done by sysfs files in the
-/sys/kernel/mm/cleancache directory.  The effectiveness of cleancache
+If properly configured, monitoring of cleancache is done via debugfs in
+the /sys/kernel/debug/mm/cleancache directory.  The effectiveness of cleancache
 can be measured (across all filesystems) with:
 
 succ_gets	- number of gets that were successful
 failed_gets	- number of gets that failed
 puts		- number of puts attempted (all "succeed")
-flushes		- number of flushes attempted
+invalidates	- number of invalidates attempted
 
 A backend implementation may provide additional metrics.
 
@@ -143,7 +144,7 @@ systems.
 
 The core hooks for cleancache in VFS are in most cases a single line
 and the minimum set are placed precisely where needed to maintain
-coherency (via cleancache_flush operations) between cleancache,
+coherency (via cleancache_invalidate operations) between cleancache,
 the page cache, and disk.  All hooks compile into nothingness if
 cleancache is config'ed off and turn into a function-pointer-
 compare-to-NULL if config'ed on but no backend claims the ops
@@ -184,15 +185,15 @@ or for real kernel-addressable RAM, it makes perfect sense for
 transcendent memory.
 
 4) Why is non-shared cleancache "exclusive"?  And where is the
-   page "flushed" after a "get"? (Minchan Kim)
+   page "invalidated" after a "get"? (Minchan Kim)
 
 The main reason is to free up space in transcendent memory and
-to avoid unnecessary cleancache_flush calls.  If you want inclusive,
+to avoid unnecessary cleancache_invalidate calls.  If you want inclusive,
 the page can be "put" immediately following the "get".  If
 put-after-get for inclusive becomes common, the interface could
-be easily extended to add a "get_no_flush" call.
+be easily extended to add a "get_no_invalidate" call.
 
-The flush is done by the cleancache backend implementation.
+The invalidate is done by the cleancache backend implementation.
 
 5) What's the performance impact?
 
@@ -222,7 +223,7 @@ Some points for a filesystem to consider:
   as tmpfs should not enable cleancache)
 - To ensure coherency/correctness, the FS must ensure that all
   file removal or truncation operations either go through VFS or
-  add hooks to do the equivalent cleancache "flush" operations
+  add hooks to do the equivalent cleancache "invalidate" operations
 - To ensure coherency/correctness, either inode numbers must
   be unique across the lifetime of the on-disk file OR the
   FS must provide an "encode_fh" function.
@@ -243,11 +244,11 @@ If cleancache would use the inode virtual address instead of
 inode/filehandle, the pool id could be eliminated.  But, this
 won't work because cleancache retains pagecache data pages
 persistently even when the inode has been pruned from the
-inode unused list, and only flushes the data page if the file
+inode unused list, and only invalidates the data page if the file
 gets removed/truncated.  So if cleancache used the inode kva,
 there would be potential coherency issues if/when the inode
 kva is reused for a different file.  Alternately, if cleancache
-flushed the pages when the inode kva was freed, much of the value
+invalidated the pages when the inode kva was freed, much of the value
 of cleancache would be lost because the cache of pages in cleanache
 is potentially much larger than the kernel pagecache and is most
 useful if the pages survive inode cache removal.
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/frontswap.txt b/Documentation/vm/frontswap.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c71a019be600
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/vm/frontswap.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,278 @@
+Frontswap provides a "transcendent memory" interface for swap pages.
+In some environments, dramatic performance savings may be obtained because
+swapped pages are saved in RAM (or a RAM-like device) instead of a swap disk.
+
+(Note, frontswap -- and cleancache (merged at 3.0) -- are the "frontends"
+and the only necessary changes to the core kernel for transcendent memory;
+all other supporting code -- the "backends" -- is implemented as drivers.
+See the LWN.net article "Transcendent memory in a nutshell" for a detailed
+overview of frontswap and related kernel parts:
+https://lwn.net/Articles/454795/ )
+
+Frontswap is so named because it can be thought of as the opposite of
+a "backing" store for a swap device.  The storage is assumed to be
+a synchronous concurrency-safe page-oriented "pseudo-RAM device" conforming
+to the requirements of transcendent memory (such as Xen's "tmem", or
+in-kernel compressed memory, aka "zcache", or future RAM-like devices);
+this pseudo-RAM device is not directly accessible or addressable by the
+kernel and is of unknown and possibly time-varying size.  The driver
+links itself to frontswap by calling frontswap_register_ops to set the
+frontswap_ops funcs appropriately and the functions it provides must
+conform to certain policies as follows:
+
+An "init" prepares the device to receive frontswap pages associated
+with the specified swap device number (aka "type").  A "store" will
+copy the page to transcendent memory and associate it with the type and
+offset associated with the page. A "load" will copy the page, if found,
+from transcendent memory into kernel memory, but will NOT remove the page
+from transcendent memory.  An "invalidate_page" will remove the page
+from transcendent memory and an "invalidate_area" will remove ALL pages
+associated with the swap type (e.g., like swapoff) and notify the "device"
+to refuse further stores with that swap type.
+
+Once a page is successfully stored, a matching load on the page will normally
+succeed.  So when the kernel finds itself in a situation where it needs
+to swap out a page, it first attempts to use frontswap.  If the store returns
+success, the data has been successfully saved to transcendent memory and
+a disk write and, if the data is later read back, a disk read are avoided.
+If a store returns failure, transcendent memory has rejected the data, and the
+page can be written to swap as usual.
+
+If a backend chooses, frontswap can be configured as a "writethrough
+cache" by calling frontswap_writethrough().  In this mode, the reduction
+in swap device writes is lost (and also a non-trivial performance advantage)
+in order to allow the backend to arbitrarily "reclaim" space used to
+store frontswap pages to more completely manage its memory usage.
+
+Note that if a page is stored and the page already exists in transcendent memory
+(a "duplicate" store), either the store succeeds and the data is overwritten,
+or the store fails AND the page is invalidated.  This ensures stale data may
+never be obtained from frontswap.
+
+If properly configured, monitoring of frontswap is done via debugfs in
+the /sys/kernel/debug/frontswap directory.  The effectiveness of
+frontswap can be measured (across all swap devices) with:
+
+failed_stores	- how many store attempts have failed
+loads		- how many loads were attempted (all should succeed)
+succ_stores	- how many store attempts have succeeded
+invalidates	- how many invalidates were attempted
+
+A backend implementation may provide additional metrics.
+
+FAQ
+
+1) Where's the value?
+
+When a workload starts swapping, performance falls through the floor.
+Frontswap significantly increases performance in many such workloads by
+providing a clean, dynamic interface to read and write swap pages to
+"transcendent memory" that is otherwise not directly addressable to the kernel.
+This interface is ideal when data is transformed to a different form
+and size (such as with compression) or secretly moved (as might be
+useful for write-balancing for some RAM-like devices).  Swap pages (and
+evicted page-cache pages) are a great use for this kind of slower-than-RAM-
+but-much-faster-than-disk "pseudo-RAM device" and the frontswap (and
+cleancache) interface to transcendent memory provides a nice way to read
+and write -- and indirectly "name" -- the pages.
+
+Frontswap -- and cleancache -- with a fairly small impact on the kernel,
+provides a huge amount of flexibility for more dynamic, flexible RAM
+utilization in various system configurations:
+
+In the single kernel case, aka "zcache", pages are compressed and
+stored in local memory, thus increasing the total anonymous pages
+that can be safely kept in RAM.  Zcache essentially trades off CPU
+cycles used in compression/decompression for better memory utilization.
+Benchmarks have shown little or no impact when memory pressure is
+low while providing a significant performance improvement (25%+)
+on some workloads under high memory pressure.
+
+"RAMster" builds on zcache by adding "peer-to-peer" transcendent memory
+support for clustered systems.  Frontswap pages are locally compressed
+as in zcache, but then "remotified" to another system's RAM.  This
+allows RAM to be dynamically load-balanced back-and-forth as needed,
+i.e. when system A is overcommitted, it can swap to system B, and
+vice versa.  RAMster can also be configured as a memory server so
+many servers in a cluster can swap, dynamically as needed, to a single
+server configured with a large amount of RAM... without pre-configuring
+how much of the RAM is available for each of the clients!
+
+In the virtual case, the whole point of virtualization is to statistically
+multiplex physical resources across the varying demands of multiple
+virtual machines.  This is really hard to do with RAM and efforts to do
+it well with no kernel changes have essentially failed (except in some
+well-publicized special-case workloads).
+Specifically, the Xen Transcendent Memory backend allows otherwise
+"fallow" hypervisor-owned RAM to not only be "time-shared" between multiple
+virtual machines, but the pages can be compressed and deduplicated to
+optimize RAM utilization.  And when guest OS's are induced to surrender
+underutilized RAM (e.g. with "selfballooning"), sudden unexpected
+memory pressure may result in swapping; frontswap allows those pages
+to be swapped to and from hypervisor RAM (if overall host system memory
+conditions allow), thus mitigating the potentially awful performance impact
+of unplanned swapping.
+
+A KVM implementation is underway and has been RFC'ed to lkml.  And,
+using frontswap, investigation is also underway on the use of NVM as
+a memory extension technology.
+
+2) Sure there may be performance advantages in some situations, but
+   what's the space/time overhead of frontswap?
+
+If CONFIG_FRONTSWAP is disabled, every frontswap hook compiles into
+nothingness and the only overhead is a few extra bytes per swapon'ed
+swap device.  If CONFIG_FRONTSWAP is enabled but no frontswap "backend"
+registers, there is one extra global variable compared to zero for
+every swap page read or written.  If CONFIG_FRONTSWAP is enabled
+AND a frontswap backend registers AND the backend fails every "store"
+request (i.e. provides no memory despite claiming it might),
+CPU overhead is still negligible -- and since every frontswap fail
+precedes a swap page write-to-disk, the system is highly likely
+to be I/O bound and using a small fraction of a percent of a CPU
+will be irrelevant anyway.
+
+As for space, if CONFIG_FRONTSWAP is enabled AND a frontswap backend
+registers, one bit is allocated for every swap page for every swap
+device that is swapon'd.  This is added to the EIGHT bits (which
+was sixteen until about 2.6.34) that the kernel already allocates
+for every swap page for every swap device that is swapon'd.  (Hugh
+Dickins has observed that frontswap could probably steal one of
+the existing eight bits, but let's worry about that minor optimization
+later.)  For very large swap disks (which are rare) on a standard
+4K pagesize, this is 1MB per 32GB swap.
+
+When swap pages are stored in transcendent memory instead of written
+out to disk, there is a side effect that this may create more memory
+pressure that can potentially outweigh the other advantages.  A
+backend, such as zcache, must implement policies to carefully (but
+dynamically) manage memory limits to ensure this doesn't happen.
+
+3) OK, how about a quick overview of what this frontswap patch does
+   in terms that a kernel hacker can grok?
+
+Let's assume that a frontswap "backend" has registered during
+kernel initialization; this registration indicates that this
+frontswap backend has access to some "memory" that is not directly
+accessible by the kernel.  Exactly how much memory it provides is
+entirely dynamic and random.
+
+Whenever a swap-device is swapon'd frontswap_init() is called,
+passing the swap device number (aka "type") as a parameter.
+This notifies frontswap to expect attempts to "store" swap pages
+associated with that number.
+
+Whenever the swap subsystem is readying a page to write to a swap
+device (c.f swap_writepage()), frontswap_store is called.  Frontswap
+consults with the frontswap backend and if the backend says it does NOT
+have room, frontswap_store returns -1 and the kernel swaps the page
+to the swap device as normal.  Note that the response from the frontswap
+backend is unpredictable to the kernel; it may choose to never accept a
+page, it could accept every ninth page, or it might accept every
+page.  But if the backend does accept a page, the data from the page
+has already been copied and associated with the type and offset,
+and the backend guarantees the persistence of the data.  In this case,
+frontswap sets a bit in the "frontswap_map" for the swap device
+corresponding to the page offset on the swap device to which it would
+otherwise have written the data.
+
+When the swap subsystem needs to swap-in a page (swap_readpage()),
+it first calls frontswap_load() which checks the frontswap_map to
+see if the page was earlier accepted by the frontswap backend.  If
+it was, the page of data is filled from the frontswap backend and
+the swap-in is complete.  If not, the normal swap-in code is
+executed to obtain the page of data from the real swap device.
+
+So every time the frontswap backend accepts a page, a swap device read
+and (potentially) a swap device write are replaced by a "frontswap backend
+store" and (possibly) a "frontswap backend loads", which are presumably much
+faster.
+
+4) Can't frontswap be configured as a "special" swap device that is
+   just higher priority than any real swap device (e.g. like zswap,
+   or maybe swap-over-nbd/NFS)?
+
+No.  First, the existing swap subsystem doesn't allow for any kind of
+swap hierarchy.  Perhaps it could be rewritten to accommodate a hierarchy,
+but this would require fairly drastic changes.  Even if it were
+rewritten, the existing swap subsystem uses the block I/O layer which
+assumes a swap device is fixed size and any page in it is linearly
+addressable.  Frontswap barely touches the existing swap subsystem,
+and works around the constraints of the block I/O subsystem to provide
+a great deal of flexibility and dynamicity.
+
+For example, the acceptance of any swap page by the frontswap backend is
+entirely unpredictable. This is critical to the definition of frontswap
+backends because it grants completely dynamic discretion to the
+backend.  In zcache, one cannot know a priori how compressible a page is.
+"Poorly" compressible pages can be rejected, and "poorly" can itself be
+defined dynamically depending on current memory constraints.
+
+Further, frontswap is entirely synchronous whereas a real swap
+device is, by definition, asynchronous and uses block I/O.  The
+block I/O layer is not only unnecessary, but may perform "optimizations"
+that are inappropriate for a RAM-oriented device including delaying
+the write of some pages for a significant amount of time.  Synchrony is
+required to ensure the dynamicity of the backend and to avoid thorny race
+conditions that would unnecessarily and greatly complicate frontswap
+and/or the block I/O subsystem.  That said, only the initial "store"
+and "load" operations need be synchronous.  A separate asynchronous thread
+is free to manipulate the pages stored by frontswap.  For example,
+the "remotification" thread in RAMster uses standard asynchronous
+kernel sockets to move compressed frontswap pages to a remote machine.
+Similarly, a KVM guest-side implementation could do in-guest compression
+and use "batched" hypercalls.
+
+In a virtualized environment, the dynamicity allows the hypervisor
+(or host OS) to do "intelligent overcommit".  For example, it can
+choose to accept pages only until host-swapping might be imminent,
+then force guests to do their own swapping.
+
+There is a downside to the transcendent memory specifications for
+frontswap:  Since any "store" might fail, there must always be a real
+slot on a real swap device to swap the page.  Thus frontswap must be
+implemented as a "shadow" to every swapon'd device with the potential
+capability of holding every page that the swap device might have held
+and the possibility that it might hold no pages at all.  This means
+that frontswap cannot contain more pages than the total of swapon'd
+swap devices.  For example, if NO swap device is configured on some
+installation, frontswap is useless.  Swapless portable devices
+can still use frontswap but a backend for such devices must configure
+some kind of "ghost" swap device and ensure that it is never used.
+
+5) Why this weird definition about "duplicate stores"?  If a page
+   has been previously successfully stored, can't it always be
+   successfully overwritten?
+
+Nearly always it can, but no, sometimes it cannot.  Consider an example
+where data is compressed and the original 4K page has been compressed
+to 1K.  Now an attempt is made to overwrite the page with data that
+is non-compressible and so would take the entire 4K.  But the backend
+has no more space.  In this case, the store must be rejected.  Whenever
+frontswap rejects a store that would overwrite, it also must invalidate
+the old data and ensure that it is no longer accessible.  Since the
+swap subsystem then writes the new data to the read swap device,
+this is the correct course of action to ensure coherency.
+
+6) What is frontswap_shrink for?
+
+When the (non-frontswap) swap subsystem swaps out a page to a real
+swap device, that page is only taking up low-value pre-allocated disk
+space.  But if frontswap has placed a page in transcendent memory, that
+page may be taking up valuable real estate.  The frontswap_shrink
+routine allows code outside of the swap subsystem to force pages out
+of the memory managed by frontswap and back into kernel-addressable memory.
+For example, in RAMster, a "suction driver" thread will attempt
+to "repatriate" pages sent to a remote machine back to the local machine;
+this is driven using the frontswap_shrink mechanism when memory pressure
+subsides.
+
+7) Why does the frontswap patch create the new include file swapfile.h?
+
+The frontswap code depends on some swap-subsystem-internal data
+structures that have, over the years, moved back and forth between
+static and global.  This seemed a reasonable compromise:  Define
+them as global but declare them in a new include file that isn't
+included by the large number of source files that include swap.h.
+
+Dan Magenheimer, last updated April 9, 2012
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
index f8551b3879f8..bdd4bb97fff7 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
@@ -165,6 +165,7 @@ which function as described above for the default huge page-sized case.
 
 
 Interaction of Task Memory Policy with Huge Page Allocation/Freeing
+===================================================================
 
 Whether huge pages are allocated and freed via the /proc interface or
 the /sysfs interface using the nr_hugepages_mempolicy attribute, the NUMA
@@ -229,6 +230,7 @@ resulting effect on persistent huge page allocation is as follows:
    of huge pages over all on-lines nodes with memory.
 
 Per Node Hugepages Attributes
+=============================
 
 A subset of the contents of the root huge page control directory in sysfs,
 described above, will be replicated under each the system device of each
@@ -258,6 +260,7 @@ applied, from which node the huge page allocation will be attempted.
 
 
 Using Huge Pages
+================
 
 If the user applications are going to request huge pages using mmap system
 call, then it is required that system administrator mount a file system of
@@ -296,14 +299,16 @@ calls, though the mount of filesystem will be required for using mmap calls
 without MAP_HUGETLB.  For an example of how to use mmap with MAP_HUGETLB see
 map_hugetlb.c.
 
-*******************************************************************
+Examples
+========
 
-/*
- * hugepage-shm:  see Documentation/vm/hugepage-shm.c
- */
+1) map_hugetlb: see tools/testing/selftests/vm/map_hugetlb.c
 
-*******************************************************************
+2) hugepage-shm:  see tools/testing/selftests/vm/hugepage-shm.c
 
-/*
- * hugepage-mmap:  see Documentation/vm/hugepage-mmap.c
- */
+3) hugepage-mmap:  see tools/testing/selftests/vm/hugepage-mmap.c
+
+4) The libhugetlbfs (http://libhugetlbfs.sourceforge.net) library provides a
+   wide range of userspace tools to help with huge page usability, environment
+   setup, and control. Furthermore it provides useful test cases that should be
+   used when modifying code to ensure no regressions are introduced.
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/ksm.txt b/Documentation/vm/ksm.txt
index b392e496f816..f34a8ee6f860 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/ksm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/ksm.txt
@@ -58,6 +58,21 @@ sleep_millisecs  - how many milliseconds ksmd should sleep before next scan
                    e.g. "echo 20 > /sys/kernel/mm/ksm/sleep_millisecs"
                    Default: 20 (chosen for demonstration purposes)
 
+merge_across_nodes - specifies if pages from different numa nodes can be merged.
+                   When set to 0, ksm merges only pages which physically
+                   reside in the memory area of same NUMA node. That brings
+                   lower latency to access of shared pages. Systems with more
+                   nodes, at significant NUMA distances, are likely to benefit
+                   from the lower latency of setting 0. Smaller systems, which
+                   need to minimize memory usage, are likely to benefit from
+                   the greater sharing of setting 1 (default). You may wish to
+                   compare how your system performs under each setting, before
+                   deciding on which to use. merge_across_nodes setting can be
+                   changed only when there are no ksm shared pages in system:
+                   set run 2 to unmerge pages first, then to 1 after changing
+                   merge_across_nodes, to remerge according to the new setting.
+                   Default: 1 (merging across nodes as in earlier releases)
+
 run              - set 0 to stop ksmd from running but keep merged pages,
                    set 1 to run ksmd e.g. "echo 1 > /sys/kernel/mm/ksm/run",
                    set 2 to stop ksmd and unmerge all pages currently merged,
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting b/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting
index 706d7ed9d8d2..8eaa2fc4b8fa 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting
+++ b/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting
@@ -8,7 +8,9 @@ The Linux kernel supports the following overcommit handling modes
 		default.
 
 1	-	Always overcommit. Appropriate for some scientific
-		applications.
+		applications. Classic example is code using sparse arrays
+		and just relying on the virtual memory consisting almost
+		entirely of zero pages.
 
 2	-	Don't overcommit. The total address space commit
 		for the system is not permitted to exceed swap + a
@@ -18,6 +20,10 @@ The Linux kernel supports the following overcommit handling modes
 		pages but will receive errors on memory allocation as
 		appropriate.
 
+		Useful for applications that want to guarantee their
+		memory allocations will be available in the future
+		without having to initialize every page.
+
 The overcommit policy is set via the sysctl `vm.overcommit_memory'.
 
 The overcommit percentage is set via `vm.overcommit_ratio'.
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/pagemap.txt b/Documentation/vm/pagemap.txt
index 4600cbe3d6be..5948e455c4d2 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/pagemap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/pagemap.txt
@@ -15,8 +15,9 @@ There are three components to pagemap:
     * Bits 0-54  page frame number (PFN) if present
     * Bits 0-4   swap type if swapped
     * Bits 5-54  swap offset if swapped
-    * Bits 55-60 page shift (page size = 1<<page shift)
-    * Bit  61    reserved for future use
+    * Bit  55    pte is soft-dirty (see Documentation/vm/soft-dirty.txt)
+    * Bits 56-60 zero
+    * Bit  61    page is file-page or shared-anon
     * Bit  62    page swapped
     * Bit  63    page present
 
@@ -147,5 +148,5 @@ once.
 Other notes:
 
 Reading from any of the files will return -EINVAL if you are not starting
-the read on an 8-byte boundary (e.g., if you seeked an odd number of bytes
+the read on an 8-byte boundary (e.g., if you sought an odd number of bytes
 into the file), or if the size of the read is not a multiple of 8 bytes.
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt
index 6752870c4970..b0c6d1bbb434 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ data and perform operation on the slabs. By default slabinfo only lists
 slabs that have data in them. See "slabinfo -h" for more options when
 running the command. slabinfo can be compiled with
 
-gcc -o slabinfo tools/slub/slabinfo.c
+gcc -o slabinfo tools/vm/slabinfo.c
 
 Some of the modes of operation of slabinfo require that slub debugging
 be enabled on the command line. F.e. no tracking information will be
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/soft-dirty.txt b/Documentation/vm/soft-dirty.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..55684d11a1e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/vm/soft-dirty.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+                            SOFT-DIRTY PTEs
+
+  The soft-dirty is a bit on a PTE which helps to track which pages a task
+writes to. In order to do this tracking one should
+
+  1. Clear soft-dirty bits from the task's PTEs.
+
+     This is done by writing "4" into the /proc/PID/clear_refs file of the
+     task in question.
+
+  2. Wait some time.
+
+  3. Read soft-dirty bits from the PTEs.
+
+     This is done by reading from the /proc/PID/pagemap. The bit 55 of the
+     64-bit qword is the soft-dirty one. If set, the respective PTE was
+     written to since step 1.
+
+
+  Internally, to do this tracking, the writable bit is cleared from PTEs
+when the soft-dirty bit is cleared. So, after this, when the task tries to
+modify a page at some virtual address the #PF occurs and the kernel sets
+the soft-dirty bit on the respective PTE.
+
+  Note, that although all the task's address space is marked as r/o after the
+soft-dirty bits clear, the #PF-s that occur after that are processed fast.
+This is so, since the pages are still mapped to physical memory, and thus all
+the kernel does is finds this fact out and puts both writable and soft-dirty
+bits on the PTE.
+
+  While in most cases tracking memory changes by #PF-s is more than enough
+there is still a scenario when we can lose soft dirty bits -- a task
+unmaps a previously mapped memory region and then maps a new one at exactly
+the same place. When unmap is called, the kernel internally clears PTE values
+including soft dirty bits. To notify user space application about such
+memory region renewal the kernel always marks new memory regions (and
+expanded regions) as soft dirty.
+
+  This feature is actively used by the checkpoint-restore project. You
+can find more details about it on http://criu.org
+
+
+-- Pavel Emelyanov, Apr 9, 2013
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt b/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt
index 29bdf62aac09..4a63953a41f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt
@@ -116,6 +116,13 @@ echo always >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/defrag
 echo madvise >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/defrag
 echo never >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/defrag
 
+By default kernel tries to use huge zero page on read page fault.
+It's possible to disable huge zero page by writing 0 or enable it
+back by writing 1:
+
+echo 0 >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/use_zero_page
+echo 1 >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/use_zero_page
+
 khugepaged will be automatically started when
 transparent_hugepage/enabled is set to "always" or "madvise, and it'll
 be automatically shutdown if it's set to "never".
@@ -166,6 +173,76 @@ behavior. So to make them effective you need to restart any
 application that could have been using hugepages. This also applies to
 the regions registered in khugepaged.
 
+== Monitoring usage ==
+
+The number of transparent huge pages currently used by the system is
+available by reading the AnonHugePages field in /proc/meminfo. To
+identify what applications are using transparent huge pages, it is
+necessary to read /proc/PID/smaps and count the AnonHugePages fields
+for each mapping. Note that reading the smaps file is expensive and
+reading it frequently will incur overhead.
+
+There are a number of counters in /proc/vmstat that may be used to
+monitor how successfully the system is providing huge pages for use.
+
+thp_fault_alloc is incremented every time a huge page is successfully
+	allocated to handle a page fault. This applies to both the
+	first time a page is faulted and for COW faults.
+
+thp_collapse_alloc is incremented by khugepaged when it has found
+	a range of pages to collapse into one huge page and has
+	successfully allocated a new huge page to store the data.
+
+thp_fault_fallback is incremented if a page fault fails to allocate
+	a huge page and instead falls back to using small pages.
+
+thp_collapse_alloc_failed is incremented if khugepaged found a range
+	of pages that should be collapsed into one huge page but failed
+	the allocation.
+
+thp_split is incremented every time a huge page is split into base
+	pages. This can happen for a variety of reasons but a common
+	reason is that a huge page is old and is being reclaimed.
+
+thp_zero_page_alloc is incremented every time a huge zero page is
+	successfully allocated. It includes allocations which where
+	dropped due race with other allocation. Note, it doesn't count
+	every map of the huge zero page, only its allocation.
+
+thp_zero_page_alloc_failed is incremented if kernel fails to allocate
+	huge zero page and falls back to using small pages.
+
+As the system ages, allocating huge pages may be expensive as the
+system uses memory compaction to copy data around memory to free a
+huge page for use. There are some counters in /proc/vmstat to help
+monitor this overhead.
+
+compact_stall is incremented every time a process stalls to run
+	memory compaction so that a huge page is free for use.
+
+compact_success is incremented if the system compacted memory and
+	freed a huge page for use.
+
+compact_fail is incremented if the system tries to compact memory
+	but failed.
+
+compact_pages_moved is incremented each time a page is moved. If
+	this value is increasing rapidly, it implies that the system
+	is copying a lot of data to satisfy the huge page allocation.
+	It is possible that the cost of copying exceeds any savings
+	from reduced TLB misses.
+
+compact_pagemigrate_failed is incremented when the underlying mechanism
+	for moving a page failed.
+
+compact_blocks_moved is incremented each time memory compaction examines
+	a huge page aligned range of pages.
+
+It is possible to establish how long the stalls were using the function
+tracer to record how long was spent in __alloc_pages_nodemask and
+using the mm_page_alloc tracepoint to identify which allocations were
+for huge pages.
+
 == get_user_pages and follow_page ==
 
 get_user_pages and follow_page if run on a hugepage, will return the
@@ -214,7 +291,7 @@ unaffected. libhugetlbfs will also work fine as usual.
 == Graceful fallback ==
 
 Code walking pagetables but unware about huge pmds can simply call
-split_huge_page_pmd(mm, pmd) where the pmd is the one returned by
+split_huge_page_pmd(vma, addr, pmd) where the pmd is the one returned by
 pmd_offset. It's trivial to make the code transparent hugepage aware
 by just grepping for "pmd_offset" and adding split_huge_page_pmd where
 missing after pmd_offset returns the pmd. Thanks to the graceful
@@ -237,7 +314,7 @@ diff --git a/mm/mremap.c b/mm/mremap.c
 		return NULL;
 
 	pmd = pmd_offset(pud, addr);
-+	split_huge_page_pmd(mm, pmd);
++	split_huge_page_pmd(vma, addr, pmd);
 	if (pmd_none_or_clear_bad(pmd))
 		return NULL;
 
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt
index fa206cccf89f..a68db7692ee8 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt
@@ -197,12 +197,8 @@ the pages are also "rescued" from the unevictable list in the process of
 freeing them.
 
 page_evictable() also checks for mlocked pages by testing an additional page
-flag, PG_mlocked (as wrapped by PageMlocked()).  If the page is NOT mlocked,
-and a non-NULL VMA is supplied, page_evictable() will check whether the VMA is
-VM_LOCKED via is_mlocked_vma().  is_mlocked_vma() will SetPageMlocked() and
-update the appropriate statistics if the vma is VM_LOCKED.  This method allows
-efficient "culling" of pages in the fault path that are being faulted in to
-VM_LOCKED VMAs.
+flag, PG_mlocked (as wrapped by PageMlocked()), which is set when a page is
+faulted into a VM_LOCKED vma, or found in a vma being VM_LOCKED.
 
 
 VMSCAN'S HANDLING OF UNEVICTABLE PAGES
@@ -371,8 +367,8 @@ mlock_fixup() filters several classes of "special" VMAs:
    mlock_fixup() will call make_pages_present() in the hugetlbfs VMA range to
    allocate the huge pages and populate the ptes.
 
-3) VMAs with VM_DONTEXPAND or VM_RESERVED are generally userspace mappings of
-   kernel pages, such as the VDSO page, relay channel pages, etc.  These pages
+3) VMAs with VM_DONTEXPAND are generally userspace mappings of kernel pages,
+   such as the VDSO page, relay channel pages, etc. These pages
    are inherently unevictable and are not managed on the LRU lists.
    mlock_fixup() treats these VMAs the same as hugetlbfs VMAs.  It calls
    make_pages_present() to populate the ptes.
@@ -651,7 +647,7 @@ PAGE RECLAIM IN shrink_*_list()
 -------------------------------
 
 shrink_active_list() culls any obviously unevictable pages - i.e.
-!page_evictable(page, NULL) - diverting these to the unevictable list.
+!page_evictable(page) - diverting these to the unevictable list.
 However, shrink_active_list() only sees unevictable pages that made it onto the
 active/inactive lru lists.  Note that these pages do not have PageUnevictable
 set - otherwise they would be on the unevictable list and shrink_active_list
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/zswap.txt b/Documentation/vm/zswap.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7e492d8aaeaf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/vm/zswap.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+Overview:
+
+Zswap is a lightweight compressed cache for swap pages. It takes pages that are
+in the process of being swapped out and attempts to compress them into a
+dynamically allocated RAM-based memory pool.  zswap basically trades CPU cycles
+for potentially reduced swap I/O.  This trade-off can also result in a
+significant performance improvement if reads from the compressed cache are
+faster than reads from a swap device.
+
+NOTE: Zswap is a new feature as of v3.11 and interacts heavily with memory
+reclaim.  This interaction has not be fully explored on the large set of
+potential configurations and workloads that exist.  For this reason, zswap
+is a work in progress and should be considered experimental.
+
+Some potential benefits:
+* Desktop/laptop users with limited RAM capacities can mitigate the
+    performance impact of swapping.
+* Overcommitted guests that share a common I/O resource can
+    dramatically reduce their swap I/O pressure, avoiding heavy handed I/O
+    throttling by the hypervisor. This allows more work to get done with less
+    impact to the guest workload and guests sharing the I/O subsystem
+* Users with SSDs as swap devices can extend the life of the device by
+    drastically reducing life-shortening writes.
+
+Zswap evicts pages from compressed cache on an LRU basis to the backing swap
+device when the compressed pool reaches it size limit.  This requirement had
+been identified in prior community discussions.
+
+To enabled zswap, the "enabled" attribute must be set to 1 at boot time.  e.g.
+zswap.enabled=1
+
+Design:
+
+Zswap receives pages for compression through the Frontswap API and is able to
+evict pages from its own compressed pool on an LRU basis and write them back to
+the backing swap device in the case that the compressed pool is full.
+
+Zswap makes use of zbud for the managing the compressed memory pool.  Each
+allocation in zbud is not directly accessible by address.  Rather, a handle is
+return by the allocation routine and that handle must be mapped before being
+accessed.  The compressed memory pool grows on demand and shrinks as compressed
+pages are freed.  The pool is not preallocated.
+
+When a swap page is passed from frontswap to zswap, zswap maintains a mapping
+of the swap entry, a combination of the swap type and swap offset, to the zbud
+handle that references that compressed swap page.  This mapping is achieved
+with a red-black tree per swap type.  The swap offset is the search key for the
+tree nodes.
+
+During a page fault on a PTE that is a swap entry, frontswap calls the zswap
+load function to decompress the page into the page allocated by the page fault
+handler.
+
+Once there are no PTEs referencing a swap page stored in zswap (i.e. the count
+in the swap_map goes to 0) the swap code calls the zswap invalidate function,
+via frontswap, to free the compressed entry.
+
+Zswap seeks to be simple in its policies.  Sysfs attributes allow for one user
+controlled policies:
+* max_pool_percent - The maximum percentage of memory that the compressed
+    pool can occupy.
+
+Zswap allows the compressor to be selected at kernel boot time by setting the
+“compressor” attribute.  The default compressor is lzo.  e.g.
+zswap.compressor=deflate
+
+A debugfs interface is provided for various statistic about pool size, number
+of pages stored, and various counters for the reasons pages are rejected.
diff --git a/drivers/staging/vme/vme_api.txt b/Documentation/vme_api.txt
index 856efa35f6e3..856efa35f6e3 100644
--- a/drivers/staging/vme/vme_api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vme_api.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds28e04 b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds28e04
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7819b65cfa48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds28e04
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+Kernel driver w1_ds28e04
+========================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Maxim DS28E04-100 4096-Bit Addressable 1-Wire EEPROM with PIO
+
+supported family codes:
+	W1_FAMILY_DS28E04	0x1C
+
+Author: Markus Franke, <franke.m@sebakmt.com> <franm@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+Support is provided through the sysfs files "eeprom" and "pio". CRC checking
+during memory accesses can optionally be enabled/disabled via the device
+attribute "crccheck". The strong pull-up can optionally be enabled/disabled
+via the module parameter "w1_strong_pullup".
+
+Memory Access
+
+	A read operation on the "eeprom" file reads the given amount of bytes
+	from the EEPROM of the DS28E04.
+
+	A write operation on the "eeprom" file writes the given byte sequence
+	to the EEPROM of the DS28E04. If CRC checking mode is enabled only
+	fully aligned blocks of 32 bytes with valid CRC16 values (in bytes 30
+	and 31) are allowed to be written.
+
+PIO Access
+
+	The 2 PIOs of the DS28E04-100 are accessible via the "pio" sysfs file.
+
+	The current status of the PIO's is returned as an 8 bit value. Bit 0/1
+	represent the state of PIO_0/PIO_1. Bits 2..7 do not care. The PIO's are
+	driven low-active, i.e. the driver delivers/expects low-active values.
diff --git a/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm
index 0403aaaba878..cc62a95e4776 100644
--- a/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm
+++ b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm
@@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ Kernel driver w1_therm
 
 Supported chips:
   * Maxim ds18*20 based temperature sensors.
+  * Maxim ds1825 based temperature sensors.
 
 Author: Evgeniy Polyakov <johnpol@2ka.mipt.ru>
 
@@ -15,6 +16,7 @@ supported family codes:
 W1_THERM_DS18S20	0x10
 W1_THERM_DS1822		0x22
 W1_THERM_DS18B20	0x28
+W1_THERM_DS1825		0x3B
 
 Support is provided through the sysfs w1_slave file.  Each open and
 read sequence will initiate a temperature conversion then provide two
@@ -32,9 +34,16 @@ currently supported.  The driver also doesn't support reduced
 precision (which would also reduce the conversion time).
 
 The module parameter strong_pullup can be set to 0 to disable the
-strong pullup or 1 to enable.  If enabled the 5V strong pullup will be
-enabled when the conversion is taking place provided the master driver
-must support the strong pullup (or it falls back to a pullup
+strong pullup, 1 to enable autodetection or 2 to force strong pullup.
+In case of autodetection, the driver will use the "READ POWER SUPPLY"
+command to check if there are pariste powered devices on the bus.
+If so, it will activate the master's strong pullup.
+In case the detection of parasite devices using this command fails
+(seems to be the case with some DS18S20) the strong pullup can
+be force-enabled.
+If the strong pullup is enabled, the master's strong pullup will be
+driven when the conversion is taking place, provided the master driver
+does support the strong pullup (or it falls back to a pullup
 resistor).  The DS18b20 temperature sensor specification lists a
 maximum current draw of 1.5mA and that a 5k pullup resistor is not
 sufficient.  The strong pullup is designed to provide the additional
diff --git a/Documentation/w1/w1.generic b/Documentation/w1/w1.generic
index 212f4ac31c01..a31c5a242973 100644
--- a/Documentation/w1/w1.generic
+++ b/Documentation/w1/w1.generic
@@ -25,8 +25,8 @@ When a w1 master driver registers with the w1 subsystem, the following occurs:
  - sysfs entries for that w1 master are created
  - the w1 bus is periodically searched for new slave devices
 
-When a device is found on the bus, w1 core checks if driver for its family is
-loaded. If so, the family driver is attached to the slave.
+When a device is found on the bus, w1 core tries to load the driver for its family
+and check if it is loaded. If so, the family driver is attached to the slave.
 If there is no driver for the family, default one is assigned, which allows to perform
 almost any kind of operations. Each logical operation is a transaction
 in nature, which can contain several (two or one) low-level operations.
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/00-INDEX b/Documentation/watchdog/00-INDEX
deleted file mode 100644
index fc9082a1477a..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/00-INDEX
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-00-INDEX
-	- this file.
-convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt
-	- how-to for converting old watchdog drivers to the new kernel API.
-hpwdt.txt
-	- information on the HP iLO2 NMI watchdog
-pcwd-watchdog.txt
-	- documentation for Berkshire Products PC Watchdog ISA cards.
-src/
-	- directory holding watchdog related example programs.
-watchdog-api.txt
-	- description of the Linux Watchdog driver API.
-watchdog-kernel-api.txt
-	- description of the Linux WatchDog Timer Driver Core kernel API.
-watchdog-parameters.txt
-	- information on driver parameters (for drivers other than
-	  the ones that have driver-specific files here)
-wdt.txt
-	- description of the Watchdog Timer Interfaces for Linux.
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt
index be8119bb15d2..271b8850dde7 100644
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt
@@ -59,6 +59,10 @@ Here is a overview of the functions and probably needed actions:
 	WDIOC_GETTIMEOUT:
 		No preparations needed
 
+	WDIOC_GETTIMELEFT:
+		It needs get_timeleft() callback to be defined. Otherwise it
+		will return EOPNOTSUPP
+
   Other IOCTLs can be served using the ioctl-callback. Note that this is mainly
   intended for porting old drivers; new drivers should not invent private IOCTLs.
   Private IOCTLs are processed first. When the callback returns with
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/src/watchdog-test.c b/Documentation/watchdog/src/watchdog-test.c
index 63fdc34ceb98..3da822967ee0 100644
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/src/watchdog-test.c
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/src/watchdog-test.c
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
 #include <string.h>
 #include <unistd.h>
 #include <fcntl.h>
+#include <signal.h>
 #include <sys/ioctl.h>
 #include <linux/types.h>
 #include <linux/watchdog.h>
@@ -29,6 +30,14 @@ static void keep_alive(void)
  * The main program.  Run the program with "-d" to disable the card,
  * or "-e" to enable the card.
  */
+
+static void term(int sig)
+{
+    close(fd);
+    fprintf(stderr, "Stopping watchdog ticks...\n");
+    exit(0);
+}
+
 int main(int argc, char *argv[])
 {
     int flags;
@@ -47,26 +56,31 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
 	    ioctl(fd, WDIOC_SETOPTIONS, &flags);
 	    fprintf(stderr, "Watchdog card disabled.\n");
 	    fflush(stderr);
-	    exit(0);
+	    goto end;
 	} else if (!strncasecmp(argv[1], "-e", 2)) {
 	    flags = WDIOS_ENABLECARD;
 	    ioctl(fd, WDIOC_SETOPTIONS, &flags);
 	    fprintf(stderr, "Watchdog card enabled.\n");
 	    fflush(stderr);
-	    exit(0);
+	    goto end;
 	} else {
 	    fprintf(stderr, "-d to disable, -e to enable.\n");
 	    fprintf(stderr, "run by itself to tick the card.\n");
 	    fflush(stderr);
-	    exit(0);
+	    goto end;
 	}
     } else {
 	fprintf(stderr, "Watchdog Ticking Away!\n");
 	fflush(stderr);
     }
 
+    signal(SIGINT, term);
+
     while(1) {
 	keep_alive();
 	sleep(1);
     }
+end:
+    close(fd);
+    return 0;
 }
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt
index 9e162465b0cf..a0438f3957ca 100644
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 The Linux WatchDog Timer Driver Core kernel API.
 ===============================================
-Last reviewed: 29-Nov-2011
+Last reviewed: 12-Feb-2013
 
 Wim Van Sebroeck <wim@iguana.be>
 
@@ -39,6 +39,10 @@ watchdog_device structure.
 The watchdog device structure looks like this:
 
 struct watchdog_device {
+	int id;
+	struct cdev cdev;
+	struct device *dev;
+	struct device *parent;
 	const struct watchdog_info *info;
 	const struct watchdog_ops *ops;
 	unsigned int bootstatus;
@@ -46,10 +50,20 @@ struct watchdog_device {
 	unsigned int min_timeout;
 	unsigned int max_timeout;
 	void *driver_data;
+	struct mutex lock;
 	unsigned long status;
 };
 
 It contains following fields:
+* id: set by watchdog_register_device, id 0 is special. It has both a
+  /dev/watchdog0 cdev (dynamic major, minor 0) as well as the old
+  /dev/watchdog miscdev. The id is set automatically when calling
+  watchdog_register_device.
+* cdev: cdev for the dynamic /dev/watchdog<id> device nodes. This
+  field is also populated by watchdog_register_device.
+* dev: device under the watchdog class (created by watchdog_register_device).
+* parent: set this to the parent device (or NULL) before calling
+  watchdog_register_device.
 * info: a pointer to a watchdog_info structure. This structure gives some
   additional information about the watchdog timer itself. (Like it's unique name)
 * ops: a pointer to the list of watchdog operations that the watchdog supports.
@@ -59,8 +73,9 @@ It contains following fields:
 * bootstatus: status of the device after booting (reported with watchdog
   WDIOF_* status bits).
 * driver_data: a pointer to the drivers private data of a watchdog device.
-  This data should only be accessed via the watchdog_set_drvadata and
+  This data should only be accessed via the watchdog_set_drvdata and
   watchdog_get_drvdata routines.
+* lock: Mutex for WatchDog Timer Driver Core internal use only.
 * status: this field contains a number of status bits that give extra
   information about the status of the device (Like: is the watchdog timer
   running/active, is the nowayout bit set, is the device opened via
@@ -77,6 +92,9 @@ struct watchdog_ops {
 	int (*ping)(struct watchdog_device *);
 	unsigned int (*status)(struct watchdog_device *);
 	int (*set_timeout)(struct watchdog_device *, unsigned int);
+	unsigned int (*get_timeleft)(struct watchdog_device *);
+	void (*ref)(struct watchdog_device *);
+	void (*unref)(struct watchdog_device *);
 	long (*ioctl)(struct watchdog_device *, unsigned int, unsigned long);
 };
 
@@ -84,6 +102,21 @@ It is important that you first define the module owner of the watchdog timer
 driver's operations. This module owner will be used to lock the module when
 the watchdog is active. (This to avoid a system crash when you unload the
 module and /dev/watchdog is still open).
+
+If the watchdog_device struct is dynamically allocated, just locking the module
+is not enough and a driver also needs to define the ref and unref operations to
+ensure the structure holding the watchdog_device does not go away.
+
+The simplest (and usually sufficient) implementation of this is to:
+1) Add a kref struct to the same structure which is holding the watchdog_device
+2) Define a release callback for the kref which frees the struct holding both
+3) Call kref_init on this kref *before* calling watchdog_register_device()
+4) Define a ref operation calling kref_get on this kref
+5) Define a unref operation calling kref_put on this kref
+6) When it is time to cleanup:
+ * Do not kfree() the struct holding both, the last kref_put will do this!
+ * *After* calling watchdog_unregister_device() call kref_put on the kref
+
 Some operations are mandatory and some are optional. The mandatory operations
 are:
 * start: this is a pointer to the routine that starts the watchdog timer
@@ -117,11 +150,17 @@ they are supported. These optional routines/operations are:
   status of the device is reported with watchdog WDIOF_* status flags/bits.
 * set_timeout: this routine checks and changes the timeout of the watchdog
   timer device. It returns 0 on success, -EINVAL for "parameter out of range"
-  and -EIO for "could not write value to the watchdog". On success the timeout
-  value of the watchdog_device will be changed to the value that was just used
-  to re-program the watchdog timer device.
+  and -EIO for "could not write value to the watchdog". On success this
+  routine should set the timeout value of the watchdog_device to the
+  achieved timeout value (which may be different from the requested one
+  because the watchdog does not necessarily has a 1 second resolution).
   (Note: the WDIOF_SETTIMEOUT needs to be set in the options field of the
   watchdog's info structure).
+* get_timeleft: this routines returns the time that's left before a reset.
+* ref: the operation that calls kref_get on the kref of a dynamically
+  allocated watchdog_device struct.
+* unref: the operation that calls kref_put on the kref of a dynamically
+  allocated watchdog_device struct.
 * ioctl: if this routine is present then it will be called first before we do
   our own internal ioctl call handling. This routine should return -ENOIOCTLCMD
   if a command is not supported. The parameters that are passed to the ioctl
@@ -141,6 +180,11 @@ bit-operations. The status bits that are defined are:
   (This bit should only be used by the WatchDog Timer Driver Core).
 * WDOG_NO_WAY_OUT: this bit stores the nowayout setting for the watchdog.
   If this bit is set then the watchdog timer will not be able to stop.
+* WDOG_UNREGISTERED: this bit gets set by the WatchDog Timer Driver Core
+  after calling watchdog_unregister_device, and then checked before calling
+  any watchdog_ops, so that you can be sure that no operations (other then
+  unref) will get called after unregister, even if userspace still holds a
+  reference to /dev/watchdog
 
   To set the WDOG_NO_WAY_OUT status bit (before registering your watchdog
   timer device) you can either:
@@ -168,3 +212,15 @@ driver specific data to and a pointer to the data itself.
 The watchdog_get_drvdata function allows you to retrieve driver specific data.
 The argument of this function is the watchdog device where you want to retrieve
 data from. The function returns the pointer to the driver specific data.
+
+To initialize the timeout field, the following function can be used:
+
+extern int watchdog_init_timeout(struct watchdog_device *wdd,
+                                  unsigned int timeout_parm, struct device *dev);
+
+The watchdog_init_timeout function allows you to initialize the timeout field
+using the module timeout parameter or by retrieving the timeout-sec property from
+the device tree (if the module timeout parameter is invalid). Best practice is
+to set the default timeout value as timeout value in the watchdog_device and
+then use this function to set the user "preferred" timeout value.
+This routine returns zero on success and a negative errno code for failure.
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt
index 17ddd822b456..f9492fed4104 100644
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt
@@ -78,6 +78,11 @@ wd0_timeout: Default watchdog0 timeout in 1/10secs
 wd1_timeout: Default watchdog1 timeout in 1/10secs
 wd2_timeout: Default watchdog2 timeout in 1/10secs
 -------------------------------------------------
+da9052wdt:
+timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 2<= timeout <=131, default=2.048s
+nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+	(default=kernel config parameter)
+-------------------------------------------------
 davinci_wdt:
 heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 600, default 60
 -------------------------------------------------
@@ -189,14 +194,6 @@ reset: Watchdog Interrupt/Reset Mode. 0 = interrupt, 1 = reset
 nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
 	(default=kernel config parameter)
 -------------------------------------------------
-mpcore_wdt:
-mpcore_margin: MPcore timer margin in seconds.
-	(0 < mpcore_margin < 65536, default=60)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
-	(default=kernel config parameter)
-mpcore_noboot: MPcore watchdog action, set to 1 to ignore reboots,
-	0 to reboot (default=0
--------------------------------------------------
 mv64x60_wdt:
 nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
 	(default=kernel config parameter)
diff --git a/Documentation/workqueue.txt b/Documentation/workqueue.txt
index a0b577de918f..f81a65b54c29 100644
--- a/Documentation/workqueue.txt
+++ b/Documentation/workqueue.txt
@@ -85,29 +85,31 @@ workqueue.
 Special purpose threads, called worker threads, execute the functions
 off of the queue, one after the other.  If no work is queued, the
 worker threads become idle.  These worker threads are managed in so
-called thread-pools.
+called worker-pools.
 
 The cmwq design differentiates between the user-facing workqueues that
 subsystems and drivers queue work items on and the backend mechanism
-which manages thread-pool and processes the queued work items.
+which manages worker-pools and processes the queued work items.
 
-The backend is called gcwq.  There is one gcwq for each possible CPU
-and one gcwq to serve work items queued on unbound workqueues.
+There are two worker-pools, one for normal work items and the other
+for high priority ones, for each possible CPU and some extra
+worker-pools to serve work items queued on unbound workqueues - the
+number of these backing pools is dynamic.
 
 Subsystems and drivers can create and queue work items through special
 workqueue API functions as they see fit. They can influence some
 aspects of the way the work items are executed by setting flags on the
 workqueue they are putting the work item on. These flags include
-things like CPU locality, reentrancy, concurrency limits and more. To
+things like CPU locality, concurrency limits, priority and more.  To
 get a detailed overview refer to the API description of
 alloc_workqueue() below.
 
-When a work item is queued to a workqueue, the target gcwq is
+When a work item is queued to a workqueue, the target worker-pool is
 determined according to the queue parameters and workqueue attributes
-and appended on the shared worklist of the gcwq.  For example, unless
-specifically overridden, a work item of a bound workqueue will be
-queued on the worklist of exactly that gcwq that is associated to the
-CPU the issuer is running on.
+and appended on the shared worklist of the worker-pool.  For example,
+unless specifically overridden, a work item of a bound workqueue will
+be queued on the worklist of either normal or highpri worker-pool that
+is associated to the CPU the issuer is running on.
 
 For any worker pool implementation, managing the concurrency level
 (how many execution contexts are active) is an important issue.  cmwq
@@ -115,36 +117,37 @@ tries to keep the concurrency at a minimal but sufficient level.
 Minimal to save resources and sufficient in that the system is used at
 its full capacity.
 
-Each gcwq bound to an actual CPU implements concurrency management by
-hooking into the scheduler.  The gcwq is notified whenever an active
-worker wakes up or sleeps and keeps track of the number of the
-currently runnable workers.  Generally, work items are not expected to
-hog a CPU and consume many cycles.  That means maintaining just enough
-concurrency to prevent work processing from stalling should be
-optimal.  As long as there are one or more runnable workers on the
-CPU, the gcwq doesn't start execution of a new work, but, when the
-last running worker goes to sleep, it immediately schedules a new
-worker so that the CPU doesn't sit idle while there are pending work
-items.  This allows using a minimal number of workers without losing
-execution bandwidth.
+Each worker-pool bound to an actual CPU implements concurrency
+management by hooking into the scheduler.  The worker-pool is notified
+whenever an active worker wakes up or sleeps and keeps track of the
+number of the currently runnable workers.  Generally, work items are
+not expected to hog a CPU and consume many cycles.  That means
+maintaining just enough concurrency to prevent work processing from
+stalling should be optimal.  As long as there are one or more runnable
+workers on the CPU, the worker-pool doesn't start execution of a new
+work, but, when the last running worker goes to sleep, it immediately
+schedules a new worker so that the CPU doesn't sit idle while there
+are pending work items.  This allows using a minimal number of workers
+without losing execution bandwidth.
 
 Keeping idle workers around doesn't cost other than the memory space
 for kthreads, so cmwq holds onto idle ones for a while before killing
 them.
 
-For an unbound wq, the above concurrency management doesn't apply and
-the gcwq for the pseudo unbound CPU tries to start executing all work
-items as soon as possible.  The responsibility of regulating
-concurrency level is on the users.  There is also a flag to mark a
-bound wq to ignore the concurrency management.  Please refer to the
-API section for details.
+For unbound workqueues, the number of backing pools is dynamic.
+Unbound workqueue can be assigned custom attributes using
+apply_workqueue_attrs() and workqueue will automatically create
+backing worker pools matching the attributes.  The responsibility of
+regulating concurrency level is on the users.  There is also a flag to
+mark a bound wq to ignore the concurrency management.  Please refer to
+the API section for details.
 
 Forward progress guarantee relies on that workers can be created when
 more execution contexts are necessary, which in turn is guaranteed
 through the use of rescue workers.  All work items which might be used
 on code paths that handle memory reclaim are required to be queued on
 wq's that have a rescue-worker reserved for execution under memory
-pressure.  Else it is possible that the thread-pool deadlocks waiting
+pressure.  Else it is possible that the worker-pool deadlocks waiting
 for execution contexts to free up.
 
 
@@ -163,25 +166,15 @@ resources, scheduled and executed.
 
 @flags:
 
-  WQ_NON_REENTRANT
-
-	By default, a wq guarantees non-reentrance only on the same
-	CPU.  A work item may not be executed concurrently on the same
-	CPU by multiple workers but is allowed to be executed
-	concurrently on multiple CPUs.  This flag makes sure
-	non-reentrance is enforced across all CPUs.  Work items queued
-	to a non-reentrant wq are guaranteed to be executed by at most
-	one worker system-wide at any given time.
-
   WQ_UNBOUND
 
-	Work items queued to an unbound wq are served by a special
-	gcwq which hosts workers which are not bound to any specific
-	CPU.  This makes the wq behave as a simple execution context
-	provider without concurrency management.  The unbound gcwq
-	tries to start execution of work items as soon as possible.
-	Unbound wq sacrifices locality but is useful for the following
-	cases.
+	Work items queued to an unbound wq are served by the special
+	woker-pools which host workers which are not bound to any
+	specific CPU.  This makes the wq behave as a simple execution
+	context provider without concurrency management.  The unbound
+	worker-pools try to start execution of work items as soon as
+	possible.  Unbound wq sacrifices locality but is useful for
+	the following cases.
 
 	* Wide fluctuation in the concurrency level requirement is
 	  expected and using bound wq may end up creating large number
@@ -205,31 +198,22 @@ resources, scheduled and executed.
 
   WQ_HIGHPRI
 
-	Work items of a highpri wq are queued at the head of the
-	worklist of the target gcwq and start execution regardless of
-	the current concurrency level.  In other words, highpri work
-	items will always start execution as soon as execution
-	resource is available.
-
-	Ordering among highpri work items is preserved - a highpri
-	work item queued after another highpri work item will start
-	execution after the earlier highpri work item starts.
-
-	Although highpri work items are not held back by other
-	runnable work items, they still contribute to the concurrency
-	level.  Highpri work items in runnable state will prevent
-	non-highpri work items from starting execution.
+	Work items of a highpri wq are queued to the highpri
+	worker-pool of the target cpu.  Highpri worker-pools are
+	served by worker threads with elevated nice level.
 
-	This flag is meaningless for unbound wq.
+	Note that normal and highpri worker-pools don't interact with
+	each other.  Each maintain its separate pool of workers and
+	implements concurrency management among its workers.
 
   WQ_CPU_INTENSIVE
 
 	Work items of a CPU intensive wq do not contribute to the
 	concurrency level.  In other words, runnable CPU intensive
-	work items will not prevent other work items from starting
-	execution.  This is useful for bound work items which are
-	expected to hog CPU cycles so that their execution is
-	regulated by the system scheduler.
+	work items will not prevent other work items in the same
+	worker-pool from starting execution.  This is useful for bound
+	work items which are expected to hog CPU cycles so that their
+	execution is regulated by the system scheduler.
 
 	Although CPU intensive work items don't contribute to the
 	concurrency level, start of their executions is still
@@ -239,13 +223,9 @@ resources, scheduled and executed.
 
 	This flag is meaningless for unbound wq.
 
-  WQ_HIGHPRI | WQ_CPU_INTENSIVE
-
-	This combination makes the wq avoid interaction with
-	concurrency management completely and behave as a simple
-	per-CPU execution context provider.  Work items queued on a
-	highpri CPU-intensive wq start execution as soon as resources
-	are available and don't affect execution of other work items.
+Note that the flag WQ_NON_REENTRANT no longer exists as all workqueues
+are now non-reentrant - any work item is guaranteed to be executed by
+at most one worker system-wide at any given time.
 
 @max_active:
 
@@ -268,9 +248,9 @@ recommended.
 
 Some users depend on the strict execution ordering of ST wq.  The
 combination of @max_active of 1 and WQ_UNBOUND is used to achieve this
-behavior.  Work items on such wq are always queued to the unbound gcwq
-and only one work item can be active at any given time thus achieving
-the same ordering property as ST wq.
+behavior.  Work items on such wq are always queued to the unbound
+worker-pools and only one work item can be active at any given time thus
+achieving the same ordering property as ST wq.
 
 
 5. Example Execution Scenarios
@@ -328,20 +308,7 @@ If @max_active == 2,
  35		w2 wakes up and finishes
 
 Now, let's assume w1 and w2 are queued to a different wq q1 which has
-WQ_HIGHPRI set,
-
- TIME IN MSECS	EVENT
- 0		w1 and w2 start and burn CPU
- 5		w1 sleeps
- 10		w2 sleeps
- 10		w0 starts and burns CPU
- 15		w0 sleeps
- 15		w1 wakes up and finishes
- 20		w2 wakes up and finishes
- 25		w0 wakes up and burns CPU
- 30		w0 finishes
-
-If q1 has WQ_CPU_INTENSIVE set,
+WQ_CPU_INTENSIVE set,
 
  TIME IN MSECS	EVENT
  0		w0 starts and burns CPU
diff --git a/Documentation/ww-mutex-design.txt b/Documentation/ww-mutex-design.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8a112dc304c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ww-mutex-design.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,344 @@
+Wait/Wound Deadlock-Proof Mutex Design
+======================================
+
+Please read mutex-design.txt first, as it applies to wait/wound mutexes too.
+
+Motivation for WW-Mutexes
+-------------------------
+
+GPU's do operations that commonly involve many buffers.  Those buffers
+can be shared across contexts/processes, exist in different memory
+domains (for example VRAM vs system memory), and so on.  And with
+PRIME / dmabuf, they can even be shared across devices.  So there are
+a handful of situations where the driver needs to wait for buffers to
+become ready.  If you think about this in terms of waiting on a buffer
+mutex for it to become available, this presents a problem because
+there is no way to guarantee that buffers appear in a execbuf/batch in
+the same order in all contexts.  That is directly under control of
+userspace, and a result of the sequence of GL calls that an application
+makes.	Which results in the potential for deadlock.  The problem gets
+more complex when you consider that the kernel may need to migrate the
+buffer(s) into VRAM before the GPU operates on the buffer(s), which
+may in turn require evicting some other buffers (and you don't want to
+evict other buffers which are already queued up to the GPU), but for a
+simplified understanding of the problem you can ignore this.
+
+The algorithm that the TTM graphics subsystem came up with for dealing with
+this problem is quite simple.  For each group of buffers (execbuf) that need
+to be locked, the caller would be assigned a unique reservation id/ticket,
+from a global counter.  In case of deadlock while locking all the buffers
+associated with a execbuf, the one with the lowest reservation ticket (i.e.
+the oldest task) wins, and the one with the higher reservation id (i.e. the
+younger task) unlocks all of the buffers that it has already locked, and then
+tries again.
+
+In the RDBMS literature this deadlock handling approach is called wait/wound:
+The older tasks waits until it can acquire the contended lock. The younger tasks
+needs to back off and drop all the locks it is currently holding, i.e. the
+younger task is wounded.
+
+Concepts
+--------
+
+Compared to normal mutexes two additional concepts/objects show up in the lock
+interface for w/w mutexes:
+
+Acquire context: To ensure eventual forward progress it is important the a task
+trying to acquire locks doesn't grab a new reservation id, but keeps the one it
+acquired when starting the lock acquisition. This ticket is stored in the
+acquire context. Furthermore the acquire context keeps track of debugging state
+to catch w/w mutex interface abuse.
+
+W/w class: In contrast to normal mutexes the lock class needs to be explicit for
+w/w mutexes, since it is required to initialize the acquire context.
+
+Furthermore there are three different class of w/w lock acquire functions:
+
+* Normal lock acquisition with a context, using ww_mutex_lock.
+
+* Slowpath lock acquisition on the contending lock, used by the wounded task
+  after having dropped all already acquired locks. These functions have the
+  _slow postfix.
+
+  From a simple semantics point-of-view the _slow functions are not strictly
+  required, since simply calling the normal ww_mutex_lock functions on the
+  contending lock (after having dropped all other already acquired locks) will
+  work correctly. After all if no other ww mutex has been acquired yet there's
+  no deadlock potential and hence the ww_mutex_lock call will block and not
+  prematurely return -EDEADLK. The advantage of the _slow functions is in
+  interface safety:
+  - ww_mutex_lock has a __must_check int return type, whereas ww_mutex_lock_slow
+    has a void return type. Note that since ww mutex code needs loops/retries
+    anyway the __must_check doesn't result in spurious warnings, even though the
+    very first lock operation can never fail.
+  - When full debugging is enabled ww_mutex_lock_slow checks that all acquired
+    ww mutex have been released (preventing deadlocks) and makes sure that we
+    block on the contending lock (preventing spinning through the -EDEADLK
+    slowpath until the contended lock can be acquired).
+
+* Functions to only acquire a single w/w mutex, which results in the exact same
+  semantics as a normal mutex. This is done by calling ww_mutex_lock with a NULL
+  context.
+
+  Again this is not strictly required. But often you only want to acquire a
+  single lock in which case it's pointless to set up an acquire context (and so
+  better to avoid grabbing a deadlock avoidance ticket).
+
+Of course, all the usual variants for handling wake-ups due to signals are also
+provided.
+
+Usage
+-----
+
+Three different ways to acquire locks within the same w/w class. Common
+definitions for methods #1 and #2:
+
+static DEFINE_WW_CLASS(ww_class);
+
+struct obj {
+	struct ww_mutex lock;
+	/* obj data */
+};
+
+struct obj_entry {
+	struct list_head head;
+	struct obj *obj;
+};
+
+Method 1, using a list in execbuf->buffers that's not allowed to be reordered.
+This is useful if a list of required objects is already tracked somewhere.
+Furthermore the lock helper can use propagate the -EALREADY return code back to
+the caller as a signal that an object is twice on the list. This is useful if
+the list is constructed from userspace input and the ABI requires userspace to
+not have duplicate entries (e.g. for a gpu commandbuffer submission ioctl).
+
+int lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+{
+	struct obj *res_obj = NULL;
+	struct obj_entry *contended_entry = NULL;
+	struct obj_entry *entry;
+
+	ww_acquire_init(ctx, &ww_class);
+
+retry:
+	list_for_each_entry (entry, list, head) {
+		if (entry->obj == res_obj) {
+			res_obj = NULL;
+			continue;
+		}
+		ret = ww_mutex_lock(&entry->obj->lock, ctx);
+		if (ret < 0) {
+			contended_entry = entry;
+			goto err;
+		}
+	}
+
+	ww_acquire_done(ctx);
+	return 0;
+
+err:
+	list_for_each_entry_continue_reverse (entry, list, head)
+		ww_mutex_unlock(&entry->obj->lock);
+
+	if (res_obj)
+		ww_mutex_unlock(&res_obj->lock);
+
+	if (ret == -EDEADLK) {
+		/* we lost out in a seqno race, lock and retry.. */
+		ww_mutex_lock_slow(&contended_entry->obj->lock, ctx);
+		res_obj = contended_entry->obj;
+		goto retry;
+	}
+	ww_acquire_fini(ctx);
+
+	return ret;
+}
+
+Method 2, using a list in execbuf->buffers that can be reordered. Same semantics
+of duplicate entry detection using -EALREADY as method 1 above. But the
+list-reordering allows for a bit more idiomatic code.
+
+int lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+{
+	struct obj_entry *entry, *entry2;
+
+	ww_acquire_init(ctx, &ww_class);
+
+	list_for_each_entry (entry, list, head) {
+		ret = ww_mutex_lock(&entry->obj->lock, ctx);
+		if (ret < 0) {
+			entry2 = entry;
+
+			list_for_each_entry_continue_reverse (entry2, list, head)
+				ww_mutex_unlock(&entry2->obj->lock);
+
+			if (ret != -EDEADLK) {
+				ww_acquire_fini(ctx);
+				return ret;
+			}
+
+			/* we lost out in a seqno race, lock and retry.. */
+			ww_mutex_lock_slow(&entry->obj->lock, ctx);
+
+			/*
+			 * Move buf to head of the list, this will point
+			 * buf->next to the first unlocked entry,
+			 * restarting the for loop.
+			 */
+			list_del(&entry->head);
+			list_add(&entry->head, list);
+		}
+	}
+
+	ww_acquire_done(ctx);
+	return 0;
+}
+
+Unlocking works the same way for both methods #1 and #2:
+
+void unlock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+{
+	struct obj_entry *entry;
+
+	list_for_each_entry (entry, list, head)
+		ww_mutex_unlock(&entry->obj->lock);
+
+	ww_acquire_fini(ctx);
+}
+
+Method 3 is useful if the list of objects is constructed ad-hoc and not upfront,
+e.g. when adjusting edges in a graph where each node has its own ww_mutex lock,
+and edges can only be changed when holding the locks of all involved nodes. w/w
+mutexes are a natural fit for such a case for two reasons:
+- They can handle lock-acquisition in any order which allows us to start walking
+  a graph from a starting point and then iteratively discovering new edges and
+  locking down the nodes those edges connect to.
+- Due to the -EALREADY return code signalling that a given objects is already
+  held there's no need for additional book-keeping to break cycles in the graph
+  or keep track off which looks are already held (when using more than one node
+  as a starting point).
+
+Note that this approach differs in two important ways from the above methods:
+- Since the list of objects is dynamically constructed (and might very well be
+  different when retrying due to hitting the -EDEADLK wound condition) there's
+  no need to keep any object on a persistent list when it's not locked. We can
+  therefore move the list_head into the object itself.
+- On the other hand the dynamic object list construction also means that the -EALREADY return
+  code can't be propagated.
+
+Note also that methods #1 and #2 and method #3 can be combined, e.g. to first lock a
+list of starting nodes (passed in from userspace) using one of the above
+methods. And then lock any additional objects affected by the operations using
+method #3 below. The backoff/retry procedure will be a bit more involved, since
+when the dynamic locking step hits -EDEADLK we also need to unlock all the
+objects acquired with the fixed list. But the w/w mutex debug checks will catch
+any interface misuse for these cases.
+
+Also, method 3 can't fail the lock acquisition step since it doesn't return
+-EALREADY. Of course this would be different when using the _interruptible
+variants, but that's outside of the scope of these examples here.
+
+struct obj {
+	struct ww_mutex ww_mutex;
+	struct list_head locked_list;
+};
+
+static DEFINE_WW_CLASS(ww_class);
+
+void __unlock_objs(struct list_head *list)
+{
+	struct obj *entry, *temp;
+
+	list_for_each_entry_safe (entry, temp, list, locked_list) {
+		/* need to do that before unlocking, since only the current lock holder is
+		allowed to use object */
+		list_del(&entry->locked_list);
+		ww_mutex_unlock(entry->ww_mutex)
+	}
+}
+
+void lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+{
+	struct obj *obj;
+
+	ww_acquire_init(ctx, &ww_class);
+
+retry:
+	/* re-init loop start state */
+	loop {
+		/* magic code which walks over a graph and decides which objects
+		 * to lock */
+
+		ret = ww_mutex_lock(obj->ww_mutex, ctx);
+		if (ret == -EALREADY) {
+			/* we have that one already, get to the next object */
+			continue;
+		}
+		if (ret == -EDEADLK) {
+			__unlock_objs(list);
+
+			ww_mutex_lock_slow(obj, ctx);
+			list_add(&entry->locked_list, list);
+			goto retry;
+		}
+
+		/* locked a new object, add it to the list */
+		list_add_tail(&entry->locked_list, list);
+	}
+
+	ww_acquire_done(ctx);
+	return 0;
+}
+
+void unlock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+{
+	__unlock_objs(list);
+	ww_acquire_fini(ctx);
+}
+
+Method 4: Only lock one single objects. In that case deadlock detection and
+prevention is obviously overkill, since with grabbing just one lock you can't
+produce a deadlock within just one class. To simplify this case the w/w mutex
+api can be used with a NULL context.
+
+Implementation Details
+----------------------
+
+Design:
+  ww_mutex currently encapsulates a struct mutex, this means no extra overhead for
+  normal mutex locks, which are far more common. As such there is only a small
+  increase in code size if wait/wound mutexes are not used.
+
+  In general, not much contention is expected. The locks are typically used to
+  serialize access to resources for devices. The only way to make wakeups
+  smarter would be at the cost of adding a field to struct mutex_waiter. This
+  would add overhead to all cases where normal mutexes are used, and
+  ww_mutexes are generally less performance sensitive.
+
+Lockdep:
+  Special care has been taken to warn for as many cases of api abuse
+  as possible. Some common api abuses will be caught with
+  CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES, but CONFIG_PROVE_LOCKING is recommended.
+
+  Some of the errors which will be warned about:
+   - Forgetting to call ww_acquire_fini or ww_acquire_init.
+   - Attempting to lock more mutexes after ww_acquire_done.
+   - Attempting to lock the wrong mutex after -EDEADLK and
+     unlocking all mutexes.
+   - Attempting to lock the right mutex after -EDEADLK,
+     before unlocking all mutexes.
+
+   - Calling ww_mutex_lock_slow before -EDEADLK was returned.
+
+   - Unlocking mutexes with the wrong unlock function.
+   - Calling one of the ww_acquire_* twice on the same context.
+   - Using a different ww_class for the mutex than for the ww_acquire_ctx.
+   - Normal lockdep errors that can result in deadlocks.
+
+  Some of the lockdep errors that can result in deadlocks:
+   - Calling ww_acquire_init to initialize a second ww_acquire_ctx before
+     having called ww_acquire_fini on the first.
+   - 'normal' deadlocks that can occur.
+
+FIXME: Update this section once we have the TASK_DEADLOCK task state flag magic
+implemented.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
index 7c3a8801b7ce..f4f268c2b826 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
@@ -54,6 +54,13 @@ Protocol 2.10:	(Kernel 2.6.31) Added a protocol for relaxed alignment
 		beyond the kernel_alignment added, new init_size and
 		pref_address fields.  Added extended boot loader IDs.
 
+Protocol 2.11:	(Kernel 3.6) Added a field for offset of EFI handover
+		protocol entry point.
+
+Protocol 2.12:	(Kernel 3.8) Added the xloadflags field and extension fields
+	 	to struct boot_params for loading bzImage and ramdisk
+		above 4G in 64bit.
+
 **** MEMORY LAYOUT
 
 The traditional memory map for the kernel loader, used for Image or
@@ -179,7 +186,7 @@ Offset	Proto	Name		Meaning
 0230/4	2.05+	kernel_alignment Physical addr alignment required for kernel
 0234/1	2.05+	relocatable_kernel Whether kernel is relocatable or not
 0235/1	2.10+	min_alignment	Minimum alignment, as a power of two
-0236/2	N/A	pad3		Unused
+0236/2	2.12+	xloadflags	Boot protocol option flags
 0238/4	2.06+	cmdline_size	Maximum size of the kernel command line
 023C/4	2.07+	hardware_subarch Hardware subarchitecture
 0240/8	2.07+	hardware_subarch_data Subarchitecture-specific data
@@ -189,6 +196,7 @@ Offset	Proto	Name		Meaning
 				of struct setup_data
 0258/8	2.10+	pref_address	Preferred loading address
 0260/4	2.10+	init_size	Linear memory required during initialization
+0264/4	2.11+	handover_offset	Offset of handover entry point
 
 (1) For backwards compatibility, if the setup_sects field contains 0, the
     real value is 4.
@@ -363,12 +371,13 @@ Protocol:	2.00+
   ext_loader_type <- 0x05
   ext_loader_ver  <- 0x23
 
-  Assigned boot loader ids:
+  Assigned boot loader ids (hexadecimal):
+
 	0  LILO			(0x00 reserved for pre-2.00 bootloader)
 	1  Loadlin
 	2  bootsect-loader	(0x20, all other values reserved)
 	3  Syslinux
-	4  Etherboot/gPXE
+	4  Etherboot/gPXE/iPXE
 	5  ELILO
 	7  GRUB
 	8  U-Boot
@@ -376,8 +385,12 @@ Protocol:	2.00+
 	A  Gujin
 	B  Qemu
 	C  Arcturus Networks uCbootloader
+	D  kexec-tools
 	E  Extended		(see ext_loader_type)
 	F  Special		(0xFF = undefined)
+       10  Reserved
+       11  Minimal Linux Bootloader <http://sebastian-plotz.blogspot.de>
+       12  OVMF UEFI virtualization stack
 
   Please contact <hpa@zytor.com> if you need a bootloader ID
   value assigned.
@@ -574,6 +587,27 @@ Protocol:	2.10+
   misaligned kernel.  Therefore, a loader should typically try each
   power-of-two alignment from kernel_alignment down to this alignment.
 
+Field name:     xloadflags
+Type:           read
+Offset/size:    0x236/2
+Protocol:       2.12+
+
+  This field is a bitmask.
+
+  Bit 0 (read):	XLF_KERNEL_64
+	- If 1, this kernel has the legacy 64-bit entry point at 0x200.
+
+  Bit 1 (read): XLF_CAN_BE_LOADED_ABOVE_4G
+        - If 1, kernel/boot_params/cmdline/ramdisk can be above 4G.
+
+  Bit 2 (read):	XLF_EFI_HANDOVER_32
+	- If 1, the kernel supports the 32-bit EFI handoff entry point
+          given at handover_offset.
+
+  Bit 3 (read): XLF_EFI_HANDOVER_64
+	- If 1, the kernel supports the 64-bit EFI handoff entry point
+          given at handover_offset + 0x200.
+
 Field name:	cmdline_size
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x238/4
@@ -623,9 +657,10 @@ Protocol:	2.08+
   uncompressed data should be determined using the standard magic
   numbers.  The currently supported compression formats are gzip
   (magic numbers 1F 8B or 1F 9E), bzip2 (magic number 42 5A), LZMA
-  (magic number 5D 00), and XZ (magic number FD 37).  The uncompressed
-  payload is currently always ELF (magic number 7F 45 4C 46).
-  
+  (magic number 5D 00), XZ (magic number FD 37), and LZ4 (magic number
+  02 21).  The uncompressed payload is currently always ELF (magic
+  number 7F 45 4C 46).
+
 Field name:	payload_length
 Type:		read
 Offset/size:	0x24c/4
@@ -690,6 +725,16 @@ Offset/size:	0x260/4
   else
 	runtime_start = pref_address
 
+Field name:	handover_offset
+Type:		read
+Offset/size:	0x264/4
+
+  This field is the offset from the beginning of the kernel image to
+  the EFI handover protocol entry point. Boot loaders using the EFI
+  handover protocol to boot the kernel should jump to this offset.
+
+  See EFI HANDOVER PROTOCOL below for more details.
+
 
 **** THE IMAGE CHECKSUM
 
@@ -996,7 +1041,7 @@ boot_params as that of 16-bit boot protocol, the boot loader should
 also fill the additional fields of the struct boot_params as that
 described in zero-page.txt.
 
-After setupping the struct boot_params, the boot loader can load the
+After setting up the struct boot_params, the boot loader can load the
 32/64-bit kernel in the same way as that of 16-bit boot protocol.
 
 In 32-bit boot protocol, the kernel is started by jumping to the
@@ -1006,7 +1051,72 @@ In 32-bit boot protocol, the kernel is started by jumping to the
 At entry, the CPU must be in 32-bit protected mode with paging
 disabled; a GDT must be loaded with the descriptors for selectors
 __BOOT_CS(0x10) and __BOOT_DS(0x18); both descriptors must be 4G flat
-segment; __BOOS_CS must have execute/read permission, and __BOOT_DS
+segment; __BOOT_CS must have execute/read permission, and __BOOT_DS
 must have read/write permission; CS must be __BOOT_CS and DS, ES, SS
 must be __BOOT_DS; interrupt must be disabled; %esi must hold the base
 address of the struct boot_params; %ebp, %edi and %ebx must be zero.
+
+**** 64-bit BOOT PROTOCOL
+
+For machine with 64bit cpus and 64bit kernel, we could use 64bit bootloader
+and we need a 64-bit boot protocol.
+
+In 64-bit boot protocol, the first step in loading a Linux kernel
+should be to setup the boot parameters (struct boot_params,
+traditionally known as "zero page"). The memory for struct boot_params
+could be allocated anywhere (even above 4G) and initialized to all zero.
+Then, the setup header at offset 0x01f1 of kernel image on should be
+loaded into struct boot_params and examined. The end of setup header
+can be calculated as follows:
+
+	0x0202 + byte value at offset 0x0201
+
+In addition to read/modify/write the setup header of the struct
+boot_params as that of 16-bit boot protocol, the boot loader should
+also fill the additional fields of the struct boot_params as described
+in zero-page.txt.
+
+After setting up the struct boot_params, the boot loader can load
+64-bit kernel in the same way as that of 16-bit boot protocol, but
+kernel could be loaded above 4G.
+
+In 64-bit boot protocol, the kernel is started by jumping to the
+64-bit kernel entry point, which is the start address of loaded
+64-bit kernel plus 0x200.
+
+At entry, the CPU must be in 64-bit mode with paging enabled.
+The range with setup_header.init_size from start address of loaded
+kernel and zero page and command line buffer get ident mapping;
+a GDT must be loaded with the descriptors for selectors
+__BOOT_CS(0x10) and __BOOT_DS(0x18); both descriptors must be 4G flat
+segment; __BOOT_CS must have execute/read permission, and __BOOT_DS
+must have read/write permission; CS must be __BOOT_CS and DS, ES, SS
+must be __BOOT_DS; interrupt must be disabled; %rsi must hold the base
+address of the struct boot_params.
+
+**** EFI HANDOVER PROTOCOL
+
+This protocol allows boot loaders to defer initialisation to the EFI
+boot stub. The boot loader is required to load the kernel/initrd(s)
+from the boot media and jump to the EFI handover protocol entry point
+which is hdr->handover_offset bytes from the beginning of
+startup_{32,64}.
+
+The function prototype for the handover entry point looks like this,
+
+    efi_main(void *handle, efi_system_table_t *table, struct boot_params *bp)
+
+'handle' is the EFI image handle passed to the boot loader by the EFI
+firmware, 'table' is the EFI system table - these are the first two
+arguments of the "handoff state" as described in section 2.3 of the
+UEFI specification. 'bp' is the boot loader-allocated boot params.
+
+The boot loader *must* fill out the following fields in bp,
+
+    o hdr.code32_start
+    o hdr.cmd_line_ptr
+    o hdr.cmdline_size
+    o hdr.ramdisk_image (if applicable)
+    o hdr.ramdisk_size  (if applicable)
+
+All other fields should be zero.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/early-microcode.txt b/Documentation/x86/early-microcode.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d62bea6796da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/early-microcode.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+Early load microcode
+====================
+By Fenghua Yu <fenghua.yu@intel.com>
+
+Kernel can update microcode in early phase of boot time. Loading microcode early
+can fix CPU issues before they are observed during kernel boot time.
+
+Microcode is stored in an initrd file. The microcode is read from the initrd
+file and loaded to CPUs during boot time.
+
+The format of the combined initrd image is microcode in cpio format followed by
+the initrd image (maybe compressed). Kernel parses the combined initrd image
+during boot time. The microcode file in cpio name space is:
+on Intel: kernel/x86/microcode/GenuineIntel.bin
+on AMD  : kernel/x86/microcode/AuthenticAMD.bin
+
+During BSP boot (before SMP starts), if the kernel finds the microcode file in
+the initrd file, it parses the microcode and saves matching microcode in memory.
+If matching microcode is found, it will be uploaded in BSP and later on in all
+APs.
+
+The cached microcode patch is applied when CPUs resume from a sleep state.
+
+There are two legacy user space interfaces to load microcode, either through
+/dev/cpu/microcode or through /sys/devices/system/cpu/microcode/reload file
+in sysfs.
+
+In addition to these two legacy methods, the early loading method described
+here is the third method with which microcode can be uploaded to a system's
+CPUs.
+
+The following example script shows how to generate a new combined initrd file in
+/boot/initrd-3.5.0.ucode.img with original microcode microcode.bin and
+original initrd image /boot/initrd-3.5.0.img.
+
+mkdir initrd
+cd initrd
+mkdir -p kernel/x86/microcode
+cp ../microcode.bin kernel/x86/microcode/GenuineIntel.bin (or AuthenticAMD.bin)
+find . | cpio -o -H newc >../ucode.cpio
+cd ..
+cat ucode.cpio /boot/initrd-3.5.0.img >/boot/initrd-3.5.0.ucode.img
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/efi-stub.txt b/Documentation/x86/efi-stub.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..44e6bb6ead10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/efi-stub.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+			  The EFI Boot Stub
+		     ---------------------------
+
+On the x86 platform, a bzImage can masquerade as a PE/COFF image,
+thereby convincing EFI firmware loaders to load it as an EFI
+executable. The code that modifies the bzImage header, along with the
+EFI-specific entry point that the firmware loader jumps to are
+collectively known as the "EFI boot stub", and live in
+arch/x86/boot/header.S and arch/x86/boot/compressed/eboot.c,
+respectively.
+
+By using the EFI boot stub it's possible to boot a Linux kernel
+without the use of a conventional EFI boot loader, such as grub or
+elilo. Since the EFI boot stub performs the jobs of a boot loader, in
+a certain sense it *IS* the boot loader.
+
+The EFI boot stub is enabled with the CONFIG_EFI_STUB kernel option.
+
+
+**** How to install bzImage.efi
+
+The bzImage located in arch/x86/boot/bzImage must be copied to the EFI
+System Partiion (ESP) and renamed with the extension ".efi". Without
+the extension the EFI firmware loader will refuse to execute it. It's
+not possible to execute bzImage.efi from the usual Linux file systems
+because EFI firmware doesn't have support for them.
+
+
+**** Passing kernel parameters from the EFI shell
+
+Arguments to the kernel can be passed after bzImage.efi, e.g.
+
+	fs0:> bzImage.efi console=ttyS0 root=/dev/sda4
+
+
+**** The "initrd=" option
+
+Like most boot loaders, the EFI stub allows the user to specify
+multiple initrd files using the "initrd=" option. This is the only EFI
+stub-specific command line parameter, everything else is passed to the
+kernel when it boots.
+
+The path to the initrd file must be an absolute path from the
+beginning of the ESP, relative path names do not work. Also, the path
+is an EFI-style path and directory elements must be separated with
+backslashes (\). For example, given the following directory layout,
+
+fs0:>
+	Kernels\
+			bzImage.efi
+			initrd-large.img
+
+	Ramdisks\
+			initrd-small.img
+			initrd-medium.img
+
+to boot with the initrd-large.img file if the current working
+directory is fs0:\Kernels, the following command must be used,
+
+	fs0:\Kernels> bzImage.efi initrd=\Kernels\initrd-large.img
+
+Notice how bzImage.efi can be specified with a relative path. That's
+because the image we're executing is interpreted by the EFI shell,
+which understands relative paths, whereas the rest of the command line
+is passed to bzImage.efi.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
index c54b4f503e2a..1228b22e142b 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
@@ -50,6 +50,13 @@ Machine check
 		monarchtimeout:
 		Sets the time in us to wait for other CPUs on machine checks. 0
 		to disable.
+   mce=bios_cmci_threshold
+		Don't overwrite the bios-set CMCI threshold. This boot option
+		prevents Linux from overwriting the CMCI threshold set by the
+		bios. Without this option, Linux always sets the CMCI
+		threshold to 1. Enabling this may make memory predictive failure
+		analysis less effective if the bios sets thresholds for memory
+		errors since we will not see details for all errors.
 
    nomce (for compatibility with i386): same as mce=off
 
@@ -84,20 +91,6 @@ APICs
 		 apicmaintimer. Useful when your PIT timer is totally
 		 broken.
 
-Early Console
-
-   syntax: earlyprintk=vga
-           earlyprintk=serial[,ttySn[,baudrate]]
-
-   The early console is useful when the kernel crashes before the
-   normal console is initialized. It is not enabled by
-   default because it has some cosmetic problems.
-   Append ,keep to not disable it when the real console takes over.
-   Only vga or serial at a time, not both.
-   Currently only ttyS0 and ttyS1 are supported.
-   Interaction with the standard serial driver is not very good.
-   The VGA output is eventually overwritten by the real console.
-
 Timing
 
   notsc
@@ -105,10 +98,6 @@ Timing
   This can be used to work around timing problems on multiprocessor systems
   with not properly synchronized CPUs.
 
-  report_lost_ticks
-  Report when timer interrupts are lost because some code turned off
-  interrupts for too long.
-
   nohpet
   Don't use the HPET timer.
 
@@ -187,6 +176,11 @@ ACPI
 
   acpi=noirq	Don't route interrupts
 
+  acpi=nocmcff	Disable firmware first mode for corrected errors. This
+		disables parsing the HEST CMC error source to check if
+		firmware has set the FF flag. This may result in
+		duplicate corrected error reports.
+
 PCI
 
   pci=off		Don't use PCI
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt
index d6498e3cd713..881582f75c9c 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt
@@ -13,7 +13,9 @@ ffffe90000000000 - ffffe9ffffffffff (=40 bits) hole
 ffffea0000000000 - ffffeaffffffffff (=40 bits) virtual memory map (1TB)
 ... unused hole ...
 ffffffff80000000 - ffffffffa0000000 (=512 MB)  kernel text mapping, from phys 0
-ffffffffa0000000 - fffffffffff00000 (=1536 MB) module mapping space
+ffffffffa0000000 - ffffffffff5fffff (=1525 MB) module mapping space
+ffffffffff600000 - ffffffffffdfffff (=8 MB) vsyscalls
+ffffffffffe00000 - ffffffffffffffff (=2 MB) unused hole
 
 The direct mapping covers all memory in the system up to the highest
 memory address (this means in some cases it can also include PCI memory
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt
index cf5437deda81..199f453cb4de 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt
@@ -19,6 +19,9 @@ Offset	Proto	Name		Meaning
 090/010	ALL	hd1_info	hd1 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!!
 0A0/010	ALL	sys_desc_table	System description table (struct sys_desc_table)
 0B0/010	ALL	olpc_ofw_header	OLPC's OpenFirmware CIF and friends
+0C0/004	ALL	ext_ramdisk_image ramdisk_image high 32bits
+0C4/004	ALL	ext_ramdisk_size  ramdisk_size high 32bits
+0C8/004	ALL	ext_cmd_line_ptr  cmd_line_ptr high 32bits
 140/080	ALL	edid_info	Video mode setup (struct edid_info)
 1C0/020	ALL	efi_info	EFI 32 information (struct efi_info)
 1E0/004	ALL	alk_mem_k	Alternative mem check, in KB
@@ -27,6 +30,7 @@ Offset	Proto	Name		Meaning
 1E9/001	ALL	eddbuf_entries	Number of entries in eddbuf (below)
 1EA/001	ALL	edd_mbr_sig_buf_entries	Number of entries in edd_mbr_sig_buffer
 				(below)
+1EF/001	ALL	sentinel	Used to detect broken bootloaders
 290/040	ALL	edd_mbr_sig_buffer EDD MBR signatures
 2D0/A00	ALL	e820_map	E820 memory map table
 				(array of struct e820entry)
diff --git a/Documentation/xtensa/atomctl.txt b/Documentation/xtensa/atomctl.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..10a8d1ff35ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/xtensa/atomctl.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+We Have Atomic Operation Control (ATOMCTL) Register.
+This register determines the effect of using a S32C1I instruction
+with various combinations of:
+
+     1. With and without an Coherent Cache Controller which
+        can do Atomic Transactions to the memory internally.
+
+     2. With and without An Intelligent Memory Controller which
+        can do Atomic Transactions itself.
+
+The Core comes up with a default value of for the three types of cache ops:
+
+      0x28: (WB: Internal, WT: Internal, BY:Exception)
+
+On the FPGA Cards we typically simulate an Intelligent Memory controller
+which can implement  RCW transactions. For FPGA cards with an External
+Memory controller we let it to the atomic operations internally while
+doing a Cached (WB) transaction and use the Memory RCW for un-cached
+operations.
+
+For systems without an coherent cache controller, non-MX, we always
+use the memory controllers RCW, thought non-MX controlers likely
+support the Internal Operation.
+
+CUSTOMER-WARNING:
+   Virtually all customers buy their memory controllers from vendors that
+   don't support atomic RCW memory transactions and will likely want to
+   configure this register to not use RCW.
+
+Developers might find using RCW in Bypass mode convenient when testing
+with the cache being bypassed; for example studying cache alias problems.
+
+See Section 4.3.12.4 of ISA; Bits:
+
+                             WB     WT      BY
+                           5   4 | 3   2 | 1   0
+  2 Bit
+  Field
+  Values     WB - Write Back         WT - Write Thru         BY - Bypass
+---------    ---------------         -----------------     ----------------
+    0        Exception               Exception               Exception
+    1        RCW Transaction         RCW Transaction         RCW Transaction
+    2        Internal Operation      Exception               Reserved
+    3        Reserved                Reserved                Reserved
diff --git a/Documentation/xtensa/mmu.txt b/Documentation/xtensa/mmu.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2b1af7606d57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/xtensa/mmu.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+MMUv3 initialization sequence.
+
+The code in the initialize_mmu macro sets up MMUv3 memory mapping
+identically to MMUv2 fixed memory mapping. Depending on
+CONFIG_INITIALIZE_XTENSA_MMU_INSIDE_VMLINUX symbol this code is
+located in one of the following address ranges:
+
+    0xF0000000..0xFFFFFFFF (will keep same address in MMU v2 layout;
+    			 typically ROM)
+    0x00000000..0x07FFFFFF (system RAM; this code is actually linked
+    			 at 0xD0000000..0xD7FFFFFF [cached]
+    			 or 0xD8000000..0xDFFFFFFF [uncached];
+    			 in any case, initially runs elsewhere
+    			 than linked, so have to be careful)
+
+The code has the following assumptions:
+  This code fragment is run only on an MMU v3.
+  TLBs are in their reset state.
+  ITLBCFG and DTLBCFG are zero (reset state).
+  RASID is 0x04030201 (reset state).
+  PS.RING is zero (reset state).
+  LITBASE is zero (reset state, PC-relative literals); required to be PIC.
+
+TLB setup proceeds along the following steps.
+
+  Legend:
+    VA = virtual address (two upper nibbles of it);
+    PA = physical address (two upper nibbles of it);
+    pc = physical range that contains this code;
+
+After step 2, we jump to virtual address in 0x40000000..0x5fffffff
+that corresponds to next instruction to execute in this code.
+After step 4, we jump to intended (linked) address of this code.
+
+    Step 0     Step1     Step 2     Step3     Step 4     Step5
+ ============  =====  ============  =====  ============  =====
+   VA      PA     PA    VA      PA     PA    VA      PA     PA
+ ------    --     --  ------    --     --  ------    --     --
+ E0..FF -> E0  -> E0  E0..FF -> E0         F0..FF -> F0  -> F0
+ C0..DF -> C0  -> C0  C0..DF -> C0         E0..EF -> F0  -> F0
+ A0..BF -> A0  -> A0  A0..BF -> A0         D8..DF -> 00  -> 00
+ 80..9F -> 80  -> 80  80..9F -> 80         D0..D7 -> 00  -> 00
+ 60..7F -> 60  -> 60  60..7F -> 60
+ 40..5F -> 40         40..5F -> pc  -> pc  40..5F -> pc
+ 20..3F -> 20  -> 20  20..3F -> 20
+ 00..1F -> 00  -> 00  00..1F -> 00
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/CodingStyle b/Documentation/zh_CN/CodingStyle
index ecd9307a641f..654afd72eb24 100644
--- a/Documentation/zh_CN/CodingStyle
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/CodingStyle
@@ -462,13 +462,6 @@ config AUDIT
 	  logging of avc messages output).  Does not do system-call
 	  auditing without CONFIG_AUDITSYSCALL.
 
-仍然被认为不够稳定的功能应该被定义为依赖于“EXPERIMENTAL”：
-
-config SLUB
-	depends on EXPERIMENTAL && !ARCH_USES_SLAB_PAGE_STRUCT
-	bool "SLUB (Unqueued Allocator)"
-	...
-
 而那些危险的功能（比如某些文件系统的写支持）应该在它们的提示字符串里显著的声明这
 一点：
 
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/IRQ.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/IRQ.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..956026d5cf82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/IRQ.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+Chinese translated version of Documentation/IRQ.txt
+
+If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
+original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
+communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
+help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
+or if there is a problem with the translation.
+
+Maintainer: Eric W. Biederman <ebiederman@xmission.com>
+Chinese maintainer: Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+Documentation/IRQ.txt 的中文翻译
+
+如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
+交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻
+译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。
+英文版维护者： Eric W. Biederman <ebiederman@xmission.com>
+中文版维护者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版翻译者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版校译者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+
+
+以下为正文
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+何为 IRQ?
+
+一个 IRQ 是来自某个设备的一个中断请求。目前，它们可以来自一个硬件引脚，
+或来自一个数据包。多个设备可能连接到同个硬件引脚，从而共享一个 IRQ。
+
+一个 IRQ 编号是用于告知硬件中断源的内核标识。通常情况下，这是一个
+全局 irq_desc 数组的索引，但是除了在 linux/interrupt.h 中的实现，
+具体的细节是体系结构特定的。
+
+一个 IRQ 编号是设备上某个可能的中断源的枚举。通常情况下，枚举的编号是
+该引脚在系统内中断控制器的所有输入引脚中的编号。对于 ISA 总线中的情况，
+枚举的是在两个 i8259 中断控制器中 16 个输入引脚。
+
+架构可以对 IRQ 编号指定额外的含义，在硬件涉及任何手工配置的情况下，
+是被提倡的。ISA 的 IRQ 是一个分配这类额外含义的典型例子。
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches
index 0f4385a62a49..be0bd4725062 100644
--- a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Majordomo lists of VGER.KERNEL.ORG at:
         <http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html>
 
 如果改动影响了用户空间和内核之间的接口，请给 MAN-PAGES 的维护者（列在
-MAITAINERS 文件里的）发送一个手册页（man-pages）补丁，或者至少通知一下改
+MAINTAINERS 文件里的）发送一个手册页（man-pages）补丁，或者至少通知一下改
 变，让一些信息有途径进入手册页。
 
 即使在第四步的时候，维护者没有作出回应，也要确认在修改他们的代码的时候
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/arm/Booting b/Documentation/zh_CN/arm/Booting
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6158a64df80c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/arm/Booting
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+Chinese translated version of Documentation/arm/Booting
+
+If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
+original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
+communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
+help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
+or if there is a problem with the translation.
+
+Maintainer: Russell King <linux@arm.linux.org.uk>
+Chinese maintainer: Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+Documentation/arm/Booting 的中文翻译
+
+如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
+交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻
+译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。
+
+英文版维护者： Russell King <linux@arm.linux.org.uk>
+中文版维护者： 傅炜  Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版翻译者： 傅炜  Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版校译者： 傅炜  Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+
+以下为正文
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+			启动 ARM Linux
+			==============
+
+作者：Russell King
+日期：2002年5月18日
+
+以下文档适用于 2.4.18-rmk6 及以上版本。
+
+为了启动 ARM Linux，你需要一个引导装载程序（boot loader），
+它是一个在主内核启动前运行的一个小程序。引导装载程序需要初始化各种
+设备，并最终调用 Linux 内核，将信息传递给内核。
+
+从本质上讲，引导装载程序应提供（至少）以下功能：
+
+1、设置和初始化 RAM。
+2、初始化一个串口。
+3、检测机器的类型（machine type）。
+4、设置内核标签列表（tagged list）。
+5、调用内核映像。
+
+
+1、设置和初始化 RAM
+-------------------
+
+现有的引导加载程序:		强制
+新开发的引导加载程序:		强制
+
+引导装载程序应该找到并初始化系统中所有内核用于保持系统变量数据的 RAM。
+这个操作的执行是设备依赖的。（它可能使用内部算法来自动定位和计算所有
+RAM，或可能使用对这个设备已知的 RAM 信息，还可能使用任何引导装载程序
+设计者想到的匹配方法。）
+
+
+2、初始化一个串口
+-----------------------------
+
+现有的引导加载程序:		可选、建议
+新开发的引导加载程序:		可选、建议
+
+引导加载程序应该初始化并使能一个目标板上的串口。这允许内核串口驱动
+自动检测哪个串口用于内核控制台。(一般用于调试或与目标板通信。)
+
+作为替代方案，引导加载程序也可以通过标签列表传递相关的'console='
+选项给内核以指定某个串口，而串口数据格式的选项在以下文档中描述：
+
+       Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt。
+
+
+3、检测机器类型
+--------------------------
+
+现有的引导加载程序:		可选
+新开发的引导加载程序:		强制
+
+引导加载程序应该通过某些方式检测自身所处的机器类型。这是一个硬件
+代码或通过查看所连接的硬件用某些算法得到，这些超出了本文档的范围。
+引导加载程序最终必须能提供一个 MACH_TYPE_xxx 值给内核。
+(详见 linux/arch/arm/tools/mach-types )。
+
+4、设置启动数据
+------------------
+
+现有的引导加载程序:		可选、强烈建议
+新开发的引导加载程序:		强制
+
+引导加载程序必须提供标签列表或者 dtb 映像以传递配置数据给内核。启动
+数据的物理地址通过寄存器 r2 传递给内核。
+
+4a、设置内核标签列表
+--------------------------------
+
+bootloader 必须创建和初始化内核标签列表。一个有效的标签列表以
+ATAG_CORE 标签开始，并以 ATAG_NONE 标签结束。ATAG_CORE 标签可以是
+空的，也可以是非空。一个空 ATAG_CORE 标签其 size 域设置为
+‘2’(0x00000002)。ATAG_NONE 标签的 size 域必须设置为零。
+
+在列表中可以保存任意数量的标签。对于一个重复的标签是追加到之前标签
+所携带的信息之后，还是会覆盖原来的信息，是未定义的。某些标签的行为
+是前者，其他是后者。
+
+bootloader 必须传递一个系统内存的位置和最小值，以及根文件系统位置。
+因此，最小的标签列表如下所示：
+
+		+-----------+
+基地址 ->	| ATAG_CORE |  |
+		+-----------+  |
+		| ATAG_MEM  |  | 地址增长方向
+		+-----------+  |
+		| ATAG_NONE |  |
+		+-----------+  v
+
+标签列表应该保存在系统的 RAM 中。
+
+标签列表必须置于内核自解压和 initrd'bootp' 程序都不会覆盖的内存区。
+建议放在 RAM 的头 16KiB 中。
+
+4b、设置设备树
+-------------------------
+
+bootloader 必须以 64bit 地址对齐的形式加载一个设备树映像(dtb)到系统
+RAM 中，并用启动数据初始化它。dtb 格式在文档
+Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt 中。内核将会在
+dtb 物理地址处查找 dtb 魔数值（0xd00dfeed），以确定 dtb 是否已经代替
+标签列表被传递进来。
+
+bootloader 必须传递一个系统内存的位置和最小值，以及根文件系统位置。
+dtb 必须置于内核自解压不会覆盖的内存区。建议将其放置于 RAM 的头 16KiB
+中。但是不可将其放置于“0”物理地址处，因为内核认为：r2 中为 0，意味着
+没有标签列表和 dtb 传递过来。
+
+5、调用内核映像
+---------------------------
+
+现有的引导加载程序:		强制
+新开发的引导加载程序:		强制
+
+调用内核映像 zImage 有两个选择。如果 zImge 保存在 flash 中，且是为了
+在 flash 中直接运行而被正确链接的。这样引导加载程序就可以在 flash 中
+直接调用 zImage。
+
+zImage 也可以被放在系统 RAM（任意位置）中被调用。注意：内核使用映像
+基地址的前 16KB RAM 空间来保存页表。建议将映像置于 RAM 的 32KB 处。
+
+对于以上任意一种情况，都必须符合以下启动状态：
+
+- 停止所有 DMA 设备，这样内存数据就不会因为虚假网络包或磁盘数据而被破坏。
+  这可能可以节省你许多的调试时间。
+
+- CPU 寄存器配置
+  r0 = 0，
+  r1 = （在上面 3 中获取的）机器类型码。
+  r2 = 标签列表在系统 RAM 中的物理地址，或
+       设备树块(dtb)在系统 RAM 中的物理地址
+
+- CPU 模式
+  所有形式的中断必须被禁止 (IRQs 和 FIQs)
+  CPU 必须处于 SVC 模式。(对于 Angel 调试有特例存在)
+
+- 缓存，MMUs
+  MMU 必须关闭。
+  指令缓存开启或关闭都可以。
+  数据缓存必须关闭。
+
+- 引导加载程序应该通过直接跳转到内核映像的第一条指令来调用内核映像。
+
+  对于支持 ARM 指令集的 CPU，跳入内核入口时必须处在 ARM 状态，即使
+  对于 Thumb-2 内核也是如此。
+
+  对于仅支持 Thumb 指令集的 CPU，比如 Cortex-M 系列的 CPU，跳入
+  内核入口时必须处于 Thumb 状态。
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cd7fc8f34cf9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,284 @@
+Chinese translated version of Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt
+
+If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
+original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
+communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
+help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
+or if there is a problem with the translation.
+
+Maintainer: Nicolas Pitre <nicolas.pitre@linaro.org>
+		Dave Martin <dave.martin@linaro.org>
+Chinese maintainer: Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt 的中文翻译
+
+如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
+交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻
+译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。
+英文版维护者： Nicolas Pitre <nicolas.pitre@linaro.org>
+		Dave Martin <dave.martin@linaro.org>
+中文版维护者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版翻译者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版校译者： 宋冬生 Dongsheng Song <dongshneg.song@gmail.com>
+		傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+
+
+以下为正文
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+内核提供的用户空间辅助代码
+=========================
+
+在内核内存空间的固定地址处，有一个由内核提供并可从用户空间访问的代码
+段。它用于向用户空间提供因在许多 ARM CPU 中未实现的特性和/或指令而需
+内核提供帮助的某些操作。这些代码直接在用户模式下执行的想法是为了获得
+最佳效率，但那些与内核计数器联系过于紧密的部分，则被留给了用户库实现。
+事实上，此代码甚至可能因不同的 CPU 而异，这取决于其可用的指令集或它
+是否为 SMP 系统。换句话说，内核保留在不作出警告的情况下根据需要更改
+这些代码的权利。只有本文档描述的入口及其结果是保证稳定的。
+
+这与完全成熟的 VDSO 实现不同（但两者并不冲突），尽管如此，VDSO 可阻止
+某些通过常量高效跳转到那些代码段的汇编技巧。且由于那些代码段在返回用户
+代码前仅使用少量的代码周期，则一个 VDSO 间接远程调用将会在这些简单的
+操作上增加一个可测量的开销。
+
+在对那些拥有原生支持的新型处理器进行代码优化时，仅在已为其他操作使用
+了类似的新增指令，而导致二进制结果已与早期 ARM 处理器不兼容的情况下，
+用户空间才应绕过这些辅助代码，并在内联函数中实现这些操作（无论是通过
+编译器在代码中直接放置，还是作为库函数调用实现的一部分）。也就是说，
+如果你编译的代码不会为了其他目的使用新指令，则不要仅为了避免使用这些
+内核辅助代码，导致二进制程序无法在早期处理器上运行。
+
+新的辅助代码可能随着时间的推移而增加，所以新内核中的某些辅助代码在旧
+内核中可能不存在。因此，程序必须在对任何辅助代码调用假设是安全之前，
+检测 __kuser_helper_version 的值（见下文）。理想情况下，这种检测应该
+只在进程启动时执行一次；如果内核版本不支持所需辅助代码，则该进程可尽早
+中止执行。
+
+kuser_helper_version
+--------------------
+
+位置:	0xffff0ffc
+
+参考声明:
+
+  extern int32_t __kuser_helper_version;
+
+定义:
+
+  这个区域包含了当前运行内核实现的辅助代码版本号。用户空间可以通过读
+  取此版本号以确定特定的辅助代码是否存在。
+
+使用范例:
+
+#define __kuser_helper_version (*(int32_t *)0xffff0ffc)
+
+void check_kuser_version(void)
+{
+	if (__kuser_helper_version < 2) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "can't do atomic operations, kernel too old\n");
+		abort();
+	}
+}
+
+注意:
+
+  用户空间可以假设这个域的值不会在任何单个进程的生存期内改变。也就
+  是说，这个域可以仅在库的初始化阶段或进程启动阶段读取一次。
+
+kuser_get_tls
+-------------
+
+位置:	0xffff0fe0
+
+参考原型:
+
+  void * __kuser_get_tls(void);
+
+输入:
+
+  lr = 返回地址
+
+输出:
+
+  r0 = TLS 值
+
+被篡改的寄存器:
+
+  无
+
+定义:
+
+  获取之前通过 __ARM_NR_set_tls 系统调用设置的 TLS 值。
+
+使用范例:
+
+typedef void * (__kuser_get_tls_t)(void);
+#define __kuser_get_tls (*(__kuser_get_tls_t *)0xffff0fe0)
+
+void foo()
+{
+	void *tls = __kuser_get_tls();
+	printf("TLS = %p\n", tls);
+}
+
+注意:
+
+  - 仅在 __kuser_helper_version >= 1 时，此辅助代码存在
+    （从内核版本 2.6.12 开始）。
+
+kuser_cmpxchg
+-------------
+
+位置:	0xffff0fc0
+
+参考原型:
+
+  int __kuser_cmpxchg(int32_t oldval, int32_t newval, volatile int32_t *ptr);
+
+输入:
+
+  r0 = oldval
+  r1 = newval
+  r2 = ptr
+  lr = 返回地址
+
+输出:
+
+  r0 = 成功代码 (零或非零)
+  C flag = 如果 r0 == 0 则置 1，如果 r0 != 0 则清零。
+
+被篡改的寄存器:
+
+  r3, ip, flags
+
+定义:
+
+  仅在 *ptr 为 oldval 时原子保存 newval 于 *ptr 中。
+  如果 *ptr 被改变，则返回值为零，否则为非零值。
+  如果 *ptr 被改变，则 C flag 也会被置 1，以实现调用代码中的汇编
+  优化。
+
+使用范例:
+
+typedef int (__kuser_cmpxchg_t)(int oldval, int newval, volatile int *ptr);
+#define __kuser_cmpxchg (*(__kuser_cmpxchg_t *)0xffff0fc0)
+
+int atomic_add(volatile int *ptr, int val)
+{
+	int old, new;
+
+	do {
+		old = *ptr;
+		new = old + val;
+	} while(__kuser_cmpxchg(old, new, ptr));
+
+	return new;
+}
+
+注意:
+
+  - 这个例程已根据需要包含了内存屏障。
+
+  - 仅在 __kuser_helper_version >= 2 时，此辅助代码存在
+    （从内核版本 2.6.12 开始）。
+
+kuser_memory_barrier
+--------------------
+
+位置:	0xffff0fa0
+
+参考原型:
+
+  void __kuser_memory_barrier(void);
+
+输入:
+
+  lr = 返回地址
+
+输出:
+
+  无
+
+被篡改的寄存器:
+
+  无
+
+定义:
+
+  应用于任何需要内存屏障以防止手动数据修改带来的一致性问题，以及
+  __kuser_cmpxchg 中。
+
+使用范例:
+
+typedef void (__kuser_dmb_t)(void);
+#define __kuser_dmb (*(__kuser_dmb_t *)0xffff0fa0)
+
+注意:
+
+  - 仅在 __kuser_helper_version >= 3 时，此辅助代码存在
+    （从内核版本 2.6.15 开始）。
+
+kuser_cmpxchg64
+---------------
+
+位置:	0xffff0f60
+
+参考原型:
+
+  int __kuser_cmpxchg64(const int64_t *oldval,
+                        const int64_t *newval,
+                        volatile int64_t *ptr);
+
+输入:
+
+  r0 = 指向 oldval
+  r1 = 指向 newval
+  r2 = 指向目标值
+  lr = 返回地址
+
+输出:
+
+  r0 = 成功代码 (零或非零)
+  C flag = 如果 r0 == 0 则置 1，如果 r0 != 0 则清零。
+
+被篡改的寄存器:
+
+  r3, lr, flags
+
+定义:
+
+  仅在 *ptr 等于 *oldval 指向的 64 位值时，原子保存 *newval
+  指向的 64 位值于 *ptr 中。如果 *ptr 被改变，则返回值为零，
+  否则为非零值。
+
+  如果 *ptr 被改变，则 C flag 也会被置 1，以实现调用代码中的汇编
+  优化。
+
+使用范例:
+
+typedef int (__kuser_cmpxchg64_t)(const int64_t *oldval,
+                                  const int64_t *newval,
+                                  volatile int64_t *ptr);
+#define __kuser_cmpxchg64 (*(__kuser_cmpxchg64_t *)0xffff0f60)
+
+int64_t atomic_add64(volatile int64_t *ptr, int64_t val)
+{
+	int64_t old, new;
+
+	do {
+		old = *ptr;
+		new = old + val;
+	} while(__kuser_cmpxchg64(&old, &new, ptr));
+
+	return new;
+}
+
+注意:
+
+  - 这个例程已根据需要包含了内存屏障。
+
+  - 由于这个过程的代码长度（此辅助代码跨越 2 个常规的 kuser “槽”），
+    因此 0xffff0f80 不被作为有效的入口点。
+
+  - 仅在 __kuser_helper_version >= 5 时，此辅助代码存在
+    （从内核版本 3.1 开始）。
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/arm64/booting.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/arm64/booting.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..28fa325b7461
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/arm64/booting.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+Chinese translated version of Documentation/arm64/booting.txt
+
+If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
+original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
+communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
+help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
+or if there is a problem with the translation.
+
+Maintainer: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com>
+Chinese maintainer: Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+Documentation/arm64/booting.txt 的中文翻译
+
+如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
+交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻
+译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。
+
+英文版维护者： Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com>
+中文版维护者： 傅炜  Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版翻译者： 傅炜  Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版校译者： 傅炜  Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+
+以下为正文
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+			启动 AArch64 Linux
+			==================
+
+作者: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com>
+日期: 2012 年 09 月 07 日
+
+本文档基于 Russell King 的 ARM 启动文档，且适用于所有公开发布的
+AArch64 Linux 内核代码。
+
+AArch64 异常模型由多个异常级别（EL0 - EL3）组成，对于 EL0 和 EL1
+异常级有对应的安全和非安全模式。EL2 是系统管理级，且仅存在于
+非安全模式下。EL3 是最高特权级，且仅存在于安全模式下。
+
+基于本文档的目的，我们将简单地使用‘引导装载程序’（‘boot loader’）
+这个术语来定义在将控制权交给 Linux 内核前 CPU 上执行的所有软件。
+这可能包含安全监控和系统管理代码，或者它可能只是一些用于准备最小启动
+环境的指令。
+
+基本上，引导装载程序（至少）应实现以下操作：
+
+1、设置和初始化 RAM
+2、设置设备树数据
+3、解压内核映像
+4、调用内核映像
+
+
+1、设置和初始化 RAM
+-----------------
+
+必要性: 强制
+
+引导装载程序应该找到并初始化系统中所有内核用于保持系统变量数据的 RAM。
+这个操作的执行是设备依赖的。（它可能使用内部算法来自动定位和计算所有
+RAM，或可能使用对这个设备已知的 RAM 信息，还可能使用任何引导装载程序
+设计者想到的匹配方法。）
+
+
+2、设置设备树数据
+---------------
+
+必要性: 强制
+
+设备树数据块（dtb）大小必须不大于 2 MB，且位于从内核映像起始算起第一个
+512MB 内的 2MB 边界上。这使得内核可以通过初始页表中的单个节描述符来
+映射此数据块。
+
+
+3、解压内核映像
+-------------
+
+必要性: 可选
+
+AArch64 内核当前没有提供自解压代码，因此如果使用了压缩内核映像文件
+（比如 Image.gz），则需要通过引导装载程序（使用 gzip 等）来进行解压。
+若引导装载程序没有实现这个需求，就要使用非压缩内核映像文件。
+
+
+4、调用内核映像
+-------------
+
+必要性: 强制
+
+已解压的内核映像包含一个 32 字节的头，内容如下：
+
+  u32 magic	= 0x14000008;	/* 跳转到 stext, 小端 */
+  u32 res0	= 0;		/* 保留 */
+  u64 text_offset;		/* 映像装载偏移 */
+  u64 res1	= 0;		/* 保留 */
+  u64 res2	= 0;		/* 保留 */
+
+映像必须位于系统 RAM 起始处的特定偏移（当前是 0x80000）。系统 RAM
+的起始地址必须是以 2MB 对齐的。
+
+在跳转入内核前，必须符合以下状态：
+
+- 停止所有 DMA 设备，这样内存数据就不会因为虚假网络包或磁盘数据而
+  被破坏。这可能可以节省你许多的调试时间。
+
+- 主 CPU 通用寄存器设置
+  x0 = 系统 RAM 中设备树数据块（dtb）的物理地址。
+  x1 = 0 (保留，将来可能使用)
+  x2 = 0 (保留，将来可能使用)
+  x3 = 0 (保留，将来可能使用)
+
+- CPU 模式
+  所有形式的中断必须在 PSTATE.DAIF 中被屏蔽（Debug、SError、IRQ
+  和 FIQ）。
+  CPU 必须处于 EL2（推荐，可访问虚拟化扩展）或非安全 EL1 模式下。
+
+- 高速缓存、MMU
+  MMU 必须关闭。
+  指令缓存开启或关闭都可以。
+  数据缓存必须关闭且无效。
+  外部高速缓存（如果存在）必须配置并禁用。
+
+- 架构计时器
+  CNTFRQ 必须设定为计时器的频率。
+  如果在 EL1 模式下进入内核，则 CNTHCTL_EL2 中的 EL1PCTEN (bit 0)
+  必须置位。
+
+- 一致性
+  通过内核启动的所有 CPU 在内核入口地址上必须处于相同的一致性域中。
+  这可能要根据具体实现来定义初始化过程，以使能每个CPU上对维护操作的
+  接收。
+
+- 系统寄存器
+  在进入内核映像的异常级中，所有构架中可写的系统寄存器必须通过软件
+  在一个更高的异常级别下初始化，以防止在 未知 状态下运行。
+
+引导装载程序必须在每个 CPU 处于以下状态时跳入内核入口：
+
+- 主 CPU 必须直接跳入内核映像的第一条指令。通过此 CPU 传递的设备树
+  数据块必须在每个 CPU 节点中包含以下内容：
+
+    1、‘enable-method’属性。目前，此字段支持的值仅为字符串“spin-table”。
+
+    2、‘cpu-release-addr’标识一个 64-bit、初始化为零的内存位置。
+
+  引导装载程序必须生成这些设备树属性，并在跳入内核入口之前将其插入
+  数据块。
+
+- 任何辅助 CPU 必须在内存保留区（通过设备树中的 /memreserve/ 域传递
+  给内核）中自旋于内核之外，轮询它们的 cpu-release-addr 位置（必须
+  包含在保留区中）。可通过插入 wfe 指令来降低忙循环开销，而主 CPU 将
+  发出 sev 指令。当对 cpu-release-addr 所指位置的读取操作返回非零值
+  时，CPU 必须直接跳入此值所指向的地址。
+
+- 辅助 CPU 通用寄存器设置
+  x0 = 0 (保留，将来可能使用)
+  x1 = 0 (保留，将来可能使用)
+  x2 = 0 (保留，将来可能使用)
+  x3 = 0 (保留，将来可能使用)
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/arm64/memory.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/arm64/memory.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a5f6283829f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/arm64/memory.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+Chinese translated version of Documentation/arm64/memory.txt
+
+If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
+original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
+communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
+help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
+or if there is a problem with the translation.
+
+Maintainer: Catalin Marinas <catalin.marinas@arm.com>
+Chinese maintainer: Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+Documentation/arm64/memory.txt 的中文翻译
+
+如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
+交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻
+译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。
+
+英文版维护者： Catalin Marinas <catalin.marinas@arm.com>
+中文版维护者： 傅炜  Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版翻译者： 傅炜  Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版校译者： 傅炜  Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+
+以下为正文
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+		     Linux 在 AArch64 中的内存布局
+		     ===========================
+
+作者: Catalin Marinas <catalin.marinas@arm.com>
+日期: 2012 年 02 月 20 日
+
+本文档描述 AArch64 Linux 内核所使用的虚拟内存布局。此构架可以实现
+页大小为 4KB 的 4 级转换表和页大小为 64KB 的 3 级转换表。
+
+AArch64 Linux 使用页大小为 4KB 的 3 级转换表配置，对于用户和内核
+都有 39-bit (512GB) 的虚拟地址空间。对于页大小为 64KB的配置，仅
+使用 2 级转换表，但内存布局相同。
+
+用户地址空间的 63:39 位为 0，而内核地址空间的相应位为 1。TTBRx 的
+选择由虚拟地址的 63 位给出。swapper_pg_dir 仅包含内核（全局）映射，
+而用户 pgd 仅包含用户（非全局）映射。swapper_pgd_dir 地址被写入
+TTBR1 中，且从不写入 TTBR0。
+
+
+AArch64 Linux 内存布局：
+
+起始地址			结束地址			大小		用途
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+0000000000000000	0000007fffffffff	 512GB		用户空间
+
+ffffff8000000000	ffffffbbfffeffff	~240GB		vmalloc
+
+ffffffbbffff0000	ffffffbbffffffff	  64KB		[防护页]
+
+ffffffbc00000000	ffffffbdffffffff	   8GB		vmemmap
+
+ffffffbe00000000	ffffffbffbbfffff	  ~8GB		[防护页，未来用于 vmmemap]
+
+ffffffbffbe00000	ffffffbffbe0ffff	  64KB		PCI I/O 空间
+
+ffffffbbffff0000	ffffffbcffffffff	  ~2MB		[防护页]
+
+ffffffbffc000000	ffffffbfffffffff	  64MB		模块
+
+ffffffc000000000	ffffffffffffffff	 256GB		内核逻辑内存映射
+
+
+4KB 页大小的转换表查找：
+
++--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+|63    56|55    48|47    40|39    32|31    24|23    16|15     8|7      0|
++--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+ |                 |         |         |         |         |
+ |                 |         |         |         |         v
+ |                 |         |         |         |   [11:0]  页内偏移
+ |                 |         |         |         +-> [20:12] L3 索引
+ |                 |         |         +-----------> [29:21] L2 索引
+ |                 |         +---------------------> [38:30] L1 索引
+ |                 +-------------------------------> [47:39] L0 索引 (未使用)
+ +-------------------------------------------------> [63] TTBR0/1
+
+
+64KB 页大小的转换表查找：
+
++--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+|63    56|55    48|47    40|39    32|31    24|23    16|15     8|7      0|
++--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+ |                 |    |               |              |
+ |                 |    |               |              v
+ |                 |    |               |            [15:0]  页内偏移
+ |                 |    |               +----------> [28:16] L3 索引
+ |                 |    +--------------------------> [41:29] L2 索引 (仅使用 38:29 )
+ |                 +-------------------------------> [47:42] L1 索引 (未使用)
+ +-------------------------------------------------> [63] TTBR0/1
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/basic_profiling.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/basic_profiling.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1e6bf0bdf8f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/basic_profiling.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+Chinese translated version of Documentation/basic_profiling
+
+If you have any comment or update to the content, please post to LKML directly.
+However, if you have problem communicating in English you can also ask the
+Chinese maintainer for help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer, if this
+translation is outdated or there is problem with translation.
+
+Chinese maintainer: Liang Xie <xieliang@xiaomi.com>
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+Documentation/basic_profiling的中文翻译
+
+如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接发信到LKML。如果你使用英文交流有困难的话，也可
+以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。
+
+中文版维护者： 谢良 Liang Xie <xieliang007@gmail.com>
+中文版翻译者： 谢良 Liang Xie <xieliang007@gmail.com>
+中文版校译者：
+以下为正文
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+下面这些说明指令都是非常基础的，如果你想进一步了解请阅读相关专业文档：）
+请不要再在本文档增加新的内容，但可以修复文档中的错误：）(mbligh@aracnet.com)
+感谢John Levon，Dave Hansen等在撰写时的帮助
+
+<test> 用于表示要测量的目标
+请先确保您已经有正确的System.map / vmlinux配置！
+
+对于linux系统来说，配置vmlinuz最容易的方法可能就是使用“make install”，然后修改
+/sbin/installkernel将vmlinux拷贝到/boot目录，而System.map通常是默认安装好的
+
+Readprofile
+-----------
+2.6系列内核需要版本相对较新的readprofile，比如util-linux 2.12a中包含的，可以从:
+
+http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util-linux/ 下载
+
+大部分linux发行版已经包含了.
+
+启用readprofile需要在kernel启动命令行增加”profile=2“
+
+clear		readprofile -r
+		<test>
+dump output	readprofile -m /boot/System.map > captured_profile
+
+Oprofile
+--------
+
+从http://oprofile.sourceforge.net/获取源代码（请参考Changes以获取匹配的版本）
+在kernel启动命令行增加“idle=poll”
+
+配置CONFIG_PROFILING=y和CONFIG_OPROFILE=y然后重启进入新kernel
+
+./configure --with-kernel-support
+make install
+
+想得到好的测量结果，请确保启用了本地APIC特性。如果opreport显示有0Hz CPU，
+说明APIC特性没有开启。另外注意idle=poll选项可能有损性能。
+
+One time setup:
+		opcontrol --setup --vmlinux=/boot/vmlinux
+
+clear		opcontrol --reset
+start		opcontrol --start
+		<test>
+stop		opcontrol --stop
+dump output	opreport >  output_file
+
+如果只看kernel相关的报告结果，请运行命令 opreport -l /boot/vmlinux > output_file
+
+通过reset选项可以清理过期统计数据，相当于重启的效果。
+
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/filesystems/sysfs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e230eaa33122
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/filesystems/sysfs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,372 @@
+Chinese translated version of Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt
+
+If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
+original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
+communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
+help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
+or if there is a problem with the translation.
+
+Maintainer: Patrick Mochel	<mochel@osdl.org>
+		Mike Murphy <mamurph@cs.clemson.edu>
+Chinese maintainer: Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt 的中文翻译
+
+如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
+交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻
+译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。
+英文版维护者： Patrick Mochel	<mochel@osdl.org>
+		Mike Murphy <mamurph@cs.clemson.edu>
+中文版维护者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版翻译者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版校译者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+
+
+以下为正文
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+sysfs - 用于导出内核对象(kobject)的文件系统
+
+Patrick Mochel	<mochel@osdl.org>
+Mike Murphy <mamurph@cs.clemson.edu>
+
+修订:    16 August 2011
+原始版本:   10 January 2003
+
+
+sysfs 简介:
+~~~~~~~~~~
+
+sysfs 是一个最初基于 ramfs 且位于内存的文件系统。它提供导出内核
+数据结构及其属性，以及它们之间的关联到用户空间的方法。
+
+sysfs 始终与 kobject 的底层结构紧密相关。请阅读
+Documentation/kobject.txt 文档以获得更多关于 kobject 接口的
+信息。
+
+
+使用 sysfs
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+只要内核配置中定义了 CONFIG_SYSFS ，sysfs 总是被编译进内核。你可
+通过以下命令挂载它:
+
+    mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys
+
+
+创建目录
+~~~~~~~~
+
+任何 kobject 在系统中注册，就会有一个目录在 sysfs 中被创建。这个
+目录是作为该 kobject 的父对象所在目录的子目录创建的，以准确地传递
+内核的对象层次到用户空间。sysfs 中的顶层目录代表着内核对象层次的
+共同祖先；例如：某些对象属于某个子系统。
+
+Sysfs 在与其目录关联的 sysfs_dirent 对象中内部保存一个指向实现
+目录的 kobject 的指针。以前，这个 kobject 指针被 sysfs 直接用于
+kobject 文件打开和关闭的引用计数。而现在的 sysfs 实现中，kobject
+引用计数只能通过 sysfs_schedule_callback() 函数直接修改。
+
+
+属性
+~~~~
+
+kobject 的属性可在文件系统中以普通文件的形式导出。Sysfs 为属性定义
+了面向文件 I/O 操作的方法，以提供对内核属性的读写。
+
+
+属性应为 ASCII 码文本文件。以一个文件只存储一个属性值为宜。但一个
+文件只包含一个属性值可能影响效率，所以一个包含相同数据类型的属性值
+数组也被广泛地接受。
+
+混合类型、表达多行数据以及一些怪异的数据格式会遭到强烈反对。这样做是
+很丢脸的,而且其代码会在未通知作者的情况下被重写。
+
+
+一个简单的属性结构定义如下:
+
+struct attribute {
+        char                    * name;
+        struct module		*owner;
+        umode_t                 mode;
+};
+
+
+int sysfs_create_file(struct kobject * kobj, const struct attribute * attr);
+void sysfs_remove_file(struct kobject * kobj, const struct attribute * attr);
+
+
+一个单独的属性结构并不包含读写其属性值的方法。子系统最好为增删特定
+对象类型的属性定义自己的属性结构体和封装函数。
+
+例如:驱动程序模型定义的 device_attribute 结构体如下:
+
+struct device_attribute {
+	struct attribute	attr;
+	ssize_t (*show)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+			char *buf);
+	ssize_t (*store)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+			 const char *buf, size_t count);
+};
+
+int device_create_file(struct device *, const struct device_attribute *);
+void device_remove_file(struct device *, const struct device_attribute *);
+
+为了定义设备属性，同时定义了一下辅助宏:
+
+#define DEVICE_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store) \
+struct device_attribute dev_attr_##_name = __ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store)
+
+例如:声明
+
+static DEVICE_ATTR(foo, S_IWUSR | S_IRUGO, show_foo, store_foo);
+
+等同于如下代码：
+
+static struct device_attribute dev_attr_foo = {
+       .attr	= {
+		.name = "foo",
+		.mode = S_IWUSR | S_IRUGO,
+		.show = show_foo,
+		.store = store_foo,
+	},
+};
+
+
+子系统特有的回调函数
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+当一个子系统定义一个新的属性类型时，必须实现一系列的 sysfs 操作，
+以帮助读写调用实现属性所有者的显示和储存方法。
+
+struct sysfs_ops {
+        ssize_t (*show)(struct kobject *, struct attribute *, char *);
+        ssize_t (*store)(struct kobject *, struct attribute *, const char *, size_t);
+};
+
+[子系统应已经定义了一个 struct kobj_type 结构体作为这个类型的
+描述符，并在此保存 sysfs_ops 的指针。更多的信息参见 kobject 的
+文档]
+
+sysfs 会为这个类型调用适当的方法。当一个文件被读写时，这个方法会
+将一般的kobject 和 attribute 结构体指针转换为适当的指针类型后
+调用相关联的函数。
+
+
+示例:
+
+#define to_dev(obj) container_of(obj, struct device, kobj)
+#define to_dev_attr(_attr) container_of(_attr, struct device_attribute, attr)
+
+static ssize_t dev_attr_show(struct kobject *kobj, struct attribute *attr,
+                             char *buf)
+{
+        struct device_attribute *dev_attr = to_dev_attr(attr);
+        struct device *dev = to_dev(kobj);
+        ssize_t ret = -EIO;
+
+        if (dev_attr->show)
+                ret = dev_attr->show(dev, dev_attr, buf);
+        if (ret >= (ssize_t)PAGE_SIZE) {
+                print_symbol("dev_attr_show: %s returned bad count\n",
+                                (unsigned long)dev_attr->show);
+        }
+        return ret;
+}
+
+
+
+读写属性数据
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+在声明属性时，必须指定 show() 或 store() 方法，以实现属性的
+读或写。这些方法的类型应该和以下的设备属性定义一样简单。
+
+ssize_t (*show)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, char *buf);
+ssize_t (*store)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+                 const char *buf, size_t count);
+
+也就是说,他们应只以一个处理对象、一个属性和一个缓冲指针作为参数。
+
+sysfs 会分配一个大小为 (PAGE_SIZE) 的缓冲区并传递给这个方法。
+Sysfs 将会为每次读写操作调用一次这个方法。这使得这些方法在执行时
+会出现以下的行为:
+
+- 在读方面（read(2)），show() 方法应该填充整个缓冲区。回想属性
+  应只导出了一个属性值或是一个同类型属性值的数组，所以这个代价将
+  不会不太高。
+
+  这使得用户空间可以局部地读和任意的向前搜索整个文件。如果用户空间
+  向后搜索到零或使用‘0’偏移执行一个pread(2)操作，show()方法将
+  再次被调用，以重新填充缓存。
+
+- 在写方面（write(2)），sysfs 希望在第一次写操作时得到整个缓冲区。
+  之后 Sysfs 传递整个缓冲区给 store() 方法。
+
+  当要写 sysfs 文件时，用户空间进程应首先读取整个文件，修该想要
+  改变的值，然后回写整个缓冲区。
+
+  在读写属性值时，属性方法的执行应操作相同的缓冲区。
+
+注记:
+
+- 写操作导致的 show() 方法重载，会忽略当前文件位置。
+
+- 缓冲区应总是 PAGE_SIZE 大小。对于i386，这个值为4096。
+
+- show() 方法应该返回写入缓冲区的字节数，也就是 snprintf()的
+  返回值。
+
+- show() 应始终使用 snprintf()。
+
+- store() 应返回缓冲区的已用字节数。如果整个缓存都已填满，只需返回
+  count 参数。
+
+- show() 或 store() 可以返回错误值。当得到一个非法值，必须返回一个
+  错误值。
+
+- 一个传递给方法的对象将会通过 sysfs 调用对象内嵌的引用计数固定在
+  内存中。尽管如此，对象代表的物理实体(如设备)可能已不存在。如有必要，
+  应该实现一个检测机制。
+
+一个简单的(未经实验证实的)设备属性实现如下：
+
+static ssize_t show_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+                         char *buf)
+{
+	return scnprintf(buf, PAGE_SIZE, "%s\n", dev->name);
+}
+
+static ssize_t store_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+                          const char *buf, size_t count)
+{
+        snprintf(dev->name, sizeof(dev->name), "%.*s",
+                 (int)min(count, sizeof(dev->name) - 1), buf);
+	return count;
+}
+
+static DEVICE_ATTR(name, S_IRUGO, show_name, store_name);
+
+
+（注意：真正的实现不允许用户空间设置设备名。）
+
+顶层目录布局
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+sysfs 目录的安排显示了内核数据结构之间的关系。
+
+顶层 sysfs 目录如下:
+
+block/
+bus/
+class/
+dev/
+devices/
+firmware/
+net/
+fs/
+
+devices/ 包含了一个设备树的文件系统表示。他直接映射了内部的内核
+设备树，反映了设备的层次结构。
+
+bus/ 包含了内核中各种总线类型的平面目录布局。每个总线目录包含两个
+子目录:
+
+	devices/
+	drivers/
+
+devices/ 包含了系统中出现的每个设备的符号链接，他们指向 root/ 下的
+设备目录。
+
+drivers/ 包含了每个已为特定总线上的设备而挂载的驱动程序的目录(这里
+假定驱动没有跨越多个总线类型)。
+
+fs/ 包含了一个为文件系统设立的目录。现在每个想要导出属性的文件系统必须
+在 fs/ 下创建自己的层次结构(参见Documentation/filesystems/fuse.txt)。
+
+dev/ 包含两个子目录： char/ 和 block/。在这两个子目录中，有以
+<major>:<minor> 格式命名的符号链接。这些符号链接指向 sysfs 目录
+中相应的设备。/sys/dev 提供一个通过一个 stat(2) 操作结果，查找
+设备 sysfs 接口快捷的方法。
+
+更多有关 driver-model 的特性信息可以在 Documentation/driver-model/
+中找到。
+
+
+TODO: 完成这一节。
+
+
+当前接口
+~~~~~~~~
+
+以下的接口层普遍存在于当前的sysfs中:
+
+- 设备 (include/linux/device.h)
+----------------------------------
+结构体:
+
+struct device_attribute {
+	struct attribute	attr;
+	ssize_t (*show)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+			char *buf);
+	ssize_t (*store)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+			 const char *buf, size_t count);
+};
+
+声明:
+
+DEVICE_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store);
+
+增/删属性:
+
+int device_create_file(struct device *dev, const struct device_attribute * attr);
+void device_remove_file(struct device *dev, const struct device_attribute * attr);
+
+
+- 总线驱动程序 (include/linux/device.h)
+--------------------------------------
+结构体:
+
+struct bus_attribute {
+        struct attribute        attr;
+        ssize_t (*show)(struct bus_type *, char * buf);
+        ssize_t (*store)(struct bus_type *, const char * buf, size_t count);
+};
+
+声明:
+
+BUS_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store)
+
+增/删属性:
+
+int bus_create_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
+void bus_remove_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
+
+
+- 设备驱动程序 (include/linux/device.h)
+-----------------------------------------
+
+结构体:
+
+struct driver_attribute {
+        struct attribute        attr;
+        ssize_t (*show)(struct device_driver *, char * buf);
+        ssize_t (*store)(struct device_driver *, const char * buf,
+                         size_t count);
+};
+
+声明:
+
+DRIVER_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store)
+
+增/删属性：
+
+int driver_create_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
+void driver_remove_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
+
+
+文档
+~~~~
+
+sysfs 目录结构以及其中包含的属性定义了一个内核与用户空间之间的 ABI。
+对于任何 ABI，其自身的稳定和适当的文档是非常重要的。所有新的 sysfs
+属性必须在 Documentation/ABI 中有文档。详见 Documentation/ABI/README。
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/gpio.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d5b8f01833f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,658 @@
+Chinese translated version of Documentation/gpio.txt
+
+If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
+original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
+communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
+help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
+or if there is a problem with the translation.
+
+Maintainer: Grant Likely <grant.likely@secretlab.ca>
+		Linus Walleij <linus.walleij@linaro.org>
+Chinese maintainer: Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+Documentation/gpio.txt 的中文翻译
+
+如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
+交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻
+译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。
+英文版维护者： Grant Likely <grant.likely@secretlab.ca>
+		Linus Walleij <linus.walleij@linaro.org>
+中文版维护者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版翻译者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版校译者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+
+
+以下为正文
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+GPIO 接口
+
+本文档提供了一个在Linux下访问GPIO的公约概述。
+
+这些函数以 gpio_* 作为前缀。其他的函数不允许使用这样的前缀或相关的
+__gpio_* 前缀。
+
+
+什么是GPIO?
+==========
+"通用输入/输出口"(GPIO)是一个灵活的由软件控制的数字信号。他们可
+由多种芯片提供,且对于从事嵌入式和定制硬件的 Linux 开发者来说是
+比较熟悉。每个GPIO 都代表一个连接到特定引脚或球栅阵列(BGA)封装中
+“球珠”的一个位。电路板原理图显示了 GPIO 与外部硬件的连接关系。
+驱动可以编写成通用代码，以使板级启动代码可传递引脚配置数据给驱动。
+
+片上系统 (SOC) 处理器对 GPIO 有很大的依赖。在某些情况下,每个
+非专用引脚都可配置为 GPIO,且大多数芯片都最少有一些 GPIO。
+可编程逻辑器件(类似 FPGA) 可以方便地提供 GPIO。像电源管理和
+音频编解码器这样的多功能芯片经常留有一些这样的引脚来帮助那些引脚
+匮乏的 SOC。同时还有通过 I2C 或 SPI 串行总线连接的“GPIO扩展器”
+芯片。大多数 PC 的南桥有一些拥有 GPIO 能力的引脚 (只有BIOS
+固件才知道如何使用他们)。
+
+GPIO 的实际功能因系统而异。通常用法有:
+
+  - 输出值可写 (高电平=1，低电平=0)。一些芯片也有如何驱动这些值的选项,
+    例如只允许输出一个值、支持“线与”及其他取值类似的模式(值得注意的是
+    “开漏”信号)
+
+  - 输入值可读(1、0)。一些芯片支持引脚在配置为“输出”时回读，这对于类似
+    “线与”的情况(以支持双向信号)是非常有用的。GPIO 控制器可能有输入
+    去毛刺/消抖逻辑,这有时需要软件控制。
+
+  - 输入通常可作为 IRQ 信号,一般是沿触发,但有时是电平触发。这样的 IRQ
+    可能配置为系统唤醒事件,以将系统从低功耗状态下唤醒。
+
+  - 通常一个 GPIO 根据不同产品电路板的需求,可以配置为输入或输出,也有仅
+    支持单向的。
+
+  - 大部分 GPIO 可以在持有自旋锁时访问,但是通常由串行总线扩展的 GPIO
+    不允许持有自旋锁。但某些系统也支持这种类型。
+
+对于给定的电路板,每个 GPIO 都用于某个特定的目的,如监控 MMC/SD 卡的
+插入/移除、检测卡的写保护状态、驱动 LED、配置收发器、模拟串行总线、
+复位硬件看门狗、感知开关状态等等。
+
+
+GPIO 公约
+=========
+注意,这个叫做“公约”，因为这不是强制性的，不遵循这个公约是无伤大雅的，
+因为此时可移植性并不重要。GPIO 常用于板级特定的电路逻辑,甚至可能
+随着电路板的版本而改变，且不可能在不同走线的电路板上使用。仅有在少数
+功能上才具有可移植性，其他功能是平台特定。这也是由于“胶合”的逻辑造成的。
+
+此外，这不需要任何的执行框架，只是一个接口。某个平台可能通过一个简单地
+访问芯片寄存器的内联函数来实现它，其他平台可能通过委托一系列不同的GPIO
+控制器的抽象函数来实现它。(有一些可选的代码能支持这种策略的实现,本文档
+后面会介绍，但作为 GPIO 接口的客户端驱动程序必须与它的实现无关。)
+
+也就是说,如果在他们的平台上支持这个公约，驱动应尽可能的使用它。同时，平台
+必须在 Kconfig 中选择 ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB 或者 ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB
+选项。那些调用标准 GPIO 函数的驱动应该在 Kconfig 入口中声明依赖GENERIC_GPIO。
+当驱动包含文件:
+
+	#include <linux/gpio.h>
+
+则 GPIO 函数是可用,无论是“真实代码”还是经优化过的语句。如果你遵守
+这个公约，当你的代码完成后，对其他的开发者来说会更容易看懂和维护。
+
+注意，这些操作包含所用平台的 I/O 屏障代码，驱动无须显式地调用他们。
+
+
+标识 GPIO
+---------
+GPIO 是通过无符号整型来标识的,范围是 0 到 MAX_INT。保留“负”数
+用于其他目的,例如标识信号“在这个板子上不可用”或指示错误。未接触底层
+硬件的代码会忽略这些整数。
+
+平台会定义这些整数的用法,且通常使用 #define 来定义 GPIO，这样
+板级特定的启动代码可以直接关联相应的原理图。相对来说，驱动应该仅使用
+启动代码传递过来的 GPIO 编号，使用 platform_data 保存板级特定
+引脚配置数据 (同时还有其他须要的板级特定数据)，避免可能出现的问题。
+
+例如一个平台使用编号 32-159 来标识 GPIO,而在另一个平台使用编号0-63
+标识一组 GPIO 控制器,64-79标识另一类 GPIO 控制器,且在一个含有
+FPGA 的特定板子上使用 80-95。编号不一定要连续,那些平台中，也可以
+使用编号2000-2063来标识一个 I2C 接口的 GPIO 扩展器中的 GPIO。
+
+如果你要初始化一个带有无效 GPIO 编号的结构体,可以使用一些负编码
+(如"-EINVAL")，那将使其永远不会是有效。来测试这样一个结构体中的编号
+是否关联一个 GPIO，你可使用以下断言:
+
+	int gpio_is_valid(int number);
+
+如果编号不存在，则请求和释放 GPIO 的函数将拒绝执行相关操作(见下文)。
+其他编号也可能被拒绝,比如一个编号可能存在，但暂时在给定的电路上不可用。
+
+一个平台是否支持多个 GPIO 控制器为平台特定的实现问题，就像是否可以
+在 GPIO 编号空间中有“空洞”和是否可以在运行时添加新的控制器一样。
+这些问题会影响其他事情，包括相邻的 GPIO 编号是否存在等。
+
+使用 GPIO
+---------
+对于一个 GPIO，系统应该做的第一件事情就是通过 gpio_request()
+函数分配它，见下文。
+
+接下来是设置I/O方向，这通常是在板级启动代码中为所使用的 GPIO 设置
+platform_device 时完成。
+
+	/* 设置为输入或输出, 返回 0 或负的错误代码 */
+	int gpio_direction_input(unsigned gpio);
+	int gpio_direction_output(unsigned gpio, int value);
+
+返回值为零代表成功，否则返回一个负的错误代码。这个返回值需要检查，因为
+get/set(获取/设置)函数调用没法返回错误,且有可能是配置错误。通常，
+你应该在进程上下文中调用这些函数。然而,对于自旋锁安全的 GPIO，在板子
+启动的早期、进程启动前使用他们也是可以的。
+
+对于作为输出的 GPIO，为其提供初始输出值，对于避免在系统启动期间出现
+信号毛刺是很有帮助的。
+
+为了与传统的 GPIO 接口兼容, 在设置一个 GPIO 方向时，如果它还未被申请，
+则隐含了申请那个 GPIO 的操作(见下文)。这种兼容性正在从可选的 gpiolib
+框架中移除。
+
+如果这个 GPIO 编码不存在，或者特定的 GPIO 不能用于那种模式，则方向
+设置可能失败。依赖启动固件来正确地设置方向通常是一个坏主意，因为它可能
+除了启动Linux，并没有做更多的验证工作。(同理, 板子的启动代码可能需要
+将这个复用的引脚设置为 GPIO，并正确地配置上拉/下拉电阻。)
+
+
+访问自旋锁安全的 GPIO
+-------------------
+大多数 GPIO 控制器可以通过内存读/写指令来访问。这些指令不会休眠,可以
+安全地在硬(非线程)中断例程和类似的上下文中完成。
+
+对于那些用 gpio_cansleep()测试总是返回失败的 GPIO(见下文)，使用
+以下的函数访问:
+
+	/* GPIO 输入:返回零或非零 */
+	int gpio_get_value(unsigned gpio);
+
+	/* GPIO 输出 */
+	void gpio_set_value(unsigned gpio, int value);
+
+GPIO值是布尔值，零表示低电平，非零表示高电平。当读取一个输出引脚的值时，
+返回值应该是引脚上的值。这个值不总是和输出值相符，因为存在开漏输出信号和
+输出延迟问题。
+
+以上的 get/set 函数无错误返回值，因为之前 gpio_direction_*()应已检查过
+其是否为“无效GPIO”。此外，还需要注意的是并不是所有平台都可以从输出引脚
+中读取数据，对于不能读取的引脚应总返回零。另外，对那些在原子上下文中无法
+安全访问的 GPIO (译者注：因为访问可能导致休眠)使用这些函数是不合适的
+(见下文)。
+
+在 GPIO 编号(还有输出、值)为常数的情况下,鼓励通过平台特定的实现来优化
+这两个函数来访问 GPIO 值。这种情况(读写一个硬件寄存器)下只需要几条指令
+是很正常的,且无须自旋锁。这种优化函数比起那些在子程序上花费许多指令的
+函数可以使得模拟接口(译者注:例如 GPIO 模拟 I2C、1-wire 或 SPI)的
+应用(在空间和时间上都)更具效率。
+
+
+访问可能休眠的 GPIO
+-----------------
+某些 GPIO 控制器必须通过基于总线(如 I2C 或 SPI)的消息访问。读或写这些
+GPIO 值的命令需要等待其信息排到队首才发送命令，再获得其反馈。期间需要
+休眠，这不能在 IRQ 例程(中断上下文)中执行。
+
+支持此类 GPIO 的平台通过以下函数返回非零值来区分出这种 GPIO。(此函数需要
+一个之前通过 gpio_request 分配到的有效 GPIO 编号):
+
+	int gpio_cansleep(unsigned gpio);
+
+为了访问这种 GPIO,内核定义了一套不同的函数:
+
+	/* GPIO 输入:返回零或非零 ,可能会休眠 */
+	int gpio_get_value_cansleep(unsigned gpio);
+
+	/* GPIO 输出,可能会休眠 */
+	void gpio_set_value_cansleep(unsigned gpio, int value);
+
+
+访问这样的 GPIO 需要一个允许休眠的上下文，例如线程 IRQ 处理例程，并用以上的
+访问函数替换那些没有 cansleep()后缀的自旋锁安全访问函数。
+
+除了这些访问函数可能休眠，且它们操作的 GPIO 不能在硬件 IRQ 处理例程中访问的
+事实，这些处理例程实际上和自旋锁安全的函数是一样的。
+
+** 除此之外 ** 调用设置和配置此类 GPIO 的函数也必须在允许休眠的上下文中，
+因为它们可能也需要访问 GPIO 控制器芯片: (这些设置函数通常在板级启动代码或者
+驱动探测/断开代码中，所以这是一个容易满足的约束条件。)
+
+	gpio_direction_input()
+	gpio_direction_output()
+	gpio_request()
+
+## 	gpio_request_one()
+##	gpio_request_array()
+## 	gpio_free_array()
+
+	gpio_free()
+	gpio_set_debounce()
+
+
+
+声明和释放 GPIO
+----------------------------
+为了有助于捕获系统配置错误,定义了两个函数。
+
+	/* 申请 GPIO, 返回 0 或负的错误代码.
+	 * 非空标签可能有助于诊断.
+	 */
+	int gpio_request(unsigned gpio, const char *label);
+
+	/* 释放之前声明的 GPIO */
+	void gpio_free(unsigned gpio);
+
+将无效的 GPIO 编码传递给 gpio_request()会导致失败，申请一个已使用这个
+函数声明过的 GPIO 也会失败。gpio_request()的返回值必须检查。你应该在
+进程上下文中调用这些函数。然而,对于自旋锁安全的 GPIO,在板子启动的早期、
+进入进程之前是可以申请的。
+
+这个函数完成两个基本的目标。一是标识那些实际上已作为 GPIO 使用的信号线，
+这样便于更好地诊断;系统可能需要服务几百个可用的 GPIO，但是对于任何一个
+给定的电路板通常只有一些被使用。另一个目的是捕获冲突，查明错误:如两个或
+更多驱动错误地认为他们已经独占了某个信号线,或是错误地认为移除一个管理着
+某个已激活信号的驱动是安全的。也就是说，申请 GPIO 的作用类似一种锁机制。
+
+某些平台可能也使用 GPIO 作为电源管理激活信号(例如通过关闭未使用芯片区和
+简单地关闭未使用时钟)。
+
+对于 GPIO 使用 pinctrl 子系统已知的引脚，子系统应该被告知其使用情况；
+一个 gpiolib 驱动的 .request()操作应调用 pinctrl_request_gpio()，
+而 gpiolib 驱动的 .free()操作应调用 pinctrl_free_gpio()。pinctrl
+子系统允许 pinctrl_request_gpio()在某个引脚或引脚组以复用形式“属于”
+一个设备时都成功返回。
+
+任何须将 GPIO 信号导向适当引脚的引脚复用硬件的编程应该发生在 GPIO
+驱动的 .direction_input()或 .direction_output()函数中，以及
+任何输出 GPIO 值的设置之后。这样可使从引脚特殊功能到 GPIO 的转换
+不会在引脚产生毛刺波形。有时当用一个 GPIO 实现其信号驱动一个非 GPIO
+硬件模块的解决方案时，就需要这种机制。
+
+某些平台允许部分或所有 GPIO 信号使用不同的引脚。类似的，GPIO 或引脚的
+其他方面也需要配置，如上拉/下拉。平台软件应该在对这些 GPIO 调用
+gpio_request()前将这类细节配置好，例如使用 pinctrl 子系统的映射表，
+使得 GPIO 的用户无须关注这些细节。
+
+还有一个值得注意的是在释放 GPIO 前，你必须停止使用它。
+
+
+注意:申请一个 GPIO 并没有以任何方式配置它，只不过标识那个 GPIO 处于使用
+状态。必须有另外的代码来处理引脚配置(如控制 GPIO 使用的引脚、上拉/下拉)。
+考虑到大多数情况下声明 GPIO 之后就会立即配置它们,所以定义了以下三个辅助函数:
+
+	/* 申请一个 GPIO 信号, 同时通过特定的'flags'初始化配置,
+	 * 其他和 gpio_request()的参数和返回值相同
+	 *
+	 */
+	int gpio_request_one(unsigned gpio, unsigned long flags, const char *label);
+
+	/* 在单个函数中申请多个 GPIO
+	 */
+	int gpio_request_array(struct gpio *array, size_t num);
+
+	/* 在单个函数中释放多个 GPIO
+	 */
+	void gpio_free_array(struct gpio *array, size_t num);
+
+这里 'flags' 当前定义可指定以下属性:
+
+	* GPIOF_DIR_IN		- 配置方向为输入
+	* GPIOF_DIR_OUT		- 配置方向为输出
+
+	* GPIOF_INIT_LOW	- 在作为输出时,初始值为低电平
+	* GPIOF_INIT_HIGH	- 在作为输出时,初始值为高电平
+	* GPIOF_OPEN_DRAIN	- gpio引脚为开漏信号
+	* GPIOF_OPEN_SOURCE	- gpio引脚为源极开路信号
+
+	* GPIOF_EXPORT_DIR_FIXED	- 将 gpio 导出到 sysfs，并保持方向
+	* GPIOF_EXPORT_DIR_CHANGEABLE	- 同样是导出, 但允许改变方向
+
+因为 GPIOF_INIT_* 仅有在配置为输出的时候才存在,所以有效的组合为:
+
+	* GPIOF_IN		- 配置为输入
+	* GPIOF_OUT_INIT_LOW	- 配置为输出,并初始化为低电平
+	* GPIOF_OUT_INIT_HIGH	- 配置为输出,并初始化为高电平
+
+当设置 flag 为 GPIOF_OPEN_DRAIN 时，则假设引脚是开漏信号。这样的引脚
+将不会在输出模式下置1。这样的引脚需要连接上拉电阻。通过使能这个标志，gpio库
+将会在被要求输出模式下置1时将引脚变为输入状态来使引脚置高。引脚在输出模式下
+通过置0使其输出低电平。
+
+当设置 flag 为 GPIOF_OPEN_SOURCE 时，则假设引脚为源极开路信号。这样的引脚
+将不会在输出模式下置0。这样的引脚需要连接下拉电阻。通过使能这个标志，gpio库
+将会在被要求输出模式下置0时将引脚变为输入状态来使引脚置低。引脚在输出模式下
+通过置1使其输出高电平。
+
+将来这些标志可能扩展到支持更多的属性。
+
+更进一步,为了更简单地声明/释放多个 GPIO,'struct gpio'被引进来封装所有
+这三个领域:
+
+	struct gpio {
+		unsigned	gpio;
+		unsigned long	flags;
+		const char	*label;
+	};
+
+一个典型的用例:
+
+	static struct gpio leds_gpios[] = {
+		{ 32, GPIOF_OUT_INIT_HIGH, "Power LED" }, /* 默认开启 */
+		{ 33, GPIOF_OUT_INIT_LOW,  "Green LED" }, /* 默认关闭 */
+		{ 34, GPIOF_OUT_INIT_LOW,  "Red LED"   }, /* 默认关闭 */
+		{ 35, GPIOF_OUT_INIT_LOW,  "Blue LED"  }, /* 默认关闭 */
+		{ ... },
+	};
+
+	err = gpio_request_one(31, GPIOF_IN, "Reset Button");
+	if (err)
+		...
+
+	err = gpio_request_array(leds_gpios, ARRAY_SIZE(leds_gpios));
+	if (err)
+		...
+
+	gpio_free_array(leds_gpios, ARRAY_SIZE(leds_gpios));
+
+
+GPIO 映射到 IRQ
+--------------------
+GPIO 编号是无符号整数;IRQ 编号也是。这些构成了两个逻辑上不同的命名空间
+(GPIO 0 不一定使用 IRQ 0)。你可以通过以下函数在它们之间实现映射:
+
+	/* 映射 GPIO 编号到 IRQ 编号 */
+	int gpio_to_irq(unsigned gpio);
+
+	/* 映射 IRQ 编号到 GPIO 编号 (尽量避免使用) */
+	int irq_to_gpio(unsigned irq);
+
+它们的返回值为对应命名空间的相关编号，或是负的错误代码(如果无法映射)。
+(例如,某些 GPIO 无法做为 IRQ 使用。)以下的编号错误是未经检测的:使用一个
+未通过 gpio_direction_input()配置为输入的 GPIO 编号，或者使用一个
+并非来源于gpio_to_irq()的 IRQ 编号。
+
+这两个映射函数可能会在信号编号的加减计算过程上花些时间。它们不可休眠。
+
+gpio_to_irq()返回的非错误值可以传递给 request_irq()或者 free_irq()。
+它们通常通过板级特定的初始化代码存放到平台设备的 IRQ 资源中。注意:IRQ
+触发选项是 IRQ 接口的一部分，如 IRQF_TRIGGER_FALLING，系统唤醒能力
+也是如此。
+
+irq_to_gpio()返回的非错误值大多数通常可以被 gpio_get_value()所使用，
+比如在 IRQ 是沿触发时初始化或更新驱动状态。注意某些平台不支持反映射,所以
+你应该尽量避免使用它。
+
+
+模拟开漏信号
+----------------------------
+有时在只有低电平信号作为实际驱动结果(译者注:多个输出连接于一点，逻辑电平
+结果为所有输出的逻辑与)的时候,共享的信号线需要使用“开漏”信号。(该术语
+适用于 CMOS 管；而 TTL 用“集电极开路”。)一个上拉电阻使信号为高电平。这
+有时被称为“线与”。实际上，从负逻辑(低电平为真)的角度来看，这是一个“线或”。
+
+一个开漏信号的常见例子是共享的低电平使能 IRQ 信号线。此外,有时双向数据总线
+信号也使用漏极开路信号。
+
+某些 GPIO 控制器直接支持开漏输出，还有许多不支持。当你需要开漏信号，但
+硬件又不直接支持的时候，一个常用的方法是用任何即可作输入也可作输出的 GPIO
+引脚来模拟:
+
+ LOW:	gpio_direction_output(gpio, 0) ... 这代码驱动信号并覆盖
+	上拉配置。
+
+ HIGH:	gpio_direction_input(gpio) ... 这代码关闭输出,所以上拉电阻
+	(或其他的一些器件)控制了信号。
+
+如果你将信号线“驱动”为高电平，但是 gpio_get_value(gpio)报告了一个
+低电平(在适当的上升时间后)，你就可以知道是其他的一些组件将共享信号线拉低了。
+这不一定是错误的。一个常见的例子就是 I2C 时钟的延长：一个需要较慢时钟的
+从设备延迟 SCK 的上升沿，而 I2C 主设备相应地调整其信号传输速率。
+
+
+这些公约忽略了什么?
+================
+这些公约忽略的最大一件事就是引脚复用，因为这属于高度芯片特定的属性且
+没有可移植性。某个平台可能不需要明确的复用信息；有的对于任意给定的引脚
+可能只有两个功能选项；有的可能每个引脚有八个功能选项；有的可能可以将
+几个引脚中的任何一个作为给定的 GPIO。(是的，这些例子都来自于当前运行
+Linux 的系统。)
+
+在某些系统中,与引脚复用相关的是配置和使能集成的上、下拉模式。并不是所有
+平台都支持这种模式,或者不会以相同的方式来支持这种模式；且任何给定的电路板
+可能使用外置的上拉(或下拉)电阻,这时芯片上的就不应该使用。(当一个电路需要
+5kOhm 的拉动电阻,芯片上的 100 kOhm 电阻就不能做到。)同样的，驱动能力
+(2 mA vs 20 mA)和电压(1.8V vs 3.3V)是平台特定问题,就像模型一样在
+可配置引脚和 GPIO 之间(没)有一一对应的关系。
+
+还有其他一些系统特定的机制没有在这里指出，例如上述的输入去毛刺和线与输出
+选项。硬件可能支持批量读或写 GPIO，但是那一般是配置相关的：对于处于同一
+块区(bank)的GPIO。(GPIO 通常以 16 或 32 个组成一个区块，一个给定的
+片上系统一般有几个这样的区块。)某些系统可以通过输出 GPIO 触发 IRQ，
+或者从并非以 GPIO 管理的引脚取值。这些机制的相关代码没有必要具有可移植性。
+
+当前，动态定义 GPIO 并不是标准的，例如作为配置一个带有某些 GPIO 扩展器的
+附加电路板的副作用。
+
+GPIO 实现者的框架 (可选)
+=====================
+前面提到了，有一个可选的实现框架，让平台使用相同的编程接口，更加简单地支持
+不同种类的 GPIO 控制器。这个框架称为"gpiolib"。
+
+作为一个辅助调试功能，如果 debugfs 可用，就会有一个 /sys/kernel/debug/gpio
+文件。通过这个框架，它可以列出所有注册的控制器,以及当前正在使用中的 GPIO
+的状态。
+
+
+控制器驱动: gpio_chip
+-------------------
+在框架中每个 GPIO 控制器都包装为一个 "struct gpio_chip"，他包含了
+该类型的每个控制器的常用信息:
+
+ - 设置 GPIO 方向的方法
+ - 用于访问 GPIO 值的方法
+ - 告知调用其方法是否可能休眠的标志
+ - 可选的 debugfs 信息导出方法 (显示类似上拉配置一样的额外状态)
+ - 诊断标签
+
+也包含了来自 device.platform_data 的每个实例的数据：它第一个 GPIO 的
+编号和它可用的 GPIO 的数量。
+
+实现 gpio_chip 的代码应支持多控制器实例，这可能使用驱动模型。那些代码要
+配置每个 gpio_chip，并发起gpiochip_add()。卸载一个 GPIO 控制器很少见，
+但在必要的时候可以使用 gpiochip_remove()。
+
+大部分 gpio_chip 是一个实例特定结构体的一部分，而并不将 GPIO 接口单独
+暴露出来,比如编址、电源管理等。类似编解码器这样的芯片会有复杂的非 GPIO
+状态。
+
+任何一个 debugfs 信息导出方法通常应该忽略还未申请作为 GPIO 的信号线。
+他们可以使用 gpiochip_is_requested()测试，当这个 GPIO 已经申请过了
+就返回相关的标签，否则返回 NULL。
+
+
+平台支持
+-------
+为了支持这个框架，一个平台的 Kconfig 文件将会 "select"(选择)
+ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB 或 ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB，并让它的
+<asm/gpio.h> 包含 <asm-generic/gpio.h>，同时定义三个方法:
+gpio_get_value()、gpio_set_value()和 gpio_cansleep()。
+
+它也应提供一个 ARCH_NR_GPIOS 的定义值，这样可以更好地反映该平台 GPIO
+的实际数量,节省静态表的空间。(这个定义值应该包含片上系统内建 GPIO 和
+GPIO 扩展器中的数据。)
+
+ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB 意味着 gpiolib 核心在这个构架中将总是编译进内核。
+
+ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB 意味着 gpiolib 核心默认关闭,且用户可以
+使能它,并将其编译进内核(可选)。
+
+如果这些选项都没被选择,该平台就不通过 GPIO-lib 支持 GPIO,且代码不可以
+被用户使能。
+
+以下这些方法的实现可以直接使用框架代码,并总是通过 gpio_chip 调度:
+
+  #define gpio_get_value	__gpio_get_value
+  #define gpio_set_value	__gpio_set_value
+  #define gpio_cansleep		__gpio_cansleep
+
+这些定义可以用更理想的实现方法替代，那就是使用经过逻辑优化的内联函数来访问
+基于特定片上系统的 GPIO。例如,若引用的 GPIO (寄存器位偏移)是常量“12”，
+读取或设置它可能只需少则两或三个指令，且不会休眠。当这样的优化无法实现时，
+那些函数必须使用框架提供的代码，那就至少要几十条指令才可以实现。对于用 GPIO
+模拟的 I/O 接口, 如此精简指令是很有意义的。
+
+对于片上系统，平台特定代码为片上 GPIO 每个区(bank)定义并注册 gpio_chip
+实例。那些 GPIO 应该根据芯片厂商的文档进行编码/标签,并直接和电路板原理图
+对应。他们应该开始于零并终止于平台特定的限制。这些 GPIO(代码)通常从
+arch_initcall()或者更早的地方集成进平台初始化代码，使这些 GPIO 总是可用，
+且他们通常可以作为 IRQ 使用。
+
+板级支持
+-------
+对于外部 GPIO 控制器(例如 I2C 或 SPI 扩展器、专用芯片、多功能器件、FPGA
+或 CPLD)，大多数常用板级特定代码都可以注册控制器设备，并保证他们的驱动知道
+gpiochip_add()所使用的 GPIO 编号。他们的起始编号通常跟在平台特定的 GPIO
+编号之后。
+
+例如板级启动代码应该创建结构体指明芯片公开的 GPIO 范围，并使用 platform_data
+将其传递给每个 GPIO 扩展器芯片。然后芯片驱动中的 probe()例程可以将这个
+数据传递给 gpiochip_add()。
+
+初始化顺序很重要。例如，如果一个设备依赖基于 I2C 的(扩展)GPIO，那么它的
+probe()例程就应该在那个 GPIO 有效以后才可以被调用。这意味着设备应该在
+GPIO 可以工作之后才可被注册。解决这类依赖的的一种方法是让这种 gpio_chip
+控制器向板级特定代码提供 setup()和 teardown()回调函数。一旦所有必须的
+资源可用之后，这些板级特定的回调函数将会注册设备，并可以在这些 GPIO 控制器
+设备变成无效时移除它们。
+
+
+用户空间的 Sysfs 接口(可选)
+========================
+使用“gpiolib”实现框架的平台可以选择配置一个 GPIO 的 sysfs 用户接口。
+这不同于 debugfs 接口，因为它提供的是对 GPIO方向和值的控制，而不只显示
+一个GPIO 的状态摘要。此外,它可以出现在没有调试支持的产品级系统中。
+
+例如，通过适当的系统硬件文档，用户空间可以知道 GIOP #23 控制 Flash
+存储器的写保护(用于保护其中 Bootloader 分区)。产品的系统升级可能需要
+临时解除这个保护：首先导入一个 GPIO，改变其输出状态，然后在重新使能写保护
+前升级代码。通常情况下,GPIO #23 是不会被触及的，并且内核也不需要知道他。
+
+根据适当的硬件文档，某些系统的用户空间 GPIO 可以用于确定系统配置数据，
+这些数据是标准内核不知道的。在某些任务中，简单的用户空间 GPIO 驱动可能是
+系统真正需要的。
+
+注意：标准内核驱动中已经存在通用的“LED 和按键”GPIO 任务，分别是:
+"leds-gpio" 和 "gpio_keys"。请使用这些来替代直接访问 GPIO，因为集成在
+内核框架中的这类驱动比你在用户空间的代码更好。
+
+
+Sysfs 中的路径
+--------------
+在/sys/class/gpio 中有 3 类入口:
+
+   -	用于在用户空间控制 GPIO 的控制接口;
+
+   -	GPIOs 本身;以及
+
+   -	GPIO 控制器 ("gpio_chip" 实例)。
+
+除了这些标准的文件,还包含“device”符号链接。
+
+控制接口是只写的:
+
+    /sys/class/gpio/
+
+    	"export" ... 用户空间可以通过写其编号到这个文件，要求内核导出
+		一个 GPIO 的控制到用户空间。
+
+		例如: 如果内核代码没有申请 GPIO #19,"echo 19 > export"
+		将会为 GPIO #19 创建一个 "gpio19" 节点。
+
+    	"unexport" ... 导出到用户空间的逆操作。
+
+		例如: "echo 19 > unexport" 将会移除使用"export"文件导出的
+		"gpio19" 节点。
+
+GPIO 信号的路径类似 /sys/class/gpio/gpio42/ (对于 GPIO #42 来说)，
+并有如下的读/写属性:
+
+    /sys/class/gpio/gpioN/
+
+	"direction" ... 读取得到 "in" 或 "out"。这个值通常运行写入。
+		写入"out" 时,其引脚的默认输出为低电平。为了确保无故障运行，
+		"low" 或 "high" 的电平值应该写入 GPIO 的配置，作为初始输出值。
+
+		注意:如果内核不支持改变 GPIO 的方向，或者在导出时内核代码没有
+		明确允许用户空间可以重新配置 GPIO 方向，那么这个属性将不存在。
+
+	"value" ... 读取得到 0 (低电平) 或 1 (高电平)。如果 GPIO 配置为
+		输出,这个值允许写操作。任何非零值都以高电平看待。
+
+		如果引脚可以配置为中断信号，且如果已经配置了产生中断的模式
+		（见"edge"的描述），你可以对这个文件使用轮询操作(poll(2))，
+		且轮询操作会在任何中断触发时返回。如果你使用轮询操作(poll(2))，
+		请在 events 中设置 POLLPRI 和 POLLERR。如果你使用轮询操作
+		(select(2))，请在 exceptfds 设置你期望的文件描述符。在
+		轮询操作(poll(2))返回之后，既可以通过 lseek(2)操作读取
+		sysfs 文件的开始部分，也可以关闭这个文件并重新打开它来读取数据。
+
+	"edge" ... 读取得到“none”、“rising”、“falling”或者“both”。
+		将这些字符串写入这个文件可以选择沿触发模式，会使得轮询操作
+		(select(2))在"value"文件中返回。
+
+		这个文件仅有在这个引脚可以配置为可产生中断输入引脚时，才存在。
+
+	"active_low" ... 读取得到 0 (假) 或 1 (真)。写入任何非零值可以
+		翻转这个属性的(读写)值。已存在或之后通过"edge"属性设置了"rising"
+		和 "falling" 沿触发模式的轮询操作(poll(2))将会遵循这个设置。
+
+GPIO 控制器的路径类似 /sys/class/gpio/gpiochip42/ (对于从#42 GPIO
+开始实现控制的控制器),并有着以下只读属性:
+
+    /sys/class/gpio/gpiochipN/
+
+    	"base" ... 与以上的 N 相同,代表此芯片管理的第一个 GPIO 的编号
+
+    	"label" ... 用于诊断 (并不总是只有唯一值)
+
+    	"ngpio" ... 此控制器所管理的 GPIO 数量(而 GPIO 编号从 N 到
+    		N + ngpio - 1)
+
+大多数情况下,电路板的文档应当标明每个 GPIO 的使用目的。但是那些编号并不总是
+固定的,例如在扩展卡上的 GPIO会根据所使用的主板或所在堆叠架构中其他的板子而
+有所不同。在这种情况下,你可能需要使用 gpiochip 节点(尽可能地结合电路图)来
+确定给定信号所用的 GPIO 编号。
+
+
+从内核代码中导出
+-------------
+内核代码可以明确地管理那些已通过 gpio_request()申请的 GPIO 的导出:
+
+	/* 导出 GPIO 到用户空间 */
+	int gpio_export(unsigned gpio, bool direction_may_change);
+
+	/* gpio_export()的逆操作 */
+	void gpio_unexport();
+
+	/* 创建一个 sysfs 连接到已导出的 GPIO 节点 */
+	int gpio_export_link(struct device *dev, const char *name,
+		unsigned gpio)
+
+	/* 改变 sysfs 中的一个 GPIO 节点的极性 */
+	int gpio_sysfs_set_active_low(unsigned gpio, int value);
+
+在一个内核驱动申请一个 GPIO 之后，它可以通过 gpio_export()使其在 sysfs
+接口中可见。该驱动可以控制信号方向是否可修改。这有助于防止用户空间代码无意间
+破坏重要的系统状态。
+
+这个明确的导出有助于(通过使某些实验更容易来)调试，也可以提供一个始终存在的接口，
+与文档配合作为板级支持包的一部分。
+
+在 GPIO 被导出之后，gpio_export_link()允许在 sysfs 文件系统的任何地方
+创建一个到这个 GPIO sysfs 节点的符号链接。这样驱动就可以通过一个描述性的
+名字，在 sysfs 中他们所拥有的设备下提供一个(到这个 GPIO sysfs 节点的)接口。
+
+驱动可以使用 gpio_sysfs_set_active_low() 来在用户空间隐藏电路板之间
+GPIO 线的极性差异。这个仅对 sysfs 接口起作用。极性的改变可以在 gpio_export()
+前后进行,且之前使能的轮询操作(poll(2))支持(上升或下降沿)将会被重新配置来遵循
+这个设置。
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt
index f606ba8598cf..2ebe539f5450 100644
--- a/Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ SLAB_C_MAGIC          0x4f17a36d  kmem_cache        mm/slab.c
 COW_MAGIC             0x4f4f4f4d  cow_header_v1     arch/um/drivers/ubd_user.c
 I810_CARD_MAGIC       0x5072696E  i810_card         sound/oss/i810_audio.c
 TRIDENT_CARD_MAGIC    0x5072696E  trident_card      sound/oss/trident.c
-ROUTER_MAGIC          0x524d4157  wan_device        include/linux/wanrouter.h
+ROUTER_MAGIC          0x524d4157  wan_device        [in wanrouter.h pre 3.9]
 SCC_MAGIC             0x52696368  gs_port           drivers/char/scc.h
 SAVEKMSG_MAGIC1       0x53415645  savekmsg          arch/*/amiga/config.c
 GDA_MAGIC             0x58464552  gda               arch/mips/include/asm/sn/gda.h
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ QUEUE_MAGIC_USED      0xf7e1cc33  queue_entry       drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c
 HTB_CMAGIC            0xFEFAFEF1  htb_class         net/sched/sch_htb.c
 NMI_MAGIC             0x48414d4d455201 nmi_s        arch/mips/include/asm/sn/nmi.h
 
-请注意，在声音记忆管理中仍然有每一些被定义的驱动魔术值。查看include/sound/sndmagic.h来获取他们完整的列表信息。很多OSS声音驱动拥有自己从声卡PCI ID构建的魔术值-他们也没有被列在这里。
+请注意，在声音记忆管理中仍然有一些特殊的为每个驱动定义的魔术值。查看include/sound/sndmagic.h来获取他们完整的列表信息。很多OSS声音驱动拥有自己从声卡PCI ID构建的魔术值-他们也没有被列在这里。
 
 IrDA子系统也使用了大量的自己的魔术值，查看include/net/irda/irda.h来获取他们完整的信息。
 
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/video4linux/omap3isp.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/video4linux/omap3isp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..67ffbf352ae0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/video4linux/omap3isp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,277 @@
+Chinese translated version of Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt
+
+If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
+original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
+communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
+help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
+or if there is a problem with the translation.
+
+Maintainer: Laurent Pinchart <laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com>
+	  Sakari Ailus <sakari.ailus@iki.fi>
+	  David Cohen <dacohen@gmail.com>
+Chinese maintainer: Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt 的中文翻译
+
+如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
+交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻
+译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。
+英文版维护者： Laurent Pinchart <laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com>
+	  Sakari Ailus <sakari.ailus@iki.fi>
+	  David Cohen <dacohen@gmail.com>
+中文版维护者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版翻译者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版校译者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+
+
+以下为正文
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+OMAP 3 图像信号处理器 (ISP) 驱动
+
+Copyright (C) 2010 Nokia Corporation
+Copyright (C) 2009 Texas Instruments, Inc.
+
+联系人: Laurent Pinchart <laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com>
+	  Sakari Ailus <sakari.ailus@iki.fi>
+	  David Cohen <dacohen@gmail.com>
+
+
+介绍
+===
+
+本文档介绍了由 drivers/media/video/omap3isp 加载的德州仪器
+（TI）OMAP 3 图像信号处理器 (ISP) 驱动。原始驱动由德州仪器（TI）
+编写，但此后由诺基亚重写了两次。
+
+驱动已在以下 OMAP 3 系列的芯片中成功使用：
+
+	3430
+	3530
+	3630
+
+驱动实现了 V4L2、媒体控制器和 v4l2_subdev 接口。支持内核中使用
+v4l2_subdev 接口的传感器、镜头和闪光灯驱动。
+
+
+拆分为子设备
+==========
+
+OMAP 3 ISP 被拆分为 V4L2 子设备，ISP中的每个模块都由一个子设备
+来表示。每个子设备向用户空间提供一个 V4L2 子设备接口。
+
+	OMAP3 ISP CCP2
+	OMAP3 ISP CSI2a
+	OMAP3 ISP CCDC
+	OMAP3 ISP preview
+	OMAP3 ISP resizer
+	OMAP3 ISP AEWB
+	OMAP3 ISP AF
+	OMAP3 ISP histogram
+
+ISP 中每个可能的连接都通过一个链接嵌入到媒体控制器接口中。详见例程 [2]。
+
+
+控制 OMAP 3 ISP
+==============
+
+通常，对 OMAP 3 ISP 的配置会在下一帧起始时生效。在传感器垂直消隐期间，
+模块变为空闲时完成配置。在内存到内存的操作中，视频管道一次处理一帧。
+应用配置应在帧间完成。
+
+ISP 中的所有模块，除 CSI-2 和 （可能存在的）CCP2 接收器外，都必须
+接收完整的帧数据。因此，传感器必须保证从不发送部分帧数据给ISP。
+
+Autoidle（自动空闲）功能至少在 3430 的 ISP 模块中确实存在一些问题。
+当 omap3isp 模块参数 autoidle 非零时，autoidle（自动空闲）功能
+仅在 3630 中启用了。
+
+
+事件机制
+======
+
+OMAP 3 ISP 驱动在 CCDC 和统计（AEWB、AF 和 直方图）子设备中支持
+V4L2 事件机制接口。
+
+CCDC 子设备通过 HS_VS 中断，处理 V4L2_EVENT_FRAME_SYNC 类型
+事件，用于告知帧起始。早期版本的驱动则使用 V4L2_EVENT_OMAP3ISP_HS_VS。
+当在 CCDC 模块中接收到起始帧的第一行时，会准确地触发事件。这个事件
+可以在 CCDC 子设备中“订阅”。
+
+（当使用并行接口时，必须注意正确地配置 VS 信号极性。而当使用串行接收时
+这个会自动校正。）
+
+每个统计子设备都可以产生事件。每当一个统计缓冲区可由用户空间应用程序
+通过 VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_STAT_REQ IOCTL 操作获取时，就会产生一个
+事件。当前存在以下事件：
+
+	V4L2_EVENT_OMAP3ISP_AEWB
+	V4L2_EVENT_OMAP3ISP_AF
+	V4L2_EVENT_OMAP3ISP_HIST
+
+这些 ioctl 的事件数据类型为 struct omap3isp_stat_event_status
+结构体。如果出现计算错误的统计，也同样会产生一个事件，但没有相关的统计
+数据缓冲区。这种情况下 omap3isp_stat_event_status.buf_err 会被
+设置为非零值。
+
+
+私有 IOCTL
+==========
+
+OMAP 3 ISP 驱动支持标准的 V4L2 IOCTL 以及可能存在且实用的控制。但
+ISP 提供的许多功能都不在标准 IOCTL 之列，例如 gamma（伽马）表和统计
+数据采集配置等。
+
+通常，会有一个私有 ioctl 用于配置每个包含硬件依赖功能的模块。
+
+支持以下私有 IOCTL：
+
+	VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_CCDC_CFG
+	VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_PRV_CFG
+	VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_AEWB_CFG
+	VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_HIST_CFG
+	VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_AF_CFG
+	VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_STAT_REQ
+	VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_STAT_EN
+
+在 include/linux/omap3isp.h 中描述了这些 ioctl 使用的参数结构体。
+与特定 ISP 模块相关的 ISP 自身的详细功能在技术参考手册 (TRMs)中有
+描述，详见文档结尾。
+
+虽然在不使用任何私有 IOCTL 的情况下使用 ISP 驱动是可能的，但这样无法
+获得最佳的图像质量。AEWB、AF 和 直方图（译者注：一般用于自动曝光和增益
+控制，以及图像均衡等）模块无法在未使用适当的私有 IOCTL 配置的情况下使用。
+
+
+CCDC 和 preview（预览）模块 IOCTL
+===============================
+
+VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_CCDC_CFG 和 VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_PRV_CFG IOCTL
+被分别用于配置、启用和禁用 CCDC 和 preview（预览）模块的功能。在它们
+所控制的模块中，两个 IOCTL 控制多种功能。VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_CCDC_CFG IOCTL
+接受一个指向 omap3isp_ccdc_update_config 结构体的指针作为它的参数。
+同样的，VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_PRV_CFG 接受一个指向 omap3isp_prev_update_config
+结构体的指针。以上两个结构体定义位于 [1]。
+
+这些结构体中的 update 域标识是否针对指定的功能更新配置，而 flag 域
+则标识是启用还是禁用此功能。
+
+update 和 flag 位接受以下掩码值。CCDC 和 preview（预览）模块的
+每个单独功能都与一个 flag 关联（禁用或启用；在结构体中 flag 域的
+一部分）和一个指向功能配置数据的指针。
+
+对于 VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_CCDC_CFG，下面列出了 update 和 flag 域
+中的有效值。 这些值可能会在同一个 IOCTL 调用中配置多个功能。
+
+        OMAP3ISP_CCDC_ALAW
+        OMAP3ISP_CCDC_LPF
+        OMAP3ISP_CCDC_BLCLAMP
+        OMAP3ISP_CCDC_BCOMP
+        OMAP3ISP_CCDC_FPC
+        OMAP3ISP_CCDC_CULL
+        OMAP3ISP_CCDC_CONFIG_LSC
+        OMAP3ISP_CCDC_TBL_LSC
+
+针对 VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_PRV_CFG 的相应值如下：
+
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_LUMAENH
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_INVALAW
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_HRZ_MED
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_CFA
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_CHROMA_SUPP
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_WB
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_BLKADJ
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_RGB2RGB
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_COLOR_CONV
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_YC_LIMIT
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_DEFECT_COR
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_GAMMABYPASS
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_DRK_FRM_CAPTURE
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_DRK_FRM_SUBTRACT
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_LENS_SHADING
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_NF
+        OMAP3ISP_PREV_GAMMA
+
+在启用某个功能的时候，相关的配置数据指针不可为 NULL。在禁用某个功能时，
+配置数据指针会被忽略。
+
+
+统计模块 IOCTL
+=============
+
+统计子设备相较于其他子设备提供了更多动态配置选项。在图像处理流水线处于
+工作状态时，它们可以被启用、禁用和重配。
+
+统计模块总是从 CCDC 中获取输入的图像数据（由于直方图内存读取未实现）。
+统计数据可由用户通过统计子设备节点使用私有 IOCTL 获取。
+
+AEWB、AF 和 直方图子设备提供的私有 IOCTL 极大程度上反应了 ISP 硬件
+提供的寄存器级接口。有些方面纯粹和驱动程序的实现相关，这些将在下面讨论。
+
+VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_STAT_EN
+-----------------------
+
+这个私有 IOCTL 启用/禁用 一个统计模块。如果这个申请在视频流启动前完成，
+它将在视频流水线开始工作时生效。如果视频流水线已经处于工作状态了，它将在
+CCDC 变为空闲时生效。
+
+VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_AEWB_CFG, VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_HIST_CFG and VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_AF_CFG
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+这些 IOCTL 用于配置模块。它们要求用户应用程序对硬件有深入的认识。对
+大多数域的解释可以在 OMAP 的 TRM 中找到。以下两个域对于以上所有的
+私有 IOCTL 配置都很常见，由于他们没有在 TRM 中提及，故需要对其有
+更好的认识。
+
+omap3isp_[h3a_af/h3a_aewb/hist]_config.buf_size:
+
+模块在内部处理自身缓冲。对模块数据输出所必需的缓存大小依赖于已申请的配置。
+虽然驱动支持在视频流工作时重新配置，但对于所需缓存量大于模块启用时内部
+所分配数量的情况，则不支持重新配置。在这种情况下将返回 -EBUSY。为了避免
+此类状况，无论是禁用/重配/启用模块，还是第一次配置时申请必须的缓存大小，
+都应在模块禁用的情况下进行。
+
+内部缓冲分配的大小需综合考虑所申请配置的最小缓存量以及 buf_size 域中
+所设的值。如果 buf_size 域在[minimum（最小值）, maximum（最大值）]
+缓冲大小范围之外，则应该将其调整到其范围中。驱动则会选择最大值。正确的
+buf_size 值将回写到用户应用程序中。
+
+omap3isp_[h3a_af/h3a_aewb/hist]_config.config_counter:
+
+由于配置并未在申请之后同步生效，驱动必须提供一个跟踪这类信息的方法，
+以提供更准确的数据。在一个配置被申请之后，返回到用户空间应用程序的
+config_counter 是一个与其配置相关的唯一值。当用户应用程序接收到
+一个缓冲可用或一个新的缓冲申请事件时，这个 config_counter 用于
+一个缓冲数据和一个配置的匹配。
+
+VIDIOC_OMAP3ISP_STAT_REQ
+------------------------
+
+将内部缓冲队列中最早的数据发送到用户空间，然后丢弃此缓冲区。
+omap3isp_stat_data.frame_number 域与视频缓冲的 field_count
+域相匹配。
+
+
+技术参考手册 (TRMs) 和其他文档
+==========================
+
+OMAP 3430 TRM:
+<URL:http://focus.ti.com/pdfs/wtbu/OMAP34xx_ES3.1.x_PUBLIC_TRM_vZM.zip>
+参考于 2011-03-05.
+
+OMAP 35xx TRM:
+<URL:http://www.ti.com/litv/pdf/spruf98o> 参考于 2011-03-05.
+
+OMAP 3630 TRM:
+<URL:http://focus.ti.com/pdfs/wtbu/OMAP36xx_ES1.x_PUBLIC_TRM_vQ.zip>
+参考于 2011-03-05.
+
+DM 3730 TRM:
+<URL:http://www.ti.com/litv/pdf/sprugn4h> 参考于 2011-03-06.
+
+
+参考资料
+=======
+
+[1] include/linux/omap3isp.h
+
+[2] http://git.ideasonboard.org/?p=media-ctl.git;a=summary
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0da95dbaef34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,981 @@
+Chinese translated version of Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt
+
+If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
+original document maintainer directly.  However, if you have a problem
+communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
+help.  Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
+or if there is a problem with the translation.
+
+Maintainer: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
+Chinese maintainer: Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt 的中文翻译
+
+如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
+交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻
+译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。
+英文版维护者： Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
+中文版维护者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版翻译者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+中文版校译者： 傅炜 Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
+
+
+以下为正文
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+V4L2 驱动框架概览
+==============
+
+本文档描述 V4L2 框架所提供的各种结构和它们之间的关系。
+
+
+介绍
+----
+
+大部分现代 V4L2 设备由多个 IC 组成，在 /dev 下导出多个设备节点，
+并同时创建非 V4L2 设备（如 DVB、ALSA、FB、I2C 和红外输入设备）。
+由于这种硬件的复杂性，V4L2 驱动也变得非常复杂。
+
+尤其是 V4L2 必须支持 IC 实现音视频的多路复用和编解码，这就更增加了其
+复杂性。通常这些 IC 通过一个或多个 I2C 总线连接到主桥驱动器，但也可
+使用其他总线。这些设备称为“子设备”。
+
+长期以来，这个框架仅限于通过 video_device 结构体创建 V4L 设备节点，
+并使用 video_buf 处理视频缓冲（注：本文不讨论 video_buf 框架）。
+
+这意味着所有驱动必须自己设置设备实例并连接到子设备。其中一部分要正确地
+完成是比较复杂的，使得许多驱动都没有正确地实现。
+
+由于框架的缺失，有很多通用代码都不可重复利用。
+
+因此，这个框架构建所有驱动都需要的基本结构块，而统一的框架将使通用代码
+创建成实用函数并在所有驱动中共享变得更加容易。
+
+
+驱动结构
+-------
+
+所有 V4L2 驱动都有如下结构：
+
+1) 每个设备实例的结构体--包含其设备状态。
+
+2) 初始化和控制子设备的方法（如果有）。
+
+3) 创建 V4L2 设备节点 (/dev/videoX、/dev/vbiX 和 /dev/radioX)
+   并跟踪设备节点的特定数据。
+
+4) 特定文件句柄结构体--包含每个文件句柄的数据。
+
+5) 视频缓冲处理。
+
+以下是它们的初略关系图：
+
+    device instances（设备实例）
+      |
+      +-sub-device instances（子设备实例）
+      |
+      \-V4L2 device nodes（V4L2 设备节点）
+	  |
+	  \-filehandle instances（文件句柄实例）
+
+
+框架结构
+-------
+
+该框架非常类似驱动结构：它有一个 v4l2_device 结构用于保存设备
+实例的数据；一个 v4l2_subdev 结构体代表子设备实例；video_device
+结构体保存 V4L2 设备节点的数据；将来 v4l2_fh 结构体将跟踪文件句柄
+实例（暂未尚未实现）。
+
+V4L2 框架也可与媒体框架整合（可选的）。如果驱动设置了 v4l2_device
+结构体的 mdev 域，子设备和视频节点的入口将自动出现在媒体框架中。
+
+
+v4l2_device 结构体
+----------------
+
+每个设备实例都通过 v4l2_device (v4l2-device.h)结构体来表示。
+简单设备可以仅分配这个结构体，但在大多数情况下，都会将这个结构体
+嵌入到一个更大的结构体中。
+
+你必须注册这个设备实例：
+
+	v4l2_device_register(struct device *dev, struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev);
+
+注册操作将会初始化 v4l2_device 结构体。如果 dev->driver_data 域
+为 NULL，就将其指向 v4l2_dev。
+
+需要与媒体框架整合的驱动必须手动设置 dev->driver_data，指向包含
+v4l2_device 结构体实例的驱动特定设备结构体。这可以在注册 V4L2 设备
+实例前通过 dev_set_drvdata() 函数完成。同时必须设置 v4l2_device
+结构体的 mdev 域，指向适当的初始化并注册过的 media_device 实例。
+
+如果 v4l2_dev->name 为空，则它将被设置为从 dev 中衍生出的值（为了
+更加精确，形式为驱动名后跟 bus_id）。如果你在调用 v4l2_device_register
+前已经设置好了，则不会被修改。如果 dev 为 NULL，则你*必须*在调用
+v4l2_device_register 前设置 v4l2_dev->name。
+
+你可以基于驱动名和驱动的全局 atomic_t 类型的实例编号，通过
+v4l2_device_set_name() 设置 name。这样会生成类似 ivtv0、ivtv1 等
+名字。若驱动名以数字结尾，则会在编号和驱动名间插入一个破折号，如：
+cx18-0、cx18-1 等。此函数返回实例编号。
+
+第一个 “dev” 参数通常是一个指向 pci_dev、usb_interface 或
+platform_device 的指针。很少使其为 NULL，除非是一个ISA设备或者
+当一个设备创建了多个 PCI 设备，使得 v4l2_dev 无法与一个特定的父设备
+关联。
+
+你也可以提供一个 notify() 回调，使子设备可以调用它实现事件通知。
+但这个设置与子设备相关。子设备支持的任何通知必须在
+include/media/<subdevice>.h 中定义一个消息头。
+
+注销 v4l2_device 使用如下函数：
+
+	v4l2_device_unregister(struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev);
+
+如果 dev->driver_data 域指向 v4l2_dev，将会被重置为 NULL。注销同时
+会自动从设备中注销所有子设备。
+
+如果你有一个热插拔设备（如USB设备），则当断开发生时，父设备将无效。
+由于 v4l2_device 有一个指向父设备的指针必须被清除，同时标志父设备
+已消失，所以必须调用以下函数：
+
+	v4l2_device_disconnect(struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev);
+
+这个函数并*不*注销子设备，因此你依然要调用 v4l2_device_unregister()
+函数。如果你的驱动器并非热插拔的，就没有必要调用 v4l2_device_disconnect()。
+
+有时你需要遍历所有被特定驱动注册的设备。这通常发生在多个设备驱动使用
+同一个硬件的情况下。如：ivtvfb 驱动是一个使用 ivtv 硬件的帧缓冲驱动，
+同时 alsa 驱动也使用此硬件。
+
+你可以使用如下例程遍历所有注册的设备：
+
+static int callback(struct device *dev, void *p)
+{
+	struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev = dev_get_drvdata(dev);
+
+	/* 测试这个设备是否已经初始化 */
+	if (v4l2_dev == NULL)
+		return 0;
+	...
+	return 0;
+}
+
+int iterate(void *p)
+{
+	struct device_driver *drv;
+	int err;
+
+	/* 在PCI 总线上查找ivtv驱动。
+	   pci_bus_type是全局的. 对于USB总线使用usb_bus_type。 */
+	drv = driver_find("ivtv", &pci_bus_type);
+	/* 遍历所有的ivtv设备实例 */
+	err = driver_for_each_device(drv, NULL, p, callback);
+	put_driver(drv);
+	return err;
+}
+
+有时你需要一个设备实例的运行计数。这个通常用于映射一个设备实例到一个
+模块选择数组的索引。
+
+推荐方法如下：
+
+static atomic_t drv_instance = ATOMIC_INIT(0);
+
+static int drv_probe(struct pci_dev *pdev, const struct pci_device_id *pci_id)
+{
+	...
+	state->instance = atomic_inc_return(&drv_instance) - 1;
+}
+
+如果你有多个设备节点，对于热插拔设备，知道何时注销 v4l2_device 结构体
+就比较困难。为此 v4l2_device 有引用计数支持。当调用 video_register_device
+时增加引用计数，而设备节点释放时减小引用计数。当引用计数为零，则
+v4l2_device 的release() 回调将被执行。你就可以在此时做最后的清理工作。
+
+如果创建了其他设备节点（比如 ALSA），则你可以通过以下函数手动增减
+引用计数：
+
+void v4l2_device_get(struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev);
+
+或:
+
+int v4l2_device_put(struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev);
+
+由于引用技术初始化为 1 ，你也需要在 disconnect() 回调（对于 USB 设备）中
+调用 v4l2_device_put，或者 remove() 回调（例如对于 PCI 设备），否则
+引用计数将永远不会为 0 。
+
+v4l2_subdev结构体
+------------------
+
+许多驱动需要与子设备通信。这些设备可以完成各种任务，但通常他们负责
+音视频复用和编解码。如网络摄像头的子设备通常是传感器和摄像头控制器。
+
+这些一般为 I2C 接口设备，但并不一定都是。为了给驱动提供调用子设备的
+统一接口，v4l2_subdev 结构体（v4l2-subdev.h）产生了。
+
+每个子设备驱动都必须有一个 v4l2_subdev 结构体。这个结构体可以单独
+代表一个简单的子设备，也可以嵌入到一个更大的结构体中，与更多设备状态
+信息保存在一起。通常有一个下级设备结构体（比如：i2c_client）包含了
+内核创建的设备数据。建议使用 v4l2_set_subdevdata() 将这个结构体的
+指针保存在 v4l2_subdev 的私有数据域(dev_priv)中。这使得通过 v4l2_subdev
+找到实际的低层总线特定设备数据变得容易。
+
+你同时需要一个从低层结构体获取 v4l2_subdev 指针的方法。对于常用的
+i2c_client 结构体，i2c_set_clientdata() 函数可用于保存一个 v4l2_subdev
+指针；对于其他总线你可能需要使用其他相关函数。
+
+桥驱动中也应保存每个子设备的私有数据，比如一个指向特定桥的各设备私有
+数据的指针。为此 v4l2_subdev 结构体提供主机私有数据域(host_priv)，
+并可通过 v4l2_get_subdev_hostdata() 和 v4l2_set_subdev_hostdata()
+访问。
+
+从总线桥驱动的视角，驱动加载子设备模块并以某种方式获得 v4l2_subdev
+结构体指针。对于 i2c 总线设备相对简单：调用 i2c_get_clientdata()。
+对于其他总线也需要做类似的操作。针对 I2C 总线上的子设备辅助函数帮你
+完成了大部分复杂的工作。
+
+每个 v4l2_subdev 都包含子设备驱动需要实现的函数指针（如果对此设备
+不适用，可为NULL）。由于子设备可完成许多不同的工作，而在一个庞大的
+函数指针结构体中通常仅有少数有用的函数实现其功能肯定不合适。所以，
+函数指针根据其实现的功能被分类，每一类都有自己的函数指针结构体。
+
+顶层函数指针结构体包含了指向各类函数指针结构体的指针，如果子设备驱动
+不支持该类函数中的任何一个功能，则指向该类结构体的指针为NULL。
+
+这些结构体定义如下：
+
+struct v4l2_subdev_core_ops {
+	int (*log_status)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd);
+	int (*init)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd, u32 val);
+	...
+};
+
+struct v4l2_subdev_tuner_ops {
+	...
+};
+
+struct v4l2_subdev_audio_ops {
+	...
+};
+
+struct v4l2_subdev_video_ops {
+	...
+};
+
+struct v4l2_subdev_pad_ops {
+	...
+};
+
+struct v4l2_subdev_ops {
+	const struct v4l2_subdev_core_ops  *core;
+	const struct v4l2_subdev_tuner_ops *tuner;
+	const struct v4l2_subdev_audio_ops *audio;
+	const struct v4l2_subdev_video_ops *video;
+	const struct v4l2_subdev_pad_ops *video;
+};
+
+其中 core（核心）函数集通常可用于所有子设备，其他类别的实现依赖于
+子设备。如视频设备可能不支持音频操作函数，反之亦然。
+
+这样的设置在限制了函数指针数量的同时，还使增加新的操作函数和分类
+变得较为容易。
+
+子设备驱动可使用如下函数初始化 v4l2_subdev 结构体：
+
+	v4l2_subdev_init(sd, &ops);
+
+然后，你必须用一个唯一的名字初始化 subdev->name，并初始化模块的
+owner 域。若使用 i2c 辅助函数，这些都会帮你处理好。
+
+若需同媒体框架整合，你必须调用 media_entity_init() 初始化 v4l2_subdev
+结构体中的 media_entity 结构体（entity 域）：
+
+	struct media_pad *pads = &my_sd->pads;
+	int err;
+
+	err = media_entity_init(&sd->entity, npads, pads, 0);
+
+pads 数组必须预先初始化。无须手动设置 media_entity 的 type 和
+name 域，但如有必要，revision 域必须初始化。
+
+当（任何）子设备节点被打开/关闭，对 entity 的引用将被自动获取/释放。
+
+在子设备被注销之后，不要忘记清理 media_entity 结构体：
+
+	media_entity_cleanup(&sd->entity);
+
+如果子设备驱动趋向于处理视频并整合进了媒体框架，必须使用 v4l2_subdev_pad_ops
+替代 v4l2_subdev_video_ops 实现格式相关的功能。
+
+这种情况下，子设备驱动应该设置 link_validate 域，以提供它自身的链接
+验证函数。链接验证函数应对管道（两端链接的都是 V4L2 子设备）中的每个
+链接调用。驱动还要负责验证子设备和视频节点间格式配置的正确性。
+
+如果 link_validate 操作没有设置，默认的 v4l2_subdev_link_validate_default()
+函数将会被调用。这个函数保证宽、高和媒体总线像素格式在链接的收发两端
+都一致。子设备驱动除了它们自己的检测外，也可以自由使用这个函数以执行
+上面提到的检查。
+
+设备（桥）驱动程序必须向 v4l2_device 注册 v4l2_subdev：
+
+	int err = v4l2_device_register_subdev(v4l2_dev, sd);
+
+如果子设备模块在它注册前消失，这个操作可能失败。在这个函数成功返回后，
+subdev->dev 域就指向了 v4l2_device。
+
+如果 v4l2_device 父设备的 mdev 域为非 NULL 值，则子设备实体将被自动
+注册为媒体设备。
+
+注销子设备则可用如下函数：
+
+	v4l2_device_unregister_subdev(sd);
+
+此后，子设备模块就可卸载，且 sd->dev == NULL。
+
+注册之设备后，可通过以下方式直接调用其操作函数：
+
+	err = sd->ops->core->g_std(sd, &norm);
+
+但使用如下宏会比较容易且合适：
+
+	err = v4l2_subdev_call(sd, core, g_std, &norm);
+
+这个宏将会做 NULL 指针检查，如果 subdev 为 NULL，则返回-ENODEV；如果
+subdev->core 或 subdev->core->g_std 为 NULL，则返回 -ENOIOCTLCMD；
+否则将返回 subdev->ops->core->g_std ops 调用的实际结果。
+
+有时也可能同时调用所有或一系列子设备的某个操作函数：
+
+	v4l2_device_call_all(v4l2_dev, 0, core, g_std, &norm);
+
+任何不支持此操作的子设备都会被跳过，并忽略错误返回值。但如果你需要
+检查出错码，则可使用如下函数：
+
+	err = v4l2_device_call_until_err(v4l2_dev, 0, core, g_std, &norm);
+
+除 -ENOIOCTLCMD 外的任何错误都会跳出循环并返回错误值。如果（除 -ENOIOCTLCMD
+外）没有错误发生，则返回 0。
+
+对于以上两个函数的第二个参数为组 ID。如果为 0，则所有子设备都会执行
+这个操作。如果为非 0 值，则只有那些组 ID 匹配的子设备才会执行此操作。
+在桥驱动注册一个子设备前，可以设置 sd->grp_id 为任何期望值（默认值为
+0）。这个值属于桥驱动，且子设备驱动将不会修改和使用它。
+
+组 ID 赋予了桥驱动更多对于如何调用回调的控制。例如，电路板上有多个
+音频芯片，每个都有改变音量的能力。但当用户想要改变音量的时候，通常
+只有一个会被实际使用。你可以对这样的子设备设置组 ID 为（例如 AUDIO_CONTROLLER）
+并在调用 v4l2_device_call_all() 时指定它为组 ID 值。这就保证了只有
+需要的子设备才会执行这个回调。
+
+如果子设备需要通知它的 v4l2_device 父设备一个事件，可以调用
+v4l2_subdev_notify(sd, notification, arg)。这个宏检查是否有一个
+notify() 回调被注册，如果没有，返回 -ENODEV。否则返回 notify() 调用
+结果。
+
+使用 v4l2_subdev 的好处在于它是一个通用结构体，且不包含任何底层硬件
+信息。所有驱动可以包含多个 I2C 总线的子设备，但也有子设备是通过 GPIO
+控制。这个区别仅在配置设备时有关系，一旦子设备注册完成，对于 v4l2
+子系统来说就完全透明了。
+
+
+V4L2 子设备用户空间API
+--------------------
+
+除了通过 v4l2_subdev_ops 结构导出的内核 API，V4L2 子设备也可以直接
+通过用户空间应用程序来控制。
+
+可以在 /dev 中创建名为 v4l-subdevX 设备节点，以通过其直接访问子设备。
+如果子设备支持用户空间直接配置，必须在注册前设置 V4L2_SUBDEV_FL_HAS_DEVNODE
+标志。
+
+注册子设备之后， v4l2_device 驱动会通过调用 v4l2_device_register_subdev_nodes()
+函数为所有已注册并设置了 V4L2_SUBDEV_FL_HAS_DEVNODE 的子设备创建
+设备节点。这些设备节点会在子设备注销时自动删除。
+
+这些设备节点处理 V4L2 API 的一个子集。
+
+VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL
+VIDIOC_QUERYMENU
+VIDIOC_G_CTRL
+VIDIOC_S_CTRL
+VIDIOC_G_EXT_CTRLS
+VIDIOC_S_EXT_CTRLS
+VIDIOC_TRY_EXT_CTRLS
+
+	这些 ioctls 控制与 V4L2 中定义的一致。他们行为相同，唯一的
+	不同是他们只处理子设备的控制实现。根据驱动程序，这些控制也
+	可以通过一个（或多个） V4L2 设备节点访问。
+
+VIDIOC_DQEVENT
+VIDIOC_SUBSCRIBE_EVENT
+VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT
+
+	这些  ioctls 事件与 V4L2 中定义的一致。他们行为相同，唯一的
+	不同是他们只处理子设备产生的事件。根据驱动程序，这些事件也
+	可以通过一个（或多个） V4L2 设备节点上报。
+
+	要使用事件通知的子设备驱动，在注册子设备前必须在 v4l2_subdev::flags
+	中设置 V4L2_SUBDEV_USES_EVENTS 并在 v4l2_subdev::nevents
+	中初始化事件队列深度。注册完成后，事件会在 v4l2_subdev::devnode
+	设备节点中像通常一样被排队。
+
+	为正确支持事件机制，poll() 文件操作也应被实现。
+
+私有 ioctls
+
+	不在以上列表中的所有 ioctls 会通过 core::ioctl 操作直接传递
+	给子设备驱动。
+
+
+I2C 子设备驱动
+-------------
+
+由于这些驱动很常见，所以内特提供了特定的辅助函数(v4l2-common.h)让这些
+设备的使用更加容易。
+
+添加 v4l2_subdev 支持的推荐方法是让 I2C 驱动将 v4l2_subdev 结构体
+嵌入到为每个 I2C 设备实例创建的状态结构体中。而最简单的设备没有状态
+结构体，此时可以直接创建一个 v4l2_subdev 结构体。
+
+一个典型的状态结构体如下所示（‘chipname’用芯片名代替）：
+
+struct chipname_state {
+	struct v4l2_subdev sd;
+	...  /* 附加的状态域*/
+};
+
+初始化 v4l2_subdev 结构体的方法如下：
+
+	v4l2_i2c_subdev_init(&state->sd, client, subdev_ops);
+
+这个函数将填充 v4l2_subdev 结构体中的所有域，并保证 v4l2_subdev 和
+i2c_client 都指向彼此。
+
+同时，你也应该为从 v4l2_subdev 指针找到 chipname_state 结构体指针
+添加一个辅助内联函数。
+
+static inline struct chipname_state *to_state(struct v4l2_subdev *sd)
+{
+	return container_of(sd, struct chipname_state, sd);
+}
+
+使用以下函数可以通过 v4l2_subdev 结构体指针获得 i2c_client 结构体
+指针：
+
+	struct i2c_client *client = v4l2_get_subdevdata(sd);
+
+而以下函数则相反，通过 i2c_client 结构体指针获得 v4l2_subdev 结构体
+指针：
+
+	struct v4l2_subdev *sd = i2c_get_clientdata(client);
+
+当 remove()函数被调用前，必须保证先调用 v4l2_device_unregister_subdev(sd)。
+此操作将会从桥驱动中注销子设备。即使子设备没有注册，调用此函数也是
+安全的。
+
+必须这样做的原因是：当桥驱动注销 i2c 适配器时，remove()回调函数
+会被那个适配器上的 i2c 设备调用。此后，相应的 v4l2_subdev 结构体
+就不存在了，所有它们必须先被注销。在 remove()回调函数中调用
+v4l2_device_unregister_subdev(sd)，可以保证执行总是正确的。
+
+
+桥驱动也有一些辅组函数可用：
+
+struct v4l2_subdev *sd = v4l2_i2c_new_subdev(v4l2_dev, adapter,
+	       "module_foo", "chipid", 0x36, NULL);
+
+这个函数会加载给定的模块（如果没有模块需要加载，可以为 NULL），
+并用给定的 i2c 适配器结构体指针（i2c_adapter）和 器件地址（chip/address）
+作为参数调用 i2c_new_device()。如果一切顺利，则就在 v4l2_device
+中注册了子设备。
+
+你也可以利用 v4l2_i2c_new_subdev()的最后一个参数，传递一个可能的
+I2C 地址数组，让函数自动探测。这些探测地址只有在前一个参数为 0 的
+情况下使用。非零参数意味着你知道准确的 i2c 地址，所以此时无须进行
+探测。
+
+如果出错，两个函数都返回 NULL。
+
+注意：传递给 v4l2_i2c_new_subdev()的 chipid 通常与模块名一致。
+它允许你指定一个芯片的变体，比如“saa7114”或“saa7115”。一般通过
+i2c 驱动自动探测。chipid 的使用是在今后需要深入了解的事情。这个与
+i2c 驱动不同，较容易混淆。要知道支持哪些芯片变体，你可以查阅 i2c
+驱动代码的 i2c_device_id 表，上面列出了所有可能支持的芯片。
+
+还有两个辅助函数：
+
+v4l2_i2c_new_subdev_cfg：这个函数添加新的 irq 和 platform_data
+参数，并有‘addr’和‘probed_addrs’参数：如果 addr 非零，则被使用
+（不探测变体），否则 probed_addrs 中的地址将用于自动探测。
+
+例如：以下代码将会探测地址（0x10）：
+
+struct v4l2_subdev *sd = v4l2_i2c_new_subdev_cfg(v4l2_dev, adapter,
+	       "module_foo", "chipid", 0, NULL, 0, I2C_ADDRS(0x10));
+
+v4l2_i2c_new_subdev_board 使用一个 i2c_board_info 结构体，将其
+替代 irq、platform_data 和 add r参数传递给 i2c 驱动。
+
+如果子设备支持 s_config 核心操作，这个操作会在子设备配置好之后以 irq 和
+platform_data 为参数调用。早期的 v4l2_i2c_new_(probed_)subdev 函数
+同样也会调用 s_config，但仅在 irq 为 0 且 platform_data 为 NULL 时。
+
+video_device结构体
+-----------------
+
+在 /dev 目录下的实际设备节点根据 video_device 结构体(v4l2-dev.h)
+创建。此结构体既可以动态分配也可以嵌入到一个更大的结构体中。
+
+动态分配方法如下：
+
+	struct video_device *vdev = video_device_alloc();
+
+	if (vdev == NULL)
+		return -ENOMEM;
+
+	vdev->release = video_device_release;
+
+如果将其嵌入到一个大结构体中，则必须自己实现 release()回调。
+
+	struct video_device *vdev = &my_vdev->vdev;
+
+	vdev->release = my_vdev_release;
+
+release()回调必须被设置，且在最后一个 video_device 用户退出之后
+被调用。
+
+默认的 video_device_release()回调只是调用 kfree 来释放之前分配的
+内存。
+
+你应该设置这些域：
+
+- v4l2_dev: 设置为 v4l2_device 父设备。
+
+- name: 设置为唯一的描述性设备名。
+
+- fops: 设置为已有的 v4l2_file_operations 结构体。
+
+- ioctl_ops: 如果你使用v4l2_ioctl_ops 来简化 ioctl 的维护
+  (强烈建议使用，且将来可能变为强制性的!)，然后设置你自己的
+  v4l2_ioctl_ops 结构体.
+
+- lock: 如果你要在驱动中实现所有的锁操作，则设为 NULL 。否则
+  就要设置一个指向 struct mutex_lock 结构体的指针，这个锁将
+  在 unlocked_ioctl 文件操作被调用前由内核获得，并在调用返回后
+  释放。详见下一节。
+
+- prio: 保持对优先级的跟踪。用于实现 VIDIOC_G/S_PRIORITY。如果
+  设置为 NULL，则会使用 v4l2_device 中的 v4l2_prio_state 结构体。
+  如果要对每个设备节点（组）实现独立的优先级，可以将其指向自己
+  实现的 v4l2_prio_state 结构体。
+
+- parent: 仅在使用 NULL 作为父设备结构体参数注册 v4l2_device 时
+  设置此参数。只有在一个硬件设备包含多一个 PCI 设备，共享同一个
+  v4l2_device 核心时才会发生。
+
+  cx88 驱动就是一个例子：一个 v4l2_device 结构体核心，被一个裸的
+  视频 PCI 设备(cx8800)和一个 MPEG PCI 设备(cx8802)共用。由于
+  v4l2_device 无法与特定的 PCI 设备关联，所有没有设置父设备。但当
+  video_device 配置后，就知道使用哪个父 PCI 设备了。
+
+- flags：可选。如果你要让框架处理设置 VIDIOC_G/S_PRIORITY ioctls，
+  请设置 V4L2_FL_USE_FH_PRIO。这要求你使用 v4l2_fh 结构体。
+  一旦所有驱动使用了核心的优先级处理，最终这个标志将消失。但现在它
+  必须被显式设置。
+
+如果你使用 v4l2_ioctl_ops，则应该在 v4l2_file_operations 结构体中
+设置 .unlocked_ioctl 指向 video_ioctl2。
+
+请勿使用 .ioctl！它已被废弃，今后将消失。
+
+某些情况下你要告诉核心：你在 v4l2_ioctl_ops 指定的某个函数应被忽略。
+你可以在 video_device_register 被调用前通过以下函数标记这个 ioctls。
+
+void v4l2_disable_ioctl(struct video_device *vdev, unsigned int cmd);
+
+基于外部因素（例如某个板卡已被使用），在不创建新结构体的情况下，你想
+要关闭 v4l2_ioctl_ops 中某个特性往往需要这个机制。
+
+v4l2_file_operations 结构体是 file_operations 的一个子集。其主要
+区别在于：因 inode 参数从未被使用，它将被忽略。
+
+如果需要与媒体框架整合，你必须通过调用 media_entity_init() 初始化
+嵌入在 video_device 结构体中的 media_entity（entity 域）结构体：
+
+	struct media_pad *pad = &my_vdev->pad;
+	int err;
+
+	err = media_entity_init(&vdev->entity, 1, pad, 0);
+
+pads 数组必须预先初始化。没有必要手动设置 media_entity 的 type 和
+name 域。
+
+当（任何）子设备节点被打开/关闭，对 entity 的引用将被自动获取/释放。
+
+v4l2_file_operations 与锁
+--------------------------
+
+你可以在 video_device 结构体中设置一个指向 mutex_lock 的指针。通常
+这既可是一个顶层互斥锁也可为设备节点自身的互斥锁。默认情况下，此锁
+用于 unlocked_ioctl，但为了使用 ioctls 你通过以下函数可禁用锁定：
+
+	void v4l2_disable_ioctl_locking(struct video_device *vdev, unsigned int cmd);
+
+例如: v4l2_disable_ioctl_locking(vdev, VIDIOC_DQBUF);
+
+你必须在注册 video_device 前调用这个函数。
+
+特别是对于 USB 驱动程序，某些命令（如设置控制）需要很长的时间，可能
+需要自行为缓冲区队列的 ioctls 实现锁定。
+
+如果你需要更细粒度的锁，你必须设置 mutex_lock 为 NULL，并完全自己实现
+锁机制。
+
+这完全由驱动开发者决定使用何种方法。然而，如果你的驱动存在长延时操作
+（例如，改变 USB 摄像头的曝光时间可能需要较长时间），而你又想让用户
+在等待长延时操作完成期间做其他的事，则你最好自己实现锁机制。
+
+如果指定一个锁，则所有 ioctl 操作将在这个锁的作用下串行执行。如果你
+使用 videobuf，则必须将同一个锁传递给 videobuf 队列初始化函数；如
+videobuf 必须等待一帧的到达，则可临时解锁并在这之后重新上锁。如果驱动
+也在代码执行期间等待，则可做同样的工作（临时解锁，再上锁）让其他进程
+可以在第一个进程阻塞时访问设备节点。
+
+在使用 videobuf2 的情况下，必须实现 wait_prepare 和 wait_finish 回调
+在适当的时候解锁/加锁。进一步来说，如果你在 video_device 结构体中使用
+锁，则必须在 wait_prepare 和 wait_finish 中对这个互斥锁进行解锁/加锁。
+
+热插拔的断开实现也必须在调用 v4l2_device_disconnect 前获得锁。
+
+video_device注册
+---------------
+
+接下来你需要注册视频设备：这会为你创建一个字符设备。
+
+	err = video_register_device(vdev, VFL_TYPE_GRABBER, -1);
+	if (err) {
+		video_device_release(vdev); /* or kfree(my_vdev); */
+		return err;
+	}
+
+如果 v4l2_device 父设备的 mdev 域为非 NULL 值，视频设备实体将自动
+注册为媒体设备。
+
+注册哪种设备是根据类型（type）参数。存在以下类型：
+
+VFL_TYPE_GRABBER: 用于视频输入/输出设备的 videoX
+VFL_TYPE_VBI: 用于垂直消隐数据的 vbiX (例如，隐藏式字幕，图文电视)
+VFL_TYPE_RADIO: 用于广播调谐器的 radioX
+
+最后一个参数让你确定一个所控制设备的设备节点号数量(例如 videoX 中的 X)。
+通常你可以传入-1，让 v4l2 框架自己选择第一个空闲的编号。但是有时用户
+需要选择一个特定的节点号。驱动允许用户通过驱动模块参数选择一个特定的
+设备节点号是很普遍的。这个编号将会传递给这个函数，且 video_register_device
+将会试图选择这个设备节点号。如果这个编号被占用，下一个空闲的设备节点
+编号将被选中，并向内核日志中发送一个警告信息。
+
+另一个使用场景是当驱动创建多个设备时。这种情况下，对不同的视频设备在
+编号上使用不同的范围是很有用的。例如，视频捕获设备从 0 开始，视频
+输出设备从 16 开始。所以你可以使用最后一个参数来指定设备节点号最小值，
+而 v4l2 框架会试图选择第一个的空闲编号（等于或大于你提供的编号）。
+如果失败，则它会就选择第一个空闲的编号。
+
+由于这种情况下，你会忽略无法选择特定设备节点号的警告，则可调用
+video_register_device_no_warn() 函数避免警告信息的产生。
+
+只要设备节点被创建，一些属性也会同时创建。在 /sys/class/video4linux
+目录中你会找到这些设备。例如进入其中的 video0 目录，你会看到‘name’和
+‘index’属性。‘name’属性值就是 video_device 结构体中的‘name’域。
+
+‘index’属性值就是设备节点的索引值：每次调用 video_register_device()，
+索引值都递增 1 。第一个视频设备节点总是从索引值 0 开始。
+
+用户可以设置 udev 规则，利用索引属性生成花哨的设备名（例如：用‘mpegX’
+代表 MPEG 视频捕获设备节点）。
+
+在设备成功注册后，就可以使用这些域：
+
+- vfl_type: 传递给 video_register_device 的设备类型。
+- minor: 已指派的次设备号。
+- num: 设备节点编号 (例如 videoX 中的 X)。
+- index: 设备索引号。
+
+如果注册失败，你必须调用 video_device_release() 来释放已分配的
+video_device 结构体；如果 video_device 是嵌入在自己创建的结构体中，
+你也必须释放它。vdev->release() 回调不会在注册失败之后被调用，
+你也不应试图在注册失败后注销设备。
+
+
+video_device 注销
+----------------
+
+当视频设备节点已被移除，不论是卸载驱动还是USB设备断开，你都应注销
+它们：
+
+	video_unregister_device(vdev);
+
+这个操作将从 sysfs 中移除设备节点（导致 udev 将其从 /dev 中移除）。
+
+video_unregister_device() 返回之后，就无法完成打开操作。尽管如此，
+USB 设备的情况则不同，某些应用程序可能依然打开着其中一个已注销设备
+节点。所以在注销之后，所有文件操作（当然除了 release ）也应返回错误值。
+
+当最后一个视频设备节点的用户退出，则 vdev->release() 回调会被调用，
+并且你可以做最后的清理操作。
+
+不要忘记清理与视频设备相关的媒体入口（如果被初始化过）：
+
+	media_entity_cleanup(&vdev->entity);
+
+这可以在 release 回调中完成。
+
+
+video_device 辅助函数
+---------------------
+
+一些有用的辅助函数如下：
+
+- file/video_device 私有数据
+
+你可以用以下函数在 video_device 结构体中设置/获取驱动私有数据：
+
+void *video_get_drvdata(struct video_device *vdev);
+void video_set_drvdata(struct video_device *vdev, void *data);
+
+注意：在调用 video_register_device() 前执行 video_set_drvdata()
+是安全的。
+
+而以下函数：
+
+struct video_device *video_devdata(struct file *file);
+
+返回 file 结构体中拥有的的 video_device 指针。
+
+video_drvdata 辅助函数结合了 video_get_drvdata 和 video_devdata
+的功能：
+
+void *video_drvdata(struct file *file);
+
+你可以使用如下代码从 video_device 结构体中获取 v4l2_device 结构体
+指针：
+
+struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev = vdev->v4l2_dev;
+
+- 设备节点名
+
+video_device 设备节点在内核中的名称可以通过以下函数获得
+
+const char *video_device_node_name(struct video_device *vdev);
+
+这个名字被用户空间工具（例如 udev）作为提示信息使用。应尽可能使用
+此功能，而非访问 video_device::num 和 video_device::minor 域。
+
+
+视频缓冲辅助函数
+---------------
+
+v4l2 核心 API 提供了一个处理视频缓冲的标准方法(称为“videobuf”)。
+这些方法使驱动可以通过统一的方式实现 read()、mmap() 和 overlay()。
+目前在设备上支持视频缓冲的方法有分散/聚集 DMA(videobuf-dma-sg)、
+线性 DMA(videobuf-dma-contig)以及大多用于 USB 设备的用 vmalloc
+分配的缓冲(videobuf-vmalloc)。
+
+请参阅 Documentation/video4linux/videobuf，以获得更多关于 videobuf
+层的使用信息。
+
+v4l2_fh 结构体
+-------------
+
+v4l2_fh 结构体提供一个保存用于 V4L2 框架的文件句柄特定数据的简单方法。
+如果 video_device 的 flag 设置了 V4L2_FL_USE_FH_PRIO 标志，新驱动
+必须使用 v4l2_fh 结构体，因为它也用于实现优先级处理（VIDIOC_G/S_PRIORITY）。
+
+v4l2_fh 的用户（位于 V4l2 框架中，并非驱动）可通过测试
+video_device->flags 中的 V4L2_FL_USES_V4L2_FH 位得知驱动是否使用
+v4l2_fh 作为他的 file->private_data 指针。这个位会在调用 v4l2_fh_init()
+时被设置。
+
+v4l2_fh 结构体作为驱动自身文件句柄结构体的一部分被分配，且驱动在
+其打开函数中将 file->private_data 指向它。
+
+在许多情况下，v4l2_fh 结构体会嵌入到一个更大的结构体中。这钟情况下，
+应该在 open() 中调用 v4l2_fh_init+v4l2_fh_add，并在 release() 中
+调用 v4l2_fh_del+v4l2_fh_exit。
+
+驱动可以通过使用 container_of 宏提取他们自己的文件句柄结构体。例如：
+
+struct my_fh {
+	int blah;
+	struct v4l2_fh fh;
+};
+
+...
+
+int my_open(struct file *file)
+{
+	struct my_fh *my_fh;
+	struct video_device *vfd;
+	int ret;
+
+	...
+
+	my_fh = kzalloc(sizeof(*my_fh), GFP_KERNEL);
+
+	...
+
+	v4l2_fh_init(&my_fh->fh, vfd);
+
+	...
+
+	file->private_data = &my_fh->fh;
+	v4l2_fh_add(&my_fh->fh);
+	return 0;
+}
+
+int my_release(struct file *file)
+{
+	struct v4l2_fh *fh = file->private_data;
+	struct my_fh *my_fh = container_of(fh, struct my_fh, fh);
+
+	...
+	v4l2_fh_del(&my_fh->fh);
+	v4l2_fh_exit(&my_fh->fh);
+	kfree(my_fh);
+	return 0;
+}
+
+以下是 v4l2_fh 函数使用的简介：
+
+void v4l2_fh_init(struct v4l2_fh *fh, struct video_device *vdev)
+
+  初始化文件句柄。这*必须*在驱动的 v4l2_file_operations->open()
+  函数中执行。
+
+void v4l2_fh_add(struct v4l2_fh *fh)
+
+  添加一个 v4l2_fh 到 video_device 文件句柄列表。一旦文件句柄
+  初始化完成就必须调用。
+
+void v4l2_fh_del(struct v4l2_fh *fh)
+
+  从 video_device() 中解除文件句柄的关联。文件句柄的退出函数也
+  将被调用。
+
+void v4l2_fh_exit(struct v4l2_fh *fh)
+
+  清理文件句柄。在清理完 v4l2_fh 后，相关内存会被释放。
+
+
+如果 v4l2_fh 不是嵌入在其他结构体中的，则可以用这些辅助函数：
+
+int v4l2_fh_open(struct file *filp)
+
+  分配一个 v4l2_fh 结构体空间，初始化并将其添加到 file 结构体相关的
+  video_device 结构体中。
+
+int v4l2_fh_release(struct file *filp)
+
+  从 file 结构体相关的 video_device 结构体中删除 v4l2_fh ，清理
+  v4l2_fh 并释放空间。
+
+这两个函数可以插入到 v4l2_file_operation 的 open() 和 release()
+操作中。
+
+
+某些驱动需要在第一个文件句柄打开和最后一个文件句柄关闭的时候做些
+工作。所以加入了两个辅助函数以检查 v4l2_fh 结构体是否是相关设备
+节点打开的唯一文件句柄。
+
+int v4l2_fh_is_singular(struct v4l2_fh *fh)
+
+  如果此文件句柄是唯一打开的文件句柄，则返回 1 ，否则返回 0 。
+
+int v4l2_fh_is_singular_file(struct file *filp)
+
+  功能相同，但通过 filp->private_data 调用 v4l2_fh_is_singular。
+
+
+V4L2 事件机制
+-----------
+
+V4L2 事件机制提供了一个通用的方法将事件传递到用户空间。驱动必须使用
+v4l2_fh 才能支持 V4L2 事件机制。
+
+
+事件通过一个类型和选择 ID 来定义。ID 对应一个 V4L2 对象，例如
+一个控制 ID。如果未使用，则 ID 为 0。
+
+当用户订阅一个事件，驱动会为此分配一些 kevent 结构体。所以每个
+事件组（类型、ID）都会有自己的一套 kevent 结构体。这保证了如果
+一个驱动短时间内产生了许多同类事件，不会覆盖其他类型的事件。
+
+但如果你收到的事件数量大于同类事件 kevent 的保存数量，则最早的
+事件将被丢弃，并加入新事件。
+
+此外，v4l2_subscribed_event 结构体内部有可供驱动设置的 merge() 和
+replace() 回调，这些回调会在新事件产生且没有多余空间的时候被调用。
+replace() 回调让你可以将早期事件的净荷替换为新事件的净荷，将早期
+净荷的相关数据合并到替换进来的新净荷中。当该类型的事件仅分配了一个
+kevent 结构体时，它将被调用。merge() 回调让你可以合并最早的事件净荷
+到在它之后的那个事件净荷中。当该类型的事件分配了两个或更多 kevent
+结构体时，它将被调用。
+
+这种方法不会有状态信息丢失，只会导致中间步骤信息丢失。
+
+
+关于 replace/merge 回调的一个不错的例子在 v4l2-event.c 中：用于
+控制事件的 ctrls_replace() 和 ctrls_merge() 回调。
+
+注意：这些回调可以在中断上下文中调用，所以它们必须尽快完成并退出。
+
+有用的函数：
+
+void v4l2_event_queue(struct video_device *vdev, const struct v4l2_event *ev)
+
+  将事件加入视频设备的队列。驱动仅负责填充 type 和 data 域。
+  其他域由 V4L2 填充。
+
+int v4l2_event_subscribe(struct v4l2_fh *fh,
+			 struct v4l2_event_subscription *sub, unsigned elems,
+			 const struct v4l2_subscribed_event_ops *ops)
+
+  video_device->ioctl_ops->vidioc_subscribe_event 必须检测驱动能
+  产生特定 id 的事件。然后调用 v4l2_event_subscribe() 来订阅该事件。
+
+  elems 参数是该事件的队列大小。若为 0，V4L2 框架将会（根据事件类型）
+  填充默认值。
+
+  ops 参数允许驱动指定一系列回调：
+  * add:     当添加一个新监听者时调用（重复订阅同一个事件，此回调
+             仅被执行一次）。
+  * del:     当一个监听者停止监听时调用。
+  * replace: 用‘新’事件替换‘早期‘事件。
+  * merge:   将‘早期‘事件合并到‘新’事件中。
+  这四个调用都是可选的，如果不想指定任何回调，则 ops 可为 NULL。
+
+int v4l2_event_unsubscribe(struct v4l2_fh *fh,
+			   struct v4l2_event_subscription *sub)
+
+  v4l2_ioctl_ops 结构体中的 vidioc_unsubscribe_event 回调函数。
+  驱动程序可以直接使用 v4l2_event_unsubscribe() 实现退订事件过程。
+
+  特殊的 V4L2_EVENT_ALL 类型，可用于退订所有事件。驱动可能在特殊
+  情况下需要做此操作。
+
+int v4l2_event_pending(struct v4l2_fh *fh)
+
+  返回未决事件的数量。有助于实现轮询（poll）操作。
+
+事件通过 poll 系统调用传递到用户空间。驱动可用
+v4l2_fh->wait (wait_queue_head_t 类型)作为参数调用 poll_wait()。
+
+事件分为标准事件和私有事件。新的标准事件必须使用可用的最小事件类型
+编号。驱动必须从他们本类型的编号起始处分配事件。类型的编号起始为
+V4L2_EVENT_PRIVATE_START + n * 1000 ，其中 n 为可用最小编号。每个
+类型中的第一个事件类型编号是为以后的使用保留的，所以第一个可用事件
+类型编号是‘class base + 1’。
+
+V4L2 事件机制的使用实例可以在 OMAP3 ISP 的驱动
+(drivers/media/video/omap3isp)中找到。
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index 58f60356f071..ffcaf975bed7 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
author	Mathias Nyman <mathias.nyman@linux.intel.com>	2017-10-17 16:07:33 +0300
committer	Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>	2017-10-19 09:49:11 +0200
commit	1ac7db63333db1eeff901bfd6bbcd502b4634fa4 (patch)
tree	efa033e16f6c0f33a71eb606c6f3427e4705bb6b /security/selinux/netif.c
parent	e7d6a32f0d1505695d4417caf93e4a64c06ffe9f (diff)